Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080198757 | MECHANISM AND SYSTEM FOR PROGRAMMABLE MEASUREMENT OF AGGREGATE METRICS FROM A DYNAMIC SET OF NODES - A method for measuring performance of system. The method includes the steps of retrieving a metric definition from a declarative metrics specification, obtaining a list of computing nodes from a database that are currently assigned to the metric definition, obtaining resource data provided by the computing nodes in the list of computing nodes and determining the metric of system performance based on the metric definition and the resource data. The computing nodes in the list of computing nodes are nodes of a cluster of nodes having a dynamically varying node count. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198758 | Communication Monitoring Apparatus, Communication Monitoring Method, Communication Monitoring Program, and Recording Medium - A communication monitoring apparatus ( | 08-21-2008 |
20080198759 | Traffic Analyis on High-Speed Networks - The present invention provides a traffic analyzing system on a communications link having analyzer circuits connected to each other by a number of links, where each analyzer circuit has a data rate lower than the data rate of the communications link, and are adapted to perform respective different levels of analysis on packets. The information extracted from the packets analyzed at a first level of analysis by a first analyzer circuit is forwarded to a second level of analysis performed at a second analyzer circuit, where the additional analysis performed by the second analyzer circuit depends on the analysis performed by the first analyzer circuit. Such a system and associated method allows for an efficient, practical, and improved traffic flow analyses for computer networks to evaluate high-speed and heavy traffic flow, as well as for improved protocol analysis for emerging technologies. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198760 | TRAINED DATA TRANSMISSION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Various embodiments are described for a trained data transmission for communication systems. | 08-21-2008 |
20080205287 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE TRANSFER OF COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC TO MULTIPLE LINKS OF A MULTI-LINK SYSTEM - An apparatus for controlling the transfer of communication traffic to an interface having a group of links comprises a detector for detecting the sizes of data units to be transferred to the interface, and a controller for causing data units to be transferred to the interface, wherein the controller is operative to select the link to which to transfer a data unit based on the detected size. The group of links includes a reference link that is used as an overflow to receive data units when other member links are full, and when the reference link is not used in its overflow capacity, the controller is operative to bias selection of the links to which to transfer data units towards the other links relative to the reference link. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205288 | Concurrent connection testing for computation of NAT timeout period - Concurrent testing of NAT connections using different timeout values to compute a keep-alive value for the NAT device. Computation of the approximate timeout value is accomplished concurrently over multiple test connections within about a time equivalent to the actual NAT timeout value. The architecture validates the computation of the approximate timeout value by distinguishing NAT connection failure from external failure using a control connection. Moreover, computation of the keep-alive value is performed only once for a given NAT device rather than being an on-going process for that NAT device. When one of the test connections fails, it is determined that the NAT timeout value is less than the test timeout value associated with the failed test connection. Accordingly, a smaller test timeout value is then selected as the keep-alive value for keep-alive processing of the NAT device. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205289 | Network and systems management monitoring tool - A method and apparatus for managing networks and devices on the networks. The method may include collecting information pertaining to the infrastructure of a network and devices on the network, and presenting a user interface that provides a view of the network and the devices using the collected information. In one embodiment, the user interface allows to make changes to software settings of the devices. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205290 | Device and method for QoS based cell capacity dimensioning - The invention relates to a method and system for monitoring QoS criteria of Traffic classes of at least one cell in a telecommunication system, comprising means for setting thresholds, means for monitoring the traffic with regard to the thresholds for the at least two different traffic classes, and means for adapting the traffic handling capacity of the monitored cell depending on the monitoring result. The monitored traffic classes preferably include circuit-switched traffic and packet-switched traffic, and/or realtime and non-realtime packet-switched traffic. Thresholds are preferably set and monitored for rate of call attempt blocking, and/or data throughput, and/or service blocking. | 08-28-2008 |
20080212485 | Transmission links - Implementations related to transmission systems are presented herein. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212486 | Checking of broadband network components - Systems and methods for checking broadband network components are provided in which an automated interactive system permits a field technician to check various conditions of a communication line or other broadband network components without the assistance of a support technician. While options to request assistance from a support technician are provided, the automated interactive system permits the field technician to perform various functions on a communication line without additional assistance, especially for routine tasks. The automated interactive system, therefore, removes efficiencies that may be associated with conventional approaches for checking broadband network components. | 09-04-2008 |
20080219176 | Transmission Device - A flow calculation unit classifies packets of data to be transmitted according to each packet header. A stream data determination unit organizes a set of packets having the same packet header as a packet group according to the classified result by the flow number calculation unit, and determines whether to transmit with a bandwidth guaranteed according to the bit rate of the packet group. A bandwidth request command generation unit requests a bandwidth control device to reserve a bandwidth for the packet group determined to be transmitted with a bandwidth guaranteed by the stream data determination unit. Therefore, a bandwidth can be automatically reserved to allow data transmission even when no transmission condition is specified by the application. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219177 | Method and Apparatus for Voice Conference Monitoring - This method and apparatus is used to process call control protocol messages and quality of service media streams from an internet protocol conferencing session. The status and attributes processed from call control protocol messages are combined with the quality of service information for the parties connecting to a conferencing session for display to users in real-time. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219178 | METHOD OF DATA ANALYSIS IN A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - This invention relates to an apparatus and method for analysis of packet media streams. In particular for analysis of media streams from different network monitoring points where it is desirable to compare analysis of a particular media packet stream from different monitoring points in the network. The invention provides a method for generating a report relating to a stream of packets in a packet switched network from a monitoring point in said network, comprising the step of: generating a signature from a plurality of packets in said stream; and in which said report includes said signature. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219179 | Transmission Device, Transmission Method, Reception Device, and Communication System - A communication system includes: a transmission device configured to transmit predetermined information; and a reception device configured to receive the predetermined information; wherein the transmission device includes an encoding unit configured to encode the information such that the error rate of the information in the case of a signal-to-noise ratio being greater than a first signal-to-noise ratio is at or below a predetermined value, and the error rate in the case of a signal-to-noise ratio being smaller than a second signal-to-noise ratio becomes 1/2; and wherein the reception device includes a decoding unit configured to decode the information subjected to encoding by the encoding unit. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219180 | Derivative packet delay variation as a metric for packet timing recovery stress testing - A method and system for analyzing simulated packet delay variation (PDV) using derivative PDV is disclosed. The delay-step method for simulating PDV determines a delay for each packet in a stream of packets generated at a regular interval. Delay target values are randomly selected based on a statistical distribution, such as a Gaussian distribution. Delay-steps are determined for each packet based on the delay target values. The delay-steps can be fixed or variable sized steps which are used to adjust the delay of sequential packets. PDV is generated by delaying each of the packets with the delay determined for that packet. The derivative PDV is calculated to evaluate a delay rate of change on a packet-by-packet basis. The derivative PDV can be used as a metric to specify stresses for adaptive packet timing recovery stress testing. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219181 | HIGH-SPEED TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS METHODOLOGIES AND PROTOCOLS - We formulate the network-wide traffic measurement/analysis problem as a series of set-cardinality-determination (SCD) problems. By leveraging recent advances in probabilistic distinct sample counting techniques, the set-cardinalities, and thus, the network-wide traffic measurements of interest can be computed in a distributed manner via the exchange of extremely light-weight traffic digests (TD's) amongst the network nodes, i.e. the routers. A TD for N packets only requires O(loglog N) bits of memory storage. The computation of such O(loglog N)-sized TD is also amenable for efficient hardware implementation at wire-speed of 10 Gbps and beyond. Given the small size of the TD's, it is possible to distribute nodal TD's to all routers within a domain by piggybacking them as opaque data objects inside existing control messages, such as OSPF link-state packets (LSPs) or I-BGP control messages. Once the required TD's are received, a router can estimate the traffic measurements of interest for each of its local link by solving a series of set-cardinality-determination problems. The traffic measurements of interest are typically in form of per-link, per-traffic-aggregate packet counts (or flow counts) where an aggregate is defined by the group of packets sharing the same originating and/or destination nodes (or links) and/or some intermediate nodes (or links). The local measurement results are then distributed within the domain so that each router can construct a network-wide view of routes/flow patterns of different traffic commodities where a commodity is defined as a group of packets sharing the same origination and/or termination nodes or links. After the initial network-wide traffic measurements are received, each router can further reduce the associated measurement/estimation errors by locally conducting a minimum square error (MSE) optimization based on network-wide commodity-flow conservation constraints. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219182 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER LINE BASED SERVICES - A system and method for adjusting digital subscriber line based services is provided. In a particular embodiment, a computer readable medium is provided including computer-executable instructions that when executed, cause a computer to modify a value of a first control parameter associated with a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) network based on a first performance parameter that is measured in real-time at a DSL modem over a first pre-determined time period. | 09-11-2008 |
20080225734 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA RATE DETECTION USING A DATA EYE MONITOR - Methods and apparatus are provided for data rate detection using a data eye monitor. The data rate is one of a plurality of data rates comprising a base rate and one or more divide-by-N multiples of the base rate, where N is an integer. The data rate of a received signal is detected by sampling the received signal; comparing the samples for a plurality of full rate data eyes associated with the received signal to determine if there is a mismatch between at least two predefined samples; and detecting the data rate by evaluating the comparison based on predefined criteria. The comparison can be performed by an exclusive or (XOR) logic gate for samples of at least two adjacent data eyes of a given rate. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225735 | REDUCING EFFECTS OF PACKET LOSS IN VIDEO TRANSMISSIONS - An error correction system determines a level of error correction protection to apply to a frame of video data to be transmitted by a sending endpoint to a receiving endpoint based on the predicted impact of packet loss as well as the importance of the frame based on inter-frame dependencies, frame size, packet loss probability, historical packet loss pattern, central processing unit (CPU) load, and available network bandwidth. At the receiving endpoint, when packet loss is detected for a particular frame, the receiving endpoint will attempt to recover the frame using protection packets received along with the video data. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225736 | TRANSMISSION OF SEGMENTS OF DATA PACKAGES IN ACCORDANCE WITH TRANSMISSION SPEED AND PACKAGE SIZE - Adaptive data transmission is accomplished by allotting transmission to data of a data package via a communications connection. In one embodiment, the steps comprise determining the transmission speed available using an open connection; estimating time of transmission of the data package in accordance with the determined transmission speed and size of the data package; comparing the time of transmission to a predetermined maximum time limit, and if the time of transmission is within the predetermined maximum time limit, allotting transmission via the open connection to the data package; else, if the time of transmission exceeds the predetermined maximum time limit, breaking the data package into segments, each of which fits within the predetermined maximum time limit, assigning priorities to each the segment in accordance with information within each the segment, and allotting transmission via the open connection to the one of the segments having the highest priority. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225737 | Dynamic Rate Limiting in Wireless Mesh Networks - A dynamic rate limiting mechanism for wireless mesh networks. In particular implementations, a method comprising monitoring one or more clients associated with a wireless mesh network and the respective hop counts of the clients to a root mesh node of the wireless mesh network; determining, responsive ton one or more events, a client data rate for one or more clients of the wireless mesh network based on the number of current clients and the respective hop counts of the current clients; and applying the client data rate to the wireless mesh network. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225738 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RETRIEVING TIME SERIES DATA - Systems and methods for analyzing time series data are disclosed. A query including a machine variable identifier may be received. The machine variable identifier may include an identifier pertaining to one or more of a state, a condition and a performance measure for a printer. A first time series data entry may be determined based on the query. The first time series data entry may include a data value and a time entry for the machine variable identifier. One or more second time series data entries may be selected based on the data value associated with the first time series data entry. One or more maintenance operations may be performed based on the one or more second time series data entries. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225739 | Method and Apparatus for Monitoring Events in Network Traffic - A method of monitoring events in network traffic is described herein, in accordance with various embodiments. The method may provide for the reduction in the number of network traffic samples that need to be analysed in order to determine performance criteria for the traffic in the network. By selecting specific samples as representative of the requirements of all the traffic, it may be possible to more efficiently and quickly provide an analysis of the activity of the network. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225740 | Detection of heavy users of network resources - A device includes a multistage filter and an elephant trap. The multistage filter has hash functions and an array. The multistage filter is operable to receive a packet associated with a candidate heavy network user and send the packet to the hash functions. The hash functions generate hash function output values corresponding to indices in the array. The elephant trap is connected to the multistage filter. The elephant trap includes a buffer and probabilistic sampling logic. The probabilistic sampling logic is operable to attempt to add information associated with the packet to the buffer a particular percentage of the time based in part on the result of the multistage filter lookup. The buffer is operable to hold information associated with the packet, counter information, and timestamp information. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225741 | Monitor for Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Networks - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving label data that indicates all interface labels that belong to each path ID of multiple path IDs associated with corresponding multiple paths between provider edge nodes in a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) network. Each interface label is associated with a network interface on a node in the MPLS network. Based on the label data, an untested list that holds data that indicates all unique interface labels is generated. A tested interface selected from the untested list is scheduled for testing. After scheduling, the interface label of the tested interface is removed from the untested list. It is determined whether the untested list still includes data for at least one interface label. If not, then a test of the MPLS network is completed without testing every path end to end, thus conserving network resources. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225742 | Scheduling method and system for guaranteeing real-time service quality of WiBro CPE - Provided are a scheduling method and apparatus for guaranteeing real-time service quality of Wireless Broadband (WiBro) customer premises equipment (CPE). The scheduling apparatus includes: a real-time protocol (RTP) packet monitoring unit for monitoring an RTP packet passing through a local area network (LAN) section and detecting a bandwidth of real-time service; and a queue managing unit for determining a window size corresponding to the bandwidth of real-time service checked by the RTP packet monitoring unit and generating/changing a real-time service queue. The scheduling method and apparatus monitor an RTP packet and adjust a real-time service queue, thereby ensuring real-time service quality of terminals. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225743 | REVERSE-LINK QUALITY-OF-SERVICE INFORMATION IN DATA PACKET HEADER - Quality-of-service information provides details related to data packets, including delay information. A data packet header may be analyzed to determine a portion capable of retaining quality-of-service information. Quality-of-service information may be compressed and placed into the identified portion. The header may be transmitted to a base station, where the quality-of-service information is decompressed, read, and modification of operations occurs as a function of the quality-of-service information. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225744 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS LINK ADAPTATION - A method of high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) link adaptation, comprises receiving a channel quality measurement metric over a Measured Results on random access channel (RACH) information element (IE). The link is adapted based upon the received channel quality metric. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225745 | PACKET NETWORK MONITORING DEVICE - A network analysis device for a digital communication network includes a digitizer to digitize a waveform representing a signal to produce a plurality of digital samples indicative of the waveform. The signal is communicated on the network. The network analysis device also includes a processor operable to analyze the digital samples to identify signal events, determine analog characteristics of the signal events, and decode the signal events, which are digital communications between network devices, based on the data, to selectively predict a failure mode. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225746 | Method and system for generating packet delay variation with a uniform distribution - A method and system for generating packet delay variation (PDV) with a uniformly distributed probability density function (PDF) for packet timing recovery stress testing. A delay-step method determines a delay for each packet in a stream of packets generated at a regular interval. In the delay-step method, delay-steps are determined for each packet based on delay target values. In order to generate PDV with a uniform PDF, the delay target values are randomly selected based on a pre-biased PDF which is a uniform distribution that is pre-biased by a pre-bias function. The pre-bias function increase the values of small delay target values so that an increased number of delay target values are at the extremes of the uniform distribution. This causes the delay-step method to result in PDV with a uniform distribution. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225747 | Simulating packet delay variation using step-target delay method - A method and system for simulating packet delay variation (PDV) is disclosed. The delay-step method for simulating PDV determines a delay for each packet is a stream of packets generated at a regular interval. Delay target values are randomly selected based on a statistical distribution, such as a Gamma distribution, which models a desired PDV. Delay-steps are determined for each packet based on the delay target values. The delay-steps can be fixed or variable sized steps which are used to adjust the delay of sequential packets. Each of the packets is then transmitted with the delay determined for that packet. | 09-18-2008 |
20080232262 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY USING CLOSURE APPROACH - Improved network topology discovery techniques are disclosed. For example, an automated method for discovering a topology of a network, having a plurality of nodes, includes the following steps. A first traceroute process is performed for a given source node and one or more destination nodes listed in a target list so as to discover one or more paths through one or more intermediate nodes between the given source node and the one or more destination nodes. The one or more intermediate nodes discovered during the first traceroute process are added to the target list. A second traceroute process is performed for the given source node and the one or more intermediate nodes discovered during the first traceroute process so as to discover one or more paths through one or more additional intermediate nodes between the given source node and the one or more intermediate nodes discovered during the first traceroute process. When one or more additional intermediate nodes are discovered as a result of performance of the second traceroute process, the one or more additional intermediate nodes are added to the target list and the traceroute process is repeated to determine the existence of any further intermediate nodes. When no new intermediate nodes are discovered as a result of performance of the second traceroute process or a subsequent traceroute process, the nodes in the target list are identified as a target closure set for the given source node. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232263 | System and method for correlating a network packet exchange with a period of a transaction - A system and method of associating a period of a transaction over an IP network with the packet exchanges of data or functions on the IP network during such period. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232264 | System and method for simulating dynamic routing of traffic over an IP network - A system and method of triggering a switch of transmission of signals from a first route of a virtual IP network to a second route of a virtual IP network upon detecting a pre-defined condition on a distant hop of the first route, and evaluating parameters of such switch from the first route to the second route. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232265 | Communication terminal, data exchange method, and computer product - When a first communication terminal retrieves data from a second communication terminal, the first communication terminal increases a reliability rank of the second communication terminal if the user of the first communication terminal selects a piece of data retrieved from the second communication terminals. When providing data to the second communication terminal, the first communication terminal controls data to be provided to the second communication terminal based on the reliability rank of the second communication terminal. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232266 | NETWORK MONITORING APPARATUS, NETWORK MONITORING METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A network monitoring apparatus that is in communication with a monitoring target apparatus through a network, receives traffic values transmitted from the monitoring target apparatus, accumulates the traffic values, calculates a traffic calculation value for judging congestion of the monitoring target apparatus by using the traffic values, and using a judgment target value corresponding to a traffic value as a congestion judgment target from the traffic values transmitted from the monitoring target apparatus and the traffic calculation value as a threshold value, compares the judgment target value and the threshold value. The apparatus judges whether the monitoring target apparatus is congested with traffic by using the comparison result. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232267 | Apparatus and method for supporting quality of service in wideband wireless communication system using multiple frequency allocations - An apparatus and method for supporting Quality of Service (QoS) in a wideband wireless communication system using multiple Frequency Allocations (FAs) are provided. In a transmitting method for packet distribution in the wideband wireless communication system, the method includes, during a network entry process, determining a number of FAs through multi-FA capability negotiation; distributing packets, received from a superordinate layer, through the multiple FAs; and transmitting the packets distributed through the multiple FAs. Accordingly, packets can be effectively distributed through multiple FAs, and QoS can be effectively provided. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232268 | LMS Adaptive Filter for Digital Cancellation of Second Order Inter-Modulation Due to Transmitter Leakage - A transmit signal second-order inter-modulation (IM | 09-25-2008 |
20080232269 | DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IP NETWORKS - A system operative to collect and analyze data in a digital network includes a probe layer comprising a probe disposed in the digital work. The probe is configured to identify and capture data from frames passing through the probe. The system also includes an analysis layer operative to receive the captured data from the probe. In addition, the system includes an application layer comprising a system master operative to mediate between an application and the probe. | 09-25-2008 |
20080239974 | Measurement of Network Performance in Transporting Packet Streams - A method and apparatus for measuring network performance. A packet from a stream of multimedia data packets is received from across a network during a measurement interval. The time interval from the start of the measurement interval to receiving the packet is measured. The response of a buffer to the received packet is determined. The level of the buffer just before the packet arrives is calculated, based on the time interval. The level of the buffer just after the packet arrives is calculated, based on the previous level. A performance measure for the network is determined based on at least one of the two levels. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239975 | Message collision handling - A collision handling receiver for use in a data communication network. The collision handling system and method comprises collision handling receivers together with transmitters inserting pseudo-random delays. Accordingly, multiple sources may transmit simultaneous messages to a receiver so that the messages arrive with varying signal levels and times of arrival. The receiver sorts the symbols into separate sequences by grouping together symbols having similar time of arrival. In addition, the receiver retains the sequences with sufficiently reliable symbol detection, for example, when 75% of the symbols in a sequence are detected with sufficient quality. Receiver then ranks the retained transmitters by received signal level and decodes the messages from transmitters with highest received signal level. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239976 | Communication link interception using link fingerprint analysis - A method for monitoring communication includes intercepting one or more communication links, which are part of a communication system that includes a plurality of the communication links. Data content that is carried by the one or more communication links is decoded. First and second mathematical fingerprints related to the one or more intercepted communication links are computed by evaluating statistical characteristics of the data content decoded from the one or more communication links. The first and second fingerprints are compared to produce a matching result, and a predefined action is performed with respect to the one or more communication links responsively to the matching result. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239977 | Methods and arrangements for selection of a wireless transmission method based upon signal to noise ratios - Methods and arrangements for wireless communications are contemplated. Embodiments include transformations, code, state machines or other logic to determine the signal to noise ratios (SNRs) of multiple stations associated with an access point in a wireless network. The embodiments may also include selecting whether one of the stations communicates with the access point by an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) transmission method or a multiple-access joint coding/decoding transmission method, the selecting based upon the SNRs and communicating the selected transmission method to the station of the multiple stations. Some embodiments may include determining an SNR threshold level, selecting the MAC transmission method if the SNR of at least one of the multiple stations is below the SNR threshold level, and selecting the OFDM transmission method if the SNRs of all of the multiple stations are above the SNR threshold level. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239978 | Automatic data rate and power adjustment on communications uplink based on communications activity on communications downlink - An Internet Protocol (IP) telephone operates a communications uplink to a switch based on activity on a separate communications downlink (such as to a personal computer) to conserve power when possible. The IP telephone monitors the communications activity of a link partner on the communications downlink, and when the link partner is present and operating at a relatively high data rate, the IP telephone operates the communications uplink at a correspondingly high data rate to support the communications needs of the IP telephone and the link partner. If the monitoring indicates that the link partner has reduced communications activity (which may include becoming entirely disconnected from the communications downlink), the IP telephone transitions to a second operating condition to operate the communications uplink at a relatively low data rate, with a corresponding decrease in the power required for operation of the communications uplink interface circuitry. By this mechanism, the power required to operate the IP telephony system can be reduced to realize costs savings etc. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239979 | Web service monitoring system using policy - A system uses policy to monitor web services. A request of quality of service (QoS) is thus achieved. A control center monitors and manages service monitors to collect data from QoS units. A service level agreement (SLA) can be used with the policy for assigning tasks. The QoS request from a service requester can be thus fulfilled. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239980 | LINEAR TIME INTERFERENCE MAP FOR 802.11 NETWORKS - The present invention advantageously provides a method for estimating an interference map for nodes in a network by continuously broadcasting packets from a jammer node at maximum capacity, simultaneously recording a delivery ratio from the jammer node to every other network node, concurrently, for all nodes except the jammer node, randomly broadcasting data, recording a sender interference of the node to another node having the sender interference from the jammer node, recording a receiver interference of the second node to the first node having the receiver interference from the jammer node, and performing each of the previous steps for all network nodes. The sender interference can be determined by broadcasting the data at a fixed rate when the jammer node's sender interference disabled, or by unicasting data from a node more than once to a nonexistent address, and measuring a time difference between receiving the broadcast data. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239981 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM RECORDING COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - The present invention provides a communication control system that monitors a status of a transmission line, and can dynamically change a communication band used by a communication device included in an access line based on the monitored result. Line terminal devices ( | 10-02-2008 |
20080239982 | METHOD FOR MONITORING IMPULSE NOISE - In a network for digital data packet transmission, quality records are stored in a memory. Each of the quality records is indicative for a reception quality being sensed of one or more received data packets. Thereupon, upon overflow of the memory, one or more of the quality records is discarded from the memory. For at least one of the quality records, discarding weights are generated as a function of at least one of the quality records and associated to the quality records. Hereby, upon such overflow, the discarding weights are taken into account in predefined rules and conditions according to which the discarding of the quality records is performed. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239983 | METHOD FOR INTEGRATING DOWNSTREAM PERFORMANCE AND RESOURCE USAGE STATISTICS INTO LOAD BALANCING WEIGHTS - In datacenter environments, many copies of servicing components (application servers, http servers, etc) are used to handle larger loads. In these cases, incoming service requests typically go to a load balancer to be directed to the appropriate servicing component. Modern advances in technology, like the Server/Application State Protocol, have allowed load balancers to receive recommendations in the form of numerical weights to describe the best distribution for the incoming requests. The present invention provides a method for computing path oriented statistics that enable load balancing algorithms to transparently integrate downstream performance and resource usage statistics into load balancing weights. | 10-02-2008 |
20080247325 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DETERMINING DATA LATENCY OVER A NETWORK - A system and method of determining data latency in a network is provided. A first data sample of application level data (e.g., financial data) is provided from a data stream received at a first network point. A second data sample of application level data (e.g., financial data) is also provided from a data stream received at a second network point, where the data streams in the first and second network points include common data and the first and second data samples include common data. A correlation between common data, in the first and second data samples is determined and a time difference between the correlated common data in the first and second data samples is then calculated. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247326 | Method, system and apparatus for dynamic quality of service modification - A method, system and apparatus for dynamically modifying the quality of service provided to a mobile communication device. The method includes the steps of establishing a secure tunnel between the mobile communication device and a remote network through a wireless network; communicating through the secure tunnel at a first quality of service; determining that a second quality of service, higher or lower than the first quality of service, is more appropriate to the communication type, and requesting, from the wireless network, the second quality of service. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247327 | Identifying correlations within wireless networks - Methods of correlating wireless network performance of a wireless network are disclosed. One method includes collecting wireless network performance parameters at a location of the network, observing at least one of activities and conditions of the wireless network over the period of time, and correlating the wireless network performance parameters with at least one of the activities and conditions of the wireless network. The wireless network performance parameters can be collected by one or more test devices operating at nodes or clients within the wireless network. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247328 | COMMUNICATION CHECKER, COMMUNICATION-STATE DETECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CHECKING COMMUNICATION STATE - A simple-structure communication checker capable of detecting the communication state of devices communicating in different communication methods is provided. The communication checker includes an SLPR communication detector that detects the communication state through the SLPR service and a FOMA communication detector that detects the communication state through the FOMA service. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247329 | Signal-to-Interference + Noise Ratio Estimator and Method, Mobile Terminal Having this Estimator - The SINR (signal-to-interference+noise ratio) estimator comprises a low-pass filter ( | 10-09-2008 |
20080247330 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING ANTENNA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for selecting an antenna in a communication system is provided. The apparatus includes a mobile station for determining a set of transmit antennas by considering statistical channel information, for determining a subset of the transmit antennas, which can increase a diversity gain and reduce an effect of a spatial correlation, from among the determined set of the transmit antennas by considering the statistical channel information and instantaneous channel information, for generating antenna selection information by using the determined subset of the transmit antennas, and for feeding back the generated antenna selection information to a base station. | 10-09-2008 |
20080253297 | Communications Method and Apparatus - A method of maintaining a communication link between a network node and a mobile node of a communications network comprises providing at least two downlink transmission beams (A to D) and designating a first of the at least two beams as a primary transmission beam (e.g. B). The beams are used in accordance with a schedule. Received signal quality or signal strength measurements are taken at the mobile node and signaled to the network node. A quality of link on the primary transmission beam (e.g. B) and at least one other of the at least two transmission beams (e.g. A, C) is determined from the measurements signalled from the mobile node to the network node and the quality of link for the beams is compared to provide a comparison and the schedule varied in accordance with the comparison. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253298 | Method and System for Managing Routes in a Wireless Network of Nodes - A method for manages routes in a wireless network of nodes by determining a distances between each pair of nodes in a set of nodes of a wireless network. The distances are maintained in a memory of a particular node of the wireless network as a distance map in a form of a wavelet, and routing a packet between the nodes is according to the distances stored as the wavelet. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253299 | Priority trace in data networks - A diagnostic tool for identifying priority errors within a data network is realized using a priority trace data packet. The priority trace data packet is originated at an originating node of interest and terminated at a terminating node of interest. At various intermediate network nodes along the data path between the originating and terminating nodes, the priority trace packet is inspected to determine the current priority value of the priority trace packet. The current priority value is stored in a priority trace field that can be analyzed by a network management node to identify one or more sources of priority errors. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253300 | Communication Quality Judgment Method, Mobile Station, Base Station, and Communications System - In order to carry out high-speed packet communications using a large-volume transmission channel like an E-DCH, uplink communication quality must be good. However, in a state in which a link imbalance occurs, a mobile station cannot estimate the uplink communication quality from downlink communication quality. Therefore, the mobile station calculates a path loss from the setting power of a common pilot channel which is notified from a base station, and the received power of the common pilot channel received thereby, and also estimates the received power in the base station on the basis of this path loss. The mobile station further judges the uplink communication quality by estimating the SIR in the base station by using the interference power notified from the base station and the estimated received power. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253301 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMPUTING DATA TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS OF A NETWORK PATH BASED ON SINGLE-ENDED MEASUREMENTS - Systems and methods for computing data transmission characteristics of a network path are disclosed. In some embodiments, the network path has a sending host, at least one intermediate host, and a receiving host, and the data transmission characteristics are computed based on single-ended measurements performed at the sending host. | 10-16-2008 |
20080259809 | Performance Measurement in a Packet Transmission Network - A data packet transmission network comprises a stream of packets of data sent by a first terminal passes in transit through at least one network equipment with which there is associated a stream measurement unit; wherein said first terminal and said measurement unit are connected to a collection unit. The measurement method comprising the following steps: the first terminal sends a specific stream of packets, each having a different determined size, the sizes being such that in a set of r packets, r being a positive integer less than or equal to the number of packets of the stream, there are not two subsets comprising the same number of packets and having the same cumulative total size; the measurement unit analyzes at least one packet and at most r packets of said stream passing in transit through the network equipment. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259810 | Broadband Service Applications Test Tool - A broadband internet system comprises a speed test tool, a database, and an internet portal. The speed test tool determines available bandwidth for a communication link. The database stores the available bandwidth for the communication link from the speed test tool. The internet portal offers a service to the customer based on the available bandwidth of the communication link stored in the database, therefore allowing the customer the most efficient usage of the bandwidth of the communication link. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259811 | Spectrum Measurement Management for Dynamic Spectrum Access Wireless Systems - A wireless system ( | 10-23-2008 |
20080259812 | Dimensioning Methods For Hsdpa Traffic - A method for determining the capacity that is needed on an lub link to fulfill Grade of Service (GoS) requirements in a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) for both Dedicated Channel (DCH) traffic and High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) traffic, the method comprising the steps of determining the bandwidth demand of the HSDPA traffic (ElasticDim); calculating an average bandwidth of the DCH traffic on the lub interface ( | 10-23-2008 |
20080259813 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE DETERMINATION - A method of estimating bandwidth capacity, available bandwidth and utilization along a path in an IP network is disclosed. ICMP time-stamp requests are sent from a source host on the edge or inside the network to all routers on the end-to-end path to a desired destination. Differences between time-stamp values are used as indicators of QoS service at each router. The collected measurements are then processed at the sending host to infer QoS parameters in terms of path capacity in bit/sec, available bandwidth in bits/sec, individual link utilization and congestion at each router. These parameters can be combined to infer the QoS service in terms of bandwidth on the end-to-end path. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259814 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING VALUE OF STATISTIC PARAMETER - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for adjusting the value of the statistic parameter so as to enable an MGC dynamically adjust the statistic parameter under H.248 framework. The method extends the H.248 protocol. The MGC sends adjustment information to the MG. The MG adjusts the value of the specified statistic parameter in a specified adjustment manner according to the adjustment information. The adjustment manner may be direct value assignment or one adjustment operation executed by the MG combining with a local preset parameter. If the adjustment information can not be recognized or supported by the MG, or the adjustment information is not suitable for the statistic parameter, the MG returns corresponding error information to the MGC. The adjustment to the statistic parameter value by the MGC may be issued to the MG for execution at the same time with other operations such as audit. | 10-23-2008 |
20080267083 | Automatic Discovery Of Service/Host Dependencies In Computer Networks - An activity model is generated at a computer. The activity model may be generated by monitoring incoming and outgoing channels for packets for a predetermined window of time. To generate an activity model, an input and an output channel are selected. A probability distribution function describing the observed waiting time between packet arrivals on the selected input channel and the selected output channel is generated by mining the data collected during the selected window of time. A probability distribution function describing the observed waiting time between a randomly chosen instant and receiving a packet on the selected input channel is also generated. The distance between the two generated probability distribution functions is computed. If the computed distance is greater than a predefined confidence level, then the two selected channels are deemed to be related. Otherwise, the selected channels are deemed to be unrelated. The activity model is further generated by comparing each input and output channel pair entering or leaving a particular computer. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267084 | Voice quality measurement for voice over IP in a wireless local area network - In one exemplary embodiment, voice quality of Voice over IP data in a wireless network is measured by first receiving at a detector in the wireless network a set of wireless frames transmitted between a first wireless device and a second wireless device in the wireless network in a predetermined time period. The wireless frames in the set carry Voice over Internet Protocol data. A rating value indicative of voice quality is determined based on the loss rate and burst rate that are determined only using frames received by the detection during monitoring. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267085 | Method for Generating /Changing Transport Connection Identifier in Portable Internet Network and Portable Subscriber Station Therefor - The present invention relates to a method for generating/changing a transport connection identifier (CID) in a portable Internet System, and a terminal using the same. Accordingly, the present invention provides a terminal including a packet detecting unit, a user input/output unit, a CID managing unit, and a data storing unit. The packet detecting unit determines whether a packet can be classified by a pre-established packet classification rule or a packet cannot be classified by the rules ( | 10-30-2008 |
20080267086 | ESTIMATION OF THERMAL NOISE AND RISE-OVER-THERMAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for estimating thermal noise and rise-over-thermal (RoT) in a communication system are described. In an aspect, thermal noise in a sideband may be measured and used to estimate thermal noise in a signal band. In one design, received power in the sideband may be measured, e.g., by computing total power of FFT transform coefficients within the sideband. Thermal noise may be estimated based on (e.g., by filtering) the measured received power in the sideband. Received power in the signal band may also be measured. Total received power may be estimated based on (e.g., by filtering) the measured received power in the signal band. RoT may then be estimated based on the estimated thermal noise and the estimated total received power. The estimated RoT may be used to estimate an available load for a cell, which may be used to admit and/or schedule users in the cell. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267087 | GATEWAY WITH IMPROVED QoS AWARENESS - A device and method for exchanging data frames are disclosed. In one aspect, the device exchanges data between a WAN and one or more LAN segments in an optimized way leading to a better quality of experience for the user. The device comprises an interface exchanging data frames over an access network, at least a first and second subnet interface exchanging data frames and arranged for being coupled to a network, a memory storing classification rules, a classification agent extracting information from an incoming data frame and applying the rules to the extracted information to determine the interface via which the incoming data frame is to be forwarded, and a Quality of Service monitoring agent for retrieving Quality of Service information from the subnet interfaces and dynamically updating the classification rules according to the QoS information. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273470 | SYSTEM FOR INTERLOCKING A SERVER TO A SERVER SYSTEM AND A COMPUTER SYSTEM UTILIZING THE SAME - A system for interlocking a plurality of servers to a server system is disclosed. In a first aspect, a computer system comprises a plurality of servers, a management module coupled to each of the plurality of servers, and an interlock mechanism coupled to the management module, wherein the interlock mechanism assigns to each of the plurality of servers an identifier that associates each of the plurality of servers to the server system, thereby defining a plurality of interlocked servers. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273471 | Terminal Device, System And Method For Measuring Traffic Based On User Services - A terminal device includes a service type distinguishing module and a traffic measuring module. The service type distinguishing module is adapted to distinguish types of services accessed by the terminal device; the traffic measuring module is adapted to measure the traffic of each service type according to the service types distinguished by the service type distinguishing module. The present disclosure also discloses a system and method for measuring traffic based on user services. With the technical scheme of the disclosure, traffic of different service types can be measured respectively on a terminal device, so that the charging system is able to apply different charging policies to different service types. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279111 | COLLECTING NETWORK TRAFFIC INFORMATION - An apparatus and method for collecting network traffic information is arranged to receive network traffic elements including one or more key fields having respective key field values. The apparatus and method further classify received network traffic elements into one of a plurality of flows dependent on the key field value of one or more key fields defined by a flow profile. The method and apparatus are further configurable to vary the flow profile, create a flow record and export the flow record to a collecting node. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279112 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING MEDIA NETWORK RESOURCES - A system and method for configuring media resources is disclosed. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a network element having a controller element to present a graphical user interface (GUI) to identify available configuration settings for one or more self-describing services offered to one or more media devices in the network, and manage a network connectivity of the media devices in the network to receive the one or more self-describing services in accordance with a selection of the available configuration settings. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279113 | Information Gathering From Traffic Flow in a Communication Network - The invention relates to a method for gathering information from traffic flowing in communication networks. The method includes generating in a network element, which sees the traffic flowing in the network, events on the basis of the traffic flow and predefined instructions, an event being a piece of information indicating that a certain matter has occurred in the traffic flow, sending said events for analysis in a central processing element, analysing said events in said central processing element, and conveying on the basis of said analysis information to network operator systems. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279114 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SERVICE AVAILABILITY INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing service availability information includes receiving a signal transmitted from a base station. A power level and interference level of the received signal is measured and an estimate of a power level of each potentially available service based on the power level of the received signal and predetermined power offsets associated with each of a plurality of potentially available services is derived. An estimate of a signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) for each potentially available service from the estimate of a power level of each service and the measured interference level and a service availability indicator for each potentially available service by dividing the estimated SIR with a target SIR are calculated. Service availability indicators for each potentially available service are outputted. | 11-13-2008 |
20080285473 | ACCESS AND BACKHAUL FRAME INTERLACING FROM TIME DIVISION DUPLEX WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method, base station, and wireless communications system for interlacing Access and Backhaul frames in a Time Division Duplex wireless communication system. The method includes monitoring Access traffic and Backhaul traffic ( | 11-20-2008 |
20080285474 | Dynamically Troubleshooting Voice Quality - In an example embodiment, a method for dynamically troubleshooting voice quality. The method comprises generating a request to intercept a predetermined data stream on a network, acquiring a replicated copy of the intercepted data stream responsive to the request and analyzing the replicated copy of the intercepted data stream. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285475 | Charging for Network Services based on Delivered Quality of Service - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving quality if service difference data. Quality of service difference data indicates how a particular flow of data packets between a first end node of a particular subscriber and a different second end node differs from a particular quality of service level. The particular quality of service level is one of multiple quality of service levels available over the network. Quality of service data based on the quality of service difference data is sent to billing server that charges the particular subscriber based on the quality of service data. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285476 | Method and System for Implementing a Forward Error Correction (FEC) Code for IP Networks for Recovering Packets Lost in Transit - Certain aspects of a method and system for implementing a forward error correction (FEC) code for Internet Protocol (IP) networks for recovering data packets lost in transit may be disclosed. At least one forward error correction (FEC) packet comprising a first checksum of at least one selected subset of a plurality of data packets may be received by the client. A second checksum of the selected subset of the plurality of data packets excluding one or more lost data packets may be calculated. One or more lost data packets may be recovered based on comparing the first checksum with the calculated second checksum. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285477 | Radio Communication Method and System Capable of Reducing Inter-Cell Interference, and Its Mobile Station and Base Station - There is provided a radio communication method capable of reducing inter-cell interference. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285478 | Transporting GSM packets over a discontinuous IP Based network - A system for transferring data includes an interface configured to receive data that is sent via a first link, and a processor coupled to the interface. The processor is configured to: receive data that is sent via a first link; determine whether there is discontinuity in the received data, the determination being based at least in part on information included in the received data; in the event that the received data includes a discontinuity, generate replacement data that repairs the discontinuity; and transmit at least a portion of replacement data to a second link such that a synchronization requirement associated with the second link is fulfilled. | 11-20-2008 |
20080291840 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting a Network Element for Testing a Network - A network element is identified from among a plurality of network elements to be used to test parameters of a network. The use of one network element to test the network provides more reliable results than using random communications from a plurality of network elements. The test network element is identified using testing pool definitions which may be provided by a network operator. The testing procedure using the single network element may use multiple pings to reduce the affect of transient responses on the network. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291841 | Mobile Wimax Signal Analyzing Method - Disclosed herein is a method of analyzing portable Internet signals in a measuring instrument. The method includes the steps of (a) acquiring synchronization using a preamble included in a currently received frame, (b) acquiring the access parameters of a DL_MAP included in the frame, and checking the validity of the DL_MAP, (c) if, as a result of the check at step (b), the DL_MAP is determined to be valid, acquiring downlink parameters and burst configuration information by interpreting the DL_MAP, and (e) performing a variety of diagnoses, including evaluation of signal quality for each burst, using the parameters and the burst configuration information. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291842 | VIDEO QUALITY ASSESSMENT - The present invention relates to the problem of estimating the effect of packet transmission impairments, including packet loss, on the subjective quality of a video transmission where frames of data relating to the same video frame or field are permitted to span more than one packet. The invention provides a method of assessing quality of a video signal comprising a sequence of video frames received via a packet switched network using a parameter which is a weighted sum of two counters where the first counter is incremented in dependence of the total number of packets in frames determined to have been received with one or more lost packets and the second counter is incremented in dependence of the number of packets following the first lost packet in each frame and the lost packet itself. | 11-27-2008 |
20080298263 | Terminal Apparatus, Terminal Apparatus Control Method, Network System, Network System Control Method, Program and Recording Medium - There is provided a terminal apparatus capable of, when the volume of packets received by the terminal apparatus is abnormally increased, disconnecting the terminal apparatus from a network and continuously performing a process other than a process regarding received packets by the steps of detecting the number of packets received from the network in a predetermined time, logically disconnecting the terminal apparatus from the network when the number of packets exceeds a predetermined value, and reconnecting the terminal apparatus to the network after a predetermined time has elapsed. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298264 | Method and Apparatus for Channel Estimation in a Transmit Diversity Environment - A method of channel estimation for a signal having a first portion transmitted using a transmit delay diversity scheme and a second portion transmitted using another multi-antenna transmission scheme includes determining a composite channel estimate from the transmit delay diversity portion of the signal. The method continues with segregating the composite channel estimate into delay groups corresponding to time offsets of the transmit delay diversity scheme for determination of first channel estimates for each subset of transmit antennas. Second channel estimates are determined for each subset of transmit antennas as a function of pilot symbols received in the second portion of the signal and corresponding ones of the first channel estimates. Thus, the first channel estimates are used to improve estimation of the second channel estimates. The method and variations of it may be implemented by configuring one or more processing circuits within a receiver circuit. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298265 | Convergence measurement in computer network - A system and method for measuring convergence performance in a network are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving a plurality of probes at a network device, temporarily storing data from at least a portion of the received probes and deleting at least a portion of the temporarily stored data at regular intervals, and receiving a packet indicating a convergence event and storing data from probes received over a predetermined period. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298266 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ASSESSING STATUSES OF CHANNELS - An assessment system classifies a plurality of channels to several channel groups according to the characteristics of the channel groups and assesses the status of each channel by a corresponding method, such as a period comparison method or a SNR comparison method, defined based on the channel groups. Hence, the present invention allows simpler computations to be made and a simpler circuit structure to be used. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298267 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK FOR MONITORING - A system, method and computer readable medium are provided for configuring network interfaces grouped into nodes for monitoring functionality. According to the method, a base address and subnet mask for the network interfaces are received, and a monitoring address is automatically generated for each of the network interfaces based on the base address, the subnet mask, and the nodes. The monitoring addresses is generated such that the monitoring address for each of the network interfaces is on a different subnet than the monitoring addresses for all of the other network interfaces in the same node as that network interface. Additionally, the monitoring addresses are assigned to the network interfaces for use by the monitoring process, with each of the monitoring addresses being assigned by being added as an additional network interface address of its network interface. Also provided is a method for monitoring functionality of network interfaces and providing fault recovery. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298268 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROLLED DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication system including a controlled device to be controlled and an information processing apparatus, in which the controlled device includes a transmission means for transmitting a message indicating that an event has occurred to the information processing apparatus and a control means for performing processing according to a request from the information processing means, and in which the information processing apparatus includes a receiving means for receiving the message indicating that the event has occurred at the controlled device, which has been transmitted from the controlled device and a request means for deciding processing performed by the controlled device according to the event indicated by the message received by the receiving means and requesting the controlled device to perform the decided processing. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298269 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR BUFFERING DATA PACKETS TRANSMITTED VIA A PLESIOCHRONOUS SIGNAL - The device for buffering packets emanating from a sending source ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298270 | Upstream Signal Quality Monitoring - The problem is that a measurement of the average signal quality (average modulation error ratio), does not identify poor quality signals that may be originating from an individual cable modem. The device of the present invention displays the modulation error ratio (MER) for each packet received. Since the media access control (MAC) address is associated with a packet received from an individual cable modem, a graph displaying the MER for each packet received is also displaying the MER for signals from the individual cable modems. Thus a technician viewing the display will be able to identify whether a low MER is a result of an impairment in the network or the from an individual cable modem. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298271 | COMMUNICATION-QUALITY MEASURING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION-QUALITY MEASURING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication quality measuring apparatus comprising a connecting section establishing a connection to the packet exchange network, a capturing section capturing packets transferred over the packet exchange network, an accumulating section accumulating the packets, a control section repeating the capturing of packets in sections of fundamental processing times, a setting section setting the capturing time and the interval time within each fundamental processing time, and a determining section determining whether or not the amount of load on hardware resources of the communication-quality measuring apparatus is greater than a predetermined value. | 12-04-2008 |
20080304422 | Methods and devices for providing robust nomadic wireless mesh networks using directional antennas - The number of directional antennas and associated radios needed to ensure a nomadic wireless mesh network (NWMN) remains operational in the event of node or link failures, while minimizing delay and other unwanted effects, may be determined using novel methods and devices. Such a determination may reduce the number of antennas and radios a service or network provider normally uses, thus reducing its costs. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310316 | Surrogate Stream for Monitoring Realtime Media - In one embodiment, a separate surrogate monitor stream provides real-time media monitoring statistics for non-media savvy protocols. The surrogate monitor stream contains packet transmission parameters, such as sequence numbers and time stamps, for associated media packets in the non-savvy media stream. The surrogate monitor stream also contains checksums derived from the media packets. The checksums are used to correlate the packets in the surrogate monitor stream with the media packets in the media stream. The information in the surrogate monitor stream is then used in conjunction with the non-savvy media stream to provide real-time media monitoring without having to modify existing infrastructure. For example, head-end video servers do not have to add Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) support or deal with protocol upgrades like RTP/UDP co-existence. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310317 | Information Acquisition - A method of acquiring network information from a network is disclosed. The network comprises an end terminal and a target terminal and installed on the end terminal is (a) a plurality of applications; and (b) mediation means arranged in operation to mediate between the plurality of applications and the target terminal. The method comprises: (i) receiving at the mediation means a query from one of the plurality of applications, the query requesting network information from a target terminal; (ii) operating the mediation means to: check if there is an existing connection to the target terminal; in the absence of an existing connection, establish a new connection between the mediation means and the target terminal; and acquire the requested network information over the new connection. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310318 | Apparatus and Method For Monitoring Base Station Signal in Communication System Having Multiple Antennas - In a signal monitoring apparatus of a base station of a communication system having multiple antennas, a transmitting/receiving unit transmits a plurality of transmit signals by using the multiple antennas or processes a plurality of receive signals received through the multiple antennas. A radio frequency calibration unit calibrates the transmit signals transmitted through the multiple antennas, and processes at least one target transmit signal among the plurality of transmit signals so as to monitor the at least one target transmit signal. A signal monitoring unit receives at least one first signal or at least one second signal, and transmits the at least one first signal or the at least one second signal to user equipment. The at least one first signal is a signal processed from at least one target receive signal among the plurality of receive signals, and the at least one second signal is a signal processed from the at least one target transmit signal by controlling the radio frequency calibration unit. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310319 | SERVER, NETWORK SYSTEM, AND NETWORK CONNECTION METHOD USED FOR THE SAME - A server includes a packet monitoring unit for monitoring a packet that is sent from a terminal without a function of automatically allocating an Internet Protocol (IP) address to a destination via an unknown network so as to detect the destined IP address of the packet; and a setting changing unit for setting the destined IP address detected by the packet monitoring unit to a self device. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310320 | Apparatus and method for parameter rollback in a self configurable broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for rolling back operation parameters of a base station in a self-configurable broadband wireless communication system are provided, in which in a manager server, an optimizer for determining optimized operation parameters of the base station based on information which is needed to optimize and is received from the base station, an evaluator for calculating service level of the base station using the optimized operation parameters, and a controller for requesting to roll back the optimized operation parameters when the service level is greater than or equal to a first threshold value. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310321 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIME-ALIGNING TRANSMISSIONS FROM MULTIPLE BASE STATIONS IN A CDMA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Schemes to time-align transmissions from multiple base stations to a terminal. To achieve time-alignment, differences between the arrival times of transmissions from the base stations, as observed at the terminal, are determined and provided to the system and used to adjust the timing at the base stations such that terminal-specific radio frames arrive at the terminal within a particular time window. In one scheme, a time difference between two base stations is partitioned into a frame-level time difference and a chip-level time difference. Whenever requested to perform and report time difference measurements, the terminal measures the chip-level timing for each candidate base station relative to a reference base station. Additionally, the terminal also measures the frame-level timing and includes this information in the time difference measurement only if required. Otherwise, the terminal sets the frame-level part to a predetermined value (e.g., zero). | 12-18-2008 |
20080316933 | Method and Device for Evaluating Degradation of Quality Caused By an Invariance of a Stimulus, as Perceived By a Recipient of Said Stimulus - A method and apparatus are provided for evaluating a quality, as perceived by a recipient, of a signal carrying a stimulus. The method includes a step for detecting absences of variation of said signal and a step of quantifying at least one deterioration corresponding to an absence of variation. The quantity of deterioration computed during the quantification step depends on an amplitude of variation of the stimulus immediately following the concerned absence of variation. The method and apparatus enable the correlation of the duration of variance, possible past of invariances and a sudden variation of amplitude following said in variance, in implementing an automatic technique in real time, for example. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316934 | Reception Quality Measurement Method, Transmission Power Control Method and Devices Thereof - A mobile station that receives F-DCPH symbols and CPICH symbols from a base station: (1) averages a plurality of CPICH symbols in a time sequence before a certain time of interest and estimates a channel, then uses the obtained channel estimation value and the CPICH symbol at the time of interest to calculate an interference power ISCP; (2) averages a plurality of CPICH symbols in a time sequence that include the CPICH symbol at the time of interest and estimates a channel, then uses the obtained channel estimation value and the CPICH symbol at that time of interest to calculate a reference ISCP; (3) corrects an interference power ISCP at the next time of interest using the difference between the ISCP and the reference ISCP; and (4) uses the ISCP that is obtained by the correction and a reception power RSCP of the F-DCPH symbol to calculate a signal to interference power ratio SIR of the mobile station. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316935 | GENERATING A NODE-B CODEBOOK - A method and apparatus generates a codebook and associated scheduling and control signaling. A plurality of channel combinations is generated for a plurality of wireless transmit receive units (WTRUs). The channel for each WTRU is quantized based on the WTRU codebook. A codebook for beamforming is generated for a plurality of WTRUs. The codebook includes a plurality of beamforming matrices. All possible beamforming matrices may be computed and the codebook may be quantized. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316936 | DATA TRANSFER RATE VARIANCE MEASUREMENT METHOD, APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM FOR STORING PROGRAM - A data transfer rate variance indicator having a small amount of calculation for each one packet and a small necessary amount of buffer (memory size), and representing a value suitable for traffic quality evaluation is to be used. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316937 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR OBTAINING CROSSTALK INFORMATION - A method for obtaining crosstalk information includes the following steps: obtaining the transmission power variation of the crosstalk source and the noise power of the crosstalk destination; based on the obtained transmission power variation of the crosstalk source and the noise power of the crosstalk destination, obtaining the crosstalk coefficient of the frequency point in which the dynamic characteristic varies, as the crosstalk information. A device for obtaining crosstalk information comprises a crosstalk coefficient obtaining module for obtaining the crosstalk coefficient of the frequency point in which the dynamic characteristic varies. Based on the crosstalk coefficient in the lines, it is ensured that the crosstalk coefficient obtained is close to the real crosstalk information. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316938 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING NETWORK RESOURCES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for allocating network resources, including: obtaining a current network performance parameter and preset service SLA; selecting service levels corresponding to the current network performance parameter from a preset resource usage strategy according to the current network performance parameter, and selecting service levels which are equal to or higher than the service levels defined in the service SLA from selected service levels; sending the selected service levels to a user terminal; allocating network resources for a user service according to the service level selected by the user terminal. A system and a device for dynamically allocating network resources to the user terminal according to the condition of the network resources, so as to improve the utilization rate of the network resources. | 12-25-2008 |
20090003227 | Performance analysis of a circuit switched mobile telecommunications network - In a circuit switched mobile telecommunications network a performance analysis is provided. In accordance with the invention a method is implemented, which can be carried out both OFF-LINE and ON-LINE, wherein transport channels carrying the circuit switched traffic of a service are found, then bit-streams of the circuit switched traffic are demultiplexed. A traffic database is built and a set of Key Performance Indicators and usage measures characterizing the service are defined and calculated. A passive traffic monitor is also disclosed, which is attached to a standardized interface of the circuit switched mobile telecommunications network consisting of mobile terminals, radio access network and core network. The passive traffic monitor comprises a trace analyzer connected to a signaling analyzer, to a user plane protocol analyzer and to a traffic database writer. The traffic database writer generating a traffic database is linked to the signaling analyzer, to the trace analyzer and to the user plane analyzer. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003228 | BAD DATA PACKET CAPTURE DEVICE - An apparatus and method for capturing data packets for analysis on a network computing system includes a sending node and a receiving node connected by a bi-directional communication link. The sending node sends a data transmission to the receiving node on the bi-directional communication link, and the receiving node receives the data transmission and verifies the data transmission to determine valid data and invalid data and verify retransmissions of invalid data as corresponding valid data. A memory device communicates with the receiving node for storing the invalid data and the corresponding valid data. A computing node communicates with the memory device and receives and performs an analysis of the invalid data and the corresponding valid data received from the memory device. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003229 | Adaptive Bandwidth Management Systems And Methods - Adaptive bandwidth management systems and methods are disclosed. An exemplary system comprises a network switching device including a plurality of physical ports and at least one switching fabric for managing connections between the physical ports. The system also includes a management processor operatively associated with the plurality of physical ports and the at least one switching fabric. The system also includes program code stored in computer-readable storage and executable by the management processor, the program code configuring the network switching device to conserve electrical energy based on the current bandwidth requirements. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003230 | Tool for communication system - A method for designing an, at least partly wireless, local area communication network for industrial application. A 3D plant model of the area in which the communication network is to operate is accessed. Devices that are to communicate in the communication, identify and quantify potential sources of interference or attenuation of the communication signals are introduced into this model. Data regarding communication characteristics of the devices are included. Communication possibilities of the devices are tested and evaluated in the communication network taking into account the possible interference and attenuation sources. If communication possibilities of a particular device is inadequate, adjustments regarding that device are suggested. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003231 | Transparent signaling agent - In today's network, enhancing or otherwise modifying signals in bearer flows in or at equipment already deployed in a network may be done by modifying or upgrading existing equipment, or otherwise invasively routing signals through identified network elements. In accordance with example embodiments of the present invention, signals for control plane flows are transparently monitored using policy based routing to direct control signals from a routing point to a signaling monitoring point. Bearer plane address information of a selected media processing point is substituted for other bearer plane address information in the control signal in a manner that causes subsequent bearer flows to be directed to the selected media processing point from the routing point by destination based routing. Bearer flows may be directed to a media processing point to apply signal enhancement to an encoded media signal on the bearer flows to produce an enhanced media encoded signal. Such embodiments enable service providers to upgrade networks with media processing in a low-cost, non-invasive manner. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003232 | ROUTE AND LINK EVALUATION IN WIRELESS MESH COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - Methods and systems for providing a network and routing protocol for utility services are disclosed. A method includes discovering a utility network. Neighboring nodes are discovered and the node listens for advertised routes for networks from the neighbors. The node is then registered with one or more utility networks, receiving a unique address for each network registration. Each upstream node can independently make forwarding decisions on both upstream and downstream packets, i.e., choose the next hop according to the best information available to it. The node can sense transient link problems, outage problems and traffic characteristics. Information is used to find the best route out of and within each network. Each network node maintains multi-egress, multi-ingress network routing options both for itself and the node(s) associated with it. The node is capable of several route maintenance functions utilizing the basic routing protocol and algorithms. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003233 | Method, Apparatus, and Computer Program Product for Identifying Selected Applications Utilizing a Single Existing Available Bit In Frame Headers - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are disclosed for collecting data about the transmission of network packets that are associated with specified applications. The packets are transmitted through a communications network fabric that is used to couple data processing systems together. A particular existing single bit in a frame header definition is selected. The bit is defined as part of the standard frame header by a communication protocol as an available bit in the frame header. The standard protocol is unchanged by the selection of this bit. An application is specified to be monitored. The selected bit is then set in each network packet that is generated by the specified application. The fabric collects performance data for each packet that has the bit set. Thus, the fabric collects performance data about a transmission of each packet that is generated by the application when that application is setting the bit. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003234 | Link quality prediction - A method and apparatus of predicting link quality of a link is disclosed. The method includes receiving multi-carrier modulated signals over a period of time, estimating an SNR for each received sub-carrier, constructing a sequence of the SNRs, and estimating link PER based upon knowledge of encoding and/or interleaving used during transmission, and the sequence of SNRs. | 01-01-2009 |
20090010175 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING AUTOMATIC DISABLING OF NETWORK DEBUGGING - An approach is provided for automatic disabling of network debugging. A debugging command is received for initiating debugging of a router that includes a processor configured to execute a debugging procedure. Utilization of the processor is monitored. A determination is made whether the utilization exceeds a utilization threshold. The debugging procedure is disabled based on the determination that the utilization threshold is exceeded. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010176 | Method for capacity evaluation in OFDM networks - A fast and simple method evaluates the capacity of OFDM-based radio networks using adaptive modulation and coding. From a mapping of SINR values to achievable data throughput, constant coefficients defining a linear function for the required channel activity of a single user are determined. Subsequently, linear equations for total uplink and downlink channel activity are obtained which allow fast numerical solutions. | 01-08-2009 |
20090016229 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING INTERFERENCE TO BROADCAST SIGNALING IN A PEER TO PEER NETWORK - Methods and apparatus related to broadcasting data and interference management in a peer to peer wireless communications network are described. Scheduling of traffic air link resources is performed on a slot by slot basis in a decentralized manner. Wireless devices intending to broadcast traffic signals transmit broadcast request signals, sometimes alternatively referred to as broadcast indicator signals. A priority level is associated with each of the broadcast request signals. A receiver device intending to receive broadcast signals detects the broadcast request signals and makes an interference determination as to whether the higher priority broadcast traffic signal can be successfully recovered in the presence of lower priority broadcast traffic signals. If the determination is that the expected interference from the lower priority broadcast traffic is unacceptable, the receiver device generates and transmits an interference control signal communicating to the lower priority device a command or request not to broadcast. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016230 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING SERVICE CAPABILITY INFORMATION OF USER EQUIPMENT - A technology for exchange of information about the capability of a multimedia service supportable by user equipment in a network supporting the multimedia service is provided. A method for exchanging service capability information in a network supporting a multimedia service includes monitoring for a change in service capability of a first user equipment, transmitting information about the service capability of the first user equipment to a second user equipment, upon detecting the change in the service capability and informing a user of a service capability of the second user equipment, upon reception of a message informing of a change in the service capability of the second user equipment from the second user equipment. Using the updated service capability information, communication resources are more efficiently used. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016231 | CONTROL CHANNEL DESIGN TO SUPPORT ONE-TO-ONE, MANY-TO-ONE, AND ONE-TO-MANY PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A protocol is provided that facilitates downlink concurrent peer-to-peer communications (within a time slot or traffic slot) between one device and many terminals as well as uplink concurrent peer-to-peer communications (within a time slot or traffic slot) between a plurality of terminals and one device. The concurrent peer-to-peer communications may take place within an ad hoc network of devices. To facilitate such operation, a time-frequency structure is provided within a control channel that allows the device and terminals to identify the peer-to-peer connections. This time-frequency structure also allows terminals to identify other sibling terminals that have a connection with the same device, thereby allowing to more efficiently performing interference mitigation. That is, sibling peer-to-peer connections with the same device may be treated different from other non-related peer-to-peer connects for purposes of interference mitigation in a wireless network. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016232 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CONNECTIVITY OF PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) COMMUNICATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for supporting connectivity of Peer-to-Peer (P2P) communication in a mobile communication system are provided. An operating method of a Mobile Station (MS) for providing the connectivity of the P2P communications in the mobile communication system includes connecting P2P communications by searching for a correspondent MS in a first Base Station (BS), determining whether a direct P2P communication is feasible with the correspondent MS in the P2P communications and, when the direct P2P communication is not feasible, setting a P2P relay using the first BS. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016233 | Method For Detecting QOS - A method for detecting QoS, including: obtaining information in packets transferred between MGWs, and obtaining packet loss ratio, jitter and delay of each channel of users in an office direction in communication with the MGWs through the obtained information; obtaining average packet loss ratio, average delay and average jitter of the office direction according to the packet loss ratio, the jitter and the delay of each channel of users; and obtaining overall QoS of the office direction according to the average packet loss ratio, the average delay and the average jitter of the office direction as well as the weight coefficient of the foregoing three indices affecting the voice quality. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016234 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTION OF HIERARCHICAL HEAVY HITTERS - An efficient streaming method and apparatus for detecting hierarchical heavy hitters from massive data streams is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method enables near real time detection of anomaly behavior in networks. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016235 | NETWORK SYSTEM - A network system is provided, in which a system change can be easily performed by adding or exchanging an equipment(s) to be controlled or monitored. The equipment has an object with an object identifier defined according to a service content provided by the equipment. Upon the receipt of a service request using the object identifier from a network device connected to the equipment via a network, the equipment executes the service defined in the object according to this service request. By assigning a same object identifier to objects of a plurality of equipments, it is possible to provide the same service from those equipments according to the service request performed from the network device by use of the same object identifier. | 01-15-2009 |
20090022060 | NETWORK PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Various embodiments of network performance assessment apparatus, systems and processes collect performance information pertaining to a current capacity utilization of a network, identify an occurrence of a capacity constraint on a portion of the network that is communicating the program to at least one presentation device, and modify at least one characteristic of the program and/or the communication thereof over the network so that a total capacity utilization of the network is less than a peak capacity of the network. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022061 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-STANDARD MESH OF NETWORKS - Aspects of a method and system for quality of service management in a multi-standard mesh of networks are provided. In a wireless mobile communication device (WMCD) enabled to communicate utilizing a variety of communication networks, QoS information, such as latency, available bandwidth, and/or throughput, communicated to the WMCD may enable the coordination of data transfers to and/or from the WMCD. In this regard, the WMCD and each of the networks may comprise a QoS management entity. A QoS management entity may be enabled to poll other QoS management entities to discover QoS information. Similarly, a QoS management entity may be enabled to receive QoS information broadcast by other QoS management entities. A QoS management entity may enable selecting a network and/or communication protocol for the transmission and/or reception of data based on exchanged QoS information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022062 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENTS TO SUPPORT GERAN BAND SCAN - A method and apparatus for performing inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurements includes receiving a long term evolution (LTE) measurement quantity. A measurement gap is received. Measurements for available global system for mobile communication (GSM) cells are performed, and the measurement results are reported. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022063 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RETRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for selectively retransmitting data according to a channel state in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes determining retransmission information of a receiver from feedback information received from the receiver, determining a retransmission scheme for the receiver using the retransmission information of the receiver, and performing a retransmission process with the receiver according to the determined retransmission scheme. In a good channel state, the data is retransmitted using the retransmission scheme to thereby enhance the reliability of the data delivery and the reception performance. In a bad channel state, the data is not retransmitted to thereby reduce a waste of resources in the data retransmission. | 01-22-2009 |
20090028060 | Method for monitoring message traffic, and a first and second network unit for the execution thereof - Message traffic between a communications unit and a first network unit of a mobile radio system, initiated by an SIP control message, is monitored. The SIP control message is evaluated by a second network unit by using at least one analysis parameter and an analysis result is generated therefrom. The analysis result is used for generating at least one item for utilization information of the first network unit that monitors the message traffic between the communications unit and the first network unit. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028061 | VOIP DIAGNOSIS - A VoIP-aware device generates data structures that include diagnostics data. The diagnostics data of each data structure identifies at least one of sender and network problems that degrade VoIP voice quality. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028062 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PARTITIONING END-TO-END PERFORMANCE EFFECTS USING NETWORK TOMOGRAPHY - Systems and methods are presented for partitioning end-to-end performance effects using network tomography. In one embodiment, a method for partitioning end-to-end performance effects within a network is presented. The method includes determining a network topology between at least two test points, obtaining an unrelated approximation of edge effects between the test points, measuring end-to-end performance data between the test points corresponding to a target application, regularizing an estimate of edge effects for the target application using the unrelated approximation of edge effects, and computing the estimate of edge effects for the target application to partition the end-to-end effects. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028063 | Systems and methods for connecting a packet-based call to a conventional telephone network - Methods and systems are provided for allowing an packet-based call made to a first identifier to dial a phone number within a telephone network. The method comprises sending a data packet from the packet-based call to a gateway device that can communicate with the telephone network. The data packet comprises the first identifier. The gateway device finds the phone number corresponding to the first identifier using a lookup table accessible to the gateway device. The gateway device then dials the phone number and transfers the data packet to the phone number. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028064 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CAPACITY ANALYSIS FOR ON THE MOVE ADHOC WIRELESS PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORKS - A system and method for capacity analysis in communication networks, particularly for on the move ad hoc wireless packet-switched networks, as well as wide variety of other multimedia networks is disclosed. The invention seeks to use the same two attributes per link (link capacity and link utilization) as known circuit-switched based analysis tools while incorporating useful aspects of various statistical analyses, such as a Queuing Theory based analysis, among others. In one embodiment, the invention introduces four tests to be implemented per each link, with results of these four tests being used to color code link congestion states to generate the reports for a planner. These four tests may generate an improved analysis of the network utilizing the same number of variables used in simple conventional circuit switched based analysis. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028065 | RADIO TRANSMISSION DEVICE, AND RADIO TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided are a radio transmission device and a radio transmission method, which prevent the deterioration of a preamble detecting performance while reducing the collision probability of a RACH. In this radio transmission device, a Signature table storage unit ( | 01-29-2009 |
20090034425 | CALL CASE CONTROLLED BLER TARGET SETTING - A method and system are disclosed for call case controlled block error rate (BLER) or bit error rate (BER) target setting in WCDMA and other CDMA technologies for Mobile to Mobile (MTM) and Mobile to Public Switched Telephone Network (MTPSTN) communication systems, whereby first an overall BLER/BER target value is defined. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034426 | Monitoring quality of experience on a per subscriber, per session basis - A system and method for monitoring quality of experience includes forwarding a data packet flow carrying content between first and second endpoints. The data packet flow is forwarded at an intermediate point between the first and second endpoints so that the first and second endpoints are communicatively coupled over one or more networks through the intermediate point. The data packet flow is analyzed at the intermediate point and an intermediate point quality of content rating of the content received at the intermediate point is generated. A report detailing one or more attributes about the data packet flow based at least in part on the intermediate point quality of content rating is further generated. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034427 | MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication method and apparatus are provided. A MIMO communication apparatus includes a selected beamforming vector determining unit to determine a selected beamforming vector corresponding to a selected user, a performance information generating unit to generate performance information corresponding to where a non-selected beamforming vector is allocated to a non-selected user, and an additional beamforming vector selecting unit to select an additional beamforming vector corresponding to the non-selected user based on the performance information. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034428 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING QOS FOR MOBILE INTERNET SERVICE - Disclosed are a QoS (Quality of Service) providing system that manages service quality of a mobile Internet system, and an apparatus and method that apply QoS according to the class of a mobile Internet service provided over a mobile Internet network. The QoS providing system includes a service class table storage unit for storing at least one QoS parameter value for a plurality of mobile Internet services; a service identifying unit for identifying a QoS service class of a mobile Internet service requested over the mobile Internet network; a QoS parameter extracting unit for extracting QoS parameters of the identified mobile Internet service by referring to the service class table; and a QoS performing unit for performing QoS on the requested mobile Internet service according to the extracted QoS parameters. Thus, several types of services can be provided simultaneously and smoothly according to a requested service characteristic in a mobile Internet network in which real-time competition for resources occurs. | 02-05-2009 |
20090040936 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING TRANSMISSIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Machine-readable media, methods, apparatus and system for scheduling transmissions in a wireless communication system are described. In some embodiments, a base station may comprise a network interface device to receive and process a long-term signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) and a channel quality indicator (CQI) from each subscriber station of a plurality of subscriber stations; a reference signal to interference plus noise ratio determining logic to determine a reference signal to interference plus noise ratio (Ref_SINR) for the each subscriber station; and a target fairness factor determining logic to determine a target fairness factor (TFF) for the each subscriber station; a real fairness factor determining logic to determine a real fairness factor (RFF) for the each subscriber station; and a pseudo CQI calculating logic to calculate a pseudo CQI for the each subscriber station based at least in part on the CQI, SINR, Ref_SINR, TFF and RFF. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040937 | COEXISTENCE OF DIFFERENT NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a plurality of network technology subsystems, each subsystem associated with a different network technology. The communication device also includes a controller coupled to the plurality of network technology subsystems. The controller enables coexistence of the different network technologies in accordance with at least one monitored quality of service (QoS) parameter. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040938 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR END TO END ROUTE CONTROL - Session independent end to end route control is provided by coordination between a pair of route control devices. Each device determines whether received traffic qualifies for end to end route control and whether the device at the other end supports end to end route control. If so, then the route control devices determine a routing mode, such as tunneling or address translation, and routing parameters. The performance of the selected path is monitored and is changed if the performance becomes unacceptable. Path performance can be measured using one-way measurement techniques that use a common inbound path or a control channel. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040939 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING BROADBAND SERVICES - A system and method are described for selecting a service state using a configurable abstraction layer. A comparison is made between network parameters of a Network Performance Layer and network services of a Service Layer. Once network parameters are within a threshold for providing a given service, a state change can be made in the configuration parameters to suit the provided service. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040940 | OFF-LINE BROADBAND NETWORK INTERFACE - A system for processing a data packet is disclosed and may include at least one processor that enables receiving of a data packet at a station on a network, the data packet having a preamble which includes a destination tag and a training sequence. The at least one processor may enable obtaining a channel model using the training sequence, and encoding each of one or more addresses that the station receives with the channel model to produce a result. The at least one processor may also enable comparing the result with the destination tag. The at least one processor may enable convolving of each of the one or more addresses that the station receives with the channel model to produce the result. | 02-12-2009 |
20090046591 | AD HOC SERVICE PROVIDER'S ABILITY TO PROVIDE SERVICE FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - An ad hoc service provider for a wireless network, a method for providing service from a mobile node, and a machine-readable medium are disclosed. An ad hoc service provider includes a processing system configured to support first and second wireless access protocols and to alter the ad hoc service provider's ability to provide service for a wireless network in response to a resource related event. A method includes sending a request that a mobile node be allowed to provide service as an ad hoc service provider, detecting a resource related event of the mobile node for a wireless network, and altering the mobile node's ability to provide service for the wireless network. A machine-readable medium includes instructions for detecting a resource related event of a mobile node, and altering the mobile node's ability to provide service as an ad hoc service provider for a wireless network based on the detection. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046592 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication method and a wireless communication system wherein any communication interruption caused by changing RRB arrangement information can be avoided. In ST | 02-19-2009 |
20090046593 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF FRAME ENCODING PARAMETERS IN A FRAME-BASED COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for data communication are disclosed. An example method includes encoding a first plurality of transmitting frames, where a header segment of each frame is encoded in accordance with a fixed set of header encoding parameters and a payload segment of each frame is encoded in accordance with a first set of a variable set of payload encoding parameters. The example method also includes transmitting the first plurality of transmitting frames to a receiving station and receiving a request from the receiving station to change the first set of payload encoding parameters to a second set of the variable set of payload encoding parameters. The example method further includes selecting the second set of payload encoding parameters based on the request and encoding a second plurality of transmitting frames, where a header segment of each frame of the second plurality of transmitting frames is encoded in accordance with the fixed set of header encoding parameters and a payload segment of each frame of the second plurality of transmitting frames is encoded in accordance with the second set of payload encoding parameters. The example method still further includes transmitting the second plurality of transmitting frames to the receiving station. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046594 | MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM OF ENABLING THE METHOD - A Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) communication method and system, the MIMO communication system including: a first channel quality information (CQI) receiving unit to receive first CQI from a user terminal, the first CQI associated with a beamforming vector selected by the user terminal; and a second CQI generating unit to generate second CQI by correcting the first CQI based on a transmission rank associated with a number of data streams to be transmitted. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046595 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTENT ESTIMATION OF PACKET VIDEO STREAMS - A method and system for estimating the content of frames in an encrypted packet video stream without decrypting the packets. The method involves comparing the relative sizes of frames within a video stream and estimating the content of the video stream based on the frame sizes and the ordering of frames within the video stream. The method can alternatively be used to estimate the content of frames in an unencrypted packet stream. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046596 | Apparatus and method for handling mobile terminal capability information - A mobile terminal | 02-19-2009 |
20090052339 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH STATE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS - In one embodiment, an apparatus can include: a status detector configured to determine a status associated with an input stream; a parameter controller configured to adjust a parameter in response to a change in the status; and a rendering controller configured to receive the input stream, and to provide a rendered stream in response to the input stream and the parameter. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052340 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING A CHANNEL MEASUREMENT REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for requesting a ChannelMeasurementReport in a wireless communication system are described. A ChannelMeasurementReportRequest message comprising an 8 bit MessageID field set to “0x07”, a 12 bit PilotPN field wherein the PilotPN field is set to the PilotPN of the sector requesting the measurement report, a 2 bit CarrierID field wherein the CarrierID field is set to the carrier on which the measurements are requested, a 40 bit StartPHYFrame wherein the StartPHYFrame is set to the frame number of the PHYFrame where access terminals are required to being measurements, a 3 bit NumChannels field wherein the NumChannels field is set to the number of channel to be measured, an 8 bit MeasurementsPerMessage field wherein the MeasurementsPerMessage determines the number of measurements to be included in one report message, an 8 bit NumMeasurementsRequested field wherein the NumMeasurementsRequested determines the total number of measurements to be made by access terminal and a 4 bit Reserved field is generated and transmitted over a communication link. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052341 | MEDIATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING EVENT RECORDS - A mediation method and a mediation system divided into independent node components that process event records independently of the other components of the system. In addition, the system is provided with at least one node manager component that monitors the functioning of the node components. Each of the independent node components operates according to its own settings and is thus self-contained and capable of continuing operation even though some of the other components are temporarily inoperative. The system comprises audit counters providing counts relating to the processed event records, and the node manager is configured to check whether the counts of the audit counters match, in order to ensure that no event records are lost in the mediation system. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052342 | NOTIFICATION INFORMATION GENERATING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, NOTIFICATION INFORMATION GENERATING METHOD AND PROGRAM - To generate notification information for improving accuracy of channel quality information reconstructed based on a difference in notifying using the difference in channel quality information between channels. A notification information generating apparatus | 02-26-2009 |
20090059805 | BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION FOR PROCESSING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WITH EACH OTHER, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A base station and a mobile station for processing wireless communication with each other, and a method for controlling the same are provided. The method for controlling a base station which performs radio communication with a mobile station includes starting radio communication via at least one arbitrary mobile station and a predetermined cellular channel; receiving Channel Quality Indication (CQI) information from the mobile station; determining whether a radio communication anomaly occurs between a specific mobile station from among the at least one arbitrary mobile station and the base station by using the received CQI information; and when determining that the radio communication anomaly occurs with the specific mobile station, controlling to interrupt the radio communication via the predetermined cellular channel and perform radio communication via the specific mobile station and either a shared channel or an open channel. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059806 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SIGNAL BASED PACKET LOSS CONCEALMENT FOR MEMORYLESS CODECS - In a method, apparatus and system for transmitting packet loss concealment (PLC) information, a subscriber device divides a voice sample into a plurality of packets, each including a plurality of successive frames having portions of the voice sample. The subscriber device determines if a predetermined look ahead time duration from the final frame of the plurality of successive frames in a current packet of the plurality of packets includes a noise to voice transition. When the predetermined look ahead time duration is determined to include the noise to voice transition, the subscriber device packs packing information regarding the predetermined look ahead time duration into the current packet. Finally, the subscriber device encodes the plurality of successive frames into the current packet for transmission. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059807 | Systems and Methods to Monitor a Network - Systems and methods to monitor a network are provided. A particular method includes determining a data packet delivery rate between a first edge switch and a second edge switch coupled to a network. The method also includes sending the data packet delivery rate to a user device, operably coupled to a customer equipment side of the first edge switch, as graphical user interface display data. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059808 | Memory Access Optimization - A method and an apparatus for memory access optimization are disclosed. Data unit information may be accumulated for a plurality of data units. Partial network statistics for the plurality of data units may be read sequentially in round robin fashion from each of a plurality of memory banks of a memory. The partial networks statistics may be updated based on the plurality of data units. The updated partial network statistics may be written sequentially in round robin fashion to each of the plurality of memory banks. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059809 | System and Method for Detecting and Reporting Cable Network Devices with Duplicate Media Access Control Addresses - The detection of devices with duplicate media access controller (MAC) addresses in a cable network. A cable network device (CND) having a MAC address is connected by the cable network to a cable modem termination system (CMTS) having a gateway interface address. A centralized storage of historical cable modem MAC address/giaddr tuple data is used to identify CNDs that report duplicate MAC addresses. The cable network tracks the CND MAC address/giaddr tuple data of all CND requests that it receives and stores the MAC address/giaddr tuple data into a datastore (such as a database). When a CND seeks to access the network, the cable network looks into the datastore to determine whether the CND MAC address of the CND has previously been stored with a different associated giaddr, which would imply that there are multiple CNDs attached to different CMTSs where the CNDs share the same MAC address. If such duplication is detected, an appropriate remedial response is taken. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059810 | Network system - A network system includes: a monitored node ( | 03-05-2009 |
20090059811 | COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - In order to keep a pathway for time critical data packets (for example for VoIP calls) a dummy flow of data packets is established between a home hub router ( | 03-05-2009 |
20090067339 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING CELL COVERAGE AND SYSTEM OF ENABLING THE METHOD - A system of controlling a cell coverage is provided. The system includes: a state information generation unit to generate state information by considering at least one of a cell coverage and a traffic load of a target cell; an adjacent state information identification unit to identify adjacent state information which is generated by considering at least one of a cell coverage and a traffic load of an adjacent node, from at least one adjacent node; and a cell coverage control unit to control the cell coverage of the target cell based on the state information and the adjacent state information. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067340 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A MOBILE STATION, A BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION AND A METHOD FOR USE THEREIN - A mobile communication system ( | 03-12-2009 |
20090073888 | DETERMINING QUALITY OF COMMUNICATION - A method, computer-readable medium, and system for providing a quality measurement based on communications within a communication application. Communication attributes that include information associated with a user's communications are obtained. In embodiments, such communication attributes may pertain to communication duration and communication frequency. Upon obtaining communication attributes, a quality measurement may be determined based on the communication attributes. Such a quality measurement provides an indication of the quality of the user's communications. In embodiments, the quality measurement may be stored, communicated to a user, or implemented within a communication application. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073889 | PHY BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION FROM BACKPRESSURE PATTERNS - The present invention provides a system and method of determining available bandwidth at a physical layer (PHY) device at a server on a broadband network. A link layer controller of a master administrator adaptively polls a PHY device over a set of time intervals. During polling, the controller places a PHY device's address on a line of a bus and awaits a response from the PHY device. Based upon the response from the PHY device, the administrator can determine whether the PHY device has available bandwidth. The link layer controller uses this information to recalculate its polling scheme to better make use of the available bandwidth over the shared transmission medium to which each PHY device in the network is attached. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073890 | Method And System For Uplink Establishment In A Wireless Cellular Communication - The present invention relates to wireless communications. More especially it relates to wireless packet data communications. Particularly it relates to latency reduction by distinguishing connection initiation of circuit switched and packet switched connections, respectively. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073891 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SPACE EFFICIENT ADAPTIVE DETECTION OF MULTIDIMENSIONAL HIERARCHICAL HEAVY HITTERS - The present invention develops an efficient streaming method for detecting multidimensional hierarchical heavy hitters from massive data streams and enables near real time detection of anomaly behavior in networks. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073892 | MEASUREMENTS IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A communication system comprising a network element, a mobile station, and a plurality of radio access means. The plurality of radio access means is configured to provide communication services to the mobile station. A radio access means of the plurality of radio access means includes a plurality of cells. The plurality of radio access means use different communication methods. The network element is configured to order the radio access means based on provided information. The provided information is associated with the plurality of radio access means and is based on a plurality of parameters associated with each of the plurality of radio access means. The network element is further configured to select a target radio access means of the plurality of radio access means based on the ordering and to send a request to the mobile station to perform compressed mode measurements based on the selected target radio access means for selecting a cell associated with the selected target radio access means | 03-19-2009 |
20090080339 | Multicast-based inference of temporal delay characteristics in packet data networks - Disclosed are method and apparatus for characterizing the temporal delay characteristics of a packet data network by multicast-based inference. Multicast probes are transmitted from a source node to a plurality of receiver nodes, which record the delays of the multicast probes. From the aggregate data comprising recorded delays of the end-to-end paths from the source node to each receiver node, temporal delay characteristics of individual links within the network may be calculated. In a network with a tree topology, the complexity of calculations may be reduced through a process of subtree partitioning. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080340 | Multicast-based inference of temporal loss characteristics in packet data networks - Disclosed are method and apparatus for characterizing the temporal loss characteristics of a packet data network by multicast-based inference. Multicast probes are transmitted from a source node to a plurality of receiver nodes, which record the arrivals of the multicast probes. From the aggregate data comprising recorded arrivals of the end-to-end paths from the source node to each receiver node, temporal loss characteristics of individual links within the network may be calculated. In a network with a tree topology, the complexity of calculations may be reduced through a process of subtree partitioning. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080341 | Wireless communications device - A wireless communications device wirelessly communicates with a communication partner by allocating communication resource areas thereto on a communication resource area basis. The wireless communications device includes a receiving unit for receiving, from the communication partner, communication quality information parts of the communication resource areas allocated to the communication partner from the communication partner; an estimation unit for estimating communication quality information on another communication resource area among the communication resource areas allocated to the communication partner based on the communication quality information on the parts of communication resource areas received by the receiving unit; and a scheduling unit for allocating the communication resource areas based on the communication quality information on the communication resource areas received by the receiving unit and the communication quality information on said another communication resource area estimated by the estimation unit. | 03-26-2009 |
20090086646 | STATUS REPORT METHOD IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for reporting missing data of a re-segmented data transmission in a wireless communication device is disclosed. The method comprises determining that a last re-segmented protocol data unit (PDU) segment of a re-segmented PDU has not been received. In response to determining that the last PDU segment has not been received, the method further comprises generating a status report, at a receiving wireless communication device. The status report comprises a beginning segment offset value identifying the byte position from an original PDU that begins the sequence of bytes that are carried in at least the re-segmented last PDU segment and an end segment unknown indicator. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086647 | METHOD OF MEASURING TRANSMIT QUALITY IN A CLOSED LOOP DIVERSITY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a method for determining channel quality information in a high speed packet access communication system with closed loop transmit diversity, power and variance related to a common pilot channel (CPICH) are determined for a rake receiver to obtain a closed loop transmit gain adjustment and to determine the CPICH signal-to-noise ratio. Thereafter, a high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) signal-to-noise ratio is determined from the CPICH signal-to-noise ratio and is mapped to derive channel quality information. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086648 | Rank Adaptation for an Open Loop Multi-Antenna Mode of Wireless Communication - To perform rank adaptation for a mobile station in a wireless network, it is determined whether the mobile station is fast moving. In response to determining that the mobile station is fast moving, an open loop multi-antenna mode is selected to perform wireless communication between the mobile station and a base station. Also, selection is made from among plural ranks for the wireless communication according to the open loop multi-antenna mode between the mobile station and the base station. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086649 | SYSTEM, TOOL AND METHOD FOR NETWORK MONITORING AND CORRESPONDING NETWORK - A system, method and tool for monitoring switching events in a network with at least two nodes, and a corresponding network, the system, method and tool including means for representing the events originated from different nodes as data in a uniform format, and means for counting the occurrence of events in a node of the network wherein switching events being represented as the same data are counted as the same event. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092055 | TRIGGERING MULTI-CARRIER REQUESTS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate triggering multi-carrier requests at a mobile device and granting or denying the request at the access point. The mobile device can determine when to request additional carriers from the access point based on communication parameters, such as buffer levels, inflow/outflow data rates, PA headroom for handling an additional carrier, a timer for requesting the carrier, a maximum number of allocable carriers, and/or the like. Upon receiving the request, the access point can grant or deny the request based at least in part on subscriber level of the mobile device, available resources in the access point, reverse link throughput, and/or the like. Allocating additional carriers to the mobile device can increase throughput for communicating with the access point. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092056 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MEASUREMENT BEHAVIOR OF DRX MODE UE - Systems and methods that manage measurement behavior of a UE in connected mode and while in discontinuous operation. The UE is enabled to autonomously (e.g., independent of instructions from network) enter a state of measurement, and generate a measurement report for the network, when quality of serving cell falls below the threshold of S_Intrasearch parameter. Moreover, the UE can perform inter-frequency and/or inter-RAT measurements autonomously by employing the “natural gaps” from its DRX pattern, when such are adequate to perform such measurements. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092057 | Network Monitoring System with Enhanced Performance - A data packet inspection and/or filtering system monitors packet traffic across an interface. In the case of monitoring incoming traffic, the incoming packets are directed to a packet capture process associated with a kernel of an operating system. The packets are then stored in shared memory of the kernel for access by a user space application that inspects the packets without requiring copying of the packets to user space and back to kernel space. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092058 | Non-Data-Aided Channel Estimators for Multipath and Multiple Antenna Wireless Systems - Novel non-data-aided maximum likelihood estimators for the delays and the attenuations in an ultra-wide bandwidth channel are proposed. Numerical results show that these new estimators outperform the previous non-data-aided maximum likelihood channel estimators derived in the literature. Moreover, in some cases, the performances of the new non-data-aided estimators approach those of the data-aided estimators, enabling us to reduce the overhead expense of pilot symbols. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092059 | Interference measurement mechanism for frequency reuse in cellular OFDMA systems - Under adaptive frequency reuse technique, mobile stations in a cellular orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system are served by different radio resource regions with appropriate frequency reuse patterns to mitigate inter-cell interference and improve system capacity. In a first novel aspect, the mobile stations measure interference statistics and obtain interference measurement results. The mobile stations report the obtained interference measurement results to serving base stations. The serving base stations determine adaptive frequency reuse patterns based on the received interference measurement result. In a second novel aspect, a radio resource control element receives the interference measurement results, determines frequency reuse patterns and configures radio resource allocation based on the received interference measurement results. In a third novel aspect, the base stations obtain the interference measurement results and schedule the mobile stations to be served with appropriate radio resource regions. | 04-09-2009 |
20090097409 | Dynamic Selection Between Active and Passive Probing in Computer Network - In one embodiment, during network operation, it is dynamically determined whether to change from passive probing of communication path metrics to active probing of communication path metrics. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097410 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CQI IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for reporting CQI in a wireless communication system, the method comprising determining the value of (RL PHYFrame Index-CQIPilotReportPhase)mod CQIPilotReportInterval, determining if DLFSS is not equal to FLSS and transmitting R-CQICH on the Control segment. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097411 | COMMUNICATION QUALITY DIAGNOSTIC UNIT - The invention achieves a communication quality diagnostic unit capable of detecting an omen phenomenon of a communication trouble early in a stage prior to actual emergence of the communication trouble due to a noise, thereby issuing a warning. The communication quality diagnostic unit for diagnosing quality of communication for transmitting and receiving frames at predetermined interval time, comprising a frame-interval time detector for monitoring interval time between the frames, a frame-interval abnormality determiner for making determination as the case of diagnostic abnormality when a predetermined threshold value is exceeded by frame-interval time as detected, and a diagnostic abnormality notifier for notifying a host unit of the diagnostic abnormality as an alarm. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097412 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RATE ASSIGNMENT - A method and apparatus for determining the data rate of a reverse link communication. An embodiment includes transmitting at a null rate on the communication channel only when the station is not transmitting voice, signaling, or data. An embodiment includes determining a maximum requested rate based on the normalized average pilot transmit power and the pilot reference value, and determining the timing of the rate request. An embodiment involves determining a maximum transmission rate. An embodiment involves determining sufficient power and a power-control set point. | 04-16-2009 |
20090103444 | Method and Apparatus for Power Throttling of Highspeed Multi-Lane Serial Links - A method for managing the power consumption of an information handling system including a multi-lane serial link having a lane setting that identifies the number of active lanes in the multi-lane serial link. The method may include determining a number of lanes required for the multi-lane serial link based on one or more I/O devices connected to the information handling system, triggering a reduction of the lane setting of the multi-lane serial link if the lane setting of the multi-lane serial link is greater than the determined number of lanes required, and automatically reducing power to the multi-lane serial link in response to the reduction of the lane setting. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103445 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING VARIOUS PDCP AND LAYER 2 OPERATIONS - Method and apparatus for enhancing interactions between layers in a wireless communications system. A PDCP layer sublayer provides a delivery confirmation service to at least one upper layer above the PDCP layer. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103446 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING NOISE AND INTERFERENCE ON RANGING CHANNEL IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for estimating a noise/interference power value of a ranging channel in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. An apparatus for a base station in a broadband wireless communication system includes an operator, an estimator, and an adder/subtractor. The operator calculates the receive (RX) power of a ranging subcarrier signal received through ranging subcarriers. The estimator estimates the signal power of a detected ranging signal. The adder/subtractor calculates the noise/interference power of a ranging channel by subtracting the signal power of the detected ranging signal from the RX power of the ranging subcarrier signal. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103447 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS BASED ON VARIABLE TTI LENGTH CONTROL - A controlling method and a radio base station apparatus capable of variably determining a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) length in accordance with a communication environment of a mobile terminal is disclosed. The radio base station apparatus includes a receiving section receiving information via an uplink channel; and a scheduler variably determining a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) length for any one of an uplink shared channel and a downlink shared channel or both based on at least any of a moving speed of a mobile terminal, location of the mobile terminal in a cell, a provided throughput value, and a number of retransmissions obtained from the received information. Preferably, the scheduler includes a TTI length allocation table describing relationships between parameter values and the corresponding TTI length, the parameters being used for estimating the location and/or the moving speed of the mobile terminal. | 04-23-2009 |
20090109865 | Methods of Providing Digital Data Services Including Comparing Predicted and Measured Levels of Performance and Related Systems and Computer Program Products - A method of providing digital data services between a communications service provider and a customer site over a communications loop may include predicting a level of performance of the communications loop without coupling a modem to the communications loop at the customer site to provide a predicted level of performance of the communications loop. The communications loop may be qualified for an initial qualified level of digital data service based on the predicted level of performance of the communications loop. After qualifying the communications loop, digital data service may be provided over the communications loop at the initial qualified level using a modem coupled to the communications loop at the customer site, and a measured level of performance of the communications loop may be obtained based on data communicated between the communications service provider and the modem over the communications loop. The measured level of performance may then be compared with the predicted level of performance. Related systems and computer program products are also discussed. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109866 | Method for Balancing Quality of Wireless Communication Channel and Wireless Communication Apparatus Using the Same - Disclosed herein are a method for balancing the quality of a wireless communication channel wherein the quality of the wireless communication channel can be more accurately estimated and adjusted on the basis of the combination of observation results of the number of data frames failed to be transmitted in the past and a received signal strength (RSS), and reliability of data transmission over the channel can thus be increased, and a wireless communication apparatus using the same. The method includes collecting information about whether data frames have been successfully transmitted and information about RSSs of the wireless communication channel, acquiring the number of data frames failed to be transmitted and an average RSS in a predetermined observation period using the collected information, comparing the acquired transmission-failed data frame number with a predetermined threshold value and the acquired average RSS with a predetermined reference RSS, respectively, and estimating the quality of the wireless communication channel and quality degradation factors in detail by performing an AND operation with respect to the comparison results. Therefore, it is possible to stably adjust the channel quality. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109867 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - The wireless communication apparatus, which performs a wireless communication by using one of switchable communication rates, includes quality assurance level specifying means for specifying a quality assurance level that is the minimum communication rate for assuring transfer quality of a streaming data of specified transfer rate; communication rate setting control means for determining an initial setting value that is higher communication rate than the quality assurance level, setting the communication rate to the initial setting value when the communication is started, and changing a setting of the communication rate according to the communication state; and a transmission process unit for performing a modulation process of the streaming data according to the communication rate for transmitting the modulated streaming data. | 04-30-2009 |
20090116397 | Network Condition Capture and Reproduction - A network condition capture and reproduction technique captures measurement data characterizing network conditions at a given time between first and second endpoint devices of a network, and utilizes the captured measurement data in a network impairment device to reproduce the network conditions at a later time and possibly in a different place. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116398 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FLOW MONITORING - A network device may include logic configured to receive a packet from a packet forwarding engine, create a flow ID for the packet, determine whether the flow ID matches one of a plurality of flow IDs in a table, determine whether the packet is associated with a flow to be sampled, sample the packet and additional packets associated with the flow that are received from the packet forwarding engine when the flow is to be sampled and transmit the flow ID and the sampled packets via a switch to an interface. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116399 | SERVICE DATA UNIT DISCARD TIMERS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate enforcing quality of service requirements. A first timer is employed for each data packet arriving at a packet data convergence protocol layer of a wireless communications apparatus. The first timer can be configured based upon delay tolerance specified according to quality of service requirements imposed on the data packet. The data packet can be discarded if the timer expires before the data packet leaves the protocol data convergence protocol layer. In addition, a second time is utilized for the data packet as it arrives at a radio link control layer. The data packet can be discarded if the second timer expires before the data packet is successfully transmitted to a receiver. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116400 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD ENABLING SWITCHING OF COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - A wireless communication apparatus includes a transmission and reception unit, a monitoring unit, and a control unit. The transmission and reception unit transmits and receives a frame to and from a wireless communication terminal. The monitoring unit monitors an interference signal in a first communication channel. The control unit selects a second communication channel and a third communication channel. The second and the third communication channels are different from the first communication channel. The transmission and reception unit transmits an instruction frame to the wireless communication terminal when the monitoring unit detects the interference signal in the first communication channel. The instruction frame includes information on the second and third communication channels and instructs the wireless communication terminal to switch the communication channel from the first communication channel to at least one of the second and third communication channels. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116401 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF DATA RATE, FRAGMENTATION AND REQUEST TO SEND PROTECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and device for adaptive control of transmission parameters such as data rate, fragmentation and request to send protection. Packet error rates for frames transmitted with and without request to send protection are computed and compared to determine whether error rates are attributable to noise or to collision. If error rates are attributable to noise, data rates may be adjusted and fragmentation may be activated. If error rates are attributable to collisions, request to send protection may be activated or adjusted. | 05-07-2009 |
20090122711 | System and Method to Measure Delay for Qos Monitoring in Wlan 802.11 Networks - A wireless network ( | 05-14-2009 |
20090122712 | System And Method Of Providing Service Information To A Carrier - A method of providing service performance information to a carrier for an application over a network is provided, wherein parameters relating to the application are transmitted to a mobile device, and the mobile device stores information relating to packets transmitted for the application. Should the information stored exceed the parameters, an alert is sent to the network. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122713 | Interfering Packet Streams in Packet Networks - A method for estimating the network-layer topology of a telecommunications network is described. In particular, the illustrative embodiment of the present invention estimates the existence and connectivity of nodes in the topology based on the detection of network-wide end-to-end path intersections. This is based on the assumption that pairs of streams of packets that share a common node will interfere and that the interference can be detected in the received streams. In general, this interference is manifested as jitter. By transmitting streams on each pair of end-to-end paths in the network, and detecting interference (or a lack of interference) a matrix of path intersections for the network can be created. Using logic and supposition, the topology of the network can be estimated using the matrix of path intersections. Once the estimate of the topology is complete, the maintenance and operation of the network can proceed based on the topology. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122714 | STREAM ANALYSIS APPARATUS AND STREAM ANALYSIS DISPLAY METHOD - An analysis display GJ | 05-14-2009 |
20090122715 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING BEAMFORMING PROFILES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A wireless communications network uses a beamforming process to increase signal quality as well as transmission capabilities and reduction of interference. An improved Golay sequence is also used in the wireless communications network. In one aspect, the processes can be used to communicate regardless of whether the system is on an OFDM mode or a single carrier mode. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122716 | Communication bandwidth measurement apparatus, recording medium on which program is recorded, and method - To provide a terminal apparatus, a program, and a communication bandwidth determination method which can correctly measure a communication bandwidth, without providing a server apparatus which measures the communication bandwidth. | 05-14-2009 |
20090129281 | QUALITY-ENERGY SCALABILITY TECHNIQUE FOR TRACKING SYSTEMS - A method of managing the operation of a system is presented. The system includes a processing subsystem configured to run a multimedia application and a telecommunication subsystem. The method includes determining telecom environment conditions, and selecting a configuration from a plurality of configurations. The selecting is based at least in part on the determined environmental conditions. The method also includes setting control parameters such as channel speed in the multimedia application and/or the telecommunication subsystem to cause the system to operate at the selected configuration, and operating the system at the selected configuration. The configuration are determined by simultaneously updating control parameters by a controller of both the multimedia application and the telecommunication subsystem. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129282 | Method and apparatus for measuring quality of VoIP call - Provided are a method and an apparatus for periodically measuring speech quality in a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) terminal while a VoIP call between VoIP terminals is in progress. The method comprises: receiving summary information regarding traffic sent from an opposite VoIP terminal; and evaluating speech quality by comparing the summary information with actually received information regarding the traffic sent from the opposite VoIP. Accordingly, each VoIP terminal can precisely evaluate the speech quality periodically and send the evaluation result to each other. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129283 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION OF DEVICE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a method of transmitting information regarding a device in a wireless personal area network (WPAN). In the method, a probe request frame is received from one of devices belonging to the WPAN according to a common mode which is a physical layer (PHY) transmission mode being commonly supported by the devices, the probe request frame containing information requesting information regarding a PHY transmission mode supported by another specific device, a probe response frame containing the information regarding the PHY transmission mode supported by the specific device is generated, and then the probe response frame is transmitted to the device transmitting the probe request frame, according to the common mode. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129284 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for reporting a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes estimating a per-subband CQI with respect to each transport layer and generating a broadband CQI with respect to each transport layer according to the per-subband CQI, comparing the broadband CQI and the per-subband CQI with respect to each transport layer to determine a difference value thereof, determining an offset value to be used in a differential CQI, determining the differential CQI by subtracting the offset value from the determined difference value, and transmitting a transmission symbol by converting the determined differential CQI into the transmission symbol. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129285 | STATISTIC REPORTING METHOD AND MEDIA GATEWAY - A statistic reporting method includes: obtaining the current time information after an MG determines that the statistic parameter value needs to be reported if the reporting of a statistic parameter value needs to be bound to the time information, when associating the current time with the current value of the statistic parameter to be reported, and reporting such information to an MGC. In the present disclosure, the MG associates the current time information with the current value of the statistic parameter to be reported, and reports such information to the MGC, thus enabling the MGC to obtain the correct time of triggering the reporting of the statistic parameter value, reducing errors and improving the accuracy of subsequent analysis and prediction based on the reported statistic parameter value. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129286 | REDUCING INTER-SS INTERFERENCE - Certain embodiments are described that enable the provision of enhanced service in wireless networks. Methods for wireless broadband scheduling are described that comprise determining levels of potential interference between subscriber stations located in an area covered by a wireless base station. Communication between the wireless base station and the subscriber stations can be scheduled to minimize interference between the subscriber stations. Scheduling may include ordering the subscriber stations based on the determined levels of potential interference for each station. Such scheduling may result in a list organized in ascending or descending order of potential interference or distance from the base station. Certain of the subscriber stations can be selected to communicate simultaneously based on the ordering. In certain of these embodiments, the ordering can be calculated to reduce mutual interference of the subscriber stations. Determining levels of potential interference can include measuring interference on each subscriber station. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129287 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND MOBILE NODE FOR UPDATING A CLASSIFIER - A method, a system, and a mobile node (MN) for updating a data classifier are provided, which mainly include the following steps: acquiring an MN's classifier information before the relocation of an access router and the MN's new classifier information after the relocation of the access router, updating corresponding properties that are changed in the classifier information, and generating updated classifier information. Therefore, after the relocation of the access router, the classifier for data packets can be correctly found, the data packets can be correctly forwarded according to the classifier information, and the uniqueness of the new CoA can be ensured. | 05-21-2009 |
20090135729 | Resource Reservation in Network Routing - The present invention relates to network routing and admission control, especially for applications requiring guaranteed quality of service over the Internet. The present invention provides a method of establishing a guaranteed quality of service link over a packet switched network between a source and a destination, the method comprising: determining whether packet traffic from a network node associated with the source to a network node associated with the destination exceeds a predetermined level; signaling an intermediate network node to receive predetermined packets from said source node and forward these to said destination node; forwarding said packets to the intermediate node; the intermediate node receiving said packets and forwarding these to said destination node. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135730 | Detection in Mobile Service Maintenance - Disclosed is a method and system for detecting inconsistencies between a radio communications network and a network database. In one form, measurements from the network are provided by mobile radio terminals. The measurements are then compared with corresponding data on the network database to determine whether there is an inconsistency. The methods described may be used in the management and maintenance of the network. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135731 | DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING BY A WIRELESS DEVICE - Techniques for monitoring radio and network conditions to improve performance for a wireless device are described. A diagnostic monitoring module may receive diagnostic messages from a modem via a diagnostic interface at the wireless device. The module may process (e.g., parse) the diagnostic messages to obtain network status information indicative of the status of a radio network. The module may provide the network status information to an application for use to control communication with the radio network. The module may also process the diagnostic messages to obtain diagnostic information indicative of the performance of a radio connection or a data session or both for the wireless device. The module may send the diagnostic information to a network server for network monitoring, debugging, etc. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135732 | Characterizing Home Wiring Via AD HOC Networking - The invention is a method of measuring the RF losses among home wiring endpoints using battery-powered “remotes” placed at each accessible endpoint in the home. The remotes use a low power, ad hoc networking technology, e.g. Zigbee, Z-wave, to connect to one another over the home wiring, rather than over the air via antennas as in typical applications of these technologies. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135733 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR MONITORING COMMUNICATION QUALITY BETWEEN COMMUNICATION DEVICES - The present invention provides a communication device, communication system, and a method for monitoring the communication quality between communication devices, in which it is ensured that the transmitting side and the receiving side can collect statistical information within the same time period. Its configuration is a method for measuring communication quality between communication devices which perform packet transmission, wherein the transmitting side communication device sends out a marker frame indicating a start and an end of a time period for measuring communication quality in which the time period is constant, and collects statistical information of transmission packets within said measurement time period, wherein the receiving side communication device recognizes the start and end of the measurement time period from the reception time of the marker frame, and collects statistical information of reception packets within the measurement time period, and wherein the communication quality is measured by statistical information of the transmission packets and the reception packets within the measurement time period. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135734 | PACKET FRAGMENTATION PREVENTION - A method of avoiding packet fragmentation. The method includes receiving a data packet belonging to a data connection, determining whether the received data packet was fragmented or determining whether the received data packet is expected to be fragmented on the way to its destination and registering the data connection of the received packet in a list of connections that carried packets that were fragmented or were expected to be fragmented. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141645 | STEALTH NETWORK - Described herein are systems and methods in which taps, which mirror or provide a copy of network traffic, are connected to monitoring equipment through shadowing units, which pass data to the monitoring equipment but block outbound data transmissions from the monitoring equipment. Aggregation/dissemination units are provided to aggregate and/or disseminate tapped data network signals to the monitoring equipment. Also disclosed are optional bypass controllers that can either route the tapped data network signals directly to the monitoring equipment or route such signals through the aggregation/dissemination units. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141646 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING TIMING FOR TRANSMISSIONS - A communication network element ( | 06-04-2009 |
20090141647 | Acknowledgment of Media Waveforms between Telecommunications Endpoints - An apparatus and method are disclosed that enable a first telecommunications endpoint to ensure that a second endpoint is receiving the first endpoint's packet stream transmissions with a satisfactory waveform quality. When the second endpoint receives the packet stream, it decodes the media waveform from the stream, encodes the waveform back into a second packet stream, and transmits some or all of the packets in the second stream back to the first endpoint. The first endpoint then decodes the received waveform in the second stream and compares it to the original waveform transmitted to the second endpoint. Based on the comparison, the first endpoint adjusts the value of a quality indication, and provides the quality indication to its user and to the second endpoint. Advantageously, the user at the second endpoint is able to determine whether the received waveform is, in fact, close enough to the waveform that the first endpoint's user intended to be received and understood. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141648 | MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CQI REPORTING METHOD - Provided is a multicarrier communication apparatus by which information quantity of CQI reporting can be reduced. In the apparatus, each CQI is recorded in a CQI table section ( | 06-04-2009 |
20090141649 | Communication System and Method - In a communications system a transmitter is arranged to transmit asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cells in which synchronous transfer mode (STM) channels are assembled. In order to minimise the bandwidth required at lease some of the ATM cells include one or more switch command(s) ( | 06-04-2009 |
20090141650 | Method for Congestion Detection in Packet Transmission Networks - A method for measuring degree of packet congestion on a channel of a packet communication network. The method includes: during a training mode, generating an mathematical relationship between the degree of packet congestion on the channel and a plurality of measurable features of the network over a plurality of network conditions; and, during a subsequent normal operating mode, periodically measuring the plurality of measurable features and applying the generated mathematical relationship to such periodically measured plurality of measurable features to determine actual degree of congestion on the channel; and comparing the actual degree of congestion on the channel with a predetermined channel congestion threshold level. The degree of packet congestion on the channel is saturation level. The measurable features include: time delay between transmission starts and terminations of the previously transmitted packet; the fraction of time the channel is busy; and, average number of packet transmission retries. | 06-04-2009 |
20090147692 | COLLECTING NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA FROM MULTIPLE AUTONOMOUS SYSTEMS - A computer apparatus comprises first Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) logic comprising BGP route table data; a network interface to communicatively couple to a first autonomous system; data collection logic in computer-readable storage media when executed operable to perform discovering an address prefix of a data collector that is communicatively coupled to second BGP logic of a router within a second autonomous system that is coupled to the first autonomous system, wherein the second autonomous system is independent of the first autonomous system; determining a path through the first autonomous system, the one or more networks or intemetworks, and the second autonomous system to the data collector based on the BGP route table; requesting the data collector to provide one or more data values relating to performance of network elements of the second autonomous system; receiving and storing the one or more data values. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147693 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING OTHER CHANNEL INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for monitoring other channel interference in wireless communication system are described. An OSI Monitor Set (OSIMonitorSet) is updated at the beginning of every superframe of a reverse link (RL) serving sector. A list of Pilot PN's (PilotPN's) of the sectors whose pilot strength (PilotStrenth) is larger than or equal to an other sector interference Monitor Threshold (OSIMonitorThreshold) in an OSIMonitorSet is provided, wherein the PilotPN and the PilotStrength are fields in an Overhead Parameter List (OverheadParameterList) of an Overhead Message Protocol and the OSIMonitorThreshold is a configuration attribute of the Overhead Message Protocol. The PilotPN of the reverse link Serving Sector (RLServingSector) are excluded. It is determined if the size of the list OSI Monitor Set Size (OSIMonitorSetSize) is larger than or equal to N | 06-11-2009 |
20090147694 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING REVERSE LINK CQI REPORTING MODES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for setting Reverse Link CQI Reporting Modes in an access terminal is provided, comprising determining a value for CQIReportingMode and setting reporting modes of the access terminal based on CQIReportingMode value. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147695 | SUB-SYMBOL RATE CABLE TESTER - Aspects of the present disclosure provide for a cable tester that tests a cable to determine the cable length. The cable tester can include a clock generator that generates a clock that has clock period that is a multiple of the data symbol period and a signal generator that injects the training signal, which can be synchronous with the clock, into the cable. The cable tester can also include a receiver that samples the returned signal from the cable and adaptively filters the returned signal based on the training signal and a controller that determines the cable length from the adaptive filter tap coefficients. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147696 | APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD FOR ENERGY-AWARE HOME GATEWAY BASED ON NETWORK - An energy-aware home gateway based on a network protocol includes a network matching module for performing a physical network interface function on a home and an external network; a processor module for performing an operation and a control function of a system in a active state in which service traffic exists; a memory module used as a system memory of the processor module; and a service function module controlled by the processor module and performing a service function depending on a use state. The home gateway further includes a network protocol agent module for processing control traffic in an idle state in which no service traffic exists; and a power supply module for supplying power to the overall system in the normal active state and for supplying power to the network matching module, the memory module, and the network protocol agent module in the idle state. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154366 | EXCHANGE OF PROCESSING METRIC INFORMATION BETWEEN NODES - Method and nodes are provided for propagating between the nodes information about processing capacity of peer nodes. Two types of signals are sent from propagating nodes towards their peer nodes. A propagating node sends first signal type at a constant rate and a second signal type at a variable rate. A ratio of the rates calculated at a peer node represents the processing capacity available a propagating node. Sequence numbers may be added to signals of the first and second type in order to assist peer nodes in detecting capacity issues. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154367 | Method And Apparatus For Relating To Quality Of Service In Wireless Networks - Quality of service is provided, for applications using a wireless network, by adapting the operation of the application to changes in operation of the wireless network, instead of attempting to command the wireless network to adapt to the application. Adaptation is accomplished by collecting pertinent RF data concerning operation of the wireless network and pre-calculating at least one anticipated operational characteristic of that network based on operational dynamics determined from the pre-calculation. Pre-calculation may include trend projection to predict near-term future operation expected from the wireless network. The pre-calculated operational characteristic is provided to the application so that operation of the application may adapt to the anticipated dynamic variations in operation of the wireless network. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154368 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING QoE GUARANTEED REAL-TIME IP-MEDIA VIDEO QUALITY - A method and apparatus for measuring the quality of a video provided in an IP network based media service is provided. The apparatus for measuring Quality of Experience (QoE) guaranteed real-time Internet Protocol (IP)-media video quality, includes: a receiver receiving a transmission video provided through an IP network service platform and an original video corresponding to the transmission video, and extracting frames of the transmission video and the original video; a detector comparing the frames of the transmission video and the original video in real time to obtain a difference between the frames of the transmission video and the original video and detecting a matching segment between the transmission video and the original video; and a measurement unit calculating a QoE parameter using the frames of the transmission video and the original video which correspond to the matching segment. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154369 | Digital-channel-monitor unit - A digital-channel-monitoring unit (DCMU) suitable for use in a coaxial-broadband network. The DCMU monitors quality, and integrity of digital and analog Radio Frequency (RF) channels from one or more remote locations in the network. These remote locations include one or more strategic locations between the headend, and a subscriber's premises, such as a business or home. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154370 | Mobile Communication Device and Reception Quality Information Creation Method - When a processing delay detection unit ( | 06-18-2009 |
20090154371 | ESTIMATION OF POSITION USING WLAN ACCESS POINT RADIO PROPAGATION CHARACTERISTICS IN A WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM - A method for estimating position using WLAN access point radio propagation characteristics in a WLAN location based service is provided. A location-based services system has a plurality of Wi-Fi access points in a target area. The Wi-Fi access points are positioned at geographic locations and have signal coverage areas. A method of characterizing at least one of the Wi-Fi access points comprises determining the geographic location of the Wi-Fi access point, dividing the signal coverage area of the Wi-Fi access point into at least one section, and determining radio propagation characteristics for each section. The radio propagation characteristics of each section characterize a radio channel of the Wi-Fi access point, and the characterization can be used in a location algorithm. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161566 | Network Management System and Method for Performing Scalable Loss Measurements within an Access Network - A network management system and a method are described herein that determine if one or more devices (e.g., consumer premises equipment(s)) are experiencing an unacceptable packet loss for downstream multicast traffic in an access network. In one embodiment, the network management system performs the following operations: (1) cause a trigger probe to be sent to the one or more devices, where each trigger probe contains information which causes the corresponding device to start a packet loss measurement; and (2) receive an unacceptable loss measurement message from one of the devices if that one device experienced packet losses over a certain period of time that exceeded a predetermined threshold which would be an indication that the one end device is experiencing an unacceptable packet loss. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161567 | DETECTION OF ROUTING LOOPS BASED ON TIME-TO-LIVE EXPIRIES - A method and system for detecting routing loops and time-to-live (TTL) expiry attacks in a telecommunications network are disclosed. The detection of routing loops and TTL expiry attacks can be achieved based on the comparison of TTL expiries occurring on two or more routers in the network. A quantity of TTL expiries associated with a router can be summed. Additionally, a quantity of TTL expiries associated with other routers that are operatively coupled to the router can be summed. A difference between the sums can be calculated and a determination of whether a routing loop exists can be made in response to the difference. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161568 | TCP data reassembly - Method and apparatus for processing computer network data. An embodiment of the invention comprises a first device for receiving a stream of data, said stream comprising at least a first data frame, said first data frame having been sent from a second device | 06-25-2009 |
20090161569 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING CARRIER ETHERNET PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY MEASUREMENTS - An Ethernet metric system and methodology which provides comparable measurements over a data link layer for use in network engineering and Service Provider (SP) performance monitoring. The Ethernet metric system of the present invention utilizes a measurement appliance known as a nodal member for measuring various Ethernet and IP metrics. A plurality of nodal members is used to make one-way or round-trip measurements over asymmetrical paths. The system includes a database for storing measurement data recorded by the plurality of nodal members. A workstation is also contemplated to facilitate system configuration and reporting of measurement data. The system further includes at least one service daemon for interfacing between the plurality of nodal members and the database. Additionally, the service daemon instructs the plurality of nodal members to create vectors and obtain vector configuration from the database. The service daemon processes results data transmitted from the nodal members to the database. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161570 | OPTIMAL COMBINATION OF SAMPLED MEASUREMENTS - Two regularized estimators that avoid the pathologies associated with variance estimation are disclosed. The regularized variance estimator adds a contribution to estimated variance representing the likely error, and hence ameliorates the pathologies of estimating small variances while at the same time allowing more reliable estimates to be balanced in the convex combination estimator. The bounded variance estimator employs an upper bound to the variance which avoids estimation pathologies when sampling probabilities are very small. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161571 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRIGGERING RADIO LINK CONTROL PACKET DISCARD AND RADIO LINK CONTROL RE-ESTABLISHMENT - A method and apparatus for triggering radio link control (RLC) re-establishment and/or protocol data unit (PDU) discard are disclosed. An RLC entity maintains a state variable for counting a total number of transmissions and/or retransmissions of an RLC PDU and its PDU segments. If the state variable reaches a threshold, the RLC entity initiates RLC re-establishment and/or discards the RLC PDU and PDU segments. The state variable may be incremented each time a negative acknowledgement is received for at least a portion of the RLC PDU or when a retransmission is considered for the RLC PDU or a portion of the RLC PDU. The RLC entity may increase a state variable proportionate to a retransmitted data size. The RLC entity may maintain separate state variables for the RLC PDU and PDU segments and counts the number of transmissions and/or retransmissions for the RLC PDU and the PDU segments. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161572 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIVED BY A COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for acknowledging data received by a communication device, the data being received by data packets, with each packet comprising a plurality of data blocks. The communication device:
| 06-25-2009 |
20090161573 | Network System, Edge Node, and Access Device - In order to specify a data discarding point in a network, provided is a network system for collecting, in the network including an access network and a transport network, pieces of statistical information including a traffic amount of the network, including: an access terminal coupled to the access network; and an edge node for interconnecting the access network and the transport network, in which: the access terminal is configured to: measure pieces of statistical information including a traffic amount in the access terminal; and notify the edge node of the measured pieces of statistical information; and the edge node collects the pieces of statistical information notified by the access terminal. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161574 | Method and System for Establishing a Communications Connection - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method for establishing a communications connection is provided. The method includes transmitting, by a digital subscriber line access multiplexer to a communications device, a plurality of parameters each representing a different indication of a same feature of the digital subscriber line access multiplexer. Each parameter is correlated with one or more communications settings. The method also includes establishing a plurality of digital subscriber line connections with the communications device. Each connection corresponds with a particular one of the parameters. The method also includes selecting one of the connections as meeting a predetermined criteria. The method also includes identifying one of the parameters that corresponds to the selected connection. The method also includes establishing a digital subscriber line connection with the communications device using at least one communications setting correlated with the identified parameter. | 06-25-2009 |
20090168659 | DIRECTOR DEVICE AND METHODS THEREOF - A director device arrangement for enabling a plurality of monitoring functions to be performed on data traffic traversing through a network is provided. The arrangement includes a set of network ports for receiving data traffic and outputting the data traffic. The arrangement further includes a set of switch chips, which is configured to include at least a first switch chip and a second switch chip, which are configured to interact with one another to perform the plurality of monitoring functions on the data traffic received by the set of switch chips. The arrangement yet also includes a set of monitoring ports, which is configured to receive at least one of the data traffic traversing through the network. The data traffic is configured to traverse the director device arrangement irrespective whether the power is provided to the circuitry of the director device arrangement. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168660 | ZERO RATING IN WIRELESS PREPAID COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - This disclosure relates to methods and systems for monitoring network usage according to predetermined rules and calculating user charges based on the network usage. The described technique includes receiving a data packet, extracting parameters from the data packet and determining whether the extracted parameters match at least one rule in a rules engine. Charges for the data packet are calculated based on the matched rules. The data packet is forwarded on to its destination. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168661 | VISUAL METERING AND RESPONSE TO MAINTAIN VOICE QUALITY IN A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL CALL - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program product for managing a voice over Internet Protocol call. A selected set of resources associated with a quality of the voice over Internet Protocol call in a data processing system is monitored during the voice over Internet Protocol call. A determination is made as to whether the quality of the voice over Internet Protocol call in a data processing has fallen below a desired level. A corrective action is performed with respect to the selected set of resources in response to the quality of the voice over Internet Protocol call falling below the desired level. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168662 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system of the present invention generates a gap section based on a channel quality indication, and determines the timing or the frequency of generating the gap section based on a given parameter between the base station device and the mobile station device. | 07-02-2009 |
20090175178 | Method and apparatus for requesting and reporting channel quality information in mobile communication system - Disclosed is a method and device for requesting and reporting channel quality information in a mobile communication system. A base station a locates a dedicated feedback channel for channel quality information report to an uplink radio resource, transmits the allocation information to subscriber stations, and generates a CQI report message to request channel quality information from the subscriber stations. The subscriber stations receive the CQI report message from the base station, measures a radio channel quality for communication with the base station, generates channel quality information, generates a CQI response message including the channel quality information, and transmit-the CQI response message to the base station through a dedicates feedback channel designated in the allocation information. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175179 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MOBILITY MEASUREMENTS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for performing mobility measurement in a communication network ( | 07-09-2009 |
20090175180 | Method and System of Addressing a Condition Experienced by a Customer When Using A Network - A method can be used to address a condition experienced by a customer when using a network. The method can include receiving a first communication from the customer, wherein the first communication is related to the condition of a video content as experienced by the customer, reviewing a log for an alarm, and testing a portion of the network that would process the video content, wherein testing generates a test result. The method can also include correlating the condition to a service parameter, an alarm, a maintenance event, a test result, or any combination thereof. The method can further include sending a second communication to the customer related to the condition. In one embodiment, the method can be fully or partly automated using a system. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175181 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF ERROR VECTOR MEASUREMENT FOR DIGITAL AND MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT IMO COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The present invention discloses an effective apparatus and method to measure the received signal quality for digital communication systems by measuring error vector measurement (EVM) with embedded EVM measurement block in receivers. The distinction of the present invention is that the EVM | 07-09-2009 |
20090175182 | Differentiated service transmission parameters adaptation - Systems and methods are provided for transmitting data on a wireless network. Some embodiments provide a technique whereby a type is determined for the transmission, at least one metric is determined for the transmission based at least in part on the transmission type and/or an indication of conditions on the channel on which the transmission is to be performed, at least one transmission parameter to be used in performing the transmission is selected to optimize the at least one metric, and the data is transmitted in accordance with the at least one transmission parameter. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175183 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Since OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing), which is a downlink access scheme used for an LTE (Long Term Evolution) communication system, is weak at interference, it is preferable that the number of base stations for transmitting the same E-MBMS (Evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) data be not excessive. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175184 | Method of requesting and reporting link quality in an EGPRS2 system - The link quality reporting method includes measuring link quality for received radio blocks, and if there is a modulation scheme with a largest number of radio blocks, reporting link quality for the modulation scheme, and if there is a plurality of schemes with the same number of radio blocks, reporting link quality for a modulation scheme selected using a predetermined method. Performance deterioration can be minimized in a link adaptation process. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175185 | Multi-Dimensional Adaptive Transmission Technique - Method and apparatus for dynamically optimizing the transmission level of each remote terminal in a satellite-based communication network. Each remote terminal maintains quasi-error-free communication at the highest efficiency level available under changing link conditions and network configurations, without requiring the reservation of substantial power margins, which results in a much more efficient satellite network. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175186 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING ACTIVE PERIOD STARTING POINT FOR USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention has disclosed a method for setting an active period starting point for a User Equipment (UE) in a Discontinuous Reception (DRX) mode, comprising steps of: a base station calculating and storing a position of the active period starting point for the UE based on predetermined parameters, so as to transmit data to the UE in a corresponding active period; the UE receiving Radio Resource Control (RRC) configuration information from the base station, and detecting whether the DRX mode is configured in it or not; the UE calculating its active period starting point based on predetermined DRX parameters in the received RRC configuration information; and the UE starting DRX based on the calculated active period starting point. The present invention has also disclosed an apparatus for setting an active period starting point for a UE in a DRX mode. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175187 | Method and Arrangement for Triggering Power Headroom Report Transmissions in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for triggering transmission of a power headroom report to be used by a base station for estimating UE transmit power also for transmissions for which a power headroom report is not included. The user equipment, UE, is to this end configured with a set of triggering conditions for power head room report transmission. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175188 | REAL-TIME MONITORING OF PERCEIVED QUALITY OF PACKET VOICE TRANSMISSION - The present invention is directed to a system and method for monitoring perceived quality of a packet-switched voice service in a network. The method includes the step of receiving a packetized voice communication via the packet-switched voice service. At least one objective measurement is obtained from the received packetized voice communication. User perceived quality of voice data is derived from the at least one objective measurement. The user perceived quality of voice data is provided to a user. The steps of receiving, obtaining, deriving, and providing are performed in real-time. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175189 | CALCULATION OF QUALITY OF WLAN ACCESS POINT CHARACTERIZATION FOR USE IN A WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM - Methods and systems for classifying WLAN access points according to the quality of estimation of characteristics of the WLAN access points are provided. The classifications may be used to scale a reference database and quantify an expected error of estimation of the characteristics of the access points. WLAN access points may be classified based on their impact on a user's position, speed of travel, and direction of travel estimation accuracy in a WLAN positioning system. A method for determining a quality of estimation of characteristics of a Wi-Fi access point comprises a Wi-Fi enabled scanning device measuring a number of received signal strength (RSS) samples of the Wi-Fi signal transmitted by the Wi-Fi access point. A total distance traveled by the Wi-Fi enabled scanning device while measuring the number of RSS samples is estimated and used to estimate the quality of estimation of characteristics of the Wi-Fi access point. | 07-09-2009 |
20090180393 | Sampling apparatus distinguishing a failure in a network even by using a single sampling and a method therefor - A network analyzer includes a sampler and a network anomaly detector. The sampler acquires communication data flowing through nodes by a data collector, estimates a topology of the nodes based on the acquired communication data by a topology estimator, stores the estimated topology of the nodes in a storage, reads out the estimated result from the storage to generate a predetermined item for each read-out topology of the nodes as a sampling rule by a rule generator, and samples the supplied communication data based on the generated sampling rule by a packet sampler. The topology of the network is thereby estimated in advance to narrow down objects to be sampled. The behavior of the communication data can thus be grasped in correlation between a target network and other networks. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180394 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE, COMMUNICATIONS METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communications device is provided which receives data frames in FIR communications mode even if the device has failed to normally receive a connect frame in SIR communications mode. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180395 | COMMUNICATING NETWORK STATUS - A method for communicating network status information includes receiving, via a first link, a request for status information from a client device, the first link being a link between a router device and a client device. In response to the request, a data exchanger is polled for status information via a second link. The second link is a link between the router device and the data exchanger. The status information identifies a state of a third link between the data exchanger and a wide area network. The status information is received via the second link and communicated to the client device via the first link. | 07-16-2009 |
20090185501 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINATION AND EXCHANGE OF NETWORK TIMING INFORMATION - Aspects of a method and system for determination and exchange of network timing information are provided. In this regard, for each network hop traversed by a packet, a propagation delay of said network hop may be determined. Moreover, the propagation delay, and/or a hop length calculated utilizing the propagation delay, may be appended to the packet. The packet may, for example, be a MMRP registration packet or a SRP reservation packet. The packet may be dropped in instances that the propagation delay and/or length of a one or more traversed network hops is outside a determined range. The hop length may be determined by multiplying the propagation delay by a speed of propagation on the hop. The speed of propagation may be determined based on the physical layer technology associated with the network hop. Digital rights management may be implemented for media communicated on the network hop based at least in part on the hop length or the propagation delay. In this regard, use of media content may be restricted to a specified location. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185502 | Apparatus and method for planning a wireless network - An apparatus and method for planning a wireless network is provided. An apparatus for planning a wireless network includes a parameter input unit for receiving parameter information, and outputting the parameter information, a Rise over Thermal (RoT) calculator for calculating an RoT using the parameter information, and outputting the RoT, a first uplink performance prediction index determiner for determining a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level using the RoT, and outputting determined MCS level information, a maximum achievable Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio (CINR) calculator for calculating a maximum achievable CINR of the determined MCS level using the determined MCS level information, and outputting a calculated maximum achievable CINR, and a second uplink performance prediction index determiner for determining at least one among a mobile station (MS) transmission power, a data rate, and an uplink CINR using the determined MCS level information. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185503 | NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYZING DEVICE, NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYZING METHOD AND NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYZING SYSTEM - A network traffic analyzing device accurately analyzes traffic of a communications network. The traffic analysis device includes a real time statistic information setting/managing unit for collecting information regarding communication data between a primary network and an access network from a traffic collecting device in real time. The device also includes a real time statistic information monitoring unit, an alert condition setting unit for alerting one or more conditions regarding the information collected from the traffic collecting device in real time, and an alert managing/notifying unit for generating an alert regarding traffic between the network and the access network based upon one or more alert conditions. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185504 | COMMUNICATION-QUALITY MEASURING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION-QUALITY MEASURING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication-quality measuring method disclosed in the present invention acquires packets to be transferred in a packet switching network and accumulates the acquired packets in an internal buffer. An acquisition amount indicating an amount of packets acquired per given unit time, a loss amount indicating an amount of packets lost during transfer in the packet switching network, and an acquisition leak amount indicating an amount of packets that cannot be accumulated in the internal buffer out of the acquired packets are measured. Based on the measured acquisition amount, loss amount, and acquisition leak amount, a packet loss rate transferred in the packet switching network and an error for the loss rate are calculated and the calculated loss rate and the loss rate error are output. | 07-23-2009 |
20090190483 | Network transmission system and a testing method thereof - A method, testing the network transmission, includes the step of providing a buffer of a scheduled size in a first storage unit, moving at least one transmission data from a second storage unit to the buffer in the first storage unit, and uploading the transmission data from the buffer in the first storage unit to an Internet. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190484 | DIRECTIONAL TOPOLOGY DISCOVERY FOR DOWNHOLE NETWORKS - An apparatus and method for discovering and monitoring a collection of nodes in a downhole network may include receiving data packets originating from several downhole nodes. These packets may be read to extract a unique identifier and hop count for each of the nodes. This information may then be used to create entries in a network topology table corresponding to each of the downhole nodes. Each entry may contain unique identifier identifying the respective node, a hop count identifying a location of the node within the downhole network, and a direction identifier. The method may further include modifying one or more entries in the topology table having a conflicting hop count and direction identifier. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190485 | Method of Closed Loop Power Control Adjusted by Self-Interference - A method and apparatus for controlling the transmit power of a mobile device in a mobile communication network takes the level of self-interference into account to perform inner-loop power control. For normal inner-loop power control, a signal quality estimate is compared to a signal quality target and power control commands are generated based on the comparison. When self-interference is the dominant impairment in the received signal, a “fast break” is introduced to change inner-loop power control command generation. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190486 | System and methods for distributed output packet metering using input lookups - System and methods for metering output packet traffic at network devices. Ingress packet lookups are employed in combination with egress packet meters, which can be arranged in parallel fashion, and used to meter traffic across multiple blades of a switch chassis. Also, egress packet traffic metering is accomplished while matching complex ingress rules without additional egress packet processing. The system has a first node for creating requests that contain a number of filter indicies for specifying packet forwarding criteria. The first node also specifies values for the filter and meter indicies based on a packet to be forwarded. The system also has a second node coupled to the first node and to a number of ports. The second node has at least one table for specifying which of the ports are to receive the packet based on the filter values, and at least one table for accounting for egress traffic bandwidth. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190487 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT FOR A NETWORK TUNNEL - A method and apparatus for providing performance measurements on network tunnels in packet networks are disclosed. For example, the method establishes two tunnels between a first measurement host and a first router, and establishes a tunnel between the first router and a second measurement host. The method also establishes a multicast group having a plurality of members, and sends one or more packets addressed to the multicast group from the first measurement host. The method measures the frequencies of directly and/or indirectly received responses from the plurality of members of the multicast group, and provides a plurality of estimated values for a plurality of packet transmission rates from measurement of the frequencies for one or more of said tunnels. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190488 | Method of aiding uplink beamforming transmission - A method and apparatus of aiding uplink beamforming transmission is disclosed. One method includes a base station downlink transmitting beamformed signals to at least a first terminal, the beam formed signals directed and conveying data to at least the first terminal. The method further includes a second terminal eavesdropping the transmitted beamformed signals, and measuring a signal quality. The second terminal estimates uplink channel information based on the measured signal quality, for aiding uplink transmission. Based at least in part on the estimated transmission channel, the second terminal transmits beamformed uplink signals to the base station. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190489 | Apparatus and method for channel estimation in wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for channel estimation in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) memory unit for collecting a predetermined number of pieces of channel information for two or more mobile stations (MSs), a CQI DIFference (CQIDIF) memory unit for storing a predetermined number of differences between consecutive pieces of channel information with respect to each MS, a CQIDIF dispersion unit for calculating a predetermined number of dispersions between two pieces of consecutive channel information with respect to each MS, and a second comparator for comparing a dispersion for differences between the two consecutive pieces of channel information with a second threshold to identify a Rician channel. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190490 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION DELAY - Determining mutual differences of transmission delays experienced by protocol data units transmitted in a communications network is based on a surprising discovery that the time difference between the receiving moments of protocol data units the temporal receiving order of which deviates from their temporal transmitting order represents the smallest possible difference between the transmission delays experienced by these protocol data units. In a method it is determined, based on an order indicator associated with a protocol data unit received at an earlier point of time and an order indicator associated with a protocol data unit received later, whether the mutual order of the protocol data units changed during transmission. If the mutual order has changed, the time difference between the receiving moments of the protocol data units is calculated, which time difference represents the smallest possible difference between the transmission delays experienced by these protocol data units. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190491 | ESTIMATING POINTING LOSS FOR USER TERMINALS OF A SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Techniques are provided herein for monitoring the performance of a satellite communications system, including techniques for determining the pointing loss of a plurality of user terminals in the satellite communications system using the isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the satellite. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190492 | Header Estimation To Improve Multimedia Quality Over Wireless Networks - A method is provided for estimating the header of a data packet in a wireless communication system. The method includes: maintaining a list of data packets received without an error at a receiver; receiving at the receiver a corrupt data packet having errors in its header; computing a likelihood score for the header of the corrupt data packet in relation to each entry in the list of data packets; and selecting an entry having the highest likelihood score as an estimated header for the corrupt data packet. | 07-30-2009 |
20090196189 | Method And Arrangement For Measuring Transmission Quality In A Packet Mode Communication Network - A method and an arrangement for measuring a transmission quality in terms of lost packets between two pre-determined nodes arranged to transmit and receive packets in a packet mode communication network. Each node is provided with a counter arranged to count transmitted packets in one node and received packets in the other node during a pre-determined period of time. After the pre-determined period of time has ended, the counters are compared in order to obtain a packet loss measurement. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196190 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR REPORT - A method for a UE reporting a CQI comprising steps of: obtaining a total number M of CQI report sub-bands in a system and a number N of CQI report sub-bands needed to be reported; measuring channel qualities of all sub-bands and according to the measurement result, determining N CQI report sub-bands needed to be reported and corresponding CQI values; sending a L-bit long sequence to a base station for indicating the sub-bands that need to be reported; sending CQI values corresponding to the sub-bands need to be reported to the base station. The present invention uses comparatively shorter bit sequence to indicate CQI report sub-bands needed to be reported and reduces the number of information bits necessary for CQI report sub-bands and also reduces the number of information bits corresponding to the CQI values in the CQI report sub-bands. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196191 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A SEQUENCE OF DATA UNITS BETWEEN A WIRELESS DEVICE AND A NETWORK - Method for transmitting a status report for a sequence of data transmitted along a wireless communication link between a wireless device and a network having several base stations, said link having a transmitting side and a receiving side. The method comprises: on the receiving side, determining status information on data units of the sequence, including a first set of data units comprising a first non-received data unit in the sequence and data units following said first non-received data unit, the status information indicating whether each data unit has been received or not on the receiving side; and transmitting, from the receiving side to the transmitting side, a status report containing a bitmap providing the status information for a second set of data units included in said first set, such that the bitmap has a predetermined maximum size. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196192 | POWER CONTROL AND SCHEDULING METHOD IN CONSIDERATION OF INTERFERENCE LEVELS BETWEEN NEIGHBOR SECTORS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In order to perform uplink scheduling for a terminal, a base station receives information on uplink interference due to the terminal from neighbor base stations, transmits the information on the uplink interference to the terminal, receives information on transmission power of a feedback channel from the terminal through the feedback channel, compares the transmission power of the feedback channel and reception power of the feedback channel so as to estimate transmission loss, and performs uplink scheduling for the terminal by reflecting the transmission loss. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196193 | METHOD IN A SCHEDULER FOR REDUCING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE - The present invention relates to a method for reducing inter-cell interference in a cellular radio system in which said scheduler controls a set of shared radio resources. The method comprises the steps of—assigning cell specific resource priority weights (RPW) to the different radio resources of a cell, said assignment differs from the assignment of the same radio resources in at least one neighboring cell utilizing the resource priority weights for selection of radio resources. The resource priority weights can furthermore be combined with channel quality indication reports (CQI) to form weighted quality indexes (WCQI) for the radio resources that are available to the scheduler. The invention also relates to a scheduler performing said method and a radio network node comprising such scheduler. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196194 | ENERGY AWARE EARLY DETECTION - An incoming data packet is received, and a rate of change of residual capacity of a portable power supply is determined. From the determined rate of change it is decided to enqueue or drop the incoming data packet. If the decision is to enqueue, the packet is transmitted. If the decision is drop, the packet is deleted without transmitting. Additional factors may be considered in the decision, such as total energy capacity, residual energy capacity, and first and second derivatives of the residual energy capacity. Real time traffic may be treated differently than non real time traffic, and video enhancement layer packets can be weighted to drop more frequently than video base layer packets for the same flow. If used in the network, congestion probe packets are dropped at a rate matched to the rate at which data packets are dropped to give other nodes an accurate view of link quality. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196195 | Network Controlled Throughput for Enhanced Uplink FACH - Systems and methods according to these exemplary embodiments provide for network control of interference associated with uplink transmissions by user equipments, UEs, operating in a random access state, e.g., the CELL_FACH state. A radio network controller, RNC, can determine, and then transmit, a limitation on uplink transmissions for such UEs, e.g., a maximum transport block size, TBS. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196196 | CARRIER MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE ASSIGNED A SET OF TWO OR MORE CARRIERS BY A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Carrier management in a wireless communication device assigned a set of two or more carriers by a wireless communication network is disclosed. In one aspect, a method of carrier management includes transmitting data over the wireless communication network on one or more carriers forming a subset of active carriers from the set of carriers assigned to the wireless communication device. A first performance metric is determined indicative of operating conditions across the set of carriers assigned to the wireless communication device. A desired number of carriers on which to transmit data based on the first performance metric is determined. The desired number of carriers on which to transmit data is compared with the number of carriers in the subset of active carriers. The subset of active carriers is dynamically adjusted based on the comparison and subsequent data is transmitted over the wireless communication network using the adjusted subset of active carriers. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196197 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION AND DOWNLINK INTER-FREQUENCY AND INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENTS IN CELL_FACH STATE - A method and apparatus of performing discontinuous reception (DRX) and downlink inter-frequency and inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurements in CELL_FACH state are disclosed. While in DRX mode, a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may perform inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements in a measurement occasion that fall into a DRX period. The WTRU may perform the measurements while T321 timer is running. The WTRU may take the measurements on first predetermined number of frame in which a DRX frame would coincide after a last reception frame if DRX operation was ongoing. The WTRU may periodically wake up for downlink reception in CELL_FACH state in accordance with a common DRX pattern that is common to all WTRUs in a cell or may wake up from DRX upon reception of the order and receiving a common traffic. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196198 | RESOURCE STATE MONITORING METHOD, DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A resource state monitoring method, device and communication network are provided. The method includes: acquiring network event state information of a node in a network running process, detecting a data plane resource state of the node and a control plane resource state of the node when it determines that the network event state information of the node meets a resource state detection triggering condition, and reporting a detection result to a management plane of the node. The device includes an acquiring unit, a checking unit, a triggering unit, a detecting unit and a reporting unit. The network includes several nodes, a communication control device and a resource state monitoring device. | 08-06-2009 |
20090201823 | Method for Dimensioning A Data Packets Handler Apparatus In A Packet-Switched Mobile Communications Network - A method of dimensioning a data packets handler apparatus in a mobile communications network includes a plurality of cells, each one providing mobile communications coverage in a respective geographic area, the mobile communications network supporting packet-switched traffic and circuit-switched traffic, wherein the data packets handler apparatus to be dimensioned is associated with at least one cell of the mobile communications network. The method includes: obtaining an indication of radio communications resources of the at least one cell; obtaining an indication of an offered packet-switched traffic with respect to the at least one cell; and determining an amount of resources of the data packets handler apparatus potentially needed by the at least one cell for handling the packet-switched traffic based on the radio communications resources and on the offered packet-switched traffic. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201824 | ESTIMATING ENDPOINT PERFORMANCE IN UNIFIED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Performance of endpoints, client devices and servers within a communication system, is determined by collecting call quality data from each endpoint by a quality monitoring server/application. Call quality data includes predefined metrics based on network and end device characteristics during each call. Calls include voice, video, and data exchanges. Collected metric values are then aggregated according to a formula for consistency and scaled based on factors such as traffic volume. Resulting performance values are used to order the endpoints such that those with degraded quality and prioritized based on factors like traffic volume can be attended to first. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201825 | Partial CQI Feedback in Wireless Networks - Within a wireless network, feedback information from user equipment (UE) to a control node (eNodeB) is necessary to support various functions. A UE receives an allocation from the eNodeB comprising a plurality of periodic transmission instances for a channel quality indicator (CQI) and a schedule comprising a plurality of periodic transmission instances for a rank indicator (RI), wherein the CQI comprises RI and other CQI fields. The UE then transmits an RI without transmitting the other CQI fields in a transmission instance allocated for both RI and other CQI fields. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201826 | SEGMENT SENSITIVE SCHEDULING - Systems and methods of scheduling sub-carriers in an OFDMA system in which a scheduler takes into account channel conditions experienced by the communication devices to optimize channel conditions. The scheduler can partition a set of sub-carriers spanning an operating bandwidth into a plurality of segments. The segments can include a plurality of global segments that each includes a distinct non-contiguous subset of the sub-carriers spanning substantially the entire operating bandwidth. One or more of the global segments can be further partitioned into a plurality of local segments that each has a bandwidth that is less than a channel coherence bandwidth. The scheduler determines channel characteristics experienced by each communication device via reporting or channel estimation, and allocates one or more segments to communication links for each device according to the channel characteristics. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201827 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA AND APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING DATA - Provided are a apparatus and method for transmitting data and a apparatus and method for receiving data, in which a transmitting station sets priorities among a plurality of data to be transmitted and a receiving station processes the plurality of data according to the priorities. The apparatus for transmitting data includes a packet-generation module which generates a plurality of data and a packet that includes the plurality of data and that specifies priorities between the plurality of data; and a communication module which transmits the packet through a communication channel. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201828 | METHOD OF DETERMINING PATH MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT - Network endpoints using TCP/IP operate to determine the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of the path between them. This determination is done so as to avoid the expensive IP fragmentation that will occur when transitting links with a smaller MTU size. The standard method of determining the path MTU (PMTU) has several known deficiencies, including: inefficient use of bandwidth as proper operation will likely result in the loss of one or more packets and difficulty of implementation as the reverse channel communication mechanism, reception of ICMP messages indicating the discarding of unfragmentable packets, is frequently blocked by firewalls and other security apparatus. | 08-13-2009 |
20090207744 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING TUNEAWAY TIME IN OPEN STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for determining TuneAway time in a wireless communication system is described. A current TuneAway attribute is and a TuneAwayRequest message having a MessageSequence matching the last received TuneAwayResponse is used. A tuneaway period number n for a sector with given sectorOffset is began at TuneAwayTimeNn, wherein the TuneAwayTimeNn is a function of t | 08-20-2009 |
20090207745 | PROVIDING REMOTE FIELD TESTING FOR MOBILE DEVICES - Remote field testing of mobile communication devices is provided herein. By way of example, an IP gateway of a target mobile network can be monitored. A mobile originated data packet associated with a test device can be updated or translated to include information of a device that is activated on the mobile network. Likewise, a mobile network originated data packet, routed to the activated device and/or identifying the test device, can be forwarded to the test device. As described herein, two way data exchange between the mobile network and the test device can be implemented even if the test device is not pre-activated on the mobile network. Further, an interface for the two way communication can comprise any suitable Internet Protocol (IP) network, enabling application testing remote from wireless access points of the mobile network. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207746 | FFT-BASED ESTIMATION OF THERMAL NOISE AND RISE OVER THERMAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for estimating thermal noise and rise-over-thermal (RoT) in a communication system are described. Thermal noise in a sideband may be measured and used as an estimate of thermal noise in a signal band. In one design, samples containing a desired signal centered at DC or a frequency higher than DC may be partitioned into blocks of K samples. Each block of K samples may be transformed with an FFT to obtain a corresponding block of K transform coefficients for K frequency bins. The power of transform coefficients for frequency bins in the sideband may be computed. Thermal noise may be estimated based on power values for the frequency bins in the sideband. Power values for frequency bins in the signal band may also be obtained and used to estimate total received power. RoT may then be estimated based on the estimated thermal noise and the estimated total received power. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207747 | Network device and data transmission method thereof in wireless sensor network - A wireless sensor network and data transmission method thereof provides for improving channel access efficiency and energy saving effect by using inventive carrier sensing mechanism. The data transmission method includes assessing a channel after initializing, when a packet to be transmitted is generated, a number of carrier sensing attempts (Ns) and a backoff value (W); determining, when the channel availability is assessed to be idle, whether W reaches 0; transmitting the packet if W reaches 0; and reassessing, if W does not reach 0, the channel after a duration corresponding W/(Ns-1) slot. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207748 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATOR IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A communication method and apparatus is disclosed that uses a received signal strength indicator (RSSI). In a sensor network including a plurality of nodes, a first node of the plurality of nodes receives a signal transmitted from a second node of the plurality of nodes, at least once. The first node also manages a link state with the second node according to the RSSI of the received signal. Therefore, the first node can receive signals from the plurality of nodes and then predict whether the second node moves. The first node can also predict a link state after the second node is moved so that communication can be performed through a link in a good state. Accordingly, the communication quality and the network performance of a network are enhanced. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207749 | USER-INITIATED REPORTING OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERRORS - Systems and methods that automatically collect data associated with system-identified errors as well as data associated with events associated with user-initiated actions. A data collection profile defines data to be collected and a user-initiated trigger. When the user-initiated trigger is sensed, data is collected according to the data collection profile. The collected data can be uploaded immediately, or stored for some period of time before being transmitted to a collection system. A user recognizes an event which may not be recognizable by the system and the user provides an input defined as the user-initiated trigger. Data may be collected for a brief time before, during and a brief time after sensing the user-initiated trigger and may be uploaded to a system. The user may annotate the collected data by explaining the error, after which the explanation is correlated with the collected data. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207750 | NETWORK MONITORING BASED ON POINTER INFORMATION - A computer system and method for identifying and extracting content from data traffic, the system including: a capture driver arranged to monitor data traffic and to copy data packets from the traffic to a buffer without disrupting the traffic flow, and to generate pointer information to identify specific parts of a data packet; a plurality of decoder modules, each module being adapted to decode one or more specific data transfer protocols; and a control interface adapted to receive pointer information from the capture driver, to route the pointer information to one or more of the plurality of decoder modules, and to route extracted content from the data traffic to an application. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207751 | SERVICE BASED LAWFUL INTERCEPTION - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in a telecommunication system to monitor information related to specified services in a service unaware node. The node handles Content of Communication associated with services. The system comprises a Delivery Function to which Content of Communication related to a target is received from the node. The method comprises the following steps: Receiving from a requesting entity to the Delivery Function a request to delimit the received Content of Communication according to not desired services. Parsing the received Content of Communication according to not desired services by a Packet Inspection Feature associated with the Delivery Function. Forwarding Control Information related to the not desired services to the requesting entity. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207752 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTHORIZING THRESHOLD TESTING WITHIN A NETWORK - A system and method for authorizing test traffic over a network. A request is received to perform a throughput test. A state of the network is determined. The throughput test is authorized in response to the determined state of the network being acceptable for performing the throughput test. The throughput test is terminated in response to the determined state of the network being unacceptable for performing the throughput test. | 08-20-2009 |
20090213740 | Measurement Based Link Capacity for Multiple Interferers in an 802.11-Based Wireless Network - A method according to the invention includes determining a PHY layer model for a single interferer in an 802.11 wireless network responsive to an input of measured pair wise of at least one of a delivery ratio and received signal strength RSSI values in the 802.11 wireless network; ascertaining a deferral probability for a given node in the network in the presence of multiple interferers in a MAC layer model of the 802.11 network responsive to the determining step in the PHY layer model; and deriving from the ascertaining step at least one of sending capacity in the presence of multiple interferers, packet collision probability in the presence of multiple interferers and available capacity in a given link for a corresponding link delivery ratio. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213741 | Multi-user MIMO systems with Imperfect CSIT and ARQ - A robust closed-loop cross-layer design provides for the downlink multi-user multi-antenna systems with imperfect Channel State Information at the transmitter (CSIT) for slow fading channels. Using ACK/NAK feedbacks from mobiles, a closed-loop cross-layer scheduler does not require any knowledge of the CSIT error statistics. To take into account of the potential packet outage (due to imperfect CSIT), we define system goodput, which measures the average bits per second per Hertz (b/s/Hz) successfully delivered to the mobiles, as the optimization objectives. We formulate the cross-layer design as a mixed combinatorial search and Markov decision problem. Based on dynamic programming approach, the optimal power and rate allocation is determined using backward recursion and forward recursion algorithms. Simulations illustrate that the proposed closed-loop cross-layer scheduler has very robust goodput performance at moderate to high CSIT errors and pedestrian mobility. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213742 | Telephone Communication Monitoring Device and Method - A telecommunication system management device, the device comprising: a means to connect the device to a source of power; a means to connect the device to a multiplexed telephone signal; a means to provide the device with a destination network address; a decoder, to receive the multiplexed telephone signal and to extract control information from the multiplexed telephone signal; a converter, to receive inputs comprising the destination network address and the extracted control information, and to convert the inputs into a network compatible output signal; and a means to connect the device to a network, to permit the device to transmit the output signal over the network; wherein, the extracted control information can be sent to the destination network address. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213743 | NOISE POWER ESTIMATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A pilot signal is estimated by using the sampling theorem to estimate noise power in a stable manner without depending on the signal to noise ratio. A pilot signal estimation section obtains an estimated pilot signal by using the sampling theorem according to a plurality of received pilot signals sampled in the frequency domain by a sampling processor. A noise power estimation section estimates noise power by applying statistical averaging to the difference between the received pilot signal received from the sampling processor and the estimated pilot signal received from the pilot signal estimation section. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213744 | Self-testing communications device - The invention relates to a communications device with a transmitter ( | 08-27-2009 |
20090213745 | FRAME MONITORING DEVICE AND FRAME MONITORING METHOD - One aspect of the embodiments utilizes a frame monitoring device includes a monitoring period judging unit for judging whether the period of a received frame is a monitoring period satisfying a condition for detecting the alarm and a received frame input control unit for inputting a new frame received by the frame monitoring device into the buffer when the new frame is received and it is judged by the monitoring period judging unit that the period of the frame is the monitoring period satisfying the alarm detecting condition, and discarding the new frame without inputting the frame into the buffer when it is judged by the monitoring period judging unit that the period of the frame is a monitoring period which does not satisfy the alarm detecting condition. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213746 | COMMUNICATION QUALITY MEASUREMENT SYSTEM, DEVICE, MANAGEMENT SERVER AND METHOD THEREOF - A management server that includes a signal control unit for controlling a signal for a packet for measuring communication quality, and a signal communication quality measurement unit that measures communication quality of a signal based on a result of signal control by the signal control unit; and a communication quality measurement device includes a payload control unit for controlling payload of packets for communication quality measurement and a payload communication quality measurement unit that measures communication quality of payload based on a result of payload control by payload control unit. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213747 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR ESTIMATING ON-OFF TRAFFIC CHARACTERISTIC AND RECORDING MEDIUM RECORDING PROGRAM FOR ESTIMATING ON-OFF TRAFFIC CHARACTERISTIC - An ON-OFF traffic characteristic can be analyzed in real time from a measurement value without requiring detailed data analysis which is performed using measurement values accumulated for a predetermined time period through a high-performance measurement apparatus. A packet length and a packet transfer time interval of a communication traffic are first measured, and a data transfer rate variance indicator is computed based on a relative entropy value between the measured packet transfer time interval and a packet transfer time interval in case of transferring at a constant transfer rate. A predetermined traffic characteristic value is at least approximately computed using the computed data transfer rate variance indicator. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213748 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING A SIGNAL-TO-INTERFERENCE RATIO - A method and apparatus for estimating a signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) are disclosed. A received signal includes signal energy on multiple basis functions. Desired signal energy in the received signal is transformed onto a first basis function with constant polarity. The desired signal energy is estimated by coherently averaging signal energy on the first basis function. A noise power is estimated by averaging signal energy on each basis function other than the first basis function and accumulating the averaged signal energy from the basis function other than the first basis function and scaling the accumulated signal energy to account for a noise estimate from the first basis function. An SIR is estimated by dividing the desired signal energy by the noise power. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213749 | METHOD FOR DETECTING THE QUALITY OF A SERVICE PARAMETER AND NETWORK SIDE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for detecting a quality of service (QoS) parameter includes: a network side communication device compares a QoS parameter obtained by network negotiation with a minimum acceptable QoS (MINQoS) parameter required by terminal equipment (TE) after acquiring the QoS parameter obtained by network negotiation during a PDP context activation process. If the QoS parameter obtained by network negotiation does not satisfy the MINQoS parameter requirement, the current PDP context activation is rejected. The network side communication device is also provided. With the present invention, rejection for the PDP context activation is realized by the network side communication device, occupied network and equipment resources are rapidly released in an unsuccessful PDP context activation process, thereby enhancing system work efficiency and network reaction time. | 08-27-2009 |
20090219825 | Endpoint Device Configured to Permit User Reporting of Quality Problems in a Communication Network - An IP telephone or other endpoint device in a network is configured to support a reporting mode of operation that may be entered, for example, responsive to user entry of a report command via a user interface of the endpoint device. In one aspect, the endpoint device stores call information in one or more buffers. Responsive to an instruction to enter a reporting mode, the endpoint device sends contents of the buffer(s) to a report server over the network. The endpoint device may reinitialize the buffer(s) responsive to an instruction to leave the reporting mode. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219826 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LIMITING ACCESS TO AN IP-BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BASED ON ACCESS POINT IP ADDRESS AND/OR MAC ADDRESS - A system and method manages call connections between mobile subscribers and an EP-based wireless telecommunications network through a wireless access point. Communications between the mobile subscribers and the IP-based wireless telecommunications network are initiated by a registration request. During the registration request various identifiers (IMSI, MAC address, IP Address, etc.) are communicated to the system. The system is arranged to log the identifiers and associate those identifiers with the entry point (e.g., the wireless access point) into the IP based wireless network. Call connections from the mobile subscribers are monitored for various throughput and call quality based metrics. Call handoffs between the IP-based wireless communications network and the cellular telephony network are managed by the system based on the monitored call quality and throughput metrics on a per-access point basis using the registered identifiers. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219827 | REGISTERED STATE CHANGE NOTIFICATION FOR A FIBRE CHANNEL NETWORK - Disclosed herein are various aspects of a Fibre Channel (Fibre Channel) fabric having switches that employ Registered State Change Notifications (RSCNs) with enhanced payloads. Two types of RSCN message formats are provided, both including status information about the affected device(s). In one embodiment, a RSCN message format for inter-switch communication provides various information about the affected devices according to one of a plurality of predetermined formats. In another embodiment, a node device RSCN message format provides information about a port state, the identification of the affected port, along with the port and node world wide names and the FC-4 types supported by the node. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219828 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING DATA TRANSFER - A method and a system for managing data transfer are provided. The method includes receiving a poll request for a status report on Protocol Data Units (PDUs) transmitted sequentially during the data transfer, determining a status reporting range of the PDUs to be accounted in the status report based on a sequence number in the poll request, and providing the status report with status information on a receipt or a loss of the PDUs within the status reporting range during the data transfer. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219829 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK PACKET CAPTURE DISTRIBUTED STORAGE SYSTEM - This is invention comprises a method and apparatus for Infinite Network Packet Capture System (INPCS). The INPCS is a high performance data capture recorder capable of capturing and archiving all network traffic present on a single network or multiple networks. This device can be attached to Ethernet networks via copper or SX fiber via either a SPAN port ( | 09-03-2009 |
20090225671 | Monitoring Quality of a Packet Flow in Packet-Based Communication Networks - A communication system includes multiple routers interconnected by a packet-based communication network. Each of the routers includes a monitoring application that monitors quality of one or more packet flows during each of multiple successive monitoring periods. For each of the packet flows, the monitoring application determines quality metrics based on information obtained from transport headers of packets. | 09-10-2009 |
20090232012 | Method and Monitoring System for Sample-Analysis of Data Comprising a Multitute of Data Packets - The invention is related to a method and a monitoring system for sample-analysis of data comprising a multitude of data packets. Defined parent population numbers (N) of data packets are sampled by an out of N sampling and classified or vice versa. Classification is done by classification rules to create sample-flow-groups of specific flows. Each sample-flow-group consists of a sample-flow-quantity of data packets having a sample-flow-size. According to the invention in each sample-flow-group sample-flow-variances and sample-flow ratios defined by the sample-flow-quantity in proportion to the sample number (n) are determined. Furthermore, an estimated flow size defined by an estimated sum of data sizes of data packages in a flow of the parent population number of data packets and its variance are calculated. For the calculation the parent population number, the sample number and at least one of the sample-flow-ratios, the sample-flow-mean-sizes and the sample-flow-variances are used, comprising the step of determination of at least one of parent population flow-ratios parent population flow-mean-sizes and parent population flow-variances for each flow in the parent population number of data packets. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232013 | METHOD, MEASURING SYSTEM, BASE STATION, NETWORK ELEMENT, AND MEASURING DEVICE - There is provided a measuring system comprising: a measuring device configured to measure parameters of a serving cell required for camping into the neighbor cells of the serving cell, to camp into the neighbor cells in order to store reception quality and neighbor cell lists from the neighbor cells; and a base station configured to set parameters of the formed virtual cell such that the virtual cell becomes a tempting destination for a cell reselection, to interfere the serving cell in order to cause the one or more user terminals to camp into the virtual cell, and to catch one or more identifiers of the one or more user terminals camping into the virtual cell after the start of virtual cell transmission. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232014 | Method for Determining a Route Distance Value - A method determines a route in distance value for use in routing protocols. An optimum route is determined for time-critical transmissions such as videotelephony or VoIP. For this purpose, the route distance value is calculated as the product of the link metrics for the links of a route, said link metrics being the product of data packet arrival rates. This value is the optimum value for the route which requires the lowest number of repeated packet transmissions (retransmissions). Optionally, an additional factor can be inserted in the link metrics, which factor ensures that the length of a route is also taken into consideration. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232015 | Traffic control device, packet-based network and method for controlling traffic in a packet-based network - A traffic control device ( | 09-17-2009 |
20090232016 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COLLECTING AND ANALYZING COMMUNICATIONS DATA - A method of monitoring data on a first communication line. Data is received from the first communication line ( | 09-17-2009 |
20090232017 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRAFFIC PRIORITIZATION - A method for management of Internet Protocol (IP) traffic comprises (a) receiving an uplink data packet associated with a connection of a plurality of connections; (b) assigning a weight to the uplink data packet; (c) updating a debt associated with the connection based on the weight assigned to the uplink data packet; (d) prioritizing the connections based on the debt associated with each of the one or more connections; and (e) processing packets in the one or more connections based on the prioritizing. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232018 | Method and apparatus for processing padding buffer status reports - A method and system for processing buffer status reports (BSRs) such that when BSR triggering is performed, the size(s) of the necessary sub-header(s) are also to be considered together in addition to the BSR size. The steps of checking whether any padding region is available in a MAC PDU that was constructed, comparing the number of padding bits with the size of the BSR plus its sub-header, and if the number of padding bits is larger than the size of the BSR plus its sub-header, triggering BSR are performed. Doing so allows the sub-header(s) to be inserted or included into the MAC PDU or transport block (TB) or other type of data unit. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232019 | PROVIDING MULTIPLE LEVELS OF SERVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Local breakout is provided by one or more nodes (e.g., a local access point and/or a local gateway) in a wireless network to facilitate access to one or more local services. In conjunction with local breakout, multiple IP points of presence relating to different levels of service may be provided for an access point. For example, one point of presence may relate to a local service while another point of presence may relate to a core network service. IP point of presence may be identified for an over-the-air packet to indicate a termination point for the packet. Also, different mobility management functionality may be provided at different nodes in a system whereby mobility management for a given node may be provided by a different node for different types of traffic. Thus, an access terminal may support multiple NAS instances. In addition, different types of paging may be provided for different types of traffic. Furthermore, messages associated with one protocol may be carried over another protocol to reduce complexity in the system. | 09-17-2009 |
20090238085 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING VOICE QUALITY ON A VoIP NETWORK - In a method and apparatus for measuring voice quality of an endpoint in a Voice-over-IP (VoIP) network, a plurality of network quality parameters are determined for the endpoint. A voice quality factor for the endpoint is determined in real time based on the network quality parameters. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238086 | Rank Dependent CQI Back-Off - In a wireless communication network UE, an estimated signal to interference and noise ratio (SINR) is calculated for each potential transmission mode, and is reduced by a calculated SINR back-off value in response to errors detected in decoding data in each of a plurality of data streams. A Channel Quality Indicator CQI is then generated based on the reduced SINRs. Reducing the SINR estimates in the presence of known data errors allows a UE to more accurately track a target BLER. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238087 | Intelligent Heterogeneous, Mobile, Ad-Hoc Communication Network - The present invention relates to a Mobile Ad Hoc Network that possesses sufficient intelligence to handle a collection of devices that differ in terms of features either inherent to the device or the environment in which they operate. The different features inherent to the device may consist of different hardware and software technologies (e.g., combination of RF for transmission ability, processing ability, power supply, and interfaces). The different features of the environment may consist of any telemetry data measuring the state of the environment, as well as information regarding the MANet such as the density of devices in the vicinity of a device. Various applications are considered. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238088 | NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYZING DEVICE, NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYZING METHOD AND NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYZING SYSTEM - A network traffic analyzing device accurately analyzes traffic of a communications network. The traffic analysis device includes a real time monitoring unit configured to collect information regarding communication data between a primary network and an access network from a traffic collecting device in real time; an alert managing/notifying unit that generates an alert regarding traffic between the primary network and the access network based on the information collected in real time by the traffic collecting device; and an alert generation cause analyzing unit that analyzes a cause of the alert generated by the alert managing/notifying unit based on information regarding at least one of normal data and abnormal data transmitted and received between the primary network and the access network prior to generation of the alert by the alert managing/notifying unit. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238089 | ETHERNET TRANSMISSION METHOD, TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - The present invention, provides an Ethernet transmission apparatus comprising a first and second MEPs provided for each of transmission lines of operational and non-operational systems and for performing the transmission/reception of a frame to be transmitted over each transmission line in a duplexed manner, and a switching processing part for switching the MEP to be used for reception by using ETH-CC which is transmitted at regular intervals, in which the above described first and second MEPs are configured to be able to confirm each other's received content and are adapted to add a continuous sequence number to the ETH-CC when transmitting the ETH-CC, and when the sequence number of the received ETH-CC is smaller than the sequence number of the ETH-CC received by the operational system side, the MEP of the non-operational system side is adapted not to transmit the frame. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238090 | COMMON DATA CHANNEL RESOURCE USAGE REPORT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating channel resource usage information for receiving additional channel resources in a wireless network. An access point can initially receive a set of channel resources from a network controller for providing wireless network access to one or more devices. The access point can grant and/or deny requests for one or more of the channel resources from a plurality of devices and can feedback information to the network controller regarding the granting/denying. The network controller can determine a load on the access point based at least in part on the feedback information and adjust channel resource allocation based on the load. Thus, where an access point has granted close to capacity of allocated resources to one or more devices, the network controller can provide additional resources to the access point based on received feedback information related to the granted resources. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238091 | MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) is disclosed. A starting location of a search space in a control region of a subframe k is acquired. The search space is defined by a set of PDCCHs at each aggregation level. The set of PDCCHs from the starting location in the search space at the each aggregation level is monitored. The starting location is defined by the multiple of the aggregation level in the control region. | 09-24-2009 |
20090245118 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING QUALITY OF SERVICE MAPPING - A system and method for providing quality of service mapping including a first receiver to receive location data of a mobile device, a transmitter to transmit the location data to one or more servers of a service provider, and a second receiver to receive signal quality information based on the location data. The signal quality map be used to provide at least a signal quality map, a coverage area map, an availability map, and turn-by-turn directions for optimized signal quality or availability, based on the signal quality information. The signal quality map be also be used to improve overall service in the event of signal loss or signal degradation. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245119 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FOR EXCHANGING SPECTRUM SENSING MEASUREMENTS THROUGH A DROP BOX AND METHOD OF USING SAME - A communications system and method for exchanging spectrum usage information through a drop box ( | 10-01-2009 |
20090245120 | Ethernet Physical Layer Transceiver with Auto-Ranging Function - A method in an Ethernet physical transceiver device for selecting a transmission speed includes resetting a first register and a count value, establishing a link with a remote network device at a first transmission speed, incrementing the first register to a first value, monitoring the link by counting the number of detected false carrier events in the incoming transmission as the count value, and at the expiration of a first time period, comparing the count value of false carrier events to a predetermined threshold. The method continues with reducing the first transmission speed when the count value exceeds the predetermined threshold, maintaining the first transmission speed when the count value is less than the predetermined threshold, and when the first register has a first value, incrementing the first register to a second value and repeating the steps of monitoring the link to reducing the first transmission speed. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245121 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A QUICKCHANNELINFO BLOCK IN ACTIVE STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and processing a QuickChannelInfo block is described. It is determined if a superframe is with odd superframe index. A QuickChannelInfo block is transmitted in every superframe with an odd superframe index. The contents of the QuickChannelInfo block are changed in accordance with the QuickChannelInfo Validity field of the QuickChannelInfo block. It is determined if multi-carrier mode is MultiCarrierOn. The QuickChannelInfo block is transmitted on each carrier. The QuickChannelInfo block is transmitted over the communication. The QuickChannelInfo block is processed after the QuickChannelInfo block is received over a communication link. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245122 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING GLOBAL NETWORK PERFORMANCE - The present invention provides a system and method for monitoring global network performance across a public Wide Area Network (WAN), and/or private networking through a secure IPSec gateway, and providing a user interface for performance metrics through a secure Internet browser. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245123 | METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUSLY ACCESSING CIRCUIT SERVICES AND PACKET SERVICES IN A CELLULAR MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM - A method for simultaneous access to circuit services and packet services in a cellular mobile radio system comprising second generation cells and third generation cells, in which method, if a packet or a circuit connection is required by a terminal already having a circuit or a packet connection set up in a second generation cell, the method determines whether a change of cell to a third generation cell is possible and, if so, effects said change of cell in order to allow said circuit and packet connections simultaneously in a third generation cell. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245124 | Receiving device, clock synchronizing method, and computer program - There is provided a receiving device including: a receiving unit that receives a packet stream; an oscillator; a measuring unit that performs a measuring operation; an acquiring unit that reads the newest time stamp read from the packet stream received by the receiving unit and the newest measurement value measured by the measuring unit with a predetermined period, from a point of time when the packet stream starts to be received; a calculating unit that calculates an accumulation value of the time stamps and the measurement values acquired by the acquiring unit; a comparing unit that compares a difference between the accumulation value of the time stamps and the accumulation value of the measurement values calculated by the calculating unit, and a value corresponding to a network jitter; and a frequency control unit that controls the oscillation frequency of the oscillator based on the comparison result by the comparing unit. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245125 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION WHEN RECEIVING A FRAME HAVING A LOW RECEPTION SUCCESS POSSIBILITY - A header analysis unit reads a parameter showing a format of a digital signal contained in a received signal. A received signal quality measurement unit measures a quality of the received signal. An awake/sleep control unit controls restart and sleep of a reception unit based on data from the header analysis unit and the received signal quality measurement unit. The awake/sleep control unit stops a reception operation for a period corresponding to a frame length when the quality of the leading portion of the received signal is less than a predetermined threshold. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245126 | Communication Apparatus, Communication Method, and Recording Medium Storing Program - When a communication apparatus (server device) that includes wireless access means and can send content data by using the wireless access means starts sending content data, it calculates a communication band that remains available for the server device to perform communication, so that any content that has a rate equal to or greater than the remaining communication band may not be publicized open to and may not hence be sent to a client device. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245127 | Application Service Level Mediation and Method of Using Same - A method and apparatus for using an application layer demarcation point are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises monitoring end-to-end performance of a network application at an application demarcation point in a network, and mediating between provider infrastructure and customer infrastructure based on results of monitoring. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245128 | INTEGRATED SWITCH TAP ARRANGEMENT WITH VISUAL DISPLAY ARRANGEMENT AND METHODS THEREOF - An arrangement in a network device for monitoring network traffic is provided. The arrangement includes a set of network ports, which includes a set of input network ports for receiving the network traffic and a set of output network ports for outputting the network traffic from the network device. The arrangement also includes a switch chip, wherein the switch chip is configured at least for analyzing the network traffic. The arrangement further includes a set of monitoring ports, which is configured to receive the network traffic from the set of network ports. The arrangement yet also includes a tap module, which is configured at least for intercepting at least part of the network traffic flowing through the network device and forwarding at least part of the network traffic to at least one of the set of monitoring ports. | 10-01-2009 |
20090252047 | DETECTION OF AN UNRESPONSIVE APPLICATION IN A HIGH AVAILABILITY SYSTEM - A method, information processing system, and computer program storage product for determining if an application has become unresponsive. Network traffic at a receiver node is monitored. The receiver node is determined to have generated a window probe response indicating a predetermined window size. A threshold associated with the window size of the receiver node is set in response to the receiver node having generated the window probe response. The window size of the receiver is determined to have been at the predetermined size for at least one of a time period greater than the threshold and a count greater than the threshold. An application associated with the receiver node is classified as unresponsive in response to the window size of the receiver node having been the predetermined size for at least one of a timer period greater than the threshold and a count greater than the threshold. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252048 | Method and Devices For Determining Available Frequency Ranges - A method of determining available frequency ranges for at least one communication device is provided. The method comprises providing a downlink transmission time interval, determining available frequency ranges within a plurality of frequency ranges after the downlink transmission time interval, and providing an uplink transmission time interval after the determining of the available frequency ranges. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252049 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR SPECIFYING THE QUALITY OF SERVICE IN A TRANSMISSION OF DATA PACKETS - A method for specifying the quality of service in a transmission of data packets between a service entity (AF | 10-08-2009 |
20090252050 | TRANSIENT ANALYSIS OF PACKET QUEUING LOSS IN A BROADCAST NETWORK - A receiver monitoring the transmissions of a packet processing device such as a wireless access point analyzes the monitored transmissions to estimate the probability of packet loss due to buffer overflow in the processing device. The loss probability can be estimated for individual packets to follow rapid changes in communication conditions. An indication of the estimated loss probability can be used to adapt the forward error correction (FEC) parameters that are used to generate the packets, thereby improving the reliability of data delivery to a receiver while optimizing the use of communication channel bandwidth. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252051 | Apparatus and method for efficient resource allocation using cognitive radio communication in orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA)-based moving networks - An apparatus and a method for efficient resource allocation using a cognitive radio communication in Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA)-based moving networks are provided. The method includes determining a minimum transmit power value of the MRS, which enables the internal terminal to have a receive Signal to Interference and Noise Ratio (SINR) greater than a first threshold; determining a transmit power value of the MRS by taking into account the determined minimum transmit power value; determining a transmit power value of the MRS per cellular terminal, which is transmittable at maximum while exerting interference less than a second threshold on a corresponding cellular terminal; searching one or more cellular terminals having the maximum transmittable transmit power value determined per cellular terminal greater than the determined transmit power value; and borrowing and allocating a resource allocated to the searched cellular terminal to the internal terminal. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252052 | FLEXIBLE POWER OFFSET ASSIGNMENTS FOR ACQUISITION INDICATOR CHANNELS - A method for wireless communications is provided. a method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes generating at least one adjustable power parameter for an acquisition indicator channel (AICH) and generating at least one adjustable power parameter for an extended acquisition indicator channel (E-AICH). The method also includes generating at least one power offset representing differences between the AICH and the E-AICH. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252053 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING LINK QUALITY - A driver for an IEEE 802.11 wireless network node determines a metric for link quality between the node and a remote node. The nodes communicate using a handshake protocol in which the first node expects to receive an acknowledgement (ACK) of receipt of a data packet from the remote node. The driver provides a measure for: collision induced losses (pc) between the first and remote nodes; a slot being erroneously detected as busy when a successful transmission could have been made (pexp) between the first and remote nodes; and a probability of successful reception of a packet when a collision occurs (pplc) between the first and remote nodes. The measure is based on a number (A) of acknowledgements received from the remote node vis-à-vis a number (T) of packets transmitted to the remote node. The driver can adjust one of carrier sensitivity or node transmission power based on the measure. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252054 | Reduced Power Transmission - Reduced power transmission is described. In embodiments, networked devices communicate via a network connection. A characteristic of the network connection between the networked devices can be determined, and an output amplitude of a signal that is indicative of the communications between the network devices can be adjusted based on the characteristic of the network connection. Power consumption that is utilized for the communications between the network devices is reduced based on the adjustment of the output amplitude of the signal. | 10-08-2009 |
20090257355 | Network node power conservation apparatus, system, and method - A network node self-retirement apparatus, system, and method is provided. The system includes a first network node, a second network node, and a plurality of network nodes. The first network node is configured to monitor a power and traffic level of the first network node and determine an operational weight based thereon. The first network node is further configured to compare the operational weight to a selected operational weight to determine a relationship between the operational weight and the selected operational weight. The first network node is further configured to execute a network node self-retirement procedure when the relationship satisfies a selected condition and to send the operational weight to at least one network node when the relationship does not satisfy the selected condition. The first network node may also determine a network topology based on operational weights received from other network nodes. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257356 | Enhanced channel quality indication reports - A method includes making measurements of a received channel, and transmitting a channel quality report that includes at least one resource block-specific report indicative of a value of a channel quality metric over a bandwidth x, and that further includes an additional report indicative of the value of the channel quality metric over a bandwidth y, where y is greater than x. The channel quality metric may be a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), and the additional channel quality report may be indicative of a difference between a mean value of the SINR of physical resource blocks found by a user equipment to exceed a reporting threshold and a mean value of the SINR over the measurement bandwidth y. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257357 | Efficient Determination Of A Link Performance Parameter - The subject matter disclosed herein provides methods and apparatus, including computer program products, for determining a link performance parameter, such as a supplemental channel characteristic of a wireless link. In one aspect, a base station receives packets from a client station. The base station determines a link performance parameter based on an error rate associated with reception of the packets. The base station then uses the link performance parameter to determine a modulation and coding scheme for use in transmitting packets to the client station. Related systems, apparatus and methods are also described. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257358 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CARRIER IDENTITY DETERMINATION IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methods are described that facilitate the determination and request of resources a node may wish to reserve. The resources include a plurality of carriers that are shared with other nodes. In an approach, the node determines a condition related to the plurality of carriers; creates an ordering of the plurality of resources; and transmits a resource utilization message (RUM) for one or more of the plurality of resources based on the ordering and the condition. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257359 | System and method for tracking performance and service level agreement compliance for multipoint packet services - A system and method for measuring compliance with a service level agreement for communications. A threshold is set for a core information rate and a user network interface core information rate operable to avoid contention. Frame loss is measured on a core network and legs of the network. A determination is made that the service loss agreement is noncompliant in response to determining there is frame loss and a user network interface core information rate has not been exceeded or the core committed information rate has not been exceeded. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257360 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING AND CONTROLLING A VIDEO SIGNAL NETWORK - The embodiments described herein provide a method for operating a video signal network. The method comprises: providing a video signal router having a plurality of input ports for receiving input video signals and a plurality of output ports for transmitting a plurality of output video signals and wherein the router has a plurality of monitorable router status conditions; providing a router control system for controlling the configuration of the router; defining, in the router control system, a plurality of predetermined states, wherein each of the predetermined states comprises at least one condition from the group consisting of: one or more signal conditions relating to one or more of the input and output video signals; and one or more router conditions relating to one or more of the monitorable status conditions; for each of the states, defining at least one action; configuring the video signal router to couple at least some of the input ports to at least some of the output ports; monitoring at least some of the input and output video signals and at least some of the router status conditions; in response to the monitored input and output video signals and router status conditions corresponding to one of the predetermined states, transmitting a notification message to the router control system; and initiating an action corresponding to the transmitted notification message. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257361 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING COMMUNICATION LINK QUALITY - Methods and apparatus for determining the quality of a communication link transmitting a specified packet type are disclosed. The methodology includes configuring first packets, which share transmission characteristics with a specific packet type, such as a Voice over IP packet, such that the first packets experience similar communication link treatment as the specific packet type. The first packets are then transmitted over the communication link to a quality monitoring server located near a termination equipment of the particular communication link. Second packets, which are transmitted by the server in response to the first packets, are received and evaluated to determine the quality of the communication link based on characteristics of the second packets. Corresponding apparatus are also disclosed. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257362 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING RADIO RESOURCES - During a contention-free period, or silent measurement period, of a first wireless communications channel, signals received on a second wireless communications channel are analyzed. The results of the analysis are used to perform advanced radio resource management functions, such as frequency selection, load balancing, or power management. Each of a plurality of wireless channels may be measured in order to perform the advanced radio resource management functions. During the analysis, an energy detect threshold may be lowered to a minimal value. | 10-15-2009 |
20090262653 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE AND CQI REPORT METHOD - Provided is a wireless communication mobile station device by which a throughput can be improved in multicarrier communication. In the device, a group control section ( | 10-22-2009 |
20090262654 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A radio access network apparatus includes: a receiver unit | 10-22-2009 |
20090262655 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND CONTROL CHANNEL ALLOCATION METHOD - A disclosed mobile station includes a storage unit configured to establish a correspondence between an identifier for a downlink Layer-1 control channel associated with a downlink data channel and a physical channel parameter for an uplink Layer-1 control channel and to store the identifier and the physical channel parameter; and a unit configured to determine the physical channel parameter based on the identifier and generate the uplink Layer-1 control channel. A disclosed base station includes a storage unit; a unit configured to measure reception quality based on a signal transmitted from the mobile station, select the physical channel parameter and generate the downlink Layer-1 control channel corresponding to the physical channel parameter; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit control information on the generated downlink Layer-1 control channel. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262656 | METHOD FOR NEW RESOURCE TO COMMUNICATE AND ACTIVATE MONITORING OF BEST PRACTICE METRICS AND THRESHOLDS VALUES - A method is provided for monitoring a resource by utilizing proxy metrics provided by a dependent resource. A primary resource is recognized by a dependent resource, where the dependent resource is dependent upon certain capabilities of the primary resource. Metrics of the primary resource upon which the dependent resource needs are determined. Thresholds related to the metrics of the primary resource are determined. The dependent resource communicates the metrics and related thresholds to a central management tool. The metrics and related thresholds are monitored. Also, the dependent resource may act as a proxy for the primary resource, where the central management tool monitors the metrics and the related thresholds of the primary resource via the dependent resource. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262657 | DATA TRANSFER PATH EVALUATION USING FILTERING AND CHANGE DETECTION - If a condition in a data transfer path is modeled appropriately, then a filter-based approach can be used to provide an estimate of the condition. This permits accurate, real-time estimates of the condition with modest requirements for data processing and memory resources. Change detection can be implemented to control a parameter of the filter. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262658 | Method of Measuring Receive Power of CDMA Mobile Communication System, and CDMA Mobile Communication System - The receive power of uplink signals in a CDMA mobile communication system is measured by prohibiting a mobile station from transmitting an uplink signal including a frame over a first channel during a predetermined transmission prohibition period, and measuring a receive power of uplink signals at a base station transmitted from each of the mobile stations located in a cell during the prohibition period. Another method of measuring the receive power includes measuring a first receive power of uplink signals at a base station from each mobile station located in a cell, and measuring each second receive power of uplink signal including a frame only over a first channel transmitted from each mobile station, and then calculating a total receive power of uplink signals excluding frames over the first channel by subtracting respective second receive powers from the first receive power. | 10-22-2009 |
20090268619 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A COGNITIVE RADIO HAVING ADAPTABLE CHARACTERISTICS - Systems and methods for configuring a network of radios for dynamic spectrum access are described. A network radio can include hardware and/or software modules for detecting a radio environment and negotiating common communications channels with a plurality of other radios in the network. Network radio behavior can be defined by a plurality of predefined policies which are used in combination with the information about the radio environment to select common operating parameters. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268620 | COMMUNICATION CONNECTING METHOD, COMMUNICATION CONNECTING DEVICE AND STORAGE MEDIUM WITH PROGRAM STORED THEREIN - A user is prompted to turn on power supply of a device to be connected with a screen. When it is detected that the power supply is turned on, the screen is displayed for confirming a user whether the device whose power supply is turned on should be connected or not. Thus, connection is carried out. With such a method, a communication connection method capable of selecting a device to be connected reliably is provided. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268621 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS AND MULTIPLEX NUMBER CONTROLLING METHOD - A spatial multiplex number controlling method and others wherein streams can be separated for each of receivers and the transmission efficiency can be improved. In a receiving apparatus, a PER is calculated from a history of CRC test results per stream multiplex number. A reception quality and an offset corresponding to the calculated PER are fed hack to a transmitting apparatus. The transmitting apparatus assigns, based on the fed-back reception quality and offset, the streams, thereby controlling the stream multiplex number. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268622 | Route Tracing Program Configured to Detect Particular Network Element Making Type of Service Modification - One or more network elements that modify type of service values in a network are detected by sending route tracing messages having increasing time-to-live values and a designated type of service value from a first network element to a second network element. Type of service values are monitored in respective time exceeded messages received from respective network elements on a given network path between the first network element and the second network element responsive to the route tracing messages. At least a particular one of the network elements on the given network path that has made a modification in type of service value relative to the designated type of service value is identified, based on the monitored type of service values in the respective time exceeded messages. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268623 | EFFICIENT PROBABILISTIC COUNTING SCHEME FOR STREAM-EXPRESSION CARDINALITIES - In one embodiment, a method of monitoring a network. The method includes, at each node of a fixed set, constructing a corresponding vector of M components based on data packets received at the node during a time period, M being an integer greater than 1, the fixed set being formed of some nodes of the network; and, based on the constructed vectors, estimating how many of the received data packets have been received by all of the nodes of the set or estimating how many flows of the received data packets have data packets that have passed through all of the nodes of the set. The constructing includes updating a component of the vector of one of the nodes in response to the one of the nodes receiving a data packet. The updating includes selecting the component for updating by hashing a property of the data packet received by the one of the nodes. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268624 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MEASUREMENT AND FEEDBACK OF CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR INFORMATION - User equipment may receive configuration information indicating whether the user equipment provides feedback of channel quality indicator (CQI) information in virtual resource block mode or physical resource block mode. If the configuration information indicates that the user equipment provides feedback in virtual resource block mode, the user equipment may calculate the CQI information for virtual resource blocks. The user equipment may feed back the CQI information for the virtual resource blocks to a Node B. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268625 | Communication Method and a Radio System - The network system of an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing radio system measures a quality of a signal from a user terminal. At least one compared property of the signal is compared with a predetermined threshold. The comparison includes a comparison involving the measured quality. A number of sub-channels for the user terminal is decreased if each comparison operation indicates that a compared property is at the predetermined threshold or within a predetermined range of the threshold. A control signal about a decrease is transmitted to the user terminal. The user terminal transmits with the decreased number of sub-channels as a response to the control signal. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268626 | SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT WITH TEST MODE - A semiconductor integrated circuit is provided which includes: A signal input terminals which include control input pads, A being an integer greater than or equal to 2; an internal circuit; a clock signal input terminal to which a clock signal is input; and an input signal control block which, in a test mode, separates time-division multiplexed data having a multiplicity of X, the time-division multiplexed data being input from A/X signal input terminals among the A signal input terminals, into individual data in accordance with the clock signal, and outputs the separated individual data to the internal circuit, X being an integer greater than or equal to 2. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268627 | METHOD FOR RING MANAGEMENT IN AN ETHERNET NETWORK COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF REDUNDANCY MANAGERS - Test packets (TP | 10-29-2009 |
20090268628 | Synchronous Circuit Synthesis Using An Asynchronous Specification - A method for specifying and synthesizing a synchronous digital circuit by first accepting a specification of an asynchronous system in which stored values are updated according to a set of state transition rules. For instance, the state transition rules are specified as a Term Rewriting System (TRS) in which each rule specifies a number of allowable state transitions, and includes a logical precondition on the stored values and a functional specification of the stored values after a state transition in terms of the stored values prior to the state transition. The specification of the asynchronous circuit is converted into a specification of a synchronous circuit in which a number of state transitions can occur during each clock period. The method includes identifying sets of state transitions, for example by identifying sets of TRS rules, that can occur during a single clocking period and forming the specification of the synchronous circuit to allow any of the state transitions in a single set to occur during any particular clocking period. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268629 | PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS - A packet processing apparatus includes a packet buffer unit that temporarily holds packet data, a packet processing unit that processes packet data output from the packet buffer unit, a clock supply unit that supplies a clock signal to the packet processing unit, and a control unit that detects a buffer vacant time indicating a time during which no packet data exists in the packet buffer unit based on an accumulation amount of the packet data in the packet buffer unit, and controls an operational state of the clock supply unit in accordance with the buffer vacant time. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268630 | SIGNALING OF UNUSED RESOURCES - A user device on a wireless network includes a receiver, a noise detector and a noise determiner. The receiver receives downlink data communications from a base station that indicates an allocation of time/frequency resource blocks at least to user devices that are communicating with the base station. The noise detector measures noise in a time/frequency resource block, comprising plural time/frequency bins, that is not allocated to one of the user devices. The noise determiner determines a level of interfering noise based on noise in the resource block that is not allocated to one of the user devices. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268631 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING FORWARD LOAD IN SECTOR, CONTROL METHOD, AND CONTROL APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for measuring a forward load in a sector includes: acquiring the amount of best-effort (BE) service data respectively transferred by each BE service user in a sector in a predetermined period of time; acquiring a time used by each BE service user for transferring BE service data in the predetermined period of time; and calculating a user equivalent rate of the BE service in the sector for the forward load by using the used time and the amount of the BE service data. The measurement apparatus includes a data amount acquiring unit, a time length acquiring unit, and a rate calculating unit. The measurement method and apparatus can measure a forward load of a BE service in a sector accurately. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268632 | Method and Apparatus for Measurement, Analysis, and Optimization of Content Delivery - An apparatus and method for measurement, analysis, and optimization of content delivery over a communications network is presented. In one embodiment, the apparatus detects data packets en route over a communications network. The detected data packets are read by the apparatus, combined into application messages, and further combined into user centric events. The events are analyzed to identify metrics and statistics relating to the delivery of content over a communications network and the experience of the end user. The metrics and statistics are saved in a data storage area. When the metrics exceed a configurable threshold, the apparatus provides real-time notification of content delivery problems or end user experience problems. Alternatively, the system can take action to proactively prevent anticipated content delivery problems or end user experience problems. | 10-29-2009 |
20090274057 | Systems, Methods and Software for Identifying a Preferred Egress Gateway in a Bypass Network for Accessing a Content Server in Another Network - A bypass computer network has multiple egress gateways for communicating with one or more content servers in other computer network(s). The bypass network is configured to test the performance between each egress gateway and a content server, and to identify at least one preferred egress gateway for accessing the content server based on the testing. The preferred egress gateway may perform Network Address Translation to translate the source IP address of a client seeking data from the content server to a publicly addressable IP assigned to the preferred egress gateway. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274058 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HEARTBEAT SIGNAL GENERATION - A system and method for heartbeat signal generation are provided. The method includes determining a communication condition and generating heartbeat signals based on the determined communication condition. The system includes a plurality of communication cells and at least one communication device configured to generate heartbeat signals. A rate of generating the heartbeat signals is based on one of (i) a service priority or user group and (ii) communication requirements for a network type for each of the plurality of communication cells. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274059 | Method and system for switching antenna and channel assignments in broadband wireless networks - A method and apparatus for antenna switching, grouping, and channel assignments in wireless communication systems. The invention allows multiuser diversity to be exploited with simple antenna operations, therefore increasing the capacity and performance of wireless communications systems. Channel characteristics indicative of signal reception quality for downlink or bi-directional traffic for each channel/antenna resource combination are measured or estimated at a subscriber. Corresponding channel characteristic information is returned to the base station. Channel characteristics information may also be measured or estimated for uplink or bi-directional signals received at each of multiple receive antenna resources. The base station employs channel allocation logic to assign uplink, downlink and/or bi-directional channels for multiple subscribers based on channel characteristics measured and/or estimated for the uplink, downlink and/or bi-directional channels. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274060 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTE MONITORING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A technique for combining operations of a wireless access point with a remote probe. An access point links a wireless client to a wireless switch. A remote probe captures wireless packets, appends radio information, and forwards packets to a remote observer for analysis. In an embodiment, the observer may provide a protocol-level debug. A system according to the technique can, for example, accomplish concurrent in-depth packet analysis of one or more interfaces on a wireless switch. The system can also, for example, augment embedded security functions by forwarding selected packets to a remote Intrusion Detection System (IDS). In an embodiment, filters on the probes may reduce overhead. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274061 | COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIA FOR WIRELESS OFDM COMMUNICATION - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 11-05-2009 |
20090279443 | ANALYZING SYSTEM OF NETWORK TRAFFIC ACCORDING TO VARIABLE COMMUNICATION'S MASS AND ANALYZING METHOD THEREOF - An analyzing system for measuring and analyzing communication traffic of a network and an analyzing method using the analyzing system are provided. The system includes a data measurement module configured to capture data that influences a change in communication traffic in a network; a measured data functionizing module configured to obtain a probability density or a cumulative distribution; a distribution function database configured to store function information on theoretically generalized distribution; a parameter decision module configured to apply the data to the function information and to decide parameters; and a suitability check module configured to select information similar to the probability density or the cumulative distribution from among the function information. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279444 | Method and apparatus for discovering, negotiating, and provisioning end-to-end SLAs between multiple service provider domains - Domains (multiple collaborating service providers) create service offerings between pairs of edge nodes that interconnect with other domains in the network. The service offerings may specify the available bandwidth, quality of service, reliability, available security, price, subscriber and service contextual specific and other SLA information. When a new service is to be created, the service definition is used along with information about the available service offerings to determine a set of networks to implement the service. Information associated with the service offerings may be flooded to all other networks. Alternatively, the service offering information may be provided to a trusted third party (SLA broker) which may provide SLA services on the network to select sets of domains to implement inter-domain services, and may also proxy to set up the service for the SLA requesting party. A hybrid approach may also be used wherein some SLA information is flooded and other information is retained in secret and provided only to the SLA broker. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279445 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, AND BASE STATION AND TERMINALS USED THEREIN - A communications system of the present invention is an OFDMA system ( | 11-12-2009 |
20090279446 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND CQI GENERATION METHOD - It is possible to provide a radio communication device and a CQI generation method capable of reducing the total number of CQI when reporting CQI for each level in a hierarchized RB. In the device and the method, the RB hierarchy is made as follows: a plurality of groups each consisting of the same number of RB are made to be one level, a group consisting of a plenty of RB is made to be a lower level, and a group consisting of a small number of RB is made to be a higher level. UE reports CQI for each level to Node B according to the RB reception quality at a longer cycle for lower level and at a shorter cycle for a higher level. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279447 | Antenna Selection with Frequency-Hopped Sounding Reference Signals - The embodiments of the invention describe a method for antenna selection in a wireless communication network. The network includes a transceiver having a set of antennas. The transceiver is configured to transmit a frequency-hopped sounding reference signal (SRS) over a subband from a subset of antennas at a time. The transceiver transmits the frequency-hopped SRS from subsets of antennas in the set of antennas alternately. In response to the transmitting, the transceiver receives information indicative of an optimal subset of antennas and transmits data from the optimal subset of antennas. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279448 | QUASI-OMNI TRAINING IN CHANNEL TIME ALLOCATION PERIOD - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for association in contention access periods and to a method for multi-cycle training in channel time allocation periods. | 11-12-2009 |
20090285108 | Method and Apparatus for Providing QoS for MP Subscribers - A method for providing Quality of Service (QoS) for a Multilink Protocol (MP) subscriber at the subscriber level is described. In one embodiment of the invention, a network element fragments a packet destined for a subscriber into multiple fragments and adds any necessary encapsulations (e.g., MP protocol encapsulation, Point-to-Point protocol encapsulation, layer 2 encapsulations). The network element links the fragments together to form a MP batch packet. The network element sends the MP batch packet to a single egress queue associated with the subscriber. The fragments are distributively transmitted across the links associated with the subscriber. Other methods and apparatuses are also described herein. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285109 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ADAPTIVE EFFECTIVE CINR REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present disclosure allow a MS to dynamically adjust the mapping of a physical CINR measurement to an effective CINR. For some embodiments, an effective CINR value may be generated based on a physical CINR value and a measured packet error rate (PER) over one or more time periods. By dynamically adjusting the effective CINR reported back to a BS, the MS may allow the BS to select a coding scheme that effectively compensates for changes in channel conditions, which may improve system performance. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285110 | TRANSMISSION PATH QUALITY MEASURING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, QUALITY MEASUREMENT METHOD, AND QUALITY MEASURING PROGRAM - The present invention provides a communication quality measuring device, a communication quality measurement method, and a communication quality measuring program by which the reliability and accuracy of the results of measurement carried out on a transmission path are improved, and comparisons between the results of measurement at one time and the results of measurement at another time or between one flow and another flow are made easier. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285111 | METHOD OF CONNECTION RE-ESTABLISHMENT AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of connection re-establishment for a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes starting a radio link monitoring timer or a radio link monitoring counter, and stopping the radio link monitoring timer or the radio link monitoring counter if it is still running when a radio resource control (RRC) connection re-establishment procedure is triggered. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285112 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A RELAY PATH IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A method of managing a relay path in a mobile multi-hop relay (MMR) environment is provided. A relay station (RS) discovers a link quality of neighboring RSs, which is necessary for managing a path, and reports the link quality to a base station (BS). The BS selects an optimal path having a tree-structure based on the reported link quality and informs the RS. Thus, wireless resources can be efficiently used. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285113 | AUTONOMOUS CARRIER SELECTION FOR FEMTOCELLS - A carrier for a femtocell is selected from a set of carriers available to femtocells. The femto node determines a preference order for the set and measures received signal strength (RSS) for each carrier. The femto node determines a least interference carrier from the set based on the RSS for each carrier, then defines a selected carrier for the femtocell by comparing the RSS of the least interference carrier to the RSS of other carriers in the set. The selected carrier may have a RSS larger than or equal to the RSS of the least interference carrier offset by a predefined margin. The comparisons may be performed in the preference order. The set available to femto nodes may be a subset of all carriers available to a combination of femtocells and macrocells and one or more of the carriers available to femtocells also may be a carrier available to macrocells. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285114 | Communication Apparatus, Communication Method, Program, and Communication System - A communication apparatus includes a receiving unit that receives a data frame including a plurality of pieces of unit data and transmitted from a communication partner; a determining unit that determines whether there is data loss, for each piece of unit data included in the data frame received by the receiving unit; a transmission right acquiring unit that acquires a transmission right; and a generating unit that generates grant data for granting the transmission right acquired by the transmission right acquiring unit to the communication partner, when the determining unit determines that at least any one of the pieces of unit data has been lost. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285115 | INFORMATION COLLECTING APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE INFORMATION COLLECTING APPARATUS, NETWORK APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE NETWORK APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An information collecting apparatus which is capable of reliably collecting information without troubling a user or a service person even when there is no device capable of playing the role of a server to collect information on its behalf. The apparatus collects information on network devices connected to a network. The collected information is transmitted to a server. When the apparatus cannot continue information collection, it is determined whether or not any network device is provided with the information collecting function. If any of them is provided, the apparatus instructs the device to execute the function, whereas if none of them is provided with the function, the apparatus instructs the device to transmit information on the device itself to the server. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285116 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND OPERATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments for bandwidth allocation methods, detecting interference with other systems, and/or redeploying in alternate bandwidth are described. Higher bandwidth channels may be deployed at channel boundaries ( | 11-19-2009 |
20090290502 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING INFORMATION VIA SELECTION OF RESOURCES USED FOR TRANSMISSION - Techniques for transmitting information in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, information may be conveyed based on specific resources used to send a signal, e.g., a pilot. A pseudo-random function may receive the information to convey via the signal and possibly other information and may provide pseudo-random values, which may be used to select the resources to use to send the signal. In one design, a transmitter (e.g., a base station for a sector) may determine first information (e.g., a sector ID) to convey via a pilot and may also determine second information for absolute time (e.g. a pilot cycle index). The transmitter may determine resources (e.g., slots) to use to send the pilot based on the first and second information and possibly based further on a PN offset assigned to the sector. The transmitter may transmit the pilot in the determined resources. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290503 | Controlling Access to a Destination in a Data Processing Network - A method and system of controlling access to a destination ( | 11-26-2009 |
20090290504 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING ATTENUATION OF DOWNLINK CHANNEL IN BASEBAND EPCN SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for detecting attenuation of a downlink channel in a baseband Ethernet Passive Coaxial Network (EPCN) system. The method includes: instructing, by a Coax Line Terminal (CLT) in a downlink time period, a Coax Network Unit (CNU) to measure a signal received by the CNU; and obtaining, by the CLT, the attenuation of the downlink channel of the CNU according to a measuring result sent by the CNU. Through the solution provided by the present invention, it is possible to obtain the attenuation of the downlink from the CLT to any CNU in the EPCN system, which facilitates engineers to locate problems and settle network troubles. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290505 | DETECTION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR POSITIONING INTERFERENCE - The present invention discloses a detection method, apparatus and system for positioning interference. The method, being applied in an EPCN including a CLT and at least one CNU connected to the CLT, includes: a CLT receiving from a CNU a packet at each uplink time slot, each CNU having a unique CNU identifier and a unique uplink time slot and determining when receiving a packet in error the CNU identifier corresponding to the uplink time slot for receiving the packet in error to position the CNU being interfered, so that the network management server can acquire physical information of the user having installed the CNU, and further accurately determine the interference source and quickly remove the failure point. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290506 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - The present invention relates to a telecommunications apparatus and a method, a storage medium, and a program for determining whether or not an other side communicating apparatus is near in a network. In a transmitting apparatus, a transmitting unit transmits a sending-message, and a control unit receives a response message to the sending-message, which includes acknowledgement information based on shared data and transmission information in the sending-message. The transmitting apparatus also includes a first judging unit that judges whether a response time of the acknowledgement message is less than a predetermined time. A receiving apparatus includes a generating unit that generates the acknowledgment information and transmits the response message to the transmitting apparatus. | 11-26-2009 |
20090296591 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - When communicating with a second wireless station, a first wireless station judges, based on link-related information received form the second wireless station and link-related information extracted from a signal transmitted by a fourth wireless station, whether a transmission link from the third wireless station to the fourth wireless station and a transmission link from the first wireless station to the second wireless station can be concurrently established without interference with each other. If judging affirmatively, the first wireless station transmits a signal to the second wireless station in synchronization with a signal transmitted by the third wireless station to the fourth wireless station. Preferably, when the first wireless station having a concurrent transmission control function communicates with the second wireless station having a interference reduction function, the first wireless station controls the interference reduction function of the second wireless station based on the link-related information received from the second wireless station and interference information, such that the transmission link from the third wireless station to the fourth wireless station and the transmission link from the first wireless station to the second wireless station can be established at the same time without interference with each other. If judging that the concurrent transmission is available, the first wireless station transmits a signal to the second wireless station according to a timing that overlaps transmission of a signal from the third wireless station to the fourth wireless station. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296592 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MEASURING AND REPORTING DATA GAP FROM WITHIN AN ANALYSIS TOOL - Network data gap is determined and reported to enable a user to validate that all the traffic that was intended to be monitored is being monitored in monitoring and/or troubleshooting tools for observation of network traffic and network installation and maintenance. Span port oversubscription, incomplete span configuration, incorrectly placed network taps and monitoring device packet drop may thereby be detected and reported as data gap. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296593 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MEASURING AND REPORTING DATA GAP FROM WITHIN AN ANALYSIS TOOL - Network data gap is determined and reported to enable a user to validate that all the traffic that was intended to be monitored is being monitored in monitoring and/or troubleshooting tools for observation of network traffic and network installation and maintenance. Span port oversubscription, incomplete span configuration, incorrectly placed network taps and monitoring device packet drop may thereby be detected and reported as data gap. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296594 | ESTIMATING CARDINALITY DISTRIBUTIONS IN NETWORK TRAFFIC - In one embodiment, a method of monitoring a network. The method includes: receiving, from each host of a set of two or more hosts of the network, a corresponding vector of M components constructed based on data packets received at the host during a time period, M being an integer greater than 1; and, based on the constructed vectors, using an expectation-maximization algorithm to estimate a cardinality distribution for the hosts in the set, wherein constructing a vector includes updating a component of the vector of the corresponding host in response to the corresponding host receiving a data packet, the updating including selecting the component for updating by hashing one or more fields of the data packet received by the corresponding host. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296595 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING FEEDBACK OVERHEAD IN WIRELESS NETWORKS USING CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS - A method for reducing feedback overhead in a wireless communications system is described. Channel quality indicator (CQI) values corresponding to a measured channel quality are received from one or more mobile communications devices. The mobile communications devices to be scheduled at a future time are estimated. CQI values are requested from the mobile communications devices that are estimated to be scheduled at a future time. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296596 | NETWORK QUALITY MEASUREMENT BASED ON QUALITY MEASUREMENT PACKET - An apparatus for measuring network quality by use of packets exchanged between a transmission apparatus and a reception apparatus serving as agents arranged in a network includes a unit configured to acquire from the reception apparatus a transmission timing corresponding to a worst quality that is determined by the reception apparatus based on quality data collection packets, the quality data collection packets being transmitted from the transmission apparatus at transmission timing that is successively changed, a unit configured to notify the transmission apparatus of the acquired transmission timing as a transmission timing for transmitting a quality measurement packet, a unit configured to acquire quality information from the reception apparatus, the quality information being measured by the reception apparatus based on the quality measurement packet transmitted from the transmission apparatus, and a unit configured to check the network quality based on the acquired quality information. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296597 | DETECTION PROGRAM, RELAY DEVICE, AND DETECTING METHOD - Only when a request formed of a plurality of request packets obtained by dividing the request is reconstructed, the request is transmitted to a survey target node that returns a response formed of a plurality of response packets obtained by dividing the response. When no response packet has been received at all from the survey target node, it is determined that any of the request packets has been discarded on a first route from a surveying node as a transmission source of the request to the survey target node. When one or more response packets have been received from the survey target node but the response cannot be reconstructed, it is determined that any of the response packets transmitted from the survey target node has been discarded on a second route from the survey target node to the surveying node as the transmission source of the request packets. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296598 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING CHARACTERISTICS OF A WIRELESS NETWORK - Characteristics about one or more wireless access devices in a wireless network, whether known or unknown entities, can be determined using a system and method according to the present invention. An observation is made of the activity over a Wireless Area Network (WLAN). Based on this activity, changes in state of wireless access devices within the WLAN can be observed and monitored. These changes in state could be indicative of normal operation of the WLAN, or they may indicate the presence of an unauthorized user. In the latter case, an alert can be sent so that appropriate action may be taken. Additionally, ad hoc networks can be detected that may be connected to a wireless access point. | 12-03-2009 |
20090303888 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING WIRELESS NETWORKS THROUGH FEEDBACK AND ADAPTATION - A method for optimizing a wireless network comprises obtaining local measurement and feedback data from a single node in the network; estimating a state of the node by using the local measurement and feedback data in an analysis framework model of the wireless network; applying the estimated state of the node to a local control law to determine one or more local protocol parameter updates for the node; and transmitting the one or more local protocol parameter updates to the node in the network. The method can further comprise obtaining global measurement and feedback data from one or more additional nodes in the network; estimating a state of the one or more additional nodes by using the global measurement and feedback data in the analysis framework model; applying the estimated state of the one or more additional nodes to the local control law; applying the estimated state of the one or more additional nodes to a global control law to determine one or more network-wide protocol parameter updates; and transmitting the network-wide protocol parameter updates to the network. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303889 | Method of uplink synchronization establishment based on the united transmission technology and the transmission matrix thereof - The present invention discloses an establishment method of uplink synchronization based on the joint transmission technology. User equipment (UE) first performs channel estimation for the downlink channel which is close to the uplink channel and determines the transmission timing of the transmission signals of uplink synchronous time slot. What's more, based on the estimation result of the downlink channel, UE constructs the transmission matrix A as well as the matrix d that is related to the signals originally intended to be sent, and then solves d=Ae+n, obtaining the converted signal e, which is used to replace the original uplink synchronous sequence for transmission, during transmission process, the method employs the transmission timing that is determined by step (b); the base station estimates the received signals by a correlator, obtaining the timing of uplink signals and deducing the time adjustments for UE; finally the network instructs UE to complete the adjustments for the transmission timing of uplink signals, and the establishment of uplink synchronization is completed. With this method, the base station within the mobile communication system can precisely instruct UE to complete the establishment process of uplink synchronization. The present invention also discloses a transmission matrix in TD-SCDMA system and its generation method thereof. The transmission matrix can be used to eliminate channel time delay feature after the conversion of uplink synchronous sequence. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303890 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMAND PROCESSING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for command processing in a wireless communication system, comprising receiving Activate or Deactivate commands, determining commands and determining state of the access terminal. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303891 | Mobile Station and Method Therefor Using Doppler and Cell Transition History for Cell Evaluation in a Fast Moving Environment - There is disclosed, a mobile station, and a method for candidate cell evaluation in a fast moving environment. The method includes receiving a plurality of transmissions from a plurality of candidate cells, where each of the plurality of transmissions corresponds to one of the plurality candidate cells. The method further includes measuring signal strengths of the plurality of transmissions and determining change in the signal strengths of the plurality of transmissions. The method further includes calculating a weighting factor corresponding to the plurality of candidate cells based on the measured signal strengths, the change in the signal strength, and a Doppler and assigning priority levels to the plurality of candidate cells based on the calculated weighting factor. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303892 | ESTIMATION METHOD, DEVICE, AND PROGRAM, AND NETWORK MEASURING SYSTEM - An inversion of a packet transmission sequence number is observed in a predetermined sampling measurement. The number of sampled sequence numbers greater than the sequence number upon the inversion is measured as an inversion degree. A number of packet losses or a loss ratio is estimated according to the inversion degree under the estimated full sampling measurement and the inversion degree observed under a predetermined sampling measurement. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303893 | METOD OF PERFORMING STATUS REPORT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing reception status report in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method of performing reception status report in a specific protocol layer of a user equipment which receives data transmitted from a base station in a mobile communication system includes performing reception status report of at least one first data block in the protocol layer in accordance with a first value of at least one parameter, the at least one first data block being transmitted from the base station, changing the first value of the at least one parameter to a second set value if a previously set event occurs or if at least one condition is satisfied and performing reception status report of at least one second data block in accordance with a second set value of the at least one parameter, the at least one second data block being transmitted from the base station. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303894 | Click Quality Classification and Delivery - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a packet flow associated with a click-through from an end user node destined for an advertiser server; extracting information from the packet flow; analyzing the extracted information to determine one or more characteristics of the packet flow; and classifying the packet flow based on the determined one or more characteristics; modifying the packet flow to include classification information to provide classification information indicating a quality level of the click-through. The packet flow may include a hypertext transfer protocol GET request. Modifying the packet flow may include adding a tag with classification information that indicates a likelihood of fraudulent click behavior associated with the packet flow. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303895 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION AND MONITORING - A wireless communication system and method for wireless communication in a multi-hop network. A first preamble is transmitted using a first repetition cycle. Monitoring for a second preamble is done in a second repetition cycle. The first repetition cycle is different than the second repetition cycle. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303896 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING RANDOM ACCESS WINDOW CONFIGURATION - An approach is provided for providing random access window configuration by estimating a processing time margin for processing random access preambles received in one or more random access channels. The estimated processing time margin is then used to offset the respective random access window configuration. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303897 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VOICE-OVER-IP CALL RECORDING AND ANALYSIS - A method and computer-readable medium for obtaining information associated with a VoIP communication session includes tapping the computer network passively to obtain signaling and media information in a first format, separating the signaling and media information, determining transport information from at least one of the signaling and media information, transcoding the media information to a second format, and storing the transcoded media information in the second format. The media information includes data, voice, audio, and/or video information. A system obtain information associated with a VoIP communication session on a computer network includes a tapping device to passively tap the computer network to obtain signaling and media information in a first format, a processing device to transcode the media information from the first format to a second format, separate the signaling information from the media information, and determine transport information from at least one of the signaling and media information, and a storage device to store the transcoded media information in the second format. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303898 | Determining of Telegram Lengths - Described is a method for determining a telegram length in an operating apparatus for communicating between the operating apparatus and a field device via a network. The method comprises composing a first telegram in the operating apparatus. The first telegram comprises a predeterminable first telegram length, and the composed first telegram is despatched via the network to the field device. After the first telegram has been despatched, the operating apparatus waits for the receipt of a second telegram, which second telegram is received by the operating apparatus via the network. After successful receipt of the second telegram, the first telegram length is increased by a predeterminable value. Increasing the value takes place until receiving the second telegram fails. After the receipt of the second telegram has failed, the first telegram length that has resulted in successfully receiving the second telegram is provided. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303899 | DISCOVERY OF MULTIPLE-PARENT DEPENDENCIES IN NETWORK PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS - Multiple parent-dependencies are identified for messages that are received on a network that includes nodes that are configured to avoid the conventional strictly-sequential communications techniques and protocols, in order to accelerate network performance. If a network is known, or assumed, to include intermediate/proxy nodes that are configured to provide acceleration, access control, and other services, the system that analyzes traffic on the network is configured to assume that these nodes may/will provide such features, and thereby introduce multiple dependencies among the messages communicated across the network. For each message transmitted from a forwarding node, messages received at the forwarding node are assessed to distinguish messages from the destination node and messages from an other node, and a dependency is defined for each. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303900 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving Channel Quality Information (CQI) in a communication system. A Base Station (BS) transmits, to a Subscriber Station (SS), a request for CQI of a resource region corresponding to a frequency reuse factor K, which is designated by the BS. The BS then receives, from the SS, the CQI of the resource region corresponding to a channel quality measured by the SS. The channel quality is measured by the SS by measuring a boosted reference signal and compensating the boosted reference signal for a non-boosted signal. | 12-10-2009 |
20090310493 | COMMUNICATION UNIT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A transmission-time measurement section ( | 12-17-2009 |
20090310494 | REAL-TIME NETWORK MEASUREMENT - A method of operation within a device coupled to a network. A first set of data is received from a first data path of the network. A first set of measurement information is identified from the first set of data, and a quality of the first data path is determined based on the first set of measurement information. A second set of data is then selectively transmitted via either the first data path or a second data path of the network, based on the quality of the first data path. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310495 | Session Control System, Session Control Method, and Mobile Terminal - [Problems] Mobile communication enabling continuation of TCP communication while maintaining the quality in a real-time communication. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310496 | MONITORING THRESHOLD FUNCTIONS OVER DISTRIBUTED DATA SETS - A method for distributed computing includes processing multiple sets of data at respective computing nodes ( | 12-17-2009 |
20090310497 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION SCHEME SETTING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - [Object] To ensure a maximum data transfer rate to achieve an improvement in throughput. [Solving Means] A CPU 114 determines whether or not time-dependent interference is present during communication with a communication partner. When it is determined that time-dependent interference is present, a PHY mode to be used in each zone is determined for each communication partner on the basis of transmission line state information or packet error detection information received via a CPU I/F register | 12-17-2009 |
20090310498 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A packetizer sectionalizes data to be transmitted into predetermined units and packetizes them into packets. A permuter permutes the order of the packets created by the packetizer based on a designated interleave length and sends out the packets to a network. A continuous loss information collector collects information on continuous packet loss occurring on the network. An interleave length determiner determines an interleave length based on the information on continuous packet loss, collected by the continuous loss information collector and designates the interleave length for the permuter. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310499 | DATA COMMUNICATION WITH CONTROL OF THE TRANSMISSION RATE OF DATA - A data communication network, includes a transmitting node; a receiving node; and a connection between the transmitting node and the receiving node. The receiving node is arranged to process data received from the transmitting mode via the connection. The network further includes a first measuring unit which is connected with a measuring input to the receiving node. The first measuring unit can determine a first parameter value forming a measure for the data processing capacity of the receiving node. A calculator has an input connected to an output of the measuring unit and can derive from the first parameter value a second parameter value forming a measure for the transmission rate of data from the transmitting node to the receiving node. A transmission control unit has a transmission control input connected to a calculator output and a transmission control output connected to the transmitting node. The transmission control unit can control a transmission of data via the connection based on the determined measure for the transmission rate. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310500 | DELAY TIME MEASURING APPARATUS, COMPUTER READABLE RECORD MEDIUM ON WHICH DELAY TIME MEASURING PROGRAM IS RECORDED, AND DELAY TIME MEASURING METHOD - In a delay time measuring apparatus a sequence number, data length, and receiving time of a data packet transmitted from a source unit to a destination unit are stored in a storage section. In addition, an ACK number and receiving time of an ACK packet returned from the destination unit to the source unit are stored in the storage section. After that, a calculation section obtains an ACK packet an ACK number of which is equal to a value obtained by adding data length of a second data packet of two successive data packets transmitted without waiting for the ACK packet to a sequence number of the second data packet of the two successive data packets from the storage section. Then the calculation section calculates round trip time from receiving time of the second data packet of the two successive data packets and receiving time of the ACK packet obtained. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310501 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for generating performance measurements for a wireless network is provided. The method may comprise: obtaining, at a base station, performance measurements and location data from a mobile device, storing, at the base station and based on the location data, at least a portion of the obtained measurements to at least one virtual geographic bin of a storage array, wherein each virtual geographic bin corresponds to a different geographic area within a cell serviced by the base station, aggregating, at the base station, at least a portion the measurements stored in each virtual geographic bin into one or more location-based performance measurements, and transmitting, from the base station, at least a portion of the location-based performance measurements to a network manager. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310502 | Device and associated method for crosstalk estimation - The present invention relates to a crosstalk estimation device for estimating crosstalk between communication lines in a precoding group. The crosstalk estimation device comprises transmission means for transmitting a pilot sequence and reception means for receiving error feedback on one or more communication lines in the precoding group. The crosstalk estimation device further comprises crosstalk estimation means for combining the pilot sequence with the error feedback in order to obtain a crosstalk estimation between the communication lines. The device further comprises selection means for selecting a subset of one or more communication lines from the precoding group. The transmission means are adapted to transmit the pilot sequence only on the subset. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310503 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING INTERACTION BETWEEN DRX CYCLES AND PAGING CYCLES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate managing interaction between paging and discontinuous reception (DRX) cycles for users operating in a communication system. As described herein, a connected mode user having an associated DRX cycle can modify its schedule for paging reception to minimize unnecessary periods of activity. For example, a user can initially schedule monitoring of paging occasions that coincide with periods of activity associated with the DRX cycle of the user. If such paging occasions are not sufficient to reach a minimum required number of monitored paging occasions, additional paging occasions can be monitored as needed by scheduling additional periods of activity and/or extending periods of activity specified in the DRX cycle. Additionally or alternatively, a network can synchronize a connected mode DRX cycle associated with a user with an idle mode paging cycle for the user, thereby providing power and performance benefits with low complexity. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310504 | PACKET CLASSIFICATION - An apparatus for classifying a data packet includes an interface for receiving the data packet; a classification controller for parsing the data packet to identify a plurality of data items required for classifying the data packet; memory for storing a set of range identifiers for each data item in the data packet corresponding to a rule range defined in the rule sets; and a controller for performing a preliminary test of at least one of the data items to determine whether any of the data item's values match known frequently-occurring values for that data item. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310505 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MULTI-SECTOR VELOCITY MOBILE VELOCITY AND DOPPLER ESTIMATE FOR SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for estimating velocity and Doppler frequency comprising acquiring a first plurality of time-of-arrival (TOA) measurements from a first plurality of base stations at a first time; acquiring a second and a third plurality of TOA measurements from a second and third plurality of base stations at a second time and a third time; determining a plurality of line-of-sight distance measurements using the first, second and third pluralities of TOA measurements; determining a plurality of velocity estimates and a plurality of angle of arrival (AOA) estimates, using the plurality of LOS distance measurements; determining a plurality of Doppler frequency estimates using the plurality of velocity estimates and the plurality of AOA estimates; and using a processor for determining an average Doppler frequency estimate over a plurality of sectors, wherein the first, second and third pluralities of TOA measurements are acquired over the plurality of sectors. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310506 | SWITCHING SCHEMES FOR MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - Signals from multiple antennas are evaluated in a wireless device having one receiver chain and the antenna receiving the highest quality signals is selected. The signal quality from the multiple antennas may be evaluated using the short symbols in the preamble or the beacon signals and the antennas dynamically selected to improve the performance of the wireless communications device. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310507 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING INFORMATION ABOUT FORWARD CHANNEL STATUS IN A MULTI-CARRIER MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving forward channel status information in a multi-carrier mobile communication system. An MS transmits to a BS forward channel status information representing an average C/I of forward signals with respect to a plurality of carriers, the maximum of the forward signal C/Is, or each of the forward signal C/Is. The forward channel status information is absolute C/I information representing a current C/I, or relative C/I information representing a difference of the current C/I from a previous C/I. | 12-17-2009 |
20090316589 | Method of Determining True Error Vector Magnitude in a Wireless Lan - Systematic transmit IQ phase and amplitude imbalances in the transmit chain of a wireless local area network (WLAN) cause a corresponding systematic shift in the roots of a constellation diagram. Additional random phase noise in the transmit chain will cause a further Gaussian distribution of points in the constellation diagram about the systematically shifted roots. This random distribution represents a true error vector magnitude (EVM). By transmitting a known training sequence through the transmit chain, which it is known will be shifted to all of the systematically shifted roots in the constellation diagram, the Gaussian spread around those shifted roots can be analysed to determine the true EVM. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316590 | Sampling and Analyzing Packets in a Network - The preferred embodiments of the present invention can include sampling packets transmitted over a network based on the content of the packets. If a packet is sampled, the sampling unit can add one or more fields to the sampled packet that can include a field for a number of bytes contained in the packet, a packet count, a flow count, a sampling type, and the like. The sampled packets can be analyzed to discern desired information from the packets. The additional fields that are added to the sampled packets can be used during the analysis. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316591 | Method and Apparatus for Generating Channel Quality Estimates - A base station receives channel quality reports from a plurality of mobile terminals. The channel quality reports from the mobile terminals indicate the signal power of the signals received by the mobile terminals from the base station and one or more interference parameters relating to the power of impairment components contributing to the total impairment of the received signal during a first time interval. The base station computes an estimated channel quality indication for a second time interval subsequent to the first time interval based on expected variations in the powers of the impairment components. The estimated channel quality indication for the second time interval is used by the base station to schedule the mobile terminals and to determine the transmission format. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316592 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING VIRTUAL LANES IN FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCHES - A method for assigning virtual lanes (VL) in a fibre channel switch is provided. The fibre channel switch element includes a virtual lane cache that can compare incoming frame parameters based on which virtual lanes may be assigned; and a register to store parameters used for virtual lane assignment. The method includes, determining if VL assignment is to be based on an incoming frame parameter or a programmed value; determining if an incoming frame is a preferred frame; and assigning a preferred routing priority if the incoming frame is designated as a preferred frame. The method also includes, determining if a fabric topology is known; and assigning virtual lanes based on a known fabric topology. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316593 | Method for optimizing discontinuous reception in random access and secheduling request - In a method for optimizing discontinuous reception mechanism in random access or scheduling request, the user equipment behaves according to a TTI window and a contention resolution timer so that the user equipment is at active time to monitor PDCCH. In the random access, the UE is at active time while a PDCCH indicating a new transmission addressed to the C-RNTI of the UE has not been received after successful reception of a Random Access Response for the non-contention preamble. In the scheduling request, the UE is at active time while an UL grant for the UE has not been received after SR has been sent. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316594 | WSN-BASED CONTEXT AWARENESS ENGINE - A WSN-based context awareness engine applies spatial filtering to sensed data which is output from sensors included in a group to filter data in which an error does not occur, identifies a non-operated sensor, compares filtered data with at least one condition to determine a current state of a place corresponding to the group, and combines the determined current state and information regarding the group to generate a context-awareness result. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316595 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for identifying a base station in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes storing a Neighbor Cell List (NCL) received from a serving base station, obtaining a Physical Cell IDentifier (PCID) from a signal received from a neighbor base station, and identifying whether the neighbor base station is a macro base station or a femto base station by determining whether the obtained PCID exists in the stored NCL. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316596 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING END-TO-END CALL COMPLETION STATUS - The present invention enables a method for following the state of a call and generating defects as function of call completion success as opposed to discrete events that happen at individual network elements during the call. In one embodiment, the invention uses Call Detail Records (CDR) to analyze the end-to-end completion status to measure per call basis defects instead of using defect codes generated by network elements on a per equipment basis. CDR is data associated with a telephone call, including the calling and the called numbers, the date and timestamp, the duration, the call setup delay, and the final handling code of the telephone call. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316597 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - An information processing apparatus performs a communication in a communication network using packets. The communication network includes a relaying device having a function of acquiring traffic information of a packet that the relaying device relays. The information processing apparatus includes a transmission unit configured to transmit a packet to a specific node as a communication target; and a node position determining unit configured to determine a position of the specific node by acquiring the traffic information from the relaying device by which the packet is relayed in the communication network, analyzing the traffic information, and monitoring a flow of the packet with respect to the specific node. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316598 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING AN ATTENUATION FACTOR - The present invention discloses a method for obtaining an attenuation factor. The method is adapted to process the synthesized signal in packet loss concealment, and includes: obtaining a change trend of a pitch of a signal; obtaining an attenuation factor, according to the change trend of the pitch of the signal. The present invention also discloses an apparatus for obtaining an attenuation factor. A self-adaptive attenuation factor is adjusted dynamically by using the latest change trend of a history signal by using the present invention. The smooth transition from the history data to the data last received is realized so that the attenuation speed is kept consistent between the compensated signal and the original signal as much as possible for adapting to the characteristic of various human voices. | 12-24-2009 |
20090323540 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE, SYSTEM ON CHIP AND METHOD FOR MONITORING DATA TRAFFIC - An electronic device is provided which comprises a plurality of processing units (IP | 12-31-2009 |
20090323541 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR TRANSMITTING CQ1 ON THE UPLINK - A method for transmitting data flows between a network element and a number of receivers over a first channel. The method comprises the steps of: performing a link adaptation for the transmission of a data flow by said network element, and transmitting the data flow, transmitting an indication of a channel quality required for reception of the data flow on a second channel, receiving by said receivers said indication of channel quality, measuring a link quality by said receivers by monitoring a pilot channel, comparing said measured link quality with said received indication of the channel quality, and transmitting to said network element result of said comparison of said measured link quality with said received indication of the channel quality, if said result is lower than a predetermined value. The invention also relates to a network element and a user equipment. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323542 | Communication apparatus and communication method - A mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus transmits reception quality information to a base station apparatus, the reception quality information indicating quality of a signal received from the base station apparatus, characterized in that the base station apparatus transmits information for instructing transmission of reception quality information without uplink data included in an uplink data transmission permission signal, and the mobile station apparatus transmits reception quality information without uplink data according to the information for instructing transmission of reception quality information without uplink data. This allows a mobile station apparatus to transmit reception quality information including a large amount of information even if there is no uplink data between the mobile station apparatus and the base station apparatus, and the transmission control flexibly responding to the amount of information and the frequency of transmissions of the reception quality information transmitted from the mobile station apparatus is possible. Therefore, more efficient communication control (scheduling) between the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus can be achieved. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323543 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CALCULATING ROUND TRIP TIME - A communication apparatus which transmits data to a transmission destination, and receives, from the transmission destination, an acknowledgement indicating that the data has been received stores, in a memory, first specific data for specifying a plurality of transmission data, and transmission time data indicating transmission times of the plurality of transmission data. Based on second specific data contained in the acknowledgement, the communication apparatus searches the memory for first specific data for specifying transmission data corresponding to the acknowledgement, and calculates a round trip time based on the transmission time of the transmission data specified by the found first specific data, and a reception time at which the acknowledgement is received. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323544 | INTERNET ROUTE DEAGGREGATION AND ROUTE SELECTION PREFERENCING - A method and system for managing the routing of traffic within a network develops a topological address space map of the network to enable a “best route” selection process. The network is comprised of a backbone connected to a plurality of peering partners. Points on the network monitor traffic flows. A central facility analyzes the traffic flows and routes within the network and performs intelligent routing management. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323545 | MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND OPERATING METHOD THEREOF - A multiple input multiple output (MIMO) communication system having a terminal and a base station. The terminal may calculate channel direction information and channel quality information in a zero-forcing mode based on expected different user interference. The terminal may also calculate channel direction information and channel quality information in a per user unitary rate control (PU2RC) mode by reusing the channel direction information and the channel quality information in the zero-forcing mode. The base station may design a preceding vector based on feedback information from the terminal. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323546 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND PROGRAM FOR IMPLEMENTING THE CONTROL METHOD - A communication apparatus which can prevent leakage of confidential information transferred over a network when a fault occurring in a communication device is analyzed. A data is acquired via a communication line. When it is analyzed that a specific data is present in the acquired data, the specific data is deleted from a data portion of the acquired data, the data portion including the specific data. A data included in another portion of the acquired data other than the data portion having included the deleted specific data is stored. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323547 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PACKET BASED COMMUNICATIONS AND ARRANGEMENT THEREFOR - A system and method for packet-based communications is performed by implementing arbitrated packet-based communications. According to an example embodiment, packet-based data is arbitrated and output with verification data. For each arbitrated packet stream, verification data is generated in response to detecting an end of frame (EOF) symbol in the arbitrated packet stream, and the verification data is added to the packet stream. A merged packet stream is provided at an output, the merged packet stream including the plurality of arbitrated packet streams with verification data added thereto. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323548 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND TERMINAL FOR DETERMINING QOS LEVEL - A method for determining Quality of Service (QoS) level is provided. The method includes: assigning, by a Coaxial-cable Line Terminal (CLT), a QoS level for a user terminal; sending, by the CLT, relevant information of the assigned QoS level to a Coaxial-cable Network Unit (CNU); and determining, by the CNU, a QoS level for a packet sent by the user terminal according to the relevant information of the assigned QoS level. A system for determining QoS level is provided. The system includes: a CLT and a CNU. A CLT and a CNU are also provided. The solution enables a coaxial-cable network unit to satisfy the QoS requirements of user terminals, and reduces the producing cost of the coaxial-cable network unit. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323549 | Method for Estimating and Signalling the Density of Mobile Nodes in a Road Network - A method and an associated device for estimating the density of mobile node traffic in an ad-hoc network on the roads of a predetermined geographical network in which mobile nodes move. Each road is divided into coverage cells. For each cell, a principal mobile node located at the center of the cell counts the number of nodes in the cell, and inserts this number into a cell density packet (CDP) transmitted from cell to cell during a first stage. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323550 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING NETWORK PACKET FLOWS - A system and method provides a broadband network node for a best effort network such as the Internet or intranets which supports the inexpensive and rapid deployment of services to the best efforts network. Separate data path and control path mechanisms allow high-speed data transfers with parallel processing flows for the data path that are controlled across data flows by the control path. Packets are classified, modified and shaped to enable the service on the network with an accountant to track packet traffic for control and billing purposes. A series of processing blades perform a modification function for each blade that processes packets according to classifications. The processing blades are modular and scalable for insertion in the broadband switch to rapidly adapt the broadband network node for new services. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323551 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING AND THE PREVENTION OF CALL STORMS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention allows monitoring and the prevention of call storms in a communications network, e.g., a VoIP network. More specifically, the present invention enables a VoIP network to monitor the calling pattern, e.g., the number of calls within a period of time that occurs between the same endpoints. If the number of calls exceed a certain threshold, then these calls with the same endpoints will be terminated and an alarm notification will be sent, e.g., to a network operator. | 12-31-2009 |
20100002594 | BUS GUARDIAN AS WELL AS METHOD FOR MONITORING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AND AMONG A NUMBER OF NODES, NODE COMPRISING SUCH BUS GUARDIAN, AND DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH NODES - In order to provide a bus guardian ( | 01-07-2010 |
20100002595 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND METHOD OF REPORTING WIRELESS CHANNEL QUALITY - A disclosed mobile station includes a wireless channel quality measuring unit configured to measure wireless channel quality; a wireless channel quality determining unit configured to determine to report the wireless channel quality to a base station if the wireless channel quality is greater than a threshold; and a transmission unit configured to report the wireless channel quality to the base station based on the determination result of the wireless channel quality determining unit. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002596 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR POWER CONTROL IN HSDPA - The method for power control in HSDPA includes Step A, the UE with the highest priority and having data to be transmitted is selected according to the algorithm, the channel resource is distributed to the UE, and the original power level is set. Step B, the transmission power is deduced when the channel quality meets the condition; Otherwise the CQI is checked, if the value of CQI is under the highest rate level, or the data is the re-transmitting data, the transmission power is increased, or the power is kept the same level. Step C, channel resource and the UE with the highest priority are checked, if there exist, then go to step B, otherwise the method is ended. So the redundant power can be used when several UEs are controlled at the same time, the efficiency and the throughput performance are improved, and the interface is reduced. The device for power controlling is given at the same time. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002597 | FEEDBACK TO SUPPORT RESTRICTIVE REUSE - The scheduler in a base station needs CQI information from a terminal for all re-use sets every 5 ms. to decide on which re-use set to schedule a given terminal. For MIMO users, the problem is that the CQI cannot be reconstructed for all re-use sets, using the current design. Solution: (1) For Multiple Code Word MIMO users, a MIMO VCQI connection layer message enables the base station to reconstruct the MIMO-CQI for all reuse sets on a packet-by-packet basis. This will enable dynamic scheduling (RESTRICTIVE REUSE) gains. (2) For Single Code Word users, dynamic RESTRICTIVE REUSE can be obtained by changing the CQI reporting format, and also sending a MIMO-VCQI connection layer message. (3) For Single Code Word design, quasi-static scheduling gains can be obtained by sending a MIMO-VCQI connection layer message. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002598 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING AND REPORTING A RANK AND A PRECODING MATRIX FOR MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT COMMUNICATION - A method and apparatus for measuring and reporting a rank and/or a precoding matrix for multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication are disclosed. A metric indicating a channel condition is measured and a rank is selected based on the metric. The metric may be a signal-to-interference and noise ratio (SINR), throughput, a block error rate (BLER), system capacity, a sum rate, or the like. An SINR for each radio block group (RBG) for each rank is calculated. A data rate is calculated for each RBG based on the SINR for each rank. An overall rate for all RBGs is calculated for each rank. At least one rank is selected based on the overall rate. At least one precoding matrix may be selected jointly with or separately from the at least one rank. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002599 | Devices and Methods for Matching Link Speeds Between Controllers and Controlled Devices - A controller system for detecting and matching link speeds. The present invention provides for a controller system. The controller system is a first controller and a first port. The first port is located in the first controller and has a first link speed. The first controller is adapted to match the first link speed to a second link speed of a second port of a first controlled device that is connectable to the first controller. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002600 | CHANNEL EFFICIENCY BASED PACKET SCHEDULING FOR INTERACTIVE DATA IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - The present packet scheduling algorithm gives cellular network operators greater flexibility in adjusting the way resources are allocated among interactive best-effort data users. The present packet scheduling algorithm is capable of allocating radio resource dynamically, not only based on channel conditions, but also to achieve different performance trade-offs among users with different link qualities. According to the algorithm, channel quality is determined for each user. Channel efficiency is calculated and the channel efficiency value is used as the primary factor in weighting the delivery of packets to (or from) a given user. In a packet schedule weighting equation, a value of exponent may be varied from negative to positive to give good (or bad) users better service. However, performance of users with bad channel qualities degrades the performance of good channel users in a disproportionate manner. | 01-07-2010 |
20100008238 | UPPER NODE STATION AND PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD - An upper node station for transmitting received packets to a mobile station via a base station includes a quality information extracting unit configured to extract quality information from the received packets; and a multiplexing unit configured to assign each of the received packets to a bearer service based on the extracted quality information to multiplex the received packets. The upper node station may further include a quality information management table configured to associate a packet header with the bearer service for each mobile station, and the multiplexing unit may identify the bearer service based on a packet header in each of the received packets referring to the quality information management table. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008239 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A RADIO NETWORK, A RADIO NETWORK AND A RECEIVER - The invention relates to a method for transmitting data in a transmission interval ( | 01-14-2010 |
20100008240 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MONITOR NETWORK LAYER FUNCTIONALITIES - Example methods and apparatus to monitor network layer functionalities are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes receiving a first probe packet at an input of a first server, the first probe packet being received from a router, the first probe packet being generated and transmitted from a second server that is one-hop away from the first server in a network, determining if the first server is a final destination of the first probe packet, and if the first server is not the final destination of the first probe packet, generating a second probe packet and transmitting the second probe packet to the router for transmission toward the final destination. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008241 | Method of Determining Video Quality - A method and a device utilizing an algorithm using measurement data derived from parameters related to a video-streaming player and/or parameters related to data transport is disclosed. The data are used as input data in a model designed to generate a value corresponding to the quality of the multimedia sequence, such as for example a MOS score. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008242 | Wireless subscriber uplink (UL) grant size selection - A method and apparatus of a wireless subscriber requesting an Uplink (UL) grant size from a base station (BS) are disclosed. One method includes the subscriber analyzing traffic patterns of uplink data, the subscriber selecting a new grant size based on the analyzed traffic patterns, and the subscriber requesting the new grant size by signaling the new grant size to the BS. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008243 | FLASH POSITION SIGNALING: MULTIPLEXING AND INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate use of power and phase coherence to multiplex or manage interference in a wireless communication environment. In accordance with various aspects set forth herein, systems and/or methods are provided that receive a spectrum of tones that include additional data, ascertain whether or not tone intensities of received tones included in the spectrum of tones exceeds a threshold, based on whether or not the tone intensities of the received tones exceed the threshold, decode information included in the received tones to extract the additional data, and thereafter decode information included in one or more remaining tones that fail to exceed the threshold in order to extract primary data. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008244 | DOMINANT INTERFERER INDICATION IN ACCESS PROBE - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating a dominant interferer to a target serving base station in a wireless communication environment. A mobile device can detect presence or absence of a dominant interferer. Further, an access probe that includes information related to the presence or absence of the dominant interferer can be generated. For example, the information can be included in a payload of the access probe as an explicit flag, an explicit indication of an interference level, a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) value (e.g., reserved versus non-reserved, . . . ), etc. Moreover, the access probe can be transmitted to the target serving base station to initiate an access procedure. The target serving base station can select a time-frequency resource to be utilized for a responsive downlink transmission (e.g. access grant signal, subsequent access related message, . . . ) as a function of the information included in the access probe. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008245 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A TRANSMISSION OF DATA STREAMS ON A TRANSPORT CHANNEL OF A TUNNEL, CORRESPONDING TUNNEL END-POINT AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A method is proposed for managing a transmission of data streams on a transport channel of a tunnel, the transmission of each stream being performed on the transport channel according to a transport protocol scheduled by packets and with acknowledgment, the tunnel being implemented between a first and a second tunnel end-point connected respectively to a first and a second sub-network, each stream being transmitted from a sender device to a receiver device, one device among the sender device and the receiver device being connected to the first sub-network and the other to the second sub-network. The method is performed by the first tunnel end-point and comprises the following steps: detecting a loss of packet on the transport channel of the tunnel; identifying at least one stream having at least one packet blocked on the transport channel of the tunnel by the loss; for at least one identified stream, generating and transmitting at least one acknowledgment to the sender device that has transmitted, on the tunnel, a packet blocked by said loss. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008246 | MOBILE STATION AND RECEPTION QUALITY MEASUREMENT METHOD - A reception quality measurement method includes instructing a mobile station existing in a cell to measure a reception quality of a signal sent by a second base station forming a cell with a frequency different from a frequency of the cell of the first base station; setting a period including a synchronizing timing for the first base station, by the mobile station; setting a plurality of measurement timings in the period, and measuring reception quality of the signals sent by the second base station at each of the measurement timings, by the mobile station; comparing the reception qualities measured at the measurement timings, and selecting an optimum reception quality, by the mobile station; and reporting the selected optimum reception quality to the first base station as the reception quality of the signal sent by the second base station, by the mobile station. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008247 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING DATA USING RELAY DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM OF CENTRALIZED MAC - Provided is an apparatus and method for transmitting and a receiving data using a relay device in a centralized Media Access Control (MAC). The apparatus may include: a channel decision unit to determine a channel status with respect to a communication path using a corresponding device and a communication path using a relay device; a path selection unit to select at least one communication path between the communication path using the corresponding device and the communication path using the relay device, based on the channel status; and a transceiver to transmit and receive the data via the selected at least one communication path. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008248 | NETWORK TESTER FOR REAL-TIME MEASURING OF TCP THROUGHPUT - The invention relates to a method for real time testing of TCP traffic in a network, the method comprising: (a) connecting a tester to the network; (b) requesting connectionless traffic from a remote device connected to the network, to the tester; (c) generating the connectionless traffic comprising a plurality of packet streams, with the remote device, and receiving the connectionless traffic by the tester; (d) generating TCP traffic comprising a plurality of TCP sessions between the tester and the remote device; and, (e) concurrently with steps (c) and (d), in real time collecting statistics of the TCP sessions using the tester. The tester has an-FPGA implemented traffic engine, including a TCP state machine, for generating and receiving traffic at the rates of at least 1 gigabit per second, and for collecting statistics in real time. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008249 | MEASURING METHOD, MEASURING APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - There is provided a measuring apparatus for acquiring packets being transmitted and received within a packet network and measuring communication quality on the basis of the acquired packets, the apparatus including a part that extracts packets acquired within one of given sampling periods, each sampling period set intermittently, and a part that measures communication quality on the basis of the packets acquired within the sampling period. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008250 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING PACKET TRANSMISSION QUALITY - Packet transmission quality in a communication network is measured by transmitting a measurement packet from a packet transmission node to a packet reception node. The packet transmission node is provided with a transmission counter counting the number of packets transmitted from a packet transmission node to a packet reception node, and a measurement packet counter counting the number of measurement packets transmitted from the packet transmission node to the packet reception mode. The packet reception node is provided with a reception counter counting the number of packets received from the packet transmission node. The packet transmission node transmits a measurement packet including a transmission counter value and a measurement packet counter value, to the packet reception node which calculates the number of lost packets or a loss rate of packets on the basis of the transmission counter value, the measurement packet counter value, and a reception counter value. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008251 | EFFICIENT PROBABILISTIC DUPLICATE PACKET DETECTOR IN COMPUTER NETWORKS - In order to solve the problem of the detection of the arrival of duplicate data packets in an interconnected, multinode data processing system, each data packet is provided with a field of r bits that are randomly generated for each data packet. However, one of the packets is provided with a field that is computed from the other randomly generated field entries in a checksum computation which yields a selected nonzero checksum value. A running checksum at the receiver is used to determine whether or not, after the receipt of the specified number, k, of data packets, a duplicate packet has been received. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008252 | Proximity Enforcement in Heterogeneous Network Environments - The invention provides an enforcement mechanism for limiting the propagation of content to a predefined proximity in a heterogeneous network. The protection mechanism determines the distance associated with wireless links of the heterogeneous networks and verifies that the distance is within the predefined proximity limits. The distance may be measured by evaluating the signal strength of received signals. The protection mechanism further uses round trip time determinations to enforce the proximity limits on wired or unknown segments of the heterogeneous network. Specifically, the round trip time associated with a wired or unknown segment may be determined using the round trip time associated with the wireless segments and the total round trip time of the network as a whole. The round trip time of the wired or unknown segment is then compared to a round trip time limit associated with the proximity requirement for distributing content. | 01-14-2010 |
20100014437 | METHODS FOR BUS DATA TRANSMISSION AND SYSTEMS UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for data transmission in a device coupled to a host via a bus is provided. A sequence of data packets are received from the host and the received data packets are stored into a buffering unit of the device. It is then determined whether a predetermined error has occurred. When the predetermined error has occurred, the buffering unit of the device is locked to stop receiving the data packets. Thereafter, the buffering unit of the device is unlocked according to an unlock request from the host to resume receiving subsequent data packets. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014438 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for transmitting uplink Ethernet data in a coaxial network, a Coaxial Network Unit (CNU) and a Coaxial Line Terminal (CLT) applying the method. In the method, the CNU determines a transmission path loss between the CNU and the CLT, determines a transmission level for transmitting uplink data according to the transmission path loss, and transmits the uplink data by using the determined transmission level. The present invention ensures the security of data uplink transmission in an Ethernet Passive Coaxial Network (EPCN) system in essence and dramatically increases service quality. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014439 | NODE OF A DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE AND MONITORING DEVICE COUPLED TO SUCH COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a node in distributed communication system operating under a time triggered protocol, further it relates to distributed communication system and to a monitoring device coupled to such node of a communication system. To provide a node in a distributed communication system, a distributed communication system and a monitoring device increasing the error detection and reducing complexity for providing a high availability for systems which require a non 100% fail safe solution a node is proposed comprising: a communication controller ( | 01-21-2010 |
20100014440 | BANDWIDTH MONITORING METHOD AND ITS DEVICE - A bandwidth monitoring device for use in a network for transferring priority packets in preference to non priority packets as far as the amount of the priority packets is within a contract bandwidth established between a network user and a network operator, comprising a bandwidth check result decision unit for detecting whether the bandwidth of the priority packets is less than the contract bandwidth, and a DSCP decision unit for determining that a non priority packet may be transferred as a priority packet when the bandwidth of the priority packets is less than the contract bandwidth thereby to sufficiently use the contract bandwidth. | 01-21-2010 |
20100020701 | Method and apparatus for determining coupled path loss - The disclosure generally relates to method and apparatus for determining coupled path loss in a small geographical which is served by a plurality of transmitters and is subject to broad signal level variation. In one embodiment, the disclosure relates to a method for determining performance of a signal received by a wireless device located within a bin of a cell of a cellular communication system. The method comprises determining the value of the received signal level as a function of the sum of the signal levels received from a primary base station at a primary cell divided by a number of signal level measurements from said primary base station. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020702 | TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS EMPLOYING BEAMFORMING - Techniques involving beamforming are disclosed. For example, For instance an apparatus may select a first mobile station served by a first base station and a second mobile station served by a second base station. Based on this selection, a quality metric may be determined that is based on a strength of a user link and a strength of an interfering link. The user link is associated with service of the first mobile station and the interfering link is associated with service of the second mobile station. When the quality metric is greater than a predetermined threshold, the apparatus may designate the first and second mobile stations as suitable for beamforming service in a same resource allocation. Also, techniques are disclosed for determining whether a mobile station is a cell edge mobile station. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020703 | NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE CAPABILITY DETECTION - A system to discover a network infrastructure capability includes one or more subsystems to establish a communication path between a first endpoint and a second endpoint. A test packet is sent from a first endpoint along the communication path and a value is associated with the test packet which relates to capabilities of the communication path. The test packet value is returned to the first endpoint. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020704 | Method, Apparatus And Computer Readable Medium For Obtaining Efficient Downlink Power Transmission - The invention relates to a method and an arrangement for obtaining efficient radio resource utilization in a communication network comprising a communication network entity transmitting data on a downlink channel over a radio interface to one or more user equipments, each of which is transmitting data on an uplink channel to said communication network entity over said radio interface. The communication network entity receives transmit power control (TPC) commands on said uplink channel and, further, monitors a channel quality indicator (CQI) on said uplink channel from said user equipment in order to obtain channel quality indicator measurements. If there is a channel quality indicator available, the communication network entity calculates a required downlink power. Otherwise, the communication network entity decodes said received transmit power control commands. Thereafter said transmission power is adjusted either based on the calculated downlink power or based on the decoded transmit power control commands in order to obtain efficient radio resource utilization. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020705 | SUPERVISORY CONTROL METHOD AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL DEVICE - A supervisory control device for a network having a plurality of network elements, includes: a communication interface which is connected to each of a plurality of element groups, wherein the plurality of network elements is grouped into the plurality of element groups; and a controller for controlling supervisory control information in element group units depending on a communication condition change for at least one network element belonging to each element group, wherein the supervisory control is performed according to the supervisory control information. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020706 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING PROCESSING METHOD, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND PROGRAM - When the role of a receiver is not predetermined, it is impossible to uniquely determine the transfer direction of communication parameters. A communication apparatus comprises: discrimination means adapted to discriminate a function of another communication apparatus with respect to communication parameter setting processing when the self communication apparatus is a candidate for a providing apparatus of communication parameters; setting means adapted to set the function of the self communication apparatus as a receiving apparatus of communication parameters upon detecting an apparatus that is confirmed as a providing apparatus of communication parameters before a set time elapses; and execution means adapted, if the setting means sets the function as the receiving apparatus, to execute, as a receiving apparatus of communication parameters, the communication parameter setting processing with the providing apparatus. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020707 | WI-FI SENSOR - Disclosed is a combined spectrum and channel analyzer with output in the form of various graphical displays. The graphical displays can be configured to display frequency, amplitude, time and density via a spectral view, a topographic view, or a planar view, or combinations of those views. Channel activities, parameters, overlap and interaction are shown in the displays. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020708 | PACKET CAPTURE APPARATUS, PACKET CAPTURE METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM HAVING A PACKET CAPTURE PROGRAM - A packet capture apparatus and method including receiving packets through a network, acquiring target packets including specific information from the received packets, extracting the target packets of each session, and storing the extracted target packets, estimating a capture cycle, a capture width, and a capture start time based on static information about the target packets to determine a start time and an end time of the reception of the packets based on the capture cycle, the capture width, and the capture start time, setting the start time and the end time in control by the packet capturing part, and using the start time and the end time being set to control intermittent packet capturing, where the packets are received during each capture width every capture cycle from the capture start time. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020709 | METHOD OF ASSIGNING PRECODING VECTORS IN A MOBILE CELLULAR NETWORK - The invention concerns a method for assigning precoding vectors in a mobile cellular network as well as a base station ( | 01-28-2010 |
20100020710 | CELL IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT AND SELECTION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing physical cell identifier (PCI) assignment. Neighboring access point parameters can be collected and transmitted to a PCI assigning component, which can generate a PCI based on the parameters as well as other local parameters. The neighboring access point parameters can be received by evaluating signals transmitted by the neighboring access points, from a UE communicating with the neighboring access points, over a backhaul link, etc. The parameters can include signal strength, identification, and/or the like. In addition, prioritized lists of PCIs can be provided to an access point, which can utilize the neighborhood parameters to select an optimal PCI from the list. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020711 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE COMPRISING A CARRIER SENSE FUNCTION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device of an example of the present invention comprises a first unit determining that whether a state is a first state indicating that a transmission medium is in use, a second state indicating that the transmission medium is not in use, or a third state indicating that whether or not the transmission medium is in use is being determined, and a second unit prohibiting a data transmission in the first and third states, and permitting the data transmission in the second state. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020712 | METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY THROUGH UPLINK COMMON CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method of transmitting and receiving channel quality information is provided. A base station transmits a command or indication a terminal to transmit the channel quality information, the terminal receives the command or indication by receiving a control channel periodically, and the terminal reports the channels quality information to the base station after receiving the command or indication. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020713 | DIVIDING RTCP BANDWIDTH BETWEEN COMPOUND AND NON-COMPOUND RTCP PACKETS - An apparatus for controlling utilization of RTCP bandwidth for compound and non-compound RTCP packets is described. This apparatus includes a bandwidth detector determining available RTCP bandwidth and a channel quality detector determining channel quality. A bandwidth divider connected to the bandwidth detector and the channel quality detector divides the available RTCP bandwidth between compound and non-compound RTCP packets based on the determined channel quality. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020714 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE MEASUREMENT - The present invention provides for a method of facilitating mobile radio communications device measurements within a mobile radio communications network, including the step of including within a Resource Block sent to the mobile radio communications device from the network an indication of the number of subsequent consecutive Transmission Timing Intervals with no allocated Resource Blocks and so as to provide to the mobile radio communications device a signal serving to indicate the time period available for device measurements. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020715 | Proactive Network Analysis System - A proactive network analysis system is a single unit for diagnosing network problems, measuring network performance, and monitoring network status in a comprehensive manner. The system is a compilation of individual tools including a distributed network packet capture data stream collector; a traffic analyzer; a performance graphing unit; a syslog recorder analyzer and archiving unit; a system availability monitor; a device configuration archiving unit; and a throughput measurement tool. The system can further provide an access list generator, an access list analyzer, a router DNS name generator and a service level agreement measurement device. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020716 | Scheduling in Wireless Communication Systems - A method in a wireless communication network ( | 01-28-2010 |
20100020717 | Method and system for Quality of Service (QoS) monitoring for wireless devices - Method and apparatus to monitor MQoS of wireless mobile devices is described. In one embodiment, the present invention provides a method to monitor the health of 3G mobile devices and provide a status check of such health to network technicians, supervisors, and management. In one aspect, mobile devices on the network perform measurement of MQoS factors that are reported to a quality of service backend. The MQoS data is combined to show current and historical network status. In another aspect, alarms may be set to notify specific managers when manager programmable conditions occur, such as low system performance, or specific error conditions occur. Reports may be generated summarizing and illustrating performance in tabular and graphical form. Parameters used for testing and monitoring mobile devices may be input to specific mobile devices or groups of mobile devices in a system. In one aspect, customer care or call centers may be enabled to request specific tests from specific mobile devices and utilize the overall network status to diagnose and/or resolve customer issues. | 01-28-2010 |
20100027430 | Apparatus and Method for Network Analysis - A system for, and method of, extracting information from multiple sessions and in accordance with disparate protocols, and transforming the same into a common language. Packets are collected by packet collectors distributed throughout a network and those packets, and/or metadata relating to those packets, are passed to an aggregator, which is made available via an application program interface to users/applications. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027431 | ALARMING IN A FEMTO CELL NETWORK - System(s) and method(s) are provided to monitor operation quality of a femto cell network. Operational data received from deployed femto cell access points are aggregated and monitored. Performance rules and associated operational quality indicators (OQIs) facilitate establishing a standard or desired quality of operation. Performance rule(s) comprises weight(s), sampling test(s), and alarm threshold(s) which can be established by a network operator. Collected data on telecommunication performance metrics can be analyzed to identify or calibrate a standard of operation, which facilitates generating performance rule(s). Weight(s) facilitates reducing the scope of operation data that is effectively monitored. OQIs can assess at least one of service quality, capacity, mobility, or provisioning in a femto cell network. Monitoring operational data generates actionable information for the femto cell network. Alarm(s) are generated when one or more OQIs adopt values below associated alarm thresholds. Alarm(s) facilitate prevention of service degradation of the femto cell network. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027432 | Impact Scoring and Reducing False Positives - According to an aspect of the invention, a system and method is onfigured to generate impact scores based on observed network traffic. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027433 | Signal Quality Indicator - A method of deriving an indicator of the signal quality in an in-service packet-based network at least having means to detect errors in packets and means to determine the overall amount of network traffic received. The method comprises the steps of: obtaining a value of the number of packets received having errors therein; obtaining a value of the overall amount of the network traffic received; calculating the indicator of signal quality (eBER) using the ratio of the number of packets received having errors therein to the overall amount of network traffic received. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027434 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF MEASURING COMMUNICATION QUALITY FOR CONSTRUCTING WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided is a communication quality measurement method and a portable communication quality measurement device for wireless sensor network. configuration. The communication quality measurement method for wireless sensor network configuration includes: a portable communication quality measurement device transmitting a communication quality detection request message to one or more of communication nodes in a wireless sensor network system at a location prepared for new installation; the one or more of the communication nodes in the wireless sensor network system receiving the communication quality detection request message to detect transmission quality information on the communication quality detection request message and adding the detected transmission quality information to a respond message to transmit the respond message to a next communication node; and the portable communication quality measurement device receiving the respond message transceived between the communication nodes to detect reception quality information and displaying the detected reception quality information and transmission quality information included in the respond message. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027435 | WIRELESS SYSTEM DESIGNING METHOD, WIRELESS SYSTEM DESIGNING SYSTEM, WIRELESS SYSTEM DESIGNING APPARATUS AND PROGRAM - In a station placement design of a scheme which assigns an address to each wireless station when a network is configured, the station placement design is enabled to ensure that addresses can be assigned. A wireless system designing method is a wireless system designing method for designing a wireless system having a mode in which an address is assigned to each wireless station when a network is formed, wherein a link quality is estimated between respective wireless stations which are installed within a predetermined region, and it is confirmed whether or not an address can be assigned to each wireless station in a topology which is formed only with links which are estimated to have link qualities equal to or higher than a predetermined level. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027436 | NODE DEVICE, NODE SYSTEM, AND METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR CHANGING STATISTIC INFORMATION MANAGEMENT TABLE USED FOR THE NODE DEVICE - To provide a node device improving the measurement accuracy of the network communication quality and creating a smaller table for managing statistics information on the communication quality. An importance degree judging section determines the importance degree of a flow by referencing data for judging the degree of importance in the Z-list. An E-list stores statistics data on a flow having a high degree of importance of monitoring. A change judging section makes a judgment on change according to the importance degree of the flow and the importance degree in the E-list. An integral quality calculating section totalizes the qualities of the normal packet information that was measured in a normal packet quality measuring section and the statistics information that was measured in a statistics information quality measuring section and records the total in a quality result section. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027437 | Systems and Methods for Determining Link Quality - Systems and methods for determining link quality are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes the steps of transmitting a first quantity of messages to a remote device, receiving a second quantity of message acknowledgements from the remote device, determining a receive signal strength indicator (RSSI) value, comparing the RSSI value to a minimum RSSI threshold. If the RSSI value is greater than the minimum RSSI threshold, calculating an end-to-end link quality (EELQ) based at least in part on the percentage of message acknowledgements received and the link quality of the previous link in the network, determining a message success rate based on the first quantity and the second quantity, receiving a link quality from the remote device, and determining an end-to-end link quality (EELQ) value based at least in part on a previous EELQ value and the message success rate. Otherwise the EELQ value is set to 0. Then calculating an end-to-end link cost (EELC) value based at least in part on the EELQ; selecting a route based at least in part on the EELC; and transmitting a message to a second device on the route. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027438 | Arbitration of Measurement Gap Coincidence with Random Access - A user agent is provided. The user agent is configured to perform a random access procedure and to perform radio measurements. The random access procedure comprises deciding when to send a random access preamble based on a possible occurrence of a measurement gap, transmitting a random access preamble on an uplink, and monitoring a physical downlink control channel for a random access response. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027439 | Portable Diagnostic Device for Trouble-Shooting a Wireless Network and a Method for Trouble-Shooting a Wireless Network - A portable diagnostic device (PDD) for diagnosing packet-based wireless networks. the PDD comprises an input device configured to convert user input into electrical signals, a radio frequency (RF) transceiver, an antenna, processing logic, a modem, and a display device. The processing logic is configured to execute a diagnostic software module that generates diagnostic commands for diagnosing a packet-based network and that interprets diagnostic information sent from the packet-based network to the PDD. The modem enables the PDD to wirelessly communicate via the RF transceiver and the antenna with a base transceiver station (BTS) that is in communication with the packet-based network. The display device displays diagnostic information received by the RF transceiver and processed by the processing logic. The diagnostic information displayed on the display device describes one or more attributes of the packet-based network. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027440 | Diagnostic information on multicast communications - Various embodiments of the invention pertain to a wireless communications device to receive multicast transmissions, and to transmit diagnostic information regarding those multicast communications in response to a triggering event. Other embodiments pertain to another wireless communications device to transmit the multicast transmissions, request the diagnostic information, and receive that information. | 02-04-2010 |
20100034101 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A CHANNEL MEASUREMENT REPORTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a ChannelMeasurementReport message in a wireless communication system, comprising generating a ChannelMeasurementReport message comprising a 8 bit MessageID field, a 12 bit PilotPN field that indicates the PilotPN of a sector for which a measurement was performed, a 2 bit CarrieriID field that indicates a carrier on which the measurements are performed, a 40 bit StartPHYFrameNumber field that indicates a frame number of a PHYFrame where an access terminal made a first measurement reported in the message, a 8 bit MeasurementInterval field that indicates a number of PHYFrames between measurements made by the access terminal, and a 8 bit NumMeasurements field that indicates number of measurements included in the message and transmitting the ChannelMeasurementReport message over a communication link. A method and apparatus is also provided for receiving and processing the ChannelMeasurementReport message. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034102 | Measurement-Based Validation of a Simple Model for Panoramic Profiling of Subnet-Level Network Data Traffic - A system and method for profiling subnet-level aggregate network data traffic is disclosed. The system allows a user to define a collection of features that combined characterize the subnet-level aggregate traffic behavior. Preferably, the features include daily traffic volume, time-of-day behavior, spatial traffic distribution, traffic balance in flow direction, and traffic distribution in type of application. The system then applies machine learning techniques to classify the subnets into a number of clusters on each of the features, by assigning a membership probability vector to each network thus allowing panoramic traffic profiles to be created for each network on all features combined. These membership probability vectors may optionally be used to detect network anomalies, or to predict future network traffic. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034103 | Robust Jitter-Free Remote Clock Offset Measuring Method - A clock offset between a client and a server is measured by: (a) the client sending a request to the server; (b) upon receiving the request in step (a), the server optionally sending a server acknowledgement to the client; (c) upon the client receiving the server acknowledgement in step (b) or directly, if no acknowledgement was used, each of the client and the server proceeding to concurrently exchange their respective timestamps with each other a multiplicity (n) of times, thus forming a multiplicity (n) of timestamp exchanges; and (d) determining a plurality of apparent forwards and backwards delays based on the multiplicity (n) of timestamp exchanges. The preferred apparent forwards and backwards delays are then selected based on the minimum values (for each direction) determined in (d) above. The clock offset between client and server is then determined based on the preferred apparent forwards and backwards delays. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034104 | DELAYABLE EVENTS IN HOME NETWORK - In one embodiment, a method for monitoring events in a home network is provided. A node receives a subscription request from a control point, wherein the subscription request indicates an interest in delayable eventing. A change is detected in an event variable. It is then determined if the control point can receive an event sent from the node. If the control point cannot receive an event sent from the node, an event notification regarding the change in the event variable is stored such that the event notification can be retrieved when the control point can receive communications from the node. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034105 | POWER DISPLAY FOR COMMUNICATION SIGNAL AND SIGNAL ANALYZER - In order to easily understand the relationship between communication signals of a plurality of channels, a signal analyzer provides a display showing a stacked bar graph | 02-11-2010 |
20100034106 | THROUGHPUT-BASED RATE ADAPTATION FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS - A system and method of throughput-based transmission rate adaptation for wireless transmissions is provided. An adapted transmission rate is determined based on transmission feedback from previous wireless frame transmissions. The adapted transmission rate is determined by comparing nominal throughputs derived from packet success rate (PSR) estimates at the current rate and other rates, such that the adapted transmission rate chosen is one that maximizes the nominal throughput. The PSR estimates can include those associated with the current rate, a fallback rate, and other rates. The PSR estimates are updated after each frame transmission. The PSR estimates can be saved and used for calculating future estimates, and they can also be time-stamped so as not to use them if they are older than a predetermined age. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034107 | OPTIMISING COMMUNICATION LINKS - A method for allocating transmission channels to transmit nodes in a wireless network, the network comprising a plurality of receive nodes and a plurality of transmit nodes wherein each receive node is arranged in a transmitter-receiver pair with a respective transmit node, and each of the receive nodes is arranged to receive data signal transmitted from its respective transmit node of the transmitter-receiver pair via a first communication path and is subject to interference when other transmit nodes transmit data signals to their respective receive nodes via other communication paths, the method comprising: (i) determining the communication link gain of a data signal transmitted via each of the communication paths; (ii) for each of the receive nodes, forming a set of the transmit nodes from which the receive node can tolerate interfering transmissions by determining the maximum number of said others of the transmit nodes for which the sum of the interfering communication link gains of the other communication paths connecting those transmit nodes to the receive node does not exceed the quotient of the communication link gain of the first communication path divided by a predetermined quality of service threshold for the first communication path; (iii) collecting the formed set of transmit nodes from step (ii) for each receive node, and using the formed sets to generate a preferred set of transmit node and receive node pairs such that the receive node of each transmit node and receive node pair in the preferred set can tolerate interfering transmissions from the transmit nodes of every other transmit node and receive node pair in the preferred set; and (iv) allocating a communication channel to the transmit nodes contained in said preferred set. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034108 | Wireless Communication System - The terminal measures the wireless channel quality of each frequency band, and notifies the base station of the quality. The base station determines the frequency band to be used by the terminal on the basis of the notification from the terminal. Then, the terminal is grouped depending on the difference etc. in frequency band in operating the terminal, and notified which terminal group the terminal belongs. Upon receipt of the notification from the base station, the terminal sets its own available frequency band and terminal group, and measures the notified wireless channel quality of the available frequency band. The measurement result is notified to the base station. The base station perform a scheduling process for each available frequency band on the basis of the wireless channel quality of the available frequency band of the terminal, and starts communicating with the terminal. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034109 | COMMUNICATION DATA STATISTICAL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION DATA STATISTICAL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - An apparatus comprises a receiver module configured to receive packets including multiple different identifiers, an aggregation module configured to classify each packet, which is received by the receiver module into a certain aggregate flow and generate aggregate statistical information including number of packets belonging to the certain aggregate flow, and a statistical processing module configured to perform an updating process arranged to classify the certain aggregate flow into a specific statistical flow and to update statistical information including number of packets belonging to the specific statistical flow based on corresponding aggregate statistical information, the statistical processing module repeating the updating process for multiple aggregate flows, into which packets are classified by the aggregation module, so as to update the statistical information in each of the multiple different statistical conditions. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034110 | ITERATIVE RECEPTION METHOD AND ITERATIVE RECEIVER - An iterative reception method and iterative receiver in a mobile communication system are provided. In order to remove inter-cell interference of a signal that is iteratively received in a multi-cell environment, a soft determination value of different cells excluding a specific cell is re-spread to be used. In addition, in order to improve reception performance of the iterative receiver that performs the interference removal by using the soft determination value, channel estimation is iteratively performed on the iteratively received signal by using a soft determination value of a previous order of the specific cell to update a channel estimation value. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce complexity of implementation and effectively remove the inter-cell interference by using the soft determination value. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034111 | Arrangement and Method Relating to Digital Subscribe Lines - A method, arrangement, and transceiver for monitoring noise on a twisted pair cable adapted to transfer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) signals with a given data symbol rate. A spectrum analyzer measures the power spectral density of a background or substantially pure noise signal. A switch and frequency detector determine whether the background pure noise signal includes repetitive impulse noise, and if so, a processor calculates the pulse width of the repetitive impulse noise utilizing an established relationship between the given data symbol rate and the frequency of the repetitive impulse noise given by the power spectral density measurements. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034112 | COMMUNICATION MONITORING METHOD, COMMUNICATION MONITORING SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AND EXTERNAL DEVICE - A management system for use in a communication monitoring system, exchanging communication check information between external devices, and monitoring communication in the network, the management system including an information manager for managing topology information about each of a number of network apparatuses, representative information about a representative external device connected to a network apparatus connected to the management system, and adjacent information about one or more external devices adjacent to each of the external devices; and an information notifier for notifying each of the external devices of the topology information, the representative information, and the adjacent information supplied from the information manager. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034113 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING A BUFFER STATUS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) reports a buffer status as part of scheduling information for enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transmissions. For reporting the buffer status, the WTRU calculates a total amount of data available across all logical channels for which reporting is requested by a radio resource control (RRC) entity. The total amount of data includes an amount of data that is available for transmission and retransmission at a radio link control (RLC) entity and an amount of data that is available for transmission in a medium access control for enhanced dedicated channel (MAC-i/is) segmentation entity in case that a MAC-i/is entity is configured. The WTRU sends scheduling information including a total E-DCH buffer status (TEBS) field that is set based on the total amount of data. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034114 | CQI REPORTING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A CQI reporting method for a Dual-Cell HSDPA service of a mobile communication system is provided for reducing CQI reporting overhead. A user terminal transmits channel quality indicators for downlink channels in a mobile communication system, measures channel qualities of a first downlink channel and a second downlink channel, compares the channel qualities of the first and second downlink channels with each other, selects at least one channel quality of the first and second downlink channels, and transmits at least one channel quality indicator indicating the at least one channel quality. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034115 | Modifying a Rate Based On At Least One Performance Characteristic - Network operating methods provide a first packet switch configured to send a plurality of packets from the first packet switch to a second packet switch via a network path traversing one or more intermediate packet switches, access data describing at least one performance characteristic of the network path, and based on the data, modify a rate at which the first packet switch sends the plurality of packets to the second packet switch via the path. Network management methods receive data describing at least one performance characteristic of a network path having a first endpoint on a first packet switch, a second endpoint on a second packet switch, the network path traversing one or more intermediate packet switches and, based on the received data, instruct the first packet switch to modify a rate at which the first packet switch sends packets to the second packet switch via the network path. | 02-11-2010 |
20100039946 | Interception Of Multimedia Services - The present invention relates to a method for monitoring in a telecommunication system. The system comprises a service domain that handles session control and a bearer domain used for transportation of media flow. A request for monitoring of a first party (A) is received by a Call Session Control Function (CSCF) in the service domain. The method comprises the following further steps: —A SIP session event is detected by the Call | 02-18-2010 |
20100039947 | RELAYS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for transmitting packets in wireless communication networks are disclosed. The methods include a relay mobile station measuring channel quality between the relay mobile station and a destination mobile station in response to a request for relay mobile stations from a base station The relay mobile station reports a channel quality indicator to the base station if the channel quality for a link between the base station and the destination mobile station via the relay mobile station is greater than a predetermined channel quality. The base station determines the relay mobile station that provides an optimal route for transmitting the packets from the base station to the destination mobile station. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039948 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT BASED ON ENHANCED PILOT MEASUREMENT REPORTS - Techniques for managing interference in a wireless network are described. A base station may receive enhanced pilot measurement reports from user equipments (UEs) and may make an interference management decision based on the received reports. The base station may select a serving base station for a UE based on an enhanced pilot measurement report received from the UE. The base station may determine resources with a low target interference level at a neighbor base station and may avoid scheduling a UE for uplink transmission on the resources. The base station may also determine whether to reserve resources for a neighbor base station based on data performance of the neighbor base station, whether the neighbor base station observes high interference from UEs served by the base station, or whether UEs served by the neighbor base station observe high interference from the base station, which may be determined based on the enhanced pilot measurement reports. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039949 | Methods and apparatus for data communication - Data communication apparatus including a port and a control entity. The control entity is operative to establish a connection with a remote entity over a first path and negotiate with the remote entity using in-band signaling over the first path establishment of a second path allowing the exchange of data between the data communication apparatus and the remote entity. The invention presents advantages from the standpoint of ease of implementation and bandwidth and resource savings. The use of an in-band messaging protocol to negotiate a establishment of the second path can be implemented generally in a straight forward manner. At the same time, the ability to transfer at least part of the connection to the second path avoids the drawbacks that would arise if that part of the connection were constrained to the first path. This feature allows the operator to take advantage of benefits provided by the second path but not available to the first path. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039950 | Method and Apparatus for Reducing the Signalling Bandwidth Load by Reporting Measurements in Differential Manner in a Multicast Message - A signalling method for reducing the bandwidth needed for communicating measurement values from at least a first source base station ( | 02-18-2010 |
20100039951 | COOPERATIVE MULTI-CELL TRANSMISSION METHOD - The present invention provides a cooperative multi-cell transmission method that can be utilized to implement cooperative transmission in a virtual cell. Sectors composing the virtual cell are real cells and/or full sectors in real cells, any sector among the sectors composing the virtual cell is physically located adjacent to at least one of the other sectors, and each sector of the virtual cell corresponds to a real transmitting node respectively. The method includes: acquiring channel state information between any user and at least one of real transmitting nodes by a main information processing node; performing user scheduling and real transmitting node scheduling based on the channel state information by the main information processing node; and cooperatively transmitting data of one or more scheduled users based on the channel state information by one or more scheduled real transmitting nodes. The method according to an embodiment of the present invention reduces the interference and enhances the system spectral efficiency. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039952 | SYSTEM FOR MONITORING, CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION OF TECHNICAL PROCESSES - In order to provide a system ( | 02-18-2010 |
20100039953 | A-PERIODIC PUCCH TRANSMISSION ON PUSCH - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate decoding of a sub-frame related to a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission. In particular, a Rank Indicator (RI) can be decoded and identified without error which can result in an error-free decoding and identification of Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), a starting point for a portion of data within the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission, and an acknowledgement (ACK). Additionally, systems and methodologies are described related to packaging information within a sub-frame of a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission such that decoding can be employed without error. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039954 | ANALYZING COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION IN A PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - An analysis of a communication configuration in a process control (PC) or substation automation (SA) system is disclosed, wherein network messages, and/or respective message sources, configured for transmission across a communication network of the system can be evaluated. From a logical data flow description that is part of a standardized configuration representation of the PC or SA system and which includes, in the form of control blocks, formal information for every message, receiver intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) can be retrieved or determined. For each retrieved receiver IED, the totality of all network messages destined for or directed to this particular receiver IED can be evaluated or processed (e.g. in view of a subsequent network load analysis, virtual local area network assignment, or graphical display of the data flow). Exemplary network messages of interest include cyclic point-to-point reports, periodic or repeated real-time multicast messages (Sampled Values SV) and event-based multicast messages (generic object oriented substation events GOOSE). | 02-18-2010 |
20100039955 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO MONITOR COMMUNICATIONS TO IDENTIFY A COMMUNICATIONS PROBLEM - Systems and methods to monitor communications to identify a communications problem are disclosed. An example method to monitor communication includes mirroring a first port on a first network element communicatively coupled to a virtual circuit to a second port on a second network element communicatively coupled to the virtual circuit, mirroring a third port on a third network element coupled to the virtual circuit to the second network element, monitoring mirrored communications data at the second network element by receiving communications data on the second port that are sent to the first port from the third port or from the first port to the third port, and analyzing the monitored communications data to identify a communications problem based on a difference between communications data mirrored from the first port and communications data mirrored from the third port. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039956 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING KEEP-ALIVE MONITORING ON SUBSCRIBER SESSIONS - A method and system for performing keep-alive monitoring on subscriber sessions as well as an edge device are provided. In the method, keep-alive monitoring is performed on a subscriber session group, and a keep-alive monitoring result of the subscriber session group serves as a keep-alive monitoring result of a plurality of subscriber sessions in the subscriber session group, so that the subscriber sessions in the subscriber session group can be processed in batches, and the real-time processing traffic of an IP edge device for the subscriber sessions is reduced, thereby lowering the real-time processing load of the IP edge device for the subscriber sessions, and increasing the real-time processing rate of the IP edge device for the subscriber sessions. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046382 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED SINGLE CELL ADAPTION DUE TO CHANGE IN ENVIRONMENT - A communication method for use in a wireless communications network is proposed, said method comprising the steps of—monitoring at least one property representative of the channel variability in time and/or frequency, for each of at least two channels in the cell, used to communicate with said at least two user terminals;—using the result of the monitoring to control, by a control node in the network or in one of the user terminals, the communication in the cell. The control of the communication may include artificially inducing time selectivity and/or frequency selectivity or selecting an operating mode for the cell. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046383 | Transmitting and Receiving Media Packet Streams - This invention concerns the transmitting and receiving of digital media packets, such as audio and video channels and lighting instructions. The network ( | 02-25-2010 |
20100046384 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL MESSAGE AND RESPONSE MESSAGE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method for responding to a random access channel message, a method for transmitting a random access channel message and a mobile communication terminal for supporting the same are disclosed. The method for responding to a random access channel message includes reading quality measurement information of a downlink channel from a second layer header of a random access channel (RACH) message which is transmitted from a user equipment to an uplink, controlling transmission power of a response message for the RACH message according to the quality measurement information; and transmitting the response message to the user equipment. Since transmission power can be adaptively controlled according to a channel measurement result of the user equipment, a radio resource can be efficiently used. In a method in which information indicating whether or not quality measurement information is included or whether or not upper layer information is included is notified to a base station through a header, compatibility between the existing user equipment and a radio network can be maintained. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046385 | Wireless Communication Terminal, Communication Control Method of Wireless Communication Terminal, and Wireless Communication System - It is possible to provide a radio communication terminal, a radio communication terminal communication control method, and a radio communication system, capable of effectively performing acquisition of a communication system and trying connection by a communication method desired by a user when a transmission process is generated even if the state is judged to be out-of-cell. When a communication start request is made in the state of out-of-cell in which communication is disabled, a control unit ( | 02-25-2010 |
20100046386 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MEASURING BI-DIRECTIONAL RADIO CHANNEL HAVING MULTIPLE ANTENNA - An apparatus and method for measuring bi-directional radio channel with multiple antenna are provided. The apparatus includes a transmitter for amplifying a signal that is frequency-up converted to radio frequency and removing a signal of other frequency band, a high power multiplexing switch for sequentially transferring transmitting signals from the transmitter to a corresponding circulator, a plurality of circulators for transferring the transmitting signals from the high power multiplexing switch to a corresponding antenna among multiple antennas, and transferring a receiving signal from a corresponding antenna, a low loss multiplexing switch for receiving the receiving signal from the corresponding circulator, and sequentially transferring the receiving signal; and a receiver for receiving the receiving signal from the low loss multiplexing switch, removing undesired frequency components from the receiving signal except a desired frequency band and low-noise amplifying the desired frequency band of the receiving signal. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046387 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A TRANSMISSION BEHAVIOR OF SUB-CHANNELS - A device for a method for determining the transmission performance of sub-channels of a transmission channel in a radio-communication system is specified, where data-comprising signal carriers are generated for the setup of the transmission channel within the radio-communication system and accommodated in the sub-channels of the transmission channel, and the transmission performance of the sub-channels is determined on the basis of the signal sub-carriers superposed with interferers. In this context, each sub-channel occupies a separate bandwidth sub-range of a total bandwidth range of the transmission channel. The bandwidth sub-range is disposed within the bandwidth at a spacing distance from other bandwidth sub-ranges of the total bandwidth range, and the interferers are limited to the bandwidth sub-range allocated to the respective sub-channel. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046388 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTIMATING DISTANCE BETWEEN NODES IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method for estimating a distance between nodes by using a round trip time (RTT) of a packet based on a CSMA/CA protocol in wireless sensor networks and a system thereof. The present invention provides a method for estimating a distance between nodes in wireless sensor networks that includes (a) measuring a transmission time of a transmission signal transmitted to the other node and a reception time of a reception signal received from the other node in response the transmission signal, and receiving a reception time of the transmission signal through the reception signal from the other node and a transmission time of the reception signal through a signal received after the reception signal from the other node; and (b) estimating a distance to the other node by using the transmission/reception time of all signals acquired in step (a). According to the present invention, it is possible to accurately estimate the distance between two nodes and as a result, it is possible to accurately identify positions of nodes that are deployed in a sensor field. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046389 | METHOD AND FACILITY FOR SELECTING SATELLITE CHANNELS - A method for selecting satellite channels in a transmission system consisting of a data source, a data sink, satellite modems and a satellite radio link with a general channel and at least one dedicated channel is provided. The data sink prompts the data source, as a function of the transmission characteristics of the general channel, to set up a dedicated channel for further data transmission. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046390 | RATE MATCHING DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RATE MATCHING IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for controlling rate matching in a communications system includes calculating a rate matching parameter containing a basic variable for an input bit string, and evaluating an additional parameter reflecting a current channel status of the transport channel receiving the input bit string. The input bit string generated in the upper layer is mapped to a physical channel of a Physical Layer by performing bit repeating or bit puncturing. If the bit repeating is executed on the input bit string on the basis of the first basic variable, and a second basic variable is calculated using the first basic variable and the additional parameter. A communication device to control rate matching between a physical channel and a transport channel includes a parameter calculator, an additional parameter generator, and a rate matching executioner to execute bit repeating or bit puncturing. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046391 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NETWORK ANALYSIS - A system for, and method of, extracting information from multiple sessions and in accordance with disparate protocols, and transforming the same into a common language. Packets are collected by packet collectors distributed throughout a network and those packets, and/or metadata relating to those packets, are passed to an aggregator, which is made available via an application program interface to users/applications. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046392 | Controlling Software Distribution or File Transfer - An example of a solution provided here comprises automatically measuring bandwidth of a network connection; comparing results of the measuring, with bandwidth parameters; preventing a transfer of a file via the network connection, if measured bandwidth is less than a minimum acceptable value; providing to an end user an option of transferring a file via the network connection, if measured bandwidth is not less than a minimum acceptable value, but is less than an optimal value; and automatically transferring a file via the network connection, if measured bandwidth is greater than or equal to an optimal value. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054139 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF DATA BLOCK - A method and apparatus for controlling a transmission of data blocks is provided by which data block transmission can be controlled more efficiently by measuring the RTT and setting a control timer value according to the measured RTT | 03-04-2010 |
20100054140 | FAULT DETECTION IN A TRANSPORT NETWORK - A device associated with a transport network generates a first traceroute through the transport network, and monitors a performance measure associated with the transport network. The device also compares the performance measure to a criterion, and determines degradation in the transport network when the performance measure matches the criterion. The device further generates a second traceroute through the transport network when the degradation occurs in the transport network, where the first and second traceroutes are used to determine a source of the degradation in the transport network. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054141 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MBS OVER MMR NETWORK USING DYNAMIC MODIFICATION OF MCS LEVEL - A method and system for Multicast Broadcast Service (MBS) over Mobile Multi-hop Relay (MMR) network using dynamic modification of Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level are provided. The base station of the system for MBS over MMR network using dynamic modification of MCS level comprises: Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC) table for storing the MCS level for the transmission between the BS and relay station (RS), throughput corresponding to the MCS level, and spectrum efficiency corresponding to the MCS level; and Dynamic Modulation and Coding (DMC) table for storing the MCS level for the transmission between the RS and MS to be changed upon update of the AMC table. If there is any change of the MCS level for the transmission between the RS and MS, the BS transmits a MCS control message to the RS informing of the MCS level change such that MBS data is transmitted with the changed MCS level. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054142 | COMMUNICATIONS METHOD FOR A PACKET-SWITCHED AND NETWORK AND NETWORK EMPLOYING THE METHOD - A communications method for a packet-switched network includes: a) receiving at a routing module operating in a low layer of a layered model defining communications on the network, a packet including an identifier associated to a protocol to be employed at a high layer of the model which is higher than the low layer; b) inspecting the received packet at an inspection module so as to identify the protocol associated to the identifier; c) selecting at a selection module a first device, operating in the high layer associated with the identified protocol; d) sending the packet toward the first device; e) processing the packet by applying at the first device a procedure of the high layer to produce a processed packet; f) sending the processed packet from the first device to the routing module; and g) transmitting the processed packet from the routing module toward the network. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054143 | UPLINK CONNECTIVITY FOR MOBILE CLIENTS - Methods and apparatus are provided for uplink connectivity for mobile clients. An apparatus in a mobile client includes an antenna for transmitting and receiving wireless signals, and an uplink connectivity manager for dividing an uplink transmission for each client location into an exploration phase and an operational phase. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054144 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME (MCS) INDEX BASED ON FREQUENCY SELECTIVITY - A method of selecting a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) index in a wireless communication system is disclosed. More specifically, the method includes measuring a frequency selectivity of a receiving channel, selecting a MCS index having a coding rate below a prescribed coding rate threshold value if the measured frequency selectivity is greater than or equal to a specified frequency selectivity threshold, and selecting the MCS index having the coding rate above or equal to the prescribed coding rate threshold value if the measured frequency selectivity is less than the specified frequency selectivity threshold. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054145 | Mobile Station Communicating with a Base Station via a Separate Uplink when the Parameters of Channel Quality Fall Below the Predefined Thresholds - The invention discloses a mobile station ( | 03-04-2010 |
20100054146 | GATHERING AND REPORTING DATA CONCERNING COMMUNICATION CHANNEL CONDITIONS FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK | 03-04-2010 |
20100054147 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus for communicating to a mobile station over a downlink shared channel includes a reception unit configured to receive downlink radio quality information from the mobile station over a control channel frequency-multiplexed with an uplink shared channel, a measurement unit configured to measure a radio quality of the control channel, and a determination unit configured to determine reliability of the downlink radio quality information based on the radio quality. Also, a communication control method at a base station apparatus for communicating to a mobile station over a downlink shared channel includes receiving downlink radio quality information from the mobile station over a control channel frequency-multiplexed with an uplink shared channel, measuring a radio quality of the control channel, and determining based on the radio quality whether the mobile station has transmitted the downlink radio quality information. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054148 | DATA ASSOCIATION SYSTEM, DATA ASSOCIATION METHOD AND DATA ASSOCIATION PROGRAM - A data association system includes: a communication monitoring unit that records communication status data; a communication data acquiring unit that acquires first communication data that the communication terminal exchanges during the communication indicated by the communication status data and records the first communication data; a data communication unit that makes second communication data accessible to the both users through communication different from the communication of the first communication data; and an association unit that specifies, among in-progress communications indicated by the communication status data, communication held by the same users as the both users in the communication of the second communication data and makes the first communication data recorded in a state of being associated with the specified communication data accessible to the both users. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054149 | Network Performance Management - The performance of a network can be managed by receiving a set of key quality parameters, wherein a key quality parameter represents a characteristic associated with at least one network component; identifying a service quality mapping module based on one or more network components associated with providing an end customer service, wherein the service quality mapping module corresponds to at least one service instance and defines a correlation between the set of key quality parameters and a set of customer quality parameters; applying the service quality mapping module to the set of key quality parameters to generate the set of customer quality parameters; and outputting a signal representing at least one customer quality parameter included in the set of customer quality parameters. Further, the service quality mapping module can define a linear dependency between a customer quality parameter and at least one key quality parameter. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054150 | Adaptive Communication Systems and Methods - Methods and communication systems are presented, in which impulse noise is monitored on a communication channel, and impulse noise protection parameters are adjusted according to the monitored impulse noise without interrupting communication service. | 03-04-2010 |
20100061255 | Reliability Metrics in an IP Network - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to characterizing reliability associated with a network. To characterize the reliability, an edge-pair reliability metric is determined for service edge point pairs. An end-to-end reliability metric is computed based on a distribution of the edge-pair reliability metric for the service edge point pairs and a threshold value. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061256 | Methods of Determining Whether a Frequency Channel is Available for Data Transmission for a Communication Device - A method of determining whether a frequency channel is available for data transmission for a communication device is provided. The method provided comprises dynamically selecting a time interval for determining whether the frequency channel is available for data transmission for the communication device. The method provided further comprises determining whether the frequency channel is available for data transmission for the communication device, during the time interval selected. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061257 | NETWORK MONITORING DEVICE, NETWORK MONITORING METHOD, AND NETWORK MONITORING PROGRAM - Information on a communication relation or communication path to be monitored is automatically generated to reduce load of a user. A path information generation part of a network monitoring device receives a destination IP address designated by a user as an object of monitoring. When the input of the destination IP address is received, the path information generation part uses configuration information tables, which store configuration information of a device on a network being monitoring, to identify IP addresses of networks to which a plurality of terminals belong, as branch IP addresses. Further, the path information generation part uses the configuration information tables and transfer destination information tables which store a routing table of a router on the network, in order to identify the connection order of routers between the designated destination IP address and the identified branch IP addresses, to generate path information. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061258 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING REPORTING PERIOD OF CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for determining a reporting period of channel quality indicator. The method includes the steps of: a) estimating a channel gain through a channel received from a base station; b) calculating a weight by using a variable for determining a fairness value and the estimated channel gain, and estimating weight channel quality to the estimated channel gain by using the calculated weight; c) comparing the estimated weight channel quality and a threshold value; and d) feeding back estimated channel quality indicator by using wireless resources assigned for the channel quality indicator feedback only in case that the weight channel quality is higher than the threshold value. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061259 | Network Coding Based on Soft Feedback | 03-11-2010 |
20100061260 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING BURSTING TRAFFIC - A system and method for monitoring bursting traffic of a user. CIR tokens are incremented at a first rate. EIR tokens are incremented at a second rate. At bit is received for communication through a user network interface. A determination is made whether there are EIR tokens in response to a determination that there are no CIR tokens. The EIR tokens are decremented in response to a determination that there are EIR tokens. The bit is communicated through a network in response to the determination that there are EIR tokens. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061261 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING ALARMS BASED ON BURSTING TRAFFIC - A system and method for generating alarms based on traffic bursting. Marked packets are received. A determination is made whether the marked packet conforms with a bandwidth profile. The packet is remarked in response to determining the marked packet does not comply with a CIR threshold and an EIR threshold. An alarm is generated in response to remarking the packet. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061262 | JOINT PACKET DETECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A packet detector joint detects 802.11a packets, 802.11b packets and interference that is within a monitored frequency range but is not formatted as 802.11a packets or 802.11b packets. The packet detector can use signals from one or more antennas. Detection of signals is done using differentially detected correlations. In addition to packet detection, the packet detector can identify signal levels, noise levels and locations of narrowband interference. The process of packet detection and identifying other indicators can be done simultaneously and as the signal is being received. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061263 | DEFINING LOST EVENT TALLEY TAG PACKETS WHEN PET COUNT RATES EXCEED AVAILABLE ACQUISITION BANDWIDTH - A system identifies when received packets are lost at a node in a multi-node processing chain. The system processing chain may include a gantry interface module for receiving coincident event data from a PET (Positron Emission Tomography) detector array, a DMA (direct memory access) rebinner card, and a transmission line coupled between the gantry interface module and the DMA card. FPGA and FIFO elements in each processing portion receive packets that may be lost if there is insufficient FIFO capacity. Lost packets are marked, discarded, and counted. At specified intervals, set in accordance with a threshold number of packets received a lost tally data packet is generated that includes count information for lost packets. The lost tally data packet is forwarded downstream when sufficient storage capacity exists. | 03-11-2010 |
20100067387 | Network Capture Method Using a Transformer - A non-intrusive method to monitor a digital network, the method comprising using a non-intrusive element, connecting to one or more differential lines carrying digital communication on a digital network without physically altering the one or more differential lines or introducing another network device. The method further comprises monitoring the digital communication using the non-intrusive element, capturing a portion of the digital communication using the non-intrusive element, and sending the captured portion of the digital communication to a network analyzer to analyze the captured portion. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067388 | METHOD FOR RESERVING PROPAGATION TIME BY ESTIMATING CHANNEL ENVIRONMENT IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a method for reserving a propagation time by estimating a channel environment in a wireless personal area network. The method includes the steps of: a) measuring a propagation range to the reception station upon starting data transaction with the reception station; b) measuring an average Strength Signal (ARSS) for determining a final transfer speed upon checking a transfer speed corresponding to the propagation range to the measured reception station based on a pre-defined table; c) determining a final transfer speed based on the transfer speed corresponding to the propagation range to the reception station according to a result that the measured ARSS is compared with Upper Bound RSS (URRS) and Lower Bound RSS (LRRS); and d) reserving a next propagation time according to the determined final transfer speed. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067389 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING POWER IN A WCDMA SYSTEM - A method and a device relating to a scheduling mechanism in a base station in a WCDMA system are disclosed. The mechanism enables the base station to rapidly adapt to users momentary traffic demands and to interference variations, a dynamical adjustable margin is proposed in this invention. The adjustment is based on the RoT measurement in a cell. To fully use the resource in a cell, the RoT can be targeted to be as closer to the RoT | 03-18-2010 |
20100067390 | System and method for discovery of network entities - A system and method of discovering network entities. Network traffic is monitored, wherein monitoring includes finding network entities in the network traffic. If the network entities are network assets, the system determines if the network entities are critical network assets. If the network entities are network users, the system classifies the network users automatically into user groups. The network traffic is then displayed as a function of the critical network assets and the user groups. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067391 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VISUALIZING NETWORK SITUATION USING SECURITY CUBE - An apparatus and method for visualizing a network condition related to a network security are provided. The apparatus includes a traffic feature extracting unit, a network condition displaying unit, and a traffic abnormal condition determining unit. The traffic feature extracting unit extracts information including source address, source port, destination address, and destination port from network traffics, selects two of the extracted information, and calculates unique dispersion degrees of two unselected information. The network condition displaying unit displays a two-dimensional cube expressed using the calculated unique dispersion degrees for the classified traffics. The traffic abnormal condition determining unit determines whether the traffics are in an abnormal condition or not based on the two-dimensional security cube. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067392 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access point allows access from at least one user device, which may be a wireless device or a wired local area network device. The access point has radio frequency transceiver circuitry for communicating over a wireless link with a base station selected from a plurality of available base stations, and an antenna, having an adjustable preferred direction for transmission and reception of radio frequency signals. Control circuitry selects a preferred direction for the antenna such that the access point can establish a wireless link with one of said base stations, based on a data rate that is available over the wireless link. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067393 | Packet round trip time measuring method - When a source device measures a packet round trip time RTT from the source device to a sink device, a band management unit allocates a reservation period for transmitting an RTT test command from the source device to the sink device and a reservation period for transmitting an RTT response setting request command from the sink device to the source device within a super frame period. At a start timing of the reservation period, a controller transmits the RTT test command and starts measuring the RTT. Upon receiving the RTT response setting request command, the controller finishes measuring the RTT. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067394 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF REPORTING IN-SERVICE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS IN LAYERED NETWORKS - A system and method of reporting in-service performance statistics in a network. The method includes the steps of a node detecting a problem related to a call connected within the network. A problem notification message is then 5 sent to the MSC. The MSC sends a call release message to one or more nodes within the network. The call release message includes a request to release all resources associated with the call. In response to the release request, the node releases all resources associated with the call. In addition, the node sends a release response message to the MSC. The release response message is 10 modified to include information relating to the call problem, thereby providing network statistics to the MSC. Preferably, the node is a Media Gateway (MGw) which sends a H.248 subtract response message modified to include information on the call problem. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067395 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USING AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating wirelessly from a mobile device to a remote receiver station is disclosed. The system includes a controller configured to monitor a status of the mobile device and, upon an initiation event, initiate a data transfer process to wirelessly communicate data to the remote receiver station. The system also includes a voice-band modem that, upon initiation of the data transfer process is configured to receive data for transfer to the remote receiver station, divide the source data into a collection source packets, and encode the data using a fountain code encoding protocol to form a series of encoded packets. The voice band modem is also configured to transmit the series of encoded packets to the remote receiver station as a burst including all of the source data and repeatedly transmit the encoded packets until receiving an indication that the series of packets including all of the source data has been received at the receiving station. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067396 | OPTIMIZING THROUGHPUT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for optimizing throughput in a wireless communication system is disclosed. A target metric is estimated based on previous acknowledgment data. A channel quality indicator offset is determined based on the target metric. A channel quality indicator is adjusted based on the channel quality indicator offset. The channel quality indicator indicates the quality of a wireless transmission channel. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067397 | Method for determining a data transport unit parameter for the communication between two stations in a network of stations, network device adapted to act as a sending station and network device adapted to act as a receiving station in the method - The invention concerns the technical field of a so-called Path MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) Discovery process between two computing nodes over packet switched networks. On the path between two hosts (H | 03-18-2010 |
20100067398 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING A PATH DISTANCE VALUE AND NETWORK NODES - In a method for determining link and route metrics, in order to determine an optimal path for time-critical transmission such as video telephony or VoIP, for use in routing protocols, the route metric is calculated as the product of the link metrics, wherein the link metrics in turn are calculated from the formula L=1−(1−A | 03-18-2010 |
20100067399 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING PROPOSED SERVICE FEATURES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Method and apparatus for analyzing a proposed service feature in a communication network is described. In one example, a call flow for supporting the service feature in the communication network is created, where at least one network component supports the call flow. First cost data for internally developing the at least one network component is determined. Second cost data for procuring the at least one network component from third party entity is determined. The first cost data and the second cost data are processed to generate a recommendation for either internally developing or externally procuring the at least one network element. | 03-18-2010 |
20100074123 | DYNAMIC MODEM BANDWIDTH CHECKING - Methods, systems, devices, and software are disclosed for providing controlled access to network characteristic data stored at a subscriber premises. In one embodiment, Internet services are provided to a subscriber through a subscriber's modem, connected to the Internet through an access network, and to a number of data terminals on a local network. The modem is adapted to receive and/or generate data from the connected networks and devices for use in generating network characteristic data. This data is stored in an access-controlled data storage module. Content providers may then login to the modem and query network characteristic data. The modem is configured to authenticate the content provider, and, if authorized and available, return the queried data to the content provider. The content provider may then communicate information to the subscriber's data terminal through the modem, according to the network characteristic data returned by the query. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074124 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIMPLIFYING PROTOCOL ANALYSIS - A system and method in accordance with exemplary embodiments may include receiving, from a user system, one or more protocol analysis request messages via a network, transmitting, to one or more multipurpose interface devices, one or more control signals based on the one or more protocol analysis request messages, receiving, from the one or more multipurpose interface devices, protocol analysis data associated with data traffic transmitted on one or more test networks in response to the transmitted control signals, and outputting, to the user system, the protocol analysis data via the network. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074125 | DISCOVERING COMMUNICATION RULES IN A NETWORK TRACE - The claimed subject matter provides a system and/or a method that facilitates managing a network by mining a communication rule. An analysis engine can employ a packet trace within a network in order to provide timing information, wherein the network includes at least one of a host, a protocol, or an application. A traffic evaluator can extract a communication rule for the network based upon an activity matrix generated from the timing information in which the activity matrix includes at least one of a row of a time window for the packet trace and a column for a flow in the packet trace. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074126 | Method and System of Multimedia Service Performance Monitoring - A method and system of multimedia service performance monitoring is provided. The method comprises the following steps: (a) a reference point acquires and stores the association relationship between multimedia packet identification number and the corresponding multimedia information; (b) a sample point orders the received packets according to the multimedia packet identification numbers, detects the integrality of the packets, and feeds the identification numbers of the lost multimedia packets back to the reference point if there are lost packets; (c) the reference point obtains the corresponding multimedia information according to the identification numbers of the lost multimedia packets returned by the sample point and the stored association relationship between the multimedia packet identification number and the corresponding multimedia information, and then evaluates the multimedia service quality of the sample point. The method and system of multimedia according to the present invention is beneficial to digital copyright management, avoids the extra process of decoding multimedia in the server, and is beneficial to monitor the multimedia service performance for a plurality of receiving ends at the server. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074127 | CHANNEL MEASUREMENTS ON COMBINED PILOT SIGNALA IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEMS - In a base station and a mobile station the pilot signal power in all carriers are combined for example by using an MRC (Maximum Ratio Combination) algorithm. Physical layer measurement such as Up-Link Synchronization and Angle of Arrival (AoA) are performed based on the combined received signal. The method results in that the measurement errors can be significantly reduced. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074128 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus for communicating to a mobile station over an uplink shared channel includes a transmit instruction unit configured to assign an uplink shared channel to the mobile station and instruct the mobile station to conduct transmissions over the assigned uplink shared channel; a measurement unit configured to measure a radio quality of the assigned uplink shared channel; and a determination unit configured to determine based on the radio quality whether the mobile station has transmitted data over the assigned uplink shared channel. In addition, a communication control method at a base station apparatus for communicating to a mobile station over an uplink shared channel includes assigning an uplink shared channel to the mobile station and instructing the mobile station to conduct transmissions over the assigned uplink shared channel; measuring a radio quality of the uplink shared channel assigned to the mobile station; and determining based on the radio quality whether the mobile station has transmitted data over the assigned uplink shared channel. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074129 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING A NETWORK LOCATING A TARGET NODE - The supporting of a network locating a target node is disclosed. The supporting of a network locating a target node includes a User Equipment (UE) transmitting a measurement report message to a source evolved Node B (eNB), the measurement report message including a measurement result of signal quality of a target eNB; the source eNB transmitting a message to a core network node, the message including a type of the target eNB; if the target eNB is a Home Node B (HNB), the core network node transmitting a switching message to a target eNB GateWay (GW) or the target eNB. The Mobility Management Entity (MME) can determine whether the UE is allowed to access the target HNB, and the MME can locate the proper HNB GW. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074130 | Preamble Group Selection in Random Access of Wireless Networks - A transport block size (TBS) of a first uplink message (RACH Msg3) transmitted on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) during a random access procedure in a User Equipment (UE) accessing a radio access network may be determined by receiving a pathloss threshold parameter. A downlink pathloss value indicative of radio link conditions between the UE and a base station (eNB) serving the UE is then determined. A smaller value of TBS is selected from a set of TBS values if the determined pathloss value is greater than an operating power level of the UE minus the pathloss threshold parameter. A larger value of TBS is selected if the pathloss value is less than the operating power level of the UE minus the pathloss threshold parameter and the TBS required to transmit the RACH Msg3 exceeds the smaller TBS value. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074131 | POWER OFFSET FOR CQI REPORTING - In one embodiment, the transmitter is for use with a cellular communication network and includes an offset determination unit configured to select a shift parameter for a channel quality indication, wherein the shift parameter corresponds to an adjustment in an energy per resource element ratio for reporting the channel quality indication. The transmitter also includes a sending unit configured to signal the shift parameter. In another embodiment, a receiver is for use with a cellular communication network and includes a reception unit that receives a transmission. The receiver also includes an offset interpretation unit configured to interpret a shift parameter for a channel quality indication from the transmission, wherein the shift parameter corresponds to an adjustment in an energy per resource element ratio for reporting the channel quality indication. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074132 | Systems for Providing Feedback to Sending Entities - Systems for providing feedback to sending entities are provided. In some embodiments, systems for providing feedback to at least one sending entity that sends requests are provided, the systems comprising: a receiving entity comprising at least one processor that: determines a number of active sources associated with each of the at least one sending entity; determines a number of sessions that each of the at least one sending entity is able to accept based on the number of active sources determined; and provides an indication of the number of sessions to each corresponding one of the at least one sending entity. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074133 | METHOD ON LOCALIZATION MESSAGE PROCESS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF WIRELESS NODES - Provided is a method for localization message process. The method includes allocating cluster resources for recognizing a location of a mobile node, setting operation of each node by deciding a cluster operation state for the mobile node, measuring distances between the mobile node to each of anchor nodes, and recognizing a location of the mobile node. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074134 | BAND ALLOCATION METHOD FOR ALLOCATING A PAIR OF RESERVATION PERIODS FOR MEASURING PACKET ROUND TRIP TIME - Upon measuring a packet round trip time RTT from a source device to a sink device, the source device requests a band management unit of a network to allocate bands for round trip packets. The band management unit notifies a reservation period Tsource for transmitting a packet from the source device to the sink device and a reservation period Tsink for sending back a packet from the sink device to the source device, using a beacon signal. The reservation period Tsource is allocated within a time period starting from a middle timing of a time cycle Tbeacon of the beacon signal, and the reservation period Tsink is allocated at a middle timing between the reservation period Tsource and the beacon signal right after the reservation period Tsource. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074135 | Distributed Packet Group Identification For Network Testing - There is disclosed a method, an apparatus, a computing device, and a storage medium for testing a network. A plurality of packets may be received. A packet group identification number for each packet may be determined by extracting two or more packet group identification fields from the packet, each packet group identification field located at a respective offset from one of a signature field, a start of the packet, a start of an IP header, and a start of a protocol header; and combining the two or more packet group identification fields to form the packet group identification number. The network testing system may measure, compile, and store performance statistics for packets having the same packet group identification number. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074136 | HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE INCLUDING VOICE OVER IP QUALITY INDICATOR, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD - A method of placing a call from a handheld device to a receiving device using VoIP includes initiating the call, transmitting a plurality of voice data packets to the receiving device, determining whether the receiving device has detected one or more missing or delayed packets, and providing a poor voice service indicator if it is determined that the receiving device has detected one or more missing or delayed data packets. Also, a method of placing a call to a receiving device over a network system which allocates bandwidth includes sending a request to the network system for a bandwidth allocation for the telephone call, determining whether the request has been granted, providing a poor voice service indicator to the user of the handheld electronic device if it is determined that the request has not been granted, and transmitting a plurality of voice data packets to the receiving device. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074137 | ZONE BASED QUALITY OF SERVICE IN A FIBRE CHANNEL FABRIC - Methods and apparatus are provided for improving the configuration, management, and distribution of quality of service information in a fibre channel fabric using zoning mechanisms. Configuration of Quality of Service (QoS) information is made easy by using zones as a classifier for flows. QoS information is included in zone objects, thereby using the existing zone distribution mechanism to distribute QoS information. Devices not part of any zones are placed automatically in the default zone with a default QoS priority level. QoS information for a particular packet is available as soon as the zoning information is obtained. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074138 | TELEPHONE APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - There is provided a telephone apparatus for communicating with a different telephone apparatus via a network, including a telephone apparatus table in which first use type information indicating a type of use preset for the telephone apparatus is registered in association with telephone apparatus information identifying the telephone apparatus, a position table in which second use type information indicating the type of use preset for a position of the telephone apparatus is registered in association with the position, a position detection part detecting a present position of the telephone apparatus of concern, and a sensing part sensing an incoming call from the different telephone apparatus, a detection part detecting a telephone apparatus on a calling side when the sensing part senses the incoming call. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074139 | Systems and Methods of Measuring Data Transport Utilization - The disclosure is generally directed to a system and method of measuring transport utilization of data that is to be multiplexed and transmitted over a digital transport facility. In a particular embodiment, the system includes a traffic management reporting device to provide a report including performance information. The performance information is determined based at least in part on a count of stuff bits included in a user data frame having a fixed size payload. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080132 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF POTENTIAL LINKS BETWEEN PROCESSING ELEMENTS - According to some embodiments, first and second processing elements may be provided on a die, and there may be a plurality of potential communication links between the first and second processing elements. Moreover, control logic may be provided on the die to dynamically activate at least some of the potential communication links (e.g., based on a current bandwidth appropriate between the first and second processing elements). | 04-01-2010 |
20100080133 | MEDIA SESSION IDENTIFICATION METHOD FOR IP NETWORKS - A method of allocating, restricting or refusing communication resources to media sessions in accordance with individual session or session type, comprises: categorizing passing packets using packet traffic characteristics such as packet length or inter-arrival period; grouping together those packets having similar traffic characteristics, and analyzing the grouped packets for session characteristics, thereby to identify a session type and allocate resources to the session or provisioning or like actions or services. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080134 | BACKGROUND SCANNING METHOD FOR WLAN CLIENT DEVICES - Background scan for 802.11 client devices allows them to keep most of its components in low power mode when certain criteria are not met. A method for changing dynamically those criteria according to the air data traffic conditions is described in the present invention. This increases the time the system remains in sleep mode and consequently improves the standby current consumption to portable 802.11 enabled media. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080135 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station for communicating with a mobile station which transmits an uplink signal according to a frequency division multiplexing scheme includes a first measurement unit configured to measure reception power on a frequency band for the random access channel in uplink or a second measurement unit configured to measure the number of receptions of preambles on the random access channel. The base station may either control the frequency band for the random access channel or restrict transmission on the random access channel based on at least one of the reception power on the frequency band for the random access channel and the number of receptions of preambles on the random access channel. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080136 | UPLINK TRANSMIT DIVERSITY ENHANCEMENT - A method for uplink transmit diversity enhancement is described. Two or more potential uplink transmission configurations are determined. Each potential uplink transmission configuration is evaluated. An uplink transmission configuration is selected based on the evaluation. Metrics of the selected uplink transmission configuration are determined. Cycle adaptation parameters are adjusted. The selected uplink transmission configuration is applied for an extended use period. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080137 | Primary and Secondary Associations for Improving Cell Edge Performance in Cellular Networks - Embodiments of the invention provide a method to efficiently enable Network MIMO for use in the downlink direction. An association is established between a primary NodeB in a first cell and a secondary NodeB in an adjacent second cell. A set of downlink transmission resources is reserved for use by both the primary NodeB and the secondary NodeB. A transport block is transmitted from the secondary NodeB simultaneously with the primary NodeB to a user equipment (UE) near the edge of the first cell in response to a schedule provided by the primary NodeB. A time instance of the reserved transmission resources is released by the secondary NodeB when no simultaneous transmission of a transport block is scheduled within a minimum time. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080138 | DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD - Disclosed herein is a data processing apparatus including: an adjusting section configured to receive a stream including packets and a start flag indicative of the beginning of each of the packets in the stream, adjust a rate of the stream to a certain rate, and output the adjusted stream that is the stream after the rate adjustment and the start flag indicative of the beginning of each of the packets in the adjusted stream; a monitoring section configured to monitor a packet interval that is a start interval between the packets in the adjusted stream on the basis of the start flag; and an output control section configured to execute output control of outputting the packets in the adjusted stream if the packet interval is a normal interval and restricting the outputting of the packets in the adjusted stream if the packet interval is an abnormal interval. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080139 | TECHNIQUES FOR SUPPORTING RELAY OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Techniques for supporting operation of relay stations in wireless communication systems are described. In an aspect, a bitmap may be sent by a base station and/or a relay station to identify subframes of at least two types in multiple radio frames. For example, the bitmap may indicate whether each subframe covered by the bitmap is of a first type or a second type. UEs may use the bitmap to control their operation. For example, a UE may perform channel estimation or measurement for the subframes of the first type and may skip channel estimation and measurement for the subframes of the second type. In another aspect, a base station may transmit data and/or control information on resources not used by a relay station to transmit a reference signal. This may avoid interference to the reference signal from the relay station, which may improve performance for UEs communicating with the relay station. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080140 | MANAGING MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS PACKET DATA SERVICE TRAFFIC IN REAL-TIME - The invention allows managing mobile telecommunications packet data service traffic. Packet data service traffic of a mobile telecommunications network is received from data collectors. The service traffic is stored in a traffic file. The traffic file is split into service specific capture files. The capture files are stored. Key information is extracted from the capture files for entry points of the network. The key information is stored in entry point specific tables. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080141 | Network system, monitoring device, information processing device, information processing method, computer-readable recording medium - A network system includes plural information processing devices mutually connected through a network. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080142 | Automatic Detection of Channel Bandwidth - A step-wise approach to automatically determining the bandwidth of a communication channel includes dividing the channel's potential bandwidth into a number of ranges. An initial range is then selected and a series of data packets specific to the selected range are transmitted from a first endpoint to a second endpoint, with the second endpoint determining one or more channel metrics based on the transmitted packets (e.g., measured transmission rates). If the metrics indicate the current range accurately reflects the channel's bandwidth, a measured transmission rate of the transmitted data packets is used as the channel's bandwidth. Otherwise, another range is selected and the process is repeated. The described approach rapidly determines channel bandwidth, even when the channel between the two endpoints is asymmetric. Techniques described herein are particularly beneficial when used in conjunction with multimedia conferencing applications. | 04-01-2010 |
20100085880 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Method and arrangement in a first node for requesting a status report from a second node. The first node and the second node are both comprised within a wireless communication network. The status report comprises positive and/or negative acknowledgement of data sent from the first node, to be received by the second node. The first node comprises a first counter configured to count the number of transmitted Protocol Data Units, PDUS, and a second counter configured to count the number of transmitted data bytes. The method and arrangements comprises initialising the first and the second counter to zero, transmitting data to be received by the second node, comparing the value of the first and the second counters with a first threshold limit value and a second threshold limit value and requesting a status report from the second node if any of the threshold limit values is reached or exceeded. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085881 | Wireless Communication System, Wireless Communication Terminal, Base Station and Wireless Communication Method - Provided is a wireless communication system for performing communication using a shared control channel that can be used in a predetermined period for each of a plurality of base stations and a plurality of traffic channels that can be adaptively allocated to each of a plurality of wireless communication terminals. The wireless communication terminal is provided with a channel requesting unit that requests the base station to allocate an individual control channel through the shared control channel and a communication control unit that performs control information communication by wirelessly connecting the individual control channel allocated from the base station. The base station is provided with a channel allocating unit that allocates one of the traffic channels as the individual control channel to be exclusively used for the wireless communication terminal when the request of individual control channel allocation is received from the wireless communication terminal through the shared control channel. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085882 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LEAST SIGNIFICANT STATION, AND INTERMEDIATE STATION - In a lower-level station ( | 04-08-2010 |
20100085883 | APPLICATION DETECTION ARCHITECTURE AND TECHNIQUES - An application detection architecture and related techniques are provided for detecting, identifying, and managing network-based applications. In various embodiments, a combined layered approach to application detection and various application-detection techniques provide for quick assessments that move from simplest to complex for rapid detection of unauthorized or misbehaving applications in communication with one or more computer networks. This layering, in some embodiments, further provides scalability and speed for determining and implementing policies that may be applicable to detected network-based application, users, groups, or devices associated with unauthorized network-based applications sending or receiving data via a computer network. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085884 | DYNAMIC TOPOLOGICAL ADAPTATION - Apparatus and methods for reconfiguration of a communication environment based on loading requirements. Network operations are monitored and analyzed to determine loading balance across the network or a portion thereof. Where warranted, the network is reconfigured to balance the load across multiple network entities. For example, in a cellular-type of network, traffic loads and throughput requirements are analyzed for the access points and their user equipment. Where loading imbalances occur, the cell coverage areas of one or more access points can be reconfigured to alleviate bottlenecks or improve balancing. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085885 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In a ring type network, a master node sends a measurement packet to a slave node in the backward direction and the forward direction, receives the measurement packet which has been circulated among a plurality of slave nodes, stores a received time of the backward direction measurement packet and a sending time of the forward direction measurement packet according to time-keeping of an internal clock, sends a measurement result notifying packet showing a sending time and a received time of the measurement packet to the slave node; each slave node receives the backward direction measurement packet and the forward direction measurement packet, sends the received measurement packet to the next node, stores the received time of the backward direction measurement packet and the sending time of the forward direction measurement packet according to the time-keeping of the internal clock, receives a measurement result notifying packet, calculates a time correction value using the sending time and the received time of the measurement packet shown in the measurement result notifying packet and the sending time and the received time of the measurement packet stored, and corrects a time of the internal clock using the calculated time correction value. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085886 | PACKET DELAY CHARACTERISTIC MEASURING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A packet delay characteristic measuring apparatus that can accurately only measure a delay in a network even if a delay may occur also in a device that receives packets. The apparatus includes: a sending section for periodically sending out test packets each including sending time information to the network; a branching section for handing over the test packets flowing from the network to each of a plurality of communication paths by electrically branching a communication path; a plurality of receiving sections each of which is connected to the branching section for receiving the identical test packets and calculating delay times based on the sending time information; and a measurement value determining section for comparing a plurality of delay times calculated by each of the plurality of receiving sections for the identical test packets and determining the smallest delay time value as a measurement value. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085887 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING THE WINDOW SIZE OF A TCP PACKET THROUGH NETWORK ELEMENTS - A system for adjusting the window size of a TCP packet on a packet network including a sending network element in communication with a receiving network element for transmitting and receiving data packets between the sending network element and the receiving network element on the packet network, wherein at least one of the sending network element and the receiving network element is configured to determine network performance information of the packet network; concatenate the network performance information into the data packets; and adjust the window size of the TCP packet based on the network performance information. A method for adjusting the window size of a TCP packet on a packet network is also included. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085888 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING SOURCE INTERNET PROTOCOL ACTIVITY IN A NETWORK - Method and apparatus for analyzing source Internet protocol (SIP) activity in a network is described. In one example, a SIP address is obtained. Log data collected over a predefined time period by a plurality of network facilities is automatically queried using the SIP address as parametric input to generate a report. The report includes sample activity for the SIP and statistics for targeted network facilities, firewall activity, targeted network spaces, and targeted IP addresses. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085889 | Statistical, Signature-Based Approach to IP Traffic Classification - A signature-based traffic classification method maps traffic into preselected classes of service (CoS). By analyzing a known corpus of data that clearly belongs to identified ones of the preselected classes of service, in a training session the method develops statistics about a chosen set of traffic features. In an analysis session, relative to traffic of the network where QoS treatments are desired (target network), the method obtains statistical information relative to the same chosen set of features for values of one or more predetermined traffic attributes that are associated with connections that are analyzed in the analysis session, yielding a statistical features signature of each of the values of the one ore more attributes. A classification process then establishes a mapping between values of the one or more predetermined traffic attributes and the preselected classes of service, leading to the establishment of QoS treatment rules. | 04-08-2010 |
20100091666 | Discovering Parameters for a Communications Link - To dynamically adjust at least one setting of an interface to a communications link in a system, in response to receiving an indication of a change in a characteristic of the communications link, a representation of potential solutions for parameters associated with the communications link is constructed. From the representation, at least one solution is selected from among the potential solutions, where the selected at least one solution specifies values for the parameters that define the at least one setting for the interface to the communications link. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091667 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - The present invention relates to resource management in a telecommunication system. In particular the invention relates to detection and estimation of transport network load and optimization of transport network resources. According to the method and arrangement of the invention a serving node engaged in admission control identifies a transport network interface from which transport load measurements are required for the admission control, and a target radio network node related to the identified transport network interface. The serving radio network node configure the target radio network node to perform and report measurements on the transport network interface. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091668 | COMMUNICATION QUALITY EVALUATION SYSTEM, DEVICE, METHOD, AND PROGRAM THEREOF - A communication quality evaluation system, a device, a method, and a program for evaluating communication quality at an arbitrary location, in the form which can actually felt by a user, are provided. According to an instruction from an evaluator, a control device displays a map or layout diagram of a specified area on a map/layout diagram display device and specifies an evaluation point within a display range of the map or the layout diagram. According to the network quality estimated by a network quality estimation unit, a network quality simulation unit for estimating the network quality when communications are performed at the evaluation point deteriorates the evaluation data and transmits the data to an evaluation device. The evaluation data deteriorated is a sample of data actually transmitted and received in the communication system. The evaluation device uses a communication device actually used by a user in the communication system. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091669 | METHOD TO SELECT ACCESS POINT AND RELAY NODE IN MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORKING - A method and apparatus are described for selecting an access point in a wireless network, including initializing a channel index, recording a received signal power and information contained in one of a beacon message and a probe request response message, calculating an access link metric for each candidate access point, the access link metric being between an end device and each candidate access point on the channel indexed by the channel index responsive to the received signal power and information receiving a path metric between each candidate access point and a gateway, estimating a function using the access link metric and the path metric, selecting one of the candidate access points based on the function and establishing a connection with the selected access point. Also described is a method and apparatus for maintaining a connection with an access point. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091670 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ALLOW COEIXTENCE BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - The present invention relates generally to wireless transceivers, and more particularly but not exclusively to non 802.11 detection and avoidance methodologies for wireless devices including transceivers. In one or more implementations, a method for detecting non 802.11 operating in the unlicensed 5.25-5.35 and 5.47-10.725 GHz radio bands, using wireless devices, such as AP, are provided. An AP is used to automatically detect the presence of non 802.11 on all channels in these bands, alert all of its clients, and move to another channel that is known to be devoid of non 802.11 using one or more implementations. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091671 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR CONTROLLING SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENTS IN A MOBILE NETWORK - A method and an arrangement in a service assurance module for controlling service level agreements for communication services in a mobile services access network. A network performance rule is created for a service level agreement, and is based on an associated performance indicator indicating the current network performance with respect to the fulfillment of the service level agreement. The performance indicator is then monitored, and the network performance rule is evaluated on a regular basis based on the performance indicator. If the network performance rule is not satisfied, an agreement violation is registered and/or measures are' taken to improve the network performance. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091672 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus for communicating a mobile station over a downlink shared channel includes a reception unit configured to receive acknowledgement information for the downlink shared channel from the mobile station over a control channel frequency-multiplexed with an uplink shared channel, a measurement unit configured to measure a radio quality of the control channel, and a determination unit configured to determine based on the radio quality whether the mobile station has transmitted the acknowledgement information. Also, a communication control method at a base station apparatus for communicating a mobile station over a downlink shared channel includes receiving acknowledgement information for the downlink shared channel from the mobile station over a control channel frequency-multiplexed with an uplink shared channel, measuring a radio quality of the control channel, and determining based on the radio quality whether the mobile station has transmitted the acknowledgement information. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091673 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication apparatus includes a reception unit configured to receive packets in multiple formats in which two or more different types of preamble information and intra-header control information are multiplexed, a demodulation and decode unit configured to demodulate and decode the received packets, and a measurement unit configured to measure a sending end time of the reception packets by selectively referring to any one of the intra-header control information on the basis of a transmission mode supported by the demodulation and decode unit. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091674 | Radio Carrier Identification Methods and Apparatus - A user equipment (UE) in a communication system measures the power received in a bandwidth on possible downlink carriers in a frequency band that is supported by the UE in order to search for available carriers. Search times can be decreased on average by using a specially configured filter to process the received power measurements and then determining likely carriers based on the filtered values. Metrics from the filter can be used to indicate both where to perform cell search and where not to perform cell search. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091675 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication system which includes a transmitter and receiver each having two or more antennae, the system including: a channel condition determining unit which determines a condition of a channel between the transmitter and the receiver; and a system control unit which changes a transmitting system in the transmitter and a receiving system in the receiver in accordance with a determination result obtained by the channel condition determining unit. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091676 | Multi-Segment Network Application Monitoring and Correlation Architecture - A system, method and computer program product are provided for network and network application monitoring. Accordingly, one or more media modules are each coupled to an associated network segment. In the case of network application monitoring, each media module is coupled to a network segment on which a network application is running. Each media module monitors and collects data relating to traffic on the associated network segment corresponding to the network application, wherein each media module is tailored for network analysis. An application server module is coupled to the at least one media module and receives the data and analyzes the data for helping to improve the performance of the network and/or network application. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091677 | WEB SERVER AND METHOD FOR HOSTING A WEB PAGE FOR PRESENTING LOCATION BASED USER QUALITY DATA RELATED TO A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A web-server communicates wireless networking performance data that reflects the true user experience of a mobile device operating in a particular location and operating on a particular wireless network. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091678 | DOWNLINK RANK INDICATION AND UPLINK RANK REPORTING FOR DEDICATED BEAMFORMING - A network transmitter and receiver are for use with a network MIMO super cell. The network transmitter includes a rank control unit configured to provide a rank indication for a dedicated beamforming transmission from the network MIMO super cell, wherein the rank indication corresponds to spatial multiplexing of multiple data streams for the dedicated beamforming transmission. The network transmitter also includes a transmission unit configured to signal the rank indication. The network receiver includes a reception unit configured to receive a dedicated beamforming transmission within the network MIMO super cell. The network receiver also includes a rank processing unit configured to process a rank indication for the dedicated beamforming transmission corresponding to spatial multiplexing of multiple data streams for the dedicated beamforming transmission. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091679 | AUTOMATED INTEROPERABILITY ASSESSMENTS BASED ON ITERATIVE PROFILING AND EMULATION OF SIP OR T.38 FAX-RELAY ENABLED DEVICES - A system for and method of efficient interoperability assessment based on automated Behavioral Profiling and Emulation of SIP or T.38 Fax-relay Enabled Devices, for example, for profiling and emulating VoIP Phones such as SIP Phones, or T.38 Fax-relay devices such as Internet Aware Fax Terminals. The method includes a Multi-step/Multi-technology Iterative Profiling Stage that allows creating a Behavioral Profile based on the analysis of a plurality of traffic samples. Also, the method presents an efficient process of Device Emulation of an actual device to be used in interoperability assessment, including a Standard State Machine parameterized by a set of characteristics stored in the Behavioral Profile. The Emulation method can be used to duplicate one or more device behaviors exhibited either by different firmware revisions, software upgrades or by different OEM product models. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091680 | Method of transmitting control signal in wireless communication system - A method of transmitting a control signal in a wireless communication system includes receiving data or a control signal, and transmitting a feedback signal through a control channel in response to the data or the control signal, wherein the control channel comprises a plurality of mini-tiles in a plurality of tiles, each of which consists of at least one orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol in a time domain and at least one subcarrier in a frequency domain, and if the plurality of tiles have the same pilot pattern, the plurality of mini-tiles are cyclically selected from the plurality of tiles, and if the plurality of tiles have cyclically-arranged pilot patterns, the plurality of mini-tiles are selected at the same position from the plurality of tiles. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091681 | VLAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION SYSTEM, METHOD AND PROGRAM - It is possible to identify a communication range even for a communication across a plurality of VLAN in a network having a plurality of communication paths because of a redundant switch configuration when managing switch VLAN setting information. A device having a predetermined VLAN-ID is made to be a KEY and a device having a predetermined VLAN-ID which can perform communication from the device is made to be a VALUE. A VLAN communication enabled/disabled hash table is created for expressing each of KEYs and VALUEs as a set of a device name and a VLAN-ID. By referencing a redundant configuration table indicating a redundant configuration and a routing table indicating whether routing is enabled, form a KEY specified as a start point for a network administrator, a VALUE which can be communicated from the KEY is identified and the VALUE is used as a KEY to follow a path. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091682 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REMOTELY DETECTING PARASITE SOFTWARE - An IP usage pattern of a first computer system is monitored by a second computer system that is remotely located from the first computer system. The second computer system is associated with an ISP. First parasite software may be identified based on an abnormal change in the IP usage pattern. The abnormal change in the IP usage pattern may be detected by comparing the IP usage pattern to a baseline model of IP usage for the first computer system. Anti-parasite software associated with the first parasite software may be forwarded from the ISP to the first computer system. | 04-15-2010 |
20100097945 | Centralized Analysis and Management of Network Packets - This description provides tools and techniques for centralized analysis and management of network packets. These tools may provide methods that include storing network packets as identified by packet-detecting devices within networks. These methods may also define baseline behavior patterns applicable to the network, as well as thresholds applicable to deviations in network behavior, relative to the baseline behavior patterns. These methods may also identify attacks against the network, as exhibited by deviations in the behavior patterns that exceed the threshold. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097946 | OPTIMIZED DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN APPROACHING DEVICES - A method, system, and computer program product are disclosed for passively sensing with a hot spot wireless device, a presence of beacon messages from any other wireless devices within a coverage area, ignoring active beacon group merging operations, allowing a mobile wireless device to join in the beacon group, within the coverage area and exchanging beacon messages with the mobile wireless device, actively sensing by exchanging a sequence of test frames with the mobile wireless device using a plurality of modes supported by both the mobile wireless device and the hot spot wireless device, and exchanging data with the mobile wireless device after the actively sensing step. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097947 | VoIP Network Element Performance Detection for IP NSEP Special Service - A system and method for receiving performance measurements for a communications network, generating alerts based on each performance measurement and a corresponding performance threshold, receiving network traps from network elements of the communications network, each network trap being generated by the network element based on a process measurement and a corresponding process threshold and correlating the alerts and the network traps to generate correlated alerts. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097948 | CHARACTERIZATION OF CO-CHANNEL INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed herein is a method for characterizing interference in a radio communication system including a plurality of radio transceiver stations configured to communicate with user equipments, the method including: measuring, by a user equipment in radio communication with a serving transceiver station, quantities indicative of interference from interfering transceiver stations; sending the measured quantities to the serving transceiver station; associating at least one codebook with the serving transceiver station, the codebook including a number of codewords each representing a respective quantized interference situation in an area covered by the serving transceiver station; and identifying in the codebook a codeword representative of the quantities measured by the user equipment. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097949 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION - A method for efficiently transmitting and receiving feedback information is disclosed. A cluster size as a unit for computing the feedback information and a reporting period of the feedback information are not uniformly determined by a base station. Information about a downlink channel status of each user equipment is reported, the cluster size and feedback period for computing and reporting the feedback information are determined using the information about the downlink channel status of each user equipment, and the feedback information is transmitted/received, thereby improving system capability. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097950 | IN ONE OR MORE NETWORK COEXISTABLE ENVIRONMENT, A METHOD FOR DETERMINING WHETHER A SPECIFIC CHANNEL IS AVAILABLE OR NOT, A METHOD FOR RECEIVING A SIGNAL FOR DETECTING AND A METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN COEXISTENCE WITH A DIFFERENT KIND OF NETWORK - Network communication and more particularly a method for determining whether a specific channel is available or not in an environment a plurality of networks can coexist are disclosed. In addition, a method for increasing a range for detecting a signal of a different type of network using a signal composed of a narrowband signal as a signal for detecting the different type of network is disclosed. Furthermore, a method for performing communication in an environment in which one or more communication networks and more particularly different types of networks coexist is disclosed. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097951 | DETECTING AND DISCRIMINATING BETWEEN INTERFERENCE CAUSED BY DIFFERENT WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES - There is provided a method and a device for detecting interfering radio technologies. The method in accordance with the invention is applicable in order to detect and identify possible interfering technologies that can be found, e.g., in the 2.4 GHz ISM band, by use of a device having a single transceiver which is adapted to employ a first wireless radio access technology. For example, a device having an IEEE 102.15.4 cordless transceiver is able to identify according to the method in accordance with the invention radio signals sent by disquieters which use other interfering technologies by use of only this transceiver. The device can for example be a sensor of a wireless body sensor network. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097952 | Method and System for Classifying Communication Signals in a Dynamic Spectrum Access System - Methods and systems for dynamic spectrum access (DSA) in a wireless network are provided. A DSA-enabled device may sense spectrum use in a region and, based on the detected spectrum use, select one or more communication channels for use. The devices also may detect one or more other DSA-enabled devices with which they can form DSA networks. A DSA network may monitor spectrum use by cooperative and non-cooperative devices, to dynamically select one or more channels to use for communication while avoiding or reducing interference with other devices. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097953 | ESTIMATION OF BANDWIDTH REQUIREMENTS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK WITH ACCESS CONTROLS - In one aspect, a method for estimating the bandwidth requirements for a transmission between an input node and an output node of a network with access controls is provided. According to the method, with respect to a time period, the sum of the value of the average bandwidth of the traffic that has been transmitted between the nodes during the time period and the weighted value of the accumulated bandwidth of the declined reservation requests is calculated. An efficient, approximate determination of the traffic matrix of the network and thus an optimal new definition of the limits for the access controls is permitted. This provides particular advantages in terms of efficiency and resources for applications in networks with a dynamic adaptation of the access controls to modified traffic situations. | 04-22-2010 |
20100097954 | Apparatus and an Associated Method for Facilitating Communications in a Radio Communication System That Provides for Data Communications at Multiple Data Rates - Apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating operation of a radio communication system that provides for multi rate data communications, such as a CDMA 2000 system that provides for 1xEV-DV communication services. A supplemental pilot, or control, signal generator embodied at a mobile station generates a supplemental pilot, or control, signal that is sent on a newly defined supplemental pilot, or control, channel. As the data rates of data communicated upon a reverse supplemental channel changes, corresponding changes are made to the power level of the reverse supplemental pilot, or control, signal. | 04-22-2010 |
20100103827 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING INTERNET-WIDE TRANSMISSION PATH AND TRANSMISSION DELAY - Disclosed herein is a system and method for estimating an Internet-wide transmission path and transmission delay. The system includes indexing construction means configured to function as storage for storing the results of actual measurement of transmission delay for all destinations on the Internet, and configured to, in order to search for necessary actual measurement results using Autonomous System (AS) numbers, translate IP addresses constituting the actual measurement results into AS numbers and index respective path segments with AS numbers, mapping means for mapping the IP addresses of queried two points to AS numbers, AS path estimation means for estimating an AS path between the two AS numbers, and path stitching means for searching for respective path segments constituting the estimated AS path, stitching the found path segments together and stitching IP paths corresponding to the AS path, thereby obtaining a plurality of stitched paths and corresponding transmission delay. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103828 | CELLULAR SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION PATH QUALITY MEASURING METHOD, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A cellular system comprises a mobile station and a base station. The mobile station includes a means for transmitting a pilot signal synchronized with data transmission and a means for transmitting a pilot signal not synchronized with data transmission. The base station includes a means for measuring an interference power based on the received power of the field of the pilot signal synchronized with data transmission, a means for measuring a desired wave power based on the received power of the field of the pilot signal not synchronized with data transmission, and a means for estimating the channel quality of the mobile station based on the interference power and the desired wave power. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103829 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A telecommunications system having a plurality of access networks, each of which can provide a facility for mobile terminals to communicate data in accordance with a communications service when in a coverage area provided by the access networks. The telecommunications system includes a mobility manager which receives network evaluation messages from a mobile terminal which provide an indication of a quality of communications available via a communications link with one or more of the plurality of access networks, which are currently available for communicating data. The mobility manager identifies one of the access networks with which the mobile terminal should be affiliated for communicating the data via a communications link provided with the access network based on an amount of power, which the mobile terminal may consume when communicating via the identified access network, and communicates an instruction to the mobile terminal to change affiliation to the identified access network. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103830 | Integrity of Low Bandwidth Communications - The invention relates to a method for checking the integrity of a set of data packets received by a receiving communication device from a sending communication device, the data packets of the set being received in unpredictable order. The invention also relates to a communication device implementing a method according to the invention, in particular to a smart card. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103831 | CONTROLLING ACCESS TO AN IP-BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK VIA ACCESS POINT MANAGEMENT - An access point management facility manages use of an access point configured for IP-based communications in a telecommunications system. The facility allows for the establishment of one or more static and/or dynamic parameters for limiting use of the access point for IP-based communications. The facility monitors traffic on the access point and determines whether any requests for use of the access point complies with the parameters for limiting use. The facility then denies or redirects a request for use of the access point if otherwise permitting the request would not comply with the parameters for limiting use of the access point. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103832 | Feedback Apparatus, Feedback Method, Scheduling Apparatus, And Scheduling Method - A scheduling apparatus in a MIMO control station for switching between SU-MIMO mode and MU-MIMO mode receives feedback information from each of a plurality of MIMO terminals. The scheduling apparatus comprises a SU-MIMO selecting unit that selects a terminal that has a SU-MIMO optimal performance metric among all the terminals; a MU-MIMO selecting unit that groups the terminals into at least one set, and selects a set of terminals that have a MU-MIMO optimal performance metric; and a switching unit that compares the SU-MIMO optimal performance metric and the MU-MIMO optimal performance metric to switch between the SU-MIMO mode and the MU-MIMO mode. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103833 | Radio Bearer Specific CQI Reporting - An improved mechanism for providing channel state feedback from a user equipment (UE) | 04-29-2010 |
20100103834 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK NETWORK MIMO IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate generation and processing of control signaling to support uplink network multiple-in-multiple-out (N-MIMO) communication in a wireless communication system. As described herein, respective network nodes associated with an uplink N-MIMO framework can generate channel state information (CSI) corresponding to an uplink channel from a designated network user to the respective nodes. Generated CSI can subsequently be communicated to an uplink anchor node for the network user in order to facilitate rate assignment, scheduling, and/or other operations with respect to the network user. As described herein, CSI generated and reported by respective cells can include channel profiles, carrier/interference profiles, estimated supported uplink rates, or the like. As additionally described herein, supplemental information such as observed interference levels, demodulation indicators, or the like can be communicated to an anchor node and utilized in rate assignment and/or scheduling. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103835 | SCHEDULER AND SCHEDULING METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN MIMO BASED WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A scheduler and scheduling method that may select a data transmission time interval and a data transmitting station are included in a multi-user Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) communication system. An access point may include a receiver to receive channel measurement signals from stations using a plurality of receive antennas; a channel estimation unit to generate channel state matrices with respect to wireless channels formed from the stations to the receive antennas using the channel measurement signals; and a scheduler to select at least one transmitting station from the stations by considering the channel state matrices and a number of the receive antennas. The receiver may receive a data stream from the selected transmitting stations. Stations receive identifiers corresponding to transmitting stations and/or transmitting antennas to identify stations or antennas for transmitting data streams to the access point. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103836 | Remote Optimizing Wireless Wan Modular Transmitter/Bridge - The invention is a modular, optimizing transmitter/bridge device for optimizing placement of a transmitter/bridge for WWAN communication for one or more WWAN service providers, comprising a transmitter/bridge for WWAN communication, including software for identifying signals from the one or more WWAN service providers, a WWAN interface for providing WWAN service from a preselected WWAN service provider in electronic communication with the transmitter/bridge, a connection to a power source in electronic communication with the transmitter/bridge; and a signal strength indicator in electronic communication with the transmitter/bridge for indicating signal strength of a preselected WWAN service. The device will also have a signal strength indicator to allow for optimal placement for maximum wireless connectivity. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103837 | TRANSPARENT PROVISIONING OF NETWORK ACCESS TO AN APPLICATION - An apparatus and method for enhancing the infrastructure of a network such as the Internet is disclosed. A packet interceptor/processor apparatus is coupled with the network so as to be able to intercept and process packets flowing over the network. Further, the apparatus provides external connectivity to other devices that wish to intercept packets as well. The apparatus applies one or more rules to the intercepted packets which execute one or more functions on a dynamically specified portion of the packet and take one or more actions with the packets. The apparatus is capable of analyzing any portion of the packet including the header and payload. Actions include releasing the packet unmodified, deleting the packet, modifying the packet, logging/storing information about the packet or forwarding the packet to an external device for subsequent processing. Further, the rules may be dynamically modified by the external devices. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103838 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVALUATING COMPONENT COSTS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for calculating a cost index in a communication network. In one embodiment, a plurality of first cost factors associated with a first set of network elements is obtained. Subsequently, a plurality of second cost factors associated with a second set of network elements is obtained. A first cost index is then determined based on the plurality of first cost factors associated with the first set of network elements. Similarly, a second cost index is determined based on the plurality of second cost factors associated with the second set of network elements. Afterwards, the first cost index is compared to the second cost index to determine a point in time when a service provider should minimize new investment in the first set of network elements. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103839 | Testing of Transmitters for Communication Links by Software Simulation of Reference Channel and/or Reference Receiver - A transmitter for a communications link is tested by using a (software) simulation of a reference channel and/or a reference receiver to test the transmitter. In one embodiment for optical fiber communications links, a data test pattern is applied to the transmitter under test and the resulting optical output is captured, for example by a sampling oscilloscope. The captured waveform is subsequently processed by the software simulation, in order to simulate propagation of the optical signal through the reference channel and/or reference receiver. A performance metric for the transmitter is calculated based on the processed waveform. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103840 | Techniques for LDPC decoding - Briefly, in accordance with one embodiment of the invention, a device may dynamically select a frequency on which to communicate on a wireless local area network by determining which channels are available and which are unoccupied, for example using a received signal power level measurement. A linear folding algorithm may be used to select an available channel at a midpoint in a larger gap between occupied channels. In the event there are multiple larger gaps of the same size, the larger gap at the higher frequency may be selected. | 04-29-2010 |
20100110905 | METHOD OF PROVIDING POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT SERVICE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of providing a point-to-multipoint service in a mobile communication system and transmission controlling method thereof are disclosed, by which a better quality of a point-to-multipoint service can be provided in a manner of coping with time-variable channel situation variable adaptively. In a mobile communication system providing a point-to-multipoint service, the present invention includes the steps of receiving data for the point-to-multipoint service from a base station, measuring a reception quality for the received point-to-multipoint service data, and transmitting reception quality information for the point-to-multipoint service data to the base station. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110906 | EFFICIENT FULL MESH LOAD TESTING OF NETWORK ELEMENTS - A method for testing a network element that includes multiple ports includes assigning one or more of the ports to serve as input and output test ports. One or more of the ports other than the test ports are terminated with respective loopback connections. The network element is configured to forward packets entering the network element at the input test port, so as to cause the packets to be distributed among the terminated ports and to exit the network element, after re-entering the network element at one or more of the terminated ports, at the output test port. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110907 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING INTERFACE UTILIZATION USING POLICERS - An approach is provided for monitoring interface utilization. Bandwidth data for an interface is collected during a configurable time interval, and a peak utilization of the interface over the time interval is determined using a plurality of incremented policers to measure the collected bandwidth data. An implementation of which is system that includes a monitoring module configured to collect bandwidth data for an interface over a configurable time interval, a plurality of incremented policers configured to measure the collected bandwidth data, and an analysis module configured to determine a peak utilization of the interface over the time interval using the measurements of the plurality of incremented policers. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110908 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ADDING LATENCY AND JITTER TO SELECTED NETWORK PACKETS - A method for adding latency and jitter to a number of selected packets transmitted between end systems within a network of end systems is described. The method includes receiving a packet identifier, the packet identifier indicating a selected packet to which latency and jitter is to be added, receiving a selected latency and jitter for the selected packet, receiving a packet, determining if the received packet is the selected packet, and forwarding the received packet to its destination if the received packet is not the selected packet. If the received packet is the selected packet, the method continues by reading a real time clock, computing a transmit time for the received packet based on the selected latency and jitter for the selected packet, and forwarding the received packet to its destination when the real time clock reaches the computed transmit time. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110909 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING TRAFFIC FLOWS USING DYNAMIC LATENCY CONSTRAINTS - A method and apparatus that use dynamic latency to estimate traffic flows in a communication network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains a demand matrix having at least one point pair demand, and satisfies each of the at least one point pair demand in the demand matrix by selecting a shortest path that minimizes a dynamic latency and a number of hops. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110910 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. An environmental monitoring receiver processes received RF signals over a broadband spectrum and that generates environmental data in response thereto. A processing module processes the environmental data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the environmental data. In an embodiment of the present invention, the environmental monitoring receiver can be implemented via one of the plurality of transceivers when operating in an environmental monitoring mode. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110911 | Method and system for conserving power in powerline network having multiple logical networks - A method and system for conserving power in a powerline network, such as a Homeplug AV (HPAV) network, that has multiple logical networks, such as multiple AV logical networks (AVLN). Power conservation is achieved through the expedient of a packet presence region (PPR) that informs nodes whether or not they need to monitor a shared carrier sense multiple access (CSMA) region in a particular beacon period. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110912 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING THE BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE - The present application discloses a method and system for transmitting a Broadcast/Multicast Service (MBMS), which is used for solving the problem that macro cell coverage of the MBMS and macro diversity combining of multi-cells cannot be implemented efficiently based on a frame structure of the existing Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) system in prior art. The method includes: mapping a channel estimation code and data symbols of a Broadcast/Multicast Service to a resource unit, wherein the channel estimation code is mapped in front of the data symbols in a signal frame at a time slot for all services or a time slot for the MBMS; and transmitting the resource unit. Using the present application, efficiency and performance of transmitting a MBMS are improved, and the multi-cells combining of the MBMS and deployment of the MBMS with a macro cell mechanism are implemented efficiently. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110913 | INTERFERENCE DETECTING DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DETECTING INTERFERENCE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - The present invention relates to a method for detecting interference and an interference detecting device for a wireless communication capable of improving detection accuracy of an interference signal in a wireless communication device without influencing network operation while the interference signal is detected; and, more particularly, to a method for detecting interference and an interference detecting device for a wireless communication to determine an interference signal by increasing an interference packet count according to an RSSI value, its own packet detection, gain reduction, deterioration of signal quality, the number of the same symbols, and so on and comparing an increased interference packet count value with a threshold value by using each ZigBee device as a main constituent of interference detection unlike a conventional method for detecting interference in which a ZigBee coordinator or a ZigBee router is a main constituent of interference detection. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110914 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN WIRELESS COMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a channel quality indicator (CQI) includes obtaining CQIs for each of a plurality of sub-bands, a sub-band comprising a plurality of sub-carriers, dividing the plurality of sub-bands into a plurality of layers according to a CQI of a sub-band, a layer comprising at least one sub-band, obtaining a representative value of a representative layer, the representative layer including a sub-band having maximum CQI and transmitting the representative value of the representative layer. Signaling overhead due to CQI feedback can be reduced. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110915 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INSPECTION OF COMPRESSED DATA PACKAGES - A method for inspection of compressed data packages, which are transported over a data network, is provided. The data packages comprise a data package header containing control data for securing the correct delivery and interpretation of the package and a payload part containing data to be transferred over the data network. The method comprises the steps of: a) extracting payload data from the payload part of the package, b) appending the extracted payload data to a stream of data, c) probing the data package header so as to determine the compression scheme that is applied to the payload data, d) applying the determined compression scheme to at least one search pattern, which has previously been stored in a search key register, and e) comparing the compressed search pattern to the stream of data. The method can be carried out by dedicated hardware. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110916 | Wireless Communication Network Analyzer - A packet controller for simultaneous processing of data packets transmitted via a plurality of communication channels includes a plurality of inputs to receive a respective plurality of signals, such that each of the plurality of signals is indicative of a presence of a data packet on a respective one of the plurality of communication channels, a clock source to supply a periodic clock signal, a plurality of independent processing modules coupled to the respective plurality of inputs to simultaneously process the plurality of signals, such that each of the plurality of independent processing modules implements a respective state machine driven by the periodic clock signal to process the respective signal independently of every other one of the plurality of processing modules, and an output to transmit an output signal indicative of a presence of at least one data packet on one or more of the plurality of communication channels. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110917 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product For Adaptive Reference Symbol Placement - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided that determine the length of an idle period, such as the idle period preceding a DL-to-UL switch point, and then insert a symbol including reference signal(s) (RS) at a position within a downlink slot that varies based upon the length of the idle period. A method, apparatus and computer program product are also provided according to another aspect that determine the length of an idle period, receive a plurality of symbols within a downlink slot and then recognize a symbol including RS at a position within the downlink slot that varies based upon the length of the idle period. Accordingly, the method, apparatus and computer program product permit the position of the symbol including RS within a downlink slot to be varied while still providing the reference signals that are required in order to permit accurate recovery of the data. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110918 | Method and apparatus for performance monitoring in a communications network - A method and device for determining a packet drop indicator, for use in a communication system is described. The method comprises the following steps: A. determining the number of packets sent at a sending side within a first time period; B. determining the number of packets received at a receiving side within a second time period; and C. calculating a packet drop indicator on the basis of said number of sent packets and said number of received packets. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110919 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING DATA CONNECTIONS IN A DATA NETWORK HAVING A PLURALITY OF DATA NETWORK NODES - A method and a device for controlling data connections in a data network including a plurality of data network nodes. The quality of a first data connection is evaluated on the basis of the adaptations of at least one coding used for the first data connection, and a second data connection is established according to the evaluation and used as a replacement for the first data connection. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110920 | METHOD USED FOR RADIO MEASUREMENT AND A COMMUNICATION NODE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method used for radio measurement in a communication network is provided. The communication network comprises multiple basic service sets controlled by a core network controller. The method comprises the steps of: the core network controller issuing a measurement request to a communication node working on a service channel; the communication node switching to a non-service channel based on the measurement request; the communication node broadcasting a measurement beacon in the non-service channel and returning to the service channel immediately after the broadcasting; a node in the non-service channel receiving the measurement beacon; and based on the measurement beacon, calculating the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) from the communication node to the node in the non-service channel. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110921 | PRE-EVALUATION OF MULTIPLE NETWORK ACCESS POINTS - The present application describes, inter alia, novel techniques to perform pre-evaluations of multiple Wi-Fi Access Points (AP) and Access Networks (AN). A pre-evaluation determines whether or not an AP is connected to the Internet and measures the path performance that the AN, via that particular AP, can offer between the mobile device and a pre-specified Internet host. In addition, the invention also discloses methods to determine whether the AN requires a user to actively authenticate themselves through a redirect log-on page. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110922 | Method and Apparatus for Estimating Channel Bandwidth - A bandwidth estimation algorithm detects peaks and/or average per-user bandwidth of data communication networks, such as narrowband and broadband wide-area radio access networks. Estimation can be performed at the TCP/IP layer with no lower layer (PHY, MAC, etc.) information assumed to be available. However, the bandwidth estimation algorithm can be applied to anywhere bandwidth needs to be estimated as well. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110923 | METHOD OF OPERATING A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a method of operating a data network comprising a plurality of interconnected nodes ( | 05-06-2010 |
20100110924 | MULTIHOP RADIO HAZARD REPORTING SYSTEM - A method and a system for the propagation of a message in a radio-operated communication network having a base unit and a plurality of members, wherein the base unit and the members each includes a transmitter and a receiver, the receiver being activated at cyclical switch-on times for a certain respective receiving period. A message to be sent from a member to the base unit is transmitted by the member to at least one adjacent member as a function of at least one rule, and the message is transmitted by the at least one adjacent member, according to the at least one rule, to at least one member adjacent thereto, in the direction of the base unit. The process is repeated such that the message is transmitted from at least one adjacent member receiving the message according to the at least one rule to at least one member adjacent thereto, in the direction of the base unit. The message is transmitted from the at least one member that is adjacent to the base unit to at least the base unit. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110925 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADJUSTING CONFIGURATION OF BORDER OBJECT - The present disclosure relates to communication technologies and discloses a method for adjusting BO configuration and an EMS for use in a mobile communication network. The method includes: exchanging, by an Element Management System, EMS, information about BOs managed by other EMSs with each of the other EMSs; and negotiating with each of the other EMSs to adjust configuration of the BOs managed by each of the other EMSs according to the information about BOs received from the other EMSs. The embodiments of the present disclosure are applicable to adjustment and optimization of a BO in a mobile communication network. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110926 | Methods And Apparatus For Processing Radio Modem Commands During Network Data Sessions - A radio modem device includes a serial interface adapted for connection to a host device via a wired serial link with use of a PPP connection; a radio modem router coupled to the serial interface; a radio modem server coupled to the radio modem router; and RF transceiver processing circuitry coupled to the radio modem router. The RF transceiver to processing circuitry is configured to provide communications over a wireless link with a cellular network, establish a packet data service attachment with the cellular network, monitor RSSI information during the communications, and maintain an attachment state of the attachment during the communications. The radio modem router is configured receive data packets from the host device; remove a PPP wrapper of the packets to reveal an IP address and a port number; identify whether the IP address and the port number match an IP address and port number of the radio modem server; in response to identifying a mismatch between the IP addresses or port numbers, cause the packets to be routed to a server via the attachment with the cellular network; and in response to identifying a match between the IP addresses and the port numbers, cause the packets to be routed to the radio modem server. The radio modem server is configured to receive the packets from the radio modem router when the IP addresses and the port numbers match; receive a command code in the packets; receive a sequence number in the packets; and process and respond to the host device in accordance with the command and the sequence number in the packets, such that the response includes the sequence number. If the command code is for obtaining the RSSI information, then the radio modem server causes the response to include the RSSI information. If the command code is for obtaining the attachment state, then the radio modem server causes the response to include the attachment state. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110927 | MONITORING PORTAL SYSTEMS AND METHODS - In one of many possible embodiments, a system includes a monitoring portal configured to receive state information descriptive of usage of a plurality of communication services provided on a plurality of communication networks of different types and to make the state information available to a subscriber of the plurality of communication services, in substantially real time. | 05-06-2010 |
20100118713 | SCHEDULING OF MEASUREMENT OCCASIONS OF A MOBILE TERMINAL - In a method of downlink operation in a communication system having a network controller, a base station and a terminal, one communication channel is scheduled by the base station; and one communication channel is scheduled by the network controller. The terminal listens to the channel scheduled by the base station at predetermined times known to the terminal and the network controller. Information is signalled from the network controller to the base station, relating to the predetermined times. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118714 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CORRELATING TRAFFIC AND ROUTING INFORMATION - In one aspect, it is realized that changes in routing configuration (and therefore network topology) may have an effect on how data is forwarded in a communication network. More particularly, it is realized the changes in the control plane have a statistical effect on information tracked in the data plane, and this relation may be used by a network manager in monitoring the network and determining a control plane cause of a data plane forwarding effect. For instance, a change in BGP routing information (control plane information) may affect the data forwarded by a router based on the changed BGP routing information (e.g., next hop data may be forwarded to a different BGP router attached to another physical port). A system and method are provided that correlate control plane and data plane information to support root cause analysis functions. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118715 | OPTIMAL PROBING FOR UNICAST NETWORK DELAY TOMOGRAPHY - Systems and methods are disclosed to probe a network includes generating a set of probing pairs from a network topology for unicast network delay tomography; probing the network using monitoring hosts in the network; and determining network performance from the probing results. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118716 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DIRECTIONAL CLEAR CHANNEL ASSESSMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of communication is provided. The method includes detecting at least a portion of a preamble of a packet transmitted by a first device by sweeping over a plurality of receive directions; receiving and decoding a header of the packet based on a first receive direction to identify that the first device had transmitted the packet; and completing reception of the packet based on a second receive direction. An apparatus for performing the method is also disclosed. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118717 | UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS INFORMATION COLLECTION SYSTEM - In an unauthorized access information collection system for monitoring unauthorized access to a honeynet so as to collect unauthorized access information, the system includes: a plurality of honey pots in which a private address or a global address is respectively set and which construct the honeynet; and an unauthorized access information collection device which is disposed between an Internet and the honeynet and which allocates a plurality of global addresses to the private address or the global address by setting of a routing table to transfer a received packet and which performs a communication control from the honeynet side to the Internet side based on a communication control list and records the packets passing through the unauthorized access information collection device. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118718 | QoS DEGRADATION POINT ESTIMATION METHOD, QoS DEGRADATION POINT ESTIMATION DEVICE, AND PROGRAM - A QoS degradation point estimation device (S | 05-13-2010 |
20100118719 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER EQUIPMENT, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus capable of communicating with a user equipment terminal using a downlink shared channel is disclosed. The base station apparatus includes a radio resource allocation unit allocating radio resource blocks to the shared channel after allocating the radio resource blocks to at least one of a synchronization signal, a common control channel, a broadcast channel, a paging channel, an MBMS channel, and a random access response channel. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118720 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING AND PROCESSING COMPONENT CARRIERS - A method and apparatus are described which perform bandwidth aggregation by simultaneously monitoring and processing a number of simultaneous, non-contiguous or contiguous component carriers in the downlink. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) can be configured by an evolved Node-B (eNodeB) to support additional component carriers. A pre-configured additional component carrier may be used. Various methods for activating and deactivating the additional component carrier are also described. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118721 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In a ring type network, a master node sends a measurement packet to a slave node; receives the measurement packet which has been circulated among a plurality of slave nodes; according to time-keeping of an internal clock; stores a sending time and a received time of the measurement packet; sends a measurement result notifying packet showing the sending time and the received time of the measurement packet to the slave node, and each slave node receives the measurement packet; sends the measurement packet received to the next node; according to time-keeping of the internal clock, stores a received time of the measurement packet; further receives a measurement result notifying packet; calculates a time correction value using the sending time and the received time of the measurement packet shown in the measurement result notifying packet received, the received time of the measurement packet stored, a total number of node apparatuses, and a difference between an order of the slave node and an order of the master node according to the packet transferring order, and corrects a time of the internal clock using the time correction value calculated. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118722 | System And Method For Providing Data Streaming And Timing Information With Missing Package Recovery - The present invention provides a monitoring device and method for supplying timing information for a data stream assembled from data packets and also for assembling a replacement data packet when a data packet is missing. The data packets received from a data network and the start time and the end time of each data packet are recorded. After assembling a data stream from the data packets, the start time of the data stream is the first start time of the first data packet and the end time of the data stream is the last end time of the last data packet. When a data packet is missing, a replacement data packet is assembled with a predefined value and the timing information is copied from the timing information from the data packet that follows the missing data packet. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118723 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING AND DISABLING A SUPPLEMENTARY DOWNLINK CARRIER - A method and apparatus are disclosed for multi cell wireless communication, wherein a status of a secondary serving cell is determined. On the condition that the secondary serving cell is disabled, a Hybrid Repeat Request (HARQ) process associated with the secondary serving cell is released. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118724 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING A GTP COMMUNICATION PATH IN AN UMTS/GPRS NETWORK - A method for monitoring a GTP communication path in an UMTS/GPRS network as well as a corresponding monitoring system that is connected to the UMTS/GPRS network. The monitoring system comprises means for generating a GTP-C message in the form of a GTP echo request message containing an IP address of the monitoring system as an originating address and an IP address of a node of the UMTS/GPRS network or an external network as a destination address. The system also includes means for transmitting the GTP echo request message to the addressed network node and storing the message transmission time, means of receiving a GTP echo response message sent by the addressed network node as a reply to a successfully transmitted GTP echo request message, and means for determining a round trip time of the GTP echo request/response messages by forming the difference between the time the GTP echo response message is received and the time the GTP echo request message is sent. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118725 | System for constructing a mobility model for use in mobility management in a wireless communication system and method thereof - A method for constructing a mobility model for use in optimizing mobility management in a wireless communication system is disclosed, which comprises steps of collecting a plurality of network traffic statistic data of a plurality of desired items, wherein the desired items are related to the behavior of a plurality of subscribers of the wireless communication system; constructing the mobility model according to the network traffic statistic data, wherein the mobility model is for modeling the mobility behavior of the subscribers; and optimizing mobility management according to the mobility model. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118726 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING REFLECTIONS AND FREQUENCY DEPENDENT DISPERSIONS IN REDUNDANT LINKS - A network device includes a group of high speed redundant transmission lines and a switch. The switch is configured to select one of the high speed redundant transmission lines. The switch causes reflections and frequency dependent dispersions in the selected high speed redundant transmission line. The network device further includes a transmitting device that is configured to adjust signals transmitted over the selected high speed redundant transmission line so as to reduce the reflections and frequency dependent dispersions. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118727 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LINK QUALITY SOURCE ROUTING - Systems and methods for routing packets by nodes in an ad hoc network in accordance with a link quality source routing protocol are disclosed. Route discovery, route maintenance, and metric maintenance are designed to propagate and keep current link quality measurements. Metric maintenance includes a reactive approach for links that a node is currently using to route packets, and a proactive mechanism for all links. Nodes are configured to include a send buffer, a maintenance buffer, a request table, link quality metric modules, and preferably a neighbor cache and a link cache. The invention allows for asymmetric links in the network. The invention may be implemented within a virtual protocol interlayer between the link and network layers. The invention may employ any particular link quality metrics, including metrics based on probing techniques as well as metrics based on knowledge gained in other ways. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118728 | NAVIGATION WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless device is registered in a first wireless router by storing information in the first wireless router, a message is created comprising a unique identifier for the wireless device and a unique identifier for the first wireless router; the message is transmitted to at least one second wireless router. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118729 | CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT BASED ON SPATIAL STRATEGIES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING ADAPTIVE ANTENNA ARRAYS - Channels are assigned based on co-spatial constraints in wireless network using spatial division multiple access. In one example, the invention includes assigning a co-spatial constraint to each of a plurality of conventional traffic communications channels of a base station, and receiving a request from a user terminal to communicate using a traffic communication channel of the base station. The invention further includes measuring a quality parameter of the request deriving a co-spatial constraint for the user terminal, assigning the user terminal co-spatial constraint to the user terminal, and assigning the user terminal to a traffic communication channels having a channel co-spatial constraint that is no less than the user terminal co-spatial constraint and that has no more assigned radios than permitted by the channel co-spatial constraint. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118730 | Transmitting Apparatus, Receiving Apparatus, And Communication Method - A transmitting apparatus is capable of transmitting data at a first frequency and second frequency to a receiving apparatus. A transmitter of the transmitting apparatus transmits a predetermined wideband signal, in a first time period in a frequency band which does not include the first frequency and in a second time period in a frequency band which does not include the second frequency. A quality measuring unit of the receiving apparatus measures the quality of communication with the transmitting apparatus based on the wideband signal received in the first and second time periods. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118731 | WIRELESS LINE USAGE STATUS MONITORING METHOD AND DEVICE - For monitoring a wireless line usage status more effectively, a mobile station extracts a synchronizing signal of each of frames received from a plurality of base stations and a known signal transmitted together with transmission data within a time slot in which the transmission data are included but not transmitted within a time slot in which the transmission data are not included. The mobile station then measures a reception power of the synchronizing signal and a reception power of the known signal for each base station. And the mobile station determines a usage status of a wireless line of each base station based on the reception power of the synchronizing signal and the reception power of the known signal. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118732 | LOOP PREVENTION TECHNIQUE FOR MPLS USING SERVICE LABELS - In one embodiment, a loss of communication is detected between a first edge device of a computer network and a neighboring routing domain. A data packet is received at the first edge device, where the received data packet contains a destination address that is reachable via the neighboring routing domain. A determination is made whether a service label is located in a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) label stack included in the received data packet. A service label in the MPLS label stack indicates that the received data packet was previously rerouted in accordance with fast reroute (FRR) operations. In response to a determination that the received data packet does not include a service label in the MPLS label stack, the received data packet is rerouted to a second edge device of the computer network for forwarding to the neighboring routing domain. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124177 | METHOD FOR SPECIFYING INPUT EDGE ROUTER - A method of specifying an input edge router has: obtaining a first value of an input packet counter from each of input candidate edge routers having possibility to receive a specified packet passing through a specified area; transmitting a test packet having a destination address of an output edge router supplying the specified packet or a test packet having a destination address of the specified packet, to a source router connected to a network indicated by a source address of the specified packet; obtaining a second value of the input packet counter from each of the input candidate edge routers; calculating a difference between the first and second values in each input candidate edge router; and specifying an input edge router through which the specified packet passes according to the difference. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124178 | Scalable delay-power control algorithm for bandwidth sharing in wireless networks - A distributed power control technique for wireless networking efficiently balances communication delay against transmitter power on each wireless link. Packets are transmitted over a wireless link from a transmitter to a receiver using a dynamically controlled transmit power level that is periodically updated at the transmitter. The transmit power is computed from i) an observed noise plus interference value of the wireless link and ii) a parameter that determines a balance between per-packet average delay and per-packet average power. In a preferred implementation, the dynamically to controlled transmit power level is computed by minimizing the sum of an average delay cost and an average power cost, weighted by the parameter. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124179 | Method and apparatus for identifying types and access modes of neighbor cells in femtocell environment - In a mobile communication system including macro cells and femtocells, a neighbor cell identification method includes: transmitting, by a neighbor cell that is a macro cell or a femtocell, a neighbor cell identifier containing information regarding the type and access mode of the neighbor cell to a user equipment. The user equipment identifies, after receiving the neighbor cell identifier the type and access mode of the neighbor cell. The user equipment also accesses the neighbor cell according to the identification result. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124180 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A SERVICE INTERRUPTION TIME MEASUREMENT - A method and apparatus are provided for determining a service interruption time measurement including routing protocol convergence time and Forwarding Information Base (FIB) insertion time, between network devices A and B in a network which has a routing protocol. A plurality of probe packets are then sent from the device A to the device B, each probe packet comprising a source address corresponding to the device A. A network route to the device A for the source IP address used by the probe packets is unknown to the network. A sequence number and sending time is typically assigned to each probe packet being sent. At a predetermined time, a route to the source address of the device A is injected into the routing protocol. Upon return to the device A of a first of the probe packets, an arrival time to is detected and an upper bound and a lower bound of the service interruption time measurement is calculated. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124181 | System and Method for Managing a Wireless Communications Network - In an embodiment, a method of operating a base station configured to support a plurality of user devices on a plurality of channels is disclosed. The method includes finding an interference level for each channel, comparing the interference level for each channel with an interference threshold, and determining up to a first number of channels whose interference metric exceeds the interference threshold to determine a set of unsuitable channels. The method also includes determining a set of usable channels, where the usable channels include the plurality of channels that are not determined to be unsuitable channels. The usable channels are allocated to the plurality of user devices. | 05-20-2010 |
20100128613 | Detection of bearer loss in an IP-based multimedia session - The present invention provides a method for detecting bearer loss in an IP-based multimedia session. A multimedia session is initiated by an access terminal. A Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) communicates the Session setup information and the bearer characteristics to a Signaling Gateway (SGW). The SGW uses this information to adjust the dormancy timers on the originating side so that the originating access link remains active during the call setup. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128614 | Resource allocation in communications system - The application discloses a method for resource allocation in a communications system. The system comprises an apparatus, such as a base station, arranged to monitor the allocation of resource blocks to scheduled data packets. On the basis of the monitoring, eventual non-allocated resource blocks are detected. The apparatus is thus arranged to perform a priority calculation on scheduled user terminals. On the basis of the calculation, one or more of the scheduled user terminals are selected as priority user terminals. Next, the method comprises performing a further allocation step, wherein the non-allocated resource blocks are allocated to one or more of the priority user terminals. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128615 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE DISCRIMINATION AND STORAGE OF APPLICATION SPECIFIC NETWORK PROTOCOL DATA FROM GENERIC NETWORK PROTOCOL DATA - Discrimination of application specific network traffic from other from general or unclassified network traffic is provided. Users may specify particular applications or data strings to be monitored. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128616 | Communication Control Apparatus, Wireless Communication Apparatus, Communication Control Method, and Wireless Communication Method - In a transmission bandwidth notification /analysis unit ( | 05-27-2010 |
20100128617 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TWO-WAY RANGING - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for wirelessly receiving a first communication from a first mobile device. A processing delay may be measured. An acknowledgement communication indicating receipt of the first communication may be generated. A measurement of the processing delay may be broadcast in a broadcast packet, for example, or by transmitting a subsequent communication including the processing delay in response to receiving a second communication having a request for the measurement of the processing delay. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128618 | Inter-Cell Interference Co-Ordination - The invention relates to a cold-working steel having the following chemical composition in % by weight: 1.3-2.4 (C+N), whereof at least 0.5 C, 0.1-1.5 Si, 5 0.1-1.5 Mn, 4.0-5.5 Cr, 1.5-3.6 (Mo+W/2), but max 0.5 W, 4.8-6.3 (V+Nb/2), but max 2 Nb, and max 0.3 S, 10 in which the content of (C+N) on the one hand and of (V+Nb/2) on the other hand, are balanced in relation to each other such that the contents of these elements are within an area that is defined by the coordinates A, B, C, D, A in the system of coordinates in FIG. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128619 | RELAY DEVICE, RELAY METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A relay device, a relay method, and a program that can suppress occurrence of congestion of packets, for example applied to a Layer | 05-27-2010 |
20100128620 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND PROPAGATION STATE COLLECTING METHOD - A mobile communications system is disclosed. The mobile communications system includes a unit which causes a mobile station apparatus residing within a communication area of an arbitrary base station apparatus to measure a propagation state of a wireless signal from a surrounding base station apparatus and which collects the measurement results; and a unit which obtains location information of the mobile station apparatus. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128621 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A base station ( | 05-27-2010 |
20100128622 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A radio communication method and a radio communication apparatus that allow enhancement of a throughput characteristic and a degree of multiplicity of an MCS without a necessity for a special additional function. A channel quality measurement section | 05-27-2010 |
20100128623 | END-TO-END ANALYSIS OF TRANSACTIONS IN NETWORKS WITH TRAFFIC-ALTERING DEVICES - In a network that includes intermediary nodes, such as WAN accelerators, that transform messages between nodes, an end-to-end path of the messages is determined. The determined end-to-end path is used in subsequent analyses of message traces, to identify timing and other factors related to the performance of the network relative to the propagation of these messages, including the propagation of the transformed messages. A variety of techniques are presented for determining the path of the messages, depending upon the characteristics of the collected trace data. Upon determining the message path, the traces are synchronized in time and correlations between the connections along the path are determined, including causal relationships. In a preferred embodiment, a user identifies an application process between or among particular nodes of a network, and the system provides a variety of formats for viewing statistics related to the performance of the application on the network. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128624 | METHOD OF MANAGING ALLOCATED ADDRESS IN LOW POWER WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Disclosed is a method of managing an allocated address through a coordinator in a Low Power Wireless Personal Area Network (LoWPAN) including receiving a first beacon data request message from a mobile node that has entered into a communication region of the coordinator; measuring a Link Quality Indication (LQI) of the first beacon data request message, setting the measured LQI as a minimum communication threshold value with the mobile node, and setting an alarm region that is an LQI range for sensing whether the mobile node leaves the communication region; if a second beacon data request message is received from the mobile node, measuring an LQI of the second beacon data request message, and checking whether the measured LQI of the second beacon data request message is included in the alarm region; and if the LQI is included in the alarm region, periodically transmitting a node alive check message to the mobile node. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128625 | Remote Control Method for Physical Layer Device and Related Physical Layer Device - A remote control method for a local physical layer device includes receiving a received packet, determining a coding of the received packet according to a packet format to generate a first determining result, determining an identification of the received packet according to the packet format to generate a second determining result, discarding the received packet according to the first determining result and the second determining result or decoding the received packet according to the packet format to generate a decoding result, and controlling or negotiating with a remote physical layer device according the decoding result. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128626 | HIGH DATA RATE INTERFACE APPARATUS AND METHOD - A data interface for transferring digital data between a host and a client over a communication path using packet structures linked together to form a communication protocol for communicating a pre-selected set of digital control and presentation data. The signal protocol is used by link controllers configured to generate, transmit, and receive packets forming the communications protocol, and to form digital data into one or more types of data packets, with at least one residing in the host device and being coupled to the client through the communications path. The interface provides a cost-effective, low power, bi-directional, high-speed data transfer mechanism over a short-range “serial” type data link, which lends itself to implementation with miniature connectors and thin flexible cables which are especially useful in connecting display elements such as wearable micro-displays to portable computers and wireless communication devices. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128627 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, UPLINK SINR MEASURING METHOD, UPLINK SCHEDULING METHOD, AND RECEPTION-QUALITY MEASURING METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a receiving unit that receives a control signal having predetermined patterns for performing communication control processing at the base station; and a measuring unit that measures SINR of reception data that is obtained from the control signal received by the receiving unit. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128628 | Context-Based Routing in Multi-hop Networks - Context-based routing in multi-hop networks involves using a context-based routing metric. In a described implementation, respective path values are calculated for respective ones of multiple paths using the context-based routing metric. A path is selected from the multiple paths responsive to the calculated path values. Data is transmitted over at least one link of the selected path. In an example embodiment, the context-based routing metric is ascertained responsive to an estimated service interval (ESI) of a bottleneck link of each path of the multiple paths. In another example embodiment, the context-based routing metric is ascertained responsive to an expected resource consumption (ERC) metric. In an example embodiment of path selection, the path is selected using a context-based path pruning (CPP) technique that involves maintaining multiple local contexts at each intermediate node, with each local context representing at least one partial path. | 05-27-2010 |
20100135165 | METHOD FOR INDICATING LOST SEGMENTS - For indicating lost segments (LS) across layer boundaries an application encoder (AE) generates independently accessible symbols (Sym) , these symbols (Sym) are aggregated by symbol aggregation means (SA) into a packet payload, the aggregated symbols in the packet payload are transported in a defined packet structure (P | 06-03-2010 |
20100135166 | BUFFER STATUS REPROTING - A system is proposed to provide buffer status reporting in a mobile telecommunications environment, particularly applicable to 3GPP networks, which allows the base station to perform Quality of Service aware uplink resource allocation. The system uses two types of buffer status reports—Absolute Buffer Status Reports and Relative Buffer Status Reports. Absolute Buffer Status Reports are sent at application start up or when the buffer level is above or below set threshold values. Otherwise Relative Buffer Status Reports are sent, which encode the present buffer level in terms of the difference from the last transmitted Absolute Buffer Status Report. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135167 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA ACCESS IN CONTENTION-BASED NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described for gaining access to a communication medium in a contention-based network, including determining a slot count based on a number of stations in the contention-based network, adjusting the slot count, initiating a frame transmission when the slot count reaches a predetermined value and wherein said number of stations and an address queue are adjusted to reflect a priority. Further, a method and apparatus are described for gaining access to a communication medium in a contention-based network, including receiving a slot count based on a number of stations in the contention-based network, adjusting the slot count, initiating a frame transmission when the slot count reaches a predetermined value and wherein said number of stations and an address queue are adjusted to reflect a priority. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135168 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY DETERMINING A GROUP OF PAIRS LOCATED CLOSE TO ANOTHER PAIR IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND ASSOCIATED SERVER, ANALYSIS DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A dedicated method for determining peers located close to another peer, each peer having at least one communication device connected to a communication node of a communication network including multiple communication nodes, of which some have a known fixed position and are known as “landmarks”. This method consists in, upon detection of a new peer, i) in determining in the communication network the closest landmark to the new peer, then ii) in determining from among the multiple nodes known as intermediary nodes that define the path linking this new peer to the pre-determined landmark, and iii) in determining a group of peers located close to the new peer as a function of at least the pre-determined path definition and the definitions of the paths linking other peers to at least the pre-determined landmark. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135169 | Channel Quality Reporting Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - When a high SIR can be achieved for downlink data transmission, for example in a MIMO system, or when higher order modulation, such as 64 QAM, can be used, it is desired to measure the instantaneous downlink channel quality indicator (CQI), and report the measured CQI to the network using the same number of bits as when a lower SIR can be achieved. In order to do this, a true CQI is derived based upon at least one network controlled parameter and a measured channel quality parameter; and the true CQI value is scaled to a new CQI value such that the new CQI will fall within a specified range of CQI values; so that the new CQI achieved by scaling the derived CQI value can be reported with every CQI value over the entire reporting range requiring the same number of bits. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135170 | LOAD ESTIMATION FOR A CELL IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The invention is directed towards a method of estimating the load on a cell in a wireless network as well as to a cell load estimating device. According to the invention a determination ( | 06-03-2010 |
20100135171 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASUREMENT OF VoIP QoE AND COMPENSATION METHOD - Provided are a system and a method for measurement voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) quality of experience (QoE), and a compensation method. a method for measuring QoE for a VoIP telephone service in real time, and claiming aftertreatment on the basis of the measurement quality. The present invention measures subjective or objective quality for an actually generated call, and allows the subjective or objective quality to be linked with aftertreatment such as compensation. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135172 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREDICTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN A HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS SYSTEM - Various embodiments are disclosed which predict the channel quality indicator (CQI) in High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA). The accuracy of CQI is crucial for HSDPA performance. In some HSDPA systems the CQI may be as much as three (3) subframes stale. Accordingly, the prediction of CQI values is required in order to efficiently schedule data for transmission over the communication channel. Various embodiments disclose first order adaptive IIR filters which are significantly less complex than the finite impulse response (FIR) counterparts and achieve similar accuracy. By minimizing the mean squared error (MSE), an exact gradient descent algorithm may be used as well as two embodiment pseudolinear regression algorithms. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135173 | Method for Implicit Conveying of Uplink Feedback Information - Method and apparatus for conveying feedback reports from a data receiving party ( | 06-03-2010 |
20100135174 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROLLER, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND BASE STATION RADIO PARAMETER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a condition reporting unit provided in a base station controller and configured to report to a mobile station via the target base station or another base station measurement and report conditions for determining whether to measure and report a reception quality level of a radio signal transmitted from the target base station; a measurement reporting unit provided in the mobile station and configured to measure the reception quality level of the radio signal if the measurement condition is satisfied and to report the measured reception quality level to the base station controller via the target base station or the other base station if the report condition is satisfied; and a radio parameter control unit provided in the base station controller and configured to control a radio parameter of the target base station or the other base station based on the reported reception quality level. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135175 | Method and Arrangement in Communication Networks - The present invention relates to a user equipment ( | 06-03-2010 |
20100135176 | Method and Arrangement in a Communication Network - The present invention relates to methods, a user equipment and a radio base station in a communication network, in which a downlink out-of-coverage is detected based on measurements done on a common channel or on the combination of common and dedicated channels. The out-of-coverage is then reported to the network, either using resources proactively assigned to the user equipment, or by transmitting a predetermined pattern of signature sequences assigned to the user equipment. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135177 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELEVANT DEVICES - The present invention provides a method for scheduling uplink transmission in a relay-based wireless communication system. The method comprises: estimating step for estimating equivalent uplink channels of respective users whose uplink transmission is performed via a same relay station; calculating step for calculating orthogonality between the equivalent channels of said users; selecting step for selecting a combination of virtual multiple input multiple output users from said users, wherein the equivalent channels of the users in said combination of virtual multiple input multiple output users is conformable to the requirement of orthogonality; and scheduling step for scheduling the respective users in said combination of virtual multiple input multiple output users to perform uplink transmission cooperatively with a same time or frequency resource. By the present invention, time or frequency resource can be effectively saved without apparently reducing system capacity when the system's radio resource is scarce, and a proper quality of the signal receiption at the base station side is maintained. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135178 | WIRELESS POSITION DETERMINATION USING ADJUSTED ROUND TRIP TIME MEASUREMENTS - One method for wirelessly determining a position of a mobile station includes measuring a round trip time (RTT) to a plurality of wireless access points, estimating a first distance to each wireless access point based upon the round trip time delay and an initial processing time associated with each wireless access point, estimating a second distance to each wireless access point based upon supplemental information, combining the first and second distance estimates to each wireless access point, and calculating the position based upon the combined distance estimates. Another method includes measuring a distance to each wireless access point based upon a wireless signal model, calculating a position of the mobile station based upon the measured distance, determining a computed distance to each wireless access point based upon the calculated position of the mobile station, updating the wireless signal model, and determining whether the wireless signal model has converged. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135179 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device, a computer program product, and a method for operating a communication device. The communication device has at least one protocol stack having at least two protocol modules, a number of threads for executing the protocol modules, the respective thread being blocked or active, the respective active thread being idle or busy, and a control unit having first means adapted to adjust the number of active threads by monitoring a ratio between a first time duration the active threads are busy and a second time duration the active threads are idle. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135180 | METHOD OF MEASURING PACKET LOSS RATE, PACKET LOSS RATE MEASURING DEVICE AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A method of measuring packet loss rate and device thereof, includes intermittently capturing packets during a session, counting a capture success number indicating a number of the packets captured in every period of a time for capturing the packets, and a capturable number indicating a possible number of the packets to be captured during the period of time without loss, calculating a loss rate indicating a rate of losing the packets, according to the capture success number and the capturable number for every period of time and correcting the loss rate, by the measuring device, so that the loss rate gets larger accordingly as average of capturable numbers of respective periods of time is smaller. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135181 | Control Information Feedback Over the Long-Term Evolution Physical Uplink Shared Channel - A network component comprising a plurality of encoders, a plurality of rate-matching modules coupled to the encoders, and a channel interleaver coupled to the rate-matching modules, wherein the rate-matching modules calculate the number of bits for rate matching a plurality of feedback control information based on a total number of bits allocated to a channel traffic without a traffic data. Included is a network component comprising at least one processor configured to encode a plurality of feedback control information, calculate the number of bits for rate-matching the feedback control information based on a total number of bits allocated to a channel traffic without a traffic data. Included is a method comprising receiving a downlink traffic, detecting a request to transmit uplink data in the downlink traffic, and transmitting feedback control information with or without data based on the request. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135182 | HIGH-SPEED IP FLOW MEDIATION APPARATUS USING NETWORK PROCESSOR - There is provided a high-speed IP flow mediation apparatus using a network processor. The apparatus includes a server collecting flow information regarding IP traffic on a high-speed line and a network processor board analyzing the collected information according to Internet applications using a network processor, and transferring the analyzed flow information to a plurality of flow analysis systems. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135183 | TELEPHONE SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM - A telephone service, particularly a telephone supplementary service communication system having an IP telephone control apparatus and an IP telephone terminal. A telephone supplementary service communication control system for the service communicate system is comprised of a specified voice terminal and a plurality of telephone supplementary service terminals registered to link with the same and including a communication control apparatus registering linking of the specified voice terminal and the plurality of telephone supplementary service terminals as a single virtual terminal and managing and controlling the running and termination of these linked terminals, wherein the communication control apparatus comprises a supplementary service starting unit monitoring the communication start state of the voice terminal and starting the supplementary service by the telephone supplementary service terminal linked with the voice terminal. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135184 | Adaptive Beamforming Configuration Methods And Apparatus For Wireless Access Points Serving As Handoff Indication Mechanisms In Wireless Local Area Networks - In one illustrative example, a wireless access point of a wireless local area network (WLAN) includes an antenna array, a wireless transceiver array coupled to the antenna array, and one or more processors which are coupled to the wireless transceiver array. The one or more processors are adapted to operate the wireless access point in a configuration mode and a handoff indication mode. In the configuration mode, the one or more processors are adapted to operate the wireless access point to receive, via the wireless transceiver array, RF signals from one or more communication devices and determine and set wireless transceiver parameters for adjusting boundaries of an RF coverage region of the wireless access point based on these RF signals. In the handoff indication mode, the one or more processors set the wireless access point with the adjusted RF coverage region (adjusted from the configuration mode), where handoff indications are communicated in response to mobile devices leaving the WLAN coverage region through the adjusted RF coverage region for handoff to a wireless wide area network (WWAN). | 06-03-2010 |
20100135185 | VOICE COMMUNICATION QUALITY ASSESSING SYSTEM - A system for assessing a voice communication quality of a communication path between first and second nodes over a network, wherein coded data of voice communication signals are transferred in a stream of packets via the communication path, including: a capturing unit for capturing at the first node at least one packet containing coded data representing non voice signals among the packets of the coded data to be transferred from the first node to the second node; a replacing unit for replacing a part of the coded data representing non voice signals in the captured packet with a predetermined code before the captured packet is transferred from the first node; a retrieval unit for retrieving at the second node said at least one packet containing coded data representing non voice signals; and an assessment unit for assessing the voice communication quality of the communication path. | 06-03-2010 |
20100142388 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVALUATING ADAPTIVE JITTER BUFFER PERFORMANCE - A method and system for providing a test signal to evaluate the performance of an adaptive jitter buffer are disclosed. For example, the method transmits a test signal into a communication network, and applies a jitter impairment along a path traversed by the test signal in the network preceding a device supporting a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) service, wherein the device having an adaptive jitter buffer. The method then analyzes the test signal that is received from the device to determine a performance of the adaptive jitter buffer. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142389 | METHOD, ARRANGEMENT, NODE AND ARTICLE FOR ENHANCING DELIVERY CAPACITY IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BY TRANSCODING TRAFFIC INTO REQUESTED QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) - Methods and apparatuses to enhance delivery capacity for traffic in a communication network are disclosed. Traffic is received to a Delivery Function with originally coded Quality of Services (QoS). A specification of requested QoS is received to the Delivery Function. The originally coded QoS is established to be higher than the requested QoS. The received traffic is transcoded into requested QoS. Optionally, the traffic is buffered with originally coded QoS and at request, the buffered traffic is retrieved. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142390 | Method and Apparatus for Realizing Space Division Multiplexing - A method for realizing space division multiplexing is provided. The method comprises steps as follows: A. acquiring space information of users, and calculating space division isolation between the users based on the acquired space information; B. generating a set of user groups for the space division multiplexing based on the space division isolation between users calculated in step A; C. selecting a user group from the set of user groups for the space division multiplexing generated in step B and allocating the same physical resource to two users among the selected user group when conducting the space division multiplexing. An apparatus for realizing space division multiplexing is further provided. Using said method and apparatus, the space division isolation can be realized reasonably with accuracy. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142391 | TEST APPARATUS AND TEST METHOD - There is provided a test apparatus for testing a device under test, including an obtaining section that obtains a packet sequence communicated between the test apparatus and the device under test, from a simulation environment for simulating an operation of the device under test, a packet communication program generating section that generates from the packet sequence a packet communication program for a test, where the packet communication program is to be executed by the test apparatus to communicate packets included in the packet sequence between the test apparatus and the device under test, and a testing section that executes the packet communication program to test the device under test by communicating the packets between the test apparatus and the device under test. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142392 | TEST APPARATUS AND TEST METHOD - There is provided a test apparatus for testing at least one device under test, including a packet list storing section that stores a plurality of packet lists each of which includes a series of packets communicated between the test apparatus and the at least one device under test, a flow control section that designates an order of executing the plurality of packet lists in accordance with an execution flow of a test program that is designed to test the at least one device under test, and a packet communicating section that sequentially communicates the series of packets included in packet lists sequentially designated by the flow control section between the test apparatus and the at least one device under test, to test the at least one device under test. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142393 | TEST APPARATUS AND TEST METHOD - There is provided a test apparatus for testing a device under test, including a receiving section that receives a packet from the device under test, a packet data sequence storing section that stores a data sequence included in each type of packet and received data included in the packet received by the receiving section, a transmission data processing section that reads data from the packet data sequence storing section and generates a test data sequence by adjusting a predetermined portion of a data sequence of a packet to be transmitted to the device under test to have a value corresponding to the received data, and a transmitting section that transmits the test data sequence generated by the transmission data processing section to the device under test. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142394 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RELEASING LOCAL DATA CONTENTS FOR IP-BASED DATA ACCESS, ASSOCIATED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DIGITAL STORAGE MEDIUM, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for releasing local data contents for an IP-based data access, wherein an evaluation unit ( | 06-10-2010 |
20100142395 | BAND MEASUREMENT METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A band measurement method for measuring a band available for communication with a target device connected via a network includes: transmitting a first request having a first data size and requesting a response having a fixed size to the target device via the network; determining a first time between the transmitting of the first request and the receipt of the response upon receipt of the response; transmitting a second request having a second data size and requesting a response having the fixed size to the target device via the network; determining a second time between transmitting of the second request and the receipt of the response upon receipt of the response; and calculating a first communication band available for transmitting data to the target device by dividing the difference between the first and second data sizes by the difference between the first and second times. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142396 | METHOD FOR SELECTING OPERATIONAL CHANNEL OF NETWORK COORDINATOR IN WIRELESS NARROW AREA NETWORK AND COORDINATOR USING THE SAME - A method for selecting an operational channel of a wireless narrow area network, a coordinator using the same, and a computer-readable recording media recording a program for realizing the method. More particularly, a method for selecting an operational channel of a wireless narrow area network in which one radio channel is occupied by a plurality of coordinators at different timings by selecting a predetermined period of a radio channel where a coordinator of the wireless narrow area network is used by another coordinator as own operational channel, a coordinator using the same, and a computer-readable recording media recording a program for realizing the method. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142397 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFYING UDP COMMUNICATIONS - The allocation of network resources, such as bandwidth, etc., can be dynamically adjusted based on the knowledge of the traffic volume, the transport protocol used by the payload and entitled level of services. The type of transport protocol can be determined by monitoring and analyzing characteristics of the data traffic. The frames or packets over a particular channel are monitored to identify the time between frames for a particular period of time. This time then can be used to calculate a recent average time. The timing of subsequently received frames can then be compared to this average to determine if the transport protocol is UDP, TCP or some other protocol. In other embodiments a recent average throughput can be calculated and be compared to a current throughput. This information, along with the load and entitled level of service is used to control the network resources. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142398 | HARDWARE IMPLEMENTATION OF NETWORK TESTING AND PERFORMANCE MONITORING IN A NETWORK DEVICE - An embodiment of the present invention offloads the generation and monitoring of test packets from a Central processing Unit (CPU) to a dedicated network integrated circuit, such as a router, bridge or switch chip associated with the CPU. The CPU may download test routines and test data to the network IC, which then generates the test packets, identifies and handles received test packets, collects test statistics, and performs other test functions all without loading the CPU. The CPU may be notified when certain events occur, such as when throughput or jitter thresholds for the network are exceeded. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142399 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INFORMATION TRANSFER - A method for information transfer includes: determining, by a source Mobility Management Network Element (MMNE) of a source Access Network (AN), version number of GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) used between the source MMNE and a destination MMNE of a destination AN; and transmitting, by the source MMNE, user information corresponding to the version number of the GTP used between the source MMNE and the destination MMNE to the destination MMNE. The embodiment of the invention also provides a device for information transfer. With the embodiment of present invention, corresponding user information transfer may be realized. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142400 | ERROR DETECTION AND RECOVERY IN A DIGITAL MULTIMEDIA RECEIVER SYSTEM - A method for detecting errors in a digital multimedia receiver system is disclosed including the steps of receiving a packetized bitstream representing a video program from at least one of a plurality of transponders in the receiver system, the packetized bitstream periodically including a marker packet having data relating to a continuity counter value, and counting each occurrence of the marker packet in a first counter. The continuity counter value is evaluated at the occurrence of each counting and a second counter is incremented if each continuity counter value is one higher than a previously evaluated continuity counter value. It is determined whether a valid bitstream is being received by comparing values of the first and second counters at predetermined time intervals. | 06-10-2010 |
20100150000 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, TERMINAL APPARATUS AND PILOT SIGNAL CONTROLLING METHOD - There is provided with a radio communication system in which a base station using a multicarrier transmission scheme as a transmission scheme and a terminal apparatus are wirelessly connected, wherein the base station includes: a data generator configured to generate first pilot signals for the terminal apparatus to measure channel quality, second pilot signals for the terminal apparatus to estimate a channel and data signals to be transmitted to the terminal apparatus; a transmission power controller configured to control transmission power of the second pilot signals and the data signals by adjusting amplitude of the second pilot signals and the data signals respectively; and a transmitter configured to generate subcarrier data by mapping the first pilot signals, the second pilot signals power-controlled by the transmission power controller and the data signals power-controlled by the transmission power controller to a plurality of subcarriers and transmit the subcarrier data generated. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150001 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In a communication device having a plurality of communication means, it is determined based on a priority or the like which one of the plurality of communication means is used to establish a communication. However, there is a problem that if no communication can be established through a network having a priority, another network, which is not desired by the user, may be selected as a communication channel and used for establishing a communication. Further, if, in order to solve this problem, only a network designated by the user is always to be used for establishing a communication, then no communication may be established for a long time, which is another problem. In order to solve these problems, it is arranged that, when a communication schedule is done, it be possible to designate a network, which should be used first on the priority basis, according to the network communication speed, communication charges or the like, and it is further arranged that, if no communication is established through the designated network, then an undesignated network be selected, thereby improving the certainty of the communication schedule, which is an advantageous effect. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150002 | Method and System for Determining the Cause of Trunk Group Blocking - Described herein are systems and methods for categorizing a blocked trunk group event into likely causes, thereby improving the ability to prevent and/or resolve any disruptions in services. An exemplary method includes analyzing network traffic from at least one trunk group, detecting a trunk group blocking event, and categorizing a cause of the trunk group blocking event based on the analyzed network traffic. An exemplary system includes a trunk group analyzing tool for analyzing network traffic from at least one trunk group, detecting a trunk group blocking event, and categorizing a cause of the trunk group blocking event based on the analyzed network traffic. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150003 | System and Method for Provisioning Charging and Policy Control in a Network Environment - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes requesting real-time transfer protocol (RTP) quality metrics to be generated by a network for a specific flow in the network. The method also includes recording the RTP quality metrics and reporting the metrics as accounting data associated with the flow. In more specific embodiments, the accounting data includes a correlator with application level accounting and the accounting data is used for quality monitoring and troubleshooting on a per-subscriber basis, on a per-flow basis, or on a per-call basis. An application function can request RTP quality monitoring with a trigger that identifies if a quality parameter reaches a certain threshold. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150004 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO BOUND NETWORK TRAFFIC ESTIMATION ERROR FOR MULTISTAGE MEASUREMENT SAMPLING AND AGGREGATION - Methods and apparatus to bound network traffic estimation error for multistage measurement sampling and aggregation are disclosed. An example method disclosed herein comprises determining a hierarchical sampling topology representative of multiple data sampling and aggregation stages, the hierarchical sampling topology comprising a plurality of nodes connected by a plurality of edges, each node corresponding to at least one of a data source and a data aggregation operation, and each edge corresponding to a data sampling operation characterized by a generalized sampling threshold, selecting a first generalized sampling threshold from a set of generalized sampling thresholds associated with a respective set of edges originating at a respective set of descendent nodes of a target node undergoing network traffic estimation, and transforming a measured sample of network traffic into a confidence interval for a network traffic estimate associated with the target node using the first generalized sampling threshold and an error parameter. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150005 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF ROUTING INFORMATION IN A NETWORK - A system and method to use network flow records to generate information about changes in network routing and to understand the impact of these changes on network traffic. The inferences made can be determinative, if sufficient information is available. If sufficient information is not available to make determinative inferences, inferences may be made that narrow the range of possible changes that may have occurred to network traffic and the underlying network. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150006 | DETECTION OF PARTICULAR TRAFFIC IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method for detecting a particular data traffic in a communication network having a plurality of nodes comprises: maintaining a list of detecting scans to be applied to an incoming data traffic; receiving the incoming data traffic; and applying a subset of the detecting scans in the list to the incoming data traffic. A network node for detecting a particular traffic in a communication network having a plurality of nodes comprises: a list of detecting scans to be applied to an incoming data traffic; an input for receiving the incoming data traffic; and an inspection chain, which applies a subset of detecting scans in the list to the incoming data traffic. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150007 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMAITON IN MULTI CARRIER WIRELESS SYSTEM - Provided is a method for transmitting and receiving a channel quality indicator (CQI) in a multi carrier wireless system which does not increase load while efficiently feeding back a change of the channel quality. The method for transmitting the channel quality indicator in a Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA)-based terminal, includes the steps of: a) transmitting a first report indicator requesting transmission of a measured channel quality indicator to a base station through a control channel when a change range of a channel quality indicator is greater than a predetermined threshold value; and b) transmitting the measured channel quality indicator to the base station through allocated radio resources when a response to the first report indicator is received from the base station. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150008 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING STATE OF NETWORK - There are provided a network state display apparatus and method capable of easily determining a present network security state in real time by analyzing an abnormality and harmful traffic deteriorating performance of a network in software by using a result of combining essential characteristics of traffic, a distinct dispersion, and an entropy and displaying the network state to be intuitionally recognized, the method including selecting and combining three of a source address, a source port, a destination address, and a destination port of collected traffic and calculating a distinct dispersion and an entropy of a residual one therefrom; displaying the calculated distinct dispersion and entropy on a security radar where the distinct dispersion and the entropy are assigned to an angle and a radius; determining whether a network state is abnormal, based on a result displayed on the security radar; and detecting reporting detailed information on abnormal traffic causing the abnormal network state. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150009 | Passive Monitoring Of Network Performance - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements to measure network performance. The method comprises the following steps:—Transmitting via a communication network (IP) payload packets ( | 06-17-2010 |
20100150010 | Communication system, communication method, communication device, and program - A communication system is provided which includes a first communication device for transmitting a plurality of packets in different packet sizes, and a second communication device having a reception unit for receiving over one or more links packets transmitted from the first communication device, and a calculation unit for calculating a packet loss rate for each packet size based on reception result of the reception unit. The communication system estimates a bit error rate during link transmission of the packets from a difference of the packet sizes of the packets transmitted from the first communication device as well as from the packet loss rate for each packet size calculated by the calculation unit. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150011 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio terminal | 06-17-2010 |
20100150012 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROUTING - A telecommunications network termination device has the capability to connect to a network access point using a primary fixed line address by a first route and also, using a second network address, by a backup routing to a shared wireless access point. Connection status messages are transmitted over the primary routing. If these are not detected by the network, it causes traffic to the user device to be diverted over the backup routing to the second network address. It also transmits instructions to the user device to route outgoing traffic by the same secondary route. The secondary route is identified from network tolopogy data stored by the network control server. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150013 | CALIBRATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, FREQUENCY CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A calibration method according to the present invention includes a step of first channel estimating for transmitting a pilot signal from a first antenna and receiving the pilot signal at a second antenna different from the first antenna to calculate a first channel estimation value; a step of second channel estimating for transmitting a plot signal from the second antenna and receiving the pilot signal at the first antenna to calculate a second channel estimation value; and a step of correction coefficient calculating for calculating, by using the first and second channel estimation values, a correction coefficient. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150014 | NETWORK QUALITY MONITORING DEVICE AND METHOD FOR INTERNET SERVICES INVOLVING SIGNALING - A network quality monitoring device includes a packet receiving unit that receives packets used by a signaling protocol server device that is a server device for processing the signaling protocol, a signaling protocol packet extracting unit that extracts signaling protocol packets for controlling the signaling protocol from packets received by the packet receiving unit, a session management table storing unit that stores the session management tables, a signaling protocol quality analyzing unit that collects quality information regarding the network quality from a session management table corresponding to sessions that have transitioned to a predetermined communication state among the session management tables stored in the session management table storing unit and, based on the collection result, analyzes statistical information regarding the network quality. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150015 | TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROCESSING BROADCAST SIGNAL IN TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM - A receiving system and a method of processing broadcast signal are disclosed herein. The receiving system includes N number of antennae, N number of demodulators, N number of known sequence detectors, and an equalizer. The N number of antennae each receives a broadcast signal including mobile service data and known data sequences. The N number of demodulators demodulates the broadcast signal received by the corresponding antenna. The N number of known sequence detectors detects known data sequences from the broadcast signal received by the corresponding antenna. The equalizer estimates a channel impulse response (CIR) of a broadcast signal received and demodulated by each antenna based upon each known data sequence detected by the N number of known sequence detectors, calculates an equalization coefficient of the broadcast signal received and demodulated by each antenna based upon at least one of the estimated CIRs, so as to compensate channel distortion of the broadcast signal received and demodulated by each antenna, and combines at least one or more distortion-compensated broadcast signal, thereby finally outputting the combined signal. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150016 | Receiver Determined Probe - According to various embodiments of the disclosed method and apparatus, nodes on a network are programmed to generate a probe transmission in response to a request from the node that will be receiving the probe. The receiving node may generate a probe request that specifies a plurality of parameters, such as a modulation profile for the probe; the payload content of the probe; the number of times to transmit the probe; a number of symbols for the payload of the probe; a preamble type for the probe; a cyclic-prefix length for the payload of the probe; a transmit power for the probe; and a transmit power scaling factor for the payload of the probe. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150017 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR LINK BALANCING DETECTION - A method of detecting a link balance of coverage of a down link and an up link in a WCDMA system is disclosed. The method includes setting a minimum receiving signal code power (RSCP) by using system information received from a base station, setting a maximum terminal Tx power for transmitting radio waves to the base station from a communication terminal according to the minimum RSCP, setting a reference value of a link balance detection quotient for detecting whether the up link and down link coverage has a defect by calculating the minimum RSCP and the maximum terminal Tx power, measuring a RSCP and a terminal Tx power from the communication terminal, and detecting the balance of the down link and up link coverage by comparing the reference value of the link balance detection quotient with a value calculated according to the measured RSCP and terminal Tx power. | 06-17-2010 |
20100157817 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATION USING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - A communication device ( | 06-24-2010 |
20100157818 | NETWORK SYSTEM, SERVER, QUALITY DEGRADATION POINT ESTIMATING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A network system estimating a point of quality degradation with high accuracy at high speed based on flow quality information and routing information on a large-scale network is provided. A network system causing a communication characteristic collection unit S | 06-24-2010 |
20100157819 | TRANSMISSION DEVICE, TRANSMISSION METHOD, SYSTEM LSI, AND PROGRAM - One transmission rate of a physical layer (PHY rate) is selected from among a plurality of PHY rates of a protocol stack by calculating one or more effective values of transmission rates of an upper layer of the protocol stack with respect to one or more PHY rates of the plurality of PHY rates respectively, and making a comparison with use of the calculated one or more effective values. Each of the one or more effective values is calculated based on (i) an ideal value of corresponding one of the transmission rates and (ii) a retransmission ratio via the physical layer that corresponds to a reception power value detected in the reception apparatus. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157820 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR RANGING USING RANGING LOADING FACTOR - Methods and apparatus for indicating a base station's amount of ranging traffic to a mobile station (MS) and for selecting a base station (BS) for performing ranging based on the ranging traffic indication are provided. This notification may occur via a ranging loading parameter, such as a ranging loading factor (RLF) indicating the ratio of used ranging slots to available ranging slots, transmitted as a new TLV (Type-Length-Value) within the Uplink Channel Descriptor (UCD) of a (potential) serving BS or in the UCD of a Neighbor Advertisement (MOB_NBR-ADV) message for a neighbor BS. By selecting a BS with a certain level of unused ranging slots, the MS may exponentially decrease the ranging overhead (i.e., the average waiting time for the ranging procedures) when compared to a conventional MS that does not consider a BS's ranging overload when trying to perform ranging with the BS. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157821 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Sending Data Units Based On A Measure Of Energy - Methods and systems are described for sending data units based on a measure of energy. In one aspect, a data unit sent to a destination node is received at a receiving network node. A measure of energy needed to successfully send data to the destination node is determined for each of at least one of a plurality of destination network paths available for routing the data to the destination node. Each destination network path includes a respective plurality of nodes having an energy expenditure and an effective rate of data transmission contributing to the measure of energy needed to successfully send data to the destination node. Any transmission of the corresponding data unit to a next one of the network nodes along the one of the plurality of destination network paths is determined based on the determined measure of energy needed to successfully send data. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157822 | SERVICE ACCOUNTING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPOSITE SERVICE - A system for an accounting infrastructure, including monitoring and reporting, for individual services within a composite service. An accounting engine integrates with the composite service to monitor components and parameters of at least one service in the composite service, to provide reporting on the measurements and statistics associated therewith over time. The accounting engine aggregates data for components and services. One example provides the accounting infrastructure as an object-oriented program model, instantiating statistics as objects. The reporting distinguishes each statistic allowing analysis and optimization of processes and services. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157823 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A WIRELESS SERVICE RECOMMENDATION - A method and apparatus for providing a wireless service recommendation are disclosed. For example, the method collects wireless access performance data, and analyzes the wireless access performance data for generating a ranking of a plurality of wireless access services that are available for a physical location. The method then provides the ranking of the plurality of wireless access services that are available for the physical location via an on-line social network website that is accessible to a mobile device that is proximate to the physical location. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157824 | Methods and System for Determining a Dominant Impairment of an Impaired Communication Channel - Methods are described for identifying a dominant impairment on a communication channel impaired by an interference issue. The methods include systematic examination of total power loading, systematic examination of signal power reduction, statistical examination of communication channel noise power, and systematic examination of interleaver effectiveness. Each relates to automatically diagnosing and characterizing distortion-based interference issues by monitoring the performance of a communication channel during a testing procedure. These methods enable a technician or engineer to remotely diagnose distortion-based interference issues relatively quickly without having to use external test equipment and without having to deploy technicians to various locations within the cable plant. A system by which these methods can be implemented is also disclosed. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157825 | ESTIMATING BANDWIDTH IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In general, a method includes monitoring, by a personal access point, an amount of backhaul bandwidth available for multimedia and signaling communications by measuring a level of latency associated with existing multimedia and signaling communications. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157826 | LOCAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE STATIONS VIA ONE OR MORE RELAY STATIONS - In a cellular communication system where two mobile stations are located within or near to a cell associated with a base station, one or more relay stations with good radio link quality relative to the two mobiles may be used to build a local forwarding communication link between the mobile stations using the one or more relay stations which avoids downlink/uplink transmission with the base station. The relay station(s) is(are) selected based on an association between two mobile stations and the relay station(s). | 06-24-2010 |
20100157827 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A method for effectively using power resource in a wireless mesh network is disclosed to select and change a level of a power saving mode according to terminal and network situations to increase the duration of the network's existence as well as improve the power consumption of each mesh terminal. After active mesh terminals that are to perform a data relay function and super-saving mesh terminals that are not to perform the data relay function are selected in consideration of a network topology at certain periods, the level of a power saving mode of the mesh terminals selected as the super-saving mesh terminals is higher than that of the mesh terminals selected as the active mesh terminals. And then, a routing path in a tree form is formed along the mesh terminals selected as the active mesh terminals to transmit data. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157828 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING EVENT AND REPORTING STATUS OF CABLE MODEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF - Provided is a method and apparatus for controlling an event of a cable modem and reporting a status of the cable modem, the method including: determining whether to periodically allocate a transmission bandwidth of a CM-STATUS message with respect to an event occurrence of the cable modem; setting an event control encoding that includes information regarding whether to periodically allocate the transmission bandwidth; and generating a MAC Domain Descriptor (MDD) message containing the event control encoding to transmit the generated MDD message. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157829 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR IMPROVED CHANNEL QUALITY REPORTING - The invention discloses a method ( | 06-24-2010 |
20100157830 | PACKET TRANSFER METHOD, PACKET TRANSFER DEVICE, AND PACKET TRANSFER SYSTEM - An edge router measures a traffic volume inputted into a network, and the measurement result is notified to a network management server. If the network management server judges that the notified traffic volume is “smaller” than a capacity of a second core router, it will direct a first core router to shift to a power saving mode. The first core router notifies the edge router of the shift to the power saving mode, and the edge router updates a routing table so that the packet to the first core router may be bypassed to the second core router. The first core router shifts to the power saving mode that does not perform packet transfer, and reduction in electric power is realized. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157831 | BASE STATION AND ACCESS CONTROL METHOD FOR CELLULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A base station is connected to wired and wireless networks to send a call that is received from the wired network to the wireless network at a predetermined quality of service (QoS), select one or more combinations of a set of modulation and coding scheme, and a radio resource amount that are associated with a QoS set in a newly incoming call, determine the radio resource amount that is equal to or less than a amount of the unassigned radio resources, assign, to the newly incoming call, the combination that is associated with the determined radio resource amount and the QoS set in the newly incoming call, reduce the radio resources assigned to the ongoing call without changing the QoS, and assign, to the newly incoming call, an amount of radio resources released from the ongoing call and modulation and coding scheme associated with this released radio resource amount. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157832 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DISCRIMINATING FRAME FORMAT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A frame format discrimination method in a wireless communication system is provided. The frame format discrimination method includes: calculating a power of an in-phase signal and a power of a quadrature signal in a predetermined section of a frame; comparing the power of the in-phase signal with the power of the quadrature signal; and determining the format of the frame in accordance with the comparison result. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157833 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVED TIMING ACQUISITION FOR VARYING CHANNEL CONDITIONS - An improved receiver apparatus and acquisition algorithm using TDM pilots is disclosed. The timing acquisition method presented provides capabilities for adapting to changing channel conditions, in particular varying expected delay spreads. The information on an expected delay spread can be fed back to the initial acquisition algorithm based on previous successful attempts, and the delay spreads measured at that time, such as to set the length of the detection window used to in the TDM pilot processing. Based on the delay spread information, the algorithm for processing the specialized TDM pilot can adaptively modify the timing acquisition parameters for more robust performance under interference conditions. This may involve reducing the length of the detection window to just a little more than or equal to the maximum expected delay spread, which reduces sensitivity of the fine timing acquisition to signal noise. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157834 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMPUTING DATA TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS OF A NETWORK PATH BASED ON SINGLE-ENDED MEASUREMENTS - Systems and methods for computing data transmission characteristics of a network path are disclosed. In some embodiments, the network path has a sending host, at least one intermediate host, and a receiving host, and the data transmission characteristics are computed based on single-ended measurements performed at the sending host. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157835 | Method and device for determining channel quality - It is provided a method for determining channel quality for a second channel, wherein, the second channel is overlapping with a first channel, the method comprising the steps of sending a request message through the first channel; receiving a response message on the second channel in response to the request message through the first channel; and determining the channel quality of the second channel based on the response message on the second channel. It can be used to determine the channel quality of at least one channel by sending a single message through the first channel. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157836 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - The present invention reduces the amount of control information for specifying the transmission method for simultaneously transmitting the uplink data and the reception quality information as well as the uplink data and the ACK/NACK, reduces delay occurring in changing the transmission method, and realizes the mapping of the uplink data and the reception quality information and that of the uplink data and the ACK/NACK, in compliance with modulation scheme and coding rate of the uplink data specified by the base station apparatus. In the mobile communication system where the base station apparatus allocates, to the mobile station apparatus, resources wherein the base station apparatus transmits, to the mobile station apparatus, control information for specifying a transmission format for the mobile station apparatus to transmit information using the uplink, while the mobile station apparatus simultaneously transmits, to the base station apparatus, the uplink data and the reception quality information based on the specified transmission format in case of having received the control information from the base station apparatus. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157837 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE OF PACKET SAMPLING - A method and a system for sampling a packet as well as a device are disclosed herein. The method includes the following steps: a notification node of an LSP sends obtained information about the protocol type of a packet to a specific netflow sampling entity; the netflow sampling entity determines the protocol type of the packet according to the information about the protocol type after receiving the packet, and samples the packet according to the determined protocol type. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the accuracy of netflow sampling is improved significantly. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157838 | Route and Link Evaluation in Wireless Mesh Communications Networks - Methods and systems for providing a network and routing protocol for utility services are disclosed. A method includes discovering a utility network. Neighboring nodes are discovered and the node listens for advertised routes for networks from the neighbors. The node is then registered with one or more utility networks, receiving a unique address for each network registration. Each upstream node can independently make forwarding decisions on both upstream and downstream packets, i.e., choose the next hop according to the best information available to it. The node can sense transient link problems, outage problems and traffic characteristics. Information is used to find the best route out of and within each network. Each network node maintains multi-egress, multi-ingress network routing options both for itself and the node(s) associated with it. The node is capable of several route maintenance functions utilizing the basic routing protocol and algorithms. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157839 | NETWORK SERVICE MONITORING - Network devices, systems, and methods are described that perform network service monitoring. One method includes examining a number of packets received by a first network device to determine whether a protocol of a packet corresponds to a given network service, forwarding packet service type information and packet address information to a second network device in response to a determination that the protocol of the packet corresponds to the network service, comparing the packet service type information and an associated service type address to a list of service types and addresses on the second network device, and executing a remedial action if, based on the comparing, it is determined that the network service is an unauthorized service and that a provider of the network service is an unauthorized provider. | 06-24-2010 |
20100165853 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION AND RADIO CHANNEL CONDITION REPORTING METHOD - A mobile station comprises a radio channel condition reporting unit reporting information indicative of a radio channel condition at a reception timing in discontinuous reception. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165854 | BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD - A base station performing a radio communication with a user equipment includes a transmission format determining unit configured to determine a transmission format of a downlink data channel not to be associated by a control channel, based on a downlink reception signal quality measured by the user equipment, a notification unit configured to notify, to the user equipment, the transmission format determined by the transmission format determining unit, and a transmitting unit configured to transmit downlink data to the user equipment via the downlink data channel, by using the transmission format determined by the transmission format determining unit. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165855 | Apparatus and method for a multi-level enmeshed policer - An enmeshed hierarchy of policers, different from traditional tree-based hierarchical system of policers is used in accordance with the present invention. A goal of using an enmeshed architecture of policing systems is to allow for a more complex set of policies to be defined across a network. Hierarchical/cascading systems ensure that the higher granularity assignments essentially dictate/constrain the behavior of finer grained assignments at higher levels for sub-flows. There is only one type of metric possible for the largest granular policer, so the only way to implement multiple system-wide metrics is to repeat the hierarchy multiple times over, which adds to the delay of the packet and the complexity of the router. In accordance with the enmeshed architecture of the present invention, multiple system-wide metrics can be implemented simultaneously, which allows for easier management of the various macro-level policies by the manager of an access network. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165856 | CROSS-LAYER OPTIMIZATION IN MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS - An embodiment of a system for optimizing operation of a mobile station in a wireless communication network such as a WLAN by adapting the physical (PHY), medium access control (MAC), and application settings of a mobile station therein includes a network status estimation module to evaluate the channel conditions of a wireless channel to serve the mobile station in terms of transmission failure probability due to noise and interference, respectively, a transmission characterization module to determine expected network performance as a function of the settings of PHY, MAC and application parameters in the current channel conditions as evaluated by the network status estimation module, a quality evaluation module to determine the expected quality of communication for the mobile station as a function of different channel performance metrics, and a quality maximization module to interact with the characterization and quality evaluation modules to identify and select the settings of PHY, MAC and application parameters for the mobile station that provide an optimum quality for the mobile station. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165857 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus for determining the quality of service of a network are disclosed. A disclosed methodology for determining quality of service for a network includes determining at least two metrics reflective of network parameters in at least two different protocol layers of the communication network. The metrics are then compared with respective threshold values, and quality of service for the network is determined based on the comparison of the metrics with the respective threshold values. Corresponding apparatus executing the methodology are also disclosed. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165858 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD - When it is judged that the size of a band of a wireless IP network ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100165859 | SORTING FLOW RECORDS INTO ANALYSIS BUCKETS - Flow information records are identified and sorted out based on the sending and/or receiving customer. Prior art problems are overcome by using a combination of router identification, SNMP numbers and interface numbers to identify the source and destination of data flow records. A flow information packet containing one or more information flow records is received at a flow process and parsed to identify the router source. The datagram of the flow information packet is examined to identify an SNMP number associated with the source and/or destination affiliated with the flow information packet. Based on the SNMP number, the interface of the router associated with the datagram is identified and the records are accordingly sorted into buckets. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165860 | Load Estimation in Receiver Diversity Telecommunication Systems - Methods and arrangements for providing load reference data in a CDMA wireless communication system with receiver diversity are presented. The method comprises measuring ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100165861 | CHANNEL CHANGE DECISION MECHANISM AND METHOD FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - In a communication network ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100165862 | User Equipment Tracing in a Wireless Communications Network - The present invention relates to a method and a network control node for tracing activity and monitoring performance of user equipments in a partly IP-based wireless communications network. The wireless communications network comprises operator controllable and/or operator uncontrollable wireless access points in communication with a network control node via one or more operator controllable and/or operator uncontrollable Internet Protocol, IP, networks. The described method is characterized by a first step of receiving a trace triggering request and user equipment identification, at a network control node, from a first network node. Alternatively, the trace triggering request is received on a signaling connection that explicitly identifies the user equipment. The network control node then starts a trace recording and information retrieval procedure relating to the identified user equipment and identifies all used IP networks and user equipment serving access point. The method further comprises the steps of analyzing the IP networks used between the network node and the user equipment and/or analyzing the user equipment serving access point. Thereafter, a trace printout is created including analyzing results and retrieved information, the printout is to be sent to a second network node, or stored locally for later retrieval. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165863 | LINK BAND ESTIMATING APPARATUS AND LINK BAND ESTIMATING METHOD - A link band estimating apparatus includes packet transmitting means for transmitting a plurality of packets in succession via a route portion of a plurality of communication routes which share a link to be measured, packet interval measuring means for measuring an interval by which the packets are spaced apart in another route portion of the communication routes, and band calculating means for calculating the band of the link to be measured based on a value measured by the packet interval measuring means and a data size of the packets. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165864 | COMMUNICATION CHARACTERISTIC MEASURING DEVICE ADAPTED TO WIRELESS TERMINAL - A cognitive terminal includes different types of radio modules suiting to different types radio media employed by a cognitive base station in the radio communication system. The radio module of the cognitive terminal counts the number of times it receives/transmits ACK/NACK in each unit time. A radio environment cognition unit of the cognitive terminal performs calculations using the count number(s) in consideration of the packet transmission time interval or the time required for repeating a single data packet, thus measuring characteristics of delay time variations in uplink/downlink communication with respect to each radio media. Thus, it is possible for the cognitive terminal to switch over radio media based on ACK/NACK in uplink/downlink communication. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165865 | NETWORK INTERFACE APPARATUS WITH POWER MANAGEMENT AND POWER SAVING METHOD THEREOF - Network interface apparatus with power management is disclosed, which comprises a physical layer circuit, for receiving a packet on a network; a media access control circuit, for performing the media access processing on the packet to output a processed packet; an interface circuit, coupled to the media access control layer, for transmitting the processed packet to a bus; a detecting circuit, coupled to the physical layer circuit, for detecting a transmitting status of the packet on the network to output a detecting signal; a loading control circuit, coupled to the detecting circuit, for control a load positioned in the interface circuit according to the detecting signal. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165866 | CIRCUIT, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TWO NODES OF A RADIO NETWORK - A circuit, system, and method for range finding between two nodes of a radio network, in particular in conformance with the industry standard IEEE 802.15.4. A mode for finding the range to a second node is initiated by the first node. A command for range finding with the address of the second node is transmitted from the first node to the second node in the mode for range finding. The second node is switched into the range finding mode by the command. A sequence is controlled by the command in the range finding mode. As a result of the control by the command, a first signal is transmitted by the first node in a transmission time window of the sequence and the first signal is received by the second node in an associated reception time window of the sequence, and a first phase value of the first signal is measured. As a result of the control by the command, a second signal is transmitted by the second node in a transmission time window of the sequence and the second signal is received by the first node in an associated reception time window of the sequence, and a second phase value of the second signal is measured. As a result of the control by the command, the first frequency of the first signal is changed by a frequency difference and the second frequency of the second signal is changed by the frequency difference in a subsequent time window of the sequence. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165867 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System to Indicate Characteristics of an Access Node to a Mobile Terminal - The present invention relates to a solution for indicating cell characteristics that apply specifically for a mobile terminal ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100165868 | TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING ARRANGEMENT WITH A CHANNEL-ORIENTED LINK - A transmitting and receiving arrangement as well as a method for transmission of monitoring and/or payload data in a transmitting and receiving arrangement for a wirefree communications system has a device which processes baseband for processing digital signals to form a baseband signal and a device which processes radio frequency for conversion of the baseband signal to a radio frequency signal. Monitoring and/or payload data are/is transmitted in the form of data packets via at least one channel of a channel-oriented link between the device which processes baseband and the device which processes radio frequency. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165869 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT PACKET TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING - A communications method comprising the steps of receiving a data packet; processing the data packet; and transmitting an ack packet approximately at an end of a first defined time interval if the processing of the data packet is completed within the first defined interval, or transmitting the ack packet approximately at an end of a second defined time interval if the processing of the data packet is not completed within the first defined interval and is completed within the second defined interval. Another communication method comprising the steps of transmitting a data packet; scanning a channel for an ack packet approximately at an end of a first defined time interval from the transmission of the data packet; and scanning the channel for the ack packet approximately at an end of a second defined time interval from the transmission of the data packet if the ack packet was not received within the first defined interval. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165870 | BANDWIDTH DIVISION FOR PACKET PROCESSING - A bandwidth divider and method for allocating bandwidth between a plurality of packet processors. The bandwidth divider includes a plurality of counters for measuring the bandwidth of data packets transferred from the bandwidth divider to a respective packet processor; and a controller for analyzing the plurality of counters and transferring a data packet to a selected packet processor based on the contents of the counters. The method monitors the bandwidth consumed by the packet processors; determines, based on the bandwidth consumed by the packet processors, which packet processor has consumed the least amount of bandwidth; and allocates a next data packet to the packet processor which has consumed the least amount of bandwidth. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165871 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETERMING THE BANDWIDTH USED BY A QUEUE - A system determines bandwidth use by queues in a network device. To do this, the system determines an instantaneous amount of bandwidth used by each of the queues and an average amount of bandwidth used by each of the queues. The system then identifies bandwidth use by each of the queues based on the instantaneous bandwidth used and the average bandwidth used by each of the queues. | 07-01-2010 |
20100172249 | Method for Determining a Route in a Wireless Mesh Network Using a Metric Based On Radio and Traffic Load - A method and apparatus for calculating a routing metric for a wireless network including retrieving configured system parameters, selecting a form of a first weight factor based on channel load/utilization and parameters of the first weight factor, selecting a form of a second weight factor based on frame/packet error rate and parameters of the second weight factor, retrieving estimated link bit rate, measuring a channel/link busy time, estimating a channel/link load, estimating a packet/frame error rate of the link and calculating the metric are described. A method and system for determining a route/path between two nodes of a wireless network including calculating a weighted radio and load aware metric by each node in the wireless network, storing the metric and using the metric to select the route/path for communication between two nodes of the wireless network based on a sum of the metrics calculated by each node of the wireless network are also described. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172250 | METHOD FOR TRANSITIONING BETWEEN MULTIPLE RECEPTION LEVELS - There is provided a method for enabling a user equipment (UE) to transition between a non-discontinuous reception (Non-DRX) level and at least one discontinuous reception (DRX) level. The UE in a DRX level wakes up periodically to monitor a scheduling channel. The method includes receiving a DRX indicator in a Non-DRX level with continuously monitoring the scheduling channel and transitioning from the Non-DRX level to a DRX level indicated by the DRX indicator. The UE can transition between multiple DRX levels by an explicit command/signaling. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172251 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR COMBINING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) CALL DATA WITH GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for combining VoIP call data with geographical information are disclosed. According to one method, VoIP subscriber device call quality information and VoIP subscriber device status information are determined for a plurality of VoIP subscriber devices. Geographic information is obtained regarding a geographic area in which the VoIP subscriber devices are deployed. The VoIP subscriber device status and the call quality information are combined with the geographic information and, based on the combined VoIP subscriber device status and the geographic information, a map that illustrates the geographic locations of the VoIP subscriber devices and an indication of the current status and the call quality of each VoIP subscriber device is graphically displayed on a display device associated with a computer. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172252 | METHOD FOR REDUCING INFORMATION LOAD OF PACKET SERVICE CONTROL CHANNEL - The present disclosure provides a method for reducing information load of Packet Service Control Channel and a method for updating channelization code. The method for reducing information load of Packet Service Control Channel comprises the following steps: sending a service access request to a RNC by means of a UE; determining whether the service need to monitor HS-SCCH, and if the HS-SCCH is determined not to be monitored, configuring a transport block size index used when the UE does not need to monitor the HS-SCCH and transmitting the transport block size index to a BS, by means of a RNC; determining a channelization code of a High-Speed Physical Shared Channel according to the transport block size index, and sending the channelization code to the RNC, by means of the BS; transmitting the transport block size index and the channelization code to the UE by means of the RNC. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172253 | Communication Apparatus, Communication Method, Communication Control Apparatus, Wireless Communication Apparatus, Communication Control Method, and Wireless Communication Method - In order to detect a change in the propagation environment of a wireless communication path rapidly and accurately and to minimize the number of packets to be discarded without being reproduced due to a delay in arrival time, a communication apparatus | 07-08-2010 |
20100172254 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTER-SYSTEM INTERFERENCE BASED RADIO CONTROL - User-networks having more than one type of access system are connected to networks having multi-access technology. Interference is measured between the connected, active access systems and the active systems are prioritized. A priority value is assigned to each of the active access systems based on the interference between systems. According to the assigned priority value, the access system with the highest value is enabled. Remaining systems are then compared with the enabled access system and an interference threshold. If the level of interference exceeds the threshold, the offending access system is disabled. If the threshold is not exceeded, the number of simultaneously operating access systems is compared to a predetermined number and the access systems below that number are then disabled. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172255 | NETWORK IN-LINE TESTER - An in-line tester ( | 07-08-2010 |
20100172256 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION USING MULTIPLE DESCRIPTION CODES - Techniques for using multiple description codes (MDC) for channel feedback to improve channel estimation accuracy are described. A receiver may obtain an initial/measured channel vector for a communication channel. The receiver may select a codebook in a set of codebooks for quantizing the initial channel vector. Each codebook may include a different set of channel vectors/codewords. Different codebooks may be selected in different reporting intervals. The receiver may select a channel vector in the selected codebook, and the selected channel vector may have (i) a largest correlation with a normalized channel vector or (ii) a smallest distance to the initial channel vector. The receiver may send the selected channel vector and possibly the selected codebook to a transmitter. The transmitter may receive the selected/reported channel vectors from the receiver in different reporting intervals and may derive a final channel vector for the communication channel based on the reported channel vectors. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172257 | Internet Real-Time Deep Packet Inspection and Control Device and Method - A deep packet inspection and control device includes a first rule table unit for storing a rule table including a first set of rule entries which are pre-defined or generated dynamically; a first scanning unit for receiving a first real-time packet data stream from the internet, and scanning the first real-time packet data stream according to a scanning window defined by the first set of rule entries; a first analysis unit for matching the first real-time packet data stream with the first set of rule entries in the scanning window of the first scanning unit, and outputting a matching result; and a first rule linkage unit for performing linkage control on the first real-time packet data stream to be output back to the internet according to the matching result output from the first analysis unit. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172258 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING PACKET - Disclosed is a packet routing method in an ad-hoc network. The method includes periodically calculating a link stability with respect to each neighbor node by means of the number of beacon frames lost within an update period for each neighbor node, updating the calculated link stability in the neighbor node table; identifying a neighbor node which is closer to a destination node of a received packet than the node when the node itself does not correspond to the destination node; and transmitting the received packet to the identified neighbor node when the identified link stability of the neighbor node is greater than or equal to a threshold value. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172259 | Detection Of Falsified Wireless Access Points - Apparatuses and methods for detecting falsified wireless access points are presented. A method includes identifying a target wireless access point for validation and measuring a round trip time delay to the wireless access point. The method also includes determining an expected processing delay of the wireless access point, analyzing the measured round trip time delay and the expected processing delay, and validating the wireless access point based upon the analysis. An apparatus includes a wireless transceiver, a processing unit coupled to the wireless transceiver, and a memory coupled to the processing unit. The processing unit is configured to identify a target wireless access point for validation, measure a round trip time delay to the wireless access point, determine an expected processing delay of the wireless access point, analyze the measured round trip time delay and the expected processing delay, and validate the wireless access point based upon the analysis. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172260 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL (TCP) TRAFFIC SMOOTHING - Various aspects of a method and system for transmission control protocol (TCP) traffic smoothing are presented. Traffic smoothing may comprise a method for controlling data transmission in a communications system that further comprises scheduling the timing of transmission of information from a TCP offload engine (TOE) based on a traffic profile. Traffic smoothing may comprise transmitting information from a TOE at a rate that is either greater than, approximately equal to, or less than, the rate at which the information was generated. Some conventional network interface cards (NIC) that utilize TOEs may not provide a mechanism that enables traffic shaping. By not providing a mechanism for traffic shaping, there may be a greater probability of lost packets in the network. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172261 | INFORMATION COLLECTION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION ERROR DETECTION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An information collection device includes a signaling packet analysis section which extracts communication device information from a signaling packet, the communication device information identifying a communication device that transmits the signaling packet when connecting to another device. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172262 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DELAY TIME COMPUTATION AND DELAY COMPENSATION BETWEEN BASE STATION AND REMOTE RADIO FREQUENCY UNIT IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for delay time computation and delay compensation between a Base Station (BS) and a remote Radio Frequency (RF) unit in a broadband wireless access system are provided. In a method of operating an apparatus for determining a delay time to compensate for delay between a BS modem card and a remote RF unit in a wireless access system, the method includes determining a process delay time required when traffic data is output from the BS modem card to an antenna of the remote RF unit in a state where a reference cable having a length short enough to neglect a cable delay time is connected between the BS modem card and the remote RF unit, determining a cable delay time required when a sync pulse signal is transmitted through a cable used in actual system operation between the BS modem card and the remote RF unit, and determining a time for outputting traffic data at an earlier time from a modem included in the BS modem card by using the determined process delay time and cable delay time. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172263 | TRANSPORT FORMAT COMBINATION SELECTING METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE STATION - In a method of selecting a transport format combination according to the present invention, a mobile station calculates the transmission power of a first physical channel using a first TFC with respect to each of first TFCs, and determines whether the mobile station is in a transmission capable state or not. Then, the mobile station calculates the sum of the transmission power of first and second physical channels using first and TFCs, with respect to each of combinations of the first and second TFCs, and determines whether the mobile station is in the transmission capable state or not. Then, the mobile station selects a first TFC from the first TFCs wherein the mobile station is in the transmission capable state. Then, the mobile station selects a second TFC from the second TFCs which are included in combinations wherein the mobile station is in the transmission capable state among the combinations including the selected first TFC. Thereafter, the mobile station transmits data in the first and second physical channels using the selected first and second TFCs, respectively. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172264 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING PERFORMANCE IN A NETWORK USING A VIRTUAL QUEUE AND A SWITCHED POISSON PROCESS TRAFFIC MODEL - A method for improving network performance using a virtual queue is disclosed. The method includes measuring characteristics of a packet arrival process at a network element, establishing a virtual queue for packets arriving at the network element, and modeling the packet arrival process based on the measured characteristics and a computed performance of the virtual queue. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172265 | Monitoring Network Traffic - A method for monitoring a wireless network includes, at a device including a communication interface coupling the device to a wireless network, monitoring messages transmitted between the communication interface and the wireless network, and outputting monitoring data associated with the monitored messages from the device. | 07-08-2010 |
20100177645 | METHOD FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT USING TERMINAL'S RECEIVED PERFORMANCE IN OFDMA WRAN SYSTEM - There is a provided a method for managing a multiple frequency assignment using a terminal's RX performance in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) wireless regional area network (WRAN) system, including: a) measuring a bit energy/noise power spectral density (Eb/No) and a received signal strength indicator (RSSI) which are received in the terminal; b) informing the measured Eb/No and RSSI of a base station; c) calculating a round trip delay (RTD) in the base station; d) determining a terminal performance level based on the measured Eb/No, RSSI and the calculated RTD; and e) determining a frequency channel and modulation scheme based on the determined performance level. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177646 | METHOD OF ESTIMATING QUALITY DEGRADATION ON NETWORK IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - In a quality degradation (QD) portion estimating method on a network, a passive measuring unit connected with a management target network measures E2E flow quality (FQ) data on a route from a transmitting terminal connected with a different network to a receiving terminal connected with the management target network and upstream FQ data on the route from the transmitting terminal to said passive measuring unit in the management target network. A QD portion estimating section connected with the management target network collects E2E FQ data and upper stream FQ data measured by said passive measuring unit. A detecting section detects as a QD flow in the management target network, a flow related to the E2E FQ data that does not show degradation of FQ, for the upstream FQ data related to the same transmitting and receiving terminals, from among the E2E FQ data which show the degradation of FQ. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177647 | Optimizing Requested Downlink Data By Adjusting Frame Number By Measuring Actual Transmission Delay - The invention relates to a method and an arrangement for optimizing a link latency on a communication interface in a communication network comprising a first communication network node ( | 07-15-2010 |
20100177648 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STATEFUL NEGOTIATION OF ENERGY EFFICIENT PARAMETERS IN LAYER 2 - A method and system for stateful negotiation of energy efficient parameters in Layer 2 are provided. In this regard, energy efficiency of communications between a first network device and a second network device may be managed via an exchange of information between the network devices and a verification of whether the information is up-to-date prior to utilizing the information. In various embodiments of the invention, the second network device may generate a decision pertaining to implementing one or more energy efficient techniques and the second network device may send a message to the first network device requesting that the first network device implement the decision. The message sent to the first network device may comprise the decision as well as parameter values utilized to generate the decision. The first network device may receive the decision and the parameter values and may determine whether the received parameter values are up-to-date. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177649 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD USED IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus communicating with a user equipment terminal in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The base station apparatus includes a determination unit determining whether an uplink signal received from the user equipment terminal is to be retransmitted, a control information generation unit generating control information to permit the user equipment terminal to transmit an uplink signal, and a transmission unit transmitting the control information to the user equipment terminal. Further, in the base station apparatus, when the determination unit determines that the uplink signal is to be retransmitted, the control information generation unit generates the control information so as to include retransmission information indicating that an uplink signal transmitted before from the user equipment terminal is to be retransmitted. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177650 | DATA NETWORK MONITORING SYSTEM AND METHOD - Methods and systems for deriving measures indicative of application-level quality of service in relation to a—client application operating in a data network whereby application data of relevance to the client application is transmitted in packets from node to node over the network by means of a plurality of application flows, each application flow being an exchange of dat between the client application and a serving application; the method comprising: monitoring characteristics of packets containing application data of relevance to the client application and identifying an application flow associated with each packet; determining from monitored characteristics, according to predetermined criteria and individually in relation to each of a plurality of application flows associated with the client application, a flow-level performance measure; and collating the respective flow-level performance measures and deriving an application-level service-quality measure. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177651 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A determination unit ( | 07-15-2010 |
20100177652 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING A SINGLE DATA FLOW IN AN AGGREGATE PACKET DATA FLOW AND FOR IDENTIFYING THE APPLICATION GENERATING SAID SINGLE DATA FLOW - The invention relates to a method and a system for detecting a single data flow in an aggregate packet data flow and identifying the application generating the single data flow, this single data flow being divided into messages, each message comprising a plurality of blocks, each block (g) having n bits for identifying 2 | 07-15-2010 |
20100177653 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPUTING AND REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATION (CQI) - Techniques for computing and reporting channel quality indication (CQI) are described. In an aspect, a plurality of CQI computation methods may be supported, and each CQI computation method may indicate how CQI should be computed. One CQI computation method may be selected for use. CQI may then be computed and reported in accordance with the selected CQI computation method. In an exemplary design, a user equipment (UE) may obtain a selected method for computing CQI, which may be chosen based on the UE capability and/or other factors. The selected method may specify (i) CQI computation for a specific codeword among a plurality of codewords or (ii) CQI computation by averaging signal quality across a plurality of layers used for transmission. The UE may compute CQI in accordance with the selected method, send the CQI to a base station, and receive data sent by the base station based on the CQI. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177654 | OPERATING CARRIER SELECTION FOR HOME NETWORK - Various embodiments are disclosed relating to carrier selection for a home network. In an example network, a method may include using a first carrier frequency to transmit in a downlink direction to a mobile node in a home wireless network, and receiving, from the mobile node, a signal strength measurement for each of a plurality of carrier frequencies. The method may further include receiving, from the mobile node, an error report for the first carrier frequency, and determining that a link quality for the first carrier frequency is below a threshold based on the error report. The method may further include selecting a second carrier frequency from the plurality of carrier frequencies based on the determining and based on the signal strength measurement of the second carrier frequency, and changing, based on the selecting, from the first carrier frequency to the second carrier frequency to transmit data in a downlink direction to the mobile node. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177655 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ANTENNA SWITCHING - A client terminal, such as a customer premises equipment (CPE), for receiving a communication signal in a plurality of reception configurations. The client terminal comprises an antenna unit having a plurality of reception configurations for receiving communication signal having a plurality of frames, each the frame having a predefined frame segment, a receiver, a switching module configured for switching between operational and testing receptions of the communication signal respectively by the receiver via the antenna unit in operational and testing configurations, and a timing circuit configured for timing the switching during the operational reception to allow the receiver to receive the testing reception when the predefined frame segment is received via the antenna unit in operational configuration. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177656 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING WIRELESSLY PROVIDING HIGH CAPACITY SERVICE USING MULTIPLE ACCESS LINKS - A data receiving method in a wireless LAN system using multiple channels includes: determining whether a difference value of signal levels of first and second access points is equal to or less than a preset value; transmitting an association request frame to the first and second access points according to the determination result; and receiving association response frames from the first and second access points. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177657 | METHOD OF MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE CHANNELS - A medium access control method in a wireless LAN system using multiple channels includes: determining the size of data frames related to a plurality of wireless stations connected through multiple channels; adjusting the number or length of the data frames related to the respective wireless stations, based on the result of determination, so that transmission start time and transmission end time of the data frames coincide during a transmission duration of an access point; and transmitting the data frames, the number or length of which has been adjusted, to the respective wireless stations. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177658 | Network Monitoring System and Path Extracting Method - A network monitoring system that monitors a communication network including plural communication apparatuses and includes an obtaining part for obtaining a transmission traffic amount and a reception traffic amount of each port of the plural communication apparatuses, a determining part for determining whether the transmission traffic amount is no less than a first threshold and whether the reception traffic amount is less than a second threshold for each port of the plural communication apparatuses, a storage part for storing connecting path data of the communication network therein, an extracting part for extracting a loop affected path, and an outputting part for outputting data of the loop affected path. | 07-15-2010 |
20100182915 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS NETWORK MANAGEMENT - Methods and systems for wireless network management are described. In one embodiment, a radio measurement of a characteristic of a wireless access technology may be taken. The wireless access technology may enable data communication through a wireless network when connected to an access point. A report may be transmitted through an alternate access technology. The report may be based on the radio measurement. Additional methods and systems are disclosed. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182916 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING NETWORK WIRELESS COMMUNICATION RESOURCES - Embodiments are described that provide methods and radio networks that communicate data between a mobile communication device and a core network. The methods include using network coding to encode data, and communicating a subset of the encoded data between the mobile communication device and the core network through a dynamic relay station. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182917 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING A PACKET IN MOBILE IP SYSTEM - The system includes a mobile node ( | 07-22-2010 |
20100182918 | METHOD AND INSTALLATION FOR CLASSIFICATION OF TRAFFIC IN IP NETWORKS - Method for classification of traffic on telecommunications networks, said method including a stage for the capture of traffic and a stage for detailed packet analysis, said method also including a stage for the statistical classification of traffic using a statistically-generated decision tree. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182919 | METHOD FOR TRIGGERING A MEASUREMENT REPORT OF MOBILE TERMINAL - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method for transmitting and receiving a measurement report of a mobile terminal is provided. A network transmits a paging message to the mobile terminal for performing the measurement report or transmits a PDU (Protocol Data Unit) having segmented SDU (Service Data Unit). The mobile terminal transmits the measurement report upon receiving the paging message or the PDU having the segmented SDU, thereby utilizing a radio resource effectively. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182920 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DATA COMMUNICATION - A communication apparatus includes an input interface to receive a flow of segmented data, and an output interface to transmit the received data from a plurality of physical links. The output interface includes storage units corresponding to the respective physical links to store transmission data. A link monitor unit observes how much data is accumulated in each storage unit. A distribution unit selects which physical link is to be used to output the received data. Based on the observations by the link monitor unit, the distribution unit changes the selection to an alternative physical link that has a larger amount of stored data than the currently selected physical link. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182921 | USER ACTIVATED BYPASS FOR IP MEDIA - A system and method for falling back to a secondary network when there is insufficient quality on a primary network is disclosed. The present invention uses a PSTN as a fallback for the IP media when the IP network cannot pass the media acceptably and while continuing to use the IP network for call control and other features. In one embodiment, a call manager has a media monitoring module, a bypass module, a PSTN control module and a GUI module. Once a call has been established between endpoints using a primary IP network, the media monitoring module monitors for degradation in call quality. If degradation in call quality is detected, the GUI module presents an interface to the user that allows selection of the secondary network or the primary IP network for continuation of the call. If the user selected the secondary network, the bypass module is activated to transfer the data communication to a secondary network such as a PSTN while the call control continues to be over the primary network. The present invention also includes a variety of methods including a method for falling back to a secondary network and a method for dynamically switching between a primary and a secondary network to ensure call quality. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182922 | WIRELESS APPARATUS FOR MEASURING A RECEIVED WIRELESS SIGNAL AND MEASUREMENT SYSTEM USING THE WIRELESS APPARATUS - A base station apparatus switches between a communication mode for performing communication with a communication party and a calibration mode for performing a calibration process. In the calibration mode, a weight vector in accordance with a first algorithm for performing a null steering directivity control for orienting an area of drastically-lowered antenna gain in the direction of arrival of a reception signal. Furthermore, multiple transmission signals weighted by the acquired weight vector are output, and a correction value for readjusting the result of the null steering directivity control is acquired from a control PC. In the communication mode, multiple transmission signals are corrected by using the correction value acquired in a calibration mode, and the corrected signals are output. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182923 | USER EQUIPMENT TERMINAL, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION COMMUNICATION METHOD - A user equipment terminal estimates a channel state, encodes channel state information representing the estimated channel state, and transmits the channel state information over plural transmission time intervals. A base station apparatus receives the channel state information over plural transmission time intervals, decodes the channel state information, and assigns resources based on the channel state information. The present invention provides the user equipment terminal, the base station apparatus, and a channel state information communication method. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182924 | METHOD OF CHANGING TRANSMISSION MODE, METHOD OF REQUESTING PACKET RETRANSMISSION, AND METHOD OF RETRANSMITTING PACKET - The present invention is directed to a method of changing a transmission mode, a method of requesting a packet retransmission, and a method of retransmitting a packet with respect to a broadcasting or multicast service. According to the invention, a plurality of terminals provided with one broadcasting or multicast service shares one random access channel (RACH) so as to transmit channel information. Accordingly, a base station receives the channel information through one RACH from the terminal or detects a packet collision generated in the RACH to confirm a request for changing the transmission mode or a request for maintaining the transmission mode by the terminal. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182925 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A radio communication apparatus including: a receiver receiving a traffic evaluation index value of a contention node as a connection node one layer below a self node with a root node of a radio network set as the top layer; parameter determining unit determining a parameter related to priority control of the contention node or a priority for determining the parameter, based on the traffic evaluation index value of the contention node, so that a traffic congestion is prevented and cleared; and a transmitter transmitting the parameter related to the priority control of the contention node or the priority to the contention node. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182926 | PACKET FORWARDING SYSTEM, PACKET FORWARDING DEVICE, PROXY DEVICE, COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM, AND CONTROL METHOD OF PACKET FORWARDING DEVICE - A first packet forwarding device is able to form a redundancy group with another packet forwarding device, and is configured to switch master and backup operation with the another packet forwarding device in a complementary manner. The first packet forwarding device is further configured to switch a first operation mode and a second operation mode in the backup operation, the first operation mode monitoring a control packet transmitted regarding the redundancy group from the another packet forwarding device that performs the master operation, and the second operation mode not monitoring the control packet. A proxy device is configured to monitor the control packet on behalf of the first packet forwarding device when the first packet forwarding device is in the second operation mode, and to control switching between the first and second operation modes of the first packet forwarding device based on monitor result of the control packet. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182927 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL PACKET IN BROADBAND COMMUNICATION NETWORK - An apparatus and a method for transmitting a control signal for determining a keep alive status of a counterpart node in a broadband communication network are provided. When a period for determining a keep alive status of the counterpart node to which a data is connected arrives, whether traffic is received from the counterpart node is determined. If it is determined that the traffic is received from the counterpart node, the keep alive status of the counterpart node is determined using the traffic received from the counterpart node. If it is determined that the traffic is not received from the counterpart node, a request signal for determining the keep alive status of the counterpart node is transmitted to the counterpart node. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182928 | Method and System For Sensing Available Spectrum In Wireless Communication Systems - Managing RF spectrum usage by secondary, or unlicensed, devices in portions of the RF spectrum where licensed, or primary, services operate is a requirement of cognitive radio systems. To perform the necessary spectrum scanning, a transition period, such as a TTG or RTG can be extended and the scanning performed during the extended period. The presence of a primary service signal can also detected by detecting an energy signature of the primary service signal in a known sequence. In both cases, there is no need to define quiet periods during which secondary devices scan the RF spectrum, thus resulting in saving of resources and improved QoS. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182929 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Techniques for controlling transmissions in wireless communication networks are described. In one aspect, transmission control for a mesh network may be achieved by ranking mesh points or stations in the mesh network. In one design, the rank of a first station in the mesh network may be determined. At least one station of lower rank than the first station in the mesh network may be identified. At least one transmission parameter for the at least one station of lower rank may be set by the first station. At least one transmission parameter value may be selected for each station based on the rank, QoS requirements, amount of traffic, and/or achievable data rate for that station and may be sent (e.g., via a probe response message) to the station. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182930 | PACKET PRIORITIZATION AND ASSOCIATED BANDWIDTH AND BUFFER MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES FOR AUDIO OVER IP - The present invention is directed to voice communication devices in which an audio stream is divided into a sequence of individual packets, each of which is routed via pathways that can vary depending on the availability of network resources. All embodiments of the invention rely on an acoustic prioritization agent that assigns a priority value to the packets. The priority value is based on factors such as whether the packet contains voice activity and the degree of acoustic similarity between this packet and adjacent packets in the sequence. A confidence level, associated with the priority value, may also be assigned. In one embodiment, network congestion is reduced by deliberately failing to transmit packets that are judged to be acoustically similar to adjacent packets; the expectation is that, under these circumstances, traditional packet loss concealment algorithms in the receiving device will construct an acceptably accurate replica of the missing packet. In another embodiment, the receiving device can reduce the number of packets stored in its jitter buffer, and therefore the latency of the speech signal, by selectively deleting one or more packets within sustained silences or non-varying speech events. In both embodiments, the ability of the system to drop appropriate packets may be enhanced by taking into account the confidence levels associated with the priority assessments. | 07-22-2010 |
20100188984 | RADIO TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, AND RADIO TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided is a communication device, which is enabled to improve the throughput of a communication system by reducing the difference of a transmission power between an SCCH and an SDCH thereby to satisfy the required quality of a PAPR. In this device, an MCS selection unit ( | 07-29-2010 |
20100188985 | MOBILE STATION, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS AND MOBILITY CONTROL METHOD - A mobile station includes a radio channel condition evaluation unit evaluating a radio channel condition; a radio channel condition averaging unit averaging the evaluated radio channel condition over a predefined time period; a radio channel condition threshold storage unit storing a threshold of the radio channel condition and a message type, the threshold and the message type being specified by a radio access network apparatus; a radio channel condition comparison unit comparing the averaged radio channel condition with the threshold; and a radio channel condition reporting unit transmitting an identifier and the radio channel condition for a cell to the radio access network apparatus, the averaged radio channel condition of the cell being greater than or equal to the threshold. A radio access network apparatus includes a radio channel condition threshold reporting unit transmitting a threshold of a reception level and information indicative of a reporting message type; a communicating cell switch unit instructing a communicating cell to be switched based on a radio channel condition supplied from a mobile station; and a mobile station identifier reporting unit transmitting a mobile station identifier for use in a destination cell based on the radio channel condition supplied from the mobile station. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188986 | Network Node and Method for Fast Traffic Measurement and Monitoring - A network node (e.g., edge node, muter, network management node) is described herein that implements a method for providing fast and exact traffic information during normal traffic fluctuations in a network and also during a sudden and big change in the traffic conditions of the network. In one embodiment, the method monitors a parameter of traffic flowing within a network by: (1) measuring a traffic parameter (m | 07-29-2010 |
20100188987 | Power learning security in wireless routers - In described embodiments, elements of a wireless home network employ learned power security for the network. An access point, router, or other wireless base station emits and receives signals having corresponding signal strengths. Wireless devices coupled to the base station through a radio link are moved through the home network at boundary points of the home and the signal strength is measured at each device and communicated to the base station. Based on the signal strength information from the emitted signals measured at the boundary points and/or from measured signal strength information of signals received from the boundary points, the base station determines a network secure area. The base station declines permission of devices attempting to use or join the home network that exhibit signal strength characteristics less than boundary values for the network secure area. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188988 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY DEVICES IN AN IEEE 802.15.4 NETWORK - In a 802.15.4 network, each reduced functionality device (RFD) is permitted to communicate with only an assigned full function device (FFD). The present invention allows each of the RFDs to communicate with another RFD upon the RFD determining that the local FFD assigned to the RFD is inoperable or unable to communicate. Under emergency conditions, the RFD is able to communicate with a closely located RFDs such that the closely located RFDs can receive and respond to an emergency situation and/or repeat the message. To satisfy the 802.15.4 standards, communication between the RFDs is allowed only during emergency conditions and when the FFD is inoperative. A comprehensive test procedure is included to insure the integrity of the system is preserved at all times. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188989 | MONITORING OF REAL-TIME TRANSPORT PROTOCOL (RTP) PACKET FLOW ALONG RTP PATH - Techniques are provided herein to enable monitoring of a real-time transport protocol (RTP) packet flow in devices along the path that the RTP packet flow traversed from a source to a destination. A device that is a source or destination of a RTP packet flow transmits a monitor request message that requests one or more other devices along a path of the RTP packet flow to monitor the RTP packet flow. The device that is the source or destination of the RTP packet flow receives one or more monitoring reports from the one or more other devices along the path of the RTP packet flow. This allows a device that requested monitoring of the RTP packet flow to analyze the monitor reports in order to determine a location of a cause of reduced performance in the RTP packet flow. e.g., missing packets, overly delayed packets, etc. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188990 | Network based service profile management with user preference, adaptive policy, network neutrality, and user privacy - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, a network device implements a service profile for assisting control of a communications device use of a service on a network, in which the service profile includes service policy settings for the communications device; monitors use of the service by the communications device based on the service profile; and modifies a service policy setting to achieve a service usage goal. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188991 | Network based service policy implementation with network neutrality and user privacy - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, a network device collects service usage measurements for a communications device use of a service on a network; and compares the service usage measurements to a device assisted implementation of a service policy to verify the device assisted implementation of the service policy. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188992 | Service profile management with user preference, adaptive policy, network neutrality and user privacy for intermediate networking devices - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, an intermediate networking device provides a service intermediary or intermediate connection between a network and one or more communications devices; implements a service profile set for assisting control of the intermediate networking device use of a service set on the network, wherein the service profile set includes one or more service profiles, each profile being associated with either the intermediate networking device or a communications device, each profile further including a plurality of service policy settings; and monitors use of the service set based on the service profile set, in which the implementation of the first service profile set is verified. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188993 | Network tools for analysis, design, testing, and production of services - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, a network device publishes a test service profile to a group of communications devices, in which the test service profile provides for beta testing of the test service profile for a service on a network, and the test service profile includes service policy settings; and monitors use of the service by the group of communications devices based on the test service profile. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188994 | Verifiable service billing for intermediate networking devices - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, an intermediate networking device provides a service intermediary or intermediate connection between a network and one or more communications devices; implements a service policy set for assisting control of the intermediate networking device use of a service on the network, in which the service policy set includes one or more service policies, each policy being associated with either the intermediate networking device or a communications device; and monitors use of the service based on the service policy set; and in which the implementation of the service policy set is verified. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188995 | Verifiable and accurate service usage monitoring for intermediate networking devices - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, an intermediary networking device provides a service intermediary or intermediate connection between a network and one or more communications devices; implements a service policy set for assisting control of the intermediate networking device use of a service on the network, in which the service policy set includes one or more service policies, each policy being associated with either the intermediate networking device or a communications device; and monitors use of the service based on the service policy set; and in which the one or more of the communication devices include a service usage notification capability, and the implementation of the first service policy set is verified. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188996 | ANALYSIS DEVICE FOR DETECTING MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS PROVIDING A CHOSEN QUALITY OF SERVICE, FOR A MOBILE COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT - An analysis device installed in mobile communication equipment includes a communication module for collecting information about mobile communication networks providing known capabilities which may offer service(s), to which the analysis device can connect the mobile communication equipment. The analysis device includes a detection means for determining from information collected by the communication module if one of the mobile communication networks is an accessible mobile communication network providing a chosen quality of service to which the mobile communication equipment is not already connected, and a control means for connecting to a newly determined accessible mobile communication network | 07-29-2010 |
20100188997 | THROUGHPUT ESTIMATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - In a throughput estimation method for estimating throughput of a first channel in a cellular system in which the first channel and a second channel that are used for an uplink wireless communication service in a cell, noise rise of the second channel is calculated from the traffic volume of the second channel, the noise rise and a target RTWP that is the target total reception power of the base station that is set in the base station are used to calculate a ratio of resources used for the wireless communication service that can be allocated to the first channel, and the resource ratio is then used to calculate the throughput of the first channel. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188998 | INTEROPERABILITY INTERFACE FOR MODEM CONTROL - A system for facilitating interaction with one or more radio modules incorporated within an apparatus. An interface may be provided to supply parameters usable by one or more radio modules for regulating communication. In at least one example configuration, the interface may receive information pertaining to one or more communication flows, may utilize the communication flow information to determine operational conditions for managing the one or more communication flows, and may formulate parameters for controlling one or more radio modules based on the operational condition information. These formulated parameters may then be provided to the one or more radio modules in the apparatus. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188999 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication method of a wireless communication apparatus ( | 07-29-2010 |
20100189000 | PREFIX INFORMATION CHECK DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Disclosed is a technique to prevent the registration of false information that a mobile router is managing prefix information that is not actually managed. According to the technique, when a mobile network prefix is registered from an MR (mobile router | 07-29-2010 |
20100189001 | SIGNAL ANALYZER - A signal analyzer for facilitating observation of a relative value, i.e., the quantity of variation in power between slots, at the time of analyzing the power of a signal which is to be measured and subjected to power control in units of slot. An analyzing section detects the power value of every slot of a signal which is to be measured and received at a receiving section, and calculates the relative value of the power value between each slot and a slot separated therefrom by a predetermined number. A display control section displays the relative values thus calculated as a graph at a display section by arranging them continuously in time series. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189002 | MULTIPLE BEAMFORMING METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention relates to a beamforming method and apparatus. A beamforming method for use in a base station for transmitting a plurality of streams through a plurality of antennas includes: receiving feedback information including information on a first codeword selected from a codebook including a plurality of codewords from each of a plurality of user terminals; grouping the plurality of user terminals by use of the feedback information from each user terminal; determining a user terminal to which a plurality of streams will be assigned of the plurality of user terminals, and determining a second codeword to be used for beamforming from the codebook by use of the feedback information of each user terminal and grouping information; and multiplying data to be transmitted through the plurality of steams by the second codeword and a unitary matrix. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189003 | TEST APPARATUS AND CIRCUIT APPARATUS - There is provided a test apparatus for testing a device under test, including a plurality of operational units that operate in response to control data supplied thereto to test the device under test, a control section that generates packet data containing the control data and unit selection data indicating which one or more of the plurality of operational units are to be selected, and a plurality of data transfer units that are cascade-connected to each other so that the packet data is transferred from each of the plurality of data transfer units to a data transfer unit of a following stage, where each of the plurality of data transfer units corresponds to one or more of the plurality of operational units. Here, when each of the plurality of data transfer units receives the packet data whose unit selection data indicates that one or more of the operational units corresponding thereto are to be selected, the data transfer unit inputs the control data contained in the packet data into the selected operational units or reads data from the selected operational units. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189004 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTEXT AWARE DEEP PACKET INSPECTION IN IP BASED MOBILE DATA NETWORKS - The present method and system perform context aware deep pack inspection in a mobile IP data network. For doing so, the method and system collect real time data from mobile IP data sessions, analyze the real time data and differentiate user data traffic from control traffic. Then, the method and system extract control information from the control traffic and create a subscriber context. The subscriber context comprises the at least one unique identifier and the corresponding IP address. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189005 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC SELECTION OF A MAC PROTOCOL FOR A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED SYSTEM - MAC protocol selection is described. In a communication system, a MAC protocol is automatically selected from a set of MAC protocols based on a connectivity graph of at least part of the communication system. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189006 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMPUTING AND SENDING RESOURCE REQUESTS AND AVOIDING DEADLOCK SITUATIONS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for requesting resources to send data packets in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes calculating a size of a Robust Header Compression (ROHC) feedback packet associated with data packets available for transmitting, creating a Buffer Status Report (BSR) based on the number of data packets available for transmitting and the size of the ROHC feedback packet, sending the BSR to a first network element to allocate resources for the UE for sending the data packets available for transmitting along with ROHC feedback packet and identifying a size of a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) status report when a handover procedure is performed. The BSR is estimated based on the size of the PDCP status report, the number of data packets available for transmitting and the size of the ROHC feedback packet. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189007 | Apparatus And Method For Constructing A Data Unit That Includes A Buffer Status Report - An apparatus and method for constructing a data unit that includes a buffer status report (BSR) such that when BSR triggering is performed, the size(s) of the necessary sub-header(s) are also to be considered together in addition to the BSR size. There is a checking unit that checks whether any padding region is available in a MAC PDU that was constructed, a comparing unit that compares the number of padding bits with the size of a buffer status report (BSR) plus its sub-header, and a processing unit that cooperates with the checking unit and the comparing unit to trigger a buffer status report (BSR) procedure if the number of padding bits is larger than the size of the BSR plus its sub-header, including the BSR and its sub-header in the MAC PDU, and setting an LCID in the sub-header to indicate a BSR is included, the BSR having been triggered due to padding. Using such apparatus allows the sub-header(s) to be inserted (included) into the MAC PDU (or transport block (TB) or other data unit). | 07-29-2010 |
20100189008 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DETERMINING STANDBY TIME FOR MOBILE STATIONS - A method and system for determining standby time for a mobile station uses a battery simulator, a base station emulator, a computer to control the test equipment and MSUT for testing a mobile station. The computer includes a module for determining a radio off battery voltage, a module for deriving a battery capacity in dependence upon the radio off battery voltage, a module for measuring battery capacity usage in a predetermined time while the mobile station is in standby mode and a module for determining a standby time for the mobile station in dependence upon the battery capacity and the battery capacity usage, where the predetermined time is less than the standby time. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189009 | Providing link quality intelligence from physical layer to higher protocol layers - Providing link quality intelligence from physical layer to higher protocol layers. The PHY (physical layer) of devices operating within wireless communication systems assess 1 or more operational parameters corresponding to a PHY link that communicatively couples 2 or more devices. These PHYs provide this assessed intelligence to the devices' higher protocol layers so that these higher protocol layers have greater visibility of the operational parameters of the PHY link. These higher protocol layers may use this assessed intelligence to make decisions about how future communication are governed across the PHY links. For example, based on a change of the operational parameter(s), the higher protocol layers may modify the operational parameter(s) for future communications. The higher protocol layers may direct the PHY to assess a particular set of operational parameters, and the higher protocol layers may assess different operational parameters at different times. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195510 | Method for the Digital Evaluation of a Data Transmission Network - The invention relates to a method for the digital evaluation of a data transmission network comprising a plurality of nodes ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100195511 | System and Method for Monitoring the Location of a Mobile Network Unit - This invention relates to a system ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100195512 | Systems and methods for presenting electronic communication packets using a logic analyzer - A method for presenting data via a display on a first computing device according to a user-selected format is described. One of a plurality of data format structures is selected. The structure comprises one or more predetermined data segments according to the selected format. A bus data stream comprising a plurality of data segments is received from a second device. The plurality of data segments being in one of a plurality of possible predetermined formats. The plurality of data segments is decoded in one or more data structures according to the selected format. The contents of the one or more data structures are displayed on a screen. A user analyzes the displayed contents and determines whether to execute debugging operations for the second device according to the contents of the displayed data structures. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195513 | PACKET INSPECTION DEVICE AND METHOD - A packet inspection device and method for use with a packet-retrievable network apparatus are provided. The packet inspection method includes: converting header information of a packet received into a hashing function value in presence of handshaking underway at the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) layer and comparing the hashing function value by a hashing function unit of the pending processing module, storing the hashing function value in a memory unit, and performing packet state comparison and packet screening and then creating by the session processing module a transmission connection according to the packet screened and selected by the pending processing module upon determination that data stored in the memory unit match the hashing function value resulting from conversion by the hashing function unit, thereby expediting packet inspection, reducing occupied memory space, and cutting costs. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195514 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A technique for operating a wireless communications system that supports multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) communications between a base station and multiple mobile stations involves generating inter-cell interference information at the mobile stations and providing the inter-cell interference information to the base station. The base station uses the inter-cell interference information to calculate channel quality indicators (CQIs) and then makes scheduling decisions in response to the CQIs. Data is transmitted from the base station to the mobile stations according to the scheduling decisions. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195515 | NODE APPARATUS, NODE QUANTITY ADJUSTMENT METHOD, AND TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM FOR A SENSOR NETWORK - A node apparatus and an adjusting method of a quantity of nodes for a sensor network and a tangible machine-readable medium thereof are provided. The sensor network comprises a plurality of groups, wherein each group has a plurality of nodes. For each group, one of the nodes is set to be a gate node, and each node within the group transmits at least one data of itself to the corresponded gate node. Each gate node calculates a data aggregation time based on a data length per unit time of received data and a predetermined packet length, so that each gate node is able to adjust the quantity of nodes within the group thereof accordingly. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195516 | NETWORK COST ANALYSIS - Embodiments generally disclosed herein include methods and systems for calculating incremental network costs between logical city pairs in a network (each city pair being in communication across the network via one or more physical links). For example, the method includes a cost analyzer that, for each physical link in the network, determines a steady state capacity allocation associated with each city pair in the network and, in the same vein, determines a restoration capacity allocation associated with each city pair in the network. The cost analyzer is capable of calculating an incremental cost per unit of traffic for a given city pair based on: i) the steady state capacity allocation and a restoration capacity allocation associated with a given city pair, as compared to, ii) the aggregate steady state capacity allocations and restoration capacity allocations associated with each city pair in the network. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195517 | PROPAGATION DELAY TIME MEASURING SYSTEM - A propagation delay time measuring system | 08-05-2010 |
20100195518 | SMOOTH EDGE DISTORTION IN BROADBAND CHANNEL INTERPOLATION VIA VIRTUAL PILOT EXTRAPOLATION - In the basic transform domain (linear filtering interpolation) technique for channel estimation at the receiver in a wireless communication system, the improvement of providing channel estimation at the receiver with computational efficiency, comprising:
| 08-05-2010 |
20100195519 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING A MISS-DETECTION OF DUPLICATED PACKETS AND AN OUT-OF-SEQUENCE DELIVERY TO THE HIGHER LAYER IN UNACKNOWLEDGED MODE OPERATION - A terminal is configured to perform a method capable of preventing the miss detection of duplicated unacknowledged mode data (UMD) protocol data units (PDU) and out-of-sequence delivery in unacknowledged mode (UM) operations. The terminal includes a receiver configured to not make a slot with a sequence number (SN) of k available to receive in new UMD PDU unless a time has passed such that no more retransmissions of a previous UMD PDU with the SN of k is possible. The terminal also includes a transmitter configured to determine a transmission window size for transmitting UMD PDUs. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195520 | Apparatus for detecting quality deterioration of a telecommunications network by discriminating periodic faults - An apparatus for detecting deterioration in quality of a telecommunications network includes a packet monitor for monitoring a packet flowing through the network, a quality information extractor for extracting the quality index of the network on the basis of the packet monitored, a quality deterioration detector for detecting deterioration in quality of the network on the basis of the quality index. The quality deterioration detector determines, for the packet monitored and coming only from a wired line, that the quality of the network is deteriorated if the quality index decreases, and determines, for the packet monitored and coming from a wireless line, that the quality of the network is deteriorated if the quality index aperiodically decreases. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195521 | Adaptive Rate Control in a Communications System - The invention relates to a method for controlling a bit-rate of a session in a packet-switched communications system where multiple sessions are set-up via a shared resource. A current bit-rate of the session is compared to a bit-rate range valid for the session to determine a distance from the position of the current bit-rate to one of the end-points of the bit-rate range. The current bit-rate is then adapted differently depending on the distance to the selected end-point. By controlling the bit-rate of each session that is set-up via the shared resource for applications that provide delay-sensitive services to users in this way the method and corresponding system and sender-receiver arrangements have the effect that rate adaptations can be distributed among the applications so that users share responsibility for rate adaptations. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195522 | CONTROL METHOD FOR UPLINK CONNECTING OF IDLE TERMINAL - A method for controlling an uplink connection of an idle UE in a wireless communication system is disclosed. In a method for performing a random access procedure by an idle-mode user equipment (UE) which desires to receive a specific broadcast/multicast service in a wireless communication system, the method includes, receiving a first message transmitted from a network, so as to count the number of UEs which desire to receive the broadcast/multicast service, transmitting a preamble for a random access to the network, receiving a second message including uplink (UL) radio resource allocation information from the network in response to the preamble, transmitting a third message selected according to a connection indication information contained in the first or second message to the network using the uplink (UL) radio resource allocation information, wherein the connection indication information indicates whether a connection to the network is required or not, and receiving a contention resolution message from the network. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195523 | Quality Channel Reporting in a Time Division System | 08-05-2010 |
20100195524 | USER EQUIPMENT - A disclosed user equipment terminal capable of transmitting and receiving broadcast information based on broadcast information change notification notified by a base station apparatus, including a determination unit receiving a signal transmitted from the base station apparatus and determining whether the broadcast information has been changed based on the signal and a broadcast information re-reception unit performing re-reception of the broadcast information when the broadcast information has been changed based on a result of determination by the determination unit. Further, in the user equipment terminal, after a predetermined re-reception process suspension period has passed, the broadcast information re-reception unit performs the re-reception of the broadcast information. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195525 | Preliminary Neighbor Cell Suitability Check - Disclosed herein are apparatus, method, and computer program product whereby user equipment ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100195526 | Multi-Stream Priority-Based Space-Time Coding - Embodiments for space-time coding are disclosed. One method includes establishing a priority for each of a plurality of data streams. A number of data bits for each of the plurality of data streams are allocated. A desired signal quality for each of the plurality of data streams is determined based on the corresponding priority. Each of the plurality of data streams are modulated according to the allocated number of data bits of each of the plurality of data streams. A space-time code is selected for each of the plurality of data streams based at least partially on the desired signal quality for each of the plurality of data streams, wherein at least one of the space-time codes is at least one of a vector or a matrix. Each of the modulated data streams are space-time coded with the selected space-time code. The space-time coded modulated data streams are summed, and transmitted. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195527 | SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS FOR COOPERATIVE BEAMFORMING BASED ON RESOURCE QUALITY INDICATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure support techniques for cooperative beamforming based on inter-cell coordination. Signaling design allows coordinated downlink transmissions with reduced inter-cell interference. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195528 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEDIA ADAPTATION THEREIN - A media adaptation method in a communication system is provided. The method includes updating a previously stored management object by a communication terminal when an operating environment of the communication terminal is changed, and determining a packet unit between the communication terminal and another communication terminal using the updated management object by the communication terminal when communicating with the other communication terminal. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195529 | ENFORCING ACCESS CONTROL ON MULTICAST TRANSMISSIONS - Systems, apparatus, methods, and computer program products for multicast access control are provided to analyze incoming data based on a source zone and a destination zone of the incoming data. Appropriate access control rules are applied to incoming data based on the results of the analysis. Additional implementations of a multicast access control include using a proxy rendezvous point operable to function as a rendezvous point in place of a physical rendezvous point. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195530 | BANDWIDTH-BASED ADMISSION CONTROL MECHANISM - A device generates a service protection factor (SPF | 08-05-2010 |
20100202298 | NETWORK COORDINATE SYSTEMS USING IP INFORMATION - Systems and methods that improve predictions of network latency in network coordinate systems (NCS) based on combining Internet topology information therewith. Topology information can be incorporated into the NCS by system/methodologies represented by geographic bootstrapping; autonomous system (AS) correction; history prioritization; symmetric updates or a combination thereof. Such can improve latency estimation between nodes when using a virtual coordinate system based on latency measurements between nodes. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202299 | MULTI-TIERED SCALABLE NETWORK MONITORING - A network analysis architecture provides a suite of complementary logic operable at different temporal and spatial timescales. The distinct temporal and spatial scales define different tiers, each analyzing network events according to predetermined temporal and spatial scales of progressive magnitude. Particular event detection logic may be operable on an immediate temporal scale, while other logic identifies trends over a longer time period. Similarly, different spatial scales are appropriate to different algorithms, as in logic that examines only headers or length of packets, or inspects an entire payload or transferred file. Deployment of logic that is focused on different timing and scope of data allows timely action in the case of readily apparent deviations, and permits longer term analysis for identifying trends that emerge over time. By selecting a suite of complementary logic directed at different deviant behavior, the focus of a single logic scheme is not charged with producing absolute screening of all traffic. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202300 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SPACE-TIME DETERMINATIONS WITH REDUCED NETWORK TRAFFIC - Space-time solutions are determined by exchanging pings among nodes in a network. Each ping includes a current space-time state of the transmitting node, which includes the transmitting node's currently estimated location and corrected time (as a count stamp). A particular node in the network receives pings from the other nodes in the network and uses the data in the received pings to estimate its own current position and to correct its own free-running clock relative to a common system time. As a service to the network, the particular node then transmits its corrected time (as a count stamp) and estimated position to the other nodes. In some embodiments, the space-time solutions discussed herein are used as backup to other navigation systems, such as the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) system. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202301 | METHOD FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN A LONG GUARD INTERVAL AND A SHORT GUARD INTERVAL AND MODULE USING THE SAME - The module for switching between a long guard interval and a short guard interval comprises a signal processing unit, a measurement unit, a comparison unit and a switching unit. The module receives a first data symbol, and the data symbol has one of a long guard interval and a short guard interval. The signal processing unit is configured to generate a second data symbol in accordance with the first data symbol. The measurement unit is configured to measure a portion of the first and second data symbols in order to generate a first measurement value and a second measurement value. The comparison unit is configured to generate an output signal by comparing the first and second measurement values with a threshold value. The switching unit is configured to selectively switch guard intervals of subsequent data symbols in accordance with the output signal. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202302 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESERVING AND SIGNALING HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST IDENTIFIERS - A system and method are provided for determining a radio condition for a first user agent; and reserving a number of HARQ Process IDs based on the radio condition for the first user agent. A system and method are also provided for sending a number of reserved HARQ Process IDs over a control channel. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202303 | RANGING METHOD FOR MEASURING DISTANCE BETWEEN A CENTRAL NODE AND AN EQUIPMENT NODE IN A BEACON WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A ranging method is described for measuring distance between a central node and an equipment node in a beacon wireless personal area network. At the beginning stage, the central node calculates the parameters needed in the ranging operation and sends these parameters to the equipment nodes by beacon frames. Equipment nodes, in turn, send ranging frames at time slots assigned thereto according to the information received in the beacon frames. The central node calculates beacon frame flight time by recording the sending time and the arrival time of the ranging frame, and then calculates the distance between the central node and the equipment node. For nodes failing in the ranging procedure, the ranging parameters are changed according to failing reasons and the above procedure is repeated until a ranging result is received without failure. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202304 | SIGNAL QUALITY MEASUREMENT IN A TIME DIVISION DUPLEX SYSTEM - The invention discloses a method ( | 08-12-2010 |
20100202305 | FLEXIBLE SPECTRUM SHARING - Various example embodiments are disclosed. According to one example embodiment, a method may include receiving, by a first wireless node in a first wireless network, a request from a second wireless node in a second wireless network to borrow spectral resources from the first wireless network. The method may further include determining a cost of granting the request, the cost being based at least in part on a cost to a lending cell within the first wireless network from which the spectral resources will be borrowed and a cost to neighboring cells of the lending cell. The method may further include lending the spectral resources to the second wireless node based at least in part on the determined cost of granting the request. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202306 | Including in the Uplink Grant an Indication of Specific Amount of CQI to be Reported - The present invention relates to a method, user equipment and a base station adapted to handle channel state feedback reports in a more flexible way. More specifically, a channel state feedback procedure is provided which utilizes the resources available for transmission of channel state feedback more efficiently. This is achieved by including uplink grant availability into the channel state feedback reporting triggers used for determining when and how to send channel state feedback from a UE, i.e. a channel state feedback reporting request may be sent by a base station in an uplink grant to a UE comprising an indication of an expected amount of information to be returned. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202307 | METHOD OF MEASURING CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method includes receiving priority information on priority for different frequency or a Radio Access Technology (RAT), measuring a serving cell periodically, measuring different frequency or RAT with higher priority than the serving cell, and suspending the measurement of different frequency or RAT with the higher priority during a certain time period when a measurement result of the different frequency or RAT with higher priority is lower than a reference value. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202308 | SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS FOR COOPERATIVE BEAMFORMING - Certain aspects of the present disclosure support techniques for cooperative beamforming based on inter-cell coordination. Signaling design allows coordinated downlink transmissions with reduced inter-cell interference. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202309 | TRANSMISSION DEVICE, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR THE SAME - A transmission apparatus is provided, including a combination determination unit configured to determine combinations of data packets so that when a data packet in a first frame is missed in transmission, a recover packet (FEC packet) for recovering the missing data packet is generated based on data packets in the first frame and data packets in a second frame, and an error correction coding unit configured to generate a recover packet based on the determination made by the combination determination unit. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202310 | TRANSMISSION BAND DETERMINATION METHOD FOR BANDWIDTH AGGREGATION SYSTEM - A bandwidth aggregation system for providing wideband communication services by aggregating multiple bandwidths and a transmission band determination method for the bandwidth aggregation system are disclosed. T bandwidth determination method includes computing weights of the multiple bandwidths based on resource allocation distributions of the individual bandwidths, and selecting one of the multiple bandwidths for establishing a connection between a base station and a mobile station based on the weights of the multiple bandwidths. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202311 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CHANNEL STATE REPORTING - An approach is provided for optimizing the timing scheme for channel state reporting. A platform determines an offset value for each of a plurality of user equipment. The offset value relates to timing between a channel state measurement point and a corresponding point for reporting of the channel state measurement. The platform further initiates signaling of the offset values to the respective user equipment. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202312 | QUALITY OF SERVICE ROUTING ARCHITECTURE - A quality of service routing architecture is provided which includes a network router configured to route network data traffic. The architecture may further include a routing communication protocol for to sending router control information from the network router to other network routers, the routing communication protocol having a quality of service level attribute. There may be a routing communication protocol decoding module on the network router. The routing communication protocol decoding module may identify incoming routing control communications and determine the quality of service level attribute of the incoming routing control communications. The network router can also include a quality of service forwarding module for determining a next hop router value based on the quality of service level attribute and forwarding data according to the next hop value determination. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202313 | REMOTE UNIT FOR PROVIDING SPATIAL PROCESSING - Methods and apparatus implementing spatial processing in a remote unit. In general, in one aspect, a remote unit in accordance with the invention includes a spatial processing unit to process signals received by a plurality of antennas. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202314 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENSURING COMPATIBILITY ON A HIGH PERFORMANCE SERIAL BUS - A data communications system is disclosed having at least one Legacy cloud coupled to at least one Beta cloud. The system further having at least one BOSS node and at least one border node. A method for ensuring compatibility is disclosed comprising determining when the BOSS node is idle, determining whether the last packet transmitted by any border node was an Alpha format packet if the BOSS node is idle, and unlocking the Legacy cloud if the last packet transmitted by the border node was not an Alpha format packet. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202315 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT USING PERIODIC MEASUREMENTS OF INDICATORS - A beacon signal used in data communications, such as the IEEE 802.11, is provided with data extensions. The data extensions permit additional information to be provided by the beacon signal, thereby reducing the traffic overhead of the network. The data extensions further permit handoffs and handoffs based on offset values. Periodic beacon requests are made during connection between a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and an access point (AP) on a WLAN. A Measurement Request field corresponding to a beacon request contains a measurement duration value and channel number for which the request applies. The beacon request permits a scan mode which includes “Active Scan” mode, “Passive Scan” mode and “Beacon Table” mode. In Active Scan mode, the measuring station (STA) transmits a probe request with a broadcast SSID. In Passive Scan mode, the measuring STA passively receives on the specified channel and return a beacon report containing one information element for each STA from which it detects a beacon or probe response. In Beacon Table mode, the measuring STA returns a beacon report containing the current contents of its beacon table without performing additional measurements. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202316 | STEPS ONE AND THREE W-CDMA AND MULTI-MODE SEARCHING - Techniques for efficient searching in asynchronous systems, such as W-CDMA, as well as multi-mode searching, are disclosed. In one aspect, step one and step three search are performed in a single search engine. In another aspect, a search engine is configurable to search the offsets of a slot in step one search, producing sequential hypothesis energies, and peak detecting and sorting those energies. In yet another aspect, the peak detector and sorter are configurable to perform step one searching or step three/multimode searching. Various other aspects of the invention are also presented. These aspects have the benefit of circuit area and search-time efficiency which translate into reduced costs, increased standby time, increased acquisition speed, higher quality signal transmission, increased data throughput, decreased power, and improved overall system capacity. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202317 | POWER CONTROL PROTOCOL FOR HIGHLY VARIABLE DATA RATE REVERSE LINK OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A subscriber unit performs power control of a reverse link by sending heartbeat messages to a base station, permitting the base station to determine a reverse link quality report. Using a reverse link quality report message received from the base station, the subscriber unit calculates its reverse power level and maintains the reverse power level during the standby state. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202318 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING PHYSICAL HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST INDICATOR CHANNEL - A method for allocating a physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH) includes allocating a CDM group according to a cyclic prefix type in consideration of a ratio of the numbers of necessary CDM groups according to spreading factors, and allocating a PHICH to the allocated CDM group. The PHICH includes an ACK/NACK signal multiplexed by code division multiplexing (CDM). Therefore, resources for PHICH transmission are efficiently allocated and a transmission structure can be maintained irrespective of a spreading factor. | 08-12-2010 |
20100208597 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CHANNEL QUALITY REPORT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of reporting of channel quality in a wireless communication system is disclosed. A method of reporting of channel quality in a user equipment, which receives a point-to-multipoint service in a wireless communication system, comprises receiving configuration information for reporting of channel quality from a network, the configuration information corresponding to each of at least one uplink channel, receiving a request message requesting the channel quality from the network, and reporting the channel quality using configuration information corresponding to an uplink channel among the at least one uplink channel. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208598 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING CHANNELS IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Instead of scanning all the channels at once, the present method separates a channel scanning procedure into multiple channel scanning operations. The method reduces a data loss rate during the operation by returning to the operating channel an associated access point operates on in accordance with a return period for transceiving blocked packets. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208599 | ANTICIPATIVE RECURSIVELY-ADJUSTING CO-ALLOCATION MECHANISM - An anticipative recursively-adjusting co-allocation mechanism (ARAM) includes the steps of: measuring a transmission bandwidth of a candidate server by a bandwidth measurement module; referring to the transmission bandwidth to calculate a recursive parameter value, and calculating a desired allocating file size of present round according to the recursive parameter value and an unassigned file size; allocating the desired allocating file size to the candidate server according to the transmission bandwidth and a transmission completion percentage of the candidate server at a previous round; performing the transmission and calculating the transmission completion percentage of each candidate server; examining the transmission completion percentage of the candidate sever; and examining whether or not an allocation of files is completed if any candidate server has completed a transmission, and looping to the next round if the file allocation has not been completed so as to enhance the data transmission performance effectively. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208600 | Arrangement for a Radio Network and a Method for Granting Data Rates to Users in a Radio Network - The present invention relates to an arrangement ( | 08-19-2010 |
20100208601 | Applying a Variable Encoding/Decoding Scheme in a Communication Network - Various systems, devices and methods for providing variable encoder/decoder mechanisms are disclosed. As one example, a coder/decoder device including a plurality of coder/decoder mechanisms, a coder/decoder selection engine, and a computer readable medium is disclosed. The computer readable medium includes a network statistic. The coder/decoder selection engine is operable to select at least one of the plurality of coder/decoder mechanisms based at least in part on the network statistic. Further, the coder/decoder selection engine is operable to offer the at least one of the plurality of coder/decoder mechanisms. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208602 | Adaptive Modulation Scheme for Multipath Wireless Channels - A modulation method for data packets transmitted on a mobile communication channel, the method comprising a first linear modulation mode, to be used when the radio conditions are good, and a second constant envelop modulation mode, to be used when the radio conditions are poor. Since a constant envelope-modulated signal is degraded more when time dispersion occurs, the first linear modulation mode is also used when the time dispersion is severe. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208605 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING NETWORK TIME DELAY CHARACTERISTICS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and device for processing network time delay characteristics. The method includes: determining whether network time delay changes; if the network time delay reduces, determining whether at least one blank frame is included in received but not played media frames of a real-time media service; if at least one blank frame is included in the received but not played media frames, extracting the blank frame from the received but not played media frames, the blank frame is a media frame, information amount of which is smaller than a preset first threshold, or difference between the information amount of which and the information amount of a previous media frame is smaller than a preset second threshold; if the network time delay increases, inserting the blank frame in the received but not played media frames. According to the embodiments of the present invention, when the network time delay changes, time for playing the received media frames may be adjusted by changing number of blank frames in the received but not played media frames, so as to reduce or eliminate the effect on the real-time media service generated by the network time delay characteristics. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208606 | RECEIVER APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A receiver apparatus wherein the processing amount for CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) measurements in a communication system having a plurality of system bandwidths can be reduced. In this apparatus, a narrow band CQI measurement part ( | 08-19-2010 |
20100208607 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR QOS TRANSLATION DURING HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - This disclosure provides methods and systems for translating quality of service (QoS) parameters of a first radio access technology (RAT), e.g., Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX), to QoS parameters of a second RAT, e.g., code division multiple access (CDMA) high rate packet data (HRPD). The methods and systems facilitate a handover by a multi-mode mobile station or other wireless device from the first RAT to the second RAT and vice versa. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208608 | TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL FOR SOUNDING SIGNAL FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - In an example embodiment, an apparatus may include at least one processor and at least one memory including computer code. The at least one memory and the computer program code may be configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus to at least perform: receiving at a mobile station from a base station in a wireless network, a channel quality threshold and a power adjustment value; measuring a downlink channel quality associated with each of a plurality of resource blocks in a downlink direction from the base station; selecting one or more of the resource blocks that have a channel quality that is greater than or equal to the channel quality threshold; and performing the following for each of the selected one or more resource blocks: determining a transmission power for transmitting a sounding signal via the resource block based upon the measured downlink channel quality for the resource block and power adjustment value; and transmitting, via a wireless transceiver, the sounding signal in an uplink direction to the base station via the resource block using the determined transmission power for the resource block. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208609 | DYNAMIC MAPPING OF QUALITY OF SERVICE TRAFFIC - Providing for dynamic mapping of quality of service (QoS) for wireless communication services provided at least in part over broadband Internet is described herein. By way of example, a data packet can be received and analyzed at a broadband Internet link to obtain a QoS level for the data packet. The QoS level can be correlated with a QoS of reverse link traffic for the communication service. If an inconsistency exists, the QoS level can be updated to be consistent with the QoS of the reverse link traffic. In at least one aspect, updating the QoS level can be conditioned at least in part on a type of traffic or service employed for the communication service. In this manner, traffic transmitted over the broadband Internet link can be treated with an appropriate QoS even if marked incorrectly by an entity transmitting the data packet. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208611 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MODIFYING NETWORK TRAFFIC - The disclosed embodiments include a system and method for modifying network traffic. For example, in one embodiment, the method includes receiving a packet at an intermediate network node at a network layer. The method determines at the intermediate network node whether layer injection can be performed at the intermediate network node. If layer injection can be performed at the intermediate network node, the method identifies at least one application or protocol associated with the packet using deep packet inspection. The method determines a routing modification based on the identified application protocol. The method then performs the routing modification on the packet. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208612 | Method for Mitigating Adverse Processor Loading in a Personal Computer Implementation of a Wireless Local Area Network Adapter - A personal computer's (PC) microprocessor is used to provide both the physical layer (PHY) and media access control (MAC) processing functions required to implement a wireless local area network (WLAN) adapter. This technique uses the polling mechanism associated with the power save (PS) functionality of WLAN protocol to relieve networking stress on the host processing system. It does this while maintaining networking integrity and packet delivery. The WLAN protocol polling mechanism is used to briefly inhibit the transfer of packets from the WLAN access point (AP) during peak periods of network traffic and/or host processor loading. Because the modulation, demodulation, and MAC functions, typically implemented in dedicated hardware on existing adapters are implemented in software running on the host PC microprocessor, other host system processes and applications can interfere with these time critical functions. Conversely, latency introduced by WLAN specific processing tasks during peak periods of network traffic may cause unacceptable delays to the other processes and applications requiring microprocessor attention. In addition to its primary stated purpose of allowing WLAN mobile stations to save power, this technique will use power save polling as a method for controlling delivery of network packets when the host is heavily loaded or when peak interrupt latencies make reliable packet delivery difficult or impossible. | 08-19-2010 |
20100214933 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING VOCAL DATA FLOW IN A PACKET DATA FLOW - The invention concerns a method and an apparatus for detecting vocal data flow in a packet data flow characterised by at least two measurable variables (X5Y). A distribution function (P{x 1 C}, P{y I C}) is provided of the values of each variable (X5Y) in a vocal data flow, and the values (x,y) of each variable (X,Y) are measured in order to obtain a sequence of measured values (x | 08-26-2010 |
20100214934 | ROUTING METHOD INTENDED FOR INTERMITTENTLY CONNECTED NETWORKS - A routing method in a network with intermittent connectivity, characterized in that it includes, to determine the routing information, for an opportunistically defined routing, for a network comprising a number n of nodes, kmax being the maximum number of relays to be considered in the routing, and M | 08-26-2010 |
20100214935 | PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT - A controlling node for a cell in a cellular system, arranged to measure a performance indicator of the communication between the node and at least one user and to aggregate the measured performance indicator for at least one user over an amount of time. The performance indicator is measured as the amount of data bits successfully transferred as data blocks in uplink and/or downlink between the controlling node and the at least one user during said defined amount of time, divided by the number of smallest physical resources in the system in terms of time and frequency used during said defined amount of time. One or more predefined combinations of one or more data blocks and one or more said smallest physical resources in the system is/are excluded from the aggregated measurement. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214936 | CALCULATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A calculation processing apparatus, which executes network calculations by a hierarchical network configured by connecting a plurality of logical processing nodes that execute calculations for input data to generate calculation result data, calculates memory sizes of buffers required for the network calculations, based on the configuration of the network calculations, in association with a plurality of types of buffer assignment methods for assigning storage areas for intermediate buffers used to hold calculation result data in correspondence with the plurality of processing nodes which configure the network, and executes the network calculations using buffers assigned by the buffer assignment method, which is selected based on the calculated memory size, in the execution sequence according to that buffer assignment method. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214937 | Rank Indicator Offset for Periodic CQI Reporting with Periodicity of One - This invention prevents a periodically reported Rank Indicator from interfering with a similarly periodically reported wideband and subband channel quality indicator. Such interference is disadvantageous because it may eliminate wideband channel quality indicator reporting or eliminate each first bandwidth part of subband channel quality indicator reporting. Proper selection of the rank indicator reporting periodicity and offset relative to the wideband and subband channel quality indicator reporting periodicity prevents this interference. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214938 | FLEXIBLE DATA AND CONTROL MULTIPLEXING - Systems and methods are disclosed for control-data multiplexing as well as control-data decoupling. In one embodiment, a semi-static approach is disclosed, wherein the upper layer(s) are configured such that each user equipment uses either control-data multiplexing or control-data decoupling. Additionally or alternatively, a dynamic approach is disclosed, in which one bit is added to the DCI format which indicates whether the UE is using control-data multiplexing or control-data coupling. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214939 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING TIME VARYING RADIO FREQUENCY ISOLATION CHARACTERISTICS BETWEEN NETWORK CELLS - A networked computing system including multiple network base stations, user equipment, and a data communications network facilitating communications amongst all devices of the networked computing system. The radio frequency isolation between two network base stations is determined by taking measurements of a radio operating parameter associated with at least one interference source. A regional network device located near one of the two base stations is configured measures the radio operating parameter on a periodic basis and then transfers the measurements to a radio communications controller. The radio communications controller then allocates network communications resources to user equipment, and optionally designates radio operation levels for one or more network base stations, based on a comparison of the received measurements to known broadcast levels of the radio operating parameter. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214940 | Methods and Systems for Monitoring Changes Made to a Network that Alter the Services Provided to a Server - Methods of automatically monitoring changes made to the communications connections into a server are provided. Pursuant to these methods, an identification is made that a change was made to the communications connections into the server. A determination is then made if the identified change complies with a set of pre-determined rules. If it is determined that the change does not comply with at least one of the rules in the set of pre-determined rules, then an alert is automatically issued. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214941 | SSYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELF-OPTIMIZATION IN WIRELESS BASE STATIONS BY DETECTION OF INTERFERENCE AT THE EDGE OF A RECEIVED RADIO FREQUENCY BAND - Systems and methods are described for reducing an interference level associated with frequency drift in a wireless base station. The base station monitors an interference level in a frequency resource caused by a first frequency resource colliding with a second frequency resource. If the interference level is outside of an expected range, the base station adjusts a parameter of the base station such as a reference oscillator frequency to compensate for frequency drift. This method may be used in a femtocell wireless base station. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214942 | ADAPTIVE PERIODIC POWER-SAVE (PS) POLLING - In accordance with at least some embodiments, a system includes an access point and a station in communication with the access point. The station selectively implements adaptive periodic Power-Save (APPS)-Polling logic for communications between the station and the access point. The APPS-Polling logic is configured to determine a timer value for periodic PS-Polling by monitoring a periodicity of arrival packets for at least a threshold amount of time. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214943 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTONOMOUSLY DETERMINING NETWORK CAPACITY AND LOAD BALANCING AMONGST MULTIPLE NETWORK CELLS - A networked computing system including multiple network base stations, user equipment, a network resource controller (NRC), and a data communications network facilitating communications amongst all devices of the networked computing system. The NRC determines a current radio channel available capacity based on a user load associated with regional user equipment, and then forecasts a maximum radio channel capacity based on the current radio channel available capacity. The NRC may be a network base station and it may determine a number of additional user equipment it can support as a component of the forecast maximum radio channel capacity. The NRC/base station may be further configured to determine a handover threshold utilizing the forecast maximum radio channel capacity, and when the NRC base station's number of users exceeds the handover threshold, one or more user equipment may be handed over to a second network base station with better service capacity. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214944 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OVERLAYING A HIERARCHICAL NETWORK DESIGN ON A FULL MESH NETWORK - A system and method are disclosed for overlaying a hierarchical network on a full mesh network. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a network element of a full mesh network ( | 08-26-2010 |
20100214945 | Distributed Overlay Multi-Channel Media Access Control (MAC) for Wireless Ad Hoc Networks - Systems and methods for distributed overlay multi-channel MAC for wireless ad hoc networks are described. In one aspect, the systems and methods divide channel frequencies defined by a wireless network protocol into a single home channel and multiple guest channels that are orthogonal to the home channel. Each of the network nodes in the ad hoc network operates on the home channel for respective variable and overlapping amounts of time to maintain network connectivity with other respective network nodes. Additionally, each of the network nodes determines whether and when to switch from the home channel to a particular guest channel of the guest channels for a variable amount of time to increase data throughput over one or more corresponding communication links in the ad hoc network with other network node(s). | 08-26-2010 |
20100214946 | System and Method for Diagnosing a Cabling Infrastructure Using a PHY - A system and method for discovering a cable type using an automated, systematic process. A PHY can be designed to measure electrical characteristics (e.g., insertion loss, cross talk, length, etc.) of the cable to enable determination of the cable type. The determined cable type can be used in diagnosis of cabling infrastructure or in a dynamic configuration or operation process. | 08-26-2010 |
20100220603 | Multipath Searcher Results Sorting Method - A method and apparatus for identifying valid multipath energy peaks are described including locating an energy peak in a profile of energy peaks, categorizing the located energy peak based on a plurality of thresholds and processing energy peaks in at least one of the categories of located energy peaks. The method and apparatus further includes removing a direct current value component from each value in the profile of energy peaks, calculating a noise floor for a multipath searching window and determining a first threshold and a second threshold. The step and means for categorizing further includes determining if the located energy peak exceeds the first threshold, labeling the located energy peak as a false alarm, if the located energy peak does not exceed the first threshold, determining if the located energy peak exceeds the second threshold and labeling the located energy peak as confident, if the located energy peak exceeds the second threshold. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220604 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION SESSION FOR MULTIMEDIA - A method and arrangement for establishing a packet-switched multimedia session for a mobile terminal connected to a mobile access network. A first Radio Access Bearer RAB is obtained, and the multimedia session is started by communicating media over the first RAB. Simultaneously with the media communication, a quality of communicated media is monitored and evaluated. If the monitored quality is deemed unacceptable, a media-adapted second RAB is obtained, and the session is continued over the second RAB. Thereby, it is not necessary to delay the communication of media by waiting for the second RAB to be obtained. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220605 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION LAYER ROLE DECIDING METHOD - When setting a communication parameter, apparatuses decide on each other's roles for setting the communication parameter. When constructing a new network after the communication parameter is set, the roles of individual communication layers (e.g., a physical layer, IP layer, transport layer, and application layer) are decided on to correspond to the roles when the communication parameter is set. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220606 | MOBILE STATION, FIXED STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A UL-DPCCH processing unit sets up a transmission mode of a channel for transmit power control according to a transmission (or reception) status of a channel exclusively used for a packet, which is monitored by a transmission and reception channel monitoring unit, and the channel for transmit power control is multiplied by a channel coefficient corresponding to the transmission mode set up by the UL-DPCCH processing unit, and the channel for transmit power control multiplied by the channel coefficient and the channel exclusively used for packet are then multiplexed. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220607 | Broadband Wireless Communication Resource Assigning Method, Base Station Apparatus and Terminal Apparatus - A first problem is to reduce an enormous uplink throughput of a base station that feedback information needs so as to improve an uplink throughput of useful user data. A second problem is to carry out a frequency segment assignment to guarantee a number of communication times and a communication quality to every terminal apparatus so as to increase a downlink throughput. The second problem is solved together. As means to give the number of communication times per each terminal apparatus, means to estimate an expected value of the number of communication times per each terminal apparatus, and means to assign the terminal apparatus per each frequency segment are arranged in the base station apparatus. To increase the communication quality, necessary means in each terminal apparatus are: means to measure statistics values of a communication capacity with regard to all the frequency segments; means to feed back the statistics values to the base station apparatus; means to calculate the occurrence probability of a high communication capacity based on the communication capacity statistics values per each frequency segment of all the terminal apparatuses; and means to assign the terminal apparatus per each frequency segment. To fuse the means to give the number of communication times and the means to give the communication quality, the means to assign the terminal apparatus per each frequency segment that the base station apparatus has assigns a frequency segment that has a little number of competitors sharing a same segment, and has high average and dispersion of the communication capacity to each terminal apparatus. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220608 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in a multi-antenna radio communication system, in particular to methods and arrangements for improved multiple HARQ transmission in such systems. While HARQ transmission schemes, as known in the art, only can consider the fact whether or not a transmission attempt has been successful the present invention provides a HARQ retransmission scheme that considers the reception quality for already performed transmissions of a same data packet when selecting a resource allocation for necessary re-transmissions. Resource allocation for retransmissions is based on a pre-defined metric indicating a quality of the reception of the previous transmission attempts. Such a metric can be derived from a quality measure derived in the receiver unit, e.g. a CQI or CSI-based value, or an appropriate measure of the mutual information, e.g. the accumulated conditional mutual information (ACMI). | 09-02-2010 |
20100220609 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING CALL LATENCY IN MONITORED CALLS - A service management platform for processing packet switched communications is provided. The service management platform has a component for handling voice calls. The component for handling voice calls comprises a first input/output for sending and receiving data packets associated with a first leg of a call, a second input/output for sending and receiving data packets associated with a second leg of the call, a monitoring component for monitoring copies of the data packets for commands contained within a payload of the data packets, and a relay component for directly relaying the data packets between the first input/output and the second input/output and for generating and forwarding copies of the data packets to the monitoring component. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220610 | MAC SLOT ALIGNMENT AMONG MULTIPLE WIRELESS STATIONS - A device in a wireless network receives signals and determines media access control (MAC) slot boundaries of the received signals. The MAC slot boundaries are averaged in time, and a local slot boundary is modified in response thereto. The local MAC slot boundary is modified by less than ten percent of a short interframe space until the local MAC slot boundary is within one orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) cyclic prefix duration of the averaged MAC slot boundaries. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220611 | PACKET FRAGMENT REASSEMBLY - An apparatus for packet fragment reassembly includes a memory and a fragment processing block coupled to the memory. The memory caches information contained in the headers of a plurality of packet fragments, wherein the plurality of packet fragments are identified as belonging to a particular packet. The fragment processing block directly performs operations to each packet fragment according to the information cached in the memory and a predetermined standard, wherein the information cached in the memory is used to track whether all packet fragments associated with the particular packet have been received at the apparatus. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220612 | QUALITY MEASURING SYSTEM, QUALITY MEASURING APPARATUS, QUALITY MEASURING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An exemplary object of the present invention lies in a point of providing a technology capable of measuring a transmission quality of an Ethernet network in order to utilize Ethernet as carrier-grade communication. The present invention includes an error bit number measurer for measuring the number of error bits that have occurred for a frame of Ethernet, being a target of monitoring, within a monitoring period, a transmitted bit number measurer for measuring the number of total transmitted bits of Ethernet frames that a device facing it has transmitted within the foregoing monitoring period, and a bit error rate operator for obtaining a bit error rate of a transmission path by employing a measurement result by the foregoing error bit number measurer and the foregoing transmitted bit number measurer. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220613 | NETWORK NODE OPTIMIZATION WITH TRIGGERED EXPRESSIONS - Method for providing a service in a communication network ( | 09-02-2010 |
20100220614 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CHANNEL SOUNDING IN FREQUENCY DUPLEX SYSTEM - A method of performing channel sounding in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system in which an uplink frame and a downlink frame use different frequency bands includes dividing a transmission bandwidth with respect to the uplink frame into a plurality of sounding zones, allocating at least one of the plurality of sounding zones to a user equipment and receiving a sounding signal from the user equipment through the allocated sounding zone. Inter-cell interference can be mitigated and overhead due to transmission of the sounding signal can be reduced. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220615 | JITTER-BASED MEDIA LAYER ADAPTATION IN REAL-TIME COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - It is a basic idea to determine the characteristics of a jitter profile measured over a plurality of packets, and classify the jitter profile based on the determined characteristics as well as information representative of the particular access used for communication between the sender and the receiver. The classified jitter profile is then matched to an appropriate action for media layer adaptation so that a proper action for media layer adaptation can be initiated. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220616 | OPTIMIZING NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Embodiments of the invention provide methods and systems for optimizing network connections by a computing device. One or more network connections between a source and a destination may be monitored for one or more values of one or more connection parameters. Thereafter, one or more values of the connection parameters of the monitored network connections may be analyzed to select one or more combinations of the values. Further, the selected combinations of the values of the connection parameters may be stored. Subsequently, one or more monitored network connections may be established based on the stored values of the combinations. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220617 | Apparatus and method for detecting channel quality indicator information in wireless communication system - An apparatus and a method for a base station or a sector to efficiently detect Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) information transmitted from a terminal in a wireless communication system are provided. A method of a base station for detecting CQI information in a wireless communication system includes determining a part or all of a CQI interval as a correlation interval based at least partly upon a presence of an interference power less than a threshold in a corresponding interval of the CQI interval; and determining correlations between a signal received over the determined correlation interval and possible codewords. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220618 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL INFORMATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method for transmitting channel information and a mobile communication terminal are disclosed. The method for transmitting channel information includes requesting, by a mobile station (MS) through a random access channel (RACH), a base station (BS) to allocate a resource for transmitting channel information, if it is determined that transmission of a channel status of a downlink channel is necessary as a result of monitoring the channel status, and transmitting, from the MS through the RACH to the BS, the channel information which is updated according to the channel status if the resource allocation is completed. Therefore an existing control channel can be efficiently used, without adding a new control channel for channel quality identifier (CQI) transmission by a mobile station or modifying the configuration of a transmitting stage. Further, signal interference for the existing channels can be prevented when generating a scheduling request. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220619 | ABNORMAL TRAFFIC DETECTION APPARATUS, ABNORMAL TRAFFIC DETECTION METHOD AND ABNORMAL TRAFFIC DETECTION PROGRAM - An abnormal traffic detection apparatus for detecting an abnormal traffic toward a communication apparatus by using information on traffics passing through a switch, comprising destination IP address counting units (C | 09-02-2010 |
20100220620 | VRRP and Learning Bridge CPE - The present invention describes an access node for communication in a telecommunication network comprising: an input/output unit adapted for receiving a first information message, wherein the first information message comprises a logical address associated with a virtual network node, a processing unit for extracting the logical address of the virtual network node and for determining a hardware address associated with the logical address of the virtual network node, where the processing unit is further adapted for a determining a logical address of an end-user host communicating with the virtual network node, wherein the access node is configured to transmit a second information message comprising the logical and hardware address of the virtual network node to the logical address of the end-user host. Also, a network infrastructure where the access node is operating, is described. The access node also implements a method of the present invention by means of a computer program comprising instruction sets for implementing the method steps of the invention. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220621 | TECHNIQUES FOR SUPPORTING LOW DUTY CYCLE MODE OF BASE STATION - A Mobile Station (MS) apparatus and method, to search for a Base Station (BS) in a Low Duty Cycle (LDC) mode in a wireless communication system, and a network entity apparatus and method, assist or support the MS, are provided. The method for the MS to search for the BS in LDC mode in the wireless communication system includes obtaining LDC information of one or more BSs in LDC mode, determining the LDC patterns of the one or more BSs in LDC mode based on the LDC information, the LDC patterns comprising at least one of an Available Interval (AI), an UnAvailable Interval (UAI), a starting time of the AI, an ending time of the AI, a length of the AI, a starting time of the UAI, an ending time of the UAI, a length of the UAI, and a cycle of the LDC, searching for any of the one or more BSs in LDC mode during their respective AI, and if a BS is found, performing a follow-up operation based on the found BS. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220622 | ADAPTIVE NETWORK WITH AUTOMATIC SCALING - A method for automatic scaling the processing capacity and bandwidth capacity of a network includes providing a network comprising a plurality of traffic processing units and a plurality of network links. Next, providing monitoring means for monitoring processing capacity demand and bandwidth capacity demand of the network. Next, providing managing means for adding traffic processing units to the network, removing traffic processing units from the network, connecting links to the network and disconnecting links from the network. Next, monitoring processing capacity demand and bandwidth capacity demand of the network via the monitoring means and then dynamically adjusting processing capacity of the network by selectively adding or removing traffic processing units in the network via the managing means upon observation of processing capacity demand increase or processing capacity demand decrease, respectively. The method also includes dynamically adjusting bandwidth capacity of the network by selectively connecting or disconnecting links in the network via the managing means upon observation of bandwidth capacity demand increase or bandwidth capacity decrease, respectively. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING COVERAGE FOR UL TRANSMISSION OVER E-DCH IN IDLE MODE AND CELL_FACH STATE - A method and apparatus for transmitting an uplink (UL) transmission over an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) includes determining whether to activate transmission time interval (TTI) bundling based upon a condition. An indication of the use of TTI bundling based upon the determination is transmitted. The UL transmission is transmitted. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220624 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION - A method for transmitting information includes a NodeB receiving information reported by a User Equipment (UE) through an Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH) transmission channel, and determining the UE corresponding to the received information according to UE ID information carried in the received information. A system and NodeB for transmitting information are also provided. When random access data is transmitted between the UE and the NodeB, the NodeB can determine the UE from which the data is received, thus ensuring practicability of the transmission solution that uses High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) to implement random access. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220625 | Heuristic Determination of Network Interface Transmission Mode - A method for measuring and determining the duplex modes of a network interface. The method assumes the network interface to be operating in a half-duplex mode until the bandwidth utilization reaches a threshold. When the threshold is reached, the method checks the traffic collision in the interface. If there is no collision, then the duplex mode is determined to be full-duplex. If there is collision, then the duplex mode is determined to be half-duplex and an alarm is set off. In another embodiment, the interface type is determined through SNMP. If the interface is a WAN interface, then the interface is determined to be full-duplex. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220626 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING TRANSMISSION BACKLOG INFORMATION - Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission backlog information are described. Reporting control factors are utilized to expand reporting possibilities for a fixed bit size request report. At least one report control factor is determined as a function of channel quality information, power information, device capability information, and/or quality of service information. A transmission backlog report value is interpreted as a function of a reporting control factor. A wide range of quantization schemes for reporting transmission backlog information are facilitated corresponding to a small bit size report. A communications device can adaptively select a quantization request level closely matched to its current needs such as to provide an accurate representation of its current traffic channel resource needs. A communications device may request a number of frames in a request report and the same report may be indirectly requesting a number of communications segments needed to clear its transmission backlog. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220627 | Enhanced Encapsulation Mechanism using GRE Protocol - Wireless gateway nodes are enabled to support mobile node services, such as content based billing, when a data treatment server is present in the system. Using one of a defined Content Flow Label (CFL), an Application Program Interface (API), and a compression protocol header, content based billing is provided such as by exchanging content and byte count information with the data treatment server. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220628 | Method and apparatus for realizing a test - A method for realizing a test is provided. The method includes receiving a test signaling and a planning parameter of an internet protocol (IP) bearer network; initiating a test service on the IP bearer network according to the test signaling and the planning parameter of the IP bearer network; and obtaining a performance indicator of the IP bearer network according to the running situation of the test service. An apparatus for realizing a test is also provided. A test service is initiated on the IP bearer network according to the planning parameter of the IP bearer network; and a performance indicator of the IP bearer network is obtained according to a running situation of the test service. According to the performance indicator, it is determined whether the current IP bearer network satisfies the performance requirements of the communication network planning model. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220629 | Estimating Available Bandwidth And Enhancing Narrow Link Bandwidth Estimations In Telecommunications Networks Using Existing User Traffic - Without using additional probing packets, estimates of the narrow link bandwidth and available bandwidth of a network path are computed based on existing traffic. The network can be of different types such as a wireless battlefield network context or a wired or wireless commercial network environment. “Fast packets”, i.e. those packets which do not experience any queuing delay in the network, are identified. Fast packets are identified to resolve end-to-end packet delay into its constituent components (deterministic, transmission and queuing delays), estimate path utilization and eliminate the uncertainty (false alarms) that causes the prior art method to lose its effectiveness. An estimation algorithm computes end-to-end transmission delay and end-to-end deterministic delay of fast packets traveling along a path in a network. Examples of deterministic delay include satellite propagation delays and clock effects. Then, based on the results of the fast packet identifying algorithm, two logic branches are followed. A first branch calculates utilization and a second branch calculates narrow link bandwidth. The narrow link bandwidth is determined from the packet pair dispersion. The available bandwidth is obtained from the narrow link bandwidth and the utilization. Estimation of available bandwidth for an end-to-end network path allows traffic sources to judiciously regulate the volume of application traffic injected into the network. | 09-02-2010 |
20100226261 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO PREVENT SPAM OVER INTERNET TELEPHONY - A method and system of preventing SPAM over Internet telephony (SPIT) is provided, including the establishment of calling rate limits for VoIP Challenge for callers, and SPIT ratings included with call initiation manual input messages to warn the callee if the call is at high risk of being SPIT. The calling rate limits are adjustable based on the reputation of the caller and events which may occur that are indicative of SPIT. Furthermore, methods for parental control over call end-points are provided. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226262 | Adaptive Joint Source and Channel Coding Scheme for H.264 Video Multicasting Over Wireless Networks - A method and apparatus for estimating packet loss rate are described including calculating a real packet loss rate in a time slot at the end of the time slot, estimating average packet loss rate for a subsequent time slot, estimating variance of packet loss rate for the subsequent time slot and estimating the packet loss rate for the subsequent time slot. A method and apparatus and also described for dynamically allocating available bandwidth for video multicast including selecting an intra-frame rate, determining a packet loss rate threshold, receiving user topology information, receiving channel conditions for each user, determining an optimal operation point for encoding and transmitting video frames in a subsequent time slot, adapting dynamically quantization parameters and a forward error correction code rate, encoding the video frames using the quantization parameters and applying forward error correction code with the forward error correction code rate to data packets of the video frames to generate forward error correction packets. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226263 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING QUALITY OF MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE (MBMS) IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND TERMINAL THEREOF - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method of supporting quality of Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) while using minimum possible radio resource(s) of a cell. A method of providing a multimedia multicast broadcast service (MBMS) in a wireless communications system that may include: transmitting a feedback configuration parameter to at least one terminal that is subscribed in a MBMS service; transmitting a MBMS service data to the at least one terminal; and receiving feedback information from the at lest one terminal that uses the feedback configuration parameter for a transmission of the feedback information. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226264 | System and Method for Robust Cell Detection - A wireless communication receiver performs robust cell searching, excluding interference due to UL transmissions from other UE, by qualifying the output of a matched filter with a metric indicative of the momentary signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). The momentary SNR metric is derived over the same amount of samples as the length of the matched filter. By discarding filter outputs during low momentary SNR, synchronization interference from UL transmissions is avoided. The momentary SNR metric and filter outputs are efficiently calculated, with only a few states and operations, compared to a conventional tapped delay line filter implementation. A limited list of cell candidates is populated, with information on correlation, timing, cell identity within cell group, and SNR metric for the K strongest candidates with respect to the matched filter correlation values. This list is used for later cell search stages, where a secondary synchronization channel is decoded. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226265 | METHOD OF CONCURRENT MULTIPATH TRANSFER BASED ON RELATIONAL PATHS - A method of Concurrent Multipath Transfer which is based on the relational paths, characterized in that for a packet lost in a path, it allows other packets sent from the path and/or other paths to point out the lost packet through a gap report. According to the present invention, any lost packets and abnormal paths can be found as fast as possible, and can be retransmitted quickly. So this method can avoid the failure of all paths from handing in packets to upper layer only for the abnormity in one path, which limits the speed of whole association. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226266 | WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Disclosed are a method, system and protocol for processing a Transmission within a wireless network, the network including at least one device that transmits the Transmission and at least one device that receives the Transmission. The method provides for receiving the Transmission at the device that receives the Transmission; determining whether the device that receives the Transmission has previously received the Transmission; and actioning the received Transmission only if the device that receives the transmission has not previously received the Transmission. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226267 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING ACCESS DURING INTER-TECHNOLOGIES HANDOFF - A system and method for determining an initial mean open loop power level of a pilot channel of a reverse traffic channel for a mobile terminal. The initial open loop power level enables handoff of an active call from a first access network to a second access network. A handoff initialization request is from the first access network. A mean received power level of the forward link of the second access network is measured and transmitted to the second access network. An open loop power adjustment factor is received from the second access network. The initial mean open loop power level is set based on the open loop power adjustment factor. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226268 | SLOT BASED PERSISTENT ALLOCATION SCHEME - There is provided a method for allocating a mobile station to an available resource slot of a plurality of resource slots within a stream of data frames, the stream of data frames broadcasted to the mobile station by a base station. The method includes scanning resource slots to identify an available resource slot, the available resource slot available for assignment to a resource, wherein the resource slots are included in all of the data frames in the stream of data frames, the scanning further including retrieving a data structure of the available resource slot, the data structure having nodes, the nodes associated with different periodicities and different offsets of the periodicities. The method also includes assigning the mobile station to one of the nodes of the available resource slot with an associated periodicity and an associated offset of the periodicity. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226269 | 12METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUCING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN MULTICARRIER-BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS BASED ON TIERS - Systems and methods for decreasing the amount of information sent on a feedback channel are disclosed. A hierarchical tree structure may be used to reduce the amount of information sent on the feedback channel. Spectral binning may also be used in conjunction with the hierarchical tree structure. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226270 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226271 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226272 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226273 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226274 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERRUPTING A TRANSMISSION OF A MULTICAST SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for interrupting a transmission of a multicast signal includes a common channel selector ( | 09-09-2010 |
20100226275 | FLOW BASED FAIR SCHEDULING IN MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments describe flow based fair scheduling in a wireless multi-hop network. The scheduling can be rate controlled multi-hop scheduling or power controlled multi-hop scheduling. The scheduling chosen is intended to provide maxmin fairness over all flows within the wireless network. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226276 | FLOW BASED FAIR SCHEDULING IN MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments describe flow based fair scheduling in a wireless multi-hop network. The scheduling can be rate controlled multi-hop scheduling or power controlled multi-hop scheduling. The scheduling chosen is intended to provide maxmin fairness over all flows within the wireless network. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226277 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MONITORING THE RECEIPT OF MULTICAST TRAFFIC - A method and system for monitoring data packet traffic in a multicast network comprising determining a first packet count received at a receiver router, representing a quantity of data packets associated with a multicast group and source at a first time, determining a second packet count received at that receiver router representing a quantity of data packets associated with that multicast group and source, at a second time subsequent to the first time, comparing the second packet count to the first packet count, and indicating an alarm in response to the second packet count being less than a predetermined value greater than the first packet count. A status for multiple routers can be obtained, comprising a difference between the quantity of the first and second packet counts; and indicating a warning in response to at least one of the plurality of router status being less than the predetermined value. | 09-09-2010 |
20100232301 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CONTROL PROGRAM - A mobile communication terminal | 09-16-2010 |
20100232302 | CHANNEL QUALITY REPORTING METHOD, SCHEDULING METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL AND BASE STATION - A method of reporting channel quality indication according to the present invention is a method in which each terminal in a communication system monitors quality of a complete system frequency range. When a frequency band of better quality than a frequency band being currently used for data communication and a frequency group including the frequency band of better quality are not detected, each terminal reports channel quality indication of a frequency group formed by a plurality of frequency bands including the frequency band being currently used for data communication. On the other hand, when a frequency band of better quality than a frequency band being currently used for data communication and a frequency group including the frequency band of better quality are detected, each terminal reports channel quality indication of the frequency group that is formed by a plurality of frequency bands including the frequency band of better quality. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232303 | BASE STATION AND METHOD - A base station (eNodeB) performing a radio communication with a user equipment (UE) includes: a transmission format determining unit ( | 09-16-2010 |
20100232304 | Mode switching of a data communications link - A method and apparatus for determining a time-out period used for switching between a first operational mode and a second operational mode of a data communications link, comprising detecting a signal used to request switching from the first operational mode to the second operational mode; measuring the duration of the signal; and determining the time-out period in dependence on the measured duration of the signal. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232305 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING METHOD, COMMUNICATING APPARATUS, AND MANAGING APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS - When a plurality of managing apparatuses which manage communication parameters exists, there is a case where the wrong communication parameters are set into a communicating apparatus. When the communication parameters are set between the managing apparatus which manages the communication parameters and the communicating apparatus, if a plurality of managing apparatuses in a setting state of the communication parameters into the communicating apparatus is detected, the managing apparatus in the setting state is notified that the plurality of managing apparatuses in the setting state exists. Whether or not the setting of the communication parameters is continued is discriminated, thereby continuing or stopping the setting of the communication parameters. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232306 | METHODS FOR SUPPORTING IPv6 USING BRIDGE EXTENSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for supporting Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) in a wireless communication system. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, a wireless communication system consists of an access router, a bridge, and a base station. The access router allocates a common network prefix to all subscriber stations served by it. When receiving IP multicast data destined for all nodes on the same link, the access router forwards the data back to the bridge. The bridge transmits IP multicast data with reference to an identification cache table (ICT) which includes MAC addresses of each subscriber stations, identifiers for point-to-point connections between the bridge and base station, IPv | 09-16-2010 |
20100232307 | Apparatus and method for semi distributed resource allocation in a cognitive radio wireless communication system - An apparatus and operation method of a Base Station (BS) for allocating a radio resource in a Cognitive Radio (CR) wireless communication system includes, when a licensed system is activated, determining whether each of User Terminals (UTs) located in a cell satisfies Quality of Service (QoS). If all of the UTs satisfy the QoS, a binary message indicating ‘on’ is broadcasted to neighbor BSs. If at least one of the UTs does not satisfy the QoS, a binary message indicating ‘off’ is broadcasted to the neighbor BSs, and when the binary message indicating ‘off’ is received from at least one of the neighbor BSs, the binary message indicating ‘off’ is broadcasted to the UTs. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232308 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, TIMING CONTROL DETERMINING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An uplink timing control device and method which make no excessive resource request for timing update when performing an uplink timing control even to a mobile station which performs no uplink signal transmission are provided. A system is characterized by comprising a mobile station ranking section for performing the prioritization of each mobile station from high necessity for the timing update in consideration of the occurrence of an extra-CP timing shift and the DRX remaining activation time of a mobile station which DRX-operates besides the mobile station received signal information at the time of the TA transmission in the past and the elapsed time form the TA transmission in the past. The system performs the timing update by allowing a mobile station with high priority determined by the mobile station ranking section to transmit an uplink timing detection signal and to notify the TA. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232309 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DYNAMIC CALL BLOCKING IN WIMAX IDLE MODE - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure present methods and apparatuses that enable a mobile station (MS) to selectively reject downlink (DL) data during idle mode. The MS may determine whether to reject the pending DL data based on information about the data. This information may be provided by a base station (BS) that is part of the access service network (ASN) that is retaining the DL data. The information provided by the BS may, for instance, include service flow information related to the pending DL data. In certain embodiments, the information may include one or more internet protocol (IP) packets that are part of the pending DL data. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232310 | FRAME BASED, ON-DEMAND SPECTRUM CONTENTION METHODOLOGY - A frame-based, on-demand spectrum contention protocol provides a fine grain allocation of a shared spectrum resource in a cognitive radio network. Each frame of a plurality of synchronized superframes is allocated independently based on contention criteria. As demands for increased spectrum resources are realized, targeted protocol is followed resulting in targeted requests issued to base stations currently occupying certain data frames. A contention resolution process occurs at the base station currently occupying the targeted spectrum resource in which spectrum contention numbers generated by each base station vying for access to a shared spectrum are compared. The base station winning the contention is announced and after a predetermined period of time, the contention winner occupies the contended spectrum resource. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232311 | CONCURRENT TRANSMISSION OF ACK/NACK, CQI AND CQI FROM USER EQUIPMENT - A wireless communications method is provided. The method includes providing a multi-codeword transmission that includes ACK/NACK and discontinuous transmission (DTX) information. The method also includes ordering reference signal (RS) symbols in proximity to at least one other reference signal symbol to facilitate signaling of additional states and enabling spreading gain to be increased. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232312 | Hierarchical Data Collection Network Supporting Packetized Voice Communications Among Wireless Terminals And Telephones - A packet-based, hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. The network accommodates real time voice transmission both through dedicated, scheduled bandwidth and through a packet-based routing within the confines and constraints of a data network. Conversion and call processing circuitry is also disclosed which enables access devices and personal computers to adapt voice information between analog voice stream and digital voice packet formats as proves necessary. Routing pathways include wireless spanning tree networks, wide area networks, telephone switching networks, internet, etc., in a manner virtually transparent to the user. A voice session and associate call setup simulates that of conventional telephone switching network, providing well-understood functionality common to any mobile, remote or stationary terminal, phone, computer, etc. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232313 | DETECTION OF ENCRYPTED PACKET STREAMS USING FEEDBACK PROBING - Methods, systems, and devices are disclosed for detecting encrypted Internet Protocol packet streams. A probe stream having a known observable parameter is generated. The observable parameter exhibits a known characteristic of a known type of data encrypted within a stream of packets. The probe stream is communicated to a network element via a communications network. When the probe stream is received by the network element, the network element can compare the known observable parameter to an actual value. Any difference between the known observable parameter and the actual value can be used to correct for network-induced variation and other effects, thus ensuring accurate detection and identification of data types within encrypted streams of packets. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232314 | NON-INTRUSIVE MONITORING OF QUALITY LEVELS FOR VOICE COMMUNICATIONS OVER A PACKET-BASED NETWORK - Provided is a method and apparatus for objectively and non-intrusively measuring voice quality on live calls without disrupting the call session or the network. A communication system includes plural communities each including a switch that controls access to a packet-based data network for call sessions. Each of the communities is coupled to the data network by respective packet-based trunks. Quality of service (QoS) monitoring devices are coupled to the respective packet-based trunks to monitor quality levels of routes between any two given communities. Each QoS monitoring device receives packets containing streaming data (which may be actual packets or test packets). From the received packets, the QoS monitoring device can derive QoS parameters, particularly for audio and speech signals on live calls without disrupting the call session. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232315 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-16-2010 |
20100238813 | Q-in-Q Ethernet rings - A resilient virtual Ethernet ring has nodes interconnected by working and protection paths. Each node has a set of VLAN IDs (VIDs) for tagging traffic entering the ring by identifying the ingress node and whether the traffic is on the working or protection path. MAC addresses are learned in one direction around the ring. A port aliasing module records in a forwarding table a port direction opposite to a learned port direction. Each node can also cross-connect working and protection paths. If a span fails, the two nodes immediately on either side of the failure are cross-connected to fold the ring working-path traffic is cross-connected onto the protection path at the first of the two nodes and is then cross-connected back onto the working path at the second of the two nodes so that traffic always ingresses and egresses the ring from the working path. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238814 | Methods and Apparatus to Characterize and Predict Network Health Status - Methods and apparatus to characterize and predict network health status are presented. A particular method of characterizing and predicting a health status of a network node includes receiving a plurality of report values associated with the network node, where each report value is one of alert and normal, and where each report value is received at a corresponding time. The method includes calculating a current report weight associated with a current report value received at a current time. When a first previous report value was received at a first previous time before the current time, the current report weight is calculated based at least partially on the current report value and at least partially on a first previous report weight associated with the first previous value. The method includes storing the current report weight at a memory device. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238815 | Network Status Detection - A network status is determined based on channel data specifying at least one channel characteristic of a communications channel. Changes in various channel characteristics are indicative of changes in a status of a distributed network. Therefore, these channel characteristics can be monitored over time to identify changes to the status of the distributed network. Changes to channel characteristics can be identified based on normalized channel data that is normalized relative to reference channel data. Status scores are generated based on the normalized channel data. The status scores are, in turn, normalized for channels that are identified as valid channels. The normalized status scores are adjusted based on variations of the channel data and the network status is identified based on status score variations. Status data identifying the network status is generated based on the status of the network. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238816 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND RELAY NODE SELECTION METHOD OF TERMINAL DEVICE - A terminal device and a relay node selection method of the terminal device are described. The terminal device may sequentially compare a threshold value and an output signal to noise ratio (SNR) of a plurality of relay nodes based on a set test order, and select a relay node having an output SNR greater than the threshold value as a relay node to perform a cooperative communication. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238817 | Method for Frequency Planning of a Cellular Radio System with IRC - In a method and a device for frequency planning of a cellular radio system with IRC. a cost function is provided that takes the IRC capabilities of the cellular system into account. Using the method and the device the frequency optimization can be made to take into account systems employing multi carrier techniques whereby the planning complexity and time for operators is reduced. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238818 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION QUALITY INFORMATION GENERATING METHOD - A wireless communication mobile station apparatus wherein the accuracy of measuring the communication quality can be improved. In this apparatus, a desired signal power measuring part ( | 09-23-2010 |
20100238819 | RELAYING METHOD, TRANSMITTER, RECEIVER AND RELAY - A relaying method includes a request packet generation operation generates a request packet for requesting a connectivity check for all communication routes between said receiver and said transmitter, a request packet transmission operation transmits a generated request packet to a relay, a route information addition operation adds information representing the router itself to the received request packet as route information, a request packet forwarding operation forwards the request packet to which said route information has been added to each of all the communication routes between said receiver and said relay, a response packet generation operation has been transcribed, a response packet transmission operation in which said receiver transmits the generated response packet to said transmitter via said relay, a response packet forwarding operation forwards the received response packet to said transmitter, and a route information output operation outputs the route information included in the received response packet. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238820 | SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHOD, SYSTEM ANALYSIS APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING SYSTEM ANALYSIS PROGRAM - An apparatus for analyzing system identifies plural combinations of downlink packet and uplink packet immediately following the downlink packet under predetermined condition, the uplink packet having a predetermined threshold value or more difference time from the received time of the downlink packet to the received time of the uplink packet. And the apparatus calculates chunk processing time by using a difference between the received time of the identified uplink packet and the received time of the identified downlink packet, which are between the time when the packet of a specific processing request to the lower-level server is received and the time when the packet of the response corresponding to the specific processing request is received, and calculates the total sum of the chunk processing times. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238821 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC CELL SELECTION AND RESOURCE MAPPING FOR CoMP JOINT TRANSMISSION - A wireless communication system includes a number of base stations capable of communicating with a plurality of subscriber stations. The base station coordinates transmission of resource blocks with a transmission of resource blocks from a second base station. The resource blocks include at least one reference signal (RS) patterns. In addition, base station punctures a plurality of resource elements in the resource blocks that might overlap with one of the CRS patterns in another resource block transmitted by the second base station such that no data is transmitted in the plurality of punctured resource elements. The subscriber station receives the resource blocks from at least two base stations and can avoid reading data from the resource elements that might overlap. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238822 | IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An image processing device includes: a holder configured to hold a reference picture necessary for decoding of an access unit as a processing subject in decoding of a stream composed of access units including a header; an analyzer configured to analyze the stream to thereby detect the header for each of the access units; and a generator configured to, if a header indicating change of deletion order of pictures is detected as the header detected by the analyzer, delete a picture included in an access unit corresponding to the header in the deletion order indicated by the header and generate hold information indicating a reference picture to be held by the holder. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238823 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING INCONSISTENT CONTROL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for handling inconsistent control information in a wireless communication system are described. In an aspect, inconsistent control information is handled in different manners for the downlink and uplink. In one design, a user equipment (UE) receives a first grant with first control information for a first data transmission and also receives a second grant with second control information for a second data transmission. The UE determines that the second control information is inconsistent with the first control information, e.g., due to the two grants conveying different transport block sizes. The UE determines whether to retain or discard the second grant based on whether the two grants are for data transmissions on the downlink or uplink. In one design, the UE retains the second grant if the two grants are for data transmissions on the downlink and discards the second grant if the two grants are for data transmissions on the uplink. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238824 | FEEDBACK MECHANISMS FOR BEAMFORMING OPERATION - A method for generating feedback data is described. A downlink message is received from a base station. It is determined whether full channel reciprocity or partial channel reciprocity is enabled at a transmitter. A mode for feedback data generation is determined. Feedback data is generated using the determined mode. The feedback data includes beamforming information. The feedback data is transmitted to the base station. The feedback data may include a channel quality indicator (CQI) and a rank. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238825 | LOOP POWER CONTROLS FOR MULTI-CARRIER HIGH-SPEED UPLINK PACKET ACCESS - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes applying independent power controls to two or more carriers from a set of high speed packet access signals. The method includes monitoring power across the two or more carriers to determine power levels for the set of high speed packet access signals. The method also includes adjusting at least one of an open loop control, an inner loop control, or an outer loop control in view of the power levels for the set of packet access signals. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238826 | ASSOCIATION AND RESOURCE PARTITIONING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH RELAYS - Techniques for performing association and resource partitioning in a wireless network with relays are described. In an aspect, resource partitioning may be performed to allocate available resources to nodes and access/backhaul links of relays. In one design, a node computes local metrics for a plurality of possible actions related to resource partitioning. The node receives local metrics for the possible actions from at least one neighbor node and determines overall metrics for the possible actions based on the computed and received local metrics. The node determines resources allocated to a set of nodes and resources allocated to the access and backhaul links of at least one relay based on the overall metrics for the possible actions. In another aspect, association involving relays may be performed by taking into account the performance of the relays. In yet another aspect, association and resource partitioning may be performed jointly. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238827 | ASSOCIATION WITH LEAKAGE-BASED METRICS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for performing association with leakage-based metrics in a wireless network are described. Association may be performed to select a serving node (e.g., a base station or a relay) for a station (e.g., a UE or a relay). In one design, at least one metric may be determined for at least one candidate node for possible association by the station. A metric for each candidate node may be determined based on leakage of the candidate node. The leakage of the candidate node may include interference due to the candidate node at stations not served by the candidate node (excluding the station). The metric for each candidate node may include a signal-to-leakage ratio (SLR), a geometry-to-leakage ratio (GLR), or a throughput-to-leakage ratio (TLR). A serving node for the station may be selected from among the at least one candidate node based on the at least one metric. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238828 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATION OF ROUND TRIP TIMES WITHIN A TCP BASED DATA NETWORK - A system and method for estimation of round trip times (RTTs) within a TCP based data network is described. The system provides for a passive monitoring of the network round-trip latency by simply observing existing TCP connections in operation. In this way, it is possible to measure RTT out to a remote site without having to send any traffic to that site with the result that there is no impact on the network, and it is possible to estimate what production traffic is experiencing. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238829 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DUAL-CELL HIGH-SPEED UPLINK PACKET ACCESS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a plurality of uplink carriers are utilized in a cellular communications system. In an aspect of the disclosure, a wireless terminal configured for use in a cellular network transmits an uplink with a plurality of uplink carriers including an anchor carrier and a secondary carrier, and receives a downlink with a plurality of downlink carriers. Here, the wireless terminal provides feedback information, such as a channel quality indicator and an acknowledgment, corresponding to the plurality of downlink carriers, on an uplink channel on each of respective carriers in a subset of the plurality of uplink carriers. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238830 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A POWER HEADROOM REPORT OF A UE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus are provided for transmitting a Power Headroom Report (PHR) to base station by a User Equipment (UE), wherein the UE determines whether a received an uplink resource is a first uplink resource allocated for a new transmission after a Medium Access Control (MAC) reset, and starts a timer for reporting the PHR, if the allocated uplink resource is the first uplink resource allocated for the new transmission after the MAC reset. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238831 | RACH-RELATED SYSTEM RESOURCE OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A RACH-related system resource optimization method and apparatus is provided for a wireless communication system. Specifically, a method is provided in a user equipment for optimizing a system resource related to a random access channel in a wireless communication system. A downlink channel condition and a transmission capability for performing random access to a base station based on a stored message size parameter are measured. The measured downlink channel condition and the measured transmission capability are reported. When a new message size parameter determined based on the reported downlink channel condition and the reported transmission capability is received, the stored message size parameter is updated with the new message parameter. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238832 | UPLINK TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL - Control of uplink transmit power for a first mobile station operating with scheduled uplink data transmissions. A change in uplink scheduled status for the first mobile station is detected ( | 09-23-2010 |
20100238833 | OFDMA with adaptive subcarrier-cluster configuration and selective loading - A method and apparatus for allocating subcarriers in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system is described. In one embodiment, the method comprises allocating at least one diversity cluster of subcarriers to a first subscriber and allocating at least one coherence cluster to a second subscriber. | 09-23-2010 |
20100246417 | METHOD FOR SELECTING ATTACHMENT POINTS AND RELAY NODE USED IN THE METHOD - A technique is disclosed, according to which communication can be achieved with high efficiency by selecting access points to be connected based on the quality of end-to-end communication between a mobile node and a correspondent node when there are a plurality of access points. According to this technique, a mobile node | 09-30-2010 |
20100246418 | Device and method of collecting and distributing reporting service measurement data in a wireless communications system - A local radio network controller (RNC) includes one or more stage buffers, with each stage buffer including a database configured to receive and index service measurement data, and a plurality of service measurement data (SM) buffers configured to store the service measurement according to the index of the database, and to send at least one of the stored service measurement data to a next stage of processing at least one of during the receiving of the service measurement data by the stage buffer and before the stage buffer has completed receiving the service measurement data. A depth and number of the SM buffers and a buffer serving time are allocated such that the one or more stage buffers are scalable to support a service node of increasing size by supporting a diverse number of service measurement pegging and appearing virtually infinite in size to applications pegging the service measurement data. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246419 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COLLECTING LOCATIONING INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and system are provided for determining estimated location of a wireless communication device (WCD) operating in a network. The network includes a first AP that is currently associated with, a second AP and a third AP. The first AP transmits a first RSSI data request message to the WCD at a first time over a radio channel. The first RSSI data request message includes a BSSID of the first AP. The WCD then transmits a first response message to the first AP, and in response the first AP transmits a first measured RSSI value to a trilateration engine (TE). At a second time different that the first time, the second AP can switch to the radio channel and transmit a second RSSI data request message that includes the BSSID of first AP to the WCD over the radio channel. In response, the WCD transmits a second response message to the second AP, and in response the second AP transmits a second measured RSSI value to the TE. A third AP performs a similar message exchange. This method and system can be used to collect RSSI information from the WCD at the APs without disrupting the connection of the WCD and the first AP that it is currently associated with, without disrupting the connections between the other second and third APs and any other WCDs that are currently communicating with the second and third APs, without requiring the WCD to send probe requests to the APs, and without the need to synchronize the APs. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246420 | Enhanced Channel Detection - An apparatus for detecting the presence of a frequency channel is provided. The apparatus comprises an energy detection unit configured to measure receive energy over a first bandwidth and a second energy detection unit configured to measure receive energy over a second bandwidth. The apparatus further comprises a processor configured to compare the measured receive energy over the first bandwidth to a first energy threshold, to compare the measured receive energy over the second bandwidth to a second energy threshold, and to detect the presence of the frequency channel when the measured receive energies over the first and second bandwidths are above the first and second energy thresholds, respectively. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246421 | Automated Network Condition Identification - Performance data relating to each of multiple network devices distributed in a geographic region is analyzed. That data can include values for various parameters measured automatically by routine polling of subscriber devices and/or network elements serving those subscriber devices. Measured parameter values can then be stored in a database and made available, together with information about subscriber device locations, to one or more analysis servers that analyze different portions of the network. As part of that analysis, groups of devices experiencing performance problems are identified based on device location. Information about those groups is then communicated and can be made available for, e.g., monitoring by service personnel. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246422 | NETWORK DEVICE AND METHOD OF MEASURING UPSTREAM BANDWIDTH EMPLOYED THEREBY - A network device measures upstream bandwidth of a communication network. The communication network includes a server and a plurality of communication nodes. The network device transmits a sequence of Internet control message protocol (ICMP) request datagrams corresponding to a sequence of time to live (TTL) increased from a first value to a second value to the server via the communication nodes. The network device designates the communication node that transmits an overtime datagram first as the best communication node, transmits a plurality of ICMP detection datagrams to the best communication node, receives response datagrams and records receiving time thereof, and calculates the upstream bandwidth according to size of the plurality of ICMP detection datagrams and the recorded receiving time of the response datagrams. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246423 | FAST SELECTION OF COOPERATIVE NODES - The present invention relates to a method, apparatuses, a system, and a computer program product for selecting at least one cooperative node from multiple cooperative nodes ( | 09-30-2010 |
20100246424 | Network Device - A network device may be provided with a PHY layer process unit configured to execute a process of a PHY layer, a determination unit configured to determine that a link state is a link up state or a link down state by utilizing information given from the PHY layer process unit, and a first control unit configured to control an electrical power supply for the PHY layer process unit. The first control unit may be configured to stop a continuous electrical power supply for the PHY layer process unit if the determination unit determines that the link state is the link down state during a first period in which the continuous electrical power supply for the PHY layer process unit is being performed, perform a temporary electrical power supply for the PHY layer process unit during a second period after the continuous electrical power supply for the PHY layer process unit is stopped, and commence the continuous electrical power supply for the PHY layer process unit if the temporary electrical power supply for the PHY layer process unit is performed during the second period and the determination unit determines that the link state is the link up state. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246425 | PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS, INTERFACE UNIT AND METHOD THEREOF - A packet processing apparatus includes a plurality of communication connecting unit each connected with a communication partner apparatus using one of a work path and a protection path, connecting unit for connecting, using a data bus, the plurality of communication connecting unit with one another; determination unit for, when a packet sent from the communication partner apparatus is received by one of the communication connecting unit, determining whether the packet is a maintenance packet that is used for monitoring a connection state with the communication partner apparatus; and transmitting unit for, when it is determined that the packet is a maintenance packet by the determination unit, transmitting the maintenance packet to the plurality of communication connecting unit using the data bus via the connecting unit. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246426 | METHOD ALLOWING A MONITORING SYSTEM OF THE NETWORK OF AN OPERATOR TO CLASSIFY IP FLOWS - A method is provided for allowing a monitoring system to classify, by entity, IP “accounting” elements passing through routers of a network of a service provider, these entities being arranged in different sites connected to the network. The method includes:
| 09-30-2010 |
20100246427 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION IN LOW SNR SCENARIO - Techniques for supporting communication for wireless devices in a wireless network are described. The wireless network may support a first physical channel having a first minimum SNR for reliable reception. Some wireless devices may require operation at a lower SNR. In an aspect, low SNR operation may be supported by transmitting data on a second physical channel that can be reliably received at a second minimum SNR that is lower than the first minimum SNR. In another aspect, low SNR operation may be supported by transmitting data on both the first and second physical channels. In yet another aspect, low SNR operation may be supported by transmitting data in multiple instances of the first and/or second physical channel. In yet another aspect, low power operation may be supported by transmitting the second physical channel in a portion of the system bandwidth instead of across the entire system bandwidth. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246428 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Data Access According to Protocol Handling - A method for performing data access via software according to communication protocol handling includes: calculating a time slot period and an upper limit of a processing time for performing a predetermined data processing according to time slot information defined in a communication protocol, a critical period and a time slot number; defining a clock frequency of a processor according to the upper limit of the processing time; and performing data access according to the slot time by the processor operating at the clock frequency. Accordingly, design inflexibility arising from performing data access via hardware is addressed, and a non-real-time issue caused by performing data access via software is also prevented. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246429 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LINK ADAPTIVE MULTICAST/BROADCAST TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A method and apparatus for adaptively transmitting the same data, i.e., multicast/broadcast data, according to channel quality to a receiving group including one or more terminals that request the same service in a wireless network. A base station obtains feedback on channel quality indications (CQIs) from a plurality of terminals, selects a transmission technique that satisfies desired service quality based on the COIs, and transmits data to the terminals included in a receiving group by using the selected transmission technique. The CQIs to be transmitted from the terminals in the receiving group to the base station are transmitted through a previously allocated common CQI feedback channel. In the present invention, in order to reduce a CQI feedback channel capacity, the base station does not allocate a common CQI feedback channel with respect to each reception terminal and allocates radio resources according to CQI levels. As radio resources are allocated according to CQI levels, a CQI feedback channel capacity may not be increased even when the number of terminals in the receiving group is increased and adaptive transmission may be efficiently performed. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246430 | VOICE OPTIMIZATION IN A NETWORK HAVING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION DEVICES - An apparatus and a method of optimizing voice quality on a network having end-points that are voice over Internet Protocol (IP) devices. Default parameters of the end-points are initialized. Network performance parameters are measured and evaluated to determine whether they signify that connection to the network is below a desired level of operation. If so, the default parameters of the end-points are re-set based on the evaluation. The adjustment may entail re-negotiating the CODEC connection and re-setting parameters for packet size and resetting parameters for jitter buffer size. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246431 | LINK STATE DETECTION METHOD AND SYSTEM - A link state detection method is disclosed in an embodiment of the present invention. The method includes: obtaining link state information from the lowest level SE to the mid-level SE; notifying to the mid-level SE the link state information from the lowest level SE to the mid-level SE; obtaining accessibility information from the mid-level SE to the lowest level SE according to the link state information from the lowest level SE to the mid-level SE, and link state information from the mid-level SE to the first level SE; notifying the first level SE the link state information from the mid-level SE to the first level SE, and the accessibility information from the from the mid-level SE to the lowest level SE; obtaining the accessibility information from the first level SE to the lowest level SE according to the link state information and the accessibility information sent by the mid-level SE. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246432 | Method and System for Detecting QoS Anomaly - A method for detecting QoS anomaly is provided. The method includes obtaining a QoS index of data stream transmission of a parent peer, and detecting QoS anomaly of the parent peer according to the QoS index and a corresponding QoS index threshold. A method for detecting factors causing QoS anomaly is also provided. The method includes detecting whether QoS of an associated peer is abnormal or not, counting a QoS anomaly proportion of the associated peer statistically, and determining factors causing QoS anomaly according to the anomaly proportion of the associated peer. Correspondingly, a system for detecting QoS anomaly and a system for detecting factors causing QoS anomaly are also provided. Thus, the QoS anomaly information is detected, and the factors causing the QoS anomaly are also detected, so as to ensure that the QoS anomaly information is precisely detected in a P2P system, and the QoS in the system is indeed guaranteed. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246433 | SCANNING NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Scanning neighboring base stations in a wireless access system is provided. In one embodiment, a method of scanning neighboring base stations for assessing channel quality includes receiving from a serving base station information associated with at least one neighboring base station, and transmitting a scanning request message from a mobile subscriber station to the serving base station, wherein the scanning request message comprises a requested scan duration and a requested scan iteration, the requested scan iteration being associated with a requested number of iterations of the scanning of the at least one neighboring base station. The method also includes receiving a scanning response message from the serving base station, wherein the scanning response message comprises an allowed scan duration and an allowed scan iteration, the allowed scan iteration being associated with an allowed number of iterations of the scanning of the at least one neighboring base station. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254271 | POINT-TO- MULTIPOINT (P2MP) NETWORK RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Techniques for managing resources in a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) network are disclosed. In some examples, a root station is adapted to transmit and receive network packets and leaf stations are adapted to transmit and receive the network packets from the root station. An electrical control system can be adapted to adjust a control error toward a zero value and adjust an output toward a steady state. The electrical control system may include feedback to control the root station based, at least in part, on the output of the electrical control system. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254272 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR - A method of transmitting channel quality indicator (CQI) includes obtaining CQI of each, of the plurality of sub-bands, selecting a first sub-band having the best CQI of the plurality of sub- bands, transmitting the best CQI of the first sub-band at a first transmission cycle and transmitting a difference value between the best CQI of the first sub-band and a CQI of the first sub-band at a second transmission cycle. Signalling overhead due to CQI transmission can be reduced. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254273 | NETWORK DEVICE AND CONNECTION DETECTION METHOD THEREOF - A network device records a number of data packets transmitted between a partner network device and the network device in a detection cycle. According to the number of detection packets without corresponding response packets number at the end the detection cycle, and the number of unchanged of data packets when the number of the detection packets without corresponding response packets is not less than the preset value, the network device determines a connection status of the partner network device. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254274 | Method of Monitoring Cells in Wireless Communication Systems - A wireless communication network automatically tests itself for sleeping cells. This is done by designing the base stations to regularly act as a terminal, contact its neighboring base stations and as a mobile perform a set of typical traffic cases. From the outcome of the traffic cases the probing base station detects neighboring base stations that cannot carry traffic. The information about sleeping cells is subsequently communicated from the base station to the operation and maintenance system. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254275 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL RECONFIGURATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for Transmission Time Interval (TTI) reconfiguration in a mobile communication system are provided. The apparatus includes an ACK/NACK determiner, an ACK/NACK controller, and a TTI controller. The ACK/NACK determiner determines if a response signal to be transmitted is ACKnowledgment (ACK) or Non ACKnowledgment (NACK) depending on an error or non-error of data received from a User Equipment (UE). The ACK/NACK controller counts the ACK and NACK determined in the ACK/NACK determiner. The TTI controller indentifies if number of the latest ACKs counted in the ACK/NACK controller is continuously generated by preset number of times and, if it is continuously generated by the present number of times, reconfigures a new TTI. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254276 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD - A disclosed base station apparatus includes a measurement unit measuring received quality of a reference signal, a scheduling unit providing scheduling information indicating allocation of a radio resource in uplink, and a transmission unit transmitting a control signal including the scheduling information. Further when, after a first packet is transmitted using a first frequency band, a retransmission packet of the first packet is transmitted using a second frequency band other than the first frequency band, the control signal further includes information indicating a difference between received quality in the first frequency band and that in the second frequency band, and the retransmission packet is transmitted at a transmission power level determined by adding a transmission power level of the first packet to that corresponding to the difference. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254277 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - There is provided a method of determining latency in a remote network element of a telecommunications network. In one embodiment, the method comprises receiving a message at a network element, the message comprising a time stamp of the time at which it was sent from a source network element. On receiving the message, the network element obtains another time stamp, and so may determine the time for the message to be sent between the network elements. In further embodiments, a source network element may gain an implicit indication of the workload of the remote network element by sending a first message to the remote network element and determining a length of time before the remote network element sends a second message back to the source network element. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254278 | ASSESSMENT IN AN INFORMATION NETWORK - A method for assessing channel performance in a home communication network is provided. The home communication network is operable over a plurality of channels. The home communication network includes a network controller and a plurality of nodes. Each of the network controller and the plurality of nodes is in communication over a coax backbone. The method preferably includes selecting a channel for assessment and allocating a first probe operation for use with the plurality of nodes. The method may also include, in response to the allocating, sending a first probe operation report message from each of the plurality of nodes to the network controller. In response to receiving the first probe operation report messages, the method may further include using the network controller to select a node to be a channel assessment operation node. In addition, the method may include selecting at least a portion of the plurality of nodes to participate in a channel assessment operation signal exchange. The method may also include moving the selected nodes to a different channel to perform a channel assessment operation on the different channel and using the channel assessment operation node to allocate a second probe operation on each of the selected nodes. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254279 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING LOAD INDICATOR IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing load state information of a Base Station (BS) in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. The method includes determining a ratio of a whole allocated resource compared to a whole resource of the BS and a ratio of a resource allocated for a rate requiring security compared to the whole resource, generating at least one load indicator for indicating a first value expressing the ratio of the whole allocated resource and a second value expressing the ratio of the resource allocated for the rate requiring security, and transmitting the at least one load indicator. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254280 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for allocating a single timeslot to multiple communication devices in a wireless communication network are disclosed. The method includes establishing a first communication channel between a base transceiver station and first communication devices through a first timeslots of a frame. The method further includes establishing a second communication channel between the base transceiver station and second communication devices through second timeslots. The method also includes determining whether a third communication channel can be established between the base transceiver station and at least one of the second communication devices using at least one of the first timeslots based on a set of predefined parameters evaluated for each of the first timeslots. Moreover, the method includes establishing the third communication channel between the base transceiver station and the at least one of the second communication devices using at least one of the first timeslots. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254281 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for supporting Peer to Peer (P2P) communication in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. A P2P zone within a frame used for the P2P communication includes at least one channel, each channel includes a broadcasting zone and a contention zone, and a P2P-mode transmit Mobile Station (MS) transmits a reference signal through a broadcasting zone of a channel to which itself belongs. The method MS includes determining an interference sum for each channel within the P2P zone, comparing the determined interference sums with each other, selecting a channel having the least interference sum, and transmitting information regarding the selected channel to a Base Station (BS). | 10-07-2010 |
20100260054 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONDUCTING MEDIA QUALITY MEASUREMENTS AT A GATEWAY - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a residential gateway (RG) having a controller to measure media presentation quality in a multicast network inline at the RG and to use Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) header information from RTP packets to perform the media presentation quality measurements. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260055 | HIGH DATA RATE INTERFACE WITH IMPROVED LINK SYNCHRONIZATION - A data Interface for transferring digital data between a host and a client over a communication path using packet structures linked together to form a communication protocol for communicating a pre-selected set of digital control and presentation data. The signal protocol is used by link controllers configured to generate, transmit, and receive packets forming the communications protocol, and to form digital data into one or more types of data packets, with at least one residing in the host device and being coupled to the client through the communications path. The interface provides a cost-effective, low power, bi-directional, high-speed data transfer mechanism over a short-range “serial” type data link, which lends itself to implementation with miniature connectors and thin flexible cables which are especially useful in connecting display elements such as wearable micro-displays to portable computers and wireless communication devices. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260056 | Mobile Communication System, Common Channel Transmission Control Device, and Common Channel Transmission Control Method Used in the System and Device - A mobile communication system in which a number of common channels are added due to the offering of a new service includes: the assumption that a plurality of common channels can be arranged to transmit the same data, a monitor means that uses the reception path search results of either dedicated channels or random access channels of mobile stations to monitor the communication state of mobile stations within the cell and a control means that, when it is determined that distribution within the cell of mobile stations that receive the new service is unbalanced, effects control to divide and use the communication range permitted by a plurality of common channels. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260057 | METHOD FOR MAPPING CONTROL CHANNELS - A method for mapping control channels is disclosed. This mapping method includes calculating a control channel mapping start time of each cell according to the number of control channel groups allocated to each cell, and performing mapping of repetition of the control channel at intervals of a predetermined distance in order to acquire a diversity gain, wherein the mapping begins from the control channel mapping start time. In this case, control channels of several groups are transmitted in each cell. So, a resource allocation method during transmission of control channels (e.g., PHICH and PCFICH) is improved such that interference between neighboring cells can be reduced, resulting in the improvement of a control channel throughput. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260058 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device capable of improving power saving is provided. A communication device ( | 10-14-2010 |
20100260059 | MULTI-USER MIMO TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for providing control information in a Multi User-Multiple Input Multiple Output (MU-MIMO) wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a plurality of Resource Elements (REs) including Downlink Control Information (DCI), determining, using the DCI, a set of REs to which a plurality of Downlink Reference Signals (DRSs) may be mapped, determining remaining REs as REs to which data is mapped, and demodulating the data using a precoding vector of a DRS corresponding to the MS. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260060 | INTEGRATED CALIBRATION PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS LANS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide a protocol for calibration of an access point in a wireless network. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260061 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTE CONTROL OF LOCAL DEVICES OVER A WIDE AREA NETWORK - A system and method for remote monitoring via an external network of the operation of a plurality of devices located on a local area network. The system and method comprise a gateway device, such as a server or intelligent router, for coupling the external network with the local area network. The gateway device has a unique external network address and is configured for receiving a network data packet addressed by the external network address. The gateway is configured for extracting a device data packet from the network data packet and for sending the device data packet to an associated local network address on the local area network. The system and method also have a control server coupled to the gateway via the external network and configured for generating the network data packet to contain the device data packet associated with a selected device of the plurality of devices. The local network address is associated with the selected device. The system and method also have a controller device located on the local area network and coupled to the selected device. The controller receives the device data packet according to the local network address and is configured to operate the selected device according to the contents of the device data packet. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260062 | PROTOCOL DELAY MEASURING DEVICE AND PROTOCOL DELAY MEASURING METHOD - A protocol delay measuring device ( | 10-14-2010 |
20100265833 | NETWORK BANDWIDTH DETERMINATION - A method for determining a bandwidth of a network system. A first device in the network transmits a plurality of test data during a first interval of time. A second device in the network receives an amount of the transmitted test data, wherein the amount of the test data received by the second device is less than a total amount of the test data transmitted by the first device during the first interval of time. The bandwidth of the network is then determined based on the amount of the test data that is received by the second device. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265834 | VARIABLE LATENCY JITTER BUFFER BASED UPON CONVERSATIONAL DYNAMICS - Methods, devices, and systems for balancing latency and voice quality during a communication session are provided. More specifically, mechanisms for monitoring parameters indicative of conversational dynamics and adjusting jitter buffer size based thereon are described. This allows latency to increase if the conversation is not highly interactive and decrease if a more interactive conversation is desired. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265835 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR MEASURING NETWORK LATENCY FROM FLOW RECORDS - The disclosure presents a system, method, and computer readable medium for computing network latencies. Network devices using flow processors create network traffic summary information in the form of flow records. A harvester may gather, process, and analyze flow records to find matching flows. Using matching flows, a harvester computes the latency, either one-way or round-trip, between two devices on the network. This information may be exported or stored on other devices on the network. The teachings of the present disclosure enable wide network coverage through the use of existing network traffic summary records. Further, the present disclosure mitigates network slowdowns associated with monitoring equipment. The present disclosure also reduces or eliminates the need for clock synchronization between devices on the network. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265836 | Self-Correcting Adaptive Tracking System (SATS) - A system and method for self and group location and tracking based on ultra wide band ranging among members of the group is presented. The system comprises an anchored station, a plurality of nodes, each node having at least knowledge of where the node is facing and heading, knowledge of all pair wise distances among all of the plurality of nodes, and ability to exchange information among the nodes and with the anchored station via relays. The system and method find a new position estimate of the group in accordance with an adaptive search process based on constraints of the ultra wide band ranging, and the search process enables extracting directional information and adaptively stabilizing orientation of the group. In one embodiment, adaptively stabilizing the orientation of the group is performed using an orientation-correcting polygon matching process. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265837 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND FEEDBACK METHOD - A terminal device is provided for solving the problem of large overhead expended in the PMI calculation process. A reception quality measurement unit ( | 10-21-2010 |
20100265838 | COMMUNICATION QUALITY ESTIMATION SYSTEM, EQUIPMENT, METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication quality estimation system has: a plurality of equipments performing packet transmission on a network; and a communication quality estimation equipment. The plurality of equipments includes: a first equipment; a second equipment; and a third equipment placed downstream of the first equipment and upstream of the second equipment. The communication quality estimation equipment estimates communication quality in the third equipment by comparing a number of first packets satisfying a first sampling rule out of packets transmitted by the first equipment and a number of second packets satisfying the first sampling rule out of packets transmitted by the second equipment. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265839 | Improved Radio Repeater Controllability - A radio repeater includes a first analyzer ( | 10-21-2010 |
20100265840 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING NOISE POWER ESTIMATE IN WCDMA NETWORK - Method and apparatus for improving a noise power estimate in a wideband CDMA (WCDMA) network are disclosed and may include calculating a total noise power estimate for a downlink channel based on a plurality of control channel bits from a plurality of different types of control channels. The plurality of control channel bits may include at least two of: dedicated physical channel (DPCH) transmit power control (TPC) bits, DPCH pilot bits, and common pilot channel (CPICH) bits. A first noise power estimate may be calculated for the downlink channel based on a plurality of the DPCH TPC bits. A value of at least one of the plurality of DPCH TPC bits may not be known when the at least one of the plurality of DPCH TPC bits is received. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265841 | System and Method for Precoding Codebook Adaptation with Low Feedback Overhead - A system and method for wireless communications with codebook adaptation with low feedback overhead are provided. A method for controller operations includes receiving a first channel information from a communications device, estimating channel statistics based on the first channel information, adapting a codebook using the channel statistics, and receiving a second channel information from the communications device. The method also includes constructing a precoding matrix from the second channel information and the adapted codebook, and transmitting information precoded by the precoding matrix to the communications device. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265842 | ENABLING SUPPORT FOR TRANSPARENT RELAYS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Providing for improved implementation of supplemental wireless nodes in a wireless base station deployment is described herein. By way of example, a donor base station is configured to send a schedule of data transmission to and from a set of UEs served by the base station, and further can provide the schedule and identifiers for the set of UEs to one or more wireless nodes serving the base station. Respective access channel measurements between respective UEs and respective wireless nodes can be forwarded to the base station, which in turn can identify optimal access channels for the set of UEs. Additionally, the donor base station can schedule multiple data transmissions on these access channels in a common transmission time slot, to achieve cell-splitting gains for the data transmissions. Range boosting, differential coding, and supplemental channel quality mechanisms are also provided for various wireless communication arrangements described herein. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265843 | Method, Apparatus and System for Forming Time Division Duplex Multi-Input Multi-Output Downlink Beams - In a method for forming TDD MIMO downlink beams, a BS receives an index of a codebook element from a mobile terminal. The codebook element refers to a codebook element whose correlation value has a greatest modulus value among correlation values that are calculated by the mobile terminal and are about correlation between the codebook element and a channel corresponding to a non-transmitting antenna of the mobile terminal. The BS calculates a channel vector corresponding to the non-transmitting antenna of the mobile terminal. The BS calculates channel vectors of the transmitting antennas of the mobile terminal, and performs SVD to determine a best transmitting precoding matrix. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265844 | Adjustment of Background Scanning Interval Based on Network Usage - In a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), roaming from one access point to another by a mobile station without interruption to network service may be facilitated by frequently performing background scans to find neighboring access points while the mobile station is associated to the WLAN. Frequent background scanning, however, depletes battery life. By dynamically adjusting the background scanning interval during the mobile station's association to the WLAN, the mobile station's immediate need for network connectivity performance may be met, while simultaneously prolonging battery life. For example, by using a shorter background scanning interval during a telephone conversation, network connectivity performance may be maintained throughout the call. Longer background scanning intervals may be used during periods when interruptions to network connectivity may be better tolerated. | 10-21-2010 |
20100271962 | AVAILABLE BACKHAUL BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION IN A FEMTO-CELL COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for estimating an available backhaul bandwidth in a femto-cell communication network includes a step ( | 10-28-2010 |
20100271963 | UPLINK RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN THE PRESENCE OF POWER LIMITED USERS - A base station in an OFDMA system which determines a modulation and coding scheme to use for a packet of a certain size to be transmitted by a Mobile Station. The base station schedules transmissions by mobile stations and transmits packets. The base station includes a processing unit which determines a number of time-frequency resources required to transmit the packet for a modulation and coding scheme, determines an SINR based on the number of time-frequency resources used and available power at the mobile station, determines a transmission rate as a ratio of the packet size transmitted to the number of time-frequency resources used, sets a rate to zero if the determined SINR is lower than a threshold SINR required for the modulation and coding scheme, and selects the modulation and coding scheme with a highest transmission rate. The base station includes a memory storing modulation and coding schemes. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271964 | FLOW REDIRECTION EMPLOYING STATE INFORMATION - In an example embodiment, there is disclosed an apparatus comprising a first interface configured to receive a packet from a client, a second interface configured to transmit the packet to a server, a third interface configured to communicate with at least one processing device, redirection module in communication with the first interface, the second interface and the third interface, and flow monitoring and state information module in communication with the first interface, the second interface, the third interface and the redirection module. Responsive to receipt of the packet on the first interface, the redirection module is operable to communicate with the flow monitoring and state information module whether state information exists for the packet, the state information comprising an address for a processing device. The redirection module is operable to route the packet to the processing device responsive to determining state information exists for the packet. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271965 | Methods and Apparatus in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to methods and apparatus in a RBS and a UE for reference signal (RS) measurements in an OFDM system, that enable having a configurable RS transmission bandwidth which is smaller than the system bandwidth. This allows for better interference coordination of RS, which in turn improves the UE RS measurements used for different services such as positioning. The RBS retrieves the RS transmission bandwidth, determines a RS measurement bandwidth based on this RS transmission bandwidth, and transmits the determined bandwidth to the UE. The UE receives the RS measurement bandwidth and measures the RS in a bandwidth determined based on the received measurement bandwidth and the UE capability. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271966 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RESOURCE MANAGEMENT DEVICE, WIRELESS BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - Disclosed is a technique of efficiently collecting communication quality information with excellent responsiveness in wireless resource management. According to the technique, a RRM | 10-28-2010 |
20100271967 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING DEMODULATING PERFORMANCE OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method and apparatus for measuring demodulating performance of a communication system. The method includes: commanding the mobile station to modulate test pattern data and transmit test pattern data to the central station; commanding the central station to comparing a demodulation result of the data transmitted from the mobile station with the test pattern data; and receiving the comparison result from the central station. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271968 | TECHNIQUES FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods for a User Equipment (UE) to transmit Channel Quality Index (CQI) feedback information, and an indicator in feedback information, to an evolved Node B (eNB) in a wireless communication system, and apparatuses therefore, are provided. A method for a UE to transmit CQI feedback information to eNB in a wireless communication system, includes obtaining one or more Transmission Points Configurations for Coordinated MultiPoint (CoMP) (TPCCs), each TPCC including a unique combination of one or more cells in a CoMP measurement set, estimating a channel for one or more cells in the CoMP measurement set, computing a CQI for each of at least one of the one or more TPCCs, each CQI being computed using one or more estimated channels that correspond to the combination of one or more cells included in a corresponding TPCC, generating CQI feedback information based on the one or more CQIs, and transmitting the CQI feedback information. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271969 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication method for a radio communication system employing an enhanced uplink scheme includes the steps of determining a transmission power control bit for controlling transmission power of a downlink control channel; generating an uplink control signal including the transmission power control bit; and transmitting the uplink control signal to a base station. In the determining step, whether an indicator channel indicating acknowledgement or negative acknowledgement for an uplink data channel is receivable at a quality level better than a predetermined value is evaluated, and the transmission power control bit of the indicator channel is determined based on the evaluation result. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271970 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION FOR CARRIER AGGREGATED SPECTRUMS - Methods and apparatus for transmitting uplink control information (UCI) in carrier aggregated spectrums are disclosed. UCI may include, but is not limited to, Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), Rank Indication (RI), Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), Acknowledge/Not Acknowledge (ACK/NACK) and Scheduling Request (SR). For symmetric carrier aggregation, uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) component carriers may be paired and use physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) in each UL component carrier to send UCI for the corresponding DL component carrier. For asymmetric carrier aggregation, methods are provided for UCI transmission and resource allocation depending on component carrier configuration or assignment. Methods are provided for multiple and single component carrier configurations that may further provide backward compatibility. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271971 | Method of Reporting Channel Quality in EGPRS System - To report channel quality in RTTI configuration, channel quality parameters for at least one radio block intended for the MS is calculated over a filtering period. A filtering period is two times longer than the time needed to transmit the radio block. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271972 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication device of the present invention is a communication device which performs data communication via a power line ( | 10-28-2010 |
20100278053 | Method for Organizing Packets Belonging to Streams, and Associated Equipment - The inventive method consists in determining a flow (F) to which belongs each new incoming packet (P), when said flow (F) is on a list of active flows, in introducing said packet into a fair share scheduling mechanism ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100278054 | Method and apparatus for the classification of ports on a data communication network node - A method and apparatus for classifying a port on a node in a data communications network, such as a router. The node, itself or in some embodiments though another network device, determines whether the port in question is currently receiving packets from a single address, for example a MAC address, only. If so, incoming packets of at least a first type are selected for inspection. The inspection criteria may vary with the type or types of packets selected, but in any case the results of the inspection are used to determine whether the single address corresponds with a client device. If so, selective security measures may be applied to the port. If security measures are applied to a port, the port is preferably monitored periodically to ensure that it remains a client port. The frequency of inspections or monitoring may vary depending on the port's classification history. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278055 | Apparatus and Method of Compensating for Clock Frequency and Phase Variations by Processing Packet Delay Values - An apparatus and method are described for compensating for frequency and phase variations of electronic components by processing packet delay values. In one embodiment, a packet delay determination module determines packet delay values based on time values associated with a first and a second electronic component. A packet delay selection module selects a subset of the packet delay values based on the maximum frequency drift of the first electronic component. A statistical parameter determination module evaluates a first and a second parameter based on portions of the subset of packet delay values A validation module validates the parameters when each portion the subset of packet delay values includes a minimum of at least two packet delay values. An adjustment module compensates for at least one of a frequency variation and a phase variation of the first electronic component based on the parameters if the parameters are both validated. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278056 | System and Method for Monitoring a Network Communication at Multiple Network Layers - A network monitor gets a (layer 7) media path bill of materials for a communication between two communication devices. The network monitor also gets a (layer 7) signaling path bill of materials. The media path bill of materials and the signaling path bill of materials comprise a plurality of items that are involved in the communication (e.g. hardware, software, links). The media path bill of materials and the signaling path bill of materials comprise a communication path bill of materials. The network monitor sends at least one configuration packet to a plurality of network analyzers to monitor packets that contain a status of the communication in relation one or more items in the communication path bill of materials. The status of the communication is output and displayed in relation to the items in the communication path bill of materials. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278057 | DETERMINING A METRIC REGION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network metric region in a wireless network is determined using a node metric region and a performance metric. The node metric region, which includes a boundary of the node metric region, for each node is estimated and the performance metric for the node metric region for each node is measured. The boundary of the node metric region for each node is adjusted based on the measured performance metric and then the wireless network metric region for the wireless network is determined based on the adjusted boundaries of the node metric region for each node. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278058 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING MULTICARRIER DIFFERENTIAL CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR (CQI) FEEDBACK - Methods, apparatuses, and computer program products are disclosed for facilitating multicarrier channel quality indicator (CQI) feedback. A wireless terminal communicates with a base station via a plurality of carriers and receives configuration data generated by the base station identifying a subset of carriers included in the plurality of carriers. The wireless terminal identifies a reference carrier and reports a reference CQI value corresponding to the reference carrier to the base station. The wireless terminal also reports a differential CQI value derived from the reference CQI value to the base station. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278059 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK SPACE TRANSMISSION OF TDD SYSTEM - A method for uplink transmission based on a time division duplex (TDD) system is provided. In the method, a terminal measures downlink channel state information, estimates the state information of the uplink spatial channel using the channel reciprocity of the TDD system, and selects an uplink spatial pre-coding matrix using the state information of the uplink spatial channel based on a certain criterion, the terminal executes spatial pre-coding using the selected pre-coding matrix, and transmits the data stream to a base station via terminal transmit antennae. A terminal, a base station and a system which are based on the method are also provided. The invention uses the reciprocity of the TDD system channel fully to achieve the maximal channel capacity, thereby optimizes the uplink spatial'transmission. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278060 | METHOD FOR MEASURING NODE LOCATION USING MAC LAYER OF WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a method for measuring a node location using a Media Access Control (MAC) layer of a Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN). The method, includes: requesting ranging measurement to the mobile node by broadcasting an MAC frame where ranging measurement start is displayed according to a ranging measurement request message for a mobile node transmitted from outside; and receiving ranging measurement information measured in the mobile node as a response to the broadcasted MAC frame and broadcasting an MAC frame where ranging measurement end is displayed. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278061 | CINR FORMULA FOR SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING - A method for calculating channel quality in a multi-stream communication system, by calculating channel quality for each selectable stream of the multi-stream communication system, based on estimation of at lest one set of error vectors. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278062 | MAC ARCHITECTURES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS USING MULTIPLE PHYSICAL LAYERS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for wireless communications using two different physical layers with a common medium access control layer. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278063 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING INTERFERENCE - A method for controlling interference between a plurality of neighboring base stations for a terminal by a serving base station of the terminal in a communication system is provided. The method includes receiving interference amount information on a first region of a downlink frame from the terminal, determining an interference amount estimate for the first region based on the received interference amount information, comparing the determined interference amount estimate with an interference amount tolerance for the first region; and transmitting an interference indicator requesting reduction in transmission power for the first region to the plurality of neighboring base stations when the interference amount estimate exceeds the interference amount tolerance. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278064 | RACH-SPECIFIC INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An RACH information transmission method and apparatus is provided for a wireless communication system. A preamble selected from a specific preamble group is transmitted. A random access response message having a Transmission Time Interval (TTI) bundling indicator is awaited in response to the preamble. A combined message generated by applying a TTI bundling based on the TTI bundling indicator with a number of TTIs is transmitted, when the random access response message is received. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278065 | Traffic Load Estimation for Access Point Functionality Enabled Mobile Devices - Embodiments of the invention comprise a system and method for estimating a traffic load on a wireless network. An access point notifies a station that the access point will not receive transmissions during a first quiet period. After the first quiet period, the access point monitors the wireless network during a first monitoring period. If no transmissions are received during the first monitoring period, the access point notifies the station that it will not receive transmissions during a second quiet period. The second quiet period has an equal or longer duration than the first quiet period. The access point alternates between monitoring periods and quiet periods and progressively expands the duration of the quiet periods as long as no transmissions are received during the monitoring periods. If a station notifies the access point that packets are pending at the device, the monitoring period is extended to handle these packets immediately. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278066 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO COMBINE NEIGHBOR CELL INFORMATION OBTAINED FROM MULTIPLE SIGNALING SOURCES - Methods and apparatus to combine neighbor cell information obtained from multiple signaling sources are disclosed. An example method disclosed herein comprises receiving first neighbor cell information via broadcast signaling, receiving second neighbor cell information via non-broadcast signaling, receiving an indicator indicating whether to (1) use the first and second neighbor cell information, or (2) use the second neighbor cell information but not the first neighbor cell information, and utilizing at least one of the first or second neighbor cell information in accordance with the indicator. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278067 | SELECTIVELY ADAPTABLE FAR-END ECHO CANCELLATION IN A PACKET VOICE SYSTEM - A packet voice transceiver adapted to reside at a first end of a communication network and to send an ingress communication signal comprising voice packets to, and receive an egress communication signal comprising voice packets from, a second packet voice transceiver residing at a second end of the communication network. The packet voice transceiver includes a far-end echo canceller that reduces echo that is present in the egress communication signal. The far-end communicates with other functional components of the transceiver system and cancels echo or refrains from canceling echo based on the activity of the other functional components. | 11-04-2010 |
20100284286 | PROCESSING DEVICE FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF MEASUREMENTS TAKEN BY RADIO TERMINALS - A processing device (D) acts on behalf of at least one radio terminal (UE) capable both of receiving data broadcast by a radio communication network in point-to-multipoint mode over a physical broadcast channel and according to an adaptable modulation and coding scheme, and of determining measurements representative of the radio conditions present in at least the cell in which it is located. This device (D) comprises processing means (PM) tasked with i) determining whether a measurement taken by at least one radio terminal (UE) corresponds to a status from among a set of predefined statuses, and ii) if so, to generate a message dedicated to the determined status and order the radio terminal (UE) to transmit this status message to the radio network within a portion of the time/frequency/code domain reserved within a signaling frame, for at least the cell in question. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284287 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING ROUTING METRICS BASED ON POWER CONSUMPTION - An approach is provided for optimizing power consumption and costs associated with routing information over a transport environment. A first collection interval corresponding to retrieval of a first data set specifying power consumption information and associated cost information for a plurality of routing nodes is determined. The first data set is compared with a second data set specifying power consumption information and associated cost information for a second collection interval. Routing metrics of the plurality of routing nodes are determined based on the comparison, wherein the routing metrics specify relative desirability of the plurality of routing nodes for establishing one or more communication paths formed by one or more of the plurality of routing nodes based on the routing metrics. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284288 | VOIP ANOMALY TRAFFIC DETECTION METHOD WITH FLOW-LEVEL DATA - The present invention relates to a method and system of detecting anomaly traffic for VoIP applications, in which a router captures an IP packet of a VoIP flow being transmitted, the captured IP packet is classified into an SIP message and a RTP traffic, header information is extracted from the classified SIP message and RTP traffic, the extracted header information is stored in a database, and whether SIP-based anomaly traffic or RTP-based anomaly traffic is generated is determined based on the extracted and stored information, and to a system therefor. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284289 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND BASE STATION FOR DETERMINING DATA TRANSMISSION OFFSETS - A method for determining a data transmission offset includes: synchronizing a first time division duplex TDD system with a second TDD system (a | 11-11-2010 |
20100284290 | CONTEXT BASED DATA MEDIATION - A communication environment includes of one or more subscriber terminals capable of receiving and transmitting data over a communication network via a communication management system. The communication management system receives mobile communication device context information and mobile communication device identification information from the mobile communication device. The communication management system then identifies data availability profiles reflective of a prior determination of mobile communication device availability to receive data communications according to context. The communication management system then implements data filtering rules corresponding to a current data availability profile. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284291 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT WITH DOWNLINK-ONLY WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include a media application that receives data from a media server via a link on a downlink (DL) -only radio access network. The link on the DL-only radio access network may be handed over to a second DL-only radio access network. A mobility management server, such as a Media Independent Handover (MIH) server, may communicate with the WTRU via a second radio access network that is a bidirectional radio access network to facilitate the handover. MIH messages may include fields that relate to DL-only radio access technologies may be used to facilitate handover of a DL-only link. Further, MIH broadcast or multicast messages may be used to facilitate the handover of a DL-only link. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284292 | PERSISTENT SCHEDULING METHOD AND APPARATUS BASED ON SEMI-GROUPING AND STATISTICALLY MULTIPLEXING - A persistent scheduling method and apparatus based on semi-grouping and statistically multiplexing, wherein a predetermined number of user equipments are grouped into a user equipment group to share allowable maximum transmission times of retransmission processes in different time slots each having a predetermined size, according to a predetermined set of criteria on communication conditions; and each user equipment within one user equipment group is allocated to use a corresponding time slot in a time division multiplexing mode. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284293 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK QUALITY ANALYSIS SYSTEM, QUALITY ANALYSIS DEVICE, QUALITY ANALYSIS METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a communication network quality analysis technique which can identify a network side communication device, a communication area, or a terminal which causes degradation of quality of the communication network detected by an abnormal communication quality index. The technique analyzes a recording content of a call process performed by the network side communication device and acquires a distribution of quality degradation amounts in respective hierarchies such as a terminal, a network communication device, or a communication area. Thus, the technique estimates a terminal, a network side communication device, or a communication area causing degradation of the communication quality according to a degree of quality degradation degree distribution bias considering the belonging relationship of the terminal, the network side communication device, and the communication area. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284294 | COMMUNICATION BY RETURN PATHWAY FROM A TERMINAL TO A TRANSMITTER FOR REDUCING IN PARTICULAR INTERFERENCE BETWEEN BEAMS FROM THE TRANSMITTER - The invention relates to a communication by return pathway from a terminal to a transmitter for reducing in particular interference between beams from the transmitter. A telecommunication system comprises a transmitter designed to render simultaneously active a first number of beams, as resources for a plurality of user terminals. Within the sense of the invention, each terminal calculates, while taking account of interference noise, at least one second preferred number of beams to be rendered simultaneously active by the transmitter, and sends to the transmitter, through the return pathway, an indication of this second preferred number, among information about the quality of reception. The transmitter can then adjust the first number of beams to be rendered active, as a function of the returns from the terminals, for a next burst. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284295 | VIDEO QUALITY ESTIMATION APPARATUS, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A packet loss frequency calculation unit ( | 11-11-2010 |
20100284296 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes: providing means for providing communication parameters to a receiving apparatus to be provided with communication parameters; determination means for determining whether there are a plurality of providing apparatuses that provide the communication parameters; and notifying means for, in case the determination means determines that there are the plurality of apparatuses, notifying the receiving apparatus that the providing means have already provided with the communication parameters of a notification that instructs the apparatus to halt the usage of the provided communication parameters. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284297 | SCANNING NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Scanning neighboring base stations in a wireless access system is provided. In one embodiment, a method of scanning neighboring base stations for assessing channel quality includes receiving from a serving base station information associated with at least one neighboring base station, and transmitting a scanning request message from a mobile subscriber station to the serving base station, wherein the scanning request message comprises a requested scan duration and a requested scan iteration, the requested scan iteration being associated with a requested number of iterations of the scanning of the at least one neighboring base station. The method also includes receiving a scanning response message from the serving base station, wherein the scanning response message comprises an allowed scan duration and an allowed scan iteration, the allowed scan iteration being associated with an allowed number of iterations of the scanning of the at least one neighboring base station. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284298 | Method and Apparatus for Transmitting Information by Using Cyclic Prefix Timeslots - A method for transmitting information by using Cyclic Prefix (CP) timeslots includes a transmitter transmitting CP information at a portion of CP timeslots when transmitting the timeslots or transmitting no CP information at CP timeslots when transmitting the CP timeslots. A method for using CP timeslots effectively and an apparatus for using CP timeslots are also disclosed. | 11-11-2010 |
20100290352 | Apparatus and methods for multi-radio coordination of heterogeneous wireless networks - Embodiments of systems and methods for multi-radio coordination of heterogeneous wireless networks are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290353 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CLASSIFYING NETWORK PACKET DATA - A network monitor provides improved understanding of the type of data being transmitted by packets by capturing rendezvous packets, such as domain name server queries and responses, to extract text domain names that may then be associated with later packets using a common numeric addresses. Text domain names intended for human understanding and recollection provide a unique insight into the content of the packets not readily obtained by analysis of the packet data itself. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290354 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING ETHERNET MODE OF OPERATION DURING PASSIVE MONITORING - A procedure for determining the mode of operation of an Ethernet network during passive monitoring of the network. A passive tap is introduced into a network and configured to operate according to a first Ethernet mode. The tap determines whether or not it is operating in the same mode as that being used by devices within the network segment being monitored. If so, the tap continues to operate in the current mode, otherwise, the tap switches modes and the process repeats until the tap is deemed to be operating in the correct mode. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290355 | Achieving Quality of Service in a Wireless Local Area Network - Examples of achieving quality of service in a wireless local area network via meeting communication channel performance criteria to include a minimum signal-to-noise plus interference ratio and a proportional fairness limit are disclosed. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290356 | WIMAX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communications system comprising at least one Base Station BS, one or more Satellites and Mobile Stations MS connected therebetween, and wherein the mobile station includes means to calculate Doppler frequency shifts. In a preferred embodiment, the mobile station includes means to measure clock mismatch frequency. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290357 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DETERMINING MAXIMUM SEGMENT SIZE OF DATA CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for determining a maximum segment size (MSS) in a mobile communication system. When the portable terminal accesses a multimedia service server through a data call, the method includes confirming whether or not a maximum segment size (MSS) of the server is stored; if the MSS is stored, the server is accessed using the MSS; and if the MSS is not stored, determining the MSS of the server through a ping procedure. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290358 | ARCHITECTURE USING INEXPENSIVE, MANAGED WIRELESS SWITCHING POINTS TO DELIVER LARGE SCALE WLAN - Methods, apparatus and a computer program product provide for a network architecture implemented between a Wireless Switching Point and a remote Wireless Controller. The Wireless Switching Point contains only a first data plane portion. At least one incoming data packet is received at a respective port of the Wireless Switching Point. Based on data included within the at least one incoming data packet, the Wireless Switching Point determines a first current network interface utilized by at least one port of the Wireless Switching Point. The Wireless Switching Point uploads the first current network interface to a remote Wireless Controller—which implements a first control plane capability on behalf of the Wireless Switching Point. After uploading the first current network interface, the Wireless Switching Point receives an update, provided by the remote Wireless Controller, to the first current network interface. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290359 | DETECTION AND LOCATION OF WIRELESS FIELD DEVICES - A method of evaluating a potential location to add a wireless field device to an existing network of a plurality of existing wireless field devices is provided. The method includes placing a handheld field maintenance tool in the potential location and causing the handheld field maintenance tool to identify wireless field devices within communicative range of the potential location. Information related to wireless communication at the potential location is viewed. Methods are also provided for identifying a selected field device in a process installation using a handheld field maintenance tool. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290360 | BLIND CARRIER FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATOR BASED ON SINGLE-OFDM-SYMBOL PN RANGING CODE IN MULTI-USER OFDMA UPLINK - A blind carrier frequency offset estimator is based on a single-OFDM-symbol training sequence in multi-user OFDMA uplink. Through multiple access interference modeling and analysis, a virtual user is employed that occupies the all null sub-carriers. By minimizing the energy leakage on the virtual user in term of tentative frequency offsets, the estimator can approach the real frequency offset. The estimator performs only on frequency-domain, simplifies interference calculations, and lowers the rank of the matrix. An iterative computation method is used to approach the real frequency offset. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290361 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXTRACTING QOS PARAMETERS IN MOBILE DEVICE - Provided are a method and an apparatus for extracting QoS parameters in a mobile device. In the method, all packets received from a terminal device are monitored, and SIP packets are filtered. When a real-time service application is executed on the terminal device, and an SIP request packet or an SIP response packet is filtered and input, QoS parameters are extracted from the SIP request packet or the SIP response packet. The extracted QoS parameters are incorporated into a wireless link data resource request and transmitted to a wireless network device. When a response to the wireless link data resource request is received, an uplink filter value for a new resource is extracted and added to a packet monitoring list. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290362 | MONITORING OF NETWORK CONNECTIONS - A management device ( | 11-18-2010 |
20100290363 | Variation of Up Link Resources in a Cellular System - The invention discloses a method ( | 11-18-2010 |
20100296401 | MULTI-DIMENSIONAL RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A communication system may include a plurality of entities comprising a hybrid network controller, one or more femtocells, one or more access points and/or one or more end-point devices. The hybrid network controller may determine and/or communicate configuration parameters corresponding to space, time, frequency and/or code domains that may enable communication of data between and/or among two or more of the entities. The configuration parameters may comprise frequency, time slot, codes and/or antenna pattern assignments. The network controller may control communication between a communication device external to the communication system and one or more of the entities within the communication system. Availability of frequencies, time slots, codes and/or antenna patterns may be monitored. The network controller may assign the femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices to handle the communication of the data. The hybrid network controller may communicate with the plurality of entities via wired, optical and/or wireless interfaces. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296402 | NETWORK REAL TIME MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM - A network real-time monitoring and control system includes several layers of components for generating a network traffic shaping control that is used to shaping network traffic flows for one or more network nodes. The layers of the network real-time monitoring and control system include a monitoring layer, an event control layer, a traffic shaping control layer, a reporting layer, and an administrative layer. The monitoring obtains network traffic indicator measurements and network node operational indicator measurements. The event control layer uses the indicator measurements to generate a network event identifier, and generates a request for a network traffic shaping control based on a correlation of the network event identifier with a network node status identifier. The request for the network traffic shaping control is communicated to the traffic shaping control layer to generate a network traffic shaping control. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296403 | Predictable Performance Optimization of Wireless Networks - Methods are described for optimizing wireless networks in a predictable way, i.e., the performance optimized is achievable in a real network. The methods consist of two main components: (i) a novel model that captures the relationship between network topology, wireless interference, traffic demand, and MAC-induced dependencies to accurately predict the throughput of individual flows in the wireless network, and (ii) a model-driven optimization that uses this model to optimize the network for a given performance objective. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296404 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND APPARATUS - The invention relates to a method of accessing a channel in a wireless network having a plurality of communication nodes, the method comprising identifying a first channel available for use, forming a cognitive network to manage utilisation of said first channel, said cognitive network comprising a leader node and at least one of said plurality of said communication nodes, managing said cognitive network by means of said leader node including identifying a second channel available for use in an event that said first channel being no longer available for use, and switching to said second channel upon said second channel being identified. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296405 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT ON UPLINK CHANNELS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems, methods, apparatus and computer program products for facilitating interference management on an uplink in a wireless communication system are provided. In one embodiment, a method can include: determining channel gain information measured on a downlink, wherein the determining is performed by a base station; determining interference from one or more interfering user equipment based on the channel gain information for the uplink; and calculating a nominal interference based on the interference from the one or more interfering user equipment. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296406 | TIMING RECOVERY OVER PACKET NETWORKS - In a method of recovering timing information over packet networks, raw network delays are measured using timing packets sent between a transmitter and receiver. The expected delay is predicted using a minimum statistics adaptive filter to track local minima of measured time delays over a smoothing window. Only those incoming timing packets which meet a particular criterion relative to the expected delay within a smoothing window are selected, and a local clock is adjusted based on the measured timing delays from the selected timing packets. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296407 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMISSION MODE SELECTION IN A MULTI CHANNEL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques to select a suitable transmission mode for a data transmission in a multi channel communication system with multiple spatial channels having varying SNRs are presented in this disclosure. For certain embodiments, a closed-loop technique may be applied, in which back-off factors used to calculate an effective SNR value fed back to a transmitter are adjusted. An open-loop rate control scheme is also presented in which a transmitter may select a data rate and number of streams based on whether transmitted packets are received in error at a receiver. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296408 | System and method for monitoring communications in a network - Methods and systems are described for monitoring communications in a packet-switched network. More specifically, the system initiates a communication between a network endpoint associated with a call mediator and at least a second network endpoint; records, at the call mediator, information associated with the communication; and upon termination of the communication, communicates, from the call mediator to an enterprise gatekeeper, the information associated with the communication. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296409 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING NETWORK ACCESS PERFORMANCE OF A WIRELESS DEVICE - Apparatus, methods, processors and computer readable media for determining the wireless network access performance or capability of a wireless device. Embodiments include a wireless device having a computer platform with a processing engine operable to generate a plurality of network access performance data during processing activities on the wireless device. The wireless device further includes a network access performance module operable to collect selected ones of the plurality of network access data associated with a predetermined data processing capability of the wireless device, and based on a predetermined collection configuration. The embodiments may also include an apparatus operable to generate the predetermined collection configuration, and operable to receive the collected network access data and to generate a performance report characterizing the network access performance or capability of the wireless device. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296410 | CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENT TIME SLOTS FOR MOBILE TERMINALS IN A TDD SYSTEM - The technology applies to a cellular radio network where each cell area is associated with a radio base station in which mobile terminals communicate with at least one of the base stations over a radio interface. The mobile terminals perform mobility-related measurements on downlink signals received from a corresponding neighbor cell during time slots configured for downlink transmission measurement. A configuration node receives input information, and based on that received input information, determines measurement time slot configuration information. The node provides the measurement time slot configuration information to the base stations so that the base stations may signal the measurement time slot configuration information to mobile terminals. | 11-25-2010 |
20100302953 | Method of coverage evaluation and optimization using triangulation model - An un-triangulated hole counting method is described in the invention to evaluate the performance of sensing coverage or wireless communication coverage in a randomly and uniformly deployed sensor network or wireless network without knowing the network topology. This method calculates the expected number of un-triangulated holes, which is the un-triangulated area size in the target area divided by mean un-triangulated hole size, given node density and target area size of the network. The present invention thus provides an aid for controlling the degree of coverage in node deployment for randomly deployed sensor networks. It can also aid to choose a suitable common transmission range for all nodes in a wireless network to provide acceptable wireless radio coverage. A position inside a target area is said to be un-triangulated if it is not enclosed by any triangle formed by connectivity links between three mutually connected nodes. An un-triangulated hole is an area enclosed by a polygon formed by links between nodes where each position of the area is un-triangulated. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302954 | DISTRIBUTED INFORMATION STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL OF COMMUNICATION NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA - An apparatus and method for information storage and retrieval of communication network performance data includes a first step | 12-02-2010 |
20100302955 | PACKET RETRANSMISSION OPTIMIZATION IN WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure set forth methods for determining a probability of retransmitting a packet in a time slot for a source node in a wireless network. Some example methods include determining whether transmission of the packet in the time slot is successful, measuring a number of time slots accumulated since a most recent successful transmission of the packet by the source node, and determining a first value of the probability based on a second value associated with the number of time slots accumulated. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302956 | Enhanced Methods of Cellular Environment Detection When Interoperating with Timed Interfers - Techniques for performing analysis of a cellular telephone signaling environment in the presence of interferers. The techniques do the analysis by employing a receiver to listen to the cellular environment during holes in the interference. The holes have a timing which differs from that used by the cellular telephone signaling environment and will thus over time overlap with structures of interest in the cellular telephone environment. The holes may be smaller than the structure of interest. The signals which the receiver hears in the holes are analyzed and combined to reproduce the structure. The combination may involve statistical methods and weighted decoding. The analysis obtains information which permits surgical attacks on individual wireless devices which are in the traffic state. Example applications of the techniques are given for the GSM and CDMA cellular telephone standards. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302957 | CHANNEL STATE TRANSITION OPTIMIZATION - A system for optimizing communications on a radio network by altering transitions between different link states that includes several modules. The activity, environment, and load module monitor monitors the link layer based on spectral-load metrics and radio-link metrics. The state transition control module determines when user equipment transitions between different states based on the type of user equipment, user equipment battery life, whether the user equipment is connected to an alternating current outlet, a spectral cost, and a backhaul cost. The channel state influencer module uses any of direct messages, ping messages, and keep-alive messages to influence the link state. The policy and preference handler enables or disables transitions based on the bearer technology type, the type of user equipment, the user's subscription plan, and the load level on the network. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302958 | CONNECTION MANAGER FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Techniques for supporting communication for a wireless device are described. In an aspect, an embedded connection manager may reside within a radio subsystem and support communication for the wireless device. The connection manager may receive at least one connection request sent by at least one application, select at least one radio for use, and provide the selected radio(s) to the application(s). In another aspect, communication may be supported using multiple radios. M out of N available radios may be selected for use, and K applications may be mapped to the M selected radios, where M>1, N>1, and K≧1. In yet another aspect, communication may be supported using profiles, which may define the operation of the wireless device to obtain connectivity. In yet another aspect, communication may be supported with auxiliary services, which are services that assist the wireless device to obtain connectivity. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302959 | Coverage of Private Base Station - A controller of a private base station receives data on a travel time depending on a propagation delay between a private base station and a user terminal. The controller outputs a control signal to a controllable amplifier for decreasing a transmission power of the private base station if the measured travel time is longer than a predetermined reference time or quality of service is lower than reference quality. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302960 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The user equipment | 12-02-2010 |
20100302961 | METHOD FOR RESOLVING NETWORK CONTENTION - A method for resolving network contention in a wireless network having a plurality of communication devices is disclosed. In one aspect, the method includes determining a set of initial values of at least three parameters of a first device of the plurality, at least one of the at least three parameters being indicative of the transmit power of that first device. The method further includes determining, given the set of initial values, a gain measure obtainable by changing the set of initial values of the at least three parameters into a set of updated values, the gain measure taking into account the parameter indicative of the transmit power. The method further includes deciding according to the determined gain measure on using the set of updated values of the at least three parameters for the first device. Other inventive aspects relate to systems and software stored on computer readable media. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302962 | Wireless Terminal, Wireless Base Station, Wireless Communication Method, And Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication method for performing wireless communications between a wireless terminal and a wireless base station during a first time period or a second time period includes determining whether the first time period or the second time period is assigned to the wireless terminal, measuring a quality of a signal to be transmitted during the determined first or second time period, selecting either the first time period or the second time period according to the measured quality of the signal, and reporting selection data indicating the selected first or second time period or reporting measurement data indicating the measured quality of the signal to the wireless base station. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302963 | AUTOMATIC NETWORK RETRIEVAL AND DISPLAY DEVICE - An automatic network retrieval and display device including: a transmission/reception processing unit | 12-02-2010 |
20100302964 | Method and Apparatus for Reporting Carrier Status - A method for reporting carrier status in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system supports Carrier Aggregation (CA) such that the UE is able to perform transmission or reception through multiple component carriers. The method includes steps of configuring a plurality of component carriers, receiving a signaling utilized for activating or deactivating the plurality of component carriers, and using a medium access control control element (MAC CE) to indicate the signaling is successfully received after the signaling is successfully received. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302965 | METHOD AND APPARATUS THAT FACILITATES AUTOMATIC ASSISTANCE FOR POSITIONING OF ACCESS POINT BASE STATIONS - Aspects are disclosed for positioning an access point base station. In a particular aspect, a performance parameter of a communication between a user equipment and the access point base station is monitored. A position of the access point base station is then assessed based on the performance parameter, and an assessment of the location is subsequently communicated. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302966 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - An access point establishing a wireless LAN is constructed to have a monitor system ‘b’ for monitoring an available channel for communication, in addition to a communication system ‘a’. In the event of detection of radar/radio signals, the access point changes a communication channel used for wireless communication from a current active channel to the monitored channel. Each terminal belonging to the wireless LAN recognizes and follows this channel change by detection of a beacon broadcasted by the access point. In the case of non-detection of radar/radio signals for one minute at the monitored channel, the wireless communication is reestablished immediately at the monitored channel recognized as a CAC (channel availability check)-finished channel. This series of processing is also applicable to inter-access point communication, for example, communication in a WDS (wireless distribution system) mode. This arrangement desirably prevents the potential interruption of wireless communication in a 5 GHz frequency band for a significant period, in the event of detection of radar/radio signals, for example, a weather radar. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302967 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING NETWORK DELAY IN ETHERNET RING NETWORK - A node generates a delay measurement frame and transmits it to an adjacent node of an Ethernet ring network in order to measure a delay of the network. The node receives the delay measurement frame generated by the node from another adjacent node of the ring network, and measures a network delay by using the received delay measurement frame. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302968 | COMMUNICATION ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus are disclosed for communication access technology management. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may evaluate end-to-end connection performance by sending a connection ECHO message and receiving a connection ECHO response. The connection performance may be evaluated for a connection including multiple transmission paths, and for multiple connections. The WTRU may establish or modify a multihoming communication session with a mobility server using a plurality of connections. Each connection may be established using a different interface. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302969 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF INTERFERER SIGNAL DETECTION - A method for detecting an interferer signal in a duplex communication channel. The method comprises establishing a duplex communication channel for transmitting and receiving a signal having a plurality of frames each comprising an uplink (UL) and a downlink (DL) sub frames, allocating a plurality of silent slots in at least on of the UL and DL sub frames of at least some of the plurality of frames, intercepting at least one transmission signal during the plurality of silent slots, and detecting at least one interferer signal according to the at least one transmission signal. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302970 | Demand-Driven Prioritized Data Structure - A system and method for optimizing the efficiency of data sharing among a set of radio nodes in a radio environment is provided. The technique includes identifying a data unit and assigning it a class, identifying a connectivity type, computing a significance factor based on connectivity type and assigned class, mapping the significance factor to a priority factor, and scheduling output of the data unit based on the priority factor. A scheduler algorithm can be used for scheduling output. The class can be assigned based on which nodes of the set of radio nodes possess copies of the data unit at a given time. An arbitration process can be used to determine the priority factor. A significance factor weighting algorithm, based on how many nodes will be receiving the data and on how much a node needs the data, can be used to determine the significance factor. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302971 | GROUND-BASED BEAMFORMING FOR SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Methods, systems and apparatus for ground-based beamforming of a satellite communications payload ( | 12-02-2010 |
20100309793 | METHOD OF ESTIMATING SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO, METHOD OF ADJUSTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING METHOD USING THE SAME, AND TRANSCEIVER THEREOF - A method of estimating a signal-to-noise ratio by considering user mobility, a method of adjusting feedback information transmission, an adaptive modulation and coding method using the same, and a transceiver thereof are disclosed. The present invention includes measuring a first channel parameter and a second channel parameter using first and second symbols sequentially received, respectively, estimating a channel quality considering a time delay between measurements of the first and second channel parameters using the first and second channel parameters, and transmitting information for the estimated channel quality if a variation of the first and second channel parameters is equal to or greater than a prescribed threshold. Accordingly, the present invention reduces performance degradation and feedback overhead caused by a time delay in channel quality estimation. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309794 | DPI MATRIX ALLOCATOR - A deep packet inspection (DPI) allocator for managing bandwidth in a communication channel, the DPI allocator comprising: a DPI application for inspecting data packets propagating to a destination via the channel that enter the allocator; and at least one service application for processing data packets that enter the allocator. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309795 | DYNAMICALLY RIGHT-SIZING PREFIXES FOR NETWORK AND APPLICATION PERFORMANCE - In one embodiment, performance parameters may be determined for each of a plurality of network address prefixes in a computer network. Based on the respective performance parameters, the prefixes may be resized through at least one of consolidation of adjacent prefixes and splitting of prefixes, and traffic may then be routed in the computer network based on the resized prefixes. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309796 | REDUCED-COMPLEXITY EQUALIZATION WITH SPHERE DECODING - Techniques for spherical decision-feedback sequence estimation are disclosed. A received signal is equalized by forming a trellis comprising a plurality of stages, each stage corresponding to a symbol time and comprising a plurality of nodes, each having a node state. A most likely received symbol sequence is identified by evaluating cumulative state metrics for the nodes according to MLSE or DFSE criteria. The trellis is formed by selecting a set of fan-out branches for each node by identifying, of all possible state transition branches from the node to successor nodes in the succeeding stage, those state transition branches that have a spherical branch metric less than a pre-determined metric limit, and determining the cumulative state metric for each node as a function of the cumulative state metrics for predecessor nodes in the preceding stage and the spherical branch metrics for fan-out branches connecting the predecessor nodes to the node. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309797 | Signal Measurements Based on Sync Signals - Methods and apparatus for determining a load estimate in a receiver in an orthogonal frequency division multiplex (OFDM) communication system include detecting at least one OFDM symbol of at least one predetermined synchronization signal; determining a signal strength measure based on the detected at least one synchronization symbol; detecting at least one OFDM symbol nearby to the OFDM symbol of the at least one predetermined synchronization signal; determining a total signal power measure based on the detected at least one nearby OFDM symbol; and determining the load estimate based on the signal strength measure and the total signal power measure. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309798 | Discontinuous Transmission and Reception - There is provided a method of determining a discontinuous reception and/or transmission cycle length, the method comprising determining information relevant to the cycle length from a high layer in a protocol stack; providing the information to a lower layer in the protocol stack; and in the lower layer of the protocol stack, determining the cycle length from the information. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309799 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING NETWORK PERFORMANCES - A method for optimizing network performances, wherein the network includes one or more network nodes ( | 12-09-2010 |
20100309800 | Network Monitoring And Intellectual Property Protection Device, System, And Method - A method and device for detecting and halting specified peer-to-peer (“P2P”) and/or Internet Relay Chat (“IRC”) communication sessions based on a priori defined templates is described. Network packets are intercepted and inspected for patterns (defined by the templates) that identify them as definitely, likely or not being associated with one of the specified P2P and/or IRC protocols. Those packets identified as definitely belonging to one of the specified protocols are prevented from reaching their target destination. Those packets identified as only likely belonging to one of the specified protocols are permitted to continue toward their target destination after select information about the particular session/packet is recorded for later use. Those packets identified as not belonging to one of the specified protocols are permitted to continue to their target destination. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309801 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a solution for taking into account that the interference, which each of the transmission resource elements is affected by, may differ between the different transmission resource elements when determining an interference estimate by determining a mixed interference estimate, e.g. based on both reference symbols and data symbols. Furthermore, signalling from the network is also introduced which makes it possible to control what the mixed interference estimate should be based on. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309802 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication according to the present invention includes a step A of causing the mobile station to judge whether or not the mobile station is allowed to go into a standby mode in a cell corresponding to a predetermined pilot channel when the mobile station detects a predetermined operation made by a user and a step B of causing the mobile station to enter the standby in the cell when the mobile station judges that the mobile station is allowed to be in the standby mode in the cell. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309803 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND GAP ALLOTTING METHOD - The invention provides a wireless communication terminal device and a gap allotting method capable of completing a measuring process at high speed and reducing the number of retransmissions. Upon determining that the average number of retransmissions exceeds the parameter for the average number of retransmissions in gap length change judging unit ( | 12-09-2010 |
20100309804 | Quality Assessment of a Communication Connection in a Radio-Operated Multi-Hop Hazard Reporting System - A method determines a quality of a communication connection between a selected secondary station and a main station of a radio-operated multi-hop hazard reporting system. The method includes the determination of a value of a first parameter for the selected secondary station, the value of the first parameter is indicative of the connection security only between the selected secondary station and the main station. The method further includes a determination of a value of a second parameter for the selected secondary station, wherein the value of the second parameter is indicative of the connection security only between any directly adjacent secondary stations of the selected secondary stations and the main station, and a determination of the quality of the communication connection based only on the value of the first parameter and the value of the second parameter. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309805 | TESTING UPSTREAM CABLE CHANNELS - In order to measure the performance of a DOCSIS upstream channel as well as to locate impairments, a special test signal is transmitted in a time slot of the upstream channel by a test instrument positioned anywhere within the CATV plant. A second test instrument, located at the termination point of the upstream plant, then detects, recovers, and processes the test signal in order to complete the measurement. The typical methods used to detect and recover bursted signals within a DOCSIS upstream channel use precise timing information transmitted in a corresponding DOCSIS downstream channel. Unfortunately, the downstream channel and thus the precise timing information are not always available to the secondary test instrument. The present invention also describes an apparatus and method for detecting a bursted test signal without the use of the DOCSIS upstream channel timing. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309806 | Peer-To-Peer Control Network For A Wireless Radio Access Network - A spectrum manager and base station controller for a wireless radio access network allocates TV band white space to all TV band devices under its control using: an allocation policy; information pulled/pushed from a white space database, spectrum usage data supplied by a spectrum sensing engine, and information received from at least one other peer spectrum manager and base station controller for the wireless radio access network. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309807 | MAINTAINING THE INTEGRITY OF CONFIGURATION INFORMATION OF A NETWORK OF ACCESS POINTS FOR USE IN POSITIONING AN APPARATUS - A method comprising: collecting from each of multiple access points in a network of access points a set of measurements made at a respective access point for signals transmitted by other access points, wherein the network of access points is for use in positioning a device that communicates with the network of access points; processing the collected sets of measurements to classify changes in the network of access points; and performing an action that is conditional upon how a change is classified. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309808 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD - A base station apparatus is used in a mobile communication system in which at least a shared data channel is transmitted by an orthogonal modulation scheme using an I-channel and a Q-channel. The base station apparatus includes a providing unit providing Acknowledgement/Non-Acknowledgement information indicating whether retransmission of a signal received in uplink is required; a mapping unit mapping a number of multiplexed users of the Acknowledgement/Non-Acknowledgement information to the I-channel or the Q-channel based on a predetermined mapping table; and a reporting unit reporting the Acknowledgement/Non-Acknowledgement information to the respective users. The mapping table indicates that, when the number of the multiplexed users is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the Acknowledgement/Non-Acknowledgement information is associated with the I-channel or the Q-channel, and otherwise, the Acknowledgement/Non-Acknowledgement information is associated with the I-channel and the Q-channel. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309809 | System and Method for Monitoring a Data Packet - The embodiments described herein include a system and method for monitoring a packet adapted to traverse a network having a plurality of devices. The system and method enable an operator to efficiently determine the marking of a packet at each intermediate hop and the destination within a network by executing an algorithm through the use of an operating system. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309810 | Technique For Soft Bit Scaling - A technique for determining in a fading channel environment a scaling factor for soft bit quantization is proposed. In a method realisation, the technique includes repeatedly determining an SNR value for the fading channel, calculating a weighted average based on a plurality of the SNR values, wherein weighting is performed such that contributions of extremal SNR values are attenuated, and determining the scaling factor for soft bit quantization dependent on the weighted average. | 12-09-2010 |
20100315960 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING ADAPTIVE JITTER BUFFER MANAGEMENT BASED ON PACKET STATISTICS FOR MEDIA GATEWAY - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing adaptive jitter buffer management based on packet statistics for media gateway are disclosed. According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a system for providing adaptive jitter buffer management based on packet statistics for a media gateway. The system includes a media gateway for communicating data between entities in one or more telecommunication networks. The media gateway includes first and second network interfaces for interfacing with the one or more telecommunication networks, a packet monitor for monitoring and maintaining packet statistics for channels established between the first and second network interfaces, each channel including a jitter buffer for buffering packets received on the first or second network interface, and a jitter buffer adjustment module for dynamically adjusting jitter buffer size on a per-channel basis based on the packet statistics maintained for each channel. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315961 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING RECEPTION ACKNOWLEDGMENT SIGNAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are apparatus and method of transmitting and receiving a reception acknowledgment signal in a mobile communication system. The apparatus and method of receiving the reception acknowledgment signal includes respectively calculating a probability that the received reception acknowledgment signal is a reception success signal and a probability that the reception acknowledgment signal is a reception failure signal, by using an estimated packet error rate predicted based on a pre-set required packet error rate and determining whether the reception acknowledgment signal is the reception success signal or the reception failure signal. The apparatus and method of transmitting a reception acknowledgment signal includes determining transmission powers of a reception success signal and a reception failure signal in order to maximize a difference between a first complex signal and a second complex signal, the first complex signal being modulated for the reception success and the second complex signal being modulated for the reception failure, based on the average transmission power and a pre-set required packet error rate. The apparatus and method of transmitting reception acknowledgment signals transmits a single packet indicating reception successes or failures for a plurality of received data packets by using variable length coding based on a pre-set required packet error rate. According to the present invention, non-uniformity of frequency between the reception success signal and the reception failure signal is considered to increase correct reception rate of the reception acknowledgment signal. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315962 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND CLOSED LOOP CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a base station device capable of reducing a DL-CSI feedback amount in a TDD type radio communication system in which a DL bandwidth is different from a UL bandwidth. In this device, a demultiplexing unit ( | 12-16-2010 |
20100315963 | Measurement of Cell-Specific Reference Symbols in the Presence of MBMS Single Frequency Network Transmissions - A network unit of an own cell is operated in a radio communication system utilizing a radio interface that includes a radio frame made up of a number of sub-frames. The own cell serves one or more user equipments. Operation includes obtaining information about a scheduling of MBSFN data transmissions in one or more neighboring cells. The information thereby obtained is used to generate an information signal that, for a given sub-frame, enables the one or more user equipments to determine whether neighboring cell measurements can be performed using a unicast group of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple access (OFDM) symbols. The information signal is transmitted to the one or more user equipments, which can then use the information to determine how to locate cell-specific reference symbols when doing measurements of neighboring cells. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315964 | METHOD OF EXCHANGING MESSAGES AND TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DEVICES - A method of exchanging a round trip time between a transmitting device and a receiving device in a wireless network comprises receiving an echo request command from an audio video control (AVC) layer to a medium access control (MAC) layer, the echo request command including a first identifier for identifying the transmitting device, a second identifier for identifying the receiving device, and a third identifier; transferring a MAC message from the MAC layer to a physical layer, the MAC message including a message preamble, a message type, and the echo request command; transmitting a first physical layer data unit to the receiving device, the first physical layer data unit including at least one header, the MAC message, and audio/video (A/V) data; and receiving a second physical layer data unit from the receiving device, the second physical layer data unit including an echo report command in response to the echo request command, the echo report command including the third identifier. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315965 | Packet Based Data Transmission - In a method for transmitting data in a packet-based transmission system, a packet is assembled by including control information and payload data, wherein the control information includes a destination address; redundancy information is calculated using the packet; wherein the destination address is stripped from the packet and the redundancy information is added to the packet and a control bit in the packet is set indicating that no destination address is included in the packet. The thus altered packet is transmitted. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315966 | DYNAMICALLY MANAGING AND RECONFIGURING WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A wireless network with multiple subscriber systems in a lobe pool may operate by determining a state of the wireless network, identifying a new condition, the new condition including a new demand condition or a new network health condition, determining whether the new condition has a threshold impact on operations of the wireless network or component subscriber systems of the wireless network, and if the threshold impact exists, reconfiguring the wireless network to accommodate the new condition. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315967 | MULTI-FREQUENCY PILOT SIGNALS - An access point is identified based on pilot signal information that appears on different frequencies. Here, a combination of one or more pilot PN spreading codes or one or more PN offsets on different frequencies are used to uniquely identify an access point. For example, upon receipt of a pilot measurement report, a network entity may uniquely identify an access point that transmitted the pilot signals based on at least one pilot PN spreading code or at least one PN offset and a plurality of frequencies identified by the report. Also, to facilitate acquiring this information, a network entity may request an access terminal to conduct an inter-frequency search for pilot signals. Also, an access terminal may maintain pilot information corresponding to access points in a network and use this information to autonomously conduct inter-frequency searches for pilot signals. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315968 | CODING METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM BASED ON MEASURING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE OF USER - This invention provides a coding method, user equipment and system based on measuring Quality of Experience (QoE) of a user. The method includes: measuring, at destination user equipment, a QoE value; comparing the measured QoE value with a QoE threshold; adjusting at least one of a source coding rate and a channel coding mode according to a result of the comparison; and coding according to the adjusted source coding rate and/or channel coding mode; or further performing wireless resource allocation according to the adjusted coding scheme. Such method, user equipment and system of this invention adjust the coding technique according to the QoE, thus making the wireless resource used reasonably. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315969 | Methods and Arrangements in a Communication System - A method and arrangement in a first node ( | 12-16-2010 |
20100315970 | Inter-Cell Interference Mitigation Using Limited Feedback in Cellular Networks - An embodiment herein provides a method to mitigate effects of inter-cell interference in cellular communications, thereby maximizing SINR of a cellular device, due to a serving base station selecting a transmission strategy which places the signal strength (average and instantaneous) of the cellular device utilizing the base station in its in-phase region and inverse of interference signal strength (average and instantaneous) received by the cellular device from interfering base stations in their out-of phase region. | 12-16-2010 |
20100322086 | ENABLING BUFFER STATUS REPORTS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for enabling Buffer Status Reports in a Long Term Evolution communication system includes a step ( | 12-23-2010 |
20100322087 | ANALYSIS AND CONTROL OF TRAFFIC BASED ON IDENTIFIED PACKET CONTROL FUNCTIONS - A device receives packet control function (PCF) load information associated with a packet data serving node (PDSN), and determines PCF Internet protocol (IP) address information and a number of sessions per PCF based on the PCF load information. The device also receives IP information from an IP network associated with the PDSN, and determines PCF identity information based on the IP information. The device further generates control information based on the PCF IP address information, the number of sessions per PCF, and the PCF identity information, and provides the control information to the PDSN to control operation of the PDSN. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322088 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MONITOR DISTRIBUTION IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present invention is directed towards systems and methods for monitoring services in a multi-core system. The systems and methods distribute the monitors for a service and the ownership of a service across the cores of the multi-core device. The greater resources of the multi-core device process the workload of the monitors for the services and the workload for monitoring the states of the services more efficiently than a single packet engine on a core. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322089 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR N-CORE STATS AGGREGATION - Described herein are systems and methods for aggregating performance data or trace data for a multi-core, multi-packet-engine networked appliance. A plurality of packet engines operate on the appliance and manage network traffic between a plurality of clients and a plurality of servers. In various embodiments, the system comprises a plurality of packet engines and an aggregator communicating with the packet engines through shared memory allocations. Each packet engine can write performance data or trace data to the a shared memory allocation. The aggregator can obtain the performance data or trace data and consolidate the data to provide unified performance data or unified trace data representative of the appliance. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322090 | POWER SCALING FOR MULTI-CARRIER HIGH-SPEED UPLINK PACKET ACCESS - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes applying independent power controls to two or more carriers from a set of high speed packet access signals. The method includes monitoring power across the two or more carriers to determine power levels for the set of high speed packet access signals. The method also includes automatically scaling at least one of the independent power controls in view of the determined power levels for the set of high speed packet access signals. The method also includes setting the minimum power offset of the data channel independently on each carrier. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322091 | IN-BAND MEDIA PERFORMANCE MONITORING - A method including receiving data packets encapsulating at least part of a media stream, extracting a decoder-ready packet from the data packets, processing the decoder-ready packet; and substantially synchronously with the processing of the decoder-ready packet, generating delivery performance information for the at least part of the media stream, data from which is included in the decoder-ready packet. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322092 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A RECEIVING APPARATUS FOR CO-CHANNEL OPERATION - A method of selecting a receiving apparatus for co-channel operation, the method comprising: transmitting a first and a second data at predetermined respective power levels on a single first channel comprising a single frequency and time slot; receiving the data; measuring a characteristic of the data; transmitting a signal indicating the measured characteristic; receiving the indicating signal; and responding to the received indicating signal by selecting the receiving apparatus for co-channel operation depending on the measured characteristic. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322093 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROCESSING METHOD BY COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device, which receives data and checks a header in the data, includes: a first check circuit configured to detect whether or not a value in the header is within a first range; a second check circuit configured to detect whether or not a value of a data length field of the header is within a second range; and a third check circuit configured to detect whether or not a value of a connection identifier field of the header is within a third range. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322094 | CARRIER DETECTION - There is disclosed a method of determining one or more candidate frequencies for a carrier signal in a received signal, which method comprises: generating a narrowband spectrum of the received signal; detecting one or more peaks in the narrowband spectrum; generating a candidate frequency list, each frequency at which a peak occurs being included in the candidate frequency list. The method further comprises: removing the detected one or more peaks from the narrowband spectrum to generate a modified narrowband spectrum; detecting one or more further peaks in the modified narrowband spectrum; and modifying the candidate frequency list in dependence on the one or more further peaks. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322095 | PACKET ANALYSIS APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A method executed by a packet analysis apparatus for analyzing packets including voice packets and non-voice packets includes: capturing packets in a specific session; storing the captured packets in a storage; screening the stored packets to count up a receipt count of voice packets; determining whether packet loss has occurred in the specific session; and determining whether loss packets are voice packets in accordance with received packets adjacent to the loss packets to count up a loss count of voice packets when the packet loss has occurred. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322096 | METHOD OF IMPROVING COMPONENT CARRIER IDENTIFICATION IN A RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of improving component carrier identification in a random access procedure for a UE of a wireless communication system includes transmitting a random access preamble on an UL component carrier to a network of the wireless communication system by using a PRACH resource corresponding to an anchor component carrier of a plurality of DL component carriers, so that the network identifies the anchor component carrier according to the PRACH resource used for transmitting the random access preamble. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322097 | Method of Handling Downlink Signaling and Related Communication Device - A method of handling downlink signaling for a mobile device in a wireless communications system is disclosed. The method comprises t receiving at least one DL reference signal by at least one antenna port configured by a network and measuring the received at least one DL reference signal for a channel quality measurement, demodulation channel estimation, or a positioning measurement, wherein the resource for the at least one DL reference signal is dynamically or semi-statically assigned and configured to the mobile device. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322098 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for sending buffer status information includes checking if a quality of service (QoS) parameter is defined for a first logical channel and at least one condition of a set of predetermined conditions associated with a logical channel group is fulfilled. If the QoS parameter is defined and at least one condition of the set is fulfilled, the method includes setting a number of bits in a media access control header according to a first semantic. The bits carry buffer status information, and the first semantic is based on the QoS parameter of the first logical channel. Otherwise, the method includes setting the number of bits carrying the buffer status information according to a second semantic that is based on an amount of data available for transmission across the logical channel group. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322099 | PC ARRANGEMENT FOR LTE TDD SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide methods, systems and apparatuses for optimizing downlink path loss (PL) measurements in time division duplex (TDD) systems enabling fast power control targeting to decrease fading margin. In one embodiment, a method of power control in a long term evolution time division duplex (TDD) system is provided. The method includes controlling a length of a path loss measurement filter based on an allocation type. A width and frequency position of the path loss measurement filter is made dependent on the allocation type. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322100 | Methods and Arrangements in a Mobile Telecommunication System - The present invention ensures that the UEs are able to make use of all the available reference signals that can be used in a cell for performing UE measurements, estimations or demodulations. That is achieved by indicating on a downlink common or shared channel, the MIMO mode settings associated with a specific network node. The indicated MIMO mode settings explicitly or implicitly indicate available common reference signals and/or dedicated reference signals to be used for said UE measurements, estimations or demodulations, which implies that measurements, estimations or demodulations can be performed based on said received indication. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322101 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING, THROUGH A WIRELESS NETWORK, A CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION BETWEEN A FIRST TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICE AND A SECOND TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for reporting, through a wireless network which has a plurality of frequency subbands, channel state information is provided. The method includes determining single or multiple units of channel state information for each frequency subband between antennas of first and second telecommunication devices, and transferring the single or multiple units of channel state information to the second telecommunication device. The number of single or multiple units of channel state information for each frequency subband is the same. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322102 | UPLINK FEEDBACK IN A MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICES (MBMS) WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A technique for managing uplink feedback involves establishing a channel quality threshold range, for example, in terms of a channel quality indicator (CQI), broadcasting the channel quality threshold range to the mobile stations and using the channel quality threshold range to control the feedback of channel quality information. For example, the mobile stations determine their own mobile station-specific CQI and then generate CQI feedback information in response to a comparison between their own mobile station-specific CQI and the CQI threshold range. In an embodiment, if the CQI of a mobile station falls within the CQI threshold range, then the mobile station can transmit a reduced set of CQI feedback information. For example, the reduced set of CQI feedback information may be a single bit that indicates whether the mobile station-specific CQI is greater than or less than a CQI threshold or whether the CQI has crossed a CQI threshold. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329128 | SCHEDULING REMOTE UNITS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for scheduling a wireless communication entity ( | 12-30-2010 |
20100329129 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICE QUALITY IN A WIMAX COMMUNICATION NETWORK, AND METHOD FOR SELECTING AN ACCESS TRANSPORT RESOURCE CONTROL FUNCTION BY MEANS OF A GUIDELINE DECISION-MAKING FUNCTION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method provides service quality in a WiMAX communication network, and a method selects an access transport resource control function by a guideline decision-making function in a communication network. According to a method for providing service quality on an air interface of an access network in a WiMAX communication network by an application function, the application function aims to provide a user of the WiMAX communication network with a service quality-related application. The desired service quality is signaled by an authentication, authorization and accounting infrastructure of the WiMAX communication network. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329130 | VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL DIAGNOSTICS - Embodiments disclose a method that may be used for diagnosing, for example, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) sessions. The method may include establishing a first streaming session between a first telephone and a server using session control messages and establishing a second streaming session between the first telephone and a second telephone using session control messages. The method may further include transmitting or receiving data packets using the second streaming session, wherein the data packets carry voice or video data between the first and second telephones. The method may further include echoing the session control messages used to establish the second streaming session or the data packets carrying the voice or video data to the server using the first streaming session. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329131 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHODS FOR OPPORTUNISTIC SCHEDULING IN A CONTENTION-BASED WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of a wireless device and method for channel access are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the wireless device is configured to measure channel quality and set a backoff delay for channel access based on the channel quality. Shorter backoff delays are set for better channel quality and longer backoff delays are set for poorer channel quality. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329132 | MOBILE AWARE BEACON - Techniques for reducing beacon interference include identifying a mobile device located within a coverage area serviced by a first access point, determining a power of a signal transmitted by a mobile device to a second access point; and modifying the beacon to reduce interference. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329133 | NETWORK DETECTION OF REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS USING INCREMENTAL LINEAR REGRESSION - Method and apparatus using incremental linear regression to derive a traffic flow signature indicative of a particular application within a packet stream. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329134 | FEEDBACK AND LINK ADAPTATION TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed relating to feedback and link adaptation techniques for wireless networks. According to an example embodiment, an apparatus may include a processor or controller. The controller may be configured to determine a channel quality indication (CQI) value for each of a plurality of wireless sub-channels, discard any of the CQI values older than a threshold time, leaving a set of current CQI values, determine a percentile CQI value based on the set of current CQI values, and transmit the percentile CQI value to an infrastructure node. The infrastructure node, may, for example, determine or select one or more data transmission parameters, such as a modulation scheme and/or coding rate, based at least in part on the received percentile CQI value. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329135 | Buffer Status Reporting Based on Radio Bearer Configuration - The present invention relates to wireless communication systems, and more particularly to a method and an apparatus for periodically reporting the buffer status in a wireless communication system. Methods and arrangements for an improved buffer status reporting taking the type of radio bearer configuration into account is provided. This is achieved according to an embodiment of the present invention by taking the type of radio bearer configuration into account when determining the content of the buffer status report sent by the UE to the eNodeB. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329136 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station is applied to a mobile radio communication system including a transmission control function. The mobile station includes a determining unit to determine a gradient, on data to be uploaded which is input from an upper layer and transmitted through an uplink data channel in a direction toward a base transceiver station, based on a relation in chronological change of transmission data amount per predetermined time; a judging unit to judge that, when detecting that the gradient has become smaller than a predetermined threshold value, the transmission data amount is decreased; and an instructing unit to instruct a lower layer, in a state where Happy bit information transmitted through an uplink control channel continuously takes a first value for requesting an increase of a transmission power, to change the first value to a second value for maintaining or decreasing the transmission power. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329137 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A plurality of wireless communication methods are combined, networks to be used are dynamically selected by evaluating each network quality, and a packet format is changed adaptively to realize necessary reliability. The wireless communication apparatus has a network interface, a data interface, a quality interface, an allocation control part, a quality database, a quality update part, communication units and antennas. The wireless communication apparatus receives data and a requested quality from an application apparatus, selects the communication unit and communication method suitable for the requested quality, and transmits the data and requested quality. The communication unit receives a communication quality of the communication partner, and the quality update part updates the communication quality state in the quality database. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329138 | METHOD OF OBTAINING INFORMATION REPRESENTATIVE OF AN AVAILABILITY, A DEVICE FOR OBTAINING INFORMATION, AND A CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM - A method is provided of obtaining information representative of an availability of a communications network, which includes a plurality of equipment exchanging routing data in accordance with a routing protocol. The method includes a stage of storing in chronological order at least some of the routing data exchanged between at least one first equipment and at least one second equipment; a stage of totaling unavailability times as a function of the routing data stored in chronological order for a predetermined time period; a stage of obtaining the information representative of an availability for the time period as a function of the totaled unavailability times. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329139 | CIRCUIT OF A NODE AND METHOD FOR TRANSIT TIME MEASUREMENT IN A RADIO NETWORK - A circuit of a node in a radio network and method for transit time measurement between a first node and a second node of a radio network is provided. A frame is transmitted by the first node, wherein the frame requires an acknowledgment of reception by the second node. A first point in time of the transmission of the frame is established by the first node by a time counter. The frame is received by the second node at a second point in time. The acknowledgment is transmitted by the second node to the first node at a third point in time, wherein the third point in time depends on the second point in time by a predetermined time interval between the second point in time and the third point in time. A fourth point in time is established by the first node by the time counter when the acknowledgment is received. The transit time or the change in transit time is determined from the first point in time established by the time counter and from the established fourth point in time and from the predetermined time interval. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329140 | Interaction Detection Between Web-Enabled and Call-Related Features - A method is provided for detecting interactions between call-related and web-enabled features. In some embodiments, communication application components are configured to transmit an indication to a feature interaction detector every time a feature is invoked by the user. When the interaction detector receives an indication that a feature is being invoked, it compares the invoked feature against features that have previously been invoked (or executed) and determines whether the invoked feature interacts with any of the features that have been previously executed. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329141 | BUFFER MODULE, RECEIVER, DEVICE AND BUFFERING METHOD USING WINDOWS - A buffer for managing the order of data packages arriving at the buffer, wherein the buffer includes a first window, having a predetermined size defined by a first and a second extreme, and the first window is included within a second window. The buffer includes a filter for determining the time stamp of an arriving data package to determine if the arriving data package has an expected location included inside or outside the first window based on the time stamp. The buffer also includes a buffer module for locating the arriving data package in the expected location or for moving the first window by a predetermined distance to a position, without changing the size of the first window, to accommodate the expected location. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329142 | SENDING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SCHEDULING REQUEST (SR) SIGNAL - A method and device for sending a scheduling request (SR) signal are used for a user equipment (UE) in a long term evolution system to send an uplink signal to a base station. The method includes: if a time length of a radio frame is less than an SR periodicity, a sending frame and a subframe for the SR signal are determined after shifting an SR subframe offset from a starting subframe of a first radio frame of multiple consecutive radio frames which have a total time length equal to the SR periodicity; if a time length of a radio frame is equal to or greater than the SR periodicity, each radio frame is determined as the sending frame for the SR signal, and if a time length of a radio frame is equal to the SR periodicity, a subframe of the sending frame is determined after shifting the SR subframe offset from the starting subframe of the sending frame; if a time length of a radio frame is greater than the SR periodicity, a subframe of the sending frame is determined after shifting the SR subframe offset from the starting subframe of a radio half-frame; and the UE sends the SR signal to the base station in the determined subframe of the sending frame. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329143 | Method and Apparatus for Relating to Quality of Service in Wireless Networks - A method for adapting quality of service to dynamics of a wireless telecommunications network is provided. The method includes collecting data relating to operation of an element in the network, wherein the collected data comprises radio-frequency (RF) data relating to operation of the network. The method also includes pre-calculating, from the collected data, a dynamic operational characteristic of the network, wherein the pre-calculating includes pre-calculating from the collected data to obtain a geometrical determination based on a geographical location of a wireless communications device within the network. The method further includes making available the pre-calculated characteristic of the network to an application of the device using the network, including storing the characteristic at a pre-calculation server accessible by the device so the device can selectively retrieve the characteristic, and updating the characteristic at a frequency based on a trigger related to volatility of the RF data being collected. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329144 | Estimating the Location of a Wireless Terminal Based on Calibrated Signal-Strength Measurements - A process and machine for estimating the location of a wireless terminal is disclosed. The illustrative embodiment of the present invention is based on the observation that the signal strength of a signal from a transmitter is different at some locations, and, therefore, the location of a wireless terminal can be estimated by comparing the signal strength it currently observes against a map or database that correlates locations to signal strengths. In accordance with a first example, if a particular radio station is known to be received well at a first location and poorly at a second location, and a given wireless terminal at an unknown location is receiving the radio station poorly, it is more likely that the wireless terminal is at the second location than it is at the first location. | 12-30-2010 |
20110002229 | DYNAMIC MANAGEMENT OF END-TO-END NETWORK LOSS DURING A PHONE CALL - A method and system of managing end-to-end loss in a manner that allows phone calls to be executed across many networks at desirable end-to-end loss levels, including networks having fixed-loss stratagems, by controlling devices to adjust their local loss or gain in order to establish target end-to-end loss. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002230 | Quality of Service Parameter Relaxation for Non-Conversational Voice Calls Over a Packet-Switched Network - A method for communication in a packet-switched network. The method includes, when a determination is made that a call that has been set up with a quality of service appropriate for a live voice call will carry recorded voice-based data, decreasing the quality of service used on the call. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002231 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MONITORING OF TIMESLOTS DURING DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for coordinating communications between a user equipment and a base station comprises identifying timeslots for uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the base station, monitoring a predetermined number of timeslots for communications, and tracking usage of at least a portion of the timeslots identified for at least one of uplink communications and downlink communications. Upon reaching a predetermined usage metric related to at least one of uplink communications and downlink communications, the method includes triggering an automatic reduction in a number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment to less than the predetermined number of timeslots or communicating a delay signal to the base station to delay a trigger of an adjustment of a number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002232 | MULTI-PATH TIMING TRACKING AND IMPAIRMENT MODELING FOR IMPROVED GRAKE RECEIVER PERFORMANCE IN MOBILITY SCENARIOS - Methods and wireless receivers ( | 01-06-2011 |
20110002233 | Link Quality Estimation Method and Apparatus in a Telecommunication System - Method and apparatus for enabling accurate link quality estimation of a wireless link between a sending node ( | 01-06-2011 |
20110002234 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UMTS HSDPA SHARED CONTROL CHANNEL PROCESSING - Aspects of a method and system for UMTS HSDPA Shared Control Channel processing may include calculating at a receiver, for each one of a plurality of control channels, a quality metric based at least one Viterbi Decoder state metric. A control channel may be selected on the basis of the quality metrics, where the quality metric is selected that provides maximum confidence. The selected control channel may be chosen if its corresponding 3GPP metric is greater than a specified threshold, where the threshold is a design parameter. A validity of a selected control channel may be determined based on consistency and a CRC, where the CRC may be derived from decoding a sub-frame. The calculating and selecting may be done for a first slot of a sub-frame for High-Speed Shared Control Channels. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002235 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING CONTROL SIGNAL TRANSMISSION - A disclosed base station includes a transmission-rate determining unit for determining a transmission rate of a control channel for transmitting an upper-layer control signal, and a transmitter for allocating a predetermined bandwidth to the control channel for transmitting the upper-layer control signal according to the determined transmission rate, and transmitting the signal. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002236 | OPTIMIZATION OF STREAMING DATA THROUGHPUT IN UNRELIABLE NETWORKS - Multiple TRFC connections transport streaming data through a wireless channel, and the difference between measured round trip times of packets and minimum round trip time is used to adjust the number of TFRC connections to fully utilize bandwidth through the wireless channel. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002237 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a transmission device comprising a transmission weight generating unit for generating a plurality of transmission weights, a communication quality acquiring unit for acquiring a value indicating the communication quality of each of unique paths, and a transmission weight determining unit for selecting such one of the transmission weights generated by the transmission weight generating unit that the difference of the values indicating the communication qualities acquired by the communication quality acquiring unit between the individual unique paths is at or lower than a predetermined value and that the sum of all the communication qualities of the unique paths becomes the maximum. | 01-06-2011 |
20110007637 | Indicating Current Connection Status of a Wireless Device - In one embodiments, a method includes determining a current connection status of a first wireless device with respect to one or more second wireless devices configured to communicate wirelessly by a particular wireless communication protocol. The current connection status of the first wireless device potentially being that the first wireless device has scanned for and found one or more available ones of the second wireless devices to connect wirelessly to but has not yet having established a wireless connection to any one of them or potentially being that the first wireless device is currently attempting to establish a wireless connection to one of the available ones of the second wireless devices. The method includes communicating for presentation to a user at the first wireless device a scan-result indicator if the first wireless device has scanned for and found one or more available ones of the second wireless devices to connect wirelessly to but has not yet established a wireless connection to any one of them and a connection-attempt indicator if the first wireless device currently is attempting to establish a wireless connection to one of the available ones of the second wireless devices. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007638 | ARTIFICIAL DELAY INFLATION AND JITTER REDUCTION TO IMPROVE TCP THROUGHPUTS - A method, a system and a base-station for automatically determining delays of data transmitted via Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and inflating these delays in order to reduce jitter and improve TCP throughput in a communications network. A Dynamic Jitter Reduction (DJR) logic/utility operating within a communications node measures delays on a rolling basis in order to capture the delay profile. Based on the delay profile, the DJR utility determines a delay target. The DJR utility ‘inflates’/augments future/expected delays toward the delay target by performing on one or more of the following: (a) using a delay based factor in the scheduler metric for TCP applications; (b) performing fine-tuning of link adaptation schemes; (c) delaying transmission of packets at the transmit or receive buffer; and (d) delaying transmission of a received TCP ACK signal from the media access control (MAC) sub-layer to TCP layer. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007639 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING IDENTIFIERS - Methods and apparatus related to detecting identifiers in a wireless communications system are described. Various methods and apparatus are well suited to a decentralized peer to peer wireless communications system in which devices monitor for and attempts to detect peer discovery identifiers of interest. Identifiers correspond to identifier bit sequences which are intentionally structured to appear to be random sequences. A portion of an identifier bit sequence is broadcast in a peer discovery interval. A receiver device, searching for a particular bit sequence of interest, tries to match received peer discovery bit sequence portion against a corresponding portion of the bit sequence of interest. Matching bits are determined on a per portion basis, and an updated match quality value is determined. A match or mismatch condition is determined as a function of the updated match quality value. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007640 | MULTIPLE PEER-TO-PEER SIGNALING - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product operable in a wireless communication system are provided in which a first signal is generated for transmission to a wireless node to enable the wireless node to determine a first preferred beam pattern. A second preferred beam pattern is determined from a second signal received from the wireless node. The apparatus communicates with the wireless node through at least one of the first or second preferred beam pattern. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007641 | Method and Device for distributing connections towards a receiving domain - A method is described for distributing a plurality of connections ( | 01-13-2011 |
20110007642 | System reliability evaluation method for transmission by two minimal paths in time restriction - A system reliability evaluation method for transmission by two minimal paths in time restriction is disclosed. The minimal path includes plural arcs between a start node and a terminal node in a flow network. The method includes the steps of providing a virtual network in a computer for simulating the flow network; inputting a transmission requirement and a time restriction; distributing the transmission requirement in a first minimal path and a second minimal path to make the first minimal path have a first throughput and the second minimal path have a second throughput; finding a plurality of feasible solutions satisfying the relation that the first throughput plus the second throughput equals the demand in the time restriction; finding a lower boundary vector by applying the comparative method; and computing a system reliability by applying set theory. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007643 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A method for adaptively deciding number of feedback resource blocks in a downlink which comprises that a base station ( | 01-13-2011 |
20110007644 | FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION IN A CDMA SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method of estimating a frequency offset. The method comprises receiving a wireless signal timed according to a first frequency; generating a local signal timed according to a second frequency; and performing a plurality of synchronization searches, each search comprising obtaining a set of correlation results indicative of a correlation between the wireless signal and the local signal at different timing offsets of the wireless signal relative to the local signal. The method the no comprises finding a series of results, with a result from each of a plurality of the synchronization searches, for which the difference in; timing offset between results from adjacent searches in the series is within a maximum specified value. A frequency off set between the first and second frequencies can be determined from the series. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007645 | SYSTEM AND PROCESS FOR DIMENSIONING A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A process for dimensioning a cellular telecommunications network, including, for each of one or more network elements of the network: accessing network element environment data representing a configuration and environment of the network element; accessing QoS data representing quality of service criteria for users of the network; and processing the network element environment data and the QoS data to generate network element capacity data representing combinations of loads of network services corresponding to capacities of the network element that meet the quality of service criteria. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007646 | INTERFERENCE RESISTANT SATELLITE LINK POWER CONTROL USING DOWNLINK BEACON - A method for determining EIRP of user terminals in a satellite communication system comprises obtaining a frequency gain of a gateway at one or more frequencies, obtaining a path gain of the gateway for one or more signal paths, and obtaining a satellite beacon signal power at a receiver of the gateway. The method also comprises determining a target signal power at the gateway for one or more frequency channels, where the target signal power based at least in part on the frequency gain, the path gain, and the satellite beacon signal power. The method also comprises obtaining a message signal power at the gateway of a message from a user terminal, and determining the EIRP of the user terminal based at least in part on a difference between the target signal power and the message signal power. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007647 | MF-TDMA SATELLITE LINK POWER CONTROL - A method for determining attenuation settings across carriers in a return link bandwidth of a user terminal comprises determining a first attenuation setting for a user terminal at a first transmission frequency, where the first attenuation setting is based on a first signal quality metric value of a first message sent from the user terminal at the first transmission frequency. The method also comprises determining a second attenuation setting for the user terminal at a second transmission frequency, where the second attenuation setting is based on a second signal quality metric value of a second message sent from the user terminal at the second transmission frequency. The method also comprises determining the attenuation settings across the carriers in the return link bandwidth of the user terminal based on the first attenuation setting and the second attenuation setting. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007648 | Method, System, and Network Apparatus for Evaluating Quality of Experience - A method for evaluating quality of experience (QoE) includes obtaining service parameter information sent from a media server. Quality of service (QoS) metrics is obtained. QoE is obtained according to the service parameter information and the QoS metrics. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007649 | BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION AND METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMIT POWER - A base transceiver station ( | 01-13-2011 |
20110007650 | METHOD OF ESTIMATING POSITION OF MOBILE NODE IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of estimating the position of a mobile node in a wireless sensor network using a passive mode OWR method. The method includes: estimating frequency offsets of anchor nodes and a mobile node; allowing the anchor nodes to sequentially transmit ranging frames; allowing the mobile node to receive the ranging frames and to estimate the difference between the reception times of signals from two anchor nodes; and applying the estimated difference between the reception times of the signals to time difference of arrival (TDOA) to estimate the position of the mobile node. According to the above-mentioned structure of the present invention, a plurality of mobile nodes can estimate their positions with a minimum number of ranging frame transmissions, without using a separate network synchronization unit. In addition, it is possible to easily construct a wireless sensor network for position recognition, and rapidly and accurately perform distance estimate using an OWR method. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007651 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND MONITORING NODE - In order to improve throughput in a whole network system, there is provided a network system controlling a plurality of wireless systems, comprising: access points of the respective wireless systems; gateways for terminating the respective wireless systems; a certificate authority; a home agent; a monitoring node; a control node; and terminal device connects to the plurality of wireless systems, wherein the monitoring node connects to the access points in the respective wireless systems and obtains information about the terminal device, the control node changes the wireless systems to which the terminal device connects in accordance with instructions of the monitoring node; and the terminal device selects one of the plurality of the wireless systems to which the terminal device connects in accordance with the information about the terminal device obtained by the monitoring node. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007652 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PATH SWITCHOVER - A method and device for path switchover in communications field are provided. The method includes: detecting communication quality of traffic transmitted on an active path and obtaining a detection value of the communication quality; determining whether the detection value meets a switching condition; if yes, switching the traffic transmitted on the active path to a standby path. The device includes a detecting module, an obtaining module, a determining module and a switching module. The embodiment of the present disclosure integrates the NQA technology for detecting the path communication quality and the TE FRR fast path switching technology, and the NQA detection result may trigger the TE FRR path to switch quickly. Therefore, when the signal quality of the path degrades, making the QoS requirement of the SLA hard to meet, the traffic may be switched to standby path to meet the requirement of the SLA agreed originally between the carrier and the user, so as to improve the user experience and the satisfactory degree on the service provided by the carriers. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007653 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING PACKET DATA ON A SUBSET OF CARRIER FREQUENCIES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A remote station for a wireless communication system including a base station is disclosed. The remote station includes a front end structure configured to receive packet data in parallel on a subset of carrier frequencies. Each packet data is preceded by a header field for identifying the remote station as the recipient of the packet data and the subset of carrier frequencies is based on a set of a corresponding number of multiple carrier frequencies. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007654 | Restoring Aggregated Circuits with Circuit Integrity Checks in a Hierarchical Network - A system and method is disclosed that assures component circuits transported in aggregated circuits restore correctly after an aggregated circuit fault. The system and method implements component circuit tail segment integrity checks whenever an aggregated circuit is restored in a higher level of a network hierarchy. Switches at both ends of an aggregated circuit perform circuit integrity checks of the tail segments of every component circuit. A failure of the component circuit integrity check on any component circuit causes that component circuit to be released and restored end-to-end. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007655 | METHOD FOR TESTING TRANSMISSION MODES OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for testing transmission modes of a wireless communication device. According to the method, a switching range is determined in a parameter space in a test device. The parameter of the parameter space describes the quality of transmission and influences a recommendation for a transmission mode to be adjusted in a device to be tested. The switching range is a subspace of the parameter space and contains at least one switching limit for the recommendation for the subsequent transmission mode to be adjusted. In a further step, random parameter points from the switching range are generated depending on a probability distribution which is defined for the switching range. A signal is generated for every parameter point and has a transmission mode determined by the parameter point and is transmitted to the device to be tested. The device to be tested then transmits one response signal per received signal to the test device, the response signal containing a recommendation for a subsequent transmission mode to be adjusted. All recommendations from all received response signals are evaluated in the test device. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007656 | DETERMINISTIC BACK-OFF METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus are described including identifying a channel that a decentralized network is using for communications and identifying a station that is a member of the decentralized network to monitor data transmission activity over the identified channel. Also described are a method and apparatus for a station to transmit data over a communication medium of a decentralized network including monitoring the communication medium, determining if the communication medium is idle, transmitting data if the communication medium is idle and if the station has a data to transmit and adjusting a slot count and a service ring configuration if the medium is busy. Further described are a method and apparatus including monitoring a communication channel used by a decentralized network, determining a number of available idle time slots between two successive frame transmissions initiated by different stations, updating a service ring, adjusting a number of stations and adjusting a slot count. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007657 | Neighbour Cell Quality Measurement in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements for neighbour cell quality measurements using silent resource element (RE) grids, and as well to a silent RE grid. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007658 | Method and Apparatus for Investigating whether a Given Signal is Received in a Given Set of OFDMA Resource Elements - A method for investigating a signal in an OFDMA transmission is disclosed. The method comprises receiving the OFDMA transmission and obtaining a resource grid comprising resource elements of the transmission; determining a set of pairs of the resource elements, wherein the resource elements of the pair are disjoint; for each pair, comparing signals of the resource elements of the pair; determining a statistical test value based on the comparisons; and processing the statistical test value to obtain a desired output about the signal. A computer program for implementing the method, a receiver arrangement adapted to perform such investigation, and a communication apparatus using such receiver arrangement are also disclosed. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007659 | BROADCAST SYSTEM, BROADCAST MANAGEMENT DEVICE, BROADCAST METHOD, AND TERMINAL - Provided is a broadcast system that assigns a communication channel to a program and broadcasts data for the program to terminals, the broadcast system including a broadcast management device and a communication access network device. The management device calculates as a score a measure of viewing requests from users of the terminals for a plurality of programs, and determines a program to actually broadcast on the communication channel based on the score. The communication access network device transmits program data on a communication channel according to the determination of the broadcast management device. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007660 | SYSTEM FOR MEASURING TRANSMISSION BANDWIDTH FOR MEDIA STREAMING AND METHOD FOR SAME - A system for measuring a transmission bandwidth for media streaming and a method thereof that are capable of calculating the transmission bandwidth by using a transmission packet to be transmitted to a receiver without transmitting a proving packet to the receiver and streaming media data to a receiver by using the transmission bandwidth in a service for streaming the media data such as a moving picture in real time. | 01-13-2011 |
20110013525 | Indirect measurement methodology to infer routing changes using statistics of flow arrival processes - Statistical methods are used to observe packet flow arrival processes and to infer routing changes from those observations. Packet flow arrivals are monitored using NetFlow or another packet flow monitoring arrangement. Packet flow arrivals are quantified by counting arrivals per unit time, or by measuring an inter-arrival time between flows. When a change in packet flow arrivals is determined to be statistically significant, a change in network routing protocol is reported. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013526 | SLOT ADAPTATION IN A WIRELESS DYNAMIC TDMA NETWORK WITH RESERVATIONS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for performing wireless slot adaptation with reservations in a time division multiple access (TDMA) network where time is divided into time slots in repeated frames. During operation, the system receives a vector from a neighbor node, wherein a respective element in the vector indicates received signal quality for a corresponding time slot in a frame with respect to that neighbor node. Next, the system updates a record which indicates the received signal quality for all the time slots within a frame for the neighbor node based on the received vector. The system then determines a transmission threshold for a time slot with respect to a neighbor node based on the record. Subsequently, the system transmits a packet destined for the neighbor node in an outbound queue if the record indicates that the received signal quality in an upcoming slot is better than the transmission threshold. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013527 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEEP PACKET INSPECTION - IP networks carry packets that consist of headers and payloads. Typical traffic analysis systems at layer 3 process packet headers in order to obtain as much information about the traffic as possible. However, performing of deep packet analysis requires the processing of packet payloads as well. Another important requirement of layer 3 processing is the need to process the payloads at wire speeds. A system and method for deep packet inspection at layer 3 involves (a) an approach for packet payload processing; (b) accounting for out of order arrival of packets; (c) an approach for partial match analysis so as to be able to analyze the traffic flows when only partial information is available; and (d) an approach for effective payload processing for attempting to achieve wire speed processing. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013528 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING PRESENCE AND LOCATION INFORMATION OF MOBILES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In one embodiment, the method includes collecting, at the base station, presence information for each of the plurality of mobile devices, respectively. Location information is collected at the base station for each of the plurality of mobile devices, respectively. Integrated information is generated at the base station for each of the plurality of mobile devices, respectively, based on the collected presence and location information. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013529 | Method and device for processing access of user terminals in fixed access networks - Improvements are made to an access control equipment, a user-side equipment, and a user terminal through this invention. Wherein, the access control equipment obtains the resource condition of the link between itself and the user-side equipment, and provides it to each user terminal via the user-side equipment, for the convenience of the user terminal to perform the access point selection. Besides, the access control equipment further performs reasonable allocation for the resource in the link according to a predefined rule without depending on a quasi-static configuration of user. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013530 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DETECTION OF A COMPATIBLE NETWORK - An approach is provided for searching and detecting cells. System synchronization sequences are detected. An information block on a control channel of one of a plurality of networks is decoded, in response to the detected synchronization sequences. The synchronization sequences are independent of the networks. The information block includes a system indicator specifying release version of the network. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013531 | LOW REUSE PREAMBLE - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate cell search and detection in high interference situations. Heterogeneous network can include a plurality of unplanned femtocell deployments, which can prevent macrocellular UEs from acquiring macrocells. A base station within the network can transmit a low reuse preamble that includes system information, wherein the low reuse preamble is tunneled on a downlink traffic channel such as a physical downlink shared channel. A UE can detect the low reuse preamble and evaluate the preamble to obtain the system information. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013532 | Method for Wireless Communication System and Device Using the Same - A method, for determining a first amount of a plurality of high-throughput long training fields within a packet in a wireless communication system, includes determining a second amount of a plurality of space time streams needed by the wireless communication system transmitting the packet, and setting the first amount to be greater than or equal to 8 when the second amount is greater than 4. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013533 | ADAPTIVE COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT TO ACCOMMODATE HIDDEN TERMINAL CONDITIONS - A method for use in an access point includes managing communication, based on an associated set of communication parameters, between a first client wireless transceiver and the packet switched backbone network, and between a second client wireless transceiver and the packet switched backbone network. A hidden terminal condition is identified, based on at least the attempt to detect transmissions from the second client wireless transceiver circuitry by the first client processing circuitry. At least one parameter of the associated set of communication parameters is altered to address the hidden terminal condition. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013534 | Receiver Having Integrated Spectral Analysis Capability - A method of managing traffic in a communications channel includes the steps of receiving a subscriber ID corresponding to a subscriber, performing a spectral analysis on a signal received from the subscriber within a time interval identified by the subscriber ID, and adjusting transmission characteristics of the subscriber based on the spectral analysis. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013535 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SOLICITING CONNECTIVITY FROM WIRELESS DATA NETWORKS - According to the embodiments of the techniques of this application, a wireless data device or other data node sends solicitation messages periodically to a wireless gateway, such as a PDSN, when there is no data traffic between the wireless data device and a wireless data network. Each solicitation message resets the simple IP inactivity timer on the wireless gateway. When multiple wireless data devices send solicitation messages, the interval between subsequent transmissions of solicitation messages is randomised to reduce the probability of collision with the solicitations from other devices on the same wireless link. The solicitation timer, for instance, may be based on the simple IP inactivity timer setting on the wireless network, and the number of wireless data devices that the wireless data network serves. Expiration of the solicitation timer at the wireless data device or other data node causes the next solicitation message to be sent from or on behalf of the wireless data device. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013536 | Side Information Bits of ACK and NACK Bits in Multiple ACK/NACK Transmission - Methods and apparatus for generating, transmitting, and processing error control information in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The error control information is designed so that the probability of a NACK-to-ACK error in transmission is lower than the probability for an ACK-to-NACK error. Multiple ACK/NACK bits are transmitted along with one or more side information bits that indicate the relative quantities of ACK values and NACK values among the ACK/NACK bits. In an exemplary method for generating error control information in a communication device, a plurality of ACK/NACK bits indicating whether corresponding transport blocks were successfully received are generated. One or more side information bits are formed as a function of the ACK/NACK bits, the side information bits indicating the relative quantities of ACK values and NACK values among the ACK/NACK bits, and transmitted along with the ACK/NACK bits to the remote communication node. | 01-20-2011 |
20110019555 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - To provide a communication apparatus for achieving further improvements in communication quality and power saving effect, without depending on network environments. A portable terminal ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110019556 | Quality of service packet processing without explicit control negotiations - Apparatuses, methods, systems, and computer program products to process QoS packets of wireless traffic without explicit control negotiations are disclosed. An embodiment may comprise a mobile computing device with wireless communications capabilities. The mobile computing device may be a client that associates or connects with an access point or communicates another client device, such as a peripheral device with wireless capabilities. The mobile computing device may monitor wireless packet traffic being transmitted from the mobile computing device. For example, the mobile computing device may monitor the packets being transmitted from a video streaming application to the peripheral device, which may comprise an LCD monitor that has wireless communications capabilities. The mobile computing device may mark the packets of the video stream as QoS packets even though the video streaming application may not do so, and place the marked packets in a QoS queue for priority processing. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019557 | PACKET AGGREGATION - Methods and apparatus for improving the efficient use of a wireless channel. Flows of compatible packets to be transmitted are processed in separate queues based on characteristics of the packets, destination and quality of service (QoS) requirements. Aggregation parameters selected for each flow define when packets aggregated on a flow are to be sent. The aggregation parameters may reflect packet type, such as QoS requirements, an application type and/or wireless channel conditions. In some embodiments, the aggregation parameters indicate a threshold frame size or include a threshold time to buffer a packet while waiting for other packets on that flow to fill a frame. When an aggregation parameter for a queue is met, the aggregated packets are transmitted as a frame. The queue is cleared and subsequent packets may begin aggregating. Some types of packets, such as acknowledgment packets, may be sent without aggregation. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019558 | DISTRIBUTED LATENCY MEASUREMENT SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ANALYSIS - Apparatus and methods are provided for generating real-time measured latency data. A message is generated with a time stamp. The time stamp indicates a time the message was sent. The time the message was sent is determined based on a reference-clock source, such as a Global Positioning System (GPS) satellite. A time that the message was received is determined using the reference-clock source. The real-time measured latency data is determined based on the time stamp and the time the message was received. If user data is present in the message, the user data is determined by removing the time stamp from the message. The time stamp and the time the message was received may be generated using a latency-measuring device that is configured to communicate with the reference-clock source. The latency-measuring device may be aboard an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) or an unmanned ground vehicle (UGV). | 01-27-2011 |
20110019559 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR STABILIZING FORWARD LINK MIMO RATE PREDICTION - A method for stabilizing forward link multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) rate prediction is described. The forward link channel quality is measured. Instantaneous channel quality estimates are determined for each instantaneous rank. Each instantaneous channel quality estimate provides an instantaneous rate estimate for the instantaneous rank. Rank defines the number of forward link transmission streams and rate defines the total capacity of the forward link for each rank. The instantaneous rates are filtered to determine an average rate per rank. A maximum rate is selected as the maximum over the determined average rate per rank. The instantaneous rank corresponding to the maximum rate is selected as the optimal rank. The instantaneous rate corresponding to the optimal rank is selected as the optimal rate. The optimal rank and optimal rate are then sent to an access point. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019560 | Method And System For Power-Limited Switching And/Or Routing In A Network - Communication devices may determine routes and/or may select a route for communicating data between a first communication device and a second communication device. The selected route may require the least power consumption. The determined routes may be ranked based on an amount of power required for routing the data. The data may be routed among devices based on the ranking. Power consumption of a device may be determined based on a bandwidth associated with the device. Route selection may be based on availability of power for power sources of the communication devices. The selection of routes may be based on a current power consumption and/or a history of prior power consumption of the communication devices. The selection of a route which may require least power consumption may be optimized based on the availability of bandwidth. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019561 | SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS FOR HALF AND FULL DUPLEX WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING MULTIPLE RADIOS - Provided herein is a wireless communication system comprising a first device and a second device. The first device comprises a first radio type and a second radio type. The second device comprises a first radio type and a second radio type. The first device is adaptable to form a communication link with the second device using the first radio or the second radio. The first device can be adaptable to transmit data to the second device through the first radio type or the second radio type. The second device can be adaptable to form a communication link with the first device through dynamic switching between the first radio type and second radio type of the second device. The second device can be adaptable to receive data from the first device through the first radio type or the second radio type. The second device can be adaptable to transmit data to the first device using the first radio type or the second radio type. The second device can be adaptable to be in communication with the first device through dynamic switching between the first radio type and the second radio type and the second device can be adaptable to transmit data to the first device through the first radio type or the second radio type. Further provided herein is a wireless communication network comprising a plurality of devices comprising at least two devices, wherein at least two devices of the plurality of device are adaptable to form a communication link using a radio type selected from a plurality of radio types, wherein the network is adaptable to dynamically select the radio type used to form the communication link. The network can monitor the quality of the communication link between the at least two devices and is further adaptable to dynamically switch between the plurality of radio types in response to the quality of the communication link. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019562 | WIRELESS HARDWARE DEVICE FOR DETECTING RELATIONS OF DISTANCE, AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING RELATIONS OF DISTANCE BETWEEN WIRELESS HARDWARE DEVICES - Described herein is a wireless device, provided with: a transceiver module, which transmits data packets that have a transmission-power level selectable from among a number of power levels and include information of the transmission-power level, and receives data packets from surrounding devices; and a control unit, which is connected to the transceiver module and controls the transmission and reception of the data packets by the transceiver module. The control unit carries out processing operations on the data packets received from the surrounding devices in a detection time interval in order to determine proximity relations between the wireless device and said surrounding devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019563 | Scheduling Traffic in a Communication Channel - The invention refers to a method for scheduling traffic in a communication channel of a mobile communications network which detects small sized data bursts and prioritizes their transmission. The detection is performed by comparison with two thresholds, one being an indicator of the instantaneous size of the data burst and the second one being related to the size of said data burst along a given period of time. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019564 | Allocating Traffic in Wide Area Mobile Networks - Method and RNC for selecting a transmission technology to MIMO UEs, HSDPA UEs and non-HSDPA UEs of a network with multiple carriers, comprising:
| 01-27-2011 |
20110019565 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE ALLOCATION OF RELEASED BANDWIDTH IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, CORRESPONDING STORAGE MEANS - One embodiment of the invention pertains to a method for allocating bandwidth in a communications network, characterized in that it comprises steps for:
| 01-27-2011 |
20110019566 | Determining Usage Predictions and Detecting Anomalous User Activity Through Traffic Patterns - The present invention concerns a system for selecting and monitoring data plans for telecommunications systems, and methods of determining, learning and estimating usage patterns in-order to predict usage and tie this to cost and the overlaying of plan selection for cost optimization. Further, additional methods are applied to determine anomalous user behaviours and raise security and data leakage related events. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019567 | METHOD FOR POSITIONING MOBILE DEVICES AND APPARATUS FOR POSITIONING MOBILE DEVICES - The present invention relates to a mobile communication field. The present invention provides a method and an apparatus for WiMAX positioning by downlink preamble fast detection DPFD. The method comprises steps of: Mobile user station MSS detects downlink preambles from BSs, all of which are synchronized by in TDD mode mobile WiMAX; the TDoA of different BSs' preamble is get through preamble-based synchronization detection; and the exact location is calculated through classical TDoA algorithms. The embodiment of the present invention describes a novel concept for measuring the position of the mobile user equipment by the uplink ranging assistant downlink preamble detection. With the mobile WiMAX is accepted as a 3G standard by ITU and widely populated, the position based on WiMAX will be a market-potential service. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019568 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving data in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes, when a status report is not received after a predetermined time elapses since a polling Packet Data Unit (PDU) is initially transmitted, generating a Radio Link Control (RLC) PDU indicating retransmission of the initially transmitted polling PDU, and transmitting the RLC PDU indicating the retransmission of the initially transmitted polling PDU. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019569 | MONITOR FOR MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving label data that indicates all interface labels that belong to each path ID of multiple path IDs associated with corresponding multiple paths between provider edge nodes in a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) network. Each interface label is associated with a network interface on a node in the MPLS network. Based on the label data, an untested list that holds data that indicates all unique interface labels is generated. A tested interface selected from the untested list is scheduled for testing. After scheduling, the interface label of the tested interface is removed from the untested list. It is determined whether the untested list still includes data for at least one interface label. If not, then a test of the MPLS network is completed without testing every path end to end, thus conserving network resources. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019570 | ESTIMATING ENDPOINT PERFORMANCE IN UNIFIED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Performance of endpoints, client devices and servers within a communication system, is determined by collecting call quality data from each endpoint by a quality monitoring server/application. Call quality data includes predefined metrics based on network and end device characteristics during each call. Calls include voice, video, and data exchanges. Collected metric values are then aggregated according to a formula for consistency and scaled based on factors such as traffic volume. Resulting performance values are used to order the endpoints such that those with degraded quality and prioritized based on factors like traffic volume can be attended to first. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019571 | Method and Apparatus for Traffic Shaping - A method and apparatus for a traffic shaper that uses a traffic shaping algorithm based on a sustained rate token bucket and a constant rate emitter. The sustained rate token bucket uses a plurality of tokens based on the sustained rate and the sustained burst size. The constant rate emitter allows transmission of traffic at an adjusted transmission rate, where the adjusted transmission rate is derived from the peak rate, peak burst size, sustained rate and sustained burst size. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019572 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARED SHAPING - A method and a network device for sharing bandwidth among a group of classes of traffic for an interface are provided. Bandwidth may be allocated to at least one traffic class of a first priority for the interface. At least some unused bandwidth of the at least one traffic class may be allocated to at least one other traffic class of a second priority for the interface. In some implementations, weighted constituents may be allocated unused interface bandwidth based on an assigned weight of each of the weighted constituents of the interface. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019573 | LOW COMPLEXITY USER SELECTION FOR SDMA - A method for grouping terminal devices in a wireless communication network containing a base-station, wherein each terminal reports to the base-station the level of signal received the terminal when the base-station transmits to another terminal or terminals. The base-station then selects from the plurality of the terminals, groups of terminals indicating low signal measurements for data transmissions sent to other group members of the group. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019574 | TECHNIQUE FOR CLASSIFYING NETWORK TRAFFIC AND FOR VALIDATING A MECHANISM FOR CLASSIFYING NETWORK TRAFFIC - A technique for classifying network traffic in the form of data packets generated by multiple applications installed on a device ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110019575 | DATA COMMUNICATIONS - In a method and system for operating an ADSL access network which has a plurality of data connections ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110019576 | RADIO QUALITY ESTIMATION SYSTEM, RADIO QUALITY ESTIMATION DEVICE, RADIO QUALITY ESTIMATION METHOD, AND RADIO QUALITY ESTIMATION PROGRAM - Provided is a radio quality estimation system for estimating radio quality in consideration of environment information which changes with the passage of time and for judging by when to implement the preventive measures of the quality deterioration by taking the quality deterioration in the future into consideration. The radio quality estimation system is characterized by comprising an environment information storage section for storing the environment information which affects the radio quality in a target area and which changes with the passage of time, a radio wave propagation analysis section for analyzing the propagation characteristics of radio waves, and a radio quality estimation section for estimating the radio quality at a point in the target area by using the analyzed propagation characteristics of the radio waves and the obtained environment information. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019577 | Inter-vehicle communication apparatus and method capable of detecting packet collision - In inter-vehicle communication, a communication apparatus may not normally receive a packet having a sufficient reception power level. Under such circumstances, a control circuit in the apparatus determines that the received packet has collided with other packet if a condition is met that a time period for a receiver circuit to receive a packet having a reception power level of equal to or more than a set value is longer than a time period required for the receiver circuit to receive a packet having a predetermined packet length. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019578 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR THE POWER MANAGEMENT OF A DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LINE - The present invention relates to a method and an arrangement for the power management of a digital communication line such as a digital subscriber line DSL. A problem addressed by the invention is that the transitioning of the digital subscriber line from a low transmission power state to a high transmission power state can cause disturbance to adjacent lines. This problem is solved by the current invention by an access node AN that is arranged to step-wise increase the power state until the high transmission power state has been reached. The invention also comprises embodiments of monitoring and detecting traffic events that serve as triggers of the transitioning. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019579 | METHOD FOR TESTING THE TRANSMISSION MODES OF A RADIO DEVICE - A method for determining a channel quality for the transmission of data in the channel by a test device. The test device transmits the data with the determined channel quality to a device to be tested which determines one or more pieces of decision information. The device to be tested forwards the piece(s) of decision information to the test device as a response signal and the test device reads the piece(s) of decision information from the response signal. The piece(s) of decision information from the response signal is/are uniquely attributed to a transmission mode to be adjusted. The initially determined channel quality is also uniquely attributed to an expected transmission mode. The expected transmission mode is compared with the transmission mode to be adjusted in a comparative unit in the evaluation unit, thereby allowing a statement regarding the correctness of the transmission mode to be adjusted. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019580 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A reproduction speed of an application being executed is controlled with changing an upper limit of accumulation of a jitter buffer based on a radio state during communication by a first wireless communication network. If it is determined to start handover preparation from the first wireless communication network to a second wireless communication network, a preparation time before handover and an absolute delay time of each of the first wireless communication network and the second wireless communication network are obtained from the handover control unit. Based on such information obtained and a data amount in a jitter buffer at a time when it is determined to start the handover preparation, the reproduction speed of the application being executed is controlled to be slowed down. Thereby, it is possible to perform handover to a different wireless communication network without deteriorating reproduction quality and real-time property. | 01-27-2011 |
20110026412 | System and method for controlling parameters for applications serviced in a best effort communication link - The present invention relates to a system and method for controlling parameters for applications serviced in a best effort (BE) communication link. The system includes a protocol specific processor configured to acquire at least one of (i) an application identifier and (ii) type of protocol associated with at least one layer higher than an internet layer for a packet to be transmitted in the BE communication link. The protocol specific processor is also configured to determine parameters for the packet according to the acquired at least one of (i) application identifier and (ii) the type of protocol associated with the at least one layer such that the packet receives quality of service (QoS) treatment in a Radio Access Network. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026413 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLE FREQUENCY HYPOTHESIS TESTING WITH FULL SYNCH ACQUISITION IN AN E-UTRA/LTE UE RECEIVER - A mobile device receives a radio frequency (RF) signal comprising a primary synchronization sequence (PSS) and a secondary synchronization sequence (SSS). The mobile device performs multiple frequency hypothesis (MFH) testing via multiple MFH branches. A SSS decoding and a PSS correlation process are performed, respectively, per MFH branch. The SSS decoding may be performed according to corresponding PSS detection. Cell-specific information such as cell ID information and/or Cyclic Prefix (CP) length is acquired per MFH branch based on corresponding PSS detection and SSS decoding. Subsequently, the mobile device selects a particular MFH branch with a maximum PSS correlation peak over the entire MFH branches. The cell-specific information from the selected MFH branch is utilized for communications within a corresponding cell if the information is detected consistently. The mobile device compares cell ID information and/or CP length information over the remaining MFH branches for consistency check. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026414 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA STREAMS WITH FEEDBACK INFORMATION OVER A LOSSY NETWORK - Systems, apparatus, and methods are provided to enhance transmitting and receiving video data streams with feedback information over a lossy and/or congested network. The systems, apparatus, and methods may optimize retransmission for lost packets or lost data frames. Optimizations are also provided to select reference frames in a data stream so that block errors are contained when RPS is used to encode data frames. Optimization in decoding may include reconstructing high-resolution data frames from low-resolution data frames. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026415 | Interference-Aware Resource Assignment in Communication Systems - Methods and apparatus in a frequency division duplex, orthogonal frequency division multiplex communication system assign resources, including the number, frequency position, and coding, in a subframe of a downlink to a user equipment (UE) based on parameters that influence the robustness against UE self-induced interference when the UE is scheduled for uplink transmission in that subframe. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026416 | System and Method for Dynamic Power Control for Energy Efficient Physical Layer Communication Devices - A system and method for dynamic power control for energy efficient physical layer communication devices. Energy-efficiency features are continually being developed to conserve energy in links between such energy-efficient devices. These energy-efficient devices interoperate with many legacy devices that have already been deployed. In these links, energy savings can be produced by having a local receiver enter an energy saving state based upon the receipt of standard IDLE signals. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026417 | BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR USE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station for use in a mobile communication system includes: a measurement unit configured to measure one or more pieces of statistical data in the number of users in a cell, a user distribution state or a traffic amount; and a deriving unit configured to derive a value of a radio parameter corresponding to currently measured statistical data from predetermined correspondence relationship between the statistical data and the radio parameter. A value of the radio parameter set as office data in the base station is automatically updated to a value derived by the deriving unit. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026418 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHED BEAM ANTENNA COMMUNICATIONS - A system for processing an RF signal received via a plurality of antenna elements includes a connection arrangement for selecting a sub-set of a given number of RF signals received from the antenna elements as well as a processing arrangement for combining the received RF signals of the selected sub-set into a single RF signal for demodulation. The system includes an RF phasing circuit for producing selective combinations of the received RF signals by applying relative RF phase shift weights to the RF signals that are combined; each combination includes RF signals received from a number of adjacent antenna elements equal to the number of the RF signals in the sub-set to be selected. A radio performance estimator generates for each selective combination of RF signals at least one non-RF radio performance indicator representative of the quality of the RF signals in the combination. A decision block identifies the sub-set of received RF signals to be selected as a function of the one radio performance indicator generated for the selective combinations of the received RF signals. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026419 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK POWER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for controlling uplink transmit power in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method includes determining an uplink transmit power for each of the plurality of transmission channels, and sequentially allocating the determined uplink transmit powers to the transmission channels in a descending order of predetermined priority levels of the transmission channels, within a maximum available transmit power of the user equipment. The priority levels of the transmission channels are predetermined so that control channels, a sounding channel, a data channel, and a bandwidth request channel have priority levels in a descending order. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026420 | LAYER SHIFTING FOR UPLINK MIMO - Wireless communications methods and related apparatuses are provided. The methods include analyzing a report or a channel quality indicator in a multiple-in-multiple-out (MIMO) wireless communications system. In one aspect, the methods include determining whether layer shifting should be employed in view of the report or channel quality indicator. The methods also include enabling or disabling layer shifting in an uplink communication based on the report or the channel quality indicator. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026421 | ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSIONS IN COORDINATED MULTIPLE POINT COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate adaptively communicating data to wireless devices. An access point can precode a dedicated reference signal (DRS) for transmitting to a wireless device, and the wireless device can receive the precoded DRS. The wireless device can determine the precoder by estimating a channel of the DRS and can provide channel condition feedback to the access point. The access point can create data signals including a single or a burst of data transmissions according to the feedback and can precode the data signals using the same precoder. The wireless device can additionally decode the data signals using the precoder. Moreover, the access point can cycle through precoders according to a patterned, random, pseudo-random, and/or similar sequence. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026422 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CARRIER FREQUENCY IN MULTI-CARRIER/CELL SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for controlling a carrier frequency in a multi-carrier/cell system are provided. The method includes receiving Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) information of a carrier frequency reported by a terminal, determining whether to deactivate or activate the carrier frequency according to the CQI information, and instructing the terminal to deactivate or activate the carrier frequency according to a result of the determining. Thus, a certain carrier frequency is flexibly activated or deactivated in the multi-carrier/cell system through carrier frequency quality reporting and threshold comparison. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026423 | Robust Techniques for Upstream Communication Between Subscriber Stations and a Base Station - A number of features for enhancing the performance of a communication system, in which data is transmitted between a base station and a plurality of subscriber stations located different distances from the base station, are presented. The power transmission level, slot timing, and equalization of the subscriber stations are set by a ranging process. Data is transmitted by the subscriber stations in fragmented form. Various measures are taken to make transmission from the subscriber stations robust. The uplink data transmission is controlled to permit multiple access from the subscriber stations. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026424 | Triggering Migration of a Network Access Agent Associated with an Access Terminal - A method is provided for triggering migration of call session state information. The method includes determining whether to migrate a network access agent associated with an access terminal in a wireless communication system based on at least one of mobility information associated with the access terminal and status information associated with the wireless communication system. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026425 | USE OF MINIMAL PROPAGATION DELAY PATH TO OPTIMIZE A MESH NETWORK - The present technology relates to protocols relative to utility meters associated with an open operational framework. More particularly, the present subject matter relates to protocol subject matter for advanced metering infrastructure, adaptable to various international standards, while economically supporting a 2-way mesh network solution in a wireless environment, such as for operating in a residential electricity meter field. The present subject matter supports meters within an ANSI standard C12.22/C12.19 system while economically supporting a 2-way mesh network solution in a wireless environment, such as for operating in a residential electricity meter field, all to permit cell-based adaptive insertion of C12.22 meters within an open framework. Particular present features relate to the use of minimal propagation delay path to optimize a mesh network. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026426 | TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - In a transmission circuit used in a TDD scheme, a preset current is supplied from a current source to a detection diode via a switch that is made conductive during a reception period and made non-conductive during a transmission period. A determination is made if the output of the detection diode is within a predetermined specified range and, if the output is out of the specified range, a judgment is made that the detection diode is faulty. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026427 | METHOD AND APPARATUS IN RELAYING SYSTEM - An apparatus, comprising a channel estimator for estimating channel coefficients of communication channels of multiple-input-multiple-output communication, a precoder for applying the estimated channel coefficients to precode a transmit signal to cancel the impact of the communication channels on the transmit signal, a first controller for providing the transmit signal for multiple-input-multiple-output transmission in a first timeslot, a second controller for processing a multiple-input-multi-signal from the receive signal. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026428 | Method for Determining Possible Locally Switched Traffic Within a Cellular Network Site - The invention relates to a method for determining connected transmissions within a first site of a communications network comprising the steps of: -retrieving ( | 02-03-2011 |
20110026429 | Network Coded Data Communication - A data communication involves selecting a group ( | 02-03-2011 |
20110032831 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RADIO NETWORK PLANNING WITH HSDPA ANALYSIS - A system and method for radio network planning comprises a grid generator and a Monte Carlo analysis module. The Monte Carlo analysis module comprises a snapshot generation module which draws, for each snapshot and for each pixel, a statistical realisation from a distribution function relating to slow fading, and a snapshot evaluation module which establishes radio network parameters. The Monte Carlo analysis module further comprises a sub-snapshot generation module which generates at least one sub-snapshot for each evaluated snapshot result, and a sub-snapshot evaluation module ( | 02-10-2011 |
20110032832 | Internet Radio Broadcast Using Cellular - Aspects describe utilizing the Internet capability in mobile devices/networks to deliver broadcast multimedia to a device. The broadcast can be video, audio, and so forth. Initially the broadcast multimedia is transmitted at high data rates (and in unicast mode) in order for a buffer associated with mobile device to be built to a very long buffer length. When the long buffer length is reached, the multimedia can be delivered at real-time rates. The multimedia delivered at real times rates can be unicast mode or in multicast mode. If the buffer is depleted, a mobile device that is part of a multicast group can autonomously disassociated from the group until the buffer length is restored. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032833 | OPTIMIZATION OF TRAFFIC ROUTING FOR DATA CENTER SERVICES - Techniques and systems for providing optimization of traffic routing for data centers are disclosed herein. In some embodiments, a method may include identifying a plurality of available source sites and paths or routes between an online service provider (OSP) and a destination prefix. A traffic manager may measure a cost for each of the plurality of available paths. In some instances, the traffic manager may also measure a performance value for each of the available paths. The traffic manager may then select one of the available source sites and paths as a preferred source site and path that has a minimized cost for an instance of the performance value when compared to other paths of the plurality of available source sites and paths. In further embodiments, the traffic manager may rewrite a routing table and DNS mapping to implement the preferred source site and path as the default source site and path between the OSP and the destination prefix. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032834 | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving service in a wireless communication system - A method and apparatus transmits and receives a service in a wireless communication system by acquiring Quality of Service (QoS) information. A packet is received through a direct communication with a terminal equipment providing a service. When the received packet includes a new destination Internet Protocol (IP) address different from a previously received packet, one or more service quality identifiers corresponding to the received packet are identified. The identified service quality identifiers are transmitted to the terminal equipment, and a service quality identifier corresponding to a service category selected by a user from the identified service categories is received from the terminal equipment. QoS information corresponding to the received service quality identifier is determined and used to generate a radio link between the mobile equipment and a mobile communication network. And the service is received through the radio link. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032835 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR OBTAINING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR INFORMATION - Embodiments of the present invention include a method and base station for obtaining Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) information. One embodiment of the method includes: receiving, by a base station, quantized channel information, quantization error, Inter-Cell Interference (ICI) power and noise power fed back by each User Equipment (UE) after channel estimation; and estimating, by the base station, a CQI corresponding to each UE to obtain an estimated CQI value corresponding to each UE according to the quantized channel information, the quantization error, the ICI power and the noise power which are fed back by the UE as well as an instantaneous precoding vector or matrix of each UE. Through the embodiments, the base station can obtain more precise CQI information of each UE so as to select a precise modulation and coding scheme and to increase system throughput. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032836 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF AND PROGRAM - The present invention provides an information processing apparatus that, during data communication with a plurality of external apparatus, maintains the accuracy of the data communication and reduces the power consumed in the data communication, and a control method thereof. To accomplish this, the information processing apparatus sets a communication rate of data communication with a plurality of communicatively connected external apparatus, and measures a receiving interval between data packets received in the data communication with the external apparatus. Furthermore, the information processing apparatus determines whether or not the measured receiving interval exceeds a predetermined threshold. If the interval exceeds the predetermined threshold, the information processing apparatus maintains the currently set communication rate. If the interval does not exceed the predetermined threshold, the information processing apparatus changes the currently set communication rate to a faster communication rate. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032837 | SYNCHRONOUS CDMA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In one aspect, there is provided a method of processing a signal received using a wireless communication channel by a receiver in a wireless cellular network. In one embodiment, the method comprises receiving signal samples of a signal to be processed from a serving cell, identifying a second of dominant interfering cells generating an interfering signal, using a number of cells in the set to select an interference scenario, and using the selected interference scenario and at least one parameter related to the serving cell and the interfering cells to select a processing function for processing the signal. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032838 | MITIGATION OF CRS MISALIGNMENT IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for coordinated multipoint wireless communications. A technique for joint processing of misaligned reference signals in coordinated multipoint communications is provided. In one aspect, a cell may transmit an offsetting reference signal which, when processed by a receiving user equipment, at least partially cancels a first reference signal transmitted by the cell. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032839 | Multiple Rank CQI Feedback for Cellular Networks - Single user and multiuser MIMO transmission in a cellular network may be performed by a base station (eNB) transmitting either one, two, or more transmission layers. A user equipment (UE) receives a reference symbol from the base station. The UE processes the reference symbol with one or more of a plurality of precoding matrices to form a plurality of channel quality indices (CQI). The UE provides feedback to the eNB comprising one or more feedback CQI selected from the plurality of CQI and one or more precoding matrix indicators (PMI) identifying the one or more precoding matrices used to form each of the one or more feedback CQIs for two or more ranks. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032840 | ONE ACTIVITY REPORT FOR INTERCEPTION PURPOSES - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements for optimizing monitoring capacity in a telecommunication system comprising at least one information element receiving unit. One activity report request along with identities of a target to be monitored are received at the element receiving unit. At least two information elements belonging to a first element group, related to the specified target by different identities and comprise duplicate information are also received at the target. The element receiving unit selects one of the received at least two elements. | 02-10-2011 |
20110038268 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SHORT RANGE RF COMMUNICATION - A method transmitting a message over at least one of a plurality of channels of a communications network is provided. The method comprises the steps of detecting a presence of jamming pulses in the at least one of the plurality of channels. The characteristics of the jamming pulses in the at least one of the plurality of channels is determined wherein the determined characteristics define at least interstices between the jamming pulses. The message is transmitted over the at least one of the plurality of channels wherein the message is transmitted within the interstices of the jamming pulse determined from the step of determining characteristics of the jamming pulses. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038269 | Estimation method for loss rates in a packetized network - A method is provided, according to which data are collected on downstream packet losses at a single point in a network. From from the collected data, packet loss rates are estimated on at least two subnetworks downstream of the collection point. The respective subnetworks may differ by one or more links. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038270 | Method for facilitating latency measurements using intermediate network devices between endpoint devices connected by a computer network - Network latency measurements of RTP traffic are measured using an intermediate network device positioned between endpoints that do not necessarily support RTCP. During an active RTP stream between two endpoints, the intermediate device detects whether the endpoints are already providing their own RTCP packets and responding to RTCP packets from the other endpoint. If not, the intermediate device generates RTCP packets on behalf of the non-responsive or non-providing endpoint(s), acting as a proxy for the endpoint(s), so the packets appear to one endpoint as if they were generated by the other endpoint. Thus, if at least one endpoint supports RTCP, a single intermediate device is sufficient to generate the RTCP packets that allow the latency calculation to be performed. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038271 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UPLINK POWER CONTROL FOR A WIRELESS TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER UNIT UTILIZING MULTIPLE CARRIERS - A method and apparatus for determining uplink power in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU). The WTRU operates in a carrier aggregated system. The WTRU is configured to receive a plurality of uplink power parameters indexed to one of a plurality of uplink carriers and receive a transmit power control command indexed to the one of the plurality of uplink carriers. The WTRU is configured to determine a pathloss of the one of the plurality of uplink carriers and determine a transmit power for the one of the plurality of uplink carriers based on the plurality of power parameters, the transmit power control command, and the pathloss. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038272 | GENERALIZED EESM SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method for computing ECINR in communication systems, by calculating or measuring instantaneously CINR (yi) or per-tone CINR value for each channel and/or bandwidth and/or signal of interest, selecting κ and β parameters according to MCS and/or FEC block size used, calculating ECINR by using the CINR ((yi) or per-tone CINR values and the κ and β parameters with a generalized EESM formula, and providing a communication system with the updated γeff which is the ECINR value. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038273 | METHOD FOR DETECTING CONTINUOUS CHANNEL NOISE AND APPARATUS FOR USING THE SAME - The method for detecting continuous channel noise comprises the steps of: setting a threshold value of channel busy time and a threshold number of channel busy condition; setting a count value to an initial value; obtaining a measured value of the channel busy time during a beacon interval; determining whether the measured value of the channel busy time is larger than or equal to the threshold value of the channel busy time; if yes, the count value is increased by 1, and if not, the count value is reset to the initial value; and determining whether the count value is larger than or to equal to the threshold number of the channel busy condition; if yes, a noise disturbance alarm is generated, and if not, next channel busy time is obtained during a next beacon interval so as to determine whether the count value is increased or not. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038274 | Route information relay method and wireless terminal - Each node connected to an ad hoc network receives route information from an adjacent node. Each node obtains quality information indicating quality of a route indicated by the route information with respect to the received route information. Each node determines whether a plurality of route information items whose packet destination nodes are the same are received at a predetermined frequency. When it is determined that a plurality of route information items whose packet destination nodes are the same are received, each node compares quality information items of the plurality of received route information items, and selects a route information item corresponding to a quality information item indicating a highest quality as a comparison result. Each node relays the selected route information item to an adjacent node. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038275 | METHOD FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for monitoring a control channel in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: dividing a control region of a subframe into a common search space having a variable size and monitored by every user equipment (UE) within a cell and a dedicated search space having a variable size and including at least one UE-specific search space to be monitored by at least one UE within the cell, and monitoring a control channel within the common search space; and monitoring a control channel within the UE-specific search space included in the dedicated search space. The performance of an overall system can be improved by effectively monitoring a downlink control channel. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038276 | Relay Station, Radio Communication System, and Radio Communication Method - Realizing the position of a wireless communication terminal and guaranteeing stable communication quality and realizing a seamless handover while maintaining wireless communication. A relay station | 02-17-2011 |
20110038277 | METHOD AND EQUIPMENT FOR DETERMINING THE TRANSMISSION RESOURCE OF CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR - A method and equipment for determining the transmission resource of channel quality indicator are disclosed. They are applied in Time Division Duplex TDD system and Half Duplex-Frequency Division Duplex HD-FDD system when Discontinuous Reception DRX operation is adopted. The method includes the following steps: determining the location of the downlink subframe where the start point of monitoring Physical Downlink Control Channel PDCCH in DRX cycle is located; determining whether the transmission resource used for transmitting the Channel Quality Indicator CQI is an uplink subframe previous to the determined location or one or more uplink subframes after the determined location. Availability of the CQI information when performing downlink schedule is guaranteed, and the transmission resource used for transmitting CQI can be effectively saved. | 02-17-2011 |
20110044182 | Reporting Operational Information Of A Network Device - A method for reporting operational information in a network is described herein. The network may include a network device and a network management server. The network device may detect an event triggering reporting of a modification to a configuration of the network device. A report message initiated by the network device may be provided. The report message may identify the modification to the configuration. The modification to the configuration may be committed after providing the report message. In another embodiment, the network device detects an event indicating a performance condition in the network device. A report message initiated by the network device is generated. The report message may include a state of the network device at the time of the event. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044183 | RESOURCE METRIC QUANTIZATION IN WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATIONS - A resource metric quantization is described that has use for resources of wireless data communications system. In one example the quantization include measuring a signal parameter for a plurality of frequency partitions, setting a first resource metric for a first frequency partition equal to a first value, determining a second and a third resource metric for a second and third frequency partition, respectively, based on comparing the measured signal parameter for the second and third frequency partitions to the measured signal parameter for the first partition, encoding a second and a third resource metric, and transmitting the encoded resource metrics to a remote wireless station. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044184 | SWITCHING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT NETWORKS BASED ON DEVICE CAPABILITIES - Methods and systems provided herein allow a communication session to be established on an optimal communication network and subsequently transferred to alternative networks if conditions dictate that such a change is necessary or desirable. The types of conditions which may be considered when identifying the optimal communication network or the alternative network include conditions related to the operation of a user device, communication profiles of the user, resources available on other networks, and the like. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044185 | Method in a Communication Device Providing Data Services Over a Packet Access Radio Interface and a Communication Device - A method in a communication device ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110044186 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVELY GENERATING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for generating a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes receiving a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) index and resource allocation information of a traffic channel and calculating a spectral efficiency at a particular time point, determining a temporary CQI index having a spectral efficiency closest to the calculated spectral efficiency in an index set, reading a CQI metric a time τ before the particular time point, determining, if the temporary CQI index is reported at the particular time point, an error rate based on the CQI metric, the error rate being a probability of an error occurring in a traffic channel after the time τ, receiving an error check result of the traffic channel transmitted at the particular time point and calculating a new error rate by applying a weight to the error check result and the error rate, and determining a CQI index to be fed back to a transmitter using the new error rate. Hence, the CQI index which maximizes spectral efficiency is determined and a Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) acknowledgement (ACK)/negative acknowledgement (NACK) probability is directly estimated adaptively according to a change in channel, thereby providing useful performance in various channel environments. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044187 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A RADIO STATION IN A MOBILE NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for operating a secondary station comprising means for communicating with a primary station, the method comprising receiving from the primary station an interference status report, said interference status report comprising an spatial indication being representative of a spatial characteristic of the interference, measuring channel characteristics on reference symbols, and interpreting the measured channel characteristics with help of the interference status report. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044188 | TIMING ADJUSTMENTS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods, systems, apparatus and computer program products are provided to improve synchronization of information units communicated in a wireless communication system. Timing misalignment in the transmission of adjacent information units can produce gaps or overlaps in the transmitted information. In a long-term evolution (LTE) wireless communication system, such gaps and overlaps can be eliminated or reduced by adjusting the lengths of a cyclic prefix portion of one or more transmitted symbols. This Abstract is provided for the sole purpose of complying with the Abstract requirement rules that allow a reader to quickly ascertain the disclosed subject matter. Therefore, it is to be understood that it should not be used to interpret or limit the scope or the meaning of the claims. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044189 | METHOD FOR SINR MEASUREMENT WITH CONTROLLING RESIDUAL GAIN IN HSPA/HSDPA SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF - An apparatus and method for measuring a Signal-to-Interference-plus-Noise Ratio (SINR) by controlling a residual gain in a high speed packet access system are provided. The apparatus includes a gain controller for measuring an intensity of a signal outputted from a residual gain controller, for outputting a gain control signal for controlling a gain of an interval of a preset gain resolution of a radio frequency integrated circuit according to the intensity of measured signal, and for outputting a residual gain value for controlling a residual gain less than the preset gain resolution, wherein the radio frequency integrated circuit gain-controls a signal inputted according to the gain control signal, and the residual gain controller multiplies the gain-controlled signal by the residual gain value to compensate the residual gain. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044190 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus comprising a table configured to include a correspondence between at least one of a first identifier that identifies a port from which frames are received, a second identifier that identifies a port from which frames are transmitted, a third identifier that identifies a flow related to a frame received, and a fourth identifier that identifies a flow related to a frame to be transmitted, and a fifth identifier that is different from the first to fourth identifiers, a counter equipped for each fifth identifier, and a controller configured to search the table, each time a frame is received or transmitted, for a fifth identifier by using any one of the first to fourth identifiers related to the frame as a key, and increment a counter corresponding to the fifth identifier by an amount. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044191 | BAND-EFFICIENT METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING A COMMUNICATION SIGNAL USING A CHANNEL BAND - A method for transmitting a further signal on a channel having a transmission band including a plurality of used subbands occupied by transmission signals. According to the method, the presence of free subbands not occupied by the transmission signals is detected and the further signal is transmitted using the free subbands. According to the method, the further signal is multiplexed by using a CDMA code and transmitted on OFDM subcarriers having frequencies within the free subbands. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044192 | Uplink Scheduling DSF Wireless Networks - In network-based uplink scheduling, users are scheduled by the network for uplink communication between a user side and a network side. In this context, the invention provides an efficient estimation of User Equipment (UE) buffer status on the network side such as at Node B ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110044193 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO COORDINATE TRANSMISSIONS IN DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS SYSTEMS VIA USER CLUSTERING - Systems and methods are described for coordinating transmissions in distributed wireless systems via user clustering. For example, a method according to one embodiment of the invention comprises: measuring link quality between a target user and a plurality of distributed-input distributed-output (DIDO) distributed antennas of base transceiver stations (BTSs); using the link quality measurements to define a user cluster; measuring channel state information (CSI) between each user and each DIDO antenna within a defined user cluster; and precoding data transmissions between each DIDO antenna and each user within the user cluster based on the measured CSI. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044194 | BASE STATION APPARATUS - A receiver receives a request for channel assignment from a terminal apparatus. Triggered by the receipt of the request by the receiver, a channel measurement unit performs carrier sense of channels defined by a combination of a frequency resource and a temporal resource. The channel measurement unit assigns any of the channels, on which the carrier sense has been performed, to the terminal. When a plurality of channels are assigned to the same terminal apparatus, a channel to be assigned is selected in consideration of the channels which have already assigned to the terminal apparatus. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044195 | Method and a Transceiver for HARQ Failure Detection - The present invention relates to a method and to a transceiver ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110044196 | USER EQUIPMENT TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A user equipment terminal for communicating with a base station apparatus using HARQ for uplink includes a transmission unit configured to transmit an uplink signal to the base station apparatus; a reception unit configured to receive a control signal indicating whether the uplink signal is to be retransmitted; and a decoding unit configured to consider the control signal as ACK when signal reliability of the control signal is low, and determine whether the control signal indicates ACK or NACK based on information in the control signal when the signal reliability of the control signal is high. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044197 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING AND EXTRACTING PROXIMITY IN NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for measuring and extracting proximity in networks are disclosed. In one embodiment, the present method receives a network from a user for analysis and extraction of a smaller proximity sub-graph. The method computes a candidate sub-graph and determines at least one Cycle Free Escape Conductivity (CFEC) proximity of at least two nodes in accordance with the candidate sub-graph. The method then extracts and presents a proximity sub-graph that best captures the proximity. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044198 | QCI Mapping at Roaming and Handover - The technology pertains to wireless telecommunications systems in which a quality of service is handled for a service provided to a user equipment when the user equipment transitions from being served by a source network to being served by a target network. The quality of service is handled even if the source and the target networks implement proprietary QCIs. In general, a source QCI, which may be proprietary to the source network, is remapped to a predetermined QCI that identifies a set of predetermined QCI characteristics whose values are similar to the source QCI characteristics identified by the source QCI. The predetermined QCI and the set of predetermined QCI characteristics are used by the target network to provide the service to the user equipment after the transition. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044199 | Method for Determining the Round Trip Time - A method in a first node for determining a round trip time of a signal sent between the first node and a second node includes sending a first signal to the second node and receiving a second signal, corresponding to the sent first signal. The second signal is sent from the second node as a response to the sent first signal. The method also includes computing the round trip time of the signal and sending the computed round trip time to the second node. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044200 | Conversational Interactivity Measurement and Estimation for Real-Time Media - An apparatus ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110051605 | FLOW THROUGH CALL CONTROL - Methods, systems, and devices are provided that propose interlacing an RTP communication with a tag that is used to identify the RTP communication within a continuous group or stream of many other RTP communications and other call control communications. The tags can be used for post processing of the RTP communication, thereby obviating the need for real-time processing of the RTP communication. This helps reduce latency in systems that are trying to control the RTP stream for various reasons. Furthermore, temporal relationships between RTP communications and other associated data streams becomes much easier to manage. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051606 | Method, System and Apparatus for Efficient Packet Analysis - A system, method, and apparatus that efficiently and stringently analyze messages are provided. A message's properties are encoded into a bitwise representation of fixed length, which is compared to a binary representation of each rule from a release policy to determine if the rule is satisfied. This process is efficient and allows near real time comparisons and decisions. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051607 | CAPACITY/AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION WITH PACKET DISPERSION - Consistent with embodiments of the present invention, systems and methods are disclosed for estimating at least one of a capacity and an available bandwidth of a communications path. Methods may be disclosed comprising: sending a measurement request to a computing device on a network and receiving data responsive to the measurement request. At least one of a capacity and an available bandwidth of a communications path from the sender to the computing device may be estimated based on the received data. The estimation may be sent to the computing device and stored. Transmission settings may be adjusted based on the estimation. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051608 | WIRELESS LOCATION DETERMINATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Disclosed herein is a wireless location determination system and method. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051609 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND MOBILE STATION CONTROL METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A disclosed base station apparatus in a mobile communication system includes a receiving unit receiving a random access channel transmitted from a mobile station apparatus, an acquisition unit acquiring random access channel quality based on a measurement of the received random access channel or a report from the mobile station apparatus, a calculation unit calculating random access channel parameters based on the acquired random access channel quality, and a broadcast unit broadcasting the calculated random access channel parameters to all the mobile stations within a coverage area of the base station. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051610 | MAINTAINING AN IP CONNECTION IN A MOBILE NETWORK - A method for IP [=Internet Protocol] communication between a mobile terminal and its correspondent node in a mobile radio network. The method comprises establishing ( | 03-03-2011 |
20110051611 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and device for processing channel quality information in a communication system is provided. A preset sampling range is determined to estimate a channel quality of a sub-frame in a quality measurement mode. The sampling rate is calculated based on the interval between samples in the channels of the sampling range. The samples are detected in the channels according to the sampling rate. The channel quality information is measured in the samples. A receiving apparatus can maintain the cannels for measuring the channel quality information, i.e., the number of samples, in a certain range. The receiving apparatus can reduce the number of samples, thereby reducing the time required for measuring the channel quality information by a preset measurement time interval. The receiving apparatus can increase the number of samples, thereby raising the accuracy of the channel quality information. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051612 | ARRANGEMENT FOR DETERMINING A CHARACTERISTIC FORM OF AN INPUT SIGNAL - A receiver and method for determining a characteristic from an input signal is disclosed. A characteristic is at least one selected from a group comprising preamble detect, frequency offset and timing offset. The input signal comprises an IF frequency fIF and a preamble signal which is a sequence of M similar data symbols. The data symbols have a symbol period SP, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 2. The method comprises: -receiving N subsequent samples of the input signal, the N subsequent samples representing a part of the input signal approximating the symbol period SP, -rotating N subsequent samples to obtain N rotated symbols; -correlating the N rotated symbols with P correlation functions to generate a set of N×P correlation values, P being an integer greater than or equal to 2; and, -selecting a maximum correlation value from the set of N×P correlation values and determining the characteristic. The invention enables to perform an efficient antenna diversity circuit, which can be used for simultaneously timing offset and frequency offset estimation, and preamble detection for both antennae with only one radio unit. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051613 | METHOD FOR DETECTING THE CENTRAL FREQUENCY OF AT LEAST ONE CARRIER IN A WIDE-BAND DOWNLINK, AND CORRESPONDING COMPUTER SOFTWARE PRODUCT, STORAGE DEVICE AND MOBILE APPARATUS - A method is provided for detecting, using a mobile apparatus, the central frequency of at least one carrier of a wide-band downlink of a communication channel associated with a frequency band, wherein the at least one carrier belongs to the frequency band. The method includes a first step of measuring the value of an indicator representative of a power received by the mobile apparatus for a plurality of frequencies evenly spaced in the frequency band in order to obtain a spectrum of values of the indicator on the frequency band. The method includes a second phase of analyzing the spectrum of the indicator, which includes recognizing the shape of the at least one carrier in the indicator spectrum, and detecting the central frequency of the at least one carrier. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051614 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF IDENTIFYING THE PAYLOAD OF A DATA PACKET IN A TCP STREAM - A method and device of identifying payload of a data packet in a TCP stream. The method includes the steps of: calculating a payload signature according to information in header of the data packet in the TCP stream; comparing the payload signature with a pre-stored file signature; determining the payload of the data packet in the TCP stream as belonging to a file corresponding to the pre-stored file signature, in response to a match between payload signatures of multiple data packets and the pre-stored file signature. The present invention can monitor and identify TCP streams by using a more efficient and lower cost solution. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051615 | REAL-TIME CHARGING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING QOS AND CHARGING RULE OF SERVICE - A method for controlling charging condition change in real-time charging system includes sending, if the user terminal requests service, a QoS and charging rule request to be applied to the user terminal from the packet processing node to the real-time charging function server; sending, in response to the QoS and charging rule request, a QoS and charging rule response from the real-time charging function server to the packet processing node; sending, if charging condition change is detected, a charging rule change request from the real-time charging function server to the QoS and charging rule management server; sending, in response to the charging rule change request, a changed QoS and charging rule, from the QoS and charging rule management server to the real-time charging function server; sending the changed QoS and charging rule from the QoS and charging rule management server to the packet processing node; forwarding the changed QoS and charging rule from the packet processing node to the real-time charging function server; and reallocating, at the real-time charging function server, quotas for the user terminal according to the changed QoS and charging rule. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051616 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF NOTIFYING COMMUNICATION STATUS LEVEL - A wireless terminal device | 03-03-2011 |
20110051617 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A transmission weight generation unit generates a plurality of transmission weights, while a communication quality obtain unit obtains a value indicating communication quality of each eigenpath. A transmission control unit, if reducing a size of a packet, controls to transmit the packet by dividing it into a plurality of eigenpaths and selects a transmission weight such that respective communication qualities of the eigenpaths become equivalent. The transmission control unit, if not reducing the size of the packet, controls to generate a plurality of packets and to transmit the packets by the eigenpaths and selects a transmission weight which maximizes overall communication quality of the plurality of eigenpath. A transmission weight policy determination unit obtains a type of the packet at transmission of the packet and determines whether to reduce the size of the packet. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051618 | ADAPTIVE TIME-FILTERING FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN OFDM SYSTEM - Time filtering channel estimates in a wireless communication system, such as an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex (OFDM) system, can be used to improve the quality of channel estimates. The characteristics of an optimal channel estimate time filter can depend on the manner in which the channel estimate is determined as well as the time correlation of channel estimates. A receiver can implement an adaptive time filter for channel estimates in which the time filter response can vary based on channel estimate parameters. The channel estimate parameters can include the manner of determining channel estimates, a time correlation of channel estimates, and an estimated Doppler frequency. The time filter response can be varied continuously over a range of responses or can be varied discretely over a predetermined number of time filter responses. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051619 | CHANNEL-ASSIGNMENT FOR A MULTI-CHANNEL DUAL-RADIO MESH BACKHAUL - In an example embodiment, a method for determining backhaul channel assignments for multi-channel dual radio mesh nodes. The method comprises acquiring collision domain data for each access point of an associated mesh network. A cost function is calculated for each access point of the associated mesh network, the cost function assigning a weighted value for each access point in a collision domain based on a number of access points in the collision domain. Backhaul channel assignments for selected for each access point that minimizes the cost function. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051620 | Master/Slave Transceiver Power Back-Off - An apparatuses and methods of setting power back-off of a master transceiver and a slave transceiver is disclosed. One example of a method includes the master transceiver determining a master power back-off, and the slave transceiver determining a slave power back-off based on signals received from the master transceiver, and based on the master power back-off. One example of an apparatus includes a master transceiver and slave transceiver system. The slave transceiver is connected to the master transceiver through a cable. The master transceiver includes means for determining a master power back-off. The slave transceiver includes means for determining a slave power back-off based on signals received from the master transceiver, and based on the master power back-off. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051621 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a control signal in a wireless communication system includes allocating a first sequence to spread a first control signal in a radio resource, allocating a second sequence to spread a second control signal in the radio resource, selecting one of the first control signal and the second control signal, generating a spread control signal by spreading the selected control signal, and transmitting the spread control signal in the radio resource, wherein the first sequence and the second sequence use different cyclic shifts of a base sequence. | 03-03-2011 |
20110058489 | CDMA RECEIVING DEVICE AND SFN DETECTING METHOD USED FOR THE SAME - A CDMA receiving device is provided which can prevent erroneous determination of an SFN detection. The CDMA receiving device ( | 03-10-2011 |
20110058490 | DISTRIBUTED CACHE - ADAPTIVE MULTICAST ARCHITECTURE FOR BANDWIDTH REDUCTION - Disclosed is a method and system for maximizing the use of available bandwidth on an ISP communication system between an Internet Service Provider (ISP) and remote locations where at least one of the remote locations has a remote cache. An embodiment may monitor downstream unicast traffic, estimate the downstream unicast bandwidth used by unicast replies to the remote locations, and determine a remaining multicast bandwidth available to send multicast messages to the remote caches. An embodiment may create a pool of the cacheable objects being sent to the remote locations from the downstream traffic. An embodiment may determine bandwidth savings for each object in the pool of cacheable objects that would be achieved by remotely caching each object and prioritize the pool of cacheable objects based on the determined bandwidth savings for each object. An embodiment may create a queue of objects to multicast to the remote caches based on the pool of cacheable objects and the remaining multicast bandwidth and then multicast the queue to the remote caches. The remote caches may intercept and reply to requests for objects held in the remote cache without accessing the ISP communication system, thus, saving bandwidth on the ISP communication system. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058491 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY OF A CPE USING A CMTS - A system and method can manage network connectivity of a customer premises equipment (CPE) using a cable modem termination system (CMTS). The CMTS connects to the CPE via a cable modem, and connects to a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server via a network. The CMTS includes a connection unit that is operable to inform the CPE to request the DHCP server to get a new internet protocol (IP) address when the cable modem changes a radio frequency (RF) channel to different IP domains, and control the CPE to communicate with the CMTS according to the new IP address. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058492 | MANAGING RESOURCES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING AT LEAST ONE SCHEDULING CHANNEL - A wireless communication system for managing resources and a method for managing resources in a wireless communication system, which system comprises at least one base station ( | 03-10-2011 |
20110058493 | Differentiating wireless uplink bandwidth request by connection priority - Differentiating wireless uplink bandwidth request by connection priority. Embodiments herein relate to wireless communications, and more particularly to bandwidth management in wireless communications. Embodiments herein focus on multiplexing bandwidth requests on a common random access channel; specifically on contention resolution protocols for a common random access channel. Embodiments herein propose a differentiated back-off timer scheme to address the problems of QoS insensitivity and delay inequity, a set of back-off parameters to implement this scheme and a method of implementing existing well-known back-off strategies within this scheme's framework. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058494 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT TRANSFER OF DATA OVER A NETWORK - A method and apparatus for improving the efficiency of a network. A source node determines the propagation delay for data to reach a destination node. This enables the source node to transmit data more efficiently by ensuring a greater portion of a specific time slot is used for receiving data by the destination node. The destination node then determines if it is connected to any other nodes, and determines the propagation delay between the other connected nodes. The process continues until a node detects it is not connected to any other nodes for which a propagation delay has not been computed. Thus, each node on the network knows the propagation delay between each node, and the nodes utilize this information to more efficiently transfer data through the network. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058495 | Estimation of Speed and Direction of Travel in a WLAN Positioning System - A method for estimating the speed and bearing of a Wi-Fi enabled device using WLAN radio signals in a WLAN based location service is provided. A method used to estimate a speed of travel of a Wi-Fi enabled device comprises the Wi-Fi enabled device receiving signals transmitted by Wi-Fi access points in range of the Wi-Fi enabled device, and using the signals to estimate the speed of and/or direction of travel of the Wi-Fi enabled device. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058496 | VOICE-ACTIVITY DETECTION BASED ON FAR-END AND NEAR-END STATISTICS - Methods and apparatus of managing a communication system, wherein a decision regarding a level of activity at a first end is made based at least in part on the level of activity at the second end. In one embodiment, the energy level of a first-end audio signal is measured. The first end is declared voice-active if the first-end energy level is greater than or equal to a first threshold value. The first end is declared voice-inactive if the first-end energy level is less than the first threshold value. To determine the value of the first threshold value, the energy level of a second-end audio signal is measured. If the second-end energy level is greater than or equal to a second threshold value, the second end is declared voice-active, in which case the first threshold is maintained at a relatively high level. If the second-end energy level is less than the second threshold value, the second end is declared voice-inactive, in which case the first threshold is maintained at a relatively lower level. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058497 | ENHANCED RECOVERY PROCEDURE - A method and apparatus is provided for performing normal reordering or timer based stall avoidance or window based stall avoidance, for instance for a 3GPP HSPDA compliant user entity; the method furthermore comprising the steps of deriving an accumulated quality measure pertaining to the packet data being communicated from the transmitter entity to the receiver entity; comparing the accumulated quality measure with a predetermined threshold value; if the accumulated quality measure meets predefined criteria, moving the window corresponding to the highest received value forward to a position corresponding to the received sequence number; and setting the next expected value in the receiver window forward to a position corresponding to a rear position of the window determined by the window size. | 03-10-2011 |
20110063987 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USING AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating wirelessly from a mobile device to a remote receiver station is disclosed. The system includes a controller configured to monitor a status of the mobile device and, upon an initiation event, initiate a data transfer process to wirelessly communicate data to the remote receiver station. The system also includes a voice-band modem that, upon initiation of the data transfer process is configured to receive data for transfer to the remote receiver station, divide the source data into a collection source packets, and encode the data using a fountain code encoding protocol to form a series of encoded packets. The voice band modem is also configured to transmit the series of encoded packets to the remote receiver station as a burst including all of the source data and repeatedly transmit the encoded packets until receiving an indication that the series of packets including all of the source data has been received at the receiving station. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063988 | PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT IN A NETWORK SUPPORTING MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) - A method and apparatus to provide hop-by-hop tracking for a communication network is described. In one embodiment, a router verifies that a next downstream router supports tracking and in response, adds a tracking indicator and a timestamp to the data packet. An end router provides a compilation of all the timestamps back to the originating router. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063989 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CANCELING THE INTERFERENCE AMONG SIGNALS RECEIVED BY MULTIPLE MOBILE STATIONS - A Macro-Diversity HandOver (MDHO) solution based on multi-User MIMO is provided. Multiple base stations (BSs) serve the MDHO zone. By jointly precoding the modulated signals to be sent, the multiple BSs send the precoded signals to the multiple mobile stations (MSs) over the same time-frequency resources. The signal to be sent is transmitted to the multiple MSs in the MDHO zone. Due to the adoption of the precoding technique, each MS makes no or small interference to other MSs. Since the multiple BSs that serve one MDHO zone serve multiple MSs over the same time-frequency resources, the system capacity in the MDHO zone is greatly improved. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063990 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication device communicable with a first type and a second type of networks based on a first type and a second type wireless setting data respectively, includes: an obtaining section obtaining an identifier of an access point when a detection section detects the disconnection with the second type network through a certain access point; and a trial section trying to connect with the second type network through the certain access point if at least one second type wireless setting data stored in the second storage includes the obtained identifier, and the trial section trying to connect with the first type network through the certain access point any of the second type wireless setting data stored in the second storage does not includes the obtained identifier but the first type wireless setting data stored in the first storage includes the obtained identifier. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063991 | PHYSICAL LAYER SIGNALING OF CONTROL PARAMETERS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for signaling common user parameters in Very High Throughput (VHT) wireless systems. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063992 | AUTO PROBING ENDPOINTS FOR PERFORMANCE AND FAULT MANAGEMENT - In one embodiment, a method for automatically probing endpoint in a network for performance and fault management is provided. The method may comprise receiving instructions to auto probe endpoints, the instructions comprising probe characteristics and endpoint indicators. The method may further comprise querying an information base to identify endpoints and to obtain information on the identified endpoints that conform to the endpoint indicators. Based on the instructions and the information obtained for the identified endpoints, one or more probe packets may be generating to be transmitted to the identified endpoints. The generated probe packets may further be scheduled for transmission to the identified endpoints. New endpoints may continue to get discovered based on a notification mechanism which exists. Likewise, endpoints leaving the discovery domain may be identified. | 03-17-2011 |
20110069623 | Diversity Monitoring For Communication Network Circuits - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media are provided for monitoring circuit diversity within a communications network. Information is gathered regarding circuits within the communications network. Diversity rules for the circuits are received. The diversity rules may limit the sharing of network resource between primary and secondary circuit pairs. The information regarding the circuits is analyzed to identify violations of the diversity rules. A report on the violations of the diversity rules is generated. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069624 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TESTING MULTIPLE DATA PACKET TRANSCEIVERS TOGETHER DURING A PREDETERMINED TIME INTERVAL - A method and system for testing multiple data packet transceivers together during a predetermined time interval. A sequence of downlink data packets are generated and distributed as corresponding sequences of downlink data packets for reception by multiple data packet transceivers each one of which is responsive during at least a respective portion of a predetermined time interval to a respective one of the corresponding sequences of downlink data packets by transmitting a respective one of multiple corresponding sequences of uplink data packets. At least a portion of each of the corresponding sequences of uplink data packets are combined to provide a sequence of test data packets of which at least one signal parameter is measured. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069625 | PRIORITY-BASED, DYNAMIC OPTIMIZATION OF UTILIZED BANDWIDTH - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for performing priority-based codec conversions. Such conversions may implemented on calls sharing a link having limited bandwidth and may also be implemented after the call has been established but before the call has been terminated. The mechanisms provided herein maximize per-user call completion/quality and overall utilization of network bandwidth by dynamically adjusting encoding algorithms and transmission characteristics of calls using the constrained link. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069626 | NETWORK TESTING PROVIDING FOR CONCURRENT REAL-TIME INGRESS AND EGRESS VIEWING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC DATA - There is disclosed a system and method for implementing concurrent real-time ingress and egress viewing of network traffic data to evaluate the performance of a device under test. The method may be performed by a network testing system. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069627 | PEER-ASSISTED TRANSMITTER SIGNAL ATTRIBUTE FILTERING FOR MOBILE STATION POSITION ESTIMATION - Examples disclosed herein may relate to filtering one or more signal attributes from a given transmitter from use in mobile station position estimation operations based at least in part on variations in signal strength indicators for one or more wireless communications between the transmitter and a plurality of devices. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069628 | CONTENTION BASED MEDIUM RESERVATION FOR MULTICAST TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described including multicasting a medium reservation message and receiving a response to the medium reservation message. Also described are a method and apparatus including receiving a medium reservation message, determining if a medium is idle and transmitting a response to the medium reservation message responsive to the determination. Further described are a method and apparatus including receiving a medium reservation message, determining if a received network allocation vector in the medium reservation message has a value greater than a current network allocation vector, determining if transmission over a medium during a time interval is detected and resetting the current network allocation vector responsive to the determination of transmission. Yet further described are a method and apparatus including receiving a response to a medium reservation message, determining if a network allocation vector in the response is greater than a current network allocation vector and updating the current network allocation vector responsive to the determination. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069629 | PHYSICAL LAYER METRICS TO SUPPORT ADAPTIVE STATION-DEPENDENT CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK RATE IN MULTI-USER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure present physical layer metrics for supporting adaptive station-dependent channel state information feedback rate in multi-user communication systems. For certain aspects, the physical layer metrics may be calculated at the stations and communicated to the AP. For certain aspects, the metrics may be calculated at an access point utilizing information about channel characteristics of stations available at the access point. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069630 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COOPERATIVE SPECTRUM USAGE AMONG MULTIPLE RADIO NETWORKS - An approach is provided for cooperatively sharing spectrum. A threshold value associated with an acceptable level of interference to a first radio network is determined. A beacon message specifying the threshold value is generated for transmission from the first radio network to one or more nodes of a second radio network that is configured to exchange traffic for mobile services. The first radio network and the second radio network share spectral resources including adjacent bands for the respective radio networks, and the beacon message is used for controlling the level of interference to the first radio network caused by the one or more nodes of the second radio network. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069631 | Technique for Radio Resource Management - A technique for radio resource management is proposed for controlling a wireless transceiver in a cellular communication system that comprises a scheduling channel configured to transport relative scheduling grants for signalling adjustments in transmission resources previously granted to the wireless transceiver. A method embodiment of this technique comprises the steps of deriving an amplitude parameter indicative of an instantaneous amplitude level of the scheduling channel, determining a threshold value taking into account the amplitude parameter, processing a scheduling signal received over the scheduling channel to obtain a signal sample comprising a relative scheduling grant, and subjecting the signal sample to a threshold decision based on the threshold value to decode the relative scheduling grant. | 03-24-2011 |
20110075575 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING A TRANSMISSION SIGNAL, IN PARTICULAR A MOBILE RADIO SIGNAL - In sending a transmission signal, in particular a mobile radio signal, to a receiver, the transmission signal is processed according to a modulation coding scheme MCS and subjected to amplitude limited to obtain a specified ratio of maximum to average transmission power PAR. A limit value EVM for an error in the transmission signal is matched to transmission conditions for the transmission signal, according to demand, in such a way that a maximum signal to interface ration is achieved at a receiver. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075576 | WIRELESS LINK QUALITY MONITORING IN NETWROK-ENABLED TVs - A networked TV gathers information pertaining to the quality of a wireless link over which the TV receives streamed multimedia content, and presents an indication of the quality to a user, selectively blocks content from display if the quality falls below a threshold, and/or reports poor link quality to a network server for diagnostic action by technical personnel. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075577 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO MEASURE THE PERFORMANCE OF A DE-JITTER BUFFER - Systems and methods to measure the performance of a de-jitter buffer are disclosed. In a described example, a method to measure adaptive de-jitter buffer performance includes transmitting a known audio signal via a plurality of packets over a packet-based network, recording a received signal based on the known audio signal, and analyzing the recorded signal to determine one or more of a lower de-jitter buffer size, an upper de-jitter buffer size, a de-jitter buffer expansion speed, or a de-jitter buffer contraction speed based on the recorded signal and the known signal. The example method further includes comparing the one or more of the lower de-jitter buffer size, the upper de-jitter buffer size, the expansion speed, or the contraction speed to a performance requirement, and correcting communication network performance based on the comparison. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075578 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SETTING ROUTING PATH CONSIDERING HIDDEN NODE AND CARRIER SENSE INTERFERENCE, AND RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF - Disclosed are a method and a system for setting a routing path in consideration of hidden nodes and carrier sense interference. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075579 | Method and apparatus for delay management in wireless communication - A method is provided for determining an allowed delay budget for the air interface portion of a communications link, the communications link comprising one or more air interface portions and a network portion. In particular, the method of the invention operates in a wireless communication system comprising an air interface portion and a network portion, and includes (1) determining a network delay for calls in the system on a per-call basis; and (2) apportioning an air-link delay budget for ones of calls in the system so as to maintain approximately equal total delay for all calls. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075580 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED CONTROL OF SPECTRUM POWER IN A MULTI-CELL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for distributed control of spectrum power in a multi-cell communication system are provided. A plurality of cells included in a multi-cell communication system may be grouped into a plurality of groups. Cells included in a first group may iteratively calculate spectrum powers to perform dynamic spectrum management (DSM) scheme in calculation sub-frames. The cells included in the first group may also perform a user scheduling. Spectrum powers determined by cells included in a second group and user scheduling results of the cells in the second group may be held static. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075581 | Wireless transmission system, wireless communication device and wireless transmission method - Disclosed herein is a wireless transmission system including a plurality of antenna pairs; a demodulation functional unit; and a transmission characteristic correction unit. The plurality of antenna pairs each including a transmission antenna and a reception antenna. A wireless signal transmitted from a transmission antenna directly arrives as a desired wave at a corresponding reception antenna. Meanwhile, a wireless signal transmitted from a different transmission antenna directly arrives as an unnecessary wave at the reception antenna. The demodulation functional unit corresponding to each antenna pair demodulates a modulation signal received by the reception antenna. The transmission characteristic correction unit carries out correction calculation based on a transmission characteristic of a transmission space between the transmission and reception antennae based on demodulation signals demodulated by the demodulation functional units to acquire an output signal corresponding to a transmission subject signal. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075582 | DELAY TIME MEASUREMENT APPARATUS, STORAGE MEDIUM STORING DELAY TIME MEASUREMENT PROGRAM AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A CPU executes a process including determining a core node among plural relay nodes on a basis of route information, acquiring a first and a second packets flowing between a server and a terminal apparatus, the second packet being transmitted on a basis of the first packet, calculating a first delay time on a basis of the first and the second packets, the first delay time relating to packet transmission between the server and the terminal apparatus, transmitting a third packet to the core node, receiving a response to the third packet from the core node, calculating a second delay time on a basis of the third packet and the response, the second delay time being a delay time of the core node, and calculating a third delay time being a delay time of an end node on a basis of the first and the second delay times. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075583 | ROUTE CONTROL METHOD AND ROUTE CONTROL SYSTEM - A route control system includes a status measuring unit, a cost management unit, a route determining unit, and a route setting unit. The status measuring unit checks a status of each node included in a network. The status is a wake state or a sleep state. The cost management unit updates a link cost for a link connected to a node in the wake state to a value smaller than any link cost for a link connected to a node in the sleep state. The route determining unit determines an optimum route connecting a first terminal to a second terminal. A sum of the link costs for the optimum route is lowest among the link costs for other available routes connecting the first terminal to the second terminal. The route setting unit sets a requested data flow in the optimum route. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075584 | SWITCH DEVICE AND LOOP DETECTION METHOD IN A RING NETWORK SYSTEM - A switch device used in a ring network operating based upon a protocol prescribed to prevent a loop from occurring includes: a transmission section that periodically transmits a predetermined control frame defined in the protocol out to a communication line in the ring network; a reception section that receives a control frame from the ring network; and a determination section that determines the occurrence of a loop when source address information in the received control frame is identical to address information on the transmission section and also when the received control frame is a predetermined control frame defined in the protocol. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075585 | RELIABILITY METRICS IN AN IP NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to characterizing reliability associated with a network. To characterize the reliability, an edge-pair reliability metric is determined for service edge point pairs. An end-to-end reliability metric is computed based on a distribution of the edge-pair reliability metric for the service edge point pairs and a threshold value. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075586 | Method of Inter-System Coexistence and Spectrum Sharing for Dynamic Spectrum Access Networks-On-Demand Spectrum Contention - This invention relates to cognitive radio based wireless communications of dynamic spectrum access networks, and more particularly to a method of addressing inter-systems (cells) coexistence and spectrum sharing. The described method of spectrum sharing called On-Demand Spectrum Contention, integrates Dynamic Frequency Selection and Transmission Power Control with iterative on-demand spectrum contentions and provides fairness, adaptability, and efficiency of spectrum access for dynamic spectrum access systems using active inter-system coordination. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075587 | OFDM SYSTEM WITH REVERSE LINK INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION - A new method of performing interference estimation to allow the data packets to be efficiently delivered in an OFDM system. The interference estimation is performed on average over each frame for each mobile station individually in both frequency and time domains. Based on the estimated interference, the CIR can be determined by the BTS based on channel response estimates made by the BTS, or by the MS based on channel response estimates made for the uplink assuming a symmetrical channel. Numerical results show that the CIR estimation error could be very small if a sub-channel is considered as the minimum transmission unit. In terms of the aggregate throughput, the interference estimation method can provide a significant gain. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075588 | PACKET LATENCY ESTIMATION - An intermediary node is adapted for receiving a sequence of packets from a server, wherein the intermediary node comprises a time estimator adapted for performing the following steps—resolving the sequence number (k) and time of arrival to the intermediary node for at least a plurality (q) of incoming packets; establishing the frame period of the incoming packets (T); establishing a sequence of normalized packet arrival times (e | 03-31-2011 |
20110080838 | Methods and Arrangements in a Mobile Telecommunication Network - Methods and apparatus for distributing available transmit power in a user equipment (UE) to avoid violation of UE power limitations on a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) and a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) are described. Available power for transmission on at least the PUCCH is determined and at least one power headroom report indicating available power for transmission on at least the PUCCH is transmitted to a base station. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080839 | DATA PRE-PAID IN SIMPLE IP ROAMING - The described embodiments of the present invention outline two solutions to the problems described above regarding simple IP data access for pre-paid subscribers. The first solutions includes a method for providing pre-paid simple IP data service to a subscriber in a network, including: sending an access request from a point of attachment in an access network capable of providing an IP network access to a home network remote authentication server which deploys a Pre-Paid Client (PPC) and receiving in the point of attachment an access request response from the home network remote authentication server. The second solution includes a method for providing pre-paid simple IP data service to a subscriber in a network, including: sending an access request from a Mobile Station (MS) which deploys a Pre-Paid Client (PPC) to a home network remote authentication server and receiving in the MS an access request response from the home network remote authentication server. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080840 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING NETWORK CONDITIONS - A system and a method determine network conditions. The system includes a server computer and a client computer. The server computer is configured to transmit data packets comprising a data object from the server computer to the client computer. The client computer includes a transmission latency detector and a transmission bandwidth detector. The transmission latency detector uses transmission time and receipt time values to determine the changes in time it takes selected portions of the data object to be transmitted from the server computer to the client computer. The transmission bandwidth detector uses identified back-to-back data packets to determine the transmission bandwidth between the server computer and the client computer. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080841 | System and Method for Estimating Positioning Error within a WLAN-Based Positioning System - The invention features a method of estimating an expected error of a position estimate for use in a WLAN positioning system that estimates the position of a WLAN-enabled device. The WLAN-enabled device receives signals transmitted by a WLAN access point in range of the WLAN-enabled device. The method estimates the position of the WLAN-enabled device based on the received signals from the WLAN access point in range of the WLAN enabled device. The method also estimates an expected error of the position estimate based on characteristics of the WLAN access point in range of the WLAN enabled device, wherein the expected error predicts a relative accuracy of the position estimate. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080842 | BINDING/UNBINDING PROCESSING METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS - A binding/unbinding processing method, system and apparatus are disclosed. The binding processing system includes: an Internet Protocol (IP) edge node and an Access Node (AN). The IP edge node is configured to: monitor received Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) messages, after monitoring a specific DHCP message, forward the specific DHCP message to all ANs corresponding to bound links, where the specific DHCP message is a DHCP ACK or DHCP REPLY message. The AN is configured to: receive the specific DHCP message sent by the IP edge node, parse and obtain an IP or Media Access Control (MAC) address carried in the specific DHCP message, and bind a port of the AN to the IP or MAC address according to the obtained IP address or MAC address. The present disclosure implements the binding/unbinding of an AN port to/from an IP or MAC address in inter-AN binding scenarios. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080843 | Transparent Network Traffic Inspection - Methods and systems are disclosed for providing parties with levels of transparency into filtering functionality of network traffic inspection implementations. Embodiments include receiving a filter change request from a subscriber over a network that defines a modification to a set of filter criteria for filtering network traffic, the filter criteria being stored in association with the subscriber in a filter criteria data store; updating the set of filter criteria in the filter criteria data store as a function of the filter change request; receiving a content dataset relating to the network traffic; identifying the content dataset as being associated with the subscriber; retrieving the set of filter criteria associated with the subscriber from the data store; and filtering the network traffic as a function of the set of filter criteria. Embodiments further provide layers of access for different entities to the filtered traffic. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080844 | Adaptative Multi-Carrier Code Division Multiple Access - A system for performing adaptative multi-carrier code division multiple access (AMC-CDMA) includes first circuitry and modulator circuitry. The first circuitry determines a channel performance metric for each of a plurality of channels. The first circuitry determines at least one parameter of bit loading for each of the channels based on the channel performance metric. The modulator circuitry modulates AMC-CDMA signals using the parameters for bit loading in each of the channels for transmission over a wired connection. | 04-07-2011 |
20110085452 | UPSTREAM BANDWIDTH LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICE - A measurement device is provided for measuring an upstream bandwidth. The measurement device includes a return path extending at least a portion of a distance between a supplier side connector and a user side connector. A coupler is connected within the return path, the coupler providing a secondary path. A detection circuit is connected electrically downstream the coupler. A level detector is connected electrically downstream the detection circuit, and a microprocessor is connected electrically downstream the level detector. The microprocessor includes a first buffer and a second buffer. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085453 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING AND TRANSMITTING PILOTS - Sets of communications resources, e.g., sets of peer discovery resources, in a peer to peer communications system may be use concurrently by multiple transmitting devices. The communications system supports a plurality of different pilot sequences. Multiple transmitting devices may transmit their signals on the same set of communications resources, but with different pilot sequences. This approach allows receiving devices to distinguish between multiple signal sources, e.g., wireless terminals, using a shared communications resource. A wireless communications device monitors a plurality of different sets of communications resources and selects, e.g., based on received energy levels, a set of communications resources from said plurality of different sets of communications resources to use for communication. The communications device further selects one of a plurality of different pilot sequences to use for said communication and transmits pilot signals using the selected pilot sequence and at least a portion of the selected set of communications resources. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085454 | System and Method for Auto 10BASE-T/10BASE-Te Selection Based on Cable Characteristics - A system and method for auto 10BASE-T/10BASE-Te selection based on cable characteristics. IEEE 802.3az defines a new 10BASE-Te PHY type for energy efficiency that runs on Category 5 or better cabling. Configuration of a PHY that supports both 10BASE-T and 10BASE-Te operating modes is based on measurements that provide an indication of channel characteristics. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085455 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CHANNEL UTILIZATION - Methods and apparatus for determining a portion of a channel, e.g., a peer discovery channel, to use in a communications network, e.g., an ad hoc peer to peer network, are described. In the communication network, the channel includes a recurring set of time/frequency resources. A device monitors the congestion level and decides to use a whole channel or a fraction of a channel (e.g., ½. ¼) as a function of the congestion level. The device may change the fraction of the channel it occupies as the congestion level changes. The device broadcasts control information indicating the fraction of the channel it occupies. The device may be a mobile wireless terminal. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085456 | Signal Egress Alarm - Notification of a detected potential egress signal from a Broadband Communications System (BCS) is expedited by detection of signal Strength at a mobile detector which is above a user-specified threshold. When a potential egress signal having a strength above a user-specified threshold is detected, it is reported with other, lesser strength egress signals, immediately over a wireless link to a central server which is dedicated to a given BCS or which provides a notification service to a plurality of such systems. The central server may provide additional processing such as for authenticating a detected signal as an egress signal and/or estimating egress signal strength at a shielding flaw and, responsive to a detected signal having a signal strength above the user-specified threshold, sending notifications of the signal egress detection or shielding flaw a user-specified number of times at user-specified intervals while the signal egress persists or until earlier terminated. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085457 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING USER EQUIPMENTS ON DIFFERENT SYSTEM BANDWIDTHS - Techniques for supporting communication for different user equipments (UEs) on different system bandwidths are described. In one design, a base station transmits first control information to support communication for at least one first UE on a first system bandwidth and transmits second control information to support communication for at least one second UE on a second system bandwidth, which overlaps the first system bandwidth. The base station transmits data to the first and second UEs on the first and second system bandwidths, respectively. In one design, the base station receives third control information from the first UE(s) and fourth control information from the second UE(s) on a third system bandwidth. The base station receives data from the first UE(s) on the third system bandwidth and receives data from the second UE(s) on a fourth system bandwidth, which overlaps the third system bandwidth. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085458 | DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION FOR EFFICIENT DECODING - Certain aspects of the present disclosure present techniques for generating a downlink control information (DCI) message which may be transmitted with a particular organization of a downlink control channel and techniques for receiving the same. The DCI message may support uplink enhancements such as single-user multiple input multiple output (SU-MIMO) and clustered DFT-S-OFDM, and may limit blind decoding operations at a user equipment. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085459 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WITH DIVERSITY CONTROL - A wireless communication device stores correspondence information that associates a plurality of operation modes previously selected for communication with a plurality of sender communication devices, with a plurality of identification information items of the sender communication devices. For data transmission to a destination communication device, the wireless communication device selects an operation mode that is previously selected for communication with the destination communication device using the correspondence information. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085460 | REPORTING OF TIMING INFORMATION TO SUPPORT DOWNLINK DATA TRANSMISSION - Techniques for reporting timing information to facilitate data transmission on a downlink are described. A user equipment (UE) may receive signals from a plurality of cells available for data transmission to the UE. Each cell may have a different propagation delay to the UE. The UE may determine timing information based on the received signals and may report the timing information to one or more of the cells. The timing information may include a receive time of each cell at the UE. The UE may receive a data transmission from at least one cell, which can be selected from the plurality of cells, based on the timing information. The at least one cell may provide a coordinated or a non-coordinated data transmission. A coordinated transmission mode may be determined based on the timing information and can include, for example, a joint transmission, a coordinated beamforming, or a coordinated silencing. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085461 | FLEXIBLE NETWORK MEASUREMENT - A method and a computer-readable storage medium are disclosed for flexible network measurement. Embodiments disclose receiving a network measurement request, transmitting portions of the request to network devices, configuring the network devices to collect metrics from packet data based on the portions of the request, and performing operations to generate metrics as a response to the network measurement request. Embodiments also disclose a flexible, dynamically configurable packet parser. Other embodiments are also disclosed. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085462 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION INDICATIVE OF TRAFFIC DELAY OF A WIRELESS LINK - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for providing information indicative of traffic delay of a wireless link are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085463 | REAL-TIME COMPARISON OF QUALITY OF INTERFACES - In some embodiments, a system and method for substantially real-time comparison of quality of interfaces by mobile devices over heterogeneous networks is disclosed. The method can be performed using a dynamic and rapid comparison by distributed hosts, using a minimal number of injected network packets, using minimal path quality metrics, which path quality metrics are independent of how a Qol is measured, and in a manner suitable for both wireline and wireless networks. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085464 | NETWORK PROCESSOR UNIT AND A METHOD FOR A NETWORK PROCESSOR UNIT - A method of and a network processor unit ( | 04-14-2011 |
20110085465 | METHOD AND SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR IF/IRAT MEASUREMENT ALLOCATION - The current invention relates to a method of searching and/or measuring on cells in a mobile communication device connected to a first cell in a network, the method comprising receiving a number of data-frames and a plurality of idle frames which can be used for cell search and/or measurement and wherein the plurality of idle frames intervenes the number of data-frames; receiving information regarding at least one further cell in said network; and based on the received information, determining for each of the at least one further cell a first part of at least one of said idle frames to search and/or measure on said at least one further cell. Further, the invention further relates to a device and a system. | 04-14-2011 |
20110090803 | Multi-Hop Network Having Reduced Power Consumption - The present disclosure is directed to networks having reduced power consumption characteristics and associated methods. In one aspect, a method for reducing power consumption in a multi-hop network can include receiving data at a plurality of primary nodes in a multi-hop network and transmitting the data from the plurality of primary nodes to a plurality of secondary nodes. Individual primary nodes have nearest neighbors at a defined distance and the secondary nodes are spaced at a distance that is greater than the defined distance away from individual primary nodes. Data is transmitted from a given primary node to a secondary node by skipping at least one intervening node and reducing power consumption of the wireless network. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090804 | Staged Port Initiation of Inter Switch Links - A fabric having switches interconnected with multiple parallel interswitch links can be configured using staged port bring up. Only one of the multiple parallel interswitch links between any two switches and the corresponding switch ports can be selected and initialized. The fabric can be configured with the selected ISLs. Once the fabric has stabilized, unselected ISLs and the corresponding switch ports can be incrementally initialized. The number of unselected ISLs to be initialized can be determined based on the available computing resources of the fabric switches. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090805 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS PROVIDING A DECOUPLED QUALITY OF SERVICE ARCHITECTURE FOR COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods which provide a decoupled quality of service (QoS) architecture for communications are shown. Embodiments implement a QoS technique which separates a packet scheduling function and a data packet mapping function in providing communications meeting desired QoS parameters. Accordingly, embodiments provide a QoS architecture in which a packet scheduler is used to determine data packet transmission priorities and in which a data mapper is used to allocate transmission frame space to data packets, wherein the packet scheduling and data mapping algorithms are decoupled or independent. A protocol data unit (PDU) pool is utilized to buffer data packets between the decoupled packet scheduler and data mapper of embodiments to facilitate their combined operation to provide desired QoS delivery. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090806 | RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT SIZE SELECTION IN DUAL CARRIER HSUPA - A method for using a flexible size radio link control (RLC) protocol data unit (PDU) on an uplink is described. A request for an RLC PDU is received from a medium access control (MAC) layer. Radio conditions for a first uplink carrier and a second uplink carrier are determined. A size of the RLC PDU is selected based on the radio conditions. The RLC PDU is generated. The RLC PDU is sent to the MAC layer. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090807 | Method and System for Analyzing Radio Performance During Over-the-Air Operation - An apparatus for determining operating characteristics of radio-frequency (RF) transmitting devices while the devices are in normal operation transmitting over-the-air RF signals. The apparatus comprises at least one signal sensor for receiving the RF signals, each sensor responsive to the RF signals received at a plurality of antennas or received at a directional antenna, an analyzer for determining signal parameters of received RF signals and for determining operating characteristics of the transmitting devices from the signal parameters, wherein each RF signal includes an identifier of the transmitting device, the apparatus using the identifier to link operating characteristics determined from the RF signals to the transmitting device, and a graphical user interface for displaying the operating characteristics for each transmitting device. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090808 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSPORT BLOCK SIZE DETERMINATION - Methods and apparatus for determining transport block sizes for relaying backhaul subframes from a relay node to a donor base station are described. A transport block size may be adjusted at a relay node by an adjustment factor. The adjustment factor may be based on parameters such as propagation delay between the relay node and donor base station, a multiplexing configuration of control and data information in a relay node subframe, a switching time in a relay node subframe between a downlink and an uplink partition of the subframe, and/or other channel or configuration characteristics. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090809 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES IN AN EXTENDED BANDWIDTH WIRELESS NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are disclosed in which a base station provides an extended bandwidth having an extension portion and a non-extension portion. The base station can indicate for a particular user equipment (UE) to utilize only a portion of the extended bandwidth. In this way, the extended bandwidth can include multiplexed resources directed to a plurality of UEs, improving capacity and/or throughput. Moreover, backwards compatibility with devices compatible with LTE Release 8 can be achieved, as those devices can be directed to utilize only the non-extension portion of the extended bandwidth. In one aspect, the base station indicates a system bandwidth including resource blocks associated with the non-extension portion and resource blocks associated with the extension portion, and the UE is not required to monitor more than a predetermined number of resource blocks to receive a downlink transmission. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090810 | METHOD FOR AQUIRING PROCESSING TIME OF WIRELESS SIGNAL - A base station resets a wireless signal processing time depending on the processing capability of a terminal, and determines the transmission position of a feedback signal for a data packet using the reset wireless signal processing time and transmits the same to the terminal. If the feedback signal indicates the success of reception of the data packet, the data packet can be processed using the reset wireless signal processing time, and the wireless signal processing time can be reset to a smaller value. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090811 | Available Bandwidth Estimation in a Packet-Switched Communication Network - A system and method for determining end-to-end available bandwidth of a path in a packet-switched communication network. A multi-rate packet chirp injector injects probe traffic packets at different probing rates, u, into the network utilizing a probe chirp. A receiver samples time separation of the probe traffic packets to generate time-separation samples, which are used to calculate relative inter-packet separation strain, ε, samples at different probing rates. An Expectation-Maximization, EM, analyzer utilizes an EM algorithm to identify useful strain ε samples and to estimate parameters of a line l | 04-21-2011 |
20110090812 | METHOD OF COLLECTING INFORMATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There are disclosed a method of and a system for collecting information related to operation of a radio communication system inexpensively and easily. A mobile radio terminal monitors a communication status of user communication, and detects as a trigger when the communication status has satisfied a predetermined condition. When a trigger is detected, the mobile radio terminal acquires a reception status of a radio signal and the position of the mobile radio terminal. The mobile radio terminal sends measured information including the reception status and the position to an information collecting server. The information collecting server receives the measured information from the mobile radio terminal and records therein the measured information which has been received. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090813 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND ARRIVAL DIRECTION ESTIMATION METHOD - A receiver having an array antenna estimates arrival directions of multiple paths that arrive with an angular spread. Consequently, arrival direction estimation accuracy can be ensured without increasing throughput even if the power every path is low by estimating an average arrival direction of an entire set of multiple paths having the angular spread from a result of one angular spectrum by multiple correlation operation units that perform mutual correlation operations with pilot signals for baseband signals received by the array antenna, a path detection unit that detects multiple arrival path receiving timings by generating a delay profile based on output of each of the correlation operation units, a path correlation value synthesis unit that synthesizes a correlation operation value calculated in the multiple correlation operation units and an arrival direction estimation unit that collectively estimates multiple path arrival directions using output of the path correlation value synthesis unit. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090814 | Apparatus And Method For Determining Timing For Transmissions - A communication network element ( | 04-21-2011 |
20110096673 | System and method for adaptive call management - A system for adaptive call management, comprising a network-connected call manager server and a call switching means coupled to the call manager server and adapted to deliver calls to a selected target via a plurality of media channels, wherein upon receipt of a call quality indicium from a call quality monitoring means associated a media channel, the call manager server selects a specific media channel, is disclosed. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096674 | AGGREGATE POLICING APPLYING MAX-MIN FAIRNESS FOR EACH DATA SOURCE BASED ON PROBABILISTIC FILTERING - In one embodiment, a method comprises calculating a corresponding data packet arrival rate for each of a plurality of data sources supplying data packets destined for a prescribed destination, the prescribed destination within a machine and the prescribed destination having a bandwidth capacity; calculating a guaranteed shared bandwidth rate for each data source based on assigning a corresponding selected portion of the bandwidth capacity relative to the corresponding data packet arrival rate; selectively passing each data packet from the corresponding data source as a passed data packet, or dropping the corresponding data packet, according to a calculated probability that the corresponding data packet arrival rate does not exceed the corresponding guaranteed shared bandwidth rate; and selectively filtering the supply of aggregated passed data packets, aggregated only from among the passed data packets supplied by the data sources, to the prescribed destination according to the bandwidth capacity of the prescribed destination. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096675 | QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) BASED SYSTEMS, NETWORKS, AND ADVISORS - Techniques and technologies for routing communications based on Quality of Service (QOS) related information. More particularly, this document discloses techniques and technologies for selecting communications paths which partially overlap other communication paths for which QOS related information has been measured. The techniques and technologies include determining, performance levels for path segments within the communication paths from the measured QOS information. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096676 | LOW LOSS LAYER TWO ETHERNET NETWORK - A method may include provisioning a first virtual connection between a first device and a second device, and provisioning a second virtual connection between the first device and the second device. A data flow is received and duplicated at the first device to generate duplicated data flows. The duplicated data flows are transmitted to the second device via the first virtual connection and the second virtual connection. The duplicated data flows are received at the second device via the first virtual connection and the second virtual connection. A performance characteristic of the data flow received via the first virtual connection is determined. The performance characteristic of the data flow received via the second virtual connection is determined. The data flow received via the first virtual connection or the data flow received via the second virtual connection is selected for forwarding based on the performance characteristics of the data flow received via the first virtual connection and the performance characteristic of the data flow received via the second virtual connection. The selected data flow is forwarded. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096677 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK DEDICATED CHANNEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling an uplink dedicated channel by a Node B in a mobile communication system. The Node B generates configuration decision information including a UE Transmission Power Headroom (UPH) included in scheduling information received from a User Equipment (UE), and determines if there is a need for a change in the uplink dedicated channel configuration information based on the configuration decision information. When there is a need for a change in the uplink dedicated channel configuration information, the Node B sends to a Radio Network Controller (RNC) the configuration decision information and a message for requesting a change in the uplink dedicated channel configuration information. The Node B receives changed uplink dedicated channel configuration information that the RNC generated based on the configuration decision information. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096678 | END-TO-END SERVICE QUALITY MONITORING METHOD AND SYSTEM IN A RADIO NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method and a system for service quality monitoring in a network comprising radio interfaces. The measurements are end-to-end measurements between the end user and chosen network element. The measurements are implemented using monitoring stations which can monitor the traffic passively or actively by transmitting test signals. The antenna beam directions of the monitoring stations can be controlled. The performance server works as a counterpart of the active tests. A reporting suite may define the performed measurements and it also collects the measurement data from different monitoring stations. Monitoring data from several corporate intranets can also be collected to an external server through internet connection. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096679 | CONTROL DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is, a wireless network that conducts wireless communications having superior latency and power-saving performance, while avoiding interference wave influences by using multiple channels. Besides conducting communications with wireless communication terminals | 04-28-2011 |
20110096680 | Method and Apparatus for Channel Quality Derivation - In one aspect, a method and apparatus derive channel quality estimates for given subcarriers in an OFDM signal, based on reference signal (RS) or other known-signal measurements made for another set of subcarriers. In at least one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus implements a method whereby it is configured for receiving reference information on the first set of subcarriers; generating the first channel quality estimates in the frequency domain, based on the received reference information; computing a power delay profile for the first set of subcarriers; and determining the second channel quality estimates either by extrapolating from the first channel quality estimates or as an average of the first channel quality estimates, depending on a delay spread of the power delay profile. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096681 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIGITAL CONTENT PROTECTION LOCALITY CHECK WITH ADAPTIVE TIMELINE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and system for data communication in a wireless network is provided. A wireless transmitter transmits a locality check message from a wireless transmitter to a wireless receiver over a wireless communication medium. Upon receiving a locality check response message from the wireless receiver, the wireless transmitter marks the locality check response message as valid even if it arrives after an original locality check time period since transmission of the locality check message, but before the end of an adjusted locality check time period. The adjusted locality check time period comprises said original locality check time period adjusted by delays in processing layers at the transmitter and wireless communication medium access delays in data communication between the wireless transmitter and the wireless receiver. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096682 | ACTIVE MULTI-PATH NETWORK REDUNDANCY WITH PERFORMANCE MONITORING - A receiving network node ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096683 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Efficient selection of an access point is performed in accordance with quality of service of wireless communication required for a wireless communication apparatus. To achieve this in a wireless network system that uses a plurality of access points, the access point suited to the quality of service of wireless communication required by the wireless communication apparatus is selected automatically when the access point to which the wireless communication apparatus will be connected is selected. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096684 | IDENTIFYING AN ORIGIN OF A DOCSIS UPSTREAM BURST - A method and an apparatus for identifying an origin of captured DOCSIS upstream bursts are disclosed. Upstream bursts are captured without knowing their allocated time slots in advance. Information from an upstream channel descriptor is used to generate RF waveforms of upstream burst preambles, which arc then correlated to the captured upstream waveforms to determine the type of captured upstream bursts without having to decode the latter. Once the type of the captured upstream bursts is determined, information from the upstream channel descriptor is further used to demodulate and decode the upstream burst, so that CPE MAC addresses can be extracted. From the extracted CPE MAC addresses, the origin of the captured upstream bursts can be identified. The identification of origins of captured upstream bursts assists in locating faults in the cable network. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096685 | PACKET MODE AUTO-DETECTION IN MULTI-MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SIGNAL FIELD TRANSMISSION FOR THE PACKET MODE AUTO-DETECTION, AND GAIN CONTROL BASED ON THE PACKET MODE - A method for automatically detecting a packet mode in a wireless communication system supporting a multiple transmission mode includes: acquiring at least one of data rate information, packet length information and channel bandwidth information from a transmitted frame; and determining the packet mode on the basis of the phase rotation check result of a symbol transmitted after a signal field signal and at least one of the data rate information, the packet length information and the channel bandwidth information acquired from the transmitted frame. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096686 | Apparatus and method for ramdom access channel transmission in wireless communication system - An apparatus is capable of transmitting a signal through a Random Access Channel in a wireless communication system. The method of transmitting a signal through a random access channel includes estimating a reverse channel status using a signal received through a forward link, determining whether to transmit a signal through a random access channel in consideration of the reverse channel status, and transmitting a signal through the random access channel when it is determined to transmit a signal through the random access channel. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096687 | Mechanism for Automated Re-Configuration of an Access Network Element - A mechanism for controlling resources and/or settings of an access network element like a base station is provided which allows an autonomous reconfiguration of, for example, the antenna configuration based on a set of performance indicators in a base station. The base station can reconfigure itself without the need of operator control so that during periods with low capacity demands the base station will reconfigure correspondingly, which may include a reduction of active cells by turning off the power for a part of the installed equipment. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096688 | Method of Operating an Access Network - A method of operating a first access network and a second access network is provided, wherein said access networks serve mobile terminals in an access area and the method comprises: selecting one of said first access network and said second access network on the basis of a power consumption assessment; performing a steering operation for the mobile terminals in said access area, comprising sending steering information to the mobile terminals, the steering information indicating to the mobile terminals to preferably use the non-selected access network not being selected; and setting the selected access network to a power-save mode. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096689 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING THE BANDWIDTH USED BY A QUEUE - A system determines bandwidth use by queues in a network device. To do this, the system determines an instantaneous amount of bandwidth used by each of the queues and an average amount of bandwidth used by each of the queues. The system then identifies bandwidth use by each of the queues based on the instantaneous bandwidth used and the average bandwidth used by each of the queues. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096690 | RECEIVER APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A receiver apparatus wherein the processing amount for CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) measurements in a communication system having a plurality of system bandwidths can be reduced. In this apparatus, a narrow band CQI measurement part ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096691 | RECEIVER APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A receiver apparatus wherein the processing amount for CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) measurements in a communication system having a plurality of system bandwidths can be reduced. In this apparatus, a narrow band CQI measurement part ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096692 | Method and Arrangement for a Communication Network for Performing Handover Decisions - The present invention related to a method and arrangement for performing handover decisions in a communication network, wherein the handover decisions are related to user equipment receiving packet data on a shared downlink traffic channel from a current serving cell. The method comprises the steps of providing ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096693 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - A method in a terminal for providing an ACK/NAK message to a base station is provided. The terminal counts the number of assigned downlink subframes detected from the base station resulting in k. The terminal then establishes whether each of a number of transport blocks comprised in the counted k downlink subframes is correctly received or not. In the case when each one of the transport blocks, comprised in the k downlink subframes is estimated as correctly received the terminal provides to the base station an encoded ACK message for the k subframes, which comprises k, the number of subframes. | 04-28-2011 |
20110103236 | TRANSMISSION METHOD OF CODE DIVISION MULTIPLEXING AND MULTIPLE ACCESS - The present invention relates to a code multiplexing method which employs the parallel linear or nonlinear coding whose coding rate is more than one for the multiplexing transmission. When the coding rate is more than one, the parallel input bits sequence and the parallel output bits sequence have a one-to-one relationship. The aforementioned parallel coding method is beyond the finite field, and all the parallel coding polynomial set is coprime with each other. The method includes the following steps: compositing the encoding matrix B which contains K coding vectors, forming K parallel data transmission paths which correspond to the K coding vectors, processing the convolutional coding between each data path and the corresponding coding vector where the coding constraint length is L, forming the N-dimensional output vectors by summing the result of the K convolutional coding data paths, receiving the aforementioned N-dimensional coding output vectors and taking the sequence detection. The abovementioned K, N, L are the basic parameters for the parallel coding. The present invention can greatly boost the system capacity and enhance the frequency efficiency by using the linear or nonlinear coding transmission whose coding rate is more than one. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103237 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE EFFICIENT INDEXING AND STORAGE OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - A network analyzer reads network packets and extracts characterizing attributes, grouping patents observed in a given amount of time on common attribute values. Grouped attributes are meta data, written to a database, while packets are written to files. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103238 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE EFFICIENT CORRELATION OF NETWORK TRAFFIC TO RELATED PACKETS - A network analyzer reads network packets and extracts characterizing attributes, grouping patents observed in a given amount of time on common attribute values. Grouped attributes are meta data, written to a database, while packets are written to files. Meta data is stored in the database including links to the physical packets related to the meta data, and a user interface enables query of the meta data and retrieval of related physical packets. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103239 | FLOW SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Systems and methods for process flow tracking are presented. In one embodiment, a flow method comprises collecting records associated with flow for post analysis; performing a flow connection process associated with the flow, wherein the flow connection process examines information in a hash table and connects flow segments based upon connect ID; and performing a presentation process in which the flow is visualized, searched and traversed. In one exemplary implementation, a flow connection process utilizes a hash table that draws a correlation between the connect ID and a connect-start record or a connect-end record. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103240 | METHOD FOR FORWARDING IN PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for forwarding of data in peer-to-peer transactions by a high-capability wireless device, such as an access point. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103241 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting signal, at a mobile station, in a wireless communication system is provided. Inter-cell interference information may be different for each frequency partition according to using a FFR scheme. Also, a parameter for controlling interference level between base stations may be different for each frequency partition. The present invention is advantageous in that, when uplink transmission is performed, system throughput and cell edge-user throughput are improved and inter-cell interference level control is efficiently performed. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103242 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING AND DISPLAYING PRESENCE OF WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICES - An instrument is disclosed that is capable of detecting and graphically displaying channel usage and the number of access points operating on each channel of interest. By using a module that counts the number of elapsed clock cycles, the total cumulative duration of detected frames, and the number of channel in-use cycles, the instrument can determine the percentage of time a channel is in use, the percentage of time of IEEE 802.11 usage on a channel, and the percentage of time of non-IEEE 802.11 usage on a channel. Further, channels are scanned for access point activity using a scanning algorithm that interleaves scanning channels at a first duration longer than the beacon interval and scanning channels at a second shorter duration. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103243 | SIGNALING FOR FLEXIBLE CARRIER AGGREGATION - Flexible carrier aggregation is provided for a radio communications system. A capability is determined to communicate over a radio interface using multiple radio frequency component carriers. Each of the multiple component carriers is configurable with one or more control channels in a first mode of operation and with no control channels in a second mode of operation. Configuration information for one of the multiple radio frequency component carriers is signaled to indicate at least one of the component carriers is configured to operate in a selected one of the first mode of operation and the second mode of operation so that a network radio node and a user equipment radio node can communicate using the selected mode of operation. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103244 | FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCHING FABRIC PORT CONTROL - The Fibre Channel standard was created by the American National Standard for Information Systems (ANSI) X3T11 task group to define a serial I/O channel for interconnecting a number of heterogeneous peripheral devices to computer systems as well as interconnecting the computer systems themselves through optical fiber and copper media at gigabit speeds (i.e., one billion bits per second). Multiple protocols such as SCSI (Small Computer Serial Interface), IP (Internet Protocol), HIPPI, ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) among others can concurrently utilize the same media when mapped over Fibre Channel. A Fibre Channel Fabric is an entity which transmits Fibre Channel frames between connected Node Ports. The Fibre Channel fabric routes the frames based on the destination address as well as other information embedded in the Fibre Channel frame header. Node Ports are attached to the Fibre Channel Fabric through links. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103245 | BUFFER SPACE ALLOCATION METHOD AND RELATED PACKET SWITCH - A buffer space allocation method for a packet switch includes periodically performing a measurement process to obtain a plurality of measurement results at different times, each measurement result indicating a total size of accumulated packets in an output queue corresponding to one of a plurality of network ports of the packet switch, and adjusting a dedicated buffer space of the output queue according to the plurality of measurement results and a reserved space value for the dedicated buffer space. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103246 | POWER-EFFICIENT LINK GROUP COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A power-efficient link group-based communication system is provided. In link group-based communication, according to the amount of transmitted traffic, an appropriate number of links in a link group are set to active mode to be used for traffic transmission, and the rest of the links in the link group are set to power save mode, thereby not transmitting traffic. Thus, efficient power reduction in the link group-based communication can be realized. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103247 | CHANNEL STATUS REPORTING - Methods, systems, apparatus and computer program products are provided to facilitate the transmission of channel status information in wireless systems, such as advanced long-term evolution (LTE-A) systems. Requests for aperiodic channel status reports are generated in systems that use multiple carriers and operate in multiple-in-multiple-out (MIMO) configurations. The request enables a user equipment to configure two transport blocks for the transmission of channel status information only. In some instances, data, in addition to channel status information, is transmitted by the user equipment. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103248 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK, METHOD FOR SETTING UP A SECOND COMMUNICATION, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND STORAGE MEANS - A method is proposed for managing communications in a wireless network in which a first communication is set up or established on a plurality of carriers between a first sender device and a receiver device, the network comprising a set of at least one second sender device for which a second communication has to be established simultaneously with said first communication. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103249 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING CELL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for measuring a cell a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method includes receiving measurement configuration information for a plurality of frequencies from a BS, without a dedicated connection between a UE and a network, and measuring cells using the plurality of frequencies according to the measurement configuration information. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103250 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DEDICATED REFERENCE SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for transmitting a dedicated reference signal (DRS) are provided, the method including determining, by a base station, whether user equipments (UEs) participating in multiple users-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) at the same physical resource block (PRB) belong to the same cell, if yes, configuring that the UEs adopt a cell-specific scrambling code sequence; otherwise, configuring that the UEs located in the cells belonging to the same cell group adopt a cell group-specific scrambling code sequence; sending, by the base station, configuration information to the UE, and sending a DRS to the UE by using the scrambling code sequence configured for the UE; an initialization code of the cell-specific scrambling code sequence is determined according to an identity of the cell in which the UE is located; an initialization code of the cell group-specific scrambling code sequence is determined according to an identity of the cell group. As such, the UE can restrain DRS interferences between different cells when receiving the DRS and improve the precision of the channel estimation. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103251 | Configuration and indication methods of multicast/broadcast over a single frequency network frames and an identifying method used by a terminal - A configuration method and an indication method of MBSFN frames and an identifying method used by a terminal applied in a long term evolution system are disclosed in the present invention, which include: an access network sends configuration parameters of the MBSFN frame to a mobile terminal determining whether the wireless frame received is an MBSFN frame according to the configuration parameters, the configuration parameters including a repetition period of the MBSFN frames distributed in system-set time. With the present invention, it could consume less bytes in system message to complete the configuration of the MBSFN sub-frames and could save system resources. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103252 | Method and Node for Decentralized Embedded Self-Optimization in a Broadband Access Network - A node in a broadband network having lines includes a network interface in communication with less than all of the lines. The node includes an embedded optimizer, a memory and processing unit in communication with the network interface which runs an optimization loop in the processing unit that monitors the lines in communication with the network interface so each line in communication with the network interface is individually optimized. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103253 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING POWER SAVING USING SUPERFRAMES - An approach is provided for providing sleep mode associated with a resource frame structure. A superframe that includes a plurality of frames that is partitioned into sub-frames is detected. A length of listening window ( | 05-05-2011 |
20110103254 | Method and device for multi-user beamforming based on a frequency division duplex system - The present invention discloses an FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) system based multi-user beamforming method and device. The method comprises the steps of: when two or more user terminals are at respective AOAs (Angles of Arrival), determining a transmit weight of a downlink signal of each user terminal by using a null-widening algorithm, and storing the transmit weight in a network side; and, the network side grouping the user terminals based on AOA information reported by the user terminals, selecting a corresponding transmit weight for the downlink signal of each user terminal in each group based on the AOA information of the user terminals in the group, and transmitting the selected transmit weight after multiplying it by a downlink data stream of the user terminal corresponding to the transmit weight. The present invention can reduce the computation burden of the network side, enhance the efficiency of beamforming, and thus increase the capacity of the FDD system while ensuring the communication quality. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103255 | MULTI-INTERFACE COMMUNICATION DEVICE, TERMINAL, AND PATH SWITCHING METHOD - A router, if judging that a routing function is impossible to execute, sends out a connection instruction message including the address of a terminal on a local network terminating the relaying flow, to another router to solicit switching. The router having received the connection instruction message starts a process for connecting with an external network while executing a process for link connection with a terminal, and then sends out a connection completion notice message when the connection with both the external network and the terminal is established. This process enables the router to switch a path rapidly. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110242 | LOCATION DETECTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A first node sends a first message to a second node. The second node sends a second message to the first node. A first elapsed time is measured from the beginning of the transmission of the first message to the beginning of receipt of the second message. A second elapsed time is measured from the beginning of the receipt of the first message to the beginning of the transmission of the second message. The second node sends a third message to the first node containing the second elapsed time. The distance between the first and second node is calculated based on these elapsed times and a calibration count multiplier contained in the second or third message. A node may be moved within a wireless mesh network. Positional information about the node and distances to its neighbors is determined and transmitted to the network manager where it is stored. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110243 | Method for Keeping Mobile Data Users Continuously Aware of Their Packet Data Utilization - This invention describes a new method for keeping a mobile user aware of the amount of data that he or she has transferred to or from a mobile device during the current subscription period (for example the current month, in the case of a month-by-month subscription plan). This will minimize the risk of the subscriber inadvertently exceeding his or her quota for data transfer during the current subscription period. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110244 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING ENHANCED RELATIVE GRANTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Aspects of a method and system for detecting enhanced relative grants in a wireless communications system may include measuring a signal power level of an Enhanced Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH) and estimating a HOLD signal level of an Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH) Relative Grant Channel (E-RGCH), based on the measured E-HICH signal power level, wherein the E-RGCH is associated with the E-HICH. The signal power level of the E-HICH in Transmission Time Intervals (TTIs) associated with the E-HICH may be measured. The HOLD signal level may be measured by compensating the measured signal power level of the E-HICH based on whether the E-HICH signal comprises an acknowledgment (ACK), a discontinuous transmission (DTX), or a negative acknowledgment (NACK). The measured signal power level may be compensated by an offset. An UP signal level of the E-RGCH signal may be estimated based on the estimated HOLD signal level. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110245 | Code Assignment in HS-SCCH Less Operation Mode - In a method and a system a good spread of users per code is obtained by providing a value related to the current load for each code in the system. The estimated load value can be used by the network to assign the HS-PDSCH code for users in HS-SCCH less operation, and may also be used in the dynamic transmission process, i.e. which codes are to be used by which user during this and future TTIs. If one code is over a given utilization threshold, where the threshold is set in order to avoid code blocking of VoIP users, enough users can be re-assigned to a different code. In the case that all of the current codes used in the HS-SCCH less operation model are over the utilization threshold, yet another code can be made available for HS-SCCH less operation. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110246 | TRANSMISSION OF FEEDBACK INFORMATION FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Techniques for sending feedback information for multi-carrier operation are described. In an aspect, feedback information may be sent on an uplink carrier that may or may not be paired with a downlink carrier on which data transmission is sent. A user equipment (UE) may receive data transmission on a downlink carrier among a plurality of downlink carriers. The UE may determine feedback information for the data transmission, determine an uplink carrier to use to send the feedback information from among a plurality of uplink carriers, and send the feedback information on the uplink carrier. In another aspect, feedback information for multiple downlink carriers may be sent on at least one uplink carrier using Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA). A UE may receive data transmissions on a plurality of downlink carriers, determine feedback information for the data transmissions, and send the feedback information on at least one uplink carrier using SC-FDMA. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110247 | Routing Node and Terminal for an FDD Communication Network and Method for Operating Them - One exemplary aspect of the invention provides a routing node for an FDD communication network, which node has a node receiving apparatus, which is set up in such a manner that it can be used to receive signals from a terminal at a first frequency, and a node transmitting apparatus which is set up in such a manner that it can be used to transmit signals to the terminal at a second frequency. In this case, the routing node is set up in such a manner that it can transmit an indication signal to the terminal, which signal indicates whether the routing node can receive signals at the first frequency at a given point in time. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110248 | APPARATUS HAVING PACKET ALLOCATION FUNCTION AND PACKET ALLOCATION METHOD - An allocation execution determiner finds a bias in flow bandwidths allocated to each of physical ports on the basis of a maximum flow bandwidth and an average flow bandwidth reflecting actual traffics, determines high and low in the flow bandwidths, and allocates traffics in such a manner that the traffics become averaged. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110249 | OPTIMIZATION OF 3GPP NETWORK ATTACHMENT - The current invention relates to a method for a network attachment procedure and a user equipment in a wireless mobile network, the wireless mobile network comprising a user equipment with a temporary identity and at least one mobility management entity. The method comprises the steps of providing an estimation whether the user equipment is unknown at the mobility management entity and sending the user equipment's temporary identity during the network attachment procedure. If the user equipment has been estimated to be unknown at the at least one mobility management entity, the user equipment's identity is sent during the network attachment procedure. These steps are carried out by the user equipment. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110250 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING CHANNEL TIME, METHOD OF DETERMINING COMPATIBLE LINKS, AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING DATA - A method of searching a compatible beam link is disclosed. The present invention includes receiving a channel time for communicating data from a coordinator, the channel time being previously allocated for communicating data between other stations, determining an occurrence of interference during the allocated channel time, and transmitting a feedback signal to the coordinator, the feedback signal including an interference information indicating an occurrence of interference. According to embodiments of the present invention, stations of network search for compatible beams whenever necessary, whereby loads of energy management and operations of a main station can be reduced. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110251 | INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method in a wireless terminal transceiver includes receiving a sequence of frames from a first base station, wherein each frame in the sequence contains a first set of time-frequency resources which may be used for scheduling data and a second set of time-frequency resources not used for scheduling data. The transceiver also receives a message from the first base station identifying a third set of time-frequency resources that is a subset of the first set of time-frequency resources, and estimates the channel state based on the transmission received in the third set of time-frequency resources. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110252 | System and Method for Channel Estimation in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for channel estimation in wireless communications systems are provided. A method for operations at a first communications device includes computing an estimate of a channel between the first communications device and a second communications device based on pilot signals transmitted from the second communications device, removing self-interference from a composite transmission relayed from a relay node, and detecting information contained in the transmissions from the second communications device from the composite transmission based on the estimate of the channel. The composite transmission includes transmissions from the first communications device and transmissions from the second communications device. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110253 | ETHERNET APPARATUS AND METHOD OF ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION RATE THEREOF - A plurality of lanes are formed between an Ethernet apparatus and a remote Ethernet apparatus. The Ethernet apparatus determines a transmission rate for transmitting a packet and determines the number of lanes to transmit a packet among a plurality of lanes according to the determined transmission rate. The Ethernet apparatus activates the determined number of lanes of a plurality of lanes and transmits the packet to the remote Ethernet apparatus through the activated lanes. Further, the Ethernet apparatus sets the number of lanes for receiving a packet according to a transmission rate, activates the set number of lanes of a plurality of lanes in a state that can receive the packet according to the set number of lanes, and receives packets that are transmitted from the remote Ethernet apparatus through the activated lanes. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110254 | CELL RESELECTION ENHANCEMENT - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate measuring frequencies for cell reselection. A base station providing a cell can be interfered by one or more closed subscriber group (CSG) cells over at least a portion of frequency utilized by the base station to serve one or more devices. The base station can determine and provide one or more parameters related to performing a measurement of a system bandwidth to one or more devices that are within range of the one or more CSG cells that includes at least a portion of the bandwidth utilized by the one or more CSG cells. The one or more devices can accordingly perform measurements of the system bandwidth of the base station for determining one or more communication metrics related to performing reselection and/or measuring other frequencies for reselection. The measurement can relate to a wideband measurement, a plurality of narrowband measurements, etc. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110255 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING CHANNEL INTERFERENCE IN A MULTI-CHANNEL SENSOR NETWORK - A method of avoiding channel interference in a multi-channel sensor network, includes periodically measuring an energy of a channel used by at least one node included in the sensor network; determining if the energy of the channel has a value larger than a first preset threshold; when the energy of the channel has a value larger than the first preset threshold, concluding that the channel is influenced by an interference from an interference source, and reporting it to a parent node of the at least one node; and switching the channel influenced by the interference to a new channel, which is not influenced by an interference, thereby avoiding an influence of the interference. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110256 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING INTER-RAT MEASUREMENT IN DUAL MODEM DEVICE - A method and apparatus for processing inter-RAT measurement in a dual modem device are disclosed. A method for processing inter-RAT measurement in a dual modem device includes receiving, by a first processor communicating with a first communication network, a measurement control signal including a parameter for signal measurement from the first communication network; transmitting, by the first processor, timing information based on a system frame number (SFN) and a global time to a second processor; acquiring time synchronization for the inter-RAT measurement between the first processor and the second processor on the basis of the system frame number (SFN) and the global time; transmitting the parameter from the first processor to the second processor; and measuring, by the second processor, a signal of a second communication network using the parameter. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110257 | UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is an uplink transmission power control method in a wireless communication system. Said method includes preferentially determining the transmission power of an uplink control channel, and determining the transmission power of an uplink data channel within the difference between the maximum transmittable power of a terminal and the transmission power of the uplink control channel, wherein the transmission of the uplink control signal through the uplink control channel and the transmission of the uplink data through the uplink data channel are performed at the same time using wireless resources different from one another. The present invention preferentially allocates the transmission power required for the transmission of an uplink control channel, and allocates residual power to an uplink data channel, thereby improving the effectiveness of power allocation when an uplink control signal and an uplink data signal are transmitted at the same time using physical resources different from one another. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110258 | RADIO BASE STATION DEVICE, RADIO RELAY STATION DEVICE, AND RADIO TERMINAL DEVICE - A radio base station device comprises: a preamble signal receiving unit ( | 05-12-2011 |
20110110259 | Cellular Congestion and Admission Control Based on Ringing Tones in Unanswered Calls - A base station in a wireless network measures a total transmission power associated with calls in a cell of the wireless network, where the calls include answered calls and unanswered calls that originated in the cell. The base station further compares the measured total transmission power with a power threshold and performs at least one of the following: muting at least one of the unanswered calls downlink voice path based on the comparison, or disconnecting at least one of the unanswered calls based on the comparison. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110260 | STREAMING COMMUNICATION DEVICE, STREAMING COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND STREAMING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A streaming communication device which accurately estimates a packet which will be lost in the future. A streaming communication device which transmits or receives a stream via a router over a packet-switched network, the streaming communication device including: an accumulating unit ( | 05-12-2011 |
20110110261 | METHOD FOR ASSOCIATING MOBILE STATIONS WITH REPEATERS IN CONTROLLING BASE STATION - A method may include determining an association between repeaters and mobile stations in a controlling eNodeB of a multi-hop wireless environment. The method may include receiving channel estimations based on reference signals transmitted by said mobile stations. The method may be implemented a wireless environment when legacy LTE UEs are present. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110262 | DOWNLINK RECEIVING STATUS FEEDBACK METHOD - A downlink receiving status feedback method is disclosed. The method comprises: a control parameter, which is used for indicating a feedback mode used by a terminal for feeding back downlink receiving status, is carried in a radio resource control (RRC) signaling which is transmitted to the terminal ( | 05-12-2011 |
20110110263 | METHOD OF TRIGGERING STATUS REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RECEIVER - A method and apparatus of triggering a status report in a wireless communication system is provided. A duplicated data block is received. A triggering of a status report is suspended if the duplicated data block requests the status report and a sequence number (SN) of the duplicated data block is equal to or greater than a maximum status transmit state variable. Even if a duplicated data block requests a status report, the status report is triggered after hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) reordering is complete. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110264 | DETERMINING LINK COSTS - Embodiments of a system with a first network device and at least first and second links connecting the first network device and one or more other network devices are disclosed. The first network device determines the costs of the first and the second links using the latencies of the first and the second links and factors that correspond to the bandwidths of the first and the second links. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110265 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS VIDEO AREA NETWORK - A method and system for device discovery in a wireless network is provided. The device discovery involves directionally transmitting a data unit from a transmitting station over a channel in different directions to emulate omni-directional transmission, receiving the data unit transmissions from different directions at a receiving station, determining the quality of the transmissions received from the different directions, and detecting location information for the transmitting station relative to the receiving station based on the highest quality transmission among the transmissions received from the different directions. Further, if a channel has sufficient bandwidth to satisfy direct link communication between two stations, then during a direct link set-up stage, the two stations conduct a probing message exchange using omni-direction transmission, and upon successful probing, obtain communication link status information and set proper communication configurations for the two stations based on the communication link status information. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116389 | Ranking Nodes in Networks with Topologies Arranged as Directed Acyclic Graphs - Embodiments of the invention disclose a system and a method for determining a rank of a node in a multi-hop wireless network, wherein the network includes a gateway node, client nodes, and relay nodes, wherein a node p(i) is a default parent of the node i having a rank, and the network uses a directed acyclic graph (DAG) topology. The method comprises steps of transmitting at least one data packet from the node to the default parent node over a wireless link; counting a number of successful transmissions of most recent transmissions of data packets; determining an expected transmission time (ETX) for the wireless link based on the number of successful transmissions in the most recent transmissions; and assigning a rank R(i) to the node based on the rank of the parent node and the ETX. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116390 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR DETECTING AND ENCODING STATES FOR ACCURATE MEASUREMENT - A method, device, and program for determining states in a flow of packets are provided. A flow of transmitted packets is received. When the difference between the sequence number of the arriving packet and the next expected sequence number is equal to zero and when the TTL number of the arriving packet is equal to the TTL number of the previous packet, there is a stable state beginning with the first of the consecutively received packets. If a difference between the sequence number of an arriving packet and a next expected sequence number is greater than 1, or TTL of the arriving packet is not equal to the TTL number of the previous packet, there is a not stable state. Time between end of one stable state and start of the next stable state is the hole, and the states and holes correlate to events for analysis of the network. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116391 | NETWORK DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - The present invention provides a network device and a control method thereof. The network device comprises: a receiver, a first timer, a transmitter, a detector, and a controller. The first timer is utilized for calculating a first predetermined time. The transmitter is coupled to the first timer, and utilized for generating a network linking signal and outputting the network linking signal. The detector is coupled to the receiver, and utilized for detecting a link status of the network device and a link partner to generate a first detecting result. The controller is coupled to the first timer, the transmitter, and the detector, and utilized for determining whether to power down the transmitter according to the first detecting result and the first predetermined time. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116392 | REMOVAL OF ICI/ISI ERRORS IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR WIRELESS REPEATERS - A method for estimating a feedback channel for a wireless repeater using frequency domain channel estimation estimates an error correction term using a most recent channel estimate and cancels the error correction term from a current block of the receive signal. Then, the feedback channel is estimated using frequency domain channel estimation and using a current block of the pilot signal and the corrected block of the receive signal. A channel estimate error term may also be estimated and subtracted directly from the channel estimate. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116393 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SPATIAL REUSE BY ASSISTANCE OF DISTRIBUTED DEVICES OVER WIRELESS SYSTEM USING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS - Disclosed are a method for spatial reuse by support of distributed devices in a wireless communication system using a directional antenna, and an apparatus for the same. In the wireless communication system using the directional antenna, the method arranges an antenna with respect to a target device for communication before the distributed devices request a resource for communication, informs the target device or a central control unit in advance of a measurement result of a signal in MASs through the antenna, and requests a resource and receives a resource allocation based on the measurement result. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116394 | PACKING SOURCE DATA PACKETS INTO TRANSPORTING PACKETS WITH FRAGMENTATION - A communication system and method are disclosed for transmitting packets of information in at least one first format over a communications link that utilizes packets of information in a second format. In certain embodiments, the packets of information in a first format are converted to packets of information in the second format prior to transmission via the communications link by packing and fragmenting the information in the first format in a coordinated manner. Embodiments may also utilize packing subheaders and fragmentation control bits in the packing and fragmentation processes. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116395 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a radio communication terminal including a measurement execution section which measures, as a measurement value, strength or quality of a signal received by a reception circuit from a base station, a measurement report creation section which creates a measurement report containing the measurement value, an offset amount setting section which sets a correction amount based on a usage status of the radio communication terminal by a user, an offset correction section which calculates an output value by subtracting the correction amount set by the offset amount setting section from the measurement value measured by the measurement execution section, and a measurement report transmission timing control section which designates a timing of transmitting the measurement report created by the measurement report creation section based on the output value calculated by the offset correction section and a threshold. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116396 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR TIME TRACKING USING ASSITANCE FROM TDM PILOTS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for time tracking using assistance from TDM pilots in a communication network. In an aspect, a method is provided for time tracking in a device operating on a communication network, wherein the device performs a time tracking algorithm. The method includes determining a delay spread, and modifying at least one parameter used by the time tracking algorithm based on the delay spread. In another aspect, an apparatus is provided for time tracking in a device operating on a communication network, wherein the device performs a time tracking algorithm. The apparatus includes computation logic for determining a delay spread, and control logic for modifying at least one parameter used by the time tracking algorithm based on the delay spread. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116397 | Communication path control apparatus for evenly distributing packets between adjacent nodes and a method therefor - In a packet transfer network node, the receiving ratio of first packets transmitted from its adjacent node is calculated to represent a proportion of the number of the first packets received from each adjacent node to the total number of those packets received from all adjacent nodes. Based on the receiving ratio calculated for a combination of a source and a destination corresponding to the destination and source of the second packets, respectively, the transmitting ratio of second packets is calculated for each adjacent node to define a proportion in which the second packets transmitted from a source corresponding to the destination of the first packets and meant for a destination corresponding to the source of the first packets are to be transmitted to an adjacent communication node. Based upon the transmitting ratios thus calculated, an adjacent node is selected to which a second packet is to be transmitted. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116398 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD OF COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus includes a transmission unit configured to transmit a packet to a base station, and a judgment unit configured to judge whether the base station is configured to transmit the packet so that an apparatus in a power saving mode can receive the packet within a predetermined time. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116399 | ANALOG BIAS CONTROL FOR PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Apparatus having corresponding methods and non-transitory computer-readable media comprise an amplifier configured to amplify signals according to a bias current, wherein the signals represent packets of data; a packet module configured to recover the packets of data from the signals amplified by the amplifier; and a control module configured to control the bias current according to one or more characteristics of the packets of data. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116400 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for controlling uplink transmission power in a communication system are provided. In the method, transmission power of an uplink data channel signal is determined according to an Open Loop Power Control (OLPC) scheme and transmission power of an uplink control channel signal is determined according to a Closed Loop Power Control (CLPC) scheme. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116401 | Multi-Channel Wireless Communications - Systems and techniques relating to wireless communications are described. A described technique includes monitoring wireless communication channels, including a first channel and a second channel, to produce a monitoring output, determining a first transmission period for the first channel, determining a second transmission period for the second channel, transmitting, based on the first transmission period, a first packet on the first channel to cause one or more wireless communication devices to set a transmission protection period for the first channel and the second channel based on a reception of the first packet, transmitting, based on the second transmission period, a second packet on the second channel, and monitoring, after the end of the first transmission period, for one or more acknowledgements. An end of the second transmission period can be aligned with an end of the first transmission period. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116402 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION IN A MESH NETWORK - In a network of wireless communications apparatuses connected by a plurality of routes, a wireless communications apparatus includes a packet generating unit that generates a packet for each of the plurality of routes in the network; an operating unit that generates power consumption information for each of the routes, the power consumption information indicating power consumption for transmitting the packets; an attaching unit that attaches the power consumption information to the packets; and a transmit unit that transmits the packets to which the power consumption information is attached via the corresponding routes. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116403 | LMS Adaptive Filter for Digital Cancellation of Second Order Inter-Modulation Due to Transmitter Leakage - A transmit signal second-order inter-modulation (IM2) canceller for a portable handset using a full duplex mode of operation (e.g., WCDMA) is used to controllably reduce IM2 introduced by a transmit signal that appears in a received signal in a receive channel of the portable handset. The transmit signal IM2 canceller includes a delay estimator and a digital signal adjuster. The delay estimator receives a first input from a receive channel and a second input from a transmit channel. The delay estimator generates an estimate of the IM2 that the transmit channel introduces in the receive channel. The digital signal adjuster removes the estimate of the IM2 before forwarding a modified receive channel signal to a baseband subsystem of the portable handset. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116404 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A radio communication device for executing a communication on the basis of a frequency division duplex, has a first antenna, a second antenna, a first receiver for receiving a first radio frequency signal via the first antenna, a second receiver for receiving the first radio frequency signal via the second antenna, a transmitter for transmitting a second radio frequency signal via the second antenna, a power measuring unit for measuring a first power of a component of the second radio frequency signal in a received signal received via the first antenna, and a control unit for controlling a reactance between the first antenna and the second antenna so as to lower an amount of coupling between the first antenna and the second antenna on the basis of the measured first power. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116405 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING RADIO FREQUENCY PARAMETERS - A system for method for adjusting radio frequency parameters. A network performance device includes a network performance function executed to monitor network performance between a wireless network device and a wireless packet network switch, determine whether at least one network performance value of the wireless network device exceeds one or more predetermined threshold values, and communicate an instruction to adjust the one or more RF parameters between the wireless network device and the wireless device in response to exceeding the one or more predetermined threshold values. An RF signal path is provided between the wireless network device and the wireless device. The network performance is concatenated into data packets communicated between the wireless network device and the wireless packet network switch utilizing a packet network. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116406 | Method For Achieving an Optimal Shaping Rate For a New Packet Flow - The present invention relates to a method and an arrangement in a communication network node ( | 05-19-2011 |
20110116407 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND RELATED METHOD OF OPERATION - A mobile station establishes UL synchronisation by the use of downlink preamble messages, and by monitoring timing drift within the downlink signalling and by updating the UL synchronisation value responsive to the magnitude of the timing drift exceeding a threshold value. Tx power values can also be updated as a function of the updated synchronisation value. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116408 | SUBSTRATE CONVEYING DEVICE - A method for controlling uplink transmission power of a mobile station (MS) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: obtaining a plurality of interference indicators indicating uplink interference from a base station (BS), wherein a full bandwidth is divided into a plurality of frequency partitions, and the plurality of interference indicators respectively correspond to the plurality of frequency partitions; determining an uplink transmission power level of a frequency partition corresponding to an interference indicator selected from the plurality of interference indicators on the basis of the selected interference indicator; and controlling the uplink transmission power on the basis of the uplink transmission power level. Accordingly, inter-cell interference can be reduced, and reliability of an MS located in a cell edge can be improved. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116409 | MULTI-PARTICIPANT CONFERENCE SETUP - Some embodiments provide an architecture for establishing a multi-participant conference. This architecture has one participant's computer in the conference act as a central content distributor for the conference. The central distributor receives data (e.g., video and/or audio streams) from the computer of each other participant, and distributes the received data to the computers of all participants. In some embodiments, the central distributor receives A/V data from the computers of the other participants. From such received data, the central distributor of some embodiments generates composite data (e.g., composite image data and/or composite audio data) that the central distributor distributes back to the participants. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116410 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling inter-cell interference (ICI) in a mobile communication system by transmitting uplink control information from a base station in a home cell to a terminal of a neighboring cell based on ICI amount information measured at the base station. The ICI control method includes receiving an uplink signal at a base station and extracting inter-cell interference amount information from the uplink signal, generating uplink control information based on the extracted inter-cell interference amount information, and transmitting the uplink control information to a terminal in a neighboring cell. The terminal schedules an uplink resource including selecting frequency bands for an uplink signal by referring to the uplink control information. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116411 | METHOD OF GENERATING PILOT PATTERN FOR ADAPTIVE CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN OFDMA SYSTEMS, METHOD OF TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING USING THE PILOT PATTERN AND APPARATUS THEREOF - Provided is a method of generating a pilot pattern capable of perform adaptive channel estimation, and a method and apparatus of a base station and a method and apparatus of a terminal using the pilot pattern. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116412 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD SWITCHING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of base stations that are capable of switching to either a first communication method or a second communication method and that carry out wireless communication with terminals by the switched communication method and a control apparatus that manages the plurality of base stations. The control apparatus includes an acquisition unit that acquires information of throughput of each of the plurality of base stations and a switching instruction unit that instructs switching of the current communication method to each of the plurality of base stations when there is a base station in which throughput drops within a fixed interval among the plurality of base stations, and that further instructs re-switching to the communication method that preceded switching to base stations in which throughput dropped from before to after switching communication method among the plurality of base stations. | 05-19-2011 |
20110122777 | Automatic channel pass-through - A network infrastructure device of an apparatus in one example comprises a receive interface and a transmit interface for a communication channel. The network infrastructure device is configured to pass a data stream for the communication channel from the receive interface, through a set of signal processing blocks, and to the transmit interface. The network infrastructure device is configured to analyze the data stream for an occurrence of a predetermined data pattern. The network infrastructure device is configured to automatically add and/or remove one or more signal processing blocks from the set of signal processing blocks upon the occurrence of the predetermined data pattern. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122778 | MULTIPLE WATERMARKS FOR FIDELITY ASSESSMENT - A system and method of perceptual quality assessment for multimedia content in a communications network employing digital watermarking. A content preparer prepares content for quality assessment by embedding digital watermarks into the multimedia data, each watermark having a different level of robustness with respect to a specified type of potential degradation introduced during content transmission. A quality assessor provides an assessment of the quality of the transmitted content by attempting to detect the presence of at least one watermark, and calculating a quality assessment score based on the level(s) of robustness of the detected watermark(s) with respect to the specified type of potential degradation. The quality assessment score can be calculated based on the level of robustness of the least robust watermark whose presence was successfully detected by the quality assessor. The quality assessor generates an output indication of the transmitted content fidelity using any suitable type of output indication. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122779 | SELF-MANAGEMENT OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY (MME) POOLS - A device estimates a load on the device based on static and dynamic load information associated with the device, provides the estimated load to the other devices in a pool of devices, and estimates, based on the estimated load, a weight of the device in the pool. The device also detects a load imbalance in the pool based on the estimated weight and weights associated with the other devices in the pool, and determines, based on the estimated load, a number of subscribers to offload from the device. The device further determines, based on the estimated weight and the weights associated with the other devices, to which of the other devices to offload the determined number of subscribers, and offloads, to address the load imbalance, the determined number of subscribers to the determined other devices in the pool. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122780 | Graceful Wakeup Of Power Saving Communication Apparatuses - An apparatus determines a wireless traffic load; generates at least one timer value based at least in part on the determined traffic load; and initiates a wireless transmission at a time based at least in part on the at least one timer value. The at least one timer value indicates a time for initiating a transmission after changing from a lower power state to a higher power state. In an exemplary embodiment the wireless traffic load is determined via continuous monitoring and initiating the transmission includes obtaining a transmission opportunity for sending a trigger frame or a power save poll frame. Various exemplary techniques are detailed as to how to determine the traffic load. The generated at least one timer value is a maximum time, which may be truncated for example after the apparatus receives a data unit by which to obtain a network allocation vector. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122781 | NETWORK DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - The present invention provides a network device and a control method thereof. The network device comprises: a receiver, a transmitter, a storage unit, and a processing unit. The storage unit is utilized for storing a software, and the processing unit is coupled to the receiver, the transmitter, and the storage unit, and utilized for reading the software from the storage unit and executing the software to execute following operations: calculating a first predetermined time and driving the transmitter to generate a network linking signal and output the network linking signal by the transmitter; polling a link status of the network device and a link partner to generate a first detecting result; and determining whether to power down the transmitter according to the first detecting result and the first predetermined time. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122782 | METHOD FOR BEAMFORMING - The present invention relates to a method for random beam-forming based on a codebook. The method includes generating a first random variable corresponding to a Gaussian distribution; generating a second random variable corresponding to a uniform distribution; generating a plurality of beam elements by using the first variable, the second variable, spatial correlation between channels, and indexes of transmitting antennas; and forming a beam by using the plurality of beam elements. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122783 | TRANSITIONING A USER EQUIPMENT (UE) TO A DEDICATED CHANNEL STATE DURING SETUP OF A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, an access network (AN) receives data for transmission to a user equipment (UE) that is not in a dedicated-channel state. The AN determines that the received data is associated with a communication session of a given type. Based on this determination, the AN transitions the UE to a dedicated-channel state. In an example, the AN can determine the association between the received data and the communication session of the given type based on an indication of the association that is contained with a data session activation request message. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122784 | MAINTAINING AN ALLOCATION OF ANTENNAS AT AN ACCESS TERMINAL DURING A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments are directed to monitoring downlink communication at an access terminal within a wireless communications system. The access terminal monitors data on a first downlink broadcast channel of a first network at least with a primary antenna of the access terminal, the monitored data associated with an active communication session (e.g., a high-priority multicast communication session) of the access terminal. The access terminal may optionally periodically monitor messaging information on a downlink channel of a second network with a secondary antenna of the access terminal, the primary antenna having a higher sensitivity than the secondary antenna. The access terminal maintains an exclusive allocation of the primary antenna to the first network irrespective of a quality level of the periodically monitored messaging information on the downlink channel of the second network. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122785 | ACQUISITION GUARD TIME REDUCTION USING SINGLE TERMINAL RANGING - Embodiments provide systems, devices, and methods for determining acquisition guard times and acquisition control parameters or distance metrics for terminals in a satellite communication network using triangulation and single terminal ranging. A terminal or multiple terminals from the network may be selected as ranging terminals; the terminals may include normal user terminals used for determining a satellite position or a satellite distance. Ranging terminals may first enter a network and synchronize to TDMA frame timing by adjusting the acquisition control parameters. An adjusted acquisition control parameter may also be called a transmit timing control parameter. A satellite position or a distance difference between a real-time and a nominal satellite position may be estimated from timing control parameters. Information about the satellite position and/or the distance difference in satellite position may then be used to reduce acquisition guard times for other terminals using various techniques to compute acquisition control parameters. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122786 | AUDIO CODEC BIT-RATE CONTROL METHOD FOR ASSURING QoS OF VOICE IN WLAN - A method and apparatus for controlling voice quality in WLAN is provided. The codec bit rate of wireless terminals is adjusted by collecting channel state information for determining a channel occupation time of wireless terminals connected to an access point, adjusting the codec bit rate of the wireless terminals based on channel occupancy of the wireless terminals with respect to total channel capacity, which is determined using the channel state information, and transmitting the adjusted codec bit rate to each of the wireless terminals. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122787 | Method and Apparatus for Estimating Link Quality, and Link Adaption Method and Apparatus - The present invention discloses a method for estimating quality of a link in a broad-band wireless communication system. The method includes: calculating quality indicators of sub-carriers in an input signal of a receiver of the system; clipping the quality indicators of the sub-carriers; and averaging the clipped quality indicators of the sub-carriers to obtain an average value as an estimation result of an effective quality indicator of the link. The present application also discloses an apparatus for estimating quality of a link in a broad-band wireless communication system, an adaption method and apparatus for a link in a broad-band wireless communication system. The methods and apparatus of the present invention can achieve relatively low calculation complexity and high accuracy. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122788 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for organizing an architecture of access points in a distributed wireless network includes measuring interference between the access points, assigning radiofrequency channels to the access points based on the measured interference and creating distributed antenna groups of multiple access points operating on a same radio frequency channel. A distributed wireless network includes a plurality of access points and a central controller connected to the access points via a common backbone, the central controller being configured to assign radio frequency channels to the access points according to the method. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122789 | Multi-Cell Channel Estimation in 3G-LTE Based Virtual Pilot Sequences - A concept for estimating interfering channels in a multicellular radio communication system including a plurality of base stations and at least a mobile station is suggest, wherein pilot signals are transmitted from the base stations to at least a mobile station, additional pilot sequences are generated, a pattern is provided which defines a rule for distributing said pilot sequences to the base stations, said pilot sequences are modulated and superposed onto said pilot signals, and a pilot signal received at a mobile station is used for estimating interferences in the communication channel from the base station which transmits said pilot signal. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122790 | COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Both a first profile that represents relationships between delay times premeasured over transmission paths and occurrence frequencies of the delay times and measurement periods of time for which the delay times over the transmission paths are measured are stored such that the first profile and the measurement period of time are correlated; a measurement period of time correlated with the first profile is obtained from the storage section if a second profile that represents relationships between delay times measured to obtain the measurement period of time and occurrence frequencies of the delay times is the same profile as the first profile; the delay times over the transmission paths are measured; and a mean value of the delay times measured for the measurement period of time is computed. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122791 | TECHNIQUE FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF NODES - A method is provided for communication between a plurality nodes organized as a ring provided with transmission resources at least one of which is a control resource dedicated to transmitting control information and associated with at least one transmission resource, said method comprising the following step executed by a node of the ring: a step of receiving information relating to a reservation of a transmission window of the transmission resource received over the associated control resource. The method further comprises, if the transmission window is reserved by another node of the ring, steps of: comparing the respective volumes of reservations of resources of the ring made by the node in question and by the other node during a reference period; and pre-empting said reservation of the transmission window as a function of the result of the comparison step. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122792 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTION OF HIERARCHICAL HEAVY HITTERS - An efficient streaming method and apparatus for detecting hierarchical heavy hitters from massive data streams is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method enables near real time detection of anomaly behavior in networks. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122793 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING COMMUNICATION RESOURCES TO COMMUNICATE DATA IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Apparatus and method for allocating communication resources in a data radio communication system, such as an MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) communication system, e.g., a communication system that provides for Enhanced Data for GSM Evolution (EDGE) data services. A multi-carrier radio resource control logic element includes an analyzer that analyzes communication resource requirements to carry out a communication service. A resource allocator allocates communication resources to be used by which to communicate the data. The communication resources are allocated across a plurality of radio carriers such that resources are allocated, during a particular time period, upon a single radio carrier of the plurality of radio carriers. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122794 | METHOD OF REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for reporting channel quality information in a wireless communication system, and a method for assigning radio resources according to the channel quality information are disclosed. A method for reporting channel quality information by a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system measures channel quality information of a downlink multi-carrier including a plurality of downlink component carriers, and transmits the measured channel quality information to a base station. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122795 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING INTERFERENCE IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for detecting interference in a heterogeneous system of a mobile communication system that uses an Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) band are provided. More particularly, an apparatus and a method for determining a start section and an end section of a packet using an Automatic Gain Control (AGC) change in a Zigbee communication system that uses an ISM band and detecting interference in a heterogeneous system using a reception rate of a packet and an interference occurrence rate depending on whether a synchronization process is performed during the determined section. The apparatus includes an interference detector. The interference detector determines a reception section of a packet by determining a start and an end of the received packet, determines whether a packet is synchronized during the determined section, and determines interference occurrence and a packet reception rate depending on whether the packet is synchronized. | 05-26-2011 |
20110128864 | METHOD FOR MEASURMENT OF NETWORK PATH CAPACITY WITH MINIMUM DELAY DIFFERENCE - A method for achieving fast and efficient measurement of path capacity of a communication network. The method includes the following steps: (a) transmitting a number of probes from a local endpoint to a remote endpoint over a network path and each probe contains at least two outgoing packets and each probe can elicit at least two response packets from the remote endpoint; (b) determining a first minDelay by measuring RTT between the time sending the first probe packet and the time receiving the first response packet; (c) determining a second minDelay by measuring RTT between the time sending the second probe packet and the time receiving the second response packet; and (d) determining a minimum delay difference by subtracting said first minDelay from said second minDelay. The minimum delay difference divided by packet size can be used as a measurement of the network path capacity. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128865 | Method and Apparatus for Power Saving Operations in Wireless Network Elements - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises determining at a base station an activity level, and selecting an availability mode based at least in part on the activity level, wherein the availability mode is one of a full-availability mode, a semi-availability mode and a minimum-availability mode. The method also comprises configuring radio resources for at least the minimum-availability mode and switching to the selected availability mode. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128866 | REVERSE LINK DATA RATE INDICATION FOR SATELLITE-ENABLED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Reverse link data rate indications in wireless communication systems are defined with low identification overhead. Existence of a pilot signal is leveraged in order to reduce the overhead for identifying and selecting the reverse link data rate. At least two distinguishable pilot signals are defined, in which, based on the particular pilot signal present in the transmitted frame, at least one rate set from the multiple available rate sets can be determined. Reverse rate information in the transmitted frame is then used to identify which specific data rate within the determined rate set is used. Based on the identified data rate, the receiver may then decode the payload data in the transmitted frame. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128867 | FORWARD LINK DATA RATE CONTROL AND RATE INDICATION FOR SATELLITE-ENABLED COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - In a synchronous application to control forward link (FL) data rates in a satellite system, user equipment (UE) repeatedly transmits a quality control measurement (QCM) index during a QCM period. During this QCM period, the data rate cannot change. The associated satellite transmits at a new rate corresponding to the QCM index. The UE knows that it will begin receiving new data at the new rate after a QCM delay. In an asynchronous application, a satellite transmits a rate change signal over a FL rate indication channel (RICH). A UE monitors the FL RICH for this signal. When the signal quality is to be low, the satellite sends only a single bit of the QCM index over a first orthogonal channel. When the signal quality is not low, the satellite transmits each bit of the QCM index in a separate orthogonal channel of the FL RICH. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128868 | Data Rate Control Mechanism - A method and product for controlling a rate of transmission from a first, transmitting node to a second, recipient node. The method comprises: transmitting a stream from the first node to the second node over a first network route; transmitting further data from the first node to a third node over a second network route substantially overlapping with the first network route; receiving feedback at the first node from the third node regarding transmission of the further data to the third node over the second network route; and based on the feedback from the third node, controlling a rate of transmission of the stream to the second node over the first network route. The third node may not be a recipient of said stream. The rate of transmission may be controlled without feedback from the second node. The further data may be formed of dummy data. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128869 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION PACKETS WITHIN AN ASYNCHRONOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND NETWORK NODE IMPLEMENTING IT - A source node estimates not only the schedule time offset of the destination node but also the clock drift of the destination node. In this way, the source node may choose very accurately the transmission start time of an information packet to this destination node so that typically only one very short preamble needs to be transmitted. The estimation of time offset and clock drift between two nodes is achieved through tone or more previous transmissions between these two nodes, in particular, information relating to these parameters is transmitted from the destination node to the source node in reply to a preamble transmitted by the source node to the destination node. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128870 | DISTRIBUTED COMPUTATION OF COMMON NORMALIZATION CONSTANT FOR QUANTIZED BEST EFFORT TRAFFIC PRIORITY - Apparatus, systems, devices and methods are provided for Distributed Computation of Common Normalization Constant for Quantized Best Effort Traffic Priority. In certain non-limiting aspects, there may be provided a method for prioritizing traffic in a wireless communication environment, including: providing a quantized priority value for each of one or more data streams associated with a wireless communications node; and determining a relative prioritization for each of the one or more data streams using the quantized priority values and one or more quantized priority values associated with one or more other wireless communications nodes; wherein, the quantized priority values associated with the wireless and other wireless communications nodes are normalized with respect to a reference rate. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128871 | Optimizing downlink communications between a base station and a remote terminal by power sharing - A method of optimizing downlink communications between a base station and mobile stations in a wireless communication system involves: identifying users that have a modulation control scheme (MCS) power value greater than a reference power value as high power users; for each of the high power users, calculating a power difference being a difference between a geometry value associated with each of the high power users and a reference geometry value associated with the reference power value respectively; summing the power differences in a power pool; identifying users that have an MCS power value below the reference power value as low power users; associating increased geometry values with at least some of the low power users while depleting the power pool by corresponding amounts until the power pool is depleted; and determining new MCSs for at least some of the low power users based on the increased geometry values. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128872 | Identifying A Sequence Of Received Signals - A sequence of received signals is identified, by a receiver of signals transmitted via a channel of a wireless communications system, as one of a number of known orthogonal sequences. The sequence of received signals is received; a modified sequence is calculated by replacing some of the received signals by their complex conjugate values; the modified sequence is correlated with each one of the number of known orthogonal sequences to obtain a correlation result for each of the known sequences; and the sequence of received signals is identified as the known sequence having the largest correlation result. When some signals in the received sequence are complex conjugated before being correlated with the known sequences, the correlation sum will increase so that even in case of a considerable frequency error the correlation sum for the correct sequence will be sufficiently large to be distinguished from noise. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128873 | Ultra Large Cell Communications - To address the need for new techniques that are able to support communications in ultra large cells various embodiments are described. For example, one method involves determining that user equipment (UE) is located in a far zone of a transceiver node's coverage area and then determining a timing advance value for the UE such that a transmission from the UE will be received at the transceiver node one slot period after a transmission of a near zone UE assigned to the same HARQ process. This timing advance value is then indicated to the UE. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128874 | PROCESS FOR SELECTION OF RESOURCES TO BE RELEASED IN CASE OF AN OVERLOAD IN A CELLULAR LAND MOBILE SYSTEM - Process and land mobile system for operating a cellular land mobile network in which in case of an overload certain resources of the land mobile network currently being used can be released in order to be available for higher priority applications, and resources can be usable at the same time by several applications, characterized in that selection of the resource to be released takes place, for all resources under consideration an efficiency factor being determined and the resource with the lowest efficiency factor being released. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128875 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO CONTROLLER, NETWORK DEVICE, RADIO BASE STATION AND CONCENTRATOR - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step of monitoring, by a radio base station | 06-02-2011 |
20110128876 | METHOD FOR NOTIFYING A NETWORK DOMAIN AND ACCESS POINT - A method for notifying a network domain and an Access Point (AP) are disclosed to overcome the problem that User Equipment (UE) entering the AP cell is notified but a UE leaving the AP cell is not notified. The method includes: the AP receiving a service request message sent by UE; and inserting a preset voice data packet into a user plane before a conversation to indicate the user of the UE a network domain that covers the UE currently, if it is determined that a current signaling connection is a Circuit Switched (CS) connection according to the service request message. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128877 | MULTIMEDIA SERVER WITH CHANNEL CONTROL AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A multimedia server includes a first transceiver that modulates a data signal to produce a first radio frequency (RF) signal and that transmits the first RF signal to a client over a first transceiver channel when the first transceiver is in a transceive mode. The first transceiver includes a first channel control that performs a first channel scan when the first transceiver is in a scan mode, that determines at least one performance parameter of the first transceiver channel and asserts a low performance signal when the at least one performance parameter compares unfavorably to a performance threshold, and that switches the first transceiver to a selected alternative transceiver channel when the low performance signal is asserted. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128878 | Method and System for Channel Estimation in a Single Channel (SC) Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) System Comprising Two-Transmit (2-TX) and Multiple-Receive (M-RX) Antennas for WCDMA/HSDPA - In a wireless system, a method and system for channel estimation in a single channel MIMO system comprising two-transmit and multiple-receive antennas for WCDMA/HSDPA are provided. A first receive antenna and at least one additional receive antenna may receive a plurality of SC communication signals transmitted from a first and an additional transmit antennas. Estimates of the propagation channels between transmit and receive antennas may be performed concurrently and may be determined from a baseband combined channel estimate. The integration time may be based on channel estimation accuracy and wireless modem performance. The signals received in the additional receive antennas may be multiplied by a rotation waveform to achieve channel orthogonality. The rotation waveform's amplitude and phase components may be modified based on the channel estimates. Rotation of the received signals in the additional receive antennas may be continuous or periodic. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128879 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK SIGNAL INCLUDING DATA AND CONTROL INFORMATION VIA UPLINK CHANNEL - A method and device for transmitting a first and second uplink signal, each having data and control information is provided. The method includes channel encoding the control information of the second uplink signal based on a number of symbols of control information to produce. The channel encoding includes determining the number of symbols in accordance with a payload size of the data of the first uplink signal and a total number of transmissible symbols of a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) of the first uplink signal. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128880 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF DIAGNOSING A VIDEO CONDITION EXPERIENCED AT A CUSTOMER PREMISES - A system and method for diagnosing video conditions experienced at one or more customer premises is disclosed. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, network device including a port coupled with a first customer premises over a network, a memory storing computer instructions, and a controller. The controller can execute the computer instructions for identifying a video condition experienced at the first customer premises where the video condition is associated with video content transmitted over the network, sending a first query to first equipment at the first customer premises, receiving first responses to the first query from the first equipment, sending a second query to second equipment at a second customer premises, receiving second responses to the second query from the second equipment, and associating a cause of the video condition with the first customer premises in response to receiving the second responses. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128881 | TECHNIQUES FOR MONITORING THE QUALITY OF SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS LINKS - A method for monitoring of a wireless link quality comprises measuring the link quality of a wireless link ( | 06-02-2011 |
20110128882 | RADIO TRANSMITTER AND RADIO RECEIVER - A radio transmitter and a radio receiver which reduce the number of blind determinations of control signals while maintaining resource utilization efficiency. A radio transmitter ( | 06-02-2011 |
20110128883 | RELAY STATION IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND OPERATING METHOD FOR THE RELAY STATION - A method for operating a relay station in a wireless communication system includes: obtaining information regarding assigned subframes among a plurality of subframes; monitoring a PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) carrying information regarding a radio resource allocation within the assigned subframes; and receiving data from a base station on the basis of the radio resource allocation of the monitored PDCCH. The relay station may operate to guarantee compatibility with an existing terminal in a wireless communication system. Also, a method for assigning radio resources between a base station and the relay station is defined. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128884 | ROUTING ADAPTABLE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC CONDITIONS IN A MULTIHOP NETWORK - A method for routing in a multihop network comprises, for at least one multihop network node: a/ obtaining a value of an electromagnetic field near said node; b/ predetermining a ratio between said obtained value and a predefined electromagnetic field threshold value; c/ using the predetermined ratio to optionally select said node as a routing node for at least one message in the multihop network. | 06-02-2011 |
20110134761 | DYNAMICALLY PROVISIONING VIRTUAL MACHINES - Method and computer program for managing the network response times experienced by virtual machines. Traffic is routed within an Ethernet network through a network switch according to IP addresses identified within Ethernet frames. A plurality of compute nodes are each coupled to the network switch via a separate Ethernet link. A response time is determined for each virtual machine running on the compute nodes, wherein the response time for a particular virtual machine is the difference between a time stamp in a TCP/IP Request message and a time stamp in a TCP/IP Response message for an IP address assigned to the particular virtual machine. The particular virtual machine may then be migrated to a target compute node in response to a particular one of the virtual machines on a particular one of the compute nodes having a response time that exceeds a response time setpoint. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134762 | Adaptation Protocols for Local Peer Group (LPG) Networks in Dynamic Roadway Environments - A method and system for determining a size of a local peer group (LPG) network in a dynamic roadway (mobile) environment is provided. In one embodiment, the method comprises measuring a roundtrip time between a first node and a second node, and utilizing the measured roundtrip time to select the size of the local peer group network from a lookup table. In another embodiment, the method comprises determining when the roundtrip time exceeds a time interval of the heartbeat signal, and when the roundtrip time exceeds the time interval of the heartbeat signal adjusting the size of the local peer group network. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134763 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING AUDIO AND VIDEO SYNCHRONIZATION - A method and system for diagnosing synchronization offsets in IPTV program signals includes generating audio counter values for audio packets and video counter values for video packets, such that synchronized audio packets and video packets have corresponding counter values. The correspondence may be fixed or may be a variable relationship during the IPTV program duration. The difference in arrival times of the audio and video packets may be measured at various IPTV network nodes, and compared to the IPTV program clock. Aberrant values for arrival times may result in a network synchronization alarm at an identified IPTV network node. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134764 | CONFLICT IDENTIFICATION IN LABEL SWITCHED SERVICES - Administrative logic is configured to discover routers in a network providing one or more label switched services and evaluate the configuration information of the label switched services to identify conflicts in the label switched services (e.g., configuration information errors). By identifying conflicts for one or more label switched services, the administrative logic generates a notification identifying the conflict and potentially the type of conflict. In particular, in one implementation, the administrative logic can use the configuration information of a first router to identify one or more peer routers of the first router and compare the configuration information in the various routers to identify apparent conflicts. The administrative logic can also communicate commands to the appropriate router to correct the misconfiguration and, in certain circumstances, establish proper communications or otherwise resolve service inconsistencies (e.g., VLL name mismatches). | 06-09-2011 |
20110134765 | Quality of Service Based Upon Location - Devices, systems and methods are disclosed which relate to implementing location-based quality of service (QoS) for applications running over a mobile communications network. A user sets up one or more “geofenced area(s)” delimited by position coordinates and associated with their mobile computing device. Also associated with each geofenced area is a “QoS Profile” listing a plurality of requested QoS attributes for traffic going to/from the user's mobile computing device or specific applications running on his/her mobile computing device over the mobile communications network. When the user enters a particular geofenced area associated with their mobile computing device, the QoS Profile associated with that geofenced area is loaded as the active QoS Profile for the mobile computing device. Additionally, as part of their QoS Profiles, a user optionally sets up other conditions which trigger changes in requested QoS attributes for their traffic over the mobile communications network. In embodiments of the present invention, the motion of the user is a condition which triggers changes in requested QoS attributes for their traffic over the mobile communications network. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134766 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FINDING LATENCY FLOOR IN PACKET NETWORKS - A latency floor between two nodes of a packet-switched network is estimated using transit times of a group of packets traversing the two nodes. In particular, a periodically generated histogram of packet transit times is used to estimate the latency floor. In some packet-switched networks, the behavior of some network elements changes drastically when the network is congested. Because latency floor cannot be accurately estimated under such conditions, packet transit times collected during a congested state of the network are discarded. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134767 | MEASURING ENCAPSULATION OVERHEAD AND TRANSPORT BANDWIDTH IN FRAME-BASED TRANSPORT - A system measures, at a network device, a first frame rate of frame-based transport based on a first frame size, and measures, at the network device, a second frame rate of the frame-based transport based on a second frame size, where the second frame size is different than the first frame size. The system determines per frame encapsulation overhead in the frame-based transport using the first frame rate, the first frame size, the second frame rate, and the second frame size. The system further determines total transport bandwidth associated with the frame-based transport using the first frame rate, the first frame size, the second frame rate, the second frame size, and the determined per frame encapsulation overhead. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134768 | NETWORK ANALYSIS USING NETWORK EVENT DATA - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, network device having a controller to combine network data sources enabling simplified database queries across a plurality of data sources, normalize the data from the plurality of data sources, continuously collect routing information between two routers of interest, selectively and automatically extract network data involving network events and routing, determine a temporal correlation among identified network events, determine a spatial correlation among identified network events, and troubleshoot an interactive media service based on a combination of the temporal correlation and the spatial correlation determined between the defined edge routers. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134769 | Multi-path load balancing using route controller - Systems and methods are described that employ multi-path BGP to realize dynamic multi-path load balancing based on an Intelligent Route Service Control Point (IRSCP) router control architecture that uses dynamic traffic flow information to perform dynamic load balancing to enable precise and effective load balancing. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134770 | OUTER LOOP POWER CONTROL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In an embodiment, an access network receives a message associated with a given user equipment (UE). The received message can be an uplink message received from the given UE itself (e.g., a measurement report, a cell update message), or can be a downlink message for transmission to the given UE (e.g., a call announcement message). The access network determines that the received message is associated with a communication session of a given type (e.g., a delay-sensitive communication session). The access network selects an uplink initial signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) target for the given UE based on the determination. The access network also starts a timer having a given expiration period based on the determination. The access network refrains from updating the uplink initial SIR target for the given UE at least until the timer expires. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134771 | JOINT PARAMETER DETERMINATION AND SEPARATE CQI GENERATION REPORTING FOR LTE-A MULTICARRIER - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for determining and reporting channel information feedback for multi-carrier operation. In one aspect, channel information feedback parameters may be determined jointly across component carriers, and channel information feedback reports may be generated and reported individually per component carrier. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134772 | Methods of radio communication involving multiple radio channels, and radio signal repeater and mobile station apparatuses implementing same - A method of facilitating radio communications involves receiving a first message from a first remote radio station on a first radio channel, transmitting the first message to a second remote radio station on a second radio channel, receiving a second message from the second remote radio station on a third radio channel, and transmitting the second message to the first remote radio station on a fourth radio channel. A method of radio communication involves receiving a first radio signal from a first remote radio station on a first radio channel, transmitting a second radio signal to the first remote radio station on a second radio channel, receiving a third radio signal from a second remote radio station on a third radio channel, and transmitting a fourth radio signal to the second remote radio station on a fourth radio channel. Radio signal repeater and mobile station apparatuses are also disclosed. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134773 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING PROPAGATION DELAY TIME - An apparatus for estimating a propagation delay time using signal transmission/reception receives an initial reception signal or a signal of which frequency offset is compensated to correspond to a predetermined condition and detects a peak time of a received signal. Next, the propagation delay time estimating apparatus estimates and compensates frequency offset of the signal of which the peak time is detected and redetects the peak time of the received signal of which the frequency offset is compensated to compensate the peak time of the received signal. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134774 | COMPONENT CARRIER ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for addressing wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) behavior in response to configuration, configuration parameters and access issues related to the activation/deactivation process when the WTRU may be configured with multiple serving cells or carrier aggregation. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134775 | Closed Loop Precoding Over a Set of Parallel Channels - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for applying successive multi-rank beamforming strategies (e.g., successive precoding strategies) for the design of precoders over a set of parallel channels. Successive beamforming is applied to a narrow band channel model and is also applied for finer quantization of a single beamforming vector (e.g., recursive beamforming). A first embodiment provides the optimal approach with high complexity. An alternative embodiment provides successive beamforming for near optimal precoding selection with medium complexity. A low complexity method for precoder selection is also provided wherein a channel representative matrix for the set of parallel channels is determined and successive beamforming on the calculated channel representative is applied. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134776 | Method for Transmitting Data in a WLAN Network - A method for transmitting data in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) including transmitting a WLAN message between a terminal device and an access node of the WLAN network in the Layer 2 protocol laver. An Extensible Authentication Protocol (PAP) message is transmitted in the WLAN message. The EAP message includes a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message having SIP authentication data. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134777 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSPORTING PACKET IN REAL TIME - In order for a packet transporting system to transport packets for service in real time, the system estimates whether the first route for transporting the packet provides the quality of service (QoS) required by the service. If the first route is qualified to provide the QoS for transporting the packet, the system estimates whether the first route group including the first route satisfies the reliability required by the service. If the first route group is disqualified to provide the reliability required by the service, the system searches for the second route different from the first route, adds the second route to the first route group, and estimates whether the updated first route group satisfies the reliability, and if, as a result of the reliability estimation, the updated first route group is qualified to provide the reliability, transports the packet in real time by using the first route group which is comprised of the first route and the second route. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134778 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SCHEMES - A method and MS apparatus for receiving a signal in a wireless communication system supporting a plurality of wireless communication schemes are disclosed. The method for receiving a signal in a wireless communication system supporting both communication of a first MS using a first wireless communication scheme and communication of a second MS using a second wireless communication scheme includes receiving from a BS a downlink signal in a downlink subframe allocated to a second zone dedicated to communication of the second MS in a downlink zone of a specific frame by the second MS. The number of downlink subframes allocated to the second zone by the BS is one, the allocated downlink subframe is a first downlink subframe of the second zone, and the first downlink subframe of the second zone is a Type-2 subframe which consists of seven OFDMA symbols. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134779 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD BASED ON NUMBER OF MESSAGES - A base station calculates the number of terminals which have transmitted messages at ith frame, and calculates the number of messages to be transmitted at (i+1)th frame by using the number of terminals which have transmitted the messages in the ith frame. The base station calculates a transmission probability by using the number of messages to be transmitted in the (i+1)th frame and the number of random access slots, and transmits the number of messages to be transmitted in the (i+1)th frame and the transmission probability to the plurality of terminals. The base station receives a message transmitted by a pertinent terminal, whose number of messages to be transmitted in the (i+1)th frame is greater than the number of random access slots, among the plurality of terminals, according to the result obtained by comparing the transmission probability and a random number. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134780 | Method of Requesting CQI Reports - In a method and a device for requesting Channel Quality Indication (CQI) reports from a mobile station of a cellular radio system, the CQI reports are requested in response to a measured Block Error Rate (BLER) of transmissions from the mobile station. In accordance with one embodiment of the present invention a CQI report is requested if the BLER of the mobile station is above a predetermined threshold value C. The threshold value C can be set to a value related to the BLER target. In particular the value C can be set to the same value or as a value close the BLER that is targeted to try to adapt the CQI report request to how well the base station knows the channel. It can also be set higher or lower to also consider how much CQ1 reporting the base station estimates can be afforded when it comes to uplink resources and uplink grant signaling in the downlink. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134781 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND LOCALIZATION DEVICE - A mobile communication and localization device cooperating with a plurality of mobile network devices includes a processing unit; a data structure containing a plurality of entries, each entry containing information about a corresponding mobile network device and a corresponding time stamp; a unit for sending data packets at respective transmission instants, each data packet containing position data indicating the position of corresponding mobile network devices; a unit for receiving data packets sent by sender mobile devices belonging to the plurality of mobile network devices; and a unit for determining the relative position of corresponding mobile network devices based on position data contained in the data packets. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134782 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In the case that the transmission signal precoding information cannot be transmitted, the transmission signal precoding information is clarified that is used to calculate the reception quality information performed immediately after the case, and a base station apparatus perform suitable communication resource allocation. A mobile station apparatus has a feedback information control section | 06-09-2011 |
20110134783 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROACTIVE MANAGEMENT OF A COMMUNICATION NETWORK THROUGH MONITORING A USER NETWORK INTERFACE - Systems and methods for proactive management of a communication network through monitoring a user network interface are disclosed. An example method disclosed herein to proactively monitor user network interfaces comprises obtaining first information related to operation of a physical port, determining that the physical port implements both a first user network interface and a second user network interface, combining the first information with second information related to operation of a first logical port implementing the first user network interface, but not implementing the second user network interface, to assess performance of the first user network interface, and combining the first information with third information related to operation of a second logical port implementing the second user network interface, but not implementing the first user network interface, to assess performance of the second user network interface. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134784 | ALWAYS-ON WIRELESS INTERNET PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION - In accordance with the teachings described herein, systems and methods are provided for always-on wireless IP communication. An access provider network (APN) that includes an always-on packet data serving node (PDSN) may be used to communicate over a wireless communication link with a mobile station. The PDSN may include an inactivity timer and may be used to set the inactivity timer to an inactivity timer starting value and send a starting value estimate to the mobile station over the wireless communication link, wherein the starting value estimate is a function of the inactivity timer starting value. The mobile station may include an inactivity timer estimate and may be used to receive the starting value estimate and set the inactivity timer estimate to the starting value estimate. The mobile station may also be used to reset the inactivity timer estimate to the starting value estimate when the mobile station communicates with the APN. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134785 | SIGNAL GAIN CONTROL METHOD, SYSTEM, MEDIA GATEWAY AND MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER - A signal gain control method, a system, a Media Gateway (MG), and a Media Gateway Controller (MGC) are disclosed. The method includes: an MG receives control information from an MGC, where the control information is about adjusting gain of a signal by setting the gain to a specific value directly or by increasing a value of the current gain; and the MG adjusts the gain of the signal according to the control information. Through an extended (media) gateway control protocol, the MGC delivers control information to the MG, thus implementing gain adjustment. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134786 | Broadband Cable Network Utilizing Common Bit-Loading - A broadband cable network (“BCN”) for determining a common bit-loading modulation scheme for communicating between a plurality of nodes in the BCN is disclosed. The BCN may include a transmitting node within the plurality of nodes where the transmitting node is capable of sending a probe signal to the plurality of nodes, and at least one receiving node within the plurality of nodes in signal communication with the transmitting node. The at least one receiving node is capable of transmitting a first response signal in response to receiving the probe signal. The first response signal includes a first bit-loading modulation scheme determined by the at least one receiving node. The transmitting node is further capable of determining the common bit-loading modulation scheme from the first response signal. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134787 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERMITTENT COMMUNICATION - When an intermittent communication mode is entered, a check period and intermittent reception mode period thereof are determined and the intermittent reception mode is reentered through an ignored process, that is, when the intermittent reception mode is entered, the check period and intermittent reception mode period are determined in overhead | 06-09-2011 |
20110134788 | NOTIFYING METHOD, AND ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE - It is specified in a manner such that a frame containing a first period formed by a plurality of slots and a second period having a predetermined length is repeated. A detecting unit detects a slot, which is usable for the communications between a plurality of other terminal apparatuses, from among a plurality of slots in the first period of a frame containing the first period and the second period. A modem unit and an RF unit broadcast information on the detected slot. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134789 | REPORT METHOD AND ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE - It is specified that a frame containing at least the plurality of slots is repeated. A detecting unit detects a slot usable in the communications between terminal apparatuses, from among a plurality of slots. A modem unit and an RF unit broadcast the information on the detected slot. A power measuring unit in the detecting unit measures the respective received powers of the plurality of slots, and an empty slot identifying unit identifies a slot whose received power is less than a threshold value. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134790 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR BIT RATE ALLOCATION FOR POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS - A method is provided for controlling point-to-multipoint communications. Channel condition information for multiple receivers of a point-to-multipoint group is received. Signal-to-noise ratio distortion is estimated for a point-to-multipoint group on the basis of the received channel condition information and available encoding bit rates. A bit rate allocation providing an optimal overall signal-to-noise ratio for transmission to the point-to-multipoint group is selected. Encoding of content to the point-to-multipoint group is controlled in accordance with the selected bit rate allocation. | 06-09-2011 |
20110141918 | TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING METHOD AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides the method and system of a Time Division Multiplexing which makes use of a number of symbols in the time domain transmitting data sequence in parallel. The method includes: the transmitting terminal forms the transmission signals which are overlapped by a number of symbols in the time domain, and the receiving terminal does data sequence detection in the time domain for the received signals according to the one-to-one relationship between the transmission data sequence and the time waveform of the transmission data sequence. In addition, the present invention also provides a kind of Time Division Multiplexing system based on the above method of the Time Division Multiplexing. The present invention makes actively use of these overlapping to produce the coding constraint relation, thus the spectral efficiency of the system is improved by a large margin. In random time-varying channel, with reasonable arrangement, the transmission reliability of the system can also be improved at the same time, and at the same threshold, Signal Interference Ratio and its spectral efficiency are far higher than those of the high-dimension modulation and other technologies. At the same spectrum efficiency, the number of the total levels of its systems and the needed threshold Signal Interference Ratio are also reduced significantly than those of the high-dimension modulation and other technologies. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141919 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VIRTUAL AGENT SESSION MONITORING AND BARGE-IN - An approach is provided for virtual agent session monitoring and barge-in. A platform monitors content of a communication session between a virtual agent and a user and determines whether the content satisfies a pre-defined rule. Further, the platform selectively initiates a barge-in of the communication session by a live agent based on the determination. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141920 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONTROLLING INTERNET PROTOCOL PACKET HANDLING IN A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - In one embodiment, the present disclosure is a method and apparatus for dynamically controlling Internet Protocol packet flows in a Voice over Internet Protocol network. In one embodiment, a method for controlling flows of packets in a network includes obtaining a list identifying at least one user element that is authorized to register with the network and dynamically configuring a manner in which at least one border element handles the packets in accordance with the list. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141921 | Identifying Network Performance Alert Conditions - A computer-implemented method includes receiving diagnostic data from a plurality of network interface devices via a plurality of network connections corresponding to the network interface devices. Each of the plurality of network interface devices includes a diagnostic module to gather diagnostic data pertaining to the network interface device, to gather diagnostic data pertaining to the corresponding network connection, and to gather diagnostic data pertaining to a video device at a user location. The video device is coupled to the network interface device to receive video data via the corresponding network connection. The method also includes analyzing the diagnostic data at the computing device to identify one or more performance alert conditions associated with a service provider network. The method further includes generating an output identifying the one or more performance alert conditions. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141922 | ESTIMATING DATA THROUGHPUT - A method may include transmitting a first data burst and a second data burst to a circuit or network under test, the first data burst having a smaller size than the second data burst. The method may also include determining a first latency associated with the first data burst based on time information associated with the first data burst and determining a second latency associated with the second data burst based on time information associated with the second data burst. The method may further include calculating an estimated throughput of the circuit or network under test based on a difference in the first and second latencies, a difference in size for the first and second data bursts, and a first data rate at which the first and second data bursts were transmitted. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141923 | System and Method for Hierarchical Visualization of Data - A system and method for monitoring IP flows in a network is disclosed. A plurality of monitor probes are coupled to links in the network, the monitor probes capture data packets from the links and determine protocols in OSI Layers 3, 4, and 5/7 of the packets. A user interface receives user inputs selecting the links and protocols for analysis. A display is coupled to the monitor probes and the user interface. The display and user interface receiving a user selection of links for analysis and display a first protocol analysis to the user, the first protocol analysis display comprising a pie chart representing all OSI Layer 3 protocols captured on the selected links, a pie chart representing all OSI Layer 4 protocols captured on the selected links, and a pie chart representing all OSI Layer 5/7 protocols captured on the selected links. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141924 | System and Method for Filtering High Priority Signaling and Data for Fixed and Mobile Networks - A system and method for monitoring IP flows in a telecommunications network is disclosed. Data packets are captured from the links in the telecommunications network via a plurality of monitoring probes. The data packets are filtered, using an interface processor, to classify the data packets by subscriber identification and link identification to create classified packets. The classified packets are filtered by application, using a packet processor, to create call session records. A subscriber record is created, using a subscriber session processor, the subscriber record binding subscriber information from the call session records, the subscriber record comprising a plurality of fields including a high value tag. One or more of the network nodes are controlled using a configuration manager according to policy rules that correspond to the high value tag. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141925 | Measuring call quality - Provided is a method, computer program product, and apparatus for estimating the quality of a call in which a first user terminal will comprise an end point. The method comprises establishing an end-to-end connection between a first user terminal and a node, which end-to-end connection is via an access point of a network by which the first user terminal is connected to the network; displaying information indicative of an expected quality of a call in which the first user terminal will comprise an end point, in dependence on information indicative of the quality of the end-to-end connection; and providing call initiation means for enabling a user to then selectively establish a call between the first user terminal and a callee. Also provided is a method, computer program product, and apparatus for estimating the quality of a call between a first user terminal and a potential callee. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141926 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISPATCHING A CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR FEEDBACK IN MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - In accordance with one or more aspects and corresponding disclosure thereof, various aspects are described in connection with channel quality indicator (CQI) feedback in connection with one or more downlink carriers. An anchor carrier scheme is employed to provide channel quality indicator (CQI) feedback of one or more downlink carriers. An indication is set to identify that a designated uplink carrier is used to convey the CQI feedback. An uplink carrier is selected from a set of uplink carriers as an anchor carrier to convey the CQI feedback. CQI feedback is transmitted for one or more downlink carriers using the designated carrier. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141927 | PRECODING CONTROL CHANNELS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate precoding signals transmitted over downlink control channels to provide transmit diversity. A dedicated reference signal (DRS) related to a wireless device can additionally be precoded such that the wireless device can determine a precoder or related parameters based at least in part on performing a channel estimate for the precoded DRS signal. The wireless device can utilize the determined precoder or related parameters to decode precoded signals received over downlink control channel resources. Additionally or alternatively, an access point can signal a sequence of precoders to the wireless device. The access point can cycle through the sequence of precoders to precode signals for transmission over downlink control channel resources, and the wireless device can decode the signals based at least in part on similarly cycling through the precoders for received signals. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141928 | SIGNALING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION IN LTE-A - Methods and systems for transmitting uplink control information in an LTE Advanced system are disclosed. A user device may determine whether uplink control information and/or available channels meet certain criteria and determine whether the uplink control information should be transmitted on a physical uplink control channel, a physical uplink shared channel, or both, based on the criteria. Criteria may include the size of the uplink control information (absolute size or relative to space available on a channel or a threshold value), the type of control information bits, the number of available (i.e., active or configured) component carriers, and the amount of power that may be required to transmit the uplink control information on more than one channel. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141929 | MEDIA FORWARDING FOR A GROUP COMMUNICATION SESSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments are directed to media forwarding for a group communication session within a wireless communications system. A server receives a frame for a given timeslot from each of a first plurality of access terminals participating in the group communication session, each of the received frames having an associated data rate. The server selects at least one and less than all of the received frames based at least in part on the associated data rates of each of the received frames. The server sends the selected at least one frame to a second plurality of access terminals participating in the group communication session. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141930 | BASEBAND COMPENSATION FOR PHASE DISCONTINUITIES IN RADIO FREQUENCY COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method for compensating for phase discontinuities on a communication device is described. A communication device may determine a desired output power. The communication device may determine a Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) gain corresponding to the desired output power. The communication device may determine a cumulative phase offset based on the DAC gain. The communication device may apply the DAC gain. The communication device may apply a phase compensation to a rotator to adjust for the cumulative phase offset. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141931 | FEEDBACK GENERATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPLINK TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL - A feedback generation method for uplink Transmit Power Control (TPC) in a mobile communication system is provided. A feedback generation system for uplink TPC includes an uplink information receiver to receive uplink information from a terminal, to measure a Signal-to-Interference Noise Ratio (SINR) value with respect to the received uplink information, and to measure a movement speed of the terminal, a transmission power adjustment value setting unit to set a transmission power adjustment value based on the movement speed of the terminal; an adjusted SINR calculator to calculate an adjusted SINR value, based on an expected SINR value and the measured SINR value; and a feedback information regenerator to regenerate feedback information based on the transmission power adjustment value and the adjusted SINR value, and to transmit the regenerated feedback information to the terminal. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141932 | NODE DEVICE AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - In a node device | 06-16-2011 |
20110141933 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING POWER FOR UPLINK - A method and apparatus for controlling power for uplink are provided. When a base station is moving or unable to communicate with others, at least one interference amount is estimated for a neighboring base station based on a path gain between a terminal and the neighboring base station and a transmission power of each encoding packet size and transmission format included in a candidate group related to scheduling transmission power parameters. A target interference amount is determined based on an interference amount control value and an initial target interference amount according to a processing load of a serving base station, and one interference amount is selected from estimated interference amounts based on the target interference amount. The terminal determines the transmission power based on an encoding packet size and a transmission format corresponding to the selected interference amount. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141934 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL TEST APPARATUS AND TEST RESULT DISPLAY METHOD - [Task] To provide a mobile communication terminal test apparatus capable of displaying an EVM or a transmission power measurement result in a frequency division multiple access communication scheme by distinguishing between the allocation band and the non-allocation band. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141935 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING MINIMUM MEAN-SQUARED-ERROR IN SINGLE-CARRIER FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for receiving a Minimum Mean-Squared-Error (MMSE) in a Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) system is provided. The method includes, transforming a signal in a time domain received through an antenna into a signal in a frequency domain, and discriminating between bands respectively allocated to terminals in a frequency domain, estimating a channel and computing a weight value from the signal transformed into the frequency domain, and detecting an MMSE, computing a time-domain bias from the weight value and a channel estimation value of the signal transformed into the frequency domain, normalizing the detected MMSE by using the computed time-domain bias, and transforming the normalized signal into a normalized signal in a time domain, decoding the normalized signal transformed to the time domain, and transmitting the decoded normalized signal transformed into the time domain to each of the terminals. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141936 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - A determination unit of a transmission apparatus determines a transmission timing of notice data (SR) for informing a reception apparatus that the event data has been transmitted according to a transmission state of the event data. An transmission unit transmits the SR at the timing determined by the determination unit. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141937 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING A PATTERN WITHIN A DATA PACKET AND DETECTING DATA PACKETS RELATED TO A DATA PACKET INCLUDING A DETECTED PATTERN - Systems, devices, and methods for finding a captured data packet including a data pattern of interest and data packets associated with the found data packet are herein provided. A traffic flow of captured data packets may be received by a network captured traffic distribution device and may be duplicated. A traffic flow of captured data packets may be scanned for data packets including a data pattern of interest and identifying information may be determined for any found data packets. A duplicate traffic flow of captured data packets may also be scanned for data packets with identifying information that matches a found data packet. An egress port for the found data packet may be determined and both the found data packet and any data packets with identifying information matching found data packet might be transmitted to the determined egress port. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141938 | ADAPTIVE DATA RATE CONTROL FOR NARROWCAST NETWORKS - A system to provide narrowcast communications uses adaptive data rate control to individual subscribers such that the effects of precipitation or other link conditions, which are not common to all subscribers, is mitigated. The invention takes advantage of the fact that the narrowcast data consist of packets which are individually addressed to specific subscribers, or groups of subscribers. The narrowcast data is communicated on a plurality of channels, each of potentially differing data rates. The subscribers are assigned a particular channel, based upon their link quality, to receive packets addressed to them. The lower data rate channel will be less affected by adverse link conditions and are hence assigned to subscribers most likely to incur adverse link conditions. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141939 | Method and Apparatus for Power and Handover Management in a Multiple Wireless Technology Communication Device - Method and apparatuses for power and handoff management in a multiple wireless technology communication device are disclosed. One method includes a wireless device communicating using a first technology, and detecting availability of a second technology. Logic control of the wireless device receives a power level indicator of communication signals of the first technology, and determining an acceptable power level of communication signals of the second technology based on the power level indicator. The logic control determines a requested power level of communication signals of the second technology based on a request from a base station. The logic control provides a modified link quality representation to the base station if the requested power level is greater than the acceptable power level. The wireless device transmits to the base station with the second technology at the acceptable power level. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141940 | METHOD FOR MEASURING AND REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A Mobile Subscriber Station (MSS) and an active Base Station (BS) for measuring/reporting a channel quality in a broadband wireless access communication system. The MSS includes a receiver for receiving, from an active BS, channel quality measurement information for the MSS to measure channel qualities of the active BS and a plurality of neighbor BSs, and channel quality report information defining a report mode for the MSS to report measured channel qualities of the active BS and the plurality of neighbor BSs, a processor for measuring the channel qualities of the active BS and the plurality of neighbor BSs according to the channel quality measurement information, and a transmitter for reporting the measured channel qualities of the active BS and the plurality of neighbor BSs to the active BS according to the channel quality report information. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141941 | Method and Apparatus of Transmitting Control Information in Wireless Communication System - A method and an apparatus of transmitting control information in a wireless communication systema are provided. The method includes transmitting first control information and second control information through an uplink component carrier (UL CC), wherein the first control information is for a first downlink component carrier (DL CC), and the second control information is for a second DL CC. | 06-16-2011 |
20110149749 | Measurement Apparatus, Displays and Methods for Indicating Channel Status - The present invention is directed to a display for easily understanding time changes of communication conditions of channels using a plurality of sub-carriers. Layers corresponding to the plurality of channels are displayed along the time base in such a manner that width of each layer is determined in accordance with the number of sub-carriers used for each channel at any given time. Additionally, colors or patterns of each layer may be modified in accordance with modulation types or power levels of the corresponding layer. The relationship between colors or patterns of the layer and modulation types or power levels is displayed. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149750 | SUBSCRIBER FALLBACK/MIGRATION MECHANISMS IN IMS GEOGRAPHIC REDUNDANT NETWORKS - A system and method for maintaining service availability for an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network is provided. A primary network receives a request from one or more subscribers of the primary network to place a call. The primary network registers the one or more subscribers. The primary network assigns an identifier to data of the one or more registered subscribers for the registration. The identifier associates the one or more subscribers with the primary network upon migration of the one or more subscribers from the primary network to the secondary network. The secondary network monitors the primary network to detect an event on the primary network. The secondary network migrates the one or more subscribers from the secondary network to the primary network based on the identifier and after initiation of the migration in response to the occurrence of the event on the primary network. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149751 | Estimating Communication Conditions - Embodiments are configured to provide communication features, including providing channel condition estimates for a communication path, such as packet loss, jitter, and/or available bandwidth, but are not so limited. In an embodiment, a method uses aspects of in-band data packets to provide channel condition estimates. In one embodiment, a system includes a bandwidth estimation component that operates to classify payload packets as part of performing capacity estimation and available bandwidth estimation operations. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149752 | TRACING SUPPORT IN A ROUTER - Method and router supporting tracing of a packet therein. A first service module receives the packet and a memory module stores a tracing extension header. The extension header comprises an identifier of a receiving service module and a tracing identifier associated with the packet. The extension is stored following reception of the packet by the first service module. Optionally, the receiving module may be the first service module that further receives the packet through a network interface module. The first service module may also generate the tracing identifier associated with the packet that uniquely identifies the tracing in the receiving module. The router may comprise a second service module and a second memory module associated thereto. The first service module may further append the tracing extension header to the packet and forwards the packet to the second service module. The second memory module may then store the extension header thereupon. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149753 | SWITCHING BETWEEN MEDIA BROADCAST STREAMS HAVING VARYING LEVELS OF QUALITY - In general, this disclosure relates to techniques for switching between media broadcast streams having varying levels of quality. In one example method, a processing pipeline of a communication device processes a first broadcast stream representing a first version of media content. The processing pipeline includes quality checkpoints at which broadcast stream quality may be determined, and receives a second, different broadcast stream that is broadcasted at another data rate. The second broadcast stream represents a second version of the media content of different media quality. The processing pipeline measures a quality of the first broadcast stream and a quality of the second broadcast stream at one or more of the quality checkpoints, and switches the processing from the first broadcast stream to the second broadcast stream if the quality of the second broadcast stream exceeds a defined threshold at one or more of the quality checkpoints. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149754 | Voice Quality Analysis Device and Method Thereof - A portion of a voice call is forked by copying packets associated with voice call at a device providing an interface between two networks. The packets to be copied are identified based on address and port information associated with the voice call. The portion of the voice call is analyzed to determine the source of any voice quality issues associated with the call. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149755 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LISTENING POLICIES FOR VIRTUAL SERVERS OF APPLIANCE - The present invention is directed towards a method for using a listening policy for a virtual server on an intermediary device. An intermediary device establishes for a first virtual server a first listening policy with an expression for evaluating packets received by the intermediary device to determine whether the packet may access the first virtual server. The intermediary device listens for packets at a first internet protocol (IP) address and a first port specified for the first virtual server. Then, the intermediary device evaluates the expression of the first listening policy to a first packet received at the first IP address and first port and determines whether to provide the first packet to the first virtual server based on a result of the evaluation. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149756 | PACKET BASED LOCATION PROVISIONING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system may include a plurality of wireless devices, each wireless device including a time source and configured to selectively communicate with at least one other of the plurality of wireless devices by way of a packet-based time precision protocol. The plurality of wireless devices may include a first wireless device and a second wireless device, the first wireless device being configured to determine whether the first wireless device and the second wireless device are in selective communication over a single-hop wireless link; determine a one-way delay over the single-hop wireless link by way of at least one packed-based time precision protocol message; and calculate a distance measurement between the first wireless device and the second wireless device based at least in part on the one-way delay. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149757 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING CELL DETECTION USING ADDITIONAL PHYSICAL CHANNELS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The described apparatus and methods may include a receiver configured to receive a signal, the signal being a combination of physical channel signals that each correspond to a different one of a plurality of physical channels, and a controller configured to capture signal energy from at least two of the physical channel signals, and detect a cell based on the captured signal energy. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149758 | CHANNEL QUALITY INDEXING AND REVERSE INDEXING - Channel quality indexing and reverse indexing is described. In one example, a quality value for subbands of a radio communications system are measured. An index for each quality measurement is then determined and a combinatorial index is generated to reflect the indices and the selected subbands. The combinatorial index is then sent to a radio station using a radio communications channel. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149759 | RANKING AND SWITCHING OF WIRELESS CHANNELS IN A BODY AREA NETWORK OF MEDICAL DEVICES - Operating techniques and methodologies for a body area network of medical devices are provided. One technique relates to an intelligent channel hopping scheme that detects loss of wireless synchronization on an initial wireless channel, thereafter obtains a measure of quality for the initial wireless channel, and then selects a new wireless channel when the obtained measure of quality fails to satisfy a threshold criteria. Another operating technique dynamically adapts an ordered list of available wireless channels in accordance with a quality measure of the available wireless channels. Thus, when quality degradation associated with a first wireless channel is detected, the ordered list can be updated to indicate a lower preference for the first wireless channel and to indicate a higher preference for a second wireless channel that does not suffer from quality degradation. Another channel hopping or switching technique selects wireless channels in a manner that is influenced by the current geographic position of the medical device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149760 | Group resource allocation systems and techniques - Embodiments of systems and methods for group resource allocation are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149761 | Technique for determining transport capacity required to achieve controllable worst case throughput - A link in a communications network is provisioned with a particular bandwidth capacity determined as a function of a “sub-par customer data fraction.” The sub-par data fraction is given by a) the amount of data transferred under sub-par condition divided by b) the total data transferred, where “sub-par condition” means that data is transferred below a given target bit rate. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149762 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING ENHANCED RELATIVE GRANTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Aspects of a method and system for detecting enhanced relative grants in a wireless communications system may include determining one or more signed signal power levels, wherein the one or more signed signal power levels may be positive E-RGCH signal levels or negative E-HICH signal levels. A probability density function may be estimated from the determined one or more signed signal power levels, and a decision threshold based on the estimated probability density function may be set. The probability density function may be estimated based on symmetry of the probability density function. The decision threshold may be set to achieve a desired probability of false positive detections. The decision threshold may be used to distinguish a received HOLD signal from a received DOWN signal for an E-RGCH channel, or to distinguish a received DTX signal from a received ACK signal for an E-HICH channel. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149763 | SYSTEM FOR MEASURING THE TRANSMISSION BANDWIDTH FOR MULTIMEDIA STREAMING AND METHOD FOR SAME - A method and system for measuring a transmission bandwidth which includes: a server for transmitting packets of multimedia data to a receiving apparatus, receiving a time stamp from the receiving apparatus, calculating a transmission bandwidth in real time from the received time stamp, and streaming the multimedia data to the receiving apparatus in accordance with the calculated transmission bandwidth; with the receiving apparatus receiving packets of the multimedia data from the server, recording received time stamp for each of received packets, and transmitting the received time stamp to the server by a predetermined cycle. According to the present invention, transmission bandwidth is measured using data actually transmitted and that streaming of media is suited to a transmission bandwidth to meet QoS (Quality of Service) requirements. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149764 | RADIO SELECTION IN A MULTI-RADIO DEVICE - Techniques for supporting communication by a wireless device having a set of radios and supporting a set of applications are described. In an aspect, radio selection may be performed based on interference information and additional information to obtain good performance. In one design, a plurality of radios available for use on the wireless device may be identified. Interference information indicative of interference between the plurality of radios may be obtained, e.g., from an interference database or a converted interference database. Additional information used for radio selection may also be obtained and may include information for communication profiles, communication preferences, application requirements, radio capabilities, etc. At least one radio may be selected for use for communication from among the plurality of radios based on the interference information and the additional information. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149765 | OPEN LOOP CHANNEL REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for reporting channel quality indicator (CQI) in a wireless communication system are described. In one design, a UE determines CQI based on an assumption of a set of precoding matrices being used by a base station for data transmission to the UE. The base station may or may not actually use the set of precoding matrices assumed by the UE. The UE sends the CQI to the base station and thereafter receives data transmission sent by the base station based on the CQI. In one design, the UE determines the set of precoding matrices for a set of time-frequency resources available for data transmission to the UE. The UE determines the received signal quality of each time-frequency resource based on a precoding matrix for that time-frequency resource. The UE then determines the CQI based on the received signal qualities of the set of time-frequency resources. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149766 | ASSOCIATION SUPPORTING APPARATUS AND METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An association supporting apparatus in a wireless communication system includes: a transmission/reception unit configured to scan associable access points (APs) among a plurality of APs existing in a plurality of station (STA) wireless networks, and receive state information from the scanned APs; a calculation unit configured to calculate transmit opportunity (TXOP) periods with respect to the APs by using the received state information of the APs; and a determination unit configured to determine a predetermined AP among the plurality of scanned APs, considering usable power levels of the APs and the number of associable STAs during the calculated TXOP periods. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149767 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING NODE IDENTIFICATION - Provided is a method and system for managing an identification (ID) of a widely moved sensor node. The method includes recognizing, at a gateway, a node to check an ID of the node, allocating an ID of the gateway as the ID of the node when the ID of the node checked by the gateway is null, sending the ID of the node to a management server when the ID of the node checked by the gateway is not null and is different from the ID of the gateway, and when a new ID is received from the management server, allocating the new ID as the ID of the node. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149768 | DUAL-BAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CHANNEL ALLOCATION USING THE SAME - A dual-band wireless communication apparatus and a channel allocation method thereof, the channel allocation method of a dual-band wireless communication apparatus including a plurality of wireless communicators includes: receiving wireless environment information via at least one of the wireless communicators; changing, at a wireless communicator not allocated a channel among the wireless communicators, a frequency band according to a received signal strength; and scanning, at the wireless communicator not allocated the channel, channels in the changed frequency band and setting one of the scanned channels to a channel for communicating with an external device. Thus, the dual-band wireless communication apparatus can offer various wireless application services by minimizing interference caused when a plurality of wireless terminals operates within one wireless communication apparatus. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149769 | TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL IN MULTI-HOP NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing power control for intermediary access points in wireless networks, such as relay nodes. Parameters related to intermediary access point communications can be provided to a serving access point, and the serving access point can generate power adjustment values and related commands based at least in part on the parameters. The parameters can include load on the intermediary access point, signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) and/or similar parameters related to communications between the intermediary access points and/or one or more UEs, etc. In addition, end-to-end power control can be provided where intermediary access points report SINR to serving access points allowing serving access points to adjust downlink transmission power. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149770 | Adaptive MAC fragmentation and rate selection for 802.11 wireless networks - A method for setting and adjusting MAC fragmentation threshold for IEEE 802.11 networks operating at different data rates is presented. The fragmentation threshold is adjusted based on throughput performance, delay constraints and hidden node influence. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149771 | MOBILE STATION AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile station (UE) according to the present invention includes: a CP length determiner unit ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149772 | TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC LANE OPERATION IN MULTI-LANE BASED ETHERNET SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - Provided is a transmission apparatus for a dynamic lane operation in a multi-lane based Ethernet system, including: a monitor to monitor whether at least one lane being used by the transmission apparatus is modified; an upper layer manager to transmit, to a Reconciliation Sublayer (RS) of the transmission apparatus, lane change information associated with the modified at least one lane; and an RS manager to transmit the lane change information to an RS of a reception apparatus corresponding to the RS of the transmission apparatus. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149773 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are method and apparatus for receiving data in a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving data through one antenna or a plurality of reception antennas; measuring received signal power levels and a noise power level from the received data; calculating a gain control value of an automatic gain control process; compensating the measured received signal power levels based on the calculated gain compensation value; calculating a predetermined ratio based on the compensated received signal power levels and the noise power level; and restoring the received data using the calculated predetermined ratio. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149774 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMIT-RESPONSE TIMING FOR RELAY OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - An apparatus and method for relay operation in a wireless communication system comprising determining a first set of subframes for downlink communication from an eNB to a relay node; determining a second set of subframes for uplink communication from the relay node to the eNB; determining a downlink (DL) hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) timing between a first control transmission and a HARQ acknowledge (ACK) message based on a first minimum delay and the first and the second sets of subframes; and determining an uplink (UL) hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) timing between a second control transmission and an uplink transmission based on a second minimum delay and the first and the second sets of subframes. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149775 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERWORKING BETWEEN MEDIA QUALITY ASSESSMENT AT TERMINAL DEVICE AND QOS CONTROL IN TRANSPORT NETWORK - Provided is a service quality of experience (QoE) predicting and managing system. The service QoE predicting and managing system may include a media quality measurement system (MQMS) to measure a QoE of media, and a quality of service (QoS)/QoE control system (QCS) to measure QoS parameter information, to predict the QoE based on the measured QoS information, to calculate a QoS parameter adjustment value by comparing and analyzing the QoE measured by the MQMS and the predicted QoE, and to transmit the calculated QoS parameter adjustment value to a service quality control system (SCS). | 06-23-2011 |
20110149776 | NETWORK INTERFACE CARD DEVICE AND METHOD OF PROCESSING TRAFFIC USING THE NETWORK INTERFACE CARD DEVICE - Disclosed are a network interface card device and a traffic processing method using the network interface card device, the method including receiving a packet from a network, determining, by a first chipset, whether a detailed analysis is performed by verifying the received packet, and analyzing in detail, by a second chipset, with respect to a packet using the detailed analysis. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149777 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FILTERING MEDIA PACKETS - A method including: receiving, at a video conferencing device, a packet of a video conferencing media stream, the video conferencing device including a processor; determining, by the video conferencing device, whether a length of the packet is sufficiently long to contain media; sending a request to a Look-up Table memory using the media stream ID as an input value while in parallel determining, with the processor, whether the packet is a valid media packet; in response to receiving a destination address in a media processing network from the Look-up Table memory and determining that the packet is a valid media packet, modifying, by the video conferencing device, a header of the packet with the destination address received from the Look-up Table memory; and transmitting, by the video conferencing device, the packet to the modified destination address. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149778 | POWER CONTROL METHOD FOR A GERAN SYSTEM TO INCREASE GERAN NETWORK CAPACITY - The present patent application comprises means, instructions and steps for controlling signal power by allowing a small bit error rate during burst processing comprising setting a transmit signal power granularity to be less than a current level ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149779 | RANGING FOR WIRELESS RADIO FREQUENCY COMMUNICATION DEVICES - The present invention relates generally to methods and systems for radio ranging and more particularly to methods and systems for determining time of arrival (TOA) of a ranging signal at a reference wireless device in order to determine distance between the reference wireless device and a target wireless device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149780 | Method of Transmitting Data, Corresponding Systems and Computer Program Product Therefor - A method of transmitting signals from a base station towards user terminals in a cellular communication system. The method includes generating diversity signals, wherein at least one of the diversity signals is subjected to a selectively variable RF phase shift. Specifically, a set of radio link quality indicators is determined at the base station, wherein each radio link quality indicator is representative of the quality of the radio link between the base station and a respective one of the user terminals. The set of radio link quality indicators is used to generate an aggregated radio quality indicator, which in turn is used to selectively vary the variable RF phase shift. For example, the phase shift may be selected, which optimizes the aggregated radio quality indicator. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149781 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - The present invention relates to the field of communications technologies. A resource management method, apparatus, and system in a multi-carrier system are disclosed. The multi-carrier system includes at least one multi-carrier cell and the multi-carrier cell includes at least two single carrier establishing cooperation. The method includes the following steps: A base station measures the cooperative resource usage information of each cooperation established single carrier cell; the base station reports the cooperative resource usage information to a radio network controller for the radio network controller to perform resource management. The information measured and reported by the base station in the embodiment of the present invention can satisfy the needs of the multi-carrier performing resource management and make sure that the radio network controller can perform reasonable admission control over multi-carrier UEs. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149782 | METHODOLOGY TO ANALYZE SECTOR CAPACITY IN DATA-ONLY MOBILE-WIRELESS NETWORK - Infrastructure network service measurements of time needed to complete data transfers are used to determine the capacity of a technology sector of a wireless packet data communication base station, such as a 1xEV-DO sector, using infrastructure network service measurements. The process, for example, may predict when the radio-frequency link between wireless data subscribers and a wireless base station becomes sufficiently congested that each user experiences reduced data speeds. The determination of capacity can be made down to the sector-carrier (a single carrier within a base station sector) level. The prediction can be cast in terms of time, which allows network service providers to plan the growth of their base stations to meet subscriber needs. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149783 | METHOD, NETWORK ELEMENT, AND SYSTEM FOR COUNTING AUDIENCE OF MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE - A method for counting the audience of multimedia broadcast/multicast service (MBMS) includes: by a first network element (NE), counting MBMS audience on the first NE; and reporting the MBMS audience counted on the first NE to a statistical analysis NE so that the statistical analysis NE gets an MBMS audience counting result. The invention also discloses a statistical analysis NE, a communication NE, and a system for counting MBMS audience. The invention overcomes the waste of resources on audience counting in multicast mode and provides a feasible method for counting audience in enhanced broadcast mode. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149784 | CALL ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM - A call admission control technique allowing flexible and reliable call admissions at an ATM switch in the case of an ATM network including both QoS-specified and QoS-unspecified virtual connections is disclosed. In the case where a QoS (Quality of Service) specified connection request occurs, an estimated bandwidth is calculated which is to be assigned to an existing QoS-unspecified traffic on the link associated with the QoS-specified connection request. A call control processor of the ATM switch determines whether the QoS-specified connection request is accepted, depending on whether a requested bandwidth is smaller than an available bandwidth that is obtained by subtracting an assigned bandwidth and the estimated bandwidth from a full bandwidth of the link. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149785 | Networks Having Plurality of Nodes - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method of communicating in a network with a plurality of nodes. In the method, information is gathered from the plurality of nodes, where information from each node specifies other nodes from which the node detected messages. Based on the gathered information, a transmit sequence according to which the plurality of nodes are to transmit is determined. Other methods and devices are also disclosed. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149786 | TRAFFIC MODELING FOR PACKET DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM DIMENSIONING - A packet-based communications network is dimensioned based on a maximum number of users able to receive a predetermined target throughput of data over a predetermined number of channels. For each of an incremental number of users, at least one blocking probability is calculated, based on a traffic distribution model, and a service delay is calculated, based on the blocking probability. An iterative throughput, corresponding to each of the incremental number of users, is determined based on the corresponding blocking probability and service delay. Each iterative throughput is compared to the target throughput. The maximum number of users is identified as the number of users having a corresponding iterative throughput that is closest to and less than target throughput. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149787 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING A CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATION VIA A SHARED CHANNEL - A method and apparatus for generating measurement report and transmitting the measurement report via a random access channel in a CELL_FACH state are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state may transition to CELL_FACH state. The measurement report may be transmitted in response to receiving a dedicated high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) using a HS-DSCH radio network temporary identity (H-RNTI). The measurement report may be transmitted periodically and may include a channel quality indicator (CQI). The H-RNTI may be a dedicated H-RNTI. The measurement report may be transmitted when the WTRU has data to transmit, during cell reselection, or during cell update. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149788 | Method and System for Integrates Link Adaptation and Power Control to Improve Error and Throughput Performance in Wireless Packet Networks - The invention provides a system that implements an algorithm for integrated link adaptation and power control to achieve specified error rates and to improve an overall throughput for real-time applications in wireless packet networks. The system initially divides wireless terminals into groups according to their signal path gains. Afterwards, the system can periodically adapt transmissions (i.e., link adaptations) based on the required error rates, actual error statistics and average transmission power for each wireless terminal group. Furthermore, transmission power can be adjusted by an enhanced Kalman-filter method to ensure successful reception. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149789 | Locating a wireless local area network associated with a wireless wide area network - An apparatus and method are disclosed in connection with a mobile device locating a wireless local area network (WLAN) associated with a wireless wide area network (WWAN). These concepts involve obtaining and recording maximum and minimum geometric time differences (GTDs) for a pair or pairs of transmitters in the WWAN while coverage is provided by the WLAN, and using these differences to later compare a contemporaneous GTD to determine whether the mobile device is more likely within the coverage area of the WLAN. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149790 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND HEADER COMPRESSION CONTROL METHOD - A communication device according to the present invention includes a header compressor ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149791 | DISTRIBUTED SPECTRUM SENSING - The present invention relates to a spectrum sensing scheme for a radio network. The proposed approach involves applying sensing in a distributed fashion to obtain an estimate of the signal spectrum. A network of the multiple sensing nodes ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149792 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A CQI control unit | 06-23-2011 |
20110158110 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIBAND RATE SCALING - A system and method for multiband rate scaling for communication, particularly wireless communication. A band is used as a parameter for wireless communication performance when a wireless communication channel has a plurality of available bands for communication. A selected communication band may be switched to another available communication band, where the switching may be based on a desired performance determination. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158111 | BULK SERVICE PROVISIONING ON LIVE NETWORK - The invention is directed to a method and system for bulk provisioning of telecommunications services on a live network and is suited to migrating telecommunications services from a legacy network to another network. Customer service data files can be imported, and validated against customer service rules and against live configuration data of the live network. Actions are logged and can be rolled back when errors are encountered. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158112 | SYNTHETIC FRAME LOSS RATIO - An endpoint for determining a frame loss ratio is provided. The endpoint includes a processor and a memory coupled with the processor. The memory stores instructions that are executable to generate a number of synthetic frames, and insert the number of synthetic frames into a stream of data frames, the synthetic frames being transmitted to a responder endpoint address designated in the synthetic frames. The memory may also store instructions that are executable to determine a number of lost synthetic frames; and calculate a synthetic frame loss ratio as a function of the number of lost synthetic frames and the number of synthetic frames inserted into the stream of data frames. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158113 | DRIVEN MULTICAST TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION ON LINK-AGGREGATE-GROUP - A method and apparatus of dynamically distributing multicast stream to different hosts on a link-aggregation-group is described. A network element receives, on a link-aggregation-group, multicast requests and determines the bandwidth for that request by the information stored in the request. The network element further allocates bandwidth requirement on the least utilized link in link-aggregation-group. The network element additionally updates a forwarding table to indicate that the multicast stream in that request is to be forward out the allocated link. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158114 | METHOD AND APPARTUS FOR PERFORMING TIMING SYNCHRONIZATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing time synchronization is provided. The method/apparatus includes, at a radio subsystem: receiving, from a digital subsystem, a first signal via the link, where the link not dedicated to timing synchronization; determining a time difference between the first signal and a second signal; converting the time difference to a time error, sending, via the link, the time error or time difference to the digital subsystem. The method further includes, at the digital subsystem, inputting the time error, received from the radio subsystem, to a phased locked loop (PLL) in order to adjust an oscillator frequency so as to reduce the amount of the time error and thus synchronizing the radio access network with the second signal received at the radio subsystem, without the need for an additional connection between the digital and radio subsystems. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158115 | Power Efficiency and Packet Delivery Ratio Through Micro Rate Control at Access Point Functionality Enabled Devices - Embodiments of the invention provide a method to allow a software access point (SAP)-enabled device to go to sleep as much as possible without sacrificing throughput and latency across networks. The SAP-enabled device defers transmissions from client stations if maximum end-to-end throughput that can be supported by the networks is below the maximum throughput supported by a connection to the client station. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158116 | METHOD AND APPARATUS THAT FACILITATES A TIMING ALIGNMENT IN A MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - Aspects are disclosed for facilitating a timing alignment in a multicarrier system. In one aspect, at least one downlink timing associated with at least one downlink carrier is determined, and an uplink timing associated with an uplink group of carriers is ascertained based on at least one downlink timing and a timing offset associated with the uplink group of carriers. Each of the uplink group of carriers is then transmitted within a threshold value of the uplink timing. In another aspect, a downlink communication is transmitted to a wireless terminal via at least one downlink carrier. This embodiment further includes assigning a timing offset to an uplink group of carriers, and providing the timing offset to the wireless terminal via the at least one downlink carrier. An uplink communication is then received via the uplink group of carriers according to the timing offset. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158117 | POWER HEADROOM REPORT FOR SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMISSIONS ON DISPARATE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a determination is made of a first power available for transmitting a first signal using a first radio access technology while simultaneously transmitting a second signal using a second radio access technology different from the first radio access technology. An uplink grant is received and a determination is made regarding a second power for transmitting the first signal on uplink using the first radio access technology based on the uplink grant. A determination is made regarding a difference between the first power and the second power and the information related to the difference via the first radio access technology is reported based upon a trigger. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158118 | Measurement and carrier group based optimization in wireless OFDM multi-carrier communication systems - In a wireless OFDM multi-carrier communication system, a mobile station obtains measurement result of a first received signal strength indication (RSSI) of a first preamble signal transmitted from a base station over a first radio frequency (RF) carrier. The mobile station also obtains signal offset information between the first RF carrier and a second RF carrier of the base station. In response to the measurement result and the signal offset information, the mobile station estimates a second RSSI of a second preamble signal transmitted by the base station over the second RF carrier without performing scanning over the second RF carrier. In one novel aspect, the mobile station identifies a carrier group containing multiple carriers that belong to the same base station. Measurement optimization, initial cell selection and cell reselection optimization, report reduction, and other carrier group based optimization can be achieved in the multi-carrier system based on identified carrier group. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158119 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, PROCESSING METHOD FOR THE SAME, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus extracts segment data including information defining the position of a fragment packet before fragmentation and the identification information of the fragment packet from the header information of the fragment packet. If the fragment packet is the last fragment packet, the apparatus extracts packet length information before packet fragmentation from the header information of the last fragment packet. A memory stores a segment database holding segment data and information associating identification information with packet length information. The communication apparatus executes integration processing of the segment data based on information stored in the segment database and determines whether the reception of all the fragment packets constituting the packet before fragmentation is complete. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158120 | NODE DEVICE - There is provided a node device having a plurality of transmission lines, included in a network, the node device including a first clock extracting section configured to extract a clock from a first packet used for synchronization of a clock in the node device, the first packet being received from the network through the transmission line, a second clock extracting section configured to extract a clock from a signal received from the network through the transmission line, and a clock selector to select a clock out of the clock extracted by the first clock extracting section and the clock extracted by the second clock extracting section, wherein the clock selected by the clock selector is used for synchronization of a clock in the node device. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158121 | EXPLICIT INDICATION OF BEARERS SUBJECT TO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - A method, user equipment and a network entity are disclosed. The method comprises the steps of: determining which of a plurality of packet bearers carry voice media components for handover between a packet-switched network and a circuit-switched network to ensure voice call continuity; and notifying an entity that will said enforce voice call continuity for which of said plurality of packet bearers carry said voice media components. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158122 | WIRELESS ROUTING SELECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A technique involves untethered access points (UAPs) that can broadcast estimated transmission time (ETT) that represents an estimated time it would take for a packet to be transmitted from the first UAP to an AP that is wire coupled to a network. The proposed system can offer, among other advantages, accurate ETT values for use by UAPs of a wireless network. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158123 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING AN ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SCHEME - A method and Mobile Subscriber Station (MSS) are provided for transmitting Channel Quality Information (CQI) in a wireless communication system using an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) scheme. A Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio (CINR) of at least two bands are measured; each of the at least two bands including a plurality of adjacent subcarriers for a band Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC) operation. A Report Response (REP-RSP) message including first information related to the measured CINR is sent. Second information related to a differential CINR of the at least two bands is sent via a Channel Quality Information Channel (CQICH). | 06-30-2011 |
20110164509 | APPLICATION-ENABLEMENT DATA SWITCH FOR ENHANCING LEGACY NFC SYSTEMS WITH WEB SERVICES - An Application-Enablement data switch enables web-enhanced services to be provided to legacy near-field communication (NFC) systems. The data switch receives IP packets from a legacy network and identifies select IP packets that contain NFC data indicating a reader ID of an NFC reader and a tag ID of an NFC tag in communication with the NFC reader. The switch further extracts the NFC data from the select IP packets and inserts the NFC data into a request message that is transmitted to a web application server that provides the web-enhanced services based on the NFC data. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164510 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING A USER GROUP USING QUANTIZED CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACKS FROM MIMO CAPABLE MOBILE DEVICES - A mobile device estimates channel status information (CSI) for an associated single user downlink multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) channel. The estimated CSI is quantized using a finite quantization resolution. The quantized CSI is communicated to the base station over a finite-rate feedback channel. Intended downlink data transmission is scheduled by the base station according to the transmitted CSI, and received by the mobile device, accordingly. The estimated CSI comprise generalized channel quality information such as channel capacity and channel direction. The base station selects a first user having a strongest channel capacity according to quantized CSI received from associated mobile devices. Beams orthogonal to a single user downlink MIMO channel of the selected first user are broadcasted. Quantized relative channel direction matrices and projected channel capacity are received from remaining mobile devices. A user having a strongest projected channel capacity is selected a second user for the user group. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164511 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING, CONFIGURING AND TESTING NEW WIRELESS DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS - A system, apparatus, and method are provided for connecting, configuring and testing new wireless devices and applications. For example, one embodiment of a computer-implemented method for enabling a trial wireless device comprises: automatically pre-provisioning one or more trial SIM cards for operation on a particular wireless cellular network on behalf of a prospective customer; automatically pre-configuring a trial wireless machine-to-machine (“M2M”) device on behalf of the prospective customer; wherein the trial M2M device includes testing and monitoring program code which, when the trial M2M device is connected to a computer system, performs the operations of: automatically connecting to the wireless cellular network execute a plurality of test operations for testing the SIM card and the trial M2M device, the test operations including determining whether the SIM card is correctly provisioned for the wireless network; determining whether the trial M2M wireless device is operating properly; and determining the existence of wireless data connectivity. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164512 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK WITH PINCH POINT AND LOW BATTERY ALERTS - A wireless mesh network includes a plurality of wireless devices and a gateway organized in a multi hop mesh topology. Each wireless device maintains and reports radio statistics to the gateway, and also reports battery conditions of its power source. The device manager communicates with the gateway and provides an alert indicating existence of a pinch point within the mesh network based upon the radio statistics. When a low battery condition is reported by a device, the device manager determines whether loss of that device is a pinch point or will cause a pinch point, and provides a low battery alert prioritized based upon the pinch point analysis. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164513 | CONTROLLING A MOBILE RECEIVER TO RECEIVING SIGNALS DESTINED FOR A PLURALITY OF RECEIVERS - The invention refers to a method for controlling a radio receiver of a mobile terminal of a telecommunications network, wherein the telecommunications network sends a signal within a signal frame (FR) to be received by a plurality of mobile terminals, the signal comprising an encoded digital content, comprising determining a signal quality of the signal, determining, dependent on the signal quality, a reception time scheme (tr) for a radio receiver of the mobile terminal, and controlling the radio receiver according to the reception time scheme to receive said signal. The invention further refers to a program and to mobile terminal for performing the method. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164514 | Transmit Power Control - A method for communicating among nodes in a network includes determining, by a transmitter, a first frequency band and at least a second frequency band to be used for communicating data packets, wherein a maximum allowable power spectral density in the first frequency band is greater than a maximum allowable power spectral density in the second frequency band. The method also includes adjusting power spectral density for a first group of frequencies in the first frequency band such that the adjusted power spectral density of the first group does not exceed the maximum allowable power spectral density of the first frequency band and a quantization noise introduced by the transmitter is less than a threshold value for a signal transmitted in the second frequency band. The method further includes modulating at least a portion of a data packet transmitted by the transmitter to at least a first receiver in accordance with the adjusted power spectral density. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164515 | COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station transmits an uplink resource allocation message including a first frame offset and a second frame offset to a mobile station. The mobile station transmits an uplink packet to the base station in a frame corresponding to a first frame index determined by using the first frame offset. The base station transmits a feedback corresponding to the uplink packet to the mobile station in a frame corresponding to a second frame index determined by using the second frame offset. If the feedback is negative, the mobile station retransmits the uplink packet to the base station in a frame corresponding to a third frame index determined by using the first frame offset. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164516 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION ACCESS, MULTIMEDIA CONTENT ACCESS, AND PHONE CONNECTIVITY - The present invention is a method and system for providing information access, multimedia content access, and phone connectivity. The present invention includes a multimedia wireless network having a plurality of nodes and a plurality of media boxes. The nodes are mobile and can have a renewable energy unit. One or more of the nodes can be a gateway node to provide information, multimedia content, and phone connectivity from an external electronic device outside the multimedia wireless network to the multimedia wireless network. The media boxes can be all-in-one data access devices and can connect to the nodes to provide access to the information, the multimedia content, and phone connectivity to a variety of electronic devices. The nodes and the media boxes can maintain seamless access to a WLAN or a phone network. The nodes and the media boxes can also be connected in a mesh network. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164517 | COMPLEXITY MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-USER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The invention concerns complexity management of a receiver in a multi-access/user communication system where interference exists. For example, but not limited to, multi-user detection at the receiver in the uplink of a code division multiple access DS/CDMA system. The invention provides a method for power management and decoding schedule optimisation by deriving ( | 07-07-2011 |
20110164518 | ADAPTIVE WIRELESS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD - The present invention relates to a method and system that provides hierarchical adaptability components to a wireless process control and/or automation network that increase system efficiency and reliability. The invention comprehends an intelligent and efficient process to design and operate a wireless process control and/or automation network while utilizing minimum system resources. In certain embodiments, path requirements are specified per usage class whereby minimum utilization of bandwidth, paths and hardware is allocated, while meeting plant environment requirements for services such as closed-loop regulatory and supervisory control, open-loop control, alerting, logging and remote monitoring. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164519 | POWER HEAD ROOM REPORTING METHOD AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - Disclosed are a control signal transmitting method and mobile terminal device capable of switching between a plurality of terminal communication modes having different maximum transmissible power values with a high degree of precision, while suppressing increases in signaling overhead. In a mobile station ( | 07-07-2011 |
20110164520 | WLAN Having Load Balancing Based on Access Point Loading - A network having distribution of access point loading includes access points to which mobile stations can associate themselves based upon access point beacon signal levels and loading levels for the various access points. A mobile station receives beacon signals from various access points and determines a signal strength for the received beacon signals. The mobile station also receives access point loading information from the access points. The mobile station associates with an access point based upon the access point beacon signal strengths and the access point loading information. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164521 | ARRANGEMENT FOR UTILIZATION RATE DISPLAY AND METHODS THEREOF - A network arrangement for automatically displaying statistical data is provided. The arrangement includes a port for receiving data traffic, a physical interface layer for copying data traffic, and a bus for directing a copy of the data traffic to monitoring devices. The arrangement also includes logic arrangement for analyzing the copy of data traffic, which includes at least a Receive Data Valid signal (including a rising edge and a falling edge) and a Receive Clock signal (including a rising edge and a falling edge). The arrangement further includes incrementing a first counter when the Receive Data Valid rising edge is received and incrementing a second counter when at least one of the Receive Clock rising edge and the Receive Clock falling edge is received. The arrangement moreover includes logic arrangement for displaying statistical data pertaining to the data traffic and a visual display arrangement for displaying statistical data. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164522 | Estimation of Position Using WLAN Access Point Radio Propagation Characteristics in a WLAN Positioning System - A method for estimating position using WLAN access point radio propagation characteristics in a WLAN location based service is provided. A location-based services system has a plurality of Wi-Fi access points in a target area. The Wi-Fi access points are positioned at geographic locations and have signal coverage areas. A method of characterizing at least one of the Wi-Fi access points comprises determining the geographic location of the Wi-Fi access point, dividing the signal coverage area of the Wi-Fi access point into at least one section, and determining radio propagation characteristics for each section. The radio propagation characteristics of each section characterize a radio channel of the Wi-Fi access point, and the characterization can be used in a location algorithm. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164523 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING NOISE POWER ESTIMATE IN A WCDMA NETWORK - A method for adjusting power in a mobile terminal is disclosed and may include determining a total transmit power control (TPC) command for a downlink channel based on a plurality of TPC commands. The plurality of TPC commands may be calculated based on a plurality of control channels. The transmit power may be adjusted based on the determined total TPC command. The plurality of control channels may include a dedicated physical channel and a common pilot channel. Noise power may be determined for each of the plurality of control channels. A TPC command may be determined based on the plurality of control channels. A reliability weight value may be determined for each of the plurality of TPC commands, based on the determined noise power for each of the plurality of control channels. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164524 | RADIO ACCESS POINT TESTING APPARATUS - In a case where reception power in a radio access point is high by external noise, the normalcy of the radio access point is tested. In order to judge the normalcy of the radio characteristic of the radio access point, a test is performed through the calling connection between a testing access terminal in the radio access point and a predetermined device. An RSSI is measured before and after the transmission of a test signal. When the RSSI exceeds a threshold value, the path loss of a reverse link connected from the radio access point to the testing access terminal is increased by an attenuator. Then, reception power in the testing access terminal decreases. Thus, initial transmission power in accordance with the reception power from the testing access terminal is raised and the calling connection of the testing access terminal can be performed even under the external noise. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164525 | ENHANCED FORMATION OF MESH-TYPE NETWORKS - The present invention relates to an enhanced formation of mesh type networks, wherein an initial mesh formation is supported by advertising additional information which specifies at least one of an association with other mesh stations or a channel environment at a concerned mesh station. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164526 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK - The present invention provides a new method and apparatus, in a network device of a multi-carrier based wireless access network, for transmitting uplink data to access device side, and the corresponding method and apparatus for channel estimation in its uplink counterpart device, wherein, a plurality of network device comprise one or more multi-antenna network devices, at least one of the multi-antenna network device transmits multipath subcarrier modulated symbols via a plurality of transmitting antennas configured for itself, wherein, at least two transmitting antennas use different subcarrier sets, but share one pilot pattern, wherein, pilot pattern used by each network device is different from the pilot pattern used by any other network device. The present invention not only can fully utilize the frequency diversity introduced by the plurality of transmitting antennas, but also can guarantee a relative high antenna power gain and save as much time-frequency resource cost caused by pilot signal as possible. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164527 | ENHANCED WIRELESS AD HOC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES - Enhancements are disclosed for wireless ad hoc networking including optimized wireless routing, multicast routing, quick network entry, use of contention domains and node weighting for improved time slot scheduling, and the like. Quality of service may be supported at each node and within scheduling algorithms across a group of nodes in order to provide a number of service levels to network users according to traffic type or the like. These and other enhancements may be used individually or in combination to improve operation of a wireless ad hoc network and support scalability, routing, traffic management, quality of service delivery, and other features. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164528 | SELECTION OF TRANSMISSION MODE - A method and apparatus for a cellular system is provided. Communication is carried out between a controlling station of a cell and a number of users in said cell, and the controlling station is equipped with a plurality of antennas. The communication can alter between a first and a second mode, and the users in the cell provide the controlling station with feedback information regarding their reception quality. The controlling station alters between said first and second modes of communication as a result of the reliability of the feedback information from the users in the cell, so that if the reliability is above a first threshold, the first mode is used, and if the reliability is equal to or below said first threshold, the second mode is used. | 07-07-2011 |
20110170427 | Best Companion PMI-Based Beamforming - From one perspective, a fixed rank r (r>1 is an integer) is determined from received signaling; at least one codeword of rank r is selected from a codebook of antenna weights for controlling inter-cell interference between a serving cell and a neighboring cell; and the selected at least one codeword of rank-r is reported to the serving cell. From a different perspective, the fixed rank r is derived and signaled to user equipments UEs operating in a serving cell; there is received from a UE in the serving cell a report indicating the at least one rank-r codeword; and an indication of the at least one rank-r codeword is forwarded to the neighboring cell. Methods, apparatus and computer programs are detailed as well as embodiments in which different ranks are used for different neighboring cells and narrowband/wideband PMI reporting which can also be different for different neighboring cells. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170428 | NETWORK BUFFER - Systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with generating a network buffer are provided. A network data model is input that includes a set of network elements, such as nodes and links, and respective costs associated with respective network elements. A center network element around which to generate the network buffer and an offset cost to define a boundary of the network buffer are also input. A network buffer is generated by determining a buffer coverage and cost. The network buffer is made up of a set of buffer network elements located within the offset cost with respect to the center network element. The cost for each buffer network element is determined as the cost associated with travelling a path with minimum cost from the center network element to the corresponding buffer network element. The buffer coverage and costs are output for subsequent analysis. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170429 | MOBILE BROADBAND PACKET SWITCHED TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION - A method in an electronic device and a system for use in a communication network including a core network and at least one access network are described. Intermediate service platforms in an access network process data bound from a base station towards a core network, and vice versa. A first data channel or stream is processed by the intermediate service platform. Exemplary embodiments bypass the intermediate service platform by intercepting a second data channel or stream bound for the intermediate service platform. The data in the second data channel or stream is processed and inserted into a data channel or stream downstream of the intermediate service platform. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170430 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISTANCE ESTIMATION BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A distance estimation system is disclosed for estimating a distance between two electronic devices. The system includes a power adjustable transmitter that is capable of having its power level adjusted between successive transmissions of packets of data, a remote device that is remote from the power adjustable transmitter for receiving the packets of data, and a distance estimation unit. The distance estimation unit is for generating a distance estimation signal responsive to the packets of data received at the remote device such that the distance estimation signal is associated with a power level at which the power level adjustable transmitter is not able to sufficiently transmit the packets of data to the remote device. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170431 | MITIGATION OF INTERFERENCE DUE TO PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - Techniques for mitigating interference due to peer-to-peer (P2P) communication are described. In an aspect, a P2P UE may measure the signal strength of downlink signals from base stations and may set its transmit power based on (e.g., proportional to) the measured signal strength in order to mitigate interference to WWAN UEs communicating with base stations. In another aspect, the P2P UE may measure the signal strength of uplink signals from WWAN UEs and may set its transmit power based on (e.g., inversely proportional to) the measured signal strength in order to mitigate interference to the WWAN UEs. In one design, the P2P UE may measure the signal strength of an uplink signal from a WWAN UE, estimate the pathloss between the two UEs based on the measured signal strength, and determine its transmit power based on the estimated pathloss. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170432 | ACCESS POINT TRANSMIT POWER SCHEMES - In a multi-level power transmission scheme, an access point transmits at one power level, while repeatedly transmitting at a burst power level for short periods of time. For example, a femto cell may transmit a beacon with periodic high power bursts of short duration, while the femto cell transmit power also undergoes high power bursts aligned with the beacon bursts. In a network listen-based power control scheme, an access point listens for one or more parameters sent over-the-air by the network and then defines transmit power based on the received parameter(s). In some aspects, beacon transmit power may be set based on a defined outage radius parameter and the total received signal power on a channel. In some aspects, access point transmit power may be set based on a defined coverage parameter and the received energy associated with signals from access points of a certain type. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170433 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING NETWORK LINK QUALITY - Properties of data transmission are measured in a telecommunications network ( | 07-14-2011 |
20110170434 | Method, electronic component and system for the diagnosis of communication connections - The invention relates to a method and system for diagnosing communication connections in a communication system. The invention enables the provision of a plurality of first diagnosis units and at least one second diagnosis unit, wherein the first and second diagnosis units each are assigned to a communication connection of the communication system and are configured for determining a value of a diagnosis variable of the respectively assigned communication connections, and provides for determining a value of at least one diagnosis variable by each of the first diagnosis units, determining a value of at least one diagnosis variable by the at least one second diagnosis unit, transferring the values determined by the first diagnosis units to an evaluation unit, statistically evaluating the transferred values by the evaluation unit, and diagnosing the values determined by the at least one second diagnosis unit depending on the statistical evaluation by the evaluation unit. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170435 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING CSI-RS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for processing a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS) in a wireless communication system based on a multiple access scheme is provided. The CSI-RS transmission method defines a plurality of CSI-RS patterns, assigns the CSI-RS patterns to individual cells, uses the CSI-RSs alternately per Physical Resource Block (PRB) so as to utilize the transmission powers of all antenna ports for transmitting CSI-RSs, transmits Coordinated Multi Point (CoMP) CSI-RSs and non-CoMP CSI-RSs separately, and mutes specific resources in association with the CSI-RS pattern of adjacent cells. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170436 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RELAY TRANSITION TIME - An apparatus and method for establishing a relay transition time in a network node in a wireless communication system comprising comparing a network node transmit/receive (TX/RX) switch time to a switch threshold; and using a fraction of the cyclic prefix (CP) as a guard period if the network node TX/RX switch time is less than or equal to the switch threshold, or using a sounding reference signal (SRS) configured channel to blank out a last symbol if the network node TX/RX switch time is greater than the switch threshold. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170437 | METHOD OF SUBCARRIER ALLOCATION IN AN OFDMA-BASED COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND NETWORK - A method of subcarrier allocation in an OFDMA-based communication network, wherein the network includes a network controller and a number of base stations, wherein the network is divided into different cells and/or sectors, and wherein subchannels are generated by forming subsets of active orthogonal subcarriers of the OFDMA frame structure, is characterized in that the base stations measure the traffic load and/or the interference from neighboring and/or other cells and/or sectors, wherein an allocation of the subchannels to the cells and/or sectors is performed on the basis of the results of the measurements. Furthermore, a network applying OFDMA technology is disclosed. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170438 | RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION, USER APPARATUS, AND METHOD - A mobile communications system having a first base station and one or more second base stations is disclosed, wherein the first base station includes a first generator which generates a first known signal for use in common between the first base station and the second base station and a second known signal use specific to each of the first base station and the second base station, and a radio transmitter which wirelessly transmits, to a subordinate terminal apparatus, the first known signal and the second known signal which are generated by the first generator. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170439 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE TERMINAL - To provide a radio base station apparatus and mobile terminal supporting each of a plurality of mobile communication systems when the plurality of mobile communication systems coexists, the radio base station apparatus assigns a modulated signal of a control signal to at least one frequency band with the system band of the LTE system as a unit on a predetermined data block basis (CCE basis) according to a predetermined rule, and when data blocks are assigned according to the rule as shown in FIG. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170440 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING TRANSMISSION SIGNALS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods, apparatus, and computer-program products for the detection of potentially interfering user equipment (UE) in the proximity of a detecting entity. The detecting entity may be a base station or a UE. The detecting entity may take one or more actions in response to the detection in an effort to mitigate interference. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170441 | ANALYTICAL COMPUTATION OF CUBIC METRIC - A method includes determining attributes of multiple Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA) signals, which are to be superimposed to form a composite CDMA signal for transmission by a wireless transmitter. A predefined analytical formula, which computes a Cubic Metric of the composite CDMA signal as a function of the attributes, is evaluated. Transmission of the composite CDMA signal by the wireless transmitter is controlled based on the computed Cubic Metric. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170442 | METHOD FOR ESTIMATING CARRIER-TO-NOISE RATIO AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for estimating a Carrier-to-Noise Ratio (CNR) at a Base Station (BS) in a wireless access system are provided. In the method, a preamble signal received from at least one neighbor BS is converted to a frequency response of a preamble sequence and Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT)-processing the preamble signal, an estimation period of the IFFT-processed preamble signal, corresponding to a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) size, is divided into a predetermined number of blocks, carrier power values of the blocks are accumulated for a predetermined number of frames, an average of timing offsets of the frames corresponding to a position of a block having a maximum average of accumulated carrier values is determined to be a timing offset of the preamble signal, a carrier power value of the preamble signal is calculated using the timing offset, and a CNR of the preamble signal is estimated using the carrier power value. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170443 | LINK SENSITIVE AODV FOR WIRELESS DATA TRANSFER - A method of improving signal quality in an ad hoc on-demand distance vector (AODV) mesh network, comprising detecting at a node the signal quality of a received AODV protocol message, comparing the signal quality of the received AODV protocol message to a threshold; and on detecting that the signal quality of the received AODV message is not above the threshold, dropping the received AODV message. Further, a method of improving AODV mesh operation by detecting at a node the signal quality of the RREQ messages received at that node; and dropping any RREQ messages for which the signal quality is not above a threshold. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170444 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLE RANGE ESTIMATION LOCATION - A system and method of determining the location of a mobile station by determining the time of transmission of a signal by a mobile station and determining range rings at a plurality of reference stations receiving the transmitted signal, where the range rings represent the distance of the mobile station from the plurality of reference stations. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170445 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION DELAY DIFFERENCES - The invention relates to determining mutual differences of transmission delays experienced by protocol data units transmitted in a communications network. This invention is based on a surprising discovery that the time difference between the receiving moments of protocol data units the temporal receiving order of which deviates from their temporal transmitting order represents the smallest possible difference between the transmission delays experienced by these protocol data units. In a method according to the invention it is determined, based on an order indicator associated with a protocol data unit received at an earlier point of time and an order indicator associated with a protocol data unit received at a later point of time, whether the mutual order of the protocol data units changed during transmission. If the mutual order has changed, the time difference between the receiving moments of the protocol data units is calculated, which time difference represents the smallest possible difference between the transmission delays experienced by these protocol data units. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170446 | Multi-Carrier Communications With Group-Based Subcarrier Allocation - A method and apparatus for subcarrier selection for systems is described. In one embodiment, the system employs orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA). In one embodiment, a method for subcarrier selection comprises a subscriber measuring channel and interference information for subcarriers based on pilot symbols received from a base station, the subscriber selecting a set of candidate subcarriers, providing feedback information on the set of candidate subcarriers to the base station, and receiving an indication of subcarriers of the set of subcarriers selected by the base station for use by the subscriber. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170447 | Thinning of Packet-Switched Video Data - This invention relates to a method and to a system for thinning a stream of packet-switched video data in which a stream of packet-switched video data is detected and the size of the packets in the video stream is determined, wherein packets of the video stream data are dropped depending on the size of the packets. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170448 | MANAGEMENT OF ROUTING TOPOLOGY IN A NETWORK - In a packet communication network comprising a plurality of nodes connected by respective links according to a routing topology, ordered metrics are respectively associated with links each connecting two nodes together directly. On detection of a modification of the routing topology, at the level of a first node connected by a link to at least one second node, a timer value associated with the second node is determined. Next, the timer is set. Finally, on expiring of this timer, a topology update message is emitted destined for the second node. The timer value is provided by an increasing function taking as parameter the metric associated with said link connecting the first node to the second node, so that the larger the metric, the larger the timer value. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170449 | Frequency Selective SINR Regeneration - A method is performed by a device in a wireless network. The method includes receiving a transmission that includes a wideband channel quality indicator, determining a received signal power estimate for each frequency band of a frequency domain, and determining an average interference-plus-noise based on the wideband channel quality indicator and the received signal power estimate. The method further includes determining a signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio estimate for each frequency band based on the average interference-plus-noise and the received signal power estimate, and performing a communicative operation based on the signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio estimate. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170450 | COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method, apparatus, and computer program for cooperative transmission are provided. A re-transmitter for a data packet determined as not having been received at a re-ceiver correctly is selected amongst the potentialre-transmitters in a cooperative transmission mode. In more detail, the re-transmitter is selected amongst an original transmitter of the data packet and assisting transmitters configured to assist transmission of the original transmit-ter. The assisting transmitters receive the data packet in the original transmission, unless errors occur in the reception at a given assisting transmitter, and are candidates for the retransmission in case the original transmission results in erroneous reception at the receiver. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176432 | Radio Communication System Including Radio Terminal Apparatuses Each Arranged At Previously Determined Position - A radio communication system includes radio terminal apparatuses each arranged at a previously determined position, radio base station apparatuses for holding radio communications with these apparatuses, and a communication system controller for communicating with the respective radio terminal apparatus via the respective radio base station apparatuses connected thereto via a LAN. The communication system controller stores therein an ad-hoc radio communication permission table indicating permission or non-permission of each of direct radio communications between the respective radio terminal apparatuses, judges whether or not the direct radio communication is permitted based on the ad-hoc radio communication permission table, in response to a request signal for a direct radio communication with a further radio terminal apparatuses received from each radio terminal apparatuses via the radio base station apparatuses, and transmits a notice signal including a result of the judgment to the radio terminal apparatus which transmitted the request signal. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176433 | Method of controlling resource usage in communication systems - In one embodiment, the method includes receiving, at the communication node, resource usage price information. The resource usage price information characterizes a cost associated with the communication node using a resource. The communication node determines an amount of the resource to use based on the received resource usage price information. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176434 | ACQUIRING A SIGNAL PARAMETER FOR A NEIGHBORING ACCESS POINT - In an example embodiment, a wireless device is configured to associate with a first access point on a first frequency. The wireless device listens for a predefined frame, which may be sent by neighboring access points or other wireless devices. When the wireless device receives a signal comprising a predefined frame, the wireless device acquires a parameter, such as signal strength, for the signal. The wireless device sends the parameter for the signal to the first access point. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176435 | ASYNCHRONOUS TIME DIVISION DUPLEX OPERATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for supporting communication in an asynchronous TDD wireless network are described. In an aspect, downlink transmissions and uplink transmissions may be sent on different carriers in an asynchronous TDD wireless network to mitigate interference. In one design, a station (e.g., a base station or a UE) may send a first transmission on a first carrier in a first time period and may receive a second transmission on a second carrier in a second time period. The station may only transmit, or only receive, or neither in each time period. In one design, allocation of carriers for the downlink and uplink may be performed when strong interference is detected, e.g., by a base station or a UE. When strong interference is not detected, the first and second carriers may each be used for both the downlink and uplink. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176436 | METHOD AND APPARATUS THAT FACILITATES REDIRECTING WIRELESS TERMINALS BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Aspects are described for redirecting wireless terminals between wireless networks. In a first embodiment, a coverage quality of user equipment within a first wireless network is monitored. Multiple candidate frequencies are then ascertained in response to the coverage quality to facilitate a communication between the user equipment and a second wireless network. The candidate frequencies are then communicated to the user equipment. In another embodiment, an indication of a plurality of candidate frequencies is received, and a failure in performing a handover from a first wireless network to a second wireless network is detected. For this embodiment, the handover is attempted via a primary frequency. An alternative frequency is then selected from the plurality of candidate frequencies in response to the failure, and a communication with the second wireless network is established via the alternative frequency. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176437 | TRAFFIC VOLUME MONITORING SYSTEM - A traffic monitoring system includes a communication apparatus for communicating with each terminal apparatus via a plurality of communication lines; and a monitor apparatus for monitoring a traffic of each terminal apparatus, wherein the communication apparatus establishes sessions with the terminal apparatuses by logical lines for each communication line; and the monitor apparatus monitors a traffic of each terminal apparatus for each flow type in each logical line. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176438 | Communication Network - A method for determining routing for data which is to be transmitted over a multilayer network, the network comprising a first layer of nodes, and a second layer of nodes, and the method comprising determining routing by taking account of available signal transmission/processing resource associated with the first layer and available signal transmission/processing resource associated with the second layer. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176439 | CLOSED-LOOP FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing channel feedback is provided herein. During operation a covariance matrix at time t (R) is calculated as a function of a received downlink signal. In order to reduce overhead, R is normalized and quantized. The base unit then uses the covariance matrix estimate to determine appropriate channel beamforming weights, and instructs transmit beamforming circuitry to use the appropriate weights. In an embodiment, circuitry performs a method of calculating a first precoding matrix index I from a codebook using a received signal, calculating a second codebook index J* using the first precoding matrix index I to approximate a covariance matrix and calculating a quantized coefficient α* to approximate the covariance matrix wherein the quantized coefficient α* is determined using the first precoding matrix index I. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176440 | RESTRICTIONS ON AUTONOMOUS MUTING TO ENABLE TIME DIFFERENCE OF ARRIVAL MEASUREMENTS - A mobile terminal receives a transmission from a base station including a group of Nprs consecutive subframes, where Nprs is a number of subframes constituting the group, and each subframe is capable of transmitting a positioning reference signal (PRS). The group of Nprs consecutive subframes is configured such that a transition between a subframe that does, or does not, include a PRS transmission to a subsequent subframe that does not, or does, include a PRS transmission can occur only after an even number of subframes 2*k, where k=0, 1, 2 . . . . The mobile terminal determines an estimated time of arrival of the transmission from the base station based on a portion of the transmission that includes a PRS transmission. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176441 | COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM STORING TEST ENVIRONMENT CREATION PROGRAM, TEST ENVIRONMENT CREATION METHOD, AND TEST DEVICE - A test device includes a virtual machine. The device has a virtual bridge which, when receiving a packet transmitted from the virtual machine to a computer connected via a network, transmits the packet to the computer via a physical interface of the test device. The device has a load generating unit for generating a first packet that provides a communication load and transmitting the generated first packet to the virtual bridge. The device has a return unit for receiving the generated first packet from the virtual bridge, not transmitting the generated first packet to the computer, returning the first packet to the second virtual machine by changing a destination address, and terminating the transmission. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176442 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method of transmitting data in a multiple antenna system, including: transmitting a channel estimation signal including a first pilot for channel estimation of a first UE supporting multiple antennas and a second pilot for channel estimation of a second UE supporting a larger number of multiple antennas than that of the first UE; and receiving feedback data in response to the channel estimation signal. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176443 | Method and Arrangement in a Communication System - Method and arrangement in a terminal for receiving data packets from a base station and providing feedback to the base station. The feedback concerns the reception status of the received data packets and may comprise an ACK/NAK. The method comprises receiving and decoding data packets from the base station in a sub-frame. It is further established whether any data packet within the received subframe is not correctly received and detected whether any subframe, expected to be received, has been missed. Further, acknowledgement information ACK/NAK is generated, a scrambling code selected with which the ACK/NAK is scrambled. The scrambled ACK/NAK is then sent to the base station, concerning the reception status of the data packets within the received subframes. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176444 | COMMUNICATION UNIT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A transmission-time measurement section ( | 07-21-2011 |
20110176445 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING A SUBCHANNEL - A method, an apparatus and a system for sharing a subchannel are disclosed. The method includes: obtaining downlink state information and uplink state information of a subchannel; and scheduling the subchannel according to the downlink state information and uplink state information of the subchannel, and allocating the subchannel to an uplink Mobile Station (MS) and/or a downlink MS. The method improves efficiency and flexibility of sharing subchannels, and therefore improves overall traffic significantly. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176446 | SYSTEM AND PROCESS FOR PACKET DELINEATION - An error management system and process can be used to identify an erroneous data packet in a data stream. In response to identifying the erroneous data packet, a subsequent valid data packet is located in the data stream. In one embodiment, a plurality of candidate locations of header checksum windows are searched and checked for a valid checksum. Multiple integrity checks of multiple header checksums can be used to reduce the probability of a false positive integrity check. In another embodiment, one or more information data fields can used for determining packet integrity by determining if the fields contain valid information bits. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176447 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HOLISTIC ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN ETHERNET NETWORKS - Aspects of a method and system for holistic energy management in Ethernet networks are provided. In this regard, based on activity in one or more nodes in a network, power consumption in the network may be controlled via computational capabilities of node(s) in the network and/or via a data communication rate between nodes in the network. Activity in a network node may be determined based on deep packet inspection of traffic transmitted/received by the node, inspection of data exchanged between subsystems in the node, a state of an operating system running in the node, data processed or waiting to be processed in the node, information exchanged between an energy management entity in the node and an energy management entity in one or more other nodes, computing tasks delegated to the node, and/or instructions transmitted along with a computing task delegated to the node. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176448 | PILOT GROUPING AND SET MANAGEMENT IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Embodiments disclosed herein relate to methods and systems for grouping pilot signals and using such grouping for pilot strength reporting and set management in multi-carrier communication systems. In one embodiment, an access network may assign a group identifier (or “group ID”) to each of the pilot signals associated with the sector, e.g., based on the coverage areas of the pilot signals, and transmit the pilot signals with the corresponding group IDs. PN offset may be used as the group ID. An access terminal may group the pilot signals received into one or more pilot groups in accordance with their group IDs, and select a representative pilot signals from each pilot group for pilot strength reporting. The access terminal may also use the pilot grouping to perform effective set management. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176449 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING TELEMETRY, VERIFICATION AND/OR OTHER ACCESS IN A SIP-BASED NETWORK - A method and system of an embodiment of the present invention may involve receiving an invite message at a network port of a device to initiate a communication session with the device; identifying an address associated with the invite message; when the address corresponds to a first address, performing a first session initiation process to establish first communications via an audio port of the device; and when the address corresponds to a second address, performing a second session initiation process to establish second communications via the audio port of the device; wherein the second session initiation process differs from the first session initiation process. In addition, access to the audio port may involve determining a priority of the invite message; rejecting the invite message when the priority of the invite message is inferior relative to a priority of a current dialog; and accepting the invite message when the priority of the invite request is superior to the priority of the current dialog. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176450 | RADIO BASE STATION, SCHEDULING SYSTEM, ALLOCATION CONTROL METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A radio base station that can communicate with a management device for controlling a mobile terminal and that accommodates the mobile terminal, includes: reception means for receiving an adjustment value in conformity with the amount of data which the mobile terminal has transmitted/received within a predetermined period, form the management device; and allocation means for controlling radio resources to be allocated to the mobile terminal, based on the adjustment value received by the reception means when the predetermined operational conditions are satisfied. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176451 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXECUTED FUNCTION MANAGEMENT AND PROGRAM FOR MOBILE TERMINAL - An executed function management system of a mobile terminal, includes a mobile phone terminal configured to store an execution history when an execution history target function, whose execution history should be stored, as one of functions is executed; and a server unit configured to acquire said execution history from the mobile phone terminal to store for every the mobile phone terminal. The mobile phone terminal notifies the execution history to the server unit at said preset timing or when a notice of said execution history is requested from said server unit. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176452 | NETWORK CONTROLLERS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AND BEARER TYPE DETERMINATION METHOD - Terminal management means stores information with respect to a terminal that joins a delivery service provided in each cell in a context that serves to manage the information with respect to the terminal. Terminal counting means counts the number of terminals that joins the delivery service in the each cell on the basis of each service using the context stored in the terminal management means. Bearer determination means determines whether to use a point-to-point bearer or a point-to-multipoint bearer for the delivery service in the each cell based on the number of terminals counted by the terminal counting means. | 07-21-2011 |
20110182192 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALIBRATION OF AN IMPLICIT BEAMFORMING WIRELESS SYSTEM - A first embodiment is a method of calibrating an implicit beamforming wireless system wherein the implicit wireless system comprises a beamformer and a beamformee. The method comprises associating the beamformer with the beamformee, sending a sounding packet from the beamformer to the beamformee, receiving a sounding response at the beamformer wherein the sounding response contains explicit channel state information as estimated by beamformee, computing implicit channel state information at the beamformer based on transmissions from the beamformee, passing explicit and implicit channel state information into the beamformer, computing a set of compensation parameters and loading the set of compensation parameters into the beamformer thereby enabling the beamformer to implicitly beamform to a device that does not support explicit beamforming. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182193 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A user equipment implements a method of processing indication messages, such as SCRI (signalling connection release indication) messages. For at least one RRC (radio resource control) state, if the current RRC state of the UE is a result of a previously sent indication, the UE inhibits itself from sending a further indication message. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182194 | MEASURING NETWORK METRICS - Methods and systems for determining origin-specific network metrics in respect of a data network having at least one ingress node, the method comprising: receiving data items from outside the network; forwarding the data items with headers comprising fields for carrying origin information relating to the origin of the data item, and path metric information indicative of a characteristic being monitored; causing the data items to traverse the network; updating the fields carrying path metric information as the data items traverse the network; determining the origin information and path metric information after the data items have traversed the network and deriving in dependence thereon an origin-specific path metric relating to the characteristic in respect of the relevant portion of a path across the network; and combining origin-specific path metrics derived in respect of different data items if they relate to characteristics in respect of data items having a common origin. Also, methods and systems for determining target-specific network metrics in respect of a data network having at least one egress node. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182195 | Radio communication apparatus, radio communication method, communication control apparatus, and program - There is provided a radio communication apparatus including a detection unit to detect first redundant information indicating redundancy at a physical/MAC layer of radio communication, a communication control unit to determine a second redundancy at an upper layer from the layer based on the first redundant information detected by the detection unit, a packetizing unit to generate a data packet by packetizing transmission data, and a redundant encoding unit to add a redundant packet to the data packet generated by the packetizing unit based on the second redundancy determined by the communication control unit. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182196 | NETWORK SYSTEMS, NETWORK INTERCONNECTION DEVICES, AND DATA TRANSMISSION SCHEME - A network system includes one or more terminals which transmit acquired data to a first network, a network interconnection device which is connected to the terminal via the first network and which receives the data from the terminal, and a management server which is connected to the network interconnection device via a second network and which receives the data from the network interconnection device; the terminal transmits the same data to the network interconnection device via the first network by a frequency corresponding to redundancy; the data contains the priority according to the contents of the data; and the network interconnection device acquires the communication quality of the second network and instructs the terminal to transmit the data according to redundancy determined based upon the acquired communication quality and the priority. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182197 | ESTIMATING SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS - A method, program and apparatus for transmitting an RF signal over a wireless communication network. The method comprises: determining a respective weighting factor for each of a plurality of digital signals each corresponding to a respective channel, the weighting factors being for weighting the digital signals for combination to produce a composite signal intended for transmission as an RF signal via a power amplifier. The method further comprises: executing instructions on a processor to dynamically calculate, in the processor, a metric related to the non-linearity of the power amplifier's transfer characteristics for the composite signal using the determined weighting factors; supplying to the power amplifier a signal for transmission as an RF signal; amplifying the signal for transmission at the power amplifier to transmit an RF signal over the wireless communication network via at least one antenna; and controlling the transmission based on the metric related to the amplifier non-linearity. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182198 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ANALYZING NETWORK POWER CONSUMPTION - A system and method for analyzing network power consumption is disclosed. The system and method for analyzing network power consumption includes the steps of specifying at least one service which will run on said network; defining a plurality of resources provisioned in the network, each having an associated power efficiency; associating a network path with the service; calculating a sum of the power efficiencies for the resources of the network path; and outputting the sum to a display device. The system and method for analyzing network power consumption is particularly useful for identifying power consumption efficiencies throughout a communication network. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182199 | Method and Apparatus for use of Silent Symbols in a Communications Network - Systems and methods for characterizing a communication channel including transmitting silent symbols during periods of a packet. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182200 | Method, Device and User Equipment for Transmitting Multi-Cell Scheduling Information - A method, device and user equipment (UE) for transmitting multi-cell scheduling information is provided. When at least two cells are serving the UE, the method for transmitting multi-cell scheduling information includes the following steps: determining a main cell of the UE from the at least two cells; transmitting, in the main cell, the scheduling information of the main cell and an auxiliary cell which are serving the UE. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182201 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Power of Mobile Station - A method, including making one or more measurements at a mobile device of path loss for a transmission between said mobile device and a base station in a first frequency band of a plurality of frequency bands in which the mobile device is configured to make transmissions to said base station; receiving at said mobile device path loss estimate information specifying an estimate of the relationship between said path loss for a transmission between said mobile device and said base station in said first frequency band, and path loss for a transmission between said mobile device and said base station in a second frequency band of said plurality of frequency bands; and determining a transmission power for at least one transmission to said base station in said second frequency band on the basis of at least said one or more measurements and said path loss estimate information. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182202 | WIRELESS SERVICE PROVISION - The invention pertains to wireless service provision comprising reception or transmission of wireless signals from/to a communications system not (yet) available for public communications in an environment providing telecommunications services of another communications system. An example embodiment of the invention explores and implements triggering of a user equipment to perform test or measurement of a target network from an originating network, whereas the user equipment triggers establishment of a communications channel in the target network, the target network providing test signals to the user equipment. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182203 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT MANAGEMENT IN A CAMPUS ENVIRONMENT - A Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is operated in conjunction with a wired Local Area Network (wired LAN) to service a premises, e.g., a campus setting. The wired LAN services the wired communication needs of the premises and serves as the wired backbone of the WLAN. A plurality of Wireless Access Points (WAPs) of the WLAN couple to the wired backbone and are serviced by the LAN. With this shared structure, wired network components, e.g., multi-layer switches, manage the operation of WLAN components, i.e., WAPs. Such management includes ensuring that the WAPs provide sufficient bandwidth to support wireless packetized voice communications. Additional management operations include WAP access, wireless terminal registration, and channel resource allocation, among others. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182204 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - When a communication parameter provided from a communication device is received in a communication parameter automatic setting process, it is determined whether the number of characters in the communication parameter is a predetermined number, whether the communication parameter includes a predetermined character, or whether the communication parameter is a communication parameter use of which is prohibited in a certain region. In accordance with a determination result, control is performed so that the communication parameter is not used. | 07-28-2011 |
20110188384 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUDITING 4G MOBILITY NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for auditing mobile services delivery to provide a coherent, path-based awareness of the quality level of the mobile services and the corresponding underlying transport elements supporting each service or path. In various embodiments, service or connection audits triggered within a network such as a 4G Long Term Evolution (LTE) wireless network result in the execution of one or more test sequences adapted to provide service, connection or other information pertaining to the network or the supported mobile services. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188385 | RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT SIZE SELECTION - An apparatus for selecting a size of a radio link control (RLC) protocol data unit (PDU) is described. The apparatus includes means for receiving a request for an RLC PDU from a medium access control (MAC) layer. The apparatus further includes means for selecting the size of the RLC PDU. The apparatus also includes means for generating the RLC PDU. The apparatus further includes means for sending the RLC PDU to the MAC layer. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188386 | PACKET-BASED MEMORY TEST OF A NETWORK DEVICE - A router may be tested using a packet-based testing technique in which the test packets are generated by the router. In one implementation, a forwarding plane in a router may include a first component to process header information of packets to determine forwarding information, and a memory component to store payload data for the packets. A control plane of the router may generate test packets, insert the test packets into the forwarding plane, receive a second set of packets from the forwarding plane, analyze the second set of packets to determine whether the second set of packets correspond to the inserted plurality of test packets, and output, based on the analysis, test results, relating to the operation of the routing device. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188387 | DETECTION OF ACTIVE NODES, SAFE NODE REMOVAL CONDITIONS, AND CROSS-CABLING CONDITIONS FOR MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS WITHIN A MULTI-CHASSIS ROUTING MATRIX - A system includes a first device connected to a second device The first device includes a second node connected to a first node and the second device via a link, and includes a backup second node connected to the first node and the second device via another link. The first node is configured to receive, via the link or the other link, a group of packets (i.e., “packets”), from the second device; display a first notification that the second node can be removed when the packets are received via only the other link; display a second notification indicating that the backup second node can be removed when the packets are received via only the link; and display a third notification indicating that neither the second node nor the backup second node can be removed when the packets are not received via only the link and via only the other link. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188388 | User equipment scheduling method in cellular uplink communication system and base station apparatus therefor - A method and an apparatus maximize the capacity of a wireless communication network by taking into consideration inter-cell interference coordination. A home cell's capacity sensitivity to interference is calculated. At least one neighbor cell's capacity sensitivity to interference is collected. And at least one UE located in the home cell is scheduled based on the home cell's capacity sensitivity and the neighbor cell's capacity sensitivity. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve power and allocation control to maximize the capacity of the overall network including neighbor cells increase the system capacity in a cellular system in which inter-cell interference is large, and adaptively perform a UE scheduling in real time to changing distribution of UEs because information on a change in the capacity of each cell is shared by periods. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188389 | Wireless Localisation System - Disclosed is method of computing a round trip delay between a pair of nodes, the method comprising transmitting at least one beacon at a known transmit time from each of the nodes; measuring the times-of-arrival of the beacons at other of the nodes; and estimating a round trip delay between the nodes from the measured times-of-arrival and the transmit times; and correcting the round trip delay for either or both of a frequency offset between the nodes and relative motion between the nodes. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188390 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed herein are a communication terminal and a method for determining a packet retransmission time in the hand-off thereof. If a hand-off between heterogeneous communication networks with different speeds is generated, a packet retransmission time after the hand-off is determined corresponding to features of a current communication network so that an error packet can be retransmitted at a speed suitable for the corresponding handed-off communication network without waste of communication resources. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188391 | INTERRELATED WiFi AND USB PROTOCOLS AND OTHER APPLICATION FRAMEWORK PROCESSES, CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS - A master electronic circuit ( | 08-04-2011 |
20110188392 | MARINE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A marine wireless communication system is capable of reliably and stably monitoring an outboard engine unit in a watercraft. The marine wireless communication system comprises at least one first wireless device disposed in at least one outboard engine unit secured to a stern of a watercraft, and at least one second wireless device disposed inside the watercraft, the first wireless device communicating with the second wireless device according to a predetermined protocol. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188393 | REPORTING OF CHANNEL INFORMATION TO SUPPORT COORDINATED MULTI-POINT DATA TRANSMISSION - Techniques for reporting channel information are described. In one aspect, a plurality of channel information reporting modes are available to a user equipment (UE) for reporting channel information for coordinated multi-point (CoMP) data transmission. The UE may determine a first channel information reporting mode to use, determine first channel information related to at least one cell in a CoMP measurement set of the UE, and send the first channel information in accordance with the first channel information reporting mode to one or more cells in the CoMP measurement set. The UE may also determine a second channel information reporting mode to use, determine second channel information related to multiple cells in the CoMP measurement set, and send the second channel information in accordance with the second channel information reporting mode. A plurality of channel feedback configurations may be supported, including a single-stage, a two-stage, and/or a one-shot channel configurations. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188394 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING SLEEP MODE AT MOBILE STATION IN A PACKET-BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus dynamically controls a sleep mode in an MS in a packet-based communication system. A packet analyzer analyzes a type of a packet that the MS transmits or receives. A controller sets a timer to a timer value according to the analyzed type of the packet. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188395 | Single Sensor Radio Scene Analysis for Packet Based Radio Signals using 2nd and 4th Order Statistics - We consider a problem of radio frequency (RF) signal analysis where one sensing node observes a frequency band possibly used by multiple packet based radio transmitters. Analysis of the received signal includes two steps. In the first step we use a spectrogram to perform temporal segmentation of the received nonstationary signal. This task may be formulated as a clustering problem. In the second step we compute a certain 2-D slice of the fourth order spectrum for each of the segments found in the first step. These fourth order spectrum slices are arraigned in a three-way array. One aspect of the second step is to use uniqueness properties of the low rank decomposition of the three-way array to recover spectra and associated activity sequences of individual components in the received signal. We derive a numerical algorithm for the low rank decomposition, which computes estimates of the spectra and activity sequences by optimizing certain weighted least squares criterion under application specific constraints. Certain embodiments are illustrated with simulation examples involving signals used in 802.11a/b/g and Bluetooth networks. The disclosed methods and related systems can be used as spectrum analysis tools, providing crucial information needed for achieving efficient utilization of radio spectrum and elimination of mutual interference between the coexisting systems. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188396 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of reporting measurement results in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment receives a measurement con figuration which configures a plurality of serving cells as measurement objects and performs measurements for the plurality of serving cells based on the measurement configuration to determine measurement results for the plurality of serving cells. The user equipment reports the measurement results for the plurality of serving cells. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188397 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR MULTI-INTERFACE MONITORING AND CORRELATION OF DIAMETER SIGNALING INFORMATION - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for multi-interface monitoring and correlation of Diameter signaling information. The method includes copying Diameter information from a first signaling message traversing a first signaling interface. The method further includes copying information from a second signaling message traversing a second signaling interface. The method further includes correlating the Diameter information from the first signaling message with the information from the second signaling message and storing the correlated information in a memory device. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188398 | RADIO RELAY STATION, RADIO RELAY METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOCATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, RADIO TERMINAL, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a radio relay station ( | 08-04-2011 |
20110188399 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES IN AN ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for receiving resources allocated from a base station by a terminal in an OFDMA mobile communication system. The method includes receiving, for a data channel, a number of first components, which indicates an amount of resources used with a first resource allocation scheme, and a number of second components, which indicates an amount of resources used with a second resource allocation scheme, from the base station over a common control channel; determining first and second identifier lengths of channel elements for the first and second resource allocation schemes according to the number of first components and the number of second components; receiving resource allocation information including an identifier indicating at least one channel element allocated to the terminal, over a data control channel using one of the identifier lengths; and transmitting and receiving data over a resource of a channel element indicated by the received identifier. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188400 | NETWORK MONITORING DEVICE, NETWORK MONITORING METHOD, AND NETWORK MONITORING PROGRAM - Information on a communication relation or communication path to be monitored is automatically generated to reduce load of a user. A path information generation part receives a destination IP address designated by a user, through an input receiving part. When the input of the destination IP address is received, the path information generation part uses configuration information tables, each of which stores configuration information of a device on a network, to identify IP addresses of networks each having a plurality of terminals, as branch IP addresses. The path information generation part uses the configuration information tables and transfer destination information tables each storing a routing table of a router, to identify the connection order of routers between the designated destination IP address and the identified branch IP addresses, to generate path information. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188401 | ERROR DETECTION FOR DATA FRAMES - A method for detecting data frame mode mismatch errors may include receiving a data frame that includes an overhead byte. It may be determined whether a value associated with the overhead byte indicates that a transmitting device operating mode matches a receiving device operating mode. In an additional implementation, it may be determined whether a value associated with the overhead byte indicates that a transmitting device output port matches a receiving device input port. An alarm may be generated when it is determined that the value associated with the overhead byte indicates that either the transmitting device operating mode does not match the receiving device operating mode or the transmitting device output port does not match the receiving device input port. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188402 | Adaptively Capping Data Throughput of Client Devices Associated with a Wireless Network - A methods and apparatuses of adaptively capping data throughput of client devices associated with a wireless network are disclosed. One method includes monitoring an air-time per bit efficiency of each client device associated with the wireless network. A data throughput cap for each client device is adaptively determined based on the air-time per bit efficiency of the client device. | 08-04-2011 |
20110194423 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting signal, at a mobile station, in a wireless communication system is provided. Inter-cell interference level control parameter information may be different for each frequency partition due to use of an FFR scheme. This method is advantageous in that, when uplink transmission is performed, system throughput and cell edge-user throughput are improved and inter-cell interference level control is efficiently performed, thereby improving a Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) at the receiving end. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194424 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MEASURING HOME CELL/PRIVATE NETWORK CELL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of measurement on a home cell/private network cell, by a user equipment (UE), in a mobile communication system, the method including the steps of: transmitting a request message requesting the measurement to a network node, the request message including an indicator instructing at least one of register, join, and use of the home cell/private network cell; receiving a response message corresponding to the request message from the network node, the response message including context information for measurement control of at least one home cell/private network cell accessible by the UE; and selectively executing measurement on the accessible home cell/private network cell by using the context information. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194425 | REMOTE NETWORK DEVICE COMPONENT TESTING - A network device receives, from a remote user device, a requested test that includes test Internet protocol (IP) packets, and converts the test IP packets into hardware test commands. The network device also performs, based on the hardware test commands, the requested test on a component of a network device card to produce hardware test results. The network device further converts the hardware test results into test results in an IP packet format, and provides the tests results in the IP packet format to the remote user device. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194426 | HIERARCHICAL QUEUING AND SCHEDULING - In an example embodiment, there is disclosed herein logic encoded in at least one tangible media for execution and when executed operable to receive a packet. The logic determines a client associated with the packet. The client associated with a service set, and the service set associated with a transmitter. The logic determines a drop probability for the selected client determines a current packet arrival rate for the selected client and determines whether to enqueue or drop the packet based on the drop probability for the selected client and the current packet arrival rate associated with the selected client. The drop probability is based on a packet arrival rate and virtual queue length for the, which is based on a packet arrival rate and virtual queue length for the service set that is based on a packet arrival rate and virtual queue length for the transmitter. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194427 | RESOURCE SELECTION FOR DUAL RADIO TERMINALS - Systems, methods and apparatus described herein include features that enable dual radio access. In one embodiment, the access point directs an access terminal through sequential measurements, which are selected by the access point based on the radio access capability of the access terminal, service preferences of the user and measurement reports. In a complementary method, an access terminal obtains the sequential measurements chosen by the access point. In another embodiment, the access point directs an access terminal through a set of measurements, which are selected by the access point based on the radio access capability of the access terminal and service preferences of the user. In another embodiment, an access terminal selects which subset of measurements to obtain based on the radio access capability of the access terminal and optionally service preferences of the user. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194428 | MCCH NOTIFICATION SCHEDULING AND CONTENTS - A multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) may be transmitted from a wireless network and may be received by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). From the perspective of the WTRU, an MBMS control channel (MCCH) notification may be received over a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). The PDCCH may include an MBMS radio network temporary identifier (M-RNTI) and the PDCCH may be on a multimedia broadcast on a single frequency network (MBSFN) subframe for MBMS. The MCCH notification may be monitored on the MBSFN subframe. The MCCH notification may be received periodically within a scheduling period for the MBSFN subframe. The MCCH notification may also be received in an MCCH message modification period that may occur prior to an MCCH message modification period that may include a new MCCH message. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194429 | Reducing Energy Consumption in Mobile Telecommunications - Method and network element for reducing energy consumption in WCDMA cells of a mobile network, the method comprising: monitoring traffic conveyed in the traffic channels of a cell; analyzing certain predetermined parameters in the monitored traffic; determining whether said predetermined parameters meet corresponding predetermined conditions; and when said predetermined conditions are met, switching off continuous transmission of common channels and facilitating the intermittent transmission of the common channels during one or more transmission events, thereby causing the cell to enter a cell standby mode. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194430 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNIFIED CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Certain aspects of the disclosure propose a unified channel estimation algorithm that combines two or more channel estimation algorithms in a single piece of hardware or software. The proposed unified channel estimation may dynamically switch, based on one or more metrics, between different modes of operation that utilize different channel estimation algorithms. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194431 | SELECTION OF TRIGGERING EVENTS/ELEMENTS FOR FOR RELAXED DETERMINISTIC BACK-OFF METHOD - In the context of IEEE 802.11 WLAN networks, enhancement to the Relaxed Deterministic Backoff (R-DEB) for random access of shared (Medium Access Control MAC) method. For all available candidate resource slots, a busy index is calculated that reflects the level of use/occupation in the past and infers a probability of use in the future by another concurring device. The method assumes the use of a sub-set of resource slots for transmission, and updates this set by replacing resource slots for which collisions are frequent with a not currently used candidate resource for which the busy index is the lowest. Passive Spoofing/overhearing of all resources for clear channel assessment (CCS) is used for resource monitoring purposes. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194432 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - A base station apparatus detects an uplink radio error and recovers the uplink. In a communication system comprised of a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus, when the base station apparatus instructs the mobile station apparatus to execute contention based random access, the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus release uplink synchronization, while when the base station apparatus instructs the mobile station apparatus to execute non-contention based random access, the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus maintain uplink synchronization. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194433 | MANAGING DEDICATED CHANNEL RESOURCE ALLOCATION TO USER EQUIPMENT BASED ON RADIO BEARER TRAFFIC WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, an access network monitors traffic, associated with a radio bearer of a given type (e.g., a radio bearer expected to be associated with delay-sensitive and/or high-priority communication sessions), between a user equipment (UE) in a dedicated-channel state (e.g., CELL_DCH state) and an application server that is arbitrating a communication session between the UE and at least one other UE. Based on the monitored traffic, the access network selectively transitions the UE away from the dedicated-channel state. For example, if traffic on the radio bearer of the given type is detected before expiration of a timer, the UE can be permitted to remaining in the dedicated-channel state. Alternatively, if no traffic on the radio bearer of the given type is detected before expiration of the timer, the UE can be transitioned away from the dedicated-channel state (e.g., into CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state). | 08-11-2011 |
20110194434 | RATE SELECTION FOR EIGENSTEERING IN A MIMO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for selecting rates for data transmission on eigenmodes of a MIMO channel are described. An access point transmits an unsteered MIMO pilot via the downlink. A user terminal estimates the downlink channel quality based on the downlink unsteered MIMO pilot and transmits an unsteered MIMO pilot and feedback information via the uplink. The feedback information is indicative of the downlink channel quality. The access point estimates the uplink channel quality and obtains a channel response matrix based on the uplink unsteered MIMO pilot, decomposes the channel response matrix to obtain eigenvectors and channel gains for the eigenmodes of the downlink, and selects rates for the eigenmodes based on the estimated uplink channel quality, the channel gains for the eigenmodes, and the feedback information. The access point processes data based on the selected rates and transmits steered data and a steered MIMO pilot on the eigenmodes with the eigenvectors. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194435 | COMMUNICATION INFORMATION ANALYSIS SYSTEM - The communication information analysis system that executes the storing and the analyzing of the communication packets inexpensively without reducing the rate and reliability of the data communication network. The system of present invention comprises one or more communication terminals and a server computer. When the user terminal communicate with other communication terminals, the user terminal stores the packets to be sent and the received packets into itself as the electrical data file, at the acquisition unit, for example, time interval. The electrical data file is sent to the server computer and stored into it. The server computer analyzes the communication packets using the electrical data file stored in the server computer itself, when requested from the user. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194436 | ASSISTED STATE TRANSITIONS OF A USER EQUIPMENT WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a user equipment (UE) determines to initiate a communication session with at least one other UE to be arbitrated by an application server. The UE determines a type of the communication session (e.g., delay-sensitive, PTT, etc.) and/or a size of a call message to be sent by the UE for requesting initiation of the communication session by the application server. The UE selects a reverse-link channel on which to transmit the call message based at least in part upon the determined type of the communication session and/or the determined size of the call message. The UE transitions to a given state (e.g., CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH, etc.) that supports transmissions upon the selected reverse-link channel. The UE transmits the call message on the selected reverse-link channel after the UE is transitioned to the given state. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194437 | ASSISTED STATE TRANSITION OF A USER EQUIPMENT (UE) FOR DELAY SENSITIVE APPLICATIONS WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, an application server receives a call message, from an originating user equipment (UE), that is configured to request initiation of a communication session, to be arbitrated by the application server, between the originating UE and at least one target UE. The application server selectively sends, in response to the call message, dummy data to a serving access network of a given UE associated with the communication session in order to facilitate a transition of the given UE to a dedicated-channel state. For example, the application server can selectively send the dummy data based on a size of the call message and/or based on a type of the communication session. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194438 | Clock Recovery Method over Packet Switched Networks based on Network Quiet Period Detection - A method of recovering timing information in a packet network, involves detecting quiet periods in the packet network when network packet delay variation (PDV) is low. A frequency prediction unit is trained during the quiet periods to learn output clock variations of a timing recovery unit to permit the frequency prediction unit to predict frequency update values for a local oscillator during non quiet periods taking into account the historical output clock variations during quiet periods. The output of the frequency prediction unit is used as the active frequency update values during non quiet periods. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194439 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COMPUTING THE AVAILABLE SPACE IN A PACKET FOR DATA STREAM TRANSPORT - The method of computing the available space in a packet for data stream transport comprises:
| 08-11-2011 |
20110194440 | Communication Devices and Methods for Determining Status of Remote Communication Devices - A communication device may include a transmitting circuit for transmitting packets from a first communication device to a second communication device and a processor in the first communication device and coupled with the transmitting circuit. The processor may evaluate the packet receipt status information to identify a packet receipt characteristic associated with the second communication device and control data packet transmission from the first communication device to the second communication device based on the packet receipt characteristic associated with the second communication device. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194441 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DISCARDING LOGGED MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of discarding logged measurements in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connected mode receives a Minimization of Drive Tests (MDT) configuration from a base station and starts a validity timer upon receiving the MDT configuration. The user equipment in an RRC idle mode logs measurements based on the MDT configuration to collect logged measurements while the validity timer is running. When the validity timer is expired, the user equipment discards the MDT configuration and starts a conservation timer. When the conservation timer is expired, the logged measurements are discarded. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194442 | Determining WLAN Edges - Determining whether a station is at the edge of wireless local area network (WLAN) coverage. In an IEEE 802.11 wireless network comprising one or more access points (APs) which may optionally be connected to one or more controllers, with wireless clients connected to those APs, . Station S connected to AP A collects reports such as beacon reports which contains information on all APs station S can hear, including signal strengths. AP A collects a neighbor report which contains information on all APs in its neighborhood including signal strengths. These reports from A and S are observed and compared over time to determine when S is at or is moving to the edge of WLAN coverage. For example, if the only entry in the beacon list for client S is AP A to which it is connected, and the signal strength is decreasing over time, S is at the edge of WLAN coverage and is moving away from the WLAN. The process may be implemented at a controller, at a client, or both. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194443 | METHOD FOR FEEDING BACK ACK/NACK FOR DOWNLINK DATA TRANSMISSION IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for feeding back ACK/NACK for downlink data transmission in a radio communication system. The method is applied on a mobile terminal and includes the following steps: receiving downlink data, calculating, with respect to each Compenent Carrier (CC), a number of ACKs of ACK/NACK information of downlink data sub-frames of the CC, and feeding back numbers of ACKs of the ACK/NACK information of the downlink data sub-frames of CCs. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194444 | Controlling and Calibrating Wireless Range - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer program product for controlling a wireless access point range. In one embodiment, the process identifies a distance between the client device and the wireless access point in response to a request by a client device to access the wireless access point. The process allows the client device to access the wireless access point if the distance from the client device to the wireless access point is within the selected access range for the wireless access point. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194445 | Link Quality Reporting for a Communication System Capable of Using Different Modulation Schemes - It is described a method for reporting, in a link quality report, link quality information from a link quality report sending station to a link quality report receiving station. The link quality report receiving station is capable of using different modulation schemes for communicating to the link quality report sending station. Depending on a priority of each of at least two of said different modulation schemes, at least one of said at least two modulation schemes are selected for inclusion of corresponding link quality information in said link quality report. According to an embodiment, the priority of each of said at least two modulation schemes is determined depending on a link quality parameter value. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194446 | NETWORK BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT - Technologies for measuring a data throughput rate of a link typically used for transferring media catalogs and media between a media provider and an UPnP Control Point. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194447 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE FLOW RECORD GENERATION AND ANALYSIS - A method, apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium for generating a mobile flow record for a mobile flow of a mobile node are provided. A method includes receiving information associated with signaling traffic of the mobile node, receiving information associated with bearer traffic of the mobile node, and generating the mobile flow record by correlating the information associated with signaling traffic of the mobile node and the information associated with bearer traffic of the mobile node. The mobile flow record includes IP layer information associated with the mobile flow and wireless layer information associated with the mobile flow. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194448 | System and Method of Controlling In-Bound Path Selection Based on Historical and Continuous Path Quality Monitoring, Assessment and Predictions - A system and method of automatically controlling in-bound traffic from a first communications peer to a second communications peer based on an input from a historical path quality assessment and prediction system is disclosed. The second communications peer receives an input from the historical path quality assessment and prediction system, selects a path through a relay based on the received input, requests allocation of the relay, and sends an address of the selected relay to the first communications peer. The system and method works in concert with an Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE) mechanism, or takes advantage of the features of the Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE) mechanism. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194449 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING AUDIOVISUAL QUALITY IMPAIRMENT IN PACKET NETWORKS - An audio and/or visual transmission quality device estimates transmission quality as perceived by a user based on observation and processing of objective metrics. The device preferably includes a primary integrator to generate an instantaneous estimate of user annoyance based on occurrence of frame loss events in a received signal. The device further preferably includes secondary integrators to process the instantaneous estimate of user annoyance in selected time intervals and generate a plurality of time-varying estimates of user annoyance valid over the selected time intervals. The device may further include a plurality of scaling modules to scale the plurality of time-varying estimates and generate a corresponding plurality of estimates of transmission quality as perceived by the user. The device may further include a modulation network to modify a sensitivity of the primary integrator to the occurrence of frame loss events in the received signal. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194450 | CELL COPY COUNT HAZARD DETECTION - The present invention is directed to a network device, method and apparatus for processing data. The present invention includes at least one ingress module for performing switching functions on incoming data. The invention further includes a memory management unit (MMU) for storing the incoming data, and at least one egress module for transmitting the incoming data to at least one egress port. Further, in the present invention, the memory management unit further comprises a cell copy count pool (CCP) memory, wherein the CCP determines when a memory cell can be made available. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194451 | System and Method of Network Diagnosis - Embodiments provide systems and methods for diagnosing a network and identifying problems in a network which reduce the data transfer rate of data through the network. One embodiment of a method for network diagnosis may include infusing data into a network upstream and downstream of a portion of the network relative to a library drive, querying the drive at intervals over time for drive data to determine the data transfer rate at the drive and comparing the data transfer rate of the data infused upstream of the device or network portion with the data transfer rate of the data infused downstream of the device or network portion to determine throughput. By comparing the data transfer rate of data infused upstream and downstream of a network device or network portion, problem devices in a network may be identified. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194452 | Transmitting Data with Multiple Priorities as OFDM Symbols - A transmitter transmits data having a set of two or more priorities on subcarriers using orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. The transmitter includes a media access (MAC) layer, wherein the MAC layer further includes a queue for storing data at each priority, a rate control block connected to each queue, and a physical (PHY) layer. The PHY layer further includes a channel coder for each priority, wherein each channel coder is connected to the corresponding queue to receive data, and to the rate control block to send coding information. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194453 | PACKET LOSS FREQUENCY MEASURING SYSTEM, PACKET LOSS FREQUENCY MEASURING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A packet loss frequency measuring system for measuring the packet loss frequency at low processing costs is provided. Packet information storage means | 08-11-2011 |
20110194454 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD - Disclosed are a wireless transmission system and a wireless transmission method that prevent CEC protocols from being affected by wireless communication transmission delays or buffering delays and failing when CEC communication is performed wirelessly in the HDMI standard. The CEC control unit of a first wireless communication device (illustrated with a receiver ( | 08-11-2011 |
20110194455 | BASE STATION, TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD FOR BASE STATION, PROCESSING APPARATUS, STORAGE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station | 08-11-2011 |
20110199914 | System and Method for Capacity Planning on a High Speed data Network - The present disclosure describes a method and system for monitoring the bandwidth utilization on a high speed data network port over time. According to the method described herein, measurements of the bandwidth utilization on the port may be taken over a predetermined time interval and analyzed to determine whether the utilization measurement equals or exceeds a predetermined upper threshold. If the port exhibits high bandwidth utilization within the time interval, an alert may be set for further monitoring of the port or for port augmentation. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199915 | MANAGING PAGES OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL WHEN THE ACCESS TERMINAL IS ENGAGED IN A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - At least one embodiment of the invention is directed to communicating in a wireless communications system, including monitoring a communication session on a first network, ignoring pages from a second network during the communication session, the first and second network configured for operation on different physical layers, and upon termination of the communication session over the first network, selectively sending a query to an application server to request information related to failed attempts by the application server to contact the access terminal on the second network during the communication session. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199916 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT USING SINGLE DEVICE BASED POWER MEASUREMENTS - A mobile device measures power from different locations for an encountered wireless access point, a WiFi or Bluetooth access point, and communicates the power measurements to a remote location. The remote location server collects power measurements for the encountered wireless access point from a plurality of communication devices. The remote location server determines the location of the encountered wireless access point utilizing corresponding power measurements from a single communication device. The power measurements are performed at different locations and over a period of time. The power measurements are time stamped and transmitted to the remote location server. The single communication device is selected based on quality and/or availability of corresponding power measurements for the encountered wireless access point. The determined location of the encountered wireless access point is stored into a reference database so as to be shared among the plurality of communication devices. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199917 | COLLABORATIVE SHARING OF LOCATION INFORMATION AMONG DEVICES IN A NETWORK - A wireless communication device determines its location and communicates the location to other local devices utilizing a nonstandard, standard and/or proprietary protocol in combination with another protocol such as a Bluetooth, RFID, IEEE 802.11 and/or a cellular phone protocol. The location may be determined utilizing a GNSS receiver and/or network device information. A new location may be determined based on the determined location, a relative distance and/or a relative direction to other local devices. Determined location information may be communicated to other devices via a network. The wireless communication device may receive locations and/or corresponding location uncertainties from devices located within a limited range. The received information is utilized to determine a more accurate location. The more accurate location is communicated back to the devices within the limited range and/or to other communication devices. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199918 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ASSISTING IN NETWORK DISCOVERY - A method assist in discovery of a directional communications network using an omni-directional communications network is provided. The method may comprise obtaining connectivity information using a first protocol for one or more apparatuses, and establishing a session with one of the one or more apparatuses for directional communication using a second protocol, wherein the first protocol is different than the second protocol. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199919 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSOCIATING A RELAY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate associating with relays in a wireless network. A device can select whether to utilize relay assistance where present based at least in part on measuring one or more determined or projected parameters related to the relay. Where utilizing a relay results in user-plane data channel conditions above a threshold level and control channel conditions below a threshold level, a serving base station can determine whether to employ another base station to serve the device, jointly serve a relay with an additional base station, and/or the like. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199920 | LOW/HIGH FREQUENCY SHARED LEAKAGE ANTENNA, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND CLOSE-RANGE DETECTION SYSTEM USING THE ANTENNA - The present invention provides a high/low frequency dual wireless location detection and information transmission system which is high in reliability and maintainability, and can be easily installed. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199921 | USER EQUIPMENT OPERATION MODE AND CHANNEL OR CARRIER PRIORITIZATION - A method for wireless communications is disclosed that includes determining a power operation control feature of a first mode of operation of a user equipment (UE). A channel prioritization is triggered based at least in part on the power operation control feature. A second configuration indicating UE operation in a second mode is received and is based on a UE generated report of a state resulting from the first mode of operation. The second mode of operation is then implemented. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199922 | HANDLING OF RECEIVED IMPLICIT NULL PACKETS - A router includes a network ingress processor and a network egress processor. The network ingress processor is configured for modifying a received MPLS packet such that an internal header thereof includes a pre-configured IP flow identifier therein in place of an as-received MPLS flow identifier. Such modifying is performed in response to the network ingress processor parsing a MPLS label stack of the received MPLS packet to determine if an existing MPLS label of the label stack needs to be replaced with an Implicit Null label and in response to determining that there is no other label in the MPLS label stack. The network egress processor includes a flow selector configured for directing packets dependent upon a type of flow identifier included in an internal header thereof, for receiving the modified MPLS packet, and for replacing the internal header with a port-specific header. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199923 | Enabling Reporting of Non-Real-Time MDT Measurements - Methods and apparatus for informing a network node of a wireless communication network of the presence of logged measurements are disclosed. A first mobile station performs measurements concerning one or more connectivity aspects for the first mobile station in relation to the wireless communication network and stores the measurements in an internal log, where the measurements are performed according to a reporting configuration for the first mobile station. The first mobile station then sends a notification to the first network node regarding the presence of logged measurements in order to enable the first network node to respond to the notification with a request for a logged measurement report. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199924 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS, AND METHODS FOR MONITORING NETWORK CAPACITY - Methods, systems, and devices for monitoring network capacity and determining network utilization are herein disclosed. A traffic flow of captured data packets received at an ingress port of a network captured traffic distribution device may be sampled at a frequency corresponding to a first time period. The sample may be analyzed to determine whether, for example, the ingress port is active during the first time period. An increment may be added to a first counter based on a determination that the ingress port is active. The increments from a predefined plurality of first time periods may be aggregated and the predefined plurality of first time periods may correspond to a second time period. A second counter value may be generated for the second time period based on the aggregate and a percent utilization of the ingress port for the second time period may be determined based on the second counter value. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199925 | PACKET SWITCHING EQUIPMENT AND SWITCHING CONTROL METHOD - A packet switching equipment and a switch control system employing the same performs operation of the switch core portion independent of content of decision of an arbiter portion and overall equipment can be constructed with simple control structure. The packet switching equipment includes input buffer portions temporarily storing packets arriving to the input ports and outputting packets with adding labels indicative of destination port numbers, a switch core portion for switching the packets on the basis of labels added to the input buffer portions, and an arbiter portion adjusting input buffer portions to provide output permissions for outputting to the output ports. A sorting network autonomously sorting and concentrating the packets on the basis of the labels added to the packets is employed in the switch core portion. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199926 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN IMPROVED USER GROUP SELECTION SCHEME WITH FINITE-RATE CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK FOR FDD MULTIUSER MIMO DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION - A method for channel selection in a communication system includes receiving a broadcast signal comprising a beam vector, generating a first channel state information message based on the power of the broadcast signal, generating a second channel state information message based on the direction of the broadcast signal with respect to the beam vector, and transmitting a feedback signal comprising at least the first channel state information message and the second channel state information message. The communication system may include a frequency division duplex (FDD) multiuser communication system or a time division duplex (TDD) multiuser communication system. The first channel state information message may include a channel gain with respect to the broadcast signal. The second channel state information message may include a measure of orthogonality between the broadcast signal and the beam vector. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199927 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - An SAE/LTE or 4G cellular telecommunications network is disclosed which comprises a plurality of eNodeBs | 08-18-2011 |
20110199928 | FEEDBACK CONTROL OF PROCESSOR USE IN VIRTUAL SYSTEMS - A device may receive packets for a system and obtain a packet drop rate of the system, a processor utilization rate of the system, and a target processor utilization rate of the system. In addition, the device may determine a target packet drop rate based on the packet drop rate, the processor utilization rate, and the target processor utilization rate. The device may drop a portion of the packets in accordance with the packet drop rate. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199929 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING NETWORK PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS - A method and a device for measuring network performance parameters are disclosed. The method includes: receiving an extended bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) packet that includes a packet loss monitoring Type-Length-Value (TLV) and/or a time delay monitoring TLV; and calculating network performance parameters according to the packet loss monitoring TLV and/or the time delay monitoring TLV in the received extended BFD packet. The device includes: an extended BFD packet receiving module and a network performance parameter calculating module. The method and the device enables the calculating of network performance parameters and the monitoring of network performance, and therefore the problem of monitoring network performance in technical solutions in the prior art is solved. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199930 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CALIBRATION DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND METHOD FOR UPDATING A CORRESPONDENCE RELATIONSHIP - A transmission apparatus and method updates a communication mode selection table that updates a communication mode selection table correctly and selects an optimal MCS according to an actual channel condition. A buffer temporarily stores calibration data to be transmitted for updating a table. A scheduler performs scheduling of data to be transmitted based on a CIR on a downlink reported from a plurality of communication terminal apparatuses. When there is no data to be transmitted, the scheduler sends calibration data from the buffer. When calibration data is transmitted as a result of the scheduling, the scheduler notifies an address information generation section of the communication terminal apparatus to which the calibration data is transmitted. In one mode, first data is transmitted from a first communication apparatus to another communication apparatus, the first communication apparatus receives from the other communication apparatus, information on an error rate when the other communication apparatus receives the first data; and | 08-18-2011 |
20110199931 | HIGH DATA RATE INTERFACE APPARATUS AND METHOD - A data interface for transferring digital data between a host and a client over a communication path using packet structures linked together to form a communication protocol for communicating a pre-selected set of digital control and presentation data. The signal protocol is used by link controllers configured to generate, transmit, and receive packets forming the communications protocol, and to form digital data into one or more types of data packets, with at least one residing in the host device and being coupled to the client through the communications path. The interface provides a cost-effective, low power, bi-directional, high-speed data transfer mechanism over a short-range “serial” type data link, which lends itself to implementation with miniature connectors and thin flexible cables which are especially useful in connecting display elements such as wearable micro-displays to portable computers and wireless communication devices. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199932 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC DATA TRANSFER MANAGEMENT ON A PER SUBSCRIBER BASIS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of dynamically managing transmission of packets is disclosed. The method, in some embodiments, may comprise establishing a network session over a communication link between a network and a user device of a user and associating a data transmission parameter with the user device. The method may further comprise receiving a packet and calculating a delay period associated with the packet based on the data transmission parameter and delaying transmission of the packet based on the delay period. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199933 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES AMONG MULTIPLE USERS - A method and apparatus for allocating resources among multiple users are provided. The method includes: determining the code allocation manners of multiple users involved in resource allocation, and determining a CQI value for each user in each code allocation manner; obtaining a TBS of each user corresponding to the determined CQI value and code for each user; and obtaining the total TBS of all users involved in resource allocation in each code allocation manner, and selecting the combination of the CQI value and code allocation manner corresponding to the largest TBS from the total TBS to serve as the manner for resource allocation. During the resource allocation among multiple users, the channel conditions of other users are considered while allocating resources to each user. This maximizes the sent data amount. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199934 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - The invention involves monitoring the flow of traffic for a particular user to detect a pattern in the flow of traffic. Upon detecting a particular pattern, one or more operating parameters or settings of the radio access network are adapted accordingly. The pattern can correspond to a particular application, or a combination of two or more applications being used concurrently by the user. The parameters or setting include timer settings or threshold values relating to state transitions. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199935 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided are a radio communication system, a transmission device, and a communication signal transmission method, which enable a reception device to correctly demodulate a communication signal without performing a feedback of a propagation path characteristic from the reception device to the transmission device. The transmission device includes an SVD calculation unit for calculating, as an inverse-direction propagation path characteristic, a propagation path characteristic exhibited in a direction from the reception device toward the transmission device and for calculating a forward-direction propagation path characteristic being a propagation path characteristic exhibited in a direction from the transmission device toward the reception device, based on the inverse-direction propagation path characteristic, reception-side calibration information regarding radio reception units notified from the reception device, and transmission-side calibration information regarding radio transmission units, and a weight synthesis unit for generating the communication signal weighted based on the forward-direction propagation path characteristic. | 08-18-2011 |
20110205910 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD TO INDICATE PREFERRED ACCESS POINTS AND SERVICE PROVIDERS - The present invention is a system, apparatus, and method for a “Priority” field that is included in the information transmitted by an Access Point (AP) ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110205911 | SYSTEM FOR CHANNEL SOUNDING OF BROADBAND SIGNAL CARRIER MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS AND METHOD THEREOF - Provided are a system for channel sounding of broadband single carrier mobile communications and a method thereof. A channel sounding device is provided, which achieves precise modeling of a broadband mobile communication in a 5 GHz band. The channel sounding device can perform precise channel modeling by collecting broadband channel data of 20 MHz between a base station and a mobile station moving at maximum 150 km/h, using a sounding signal including a 802.15.3 preamble, a maximum length sequence (MLS) signal, and a single carrier frequency domain equalization (SC-FDE) symbol overcoming a limitation of signal distortion of an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) signal. The channel sounding device can simultaneously perform modeling of interference of an adjacent channel as well as a transmission channel. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205912 | PACKET TIMING MEASUREMENT - A method and apparatus for performing packet time measurements. In one embodiment, the method comprises transmitting a packet in the network from a sender to a receiver through a plurality of devices; creating a plurality of packets by copying the packet at each of the plurality of devices as the packet is being transmitted through the plurality of devices, including adding a time stamp to each packet in the plurality of packets, wherein time stamps of plurality of packets are generated with data from time stamp engines synchronized to a global clock; sending the plurality of packets with their time stamps to a tool; and performing analysis on the plurality of packets using the tool. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205913 | BEAMFORMING AND SDMA METHODS FOR WIRELESS LAN AND OTHER APPLICATIONS - Embodiments of the present disclosure present methods for calculating beamforming and spatial division multiple access (SDMA) weights utilizing minimum mean square error (MMSE) method. The beamforming and SDMA weights may also be normalized for further performance improvements. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205914 | Threshold Determination in TDOA-Based Positioning System - A method in a wireless communication terminal including receiving a signal comprising at least a Positioning Reference Signal (PRS) transmission from a serving cell and a PRS transmission from a neighbor cell, estimating a signal quality metric (SQM) based on the PRS transmission from the neighbor cell, estimating a time difference of arrival (TDOA) measurement for the neighbor cell based on the PRS transmissions, determining if the estimated SQM satisfies a criterion, and sending a report to the serving cell that includes at least the estimated TDOA if the criterion is satisfied. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205915 | ECHO MITIGATION IN THE PRESENCE OF VARIABLE DELAYS DUE TO ADAPTIVE JITTER BUFFERS - In an example embodiment, a control connection is introduced between an adaptive jitter buffer (AJB) and an adaptive bulk delay (ABD) buffer of an echo canceller (ECAN) in an Internet Protocol (IP) conference bridge. The control connection allows the AJB to control the amount of delay inserted by the ABD in the ECAN convolution processor (CP) signal path. The adjustment in ABD delay restores the time alignment of the ECAN internal echo estimate and offsets variations in echo tail delay introduced by network induced AJB delay changes. Time-invariance is preserved in the echo tail path. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205916 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An inspection node receives an event to begin monitoring a traffic flow where the event comprises a flow identifier associated with the traffic flow. The inspection node receives the traffic flow where the traffic flow comprises a plurality of packets and begins inspecting the plurality of the packets to obtain an application identifier. Based upon the flow identifier and the application identifier, the inspection node performs a sampling process on the traffic flow. After determining the end of the traffic flow, the inspection node terminates the sampling process. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205917 | SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEM, SIGNAL PROCESSING APPARATUS, SIGNAL PROCESSING PROGRAM - A signal processing system that includes a transmitter component, a receiver component, a comparison component and an execution component is provided. The transmitter component transmits a predetermined detection signal, using one or other of a plurality of signal lines of a transmission path. The receiver component receives an interference signal, occurring in a different signal line from the signal line the transmitter component used for transmitting the detection signal, the interference signal occurring from interference due to the detection signal transmitted from the transmitter component. The comparison component compares a voltage value of the interference signal received by the receiver component with a predetermined reference voltage value. The execution component, based on a comparison result of comparison by the comparison component, executes predetermined processing according to the comparison result. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205918 | Apparatus for Power Line and Wireless Communications - A communications apparatus comprises a first medium interface circuit for communicating data over a power line, a first medium access controller, having a first MAC address, for controlling the first medium interface circuit, an 802.11 compliant second medium interface circuit for wireless data communications, a second medium access controller, having a second MAC address, for controlling the second medium interface circuit, and a communications medium access controller configured to apportion data for simultaneous communication over the wireless and power line media. The first medium interface circuit and the second medium interface circuit are linked at the layer II level of the OSI model. A network of said devices is also disclosed, the network possibly including device connected via only one of the media. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205919 | ROUTE CALCULATING SYSTEM - A route calculation system includes a collection unit that collects a current link traffic volume and a link power consumption for each link included in a network; a link cost calculation unit that estimates, for each link, an increase in the link power consumption due to the request flow based on the current link traffic volume, the link power consumption, the request flow, and the characteristic, and calculates a link cost value based on the increase in the link power consumption; and a route determination unit that determines, as a route for the request flow, a route that has the smallest sum of the link cost values of each route connecting between any nodes, thereby reducing the power consumption in the entire network for a request flow. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205920 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device according to the present invention includes: a receiving unit which receives a block transmitted by a communication device; a photocurrent measuring unit which measures a reception quality of the received block; a PHY rate determining unit which determines, based on the reception quality, a PHY rate that is used by the communication device for transmitting a next block; a block size control unit which determines, based on the measured reception quality, a block size; and a transmission unit which transmits feedback information including the determined PHY rate and the determined block size to the communication device, and the block size control unit determines the block size to be a value smaller than a maximum value of a block size that can be transmitted by the communication device, when a value indicating the reception quality of the block is within a predetermined range including a PHY rate threshold. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205921 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING FORBIDDEN CHANNEL LIST - A method for generating a forbidden channel list for a combined wireless communication station comprises the steps of: obtaining a channel usage report from an access point; performing a channel scan procedure; generating at least one of a channel load report, a noise indicator report, a signal strength indicator report and a packet error rate report according to the results of the channel scan procedure; and generating a forbidden channel list at least according to the generated one of the channel usage report, the channel load report, the noise indicator report, the signal strength to report, and the packet error rate report. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205922 | RADIO TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A radio terminal ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110205923 | MEASUREMENT IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The present invention relates to measurement in radio communication systems. In particular, the present invention relates to a sounding method in a cellular wireless communication system, the communication system itself and its components like base stations and mobile stations. The radio communication system ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110205924 | Collision avoidance in multiple protocol communication networks using a shared communication medium - A method for collision avoidance in multiple protocol networks using a shared communication medium begins by determining a first protocol probable active time period. The method continues by determining a first protocol probable inactive time period. The method continues by generating a transmit blocking indication based on the first protocol probable active time period and the first protocol probable inactive time period. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205925 | DYNAMIC CHANNEL SHARING USING BANDWIDTH METRICS - In a Mobile Ad Hoc Network (MANET), each node calculates a bandwidth output value representative of data output requirements for the node relative to the transmit time slots available to the node. This value is shared with other nodes in the MANET and may be employed to more efficiently allocate channel usage among nodes as traffic demands and network topology change. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205926 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Method and arrangement in a first node for requesting a status report from a second node. The first node and the second node are both comprised within a wireless communication network. The status report comprises positive and/or negative acknowledgement of data sent from the first node, to be received by the second node. The first node comprises a first counter configured to count the number of transmitted Protocol Data Units, PDUs, and a second counter configured to count the number of transmitted data bytes. The method and arrangements comprises initialising the first and the second counter to zero, transmitting data to be received by the second node, comparing the value of the first and the second counters with a first threshold limit value and a second threshold limit value and requesting a status report from the second node if any of the threshold limit values is reached or exceeded. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205927 | Automated On-Line Business Bandwidth Planning Methodology - Closed-loop control is applied to the field of automated on-line business bandwidth planning tools by comparing measured business bandwidth with a baseline for providing a difference indication, changing the baseline according to the difference, and reporting the change as an event relating to a service level agreement. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205928 | Method for Improving Battery Life and HARQ Retransmissions in Wireless Communications Systems - Methods and apparatus for controlling discontinuous receiver operation in a wireless communication device are disclosed. In an exemplary embodiment, a wireless communication device ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110205929 | METHOD OF OPTIMISING BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for communication ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110205930 | Method for Transmitting of Reference Signals and Determination of Precoding Matrices for Multi-Antenna Transmission - Techniques are disclosed for determining transmitter antenna weights at a base station ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110211463 | ADD-ON MODULE AND METHODS THEREOF - An arrangement for processing data traffic flowing through a network is provided. The arrangement includes a data interface for receiving the data traffic. The arrangement also includes an inspection engine for analyzing the data traffic, wherein the analyzing is performed on at least payload data. The arrangement further includes means for routing the data traffic through the network, wherein the means for routing is configured to define one or more ports for transmitting the data traffic. The means for routing the data traffic is dynamic to balance the data traffic across multiple outgoing ports. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211464 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING OF USER QUALITY-OF-EXPERIENCE ON A WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of the invention provide monitoring of the Quality-of-Experience (QoE) of a mobile user of a wireless network without introducing any additional packets or requiring user feedback. Furthermore, embodiments of the invention provide QoE information based on certain control messages that may be utilized for reporting, research, or monitoring purposes. As such, a service provider could utilize the QoE information provided by embodiments of the invention to, among other possibilities, manage, upgrade, or enhance their wireless network to ensure a quality network experience for end users. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211465 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a telecommunications network including a gateway network element in communication with a control system and a user device, a system and method of controlling a data consumption rate of the user device including: a first control system node periodically transmitting a command to a second control system node, the message including information relating to a user's data usage, received from the gateway network node; in response to each command, the second control system node transmitting a reply message to the first control system node; controlling the transmission of the periodic commands according to a variable time interval; and the second control system node using the data usage information received in the periodic reply messages to control the data consumption of the user device. Preferably the control system conforms to a 3GPP Policy Charging Control Architecture and the first node is a PCEF and the second node is a PCRF. It is also preferable that the command is a DIAMETER protocol Accounting Request (ACR) command and the reply message is a DIAMETER protocol Accounting Answer (ACA) message. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211466 | Method and Arrangement for Handling a Radio Receiver in a Wireless Communication Network - The invention provides a mechanism that on an opportunistic basis, enables an increased performance of network related services in a user equipment without significantly increasing the user equipment's power consumption A method in a user equipment is provided for handling a radio receiver comprised in the user equipment The radio receiver is adapted to receive signals from a first network over a radio link The user equipment further comprises a battery The method comprises the steps of:—detecting a change of power consumption of the battery in the user equipment, and —adjusting the receiver activity level based on the detected change of battery power consumption. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211467 | CHANNEL QUALITY MEASUREMENT IN RELAY SYSTEMS - An SAE/LTE or 4G cellular telecommunications network is disclosed which comprises a plurality of eNodeBs and a network core. A plurality of mobile telecommunications devices are registered with the network and communicate with the network core via the eNodeBs. A relay is provided between the eNodeB | 09-01-2011 |
20110211468 | METHOD OF DATA RATE ADAPTATION FOR MULTICAST COMMUNICATION - A method to implement an adaptive multicast data rate transmission selection includes determining the lowest signal strength station in a multicast group, using signal strength as an indicator to increase data rate, and determining if the increase in data rate is viable for multicast transmission by determining frame or packet loss using the increased data rate. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211469 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A communication device transmits a plurality of measurement packets to another communication device while successively varying a transmitting interval. After the plurality of measurement packets have been transmitted, the communication device determines a location of a usable bandwidth in relation to a first bandwidth range that is a range within which bandwidths are measured. The communication device resets the first bandwidth range to a second bandwidth range that is a range within which the bandwidths are measured and in which at least one of an upper limit and a lower limit is different from the corresponding limit in the first bandwidth range in accordance with the determination. The communication device selects a bandwidth that will be used when the measurement packets are transmitted. The communication device transmits the measurement packets to the other communication device using the bandwidth that has been selected. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211470 | INTERFERENCE REJECTION BY SOFT-WINDOWING CIR ESTIMATES BASED ON PER-TAP QUALITY ESTIMATES - A channel impulse response (CIR) estimate associated with a communication channel may be processed by determining coefficient values that respectively correspond to taps of the CIR estimate, and multiplying the taps by the respectively corresponding coefficient values. The coefficient values are determined according to a soft decision technique. The resulting modified CIR estimate is used to demodulate a communication signal received via the communication channel. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211471 | PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD AND NODES - This is a method for transmitting packets. The transmission method includes measuring a time taken for feedback indicating that a packet including context information has been lost; and switching between a first mode and a second mode based on the measured time taken for the feedback, the first mode being a mode for periodically transmitting a packet including the context information and the second mode being a mode for transmitting a packet including the context information in response to the feedback indicating that a packet including the context information has been lost. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211472 | TOPOLOGY AWARE MANET FOR MOBILE NETWORKS - Systems and methods provide adaptability in a mobile ad hoc network (MANET), based on an existing protocol, such as adaptive hybrid domain routing (AHDR). The systems and methods are especially suited for fast changing topologies that may change after a reactive route discovery has been completed. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211473 | TIME MACHINE DEVICE AND METHODS THEREOF - A time machine arrangement for performing health check on a network environment is provided. The arrangement includes a set of network ports that that is configured for receiving and outputting network data traffic. The arrangement also includes a monitoring port for receiving at least a portion of the data traffic flowing through the network. The arrangement further includes a set of processors configured at least for managing and analyzing the data traffic. The set of processors includes a scheduler component for directing the data traffic, a filtering component for applying a set of filters on the set data traffic, an encryption component for encrypting the data traffic, and a trigger component for defining a set of conditions for storing the data traffic. The arrangement yet also includes a storage memory component for storing a copy of at least the portion of the data traffic flowing through the network environment. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211474 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALIBRATION AND CHANNEL STATE FEEDBACK TO SUPPORT TRANSMIT BEAMFORMING IN A MIMO SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for calibration and channel state feedback to support transmit beamforming in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system are disclosed. For radio frequency (RF) calibration, a first station (STA) sends a calibration request to a second STA, and the second STA sends a sounding packet to the first STA. The first STA receives the sounding packet, performs at least one channel measurement and performs calibration based on the channel measurement. For channel state feedback, the first STA sends a channel state feedback request to the second STA. The second STA sends a sounding packet to the first STA. The first STA receives the sounding packet and performs at least one channel measurement with the sounding packet. The first STA then calculates a steering matrix for transmit beamforming based on the channel measurement. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211475 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD - A wireless communication method of a base station that transmits a modulation signal based on an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing scheme to a plurality of terminals. The method includes determining, for each terminal of the plurality of terminals, which subcarrier group or how many symbols along a time axis are to be allocated in a transmission frame, the transmission frame including a first period in which first transmission symbols are arranged and a second period in which second transmission symbols which are different from the first transmission symbols are arranged. The method also includes forming the transmission frame according to a determined allocation, wherein a plurality of symbols on a frequency axis for transmitting N bits (N is a natural number) are arranged within a part of the first period, by using a modulation scheme whereby N bits can be transmitted using one symbol. The method further includes transmitting the modulation signal using the transmission frame. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211476 | METHOD FOR UPLINK SPECTRUM MONITORING FOR SPARSE OVERLAY TDMA SYSTEMS - Spectrum monitoring measurements are made by microcell base stations in a layered cellular network, while not serving calls or engaged in processing calls. The microcell base station transmits a first control message from to a microcell mobile station, to increase the duration for the mobile station to reside in the camping state on a control channel of the microcell base station. The microcell base station transmits a second control message from the microcell base station to the microcell mobile station, to increase the duration for the mobile station to reside in a call origination state while attempting to access a control channel of the microcell base station. Then, to perform the spectrum monitoring measurement, the base station's transmitter is turned off, the receiver is retuned to the frequency to be monitored, a signal strength measurement taken on that frequency, the receiver is retuned back to its assigned frequency, and the transmitter is turned back on, all in a short time interval. Because the measurement time is so short, it is possible to take spectrum-monitoring measurements without causing inactive mobiles registered on the measuring base station to reselect control channel. Mobiles initiating a call during a spectrum monitoring measurement by its base station are also delayed in their control channel reselection. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211477 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HIGH RATE OFDM COMMUNICATIONS - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211478 | Cellular Communication System, Apparatus and Method for Management of Backhaul Resources - A communication network element comprises traffic scheduler logic capable of scheduling transmission of a first category of queued traffic across a backhaul interface in accordance with a rate control value. The communication network element further comprises traffic manager logic capable of scheduling transmission of a second category of queued traffic across the backhaul interface in accordance with a determined backhaul bandwidth allocation, the backhaul bandwidth allocation being based on a determination of available bandwidth across the backhaul interface not required for scheduled first category traffic. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211479 | SCHEDULING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method is provided for scheduling transmissions from a plurality of services operating over a widely distributed communications network. A headend communications device (such as a cable modem termination system) arbitrates bandwidth among a plurality of cable modems configurable for bi-directional communications. The headend grants a bandwidth region to a specified cable modem or assigns contention regions for a group of cable modems. Each cable modem contains a local scheduler that sends requests for bandwidth according to local policies or rules. Upon receipt of a grant from the headend, the local scheduler selects packets to be transmitted to best serve the needs of the services associated with the cable modem. Accordingly, a service requesting bandwidth may not be the service utilizing the grant corresponding to bandwidth request. Nonetheless, the local scheduler manages bandwidth allocation among its local services such that all requesting services eventually receive bandwidth | 09-01-2011 |
20110211480 | Call Admission Control and Preemption Control Over a Secure Tactical Network - In a secure network where the network characteristics are not known, a call admission control algorithm and a preemption control algorithm based on a destination node informing the source node of the observed carried traffic are used to regulate the amount of traffic that needs to be preempted by the source. The amount of traffic that needs to be preempted is based on the carried traffic measured at the destination node. The traffic to be preempted is based on the priority of the traffic, where the lowest priority traffic is the first to be preempted until the amount of traffic preempted is sufficient to allow the remaining traffic to pass through the network without congestion. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211481 | CROSS-LAYER APPROACH TO VIRTUALIZED OVERLAY ON AD HOC NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus to a cross-layer approach to virtualized overlay on ad hoc networks are described. In one embodiment, a virtual address may be used to search for a (key, value) pair in a virtual overlay. Other embodiments are also described. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211482 | RECEIVER APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A receiver apparatus wherein the processing amount for CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) measurements in a communication system having a plurality of system bandwidths can be reduced. In this apparatus, a narrow band CQI measurement part ( | 09-01-2011 |
20110211483 | Channel Quality Indicator for a Communication System - A method and apparatus for generating a performance indicator in a high-speed communication system. A plurality of disparate communication status signals with differing formats from a transceiver are combined in a logic module to create a single link quality indicator signal. The link quality indicator signal is used to encode different operational states of the transceiver from fully operational, to marginally operational, to failed. The link quality indicator signal is advantageously employed to drive a LED creating a visual performance indicator. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211484 | Determining Coverage of a Wireless Network - An apparatus and method of determining coverage of a wireless network is disclosed. The method includes traveling to multiple locations around access points of the wireless network, and for a plurality of client applications, measuring a performance parameter between a test client device and nodes of the wireless network, at a plurality of the multiple locations. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211485 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A technique for operating a wireless communications system that supports multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) communications between a base station and multiple mobile stations involves generating inter-cell interference information at the mobile stations and providing the inter-cell interference information to the base station. The base station uses the inter-cell interference information to calculate channel quality indicators (CQIs) and then makes scheduling decisions in response to the CQIs. Data is transmitted from the base station to the mobile stations according to the scheduling decisions. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211486 | METHOD FOR MANAGING HETEROGENEOUS BASE STATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and devices are provided to enable operation while experiencing reduced interference of at least two base stations in a wireless network wherein at least one of base stations is deployed in a femto deployment configuration and at least one of the others is deployed in a different deployment category. The method comprises preventing the usage of at least one radio resource selected from among sub-carriers comprised within a radio channel and/or time-domain resource, from one of the at least two base stations. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211487 | COOPERATIVE BEAMFORMING APPARATUS AND METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cooperative beamforming apparatus and method in a wireless communication system supporting channel sensitive scheduling based on feedback information is provided. A beamforming method in a wireless communication system according to the present invention includes transmitting, at a mobile station, a channel condition information of a channel of a serving base station to the serving base station and a channel condition information of a channel of a neighbor base station; and forming, at the serving base station, a beam based on the channel condition information to transmit a signal and, at neighbor base station, a beam to transmit a signal. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211488 | TECHNIQUE FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION MODE DETERMINATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for determining the transmission mode in a wireless communication system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method for transmission mode determination in a wireless communication system, comprising a step wherein feedback information regarding channel status is received, and a step wherein it is determined based on said feedback information whether a transmission signal will be transmitted via each of a fixed number of subcarriers, after applying a propagation sequence. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211489 | Communication Method and Apparatus in Multi-Carrier System - Disclosed is a communication method in a multi-carrier system, including: allocating radio resources for transmitting signals to a middle guard band; and transmitting the signals through the radio resources; wherein the middle guard band is a frequency band positioned between used bands of a plurality of carriers, respectively, within an aggregated carrier formed by aggregating the plurality of carriers and a unit allocating the radio resources of the middle guard band is different from a unit allocating the radio resources of the used bands. A multi-carrier system uses the guard bands between the carriers to improve channel estimation performance or increase efficiency of radio resources. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211490 | ASYMMETRIC BEAM STEERING PROTOCOL - A system for configuring antenna systems for selecting directional communication signals corresponding to other apparatuses. A directional communication signal may be selected as the result of a beam training operation coordinated between at least two apparatuses. Beam selection training sequences may then be broadcast from one apparatus, and the receiving apparatus may determine the quality of each received beam training sequence in order to approximate a vector describing the direction from which the signals were sent. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216660 | SYNCHRONIZATION IN A WIRELESS NODE - A wireless node receives a beacon from a wireless access point. The beacon includes a wireless protocol time synchronization function (TSF) timestamp generated with reference to a global clock for a network. The wireless node synchronizes a counter according to the TSF timestamp. The wireless node receives a global timing offset (GTO) packet from the wireless access point and combines the GTO packet with a counter value to generate a global timestamp. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216661 | Communication Control Device and Communication Quality Measurement Method - Disclosed is a communication control device for measuring the delivery quality of unicast/multicast video delivery by a user premises device. The communication control device connects a first network to a second network. The first network is connected to a delivery server for delivering data packets containing plural pieces of content. The second network is connected to a plurality of computers for acquiring the data packets from the delivery server. The communication control device acquires control information that is transmitted from the computers to the delivery server, extracts computer identification information and data packet identification information from the acquired control information, and measures the delivery quality of data packets targeted for measurement, which are to be transmitted to the identified computers, in accordance with the extracted computer identification information and the extracted data packet identification information. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216662 | COOPMAX: A COOPERATIVE MAC WITH RANDOMIZED DISTRIBUTED SPACE TIME CODING FOR AN IEEE 802.16 NETWORK - Cooperative communication is a technique that can be employed to meet the increased throughput needs of next generation WiMAX systems. In a cooperative scenario, multiple stations can jointly emulate the antenna elements of a multi-input multi-output system in a distributed fashion. A framework for a randomized distributed space-time coding (“R-DSTC”) technique in the emerging relay-assisted WiMAX network, and the development of a cooperative medium access control (“MAC”) layer protocol, called CoopMAX, for R-DSTC deployment in an IEEE 802.16 system, is described. The technique described couples the MAC layer with the physical (PHY) layer for performance optimization. The PHY layer yields significant diversity gain, while the MAC layer achieves a substantial end-to-end throughput gain. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216663 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING VOICE PERIOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for detecting a voice period in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes determining a voice codec rate, comparing a maximum size of a Silence InDication (SID) packet and a minimum size of a voice packet corresponding to the determined voice codec rate, and detecting the voice period by using any one of a packet size and an inter-packet interval according to the comparison result. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216664 | PUSH SIGNAL DELIVERY STATUS JUDGING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A method for judging delivery status of a push signal includes: receiving packets flowing in a specific session between a transmission source and transmission destination at an arbitrary point on a route of the specific session, and storing the received packets into a storage device, wherein the packets include voice packets and non-voice packets representing the push signal; judging based on sequence numbers included in the received packets stored in the storage device, whether or not packet loss has occurred in the specific session; and upon detecting that the packet loss has occurred, judging, according to status of the packet loss and predetermined characteristic of the non-voice packets, whether or not loss of the push signal has occurred. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216665 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF INTERNET PROTOCOL TRAFFIC IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for operating a communication system is provided. The method includes receiving an arrival rate of a plurality of real-time packets, and receiving a real-time packet including a first plurality of identifiers, for transmission on a first link or a second link, where the first link has a first bandwidth. The method also includes processing the real-time packet to select a first selected link from the first link and the second link based on the first plurality of identifiers, the arrival rate of the plurality of real-time packets, and the first bandwidth, and transmitting the real-time packet on the first selected link. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216666 | METHOD OF MULTIPLEXING OVER AN ERROR-PRONE WIRELESS BROADCAST CHANNEL - Provided is a method and system for transmitting information. The method includes determining stream length information for at least one data stream to be transmitted and associating the stream length information with a system parameter message. The system parameter message including the associated stream length information is transmitted separately from the data stream. This process facilitates de-multiplexing of individual streams and the processing of stream data even if one or more individual streams are received in error. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216667 | Method and System for a Radio Frequency Management in a Mesh Network with a Path Distance Factor - A method and system for radio frequency management (RFM) in a mesh network using a path distance factor (PDF) is disclosed. According to one embodiment, a computer-implemented method, comprises calculating a path distance factor (PDF) between a first mesh router and a portal. A frame is transmitted to a second mesh router, wherein the frame includes the path distance factor. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216668 | NODE APPARATUS, ROUTE CONTROL METHOD, ROUTE COMPUTATION SYSTEM, AND ROUTE COMPUTATION APPARATUS - A node apparatus wherein when a topology change occurs on a network used for packet transfer between node apparatuses, the node apparatus performs dynamic route control for establishing a new normal route. The node apparatus has a device that receives, from another node apparatus, a route control message which includes information required for route determination; a device that computes a route on the network based on the received route control message; a device that sends another node apparatus a route control message which includes information required for said another node apparatus to determine a route on the network; a device wherein when receiving the route control message, this device computes an operation start time for route control operation by the route computation and the message sending, based on a distance between a topology change part and said node apparatus of oneself; and a device that controls the execution of the route control operation based on the computed operation start time. | 09-08-2011 |
20110222415 | Method and system for implementing link adaptation based on mobility - A method comprising establishing a wireless link with at least one endpoint. The wireless link includes at least one connection. The method also includes receiving a mobility indication indicative of a rate of travel of the endpoint. The method further include dynamically selecting at least one parameter for the wireless link based on the received mobility indication. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222416 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OVER THE AIR LOAD INDICATOR FOR WIRELESS SCHEDULING - Systems and methods for facilitating inter-cell interference coordination using load indication are described. A UE may receive load indicator signals from a plurality of base stations in adjacent cells and determine, based at least in part on the load indicator signals, a transmit power metric. The transmit power metric may be provided to a serving base station, which may allocate uplink resources based on the transmit power metric. Additional information related to receiver sensitivity and/or path loss may be used to determine the transmit power metric. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222417 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - This invention provides a communication technique which allows data communication upon setting a proper operation mode for power consumption level control in accordance with a variation in communication rate or a change in the operation state of the communication apparatus due to various factors. This communication apparatus includes a sub-system including a communication unit to transmit and receive data and a main system which performs reception processing of data received by the sub-system and generation processing of data to be transmitted from the sub-system. The main system includes a main system state detection unit to detect the operation state of the main system. The sub-system includes a control unit to control the transmission/reception of data by setting, for the communication unit, an operation mode for controlling the power consumption level of the sub-system which is selected in accordance with the detection result obtained by the main system state detection unit. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222418 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING ENERGY CONSUMPTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for controlling an Energy Saving (ES) mode at a base station of a wireless communication system are provided. The method for controlling the ES mode includes predicting a traffic load of a next time, determining whether to enter the ES mode using the predicted traffic load, when determining to enter the ES mode, determining reliability of the predicted traffic load, and when the predicted traffic load is reliable, operating in the ES mode. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222419 | POWER EFFICIENT COMMUNICATIONS - A method, system, and device provide power-efficient communications within the context of available power. Transmission and receipt data rates are scalable in accordance with output power available from a power source. Data is transmitted at a data rate determined, at least in part, by the available output power. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222420 | Multi-Carrier Communications With Adaptive Cluster Configuration and Switching - A method and apparatus for allocating subcarriers in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system is described. In one embodiment, the method comprises allocating at least one diversity cluster of subcarriers to a first subscriber and allocating at least one coherence cluster to a second subscriber. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222421 | Method and System for Detecting Unauthorized Wireless Access Points Using Clock Skews - A new methodology that uses clock skews of a wireless local area network access point (AP) as its fingerprint to detect unauthorized APs quickly and accurately. The clock skew is determined from time synchronization function (TSF) timestamps sent out in beacon probes. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222422 | Method and system for direction setting of a self-configurable asymmetric link - A network including two networking devices connected via a self-configurable asymmetric link. The networking devices connect multimedia sink and source devices. And the networking devices further set the direction of the self-configurable asymmetric link based on a function describing the desired connections between the multimedia sink and multimedia source devices. Also disclosed a network comprising two networking devices connected via a self-configurable asymmetric link. The networking devices configured to connect multimedia sink and source devices. And the networking devices set the direction of the self-configurable asymmetric link based on the usage statistics of the self-configurable asymmetric link. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222423 | MEDIA (VOICE) PLAYBACK (DE-JITTER) BUFFER ADJUSTMENTS BASED ON AIR INTERFACE - Systems and methods for adapting a de-jitter buffer to conform to air link conditions. An air link characteristic may be detected before that characteristic begins to affect packet delivery, such as by slowing or speeding delivery delay at a subscriber station. A receiver-side de-jitter buffer, which adds delay to received packets, may adaptively adjust its size based upon the detected air link characteristic, such that the de-jitter buffer is appropriately sized for anticipated data packets before they are received at the subscriber station. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222424 | DIRECT WIRELESS CLIENT TO CLIENT COMMUNICATION - A wireless station is connected to a wireless network through an access point and can establish a direct client-to-client connection to a second wireless station. The wireless station can communicate directly with the second wireless station without involving the access point. The wireless station communicates with the wired network and with other wireless stations through the access point. The second wireless station may have an infrastructure connection to the access point or may be independent. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222425 | CONTROLLING NETWORK TRAFFIC - In an ATM exchange, a cell transmission control section transmits an ATM cell to a transmission path of an ATM network. A traffic monitor monitors traffic of the cell transmissions. A statistical process section performs a temporal statistical process on the result of the traffic monitoring using a clock and a memory. A CAC produces an instruction for traffic control over a transmission terminal based on the result of the statistical process. A UPC controls traffic of a transmission path from the transmission terminal in accordance with the instruction. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222426 | METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA BETWEEN AT LEAST ONE GUIDED VEHICLE AND A GROUND NETWORK - A method for routing data between at least one guided vehicle and a ground network, wherein said vehicle moves on a track between at least a first and a second communication terminal arranged on the ground along the track. The terminals are capable of exchanging data streams between a ground network and at least one routing module onboard the vehicle. A transmission quality measurement for a first signal between the first terminal and the routing module is carried out periodically, a transmission quality measurement for a second signal between the second terminal and the routing module is carried out periodically, a measurement of the available data flow rate for the first signal between the ground network and the routing module is carried out periodically, a measurement of the available data flow rate for the second signal between the ground network and the routing module is carried out periodically, a routing path for at least a portion of the data between the ground network and the routing module is also periodically determined via at least one of the communication terminals if it has a measured signal quality higher than a predetermined threshold and a data flow rate higher than a predetermined threshold. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222427 | Method and Apparatus For Enabling Services and Media in a Communication Network - A method and apparatus in a group manager ( | 09-15-2011 |
20110222428 | RELAYING IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication link is provided between a station of an access system and a relay node. The relay node is a node capable of wirelessly communicating with at least one communication device within the coverage thereof. A set up procedure for the communication link is initiated such that the relay node acts as a communication device towards the station, the set up procedure being initiated according to a set up procedure between the station and communication devices accessing the station directly. Communication between the relay node and at least one communication device within the coverage area thereof are handled such that the relay nodes acts as a station of an access system towards said at least one communication device. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222429 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, RECEPTION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROCESSING METHOD USED IN RECEPTION APPARATUS - The present invention relates to a transmission apparatus, a reception apparatus, a communication system, and a processing method used in the reception apparatus that are capable of reducing collisions of an Ack frame. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222430 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ASSIGNING TRAFFIC TO A DIRECT TUNNEL, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A method and a device assign traffic to a direct tunnel. The traffic is assigned to the direct tunnel based on a prioritization provided by a serving node and/or by a gateway node. In addition, a computer program product and computer-readable medium are provided. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222431 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM, AND TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING METHOD - To provide a transmitting apparatus capable of accurately estimating an available bandwidth even in a high bandwidth in a network. The transmitting apparatus ( | 09-15-2011 |
20110228683 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In cooperative sensing in which a plurality of cognitive radio apparatus collaboratively exchange sensing information on a status of frequency band usage as a secondary system, the sensing information is efficiently exchanged in the secondary system without influencing communication of the primary system. In a radio communication system according to this invention, a first radio communication device includes means for observing a surrounding radio communication environment, means for converting information obtained by the observation into a parameter used for radio communication, and means for performing transmission by using the parameter, and a second radio communication device includes means for receiving a signal transmitted from the first radio communication device and means for extracting, from the received signal, information on the surrounding radio communication environment that is observed on a transmission side. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228684 | COMPUTER PRODUCT, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR DEVICE TESTING - A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing therein a test program causing a computer to execute a process including acquiring a first packet and a second packet sent to a first device; transmitting, based on the acquired first packet, a third packet obtained by setting a destination of the first packet to a second device; and transmitting, based on the acquired second packet, a fourth packet obtained by setting a destination of the second packet to the second device, the fourth packet being transmitted upon elapse of a period from the transmission of the third packet and equal to a time interval between acquisition of the first packet and acquisition of the second packet. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228685 | WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROL DEVICE, WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROL METHOD, AND WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROL SYSTEM - A buffer has a predetermined storage capacity, and accumulates data received from an external device. A transmitting unit reads data from the buffer and transmits the data to a mobile terminal. A transmission rate determining unit determines the transmission rate for transmitting data from the external device to its own device, based on the free space in the buffer. The window size notifying unit notifies the mobile terminal of a window size in accordance with the determined transmission rate. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228686 | NODE, COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A computer of a first node executes primary communication and secondary communication between a first node group and a second node group provided with nodes. On the basis of the transmission capabilities of a network, the computer computes the required time required to transmit data that has been designated as outgoing data since the start time of a periodically executed transmission process up until the current time, wherein the designated data is data from among the received data that has been successively designated as outgoing data. The computer determines whether or not the time equal to the current time plus the required time matches the start time of the primary communication periodically conducted between the nodes. On the basis of the determined results, the computer decides which data from among the received data to designate as outgoing data. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228687 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING RECIPROCAL INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY NEIGHBOR RELATIONS - A method and apparatus for establishing inter-RAT reciprocal neighbor relationships. The method may include receiving a neighbor relation notification from a first entity, wherein the neighbor relation notification indicates a neighbor relationship of a first cell to a second cell, wherein the first cell uses a first RAT, and wherein the second cell uses a second RAT that is different than the first RAT, determining, by a second network entity, that a reciprocal neighbor relationship of the second cell to the first cell does not exist in a neighbor list for the second cell, and generating the reciprocal neighbor relationship. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228688 | CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, COMPOSITE SWITCH DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHOD - A control system and method thereof is provided. The control system includes switch devices that operate on supplied power, each switch device includes multiple switch-side ports and a communication processing unit for relaying data, input to any of the switch-side ports on a basis of destination information set for the data, a relay device that includes first ports coupled to corresponding switch-side ports of the switch devices and second ports selectively coupled to the first ports and that relays the data, input to any of the second ports, to any of the first ports, and a control device that controls the switch devices and the relay device, where the control device includes a port monitoring unit, a port-assignment control unit, and a power control unit. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228689 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UTILIZING SPECTRAL RESOURCES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless communication system comprises a wavelet analyzer and a wavelet signal generator. The wavelet analyzer is operable to analyze wireless signals within a frequency and time map of a communications spectrum, whereby the wavelet analyzer is adapted to determine one or more available cells within the frequency and time map. The wavelet signal generator is operable to generate one or more wavelet signals for transmission within the determined one or more available cells of the frequency and time map based on the analyzed wireless signals within the frequency and time map. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228690 | Methods and Apparatus For Uplink Macro-Diversity in Packet-Switched Cellular Networks - A method and apparatus for providing uplink macro-diversity in packet-switched networks that allows packets and/or portions of packets, e.g., frames, to be selectively sent from an end node, e.g., wireless communication device or mobile terminal, over a set of multiple communication connections, e.g., physical-layer or link-layer connections, to one or more access nodes, e.g., base stations. Uplink macro-diversity is achieved in part through intelligent selective forwarding over multiple communication connections, where the forwarding decision is controlled by the end node based on a variety of factors, e.g., physical-layer channel conditions and/or higher layer policy. The forwarding decision is executed on a rapid timescale, e.g., on a per packet basis, to adapt to the dynamically varying conditions of the set of communication connections. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228691 | METHODS AND APPARTUS FOR CONTROLLING INTERFERENCE TO BROADCAST SIGNALING IN A PEER TO PEER NETWORK - Methods and apparatus related to broadcasting data and interference management in a peer to peer wireless communications network are described. Scheduling of traffic air link resources is performed on a slot by slot basis in a decentralized manner. Wireless devices intending to broadcast traffic signals transmit broadcast request signals, sometimes alternatively referred to as broadcast indicator signals. A priority level is associated with each of the broadcast request signals. A receiver device intending to receive broadcast signals detects the broadcast request signals and makes an interference determination as to whether the higher priority broadcast traffic signal can be successfully recovered in the presence of lower priority broadcast traffic signals. If the determination is that the expected interference from the lower priority broadcast traffic is unacceptable, the receiver device generates and transmits an interference control signal communicating to the lower priority device a command or request not to broadcast. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228692 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND SIGNAL GENERATOR FOR QUALITY DETERMINATION OF AN IP NETWORK CONNECTION - The present invention relates to a method, a system and a VoIP signal generator for determining the quality of an IP network connection, comprising the steps of generating a measuring signal by way of a signal generator for measuring the quality of an IP network connection; determining, by way of the signal generator, for each of the generated at least one measuring signal the respective signal quality of each generated measuring signal; and simultaneously transmitting the at least one measuring signal and the respective quality information over the IP network connection to a receiver. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228693 | Method Of Sensing - In a radio system where wireless nodes are in contact, the wireless nodes are enabled to exchange information, with adjacent nodes. In addition distant nodes out of range for direct communication can in accordance with one embodiment be communicated with by forwarding data over multiple hops. The wireless nodes are adapted to perform sensing of at least one radio resource in response to a request from a node. Based on the collective information from at least one other wireless nodes a wireless node can make an improved decision if a particular radio resource is free to use or not. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228694 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CODE DOMAIN POWER AND CODE DOMAIN ERROR POWER - Method and apparatus for simultaneously showing Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power for various code channels by receiving a signal, evaluating the signal, ascertaining a Code Domain Power for a code channel, ascertaining a Code Domain Error Power for the code channel, and simultaneously showing the Code Domain Power and the Code Domain Error Power. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228695 | Method for Estimation of Residual Bandwidth - This invention related to a bandwidth estimation method which is easily implementable on network nodes and enables to be made better routing decisions (for example the link with higher residual bandwidth should be favored in routing decisions) and/or estimates the flow admission control (for example accept a new flow only if there is enough available path residual bandwidth) by enabling estimation of availability of the communication capacity estimates. | 09-22-2011 |
20110235530 | DLP-BASED WIRELESS DOCKING FOR WIFI-BASED ENDPOINTS WITH DESKTOP - Methods, devices, and systems for automatically controlling the establishment and/or termination of inter-client Data Link Protocol (DLP) communication channels. More specifically, methods, devices, and systems are provided for establishing an inter-client DLP communication channel on demand for communication sessions and terminating the same upon completion of such communication sessions. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235531 | Performance And Traffic Aware Heterogeneous Interconnection Network - In one embodiment, a method includes comparing an occupancy level of a buffer of a port of a router to a threshold, and controlling the port to operate at a first voltage and frequency based at least in part on the comparison, and at least one other port of the router is controlled to operate at a second voltage and frequency. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235532 | System and Method for Resolving Multiple Location Estimate Conflicts in a WLAN-Positioning System - Methods of and systems for resolving multiple location estimate conflicts in a WLAN-positioning system are provided. Disclosed are methods to quantify the probability that a particular location estimate of a mobile device made by a Wi-Fi based positioning system is correct to within an arbitrary accuracy. Implementations use observed access point cluster size, age information for access point location determination, and/or cumulative distribution functions that characterize the conditional probability that one or more access points detected by the mobile device have relocated within a specified time interval to make the probability determinations. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235533 | PROTOCOL TO SUPPORT ADAPTIVE STATION-DEPENDENT CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK RATE IN MULTI-USER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatuses are proposed for supporting one or more user-dependent channel state information (CSI) feedback rates in a downlink spatial division multiple access (SDMA) system. For certain aspects, an access point (AP) may receive a channel evolution feedback from one or more stations and send a request for CSI to the stations whose CSI values need to be updated. For certain aspects, the AP may poll the stations for updated CSI values. For certain aspects, deterministic back-off timers may be assigned to the stations indicating when to send their CSI feedback. The proposed methods may improve system performance. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235534 | UPLINK ACK/NACK SIGNALING FOR AGGREGATED CARRIERS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for uplink ACK/NACK signaling for aggregated carriers in a communication network includes a step | 09-29-2011 |
20110235535 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus including: a processing unit configured to transition between a first state and a second state and configured to perform a response process on a packet received via the network, wherein the processing unit includes: a determination unit configured to perform a first determination process; a verification unit configured to perform a first verification process for verifying the validity of the first packet, if it is determined as a first case; and a first responding unit configured to perform the response process on the first packet, if the first packet is verified as valid, wherein if it is determined as a second case that the first packet is not the packet of which the response process is to be performed by the processing unit, the verification unit dose not perform the first verification process and the first responding unit does not perform the response process. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235536 | COMMUNICATION REPEATER AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication repeater comprises a transmitting and receiving that performs wireless communication with a communication device, a power-line carrier communication unit that performs power-line carrier communication with the communication device, and a control unit. The control unit selects either one of the wireless communication and the power-line carrier communication according to conditions. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235537 | Method and System for a Greedy User Group Selection with Range Reduction in TDD Multiuser MIMO Downlink Transmission - Certain aspects of a method and system for processing signals in a communication system may include maximizing system capacity for a time division duplex (TDD) multiuser multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) downlink system, based on a single signal for a single user within a reduced search range or the single signal for the single user and at least one other signal for one other user within a remaining portion of the reduced search range. The reduced search range may be generated by sorting a plurality of signals based on a channel gain corresponding to each of the plurality of signals. The single signal for the single user may be selected from the reduced search range corresponding to a channel gain that is greater than a channel gain corresponding to a remaining portion of the reduced search range. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235538 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VALIDATING SERVICE INFORMATION (SI) AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC INFORMATION (PSI) IN BROADCAST TECHNOLOGIES - A method and system for validating SIPSI of a broadcast table in an electronic device is provided. The method includes receiving a first cache signature and retrieving a second cache signature from a memory. The method also includes identifying differences between the first cache signature and the second cache signature. Further, the method includes performing one of updating the broadcast table and updating a portion of the broadcast table. The system includes an electronic device for validating SIPSI of a broadcast table. The electronic device includes a broadcast receiver for receiving a first cache signature and a memory for storing a second cache signature. The electronic device also includes a processor for identifying differences between the first cache signature and the second cache signature. Further, the electronic device includes the processor for performing one of updating the broadcast table and updating a portion of the broadcast table. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235539 | Adaptive Bearer Configuration for Broacast/Multicast Service - A method and apparatus for providing adaptive bearer configuration for MBMS delivery is disclosed. A first aspect of the present disclosure is a method of operating a wireless infrastructure entity ( | 09-29-2011 |
20110235540 | TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MIMO TECHNOLOGY IN A FORWARD LINK OF A HIGH RATE PACKET DATA SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus are provided for transmitting and receiving data in a communication system with a plurality of antennas. Data and a first pilot are generated. The first pilot is transmitted at a first position in a frequency domain that corresponds to a position of the generated data in the frequency domain and at a first position in a time domain that is with the generated data, in every transmission time interval of the data. A second pilot is generated. The second pilot is transmitted at predetermined second positions in the time domain and the frequency domain, in a transmission time interval that is predefined by a transmitter and a receiver. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235541 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING VOICE CALL QUALITY OVER PACKET NETWORKS - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for maintaining voice call quality over a packet network by providing optimal de-jitter buffer depth and rate of change of depth. Buffer depth and rate of change of buffer depth may be initially determined by classifying the incoming call. Classification of the incoming calls may be accomplished by categorizing calls into groups based on characteristics of the calls. The buffer depth and rate of change of depth may be further optimized at the start of calls based on voice-path delay and packet loss probability measurements over one or more calls of the same class such that the voice-path delay is minimized while maintaining a certain packet loss probability, the packet loss probability is minimized while maintaining a certain voice-path delay, or an R-factor, which is an objective measure of voice quality, is maximized. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235542 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING NETWORK QUALITY OF SERVICE - A Set Top Box (STB), a net conference terminal, a method, an apparatus and a system for processing network Quality of Service (QoS) are disclosed. The method for processing network QoS includes: obtaining actual usage information of network quality parameters; and obtaining descriptive information of network QoS according to the actual usage information of the network quality parameters. The network QoS processing apparatus includes: a first obtaining module, configured to obtain actual usage information of the network quality parameters which include transmission bandwidth, and network delay and/or network packet loss ratio; and a second obtaining module, configured to obtain descriptive information of network QoS according to the actual usage information of the network quality parameters. The network QoS processing system includes a communication network and a network QoS processing apparatus located in the communication network. The method, apparatus and system for processing network QoS can improve the accuracy of measuring network QoS. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235543 | DYNAMICALLY TROUBLESHOOTING VOICE QUALITY - In an example embodiment, a method for dynamically troubleshooting voice quality. The method comprises generating a request to intercept a predetermined data stream on a network, acquiring a replicated copy of the intercepted data stream responsive to the request and analyzing the replicated copy of the intercepted data stream. | 09-29-2011 |
20110242994 | FLOW SAMPLING WITH TOP TALKERS - An improved network flow sampling apparatus and corresponding method more intelligently selects flows to be reported beyond random flow or packet sampling intervals. Evaluation of flows selects top talkers or heavy hitters as important flows that most impact traffic and therefore should be reported. Top talkers are flows defined based on a customized definition according to, for example, number of packets in a flow, number of bytes in a flow, or bandwidth consumed by a flow. An external collector can thus proceed with traffic profiling or other flow monitoring purposes with a more intelligently determined network flow sample. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242995 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTI-DOMAIN ROUTING - Systems and methods for multi-domain routing are provided. In some embodiments, a method for determining a path calculation from a source node to a destination node over a multi-domain network is provided. The method may include steps for receiving a predetermined sequence of domains for communicating information from the source node to the destination node, determining a link type for each of a plurality of links in the predetermined sequence of domains, modifying the link type of one or more of the plurality of links such that the plurality of links are unidirectional links towards a destination node, and determining a path along the predetermined sequence of domains based on the modified plurality of links. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242996 | Method and System for Simulating Wireless Networks - A method, that comprises selecting for simulation a first cell comprising a access station. The method also includes determining a first cell pattern comprising a first plurality of cells surrounding the first cell. The method additionally includes simulating, for each cell of the first plurality of cells, at least one wireless parameter associated with at least one wireless signal. The method further includes determining a second cell pattern comprising a second plurality of cells surrounding the first cell pattern. Each cell of the second plurality of cells comprises a copy of a simulation result of a corresponding cell of the first plurality of cells. The method also includes simulating, for the first cell, at least one wireless parameter associated with at least one wireless connection. The simulation is based on the simulation results of the first plurality of cells and the copied simulation results of the second plurality of cells. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242997 | EXTENDED UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION (UCI) REPORTING VIA THE PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (PUCCH) - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) is described. A first part of the UCI is encoded in a single physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) symbol. A channel of the PUCCH symbol is selected to implicitly encode a second part of the UCI in the PUCCH symbol. The PUCCH symbol is transmitted via a single PUCCH signal. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242998 | QUALITY OF SERVICE CONTROL OF REVERSE TRAFFIC CHANNEL FOR A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile communication device for providing QoS of packet transmission is provided. The packet transmission from and to the mobile communication device is performed by repeating a predetermined number of interlaces by a predetermined cycle. In the mobile communication device, a wireless module transmits a first sub-packet of a first packet and a first sub-packet of a second packet to a mobile communication network, and receives a response message corresponding to the first sub-packet of the first packet from the mobile communication network, wherein the first sub-packet of the first packet is transmitted in a first interlace prior to a second interlace in which the first sub-packet of the second packet is transmitted. Also, a controller module calculates a plurality of QoS parameters for a second sub-packet of the second packet in response to the response message, prepares the second sub-packet of the second packet with the QoS parameters, and transmits the second sub-packet of the second packet in the second interlace to the mobile communication network via the wireless module. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242999 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONDUCTING MEASUREMENTS WHEN MULTIPLE CARRIERS ARE SUPPORTED - Measurements are conducted on one or more carriers in a case where an access terminal supports reception on multiple carriers. Upon determining that an access terminal is capable of concurrently receiving on a given set of carriers, a measurement is conducted on one or more carriers of the set while receiving on or more other carriers of the set. Conversely, upon determining that an access terminal is not capable of concurrently receiving on a given set of carriers, a measurement is conducted on one or more carriers of the set while not receiving on or more other carriers of the set. In addition, data transfers to or from an access terminal on a carrier may be restricted (e.g., data transfers not scheduled or only low priority data transfers scheduled) during one or more subframes before or after the access terminal conducts a measurement on another carrier. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243000 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE MAC LAYER FRAGMENTATION AND HARQ CHANNEL IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT - Systems and methods are disclosed for adaptively assigning a number of parallel Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) channels based on system parameters such as channel conditions and pending HARQ processes. The channel conditions may comprise at least one of a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) received from a User Equipment (UE), a number of retransmissions in one or more of the parallel HARQ channels, and a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR). | 10-06-2011 |
20110243001 | METHOD OF ANALYSIS FOR INTERNET TELEPHONE QUALIT AND ITS INTERFERENCE - A method for analyzing Internet telephone quality and interference has developed that two-way voice and video quality between IP phones and a measurement instrument measures in real time along the actual communication path using loopback functions of the IP phones. When interference is detected, the interference source location is identified by checking whether the interference has occurred in the internal section of the IP phones or in the IP network section on the basis of loopback results of the IP phones and ping and trace route analysis in a section-based manner. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243002 | APPARATUS, MODULE AND METHOD USED FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication terminal apparatus communicates with a wireless base station wirelessly. The wireless communication terminal apparatus includes a wireless communication unit and a control unit. The wireless communication unit communicates wirelessly. The control unit transmits a search request, in which search duration for searching a wireless base station is included, from the wireless communication unit to a wireless base station during connection, and when a search response is received in the wireless communication unit from the wireless base station during connection, suspends at least a transmitter in the transmitter and a receiver of the wireless communication unit in all or a part of the search duration. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243003 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTION - A wireless connecting method includes a connection monitoring step, a connection parameter retaining step, and a connection restoring step. The connection monitoring step monitors the wireless connection between the communication terminal device and the base station. The connection parameter retaining step sets a communication session retention time period that is longer than a connection parameter retention time period, and retains a connection parameter. A connection parameter when the wireless connection is disconnected is retained in at least one of the communication terminal device and the base station for the communication session retention time period exceeding the connection parameter retention time period. The connection restoring step executes, after the connection parameter retention time period has elapsed, when the communication session retention time period has not elapsed, an initial connecting process and restores the connection using the connection parameter stored when the wireless connection is disconnected. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243004 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUSES, AND METHODS TO FACILITATE COORDINATED SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A system and method of coordinating scheduling in a wireless communication system are described herein. In one aspect, user equipments determine one or more cells that interfere with communications received by the user equipments. The user equipment may determine particular information about the interfering cells, including a metric function based on the precoding matrix used by the interfering cell. The user equipment may transmit this information to the interfering cell in order to coordinate the use of precoding matrices between cells. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243005 | Mobility cell measurement method and apparatus for mobile communications system - This invention provides a mobility cell measurement method and apparatus for a mobile communications system like as LTE-A. The method includes: performing inter-carrier synchronous transmission of a synchronous signal on at least two Component Carriers (CCs); sending information regarding one or more CCs among the at least two CCs that is capable of performing Carrier Aggregation (CA) with a carrier of a serving cell to a user equipment through higher-level signaling; and sending joint mobility measurement information to the user equipment of the serving cell, wherein the user equipment determines a CC for performing joint mobility measurement according to the information regarding the one or more CCs and the joint mobility measurement information and performs the joint mobility measurement on the determined CC. This increases the speed of the mobility measurement and reduces the power consumption of the user equipment. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243006 | Wireless communicaton system, wireless communication device and wireless communication method, and computer prorgram - A wireless communication system, wherein packet transmission operations are carried out in an infrastructure mode, includes: a first terminal station serving as a data transmission source; a second terminal station serving as a data receiving destination; and a control station configured to contain each terminal station and relay a packet transmitted between the two terminal stations; wherein the first terminal station transmits a packet addressed to the second terminal station via the control station, and detects that the second terminal station is within range capable of a direct link, based on the first terminal station receiving a confirmation response packet replied from the second terminal station, the confirmation response packet being replied from the second terminal station upon a predetermined period of time having passed from the time of the control station transferring the packet to the second terminal station address. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243007 | System and Method for Uplink Multi-Antenna Power Control in a Communications System - A system and method for uplink multi-antenna power control in a communications system are provided. A method for user equipment operations includes determining a transmit power level for transmit antennas of the user equipment having at least two transmit antennas, and setting a power amplifier output level for each of the at least two transmit antennas in accordance with a respective transmit power level. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243008 | COMPONENT CARRIER ACTIVATION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for activating a deactivated Component Carrier in a cellular communication system supporting carrier aggregation. The method includes receiving, from a Base Station (BS), UpLink (UL) scheduling information for a UL CC in a deactivated state; determining whether a DownLink (DL) CC associated with the UL CC is activated; and activating the DL CC, when the DL CC is not activated. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243009 | Physical Downlink Shared Channel Muting on Cell-Specific Reference Symbols Locations for of Non-Serving Cells - The primary serving base station transmits PDSCH with zero energy on the inter-cell CRS resource element location. This is called mute PDSCH. Within the first Physical Resource Block (PRB | 10-06-2011 |
20110243010 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT TO SUPPORT PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION IN A WIDE AREA NETWORK - Techniques for performing interference management to support peer-to-peer (P2P) communication in a wide area network (WAN) are described. In an aspect, interference management may be performed in a coordinated manner for/by a set of server nodes, which may include a P2P server and at least one neighbor server node of the P2P server. The P2P server may be a UE communicating peer-to-peer with at least one other UE or P2P client. Interference management may be performed for the set of server nodes to reduce interference to the P2P server and/or the at least one P2P client. In one design, active sets may be determined for UEs. The active set of each UE may include nodes received with sufficient strength by that UE. The set of server nodes may be determined based on the active sets of the P2P server, the at least one P2P client, and possibly other UEs. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243011 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system which can automatically construct a network, as well as reducing power consumption of each node in the network is provided. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243012 | FEEDBACK OF CONTROL INFORMATION FOR MULTIPLE CARRIERS - Techniques for sending control information relating to multiple downlink carriers and data on a single uplink carrier are described. A user equipment (UE) may be scheduled to transmit on a designated uplink carrier. The UE can multiplex control information for multiple downlink carriers with data for transmission on the uplink carrier in a same subframe. Multiplexing may be performed according to a type of the control information and/or an ordering, priority, or association of the downlink carriers. The UE can selectively encode the control information separately for each downlink carrier and/or jointly across downlink carriers. The control information may be mapped to a single layer or multiple layers of a data channel. The UE may send the multiplexed control information and data on the data channel in the subframe while maintaining a single-carrier waveform. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243013 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL SCANNING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus perform channel scanning in a wireless communication system. A signal intensity of an Access Point (AP) is compared with a scanning threshold, when the AP signal intensity not less than the scanning threshold, a channel scanning schedule list is generated in consideration of a scan time based on a passive channel scan scheme and a scan time based on an active channel scan scheme. The channel scanning is performed every channel scanning time, according to the channel scanning schedule list. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243014 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK SCHEDULING IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for uplink scheduling in a communication system are provided. The method includes determining whether a User Equipment (UE) is included in an uplink scheduling list, a buffer length of the UE is estimated, if the UE is included in the uplink scheduling list, it is determined whether a Buffer State Report (BSR) indicating the buffer length of the UE has been received from the UE, if the estimated buffer length is 0, and the UE is transitioned to a non-zero BSR reception state and maintained in the uplink scheduling list, if the BSR has not been received from the UE. The non-zero BSR reception state is a state in which a zero BSR indicating the buffer length of the UE is 0 has not been received. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243015 | MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND ADAPTIVE CARRIER SELECTION AND LINK QUALITY REPORTING METHOD FOR THE SAME - A link quality reporting method and apparatus, and a carrier selection method and apparatus, for a multicarrier communication system utilizing carrier aggregation are disclosed. In the system, the user equipment measures, for each component carrier divided into a Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) resource region and a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) resource region, link quality of the PDSCH resource region and the PDCCH resource region of the component carrier and sends measured link quality information as feedback information to the base station, and the base station adaptively selects a set of component carriers for control information transmission (i.e., a PDCCH Component Carrier (CC) SET) and a set of component carriers for data transmission (i.e., a DownLink (DL) CC SET) on the basis of the feedback information. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243016 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING POWER HEADROOM REPORTING PROCEDURE AND PHR MAC CONTROL ELEMENT - This invention relates to a method for performing Power Headroom reporting procedure, adapted for a user equipment, wherein the user equipment is operated in a plurality of activated serving cells, the method includes the steps of: providing a prohibitPHR-Timer; obtaining a plurality of downlink path loss values respectively corresponding to the activated serving cells; triggering a power headroom report when the prohibitPHR-Timer expires or has expired and at least one of the downlink path loss values has changed more than a PathlossChange threshold since the last transmission of a PHR; and reporting the power headroom report. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243017 | MU-MIMO-OFDMA SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTI-RANK CQI COMPUTATION AND PRECODER SELECTION - Methods and systems for determining attributes of communication channels of MU-MIMO users in an OFDMA system are disclosed. One method comprises receiving from a base station, for at least one sub-band of contiguous sub-carriers, an indication of an estimate of or an upper-bound on a total number of streams that are co-scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band. In addition, the method further comprises determining one or more signal quality measures for the at-least one sub-band based on the estimate of or the upper-bound on the total number of streams that are scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band. Moreover, an indication of the one or more signal quality measures is transmitted to the base station. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243018 | MU-MIMO-OFDMA METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SIGNALING MULTI-RANK CQIs AND PRECODERS - Methods and systems for determining attributes of communication channels of MU-MIMO users in an OFDMA system are disclosed. One method includes receiving from a base station, for at least one sub-band of contiguous sub-carriers, an indication of an estimate of or an upper-bound on a total number of streams that are co-scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band and an indication of a fraction of a transmit power at the base station that is applied to streams that are scheduled for transmission to a particular user. The method further includes determining one or more signal quality measures for the at least one sub-band based on at least one of the fraction or the estimate of or the upper-bound on the total number of streams that are scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band. In addition, an indication of the one or more signal quality measures is transmitted to the base station in the method. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243019 | MU-MIMO-OFDMA MULTI-RANK CQI AND PRECODER SIGNALING SCHEMES - Methods and systems for determining attributes of communication channels of MU-MIMO users in an (OFDMA) system are disclosed. One method includes receiving from a base station, for at least one sub-band of contiguous sub-carriers, an indication of an estimate of or an upper-bound on a total number of streams that are co-scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band. The method further includes determining one or more signal quality measures for the at least one sub-band based on the estimate of or the upper-bound on the total number of streams that are scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band in accordance with at least one of single-user scheduling rules or multi-user scheduling rules. In addition, the method includes transmitting to the base station an indication of the one or more signal quality measures and at least one tag identifying each signal quality measure as being determined in accordance with the single-user scheduling rules or the multi-user scheduling rules. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243020 | Measuring and Displaying Wireless Network Quality - Methods of calculating and displaying quality metrics on a wireless digital network such as a network using IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi standards. The quality metric calculation assigns weights only to factors which are observed above a threshold, combining multiple factors into a scalar result. The quality metric is derived from the weighted sum of two or more parameters such as: noise floor offset, channel busy indication, adjacent and overlapping channel interference, interferer duty-cycle, frame retry-rate, PHY error rate and CRC error rate. Quality spectrograms may be used to display calculated quality metrics across a channel, channel range, or frequency band, plotting calculated quality metric versus frequency or channel range over a configurable time frame. Using known locations of radios, quality ranges are mapped onto visual representations such as contour lines, shading density, or color codes, and overlayed for example over floor plans or other site representations. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243021 | Spectrum-aware RF Management and Automatic Conversion of Access Points to Spectrum Monitors and Hybrid Mode Access Points - Methods of operating devices on a wireless network as access points (AP) or spectrum monitors (SM). An adaptive radio management (ARM) process operating on the digital network senses network conditions based on data from APs and SMs on the network, and in response to conditions changes devices from AP operation to SM operation, and from SM operation back to AP operation. A method for providing wideband spectrum analysis functions on a radio operating as an AP on a channel proving client connectivity services. A method for scanning off-channel for shorter durations between transmissions to collect spectral data and a method for explicitly quieting IEEE 802.11 transmissions on a channel to collect spectral data. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243022 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a reception unit configured to obtain a reception signal by receiving a first packet having, as a unit, a slot including at least two repetitive symbol sequences used to transmit an identical symbol by switching antenna beams having different directions, a carrier sensing unit configured to sense a carrier for each symbol period from the reception signal, a measurement unit configured to measure a slot length from the reception signal, a generation unit configured to generate a second packet having the slot as a unit, a timer which decrements a time period until transmission of the second packet for each slot length, a control unit configured to stop, if a carrier is sensed within a time period of the slot length, the timer for the time period, a transmission unit configured to transmit the second packet according to the timer. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243023 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A base station apparatus includes multiple antennas including M physical antennas (# | 10-06-2011 |
20110243024 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INFLUENCING THE SELECTION OF PEER DATA SOURCES IN A P2P NETWORK - Disclosed is a method of selecting a data source node from a plurality of data source nodes, the selected data source node being used to send data to a data requesting node over a packet data network. The method includes, at an intermediate node of the network, intercepting at least one message sent to or from the data requesting node, the message(s) relating to data source node suitability, determining a cost of communication between the data requesting node and each of the data source nodes to which the message(s) relate, and influencing data source node suitability information sent to the data requesting node to take account of the cost to enable the data requesting node to use the information to select a data source node. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243025 | SPACE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS FOR WIRELESS LAN, AND CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR THE SAME - Provided are space division multiple access for wireless local area network (WLAN), and channel estimation for the same. A frequency division multiple access technique and a space division multiple access technique based on competition are used together for channel access. The channel access method includes: a competition period for estimating channel characteristics for a plurality of stations and transmitting, to the plurality of stations, downlink schedule information or uplink schedule information based on the estimated channel characteristics; and a data transmission period for performing downlink transmission or uplink transmission with all or some of the plurality of stations in accordance with the downlink schedule information or the uplink schedule information. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243026 | METHOD WHEREBY A CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IS FED BACK BY A TERMINAL IN A MULTIPLE-ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND A DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed is a method whereby a channel quality indicator is fed back by a terminal in a multiple-antenna wireless communication system. More specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving reference signals corresponding to a plurality of data streams from a base station; using the reference signals to calculate a channel quality indicator; and transmitting the calculated channel quality indicator to the base station; and, in the step in which the channel quality indicator is calculated, the channel quality indicator is calculated under the assumption that at least one of the reference signals has been transmitted using wither the spatial-multiplexing technique or the transmit diversity technique, depending on the feedback setting of the terminal. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243027 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - A mobile terminal device for performing multi-carrier communication with a base station device can improve communication quality while reducing the data amount without lowering accuracy of feedback information. In the mobile station device ( | 10-06-2011 |
20110243028 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION TO BE EMPLOYED IN THE SAME - In the communication system performing transmission with generating the vacant period in the slotted mode during data transmission in order to perform various process, such as different frequency carrier quality measurement or so forth, the control signal for maintaining a communication quality is inserted even in the vacant period. Therefor, a link quality may not be degraded even if the vacant period is long. Namely, when the pilot signal is used as the control signal, even in the vacant period, measurement of the link quality of the forward link with the pilot signal is performed in the mobile station to report the result of measurement to the base station. Therefore, transmission power control of the forward link can be performed according to the report in the base station. Therefore, degradation of the forward link can be eliminated. | 10-06-2011 |
20110249571 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PAGE DELIVERY TO A WIRELESS CLIENT DEVICE IN IDLE STATE - Proxy devices simultaneously support multiple modes of client device operation. Embodiments facilitate continued support of idle mode, proxy state operation of one or more client devices by a proxy device that is serving an active connected mode proxied client device. Paging message delivery from the proxy device to an idle mode proxied client device is facilitated by the proxy device monitoring a channel associated with the active connected mode proxied client device for a message (e.g., paging message) associated with the idle mode proxied client device. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249572 | Real-Time Adaptive Processing of Network Data Packets for Analysis - A network monitoring system that summarizes a plurality of data packets of a session into a compact session record for storage and processing. Each session record may be produced in real-time and made available during the session and/or after the termination of the session. Depending on protocols, a network monitoring system extracts different sets of information, removes redundant information from the plurality of data packets, and adds performance information to produce the session record. The network monitoring system may retrieve and process a single session record or multiple session records for the same or different protocols to determine cause of events, resolve issues in a network or evaluate network performance or conditions. The session record enables analysis in the units of session instead of individual packets. Hence, the network monitoring system can analyze events, issues or performance of the network more efficiently and effectively. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249573 | CHANNEL ACCESS FOR COGNITIVE NETWORKS - A system for managing wireless interaction based on communication performance. Source apparatuses may desire to establish wireless links to target apparatuses. Prior to initiating new wireless links, source apparatuses may evaluate whether the establishment of new wireless links will increase the cumulative performance of the wireless communication environment, wherein the wireless communication environment may comprise the apparatuses communicating wirelessly within transmission range of a source apparatus. The evaluation may determine, for example, whether predicted cumulative performance of the wireless communication environment after the new wireless link is initiated would be greater than cumulative performance prior to link initiation. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249574 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PREDICTING VIDEO TRANSMISSION QUALITY THROUGH A NETWORK - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for approximating video transmission quality capability through a communications network. Initially, a processor is used to insert data into the network through a first endpoint that is delivered to a second endpoint. Then, at least one characteristic of the network between the first and second endpoints is determined based on how the second endpoint receives the data. After the at least one characteristic is determined, a representative video segment is selected based on the at least one characteristic. Finally, the representative video segment is output to demonstrate the video transmission quality capabilities of the network. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249575 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A user equipment implements a method of processing indication messages, such as SCRI (signalling connection release indication) messages. If upper layers indicate that there is no more packet switched data for a prolonged period, then if a count of how many indication messages have been triggered in at least one RRC (radio resource control) state is less than a maximum number, the UE increments the count, and a cause is set in the indication message, and the indication message is sent. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249576 | ANTENNA SELECTION BASED ON PERFORMANCE METRICS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - Techniques for supporting a plurality of radios on a wireless device with a limited number of antennas are described. In one design, at least one radio may be selected from among the plurality of radios on the wireless device. At least one performance metric may be determined and may include a performance metric related to isolation between antennas, or correlation between antennas, or throughput, or link capacity, or interference, or power consumption of the wireless device, or received signal quality at the wireless device. In one design, an objective function may be determined based on the at least one performance metric. At least one antenna may be selected for the at least one radio from among a plurality of antennas based on the at least one performance metric, e.g., based on the objective function. The at least one radio may be connected to the at least one antenna. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249577 | FACILITATING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN TD-SCDMA MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEMS - Uplink synchronization processes in multi-carrier time division-synchronous code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA) systems include determining uplink transmission timing for a first carrier frequency and performing uplink synchronization on the other carrier frequencies based on the transmission timing of the first carrier frequency. The transmission timing may be adjusted based on a timing offset that is measured between the received downlink pilot signals of the various carrier frequencies. User equipment may perform uplink synchronization individually with each of the carriers serviced by a particular Node B after receiving synchronization information regarding those carrier frequencies. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249578 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION TRANSMISSION FOR MULTIPLE CARRIERS - Channel state information is reported in periodic and aperiodic reports for multiple component carriers or serving cells. Channel state information may be reported for a subset of aggregated downlink carriers or serving cells. For an aperiodic report, the carrier(s)/serving cell(s) for which channel state information is reported are determined based on the request for the aperiodic report. When a CQI/PMI/RI report and a HARQ ACK/NACK report coincide in a subframe, the HARQ ACK/NACK report is transmitted on PUCCH, and the CQI/PMI/RI report is transmitted on PUSCH. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249579 | METHOD FOR MITIGATING OUTAGES IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - The present invention provides a method for mitigating outages in wireless communication systems using feedback for control channels formed by aggregating groups of resource blocks or resource elements, the method. One embodiment of the method includes generating control channel feedback at user equipment. The control channel feedback is generated using one or more measurements performed on signals received at the user equipment over a downlink control channel at a current aggregation level. The method also includes transmitting the control channel feedback over an uplink channel and using this information for the optimal implementation of Cell range expansion by the network. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249580 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD OF PROCESSING THEREBY, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus, acting as an access point, constructs a first network and communicates as a station on a second network constructed by another apparatus. The communication apparatus holds parameter information that defines a transmission interval of data. If communication channels of the second network and of the first network are in an interfering relationship and the communication status in the second network is a predetermined status, then the communication apparatus changes parameter information corresponding to any type of data in the held parameter information. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249581 | Method of Handling Sounding Reference Signal Transmission and Related Communication Device - A method of handling a sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises enabling a mobile device-specific carrier aggregation (CA) with at least one uplink (UL) component carrier, and performing the SRS transmission on the at least one UL component carrier to a network according to at least one of a mobile device-specific SRS configuration, a component carrier-specific SRS configuration and a cell-specific SRS configuration, which are configured by the network. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249582 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REQUEST/FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS - A Channel State Information (CSI) request/feedback method and apparatus for a wireless communication system supporting carrier aggregation or bandwidth extension are provided. A base station sets a CSI request field of an Uplink (UL) grant for scheduling UL transmission on a UL Component Carrier (CC) corresponding to a Downlink (DL) CC of which CSI is requested, to a request value. The UL grant is transmitted to a terminal. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249583 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING DELAY OF BUFFER DATA OF UE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus estimate a delay of buffer data of a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system. A message comprising the size of buffer data is received from a UE. The size of the buffer data of the UE is distributed into a plurality of groups based on a time point of receiving the message comprising the size of the buffer data of the UE. A delay for each of the plurality of groups is estimated using a time interval of execution of delay estimation for the buffer data of the UE. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249584 | PERIODIC CQI REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - According to certain aspects, techniques for aperiodically reporting channel state information (CSI) on protected and unprotected resources are provided. The protected resources may include resources in which transmissions in a first cell are protected by restricting transmissions in a second cell. According to certain aspects, a request for channel quality indicator (CQI) may be sent in a first subframe, CQI may be measured for a second subframe having a first offset from the first subframe, and a corresponding CQI report sent in a third subframe having a second offset from the first subframe. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249585 | Methods and Systems for Transmission of Multiple Modulated Signals Over Wireless Networks - A method and apparatus for requesting and allocating bandwidth in a broadband wireless communication system. The inventive method and apparatus includes a combination of techniques that allow a plurality of CPEs to communicate their bandwidth request messages to respective base stations. One technique includes a “polling” method whereby a base station polls CPEs individually or in groups and allocates bandwidth specifically for the purpose of allowing the CPEs to respond with bandwidth requests. The polling of the CPEs by the base station may be in response to a CPE setting a “poll-me bit” or, alternatively, it may be periodic. Another technique comprises “piggybacking” bandwidth requests on bandwidth already allocated to a CPE. In accordance with this technique, currently active CPEs request bandwidth using previously unused portions of uplink bandwidth that is already allocated to the CPE. The CPE is responsible for distributing the allocated uplink bandwidth in a manner that accommodates the services provided by the CPE. By using a combination of bandwidth allocation techniques, the present invention advantageously makes use of the efficiency benefits associated with each technique | 10-13-2011 |
20110249586 | Methods and Systems for Transmission of Multiple Modulated Signals Over Wireless Networks - A method and apparatus for requesting and allocating bandwidth in a broadband wireless communication system. The inventive method and apparatus includes a combination of techniques that allow a plurality of CPEs to communicate their bandwidth request messages to respective base stations. One technique includes a “polling” method whereby a base station polls CPEs individually or in groups and allocates bandwidth specifically for the purpose of allowing the CPEs to respond with bandwidth requests. The polling of the CPEs by the base station may be in response to a CPE setting a “poll-me bit” or, alternatively, it may be periodic. Another technique comprises “piggybacking” bandwidth requests on bandwidth already allocated to a CPE. In accordance with this technique, currently active CPEs request bandwidth using previously unused portions of uplink bandwidth that is already allocated to the CPE. The CPE is responsible for distributing the allocated uplink bandwidth in a manner that accommodates the services provided by the CPE. By using a combination of bandwidth allocation techniques, the present invention advantageously makes use of the efficiency benefits associated with each technique | 10-13-2011 |
20110249587 | PILOT-MEASUREMENT CONTROL METHOD AND DUAL-MODE TERMINAL - A pilot-measurement control method and a dual-mode terminal are provided. After entering a tunnel state, an idle state protocol submodule does not wait for a measurement start command to trigger pilot measurement, but instead, directly triggers pilot measurement by actively searching for high rate packet data (HRPD) measurement permission variable information. Alternatively, measurement indication information sent by an initialization protocol submodule is buffered in advance, so that after entering the tunnel state, the idle state protocol submodule can trigger pilot measurement by searching for the buffered information. Alternatively, the idle state protocol submodule performs pilot measurement according to received measurement indication information sent by an air interface connection management protocol submodule when the idle state protocol submodule is activated. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249588 | System For Wireless Communication and a Method For Providing Wireless Communication - The present invention relates to a system for wireless communication comprising a first transceiver circuitry (BS) connected to a plurality of virtual antenna ports of an antenna arrangement; each virtual antenna port is a combination of one or more physical antenna ports. The first transceiver circuitry (BS) is configured to: communicate with a second transceiver circuitry (UE) via the antenna ports of the antenna arrangement; receive primary beamshaping information related to a first link (Downlink) between the first transceiver circuitry (BS) and the second transceiver circuitry (UE); determine secondary beamshaping information related to a second link (Uplink) between the second transceiver circuitry (UE) and the first transceiver circuitry (BS); and apply at least one weight vector based on the primary and secondary beamshaping information for subsequent transmission of signals from the first transceiver circuitry (BS) via the plurality of virtual antenna ports of the antenna arrangement. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249589 | CHANNEL SENSING SCHEME USING NATURAL QUIET PERIOD IN COGNITIVE RADIO SYSTEM - Provided is a method of sensing an operating channel by using a natural quiet period in a cognitive radio system. A requested QP is reduced by using a natural QP needed for communication that is intrinsic to a communication system, not by using a QP for cognitive radio. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249590 | System and Method for Multiplexing Control and Data Channels in a Multiple Input, Multiple Output Communications System - A system and method for system and method for multiplexing control and data channels in a multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) communications system are provided. A method for transmitting control symbols and data symbols on multiple MIMO layers includes selecting a first set of codewords from Ncw codewords, distributing control symbols onto the first set of layers, placing data symbols of the first set of codewords onto the first set of layers, placing data symbols of the (Ncw-Ncw1) remaining codewords to remaining layers if Ncw>Ncw1, and transmitting the multiple MIMO layers. The first set of codewords is associated with a first set of layers from the multiple MIMO layers, and the Ncw codewords are to be transmitted simultaneously and the first set of codewords comprises Ncw1 MIMO codewords, where Ncw and Ncw1 are integers greater than or equal to 1. The remaining layers are MIMO layers from the multiple MIMO layers not in the first set of layers. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249591 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFYING DEGRADATION OF A MEDIA SERVICE - A method and device for identifying degradation in service quality for a wireless media service. The wireless media service has a known expected packet generation rate, which may be determined by the device based upon the codec and payload size selected on initiating the media service. At a receiving device, the packets actually received by the device from the other termination point are counted over a time period, and this number is compared with the number of packets that were expected based upon the known packet generation rate. From this comparison a packet loss rate may be determined. If the packet loss rate exceeds a threshold level, then the device may issue a user alert, terminate the service, or take other action. The threshold level may be established based upon a packet loss rate corresponding to a significant degree of service quality degradation. | 10-13-2011 |
20110255424 | SUMMARIZING INTERNET TRAFFIC PATTERNS - A method and system for monitoring network traffic by estimating an L | 10-20-2011 |
20110255425 | Methods and Apparatus for Secondary Bandwidth Detection and Allocation - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises monitoring a bandwidth allocation of a primary device via monitoring at least one broadcast message sent from an associated base station; determining whether a secondary bandwidth is available based on the monitored bandwidth allocation of the primary device; allocating the secondary bandwidth to a secondary application on a secondary device if the secondary bandwidth becomes available; keeping track of changes in the bandwidth allocation of the primary device; and returning the secondary bandwidth to the primary device when the changes in the bandwidth allocation of the primary device indicates a need for the secondary bandwidth by the primary device. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255426 | WIRELESS DEVICE DEPLOYMENT WITH RELIABLE LINKS - The embodiments are related to deploying wireless devices in a space to maximize a monitored area. In an embodiment, the system includes at least one first wireless device installed into a first position and set in a placed mode, and a second wireless device to be installed into a second position and set in an unplaced mode. The second wireless device is moved away from the at least one first wireless device. An application message is transmitted at a normal operating power. A link quality detection message is transmitted at a reduced power lower than the operating power by a headroom. The link quality between the at least one first wireless device and the second wireless device is estimated based on the link quality detection message to determine the second position to install the second wireless device. Once installed, the second wireless device is switched to the placed mode. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255427 | System and Method for Physical Layer Device Enabled Clock Diagnostics - A system and method for physical layer device enabled clock diagnostics. The physical layer device can monitor the performance of a clock recovery module. Performance monitoring can be performed on the output clock signal or the control components used to generate the output clock signal. In one embodiment, the performance monitoring is correlated to particular data patterns to provide an accurate determination of variations or other inconsistencies within the clock recovery module. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255428 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMBINED MAC LEVEL MESSAGE WITH CQI CHANNEL CONTROL MESSAGE FOR CHANNEL FEEDBACK REPORT - In one or more embodiments, a system and method of managing network channel quality in a wireless communications network includes reporting a channel quality measurement from the particular user to a base station (BS) over an available CQICH, and determining a MCS based, at least in part, upon the channel quality measurement. If a threshold network CQICH capacity is reached during a subsequent data frame such that a CQICH is no longer available, MAC level messages are generated between the BS and the particular user to trigger reporting of signal quality information to the BS by the particular user. After the next CQICH cycle commences and if a CQICH is still unavailable, the signal quality information is continued to be provided via MAC level messages. Otherwise, a CQICH is reallocated for a particular user and channel quality measurement reporting is transitioned back to the CQICH. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255429 | METHOD FOR EVALUATING LINK COST METRICS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method for measuring link cost metrics and evaluating their accuracy with respect to reference measure of link quality in a communication network, said method comprising the steps of: during a given time interval, simultaneously transmitting several types of probe packets and data traffic, and estimating a plurality of link cost metrics (metricA, metricB, . . . , metricN) and a reference measure of link quality for a set of communication links; evaluating the accuracy of the estimated link cost metrics (metricA, metricB, . . . , metricN) by computing their correlation with the reference measure of link quality; and collecting cross-layer information for each probe packet. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255430 | Communication device, communication method, and program - There is provided a communication device including a communication state determination section which determines a communication state corresponding to a transmission rate demanded from a simulation engine based on a transmission rate and a state of communication at the transmission rate between a first communication state measurement device and a second communication state measurement device via a real network, a traffic generation section which generates traffic by creating data based on the communication state determined by the communication state determination section, a protocol processing section which creates a packet including the data created by the traffic generation section, and a communication section which transmits the packet created by the protocol processing section to another communication device. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255431 | COORDINATED SILENT PERIOD WITH SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL (SRS) CONFIGURATION - A method of wireless communication includes configuring a virtual SRS (sounding reference signal) transmission to prompt a user equipment (UE) to use a shortened uplink transmission format to create a silent period at an end of a subframe. Reports are received from the UE indicating interference observed during the silent period. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255432 | Load Control in Uplink Interference Cancellation Systems With Soft Decision - A method for load control in uplink interference cancellation systems with soft decision is disclosed. It is determined whether interference is to be cancelled from a received signal based on a packet size of the received signal. If the signal is to be cancelled, a maximal correlation factor between an interfering portion and a useful portion of the received signal is determined based on a transport block size of the received signal. If the signal is to be cancelled, a reduced target load for a base station is also determined based on the maximal correlation factor. If the signal is to be cancelled, uplink transmit power for one or more wireless communication devices is adjusted based on the reduced target load. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255433 | ROBUST PACKET DETECTION, SYMBOL TIMING, CHANNEL LENGTH ESTIMATION AND CHANNEL RESPONSE ESTIMATION FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method in accordance with an embodiment of the invention includes producing a first signal match indication based on at least one match indication indicative of a match between at least one signal received in at least one band and a reference signal. The method also includes producing a first signal multipath combined signal based upon the first signal match indication, and detecting a first peak in the first multipath combined signal. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255434 | Beam Forming Method, Apparatus and System - The invention relates to a method of transmitting data in a communications system. The invention comprises: receiving from a user an uplink signal using multiple narrow antenna beams; measuring beam-specific pilot signal powers from the uplink signal for all the beams; and using the measured pilot signal powers to determine which one or ones of the downlink beams is to be used for a downlink signal for the user. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255435 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, BASE STATIONS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHODS, AND PROGRAMS - A base station according to the present invention includes a decision unit that computes an allowable throughput of each terminal for each of combinations of modulation systems and code rates in the case in which the base station accommodates a predetermined accommodation number of terminals in advance, compares a minimum reserved traffic rate of the terminal that is the control target and the allowable throughput, and decides a minimum physical rate at which the bandwidth is reserved based on the compared results; and a control unit that executes the control for the terminal that is the control target postulating that the adaptive modulation is executed for the terminal that is the control target at the minimum physical rate decided by the decision unit. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255436 | Method of Optimizing Comp Zone for Joint Processing Mode - A method of optimizing a CoMP Zone for a joint processing mode is disclosed. A method of optimizing a CoMP zone for a joint processing mode in a user equipment of a mobile communication system comprises transmitting information of at least one subband preferred by the user equipment among a plurality of subbands included in the CoMP zone, to a serving base station; receiving information of a specific subband included in the CoMP zone from the serving base station; and receiving data from at least one of the serving base station and neighboring base stations that support the CoMP, through a radio resource corresponding to the specific subband. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255437 | COMMUNICATION QUALITY MONITORING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION QUALITY MONITORING METHOD AND PROGRAM THEREOF - A communication quality monitoring device is provided which determines communication quality deterioration by variation of a transmission buffer length in session control irrespectively of generation/non-generation of a data loss. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255438 | TECHNIQUES FOR PERFORMING EFFICIENT LINK ADAPTATION IN WIRELESS PERSONAL NETWORKS | 10-20-2011 |
20110255439 | RADIO COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - To provide a radio communication control apparatus and a radio communication control method capable of controlling simultaneous transmission and reception so as not to degrade system throughput. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261703 | DISTRIBUTED METHOD FOR EQUITABLE BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION FOR CONTENT DISTRIBUTION IN A NETWORK - A distributed method is presented for determining equitable bandwidth allocations in a content distribution tree network, where the root of the tree has a server that broadcasts multiple programs throughout the tree. The intensive computations in the distributed method are done at each of the nodes independently while only minimal information is exchanged among the nodes. Each network link has limited capacity. The allocation problem is formulated as an equitable resource allocation problem with a lexicographic maximin objective function that provides equitable service performance for all requested programs at the various nodes. The constraints include link capacity constraints and tree-like ordering constraints imposed on each of the programs. The distributed method converges to the equitable solution in a finite number of iterations. The distributed method can be applied to a network comprised of multiple trees. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261704 | MULTI-CARRIER OPERATIONAL MODES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL, METHOD OF INITIALIZING A MOBILE STATION IN ORDER TO PREPARE FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION IN SAME, AND CARRIER MANAGEMENT METHOD IN SAME - Multi-carrier operational modes in a wireless communications protocol are described, along with a method of initializing a mobile station in order to prepare for multi-carrier operation and a carrier management method within a wireless communications protocol. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261705 | Mapping Traffic Classes to Flow Control Groups - An apparatus, method, and storage medium for testing a network. A traffic generator may generate and transmit test traffic including a plurality of packet streams associated with a plurality of flow control groups. A traffic receiver may receive flow control packets from the network. Flow control logic may generate traffic class state data indicating a paused/not paused state for each of a plurality of traffic classes in accordance with the received flow control packets. A conversion table may map the traffic class state data into flow control data indicating a paused/not paused state for each of the plurality of flow control groups. The traffic generator may be configured to stop transmission of all packet streams associated with paused flow control groups in accordance with the flow control data. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261706 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A source apparatus writes, in a route request packet, the number of routes requested by the source apparatus. When a relay apparatus receives a route request packet for the first time, the relay apparatus determines a waiting time period, based on a route evaluation value that indicates a state of a route through which the route request packet has passed, and starts a timer. The relay apparatus selects route request packets having as high route evaluation values as possible, among route request packets that have been received until the timer expires, the number of route request packets to be selected being equal to the number of routes requested by the source apparatus, and then broadcasts the selected route request packets. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261707 | FACILITATING OPEN LOOP POWER CONTROL IN TD-SCDMA MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEMS - Open loop power control in Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) multi-carrier systems is facilitated through the determination of a value for open loop control on a primary carrier frequency which is then used to perform open loop control on at least one secondary carrier frequency in the multi-carrier system. This determined open loop control value may be applied using the value determined on the primary carrier frequency, or may be further adjusted using an estimated difference between received power of the primary carrier frequency and the secondary carrier frequencies, in selected aspects. When the pilot signals in the secondary carrier frequencies are transmitted at different power levels, this open loop control value may be further adjusted with a transmit power level offset. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261708 | GROUP TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method for channel sounding by an access point includes transmitting a sounding frame to a plurality of mobile stations (STAs). The sounding frame includes training symbols to be measured by each of the plurality of STAs. A sounding response frame is received from each of the plurality of STAs. The sounding response frame received from a first STA of the plurality of STAs is received at a short interframe spacing interval delay after completion of the sounding request frame transmission. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261709 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE USE OF MULTIPLE-INPUT, MUTLIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-PACKET RECEPTION (MPR) - A method for multipacket communication in an asynchronous wireless system includes the steps of transmitting at least two packets of 2M digital signals from a plurality of transmitters without other transmission taking place within a predetermined number of symbol durations from each side of each packet. Each transmitter generates digital signals denoted as at least two super-symbols according to an Alamouti coding scheme corresponding to M symbols of first set of super-symbols in a first transmission interval and a second set of super-symbols in a second transmission interval. The received packets include inter-symbol interference of the super-symbols when imperfectly synchronized which expands the time interval of the received packets. A symmetric Alamouti structure for the received packets is generated by folding the expanded received signal on itself, multiplying by a factor of −1, and decoding using the Alamouti structure for the received packets at each antenna of the receiver. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261710 | ANALYSIS APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ABNORMAL NETWORK TRAFFIC - The present invention discloses a network abnormal traffic analysis method, which calculates a set of index values of a monitored server based on the acquired IP network data, performs a primary detection on the calculated set of index values to generate vector corresponding to the set of index values, and performs a secondary detection on the vector to determine whether abnormal traffic and abnormal types related to the monitored server exist. The present invention also relates to a network abnormal traffic analysis apparatus related therewith and a network traffic monitoring system and method adopting these network abnormal traffic analysis method and apparatus. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261711 | WIRELESS COMMINICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ASSIGNING A CHANNEL IN SAID WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. The wireless communication system comprises an antenna unit comprising a plurality of antenna elements, selecting means arranged to select at least one of the antenna elements as serving antenna for communication with user equipment, means for code allocation arranged to allocate a code for channel estimation support for the communication between the serving antenna and the user equipment, and a control unit arranged to control the communication based on the selected serving antenna and the allocated code. The means for code allocation are arranged to assign the code to said user equipment. The control unit is arranged to control the serving antenna so as to transmit the code assigned to the user equipment. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261712 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CARRIER CONFIGURATION INFORMATION - A method for allowing a mobile station to reliably receive a paging message in a multi-carrier system is disclosed. A method for controlling a mobile station to receive carrier configuration information (CCI) in a wireless access system supporting multiple carriers includes a) receiving a first CCI including information about configuration of the multiple carriers from a first base station, b) receiving a second CCI including information about configuration of the multiple carriers from a second BS, and c) determining whether to perform location update and carrier switching using the first CCI and the second CCI. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261713 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - There is provided a mobile terminal apparatus and a radio base station apparatus capable of transmitting a downlink signal using an optimum feedback parameter even when a control delay exists and improving throughput characteristics of a downlink channel. A mobile terminal apparatus (1) measures a feedback parameter for a radio base station apparatus (3) using a received signal, obtains a feedback value, predicts a feedback parameter after a control delay in which the feedback value is reflected on transmission of a downlink shared channel to obtain a feedback predicted value, transmits the feedback predicted value to the radio base station apparatus, and the radio base station apparatus (3) selects a precoding weight of MIMO channel transmission using the feedback predicted value and schedules the downlink shared channel using the feedback predicted value. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261714 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ENABLING MULTI-CARRIERS AGGREGATION TRANSMISSION - The present invention discloses a transmission method with multi-carrier aggregation, which includes: performing uplink and downlink configurations for each of the component carriers aggregated in a cell and ensuring coexistence of at least one identical uplink sub-frame and at least one identical downlink sub-frame between at least two of the component carriers and compliance of the configuration of at least one of the component carriers with an uplink and downlink configuration of R8; and transmitting the uplink and downlink configuration of any one of the component carriers and those of the other component carriers aggregated with the any one component carrier to an LTE-A UE accessing the corresponding component carrier. The invention further provides a transmission device with multi-carrier aggregation. With the invention, uplink and downlink configurations in an LTE-A system can be performed to accommodate a demand of a TDD system. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261715 | Methods and Arrangements in a Wireless Communication Network for Handling at Least One Primary Tracking Area - A method and arrangement in a data collection network node ( | 10-27-2011 |
20110261716 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus of transmitting a sounding reference signal by a user equipment is provided. A user equipment transmits a first sounding reference signal through a first antenna, and transmits a second sounding reference signal through a second antenna. Resources for transmitting the first sounding reference signal and the second sounding reference signal are partially different. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261717 | CALL CONTROL SYSTEM, CALL CONTROLLER, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND CALL CONTROL METHOD - There is provided a call control system, a call controller, a terminal device, and a call control method of this type, whereby a communication network to be used by a terminal device on the receiving side is determined in an efficient manner to allow communication promptly, in a communication where plural communication networks are selectively used. On receipt of a reception request from the terminal device | 10-27-2011 |
20110261718 | Method, System and Device for Facilitating Data Communication - Data communication is facilitated in a mobile network in a general communication network, the mobile network being formed from a mobile router in communication with a plurality of network nodes. One method of facilitating the data communication includes, at the mobile router, determining the availability of one or more access bearers from a group thereof, each access bearer providing an access gateway to a communication network. The mobile router then automatically selects at least one available access bearer based upon a prioritized list containing two or more access bearers, the prioritized list indicating an order of preference. The mobile router then connects to the selected access bearer using an access communication technology compatible with the selected access bearer to allow each of the network nodes of the mobile network to communicate with correspondent nodes of the communication network via the access gateway provided by the access bearer. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261719 | SYSTEMS, PROCESSES AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR IMPROVED PACKET SCHEDULING OF MEDIA OVER PACKET - A method of processing first and second record packets of real-time information includes computing for each packet a deadline interval and ordering processing of the packets according to the respective deadline intervals. A single-chip integrated circuit has a processor circuit and embedded electronic instructions forming an egress packet control establishing an egress scheduling list structure and operations in the processor circuit that extract a packet deadline intervals, place packets in the egress scheduling list according to deadline intervals; and embed a decoder that decodes the packets according to a priority depending to their deadline intervals. | 10-27-2011 |
20110267966 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES TO IMPROVE PERFORMANCE OF COEXISTING RADIO SIGNALS - Embodiments of a method and an apparatus for improving the performance of coexisting wireless radio signals are described. In one embodiment, the method includes detecting burst-type interference based on a packet error rate and a transmission rate associated with a transmitter. The method further includes setting the transmission rate in accordance with a burst-type rate adaptation mode to increase data throughput. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267967 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING A CONTROLCHANNEL IN AN ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A scheduler capable of operating in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing communication system schedules a control channel for a user equipment by determining a channel quality metric associated with the user equipment, calculating a target control channel element quality metric, determining a control channel element utilization rate, wherein the control channel element utilization rate a past rate of utilization of control channel elements, and selecting a control channel element aggregation level for the control channel based on the channel quality metric, the target control channel element quality metric, and the control channel element utilization rate. The scheduler then allocates control channel elements to the control channel based on the selected control channel element aggregation level. The scheduler further may steal power from one or more unused control channel elements and assign the stolen power to control channel elements assigned to the control channel. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267968 | MULTIPLE-FRAME OFFSET BETWEEN NEIGHBOR CELLS TO ENHANCE THE GERAN SIGNALING PERFORMANCE WHEN POWER CONTROL FOR SIGNALING IS IN USE - The present patent application comprises means and instructions for improving signaling by increasing a power of at least one signaling channel if errors on the signaling channel occur, comprising tracking quality of the at least one signaling channel, determining whether the at least one signaling channel has an error rate that is above a threshold, and increasing power to the at least one signaling channel if the error rate is above the threshold. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267969 | BROADBAND TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM BETWEEN ONE OR MORE CONTROL CENTERS AND ONE OR MORE MOBILE UNITS - A broadband telecommunication system between one or more control centers (CC) and one or more mobile units (MU) moving at high speed, the communication being supported by a wireless radiosystem with handover (HO) roaming. According to the main aspect of the invention, it is possible to minimize the scan step of the handover, thanks to the introduction in the procedure of a certain number of parameters and the setting thereof suitably handled via a specific algorithm. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267970 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD SWITCHING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of base stations that can switch to either first or second communication method and that communicates wirelessly with terminals by the switched communication method and a control apparatus that manages the plurality of base stations. The control apparatus includes: an acquisition unit that acquires, from each base station, throughput of the base station and RSSI of each terminal that communicates wirelessly with the base station; and a switch instruction unit that instructs to each base station switch the current communication method when there is, among the plurality of base stations, a base station in which throughput has decreased within fixed interval, and instructs to re-switch to the communication method before switching to base stations in which throughput before and after switching of communication method is same but a specific standard, based on RSSI after switching of communication method, is not satisfied. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267971 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING DATA USING SEQUENTIAL RESPONSE PROTOCOL - Provided is a data communication method and apparatus based on a sequential response protocol that is applicable to a multiple user multiple input and multiple output (MU-MIMO) system. The data communication apparatus may include response indexes (RIs) with respect to multiple terminals in at least one spatio-temporal stream to be transmitted to the multiple terminals, and the response indexes may be information associated with a transmission sequence of data to be transmitted by the multiple terminals. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267972 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING OF CYCLIC SHIFT PARAMETER FOR SUPPORTING ORTHOGONALITY IN MIMO ENVIRONMENT - A method includes: determining a CS parameter which implicitly indicates an orthogonality allocation rule and orthogonality-related information, by determining a multiple access state of one or more User Equipments (UEs), and transmitting the determined CS parameter to the one or more UEs, wherein the orthogonality-related information comprises an Orthogonal Cover Code (OCC) indicated by the CS parameter, the orthogonality allocation rule is determined as a uniform scheme or a non-uniform scheme according to a set with at least one element to which the CS parameter belongs, if the non-uniform scheme is applied as the orthogonality rule, determining the at least one element as the CS parameter of the UE if the UE is in an SU-MIMO (Single User Multiple Input Multiple Output) state, and if the uniform scheme is applied as the orthogonality rule, determining the at least one element as the CS parameter of the UE if the UE is in an MU-MIMO (Multiple User Multiple Input Multiple Output) state. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267973 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPORTING RECEPTION QUALITY - A communication apparatus wherein in a case of reporting a reception quality measured for each of a plurality of subbands, even if the band is widened, the degradation in transmission efficiency can be avoided. In this apparatus, an antenna ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110267974 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SLAVE STATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a main-data processing unit that performs predetermined data processing on input data, and operates by switching two states of a sleep state as a state where an operation of the main-data processing unit is stopped and a normal state as a state where the main-data processing unit is operating. The communication apparatus includes a filtering unit that extracts communication state information for indicating a communication state from the input data, and a signal processing unit of a sub-data processing unit that shifts the main-data processing unit to a sleep state or a normal state based on the communication state information. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267975 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A communication apparatus ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110267976 | WIRELESS RELAY APPARATUS AND WIRELESS RELAY SYSTEM - A wireless relay apparatus which can provide a wireless relay apparatus compatible with an MIMO system without changing the wiring of an already installed wireless relay apparatus or wireless relay system not compatible with the MIMO system, and which is able to minimize the costs that are generated in installing a wireless relay apparatus compatible with the MIMO system. In this apparatus, a second wireless apparatus ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110273997 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SCHEDULING METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION DEVICE, AND RADIO TERMINAL - A radio communication system, scheduling method, radio base station device, and radio communication terminal all enabling improvement of the system throughput. The radio base station device ( | 11-10-2011 |
20110273998 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MONITORING PARAMETERS OF A WIRELESS DEVICE - Systems and methods are provided for controlling monitoring operations, such as the monitoring of signal strength, media access control layer overhead information data, application layer overhead information, and/or data in a device, such as a battery powered, mobile, communication device. A user interface status and/or a flow status can be monitored. Based at least in part on the user interface status and/or the flow status, a determination can be made as to when and/or how often monitoring is to be performed. | 11-10-2011 |
20110273999 | DATA TRANSMISSION VIA A RELAY STATION WITH ACK/NACK FEEDBACK - Techniques for supporting communication by a relay station are described. In an aspect, the relay station may support NACK Type 1 when operating in an amplify-and-forward (AF) mode. The relay station may receive a first transmission of a packet from an upstream station, determine PAPR of the first transmission, and send NACK Type 1 to the upstream station if high PAPR is detected. In another aspect, the relay station may support NACK Type 1 and NACK Type 2 when operating in a decode-and-forward (DF) mode. The relay station may perform PAPR decoding for the first transmission, send NACK Type 1 if PAPR decoding fails, perform channel decoding if PAPR decoding passes, and send NACK Type 2 to the upstream station if channel decoding fails. In yet another aspect, the relay station may operate in the AF mode or the DF mode. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274000 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEVELOPING A WI-FI ACCESS POINT MAP USING SENSORS IN A WIRELESS MOBILE DEVICE - A wireless mobile device capable of developing a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) access point map. The mobile device comprises a Wi-Fi module and a processor. The Wi-Fi module is configured to communicate with a plurality of Wi-Fi access points and determine a signal strength from at least one of the Wi-Fi access points at each of a plurality of locations. The processor is configured to display a Wi-Fi access point map on a display of the mobile device, the map configured to associate the signal strength of the at least one Wi-Fi access point with each location, and direct a user of the mobile device to a location on the map, the location on the map having a stronger Wi-Fi signal that a current location of the mobile device. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274001 | Signal Measurement in TD-SCDMA Multicarrier Systems Using Downlink Synchronization Codes - Wireless communication in a multicarrier radio access network may be implemented where a user equipment (UE) maintains communication with various carrier frequencies in the multicarrier network. The UE will receive an indication from a node B to measure a signal quality on one of a number of carrier frequencies in the network. The UE will then measure the signal quality on the carrier frequency based on measurements using a downlink synchronization code transmitted by the node B on the downlink pilot channel of the carrier frequencies in the multicarrier network. The UE may then report the channel quality back to the node B. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274002 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF OPERATING A MULTI-USER SYSTEM - A method and system is disclosed for grouping the multiple stations connected to an access point (AP). The system and method comprise sending a sounding packet to a plurality of stations, wherein the stations may be all or part of the stations that are located within the range of the AP. The stations that receive the sounding packets respond to the AP, and the AP determines the channel state information (CSI) from the responses. According to the CSI, the AP divides the multiple stations into several groups. According to an embodiment of the present invention, a confirmation step is performed to each group of stations, respectively. The AP sends a second sounding packet to each group of stations, and verifies the CSI between each station group by group. Therefore, the method and system provides for monitoring the validation of each group by periodically sending sounding packets to each group. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274003 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF OPERATING A MULTI-USER SYSTEM - A method and system is disclosed for grouping the multiple stations connected to an access point (AP). The system and method comprise sending a sounding packet to a plurality of stations, wherein the stations may be all or part of the stations that are located within the range of the AP. The stations that receive the sounding packets respond to the AP, and the AP determines the channel state information (CSI) from the responses. According to the CSI, the AP divides the multiple stations into several groups. According to an embodiment of the present invention, a confirmation step is performed to each group of stations, respectively. The AP sends a second sounding packet to each group of stations, and verifies the CSI between each station group by group. Therefore, the method and system provides for monitoring the validation of each group by periodically sending sounding packets to each group. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274004 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SPACE-TIME DETERMINATIONS WITH REDUCED NETWORK TRAFFIC - Space-time solutions are determined by exchanging pings among nodes in a network. Each ping includes a current space-time state of the transmitting node, which includes the transmitting node's currently estimated location and corrected time (as a count stamp). A particular node in the network receives pings from the other nodes in the network and uses the data in the received pings to estimate its own current position and to correct its own free-running clock relative to a common system time. As a service to the network, the particular node then transmits its corrected time (as a count stamp) and estimated position to the other nodes. In some embodiments, the space-time solutions discussed herein are used as backup to other navigation systems, such as the Automatic Dependent Surveillance—Broadcast (ADS-B) system. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274005 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION THROUGH PDCCH - A method for efficiently transmitting and receiving control information through a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) is provided. When a User Equipment (UE) receives control information through a PDCCH, the received control information is set to be decoded in units of search spaces, each having a specific start position in the specific subframe. Here, a modulo operation according to a predetermined first constant value (D) is performed on an input value to calculate a first result value, and a modulo operation according to a predetermined first variable value (C) corresponding to the number of candidate start positions that can be used as the specific start position is performed on the calculated first result value to calculate a second result value and an index position corresponding to the second result value is used as the specific start position. Transmitting control information in this manner enables a plurality of UEs to efficiently receive PDCCHs without collisions. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274006 | DISTRIBUTED CACHE - ADAPTIVE MULTICAST ARCHITECTURE FOR BANDWIDTH REDUCTION - Disclosed is a method and system for maximizing the use of available bandwidth on an ISP communication system between an Internet Service Provider (ISP) and remote locations where at least one of the remote locations has a remote cache. An embodiment may create a pool of the cacheable objects being sent to the remote locations from the downstream traffic. An embodiment may determine bandwidth savings for each object in the pool of cacheable objects that would be achieved by remotely caching each object and prioritize the pool of cacheable objects based on the determined bandwidth savings for each object. An embodiment may create a queue of objects to multicast to the remote caches based on the pool of cacheable objects and the remaining multicast bandwidth and then multicast the queue to the remote caches. The remote caches may intercept and reply to requests for objects held in the remote cache without accessing the ISP communication system, thus, saving bandwidth on the ISP communication system. | 11-10-2011 |
20110280137 | Packet Rate Detection Apparatus and Method - There are disclosed an apparatus, a machine readable media, and methods for testing a network. The apparatus may include a statistics engine coupled to a memory. The statistics engine may extract a packet group identifier (PGID) from a packet received from the network and retrieve traffic statistics associated with the PGID from the memory. The retrieved traffic statistics may include a packets-per-interval count and a packets-per-interval threshold, the packets-per-interval count indicating a number of packets received within a time interval of a sequence of time intervals. At the start of each new time interval, the statistics engine may set a flag indicating whether or not the packets-per-interval count for the previous time interval was equal to or greater than the packets-per-interval threshold. The flag may be saved in the memory as part of the traffic statistics associated with the extracted PGID. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280138 | BI-DIRECTIONAL REPEATER WITH A QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) INDICATOR - The invention relates to a method for determining a quality of service (QoS). A received signal strength indicator (RSSI) value associated with a downlink signal, a gain of a downlink power amplifier, and an increase in the RSSI value received by the mobile device associated with the downlink signal are determined. The QoS based on at least one of the RSSI value, the gain, and the increase in RSSI value received by the mobile device is determined and displayed to the user. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280139 | PROGRESSIVE CHARTING - Embodiments of the invention include an apparatus, method, and computer program for progressive charting of network traffic flow data. The method includes, in one example, receiving, at a network traffic analyzer, a query of network traffic flow data over a certain time period. The method further includes modifying the query to produce sub-queries each based on different segments of time within the certain time period, executing at least one of the sub-queries, and incrementally outputting results of each of said executed sub-queries as each of the sub-queries are completed. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280140 | Alternate Transmission Scheme for High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) - Transmission of certain channels between a User Equipment (UE) and a Node B (NB) in High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) of a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) network may be scheduled during a UE's idle intervals. Scheduled transmissions during a UE's idle interval result in lost system resources because the transmissions do not occur. A NB may prevent conflicts between scheduled transmissions and a UE's idle period by prohibiting transfer of certain channels a predetermined number of radio frames before the UE's idle period. Alternatively, the NB may schedule transmission of certain channels with a predetermined delay to prevent the channels from being scheduled during the UE's idle period. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280141 | Control Channel Discontinuous Reception (DRX) Messaging for Performing Measurements to Enable Handover Between Wireless Networks - In geographical areas with incomplete coverage of Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) networks, it may be beneficial for a multimode User Equipment (UE) to handover to a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) network. Before handover, a multimode UE may receive an indication from a serving TD-SCDMA cell to enter a Discontinuous Reception (DRX) mode and perform measurement on a nearby GSM cell. After measurement, the UE receives a grant from the serving TD-SCDMA cell allowing the UE to transmit a measurement report to the serving TD-SCDMA cell. The TD-SCDMA cell may use the measurement report to determine if the multimode UE should handover to the GSM cell. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280142 | DECENTRALIZED SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VOICE AND VIDEO SESSIONS - A wireless communicator, including a modular communicator, including a communicator controller, a modem coupled with the communicator controller for sending and receiving data under instruction of the communicator controller, and a connector coupled with the communicator controller for transmitting signals between the modular communicator and a jacket device under instruction of the communicator controller, and a plurality of jacket devices, each jacket device including a housing comprising a cavity into which the modular communicator is inserted, a jacket controller mounted in the housing, a connector coupled with the jacket controller for transmitting signals between the jacket device and the modular communicator under instruction of the jacket controller, a user interface mounted on the housing and coupled with the jacket controller for performing on-line communication functions via the modem, and for performing at least one off-line activity via the jacket controller, and a usage monitor mounted in the housing and coupled with the jacket controller for monitoring off-line activity usage, wherein the jacket controller notifies the communicator controller when the amount of off-line usage monitored by the usage monitor exceeds a pre-designated threshold, and wherein the communicator controller instructs the modem to transmit an off-line usage report to a remote computer. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280143 | System, Apparatus for Content Delivery for Internet Traffic and Methods Thereof - In one embodiment, a method of serving media includes receiving a delivery log of traffic use after every first time interval for an user equipment. The user equipment is part of a hot billing class of users. The traffic use comprises data usage by the user equipment during communication with a media server in a layer2 access network. A user traffic information computed from the delivery log is transmitted to a billing center. A account status information is received from the billing center. The account status information is received if the user equipment exceeds a user account metric. A session termination information based on the account status information is transmitted. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280144 | REDUCING IDLE MODE POWER CONSUMPTION FOR MONITORING NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS - A method for reducing idle mode power consumption is disclosed. An idle mode is entered. A neighboring base station is selected. If the selected neighboring base station is assigned a high-frequency monitoring mode, a signal strength of the neighboring base station is measured. A low-frequency monitoring mode is assigned to the selected neighboring base station if the signal strength of the selected neighboring base station has been below a power threshold for longer than a time threshold. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280145 | Loop detecting device, system, method and program - A loop detecting device is provided which is capable of detecting a loop packet or a loop flow with less processing load. A sorting means | 11-17-2011 |
20110280146 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR RECEIVE POWER ESTIMATION IN A MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for estimating a received signal power of a first transmission channel at a receiving node in a communications system wherein a received signal comprises information transmitted by a transmitting node over at least two transmission channels. The received signal power of a second of the at least two transmission channels is measured, and together with an estimate of the relationship between the transmission power of the second transmission channel and the transmission power of the first transmission channel; the measurement of the received signal power is used in estimating the received signal power of the first transmission channel. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280147 | Front-End Module and Method for Testing a Front-End Module - For simpler and more rapid testing of a front-end module, additional linked operating states are provided in the switch and/or its decoder and allow a plurality of paths to be enabled in parallel, in order in this way to test these paths with a smaller number of test routines in a test set, in particular a network analyzer. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280148 | ADAPTIVE SENSITIVITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method of accommodating aberrant behavior in wireless devices in a wireless network includes the steps of establishing communication with at least one wireless device, monitoring signals received from the at least one wireless device, determining characteristics of the at least one wireless device based on the monitored signals, comparing the determined characteristics with prescribed characteristics for wireless devices exhibiting aberrant behavior and altering settings to accommodate the at least one wireless device, when the determined characteristics match the prescribed characteristics. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280149 | PACKET CAPTURE SYSTEM, PACKET CAPTURE METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Measuring devices are connected to the same network. A sharing control processing unit controls sharing of capture of packets among the measuring devices. An aggregating unit collects the captured packets. Each measuring device notifies the sharing control processing unit of a state about its capture. The sharing control processing unit determines which measuring device is to start/stop the capture, according to a predetermined rule and the notified state. When determining that the capture is to be switched from a first measuring device to a second measuring device, the sharing control processing unit instructs the second measuring device to start the capture. After receiving a notification that the second measuring device has actually captured a packet(s), the sharing control processing unit instructs the first measuring device to stop the capture. The aggregating unit identifies a duplicate packet(s) double captured by the first and second measuring devices, and reconstructs the packets. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286340 | REMOTE CONTROL OF TRANSMITTER-SIDE RATE ADAPTATION - In general, this disclosure is directed to techniques for remotely controlling a transmitter-side rate adaptation algorithm. According to one aspect, a method includes detecting, with a receiver device, that a packet received from a transmitter is corrupted. The method further includes sending, with the receiver device, a positive acknowledgement for the packet to the transmitter in response to at least detecting that the packet is corrupted. According to another aspect, a method includes determining, with a receiver device, a targeted outcome for a rate adaptation algorithm performed by a transmitter. The method further includes using, with the receiver device, positive acknowledgements to remotely control the rate adaptation algorithm performed by the transmitter based on at least the targeted outcome. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286341 | System and Method for Spatial Multiplexing for Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission - A system and method for spatial multiplexing for coordinated multi-point transmission are provided. A method for communications device operations includes receiving transmissions from at least two access points, measuring channels between the communications device and each of the at least two access points based on the received transmissions, computing beamforming weights based on the measured channels, and transmitting the beamforming weights to the at least two access points. The computing is based on attempting to maximize a capacity of a communications system containing the communications device and the at least two access points with the beamforming weights, and the beamforming weights are used at the at least two access points to beamform transmissions to the communications device using coordinated multi-point transmission. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286342 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ROUTE PACKETS IN A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus to route packets in a network are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes receiving a packet in a packet aggregator, accessing a forwarding table to determine a router within a router array to which the packet is to be forwarded, transmitting the packet to the determined router via a first interface of the packet aggregator, identifying a second interface within the router to which the packet is to be forwarded, forwarding the packet from the router via the second interface to a virtual interface within the packet aggregator, and statically forwarding the packet from the packet aggregator to a destination based on the virtual interface that received the packet. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286343 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DUAL MODE COMMUNICATION - Wi-Fi setup application and path switching applications are provided to allow commands received from native applications of the UE to be redirected to a Wi-Fi engine. The Wi-Fi engine supports circuit switched and packet switched services over a Wi-Fi connection, thus allowing commands received from native applications on a UE to connect the user to either a wireless unlicensed communication system or a wireless licensed communication system. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286344 | Wireless Communication System for Controlling Qualities of Experience, and Gateway - When a terminal switches systems, if many users have their terminals already connected to destination wireless communication system and the resource use rate of destination system is high, other users have to reduce resources to meet a QoS to be delivered to the user. When resource allocation is controlled based on QoS, the resources are controlled for meeting a requested QoS. Therefore, even if a larger magnitude of a resource than a necessary magnitude thereof is allocated based on radio environment, there is no way of reducing the resource. This situation deteriorates the performance of the systems. An access point or a gateway is provided with a facility that measures a quality of experience (QoE), which a user perceives for an application, for system switching. The QoE of the user concerned and a QoE of whole systems are calculated. If the QoEs are improved, the systems are switched. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286345 | Method of determination of transmission quality of a communication link between a transmitter and a receiver and corresponding apparatus - The invention proposes a method and apparatus for determination of transmission quality of a communication link between a transmitter and a receiver. Among others, the invention allows to determine the transmission quality of a communication link between a transmitter and a receiver by a tier device, for example a transmission quality testing or monitoring device. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286346 | MEASUREMENT OF RECEIVED POWER AND RECEIVED QUALITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatuses for wireless communications. According to certain aspects, a set of protected resources, allocated to a base station of a first cell, that are protected by restricting transmissions of a second cell is determined and received power of a first reference signal from the base station in the set of resources is measured. According to certain aspects, a subset of one or more neighbor base stations that have reduced interference in a set of protected resources is determined and received power measurements for the subset of neighbor cells is excluded when calculating receive signal quality measurements for the subframe. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286347 | UE Based Conditional Enabling of ULTD - In a communication system, user equipment (UE) conditionally performs uplink transmit diversity (ULTD) either by Switched Antenna Transmit Diversity (SATD) or Beamforming Transmit Diversity (BFTD) using a first antenna and a second antenna. Either a serving node or the UE determines that uplink transmit diversity is conditionally authorized. Either a serving node or the UE measures a value. The UE transmits using ULTD in response to determining that an enabling condition based on the value is satisfied. The UE can also disable uplink transmit diversity in response to determining that a disabling condition based on the value is satisfied. The disabling condition comprises a disabling threshold that equals the enabling condition comprising an enabling threshold with a threshold adjustment for hysteresis. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286348 | Quality-deteriorated part analyzing system, quality-deteriorated part analyzing device, quality-deteriorated part analyzing method, and quality-deteriorated part analyzing program - Provided is a quality-deteriorated part analyzing system capable of analyzing a quality-deteriorated part in a network while increasing the degree of freedom of precision (coverage ratio, sectioning divisions, etc.) independently of the number and installation locations of devices transmitting and receiving flows. Path calculation means | 11-24-2011 |
20110286349 | Method and System for User Equipment Location Determination on a Wireless Transmission System - Neighbor cell hearability can be improved by including an additional reference signal that can be detected at a low sensitivity and a low signal-to-noise ratio, by introducing non-unity frequency reuse for the signals used for a time difference of arrival (TDOA) measurement, e.g., orthogonality of signals transmitted from the serving cell sites and the various neighbor cell sites. The new reference signal, called the TDOA-RS, is proposed to improve the hearability of neighbor cells in a cellular network that deploys 3GPP EU-TRAN (LTE) system, and the TDOA-RS can be transmitted in any resource blocks (RB) for POSCH and/or MBSFN subframe, regardless of whether the latter is on a carrier supporting both PMCH and POSCH or not. Besides the additional TDOA-RS reference signal, an additional synchronization signal (TDOA-sync) may also be included to improve the hearability of neighbor cells. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286350 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - Exemplary embodiments increase reliability of communication over a non-deterministic communication channel, in electric power systems. A communication channel is monitored based on regular network traffic, by evaluating messages or data packets carrying real-time operational data as a payload. A permanent determination of a channel quality, including appropriate alarming in case the channel quality is found insufficient, is based on an evaluation, at a receiving node, of data packets continually transmitted by a sending node. These continually or repeatedly transmitted data packets can include identical payloads reflecting current states rather than state changes as operational data. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286351 | System and Methods for Making Channel Assignments to Reduce Interference and Increase Capacity of Wireless Networks - There is disclosed a system and method for improving wireless system capacity by reducing collisions where the Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) is high in systems having a channel reuse of 1. By ordering the channel assignment in each of the interfering cells according to a pattern, for example, according to the distance from a base station (determined by power levels), the mobile stations will become paired on the same channel in a manner to reduce interference between them. In one embodiment, this intelligent assignment is accomplished by assigning mobile stations in one cell such that the mobile station having the strongest signal is assigned channel. A while in the interfering cell the mobile station with the weakest signal is assigned to channel A. In another embodiment, certain preferred mobile stations are assigned either interference-free channels or channels paired with weak interference mobile stations. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286352 | WIRELESS DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISCRIMINATING RADAR TRANSMISSIONS FROM WIRELESS NETWORK TRANSMISSIONS AND WIRELESS NETWORK HAVING RADAR-AVOIDANCE CAPABILITY - The disclosure provides a wireless device for use in a wireless network, systems and methods for identifying radar signals and for giving the wireless network a radar-avoidance capability. In one embodiment, the wireless device includes: (1) a pulse analyzer configured to make a determination whether a received pulse is a radar pulse and not a wireless network pulse and (2) a pulse reporter coupled to the pulse analyzer and configured to generate, if the determination is positive, a report thereof for transmission over the wireless network to a central aggregation node thereof. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286353 | CQI REPORTING FOR MIMO TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for determining and reporting channel quality indicator (CQI) information are described. A user equipment (UE) may determine a transmit power per channelization code, P | 11-24-2011 |
20110286354 | RESOURCE STATE MONITORING METHOD, DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A resource state monitoring method, device and communication network are provided. The method includes: acquiring network event state information of a node in a network running process, detecting a data plane resource state of the node and a control plane resource state of the node when it determines that the network event state information of the node meets a resource state detection triggering condition, and reporting a detection result to a management plane of the node. The device includes an acquiring unit, a checking unit, a triggering unit, a detecting unit and a reporting unit. The network includes several nodes, a communication control device and a resource state monitoring device. | 11-24-2011 |
20110292815 | METHOD AND TERMINATION NODE FOR BUNDLING MULTIPLE MESSAGES INTO A PACKET - The invention relates to a method and a termination node for bundling multiple messages into a packet having a predetermined maximum size. The total size of messages received from an upper layer is checked if it is large enough to fill the maximum-sized packet. If not, the receipt of further messages is waited for a bundling delay time and if the bundling delay time has expired the messages received during said delay time are bundled into the packet. In order to ensure primarily a maximal bundling efficiency and secondarily a lowest possible delay time for the received messages before they are bundled the bundling delay time is calculated in response to an average arrival rate and an average size of the previously received messages such that the bundling delay time corresponds to an average time to fill the packet of the predetermined maximum size. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292816 | CONFIGURABLE RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL STRUCTURE FOR RANGE EXTENSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method involving a configurable random access channel structure. One embodiment of the method includes generating a random access channel burst that includes a cyclic prefix and a selected number of repetitions of a preamble. The number of repetitions is selected based on at least one of a cell radius and a radio transmission frequency. This embodiment of the method also includes transmitting the random access channel burst over an air interface. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292817 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PREEMPTIVE BACKOFF FOR MEDIUM ACCESS IN WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKS - A method of operating a wireless device is provided in which a number of neighboring nodes is estimated, a medium access priority to access a communication resource in a current timeslot is determined, and whether to transmit a scheduling control signal in the current timeslot is determined based on the number of neighboring nodes and the medium access priority. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292818 | SMART TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION - Embodiments of the invention include an apparatus, method, and computer program for collecting and analyzing network traffic flow records. The method includes, in one example, receiving a plurality of flow records which include data about traffic in a network. The method may further include caching the plurality of flow records in temporary storage, analyzing the plurality of flow records to determine a number of bytes of traffic that each of the plurality of flow records represents, and selecting a subset of the plurality of flow records to forward to permanent storage based on the determined number of bytes of each of the flow records. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292819 | TWO-WAY RANGING MESSAGING SCHEME - In a two-way ranging scheme where a first apparatus (e.g., device) determines a distance to a second apparatus (e.g., device), specified packets are sent between these apparatuses at specified times to facilitate the determination of the distance. In some aspects, these packets may be defined and/or sent in a manner that enables the apparatuses to detect a leading edge of a received packet with a high degree of accuracy. For example, an apparatus may transmit a packet a defined period of time after transmitting or receiving another packet. In addition, a packet may comprise a defined symbol sequence that is used by an apparatus that receives the packet to identify a leading edge of the packet. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292820 | TWO-WAY RANGING MESSAGING SCHEME - In a two-way ranging scheme where a first apparatus (e.g., device) determines a distance to a second apparatus (e.g., device), specified packets are sent between these apparatuses at specified times to facilitate the determination of the distance. In some aspects, these packets may be defined and/or sent in a manner that enables the apparatuses to detect a leading edge of a received packet with a high degree of accuracy. For example, an apparatus may transmit a packet a defined period of time after transmitting or receiving another packet. In addition, a packet may comprise a defined symbol sequence that is used by an apparatus that receives the packet to identify a leading edge of the packet. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292821 | Service-Based Inter-Radio Access Technology (INTER-RAT) Handover - In geographical areas with incomplete Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) coverage, it may be beneficial for a multimode User Equipment (UE) to handover to a GSM network, a WCDMA network, a CDMA 1x RTT network, or an LTE network. When multiple networks are available to the UE and a poor signal quality is detected in the TD-SCDMA network, one of the available networks may be selected for inter-RAT handover based on a service type of the active call on the UE. For example, when a circuit-switched call, such as a voice call, is in progress on the UE, an inter-RAT handover to a GSM network occurs. In another example, when a packet-switched call, such as a data call, is in progress on the UE, an inter-RAT handover to a WCDMA network occurs. Selecting a network for inter-RAT handover based on an active call service type improves the service provided to the UE. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292822 | GATHERING DATA ON CELLULAR DATA COMMUNICATION CHARACTERISTICS - A method for collecting data that can be used to characterize the performance of a wireless communications system is disclosed. The method comprises determining data characterizing a wireless data communication that occurs between an internet service provider and a data collection system. The data collection system comprises a data exchanger and a routing device through which communications can be routed between client devices and an internet via the internet service provider. The routing device includes a memory. The routing device collects the data and stores the data in the memory of the routing device. A system for collecting data is also disclosed. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292823 | SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL (SRS) IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK (HETNET) WITH TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING (TDM) PARTITIONING - Methods and apparatus for uplink (UL) radio link monitoring (RLM) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) heterogeneous network (HetNet) with enhanced inter-cell interference coordination (eICIC) are described. Various options are presented in an effort to transmit a sounding reference signal (SRS) of a user equipment device (UE) served by a Node B in the HetNet, avoiding both interference from UL transmissions from other UEs being served by neighboring Node Bs and collisions with the UE's own channel quality information (CQI) or physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), for example. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292824 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO LINK SYNCHRONIZATION DETERMINING METHOD - While a mobile station apparatus is receiving a plurality of frequency bands, effective determinations of wireless link synchronization can be achieved. The mobile station apparatus measures the reception qualities of a plurality of different downlink frequency band signals (DL_CC | 12-01-2011 |
20110292825 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL IN DOWNLINK MIMO SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting a-reference signals for measuring a channel in a downlink MIMO (Multi Input Multi Output) system The method comprises the steps of: configuring, by a base station at which N | 12-01-2011 |
20110292826 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION POWER - A method of transmitting signals from a transmitter of a wireless communication system comprises determining each transmission power of a first signal and a second signal; if the difference Y in transmission power between the first signal and the second signal exceeds a predetermined value X, adjusting at least one of the transmission powers of the first signal or the second signal so as not to allow the difference in adjusted transmission power to exceed the predetermined value; and simultaneously transmitting the first signal and the second signal to a receiver using the adjusted transmission power. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292827 | METHOD FOR DEMODULATING DATA AND DEMODULATING APPARATUS BASED ON A DOWNLINK TRANSMIT DIVERSITY MODE IN A LTE SYSTEM - A demodulating method and a demodulating apparatus at a receiver based on a downlink transmit diversity mode in a LTE system are provided by the present invention. The method includes: dividing received data from sub-carriers of each receiving antenna based on a transmit diversity mode into multiple groups of received data according to numbers of antennas of a transmitter and a receiver; performing an independent demodulation on each group of the multiple groups of received data separately according to a demodulation algorithm of two-port transmitting and single-port receiving, so as to obtain a corresponding group of demodulated data; and for multiple groups of demodulated data corresponding to same transmitted data, performing a maximum ratio combination on the multiple groups of demodulated data according to a channel condition corresponding to each group of the multiple groups of demodulated data, so as to obtain a corresponding final demodulated data value. The demodulating method and the demodulating apparatus of the present invention can ensure the performance of the system adopting the diversity algorithm in situations of various kinds of antenna configurations, reduce cost and the complexity of devices in a practical application, and is very easy for project implementation. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292828 | Network System and Electronic Apparatus - This network system includes a plurality of electronic apparatuses having a communication function capable of establishing a network selectively employing a channel available on coaxial wiring and is formed to reestablish the network if a management apparatus managing the network determines that communication quality of the channel is deteriorated. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292829 | ADAPTIVE MODULATION FOR FIXED WIRELESS LINK IN CABLE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - In one embodiment of a communications network, the predetermined encoding scheme and symbol constellation configurations are chosen so that the range in channel qualities that the encoding scheme and symbol constellation configurations are designed to be utilized within overlap with each other. This overlapping provides hysteresis, which reduces the frequency with which a subscriber must alter encoding scheme and symbol constellations. Reducing the frequency of changing encoding scheme and/or symbol constellation eliminates the communication overhead associated with these changes and increases throughput by enabling the subscriber to spend more time transmitting data. | 12-01-2011 |
20110299408 | Dynamic Channel and Transmission Rate Selection - Dynamic channel and transmission rate selection is described. In an example, a communication resource for transmitting data to a receiver is selected from several channels, each having several associated rates. The selection comprises storing a weighting factor for each channel/rate combination, monitoring transmission performance on a selected channel and rate, and inferring performance for other rates on the selected channel from the monitored performance. Each weighting factor is then updated using the monitored and inferred performances, and used to select a channel/rate combination for subsequent transmission. In another example, a communication device comprises a transmitter, a processor, and a memory arranged to store a weighting factor associated with each receiver, channel and rate combination. The transmitter sends data to a receiver using one channel and rate, and the processor monitors the performance, updates the weighting factors accordingly, and selects a receiver, channel and rate combination for subsequent transmission. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299409 | REACHABILITY DETECTION IN TRILL NETWORKS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for testing reachability between two nodes within a network. During operation, the system transmits a network-testing request frame from a source node to a destination node, and in response to receiving a network-testing response frame corresponding to the request frame, the system determines reachability of the destination node. The network-testing request or response frame is not processed on an Internet Protocol (IP) layer. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299410 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING QUALITY OF SERVICE VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for managing quality of service via a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, a broadband gateway that supports one or more first QoS protocols may determine, based on communications with a plurality of communication devices, whether each of the plurality of communication devices supports the one or more first QoS protocols. The gateway may communicate a result of the determination to a content provider and/or service provider. In this manner, the content provider and/or service provider may determine whether to utilize one or more second QoS protocols to deliver content to a particular one of said plurality of communication devices based on whether said particular of communication devices based on whether said particular one of said plurality of communication devices supports the one or more first QoS protocols. The gateway may be operable to map between QoS protocols. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299411 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTENT AGGREGATION VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway determines network channel conditions for a requested service and identifies a user profile for a requesting device. The broadband gateway negotiates a service profile for the requested service with the at least one network access service provider based on the determined network conditions and the identified user profile. Content may be acquired and received for the requested service from the at least one network access service provider utilizing the negotiated service profile. The broadband gateway aggregates and assembles the received content. The resulting assembled content is communicated to the requesting device for the requested service. The broadband gateway may relay content among peer devices. Content conversion may be performed during the relay communication to match user profiles of subsequent peer devices. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299412 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A BROADBAND GATEWAY TO PROVIDE ENERGY EFFICIENT MANAGEMENT IN A HOME NETWORK - A broadband gateway may provide energy management service within a home network. The energy management service may enable reducing and/or enhancing energy consumption within the home network. The energy management service may comprise managing one or more devices in the home network by the broadband gateway. The energy management service may be performed based on energy-related information associated with devices, and the information may be stored by the broadband gateway. At least some of the energy-related information may be acquired from the managed devices. The energy management service may comprise controlling and/or configuring the managed devices, and/or communications between the managed devices within the home network. The broadband gateway may track actual energy usage by the managed devices. Information corresponding to energy-related activities and/or usage may be displayed via a user interface. The information may also be reported to entities external to the home network. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299413 | PORT PROFILE MANAGEMENT FOR VIRTUAL CLUSTER SWITCHING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch system. The switch includes a port profile which specifies a set of port configuration information. During operation, a control mechanism within the switch detects a source MAC address of an incoming frame and determines that the MAC address is associated with the port profile. The control mechanism then applies the port profile to a switch port on which the frame is received. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299414 | PRESERVING QUALITY OF SERVICE ACROSS TRILL NETWORKS - Systems and techniques for processing and/or forwarding packets are described. An ingress switch can use a QoS mapping mechanism to map a first set of Quality of Service (QoS) bits in a packet received from a customer to a second set of QoS bits for use in a Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) packet which encapsulates the packet. The first set of QoS bits can be different from the second set of QoS bits. The TRILL packet can be processed and/or forwarded in the network based on the second set of QoS bits. At the egress switch, the TRILL packet can be decapsulated and the original packet with the original QoS bits (or QoS bits that are different from the original QoS bits) can be forwarded to the customer's network. In this manner, some embodiments of the present invention can preserve the QoS bits across a TRILL network. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299415 | Method and user equipment for acquiring random access information - The present invention discloses a method and User Equipment (UE) for acquiring random access information. The method comprises: during a random access procedure, the UE measures and acquires parameter information in the random access procedure; and after the success of the random access, the UE reports partial or all of acquired parameter information to a base station. According to the present invention, the base station can optimize the random access according to the parameter information reported by the terminal, thereby improving the precision of the random access optimization. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299416 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OPTIMIZING A RADIO LINK - Optimizing a radio link is done by acquiring at least OSI layer one and two performance measurements, determining an optimum setting collection for at least OSI layer three to a top layer, then configuring at least the OSI layer three to the top layer based upon the optimum setting collection. The top layer is at least OSI layer four. The invention includes optimized radio links, methods of making optimized radio links, revenue generating making optimized radio links by providing means for optimizing the radio link. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299417 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND OPERATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments for bandwidth allocation methods, detecting interference with other systems, and/or redeploying in alternate bandwidth are described. Higher bandwidth channels may be deployed at channel boundaries ( | 12-08-2011 |
20110299418 | ON-LINE WEB ACCESSED ENERGY METER - An electrical metering system capable of performing multiple metering functions, collecting data, and wirelessly provides the collected metering data to a utility operator. In the electrical metering system, at least one computing device for initiating a request for data. A first modem connects the computing device to an infrastructure. A wireless embedded modem for wirelessly connects an electric meter to an infrastructure, and the wireless electric modem receives a request from the computing device and wirelessly transmits the metering data to the computing device, thereby initiating the request. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299419 | OPEN PLATFORM ARCHITECTURE FOR INTEGRATING MULTIPLE HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK FUNCTIONS - A platform for seamlessly hosts a plurality of disparate types of packet processing applications. One or more applications are loaded onto a service card on the platform. A programmable path structure is included that maps a logical path for processing of the packets through one or more of the plurality of service cards according to characteristics of the packets. Multiple path structures may be programmed into the platform to offer different service paths for different types of packets. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299420 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM FOR CALCULATING ADDRESSING AND BANDWIDTH REQUIREMENTS OF A NETWORK - Apparatuses, methods and computer-readable storage mediums are provided for calculating estimated addressing and bandwidth requirements of a customer domain, such as to facilitate designing the respective domain. A method includes selecting customer premises equipment (CPE) of a domain including a plurality of CPEs, where each CPE includes one or more devices, and one of the one or more devices include an interface with which the domain communicates with the respective CPE. The method also includes determining if the interface of the selected CPE comprises a router, and calculating an addressing requirement of the selected CPE, where the addressing requirement includes a number of device addresses for the selected CPE. The method may additionally or alternatively include analyzing traffic patterns of the selected CPE with respect to one or more other CPEs, and based on the analysis, calculating a bandwidth requirement of the selected CPE. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299421 | METHOD FOR REPORTING AND ACCUMULATING DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for coordinating communication in a wireless sensor network may include a plurality of nodes, such as routers, edge nodes, data accumulators and/or gateways. Time management functions, such as determining an elapsed time, may be controlled based on a detected temperature, e.g., a temperature detected at a node, and/or based on a detected clock skew between two or more clocks in two or more different devices. Accurate time management may allow for devices to more accurately coordinate communication instances, e.g., communication that occurs at periodic wake up times. A cluster head, such as a data accumulator, may be associated with a network after its initial formation and cause nodes in the network to alter their hierarchy in the network, thereby making the cluster head accumulator a parent to nodes in the network. Nodes having a relatively lower hop count may have a higher battery capacity than nodes having a higher hop count. | 12-08-2011 |
20110305145 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING TRANSMISSIONS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A communication system comprises a communication node for scheduling uplink and downlink transmissions in a communication system. The communication node determines based on a first set of parameters of a data associated with the communication node and a second set of parameters of a data associated with one other communication node, whether to load the data associated with the communication node from an end of a data queue buffer. The communication node upon determining to load the data associated with the communication node from the end of the data queue buffer, loads the data associated with the communication node from the end of the data queue buffer. The communication node further determines a start time for transmission of the data associated with the communication node and schedules transmission of the data associated with the communication node at the start time. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305146 | Carrier Signals For Synchronization - Disclosed herein are methods and systems that may help a WiMAX base station function without a GPS signal by providing a high-stability reference signal via a subcarrier of a broadcast signal, such as an FM radio signal. An exemplary broadcast station may therefore be configured to phase-lock a subcarrier signal to a GPS signal, and include this subcarrier in its broadcast signal, thereby providing the subcarrier signal for use by a base station as a high-stability reference signal for local-oscillator stabilization at the base station. The broadcast station may further modulate a timing signal onto the subcarrier signal. An exemplary base station may therefore receive the broadcast signal, decode the broadcast signal to acquire the subcarrier signal, and use the subcarrier signal to stabilize its local oscillator, rather than using a GPS signal. The base station may further demodulate the subcarrier to acquire the timing signal, which the base station may use for frame-start synchronization, instead of a GPS signal. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305147 | METHOD, NETWORK, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT FOR FLOW BASED QUALITY OF SERVICE - A method, network, and computer program product are provided for traffic flow quality of service. A quality of service priority table is received for services defined by a user at the network, and the quality of service priority table includes quality of service levels for the services. Traffic flows are determined to correspond to packets being communicated over the network for the user. The traffic flows are mapped to services. The traffic flows are mapped to the quality of service levels for the services. The quality of service levels are assigned to the traffic flows as assigned quality of service levels corresponding to the services. Each of the traffic flows is routed over the network according to its assigned quality of service levels, respectively. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305148 | OPPORTUNISTIC CONCURRENT TRANSMISSION METHOD OF WIRELESS NETWORK AND WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM USING THE SAME - Provided is an opportunistic concurrent transmission method for achieving efficient transmission with limited wireless resources in a WLAN environment. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, when a packet to be transmitted is provided in an access point in a wireless network system, information on a link which is performing transmission from another access point is acquired by overhearing transmission from another access point, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value of the link is verified by referring an interference map, and the packet is concurrently transmitted when the verified SINR value is equal to or more than a predetermined capture threshold. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305149 | METHOD FOR TIME AWARE INLINE REMOTE MIRRORING - A method of monitoring packet traffic is provided. The method includes: at a first access point, capturing portions of traffic packets passing therethrough separated by time intervals; encapsulating the portions of traffic packets thereby forming encapsulated packets and adding timestamps to the encapsulated packets so as to preserve the portions of traffic packets and information related to the time intervals; transmitting the encapsulated packets over a network; decapsulating the encapsulated packets so as to obtain replay packets and the capture timestamps, wherein the replay packets include the portions of the traffic packets; and, transmitting the replay packets separated by the time intervals, wherein the timestamps are used to reproduce the time intervals so as to imitate the traffic packets passing through the first access point. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305150 | METHOD OF REMOTE ACTIVE TESTING OF A DEVICE OR NETWORK - A test device includes a packet input receiver for receiving encapsulated packets from a network; a packet reader for extracting timing information from the encapsulated packets, and for decapsulating encapsulated packets so as to obtain test packets; a FIFO queue for storing the test packets; a packet controller for reading the test packets from the FIFO queue and writing the test packets into a de-jitter buffer in accordance with the timing information, the de-jitter buffer for storing the reordered test packets; and, a packet output generator for providing the test packets to a target device wherein time intervals between the test packets are reproduced using the timing information. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305151 | APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PACKET - A packet transmitting apparatus including a receiving unit for receiving a packet; a determining unit for determining whether an elapsed time t is longer than a first threshold time X·T | 12-15-2011 |
20110305152 | RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station (eNB) includes: a calculation unit ( | 12-15-2011 |
20110305153 | METHOD FOR DESIGNATING A DUAL REGION - A method for designating a dual region according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: enabling a terminal which is in communication with a first network to calculate a channel state threshold value corresponding to data; comparing the channel state value of the first network and the channel state value of the second network, acquired using a pilot signal of a second network, with the channel state threshold value; calculating a network evaluation score of the first network; comparing the network evaluation score of the first network with a network evaluation threshold value for designating a dual region, if the channel state value of the first network and the channel state value of the second network are larger than the channel state threshold value; and determining whether to designate a dual region in accordance with the result of the comparison using the network evaluation threshold value. The method of the present invention can reduce service cutoff or delay time during inter-radio access. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305154 | Transmitting a First and a Second Channel Quality Information Between Two Network Elements - It is described a method for transmitting channel quality information between a second network element and a first network element. The method includes (a) dividing a range of possible radio channel qualities between the two network elements into a fixed number of quality classes, (b) measuring the quality of a radio channel between the two network elements, (c) selecting one quality class out of the fixed number of quality classes based on the measured quality of the radio channel, (d) transmitting from the second network element to the first network element a first channel quality information being indicative for the selected quality class, and (e) transmitting from the second network element to the first network element a second channel quality information being indicative for the measured quality within the limits of the selected quality class. It is further described the first and the second network element, which in conjugation with each other are adapted to carry out the described method. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305155 | RADIO APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Each of a plurality of frequencies defines a combination of at least one uplink from among a plurality of types of uplink radio access, and at least one downlink from among a plurality of types of downlink radio access. A base station ( | 12-15-2011 |
20110305156 | Method and Apparatus for Determining Channel Bandwidth - In a method implemented in a first communication device, a control frame having a bandwidth is generated. The control frame is transmitted via a first composite communication channel, wherein the first composite communication channel comprises a plurality of communication channels. A bandwidth of a response frame, received from a second communication device in response to transmitting the control frame, is determined. A second composite communication channel based on the bandwidth of the response frame is determined, wherein the second composite communication channel comprises at least one communication channel from the plurality of communication channels. One or more data frames are transmitted to the second communication device via the second composite communication channel. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305157 | Method and Apparatus for Preamble Reduction - A method of reducing resource overhead attributed to preambles in a communication system includes transmitting, at a transmitter, one or more signals including a first packet. The first packet is transmitted in a first time-frequency grant including a first set of one or more subcarriers. The first packet includes a full preamble including reference signal information for determining a total channel estimate for every subcarrier to be used in transmission of the first packet. A second packet is transmitted in a second time-frequency grant including a second set of one or more subcarriers without a full preamble when a receiver configured to communicate with the transmitter can determine a phase offset between the transmitter and the receiver from the signals received at the receiver. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305158 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING MULTICAST RESOURCE ALLOCATION INFORMATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving multicast resource allocation information in a communication system are provided. In the communication system, a base station transmits the multicast resource allocation information to a mobile station, wherein the multicast resource allocation information includes a Group IDentifier (ID) of a group which should receive multicast resource allocation information on multicast resources through which a multicast data burst is to be transmitted, a Resource Index indicating a location and a size of allocated multicast resources, and a Long Transmission Time Interval Indicator (Long_TTI_Indicator) indicating a number of Advanced Air Interface (AAI) subframes spanned by the allocated multicast resources. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305159 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MEASUREMENTS IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL - A method is provided for controlling measurements in a wireless telecommunications terminal. In a Long Term Evolution (LTE) wireless communication system, the network instructs a UE to measure the received power and quality of the reference signals of the serving cell as well as of neighbor cells. The object of improving the system power consumption of user equipment (UE) that has to perform such measurements is solved by distributing the measurement functionality between RRC and PHY layers such that the RRC layer is enabled to rest in a power save mode unless results of the measurements have to be reported to the network, and to be only active for a minimum to ensure that the UE still behaves standard compliant to the network. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305160 | SYSTEM, DEVICE, AND TERMINAL FOR RESOLVING AN OBFUSCATED NETWORK ADDRESS OF A NETWORK DEVICE WITHIN A NETWORK - A system for identifying a network device includes a local area network (“LAN”), an external network, one or more network devices, a packet-modifying device, a monitoring device, a data store, and an analysis terminal. Each network device is configured for having a network address and to communicate with the LAN. The packet-modifying device is coupled to the LAN and the external network and has an external-network network address. The monitoring device generates identifying information of the network device when communicating with the external network via the packet-modifying device. The monitoring device configures the identifying information to identify the obfuscated network address of the network device. The data store stores the identifying information. The analysis terminal is coupled to the data store and is adapted to resolve the network address of the network device upon receiving an alert regarding the network address obfuscated by the packet-modifying device. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305161 | CSI Reporting on PUSCH for Carrier Aggregation - Carrier aggregation allows concurrent transmission on multiple component carriers (CC) to increase the data rate. A user equipment (UE) device in a cellular network provides periodic or aperiodic channel state information of the DL channel to a base station (eNB) for each of the aggregated CCs. The UE receives two or more reference signals corresponding to two or more aggregated CCs from an eNB. The UE computes a plurality of channel state information (CSI) reports for each of two or more aggregated CCs derived from the two or more reference signals. The UE receives a positive CSI request from the eNB for a CSI report and transmits CSI feedback to the eNB comprising one or more CSI reports selected from the plurality of CSI reports. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305162 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (AS AMENDED) - While directional communication using millimeter waves is realized, the number of communication stations through which simultaneous communication is possible is increased to increase the throughput of the entire system. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305163 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio base station ( | 12-15-2011 |
20110305164 | COOPERATIVE BEAM FORMING METHOD, APPARATUS AND BASE STATION - The present invention proposes a method, device and base station for cooperative beam forming based on MBMS fixed grid of beams GoB. The cooperative beam forming method comprises following steps: grouping users into cell central user group and cell edge user group (S | 12-15-2011 |
20110310749 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RELIABLE COMMUNICATIONS OVER MULTIPLE PACKET RF NETWORKS - The invention is a method and system for mobile communications. A mobile communicator communicates with a network routing center. The communicator monitors each of two or more wireless carriers for a service characteristic. The communicator selects, based on the monitored service characteristic, one of the two or more wireless carriers. The mobile communicator can then communicate with the network routing center using the selected wireless carrier. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310750 | JITTER BUFFER MANAGEMENT FOR POWER SAVINGS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A technique for jitter buffer management for improved power savings in a wireless communication device ( | 12-22-2011 |
20110310751 | Mobile Apparatus Supporting Context Monitoring, Method of Monitoring Context Using the Same and Context Monitoring System Having the Same - A mobile apparatus includes a processing planner and a plan processor. The processing planner generates a plurality of resource use plans in response to a context monitoring query (CMQ) of an application, and selects a final plan satisfying a request of the CMQ among the resource use plans. The plan processor executes the final plan. Accordingly, the mobile apparatus may support resource-efficient context monitoring. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310752 | MULTI-USER MIMO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD USING FEEDBACK INFORMATION - The effective performance metric and achieving method of a multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) communication system are provided. A number of feedback bits of channel information may be determined based on an effective spectral efficiency (ESE). The ESE may correspond to a metric of the throughput performance with respect to a total radio resource including an uplink radio resource and a downlink radio resource. User-scheduling may be based on the feedback information that is based on the ESE, and thus, the throughput performance of the communication system may be enhanced. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310753 | Measurement configuration in multi-carrier OFDMA wireless communication systems - Various measurement configurations and s-Measure mechanism in multi-carrier OFDMA systems are provided. In one embodiment, a user equipment (UE) measures a first reference signal received power (RSRP) level in a primary serving cell (Pcell) over a primary component carrier (PCC). The UE also measures a second RSRP level in a secondary serving cell (Scell) over a secondary component carrier (SCC). The UE compares the first RSRP level with a first s-Measure value and compares the second RSRP level with a second s-Measure value. The UE then enables s-Measure mechanism and stops measuring neighbor cells over the PCC if the first RSRP level is higher than the first s-Measure value. The UE also enables s-Measure mechanism and stops measuring neighbor cells over the SCC if the second RSRP level is higher than the second s-Measure value. By having independent s-Measure mechanism and independent s-Measure value, maximum flexibility is achieved. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310754 | CELL FOR SELF-CONFIGURING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A cell, preferably a stand-alone device, arranged for wireless communication with a plurality of other cells in a communication network, e.g. a TDMA network such as a DECT based network. The cell includes a processor performing a selection algorithm which selects a reference cell among other cells. The selection algorithm bases the selection on a wireless signal, e.g. an RF signal, received from at least two other cells. Further, the cell includes a wireless receiver for receiving a first wireless signal, e.g. an RF signal, from the reference cell with time synchronization information for the reference cell. The cell includes a wireless transmitter which transmits time synchronization information for the cell itself represented in a second wireless signal, e.g. and RF signal. The selection algorithm selects the reference cell based on transmission link quality measurements and cell path information received from a number of cell candidates. The cell preferably also itself transmits cell path information, e.g. at regular intervals. Preferably, the cell can generate a random number and transmit it in wireless form as its cell identity code. A network of such cells can be self-configured, i.e. no manual action is required. Further, it allows changes in network topology, e.g. change of position of one or more cells, since each cell can automatically adapt to a new topology and select the most reliable reference cell to synchronize to. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310755 | METHOD FOR LINK QUALITY ESTIMATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for link quality estimation in a wireless network, is characterized in that nodes of the wireless network perform the steps of sending packets to other nodes, monitoring all packets received from other nodes being located within their communication range, and calculating sent-received ratios with respect to other nodes and deriving thereof a link quality towards the respective nodes. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310756 | NETWORK ELEMENT AND A METHOD OF OPERATING A NETWORK ELEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for determining throughput and data loss between a first network element of a telecommunications network and a second network element of that network. The first and second network elements may include, but are not limited to, a radio base station, a SAE-GW, an RNC, an SGSN or a GGSN, depending on the type of telecommunications network in which the method is employed. Data is exchanged between the first and second network elements in a manner that enables each of the first and second network elements to determine a true value of throughput and/or data loss for a communication link between the first and second network elements. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310757 | METHOD OF SELECTING A DESTINATION NODE, NODE AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A monitoring node periodically transmits an active/inactive monitoring signal to selection target nodes. Upon receipt of the active/inactive monitoring signal, each selection target node calculates a current subscriber accommodated ratio, which is load information, creates an active/inactive monitoring response signal based on the load information, and transmits the active/inactive monitoring response signal to the monitoring node. Upon receipt of the active/inactive monitoring response signal from the selection target node, the monitoring node extracts the load information from the active/inactive monitoring response signal, determines the relevant acquisition ratio based on the load information, and performs the selection procedure of a destination node based on the determined acquisition ratio. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310758 | Method of Resource Assignment for Radio Communication System and Base Station Apparatus - A method for assigning resources of a radio communication system that is aimed at relaxing interference between cells and that is applicable even in the case where femtocell base stations are installed within a macrocell base station area, and a radio base station apparatus. A transmit power limitation that limits an allocatable resource for each subband consisting of one or plural sub-carriers is decided, resource assignment is preformed on a mobile terminal on a subband-by-subband basis by a scheduler so that the transmit power limitation may be satisfied, and the transmit power limitation is altered based on an estimation result of an interference quantity from surrounding cells. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310759 | UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION (UCI) MAPPING INDICATOR FOR LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) CARRIER AGGREGATION - A system and method to instruct a User Equipment (UE) how Uplink Control Information (UCI) on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) should be transmitted with carrier aggregation. A semi-static signaling of a UCI mapping bit (via a Radio Resource Control (RRC) parameter) is used by a base station such as an eNodeB to require the UE to transmit UCI using one of two pre-determined UCI transmission modes. The bit can be decided by the base station, considering, for example, the available bandwidth or quality of different Uplink Component Carriers (UL CCs) associated with the UE. This network-based solution allows the network to either configure a general rule of UCI transmission by the UE or to enforce the UCI transmission on the Uplink Primary cell (UL Pcell). Because of the rules governing abstracts, this abstract should not be used to construe the claims. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310760 | CARRIER AGGREGATION WITH POWER HEADROOM REPORT - Methods, apparatuses, and software can be used for providing power headroom reporting in a telecommunication system. A method can include configuring a user equipment to send a power headroom report control element in uplink, wherein the power headroom report control element includes a bitmap indicating which power headroom reports are being reported. The method can further include receiving the power headroom report control element from the user equipment. The method additionally can include processing the received power headroom report control element based on the configuration of the user equipment. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310761 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING BROADCAST CHANNEL IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - To transmit and receive system information of a base station in a broadband wireless access system, operations of the base station include determining transmission periodicities of a plurality of system information subpackets periodically transmitted in a periodicity of two or more superframes, determining transmission offsets of the subpackets based on the transmission periodicities using a predefined rule for determining a transmission periodicity and a transmission offset, and transmitting the subpackets respectively according to the transmission periodicities and the transmission offsets. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310762 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING COMMUNI-CATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and system for managing communication in a wireless communication network is provided. The method includes receiving a request from a first communication device to establish a first communication channel. A first time slot is assigned to the first communication device to establish the first communication channel. The method then receives a request from a second communication device to establish a second communication channel. Thereafter, the first time slot and a second time slot is simultaneously assigned to the second communication device for establishing the second communication channel. A first value of at least one of a plurality of predefined parameters at the first time slot is below a first threshold value. The first value of the at least one of the plurality of predefined parameters, is then monitored. Thereafter, the method relinquishes the second communication channel established using the second time slot based on the first value. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310763 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR GENERATING AND REPORTING OVERLOAD INDICATOR REPORT - A method and a device for generating and reporting an Overload Indicator (OI) report. A controller jointly carries out conversion of a number system on a binary number used by an OI value in each Physical Resource Block (PRB) group indicated by a set grouping tag value. The controller converts a value generated by the conversion of the number system into a new binary number, and joints the new binary number in each PRB to generate the OI report. The controller carries out the above operations according to all the set grouping tag values, and compares the number of bits occupied by the OI report corresponding to each grouping tag value to select a PRB grouping mode corresponding to the OI report occupying the least number of bits as the OI format of the controller. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310764 | System and Method for Facilitating Network Performance Analysis - A system for facilitating network performance analysis. In an illustrative embodiment, the system includes a first module capable of quantifying network performance associated with a first portion of the network and providing a signal in response thereto. A second module is capable of ascertaining performance degradations in a communications link traversing plural portions of the network that are attributable to the first portion based on the signal. In a more specific embodiment, the second module further includes a third module adapted to ascertain degradations in network performance associated with a second portion of the network based on the signal and based on a performance parameter associated with both the first portion and the second portion of the network. In this embodiment, the first portion includes a wireless portion, and the second portion includes a wired portion. The performance parameter incorporates a Frame Loss Vector (FLV) associated with a communications link that traverses the wireless and wired portions of the network. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310765 | Method for Low Power Radio Operation in a Wireless Packet Network - A system and method allows devices to send and receive packets while using power to do so to the extent needed, thereby conserving power. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310766 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF COMPENSATING FOR CLOCK FREQUENCY AND PHASE VARIATIONS BY PROCESSING PACKET DELAY VALUES - An apparatus and method are described for compensating for frequency and phase variations of electronic components by processing packet delay values. In one embodiment, a packet delay determination module determines packet delay values based on time values associated with a first and a second electronic component. A packet delay selection module selects a subset of the packet delay values based on the maximum frequency drift of the first electronic component. A statistical parameter determination module evaluates a first and a second parameter based on portions of the subset of packet delay values. A validation module validates the parameters when each portion the subset of packet delay values includes a minimum of at least two packet delay values. An adjustment module compensates for at least one of a frequency variation and a phase variation of the first electronic component based on the parameters if the parameters are both validated. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310767 | METHODS OF RF SENSING CONTROL AND DYNAMIC FREQUENCY SELECTION CONTROL FOR COGNITIVE RADIO BASED DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS NETWORK SYSTEMS-COGNITIVE DYNAMIC FREQUENCY HOPPING - This invention relates to cognitive radio based wireless communications of dynamic spectrum access networks, and more particularly to a method of addressing radio frequency sensing control and dynamic frequency selection control. A method called Cognitive Dynamic Frequency Hopping that is based on the selective Simultaneous Sensing and Data Transmissions is described. The Cognitive Dynamic Frequency Hopping method is further facilitated by a collision avoidance technique. The described method satisfies both reliable and timely RF sensing for guaranteeing licensed user protection, and QoS satisfaction for services of the dynamic spectrum access systems. | 12-22-2011 |
20110317566 | DEVICE FOR ANALYZING AND DIAGNOSING NETWORK TRAFFIC, A SYSTEM FOR ANALYZING AND DIAGNOSING NETWORK TRAFFIC, AND A SYSTEM FOR TRACING NETWORK TRAFFIC - A system detects the presence of illegal access attacks. The device for analyzing and diagnosing network traffic divides packets into k (k>0) types based on protocol type and port number, etc., a component observing the number of distinct values of one or more pre-specified fields in packet header for each packet type, for all packets that have transited the observation points in a network, an element observing the number of distinct values of one or more pre-specified fields in the packet payload for each packet type, for all packets that have transited the observation points in a network, and a diagnosis element determining whether the network is abnormal when the number of distinct values observed in fields of each packet type crosses a specified ratio-threshold within a predetermined interval. This enables detection of small-scale DoS attacks with little change in addresses number, improving illegal access detection accuracy. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317567 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A ROUTE METRIC - Machine-readable media, methods, apparatus and system for determining a route metric are described. In some embodiments, a characteristic of a packet to be sent from a node to another node is analyzed. The characteristic of the packet may indicate at least one of a group consisting whether the packet is transmission quality sensitive and whether the packet is transmission throughput sensitive. Then, a weight relationship between a packet loss rate and a data rate may be determined, in which the weight relationship may vary with the characteristic of the packet. A route metric for a route from the node to the another node may be determined based upon the packet loss rate, the data rate and the weight relationship. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317568 | Measuring Network Performance With Reference Packet Probing - A method of measuring network performance is disclosed. A payload packet is transmitted from a sending node to a receiving node via a communication network. A reference packet is transmitted to the receiving node in connection with sending of the payload packet. Receive information related to the payload packet and to the reference packet is generated, at the receiving node. Send information related to the payload packet and to the reference packet is received, by the receiving node. Network performance is estimated by utilizing the send and receive information. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317569 | Method and Apparatus for Device-to-Device Network Coordination - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises broadcasting from a user equipment (UE) having means for device to device (D2D) communication a beacon comprising an OFDM beacon frame comprising a plurality of beacon fields; receiving at least one random access request from at least one neighbor device to trigger handshake signaling for establishment of a D2D connection; responding to one of the at least one random access request with an acknowledgement beacon including at least an identifier of the UE to confirm the D2D connection with the selected neighbor device; discovering available resources; and exchanging said resource information in the handshake signaling with the neighbor devices. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317570 | Iterative Localization Techniques - The present invention refers to iterative localization techniques with wireless communication systems for rural environment with limited number of base stations in the range of the mobile station and urban environment with multipath propagation channel and several base stations in the range of mobile station. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317571 | Method and Apparatus for Data Offloading - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises receiving data dependent offloading parameters at a mobile device, measuring data amount usage of the mobile device, comparing the measured data amount usage to the received data dependent offloading parameters, and determining whether to attempt offloading of data from the mobile device to a complementary network based on the comparison. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317572 | NETWORK THROTTLE METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method for controlling a number of user equipments in a cellular network, the network comprises at least one user equipment ( | 12-29-2011 |
20110317573 | STATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF CHECKING COMMUNICATION PERFORMANCE THEREOF - A station device includes an output unit that outputs a massage, a communication unit that communicates with a wireless access point which is movable from one place to another place, a determination unit that determines current communication performance with the wireless access point, a storage unit that stores the determined current communication performance, and a controller that compares the current communication performance with pre-stored previous communication performance and controls the output unit to output a message according to a result of the comparison. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317574 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SETTING TRANSMITTER POWER LEVELS - The invention relates to a method and system of setting transmitter power levels, particularly in a Local Network Node transmitter, providing a pico cell for private use. A User Equipment (UE) is used to make measurements of the transmission link properties, such as downlink power and round trip time. Based on the measurements made at one or a plurality of locations, the power of the Local Network Node can be determined such that interference is minimized with any overlying cells of a macro-network. Call handovers between the UE and the cell of a macro network can also be arranged based on properties measure by the UE. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317575 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-USER MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT TRANSMISSION - Embodiments of the present invention relate to methods and systems of transmitting data signals from at least one transmitting terminal with a spatial diversity capability to at least two receiving user terminals, each provided with spatial diversity receiving device. The methods and systems are useful, for example, in communication between terminals, e.g., wireless communication. In certain embodiments, transmission can be between a base station and two or more user terminals, wherein the base station and user terminals are each equipped with more than one antenna. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317576 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING A NEIGHBOR CELL LIST FOR A BASE STATION IN A CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for automatically configuring a neighbor cell list, NCL, for a base station in a cellular wireless network, comprises receiving measurement reports for neighbor cells from a plurality of mobile stations. The reports are grouped by the neighbor cell with which each is associated. Neighbor cells are selected for inclusion in the NCL depending on the number of reports in their respective group. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317577 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - Provided are a communication system, a base station apparatus, a mobile station apparatus, and a communication method which can effectively manage measurement information held by a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus in a system comprising a plurality of component carriers. The mobile station apparatus is used in a mobile communication system configured by a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus. For a plurality of cells with the cell having different frequency, a reference cell with respect to an object to be measured is defined as a measurement reference cell when executing a measurement. The mobile station apparatus specifies one or more of the measurement reference cell for the object to be measured and executes a measurement of the object to be measured for the specified one or more of the measurement reference cell. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317578 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SERVICE DATA FROM A SERVER TO A TERMINAL VIA A BASE STATION - A base station transmits service data to a terminal at a first transmission rate. A server transmits the service data to the base station at a second transmission rate required for transmitting the service data. When the second transmission rate exceeds the first transmission rate, the server determines a part of the service data by thinning out the service data so that the part is able to be transmitted to the terminal at the first transmission rate. The server provides the determined part with marking information, and transmits the service data provided with the marking information to the base station at the second transmission rate. The base station extracts the part from the received service data based on the marking information provided for the part, and transmits the extracted part of the service data to the terminal at the first transmission rate. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317579 | SERVER FOR UPDATING LOCATION BEACON DATABASE - A location beacon database and server, method of building location beacon database, and location based service using same. Wi-Fi access points are located in a target geographical area to build a reference database of locations of Wi-Fi access points. At least one vehicle is deployed including at least one scanning device having a GPS device and a Wi-Fi radio device and including a Wi-Fi antenna system. The target area is traversed in a programmatic route to reduce arterial bias. The programmatic route includes substantially all drivable streets in the target geographical area and solves an Eulerian cycle problem of a graph represented by said drivable streets. While traversing the target area, Wi-Fi identity information and GPS location information is detected. The location information is used to reverse triangulate the position of the detected Wi-Fi access point; and the position of the detected access point is recorded in a reference database. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317580 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING AND OPTIMIZING NETWORK PERFORMANCE TO A WIRELESS DEVICE - In one embodiment, a method for monitoring and optimizing network performance to a wireless device that includes determining network performance information of a wireless router and communicating data packets containing the network performance information between said wireless router and a packet network switch. The data packets are communicated from said packet network switch to a network management device. The network management device is configured to instruct the said packet network switch to adjust at least one of encoding/decoding rate and power amount to optimize said network performance to said wireless device. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317581 | RADIO RECEPTION APPARATUS, RADIO TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a case where a second reference signal for a second communication system is transmitted in addition to a first reference signal for a first communication system, resources that affect a reception apparatus compatible only with the first communication system can be minimized, and the throughput can be prevented from being deteriorated. As resources for a reference signal CSI-RS for LTE-A, last half symbols in a time direction of a resource unit RB/Sub-frame defined in a frequency-time domain are used, and the CSI-RS is allocated in a position up to the last two symbols or in the last symbol, or the like, of a particular RB/Sub-frame and transmitted when a reference signal | 12-29-2011 |
20110317582 | MULTI-CELL TRANSMISSION DIVERSITY METHOD AND APPARATUS - A multi-cell transmission diversity method and apparatus that is capable of forming two virtual antennas of each cell and producing orthogonality of the virtual antennas using an improved precoding technique in an OFDM-based cellular mobile communication system is provided for improving transmission diversity gain with coherent combination of the orthogonal signals at the receiver. A multi-cell transmission diversity transmission method of a transmitter according to the present invention includes generating a first signal stream and a second signal stream by performing transmission diversity encoding on a user data; multiplexing and precoding the first signal stream and a first dedicated reference signal into a first diversity signal; multiplexing and precoding the second signal stream and a second dedicated reference signal a second diversity signal; and transmitting the first and second diversity signals simultaneously, wherein the first dedicated reference signal and the second dedicated reference signal are user-specific reference signal signals. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002556 | USER EQUIPMENT TERMINAL, BASE STATION, AND CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION REPORT METHOD - A user equipment terminal for reporting channel quality information to a base station includes a channel quality information measuring unit configured to measure channel quality information; and a channel quality information generating unit configured to generate, as the channel quality information, a difference value between a first absolute value of the measured channel quality information and a second absolute value of previously measured channel quality information. The present invention also relates to a base station and a channel quality information report method. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002557 | Method for Self Organizing Network Operation - The present invention relates to wireless cellular telecommunication networks and, in particular, to control and management of self organizing wireless cellular telecommunication network. A method for network planning and frequency optimization in LTE networks by determining the optimal base station configuration parameters, comprises a base station initialization, an initial base station configuration, an iterative measurement procedure, an optimization process, a verification of operation, and a periodical maintenance procedure. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002558 | PACKET PROTOCOL PROCESSING WITH PRECISION TIMING PROTOCOL SUPPORT - Device and methods determine timing parameters and associated timing actions from timing messages in communication packets. The timing messages may be encapsulated with plurality of communication protocols. An example timing message may be an IEEE 1588 timing message encapsulated in an Internet protocol packet encapsulated in an Ethernet protocol packet. The protocols are matched in classifier blocks by comparing portions of the packet to bit values or ranges of values. Operation of other than the first classifier block depends on results of matching in the preceding block by using offset values passed between blocks that indicate starting points for the matching. The final classifier block matches values in timing messages to identify timing parameters and associated timing actions in the message. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002559 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING TRANSMISSION POWER OF TERMINAL HAVING HETEROGENEROUS MODEM CHIPS - An apparatus according to an embodiment of the invention, the apparatus for detecting transmission power of a first communication scheme in a mobile communication terminal having a first modem for the first communication scheme and a second modem for a second communication scheme which is different from the first communication scheme, includes: a feedback circuit configured to detect a high frequency signal outputted from a power amplifier of the first communication scheme and convert the detected high frequency signal into an analog signal; a reception unit configured to receive the analog signal outputted from the feedback circuit and band information transmitted from the first modem for the first communication scheme; and an output unit configured to output a particular value after comparing a signal outputted from the reception unit and a predetermined signal. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002560 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING AP IN CONSIDERATION OF NETWORK PERFORMANCE - Performance values between an access point (AP) and one or more networks to which the AP is connected are measured, and performance information is generated based on the measured performance values. When a request for the performance information is received from a terminal connected to the AP, the performance information is broadcast to the terminal at a pre-set time to allow the terminal to select an optimum AP based on the received performance information and attempt to access a wireless network. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002561 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION USED IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING TIME SLOTS - An apparatus used in a communication system having a plurality of time slots includes a signal processing circuit, a signal detector, and a controlling circuit. The signal processing circuit receives an input signal. The signal detector detects the input signal to generate a detection result. The controlling circuit controls the signal processing circuit according to the detection result. When the detection result does not meet a predetermined criterion, the controlling circuit adjusts the signal processing circuit for reducing power consumption of the signal processing circuit. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002562 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME - There is provided a communication apparatus capable of performing HEAC communication with another communication apparatus compliant with HEAC communication, comprising: a receiving unit configured to receive an HEC signal from the other communication apparatus via a transmission path; a detecting unit configured to detect a signal level of the HEC signal received by the receiving unit; a deciding unit configured to decide an amplification factor of an HEC signal to be transmitted based upon the detected signal level in a case where the detected signal level is not within prescribed limits; an amplifying unit configured to amplify the HEC signal to be transmitted at the decided amplification factor; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit an HEAC signal, which includes an ARC signal and the HEC signal to be transmitted amplified by the amplifying unit, to the other communication apparatus via the transmission path. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002563 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a wireless mobile communication system ( | 01-05-2012 |
20120002564 | MOBILITY IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A device, method or system implements operations to receive compressed samples of wireless transmissions from a plurality of user equipment (UEs) traveling through different communication regions in a wireless network, and detect information in the wireless transmissions of the UEs based on the compressed samples. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002565 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - This disclosure provides a communication apparatus that can perform reliable and stable communication with one or more counterpart apparatuses in a communication network, where the network has plural communication paths in which data communication transmissions are performed according to a predetermined transmission condition. The transmission condition of a communication packet for at least one of the plural communication paths is determined to be different from the predetermined transmission condition if bandwidth measurement is not performed on that communication path while bandwidth measurement is performed on one or more of the other communication paths. Accuracy of measuring available bandwidth in the communication network can be improved because communication paths that perform bandwidth measurements are less impacted by communication paths that do not perform bandwidth measurement. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002566 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - The disclosure provides a communication apparatus that can accurately measure the available bandwidth of a communication path between itself and another communication apparatus by performing measurement communication in accordance with an execution frequency. The communication apparatuses can select the optimum communication method in accordance with the identified available bandwidth, so that each of the communication apparatuses can reliably perform communication with a counterpart apparatus. The execution frequency is identified in accordance with the communication stability so that an appropriate execution frequency can be identified for each bidirectional communication path. In this way, communication apparatuses can accurately measure the available bandwidth by performing measurement communication with the optimum execution frequency. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002567 | CROSS-LAYER OPTIMIZATION FOR NEXT-GENERATION WIFI SYSTEMS - Systems, methods, and apparatus are described that that increase throughput of a WiFi network. A first method is provided wherein access points monitor and keep track of their states on each resource block (frequency channel and antenna pattern) associated therewith and dynamically select the resource blocks that increase network throughput based on the instantaneous states of the access points. A second method is provided comprising employing Q-learning to determine one or more modifications of operating parameters of a network node based on observed throughput of the network and implementing the one or more modifications at the node. A third method is also provided which combines the first and second methods so as to increase network throughput at both the physical layer and the MAC layer. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002568 | Configuring the Transmission of Periodic Feedback Information on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) - In order to facilitate sending of different kinds of channel feedback information, a periodic information transmission in a shared uplink channel is configured, PUSCH, and required resources are allocated for the transmission. | 01-05-2012 |
20120008509 | DETECTING DEGRADATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK PERFORMANCE - A system and method for monitoring wireless network performance that provides a real-time detection and identification of problem areas within a wireless carrier's network. The method involves receiving and attempting to fulfill requests for vehicle services data sent via the wireless carrier system between vehicles and a call center or other remote facility. The success or failure of these attempts are recorded and associated with the geographic region in which the vehicle was located during the attempt, and this information for a multitude of vehicles is then analyzed in conjunction with other inputs and stored data to determine whether a particular geographic region is experiencing a wireless service outage or other degradation in performance. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008510 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Uplink Antenna Transmit Diversity - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed to provide antenna transmit diversity. A wireless transmit/receiver unit (WTRU) may comprise multiple antennas. A channel condition for each of the antennas may be determined. A probing phase may be used in order to determine the channel conditions. During a period of the probing phase, a probing signal from each antenna may be transmitted during a respective time interval. The WTRU transmit power may or may not be held constant. A Node B may receive each probing signal and determine channel quality information. The Node B may adjust the determined channel quality information if there is a power offset between the signals. The Node B may send the channel quality information to the WTRU. The WTRU may switch an antenna to use for uplink transmission based on the received channel quality information. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008511 | BLIND UPLINK INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKING - Blind interference cancellation is described for wireless networks in which a subject base station or cancellation apparatus obtains semi-static information for at least one of its neighboring cells. The base station measures the noise level of each of the neighboring cells based on samples it takes of uplink transmissions in each of the neighboring cells. The neighboring cells are then ranked for interference cancellation based on their relative noise levels. The base station performs discontinuous transmission (DTX) detection to identify at least one interfering user equipment (UE) in the neighboring cell and cancels interference attributable to those identified interfering UEs. The DTX detection and cancelation are then repeated for the remaining neighboring cells in the order they are ranked. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008512 | Device, Packet And Method For Power Saving - In some embodiments herein a method in a first communication device ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120008513 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING TARGET FLOW IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for detecting a target flow in a wireless communication system are provided. The target flow detection method includes receiving a packet, determining a behavior state of the packet, comparing the behavior state with a plurality of stored behavior signatures, retrieving, when the behavior state matches one of the stored behavior signatures, a target flow corresponding to the behavior signature, and instructing a packet processor to process the target flow. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008514 | Correlating Data from Multiple Spectrum Monitors - A combination and correlation of data from multiple sensors in a wireless digital network is described. Sensors such as spectrum monitors, access points, and wireless client devices provide spectrum data to one or more central stations connected to the network. Spectrum data from multiple sensors is combined and correlated to provide insight into network operation such as spectrum maps, detection-range maps, and for network diagnostics. Sensors providing spectrum data may be synchronized. Correlating spectrum data from synchronized sensors allows more accurate location of sources such as interferers. The known EIRP of certain wireless devices may be used to improve location estimates, and these devices may be used as calibrations sources for sensors in the wireless network. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008515 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING MESSAGE TRANSMISSION OVERHEAD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for reducing a message transmission overhead in a wireless communication system that supports a Service Discovery Protocol (SDP). In the method, when a service discovery request message is received from a neighbor node, a hop count of the service discovery request message is determined. A maximum hop count of an advertisement message is determined with consideration of the hop count of the service discovery request message. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008516 | TTL OPERATIONS FOR SMALL RB ASSIGNMENTS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for wireless communications, wherein more accurate timing offset calculations may be achieved for uplink transmissions with a relatively small number of assigned resources. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008517 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a multicarrier communication apparatus by which information quantity of CQI reporting can be reduced. In the apparatus, each CQI is recorded in a CQI table section ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120008518 | METHOD FOR PROBLEMATIC USER DETECTION - A method for problematic station detection featuring problematic station detection algorithm based on calculating the amount of time a station is wasting. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008519 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD - Device detection is performed by using a second detection unit which uses unicast transmission with a destination address being changed in addition to a first detection unit which uses broadcasting/multicasting. When unicast transmission can be normally performed, detection using the first detection unit is performed to determine whether broadcasting/multicasting at this point of time can be performed. In addition, the first or second detection unit is selected or the processing order of the first and second detection units is changed in accordance with the permission/inhibition determination result. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008520 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING TRANSMIT POWER - A method and an apparatus for determining transmission power are disclosed. A gain factor of an E-DPDCH in a compressed mode is determined according to the number of E-DPDCH used for initial transmission of data; and the transmission power of the E-DPDCH is determined according to the gain factor of the E-DPDCH in compressed mode. As the gain factor of E-DPDCH in compressed mode is determined according to the number of E-DPDCH for initial transmission of data, the gain factor of the E-DPDCH in compressed mode can be determined accurately, and thus the transmit power of the E-DPDCH can be determined accurately according to the gain factor of the E-DPDCH. Therefore, the waste of transmit power of the E-DPDCH is reduced, and thus the system capacity is improved. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008521 | PATH CHARACTERISATION IN NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for providing path characterisation information relating to a network characteristic such as network congestion to nodes in a data network ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120008522 | CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR METHOD - The disclosed a method will work with future versions of LTE-A, be backwards compatible, and alleviate interference to signals for basic system operation. The method includes generating one or more Reference Signals associated with the one or more Channel Quality Indicators, and includes mapping the one or more Channel Quality Indicator-Reference Signals to the last symbol of the second slot of the one or more subframes. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008523 | Methods and Apparatuses for Associating Charging Identifiers - Methods and devices for associating charging identifiers are disclosed in the present invention. The method includes: when a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) entity transmitting a charging identifier to a Bearer Binding and Event Reporting Function (BBERF) entity, the PCRF transmits a packet data network connection identifier associated with the charging identifier to the BBERF. By the present invention, accuracy of charging is improved. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008524 | Method and Apparatus for Monitoring a Random Access Channel - A user equipment for obtaining data for observing performance related to Random Access in a cellular radio system is provided. The user equipment can connect to the system. In order to provide the network/system with data for observing the random access procedure the user equipment measures and stores data needed to compute measurements to be reported to the system. The user equipment further generates a measurement report, and transmits the measurement report based on a trigger event. | 01-12-2012 |
20120014264 | HANDOVER METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - Disclosed is method and user equipment for performing a handover between a MBSFN area and a non-MBSFN area in a communication network. The communication network comprises a first cell constituting a MBSFN area, a second cell not constituting the MBSFN area, and a reserved cell between the first cell and the second cell being subordinate to the MBSFN area, reserved cell indication information being broadcast in the reserved cell, the method comprises steps of: receiving the reserved cell indication information to learn that a user equipment is located in the reserved cell; measuring in the reserved cell, for a preset service, a first signal strength based on MBMS transmission and a second signal strength based on single-cell transmission; and selecting the first cell or the second cell as a target cell during a period in which a difference between the first signal strength and the second signal strength is lower than a preset threshold. When the user equipment moves between different communication areas, the method of the present invention can provide continuous MBMS service for the user. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014265 | DATA PACKET ROUTING - According to one example of the present invention, there is provided a method of routing data packets to a plurality of packet processors in a computer network. The method comprising obtaining workload data from the packet processors, determining a workload distribution across the packet processors, and updating a balancing table used by a switching element in the network based on the determined workload. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014266 | MANAGING A CONVERGED DEVICE THAT IS CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH A PLURALITY OF CONNECTIONS - Various embodiments pertain to managing a converged electronic device | 01-19-2012 |
20120014267 | Evaluating and Reporting Measurements for H(E)NB Outbound Mobility and Inter-H(E)NB Mobility in Connected Mode - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed that may provide for a WTRU to perform measurements in order to avoid radio link failure that may occur because the WTRU's neighboring cells are, or include, CSG cells. For example, thresholds may be implemented to compensate for the presence of CSG cells, a WTRU may make adjustments when performing measurements, etc. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014268 | MULTIPLEXING AND FEEDBACK SUPPORT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A control scheme using packet headers allows GSM EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) systems to increase spectral efficiency through multiplexing techniques, such as superposition coding, multi-user packet transmission, joint detection, and/or joint decoding. A fast feedback scheme for GERAN allows Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) frames to be transmitted over GERAN air interfaces without excessive feedback latency. As a result, Hybrid Automatic Repeat-reQuest (H-ARM) acknowledgements may be timely provided for end-to-end VoIP calls that traverse GERAN air interfaces. Additionally, Incremental Redundancy H-ARQ and link quality feedback latencies are decreased. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014269 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTENTION-BASED UPLINK ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for contention-based access in a wireless communication system are disclosed. A base station may determine a contention-based resource allocation comprising a subset of available system resources. Information related to the contention-based resources may be sent to a user device. In addition, state information may be provided to the UE. The UE may generate and send a contention-based uplink transmission consistent with the allocated resources and state information. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014270 | Frame signal generating method and frame signal generating device - A method for generating a frame signal includes monitoring a first frame signal and obtaining a first parameter based on the monitoring result; setting a second parameter based on the type of the first frame signal; when the first frame signal is being input, generating a second frame signal with a bit rate different from that of the first frame signal by determining data and stuff byte positions based on the first parameter and performing frame processing on data and stuff bytes corresponding to the first frame signal based on the determined data and stuff byte positions; and when the first frame signal is not being input, generating the second frame signal by determining the data and stuff byte positions based on the second parameter and performing the frame processing on data and stuff bytes corresponding to a maintenance signal based on the determined data and stuff byte positions. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014271 | Efficient Use of a Communications Network - A duration of time a communications device is connected to a first network is monitored. A signal of a second network is detected. Next, it is determined whether a predetermined amount of time has elapsed such that the communications device makes efficient use of the first network, and in response to a determination that the predetermined amount of time has elapsed, a connection of the communications device to the second network is initiated. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014272 | Communication Control Server, Base Station, Terminal and Coordinated Service System and Method - A communication control server of the present invention comprises: a network interface; a memory unit in which a cluster information table and a channel state information table are stored; a channel state information recovery unit acquiring a feedback message of a user equipment within a cluster from a base station via a network interface, wherein the cluster information table holds a joint codebook shared by the base stations within the cluster, wherein the joint codebook holds an identifier for determining channel state information and a distribution of the channel state information, and wherein the feedback message includes an identifier corresponding to the channel state information of the user equipment. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014273 | An Apparatus and Method for Voice Call Continuity - A mobile device having an operating system which includes a communications framework having a voice call continuity convergence layer. The status of the circuit switched and packet switched parts of the network are reported to the convergence layer which decides which part of the network to connect to based on network status and pre-stored profiles. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014274 | BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, CONTROL PROGRAM, AND MOBILE STATION - [Problem] The number of the base stations that are activated uselessly cannot be sufficiently reduced even in a light traffic state. As a result, interference between adjacent cells and power consumption cannot be sufficiently reduced. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014275 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CODEC MODE IN ALL-IP NETWORK AND TERMINAL USING THE SAME - A method of controlling the codec mode of a convergence internet protocol (IP) network and a terminal using the method are provided. The terminal may include a variable bit-rate/mode codec controller including a channel status measurement and management (CSMM) unit which measures the status of a wireless channel and provides the results of the measuring of the wireless channel status as channel quality information, and which measures the transfer performance of a received packet and provides the results of the measuring of the packet transfer performance as packet measurement parameter information, and a service quality control (SQC) unit which measures the quality of a multimedia service based on the channel quality information and the packet measurement parameter information, provides the results of the measuring of the multimedia service quality as service quality information and determines a codec mode of the terminal or a counterpart terminal communicating with the all-IP terminal based on the service quality information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the quality of multimedia services. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014276 | METHOD FOR RELIABLE DETECTION OF THE STATUS OF AN RTP PACKET STREAM - In a method for determining the status of a real-time transfer protocol (RTP) packet stream, several steps are performed. A time period elapsed since reception of the last RTP packet is determined, the content of the last received RTP packet is determined, and the status of the RTP packet stream based on the elapsed time period and the content of the last received RTP packet is categorized. The method is advantageous in that the risk of false detection of dead RTP packet streams is reduced. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014277 | NETWORK MONITORING SYSTEM - A deployed communications network, providing voice, video and data, has millions of devices on the network including customer premises equipment (CPE), such as set top boxes and residential gateways. The present invention relates to the use of scaling techniques for minimizing the cost of hardware yet provide a monitoring solution for large networks. CPE's are grouped into groups according to geographical location and/or quality of operation, and the frequency and order of data collection is based on a hierarchical, round-robin structure of the CPE groups and the status of each CPE. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014278 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING SYSTEM NODE POSITIONS - Various methods for determining a configuration of a communications system are provided, including methods for determining system node positions. One example method includes generating a node attribute information segment, and adding the node attribute information segment to an attribute information message at a position within the attribute information message indicative of a position of a node within a series string of communications connections. Some of the methods may be implemented within the context of an asset locating system that analyzes the timing of wireless signals to determine a location of the source of the signal. Related systems and apparatuses are also provided. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014279 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND PRECODING METHOD - A wireless transmission apparatus able to reliably increase outage capacity according to the state of a propagation path. This apparatus is a wireless transmission apparatus ( | 01-19-2012 |
20120014280 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION AND FEEDBACK - An arrangement is disclosed where in a multi-carrier communication system, the modulation scheme, coding attributes, training pilots, and signal power may be adjusted to adapt to channel conditions in order to maximize the overall system capacity and spectral efficiency without wasting radio resources or compromising error probability performance, etc. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014281 | METHOD OF MAINTAINING A QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and user equipment providing wireless communication services, and a method of transmitting and receiving data between a terminal and a base station in an evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and more particularly, to a method of maintaining a Quality of Service (QoS) in an optimized manner, such that the effective data transmission can be performed with a good quality of service data. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020225 | Method and Apparatus for MIMO Transmission - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus for transmission is disclosed comprising a processor configured to receive data and to form data packets, a radio frequency transmitter configured to transmit the data packets, a monitor configured to evaluate resource utilization of the radio frequency transmitter and to provide a resource utilization rate, and a controller, wherein the controller is configured to instruct the processor to form multiple output or single output data packets to the radio frequency transmitter based on the resource utilization rate. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020226 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR MULTIPLE STATION SOUNDING IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Embodiments of a method and apparatus for obtaining sounding measurements between an access point and a wireless station within a wireless local area network are described. Some embodiments relate to Wi-Fi networks and networks operating in accordance with one of the IEEE 802.11 standards. Some embodiments may allow an access point to request that multiple stations compute sounding measurements with minimal time delay between measurements. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020227 | COMPLEMENTARY NETWORK QUALITY TESTING METHOD - A complementary network quality testing method for conducting a test on the quality of service with regard to data transmission taking place in a telecommunication network includes setting up a committed bucket of a committed burst size to receive tokens introduced thereinto at a committed information rate; receiving normal protocol data units and/or test protocol data units, followed by storing the normal protocol data units in a data queue and/or storing the test protocol data units in a test queue; determining whether the normal protocol data units are present in the data queue; and retrieving selectively the test protocol data units from the test queue or determining, selectively and again, whether the normal protocol data units are present in the data queue, depending on whether the tokens are present in the committed bucket. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020228 | Sectorized Scheduling Method for the High Speed Uplink Packet Access Service and the System thereof - A sectorized scheduling method for the high speed uplink packet access service is provided in the present invention, the method comprises: obtaining the current sector load of each sector and the current high speed uplink packet access service HSUPA mobile station load of each sector, and the maximal allowable sector load of each sector; obtaining the rest available sector load based on the maximal allowable load and the current sector load, performing load assignment for each sector based on the rest available sector load and the distribution of HSUPA mobile station in various sectors. A sector based scheduling system for the high speed uplink packet access service is also provided in the present invention. The present invention correctly associates the HSUPA UE load and the sector load, solves the problem of the larger overload or the larger underload, and improves the HSUPA throughput by several times. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020229 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method of wireless communication includes receiving signaling from a served User Equipment (UE), via a radio access technology, indicating an interfering technology associated with coexistence issues experienced by the served UE. The method also includes calculating future subframes expected to experience coexistence issues based on previous subframes estimated to have experienced coexistence issues. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020230 | CHANNEL FEEDBACK BASED ON REFERENCE SIGNAL - Techniques for supporting channel measurement and reporting in a wireless communication system are described. In one design, a cell transmits a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) used for channel estimation and coherent demodulation and a channel spatial information reference signal (CSI-RS) used for channel measurement and channel feedback reporting. The cell may transmit the CSI-RS less frequently than the CRS, or from more antenna ports than the CRS, or on fewer resource elements than the CRS, or a combination thereof. In one design, a user equipment (UE) determines at least one bandwidth part configured for the UE, with each bandwidth part covering at least one subband. The UE receives the CRS and CSI-RS from the cell, determines channel feedback information for the at least one bandwidth part based on the CSI-RS, sends the channel feedback information to the cell, and receives data transmitted by the cell based on the channel feedback information. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020231 | Method for wireless communication in a device with co-existence radio - Various methods for wireless communication in a device with co-existed/co-located radios are provided. Multiple communication radio transceivers are co-existed/co-located in a user equipment (UE) having in-device coexistence (IDC) capability, which may result in IDC interference. For example, the UE is equipped with both LTE radio and some ISM band applications such as WiFi and Bluetooth modules. In a first method, the network identifies IDC capability by UE identification (e.g., UE ID). In a second method, the UE intentionally performs cell selection or reselection to cells in non-ISM frequency bands. In a third method, the UE signals the existence of ISM band applications via capability negotiation. In a fourth method, the UE signals the activation of ISM band applications by signaling messages (e.g., RRC message or MAC CE). Under the various methods, the UE and its serving eNB can apply FDM or TDM solutions to mitigate the IDC interference. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020232 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus including: a counter storage unit storing a reception counter value of the apparatus when a specific frame is received; a measurement unit measuring the number of frame losses occurring between the apparatus and the preceding apparatus on the basis of the reception counter value of the apparatus, a transmission counter value of a source apparatus of the specific frame included in the specific frame and the total number of frame losses between the source apparatus and the preceding apparatus of the apparatus, when the specific frame is received; a transmission unit transmitting the specific frame; and a frame control unit adding, to the specific frame, loss information associating the number of frame losses occurring between the apparatus and the preceding apparatus with an identifier of the apparatus and forwarding the specific frame to the transmission unit, when the frame loss occurs, and forwarding the specific frame to the transmission unit without adding the loss information to the specific frame, when no frame loss occurs. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020233 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for receiving data in a communication system includes a parser configured to receive multimedia data and analyze the multimedia data into a plurality of tokens; a plurality of decoding units configured to receive input tokens corresponding to them among the plurality of tokens and decode the multimedia data; and a scheduler configured to schedule the plurality of tokens and transmit the respective input tokens to the plurality of decoding units at precise times, wherein the plurality of decoding units decode the multimedia data by the input tokens transmitted from the scheduler and provide a multimedia service. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020234 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES AND/OR SYSTEMS RELATING TO RATE SCHEDULING, TRAFFIC SCHEDULING, RATE CONTROL, AND/OR POWER CONTROL - Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communication networks are described. Embodiments directed to methods and apparatus for establishing traffic data transmission rates and/or transmission power levels between wireless terminals is described. Embodiments direct to methods and apparatus of making decisions whether or not to transmit as a function of the received power of the received response signals are also described. Transmission of pilot signals after granting of a transmission request and a decision to transmit traffic data has been made occurs in some embodiments. Rate information to be used in determining a traffic rate may be received in response to the pilot signal from a peer to peer (P2P) device. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020235 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING IMPROVED HANDOFFS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and systems are provided for using a PDSN in a wireless communication network that includes multiple IP addresses and multiple corresponding physical interfaces. Through the use of multiple IP addresses and interfaces, the throughput of the PDSN may be substantially increased. Additionally, the multiple IP addresses and interfaces may be used to provide redundancy in order to protect against software or hardware failures. According to the methods and systems of the invention, moreover, the risk of internal hard handoffs resulting from the use of a PDSN having multiple IP addresses and interfaces is eliminated or at least substantially reduced | 01-26-2012 |
20120020236 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A transmission apparatus includes (N+1) or more transmission antennas. A first receiving apparatus detects N or fewer transmission antennas from a received signal. A second receiving apparatus detects more than N transmission antennas from a received signal. The transmission apparatus uses a first radio resource for outputting a known signal from each of transmission antennas and uses a second radio resource for outputting a known signal from at least one of the transmission antennas. A timing difference between the first and second radio resources is smaller than or equal to a first determined difference and a frequency difference therebetween is smaller than or equal to a second determined difference. The first receiving apparatus estimates a channel state based on the known signal outputted on the first radio resource. The second receiving apparatus estimates a channel state based on the known signals outputted on the first and second radio resources. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020237 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PARENT NODE SEARCH METHOD - A parent node includes: a signal reception unit receiving a parent node search signal transmitted from a child node; a RSSI measurement unit measuring a RSSI as an index indicating the intensity of wireless link with the child node transmitting the parent node search signal; a response wait time standby processing unit that, after waiting for a response wait time in accordance with the intensity of wireless link, returns a response signal to the child node as a sender of the parent node search signal; and a signal transmission unit. The child node includes: a signal transmission unit transmitting a parent node search signal; a signal reception unit receiving a response signal; and a parent node selection unit that selects a parent node for routine communication on the basis of a wait time from the transmission of a parent node search signal to the reception of a response signal. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020238 | NETWORK SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A communication terminal includes: a communication unit for transmitting and receiving data to/from a second terminal and a third terminal; a memory storing a part of the transmitted and received data; and a control unit for detecting, using the communication unit, whether the second terminal is in a first state in which the second terminal can exchange first data with the communication terminal and the third terminal or in a second state in which the second terminal cannot exchange the first data with the communication terminal and the third terminal, thereby storing the first data exchanged during the second state in the memory as second data, and for transmitting the second data to the second terminal when a transition from the second state to the first state is detected. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020239 | RADIO RELAY STATION AND RADIO RELAY METHOD - A radio relay station provided with: a donor-side transceiver unit which transmits and receives a donor-side signal, at which a first frequency band is used, to and from a radio base station; a service-side transceiver unit which transmits and receives a service-side signal, at which a second frequency band adjacent to the first frequency band is used, to and from a radio terminal; and a control unit and a control unit which control the donor-side transceiver unit and service-side transceiver unit respectively. The donor-side transceiver unit, when the service-side signal has been received, measures the signal level of the service-side signal at the first frequency band. The control unit and the control unit adjust the shift amount for the second frequency band at the frequency shifter so as to lower the signal level. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020240 | RADIO TERMINAL, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A radio terminal ( | 01-26-2012 |
20120020241 | HARQ INDICATOR DETERMINATION - In order to determine whether a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) indicator received by user equipment (UE) from a base station is an acknowledgment (ACK) or negative acknowledgement (NACK), when a signal representing the HARQ indicator is received by the UE, a plurality of symbols encoded in the received signal are determined to obtain a softbit for each of the symbols by summing an in-phase component and a quadrature component of each symbol. Thereafter, the softbits are summed up to be compared with the amplitude of the symbols to determine whether the HARQ indicator is an ACK or NACK. | 01-26-2012 |
20120026897 | Packet Switching Device Using Results Determined by an Application Node - Packets are encapsulated and sent from a service node (e.g., packet switching device) using one or more services applied to a packet by an application node (e.g., a packet switching device and/or computing platform such as a Cisco ASR 1000) to generate a result, which is used by the service node to process packets of a flow of packets to which the packet belonged. An example of a service applied to a packet is a classification service, such as, but not limited to, using deep packet inspection on the packet to identify a classification result. The service node can, for example, use this classification result to process other packets in a same packet flow, such that all packets of a flow do not need to be, nor typically are, sent to an application node for processing. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026898 | Formatting Messages from Sensor Nodes in a Sensor Network - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a summary of statistics concerning a sensor node in a sensor network that comprises a plurality of sensor nodes, the statistics having been generated based on one or more of sensor data from a sensor at the sensor node, communication to the sensor node from one or more other sensor nodes in the sensor network, or communication from the sensor node; analyzing the summary; and applying based on the analysis one or more predetermined polices to one or more of the sensor nodes or the sensor network. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026899 | PATH SWITCHING USING CO-LOCATED RADIOS IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A node in a multi-hop wireless network includes a master radio and a surrogate radio. The master radio performs data communication on a main multi-hop path in the multi-hop wireless network, and the surrogate radio simultaneously scans one or more channels in the multi-hop wireless network. A channel manager determines if a link between two different nodes on the main multi-hop path is disconnected, and, in response to determining a disconnection of the link between two different nodes on the main multi-hop path, the data communication is switched to an alternative multi-hop path in the multi-hop wireless network based on information obtained from the scanning of the one or more channels. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026900 | STATE SYNCHRONIZATION OF SERIAL DATA LINK SESSIONS CONNECTED ACROSS AN IP NETWORK - In one embodiment, a router maintains a communication session between a local terminal unit and a remote terminal unit, the local terminal unit interconnected to the router over a local serial data link, and the remote terminal unit interconnected to the router over an Internet Protocol (IP) session via a remote router and a corresponding remote serial data link. The router may then monitor a state of the local serial data link, and communicates this state with the remote router over the IP session, as well as a remote state of the remote serial data link. The router may then correspondingly control the state of the local serial data link to match the remote state of the remote serial data link. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026901 | Method and Apparatus for Processing Signals - Incoming signals that are sparse in the code-correlation domain, such as CDMA signal (GPS signals being a specific example of such signals) are processed by sampling the incoming signal at irregular time intervals at an average rate that is significantly lower than the Nyquist rate; which in the case of GPS signals is the chip rate of a pseudorandom code sequence that is embedded in the signal. The sampled signal is processed with locally generated signals that are also sampled the same irregular time intervals. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026902 | COMPUTING DEVICE AND CROSSTALK INFORMATION DETECTION METHOD - A computing device and a method reads a circuit board layout file from a storage device, and selects a first signal transmission line from circuit board layout file as a target line. The computing device and method computes a distance between the target line and the aggressor line corresponding to each unit sample length. If the distance is more than or equal to a height of a sample region, the computing device and method defines the height of the sample region as a crosstalk space between the target line and the aggressor line corresponding to a unit sample length. Otherwise, if the distance is less than the height of the sample region, the computing device and method defines the distance as the crosstalk space between the target line and the aggressor line corresponding to the unit sample length. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026903 | SELECTIVE ALLOCATION OF DEDICATED CHANNEL (DCH) RESOURCES WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a UE determines to transmit a message (e.g., an alert message, a call initiation message). Based on the type of the message to be transmitted, the UE selectively transmits supplemental data configured to prompt an access network to transition the UE to a dedicated channel state (DCS). In another embodiment, an application server configured to arbitrate communication sessions between UEs receives a message for transmission to a target UE. Based on the type of the message to be transmitted to the target UE, the application server selectively transmits, to a serving access network of the target UE, supplemental data configured to prompt the serving access network to transition the target UE to the DCS. In another embodiment, the access network selectively transitions a target UE to the DCS based on whether differently sized messages are received at the access network for transmission to the target UE. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026904 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING LINK ADAPTATION PARAMETERS FOR CDMA-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for selecting a transport format resource combination (TFRC) using an information theoretic approach are provided. The TFRC may be selected in a medium access control (MAC) layer for transmission of data in a code division multiple access (CDMA) wireless communication system. The maximum number of spreading codes available for transmission and the set of possible TFRCs may be determined based on channel characteristics. For each transport block set size (TBSS) in the set of possible TFRCs, a TFRC is selected with the largest number of spreading codes within the maximum number of spreading codes for a corresponding minimum coding rate. The corresponding code rate for each selected TFRCs is compared to a threshold to select a corresponding type of modulation. One of the selected TFRCs is selected to be provided to the physical layer that best matches the CQI and maximizes the TBSS. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026905 | COMPUTER PRODUCT, TESTING APPARATUS, AND TESTING METHOD - A computer-readable medium stores a program causing a computer to execute acquiring a transmission interval for packets transmitted from a first-source to a first-destination; judging whether a given packet, among the packets whose destination has been changed to a second-destination are transmitted from a second-source, is a designated-packet requiring acknowledgment for the preceding packet; transmitting the given packet after acknowledgment is received, if acknowledgment is required; correcting an interval between the designated-packet and the subsequent packet, to be shorter than intervals for 2 packets transmitted from the first-source to the first-destination and corresponding to the designated-packet and the subsequent packet, if an interval between transmission of the preceding packet and transmission of the designated-packet exceeds intervals for 2 packets transmitted from the first-source to the first-destination and corresponding to the preceding packet and the designated-packet; and transmitting the subsequent packet from the second-source to the second-destination, at the corrected interval. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026906 | Adaptive antenna system signal detection - A system and method for processing signals in a communication system is disclosed herein. The system and method comprises processing steps and processing logic for generating a downlink subframe comprising a preamble and a plurality of data bursts within a predetermined frequency band; embedding first and second sets of downlink subframe parameters in the downlink subframe; transmitting the downlink subframe; receiving the downlink subframe; processing data in the preamble to obtain channel quality indicator (CQI) information; and using the CQI information to select either the first set or set second set of downlink subframe parameters to process the data bursts in the downlink subframe. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026907 | BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes a measuring unit and a setting unit. The measuring unit configured to measure at least any one piece of information of an absolute value of received total wideband power in the cell, a dispersion value of the received total wideband power in the cell, a reception success rate which is a rate of success in packet reception in the cell, and a simultaneous connecting user number which is the number of radio terminals connected to the cell simultaneously. The setting unit configured to set target received total wideband power which is a target for the received total wideband power in the cell based on information measured by the measuring unit. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026908 | NETWORK MEASUREMENTS AND DIAGNOSTICS - A network diagnostics equipped device(s), such as a Domain Master, node, test and measurement system, transceiver, or the like, is configured to be capable of performing one or more of data rate measurements in a network, Signal-to-Noise Ratio per subcarrier (SNRps) measurements in a network, Bit Allocation Value per subcarrier (BATVps) measurements in a network, Channel Attenuation per subcarrier (CATps) measurements in a network, Quiet Line Noise per subcarrier (QLNps) measurements in a network and Nonlinear Noise per subcarrier (NLNps) measurements in a network. The above information can be further used to address network performance issues as well as to map and assist with identification of one or more problems within the network. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026909 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION OF MULTI-CHANNEL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for reporting channel state information (CSI), performed by a beamformee, in a wireless local area network system using multi-channels is provided. The method includes receiving, from a beamformer, an NDP announcement (NDPA) frame announcing that a null data packet (NDP) frame follows the NDPA frame, receiving the NDP frame from the beamformer, estimating a channel from a training symbol of the NDP frame and transmitting to the beamformer a CSI report frame containing a result obtained by estimating the channel, wherein the channel is a multi-channel acquired by aggregating first and second channels which are non-contiguous to each other, and wherein the CSI report frame includes an average signal to noise ratio (SNR) for each space-time stream of the first channel and a steering matrix for each subcarrier of the first channel and an average SNR for each space-time stream of the second channel and a steering matrix for each subcarrier of the second channel. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026910 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROL AVERAGE TRANSMISSION RATE IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A scheduling method in a wireless communication includes receiving a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) from a plurality of terminals. The method also includes determining an average transmission rate of each terminal based on the CQI by approximating an instantaneous transmission rate distribution to a Gaussian distribution. The method further includes determining a weight of each terminal such that the average transmission rate of each terminal satisfies a target transmission rate. The method also includes selecting a terminal set by applying the determined weight. Thus, it is possible to control the fairness between the terminals and to efficiently control the transmission rate of the terminals according to the required transmission rate and the channel environment of the terminals. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026911 | System and Method for Enhancing Network Stability by Selectively Controlling Adjacency Formation - A system and method for facilitating connecting a switch to a network to improve network performance. In an illustrative embodiment, the system includes a first module for determining when the switch is initially connected to a network and providing a signal in response thereto. A second module selectively forms adjacencies with peers of the switch in response to the signal and based on one or more predetermined parameters. In a more specific embodiment, the switch is a router or Layer-3 (L3) switch. The one or more predetermined parameters include a load factor, values pertaining to capabilities of a processor included in the router, bandwidth capabilities of the interface and/or the router, internal router queue counts, and so on. The router employs a routing protocol such as Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP). The second module throttles and adjacency-formation rate based on the predetermined parameters. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026912 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING THE NUMBER OF CODE WORDS AND POWER - A method for allocating the number of code words and power according to physical channels carrying data includes: determining initial power and an initial number of code words; adjusting the initial power and the initial number of code words in balanced mode according to resource utilization of data transmission physical channels to select a transport block size (TBS) suitable for data transmission, where the power and the number of code words corresponding to the TBS suitable for data transmission are allocated power and number of code words. An apparatus for allocating the number of code words and power according to physical channels carrying data is also provided. With the present application, it is guaranteed that the number of code words and the power may be allocated in balanced mode. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026913 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING FEEDBACK FOR A DOWNLINK SHARED SERVICE AND ESTIMATING A NUMBER OF WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNITS - A method and an apparatus for sending a signal on a contentious feedback channel for a downlink shared service and for estimating a number of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) are disclosed. When a transmission criterion associated with a physical random access feedback channel (P-RAFCH) is satisfied, a physical resource is randomly selected among a plurality of physical resources assigned for the P-RAFCH and a pre-configured signal is sent using the selected physical resource. A Node-B receives the pre-configured signal from a plurality of WTRUs and calculates a number of the WTRUs based on a number of used physical resources. The transmission criterion is at least one of successful reception of a data packet on a downlink physical channel, successful reception of a data block on a data service, reception of a signaling command, occurrence of a measurement event, and failure to receive a transmission after a specified number of times. | 02-02-2012 |
20120033561 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION - The disclosed mobile station includes: a CAZAC code generation unit configured to generate CAZAC code according to a CAZAC sequence number reported from the base station; a cyclic shift unit configured to cyclically shift each symbol of the CAZAC code based on a cyclic shift number reported from the base station, and a block spreading unit that operates with the cyclic shift unit or operates instead of the cyclic shift unit, and that performs block spreading processing for the CAZAC code according to a block spreading number reported from the base station. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033562 | High Precision Packet Generation in Software Using a Hardware Time Stamp Counter - There is disclosed a system and method for high precision packet generation in software using a hardware time stamp counter. The method may include receiving user selection to create a network test and receiving test information from the user, the test information including a packet transmission rate. A packet transmission interval may be calculated based on the packet transmission rate. The network test is executed. Packets are transmitted at the packet transmission rate, including checking a hardware counter to learn if the packet transmission interval has elapsed and, when the packet transmission interval has elapsed, sending the packet over a network. The method may be performed by a network testing system or computing device. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033563 | PACKET CLASSIFICATION AND PRIORITIZATION USING AN IP HEADER IN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE - A method and apparatus for packet classification and prioritization using an internet protocol (IP) header in a mobile wireless device. The mobile wireless device includes an application processor and a transceiver. The transceiver in the mobile wireless device receives a higher layer packet from the application processor and reads a value of a field embedded in the higher layer packet. The transceiver creates at least one lower layer protocol data unit from the higher layer packet and maps the at least one lower layer protocol data unit to a wireless access channel having a quality of service property. The mapping of the lower layer protocol data unit is based on the value of the field read by the transceiver. In representative embodiments, the higher layer packet is an internet protocol datagram, and the field is a differentiated services code point field. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033564 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - In a data transmission method of a wireless access point (WAP), the WAP determines whether a probe request frame transmitted from a mobile device is present in a wireless network. The WAP further transmits a beacon frame in response to the probe request frame when the probe request frame is present in the wireless network. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033565 | NON-ACCESS STRATUM PROTOCOL OPERATION SUPPORTING METHOD IN A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND THE SYSTEM THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method and system for management of the mobility of a terminal by using a non-access stratum (network stratum “NAS”) protocol in a mobile telecommunication network. The method for management of the mobility of a terminal by using an NAS protocol, i.e., messages includes a terminal (“UE”) and a mobile management entity (“MME”), and efficiently divides and processes security protected NAS messages and NAS messages with no security, and efficiently divides and processes EMM (EPS Mobility Management) messages, i.e., mobility management messages, and ESM (Evolved Session Management) messages, i.e., session management messages in a network such as an EPS (Evolved Packet System) of 3GPP, thereby managing the mobility and the sessions of a terminal in an efficient manner. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033566 | HYBRID FEEDBACK FOR CLOSED LOOP MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE- OUTPUT - The subject matter disclosed herein provides methods and apparatus for closed loop operation of a wireless system implementing multiple input and multiple output (MIMO). In one aspect, there is provided a method. The method may provide channel estimation feedback to a base station by a user equipment in a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving downlink data from the base station, calculating a digital portion representing a channel parameter estimation of the downlink data, calculating an analog portion representing an error estimation of the digital portion and providing, as feedback, the digital portion and the analog portion to the base station. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033567 | DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, DATA RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - In a data transmission apparatus a processor refers to a storage unit storing a usage percentage indicative of a percentage by which each of a plurality of routes is used for transmitting data destined for an apparatus, distributes the data destined for the apparatus to routes according to the usage percentage of each route to transmit the data destined for the apparatus, lowers the usage percentage set in the storage unit of a route on which a data transmission load is light compared with other routes to zero. If a state in which the usage percentages of two or more routes are greater than zero continues for a determined period of time, then the processor determines that an equilibrium state has arisen. Upon detecting the equilibrium state, the processor sets usage percentages of the two or more routes between which there is a difference in the storage unit. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033568 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING WIRELESS NETWORK IN A DIGITAL DEVICE - A method and apparatus for connecting a wireless network in a digital device are provided. The method of connecting the wireless network of the digital device includes receiving a signal from a peer digital device, comparing Receive Signal Strength (RSS) of the received signal with a specified threshold to determine whether the peer digital device is located nearby, if it is determined that the peer digital device is located nearby, establishing a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) connection to the peer digital device, and automatically executing an application program that uses the WLAN connection. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033569 | ADAPTIVE BUFFER STATUS REPORTING - The present invention relates to a method for communicating in a network from a first station to a second station, wherein the first station comprises at least one buffer memory for storing data packets to be transmitted, the method comprising the steps of (a) the first station estimating the status of the at least one buffer memory, (b) the first station transmitting at least one buffer status packet representative of the buffer memory status, wherein the method further comprises (c) adapting the value of a first parameter of the buffer status packets on the basis of a data traffic characteristic. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033570 | DOWNLINK INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION METHOD AND ENB - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a downlink Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC) method and relate to the wireless communication field. The method includes: obtaining information about multiple carriers in a current cell; obtaining, according to the information about the multiple carriers, a downlink ICIC parameter corresponding to each carrier of the multiple carriers; and sending the downlink ICIC parameter corresponding to each carrier to a neighboring cell of the current cell so as to enable the neighboring cell to perform, according to the downlink ICIC parameter, downlink interference coordination with the first cell. The embodiments of the present invention are applicable to downlink ICIC in a multi-carrier system. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033571 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes a first channel state measurer and a second channel state measurer. When a second communication device measures a state of a channel between the second communication device and a first communication device using reference signals transmitted from the first communication device, the first channel measurer is configured to measure a state of the channel including an interference due to a signal transmitted from another first communication device. When measuring the state of the channel between the second communication device and the first communication device using the reference signals transmitted from the first communication device, the second channel state measurer measures the state of the channel while suppressing the interference due to the signal transmitted from the another first communication device. Accordingly, the wireless communication system can generate adequate feedback information both when cooperative communication is performed and when cooperative communication is not performed. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033572 | METHOD FOR THE COMPUTER-ASSISTED PROCESSING OF MEASUREMENTS OF FEATURES IN A RADIO NETWORK - In a method for the computer-assisted processing of measurements of features in a radio network, each of a plurality of measurements is associated with a base station and describes a feature of a field transmitted by a mobile object at the associated base station and/or a field transmitted by the associated base station at the mobile object. A plurality of evaluation units communicate with the base stations, one or more base stations of the radio network being associated with each evaluation unit. The evaluation units evaluate features in the radio network, a suitable evaluation unit always being determined by the position of the mobile object to evaluate the features. Since the feature evaluation is distributed, not all evaluated data in the network is lost in case an evaluation unit breaks down. In addition, using multiple evaluation units ensures that enough computer capacity is available to process the measurements in the method. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033573 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTELLIGENT DISCARD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing system performance of capacity and spectrum constrained, multiple-access communication systems by selectively discarding packets are provided. The systems and methods provided herein can drive changes in the communication system using control responses. One such control responses includes the optimal discard (also referred to herein as “intelligent discard”) of network packets under capacity constrained conditions. Some embodiments provide an interactive response by selectively discarding packets to enhance perceived and actual system throughput, other embodiments provide a reactive response by selectively discarding data packets based on their relative impact to service quality to mitigate oversubscription, others provide a proactive response by discarding packets based on predicted oversubscription, and others provide a combination thereof. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033574 | AD-HOC NETWORK AND A METHOD FOR CONFIGURING THE AD-HOC NETWORK AND A MOBILE REPEATER TELEPHONE FOR USE IN THE AD-HOC NETWORK AND USE OF THE MOBILE REPEATER TELEPHONE - An ad-hoc network that includes a plurality of telephones at least one of which is a mobile repeater telephone for establishing a first telephone connection line between a first caller telephone and a first receiver telephone, and for simultaneously establishing at least one second telephone connection line between a second caller telephone and a second receiver telephone. A subset of all the mobile repeater telephones in the network each have its own unique code and a subset of the unique codes are known to a subset of all mobile repeater telephones in the ad-hoc network. The mobile repeater telephones have a software program stored on the processors of the telephones or a database that is accessible by the telephones. The software program includes a geographic map in electronic form of the area of the network and includes data about topography and obstacles and how much the obstacles attenuate the signal. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033575 | CHANNEL INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT SYSTEM - A channel information feedback method, an information processing method, a mobile station, a base station, and a MIMO system are disclosed by embodiments of the present invention. Through the foregoing technical solutions, different numbers of channel information feedback bits are allocated for different channels dynamically, and the feedback gain is made better use of. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033576 | PILOT-MEASUREMENT CONTROL METHOD AND DUAL-MODE TERMINAL - A pilot-measurement control method and a dual-mode terminal are provided. After entering a tunnel state, an idle state protocol submodule does not wait for a measurement start command to trigger pilot measurement. Instead, the idle state protocol submodule directly triggers pilot measurement by actively querying for high rate packet data (HRPD) measurement permission variable information. Alternatively, measurement indication information sent by an initialization protocol submodule is buffered in advance, so that after entering the tunnel state, the idle state protocol submodule can trigger pilot measurement by querying for the buffered information. Alternatively, the idle state protocol submodule performs pilot measurement according to received measurement indication information sent by an air interface connection management protocol submodule when the idle state protocol submodule is activated. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033577 | Wireless Home Network Routing Protocol - Techniques for a node in a wireless network to process packets are disclosed. An example method includes registering with a network-management system in the network to become a node in the network, determining neighboring nodes, measuring costs of wireless links to its neighboring nodes, measuring radio characteristic levels of the wireless links to its neighboring nodes, sending a link-state advertisement to the network-management system, the link-state packets providing its neighboring relationships and the costs of the wireless links to its neighboring nodes, receiving link weights from the network-management system, computing a routing table for a link-state routing protocol based on (1) the sum of the link weights and the radio characteristic levels for the corresponding wireless links to its neighboring nodes, and (2) a topology of the network, and processing the packets using the routing table. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033578 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR POWER CONTROL - A method for setting a power control level ( | 02-09-2012 |
20120033579 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A data transmission method includes receiving a data packet sent by a sender and recording information about the data packet received, sending the received data packet to a receiver through a protocol layer, looking up recorded information about data packets according to a data packet mapping after the protocol layer receives confirmation information of a data packet sent by the receiver to the sender. The data packet mapping is a relation between a recorded data packet and a data packet received by the protocol layer. The method further includes constructing an acknowledgement destined for the sender according to information about the data packet obtained by the steps of looking up recorded information about received data packets. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033580 | RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER PEER-TO-PEER EXCHANGE OF USER EQUIPMENT MEASUREMENT INFORMATION - A wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA) first radio network controller (RNC) includes a logic device configured to control a measurement request device such that the measurement request device requests common measurements using a global procedures module of a radio network sublayer application part (RNSAP) procedures over a radio network controller interface (IUR) for a second RNC, the common measurements including received total wideband power, load and global positioning system (GPS) timing information. The logic device is configured to control the measurement request device such that the measurement request device requests measurements from the second RNC using RNSAP procedures over the IUR, the measurements including received signal code power (RSCP) of a common control physical channel (CCPCH) and interference signal code power (ISCP). | 02-09-2012 |
20120039189 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO LIMIT REPORTING OF NEIGHBOR CELL MEASUREMENTS - Methods and apparatus to limit reporting of neighbor cell measurements are disclosed. An example method disclosed herein for a wireless device to perform measurements in a mobile communication network comprises receiving configuration information for periodic downlink pilot measurements to be performed by the wireless device, the configuration information including an upper limit on a number of neighbor cells for which periodic downlink pilot measurements are permitted to be reported, and performing the periodic downlink pilot measurements in accordance with the configuration information. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039190 | PARTITIONING DIRECTED ACYCLIC GRAPH (DAG) TOPOLOGIES - In one embodiment, network statistics may be monitored for a first directed acyclic graph (DAG) from a first root node, and based on those network statistics, a trigger may be determined to partition the first DAG. As such, a candidate second root node may be selected for each of one or more DAG partitions, and a tunnel may be established between the first root node and the one or more second root nodes. Each second root node may then establish a new DAG partition with itself as the root (and with the same DAG parameters as the first DAG), wherein nodes of the first DAG remain with the first DAG or attach to the new DAG partition based on one or more metrics associated with each respective root (e.g., reachability, cost, DAG rank, etc.). | 02-16-2012 |
20120039191 | ANALYSING RADIO NETWORK COVERAGE - A radio network coverage area provided by a mobile radio network is analysed. The analysis is provided by receiving control messages from a first interface communicated between a base station of the mobile radio network and a radio network controller, the control messages being provided for controlling the communications of the data to or from the mobile terminals via the base station. The method includes identifying a mobile identity number associated with the mobile terminal from the control messages communicated via the first interface, identifying, using the mobile identity number, mobility control messages communicated via the first interface, the mobility control messages providing an indication of a relative distance of the mobile terminal from the base station, receiving data communicated via a second interface between the radio network controller and a core network part of the mobile radio network, identifying the data communicated from the mobile terminal, using the mobile identity number identified from the first interface, determining a relative measure of quality of the data received from the mobile terminal, and generating a performance map providing a relative distance of the mobile terminal from the base station and a quality of data communicated at the relative distance from the mobile terminal. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039192 | INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - There is provided a first device for use in a communication system, the communication system further comprising a plurality of second devices, the system having a plurality of orthogonal frequency carriers available for transmissions, each second device having a respective carrier frequency offset estimated from signals received from the first device, each of the second devices transmitting a respective stream of symbols using the respective estimated carrier frequency offset and one or more frequency carriers selected from the plurality of orthogonal frequency carriers, the first device comprising receiver circuitry for receiving respective signals from each of the second devices; a channel estimator for generating, from the received signals, an estimate of the channel over which the signals have been transmitted; an interference estimator for generating, from the received signals, an estimate of interference at the first device caused by errors in the carrier frequency offsets estimated by each second device; and circuitry for equalising the received signals using the estimate of the channel and the estimate of the interference. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039193 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND DYNAMIC MANAGEMENT METHOD USING THE SAME - A network device transmits and receives data packets between the network device and a network. The data packets includes information about a procedure needed in order to process the data packets. According to the information, the network device executes the procedure to process the data packets. If the time of the procedure has not been executed to process the data packets is more than a predetermined time and no other data packets are needed to be processed, the network device turns off the procedure automatically. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039194 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND METHOD, AND PROGRAM - There is provided an information processing device including an adjustment unit that adjusts respective lengths of delay times, which delay data transmission, for a plurality of different delay elements regarding the data transmission, so as to match with the longest delay time of the plurality of delay times or a predetermined time equal to or more than the longest delay time, and a setting unit that sets the respective plurality of delay times of which the lengths are adjusted by the adjustment unit in a processing unit which performs a process for the data transmission. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039195 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BY CALCULATING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN A MOBILE USER EQUIPMENT AND AN INTERMEDIATE ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for supporting a handover on the basis of the distance from an intermediate access point to a user equipment includes receiving uplink message set information of the user equipment from a serving base station of the user equipment; receiving the uplink message transmitted by predetermined transmitting power from the user equipment, and detecting the user equipment which has sent the uplink message on the basis of the uplink message set information; determining the receiving power by which said uplink message is received; calculating the distance between the intermediate access point and the detected user equipment by using said predetermined transmitting power and said receiving power; and performing a subsequent handover based on the distance calculated in the previous step. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039196 | SUB-BAND FEEDBACK FOR BEAMFORMING ON DOWNLINK MULTIPLE USER MIMO CONFIGURATIONS - A method in a communication network includes an access point, using a multiple input multiple output antenna configuration, sending out a sounding packet to a plurality of client stations. The client stations determine a channel estimation of the sounding packet, but only a channel estimation of a portion of the entire sounding packet to avoid processing the entire packet. The resulting partial estimation is sent to the access point for using in transmit beamforming. In other examples, the client station sends a reverse link sounding packet over a portion a channel having a bandwidth less than the sounding packet, and from this the access point determines partial channel estimations and transmit beamforming conditions. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039197 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING CELLS OF TERMINAL INCLUDING PLURAL HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION MODULES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for measuring signals of peripheral cells when heterogeneous communication modules such as Long Term Evolution (LTE), wireless Local Area Network (LAN), Bluetooth, and Global Positioning System (GPS) coexist in a terminal in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a measuring report setting message including measuring report conditions from a base station, measuring signal quality of at least one of a serving cell or a peripheral cell and determining whether the measured signal quality satisfies the measuring report conditions, and generating and transmitting a measuring report message including a measuring result to the base station when the measured signal quality satisfies the measuring report conditions. Accordingly, the terminal may measure signals of peripheral cells in a state in which there is interference from another communication module to maintain a normal communication situation. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039198 | CONSTRUCTING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT SIGNAL (VHT-SIG) FIELDS FOR REDUCED PEAK-TO-AVERAGE POWER RATIO (PAPR) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for constructing a VHT-SIG field of a transmission preamble in a manner that may reduce peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) of the transmission. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039199 | APERIODIC CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR REPORT IN CARRIER AGGREGATION - Techniques for reporting channel quality information (CQI) in a multi-carrier wireless communication system are disclosed. In one aspect, a user equipment determines one or more reporting groups, each comprising a plurality of component carriers which are configured for the user equipment. The user equipment may detect a trigger from a base station that selects a reporting group and may respond to the trigger by sending CQI for at least the activated component carriers in the selected reporting group. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039200 | METHOD OF CHANNEL MANAGEMENT FOR MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are channel management methods in a multicarrier structure in a mobile communication system. Uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) channel management methods in a carrier aggregation environment are used as the channel management methods. In DL, a base station determines a component carrier (CC) of an unstable radio channel state, stops data retransmission by the CC, and notifies a terminal of retransmission stop. In UL, the base station determines a CC of an unstable radio channel state and instructs the terminal to stop data retransmission by the CC, and the terminal stops the data retransmission and initializes a retransmission buffer. Using the channel management methods in the mobile communication system employing the multicarrier structure, an increase in the number of unnecessary retransmissions is prevented, so that unnecessary retransmission and power consumption of the terminal can be reduced and the waste of radio resources and the degradation of base station performance due to unnecessary retransmission can be prevented. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039201 | HYBRID LAND MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM INCORPORATING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT AND OUT-OF-COVERAGE INDICATION - The present disclosure provides a system and a method for providing mobility management and out-of-coverage indication in a hybrid system comprised of conventional LMR sites and trunking LMR sites. If a radio is located at a conventional site, the radio provides its location and user group data to the disclosed system through its traffic channel when the channel is idle. If the radio is located at a trunking site, the radio provides its location and user group data to the disclosed system through the trunking site's control channel. Knowledge of the radio's current location and user group data is used to provide dynamic call routing and data management within the disclosed system. The disclosed system and method provides seamless communication between a trunking site and a conventional site while concurrently enhancing the hybrid system to provide mobility management and out-of-coverage indication features typically associated with a stand-alone trunking system. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039202 | DEVICE IN WIRELESS NETWORK, DEVICE RESOURCE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, GATEWAY AND NETWORK SERVER, AND CONTROL METHOD OF THE NETWORK SERVER - Provided is a device resource management apparatus in a wireless network, the device resource management apparatus including an access mode selection module to select a predetermined access mode among a plurality of access modes for a device, each of the plurality of access modes determining a type of a medium included in an access route between the device and an opponent device, and a device agency module to obtain an agent profile corresponding to the device when an access route between the device and the opponent device is formed according to the predetermined access mode, and to perform, as a proxy for the device, at least one function defined by the agent profile. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039203 | DETERMINING THE EFFECTS OF NEW TYPES OF IMPAIRMENTS ON PERCEIVED QUALITY OF A VOICE SERVICE - Empirically derived models are used to relate user perception to objectively measurable characteristics, under a criterion of nearly perfect co-variance between predicted MOS values and the variations in the values of the objectively measurable characteristics. In the example context of evaluating packet switched telephony service, the present invention eliminates the need to perform subjective tests to characterize each combination of codec type and transmission protocol. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039204 | RADIO BEARER STATUS SENDING METHOD AND DEVICE - A radio bearer status sending method and device are provided. The method includes: after executing uplink resource allocation during current transmission period, determining the number of tokens in a token bucket which is corresponding to the radio bearer; according to the determined number of tokens, sending the first status information which indicates that the number of the tokens is larger than zero to a base station; or sending the second status information which indicates that the number of tokens is not larger than zero to the base station. By using the method and device provided by the invention, the accuracy of the radio bearer status reported by a User Equipment (UE) is improved, therefore, the base station can allocate the uplink resources more properly, and the usage efficiency of uplink resources is increased. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039205 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD OF BASE STATION, AND CONTROL METHOD OF RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One object of the present invention is to make a base station detect inconsistency between an uplink maximum transmission power P_CMAX actually set by a mobile station, and a maximum transmission power P_EMAX allowed by the base station for the mobile station without making the mobile station report to the base station about a transmission power upper-limit value P_UMAX associated with a power class of the mobile station. A base station ( | 02-16-2012 |
20120039206 | RECEIVING APPARATUS - A receiving apparatus ( | 02-16-2012 |
20120039207 | Link Adaptation with Aging of CQI Feedback Based on Channel Variability - According to teachings presented in this document, reported channel quality information, as used for controlling one or more aspects of wireless transmission, is compensated according to an aging function that depends on channel variability. In this manner, the “amount” or extent of age-based compensation applied to the channel quality feedback for a given user—e.g., a mobile station or other item of user equipment—varies as function of that user's channel conditions. More particularly, in an advantageous approach, the aging function applied to the channel quality estimates received from a given user depends on estimates of that user's channel variability. Channel quality estimates from (or generated for) a user whose channel conditions are changing very little, or at least are changing very slowly, may be aged less aggressively than those associated with a user whose channel conditions are changing more rapidly. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039208 | METHOD FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION OF DATA FROM A USER TERMINAL, A BASE STATION, A COORDINATION DEVICE, AND A COMMUNICATION NETWORK THEREFOR - The invention concerns a method for uplink transmission of data from a user terminal (UE), wherein the data are received by base stations (eNB | 02-16-2012 |
20120039209 | DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL FOR MULTIPLE DOWNLINK TIME SLOTS IN TDD COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for downlink power control for use in a spread spectrum time division communication system having time slots for communication, implemented in a user equipment, includes receiving data in a command per coded composite transport channel (CCTrCH) transmitted over a plurality of time slots. An interference power for each time slot of the plurality of time slots is measured and a single power command for the entire CCTrCH is transmitted in response to a signal to interference ratio of the received CCTrCH and the measured interference power measurement for each time slot. A subsequent data is received in the CCTrCH communication having a transmission power level for each downlink communication time slot set individually in response to the interference power measurement for that time slot and the single power command for the entire CCTrCH. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039210 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INCREASING SPECTRUM USE EFFICIENCY IN A MESH NETWORK - Mesh Network Access Points (APs) points, including gateways and routers, are deployed over a geographic area. The APs monitor the communication channel for other carriers and transmit accordingly. The APs selectively co-transmit when other carriers are sensed, if the efficiency of the mesh network will improve. APs select a transmission rate based on observed carrier-to-interference ratios. APs use directional antennas to increase carrier-to-interference ratios and spectral efficiency. AP transmit schedules are adaptable and adjusted according to observed carrier-to-interference measurements. | 02-16-2012 |
20120044816 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING WHEN TO USE CONTENTION-BASED ACCESS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless communication system as described here employs control signaling for contention-based uplink access from user equipment devices to a base station. Contention-based access configuration is performed via physical downlink control channel signaling. Configuration data sent to the user equipment devices identifies multiple contention-based access zones, along with minimum power headroom values for each contention-based access zone. A probability factor may also be used to lower collision possibility by influencing whether the user equipment devices perform contention-based uplink access. An uplink grant message can be used to acknowledge contention-based transmission; contention resolution is achieved implicitly via the uplink grant. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044817 | Managing Network Bandwidth - A system for managing network bandwidth, according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises a configuration storage module and a call manager. The configuration storage module includes a supported codecs storage, codec lists, administrator settings storage and reservation storage list. The call manager includes an extension module, trunk module, location service engine, settings manager, bandwidth manager and media stream manager. The call manager receives an offer message for a call having one or more media types. The call manager uses information included in the offer message, along with information stored in the configuration storage module, to negotiate a call settings list with one or more other sites for connecting the call, and thereby manage bandwidth for the call. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044818 | Adaptation of Receiver Settings in a Heterogeneous Network - Techniques are described for adapting receiver settings used by a mobile terminal operating in a heterogeneous network comprising macro cells and pico cells with overlapping coverage areas. A first set of subframes is allocated to the pico cells for downlink transmissions to a mobile terminal in a link imbalance zone. The mobile terminal acquires information about the subframe allocation and uses the subframe allocation information to select the signals used for adapting receiver settings used when operating in the link imbalance zone. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044819 | ROUTER AND METHOD FOR DISTINGUISHING REAL-TIME PACKETS IN THE ROUTER - A router and method distinguishes real-time packets in the router. The router reads information of reference packets and a packet length of a test packet. A packet arrival rate of the test packet, an inter-arrival time standard deviation of the test packet, and a packet length standard deviation of the test packet are calculated according to the information of the reference packets. The router marks the test packet as the real-time packets in response to a determination that the packet length of the test packet falls in the allowable range, the packet arrival rate of the reference packets falls in the allowable range, the inter-arrival time standard deviation of the test packet falls in the allowable range, and the packet length standard deviation of the test packet falls in the allowable range. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044820 | GATEWAY DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION - A gateway device and method for establishing Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication includes setting coding methods of the VoIP, and setting quality of service (QoS) parameters corresponding to each coding method. In response to dialing a VoIP phone call from a local user terminal, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) session is initiated to determine a coding method. QoS parameters corresponding to the determined coding method are parsed to generate a request packet. The request packet is sent to base station to request for establishing a VoIP phone call. The VoIP phone call is established between the local user terminal and a remote user terminal by sending the VoIP packets through the base station to the remote user terminal. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044821 | CONTROL CHANNEL MONITORING APPARATUS IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method for monitoring a control channel and an apparatus thereof. A reference carrier is set, and then the multi-carrier sends blind decoding area information based on the reference carrier to monitor a control channel. A terminal monitors the control channel based on the blind decoding area information. The terminal performs blind decoding only for a component carrier required, and thus reduces power consumption and reception complexity. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044822 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DRIVE TEST IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for matching the radio channel measurement timing of Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) cycle with timings of the Discontinuous Reception (DRX) cycle are provided. The radio channel measurement method of a terminal according to the present invention includes configuring a DRX cycle, receiving a Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) cycle, comparing the DRX cycle and the MDT cycle, measuring, when the MDT cycle is an integer multiple of the DRX cycle, the radio channel at DRX timings matching with MDT timings, and storing a result of the measurement. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044823 | TONE RELAY SYSTEM AND METHOD - A tone relay system comprises a tone detector arranged to receive a sequence of signal samples and to provide a plurality of media descriptors, each media descriptor comprising a cell of one or more of the signal samples and a tone detection meta-information for the cell; and a tone relay module arranged to receive each media descriptor, to perform an evaluation of the meta-information and modify the meta-information depending on one or more preceding media descriptors when a result of the evaluation indicates an undetermined tone state, and to provide the media descriptors with a predetermined delay to a tone aggregator module, when the meta-information indicates a tone, for transmission over a network, and to provide the media descriptors without the predetermined time delay to an encoder module, for transmission over the network, otherwise. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044824 | Controlling Cell Activation in a Radio Communication Network - In a radio communication network there are a number of radio base stations, at least one of which belongs to a first radio access network and manages at least one active cell serving user equipment. It is determined whether a passive other cell of a radio base station belonging to a second overlapping radio access network should be activated based on information representative of radio access preferences of the user equipment (S | 02-23-2012 |
20120044825 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING CONTROL MESSAGES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - There is described a method of processing control messages received by a wireless communication network from a wireless communication device. The method comprises: monitoring received control messages sent by the wireless communication device to identify control messages conveying information indicating whether or not the wireless communication device has a handover capability associated with performing a handover between the packet-switched and circuit-switched domains; for any such identified control message which indicates that the corresponding wireless communication device does not have said handover capability, modifying the control message to indicate that said corresponding wireless communication device does have said handover capability and forwarding the modified control message to the core network; and storing data indicative of whether or not the wireless communication device has said handover capability. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044826 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING MCCH CONTROL SIGNALING IN MBSFN MANNER - A method and device for realizing MBMS control signaling transmission in MBSFN manner are provided in the present invention. Wherein, a base station transmits multimedia broadcast multicast service MBMS control signaling in MBSFN manner, preferably, the base station multiplexes MBMS control signaling and MBMS service data in a same MBSFN subframe, and transmits them according to an adjustment period and/or a repetition period. Then, a mobile station receives the MBMS control signaling at the corresponding MBSFN subframe according to the adjustment period and/or the repetition period. With the solution of the present invention, MBMS control signaling transmission in MBSFN manner is realized. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044827 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK - A communication method between nodes that have their own timers and have an equal start time of a frame for Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) communication based on their timers in a mobile ad-hoc network, in which a node receives a timer value derived by a neighbor node on the basis of a transmission time, from the neighbor node, the node calculates a time offset indicative of a difference between a timer value derived on the basis of a time the node received the timer value, and the received timer value, and stores the time offset in a memory, and upon receiving a time value indicating a time related to inter-node TDMA communication from the neighbor node, the node corrects the received time value as a time value based on its timer using the time offset, and performs TDMA communication using the corrected time value. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044828 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA RELAY USING SAME - Disclosed is a method for transmitting integrated packet data by a relay station (RS) in a multi-hop relay communication system, including: integrating a plurality of packet data received from mobile stations (MSs) and determining a data integration scheme for transmitting the integrated data to base station (BS); receiving packet data from MSs, classifying the received packet data into one or more integration packet classes according to the determined data integration scheme, and storing the same; determining QoS (Quality of Service) requirements and a MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) level of the stored integration packet classes; calculating required resource according to the determined MCS level and requesting an allocation of the resource from the BS; receiving an approval for resource allocation from the BS, and modulating and coding the integrated packet class, mapping the same to the resource to configure an integrated packet; and transmitting the configured integrated packet to the BS. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044829 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING CO-CHANNEL AND CO-EXISTENCE VIA ENHANCED FRAME PREAMBLES - Enhanced frame preambles facilitate co-channel co-existence in a wireless communication environment by having at least one preamble characteristic that connotes channel-sharing information regarding the wireless communication environment. In an exemplary embodiment, a downlink subframe is received in one or more wireless communication signals in a wireless communication environment. A preamble is detected in the downlink subframe, and at least one characteristic of the preamble is ascertained. Channel-sharing information for the wireless communication environment is determined based upon the at least one characteristic of the preamble. In another exemplary embodiment, a channel is scanned to detect secondary preambles being transmitted on the channel. A current preamble configuration, including a permutation of preamble location and preamble content corresponding to the secondary preambles, is determined, which connote channel-sharing information. A next available preamble location may be adopted based on the current preamble configuration. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044830 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNALS USING COLLABORATIVE MIMO SCHEME - A method for reducing inter-cell interference and a method for transmitting a signal by a collaborative MIMO scheme, in a communication system having a multi-cell environment are disclosed. An example of a method for transmitting, by a mobile station, precoding information in a collaborative MIMO communication system includes determining a precoding matrix set including precoding matrices of one more base stations including a serving base station, based on signal strength of the serving base station, and transmitting information about the precoding matrix set to the serving base station. A mobile station in an edge of a cell performs a collaborative MIMO mode or inter-cell interference mitigation mode using the information about the precoding matrix set collaboratively with neighboring base stations. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044831 | Method Apparatus and Network Node for Applying Conditional CQI Reporting - A method for limiting Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) reporting from a User Equipment to a network node is provided where a User Equipment can transmit CQI reports to a network node, such as e.g. a base station, when the User Equipment is operating in low transmission and/or low reception activity mode. A limited CQI reporting is obtained by triggering the reporting according to one or more predefined rules, which to at least some extent depend on CQI specific information provided to the User Equipment from the network node. A User Equipment and a network node adapted to operate in accordance with the suggested method are also provided. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044832 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND A DELAY AMOUNT DETECTION METHOD - A detection section ( | 02-23-2012 |
20120057475 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PERFORM JAMMING BASED ON SIGNAL AND INTERFERENCE IN PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided in which a signal is received on a resource, a signal quality of the signal is determined, a signal energy of the signal is determined, and the resource is jammed based on the signal quality and the signal energy by transmitting a signal on the resource. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057476 | MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS OVER FIXED WIRELESS NETWORKS - One or more devices determine uplink signal strength for a machine-to-machine (M2M) device using a wireless access network. The one or more devices identify a default uplink transmission mode that requires the M2M device to employ transmission time interval (TTI) bundling, when the uplink signal strength is below a particular threshold, and identify a default uplink transmission mode that requires the M2M device to not employ TTI bundling, when the uplink signal strength is not below the particular threshold. The one or more devices store, in a memory, the default transmission mode for the M2M device. The one or more devices retrieve, from the memory and during a wake-up time window associated with the M2M device, the default transmission mode for the M2M device and construct, for the M2M device, an uplink scheduling grant based on the stored default transmission mode. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057477 | Mobile Subscriber Information Transmission Over Multiple Uplink Frames - Methods and apparatuses of a mobile subscriber transmitting information to a base station are disclosed. One method includes identifying an uplink transmission condition. If the uplink transmission condition is identified, the mobile subscriber transmits a message over multiple uplink frames using multiple uplink frame types. The mobile subscriber may inform the base station that it is transmitting the message over the multiple uplink frames. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057478 | Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation Control in a Multi-Access Radio Communication System - A scheduler for ranking-based scheduling of multiple users on a shared communication channel of a serving base station in a wireless communication system comprises a determiner ( | 03-08-2012 |
20120057479 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL UNIT AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM - A communication control unit and a communication control system are provided in which control devices can synchronously operate. In a communication control system in which a communication control unit and multiple control devices having an actuator to operate a control target are connected via a network, the communication control unit provides a control command to the control devices, synchronizes times of the communication control unit and the control devices, obtains communication delays relative to the control devices, collects control start times of the control devices, obtains a time by subtracting the control start time from a predetermined time as a start time of the control device, calculates a time obtained by subtracting the communication delay from the start time for each control device, and transmits the control command to the control devices before the earliest time of the calculated times. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057480 | UE RECEIVER REFERENCE SIGNAL PROCESSING THAT UTILIZES RESOURCE PARTITIONING INFORMATION - Communication in a dominant interference scenario may be supported by performing inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC). According to certain aspects of ICIC, resource coordination/partitioning may be performed to allocate resources to a serving Node B located near the vicinity of a strong interfering Node B. The interfering Node B may avoid transmitting on the allocated/protected resources, but transmissions from the interfering Node B on resources not allocated to the serving Node B (i.e., unprotected) may cause significant interference on cell-specific reference signal (CRS) tones of the serving Node B. Therefore, if the CRS tones of the unallocated/unprotected resources are used, performance degradation may result to various operations of the serving Node B. Therefore, certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for a UE receiver in utilizing resource partitioning information (RPI) for performing CRS processing in a heterogeneous network (HetNet). | 03-08-2012 |
20120057481 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING ROUND TRIP TIME BASED ON WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A RTT measurement system includes first and second signal time measuring devices respectively connected to two wireless LAN devices and a RTT estimator. Each one of the first and second signal time measuring devices senses a transmitted signal from a corresponding WLAN device and a corresponding received signal and measures a signal time difference between the transmitted signal and the received signal. The RTT estimator estimates a RTT using the measured signal time differences at the first and second signal time measuring devices. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057482 | UNIFIED FEEDBACK FRAMEWORK FOR MU-MIMO ENHANCEMENT BASED ON INDICATION OF PREFERRED PRECODER PAIRINGS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for generating unified feedback framework for Multi User Multiple Input Multiple Output (MU-MIMO) enhancement based on indication of a preferred precoder pairings. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057483 | Frame Structure For Multi-Input Multi-Output - Described herein are implementations related to data communication using a frame that includes at least two data packets. One of the data packets includes a preamble that is separated from a payload by a gap, void or empty space. Another of the data packets includes a preamble that is aligned with the gap, void or empty space. A receiver of the frame may perform channel measurements during the gap, void or empty space. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057484 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING DOWNLINK CHANNEL QUALITY - The present invention provides a method includes: receiving a downlink channel quality indicator or an interference indicator, where the downlink channel quality indicator or the interference indicator is fed back by a UE; estimating a weak interference noise matrix of the UE according to the downlink channel quality indicator or the interference indicator, where the downlink channel quality indicator or the interference indicator is fed back by the UE; obtaining a time-frequency channel matrix of a serving cell and a time-frequency strong interference matrix of a strong interfering cell, and obtaining a time-frequency interference noise matrix of the UE according to the estimated weak interference noise matrix and the time-frequency strong interference matrix; and estimate downlink channel quality according to the time-frequency channel matrix and the time-frequency interference noise matrix. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057485 | DYNAMICALLY MANAGING AND RECONFIGURING WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A wireless network with multiple subscriber systems in a lobe pool may operate by determining a state of the wireless network, identifying a new condition, the new condition including a new demand condition or a new network health condition, determining whether the new condition has a threshold impact on operations of the wireless network or component subscriber systems of the wireless network, and if the threshold impact exists, reconfiguring the wireless network to accommodate the new condition. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057486 | TO SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless sensor network of devices including a sensor and a coordinator:
| 03-08-2012 |
20120057487 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING ACK/NACK - The present invention is directed to a wireless communication system. Particularly, the present invention is directed to a method and an apparatus of transmitting an ACK/NACK (acknowledgement/negative ACK) signal by a user equipment in a wireless communication system, which includes receiving a plurality of data units from a base station, bundling ACK/NACK results for a plurality of the data units per time or frequency interval to obtain at least one bundled ACK/NACK result, performing ACK/NACK multiplexing over the at least one ACK/NACK result to determine an uplink resource for ACK/NACK transmission and a bit sequence, and transmitting the bit sequence to the base station via the uplink resource for the ACK/NACK transmission. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057488 | Method and Device for Detecting of Transmitting Antenna Configuration in Long Term Evolution System - The present invention discloses a method and device for detecting transmitting antenna port configuration in a LTE system. The method includes: receiving a signal transmitted by a transmitting end at a receiving end, extracting from the signal a reference signal transmitted by each transmitting antenna port and descrambling; calculating and obtaining reference signal energy of each transmitting antenna port, dividing the reference signal energy into a first type of reference signal energy and a second type of reference signal energy, and determining a current bandwidth; and comparing the first type of reference signal energy with the second type of reference signal energy, and determining the number of transmitting antenna ports according to a comparison result. The present invention does not need to perform P-BCH blind detection multiple times to obtain the number of transmitting antenna ports, thus improving the performance of cell initial search and reducing the complexity of implementation. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057489 | METHOD FOR SELECTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PATH - Disclosed is a method of selecting a communication path having wider communication bands with respect to wireless communication apparatuses capable of performing direct communication between the wireless communication apparatuses without routing through a relay apparatus. A first wireless communication apparatus determines the capability of the relay apparatus to determine a threshold and compares the received signal strength indicator of a packet transmitted from a second wireless communication apparatus to the first wireless communication apparatus by direct communication with the threshold to determine a communication path for a packet to be transmitted to the second wireless communication apparatus. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057490 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING A DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE CARRIERS - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention discloses a method and apparatus for monitoring a downlink control channel in a wireless communication system which supports multiple carriers. According to one embodiment of the present invention, provided is a method in which a user equipment that supports carrier aggregation for performing communication through the use of a plurality of component carriers monitors a downlink control channel, wherein said method comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, setup information for a specific component carrier among the plurality of component carriers; starting a timer in accordance with the control signal received through the downlink control channel; and monitoring the downlink control channel through the specific component carrier and deactivating the rest of the plurality of component carriers when timer expires. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057491 | Method of Scheduling Transmissions in a Communication System - In a telecommunication system, a method of controlling and implementing uplink transmission schemes specifically for user equipment having multiple input/multiple output (MIMO) capability, including initialising said scheme at a network element; forwarding a message from said network element to said terminal indicating said scheme; transmitting uplink signals according to said scheme. It may include selecting a pre-coding arrangement such as a Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator or other scheduling grant information. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057492 | Opportunistic 40 MHz Mode of Transmission in Wireless Transmitters - A system includes a signal processing module and a control module. The signal processing module receives a first clear channel assessment (CCA) signal for a first sub-channel of a communication channel, increases a pulse width of the first CCA signal by a predetermined period of time, and generates a second CCA signal. The control module receives the second CCA signal and a third CCA signal for a second sub-channel of the communication channel. The control module transmits data via one of the second sub-channel and the communication channel based on the second and third CCA signals. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057493 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CONTROL PROGRAM - A mobile communication terminal 10 receives “HCS_PRIO” of a notice data (System Information Block Type 3) of a base station | 03-08-2012 |
20120057494 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INCREASING SPECTRUM USE EFFICIENCY IN A MESH NETWORK - Mesh Network Access Points (APs) points, including gateways and routers, are deployed over a geographic area. The APs monitor the communication channel for other carriers and transmit accordingly. The APs selectively co-transmit when other carriers are sensed, if the efficiency of the mesh network will improve. APs select a transmission rate based on observed carrier-to-interference ratios. APs use directional antennas to increase carrier-to-interference ratios and spectral efficiency. AP transmit schedules are adaptable and adjusted according to observed carrier-to-interference measurements. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057495 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE AND CORRELATION SETTING METHOD - Provided is a radio communication base station device which can suppress a use amount of an SRS communication resource. In this device, a correlation rule setting unit ( | 03-08-2012 |
20120057496 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PAGING USER EQUIPMENT - A method, an apparatus, and a system for paging a User Equipment (UE) are provided. The method for paging a UE includes: sending a downlink data notification message inclusive of paging range indicator information to a core network control plane entity; receiving a paging message sent by the core network control plane entity and inclusive of a raging range; and initiating a paging to a UE corresponding to a user ID in the paging range. The apparatus for paging a UE includes: a first sending module, a first receiving module, and a paging initiating module. A system for paging a UE is further provided. With the method, apparatus, and system for paging a UE, the UE can be paged in only a set paging range. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057497 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING NETWORK PERFORMANCE - The present invention relates to the communications field, and discloses a method for measuring network performance. With the method, a receiving end receives a performance measurement message corresponding to a data stream, obtains a performance measurement parameter corresponding to the data stream, so that stream-based network performance measurement can be implemented. The present invention also discloses an apparatus and a system for measuring network performance, and another method for measuring network performance. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057498 | METHOD FOR POSITIONING USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING THE METHOD - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to an apparatus for positioning a user equipment and method thereof. The present invention includes receiving, from a plurality of base stations including a serving cell, a predetermined number of consecutive positioning subframes in a radio frame at a predetermined period, each of the consecutive positioning subframe including a reference signal, measuring a time of arrival of the positioning subframes by using the reference signal, and transmitting a result of the measured time of arrival of the positioning subframe to the serving cell, wherein the predetermined period is set to be larger than a generation period of the reference signal and wherein sequences of the reference signals included in the consecutive positioning subframes are different from each other. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057499 | Channel Quality Indication Report with Granularity Dependent of the Number of Best Component Carriers - According to several embodiments of the present invention, an apparatus (e.g., a UE) monitors a set of component carriers by referring to sub-bands having a sub-band size. The channel quality of the component carriers is detected, best component carriers are identified based on the channel quality, the number of the best component carriers is identified, and the subband size is varied based the identified number of the best component carriers. Identification information and channel quality information on the best component carriers may then be provided, for example to a network control element such as an eNode-B. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057500 | RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A control unit ( | 03-08-2012 |
20120063333 | Manageability Tools for Lossless Networks - Manageability tools are provided for allowing an administrator to have better control over switches in a lossless network of switches. These tools provide the ability to detect slow drain and congestion bottlenecks, detect stuck virtual channels and loss of credits, while hold times on edge ASICs to be different from hold times encore ASICs, and mitigate severe latency bottlenecks. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063334 | ZIGBEE IP/6LOWPAN ROUTER - A system and method for managing energy of a home or other structure are disclosed. An energy management system for a home network comprises a central device controller configured to communicate with energy consuming devices, energy generation devices and storage devices at a home. Power/energy measuring devices provide consumption measurements for the home and each device to the controller. A home network router routes communications among various networks for the home. The router provides for a 6LowPan/Zigbee network to communicate with WiFi, Ethernet and the like networked devices of the home. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063335 | PACKET IDENTIFICATION FOR POWER SAVING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A network coordinator can assign an association identifier (AID) and/or a group identifier (GID) to identify a client station to which a packet is to be transmitted and to enable the client station to determine whether to receive an incoming packet. The network coordinator can randomly generate a base AID that is representative of the network coordinator and can assign at least one AID to client stations to minimize the probability of client stations associated with proximate network coordinators being assigned the same AIDs. The network coordinator can also randomly assign at least one GID to a group of client stations to minimize the probability of groups of client stations associated with the proximate network coordinators being assigned the same GID. The client station can analyze indications of a received AID and/or received GID to determine whether to receive the packet or whether to switch to an inactive power state. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063336 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TUNING TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS IN MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT SYSTEMS WITH AGED AND NOISY CHANNEL ESTIMATION - System and method for tuning transmission parameters based on estimated ratio between a signal to an estimated interference plus noise (SINR) of a user, in a multiple-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) communication system, the method including obtaining channel state information (CSI) related to a channel from an access point (AP) to users that participate in a next MU-MIMO transmission, wherein the AP, and the users pertain to the MU-MIMO communication system, obtaining error coefficients related to errors related to channel-ageing and to estimation noise of the CSI, and calculating the estimated SINR, wherein the estimated interference is related to power of the other users and to the estimated channel magnitude the user u, and to the error coefficients, wherein the estimated channel magnitude is derived from the CSI. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063337 | ACCESS POINT CONTROLLER FOR ADJUSTING A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - Systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with controlling a wireless access point are described. According to one embodiment, an access point controller is configured to control a wireless access point. In one embodiment, the access point controller includes a detection logic configured to determine whether a wireless station that is wirelessly communicating with the wireless access point is within a predetermined distance to the wireless access point. In one embodiment, the wireless access point is configured to transmit signals at a first transmission rate within a first transmission range. The access point controller also includes an adjusting logic configured to, in response to the wireless station being within the predetermined distance to the wireless access point, reduce the first transmission range of the wireless access point to a second transmission range by increasing the first transmission rate of the wireless access point to a second transmission rate. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063338 | Wireless Communication Enabled Meter and Network - A meter enabled for wireless communication and a wireless communication network are disclosed. A meter enabled for wireless communication comprises a metering device, a wireless communication system and an interface between the two. Meter data can be read, and the meter can be controlled via communication with a wireless network. A self-configuring wireless network is disclosed that includes a number of vnodes, and one or more VGATES. Vnodes are operative to form ad hoc piconet connections. The one or more VGATES comprise computer network gateways that are enabled for wireless communication. The VGATES enable the wireless array of vnodes to communicate with a private or public computer network to transmit data or receive commands. The network may also communicate with a VNOC system that enables the wireless array of vnodes to communicate (either directly or through a VGATE) with a central control facility. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063339 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PACKET IN WIRELESS NETWORK - An apparatus for transmitting a packet in a wireless network includes: a delay time calculator for calculating an expected delay time to a destination based on the number of hops for a received packet to be transmitted to the destination and a channel access time; and a packet processor for discarding the received packet or inserting the received packet into a transmission queue according to a result of a comparison made between the expected delay time and a preset allowable value. The delay time calculator calculates the number of hops by a routing protocol used in the apparatus or by an analysis of a header portion of the received packet. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063340 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACCESS POINT BASED POSITIONING - Apparatus and methods for scanning for access points (APs) for wireless local area network (WLAN) positioning. In one embodiment a wireless device includes a WLAN positioning system. The WLAN positioning system includes an AP scanner. The AP scanner is configured to determine which WLAN channels are being used by APs proximate to the wireless device. The AP scanner is also configured to scan for AP transmissions only the WLAN channels determined to be used by APs proximate to the wireless device. The AP scanner is further configured to extract signal strength and AP identification information for WLAN positioning from the AP transmissions on the scanned channels. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063341 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - To reduce power consumption in a mobile station apparatus in uplink, while making the system more efficient, the mobile station apparatus has a plurality of transmission antennas | 03-15-2012 |
20120063342 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus transmits a packet that includes a destination address, a source address, and a frame body over a wireless network. The wireless communication apparatus computes a first calculation value for use in detecting packet falsification based on a destination address, a source address, and a frame body by using a predetermined computation method, and stores the first calculation value that is associated with the destination address. When a second packet is to be transmitted to a same destination address that is the same as the destination address stored in the storage unit, the wireless communication apparatus computes a second calculation value using the first calculation value stored in the storage unit and the frame body contained in the second packet by using the predetermined computation method. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063343 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - To measure the channel quality of the own cell accurately in a condition where there is no interference from a neighbor cell. A wireless communication terminal according to the invention is a wireless communication terminal to be connected to a base station for transmitting and receiving data to/from the base station, the wireless communication terminal including: a receiver that receives a signal which includes control information provided for measuring a channel quality of own cell from the base station; an extractor that extracts the control information from the signal received by the receiver; a measurement section that measures, on the basis of the control information, the channel quality of the own cell in a domain where a neighbor cell does not transmit a signal; and a transmitter that transmits a measurement result of the channel quality of the own cell measured by the measurement section, to the base station. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063344 | METHOD OF ASSIGNING PRECODING VECTORS IN A MOBILE CELLULAR NETWORK - A method for assigning precoding vectors in a mobile cellular network as well as a base station. A base station provides a code book comprising indexed precoding vectors to mobile stations associated with the base station via a downlink channel. A mobile station selects indices of preferred precoding vectors from the code book and reports the indices to the base station via an uplink channel. The mobile selects indices of preferred companion precoding vectors from the code book that shall preferably be used by the base station for other mobile stations served by the base station on the same time/frequency resource, and reports the indices associated with the preferred companion precoding vectors to the base station via the uplink channel. For each mobile station, the base station determines a precoding vector based on the reported indices of the preferred precoding vectors and the reported indices of the preferred companion precoding vectors. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063345 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MEASURING NETWORK PERFORMANCE - In one of many possible embodiments, a system includes a session sender configured to define and transmit a sender test packet, and a session reflector communicatively coupled to the session sender. The session reflector is configured to receive the sender test packet from the session sender, determine whether the sender test packet is received by a predetermined time. Upon a determination that the sender test packet is received by the predetermined time, the session reflector is configured to define a response test packet and transmit the response test packet to the session sender. The response test packet is defined to include data for calculating at least one two-way performance metric. In some embodiments, the session reflector is configured to record information for calculating at least one one-way performance metric. In certain embodiments, a fetch client is configured to remotely retrieve the recorded information from the session reflector. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063346 | Method for Transmitting an Information Sequence - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for applying successive multi-rank beamforming strategies (e.g., successive precoding strategies) for the design of precoders over a set of parallel channels. Successive beamforming is applied to a narrow band channel model and is also applied for finer quantization of a single beamforming vector (e.g., recursive beamforming). A first embodiment provides the optimal approach with high complexity. An alternative embodiment provides successive beamforming for near optimal precoding selection with medium complexity. A low complexity method for precoder selection is also provided wherein a channel representative matrix for the set of parallel channels is determined and successive beamforming on the calculated channel representative is applied. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063347 | Methods and Systems for Estimating Network Available Bandwidth Using Packet Pairs and Spatial Filtering - Estimation of available bandwidth on a network uses packet pairs and spatially filtering. Packet pairs are transmitted over the network. The dispersion of the packet pairs is used to generate samples of the available bandwidth, which are then classified into bins to generate a histogram. The bins can have uniform bin widths, and the histogram data can be aged so that older samples are given less weight in the estimation. The histogram data is then spatially filtered. Kernel density algorithms can be used to spatially filter the histogram data. The network available bandwidth is estimated using the spatially filtered histogram data. Alternatively, the spatially filtered histogram data can be temporally filtered before the available bandwidth is estimated. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063348 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING BEAM FORMING FOR A SINGLE USER - The invention discloses a system for implementing beam forming for a single user is, in the system, a null widening calculation unit is for calculating the first beam forming weight corresponding to the first detection threshold and the second beam forming weight corresponding to the second detection threshold by using a null widening algorithm according to the input first detection threshold and second detection threshold; a beam forming unit is for implementing beam forming according to the first beam forming weight and second beam forming weight respectively. The invention further discloses a method for implementing beam forming for a single user, and the method includes: calculating the first beam forming weight corresponding to the first detection threshold and the second beam forming weight corresponding to the second detection threshold by using a null widening algorithm according to the input first detection threshold and second detection threshold; and implementing beam forming. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063349 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - Provided are an apparatus and a method for monitoring a control channel in a multiple-carrier system. The user equipment monitors downlink control channels for a plurality of scheduled component carriers in an extended search space. The user equipment receives downlink control information for the scheduled component carrier via a successfully decoded downlink control channel. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063350 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - Provided are an apparatus and a method for monitoring a control channel in a multi-carrier system. A plurality of sub-search spaces within an extended search space corresponds to a plurality of scheduled component carriers, respectively. Each of the plurality of sub-search spaces includes a plurality of control channel elements (CCEs), and the CCEs of the plurality of sub-search spaces are interleaved with each another within the extended search space. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063351 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MONITORING THE CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and device for monitoring the control channel in a multiple carrier system. A terminal determines an extended search space comprising a plurality of sub-search spaces, and each of the plurality of sub-search spaces corresponds to at least one of a plurality of scheduled component carriers. The terminal monitors a downlink control channel for the scheduled component carrier corresponding to each of the plurality of sub-search spaces. At least one of the plurality of sub-search spaces is a shared sub-search space corresponding to at least two of the plurality of scheduled component carriers. | 03-15-2012 |
20120069743 | INTELLIGENT JACK PROVIDING PERCEPTIBLE INDICATION OF NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - An intelligent network jack configured for connection to a communication network includes a housing, an input connector, an output connector adapted for coupling to the communication network, processing circuitry arranged within the housing and operative to perform a test for connectivity between the network jack and the communication network, and a display for presenting a result of the connectivity test in a user-perceptible manner. In one embodiment, the network jack comprises an in-wall network jack configured for installation with the housing primarily on one side of a wall and with at least the input connector and display accessible on an opposite side of the wall. In another embodiment, the network jack comprises an adaptor network jack with the output connector configured for insertion into an input connector of an existing conventional in-wall network jack. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069744 | GENERATING AND ALLOCATING PERFORMANCE MONITORING TRAFFIC - A method includes monitoring, by a first network device, traffic from a customer device, wherein the traffic is to be forwarded via a provider's network. The method also includes identifying a traffic pattern associated with the traffic, identifying a link on which the identified traffic pattern was transmitted and generating performance monitoring traffic. The method further includes forwarding, by the first network device, the performance monitoring traffic to the provider's network via the link on which the identified traffic pattern was transmitted. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069745 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO IMPROVE LDP CONVERGENCE USING HIERARCHICAL LABEL STACKING - A method for improving LDP (Label Distribution Protocol) convergence time in an MPLS (Multi-Protocol Label Switching) network is described. An hierarchical LSP is established to transport packets belonging to a FEC attached to an egress LSR. The hierarchical LSP includes an egress LSR LSP that is common for each of the FECs attached to the egress LSR and forms a path from the ingress LSR through one or more intermediate LSRs to the egress LSR. The egress LSR LSP is used when label switching packets destined for the FECs attached to the egress LSR. The hierarchical LSP also includes a unique FEC LSP for each FEC that is used by the egress LSR to identify and forward packets to that FEC. Responsive to a topology change that changes a next-hop of the ingress LSR to reach the egress LSR, the ingress LSR modifies an entry in a forwarding structure to change the next-hop for the egress LSR LSP and does not modify substantially any forwarding structure entities for the FEC LSPs. LDP convergence time is reduced through a reduction of forwarding structure modifications after the topology change. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069746 | METHODS OF CO-EXISTENCE FOR WIDEBAND TRANSMISSIONS - Embodiments of systems and methods for providing wideband transmission co-existence are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069747 | Method and System for Detecting Changes In Network Performance - A system and method are provided for identifying a change point in a set of data. The system performs the method by receiving a set of data. The data indicates a plurality of performance measurements from a measurement point in a network. Each of the plurality of measurements represents a single type of performance measurement made at the measurement point at each of a corresponding plurality of points in time. The method also includes dividing the set of data into a plurality of data points in a chronological order. Each data point has a value corresponding to the performance measurements. The method also includes ranking the data points in an ascending order, calculating a cumulative sum for each of the data points, calculating a change score for the set of data points. A change point is identified in the data set if the change score exceeds a predetermined confidence level. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069748 | DYNAMIC MOBILE APPLICATION QUALITY-OF-SERVICE MONITOR - Technologies are generally described for determining a quality-of-service of mobile applications. In some examples, a process for determining a quality-of-service of a mobile application executing on a mobile device coupled to a network includes collecting, by a mobile monitoring application (MMA), network usage measurements associated with multiple network communication sessions from a first network communication layer, wherein the multiple network communication sessions are conducted via the network and are associated with the mobile device. The process may also include evaluating, by the MMA, the collected network usage measurements to determine application-specific usage data associated with the mobile application, and determining, by the MMA, the quality-of-service of the mobile application based on the application-specific usage data. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069749 | MOBILITY POLICY UPDATES FOR MOBILE DEVICES - A packet data network gateway device may receive packet network data at a packet data network gateway device; filter the received packet network data to extract information associated with one or more messages in the packet network data; analyze the extracted information; and dynamically determine one or more of policy updates, rules, or thresholds based on the analyzing of the information and information associated with one or more of subscribers, location, existing policies, network operating condition and load. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069750 | METHOD TO CONTROL RECONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - Methods to control reconfiguration of multiple radio access bearers in a mobile wireless device connected to a wireless network are described. The mobile wireless device is connected to the wireless network through a voice connection and a data connection simultaneously. The data connection is concurrently active with the voice connection. Transmission of one or more signaling messages for the data connection is delayed until the voice connection terminates. Representative signaling messages include messages that reconfigure a radio access bearer supporting the data connection and messages estimated to exceed a pre-determined transmission time interval. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069751 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOVER METHOD OF THE MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal and a handover method for the mobile terminal are disclosed. A mobile terminal according to an embodiment of the invention may include: a communication unit configured to receive from a base station multiple frames, each belonging to one of two or more frame in a set order of priority; and a control unit configured to control the mobile terminal to perform a handover to a base station based on the occurrence pattern of frame types of the multiple frames. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069752 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING A MOBILE DEVICE NETWORK FOOTPRINT INDEX - The present relates to a method and a system for generating a mobile device network footprint index. The method and system receives, at an analytic system, information related to a network footprint of mobile devices. This information consists in records representative of mobile IP sessions occurring on a mobile IP network. Then, the method and system aggregates, by means of the analytic system, the information by models of mobile devices; and processes, by means of the analytic system, the aggregated information to calculate at least one metric representative of a network footprint of a selected model of mobile device over a selected period of time. A mobile device network footprint index is generated, by means of the analytic system, by calculating the at least one metric for several selected models of mobile devices over the selected period of time. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069753 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION BASED ON MIDAMBLE - Channel estimation at a user equipment includes estimating channel quality of at least one channel. A first algorithm or a second algorithm is selected based on the estimated channel quality. Channel estimation is performed based on the selected algorithm. The first algorithm may be a midamble multiplication-based algorithm. The second algorithm may be a midamble division algorithm. Channel estimation may also include estimating noise of a channel and adaptively setting a threshold based on the estimated noise to refine the channel estimation. The estimating channel quality, selecting of a first or second algorithm and channel estimation may be performed iteratively for contributing signals on a channel. An adaptive threshold may be modified across iterations. The channel estimation may also include determining a delay profile of a channel to refine the channel estimation. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069754 | EXTENSION OF A LOCAL AREA PHONE SYSTEM TO A WIDE AREA NETWORK WITH HANDOFF FEATURE - A soft switch | 03-22-2012 |
20120069755 | OFDMA WITH ADAPTIVE SUBCARRIER-CLUSTER CONFIGURATION AND SELECTIVE LOADING - A method and apparatus for allocating subcarriers in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system is described. In one embodiment, the method comprises allocating at least one diversity cluster of subcarriers to a first subscriber and allocating at least one coherence cluster to a second subscriber. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069756 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include mitigating interference for devices communicating with femto nodes or other low power base stations by assigning protected resources for communicating therewith. The protected resources can be negotiated with a macrocell base station using interference cancellation. The protected resources can be assigned based on an early or late handover event, which can indicate that the device may be susceptible to interference from the macrocell base station. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069757 | Low Complexity Link Adaptatation for LTE/LTE-A Uplink with a Turbo Receiver - An inventive method for link adaptation for an LTE/LTE-A uplink with a turbo SIC receiver includes the steps of determining a precoding matrix index PMI and rank index RI selection for an LTE/LTE-A uplink when precoding of the uplink is enabled, responsive to channel state information of a subcarrier in the uplink; determining a decoding order for codewords in the uplink i) when the precoding of the uplink is not enabled and ii) if needed when the precoding of the uplink is enabled; performing modulation and coding scheme MCS assignment for the uplink based on a hard decision successive interference cancellation SIC rule (without intra-CW cancellation) or a partial hard decision successive interference cancellation SIC rule (with intra-CW cancellation), responsive to the determined PMI and RI selection; and influencing data transmission in the uplink responsive to the MCS assignment for detection by a turbo SIC receiver. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069758 | MULTI-MODE MULTI-BAND MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND MODE SWITCHING METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a multi-mode multi-band mobile communication terminal and a mode switching method thereof wherein a mode switching can be performed between an asynchronous network and a synchronous network by minimizing interruption in communication. According to the switching method of a multi-mode multi-band mobile communication terminal, the power of a signal received from an asynchronous network or a synchronous network is measured and the measured power of the received signal drives a modem portion, thereby switching the mode of the mobile communication terminal. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069759 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING SUBSCRIBER STATION MOBILITY - Methods and apparatus for identifying a subscriber station which is in motion, determining a mobility metric indicative of a level of mobility of the subscriber station and varying or updating one or more operating parameters based on the mobility metric. An apparatus can determine a measure of mobility based on one or a combination of a plurality of factors, such as variations in signal strength, variations in a channel estimate, or variations in phase or frequency of a particular signal or signal component. The one or more measures of mobility can be combined to form a single measure of mobility, the measure of mobility can be quantized to a predetermined number of mobility levels and one or more operating parameters can be varied or adjusted based on the mobility level. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069760 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TIMING OF NETWORK PERFORMANCE LOGGING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system controls timing of network performance information logging of a cellular network by configuring a mobile device to automatically collect data about physical characteristics of the cellular network and log that data. The mobile device initially receives network performance information logging configuration from its registered cellular network. Based on the configuration, the mobile device configures itself to collect and log the network performance information relating to physical characteristics of the cellular network. While in idle mode, the mobile device collects and logs the information. A logging duration timer corresponds to a specified time duration over which the mobile device logs network performance information. If the mobile device starts the logging duration timer at the time of configuration, it maintains the timer even after the transition to idle mode. The mobile device may also start the logging duration timer after it transitions to idle mode. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069761 | REMOTE TESTING AND MONITORING TO A CELL SITE IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Systems and methods provide remote performance monitoring and testing to a cell site in a cellular communications network. The systems and methods include a network management center having remote monitoring and testing capabilities utilizing an intelligent customer service unit that traps and makes available alarm information on the transport link. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069762 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SERVICE COVERAGE AREA MANAGEMENT - A wireless terminal serviced by a Wireless Access Point (WAP) of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) infrastructure includes a processor, an RF unit and a directional antenna. The RF unit receives instructions from the WAP that are derived from participatory data based on communications involving the WAP and non-participatory data based on communications the WAP listens to, but does not participate in. The processor alters a gain vector of the directional antenna based on the instructions received from the WAP. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069763 | Method and Apparatus for Negotiation Control of Quality of Service Parameters - A method and an apparatus for negotiation control of Quality of Service (QoS) parameters are provided. The method includes: obtaining, by a High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Serving Gateway (HSGW), static QoS parameters of a User Equipment (UE), where the static QoS parameters include static QoS parameters related to an Access Point Name (APN); establishing, by the HSGW, a Packet Data Network (PDN) connection corresponding to the APN with the UE; and sending, by the HSGW, static QoS parameters related to the APN corresponding to the PDN to an access network to enable the access network to perform QoS authorization, according to the static QoS parameters related to the APN corresponding to the PDN, for establishing an air interface bearer for the UE. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069764 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLINK RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN AN ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication is provided that schedules both Distributed Virtual Resource Blocks (DVRB) and Localized Virtual Resource Blocks (LVRB) in a same frequency channel, thereby obtaining the benefits of frequency selective scheduling while minimizing the uplink feedback overhead. In one embodiment of the invention, the communication system assigns one or more downlink Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs) of multiple downlink Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs) to each user equipment (UE) given an LVRB to produce at least one reserved PRB and multiple non-reserved PRBs and assigns a part of each PRB of the multiple non-reserved PRBs to a UE given a DVRB. In another embodiment of the invention, the communication system assigns PRBs pre-reserved for localized transmission to UEs scheduled for LVRBs and assigns parts of multiple PRBs pre-reserved for distributed transmission to each UE given a DVRB. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069765 | VIRTUAL GATEWAY NODE FOR DUAL-MODE WIRELESS PHONES - In one embodiment, a virtual gateway mediates between a dual-mode subscriber device and an IP-based PBX. In particular, the virtual gateway includes a WLAN interface for communicating with the dual-mode subscriber device and a network interface (wired or wireless) for communicating with the IP-based PBX over the Internet. As such, the virtual gateway may relay voice and call control instructions between the dual-mode subscriber device and the IP-based PBX, and may provide the same call control functions to the dual-mode subscriber device provided by the call control processor in existing dual-mode phones. The embodiment further provides a dual-mode subscriber device suitable for operation with the virtual gateway. Because the dual-mode subscriber device does not require a call control processor, the battery life and cost of the device are significantly improved. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069766 | System and method of hybrid FDM/TDM coexistence interference avoidance - A hybrid FDM/TDM solution for in-device coexistence interference avoidance is proposed. A user equipment (UE) comprises a first radio transceiver and a second co-located radio transceiver. The UE detects coexistence interference between the two radios based on radio signal measurement. The UE sends an IDC interference indicator to its serving base station (eNB). The UE also reports IDC information including recommendation for FDM and TDM configurations to the eNB. The eNB receives the IDC interference indicator and evaluates whether to trigger FDM-based solution to mitigate the coexistence interference. The eNB also evaluates whether to trigger TDM-based solution to mitigate coexistence interference. The evaluation is based on the recommended FDM and TDM configurations. The eNB may trigger FDM-based solution, TDM-based solution, or FDM and TDM solution based on the evaluation results of the feasibility and effectiveness of each solution. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069767 | METHOD AND AN ARRANGEMENT FOR A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a user device and a method for providing a solution for how to make automatic update of the presence state in a mobile device in a communication service e.g. a buddy list in a chat service. The solution is based on that the user device analyzes the background ‘“noise” 5 (sound) of the audio environment, and utilizes this analysis for determining a presence state of the user of the mobile device. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069768 | TRANSMIT ANTENNA SUBSET SELECTION FOR RETRANSMISSION - A transmit switched antenna system utilizes one of several antennas selection protocols combined with feedback from a receiving device to take advantage of time and space transmission for the same information. A transmit device transmits first information over a first subset of a set of antennas and receives an ACK or NACK from the receiver along with a channel quality indicator. If a NACK is received, the transmitter selects a next antenna subset for transmission, based on the antenna selection protocol utilized. One protocol randomly selects the next subset and does not require the channel quality indicator. Another protocol determines the next antenna subset based on channel quality history, and a third protocol selects the next antenna subset based on expectation of retransmissions for different protocols. | 03-22-2012 |
20120076007 | WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE UTILIZING GEO-REFERENCING - A wireless communication system for use in a process control environment includes a reference node adapted to determine geographic positions of at least some of the reference node, a base node, and a field node and determine RF power settings of transceivers attached to the reference node, the base node, and the field node based on the position of determined geographic positions. Additionally, the reference node is adapted to determine RF noise level at a plurality of locations within the process control environment at a plurality of times and to adjust the RF power settings based on the determined RF noise levels. The reference node may be implemented on a hand-held device. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076008 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONFIGURATION DATA ON A MEDIA GATEWAY AND A MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER IN A NEXT GENERATION NETWORK - A system and method for managing configuration data on a media gateway and a media gateway controller in a next generation network is disclosed. In one embodiment, in a method of managing configuration data on a media gateway (MG) and a media gateway controller (MGC) in a next generation network, it is determined whether all required configuration data is provisioned for the MG by a configuration management module residing in the next generation network upon boot up. If all the required configuration data is not pre-configured, then the configuration management module sends a message to an associated MGC requesting for configuration data. The configuration management module verifies format of the received configuration data upon receiving an acknowledgement and the configuration data by the MG. The configuration management module also stores received configuration data in the MG and provisions the MG upon a successful verification of the configuration data. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076009 | SHARED WI-FI / WIRELESS BROADBAND ACCESS - A subscriber device detects a potential node for providing supplemental bandwidth to the subscriber device. The subscriber device sends, to a control server, an indication of the potential node. The subscriber device requests, via a primary data path, data from a content server and detects high bandwidth usage of the primary data path. The subscriber device sends, to the control server and based on the detected high bandwidth usage, a request for supplemental bandwidth. The subscriber device receives a portion of the data via the primary data path and another portion of the data from the potential node via a secondary data path that differs from the primary data path. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076010 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING DATA RATE AND PACKET LENGTH IN MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method is provided to determine optimal data rate and packet length in mobile networks. The method directly determines the optimal packet length (L) and data rate (D), which allows fast convergence in the mobile channel. The method automatically identifies and quantifies channel conditions, as well as adjusts parameters according to changes of channel conditions. A variable (Channel condition Index (CCI)) is abstracted from simulations and then used to describe and quantify the impact of three components of channel conditions: signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), multipath environment and velocity. Based on packet completion rate (PCR) status, the channel condition is identified in terms of CCI value. Once CCI is identified, the model of effective throughput G is directly optimized to locate the best packet length (L) and data rate (D). | 03-29-2012 |
20120076011 | POWER SAVING SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - A power saving method, system and apparatus may include detecting a traffic mode based on statistics of packet network traffic. A packet-free time may be predicted based on a quality of service metric associated with the traffic mode. A low power state may be entered based on the predicted packet-free time, the quality of service metric and the traffic mode. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076012 | COMFORT NOISE GENERATION BY A HEADSET THAT IS ASSOCIATED WITH A VOIP-ENABLED DEVICE - A VoIP-enabled device is configured to detect silence in incoming VoIP communication. The VoIP-enabled device is configured to transmit a silence indicator to a headset in response to detecting silence in the incoming VoIP communication. The silence indicator specifies that the headset is to generate comfort noise and to incorporate the comfort noise into the speech during the period of silence. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076013 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SHARING COUNTER RESOURCES BETWEEN CoS/PRIORITY OR/AND BETWEEN EVC/VLAN TO SUPPORT FRAME LOSS MEASUREMENT - Embodiments including methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for calculating frame parameters for the purpose of measuring performance in a network based on the calculated frame parameters are disclosed. By automatically or manually provisioning at least two network elements in a star or other network topology to transmit and receive service frames (e.g., Loss Measurement Messages or Loss Measurement Responses), the embodiments enable network elements to share network resources, such as frame counters, thereby decreasing the number of frame counters needed to perform frame parameter measurements and increasing scalability for a given counter resource supported by a low cost network processor units. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076014 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRAFFIC ENGINEERING IN SHORTEST PATH BRIDGED NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for diverting traffic in a communications network are disclosed. According to one aspect, the invention provides a communications network with a first node and a second node. Connecting these two nodes is a first set of intermediate nodes on a first path (the true shortest path) and a second set of intermediate nodes on a second alternate path. At a first node, a first processor determines whether a packet arriving at the first node must transit the second node. If so, the base virtual local area network (VLAN) identifier (VID) of the packet is replaced by a first VID, and the packet is transmitted along the second path through the second set of intermediate nodes to the second node. At the second node, a second processor determines whether a packet arriving at the second node must transit the first node. If so, the base VID of the packet is replaced by a second VID different from the first VID and different from the base VID, and the packet is transmitted along the second path through the second set of intermediate nodes to the first node. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076015 | DYNAMIC CHANGING TIER SERVICE ON TEST DEVICE - A test device is located within a broadband communications network. The test device is interconnected with a policy enforcement point of the broadband communications network. Responsive to commencement of a test to be conducted with the test device, the policy enforcement point is signaled, from a policy server of the broadband communications network, so as to set a bandwidth tier for the test to be conducted with the test device. The test is conducted with the test device in accordance with the bandwidth tier. One or more additional tests can be conducted for additional, different, bandwidth tier(s). Related methods, systems, apparatuses, and computer program products are also disclosed. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076016 | FEMTOCELL AUTOMATIC SPEED TEST - A system and methodology that facilitates automatically determining performance parameters of a broadband network connected to a femto access point (FAP) is provided. In particular, the system automatically performs a broadband test, in the background, to detect the current speed, performance, throughput, etc. of the broadband network. The results of the speed test are then provided to the customer and/or to the femtocell carrier's Customer Care team, to facilitate diagnosing and correcting problems with the femtocell's performance. Specifically, the system notifies the customer of the broadband test results via short message service (SMS) message(s), email and/or posts the results on a femtocell management web page accessed by the customer. In addition, the femtocell automatic broadband test results can also be posted to an online tool that is accessed by authorized entities within the femtocell carrier's Customer Care team to facilitate easy and accurate diagnosis of femtocell performance issues. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076017 | APERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REQUEST IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method, computer program product, and apparatus are provided in which a request for a channel state information (CSI) report is received on a component carrier of a plurality of component carriers. The request indicates a set of component carriers of the plurality of component carriers for which to provide the CSI report. In addition, a CSI report including feedback for each of the indicated component carriers in the set of component carriers is transmitted. A method, computer program product, and apparatus are provided in which a request for a CSI report on a component carrier of a plurality of component carriers is transmitted. The request indicates a set of component carriers of the plurality of component carriers for which to receive the CSI report. In addition, a CSI report including feedback for each of the indicated component carriers in the set of component carriers is received. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076018 | MAINTAINING DIFFERENT VIRTUAL ACTIVE SETS FOR DIFFERENT CELL TYPES - To facilitate inbound mobility for an access terminal, different virtual active sets are employed for different types of access points or cells (e.g., HNBs versus macro cells). In addition, different lists of permitted cells are maintained for these different types of access points or cells. Also, a frequency quality estimate for inter-frequency event triggering may be based on measurement of a single cell present in a virtual active set (e.g., a dedicated HNB virtual active set). | 03-29-2012 |
20120076019 | Methods, Testing Apparatuses and Devices for Removing Cross Coupling Effects in Antenna Arrays - Methods and devices for removing cross coupling effects between elements of an antenna array ( | 03-29-2012 |
20120076020 | COMMUNICATION METHOD USING MULTI-RADIO AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - Provided is a communication method and apparatus using a multi-radio. The communication method includes establishing a link via at least one node included in a group that uses a low data-rate radio (LDR); transmitting a data frame to the at least one node included in the group; and receiving, using a multi-radio based on an availability of the LDR, an acknowledgement (ACK) with respect to the transmitted data frame. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076021 | DYNAMIC SWITCHING BETWEEN DC-HSDPA AND SFDC-HSDPA - A method, apparatus, computer program product, and processing system provide for dynamic selection of a secondary serving cell among various available secondary serving cells, be they in the same frequency as the primary serving cell (as in SFDC-HSDPA), in a different frequency but in the same band as the primary serving cell (as in DC-HSDPA), or in a different band from the primary serving cell (as in DB-DC-HSDPA). Here, the UE may be preconfigured for each of the available secondary serving cells, and may receive a configuration message to select between one of them based on factors such UE battery consumption, CQIs corresponding to the available secondary serving cells, loading of the secondary serving cells, or UE power headroom limitations. Thus, an advanced UE capable of receiving the plurality of technologies may benefit from dynamically selecting the best available secondary serving cell in accordance with the factors. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076022 | MULTI-FUNCTION DEVICE - A multi-function device capable of executing a plurality of functions, the device comprising: a first acquisition unit configured to acquire communication state information relating to a current communication state of the multi-function device; a determination unit configured to determine: a first priority order in a case of a first state indicating that the current communication state of the multi-function device is good; and a second priority order in a case of a second state indicating that the current communication state of the multi-function device is poor, wherein the second priority order is different from the first priority order, and wherein each of the priority orders indicate each of priorities of the plurality of functions; and a data transmission unit configured to execute preferentially a transmission of data for a high-priority function earlier than a transmission of data for a low-priority function, based on the determined priority order. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076023 | METHOD AND APPARATS FOR PERFORMING EFFICIENT FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ANTENNA - A method for transmitting channel status information (CSI) of downlink transmission via uplink in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a rank indicator (RI) and a precoder type indicator (PTI) at a first subframe, transmitting at a second subframe a first precoding matrix indicator (PMI) when the PTI has a first value and transmitting a second PMI and a wideband channel quality indicator (WB CQI) when the PTI has a second value, and transmitting at a third subframe a second PMI and a WB CQI when the PTI has a first value and transmitting a subband (SB) CQI and a second PMI when the PTI has a second value. A user equipment (UE) preferred precoding matrix is indicated by a combination of the first PMI and the second PMI. Subsampled codebooks of precoding codebooks of individual Rank-2, Rank-3 and Rank-4 are applied to the second PMI. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076024 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT FEEDBACK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - A method and apparatus for performing effective feedback in a wireless communication system supporting multiple antennas. A method for transmitting CSI of downlink transmission via uplink in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a joint-coded rank indicator (RI) and a first wideband (WB) precoding matrix indicator (PMI) at a first subframe, and transmitting a wideband channel quality indicator (WB CQI) and a second WB PMI at a second subframe. A user equipment (UE) preferred precoding matrix is indicated by a combination of the first PMI and the second PMI. If the RI is Rank-1 or Rank-2, the first PMI indicates one of subsets each having 8 indexes from among 16 indexes of the first PMI of a precoding codebook. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076025 | REPORTING OF CHANNEL PROPERTIES IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Rank indicator and channel quality indicator (CQI) estimation and reporting functionalities are discussed with regard to heterogeneous networks to reduce the number of inconsistent CQI estimates transmitted to an evolved node B (eNB), where the CQI is defined as inconsistent when the rank indicator, on which the CQI is conditioned, is from a different subframe type than the subframe on which the CQI is to be estimated. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076026 | ASYMMETRICAL LINK CONFIGURATION FOR INCREASED TOTAL NETWORK CAPACITY - A method for managing transmission settings in a wireless point-to-point link, including making a first estimate of a current required traffic capacity for transmitting in a first direction, from a first point in the wireless point-to-point link to a second point, and selecting a first technique for transmitting in the first direction, based, at least in part, on the first estimate of the current required traffic capacity, in which the first technique selected provides a traffic capacity which is less than a maximum capacity possible in the first direction. Related apparatus and methods are also described. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076027 | FEMTO-RELAY SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF MANAGING SAME - The various embodiments of the present invention relate generally to femto-relay systems and methods. An exemplary embodiment of the present invention provides a femto-relay system comprising a relay-radio, a femto-radio, a joint femto-relay resource management module, and an IP-backhaul QoS monitoring module. The relay-radio is in communication with a macro-cell base-station. The femto-radio is in communication with the relay-radio and configured to route signals between a core network and at least one femto-cell user equipment through an IP-backhaul link. The joint femto-relay resource management module is configured to intelligently manage radio resources between the femto-radio and the relay-radio to reduce cross-tier interference. The IP-backhaul QoS monitoring module is configured to monitor a QoS being delivered by the IP-backhaul link and notify the relay-radio to route signals between the femto-cell user equipment and core network through the macro-cell base-station if the QoS fall below a predetermined threshold. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076028 | Method and apparatus for performing effective feedback in wireless communication system supporting multiple antennas - A method for transmitting channel status information (CSI) of downlink multi-carrier transmission includes generating the CSI including at least one of a rank indicator (RI), a first precoding matrix index (PMI), a second PMI and a channel quality indicator (CQI) for one or more downlink carriers, the CQI being calculated based on precoding information determined by a combination of the first and second PMIs, determining, when two or more CSIs collide with one another in one uplink subframe of one uplink carrier, a CSI to be transmitted on the basis of priority, and transmitting the determined CSI over a uplink channel. If a CSI including an RI or a wideband first PMI collides with a CSI including a wideband CQI or a subband CQI, the CSI including a wideband CQI or a subband CQI has low priority and is dropped. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076029 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AVAILABILITY METRICS FOR MEASUREMENT AND MANAGMENT OF ETHERNET SERVICES - Maintenance entities may be defined between customer and provider flow points to allow performance management to take place on an Ethernet network. The maintenance entities may be defined for access link, intra-domain, and inter-domain, and may be defined on a link or service basis. Performance parameters, including availability metrics, may be collected for the maintenance entities. The provision of such availability metrics in an Ethernet based solution to facilitate consistency of service management and operations for carriers transitioning to the Ethernet solution. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076030 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO MEASURE THE PERFORMANCE OF A DE-JITTER BUFFER - Systems and methods to measure the performance of a de-jitter buffer are disclosed. An example method includes transmitting a known audio signal via a plurality of packets over a packet-based network, recording a received signal based on the known audio signal, analyzing the recorded signal to determine one or more of a lower size, an upper size, an expansion speed, or a contraction speed of a de-jitter buffer based on the recorded signal and the known signal, comparing the one or more of the lower size, the upper size, the expansion speed, or the contraction speed to a performance requirement, and correcting communication network performance based on the comparison. Determining the expansion speed includes filling a lower portion of the de-jitter buffer, adding jitter to the plurality of packets, the jitter increasing at a first rate, and identifying the expansion speed as the first rate if no packet loss occurs. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076031 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION TO USERS IN SLOTTED CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEMS USING BEAMS - The invention includes several embodiments for slot assignment in code division multiple access communication systems. One embodiment for fixed beams assigns slots by first detecting a beam having the best received quality and selected the best slot from that beam. Another fixed beam embodiment determines the best slot or slots in a number of beams and determines the overall best beam/slot combination. Another fixed beam embodiment uses a modified interference factor. One embodiment for the uplink using adaptive arrays using a spatial analysis stage followed by a transmission power level estimation stage. An overall interference level associated with each slot is determined and a slot having the best overall quality is determined. Another embodiment for the downlink uses the spatial analysis and slot assignment of the uplink for the downlink. Another embodiment for the downlink uses a spatial and transmission power level estimation stages. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076032 | MULTI-USER MIMO-SDMA FOR FINITE RATE FEEDBACK SYSTEMS - A multi-user v downlink beamforming system with limited feedback ( | 03-29-2012 |
20120076033 | METHODS FOR OPPORTUNISTIC MULTI-USER BEAMFORMING IN COLLABORATIVE MIMO-SDMA - A system and method for opportunistically designing collaborative beamforming vectors is disclosed for a wireless multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) space division multiple access (SDMA) communication system by sequentially designing beamforming vectors for ranked channels in order to exploit the instantaneous channel conditions to improve per user average SNR performance. Each subscriber station independently transmits information to a base station that allows the base station to determine beamforming vectors for each subscriber station by ranking the subscriber stations by channel strength. Using sequential nullspace methods, the ranked channel matrices are then used to select the channel matrix H | 03-29-2012 |
20120076034 | Baseband Processor Apparatus and Method for Monitoring A Wireless Communication Network - A baseband processor of a distributed architecture for monitoring mobile communication in a wireless communication network is claimed. Systems and methods enable receiving reporting data related to events that occur in a wireless network from the perspective of the wireless device. The data management system is capable of generating a data reporting profile and communicating with a wireless device. The application processor is capable of monitoring and reporting a plurality of conditions within the wireless device and sending and receiving communications from the data management system. The baseband processor is capable of monitoring and reporting plurality of conditions on the wireless network and sending and receiving communications with the application processor. Both the application processor and the baseband processor monitor and report the conditions of the device and the network by applying a series of logical rules found within the data reporting profile. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076035 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SETTING UP A BEARER - Method and system for setting up a bearer are disclosed. The bearer setup method includes these steps: a packet data network gateway (PGW) obtains first quality of service (QoS) information and a first bearer identifier (ID), and sets up a bearer between the PGW and a radio access network (RAN) according to the first QoS information, where the bearer is associated with the first bearer ID; the RAN sets up a radio bearer (RB) with a user equipment (UE) according to second QoS information associated with the first QoS information, where the RB is associated with a second bearer ID associated with the first bearer ID. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076036 | Method and System for Proxy A/V Bridging on an Ethernet Switch - Aspects of a system for proxy NV bridging on an Ethernet switch may include an AV switch enables reception of incoming PDUs from a legacy device via an AV block network, wherein each incoming PDU contains an AV stream identifier (which consists of a destination address and may also consist of a traffic class designation and/or higher level protocol identifiers). The destination address may identify a destination AV device within the AV block network. The AV switch may enable generation of outgoing PDUs by inserting or modifying a corresponding traffic class designation within each of the incoming PDUs. The AV switch may enable transmission using a specific traffic shaping process of each of the outgoing PDUs to a destination AV device within the AV block network based on the AV stream identifier and corresponding QoS parameters. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076037 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting a sounding reference signal from to a base station in a radio communication system. More specifically, the method comprises the steps of: transmitting a periodic sounding reference signal to a base station; receiving a transmission instruction for an additional sounding reference signal from the base station; multiplexing said periodic sounding reference signal and said additional sounding reference signal along a frequency axis or a time axis; and transmitting said multiplexed periodic sounding reference signal and said additional sounding reference signal to said base station. Said multiplexing step is characterized by multiplexing said periodic sounding reference signal and said additional sounding reference signal along a frequency axis or a time axis. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076038 | INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION - Coordinated multipoint communication is a technology for improving cell-edge performance for users in a cell-type mobile communication system. In order to enable a coordinated multipoint transmission/reception operation, a user equipment report of a local environment is required to select both coordinated communication modes and communication partners in evolved Node B (eNB) base stations. According to the present invention, a method is described for feeding back information from User Equipment (UE) to a serving base station to enable a coordinated multi-point transmission/reception operation. The information reported through the feedback is classified into two categories corresponding to received signal intensity information and received signal timing information. The UE may select one or both types of information from between the categories to provide feedback. In embodiments of the present invention, various overhead-reducing reporting formats are described. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076039 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL USING SPATIAL SILENCING - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting signals in a heterogeneous network, the method comprising: a step wherein a base station determines a value-added vector for forming a beam pattern to be applied to a subsidiary carrier; a step wherein carrier operation information including information related to the determined value-added vector is transmitted via a primary carrier; and a step wherein the subsidiary carrier is transmitted by applying the determined value-added vector. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076040 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - To suppress concentration of channel quality information requests and reports in a case of discontinuously transmitting reference signals at specific resources in a time domain, and thereby preventing degradation in throughput. A transmission apparatus (eNB) transmits an instruction of CSI request distributed for each reception apparatus in a subframe concurrently with or earlier than a reference signal CSI-RS to each of reception apparatuses (UE | 03-29-2012 |
20120076041 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of reporting a measurement result in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment receives, from a base station, measurement configuration information comprising a reporting condition for triggering reporting of a measurement result on M component carriers among N component carriers, where M≦N. The user equipment determines whether the reporting condition is satisfied by measuring the N component carriers. If the reporting condition is satisfied, the user equipment reports a measurement result on the M component carriers to the base station. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076042 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN A MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and discloses a method and an apparatus for performing random access in a multi-carrier wireless communication system. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the method in which user equipment carries out a process for random access to a base station in a multi-carrier wireless communication system comprises: a step of measuring the channel qualities of one or more uplink component carriers, and determining the uplink component carrier having the highest channel quality; a step of selecting a physical random access channel (PRACH) resource on the uplink component carrier having the highest channel quality; and a step of transmitting a random access preamble to the base station using the selected PRACH resource. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076043 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, CONTROL CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND CONTROL CHANNEL RECEPTION METHOD - Disclosed is a wireless communication base station device which can prevent unnecessary HARQ retransmissions when a terminal is using a plurality of unit bands, even when the unit band through which data is transmitted differs from the unit band through which a PDCCH, to which the resource allocation information of said data is allocated, is transmitted. In this device, a control unit ( | 03-29-2012 |
20120082039 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DIRECTIONAL INFORMATION FOR PEER DISCOVERY IN PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for operating a local device to discover proximal information is disclosed. The method includes receiving a signal from a remote device, determining an identification and a relative bearing of the remote device based on the signal and displaying the identification and the relative bearing of the remote device. The apparatus for operating a local device to discover proximal information includes a processor configured to receive a signal from a remote device and determine an identification and a relative bearing of the remote device based on the signal and a display coupled to the processor, the display configured to display the identification and the relative bearing of the remote device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082040 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLLISION DETECTION IN WIDER BANDWIDTH OPERATION - Embodiments of systems and methods for providing collision detection in a wider bandwidth are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082041 | POWER HEADROOM REPORTING - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products are described for power headroom reporting. A mobile device may identify a transmit power associated with each of a number of independently power controlled channels on one or multiple carriers configured for use by the mobile device. The transmit power may relate to one channel that is an uplink control channel, and one or more additional channels that are uplink shared channels. The identified transmit power of one channel (e.g., the uplink control channel) may be a virtual transmit power, while other identified transmit powers may be measured transmit powers for actual transmissions. The identified transmit powers may be added up, and the power headroom available for the mobile device may be calculated using the accumulated transmit powers. The mobile device may transmit a power headroom report to a base station. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082042 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK FOR ENHANCED DOWNLINK MULTIPLE INPUT - MULTIPLE OUTPUT OPERATION - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is deriving multiple input-multiple output feedback information using a set of precoding matrices associated with at least one precoding codebook, signaling, in a first plurality of resource elements, channel state information associated with a first precoding matrix indicator of the set of precoding matrices jointly with a transmission rank, and signaling separately, in a second plurality of resource elements, channel state information associated with a second precoding matrix indicator of the set of precoding matrices. In addition, there is receiving signaling in a first plurality of resource elements of channel state information associated with a first precoding matrix indicator of a set of precoding matrices jointly with a transmission rank, receiving signaling separately in a second plurality of resource elements of channel state information associated with a second precoding matrix indicator of the set of precoding matrices, and controlling a downlink multiple input-multiple output transmission in accordance with the received signaling. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082043 | Indication of user equipment transmit power capacilty in carrier aggregation - A method of power headroom reporting (PHR) is proposed. A UE is configured with a plurality of component carriers (CCs) and is served by one or more power amplifiers (PAs) in a wireless system with carrier aggregation. The UE determines transmit power limitation (TPL) information that comprises a set of TPL values, each TPL value corresponds to a UE-configured maximum transmit power for UE-level, PA-level, and CC-level. The TPL information is then reduced to non-redundant TPL values. Based on the non-redundant TPL values, the UE determines power headroom (PH) information that comprises a set of PH values. Each PH value equals to a TPL value subtracted by a UE-calculated transmit power. The UE reports the PH information to a base station via a fixed-length or variable-length MAC CE at each PHR reporting instance. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082044 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A WIRELESS FEEDER NETWORK - An apparatus and method are provided for controlling a wireless feeder network used to couple access base stations of an access network with a communications network. The wireless feeder network comprises a plurality of feeder base stations coupled to the communications network and a plurality of feeder terminals coupled to associated access base stations. Each feeder terminal has a feeder link with a feeder base station, and the feeder links are established over a wireless resource comprising a plurality of resource blocks. Sounding data obtained from the wireless feeder network is used to compute an initial global schedule to allocate to each feeder link at least one resource block, and the global schedule is distributed whereafter the wireless feeder network operates in accordance with the currently distributed global schedule to pass traffic between the communications network and the access base stations. Using traffic reports received during use, an evolutionary algorithm is applied to modify the global schedule, with the resultant updated global schedule then being distributed for use. This enables the allocation of resource blocks to individual feeder links to be varied over time taking account of traffic within the wireless feeder network, thereby improving spectral efficiency. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082045 | DETERMINING A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL FROM A PLURALITY OF POSSIBLE CHANNEL BANDWIDTHS - In a method of determining a set of communication channels for a first basic service set from at least i) a first set of channels and ii) a second set of channels, wherein each of at least some of the channels in the second set of channels partially overlaps, in frequency, at least one of the channels in the first set of channels, whether the second set of channels is being utilized by a second basic service set is determined. That the set of communication channels for the first basic service set includes either i) the first set of channels or ii) the second set of channels is determined based at least on a determination of whether the second set of channels is being utilized by the second basic service set. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082046 | POWER HEADROOM FOR SIMULTANEOUS VOICE AND LONG TERM EVOLUTION - A method, apparatus, and computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a determination is made of a first power available for transmitting a first signal using a first radio access technology while simultaneously transmitting a second signal using a second radio access technology different from the first radio access technology. An uplink grant is received and a determination is made regarding a second power for transmitting the first signal on uplink using the first radio access technology based on the uplink grant. A determination is made regarding a difference between the first power and the second power. Information related to the difference is reported via the first radio access technology based on a trigger. The reporting information is triggered when the change of a power backoff from a last report exceeds a selected threshold. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082047 | USER EQUIPMENT MEASUREMENT FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS WITH FEMTO CELLS - Systems and methods for interference management are disclosed. Exemplary embodiments disclose systems and methods configured to identify victim or interfering mobile stations and transmit measurement instructions to the victim or interfering mobile stations. According to certain embodiments, the mobile stations monitor downlink link quality and report this information back to the serving cells. The serving cells are configured to schedule the mobile stations in the subframes whose downlink link quality is high, determined based on a predetermined threshold. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082048 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SMART GRID COMMUNICATIONS AND MANAGEMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving phasor measurement unit (PMU) data in a first transmission; converting the first transmission into a multicast transmission; and multicasting the PMU data to a multicast group address, which identifies a plurality of subscribers. In more specific implementations, the converting of the first transmission into the multicast transmission occurs at a first-hop router in relation to a PMU source that sent the first transmission. In some cases, the first transmission is a unicast transmission sent from a network element, which includes a PMU sensor. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082049 | DEVICES FOR DETERMINING A REFERENCE SUBFRAME AND DETERMINING A MODE - A wireless communication device for determining a reference subframe is described. The wireless communication device includes a processor and instructions stored in memory that is in electronic communication with the processor. The wireless communication device determines a reporting subframe n. The wireless communication device also determines a reference subframe n−n | 04-05-2012 |
20120082050 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A WIRELESS FEEDER NETWORK - An apparatus and method are provided for controlling a wireless feeder network used to couple access base stations of an access network with a communications network. The wireless feeder network connects base stations coupled to the communications network and feeder terminals coupled to associated access base stations. Each feeder terminal has a feeder link with a feeder base station. The method includes allocating resource blocks for the feeder base stations and feeder terminals to establish the feeder links. The resource blocks are allocated between a centrally administered schedule and at least one feeder base station administered schedule. Network traffic being carried by the feeder links is monitored to determine at least one characteristic. The resource blocks are reallocated between the centrally administered schedule and the at least one feeder base station administered schedule in dependence on the at least one characteristic of the network traffic. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082051 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING MEASUREMENT INFORMATION REPORT IN 3GPP SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for recording and reporting Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) measurement information in a 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) system are provided. The method and apparatus includes supplementary information which is recorded and reported by the UE in connected/idle mode and useful for MDT performed by the User Equipment (UE). A process is provided for the location information acquisition time along with the location information in connected mode to verify the corresponding information and recording the measurement information at the cell reselection time in idle mode and the indicator information of the type of cell reselection. The information control method of a terminal includes measuring MDT information while the terminal is operating in idle mode and recording the MDT information in idle mode cell reselection. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082052 | System and Method for Coordinating Different Types of Base Stations in a Heterogeneous Communications System - A system and method for coordinating different types of base stations in a heterogeneous communications system are provided. A method of communications controller operations includes signaling an indicator of a subset of a plurality of communications resources controlled by a communications controller to a user equipment, and receiving a report comprising channel information associated with a measurement of signals transmitted in the subset from the user equipment. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082053 | Method and Apparatus for Service Configuration and Rate Matching of Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access System - A method for configuring a service and a method and apparatus for rate matching in a TD-SCDMA system, this method for configuring the service includes: taking that a check bit puncturing ratio should be more than 7i+a or less than 7i−a as a newly added constraint condition, and the check bit puncturing ratios of each configured service being outside a range of [7i+a, 7i−a], the method for rate matching includes: when puncturing each path of check bits of the current data block, if a difference between a position P | 04-05-2012 |
20120082054 | COMPRESSED MODE OPERATION AND POWER CONTROL WITH DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION AND/OR RECEPTION - Techniques to support operation in a compressed mode and/or a continuous packet connectivity (CPC) mode are described. In an aspect, a user equipment (UE) may obtain an assignment of enabled subframes for the CPC mode and an assignment of transmission gaps for the compressed mode. The transmission gaps may be aligned with idle times between the enabled subframes. The UE may exchange data during enabled subframes not overlapping the transmission gaps and may skip data exchanges during enabled subframes overlapping the transmission gaps. The UE may make cell measurements during the transmission gaps. In another aspect, the UE may obtain enabled subframes and skipped subframes, exchange data during enabled subframes not corresponding to the skipped subframes, and skip data exchanges during the skipped subframes. In yet another aspect, the UE may receive orders on a shared control channel to quickly enable and disable the compressed mode. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082055 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMITTING STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The base station determines a possibly-allocated domain, which is a band that may be used in communication with the mobile station, with respect to each mobile station, and determines a frequency band to be allocated to the mobile station within the determined possibly-allocated domain. Then, the base station transmits possibly-allocated-domain information indicating the possibly-allocated domain and allocation information, which is information indicating allocation of the frequency band, to the mobile station. Then, the base station and the mobile station communicate with each other in accordance with the possibly-allocated-domain information and the allocation information. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082056 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE COMPRISING A CARRIER SENSE FUNCTION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device of an example of the present invention comprises a first unit determining that whether a state is a first state indicating that a transmission medium is in use, a second state indicating that the transmission medium is not in use, or a third state indicating that whether or not the transmission medium is in use is being determined, and a second unit prohibiting a data transmission in the first and third states, and permitting the data transmission in the second state. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082057 | POWER-SAVING FUNCTIONS IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - Embodiments of the present invention include a communications network using end-to-end tunnels. A control unit monitors the traffic load on at least two paths, as well as determines a power saving traffic distribution if the total traffic on the at least first and second paths if the traffic load does not exceed the capacity of both or all paths between the same end nodes. The power saving traffic distribution puts at least one of the first and second paths in a standby mode in which it carries no traffic. A command unit redirects traffic according to the power saving distribution and to order at least one network element or at least one link in the path or paths to be put in standby mode to enter into a power saving standby mode. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082058 | IMPROVED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN A COORDINATED MULTIPOINT NETWORK - In one aspect, the present invention in one or more embodiments improves mobility management—e.g., handover processing enhancement—by providing/utilizing additional information in combination with CoMP operation, for enhancing the handover procedure. For example, the additional information is used to improve judging the most suitable target cell ( | 04-05-2012 |
20120087253 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR PEER-TO-PEER DATA IN NON PEER-TO-PEER RESOURCES - A method of operating a wireless device includes communicating in one of peer-to-peer data resources or non peer-to-peer resources. The peer-to-peer data resources include a first set of peer-to-peer resources with a first bandwidth and a second set of peer-to-peer resources with a second bandwidth greater than the first bandwidth. The first set of peer-to-peer resources is parallel in time with the non peer-to-peer resources. In addition, the method includes estimating a signal quality for a data transmission on the peer-to-peer data resources. Furthermore, the method includes determining whether to send the data transmission in one of the first set of peer-to-peer resources or the second set of peer-to-peer resources based on the estimated signal quality. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087254 | UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION ON BACKWARD COMPATIBLE PUCCH FORMATS WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) on a user equipment (UE) is described. A number of bits for a channel quality indicator and/or a precoding matrix index and/or a rank indication (CQI/PMI/RI) is obtained. A number of component carriers with hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) reporting is also obtained. A total number of HARQ-ACK bits is further obtained. A number of HARQ-ACK bits that can be carried on the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) is determined. Bundling is performed on the total number of HARQ-ACK bits to be reported to fit the total number of HARQ-ACK bits to be reported into the number of HARQ-ACK bits that can be carried on the PUCH. A backward compatible PUCCH format is used to simultaneously carry the CQI/PMI/RI bits and the HARQ-ACK bits. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087255 | RELAY APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREFOR - The present invention provides a relay apparatus | 04-12-2012 |
20120087256 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A wireless communication apparatus includes a first storage unit, a switching detection unit and a control unit. The first storage unit stores configuration information that configures a relationship between occurrence of switching of a wireless communication apparatus and a frequency of the occurrence of switching. The switching detection unit detects the occurrence of switching of other wireless communication apparatus currently connected by wireless communication. The control unit performs control on a basis of the configuration information such that the frequency of switching when the detected occurrence of switching satisfies a given condition is lower than when the occurrence of switching does not satisfy the given condition. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087257 | Signalling Mechanism for Multi-Tiered Intra-Band Carrier Aggregation - Methods of performing intra-band carrier aggregation in a multi-tiered wireless network include determining a capability of a user equipment unit located within an overlapping coverage area of first and second radio network nodes to simultaneously receive data on a first component carrier and on a second component carrier from the first and second network nodes, and simultaneously transmitting data to the user equipment unit using the first and second component carriers from different radio network nodes in response to determining that the user equipment unit is capable of simultaneously receiving data on the first component carrier and on the second component carrier from different radio network nodes. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087258 | USER TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR MANAGING DATA RELATED TO MINIMIZATION OF DRIVE-TESTS (MDT) - A user terminal and a method for managing data related to minimization of drive-tests (MDT) in the user terminal. The method includes entering into an MDT mode, receiving a system parameter from a base station, obtaining MDT-related data D | 04-12-2012 |
20120087259 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING MDT-RELATED DATA - Provided is a method for obtaining and reporting minimization of drive-tests (MDT)-related data and an apparatus for performing the same. The method may include receiving mode signaling message related to performing of an MDT mode, obtaining MDT-related data for measuring a propagation environment around equipment, based on the MDT mode signaling message, maintaining and storing the MDT-related data in a memory, generating an MDT report message including at least one of an average of the MDT-related data D | 04-12-2012 |
20120087260 | MODELING RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method, a computer program product and a device, the method is for evaluating a state of a radio access network (RAN), and may include parsing control plane massages that are exchanged between the RAN and a core network that is coupled to the RAN; and determining, by an edge bandwidth manager, a current state of the RAN based on the control plane massages. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087261 | DYNAMIC SWITCHING BETWEEN COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL INTERFERENCE CANCELATION AND RESOURCE ELEMENT PUNCTURING IN A CO-CHANNEL HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Communication in a dominant interference scenario may be supported by performing inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC). Resource coordination/partitioning may be performed to allocate resources to a serving Node B located near the vicinity of a strong interfering Node B. The interfering Node B may avoid transmitting on the allocated/protected resources, possibly except for a common reference signal (CRS). A UE can then communicate with the serving Node B on the protected resources in the presence of the interfering Node B and may observe no interference (possibly except for the CRS) from the interfering Node B. When CRS tones of an interferer may collide with control/data tones of a serving cell, CRS interference cancellation (CRS IC) or puncturing of interfered resource elements (REs) may be appropriate. Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques, where the UE may dynamically switch between CRS IC and RE puncturing based on certain parameters. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087262 | Method, Apparatus and System for Detecting Service Data of a Packet Data Connection - The invention relates to an apparatus, a system, a method and a computer program product for transmitting to a policy and/or charging server information relating to a user, wherein the information includes an indication of a service data detecting entity for detecting service data of a packet data connection of the user, and initiating communication towards the service data detecting entity based on the received information. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087263 | Method And Apparatus For Frequency Offset Estimation And Correction In Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing System - A frequency offset estimation and correction method in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system is disclosed in present invention, including: obtaining a pilot frequency domain channel estimation value of a target user, and smoothing the channel estimation value in frequency domain; obtaining the link quality state of a receiver; adopting a history smoothing algorithm or a multi-branch attempt algorithm to perform frequency offset estimation and frequency offset compensation, performing frequency domain demodulation for the data for which frequency offset compensation has been performed, and outputting a link quality state parameter; and updating the link quality state of the receiver according to the link quality state parameter, determining the output value of this frequency offset estimation and outputting a history frequency offset value required by next frequency offset estimation according to the determined output value of this frequency offset estimation. A corresponding apparatus is also disclosed in the present invention. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087264 | Method and Device for Measuring a Received Signal Power in a Mobile Communication System - In a method and a mobile communications receiver for performing signal measurements, signal measurement data is received from at least one base station during at least part of a measurement period. Each measurement period comprises a number of non-equidistant snapshot measurement windows during which the receiver receives signal measurement data. At least one average signal strength value of the signal measurement data received during the measurement period is computed. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087265 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INTEGRATED BASE STATION, AND TERMINAL - A frame time having a certain period of time is divided into: a time period (for inter-base-station time division multiplex communication) in which one of the base stations has a transmission right in the simultaneous transmission and carries out inter-base-station time division multiplex communication so as to avoid interference between the base stations; and a time period (for inter-base-station simultaneous communication) for communication which is simultaneously carried out between the plurality of base stations. Furthermore, the time periods are switched for the communication. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087266 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION ACTIONS FOR TIME-DOMAIN PARTITIONED CELLS - Aspects of the present disclosure relate generally to wireless communication systems, and more particularly, to systems and methods for managing inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) actions for time-domain partitioned cells. In certain aspects, time-domain partitioning is accounted for by an eNB in determining whether to send frequency-based inter-cell interference information (e.g., uplink overload indicator) to neighboring eNB(s) and/or responsive actions to take in response to receiving frequency-based inter-cell interference information (e.g., uplink overload indicator, high interference indicator, and/or relative narrowband transmission power). | 04-12-2012 |
20120087267 | Method and Apparatus for Adaptive Searching of Distributed Datasets - A first communication device comprising memory in which data is stored may receive a request packet from a second communication device, measure received signal strength for the request packet, and determine whether to perform the requested search of the data stored in the memory based on the received signal strength and the power at which the request packet was transmitted. The search request packet may comprise a request to search the data stored in the memory, and a transmit power field that indicates a power at which the request packet was transmitted. The determining may be based on a result of a comparison between the received signal strength and a threshold and/or based on a comparison of a relative power and a threshold. The relative power may be calculated utilizing the received signal strength and the power at which the packet was transmitted. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087268 | ADAPTIVE RATE AND REACH OPTIMIZATION FOR WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORKS - A method controls a wireless local area network, which includes a centralized performance management controller and a plurality of network elements. The method includes determining interference between each network element and every other network element of the plurality of network elements, and populating an interference matrix identifying the interference between each combination of two network elements of the plurality of network elements. The method also includes generating an adjacency matrix based on the interference matrix indicating each combination of the two network elements of the plurality of network elements that has an unacceptable level of interference. The method further includes improving overall performance of the wireless local area network by reducing the unacceptable levels of interference indicated by the adjacency matrix. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087269 | SELF-OPTIMIZING WIRELESS NETWORK - Optimizing a plurality cell sites or sectors in a wireless netwrok including receiving network data regarding a plurality of cell sites or sectors; determining a critical zone in which communication is degraded; determining best neighbor cell sites or sectors among the neighbor cell sites or sectors associated with the critical cell sites or sectors; determining if the critical cell sites or sectors in the critical zone have available resources for achieving a desired improvement in communications; determining if the best neighbor cell sites or sectors have available resources for achieving the desired improvement in communications; and altering wireless network parameters of the critical cell sites or sectors, or the best neighbor cells sites or sectors for achieving the desired improvment in communications. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087270 | UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention relates to an uplink synchronization method and apparatus, where the method includes: obtaining a timing advance of a second frequency point according to a timing advance of a first frequency point; and sending data at an uplink sending time corresponding to the timing advance of the second frequency point. According to embodiments of the present invention, the TA of the second frequency point can be obtained according to the TA of the first frequency point, and a RACH access process does not need to be performed at the second frequency point, which effectively reduces the network resources occupied by the RACH process, and shortens the produced delay, thereby improving the performance of the entire system. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087271 | SIGNALING OF POWER INFORMATION FOR MIMO TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for signaling power information to facilitate channel quality indicator (CQI) reporting are described. A Node B may send power information that may be used by a UE to determine a power per channelization code, P | 04-12-2012 |
20120087272 | LOCALIZATION IN A NETWORK - A system for determining node locations comprises an interface for receiving a first set of measurements at a first set of nodes, the first set of nodes having known locations. The system further comprising an interface for receiving a second set of measurements at a node having an unknown location, and a processor configured for determining a location of the node with unknown location based at least in part on the first set of measurements and the second set of measurements. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087273 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IN COMP SCHEME - The present system relates to a method for signal transmission in a CoMP scheme. Each cell that performs a CoMP operation in capable of setting and allocating a particular carrier and a particular CoMP zone in order to execute a particular CoMP scheme. Using the particular CoMP zone and the allocated carrier, a terminal can transmit and receive a CoMP signal corresponding to the particular CoMP zone and the allocated carrier. The terminal can perform measurement of a carrier or a particular zone within the carrier and select a carrier or a particular zone, on the basis of the measurement value. On the other hand, a serving base station can select a carrier or a particular zone, on the basis of the measurement value that is received from the terminal. | 04-12-2012 |
20120093007 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL USING MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BANDS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting and receiving signals using multiple frequency band in a wireless communication system are provided, in which a BS determines whether an MS is to use a plurality of FAs, selects the plurality of FAs if it is determined that the MS is to use the plurality of FAs, transmits FA information about the selected FAs to the MS, and transmits and receives signals to and from the MS in the selected FAs. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093008 | IMPLICIT REJECT RESPONSE - A wireless communication network having received-priority access requests on an access channel issues an implicit reject response on a grant channel, such as a flag or other value embedded in an explicit access grant or explicit access reject response. The implicit reject response applies to some or all outstanding low-priority access requests. At the expiration of a terminal's grant channel monitoring window, if it has detected an applicable implicit reject response but not an explicit response, the terminal will refrain from transmitting another access request for a predetermined or configurable duration. The implicit reject response may comprise a flag, or a value that implicitly rejects only a fraction of the outstanding low-priority access requests. The implicit reject response may comprise a duration that the terminal must wait prior to transmitting another access request, and may direct the terminal to directly monitor the grant channel without transmitting a subsequent access request. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093009 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - Interference between potentially conflicting radio access technologies (RATs) in a wireless device may be managed through a coexistence manager which allows communication using a first active RAT (e.g., Long Term Evolution (LTE)) and communication with a second active RAT (e.g., wireless local area network (WLAN)) when the first RAT is not scheduled for communicating during an uplink timeslot. Communications by a WLAN radio may be controlled using a power save mode. WLAN communications may be timed so that downlink signals (such as data or acknowledgement messages) to the WLAN radio are received during an inactive uplink subframe for an LTE radio. WLAN communications may also be timed so that downlink signals to the WLAN radio are received during downlink times scheduled for an LTE radio. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093010 | EVOLVED NODE B CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR (CQI) PROCESSING FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for processing channel quality information (CQI) and scheduling resources subject to cooperative resource allocation based on the CQI are provided. To convey the CQI for protected/unprotected subframes in a single report, a new vector CQI format may be utilized. Two alternatives for CQI processing this vector format and the advantages of each are described. In the first alternative, a single entry from the CQI vector is selected for processing by a downlink scheduler and/or other media access control (MAC) blocks (e.g., a PHICH, DCI power control, and/or PDCCH scheduler). In the second alternative, the selection from the CQI vector is made on a per-subframe basis, and both the subframe and the selected CQI element are processed by the downlink scheduler and/or the other MAC blocks. In this manner, better scheduling decisions may be made using the CQI vector. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093011 | Methods, Apparatuses, and Computer Program Products for Prioritizing Uplink Carriers - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for prioritizing uplink carriers. A method may include determining a first pilot channel transmission power level for a first uplink carrier. The method may further include determining a second pilot channel transmission power level for a second uplink carrier. The method may additionally include prioritizing the first and second uplink carriers based at least in part upon the first and second pilot channel transmission power levels. Corresponding computer program products and apparatuses are also provided. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093012 | Channel State Information Measurement and Reporting - A rule specifies a timing relation between a measurement configuration which indicates at least one subframe to measure and a reporting configuration which indicates at least one subframe in which to report. This rule is used by both user equipment UE and network to map between a downlink subframe in which channel state information is measured and an uplink subframe in which the channel state information is reported. The network may configure the UE with the measurement and reporting configurations via dedicated signaling or broadcast. If the measurement configuration is periodic and indicates multiple downlink subframes to measure the rule results in a one to one mapping of downlink to uplink subframe where less than all of the multiple downlink subframes map to an uplink subframe; if aperiodic the rule indicates a single downlink subframe to measure. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093013 | Calculation Method and Device of Intra-Turbo Code Interleaver - A calculation method of a turbo code internal interleaver is disclosed by the present invention, and comprises: dividing a sequence with a length of K | 04-19-2012 |
20120093014 | COMMUNICAITON METHOD AND APPARATUS USING SYMBOL INTERLEAVING - A communication method and apparatus using a symbol interleaver in a long term evolution (LTE)-based satellite communication system are provided. The communication method may include determining whether to use an interleaver based on service information, and interleaving the data using the symbol interleaver designed based on interleaver information. Also, the communication method may include generating random data using a timer and interleaving the random data. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093015 | Systems and Methods for Multi-Beam Optic-Wireless Vehicle Communications - The present invention offers systems and methods for effective multiple-hop routing, multicasting and media access control for vehicle group communications that employ directional wireless radio technology. Multi-beam optic-wireless media and streamlined operations provide low-overhead communications among vehicles. Systems and methods are provided to maintain a quasi-stationary group of neighboring vehicles, enable high-throughput on-demand switching among multiple vehicles, enable group coding in the vehicle group to achieve higher throughput, and enable dynamic adjustment of link to maintain desirable vehicle group. The proposed solution builds upon the conception of a MAC-free wireless operation and quasi-stationary vehicular switched network to achieve ultra-low-overhead and high-throughput vehicle communications. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093016 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL - A Multi-Input Multi-Output (MIMO) downlink transmission control method that is related to communications technologies is disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. The method includes: obtaining a channel fading change rate and a feedback delay of a user; calculating out a closed-loop MIMO throughput gain according to the channel fading change rate and the feedback delay; and determining a downlink transmission mode according to the closed-loop MIMO throughput gain, wherein the downlink transmission mode includes a closed-loop mode or an open-loop mode. A MIMO downlink transmission control apparatus is also disclosed. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093017 | ADAPTIVE JOINT SOURCE AND CHANNEL CODING SCHEME FOR H.264 VIDEO MULTICASTING OVER WIRELESS NETWORKS - An invention is described including calculating a real packet loss rate in a time slot at the end of the time slot, estimating average packet loss rate for a subsequent time slot, estimating variance of packet loss rate for the subsequent time slot and estimating the packet loss rate for the subsequent time slot. An invention is also described for dynamically allocating available bandwidth for video multicast including selecting an intra-frame rate, determining a packet loss rate threshold, receiving user topology information, receiving channel conditions for each user, determining an optimal operation point for encoding and transmitting video frames in a subsequent time slot, adapting dynamically quantization parameters and a forward error correction code rate, encoding the video frames using the quantization parameters and applying forward error correction code with the forward error correction code rate to data packets of the video frames to generate forward error correction packets. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093018 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - To perform scheduling for improving throughput, while suppressing control information amounts notified from communication terminal apparatuses. A communication terminal apparatus ( | 04-19-2012 |
20120093019 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a communication method, a device and a communication system. The technical solutions provided by the present invention include: a Base Station Router (BSR) and a service server. The BSR is configured to make a Mobile Station (MS) access a network, obtain information of multiple transmission paths from the service server during a process for the MS to apply to the service server for a service, and provide a communication service for the MS and the service server by using a multi-path transmission scheme. The service server, connected with the BSR, is configured to obtain information of QoS required by the service applied by the MS, determine the multiple transmission paths according to the information of the QoS, and communicate with the MS by using the multi-path transmission scheme. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093020 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a radio communication mobile station apparatus, a radio communication base station apparatus and a radio communication method, which make it possible to correctly switch between transmission modes for a PUSCH and a PUCCH while impeding signaling overhead from increasing. A transmission mode setting unit ( | 04-19-2012 |
20120093021 | CELL SEARCHING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - Provided are a cell searching method and an apparatus in a multi-carrier system. A terminal acquires a first physical cell identity (PCI) for a first downlink component carrier, and acquires an expanded PCI for a second downlink component carrier. A first downlink reference signal through the first downlink element carrier is transmitted on the basis of the PCI, and a second downlink reference signal through the second downlink component carrier is transmitted on the basis of the expanded PCI. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093022 | Fast Retransmission Method and Device in Radio Link Control Layer Acknowledged Mode - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for fast retransmission in radio link control layer acknowledged mode, said method comprises: a sending end analyzing a status report to obtain unacknowledged (NACK) information; the sending end determining data that need to be retransmitted according to a judging condition of a last group of NACK information, and placing the data into a retransmission queue and sending the data to a receiving end after packeting; said apparatus comprises: a status report receiving unit for receiving status reports from an opposite end continuously; a status report analyzing unit for analyzing a status report to obtain NACK information; a status report judging and determining unit for determining data that need to be retransmitted according to a judging condition of a last group of NACK information; and a data retransmitting unit for sending retransmission data to a receiving end after packeting in a retransmission queue. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093023 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR EVALUATING INTERCONNECTION EFFICIENCY OF PARALLEL COMPUTER NETWORKS BASED UPON STATIC ROUTING SCHEMES - Methods and devices for characterizing the interconnection efficiency of a computer network based upon a static routing scheme are disclosed. The network comprises a plurality of items of equipment. After having determined ( | 04-19-2012 |
20120093024 | Method for ascertaining a transmissible telegram data length - A method for ascertaining a transmissible telegram data length in a HART® fieldbus system. The method comprises the following steps: transmitting a test telegram between a master and a slave via the HART® fieldbus system, wherein the test telegram has a predetermined test data length; checking by the receiver of the test telegram whether the latter was received in its entirety; and determining whether this test data length is transmissible based on the result of the check. | 04-19-2012 |
20120099445 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system has a communication control unit, communication terminal units and communication units. The communication control unit and the communication terminal units communicate according to a first protocol. The communication units mutually communicate according to a second protocol. A specific communication unit of the communication units has a data analyzer and a data transmitter. The data analyzer judges whether or not second monitoring information represents a steady state. The data transmitter transmits the control information corresponding to the second monitoring information to at least one related second communication terminal unit through the communication control unit according to the first protocol if the second monitoring information represents an unsteady state. Thereby, the load connected to the second communication terminal unit is controlled. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099446 | REPORTING OF CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATORS FOR A NON-LINEAR DETECTOR - Techniques for determining channel quality indicators (CQIs) for a non-linear detector at a user equipment (UE) are described. In one design, the UE may determine at least one parameter (e.g., at least one threshold) based on at least one constellation constrained capacity function. Each threshold may correspond to a maximum number of information bits for one stream when a particular modulation order is used for another stream. The UE may determine CQIs for multiple streams for the non-linear detector based on the at least one parameter. The UE may also select a precoding matrix (e.g., jointly with the CQIs) based on the at least one parameter. The UE may report the selected precoding matrix and the CQIs for the multiple streams. The UE may thereafter receive a transmission of the multiple streams, which may be transmitted based on the selected precoding matrix and the CQIs. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099447 | Reliable ISP Access Cloud State Detection Method and Apparatus - A Multi-Homing System is equipped with an Adaptive ISP Access Cloud State Detection apparatus (ACSD) that improves the reliability of the availability of digital connections (links) between computer sites, such as a Computer Premises Network and the Internet, in which such connections are made by connecting through a multiplicity of ISP Access Clouds (links). Reliability is improved over prior art methods by using data elements of Internet Protocol data-grams, e.g. record fields or bits of fields, that are regularly and normally exchanged between the ISP Access Clouds and the CPN without creating additional data traffic. Data Elements from each ISP Access Cloud are used by processing functions of the by the ACSD to test for conditions that indicate that it may be in a DOWN status. when a DOWN status is suspected, other functions in the ACSD initiate transmission of a set of PROBE packets that can reliably determine if the suspect link is actually DOWN or merely giving a response that would be interpreted as DOWN by prior art methods. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099448 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS APPARATUS - A wireless apparatus includes: a first wireless unit, a second wireless unit, a controller, and a processing unit. The first wireless unit performs wireless communications in a first communication mode for performing the communications within a first communication coverage area. The second wireless unit performs wireless communications in a second communication mode for performing the communications within a second communication coverage area which is smaller than the first communication coverage area. The controller starts the second wireless unit on the basis of a received power of the start notification signal. The start notification signal is received by the first wireless unit. The processing unit manages or holds data transmitted and received by the first wireless unit and the second wireless unit. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099449 | SPATIAL RESUSE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In a first method, a first apparatus determines a channel gain to a second apparatus with which the first apparatus is communicating. The first apparatus determines interferer backoff information that ensures an interference level at the first apparatus such that a signal received from the second apparatus can be decoded reliably. The interferer backoff information is determined based on the channel gain. The first apparatus transmits information based on the interferer backoff information in a message to the second apparatus. In a second method, a first apparatus in communication with a second apparatus determines a channel gain to a third apparatus with which the first apparatus can potentially interfere. The first apparatus receives a message from the third apparatus. The message includes interferer backoff information. The first apparatus determines a power for transmitting a signal to the second apparatus based on the interferer backoff information and the channel gain. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099450 | SPATIAL REUSE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided. The apparatus determines a channel gain to a second wireless device with which the first wireless device is communicating. In addition, the apparatus determines interferer backoff information that ensures an interference level at the first wireless device such that a signal received from the second wireless device can be decoded reliably. The interferer backoff information is determined based on the channel gain. Furthermore, the apparatus transmits information based on the interferer backoff information in one of an RTS message or a CTS message to the second wireless device. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099451 | Method and device for detecting a signal in a Long Term Evolution system - The present disclosure discloses a method for detecting a signal in an LTE system, the method includes that: an eNodeB calculates a signal power P | 04-26-2012 |
20120099452 | Method, Terminal and Network System for Reporting Buffer Status Report - The present invention discloses a method, a terminal and a network system for reporting a buffer status report. The method comprises: a terminal triggers a buffer status report (BSR) and obtains radio resource information of uplink component carriers in a radio network; one or more BSR data units are constructed based on information of buffer data volume to be transmitted; one or more uplink component carriers are selected from the uplink component carriers with available radio resources, and the BSR data unit(s) is/are transmitted on the selected uplink component carrier(s) to a network side. The present invention fully takes advantages of wide bandwidth of a long term evolution-advanced (LTE)-A system, and can realize high-efficiency-and-quality transmission of BSR data unit(s). | 04-26-2012 |
20120099453 | Uplink Link Adaption at the User Equipment - Method and arrangement in a user equipment for link adaptation of signals sent from the user equipment to a base station. The base station and the user equipment are comprised within a wireless communication system. The method comprises receiving information from the base station, comprising an indication of resource blocks available for transmission of signals from the user equipment to the base station, obtaining at least one of a user equipment related parameter or a link related parameter, and selecting a subset of the indicated available resource blocks received from the base station, based on at least one of the measured user equipment related parameter or the measured link related parameter, to be used for sending signals to the base station. Also, a method and arrangement in a base station for assisting a user equipment in performing link adaptation of signals is presented. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099454 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A scheduling method and apparatus in a wireless communication system. The scheduling method for a node B in a wireless communication system supporting a plurality of carriers includes determining a delay weight for each of a plurality of user equipment (UEs) according to a preset weight application time point. The method also includes determining a scheduling metric value of each UE per carrier using the delay weight, and determining a priority of each UE per carrier using the scheduling metric value. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099455 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system is provided including a first base station, and a second base station having a coverage area at least one part of which overlaps a coverage area of the first base station. The communication system includes a measurer that measures a utilization degree of at least one mobile station connected to the second base station, and an adjuster that adjusts a wireless resource allocation of the at least one mobile station connected to the second base station based upon the utilization degree. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099456 | RECEPTION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, RECEIVING METHOD, AND TRANSMITTING METHOD - A reception apparatus includes a receiver configured to receive a packet including a label and quality information indicating communication quality for the packet. The reception apparatus also includes a processor configured to allocate a priority to the received packet based on a combination of the label and the quality information included in the received packet and a transmitter configured to supply the packet to which the priority is allocated to a switch that performs transfer control to a packet based on its priority. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099457 | METHOD AND SIGNALING TO ENHANCE ASSOCIATION IN MESH SYSTEMS - A method and system for conveying backhaul link information for intelligent selection of a mesh access point (MAP) in a mesh network are disclosed. The mesh network includes a plurality of MAPs. The MAPs send backhaul link information regarding backhaul connections between each MAP and any interconnections in the mesh network to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The WTRU then determines a performance value with respect to the MAPs based on the backhaul link information and selects one of the MAPs to associate with based on the performance value. The WTRU may send information about interconnection needs of the WTRU to the MAPs, and the MAPs may generate the backhaul link information based on the interconnection needs of the WTRU. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099458 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal apparatus includes a downlink transceiver that receives downlink data via a base station governing a first cell and exchanges with the base station governing the first cell, control information that is for receiving the downlink data; and an uplink transceiver that transmits uplink data via a base station governing a second cell that is different from the first cell and exchanges with the base station governing the second cell, control information that is for transmitting the uplink data. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099459 | RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH A MINIMAL BROADCAST CHANNEL - In one embodiment, the present invention comprises transmitting a broadcast burst in a broadcast channel from a base station of a radio communications system. The invention further comprises receiving a request burst from a user terminal, and transmitting a message burst from the base station to the user terminal from which the request was received. The message burst includes a description of the channels available on the radio communications system for receiving messages from user terminals. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099460 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, AND RADIO TERMINAL STATION - This radio communication method is used to perform spatial multiplexing communication between cells in the overlap cell environment. In the MU-MIMO overlap cell environment, when a null is formed between a radio base station and a radio terminal station belonging to different cells, a first set of a “call signal” and a “response signal” is used to perform mutual detection with the radio base station and the radio terminal station belonging to different cells, and then a null is formed so as not to cause interference of radio waves between the radio base station and the radio terminal station belonging to different cells. At this time, the addresses of the radio base station and the radio terminal station are used to discriminate whether the radio base station and the radio terminal station belong to the same cell or different cells. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099461 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING UP RADIO BEARER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of setting up a radio bearer (RB) in a wireless communication system are provided. A relay node transmits information on a supported quality of service (QoS) to a core network (CN) or a user equipment. The relay node relays a service request of the user equipment to the CN and sets up a UuRB for a service requested by the service request over a Uu interface between the relay node and the user equipment under the instruction of the CN. The relay node sets up a UnRB over a Un interface between the relay node and a base station (BS) according to a required QoS for the service requested by the service request. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099462 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a radio communication terminal which is capable of measuring quality in communication with a handover destination with high accuracy. The radio communication terminal is capable of communicating with a base station or a relay node, and includes: a receiver which receives control information including information relating to measurement of measuring quality of a neighbor cell; an extractor which extracts information on a subframe where the measurement should be performed, which is a subframe where only transmission of a signal from the relay node connected to the base station is performed, from the information relating to the measurement; a measurement section which performs the measurement, on a subframe basis, based on the extracted information on the subframe where the measurement should be performed: and a transmitter which transmits a result, of the measurement to the base station or the relay node. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099463 | Method and Apparatus for Managing Carrier Measurements - Various methods for managing carrier measurements are provided. One example method includes capturing a secondary carrier intra-frequency measurement for a secondary carrier frequency and determining that the secondary carrier measurement satisfies secondary carrier event criteria. The secondary carrier event criteria may be derived from an anchor carrier measurement parameter. The example method may also include generating a measurement report in response to the captured secondary carrier intra-frequency measurement satisfying the secondary carrier event criteria. The measurement report message may include an event identifier associated with the satisfied event criteria. Similar and related example methods and example apparatuses are also provided. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099464 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-CARRIERS - Discussed are a method and an apparatus for managing system information in a wireless communication system supporting multi-carriers. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method by which user equipment obtains system information in a wireless communication system supporting multi-carriers comprises the steps of: receiving from a base station a message including information related to modification to system information of one or more component carriers; determining whether the system information of a component carrier from among the plurality of component carriers, which is set to the user equipment, is to be modified, based on the information related to the modification to the system information of the one or more component carriers; and obtaining the modified system information of the component carrier set at the user equipment when it is determined that the system information of the component carrier set at the user equipment is to be modified. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099465 | METHOD AND ITS DEVICES OF NETWORK TCP TRAFFIC ONLINE IDENTIFICATION USING FEATURES IN THE HEAD OF THE DATA FLOW - Online TCP traffic identification using features in the head of the data flow wherein parameters of a number of packets in the head of the data flow such as packet length are extended with modified packet interval time and so on to establish the protocol features library according to the joint probability distribution. The protocol type of the data flow is obtained through comparing the packets features in the head of the data flow with the protocol features library. Data flow separation module, features extraction module, classification arbitration module and protocol features library module are included. The present invention weakens the impact that the round-trip delay has significantly on the protocol features, can accurately identify various TCP-based application-layer services and support online traffic identification. The identification process is suitable for hardware devices implementation and can be used in devices and systems that need online traffic identification in high-speed backbone network. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099466 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A communication terminal is capable of simultaneously communicating through a plurality of carriers by carrier aggregation, and the communication terminal comprises: a quality measurement unit for measuring the reception quality of a radio wave transmitted through a plurality of carriers from a base station of a connected cell to obtain a measured value; a primary carrier storage unit storing information specifying a primary carrier chosen from the plurality of carriers; a comparator for comparing a measured value of the primary carrier measured by the quality measurement unit to a threshold value; and a cell search unit for searching for another cell when the measured value of the primary carrier is less than or equal to the threshold value. Consequently, a search threshold value for carrier aggregation can be appropriately determined to perform a cell search and a quality measurement. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099467 | RADIO BASE STATION AND RESOURCE ALLOCATING METHOD - A radio base station ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099468 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DOWNLINK DATA SYNCHRONIZATION IN AN eMBMS TRANSMISSION - The invention proposes a technical scheme for controlling downlink data synchronization in an eMBMS transmission in a radio link control entity in a base station. By determining one length indicator for each service data unit, and meanwhile, each length indicator corresponds to one extension bit, the length indicator and the extension bit of each RLC SDU are byte aligned, and the base station generates different length indicators for the service data units with the different length distribution. By adopting the technical scheme of the invention, the corresponding radio link control header overhead thereof is fixed for each service data unit, and therefore, even in the case where a consecutive packet loss occurs in the service data unit received by a certain base station, synchronization between it and other base stations receiving correctly can still be achieved. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099469 | METHODS OF TRANSMITTING A SIGNAL IN A TIME DIVISION DUPLEXING MIMO SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUSES - The present invention relates to methods of transmitting a signal in a time division duplexing MIMO system and associated apparatuses. According to a first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of transmitting a signal in an eNodeB of a time division duplexing multiple input multiple output system. The method includes: A. receiving a signal from a user equipment in a space division multiplexing group and estimating uplink channel characteristics according to the received signal; B. determining reciprocity calibration information between the uplink channel characteristics and downlink channel characteristics; C. determining a downlink precoding matrix using zero forcing according to the uplink channel characteristics and the calibration information and transmitting a downlink signal to the user equipment in the space division multiplexing group according to the determined downlink precoding matrix. And the step B further comprises receiving information associated with a downlink vector channel matrix fed back from the user equipment in the space division multiplexing group and selectively updating the calibration information according to the information associated with the downlink vector channel matrix. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099470 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and apparatus for channel state information feedback. The method comprises: estimating channel state information from the mobile terminal to a serving cell and neighboring cells according to channel state information reference signals (CSI-Reference Signal) received from a plurality of coordinating cells; calculating a precoding matrix based on the estimated channel state information of the serving cell; calculating precoded channel state information respectively for the serving cell of the mobile terminal and neighboring cells in the coordinating cells according to the obtained precoding matrix; and feeding the precoded channel state information back to the serving cell of the mobile terminal. The above technical scheme can implement flexible and efficient channel status information feedback with low overhead, and enable multi-cell coordinated transmission to perform flexible and efficient precoding processing based on the feedback. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099471 | Adjusting Channel Quality Report in a Wireless Communication Network - The present invention relates to a method and an arrangement in a first communication node ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099472 | THRESHOLD VALUE CALCULATION METHOD A RADIO BASE STATION - A threshold calculation apparatus ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099473 | Method and Device for Maintaining Long Term Evolution Base Station - A method and a device for maintaining a Long Term Evolution (LTE) base station are provided by the embodiments of the present invention. Depending on the LTE access network system and air interface characteristics, by making a few processing flow changes in such mode or method, a wireless communication link is established between a network maintenance device and a base station to implement the base station maintenance and data communication. Application of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention can implement the base station maintenance and data communication by the wireless mode, reduce the cost of the network maintenance and prevent the destruction and influence of human factors on the operation and maintenance of the base station. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099474 | DIVERSITY ANTENNA SYSTEM AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - An antenna diversity system comprises a diversity transmitter having a plurality of transmitter-side antennas, the diversity transmitter being arranged to generate at least one sequence of signals comprising data packets having payloads identical and identifiers different for each of the data packets, each of the identifiers identifying a corresponding one of the plurality of transmitter-side antennas; and to successively transmit at least two of the signals at different points in time on the corresponding ones of the plurality of transmitter-side antennas; and a receiver comprising a first receiver-side antenna, the receiver being arranged to successively receive the signals of the at least one sequence on the first receiver-side antenna, and to suspend receiving of subsequent signals of the at least one sequence when an error check of a data packet comprised in a received signal of the at least one sequence indicates a successful reception. | 04-26-2012 |
20120106362 | DISTRIBUTED LEARNING METHOD FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - In a wireless mesh network, an algorithm is used by mesh points in the network to predict the success of and interference created by a new transmission opportunity. In particular, it is provided a method for mesh points, in a mesh network, to determine whether to transmit to another mesh point simultaneously while another transmission is taking place on the same communication link. A mesh point should not transmit to another mesh point if the mesh point's transmission interference disturbs a simultaneous transmission from another mesh point. Furthermore, a transmitting mesh point should not transmit to a receiving mesh point if the transmission will be disturbed at the receiving mesh point from interference from a simultaneous transmission from another mesh point. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106363 | Auto-Aware Dynamic Control Policy for Energy Efficiency - An auto-aware dynamic control policy for energy efficiency. A discovery node in a network can be designed to transmit periodically discovery traffic to a plurality of other network nodes in the network. Responses to the discovery traffic can be used by the discovery node to ascertain real-time activity in the network. Measures of the real-time activity can be used to adjust a control policy in the discovery node. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106364 | HETEROGENEOUS COEXISTENCE MANAGEMENT IN SECONDARY NETWORKS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to provide for wireless resource sharing between heterogeneous wireless networks to enable coexistence in a TV band white space. An example embodiment of the invention includes a method, comprising the steps of: registering coexistence information services to a wireless network, wherein decisions concerning operational parameters of the wireless network are made by a wireless device belonging to the wireless network; determining that the wireless network has one or more neighboring wireless networks; receiving a satisfaction level indication for the wireless network, the satisfaction level indication representing how satisfied the wireless network is with current communication resources; and notifying one or more network controllers serving the one or more neighboring wireless networks of the registered service type and the satisfaction level indication of the wireless network. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106365 | NETWORK PACKET LATENCY MEASUREMENT - A solution for network packet latency measurement includes, at a network device having a memory, storing a first time value indicating when an ingress port of the network device received a packet. The solution also includes storing a second time value indicating when an egress port of the network device received the packet for transmission towards another network device. The solution also includes storing a difference between the first time value and the second time value. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106366 | DATA LOSS MONITORING OF PARTIAL DATA STREAMS - A method for detecting loss of sensitive information in partial data streams may include identifying partial data streams containing segments lost while capturing network traffic at a network computing device, determining characteristics of content of the partial data streams, padding content portions of the lost segments in the partial data streams, and scanning the partial data streams for sensitive information according to at least one data loss prevention (DLP) policy. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106367 | DETERMINING A SIMILARITY BETWEEN TREE RELATED STRUCTURES - According to an order, a plurality of restricted top down model (RTDM) distances between a plurality of nodes residing on at least one tree related structure is determined. The determining includes determining a first RTDM distance between nodes of a first node pair of the plurality of nodes, wherein the determining the first RTDM distance comprises comparing prior determined RTDM distance measurements with the first node pair, wherein the prior determined RTDM distance measurements relate to node pairs preceding the first node pair within the order. The first RTDM distance measurement, the prior determined RTDM distance measurements and a second node pair of the plurality of nodes are compared. Based on the comparing, generating a second RTDM distance measurement. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106368 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF DETECTING RESOURCE ASSIGNMENT INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of detecting resource assignment information by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The UE detects a number of Assignment Advanced-MAP (A-A-MAP) groups and a number of a plurality of A-A-MAP Information Elements (IEs) included in each of the A-A-MAP groups, extracts type and flag of each of the plurality of A-A-MAP IEs; and performs blind detection of resource assignment information on the basis of the type and flag of each of the A-A-MAP IEs. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106369 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND RING NETWORK MONITORING METHOD - A communication apparatus forming a ring network sends a test frame that is not designed to be discarded at a block point in the ring network established to discard the user frame and that is configured to have a data size randomly selected from the data sizes permitted for the user frame, from a first communication port connected to a transfer channel in a first direction in the ring network. The communication apparatus determines that the transfer status of the user frame in the ring network is normal when the sent test frame is received via a second communication port connected to a transfer channel in a second direction in the ring network in a predetermined manner. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106370 | NEIGHBOR RELATION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT - Neighbor relation information management involves, for example: acquiring, reporting, and exchanging neighbor relation information. In some cases, neighbor relation information is acquired and/or reported in a manner that does not significantly impact other functionality of the access terminal. For example, an access terminal may be configured to acquire and/or report neighbor relation information only during one or more defined radio states. In some cases, the acquisition of neighbor relation information is based on a neighbor relation threshold. In some cases, an access terminal does not immediately report measured neighbor relation information and instead stores the information for reporting at a later time. In some cases, a transmitted indication is used to facilitate retrieval of neighbor relation information from an access terminal. In some cases, neighbor relation information acquired from an access terminal is exchanged over a direct interface between access points. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106371 | COLLISION DETECTION AND BACKOFF WINDOW ADAPTATION FOR MULTIUSER MIMO TRANSMISSION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally apply to a wireless local area network (WLAN) where an access point (AP) has data to send to multiple stations (STAs). By using the Downlink Spatial Division Multiple Access (DL-SDMA) technique, the AP may send data at the same time towards multiple STAs. Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatuses for detecting that a multiuser multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) transmission has suffered a collision and to adapting a contention window (CW) size for a backoff counter applied to a subsequent MU-MIMO transmission. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106372 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATION WITH SHORTENED SIGNAL FORMATS - Techniques for addressing high interference observed by a receiver in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The receiver may observe different interference power levels across a transmission symbol. In an aspect, the receiver applies different weights to different portions of the transmission symbol to account for fluctuation of interference power across the transmission symbol. In another aspect, a transmitter may send a transmission symbol such that a receiver can ignore a portion of a symbol period with high interference. In one design, the transmitter generates a transmission symbol including at least two copies of a signal component. The transmitter transmits at least one copy of the signal component in a portion of the symbol period in which the receiver does not observe high interference. The receiver processes the at least one copy of the signal component to recover data sent in the transmission symbol. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106373 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SOUNDING ANTENNAS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate sounding antennas in wireless communication. In an aspect, a method for wireless communication includes determining at least one resource reserved for transmitting a demodulation reference signal and transmitting a sounding reference signal over the at least one resource. In another aspect, a method of wireless communication includes signaling a parameter related to sounding multiple antenna ports, receiving signals from a device over the multiple antenna ports, and estimating a channel related to the signals at least in part by removing a precoding from the signals. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106374 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR USING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNALS - In a wireless communication system, a wireless device is identified as being a relay device. A channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) configuration is selected such that at least one CSI-RS can be transmitted to the wireless device in a subset of subframes assigned to relay backhaul transmissions. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106375 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING A GROUP OWNER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for a device to determine a group owner that functions as an access point in a wireless network is provided. In the method, a first device acquires first intention information indicating the first device's intention to become a group owner and receives, from a second device, second intention information indicating the second device's intention to become a group owner, and compares the first intention information and the second intention information to determine that one of the first and second devices is a group owner. This method enables smooth communication between devices in a wireless network since a device which has more available power or can operate for a longer time can become a group owner. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106376 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device includes a communication unit that receives a reception window size from a reception side communication device and transmits a packet of a transmission amount corresponding to a transmission window size to the reception side communication device; and a control unit that determines whether a channel with respect to the reception side communication device is in a broad band and high delay circumstance, changes a first state where the transmission window size is a first window size which is not larger than the reception window size to a second state wherein the transmission window size is a second window size which is larger than the reception window size when the channel is determined as the broad band and high delay circumstance, and transmits the packet of the transmission amount larger than the reception window size in the second state. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106377 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A MEASUREMENT OF PERFORMANCE FOR A NETWORK - Performance for a network is measured by sending multi-objective probes on a path, receiving at least one of the multi-objective probes for the path, and determining performance measurements for at least two parameters of the path determined from the at least one of the multi-objective probes. Separate algorithms are simultaneously executed to measure the at least two parameters of the path determined from the at least one of the multi-objective probes. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106378 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IP TARGET TRAFFIC ANALYSIS - Methods and systems for identifying network users who communicate with the network (e.g., the Internet) via a given network connection. The disclosed techniques analyze traffic that flows in the network to determine, for example, whether the given network connection serves a single individual or multiple individuals, a single computer or multiple computers. A Profiling System (PS) acquires copies of data traffic that flow through network connections that connect computers to the WAN. The PS analyzes the acquired data, attempting to identify individuals who login to servers. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106379 | NETWORK MONITORING APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION QUALITY AND A METHOD THEREFOR - In a communication quality monitoring apparatus, a learning estimator uses collected network information and operational expressions for service quality to update the expressions based on a difference between an estimation of the quality and service quality information to learn the relationship between the loads and the quality. Based on the service quality information, a determiner determines whether or not the quality is lower than a predetermined value. When the quality is determined lower than the predetermined value, a control selector generates candidate information based on the network information and network configuration information, and determines, before control, whether or not the service quality estimation obtained from this candidate information and the operational expression exceeds the predetermined value. Apiece of candidate information determined as exceeding this value is selected. Based on control contents in the candidate information, a network controller controls the network devices. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106380 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HIGH RESOLUTION INDOOR POSITIONING USING A NARROWBAND RF TRANSCEIVER - A sequence of two or more signals representing two or more data packets is transmitted through a wireless channel using a transmitter device. The two or more signals are a result of two or more transmissions that are made sequentially in time at different center frequencies in order to span a desired bandwidth. At least one of the two or more signals includes a physical layer preamble. The sequence of two or more signals is received using a receiver device. A time of arrival of one or more signals of the received sequence is calculated using one or more of the received sequence, the time differences among the two or more transmissions, the different center frequencies, information from the two or more data packets, and any carrier phase differences among the two or more transmissions using the receiver device. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106381 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SOFT ACCESS POINT POWER REDUCTION - A system and method for reducing power consumption of a wireless device operating as a soft access point. In one embodiment, a wireless device includes a soft access point controller that configures the wireless device to operate as a group owner in a peer-to-peer wireless local area network. The soft access point controller includes a beacon controller. The beacon controller is configured to transmit beacon frames at a first periodic interval. The beacon controller is also configured to extend a discovery interval of a wireless station by transmitting acknowledgement packets at a second periodic interval. The second periodic interval is shorter than the first periodic interval and shorter than a minimum discovery scan timeout of the wireless station. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106382 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK TEST METHOD AND TEST SYSTEM - The embodiments of the present disclosure provide a WWAN test method and a test system related to the communication field, which is suitable for the product research and development stage and can derive a quantitative data relationship between a NFS test result and an OTA test result. The WWAN test method comprises: measuring a power value of noises, denoted by D(NFS), received by an antenna of a terminal to be tested in a NFS test manner; measuring a power attenuation value, denoted by D-sense, of a path from a WWAN module to the antenna of the terminal; obtaining an antenna efficiency value, denoted by AE, of the terminal; and obtaining a TIS value of an OTA test result by TIS=D(NFS)+D-sense−AE. The embodiments of the present disclosure can be used in the NFS test. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106383 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTONOMOUS DISCOVERY OF PEAK CHANNEL CAPACITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A wireless device includes a data structure that relates peak channel capacity to the quality of the wireless communication link. The wireless communication link quality forms an index to indicate the expected peak channel capacity for that particular quality value of the wireless communication link. The wireless device uses the data storage structure to determine an expected data transfer throughput based on the quality of the wireless communication link. A transfer rate lower than expected may indicate congestion in the core network or the RAN. In this case, the network may slow the data delivery from the data source or temporarily suspend delivery. Conversely, low data throughput may be the result of a poor quality wireless communication link. If the data structure indicates that the data throughput corresponds to the expected throughput for the quality value of the wireless communication link, the system need not take any steps to reduce congestion. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106384 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - An apparatus and a system for transmitting channel state information acquires channel state information of a channel between a mobile terminal and two or more cooperative base stations. The apparatus quantizes the channel state information separately by using a preset single-cell codebook used for quantizing the channel between the mobile terminal and each one of the two or more cooperative base stations. The apparatus acquires united codeword indexes of the quantized channel state information in the single-cell codebook; and transmits the united codeword indexes of the quantized channel state information in the single-cell codebook. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106385 | CHANNEL BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION ON HYBRID TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS LINKS - A bandwidth estimation algorithm on shared links detects peaks and/or average per-user bandwidth. Estimating is performed at the transport or IP layer with no assistance from lower layer (PHY, MAC, etc.) and the techniques can be used for any of adjusting the level of video optimization to the available bandwidth; driving QoS decisions at the transmitter based on available bandwidth; improving QoS enforcement during transitions among hybrid technologies on a wireless links; and correcting estimates on devices delivering bursty payload. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106386 | Method of uplink MDT measurement - Methods of MDT information logging and reporting are provided. In one embodiment, a method is provided to resolve shortcomings of prior art by correlating UL measurements with QoS information to enable UL performance analysis and accurate detection of coverage problems. In another embodiment, a method is provided to resolve the shortcomings of the prior art by making DL measurements and location information collecting or logging conditional on UL measurements. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106387 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION NODE, AND DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication management apparatus that manages transmission of data in a network in which plural communication nodes are connected via a transmission line in a ring shape, the apparatus including: a network-presence checking unit that transmits a network-presence-check frame in broadcast and generates network connection information indicating a connection state among the connection nodes from a received network-presence-check acknowledge frame, a token-circulation-order determining unit that determines token circulation order; a setup processing unit that performs setup processing for notifying each of the communication nodes of a token circulation destination; a data-frame-communication processing unit that performs transmission and reception of a data frame using a token frame; and a line-connection managing unit that disables, when the network has a ring configuration, any one of ports of any one of the communication nodes to prevent a connection state of the network from becoming a ring shape. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106388 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a communication system in which cooperative communication is performed, adaptive control is performed efficiently relating mainly to precoding processing. There are included, in an anchor base station | 05-03-2012 |
20120106389 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for operating a network comprising a primary station communicating with a plurality of secondary stations, the method comprising the primary station communicating with a secondary station in a discontinuous mode; the secondary station transmitting to the primary station a control message based on the current status of the secondary station; the primary station changing a parameter of the discontinuous mode based on the control message. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106390 | Method, System and Device for Reporting Uplink Pilot Interference - A method, a system and a device for reporting uplink pilot interference are provided, which are applied to time division duplex (TDD) system, and include: a base station measures uplink pilot time slot (UpPTS) interference based on a cell portion; the base station transmits the uplink pilot time slot interference, which carries the home cell portion ID corresponding to the uplink pilot time slot interference, to a radio network controller, therefore the radio network controller selects the transmitting position of the uplink pilot time slot according to the uplink pilot time slot interference and the home cell portion ID. The system realizes the reporting of the dedicated measurement in TDD system. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106391 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION IN A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for information transmission in a machine-to-machine telecommunications network and a machine-to-machine telecommunications network. The telecommunications network supports information transmission between a server and a plurality of communication terminals. A common group identifier is assigned to a group containing at least some of the plurality of communication terminals. An information message is transmitted to the plurality of communication terminals to which the common group identifier has been assigned. The information message contains the common group identifier. | 05-03-2012 |
20120113823 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VERY HIGH FREQUENCY DATA LINK CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT - A method to increase throughput over a very high frequency aeronautical network is provided. The method comprises simultaneously receiving at least two downlink signals at a plurality of ground antennas at an aeronautical ground station of the very high frequency aeronautical network, generating a channel-state-information matrix based on preambles, decomposing the simultaneously received at least two downlink signals into respective ones of the at least two downlink signals, and decoding each of the respective ones of the decomposed at least two downlink signals. The at least two downlink signals include respective preambles indicative of a channel state. Solutions to the channel-state-information matrix are generated by a mean-square-error algorithm to avoid singularities in the solutions. The decomposing of the simultaneously received at least two downlink signals is based on the generated channel-state-information matrix. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113824 | REPORT SEQUENCE WITH PERFORMANCE DATA TRANSMITTED BETWEEN TWO NODES OF A COMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method, a performance data transmission device and a computer program product for performing performance management reporting from a first to a second node in a communication system. The reporting concerns communication over one communication interface of a node in the communication system and the performance data transmission device comprises a data collecting unit that obtains performance data relating to the communication over the communication interface for transmission to the second node and configuration data, a data scheduling unit that schedules the transmission of performance data and configuration data in a sequence of consecutive reports according to a reporting scheme, where the sequence makes up a set of reports, and a transmitting unit that transmits the reports according to the reporting scheme and where configuration data is only present in a subset of the set of reports including at least one report. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113825 | Wireless Communication Device and Method for Performing Neighbor Cell Analysis During Continuous Packet Connectivity Mode - A wireless communication device is operable to perform neighbor cell analysis functions while operating in a continuous packet connectivity (CPC) mode and without requiring dedicated time periods for performing the neighbor cell analysis functions as part of a discontinuous reception (DRX) phase of the CPC mode. The DRX phase includes discontinuous (e.g., periodic) time periods for monitoring a downlink control channel from a serving base station. A receiver of the wireless communication device receives a control signal over the downlink control channel during each time period of the discontinuous time periods. A processor of the wireless communication device performs a portion of a neighbor cell analysis function during each time period of a quantity of the discontinuous time periods to produce neighbor cell analysis data. The processor accumulates the neighbor cell analysis data over the quantity of time periods to complete the neighbor cell analysis function. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113826 | Idle Interval Generation in Telecommunication Systems - In certain wireless communications systems, such as TD-SCDMA, frames are divided into sections allocated for various communication purposes such as uplink and downlink transmissions. In such schemes, there may be no mechanism to generate gaps for a UE to employ for non-allocated purposes, such as inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement. To generate gaps for such purposes the UE may employ rate-matching techniques to take certain allocated time slots for the UE and reserve them for inter-RAT measurement or other purposes. The rate-matching techniques generate unconfigured slots. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113827 | DYNAMIC SIMULTANEOUS PUCCH AND PUSCH SWITCHING FOR LTE-A - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) on a user equipment (UE) is described. A set of physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) candidates on an activated serving cell are monitored. A PDCCH of a serving cell intended for the UE in a subframe is detected. A physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) corresponding to the PDCCH in the same subframe is decoded. Transmission of the UCI for a subframe corresponding to the subframe in which the PDCCH was decoded is adjusted. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113828 | BEAM-FORMER HUB - A method, program, system and apparatus for implementing programmable radio patterns (i.e. beam-forming) in a wireless communication network are discussed. Beam-forming is performed by weighting data samples to compensate for phase variation and frequency variation introduced by a signal path. The phase variation and frequency variation introduced by a signal path is estimated by correlating stored data and calibration data. The phase variation and frequency variation are compensated for by applying phase and frequency corrections, or weights, to the data so as to equalize the phase variation and t frequency variation of the data. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113829 | Achieving Greater Test Efficiencies Using ACK Signal Suppression - A method and system for testing a wireless data packet transceiver as a device under test (DUT) adapted to operate in conformance with a wireless signal standard such that a transmitted signal, when received by an intended receiver, is to result in a responsive signal transmission acknowledging such signal reception. During testing, responsive signal transmissions, e.g., acknowledgement signals, are withheld by the test system until after a predetermined number of data packets have been captured from the DUT, until a predetermined time interval has passed, or until data packets at a predetermined number of data rates have been captured from the DUT. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113830 | ENHANCED NODE B AND METHOD FOR PRECODING WITH REDUCED QUANTIZATION ERROR - Embodiments of an enhanced Node B (eNB) and method for precoding with reduced quantization error are generally described herein. In some embodiments, first and second precoding-matrix indicator (PMI) reports may be received on an uplink channel and a single subband precoder matrix may be interpolated from precoding matrices indicated by both the PMI reports. Symbols for multiple-input multiple output (MIMO) beamforming may be precoded using the interpolated precoder matrix computed for single subband for a multiple user (MU)-MIMO downlink orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) transmission. In some embodiments, each of the first and second PMI reports includes a PMI associated with a same subband that jointly describes a recommended precoder. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113831 | Determination of Carriers and Multiplexing for Uplink Control Information Transmission - Embodiments contemplate methods and devices that may select uplink (UL) transmission resources for transmitting uplink control information (UCI). A determination may be made that UCI should be transmitted. A physical channel resource for transmission of the UCI may be selected and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WRTU) may transmit the UCI over a physical uplink channel capable of supporting multiple component carriers using the selected physical channel resource. The selection of the physical channel resource may include at least one of: selecting a pre-determined UL component carrier (CC) for uplink transmission on a physical uplink control shared channel (PUSCH) upon a PUSCH resource being available in a subframe, or, selecting a pre-determined UL CC for uplink transmission on a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) capable of UCI transmission in the subframe upon a PUSCH resource not being available in the subframe. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113832 | TRANSMISSION OF CONTROL INFORMATION ON UPLINK CHANNELS - Techniques for sending control information on uplink channels are disclosed. In one design, a user equipment (UE) may determine its current configuration for concurrent transmission of a control channel and a shared channel. The UE may select one or more channels, from among the control channel and the shared channel, to send control information of at least one type in a same subframe. The UE may select the one or more channels based on the types of control information to send, the current configuration for concurrent transmission of the control channel and the shared channel, whether the UE is scheduled for data transmission on the shared channel in the subframe, whether the UE has sufficient transmit power to transmit both the control channel and the shared channel, etc. The UE may send the control information on the one or more selected channels in the subframe. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113833 | Method of Power Information Reporting for Enhancing Uplink Power Control - A method of power information reporting for enhancing uplink power control in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises reporting a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) power headroom report (PHR) on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) in a reporting subframe for each of at least one PUCCH transmission in a first subframe. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113834 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS AND METHODS TO FACILITATE EFFICIENT REPEATER USAGE - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be provided for detecting a change in power of received signals and adjusting amplification of the received signals based on the detected change in power prior to transmitting the signals. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113835 | INTER-NETWORK CARRIER ETHERNET SERVICE PROTECTION - An interconnection assembly for connecting a first communication network to a second communication network includes a first network device of the first communication network for selectively transmitting data packets to a second network device of the second communication network and a third network device of the first communication network for alternatively transmitting the data packets to the second network device of the second communication network depending on a status information made available to the third network device. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113836 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COMPUTATION OF CHANNEL LOSS RATE AND COLLISION LOSS RATE OF COMMUNICATION LINK(S) IN A RANDOM ACCESS NETWORK - A method is intended for computing online channel loss rate and collision loss rate of at least one communication link established between nodes of a network using a random access MAC protocol. This method comprises the steps of i) dividing time in probing windows and transmitting a chosen number S of probe packets during each probing window from a transmitter node to a receiver node linked therebetween, ii) measuring a packet loss rate from probe packets lost on this communication link during a probing window, iii) scanning each probing window with smaller sliding windows, each having a size Wk smaller than S, to identify the sliding window during which only channel losses occur, and then for computing a channel loss rate on this communication link from this identified sliding window, and iv) computing a collision loss rate on this communication link by subtracting the computed channel loss rate from the measured packet loss rate. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113837 | Methods and Apparatus for Enhancing Network Testing Procedures - Methods and arrangements for reporting of measurements in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The embodiments relate to methods and arrangements exercising automated collection of network performance statistics as an alternative to drive tests and reporting function called Minimizing Drive Tests (MDT). The described embodiments for reporting of measurements in a wireless communication system include acquiring suitable confidence information. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113838 | COMMUNICATION METHOD OF A MACRO BASE STATION, A VEHICULAR MOVING RELAY, AND A VEHICULAR MOVING TERMINAL - Provided are examples of methods of a vehicular moving relay in a communication system including the vehicular moving relay, a moving terminal, and a macro base station. Also provided is an example of a terminal. The vehicular moving relay may repeatedly transmit data to a vehicular moving terminal without requesting a handover from a macro base station to the vehicular moving relay, using a unique code that is allocated to the vehicular moving terminal from the macro base station. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113839 | COMMON FRAMEWORK FOR ADVANCED MULTI-CELL AND MULTI-RAT COORDINATED OPERATIONS - Embodiments of a system and methods for advanced multi-cell coordinated operations are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113840 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENHANCED TRANSMISSION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Method and system for improving the performance of mobile communication networks. The method and system employs the additional functionality whereby an additional phase offset can be applied to one of the physical paths (one physical antenna) in order to modify and adapt the transmit polarization. In the preferred embodiment, the criterion for selecting the additional phase offset will be to maximize the energy received from the HSPA serving cell by the legacy HSDPA user equipments. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113841 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTION OF A NAT DEVICE - A method for detection of a network address translation (NAT) device in a network is described herein. An edge network device detects a first packet at an edge port of the edge network device. A second packet is detected at the edge port of the edge network device. It is determined whether a time to live (TTL) value associated with the first packet is different from a TTL value associated with the second packet. Where the TTL value associated with the first packet is different from a TTL value associated with the second packet, it is determined that a NAT device is connected to the edge port. Where the TTL value associated with the first packet is the same as a TTL value associated with the second packet, it is determined that a NAT device is not connected to the edge port. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113842 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DOWNLINK RECEIVING POWER DETECTION METHOD THEREFOR - A wireless communication system and a method for detecting downlink receiving power in the system are disclosed. N cells in the system respectively transmit data to at least one receiving terminal via N resource blocks using the same time-frequency resources; multiple channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) of a corresponding cell are set in each resource block, and orthogonality is maintained among the CSI-RSs of all the cells, wherein N is an integer greater than 1. Said method includes: an additional demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) used for indicating a receiving power is set in a puncture position in the resource block of the first cell which corresponds to a CSI-RS set in a resource block of another cell; and the receiving power of said first cell is detected according to said additional DM-RS. By using said method, the receiving power of a single cell in N cells can be detected, and the system overhead is not increased. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113843 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEMS FOR APPLYING ALMOST BLANK SUBFRAME (ABS) PATTERNS - Methods, apparatus, and systems using almost blank subframes patterns are disclosed. Different ABS patterns and triggers are described for enabling a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to obtain ABS patterns. One representative method of scheduling operations by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include the WTRU receiving information indicating the ABS pattern with a plurality of ABS intervals of an interfering cell; determining timing associated with the ABS intervals of the interfering cell in accordance with the indicated ABS pattern; and scheduling a measurement opportunity, a transmission opportunity or a reception opportunity during the ABS intervals of the interfering cell. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113844 | INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENTS IN ENHANCED INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION CAPABLE WIRELESS TERMINALS - A wireless communication terminal is disclose. The terminal includes a transceiver coupled to a processor configured to determine that a subset of a plurality of REs must be excluded from demodulation, the plurality of resource elements (REs) received in a signal from a first base station, to estimate a hypothetical block error rate (BLER) based on the signal received from the first base station by excluding the subset of the plurality of Res, and to estimate channel state information based on the hypothetical block error rate (BLER). | 05-10-2012 |
20120113845 | UPLINK SCHEDULING APPARATUS AND METHOD BASED ON UPLINK REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for scheduling uplink transmissions according to a maximum transmission power and Power Headrooms (PHs) reported by a User Equipment (UE) are provided. A method for reporting the PHs for carriers used by a terminal in a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation includes generating a message including the PHs along with indicators indicating whether a real transmission is scheduled on an uplink data channel of corresponding carrier, and including, when the real transmission is scheduled, a maximum transmission power used for calculating the PHs in the generated message. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113846 | Idle State Interference Mitigation in Wireless Communication Network - A mobile station is disclosed wherein the mobile station determines interference by assessing one or more frames in a first periodic sequence of frames relative to a reference and, in response to the assessment, monitors transmissions from a base station for paging signals during a second periodic sequence of frames, wherein the second periodic sequence of frames is offset from the first periodic sequence of frames by a predetermined amount. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113847 | Configuring Unscheduled Periods to Enable Interference Reduction in Heterogeneous Networks - A mobile station in a wireless communication network is disclosed. The mobile station includes a transceiver coupled to a processor configured to perform measurements of signals of one or more cells of a wireless communication system during a first set of subframes, to cause the transceiver to transmit a measurement report including at least the measurements of signals of the one or more cells, and to indicate that the measurements of the one or more cells were performed during the first set of subframes. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113848 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALCULATING POWER HEADROOM IN CARRIER AGGREGATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A power headroom calculation method and apparatus of a User Equipment (UE) are provided for a primary cell Power Headroom (PH) calculation in a Long Term Evolution-Advanced (LTE-A) mobile communication system. The method includes determining whether an activated serving cell includes uplink data and/or uplink control signal to be transmitted, and determining PH of the activated serving cell according to whether the activated serving cell has the uplink data and/or uplink control signal. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113849 | CQI-ONLY TRANSMISSION ON THE PUSCH - A method for transmitting a channel quality indicator-only feedback payload is described. A channel quality indicator scheduling message is received from a base station. A channel quality indicator-only feedback payload is generated. The channel quality indicator-only feedback payload is transmitted on a physical uplink shared channel. The method may be performed by a wireless communication device. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113850 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - A method is provided for measuring CSI. A Macro UE determines a restricted measurement resource pattern for CSI measurement. The restricted measurement resource pattern is reported from the Macro UE to a Macro NodeB. The CSI of the restricted measurement resource pattern is measured. The CSI is reported from the Macro UE to the Macro NodeB for scheduling a data transmission resource of the Macro UE in the restricted measurement resource pattern according to the CSI. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113851 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK - In an embodiment, state of a wireless channel on which information is received is measured; the measured state is used to select from a codebook a plurality of N codewords which optimize a predefined measure, and first and second codewords of the plurality are reported which best optimizes and next-best optimizes the predefined measure. If by example the above is done by a user equipment UE, in another embodiment the network receives first and second indications, searches a codebook using the first and second indications to find the first and second codewords; and utilizes them to improve the channel state information, such as by interpolating between them to find an estimate of the channel. In examples the channel is a MIMO channel that is estimated at two or more antenna ports, there are interpolation weights sent with the codeword indications, and the interpolating uses a geodesic algorithm. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113852 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING AND SENDING DOWNLINK CSI REFERENCE SIGNAL - A method for configuring and sending a downlink CSI reference signal is provided. The method comprises: an eNB configures the downlink CSI reference signal and sends configuration information of the downlink CSI reference signal to a UE, wherein the configuration information comprises a starting subframe number and/or a cycle of the downlink CSI reference signal; the eNB sends the downlink CSI reference signal to the UE according to the configuration information of the downlink CSI reference signal. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113853 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BLIND TRANSPORT FORMAT DETECTION USING DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION (DTX) DETECTION - Methods and apparatus are provided for blind transport format detection using Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) detection. According to one aspect of the invention, the transport format that was used to transmit information is determined by identifying a transition between a Discontinuous Transmission segment and a data segment included in the transmitted information; and determining the transport format based on a location of the transition of the Discontinuous Transmission segment. A cyclic redundancy check can optionally be performed for a plurality of possible transport formats, and then the step of identifying a transition can be to limited to those transport formats having a valid cyclic redundancy check. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113854 | Adaptive Data Delivery - Techniques for use in delivering data from a host service to a mobile device operative in a wireless network are disclosed. The host service is configured to maintain in a host memory an availability status indicative of the availability of the mobile device in the wireless network. A router receives an indication signal from the mobile device within a predetermined interval. The indication signal indicates one or more functional states or parameter levels of the mobile device. When the one or more functional states or parameter levels of the indication signal are indicative of availability, and a cached availability status in cache memory of the router equals to unavailable, the router changes the cached availability status from unavailable to available and transmits the changed availability status from the router to the host service for setting the availability status at the host service. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113855 | CHARGING COUNT METHOD AND DEVICE - A charging count method and a charging count device are provided. The method includes: acquiring an industry user identifier corresponding to a user equipment according to a user equipment identifier or an access point name APN used by the user equipment; and performing charging count on an industry user corresponding to the industry user identifier. Through the charging count method and the charging count device, charging processing of a charging count network element is optimized, thereby greatly reducing a charging processing load of the charging count network element, and ensuring normal operation of the charging count network element. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113856 | TRANSMISSION ADAPTATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - An arrangement is provided for adapting the output bit rate of a multimedia source to the bandwidth available in a wireless network. Depending on the value of the available network idle time, at least a portion of the available network idle time may be used by the source to increase its output bit rate so that the network bandwidth may be more efficiently utilized. If the effective throughput of the network after the increase of source output bit rate drops significantly, the source may reduce its output bit rate until the effective throughput returns to the level before the source output bit rate increase. Additionally, packet delay and queue jitter information may be collected and used for queue rate adaptation as well as bandwidth adaptation. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113857 | DYNAMIC MONITORING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - A device, connected to a monitoring appliance, may include a traffic analyzer to receive a data unit and identify a traffic flow associated with the data unit. The device may also include a traffic processor to receive the data unit and information regarding the identified traffic flow from the traffic analyzer, determine that the identified traffic flow is to be monitored by the monitoring appliance, change a port number, associated with the data unit, to a particular port number to create a modified data unit when the identified traffic flow is to be monitored by the monitoring appliance, and send the modified data unit to the monitoring appliance. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113858 | HANDOVER PROCESSING IN MULTIPLE ACCESS POINT DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM - This disclosure relates to method, device and system for determining transmit power in a communication system. A node receives an access point interference signal from an access point. The access point interference signal is measured by the access point based in part on an inference from an external system. The node determines a transmit power based in part on the access point interference signal. The node then transmits an uplink signal at the transmit power. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113859 | METHOD FOR MEASURING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION ON A DOWNLINK MULTI-CARRIER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - The present invention relates to a method for measuring channel quality information in a system transmitting a signal via a plurality of component carriers. The method comprises the steps of: measuring a channel quality value of at least one component carrier allocated to a terminal from among a plurality of component carriers used to transmit a signal from a serving cell, to which the terminal belongs, to the terminal; comparing the channel quality value with a critical value for determining whether or not a channel quality of a component carrier not allocated to the terminal from among the plurality of component carriers must be derived; and, if the channel quality value is less than the critical value, measuring a channel quality value of a component not allocated to the terminal from among the plurality of component carriers. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113860 | POWER SAVING MECHANISM IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - The present invention relates to providing methods and apparatus for determining whether a cell in a radio access network could have been powered down during at least one time slot in a predetermined period of time. Measurement data relating to the cell is used to determine whether the neighbouring cells had sufficient spare capacity to handle the network traffic originating from cell during the time slots in the predetermined period of time. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113861 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDBACK TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for feedback transmission in a wireless communication system are provided. A terminal receives information about a short-term feedback period and a long-term feedback period from a base station, and then transmits to the base station short-term feedback information per short-term feedback period or long-term feedback information per long-term feedback period over a primary fast feedback channel (PFBSCH). The long-term feedback information contains an index of a subband subjected to channel measurement and a difference in measurement values that is a difference between a reference channel measurement value and a channel measurement value being measured. | 05-10-2012 |
20120120814 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTIMATING PROCESSING WORKLOADS - Systems and associated methods for estimating wireless workloads are described herein. Systems and methods provide for generating an estimate of a wireless workload's processing requirements from the combined knowledge of system specific values, such as system parameters, platform details, and implementation details. Systems and methods for estimating wireless workloads may be utilized in various wireless protocols, including, 3G, WiMax, LTE, WiFi, femtocells, and point-to-point wireless links. The estimated workloads may be used for scheduling wireless workloads in a shared computing environment. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120815 | MANAGING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless network, such as an LTE (“Long-Term Evolution”) network, may be configured to monitor a communications interface to set an inactivity timer that, in turn, sets the operating mode of a communications interface. The operating mode may comprise a time-domain reception pattern of the wireless device. A wireless device may monitor a communications interface that includes at least a first logical channel (for example for a first application) and a second logical channel (for example for a second application). Based on monitoring the communications interface, a first activity state for the first logical channel may be determined. Also, based on monitoring the communications interface, a second activity state (e.g., an activity status) for the second logical channel may be determined. An inactivity timer used by the communications interface may be set to a first value or a second value based on the first and second activity states. The battery life of a wireless device may be preserved by setting an inactivity timer responsive to the manner in which the wireless device is being used. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120816 | LOCATION AND NETWORK BASED MOBILE DEVICE POWER MANAGEMENT - Methods and apparatus for reducing power use in a mobile device are disclosed. In accordance with many embodiments, a method includes receiving network-location information that indicates a coverage area of each of a plurality of available wireless networks and receiving mobile-device-location information that identifies a location of the mobile device. And in addition, in the event the mobile device is within an area that is not covered by any of the plurality of available wireless networks, an attempt to communicate with any of the plurality of wireless networks is delayed based upon the mobile-device-location information indicating the location of the mobile device is not within a coverage area of at least one of the plurality of wireless networks. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120817 | CONFIGURING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION (UCI) REPORTING - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) by a user equipment (UE) is described. Downlink channels are measured to obtain channel state information (CSI). Radio resource control (RRC) signaling is received from an eNode B. It is determined whether simultaneous physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) and physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission is enabled. One or more CSI reports are transmitted on the PUSCH according to the RRC signaling. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120818 | Bandwidth Modification for Transparent Capacity Management in a Carrier Network - Some embodiments provide a capacity management agent that modifies bandwidth that is allocated between an end user and a carrier network by caching requested content that is streamed at a first rate and then providing the cached content to the end user through the carrier network at a second rate. The agent performs a process that includes receiving data intended for a service region of the carrier network from an external data network. The process identifies resource availability at the service region. Next, the process passes the data to the service region at the first rate when the resource availability at the service region is not less than a threshold amount and caches the data for passing to the service region at the second rate that consumes fewer carrier network resource than the first rate when the resource availability at the service region is less than the threshold amount. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120819 | Testing Packet Fragmentation - Methods and apparatus for testing a network that converts datagrams into fragments. A traffic generator may generate a datagram containing plural instrumentation blocks and transmit the test traffic over the network. A traffic receiver may determine if a plurality of fragments received via the network constitutes a complete datagram based, at least in part, on data within respective instrumentation blocks extracted from each received fragment. The traffic receiver may report test statistics indicative of a number of complete datagrams received and a number of incomplete datagrams received. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120820 | Testing Fragment Reassembly - Methods and apparatus for testing a network that reassembles fragments into datagrams. A packet receiver may extract a plurality of instrumentation blocks from a packet received from the network. The packet receiver may determine if the received packet constitutes a correctly reassembled datagram based on information contained within the plurality of instrumentation blocks. The packet receiver may accumulate and report test statistics indicative of a number of correctly reassembled datagrams received and a number of incorrectly reassembled datagrams received. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120821 | UE TIMING ADJUSTMENT IN A MULTI-RAT, CARRIER AGGREGATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A common uplink timing adjustment parameter value is estimated for UE transmissions in the multi-RAT communications network and provided for transmission to one or more UEs. That signaling parameter value is common to both the first and second RATs and useable by the one or more UEs to adjust transmit timing of uplink carriers belonging to the different RATs. The common timing adjustment parameter value may be provided, for example, in order to coordinate UE transmit timing of a first uplink carrier associated with the first RAT and of a second uplink carrier associated with the second RAT. A multi-RAT UE concurrently receives a first downlink carrier associated with the first RAT and a second different downlink carrier associated with the second RAT. The UE receives the common timing adjustment parameter value on one of those downlink carriers and adjusts a transmit timing of a first uplink carrier associated with the first RAT and of a second uplink carrier associated with the second RAT. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120822 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER USING RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIAL VELOCITY IN TERMINAL - Provided is a handover apparatus and method for a terminal based on a received signal strength (RSS) and a radial velocity. The handover method may measure an RSS from a currently accessed base station and RSSs from candidate base stations for handover, may measure a radial velocity with respect to the currently accessed base station and radial velocities with respect to the candidate base stations for handover, and may perform a handover by determining a base station for handover based on the measured RSSs and the measured radial velocities when the RSS from the currently accessed base station is less than or equal to a reference RSS. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120823 | CHANNEL QUALITY INDEX FEEDBACK REDUCTION FOR BROADBAND SYSTEMS - Systems and methodology for exploiting channel correlation in time and/or frequency to reduce CQI feedback in wireless communications systems. By compressing CQI feedback at the receiver to reduce redundancy in CQI feedback information that results from the channel correlation, the average feedback rate is reduced. In various embodiments, redundancy in time may be removed from the CQI feedback by monitoring variations of the CQI information in time at the receiver so that CQI information for a given CQI reporting instance is communicated to the transmitter only if it differs from the CQI information for the previous CQI reporting instance. Otherwise, no feedback is performed. In other embodiments, CQI feedback is compressed by performing a discrete cosine transform (DCT) on the CQI data. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120824 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING AND SHARING NETWORK PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (NPI) - Apparatus and methods that provide wireless communications, where a method for wireless communications includes determining network performance; and sharing NPI with a network node; wherein the NPI comprises information necessary for the network node to determine the performance available on a network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120825 | Method and Base Station for Combined Adjusting Downlink AMC and MIMO Mode - A method and base station for jointly adjusting downlink AMC and MIMO modes. The base station comprises an AMC module, a fast feedback module and a joint adjustment module. The method comprises: a base station determining the current maximum available Downlink Interval Usage Code (DIUC) using a downlink Carrier to Interference plus Noise ratio (CINR) fed back by a terminal, using a MIMO mode fed back by the terminal to determine the current channel condition, and jointly adjusting the current MIMO mode and the DIUC of the terminal within the maximum available DIUC range according to the current channel condition. The method and base station overcome the shortcoming of adjusting MIMO modes or DIUCs separately, and provide more combinations of the MIMO modes and DIUCs to maximize spectral utilization and data transmission rate, thereby achieving ultimately the purpose of improving link reliability and system throughput. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120826 | Base Station, Terminal, System And Method For Transmitting Sounding Reference Signal By Using Multiple Antennas - An eNB, user equipment, system and method for transmitting sounding reference signals by using multiple antennas are disclosed in the present invention, which can reduce overhead of uplink sounding reference signals. The method includes: if an Advanced Long Term Evolution (LTE-A) system has uplink multiple antennas, an eNB configures respectively transmission periods of Sounding Reference Signals (SRSs) which are transmitted over each antenna for a User Equipment (UE); according to the configuration by the eNB, the UE transmits an uplink SRS over each antenna with the corresponding SRS transmission period. The present invention can reduce the uplink SRS overhead in the system remarkably if there are multiple antennas. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120827 | INFORMATION PROVIDING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROVIDING METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An information providing apparatus includes: a map information storage unit which maintains map information with which at least one of position information, address information, and names of buildings or shops is associated; a communication parameter obtaining unit which obtains communication parameters associated with the position information; an image information creating unit which creates image information in which the communication parameters associated with the position information are described on the map information; and a display unit which displays the image information created by the image information creating unit. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120828 | Managing Communications Across a Wireless Network - A wireless network (e.g., an LTE network) may be configured to monitor a communications interface to set an inactivity timer that, in turn, sets the operating mode of a communications interface. The operating mode may include a time-domain reception pattern of the wireless device. A wireless device may monitor a communications interface that includes at least a first logical channel and a second logical channel. Based on monitoring the communications interface, a first activity state for the first logical channel may be determined and a second activity state (e.g., an activity status) for the second logical channel may be determined. An inactivity timer used by the communications interface may be set to a first value or a second value based on the first and second activity states. The battery life of a wireless device may be preserved by setting an inactivity timer responsive to how the wireless device is used. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120829 | System and Method for Communicating Over Multiple Communications Links - An embodiment method for operating a device in receiving a transmission over a plurality of communications links includes assigning an allocatable receiver resource to each communications link in the plurality of communications links according to a measure derived from communications link characteristics of each respective communications link and combined communications link characteristics of the plurality of communications links, and receiving the transmission over the plurality of communications links with the assigned allocatable receiver resource. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120830 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - A mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus (MS) transmits, to a base station apparatus (BS), uplink data using a PUSCH assigned by an uplink data transmission permission signal, wherein the BS transmits, to the MS, a RRC signal including a transmission instruction of reception quality information (RQI) and the uplink data transmission permission signal, and wherein the MS: periodically transmits, to the BS, first RQI using a PUCCH according to a transmission instruction of the RQI included in the RRC signal; transmits, to the BS, second RQI using the PUSCH in case that a transmission instruction of RQI is included in the uplink data transmission permission signal; and transmits, to the BS, the first RQI using the PUSCH in case that the PUSCH is assigned by the uplink data transmission permission signal which does not include a transmission instruction of the RQI in transmitting the first RQI. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120831 | QOS MULTIPLEXING VIA BASE STATION-RELAY NODE INTERFACE - The invention relates to methods for providing IP packets from a core network node to a relay node, wherein the IP packets are conveyed via a base station to the relay node on a wireless interface. To suggest an interface termination for data transport between core network and a relay node that is allowing for a flexible QoS control, preferably on a per user equipment basis this invention proposes two different multiplexing modes for use on the interface between base station and relay node: a first mode in which there is only a single dedicated radio bearer between the base station and the relay node to which all IP packets are multiplexed/mapped, and a second multiplexing mode where multiple dedicated radio bearers between the base station and the relay node are configured and the base station is multiplexing IP packets to the individual dedicated radio bearers according to their QoS class. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120832 | Method for discontinuously transferring Data in a Point-to-Multipoint Access Network, Central Unit, and Network Termination Unit - The invention relates to a method for discontinuously transferring data (DI | 05-17-2012 |
20120120833 | NETWORK REALTIME MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM - A network real-time monitoring and control system includes several layers of components for generating a network traffic shaping control that is used to shaping network traffic flows for one or more network nodes. The layers of the network real-time monitoring and control system include a monitoring layer, an event control layer, a traffic shaping control layer, a reporting layer, and an administrative layer. The monitoring obtains network traffic indicator measurements and network node operational indicator measurements. The event control layer uses the indicator measurements to generate a network event identifier, and generates a request for a network traffic shaping control based on a correlation of the network event identifier with a network node status identifier. The request for the network traffic shaping control is communicated to the traffic shaping control layer to generate a network traffic shaping control. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120834 | HIGH RESOLUTION WIRELESS INDOOR POSITIONING SYSTEM FOR LEGACY STANDARDS-BASED NARROWBAND MOBILE RADIOS - Two or more data packets transmitted through a wireless channel are received using a receiver device. The two or more data packets are a result of two or more transmissions that are made sequentially in time at different center frequencies in order to span a desired bandwidth. Each data packet of the two or more data packets is transmitted at a single center frequency. Time differences and/or carrier phase differences among the two or more transmissions are estimated. A time-of-arrival of one or more data packets of the two or more data packets is calculated using each data packet of the two or more data packets and one or more of the estimated time differences, the different center frequencies, and the estimated carrier phase differences. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120835 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication apparatus and an associated method are provided. The apparatus includes a receiving unit configured to receive first data and second data, which are transmitted from a plurality of antennas for spatial-multiplexing using a plurality of blocks, into which a plurality of consecutive subcarriers in a frequency domain are divided. The apparatus further includes a calculating unit configured to calculate a first absolute CQI value per each of the blocks for the first data and a second absolute CQI value per each of the blocks for the second data, and calculate a relative value of the second absolute CQI value with respect to the first absolute CQI value, per each of the blocks. The apparatus still further includes a transmitting unit configured to transmit the first absolute CQI value and the relative value of the second absolute CQI value in the same block. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120836 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR REDUCING THE AVERAGE TIME NEEDED FOR A COMMUNICATION UNIT TO CONNECT TO A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Described herein are techniques related to data communications using a data packet having at least one frame with a robust preamble for use over media having a high degree of non-stationary noise (e.g., impulsive noise). The described techniques employ a preamble with a structure having multiple transitions between the preamble sections. Each transition indicates the start of the upcoming frame. With the techniques described herein, if noise damages the transitions between such sections beyond recognition, the receiver can still determine the frame start time from the one or more of the undamaged transitions. Thus, the robustness of communications via the noisy media is significantly increased. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120837 | HANDHELD COMPUTING UNIT WITH POWER MANAGEMENT - A handheld computing unit includes a plurality of PHY units, a local wireless interface (LWI), and a processing module. When the unit is in a femtocell AP mode, the processing module performs one or more femtocell AP functions to facilitate conversion of a LWI downstream data into one or more downstream PHY signals and conversion of one or more upstream PHY signals into the LWI upstream data; determines energy demand of the handheld computing unit; determines whether the energy demand compares unfavorably to energy performance criteria; and, when the energy demand compares unfavorably to the energy performance criteria, executes an energy adjustment algorithm. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120838 | SCOPE OF CHANNEL QUALITY REPORTING REGION IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that effectuate or facilitate multichannel feedback in multichannel wireless communication environments. In accordance with various aspects set forth herein, systems and/or methods are provided that construct a carrier set, classifies a carrier as belonging to the carrier set, utilizes the carrier as representative of all carriers included in the carrier set to measure a channel quality of the carrier, and transmits a CQI based on the channel quality of the carrier, wherein the broadcast CQI is representative of all carriers included in the carrier set. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120839 | Methods for monitoring channel sounding quality in WLAN devices - A method of monitoring channel-sounding quality for VHT WiFi devices is provided. A mobile station (the receiver) receives a sounding signal transmitted from an access point (the transmitter) over one or multiple sub-channels of a wide channel in a wireless network. The receiver performs channel estimation and determines an estimated channel response matrix. The receiver then calculates sounding quality for each valid sub-channel by computing an estimation error of the received sounding signal based on the estimated channel matrix. The receiver transmits a feedback message to the transmitter. The feedback message contains sounding quality information derived from the calculated channel sounding quality. If the channel sounding qualities for all valid sub-channels are poor, then a null VHT channel feedback frame is sent back to the transmitter. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120840 | Adjusting Method for Downlink Modulation Coding Mode and Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output Mode and Device - An adjustment method for downlink modulation and coding scheme and multiple-input-multiple-output mode (MIMO) and a base station thereof are provided. The method comprises: establishing a corresponding relationship table of data transmission rates and combinations of said downlink scheme and MIMO; determining maximal available modulation and coding scheme according to the downlink carrier-to-interference-and-noise-ratio (CINR) reported by a terminal, switching current downlink scheme to the maximal available scheme when the current downlink scheme is greater than the maximal available scheme; collecting the total number of data packets and the number of valid data packets in the data packets in every report period; and adjusting the current downlink scheme and MIMO according to the maximal available scheme and said table when determining that the current downlink scheme and MIMO are not suitable for the current channel conditions in accordance with the total number of data packets and the number of valid data packets. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120841 | METHOD OF PCI AND CQI ESTIMATION IN CDMA SYSTEMS - A method includes: receiving symbols from antenna(s); calculating average-channel estimates of the symbols over a measurement period; forming a channel matrix from the average-channel estimates; calculating a power ratio between a closed-loop mode and an open-loop mode for each PCI using the channel matrix; calculating RSCP value(s) and ISCP value(s) corresponding to the antenna(s); averaging the RSCP value(s) and ISCP value(s) over the antenna(s) to provide averaged RSCP and ISCP; calculating open-loop SINR from the averaged RSCP and ISCP; calculating SINR for stream(s) for each PCI from the power ratio and the open-loop SINR; determining TBS for a single stream from a single-stream-CQI table using calculated SINR; determining TBS for all streams from a dual-stream-CQI table using calculated SINR; comparing the TBS of the single stream and TBS of the dual stream to determine whether to select single stream or dual stream; and determining PCI and CQI for the stream(s). | 05-17-2012 |
20120120842 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for allocating a reerence signal, in a method for transmitting a Channel State Information-Reference Reference Signal (CSI-RS) for measuring a transmission channel according to each antenna and a data signal in a broadband wireless communication system based on a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) scheme through a plurality of antennas. | 05-17-2012 |
20120127869 | MULTIPLE CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) REPORTING ON THE PHYSICAL UPLINK SHARED CHANNEL (PUSCH) WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) by a user equipment (UE) is described. It is determined that multiple channel state information (CSI) reports are scheduled on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). An aggregated CSI report is generated using two or more of the multiple CSI reports. The aggregated CSI report is transmitted on the PUSCH. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127870 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling an Enhanced Frequency Domain Equalizer - A method and apparatus for enabling an enhanced FDE in a TD-SCDMA system is provided. The method may comprise receiving one or more signals from one or more cells over one or more channels where each channel is described using a channel vector and a spreading vector, and where each signal includes one or more data blocks each including a number of symbols, converting the one or more received signals from a time domain into a frequency domain using a block FFT, inverting a covariance matrix, wherein the covariance matrix is derived from a linear convolution of the one or more channel vectors and the one or more spreading vectors, and determining one or more MMSE signals by manipulating the frequency domain one or more received signals by applying the inverted equivalent channel matrix. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127871 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORECASTING BUSY HOUR TRAFFIC FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for forecasting busy hour traffic for a network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains actual traffic data for a seed time frame for each of one or more sectors in a given market and marketing projections for one or more forecast time frames for the given market, and determines a market traffic actual measure for the given market from the actual traffic data. The method obtains market traffic estimates from one or more previous runs, and updates the one or more market traffic estimates for the one or more forecast time frames beyond the seed time frame to obtain one or more updated market traffic estimates, wherein the updated market traffic estimates are used for forecasting the busy hour traffic data for each of the one or more forecast time frames beyond the seed time frame. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127872 | SCALABLE VIDEO MULTICAST METHOD IN WiMAX NETWORKS - A scalable video multicast method in WiMAX networks is provided in the embodiments of the present invention. The method arranges data transmitting mechanisms and data transmitting rates for a base station and at least a relay station according to network productivity of each bandwidth unit to satisfy the demands of subscriber stations so as to maximize the network productivity within a limited bandwidth. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127873 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHING SERVICES - A method, an apparatus, and a system for automatically switching services are provided. The method includes: determining whether a switching condition is satisfied; migrating a user equipment (UE) using a first service operated on a switchable frequency point to a frequency point operating the first service, when the switching condition is satisfied; and switching the first service operated on the switchable frequency point to a second service. It is determined that a switching condition is satisfied, a UE using a first service operated on a switchable frequency point is migrated to a frequency point operating the first service, so as to switch the first service operated on the switchable frequency point to a second service, thereby improving utilization of spectrum resources and increasing a service income. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127874 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FRAME IN VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED ON WIRELESS ACCESS FOR VEHICULAR ENVIRONMENT - In a vehicle communication system, a frame transmitting apparatus gives a transmission opportunity to an emergency frame received from an upper layer without EDCA (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access), and gives a transmission opportunity to a generic frame received from an upper layer through EDCA. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127875 | Method and device for calculating k-shortest paths - The disclosure discloses a method and a device for calculating K-shortest paths, belonging to the field of a path calculation technology. The method comprises: calculating a shortest path tree of a whole network topological graph of Traffic Engineering (TE) links in current optical network; sorting, on the calculated shortest path tree, necessarily passed links or nodes in an optical path to be built; executing segmented calculation according to the sorted necessarily passed links and nodes, and assembling the K-shortest paths with paths obtained by the segmented calculation. The manner of sorting the necessarily passed nodes and links on the calculated shortest path tree effectively avoids the path assembly failure probability which is caused by the randomness of the necessarily passed nodes and links, further speeds up the quick determination of path accessibility, effectively improves the path assembly success rate and the path calculation reliability. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127876 | Cell Edge Coverage Hole Detection in Cellular Wireless Networks - A cell edge coverage hole detection method for a cellular wireless communication system such as an LTE system. A coverage hole in a cell edge region will cause radio link failures, RLF, which are difficult to distinguish from those caused by handover issues. The method collects (S | 05-24-2012 |
20120127877 | PACKET TRANSFER DEVICE AND PACKET TRANSFER METHOD - Packet transfer device and method have both a processing procedure for uninterruptible-switching desiring packets and a processing procedure for low-delay desiring packets, and process each user packet according to a desired one of the processing procedures. The uninterruptible-switching desiring packets are set to be in phase by a delay unit and written into an uninterruptible-switching memory. The low-delay desiring packets are written into a low-delay memory without passing trough the delay unit, that is, without being delayed. A read-out controller reads out a packet from the uninterruptible-switching memory. When the read-out packet is an uninterruptible-switching desiring packet, the packet is directly output, and when the read-out packet is a low-delay desiring packet, the packet is discarded, and a low-delay desiring packet is read out from the low-delay memory and output. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127878 | ANTENNA ALLOCATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for selecting and allocating antennas efficiently are provided. The method includes transmitting, to a User Equipment (UE), information indicating a configuration of a plurality of Channel Status Information Reference Signals (CSI-RSs) through UE specific signaling during an initial access attempt with the UE; receiving, from the UE, CSI-RS measurement results indicating configured CSI-RSs; transmitting CSI-RSs corresponding to a set of available distributed ports (D-ports) based on received signal strength information included in results of the CSI-RS measurement; and determining a CSI-RS of a selected D-port set for use in communications based on feedback information received from the UE. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127879 | Service Interface for QOS-Driven HPNA Networks - An in-band signaling model media control (MC) terminal for an HPNA network includes a frame classification entity (FCE) and a frame scheduling entity (FSE) and provides end-to-end Quality of Service (QoS) by passing the QoS requirements from higher layers to lower layers. The FCE, located at an LLC sublayer of the MC terminal, receives a data frame from a higher layer of the MC terminal that is part of a QoS stream. The FCE classifies the received data frame for a MAC sublayer of the MC terminal based on QoS information contained in the received data frame, and associates the classified data frame with a QoS stream queue corresponding to a classification of the data frame. The FSE, located at the MAC sublayer of the MC terminal, schedules transmission of the data frame to a destination for the data frame based on a QoS requirement associated with the QoS stream. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127880 | Supplemental Node Transmission Assistance in a Wireless Communication Network - Supplemental node transmission assistance in a wireless network provides for transmissions between a wireless network and wireless user equipment in a first direction using a serving node of the wireless network while providing for transmissions between the wireless network and wireless user equipment in a second direction using a supplemental node of the wireless network. The supplemental node is selected based on providing better channel conditions between the network and the user equipment in the second direction than the serving node. The supplemental node thus provides transmission assistance for the serving node in order to provide the best available downlink and uplink communications between the user equipment and the network. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127881 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING CENTRALIZED NETWORK PERFORMANCE TABLES TO MANAGE NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A system for centrally controlling packet network communications may include an input/output (I/O) unit configured to communicate data packets over a packet network with multiple network communications devices, a processing unit in communication with the I/O unit and configured to communicate with the network communications devices via respective node segments, and a memory in communication with the processing unit and configured to store a table. The processing unit may be configured to receive and store network performance information of node segments generated by the network communications devices. The network performance information may be stored in the table in association with indicia representative of the node segments, respectively. The processing unit may further be configured to control network communications by the network communications devices over the node segments based on the network performance information stored in the table. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127882 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING RECIPROCAL BILLING FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF COMMUNICATIONS OVER A PACKET NETWORK - A system and method for determining inter-carrier network usage may be used. The method may include determining network usage of a first packet network managed by a first communications carrier by subscribers of a second communications carrier that manages a second packet network. The network usage may distinguish communications of data packets including real-time content and non-real-time content. Network usage of the second packet network by subscribers of the first communications subscriber may be determined. A network usage differential between the determined usages of the first and second packet networks may be determined, where the network usage information may distinguish communications of data packets including real-time and non-real-time content. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127883 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING AND MAINTAINING QUALITY OF SERVICE PARAMETERS ON A MULTI-HOP NETWORK - Disclosure of the present embodiments relate to a method, an apparatus, and a system for determining and maintaining quality of service parameters on a multi-hop network. The method for determining QoS parameters on a multi-hop network includes: in a data transmission process in a transmission path from a user equipment to an evolved NodeB, acquiring statistics of QoS parameters of a relay link in the transmission path; and determining, according to the statistics of the QoS parameters of the relay link and in combination with QoS parameters that need to be maintained in the transmission path and radio interface topology information in the transmission path, QoS parameters that need to be acquired by an access link and the relay link in the transmission path. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127884 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING A SIGNAL-TO-INTERFERENCE RATIO - A method and apparatus for estimating a signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) are disclosed. A received signal includes signal energy on multiple basis functions. Desired signal energy in the received signal is transformed onto a first basis function with constant polarity. The desired signal energy is estimated by coherently averaging signal energy on the first basis function. A noise power is estimated by averaging signal energy on each basis function other than the first basis function and accumulating the averaged signal energy from the basis function other than the first basis function and scaling the accumulated signal energy to account for a noise estimate from the first basis function. An SIR is estimated by dividing the desired signal energy by the noise power. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127885 | Multiple Independent Pathway Communications - A system and method for utilizing multiple independent communication pathways for communication. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise receiving a first signal directly from a first communication network, where the first signal communicates a first representation of a unit of information. A second signal may be received from a second communication network, where the second signal communicates a second representation of the unit of information. The received first and second signals may be processed to determine the first and second representations of the unit of information respectively. An indication of reliability may be determined from the second signal. The indication of reliability and the second representation of the unit of information may be used to re-determine the first representation of the unit of information. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127886 | ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION AND RECEIVING METHOD AND DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - Disclosed is an adaptive transmit and receive method and device in a multiple-antenna wireless communication system. A transmit mode comprises different main transmit modes each of which includes one or both of a sub-transmit mode based on STBC and a sub-transmit mode based on SM. A receiver calculates an STBC performance parameter and a SM performance parameter, and a transmitter uses the parameters to determine a main transmit mode with maximum data rates and select a sub-transmit mode for minimizing power consumption. The transmitter channel-encodes, modulates and antenna-maps input data according to the selected transmit mode, and outputs results to the receiver. The receiver antenna/symbol-demodulates and channel-decodes the received data. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127887 | Method for Implementing Virtual Network Port and Embedded Device for Implementing Virtual Network Port - A method for implementing a virtual network interface, which is applicable for the embedded device without a physical network interface equipped, including that: the embedded device encapsulates the to-be-transmitted IP data packet as the data frame which is able to be identified by the universal interface on the device and carries a virtual network port identifier, transmits the data frame through the universal interface; after the embedded device receives the data frame from the universal interface, the embedded device delivers the IP data packet parsed from the received data frames to the application layer when determining that the received data frame carries a virtual network port identifier. An embedded device for implementing a virtual network interface is also provided, the device includes a universal interface, a determining module, an encapsulating/decapsulating module, and a sending/receiving module. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127888 | BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS RESOURCE ALLOCATING METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATING METHOD - In a wireless communication system, when data communication is performed between a relay device and a terminal (in a second path), the same amount of data is required to be transferred between a base station and the relay device (in a third path). An amount of wireless communication resources required is obtained by adding an amount inversely proportional to a capacity of each of the second and third wireless transmission-paths. Therefore, the amount inversely proportional to the capacity of the third path is consumed in excess. Based on a channel quality of a first wireless channel between the base station and the terminal, a channel quality of a second wireless channel between the terminal and the relay station, and a channel quality of a third wireless channel between the base station and the relay station, it is determined whether data communication between the base station and the terminal is relayed. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127889 | MIMO RECEIVING APPARATUS AND RECEIVING METHOD - A MIMO receiving apparatus that can demodulate a spatially multiplexed signal without using any division operation requiring a large quantity of operation resources. In the MIMO receiving apparatus, stream separation section ( | 05-24-2012 |
20120127890 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HYBRID LOCATION IN A CDMA 2000 NETWORK - A system and method for estimating a location of a wireless device receiving signals from plural nodes of a Code Division Multiple Access 2000 communications system. One or more ranges of a wireless device from one or more of the plural nodes may be determined as a function of signals received at the wireless device from the respective one or more plural nodes and as a function of information in an uplink pilot signal. From one or more location measurement units (“LMU”) measurements an uplink time of arrival (“TOA”) measurement from the device may be determined and then an estimation of the location of the wireless device determined as a function of the uplink TOA and determined one or more ranges. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127891 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and arrangement in a base station for scheduling radio resources to a user equipment. The method and arrangement comprises receiving a scheduling request from the user equipment, and also a time offset value which value is associated with the moment of time when a frame of data was generated in the user equipment buffer. Also, the moment of time when the frame of data was generated in the user equipment buffer is determined, based on the received time offset value. Thereby the buffer state of the user equipment buffer is predicted by using the determined moment of time when the frame of data was generated in the user equipment buffer. Further, radio resources are granted to the user equipment, based on the predicted buffer state of the user equipment buffer. In addition, a method and arrangement in a user equipment for assisting the base station in scheduling radio resources are described. | 05-24-2012 |
20120134280 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK ACCESS POINT AND DEVICE RF SPECTRUM ANALYSIS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system for measuring and analyzing radio frequency power proximate and within a wireless field device mesh network. A centralized software module (CSWM) collects and analyzes values from one or more wireless devices of the wireless field device mesh network representing received RF power measurements on an assigned RF channel and values representing corresponding times of the received RF power measurements. Each wireless device measures received RF power on the assigned RF channel at times other than during reception of a signal resulting in transmission by the wireless device of either an acknowledgment signal or a non-acknowledgement signal. Values representing the received RF power measurements and the corresponding times of the received RF power measurements are determined from the stored received RF power measurements and corresponding times and then discarded. These values are stored within the wireless device until successfully reported. A network manager coordinates communication between the wireless devices and synchronizes the corresponding times of received RF power measurement throughout the wireless field device mesh network. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134281 | Monitoring And Apparatus For Pre-Configuring Conditions For Data Transfer - A method for pre-configuring conditions of data transfer at a base station for user equipment includes receiving a data transfer request from user equipment. The data transfer request includes conditions. The base station compares the conditions with current base station performance conditions. If the comparison is favorable, the base station sends an accept message to the user equipment. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134282 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING DEVICES TO FORM A COMMUNITY - An approach is provided for selecting devices to form a community. A network manager determines one or more candidate devices within proximity of at least one device. Next, the network manager determines to initiate at least one synchronized capture of sensor data by the at least one device and at least one of the one or more candidate devices. Then, the network manager determines to form the community based, at least in part, on the at least one synchronized capture. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134283 | DETERMINING NEIGHBOR LISTS AND PN OFFSETS FOR NEW SECTOR - A method and apparatus is provided for selecting a pseudo-noise (PN) offset for a newly deployed sector in a mobile communication network. A set of candidate PN offsets is determined and a priority factor for each candidate PN offset is determined based on a sector azimuth of the new sector, sector azimuths of sectors using the candidate PN offsets, or both. The PN offsets are ranked based on priority factor and distance to the new sector. A candidate PN offset is then selected from the candidate list based on the final ranking. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134284 | Methods and Nodes in a Wireless Communication Network - First network node | 05-31-2012 |
20120134285 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPRATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A radio communication apparatus for performing radio communication with an other radio communication apparatus, the radio communication apparatus including: a control unit which determines an encoding rate, a modulation scheme, and data volume for each of a plurality of transmission data transmitted to the other radio communication apparatus based on an error detection result received from the other radio communication apparatus; and a transmission unit which respectively transmits the plurality of transmission data to the other radio communication apparatus based on the determined encoding rate, modulation scheme, and data volume. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134286 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING SUBSCRIBER QUALITY OF SERVICE PROFILES - A wireless communication apparatus is operable in a first wireless communications system implementing a first wireless communications protocol. A subscriber Quality of Service (QoS) profile module is for configuring a QoS Profile. A receiver module is for receiving, over the first wireless network, a QoS Profile Request message. A transmission module is for transmitting a QoS Profile Response message over the first wireless network. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134287 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION REQUEST MESSAGES OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for coordinating information request messages over an ad-hoc mesh network. A module receives at least one request to transmit one or more information request messages over an ad-hoc mesh network. The module determines context information associated with at least a portion of the ad-hoc mesh network, one or more nodes within the at least a portion of the ad-hoc mesh network, or a combination thereof. The module then determines to transmit the one or more information request messages over the ad-hoc mesh network based, at least in part, on the context information. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134288 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING POSITION INFORMATION OF USER EQUIPMENT - A method, system and device for determining the position of a user terminal are used to solve the problem that it is unable to determine the position information of the user terminal in long term evolution (LTE) systems existing in the prior art. The method of an embodiment comprises: a network side determines the measure value of timing advance (TA) according to the actual arrival time and the expected arrival time of a contention-free random access preamble sequence from the user terminal ( | 05-31-2012 |
20120134289 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - The amount of control information is reduced for specifying the transmission method for simultaneously transmitting uplink data and reception quality information, and uplink data and ACK/NACK. Delay in changing the transmission method is reduced, and the mapping of uplink data and reception quality information and of uplink data and ACK/NACK is realized, in compliance with modulation scheme and coding rate of the uplink data specified by the base station apparatus. In a mobile communication system the base station apparatus allocates, to the mobile station apparatus, resources wherein the base station apparatus transmits, to the mobile station apparatus, control information for specifying a transmission format for the mobile station apparatus to transmit information using the uplink, while the mobile station apparatus simultaneously transmits, to the base station apparatus, uplink data and reception quality information based on the specified transmission format when the control information from the base station apparatus is received. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134290 | RAPID SEARCH FOR OPTIMAL WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION - A search algorithm to find a globally optimal radio plan for a wireless network, including assignments of frequency and transmission power to multiple access points. Two different evaluation metrics are used in order to provide an optimal solution in a reasonable time period. Frequency searches are performed using a special rapid evaluation metric. Transmission powers are selected using a more refined metric that estimates data throughput. The search results are deterministic and execution time is also substantially deterministic. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134291 | Network Based Service Profile Management with User Preference, Adaptive Policy, Network Neutrality, and User Privacy - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, a network device implements a service profile for assisting control of a communications device use of a service on a network, in which the service profile includes service policy settings for the communications device; monitors use of the service by the communications device based on the service profile; and modifies a service policy setting to achieve a service usage goal. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134292 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A WIRELESS NETWORK, AND WIRELESS NETWORK THEREFOR - Method for transmitting data from a resource-constrained transmitter to a receiver in a wireless network, comprising the following steps: —the resource-constrained transmitter ( | 05-31-2012 |
20120140642 | Configuration of access points in a telecommunications network - A GSM or UMTS mobile telecommunications network is provided including a radio access network comprising macro base stations with additional access points. The access points are connected to a network core via a hub and a concentrator and may appear to a mobile terminal as a conventional base station that communicates with the mobile terminal using GSM or UMTS protocols and does not require modification to a standard GSM or UMTS mobile terminal. The access points are associated as a cluster. A procedure includes performing initial configuration of the access points such that one or more of the access points operates in a transmit mode while the other access points operate in a receive mode only. The strength of the received signal is processed by a processor associated with the concentrator which calculates and provides parameters to each of the access points to provide optimum radio coverage within premises. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140643 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC ESTIMATION OF TRAFFIC REASSIGNMENT - A method and apparatus for providing an estimation of traffic reassignment for a network are disclosed. For example, the method and apparatus provide an automatic estimation of traffic reassignment for a wireless network. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140644 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ROBUST CIRCUIT SWITCH FALL BACK PROCEDURE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a user equipment (UE) may obtain at least one of a plurality of circuit switched fall back (CSFB) parameters from at least one of an LTE eNodeB or a usable system, wherein the plurality of CSFB parameters comprise a channel list, a system time, and a neighbor list, and may perform one or more system acquisition actions based on the at least one of the plurality of obtained CSFB parameters. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140645 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING VIDEO - A method and apparatus for distributing live video to multiple client devices is provided herein. In particular, a router is provided that acts on behalf of all client devices in its network. The router serves multiple groups of client devices with each group being formed by client devices having similar bandwidth requirements. The router then requests and receives video chunks from a network. The router then redistributes the video chunks to the multiple client devices using a multicast transmission. In particular, to minimize the demands on the core network, the router sets up a separate multicast to each group. Live video, of the appropriate quality is then multicast to each group. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140646 | Method and Device to Improve Channel Coexistence Using Non-Contiguous Channels of a Wireless Network - A method and device. The device is to use a first frequency segment of a wireless non-contiguous channel to monitor non-operating channels within an operating range of a wireless network; and use a second frequency segment of the wireless channel as a communication channel of the wireless network. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140647 | Communications Techniques For Bursty Noise Environments - Techniques are disclosed that involve communicating in bursty noise environments. For instance, a source device may send a probing packet to a destination device. This probing packet is for determining whether the communications medium (e.g., one or more frequency channels) is currently exhibiting a busy or jammed (e.g., due to bursty noise) condition. More particularly, based on whether an acknowledgment of the probing packet is received, the source device determines whether the channel is jammed (or busy) or clear. For example, an unacknowledged probing packet indicates that the channel is jammed or busy, while an acknowledged probing packet indicates that the channel is clear. If the channel is determined to be clear, then the source device may transmit one or more data packets to the destination device. Such data packet transmissions may be in accordance with a non rate-adaptive technique. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140648 | Method And Apparatus For Improved Multicast Service - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved multicast operation. In one method, a station transmits ( | 06-07-2012 |
20120140649 | PRIORITIZING MULTIPLE CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) REPORTING WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) on a user equipment (UE) is described. Multiple channel state information (CSI) reports are generated for multiple component carriers (CCs) that are scheduled to be transmitted in a subframe. A method of prioritization for the CSI reports is selected. A highest priority CSI report of the multiple CSI reports is determined using the selected method of prioritization. The highest priority CSI report is transmitted. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140650 | BANDWIDTH EFFICIENCY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of processing a signal for transmission, the method comprising: determining a quality of a first portion of the signal; and if the quality satisfies a threshold criterion then aggregating a representation of the first portion of the signal with a representation of a subsequent portion of the signal. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140651 | SYSTEM SUPPORT FOR ACCESSING AND SWITCHING AMONG MULTIPLE WIRELESS INTERFACES ON MOBILE DEVICES - A client-based system for use in a mobile client device in communication with a remote server device provides for dynamically switching among multiple wireless interfaces on the mobile client device. The system includes a first interface for communicating over a cellular network, a second interface for communicating over a WiFi network, and a computer-readable medium within the mobile client device, having thereon computer-executable instructions for switching one or more connection-oriented sessions from one of the first and second interfaces to the other based on a selection policy selected from an energy saving selection policy, an offload selection policy, and a performance selection policy. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140652 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION NODE - A method, a system and a device for determining cooperative transmission node are provided, wherein, the method includes: a base station sends configuration information of uplink signal for a user terminal to the user terminal and each relay node device belonging to the base station; said base station and said each relay node device receive the uplink signal sent by the user terminal according to said configuration information of uplink signal, and measure the uplink signal; the measurement result of obtained by said base station is compared with the measurement result of each relay node device, and the cooperative transmission node for the user terminal is determined according to the result of the comparison. The present invention can determine the optimal node device set which participates in cooperation, and also modify the optimal cooperative transmission node set for a user terminal in real time, and enables transparent cooperative transmission for the user terminal. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140653 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING A MEASUREMENT CONTEXT - A method and a device for processing a measurement context are provided by the present invention. The method includes: preparing for handover between radio access network devices in the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system ( | 06-07-2012 |
20120140654 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING BACKUP CHANNEL IN MULTI-CHANNEL ENVIRONMENT - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for managing a backup channel in a multi-channel environment. According to an aspect of the present invention, the method of managing a backup channel in a multi-channel environment includes transmitting a control region of a super frame through a first channel constituting the multi-channel and transmitting a data region of the super frame to a destination terminal through a second channel constituting the multi-channel. A transmission quality of the first channel is acquired using the control region transmitted through the first channel. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140655 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN MULTI-USER MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for feeding back Channel Quality Information (CQI) by a terminal in a Multi-User Multi-Input Multi-Output (MU-MIMO) communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a signal from a base station, determining a lower limit of an average Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) for the received signal, and determining the lower limit of an average SINR as CQI, and feeding back the CQI to the base station. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140656 | Method and Arrangement for Load Management in Heterogeneous Networks with Interference Suppression Capable Receivers - In a method of providing load measurements in an interference suppression capable radio base station node associated with a plurality of users in a heterogeneous wireless communication system, applying interference suppression to received signals in the radio base station node, to provide interference suppressed received signals. Subsequently, estimating neighbor cell interference based on the interference suppressed received signals, and estimating a reference received total wideband power, based on the interference suppressed received signals. Then performing the steps of determining a first load measure based on the interference suppressed received signals and the estimated reference received total wideband power, and determining a second load measure based on the interference suppressed received signals, the estimated reference received total wideband power and on the estimated neighbor cell interference. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140657 | Methods and Arrangements for Cell Stability in a Cellular Communication System - A method for assisting load scheduling in a wireless communication system comprises computing of an estimate of a noise floor measure for received uplink radio signals and a neighbor cell interference power is estimated. An interference whitening of the received uplink radio signals is performed based on frequency domain equalizing or frequency domain pre-equalizing. A useful signal power after interference whitening is determined and a first user noise floor compensation factor is derived. A noise rise measure is calculated based at least on the useful signal power after interference whitening, the noise floor compensation factor, the noise floor measure and the estimated neighbor cell interference power. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140658 | WIRELESS BASE STATION FOR CONTROLLING ANTENNA TRANSMISSION POWER - Provided is a wireless communication system which includes a wireless communication unit using plural frequency bands and plural antennas. The system changes the transmission power of each antenna, based on the interference of each of the frequency bands from the neighbor base station along the antenna direction. The system estimates the number of antennas necessary for transmission in response to a user requirement, and determines a necessary antenna in accordance with the antenna direction in which the terminal is located, and further changes the transmission power of each antenna. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140659 | TERMINAL-TO-TERMINAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD USING IP TRANSFER NETWORK - The present invention is the communication system that the communication connection control between the terminals is performed, in the IP transfer network forming the closed network, by using the IP communication record. Further, the present invention relates to the communication system to perform the communication connection control between the terminals by obtaining the IP address of the server which manages the communication connection control of the destination terminal based on the telephone number or the host name of the destination terminal. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140660 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION IN MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - A method of performing cooperative transmission in a multi-node system including a Base Station (BS) and a plurality of nodes controlled by the BS is provided. The method comprises: transmitting a first signal generated using a first cell identifier (ID) from the plurality of nodes; and transmitting a second signal generated using a second cell ID from at least one of the plurality of nodes, wherein the first cell ID is identical with a cell ID used by the BS, and the second cell ID is different from the first cell ID. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140661 | Communication Quality Estimation Apparatus, Base Station Apparatus, Communication Quality Estimation Method, and Communication Quality Estimation Program - A communication quality estimation apparatus includes a channel information acquisition section for receiving channel quality information indicating channel quality in transmission paths between a plurality of terminal apparatuses and a base station apparatus from the plurality of terminal apparatuses for each subframe, a smoothing calculation section for calculating smoothed channel quality information by smoothing the channel quality information received so far from the terminal apparatus for each terminal apparatus, and a smoothed information storage section for storing the smoothed channel quality information calculated by the smoothing calculation section in association with an identifier of each of the plurality of terminal apparatuses. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140662 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING LENGTH OF TRANSMISSION FRAME BASED ON LINK QUALITY INDICATOR (LQI) - A method and apparatus for determining a length of a transmission frame based on a Link Quality Indicator (LQI) are provided. A target transmitter may request an LQI from a target receiver, and the target receiver may transmit information about the LQI to the target transmitter. The target transmitter may determine the length of the transmission frame based on the LQI. The target transmitter) may determine the length of the transmission frame proportional to the LQI. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140663 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDBACK OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM (DAS)- BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Feedback methods and apparatuses are provided for efficiently feeding back downlink Channel State Information (CSI) using limited information in a DAS-based wireless communication system. A method includes determining, by a receiver, a candidate Antenna Port (AP) set from among a plurality of APs; selecting an active AP set from the candidate AP set; and transmitting the candidate AP set, the active AP set, and the downlink CSI of active APs included in the active AP set | 06-07-2012 |
20120140664 | RANDOM ACCESS FOR WIRELESS MULTIPLE-ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Techniques for facilitating random access in wireless multiple-access communication systems are described. A random access channel (RACH) is defined to comprise a “fast” RACH (F-RACH) and a “slow” RACH (S-RACH). The F-RACH and S-RACH can efficiently support user terminals in different operating states and employ different designs. The F-RACH can be used to quickly access the system, and the S-RACH is more robust and can support user terminals in various operating states and conditions. The F-RACH may be used by user terminals that have registered with the system and can compensate for their round trip delays (RTDs) by properly advancing their transmit timing. The S-RACH may be used by user terminals that may or may not have registered with the system, and may or may not be able to compensate for their RTDs. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140665 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR AUTHORIZING POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL RULE - A method, an apparatus and a system for authorizing a policy and charging control rule are provided. The method includes: receiving a resource allocation request message, where the resource allocation request message indicates that a resource is allocated on a designated bearer; sending ARP information of the designated bearer to a PCRF; and receiving QoS of PCC rule authorized by the PCRF according to the ARP information of the designated bearer, and performing bearer binding according to the QoS of the authorized PCC rule. In the present invention, the PCRF acquires the ARP information of the designated bearer, so that the PCC rule authorized by the PCRF can be bound to the designated bearer, and the user equipment on the designated bearer can be successfully allocated the resource. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140666 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RELAY NODE, RADIO BASE STATION, AND GATEWAY DEVICE - A mobile communication system according to the present invention comprising a plurality of Un radio bearers set between the plurality of mobile stations UE and the relay node RN, each of Un radio bearers for a predetermined QoS set for different mobile stations UE is configured to be mapped to a Un radio bearer for the predetermined QoS set between the relay node RN and the radio base station DeNB. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140667 | RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A control unit ( | 06-07-2012 |
20120140668 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALCULATING PACKET ARRIVAL TIME INTERVAL - A method and an apparatus for calculating packet arrival time interval are provided by the present invention. In the above-mentioned method, when the current packet arrives, system current time T | 06-07-2012 |
20120140669 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR TESTING OF A CAPACITY OF A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method in a communication network node for testing a capacity of a communication network comprising the communication network node is provided. The communication network node communicates with a plurality of user equipments on downlink and uplink channels over an air interface. The communication network node generates ( | 06-07-2012 |
20120140670 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - When a determining unit ( | 06-07-2012 |
20120147758 | SYSTEM FOR ESTIMATING DOWNLOAD SPEED FROM PASSIVE MEASUREMENTS - A system for passive estimation of throughput in an electronic network is disclosed. The system may include an plurality of mobile devices configured to operate in the network and may further include an electronic data processor. The processor may be configured to access flow records for data flows associated with the mobile devices during a predetermined time interval. Additionally, the processor may be configured to annotate the flow records with an application field and a content provider field. The processor may also be configured to determine a flow type of each data flow based on the application field and the content provider field of the flow records. Furthermore, the processor may be configured to generate a throughput index that only includes non-rate-limited flow types. Moreover, the processor may be configured to estimate maximum throughput for each data flow having non-rate-limited flow types in the throughput index. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147759 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING A COMMUNICATION QUALITY FEEDBACK OF AN END-TO-END COMMUNICATION PATH - The apparatus and methods described herein are used to provide a communication quality feedback of an end-to-end communication path between an application transmitter and an application receiver. One method includes transmitting data from the application transmitter to the application receiver via the end-to-end communication path, the end-to-end communication path having at least one wireless link with a wireless transmitter and a wireless receiver, generating, at the wireless transmitter, a first communication quality feedback message, and transmitting the first communication quality feedback message from the wireless transmitter to the application transmitter in a standardized format. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147760 | Method for Provisioning a Wireless Network - A method that collects data and subjects it to statistical analysis to detect localized events, which assists in network provisioning. Illustratively, the data employed is hourly network traffic count that is collected at cell sites. By taking the advantage of additive property of Poisson process, the method integrates spatial neighbor information by aggregating temporal data in various areas, and iteratively estimating the event location and the radius of event impact by examining the posterior probability base on the aggregated data. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147761 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) TERMINALS - The present invention relates to a method of channel estimation comprising two major steps. The first step is the least-squared and minimum mean-square error (MMSE) estimations on the pilot resource elements to generate the channel response estimates at the predefined pilot locations. The second step of the channel estimation, which utilizes the results from the first step to compute the channel response estimates for the remaining resource elements, comprises the following three operations: (i) averaging of each pair of adjacent pilot resource elements in the frequency direction to obtain the channel response estimate of the resource element in the middle of those two pilot resource elements; (ii) MMSE interpolation in the time domain for all the sub-carriers containing pilot signals; and (iii) linear interpolation in the frequency direction for all the sub-carriers not containing any pilot signals. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147762 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF CONTROLLING STATE DEVICES OPERABLE TO SUPPORT CALLS BETWEEN ENDPOINTS - A method and system of controlling state for devices operable to support signaling or sessions between endpoints, such as the type used to support phone, video, messaging, and other calls. The state control may include transitioning the device between in-service and out-of-service states as a function of current, past or future operating demands on the devices. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147763 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING DATA IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for receiving data in a communication system includes: a detection unit configured to calculate power values of a data packet and a ratio of the power values by using a preamble of the data packet in a received signal, and detect the data packet through the calculated ratio of the power values; a control unit configured to calculate a gain compensation value of the detected data packet, and perform an automatic gain control (AGC) on the detected data packet by using the gain compensation value; a compensation unit configured to calculate a DC offset in the received signal, and remove the DC offset from the received signal; and a demodulator configured to demodulate the AGCed data packet. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147764 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND POWER ADJUSTMENT METHOD THEREOF - An electronic apparatus and a method thereof are provided. The electronic apparatus includes a signal detection module and a power adjustment module. The signal detection module detects a received signal quality of a first wireless communication system. The power adjustment module is coupled to the signal detection module, and adjusts an output power in a second wireless communication system according to the received signal quality, so as to enlarge service coverage of the electronic apparatus in the second wireless communication system. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147765 | Power Control Loop Stability Monitoring - New load measures are provided for a base station in a wireless communication network using interference suppression receivers. The new load measures are based on the estimation of neighbor cell interference and reflect the load after interference suppression. The improved load measures are used to monitor the stability of the uplink power control loops of the user terminals served by the base station. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147766 | CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving channel status information in a mobile communication system including a distributed antenna system. The channel status information feedback method of the present invention includes transmitting, to a base station, received signal strengths of reference signals transmitted through at least one of antennas distributed in a service area of the base station and transmitting, to a base station, channel status information corresponding to at least one antenna selected by the base station. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147767 | EXTENDED QOS SUPPORT IN EPC - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a target Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a target Serving General Packet Radio Service Support Node (SGSN) network node, and method, for handling a mobility procedure or session procedure within the same operator. The roaming agreement handling may comprise comparing a Quality of Service (QoS) parameter associated with a source system, a maximum QoS associated with a target system and a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) or Policy and Changing Rules Function (PCRF) capability. The mobility procedure or session procedure handling may further comprise providing instructions for the roaming procedure based on the comparison. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147768 | Method and Apparatus For Reducing Power Consumption in a Telecommunication Network - A method that reduces the power consumption on network nodes by taking into account the services that need to be supported by the network and the power saving capabilities of the nodes. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147769 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COLLECTING, REPORTING, AND ANALYZING DATA ON APPLICATION-LEVEL ACTIVITY AND OTHER USER INFORMATION ON A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - System and method for collecting and analyzing information on application-level activity and other user information on a mobile data network. A platform non-intrusively and transparently monitors data activity on a mobile data network in real-time so that user-level information can be reported to an operator. The platform comprises a plurality of collectors, a data manager, and a report manager. The collectors communicate with network routers to almost all network data. The collectors inspect the data for IP addresses and correlate them to user mobile phone numbers. The data manager receives the data and augments it with information obtained by querying carrier information. The data manager stores the data and monitors it to see if it satisfies a set of defined real-time reports. The report manager then works with the data manager to develop and test new reports based on operator instructions for a specific report. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147770 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING PILOTS - This is provided a method for allocating pilots to a sub-frame. The sub-frame includes a plurality of blocks in time domain. The method includes allocating a data demodulation (DM) pilot used for demodulating data to two blocks spaced not contiguous with each other, and allocating a channel quality (CQ) pilot. System capacity can be increased, and degradation of performance incurred by a channel estimation error can be minimized. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147771 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING A BUFFER STATUS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) reports a buffer status as part of scheduling information for enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transmissions. For reporting the buffer status, the WTRU calculates a total amount of data available across all logical channels for which reporting is requested by a radio resource control (RRC) entity. The total amount of data includes an amount of data that is available for transmission and retransmission at a radio link control (RLC) entity and an amount of data that is available for transmission in a medium access control for enhanced dedicated channel (MAC-i/is) segmentation entity in case that a MAC-i/is entity is configured. The WTRU sends scheduling information including a total E-DCH buffer status (TEBS) field that is set based on the total amount of data. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147772 | Exchange of Parameters Relating to Measurement Periods - Methods, a first, and a second network node as well as a user equipment for exchange of measurement period related parameters are provided. The user equipment ( | 06-14-2012 |
20120147773 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A apparatus and method for transmitting channel state information is disclosed. If an LTE-A system transmits a reference signal per subframe to support eight transmitting antennas, a problem occurs in that overhead is great. In order to solve this problem, a reference signal for channel measurement is transmitted per subband at different periods, or a user equipment scheduled for channel measurement uses a demodulation reference signal. The user equipment can notify a base station of channel measurement result using the demodulation reference signal in accordance with implicit or explicit signaling from the base station. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147774 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AN UPLINK BROADBAND MEASUREMENT SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING A DOWNLINK CHANNEL USING SAME - The present specification relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for transmitting an uplink broadband measurement signal in a wireless communication system, and to a downlink channel estimation technique using the same. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147775 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR INFORMATION OF MULTIPLE USER TERMINALS - Provide are a method, a system and an apparatus for transmitting channel quality indicator information of multiple user terminals. The method includes: at least two user terminals transmit their own channel quality indicator information using the same time and frequency resources, wherein the time and frequency resources include at least one frequency-domain unit in frequency domain and at least two sets of data time-domain units in time domain, each set of data time-domain units including at least two data time-domain units; and the channel quality indicator information of each user terminal is transmitted on at least one set of data time-domain units by means of time-domain Code Division Multiple Address. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the transmitted bits according to size of the channel quality indicator information. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147776 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISCOVERING SCTP ASSOCIATIONS IN A NETWORK - Systems and methods for discovering SCTP associations between devices communicating in a network are described. A method comprises monitoring packets communicated among a plurality of source and destination devices, determining a combination of source EP address, source port number, destination IP address, and destination port number that defines an association between a source device and a destination device, and resolving a combination of source and destination verification tags that further defines the association based upon the combination of EP addresses and port numbers. The method further comprises ascertaining whether a subsequently monitored packet belongs to the association based at least in part upon an element of the combination of verification tags after at least one element of the combination of EP addresses and port numbers has changed during the ongoing communication. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147777 | ACCESS POINT TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - An access point terminal includes: a communication-terminal-status determination unit which determines a communication status of one wireless communication terminal out of wireless communication terminals, by obtaining a wireless signal transmitted or received by the one wireless communication terminal; and a frequency control unit which uses (i) a first frequency band for wireless communication with the one wireless communication terminal and (ii) a frequency band other than the first frequency band for the wireless communication with one or more of the wireless communication terminals other than the one wireless communication terminal, when the communication-terminal-status determination unit determines that the communication status of the one wireless communication terminal satisfies a predetermined condition. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147778 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus capable of communicating with a user equipment terminal using an uplink shared channel includes a radio resource allocation unit configured to decrease frequency resources allocated to the shared channel, when transmission power of the user equipment terminal is less than a predetermined threshold. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147779 | PATH-BASED ADAPTIVE PRIORITIZATION AND LATENCY MANAGEMENT - An improved solution for managing messages through a request response protocol network utilizing a path-based adaptive prioritization and latency management is provided. A weight for a message is determined at a message management computing device based upon a number of hops and a latency of networks passed through by the message. A hop latency target for a current hop segment is evaluated relative to an overall latency target and the determined weight for the message. A priority of the message is adjusted in response to determining that the overall latency target, relative to the weight for the message and the hop latency target for the current hop segment, exceeds a configured allowable hop latency deviation for the current hop segment. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147780 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE DIFFERENTIATED ROUTING IN MULTI-HOP MULTI-RADIO WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method provides for differentiating usage permissions between different categories of communication traffic within a given network. The method includes ensuring one or more categories of traffic never transits communication radios, link, and/or spectrums dedicated to a different category of traffic. A combined routing metric is calculated using a scaling factor for discouraging usage of restricted communication links and encouraging usage of non-restricted communication links. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155291 | Method and apparatus providing interference measurement in a coordinated multi-point transmission environment - A method includes receiving signaling from a base station, where the signaling includes information descriptive of a muted resource element pattern configuration when operating in a cell that is associated with at least one multi-cell cooperation area. The method further includes making at least one measurement according to the received information for at least one of the cooperation areas for making an interference estimate and transmitting measurement results to the base station. Another method includes transmitting signaling that contains information descriptive of a muted resource element pattern configuration to a user equipment operating in a cell that is associated with at least one multi-cell cooperation area. This method further includes muting resource element transmissions in accordance with the information descriptive of the muted resource element pattern configuration; and receiving from the user equipment at least one measurement made according to the transmitted signaling for at least one of the cooperation areas. In these methods different cooperation areas are associated with mutually orthogonal muted resource elements. Corresponding apparatus and computer programs stored on non-transitory computer readable medium are also disclosed. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155292 | MOBILE HARDWARE AND NETWORK ENVIRONMENT SIMULATION - The present technology provides an ability to simulate the performance of mobile content in a more realistic testing environment than previously available. Specifically, the present technology can mimic the fluctuations in network states that mobile devices typically experience. As the mobile content is tested using the simulated network states, the present technology can record the performance of the mobile content and create a log of the performance. Further, the present technology can also analyze the mobile content performance log and recommend various optimizations to increase the performance of the content. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155293 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A TWO-LAYER ARCHITECTURE FOR PROCESSING WIRELESS TRAFFIC - A method and system for processing wireless traffic of a wireless network, e.g., a cellular network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains wireless traffic, and processes the wireless traffic by a plurality of probe servers, where each of the plurality of probe servers generates a plurality of feeds comprising a data feed and a control feed. The method correlates the plurality of feeds from the plurality of probe servers by a plurality of aggregator servers, where the data feed and the control feed of each of the plurality of probe servers are correlated with at least one other probe server of the plurality of probe servers, and outputs a correlated result from the correlating. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155294 | DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH CONTROL IN INTERFERENCE SITUATIONS - When a wireless communications device intends to communicate with another device over a wide channel consisting of multiple narrow channels, but detects interference on one or more of those narrow channels, it may restrict subsequent communications with that other device to those narrow channels that don't suffer from the interference. In one embodiment the device may simply refuse to monitor the interfering channel(s) for signals for a particular period of time. In another embodiment the device may use a CTS to signal the other device not to use the interfering narrow channel(s). That may result in using a wide channel with a reduced bandwidth for communications. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155295 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OVER A COMBINED CHANNEL - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of wireless communication over a combined channel. For example, a wireless communication unit may transmit a wireless communication transmission over a combined channel including a primary channel and at least one secondary channel, wherein the wireless communication unit is to begin the transmission over the combined channel if a detected state of use of the secondary channel is idle for at least a predefined silence period preceding an expiration of a back-off period corresponding to the primary channel, wherein the silence period is longer than a priority interframe space (PIFS) interval. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155296 | INTELLIGENT AUTOMATED DATA USAGE UPGRADE RECOMMENDATION - A method of notifying a mobile station regarding data usage with a plan limit includes tracking an amount of data usage consumed by the mobile station. A first data usage limit and a first data usage time frame are determined from a user account. A comparison is made of the data usage to the first data usage limit and a present time to the first data usage time frame. From this comparison, a projected data usage amount is determined and whether the projected data usage exceeds the first data usage limit. If exceeded, the system analyzes a second data usage limit to determine if it is greater than the projected data usage amount. If greater, the server provides a message to the mobile station notifying the user of the projected overage and suggestions to change to a new plan offering the second data usage limit. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155297 | MEDIA GATEWAY HEALTH - Data is received from a media gateway relating to a congestion level in the media gateway. In a computer having a processor and a memory, at least a first datum and a second datum included in the data are evaluated. Based on the evaluation, it is determined whether the congestion level exceeds a predetermined level. The congestion level is reported, including whether the congestion level exceeds the predetermined level. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155298 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MAPPING MANAGEMENT - A method, computer readable medium and apparatus for performing mapping management are disclosed. For example, the method monitors network performance measurements of long term evolution mobility elements, monitors a class type and a bandwidth type of long term evolution interfaces, determines if an impairment state is detected based upon the monitoring network performance measurements and the monitoring the class type and the bandwidth type, determines if the impairment state is due to a class of service and a quality of service mismatch and reconfigures the quality of service if the impairment state is due to the class of service and the quality of service mismatch. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155299 | MESSAGE ACKNOWLEDGMENT BASED UPON COMMUNICATION QUALITY - A method of selectively employing acknowledgment in a communication system is presented herein. In one implementation of the method, at least one indication of a communication quality of a link coupling a first communication node and a second communication node is processed. After processing the indication, a message from the first communication node is transmitted over the link to the second communication node. The message includes an acknowledgment request if the processing of the indication signifies that the communication quality of the link is below a predetermined level. Oppositely, the message does not include an acknowledgment request if the processing of the indication signifies that the communication quality of the link at least attains the predetermined level. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155300 | COMMUNICATION METHOD OF A BASE STATION AND A TERMINAL - Provided is a communication method of a base station and a terminal for enhancing a recovery performance of a signal using a feedback control message. The feedback control message may include information about a target received power at the base station with respect to feedback information of each of a plurality of terminals and information associated with a feedback mode of the feedback information. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155301 | Wireless Network System and Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device includes a sensor processing unit that generates sensor data including a measurement result acquired by a sensor; a communication measurement unit that generates communication quality data including a communication state for transmitting a packet; a compression determination unit that determines compression rates of first sensor data and first communication quality data according to the contents of the first sensor data including the transmitted sensor data and the generated sensor data or the contents of the first communication quality data including the transmitted sensor data and the generated communication quality data; a compression unit that compresses the first sensor data and the first communication quality data according to the determined compression rates; and a wireless communication unit that transmits a packet including the compressed first sensor data and the compressed first communication quality data to another wireless communication device or the access point. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155302 | LOCATION MEASURING METHOD AND APPARATUS USING ACCESS POINT FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SERVICE AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING LOCATION COORDINATE OF ACCESS POINT - A method and apparatus for measuring a location using an access point for a wireless local area network service are provided. The method includes: storing location coordinates of access points in a storage unit; receiving information of nearby access points from the communication terminal; selecting a predetermined number of nearby access points based on the received access point information; extracting location coordinates of the selected predetermined number of nearby access points from the storage unit; and calculating a barycentric coordinate using the extracted location coordinates, and determining the calculated barycentric coordinate as a final location of the communication terminal. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155303 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for coexistence interference avoidance in a UE equipped with a LTE radio and an ISM radio includes applying a TDM solution in the UE for avoiding coexistence interference between the LTE radio and the ISM radio, the TDM solution defining a period of the TDM solution allocated for the LTE radio and another period of TDM solution allocated for the ISM radio. The method further includes the UE reporting an ISM buffer status to an eNB for adapting the TDM solution. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155304 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESS CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA)-based wireless mesh network, a communication node receives information regarding a next transmission time of a 1-hop node and a 2-top node through the 1-hop node, calculates next transmission intervals of the 1-hop node and the 2-hop node, determines a next transmission time of the communication node by using the next transmission intervals of the 1-hop node and the 2-hop node, and then transmits, to an 1-hop node of the communication node, the information of the next transmission time together with the information of the transmission time of the 1-hop node, received from the 1-hop node. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155305 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRACKING POSITION OF FIXED NODE - Provided is an apparatus and method for tracking a position of a fixed node. The position tracking apparatus of the fixed node may include: an interface to extract, from a database in response to the occurrence of an event about tracking the position of the fixed node, packet data corresponding to a mobile node associated with the event; and a processor to analyze a received signal strength of the packet data and a position of the mobile node from the packet data, and to track the position of the fixed node using the analysis result. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155306 | BASE STATION AND OPERATING METHOD THEREOF - A base station measures an amount of traffic within a downlink buffer. If the measured amount of traffic is larger than a threshold value, the base station adjusts a ratio of an available interval and an unavailable interval according to a ratio of the amount of traffic against the threshold value and length of a superframe. If the measured amount of traffic is smaller than the threshold value, the base station adjusts a ratio of the available interval and the unavailable interval according to a ratio of the threshold value against the amount of traffic and length of the superframe. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155307 | INTERFERENCE DETECTION IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - Disclosed is a method of identifying interference in a cellular telecommunications network including a plurality of cells controlled by a base stations | 06-21-2012 |
20120155308 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS POINT AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for controlling a plurality of access points by a monitoring station in a communication system, including: receiving access point status report policy information from a control server; receiving a basic service set load information element from the plurality of access points; generating access point status information by using the basic service set load information element; transmitting the access point status information to the control server by a method specified in the access point status report policy information; receiving an access point control command from the control server; and transmitting the access point control command to the plurality of access points. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155309 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and a method for handover of a terminal in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes transmitting, by a serving BS, measurement control information and DRX control information to a terminal; measuring, by the terminal, a channel, based on the measurement control information; operating, by the terminal, in connected DRX, based on the DRX control information; reporting, by the terminal, channel measurement information to the serving BS; determining, by the serving BS, the handover of the terminal based on the channel measurement information provided from the terminal; resetting, by the serving BS, the DRX control information of the terminal; transmitting, by the serving BS, the reset DRX control information to the terminal; operating, by the terminal, in the connected DRX, based on the reset DRX control information provided from the serving BS; and transmitting, by the serving BS, handover indication information to the terminal. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155310 | RACH PROCEDURES AND POWER LEVEL FOR MTC DEVICES - The present document relates to a wireless device in a digital cellular telecommunications network. For example, the present document relates to the request of an access channel from a wireless device to a base station of the digital cellular telecommunications network. Example methods for controlling one or more transmissions between a wireless device and a base station are described. The one or more transmissions include at least an initial transmission. One example method comprises determining the quality of a radio uplink between the wireless device and the base station, the quality being based on at least one parameter associated with a previous transmission; setting a control parameter for controlling the transmission between the wireless device and the base station based on the determined quality of the radio uplink; and transmitting the initial transmission. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155311 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING POSITION OF TARGET OBJECT IN WLAN ENVIRONMENT - An apparatus and method for determining the position of a target object in a wireless local area network (WLAN) environment are provided. According to the apparatus and method, it is possible for a user to easily identify each neighboring target object and to precisely select any desired neighboring target object. Therefore, it is possible to improve user convenience. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155312 | Measurement Reporting Method And Device In A Wireless Communication System - Provided are a measurement reporting method and device in a wireless communications system. A mobile station receives data relating to a measurement set for K (M≦N) component carriers to be measured from among N component carriers, from a base station. The mobile station measures the K component carriers. The mobile station then reports the results of the measurement of the K component carriers to the base station. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155313 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, NETWORK NODE, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - Disclosed is a technique for enabling a mobile terminal, which is capable of using a plurality of communication routes for communication with a correspondent node, to select an appropriate communication route to communicate with the correspondent node. According to the technique, the mobile terminal (UE/MN | 06-21-2012 |
20120155314 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS TERMINAL, WIRELESS RELAY STATION, AND WIRELESS BASE STATION SYSTEM - A terminal speed identification unit identifies the moving speed of a wireless terminal currently in communication. A ranging control unit sets the transmission cycle of a ranging signal of a wireless terminal moving at a speed greater than or equal to a predetermined speed shorter than the transmission cycle of a ranging signal of a wireless terminal moving at a speed below the predetermined speed. A transmission unit transmits a signal notifying the transmission cycle of a ranging signal to the wireless terminal. A reception unit receives a ranging signal from a wireless terminal currently in communication. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155315 | DOWNLINK TRANSMIT BEAMFORMING - A wireless network access point can operate as a closed loop MIMO device when communicating with a station that is operating as an open loop MIMO device. Transmit/receive chains in the access point are calibrated to support aggregate channel reciprocity. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155316 | Method and Device for Determining Search Space, and Method and Device for Determining Candidate Control Channel Resources - A method and a device for determining a search space and for determining candidate control channel resources are provided in present invention. The method for determining the search space includes: determining the number of downlink control information bits of each type of control channel currently required to be monitored by a UE; determining a temporary search space corresponding to the each type of control channel according to a mapping relationship currently used by the UE; and determining that an actual search space corresponding to a selected type of control channel is all or a part of CCEs of a union of temporary search spaces corresponding to all or a part of control channels with the same number of the downlink control information bits, when the DCI bit number of one or more other control channels is the same as the DCI bit number of the selected type of control channel. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155317 | Wireless Architecture and Support for Process Control Systems - A wireless communication system for use in a process environment uses mesh and possibly a combination of mesh and point-to-point communications to produce a wireless communication network that can be easily set up, configured, changed and monitored, thereby making a wireless communication network that is less expensive, and more robust and reliable. The wireless communication system allows virtual communication paths to be established and used within the process control system in a manner that is independent of the manner in which the wireless signals are sent between different wireless transmitting and receiving devices within the process plant. Still further, communication analysis tools are provided to enable a user or operator to view the operation of the wireless communication network to thereby analyze the ongoing operation of the wireless communications within the wireless communication network. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155318 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SPECTRUM PREDICTION - Method, system and apparatus for spectrum prediction are provided. The method includes: obtaining the first sampling data of target spectrum, wherein the first sampling data including existing service information, channel information and channel state information of the target spectrum; extracting channel state information of all channels of the same service in each timeslot from the first sampling data, and generating a sampling matrix; extracting a spectrum resource occupancy mode combination of the target spectrum from the sampling matrix; obtaining the second sampling data of the target spectrum, matching the spectrum resource occupancy mode combination according to the second sampling data of the target spectrum, and predicting the channel state of the target spectrum in a future timeslot according to the matching result. | 06-21-2012 |
20120163198 | Scheduling TDD-LTE Measurement in TD-SCDMA Systems - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for performing a time division duplex-long term evolution (TDD-LTE) measurement in a time division synchronous code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA) system. Certain aspects provide a method that generally includes obtaining measurements of downlink (DL) transmission from a base station (BS) of a second radio access technology (RAT), maintaining uplink (UL) transmission with a BS of a first RAT while obtaining the measurements, and performing network acquisition operations with the BS of the second RAT based on the measurements. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163199 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSION IN A MULTIHOP WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for media access control and rate control to improve data throughput in multihop wireless networks. For controlling media access, an unlocking mechanism is provided that sets the unlocking times at which the scheduling patterns of a MAC protocol is unlocked by requiring all, or a subset of links, to stop transmitting. The unlocking times are set and updated according to quality of service requirements which may change over time. Parameters of the MAC protocol and packet arrivals rates to the links in the network are updated using the parameters of the unlocking mechanism, the queue-sizes, and the utility functions of the links in the network. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163200 | Method and System for Interference Detection and Mitigation - In a method for adjusting the modulation of information onto subcarriers transmitted on a network, a first modulation profile of a network node on the network is set a first density. A plurality of messages in support of a link maintenance operation (LMO) on the network are monitored. The first modulation profile of the network node is updated to a second modulation profile having a second density. The updating is based on the monitored messages. Interference is detected by determining that a link between the first network node and a second network node on the network is not conveying a predetermined class of messages correctly. The first network node is set to a third modulation profile more robust than the first and second modulation profiles in response to the detected interference. The third modulation profile is common to each network node on the network. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163201 | CABLE MODEM WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC ATTENUATION - Described herein are a number of steps, methods and/or solutions that can be applied to greatly improve attenuation control of RF signals in cable plant. The present disclosure is directed to a cable modem auto-attenuation system or any other signal transferring system. The system may be capable of taking a high-power signal from the cable plant's service line, dropping the power value down to a usable level and transmitting the signal to a cable modem while eliminating the need for rigorous manual adjustments that a normal cable modem often requires. In certain embodiments, the system may be integrated into a separate device connected between the modem and the cable company service line and configured to handle upstream and downstream attenuation separately or jointly. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163202 | INTELLIGENT REDUCTION OF INTERFERENCE TO PUBLIC SAFETY WIRELESS NETWORKS - Interference, from fixed wireless terminals, communicating with, for example, an LTE network, can be intelligently reduced for nearby public safety networks. A fixed terminal may, for instance, determine a signal strength of radio signals from a public safety wireless network, and perform a threshold comparison of the signal strength to determine whether the fixed terminal is located in an edge area of a cell of the public safety wireless network. The fixed terminal may reduce transmission power, to the network of the fixed terminal (e.g., the LTE network), when the threshold comparison indicates that the device is located in the edge area of the cell of the public safety wireless network. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163203 | Adaptive Control of Video Transcoding in Mobile Networks - The data rate for video data being transmitted through a wireless network is adjusted based upon cell congestion levels. A network monitoring system identifies the congestion levels in network cells based upon data traffic captured from network interfaces. When a cell congestion level reaches a first level, an alert is sent to a video transcoding device. The video transcoding device adjusts the data rate for video data being sent to one or more subscribers in the congested cell. The data rate adjustments may be based upon a subscriber profile or a user equipment type. When cell congestion levels drop below a second threshold, the monitoring system sends a second alert indicating that the data rate can be increased. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163204 | METHODS FOR REDUCING SET-UP SIGNALING IN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM - A method for reducing set-up signaling in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) communication system is performed by an LTE subsystem. The method includes the LTE subsystem: receiving from a first user equipment (UE) a first message as part of a connection procedure to connect the first UE to the LTE system, the first message having contents that include an identifier for identifying a virtual channel on which the first UE intends to transmit media; determining a status of the virtual channel; and based on the status of the virtual channel, determining whether to send to the first UE a response to the first message that allows the connection procedure to proceed or to send to the first UE a response that terminates the connection procedure. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163205 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FLOW CONTROL IN A MULTI-POINT HSDPA COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A base station (e.g., a Node B in a Multi-Point HSDPA network) calculates an amount of data to request from a network node (e.g., a radio network controller or RNC). As a part of the algorithm utilized, a length of a queue at the Node B for buffering the flow may be dynamically adjusted in an effort to optimize the trade-off between buffer underrun and skew. Further, a network node (e.g., the RNC) responds to Node B flow control requests. Here, the RNC may determine the amount of data to send to the Node B in response to the flow control message from the Node B, and may send the data to the Node B. In various aspects of the present disclosure involving a Multi-Point HSDPA system, the flow control algorithm at the RNC coordinates packet flow to the primary serving cell and the secondary serving cell for the UE. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANALYSIS OF USER TRAFFIC WITHIN A PREDEFINED AREA - Multiple packets are received that were transmitted by multiple mobile electronic device sensors located in a predefined area. The packets each include data detected by the sensors of multiple mobile electronic devices. At least a portion of the collected data is stored including multiple unique device identifiers that belong to multiple mobile electronic devices. Responsive to determining that at least two of the unique device identifiers are sequential, a set of values based on the at least two unique devices identifiers are associated as belonging to a same one of the mobile electronic devices. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163207 | SPEED-ADAPTIVE CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR (CQI) ESTIMATION - A method, apparatus, computer program product, and processing system for generating a channel quality indicator (CQI) adapted according to the speed of a moving user equipment (UE). A CQI can be generated by mapping a calculated signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) to a CQI value. The SNR corresponds to a signal power and a noise power of a received pilot signal. The signal power and the noise power may be generated utilizing respective infinite impulse response (IIR) filters having filter coefficients chosen in accordance with the speed at which the UE moves. Selection of the filter coefficients can be made in accordance with a continuous function or a discontinuous function utilizing a threshold, and may utilize hysteresis. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163208 | SUBBAND SNR CORRECTION IN A FREQUENCY SELECTIVE SCHEDULER - A method, system, and base station for providing subband signal to noise ratio (SNR) correction in the scheduling of communication resources. A Scheduling Correction (SC) utility receives periodic subband and wideband channel quality indicator (CQI) reports from one or more wireless devices. The SC utility records a subframe report period for a respective subband CQI report. The SC utility calculates the age of the subband report to determine whether the subband CQI report remains valid. If the subband report is invalid, the SC utility utilizes the wideband CQI report for (current) transmission scheduling. However, if the subband report is valid, the SC utility utilizes: (a) the subband CQI report for transmission scheduling from the most current reporting subframe; or (b) a modified subband CQI value with a correction that utilizes the wideband CQI report, if the subband CQI report was not received at the most current reporting subframe. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163209 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ANALYZING NETWORK PACKETS BASED ON HISTORY - Disclosed herein is a network packet analysis technology that analyzes packet protocols without having preliminary information about the sequence of network packets, and is capable of analyzing the meanings of fields of each network packet, as well as the temporal sequence of the network packets, using pre-stored history sets. For this, the apparatus for analyzing network packets includes a history set generation unit for capturing and synchronizing network packets, input events and screen shots when an application is running, and then generating a plurality of history sets. A history set storage unit stores the plurality of history sets. A packet analysis unit analyzes the plurality of history sets stored in the history set storage unit and then analyzes a temporal sequence of the network packets and individual fields of each network packet. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163210 | THROUGHPUT DERIVATION METHOD FOR INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FUNCTION - A throughput derivation method in a wireless communication system includes generating a victim link and an interference link by setting an input parameter, calculating a desired Received Signal Strength (dRSS) for a specific channel and an interfering Received Signal Strength (iRSS) for the specific channel, allocating a channel for interference avoidance by comparing the calculated iRSS with a threshold that is a signal transmission/reception permission level, calculating a Signal to Interference-plus-Noise Ratio (SINR) using dRSS and iRSS for the allocated channel, and calculating a packet error rate using the calculated SINR and computing a throughput using the calculated packet error rate. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163211 | DATA RATE MATCHING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Disclosed are a data rate matching method and apparatus for use in mobile communication systems that can perform parallel interleaving at a high speed without a collision between encoded data input in parallel. A set of first parameters (f | 06-28-2012 |
20120163212 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING ABNORMAL TRAFFIC - An apparatus and method for detecting abnormal traffic are provided. According to the apparatus and method, it is possible to easily detect abnormal traffic by analyzing a traffic image that is generated based on traffic statistics data provided by an external traffic analysis device or an internal traffic analysis device without the need to access a traffic analysis device that is hard to access or manipulate. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163213 | MULTI-BAND CHANNEL CAPACITY FOR METER NETWORK - A communication system that relays data messages from or to a plurality of remote endpoints via RF gateways to a data accumulation site over one of a series of communication channels. The communication system monitors the signal-to-noise ratio of communication from each individual endpoint, which can be utility meters and related control or monitoring points, to a gateway. Based upon a quality of service and/or the signal-to-noise ratio of the communication of the endpoints to the gateways, the system assigns a desired communication channel to the endpoint. Each of the desired communication channels have varying data transmission rate and required SNR and each channel is selected based upon the signal-to-noise ratio of the transmissions from the endpoint to the gateways. If the signal-to-noise ratio changes for an endpoint, the system dynamically reassigns a different channel to the meter based upon the updated signal-to-noise ratio. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163214 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MEASURING VOICE QUALITY OF VoIP TERMINAL USING WIDEBAND VOICE CODEC - A method for measuring voice quality in a wireless communication network includes measuring an MOS of a signal using a narrowband voice codec and an MOS of a signal using a wideband voice codec in a cable loopback environment, calculating a wideband voice codec correction coefficient using the measured MOS, measuring an MOS of a signal using the narrowband voice codec and an MOS of a signal using the wideband voice codec in a terminal connection environment; and outputting a value obtained by adding the wideband voice codec correction coefficient to the measured MOS in the terminal connection environment. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163215 | OPEN WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS AND CONNECTION METHOD USING THE SAME - An open wireless access network apparatus includes an Internet protocol (IP) resource management unit to allocate IPs, respectively, to a plurality of provider servers and open wireless access points (APs), and map the IP of each provider server to the IP of each open wireless AP; a subscriber movement management unit to provide a second wireless AP with an IP that has been allocated to a first wireless AP when a mobile device changes from one area in which the mobile device has a signal delivered from the first wireless AP to another area in which the mobile device has a signal delivered from the second wireless AP; and a wireless AP connection control unit to allow the mobile device to be connected to the second wireless AP through the allocated IP. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163216 | MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - Disclosed is a media access control apparatus and method in a wireless local area network (LAN) system, which improves the performance of a wireless network by obtaining a transmission opportunity based on information on a station (STA), received from an access point (AP) in a contention-based distributed media access control system such as an IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN system. In the media access control apparatus and method, a station determines a contention window (CW) value based on information on other stations accessing a same access point and information on the idle state of a channel, so that an inefficient CW value is be set in a Distributed Coordination Function (DCF) used in the IEEE 802.11. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the processing speed of the station and to the efficiency of a wireless LAN network. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163217 | Structure of Adaptive Multiple Antennas and Communication Device and Method Using Adaptive Multiple Antennae - The present invention relates to communication using multiple antennas, and more particularly, to an apparatus and method for adaptively adjusting, based on a channel environment, an interval and direction of multiple antennas each of a transmitter and a receiver. A communication method according to the present invention may include verifying information about a channel state based on a pilot signal transmitted for each antenna of a transmitter, adjusting intervals among antennas of a receiver based on the information about a channel state, calculating transmission capacity values according to the adjusted intervals among antennas, and setting an antenna to an antenna interval corresponding to a transmission capacity having a highest value among the transmission capacity values calculated. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163218 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLE ACCESSES BASED ON RESOURCE CONTENTION USING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA - Provided is an apparatus and method for spatial reuse of resources using a directional antenna based on a resource contention in a wireless network. An apparatus for multiple accesses based on a resource contention using a directional antenna may use a resource contention period efficiently in a medium access control (MAC) by calculating an optimal value of an objective function for a delay time and a throughput. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163219 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY BASED ON FLOW IN PMIPv6 - A method and apparatus for supporting a flow-based mobility to a multi-mode terminal equipped with a plurality of wired and wireless network interfaces, and selecting an access network may be provided in the PMIPv6 technology that supports a network-based mobility. Also, a flow-based location registration process and a handover process of the multi-mode terminal may be provided, and a flow-based data transmission process and an access network selecting process for the multi-mode terminal may be provided. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163220 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for transmitting data in a communication system includes: a receiver configured to receive signals from a plurality of terminals in a multiuser-multi-input multi-output (MU-MIMO) scheme; an assignor configured to assign group IDs to terminal groups, respectively after identifying the plurality of terminals and grouping the plurality of terminals into the terminal groups; a generator configured to define a load element which indicates a resource and load state of a basic service set (BSS) through the group IDs and to generate a beacon frame including the load element; and a transmitter configured to transmit the beacon frame to the plurality of terminals in the MU-MIMO scheme. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163221 | Communication Device, Communication Method and Computer Program Product - A communication device measures an available bandwidth, which is a bandwidth that can be used for data communication, while changing a transmission rate of packets. The communication device comprises a range determination portion that sets a reference point and determines a search range, a bandwidth setting portion that sets a measurement bandwidth, a first generation portion that generates media data, a second generation portion that generates redundant data, a packet generation portion that packetizes the media data and the redundant data, and a packet transmission portion that transmits measurement packets. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163222 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOCATING A WIRELESS DEVICE IN A WIMAX NETWORK USING UPLINK SIGNALS - A system and method for estimating a location of a wireless device receiving signals from plural nodes of a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (“WiMAX”) communication system. Contention or non-contention based ranging may be allocated to the wireless device, and a first signal may be transmitted from at least one of the plural nodes to the wireless device. Tipping information may then be transmitted to one or more location measurement units, and a ranging signal transmitted from the wireless device in response to the first signal. Uplink signal time of arrival measurements of the ranging signal may be performed as a function of the tipping information, and a location of the wireless device estimated as a function of the determined uplink measurements. Downlink signal measurements of first signals received by the wireless device from the plural nodes may also be determined and a location of the wireless device determined from the uplink and/or downlink measurements. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163223 | TRANSMISSION OF SYNCHRONIZATION AND CONTROL SIGNALS IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS SYSTEM - In a broadband wireless communication system, a primary control signal may be relocated within the operation band for transmission while avoiding interference. For example, if the primary control signal employs P contiguous sub carriers, the primary control signal can be placed in any section of the band that has P contiguous subcarriers. If a narrow-band interferer appears at one end of the band, the primary control signals can be placed at the other end. If the interferer appears in the middle, the primary can be relocated to either end of the band. The placement of primary control signals can be changed as the interference environment changes. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163224 | AUTOMATIC PROTECTION SWITCHING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide an automatic protection switching method, device and system. The method includes: determining a part of services as to-be-switched service(s) according to change of bandwidth when monitoring that the bandwidth of the first transmission path changes; and switching the to-be-switched service(s) between links on the second transmission path and the first transmission path. Another method includes: receiving a partial switching message from a peer network edge node through the first transmission path or the second transmission path; and determining the to-be-switched service(s) according to indication information about the to-be-switched service(s) or bandwidth change information in the partial switching message, and switching the to-be-switched service(s) between links on the first transmission path and the second transmission path. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163225 | Determining Telecommunication Subscriber Metrics - Information associated with a communication is gathered at a switching point during the routing process to determine subscriber metric information associated with an active service identifier. The information relates to the originator of the communication and the target. The information is compared to a provider database to determine a carrier originally associated with the active service identifier. The information is then compared to a porting database to determine if the active service identifier was ported, and if so, to which carrier the active service identifier was ported. A determination can then be made regarding which carrier is associated with the active service identifier. Various systems and methods may be used to determine a number of subscribers, a number of new subscribers, and a number of disconnected subscribers for a given carrier in a given market. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163226 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a communication device includes a first wireless device configured to transmit a signal and a second wireless device configured to transmit a positive acknowledge when reception of the signal is successful. In the first wireless device, a first controller controls a first transmission module to change a first frequency channel based on a change order stored in a first storage when the positive acknowledge is not received even after the time measured by a first timer exceeds a first period. In the second wireless device, a second controller controls a second reception module to change the first frequency channel based on the change order stored in a second storage when the positive acknowledge is not transmitted even after the time measured by a second timer exceeds the first period. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163227 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTELLIGENT PROBE TESTING - Systems and methods are disclosed for testing a processor having at least a first interface. In one embodiment, the method includes configuring, at the processor, a second interface, such that the configured second interface has one or more quality of service parameters representative of the first interface; sending one or more packets through the configured second interface, the one or more packets being representative of another packet received at the first interface; and determining, based on the one or more packets, one or more performance parameters corresponding to the first interface under test. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163228 | METHOD FOR INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE MITIGATION FOR A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for reducing inter-cell interference (ICI) in a mobile communication system controls transmission signal power of an uplink signal from a terminal based on signal power measurement for a signal received from a base station of a neighboring cell. A terminal receives a signal from a base station of a neighboring cell via a wireless channel, measures a channel response against a threshold value across an applicable frequency band by using the received signal, determines a transmission signal power for each frequency band used for data transmission based on the measured channel response, and transmits data to a home cell base station according to the transmission signal power for each frequency band. The terminal may measure a channel response based on signals received from multiple base stations in multiple neighboring cells, and may also evaluate signal power of a signal transmitted from the home cell. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163229 | Achieving Quality of Service in a Wireless Local Area Network - Examples of achieving quality of service in a wireless local area network via meeting communication channel performance criteria to include a minimum signal-to-noise plus interference ratio and a proportional fairness limit are disclosed. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163230 | VARIABLE TRANSLUCENCY NO-SIGHT ROUTING FOR AD-HOC NETWORKS - A system comprising a plurality of nodes forming a network and a link-state packet capable of being transmitted by a source node in the network to a destination node in the network over a communication link; wherein the source node subtracts a transmission cost associated with the communication link from a time-to-live value associated with the link-state packet prior to transmitting the link-state packet to the destination node. Each node in the network may be configured to use a routing protocol, such as a no-sight routing protocol, to assign the transmission cost to the communication link. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163231 | Preamble Group Selection in Random Access of Wireless Networks - A transport block size (TBS) of a first uplink message (RACH Msg3) transmitted on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) during a random access procedure in a User Equipment (UE) accessing a radio access network may be determined by receiving a pathloss threshold parameter. A downlink pathloss value indicative of radio link conditions between the UE and a base station (eNB) serving the UE is then determined. A smaller value of TBS is selected from a set of TBS values if the determined pathloss value is greater than an operating power level of the UE minus the pathloss threshold parameter. A larger value of TBS is selected if the pathloss value is less than the operating power level of the UE minus the pathloss threshold parameter and the TBS required to transmit the RACH Msg3 exceeds the smaller TBS value. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170466 | JOINT SUBCARRIER USAGE RATIO AND POWER ALLOCATION METHOD, SYSTEM USING THE SAME, BASE STATION AND CONTROLLER USING THE SAME - A joint subcarrier usage ratio and power allocation method, the system and base station, and a controller using the same are proposed. The method is adapted for a femtocell base station using OFDMA technology to jointly select transmission power and subcarrier usage ratio. The method includes a first adjustment process, which simultaneously, dynamically and jointly adjusts the transmission power and the subcarrier usage ratio so as to quickly satisfy capacity requirement and link reliability requirement. The method also includes a second adjustment process for slowly adjusting the transmission power and the subcarrier usage ratio after the capacity requirement and the link reliability requirement are both met in the first adjustment process for stability duration. The second adjustment process helps the femtocell base station achieve maximal power efficiency. An outer-loop control might be used in the method to relax the capacity requirement of one femtocell for quickly achieving a stable situation. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170467 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VIRTUAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND TRAFFIC VALIDATION - An approach provides virtual circuit protection. Traffic is received at a network interface device configured to interface an Ethernet virtual circuit of a service provider transport network over a user network interface (UNI). The network interface device is configured as a demarcation point between a customer network and the service provider transport network. Circuit replication is performed over the virtual circuit to create a plurality of communication paths over the virtual circuit by assigning respective tags for independently switching the traffic over the communication paths. One of the communication paths is designated as a standby communication path. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170468 | POWER MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS AD HOC NETWORK - In a wireless ad hoc network ( | 07-05-2012 |
20120170469 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR FACILITATING DETERMINATION OF A STATE OF A RECEIVER BUFFER - Methods and apparatuses are provided for facilitating determination of a state of a receiver buffer. A method may include receiving, at a first time, a data packet of a data stream transmitted by a sending apparatus. The method may further include generating, at a second time, a periodically generated receiver reporting message. The method may additionally include determining an interval time defining an interval between the first time and the second time. The method may also comprise causing an indication of the interval time to be sent to the sending apparatus. Corresponding apparatuses are also provided. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170470 | CORRELATING COMMUNICATION TRANSACTIONS ACROSS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A system for correlating communication packets across different communication networks includes a first monitoring agent in a first network for collecting local identifying information of a communication packet at a communication node. The first monitoring agent pairs the local identifying information with a public identifying information of the packet for a second network. The first monitoring agent further adds a timestamp to the collected information. A second monitoring agent in the second network receives a communication packet from the communication node and collects public identifying information of the packet. The second monitoring agent adds a time-stamp to the collected information. A third monitoring agent in the second network receives the information collected by the first and the second monitoring agents and correlates packets based on the received information. The third monitoring agent determines when specific packets captured from the first network and the second network are related to each other. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170471 | AUTOMATED ACCESS POINT SELECTION TO PROVIDE COMMUNICATION NETWORK PRESENCE TO A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of selecting an access point to provide communication network presence to a communication device. The method can include detecting a plurality of access points and performing scans of the detected access points over each of a plurality of period windows to detect short-term attributes and long-term attributes associated with each detected access point. When a new scan of the detected access points is performed over a new period window, an oldest set of short-term attributes can be purged from a prior period window. The short-term attributes, the long-term attributes and a time-invariant attribute can be processed for each of the access points to rank the access points in terms of priority. An access point having the highest priority can be selected to be the access point to provide the communication network presence to the communication device. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170472 | ON-CHIP PACKET CUT-THROUGH - Embodiments of the invention include a method for avoiding memory bandwidth utilization during packet processing. The packet processing core receives a plurality of packets. The packet processing core identifies the packet's quality of service (QoS) descriptor. The packet processing core determines that at least one packet should be moved to an off-chip packet stored prior to the packet being transmitted to the egress port. The packet processing core bases that determination, at least in part, on the packet's QoS descriptor. The packet processing core moves the determined packets to the off-chip packet store. The packet processing core determines that at least one packet should not be moved to the off-chip packet store prior to the packet being transmitted to the egress port. This determination is also made, at least in part, based on the packet's QoS descriptor. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170473 | OUT-OF-BAND RADIO FOR SUPPORTING COMPRESSED MODE IN A FEMTO DEPLOYMENT - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for using communications over an out-of-band (OOB) link to support compressed mode communications by user equipment (UE) in a femto deployment. Typically, UEs must tune away from an active communications channel to make inter-frequency and/or inter-RAT measurements. When making these measurements, data communications may be compressed to allow time to tune away for those measurements. Embodiments integrate an OOB proxy with the femtocell to provide OOB link capability to supplement WWAN link resources. According to various techniques, the OOB link is used to compensate for reductions in data rate and/or quality resulting from compressed mode operation. For example, the OOB link is used to communicate compressed mode signaling data, retransmissions, and/or other compensatory data. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170474 | System and Method of Adaptive Roaming for WLAN Clients - The system and method of the present application improves the performance of a WLAN client by sensing the environment and dynamically adjusting roam trigger values. The system and method scans the WLAN area for access points (AP) and analyzes the signal quality of an AP based on a plurality of AP system parameters. If signal quality of the current AP is less than that of the AP that was scanned, then the WLAN card enters into a roaming mode in order to connect with the higher signal quality AP. If the signal of the current AP is greater, then a new scan is conducted after a predetermined amount of time. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170475 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MICROECONOMIC MULTIPLEXING OF DATA OVER COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - A system and method for optimal allocation of bandwidth in a multichannel transmission channel. In an embodiment, a system may allocate a specific amount of bandwidth in the transmission channel in order to maximize the value of the data that is transmitted on a per-channel basis. Typically, a transmission channel has enough bandwidth to accommodate the minimum bandwidth for all data across all channels. The excess bandwidth may be allocated in an optimal manner so as to provide additional bandwidth for the most valuable channels. The maximum allocation of bandwidth is a point in which allocating additional bandwidth to a channel does not yield any additional value. Such an allocation may be accomplished using an iterative analysis of the available bandwidth and a microeconomic-based analysis of the subjective value of each channel. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170476 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING LIVE MEDIA STREAMING IN PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKS - A method and a system for transmitting a live media stream to a plurality of nodes under a multicast tree in peer-to-peer (P2P) networks are provided. First, the reliability of each node is calculated according to a number of child nodes that can be supported by the node and an accumulated on-line time of the node. According to the number of child nodes and the reliability of each node, the nodes are rearranged in a database to establish an ideal reliable multicast tree. Finally, according to the reliability of each node, a location of each node in the multicast tree is practically adapted in sequence in a descending order, and a relative delay between nodes is weighted and compared, so a level difference between the adapted level of the node in the multicast tree and the level of the node in the ideal reliable multicast tree is the smallest. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170477 | Computer, communication system, network connection switching method, and program - A computer comprises: a virtual network interface device; a first virtual switch connected to a first physical network interface device; a second virtual switch connected to a second physical network interface device; a communication analysis unit (or path control unit) that, based on a result of communication with a packet transmission destination obtained by analyzing a packet transmitted from the virtual network interface device, selects to which of the first virtual switch and the second virtual switch the virtual network interface device is to be connected; and a connection setting unit that holds a connection between the virtual switch selected by the communication analysis unit (or path control unit) and the virtual network interface device. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170478 | Self-Organizing Network Related Power Capacity Status Reporting - Provided is an apparatus, method, system and computer program product directed to a self-organizing network related power capacity status reporting. A threshold value is set and provided for distribution to communication terminals, wherein the threshold value is related to a relative value concerning the availability of remaining power at a communication terminal. Provision of the threshold to the communication terminals is commanded, and a power report from the communication terminals is also commanded, if the relative value concerning the availability of remaining power at a communication terminal is above the threshold value. Eventually, a measurement report of those communication terminals is commanded, which have reported a relative value concerning the availability of remaining power above the threshold value, wherein this commanding includes an instruction to conduct and report measurements related to the self organization of a communication network in which a communication terminal is connected. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170479 | Allocation of Acknowledgement Channels to Channel Groups Having Fixed Transmit Energies - A method and apparatus is provided for assigning resources for an acknowledgement channel, such as the PHICH in LTE systems. A list of acknowledgement channels for a group of scheduled mobile terminals is generated. The list is sorted in descended order of the required transmit energies for the corresponding mobile terminals. The acknowledgement channels are then assigned to channel groups one at a time in sorted order to an available channel group with the lowest cumulative transmit energy. By sorting the channel list before assigning resources, the variance in the transmit energies for different channel groups is reduced. Given enough number of acknowledgement channel groups, the small variance in the transmit energies for different channel groups implies improved error rate performance. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170480 | RECEPTION DEVICE AND METHOD - A channel characteristic obtained from a pilot signal is stored for a prescribed number of symbols and a Fourier transform is performed ( | 07-05-2012 |
20120170481 | RELAY STATION, RELAY METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - To dynamically change an amount of communication resources to be used for relay communication. A relay station for relaying a radio signal between a base station and a mobile station is provided. The relay station includes a wireless communication unit for transmitting or receiving a radio signal in blocks individually divided in at least one of a time domain, a frequency domain, a code domain, and a space domain, and a communication control unit for causing the wireless communication unit to transmit, in one block, data contained in two or more radio signals received in different blocks by the wireless communication unit. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170482 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN LOW-FREQUENCY BAND IN HUMAN BODY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND THE HUMAN BODY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention proposes a method for transmitting data considering a non-contact state of a human body, while selecting a central frequency in various ranges in the human body communication system. To this end, a first embodiment of the present invention proposes a human body communication system in which a central frequency can be simply moved, and specifically, proposes a data transmission apparatus comprising a frequency shifter which shifts the output of a multiplexer into a specified frequency so as to enable the central frequency to be moved. In addition, a second embodiment of the present invention proposes a human body communication system which controls not only central frequency selection and transmission band minimization, but also a data rate, modulation, etc, and thus can perform stable communication in a non-contact state of a human body. Through this, it is possible to maximize the band efficiency, and to transmit data considering a non-contact state of a human body. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170483 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING AND ACQUIRING OVERHEAD FLOW DATA IN A MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for distributing and acquiring overhead flow data in a multi-frequency network. In an aspect, a method includes generating primary flow (PF) overhead data associated with one or more multiplexes to be distributed in the multi-frequency network, identifying multiplex specific overhead (MSO) data associated with the one or more multiplexes, transmitting the PF overhead data over the multi-frequency network using first pre-assigned flow identifiers, and transmitting the MSO data over the multi-frequency network using second pre-assigned flow identifiers. An apparatus includes flow acquisition logic configured to acquire PF overhead data associated with at least one multiplex using first pre-assigned flow identifiers, and processing logic configured to determine that overhead data associated with the at least one multiplex has been updated based on the received PF overhead data, and to obtain MSO data associated with the at least one multiplex using second pre-assigned flow identifiers. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170484 | SIGNALING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A communication system, such as a wireless CDMA system, detects markers with fewer errors by having field units transmit the markers at different power levels (e.g., 9 dB for one marker and 11 dB for another marker). The difference in power levels of the markers allows the base station to identify the request markers using alternative criteria with a low probability of error, where the alternative criteria may include comparing the markers to respective energy level thresholds, monitoring occupancy of time slots, occupancy of mutually exclusive code channels, or combinations thereof. For example, in one particular embodiment, a request marker, which is generally a high priority marker, is transmitted with higher power, which improves the probability of detection and reduces the probability of false detection of the request marker. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170485 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal | 07-05-2012 |
20120176918 | Limited System Information Decoding For Automatic Neighbor Relations In Mobile Networks - A UE in the idle or semi-idle state determines that a wirelessly received signal is scrambled by a scrambling code which is not within a locally stored list of scrambling codes received from its serving network node, and applies a rule to determine from the scrambling code whether to decode broadcast system information that is transmitted by an access node using the scrambling code. In one embodiment such a rule is that if the scrambling code is not within the list, do not decode the broadcast system information again if the scrambling code is locally stored from a previous instance of decoding the system information. Another rule embodiment is if the scrambling code is not within the list, do not attempt to decode the system information unless a measured signal strength for the wirelessly received signal is higher than a threshold, which may be absolute or dependent on strength of a signal received from the serving network node. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176919 | Test Method for Type 3I Receiver in Multicarrier Configuration - The present invention discloses a test method and a testing apparatus for type 3i receivers which use multicarrier operation in HSDPA. The method sequentially tests each carrier, one at a time. Applying multi-switches, channel emulators and efficient wirings, performance tests can be performed without any need for changing the User Equipment to be tested. In case a single carrier test is passed, the next carrier is selected for the test. All carriers are thus tested sequentially against a single carrier throughput requirement until all carriers have been processed. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176920 | Tracking Packet Sequence Numbers - Methods, traffic receivers, and computer readable storage media for testing network connections are disclosed. A traffic receiver coupled to a network under test may receive a packet. A packet group identification number (PGID and a sequence number (SN) may be extracted from the received packet. Data associated with the PGID may be retrieved from a memory, the data including a next expected sequence number (NESN), a start of run (SOR), a number of in-order packets (NIO) and a number of duplicate packets (NDP). When SN is equal to NESN, NESN and NIO may be incremented. When SN is less than NESN and SN is greater than or equal to SOR, NDP may be incremented. When SN is greater than NESN, SOR may be set to SN, NESN may be set to SN plus one, and NIO maybe incremented. Updated data may be stored in the memory. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176921 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) FEEDBACK PROTOCOL FOR MULTIUSER MULTIPLE INPUT, MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for using channel state information (CSI) feedback for multiuser multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) transmission. For certain aspects, a method of wireless communications generally includes generating a training frame and transmitting the generated training frame. The training frame typically includes first information identifying a group of one or more apparatuses and second information indicating whether each of the apparatuses in the group is to determine at least one characteristic of a channel. For other aspects, a method of wireless communications generally includes receiving a request at an apparatus and transmitting, in response to the received request, a packet using frame aggregation, wherein two or more frames are transmitted in a single transmission using a single header. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176922 | DOWNLINK FLOW CONTROL BY ADDING NOISE TO A RECEIVER TO REDUCE PHYSICAL LAYER THROUGHPUT - Aspects of the present disclosure relate to wireless communications and techniques and apparatus for downlink flow control at the physical layer of a user equipment (UE). Aspects generally include monitoring one or more parameters related to the UE and intentionally reducing channel quality based on the one or more parameters to trigger downlink flow control. According to aspects, channel quality may be reduced by degrading receiver performance and/or intentionally adding noise to a signal. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176923 | Power Control Method to Mitigate Interference for In-Device Coexistence - A power control method to mitigate in-device coexistence (IDC) interference is provided. A wireless communication device (UE) is equipped with a first LTE radio module and a second co-located WiFi/BT/GSNN radio module. Upon detecting coexistence or IDC interference, the UE applies power control method to mitigate the interference. In a first embodiment, the LTE radio module adjusts its power parameters locally without informing the serving eNB. In a second embodiment, the LTE radio module adjusts its power parameters and implicit informs the eNB through existing PHR reporting. In a third embodiment, the LTE radio module changes its power or power class and explicitly informs the eNB through UE capability or new RRC message or MAC CE. Power control can be used as a low cost and lightweight solution before applying other heavyweight solutions that either require more resource or control overhead, or have higher impact on throughput. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176924 | Channel Quality Indicator Reporting - A method, computer program and apparatus operate when resuming data transmission/reception upon activation of a serving cell, or after a long in-device coexistence interference avoidance gap, to determine whether to report to a network access node an in-device coexistence interference indicator value and send the in-device coexistence interference indicator value to the network access node, The in-device coexistence interference indicator value is reported to the network access node for a certain period if any periodic channel quality indication resource is configured for the cell, or if an aperiodic channel quality indication for the cell is requested from the network access node. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176925 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING AN INSTANCE FOR PERFORMING A CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION MEASUREMENT AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A communications apparatus is provided. A processor is coupled to a transceiver, and at least comprises a first processor logic unit for performing a channel state information measurement at the sub-frame(s) comprised in a first sub-frame subset configured by a peer communications apparatus to obtain a first measurement result, a second processor logic unit for performing a second channel state information measurement at the sub-frame(s) comprised in a second sub-frame subset configured by the peer communications apparatus to obtain a second measurement result, a third processor logic unit for reporting the first measurement result and the second measurement result to the peer communications apparatus via the transceiver at one or more reporting instances. The reporting instances are determined based on a plurality of reporting parameters, and the reporting parameters are respectively configured for the first sub-frame subset and second sub-frame subset by the peer communications apparatus. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176926 | SECONDARY CARRIER ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A secondary carrier activation/deactivation method for activating/deactivating secondary carriers in addition to a primary carrier is provided for a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation. The method includes identifying, when a secondary carrier control message is received from a base station, carriers to be activated are deactivated, determining, when the message includes a secondary carrier activation command, whether a first time point has arrived, and executing, when the first time point arrives, predetermined first operations. The present invention is advantageous to avoid malfunctions in communication system supporting carrier aggregation by defining UE operations to be taken in SCell activation and deactivation. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176927 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A relay node (or relay station) assists in providing asymmetric communications with a mobile station. When resources are less than ideal for providing a direct uplink or downlink with the mobile station to a first base station, the relay station is employed to provide an uplink or downlink to a second base station. The mobile station may still maintain a direct downlink/uplink to the first base station when adequate resources are present. To assist in resource coordination the first and second base stations share scheduling information for the mobile station. This approach allows a second base station to server as a surrogate base station for a first base station, when inadequate resources are available for a direct uplink or downlink to the mobile station. The relay node makes it possible for the mobile station to maintain the uplink (or downlink) with the second base station, while remaining assigned to the first base station. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176928 | CHANNEL CALIBRATION FOR A TIME DIVISION DUPLEXED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques to calibrate downlink and uplink channels to account for differences in the frequency responses of transmit and receive chains are described. In one embodiment, pilots are transmitted on downlink and uplink channels and used to derive estimates of the downlink and uplink channel responses, respectively. Sets of correction factors are then determined based on estimates of downlink and uplink channel responses. A calibrated downlink channel is formed using a first set of correction factors for the downlink channel, and a calibrated uplink channel is formed using a second set of correction factors for the uplink channel. The first and second sets of correction factors may be determined using a matrix-ratio computation or a minimum mean square error computation. The calibration may be performed in real-time based on over-the-air transmission. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 07-12-2012 |
20120182885 | Testing Connectivity in Networks Using Overlay Transport Virtualization - Techniques are provided for detecting connectivity failures within an OTV network using CFM. In an embodiment, a method and apparatus for using E-OAM to accurately test connectivity in an OTV network is provided. In an embodiment, one method comprises: in a first edge router that is in a local area network (LAN) and that is coupled to a core network: maintaining, for each node of the LAN, a mapping of a source address to one or more delivery multicast groups, each delivery multicast group comprising a set of other edge routers, each of the other edge routers having a connection to a distinct LAN; receiving a frame from a particular source node of a particular source address; sending the frame to a plurality of the delivery multicast groups that are mapped, in the mapping, to the particular source address. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182886 | Method and Apparatus for Wireless Medium Access - In a non-limiting and example embodiment, a method is provided for arranging multi-channel wireless communications, including detecting, by a communications apparatus, information on available bandwidth for a transmission opportunity applying multiple channels, and controlling duration of channel occupancy for at least one of channels available for the transmission opportunity on the basis of the information on available bandwidth. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182887 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION USING SUBSETS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed for wireless resource sharing between heterogeneous wireless networks to enable coexistence of secondary networks by grouping two or more of the neighboring networks into subsets based on determining whether one or more wireless networks has a fair portion of available resources to operate, according to an embodiment of the present invention. An example embodiment of the invention includes a method, comprising: forming, by an apparatus, one or more subsets of networks, wherein each of the one or more subsets of networks comprise one or more wireless networks from one or more wireless networks served by the apparatus and wireless networks neighboring the one or more served wireless networks; calculating target resources for each of the one or more subsets of networks based on one or more parameters associated with the wireless networks; allocating available resources for each the one or more wireless networks served by the apparatus and wireless networks neighboring each of the one or more served wireless networks based on the calculated target resources; and determining whether each of the one or more wireless networks served by the apparatus and wireless networks neighboring each of the one or more served wireless networks has a fair portion of available resources to operate. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182888 | Write Traffic Shaper Circuits - In an embodiment, one or more fabric control circuits may be inserted in a communication fabric to control various aspects of the communications by components in the system. The fabric control circuits may be included on the interface of the components to the communication fabric, in some embodiments. In other embodiments that include a hierarchical communication fabric, fabric control circuits may alternatively or additionally be included. The fabric control circuits may be programmable, and thus may provide the ability to tune the communication fabric to meet performance and/or functionality goals. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182889 | Quality of Service (QoS)-Related Fabric Control - In an embodiment, one or more fabric control circuits may be inserted in a communication fabric to control various aspects of the communications by components in the system. The fabric control circuits may be included on the interface of the components to the communication fabric, in some embodiments. In other embodiments that include a hierarchical communication fabric, fabric control circuits may alternatively or additionally be included. The fabric control circuits may be programmable, and thus may provide the ability to tune the communication fabric to meet performance and/or functionality goals. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182890 | ADAPTIVE PEER DISCOVERY BASED ON NON PEER DISCOVERY TRANSMISSIONS AND DEVICE DENSITY FOR WI-FI - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided in which a number of wireless devices communicating peer discovery information are estimated. In addition, a transmission time period for transmitting peer discovery information is determined based on the estimated number of wireless devices. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182891 | PACKET ANALYSIS SYSTEM AND METHOD USING HADOOP BASED PARALLEL COMPUTATION - The present invention relates to a packet analysis system and method, which enables cluster nodes to process in parallel a large quantity of packets collected in a network in an open source distribution system called Hadoop. The packet analysis system based on a Hadoop framework includes a first module for distributing and storing packet traces in a distributed file system, a second module for distributing and processing the packet traces stored in the distributed file system in a cluster of nodes executing Hadoop using a MapReduce method, and a third module for transferring the packet traces, stored in the distributed file system, to the second module so that the packet traces can be processed using the MapReduce method and outputting a result of analysis, calculated by the second module using the MapReduce method, to the distributed file system. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182892 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOW-LATENCY NETWORKING - Various aspects of a method and system for low-latency networking are provided. Latency requirements of traffic to be communicated along a network path comprising one or more Ethernet links may be determined. A maximum size of Ethernet frames utilized for communicating the traffic may be determined based on the latency requirements. The maximum size of the Ethernet frames may be determined based on a data rate of one or more Ethernet links along the network path. A single device may utilize different maximum packet sizes for different ports/links on which it communicates. One or more messages indicating the determined maximum size may be communicated among devices along the network path to coordinate maximum packet sizes. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182893 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING POWER OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Devices, systems and methods of controlling transmit power of a station are disclosed. The station is able to request for link management, to receive a response frame with an indication to decrease and/or to increase the transmit power and, if the transmit power is increased or decreased no later than a predefined time interval, the station sends a link adaptation acknowledgment with an indication to increase or decrease the transmit power. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182894 | WIRELESS RELAY MODULE FOR REMOTE MONITORING SYSTEMS - A wireless relay module for networked communications between a series of medical devices and a remote monitoring device. The relay module communicates with the remote monitoring device over one or more internet-accessible wireless communication networks, and includes a receiver, transmitter for communicating over wireless relay networks, other transmitters for the one or more internet-accessible wireless communications networks; and a controller. The controller determines a status of the one or more internet-accessible wireless communications networks. When the status indicates that at least one of the interne-accessible wireless communications network is available, the appropriate transmitter is selected for the transmitting medical device data over the available internet-accessible wireless communications networks. When internet-accessible wireless communications networks are not accessible, the appropriate wireless relay network transmitter is selected for transmitting the data to another wireless relay module. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182895 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Provided are apparatus and a method for transmitting and receiving channel state information. The apparatus for transmitting channel state information includes a resource demapper configured to extract at least one of data, a user equipment (UE)-specific reference signal, and a cell-specific reference signal from an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)-demodulated signal, a channel estimation unit configured to estimate a downlink channel on the basis of at least one of the UE-specific reference signal and the cell-specific reference signal, and a channel state information producer configured to produce at least one of a cell-specific channel quality indicator (CQI), a UE-specific CQI, and switched beam selection information on the basis of information on the estimated downlink channel. Accordingly, it is possible to efficiently perform channel adaptive transmission and beamforming-mode transmission in consideration of an actually reflected beamforming gain and interference cancellation gain. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182896 | INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USER EQUIPMENT HAVING MULTIPLE HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION MODULES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An interference measurement method and a user equipment supporting the method are provided. The method enables the user equipment having multiple heterogeneous communication modules for Long Term Evolution (LTE), WiFi, Bluetooth and Global Positioning System (GPS) to perform interference measurement so as to avoid coexistence interference. The user equipment may perform effective communication by identifying non-preferred frequency bands and avoiding coexistence interference caused by the heterogeneous communication modules. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182897 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK ENTRY IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - An apparatus and a method for manage network entry in a heterogeneous network (HetNet). In the method for network entry of a terminal in a HetNet, a base station access signal for network entry is transmitted to a serving base station. A response message is received from the serving base station. An uplink parameter is controlled based on an indication of the serving base station included in the response message. An access request message is generated and transmitted to the serving base station. A downlink response message including information regarding a selected serving base station is received from the serving base station. An access response message including information for network entry is received from the selected serving base station. A network entry procedure is performed with the selected serving base station. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182898 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK DATA VIA A RELAY - A method and system for transmitting downlink data via a relay, and a relay are provided by the present invention. The system includes an evolved node B and a relay. The evolved node B is set to determine power parameters of a terminal according to a downlink transmission power from the rely to the terminal, and to inform the terminal of the power parameters; the rely is set to perform the signal transmission to the terminal according to the downlink transmission power; the terminal demodulates the signal received from the evolved node B and/or the rely according to the power parameters. Application of the present invention enhances the transmission performance of the system, and resolves the problem of setting the transmission power for the relay node. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182899 | CQI TABLE FOR WIRELESS MIMO NETWORK - A Channel Quality Indicator table for wireless multiple input multiple output (MIMO) networks is disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of generating a table for channel quality indicator (CQI) for an open loop MIMO transmission includes calculating performance of a link between a transmitter and a user end unit for each MIMO transmission mode over a range of average signal-to-noise ratio, and selecting the MIMO transmission mode that maximizes performance for each subset of the range of average signal-to-noise ratio. The method further includes storing the selected MIMO transmission mode and the corresponding subset of the range of average signal-to-noise ratio in a CQI table, the CQI table being stored in an user end unit and a base transceiver station of the open loop MIMO network. | 07-19-2012 |
20120188881 | Adaptive Transmission Systems and Methods - Abstract Spatial multiplexing and transmit diversity can improve the capacity of a wireless communication system. The system and method adapts communication schemes for communication systems with multiple antennas utilizing at least two transmission modes. The at least two transmission modes can, but are not necessarily, used for uplink communications. The two transmission modes may be chosen from the group consisting of a single antenna mode, a diversity mode a spatial multiplexed mode and a mixed diversity and spatial multiplexed mode. The at least two transmission modes may involve adaptation among multiple transmitters. At least one receiver may indicate a transmission mode to be used by a transmitter for a subsequent transmission. A transmitter may determine a transmission mode to be used for a subsequent transmission. The transmission mode can be based on channel sounding. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188882 | Determining Mobile Video Quality of Experience and Impact of Video Transcoding - Video data packets transmitted through a wireless network are captured by a network monitoring system. Video data sessions are detected from the video data packets. Key parameters are identified within the video data packets, such as video bit rate, resent or failed video packets, and video session duration. A Quality of Experience (QoE) is determined for some or all users associated with the video sessions based upon the key parameters. A header extension is added to the video data packets by a transcoding system. The header extension includes data associated with original and transcoded video data packets. The network monitoring system monitors the header extension and evaluates the effect of video transcoding upon the overall QoE for users. The monitoring system provides feedback to a transcoding policy engine based upon the effect of transcoding upon QoE. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188883 | NEGOTIATED CHANNEL INFORMATION REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques to enhance the performance in a wireless communication system using CQI feedback optimized to support different scenarios. According to one aspect, an access terminal may select a CQI feedback table based on the access terminals capability. According to another aspect, an access point may select a CQI feedback table based on an access terminals capability, system loading and the type of service provided by the access point. An access point which provides services that require high data rates may select a larger CQI feedback table to support the high data rates for access terminals which support the larger CQI feedback table. The same access point may select a smaller CQI feedback table for access terminals which do not have the capability or need for the high data rate services. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188884 | METHOD AND A NETWORK NODE FOR DETERMINING AN OFFSET FOR SELECTION OF A CELL OF A FIRST RADIO NETWORK NODE - A method and network node ( | 07-26-2012 |
20120188885 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELF-ADAPTING DYNAMIC POWER REDUCTION MECHANISM FOR PHYSICAL LAYER DEVICES IN PACKET DATA NETWORKS - A physical layer (PHY) in a network device may provide self-adapting power reduction based on monitoring of activity associated with an interface between the PHY and remaining components of the network device. The power management operations of the PHY may then be configured and/or adjusted based on that monitoring. The PHY may comprise an Ethernet PHY, which may support energy efficient Ethernet (EEE) features. The monitored interface may comprise a Media Independent Interface (MII) based interface. In instances where the monitored activity comprises outbound traffic, outbound data received via the interface may be buffered when at least one subcomponent of the PHY that is operable to support transmission of the outbound traffic is unavailable due to the power management operations. The buffering may be configured to last to allow sufficient time to reactivate the at least one subcomponent. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188886 | Allocation Method for Physical Downlink Control Channel, Base Station and User Terminal - The present invention discloses a method for configuring a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH), a base station and a UE, wherein the base station configures a component carrier or component carriers for monitoring the PDCCH for the UE and notifies the UE about information on the configured component carrier or component carriers so that the UE monitors the PDCCH only over the configured component carrier or component carriers. Stated otherwise, in this way, the UE will operate only over a necessary component carrier or component carriers without monitoring respective component carriers in an LTE-A system to thereby reduce the number of concurrently monitored component carriers, and in the case of nonconsecutive component carriers, also reduce the number of consequently enabled receivers and consequently the amount of consumed power of the UE for monitoring the PDCCH. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188887 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a situation where a communication line is busy in a TCP communication, or in a situation where TCP data is continuously received, divided transmission of TCP-ACK is suppressed. A communication terminal includes a transmission standby frequency estimation unit | 07-26-2012 |
20120188888 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING THE DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION IN THE COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A method for controlling the downlink transmission and a device for the signal associated processing in the coordinated multi-point transmission system are provided, which relate to the mobile communication technology, for optimizing the downlink transmission control in the coordinated multi-point transmission system. The embodiment aims at the coordinated multi-point transmission system, and in the base station side according to the SINR1 level of the frequency domain resource block fed back by the user, the mating result of the user, the associated resource allocation result and the pretreatment weight value result, determines the Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level of the scheduled user channel to provide the accuracy of the MCS level, thus optimizing the downlink resource configurations, further increasing the throughput of the system. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188889 | DYNAMIC ENABLING AND DISABLING OF CLTD OPERATION VIA HS SCCH ORDERS - Apparatus and methods of wireless communication include configuring a closed loop transmit diversity (CLTD) operation between a User Equipment (UE) and an access node, detecting a condition of an uplink from the UE to the access node, and disabling CLTD operation by the UE based upon the condition. Optionally, the apparatus and methods may further include detecting that the condition of the uplink has ended, and in response enabling the CLTD operation. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188890 | RADIO WAVE STATE DISPLAY SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, ROUTER, RADIO WAVE STATE DISPLAY METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A user terminal comprises: a wireless quality measurement unit that works according to a first wireless communication method and measures wireless quality thereof at a predetermined time interval; and a radio wave state display unit that integrally displays a radio wave state from the user terminal to a base station based on both a wireless quality of a first wireless section and a wireless quality of a second wireless section where a second wireless communication method is used, the wireless quality of the second wireless section measured by a router. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188891 | Measuring Service Quality - A probe (PR) and a UDP responder (RESA, RESB, RESC) for measuring service quality in a data network. The UDP test packet comprises at least one header field in the packet payload for addressing the UDP packet. The probe (PR) sends the UDP packet to the first UDP responder (RESA). The first UDP responder (RESA) modifies the UDP packet header field and forwards the UDP packet to a second UDP responder (RESB) or returns the UDP packet to the probe (PR) based on the unmodified header field information. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188892 | NETWORK ABSTRACTION GATEWAY AND CORRESPONDING METHOD TO ABSTRACT AN ENDPOINT - A network abstraction gateway includes at least one abstracted network interface for connectivity with an abstracted network wherein a user has an abstracted endpoint having a first identity in the abstracted network; a communication system interface for connectivity with at least one user's communication system and exposing abstracted endpoint behavior via a second identity in the user's communication system; means adapted to register a one-to-one relationship between the first identity and the second identity; means for extracting behavior of the abstracted endpoint; and endpoint abstraction means adapted to abstract the abstracted endpoint in the user's communication system via an endpoint abstraction using the second identity. The endpoint abstraction is responsive to behavior of the abstracted endpoint and is adapted to implement at least one feature and/or state of the user's communication system and to bi-directionally map the behavior of the abstracted endpoint. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188893 | Communication Device, Computer Readable Recording Medium, Communication Method and Communication System - Determining and configuration a transmission period for a communication device may include transmitting measurement data to measure a relay period of a relay device in the network, where the relay period corresponds to an interval of relaying data to another communication device configured to connectable to network. Additionally, the communication device may receive result data indicative of the relay period of the relay device in response to the measurement data from the other communication device, determine the transmission period at which the communication device transmits data to the other communication device based on the relay period, and transmit data to the other communication device via the relay device based on the determined transmission period. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188894 | MULTICAST SCHEDULING AND LINK ADAPTATION - The invention relates to a method for transmitting multicast information from at least one transmitter (BS, Tx) to a plurality of receivers (UE | 07-26-2012 |
20120188895 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING LOCAL IP CONNECTIVITY FOR AN (E)NODEB - A system for supporting local IP connectivity for an (e)NodeB, the system including a mobile operator network with a PDN-Gateway or a GGSN, and at least one User Equipment (UE) that is associated with the (e)NodeB, is characterized in that a local gateway function (L-GW) is provided for the (e)NodeB, wherein an extension tunnel is established between the local gateway function (L-GW) and the PDN-Gateway or the GGSN of the mobile operator network. Furthermore, a corresponding system is disclosed. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188896 | NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD - Disclosed is a network apparatus and associated method configured to form a network of operative devices using, in a main embodiment, powerlines as the network medium. The network medium provides for communication of data between operative devices. The network apparatus comprises plural network node apparatus, each of which comprise a network connector and an operative device connector. At least one of the network node apparatus also comprises a power saving apparatus which provides less power to operative parts of the network node apparatus itself and the operative device to which the network node apparatus is attached during a second operating condition than when in a first operating condition, thereby providing for reduced power consumption in the second operating condition. The network node apparatus also comprises a processor which determines at least one quality of service requirement and to change between the first and second conditions accordingly so as to enable routing of data in accordance with the quality of service requirement, while minimizing power consumption of said network apparatus. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188897 | Terminal Access Method, System and Associated Devices - A terminal access method is disclosed. The method includes the following steps: the terminal receives an auxiliary synchronization signal sent by a base station on a transmission resource which is chosen from an uplink and used for transmitting downlink data; the terminal calculates transmission power according to the auxiliary synchronization signal; and the terminal sends a Random Access Channel (RACH) access preamble code to the base station according to the transmission power and performs a RACH access process. In this technical solution, the auxiliary synchronization signal is transmitted in a special sub-frame selected from the uplink, which makes it possible for the terminal to obtain the channel quality information of the uplink by receiving the auxiliary synchronization signal during a cell synchronization stage, and determine the transmission power according to the channel quality information of the uplink before the RACH process occurs, thereby reducing the step of adjusting the transmission power and shortening the time of the random access of the channel. A terminal access system and associated devices are also provided. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188898 | DETECTION OF FAILURES IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Determining a network transmitter that is more likely to cause handoff failures in a telecommunication service based on historical data records. The historical data records may be standard Call Data Records. A probability that a service provided by a first network transmitter will be handoffed to a second network transmitter is determined. An indication that a target network transmitter is overly busy is determined based on the number of failed services for each network transmitter that may handoff a service the target network transmitter and the probability that a service will be handoffed to the target network transmitter. Based on the indication, measures may be taken to increase quality level of the target network transmitter. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188899 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION TERMINAL AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a method for processing channel state information a terminal and a base station. The channel state information processing method includes: converting current channel state information into a current channel parameter frame; obtaining feedback information after performing frequency domain quantization and coding on the current channel parameter frame; and sending the feedback information to a base station. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188900 | MIMO BEAMFORMING METHOD AND METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING A DIFFERENTIAL CODEBOOK FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - A MIMO beamforming method comprises receiving at a base station information regarding a difference between an ideal beamforming matrix and an averaged beamforming direction, using the information to construct a beamforming matrix at the base station, and performing a beamforming operation using the reconstructed beamforming matrix. Alternatively, the method comprises computing at a subscriber station an averaged beamforming direction, computing at the subscriber station a quantization index corresponding to a differential matrix in a differential codebook, and transmitting the quantization index across a wireless channel of the wireless network. The differential codebook may be constructed by identifying a codebook center and transforming a predefined codebook that is stored in a memory of a component of the wireless network. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188901 | Time division duplex wireless network and associated method using connection modulation groups - A wireless network is provided that includes a base station and subscriber stations that communicate with the base station using radio frequency (RF) time division duplex (TDD) signaling. The base station may establish medium access control (MAC) connections with each station. The base station monitors communications with the stations and, in accordance, assigns stations or MAC connections to modulation groups. The base station transmits signals on MAC connections or to stations in a modulation group in adjacent TDD slots within a TDD frame. The base station may receive access requests from the stations, evaluate traffic requirements for the stations, and determine a longest downlink portion for the stations. The base station then allocates downlink and uplink portions of a TDD frame according to the length of the longest downlink portion. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188902 | CHANNEL SOUNDING TECHNIQUES FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique for channel sounding in a wireless communication system includes determining respective geometries of multiple subscriber stations with respect to a serving base station. Respective time periods for sounding a channel between the multiple subscriber stations and the serving base station are then set based on the respective geometries of the multiple subscriber stations. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188903 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO TERMINALS, RADIO BASE STATIONS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - Disclosed is a radio communication system wherein radio terminals can communicate using a plurality of component carriers having different frequencies. The communication system has a reception start timing control means for commonly controlling the cycle of reception start timing for predetermined channels in at least some of the component carriers assigned to the radio terminals; and a reception control means for controlling the reception interval of said predetermined channels, said reception intervals being started at the reception start times in at least some of the component carriers assigned to the radio terminals. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188904 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING COMP FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - Disclosed are a method for transmitting CoMP feedback information in a wireless communication system and a terminal apparatus using the same. Measured values of adjacent cells for performing a CoMP operation can be generated by using measured values defined in an existing LTE system. Consequently, the present invention doesn't need to define new measured values in a LTE-Advanced system. | 07-26-2012 |
20120195207 | Communication terminal, communication device, method for measuring a signal and method for requesting a measurement - A communication terminal is described comprising a transmitter configured to generate a transmit signal and a measurement circuit configured to receive the generated transmit signal and to measure the power of the received transmit signal in a predetermined frequency region. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195208 | PROGRAMMABLE MULTIFIELD PARSER PACKET - A method of operating a packet parser in a computing system includes providing a configurable packet pointer by the packet parser, the packet pointer configured to index a configurable number of atomic parsing elements, the atomic parsing elements having a configurable size, in a data stream received by the computing system for extraction, wherein the indexed atomic parsing elements are non-contiguous in the data stream; and receiving the extracted indexed atomic parsing elements from the data stream by the packet parser. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195209 | SYSTEM TO SHARE NETWORK BANDWIDTH AMONG COMPETING APPLICATIONS - The present invention pertains to the allocation of bandwidth on a global large scale network. Systems and methods are provided to base bandwidth allocation on the predicted bandwidth demands of the network users. In allocating bandwidth, each user is assigned a user weight value, and is to be allocated bandwidth in proportion to that value. In addition, the bandwidth allocation is enforced so as to ensure that bandwidth allocation policies are maintained. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195210 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COORDINATING FEMTO INTERFERENCE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method includes receiving interference information associated with a plurality of femto access points operating in a macro network; evaluating the interference information; determining that an interference threshold has been exceeded based on the interference information; and communicating signaling information to a particular femto access point to reduce an interference level based on the interference information. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195211 | Configuration of Wireless Receiver - This disclosure is directed to a wireless receiver and a method for configuring the wireless receiver, comprising the actions of determining a geometry factor for a channel over which signals are transmitted to the wireless receiver, the geometry factor being a measure indicative of inter-cell interference plus noise power at the wireless receiver; determining the variance of the determined geometry factor, the variance being a measure indicative of the variation in time or rate of the geometry factor; and configuring the wireless receiver based on the geometry factor and the variance of the geometry factor. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195212 | COOPERATIVE SENSING SCHEDULING FOR ENERGY-EFFICIENT COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORKS - Cooperative sensing scheduling and parameter designs are described, which can achieve improvements in energy efficiency in cognitive radio networks, for example. In addition, the disclosed subject matter describes an objective or reward function or policy related to energy efficiency and considerations such as channel assignments sensing time that can maximize the objective function. The disclosed details enable various refinements and modifications according to system design and tradeoff considerations. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195213 | Method and Equipment for Reporting Channel State Information Aperiodically - The disclosure discloses a method and device for reporting channel state information aperiodically. Wherein the method comprises: collecting the channel state information reported by the UE through the configured receiving window; determining the change speed degree of the channel state of the UE according to the criterion for determining a change speed of the channel state information; deciding whether the UE needs to perform aperiodic reporting according to the mapping relationship between the change speed degree of the channel state information and a reporting period adjusting value, and determining timing for the aperiodic reporting if needed. By the method of the disclosure, on one hand, the base station sufficiently obtains the channel state information reported by the UE, which benefits for more suitable scheduling and resource allocating for the UE; on the other hand, PUSCH resources can be used more rationally. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195214 | MULTITAPER SPECTRUM SENSING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Spectrum sensing methods and systems for detecting spectrum holes for use in cognitive radio secondary transmissions are disclosed. In one method, an indication of an assignment of a set of subcarriers to a primary user is received. The method further includes determining multitaper spectral estimates for at least a subset of the set of subcarriers based on the assignment of the set of subcarriers to the primary user by processing samples for the at least a subset of the set of subcarriers. In addition, a test statistic that is based on the multitaper spectral estimates is compared to a threshold to determine whether the set of subcarriers is utilized for primary transmissions to the primary user. Moreover, data signals are received on at least one of the subcarriers in the set of subcarriers if the set of subcarriers is not utilized for primary transmissions to the primary user. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195215 | INDOOR LOCATION MEASURING METHOD AND APPARATUS USING ACCESS POINT - Provided is an indoor location measuring method and apparatus. The indoor location measuring apparatus that measures a location of a communication terminal within a building by determining a floor where the communication terminal is located may include a floor classifying means for classifying information relating to a plurality of access points (APs) and collected by the communication terminal for each floor, and a location determining means for assigning a grade constant to each item of AP information classified for each floor based on the signal intensity included in the AP information, and for calculating the sum of the grade constants for each floor, and for determining a floor having the largest sum as a location of the communication terminal. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195216 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ADAPTIVE CHANNEL ACCESS - A base station and method for adaptive channel access in a wireless network are provided. The base station assigns a channel access scheme for providing channel access to service data, wherein at least a portion of the service data is assigned to one of a reserved shared channel access scheme and a superimposed channel access scheme based on one or more characteristics of the network and one or more requirements of the service data. Network resources are then allocated according to the assigned channel access scheme. The service data is then transmitted using the allocated resources. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195217 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device and methods are disclosed. A first throughput is calculated when a current modulation scheme and a current encoding rate is changed, and a second throughput is calculated when a current retransmission unit is changed. The current modulation scheme and the current encoding rate are changed to provide a changed modulation scheme and a changed encoding rate, if the first throughput is greater than or equal to the second throughput when prescribed conditions are met. The current retransmission unit is changed to provide a changed retransmission unit, if the first throughput is less than the second throughput. Information is transmitted to a communication device of a communication partner based on the changed modulation scheme, the changed encoding rate, and the changed retransmission unit. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195218 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DELIVERING PUSH MESSAGE - A system may deliver a push message to user equipment. The system may include a push notification server and a mobile communication core network. The push notification server may be configured to create and transmit a push message when a certain data is updated. The mobile communication core network may be configured to receive the push message from the push notification server, determine whether a user equipment associated with the push message is connected to a wireless local area network (WLAN) access network, and transmit the push message to the user equipment through at least one of a mobile communication radio access network and the WLAN access network based on the determination. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195219 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PRECODING BY LIMITED COOPERATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method are provided for precoding by limited cooperation in a wireless communication system. A method of data precoding by a Base Station (BS) in a wireless communication system includes determining a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) parameter indicating channel size information between the BS and a User Equipment (UE) served by the BS; transmitting the determined CQI parameter through a backhaul to a central unit; receiving, from the central unit, a weight factor based on a CQI parameter from each cell; and determining a precoding vector based on the weight factor. The weight factor represents a relative ratio of an inter-cell environment that is to be interfered by the BS. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195220 | Wireless Mesh Network and Method of Frequency Optimization - The present invention relates to a wireless mesh network and a method of frequency optimization comprising devices such as router over which the connection established with the other networks is routed, access points which act as a data transmission point in the network and client devices which use the network resources over access points; operate with the IEEE 802.11n standards compatibly and wherein the most appropriate channel is selected by monitoring the frequencies of the current and candidate channel on which the data transmission is carried out. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICES - A method and apparatus of resource management for multimedia broadcast multicast services (MBMS) are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) sends a measurement report and an MBMS reception performance report to a network. Single frequency network (SFN) area change may be made based on cell reselection information, WTRU macro-diversity MBMS reception performance, neighbor cell signal strength reported by a WTRU, interference level measured by the WTRU, a number of WTRUs in a cell, service priority, WTRU class, WTRU mobility trend, WTRU location to a cell center, WTRU MBMS reception interference level, etc. The MBMS service on/off decision and/or point-to-point (PTP) to point-to-multipoint (PTM) switching may be made based on a channel condition of a WTRU. The channel condition may be determined based on whether the WTRU is in in-sync or out-of-sync in MBMS reception, consecutive negative acknowledgements (NAKs) within a certain time window, measured pathloss from a reference channel, etc. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195222 | Verifiable and Accurate Service Usage Monitoring for Intermediate Networking Devices - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, an intermediary networking device provides a service intermediary or intermediate connection between a network and one or more communications devices; implements a service policy set for assisting control of the intermediate networking device use of a service on the network, in which the service policy set includes one or more service policies, each policy being associated with either the intermediate networking device or a communications device; and monitors use of the service based on the service policy set; and in which the one or more of the communication devices include a service usage notification capability, and the implementation of the first service policy set is verified. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195223 | Verifiable and Accurate Service Usage Monitoring for Intermediate Networking Devices - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, an intermediary networking device provides a service intermediary or intermediate connection between a network and one or more communications devices; implements a service policy set for assisting control of the intermediate networking device use of a service on the network, in which the service policy set includes one or more service policies, each policy being associated with either the intermediate networking device or a communications device; and monitors use of the service based on the service policy set; and in which the one or more of the communication devices include a service usage notification capability, and the implementation of the first service policy set is verified. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195224 | Methods and Devices for Uplink Diversity Transmission - Methods and devices are provided wherein a user equipment transmits using at least two uplink transmit antennas and receives a set of control signals in the downlink direction from a cellular network. The user equipment estimates a received signal quality for each control signal in said set of control signals and determines, based on said received signal quality, which control signals that have been reliably received. The user equipment derives one or more parameters related to the uplink transmit diversity operation using a subset of control signals from the set of control signals, said subset only including control signals determined as reliably received; and transmits in the uplink direction applying the derived one or more parameters to control the uplink transmit diversity operation. The accuracy of the transmit diversity parameter values derived/set by the UE can be improved. This will enhance the performance of the uplink transmit diversity and will also reduce interference to the neighbor cells. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195225 | METHOD FOR CHANNEL STATE MEASUREMENT IN MULTI-MODE MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORKS - The invention concerns a method for measuring channel state information of multiple transmission/reception modes in a wireless network comprising a plurality of nodes, said modes being defined by frequency channels and/or antenna patterns, said wireless network comprising a MAC (Media Access Control) layer and every node comprising at least one MAC queue, comprising the steps of: periodically sending broadcast probe packets by at least one node called transmitter node, using a pre-determined and globally known period and predetermined sequence of transmission modes, each of said probe packets containing the transmission mode used for its transmission a sequence number of the transmission mode in the pre-determined sequence of transmission modes and a timestamp value containing the time said broadcast probe packet was buffered at the MAC queue of the transmitter node; measuring, by at least one second node called receiving node receiving a broadcast probe packet, channel state information of a transmission/reception mode for the link between the transmitter node and the receiving node; storing, by said receiving node, said measured transmission/reception mode for said link; using information contained in said received broadcast probe packet, by said receiving node, to determine its reception mode and the beginning and end time instants it will use this reception mode, in order to receive a further broadcast probe packet and measure the next transmission mode of transmitter node, during a next measurement period of transmitter node. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195226 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communication System - Method and arrangement in a base station for adjusting a channel quality indicator value of a wireless transmission between the base station and a user equipment. The base station, the user equipment and a relay node are comprised in a multi-hop wireless communication system and adapted to intercommunicate in a first transmission mode and a second transmission mode. The method comprises sending a radio signal to be received by the user equipment, obtaining a measurement of the channel quality indicator value, determining if the transmission mode of the sent radio signal is different from the transmission mode of the obtained channel quality indicator value measurement, and adding a channel quality indicator offset value to the channel quality indicator value, if the transmission mode of the relay node is determined to be the first transmission mode while the channel quality indicator was measured and obtained in the second transmission mode. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201146 | MESH INFRASTRUCTURE UTILIZING PRIORITY REPEATERS AND MULTIPLE TRANSCEIVERS - A wireless mesh network, method, and processor-readable storage medium for using stand-alone repeaters that are designated as having priority over other communication nodes with respect to their service as repeaters are disclosed herein. According to various embodiments, a control node or collector builds a wireless mesh network by first establishing communication paths with the designated priority communication nodes and then with communication nodes that are not designated priority communication nodes. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201147 | METHODS FOR ACHIEVING TARGET LOSS RATIO - A method of forwarding data transmissions from a first network to a third network via a second network comprises receiving packets of a first type from the first network, segmenting each packet of a first type into packets of a second type, transmitting the packets of a second type to the second network, and producing and transmitting at least one encoded duplicate of each of the packets of a second type to the second network. The encoded duplicate packet allows a packet of the first type to be recreated in the event that not all the packets of the second type are received at the second network. In the event that a sufficient number of the packets of a second type and the encoded duplicate packets are not received to recreate the packet of a first type, the method determines a loss ratio that represents the number of packets not recreated relative to the number of packets transmitted during a selected time interval, dynamically adjusts the overhead required to produce the encoded duplicate packets to attempt to minimize the loss ratio, detects a significant increase in the determined loss ratio over a plurality of the time intervals, successively reduces the overhead required to produce the encoded duplicate packets in response to the detection of a significant increase in the determined loss ratio, and determines whether the reduced overhead requirement stabilizes the determined loss ratio and, if the answer is affirmative, terminates the successive reduction of the overhead requirement. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201148 | Method Of Managing User Traffic To Prevent Aggressive Users From Abusing Network Resources - In one embodiment, a plurality of queues are established corresponding to each of a plurality mobiles, respectively. Data packets associated with the plurality of mobiles are received at a network element. Each received data packet is assigned to a corresponding one of the plurality of queues. A determination operation is performed on a selected one of the plurality of queues to determine whether or not to send one or more packets of each queue from the network gateway element. The determination operation is performed based on a comparison between a packet size of a head packet and an adaptive transmission threshold value associated with the selected queue. The adaptive transmission threshold value is a value that is changed based on an amount data sent from the selected queue. The head data packet being an earliest received data packet in the selected queue. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201149 | Mitigation of Interfering Sounding Reference Signals in Radiocommunication Systems - Sounding reference signals transmitted in one cell, and which use a same base sequence as sounding reference signals transmitted in a neighboring cell, may cause interference. Detection of signal energy on unallocated sounding resources in a cell can be used when allocating additional sounding resources in that cell. Coordination among base stations, e.g., eNodeBs, can be performed to mitigate potential sounding reference signal interference. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201150 | EFFECTIVE METHOD OF MEASURING WIRELESS CONSUMER EXPERIENCE INSIGHTS - Apparatus and methods for measuring consumer experience through an optimal user panel within predetermined error rate, or any other categorization for wireless domain. The data is collected at the panel member's wireless device. Categorization of data is based on but not limited to, product groupings and market segments. To minimize the cost of the method while having the estimate of consumer experience within aforesaid error rates, the panel members are chosen such that they can provide the most informative data of usage for the parameters that effect consumer experience, such as wireless network usage, usage of applications, sequence thereof among others. The focal point of data collection will be to trace the failure rate in the wireless network, devices, application among others. Thus we can apply suitable statistical models of prediction, such as but not limited to Poisson distribution and Empirical Bayes technique. Thus an optimal and more accurate quantitative measure of the estimate is made. By providing for performance statistics of consumer experience, it can readily be determined if a performance problem is related to the device, to the network and can also compare various factors such as but not limited to service providers, software platforms on wireless devices, different market segments using the wireless devices. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201151 | Layer 2 ACK And NACK Status Reporting - A second timer is started upon sending a negative acknowledge status indicator. Sending of negative acknowledge status indicators is inhibited while the second timer is running, and un-inhibited/resumed upon expiry of the second timer. A first timer is started upon sending an acknowledge status indicator. Sending of acknowledge status indicators is inhibited while the first timer is running, and un-inhibited/resumed upon expiry of the first timer. The timer durations may be related but operation of the first timer and the second timer is independent of one another. In a specific example the first timer is an ACK status prohibit timer, the second timer is a NACK status prohibit timer, the acknowledge status indicator is a status PDU with ACK super-field, and the negative acknowledge status indicator is a status PDU with List, Bitmap, Relative List super-field. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201152 | INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Interference on pilot signals and on data tones can be mismatched. Different types of interference estimates perform differently based on how the mismatch occurs. The resulting interference estimate may thus be inaccurate. Interference estimates based on pilot signals and also on data tones can both be evaluated for reliability. The more reliable of the two can then be selected. If the data tones estimate is selected, the estimate can be calculated from covariance matrices or from traffic-to-pilot ratios. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201153 | ADAPTIVE TECHNIQUES FOR FULL DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS - In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include receiving a first analog radio frequency signal including a signal of interest and an interference signal caused by a second analog radio frequency signal transmitted in full duplex over a channel from which the first analog transmission is received; adjusting at least one of the first analog radio frequency signal and a portion of the second analog radio frequency signal to enable at least one of a reduction or an elimination of the interference signal in an output analog radio frequency signal; combining the first analog radio frequency signal and the portion of the second analog radio frequency signal to generate the output analog radio frequency signal characterized by at least the reduction or the elimination of the interference signal included in the output analog radio frequency signal; and providing the output analog radio frequency signal. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201154 | CSI Measurement, Reporting and Collision-Handling - This invention sets conditions for user equipment responses to channel state indicator request in channel station information that may conflict. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201155 | Channel Selection in Power Line Communications - Systems and methods for channel selection in power line communications (PLC) are described. In some embodiments, a method may include defining a plurality of frames, each frame having a plurality of time slots. The method may also include assembling a pair of beacon and bandscan packets within each of time slot of each frame. The method may further include sequentially transmitting each of the frames over a corresponding one of a plurality of different frequency bands. In some implementations, each bandscan packet may include a slot index indicating a position of its time slot within its respective frame and/or a band index indicating one of the plurality of different frequency bands. In response to having transmitted the plurality of frames, the method may include receiving one or more packets indicating a selection of one or more of the plurality of different frequency bands to be used in subsequent communications. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201156 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In a wireless communication device for performing plural wireless communications with different standards using the same frequency band, degradation of communication quality and communication speed due to communication interference is prevented, while drop in throughput and occurrence of frame loss are prevented. A first wireless communication section first performs wireless communication using a first frequency band and a second wireless communication section performs second wireless communication using a second frequency band with which at least a part of the first frequency band overlaps. The first wireless communication section analyzes a communication status signal which represents a signal pattern corresponding to communication status of the second wireless communication and then determines whether it is synchronous communication, and if it is, the first wireless communication section transmits/receives data in a non-communication period when communication in the synchronous communication is not performed, in synchronization with timing of the synchronous communication. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201157 | Power Management of User Equipment Located on a Femtocell Base Station - A method for managing power control of enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) uplink (UL) channels of at least one user equipment (UE) that is located on a femtocell base station (FBS), is provided herein. The method includes calculating, for the UE, a maximum dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH, power level. The method also includes lower, by the FBS, a DPCCH power level for the UE when the actual DPCCH power level is exceeding the maximum DPCCH power level for the UE. The lowering of the DPCCH power level is independent of a signal-to-interference (SIR) target for the FBS. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201158 | PEER-TO-PEER / WAN ASSOCIATION CONTROL AND RESOURCE COORDINATION FOR MOBILE ENTITIES USING AGGREGATE NEIGHBORHOOD UTILITY METRICS - In a cellular wireless communication system, peer-to-peer (P2P) links between mobile devices are implemented, and controlled using an aggregate utility metric for a group of P2P and cellular links. A mobile node participating in a P2P link, or an eNB, may periodically broadcast an activity level indicator indicating a resource-dependent activity level of the link. The node may control the activity level in response to utility metrics received from members of neighboring P2P links to maximize an aggregate utility of the link and the neighboring P2P links sharing at least a subset of resources of a common frequency spectrum. Formation or termination of P2P links may be controlled in response to comparing a calculated achievable utility value to a current utility value of a link, and taking action calculated to maximize the aggregate utility value. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201159 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A base station includes a radio communication unit, a resource adjustment unit, a resource division unit and a detection unit. The resource adjustment unit determines radio resources to be allocated to a downlink communication from a radio resource region shared with another base station. The resource division unit limits, to a first radio resource segment which is a part of the radio resource region, radio resources in response to estimating that communication quality of the downlink communication using the limited first radio resource segment is improved over the communication quality of the first downlink communication when using the entire range of the radio resource region that is shared with the other base station. The detection unit detects execution of resource division by the other base station for limiting radio resources used for another downlink communication between the other base station and a mobile station to a second radio resource segment. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201160 | ASSIGNING MOBILE USERS IN A HALF-FREQUENCY DIVISION DUPLEX (HFDD) SYSTEM TO UPLINK (UL) SUB-FRAMES AND TO DOWNLINK (DL) SUB-FRAMES - Methods assigning mobile users in a half-frequency division duplex (HFDD) system to first and second UL groups of an uplink (UL) sub-frame, and to first and second UL groups of a downlink (DL) sub-frame, where the UL sub-frame has a first carrier frequency and the DL sub-frame has a second carrier frequency, are disclosed. One method includes determining a type of data, a receive CINR (carrier interference plus noise ratio), and a Doppler frequency parameter, for a plurality of mobile users. The mobile users to are assigned to the first UL group, second UL group, first DL group and second DL group based on time durations of the first UL group, second UL group, first DL group and second DL group, and at least one parameter of the determined parameters of the mobile users. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201161 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE DETECTION, TRANSMISSION AND ANALYSIS OF SAFETY-RELATED SIGNALS - The invention relates to a method and a system for detecting, transmitting, and analyzing at least one safety-related signal (S | 08-09-2012 |
20120201162 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of mitigating inter-cell interference in a wireless communication system are provided. A user equipment receives serving-cell data over a first data channel indicated by a first control channel for which decoding is successful by monitoring a plurality of candidate control channels in a search space of a serving cell. The user equipment receives interfering-cell data over a second data channel indicated by a second control channel for which decoding is successful by monitoring a plurality of candidate control channels in a search space of an interfering cell. The A user equipment cancels interference from the interfering cell by processing the serving-cell data and the interfering-cell data. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201163 | Efficient Use of Reference Signal Symbol Resources in a Hierarchical Heterogeneous Cell Deployment - Techniques for collecting channel-state-information, CSI, feedback in a wireless network that comprises a plurality of geographically separated transmission points ( | 08-09-2012 |
20120201164 | Distribution Of Cell-Common Downlink Signals In A Hierarchical Heterogeneous Cell Deployment - A high-power point ( | 08-09-2012 |
20120201165 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK DATA IN A MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method of transmitting feedback data in a multiple antenna system comprises receiving a request message of feedback data on a downlink channel, the request message comprising uplink scheduling information, selecting a set of M (M≧1) subbands within a plurality of subbands, generating the feedback data, the feedback data comprising a frequency selective PMI (precoding matrix indicator), a frequency flat PMI, a best band CQI (channel quality indicator) and a whole band CQI, and transmitting the feedback data on a uplink channel allocated to the uplink scheduling information. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201166 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATORS (CQIs) - A method and apparatus for sending and receiving channel quality indicators (CQIs) is disclosed. A CQI may be sent or received periodically. A CQI may also be sent or received upon request by a network. | 08-09-2012 |
20120207032 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COEXISTENCE BASED ON TRANSCEIVER CHAIN EMPHASIS - Methods and apparatus for reduction of interference between a plurality of wireless interfaces. In one exemplary embodiment, a device having a first (e.g., Wi-Fi) interface and a second (e.g., Bluetooth) interface monitors interference between its interfaces. A reduction in transmit power of the Wi-Fi module causes a disproportionately larger reduction in undesirable interference experienced at the Bluetooth antennas. For example, when the Bluetooth interface detects interference levels above acceptable thresholds, the Wi-Fi interface adjusts operation of one or more of its transmit chains based on various conditions such as duty cycle, Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI), etc. Various embodiments of the present invention provide simultaneous operation of WLAN and PAN interfaces, without requiring time division coexistence, by reducing power on a subset of interfering antennas. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207033 | Shared Band Deployment Support Function For Connection Establishment - A network support node collects information about unlicensed spectrum in use by a first access node; and provides at least some of the information to a user equipment via a second access node which utilizes licensed spectrum. In various exemplary embodiments: the information is collected via an interface between the first access node and the support node which does not pass through the second access node; the support node sends a query for the information when previously collected information is outdated; the support node sends to the first access node a preferred set of whitespace channels and/or virtual channelization; and the support node sends parameters for either/both access nodes to report on the unlicensed spectrum. Example parameters are: frequency/bandwidth range for the unlicensed spectrum in use by the first access node, and/or frequency range for a common control channel transmitted by the first access node in the unlicensed spectrum. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207034 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTS OF NON-NETWORK ELEMENTS ON THE SUBSCRIBER EXPERIENCE IN A MOBILE NETWORK - Various methods, systems, and computer program products are disclosed for determining effects of non-network elements on a subscriber experience. For example, a method may include receiving traffic data. In some implementations of the invention, the method may include associating the traffic data with one or more non-network elements, which may operate on the mobile network but are not part of an infrastructure of the mobile network. The method may include determining a subscriber experience for the one or more non-network elements based on the traffic data that is associated with the one or more non-network elements. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207035 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTS OF NON-NETWORK ELEMENTS ON NETWORK RESOURCE UTILIZATION IN A MOBILE NETWORK - Various methods, systems, and computer program products are disclosed for determining effects of non-network elements on resource utilization. According to various implementations of the invention, a method may include receiving traffic data. The method may include associating the network traffic data with a non-network element, which may operate on the mobile network but are not part of an infrastructure of the mobile network. The method may include determining a first communication procedure used by the one or more non-network elements based on the associated network traffic data. The method may include determining a utilization of network resources by the one or more non-network elements based on the first communication procedure. The network may further include determining a change in the utilization of network resources based on a second communication procedure. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207036 | Indicating Status of Radio Resources in Wireless Network - Methods and apparatuses for indicating status of radio resources in a wireless network are provided. A requesting device transmits a resource request on a first radio channel to a responding device. The resource request includes a request to reserve the first radio channel between the requesting device and the responding device. The responding device transmits a resource response on the first radio channel in response to the resource request. The resource response comprises status information indicative of status of at least one second radio channel not requested to be reserved by the requesting device. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207037 | PARTITIONING RESOURCES WITH SOFT REUSE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods are disclosed for reusing resources of a wireless network. Radio communications resources of the wireless network are divided into partitions. A system described herein allows access to resources in the first partition by a first set of users for primary communications on the first partition, and allows access to resources in the first partition by a second set of users for secondary communications on the first partition. The control system also allows access to resources in the second partition by the second set of users for primary communications on the second partition, and allows access to resources in the second partition by the first set of users for secondary communications on the second partition. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207038 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHODS FOR OPERATING THEREOF - According to an embodiment, a communication terminal is described comprising two radio communication modules and a controller configured to, in response to the reception of a request for starting communication using the second radio communication module, perform at least one of requesting from a communication device to perform reception quality measurements of signals received from the first radio communication module if the first radio communication module is transmitting signals to the communication device; and performing reception quality measurements of signals received from the communication device by the first radio communication module if the first radio communication module is receiving signals from the communication device. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207039 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VALIDATING NETWORK TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION IN A BLADE SERVER - A system and method for validating network traffic routing within a blade chassis, involving generating a first packet for sending to a first packet receiver by a first route; inserting a first session identifier into a payload of the first packet, where the first session identifier identifies a first session of the first packet receiver; sending the first packet to a packet classifier; sending a first copy packet to a first expect queue, where the first copy packet is a duplicate of the first packet; receiving the first packet by the packet classifier; classifying the first packet by the packet classifier to obtain a first classified packet; extracting the first session identifier from the first classified packet to obtain a first extracted session identifier; and determining whether the first extracted session identifier matches the first session identifier. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207040 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IN-DEVICE INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Methods and apparatus for mitigating in-device interference are described. The methods may include an in-device interference event (e.g. an interference situation), and the processing of events may depend on the priority of the technologies. A handover to another frequency or radio access technology (RAT) may occur in case a co-existing technology may be activated. The network may signal to the device a list of frequencies or RATs that it may be allowed to measure and handoff to. A network may provide a scaling value that the device may use to speed up reaction to the interference. The device may apply a scaling factor to an “out of synch’ counter and/or the radio link failure (RLF) timer used for the RLF procedure. The device may apply different scaling factors for the measurements and time to trigger events. The device may trigger a report to the network requesting gaps for an alternate RAT. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207041 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TAGGING CLIENT/NETWORK INFORMATION IN HEADERS OF DATA PACKETS - A system and method for tagging client/network information in mobile data packet traffic intercepts a data packet from a wireless mobile device, which includes client-related information embedded in a header of the data packet, at a mobile access network. The client-related information is then extracted from the data packet for processing. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207042 | METHOD FOR HANDLING TERMINALS IN A NETWORK - Method for handling terminals in a network using VAMOS technology which performs a “virtual” pairing of the terminal with a simulated call. The method comprises the steps of generating a VAMOS support database with terminal information of terminals in the network; checking in the VAMOS support database for an entry corresponding to terminal information of a given terminal; if no entry is found in the VAMOS support database, pairing the terminal with a simulated call, launched by the network, in a VAMOS channel; measuring at least one indicator parameter of the terminal during the pairing with the simulated call; assigning an entry in the VAMOS support database indicating the applicability of the terminal with VAMOS technology; and allowing VAMOS channelization for the terminal in dependence upon the entry corresponding to the given terminal. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207043 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING CHANNEL AND INTERFERENCE ESTIMATIONS IN MACRO/RRH SYSTEM - Aspects disclosed herein relate to channel and interference estimations in a multiple transmission point environment including an eNB and RRHs. In the disclosed aspects, one or more transmission points can signal to a UE to measure channel state conditions based on a first and a second resource pattern. The UE may receive the signaling and perform interference estimation based at least in part on the first resource pattern, and channel estimation based at least in part on the second resource pattern. The UE may generate a channel state report based on the interference and channel estimations, and transmit the channel state report to a transmission point. The eNB may employ the received channel state report in scheduling one or more resources for use by the UE, and may select or adjust network traffic on the first and the second resource pattern, to affect the resulting channel and interference estimation. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207044 | Method of UE RSRQ Measurement Precaution for Interference Coordination - A method of UE RSRQ measurement precaution for interference coordination is provided. The UE receives radio signals of a neighbor cell under measurement. The neighbor cell applies a TDM silencing pattern for inter-cell interference coordination (TDM ICIC). The UE determines a measurement pattern that includes multiple subframes. The UE performs RSRQ measurements of the cell over multiple subframes and obtains multiple RSRQ measurement samples. The UE derives RSRQ measurement result by estimating the multiple RSRQ samples and applying a weighted average. RSRQ samples estimated to be more applicable are taken into account to more extent (e.g., applied with more weight), and/or RSRQ samples estimated to be less applicable are taken into account to less extent (e.g., applied with less weight, or discarded with zero weight). With UE precaution, a more predictable RSRQ measurement result is produced. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207045 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLOSED LOOP TRANSMIT DIVERSITY TRANSMISSION INITIAL ACCESS - Uplink precoding in closed loop transmit diversity (CLTD). The methods and apparatus relate to precoder operations during an initial stage using default precoder tap weights, and a second stage wherein precoder weights obtained from a precoder control indicator channel information are used, provided the signal quality of the precoder control indicator channel is sufficiently reliable. The methods and apparatus also relate to procedures for responding to detection of an unreliable pre-coding control information (PCI) carried in a downlink feedback signal. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207046 | METHOD FOR MONITORING A NETWORK AND NETWORK INCLUDING A MONITORING FUNCTIONALITY - A method for monitoring a network, wherein the network has a connected graph topology, in particular a tree structure, including a plurality of monitoring nodes that collect network measurement data, a plurality of mediator nodes each performing at least the task of aggregating network measurement data received from different monitoring nodes and/or other mediator nodes, and at least one root entity that receives network measurement data and/or aggregated network measurement data from the mediator nodes, is characterized in that the aggregation of network measurement data is performed by condensing network measurement data into a summarized probabilistic data structure. Furthermore, a network including a monitoring functionality is disclosed. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207047 | Priority Rules of Periodic CSI Reporting in Carrier Aggregation - A method of determining priority rules for periodic CSI reporting in carrier aggregation is proposed. A UE obtains channel state information (CSI) feedback for multiple downlink component carriers (CCs) in a multi-carrier wireless communication network. Each downlink CC is associated with a feedback mode, and each feedback mode comprises a set of feedback types to be reported to a base station at time slots configured by an upper layer. The UE then determines a prioritized downlink CC for CSI reporting based on priority levels of the feedback types to be transmitted for each downlink CC at a given time slot. The UE then transmits the corresponding CSI feedback for the prioritized downlink CC at the given time slot via a feedback channel over a primary uplink CC. In one embodiment, different feedback types are prioritized by groups, and each group has several feedback types sharing the same priority. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207048 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DOWN LINK INTERFERENCE CANCELATION BETWEEN ADJACENT BASE STATIONS IN BASE STATION WITH RECONFIGURABLE ANTENNA - A transmit antenna pattern is provided. A method for determining the transmit antenna pattern includes determining first Signal to Interference and Noise Power Ratios (SINRs) of a first mobile station and a second mobile station based on first Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) values received from a first base station and a second base station in the first operation when a transmit antenna pattern of the first base station is fixed and a transmit antenna pattern of the second base station is changed, determining second SINRs of the first mobile station and the second mobile station based on second CQI values received from the first base station and the second base station when the transmit antenna pattern of the first base station is changed and the transmit antenna pattern of the second base station is changed, and determining a transmit antenna pattern exhibiting the best performance based on the determined SINRs. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207049 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING HYBRID NETWORK, AND GATEWAY APPARATUS, WIRELESS TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A method for accessing a hybrid network and a gateway communication system are disclosed. The method comprises: sensing by a gateway apparatus a relay request slot on a downlink common control channel of the wide area network; transmitting by a wireless terminal a relay request signal requesting to relay a data packet to be transmitted, in the relay request slot on the downlink common control channel; and if the relay request signal from the wireless terminal is sensed in the relay request slot, establishing by the gateway apparatus a connection with the wireless terminal in a distributed network environment. As such, the gateway apparatus accesses the wireless distributed network only when the surrounding wireless terminals require data relay, without sensing signals on both networks simultaneously. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207050 | Method and device for multi-user beamforming based on a frequency division duplex system - The present invention discloses an FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) system based multi-user beamforming method and device. In the method, when two or more user terminals are at respective AOAs (Angles of Arrival), a transmit weight of a downlink signal of each user terminal is determined by using a null-widening algorithm, and the transmit weight is stored in a network side, the network side groups the user terminals based on AOA information reported by the user terminals, a corresponding transmit weight for the downlink signal of each user terminal in each group is selected based on the AOA information of the user terminals in the group, and the selected transmit weight is transmitted after multiplying it by a downlink data stream of the user terminal corresponding to the transmit weight. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207051 | CHANNEL QUALITY MEASUREMENTS FOR DOWNLINK RESOURCE ALLOCATION - A method for reporting channel quality from a user equipment (UE) to a base station is described. The UE derives a channel quality for each of a plurality of downlink resources. The UE transmits channel quality reports in a pattern of time intervals by rotating through the plurality of downlink resources in different time intervals of the pattern, wherein a channel quality report is not transmitted by the UE in each time interval of a frame. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207052 | CONTROL AND DATA MULTIPLEXING IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus are provided for a base station to assign to a UE communicating with the base station a number of coded control information symbols being transmitted with coded data information symbols during a transmission time interval by the UE. At least one offset value is assigned to the UE. A size of data is assigned to the UE. The base station transmits information regarding the at least one offset value to the UE. The base station transmits information regarding the size of data to the UE. The number of coded control information symbols assigned to the UE for transmission of control information is determined based on the size of data and the at least one offset value. The control information includes at least one of CQI, ACK/NAK, PMI, and RI. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207053 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING POWER SAVINGS ON MOBILE DEVICES - Various embodiments for providing enhanced power savings in mobile computing devices are described. In one or more embodiments, a mobile computing device may include a motion sensor to detect when the device is in motion. The mobile computing device may include a radio processor that may select from among several signal search procedures based on whether the device is in motion, and whether a signal is detectable and adequate. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207054 | RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio base station eNB according to the present invention includes: a CQI reception unit | 08-16-2012 |
20120207055 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION TO TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CoMP TRANSMISSION - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system having at least one base station utilizing CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point) transmission, wherein a terminal receives a reference signal from said at least one base station. If said at least one base station makes a transmission based on said reference signal through Coordinated beamforming (CB), information based on PMI (Precoding Matrix Index) corresponding to each base station is determined. Accordingly, if said at least one base station makes a transmission based on joint processing, phase set information is determined for phase correction of the formed beam. Thus, the present method transmits feedback information, comprising PMI set information based on CB and said phase set information, from said at least one base station to a server base station. | 08-16-2012 |
20120213094 | PLUG-AND-PLAY NETWORK FILTER - A method of configuring an appliance to be a plug-and-play network filter includes the steps of configuring an appliance to alter the flow of network traffic when the appliance is connected to a network. The appliance is configured to change the address resolution protocol ARP so that it assumes the role of a router by issuing an ARP packet. The appliance is configured to establish itself between the router and end user terminals. The appliance is configured to respond to any ARP Request on the Gateway IP address. The appliance is configured to monitor Internet traffic, and filter certain predefined types of Internet traffic. The appliance is configured to transparently proxy web packets on TCP with destination port 80. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213095 | IQ Imbalance Image Compensation in Multi-Carrier Wireless Communication Systems - A method in a wireless communication terminal includes receiving an aggregated carrier including a first component carrier and a second component carrier, determining a level of interference from a signal received on the first component carrier to a signal on the second component carrier based on a signal characteristic of the first component carrier and a signal characteristic of the second component carrier, and providing signal interference information to a serving base station if the determined interference level satisfies a condition. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213096 | IQ Imbalance Image Compensation in Multi-Carrier Wireless Communication Systems - A method in a wireless communication terminal includes receiving an aggregated carrier including a first component carrier and a second component carrier, measuring leakage of a reference signal from the first component carrier onto the second component carrier, receiving a signal on the aggregated carrier, and compensating for leakage of the signal from the first component carrier to the second component carrier based on the measurement of the leakage of the reference signal. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213097 | Method And Apparatus For Improved Multicast Service Using Feedback Mobiles - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved multicast operation. In one method, a mobile device receives a multicast packet from a station, the mobile device being one of a plurality of mobile devices that includes a group of feedback mobile devices. The mobile device transmits an indication that it is volunteering to become a member of the group of feedback mobile devices and determines whether to begin operating as a member of the group of feedback mobile devices. If the mobile device is to begin operating as a member of the group of feedback mobile devices, the mobile device transmits an indication of channel quality and/or a level of interference observed by the mobile device. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213098 | Real-time and synchronization Internet of things analyzer System Architecture - The Internet of things needs using the self-configuring wireless sensors network to interconnect all things. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213099 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY ADAPTING A MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME - The invention is directed to a method for dynamically adapting a modulation and coding scheme for a base station transmitting a multicast-and-broadcast service to a plurality of subscribers. The method comprises periodically performing a transmission adapting process. The transmission adapting process comprises steps of setting a feedback condition according to a coverage corresponding to the multicast-and-broadcast service and sending a negative-acknowledge-based feedback query including the feedback condition, a feedback channel and feedback information corresponding to the multicast-and-broadcast service to the subscribers. According to a feedback-receiving status, the base station adapts a modulation and coding scheme for transmitting the multicast-and-broadcast service. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213100 | METHOD FOR SELECTING TRANSMISSION ARCHITECTURE AND TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A method for a transmission system selecting one of a plurality of transmission architectures to transmit a multicast-and-broadcast service is provided. The transmission system comprises at least one base station participating the transmission of the multicast-and-broadcast service. The method comprises recording a number of subscribers for subscribing the multicast-and-broadcast service within the coverage range of each of the base stations. According to the subscriber number and the number of the base stations, each of the transmission architectures is mapped to average cell efficiency. The average cell efficiency of each of the transmission architectures is analyzed. The transmission architecture corresponding to the maximum average cell efficiency is selected for the transmission system transmitting the multicast-and-broadcast service. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213101 | RELAY, METHOD OF RELAYING, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay device that relays a wireless signal between a transmission device and a reception device, includes: a receiver that receives the wireless signal from the transmission device; a transmitter that transmits, to the reception device, the received wireless signal subjected to processing via a first protocol that amplifies the received wireless signal or a second protocol that decodes and re-encodes data contained in the received wireless signal; and a controller that switches between the first protocol and the second protocol using an evaluating index including a first evaluating value related to transmission environment between the transmission device and the relay device and a second evaluating value related to transmission environment between the relay device and the reception device. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213102 | WIRELESS STATION, INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE METHOD, AND SYSTEM FOR INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE - A wireless station in a second communication system, with at least a portion of a first frequency band used in a first communication system and a portion of a second frequency band used in the second communication system being shared or neighboring, the wireless station including a waveform characteristic quantity extracting unit that extracts a waveform characteristic quantity which shows a statistical characteristic of a signal received from the first communication system; a communication parameter determining unit that determines communication parameters to be used for the wireless station in the second communication system depending on a determination result of whether the extracted waveform characteristic quantity is of a predetermined waveform characteristic quantity for reducing an interference; and a transmission and reception unit that transmits and receives a wireless communication signal in the second communication system in accordance with the determined communication parameters. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213103 | METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR PACKET CONTENT TRANSLATION - The disclosure provides a method and a network device for packet content translation, wherein the network device comprises: a packet analyzing unit, a packet comparing unit, and a calculating unit, and the method comprises: providing a packet content translation criteria table; obtaining characteristic information of a packet; comparing the characteristic information of the packet with the packet content translation criteria table to determine whether a corresponding match entry is found in the packet content translation criteria table; and using the calculating unit to perform a packet content translation for the packet according to a packet processing mode indicated by the corresponding match entry. The method and the network device for packet content translation of the disclosure can reduce resource requirement for network equipments. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213104 | APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING POWER AND METHOD THEREOF - A power adjusting apparatus communicating with a remote terminal is provided. The apparatus includes: a transceiving unit transmitting a plurality of test packets by a plurality of powers; a processing unit coupled to the transceiving unit, and deciding a transmission power for transmitting a subsequent packet according to at least one retransmission number of transmitting the test packets. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213105 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR POSITIONING A WIRELESS DEVICE - The present invention relates to a method in a network node | 08-23-2012 |
20120213106 | INTERCONNECTED RADIO NETWORK - A method for establishing and operating a wireless, packet switching data transmission network can be performed by a network in which: an omnidirectional module sends request information containing the station number of a first radio station to other radio stations in the range of reception thereof after having switched on said first radio station, and in which the radio stations receiving the request information send response information containing their respective station numbers to the first radio station, and in which the first radio station sends connection requests to those radio stations from which it has received response information, and in which the first radio station uses its directional radio module to establish a directional radio link for transmitting data packets in the mesh network to the directional radio module of at least one second radio station which has responded positively to the connection request. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213107 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A signal measurement method and a device for comparing measurement results of a serving cell and a neighbor cell in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes receiving a resource restriction pattern including first pattern information that indicates specific subframes to be restricted in measurement of the serving cell, measuring the neighbor cell at a first frequency band, measuring, if a predetermined condition is met, the serving cell applying the first pattern information, and measuring, if the predetermined condition is not met, the serving cell without applying the first pattern information and performing evaluation by comparing a serving cell measurement result obtained from measurement of the serving cell with a neighbor cell measurement result obtained from measurement of the neighbor cell. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213108 | RADIO RESOURCE MONITORING (RRM) AND RADIO LINK MONITORING (RLM) PROCEDURES FOR REMOTE RADIO HEAD (RRH) DEPLOYMENTS - Wireless networks may include remote radio heads (RRHs) for extending the coverage of a macro cell. The macro cell may be connected to the RRHs, for example, by optical fiber, and there may be negligible latency between the macro cell and the RRHs. RRH deployment with different cell specific RS transmissions may create many cell edges, which may present challenges in idle state mobility. Certain aspects of the present disclosure may utilize coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmissions for idle user equipment (UE) support and, in some aspects, may introduce new radio link monitoring (RLM) techniques. As a result, the techniques presented herein may help achieve better idle mode performance and/or better RLM performance. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213109 | DISCOVERY REFERENCE SIGNAL DESIGN FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT OPERATIONS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques that may be used to discover transmission points in heterogeneous networks (HetNet) that involves coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission and reception. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213110 | COMMUNICATION CHANNEL SELECTION DEVICE, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A communication channel selection device, method and computer program product select a wireless communication channel among a plurality of communication channels with partially overlapping bandwidths in a frequency range available for use by an access point. A channel detector detects a busy channel used by another access point different from the access point. A signal strength detector detects a received signal strength of a wireless radio wave output from the another access point in the busy channel detected by the channel detector. A channel selector checks for a presence of a non-interfering channel that does not interfere with the detected busy channel, and when the channel selector does not detect the presence of the non-interfering channel, the channel selector selects the communication channel to be used by the access point based on the received signal strength of the wireless radio wave output in the busy channel. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213111 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - A base station is provided with a reference signal for channel state measurement generation part that generates a reference signal for channel state measurement for a mobile terminal to measure a channel state, and transmission antenna parts, that transmit reference signal for channel state measurements to the mobile terminal with each transmission antenna port. The mobile terminal is provided with reception antenna parts, that receive the reference signal for channel state measurements transmitted from the base station in reception antenna ports, and a feedback information generation part which measures a channel state between the transmission antenna port and the reception antenna port based on the received reference signal for channel state measurement to calculate a channel state estimation value, performs grouping on a plurality of channel state estimation values, and generates feedback information for the base station. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213112 | METHOD FOR MEASURING SENSITIVITY OF DATA PACKET SIGNAL RECEIVER - Methods for measuring the sensitivity of a data packet signal receiver are provided by varying the power level or modulation or both of a received data packet signal in a predetermined controlled sequence of data packet signals. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213113 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING CHANNEL MEASUREMENT - A method and an apparatus for implementing channel measurement are disclosed in the present invention. The method includes: determining an antenna port subset, which is required to be measured, for a UE according to current state information of the user equipment UE; and informing the UE to perform channel measurement for the subset of antenna ports that is required to be measured and feed back channel state information. Through the present invention, when the state information of the UE meets a certain condition, the UE measures only the reference signals of a part of antenna ports, and feeds back channel state information for this part of antenna ports. Therefore, the overhead generated by the feedback of the UE to the channel state information is reduced. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213114 | ADAPTIVE QUALITY OF SERVICE POLICY FOR DYNAMIC NETWORKS - A close-loop quality of service system is provided that collects real-time network performance indicators at the physical, data link and network layers. Using those indicators, the system dynamically controls the network traffic in order to achieve improved performance according to the priority and policy defined by a data user or system/network administrator. Several features of this quality of service system includes (1) dynamic maximum bandwidth reallocation, (2) dynamic maximum packet sizing, (3) adaptive policing, and/or (4) real-time link status feedbacks to make more efficient use of available bandwidth and adjust to transmission requirements. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213115 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION METHOD AND DEVICE IN A MULTI-ANTENNA SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a channel estimation method and device in a multi-antenna system. The method includes: obtaining the original channel estimation value of each array element of an array antenna for each uplink user received by the antenna; converting them into a channel estimation matrix; dividing the channel estimation matrix into an amplitude matrix and a phase matrix; grouping the elements of each array element at the same tap location in the amplitude matrix together for signal transformation processing and performing transform domain noise reduction to the high-frequency portion of the obtained transform domain data; inversely transforming the noise-reduced data to a noise-reduced amplitude matrix; and combining the noise-reduced amplitude matrix with the phase matrix into a restored channel estimation matrix, wherein the amplitude of each channel estimation value of the restored channel estimation matrix has undertaken a multi-antenna transform domain noise reduction process. | 08-23-2012 |
20120218906 | Method and apparatus for physical layer link adaptation based on traffic properties - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a method, including receiving data for transmission over a physical link, acquiring information about the data transmission, setting physical layer link adaptation parameters for the transmission based on the acquired information, wherein the setting includes adjusting the physical layer link adaptation parameters separately for transmission in an application data transfer direction and an application feedback direction. Also, the present invention provides a correspondingly adapted device and computer program product. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218907 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COORDINATED DISCOVERY OF THE STATUS OF NETWORK ROUTES BY HOSTS IN A NETWORK - Systems and methods for coordinated discovery of the status of network routes by hosts in a network. A plurality of host devices is connected to at least one of a plurality of egress devices. Each of the plurality of host devices is assigned to at least one cluster group. A cluster group may include one or more host devices connected to a common egress device. A master node is selected from the members of each cluster group. The master node coordinates the issuance of probe messages from the master node and other members of the cluster group to the common egress device. The probes provide the status of a network route to and through the common egress device. The master node makes the status available to the members of the cluster group. A member of the cluster group may obtain the status by communicating with the master node or by communicating with other members of its cluster group. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218908 | System and Method for Finding Important Nodes in a Network - Techniques for optimizing steady state flow of a network are provided. The techniques include determining a first set of two or more nodes in a network, computing a steady-state flow probability of the first set of two or more nodes, and iteratively interchanging nodes from a second set of two or more nodes into the first set of two or more nodes to determine an optimum total steady state flow of the network, wherein determining an optimum total steady-state flow of the network comprises iteratively interchanging nodes until no additional improvements in steady-state flow over the computed steady-state flow probability can be obtained. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218909 | STORAGE MEDIUM STORING INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING CONNECTION REQUESTS TO ESTABLISH CONNECTION TO ACCESS POINTS FROM A PLURALITY OF PROGRAMS - An information processing program for controlling an information processing apparatus capable of executing at least first and second programs in parallel is provided. The information processing program includes: reception instructions for receiving a connection request for connection to an access point from the first and/or second program(s); determination instructions for comparing information of the received connection request with information of connection status to the access point, and thereby determining whether or not that one of the first and second programs which made the connection request is to be connected to the access point; and connection processing instructions for performing a process for connecting the program that made the connection request to the access point, based on the result of determination. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218910 | Multicast Support for Dual Stack-Lite and Internet Protocol Version Six Rapid Deployment on Internet Protocol Version Four Infrastructures - A method implemented by a network apparatus comprising receiving a Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) membership report message from a host, sending an Automatic IP Multicast Tunneling (AMT) Relay discovery message comprising an anycast address for a border relay (BR) via an IPv4 network, receiving an AMT Relay advertisement message comprising a unicast address for the BR via the IPv4 network, sending an AMT request message to the BR via an AMT tunnel, receiving an AMT query message comprising a MLD listener query from the BR via the AMT, sending an AMT membership message comprising the MLD membership report message of the host to the BR via the AMT tunnel, and receiving an AMT multicast data message comprising an encapsulated IPv6 multicast message from the BR via the AMT tunnel. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218911 | Transceiver Set Assignment Scheme For A Distributed Antenna System - According to one embodiment, a method includes establishing a plurality of wired connections between a base station and a plurality of geographically distributed remote transceivers. Each remote transceiver of the plurality of remote transceivers has one or more physical antenna ports. The plurality of remote transceivers are assigned to a plurality of sets where each set has one or more of the plurality of remote transceivers. One or more logical ports is assigned to each set of the plurality of sets. Each logical port of a set corresponds to at least one physical antenna port of the one or more remote transceivers of the respective set. Data traffic is sent from the base station to the endpoint using at least one wireless connection between the endpoint and at least one physical antenna port of the one or more remote transceivers of a first set of the plurality of sets. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218912 | MULTI-LINK SCHEDULING TO COMPENSATE FOR MULTI-PATH FADING - The present solution relates to a method in a first communication node for (101) improving bandwidth utilization in a wireless communication system (100). The system comprises at least two communication links (110, 112) between the first communication node (101) and a second communication node (105). First, the first node (101) receives (501) data. Then, it indicates (502) that the data belongs to a category relating to link quality. The number of categories is related (503) to the number of communication links. Link quality based on communication link quality measurements of the at least two communication links (110, 112) is then determined (504), before the data is sent (509) on one of the at least two communication links (110, 112) to the second communication node (105). The chosen link being based on the quality measurements. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218913 | CHANNEL INFORMATION FEEDBACK DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF, AND MODE SWITCHING METHOD, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, AND BASE STATION SYSTEM USING SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly to a device for feeding back channel information in consideration of interference according to connection of an additional terminal and a technique for switching a mode by enabling a base station and the like to determine the connection of the additional terminal using the communication system. | 08-30-2012 |
20120224497 | Signal Quality Measurement Based On Transmitter Status - A method of adapting a transceiver includes receiving a signal at a time instant by the transceiver, determining if the transceiver is transmitting at the time instant, selectively updating one two signal quality measurements based on the transmission determination, evaluating a difference between the two signal quality measurements and adapting an operating mode of the transceiver based on the evaluation | 09-06-2012 |
20120224498 | BAYESIAN PLATFORM FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose a method for estimating a channel utilizing Sparse Bayesian Learning (SBL) algorithm. The proposed method employs a Basis expansion (e.g., polynomial) channel model, and iteratively performs SBL algorithm to adjust parameters of the channel model. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224499 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR REFERENCE SIGNAL INTERFERENCE CANCELATION - Various aspects disclosed are directed to improvements to channel estimation through more efficient cancelation of neighboring common reference signals (CRS). Cancelation of CRS from other cells allows the user equipment (UE) a better opportunity for accurately detecting the reference signal of the current cell. Alternative aspects have a recursive element that uses previous estimates as the basis for the current channel estimate. The various aspects of the present disclosure generally have two alternative embodiments: (1) initializing the channel estimation for all cells with a previous channel estimate and cancellation of reference signals of non-target cells to accurately update channel estimate of the target cell; and (2) initializing the channel estimate for all cells with a previous channel estimate and cancelation of reference signals of all cells to accurately estimate residual channel estimate of the target cell and update its channel estimate. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224500 | RELAY STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A measuring unit measures the line quality with an eNB. A receiving unit receives line quality information transmitted from an UE. When the line quality measured by the measuring unit is different from line quality contained in the line quality information received by the receiving unit, a transmitting unit changes,the received target data to data for a layer that is different from the physical layer,and transmits the changed data to the UE. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224501 | Upstream Bandwidth Management Methods and Apparatus - A system and method for managing bandwidth of an upstream communications channel in a communications system. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224502 | POWER CONTROL FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Techniques for controlling transmit power of a terminal are described. The terminal may send a first transmission (e.g., for pilot or signaling) on the reverse link, receive feedback (e.g., a power control command or an erasure indicator) for the first transmission, and adjust a reference power level based on the feedback. The terminal may also receive interference information and possibly other parameters such as a pilot quality indicator (PQI), an offset factor, and a boost factor from a sector. The terminal may determine transmit power for a second transmission to the sector based on the interference information, the reference power level, and/or the other parameters. The terminal may receive the feedback from one sector and may send the second transmission with CDMA or OFDMA to the same sector or a different sector. | 09-06-2012 |
20120230209 | System and Method for Exchanging Channel, Physical Layer and Data Layer Information and Capabilities - A system and method for exchanging channel, physical layer and data layer information and capabilities. The exchange of channel, physical layer and data layer capabilities enables optimal solutions for the provision of network services. In one embodiment, channel, physical layer and data layer capabilities are exchanged during an auto-negotiation process or LLDP messaging. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230210 | PACKET SNIFFING WITH PACKET FILTERING HOOKS - Systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with packet sniffing using packet filter hooks are described. In one embodiment, a method includes re-directing a network packet at a filter hook point in an Internet Protocol processing stack. The example method may also include re-directing the network packet to a packet sniffer. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230211 | METHODS AND NETWORK NODES FOR ALLOCATING CONTROL CHANNEL ELEMENTS FOR PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - Methods and nodes of a telecommunications system are disclosed. How many Control Channel Elements of a Frequency Division Multiplexing radio interface are used to transmit a Physical Downlink Control Channel message from a node of the telecommunications system to a User Equipment unit are controlled based on whether the node received from the User Equipment unit a response to a prior Physical Downlink Control Channel message transmitted to the User Equipment unit. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230212 | CONGESTION DETECTION IN A NETWORK INTERCONNECT - A method and system for detecting congestion in a network of nodes, abating the network congestion, and identifying the cause of the network congestion is provided. A congestion detection system may comprise a detection system, an abatement system, and a causation system. The detection system monitors the performance of network components such as the network interface controllers and tiles of routers to determine whether the network is congested such that a delay in delivering packets becomes unacceptable. Upon detecting that the network is congested, an abatement system abates the congestion by limiting the rate at which packets are injected into the network from the nodes. Upon detecting that the network is congested, a causation system may identify the job that is executing on a node that is the cause of the network congestion. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230213 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING MULTIPLE FREQUENCY ALLOCATIONS (FAS) IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for receiving a multiple frequency band are provided. In the method for receiving a multiple frequency band of a terminal is a mobile communication system, respective received signal strengths or respective gains are measured with respect to a signal received via at least one Radio Frequency (RF) chain. Whether multiple frequency band reception that uses a single RF chain is possible is determined using the respective received signal strengths or the respective gains. When the multiple frequency band reception that uses the single RF chain is possible, the multiple frequency band is received using the single RF chain. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230214 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING AND OPTIMIZING NETWORK PERFORMANCE TO A WIRELESS DEVICE - The disclosed embodiments include a method for monitoring and optimizing network performance to a wireless device that includes determining network performance information of a wireless router and communicating data packets containing the network performance information to a network management device. The network management device is configured to transmit instructional data packets to the wireless router that include instructions for optimizing network performance to said wireless device in response to identify a network performance problem associated with the wireless router. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230215 | MOBILE USER TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A method for using a mobile user terminal includes a receiving a signal and a measuring downlink channel quality based on the signal; wherein downlink channel quality information and an uplink pilot signal simultaneously is not transmitted at a period which the mobile user terminal is a state of transmission off in an intermittent fashion. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230216 | COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station and a base station communicate with each other using a frame including one or more downlink subframes and one or more uplink subframes. The base station begins the transmission of a data burst in a subframe corresponding to a downlink subframe index. The mobile station transmits feedback for the data burst to the base station in a subframe corresponding to an uplink subframe index. If the frame uses a time division duplex scheme, the uplink subframe index is determined by at least using the downlink subframe index and the parameter value. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230217 | USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment includes radio communication unit that performs radio communication with a base station over a communication channel formed by aggregating a plurality of component carriers. The user equipment has a measurement unit that measures a channel quality of the communication channel, and a controller that creates a measurement report using a result of the measurement and sends the measurement report to the base station. Each data signal transmitted over the communication channel is classified into any of two or more classes depending on a QoS requirement thereof. The radio communication unit receives control information related to a mapping between each of the plurality of component carriers and the class of each data signal from the base station, and the controller controls at least one of the measurement and the sending of the measurement report, according to a procedure which varies depending on the control information. A base station performs associated functions, according to a communication method involving allocation of data to component carriers based at least in part on channel quality criteria for different data classifications. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230218 | Method and Base Station for Detecting a HARQ-ACK Codeword - A method in a base station for detecting a HARQ-ACK codeword comprised in a signal received from a UE is provided. The base station knows HARQ-ACK codewords being possible to detect. The base station receives ( | 09-13-2012 |
20120230219 | Method and Arrangements for Reducing the Number of Failed Handover Procedures - The invention relates to a method in a source radio base station ( | 09-13-2012 |
20120230220 | Bit Soft Value Normalization - An LTE uplink soft demapper includes an SC-FDMA symbol noise power meter (22) configured to individually determine a noise power measure for each SC-FDMA symbol in a slot by exploiting information contained in modulated data symbols of the corresponding SC-FDMA symbol. A bit soft value normalizer (24) connected to the SC-FDMA symbol noise power meter (22) is configured to normalize bit soft values, representing reliability of received bits obtained from the SC-FDMA symbols in the slot, based on the determined noise power measures. | 09-13-2012 |
20120236733 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING USE OF A MOBILE HOTSPOT FUNCTION IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method for monitoring use of a mobile hotspot function in a wireless device, comprising: storing a last access time for a client within a memory of the wireless device, the last access time being a time when the hotspot function last performed a network address translation for the client; determining whether a difference between a current time and the last access time exceeds a threshold; and, if the difference exceeds the threshold, generating an indication that the mobile hotspot function is not in use by the client. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236734 | PACKET LOSS MEASUREMENT AT SERVICE ENDPOINTS OF A VIRTUAL PRIVATE LAN SERVICE - In general, techniques are described for measuring packet data unit (PDU) loss in a L2 virtual private network (L2VPN) service, such as a VPLS instance. In one example of the techniques, provider edge (PE) routers that participate in the L2VPN measure known unicast and multicast PDU traffic at the service endpoints for the instance to determine unicast PDU loss within the service provider network. As the routers learn the outbound service (i.e., core-facing) interfaces and outbound local (i.e., customer-facing) interfaces for L2 addresses of customer devices that issue packets to the VPLS instance, the routers establish respective unicast transmit and receipt counters for the service endpoints that serve the customer devices. In another example, PE routers that participate in the L2VPN measure multicast PDU traffic at the service endpoints for the instance and account for internal replication by intermediate service nodes to determine multicast PDU loss within the service. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236735 | ENHANCED POWER HEADROOM REPORTING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method in a wireless communication device includes determining a first configured maximum transmit power (P | 09-20-2012 |
20120236736 | Method and Apparatus for Multi-Radio Coexistence with a System on an Adjacent Frequency Band Having a Time-Dependent Configuration | 09-20-2012 |
20120236737 | Base Station, Method, Computer Program and Computer Program Product for Improved Random Access - A base station as presented herein improves random access. The base station comprises a radio unit comprising a transceiver and an antenna; a message receiver arranged to receive random access preamble messages with a preamble, from mobile communication terminals, on a random access channel; a distance determiner arranged to, for each random access preamble message, determine whether the corresponding mobile communication terminal is further away than an outer threshold distance from the radio unit; and a radius adjuster arranged to, when it is determined that there is more than a threshold magnitude of mobile communication terminals being further away than the outer threshold distance, increase the outer threshold distance and a random access cell radius of the radio unit. In other words, when many mobile communication terminals are determined to be far away, the random access cell radius is increased, allowing dynamic resizing of the random access cell. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236738 | Radio frequency communications based on multiple receivers - Apparatus, methods, and computer program products are disclosed for: selecting a reception path to receive information from a first receiver path through a first receiver portion in a transceiver portion of the apparatus or from a second receiver path in a receiver portion separate from the transceiver portion of the apparatus, wherein both of the first and second receiver paths receive the information using a same frequency band of a same radio access technology; and receiving the information using the selected reception path. Apparatus, methods, and computer program products are disclosed for: transmitting first information using a transmission frequency band of a radio access technology over a transmission path in a transceiver; and, for the radio access technology and a reception frequency band, receiving second information over a receiver path in a secondary receiver, where the transceiver does not have a receiver path configured to receive the reception frequency band. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236739 | NETWORK DEVICE, AND MULTI-WIDE AREA NETWORK INTERFACE SELECTION MODULE AND METHOD - A network device includes a plurality of wide area network (WAN) interfaces, and a multi-WAN interface selection module. The WAN interfaces transmit session requests. The multi-WAN interface selection module communicates with the WAN interfaces and includes a monitoring unit, a quality table management unit and a network selection unit. The monitoring unit monitors and records network QoS corresponding to each WAN interface to obtain corresponding QoS information. The quality table management unit establishes a QoS information table according to the QoS information from the monitoring unit and updates the QoS information table in real time, and the network selection unit queries the QoS information table to select and distribute a WAN interface to send a new session request. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236740 | NETWORK EMULATION WITH VARYING BANDWIDTH AND/OR ERROR RATE - Network emulation techniques are provided for dynamically varying network bandwidth and/or error rate. Network emulation can be performed by determining a bandwidth range, determining a plurality of specific bandwidth values distributed across the bandwidth range, and dynamically varying available bandwidth among the plurality of specific bandwidth values for a stream of network packets. Transitioning between specific bandwidth values can be performed using a probability jump matrix. Network emulation can also be performed by varying error rates, such as dropped packets, separately or in addition to dynamic bandwidth variation. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236741 | POWER CONTROL AND USER MULTIPLEXING FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK COORDINATED MULTIPOINT OPERATIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for power control and user multiplexing for coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission and reception in heterogeneous networks (HetNet). | 09-20-2012 |
20120236742 | Method/apparatus for transporting two or more asynchronous data streams over a single data link - A method and apparatus for locking transmit data rates to respective, arbitrary receive data rates in a system that transports two or more video, audio or general data streams over a single data link. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236743 | TRANSMITTING DEVICE AND INFORMATION ACQUISITION CONTROL METHOD - A transmitting device includes a counter circuit that counts a counter circuit that counts a value of statistical information of a communication path for certain time periods; a memory; and a control circuit that acquires the value of the statistical information from the counter circuit and causes the memory to store the value of the statistical information when the value of the statistical information acquired by the counter circuit reaches a threshold. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236744 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH SIGNAL PROCESSING MECHANISM FOR TONE ESTIMATION AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A method of operation of a communication system includes: converting time-domain data to frequency-domain data based on an N-point transform size; generating K-point data based on the frequency-domain data and the N-point transform size; and determining a tone interference frequency based on the K-point data for elimination of tone interference to improve system performance. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236745 | TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING OR RECEIVING A SIGNAL INCLUDING PREDETERMINED INFORMATION - A measuring unit measures a quality of a received packet signal. An estimating unit estimates entry from a second area to a first area when the measured quality is improved so as to satisfy a first condition and estimates the entry from the first area to the second area when the quality measured by the measuring unit is deteriorated so as to satisfy a second condition. The estimating unit sets different values for a parameter included in the first condition and the parameter included in the second condition. The determining unit determines a first period or a second period as transmission timing based on an estimated result. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236746 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING OR RECEIVING A SIGNAL INCLUDING PREDETERMINED INFORMATION - An acquiring unit receives a packet signal of a first type from the other base station apparatus. A measuring unit measures a receipt frequency of the packet signal of the first type which is received. A determining unit determines a timing for broadcasting a packet signal of a second type to inform a terminal apparatus of a presence based on the receipt frequency which is measured and a receipt timing of the packet signal of the first type which is received. A broadcasting unit broadcasts the packet signal of the second type in the determined timing. A communicating unit executes a communication with the terminal apparatus receiving the packet signal of the second type. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236747 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING RADIO RESOURCES, AND RADIO SYSTEM - There is provided a radio system, comprising: a receiver for receiving uplink channel traffic; a measuring unit for measuring periodicity of the received uplink channel traffic; and a control unit for controlling discontinuous uplink operation on the basis of the measured periodicity of the received uplink channel traffic. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236748 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION, SATELLITE-BASED WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEMS, AND AIRCRAFT-BASED WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEMS, AND RELATED METHODS - A wireless network system may include a source node having a first source wireless interface and a second source wireless interface, wherein the source node initiates a data transmission via the first source wireless interface. The wireless network system may also include a repeater node having a first and second repeater wireless interfaces, wherein the repeater node is configured to receive the data transmission on the first or second repeater wireless interface and to repeat the data transmission on the other of the first or second repeater wireless interface. The wireless network system also includes a destination node having first and second destination wireless interfaces, wherein the destination node is configured to receive the data transmission on the first or second destination wireless interface. A wireless network system may also include a satellite-based, wireless network system, including an earth station server, a satellite client, and a terrestrial client. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236749 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTONOMOUS CHANNEL COORDINATION FOR A WIRELESS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - A method and system for autonomous channel coordination for a wireless distribution system (WDS) are disclosed. A wireless communication system includes a plurality of access points (APs) and the APs communicate each other via a WDS. A coordinated channel group (CCG) of a plurality of member APs is established. The member APs of the CCG camp on a WDS channel used for the WDS among the member APs of the CCG. One AP among the member APs of the CCG is designated as a master AP. The master AP coordinates with other member APs of the CCG for selecting and configuring the WDS channel for the CCG and addition and deletion of member APs. By allowing APs to define a CCG, changes of the WDS channel are performed autonomously while maintaining connectivity. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236750 | SYSTEM, METHOD FOR COMPILING NETWORK PERFORMANCING INFORMATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS WITH CUSTOMER PREMISE EQUIPMENT - A system and method for determining network performance information. The system includes an interface configured to communicate between customer premise equipment (CPE) and a communications device. The system also includes one or more processing units in communication with the interface. The one or more processing units are configured to generate packets communicated by the interface between the CPE and the communications device to determine the network performance information. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236751 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS LOGGING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing measurements logging in a mobile communications system is provided. An user equipment receives a first measurement configuration message including a first measurement configuration and receives a second measurement configuration message. The user equipment discards the first measurement configuration upon receiving the second measurement configuration message. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236752 | Apparatus and Method for Channel Estimation in a Wireless Communications System - The exemplary embodiments of the present invention relate to a user equipment and to a method for channel estimation in a wireless communications network system. The method comprises: receiving physical resource blocks from a radio base station; estimating a channel coefficient of each received physical resource block; calculating for each two adjacent physical resource blocks, a difference between estimated channel coefficients of the two adjacent physical resource blocks; comparing each difference with a predefined threshold value; grouping physical resource blocks for which said difference is less than or equal to the predefined threshold value; and performing a group-wise channel estimation and per physical resource block channel adaptively. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243424 | CARRIER-PHASE DIFFERENCE DETECTION AND TRACKING IN MULTIPOINT BROADCAST CHANNELS - Methods and apparatus are described that provide carrier-phase difference (CPD) acquisition via signaling protocols between communicating devices. The random CPD between two disjoint devices can be measured by the signaling protocols described herein. With the availability of the CPD, a device is also able to acquire its outgoing channel (transmit channel) information, thus avoiding the channel information feedback that is being considered and/or practiced in some wireless communications systems. Also described are methods and apparatus that use the CPD to synchronize the clocks of two or more devices and that track the time-variations of the CPD for reliable CPD measurement and tracking loop operations. Applications of the described methods and apparatus include wireless multipoint broadcast systems, also known as coordinated multipoint transmission, or CoMP, in LTE (long-term evolution)-advanced systems, point-to-point wireless MIMO systems, and general wireless device networks. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243425 | POWER MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR USE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - Between a user equipment and a base station in a wireless network system, a plurality of data links are simultaneously established for communication. The amounts of power for respectively maintaining the data links are adjusted according to the transmission quality of each corresponding data link, so that the data link with better transmission quality may receive more resource for improving the overall data throughput of the data links. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243426 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A hybrid vehicle electronic control unit (HV-ECU) includes a communication unit and a retransmission control unit. The communication unit performs a retransmitting process of data when a transmission error of the data is detected. The retransmission control unit inhibits the retransmitting process in a corresponding communication period and releases the retransmitting process when the corresponding communication period ends and the next communication period starts if the number of times that a transmission error is detected in a predetermined communication period is larger than a transmission stop determination threshold value. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243427 | Using Mobile Communication Devices To Facilitate Coordinating Use of Resources - System(s), method(s), and device(s) that facilitate managing resources associated with communication devices are presented. A mobile device(s) at cell edge identifies its in-use resource blocks (RBs) to a neighbor base station, or in-use RBs of a neighbor base station to the serving base station. In the former instance, the neighbor base station sorts RBs in ascending order based on signal strengths respectively associated with the RBs and mobile devices; in the latter instance, the serving base station ranks RBs in ascending order based on signal strengths respectively associated with the RBs and neighbor base stations. RBs having weakest signal strength are reused first for mobile devices at cell edge. Base station establishes a direct wireless radio path with another base station facilitated by employing a sequence of subframes where all subframes but a specified subframe are blanked, and data is transmitted between base stations during the specified subframe. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243428 | METHOD CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM FOR ADAPTING A RECEIVER RECEIVE CHAIN BASED ON DETECTED BACKGROUND NOISE - Disclosed is a radio frequency (RF) receiver for receiving a communication channel modulated on one or more carrier frequencies. The receiver may include a gain adjustable RF amplifier, a wideband signal power measurement circuit, and control logic. The control logic may be adapted to use outputs of one or more measurement circuits to classify interfering signals based on measured signal power and spectral proximity to the one or more channel carrier frequencies, and to adjust the gain of the radio frequency amplifier based on the classification. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243429 | USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a user equipment UE according to the present invention which appropriately measures downlink radio quality when multi-carrier transmission is performed, the user equipment UE includes a measurement unit | 09-27-2012 |
20120243430 | Downlink MCS Selection in a Type 2 Relay Network - A method for selecting an MCS for a cell in which one or more Type 2 relay nodes are present. The method includes the access node for the cell estimating the quality of the link between a relay node in the cell and a UA in the cell and using the estimate to select an MCS for the cell. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243431 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Allocating Resources in Wireless Communication Network - The present application discloses a method, an apparatus and a computer program product for allocating resources for a Device-to-Device (D2D) direct communication user equipment in a wireless communication network, wherein the method comprise: transmitting a communication channel status report regarding Device-to-Device direct communication to a base station; receiving resource allocation instructions generated by the base station based on the communication channel status report; and performing Device-to-Device direct communication between user equipments on the allocated resources; the disclosed apparatus comprises transmitting means for transmitting a communication channel status report regarding Device-to-Device direct communication to a base station; receiving means for receiving resource allocation instructions generated by the base station based on the communication channel status report; and performing means for performing Device-to-Device direct communication between user equipments on the allocated resources. By using the method, apparatus and computer program product disclosed in the present application, resource sharing/allocation collision between the D2D user equipment and cellular user equipment can be effectively reduced and use rate of resources can be improved. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243432 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A MOBILE NETWORK FOR CHARGING TRAFFIC AND CORRESPONDING MOBILE NETWORK - A method for operating a mobile network, especially for charging traffic within the mobile network, wherein monitoring of chargeable events regarding traffic from and/or to a mobile node will be performed by a Charging Function for collecting charging data. The method is characterized in that a Charging Function's sub-function for monitoring of chargeable events on a data flow level or IP (Internet Protocol) flow level will be additionally located—as an additional sub-function D-CEMF (Delegated Chargeable Event Monitoring Function)—on at least one further network element, which is different from the Charging Function and which allows to traverse breakout and/or localized traffic of the mobile node, so that the Charging Function and the further network element each are including such a sub-function, and that the additional sub-function D-CEMF will report information regarding monitored chargeable events to the Charging Function. A mobile network for carrying out the method is described. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243433 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTONOMOUS OFDMA BEACON RECEPTION MEASUREMENT - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include configuring the device to monitor the presence of the OFDMA beacons and the quality of the OFDMA beacon receptions. The device may transmit the beacon reports that detail the sensed beacons from the beaconing device during an OFDMA beacon opportunity. In another aspect there is provided a method. The method may include configuring a dedicated beacon quality measurement agreement between two or more devices. Based on the agreement defining the beacon transmission and reception periodicity, one device transmits a beacon and the other devices in the agreement monitor the beacon. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250529 | MOBILE AD-HOC RE-ROUTING METHOD - In a mobile ad-hoc re-routing system in which network nodes are identified by topology dissemination messages, including local “Hello” and global Topographical Control (“TC”) messages, the improvement comprises triggering topology dissemination messages based on at least one of a new neighbor determination and link loss determinations. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250530 | Systems and Methods for Learning MSS of Services - The virtual Server (vServer) of an intermediary device deployed between a plurality of clients and services supports parameters for setting maximum segment size (MSS) on a per vServer/service basis and for automatically learning the MSS among the back-end services. In case of vServer/service setting, all vServers will use the MSS value set through the parameter for the MSS value set in TCP SYN+ACK to clients. In the case of learning mode, the backend service MSS will be learnt through monitor probing. The vServer will monitor and learn the MSS that is being frequently used by the services. When the learning is active, the intermediary device may keep statistics of the MSS of backend services picked up during load balancing decisions and once an interval timer expires, the MSS value may be picked by a majority and set on the vServer. If there is no majority, then the highest MSS is picked up to be set on the vServer. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250531 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RELAYING PEER DISCOVERY INFORMATION IN WWAN - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided in which a peer discovery signal is received from a second apparatus. At least one of a path loss to a serving base station or a path loss to a neighboring base station is determined. Whether to relay the peer discovery signal is determined based on the at least one of the path loss to the serving base station or the path loss to the neighboring base station. The peer discovery signal is sent upon determining to relay the peer discovery signal. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250532 | System and Method for Clear Channel Assessment that Supports Simultaneous Transmission by Multiple Wireless Protocols - System and method for performing clear channel assessment for simultaneous transmission in a device implementing multiple wireless protocols. The system may include first and second wireless protocol circuitry configured to generate first and second signals, respectively, for wireless transmission according to first and second wireless protocols, respectively. A first in-band signal strength threshold and a second in-band signal strength threshold may be maintained by the first wireless protocol circuitry. It may be determined whether the first or second in-band signal strength threshold should be used in performing the clear channel assessment. Clear channel assessment may be performed using the determined in-band signal strength threshold. Performing clear channel assessment may include comparing an ambient signal strength on a channel with the determined in-band signal strength threshold. The first wireless protocol circuitry may be configured to determine whether to wirelessly transmit first signals based on the clear channel assessment. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250533 | SYMMETRIZATION OF CHANNEL IMPULSE RESPONSE - Embodiments of apparatuses, articles, logic, methods, and systems for a multi-carrier receiver that makes symmetric a channel impulse response to reduce channel estimation computational complexity are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250534 | Calibration of a Transmitter with Internal Power Measurement - A method for calibrating a transmitter includes operating the transmitter using a first transmitter setting; obtaining, via an external reference measuring device, a transmit power reference value indicative of a first transmit power of the transmitter corresponding to the first transmitter setting, and obtaining, using an internal measuring device of the transmitter or of a receiver associated with the transmitter, a first uncalibrated transmit power measurement value corresponding to the first transmit power. The method further includes calibrating the internal measuring device using the transmit power reference value and the first uncalibrated transmit power measurement value to provide a calibrated internal measuring device, operating the transmitter using a second transmitter setting, and obtaining, using the calibrated internal measuring device, a second transmit power measurement value indicative of a second transmit power corresponding to the second transmitter setting. Lastly, the method includes obtaining self-calibration data based on the second transmitter setting and the second transmit power measurement value, and storing the self-calibration data in a calibration data structure. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250535 | HUB LABEL BASED ROUTING IN SHORTEST PATH DETERMINATION - Hub based labeling is used to determine a shortest path between two locations. Every point has a set of hubs: this is the label (along with the distance from the point to all those hubs). The hubs are determined using the labels. The hubs are determined that intersect the two labels, and this information is used to find the shortest distance. A hub based labeling technique uses a preprocessing stage and a query stage. Finding the hubs is performed in the preprocessing stage, and finding the intersecting hubs (i.e., the common hubs they share) is performed in the query stage. During preprocessing, a forward label and a reverse label are defined for each vertex. The labels are generated using contraction hierarchies that may be guided by shortest path covers, and may be pruned. A query is processed using the labels to determine the shortest path. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250536 | ETHERNET-DUAL-ENDED LOSS MEASUREMENT CALCULATION - The invention is directed to a method of preserving accuracy in dual-ended frame loss measurement system between a first node and a second node in a packet switching network, especially by Ethernet routers, switches and bridges supporting ITU-T Y.1731 dual-ended LM functionality by enhancing the behavior of dual-ended frame loss measurement to permit enabling and disabling the loss measurement at each node separately without incurring erroneous errors. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250537 | ADAPTIVE POWER SAVING FOR A MOBILE SUBSCRIBER UNIT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for adaptive power saving for a mobile subscriber unit in a wireless communication network includes receiving beacons from an access point, measuring timing periods between received beacons, determining a delay in timing periods, and associating the delay in timing periods to a change in a quality of a communication link. The link quality can be quantified and used for reconfiguring power-save parameters in response to a change in link quality. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250538 | REDUCING BATTERY POWER CONSUMPTION DURING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION AND TRANSMISSION - Techniques, systems and apparatus are described for reducing battery power consumption during a discontinuous reception and transmission mode of operation of a communication device. When operating in the discontinuous reception and transmission mode, a communication device can process radio frequency signals received from base stations to identify a set of active base stations based on a quality of the received radio frequency signals. This can reduce the total number of base stations to decode the corresponding system frame number (SFN). Based on the decoded SFN, the communication device can select a base station to perform hand-off. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250539 | TECHNIQUES TO DETERMINE USER PRESENCE - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of detecting user presence, comprising registering a client associated with the user on a host associated with the user and setting up a wireless communication pairing, wherein while setting up the pairing, the client measures the host wireless communication power and uses it as calibration threshold for distance detection, and wherein the client measures a beacon power of the host radio and when the beacon power is above a threshold, the client is determined to be proximate to the host. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250540 | PRESENTING INFORMATION AT ONE OR MORE MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN A TRANSPORTATION NETWORK - The disclosure described technology for presenting information via a mobile communication device in a transportation network, the transportation network modeled by segment and time slot. Information tagged by modeled segment, modeled time slot, and aggregate demographics of a target audience in the modeled segment and modeled time slot is received. The aggregate demographics include at least route context of transportation network users in the segment and time slot. The received information, including received tagged information, is published to a communication network of the mobile communication device. The published information is filtered for published information tagged with aggregate demographics corresponding to demographics of the mobile communication device—demographics of the mobile communication device including at least a route context of the mobile communication device. The filtered information is presented via the mobile communication device. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250541 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING EFFECTIVE CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE CARRIERS - A method and apparatus for transmitting effective channel status information (CSI) in a wireless communication system supporting multiple carriers are disclosed. The method for indicating CSI transmission in a wireless communication system supporting multiple carriers includes transmitting downlink control information (DCI) including a channel quality information (CQI) request field to a user equipment (UE) over a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), and receiving CSI reporting of a single downlink carrier or multiple downlink carriers from the UE over a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) without receiving uplink data. If the CSI for the single downlink carrier is reported, the number (N | 10-04-2012 |
20120250542 | Method And Apparatus For Encoding Channel Quality Indicator And Precoding Control Information Bits - A method and apparatus for encoding channel quality indicator (CQI) and precoding control information (PCI) bits are disclosed. Each of the input bits, such as CQI bits and/or PCI bits, has a particular significance. The input bits are encoded with a linear block coding. The input bits are provided with an unequal error protection based on the significance of each input bit. The input bits may be duplicated based on the significance of each input bit and equal protection coding may be performed. A generator matrix for the encoding may be generated by elementary operation of conventional basis sequences to provide more protection to a most significant bit (MSB). | 10-04-2012 |
20120250543 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for communicating Channel State Information (CSI) feedback. In some aspects, the CSI feedback is communicated in a very high throughput (VHT) wireless communications system. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250544 | FIELD DEVICE CONTROLLING SYSTEM - One or more field devices, and a controller are connected so as to be able to communicate with a field device through a first communication route, and a device monitoring unit that is connected so as to be able to communicate with the field device through a second communication route are provided, wherein the device monitoring unit is provided with a checking tool for checking a status of the field device and the status of communication through the first and/or the second communication routes, based on a response received through the second communication route from the field device in response to a signal sent through either the first communication route or the second communication route. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250545 | SELECTION OF DYNAMIC RELAYS FOR COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS IN A MOBILE NETWORK - The invention relates to the selection of at least one dynamic node, in a mobile network, as a candidate for relaying a data communication signal between a transmitting entity and a receiving entity of the network. In terms of the invention: at least one first area around at least one first entity among the transmitting and receiving entities is defined, beyond which a data communication signal is attenuated beyond a first predetermined threshold; and the selection of nodes as possible candidates for relaying the communication signal on the basis of the definition of the first area is limited. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250546 | METHOD OF EVALUATING THE QUALITY OF RADIO LINKS FOR A WIRELESS BODY AREA NETWORK, METHOD OF TRANSMITTING MESSAGES FOR A WIRELESS BODY AREA NETWORK, AND DEVICES FOR IMPLEMENTING THOSE METHODS - A method for evaluating quality of radio links for a wireless body area network includes first and second wireless devices forming a body area network and configured to communicate with each other. One of the two wireless devices is mobile relative to the other, The method includes exploiting messages received by one of the wireless devices to measure instantaneous quality of a corresponding radio link and to estimate times during and between which a radio link is reliable, calculating an estimated times reliability indicator, and classifying the radio links as a function of the reliability indicator into at least first and second categories. One of these categories is a category relating to intermittently reliable radio links taking into account the mobility of the wireless devices of the body area network. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250547 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication device includes: a data transmission unit that transmits data to one or more receiving terminals; and a communication mode determination unit that determines a communication mode in which the data is transmitted from the data transmission unit, wherein the communication mode determination unit selects a first communication mode in which unicast communication is used when the number of receiving terminals to which the data is transmitted is equal to or less than a predetermined number, and selects a second communication mode in which unicast communication is performed to one or some of receiving terminals as a destination and the other receiving terminals than the destination also receive packets in unicast communication when the number of receiving terminals to which the data is transmitted exceeds the predetermined number. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250548 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION ASSOCIATED WITH PERFORMING RESELECTION IN A MULTI-RAT SYSTEM - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose methods and apparatuses for reducing power consumption associated with performing reselection between radio access technologies (RATs). For example, a network that supports first and second RATs may obtain a list of neighbor base stations of a third RAT and determine whether to transmit the neighbor list on the first RAT, the second RAT, or both. In another aspect, a user equipment (UE) may combine information from the neighbor lists received from the first and the second RATs, and decide whether to take measurements in the third RAT based on the combined information. The UE may also maintain a central entity with measurements taken in the third RAT based on the neighbor lists received from the first and the second RATs and decide whether to perform cell reselection based on measurements in the central entity. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250549 | METHOD FOR REPORTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME - A method for reporting uplink control information and a wireless communication device using the same are disclosed. The wireless communication device supports multiple component carriers (CC), and the proposed method includes following steps. When a base station requests the wireless communication device to transmit aperiodic channel state information (CSI) report of one or more downlink CC to the base station, but the CSI of the downlink CCs may be invalid, following steps are executed on the downlink CC. Full payloads of channel quality indicator (CQI)/precoding matrix indicator (PMI) corresponding to a plurality of selectable RI values of the downlink CC are respectively calculated. Additionally, an RI value of the downlink CC is selected according to the full payloads of the CQI/PMI corresponding to the selectable RI values. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250550 | CHANNEL FEEDBACK FOR COOPERATIVE MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION - A method includes receiving in a mobile communication terminal downlink signals from at least first and second cells that coordinate transmission of the downlink signals with one another. Channel feedback is calculated in the terminal based on the received downlink signals. The channel feedback is configured to cause the first cell to precode subsequent downlink signals in response to the channel feedback with a first precoding vector, and to cause the second cell to precode the subsequent downlink signals in response to the channel feedback with a second precoding vector that differs in magnitude from the first precoding vector. The channel feedback is transmitted from the terminal. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250551 | System and Method for Transmission and Reception of Control Channels in a Communications System - A method for transmitting control information to a wireless node includes determining, by a communications controller, a region for the control information in a subframe as at least one of a data region and a control region of the subframe. The method also includes modulating, by the communications controller, the control information, and mapping, by the communications controller, the modulated control information onto resources of the subframe according to the determined region. The method further includes transmitting, by the communications controller, the subframe to the wireless node. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250552 | Method and System for Greedy User Group Selection with Range Reduction for FDD Multiuser MIMO Downlink Transmission with Finite-Rate Channel State Information Feedback - Aspects of a greedy search user group selection scheme with range reduction for FDD multiuser MIMO downlink transmission with finite-rate channel state information feedback are provided. The method may comprise receiving feedback information via a communication channel for a plurality of users in a frequency division duplex system. The system capacity may be maximized using the feedback information based on a signal from a single user within a reduced search range or based on the signal from the single user and at least one other signal from another user within a remaining portion of the search range. The feedback information may comprise quantized gain and/or direction of the channel state information of the users. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250553 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPOSING A SET OF CELLS IN A RADIO NETWORK - A method in a mobile station for enabling the composing of a set of a cells within a coverage area of a radio access network within which the same information is transmitted time synchronously using a modulation and coding scheme common for the cells of the set. The method includes: identifying one or more pilot signals from respective one or more cells monitored by the mobile station; determining signal and interference levels from the one or more monitored cells if a signal would be transmitted time synchronously using a common modulation and coding scheme within cells of a candidate set of cells; determining one or more modulation and coding schemes selectable with regard to the determined signal and interference levels and the candidate set of cells; and, indicating the one or more determined selectable modulation and coding schemes towards a network node performing the composition of the set of cells. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250554 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFYING DEGRADATION OF A MEDIA SERVICE - A method and device for identifying degradation in service quality for a wireless media service. The wireless media service has a known expected packet generation rate, which may be determined by the device based upon the codec and payload size selected on initiating the media service. At a receiving device, the packets actually received by the device from the other termination point are counted over a time period, and this number is compared with the number of packets that were expected based upon the known packet generation rate. From this comparison a packet loss rate may be determined. If the packet loss rate exceeds a threshold level, then the device may issue a user alert, terminate the service, or take other action. The threshold level may be established based upon a packet loss rate corresponding to a significant degree of service quality degradation. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250555 | Method And System For Reducing Transceiver Power Via A Variable Signal Constellation - Aspects of a method and system for reducing transceiver power via a variable signal constellation are provided. In this regard, an Ethernet PHY device may receive one or more signals indicative of a current state of an Ethernet link to which the PHY device is coupled and/or indicative of resources, such as power, available to the PHY device. Accordingly, a number of points comprising a signal constellation utilized to communicate data via the Ethernet link may vary based on the one or more signals. A current state of the link may comprise a bit error rate, a packet error rate, and/or utilization, in terms of bandwidth for example, of the link. Aspects of the invention may enable controlling, at least in part, power consumption of the PHY device may altering the number of points comprising the signal constellation. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250556 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MEASURING CHANNEL QUALITY FEEDBACK OF MOBILE STATIONS - A measuring device for determining the channel-quality feedback quality of mobile stations contains a base station, a mobile station and a measuring unit. The measuring unit contains at least two antennas and a processing device. The measuring unit and the mobile station receive signals in each case by means of at least two antennas from the same at least two antennas of the base station. The mobile station determines a channel-quality feedback value from the signals it has received. The processing device determines the orthogonality of the signals received by the measuring unit. The processing device determines a channel-quality feedback value from the orthogonality. From this and from the channel-quality feedback value of the mobile station, the processing device determines the quality of the latter. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250557 | Resolving Channel State Information Outdating - It is described a method of operating a base station and a base station which uses a communication channel depending on channel state related information and time information e.g. a prediction time. In this way, problems due to outdating of the channel state related information may be overcome and a feedback overhead may be reduced. According to other embodiments, other parameters like a used prediction method, a prediction horizon, etc. are used to provide a better scenario adaption. Other embodiments relate to combined long term prediction and short term prediction and respective timing settings. Other embodiments relate to a method of operating a user equipment and a user equipment which is adapted for communicating the required time information between the base station and the user equipment. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250558 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY MEASURING A CHANNEL IN A MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and an apparatus for efficiently measuring a channel in a multi-carrier wireless communication system. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method in which a downlink receiving entity provides downlink channel measurement information for establishing component carriers in a multi-carrier wireless system, comprise the following steps: receiving, from a downlink transmitting entity, information on one or more downlink component carriers for which channel measurement for establishing CCs is to be performed; performing downlink channel measurement for one or more DL CCs; and reporting the result of the downlink channel measurement to the downlink transmitting entity, wherein said one or more downlink component carriers for which channel measurement is to be performed may contain a component carrier which is not allocated to the downlink receiving entity. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250559 | Method, Mobile Station, Base Station and Computer Program Product to Control the Activation of a Wireless Carrier - Providing and receiving carrier information using a bitmap comprising a series of bits, each bit indicating one of two predetermined states for a respective carrier of a predetermined group of carriers. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250560 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONTAINING A RELAY STATION - Provided are a method and apparatus for transmitting feedback information in a wireless communication system containing a relay station. A subband is divided by a plurality of partitions, and the relay station measures feedback information for each of the partitions, and transmits feedback information measured for each of the partitions cyclically at a predetermined interval. Each partition can be a physical resource unit (PRU), and one PRU contains 18 subcarriers. Feedback information for each partition can be cyclically transmitted in the order fixed in the subband. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250561 | DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM, DATA COLLECTION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR COLLECTING DATA - A wireless communication device in a data collection system starts measuring a time when the wireless communication device receives a wireless signal from a data collection device. The wireless communication device changes the wireless channel, transmits a detection signal for detecting the data collection device, and starts measuring a time after transmitting the detection signal when the wireless communication device is unable to receive a next wireless signal from the data collection device even after passage of a predetermined time since the wireless communication device has previously received the wireless signal. The wireless communication device changes the wireless channel to be used, depending on whether the wireless communication device has received a response signal from the data collection device in response to the detection signal within a predetermined time. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250562 | MEASUREMENT EVALUATION METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - The embodiments of the present invention provide a measurement evaluation method, system and device for a multi-carrier system. The method includes that: UE receives measurement configuration information transmitted by an eNB, where the measurement configuration information comprises a to-be-measured frequency and report configuration; the UE determines signal quality of a measurement reference cell according to the measurement configuration information and current aggregated cells of the UE; the UE performs measurement for signal quality of a target cell on the to-be-measured frequency, and based on the signal quality of the measurement reference cell, performs evaluation for the target cell according to the report configuration; and if an evaluation result indicates that the signal quality of the target cell fulfills a report condition contained in the report configuration, the UE reports the signal quality of the target cell to the eNB. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250563 | Method and apparatus for establishing service route - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for establishing a service route, wherein the method comprises the steps of: collecting, by a control station, channel quality information of all links on each path of a terminal; according to the channel quality information, selecting an access station which establishes a route with the terminal. The present invention realizes selecting the access station which establishes a route with the terminal according to the actual application situation. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250564 | METHOD OF MANAGEMENT FOR OPERATING A BROAD BAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A NARROW BAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IMPLEMENTED IN A SAME FREQUENCY BAND - A method of management for operating a first system of communication of the broadband type communication system emitting over a first frequency range, and a second system of communication of the narrow band type communication system emitting over a second frequency range, the first system and the second system using all or part of a same frequency band, such common frequency band being called a crossover frequency band for both systems, the method including: embodying a scan operation from at least the crossover frequency band of the two systems using a scan device from the first communication system; identifying, after the scan operation, the frequency channels used by the second communication system; adapting the operating of the first communication system within the frequency channels identified as being used by the second communication system. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250565 | Interference Control Method and Apparatus in Self-Organizing System - An interference control method and apparatus in a self-organizing system are provided. The method includes the following steps: interference information is received at an access node from at least two other access nodes, wherein the other access nodes serve communication devices interfered by the access node; then the interference information is evaluated at the access node to determine at least one action that could be taken because of the interference; information about the determined at least one action is communicated to at least one of the at least two other access nodes, and the recipient node is operated accordingly. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250566 | Method and system for acquiring support capability of mobile terminal by base station side system - A method for acquiring support capability of a mobile terminal by a base station side system is disclosed in the present disclosure, and the method includes: the base station side system applies a co-frequency interference to the mobile terminal, and detects a measurement report which is fed back by the mobile terminal after the co-frequency interference is applied, and determines and acquires the support capability of the mobile terminal for voice services over adaptive multi-user channels on one slot according to associated parameters in the detected measurement report in combination with associated threshold values. A system for acquiring support capability of the mobile terminal by the base station side system is also disclosed in the present disclosure. In the system, a base station side determining unit is configured to determine and acquire the support capability of the mobile terminal for voice services over adaptive multi-user channels on one slot according to associated parameters in detected measurement report in combination with associated threshold values. With the method and system in the present disclosure, the base station side system can adaptively and accurately acquire the support capability of the mobile terminal for Voice services over adaptive multi-user channels on one slot. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250567 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DYNAMICALLY CHANGING PORT SERVICE CONFIGURATION BETWEEN APPLICATION PROCESSOR AND COMMUNICATION MODULE - The invention provides a method and apparatus dynamically switching port service configurations between an application processor (AP) and a communication module. The method comprises: after normal initialization, the AP and the communication module respectively performing port service configurations in an initialization phase; after the port service configurations in the initialization phase are completed, starting monitoring of data flow between the AP and the communication module; and the AP and the communication module respectively switching their respective current port service configurations to a port service configuration corresponding to the monitored data flow according to a result of the monitoring of the data flow. The invention allows a service to be configured to a low power consumption port dynamically according to counted data flow between the AP and the communication module, thereby reducing power consumption efficiently and extending standby working time while supporting the real-time requirement of communication in the system. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250568 | METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A CDMA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A novel and improved method and apparatus, in a WCDMA communication system, for informing a mobile station of a downlink data frame time offset by determining the downlink data frame time offset, and transmitting the downlink data frame time offset via an Active Set Update message transmitted from a cell to mobile station. Once an Active Set Update message is received, the data frame time offset information is provided to a timing block which may determine data frame boundary of each downlink signal. Timing block may then adjust the PN sequence timing corresponding to the downlink signal associated with the data frame time offset such that corresponding data symbols in each data frame are correctly soft combined in a combiner. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250569 | Internet Protocol Version 6 Network Connectivity in a Virtual Computer System - A method for sharing a network connection between a host system and a virtual machine includes receiving an incoming data frame. The host system is enabled to use the network connection using a first layer 2 address and a first layer 3 address. The first layer 2 and the first layer 3 addresses are associated with the network connection. The virtual machine is enabled to attempt to use the network connection using a second layer 2 address and a second layer 3 address. The first layer 3 and the second layer 3 addresses are compliant with IPv6. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257515 | Reference signal port discovery involving transmission points - A method includes receiving information indicating one or more sets of reference signal patterns from a first transmission point, wherein at least one of the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns corresponds to one of one or more other transmission points; measuring the channel quality for the indicated sets of reference signal patterns; and reporting indications of the measured channel quality for the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns to the first transmission point. Another method includes transmitting information indicating one or more sets of reference signal patterns from a first transmission point to a user equipment, wherein at least one of the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns corresponds to one of one or more other transmission points; and receiving from the user equipment indications of measured channel quality for the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257516 | Multi-Receiver Combining for Distributed Antenna Systems with Code Division Multiple Access Radio Frequency Uplink Sources - A distributed antenna system and related methods are provided to reduce interference among wireless mobile devices in a distributed antenna system. A combiner is provided that is configured to be coupled to a plurality of remote transceiver stations deployed in a coverage area and which wirelessly transmit downlink signals to and receive uplink signals from wireless mobile devices. A plurality of input streams that carry uplink signals transmitted by wireless mobile devices are received on individually assigned signal paths from each of the remote transceiver stations. At least one parameter of an input stream received from the one or more of the remote transceiver stations is monitored. A mapping function is determined based on the monitoring. The plurality of input streams are combined based on the mapping function to produce the two or more output streams and the two or more output streams are sent to corresponding receivers in a base station. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257517 | DATA RECEIVING DEVICES AND METHODS FOR RECEIVING DATA - According to an embodiments, a device may be provided. The device may include a data receiver configured to receive data in sets of consecutive packets from a data transmitter, wherein each set may include a first packet and at least one further packet. The device may further include a first packet reception determinator configured to determine whether the first packet of a set of consecutive packets is received by the data receiver. The device may further include a data sending determinator configured to determine whether the data transmitter sends the set of consecutive packets based on whether the first packet of the set of consecutive packets is received. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257518 | REAL-TIME PROBABILITY BASED CONTACT HANDLING TIME - Systems and methods are provided to estimate the amount of service time left in a contact with a contact center. A system records metadata factors associated with contacts and the service time for the contacts. This information is incorporated into one or more service time probability distributions. A service time probability distribution is a function describing how much time a contact, having certain, defined characteristics, took historically. The distribution can subsequently be used to estimate service time for future contacts that have the same or similar characteristics. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257519 | Method and Apparatus for Multi-Radio Coexistence on Adjacent Frequency Bands - A method and apparatus for a co-scheduler can mitigate UE-to-UE adjacent carrier frequency band interference by allocating three sets to a first user equipment uplink. Each set has at least one sub-carrier in a first frequency band, at least one uplink time period, and at least one transmission power parameter. The co-scheduler initially allocates the first set. The co-scheduler allocates the second set in response to detecting a second user equipment operating proximal to the first user equipment, and the second set differs from the first set in either at least one sub-carrier or at least one transmission power parameter. The co-scheduler allocates the third set in response to detecting that the second user equipment is no longer operating proximal to the first user equipment, and the third set differs from the second set in either at least one sub-carrier or at least one transmission power parameter. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257520 | APPARATUS FOR POWER MANAGEMENT IN A NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for power management in a network communication system including a legacy first network device is disclosed. The apparatus includes a second network device to serve as a client device to the first network device, a detector to generate a first signal if an idle status occurs in a first traffic from the first network device, and generate a second signal if a second traffic posterior to the first traffic is to be transmitted from the first network device, an identifier in response to the first signal to generate a third signal if the idle status exceeds a predetermined period of time, and a controller to disable the second network device in response to the third signal and hold the first network device from transmitting the second traffic in response to the second signal. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257521 | ADAPTIVE GUARD INTERVAL FOR WIRELESS COEXISTENCE - A coexistence interval includes a second part used by a second wireless network (for example, WLAN) and a first part used by a first wireless network (for example, Bluetooth). A Guard Interval (GI) defines an amount of time at the end of the second part and before the beginning of the first part during which communications in the second wireless network are not initiated. The amounts of time required to complete individual communications in the second network are measured and are used to change the rate of GI adjustment. In one example, if measurement values are fairly constant then the GI is adjusted at a slower rate, whereas if the stream of measurement values exhibits a relatively substantial and sustained increase then the rate of GI adjustment is increased. The GI and the rate of GI adjustment are dynamically adjusted based on response time measurement values. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257522 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO TERMINAL - A mobile communication method, which configures a DRX cycle having an On duration in which a downlink signal transmitted from a serving base station is to be monitored and an Off duration other than the On duration in an RRC connected state where an RRC connection is established between a radio terminal and a radio base station, the mobile communication method comprising: a step A of measuring, at the radio terminal, reception quality of a reference signal transmitted from a cell even in the Off duration when the DRX cycle is configured. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257523 | DYNAMIC RECEIVE DIVERSITY SWITCHING - Dynamically control of receive diversity switching in a user equipment (UE) is disclosed. By dynamically controlling the switching between enabling and disabling the receive diversity, power consumption in UEs, such as smart phones and other mobile devices may be reduced. Control is based, at least in part, on measurements for data activity performed by the UE. When the UE finds measurements that would suggest data activity, the UE will switch to enable a receive diversity state when conditions are available for the switch. Similarly, when the UE finds measurements that would suggest data inactivity, the UE will switch to disable the receive diversity state when conditions are available for the switch. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257524 | CSI REPORTING FOR MULTIPLE CARRIERS WITH DIFFERENT SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS - Techniques to support periodic reporting of channel state information (CSI) for multiple component carriers (CCs) with different system configurations are disclosed. A user equipment (UE) is configured with multiple CCs for carrier aggregation. Each CC is associated with a particular system configuration, which indicates whether FDD or TDD is utilized and, if TDD is utilized, a particular uplink-downlink configuration for the CC. Each CC is associated with a set of subframes available to send CSI on that CC, which is determined based on the system configuration of the CC. The multiple CCs configured for the UE include at least two CCs associated with different system configurations and different sets of subframes available to send CSI. The UE sends CSI for a first CC on a second CC based on a set of subframes available to send CSI on the second CC. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257525 | MOBILE ROUTER METHOD WITH RATE LIMITING - A method for operating a mobile router, comprises: transferring data via a cellular network at a data rate controlled by the router; receiving data rate information via the cellular network; and utilizing the data rate information to control the data rate of data subsequently transferred via said cellular network. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257526 | MOBILE ROUTER METHOD WITH PRIORITY RATE LIMITING - A method of operating a mobile router comprises: storing priority information associated with predetermined types of download data and data rate information associated with the priority information; determining the priority of download data received via the wide area network interface; determining if data is being transferred via the local area network interface; and controlling the data rate for the download data based on the download data priority, the priority information, the data rate configuration information, and whether data is being transferred via the local area network interface. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257527 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL/INTERNET PROTOCOL (TCP/IP) PACKET-CENTRIC WIRELESS POINT TO MULTI-POINT (PtMP) TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE - A packet-centric wireless system includes: a wireless base station communicating via a transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) to a first data network; one or more host workstations communicating via TCP/IP to the first data network; one or more subscriber customer premise equipment (CPE) stations coupled with the wireless base station over a shared bandwidth via TCP/IP over a wireless medium; and one or more subscriber workstations coupled via TCP/IP to each of the subscriber CPE stations over a second network. The system can allocate shared bandwidth among the subscriber CPE stations to optimize end-user quality of service (QoS). The first data network includes at least one of: a wireline network; a wireless network; a local area network (LAN); and a wide area network (WAN). The second network includes at least one of: a wireline network; a wireless network; a local area network (LAN); and a wide area network (WAN). | 10-11-2012 |
20120257528 | TRANSPORT CONTROL METHOD, ACCESS DEVICE, AND TRANSPORT SYSTEM - The present invention disclose a transport control method, an access device, and a transport system. The transport control method includes: monitoring a current impairment index of a network; determining, according to a transport quality grade corresponding to the monitored current impairment index of the network, the number of redundant blocks carried in a data packet to be sent and/or a packetization duration of the data packet to be sent, where the number of redundant blocks carried in the data packet and/or the packetization duration of the data packet has a preset mapping relationship with a transport quality grade; and packetizing and sending the data packet according to the determined number of the carried redundant blocks and/or the determined packetization duration. The present invention may improve flexibility of transport control and is beneficial to appropriate adaptation to real-time dynamic changes of a network impairment condition. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257529 | COMPUTER SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MONITORING COMPUTER SYSTEM - A computer system according to the present invention has: a switch configured to forward a received packet data to a destination in accordance with flow that is set in the switch; and a controller configured to set flow with respect to the switch, in response to first-packet receipt notification from the switch. The switch transmits the first-packet receipt notification to the controller and notifies the controller of a port number included in the received packet data. The controller obtains, from a server, an application name of an application using the port number and records, on a memory device, a correspondence relationship between the application name and the flow that is set with respect to the switch. It is thus possible to monitor statistical information with respect to each application, without being affected by a method of allocating port numbers to applications. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257530 | Communication Method and Devices for High Density Wireless Networks - This document describes a method for wireless communication in large-scale monitoring and actuation applications. Typically, these networks must be designed to use efficiently available bandwidth in the wireless communication channel and to be able to deal with high node densities. The method mitigates the effects of co-channel interference, while allowing spatially distributed simultaneous transmissions. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257531 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION EFFICIENTLY IN A MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting channel status information in a multi-carrier wireless communication system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, may include: receiving, at a receiving terminal, signals transmitted on N (N≧2) number of carriers from a transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal; determining, at the receiving terminal, channel status information for each of the N number of carriers from the received signals; and transmitting the channel status information for each of the N number of carriers on M (1≦M≦N) number of carriers from the receiving terminal to the transmitting terminal. The channel status information for each of the N number of carriers may be transmitted according to a channel status information reporting period for each of the N number of carriers and a channel status information reporting period offset. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257532 | RELAY DEVICE, RELAY SYSTEM, RELAY METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - A relay device according to the present invention includes an uplink signal relaying unit that performs an uplink signal relaying operation that amplifies an uplink signal transmitted through an uplink channel from a mobile station and re-transmits the amplified uplink signal to a base station; a frequency information acquisition unit that acquires frequency information that represents a frequency band that said mobile station uses for the uplink channel periodically or at predetermined timings; an uplink signal detection unit that determines whether or not the average reception power of the uplink signal in the frequency band represented by the frequency information acquired by said frequency information acquisition unit exceeds a predetermined threshold; and a control unit that controls the uplink signal relaying operation performed by said uplink signal relaying unit based on a determined result of said uplink signal detection unit. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257533 | ENHANCED DATA LINK COMMUNICATION OVER IRIDIUM - A method to reduce latency in a data link communication is provided. The method includes compressing a data packet to be uplinked from a ground station to an aircraft communications addressing and reporting system (ACARS) in an aircraft and determining a packet size of the data packet. The aircraft communications addressing and reporting system is configured to receive packets having a packet size less than or equal to a first threshold packet size. An Iridium router based unrestricted digital inter-working connectivity solution data service is implemented to uplink the compressed data packet if the packet size exceeds a second threshold packet size. A short burst data service is implemented to uplink the compressed data packet if the packet size is less than or equal to the second threshold packet size. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257534 | Assessment of Click or Traffic Quality - Systems and methods enable displaying an indication of traffic quality. The system retrieves keyword or other traffic data for at least one keyword associated with at least one search engine. The system compares the traffic data for a first time period to the traffic data for a second time period, according to one or more date ranges and other parameters selected by a user for each time period. As a result of the comparison, an indication of the traffic quality associated with a disparity between the first time period data and the second time period data, if any, is displayed. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263046 | Method And Apparatus For Determining Uplink Noise Power In A Wireless Communication System - In one embodiment, the method includes receiving signals from user equipment, despreading the received signals by applying an unused channelization code, and determining the uplink noise power based on output of the despreading. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263047 | Method and Apparatus to Detect the Transmission Bandwidth Configuration of a Channel in Connection with Reducing Interference Between Channels in Wirelss Communication Systems - In a method of detecting a transmission bandwidth configuration, the method includes monitoring ( | 10-18-2012 |
20120263048 | Methods for Even Hash Distribution for Port Channel with a Large Number of Ports - Embodiments described herein achieve even traffic load-balancing among physical ports in a port channel with 2 | 10-18-2012 |
20120263049 | BGP SLOW PEER DETECTION - In one embodiment, a router selects a particular peer from an original update group used with an Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP) such as Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). The original update group includes a plurality of peers of the router that share a same outbound policy and that receive common update messages, from the router, of routing table information. The router determines that the particular peer is a potential slow peer based on a first type of indicia, wherein a slow peer is a peer that cannot keep up with a rate at which the router generates update messages over a prolonged period of time. The router confirms that one or more second types of indicia are consistent with the particular peer being a slow peer. In response to the confirmation, the router determines that the particular peer is a slow peer. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263050 | WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE WITH POSITIONING FUNCTION AND METHOD THEREOF - A wireless network access device for positioning a mobile device includes a distance acquiring module, an information receiving module and a position determining module. The distance acquiring module acquires an initial distance between the wireless network access device and the mobile device in an initial position and an intermediate distance between the wireless network access device and the mobile device in an intermediate position. The information receiving module receives a distance, angle and orientation of movement of the mobile device from the initial position to the intermediate position. The position determining module determines a current position of the mobile device according to the received distance, angle and orientation of the mobile device, the initial distance and the intermediate distance. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263051 | TERMINAL-BASED SELECTION OF RADIO PARAMETERS AMONG A PARAMETER SUBSET OFFERED BY THE NETWORK - A method of operating a telecommunications system ( | 10-18-2012 |
20120263052 | Method and Device for Detecting Downlink Control Information - The present invention provides a method and device for detecting downlink control information, which relates to the communication field. The method includes: during cross carrier scheduling, the user equipment (UE) determines a search space for monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) according to the number of downlink component carriers in a PDCCH Monitoring Set and the number of downlink component carriers in a UE DL Component Carrier Set. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263053 | SENSOR NETWORK INFORMATION COLLECTION VIA MOBILE GATEWAY - There is provided a sensor network information collection mechanism in which, after a UE has decided to become part of an information collecting operation for collecting information from a local sensor network, a signaling transmitted from a managing node of a local sensor network is received and processed. A communication network control element is informed about the willingness to become an information collector by sending a report message comprising measurement results derived from the signaling received from the managing node of the local sensor network. When receiving a gateway allocation message indicating that the UE is determined to be a gateway element to the local sensor network, the information collecting operation is started wherein sensor nodes of the local sensor network are woke up, and a traffic flow direction in the local sensor network is set in accordance with the managing node identity to which the UE is accessed. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263054 | Method and Devices for a Communication System - The present invention relates to a method and devices for allowing a communication terminal to configure a measurement gap pattern on a downlink carrier frequency for measurement on a target carrier frequency by said communication terminal, the communication terminal being capable of performing measurements on at least two downlink carrier frequencies without measurement gap, the method comprising: obtaining an indication that there is a need for the measurement gap pattern, for performing the measurement on the target carrier frequency; retrieving information about how to configure the measurement gap pattern; and determining, based on the retrieved information, the downlink carrier frequency on which the measurement gap pattern is to be configured. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263055 | Fast Link Adaptation and Transmit Power Control in Wireless Networks - An open-loop fast link adaptation scheme is proposed in an OFDM system. An access point first transmits a downlink packet comprising an open-loop link metric to a wireless station. The open-loop link metric contains a transmit power of the downlink packet plus a receiver sensitivity of the access point. The wireless station measures a received signal strength indication (RSSI) value of the downlink packet. The wireless station then applies open-loop link adaptation and determines a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) based on the open-loop link metric and the RSSI value. The open-loop link adaptation scheme is especially suitable for smart meter/sensor networks as it reduces overhead and increases link capacity. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263056 | APPARATUS, METHODS, AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Selected embodiments are directed to methods, apparatus, and articles of manufacture for wireless radio frequency communications. Adjacent antenna array elements of a receiver antenna array are separated by less than the diffraction limit of the radio frequency communication band in which the apparatus and methods operate. A plurality or multiplicity of near-field scatterers are asymmetrically placed in the immediate vicinity of each of the antenna array elements, to perturb the pattern of each of the antenna elements, making the patterns different even below diffraction limit spacing. A transmitter spatially and temporally focuses simultaneous transmissions on each of the antenna array elements, using time reversal communication techniques. The transmitter may transmit through multiple antenna elements, and the channel from the transmitter to the receiver may be subject to multipath phenomena. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263057 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING SUBFRAME AND TRANSMITTING CHANNEL INFORMATION FOR CONTROLLING INTERFERENCE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for operating a subframe and transmitting channel information for controlling interference in a communication system are provided. If a macro evolved Node B (eNodeB) determines and reports an uplink protection subframe for suppressing uplink transmission to a neighboring eNodeB, transmits scheduling information for uplink data through a downlink subframe corresponding to an uplink protection subframe, and the uplink protection subframe determined by the neighboring eNodeB is reported, a small eNodeB sets the reported uplink protection subframe as a flexible subframe, and uses the flexible subframe for downlink transmission. If the flexible subframe is used for the downlink transmission, a terminal of the small eNodeB measures and transmits non-period channel information in the flexible subframe through at least one uplink subframe. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263058 | TESTING SHAPED TCP TRAFFIC - A testing system for a TCP network that provides an innovative and bounded test approach to a network configuration that otherwise would require live user traffic and subjective means to determine if the traffic was being shaped or policed. The parameters of a network segment are determined, and then a plurality of connections are used to properly stress network buffers and the traffic shaping function. A throughput chart can then be generated to determine if the network segment has been properly shaped. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263059 | MOBILE TERMINAL, WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM HAVING THE MOBILE TERMINAL, AND SCANNING METHOD OF THE WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile terminal includes an acceleration sensor, and a wireless network system includes the mobile terminal including a sensor for generating a signal corresponding to a movement of the mobile terminal; a status management module for detecting a moving status of the mobile terminal by using the signal from the sensor, and for sensing a strength of a signal provided from a base station to which the mobile terminal is connected; a scanning module for performing a scanning operation with respect to adjacent base stations according to a result of the detecting and a result of the sensing; and a memory for storing information collected via the scanning operation. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263060 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, CONTROL PROGRAM FOR MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT FOR BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - Efficient transmission control of power headroom is performed by a mobile station apparatus that includes a power headroom control unit which manages a power headroom which is a difference between a maximum transmit power value determined for each uplink carrier component by a base station and a predetermined power value estimated for uplink transmission. A path loss measurement unit monitors a path loss of a downlink carrier component informed from the base station among a plurality of downlink carrier components. When a path loss value of any downlink carrier component changes more than a predetermined value, the power headroom control unit modifies transmission to the base station apparatus of the power headroom for uplink transmission corresponding to all the downlink carrier components set by the base station apparatus. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263061 | Method and Apparatus for Generating Channel Quality Estimates - A base station receives channel quality reports from a plurality of mobile terminals. The channel quality reports from the mobile terminals indicate the signal power of the signals received by the mobile terminals from the base station and one or more interference parameters relating to the power of impairment components contributing to the total impairment of the received signal during a first time interval. The base station computes an estimated channel quality indication for a second time interval subsequent to the first time interval based on expected variations in the powers of the impairment components. The estimated channel quality indication for the second time interval is used by the base station to schedule the mobile terminals and to determine the transmission format. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263062 | TRANSPORT CONTROL SERVER, TRANSPORT CONTROL SYSTEM, AND TRANSPORT CONTROL METHOD - A passage channel is calculated by taking into account a plurality of requirements having different importance degrees. A channel calculation unit ( | 10-18-2012 |
20120263063 | Client Entity, Network Entity and Data Replacement Entity - The present invention relates to a client entity being capable of communicating over a communication network. The client entity comprises a receiver ( | 10-18-2012 |
20120263064 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - To appropriately transmit “entering/leaving proximity indication” while preventing the wastage of radio resources. A mobile station UE according to the present invention is configured not to transmit “entering proximity indication” even when an entry into a predetermined area # | 10-18-2012 |
20120263065 | METHOD FOR PREDICTING THE DATA RATE IN ACCESSES ON AN ASYMMETRIC DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER LINE - Disclosed is a method for predicting the performance of a metal pair for broadband accesses from reflectometry measurements taken from a single point of the access network, specifically from the telephone exchange, the method being able to be carried out from the raw data provided by the DSLAM, as well as from data already prepared by management and configuration tools. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263066 | COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS - Disclosed is a communications apparatus comprising: a first medium interface circuit that communicates data over a powerline medium, a first medium access controller, for controlling the first medium interface circuit, said first medium access controller having a first MAC address; a second medium interface circuit that is 802.11 compliant and which communicates data wirelessly, a second medium access controller, which controls the second medium interface circuit, said second medium access controller having a second MAC address; and a communications medium access controller that is operative to provide for communication of data simultaneously over the powerline medium and wirelessly by way of the first and second medium interface circuits; wherein said first medium interface circuit and said second medium interface circuit are linked at the layer II level of the OSI model. A network of said devices is also disclosed, the network possibly including device connected via only one of the media. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263067 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING COMPONENT CARRIER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and a method for determining a preferred component carrier (CC) to be used by a first station and a second station in a wireless communication system using a plurality of component carriers (CCs). According to the present invention, it is possible to lower inter-cell interference (ICI) with adjacent cells between the first station and the second station, and to improve the transmission efficiency. Further, the invention is capable of efficiently operating the plurality of component carriers. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263068 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile terminal apparatus, a radio base station apparatus and a radio communication method are provided which can perform optimum control during downlink CoMP transmission in an LTE-A system. The radio communication method according to the present invention includes steps of the mobile terminal apparatus receiving downlink signals including reference signals from a plurality of radio base station apparatuses associated with downlink CoMP, transmitting feedback information including the channel quality measurement results to the plurality of radio base station apparatuses, and steps of a radio base station apparatus receiving uplink signals including channel quality measurement results of a plurality of radio base station apparatuses associated with downlink CoMP and cell information on radio base station apparatuses whose average reception levels are within a first threshold range, and controlling, when there are radio base station apparatuses whose average reception level difference is within a second threshold range among radio base station apparatuses whose average reception levels are within the first threshold range, transmission power for both radio base station apparatuses. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263069 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS VIDEO AREA NETWORK - A method and system for device discovery in a wireless network is provided. The device discovery involves directionally transmitting a data unit from a transmitting station over a channel in different directions to emulate omni-directional transmission, receiving the data unit transmissions from different directions at a receiving station, determining the quality of the transmissions received from the different directions, and detecting location information for the transmitting station relative to the receiving station based on the highest quality transmission among the transmissions received from the different directions. Further, if a channel has sufficient bandwidth to satisfy direct link communication between two stations, then during a direct link set-up stage, the two stations conduct a probing message exchange using omni-direction transmission, and upon successful probing, obtain communication link status information and set proper communication configurations for the two stations based on the communication link status information. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263070 | Adjustment of Background Scanning Interval Based on Network Usage - In a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), roaming from one access point to another by a mobile station without interruption to network service may be facilitated by frequently performing background scans to find neighboring access points while the mobile station is associated to the WLAN. Frequent background scanning, however, depletes battery life. By dynamically adjusting the background scanning interval during the mobile station's association to the WLAN, the mobile station's immediate need for network connectivity performance may be met, while simultaneously prolonging battery life. For example, by using a shorter background scanning interval during a telephone conversation, network connectivity performance may be maintained throughout the call. Longer background scanning intervals may be used during periods when interruptions to network connectivity may be better tolerated. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263071 | DPI MATRIX ALLOCATOR - A deep packet inspection (DPI) allocator for managing bandwidth in a communication channel, the DPI allocator comprising: a DPI application for inspecting data packets propagating to a destination via the channel that enter the allocator; and at least one service application for processing data packets that enter the allocator. | 10-18-2012 |
20120269075 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR BROADCAST AND MULTICAST/UNICAST TRANSITION - Mechanisms are provided for efficient transition between broadcast media reception and multicast/unicast media reception. Broadcast media quality is dynamically analyzed to determine when transition is appropriate. Broadcast services are mapped to multicast/unicast delivered services. Transition occurs smoothly by acquiring both broadcast and multicast/unicast media during transition and analyzing timing data to allow for media stream alignment and switchover. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269076 | ANTENNA DIVERSITY FOR MAGNETIC INDUCTION RADIO - A magnetic induction system is disclosed, which has antenna diversity at the transmitter side, but which does not require a bidirectional link to pass information regarding received signal quality back to the transmitter. The system uses a time division multiplexing access (TDMA) arrangement, to transmit the same, or correlated, information with a level of redundancy, from two, or more, antenna to at least a receiver. The or each receiver is configured to determine a received signal quality from the channel received from one antenna, and, in response to inadequate signal quality, to switch to another antenna. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269077 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A PRECODING VECTOR FOR PRECODING DATA TO BE TRANSMITTED TO A WIRELESS DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for determining a precoding vector for precoding data to be transmitted to a wireless device, includes receiving first channel state information of a channel between a first wireless device and a first base station. The first channel state information is received by the first base station from the first wireless device. The method includes receiving first channel gain information of a channel between a second wireless device and the first base station. The first channel gain information is received from the second base station. The method includes receiving a first signal strength parameter from the second base station and a first interference strength parameter from the second base station and maximizing a common signal to interference noise ratio parameter to obtain a precoding vector for precoding data to be transmitted to the first wireless device. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269078 | POWER ADAPTATION APPARATUS AND POWER ADAPTATION METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK/DOWNLINK POWER - A power adaptation apparatus for a wireless communication channel includes a power ratio compensator. The power ratio compensator is capable of receiving a channel quality indicator and compensating a power ratio parameter according to the channel quality indicator, wherein the power ratio parameter defines a relation between power of the wireless communication channel and power of another wireless communication channel, and is referenced for setting the power of the wireless communication channel. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269079 | SCANNING NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of scanning neighboring base stations for measuring channel quality in a wireless communication system includes receiving, by a mobile station from a serving base station, information associated with at least one neighboring base station; transmitting, by the mobile station to the serving base station, a scanning request message to request an allocation of a scanning interval for scanning, the scanning request message including parameters associated with a requested scan duration, a requested interleaving interval, and a requested scan iteration, wherein the requested interleaving interval is interleaved between each scan; and receiving, by the mobile station from the serving base station, a scanning response message including an allowed scan duration parameter in response to the scanning request message, wherein the allowed scan duration parameter is set to zero to indicate that the request for the allocation of the scanning interval is denied. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269080 | CARRIER SENSE-BASED RANGING - Wireless local area networks (WLANs) provide wireless communication between various wireless devices. Frames are acknowledged (ACKed) after a short and predefined MAC idle time. The MAC idle time varies with 1) the physical distance between wireless devices, caused by the delay of wireless signal propagation, and 2) the time to detect the ACK at the local wireless device, which varies with the signal strength of the incoming ACK. Embodiments present CAESAR (CArriEr Sense-bAsed Ranging), which combines time of flight (TOF) and signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) measurements to calculate the distance between two wireless devices. CAESAR measures the distance by estimating the MAC idle time in a data/ACK communication at a particular clock resolution and the ACK detection time on a per-frame basis. Performance measurements confirm the accuracy of the solution and show the capability to track the distance to WLAN smart phones at pedestrian speeds. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269081 | Estimating Mobile Local Propagation Environment Characteristics For Wireless Communications - Characterization and enhancement of a mobile local scattering environment. The system includes a channel component and a link control component, wherein the channel component facilitates communication of a ping signal, which is used to estimate the delay spread characteristics and/or angle of arrival in order to characterize the mobile local scattering environment. This information is sent to the link control component, which enhances radio link performance based on the received information. The system can be used to assist in E-911 location applications, such as determining the location of an indoor user. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269082 | DETERMINATION OF SYSTEM PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - A method of determining system performance parameters, such as delay, present in a network where the network is one of a plurality of heterogeneous networks in a communication system. The communication comprises a first network and a first node, both controlled by a first network operator, and a second network controlled by a second network operator. The first node is located in the second network. The method comprises the steps of: the first node communicating with at least one other node; the first node obtaining system-related information as a result of this communication; the system-related information being used to derive the system performance parameters of the second network. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269083 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention relates to a communication device ( | 10-25-2012 |
20120269084 | RADIO BASE STATION - A reception quality in a radio base station eNB is estimated with a high accuracy by using a reference signal. The radio base station eNB according to the present invention includes signal power estimation units | 10-25-2012 |
20120269085 | Multicast-Based Inference of Temporal Loss Characteristics in Packet Data Networks - Disclosed are method and apparatus for characterizing the temporal loss characteristics of a packet data network by multicast-based inference. Multicast probes are transmitted from a source node to a plurality of receiver nodes, which record the arrivals of the multicast probes. From the aggregate data comprising recorded arrivals of the end-to-end paths from the source node to each receiver node, temporal loss characteristics of individual links within the network may be calculated. In a network with a tree topology, the complexity of calculations may be reduced through a process of subtree partitioning. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269086 | PACKET LOSS DETECTING METHOD AND APPARATUS, AND ROUTER - A packet loss detecting method includes: a first router counts received packets and sent packets respectively according to a class of service value of a packet in each tunnel; the first router generates a first packet loss detection packet corresponding to the class of service value, sends the first packet loss detection packet to a second router at a peer end, and receives a first packet loss response packet returned by the second router; and the first router corresponds a class of service value, and measures a packet loss value according to a locally recorded count value and a count value carried in the first packet loss response packet. With the technical solution, packet disorder does not occur when packet loss measurement is performed for a pseudo-wire with multiple classes of service. In addition, traffic detection occupies a smaller bandwidth. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269087 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK TRAFFIC SWITCHING - The embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for controlling network traffic switching. The method for controlling network traffic switching includes: establishing a direct link interface, where the direct link interface has an address attribute of a peer node, and a value of the attribute is a peer node address of the direct link; and comparing a border gateway protocol (BGP) next-hop address of each route in a routing table with the peer node address of the direct link, and switching traffic on a route that matches a comparison result to the direct link. By using the preceding technical solution, after a direct link is established between nodes, a relevant node establishes a new type of interface for the direct link. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269088 | METHOD FOR BUILDING AD HOC NETWORK - Before software for a routing protocol in a second wireless terminal receives a routing packet between a first wireless terminal and the second wireless terminal that are both included in an ad hoc network, stability determining software determines whether or not a link between the first wireless terminal, which is the source of the routing packet, and the second wireless terminal is stable. When the link is determined to be stable, the software for the routing protocol in the second wireless terminal processes the routing packet. This allows building of a route using only a stable link between adjacent nodes. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269089 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING INTERLAYER DEVICES AND OPTIMIZING NETWORK PERFORMANCE - A system and method is disclosed for monitoring and optimizing interlayer network performance that includes determining at the data link layer of a network device whether there is degradation in transmission performance over at least one link in the network using network performance information data and if so, the system and method communicates from data link layer of the network device to a second layer of the network device information regarding the degradation in transmission performance associated with the at least one link in the network. The system and method optimizes, at the second layer of the network device, network performance to overcome the degradation in the transmission performance associated with the at least one link in the network. | 10-25-2012 |
20120275318 | METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY SHARING A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL BETWEEN COORDINATION AND INTERFERENCE - A method for sharing a communication channel between a first network and a second network. The method includes transmitting a signal from the second network to the first network in response to the second network detecting presence of the first network. The signal includes a predetermined sequence measuring the strength of the signal arriving at the first network and transmitting a unification request from the first network to the second network when a metric based on the measured strength is less than a unification threshold. The unification request invites the second network to coordinate operation with the first network to reduce interference between the first network and the second network. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275319 | CONCURRENT TRANSMISSION OF WI-FI AND BLUETOOTH SIGNALS - A method and device for concurrently transmitting a Wi-Fi signal and a Bluetooth signal via a common power amplifier and antenna. A first set of values indicative of transmission power levels of a Wi-Fi signal and a corresponding set of values indicative of transmission power levels of a BT signal are stored in a table. Information about activities pertaining to the BT signal including a value of a transmission power level of the BT signal is received. Based on the received value of the transmission power level of the BT signal, a corresponding value of a transmission power level of the Wi-Fi signal may be looked up from the table. Transmission of one or more of the Wi-Fi or BT signals may be controlled, based on at least one of the received information or the looked-up value of the transmission power level of the Wi-Fi signal. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275320 | SIGNAL STRENGTH AWARE BAND STEERING - A system or method that receives a current request from a client, and responds to the current request based on signal strength associated with a previous request. If the current request is received on a non-preferred communication band, and a previous request was received on a preferred communication band within a pre-determined time, the system determines whether the signal strength associated with the previous request is weaker than a pre-determined threshold signal strength level for the preferred communication band. If so, the system responds to the current request. Otherwise, the system ignores the current request. If no recent request on the preferred communication band is received, and the signal strength associated with the current request is weaker than a pre-determined threshold signal strength level for the non-preferred communication band, the system responds to the current request on the non-preferred communication band. Otherwise, the system ignores the current request. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275321 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ARBITRATION OF UPDATES PROVIDED TO A UNIVERSAL INTEGRATED CIRCUIT CARD - Systems and methodologies are described that determine whether to communicate an update message to a UICC. A UE may be equipped a status update message from at least one of a first radio access technology (RAT) module supporting a first RAT and a second RAT module supporting a second RAT. The first RAT and the second RAT are different. Further, the UE may be equipped to determine whether to generate a universal integrated circuit card (UICC) update message to update a UICC by applying one or more RAT arbitration factors to the received status update message. The UICC includes current UICC status information associated with a current RAT. A status update message may include, a service status, RAT information, and location information, and the UE may apply the RAT arbitration factors to at least a portion of the status update message. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275322 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESTRICTED MEASURING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include determining resources over which to measure signals from a base station. One or more parameters related to a resource restriction pattern can be provided to the device for measuring signals over indicated resources. The resource restricted pattern can correspond to a bitmap where each bit relates to a time period over which signals can be transmitted by the base station, and the bit can specify whether a signal received over the resource should be measured. The resource restriction pattern can correspond to a set or protected resources negotiated using a resource partitioning scheme. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275323 | SCALABLE POLICY-CONTROLLED PACKET INSPECTION SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ADVANCED APPLICATION INTERFACE - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed to determine quality of service information. A device, such as a user equipment (UE), may receive a policy. The policy may indicate a level of inspection relating to application identification for a session. The device may receive information associated with the session. For example, the information may include application provided information, packet data, operating system provided information, etc. The device may perform an inspection of the received information at the level indicated by the policy. The device may perform the inspection in order to identify an application associated with the session. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275324 | PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND PACKET RECEPTION SYSTEM - This invention provides a simultaneous packet transmission system and a simultaneous packet reception system which enable a reception side to receive simultaneous packets without transmitting a retransmission request to retransmit discarded simultaneous packets even if part of simultaneous packets are discarded. A wireless LAN base station multicasts a simultaneous packet which is obtained by allocating a sequence number to a LAN packet a plurality of times. If a wireless LAN terminal receives the same simultaneous packets a plurality of times, the wireless LAN terminal discards duplicated simultaneous packets and leaves only one simultaneous packet. Since the simultaneous packet is multicast a plurality of times, the wireless LAN terminal can receive the simultaneous packet as long as all the same simultaneous packets are not lost. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275325 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - In a communication apparatus, based on the relationship among a first port for outputting frames including tag information, a frame destination address, and bandwidth specified to the first port, a controller generates threshold value information to be associated with a second port to which the frames including tag information are input. With respect to the frames input from the second port, a reception processor measures a reception rate according to the tag information and the frame destination address, and selects, based on the reception rate and the threshold value information, frames to be preferentially discarded at the first port. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275326 | Non-Beacon Network Communications Using Frequency Subbands - Systems and methods for designing, using, and/or implementing non-beacon network communications using frequency subbands are described. In various implementations, these systems and methods may be applicable to Power Line Communications (PLC). For example, a method may include transmitting a beacon request message over a given one of a plurality of frequency subbands, receiving a plurality of beacons in response to having transmitted the beacon request message, each of the plurality of beacons received over a respective one of the plurality of frequency subbands, and calculating a downlink quality report based, at least in part, upon the received beacons. The method may also include transmitting the downlink quality report over each of the plurality of frequency subbands and receiving a subband allocation command in response to having transmitted the downlink quality report, the subband allocation command indicating a downlink subband assignment and an uplink subband assignment. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275327 | NETWORK-CENTRIC LINK ADAPTATION FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION - A Coordinated MultiPoint (CoMP) cell controller performs network-centric link adaptation for User Equipment (UE) in the CoMP cell. The CoMP cell controller receives at least infrequent channel estimates from a UE in the CoMP cell, from which it estimates downlink channel and thermal noise at the UE. The CoMP cell controller is aware of the desired signal to be received at the UE, and the intra-CoMP cell interference to the UE caused by transmissions to other UEs in the CoMP cell. The CoMP cell receives from the UE reports of inter-CoMP cell interference caused by transmissions by other CoMP cells. Based on the downlink channel quality, the desired signal, the intra-CoMP cell interference, the inter-CoMP cell interference, and the thermal noise, the CoMP cell controller performs link adaptation by selecting modulation and coding schemes, and other transmission parameters, for an upcoming transmission duration (such as a TTI). | 11-01-2012 |
20120275328 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN VIRTUAL SERVERS - Under the environment that IP addresses of virtual machines overlap, it makes it possible to carry out a communication between the virtual machines and for a network manager to grasp in a communication flow condition in real time. Specifically, the physical server assigns a virtual machine ID to the virtual server under the management, and assigns a reception-side virtual machine ID and a transmission-side virtual machine ID to a bit space of a transmission packet in the form of TCP/IP packet, when a communicating between the virtual servers through a network. Then, the physical server transmits the transmission packet onto the network. A physical switch is provided on the network connecting between the physical servers, and identifies the transmission packet based on the virtual machine ID contained in a bit space other than data of the transmission packet under the environment that IP addresses of the virtual machines overlap on the network, and collects data showing a network condition. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275329 | Method and Apparatus for Enhancement of Cell ID-Based Position Determination in TD-SCDMA Multimode Terminals - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which the method of wireless communication includes identifying a reference cell; selecting a plurality of candidate cells based on a criteria; determining a characteristic for the reference cell and the plurality of candidate cells; and setting a position based on the determined characteristic. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275330 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CUBIC METRIC COMPUTATION IN DUAL-CARRIER AND MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method is disclosed that comprises receiving at least two sets of gain values, wherein each set of gain values denotes the gains of a set of code channels that are carried by each of at least two carriers; receiving at least two power or amplitude levels that are allocated to the at least two carriers; and calculating a cubic metric based on the received at least two sets of gain values and the received at least two power or amplitude levels. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275331 | Random Data Stream Sampling - There is provided a method of sampling data elements from a data stream for subsequent analysis, the data stream comprising a plurality of data elements, wherein each data element has a respective unique quasi-random identifier determined from a set of identifiers, the method comprising selecting data elements from the data stream whose identifiers are within a first element selection range to give a set of selected data elements, the first element selection range being a subset of the set of identifiers; wherein, once the set of selected data elements comprises a predetermined number of data elements, the method further comprises: determining a second element selection range as a proper subset of the first element selection range; discarding data elements from the set of selected data elements whose identifiers are not within the second element selection range; and selecting at least one further data element from the data stream whose identifier is within the second element selection range for the set of selected data elements. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275332 | INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - An interference avoidance method performed by an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The method includes: transmitting a training request (TRQ) message for requesting transmission of a sounding frame to a first station which is a target of multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) transmission and a second station which receives data through a direct link during the MU-MIMO transmission; receiving first and second sounding frames respectively transmitted by the first and second stations in response to the TRQ message; estimating a channel by using the first sound frame to determine a beam-forming vector to be used for the MU-MIMO transmission; and performing the MU-MIMO transmission for MU-MIMO transmission target stations including the first station, wherein the beam-forming vector is determined such that the MU-MIMO transmission has a minimum effect on the second station by considering channel information between the AP and the second station and acquired on the basis of the second sounding frame received from the second station. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275333 | PERFORMING A TIME MEASUREMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for performing a time measurement on a data flow transmitted from a transmitter to a receiver of a communication network is provided. The method comprises: at the transmitter, dividing the data flow in first and second time alternating blocks of data units, transmitting them, increasing a transmission counter while the first blocks are transmitted and setting a transmission timestamp to a current time when a predetermined data unit of each first block is transmitted; at the receiver, receiving the first and second blocks, increasing a reception counter while the first blocks are received and setting a reception timestamp to a further current time when the predetermined data unit of each first block is received; and at a management server, periodically detecting values of the transmission counter, the reception counter, the transmission timestamp and the reception timestamp, and using them for performing the time measurement. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275334 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control apparatus in which, when requested to transmit (transmission) terminal information from information processing means, a transmission timing controller obtains past own terminal communication band information from an information storage, and determines whether or not to control a transmission timing. Moreover, the transmission timing controller calculates a back-off parameter for the control based on a past reception power information history that is obtained from the information storage, and sets a back-off parameter to a transmission device. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275335 | METHOD FOR SENDING SIGNALS FROM BASE STATION AND ENERGY-SAVING BASE STATION - A method for sending signals from a base station is provided, which includes: setting an energy-saving flag when intending to enter an energy-saving mode; notifying the energy-saving mode corresponding to the energy-saving flag to a User Equipment (UE); and sending signals in the energy-saving mode applied after setting the energy-saving flag. The energy-saving flag may be a Reference Symbol (RS) energy-saving indication, data transmission bandwidth indication, or an indication of reducing antennas for sending data. When the cell load is light, the method and the energy-saving base station provided herein change the bandwidth of transmitting downlink RSs of the cell dynamically to reduce energy consumption of the base station without changing the cell bandwidth which is a critical parameter, and relieve impact on the service caused by power consumption reduction but add no complexity to the UE. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275336 | Methods And Apparatus for Dynamically Adjusting A Data Packet Window Size For Data Packet Transmission In A Wireless Communication Network - A router is operative to perform the following actions for each one of a plurality of wireless mobile devices operating in a wireless network. The router transmits to the wireless mobile device a number of data packets matched for a window size. The router changes the window size for the wireless mobile device based on whether a round trip time for communicating the data packets is within a threshold value. The router will update the threshold value based on the round trip times associated with traffic communicated via the router for all of the wireless mobile devices. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275337 | SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING HIGH QUALITY SPEECH SIGNALS ON A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - The VolP quality speech process is activated when a subscriber accesses a speech quality sensitive resource or in response to an activation of the feature by the subscriber, or when it is determined that the originating subscriber terminal device requires the transmission of high quality speech signals. A transmit buffer, associated with the port circuit that serves the originating device, stores a predetermined number of packets as they are transmitted from the originating device. In the case of lost or damaged packets, the VolP quality speech system activates the transmit buffer to retransmit the missing or damaged packet to the destination device. Intelligent buffer management is provided, where the destination device can regulate the size of the transmit buffer as well as the size of its jitter buffer. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281551 | METHOD FOR SETTING A MOBILE NODE SPECIFIC CYCLIC PREFIX IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION - The invention concerns a method and an apparatus implementing the method. In the method is determined in a mobile node whether the mobile node supports mobile node specific cyclic prefixes. The mobile node transmits to a base station node an indication whether the mobile node supports mobile node specific cyclic prefixes. The base station node measures a delay spread of a radio resource transmitted by the mobile node. The mobile node receives an indication of an uplink direction cyclic prefix length from the base station node. The mobile node forms a cyclic prefix of the uplink direction cyclic prefix length selected from a useful symbol, adds the cyclic prefix in front of the useful symbol and transmits a signal comprising the cyclic prefix and the useful symbol to the base station. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281552 | MEASUREMENT AND FEEDBACK CALCULATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for performing measurement by a radio apparatus is presented. In one embodiment, the method includes determining raw measurements (e.g., a channel estimation and a noise variance estimation) of a subband and determining a rank indicator (RI) without requiring a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) search. The method includes calculating, based at least on the raw measurements, a mean instantaneous capacity (MIC) for the subband and determining a channel quality indicator (CQI) and a PMI based at least on the MIC. In one embodiment, the method uses subband-based measurements for performing feedback/measurement. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281553 | IDLE MODE RECEIVE ANTENNA DIVERSITY SYSTEM - Electronic devices may be provided that contain wireless communications circuitry. The wireless communications circuitry may include radio-frequency transceiver circuitry coupled to multiple antennas. An electronic device may alternate between a sleep mode and a wake mode. During wake mode, the electronic device may monitor a paging channel in a wireless network for incoming paging signals. The device may use either a single antenna mode or a multiple antenna mode such as a dual antenna mode in monitoring the paging channel. In the single antenna mode, a single active antenna is used to receive paging signals. In the dual antenna mode two antennas are simultaneously used to receive paging signals. The device may choose which antenna mode to use based on signal quality measurements and history information on successfully received paging signals. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281554 | Methods and Systems of Wireless Communication with Remote Radio Heads - A method for transmitting control information in a telecommunications cell is provided. The method includes a transmission point in the cell transmitting a unicast PDCCH intended only for a specific UE in the cell. The unicast PDCCH contains at least one resource element in each resource element group. The at least one resource element contains a UE-specific DMRS that can be used for decoding the unicast PDCCH without the cell-specific reference signal. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281555 | Systems and Methods of Wireless Communication with Remote Radio Heads - A method for communication in a telecommunications cell is provided. The method includes a macro-eNB transmitting a UE-specific SRS to a specific UE in the cell over at least one TP. The method further includes the UE receiving the UE-specific SRS, measuring the UE-specific SRS, and feeding back to the macro-eNB information about a downlink channel from the TP to the UE, the information being based on the measurement. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281556 | MULTI-CELL COORDINATED TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method is described for fast coordinated transmissions in a multi-point system, which involves a UE receiving known pilot signals sent from a set of transmission antennas and determining, based on the known pilot signals from the set of transmission antennas, a recommended first subset of transmission antennas from which transmissions are not intended for the wireless communication device, and a recommended second subset of transmission antennas from which transmissions are intended for the wireless communication device. The UE also determines a recommended transmission power setting of each of the first subset of transmission antennas; sending information to the base station, wherein the information pertains to the recommended first and second subsets of transmission antennas and the recommended transmission power setting of each of the first subset of transmission antennas. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281557 | TECHNIQUES FOR PRIVILEGED NETWORK ROUTING - Techniques for privileged network routing are provided. As traffic is received at a gateway of a network backbone provider environment it is interrogated for predefined criteria. If the traffic satisfies the predefined criteria, then the information is routed within the network backbone provider environment to use a set of reserved and restricted resources to provide premium service for the traffic being routed through the network backbone provider environment. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281558 | TEMPERATURE-DRIVEN AIRLINK SELECTION IN A MULTI-MODE WIRELESS DEVICE - A method and system for temperature-driven airlink selection in a multi-mode wireless device is disclosed. The method may include monitoring a temperature in the multi-mode wireless device while the multi-mode wireless device operates in a first airlink mode, determining whether to switch the airlink mode of the multi-mode wireless device in response to a change in the monitored temperature, and switching the multi-mode wireless device to operate in a second airlink mode in response to a determination to switch the airlink mode. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281559 | MAXIMUM TRANSFER UNIT (MTU) OPTIMIZATION FOR ADVANCED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A network device is configured to identify a configured maximum segment size value, for a wireless access network associated with the network device, which is calculated to prevent fragmentation over the wireless access network. The network device is configured to receive, from a first computing device, a synchronization message including an initial maximum segment size value for a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) socket connection between the first computing device and a second computing device that uses the wireless access network. When the initial maximum segment size value is larger than the configured maximum segment size value, the network device is configured to replace the initial maximum segment size value with the configured maximum segment size value to create a modified synchronization message, and send the modified synchronization message to the second computing device for establishing the TCP socket connection. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281560 | Communication System and Method - A method of determining information on network resources in a packet-based internetwork comprising multiple routing nodes, the method comprising: distributing user software to each of multiple end-user terminals connected to the internetwork, the user software having a primary user function other than the collection of network data; in association with the user software, distributing secondary code configured to participate in the collection of data by probing different routes from the respective end-user terminal to a destination terminal over the internetwork, each route passing via a plurality of said routing nodes; receiving data resulting from the probing performed by the secondary code on the multiple end-user terminals, including data resulting from routes involving the routing nodes of different network service providers; and determining estimates of network resources based on the received data. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281561 | ADAPTIVE FAST DORMANCY IN A MOBILE DEVICE - Method, apparatus and computer program product to adapt the timing for releasing connections between a mobile wireless device and a wireless network is described. The mobile wireless device monitors data activity, and the value of a fast dormancy timer increases when data activity increases and decreases when data activity decreases. The mobile wireless device counts successive time intervals that include data activity and changes the value of the fast dormancy timer based on a preferred fast dormancy timer value related to the successive time interval count. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281562 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RENDERING VIDEO WITH RETRANSMISSION DELAY - A system, apparatus, and method for rendering a video stream, the video stream having a plurality of frames. One method includes receiving the plurality of frames via a network, each frame having an estimated arrival time, determining a retransmission rendering delay, based on a round-trip delay and a round-trip delay constant, for a current frame of the plurality of frames using a processor, determining a render time for the current frame using a sum of the current frame's estimated arrival time and the retransmission rendering delay, and rendering the current frame at the render time. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281563 | WTRU Measurements Handling to Mitigate In-Device Interference - A method for performing measurements in a device with at least two radio access technologies (RATs) is disclosed. The method may include establishing a first measurement schedule on a first RAT, and establishing a first transmission schedule for a second RAT. The method may further include changing at least one of the first measurement schedule or the first transmission schedule to prevent measurements of the first measurement schedule from occurring contemporaneously with transmissions of the first transmission schedule. Transmissions from the second RAT may interfere with measurements on the first RAT. The method may include transitioning from the first measurement mode to a second measurement mode based determining the second RAT is operating on potentially interfering frequency. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281564 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-POINT HSDPA COMMUNICATION UTILIZING A MULTI-LINK PDCP SUBLAYER - A method and apparatus for wireless communication may provide a multi-link PDCP sublayer in a radio network controller capable of allocating PDCP PDUs among a plurality of RLC entities for use in a multi-point HSDPA network. Some aspects of the disclosure address issues relating to out-of-order delivery of the PDCP PDUs to a UE, such as unnecessary retransmissions. That is, the disclosed multi-link PDCP may be capable of distinguishing between sequence number gaps that are caused by physical layer transmission failures and those caused merely by skew. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281565 | APPARATUSES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING LOCATION OF A MOBILE DEVICE(S) IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM(S) - Distributed antenna systems provide location information regarding client devices communicating with remote antenna units (RAU) in a service area. The location information can be used to determine the location of client devices relative to the RAU(s) with which the client devices are communicating. A location processing unit (LPU) is configured to provide location information for client devices. The LPU includes a control system configured to receive uplink radio frequency (RF) signals communicated by a client device wirelessly communicating to a plurality of RAUs. The control system determines location information for a client device based on which RAU receives the strongest signal from the client device. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281566 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CONNECTIVITY TO A NETWORK - Method and apparatus for controlling connectivity to a network for intermittent data services are disclosed. A new dormant mode is defined such that a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may transition from a connected state or an idle state to the dormant mode based on triggering conditions. The WTRU may transition from a connected state or an idle state to a dormant mode if the characteristic or the priority of the data matches a characteristics or a priority for the dormant mode and operate using configuration which is different from configuration used for the connected state or the idle state. The WTRU in the dormant mode may perform a WTRU-controlled mobility procedure. The WTRU in the dormant mode may maintain a dedicated resource, such as a cell radio network temporary identity (C-RNTI), for receiving a unicast traffic from the network. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281567 | Methods and Systems of Wireless Communication with Remote Radio Heads - A method of operating an eNB in a wireless communication network is provided. The method comprises transmitting, by the eNB to a UE, configuration information of first and second sets of CSI-RS resources, wherein the first set of CSI-RS resources is used for long term measurement and the second set of CSI-RS resources is used for short term CSI feedback. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281568 | POWER HEADROOM REPORTING RELATED TO POWER MANAGEMENT MAXIMUM POWER REDUCTION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a difference between a previous power management maximum power reduction (P-MPR) and a current P-MPR is determined. The previous P-MPR is the P-MPR when an indication is communicated that a power backoff is applied due to the previous P-MPR. A power headroom report (PHR) is triggered when the difference is greater than a threshold and the current P-MPR is greater than a sum of a maximum power reduction (MPR) and an additional MPR (A-MPR). Moreover, an apparatus is provided in which whether and how a P-MPR has changed is indicated in a PHR, and the PHR is transmitted. An apparatus is also provided in which a request is received from an evolved Node B (eNodeB) to report a P-MPR, and a PHR is transmitted including information related to the | 11-08-2012 |
20120281569 | BASE STATION, INTERFERENCE CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Timing division multiplexing is conducted between the cells to avoid intercell interference. Transmission timing in a time slot pattern has a given interval. A base station determines the transmission timing based on measured uplink interference power. For example, an uplink time slot pattern in which the measured uplink interference power is smaller is selected. A downlink time slot pattern is assigned so that a response to HARQ is returned at that timing. If traffic is busy, additional time slot pattern may be assigned. In determination of the traffic volume, for example, the queued buffer size, the number of connected terminals, or the number of connections to a higher-level device can be used. Assignment timing can be an initial setup time, or a fluctuation detection time of a channel which can be realized by collection of report information on a downlink communication quality, periodic monitor of uplink interference information. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281570 | DELAYED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A delayed acknowledgement transmission method and an apparatus are provided for improving communication performance of a system and a terminal by delaying an ACKnowledgement (ACK) transmission of the terminal in a handover procedure. The method includes transmitting an acknowledgement corresponding to a segment immediately upon receipt of the segment, detecting a delay condition event which is triggered when a difference between a signal strength of the source base station and a neighboring base station is equal to or greater than a predefined offset, calculating a delay value for delaying acknowledgement transmission corresponding to the segment received after detecting the delay condition event, and transmitting the segment received after the detection of the delay condition event by delaying by as much as a time corresponding to the delay value. The apparatus is capable of avoiding a router's performance degradation and reducing a packet transmission delay and packet loss. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281571 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING A HAPPY BIT ON AN E-DCH DEDICATED PHYSICAL CONTROL CHANNEL - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) determines (1) whether the WTRU is transmitting as much scheduled data as allowed by a current Serving_Grant, (2) whether the WTRU has enough power to transmit at higher data rate, and (3) based on a same power offset as a currently selected E-DCH transport format combination (E-TFC), whether total E-DCH buffer status (TEBS) would require more than predetermined period to be transmitted with the current Serving_Grant.times.a ratio of active processes to a total number of processes. If criteria (1)-(3) are met, the WTRU sets the happy bit to “unhappy.” If MAC-i/is is configured, the WTRU evaluates criteria (2) by identifying an E-TFC that has a transport block size at least x bits larger than a transport block size of the currently selected E-TFC, and determining whether the identified E-TFC is supported based on a same power offset as the currently selected E-TFC. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281572 | Method And Device For Determining A Jitter Buffer Level - It is disclosed a method for determining a buffer level of a jitter data buffer ( | 11-08-2012 |
20120281573 | PHYSICAL CELL IDENTIFIER (PCI) ADAPTATION TO MITIGATE INTERFERENCE IN HETEROGENEOUS CELLULAR NETWORK - A first radio network node (HBS | 11-08-2012 |
20120281574 | METHOD OF SYNCHRONISATION CHANNEL (SCH) INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of SCH interference cancellation in a mobile communication system, including the steps of: (a) receiving a chip equalised signal on one or more streams, each signal having a CPICH and a plurality of chips in one or more slots; (b) generating a PSC pattern and an SSC pattern for a P-SCH and an S-SCH associated with the signal; (c) estimating the power of P-SCH and S-SCH; (d) estimating a power ratio for each of the P-SCH to CPICH and the S-SCH to CPICH; (e) SCH interference cancelling in the first 256 chips of the n-th slot. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281575 | DYNAMIC ROUTE BRANCHING SYSTEM AND DYNAMIC ROUTE BRANCHING METHOD - A dynamic optimum design is realized to dynamically adopt a multipath route according to a reception situation of the traffic flow of each terminal, to select a splitting method such as a copy and division at a split position according to the situation of the network, and to minimize the cost imposed on the network. Specifically, in a control unit which sets a route of the traffic flow dynamically to an optional node on a network, monitors the reception quality of the communication traffic flow on the network to calculate a split position of the traffic flow, the splitting method such as copy and division, and a split route in order to attempt optimization based on maximization and stabilization of reception quality. In response to an instruction from the control unit, the traffic flow is dynamically split onto a plurality of routes by the splitting method such as an identical copy, a partial copy, a flow base division and a random division, in one or a plurality of optional nodes of nodes through which the communication traffic passes, and the traffic flow is restored on a reception side. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281576 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND PROCESSING METHOD - A communication system, a mobile station apparatus, a base station apparatus, and a processing method are provided that can perform decoding processing of a PDCCH related to a search space efficiently, and can perform communication promptly. A mobile station apparatus for performing communication with a base station apparatus in a mobile communication system: perform monitoring of a physical downlink control channel in an extension search space in accordance with an instruction from the base station apparatus. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281577 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SERVICE MANAGEMENT FOR TERMINALS WITH BROADBAND CONNECTIONS - A method for service management for terminals with broadband connections, wherein the terminal ( | 11-08-2012 |
20120281578 | METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING CHANNEL INFORMATION, AND TERMINAL AND BASE STATION USING SAME - The present description relates to a wireless communication system and to a method for transceiving channel information through carrier aggregation, and a terminal and a base station using the method. The method described in the present description comprises: receiving channel information from a user terminal, and generating a sub-band group from one or more subbands contained in at least one or more component carriers; and receiving, from the user terminal, channel information for each of the sub-band groups through a control channel. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281579 | Method and Network Node for Monitoring a Quality of Media Transfer in a Session Initiation Protocol Based Voice Over Internet Protocol Communications Network - Method and network node for monitoring a quality of media transfer in a SIP based VoIP communications network comprising a first and second network node. The method includes the step of collecting, by the first network node, information representative of the quality of media transfer on the user plane, such as information included in one or more RTCP messages related to that media transfer, and including, by the first network node, in a SIP message said information representative of the quality of media transfer on the user plane. The method further includes transmitting the SIP message from the first network node to the second network node, and storing in a repository associated with the second network node the information representative of the quality of media transfer on the user plane. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281580 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NOTIFYING OF THE OCCURRENCE OF AN EVENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a preamble transmission method performed by a terminal in a wireless communication system. The preamble transmission method performed by a terminal in a wireless communication system includes detecting the occurrence of an event, and transmitting a preamble corresponding to the detected event to a network through a random access channel (RACH). Congestion in a wireless network can be reduced, and a procedure for notifying of the occurrence of an event can be simplified. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281581 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTING ACCESS POINT NAME - The present invention discloses a method for selecting an access point name (APN), including: a user triggering an application required to use a data service link; when the user does not start user self-configuration of multi-APN and the application does not need a dedicated APN, a terminal selecting an APN for the application from the information of a corresponding relation between the applications and the APN in a multi-APN selection database according to basic information of the application. The present invention also discloses a corresponding apparatus. The present invention selects different access points for the application for connecting, to realize managing the selection of multiple APNs in a multimode terminal by using the data service. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281582 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A USER EQUIPMENT TO MEASURE INACTIVE DOWNLINK COMPONENT CARRIER - The invention proposes a method and apparatus for a user equipment to decide by itself to measure an inactive downlink component carrier and a method and apparatus for a base station to control a user equipment to measure an inactive downlink component carrier. The invention further proposes a method and apparatus for a user equipment to request transmission of a sounding reference signal and a method and apparatus for a base station to control a user equipment to transmit a sounding reference signal. Both the user equipment and the base station are located in a wireless communication system based on carrier aggregation. The technical solutions of the invention can achieve a trade-off between low power consumption of the user equipment and the rapid and accurate response to the component carrier. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281583 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - When switching a setting of a communication mode for a transmitting signal to a different communication apparatus from a non-spatial multiplexing mode to a spatial multiplexing mode on the basis of a first communication quality, a switching unit stores the first communication quality as a switchover reference value and then, when the first communication quality in a case of switching the setting of the communication mode for the transmitting signal to the different communication apparatus from the spatial multiplexing mode to the non-spatial multiplexing mode on the basis of a second communication quality is larger than the switchover reference value by a value which is equal to or more than a predetermined value, halts the switchover of the setting, to the spatial multiplexing mode, of the communication mode for the transmitting signal to the different communication apparatus until a predetermined requirement is satisfied. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281584 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - A system for determining a location for a mobile communication device includes a plurality of taps, a multiplexer, and a link aggregator. Each tap includes a pair of connectors that couple to a communication link of a radio access network inline and pass between them a signal received over the communication link. Each tap also includes a multiplexer connector that couples to a multiplexer and a cable connecting the multiplexer connector to the inline connectors. The tap replicates signals passing between the inline connectors and propagates the replicated signals to the multiplexer connector. The multiplexer receives, from each tap, signals replicated by that tap, extracts location data from the received signals, and transmits the location data to a link aggregator. The link aggregator receives the location data from the multiplexer and determines a location for one of the mobile devices based on the received location data. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281585 | HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS IN ACCESS POINT NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a handover method and apparatus in an access point network. The method includes: determining, by a source access point, that a handover is needed; obtaining, by the source access point, IP address information of a target access point; setting up, by the source access point, an Iur link with the target access point according to the IP address information; instructing, by the source access point, the target access point to set up a radio link between the target access point and a user equipment; and deleting, by the source access point, a radio link between the source access point and the user equipment. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281586 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR MONITORING NETWORKS - Certain exemplary embodiments comprise a method comprising: for selected traffic that enters a backbone network via a predetermined ingress point and is addressed to a predetermined destination, via a dynamic tunnel, automatically diverting the selected traffic from the predetermined ingress point to a processing complex; and automatically forwarding the selected traffic from the processing complex toward the predetermined destination. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281587 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING SERVICE PROCESSING RESOURCES OF A MULTI-MODE BASE STATION SYSTEM - A method and a device for adjusting service processing resources of a multi-mode base station system are provided, which relate to the wireless communication technology, so as to reduce the operation difficulty and the maintenance cost of the multi-mode base station system. The method includes: periodically acquiring traffic model data of each wireless access standard of the multi-mode base station system; determining service processing resources required by each wireless access standard according to the traffic model data; and adjusting service processing resources of each wireless access standard according to the determined service processing resources required by each wireless access standard. The device and method are mainly used in the multi-mode base station system. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281588 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK AND DOWNLINK INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION - A method for inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) by a home evolved NodeB (HeNB) is described. A portion of bandwidth is reserved for a user equipment (UE). Notification of the reserved portion of bandwidth is sent to at least one potentially interfering evolved NodeB (eNB). A data exchange is performed with the UE using the reserved portion of bandwidth. Notification is sent to the potentially interfering eNBs releasing the reserved portion of bandwidth. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281589 | AUDIO QUALITY MEASUREMENT APPARATUS, AUDIO QUALITY MEASUREMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An audio quality measurement apparatus includes: a packet reception unit that picks up a packet conforming to a predetermined protocol from a network; an analysis unit that calculates a frame discard rate or a packet loss rate based on information stored in the packet; and a quality measurement unit that estimates audio quality based on the frame discard rate or the packet loss rate. | 11-08-2012 |
20120287797 | TECHNIQUES FOR MINIMIZING THE BEAM FORMING TIME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method for beamforming in a wireless local area network (WLAN), the method is performed by a receiver wireless station. The method comprises receiving a frame transmitted by a transmitter wireless station over a wireless medium; analyzing a physical (PHY) header of the received frame to determine if a Short Interframe Space (SIFS) response is required; when a SIFS response is required, performing: constructing a response frame including a PHY header, wherein the PHY header includes at least a measured link quality field; inserting a measured signal quality in the measured link quality field; waiting a time equal to a SIFS period; and sending the response frame to the transmitter wireless station after the SIFS period has elapsed, wherein based on received measured values included in response frames the transmitter wireless station predicts a loss link to initiate a beamforming training, thereby reducing the beamforming time. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287798 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPLINK MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT TRANSMISSION - Methods and apparatuses are provided for uplink MIMO transmissions in a wireless communication system. In particular, a single inner loop power control may be utilized to control a power of both a primary stream and a secondary stream, in a system where the power of the secondary stream is linked to the power of the primary stream. That is, a single transmit power control command calculated according to the primary stream and directly controlling the power of the primary stream can effectively control the power of both uplink streams. Further, the disclosure provides outer loop power control, where a signal-to-interference ratio target used in the inner loop power control can be adjusted. Here, the SIR target may be adjusted in accordance with at least one of a block error rate performance or a HARQ failure performance of one of the primary stream or the secondary stream. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287799 | CHANNEL FEEDBACK FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSIONS - A method of Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) communication between a base station has a plurality of points with at least one user equipment (UE). At least one UE receives at least one transmission from the base station having the plurality of points. This UE measures downlink channel state information for each of the plurality of points including a rank indicator (RI), a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) and a channel quality indicator (CQI). This UE transmits the downlink channel station information in an uplink feedback channel to the base station. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287800 | Radio Network Node, a Node and Methods Therein for Enabling Enhanced Cell ID Timing Measurement for Positioning of a User Equipment - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a radio network node ( | 11-15-2012 |
20120287801 | USING MAXIMAL SUM-RATE MUTUAL INFORMATION TO OPTIMIZE JCMA CONSTELLATIONS - A method and a system for calculating a JCMA constellation for use in a JCMA communication system where the method includes a step of using maximum sum-rate mutual information criterion to select an optimal JCMA constellation for the number of transmitters N, SNR and modulation schemes used by the transmitters. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287802 | METHOD FOR CALIBRATING THRESHOLDS AND THRESHOLD CALIBRATION MODULE FOR A SATELLITE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for calibrating a threshold for selecting a transmission format, from a plurality of transmission formats, in order to exchange data packets over a radio-frequency propagation channel, referred to as the “channel” (L, | 11-15-2012 |
20120287803 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION - The present invention provides a method for channel estimation used in a receiver of a multi-carrier communication system, including: receiving a multi-carrier symbols from a transmitter of the multi-carrier communication system; and obtaining channel information of sub-carriers carrying data of the multi-carrier symbols, using selectively time direction interpolation and frequency direction interpolation for channel information of a plurality of scatter pilots of the multi-carrier symbols. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287804 | Wireless Communication System Applied To Aviation Industry And Airband Interference Detection Method - Provided is a wireless communication system capable of increasing safety in the aviation industry, and applicable to the aviation industry. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287805 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - A data transmitting apparatus including a transmitting unit connected to a first network and configured to transmit a check packet to a data receiving apparatus; a control unit configured to receive an acknowledgment message to the check packet from the data receiving apparatus, the acknowledgment message including acknowledgment information based on shared data shared with said data receiving apparatus; a computing unit configured to compute an expected acknowledgment information based on the shared data shared with said data receiving apparatus; a comparing unit configured to produce a comparison result for said data receiving apparatus based on the acknowledgment information and the expected acknowledgment information; a timer configured to determine whether a response time of the acknowledgment message is less than a predetermined time; and a judgment unit configured to judge whether to stop transmission of content data based on the comparison result and the determination of the timer. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287806 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACHIEVING ACCELERATED THROUGHPUT - Systems and methods for transporting data between two endpoints over an encoded channel are disclosed. Data transmission units (data units) from the source network are received at an encoding component logically located between the endpoints. These first data units are subdivided into second data units and are transmitted to the destination network over the transport network. Also transmitted are encoded or extra second data units that allow the original first data units to be recreated even if some of the second data units are lost. These encoded second data units may be merely copies of the second data units transmitted, parity second data units, or second data units which have been encoded using erasure correcting coding. At the receiving endpoint, the second data units are received and are used to recreate the original first data units. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287807 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS SELECTING ONE OF DIRECT COMMUNICATION PATH AND INDIRECT COMMUNICATION PATH VIA ACCESS POINT APPARATUS - A first wireless communication apparatus acquires communication qualities of a first communication path, a second communication path and a direct communication path, respectively, adopts as a communication quality of an indirect communication path a lower communication qualities selected from the communication qualities of the first and second communication paths, and selects a communication path having a higher one of a communication performance corresponding to the direct communication path and a communication performance corresponding to the indirect communication path. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287808 | COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM USING MULTICARRIER TRANSMISSION MODE - A communications system for exchange of information between communications apparatuses by a multicarrier transmission mode using a plurality of subcarriers, the communication system includes a transmission data generator configured to generate frequency band information indicating which frequency band is to be used for transmission of data information between said communication apparatuses and a transmitter configured to transmit the frequency band information by using a specific frequency band which is set from among a plurality of frequency band assigned to the communications system, and to transmit data information by using at least one frequency band set from among said plurality of frequency bands; and a receiver configured to receive the frequency band information by using the specific frequency band, wherein said specific frequency band also transmits data information and said specific frequency band is made variable. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287809 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING NETWORK CONVERGENCE TIME - A method and system for measuring a convergence time of a network. Test traffic including a plurality of packet groups may be transmitted and received via the network. The network may be instructed to redirect packets belonging to a selected packet group from a first port of the network to a second port of the network. A first test port unit coupled to the first port may determine an arrival rate for the selected packet group and store a below threshold timestamp when the arrival rate first falls below a predetermined threshold rate. A second test port unit coupled to the second port may determine an arrival rate for the selected packet group and store an above threshold timestamp when the arrival rate first equals or exceeds the predetermined threshold rate. The convergence time may be determined based on the below threshold timestamp and the above threshold timestamp. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287810 | SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR ROGUE VOIP PHONE DETECTION AND MANAGING VOIP PHONE MOBILITY - A method and a system track network access information for authorized network devices. The access information facilitates tracking movement of the device throughout the network. In addition the access information can be used to detect when an unauthorized device attempts to access the network, posing as an authorized device. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287811 | SOLICITING FIRST PARTY IN COMMUNICATION SESSION TO MAINTAIN CALL WHEN DEGRADATION OF CONNECTION TO SECOND PARTY IS ANTICIPATED - A system and method are provided for monitoring the quality of a communication session with a mobile device. Should the communication session degrade, rather than dropping the communication session the user of a device communicating with the mobile device is prompted to wait while an attempt is made to improve the quality of the communication session. Similarly if the user of the mobile device moves out of a coverage area, rather than dropping the communication session the user of the device communicating with the mobile device is prompted to wait until a new communication session can be established. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287812 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING EFFICIENT RANGING IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system; and more specifically to a method and apparatus for performing an efficient ranging procedure by mobile station and a base station, by distinguishing the dedicated ranging from the contention-based random access. A method for performing ranging with a mobile station in a broadband wireless access system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: transmitting a first ranging code for requesting ranging to a base station through a first ranging opportunity of a first frame; and receiving a first message including a response to the first ranging code, wherein if the first ranging code is a dedicated ranging code and the response to the first ranging code is “continue”, the first message may further include at least one of a dedicated flag field, a second ranging code, and the information on the second ranging opportunity. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287813 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communication System - Method and arrangement in a network entity for supporting link adaptation in a wireless communication system. The method comprises obtaining | 11-15-2012 |
20120294158 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK INTRUSION DETECTION BASED ON MONITORING NETWORK TRAFFIC - Systems, methods, and apparatus for network intrusion detection are provided. A device may include at least one memory and at least one processor. The at least one memory may be configured to store computer-executable instructions that facilitate traffic inspection of communications received by the device. The at least one processor may be configured to access the at least one memory and execute the computer-executable instructions to (i) identify one or more network traffic parameters associated with a network traffic profile for the device; (ii) evaluate, based at least in part upon the one or more network traffic parameters, at least one communication received by the device; and (iii) determine, based at least in part upon the evaluation, whether the at least one communication satisfies the traffic profile. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294159 | METHOD OF MEASURING ACTIVITY OVER A VOIP CALL | 11-22-2012 |
20120294160 | Methods and Systems for Managing Device Bandwidth Usage - Systems and methods for controlling a wireless device by a user based on bandwidth used when the device is connected to a network are disclosed. The bandwidth used by a process when the wireless device is connected to a network is determined. Information associating the value of the bandwidth used by the process when connected to the network, with at least one characteristic of the network is provided. A bandwidth management profile that identifies what process is allowed to be executed on each network is generated. The bandwidth management profile is used to determine whether the process should be executed on the network. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294161 | QUALITY OF SERVICE COGNIZANT SCHEDULER FOR FEMTOCELL BASE STATIONS - A method and system are provided to schedule the transmissions to a plurality of applications for a plurality of users connected to a femtocell taking into account the quality of service (QoS) requirements of each application served while maintaining an efficient use of the wireless radio resources as well as a user and application weighted notion of fairness of service reception. The scheduler differentiates between not only different users but also between applications of each user, and schedules data transmission amongst these applications so that QoS requirements for all applications are satisfied. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294162 | Reduced Complexity Receiver For UL CoMP - Methods, apparatus and computer program products are disclosed. A method includes receiving signals from a number of antennas, the signals from a number of user equipments and comprising a number of sub-bands allocated to the number of user equipments; selecting, based on one or more criteria and for each of number of selected sub-bands allocated to a selected one of the number of user equipments, one or more antennas of the number of antennas to be used for signal detection and interference suppression on the received signals for the selected user equipment; and performing, for the selected user equipment, the signal detection and interference suppression on the received signals for each of the number of selected sub-bands based on the corresponding selected one or more antennas for each of the number of selected sub-bands to create an output signal. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294163 | Apparatus and Method for Direct Device-to-Device Communication in a Mobile Communication System - The invention concerns a method and an apparatus implementing the method. In the method at least one synchronization signal is received from a base station to a mobile node, which determining timing based on the at least one synchronization signal, for example, a group of orthogonal frequency division multiple access resource elements. The mobile node transmits an uplink radio resource reservation request to a base station. The mobile node receives from the base station an assignment of a radio resource dedicated for radio transmission to a remote node, the radio resource being within a band having a transmission power upper limit. The mobile node transmits a signal to the remote mobile node on the radio resource based on the timing determined. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294164 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR NON INTRUSIVE MEAN OPINION SCORE (MOS) ESTIMATION BASED ON PACKET LOSS PATTERN - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for non-intrusive mean opinion score (MOS) estimation based on packet loss pattern are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method for non-intrusive mean opinion score estimation based on packet loss pattern includes receiving a packet data stream, measuring the packet loss for the received data stream, calculating a probability of packet loss based on the measured packet loss, and calculating an estimated mean opinion score based on the calculated probability of packet loss. In one embodiment, the estimated mean opinion score is calculated using a mathematical function that maps calculated probability of packet loss to mean opinion score. In one embodiment, the mathematical function is a polynomial having coefficients that are selected so that the polynomial closely models reference opinion scores for a range of packet loss probabilities. In one embodiment, the coefficients are determined using a least squares analysis of a dataset that includes reference opinion scores for each of a range of packet loss probabilities. In one embodiment, the reference opinion scores for each of a range of packet loss probabilities are calculated using an intrusive algorithm to analyze lossy data streams that exhibit particular packet loss probabilities and generate mean opinion scores for each of the respective packet loss probabilities. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294165 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION - Apparatus and method for communication are provided. The solution comprises communicating on a synchronised shared channel having a frame structure comprising symbols; receiving from a network element a given number for each frame or sub frame, and during the given number of symbol periods in the beginning of a frame or sub frame measuring interference and making a decision whether to transmit or not during the rest of the symbol periods of the frame or sub frame. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294166 | TECHNIQUES FOR EFFICIENTLY UPDATING ROUTING INFORMATION - Techniques for efficiently updating routing information in a network device such as a router. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the routing information is updated upon creation or deletion of an overlay tunnel without the network device having to regenerate a Shortest Path Tree (SPT) by performing full Shortest Path First (SPF) processing. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294167 | POWER HEADROOM PROCESSING METHOD AND TERMINAL - The invention discloses a method for processing power headroom and a terminal thereof, wherein the method comprises: when transmitting a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and/or a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) on subframe i and component carrier group j, the terminal measures power headroom on the subframe i and the component carrier group j; the terminal reports the power headroom to the base station and indicates the type of the reported power headroom when reporting. The invention specifically indicates the type to which the power headroom belongs by reporting the type while reporting the power headroom, thereby avoiding confusion. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294168 | DYNAMIC SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a dynamic spectrum management (DSM) engine are described. The WTRU includes a transceiver, a radio frequency (RF) spectrum sensing unit and a processing unit. The transceiver transmits over a wireless link. The RF spectrum sensing unit measures information indicative of usage of a spectrum by other devices. The processing unit detects a change in performance of the wireless link, controls the transceiver to transmit a notification to a DSM engine indicating that the change in the performance of the wireless link was detected on a condition that the processing unit detects the change in performance of the wireless link, and receives a sensing task request for the WTRU to measure the information indicative of the usage of the spectrum by other devices based on the notification transmitted to the DSM engine indicating that the change in the performance of the wireless link was detected. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294169 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING OVERHEAD OF SEARCHER TASKS FOR DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - At least one feature pertains to a method of communication that comprises aligning a measurement task that utilizes a resource within a user equipment, such that at least a portion of the measurement task is performed during a time that the resource is enabled in the user equipment, and executing the measurement task during the time that the resource is enabled in the user equipment. In one example, the measurement task may be a searcher task, the resource may comprise receiver circuitry, and the time that the resource is enabled corresponds to a DRX monitoring interval of a downlink channel, such as a high speed shared control channel. By aligning and executing the searcher task during the time that the resource is enabled in the user equipment, searcher overhead may be reduced. Reducing searcher overhead allows the user equipment to save power by disabling the receiver circuitry. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294170 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FRAME WITH INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND APPRATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for transmitting a frame in a wireless local area network system is provided. The method includes obtaining, by a station (STA), interference channel information of an interference channel between the STA and neighbor STA that is a frame transmission object of an access point (AP); determining, by the STA, a transmitting beam vector based on the interference channel information; and transmitting, by the STA, a data frame to a transmission target STA using a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission based on the transmitting beam vector. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294171 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A plurality of frame buffers of a communication device store input frames for respective flows, which are units of managing communication. A sequential scheduler and an adjustment scheduler cyclically visit the plurality of frame buffers to read a frame for external output from each frame buffer. The sequential scheduler reads one frame per a visit to each frame buffer at a speed lower than a communication speed of the communication device. The adjustment scheduler reads one or more frames per a visit to each frame buffer such that a restriction on read quantity defined by a reference value greater than the shortest frame size is imposed. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294172 | RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station communicating with a radio terminal, comprising a control unit configured to perform scheduling of a radio resource with respect to the radio terminal, wherein the control unit estimates transmission power of the radio terminal, which is calculated by the radio terminal, based on information on transmission power notified from the radio terminal, calculates power of an uplink signal from the radio terminal based on uplink propagation loss between the radio base station and the radio terminal, and performs the scheduling based on a difference between a first power obtained by the estimation of the transmission power of the radio terminal and a second power obtained by the calculation of the power of the uplink signal. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294173 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CLIENT SERVER INTERACTION IN HYBRID NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - Methods and apparatus for modifying network management for hybrid operation. In one embodiment, the networks include an LTE network and a CDMA 1X network, and a mobile device can place CDMA 1X voice calls while registered with the LTE network. However, since the mobile device cannot simultaneously measure information for the LTE network while connected to the CDMA 1X networks, the mobile device modifies measurements and behaviors reported to the LTE network. In one implementation, the mobile device accounts for the time switched away from the LTE network in one or more subsequent reports thereto. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294174 | BANDWIDTH CALCULATING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE RESERVATION IN mVoIP SYSTEM - A provided is a bandwidth calculating method for resource reservation. The method includes receiving a message having a CODEC type and a ptime value wherein the ptime denotes an interval of transmitting a packet, extracting the CODEC type and the ptime value from the received message, and calculating a required bandwidth using the extracted CODEC type and the extracted ptime value. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294175 | CONTROL DEVICE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A control device | 11-22-2012 |
20120294176 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication quality managing unit ( | 11-22-2012 |
20120294177 | Method and apparatus for multi-homing path selection of stream control transmission protocol - The present disclosure discloses a method for multi-homing path selection of a stream control transmission protocol (SCTP). The method includes the following steps of: starting quality evaluation of paths; calculating a quality evaluation value of each path; comparing the quality evaluation value of each path; and selecting a path with the highest quality evaluation value to transmit a data message. The present disclosure also discloses an apparatus for multi-homing path selection of an SCTP. By adopting the method and the apparatus, a network selects the path with the highest quality evaluation value to transmit a data message. As long as path faults affect the transmission efficiency, other path with better quality is selected for transmission, thus the capability of the network of dealing with all kinds of path faults can be improved, and the data transmission speed and quality are further improved. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294178 | MEASUREMENT CONTROL METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A measurement control method, system and device for a multi-carrier system are disclosed. The method includes that: UE selects the channel quality of a serving carrier or serving carrier group as a reference value, uniformly starts measurement on carriers except serving carriers or serving carrier groups when the reference value is smaller than a measurement starting threshold, s-Measure, configured by an eNB for the serving carriers or serving carrier groups, and uniformly closes the measurement on the carriers except the serving carriers or serving carrier groups when the reference value is larger than or equal to the s-Measure. Through referring to the channel quality of one serving carrier or one serving carrier group, measurement on the carriers except the serving carriers or serving carrier groups is uniformly started and closed, so as to solve the problem that the UE controls measurement according to multi-carrier signal quality in multiple serving cells. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294179 | ACTIVE SET MODIFICATION TO RELEASE BACKHAUL CAPACITY - System(s), method(s), and device(s) that enable release of backhaul capacity associated with base stations are presented. During soft handover, a communication device can have its connection maintained with more than one base station. A link controller component can identify a radio link having the highest quality and can determine the relative backhaul load of each base station communicating with the communication device. The link controller component determines whether the base station having the highest radio link quality is experiencing the heaviest backhaul load relative to the other base stations. If the base station with the highest link quality does not also have the heaviest backhaul load, the link controller component identifies the base station having the heaviest backhaul load and the identified base station can have its status modified with respect to the communication device for a desired period of time, in accordance with predefined status modification criteria. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294180 | SELECTING RECEIVER PARAMETERS BASED UPON TRANSMITTING DEVICE IDENTIFICATION VIA TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS - A wireless device includes at least one antenna, an RF interface, and processing circuitry coupled to the RF interface and indirectly to the at least one antenna. The wireless device identifies other wireless devices that service based upon transmission characteristics of wireless signals received from other wireless devices and/or relative positions of the other wireless devices with respect to itself. In a first operational period, the wireless device determines transmission characteristics of the other wireless devices. Then, during a second operational period, without further interaction with the other wireless devices, the wireless device determines communication link characteristics based simply upon transmission characteristics of the other wireless devices. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294181 | DATA TRANSFER PATH EVALUATION USING FILTERING AND CHANGE DETECTION - If a condition in a data transfer path is modeled appropriately, then a filter-based approach can be used to provide an estimate of the condition. This permits accurate, real-time estimates of the condition with modest requirements for data processing and memory resources. Change detection can be implemented to control a parameter of the filter. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294182 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Mobile Inter-Mesh Communication Points in a Multi-Level Wireless Mesh Network - A mobile backhaul inter-mesh communication point forms an interface between a wireless mesh network on a first level and a wireless mesh network on a second, higher bandwidth, level. The two wireless networks are differentiated, e.g., by causing the mesh networks to be formed using different spectra, protocols or coding, or antennae. The mobile intra-mesh communication point functions as an access point in the lower level mesh network and as a relay point in the upper level mesh network. Utilizing mobile inter-mesh communication points facilitates deployment of wireless network access points while enabling the location of access points to follow the concentration of network users. Mobile inter-mesh communication points may be deployed in personal vehicles such as cars, trucks, and motorcycles, public transportation vehicles such as busses, trains, and aircraft, emergency vehicles such as fire trucks and ambulances, and many other types of vehicles. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294183 | Method and system for diagnosing access node - A method for diagnosing an access node (AN) is provided, including: a service node (SN) sending a diagnosis query message to the AN; after receiving the diagnosis query message, the AN returning a diagnosis query response message to the SN; and the SN displaying a query result on a command line or sending the query result to a network management system. A system for diagnosing an AN is provided too. The method and system solve the communication problem between the network system, maintenance group or operator associated with the SN and the network system, maintenance group or operator associated with the AN. As a result, the diagnosis of the AN is fast and efficient, thereby improving the diagnosis efficiency during the network failure and subscriber service failure. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294184 | METHOD FOR REPORTING THE RESULTS OF SPECIFIC REFERENCE-CELL-BASED QUALITY MEASUREMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION, AND APPARATUS FOR THE METHOD - The present invention relates to a method in which a terminal reports the results of quality measurement based on a specific reference cell from among a plurality of serving cells for the terminal in a mobile communication system using carrier aggregation. The present invention also relates to a terminal apparatus for the method. For this purpose, the terminal receives measurement configuration information from a network, performs a quality measurement in accordance with the received measurement configuration information, determines whether or not a report criterion based on a specific reference cell from among the plurality of cells for the terminal is met in accordance with the measurement result, and, if the report criterion based on the specific reference cell is met, sends a report message, including the measurement results and an indicator that indicates the specific reference cell, to the network. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294185 | ADAPTATION OF CYCLIC SHIFT FOR RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLES - The present invention enables automatic configuration of random access parameters. The base station is configured to control PRACH transmission of UEs, wherein the UE PRACH transmission comprises transmission of PRACH preambles constructed of root sequences. This is achieved by storing statistics associated with previous transmissions. A parameter associated with the construction of the PRACH is tuned based on the stored statistics. The base station controls the UE PRACH transmission by transmitting information to the UEs relating to the tuned parameter. This information is used by the UE when constructing the PRACH preambles. In this way, the cell parameters relating to random access can be improved to fit better to individual cells resulting in improved resource usage. | 11-22-2012 |
20120300646 | VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) SESSION QUALITY - A method, computer program product, and system for VoIP session quality is described. A method may comprise allowing a user to define a session quality threshold for a Voice-over-Internet-Protocol (VoIP) session of a VoIP conference, the session quality threshold corresponding to a session quality characteristic of the VoIP session. The method may further comprise determining a session quality value for the session quality characteristic of the VoIP session. The method may additionally comprise determining if the session quality value for the session quality characteristic of the VoIP session is unacceptable based upon, at least in part, the session quality threshold that corresponds to the session quality characteristic of the VoIP session. The method may also comprise, in response to determining that the session quality value is unacceptable, initiating one or more predefined session quality actions. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300647 | System and Method for Providing Communication Services - A method for determining a load measure associated with a wireless communications node, such as a Wi-Fi access point or cellular base station, is described. A time interval measure representing a time interval between frames transmitted by a node is determined, and a number of user devices associated with the node is determined based on information in the frames transmitted by the node. A load measure associated with the node is determined, based at least on the number of user devices associated with the node and the time interval measure. Systems and apparatus are also described. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300648 | System and Method for Monitoring Dropped Packets - A system and method for monitoring dropped packets are provided. A method for communications device operations includes receiving a sequence of packets from a transmitting station, where each packet in the sequence of packets includes a protocol layer packet for each protocol layer of multi-layered network. The method also includes determining if a packet in the sequence of packets has been dropped by the transmitting station, where the determining is based on at least two sets of sequence numbers associated with different protocol layers of packets in the sequence of packets. The method further includes updating a packet discard counter based on the determining. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300649 | Mobile device throughput testing - The instant invention is a program applet that can be loaded onto mobile devices and directly interfaces with the operating system and automated test scripts. The program applet is capable of initiating the required transfer and will provide information regarding the progress of the transfer such that a test client can properly calculate the data throughput rates. The result is a minimization of time-to-market for test and measurement tools using software architecture that simplify and speed-up development and maintenance of test and measurement tools by removing awareness of complexity of external hardware dependencies from the actual test and measurement software code, and placing dependencies management to carefully defined components that could be reused and shared between multiple test and measurement software tools and systems at once. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300650 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatus for network communication are disclosed. An example method includes sending an initial packet to a network device, receiving a response packet that is a response to the initial packet and includes a parameter that does not match the initial packet, determining that the response packet is a response to the initial packet, and in response to determining that the response packet is a response, determining that the network device is responsive to network requests. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300651 | Method and Arrangements for an Event Triggered DRX Cycle Adjustment - The invention relates to methods and arrangements for an event triggered DRX cycle adjustment. A user equipment located in a serving cell of a mobile communications network monitors downlink communication at predetermined time intervals when operating in discontinuous reception mode. The user equipment also performs communication parameter measurements regarding at least one of the serving cell and one or more neighbour cells. After the occurrence of a first event, the user equipment sends at least one of measurement data and a first event report to the network. The sending is triggered by the occurrence of the first event. The monitoring is caused to be performed at shortened time intervals after the occurrence of a second event, wherein the second event is defined to indicate a higher probability of receiving a handover command than the first event. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300652 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - To provide a radio base station apparatus, mobile terminal device and wireless communication method for transmitting and receiving downlink channel quality measurement reference signals in consideration of interference estimation of high accuracy, in a wireless communication method of the invention, a radio base station apparatus generates channel quality measurement reference signals, and maps the channel quality measurement reference signals to two adjacent symbols, and a mobile terminal device receives a downlink signal including the channel quality measurement reference signals mapped to two adjacent symbols, and performs interfering power estimation using the channel quality measurement reference signals mapped to two adjacent symbols. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300653 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - To provide a radio base station apparatus, mobile terminal device and wireless communication method for transmitting and receiving downlink channel quality measurement reference signals in consideration of orthogonalization among transmission antennas, orthogonalization among cells, and interference estimation of high accuracy, in a wireless communication method of the invention, a radio base station apparatus generates channel quality measurement reference signals, performs randomization processing on the channel quality measurement reference signals to be mutually non-orthogonal among at least a part of cells, and orthogonalizes the channel quality measurement reference signals among transmission antennas to transmit to a mobile terminal device together with control information, and the mobile terminal device receives a downlink signal including the control information and the channel quality measurement reference signal, extracts the channel quality measurement reference signal using the control information, and measures channel quality using the channel quality measurement reference signal. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300654 | Adaptive Feedback of Channel Information for Coordinated Transmission on a Wireless Backhaul - A backhaul link is established between a base station and a relay that assists the base station in communicating with a mobile device over an access link established between the relay and the mobile device. The channel response of the back-haul link is determined by estimating first and second parts of the backhaul link channel response, the second part changing faster than the first part. The first part of the backhaul link channel response is estimated by calculating an average of the backhaul link channel response over a predetermined period at the relay and the second part is estimated by calculating variation in the backhaul link channel response over the predetermined period at the relay. Quantized versions of the first and second parts of the backhaul link channel response are transmitted from the relay to the base station over the backhaul link | 11-29-2012 |
20120300655 | METHOD OF RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING MESSAGE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING A MTC DEVICE AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method of receiving a message by a wireless device in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The present invention comprises obtaining information of a first cycle, the first cycle including a monitoring interval and a non-monitoring interval; and monitoring at least one active occasion within the monitoring interval for receiving the message, wherein the message is repeated within the monitoring interval. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300656 | CODEBOOK BASED CHANNEL INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A codebook based channel information feedback method, device and system are provided in the present invention. The codebook based channel information feedback method includes: measuring, by a terminal in a communication system, a parameter of a downlink channel between the terminal and a base station of the communication system; selecting a plurality of precoding matrixes from a precoding codebook by using the parameter of the downlink channel, wherein a plurality of the precoding matrixes can be used by both of single-user multi-input multi-output (MIMO) transport mode and multi-user MIMO transport mode, and the precoding codebook is an aggregation of precoding matrixes; and feeding back a first information for indicating a plurality of the precoding matrixes to the base station. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300657 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF LIMITING MEASUREMENT REPORTS - The present invention relates to a method for limiting measurement reports by limiting objects of measurement and evaluation for a measurement report, and user equipment therefore. The method for limiting measurement reports by user equipment in a mobile communication system according to the present invention comprises: receiving a cell list that includes information about at least one cell; receiving a measurement setup message that includes a measurement limiting command for limiting objects of measurement and evaluation to the at least one cell included in the cell list; measuring the quality of signals that are received from neighbor cells; performing the measurement and evaluation on the basis of the signal quality having been measured to determine whether the quality measurement should be reported; and transmitting a measurement report message that includes the information about measurement reports generated in accordance with the measurement and evaluation, wherein, in the measurement and evaluation step, whether the measurement should be reported is evaluated only for a received signal from the at least one cell included in the cell list. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300658 | VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) SESSION QUALITY - A method, computer program product, and system for VoIP session quality is described. A method may comprise allowing a user to define a session quality threshold for a Voice-over-Internet-Protocol (VoIP) session of a VoIP conference, the session quality threshold corresponding to a session quality characteristic of the VoIP session. The method may further comprise determining a session quality value for the session quality characteristic of the VoIP session. The method may additionally comprise determining if the session quality value for the session quality characteristic of the VoIP session is unacceptable based upon, at least in part, the session quality threshold that corresponds to the session quality characteristic of the VoIP session. The method may also comprise, in response to determining that the session quality value is unacceptable, initiating one or more predefined session quality actions. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300659 | ADAPTIVE CHANNEL PREDICTION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method and system for predicting channel fading, particularly in a mobile wireless environment, that is accurate for long-range predictions. The method comprises estimating a model parameters based on a current channel estimate, and recursively adapting the model parameters to predict future channel fading coefficients until a predetermined re-acquisition condition is satisfied. Once the re-acquisition condition has been satisfied, the model parameters are again estimated based on a current channel estimate. The acquired model parameters are adaptively updated and used in a Kalman filter. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300660 | METHOD FOR SETTING SUBBANDS IN MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication base station apparatus wherein when a frequency scheduling transmission and a frequency diversity transmission are performed in a multicarrier communication at the same time, the adaptive control of a channel for performing the frequency scheduling transmission can be prevented from being complicated. In this apparatus, a modulating part ( | 11-29-2012 |
20120300661 | Adaptive CQI Sub Band - The present solution relates to a method in a first communication node ( | 11-29-2012 |
20120300662 | Cellular Control Sensing for Multicell Device-to-Device Interference Control - A method, apparatus, computer readable medium is provided to perform resource coordination among multiple cells to cancel near-far interference for device-to-device transmission, including cross-cell device-to-device transmission. In this context, a dedicated resource exchanging channel can be defined between cellular user equipment and device-to-device user equipment for interference control and resource coordination. A cellular user equipment can forward its uplink resource grant information over the dedicated resource exchanging channel when it determines potential interference. A device-to-device user equipment can monitor the dedicated resource exchanging channel in order to identify one or more resources that can potentially interfere with device-to-device transmission. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300663 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RETRANSMISSION DECISION MAKING - A method and apparatus are described including parsing an abstraction-layer header and assigning a priority to a packet to be transmitted. A network monitor of a transmitter is connected between a network interface and a retransmission decision maker for deciding which packets to retransmit, for example, based on the assigned priority and collected network statistics or conditions, for example, packet loss rate. A network monitor may also be provided at a receiver for collecting current network statistics such as cumulative number of packets lost and for providing such statistics to a transmitter. The method further includes buffering the data to be transmitted along with the assigned priority, transmitting data retrieved from a buffer via a datagram protocol, receiving a request for retransmission of data, determining if the requested data is in the buffer and retransmitting the requested data via a protocol that provides end-to-end acknowledgement of data and error recovery. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300664 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PERTAINING TO THE ASSESSMENT OF MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE LATENCY THROUGH HIGH-SPEED CHANNELS - A network monitoring apparatus in a mobile communications network monitors, for a predetermined time, TCP packets in the network that tend to comprise end-user traffic using the high-speed data path but not the low-speed data path to provide monitored packet information. The network monitoring apparatus uses this monitored packet information to identify the fastest end user-experienced communication exchanges within the mobile communications network. By one approach, the network monitoring apparatus effectively filters out most or all of the end-user traffic that uses the low-speed data path when providing that monitored packet information. This can comprise, for example, tending to utilize data pertaining to TCP packets that correspond to higher traffic volume (and hence that are likely being conveyed via a high-speed data path) while also tending to discard data that pertains to TCP packets to that correspond to low traffic volume (and hence that are likely being conveyed via a low-speed data path). | 11-29-2012 |
20120300665 | Method and device for power control in non-adaptive retransmission - The disclosure discloses a method and device for power control in non-adaptive retransmission. The solution thereof includes: when UE does not obtain a TPC adjustment value of a current HARQ process by parsing, determining a current power control mode; if the mode is an accumulation mode, determining whether the calculated sum of TPC adjustment values of each HARQ process is smaller than a given threshold, if yes, obtaining a transmission power by adding an increment adjustment value to a retransmission power, otherwise, calculating the transmission power of UE according to a formula in a protocol; if the mode is an absolute value mode, obtaining a transmission power by adding an increment adjustment value to a retransmission power. The solution can improve the SINR detected by an eNB and improve a retransmission success rate, thereby saving radio resources, facilitating utilization of radio resources and reduction of transmission delay, improving the throughput rate of an LTE system and improving the system performance | 11-29-2012 |
20120300666 | COORDINATED COMMUNICATION METHOD USING MULTIPLE TERMINALS - A method of performing coordinated communication by a relay station is provided. The method includes: receiving a signal from a terminal; measuring channel state information (CSI) indicating a state of a channel which receives the signal; comparing the CSI with a predetermined threshold to determine whether to decode the received signal; and if it is determined to decode the received signal, removing noise by decoding the received signal, and then performing decode and forward (DAF) in which the signal is re-encoded and transmitted to a base station, and if it is determined not to decode the received signal, performing amplify and forward (AAF) in which the received signal is amplified and forwarded to the base station. The CSI may be at least one of a frame error rate (FER), a bit error rate (BER), a signal to noise ratio (SNR), and a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR). Accordingly, a time delay consumed for channel decoding in hybrid DAF coordinated communication can be decreased, data transmission and resource usage can be more effectively achieved in coordinated communication using multiple terminals, and unnecessary power consumption can be decreased. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300667 | Activation and Deactivation of Component Carrier Measurements Based on Thresh-Old Settings - In accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the invention there is at least a method, computer program, and apparatus for receiving over a first component carrier from a serving cell at least one of a first threshold and a second threshold, and performing at least one of: measuring the first component carrier and determining if the measurement exceeds the first threshold, and utilizing the second threshold and determining if a neighboring cell is a potential candidate for scheduling on a second component carrier. | 11-29-2012 |
20120307652 | LIGHTWEIGHT STORING MODE FOR CONSTRAINED COMPUTER NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a management device, such as a root node, monitors Internet Protocol (IP) overhead (e.g., IP header sizes during source-routing or route table sizes) within a directed acyclic graph (DAG) in a computer network. If it is determined that the IP overhead is above a configured threshold, then in response, a trigger is initiated to have devices within the DAG label-switch downward traffic directed away from the root node within the DAG. In another embodiment, a device communicating within a DAG stores IP routes corresponding to upward traffic from the device directed toward a root of the DAG, and IP-routes upward traffic based on the IP routes. Conversely, the device also stores labels corresponding to downward traffic from the device directed away from the root of the DAG, and label-switches downward traffic based on the labels, accordingly. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307653 | REACHABILITY RATE COMPUTATION WITHOUT LINK LAYER ACKNOWLEDGMENTS - In one embodiment, a device in a computer network receives a particular packet associated with a transmission attempts value, the associated transmission attempts value indicative of a first number of times a transmitter has attempted to transmit the particular packet. In response, the device increases by one a stored successful attempts value stored at the device, the stored successful attempts value indicative of a second number of times the device has received the same particular packet. As such, a reachability rate of a link from the transmitter to the device may be determined based on comparing the associated transmission attempts value to the stored successful attempts value. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307654 | Bandwidth Estimation Based on Statistical Measures - Some embodiments provide a method for estimating bandwidth estimate based on a set of statistical measurements that quantifies bandwidth variation. The method receives a piece of media content at a receiving device and computes several instantaneous bandwidth measurements based on sample data blocks or media content received at the receiving device. The method computes the set of statistical measures that quantifies variation between the computed instantaneous bandwidth measurements. Based on the set of statistical measures, the method computes a revised bandwidth estimate for receiving media content at the receiving device. In some embodiments, the method uses the revised bandwidth estimate to determine an amount of media content data to buffer in order to provide an uninterrupted playback. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307655 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TWO WAY PUSH NOTIFICATIONS - A system and method are described for establishing two-way push communication between a provider and a mobile device. Providers (like mobile devices) register to listen for push notifications from a specified set of users. The presence of the provider is then continually monitored to determine whether the provider is currently listening over a pre-specified port. If so, in response to receiving a push notification for the first provider from the set of one or more users, a current network location over which the provider is listening for push notifications is identified and the push notification is forwarded to the first provider. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307656 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC ROUTING FOR PUSH NOTIFICATIONS - A system and method are described for dynamically routing push notifications to users over the most efficient network path. For example, in one embodiment, presence information associated with a device of a user is monitored. The presence information indicates whether the first device is currently connected to a wireless network and a current network location of the device. The channel quality for packets transmitted between the first device and a first gateway and between the first device and a second gateway is also monitored and is used to select between the first and second gateways when transmitting push notifications. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307657 | Methods and Systems for a Generic Multi-Radio Access Technology - Generic devices, systems and methods for multiple radio access technologies (RATs) are described. Arrangements can include, for example, a processor configured to execute procedures associated with different radio access technologies (RATs), a radio planner function configured to receive requests for radio resources from the procedures and further configured to selectively grant or deny radio access by the procedures in response to the requests, and a memory device configured to operate as a distributed data base to store data produced by at least one of the procedures and to provide the data to at least one other of the procedures. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307658 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR BANDWIDTH AGGREGATION OF MOBILE INTERNET ACCESS NODE - The embodiment of the disclosure discloses a method, apparatus and system for bandwidth aggregation of a MiAN. The method is applied in an aggregation system. The aggregation system comprises a master MiAN and one or more slave MiANs, the master MiAN and the one or more slave MiANs are connected to a WAN via WAN links respectively corresponding to the master MiAN and the one or more slave MiANs, the master MiAN establishes communication link with the one or more slave MiANs via a proximity interface. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307659 | NETWORK SYSTEM, GATEWAY DEVICE AND METHOD OF DETERMINING A FORWARDING PATH - A network system for forwarding a packet includes a portable network connection device that includes a first communication controller and is connectable with a client. A gateway device is included that has a second communication controller and performs routing. The portable network connection device and the gateway device are connected by a first network including a tunnel path. When the portable network connection device and the gateway device are connected by a second network that does not include the tunnel path, the second communication controller communicates with the first communication controller via the second network. When the portable network connection device and the gateway device are not connected by the second network, the second communication controller communicates with the first communication controller via the first network. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307660 | Technique for Performing Physical Layer Measurements - The present disclosure relates to a technique for performing physical layer measurements on a frequency resource relative to other frequency resources in a telecommunications system operable to communicate over multiple frequency resources. A method aspect of this technique includes determining that a mobile terminal is to perform a physical layer measurement with regard to a first frequency resource, determining if there is data to be communicated over one or more second frequency resource(s) within a time period wherein the first frequency resource is distinct from the second frequency resources: if it is determined that there is no data to be communicated over the second frequency resource(s) within the time period, performing the physical layer measurement on the first frequency resource and forming a quality measure of the first frequency resource based on the physical layer measurement; or if it is determined that there is data to be communicated over the second frequency resource(s) within the time period, modifying the physical layer measurement and forming a quality measure of the first frequency resource based on the modified physical layer measurement. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307661 | USABLE BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT METHOD, USABLE BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT SYSTEM, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - An order of terminal devices that are destinations of a measurement packet train to be transmitted is instructed to each of a plurality of terminal devices connected together via a network (step S | 12-06-2012 |
20120307662 | METHOD FOR MONITORING AND INTELLIGENT CONTROL OF THE PARAMETERS IN RADIO NETWORKS - A method and system for monitoring and intelligently controlling parameters that affect the operation of the network connection in wireless networks. Using monitoring elements, measurement data about the network is collected and stored in a so-called history base. The data can be processed by analysis in order to generate a prediction model giving an approximation of the network operation in the future. On the basis of the prediction model the parameters that affect the operation of the network connection in a network device can be controlled so as to maintain or improve the service level provided by the network. The measurements and the changes are made as a continuous process, so that the system can learn from the earlier situations and parameters so as to approach the optimal situation in the service provided by the network. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307663 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT USING PERIODIC MEASUREMENTS OF INDICATORS - A beacon signal may be provided with data extensions. The data extensions permit additional information to be provided by the beacon signal, thereby reducing the traffic overhead of the network. The data extensions further permit handoffs and handoffs based on offset values. A Measurement Request field corresponding to a beacon request contains a measurement duration value and channel number for which the request applies. The beacon request permits a scan mode. In Active Scan mode, the measuring station (STA) transmits a probe request with a broadcast SSID. In Passive Scan mode, the measuring STA passively receives on the specified channel and return a beacon report containing one information element for each STA from which it detects a beacon or probe response. In Beacon Table mode, the measuring STA returns a beacon report containing the current contents of its beacon table without performing additional measurements. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307664 | APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING SIGNAL-TRANSMISSION POWER, MOBILE STATION, METHOD OF CONTROLLING SIGNAL-TRANSMISSION POWER, AND PROGRAM - The peak-index calculator calculates a peak index as an indication of PAR in accordance with gain factors β of channels. The coefficient selector includes a lookup table storing therein fitting coefficients X and Y each categorized in accordance with a combination of β, and selects coefficients X and Y each having a value determined in accordance with a combination of the gain factors β. The power-reduction calculator calculates a reduction in maximum signal-transmission power in accordance with both the peak index and the selected coefficients X and Y. The TXAGC calculator controls maximum signal-transmission power in accordance with the calculated reduction. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307665 | Handling of Measurements for Selecting a Cell in a Network - The present invention generally relates to devices and methods, in a cellular network, for measuring a power level for each one of a plurality of BCCH carriers emitted by neighbouring cells around a Mobile Set, in: dividing the plurality of carriers into at least a first group and a second group; handling measurements of the power level of each carrier included in the first group, so as the time lapsed between two consecutive measurements for each carrier is lesser than a first threshold; handling measurements of the power level of each carrier included in the second group, so as the time lapsed between two consecutive measurements for each carrier is lesser than a second threshold different from the first threshold. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307666 | TESTING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS LINKS - A method and apparatus for testing network links bi-directionally and independently employ local test apparatus ( | 12-06-2012 |
20120307667 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COUNTING RESIDENT TIME SPAN RATIO IN DUAL NETWORK OF DUAL MODE SINGLE STANDBY TERMINAL USER - A method and device including modules for performing a statistics on a resident time span ratio of a dual-mode single-standby terminal user in dual networks, including: setting a T | 12-06-2012 |
20120307668 | Methods and Devices Which Enable Considering a Number of Active User Stations Linked Via Relays When Allocating Radio Resources - In a radio communication system, a relay node that relays data received from an anchor node to user stations, determines and transmits information about a number of active user stations linked to the relay node, to the anchor node. The anchor node allocates radio resources according to the received information about the number of active user stations. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307669 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL MEASUREMENT INFORMATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting channel measurement information in a mobile communication system are disclosed. The method and apparatus enable a user equipment to log channel measurement information and transmit the same to a base station so as to enhance radio network performance and reduce processing complexity of the user equipment by removing unnecessary operations of the user equipment and preventing waste of radio network capacity during transmission of channel measurement information. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307670 | Inter-Frequency Positioning Measurements - A networks node generates an inter-frequency neighbor list of neighbor cells intended to be measured including neighbor cells satisfying an alignment condition and a sufficient measurement time. The alignment condition is satisfied when subframes of a first signal having a first frequency transmitted via a reference cell associated with the user equipment are synchronized with, have a known offset relative to or have a random offset smaller than one half of a sub frame relative to corresponding subframes of a second signal having a second frequency transmitted via a neighboring cells. The sufficient measurement time is determined by an overlap of measurement gaps and positioning subframes in the second signal. The user equipment performs the inter-frequency Reference Signal Time Difference (RSTD) measurements during measurement gaps. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307671 | Reselection of Cells in a TDMA Cellular Network - The present invention generally relates to the reselection, handled by a Mobile Set, of a cell in a cellular network using Time Division Multiple Access as channel access method. The Mobile Set in an idle mode, while receiving signals emitted by a serving cell on which the Mobile Set is camped and by a plurality of surrounding cells, carries out the following steps: comparing, to a first threshold, a first Signal-to-Noise Ratio for signals emitted from said serving cell; if the first Signal-to-Noise Ratio is lower than the first threshold, identifying one of the surrounding cells emitting signals having a second Signal-to-Noise Ratio higher than a second threshold, said second threshold being higher than the first threshold; selecting said identified surrounding cell as new serving cell. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307672 | METHOD AND USER TERMINAL FOR MULTI-SITE MULTI-USER JOINT TRANSMISSION - The present invention proposes a method for multi-site multi-user joint transmission, the method comprising: measuring, by a user terminal, a downlink channel originated from each base station; according to the measurement for the downlink channel, quantizing and obtaining, by the user terminal, per-site channel information for the each base station and additional inter-site channel information, the additional inter-site channel information being used for calculating joint channel information of multiple base stations; and feeding back, by the user terminal, the per-site channel information for the each base station and the additional inter-site channel information so that the base station performs scheduling to execute the multi-site multi-user joint transmission. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307673 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR BROADBAND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA COMMUNICATION - Provided is an apparatus and method for wideband short-range wireless communication using a directional antenna in a millimeter wave band, and the method for wideband short-range wireless communication according to an embodiment may determine a first time interval and a second time interval for a cooperated data frame transfer based on a packet transmission time at each transmission from a source node to a destination node, transmit a frame to a relay node through an antenna pattern directed towards the relay node at a start point of the first time interval, and transmit the frame to the destination node through an antenna pattern directed towards the destination node to after a predetermined period of time from a start point of the second time interval. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307674 | METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for data transmission from a first node to a second node in a communication network includes: analysing data arriving in a buffer of the first node to generate an arrival history curve describing the amounts of data arriving in the buffer over a past time period; processing the arrival history curve to generate a plurality of signals corresponding to filtered components of the wavelet transform; processing each signal in a separate neural network trained with training patterns based on previously received and buffered data to generate forecast signals for future data arrivals; recombining the forecast signals to generate an arrival forecast curve describing the amounts of data arriving in the buffer in a future period; the first node generating bandwidth reservation requests based on the arrival forecast curve and transmitting the bandwidth requests to the second node; the second node allocating bandwidth based on the bandwidth requests; and transmitting data from the first node to the second node within the allocated bandwidth. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307675 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING ROUND-TRIP TIME IN TELECOMMUNCATION NETWORKS - A method for estimating round-trip time (RTT) values for data packets travelling in a telecommunication network is disclosed. During a first time interval ( | 12-06-2012 |
20120307676 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT NETWORK - A system for collecting traffic information that includes at least one first mobile node; at least one second mobile node; at least one data collection node; and a central processing station. At least one packet is transmitted between the first mobile node and the second node. The data collection node includes a packet search analyzer to determine an identifier that identifiers the first mobile node or the second mobile node from the at least one packet. The central processing station is linked to the data collection node and communicates traffic information associated with the identifier. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307677 | Transmitting Data in a Communication System - A signal to be transmitted from a terminal via a channel in a communication network is encoded by receiving the signal at the terminal; determining characteristics of the channel; encoding a first portion of the signal in accordance with a first encoding method to produce a first encoded signal portion; and encoding a second portion of the signal in accordance with a second encoding method to produce a second encoded signal portion. The first portion of the signal is encoded in accordance with the first encoding method depending on the determined characteristics of the channel. The first encoded signal portion and the second encoded signal portion are transmitted via the channel. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307678 | Inferring TCP Initial Congestion Window - A packet trace is received. Inter-arrival times between the multiple packets in the packet trace are determined. An inter-arrival time in the inter-arrival times that is greater than a threshold is identified. An order number of the inter-arrival time is identified. A determination is made as to whether a size of each of at least a portion of the multiple packets is equal to a maximum segment size. When a determination is made that the size of each of at least a portion of the multiple packets is equal to the maximum segment size, a size of the ICW as a product of the order number and the maximum segment size is returned. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314587 | HYBRID POSITIONING MECHANISM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A wireless communication device can determine its position in accordance with a hybrid positioning mechanism to minimize bandwidth and power consumption at the wireless communication device. The wireless communication device can detect one or more request messages and one or more corresponding response messages exchanged between a master access point and one or more target access points, and can accordingly determine TDOA information associated with the one or more target access points. The wireless communication device can receive, from the master access point, RTT measurement information determined by the master access point based, at least in part, on the one or more request messages and the one or more corresponding response messages exchanged between the master access point and the one or more target access points. The wireless communication device can calculate its position information based, at least in part, on the TDOA information and the RTT measurement information. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314588 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING VARIABLE CQI REPORTING PERIOD IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for configuring a variable Channel Quality Information (CQI) reporting period based on a User Equipment's (UE) Doppler frequency or speed. Mobile users are divided into three Doppler frequency regions based on their speed—for example, low, medium, and high Doppler users—and are assigned the CQI, reporting periods accordingly by the base station. The users in the low and high Doppler regions (i.e., UEs with low and high speeds) receive a high value for the CQI reporting period, whereas—the users in the medium Doppler region (i.e., UEs with medium speeds) receive a low value for the CQI reporting period. The UE speed-specific CQI reporting period improves the uplink capacity by adaptively controlling a UE's CQI-related uplink transmissions, without compromising on the downlink capacity/throughput. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314589 | MEASUREMENT SCHEDULING IN CELL_FACH (FORWARD ACCESS CHANNEL) AND CELL_DCH (DEDICATED CHANNEL) STATES BACKGROUND - Methods and apparatus are provided for operating in a first RAN at a working frequency, determining a priority of measurement tasks enabled by the first RAN, and dynamically scheduling the tasks according to the priority. For certain aspects, the first RAN may be a TD-SCDMA network. The measurement tasks are intended to measure at least one parameter of a serving cell in the first RAN on a primary frequency, at least one cell in the first RAN on at least one frequency other than the primary frequency, one or more cells in at least one RAN other than the first RAN (e.g., a GSM network) or any combination thereof. This dynamic assignment allows the UE to make scheduling decisions on which frequencies and RANs to measure, as well as how often these frequencies and RANs are measured, thereby providing for more efficient use of idle slots over conventional haphazard scheduling. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314590 | ENHANCED PRECODING FEEDBACK FOR MULTIPLE-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT AND MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) on a user equipment (UE) is described. A first precoding matrix indicator (PMI) corresponding to a multiple-user multiple-input and multiple-output (MU-MIMO) downlink transmission is generated using a first codebook set. A second PMI corresponding to the MU-MIMO downlink transmission is generated using a second codebook set. The first PMI and the second PMI are sent to an eNode B in a channel state information (CSI) report. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314591 | TRACKING LOOP DESIGN FOR UNICAST AND MULTICAST/BROADCAST SIGNALS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. In a first configuration, the apparatus maintains a first set of tracking loops associated with unicast signals and a second set of tracking loops associated with multicast/broadcast signals. In addition, the apparatus decoding at least one of a received unicast signal based on the first set of tracking loops or a received multicast/broadcast signal based on the second set of tracking loops. In a second configuration, the apparatus maintains a TTL and a FTL associated with unicast signals based only on received unicast signals. In addition, the apparatus receives a multicast/broadcast signal and decodes the received multicast/broadcast signal based on the TTL and the FTL maintained based only on the received unicast signals. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314592 | Decentralized Control of Interference Reduction in a Wireless Communication System - A first base station ( | 12-13-2012 |
20120314593 | Quality of Service in Packet Networks - Methods and systems for providing quality of service over IP networks are disclosed. In one aspect, a flow label field of a header may be divided into first and second portions. The first portion defines a quality of service. The second portion identifies a message flow. Once the first portion defining the quality of service is established by the sending node, no nodes in the transmission path may change the quality of service value. Each node may route packets based on the quality of service field, or may modify the traffic class field of the header based on the quality of service and then route the packet based on the traffic class field. A service provider can use DSCP within its own administrative domain(s), and end users can set and maintain QoS using the methods described herein, thereby providing a framework for end-to-end QoS using IP packets. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314594 | MEASURING AND IMPROVING MULTIUSER DOWNLINK RECEPTION QUALITY IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Embodiments for improving multi-user downlink reception quality in WLANS are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes receiving, at a station, at least one multi-user sounding packet from an access point. The method also includes determining a sum of desired signal strengths from the at least one received sounding packet. The method also includes determining a sum of interference signal strengths from the at least one received sounding packet. The method also includes generating link quality metrics based on a ratio of the sum of desired signal strengths to the sum of interference signal strengths. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314595 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus that receives, from a plurality of other communication apparatuses, information indicating communication quality of a multicast transmission transmitted from the communication apparatus to each of the plurality of other communication apparatuses; and controls a multicast transmission rate to be lowered if a communication quality of a first one of the plurality of other communication apparatuses is less than a predetermined threshold and a communication quality of a second one of the other plurality of other communication apparatuses is greater than the predetermined value. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314596 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus that receives, from a plurality of other communication apparatuses, information indicating communication quality of a multicast transmission transmitted from the communication apparatus to each of the plurality of other communication apparatuses, and controls a multicast transmission rate based on the information received from the plurality of other communication apparatuses. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314597 | ENHANCED STREAM RESERVATION PROTOCOL FOR AUDIO VIDEO NETWORKS - An enhanced stream reservation protocol comprising a Talker device sending a Stream Reservation Protocol (SRP) Talker Advertise message for streaming data to a Listener device, receiving the Talker Advertise message and checking bandwidth availability on an output port thereof for the streaming. In case of insufficient communication bandwidth, sending a failure message that includes information about available bandwidth from the Talker device to the Listener device. A protocol for communication in a bridged network, comprising a Talker device sending an SRP Talker Advertise message for streaming data to a Listener device. The Talker Advertise message includes communication path information from the Talker device to the Listener device. A communication path from the Talker device to the Listener device is selected based on said path metrics, for streaming data between the Talker device and the Listener device. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314598 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - Prior to implementing a coexistence solution for a multi-radio device, a measurement determines whether interference experienced by one radio is caused by another radio on the device. This determination includes comparing measurements of the first radio during times when the other radio is operational and when the other radio is inactive. If the compared performance measurements are within a certain range, a coexistence/interference management solution may be implemented. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314599 | Methods and Apparatus for Using a Layered Gear to Analyze and Manage Real-time Network Quality of Service Transmission for Mobile Devices on Public Networks - Methods and apparatus for providing layered gear mechanism to analyze network loss and latency conditions includes bundling data into data packets of varying depths, at a source with data packets of each depth belonging to a particular data type. The data packets of varying depths are transmitted in layers over a network, to a destination. Information for the transmitted data packets for each layer is collected constantly and analyzed as the data progresses along the network to identify corresponding network transmission characteristics. The transmission of subsequent data packets for anyone of the layers is adjusted based on the network transmission characteristics. The adjusting is repeated one or more times based on the analyzed information for the transmitted data packets. The transition metrics for each layer is utilized for relative analysis of transmission metrics across the layers to set the adjusting. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314600 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMIT POWER OF A MOBILE STATION - Method and apparatus for controlling a transmit power of a mobile station are disclosed. Mobile stations in direct communication on a cross link (XL) receive control parameters from a base station. A first mobile station (a receiving mobile station) may calculate a correction parameter for power offset for transmissions from a second mobile station (a transmitting mobile station) to the first mobile station, and send it to the second mobile station. The correction parameter may be generated within the maximum and minimum limits. The second mobile station may calculate a transmit power level for a transmission to the first mobile station based on the correction parameter, measurements on resources allocated for cross links for mobile station-to-mobile station direct communications, an interference measurement received from the first mobile station, and a path loss to the first mobile station. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314601 | MOBILE NODE REGISTRATION - A method is disclosed for a mobile node to register with a home agent on a home network when the mobile node is located near a border between two or more foreign domains. A buffer zone is defined that includes the border between the foreign domains and overlapping portions of the foreign domains. When the mobile node is located inside the buffer zone, mobile node re-registration with either foreign agent is limited to once for each registration lifetime rather than each time the mobile node crosses from one foreign domain to another foreign domain. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314602 | D.C. Offset Estimation - A combination of a phase shifter, a measurement receiver, and an offset estimator enable the d.c. offset in the transmit path of a quadrature transmitter to be distinguished from the d.c. offset in the measurement receiver. The measurement receiver performs a first measurement on the transmit path output with a “normal” phase shift of 0 degrees and 90 degrees for in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) components, and a second measurement with a “special” phase shift for the I and Q components. In one embodiment, the “special” phase shift for the I and Q components is 180 degrees and 270 degrees, respectively. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314603 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING POWER HEADROOM REPORT - The present application discloses a method and device for transmitting and receiving a power headroom report, wherein the method for transmitting a power headroom report comprises: forming, at a user equipment, a power headroom report specific to each carrier component; and transmitting the power headroom report to a base station. By implementing the method and device disclosed by the present application, a complete power headroom reporting mechanism can be provided to a LTE-A system having multiple new features. In addition, by receiving the power headroom report specific to each carrier component, the base station can further derive how many resource units need to be allocated to the user equipment, and a corresponding modulation and coding scheme so as to perform an effective resource scheduling and guarantee transmission quality of wireless links. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314604 | Methods and Arrangements for Performing Measurements in a Wireless Communication Network for Positioning or for Enabling Location-Based Services - Method and arrangement in a positioning target node ( | 12-13-2012 |
20120314605 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PATH CONTROL APPARATUS, PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS, AND PATH CONTROL METHOD - To provide a communication system capable of defining an appropriate flow path even when there are two or more types of links of packet forwarding apparatuses that form a communication network, packet forwarding apparatus information storing means stores, for each packet forwarding apparatus, an identifier of the packet forwarding apparatus, a port identifier of each port of the packet forwarding apparatus, and a type of link connected to each port of the packet forwarding apparatus. When a new flow detection notification is received from a packet forwarding apparatus, link type determination means determines a type of link through which a packet received by the packet forwarding apparatus passes, based on the identifier of the packet forwarding apparatus and the port identifier included in the new flow detection notification and information stored in the packet forwarding apparatus information storing means. Path calculations means calculates a communication path for the packet based on topology information on the type of link determined. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314606 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for controlling a handover from a first base station to a second base station by a user equipment that performs radio communication over a communication channel formed by aggregating a plurality of component carriers, wherein scheduling information on each component carrier is transmitted to the user equipment according to either of a straight scheduling method and a cross scheduling method, and the method includes at the first base station, commanding first the user equipment to perform a handover from the first base station to the second base station on a second component carrier to be operated according to the straight scheduling method in the second base station, when it is determined that a handover on a first component carrier following the cross scheduling method is to be executed. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314607 | UPLINK LOAD PREDICTION USING KALMAN FILTERS - Method and arrangement in a base station for providing an input parameter in an algorithm for predicting uplink load in a cell in a wireless communication system. The cell comprises at least one user equipment. The method comprises obtaining SIR target value associated with the user equipment, measuring SIR value on a signal sent from the user equipment, comparing the difference between the obtained SIR target value and the measured SIR value with a threshold limit value, selecting the SIR value as input parameter in the uplink load prediction algorithm for the user equipment, if the difference between the obtained SIR target value and the measured SIR value is bigger than the threshold limit value. Otherwise selecting the SIR target value as input parameter in the uplink load prediction algorithm for the user equipment. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314608 | INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, METHOD, AND NETWORK NODE - In a distributed information communication processing system in which a plurality of information communication devices provides a service through a network, response speed, electric power consumption, and further reliability are improved. The distributed information communication processing system which provides various services is configured by associating an entrance node (EN) which executes filtering near sensors, actuators, and terminals being information sources, an intelligent node (IN) which changes an information processing position and executes information processing and communication processing instead of a data center (DC), and a management node (MN) which manages these nodes. Thereby, real time type information processing can be realized. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314609 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME THROUGH RELAY - The present invention provides a wireless communication method used for transmitting and receiving a relay in a wireless local area network system. The wireless local area network system according to an embodiment of the present invention relates to a wireless communication method of setting a relay link through a relay and setting a transmission time point at which a data frame is transmitted in a source device by recognizing a propagation delay between devices, and the like when an operation mode of the set relay corresponds to a cooperating mode. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314610 | MULTI-SIM MULTI-STANDBY COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND GAIN OBTAINING METHOD FOR NON-TRAFFIC CARD THEREOF - A gain obtaining method for a non traffic card of a multi-card multi-standby communication device, comprising: acquiring spare time information of a traffic card (S | 12-13-2012 |
20120314611 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK - An apparatus and method for feeding back channel state information are disclosed. The method of providing channel state information for a wireless communications channel provided between a first network node having at least one transmission antenna and a second network node having at least one reception antenna comprises the steps of: estimating a current value of at least a first type of channel state information for at least one sub-channel within the channel from signals received by the at least one reception antenna over the channel from the at least one transmission antenna; determining whether the current value of the first type of channel state information varies from previously-transmitted value for the first type of channel state information by at least a predetermined amount; and if so, transmitting an indicator indicative of the current value for the first type of channel state information to the first network node. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314612 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE TRANSMIT DIVERSITY USING SYMMETRIC PHASE DIFFERENCE - Communication is performed for a first communication device having a set of antenna elements. A quality-indication signal is received from a second communication device (e.g., a basestation). A complex weighting is calculated based on the quality-indication signal. A pre-transmission signal is modified based on the complex transmit diversity weighting to produce a set of modified-pre-transmission signals, wherein the modifications are symmetric by making approximately half the magnitude of the transmit diversity modification to one signal in a first direction, and approximately half the magnitude of the transmit diversity modification to the other signal in a second direction, opposite the first direction. Each modified pre-transmission signal from the set of modified-pre-transmission signals is uniquely associated with an antenna element from the set of antenna elements. The set of modified-pre-transmission signals is sent from the set of antenna elements to produce a transmitted signal. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314613 | METHOD FOR REPORTING AND OBTAINING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, ENODEB, AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method for reporting and obtaining channel state information, an eNodeB, and a user equipment are disclosed. The method for reporting channel state information includes: determining a reported content in channel state information (CSI) of downlink component carriers according to priorities of contents-in-CSI, where the CSI of the downlink component carriers includes the reported content and a content that is not to be reported; and reporting the reported content to an eNodeB on a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH). By determining a reported content in CSI according to a priority, the shortage of a CSI reporting resource may be relieved. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314614 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN A BASE CHANNEL AND A 60 GHZ CHANNEL - A method for switching between channels on different bands is described. Communication with a wireless device occurs on a base channel. A channel switch request is sent to the wireless device. An acknowledgment is received from the wireless device. Communication with the wireless device switches to a 60 GHz channel. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314615 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND TERMINAL APPARATUS WHICH TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE A SIGNAL INCLUDING INFORMATION - A base station apparatus controls inter-terminal communication. A frame in which a first period in which the base station apparatus may broadcast a signal, a second period in which the terminal apparatus may broadcast the signal, and a third period in which one-to-one transmission of the signal between the base station apparatus and the terminal apparatus may be performed are time-division multiplexed is defined. A processing unit generates information about a configuration of the frame. A modem unit and an RF unit broadcast the signal in which the generated information is included in the first period. The RF unit, the modem unit, and the processing unit receive the signal broadcasted from the terminal apparatus in the second period. The RF unit, the modem unit, and the processing unit perform one-to-one communication with the terminal apparatus in the third period. | 12-13-2012 |
20120320764 | Multicarrier Communication Support - There are provided measures for multicarrier communication support, such as for non-adjacent multicarrier support for a contiguous-bandwidth receiver. Such measures exemplarily include receiving one or more carriers in a configurable contiguous bandwidth, calculating an imbalance metric representing a receiving imbalance over a set of carriers, said imbalance metric representing a difference between a first value based on received signal strength indication on each of one or more carriers and a second value based on received signal strength indication on each of one or more carriers, verifying, based on the calculated imbalance metric, whether a threshold condition relating to a current mode of an adjacent carrier mode and non-adjacent carrier mode is satisfied, and reporting an event for triggering reconfiguration of said configurable contiguous bandwidth to switch the current mode between said adjacent and non-adjacent carrier modes, if the threshold condition is satisfied. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320765 | Carrier-Phase Difference Detection With Mismatched Transmitter And Receiver Delays - Methods and apparatus are described that provide efficient detection of the carrier-phase difference (CPD) between communicating devices over the entire signal bandwidth. The CPD detection utilizes the linear structure of the CPD, which eliminates most of the feedback overhead. Both feedback mechanisms, compact digitized feedback, and feedback via fast signaling protocols, are described. The CPD can be decomposed into a fixed/slow-changing portion and a fast-varying portion, with the former being pre-calibrated and communicated prior to communications sessions, thus further reducing the feedback overhead and improving the CPD detection accuracy. The nonlinearity in the TX/RX chains can also be pre-calibrated, allowing CPDs with more general structures to be detected by methods that detect CPDs with linear structures. Applications of the described methods and apparatus include wireless multipoint broadcast systems, also known as coordinated multipoint transmission, or CoMP, in LTE-A (long-term evolution, advanced) systems, and frequency and phase synchronization of a cluster of base stations. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320766 | METHOD OF COORDINATING FAULT DETECTION RESPONSES BY ACCESS NODES OF A NETWORK - The present invention provides a method of coordinating access nodes when a sleeping cell is detected. The method may include modifying a coverage area of an access node to compensate for lost coverage in a sleeping cell detected by the access node. The access node implements resource allocation algorithms and a cell identification algorithm. The method may also include instructing the resource allocation algorithms and/or the cell identification algorithm to perform a predetermined action concurrently with the modification. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320767 | PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZED AND CONFIGURABLE STATE BASED HEURISTIC FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF REAL-TIME TRANSPORT PROTOCOL TRAFFIC - A probe receives a first packet over a network on a port. A sequence number and synchronization source identifier (SSRC) associated with the first packet are identified. The probe receives a subsequent packet and a sequence number and SSRC associated with the subsequent packet are determined. The probe determines whether the SSRC associated with first packet and the SSRC associated with the subsequent packet match. Additionally, the probe determines whether the sequence number associated with the subsequent packet is within an acceptable range of values related to the sequence number associated with the first packet. Additionally, the probe calculates the time interval between reception of the packets. The probe classifies traffic on the port as RTP or non-RTP traffic based on analysis of the SSRCs, sequence numbers and time intervals. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320768 | REDUCING THE IMPACT OF HIDDEN NODES IN MESH NETWORKS - In one embodiment, hidden neighbor relationships are identified based on received neighbor information from a plurality of nodes in a communication network. Based on determining a number of hidden neighbors for a particular node at various node parameters, a cost function associated with the particular node may be determined and utilized. In another embodiment, a number of hidden nodes of the particular node is determined across a range of transmission powers, and a delay associated with the particular node reaching a root node in the network across the range of transmission powers is also determined based on the neighbor nodes reachable at respective transmission powers. A tradeoff is determined across the range of transmission powers between the number of hidden nodes and the delay, and then the transmission power of the particular node can be set based on an acceptable determined tradeoff. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320769 | MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION SUPPORT - Embodiments of the invention are concerned with multicarrier communication support, such as non-adjacent multicarrier support for a contiguous-bandwidth receiver. One embodiment includes receiving one or more carriers in a configurable contiguous bandwidth, calculating an imbalance metric representing a receiving imbalance over a set of carriers, said imbalance metric representing a difference between a first value based on received signal strength indication on each of one or more carriers and a second value based on received signal strength indication on each of one or more carriers, verifying, based on the calculated imbalance metric, whether a threshold condition relating to a current mode of an adjacent carrier mode and non-adjacent carrier mode is satisfied, and reporting an event for triggering reconfiguration of said configurable contiguous bandwidth to switch the current mode between said adjacent and non-adjacent carrier modes, if the threshold condition is satisfied. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320770 | Method of Handling Interference Mitigation in Heterogeneous Network by Channel Measurement and Related Communication Device - A method of handling resource arrangement for a first base station of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises obtaining channel information of a channel corresponding to a resource block from a measurement, a relay node of the wireless communication system or a second base station of the wireless communication system, wherein the resource block is identified by a time period and a frequency bandwidth; and arranging the resource block to a mobile device in the wireless communication system according to the channel information of the channel. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320771 | Energy Efficiency Ethernet with Assymetric Low Power Idle - Energy efficient Ethernet with asymmetric low power idle. Low power idle mode is typically leveraged when both direction of a link do not have data traffic to transmit. Such a requirement reduces the application of low power idle due to the frequent existence of data traffic in only one direction. An asymmetric low power idle mode enables reduction in power consumption and signal emissions even when one direction has data traffic to transmit. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320772 | COMMUNICATION DEVICES FOR TRANSMITTING DATA BASED ON AVAILABLE RESOURCES - A method for transmitting data by a communication device is described. The method includes determining whether there are sufficient resources available to insert data into an aggregated packet. The method also includes inserting discardable data into the aggregated packet if there are not sufficient resources available to insert the data. The method further includes inserting the data into the aggregated packet if there are sufficient resources available to insert the data. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320773 | Method for Computing the Receive Power of a Non Serving Cell, and Receiver for Doing the Same - A method for testing a band allocated to a non serving cell for a wireless OFDM communication systems, involving the step of:—configuring the RF front end circuit to receive a wide band signal covering multiple candidates of bandwidths (BW | 12-20-2012 |
20120320774 | Method for Transmitting Feedback of Channel State Information and User Equipment - Disclosed are a method for transmitting feedback of channel state information and user equipment. The method comprises: under a transmission mode, user equipment (UE) determining contents carried by channel state information according to indication information, wherein the indication information comprises at least one of the following: rank indicator (RI), channel quality indication information (CQI) and configuration signaling sent by a base station eNodeB; and the UE sending the channel state information to the eNodeB. The present invention solves the problem that the contents provided by the channel state information are not suitable for those transmission modes under which a multiple user-MIMO and a single user-MIMO can be switched from one to another, improving the applicability of the channel state information. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320775 | FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A feedback method and apparatus is provided for facilitating feedback in a Cooperative Multi-Point (CoMP) system in which multiple base stations cooperate with each other for downlink transmission to a terminal. The feedback method of a terminal includes determining whether the terminal is operating in cooperative multi-point mode for receiving data from a plurality of cells; estimating, when the terminal is operating in cooperative multi-point mode, channels of the cells belonging to a measurement set based on channel status information reference signals for the cells; selecting at least one best cell based on a signal-to-interference plus noise ratio based on the estimated channels; and feeding back a cell index and channel information of the best cell. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320776 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING SYNCHRONIZATION FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES - A method and an apparatus for obtaining synchronization of a terminal for communication between devices when a base station collapses are provided. The method includes, when a preamble signal is not received from the base station, maintaining a first synchronization for a predetermined time using a timer, transmitting a first preamble signal at a first synchronization point, performing a synchronization procedure with at least one neighbor terminal based on the first preamble signal, and, after the synchronization procedure, performing communication with the at least one neighbor terminal. In addition, when a preamble signal is not received from a base station, a first preamble signal from a relevant neighbor terminal is monitored for a predetermined time. When the first preamble signal is not received from the relevant neighbor terminal for the predetermined time, a second preamble signal is transmitted at an arbitrary point. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320777 | Method for Transmitting Data in a Radio Network, a Radio Network and a Receiver - What is provided is a method for communicating with a cellular network. The method is performed by a mobile computing device that comprises a transmitter and a receiver. One or more communication channels are monitored for one or more data packets that are transmitted by a base station of the cellular network during a transmission period. The transmission period can include one or more time slots. The mobile computing device determines whether one or more data packets have been received during a first time slot of the transmission period. In response to determining that no data packet has been received during the first time slot, the mobile computing device switches to an idle state until the transmission period ends. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320778 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL MEASUREMENT - The present invention discloses a method for channel measurement which includes: determining the size of measured bandwidth of a terminal and the location of the measured bandwidth in system bandwidth; determining the size of a measured sub-band and/or the quantity or sizes of measured sub-band sets according to the measured bandwidth; sending the determined size of the measured bandwidth and the location of the measured bandwidth in the system bandwidth, and the size of the measured sub-band and/or the quantity or sizes of the measured sub-band sets to the terminal; receiving measurement results returned by the terminal With the method provided in the present invention, invalid feedback is prevented and effectiveness and accuracy of channel measurement and feedback are improved. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320779 | PROVISION OF PATH CHARACTERISATION INFORMATION IN NETWORKS - Methods, apparatus and other means for providing path characterisation information to a data sender relating to a network characteristic such as congestion experienced by data units traversing a path across a data network from the data sender towards one of a plurality of data receivers, the data units having associated therewith information indicative of the network characteristic, the path being traversed by the data units having at least a first path portion between said data sender and a proxy node along which data units may traverse conveying a measure indicative of the network characteristic that is representable by any of a first set of codepoints, the data receivers being operable to provide data acknowledgement units in respect of data units they receive via a second path portion in which information indicative of the network characteristic may only be representable using codepoints of a second set of codepoints having less codepoints than the first set of codepoints. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320780 | SPEED ESTIMATION METHOD, SPEED ESTIMATION APPARATUS, SPEED ESTIMATION SYSTEM AND RECORDING MEDIUM OF CONTROL PROGRAM OF SPEED ESTIMATION APPARATUS - In order to enable to judge validity of a measurement result of a transmission rate, a speed estimation method transmits a data packet and probe packets before and after the data packet to a measured section which is a target for measurement of a transmission rate, estimates a transmission rate of a measured section based on a first receiving interval which is a receiving interval between the probe packets transmitted through the measured section just before and immediately after the data packet and a data volume of the data packet, and determines validity of a transmission rate by comparing a second receiving interval which is a receiving interval between the probe packets which have passed the measured section continuously in a state that a data packet does not exist in between them in a measured section and a first receiving interval. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320781 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A SLAVE NODE, A ROUTE MAKING METHOD AND A PROGRAM - Provided are a communication system and the like capable of making a stable relay route even when a propagation channel is fluctuated by the fluctuation of RSSI. For making a tree-type communication route whose root is a core node, each slave node, after the reception of the latest reset routing packet from a node, judges if the transmission source node should be the parent of the tree-type structure based on the sequential average of the reception power of n routing packets received from the same transmission source node. As the reception power is log-normally distributed in general, an asymptotically stable relay route can be obtained, especially by using the sequential average. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320782 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION FOR REPEATER - The present invention relates to a method of a repeater receiving the downlink control information through an R-PDCCH from a base station according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: determining a candidate location on which an R-PDCCH is transmitted at first and second slots of a downlink sub-frame; monitoring whether the R-PDCCH is transmitted on the determined candidate location; and receiving the downlink control information included in the R-PDCCH when the transmission of the R-PDCCH is monitored, wherein the R-PDCCH candidate location is set as a VRB set including VRBs of N number and a candidate location of one R-PDCCH for a high combination level can be composed of a combination of two adjacent candidate locations of the R-PDCCH candidate locations for a low combination level. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320783 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LTE CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION ESTIMATION - A method, computer program, device and system are provided for determining channel state information for use in a wireless communications network. The channel state information includes a rank indicator (RI), precoding matrix index (PMI) and channel quality indicator (CQI). The RI, PMI or CQI can be determined based on channel covariance estimation and the Taylor series approximation of its inverse. Further, the RI and PMI can be determined separately. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320784 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING A GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE REPRESENTATIVE OF NETWORK PERFORMANCE - The disclosed embodiments include a system and method for monitoring performance of a packet network. In one embodiment, a method includes collecting network performance information from a plurality of network nodes of a packet network, the network performance information being indicative of a health of the network packet network. The method includes storing the network performance information collected from the plurality of network nodes and generating a graphical user interface including a graphical representation of the network performance information, wherein the graphical representation of a network segment is indicated as a line, and wherein a width of the line widens and narrows in accordance with an amount of traffic flow over the network segment. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320785 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING PACKET CONGESTION - A method and apparatus for addressing a congestion condition in a communication network are disclosed. For example, the method receives an alert for at least one of: a trunk or a Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC), where the trunk or the PVC is associated with a route. The method determines whether the alert is associated with a congestion condition by determining whether a trunk utilization has exceeded a first predetermined threshold for the trunk or for the at least one trunk supporting the PVC. The method then rebuilds the route if the first predetermined threshold is exceeded for the trunk or for the at least one trunk supporting said PVC. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320786 | CONTROL AND MONITORING FOR FAST MILLIMETER-WAVE LINK USING OUT-OF-BAND WIRELESS CHANNEL - A method for fast and efficient data downloading in wireless communications. The method includes ways to download file data of a large size from a server (access point) to a user's client (mobile device) at high speed and efficiency by using both mmWave wireless communication and conventional wireless communication (WiFi, 3G, etc.). A server transmits packetized file data to a client. The file data is transmitted as data packets via mmWave. In parallel, the server transmits check packets (roll-call packets) corresponding to the data packets. As a test at the time of establishing links, the latency for each communication line is measured. The receiver side, upon completion of receiving the check packets, checks whether their corresponding mmWave packets have arrived. If any corresponding mmWave packet has not arrived, it is determined that the mmWave packet has been lost and a retransmission request is immediately returned to the server via WiFi. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320787 | High Resolution Wireless Indoor Positioning System for Legacy Standards-Based Narrowband Mobile Radios - Two or more data packets transmitted through a wireless channel are received using a receiver device. The two or more data packets are a result of two or more transmissions that are made sequentially in time at different center frequencies in order to span a desired bandwidth. Each data packet of the two or more data packets is transmitted at a single center frequency. Time differences and/or carrier phase differences among the two or more transmissions are estimated. A time-of-arrival of one or more data packets of the two or more data packets is calculated using each data packet of the two or more data packets and one or more of the estimated time differences, the different center frequencies, and the estimated carrier phase differences. | 12-20-2012 |
20120327789 | END-TO-END DELAY MANAGEMENT FOR DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A method for calculating delay in a distributed antenna system includes sending a ping initiation message from a remote node to a host node in a distributed antenna system. The ping initiation message uniquely identifies a first communication port of the remote node to the host node with a unique identification. The method also includes receiving a ping reply message at the remote node. The ping reply message corresponds to the ping initiation message and also uniquely identifies the first communication port of the remote node with the unique identification. The method also includes determining, at the remote node, whether the ping reply message corresponds to the first communication port of the remote node based on the unique identification. The method also includes, when the ping reply message corresponds to the first communication port of the remote node, calculating the round-trip time delay between sending the ping initiation message and receiving the ping reply message at the remote node. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327790 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR COORDINATING CIRCUIT SWITCHED (CS) SERVICES IN PACKET TRANSFER MODE (PTM) - A wireless communications device is provided with a baseband chip capable of coordinating operations between circuit-switched (CS) and packet-switched (PS) services with different subscriber identity cards. The baseband chip is configured to perform a packet switched (PS) data service associated with a second service network, sacrifice a portion of data transceiving from/to the second service network to monitor a channel associated with a first service network during the PS data service, so as to receive message from the first service network or maintain mobility in the first service network. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327791 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENHANCING WIRELESS MESH NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless mesh network includes a plurality of radio data nodes. The wireless mesh network also includes at least one alternating current (AC) conduit coupled to at least two of the plurality of the radio data nodes. The at least one AC conduit is configured to transmit data between the at least two of the plurality of radio data nodes. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327792 | Method for Discovering and Maintaining Routes in Smart Meter Networks - A set of routes are discovered in a network including concentrators, smart meters and an imaginary node. Each concentrator node, a source, broadcasts a route request (RREQ) packet to the imaginary destination node. Intermediate nodes store a route as a node list (NL) in the RREQ packet and as a route table (RT) in the node. Then, each smart meter node can select a primary route and a secondary route from the smart meter node to any concentrator from the route table. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327793 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ESTIMATING AN UNKNOWN FREQUENCY ERROR OF A TONE SIGNAL - Estimating an unknown frequency error of a tone signal may comprise sampling, within an error bandwidth, wireless signals including the tone signal that occupy the error bandwidth to generate signal samples, and repeatedly, for different frequency offsets: applying a frequency offset to the signal samples to produce offset values that represent the signals occupying an offset bandwidth equal to the error bandwidth offset by an offset frequency; estimating, within a frequency estimation range less than the error bandwidth, a tone frequency error using the offset values; and measuring a signal-to-noise ratio of the tone signal using the signal samples and the estimated tone frequency error. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and discussed. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327794 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING TRANSMIT POWER OF RELAY NODE - A method and an apparatus for configuring transmit power of a relay node in consideration of a backhaul link channel state are provided. The method includes receiving a backhaul downlink signal, measuring a channel state of the backhaul downlink signal, and configuring access downlink transmit power using the measured channel state. The relay node transmit power control method of the present invention is advantageous in that a User Equipment (UE) can perform cell selection in consideration of the backhaul link channel state without extra signaling of the backhaul link channel state. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327795 | INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION USING DATA TRAFFIC POWER AND REFERENCE SIGNAL POWER - In a wireless communication system, interference on data tones is estimated by detecting data transmissions from interferers. An overall interference covariance matrix is estimated as a function of scalar traffic to pilot ratio (TPR) estimates, residual interference covariance estimates, and covariance of channel estimates of dominant interferers. The interference estimates are refined as a function of reliability based on a ratio of power received from a serving cell and power received from a dominant interferer. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327796 | TEST DEVICE AND TEST METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - To reduce the load of a communication process performed between pseudo base stations of different communication standards. An LTE pseudo base station unit | 12-27-2012 |
20120327797 | Method And Apparatus For A Handling A Cell Change - A user equipment for handling a cell change from a first cell to a second cell in a wireless communications network alters a duration of a measurement time over which at least one measurement is performed and alters a measurement bandwidth of the at least one measurement. The alterations may be performed based on associated bandwidths of the first and second cells. A network node sends, to the user equipment, a notification of a cell change and information associated with the cell change and also receives measurement data of at least one measurement performed over an altered measurement bandwidth and an altered duration of measurement time where the alterations are based on the information associated with the cell change. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327798 | CONNECTION ANALYSIS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method of generating an analysed call record comprising the steps of: providing control plane information identifying a plurality of terminations established at a gateway involved in the call; providing user plane information related to terminations used in the call; providing user plane measurement data being associated with respective terminations; analysing the user plane measurement data in order to produce respective quality indications for respective ones of the plurality of terminations; generating enhanced user plane information incorporating the respective quality indications; and associating together the control plane information and the enhanced termination reports. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327799 | Network Node and Method Related to Buffer Estimation - The present invention relates to a network node such as a base station for a wireless communications system, and to a method for supporting a change of a buffer estimation state of a user equipment from a passive to a proactive state. The method comprises receiving ( | 12-27-2012 |
20120327800 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE IN OFDM MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for efficiently measuring downlink interference in a Distributed Antenna System (DAS)-based Long Term Evolution Advanced (LTE-A) system with a plurality antennas distributed within the service area of each evolved Node B (eNB), through the use of a Channel Status Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS) method and a muting method, is provided. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327801 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING DEGRADATION OF RADIO LINK QUALITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING RELAYS - A method and apparatus for processing degradation of radio link quality in a wireless communication system supporting relays are disclosed. The method includes determining quality of a radio link between the first node and the communication apparatus, recovering the radio link between the first node and the communication apparatus, when the quality of the radio link between the first node and the communication apparatus is decreased to or below a predetermined threshold, and transmitting to the second node a signaling to control communication on a radio link between the second node and the communication apparatus, when the quality of the radio link between the first node and the communication apparatus is decreased to or below the predetermined threshold. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327802 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for performing measurement in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment determines a reference quality value based on quality values of a plurality of serving cells; determines a management object by comparing the reference quality value with a plurality of | 12-27-2012 |
20120327803 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FORWARDING PACKET BY EVOLVED NODE-B IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for forwarding a packet when a handover is performed between evolved NodeBs (eNBs) in a wireless communication system are provided. In a method of scheduling a forwarding packet by a target eNB in the wireless communication system, the method includes receiving a User Equipment (UE)'s packet forwarded from a source eNB of the UE at the occurrence of a handover of the UE, determining a delay value of the packet by considering at least one of an X2 delay value and a queuing delay value with respect to the forwarded packet, and scheduling the packet on the basis of the determined delay value. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327804 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER - The present description relates to a method for controlling uplink power in a distributed multi-node system, comprising the following steps: receiving reference signals from a plurality of antenna nodes containing at least one antenna; estimating average propagation loss on the basis of the receiving power of the reference signals received from the plurality of antenna nodes; receiving, via a downlink control channel, noise and interference (NI) information from a base station which contains the plurality of antenna nodes; and determining uplink transmission power using the estimated average propagation loss and the received noise and interference information. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327805 | Method of Aiding Uplink Beamforming Transmission - A method of aiding uplink transmission is disclosed. One method includes a base station downlink transmitting signals to at least a first terminal, the transmitted signals directed and conveying data to at least the first terminal. The method further includes a second terminal eavesdropping the transmitted signals, and measuring a signal quality. The second terminal estimates uplink channel information based on the measured signal quality, for aiding uplink transmission. Based at least in part on the estimated transmission channel, the second terminal transmits uplink signals to the base station. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327806 | Method and System for Reducing Transceiver Power Via a Variable Number of Channels - Aspects of a method and system for reducing transceiver power via a variable number of channels are provided. In this regard, utilization and/or availability of network and/or device resources may be determined and a configuration of channels utilized for transmitting data may be determined based on the determined utilization and/or availability of resources. Accordingly, the number of channels over which data is communicated may be altered based on determined thresholds for the utilization and/or availability of resources. Moreover, the configuration of channels utilized for communicating data may be dynamically altered by monitoring changes to the utilization and/or availability of resources. For example, the number of channels may be altered based on available bandwidth on one or more channels, based on capacity and/or available space of one or more buffers, and/or based on available power or desired power consumption of a transmitter. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327807 | NETWORK ENTITY AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A SERVICE FOR USER ENTITY IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network entity comprises a detector for detecting at least one behaviour indication indicating a behaviour of the user entity during a communication towards the communication network, an allocator for allocating said user entity to a certain user entity group from a plurality of user entity groups in dependence on the detected at least one behaviour indication, said certain user entity groups being respectively associated with a different set of management parameters adjusting said service, and an adjuster for adjusting said service for said user entity in dependence on the set of management parameters associated with the certain user entity group. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327808 | Method and Apparatus for Configuring Compressed Mode - A method and apparatus for configuring compressed mode operation comprises detecting a compressed mode pattern or pattern sequence scheduling three or more consecutive compressed mode frames and taking appropriate mitigation action. In a first aspect a non activation construction is suppressed and the compressed mode pattern sequence is activated. In the second aspect if a pattern or sequence scheduling three or more consecutive compressed mode frames is identified, activation is suppressed. In a third aspect if such a patent or sequence is identified, a normal frame is inserted in the pattern sequence replacing a compressed mode frame. | 12-27-2012 |
20130003566 | Method and Node for Controlling Bearer Related Resources as well as a Corresponding System and Computer Program - The present invention relates to a method for controlling bearer related resources by a policy and charging system in a communication network and a node for controlling bearer related resources, as well as to a system comprising the node, and to a computer program configured to make effective use of bearer resources of a telecommunication network. The method for controlling bearer related resources by a policy and charging system in a communication network comprises the steps of obtaining, at a network node, bearer support information indicating whether a user equipment, UE, supports a dedicated bearer of a plurality of bearers, which is a bearer dedicated to a service session; setting a time period for the service session according to the obtained bearer support information; and instructing a modification of a reserved bearer resource assigned to the service session when the set time period expires. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003567 | PARALLEL PROCESSING FOR MULTIPLE INSTANCE REAL-TIME MONITORING - Systems and methods are disclosed for analyzing network traffic data to generate complex statistics associated with the network traffic in real-time through parallel processing and data pipelining. In one implementation, a system includes a processor and a memory. The memory stores instructions that cause the processor to generate a plurality of program instances, wherein a first program instance observes the network traffic and uses a plurality of execution threads to distribute portions of the network traffic to additional program instances tasked with generating statistics associated with the network traffic. In other embodiments, a plurality of additional execution threads to the first program instance are tasked with generating the statistics. In either case, the generated statistics are placed into a data pipeline organized into time intervals of generated statistics, wherein the computation of higher-order statistics are computed as the lower-order time intervals are processed. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003568 | Frequency offset estimation scheme in scheduled based wireless system - A technique to provide frequency offset estimation for packets transmitted during a service period allocated strictly for designated source and destination devices. The destination device obtains coarse and fine frequency offset estimation from the short and long preambles. A residual frequency offset is tracked for the data blocks and combined with the coarse and fine frequency offset to obtain a total frequency offset to apply to the data blocks. The total frequency offset value at the end of the first packet is saved and, instead of again estimating the coarse and fine frequency offset values with the short and long preambles of the second packet, the saved total frequency offset value is used as the initialization value to add to the residual frequency offset in the second packet. The saved offset value at the end of each packet becomes the initialization value for the subsequent packet. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003569 | Control Channel Decoding of Neighboring Cells - A method of determining a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) includes descrambling a control channel, decoding control messages included in the control channel wherein the decoded control messages include control bits and received cyclic redundancy check (CRC) bits, generating a CRC from the decoded control bits, determining the RNTI from the generated CRC and received CRC and utilizing the RNTI for decoding subsequent subframes. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003570 | TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT AND METHOD - A transmitter circuit includes a first unit configured to determine a transmission power of the transmitter circuit, and a second unit configured to determine whether a transmission of data for a signaling radio bearer is scheduled by the transmitter circuit. The transmitter circuit further includes a third unit configured to suppress a transmission of transmission data by the transmitter circuit if the transmission power exceeds a threshold value and if the transmission of data for the signaling radio bearer is scheduled. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003571 | QUALITY CONTROL APPARATUS, MOVING IMAGE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, QUALITY CONTROL METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A moving image transmission system determines adequate number of packets, which are corresponding to redundant portion, in accordance with a network state. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003572 | INDOOR POSITION DETERMINATION METHOD AND SYSTEM BASED ON WLAN SIGNAL STRENGTH - An indoor position determination method and system based on WLAN signal strength using remote monitoring and cell space environmental attenuation is provided. The indoor position determination method includes a remote monitoring step of collecting information about signal strength from a neighboring AP and generating an AP signal strength table, a position information requesting step of receiving identification information and signal strength of a detected AP from a mobile terminal, and a cell determination step of comparing a signal strength pattern of each AP received from the mobile terminal with a neighboring AP signal strength pattern of each AP with reference to the AP signal strength table and determining a cell having an AP with a most similar pattern as a cell where the mobile terminal is presently located. Environmental attenuation is used instead of wall attenuation and floor attenuation, and locations of an AP and a mobile terminal in the same cell space may be may be simply estimated by applying the same environmental attenuation. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003573 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING SECONDARY USAGE OF LICENSED CELLULAR SPECTRUM - A method and apparatus for a secondary wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to use of secondary cellular spectrum are provided. The secondary WTRU monitors transmissions of a primary WTRU; determines whether to provide assistance to the primary WTRU; and in response to a determination to provide assistance, performs cooperative communications with the primary WTRU for its transmission of data to a base station. If the assistance results in the data being transmitted to the base station faster than it would have with out assistance, the secondary WTRU may utilize uplink resources originally intended for the primary WTRU. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003574 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD AND SWITCHING DEVICE - A communication system has: a monitoring unit | 01-03-2013 |
20130003575 | NODE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Transmission of transmission packets from communication terminals ( | 01-03-2013 |
20130003576 | Node and method for communications handling - Example embodiments disclosed herein may be directed towards a system, and corresponding method, for sending machine-to-machine (M2M) application specific parameters. These parameters may allow a network operator to guide M2M application behaviour in accordance with potentially limited recourses in the network. These parameters may also be used to provide IPv6 address information to a gateway node and/or M2M server and/or Service Capability Server (SCS). | 01-03-2013 |
20130003577 | COMMUNICATION STATE TRANSITIONING CONTROL - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe devices, methods, computer-readable media and systems configurations for managing state transitions of communication circuitries in wireless networks. Embodiments manage radio resource control (RRC) state transitions and/or discontinuous reception (DRX) state transitions. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003578 | User Equipment Restricted Measurements For Multimedia Broadcast Single Frequency Network Networks - An example apparatus includes a processor and an associated memory, in which the processor is configured to receive an indicator that indicates whether Multimedia Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) subframes are configured for measurement restriction and perform measurements based on the indicator. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003579 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PARSING A NETWORK ABSTRACTION-LAYER FOR RELIABLE DATA COMMUNICATION - A method and apparatus are described including parsing an abstraction-layer header, assigning a priority to a packet to be transmitted, buffering the data to be transmitted, transmitting data retrieved from a buffer via a datagram protocol, receiving a request for retransmission of data, determining if the requested data is in the buffer and retransmitting the requested data via a protocol that provides end-to-end acknowledgement of data and error recovery. A network monitor of a transmitter is connected between a network interface and a retransmission decision maker for deciding which packets to retransmit, for example, based on the assigned priority and collected network statistics. A network monitor may also be provided at a receiver for collecting current network statistics and reporting them to transmitter. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003580 | Mechanism for Aggregating Uplink Interference Information for Use in Multi-Carrier Systems - There is proposed a mechanism by means of which information can be generated and used for estimating and identifying at each base transceiver station of a communication network the set of other base transceiver stations generating interference on certain monitored component carriers used by the base transceiver station, i.e. information for the generation of the incoming uplink background interference matrix. For this purpose, a specific communication information set, referred to as uplink radio load map, is determined which informs about an average (time/frequency) and aggregated (over all or group of served UEs) uplink load measure per component carrier. Based on the uplink radio load map received via suitable signaling from other base transceiver stations, each base transceiver station can determine the incoming uplink background interference matrix and initiate, if necessary, suitable measures for reducing interference per component carrier. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003581 | RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Radio blocs (BR | 01-03-2013 |
20130003582 | NETWORK SPLITTING DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD USING VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS - A network separation apparatus allows a user terminal, connected to an internal network, to connect an external network. The network separation apparatus includes a packet transmission/reception unit to receive a packet generated in a virtual environment on the user terminal and transmit the packet either to the external network or the internal network. The apparatus also includes a packet analysis unit to analyze the packet received from the packet transmission/reception unit and a packet processing unit to allow the packet to be transmitted to the external network or the internal network, separately, based on an analysis result of the packet from the packet analysis unit and a preset packet processing policy. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003583 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR REDISTRIBUTING RESOURCES FOR USE IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an arrangement ( | 01-03-2013 |
20130003584 | Technique for Automatic Gain Control in a Multi-Carrier Communication System - A technique for performing Automatic Gain Control (AGC) in a multi-carrier communication system in which transmission gaps are scheduled on a serving carrier to enable temporary tuning to another carrier by a served device is described. A method embodiment of this technique comprises: performing a first AGC procedure in relation to a first signal received on a first carrier during a first transmission gap; determining an AGC configuration for a second procedure based on at least one of channel conditions in relation to the first carrier and a lapsed time since the first transmission gap; and determining if the second AGC procedure can be skipped. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003585 | Methods and Apparatus in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to methods and apparatus in a RBS and a UE for reference signal (RS) measurements in an OFDM system, that enable having a configurable RS transmission bandwidth which is smaller than the system bandwidth. This allows for better interference coordination of RS, which in turn improves the UE RS measurements used for different services such as positioning. The RBS retrieves the RS transmission bandwidth, determines a RS measurement bandwidth based on this RS transmission bandwidth, and transmits the determined bandwidth to the UE. The UE receives the RS measurement bandwidth and measures the RS in a bandwidth determined based on the received measurement bandwidth and the UE capability. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003586 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RELAY CONTROL METHOD, RELAY STATION APPARATUS, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - A mobile communication system includes a base station, a mobile station, and a relay station. The mobile station includes a transmitter transmitting a random access request to the base station. The relay station includes a transmission information acquisition unit receiving a random access response from the base station and acquiring transmission information of a connection establishment request out of the random access response, and a relay report unit measuring a received state of the connection establishment request and transmitting relay information including the received state to the base station and the base station includes a comparison determinator comparing a received state of the connection establishment request measured by the base station with a measurement information of the received state in the received relay information and determining whether the relay station is used to relay radio communications with the mobile station. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003587 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HIGH RATE OFDM COMMUNICATIONS - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003588 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE STATION-ASSISTED INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Devices and methods are provided for using a mobile station to mitigate interference between wireless access points. A mobile station communicates interference mitigation data corresponding to a first and second set of radio resources between a first and second wireless access point (AP). The interference mitigation data is processed by the first wireless AP to resolve conflicts in the claiming, and subsequent assignment, of the first and second radio resource assignments to the mobile station. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003589 | MOBILE STATION-ASSISTED INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Devices and methods are provided for using a mobile station to mitigate interference between wireless access points. A mobile station communicates interference mitigation data corresponding to a first and second set of radio resources between a first and second wireless access point (AP). The interference mitigation data is processed by the first wireless AP to resolve conflicts in the claiming, and subsequent assignment, of the first and second radio resource assignments to the mobile station. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003590 | ACCESS POINT FOR MOBILE STATION-ASSISTED INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Devices and methods are provided for using a mobile station to mitigate interference between wireless access points. A mobile station communicates interference mitigation data corresponding to a first and second set of radio resources between a first and second wireless access point (AP). The interference mitigation data is processed by the first wireless AP to resolve conflicts in the claiming, and subsequent assignment, of the first and second radio resource assignments to the mobile station. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003591 | System and Method for Dynamic Coordination of Radio Resources Usage in a Wireless Network Environment - An architecture, system and associated method for dynamic coordination of radio resource usage in a network environment. In one aspect, a method of processing sensory reports of one or more sensing elements in a radio network comprises receiving a sensory report from a sensing element operating in multiple radio access technologies, the sensory report including sensory data associated with multiple radio channels relative to at least one radio element; identifying the sensing element's identity and determining if the sensory report has been tagged with a code generated by a predetermined code generator; responsive to the identifying and the determining, authenticating the sensory report; and correlating the sensory report from the sensing element with at least one of one or more previous sensory reports from the sensing element and one or more previous sensory reports received from another sensing element. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003592 | Optimizing Communications - A method of transmitting a data stream to end-user nodes of a network, and a corresponding communication system, program, and distribution system for distributing the program. The method comprises: for each of a plurality of possible combinations of routes of the stream to a plurality of consuming end-user nodes, evaluating a utility function for each of the consuming end-user nodes, the utility function being dependent on route and defining a quantitative measure of end-user benefit that would be experienced at the respective end-user node by consumption of the stream; for each of the plurality of possible combinations of routes, determining an overall utility value based on the respective evaluation of the utility functions of each of the plurality of consuming end-user nodes; and selecting a preferred combination of routes for the stream based on the overall utility values of the different possible combinations. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003593 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING END TO END VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus for managing a virtual private network are disclosed. For example, the method collects performance data for at least one parameter from a plurality of customer edge routers and a plurality of provider edge routers associated with the virtual private network. The method correlates the performance data for identifying one or more performance exceptions based on a threshold for each of the at least one parameter, and performs a trending analysis using the one or more performance exceptions to predict a potential problem that will impact the virtual private network. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003594 | Communication Apparatus, Method for Implementing Communication, and Non-Transitory Computer-Readable Medium - A communication apparatus may comprise a processor and a memory. The memory is configured to store computer-readable instructions that, when executed, instruct the communication apparatus to execute steps comprising acquiring a type of transmission data referring to information about the transmission data, and limiting a search range of a network bandwidth, in response to the acquired type of the transmission data, wherein the network bandwidth is measured by a transmission interval of a transmission of a plurality of packets via a network, and a reception interval of a reception of the plurality of packets via a network. The memory is configured to store computer-readable instructions that further instructs the communication apparatus to execute steps comprising setting the search range according to the limited search range, and transmitting a packet within the limited search range for measuring the network bandwidth. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003595 | LINK ASSESSMENT BEFORE TERMINATING ALTERNATE CONNECTION DURING HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK HANDOVERS - When providing wireless communication capability for patient monitoring devices (PMDs) ( | 01-03-2013 |
20130003596 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RELOCATING ADDRESS SPACE - The invention relates to a method for relocating address space in a peer-to-peer network with hierarchical addressing is performed in a network ( | 01-03-2013 |
20130003597 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station device communicates with a mobile station device, either directly or via a relay station device. The base station device includes: a reference signal transmission instruction unit configured to instruct the mobile station device to transmit a reference signal; and a reference signal measurement instruction unit configured to instruct the relay station device to measure the reference signal that is transmitted by the mobile station device. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010615 | RAPID NETWORK FORMATION FOR LOW-POWER AND LOSSY NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a node joins a communication network, and in response to joining the network, operates in a rapid startup mode, wherein the node in rapid startup mode establishes network configurations rapidly by deemphasizing quality (optimality) of the network configurations. Subsequent to operating in the rapid startup mode (e.g., after some timer or explicit command), the node then operates in a robust mode, wherein the node in robust mode iteratively refines the network configurations to increase the quality of the network configurations. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010616 | WIRELESS DEVICE FOR SELECTING CONNECTION TARGET BASED ON SIGNAL QUALITY, SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A wireless device for selecting a connection target based on signal quality, a system and a method thereof are provided. The invention selects a candidate device having the best signal quality and duration of the signal quality is not less than a threshold reaching a certain time. If the selected candidate device also selects the wireless device, a unique connection is established between the wireless device and the candidate device. In a dynamical and complicated environment, the disclosed system and the method can build up a stable linear topology through automatic negotiation among wireless devices. The invention then achieves the effect of updating topology in time to adapt to environment changes. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010617 | RELATIVE POSITION DETERMINATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICES - The position of a target wireless device in a wireless communication network can be calculated relative to a predetermined number of reference wireless devices in the wireless communication network to preclude the need for fixed/absolute reference points. The reference wireless devices can be selected based, at least in part, on comparing one or more performance measurements associated with each wireless device against one or more corresponding threshold performance measurements. The position of each of the reference wireless network devices relative to each other is determined based, at least in part, on a distance between each pair of the reference wireless network devices. The relative position of the target wireless network device is determined based, at least in part, on the position of each of the reference wireless network devices relative to each other and a distance between the target wireless network device and each of the reference wireless network devices. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010618 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING FLEXIBILITY IN PEER DISCOVERY RANGE AND FREQUENCY OF UPDATES - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus transmits a first peer discovery signal with a first periodicity/temporal frequency in a first set of peer discovery resources. The apparatus determines an energy on an allocated peer discovery resource of a second set of peer discovery resources. The apparatus refrains from transmitting a second peer discovery signal in the second set of peer discovery resources when the energy is greater than a threshold. The apparatus transmits the second peer discovery signal in the second set of peer discovery resources with a second periodicity/temporal frequency less than the first periodicity/temporal frequency when the energy is less than the threshold. The apparatus may utilize the first set of peer discovery resources every period and the second set of peer discovery resources once every N periods in which once every N periods is the second periodicity. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010619 | System and Method for Multi-Carrier Network Operation - Methods, devices, and systems for multi-carrier network operation are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of pairing and linking carriers in a multi-carrier network, wherein the multi-carrier network includes a downlink carrier, a first uplink carrier, and a second uplink carrier between a base station and a user equipment (“UE”), comprises receiving a Radio Resource Control (“RRC”) signaling; pairing the first uplink carrier with the downlink carrier using information in the RRC signaling, wherein the information includes the pairing of the downlink carrier with the first uplink carrier; and linking the second uplink carrier with the downlink carrier using information in the RRC signaling, wherein the information includes the linking of the downlink carrier with the second uplink carrier. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010620 | Connection Reconfiguration in a Multicarrier OFDM Network - A base station transmits a control message to a wireless device to configure a first connection comprising at least one data radio bearer and to configure measurement parameters of the wireless device. The base station receives a measurement report from the wireless device comprising signal quality information of a second carrier. The base station activates the second carrier if the at least one measurement report indicates an acceptable signal quality for the second carrier. The base station transmits data traffic to the wireless device on the first and second carriers. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010621 | Control Apparatus and Control Method - The control apparatus is provided with a channel quality test module for collecting power consumption between adjacent gateways of the data transmission routes, a communication interface for collecting data delay of the respective gateways of the data transmission routes by performing data communication with the gateways, a memory for storing a gateway routing table containing the multiple data transmission routes, the power consumption collected by the channel quality test module, and the data delay collected by the communication interface, and a processor for adding priority to the multiple data transmission routes in the gateway routing table stored in the memory on the basis of the power consumption and data delay stored in the memory. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010622 | MULTIPLE BEARER RADIO SYSTEMS - Multiple bearers such as LTE and P25 in a radio system are used to provide diversity and therefore more reliable signal transmissions. The bearers are ranked according to one or more quality characteristics and uplink or downlink messages are transmitted using the best available path at that time. Emergency messages are transmitted simultaneously on all available bearers. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010623 | COMMUNICATION SCHEME FOR CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION - The invention relates to a method for transmitting and a method for reconstructing channel quality information in a communication system. Further, the invention also provides a transmitter and receiver performing these methods, respectively. The invention suggests a scheme for communicating channel quality measures that on the one hand allows for an accurate reconstruction of the channel quality measures at the receiver and on the other hand requires an acceptable transmission overhead. This is achieved by partitioning channel quality measures into at least two partitions and to compress the values partition-wise, for example, by means of a discrete cosine transform and the transmission of only a subset of the resulting coefficients. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010624 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE MEASUREMENT - The present invention discloses a method and system for measuring and reporting a multimedia broadcast multicast service, for solving the technical problem of how to measure and report a measurement result reflecting MBMS performance by the UE. In the present invention, the UE measures the MBMS according to a measurement configuration, and when a measurement reporting norm is met, the UE reports a measurement result or a measurement log of the measured MBMS measurement quantity to a network side. By the method, the operators can be assisted to timely understand the MBMS service performance of the current cell and can timely find the potential problems according to the measurement reporting result, and then resolve the problems as soon as possible; furthermore, the efficiency and cost problems caused by previous drive test can be effectively saved, and the service performance is improved. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010625 | WIRELESS SUBSCRIBER UPLINK (UL) GRANT SIZE SELECTION - A method and apparatus of a wireless subscriber requesting an uplink (UL) grant size from a base station (BS) are disclosed. One method includes the subscriber analyzing traffic patterns of uplink data, the subscriber selecting a new grant size based on the analyzed traffic patterns, and the subscriber requesting the new grant size by signaling the new grant size to the BS. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010626 | TERMINAL SETTING CHANGE NOTIFICATION - There is disclosed a method, and a corresponding apparatus, for maintaining the settings of a user equipment, comprising: monitoring at least one stored setting in the terminal; responsive to a change in said at least one stored setting notifying a controller; and responsive to said notification selectively resetting said at least one stored setting. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010627 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AN ADAPTIVE FILTER ARCHITECTURE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for selecting a spectral region in a radio frequency spectrum for initiating a communication session having an uplink and a downlink, correlating a signal strength of portions of the spectral region to generate a correlation factor, detecting radio frequency interference in the spectral region according to the correlation factor, and generating tuning coefficient data to substantially suppress the radio frequency interference in the spectral region during the communication session. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010628 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COOPERATIVE DATA TRANSFER - A method for cooperative data transfer includes establishing a primary wireless connection with a primary access station. The primary wireless connection uses a primary synchronization channel that is transmitted during a first frame of a super frame. The super frame comprises a plurality of frames. The method also includes detecting a secondary synchronization channel generated by an alternate access station during a subsequent frame of the super frame. The method further includes determining whether the detected secondary synchronization channel has a signal strength greater than a threshold signal strength. The method additionally includes receiving permission to begin a cooperative data transfer operation with both the primary access station and the alternate access station. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010629 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AN ADAPTIVE FILTER ARCHITECTURE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for identifying a spectral region in a radio frequency spectrum for initiating a communication session having a transmission link and a reception link, determining a correlation factor from signals measured in the spectral region, detecting according to the correlation factor a foreign communication signal in the spectral region, generating coefficient data to prevent interference with the foreign communication signal while transmitting in the transmission link, filtering a first signal for transmission in the transmission link according to the coefficient data to generate a filtered signal, and causing a transmission of the filtered signal which prevents interference with the foreign communication signal while transmitting in the transmission link. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010630 | Method And Apparatus For Reporting Inter-Frequency Measurement Using RACH Message In A Mobile Communication System - A user equipment (UE) is provided which reduces uplink signaling overhead in the process of reporting inter-frequency measurement results over a RACH. For measurement reporting, the UE receives an SIB including a cell information list for non-used frequency cells and a threshold from an RNC, compares signal strengths of signals received from the non-used frequency cells with the threshold, and acquires at least one inter-frequency cell ID indicating at least one non-used frequency cell having signal strength exceeding the threshold from the cell information list. The at least one inter-frequency cell ID is included in a RACH message as measurement result information for the at least one non-used frequency cell, and transmitted to the RNC. The RNC determines that the cell corresponding to the inter-frequency cell ID has signal strength exceeding the threshold. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010631 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING LOGGED MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus for performing logged measurement in a wireless communication system. A terminal receives measurement setup and a terminal selection parameter from a base station. The terminal determines whether to apply the measurement setup on the basis of the terminal selection parameter. If it is determined that the measurement setup is to be applied, the terminal performs measurement logging on the basis of the measurement setup. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010632 | Simultaneous Feedback Signaling for Dynamic Bandwidth Selection - A method of simultaneously providing channel quality feedback information in all valid sub-channels is provided to facilitate and improve the performance of dynamic transmission bandwidth adjustment and fast link adaptation. A receiving device receives a sounding signal over a wide channel in a wireless system. The sounding signal is transmitted from a transmitting device over multiple sub-channels of the wide channel. The receiving device estimates channel quality information based on the sounding signal for each sub-channel. The channel quality information includes estimated average SNR and recommended MCS and other channel quality metrics. The receiving device transmits a feedback message to the transmitting device. The feedback message contains the estimated channel quality information for all valid sub-channels within the transmission bandwidth. The transmitting device performs dynamic transmission bandwidth selection and fast link adaptation based on the channel quality information for all valid sub-channels. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010633 | REDUCING LOAD IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Apparatus and method for reducing an air interface load in a communication network. A base station is provided with a receiver adapted to receive signals from a terminal via a Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) and a second control channel. A measuring unit measures a signal to interference ratio (SIR) of the DPCCH. An effective SIR determining unit determines an effective SIR on the basis of the measured SIR of the DPCCH and an estimate of the SIR of the second control channel. A comparison unit compares the effective SIR with a target SIR, and a power determination unit determines a power control command for controlling power usage for the DPCCH on the basis of the comparison. A transmitter sends a message to the terminal, the message including the power control command. The invention allows the DPCCH power (or DPCCH SIR) operating point to be maintained at a low level. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010634 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR APPLYING ADAPTIVE LINK IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus of transceiving a signal using a link adaptation in a communication system, particularly, a method of dividing a resource region into a plurality of resource regions, and applying different line adaptations to the resource regions. A method of controlling a link of a terminal in a mobile communication system receives at least two downlink channel signals to estimate states of received channels, generates a channel discrepancy report when states of channels exceed a preset threshold, and reports the channel discrepancy report to a base station through a preset uplink channel. A method of controlling a link of a base station receives a channel discrepancy report through an uplink channel, and determines MCS and transmission power of downlink channels based on the received channel discrepancy report and transmits the determined MCS and transmission power to the terminal through a downlink channel. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010635 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION POWER AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. Particularly, the present invention relates to a method in which a home base station performs power control and an apparatus for the same, the method comprising the steps of: acquiring information on downlink signal strength of a macrocell; and determining an upper limit of downlink transmission power of the home base station by taking into consideration of the downlink signal strength of the macrocell, wherein: when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the upper limit of the downlink transmission power of the home base station is determined to be an intermediate value among a minimum transmission power value, a maximum transmission power value, and a power control value proportional to the downlink signal strength of the macrocell; and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the upper limit of the downlink transmission power of the home base station is determined to be a predetermined fixed value, the predetermined condition being a value indicating the downlink signal strength of the macrocell is equal to or greater than a first threshold value. | 01-10-2013 |
20130016619 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CURRENT TO CERTAIN COMPONENTS OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICEAANM Rahman; MahiburAACI ChandlerAAST AZAACO USAAGP Rahman; Mahibur Chandler AZ USAANM Oliaei; OmidAACI TempeAAST AZAACO USAAGP Oliaei; Omid Tempe AZ USAANM Ivonnet; JorgeAACI ChandlerAAST AZAACO USAAGP Ivonnet; Jorge Chandler AZ US - A method may include: determining a signal strength of a signal in a receive path of a wireless communication element, the receive path configured to receive a wireless communication signal and convert the wireless communication signal into a digital signal based at least on an oscillator signal; selecting a current mode from at least one of a first current mode and a second current mode for the wireless communication element based at least on the signal strength; communicating a control signal to the receive path indicative of the current mode; modifying one or more operational parameters of the receive path such that the receive path consumes a different amount of current in each of the current modes. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016620 | Network Transmission Capacity MeasurementAANM Den Hartog; Frank Theodoor HenkAACI ZoeterwoudeAACO NLAAGP Den Hartog; Frank Theodoor Henk Zoeterwoude NLAANM Delphinanto; ArchiAACI DelftAACO NLAAGP Delphinanto; Archi Delft NLAANM Nicolai; Floris PeterAACI AmsterdamAACO NLAAGP Nicolai; Floris Peter Amsterdam NL - Transmission capacity from a first node to a second node through a communication network is measured. First and second probe message from the first node to the second node, a first and second amount of data in the first and second probe message respectively being mutually different, at least one of the first and second amount exceeding a fragmentation threshold of the communication network. First and second round trip time durations are measured between transmission of the first and second probe message from the first node and reception back at the first node of a first and second response message from the second node to the first and second probe message respectively. The capacity is computed from a difference between the first and second round trip time duration. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016621 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR RESTRICTING TRANSMISSION OUTPUT IN A PORTABLE TERMINALAANM KIL; Kwang-MinAACI Gyeonggi-doAACO KRAAGP KIL; Kwang-Min Gyeonggi-do KRAANM AN; Hae-JunAACI Gyeonggi-doAACO KRAAGP AN; Hae-Jun Gyeonggi-do KR - A transmission output restricting method and apparatus of a portable terminal includes a radio frequency (RF) unit to detect a transmission power reflected based on a degree of mismatching of an antenna when a transmission power is emitted via the antenna, and to measure a transmission power increased due to the reflected transmission power caused by a human contact to the antenna, and a controller to control an output of the transmission power by restricting the output of the transmission power when the transmission power measured by the RF unit is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016622 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING PACKET SERVICE IN A PORTABLE TERMINALAANM LEE; Shin-DuckAACI Gyeongsangbuk-doAACO KRAAGP LEE; Shin-Duck Gyeongsangbuk-do KRAANM LEE; Hyun-ChulAACI DaeguAACO KRAAGP LEE; Hyun-Chul Daegu KR - An apparatus and method for providing a packet service in a portable terminal in which a first communication network unit provides the packet service through a first communication network, a second communication network unit provides a circuit service set as a default service and the packet service through a second communication network, and a controller has the capability to switch delivery of the packet service from the first communication network to the second communication network. When it is determined that a data rate of a bandwidth allocated by the first communication network is lower than a maximum data rate supported by the second communication network during the packet service in progress through the first communication network, the controller preferably switches from the first communication network to the second communication network and controls the second communication network unit to perform the packet service. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016623 | Method and a Device for Power Reduction in an LTE System - A method for use in a wireless communications system in which there is at least a first mode which controls the traffic to and from user terminals in a cell within the system, so that there is downlink traffic in the system. The first node transmits downlink traffic in radio frames, each of which comprises sub-frames. The first node performs measurements on pre-defined system indicators in at least said first cell, and based on the results of said measurements, the first node is allowed to autonomously decide to vary the number of available down link sub-frames used for down link traffic in said down link radio frames and also to vary the content of the down link sub frames which are used, said decision being valid for a time which is specified by the first node. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016624 | QoS THROTTLING FOR MOBILE DEVICESAANM Li; XiangyangAACI PuDong Jinqiao ShanghaiAACO CNAAGP Li; Xiangyang PuDong Jinqiao Shanghai CNAANM Cai; YigangAACI NapervilleAAST ILAACO USAAGP Cai; Yigang Naperville IL US - Communication networks and methods are disclosed for performing Quality of Service (QoS) throttling for mobile devices. One embodiment comprises a network element that serves a mobile device for data services. The network element includes a control system that monitors usage of the mobile device that is accessing the data services. The network element further includes a policy system that identifies that the usage of the mobile device reaches a usage threshold, and determines a reduced QoS responsive to reaching the usage threshold. The control system then downgrades the QoS provided to the mobile device for data services based on the reduced QoS. The policy system may further send a notification to the mobile device that the QoS is reduced. | 01-17-2013 |
20130021923 | COMMUNICATION DROP AVOIDANCE VIA SELECTIVE MEASUREMENT REPORT DATA REDUCTION - Mitigating a risk of a communication session being dropped while the communication session is in progress. Conventional measurement report (MR) messages can be generated and communicated from a mobile communication device to a communication network. Responsive to the mobile communication device detecting an out-of-sync (OOS) condition, an OOS counter can be incremented. When the OOS counter is equal to at least a threshold value, generation of conventional MR messages can cease. Further, at least one size reduced MR message can be generated. An amount of data contained in the size reduced MR message can be selectively limited to be less than an amount of data contained in the conventional MR messages. The size reduced MR message can be communicated from the mobile communication device to the communication network. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021924 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TIME DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATION WITH AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST ERROR CONTROL | 01-24-2013 |
20130021925 | COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (COMP) TRANSMISSION METHOD SELECTION AND FEEDBACK REQUIREMENTS - A method for configuring coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission by an eNode B is described. Feedback information is received from a user equipment (UE). A CoMP transmission measurement set is determined. The CoMP transmission measurement set is sent to the UE. A channel state information (CSI) report of the CoMP measurement set is received from the UE. A CoMP transmission method used for each CoMP transmission point in the CoMP measurement set is selected. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021926 | FEEDBACK REPORTING BASED ON CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNAL (CSI-RS) GROUPS - In macro/RRH setups, channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS) and demodulation reference signals (DM-RS) may be used to decouple control and data transmission. Data transmission (e.g. for LTE Rel 10 and beyond) may be based on CSI-RS and DM-RS, while control may be received from a different set of cells or TxPs via CRS. Certain aspects of the present disclosure introduce a reporting framework, in which configuration of data-serving cells/TxPs may be carried out based on CSI-RS. In certain aspects, a new concept of CSI-RS groups, i.e., a set of CSI-RS ports that a UE considers as one group for precoding matrix indicator (PMI)/channel quality indicator (CQI)/rank indicator (RI) reporting, may be defined. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021927 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SLAVE STATION DEVICE, MASTER STATION DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication system that includes a hub and multiple nodes is provided. The nodes include a wireless communication control unit that acquires, during a predetermined communication time period, a signal transmitted to the hub by a node; an RSSI calculating unit that calculates propagation information from the signal acquired by the wireless communication control unit; and an RSSI table creating unit that transmits the calculated propagation information to the hub. The hub includes a wireless communication control unit that receives propagation information transmitted by each of the nodes and an RSSI table aggregating unit that aggregates the received propagation information. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021928 | EVALUATING A CAPACITY OF A CELL OF A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method, a computer readable media and a device, the method is for evaluating a capacity of a cell of a radio access network (RAN), and may include monitoring, by a monitor, (a) downstream traffic that is directed towards the cell and (b) responses from the cell to the downstream traffic, to provide monitoring results; calculating, in response to the monitoring results, round trip time (RTT) statistics; and generating an estimate of the capacity of the cell in response to the RTT statistics. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021929 | METHOD OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR MOBILE TERMINAL IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method for managing mobility of a terminal in a heterogeneous network environment is provided. According to an aspect, there is provided an operation method of a terminal receiving parameters for Coordinated Multi-point transmission/reception (CoMP) operation in a heterogeneous network environment, the operation method including, at the terminal, receiving at least one parameter among a CoMP operation mode parameter, a time information parameter regarding a time at which the CoMP operation starts, a point information parameter about points that participate in the CoMP operation, and a CoMP operation parameter, from a base station, through a layer-3 message. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an unnecessary ping-pong handover and efficiently provide service continuity. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021930 | NETWORK SYSTEM - A network system has lower switches and upper switches connected to the lower switches. Each of the upper switches includes a connection information notifying means for notifying connected lower switch list informations each of which includes an identification information on each of the lower switches connected to each of the upper switches, to the lower switches connected to each of the upper switches. Each of the lower switches includes a comparison determination means for comparing the connected lower switch list informations notified by the connection information notifying means, in order to determine a connection state between the upper switches and the lower switches. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021931 | METHOD FOR AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for feeding back channel information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes calculating an average Signal to Interference and Noise Ratio (SINR), determining a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level corresponding to the average SINR, determining an MCS level meeting a predefined condition among MCS levels equal to or less than the determined MCS level, and reporting a channel quality indicator representing the determined MCS level to a base station. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021932 | SLEEP MODE FOR USER EQUIPMENT RELAYS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for subframe muting and/or discontinuous reception (DRX) mode related to sleep mode for user equipment (UE) relays. One method generally includes measuring, at a UE functioning as a relay (i.e., a UE relay), signals of one or more other UEs functioning as relays during one or more particular subframes and reporting the measurements of the signals to an apparatus. Another method generally includes determining, at a first UE functioning as a relay, that no UEs are being served by the first UE; based on the determination, increasing an interval between broadcast signals; and transmitting the broadcast signals according to the increased interval. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021933 | RAN Analytics, Control And Tuning Via Multi-Protocol, Multi-Domain, And Multi-RAT Analysis - The present invention identifies methods and procedures for correlating control plane and user plane data, consolidating and abstracting the learned and correlated data in a form convenient for minimizing and exporting to other network devices, such as those in the Core Network and the Access Network, or the origin server, CDN devices or client device. These correlation methods may use Control Plane information from a plurality of interfaces in the RAN, and User plane information from other interfaces in the RAN or CN. IF the device is deployed as an inline proxy, this information may be exported using in-band communication, such as HTTP extension headers in HTTP Request or Response packets, or another protocol header, such as the IP or GTP-U header field. Alternatively, this information can be exported out-of-band using a separate protocol between the RAN Transit Network Device (RTND) and the receiving device. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021934 | MULTI-FREQUENCY BAND RECEIVER BASED ON PATH SUPERPOSITION WITH REGULATION POSSIBILITIES - A multi-frequency band receiver includes first and second receive paths, a combiner, a code multiplex baseband stage and an amplifier controller. The first and second receive paths receive and process first and second code multiplex signals, respectively. The first or the second receive path includes an amplifier having a variable gain factor. The combiner superposes the first and second processed code multiplex signals. The code multiplex baseband stage processes the superposed code multiplex signal to obtain and use first and second baseband receive signals. The first and second baseband receive signals represent data of the first and second code multiplex signals, respectively. In addition, the amplifier controller controls the gain factor of the amplifier having a variable gain factor so that the first or the second baseband receive signal includes a minimum reception quality which can be variably predetermined and is dependent on the operating state. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021935 | METHOD OF MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of monitoring a control channel in a wireless communication system includes receiving, by a user equipment (UE) from a network, information associated with a discontinuous reception (DRX) period via a radio resource control (RRC) signaling, wherein the DRX period includes a monitored duration and an unmonitored duration; monitoring, by the UE, a downlink control channel during the monitored duration, wherein the downlink control channel is used for a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH); continuing monitoring the downlink control channel if the downlink control channel is successfully decoded by the UE during the monitored duration; and entering a DRX mode upon receiving a command message. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021936 | Method and Apparatus for Diagnosing Faults in a Hybrid Internet Protocol Network - An Ethernet switch can receive an internet protocol query packet generated by a receiver for collecting telemetry data between a source and the receiver in a multicast network, translate the internet protocol query packet to an Ethernet query packet, collect in the Ethernet query packet telemetry data from the Ethernet switch where at least one telemetry field of the Ethernet Switch includes an arrival time of the Ethernet query packet at the Ethernet switch, and submit the Ethernet query packet to the next network element of the multicast network. An internet protocol router can receive an Ethernet query packet generated by an Ethernet switch having at least one field for telemetry for collecting telemetry data between a source and a receiver, translate the Ethernet query packet to an internet protocol query packet, and submit the internet protocol query packet to the next network element. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021937 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING QUALITY OF SERVICE OF NETWORK - When capturing packets at the application level for the purpose of QoS monitoring, a QoS monitor needs to be bound to the same IP address and port as those of a media player. However, due to the unicast duplicate binding problem, a unicast packet captured by the QoS monitor will not be received by the media player, which means the QoS monitor have affected the operation of the media player. The present invention provides a solution to make the QoS monitor, upon the receipt of a unicast packet, forward the packet to the socket of the media player. In order to guarantee that the forwarded packet can be received by the socket of the media player, the QoS monitor needs to keep the port unchanged and replace the destination IP address with the local host address (127.0.0.1). According to the invention, the QoS monitor can sniff the media player without interference to the normal operation of the media player. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021938 | RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station | 01-24-2013 |
20130021939 | LOCATING SENSORS OF A NETWORK OF WIRELESS SENSORS - A method and apparatus are provided for locating the positions of sensors of a network of sensors suitable for communicating with one another by radio connection. The method is suitable for receiving, from sensors of the network of sensors, measurements of relative distances between sensors of the network; for calculating a topology for the network of sensors from the received distance measurements, the topology comprising nodes representative of sensors of the network of sensors; and for determining absolute positions for the sensors by anchoring the calculated topology in an absolute frame of reference on the basis of constraints associated with an environment plan of the network of sensors. The invention also provides a locating device implementing the management method. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021940 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Management of Measurement Reporting After Cell Change - A method for providing management of measurement reports after a cell handover may include receiving, at a source cell, an indication that a handover of a mobile terminal is to be conducted from the source cell to a target cell, causing provision of information indicative of a measurement configuration employed by the mobile terminal with respect to the source cell to the target cell in which the measurement configuration is descriptive of reports for communication parameters measured at the mobile terminal based on transmissions associated with the source cell, and directing communication of a continuity indicator to the mobile terminal to indicate to the mobile terminal whether to continue providing measurement information to the target cell based on the measurement configuration. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021941 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND NODE FOR DETERMINING QUALITY OF SERVICE OF RESPECTIVE SEGMENTS OF A LINK - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and apparatus for determining QoS of respective segments of a link. The method may comprise: determining QoS target values of the respective segments at least based on an overall requirement on the QoS of the link according to a relationship between QoS of respective segments and overall QoS of the link. With technical solutions of the present invention, it is provided a solution that could guarantee the QoS for a multi-hop relay system, and the solution has a great scalability and a good backward compatibility and is transparent to both a core network and user equipments. | 01-24-2013 |
20130028102 | Adjusting a Single-Input and Multiple-Output (SIMO) Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) - A method for adjusting a received channel quality indicator is described. A channel quality indicator is received from a wireless communication device. A first transmission time interval for which the channel quality indicator was generated is determined. The received channel quality indicator is adjusted using an outer loop margin. The outer loop margin is dependent on a transmission mode of the first transmission time interval. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028103 | LINK RELIABILITY METRICS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a transmitter in a communication network receives an indication of active transmission times of a receiver to which the transmitter attempts to reach with first transmissions, the active transmission times indicating respective times of second transmissions initiated by the receiver. Based on determining when the first transmissions occur, the transmitter may then compute a link reliability metric for a link from the transmitter to the receiver by excluding one or more of the first transmissions from the indicated active transmission times of the second transmissions. In one embodiment, the active transmission times are in the past and the reliability metric excludes any first transmissions in the past during those times, while in another embodiment the active transmission times are scheduled in the future and the reliability metric does not include any first transmissions since the first transmissions may be scheduled to avoid the active transmission times. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028104 | ESTIMATED TRANSMISSION OVERHEAD (ETO) METRICS FOR VARIABLE DATA RATE COMMUNICATION LINKS - In one embodiment, an expected transmission count (ETX) link metric is computed for a link between a transmitter and a receiver in a communication network, the ETX representative of an expected number of transmissions necessary for a message to be successfully received by the receiver over the link, and a data rate of the link at which the ETX is computed is also determined. From these, an estimated transmission overhead (ETO) link metric for the link may be computed by dividing the ETX by the data rate. In one embodiment, the data rate of the link may be adjusted based on the ETO (e.g., to minimize the ETO). In another embodiment, routes through the communication network may be selected based on ETO values along the route. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028105 | Wide Field Indexing for Packet Tracking - Methods, apparatus, and computer readable storage media for accumulating traffic statistics. A traffic receiver may receive a packet and determine a flow identifier associated with the received packet. A hash function may be applied to the flow identifier to generate a memory pointer. One or more records may be retrieved from a statistics memory based on the memory pointer. A determination may be made if the flow identifier associated with the received packet matches a flow identifier value contained in one of the one or more retrieved records. When a match occurs, the retrieved record containing the matching flow identifier value may be updated and the updated record may be stored in the statistics memory. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028106 | Resource Aware Parallel Process Distribution on Multi-Node Network Devices - Techniques are provided for monitoring a plurality of independently operating processing nodes in a core data packet routing system, wherein each processing node is running its own operating system instance. A placement decision is made for respective processes on selected ones of the independently operating processing nodes based on a predetermined policy, and then the respective processes are placed, based on the placement decision, on the selected ones of the independently operating processing nodes such that the respective processes become placed processes. A list of placed process/processing node pairs specifying a pairing of the placed processes and the processing nodes on which the placed processes have been placed is maintained so that a user can review the then-current set of process placements | 01-31-2013 |
20130028107 | MACRO NETWORK OPTIMIZATION WITH ASSISTANCE FROM FEMTO CELLS - The disclosed subject matter relates to employing a received signal strength indicator returned from a femto cell to optimize a multiple access wireless communication network. In particular, a method operable in a wireless communications network is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a received signal strength indicator from a femto cell situated in a geographical area within a multiple access wireless communication network, and optimizing the multiple access wireless communication network as a function of the received signal strength indicator. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028108 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method for detecting downlink control information, including: when scheduling across carriers is enabled, determining by user equipment (UE) user-specific search space monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) according to component carrier indexes, wherein the component carrier indexes include component carrier indexes corresponding to various component carriers implementing scheduling across carrier and being scheduled across carriers. Also the present invention also provides an apparatus for detecting downlink control information, a user equipment and a network side device. The present invention solve the overlap problem of common search space and user-specific search space in Release 10 and solves the problem of determining a search space for the PDCCH in the situation of scheduling across carriers is enabled in Release 10. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028109 | Point-Dependent Resource Symbol Configuration in a Wireless Cell - A high-power point and one or more low-power points transmit signals associated with the same cell-identifier in a heterogeneous cell deployment. Coverage areas corresponding to the low-power points fall at least partly within the coverage area for the high-power point, so that mobile stations within range of a low-power point are also within range of the high-power point. Channel-state-information reference symbols, CSI-RS, are transmitted using different CSI-RS resources on different transmission points within the cell, while configuration of CSI-RS measurement resources is conducted on a UE-specific basis. The choice of measurement resources to be used is determined by the network, based on the properties of the channels from the transmission points to the UE. As the UE moves around within the cell, the network tracks the channel properties and reconfigures the CSI-RS resources measured by the UE, to correspond to the resource of the closest transmission point or points. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028110 | TRANSMITTING DEVICE AND TRANSMITTING METHOD - According to one embodiment, a transmitting device includes a transmitter configured to transmit a frame; a first carrier sensor configured to perform carrier sense in a wider bandwidth than a signal bandwidth to be used for a transmission of the frame by the transmitter; and an idle detector configured to determine whether the first carrier sensor succeeds in detecting an idle for a period that is equal to or more than a period for the transmitter to transmit the frame. The transmitter is configured to, when the idle detector succeeds in the idle detection, start the transmission of the frame after a lapse of a first period after the success of the idle detection. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028111 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A COGNITIVE RADIO HAVING ADAPTABLE CHARACTERISTICS - Systems and methods for configuring a network of radios for dynamic spectrum access are described. A network radio can include hardware and/or software modules for detecting a radio environment and negotiating common communications channels with a plurality of other radios in the network. Network radio behavior can be defined by a plurality of predefined policies which are used in combination with the information about the radio environment to select common operating parameters. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028112 | INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND INFORMATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE - For a user signal (signal requesting for provision of services) input to a signal transport network, header information for transmission in the signal transport network is given at a portal edge of the signal transport network on the user side. The information given at this time includes a time stamp indicating the time of receiving the user signal by the edge. In a server on the service provider side, the time stamp is referred to, and services are provided for each user. Specifically, a response process schedule for each user is produced from the time stamp, and waiting time is reduced and a priority process is performed in accordance with the time of issuing the request by the user. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028113 | Method and Apparatus for Locally Managed Allocation of Bandwidth in a Wireless Network - A method for fabricating read-only copy protected optical medium comprising: a substrate ( | 01-31-2013 |
20130028114 | Conversion of Inputs to Determine Quality of Service (QoS) Score and QoS Rating along Selectable Dimensions - A multi-dimensional analysis method for operation of a data server to isolate Quality of Service issues to constituents within major or minor Key Performance Indicators. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028115 | COMBINING P2P AND SERVER-BASED CONFERENCING - A system and a method for teleconferencing including a plurality of terminals, a plurality of peer servers and at least one conferencing servers, where the terminals measure their channel quality, create at least one group of terminals according to their channel quality measurements, and using a coding scheme adaptive to the channel quality measurements. The terminals communicate conferencing content via peer-to-peer communication, directly between terminals who are members of the group of terminals, and using the selected coding scheme, and communicate the same conferencing content with other terminals participating in the conferencing call via at least one network device such as a conferencing-server and a peer-server. Where the conferencing-server and/or the peer-server provide conversion for the conferencing content, adaptive to the other terminals. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028116 | WLAN Having Load Balancing Based on Access Point Loading - A network having distribution of access point loading includes access points to which mobile stations can associate themselves based upon access point beacon signal levels and loading levels for the various access points. A mobile station receives beacon signals from various access points and determines a signal strength for the received beacon signals. The mobile station also receives access point loading information from the access points. The mobile station associates with an access point based upon the access point beacon signal strengths and the access point loading information. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028117 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AGGREGATING CARRIERS OF MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - The described aspects include methods and apparatus for communicating control information in a carrier aggregation configuration that uses multiple radio access technologies (RAT). A first resource assignment related to a first carrier corresponding to a first RAT can be received, as well as, a second resource assignment related to a second carrier corresponding to a second RAT. The first carrier and the second carrier are aggregated for communicating data in a wireless network. In addition, resources can be determined for communicating first RAT control data for the first RAT over an uplink carrier based at least in part on the first resource assignment. Second RAT control data can then also be communicated in containers and/or using timing for control data of the first RAT over at least a portion of the resources. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028118 | MANAGING HANDOFF TRIGGERING BETWEEN UNICAST AND MULTICAST SERVICES - A wireless communication network may provide services, e.g., multimedia services, in unicast and broadcast modes, and the mode of providing a service may depend on a level of demand. In response to changing demand for a service the network may determine that service should transition from one mode to the other, and the network, may signal such a transition to one or more terminals subscribing to the service. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028119 | REDUCING PLMN SEARCH TIME - A method includes storing in a mobile communication terminal a definition of a set of frequency bands in which the terminal is capable of communicating, including at least first and second frequency bands. One or more combinations of at least portions of the frequency bands in the set, which cannot be allocated in proximity to one another due to interference, are determined in the terminal. A search is conducted in the terminal over the set of the frequency bands. Upon detecting a presence of a candidate wireless network in a first portion of the first frequency band, which cannot be allocated in proximity to at least a second portion of the second frequency band in accordance with the specification, at least the second portion is omitted from the search. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028120 | System and Method for Measuring and Reporting Uplink Channel Condition - A method for reporting channel condition includes receiving an initial configuration identifying a group of assessment devices, and determining a channel condition for each communications channel between one of the assessment devices and the transmission point. The method also includes comparing each of the channel conditions with a first threshold, and transmitting a report to a network entity if at least one of the channel conditions meets the first threshold. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028121 | PACKET LOSS ANTICIPATION AND PRE EMPTIVE RETRANSMISSION FOR LOW LATENCY MEDIA APPLICATIONS - In many low latency media applications it is important to transmit media data packets from a media source to one or more media destinations as promptly as possible, while also ensuring that all media data packets that may be lost due to transmission errors are retransmitted and received correctly at the media destination. This invention described a system to do this with a system and methods for anticipating media data packet loss and making preemptive media data packet retransmission requests by dynamically computing a metric and decision logic for retransmission request that includes a need based factor from the media consuming application. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028122 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS WITH RELAYS - Methods and systems are provided for use with wireless networks having one or more cell in which each cell includes a base station (BS), at least one relay station (RS) and at least one mobile station (MS). The at least one relay station can be used as an intermediate station for providing communication between the BS and MS. Methods are provided for an RS to initially access the network, access of the RS by MSs initially accessing the network, methods of allocating OFDM resources for communicating between the BS, RS and/or MS for example dividing transmission resources into uplink and downlink transmissions, and methods of inserting pilot symbols into transmission resources used by the RS. In some embodiments on the invention, the methods are consistent and/or can be used in conjunction with existing standards such as 802.16e. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028123 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN HIGH SPEED PACKET ACCESS COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICAL FIELD - A method and an apparatus for utilizing multiple carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) capable of receiving on a single downlink carrier at a time may tune the receiver to one downlink carrier and switch the downlink carrier in accordance with a configured pattern. The WTRU may switch the carrier from an anchor carrier to a non-anchor carrier at a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) sub-frame boundary, and switches back at an end of a subsequent high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH) subframe. The WTRU may switch the carrier at an HS-PDSCH sub-frame boundary. A WTRU capable of receiving on multiple downlink carriers simultaneously may tune the receiver to an anchor carrier and a supplementary carrier, and switch the supplementary carrier to another carrier based on a carrier switching order. The carrier switching order may be received via an HS-SCCH or via layer 2 signaling. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028124 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device according to the invention includes a reception section that receives a downlink signal in a first subframe from another wireless communication device; an ACK/NACK generation section that generates ACK/NACK which indicates an error determination result of the received downlink signal; a determination section that determines, when an uplink signal directed to the other wireless communication device is not allocated in a second subframe, whether a different uplink signal is allocated in a third subframe subsequent to the first subframe by a predetermined number of subframes and previous to the second subframe; a multiplexing section that multiplexes the ACK/NACK to the different uplink signal in the third subframe when the determination section determines that the different uplink signal is allocated in the third subframe; and a transmission section that transmits the different uplink signal in which the ACK/NACK is multiplexed by the multiplexing section. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028125 | RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station | 01-31-2013 |
20130028126 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communication System - According to some embodiments of the invention, a method is provided in a radio network node for scheduling data transmission and/or reception. According to the method, the radio network node predicts ( | 01-31-2013 |
20130028127 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND NODES FOR DETERMINING AND ADJUSTING TARGET PACKET DELAY OF A LINK SEGMENT - In embodiments of the present invention, there is disclosed a method, apparatus, and network node for determining target packet delays of respective segments of a link. The method may comprise: collecting parameters affecting packet delays; and determining target packet delays of respective segments based on the collected parameters and an overall requirement on the packet delay of the link according to a relation between the packet delays of respective segments and an overall packet delay of the link. Besides, there is further provided a method, apparatus, and network node for adjusting target packet delays of respective segments of a link. With embodiments of the present invention, it is provided a solution of a packet delay guarantee for a multi-hop relay system, and the solution has a great scalability and a good backward compatibility and is transparent to both the core network and user equipments. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028128 | System and Method for Dynamic Band Scheduling - A method and apparatus that allows a communication system to operate across multiple bands and access technologies and to dynamically assign bands to user equipment (UE) devices based on properties of the bands, traffic conditions, services being delivered and other considerations. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028129 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION OF A TERMINAL IN A MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus for transmitting feedback information of a terminal in a multi-node system in which a plurality of antennas are distributed and disposed in a cell. The method comprises the steps of: transmitting first feedback information, indicating a state between a channel and at least one of antennas, to a base station; and transmitting second feedback information, indicating at least one antenna, to the base station. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028130 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MONITORING THE RECEIPT OF MULTICAST TRAFFIC - A method and system for monitoring data packet traffic in a multicast network comprising determining a first packet count received at a receiver router, representing a quantity of data packets associated with a multicast group and source at a first time, determining a second packet count received at that receiver router representing a quantity of data packets associated with that multicast group and source, at a second time subsequent to the first time, comparing the second packet count to the first packet count, and indicating an alarm in response to the second packet count being less than a predetermined value greater than the first packet count. A status for multiple routers can be obtained, comprising a difference between the quantity of the first and second packet counts; and indicating a warning in response to at least one of the plurality of router status being less than the predetermined value. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028131 | REAL-TIME NETWORK NODE LOCATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system for determining a position of location of a tag includes, in an embodiment: a plurality of routers each including at least one antenna; and a location engine to: (a) determine for at least one router, from signals sent by the one router and at least part of which are received by the at least one antenna of each of at least one other of the routers, an average path loss of signal strength; (b) optimize, for at least the one router, multipath parameters in a radio-frequency signal propagation equation using the average path loss for each of the at least one other of the routers and known distance between the router and each of the at least one other of the routers; and (c) determine the position of location of the tag using at least the optimized multipath parameters. | 01-31-2013 |
20130033994 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE OPTIMIZATION OF RESOURCE UTILIZATION FOR REDUNDANCY ELIMINATION - An example method may include calculating a parameter for traffic propagating in a network between a sender and a receiver, where the traffic comprises encoding information and decoding information; determining whether the parameter meets a predetermined value; classifying the traffic as uni-directional if the parameter meets the predetermined value; and classifying the traffic as bi-directional if the parameter does not meet the predetermined value. | 02-07-2013 |
20130033995 | CHANNEL SCANNING IN A NETWORK HAVING ONE OR MORE ACCESS POINTS - Techniques are presented for channel scanning in a network having one or more access points. In one embodiment, a first frequency band is scanned to identify a first access point. A channel indicator is received from the first access point. A second frequency band is scanned based on the channel indicator, to identify a second access point. The second access point may be identified based on the channel indicator. | 02-07-2013 |
20130033996 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE WITH ANTENNA SWITCHING CAPABILITIES - Electronic devices may be provided that contain wireless communications circuitry capable of supporting time division multiple access. The wireless communications circuitry may include radio-frequency transceiver circuitry coupled to multiple antennas. Signal strength measurements may be gathered using the antennas and corresponding signal strength difference measurements may be computed to reflect which of the antennas is exhibiting superior performance. The signal strength measurements may be made by measuring receive power levels in a beacon channel during idle time slots while toggling its antennas in and out of use or by detecting for the presence of non-silent traffic channel frames or silence indicator description frames and measuring corresponding receive power levels while toggling its antennas in and out of use. Beacon-channel-based measurements and non-silent-frame-based measurements may be used for electronic devices with receive diversity by simultaneously receiving frames of interest using each of its antennas and making corresponding measurements in parallel. | 02-07-2013 |
20130033997 | METHOD OF INCREASING DATA THROUGHPUT OF A WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM BY DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING WINDOW SIZE OF COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - In a wireless network system which adopts a multi-layer data transmission structure, a wireless channel is established between a user equipment and a base station. A signal transmission status of a first layer is measured for adjusting a data transmission parameter of a second layer accordingly. The second layer is higher than the first layer according to the multi-layer data transmission structure. | 02-07-2013 |
20130033998 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASUREMENT FOR INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system and, more specifically, a measurement method and apparatus for inter-cell interference coordination in a wireless communication system are disclosed. Herein, a method for supporting measurement of a User Equipment (UE) by a first base station in a wireless communication system includes the steps of acquiring information of downlink subframe configuration of a second base station, determining measurement objects of downlink resource of the first base station based on the downlink subframe configuration of the second base station; transmitting information of the measurement objects to the UE, and receiving measurement result for the measurement objects from the UE. | 02-07-2013 |
20130033999 | NODE AND METHODS THEREIN FOR ENHANCED POSITIONING WITH COMPLEMENTARY POSITIONING INFORMATION - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a positioning node, and method therein, for enhanced user equipment position determination management. Example embodiments are also directed towards a network node, and method therein, for enhanced position determination. The example embodiments may employ the use of complementary positioning information in the management or performance of positioning measurement configurations. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034000 | METHOD OF VARIABLE RATE SINGLE USER AND MULTI USER MIMO FEEDBACK FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A spatial channel state information (CSI) feedback technique is incorporated into multiple-input multiple-output mobile communications technologies. User equipment (UE) channel conditions are measured and, based on the measurements, codebook subsets are selected to which indices are assigned and fed back to a base station. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034001 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a terminal apparatus including a first communication unit that performs communication according to a first wireless communication scheme using frequency division duplex; a second communication unit that performs communication according to a second wireless communication scheme different from the first wireless communication scheme; a detecting unit that detects deterioration of reception quality of the first communication unit due to generation of the communication by the first communication unit and the communication by the second communication unit at the same timing; and a reporting unit that reports the deterioration of the reception quality to a communication control apparatus scheduling the communication by the first communication unit, when the deterioration of the reception quality is detected by the detecting unit. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034002 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RELIABLE ESTIMATION OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - A network, advantageously a home network, comprises a number of user devices, for example personal computers, game consoles and smartphones, each having an estimator application, preferably voluntarily installed by the user. The network further comprises a network device that acts as an interface between the network and an external network. The estimator applications measure the network traffic for its user device, while the network device in parallel generates an independent measurement of the network consumption. The measurements are then compared. If the difference between the sum of the measurements from the estimator applications and the measurement of the network device is below a fixed threshold, it is assumed that the measurements are valid for the considered measurement time interval. Otherwise, the difference is an indication that at least one estimation was incorrect. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034003 | CARRIER GROUPING SCHEMES FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method in a receiver includes receiving from a transmitter a request to provide channel feedback relating to a communication channel between the transmitter and the receiver. A maximum latency after which the channel feedback is expected by the transmitter is assessed. A spectral resolution with which to calculate the channel feedback is selected based on the assessed maximum latency. The channel feedback is calculated with the selected spectral resolution, and the calculated channel feedback is sent to the transmitter within the maximum latency. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034004 | REFERENCE TBTT ESTIMATION ALGORITHM FOR SMART POWER SAVING ON WLAN CLIENT - A WLAN client receives a plurality of beacons that include timestamp values that indicate when the beacons were sent by an access point (AP). The WLAN client calculates a beacon drift value for each of the plurality of received beacons in response to the timestamp values and known physical layer characteristics associated with the WLAN client. The WLAN client selects one of the calculated beacon drift values that represents a minimum beacon drift, and uses this selected beacon drift value (i.e., golden reference target beacon transmission time (RTBTT) estimate) to control the wakeup timing of the WLAN client. The golden RTBTT estimate is updated if a subsequently received beacon exhibits a shorter beacon drift value. If the wakeup wait period of the WLAN client exceeds a predetermined threshold for each of a plurality of received beacons, the golden RTBTT is recalculated to account for the associated increased beacon drift. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034005 | Enhanced QOS Support using Bluetooth Low Energy - Embodiments support stringent Quality of Service (QoS) requirements using adaptations to the existing Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) protocols. In systems using an enhanced BLE protocol, the master send a poll frame at selected connection intervals or poll intervals. The duration of the connection interval and/or poll interval may be calculated based upon desired QoS parameters, such as delay, target packet error rate (PER), frame error rate (FER), and/or jitter. The master may consider the connection interval lost if a frame is not received from the slave after a predetermined number (m) of consecutive poll frames are transmitted. The value m may be set relatively high to provide more robustness in the system. However, the poll interval may also need to be adjusted to meet QoS requirements. The slave may be required to transmit a packet—that may or may not carry data—in response to every m | 02-07-2013 |
20130034006 | MOBILE STATION, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile station UE includes a measurement unit | 02-07-2013 |
20130034007 | Systems and Methods for OFDM Channelization - Systems and methods for OFDM channelization are provided that allow for the co-existence of sub-band channels and diversity channels. Methods of defining diversity sub-channels and sub-band sub-channels are provided, and systematic channel definition and labeling schemes are provided. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034008 | Handling of Idle Gap Commands in a Telecommunication System - The invention relates to methods and arrangements for the reliability handling of idle gap commands received in a unit of a mobile telecommunication system. A user equipment located in a cell of a mobile telecommunication network receives signaling gap commands used to activate or deactivate idle gaps for downlink measurements in the neighbor cells. It is determined whether the received gap command is reliable or not. Downlink measurements are then performed in accordance with a predefined rule in case the received gap command is determined as unreliable. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034009 | System and Method for Dynamic Power Control for Energy Efficient Physical Layer Communication Devices - A system and method for dynamic power control for energy efficient physical layer communication devices. Energy-efficiency features are continually being developed to conserve energy in links between such energy-efficient devices. These energy-efficient devices interoperate with many legacy devices that have already been deployed. In these links, energy savings can be produced by having a local receiver enter an energy saving state based upon the receipt of standard IDLE signals. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034010 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING ANTENNA CALIBRATION INFORMATION AND DETERMINING ANTENNA CALIBRATION FACTOR - A method and device for reporting antenna calibration information and determining antenna calibration factor are provided by the present invention. When reporting the antenna calibration information, a user equipment (UE) estimates the downlink equivalent baseband channel from a plurality of antennas of the base station to the UE; according to the equivalent baseband channel, determines the amplitude response and delay value to be reported, and then reports the amplitude response and delay value to the base station. When determining the antenna calibration factor, according to the uplink signal sent by the UE on the base station-directed time-frequency resources, the base station determines the amplitude response and the delay value; according to the amplitude response and delay value reported by the UE and according to the amplitude response and delay value determined by the uplink signal, the base station calculates the antenna calibration factor. Because the UE pre-processing process is added, the sensitivity degrees to the channel estimation error and to the channel Doppler extension are reduced. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING A CYCLIC SHIFT PARAMETER WHICH INDICATES ORTHOGONALITY - An apparatus and method for transceiving a cyclic shift parameter which provides orthogonality includes a base station to transmit a cyclic shift parameter that provides orthogonality, and the method involves determining multiple access states of one or more user equipments (UEs), determining the cyclic shift parameter for calculating information related to the orthogonality, and transmitting the determined cyclic shift parameter to the UE. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034012 | AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION DEVICE, AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A packet generation unit ( | 02-07-2013 |
20130034013 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING A CELL QUALITY MEASUREMENT RESULT FOR MDT BY A TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for reporting a cell quality measurement result for minimization of drive test (MDT) to a base station in an efficient manner by a terminal. The method for reporting a quality measurement result for MDT by a terminal according to one aspect of the present invention comprises: receiving from a base station a first message that contains logging configuration information of a quality measurement result for the MDT; performing quality measurement for the MDT and logging the quality measurement result according to logging configuration information contained in the first message; receiving from the base station a second message that contains information regarding whether the base station supports the report of the quality measurement result; and transmitting to the base station a message notifying the existence of the logged quality measurement result, if the second message contains the information regarding the support of the measurement result. | 02-07-2013 |
20130039193 | DEVICES FOR CONVERTING A DOWNLINK SUBFRAME - An evolved Node B (eNB) configured for converting a downlink subframe is disclosed. The eNB includes a processor and executable instructions stored in memory that is in electronic communication with the processor. The eNB determines whether to convert a target downlink subframe to a special subframe type 2. The eNB also transmits physical (PHY) layer signaling indicating a subframe conversion for the target downlink subframe if it is determined to convert the target downlink subframe to the special subframe type 2. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039194 | AUTONOMOUS MAXIMUM POWER SETTING BASED ON CHANNEL FINGERPRINT - A home base station (HBS) ( | 02-14-2013 |
20130039195 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RANDOM ACCESS INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN HETEROGENEOUS CELLULAR NETWORKS - Methods and systems at a user equipment, low power access node and first access node operating in a wireless network having a plurality of access nodes comprising a first access node and at least one low power access node having lower transmit power than the first access node, wherein the user equipment receives stronger downlink signals from the first access node than from the at least one low power access node, the method at the user equipment determining, by the user equipment, whether a low power access node is better for uplink data transmission than the first access node; and if the low power access node is better for uplink data transmission, sending from the user equipment to the low power access node, a random access preamble directed to the first access node. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039196 | OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A management system for managing the operation of network elements in a mobile communications system, the management system comprising: a manager agent entity being capable of sending a request for the network element to measure a parameter indicated by a target to obtain a plurality of measured parameters and being capable of sending an achievement indication element related to the target; and an agent entity being capable of receiving the achievement indication element and being capable of determining a target achievement indication in respect of at least one measured parameter, the target achievement indication having been determined as a result of monitoring the correspondence between the target and the at least one measured parameter. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039197 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL INFORMATION OF A PLURALITY OF CARRIERS - There is a method and device for scheduling channel information feedback to perform a feedback of channel information of a plurality carriers, wherein the method for feeding back channel information includes: a user equipment measuring channel information over a plurality of downlink carriers; upon reception of an instruction to trigger a feedback of channel information transmitted from a base station, the user equipment transmitting to the base station the measured channel information of corresponding downlink carriers in an obtained set of downlink carriers required to be measured and fed back. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039198 | BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes a receiver configured to receive data wirelessly transmitted from plural mobile stations which repeatedly transmit the data until a reception acknowledgement signal representing that the data has been received by the base station is received, a transmitter configured to wirelessly transmit data to the plural mobile stations, and a controller configured to assign a radio resource for data transmission to a mobile station of the plural mobile stations in accordance with a data transmission request received from the mobile station, make the receiver receive data from the mobile station in the assigned radio resource, when the receiver has received the data from the mobile station make the transmitter transmit the reception acknowledgement signal to the mobile station, and when the radio resource is reassigned in association with the wireless transmission of the reception acknowledgement signal make the transmitter retransmit the reception acknowledgement signal. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039199 | Methods of Point Association for Cooperative Multiple Point Transission - Procedures for point association as well as measurement and feedback required to enable point association for CoMP deployment scenario 4 are proposed. In a first novel aspect, a serving eNB configures a first higher-layer configuration for RSRP measurement to be used by a UE for serving point selection. The higher-layer configuration contains multiple CSI-RS configurations, and each CSI-RS configuration indicates a set of resource elements (REs) or subcarriers in both frequency domain and time domain as one CSI-RS resource with non-zero transmission power. The UE then performs RSRP measurements based on the multiple CSI-RS configurations and reports RSRP measurement results to the serving eNB. In a second novel aspect, the serving eNB configures a second higher-layer configuration for CSI reporting based on the reported RSRP measurement results. In a third novel aspect, the serving eNB sends CSI-RS information to the UE for uplink power control. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039200 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC FREQUENCY SELECTION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of dynamic frequency selection by an access point (AP) in a basic service set (BSS) in a wireless local area network is provided. The access point configured to communicate over a primary subchannel and a secondary subchannel. The method includes: transmitting a frame including a quiet element and a quiet channel element; and performing channel measurements in the quiet interval. The quiet element defines an quiet interval during which no transmission occurs, the quiet channel element indicates that the secondary subchannel is to be quieted during the quiet interval, and the quiet channel element indicates a condition under which the primary subchannel may be used during the quiet interval. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039201 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AMONG A SOURCE DEVICE, A DESTINATION DEVICE AND A RELAY DEVICE - A communication method of a source device according to an embodiment includes detecting a status of a first link directly connected from the source device to a destination device or a status of a second link connected from the source device to the destination device via a relay device, selecting any one of the first link and the second link based on a result of the detection, and transmitting data using the selected link. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039202 | COMPONENT CARRIER (DE)ACTIVATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - This invention relates to the proposal of component carrier (de)activation message that is allowing a activation or deactivation of one or more component carriers in the uplink or downlink. Furthermore, the invention relates to the use of the new component carrier (de)activation message in methods for (de)activation of downlink component carrier(s) configured for a mobile terminal, a base station and a mobile terminal. To enable efficient and robust (de)activation of component carriers, the invention proposes to use component carrier-specific or cell-RNTI(s) for the scrambling of the CRC of the component carrier (de)activation message, and to explicitly indicate the intended recipient of the component carrier (de)activation message in a corresponding field in the message. Furthermore, the invention further proposes different designs of the component carrier (de)activation message and further uses thereof, so as to trigger CQI reporting and/or SRS transmission by a mobile terminal. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039203 | REFERENCE SIGNAL FOR A COORDINATED MULTI-POINT NETWORK IMPLEMENTATION - A system and method of receiving a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) is presented. At a user equipment, a first CSI-RS transmitted from a base station is received. In some implementations, the first CSI-RS is transmitted at a first periodicity using a first set of antenna ports. At the user equipment, a second CSI-RS transmitted from the base station is received. In some implementations, the second CSI-RS is transmitted at a second periodicity using a second set of antenna ports. At least one of the first CSI-RS and the second CSI-RS is used to perform channel measurement. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039204 | METHOD FOR REDUCING ENERGY CONSUMPTION IN PACKET PROCESSING LINECARDS - The present invention refers to a method for reducing energy consumption in a packet processing linecard of a packet transmission network, said packet processing linecard comprising a plurality of microprocessors aimed at processing packet traffic wherein the number of active microprocessors is dynamically adjusted as a function of the computation of a traffic estimator based on a recurrent estimation of at least two statistical parameters including the average and a parameter representative of the statistical distribution of the packet traffic. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039205 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - Provided are a wireless communication method, a base station, a wireless communication system and a communication apparatus whereby an interference power is calculated from an estimated propagation channel estimation result and the transmission power is controlled based on the interference power or the interference is suppressed by controlling the directivity, thereby increasing the transmission capacity. A propagation channel estimation circuit performs propagation channel estimation from a response signal transmitted from a terminal station and estimates a propagation channel estimation result. An interference power calculation circuit measures each interference power from a signal of each sub-carrier received by each of wireless units, and calculates an interference power for each sub-carrier from the propagation channel estimation result estimated by the propagation channel estimation circuit. When the calculated interference power is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold, an interference suppression signal generation circuit changes the transmission power and generates an interference suppression signal. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039206 | Adaptive Resource Partitioning in a Wireless Communication Network - Techniques for performing adaptive resource partitioning are described. In one design, a node computes local metrics for different possible actions related to resource partitioning to allocate available resources to a set of nodes that includes the node. Each possible action is associated with a set of resource usage profiles for the set of nodes. The node sends the computed local metrics to at least one neighbor node in the set of nodes. The node also receives local metrics for the possible actions from the neighbor node(s). The node determines overall metrics for the possible actions based on the computed local metrics and the received local metrics. The node then determines allocation of the available resources to the set of nodes based on the overall metrics. For example, the node may select the action with the best overall metric and may utilize the available resources based on a resource usage profile for the selected action. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039207 | CELL BASED DATA TRANSFER WITH DYNAMIC MULTI-PATH ROUTING IN A FULL MESH NETWORK - The present invention relates to computing apparatus as an element of a network structure using a method for acquiring and maintaining cell locked data transfer amongst a number of computing apparatuses which can be full mesh interconnected by full duplex data transfer links. A predefined number of symbols transmitted as a cell is followed by a variable number of idle symbols to ensure the nominally simultaneous start of the cell transfers throughout the network without a central control. At specific positions of the cells each computing apparatus broadcasts a list of its transmission requests and receiver capabilities to all other computing apparatuses. Each of the interconnected computing apparatuses executes the same arbitration procedure based on the identical data set of transmission requests and receiver capabilities. As a result transmission paths are assigned for direct transmission and for payload forwarding. The transmission paths can be assigned per cell period individually for both directions of each link. Several packet protocols assigned over the cell transmission layer can coexist in the network. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039208 | Method for Setting and Adjusting a Parameter Dependent on a Round Trip Time - An arrangement ( | 02-14-2013 |
20130039209 | DATA TRANSFER - A bridging system, comprising bridges and a network, is arranged to transfer data using TCP/IP or similar between a local Storage Area Network (SAN) and a remote SAN. In one embodiment, a bridge is arranged to transfer data from a plurality of ports in a periodic sequence. While an acknowledgement from the remote SAN for data transferred from one port data is awaited, further data can be transferred using one or more of the remaining ports. In other embodiments, one or more parameters, such as number of ports, Receive Window Size etc., can be optimised using artificial intelligence (AI) routines in order to control the data transfer rate between the bridges. The bridging system may be configured to perform a self-learning routine on installation and, in some embodiments, to compile and consult a knowledge base storing optimum configurations for transferring data packets having different attributes by simulating data transfers. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039210 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING A TEMPORARY BLOCK FLOW TO WHICH A PIGGYBACKED ACK/NACK FIELD IS ADDRESSED - A method and an apparatus for indicating a temporary block flow (TBF) to which a piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) field is addressed. A method and apparatus of performing receive processing to reduce the probability of false acceptance of erroneous PANs are also disclosed. A transmit station generates a PAN check sequence (PCS) and performs a channel coding on a PAN field and the PCS. The transmit station scrambles the encoded bits of the PAN field and the PCS with a TBF-specific scrambling code. Because of the scrambling, the PCS decoding at a receive station will pass if the data block is received by an intended receive station, while the PCS decoding will fail if received by a non-intended receive station. Alternatively, the scrambling may be performed before the channel coding. Alternatively, the transmit station may combine the PAN field and a temporary flow identity (TFI) to generate a PCS. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039211 | INTERFERENCE DETECTION - A computing device configured for wireless communication may effectively control adaptation to channel conditions. The device may be configured to identify and classify conditions impacting performance of a channel so that appropriate adaptations may be made. Interference may be detected by correlating received signal strength and packet errors. High received signal strength correlated to a high packet error rate may signify presence of a source of interference. Once a source of interference is detected, other criteria may be used to determine the nature of the interference so that an adaptation that is minimally disruptive of applications can be selected. Additionally, channel degradation may be predicted by monitoring trends in error rates, including Forward Error Correction rates, and adaptation may be used before packet error rates exceed an unacceptable level. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044609 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR ENHANCING DATA RATE FOR PACKET-SWITCHED (PS) DATA SERVICE - A wireless communication device for eliminating performance degradation of a packet-switched (PS) data service. The device comprises a processor configured to receive a request to perform the PS data service with a first subscriber identity card, reduce a plurality of scheduled monitoring tasks associated with a second subscriber identity card, and perform the PS data service with the first subscriber identity card while using the reduced plurality of scheduled monitoring tasks to maintain mobility or receive network messages with the second subscriber identity card. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044610 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATION OF CHANNEL TEMPORAL CORRELATION AND MIMO MODE SELECTION IN LTE SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for channel temporal correlation estimation and MIMO mode selection. An embodiment of the invention under LTE system utilizes SRS symbols for temporal correlation estimation and performs MIMO mode selection based on the said temporal correlation estimation. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044611 | OVERLAYING AN AIR TO GROUND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ON SPECTRUM ASSIGNED TO SATELLITE SYSTEMS - An air to ground communication system provides internet access to aircraft from ground based stations. The air to ground system shares spectrum with uplink portions of a satellite communication spectrum. Interference mitigation techniques are employed to avoid interference between the ground based communications and satellite communications. Fade mitigation techniques are employed to provide communication to aircraft at low angles of elevation in the presence of rain. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044612 | AUTONOMOUS WI-FI BASED RANGING DEVICE - A method for autonomous ranging between Wi-Fi enabled mobile devices. A mobile device transmits a probe request to a target mobile device via a wireless channel, and receives a probe response from the target device. The probe response includes identification information associated with the target device. The mobile device uses the identification information to transmit a data packet to the target device via the wireless channel, and without communicating with any wireless access points. The mobile device then receives a reply packet from the target device and determines a distance to the target device based on a round trip time between the transmission of the data packet and the reception of the reply packet. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044613 | OPTIMIZING VOICE CALLS ON PACKET SWITCHED NETWORKS - Methods and systems for optimizing voice call setup times for user devices. A user device that is registered to a packet switched network and in an idle state receives a command to establish a voice call. The user device selects a legacy cell of a circuit switched network. The user device then establishes a radio connection with the selected legacy cell without first establishing a radio connection with a serving cell of the packet switched network. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044614 | ACCESSING AN APPLICATION BASED ON A LEVEL OF SERVICE QUALITY - A user device receives an instruction to access an application, of one or more applications being provisioned via one or more base stations; obtains service quality information, associated with the application, where the service quality information identifies one or more quality thresholds associated with one or more frequency bands to be used to access the application; measures a first level of service quality associated with traffic being received via a first frequency band and a second level of service quality associated with traffic being received via a second frequency band; and accesses the application using one of the first frequency band or the second frequency band based on a determination that another one of the first level of service quality or the second level of service quality is less than a threshold, of the one or more quality thresholds. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044615 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROTECTING WIRELESS MEDIA STREAMS - A method is described including determining if a downlink data packet needs to be transmitted, transmitting the downlink data packet, determining if an uplink data packet has been received, determining if the received uplink data packet was transmitted by a protected station and performing scheduling. An apparatus is described including a scheduling module which controls access opportunities of protected uplinks and protected downlinks, the scheduling module is in communication with an uplink profiler and a medium access module, the uplink profiler module maintains statistics regarding the protected uplinks and the uplink profiler is in communication with the scheduling module and the medium access module performs actual transmission of data and the medium access module is in communication with the scheduling module. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044616 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING A CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION - In a method for transmitting a channel quality information on the quality of a communication channel in a radio communications system the system includes a regular cycle for transmitting the channel quality information in an uplink direction from a communication unit to a network, and the method including suppressing in the communication unit the transmitting of the channel quality information based on a predefined condition. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044617 | Reducing Interference in Wireless Time Division Duplex Systems by Monitoring and Limiting Timing Advance - Techniques are provided for reducing interference in a wireless network. A user equipment device in a first wireless coverage area of a wireless network using a time division duplex transmission scheme to designate a maximum timing advance value for uplink transmissions based on potential interference between uplink transmissions made by the user equipment device in the first wireless coverage area or at least one other user equipment device in the first wireless coverage area, and downlink transmissions intended for at least one user equipment device in a second wireless coverage area of the wireless network. The maximum timing advance value may be based on relative cell radii or other cell properties of the first and second wireless coverage areas. A base station may determine the maximum timing advance and transmit the maximum timing advance to the user equipment device. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044618 | MONITORING APPARATUS, MONITORING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - A monitoring apparatus includes a processor to execute a process that includes calculating the delay of each of the data among acquired series of data transmitted from a communication apparatus that performs transmission processing with regularity; extracting from the series of data, a set of data whose calculated delays are greater than or equal to a threshold; and identifying, from among the extracted set of data, a pattern of data appearing successively for a given number of times or more, at equivalent intervals; and an output device that outputs information indicating the data related to the identified pattern. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044619 | Determining and Selecting Levels of Power Reduction for Signals to Be Transmitted From a Mobile Communications Device - Levels of power reduction for signals to be transmitted from a mobile communications device via radio channels in a digital wireless communications system, where each signal is modulated according to one of a number of modulation configurations, are determined. For each modulation configuration a first estimate of a power reduction is calculated ( | 02-21-2013 |
20130044620 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING QUALITY OF MULTIMEDIA SERVICE - A system and a method for measuring quality of a multimedia service transceived via a VoIP service and notifying a user of a result of the measurement are disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention includes a VoIP multimedia server configured to loop back sample multimedia data received from a multimedia terminal providing a VoIP multimedia service, analyze a quality measurement result received from the multimedia terminal, calculate a quality measurement score, convert the quality measurement score into voice data, and transmit the voice data to the multimedia terminal, and a multimedia terminal configured to transmit the sample multimedia data to the VoIP multimedia server via a packet network, measure the quality of loopback sample multimedia data looped back from the VoIP multimedia server, transmit the quality measurement result to the VoIP multimedia server, receive the voice data of the quality measurement score, and output a voice. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044621 | SELF-INTERFERENCE HANDLING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A wireless communication terminal that has the self-interference due to the support of carrier aggregation, aggregating and jointly using two or more component carriers for transmission and reception, performs a first set of measurements on a received signal on a first operating frequency, wherein the first set of measurements are performed during which the wireless terminal transmits or receives signals on a second operating frequency. In an alternative embodiment, the wireless communication terminal changes the maximum transmit power limit on a first operating frequency on a per-slot basis to reduce the impact of harmonic or intermodulation distortion on a received signal at a second operating frequency. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044622 | CONTROLLING SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IN RADIO UNITS - Described embodiments provide controlling signal transmission in a plurality of radio units. The plurality of radio units may be coupled to a digital unit. The digital unit may be spatially separated from the plurality of radio units. Signal quality measurements may be received from multiple radio units when a user equipment is located within an overlapping service area of the multiple radio units. Determination may be made as to whether to simultaneously use at least two of the multiple radio units to transmit a data signal to the user equipment based on the received signal quality measurements. At least two of the multiple radio units may be controlled to transmit a same data signal to the user equipment using a same channel based on the determination result. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044623 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless communications system is described which comprises a base station, a relay device, and a terminal device. The terminal device is operable to transmit a message to the base station via the relay device. The relay device is operable to add a relay header to the message received from the terminal device, the relay header comprising control information for controlling the transmission of subsequent messages from the terminal device to the relay device. The relay device is also operable to relay the message having the relay header added to the base station. A problem with uplink-only relaying is that the relay device cannot feed back control information to the terminal device to support efficient future transmissions over the air interface between the terminal device and the relay device. However, by adding such control information to messages being relayed from the terminal device to the base station on the uplink, subsequent downlink communications from the base station to the terminal device can include the control information generated at the relay device (or transmission parameters derived from the control information). | 02-21-2013 |
20130044624 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) BASED ON PHYSICAL UPLINK SHARED CHANNEL (PUSCH) - A method and apparatus for reporting channel state information (CSI) based on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) are used to realize correct reporting of the CSI based on double code books. The method includes the following steps: a reporting mode configuration signaling for the CSI sent from a network side is received, and said reporting mode configuration signaling for the CSI at least carries a designated reporting mode identifier; a first CSI aiming at the whole bandwidth of a system is established according to a reporting type corresponding to said reporting mode identifier; the whole bandwidth of the system is divided into at least two frequency band subclasses, and a second CSI aiming at a designated frequency band subclass is established according to the reporting type corresponding to said reporting mode identifier; and when a reporting indication signaling sent from the network side is received, said first CSI and said second CSI are transmitted to the network side. Therefore, when a user equipment (UE) reports the CSI, a long-term/wideband CSI and a short-term/frequency selective CSI could be considered comprehensively, then a two-level feedback mechanism based on the PUSCH double code books is realized. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044625 | METHOD FOR NON-COOPERATIVE MEASUREMENT OF NETWORK DATA-PATH QUALITY - A method and apparatus for measuring network path quality in a non-cooperative manner, which involves sending a probe consisting of a plurality of probe data packets to a remote node and receiving a response consisting of at least one response data packet therefrom. Both the probe and response data packets carry application messages and are exchanged according to normal transmission mechanisms, so that the method can void the reliability problem suffered by methods using non-data probes. The response data packets, at the same time, provide sufficient information for obtaining a rich set of data-path quality metrics in an efficient way. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044626 | Adaptive Multi-Service Data Framing - When a signal-to-noise ratio affecting radio communication becomes sufficiently low, the data transmission rate is responsively decreased in compensation. The signal-to-noise ratio of the communication link is thereby increased. Data for multiple different services is transmitted in data packets between two radios. By allocating one part, or time slot, of the data packet's payload to one service, and allocating another part, or time slot, of the data packet's payload to another service, communications sessions for multiple services can be maintained concurrently. Services are prioritized relative to each other. In case the signal-to-noise ratio becomes too low, data packet portions that are related to lower-priority services can be omitted from some data packets before those data packets are transmitted. Data remaining in the packet can be sent at a reduced data transmission rate without causing the quality of service for the remaining packets to fall below the minimum required level. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044627 | Method of Handling Mobile Device Mobility and Related Communication Device - A method of handling mobility for a mobile device under coverages of a base station and a first relay capable of conveying data between the mobile device and the base station in a wireless communications system is disclosed. The method includes measuring at least a first communication environment of at least a first link with at least a base station to generate at least a first measurement result, measuring at least a second communication environment of at least a second link with at least a relay to generate at least a second measurement result, and reporting at least a channel quality report including at least one of the at least a first measurement result and the at least a second measurement result to a network of the wireless communications system. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044628 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USING AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating wirelessly from a mobile device to a remote receiver station is disclosed. The system includes a controller configured to monitor a status of the mobile device and, upon an initiation event, initiate a data transfer process to wirelessly communicate data to the remote receiver station. The system also includes a voice-band modem that, upon initiation of the data transfer process is configured to receive data for transfer to the remote receiver station, divide the source data into a collection source packets, and encode the data using a fountain code encoding protocol to form a series of encoded packets. The voice band modem is also configured to transmit the series of encoded packets to the remote receiver station as a burst including all of the source data and repeatedly transmit the encoded packets until receiving an indication that the series of packets including all of the source data has been received at the receiving station. | 02-21-2013 |
20130051251 | Mobile Device Network Configuration Via Speed Determination - In one or more embodiments, a mobile device can determine its speed and can utilize a wireless network based on its determined speed. In one example, the mobile device can be within a communications range of a wireless access point that implements a wireless local area network and can utilize a mobile telephone network for data communications rather than the wireless local area network when the mobile device is traveling at or above a certain speed. In another example, the mobile device can receive a signal from the wireless access point and, based on the signal and the speed of the mobile device, the mobile device can utilize the wireless access point at or above the certain speed. For instance, the signal can include a beacon indicating that the wireless access point can be utilized for data communications when the mobile device is traveling at or above a certain speed. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051252 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR MONITORING NETWORK PERFORMANCE - Network performance management includes identifying a location of a test unit, providing a test protocol to the test unit over a network, and transmitting a stream of data packets to the test unit. The network performance management also includes identifying, via the location of the test unit, a transmission path of network elements through which the stream of packets flows. The network performance management further includes tracking measurements associated with the stream of data packets transmitted to the test unit and return data packets received from the test unit. The measurements are tracked for segments associated with each of the network elements in the transmission path. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051253 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING USER EXPERIENCE VIA PAYLOAD ADAPTATION - Apparatus and methods for payload adaptation for a mobile device based on a request from the mobile device include determining a communication connection characteristic of the request and obtaining one or more results to generate obtained results responsive to the request. The apparatus and methods further include customizing the obtained results to generate customized results based on the communication connection characteristic and transmitting the customized results to the mobile device. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051254 | Dynamic Scheduling of In-Band Relay Node Resources - A relay node is operated in a communication system wherein the relay node communicates with a communication system node via a first link and communicates with user equipment (UE) via a second link. The relay node detects whether a collision between its own uplink transmission on the first link and receipt of the user's transmission on the second link at a future time instant is expected to occur, wherein the collision will interfere with the relay node's ability to receive the UE's transmission. If so, then, the relay node selects and executes one of a plurality of interference averting measures, selection being based at least in part on what type of information is expected to be transmitted and received on the respective first and second links. First and second interference averting measures comprise refraining from or proceeding with transmission of some information to the communication system node. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051255 | DYNAMIC CHANNEL ESTIMATION APPARATUS, SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Apparatus, systems, and methods disclosed herein operate to calibrate path loss parameters corresponding to a communication channel between wireless stations, including a path loss exponent. A time-of-flight (TOF) associated with packet transmissions traversing a path between a first wireless station and a second wireless station is measured. A path length D | 02-28-2013 |
20130051256 | Channel Reservation Procedure - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program are presented for carrying out channel reservations in a wireless communication system. A communication apparatus initiates a preliminary channel reservation procedure initiating related to a spatial multiplexing group transmission. The communication apparatus is caused to transmit during the preliminary channel reservation procedure a reservation request message announcing a preliminary group reservation on the channel. Upon completed preliminary channel reservation procedure, the communication apparatus is caused to utilize the preliminary group reservation by causing transmission of a frame on the reserved channel according to the spatially multiplexed wireless communication. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051257 | Scheduling of Packets at Cellular Base Stations - A method for scheduling a sequential transmission of a plurality of packets includes estimating a time when each of the plurality of packets waiting to be transmitted will be used by a device targeted to receive the plurality of packets, and mapping the time of each of the plurality of packets to a prioritization among the plurality of packets. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051258 | Method of Controlling Receive Diversity for Battery Lifetime Improvement and Related Communication Device - A method of handling receive diversity of a mobile device in a wireless communication system for the mobile device is disclosed. The method comprises determining a plurality of corresponding conditions of a plurality of services supported by the mobile device; and controlling the receive diversity according to the plurality of corresponding conditions, for receiving data transmitted by a network of the wireless communication system. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051259 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK POWER IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for reporting power headroom in a user equipment of a multi-carrier system, includes receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) signal comprising uplink resource allocation information from a base station; transmitting at least one of a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) signal and a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) signal to the base station in a predetermined subframe based on the uplink resource allocation information in accordance with a transmission mode; calculating one or more power headroom values for the predetermined subframe in accordance with the transmission mode; and transmitting a report message comprising the one or more power headroom values to the base station, wherein the user equipment reports its first and second type power headroom values when operating in transmission mode A, or reports its first type power headroom value when operating in transmission mode B. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051260 | COEXISTENCE OF A NORMAL-RATE PHYSICAL LAYER AND A LOW-RATE PHYSICAL LAYER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system including a physical layer module and a processing module. The physical layer module is configured to communicate at a first data rate via a channel, where the channel includes (i) a first sub-channel and (ii) a second sub-channel of the channel, to receive a first packet including a first preamble transmitted at the first data rate via (i) the first sub-channel and (ii) the second sub-channel, and to receive a second packet including a second preamble transmitted at a second data rate via (i) the first sub-channel or (ii) the second sub-channel, where the second data rate is less than the first data rate. The processing module is configured to process (i) the first preamble transmitted at the first data rate and (ii) at least a portion of the second preamble transmitted at the second data rate. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051263 | MOBILE TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile terminal includes a first transceiver which communicates a first signal in a first frequency band, a second transceiver which communicates a second signal in a second frequency band, a measuring section which measures a reception quality of the first signal, and a reception quality of the second signal, a storage which stores one or more index values based on the reception quality of the first signal which is obtained when the reception quality of the second signal becomes less than or equal to a threshold value, and a controller which puts the second transceiver into a sleep mode when the reception quality of the second signal becomes less than or equal to a threshold value, and cancels the sleep mode when a subsequently measured reception quality of a first signal becomes equal to or greater than the one or more index values. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051264 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR AGGREGATION OF HETEROGENEOUS COMPONENT CARRIERS AND COMMUNICATION DEIVCE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATION USING THE SAME - Communication methods for aggregation of heterogeneous component carriers and communication devices and wireless communication stations using the same methods are proposed. In one embodiment, the proposed communication method is adapted to a wireless communication station and includes aggregating physical channel resources respectively corresponding to heterogeneous access technologies in a Layer 2 or below the Layer 2 in a protocol stack; and communicating with at least one wireless terminal communication device through the physical channel resources respectively corresponding to the heterogeneous access technologies, wherein the physical channel resources respectively corresponding to heterogeneous access technologies are heterogeneous component carriers. The physical channel resources may be heterogeneous component carriers, such as radio component carrier(s), optical component carrier(s), and/or acoustic component carrier(s). | 02-28-2013 |
20130051275 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION IN MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for transmitting channel status information (CSI) in a wireless communication system which supports multiple carriers. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for transmitting channel status information for multiple carriers comprises the steps of: measuring downlink channels for first and second carriers which are closely placed to each other on the frequency domain; determining channel status information for the first carrier on the basis of a result of the channel measurement for the first carrier; determining channel status information for the second carrier on the basis of a part of the channel status information for the first carrier and a result of the channel measurement for the second carrier; and transmitting channel status information for the first and second carriers. | 02-28-2013 |
20130058227 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF BUILDING AN INFRASTRUCTURE FOR A VIRTUAL NETWORK - A network resource module communicatively interfaces a resource manager with one or more network nodes in a communications network. Each network node provides one or more network resources that may be used to create a virtual infrastructure for a virtual network. The network resource module detects the network nodes, abstracts the resources associated with the network nodes at a desired granularity (e.g., node level or flow level) into Virtual Resource Objects (VROs), and then publishes the VROs in a registry. Thereafter, Virtual Network Operators (VROs) select desired VROs from the registry to build the virtual infrastructure for the virtual network. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058228 | NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - Some embodiments provide a network virtualizer for managing several managed switching elements that forward data in a network. The virtualizer includes an interface for receiving input logical forwarding plane data. It also includes a converter for converting the input logical forwarding plane data to output physical control plane data. In some embodiments, the physical control plane data is translation into physical forwarding plane data that direct the forwarding of data by the managed switching elements. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058229 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROBUST PACKET DISTRIBUTION AMONG HIERARCHICAL MANAGED SWITCHING ELEMENTS - For a network that includes several managed edge switching elements and several managed non-edge switching elements that are for implementing a logical switching element, some embodiments provide a method of distributing packet processing across the several managed non-edge switching elements. The method receives a packet for processing through the logical switching element. Based on a determination that the packet needs to be processed by a managed non-edge switching element, the method determines a particular managed non-edge switching element of the several managed non-edge switching elements to forward the packet. The method forwards the packet to the particular managed non-edge switching element for the particular managed non-edge switching element to process the packet. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058230 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PACKET CLASSIFICATION PREVIEWING - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for packet classification previewing are disclosed. Packet classification previewing is performed by a reserved preview packet classifier and initiated by a user. According to one aspect, a method for packet classification previewing includes providing a preview packet classifier. User input is received to classify packets using the preview packet classifier. In response to the user input, classification of packets is initiated using the preview packet classifier. Preview packet classification results are generated and displayed to the user, providing feedback as to whether the classifier configuration is correct or not as the user changes the configuration dynamically. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058231 | Method and apparatus for adjusting TCP RTO when transiting zones of high wireless connectivity - Systems and methods for managing transmissions of a mobile device are described herein. An example of a mobile device described herein includes an environment monitor module configured to perform one or more observations of a local environment associated with the mobile device, a connectivity tracker module communicatively coupled to the environment monitor module and configured to determine whether the one or more observations indicate wireless connectivity of the mobile device has been restored, and a retransmit timeout (RTO) manager module communicatively coupled to the connectivity tracker module and configured to reset at least one RTO value of the mobile device if the wireless connectivity of the mobile device has been determined to be restored. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058232 | Signal Processing - According to an embodiment, a mobile device includes wireless access circuitry configured to access a wireless communication network; a processor for executing a communication client application to conduct a packet-based call with a remote device via a channel established over the wireless communication network, the communication client application configured to monitor at least one network parameter; a hardware processing module selectively operable to implement a processing function; a software processing module selectively executable to implement said processing function; and a selection mechanism for supplying the call to one of the hardware processing module and software processing module based on the at least one monitored network parameter. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058233 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVATING CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for activating a carrier by a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation is provided. The UE receives a Down-Link (DL) assignment from an Evolved Node B (ENB), and determines whether to activate a carrier based on the DL assignment. By doing so, the UE may perform carrier activation rapidly and efficiently. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058234 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL MEASUREMENT AND METHOD OF PROVIDING INFORMATION FOR CELL MEASUREMENT - A method of providing information for cell measurement is provided. In the method, a first cell obtains a first pattern information indicating a subframe for performing measurement with respect a second cell. The first cell configures a subframe for performing measurement, which is different from that for performing measurement with respect the second cell. The first cell transmits a second pattern information on the subframe configured by the first cell to a user equipment (UE). | 03-07-2013 |
20130058235 | SUB-PATH E2E PROBING - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for estimating available bandwidth of sub-path of a data path. The solution is based on the sending of probe packet trains comprising inner and outer packets from a start node to an end node using different TTL values for the outer and inner packets of these probe trains. By comparing measurements using different TTL values of the inner packets, it is also possible to determine which link are the local tight link and what available bandwidth it has. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058236 | METHOD AND NODE FOR MEASURING PROCESSING POWER IN A NODE IN A COMMUNCATIONS NETWORK - The embodiments herein relate to a method in a first network node ( | 03-07-2013 |
20130058237 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A FLEXIBLE LOW POWER MODE - What is disclosed is a method for transmitting DSL data including establishing a communication link between a first unit and a second unit, the communication link selectively operable according to one of a plurality of management states, each of said management states defined by at least one fixed control parameters associated with a predetermined value. The method also includes initiating operation of the communication link according to a first management state; transmitting from the first unit a request to the second unit to modify said predetermined value; and implementing the request while said link is operating according to the first management state. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058238 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATED CALL TROUBLESHOOTING AND RESOLUTION - A method for call quality troubleshooting and mitigation may include polling network communication path elements to determine network performance data, receiving a call quality alert from at least one communication unit, the call quality alert indicating degraded call quality of a call session, and analyzing the network performance data from the network communication path elements and the at least one communication unit to determine a cause of the alert and at least one action to mitigate the cause of the alert. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058239 | Integrity and Quality Monitoring and Signaling for Sounding and Reduced Feedback - A method of sounding and feedback with channel quality information and reduced overhead is provided. A receiving station receives a sounding signal transmitted from an access point over multiple sub-channels of a wide channel in a wireless network. The receiving station detects channel quality based on the received sounding signal for each sub-channel. The receiving station then performs channel estimation based on the received sounding signal and thereby determining feedback information. Finally, the receiving station transmits a feedback message to the access point, the feedback message contains NULL feedback information, reduced feedback information, or channel integrity/quality indicators based on the channel quality information for each sub-channel. Based on the feedback message, the access point may repeat the sounding process, narrow the transmission bandwidth, or select only stations who have indicated uncorrupted channel sounding for MU-MMO transmission. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058240 | PDCCH MONITORING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A CARRIER JUNCTION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a PDCCH monitoring method in a carrier junction system, comprising: monitoring a plurality of candidate PDCCHs in an overlapping region between a PDCCH search space of a first component carrier and a PDCCH search space of a second component carrier; and receiving downlink control information through one PDCCH out of the plurality of candidate PDCCHs, which has succeeded in decoding. The PDCCH having succeeded in decoding is a shared PDCCH that contains shared control information, a PDCCH for a self-scheduling component carrier without a carrier indicator field, or a PDCCH for a primary component carrier. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058241 | Method And Apparatus For Cell Reselection - A method and wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) are disclosed that is configured to perform cell reselection to another cell when the WTRU is in a CELL_FACH state using an Enhanced-Dedicated Channel (E-DCH). The cell reselection is based on internal measurements by the WTRU. Alternatively, the cell reselection can be WTRU based on the WTRU measurements reported to the network. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058242 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHODS AND APPRATUSES USING THE SAME - A mobile communication device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided for improving data throughput by dynamically adjusting a window size of a communication protocol layer. The wireless module performs wireless transceiving to and from a service network. The controller module measures a link quality of the service network associated with a first protocol layer via the wireless module, and determines a number of transmission layers supported for spatial multiplexing associated with the first protocol layer. Also, the controller module adjusts a data transmission parameter associated with a second protocol layer according to the link quality and the number of transmission layers associated with the first protocol layer. Particularly, the second protocol layer is hierarchically higher than the first protocol layer in a multi-layer protocol stack. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058243 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING SOURCES OF ROGUE NON-AUDIO TRAFFIC MARKED AS AUDIO TRAFFICE - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and computer-readable storage media for managing a packet network to deal with rogue applications that produce non-audio packets marked as audio packets. The system analyzes packet flow through the network to identify an unauthorized source of non-audio packets marked as audio packets, and upon identifying the unauthorized source, the system stops subsequent unauthorized transmission of non-audio packets marked as audio packets from the identified unauthorized source. For example, such an unauthorized source is identified by finding that an audio marked packet has a source address that is not found on a list of authorized sources, or by detecting atypical patterns of audio queue utilization, or by determining whether audio marked packets from a source exceed a threshold value related to transmission of audio marked packets. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058244 | Method and System for Processing Measurement Event in Multi-Carrier System - The present invention provides a method and a system for processing a measurement event in a multi-carrier system. The method for processing a measurement event in a multi-carrier system comprises: a mobile terminal receives a measurement assignment configured and transmitted by a network side device (S | 03-07-2013 |
20130058245 | HANDOVER WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A handover with carrier aggregation is provided. A method of assisting handover of a user equipment from a source wireless access node to a target wireless access node, for use in a wireless access network having a plurality of carrier frequencies and a plurality of cells in which a cell and a carrier frequency may be configured as a component carrier, and in which at least two component carriers may be aggregated for communication between the user equipment and the source wireless access node, the aggregated component carriers comprising a primary component carrier and at least one secondary component carrier comprises the step of selecting, at the source wireless access node, a first carrier frequency to be configured as a primary component carrier for communication with the target wireless access node after handover, and selecting, at the target wireless access node, a second carrier frequency to be configured as a secondary component carrier for communication with the target wireless access node after handover. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058246 | DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) SYSTEM, AND BASE STATION - The disclosure provides a downlink transmission method for a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) system, and a base station, wherein the method comprises: a base station selecting a downlink MIMO mode in a downlink transmission mode in which a UE currently is by using a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), a Rank Indicator (RI) and a Preceding Matrix Indicator (PMI) which are reported by the UE within a time window; and the base station transmitting data to the UE by using the selected downlink MIMO mode. The disclosure achieves the effect of increasing the coverage and capacity of the LTE system to the maximum. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058247 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COEXISTENCE OF DIFFERENT BANDWIDTH SYSTEMS IN TV WHITE SPACE - Methods and apparatus of slot time synchronization for coexistence of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz systems in TV white space are provided. The methods and apparatus extend concepts used in traditional 802.11 applications in the MAC layer so that networks that overlap in frequency and space can have access opportunities to TV white space channels. Several passive mechanisms are described which use bits of traditional 802.11 MAC Management Protocol Data Units to receive information related to the slot time of other overlapped networks. An active approach is described that uses measurements from a radio resource measurement service to adjust the slot time of stations in a network to that of the lowest bandwidth overlapped network in frequency and space. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058248 | MECHANISM FOR INTEGRATING APPLICATION DATA WITH AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION TOOLS FOR CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENTS - The present invention relates to a system and method for integrating useful data while measuring available bandwidth between a cloud computing client device and a server farm. More specifically the present invention relates to the method for integrating useful application data carried inside probe packets, by tools that estimate available bandwidth between two nodes connected through the internet (cloud). Importantly, the present invention relates to the method to overcome application data loss that typically happens during the available bandwidth estimation process. Advantageously, the Cloud Computing Environment (CCE) user's internet usage billing reduces significantly and also Available Bandwidth Measurement Tools (ABMT) could be run more frequently without significant increase in billing. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058249 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF ALLOCATING TIMESLOTS IN A MULTIPLE USERS REUSING ONE SLOT (MUROS) ENVIRONMENT - A method and system are provided for allocating timeslots in a Multiple Users Reusing One Slot (MUROS) environment. A method includes receiving measurement data from a first mobile station over the uplink channel; evaluating a set of parameters associated with pairing the first mobile station in the uplink channel and the downlink channel, respectively, based on the measurement data; associating a first timeslot in a frame between the first mobile station and a set of mobile stations for uplink data transmission using the evaluated set of parameters; and associating a second timeslot in the frame between the first mobile station and a second set of mobile stations for downlink data transmission using the evaluated set of parameters. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064103 | Mechanism for signaling buffer status information - There is provided a mechanism for reporting buffer status information to a communication network control element when transmission via both a licensed and an unlicensed spectrum is conducted and offloading of traffic is executed. After an offloading value indicating the amount of traffic which can be offloaded from a transmission over a licensed spectrum to a transmission over an unlicensed spectrum is estimated, the UE determines a buffer size of at least one transmission buffer used in a transmission over the licensed spectrum and the unlicensed spectrum. Then, buffer status information is sent to the eNB wherein the estimated offloading value is considered. The eNB can then allocate resources for the transmission over the licensed band while benefits by the offloading to the unlicensed band are considered in the resource allocation. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064104 | SECURE QUALITY OF SERVICE - Methods and apparatus are provided for communicating a flow of packets with a requested quality of service. An exemplary method involves receiving a first packet of a flow, determining a first reference value for the packet flow identification field of the first packet using a key value, and facilitating the requested quality of service for the first packet when the received value of the packet flow identification field of the first packet matches the first reference value. The method continues by receiving a second packet of the flow, determining a second reference value for the packet flow identification field using the key value, and facilitating the requested quality of service for the second packet when the received value of the packet flow identification field of the second packet matches the second reference value. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064105 | FEEDBACK PROTOCOL FOR END-TO-END MULTIPLE PATH NETWORK SYSTEMS - A method, system, and computer program product for providing feedback over a multiple path network is provided. A first device sends a transmissions to a second device over at least two different paths of the network. Using information collected as a result of receiving the transmissions, the second device aggregates data regarding the performance of each of the paths together into a feedback message. The second device then sends this feedback message to the first device over one path of the network. The first device uses the data in the feedback message in its calculations for determining the relative performance of each path. The amount of traffic sent along each path is adjusted as appropriate, based on these calculations. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064106 | AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OF MOBILE CALLS BETWEEN VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) AND GUARANTEED SERVICE (GS) NETWORKS BASED ON QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) MEASUREMENTS - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for the automatic transfer of mobile calls between wireless packet switched (PS) and guaranteed service (GS) networks based on quality of service (QoS) measurements are disclosed. One method includes establishing a call over the PS or GS network. The method may further include monitoring a quality of service (QoS) parameter associated with the PS network, and comparing the QoS parameter to a minimum quality threshold. The method may further include receiving instructions to initiate a call transfer based upon the comparison of the QoS parameter to the minimum quality threshold. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064107 | ADJUSTMENT OF RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL STATE TIMERS IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for adjusting Radio Resource Control (RRC) timers in a Radio Access Network (RAN). The system manages radio communications between a mobile device and a base station, and further transitions the mobile device between Radio Resource Control (RRC) states based upon application-layer data traffic for the mobile device and a timer value. Additionally, the system determines an overhead load based on network-layer signaling events associated with at least one RRC transition for the mobile device, and determines a bearer load based on the application-layer data traffic for the mobile device. Based upon the overhead load and the bearer load, the system adjusts the timer value. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064108 | System and Method for Relating Internet Usage with Mobile Equipment - A network intelligence solution (NIS) is arranged to access a stream of IP (Internet Protocol) packets associated with communications over a mobile communications network between mobile equipment employed by a user and a remote server such as a web server. When the mobile equipment accesses the network, the TAC (Type Allocation Code) portion of the IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) is extracted from the IP stream at the NIS so that information about the mobile equipment such as technical information (e.g., manufacturer, model, operating system, etc.) and market data (e.g., market share, average sales price of the equipment, etc.) can be retrieved from one or more databases. The NIS performs deep packet inspection (DPI) to measure Internet usage by the mobile equipment user with each network access. Relationships between variables and/or observed data in each of the Internet usage data and mobile equipment information may then be identified. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064109 | Analyzing Internet Traffic by Extrapolating Socio-Demographic Information from a Panel - A network intelligence solution (NIS) is arranged to tap a stream of IP (Internet Protocol) packets traversing a node in a network that supports a mobile communications service between mobile equipment employed by subscribers in a universe of subscribers to the service and one or more remote servers such as web servers. The NIS performs deep packet inspection to measure Internet usage by the universe of subscribers as well as usage by a subscriber panel that is a representative subset of the universe. A unique network identifier is generated, for example using the MSISDN (Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network Number) associated with each subscriber which is anonymized, to enable socio-demographic information collected from the subscriber panel to be correlated to the panel's Internet usage. The correlations can then be extrapolated to make generalizations about socio-demographics of the larger subscriber universe. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064110 | ACTIVITY-AND DEPENDENCY-BASED SERVICE QUALITY MONITORING - Many services measure quality of service (QoS) according to abstract metrics based on general heuristics of QoS determinants (e.g., VoIP service providers may presume that QoS is predominantly determined by network performance). However, users' QoS perceptions are often based on their experiences with particular activities of the service, which may utilize different service paths having different QoS determinants. Therefore, QoS may be measured by identifying the activities of the service, and the dependencies among the components of such services; for respective activities and dependencies, identifying a service path from the source to the user, and the segments comprising the service path; measuring the quality of the segments of the service path; and calculating the QoS of the activity according to the QoS of the segments of the service path providing the activity. This approach may yield QoS information of greater relevance to the users' experience and with greater analytic value. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064111 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - In a multi-radio user equipment, a power backoff or similar restraint may be placed on communications of a first radio, such as LTE, in order to protect operations of a second radio, such as Bluetooth, depending on the time remaining for completion of the communications of the second radio. Such protected operations may include paging or inquiry operations. A power backoff may be applied to an LTE radio in order to protect completion of the paging or inquiry operations. The power backoff may be increased as the time to completion of the paging or inquiry operations approaches. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064112 | Method of Handling Adaptive Modulation and Coding and Related Communication Device - A method of determining a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for a next hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) transmission for a receiver in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises measuring signal quality of a present HARQ transmission when receiving complete information transmitted by a transmitter of the wireless communication system in the present HARQ transmission; determining normalized signal quality according to the signal quality and remaining part of the complete information to be received in the next HARQ transmission; and determining the MCS according to the normalized signal quality, for processing the remaining part of the complete information according to the MCS. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064113 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - A transmission apparatus includes a digital circuit that has an input circuit into which packets are input at indefinite intervals; a measuring circuit that measures an interval during which no packet is input into the input circuit; a determiner circuit that determines, based on the interval measured by the measuring circuit, whether to insert a given frame between packets input into the input circuit; and a transmitter that inserts, based on a result of determination by the determiner circuit, the given frame between the packets input into the input circuit and sequentially transmits the packets with the given frame therebetween. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064114 | RANDOM ACCESS HETEROGENEOUS MIMO NETWORK - A number of techniques, which may be used together, provide distributed coordination of multiple stations so that concurrent transmissions and increased throughput are achieved on a shared radio medium. Each of the techniques provides a separate innovation that can be used alone or in combination with one or more of the other techniques. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064115 | MULTIPLEXING TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, RECEIVER APPARATUS AND MODULE, TRANSMITTER APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING TRANSMISSION - Digital signals having respective pieces of frequency information different from each other are bundled, and transmitted at high speed. On receiving side, digital signals retaining the respective pieces of frequency information are recovered and separated. Transmitter apparatus divides pieces of transmission data that have the different pieces of frequency information and correspond to respective input channels into data blocks having a fixed length, as valid data, and subsequently multiplexes the data blocks corresponding to the respective input channels and outputs the multiplexed data to a transmission path. A receiver apparatus divides data string received into data flows and subsequently restores the transmission data, from the data blocks consecutive in each data flow and stores the restored data, and outputs transmission data corresponding to the respective data flows in synchronization with clocks generated for these data flows. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064116 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless communications system is described which comprises a base station, a relay device, and a terminal device. The terminal device is operable to transmit a message to the base station via the relay device. The relay device is operable to add a relay header to the message received from the terminal device, the relay header comprising control information for controlling the transmission of subsequent messages from the terminal device to the relay device. The relay device is also operable to relay the message having the relay header added to the base station. By adding such control information to messages being relayed from the terminal device to the base station on the uplink, subsequent downlink communications from the base station to the terminal device can include the control information generated at the relay device (or transmission parameters derived from the control information). | 03-14-2013 |
20130064117 | RELAY NODE SIMULATOR AND TEST METHOD - A relay node simulator that outputs a test signal obtained by simulating a signal in which a first RF signal from a base station and a second RF signal transmitted to a mobile communication terminal by a relay node receiving the first RF signal are multiplexed, the relay node simulator including a relay processing unit that generates a second baseband signal on the basis of a first baseband signal, a delay processing unit that provides a predetermined delay to the second baseband signal, a gain adjustment unit that changes a level of the first baseband signal, an adder that adds the first baseband signal and the second baseband signal, and a transmission unit that converts an added signal into an RF signal and transmits a converted signal as the test signal. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064118 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT FOR WIRELESS DEVICE COEXISTENCE - Methods and apparatus for enhancing network capacity in a network comprising multiple wireless communication that overlap at least partly in frequency spectrum. In one embodiment, the apparatus comprises a portable device such as a laptop or smartphone having both a WLAN (e.g., Wi-Fi) interface and a PAN (e.g., Bluetooth) interface which each operate with approximately the same frequency range. One variant places the WLAN interface into a power-saving mode as a default, thereby mitigating interference with the PAN interface in cases where the WLAN interface is not in active use. In another variant, an aggressive PAN management algorithm is used to enforce network policy on the PAN interface, thereby mitigating interference between the PAN interface and the WLAN interfaces of other devices in the network (as well as the parent device). AP-based variants are also described. Methods of operation and doing business utilizing the aforementioned apparatus are also disclosed. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064119 | Narrow Bandwidth Operation in LTE - A method of wireless communication provides narrow bandwidth operation within a wider LTE system bandwidth. Wideband information is transmitted to a first set of user equipments (UEs). Also, narrowband information is transmitted to a second set of UEs. The second set of UEs operate in a narrower bandwidth than the first set of UEs. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064120 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A communications system comprises a managing entity responsible for handling measurement reports and a network node, the managing entity being capable of sending condition-related parameters to the network node and the network node being capable of controlling measurement reporting in a communications system by: receiving a measurement report from a mobile terminal; determining from the measurement report whether it is a type of measurement report for which condition-related parameters need to be applies; wherein if the measurement report is of the type requiring the condition-related parameters to be applied, applying a load-related condition and a security related condition and if both are satisfied, providing the measurement report to the managing entity. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064121 | Method and Apparatus for Measuring the Distance Between Nodes - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for measuring distances between nodes. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, N or more nodes among a plurality of nodes located in a network are randomly selected, n-dimensions (where N>n and n≧1) are formed by using the randomly selected N or more nodes, coordinates of other nodes are determined in the formed n-dimensional spaces by using distances between the randomly selected N or more nodes and other nodes, and distances between the plurality of nodes located in the network are calculated by using the determined coordinates. According to the present invention, the distance between nodes located in a network may be more effectively measured. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064122 | LINK QUALITY ESTIMATION AND APPARATUS IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and apparatus for enabling accurate link quality estimation of a wireless link between a sending node and a receiving node. When the sending node receives link state reports from the receiving node, it estimates the current state of the wireless link. The sending node also determines a measurement adjusting parameter if the link state reports are deemed inaccurate in relation to the estimated link state, based on a deviation between the received link state reports and the estimated actual link state. The sending node then sends the determined measurement adjusting parameter to the receiving node, and the receiving node provides a link state report based on signal measurements adjusted by the measurement adjusting parameter. The adjusted link state report can then be used for link adaptation of the wireless link and/or for packet scheduling decisions. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064123 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL, MESSAGE SENDING METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR ALLOWING TERMINAL TO EXECUTE THE METHOD - Upon receiving a beacon, a terminal B sends a RTS control message to a terminal A before sending a registration request message to the terminal A. Upon receiving the RTS control message, the terminal A sends a CTS control message. The terminal B measures the time from when the RTS control message is sent to when the CTS control message is received so as to calculate the distance with the terminal A. If the distance with the terminal A is within a predetermined distance X | 03-14-2013 |
20130064124 | WEAK SIGNAL DETECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A mechanism for weak signal packet detection in a wireless receiver. Cross-correlation and self-correlation operations are performed on a plurality of short training field symbols associated with a plurality of RF signals received at a plurality of receiver chains of the wireless receiver. A plurality of self-correlation outputs generated in the plurality of receiver chains are summed and the sum of the self-correlation outputs is accumulated over a predetermined number of STF symbol periods. A moving sum operation is performed on the accumulation output when the accumulation output is greater than a first predetermined threshold. A signal indicating a data packet has been detected is generated when the moving sum output is greater than a second predetermined threshold. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064125 | FLOW STATISTICS AGGREGATION - There are disclosed apparatus and methods for testing a network. An apparatus for testing a network may include first and second memory banks configured to alternate between being active and inactive in a complementary manner. A traffic receiver may receive traffic comprising a plurality of packets from the network, accumulate traffic statistics, store the accumulated traffic statistics in the active memory bank of the first and second memory banks, and copy contents of the first memory bank, when inactive, to a third memory bank, and copy contents of the second memory bank, when inactive, to a fourth memory bank. A port processor may aggregate at least selected traffic statistics stored in the third memory bank and the fourth memory bank. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064126 | RECEIVING APPARATUS AND DATA OBTAINING METHOD - A receiving apparatus for communication area evaluation includes a receiving unit configured to receive a first signal transmitted from a base station; a delay profile calculation unit configured to calculate a downlink delay profile based on the first signal; and an estimated value calculation unit configured to calculate an estimated cyclic prefix length based on the calculated downlink delay profile. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064127 | METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR SELECTING LABEL SWITCHED PATH - The present invention relates to a method for selecting a label switched path LSP, which is applied in an MPLS network and includes: determining an energy engineering parameter of a network element itself in the network, where the network element is a network element on any candidate LSP between a source network element and a destination network element; receiving, by the network element, Interior Gateway Protocol IGP messages sent by other network elements in the network, and obtaining an energy engineering parameter of each of the other network elements; and selecting, according to the energy engineering parameter of the network element itself and the energy engineering parameter of each of the other network elements, a transmission path for the source network element and the destination network element. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064128 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - The present invention discloses method and terminal for feeding back channel state information. The method comprises: UE determining channel state information comprising first-type PMI and/or second-type PMI according to indication information, wherein first-type PMI is used for indicating index of one first precoding matrix in first precoding codebook, each first precoding matrix is used for mapping channel information of one wideband and/or long-term channel; second-type PMI is used for indicating index of one second precoding matrix in second precoding codebook, each second precoding matrix is used for mapping channel information of one subband and/or short-term channel; UE feeding back first-type PMI in PUCCH periodically and feeding back second-type PMI in PUSCH periodically or non-periodically, or, feeding back first-type PMI and second-type PMI in PUCCH. Through the present invention, precision of feeding back channel state information by UE is increased, and base station can dynamically select SU-MIMO or MU-MIMO transmission. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064129 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program Product for Selecting Beam Group and Subset of Beams in Communication System - An apparatus and method for selecting a beam group and a subset of beams in a communication system are disclosed. The method includes: measuring channel state information (CSI) on a downlink from a base station ( | 03-14-2013 |
20130064130 | Method for dynamically adjusting switching loop and network equipment - The disclosure provides a method for dynamically adjusting a switching loop. The method comprises the following steps: a network equipment in the switching loop determines current link costs of all links connected with the network equipment, wherein the network equipment determines the current link costs of the links according to initial link costs and link adjustment parameters of the links (S | 03-14-2013 |
20130064131 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING POWER INFORMATION IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for transmitting power information by a mobile station in a multiple component carrier system includes: obtaining power headroom that is a difference between maximum transmit power of a mobile station for each component carrier and power estimated for actual uplink transmission; configuring an identification field that identifies a component carrier that the power headroom is for; configuring power headroom fields that indicates a level of power headroom; and generating a medium access control protocol data unit (MAC PDU) including the identification field and the power headroom field and transmitting the generated MAC PDU to a base station. | 03-14-2013 |
20130070617 | SHORTEST PATH ROUTING SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORKS WITH NON-FULLY MESHED VERTICES - Shortest path routing systems and methods are presented for networks with non-fully meshed vertices or nodes. The systems and methods may include a shortest path routing method in a network with non-fully meshed vertices, a network with non-fully meshed vertices, and a system for implementing the shortest path routing methods. The shortest path routing systems and methods include modifications to the Dijkstra algorithm to more accurately model a network, such as an optical or photonic network. In an exemplary embodiment, the Dijkstra algorithm is modified to represent degrees at a site with an ingress vertex (e.g., a demultiplexer) and an egress vertex (e.g., a multiplexer). In another exemplary embodiment, in addition to representing degrees as ingress and egress vertices, the Dijkstra algorithm is modified to maintain knowledge of previously visited degrees to prevent revisiting a same degree in determining a shortest path. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070618 | MOBILE NETWORK SERVICES IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A first service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services based on the broken out data. A second service mechanism in the core network performs one or more mobile network services based on the network traffic remaining after the first service mechanism performs its breakout. An optional third service mechanism coupled to the core network provides one or more mobile network services in the mobile data network. An overlay network allows the first, second and third service mechanisms to communicate with each other. The overlay network is preferably a private virtual network. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070619 | MAINTENANCE OF HIGH-SPEED CHANNELS BY INSERTING CHANNEL MAINTENANCE DATA IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK TO AVOID CHANNEL TYPE SWITCHING - A mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A first service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation. When data is broken out by the first service mechanism, the data is delivered at the edge, which means the true activity of the channel is not visible to the core network. The reduction of data in the core network due to serving data at the edge risks causing a switch from a high-speed channel to a low-speed channel by the mechanism in the core network that monitors and assigns channel speeds. In order to maintain the high-speed channel, the on-going data rate for a subscriber session is monitored and channel maintenance traffic is injected towards and from the radio network controller (in both directions). The amount of channel maintenance traffic depends on thresholds that determine a desired data rate. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070620 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods of selecting a media path for data packets bearing the media of a telephone call to traverse during a voice over Internet protocol telephone call include testing the call quality of multiple potential media paths immediately before a call is setup. The potential media path with the highest call quality is used as the initial media path for the call. If the call quality of the media path currently in use declines below a threshold value during a call, potential alternate media paths are identified and tested for call quality. If one of the alternate media paths has better call quality than the media path presently in use, the call is switched to the alternate media path with the highest call quality. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070621 | System And Method Of Wireless Communication Using Large-Scale Antenna Networks - A communication method uses a distributed cell-free network of spatially independent service antennas. According to the method, pilot sequences are allocated to a user population of access terminals by an allocation procedure that imposes local relative orthogonality of pilot sequences. Channel coefficients for access terminals arc determined by measuring allocated pilot sequences as received by each of the service antennas. In embodiments of the invention, the determination of channel coefficients is performed independently and the resulting channel coefficients are locally stored at the respective service antennas. At each service antenna, a processor independently uses locally stored channel coefficients to precode forward link signals or to at least partially decode reverse link signals. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070622 | Distributed Network Traffic Data Collection and Storage - Network traffic information from multiple sources, at multiple time scales, and at multiple levels of detail are integrated so that users may more easily identify relevant network information. The network monitoring system stores and manipulates low-level and higher-level network traffic data separately to enable efficient data collection and storage. Packet traffic data is collected, stored, and analyzed at multiple locations. The network monitoring locations communicate summary and aggregate data to central modules, which combine this data to provide an end-to-end description of network traffic at coarser time scales. The network monitoring system enables users to zoom in on high-level, coarse time scale network performance data to one or more lower levels of network performance data at finer time scales. When high-level network performance data of interest is selected, corresponding low-level network performance data is retrieved from the appropriate distributed network monitoring locations to provide additional detailed information. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING A SOUNDING CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There are provided a method and apparatus for allocating a sounding channel in a wireless communication system. A base station transmits a first sounding channel allocation data to allocate a first sounding channel for a first system to a first zone, and transmits a second sounding channel allocation data to allocate a second sounding channel for a second system other than the first system to a second zone. The first zone and the second zone are multiplexed by an FDM (Frequency Division Multiplexing) method, and the first sounding channel and the second sounding channel are allocated to a same OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) symbol. A channel response can be estimated accurately when a terminal for IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.16m system and a terminal for IEEE 802.16e system coexist in a legacy support mode. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070624 | SENSOR-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS USING COMPRESSED SENSING WITH SPARSE DATA - Methods, devices and systems for sensor-based wireless communication systems using compressive sampling are provided. L User Equipments (mobile stations) transmit signals with sparsity S and their signals are compressively sensed to M samples by Z remote samplers (a distributed antenna arrangement) and the uplink channel is estimated by a central processor (the “central brain”). For a given system signal to noise ratio, retained samples M and sparsity S, we approximate the loss in sum mutual information due to imperfect knowledge of the channel. The approximation is premised on a lower bound of the mutual information which accounts for the power in the channel estimation error. Also, throughput results are given for adaptively adjusting the sparsity of multiple users' transmit signals based on channel fading. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070625 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION - To reduce an uplink interference in a network with a first base station of a large output and a second base station of a small output. Detecting the interference, the second base station urges the first base station to hand over a terminal causing it to the second base station. Multiple base stations and one or more terminals exist in this system, each terminal connects with one base station, and a serving base station is changed according to a communication state of each terminal. If the different second base station other than the first base station to which the terminal connects detects a large interference, the second base station will multicast transmit information for urging handover to the base stations except itself. The base station having received the information specifies a terminal giving the interference to the second base station, and makes it to be handed over thereto. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070626 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL DISCOVERY IN COGNITIVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS - Techniques are provided for channel discovery. For example, there is provided a method operable by a mobile entity that may involve measuring beacon signals associated with the network. In one approach, the method may involve, in response to detecting an Authorized Shared Access (ASA) beacon signal on a frequency common to each network entity on a given ASA channel, extracting frequency information from the ASA beacon signal, wherein the ASA beacon signal comprises a single frequency network (SFN) beacon signal. In another approach, the method may involve, in response to detecting an ASA beacon signal on a frequency common to each network entity on a given ASA channel, extract frequency information from the ASA beacon signal, wherein timing correlates with an operating frequency for the ASA beacon signal. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070627 | System and Method for Managing Contention in a Wireless Communications System - A method for transmitting to an access point includes receiving a selection condition and a selection contention period from the access point, and comparing the selection condition to a selection parameter. The method also includes contending for use of a transmission medium during the selection contention period if the selection parameter meets the selection condition. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070628 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING SUB-CHANNELS IN A NETWORK - At least one operating condition is determined for a first mobile subscriber station ( | 03-21-2013 |
20130070629 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (HARQ) ENABLE/DISABLE - A system and method of increasing data throughput in a wireless communications network between a base station (BS) and one or more mobile stations (MS) includes establishing a service flow (SF) and initially enabling a hybrid automated repeat request (HARQ) protocol; determining, at a particular time, the measure of quality of the communications channel; comparing the determined measure of quality with a predetermined channel quality threshold; and selectively disabling the HARQ protocol based upon a first comparison result while continuing the SF between the BS and MS. In other aspects, after selectively disabling the HARQ protocol, the method further includes determining that the time-varying measure of quality of the communications channel has deteriorated below the predetermined channel quality threshold; and selectively re-enabling the HARQ protocol in the established SF. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070630 | Method and System for Determination and Exchange of Network Timing Information - Aspects of methods and systems for determination and exchange of network timing information are provided. In one such method, a propagation delay of a network physical link is determined using a plurality of time stamps. The time stamps are provided by one or more sending nodes traversed by a packet along the network physical link. The length of the network physical link is calculated, utilizing the determined propagation delay. The determined propagation delay and/or the length of the network physical link is appended to the packet. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070631 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MINIMIZING POWER CONSUMPTION DURING IDLE MODE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for minimizing power consumption of a terminal during a power saving mode operation in a wireless communication system includes acquiring synchronization using a frequency used in a first paging listen interval or a frequency selected in a first paging listen interval; measuring a signal quality based on the acquired synchronization; and according to the measured signal quality, determining a length of a wake-up interval for a second paging listen interval. Thus, the terminal operating in the idle mode can minimize the power consumption of the terminal through the efficient control of the synchronization acquisition overhead interval and the frequency reselection algorithm carried out based on and the channel change. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070632 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF REPORTING LOGGED MEASUREMENTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides an apparatus and method of reporting logged measurements in a wireless communication system. User equipment receives an MDT (Minimization of Drive Tests) configuration from a base station, and logs a measurement on the basis of the MDT configuration in order to collect logged measurements. The user equipment determines whether the logged measurement needs to be reported. If it is determined that the logged measurement needs to be reported, the user equipment transmits to the base station a report indicator indicating the need for reporting of the logged measurement. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070633 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND MOBILE DEVICE - During communication by a mobile device, when a communication feasibility determining unit of an SGSN determines, based on a remaining communication volume, that the communication by the mobile device cannot be continued, an access point information extracting unit extracts APN information regarding an APN with an unused remaining communication volume and reports the extracted APN information to the mobile device. An access point information acquiring unit of the mobile device acquires APN information regarding the APN with an unused remaining communication volume. When communication is next initiated, the APN information regarding the APN with an unused remaining communication volume is transmitted to the SGSN to perform communication. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070634 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE - The invention relates to the technical field of wireless communications, and in particular to a method, system, and device for measuring interference, so as to solve the problem in the prior art that the precision of interference measured by a terminal is low if a cell adopts a Resource Element Muting (RE MUTING) solution. The method includes: a network side device determining configuration information of a first Resource Element (RE) group performing interference measurement ( | 03-21-2013 |
20130070635 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SAVING ENERGY IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASE STATION - A method for achieving energy-saving in a mobile communication system base station, for application in an LTE system, comprises the steps of: determining the average value of a downlink sub-frame traffic load; determining, when the average value of the downlink sub-frame traffic load is below a threshold value therefor, an MBSFN downlink sub-frame which is not carrying multicast traffic; and closing the radio frequency channel corresponding to the multicast symbol in the MBSFN downlink sub-frame which is not carrying multicast traffic. By using the method in the embodiments of the present invention, the number of downlink sub-frames required to meet the communication traffic needs of a current cell is judged according to changes in the traffic load observed by measuring the traffic load values in that cell; sub-frames which can be closed are set as MBSFN downlink sub-frames which do not send multicast traffic; radio frequency channels occupied by the multicast symbol are closed, thereby achieving the object of reducing energy consumption. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077500 | Parallel Traffic Generator With Priority Flow Control - An apparatus to generate test traffic for testing a network. A scheduler may provide packet definition data for a sequence of packets, each packet associated with a respective flow control group. A channelized schedule FIFO (first-in first-out) queue may store the packet definition data. The channelized schedule FIFO queue may include multiple parallel channels, each channel dedicated to storing packet definition data associated with a corresponding flow control group. A plurality of non-channelized packet builder lanes may build packets in accordance with packet definition data read from the channelized schedule FIFO. A channelized output FIFO buffer may store packets built by the plurality of packet builder lanes. The channelized output FIFO buffer may include multiple parallel channels, each channel dedicated to storing packets associated with a corresponding flow control group. An output multiplexor may interleave packets from the channelized output FIFO buffer to form the test traffic. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077501 | DYNAMIC SUBFLOW CONTROL FOR A MULTIPATH TRANSPORT CONNECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A multipath transport protocol such as multipath TCP can utilize metrics such as a wireless link condition corresponding to one or more paths as a parameter for controlling a dynamic allocation of data and control signaling over respective paths. Fault-tolerant control can enable retransmissions of packets already sent on a poor path, onto a good path. Further, the feedback, the retransmissions, and other control signaling can be provided on a separate subflow or on a UDP overlay. In this way, a multipath TCP connection can be more reliable and efficient as flow control and data flow are enhanced. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077502 | ADJUSTING REPEATER GAINS BASED UPON RECEIVED DOWNLINK POWER LEVEL - A method of controlling gains within a repeater may include determining a power control set point value which controls a transmit power of a mobile station (MS), and receiving a downlink signal from a base station transceiver system (BTS). The method may further include measuring a power of the received downlink signal, and computing a power level of a signal expected at the uplink of the repeater, wherein the computing is based on the measured downlink power and the power control set point value. Finally, the method may further include adjusting a gain of at least one amplifier based on the computed power level. An apparatus for controlling gains in a repeater may include a baseband processor for performing the above method. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077503 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING QoS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and system for improving quality of service (QoS) in a wireless network are disclosed. In one embodiment, bearer connection context parameters of each of a plurality of data packets in the wireless network are obtained. Further, general packet radio service tunneling protocol user plane protocol data unit (G-PDU) packets are determined in the plurality of data packets based on first bearer connection context parameters which is a subset of the bearer connection context parameters. Furthermore, the determined G-PDU packets are queued in a non-signaling queue. QoS attributes are then computed for each of the queued G-PDU packets. In addition, priority data is computed for each of the queued G-PDU packets is computed using the computed QoS attributes. Moreover, one or more priority queues are formed based on the computed priority data of each of the queued G-PDU packets for improving QoS in the wireless network. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077504 | STUDIO-TRANSMITTER LINK (STL) SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Studio-transmitter link (STL) systems and methods are disclosed. In one embodiment, a STL system is provided that includes a STL transmitter comprising a first STL transmitter interface that transmits program content over a first transmission path to a STL receiver, and a second STL transmitter interface that transmits program content over a second transmission path to the STL receiver. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077505 | Method And Apparatus For Using Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Filtering To Provide Air-Time Optimization In Wireless Networks - A method, apparatus and computer program product for using Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) filtering to provide air-time optimization in wireless networks is presented. At least one message is received at an Access Point (AP) from a mobile unit (MU). A determination is made by the AP whether a received Signal Strength indicator (RSSI) associated with the at least one message from an MU is greater than a predetermined threshold. When the RSSI value associated with the at least one message from na MU is greater than to said predetermined threshold, then a response is generated by the AP and sent to the MU. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077506 | System and Method for Association and Uplink Adaptation in a Relay Network - In a system for allocating resources of a wireless communication system power levels of downlink (DL) communication channels and coupling losses of uplink (UL) communication channels are determined. When the power level of the DL communication channel between a base station and a UA is greater than the power levels of the DL communication channels between each of a plurality of RNs and the UA, and the coupling losses of the UL communication channel between at least one of the RNs and the UA are less than the coupling losses of the UL communication channel between the base station and the UA, a DL communication channel resource on the base station to the UA, and a UL communication channel resource on the at least one of the plurality of RNs to the UA are allocated. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077507 | Method and System for Small Cell Discovery in Heterogeneous Cellular Networks - A method and a user equipment in a network having a macro cell and at least one small cell, the method in one embodiment receiving a measurement restriction over a broadcast channel from the macro cell; and applying the restriction for a corresponding measurement at the user equipment. In one embodiment the method includes receiving a small cell list from the macro cell; and measuring at least one of a reference signal receive power and a reference signal received quality based on the received small cell list. The method includes, in one embodiment, receiving a neighboring small cell configurations from the macro cell; and utilizing the received small cell configurations to attach to a small cell. The method includes, in one embodiment, receiving an s-measure offset value over a broadcast channel from the macro cell; and applying the s-measure offset value to an s-measure for neighbor cell discovery. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077508 | Method and Apparatus For Signal Quality Determination in a Communication Network - One aspect of the present invention is method for signal quality measurement that provides significant improvements in accuracy, at least in certain scenarios where conventional approaches to such measurements are vulnerable to inaccuracies. Non-limiting example scenarios include instances where a communication network uses downlink carriers in neighboring cells with overlapping frequencies but with different bandwidths and/or center frequencies. In such cases, there may be uneven interference across the carrier bandwidth, e.g., arising from neighboring carriers operating at different center frequencies and/or at different bandwidths. Thus, making the signal quality measurement for a given carrier depend on a combination of measurements taken at different frequency regions of the carrier provides a clearer, more accurate picture of the interference or loading conditions bearing on that carrier. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077509 | RELAYING APPARATUS AND RELAYING METHOD - A relaying apparatus includes a memory that stores a program including a procedure, and a processor that executes the program including the procedure, wherein the procedure includes delaying, when received packet data includes a synchronization message for any one of a frequency synchronization and a time synchronization, a transmission of the received packet data so that a period of time for a relaying process attains a given value. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077510 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING A PACKET - An apparatus includes a first switch circuit in an active mode and a second switch circuit in a standby mode. The apparatus receives high-priority packets and low-priority packets. Each switch circuit stores the high-priority packets and the low-priority packets into first and second buffers, respectively. The each switch circuit performs packet-readout processing reading out a packet from the first and second buffers where the packet-readout processing is performed on the first buffer on a priority basis. The apparatus controls the first switch circuit so that a back-pressure time for the high-priority packets becomes longer with increasing amount of data transmitted by the high-priority packets, when a low-priority packet outputted from the first switch circuit is determined to be a packet that has been received at a first time that is later than a second time at which another low-priority packet outputted from the second switch circuit has been received. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077511 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication system is provided with a wireless transmission apparatus and a wireless reception apparatus. The wireless transmission apparatus includes a plurality of transmission antennas and a transmission unit. The transmission unit performs signal transmission according to a notified operation mode. The wireless reception apparatus includes a plurality of antennas, a reception unit, a reception quality controller, and an operation mode controller. The reception unit performs reception processing of reception signals received by the reception antennas. The reception quality controller measures a reception quality of each reception signal to calculate a ratio of the reception quality. The operation mode controller determines selection or non-selection of an operation mode according to a comparison result of the ratio and a threshold value and gives notification of the selected operation mode. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077512 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TERMINALS - A direct communication method between terminals is provided. When a terminal receives a plurality of synchronization information parts, the terminal selects synchronization information to acquire a reference time among the plurality of synchronization information parts according to a priority. Here, the priority is an order of first synchronization information that is received from a base station, second synchronization information that is received from a global positioning system (GPS), and third synchronization information that is received from a terminal in which a hop count from the base station or the GPS is small. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077513 | CoMP MEASUREMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a subscriber station configured to communicate with one or more base stations in a wireless communication network. The subscriber station is configured to receive, from the network, information associated with one or more of the TPs that are candidates for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission with the subscriber station, measure a plurality of channel quality values for each of the one or more TPs, and report to the network, the measured channel quality values. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077514 | Channel State Information Transmission - A wireless device receives control messages from a first base station. The control messages configure measurement parameters and triggers measurements of channel state information for a subset of carriers. The control messages configure an uplink transmission resource, physical uplink channel format, and a list of carriers. The wireless device measures and transmits the channel state information for each active carrier in the list of carriers. The wireless device simultaneously receives signals from a subset of carriers belonging to at least two base stations or belonging to at least two sectors of the first base station. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077515 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING MOBILITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for performing mobility by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: receiving Physical layer Cell Identity (PCI) split information from a network, the PCI split information indicating a predetermined set of at least one PCI reserved for a predetermined cell type; receiving system information from at least one candidate cell, the system information comprising a PCI for each cell; measuring the at least one candidate cell; determining whether to apply the PCI split information for selecting a target cell; selecting the target cell; and performing the mobility to the target cell. If it is determined that the PCI split information is applied, the step of selecting the target cell includes: excluding at least one cell has a PCI included in the predetermined set; and selecting the target cell among at least one remaining cell. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077516 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a radio communication apparatus, a packet size estimation unit estimates the packet size of a packet transmitted to the radio communication apparatus from a transmission side. A reception quality measurement unit measures reception quality of a received signal to obtain a reception quality measurement value. A code block number estimation unit estimates the numbers of code blocks in one packet using the packet size and the code block sizes for individual operation modes. An operation mode selection control unit recognizes desired qualities with respect to the individual operation modes from the estimated numbers of code blocks. Then, the operation mode selection control unit selects an appropriate operation mode based on a result of comparing the desired qualities with the reception quality measurement value. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077517 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING RADIO NETWORK DEPLOYMENT STATE TEST PROCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing a radio network deployment state test process in a mobile communication system are provided. In the method, a User Equipment (UE) receives a n equivalent Minimization of Drive Test (MDT)_Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) list from a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or an enhanced Node B (eNB), wherein a PLMN of the MME is an MDT_PLMN of the UE, the MDT_PLMN is a PLMN in which the UE performs an MDT process as a radio network deployment state test process using an MDT scheme, the equiva lent MDT_PLMNs are equivalent PLMNs of the MDT_PLMN, and the equivalent MDT_PLMN Identifiers (IDs) represent PLMN IDs of equivalent PLMNs of the PLMN of the MME. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077518 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND REFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD - The present invention is designed to perform CQI measurement for adjacent cells without making the processes in the user terminal UE complex. A base station apparatus (eNodeB # | 03-28-2013 |
20130077519 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL MANAGEMENT IN HSPA - A method is provided for determining a transmission power control command in a User Equipment (UE) of a High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) network by combining Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands received during Discontinuous Transmission/Discontinuous Reception (DTX/DRX) modes. The combining is done on those TPC commands, which are received on different radio links after ignoring the TPC commands that might be received in a DownLink (DL) slot overlapping with no UpLink (UL) transmission. The UE using the combined TPC commands as derived for transmission of second UL Dedicated Physical Control CHannel (DPCCH) preamble and thereby leading to increase in link reliability and subsequent conservation of power by the UE. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077520 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH-SPEED TRANSMISSION ON RACH - A method and apparatus for signaling in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU). The method includes the WTRU receiving a value of a maximum number of retransmissions and retransmitting data in a plurality of hybrid automatic retransmission request (HARQ) processes limited by the value of a maximum number of retransmission. The WTRU is configured to receive a cell-specific, fixed or absolute grant on a broadcast channel. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077521 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR UPDATING COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION SET - A method and a device for updating a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission set are provided by the embodiments of the present invention. The embodiments of the present invention can update the CoMP transmission set, and adjust the CoMP coordinated cells flexibly, which is conducive to further improving the overall performance of the cell and the performance of the users at the edge of the cell. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077522 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile communication terminal includes: a transmission power controlling unit for performing transmission power control such that the sum of channel transmission powers or the sum of the ratios of the channel transmission powers to threshold values of the corresponding channels is a predetermined target value; an average transmission power calculating unit for calculating the average value of the sum of the channel transmission powers in a set monitoring period or the average value of the sum of the ratios of the channel transmission powers in the set monitoring period to the threshold values of the corresponding channels; and a transmission power suppressing unit for performing reduction control of the transmission powers such that these average values in a set control period are each equal to or less than the threshold value. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077523 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTICARRIERS - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, discloses a method and a device for transmitting/receiving channel state information in a wireless communication system supporting multicarriers. The method for transmitting downlink channel state information in the wireless communication system supporting downlink multicarriers, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the following steps: receiving from at least one downlink carrier an uplink grant downlink control information (DCI) including a request for the channel state information; measuring the channel state information of at least one first type downlink carrier; and transmitting the measured channel state information on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) resource indicated by the uplink grant DCI, wherein the downlink multicarriers comprise the first type downlink carrier and a second type downlink carrier, wherein the channel state information on the second type downlink carrier may not be transmitted. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077524 | Method and System for Improved Interference Cancellation by Path Selection - The present invention discloses method and system for improving performance of interference cancellation in a radio communication system. The method comprises: estimating power of an interfering signal contained in a received signal; estimating power of an additive estimate error signal added to the interfering signal; and canceling the interfering signal from the received signal if the estimated power of the additive estimate error signal is lower than the estimated power of the interfering signal. A cellular mobile terminal and a cellular base station comprising the system are also disclosed. | 03-28-2013 |
20130083672 | Apparatus and Method for Controlling Self-Interference in a Cellular Communications System - The invention relates to a radio base station ( | 04-04-2013 |
20130083673 | Access Node For A Communications Network - An access node such as an OLT or DSLAM for use in a communications network. The access node performs a plurality of functions using in a number of function modules, each divided into one or more sub-modules. The status of the sub-modules is controlled by a controlled by a controller that reviews load statistics and other inputs and determines whether the configuration of the function module should be changed. If so, individual sub-modules are powered down, clock-gated, or returned to operational status. A traffic dispatcher positioned before each function module distributes the data traffic to available sub-modules for processing, after which it is aggregated by a traffic aggregator and passed on to the next stage. A number of circuit boards may be used, each containing only one or two function modules. The boards are connected by short, high-speed serial lines, which may have multiple links whose status may also be controlled. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083674 | METHODS FOR ROBUST WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FOR NODES LOCATED IN VEHICLES - A communication method for a wireless communication network in a vehicle is disclosed where the network includes a plurality of sensor nodes and a receiving node. The method includes wirelessly transmitting first sensor data from a first sensor node and second sensor data from a second sensor node using first and second frequency channels, and receiving the first and second sensor data at the receiving node. The method can include rearranging the order of transmitting sensor data, and aggregating sensor data at the sensor nodes. The method can include testing the quality of the wireless links; and using the links with the best quality whether indirect or direct links. The receiving node can simultaneously receive data from more than one node using different frequencies. The nodes can transmit data in parallel using different frequencies. The network can include helper nodes. The wireless communication network can be designed as a tree. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083675 | DEVICES FOR RADIO LINK MONITORING - A user equipment (UE) configured for radio link monitoring is described. The UE includes a processor and instructions stored in memory that is in electronic communication with the processor. The UE monitors a radio link quality for a secondary cell (SCell). The UE also determines whether a physical layer problem is detected based on the radio link quality. If a physical layer problem is detected, the UE stops a time alignment timer (TAT) of the SCell or sets the time alignment timer (TAT) of the SCell as expired. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083676 | Enhanced Stomp-and-Restart with Interference Suppression - Enhanced stomp-and-restart techniques are provided. At a plurality of antennas of a wireless communication device, energy is received in a channel in which one or more frames may be transmitted to the wireless communication device from any one of a plurality of other wireless communication devices. A first frame is acquired from the received energy. Channel state information is computed for the first frame and the channel state information associated with the first frame is stored. Interference suppression parameters are computed for the first frame from the channel state information. It is determined whether a stronger second frame is being received by the wireless communication device. The received energy associated with the first frame is nulled-out using the interference suppression parameters when the stronger second frame is determined to be received so that start-of-packet processing and decoding is performed on the stronger second frame. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083677 | Method And Apparatus For Controlling Buffer Status Report Messaging - An apparatus such as a user equipment user device, smart phone and the like includes a memory device and an associated processor configured to transmit a buffer status report message when a reported buffer size in a last transmitted buffer status report message is satisfied. The apparatus may be configured to store the reported buffer size associated with the last transmitted buffer status report message, and track one or more grants of uplink resource; wherein the reported buffer size associated with the last transmitted buffer status report message is satisfied based on the grants of uplink resource. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083678 | MULTI-RADIO MEDIUM-AGNOSTIC ACCESS ARCHITECTURE - A multi-radio medium-agnostic access architecture is proposed. The multi-radio medium-agnostic architecture features a medium-agnostic MAC that interfaces between the TCP/IP and the physical layers of user equipment, such as a laptop computer or cellular phone having multiple radios, so that the radios in the user equipment may operate simultaneously, seamlessly, and transparently to higher layers. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083679 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FILTERING AND PROCESSING RECEIVED VEHICLE PEER TRANSMISSIONS BASED ON RELIABILITY INFORMATION - Methods and devices for processing and retransmitting highway communication system transmissions include determining a reliability of a received message and including an indication of the reliability in retransmitted transmissions. Reliability of received messages may be based on a signal strength of the received peer transmission, comparison of the signal strength to a distance to the transmitter based on message contents, the age of the received message, the signal quality of the received message, and other parameters. An indication of the determined reliability may be included in retransmissions of the message to enable other vehicles and receiver units in the highway communication system to benefit from the reliability determination. Message reliability may be used as part of prioritizing messages for processing. Messages may be processed according to priority so that high priority messages are processed before lower priority messages. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083680 | SERVER, SERVER CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - According to one embodiment, a server includes a transmitter, a storage, a determination unit and a controller. The transmitter is configured to transmit data using TCP streams. The storage is configured to store a number of TCP streams which the transmitter used in transmitting the data and a maximum value of a bandwidth which the transmitter used in transmitting the data using the number of TCP streams, in association with each other. The determination unit is configured to determine a number of TCP streams, which the transmitter uses in transmitting new data, based on the stored number, the stored maximum value, and a target value of the bandwidth. The controller is configured to update the stored maximum value when a bandwidth used for transmitting the new data using the determined number is larger than the maximum value associated with the stored number which is identical to the determined number. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083681 | Methods of Channel State Information Feedback and Transmission in Coordinated Multi-Point Wireless Communications System - A method of operating an eNB in a wireless communication network is provided, wherein the eNB is configured for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission. The method comprises determining, by the eNB, whether to use a fall back transmission scheme for communicating with a UE in the network, wherein the fall back transmission scheme is different from a regular transmission scheme. The method further comprises transmitting, by the eNB, data using the fall back transmission scheme in one or more selected subframes and/or on selected frequency resources. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083682 | DOWNLINK TIMING REFERENCE FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION - A method, apparatus and a system are disclosed. A method of operating a user equipment includes receiving one or more signals from one or more transmission points for a coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission. The method also includes identifying a timing reference for receiving the coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission as a time when a signal is first received from one of the transmission points. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083683 | Support of Network Based Positioning by Sounding Reference Signal - A method of network-based positioning using sounding reference signal (SRS) is proposed. An eNodeB configures a number of parameters of a periodic SRS transmission for a user equipment (UE). The eNodeB then transmits SRS configuration data for SRS measurements performed by a location measurement unit (LMU). The SRS configuration data includes cell-specific SRS bandwidth configuration and UE-specific SRS bandwidth configuration. The SRS configuration data may further include a number of antenna ports for SRS transmission, SRS frequency hopping bandwidth configuration, information on whether SRS sequence-group hopping is enabled, and Δ | 04-04-2013 |
20130083684 | METHODS OF DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a device to device (D2D) communication method. The D2D communication method includes generating a connection identification (CID) for D2D communication using an identification (ID) of a specific terminal, selecting a sequence corresponding to the CID, and transmitting the selected sequence using a paging request resource including a plurality of subcarriers. Accordingly, even in a channel selective wireless environment, a performance of a wireless link may be improved, and usage efficiency of wireless resources may be improved. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083685 | METHOD FOR DIFFERENTIALLY QUANTIZING CHANNEL INFORMATION IN MULTI-ANTENNA WIRELESS SYSTEMS AND SYSTEM ADOPTING THE SAME - A method of signal transmission based on differentially quantized channel information in a multi-antenna wireless communication system which can transmit signal to multiple mobile stations simultaneously through multiple transmit antennas includes a main codebook reporting step of each mobile station for quantizing channel correlation information (CCI) using a main-codebook and reporting an index of the main codebook, which corresponds to the quantized CCI, to a base station. A sub-codebook reporting step of each mobile station for quantizing the change of the CCI between the quantization interval using a sub-codebook and reporting an index of the sub-codebook, which corresponds to the quantized CCI change, to a base station. A multi-user eigen-beam transmission step of the base station for generating multiple eigen-beams using the index of the main-codebook or sub-codebook reported from mobile stations and transmitting them to multiple users simultaneously. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083686 | Systems and Methods of Measuring Communication Performance - The disclosure is generally directed to a system and method of measuring transport utilization of data that is to be multiplexed and transmitted over a digital transport facility. In a particular embodiment, the system includes a traffic management reporting device to provide a report including performance information. The performance information is determined based on a count of stuff bits included in a user data frame having a fixed size payload. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083687 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A meter interface which is an exemplary communication device includes a radio communication unit, a level calculator unit, and an interface processing unit, and the processing unit is configured to obtain information relating to the number of lower terminals connected to each of the upper terminals, based on the signal from the upper terminal, and determine as an upper terminal to be connected to the meter interface, an upper terminal which is smallest in the number of lower terminals connected to the meter interface, from among upper terminals in which received signal levels calculated in the level calculator unit are not lower than a predetermined threshold. | 04-04-2013 |
20130088978 | Joint Encoding of Rank and CQI Feedback For Comp - A method to reduce feedback overhead for CoMP operation is described. The method includes deriving a set of CSI for a coordinated multi-point transmission received at a UE over a plurality of radio links Each CSI of the set of CSI pertains to a radio link of the plurality of radio links. The plurality of radio links includes a first link from a serving transmission point and at least one multi-point link from at least one non-serving transmission point to the UE. The method also includes jointly encoding at least two CSI from the set of CSI. Apparatus and computer readable media are also described. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088979 | System and Method for Multiple Point Transmission in a Communications System - A system and method for multiple point transmission in a communications system are provided. A method for multiple point transmission operation comprises modifying a configuration of a radio bearer for use in a multiple point transmission to a user equipment according to operating condition information of the user equipment, reconfiguring the radio bearer according to the modified configuration, and initiating a multiple point transmission to the user equipment using the reconfigured radio bearer. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088980 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT IN AN EXTENSION CARRIER - A method in which a terminal (UE) operates to perform channel quality measurement in a system which supports carrier aggregation, disclosed in the present description, comprises the following steps: receiving, from a base station, a first message containing a first indicator for indicating control information for channel quality measurement used in an extension component carrier; receiving control information corresponding to the first indicator from the base station via the extension component carrier; and performing channel quality measurement in the extension component carrier using the received control information. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088981 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING HIERARCHY FEEDBACK WITH SPACE INFORMATION-ASSISTED - A method for performing hierarchical feedback with space information assisted in a mobile communication system is provided. At the user terminal, the method comprises: measuring a space correlated matrix of multiple transmit antennas of a base station; converting a hierarchical code book in the mode of hierarchical feedback by using the spatial correlation matrix; selecting the code word from the converted hierarchical code book; and feedbacking a pre-coding matrix index corresponding to the index of the selected code word and the space correlated correlation matrix from the user terminal to the base station by using the mode of hierarchical feedback. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088982 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING COVERAGE OF WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER - A method of controlling coverage of a wireless transceiver, including receiving information about the wireless transceiver from an external device, and changing a coverage value of the wireless transceiver, which has been set in advance, based on the received information about the wireless transceiver. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088983 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTEGRATING DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and apparatus are described for integrating third generation partnership project (3GPP) radio access network and an Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 radio access technologies (RATs). This may be done at a medium access control (MAC) layer or below the MAC layer. For example, a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for multiple radio access technology (RAT) integration includes a 3GPP RAT including a radio resource control (RRC) entity, an IEEE 802.11 RAT including a medium access control (MAC) management entity, and a session management entity (SME) for mapping between the RRC entity and the MAC management entity. Combined, hybrid and split versions of logical channel prioritization (LCP) are described. The features of an LTE access stratum-service management entity (AS-SME) are also described. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088984 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING FEEDBACK IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus are provided for generating feedback in a communication system. The method includes receiving information about first Evolved Node Bs (ENBs) and a threshold for the first ENBs, which are powered off at a specific time; measuring a channel status for each of second ENBs, which are subject to channel status measurement; selecting a third ENB having an optimal channel status from among the second ENBs, based on the measured channel statuses; generating first feedback information including a cell index and channel status information for the third ENB; measuring a channel status for each of the second ENBs, while the first ENBs are powered off; selecting a fourth ENB having an optimal channel status from among the second ENBs, based on the measured channel statuses; and generating second feedback information including a cell index and channel status information for the fourth ENB. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088985 | METHOD FOR MEASURING A NEIGHBORING CELL AND AN APPARATUS THEREOF - A method of performing intra-frequency cell measurement by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes determining a measurement gap for the intra-frequency cell measurement based on downlink control information received from an eNB, and performing the intra-frequency cell measurement for a neighboring cell during the measurement gap. The measurement gap corresponds to one or more downlink subframes other than a downlink subframe having downlink data for the UE indicated by the downlink control information. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088986 | System and Method for Coordinated Transmission - A method for operating a first communications controller serving a first device includes receiving channel information for a communications channel between the first communication controller and a second device served by a second communications controller, and determining a time-frequency resource, a duration, and a precoding constraint in accordance with the received channel information, the time-frequency resource, the duration, and the precoding constraint for use with a transmission of the first communications controller occurring within the time-frequency resource for the duration to reduce interference to a third device served by the second communications controller. The method also includes transmitting coordinated transmission information about the time-frequency resource, the duration, and the precoding constraint, to the second communication controller, and transmitting to the first device in accordance with the precoding constraint, the time-frequency resource, and the duration. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088987 | Broadband Radio Frequency Data Communication System Using Twisted Pair Wiring - A system for distributing broadband signals via twisted pair wiring is disclosed. Various aspects of the system involve use of a broadband signal distribution interface device and/or a broadband line driver. In one aspect, a broadband signal distribution interface device includes a broadband signal interface configured to receive broadband radio frequency signals, and a plurality of broadband signal connections configured to distribute broadband radio frequency signals. The interface device also includes circuitry defining an upstream signal path and a downstream signal path and including a gain control circuit and a slope control circuit each positioned along the downstream signal path. The circuitry is configured to accommodate downstream transmission of the broadband signals onto twisted pair wiring. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088988 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING AGGREGATED CARRIER CELL - A method for measuring an aggregated carrier cell includes the following content. A user equipment receives measurement configuration information of an aggregated carrier cell from a serving base station, where the measurement configuration information includes signal estimation value information and a corresponding measurement period thereof; the user equipment obtains a measurement period of a non-active component carrier according to a signal estimation value of the non-active component carrier in the aggregated carrier cell and the measurement configuration information; and the user equipment measures the non-active component carrier according to the measurement period. With the method of the present invention, the user equipment can measure different component carriers in an aggregated carrier cell in different periods. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088989 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A CENTRALIZED SUBSCRIBER LOAD DISTRIBUTION - A method and apparatus for providing subscriber load distribution in networks are disclosed. For example, the method receives capacity data and user equipment (UE) resource consumption data from a plurality of devices that process call control signaling messages within the communication network. The method receives a first request from one of the plurality of devices to re-register one or more selected user equipment, and selects at least one available device from the plurality of devices. The method then re-registers the one or more selected user equipment on the at least one available device. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088990 | Methods, Devices and Computer Readable Media for Providing Quality of Service Indicators - Provided are exemplary embodiments including a methods, software and devices for providing Quality of Service (“QoS”) information the user of a mobile communications device while present at a geographic position. The embodiments include methods and devices for receiving a communication signal on a wireless communication device while located at the geographic location, measuring a characteristic of the communication signal pertinent to the proper operation of the wireless computing device in addition to signal strength; and providing a cognizable rendition of the quality of the characteristic to the user by the wireless communication device. The cognizable rendition may be a bar indicator or other audio, visual, vibratory, olfactory or tactile indicator. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088991 | ASYMMETRICAL MULTICARRIER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE - Asymmetrical multicarrier interference avoidance in a communication from a network to a subscriber device is provided. The asymmetrical multicarrier interference avoidance technique comprises measuring signal-to-noise ratio interference values and sorting the measured values into two tables for selecting an anchor and a non-anchor frequency carrier pairs. The system is self-tuning based on changes in the network, the subscriber and the surrounding environment. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088992 | HIGH DATA THROUGHPUT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK RECEIVER - A method for receiving a frame in a high data throughput wireless local area network begins by receiving a preamble of the frame via a channel in accordance with a default receiver filter mask. The processing continues by validating the preamble. The processing continues by, when the preamble is validated, interpreting the preamble to determine a high data throughput channel configuration. The processing continues by reconfiguring the default receiver filter mask in accordance with the high data throughput channel configuration to produce a reconfigured receiver filter mask. The processing continues by receiving a data segment of the frame in accordance with the reconfigured receiver filter mask. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088993 | CABLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS EMPLOYING TDMA/ATDMA QAM UPSTREAM CHANNELS BELOW 20 MHZ FOR INCREASED UPSTREAM CAPACITY TO SUPPORT VOICE AND/OR DATA SERVICES - Cable communication systems and methods to provide voice and/or data services to subscriber premises via a cable plant that conveys upstream information over an upstream path bandwidth, and a cable modem system including one or more demodulation tuners to receive and demodulate one or more upstream radio frequency (RF) signals. An RF signal includes an encoded carrier wave having a carrier frequency of between 5 MHz and 19.6 MHz that is modulated using a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) protocol or an Advanced Time Division Multiple Access (ATDMA) protocol and quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) with voice and/or data information constituting at least some of the upstream information. A modulation order of the QAM for the first upstream RF signal is at least 32, and at least one demodulation tuner of the cable modem system is configured to receive and demodulate the first upstream RF signal. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088994 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING PERFORMANCE OF MULTI-SERVICE IN TUNNEL - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for measuring performance of multi-service in a tunnel, including: receiving a measurement message corresponding to a service packet, where a priority of the measurement message is the same as that of the service packet, and the measurement message includes at least one of the three: a packet loss measurement parameter, a delay measurement parameter, and a variation measurement parameter; and measuring performance of a service in a tunnel according to a measurement parameter in the measurement message. According to the embodiments of the present invention, a problem that performance measurement cannot be performed for different services transmitted in a tunnel in the prior art may be solved. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088995 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting data in a wireless communication system. The method for transmitting data involves allocating a first node set containing a plurality of nodes for the transmission of downlink signals and a second node set containing a plurality of nodes for the reception of uplink signals, and communicating with a terminal through the first node set and the second node set. In the event the uplink transmission and downlink transmission are performed by base stations or nodes that are different from each other, the operation of the base stations and of a terminal can be efficiently controlled. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088996 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - There is provided a radio communication system includes a radio station, a host apparatus configured to subordinate the radio station, and a terminal configured to communicate with the radio station. The terminal has a function of transmitting data to the host apparatus through a plurality of the radio stations and, when data is transmitted through the radio stations, executes a first transmitting operation for transmitting different data portions respectively to the radio stations, which are set as transmission destinations, or a second transmitting operation for transmitting same data respectively to the radio stations, which are set as the transmission destinations. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088997 | MONITORING PATH CHARACTERISATION INFORMATION - Methods and an associated traffic management module and system are disclosed for monitoring, at a traffic management module ( | 04-11-2013 |
20130094371 | MANAGEMENT OF MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARER SESSIONS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and methodology that can limit and manage the number of multiple radio access bearer (mRAB) initiations, which are transitions from a Circuit Switched (CS) voice session, is provided. Moreover, the system, within a Radio Access Network (RAN), can identify vulnerable radio conditions for a user equipment (UE) on an uplink (UL) and/or a downlink (DL), and then subsequently determines whether a Packet Switched (PS) data session is allowed to pass through to the UE, during a CS voice call. In addition, the system can temporarily block a network-initiated data request to the existing CS voice call, if the voice call is likely to be dropped on initiating an mRAB. As the vulnerable radio conditions improve, the system can deliver the previously blocked data request to the UE. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094372 | Systems, Methods, and Apparatus for Modifying Sensor Time Stamp Data - Certain embodiments of the invention may include systems, methods, and apparatus for providing modifying sensor time stamp data. According to an example embodiment of the invention, a method is provided for monitoring and correcting sample time stamps. The method can include receiving packet data from one or more sensors or intelligent electronic devices (IEDs); examining time stamps associated with the received packet data; and determining a variance between the time stamps or an offset between the time stamps and an accurate time source. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094373 | Self Synchronizing Data Communication Method and Device - A method of receiving a data transmission includes detecting a first switching of a transmission signal to a first signal value, starting a duration measurement of a first time interval that begins with detecting the first switching of the transmission signal, detecting a second switching of the transmission signal to a second signal value, stopping the measurement of the first time interval duration and starting a second duration measurement of a second time interval, detecting a third switching of the transmission signal to the first signal value or to a third signal value, stopping the second measurement in response to detecting the third switching, determining a relation of the first and second time interval durations from the first and second measurements, and determining a data value of the transmission signal based on the determined relation. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094374 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE UPLINK ATTENUATION - Techniques are provided for overcoming uplink (UL) interference at a femtocell or the like by modifying the estimated interference-plus-noise power in UL power control. In one example, the modification can be specified by a method, operable by a network entity, that may involve determining a level of excess received interference based at least in part on out-of-cell interference (Ioc). In another example, the modification can be specified by a method, operable by a network entity, that may involve determining a difference between the downlink transmit powers of the high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) serving and non-serving cells, with which the UE are in soft handover (SHO) in uplink and is served by the HSDPA serving cell in downlink. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094375 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DETECTING TRANSMISSION COLLISION AND/OR ALLEVIATING TRANSMISSION COLLISION - A method for detecting a transmission collision between a first wireless communication terminal and a second wireless communication terminal includes the following steps: when one retry packet transmitted from the first wireless communication terminal is received by the second wireless communication terminal, checking if at least one transmission collision condition is met and accordingly generating a checking result; deriving statistic data from a plurality of checking results generated in response to a plurality of retry packets transmitted from the first wireless communication terminal; and detecting the transmission collision between the first wireless communication terminal and the second wireless communication terminal according to the statistic data. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094376 | NETWORK PROTOCOL ANALYZER APPARATUS AND METHOD - In one embodiment, a method for electronically analyzing packets using a packet analyzing apparatus includes receiving one or more data packets via a first interface port, wherein the one or more data packets comprises a full packet that may include a payload, determining whether the full packet is part of an existing permitted connection, and if so, determining whether the full packet contains a payload, and if the full packet of the existing permitted connection does not contain a payload, transmitting data indicative of the full packet via the second interface port to an industrial machine control. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094377 | GATEWAY CHANNEL UTILIZATION - Voice call entries for voice calls handled by a gateway may be stored in a database. Determining channel utilization in the gateway may include determining whether a gateway channel was used during a voice call based on a corresponding voice call entry. A determination may be made as to whether the voice call is complete or active. Also, the channel name is determined and the channel usage duration of the voice call since the last channel utilization determination is calculated. Also, the channel name is mapped with the channel usage duration, and the mapping may be stored in the database. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094378 | Method and Apparatus to Compute a Noise Power Estimate in a WCDMA Network - Method and apparatus for computing a noise power estimate in a wideband CDMA (WCDMA) network are disclosed and may include calculating a noise power estimate for a downlink channel based on an orthogonal sequence generated for a transmitted signal. The orthogonal sequence may be generated based on a slot number of the transmitted signal and/or a transmit diversity mode used for the transmitted signal. A portion of a plurality of dedicated physical channel (DPCH) pilot bits for the downlink channel may be summed to generate an in-phase (I) component and a quadrature (Q) component. The generated I component and the generated Q component may be multiplied by the orthogonal sequence to generate at least one noise I component and at least one noise Q component. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094379 | Device and Method for Dynamically Configuring Discontinuous Reception Parameters - The present invention provides a device and a method for dynamically configuring Discontinuous Reception parameters, and the method includes: when DRX parameters of a terminal need to be adjusted, the DRX parameters are adjusted until the terminal satisfies the requirement of the Guaranteed Bit Rate after the adjustment of DRX, and then the DRX parameters are no longer adjusted. Adopting the technical scheme of the present invention can make a base station adapt to the power-saving and performance requirement of the terminal in real time by a dynamic estimation of the DRX adjusted parameters of the terminal, in addition, it can also satisfy the requirement for the signaling load in different circumstances by configuring an adjusted cycle. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094380 | FEEDBACK INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - The present invention reduces the increase of the amount of feedback information, and, regardless of whether the correlation between antennas is high or low, increases the data rate upon MIMO transmission. A feedback information transmission method to assume a Hermitian transpose of a precoding matrix corresponding to a PMI that is selected in accordance with the amount of channel variation as a channel matrix (effective channel: h | 04-18-2013 |
20130094381 | System and Method for Measurement Bandwidth Configuration - Signaling a Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) or Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ) measurement of a wireless channel is achieved by sending an measurement bandwidth (measbandwidth) indicator to a receiver that mandates a specific measurement bandwidth for performing the RSRP or RSRQ measurement. By virtue of receiving the measbandwidth indicator, the receiver is required to perform the RSRP or RSRQ measurement over a portion of the wireless channel that is equal to the measurement bandwidth specified by the measbandwidth indicator. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094382 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING IN-DEIVCE COEXISTENCE INTEFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and apparatus for controlling in-device coexistence (IDC) interference in a wireless communication system are described in the present invention. The present invention includes transmitting UE capability information whether the UE has a capability to measure IDC, to a base station (BS); receiving measurement configuration information whether the UE is allowed to send IDC indication, from the BS; and transmitting the IDC indication and at least one of measurements which are a measurement in consideration of IDC and a measurement without consideration of IDC to the BS. It is possible to control reducing occurrence of in-device coexistence interference. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094383 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING DEDICATE SEARCHING SPACE IN PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - A method for determining a dedicate searching space (DSS) in a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes steps of indicating the UE to monitor a semi-persistent scheduling cell radio network temporary identifier (SPS C-RNTI) in the PDCCH for receiving a semi-persistent scheduling grant, and determining the DSS utilized for monitoring the SPS C-RNTI according to a cell radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) of the UE. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094384 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CHANNEL MEASUREMENT IN A DISTRIBUTED MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - The present description relates to a method for receiving a reference signal (RS) in a distributed multi-node system, comprising: a step of receiving, from a base station, channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) configuration information which indicates the configuration of the channel state information reference signal the power of which is nonzero; and a step of receiving a channel state information reference signal for at least one node in a cell on the basis of the channel state information reference signal configuration information, wherein said channel state information reference signal with non-zero power has at least one configuration, and is received via at least one subframe. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094385 | Methods and Arrangements for Handling Carrier Selection - A method in at least one radio network node for handling earner selection comprises measuring at least one of interference or load levels on at least two uplink carriers, said measurement being performed in at least one sector of each carrier, calculating an offset based on said measured Interference or said measured load levels on the at least two uplink carriers, said offset reflecting the interference or load difference between the uplink carriers, and signalling said offset to a communication device, thereby allowing said communication device to base its carrier selection for random access at least on said measured interference or load levels on said at least two uplink carriers. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094386 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal device which can negate the need for troublesome switchovers and increase ease of use. In the device, a communication unit is connected to a client and carries out short distance wireless communication. An AP operation unit relays the transfer of data between the client and the connection destination thereof, on behalf of an access point. An electric field intensity acquisition unit measures the electric field intensity of a signal received from the access point. A client connection cancellation unit determines whether the device is within the communication area of the access point on the basis of the electric field intensity measured by the electric field intensity acquisition unit. If it is determined by the client connection cancellation unit that the device is within the communication area of the access point, an AP operation termination unit cancels the connection with the client in the AP operation unit. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094387 | Timeslot Allocation Method in a Wireless TDD Network - Method and arrangement in a first base station for scheduling in a TDD wireless network, which wireless network comprises the first base station serving a user equipment, and a second base station. The method comprises detecting that the second base station uses a different TDD configuration, instructing the user equipment to provide a signal strength measurement report based on a signal received from the second base station, receiving the measurement report, and allocating resources to the user equipment based on the received measurement report. Thereby is allocation of resources in TTIs not having the same uplink-downlink direction in the first base station and the second base station respectively, is avoided for the user equipment, when the received signal strength measurement report indicates that such allocation is appropriate. Also, a method and arrangement in a user equipment for scheduling in a TDD wireless network is described. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094388 | Method and Arrangement for Detecting a Channel Quality Offset - A method and an arrangement in a first radio network node for determining a channel quality offset for a radio channel for sending data from the first radio network node to a user equipment are provided. The first radio network node receives from the user equipment channel quality information for the radio channel. The first radio network node estimates resource utilization and signal-to-noise-ratio for the user equipment. The first radio network node determines the channel quality offset based on the received channel quality information, the estimated resource utilization and the estimated signal-to-noise-ratio. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094389 | Information on Reference Signal Structure for Neighbouring Cell Measurements - The present invention relates to cellular radio communication and in particular to providing information on neighbour cells to enable terminals to perform neighbour cell measurements. In the prior art the terminal attempts to make neighbour cell measurements in a reference signal structure that is the same in the neighbour cell as in the cell the terminal camps in. The present invention is based on the insight that the reference signal structure may differ between neighbouring cell for example in the situation of an MBSFN area that is restricted to a region of all cells of a radio network, or in the situation of TDD mode being applied there may be different regions with different allocation of sub-frames for transmission in the uplink and downlink directions. The present invention solves the problem by broadcast information in a cell indicative of the reference signal structure in neighbour cells. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094390 | LOCATION AWARE BACKGROUND ACCESS POINT SCANNING FOR WLAN - Respective distances between a communication device and a plurality of wireless local area network (WLAN) access points are determined. One of the plurality of WLAN access points with which the communication device is to associate is selected based on the determined distances. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094391 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH RATE PACKET DATA TRANSMISSION - In a data communication system capable of variable rate transmission, high rate packet data transmission improves utilization of the forward link and decreases the transmission delay. Data transmission on the forward link is time multiplexed and the base station transmits at the highest data rate supported by the forward link at each time slot to one mobile station. The data rate is determined by the largest C/I measurement of the forward link signals as measured at the mobile station. Upon determination of a data packet received in error, the mobile station transmits a NACK message back to the base station. The NACK message results in retransmission of the data packet received in error. The data packets can be transmitted out of sequence by the use of sequence number to identify each data unit within the data packets. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094392 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting channel state information of a terminal in a multi-carrier system, and to a terminal using the method. The method comprises the steps of: receiving reference signals from a base station via a plurality of downlink component carriers; measuring a channel state for each of the plurality of downlink component carriers using the reference signals included in the plurality of downlink component carriers; generating channel state information on a portion of the plurality of downlink component carriers; and transmitting to the base station the channel state information on a portion of the plurality of downlink component carriers and/or an index which indicates the portion of the plurality of downlink component carriers. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094393 | METHOD, TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR STARTING COMPRESSED MODE - The present invention discloses a method, a terminal and a communication system for starting a compressed mode, wherein the method comprises: a terminal receiving information of a target cell to be measured from a radio network controller; according to the information of the target cell to be measured, the terminal determining a transmission gap pattern sequence; according to the determined transmission gap pattern sequence, the terminal starting a compressed mode to perform a measurement to the target cell. In accordance with the present invention, the problem that a compressed mode can not be started in the case of load balancing mechanism or service bearer feature mechanism is solved, and the Quality of Service (QoS) of the terminal as well as the performance of the system are enhanced. | 04-18-2013 |
20130100828 | TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - The present invention is directed to providing a transmission power control method and a mobile station apparatus that can adequately control the transmission power of a mobile station apparatus having a plurality of transmitting antennas. Uplink transmission power control for a mobile station apparatus having a plurality of transmitting antennas provides a step of measuring the path loss (PL) of at least one transmitting antenna in a plurality of transmitting antennas, a step of setting representative value path loss (PL′) based on the measured path loss values, a step of determining the total transmission power (P | 04-25-2013 |
20130100829 | RADIO BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station eNB according to the present invention includes a Measurement control signal transmission unit | 04-25-2013 |
20130100830 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ANALYZE A WIRELESS INFORMATION DELIVERY SYSTEM - A method includes receiving a packet stream via a wireless signal from a device of a wireless information delivery system. The method includes determining wireless signal data associated with the wireless signal during a particular time interval, determining packet stream data associated with the packet stream during the particular time interval, and analyzing the wireless signal data and the packet stream data to produce an assessment of at least a portion of the wireless information delivery system. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100831 | NETWORK NEIGHBOR ADMISSION COORDINATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR POWERLINE COMMUNICATION - Systems and methods are provided for enabling the deployment of powerline communication networks and associated nodes on a powerline, wherein existing powerline communication networks connected to the powerline are detected and interrogated to ascertain communication bandwidth utilization rates and other information relating to the existing powerline communication networks and their associated nodes. The ability to detect the existence of powerline communication networks connected to the powerline, and to ascertain information relating to these existing powerline communication networks enables the new powerline communication network to be deployed on the powerline such that communication bandwidth allocation configuration settings for the new powerline communication network are met or exceeded. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100832 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACCOUNTING FOR TIME THAT A PACKET SPENDS IN TRANSIT THROUGH A TRANSPARENT CLOCK - Despite a recent revision, IEEE 1588™-2008 does not provide a complete implementation for PTP (precision time protocol) that accounts for variable delays introduced by network components. According to a broad aspect, the present disclosure provides implementations that account for variable delays introduced by network components. Therefore, the amount of time that a packet spends in transit through a transparent clock can be accounted for. According to another broad aspect, there is provided a master-slave mode that allows a transparent clock to function as a master or a slave to another clock. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100833 | Transmission of Information in a Wireless Communication System - Methods, devices, and systems for the transmission of information in a wireless communication system are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of transmission in a wireless communication system comprises determining by a wireless device ( | 04-25-2013 |
20130100834 | INCREASING CSI-RS OVERHEAD VIA ANTENNA PORT AUGMENTATION - A method of wireless communication is presented. The method includes signaling a first number of channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) ports corresponding to resource elements (REs) and a second number of virtual antenna ports, the second number being less than or equal to the first number. The method also includes transmitting CSI-RS on each virtual antenna port, the CSI-RS mapped to at least a portion of the REs. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100835 | Carrier Selection and/or Reselection - The invention relates to an apparatus including at least one processor and at least one memory including a computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code con-figured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus at least to: search for feasible component carriers by measurements, and if at least one feasible component carrier is found, take it into use; select at least one home node for negotiations for obtaining resources, the selection being based on the measurements, and negotiate for obtaining resources, if no feasible component carriers are found; take into use at least one feasible component carrier obtained based on the negotiations, if at least one feasible component carrier is obtained; and take into use at least one component carrier which is closest feasible, if no feasible component carriers are obtained. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100836 | Allocating One or More Resources (e.g. carriers) to a Network Element (e.g. HeNB) in a Communication System - A method of allocating one or more carriers such as frequencies, to a network element (e.g. HeNBs) in a communication system, in particular a heterogeneous communication system including selecting at least one neighbouring network element (e.g. a macro base station), measuring a parameter (e.g. RSRP) from the one neighbouring network element; determining whether said parameter is above a threshold; and allocating carrier(s) to said network element as a result. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100837 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - In the mobile communication system according to the present invention, when the RSRP or RSRQ in a non-serving cell of SCC within “MeasObject” is larger than the sum of the RSRP or RSRQ in an Scell within the “MeasObject” and a predetermined offset value (Offset) for a predetermined period (Time-To-Trigger), the mobile station UE determines that “ReportConfig-A | 04-25-2013 |
20130100838 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step of notifying, by a radio base station eNB, a mobile station UE of: a condition under which a measurement report is triggered; a measurement-report target CC having a measurement result that should be reported at the same time when the measurement report is performed; and the maximum number of cells, on the measurement-report target CC, having a measurement result that should be reported, and a step of transmitting, by the mobile station UE, a measurement result of a cell of which the number is equal to or less than the notified maximum number, for each notified measurement-report target CC. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100839 | OPTIMIZED RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR WIRELESS DEVICE IN PACKET TRANSFER MODE - A system and method allows a network, in response to a cell reselection notice, to serve a wireless, wireless device sufficient data to complete a pending data transfer instead of performing the immediate cell change. Appropriate allocation of radio resources to the wireless device in the current serving cell and before cell change allows reduced packet data transfer latencies for small data sessions, better load balancing and traffic resourcing between cells, appropriate allocation of uplink resources in the new target cell, and enhanced control over network congestion. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100840 | Transmitter Assisted Quality of Service Measurement - A method and apparatus for transmitter assisted Quality of Service (QoS) measurement. Time information is generated by the transmitter and transmitted along with a data transmission. A receiving device determines a QoS measurement based upon the time information and the received data. The time information indicates when the data was made available for transmission, which data transmission blocks belong to a single data transmission, and when a transmitter buffer was emptied. The QOS measurements are performance measurement such as, latency measurements and throughput measurements. The time information indicates a time reference relative to the timing of a wireless interface. The time reference is a System Frame Number (SFN), a Connection Frame Number (CFN), a relative count of frame numbers, a count of sub-frames, or a count of Time Transmission Intervals (TTIs). An aggregated QOS measurement is generated based upon the QOS measurement. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100841 | MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION METHOD OF MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT THEREOF - The present invention discloses Measurement configuration method of multi-carrier system and equipment thereof, and the method comprises the following steps: the terminal determines whether the frequency of target PCC exists in the measurement configuration after inter-frequency handover or inter-frequency RRC connection re-establishment is completed successfully, exchanges relevant measurement configuration of source PCC with that of target PCC when that of target PCC exists in the determined measurement configuration; and, deletes or reserves relevant measurement configuration of SCC, or exchanges relevant measurement configuration of source SCC with that of target SCC. The present invention solves the problem of measurement exchange and configuration of terminal under CA working condition when RRC connection re-establishment and handover of inter-frequency are completed successfully, saves air interface signaling and reduces the realization complexity. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100842 | TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - It is an object to provide a transmission power control method, mobile terminal apparatus and radio base station apparatus for enabling a mobile terminal apparatus that performs radio communications in a system band including a plurality of component carriers to suitably control uplink transmission power in each component carrier, and a transmission power control method of controlling uplink transmission power of a mobile terminal apparatus that performs radio communications in a system band including a plurality of component carriers is provided with the steps of receiving a transmission power control command generated in a radio base station apparatus, and applying the received transmission power control command to a plurality of component carriers in common and setting transmission power of each component carrier. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100843 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A DIRECT MEASURE OF QUALITY IN A PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK - A method and system for analyzing deficiencies in a packet-switched network is described. In one example, network measurement data pertaining to components within a packet-switched network are obtained. Reliability estimates of access networks and associated access links coupled to the packet-switch network are conducted. Lastly, an end-to-end direct measure of quality (DMOQ) is calculated from the network measurement data and network estimation data derived from the reliability estimates. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100844 | RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR A HIGH-SPEED SHARED CHANNEL - Radio resources like spreading codes and transmission power are optimally allocated to various different types of radio channels supported in the cell including a specialized channel like a high-speed shared channel. One or more measurements made at the base station are provided to the radio resource manager. Such measurements include other-channel power, high speed shared channel code usage, high speed shared channel transport format usage, average active load on the high speed shared channel, empty buffer, excess power, and similar parameters that relate to a high speed shared channel. One or more of these reported measurements may then be used to access, allocate, and/or regulate resources associated with the base station's cell. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100845 | HANDOVER METHOD FOR MINIMIZING PACKET CALL RECONNECTION DELAY TIME BETWEEN DIFFERENT MOBILE COMMUNICATION SCHEMES AND MULTI-MODE TERMINAL FOR THE SAME - A multi-mode terminal having first and second modems supporting different communication services and method for performing a handover thereof are provided. The method includes receiving, by the first modem, a message including starting condition for handover to a second communication network, wherein the condition is defined by a first communication network; determining, by the first modem, whether the starting condition for handover in the received message is satisfied; if the starting condition for handover in the received message is satisfied, receiving by the second modem, a command from the first modem to handover to the second communication network; and registering, by the second modem, into the second communication network in response to the command of the first modem, and connecting to the second communication network to perform communication. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100846 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of reporting a measurement result in a wireless communication system are provided. A user equipment receives a measurement configuration for a serving cell and performs a measurement in accordance with the measurement configuration to acquire an actual measurement result. The user equipment determines whether the serving cell is deactivated and transmits a measurement result including a pre-defined value if the serving cell is deactivated. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100847 | Method And An Apparatus For Evaluating Network Performance - The present invention relates to methods and node entities for enabling active measurement for evaluating network performance in a network comprising a logical tree structure | 04-25-2013 |
20130100848 | METHOD FOR FILTERING AND PROCESSING DATA IN A PACKET-SWITCHED COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method processes data in a packet-switched communication network having a plurality of network nodes, between which data packets are transmitted. Information contained in one data packet is extracted therefrom, the packet being received in a network node. One physical transmission parameter of the received data packet is ascertained, the physical transmission parameter specifies or is dependent on one property of the physical transmission of the received data packet. The received data packet is filtered based on a rule set, taking into account some of the extracted information and part of the physical transmission parameter, and further processed dependant on the filtering. An application of the method is “bootstrapping”, wherein network nodes are configured, cryptographic information being transmitted in the context of the configuration. A plausibility test of physical transmission parameters of the data packets that are transmitted during bootstrapping can ascertain whether an attacker is manipulating the bootstrapping process. | 04-25-2013 |
20130107726 | MULTI-METRIC ROUTING CALCULATIONS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107727 | Apparatus and Method for the Management of Reception Parameters in a Communication System | 05-02-2013 |
20130107728 | User Behavior Model and Statistical Transition Map to Assist Advanced WLAN Applications | 05-02-2013 |
20130107729 | METHOD, SYSTEM, NETWORK NODES, ROUTERS AND PROGRAM FOR BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION IN MULTI-HOP NETWORKS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107730 | Burst Avoidance in Uplink Systems | 05-02-2013 |
20130107731 | Multi-User Scheduling Involving Retransmission | 05-02-2013 |
20130107732 | WEB-LEVEL ENGAGEMENT AND ANALYTICS FOR THE PHYSICAL SPACE | 05-02-2013 |
20130107733 | USER-FOCUSING TECHNIQUE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107734 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD | 05-02-2013 |
20130107735 | Numbering of Automatic Repeat Request Processes | 05-02-2013 |
20130107736 | PORTABLE NETWORK COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD OF SELECTING ACTIVE NETWORK INTERFACE AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM | 05-02-2013 |
20130107737 | NETWORK REDIRECTION IN HETEROGENEOUS OVERLAY NETWORKS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107738 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FAST INITIAL NETWORK LINK SETUP | 05-02-2013 |
20130107739 | Mixed Speed Scheduling | 05-02-2013 |
20130107740 | INTERFERENCE CONTROL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-02-2013 |
20130107741 | MONITORING BROADCAST AND MULTICAST STREAMING SERVICE | 05-02-2013 |
20130107742 | MOBILE STATION, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 05-02-2013 |
20130107743 | MOBILE STATION, RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 05-02-2013 |
20130107744 | SYSTEMS, STRUCTURES AND ASSOCIATED PROCESSES FOR OPTIMIZATION OF STATE TRANSITIONS WITHIN WIRELESS NETWORKS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107745 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR UPLINK THEREOF, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE | 05-02-2013 |
20130107746 | METHOD FOR REFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION, METHOD FOR CHANNEL QUALITY ESTIMATION, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-02-2013 |
20130107747 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING CALL LATENCY IN MONITORED CALLS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107748 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR INTERWORKING OF WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORKS AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS OR WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORKS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107749 | CAPACITY INCREASING DEVICES AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION | 05-02-2013 |
20130107750 | Method In A Wireless Process Control System For Reducing Power Consumption, And A Controller And Computer Program Products | 05-02-2013 |
20130107751 | BASE STATION AND METHOD | 05-02-2013 |
20130114421 | ADAPTIVE BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION - It can be determined whether relative one way delay for data packets in a data stream exceeds a delay threshold. If so, then a delay congestion signal indicating that the relative one way delay exceeds the delay threshold can be generated. The delay congestion signal can be used in calculating an adaptive bandwidth estimate for the data stream. A packet loss rate congestion signal may also be used in calculating the bandwidth estimate. It can be determined whether a data stream of data packets is in a contention state. If the data stream is in the contention state, then an adaptive bandwidth estimate can be calculated for the data stream using a first bandwidth estimation technique. If the data stream is not in the contention state, then the bandwidth estimate for the data stream can be calculated using a second bandwidth estimation technique. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114422 | OPTIMIZATION OF DISTRIBUTION OF OVER-THE-AIR (OTA) UPDATES TO PORTABLE COMPUTING DEVICES - A system and apparatus for distributing updates to portable computing device are disclosed. A number of portable computing devices to receive update data is determined and a first number of invitations to update are transmitted to a subset of the portable computing devices to receive update data during a first event. Data describing network usage during the first event is received and the available network bandwidth is determined Based on the available network bandwidth, the size of the update data and network speed, a second number of invitations to update for transmission during a second event is determined In one embodiment, the available network bandwidth accounts for a threshold bandwidth and the bandwidth being used. This allows dynamic modification of the number of invitations based on available network bandwidth while allowing bandwidth usage to remain below the threshold bandwidth. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114423 | PACKET SYNCHRONIZATION RECEIVER - A method includes generating, based on at least one received signal, a first packet stream and a second packet stream. One of the first and second packet streams includes a packet associated with the other of the first and second packet streams. The first and second packet streams indicate respective buffer configuration sizes. The method further includes, prior to determining the respective buffer configuration sizes indicated by the first and second packet streams, allocating respective first and second portions of a dejitter buffer to the first and second packet streams. In at least one embodiment of the method, the allocating is performed by hardware coupled to the dejitter buffer. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114424 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMIT PRIORITY DETERMINATION WITHIN A LINK - A method, computer program product, and an apparatus for a transmit priority distributed backoff are provided. The apparatus forms a peer-to-peer communication link with a second apparatus. In addition, the apparatus determines whether to transmit in an assigned resource for securing a transmit priority for transfer of data to the second apparatus based on a quality of service estimation. Furthermore, the apparatus transmits to the second apparatus based on the determination. A method, computer program product, and an apparatus for a transmit priority token passing are provided. The apparatus forms a peer-to-peer communication link with a second apparatus. In addition, the apparatus determines a transmit priority within the link based on a quality of service estimation. The transmit priority is a priority of transmission between the apparatus and the second apparatus in the link. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114425 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANK ADAPTATION IN AN ORTHOGONAL FEQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system provides for adaptive rank determination, for example, a rank 2 transmission in instances where a rank 1 transmission may be indicated under supported feedback modes in current standards where no explicit power adaptation can be assumed, for example, where a user equipment (UE) is limited to reporting a rank 1 channel due to a large dynamic range of a signal or due to a signal received by the UE from one base station (BS) antenna port drowning out a signal received by the UE from another BS antenna port. The communication system provides for the UE to implement rank 2 transmission in such instances by using per-antenna port power control at a BS serving the UE. In one embodiment, the BS controls the rank determination at the UE by signaling transmit power or power offset related parameters to use for rank and transmission parameters determination and feedback. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114426 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POOLING BANDWIDTH ACROSS DISPARATE BANDWIDTH RESERVATIONS - In one embodiment, a method includes obtaining a message associated with a data flow that includes a first indicator that identifies an amount of requested pool bandwidth and a second indicator that identifies a pool with which the data flow is associated. The pool is associated with a plurality of data flows that includes the data flow. The method also includes determining whether the pool has an overall bandwidth allocation, and, if so, determining whether reserving the amount of requested bandwidth would cause the overall bandwidth allocation to exceed a maximum pool bandwidth allocation. Finally, the method includes reserving approximately the amount of requested bandwidth when it is determined that reserving the amount of requested bandwidth would not cause the overall bandwidth allocation to exceed the maximum pool bandwidth allocation. Reserving approximately the amount of requested bandwidth includes increasing the overall bandwidth allocation by the amount of requested bandwidth. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114427 | Cooperative Multipoint Scheme Selection Codebook - A network sends to a user equipment UE a reference signal configuration, and from receiving it the UE selects a codeword identifying a cooperative multipoint CoMP transmission scheme. There is a CoMP scheme selection codebook from which the UE selects the codeword corresponding to its recommended CoMP scheme. The UE sends to the network that codeword which identifies the CoMP transmission scheme, along with the CSI feedback characterizing the CoMP transmission scheme. From that codeword which the network receives it determines the UE's assumed CoMP transmission scheme, which the network uses to determine how the CSI feedback, received from the UE, was calculated by the UE (for example, joint transmission, or dynamic point selection with or without muting, or coordinating scheduling/beamforming). The network uses this information for selecting a CoMP transmission scheme for downlink CoMP transmissions to the UE. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114428 | Devices and Methods Related to Improvements in Coordinated Multipoint Transmission Arrangements - For coordinated multipoint transmission arrangements there is provided a device, including a controller module, configured to control a plurality of transmission points, each constituted by a set of at least one transmit antenna, to transmit data to another device in a coordinated transmission from at least a subset of the plurality of transmission points, wherein each subset with resources allocated thereto defines a respective coordinated transmission scheme, wherein the controller module is configured to transmit information on resources pertaining to multiple coordinated transmission schemes, and send at least one biasing parameter associated to at least one of the transmission schemes, to be applied for biasing a channel quality parameter. Another device includes a controller module, configured to report feedback responsive to such coordinated transmission, and the controller module is, among others, configured to apply the at least one biasing parameter to derived channel quality parameters. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114429 | Method and Apparatus for Identifying Other User Equipment Operating in a Wireless Communication Network - The present invention includes a method and apparatus for autonomously determining by a first UE the identities (IDs) of one or more other UEs that are operating in or around the same network area as the first UE. More particularly, the first UE determines with a defined reliability the UE ID of an otherwise unknown UE based on receiving and processing an HS-SCCH transmission targeted to the unknown UE. By learning actual UE IDs for one or more other UEs operating in or around the same area as the first UE, the first UE can then properly decode HS-SCCH transmissions to those other UEs, and thereby gain knowledge of the signal structures used for data (HS-PDCH) transmissions to those other UEs. Advantageously, the first UE applies such knowledge in its desired-signal receiver processing, such as for enhancing channel estimation and/or performing structured-signal interference cancellation. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114430 | Devices and Methods Related to Controlling UE Assumption of Interference - To control UE assumption of interference there is a controller module to control a plurality of transmission points, each constituted by a set of at least one transmit antenna, to transmit data to another device in a coordinated transmission from at least a subset of the plurality of transmission points. The controller module is configured to allocate, to each resource linked to the subset of the plurality of transmission points, an interference contribution parameter that is indicative of an expected interference contribution originating from said transmission point, and to inform said another device of those resources to which the subset of the plurality of transmission points is linked, together with the respective interference contribution parameter allocated to each resource. Another device reports feedback based on signals which are scaled with the respective interference contribution parameter. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114431 | Efficient Signaling of Common Reference Signal shifts and Physical Downlink Control Channel Region Mismatch in Coordinated Multipoint Transmission - Information about a set of cells potentially taking part in coordinated multipoint transmission is obtained, information about at least one of reference signal configuration and data region size configuration for each of the set of cells is obtained, further an indication of which of the reference signals configuration and the data region size configuration should be assumed in resource mapping for data is obtained, and data according to the resource mapping is received. Information about at least one of reference signal configuration and data region size configuration for each cell of a set of cells potentially taking part in coordinated multipoint transmission is provided, and an indication of which of the reference signals configuration and the data region size configuration should be assumed in resource mapping for data is provided. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114432 | CONNECTING TO AN EVOLVED PACKET DATA GATEWAY - A user device may receive an access request to access an application provided by a cellular carrier associated with the user device. The user device may use a first type of tunneling protocol to establish a connection, via an evolved packet data gateway (ePDG), to a server that provides the application; determines whether the connection is established using the first type of tunneling protocol; and use a second type of tunneling protocol to establish the connection when the connection is not established using the first type of tunneling protocol. The user device may also use the connection to access the application via the ePDG. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114433 | SCALING FOR FRACTIONAL SYSTEMS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for utilizing scaling factors and/or fractional bandwidth and waveforms for wireless communication. Scaling factors may be utilized to relate aspects of one subsystem with aspects of another subsystem. Embodiments may utilize portions of spectrum that may not be big enough to fit a standard waveform. Scaling factors may be utilized to generate fractional waveforms to fit these portions of spectrum. A fractional subsystem may be generated with respect to a normal subsystem or other fractional subsystem through dilating, or scaling, time, frequency, state, or other aspects of the fractional subsystem with respect to time, frequency, state, or other aspects of the normal subsystem or the other fractional subsystem. The fractional subsystem may be aligned with a normal system at different times and/or different frequencies. Scaling information may be utilized to perform measurements on another subsystem, perform handoffs to another subsystem, perform reselection, align, etc. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114434 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION DURING ALMOST BLANK SUBFRAMES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for communication in a wireless communication network are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes an overlay access node that supports Almost Blank Subframes (ABSs). The overlay access node, such as macro eNB, can receive measurement results from one or more user equipments, including macro user equipments (UEs) and/or pico (UEs), either directly or via an underlay access node, such as a pico eNB. The macro eNB can determine a set of macro UEs that are sufficiently close to the macro eNB for transmission during ABSs with a low transmission power or beamforming without significant interference to the pico UEs. This scheme improves the throughput of transmission between the macro eNB and macro UEs while reducing interference to the pico UEs. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114435 | Almost-Blank Subframe Configuration Detection in Heterogeneous Networks - A method for detecting an Almost-Blank Subframe (ABS) configuration for an interfering macro cell of a heterogeneous network is implemented in a wireless terminal. For one or more resource blocks in a received signal, a first power metric is calculated as a function of channel response estimates determined for predicted cell-specific (or common) reference signal (CRS) resource element locations in a plurality of symbols. For the one or more resource blocks in the received signal, a second power metric is calculated as a function of channel response estimates determined for the predicted CRS resource element locations in a single one of the plurality of symbols. A difference between the first and second power metrics is compared to a threshold, and responsive to the comparison a determination is made as to whether the macro cell is operating in a Multicast and Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) mode or a non-MBSFN mode. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114436 | REVERSE LINK THROUGHPUT MANAGEMENT FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices for increasing reverse link throughput by coordination of multiple wireless systems using reverse link blanking are provided. Some embodiments involve utilizing the bandwidth of one carrier bandwidth that partially overlaps with the bandwidth of another carrier bandwidth. This overlap may create interference. Different indicators may be utilized to prompt a device, such as a mobile device, to coordinate reverse link transmission blanking on at least one of the carrier bandwidths to increase throughput for the other overlapping carrier bandwidth. For example, a base station may transmit such an indicator to the mobile device to prompt the transmission blanking. Some embodiments also include increasing transmission power for the overlapping carrier bandwidth during the transmission blanking of other carrier bandwidth. Some embodiments utilize flexible carrier bandwidths systems that may utilize portions of spectrum that may not be big enough to fit a normal bandwidth waveform. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114437 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION BY A USER EQUIPMENT USING BLIND DETECTION - In order to cancel any interference due to the second cell signal (e.g., from a non-serving cell) from a signal received at a UE, without receiving additional control information, the UE blindly estimates parameters associated with decoding the second cell signal. This may include determining a metric based on sets of symbols associated with the cell signals in order to determine parameters for the second cell signal, e.g., the transmission mode, modulation format, and/or spatial scheme of the second cell signal. The parameters for the signal may be determined based on a comparison of the metric with a threshold. When a spatial scheme and a modulation format is unknown, the blind estimation may include determining a plurality of constellations of possible transmitted modulated symbols associated with a potential spatial scheme and modulation format combination. Interference cancellation can be performed using the constellations and a corresponding probability weight. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114438 | REFERENCE SIGNAL DETECTION - Aspects of the disclosure are related to identifying whether an apparatus (e.g., base station, access point, etc.) is transmitting using a CRS based transmission scheme or a UE-RS based transmission scheme. Such detection may be necessary for PDSCH interference cancellation (IC) of a neighboring cell since a UE may not know which transmission scheme is used by the neighboring cell. For instance, the UE may know the transmission scheme of the serving cell, but the UE may not know the transmission scheme of a neighboring non-serving cell. As such, aspects of the disclosure provide for a blind detection algorithm to identify or determine a transmission mode or transmission scheme of a neighboring cell to then apply interference cancellation (IC) to an interfering signal received from the neighboring cell. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114439 | AUTOMATIC FRAMING SELECTION - Network traffic is monitored and an optimal framing heuristic is automatically determined and applied. Framing heuristics specify different rules for framing network traffic. While a framing heuristic is applied to the network traffic, alternative framing heuristics are speculatively evaluated for the network traffic. The results of these evaluations are used to rank the framing heuristics. The framing heuristic with the best rank is selected for framing subsequent network traffic. Each client/server traffic flow may have a separate framing heuristic. The framing heuristics may be deterministic based on byte count and/or time or based on traffic characteristics that indicate a plausible point for framing to occur. The choice of available framing heuristics may be determined partly by manual configuration, which specifies which framing heuristics are available, and partly by automatic processes, which determine the best framing heuristic to apply to the current network traffic from the set of available framing heuristics. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114440 | METHOD OF ACCELERATING NETFLOW DATA FILTERING - The invention discloses a method of accelerating netflow data filtering by combining a central processing unit (CPU) with a graphics processing unit (GPU) to reduce energy consumption and the carbon emission. The method comprises the steps of reading a plurality of filter conditions and a part of netflow data in a program of a CPU; transferring the plurality of filter conditions and the part of netflow data from the CPU to a GPU in the display card; applying the plurality of filter conditions to the part of netflow data in a multi-thread kernel program of the GPU to obtain a plurality of filter results; transferring the plurality of filter results from the GPU to the CPU; merging the plurality of filter results to be a total filter result; and repeating the steps until the all data in the large amount of netflow data are filtered. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114441 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION COMPUTATION FOR ENHANCED INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION - A delayed channel estimation is a channel state information (CSI) reference subframe having an index (N | 05-09-2013 |
20130114442 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING CHANNEL BASED ON WEATHER DATA - In a satellite communication system, a central station receives a message including channel measurement information that is provided from a terminal and calculates a channel estimating value based on the received channel measurement information and weather data of a region corresponding to a location of the terminal. The central station determines encoding and modulation methods of data to transmit based on the calculated channel estimating value. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114443 | Layered Multicast and Fair Bandwidth Allocation and Packet Prioritization - Embodiments include an overlay multicast network. The overlay multicast network may provide a set of features to ensure reliable and timely arrival of multicast data. The embodiments include a congestion control system that may prioritize designated layers of data within a data stream over other layers of the same data stream. Each data stream transmitted over the network may be given an equal share of the bandwidth. Addressing in routing tables maintained by routers in the may utilize summarized addressing based on the difference in location of the router and destination address. Summarization levels may be adjusted to minimize travel distances for packets in the network. Data from high priority data stream layers may also be retransmitted upon request from a destination machine to ensure reliable delivery of data. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114444 | Methods and Systems for Scheduling in a Virtual MIMO Communication Environment - A system and method for scheduling cooperative uplink transmissions in a virtual multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication environment are provided. More specifically, both random and channel aware orthogonal scheduling techniques for identifying a sub-set of N mobile terminals to provide cooperative uplink transmissions for each transmit time interval are provided. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114445 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING BUFFER STATUS REPORT IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The invention proposes a method and an apparatus for transmitting a buffer status report in a wireless network, where a user equipment is configured with a plurality of component carriers, the user equipment obtains an amount of data to be transmitted after respective media access layer protocol data units corresponding to the respective component carriers are generated, generates the uplink buffer status report message according to the amount of data to be transmitted, and reports the uplink buffer status report message to a base station serving the user equipment. The invention address the problem of how to report buffer status information when there are a plurality of media access layer protocol data units in a transport time interval. With the solution of the invention, the base station can definitively know how many uplink resources can be allocated for the user equipment to guarantee more efficient scheduling. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114446 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEMS FOR MINIMIZATION OF DRIVE TESTS (MDT) BASED ON QOS VERIFICATIONS - A method of managing one or more test measurements associated with a communication system using a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is disclosed. The method includes receiving, by the WTRU, a measurement configuration including at least a trigger indicating a condition or event for initiation of the one or more test measurements; determining, by the WTRU, whether the trigger has been satisfied, as a determination result; initiating the one or more test measurements in accordance with the determination result; and measuring, by the WTRU, the one or more test measurements. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114447 | INCREMENTAL INTERFERENCE CANCELATION CAPABILITY AND SIGNALING - Incremental interference cancelation (IC) capability management and signaling is disclosed. A mobile device selects certain groups of its individual IC capabilities to deactivate in response to various operating conditions it is experiencing. The mobile device reports its currently active IC capability to a serving base station, which uses information to determine whether to modify any existing communication conditions with respect to the reporting mobile device. The base station detects and analyzes the current communication conditions with respect to the reporting mobile device in light of the mobile device's currently active IC capabilities. The base station may modify such conditions through actions such as signaling the mobile device to activate or deactivate certain other groups of IC capabilities. The base station can make other modifications such as changing the communication schedule for the mobile device, modifying the control loop for channel quality indicator (CQI) reporting, and the like. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114448 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is an apparatus for transmitting data in a communication system, including: a depacketizer configured to receive loss information on a data packet and congestion information on the channel from a terminal receiving the data packet through the channel; a frame assembly configured to confirm a congestion situation predictor from the congestion information and frame-aggregate data transmitted to the terminal according to the congestion situation predictor; a redundancy controller configured to confirm a data packet loss predictor from the loss information and generate redundancy data of the data according to the data packet loss predictor; and a packetizer configured to transmit the frame aggregated data and the redundancy data, with being included in the data packet. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114449 | HANDLING MISMATCH OF CONTROL SPANS BETWEEN SERVING CELL AND INTERFERING CELLS FOR CONTROL AND DATA CHANNEL INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - The following is directed to control and data channel interference cancellation between a serving cell and interfering cell. A first symbol of a subframe is processed to determine a control span of a serving cell and a control span of an interfering cell. The interference is then cancelled based on the determined control spans. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114450 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROXIMITY DETECTION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods, apparatus, and computer-program products for the detection of potentially interfering or interfering user equipment (UE) in the proximity of a detecting entity. The detecting entity may be a base station or a UE. In an aspect, the proposed detecting scheme utilizes semi-static system information from one or more neighboring base stations (BSs), and identifies a neighbor BS's UE that causes interference in the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH). The proposed detecting scheme may also identify corresponding resources that are allocated to an interfering UE by the interfering neighbor base station. In aspects, detecting schemes may not utilize information from one or more neighboring BSs. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114451 | INTRA-CELL AND INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE MITIGATION METHODS FOR ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY-DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS CELLULAR NETWORKS - Various embodiments of a method of mitigating interference in an OFDMA cellular network and a user terminal incorporating various of the embodiments. In one embodiment, the method includes: (1) selecting at least one dominant interfering signal, (2) generating estimates of a desired signal and the at least one dominant interfering signal, (3) jointly deciding based on the estimates such that an energy of a residual error is reduced and (4) mitigating interference based on the estimates. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114452 | NETWORK ACCESS MECHANISM BASED ON POWER - Systems and methods for accessing a contention-based communications network are provided. In systems and methods for accessing a contention-based communications network, an access point in the network is created. The access point is a first node connected to the network configured to receive a request from a second node to gain access to the network. A power of a signal transmitted between the access point and the second node is measured. A probability that the second node will access the network is determined based on the measured power of the signal transmitted between the access point and the second node. A determination of whether to permit the second node to gain access to the network is made based on the determined probability. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114453 | Method Applied to Receiver of Wireless Network for Frequency Offset and Associated Apparatus - A method applied to a receiver of a wireless network in response to frequency offset is provided. Upon receiving a preamble, a reference symbol is provided according to a long training symbol in the preamble, and a frequency domain transform is performed on the reference symbol to generate a corresponding reference spectrum. A correlation calculation is performed on the reference spectrum and a predetermined spectrum to provide a first frequency offset. The preamble is carried by a plurality of different sub-carrier frequencies, with a frequency difference between neighboring sub-carrier frequencies being equal to a sub-carrier frequency space. The first frequency offset is an integral multiple of the sub-carrier frequency space. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114454 | Minimization of Drive Tests for Uplink Link Coverage - A method of using additional uplink measurements for MDT UL coverage is provided. A base station (eNodeB) establishes a radio resource control (RRC) connection with a user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication network. The eNodeB and the UE are configured for Minimization of Drive Test (MDT). The eNodeB receives a Power Headroom Report (PRH) corresponds to a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) from the UE, and forwards the PHR to an MDT server. The eNodeB performs uplink measurement of a Demodulation Reference Signal (DM-RS) allocated in the PUSCH. The uplink measurement also involves measuring an uplink Received Interference Power (RIP) associated with the PUSCH. The eNodeB then reports uplink measurement results to the MDT server. The MDT server is able to determine uplink coverage based on the PHR and the uplink measurement results. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114455 | USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATIONS, AND METHODS ALLOWING FOR HANDLING OF COLLIDING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REPORTS - Collision handling of channel state information (CSI) reports is described for enhanced inter-cell interference coordination (eICIC), coordinated multipoint transmission (CoMP), and/or carrier aggregation (CA). Various aspects include prioritization schemes to resolve collisions between different CSI reporting sets in relation to the same component carrier (CC) used with transmission. Multiple stages of prioritization may identify CSI for a report based on various criteria. Tie breaker criteria may be defined for priority among CSI reports that changes for different subframes. In other aspects, PUSCH is utilized to transmit CSI for prioritized reporting sets in a subframe. In yet other aspects, if parallel PUCCH is supported, colliding CSI may be handled on a per PUCCH basis. Other aspects may allow for prioritizing periodic CSI within each of multiple CCs, and then prioritizing over different CCs to handle an interaction of CSI reports for CA, eICIC and/or CoMP. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114456 | QUALITY OF SERVICE DETERMINATION BASED ON UPSTREAM CONTENT SOURCE - Systems and methods for providing trigger based dynamic changes to a packet flow in a communication network are described. The trigger based dynamic changes can include upgrading and downgrading quality of service (QoS), processing the packet flow, and providing services to the packet flow. These changes can be provided by inspecting packets at a gateway for trigger conditions and setting up a proxy instance for the packet flows. The proxy can coordinate QoS changes and management of packet flows. The triggers can be based on the destination of the packet, for example, the uniform resource locator (URL) and/or by the services (e.g., email, video, messaging) that the subscriber is accessing. The triggers can also be based on the identity of the user or agreements a provider might have with an operator of network equipment for users accessing the provider's website. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114457 | Method for Reporting Power Headroom Report and User Equipment - The present invention discloses a method for reporting a power headroom report and a user equipment, which are applied in the field of communications. The method includes triggering reporting of a first power headroom report and determining that a condition of sending the first power headroom report is satisfied. The condition of sending the first power headroom report includes a determination that uplink data channel transmission occurs in a current transmission time interval. The first power headroom report is obtained. The first power headroom report includes a first power headroom value that includes a difference between maximum transmitting power of a carrier and a sum of transmitting power of a control channel of the carrier and transmitting power of a data channel of the carrier. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114459 | METHOD FOR CALIBRATING ANTENNA RECIPROCITY IN A BASE STATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK AND A DEVICE THEREOF - The present invention provides a method and device for calibrating antenna reciprocity via OTA in a base station of wireless network, and the method comprises: determining, based on a predefined rule, a plurality of calibrating UEs out of a plurality of UEs, and antennas, to be calibrated by the plurality of calibrating UEs, of the plurality of base stations, wherein the plurality of calibrating UEs are configured to calibrate antennas of the plurality of base stations; and calibrating, according to the determined calibration relationship, the antennas reciprocity of the plurality of base stations based on the plurality of calibrating UEs. With the method of present invention, communication channel model can be calibrated effectively so as to enhance antenna reciprocity in CoMP scenario. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114460 | Technique for Packet Flow Analysis - A technique for generating or updating a user profile based on a packet flow in a communications network from a user terminal to a destination address is described. A method implementation of this technique comprises receiving, by a Policy Control and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) from a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF), at least one item of information indicative of at least one of the destination address and a service provided at the destination address to the user terminal. Based on this item of information, a user profile for a user associated with the user terminal is generated or updated. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114461 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION IN A MULTIPLE CARRIER SYSTEM - Provided are an apparatus and method for transmitting uplink control information (UCI) in a multiple carrier system. The method comprises the steps of: generating uplink control information for measuring a downlink component carrier (DL CC) set in a terminal; selecting a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) of one uplink component carrier from among PUSCHs of at least two uplink component carriers set in the terminal, according to a priority order; and transmitting the uplink control information through the PUSCH of the selected uplink component carrier. | 05-09-2013 |
20130121171 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING AN END TIME OF UPLINK BACK PROPAGATION - The invention provides a method and a system for determining an end time of uplink back propagation in a mobile communication system to solve a problem of accurately judging the end time of uplink back propagation, wherein the method includes the following steps: sending data with consecutive sequence numbers in a buffer of a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) module to a serving gateway (S-GW) via an S1 tunnel; sending data with inconsecutive sequence numbers, which is from data with a first inconsecutive sequence number to last data in the buffer of the PDCP module, to a target base station via an uplink back propagation tunnel; generating an end marker datagram; sending the end marker datagram to the target base station via the uplink back propagation tunnel; and receiving, by the target base station, the end marker datagram and determining that the uplink back propagation has ended. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121172 | POWER SAVINGS BASED WIRELESS TRAFFIC CONTROLLER FOR MOBILE DEVICES - Aspects of the present disclosure provide methods for power saving at a mobile station by a software module. A software module, residing between an application subsystem and a modem of a mobile station, may buffer uplink data to create power savings in an efficient and dynamic manner. During power saving, the software module may buffer data during modem unavailable intervals and may transmit the buffered data during the modem available intervals. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121173 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING DISTANCE IN A WI-FI NETWORK - A method and apparatus for improving the accuracy of a round trip time (RTT) estimate between a first device and a second device are disclosed. The method involves calculating an acknowledgement correction factor and a unicast correction factor. These correction factors are used to compensate for symbol boundary time errors resulting from multipath effects. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121174 | Methods and Apparatus for Managing Network Signaling - Systems and apparatus for managing signaling of channel state information. A user equipment performs channel state information measurements in measurement subframes. The user equipment receives an uplink triggering grant from a base station, with the uplink triggering grant specifying a measurement subframe for which channel state information is to be reported. The channel state information triggering uplink grant specifies a measurement subframe at least a designated number of subframes back from an uplink communication subframe in which the channel state information is to be reported. At the uplink communication subframe corresponding to the channel state information triggering uplink grant, the user equipment reports the channel state information measured at the specified measurement subframe. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121175 | MITIGATING EFFECTS OF PREDICTED FAILURES IN A MOBILE NETWORK BASESTATION DUE TO WEATHER - Basestation equipment in a mobile data network is subject to harsh environmental conditions at many remote locations. International Business Machines Corporation (IBM) has introduced a Mobile Internet Optimization Platform (MIOP) appliance, referred herein as the MIOP@NodeB. This appliance is placed at the edge or basestation of a mobile data network to provide a platform for hosting applications and enhancing mobile network services. The introduction of an edge appliance provides a platform for additional reliability functions. A predictive failure mechanism in the basestation appliance mitigates the effects of predicted failures in a mobile network basestation due to weather conditions. The predictive failure mechanism considers historical data, ambient environmental conditions, weather alerts and weather forecasts to take pre-emptive action to avert partial or total failure of the basestation equipment. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121176 | COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR ENERGY-HARVESTING DEVICES - In one embodiment, an energy-harvesting communication device of a communication network accumulates energy, e.g., electromagnetic energy. Upon detecting that the accumulated energy surpasses a sufficient threshold, the communication device may transmit a message into the communication network using the accumulated energy as an unreliable and unsynchronized broadcast transmission to any available receiver within the communication network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121177 | ALERT-TRIGGERED RECORDING OF SPECTRUM DATA - Techniques are described for alert-triggered recording spectrum data. In one embodiment, a method comprises determining whether network performance for one or more communications channels of a wireless network is below a threshold. In response to determining that the network performance for the one or more communications channels of the wireless network is below the threshold, recording of spectrum data for energy on the one or more communications channels of the wireless network is initiated. In an embodiment, determining whether network performance is below a threshold comprises determining whether the quality of at least one communications channel is below a threshold. In another embodiment, determining whether network performance is below a threshold comprises determining whether one or more network parameters monitored on one or more network elements indicate that network performance is below a threshold. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121178 | ROUTING COMMUNICATIONS BASED ON LINK QUALITY - A node may determine a link quality between the node and multiple neighbor nodes. For each of the multiple neighbor nodes, the node compares the determined link quality between the node and each respective neighbor node to a predetermined threshold quality. If the link quality meets the predetermined threshold quality, the node may qualify the link and add the link to a list of qualified links that meet the threshold link quality. The node may then route communications to neighbor nodes with which the node has a qualified link. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121179 | ENHANCED TRANSPORT FORMAT COMBINATION IDENTIFIER SELECTION TO IMPROVE TD-SCDMA HSUPA THROUGHPUT - In time division-synchronous code division multiple access high speed uplink packet access (TD-SCDMA HSUPA) communications, a user equipment may select a enhanced physical uplink channel (E-PUCH) modulation scheme based on allocated radio resources. Selection of the modulation scheme is configured to avoid ambiguity at the base station as to which modulation type is selected. Ambiguity may arise in certain communication conditions. Those conditions may be determined and avoided to avoid the ambiguity at the base station. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121180 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO SELECT AN ACCESS POINT - A method and apparatus of selecting at least one access point (AP) enable a user terminal to wirelessly communicate efficiently. The method includes sensing a plurality of APs connectible to the user terminal, measuring a network access speed indicating a speed of transmitting and receiving data between the user terminal and an external device over a network with respect to each of the plurality of APs, and selecting the at least one AP based on the measured network access speed. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121181 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A transmission control method performed in a communication apparatus, the transmission control method including: receiving a packet from a counterparty apparatus, measuring a quality of communication with the counterparty apparatus and the fluctuation amount of the quality, controlling a transmission so as to transmit a packet to the counterparty apparatus when the fluctuation amount is relatively large in accordance with a first level and the quality is relatively high in accordance with a second level, and not to transmit a packet to the counterparty apparatus when the fluctuation amount is relatively large in accordance with the first level and the quality is relatively low in accordance with the second level. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121182 | BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station including: a first antenna for a first wireless communication, a second antenna for a second wireless communication, and a processor to receive a request from a registered mobile terminal that is registered with the base station, to communicate with the registered mobile terminal by using the first wireless communication in accordance with the request, and to control a non-registered mobile terminal that is not registered with the base station, so as to communicate with the base station by using the second wireless communication, when the non-registered mobile terminal communicates with the base station by using the first wireless communication and a condition of a communication performed by the base station is not satisfied. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121183 | DATA BUFFERING - A method is disclosed for bridging between a first data link carrying data units of a first data protocol and a second data link for carrying data units of a second protocol by means of a bridging device. This method may comprise receiving by means of a first interface entity data units of a first protocol, and storing those data units in the memory. Then, accessing by means of a protocol processing entity the protocol data of data units stored in the memory and thereby performing protocol processing for those data units under the first protocol. The method also accesses by means of a second interface entity the traffic data of data units stored in the memory and thereby transmits that traffic data over the second data link in data units of the second data protocol. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121184 | Method and Apparatus For Controlling Power of Mobile Station - A method, including making one or more measurements at a mobile device of path loss for a transmission between said mobile device and a base station in a first frequency band of a plurality of frequency bands in which the mobile device is configured to make transmissions to said base station; receiving at said mobile device path loss estimate information specifying an estimate of the relationship between said path loss for a transmission between said mobile device and said base station in said first frequency band, and path loss for a transmission between said mobile device and said base station in a second frequency band of said plurality of frequency bands; and determining a transmission power for at least one transmission to said base station in said second frequency band on the basis of at least said one or more measurements and said path loss estimate information. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121185 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH LARGE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - A base station and mobile station are configured to perform control beam association. A method at the base station includes transmitting at least one first control beam including reference signals on which the mobile station can perform a measurement. The method also includes receiving a first measurement report from the mobile station of the at least one first control beam. The method further includes, based on the first measurement report, selecting at least one of the at least one first control beam for at least one control channel for the mobile station to associate with. The method still further includes transmitting control information in the at least one control channel to the mobile station using the at least one selected control beam, the control information comprising at least one resource allocation indication for the mobile station. The at least one selected control beam is associated to the mobile station. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121186 | UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSION WITH INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Systems and methods providing uplink coordinated multi-point (CoMP) communication are shown. A second cell may identify at least one first UE communicating with a first cell and capable of causing high uplink interference to the second cell. The second cell may estimate uplink interference from the at least one first UE at the second cell. The second cell may estimate uplink interference on specific resources. For example, the second cell may determine resources assigned to the at least one first UE for data transmission to the first cell (e.g., using pre-scheduling information provided by the first cell) and estimate uplink interference from the at least one first UE on the resources assigned to the at least one first UE. The second cell may schedule at least one second UE for uplink data transmission to the second cell based on the estimated uplink interference from the at least one first UE. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121187 | COMPUTATION OF MEASUREMENT METRICS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for computing measurement metrics in a wireless communications network are provided. One example method generally includes obtaining a channel impulse response (CIR) from one or more reference signals (RSs) transmitted from one or more antennas of a base station (BS); calculating an absolute square per element of the CIR to generate channel energy response (CER) elements; calculating a threshold value based on a noise variance estimated from a portion of the CER elements; selecting CER elements that exceed the threshold value; and computing a reference signal received power (RSRP) value based on the selected CER elements. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121188 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for estimating a frequency offset of a local oscillator using primary synchronization signal (PSS) and secondary synchronization signal (SSS) while initially acquiring a long term evolution (LTE) signal. In certain aspects, a frequency offset estimation procedure may include PSS-based frequency offset estimation and SSS-based frequency offset refinement. The PSS-based frequency offset estimation may include determining a suitable reference PSS and using the ascertained reference PSS to estimate a PSS-based frequency offset. The SSS-based frequency offset refinement may include determining a suitable reference SSS using the PSS based frequency offset and using the ascertained reference SSS to refine PSS-based frequency offset from the PSS-based frequency offset estimation. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121189 | Supporting Different LTE-TDD Configurations in Neighboring Regions and/or Adjacent Carriers - When communications of a single radio access technology (RAT), or different radio access technologies in a proximate communication spectrum are operating at the same time, potential interference between devices may occur. To reduce the interference, the time division duplex (TDD) configuration of one or more conflicting device may be altered. For example, at the edge of a communication region, TDD configurations used by edge base stations to communicate with mobile devices may be set to reduce interference. As another example, communications of a first device may be altered so the first device schedules uplink communications when a second device also has uplink communications scheduled. Other configurations may also be implemented. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121190 | WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE AND AUTOMATIC PARAMETER SETTING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless network device and an automatic parameter setting method thereof are provided. The device includes a wireless communication module and an operation module. The wireless communication module is used for transmitting a test signal to a wireless device according to a wireless communication protocol, and receiving an ACK frame transmitted by the wireless device. The operation module is electrically connected to the wireless communication module, and is used for calculating one half of a sum of a minimum transmission time and a maximum transmission time, setting the half of the sum as an ACK timeout interval of the wireless communication module, analyzing whether the ACK frame is obtained within the ACK timeout interval so as to determine whether to use the ACK timeout interval as the maximum transmission time or the minimum transmission time, and recalculating the ACK timeout interval. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121191 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING INTERFERENCE IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Certain aspects relate to methods and apparatus for reducing interference in a heterogeneous network. Certain aspects relate to methods and apparatus for delinking downlink and uplink resource partitioning in a heterogeneous network. In aspects, the delinking is accomplished by reliably delivering uplink grant to a UE, e.g., pico UE in a pico CRE region, without using downlink Almost Blank Subframe (ABS) resources in which an interfering cell limits transmission to reduce interference to other victim cells. In techniques, instead of using the regular PDCCH sent in downlink ABS resources for uplink grant transmission, the uplink grant is sent on another more reliable downlink control channel using resources configured to avoid interference with transmissions from an interfering base station. In techniques, the DL grant is sent on PDCCH in non-downlink ABS resources, but the UE employs enhanced UE capabilities (e.g., interference cancellation) to process the received control information. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121192 | MEASURING MESSAGE STREAM QUALITY ACROSS NETWORKS - Service message streams are sent to create sent service messages from a source across networks to a destination and receive responses to the sent service messages to create an estimate of the jitter in the travel time and a packet loss measurement at each device traversed between the source and destination. Communication with the service provider of one of the devices may estimate the quality of service across each device based upon the jitter estimate and packet loss measurement, and possibly also based upon the service message type and/or the message rate. Multiple sources may be operated at multiple sites within an enterprise. The service provider may operate agents at the source and destination to estimate two-way quality of service. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121193 | Device-Based Architecture for Self Organizing Networks - Techniques to self-optimize a network are disclosed. The link quality of a communications link is assessed to determine if a predetermined link quality level is satisfied. If the link quality level is not satisfied, a link adaptation routine is employed to optimize the communications link. In the event the link adaptation routine fails to optimize the communications link to the predetermined link quality level, a power control routine to adapt signal power is employed. In this way, interference between the link adaptation and power control routines is minimized. The link quality assessment may take into account user profile, application profile, and mobile terminal characteristics. Similarly, the link quality assessment may take into account radio conditions such as air interface, cellular sector and core network characteristics. In turn, the communications terminal may transmit communications link characteristics to the cellular sector to enable the cellular sector to self optimize. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121194 | Method and apparatus for locally optimizing wireless operation in mobile devices - Location profile is used as a way of optimizing power consumption of communication devices such as mobile handsets and smart phones which tend to have facilities for multiple wireless methods for communication. This is done by correlating the availability of the wireless signals to the specific zones in the user location profile. The method learns the wireless environment of each zone and subsequently while the device is detected to be in the same zone, intelligently prioritizes use of different communication methods for that zone, and turns off all unnecessary communication options, thereby reducing power consumption. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121195 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR INTEGRATING BATCH SCHEDULING WITH EXTERNAL BEAMFORMING - Methods and systems for simultaneous determination of channel resource allocations and beam vectors for uplink frames are disclosed. One method includes receiving batch information from client devices indicating amounts of data to be transmitted on the uplink by the client devices. Further, signal quality can be measured on channel resources for each of the client devices and for each of a plurality of beam vectors. Additionally, rate information for the channel resources for each of the client devices is determined based on signal quality measurements. Moreover, the method includes computing, based on the batch information and the rate information, utilities for allocations of the channel resources to the client devices and for the beam vectors for at least one uplink frame and selecting, based on the utilities, at least one of the beam vectors and at least one of the allocations for transmission of the data on the uplink frame(s). | 05-16-2013 |
20130121196 | Link Supportability in a WCDMA Communications System - A method, computer program product, and system are provided for computing link supportability in a WCDMA communications system. For example, the method can be used to calculate link supportability of a transponder in satellite communications system (e.g. MUOS) in a user-to-base direction. This method can include expressing a carrier signal to noise ratio spectral density for a communication link of interest in terms of a transponder input power of the communication link of interest, a spectral overlap factor representative of one or more interfering communication links, and a transponder input power of the one or more interfering communication links. Assumptions and approximations can be made to simplify the spectral density expression in order to reduce a dimensionality of terms used in the computation of the expression. As such, in reducing dimensionality, the expression becomes a manageable computation for WCDMA communication systems to evaluate. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121197 | Mobile WLAN Gateway - This disclosure provides a technique for operating a mobile station as a wireless local-area network (WLAN) gateway. The mobile station is provided with a gateway application to control the following operations: activating a WLAN circuitry of the mobile station as a WLAN base station capable of communicating with at least one WLAN terminal over a WLAN network; creating a network identifier for the WLAN base station; assigning an internet protocol address for the at least one WLAN terminal; resolving domain name service (DNS) queries in cooperation with an external DNS service system; assigning at least one port number for each protocol supported by the gateway application; and tunneling internet traffic between the at least one WLAN terminal and an internet host over the broadband connection. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121198 | METHOD, EQUIPMENT FOR SUBMITTING A MEASUREMENT REPORT - A method, relevant equipment and system for determining a User Equipment (UE) or UEs affecting a neighboring cell are disclosed. The method for determining UE or UEs affecting a neighboring cell includes: receiving load information sent by a neighboring cell, where the load information indicates an interfered Physical Resource Block (PRB) of the neighboring cell; determining a UE or UEs that occupy, when scheduling is performed, the interfered PRB; determining UEs located in an Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC) measurement area corresponding to the neighboring cell; and obtaining an intersection of the UE or UEs that occupy, when scheduling is performed, the interfered PRB and the UE or UEs located in the ICIC measurement area corresponding to the neighboring cell. The technical solution under the present invention enables accurate determining of the UE or UEs that affect the neighboring cell. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121199 | MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATIONS WITH ADAPTIVE CLUSTER CONFIGURATION AND SWITCHING - A method and apparatus for allocating subcarriers in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system is described. In one embodiment, the method comprises allocating at least one diversity cluster of subcarriers to a first subscriber and allocating at least one coherence cluster to a second subscriber. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121200 | MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATIONS WITH ADAPTIVE CLUSTER CONFIGURATION AND SWITCHING - A method and apparatus for allocating subcarriers in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system is described. In one embodiment, the method comprises allocating at least one diversity cluster of subcarriers to a first subscriber and allocating at least one coherence cluster to a second subscriber. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121201 | INCREASING THROUGHPUT BY ADAPTIVELY CHANGING PDU SIZE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS UNDER LOW SNR CONDITIONS - Feedback indicates low signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) conditions for a wireless communications link between a transmitter device and a receiver device. After attempting to achieve a target packet error rate (PER) by increasing transmission power for the wireless communications link, the transmitter device receives feedback that indicates a current PER, for data transmitted using an initial automatic repeat request (ARQ) block size, is above the target PER for the receiver device, and changes, based on the feedback, the current ARQ block size to a different ARQ block size for the wireless communications link. The different ARQ block size may be adaptively selected to provide a maximum PDU size that achieves the target PER at the receiver device under the low SNR conditions. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121202 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A CIR measuring section measures CIRs of all blocks received and a block selection section makes a threshold decision based on the CIR measurement result and threshold information according to an amount of traffic in the own cell and neighboring cells. As a result of the threshold decision, blocks whose CIRs exceed the threshold are regarded as usable blocks. A CIR averaging section averages the CIRs of the usable blocks and a CQI generation section generates a CQI based on the CIR average value. The CQI generated and selected block numbers are reported to a base station apparatus. This allows the throughput of the own cell and neighboring cells to be improved. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121203 | Apparatus and Method of Reporting Power Headroom in Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus of reporting a power headroom in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment determines a power headroom based on a configured transmit power and transmits a power headroom report to a base station. The power headroom report includes a power headroom level indicating the power headroom and a backoff indicator indicating whether the user equipment applies power backoff due to power management. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121204 | METHOD FOR ALLOWING TERMINAL TO REPORT MEASUREMENT RESULT FOR MDT TO BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention provides a method for a terminal to report the measurement result of a minimization of drive test (MDT) in a wireless communication system. More specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving MDT setup information from said base station; performing cell measurement on the basis of said MDT setup information; storing the result of said cell measurement in an MDT log on the basis of a valid time that precedes as much as the second interval from storage times, at every storage time of a first interval unit that is contained in said MDT setup information; and reporting to said base station the MDT log in which the result of said cell measurement is stored. | 05-16-2013 |
20130128752 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSION DURING A CIRCUIT SWITCHED CALL - Systems and methods are provided for controlling whether non-user initiated polling data is allowed to be transmitted from a wireless device while a circuit switched call is in progress. This can have the effect of reducing call drop rate in systems that suspend handoffs while a packet switched radio access bearer is being established. This behaviour can be made a function of user input or RF conditions. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128753 | Method and System for Optimizing Bandwidth Utilization in an In-Home Network - Methods and systems for optimizing bandwidth utilization in an in-home network may comprise determining usage and/or quality of communication links operating in accordance with first and second communication protocols in a multi-protocol wired and wireless network. Data communication may be routed from a first communication link operating in accordance with the first communication protocol to a second communication link operating in accordance with the second communication protocol, based on the determining. The first communication protocol may comprise a multimedia over cable alliance (MoCA) standard and the second communication protocol may comprise an IEEE 802.11x standard. The determining and routing may be performed by a MoCA network controller. The first communication protocol may comprise an IEEE 802.11x standard and the second communication protocol may comprise a MoCA standard. The rerouting may increase bandwidth usage efficiency and/or data throughput of the network. The determining and rerouting may be performed dynamically. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128754 | POWER-EFFICIENT CHANNEL QUALITY MEASURING METHOD IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN WHICH CARRIER AGGREGATION IS EMPLOYED, AND A DEVICE FOR THE SAME - The present invention relates to a method in which a terminal carries out channel quality measurement in a power-efficient fashion in a mobile communication system in which carrier aggregation is employed. If the terminal supports measurement based on serving cell quality, then an additional judgment is made as to whether the terminal is configured for simultaneous communication with a plurality of serving cells and, if the terminal does support measurement based on serving cell quality and is configured for simultaneous communication with a plurality of serving cells, then a decision is made as to whether the quality-representing value for the plurality of serving cells is at or above a threshold value and, if the quality-representing value for the plurality of serving cells is at or above the threshold value, then a quality measurement is carried out within a limited range taking into account the plurality of serving cells. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128755 | PRESENCE PLATFORM FOR PASSIVE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK-TO- RADIO ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE TRANSITION - Profile-based passive network switching of wireless mobile devices comprises receiving at a wireless access point a device specific identifier beacon transmitted from a mobile device and extracting a device specific identifier from the beacon. The access point then transmits the device specific identifier and access point provider information to a networked server configured with presence network switching software for determining network switching requirements based on the transmitted device specific identifier. The access point then receives mobile device network switching data from the server for processing. The access point then transmits local wireless network authentication and connection information from the access point to the mobile device to facilitate activating a wireless network connection between the mobile device and the access point at which point the access point starts processing wireless communication from the mobile device over the local wireless network. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128756 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL LAYER MEASUREMENTS IN MULTICAST BROADCAST MULTIMEDIA SERVICE SYSTEMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. An apparatus, e.g., user equipment (UE), receives a reporting requirement for one or more Multicast-Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) physical layer parameters. The UE obtains the one or more MBSFN physical layer parameters including at least one parameter corresponding to a reference signal, and creates a report based on the obtained one or more MBSFN physical layer parameters. The UE may obtain the one or more MBSFN physical layer parameters using user-plane or control-plane based mechanisms. The user-plane mechanism involves the use of a modified version of the reporting mechanism for Quality of Experience (QoE) metrics. The control-plane mechanism involves the use of a modified version of the reporting mechanism for the Minimization of Drive Tests (MDT) metrics. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128757 | NON-INTRUSIVE IN-BAND LINK COST ESTIMATION IN MULTIHOP NETWORKS - In a wireless multi-hop network, packet routing paths are determined for a first node device based on passive measurement of data messages over a wireless link formed between the first node device and a neighboring second node device. The first node device transmits a first data message to the second node device via the wireless link. At least one of the first node device and the second node device monitors at least one transmission performance parameter corresponding to only a selected subset of frames of the first data message. The selected subset of frames has structural similarity to selected subsets of frames of other data messages communicated and monitored by other node devices of the network. A link cost associated with the wireless link is determined based on at least one transmission performance parameter value produced as a result of the monitoring, which can be used to update the packet routing paths. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128758 | INTELLIGENT INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT USER DEVICE - An infrastructure management device comprises a processor configured to obtain port status and networking device status for each of one or more physicals networking devices in a system. The device also comprises a display unit coupled to the processor and configured to display one or more virtual networking devices, and a user input element configured to provide user input to the processor. The port status indicates that a cable is inserted into the first port and the processor obtains cable data identifying one or more characteristics of the cable inserted into the first port. The processor is configured to compare the one or more characteristics of the cable inserted into the first port with one or more characteristics defined in the work order. The processor is configured to provide a notification to a user indicating whether the one or more characteristics of the inserted cable comply with the work order. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128759 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPUTING AND REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATION (CQI) - Techniques for computing and reporting channel quality indication (CQI) are described. In an aspect, a plurality of CQI computation methods may be supported, and each CQI computation method may indicate how CQI should be computed. One CQI computation method may be selected for use. CQI may then be computed and reported in accordance with the selected CQI computation method. In an exemplary design, a user equipment (UE) may obtain a selected method for computing CQI, which may be chosen based on the UE capability and/or other factors. The selected method may specify (i) CQI computation for a specific codeword among a plurality of codewords or (ii) CQI computation by averaging signal quality across a plurality of layers used for transmission. The UE may compute CQI in accordance with the selected method, send the CQI to a base station, and receive data sent by the base station based on the CQI. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128760 | DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD USED IN SAID SYSTEM - A distributed antenna system that forms a plurality of communication areas and allows a plurality of terminals to communicate simultaneously, while minimizing variability in the quality of communication among the terminals. Said distributed antenna system: provides one or more logical antenna ports to wireless front-end units provided with remote radio heads (RRHs); forms a plurality of communication areas; determines the terminals that will communicate in each communication area; controls connection between the logical antenna port(s) and the front-end units per communication area; and uses signal-processing devices associated with the logical antenna ports to perform signal processing for each terminal. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128761 | METHOD AND DEVICE WHEREBY BASE STATION ALLOCATES NODES TO TERMINAL IN A SEMI-STATIC FASHION IN MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - The present invention relates to wireless communication, and more specifically, to a method and device whereby a base station allocates nodes to a terminal in a semi-static fashion in a multi-node system. The method, according to one aspect of the present invention, whereby a base station allocates at least a portion of a plurality of nodes to a terminal in a multi-node system comprising the plurality of nodes and the base station for controlling the plurality of nodes, comprises the steps of: receiving, from the terminal, data showing at least one first node that is preferred among the plurality of nodes by the terminal; and transmitting, to the terminal, first data for allocating the first node(s) to the terminal. The first data may comprise pilot data which is required by the terminal in order to transmit, to the base station, feedback data concerning the first node. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128762 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING INTELLIGENT ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for controlling an intelligent antenna system are provided. The method includes: pre-configuring a Request Min Rate (RR), a Request Max PER (RP) and a request TX power (RTP); A). determining a current antenna configuration and a current transmitting power of the intelligent antenna system; B). reducing the transmitting power as long as the packet loss ratio does not exceed the RP with the current antenna configuration and with RR as a current transmitting rate, and adopting a reduced transmitting power as the current transmitting power; and C). switching between different antenna configurations at intervals with the current transmitting rate and the current transmitting power to obtain an antenna configuration under which the packet loss ratio is lower than the current packet loss ratio, and performing B). | 05-23-2013 |
20130128763 | Method and system for interactively selecting auxiliary cell - The disclosure provides a method for interactively selecting an auxiliary cell, which includes: a UE selects a master cell and performs data interaction with the master cell to obtain a neighbour cell list; the UE measures coordinated multiple point status information of a cell in the neighbour cell list, and perform evaluation according to a measurement result to generate a candidate list of coordinated multiple point auxiliary cells; when the UE initiates a coordinated multiple point operation service, the UE sends the candidate list to the master cell; the master cell performs an activation strategy on a cell in the candidate list to obtain an auxiliary cell for the coordinated multiple point operation of the UE, and sends an auxiliary cell activation list to the UE; and the UE maintains the auxiliary cell activation list until the coordinated multiple point operation service ends. The disclosure further provides a system for interactively selecting an auxiliary cell. By means of the method and apparatus above, a preferable neighbour cell can be selected as an auxiliary cell through interaction, and service is quality and user experience in a coordinated multiple point operation is improved. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128764 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SEND BEAMFORMING AND MULTIPLE USER SCHEDULING FOR MULTIPLE SECTOR COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION IN A MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEM - A Tx beamforming method for multi-sector cooperative transmission in a multi-antenna system includes determining a transmission mode of sector boundary users according to a channel condition; determining a multi-sector cooperative Tx beam for supporting multiple users, based on the transmission mode of the user; determining a user combination for multi-sector cooperative beamforming by considering the determined multi-sector cooperative Tx beam; and performing sector cooperative Tx beamforming with the determined user combination. Thus, the overall system capacity can be enhanced. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128765 | CELL MEASUREMENT METHOD AND TERMINAL - A cell measurement method of a User Equipment (UE) is disclosed. The cell measurement method may include receiving a radio resource configuration dedicated Information Element (IE) and a measurement object from a serving cell. The radio resource configuration dedicated IE may include first information about a measurement resource restriction pattern for a first cell and the measurement object may include a neighbor cell configuration IE for indicating MBMS Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) configurations of one or more neighbor cells. The measurement object may further include second information about a resource restriction pattern indicating subframes on which restriction is imposed in Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) or Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ) measurements of one or more neighbor cells and a list of one or more neighbor cells to which the second information is applied. If the MBSFN configurations of the one or more neighbor cells are not known or not explicitly indicated by the neighbor cell configuration IE, the method may further include determining that the subframes indicated by the second information have not been configured as MBSFN subframes for the one or more neighbor cells listed in the list. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128766 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, AND RADIO TERMINAL | 05-23-2013 |
20130128767 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting feedback of a mobile station (MS) in a wireless communication system supporting a multi-carrier operation are provided. The method includes transmitting feedback information to a base station, and in this case, the feedback information is transmitted through a MAC control message and the feedback information includes carrier information of an activation carrier related to the MAC control message. | 05-23-2013 |
20130136011 | System and Method for Integrating Line-Rate Application Recognition in a Switch ASIC - A system and method for integrating line-rate application recognition in a switch ASIC. Switching platforms can be built using this feature with a conventional control plane processor rather than a more expensive specialized processor. A deep packet inspection system can be embodied in a switch ASIC using a flow tracker and a signature matching engine. The flow tracker can be positioned in an ingress portion of the switch ASIC at a location where packets in a bi-direction flow can be observed and recorded. The flow tracker generates a signature match request that is forwarded to a signature matching engine in an auxiliary pipeline. The signature matching engine analyzes packets using signature matching state machine and reports the signature matching results to the flow tracker using a response packet that is sent to the ingress pipeline. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136012 | Method and Network Node - Network node ( | 05-30-2013 |
20130136013 | Handshaking Protocol Using Bursts in OFDMA Frame Structure - One embodiment is directed to a method, apparatus, and/or computer program for reducing interference in a local area radio system. The method may include selecting, by a first network node, time/frequency resources to transmit data, transmitting request to send (RTS) bursts to a second network node on the selected resources, and listening for clear to send (CTS) bursts. The method may further include separating received clear to send bursts, decoding the clear to send bursts received from the second network node, determining whether data is allowed to be transmitted based on the received clear to send bursts, and transmitting the data to the second network node when it is determined that the data can be transmitted. The request to send and/or clear to send bursts may be encoded with orthogonal codes when there are multiple cells in a neighborhood of the first network node and/or the second network node. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136014 | SCANNING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for scanning assigned carriers in a multicarrier system may include receiving a multicarrier advertisement message from a base station, the multicarrier advertisement message including scan reporting trigger control information of assigned secondary carriers, performing scanning for the assigned secondary carriers, and reporting the scan results to the base station when a specific metric measured by the scanning meets a condition set in the scan reporting trigger control information. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136015 | USER EQUIPMENT CARRIER ACTIVATION - In one exemplary embodiment of the invention, a method includes: measuring at least one characteristic of a secondary component carrier to obtain a measurement result, where measuring is performed by an apparatus while the apparatus is in communication with a network via a primary component carrier with a network access node; and in response to the measurement result of the at least one characteristic being below a threshold, and further in response to receiving from the network access node an activation command for the secondary component carrier, considering the secondary component carrier as being undetectable. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136016 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PEER LINK SETTING, AND METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CHANNEL SWITCHING, IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A method and apparatus for configuring mesh peer link and a method and apparatus for switching channel in wireless mesh network are provided. A method of configuring a mesh peer link in a wireless mesh network includes a first mesh station transmitting a mesh peering open frame to a second mesh station, and the first mesh station receiving a mesh peering confirm frame from the second mesh station in response to the mesh peering open frame, wherein the first mesh station and the second mesh station support a very high throughput (VHT), and wherein the mesh peering open frame and the mesh peering confirm frame comprise a VHT capability information element. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136017 | OFDM Communications System - A communications system comprising a base station, and a plurality of terminals served by that base station which may include an ad-hoc network of terminals. Information from the base station or transmitting terminal is transported to the receiving terminals in the form of symbols in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexed format. Each terminal has means for measuring a channel dispersion and rate of phase variation corresponding to multipath signal reception for that terminal and for reporting that dispersion and variation measure to the transmitting station. In response to the channel dispersion and phase change measurements, the base station or transmitting terminal is arranged to provide, for groups of terminals having a similar channel dispersion, respective symbol and prefix lengths on the basis of the dispersion measurement of that group of terminals. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136018 | ACCESS POINT HAVING MULTICHANNEL AND MULTI TRANSMISSION POWER, CELL FORMATION METHOD - Described embodiments provide an access point for forming multiple service zones within a corresponding cell. The access point may include a first access point module and a second access point module. The first access point module may be configured to form a first service zone for first user equipment located at a center area of the cell. The second access point module may be configured to form a second service zone for second user equipment located at an edge area of the cell. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136019 | FIELD WIRELESS SYSTEM - A field wireless system may include a system manager that manages a wireless network including wireless field devices, and a backbone router that performs wireless communication with the wireless field devices. The system manager may include a network configuration collection unit that collects a connection configuration of the wireless network, and a path selection unit that selects relay paths for each of the wireless field devices that is a destination of a packet, based on the collected connection configuration. The backbone router may include a relay information storage unit that stores the selected relay paths, and a packet processing unit that replicates packets, each of which is destined for each of the wireless field devices, by the number of the stored relay paths, the packet processing unit storing information indicating a different relay path in each of the replicated packets. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136020 | METHOD FOR MEASUREMENT OF ASYMMETRIC NETWORK CAPACITIES - Disclosed is a method for achieving efficient and accurate measurement of path capacities of a communication network. The method includes the following steps: (a) transmitting a number of probes from a local node to a remote node over a forward network path, each probe contains at least one probe packet and can elicit the remote node to transmit a number of response packets to the local node over a reverse network path; (b) determine for each response packet a minimum round-trip packet delay between the time transmitting the probe and the time receiving the response packet; (c) calculate a number of pair-wise minimum delay differences from the minimum round-trip packet delays. The number of pair-wise minimum delay differences can be used as a measurement of the forward capacity, reverse capacity, faster-path capacity, slower-path capacity and a degree of capacity asymmetry between the local node and the remote node. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136021 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR SELECTIVELY RESETTING AND TRANSFERRING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CHANNEL - The present disclosure presents methods and apparatuses for selective channel reset. For example, the disclosure describes example methods that may include determining that a candidate cell exhibits superior communication properties on a carrier than does a serving cell. In an aspect, this carrier may correspond to an active serving cell channel. The example methods may also include adding a reset flag to a channel reconfiguration message based on the determining, where the reset flag instructs a user equipment to reset a subset of a set of channels associated with the serving cell and the subset includes the channel. Furthermore, example methods may include transmitting the channel reconfiguration message, for example, to a user equipment. Thus, a specified subset of channels associated with the user equipment may be reset, which reduces the signaling load, complexity, and power drain associated with legacy channel reset methods and apparatuses. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136022 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LINK ADAPTATION FOR VARIABLE LINK CONDITIONS - Systems, apparatus, methods, and manufactures for performing link adaptation in a communications system are described. The methods may employ an error rate table that has a channel condition value dimension and a transmission parameter dimension. The elements of the error rate table include expected error rates for data transmitted at various channel conditions according to various transmission parameters. Also, the various transmission parameters may each be associated with a data transmission rate. For a given channel condition value, the methods may determine expected throughputs for each of the transmission parameters according to the associated expected error rates and data transmission rates. A transmission parameter may be selected according to the expected throughputs. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136023 | FACILITATING NOISE ESTIMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Providing for noise estimation in wireless communication, and particularly for access request signals transmitted by a user equipment (UE), is described herein. By way of example, a wireless signal receiver can employ unused signal dimensions of a wireless network for noise estimation. In addition, the unused signal dimensions can be selected for time-frequency resources that are associated with a particular wireless channel, in order to obtain a noise estimate for that channel. By employing unused signal dimensions, a noise measurement is likely to include no other signal transmissions, and provide an accurate estimate of noise on that channel. According to various aspects of the subject disclosure, one or more Chu sequences employed for signal transmissions, root sequences thereof, or one or more cyclic shifts of a root sequence can be employed for the unused signal dimension. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136024 | POWER CONTROL ARRANGEMENT FOR LONG TERM EVOLUTION TIME DIVISION DUPLEX METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide methods, systems and apparatuses for optimizing downlink path loss (PL) measurements in time division duplex (TDD) systems enabling fast power control targeting to decrease fading margin. In one embodiment, a method of power control in a long term evolution time division duplex (TDD) system is provided. The method includes controlling a length of a path loss measurement filter based on an allocation type. A width and frequency position of the path loss measurement filter is made dependent on the allocation type. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136025 | SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS (RANS) CONVERGENCE AND METHOD THEREOF - Provided are a system for implementing multiple Radio Access Networks (RANs) convergence and a method thereof in the present invention. The method includes: an anchor RAN establishes a connection with a User Equipment (UE); the anchor receives a RAB establishment request from a Core Network (CN); the anchor RAN selects an auxiliary RAN; the anchor RAN sends quality of service (QoS) parameters to the auxiliary RAN, so that the auxiliary RAN establishes a connection with the UE according to the QoS parameters, while the anchor RAN keep the connection with the UE. With the methods provided in embodiments for the present invention, multiple RANs convergence is implemented, and the UE establishes connections with the anchor RAN and the auxiliary RAN at the same time, so as to improve the peak rate of the UE. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136026 | CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION FEEDBACK TECHNIQUES FOR A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Channel quality information feedback techniques for a wireless system are described. An apparatus may comprise a base station having base station logic to determine a channel quality indicator feedback dimension value representing a number of resource blocks for an orthogonal frequency division multiple access system to be measured by a subscriber station based on a matching ratio value, and a transceiver to send the channel quality indicator feedback dimension value to the subscriber station. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136027 | MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION, CELL RECEPTION QUALITY MEASURING METHOD AND CELL RECEPTION QUALITY MEASURING SYSTEM - Disclosed is a technique for providing a mobile terminal and the like capable of reducing inter-cell interference between a macro cell and a small cell, suppressing frequent switching of a primary cell in carrier aggregation, and hence reducing an increase in the processing load on a base station and an increase in the power consumption of the terminal. According to the technique, there are included a receiving unit | 05-30-2013 |
20130136028 | Automatic Guard Period Adjustment in a Base Station for Time Division Duplexed Wireless Communications - The present invention is directed to a method for adjusting a guard period in a base station for a cellular wireless communication system. The base station is adapted to communicate in a frame structure comprising a downlink frame followed by the guard period followed by an uplink frame. The method comprises the following steps: measuring interference in dependence on time from at least one interfering base station; and adjusting an uplink frame start time within the frame structure in dependence on the measured interference. The invention also relates to a base station, a network management entity, a computer program product and a method for operating the network entity. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136029 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOW TRANSMISSION POWER CELL BASE STATION, MACROCELL BASE STATION, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND LOAD DISTRIBUTION METHOD - A macrocell base station controls to reduce interference between cells by a downlink signal of the macrocell base station with specific timing, the interference which a downlink signal of a low transmission power cell suffers for a wireless terminal. A low transmission power cell base station decides measurement timing with which the wireless terminal measures reception quality of the low transmission power cell based on information about the specific timing, and sends a setting message including a parameter according to the measurement timing to the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal measures reception quality with the measurement timing indicated by the parameter, and when the wireless terminal satisfies a condition for executing an event based on the measured result, the wireless terminal sends a reception quality measurement message including information indicating that the measurement is made with the measurement timing to the low transmission power cell base station. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142053 | METHOD AND AN APPARATUS TO OPTIMIZE MONITORING FOR A NEW EMBMS SESSION IN LTE NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus is configured to monitor for a notification of MCCH information change associated with an MBSFN area without having previously performed an MCCH information acquisition procedure to acquire MCCH information in the MBSFN area. Furthermore, the apparatus is configured to acquire the MCCH information while monitoring for the notification of the MCCH information change that indicates a change of MCCH information. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142054 | METHODS FOR OPERATING WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICES IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION NETWORKS - A coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission radio network is provided. Each cell in the CoMP network may include antenna nodes distributed at different geographical locations and coupled to a common baseband processing unit via an optical fiber link. When operating a user device in the CoMP network, the device may register with a neighboring baseband unit and may be served using at least one antenna node. The device may continuously receive reference signals from different antenna nodes in its vicinity and compute receive signal strength levels. The device may report the measurements to the corresponding baseband unit. The baseband unit may then switch appropriate antennas in/out of use based on the measured results. If desired, the device may be served using more than one antenna node that may or may not be part of the same cell (e.g., the device may be served using antenna nodes coupled to different baseband units). | 06-06-2013 |
20130142055 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PRESERVING APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ON HANDOVER IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods preserve application identification information on handover in a communication network. End user quality of experience is improved by determining applications associated with communications to and from the end user. The applications may include application classes and specific applications. The application information is used to schedule packets such that the end user quality of experience is improved for that application. When the end user is handed over between wireless access nodes, the access nodes transfer application information so that the improved end user quality of experience is maintained. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142056 | RECOMMENDING INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH A USER EQUIPMENT OR A COMMUNICATION GROUP IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a communication device (e.g., a user equipment (UE), a server, etc.) determines one or more current parameters associated with an operating environment of the first UE, and then excludes at least one communication mode from one or more available communication modes to produce a set of communication modes by which a second UE is recommended to contact the first UE. In another embodiment, the communication device selectively recommends communication groups to users of UEs with current operational capabilities similar to characteristics of the recommended communication groups. In another embodiment, a server determines that a threshold number or a threshold percentage of group-members of an existing communication group are friends with a set of users that do not yet belong to the existing communication group, and then recommends that the set of users join the existing communication group. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142057 | Control Channel Acquisition - Disclosed are various embodiments of control channel acquisition systems and methods. A baseband processor in communication with the RF transceiver performs an initial detection of a carrier frequency based on GMSK symbols in the FCCH. The initial detection is refined and verified by passing a signal through a mathematical filter and comparing an energy of the filtered signal to a threshold. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142058 | USING TD-SCDMA CONTINUOUS TIME PERIOD TO FACILITATE TD-SCDMA TO GSM WIRELESS HANDOVER - Wireless communication is implemented by a multi-mode user equipment (UE). The method includes selecting a continuous time period during a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) voice call. The voice call is via a Node B. The selected continuous time period includes multiple subframes. The method also includes preventing the UE from communicating with the Node B during the selected continuous time period, or at least preventing downlink communications with the Node B. The method further includes acquiring a Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) signal from at least one GSM cell during the selected continuous time period. The UE can handover to a selected GSM cell based on the measurements of the acquired GSM cell(s). | 06-06-2013 |
20130142059 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSISTED/COORDINATED INTRA-HOME COMMUNICATIONS - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed that may provide assistance across networks using different radio access technologies. A centralized gateway CGW ( | 06-06-2013 |
20130142060 | INSTANTANEOUS NOISE NORMALIZED SEARCHER METRICS - In a wireless communication system employing frequency division duplexing (FDD) that may be synchronous or asynchronous for transmitting data, in which the underlying Rx signals have different statistics, and where the hypothesis testing is degraded thereby, the improvement of generating a complementary searcher metric that is a noise metric (NM) comprising: projecting the Rx signals into the noise subspace of a pilot sequence. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142061 | Detecting Extended Acquisition Indicators - Various embodiments are disclosed for detecting extended acquisition indicators in a wireless communication device. Acquisition indicator (AI) data is received, including an acquisition indicator (AI), a corresponding AI signature, and a corresponding plurality of extended AI indicators (EAI). The device determines whether channel power corresponding to the received AI signature exceeds a first negative limit. The device determines whether a reliability metric of the extended acquisition indicators exceeds a second limit. If the channel power does not exceed the first negative limit and the reliability metric does not exceed the second limit, the device declares the AI to be an indeterminate indicator that denotes neither acknowledgment nor denial of an access request associated with the received AI data. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142062 | Channel State Information Feedback - A wireless device receives a first reference signal from a first base station and estimates a first signal strength based on the received first reference signal. The wireless device receives a second reference signal from a second base station and estimates a second signal strength based on the received second reference signal. The wireless device estimates an interference value based, at least in part, on the second reference signal. The wireless device estimates a signal to interference ratio value based on the second signal strength and a total interference value. The total interference value is computed based upon the interference value or the interference value plus the first signal strength. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142063 | VERIFYING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF AN INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - Verifying the functionality of an integrated circuit, the integrated circuit being operable for processing a data packet thereby generating a data processing result. A data packet to be processed is evaluated to determine if the data packet is an erroneous data packet. If the data packet is identified as an erroneous data packet, a modified data packet is generated by modifying the erroneous data packet and providing the modified data packet to the integrated circuit. A determination is made as to whether the data processing result comprises the modification; and a malfunction of the integrated circuit is signaled, if the data processing result comprises the modification. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142064 | HANDOVER IN MULTICARRIER WIRELESS NETWORKS - A serving base station transmits at least one message to configure at least one backward compatible carrier and at least one non-backward compatible carrier in a wireless device. The serving base station transmits, in response to the serving base station making a handover decision, a second message to a target base station. The second message comprises parameters indicating whether the wireless device supports configuration of non-backward compatible carriers, configuration information of at least one backward compatible carrier and/or configuration information of at least one non-backward compatible carrier. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142065 | ROUTING TELECOMMUNICATIONS TRAFFIC - System and method for routing telecommunications traffic comprising a network gateway having a data interface for connecting to a data network, a public circuit-switched telephone network, PSTN, interface and logic configured to communicate telecommunications traffic between a PSTN and a mobile unit using a data network. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142066 | ROUTER, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ROUTER, AND PROGRAM - A router includes an input section configured to receive data, a buffer section including a plurality of data storage sections and configured to store the data received by the input section, and an output section configured to output the data stored on the buffer section. The router also includes an allocation processing section configured to determine whether or not to store the data on a pre-secured specific data storage section among the plurality of data storage sections, or whether or not to store the data on a pre-secured specific data storage section among a plurality of data storage sections in a buffer section of another router which is an output destination, the determination being made based on information representing burstiness of the data received by the input section. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142067 | AUTOMATED ON-LINE BUSINESS BANDWIDTH PLANNING METHODOLOGY - Closed-loop control is applied to the field of automated on-line business bandwidth planning tools by comparing measured business bandwidth with a baseline for providing a difference indication, changing the baseline according to the difference, and reporting the change as an event relating to a service level agreement. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142068 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTONOMOUS CHANNEL COORDINATION FOR A WIRELESS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - A method and system for autonomous channel coordination for a wireless distribution system (WDS) are disclosed. A wireless communication system includes a plurality of access points (APs) and the APs communicate each other via a WDS. A coordinated channel group (CCG) of a plurality of member APs is established. The member APs of the CCG camp on a WDS channel used for the WDS among the member APs of the CCG. One AP among the member APs of the CCG is designated as a master AP. The master AP coordinates with other member APs of the CCG for selecting and configuring the WDS channel for the CCG and addition and deletion of member APs. By allowing APs to define a CCG, changes of the WDS channel are performed autonomously while maintaining connectivity. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142069 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING ANTENNA AND CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS IN BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for antenna switching, grouping, and channel assignments in wireless communication systems. The invention allows multiuser diversity to be exploited with simple antenna operations, therefore increasing the capacity and performance of wireless communications systems. Channel characteristics indicative of signal reception quality for downlink or bi-directional traffic for each channel/antenna resource combination are measured or estimated at a subscriber. Corresponding channel characteristic information is returned to the base station. Channel characteristics information may also be measured or estimated for uplink or bi-directional signals received at each of multiple receive antenna resources. The base station employs channel allocation logic to assign uplink, downlink and/or bi-directional channels for multiple subscribers based on channel characteristics measured and/or estimated for the uplink, downlink and/or bi-directional channels. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142070 | BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a technique to provide a base station and the like capable of flexibly distributing traffic for terminals of a plurality of network-sharing communication operators. According to the technique, the base station to which a plurality of mobile terminals connect and that relays a communication between the plurality of mobile terminals and a communication device as a correspondent node of the plurality of mobile terminals, includes: a configuration unit | 06-06-2013 |
20130142071 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DECREASING MULTI-CELL FEEDBACK OVERHEAD - Method and apparatus for decreasing multi-cell feedback overhead is provided in the present invention. Wherein a user equipment utilizes a first period to feedback short-term channel direction information of a serving base station, utilizes a second period to feedback long-term channel direction information of neighboring base stations, further, the user equipment utilizes a third period to feedback long-term relative amplitude information, utilizes a fourth period to feedback short-term relative phase information, wherein the first period is shorter than the second period, and the third period is longer than the fourth period. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142072 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COLLECTING STATISTICS ON USER EQUIPMENT INFORMATION IN MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE - The disclosure provides a method and system for collecting statistics of UE information in MBMS. A UE sends a dedicated RRC signaling carrying feedback information to a network side when a trigger condition is satisfied; the network side collecting statistics of UE information according to the feedback information and sends, when the collected statistics satisfy a requirement, a feedback stop indicator to the UE; and the UE stops sending the feedback information after receiving the feedback stop indicator. With the solutions, statistics of the UE information can be collected by the network side, and the requirements for activating or deactivating the MBSFN transmission mode of the MBMS service by the network side can be met; the network side instructs the UE to stop feeding back with full consideration of load of uplink resources, so that load of uplink resources can be reduced, and uplink resources can be saved. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142073 | COMMUNICATION UNIT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication unit which belongs to a network is provided with an adding section, a measuring section, a measurement result notifying section, a processing rule storage section and a processing section. The adding section adds data for measurement of a communication state to a reception frame when the communication unit is the entrance edge node of the network. The measuring section measures the communication state based on the communication state measurement data when the communication unit is an exit edge node of the network. The measurement result notifying section notifies the measurement result to the control unit which controls the network. The processing rule storage section refers to identifier data of the reception frame and stores a processing rule relating the identification data of the reception frame and the processing of the reception frame. The processing section processes the reception frame based on the processing rule. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142074 | FREQUENCY AGILITY FOR WIRELESS EMBEDDED SYSTEMS - A method for frequency agility in a wireless embedded system, the wireless embedded system comprising a WAP and a WEP communicating on a current channel, includes determining a first channel table comprising an order of available channels for the WAP; determining a second channel table for WEP, wherein the first channel table and the second channel table list the available channels in the same order; in the event interference is detected by the WAP on the current channel, determining a new current channel by testing the available channels for interference in the order listed in the first channel table; and in the event the WEP does not receive an acknowledgement from the WAP of a message sent by the WEP to the WAP, resending the message on each of the available channels in the order listed in the second channel table until an acknowledgement is received from the WAP. | 06-06-2013 |
20130148512 | DISTRIBUTED CONTROL PLANE FOR LINK AGGREGATION - In accordance with embodiments of the disclosure, a method may include communicating, via an inter-card communication channel, local link status information regarding at least one local physical port resident on a first network interface, wherein the at least one local physical port is a member port of a link aggregation group, to one or more other network interfaces, other than the first network interface, having member ports of the link aggregation group. The method may also include receiving, via the inter-card communications channel, non-local link status information regarding at least one non-local physical port resident on the one or more other network interfaces, wherein the at least one non-local physical port is a member port of the link aggregation group. The method may further include designating a link status of the at least one local physical port based on the local link status information and the non-local link status information. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148513 | CREATING PACKET TRAFFIC CLUSTERING MODELS FOR PROFILING PACKET FLOWS - Packet traffic profiling models are created based on packet headers of a packet flow at a first model aggregation level to obtain first flow information describing packet-oriented parameters of the flow. A machine learning algorithm (MLA) creates a first model based on the first information, determines if the first model achieves a first confidence level, and if not, defines multiple flow slices in the packet flow. Flow slices at a second higher model aggregation level are processed to obtain second flow information describing flow slice-oriented parameters of the packet flow, and an MLA creates a second model based on the second information to determine if the second model achieves a second confidence level. If so, the process completes; if not, further processing continues at a next level. One of the models is selected for profiling packet traffic flows. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148514 | POSITIONING TECHNIQUE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A hybrid positioning system can be implemented to improve location estimation of a wireless network device when reference network devices can have different distance calibration constants. For each of a plurality of positions at which the wireless network device is placed and for each reference network device, a distance between the wireless network device and the reference network device is determined. A first positioning algorithm is executed to determine an intermediate location (corresponding to each position) of the wireless network device and a distance calibration constant for each reference network device based, in part, on a corresponding initial location of the wireless network device. A second positioning algorithm is executed to estimate a subset of the positions of the wireless network device based on the intermediate location (corresponding to the position) of the wireless network device and the distance calibration constant of each of reference network devices. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148515 | Channel Measurements Supporting Coordinated Multi-Point Operation - An aspect of this invention is a definition of a set of reused channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) resources among transmission points, which can be lower power nodes, for intra-cell coordinated multi-point (CoMP) operation. Separate CSI-RS resources are defined for each transmission point for sporadic separate measurements to be made by user equipment. The sporadic measurements may be implemented with low additional overhead, and are used for generating potentially simplified CSI feedback to an evolved NodeB that enables adapting shared channel reuse and also potentially making related channel quality indicator (CQI) compensation. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148516 | Choosing Connectable End Points for Network Test - Methods and apparatus for conducting a test of a network including a plurality of endpoints, each endpoint including a software agent for conducting network tests. Candidate endpoints pairs to conduct the test may be identified from the plurality of endpoints. The candidate endpoints pairs may be ranked in accordance with stored connectivity data. The connectivity of the candidate endpoint pairs may be checked in rank order until a connectable endpoint pair is located. The connectable endpoint pair may be instructed to conduct the test. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148517 | MANAGING TRANSMIT POWER FOR BETTER FREQUENCY RE-USE IN TV WHITE SPACE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for managing transmit power in a television white space (TVWS) network. One example method generally includes transmitting a sequence of request-to-send (RTS) messages at different transmit power levels to an apparatus and determining if a clear-to-send (CTS) message was received in response to at least one of the RTS messages corresponding to a particular one of the transmit power levels. Another example method generally includes receiving, at a first apparatus from a second apparatus, a packet that cannot be decoded by the first apparatus; determining at least one of a time or a duration corresponding to the packet; transmitting a query with an indication of the at least one of the time or the duration; and receiving a message from the second apparatus in response to the query, the message identifying the second apparatus as a source of the packet. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148518 | PACKET RECEIVER AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A packet processing method applied in a packet receiver is provided. An approximate bit rate is first determined according to time stamps of two different packets. The approximate bit rate is corrected according to a time stamp of another packet to generate a fine-tuned bit rate. According to the fine-tuned bit rate, one or more subsequent packets are read out from a buffer. The time stamp of a subsequent packet is provided according to the approximate bit rate. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148519 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TESTING WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE - A system for testing a wireless network device determines a limit of the sensitivity of the wireless network device under test by adjusting the power of testing apparatuses. A set module sets test parameters. The testing apparatuses transmit a predetermined amount of testing packets based on the test parameters set by the set module. An amount of testing packets received by the wireless network device under test is recorded. A control module compares the amount of testing packets received by the wireless network device under test with a predetermined value to determine whether the limit of the sensitivity of the wireless network device under test complies with a wireless network standard, and the power of the testing apparatuses is adjusted to obtain the limit of the sensitivity of the wireless network device under test. In addition, the present invention discloses a method for testing a wireless network device. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148520 | SUPPORTING VOICE FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices for supporting voice communications in a wireless communications system are provided. Some embodiments utilize multiple code channels to transmit the voice frames. These embodiments include parallel multi-code embodiments, offset multi-code embodiments, and multi-user multi-code embodiments. Some embodiments utilize flexible carrier bandwidths systems that may utilize portions of spectrum that may not be big enough to fit a normal bandwidth waveform. Some embodiments transmit and receive a subset of subframes of voice frames received over flexible bandwidth code channels. In some embodiments, a subset of subframes based on a flexible bandwidth scaling factor of one or more flexible bandwidth code channels is transmitted. The receiver may decode the voice frame based on the received subset of subframes. An outer loop power control set-point may be adjusted to provide a predetermined frame error rate based on the number of transmitted subframes. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148521 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method of discontinuous reception (DRX) in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) includes the WTRU receiving DRX setting information over a radio resource control (RRC) signal, and the WTRU receiving DRX activation information over medium access control (MAC) signal. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148522 | DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF, AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH THE SAME APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A data communication apparatus according to the present invention includes a channel determination unit for determining frequency channels to be monitored on the basis of a current location of the ship station, a performance measurement unit for measuring channel performance for each of the determined frequency channels, a channel selection unit for selecting one frequency channel from among the determined frequency channels on the basis of the measured channel performance, and a data communication unit for performing data communication with the coast station using the selected frequency channel. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148523 | METHOD OF ALLOTTING CARRIER TO STATION - Disclosed is a carrier wave allotting method of an operation and maintenance system in a wireless communication network. The carrier wave allotting method includes searching a wireless resource of the wireless communication network; updating cell information indicating information of cells of the wireless communication network; searching an access mode of a station connected with the operation and maintenance system; searching a wireless capacity of the station; and allotting a carrier wave to the station according to the wireless resource, the cell information, the access mode, and the wireless capacity. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148524 | SWITCH-EXTENDER AND A METHOD FOR CALIBRATING - A switch-extender is connected to a measurement system and to several DUTs. It splits a signal from the measurement system into several signals so that the several DUTs receive the same signal and can therefore be tested in parallel. The switch-extender further includes at least one amplifier and/or at least one attenuator for every output port so that every signal has the same signal level no matter what the individual attenuation factor of the signal connectors or of the internal printed circuit board is. Furthermore a method for calibrating the measurement system as well as for the switch-extender and the signal connectors describes how to obtain the needed calibration values both for the downlink path and for the uplink path without changing the signal connector. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148525 | METHOD FOR CALCULATING PERCEPTION OF THE USER EXPERIENCE OF THE QUALITY OF MONITORED INTEGRATED TELECOMMUNICATIONS OPERATOR SERVICES - The present invention relates to a method for calculating user experience perception of the quality of monitored integrated telecommunications operator services. For this purpose, data from the monitoring of user services is used, along with questionnaires previously completed by a representative sample of users for subsequent combination by means of correlation algorithms, and after they have been put through automatic learning algorithms, obtaining a value for the quality of the experience, which implies an estimate of the quality of service perceived by the user of said service. Lastly, the network parameters that most affect the QoE as a function of the relevance thereof for predictions of quality are automatically identified in order to provide the values needed to attain a certain quality of experience as defined by the user. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148526 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING GROUP SETTING IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Provided is a device-to-device (D2D) group communication control method. In the D2D group communication control method, D2D group session information is generated and transmitted when a D2D group service request or a D2D group communication sensing report is received. When a D2D group session confirmation message is received according to the D2D group service request or the D2D group communication sensing report, D2D group session setup is determined to be successful. A D2D group service response message or a D2D group service start message is transmitted to at least one device belonging to a D2D group for which the D2D group session setup is completed. Thereby, centralized D2D group session management can be performed. Accordingly, the number of connections of separate direct communication can be reduced and hence a signaling load can be reduced. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148527 | COMPRESSED MODE MEASUREMENTS FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER SYSTEMS, DEVICES, AND METHODS - Methods, systems, and devices are provided that may address problems to enabling a user equipment (UE) in connected mode on a normal bandwidth cell to make inter-frequency measurements on another normal bandwidth cell and a flexible bandwidth cell. Some embodiment utilize a set of compressed mode gap configurations for measuring both normal bandwidth and flexible bandwidth inter-frequency cells with the following modification for flexible bandwidth cells: reducing the coherent length used by the UE; using the same cell search parameters at the UE but modifying the compressed mode gap parameters to accommodate both normal bandwidth and flexible bandwidth cell search; and/or maintaining the compressed mode gap parameters but reducing the search window size during cell search coherent accumulation. Some embodiments may configure separate compressed mode measurements configuration for normal bandwidth and flexible bandwidth measurements. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148528 | ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME SELECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method and apparatus are provided for selecting a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS). Interference strength information is received from one or more neighbor base stations. An interference level is estimated using the received interference strength information. The MCS is selected based the estimated interference level. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148529 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIBAND RATE SCALING - A system and method for multiband rate scaling for communication, particularly wireless communication. A band is used as a parameter for wireless communication performance when a wireless communication channel has a plurality of available bands for communication. A selected communication band may be switched to another available communication band, where the switching may be based on a desired performance determination. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148530 | Method And Apparatus For Performing Discontinuous Reception And Downlink Inter-Frequency And Inter-Radio Access Technology Measurements In Cell_Fach State - A method and apparatus of performing discontinuous reception (DRX) and downlink inter-frequency and inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurements in CELL_FACH state are disclosed. While in DRX mode, a wireless transmit/receive unite (WTRU) may perform inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements in a measurement occasion that fall into a DRX period. The WTRU may take the measurements on first predetermined number of frame in which a DRX frame would coincide after a last reception frame if DRX operation was ongoing. The WTRU may periodically wake up for downlink reception in CELL_FACH state in accordance with common DRX pattern that is common to all WTRUs in a cell or may wake up from DRX upon reception of the order and receiving a common traffic. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148531 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING, ANALYZING, AND PRESENTING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for analyzing, collecting, and presenting data in a communication network are disclosed. An example method includes analyzing collected data to generate gateway metrics representative of a user experience of a user-initiated communication within a network, the network comprising network elements, the gateway metrics comprising at least one of a number of termination attempts for a DS0 channel, a number of rejected attempts for the DS0 channel, a number of terminations answered for the DS0 channel, a number of attempts for a hunt group, a number of rejected attempts for the hunt group, or a number of terminations answered for the hunt group; determining an average upper transaction time per customer based on the collected data; and presenting the gateway metrics in a plurality of tabular views corresponding to service area levels, the views presenting performance data representing the average upper transaction times of the service area levels. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148532 | VIRTUAL DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SYSTEMS - A system for monitoring and diagnosing communication systems comprises: an interface, a processor, and a graphical user interface. The interface receives one or more communication data streams. The processor extracts information from the one or more communication data streams. And, the graphical user interface displays the information as a plurality of time-correlated lanes. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148533 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The disclosure provides a method for processing Channel State Information (CSI), and a User Equipment (UE). The method comprises: a UE measuring a channel on a CSI reference signal (CSI-RS) resource when a neighbouring cell performs coordinated muting on the resource corresponding to the CSI-RS (S | 06-13-2013 |
20130148534 | Method and Apparatus for Reporting a Measurement Result in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for reporting a measurement result in a wireless communication system. A terminal configures a plurality of serving cells, and performs measurement on the plurality' of serving cells. When a measurement report is triggered, the terminal determines whether or not a quality of at least one serving cell from among the plurality of serving cells is lower than an auxiliary' threshold value. The measurement report includes the quality of a best neighboring cell at a serving frequency of the serving cell the quality of which is lower than the auxiliary threshold value. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148535 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING SECONDARY CELLS IN A CARRIER AGGREGATION ENVIRONMENT - A method and an apparatus for activating and deactivating secondary cells in a carrier aggregation environment are provided. In one embodiment, a Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) command is received from a base station for activating/deactivating a secondary cell associated with a User Equipment (UE). The secondary cell configured for the UE is activated/deactivated based on the MAC CE command. Further, a first uplink grant is received from the base station upon activation/deactivation of the secondary cell. Accordingly, quality information (e.g., channel quality information, sounding reference signal information, and the like) associated with the cell(s) is transmitted to the base station in the received first uplink grant over a physical uplink shared channel. Furthermore, a hybrid automatic repeat request entity associated with the secondary cell is reset. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148536 | Methods and Arrangements for Establishing a Radio Connection in a Communication System - This invention pertains in general to the field of establishment of radio connection in a communication system. More particularly the invention relates to establishing a radio connection in a communication system. By broadcasting Random Access Channel related system information, user equipments can send a RACH request and receive a set of DL demodulation reference signals associated with a DL control channel. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148537 | COMMUNICATION QUALITY MONITORING SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION QUALITY MONITORING METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - Conventional network quality monitoring systems require high monitoring cost, because: physical maintenance cost is high, since monitors are required to install on many portion of the network; the number of monitoring flows is apt to increase; the cost for information synchronization between monitors is required; and the network cost to collect information from apparatuses is required. In the present invention, based on a network whose route is definable by an external controller and changing the monitoring flow route appropriately, it is possible to perform monitoring of the communication quality under a small number of monitoring terminals and flows. Further, the role of the monitoring flow is divided into the monitoring flows to monitor the quality degradation occurrence and to specify the quality degradation point. The former is used for normal time, and the latter is for the quality degradation time. Consequently, the network monitoring system reducing the cost is proposed. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148538 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile communication terminal including multiple receiving antennas demodulates an interfering UE-specific reference signal that might be used in another mobile communication terminal, and analyzes interference parameters specified by the interfering UE-specific reference signal demodulated by the interfering UE-specific reference signal demodulator, the interference parameters being parameters with regard to another beam sent to another mobile communication terminal from an interfering base station. Then, the mobile communication terminal calculates receiving weights so as to suppress influence to the desired beam from other beams, on the basis of desired beam parameters and the interference parameters. | 06-13-2013 |
20130155878 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR IMPROVED LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (HARQ) PROCESSING - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for performing long term evolution (LTE) hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) processing are disclosed. According to one method, the method occurs at a multi-UE simulator. The method includes receiving downlink control channel data for a plurality of user devices being simulated. The method also includes decoding HARQ data for each user device of the plurality of user devices. The method further includes performing at least one HARQ data verification step for each user device of the plurality of user devices and acting on the verified HARQ data for each user device of the plurality of user devices. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155879 | QUASI-DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS FOR INTERNET OF THINGS (IOT) APPLICATIONS - Spectrum access for Internet of things (IOT) applications including receiving information about expected use by a primary user of a spectrum band in a radio frequency spectrum. The spectrum band is classified into at least two working modes based on the expected use. The spectrum band is sensed to determine a current access pattern of the primary user. Based on the classifying and the sensing, one of the working modes is selected as a current working mode of the primary user. Transmissions are scheduled on the spectrum band using a current schedule that is responsive to the current working mode of the primary user. If the current working mode of the primary user changes, the sensing, selecting, scheduling, and determining whether the current working mode has changed are re-performed. Otherwise, the transmission scheduling and determining if the current working mode has changed are re-performed. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155880 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING NETWORK CONVERGENCE VIA ADAPTIVE ROUTING TECHNIQUES - One embodiment of the present invention sets forth a technique for a node within a network to adjust one or more routing parameters based on certain network parameters. A node monitors certain network metrics such as the mean time between routing drops. In response to changes in these network parameters, the node changes certain routing parameters, such as the holddown time. The node may store network metrics and associated routing parameters that result in preferred network operating conditions. The node may pre-load these beneficial settings upon the occurrence of a particular condition such as a system reset of the node. Moreover, a node may share these beneficial settings with neighboring nodes on the same network. One advantage of this approach is that cost savings are achieved when a node within a network may be installed without preconfiguring the node with specific routing parameters. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155881 | PRIORITIZING INTER-FREQUENCY/INTER-RAT MEASUREMENTS AND EMBMS IN LTE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided for prioritizing the performance of measurements during measurement gaps and the reception of multicast/broadcast content. The apparatus receives a configuration from a serving cell to perform a measurement during a measurement gap of a unicast service while in a connected mode. In addition, the apparatus determines whether to refrain from leaving the serving cell on a first frequency and performing the measurement on a second frequency of a neighboring cell in order to receive multicast/broadcast content associated with a multicast/broadcast service during the measurement gap. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155882 | BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION MONITORING FOR A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system to monitor bandwidth can include memory to store session data describing each communication session for at least a portion of a communication system. A bandwidth calculator can access the session data and provide a measure of bandwidth utilization computed based on the accessed session data. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155883 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING FREQUENCY SCAN FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS WITH VARIABLE CHANNEL BANDWIDTH - Techniques for performing a frequency scan to detect wireless systems operating on frequency channels with variable bandwidths are disclosed. In one aspect, a user equipment (UE) performs a frequency scan for a plurality of frequency channels and measures the received power of each frequency channel based on a center frequency and a bandwidth of the frequency channel. The UE identifies candidate frequency channels for acquisition based on the results of the frequency scan. In another aspect, a frequency scan of a band is performed by partitioning the band into multiple segments, measuring received powers of subcarriers or raster frequencies within each segment, and concatenating received powers of subcarriers or raster frequencies for all segments. A frequency scan is then performed based on the concatenated results for the multiple segments. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155884 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - To comport with specific absorption rate (SAR) requirements for a transmitting multi-radio mobile device, transmissions of the multiple radios may be duplexed to ensure compliance with communication regulations. Duplexing of transmissions may occur if overall transmissions exceed a particular threshold value. The duplexing may be opportunistic or deterministic. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155885 | APPLICATION SERVICE LEVEL MEDIATION AND METHOD OF USING THE SAME - A method and apparatus for using an application layer demarcation point are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises monitoring end-to-end performance of a network application at an application demarcation point in a network, and mediating between provider infrastructure and customer infrastructure based on results of monitoring. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155886 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING TIME DIVISION DUPLEX NOISE OF COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for detecting time division duplex (TDD) noise of a communication device, the communication device includes a radio frequency (RF) unit, a voice generation unit, a voice signal acquisition unit, an audio processing unit, and a processor. The RF unit emits a plurality of radio signals. The voice generation unit generates voice signals and outputs the voice signals. The voice signal acquisition unit acquires the voice signals. The audio processing unit converts the acquired voice signals into digital audio signals, and analyzes the digital audio signals to detect whether the digital audio signals contain time division duplex (TDD) noise. The processor generates a result indicating the digital audio signals contain or do not contain the TDD noise according to the analysis of the digital audio signals, and displays the result on a display of the communication device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155887 | Circuit, System and Method for Communication Between Two Nodes of a Radio Network - A first node of a radio network initiates a mode for finding the range to a second node. The first node transmits to the second node, with the address of the second node, a range finding command, which switches the second node into the range finding mode and controls a sequence. The first node transmits in a transmission time window a first signal, which is received by the second node in an associated reception time window, a first phase value of the first signal being measured. The second node transmits in a transmission time window a second signal, which is received by the first node in an associated reception time window, a second phase value of the second signal being measured. The first frequency is changed by a frequency difference and the second frequency is changed by the frequency difference in a subsequent time window of the sequence. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155888 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF RENEGOTIATING END-TO-END VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL CODECS - Systems and methods of Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication are provided. A particular system includes a VoIP endpoint. The VoIP endpoint is adapted to monitor a packet loss measure between the VoIP endpoint and a second VoIP endpoint during a VoIP communication using a first CODEC. The VoIP endpoint is also adapted to negotiate with the second VoIP endpoint to select a substitute CODEC having a nominal data rate that is lower than an in-use nominal data rate of the first CODEC. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155889 | INTELLIGENT MULTI-STREAMING FOR ENHANCING OR AVOIDING DROPPED AND INTERRUPTED COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - Systems and methods for intelligently enhancing communication sessions or avoiding dropped and interrupted communication sessions between or among communication devices. Characteristics of a communication link are monitored and are compared to intelligent communication session data to predictively determine whether a handoff may be needed or whether multi-streaming should be invoked or terminated. Intelligent communication session data may be monitored, recorded and/or stored by a handoff service, a bridging service and/or a multi-streaming service, as well as applications executed on communication devices or other network devices. Intelligent communication session data may be any data relating to a communication session, including detected signal strengths, available networks, protocol and buffer statistics and analysis, environmental and/or geographical factors, the performance of access points and other network components, past interactions between or among communication devices, and access points and other network components, context of conversations during voice calls. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155890 | RECEIVE ANTENNA SELECTION/COMBINING OF RECEIVE ANTENNAS USING FEWER NUMBER OF RECEIVE CHAINS - Methods and apparatus for performing receive antenna diversity measurements in measurement gaps are provided. One embodiment may include communicating with a serving base station using a first set of one or more receive antennas during a normal operational period, performing receive antenna diversity measurements with a second set of one or more receive antennas during a measurement gap between normal operational periods, and selecting one or more receive antennas for at least one of use and/or combining, based on the receive antenna diversity measurements | 06-20-2013 |
20130155891 | Beamforming Signaling in a Wireless Network - A first base station receives a message from a second base station. The second base station comprises a downlink carrier comprising downlink resource blocks. The message comprises downlink beamforming information element indicating a beamforming codeword employed for a downlink resource block. The first base station obtains channel state input information for a wireless device based on, at least in part, processing the downlink beamforming information. The first base station transmits the channel state input information to the wireless device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155892 | Computing Time-Decayed Aggregates in Data Streams - Aggregates are calculated from a data stream in which data is sent in a sequence of tuples, in which each tuple comprises an item identifier and a timestamp indicating when the tuple was transmitted. The tuples may arrive out-of-order, that is, the sequence in which the tuples arrive are not necessarily in the sequence of their corresponding timestamps. In calculating aggregates, more recent data may be given more weight by multiplying each tuple by a decay function which is a function of the timestamp associated with the tuple and the current time. The tuples are recorded in a quantile-digest data structure. Aggregates are calculated from the data stored in the quantile-digest data structure. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155893 | MULTIPLE CHANNEL SYSTEM FOR A TWISTED PAIR TELEPHONE WIRE LOCAL LOOP SYSTEM - Example multiple channel systems for a twisted pair telephone wire local loop system are disclosed. An example method includes implementing, via a digital filter at a subscriber gateway, a frequency translation received from a first controller of a switching office in response to a bandwidth allocation request, wherein the frequency translation moves a signal to an available frequency band identified by the first controller of the switching office; operating a second controller at the subscriber gateway to control the digital filter; and transmitting a plurality of frequency division multiplexed signals via a first transceiver configured to send and receive via multiple independent channel located at the subscriber gateway. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155894 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING NETWORK - A method and system for accessing a network are disclosed in the present invention. The method includes that: terminals in a same group execute random number synchronization; when an arbitrary first terminal in the group initiates network access, terminals in the group except the first terminal monitor the access of the first terminal according to the synchronized random number; after monitoring that the first terminal accesses network successfully, the terminals in the group except the first terminal initiate network access by using Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection uplink resources which are allocated to the group by the network. The technical solution of the present invention can reduce the signaling overhead for establishing signaling connection and data bearing. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155895 | MDT INFORMATION-REPORTING FORMAT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND TIME-STAMP CONFIGURING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method for configuring a Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) information reporting format and a time-stamp is provided that supports MDT in a 3 | 06-20-2013 |
20130155896 | Method and Terminal for Searching for an Access Point - Specifically, according to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for searching for an access point is provided. The method for searching may comprises the steps of: a terminal measuring the position thereof; checking an access point located near the measured position of the terminal; determining whether or not the distance between the terminal and the access point is greater than the radius range searchable by the terminal; and searching for the access point when the distance between the terminal and the access point is less than the radius range. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155897 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING INFORMATION ABOUT A PRE-CODING MATRIX OF A TERMINAL IN A MULTIPLE NODE SYSTEM - A method of transmitting, by a first terminal, information about a pre-coding matrix to a base station in a multiple node system comprises the steps: measuring a downlink channel of a first node through a reference signal for CSI (Channel-State Information) measurement of the first node; measuring a downlink channel of a second node through a reference signal for decoding transmitted by the second node; and transmitting, by the first terminal, information about a pre-coding matrix for the first terminal to the base station on the basis of the measured downlink channels of the first and second nodes. | 06-20-2013 |
20130163442 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INITIALIZING A NETWORK CONNECTION FOR AN OUTPUT DEVICE - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a processor configured to send an identifier to an output device such that the output device presents the identifier. The apparatus also includes a cellular communication module and a Wi-Fi communication module operatively coupled to the processor. The cellular communication module can be configured to establish a connection with a cellular network. The cellular communication module can be configured to receive, from a server via the cellular network, Wi-Fi configuration instructions in response to the server receiving the identifier and the Wi-Fi configuration instructions from a communication device. The Wi-Fi communication module can be configured to establish a connection with a Wi-Fi network based on the Wi-Fi configuration instructions. The Wi-Fi communication module can be configured to receive, from the communication device, a command configured to control content presented by the output device after the connection with the Wi-Fi network has been established. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163443 | Blind Detection of VAMOS Capable Mobile Stations - A network performs blind detection of the VAMOS capability, at or above a predetermined SCPIR level, of mobile stations. The network transmits an AQPSK modulated message having a predetermined SCPIR level on a control channel or non-traffic portion of a traffic channel, and monitors the mobile station for an anticipated action taken in response. In some embodiments, the AQPSK modulated message is repeated to increase the probability of its reception. In some embodiments, AQPSK modulated messages are transmitted at varying SCPIR levels, to determine a minimum SCPIR level at which the mobile terminal is operative in VAMOS mode. The VAMOS capability and SCPIR level of mobile stations may be recorded, so that they may later be paired for VAMOS operation. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163444 | MULTICAST RESOURCE OPTIMIZATION - Content may be transmitted to mobile devices, in a network, using a Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services (MBMS) multicast technique over wireless interfaces in the network. In one implementation, network elements in the network may receive feedback about the MBMS multicast transmission, where the feedback relates to a quality of the content, as received by the one or more mobile devices, or to the quality of the radio channel. The devices may determine whether to modify transmission parameters relating to the MBMS multicast transmission and may determine whether to retransmit lost data, corresponding to the content, to the mobile devices. The lost data may be retransmitted as a unicast transmission or a multicast transmission. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163445 | Testing TCP Connection Rate - Methods and apparatus to test connection rate of a network device. T connections between a test system and the network device may be defined and C connections of the T connections may be initiated in each of a plurality of sequential time intervals, where T and C are positive integers and T>C. Connection identifiers associated with active connections and inactive connections may be stored in first-in first-out active and idle queues, respectively. Connection identifiers associated with the initiated connections may be moved from the head of the idle queue to the tail of the active queue. When a number NI of connection identifiers in the idle queue at the start of a time interval is less than C, C−NI connections associated with connection identifiers at the head of the active queue may be aborted and re-initiated. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163446 | Correlation of Media Plane and Signaling Plane of Media Services in a Packet-Switched Network - This invention relates to methods for correlating at least one media path and a signaling session of a packet-switched network and to an implementation of these methods in hardware and software. To overcoming one or more of the limitations and challenges on the correlation of signaling plane and media plane of services, the invention defines a key, which can be used for correlation of media streams and signaling sessions. The invention is based on a signaling probe identifying new services and associated media paths of the media plane by detecting their corresponding signaling sessions and determining for each service a signaling session identifier. The signaling probe registers the signaling sessions and their media paths at a correlation unit using the signaling session identifiers as a key, which allows a media probe to query the correlation unit for respective signaling session identifiers that correspond to media paths detected in the media plane traffic. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163447 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS IN RELATION TO SENSING OPERATION IN A CARRIER AGGREGATION SCENARIO - The present invention proposes an apparatus which comprises a communication module configured for communication in a carrier aggregation mode aggregating a primary and at least one secondary carrier, a measurement module, and a control module, configured to retrieve measurement information pertaining to a measurement to be conducted of at least one secondary carrier associated to the primary carrier in the carrier aggregation mode, and instruct the measurement module to conduct a measurement of the at least one secondary carrier based on the measurement information, determine, based on a measurement result, an extent to which the measured secondary carrier is usable for transmission. Also, a corresponding method and computer program product is proposed. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163448 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROBABLISTIC WLAN POSITIONING - This disclosure is directed to a wireless network node having position determination capabilities. The position of a node is determined using range measurements to other network nodes having known locations. Probability density functions modeling uncertainty factors are incorporated in the estimation algorithms to account for the dynamic nature of wireless network, including the relative motion of a node in the network. These probabilistic estimation techniques provide a solution in the form of an expectation value for the position of the network node and a variance that can be assessed to determine the validity of the position determination. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163449 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMAL LISTEN BEFORE TRANSMIT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - One embodiment of the present invention sets forth a technique for transmitting data in a listen before talk (LBT) wireless transmission regime. A digital radio receiver is configured to simultaneously receive and decode digital data transmissions from multiple radio channels. A digital radio transmitter is configured to listen to the multiple radio channels prior to transmitting digital data on a selected one of the multiple channels, based on locally determined channel occupancy. Optimal LBT efficiency is achieved within the set of multiple channels, thereby improving overall transmission efficiency between the transmitter and the receiver. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163450 | OPTIMIZATION OF DATA HANDOVER TO WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORKS - A method, system, and computer program product for managing a radio resource control state of a user equipment. A triggering module may be configured to determine whether a number of triggering conditions are satisfied. Also, responsive to satisfying the number of triggering conditions, a sustain module may be configured to initiate a sustain message. The sustain message may prevent the radio resource control state of the user equipment from changing states | 06-27-2013 |
20130163451 | Terminal-Assisted Improvement of Timing-Based Positioning Accuracy - There are provided measures for enabling a terminal-assisted improvement of timing-based positioning accuracy. Such measures may exemplarily include measuring a cell-related timing value for timing-based positioning calculation on the basis of a cell-originated positioning-related signal and measuring a terminal-related timing value for timing-based positioning calculation at an apparatus to be positioned, and utilizing the measured cell-related timing value and the measured terminal-related timing value for timing-based positioning calculation relating to the apparatus to be positioned at a network side. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163452 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ADJUSTING CARRIER QUALITY METRICS FOR INTRINSIC IMPARIMENTS - An Internet protocol (IP) telephony system terminates calls to certain groups of telephone numbers via multiple different telephony carriers. The IP telephony system will discontinue using a telephony carrier to terminate calls if the quality provided by the carrier falls below a threshold level. The IP telephony system includes a quality monitoring unit that determines when a particular group of telephone numbers are intrinsically impaired, such that no carrier could provide high quality when terminating calls to those numbers. In these circumstances, the IP telephony system adjusts the quality threshold to which a carrier's quality is compared when completing calls to the impaired numbers to account for the intrinsic impairment of the telephone numbers. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163453 | PRESENCE SENSOR WITH ULTRASOUND AND RADIO - An ultrasound and radio frequency technology is used to implement presence sensor capability for wireless devices such as, a laptap device. For example, the laptap device connects to a station device through a WiFi signal. In this example, the WiFi signal may include a data packet that synchronizes internal clocks of the laptap device with the station device. Further, the data packet may include transmitting time information for an ultrasound audio signal generated by the station device. The ultrasound audio signal is received by the laptap device that calculates time of flight (TOF) of the ultrasound audio signal. The TOF may be used to determine actual distance of the wireless device (e.g., laptap device) to the station device. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163454 | MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION AND REPORTING METHOD FOR MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREOF - The present invention discloses a measurement configuration and reporting method for multi-carrier system and device thereof, and the method comprises the following steps: eNB sends RRC signaling carrying multi-carrier measurement configuration information to the terminal; said terminal measures according to said multi-carrier measurement configuration information and carries multi-carrier measurement results in measurement report message. In the embodiments of the present invention, the terminal carries multi-carrier measurement results in measurement report message according to RRC signaling sent by eNB to quickly provide measurement results required during eNB handover, thus facilitating source eNB to perform multi-carrier handover for UE under CA. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163455 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device including: a processor configured to perform a wireless communication protocol including an upper layer and a lower layer, wherein the processor is configured to estimate, based on a round trip time measured at the upper layer in case of carrying out a retransmission control at the lower layer and a time taking for retransmissions at the lower layer, a first estimated round trip time, to estimate, based on the number of times of packet loss at the upper layer in case of carrying out the retransmission control at the lower layer, and the number of times of successful transmission at the upper layer being recovered by the retransmission control, a first estimated packet loss rate, and to obtain, based on the first estimated round trip time and the first estimated packet loss rate, a first estimated throughput in case of not carrying out the retransmission control. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163456 | Method and Device for the Validation of Networks - A method is provided for the validation of a network by a checking module, the network comprising a plurality of routers, each of the routers comprising a plurality of output ports, each of the output ports of the routers being associated with a bandwidth budget, a priority latency budget and a plurality of network budget grains. The method comprises, for each of the ports of each of the routers, steps of: calculation of a latency consumed on the output port of the router on the basis of the network budget grains and the bandwidth budget; checking of the compatibility of the latency consumed on the output port with the priority latency budget grains of the output port of the router; and, transmission by the checking module of a signal indicating the result of the check. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163457 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK APPARATUS AND METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM OPERATING IN FDD MODE - A Channel State Information (CSI) feedback method and apparatus is provided for transmitting, at a base station, the CSIs for plural transmit antennas with a limited amount resource and receiving, at a mobile station, the CSIs efficiently in a massive Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) system operating in the Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163458 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR POSITION LOCATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for position location in a wireless network. In an aspect, a method is provided that includes determining whether a symbol to be transmitted is an active symbol, wherein the symbol comprises a plurality of subcarriers, and encoding identification information on a first portion of subcarriers if it is determined that the symbol is the active symbol. The method also includes encoding idle information on a second portion of subcarriers if it is determined that the symbol in not the active symbol. In an aspect, an apparatus includes detector logic configured to decode a plurality of symbols to determine identification information that identifies a plurality of transmitters, and to determine a plurality of channel estimate associated with the plurality of transmitters. The apparatus also includes position determination logic configured to calculate a device position based on the plurality of transmitters and the plurality of channel estimates. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163459 | Adjusting Link Layer Control Frame to Facilitate Data Thoughput - A base station subsystem includes logic to change the modulation and coding scheme for radio communications, and logic to communicate with a switching GSM to cause a change in link layer control frame size to reflect the change in modulation and coding scheme. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163460 | COOPERATIVE TRANSCEIVING BETWEEN WIRELESS INTERFACE DEVICES OF A HOST DEVICE - A circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives packetized data with a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol. A second wireless interface circuit transceives packetized data with a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol and wherein the operation of the second wireless interface circuit interferes with the operation of the first wireless interface circuit. A processing module selectively preempts use of the second frequency spectrum by the second external device using a plurality of preemption modes including a first preemption mode and a second preemption mode. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163461 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and device for transmitting/receiving channel state information (CSI). A method for a terminal for transmitting CSI according to one embodiment of the present invention includes: a first step of receiving a reference signal for channel measurement from a base station; a second step of generating sub-band (SB) CSI for each of a plurality of SBs using the received reference signal in the terminal and sequentially transmitting the generated SB CSI to a base station; and a third step of sequentially transmitting each SB CSI to a base station according to an order different from that of the sequential transmission. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163462 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile communication terminal includes an interference rejection combining processor for obtaining a received signal vector with regard to each of multiple resource elements and for calculating receiving weights so as to suppress influence to a desired beam of electric wave sent from the desired base station by other beams, on the basis of the received signal vectors; a non-interference-rejection receiving weight calculator for calculating receiving weights so as not to suppress influence to the desired beam by other beams; a signal separator for separating a signal destined for the mobile communication terminal from signals destined for other mobile communication terminals; and an interference rejection combining determiner for determining whether the receiving weights to suppress influence by other beams or the receiving weights calculated by the non-interference-rejection receiving weight calculator should be used for signal separation by the signal separator, on the basis of an index representing a relationship between reception quality of a desired downlink transmission signal and reception quality of an interfering signal. | 06-27-2013 |
20130170363 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTI-NETWORK AUDIO CONTROL - Systems, methods, apparatus, and articles of manufacture to facilitate connection to a multimedia playback network are disclosed. An example wireless device includes a wireless communication interface to identify a first network within range of the wireless device available for connection and to facilitate connection of the wireless device to the first network. The example wireless device includes a processor to add the first network to a registry of networks for connection by the wireless device. The example wireless device includes a signal strength monitor to monitor one or more available networks from the network registry that are within range of the wireless device. The example processor is to evaluate the available network(s) to identify a preferred network for connection based on at least one network characteristic and facilitate a switch from connection of the wireless device to the first network if the preferred network is different from the first network. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170364 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF MONITORING CALL QUALITY - When a voice over Internet protocol (VOIP) telephone call is being conducted by a mobile telephony device, measurements of at least one condition that exists for the mobile telephone device during the VOIP telephone call are taken during the duration of the telephone call. The measurements could be taken periodically as the VOIP telephone call progresses. The measured condition is one that could affect the perceived quality of the VOIP telephone call. The measurements of the at least one condition are recorded against the telephone call for later use and analysis. The recorded information may be analyzed to determine how to modify a setting of the mobile telephony device to improve the quality of VOIP telephone calls conducted with the mobile telephony device. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170365 | System and Method for Ec/Io Access Screeening in a CDMA Network - Provided are system and method for performing access screening in a CDMA network. In one embodiment, the method comprises comparing a strength of a reference pilot specified in an origination message (“ORM”) received from the mobile unit to at least one of an upper pilot strength threshold (“UPST”) and a lower pilot strength threshold (“LPST”); responsive to the reference pilot strength failing to exceed the LPST, redirecting the mobile unit; responsive to the reference pilot strength exceeding the LPST but failing to exceed the UPST, determining whether an additional pilot is reported having a strength greater than that of the reference pilot; and responsive to a determination that no additional pilot is reported having a strength greater than that of the reference pilot, redirecting the mobile unit. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170366 | MULTI-USER SCHEDULING IN CELLULAR UPLINKS - Disclosed herein are techniques, methods, and apparatus pertaining to a multi-user scheduling in 4G and 3GPP LTE cellular uplinks. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170367 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING AN ACCESS NETWORK OF A NETWORKED TERMINAL - Disclosed herein is an apparatus and method of identifying an access network. The apparatus including: a packet capturing unit configured to capture a plurality of packets transmitted or received by a server; a flow classifying unit configured to classify each of the captured packets into individual flows with reference to at least one of an origination address, a destination address, and a port number; a round trip time (RTT) calculating unit configured to calculate RTT values from the packets classified into a flow of the individual flows; an access network determining unit configured to determine that an origination address included in a packet classified into the flow is an address accessing the server through a first communication network when the RTT calculated values exceed a reference value; and a storage unit configured to store the address accessing the server through the first communication network. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170368 | Method and system for counting data packets - The disclosure provides a method for counting data packets, which includes the following steps: counting packet pulse signals when a low bit counter is in a count state, and sending a carry signal when the low bit counter is full; and acquiring data from an address of a Random Access Memory (RAM) corresponding to the low bit counter which sends the carry signal, adding 1 to the acquired data and then writing the added data into the address. The disclosure also provides a system for counting data packets. According to the technical scheme of the disclosure, the occupancy rate of logical resources is reduced while the counting of the data packets in a network is finished at a high speed. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170369 | CLOCK RATE CONTROLLER AND METHOD THEREOF AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - An exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure illustrates a clock rate control method. Firstly, a usage of a first input first output (FIFO) buffer in an electronic device is detected. Then, whether the usage falls within a first specific interval is determined, wherein the first specific interval has a first upper limit value and a first lower limit value. When the usage is larger than the first upper limit value, a clock rate of the inner device of the electronic device is increased; when the usage is less than the first lower limit value, the clock rate is decreased. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170370 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MAKING CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS TO REDUCE INTERFERENCE AND INCREASE CAPACITY OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - Techniques for making channel assignments to reduce interference and increase capacity of wireless networks are described. In an implementation, a first station receives a signal from a second station. The first station measures a signal strength of the received signal, and determines that the signal strength is relatively weak compared to other signals received at the first station from other stations. A set of OFDMA subcarriers available for assignment is divided into a first subset for relatively weak signals within a first cell and a second subset for relatively strong signals within the first cell. The second station is assigned a transmit subchannel that is formed for a predetermined period of time by the first subset of subcarriers, the transmit subchannel assigned based on the determination that the signal strength of the received signal is relatively weak. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170371 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MAKING CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS TO REDUCE INTERFERENCE AND INCREASE CAPACITY OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - Techniques for making channel assignments to reduce interference and increase capacity of wireless networks are described. In an implementation, a signal is received at a first station from a second station. A signal strength is measured and compared to other signal strength measurements of signals received from other stations. The signal strength is determined to be relatively weak based on the comparison, and the second station is assigned to a first subchannel that includes subcarriers reserved for stations with relatively weak signals. Subsequently, the signal strength measurement is repeated and the signal strength is determined to be relatively strong in comparison to the other signal strengths. The second station is then reassigned to a second subchannel that includes subcarriers reserved for stations with relatively strong signals. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170372 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING FEEDBACK DELAY - A method for obtaining feedback delay includes: obtaining a target time elapsed in a process from when a remote radio end receives uplink data sent from a user end to when the remote radio end sends out feedback information responsive to the uplink data to the user end, wherein the feedback information responsive to the uplink data is fed back by a processing node to the remote radio end; calculating a feedback delay by adding the target time and an air interface transmission propagation delay, wherein the air interface transmission propagation delay is a transmission time of the uplink data from the user end to the remote radio end; and configuring, by the processing node, an uplink hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) ACK/NACK feedback interval to be the feedback delay. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170373 | Method, Apparatus and System for Finding and Selecting Partners - Finding and selecting partners in a MiAN Cluster system is accomplished by a slave, a pairing request for requesting a pairing with a master to a server; receiving, by the slave, proximity information returned from the server based on the pairing request, the proximity information including information of working channels of a proximity interface of the master of the first kind, the master of the first kind being a master determined by the server according to the first geographical location and a geographical location of a master of the second kind previously obtained and supporting a clustering function where a distance between it and the slave meets a predetermined threshold; performing, by the slave, search on the corresponding channels according to the proximity information, and establishing a communication connection with the proximity interface of the master when a master is found. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170374 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR LOCATING DEVICES - Disclosed embodiments provide methods and systems for locating a device in a wireless network. In one aspect, a device may broadcast a signal, and one or more network components may measure the received signal strength of the signal. Based on the signal strength and/or at least one or more parameters, the one or more network components may determine whether to perform a round trip time measurement with the network device. The network components may perform the round trip time measurement based on the determination and report the results of the measurement to a server. The server may be configured to determine the location of the network device based on the round trip time measurement. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170375 | WIRED/WIRELESS CONVERGED MAC ADAPTOR AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING FRAME USING WIRED/WIRELESS CONVERGED MAC ADAPTOR - A wired/wireless converged media access control (MAC) adaptor and a method for transmitting a frame using the same. The wired/wireless converged MAC adaptor may include a service network interface (SNI) to transmit a MAC frame corresponding to a wired or wireless service, or common public radio interface (CPRI) data, a frame conversion unit to convert, into an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) frame, a wired/wireless converged MAC frame having a common frame structure of the MAC frame corresponding to the wired or wireless service or the CPRI data, and an OFDM interface configured to transmit the OFDM frame to an optical OFDM modem by dynamically allocating sub-carriers based on data transmission characteristics. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170376 | Special Subframe Configuration in Wireless Networks - A base station configures a first set of subframes on a first carrier as special subframes. The base station transmits at least one unicast control message to a wireless device. The at least one unicast control message configures a second carrier. The base station configures the second carrier to enter a special subframe for every subframe in which the first carrier enters a special subframe, and the second carrier is activated. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170377 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING APPLICATION USING PACKET IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for identify an application to which a packet flow belongs in a communication system. In the method, characteristic information of a first application is selected. Bit lines of a position designated by a mask included in the characteristic information are examined from packets transferred via the packet flow. A ratio of the number of examination results of coincidence to the number of all input packets is calculated. When the ratio exceeds a first threshold included in the characteristic information, it is determined that the packet flow belongs to the first application. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170378 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR LOCALIZATION IN INDUSTRIAL WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method and system are disclosed for localization in an industrial wireless sensor network by identifying a sensor node of a field device for localization, and determining the location information of the sensor node associated with the field device. The determined location information is stored in the field device, in one or more modules of the wireless network management component, and/or an operator portal. Operation can be indicated upon the joining of the field device into the network or during the commissioning of the industrial wireless sensor. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170379 | Detection of Encrypted Packet Streams Using Feedback Probing - Methods, systems, and devices are disclosed for detecting encrypted Internet Protocol packet streams. A probe stream having a known observable parameter is generated. The observable parameter exhibits a known characteristic of a known type of data encrypted within a stream of packets. The probe stream is communicated to a network element via a communications network. When the probe stream is received by the network element, the network element can compare the known observable parameter to an actual value. Any difference between the known observable parameter and the actual value can be used to correct for network-induced variation and other effects, thus ensuring accurate detection and identification of data types within encrypted streams of packets. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170380 | ADAPTING A COMMUNICATION NETWORK TO VARYING CONDITIONS - Systems and methods are disclosed for adapting a communication system to varying conditions. Using some form of discovery protocol, the communication standards supported by at least two communicants are determined. Each communicant may then periodically monitor the quality of the channel established by the communication standard and dynamically select a set of one or more communication standards to use for communicating. Further, when communicants share common non-standard parameterized implementations of communication standards, changes to the protocols which the communication standards comprise can be used to add options for a more dynamic response to changing conditions than is possible when adhering only to an established communication standard. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170381 | BAND CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER NETWORK AND BAND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - A band control system of the present invention is applicable to a digital subscriber line network in which a first apparatus and a second apparatus situated at a subscriber station and a center, respectively, are interconnected by a metallic cable for interchanging at least a digital data signal with each other. The band control system includes a commanding device included in one of the first and said second apparatuses for monitoring the receipt of ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cells from the other apparatus and sending, based on the result of monitoring, a band variation command to the other apparatus to thereby cause it to vary a band by using a frequency band not used for signal transfer. A band varying device is included in the other apparatus for receiving the band variation command and varying the band in accordance with the command. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170382 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR UPDATING A DATABASE FOR WIRELESS LAN BASED POSITIONING - An apparatus for updating a database for wireless LAN based positioning includes a database for storing grid cells divided by pCell ID and base station-derived environment information and wireless LAN environment information matched to the grid cells; a grid cell determining unit for determining an information-unmeasured grid cell among the grid cells, the information-unmeasured grid cell being a grid cell that has unmeasured information among parameters of the wireless LAN environment information matched to the grid cells; an unmeasured parameter checking unit for checking an unmeasured parameter in the information-unmeasured grid cell; a radiowave environment estimating unit for generating radiowave environment estimation information by estimating the unmeasured information based on the unmeasured parameter checked; and a database updating unit for reflecting the radiowave environment estimation information in the information-unmeasured grid cell determined. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170383 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTIMATING AP POSITION USING A MAP OF A WIRELESS LAN RADIO ENVIRONMENT - The present disclosure concerns a method and apparatus for estimating AP position using WLAN radiowave environment map. An embodiment includes filter for generating filtering radiowave map with data selected exclusively for having common MAC address from collected WLAN radiowave environment maps; grid-cell divisor for generating grid radiowave map with arbitrary grid cells from dividing the filtering radiowave map; representative-coordinate mapper for calculating centroid of each of grid cells constituting grid radiowave map and mapping each centroid as representative coordinate to each grid cell; representative-signal-strength mapper for calculating representative signal strengths based on data in grid cell and mapping each representative signal strength to grid cell; weight-value sorter for sorting out weight value corresponding to a range covering representative signal strength as received; and position estimator for estimating positional information of APs having common MAC address based on one or more of representative coordinate, representative signal strength, and weight value. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170384 | NETWORK TECHNOLOGY SELECTION - A system for assisting the installation of a communications service at a customer premises ( | 07-04-2013 |
20130170385 | Methods and Arrangements for Contention Resolution in a Communication System - The present invention relates a User Equipment, UE ( | 07-04-2013 |
20130170386 | NETWORK SIGNAL TRACING USING CHARGING IDENTIFIERS AS TRACE RECORDING SESSION REFERENCES - Signaling through a plurality of network elements is traced during a trace session. The network elements generate trace records that record information associated with a communication session and that include a charging identifier that is used as a trace recording session reference for the trace session. The charging identifier is a unique network-wide identifier for a subscriber, UE or service and can be used by an operations support system to correlate which trace records are associated with a same subscriber, UE or service that is being traced and, thereby, may enable end-to-end tracing through a network. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170387 | Interference Measurement and Reporting for Device-to-Device Communications in a Communication System - An apparatus, method and system for measuring interference for direct device-to-device communications in a communication system. In one embodiment, an apparatus includes a processor and memory including computer program code. The memory and the computer program code are configured, with the processor, to cause the apparatus to monitor an interference transmission from device-to-device (D2D) user equipment participating in cellular communications employing a communication resource; and format a message for reporting the interference levels observed during the interference transmission. In another embodiment, a memory and the computer program code are configured, with the processor, to cause the apparatus to monitor a precoded RS interference transmission from a node B station participating in cellular communications including D2D devices employing a communication resource; and format a message for reporting the RS levels observed during the interference transmission. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170388 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND DELAY DETECTING METHOD - A communication apparatus includes a time-stamp generating unit for generating a time stamp during transmission or reception of a PDU transmitted and received, a transmission-data storing unit, a reception-data storing unit, a frame processing unit configured to generate a PDU including a data refresh instruction to the other node, periodical transmission data in the transmission-data storing unit, and a frame transmission time acquired from the time-stamp generating unit and store, upon receiving a PDU from the other node, periodical transmission data included in the PDU in the reception-data storing unit, and a one-way-delay detecting unit for determining, upon receiving the PDU, according to whether a next PDU has been received within a first delay allowable time after the last PDU was received, or whether a transmission time of the PDU is within a second delay allowable time, presence or absence of occurrence of a delay of a PDU. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170389 | NETWORK CONTROL SINGLE RADIO HANDOVER METHOD AND DEVICE BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - Provided are a device and method for performing handover by detecting a state of another wireless network when only a wireless access interface for a current access network is activated in a mobile terminal. A handover controller performs communication between a mobile terminal performing a single radio handover and an information server managing access information for each wireless network. The handover controller obtains multi RAT access information used for accessing a network accessible at a current position of the mobile terminal. The handover controller obtains a network quality measurement result, which is measured using the multi RAT access information, from the mobile terminal, and determines a target network of the mobile terminal by using the network quality measurement result. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170390 | DELAY MEASUREMENT SYSTEM AND DELAY MEASUREMENT METHOD, AS WELL AS DELAY MEASUREMENT DEVICE AND DELAY MEASUREMENT PROGRAM - The present invention measures 1-way delay without equipping all nodes with special functionality in a situation in which time has not been synchronized. The delay measurement system of the present invention has a transmission origin node and a transmission destination node which is connected to the transmission origin node through a network including relay nodes, and measures the delay time from the transmission origin node to the transmission destination node direction, wherein the transmission origin node generates a clock. On the basis of the generated clock, delay measurement packets are generated at regular periods. The generated delay measurement packets are transmitted to the transmission destination node. The transmission destination node selects the delay measurement packets from among the received frames. The delay received by the delay measurement packets in the network between the transmission origin node to the node itself is measured. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170391 | METHOD OF AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING QUALITY OF AUDIO AND VIDEO BIT STREAM TRANSMISSIONS OVER A TRANSMISSION CHAIN - A method for measuring quality of packetized audio and video transmission over a transmission chain includes: providing one or more measurement detectors along the transmission chain; detecting, by the one or more measurement detectors, loss of bit stream packets at one or more measurement points; determining the unique identifier for each detected lost packet; sending, by the one or more measurement detectors, a list of lost packet identifiers to a central monitoring system; constructing, by the central monitoring system, a simulated stream for each measurement point based on a stored error-free stream and the received lost packet identifiers; and evaluating the simulated stream for deriving a quality score for each measurement point. | 07-04-2013 |
20130176865 | Counteracting Spam in Voice Over Internet Protocol Telephony Systems - An approach is provided to detect a spam message transmitted over a packetized, network-based telephony system. A request to initiate a first voice communication session is received from a requestor. A voice communications session is established with the requestor over the computer network. An audible ringing tone is sent to the requestor over the established voice communications session. While the audible ringing tone is being sent, audio data that is received from the requestor is analyzed. If the analysis detects an audible message in the audio data, then the requestor is identified as a possible spam source. On the other hand, if the analysis fails to detect the audible message in the audio data then the established voice communications session is handled as a non-spam event. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176866 | CALL RECOVERY IN TD-SCDMA HANDOVER FAILURE - A method of wireless communication includes measuring and recording a path loss of a first downlink signal from a source base station, prior to attempting handoff from the source base station to a target base station. The path loss of a second downlink signal from the source base station is measured after unsuccessful handoff from the source base station to the target base station. A UE communicates with the source base station, after unsuccessful handoff, using an uplink timing corresponding to an uplink timing recorded prior to attempting handoff when a difference between the path loss of the first downlink signal and the path loss of the second downlink signal fails to meet a threshold value. A new uplink timing is used when the difference meets the threshold value. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176867 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBJECT GROUPING AND STATE MODELING FOR APPLICATION INSTANCES - Various exemplary embodiments relate to an operational group in a network element of a communication network, where the operational group is associated with monitored objects and monitoring client objects such that the status of the operational group is a function of the operational status of the monitored objects or services. Monitoring client objects can monitor the status of the operational group such that the status of each of the monitoring client objects reflects the status of the operational group. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176868 | PHASE DIFFERENCE SIGNALING IN MIMO MODE UPLINK - An uplink signaling method is described where the UE transmits an indication of its ability to maintain relative transmit phase continuity with respect to a plurality of transmit chains thereof in place of being required to actually maintain the phase difference between its transmitters. The signaling method utilizes straightforward signaling with very little overhead, because the indication may be provided by setting the value of a bit in an uplink transmission. In response, a base station adopts an uplink transmission format for communications by the UE based, at least in part, upon the received indication. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176869 | REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN RESPONSE TO MOTION DETECTION - A method and apparatus to selectively enable and disable one or more modules in a mobile communication device based on a variation in received signal strength indicator (RSSI) values to reduce power consumption while the mobile device is relatively stationary. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176870 | ANTENNA ARRAY CONTROL METHOD AND ACCESS POINT USING THE SAME - The present disclosure provides an antenna array control method and an access point using the same. The antenna array control method may include the following steps. At least a packet is selected as at least a probing packet every probing period. One of the radiation patterns to be probed in an antenna array is used to transmit the probing packet. The packet error rates of the radiation patterns to be probed in the antenna array are calculated. The radiation pattern with a minimum packet error rate among all of the radiation patterns is selected as a best radiation pattern. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176871 | Network Bottleneck Management - The invention provides a method by which a network element in a telecommunications network can report factors that have limited the performance of a UE in an observation period. A bottleneck score is calculated for each factor, the bottleneck score providing a measurement of the extent to which that factor has limited the performance of that UE compared to other factors in the observation period A data record for the UE is populated with the bottleneck scores and sent in a report towards upper layer management functions. When these reports are received (e.g. by a MME) they may be complemented with global entities of the users and aggregated measures created. The bottleneck scores may be calculated by collecting per-UE performance counters from a radio scheduler and estimating an actual UE performance from the collected performance counters, replacing one or more of the measured performance counters with a hypothetical value reflecting a particular factor operating ideally, and estimating a theoretical user performance based on the hypothetical value and remaining performance counters, and assigning a bottleneck score for that factor by comparing the estimated actual user performance with the estimated theoretical user performance. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176872 | FUNCTION VARIABLE VALUE TRANSMITTER, FUNCTION RECEIVER AND SYSTEM - A transmitter-side estimation of the complex channel influence between function variable value transmitters and function receivers is limited to the estimation of the magnitude of the channel influence, so that a pre-distortion of the symbols of the symbol sequences depends on an inverse of the magnitude of the channel influence, but is independent of a phase of the channel influence. Easing the channel estimation does not change the central tendency of the calculated function results transmitted over the multiple channel. Alternatively, on the side of the function receiver, a statistical quantity describing the multiple-access channel is determined. For this purpose, it is sufficient when the function variable value transmitters transmit constant power signals over the multiple-access channel in a channel estimation phase. Thus, the channel estimation effort is transferred to the function receiver and hence occurs less frequently, which again reduces the overall energy expenditure. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176873 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR POWER CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT DURING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - Methods and apparatus for adaptively adjusting temporal parameters such as e.g., wake-up times of digital tracking algorithms (such as timing, frequency and power control). In one exemplary embodiment, wake-up times for tracking loops are based on success/error metrics (e.g., Block Error Rate (BLER), Bit Error Rate (BER), Packet Error Rate (PER), Cyclic Redundancy Checks (CRC), etc.) of one or more previous discontinuous reception (DRX) cycles. In a second embodiment, wake-up times for tracking loops are based on residual frequency and timing errors, etc. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176874 | UPLINK POWER/RATE SHAPING FOR ENHANCED INTERFERENCE COORDINATION AND CANCELLATION - According to an aspect of the present disclosure, a serving base station determines a path loss and/or a distance measurement between the serving base station and a neighbor base station. A cell-specific power control parameter and a UE transmission power may be determined based on the determined path loss and/or distance measurement. Finally, the serving base station assigns a UE transmission rate based at least on a region where a UE is located, the region being within a serving cell | 07-11-2013 |
20130176875 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method of relaying a signal in a wireless communications network comprising a plurality of wireless devices, the method being performed by at least one of said wireless devices to relay a signal in a communication path between one of said plurality of wireless devices and another one of said wireless devices, wherein said at least one of said wireless devices comprises a power amplifier for amplifying said signal, the method comprising receiving a signal from said one of said plurality of wireless devices, determining a peak-to-average power ratio of said received signal under a plurality of predetermined relay modes, determining a back-off value associated with said power amplifier, selecting a mode of relaying said signal from said plurality of predetermined relay modes based on said determined peak-to-average power ratio and said determined back-off value, and transmitting said signal to said another one of said plurality of wireless devices using said selected mode. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176876 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE CONTROL METHOD - Radio control units concurrently perform two or more communications using two or more different communication schemes. Transmission power detection units detect the values of transmission power used for the communications that the radio control units perform using the respective communication schemes. A transmission power management unit obtains the sum of specific absorption rates associated with the respective communications, based on the values of transmission power thus detected by the transmission power detection units. Then, when the thus obtained sum of specific absorption rates exceeds a predetermined reference value, the transmission power management unit instructs protocol control units to perform the communications in a time-division manner in order for the respective communications using the two or more communication schemes to be non-concurrently performed. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176877 | DETECTING BURSTY INTERFERENCE TO TRIGGER A COEXISTENCE INDICATION - A user equipment (UE) may reduce coexistence issues with one or more radio access technologies (RATs) caused by a bursty interference. The bursty interference may be detected by detecting a number of modes in a measured signal sample and determining when a signal contains a multi-modal distribution based at least in part on the detecting. A coexistence indication is created based at least in part on the determining. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176878 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT SUPPORTING ANTENNA DIVERSITY - A wireless communication circuit for a wireless communication device having a plurality of antennas is disclosed. The wireless communication circuit includes: a transceiver for receiving and transmitting network packets; a control circuit for controlling the switching circuit to switch the transceiver among the antennas so that the transceiver receives the preamble of a first network packet; and a receiving signal strength detector for detecting the receiving signal strength value of respective antennas in respective receiving periods during the reception of the preamble conducted by the transceiver. If the receiving signal strength value of each antenna is less than a predetermined threshold, the control circuit selects an antenna with the maximum receiving strength value as a target antenna and controls the switching circuit to couple the transceiver to the selected target antenna so that the transceiver receives the rest of the first network packet through the target antenna. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176879 | PHASE AND AMPLITUDE TRACKING IN THE PRESENCE OF A WALKING PILOT SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for tracking amplitude and phase of a received low frequency signal comprising a walking pilot signal is disclosed, wherein the pilot signal changes in frequency a number of times according to a sequence that repeats. The design includes initializing a FIFO buffer and summing estimated channel power over the sequence to determine an initial total power. The design also includes, for a new received symbol, determining an updated power estimate for the new received symbol, placing the updated power estimate in the FIFO buffer, and removing a least current value from the FIFO buffer, and estimating amplitude of the signal using a sum of all updated power estimates in the FIFO buffer divided by the initial total power. The design may further include determining a delta phase value using maximum ratio combining scaled with a scaling factor. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176880 | PHY BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION FROM BACKPRESSURE PATTERNS - The present invention provides a system and method of determining available bandwidth at a physical layer (PHY) device at a server on a broadband network. A link layer controller of a master administrator adaptively polls a PHY device over a set of time intervals. During polling, the controller places a PHY device's address on a line of a bus and awaits a response from the PHY device. Based upon the response from the PHY device, the administrator can determine whether the PHY device has available bandwidth. The link layer controller uses this information to recalculate its polling scheme to better make use of the available bandwidth over the shared transmission medium to which each PHY device in the network is attached. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176881 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR BLIND INTERFERENCE DECREASE/CANCELLATION TECHNIQUES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which one or more semi-static parameters associated with at least one neighboring eNode B (eNB) and an interfering user equipment (UE) are detected, at an eNB, and a blind interference reduction scheme based on the one or more detected semi-static parameters to reduce a signal from the interfering UE is applied. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176882 | MOBILE STATION WITH ROAMING TIMER - A mobile station in a wireless network includes a roaming timer. The roaming timer is set based on various criteria, and when the roaming timer expires, an attempt to roam is performed. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176883 | Method and Device for Deciding Location of Terminal in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to a method for deciding a location of a terminal in a wireless communication system, and provides the method for deciding the location comprising the following steps: receiving reference signals from a plurality of base stations; and transmitting reference signal time difference (RSTD) which is received from the plurality of base stations, wherein the reference signal is mapped according to a predetermined pattern inside a subframe. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176884 | CROSS-RAT CONFIGURATION FOR MINIMIZATION OF DRIVE TEST - Systems and methods for configuring cross radio access technology minimization of drive testing are presented. In one embodiment, the use of circuit switched fallback is used as a trigger for switching minimization of drive test configurations on a user equipment. After the user equipment returns from circuit switched fallback, the minimization of drive test parameters are reported to the base station. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176885 | METHOD FOR ADJUSTING CELL RESELECTION PRIORITY FOR AVOIDING IDC INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention discloses a method for a first communication module of a user equipment measuring for cell reselection in a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention comprises the following steps: receiving a first message including at least one frequency priority list from a base station; receiving a second message from at one or more second communication modules which coexist in the terminal; and measuring the frequency based on the at least one frequency priority list and the operating frequency information that is included in the second message, when the second message indicates the beginning of the operation of the one or more second communication modules. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176886 | AUTOMATIC DETECTION APPARATUS FOR UL/DL CONFIGURATION IN LTE-TDD SIGNAL AND THE METHOD THEREBY - This invention relates to an automatic detection apparatus for UL/DL configuration in LTE-TDD signal and the method thereby for automatically detecting the UL/DL configuration number of an LTE-TDD signal without a decoder by using a simple structure. An automatic detection apparatus for UL/DL configuration in LTE-TDD signal comprises: a signal receiving unit for receiving an LTE-TDD RF signal and converting the LTE-TDD RF signal into a LTE-TDD baseband signal; a signal extracting unit for extracting a cell-specific reference signal for each subframe length in one frame length of the LTE-TDD baseband signal received from the signal receiving unit; a signal power measurement unit for measuring the power of the corresponding subframe reference signal according to the cell-specific reference signal received from the signal extracting unit; and an UL/DL configuration determination unit for determining whether the corresponding subframe is a DL subframe or an UL subframe according to the comparison result of the power of the corresponding subframe reference signal measured in the signal power measurement unit with a predetermined reference value, and determining the UL/DL configuration number for the corresponding frame based on the subframe number determined as described above. In the above configuration, it is characterized in that the predetermined reference value is the noise power without any LTE-TDD signal. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176887 | METHOD OF REDUCING INTERCELL INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for transmitting a downlink signal through coordinated beamforming with a neighboring cell at a serving cell includes transmitting first subframe information for designating one or more subframes to the neighboring cell, transmitting first Precoding Matrix Index (PMI) restriction related information including one or more PMIs to a User Equipment (UE) of the serving cell, the PMIs forming a beam so that interference affecting the neighboring cell in the one or more subframes has a constant characteristic, receiving first Channel State Information (CSI) reporting measured in the one or more subframes based on the first PMI restriction related information from the UE of the serving cell, and transmitting a downlink signal to the UE of the serving cell based on the first CSI reporting, the neighboring cell receiving CSI reporting corresponding to the neighboring cell, measured by the UE of the neighboring cell in the one or more subframes. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176888 | SWITCH SYSTEM, AND MONITORING CENTRALIZED CONTROL METHOD - A switch system allows free change of a grain degree of monitoring without being conscious of a routing control. For example, a control protocol of a transmitter is used based on the open flow (OpenFlow) technique to control the monitoring function of the switch system, and the centralized control of the monitoring can be realized as the whole network and the monitoring result is reflected on the routing control. Here, the switch has a flow table for packet transfer and a flow table for monitoring. Both of the tables are searched to one packet and a multi-hit operation is performed to execute the operation of each of the entries. That is, both the tables are searched and the packet is transferred according to corresponding flow entries. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176889 | CLOSED LOOP FORMATION PREVENTING SYSTEM AND CLOSED LOOP FORMATION PREVENTING METHOD - In an open flow network system in which there are a plurality of networks, in each of which one OFC (OpenFlow Controller) manages a plurality of OFSs (OpenFlow Switches), and a large network is formed by a combination of them, registration of a flow entry which forms a closed loop is prevented without a component and a procedure for cooperation of the plurality of OFCs. Specifically, after route calculation, the OFC temporarily registers an flow entry of a calculation result on a flow table of the OFS as the flow entry for a test. After that, the OFS flows the test packet according to the temporarily registered flow entry. When the test packet is routed without forming the closed loop, the OFS detects it and normally registers the flow entry for a first time. Detecting that the test packet forms a closed loop, the OFS deletes a temporarily registering flow entry and returns an error to the OFC. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176890 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay communication system is described in which a relay node communicates with a base station using a sequence of frames, each frame comprising a plurality of sub-frames. The relay node has an energy saving mode in which it monitors for communications from said base station in at least one pre-determined sub-frame of each frame and does not monitor for communication from said base station in at least one other sub-frame of that frame. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176891 | METHOD FOR MEASURING TO ELIMINATE IDC INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention discloses a method for a first communication module of a user equipment measuring for eliminating in-device coexistence (IDC) interference in a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention comprises the following steps: receiving a message from one or more second communication modules which coexists in the terminal; performing inter-frequency measurement based on the setting information related to measuring when the message indicates the beginning of the operation of the second communication module; and reporting to the base station the result of the inter-frequency measurement. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182583 | ACQUISITION OF CELL INFORMATION FOR ENHANCING NETWORK OPERATION IN HETEROGENEOUS ENVIRONMENT - A user equipment (UE) performs measurements on a serving cell and at least one neighbor cell in a heterogeneous wireless communications network that includes one or more higher power radio network nodes operating near one or more lower power radio network nodes. The UE acquires enhanced neighbor cell information (eNCI) including at least subframe information and determines an allowed set of one or more subframes during which the UE may make downlink and/or uplink measurements for at least one cell in the heterogeneous network. A network node in the heterogeneous network generates the eNCI, from which the UE may determine the allowed set of radio transmission subframes, and provides the eNCI for the UE to coordinate the UE measurements on the at least one cell during one or more of the allowed subframes. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182584 | Methods and apparatus relating to connection and/or session establishment decisions - Wireless communications devices with existing peer to peer links transmit, e.g., in accordance with a recurring schedule, quality of service related information corresponding to the existing links. The transmitted quality of service related information is, e.g., information indicating an obtained quality of service for the existing link. In some embodiments, quality of service related information is communicated in one of: a peer discovery signal, a connection ID broadcast signal and a contention resolution signal. A wireless communications device seeking to establish a new peer to peer link receives quality of service related information corresponding to existing links and estimates a quality a service achievable on the new desired potential link based on the received quality of service related information. The wireless communications device decides whether or not to establish the new peer to peer link based on its quality of service estimate. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182585 | LINK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTI-STAGE, HIGH-SPEED SYSTEMS - A system includes a plurality of modules, a backplane communicatively coupled to the plurality of modules, a plurality of links defined between the plurality of modules over the backplane, and a link management system configured to dynamically manage parameters associated with each of the plurality of links A link management method includes, for a system, defining a codebook for each module, device, and interconnect in the system, the codebook includes data describing physical link topologies and configuration parameters associated therewith, for initializing a link in the system, obtaining appropriate codebooks for each segment in the link, calculating an overall link loss for the link based on data in the appropriate codebooks, and obtaining configuration parameters for the link based on the overall link loss. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182586 | OBTAINING COMMUNICATION SESSION INITIATION INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a user equipment (UE) receives request to set-up a communication session of a given type while the UE is in a dormant state (e.g., URA_PCH or CELL_PCH). The UE configures a state transition request message (e.g., a cell update message) (i) to request that an access network transition the UE from the dormant state to a target state (e.g., CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH) and to obtain a network-assigned serving cell-specific identifier (e.g., C-RNTI) for exchanging data between the UE and the serving cell in association with the communication session of the given type and (ii) to indicate the given type of the communication session. The UE transmits the state transition request message to the access network, and the access network determines the given type of the communication session based on the state transition request message. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182587 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE RECEIVER MODE SELECTION DURING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - Methods and apparatus for adaptively adjusting receiver operation during non-continuous (e.g., discontinuous) reception. In one exemplary embodiment, a user device such as a User Equipment (UE) adaptively adjusts its reception mode based on a determined actual error. The reception mode is selected so as to improve reception performance, while still minimizing overall power consumption. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182588 | POWER LINE COMMUNICATION-BASED LOCAL HOTSPOT WITH WIRELESS POWER CONTROL CAPABILITY - A method and a system for providing wireless communication facility with low interference between multiple wireless devices providing hotspot wireless coverage within a local area of an integrated enterprise or integrated home environment is disclosed. The sensor devices implementing hotspots are connected to a local area network (LAN) based on power line communication (PLC) and enabled with wireless power output control capability, allowing the coverage of area of each sensor device to be adjusted. The power output control is by a switch which allows the power output to be increased and decreased depending on coverage required and the output of the nearest hotspot. The power output level is indicated on the sensor by LEDs to enable resetting and adjustment. The use of power control and elimination of coverage overlap allow multiple hotspots to be used for achieving good connectivity while reducing interferences and noise within hotspots during connection and use. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182589 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED COEXISTENCE ALGORITHMS IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for mitigating the effects of interference between multiple air interfaces located on an electronic device. In one embodiment, the air interfaces include a WLAN interface and PAN (e.g., Bluetooth) interface, and information such as Receiver Signal Strength Index (RSSI) as well as system noise level information are used in order to intelligently execute interference mitigation methodologies, including the selective application of modified frequency selection, variation of transmitter power, and/or change of operating mode (e.g., from multiple-in multiple-out (MIMO) to single-in, single-out (SISO)) so as to reduce isolation requirements between the interfaces. These methods and apparatus are particularly well suited to use cases where the WLAN interface is operating with high data transmission rates. Business methods associated with the foregoing technology are also described. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182590 | Communication Method Between Two Distinct Networks with Radio Communication Nodes, Associated Processing Module and Computer Program - A communication method between two distinct networks with radio communication nodes, includes the following steps: collecting geographical location information for the nodes of the first and second network, deducing a geographical coverage area of the first and second network as a function of geographical location information; determining an intersection zone of the geographical coverage areas; identifying, as a function of the collected location information, nodes of the first and second network, located inside said intersection zone; and sending said nodes of the first identified network data indicating the collected geographical locations of the nodes of the second identified network. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182591 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MONITORING DEVICE OF RING NETWORK, AND FLOW RATE MONITORING METHOD OF RING NETWORK - A communication system includes a plurality of communication devices forming a ring network and a monitoring device. Each of the plurality of communication devices appends, to a frame that the communication device relays, an ID tag indicating the number of communication devices relaying that frame in the ring network. The monitoring device refers to frames received by a predetermined communication device and having the ID appended thereto, and tallies an amount of data for frames for each number of relaying communication devices. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182592 | System and Method for Quality of Service Control - A method for measuring delay in a wireless fidelity (WiFi) network includes measuring a delay associated with transmission of a packet through the WiFi network in response to a measurement request from a requesting device, and contending for access to a communications channel of the WiFi network after measurement of the delay. The method also includes transmitting the delay as measured to the access point using the communications channel after a successful contention. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182593 | DATA UNIT FORMAT FOR SINGLE USER BEAMFORMING IN LONG -RANGE WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANS) - A method includes receiving data units each having a preamble with first and second preamble portions, detecting symbol constellation rotations of OFDM symbols in the first preamble portions, and determining, based on the detected rotations, whether the preambles conform to a first format. The method also includes, when it is determined that a preamble conforms to the first format, processing the second preamble portion according to the first format, and, when it is determined that a preamble does not conform to the first format, (i) determining whether information bits in the first preamble portion indicate a single- or multi-user data unit, (ii) when it is determined that the information bits indicate a single-user data unit, processing the second preamble portion according to a second format, and (iii) when it is determined that the information bits indicate a multi-user data unit, processing the second preamble portion according to a third format. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182594 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL - An apparatus and a method for generation of channel state information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes transmitting, by an evolved Node B (eNB), a first reference signal to a plurality of User Equipments (UEs), receiving channel state information generated based on the first reference signal from the plurality of UEs, selecting candidate UEs to which wireless resources are to be allocated and transmitting second reference signals to the selected candidate UEs, receiving channel state information generated based on the second reference signals from the candidate UEs, and selecting final UEs, to which wireless resources are to be allocated, from the candidate UEs based on the channel state information generated based on the second reference signals, and transmitting control information for data reception to the selected final UEs. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182595 | ANALOG FRONT-END CIRCUIT FOR MEASUREMENT - An analog front-end circuit for measurement used as an interface between a sensor and a control device includes: an isolated part including at least an AD conversion circuit configured to serve as an interface to the sensor; a non-isolated part including at least a control circuit configured to serve as an interface to the control device; and an isolated communication unit configured to perform isolated half-duplex communication between the isolated part and the non-isolated part. The control circuit is configured to transmit an AD conversion instruction to the AD conversion circuit after providing setting for measurement to the isolated part via the isolated communication unit, obtain a result of AD conversion by the AD conversion circuit from the isolated part via the isolated communication unit, and transfer the obtained AD conversion result to the control device. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182596 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT NETWORK WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and an apparatus for sending and receiving channel state information in network Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) wireless communication systems are provided. Hybrid feedback technology is provided to transfer complete Channel State Information (CSI) to a transmitter by efficiently combining limited amounts of long-term channel information and short-term channel information are In a down link MIMO network system. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182597 | MOBILE PEER-TO-PEER CONTENT SHARING METHOD AND SYSTEM - Embodiment of the disclosure set forth methods for sharing data in a wireless network. Some example methods include storing in a database a content related information associated with a first mobile device, receiving a request for the content related information from a second mobile device, searching the database for the content related information, and transmitting a search result to the second mobile device to enable the transfer of content between the first mobile device and the second mobile device. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182598 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMISSION MODE SELECTION IN A MULTI CHANNEL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques to select a suitable transmission mode for a data transmission in a multi channel communication system with multiple spatial channels having varying SNRs are presented in this disclosure. For certain embodiments, a closed-loop technique may be applied, in which back-off factors used to calculate an effective SNR value fed back to a transmitter are adjusted. An open-loop rate control scheme is also presented in which a transmitter may select a data rate and number of streams based on whether transmitted packets are received in error at a receiver. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182599 | Technique for Channel Estimation in the Presence of a Signal Phase Discontinuity - A technique for performing channel estimation based on a received signal comprising a first signal part and a second signal part in the presence of an unknown phase discontinuity between the first signal part and the second signal part is presented. A method implementation of this technique comprises providing a first channel parameter that is based on the first signal part, determining a second channel parameter based on the second signal part, estimating the phase discontinuity from the first channel parameter and the second channel parameter, updating the first channel parameter based on the estimated phase discontinuity, and determining a channel estimate based on the second signal part including performing channel estimation filtering using the updated first channel parameter as filter state information. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182600 | INTERFERENCE-AWARE SCHEDULING WITH BROADCAST/MULTICAST SIGNALING - A method for interference-aware scheduling is provided. The method can include acquiring a plurality of interference characteristics, each of the interference characteristics associated with a range of communication resources. The method may further include combining at least two of the interference characteristics into a combined interference characteristic, and transmitting a message encoding the combined interference characteristic. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182601 | System and Method for Aggregating and Estimating the Bandwidth of Multiple Network Interfaces - The present invention provides a system and method for aggregating and estimating the bandwidth of the multiple network interfaces. Particularly, the invention provides a cross layer system for bandwidth aggregation based on dynamic analysis of network conditions. Further, the invention provides a system and method of estimation for evaluating bandwidth of multiple physical interfaces. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182602 | Method For Transmitting A Signal While Avoiding The Influences Of An Interference Signal Existing In The Same Channel In A Communication System Having A Main Communication Device And A Plurality Of Terminal Communication Devices - The method for transmitting a signal while avoiding the influences of an interference signal in the same channel according to the present invention comprises: a process in which communication devices in the communication system perceive, in a distributed manner, whether or not an interference signal exists in a transmission channel being used; a process in which the communication devices in the communication system temporarily transceive signals using a plurality of available transmission channels other than the transmission channel currently being used so as to avoid an interference signal if the interference signal is perceived; and a process of determining the channel having a best link state as a transmission channel from among the plurality of used transmission channels and returning to an existing transmission system using a single channel. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182603 | METHOD OF DETERMINING LOCATION - A method for determining a location of a mobile apparatus based on the presence of wireless access point signals. The received wireless signal strength from a plurality of observed wireless access points is compared with profiles each relevant to a different user context and containing a plurality of previously registered wireless access point signal strengths around a previously registered location. The location of the mobile apparatus is determined based on the profile most closely matching the collection of observed wireless access points. Wireless access points present in the profile but not observed are ignoring during the matching process. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188499 | PERFORMING IDLE MODE MOBILITY MEASUREMENTS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture for performing idle mode mobility measurements in a mobile network are disclosed. An example method in a user equipment (UE) disclosed herein comprises receiving, from the mobile network, a system information block (SIB) message specifying idle mode mobility measurement is to be performed. If the measurement parameter threshold is not configured in the SIB message or if the SIB message includes an indication to not use a configured measurement parameter threshold in the SIB message, the UE sets a measurement parameter threshold for idle mode mobility measurement. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188500 | AUTOMATIC UPLINK-DOWNLINK RATIO RECONFIGURATION SETTING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - At least one neighbor cell is identified by a base station by detecting a synchronization signal of the at least one neighbor cell. A received signal power, such as a Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) or a Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), or a combination thereof, is also measured from the at least one neighbor cell. Identifying information and the received signal power of the at least one neighbor cell is then communicated to a network entity of the wireless network. Information is received from the network entity indicating whether the base station can enable a reconfiguration of the allocation of uplink and downlink subframes used in the cell of the base station. Based on the information received from the network entity, the base station enables a reconfiguration of the allocation of uplink and downlink subframes used in the cell. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188501 | Techniques for Coordinated Uplink Power Control - Examples are disclosed for determining, at a base station, a target received power parameter for a wireless device in communication with the base station. In some examples, the target received power parameter may be determined based on one or more uplink status signals received from the wireless device at the base station and/or one or more other base stations. For these examples, the wireless device may adjust one or more transmit power levels responsive to receiving the target received power parameter from the base station. Other examples are described and claimed. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188502 | Techniques for Uplink Coverage Analysis - Examples are disclosed for analyzing uplink interference or pathloss associated with uplink coverage provided by one or more base stations for a wireless network based on logged uplink signal quality or interference information at least temporarily maintained at a wireless device. In some examples, a base station may request the logged uplink signal quality or interference information from the wireless device. The wireless devices may have been configured to measure uplink signal quality or interference characteristics for one or more communication links between the wireless device and one or more base stations of the wireless network. The logged uplink signal quality or interference information may be based on the measured uplink signal quality or interference characteristics. Other examples are described and claimed. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188503 | Low Mobility States And Procedures - Mobility states are defined in order to prevent excess signaling overhead and to conserve power on a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in a wireless network. The WTRU may determine that is operating in a low mobility state based on triggers related to the frequency of movement of the WTRU between network cells. The WTRU may change cells less frequently in a low or no mobility state than in a normal mobility state. Upon determining that the WTRU is in the low or no mobility state, the WTRU may configure mobility procedures associated with the low or no mobility state in order to conserve power and other network resources. The WTRU may coordinate its mobility state with the network. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188504 | TEST FIXTURE AND METHOD FOR SECURING AND TESTING NETWORK DEVICES - A system and method for testing multiple residential gateways. One of the multiple residential gateways is engaged in a testing platform of a test fixture. The testing platform includes an adapter for interfacing the set-top box with the test fixture. The multiple residential gateways are automatically tested in parallel. Test results for each of the multiple residential gateways are measured. The test results for each of the multiple residential gateways are displayed to a user. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188505 | Control and Data Signaling in Heterogeneous Wireless Communication Networks - A method in a wireless communication device including receiving control signaling from a base station in a control region of a downlink carrier spanning a first bandwidth, receiving a signaling message from the base station indicating a second bandwidth, receiving a first control message within the control region using a first Downlink Control Information (DCI) format size, the first DCI format size based on the first bandwidth, and receiving a second control message within the control region using a second DCI format size, the second DCI format size based on the second bandwidth, wherein the second bandwidth is distinct from the first bandwidth and the first and second control messages indicate downlink resource assignments for the downlink carrier. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188506 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING CHANNEL IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A channel allocation apparatus in a communication system includes: a measuring unit configured to measure clear channel assessments (CCA) of a plurality of stations (STAs) included in the communication system; a checking unit configured to compare the measured CCAs to preset reference CCA, and check fairness and unfairness in the STAs; and an allocating unit configured to change and allocate channels allocated to STAs corresponding to unfairness, according to the measured CCA and the reference CCA. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188507 | DATA TRANSMISSION AND POWER CONTROL IN A MULTIHOP RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for transmitting data with distributed and centralized scheduling in a multihop relay communication system are described. For distributed scheduling, a relay station may generate and send first channel quality information (CQI) to a base station and receive second CQI from a subscriber station. The relay station may receive data sent by the base station based on the first CQI and may resend the data to the subscriber station based on the second CQI. For centralized scheduling, the relay station may generate first CQI for the base station, receive second CQI from the subscriber station, and send both CQIs to the base station. The relay station may receive data sent by the base station based on the first CQI and may resend the data to the subscriber station based on a scheduling decision determined based on the second CQI. Techniques for distributed and centralized power control are also described. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188508 | POSITIONING DEVICE OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING WIRELESS LAN INFORMATION OF DEVICE, POSITIONING SERVER OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND METHOD FOR DRIVING SERVER - Embodiments of the disclosure concern a mobile terminal positioning apparatus, method for establishing wireless LAN information of the apparatus, mobile terminal positioning server, and method for operating the server wherein mobility of access point is determined by using positioning information provided at the request of mobile terminal positioning, updating wireless LAN information in wireless LAN server based on stationary access point to make it available to providing mobile terminal positioning service. Exemplary positioning apparatus includes access point for performing local wireless communications; node information-based server for managing wireless environment information of a node in charge of the mobile terminal communications; wireless LAN server; positioning server for calculating distance between the access point and node or between access point and mobile terminal, and if a certain distance is exceeded, determining the access point to be transportable and deletable, and providing the positioning result on stationary access point basis. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188509 | MEASURING UNIT AND A METHOD FOR MEASURING TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS OF A DEVICE UNDER TEST - A measuring unit for measuring transmission parameters of a device under test, comprising a control unit, a transmitter and receiver unit and an evaluation unit. The transmitter and receiver unit is connected via a first connection to the control unit and via at least one transmission channel to the device under test. The device under test is connected via a second connection to the evaluation unit, wherein, for the measurement of the transmission parameters of the device under test, control-data packets and test-data packets are transmitted separately between the control unit and the evaluation unit, and wherein a transmission channel for the test-data packets can be disturbed in a targeted manner. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188510 | Methods and Nodes for Handling Measurements - The embodiments herein relate to a method in a positioning node ( | 07-25-2013 |
20130194936 | MOCA QUALITY INDEX MEASUREMENT SYSTEM FOR QUALIFYING HOME NETWORKS - Systems and methods for quantifying the suitability of a coax network segment to support MoCA communications, comprising: transmitting a test signal associated with MoCA communications through the segment's first end; receiving the test signal through the segment's second end; determining a response function; determining a channel degradation reference based on the highest power level of the response function and a predetermined reference; calculating subcarrier degradation for each MoCA subcarrier, in accordance with the difference between the channel degradation reference and the subcarrier response function; and quantifying the suitability of the segment to support MoCA communications from the first end to the second end in accordance with the subcarrier degradation of all subcarriers in the response function. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194937 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING INTELLIGENT CODEC RATE ADAPTATION FOR WIRELESS USERS - The method includes receiving, at a network element, a media data packet sent from a first source user equipment (UE) towards a first destination UE; detecting, at the network element, congestion in at least one of a downlink channel between the network element and the first destination UE, and an uplink channel between the first source UE and the network element; identifying a second source UE that is transmitting first data to a second destination UE through the network element and has a subscriber priority level lower than the first source UE if the detecting detects congestion; sending a congestion indication that causes the second source UE to lower a rate at which the second source UE transmits the first data through the network element to the second destination UE if the detecting detects congestion; and sending the media data packet from the network element to the first destination UE. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194938 | Interference Control Mechanism in Multi-Band Communication - There is provided a mechanism for controlling communications conducted in multiple frequency bands so as to decrease an interference level between the communications. When an interference situation caused between a first set UL communications performed on at least two different frequency bands and a DL communication performed on another frequency band is determined, a frequency carrier deactivation processing is conducted so as to deactivate either one of carriers of the at least two frequency bands of the set of UL communications. The deactivation processing comprises for example an autonomous denial on the UE side or an interference reporting with deactivation on the eNB side. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194939 | TRANSCEIVER - Embodiments of the invention provide a method of configuring a transceiver to transmit and receive signals at a plurality of frequencies including at least a first transmitted signal modulated at a first transmission frequency, a first received signal modulated at a first reception frequency, and a second transmitted signal modulated at a second transmission frequency, the method comprising:
| 08-01-2013 |
20130194940 | Base Station, User Equipment, and Methods therein in a Communications System - A method in a first base station for obtaining channel state information from a user equipment is provided. The first base station is comprised in a wireless communication system. The wireless communication system further comprises the user equipment. The first base station estimates ( | 08-01-2013 |
20130194941 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR RRC SWITCHING - In a method of controlling RRC (Radio Resource Control) state switching in a wireless communication system, adaptively controlling (S40) RRC state switching between an idle state and a connected state for a user equipment based on at least a detected mobility measure for said user equipment. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194942 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communication System - Method and arrangement in a first base station for calculating a first location parameter a of a user equipment in order to improve beamforming accuracy. The first base station and the user equipment are comprised in a Coordinated Multiple Point “CoMP” communication system together with a second base station. The method comprises measuring a signal received from the user equipment, estimating a first parameter value α′ based on the measured signal, obtaining a second parameter value α″, based on an estimated second location parameter β of the user equipment, estimated at the second base station and calculating the first location parameter α, based on the first estimated parameter value α′ and the obtained second parameter value α″. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194943 | EVOLVED NODE B AND METHOD FOR COHERENT COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION WITH PER CSI-RS FEEDBACK - An evolved Node B (eNB) and method for coherent coordinated multipoint transmission with per CSI-RS feedback are generally described herein. The eNB may configure a first cooperating point and a second cooperating point to jointly transmit a multi-node channel-state information (CSI) reference signal (RS) (CSI-RS) in predetermined resource elements of a resource block. The eNB may receive CSI reports as feedback from user equipment (UE). The CSI reports may include a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) indicating relative phase information between the cooperating points based on the multi-node CSI-RS. The CSI reports for the multi-node CSI-RS may be restricted to a PMI of rank-1. The eNB may configure the cooperating points for a coherent joint transmission to the UE based at least on the relative phase information. The coherent joint transmission may also be jointly beamformed based on single-node PMIs. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194944 | System and Method To Avoid Interference With Radar Systems - A gateway device includes an input port for receiving Internet signals, a single RF module, a memory and a processor. The memory has computer executable instructions stored therein, wherein execution of the computer executable instructions by the processor causes the processor to retrieve a channel monitoring time from the memory. The execution of the computer executable instructions further causes the processor to monitor selected channels and develop and store in the memory a value of a confidence level for each channel. Each channel is monitored for a predetermined period of time between transmissions of data and the confidence level associated with a channel indicates the probability that frequencies associated with such channel are used by a radar system. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194945 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR IMPLEMENTING A MULTI-RAB MINIMUM TFC DETERMINATION ALGORITHM BASED ON TRANSMIT POWER - In an aspect of the present disclosure, presented is a method for wireless communication that includes obtaining at least one transport format combination (TFC), determining a minimum TFC (MinTFC) mode based on at least one TFC state of at least one TFC inside or outside a MinTFC set, and controlling at least one TFC based on the MRAB MinTFC mode. Through this method, pack-switched transmission power can be managed in a manner that will cause a circuit-switched call to function properly in challenging power conditions. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194946 | CONVERGED ENHANCED ETHERNET NETWORK - A system to improve a Converged Enhanced Ethernet network may include a controller having a computer processor connected to a layer 2 endpoint buffer. The system may also include a manager executing on the controller to monitor the layer 2 endpoint buffer by determining buffer data packet occupancy and/or rate of change in the buffer data packet occupancy. The system may further include a reporter to notify a congestion source of the layer 2 endpoint buffer based upon the buffer data packet occupancy and/or rate of change in the buffer data packet occupancy. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194947 | UE-INITIATED DYNAMIC ACTIVATION AND DE-ACTIVATION OF SECONDARY CARRIERS - Managing of secondary carriers for a multicarrier user equipment (UE) is described in which the UE initiates or provides input for activation and deactivation of selected secondary cells in a carrier aggregation depending on allocation or provisioning of UE radio frequency resources. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194948 | METHODS FOR INDICATING BACKHAUL RELAY GEOMETRY - A backhaul quality is measured. One or more subsets of cell identifiers having a mapped backhaul quality that maps to the measured backhaul quality are identified. The one or more subsets have a set of cell identifiers associated therewith. A network is queried to indicate one or more cell identifiers in the identified subset of cell identifiers available for a user equipment (UE) relay. One of the one or more indicated cell identifiers is selected. If more than one subset of cell identifiers has a mapped backhaul quality that maps to the measured backhaul quality, first and second subsets having respective first and second mapped backhaul qualities are selected and the backhaul qualities are compared relative to a backhaul quality threshold. The mapped backhaul quality that most satisfies the backhaul quality threshold is identified for the network query. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194949 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EXTRACTING STRUCTURED APPLICATION DATA FROM A COMMUNICATIONS LINK - Systems and methods for generating a semantic description of operations between network agents. In an embodiment, packet-level traffic between two or more network agents is captured. The packet-level traffic is bundled into one or more messages, wherein each message comprises one or more elements. For each of the messages, the elements of the message are matched to one or more attributes, and the message is decoded into message data based on the matched attributes. The message data is then used to generate a semantic description of operations between the network agents. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194950 | SYSTEMS AND/OR METHODS FOR MANAGING OR IMPROVING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN CELLS - Systems and methods for managing and/or improving interference in cells may be provided. For example, in embodiments, a partial-band Almost Blank Subframe (PB-ABS) subframe and/or a spatial Almost Blank Subframe (SABS) may be provided and/or used for coordinating communication with in networks with smaller and larger cells (e.g. pico or macro cells). For example, a PB-ABS may provide a dimension (e.g. frequency) that may be used to define a region and/or particular resources (e.g. resource blocks) reserved for pico cell operations or transmissions and a region or other resources (e.g. not those reserved for pico cell operations) available for macro cell operations or transmissions. Additionally, based on beam parameters (e.g. associated with cell partitioning), SABS may offer an additional dimension (e.g. spatial) that may be used to prevent transmission in a particular spatial direction. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194951 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DATA SERVICE USING BROADCASTING SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for providing a data service by using a broadcasting signal are provided. To transmit the broadcasting signal by an Access Point (AP) located within a coverage area of a base station (eNB), the AP transmits configuration information, used for transmission of the broadcasting signal on the same frequency band as that of the eNB, to the eNB, receives broadcasting signal transmission information, based on the configuration information, from the eNB, and transmits the broadcasting signal according to the broadcasting signal transmission information. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194952 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL (TCP) PACKET LOSS - Provided is a method of identifying a transmission control protocol (TCP) packet loss, including transmitting at least one TCP data packet to a TCP receiver, estimating wireless channel status information using the TCP receiver by interaction between a TCP layer and a physical layer, and receiving an acknowledgement (ACK) packet including the estimated wireless channel status information from the TCP receiver. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194953 | POWER CONTROL MANAGEMENT IN UPLINK (UL) COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (COMP) TRANSMISSION - Techniques for performing path loss (PL) compensation in coordinated multipoint (CoMP) systems are provided. A method for wireless communications by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method generally includes selecting, from a plurality of transmission points involved in uplink (UL) coordinated multipoint (CoMP) operations with the UE, a transmission point to associate with for path loss (PL) compensation, and adjusting power of one or more transmissions based on path loss measured based on the selected transmission point | 08-01-2013 |
20130194954 | MOBILITY IMPROVEMENT USING INCREASED NUMBER OF MOBILITY MEASUREMENTS FOR A TIME PERIOD - A method includes performing, responsive to entry into a cell, with a selected interval a number of measurements during a time period. The method also includes ceasing, after expiration of the time period, to perform the measurements that were performed responsive to the entry into the cell. The selected interval may be a maximum interval during which a measurement should be performed. Another method includes determining information to be used by a user equipment to perform, responsive to entry by the user equipment into a cell, a number of measurements using a selected interval during a time period. This other method includes signaling the information to the user equipment. Apparatus, computer program products, and systems are also disclosed. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194955 | Method and System for UMTS HSDPA Shared Control Channel Processing - Aspects of a method and system for UMTS HSDPA Shared Control Channel processing may include calculating at a receiver, for each one of a plurality of control channels, a quality metric derived from at least one Viterbi Decoder state metric. A control channel may be selected on the basis of the quality metrics, where the quality metric is selected that provides maximum confidence. The selected control channel may be chosen if its corresponding 3GPP metric is greater than a specified threshold, where the threshold is a design parameter. A validity of a selected control channel may be determined based on consistency and a CRC, where the CRC may be derived from decoding a sub-frame. The calculating and selecting may be done for a first slot of a sub-frame for High-Speed Shared Control Channels. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194956 | System and Method for Common Control Channels in a Communications System - A method for operating a communications controller includes selecting a search space configuration out of a set of candidate search space configurations for a user equipment served by the communications controller, wherein the search space configuration specifies one or more search spaces to be monitored out of a set of search spaces, and signaling the selected search space configuration to the user equipment. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194957 | RADIO BASE STATION AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - To provide a radio base station and a control method thereof wherein a simple way is used to relax the load concentration of a power control and also relax the control delay. A radio base station and a control method thereof wherein a frame generating part inserts a dummy TPC command, and a power setting part sets a TPC command, whereby a process of deciding the TPC command to be inserted can be delayed by the time required for the processes done in the frame generating part, a modulating part and a spreading part and wherein the process of deciding the TPC command and a process of deciding a power value are separated from and done at different timings from a process of controlling a TPC command insertion status and a process of controlling a power setting status, with the result that even when the processes are concentrated, a load dispersion can be done. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194958 | DETERMINING LOSS OF IP PACKETS - A method of determining loss of IP packets that are transported over a network ( | 08-01-2013 |
20130194959 | BI-DIRECTIONAL LINK MARGIN ESTABLISHMENT FOR WIRELESS EMBEDDED SYSTEMS - A method for bi-directional link margin establishment includes sending a first link margin exchange packet by a wireless end point (WEP) to a wireless access point (WAP); measuring an uplink signal strength of the first packet; sending to the WEP a second packet comprising the measured uplink signal strength of the first packet; measuring a downlink signal strength of the second packet; calculating an uplink link margin based on the uplink signal strength from the second packet; sending to the WAP a third packet comprising the measured downlink signal strength of the second packet and the calculated uplink link margin; measuring the uplink signal strength of the third packet; calculating a downlink link margin based on the downlink signal strength from the third packet; and sending to the WEP a fourth packet comprising the measured uplink signal strength of the third packet and the calculated downlink link margin. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194960 | LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT BY ITS IP ADDRESS - A technique for locating equipment connected via a high-speed line to a distributor device of fixed and predetermined position. The technique involves measuring signal attenuation between the equipment and the distributor device, and estimating the position of the equipment relative to the distributor device, deduced from this attenuation measurement. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194961 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL IN MULTIPLE NODE SYSTEM - Provided are a method of transmitting a signal of a multi-node system. The method includes: transmitting a first signal to a user equipment via the plurality nodes by applying a first power factor; receiving power feedback information as a feedback from the user equipment; and transmitting a second signal to the user equipment via at least one node among the plurality of nodes by applying a second power factor, wherein the first power factor and the second power factor are elements for determining transmit power to be applied to the plurality of nodes, wherein the power factor information includes information for transmit power applicable to each of the plurality of nodes by measuring the first signal, and wherein the second power factor is determined based on the power factor information. | 08-01-2013 |
20130201839 | SEGMENT SIZE DETERMINATION - A method is provided that includes determining, via data processing circuitry, error rate metrics of data transmissions over a constrained application protocol (CoAP) using a first CoAP segment size. The method further includes determining, via the data processing circuitry, a second CoAP segment size for the data transmissions based at least in part upon the error rate metrics. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201840 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION - Some embodiments provide a method for channel estimation in a wireless device. According to the method, the wireless device obtains an indication that a set of antenna ports, or antenna port types, share at least one channel property. The wireless device then estimates one or more of the shared channel properties based at least on a first reference signal received from a first antenna port included in the set, or having a type corresponding to one of the types in the set. Furthermore, the wireless device performs channel estimation based on a second reference signal received from a second antenna port included in the set, or having a type corresponding to one of the types in the set, wherein the channel estimation is performed using at least the estimated channel properties. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201841 | UPLINK FEEDBACK FOR MULTI-SITE SCHEDULING - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed for a user equipment (UE) to provide feedback in a multi-site scheduling system (e.g., a system where multiple entities may schedule and/or send data to the UE). For example, the UE may receive a first data from a first network entity and a second data from a second network entity. A network entity may include entities that transmit data and/or control information to the UE, e.g., an eNodeB (eNB). The UE may generate feedback relating to received data, such as ACK/NACK information or channel state information (CSI). The UE may send a first feedback relating to the first data in a first subframe and a second feedback relating to the second data in a second subframe. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201842 | MEASUREMENTS FOR THE INTERWORKING OF WIRELESS WIDE AREA AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Technology is discussed for capturing performance measurements from Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) transmission points and Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Access Points (AP). The performance measurements can provide information about the interworking a WWAN and one or more WLANs that can be used to offload traffic from the WWAN. Also, an illustrative example of the collection of performance measurements at a WWAN is explained. Furthermore, the correlation, analysis, and general harnessing of performance measurements to optimize and/or maintain combinations between a WWAN and one or more WLANs is discussed, among other topics. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201843 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING NETWORK PACKETS RECEIVED ON A CLIENT DEVICE USING OPPORTUNISTIC POLLING BETWEEN NETWORKING LAYERS - A method for receiving network packets on a client device comprising: initially entering into a first mode of operation in which polling from a network layer to a driver layer is disabled, wherein in the first mode of operations data packets received by the driver layer are pushed up to the network layer; monitoring a load factor defining a current network load on the client device; and entering into a second mode of operation in which polling from the network layer to the driver layer is enabled, wherein when in the second mode of operation, the network layer polling the driver layer when it is ready to accept new packets from the driver layer. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201844 | PARAMETER PREDICTION FOR AUTONOMOUS DSL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PROFILE SELECTION - Method and arrangement for predicting a parameter indicative of an achievable bit rate when using a certain configuration in a digital subscriber line. The method involves obtaining basic configuration parameters of a known configuration; selecting a candidate configuration; and deriving an estimated parameter, indicative of an achievable bit rate, based on the obtained and selected parameters. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201845 | Method for Allocating a Network Entity - The invention relates to a method for allocating a network entity for handling user communication signals of a user, the user communication signals comprising payload and signalling load. The method comprises obtaining ( | 08-08-2013 |
20130201846 | METHOD FOR EVALUATING AN AVAILABLE PATH BITRATE BASED ON AN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT PATH SELECTION - A method for evaluating an available bitrate over a path among one of at least two paths linking a first endpoint and a second endpoint, the path being called an evaluation path, is disclosed. The first endpoint is configured for sending data packets to the second endpoint, the second endpoint is being configured for sending at each data packet reception an acknowledgment message to the first endpoint through one of the at least two path selected at each data packet reception. The method comprises, at the first endpoint, steps of:
| 08-08-2013 |
20130201847 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE AD HOC NETWORKS - A neighborhood multimedia sharing controller (NMSC) includes a dynamic spectrum management (DSM) management entity configured to allocate multimedia packets to available unlicensed frequency bands for use by a respective radio access technology (RAT) selected from several RAT physical layers, based on quality of service (QoS) requirements of multimedia applications. A network interface of the NMSC enables peer-to-peer communication with at least one other NMSC to coordinate a cluster of ad hoc network nodes based on detected common multimedia stream patterns. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201848 | Node and Method for Adapting Parallel Measurements with Respect to an Enhanced Receiver - Techniques for adapting parallel measurements and/or channel receptions when an enhanced receiver is in use. An example radio node obtains information associated with parallel measurements and/or information associated with channel receptions, as well as information related to interference, and adapts a number of current parallel measurements and/or channel information based on the obtained information and at least one characteristic of an enhanced receiver. Other embodiments include a network node adapted to configure measurements and/or channel receptions for a radio node by accounting for an enhanced receiver utilization. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201849 | REFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMITTING METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - It is an object of the present invention to provide a reference signal transmitting method, a mobile terminal apparatus and a base station apparatus capable of reducing influences on a PDCCH even when performing transmission control over an aperiodic reference signal for measuring channel quality. Downlink control information corresponding to each component carrier in which transmission control information of a reference signal for measuring channel quality is set is aggregated and assigned to a downlink control channel of a specific component carrier for a mobile terminal apparatus that performs radio communication in a system band containing a plurality of component carriers and transmitted, and when the mobile terminal apparatus controls transmission of the reference signal for measuring channel quality based on the transmission control information of the reference signal for measuring channel quality included in the received downlink control information, the downlink control information corresponding to each component carrier includes a bit field in which identifier information of the component carrier is set and the transmission control information of the reference signal for measuring channel quality is set in the bit field. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201850 | VOICE/DATA HYBRID MODE - A method for voice/data hybrid mode within a user equipment (UE). The method includes detecting a first radio access technology (RAT) activity in response to a received first RAT suspend request for a second RAT tune-away. The method also includes adaptively performing the first RAT suspend request according to a predetermined priority of the detected first RAT activity and a second RAT tune-away activity. A receive chain is shared between a first RAT modem and a second RAT modem of the UE. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201851 | Method and Apparatus for Collecting and Providing Diverse Traffic Information in Cellular Networks - A method of collecting and providing traffic statistics in a cellular network in accordance is proposed. A UE establishes an RRC connection with a base station. The UE starts to collect traffic statistics that comprises a CDF curve or a PDF diagram for packet inter-arrival time. The UE may receive a measurement configuration from the base station for the traffic statistics collection. The UE then reports a representation of the traffic statistics to the base station for RRC reconfiguration. The UE may also receive a reporting request from the base station that specifies a representation format. The representation format includes one or more probability values at corresponding inter-arrival time points, at least one slope of the CDF, one or more steep events in the CDF, or a PDF range. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201852 | Method and Apparatus for Triggering and Reporting Diverse Traffic Information in Cellular Networks - A method of triggering and reporting traffic statistics in a cellular network is proposed. A UE establishes an RRC connection with a base station. The UE collects traffic statistics upon detecting a trigger event. The traffic statistics comprises packet inter-arrival time. The trigger event may be detected by the UE or by the base station. The UE then determines a representation of the traffic statistics and report the result to the base station. The report may be triggered by the UE or by the base station based on another trigger event. Upon receiving the traffic statistics, the base station determines RRC reconfiguration parameters. In one example, DRX timer values are determined based on intra-burst packet inter-arrival time. In another example, RRC release timer is determined based on inter-burst packet inter-arrival time. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201853 | Spectrum estimation for low-load LTE signals - A method includes receiving a signal in a communication terminal. A power spectral density, which the signal would have under full-load conditions of a transmitter transmitting the signal, is estimated based on the received signal. An operation is performed in the communication terminal using the estimated power spectral density. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201854 | CELLULAR RADIO NETWORK - To avoid reference symbol collision, between reference symbols used by neighbouring cells in an OFDM based cellular telecommunications network, the transmission symbols on a given subcarrier used by respective neighbouring base stations are compared and where both transmission symbols are determined to be reference symbols the start time of the frame timing period of one of the base stations is adjusted. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201855 | MICROWAVE ANTENNA ALIGNMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention discloses a microwave antenna alignment method and apparatus, relating to the field of communications technologies, and providing a clear instruction for antenna adjustment and implementing more convenient antenna alignment. The microwave antenna alignment method includes: performing vector subtraction for in-phase signals received by two sub-antennas within a same horizontal plane to obtain an azimuth plane vector difference, where an azimuth plane angular error signal includes the azimuth plane vector difference, and the azimuth plane angular error signal is used to reflect a deviation angle and direction of a received beam from the antenna direction within the horizontal plane; and aligning the antenna within the horizontal plane according to the azimuth plane angular error signal. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201856 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL -BASED FAST CELL SWITCHING FOR HIGH-SPEED PACKET ACCESS - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating switching HSPA (high speed packet access) serving cells from each of an RNC (radio network controller), base station, and access terminal are provided. The RNC pre-configures an access terminal and each base station in an active set for HS-DSCH operation by providing identification codes identifying each of the base stations. The RNC transmits data packets tagged with sequence numbers to each base station where they are synchronously buffered. The access terminal initiates a handover by transmitting a PDU (protocol data unit) to each of the base stations. The PDU is encoded with the identification code of a target base station and a sequence number of a subsequent packet. The target receives the PDU and directly completes the handover with the access terminal. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201857 | DISTRIBUTED RATE ALLOCATION AND COLLISION DETECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A hybrid cellular and non-cellular multi-hop communication device, including a hand-held wireless device having one or more antennas, a cellular wireless interface connected to at least some of the one or more antennas, and a non-cellular wireless interface connected to at least some of the one or more antennas. The non-cellular wireless interface may include a rate allocator configured to select a physical-layer rate of transmission of data from the non-cellular wireless interface based on a queue length of data to be transmitted from the hand-held cellular device and a transmitter configured to wirelessly transmit data from the queue and adjust physical-layer transmission parameters based on a physical-layer rate selected by the rate allocator. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201858 | ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - One embodiment is a source router that monitors the performance of an Ethernet network. The source router generates an Ethernet connectivity check request frame that includes a transmission timestamp, and transmits the Ethernet connectivity check request frame to a destination router. The source router receives a reply from the destination router that is transmitted in response to receiving the Ethernet connectivity check request frame and determines a round trip time between the source router and the destination router based on a time of receipt of the reply and the transmission timestamp. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201859 | CO-CHANNEL OPERATION SYSTEMS, METHODS, & DEVICES - Co-channel operation systems, methods, and devices are discussed in this document. Some embodiments can include remote stations configured for co-channel operation with one or more other remote stations. Remote stations can generally comprise a processor and a memory in electronic communication with the processor. Instructions can be stored in the memory, and when executed by the processor cause a remote station to receive a first data sequence from a first base station; use the first data sequence to distinguish a first signal transmitted by the first base station from unwanted signals transmitted by one or more other base stations; and demodulate the first signal. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201860 | MULTIPLE-FRAME OFFSET BETWEEN NEIGHBOR CELLS TO ENHANCE THE GERAN SIGNALING PERFORMANCE WHEN POWER CONTROL FOR SIGNALING IS IN USE - The present disclosure discusses devices, methods, and systems for improving signaling. This can occur, according to some implementations, by increasing a power of at least one signaling channel if errors on the signaling channel occur, comprising tracking quality of the at least one signaling channel, determining whether the at least one signaling channel has an error rate that is above a threshold, and increasing power to the at least one signaling channel if the error rate is above the threshold. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201861 | Methods for Determining a Loading of a Wireless Communications System and Communication Apparatuses Utilizing the Same - A method for determining a loading of a wideband communications channel in a wireless communications system includes: setting up a loading table for the wideband communications channel comprising a plurality of narrow band communications channels; obtaining channel characteristics of the plurality of narrow band communications channels; deciding on a number of data streams and a practical bandwidth of the wideband communications channel for a data transmission transaction and selecting one or more peer communications devices for receiving the data streams; completing the data transmission transaction with the one or more peer communications devices; updating the loading table with the information about the practical bandwidth of the wideband communications channel, the number of data streams and duration of the data transmission transaction; and computing the loading by using the information in the loading table in accordance with a pre-determined formula. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201862 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FEEDING BACK DOWNLINK CHANNEL FEEDBACK INFORMATION, AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR USER PAIRING - A method and device for feeding back downlink channel feedback information, and a method and device for user pairing. The method for feeding back downlink channel feedback information includes: calculating the multi-user channel quality indication error of a user, which error is used to reflect the difference in channel quality indication between the situation of multi-user multiple input multiple output transmission and the situation of single user multiple input multiple output transmission; adding the multi-user channel quality indication error into the downlink channel feedback information which includes a pre-coding matrix indication and a channel quality indication, and feeding the same back to a base station for scheduling. Therefore, the bit error rate of demodulation in the MIMO system can be reduced and the system performance can be improved. | 08-08-2013 |
20130208601 | MEASUREMENT REQUESTING AND REPORTING - A method of operating a node of a communications network comprises the node requesting a user equipment unit to prepare a measurement report concerning a measurement object. The measurement report includes (a) a measurement result for the measurement object as measured from a current serving cell and a measurement result for the measurement object as measured from a neighbor cell; and (b) additional measurement reporting including measurements that are available at the user equipment unit from multiple serving carriers. The method further comprises the node configuring the user equipment unit to ensure that the user equipment unit includes a reference signal received power (RSRP) value for the measurement result for the measurement object as measured from the neighbor cell. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208602 | EFFECTIVE APPLICATION DENSITIES FOR FABRICS - A non-transitory machine-readable storage device includes executable instructions that, when executed, cause one or more processors to calculate an effective application density for switches in fabrics. The processors are further caused to calculate an effective application density for the fabrics using the switch application densities. The processors are further caused to recommend deployment of an application on a first switch in a first fabric if the effective application density of the first switch is below a first threshold and the effective application density of the first fabric is below a second threshold. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208603 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PERFORMING LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) CHANNEL DELINEATION - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for performing long term evolution (LTE) channel delineation are disclosed. According to one method, the method includes storing a plurality of channel delineation maps in memory. The method further includes receiving downlink data from an LTE radio link. The method also includes identifying one of the channel delineation maps using the received data. The method further includes performing channel delineation on the data using a preconfigured channel delineation map. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208604 | Interference Measurement In Wireless Networks - Embodiments contemplate methods, systems, and apparatuses for interference measurement in a wireless communication network, including wireless communication networks the employ MIMO in uplink and/or downlink communication. Embodiments contemplate identifying one or more interference measurement resource elements that may be received from one or more transmission points. Embodiments also contemplate performing interference measurement estimation based at least in part on the identified one or more interference measurement resource elements. Channel state information (CSI) perhaps in the form of reports may be generated based at least in part on the one or more interference measurement estimation. Embodiments also contemplate that the CSI report may be transmitted to one or more nodes. In some embodiments, the one or more interference measurement resource elements may be received as part of a set of resource elements. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208605 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UE-BASED HANDOVER DURING NETWORK COVERAGE HOLES - Apparatus and methods are described herein for efficiently handing over a user equipment from an earlier-technology network back to a later-technology network upon detecting the end of a coverage hole in the later-technology network. The UE may be configured to measure signals from the later-technology network. When the UE discovers, upon establishment or reestablishment of a PS data connection, that the later-technology network signal exceeds a defined threshold, the UE may initiate a handover back to the later-technology network. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208606 | TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS FOR VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT TRANSMISSION - Transmission parameters are determined for communication between apparatuses. These transmission parameters may specify, for example, a number of spatial streams, a bandwidth, and a transmission rate. Based on the determined parameters, a table of a set of tables comprising transmission parameters is identified and an index from the table is determined. Rate information is then sent in a frame from one of the apparatuses to the other. The rate information comprises several fields indicative of the index, the number of spatial streams, and bandwidth. The apparatus that receives the rate information may then use this information to identify the table and obtain transmission parameters from the table. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208607 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH EXTENDED RANGE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for supporting communication over an extended range in a wireless network are disclosed. In one aspect, a station sends multiple messages of a given type for different operating modes. These messages can be detected by stations with different capabilities, which may avoid collisions between stations. In one design, a first station receives a Request-to-Send (RTS) message from a second station having data to send. The first station sends a first Clear-to-Send (CTS) message and also a second CTS message in response to the RTS message. The second CTS message has an extended range as compared to the first CTS message. The first station thereafter (i) receives data sent by the second station in response to the second CTS message and (ii) sends an acknowledgement having an extended range. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208608 | RECONFIGURABLE ANTENNAS AND CONFIGURATION SELECTION METHODS FOR AD-HOC NETWORKS - Reconfigurable antennas in an ad-hoc network are provided where all nodes employ MIMO/SIMO/MISO communication techniques. Three types of reconfigurable antennas: Reconfigurable Printed Dipole Array (RPDA), Reconfigurable Circular Patch Antenna (RCPA) and Two-Port Reconfigurable CRLH Leaky Wave Antennas are used. The RPDA, RCPA and the CRLH Leaky Wave antennas have a different number of configurations as well as different degrees of pattern diversity between possible configurations. To effectively use these antennas in a network, the performance of centralized and decentralized antenna configuration selection schemes are quantified for reconfiguration at one or both link ends. The sum capacity of the network is used as a metric to quantify the performance of these antennas in measured and simulated network channels. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208609 | REDUCING NETWORK ACQUISITION TIME - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which PAPR for an input of an AGC in a wireless receiver is generated. The AGC may provide a gain-controlled signal to a correlator when the PAPR of the input does not exceed the threshold ratio and may clamp the gain of the gain-controlled signal when PAPR of the input is large. A large PAPR may cause termination of search for a signal of interest in a current channel. The search may be resumed in a non-adjacent channel. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208610 | Apparatus and Method to Control the Collection of Measurement Data in a Communication System - An apparatus, method and system to control the collection and reporting of measurement data in a communication system. In one embodiment, an apparatus includes a processor ( | 08-15-2013 |
20130208611 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING SIGNALS - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for receiving signals, which comprises the followings: receive signals on at least one receiving branch, which comprises at least two reception units, including one data reception unit and one pilot reception unit at least. Said signal refers to a codeword in a transmission codebook; calculate metric value of each codeword in said transmission codebook according to said received signal; obtain the codeword with maximal metric value among all said codewords and the metric value corresponding to this codeword; if this value exceeds threshold value, Determining the codeword corresponding to said maximal metric value; if this value is less than the threshold value, Determining discontinuously-sent DTX. In the present invention, perform joint demodulation of data symbol and pilot symbol to make the demodulation results more reliable; meanwhile; judge whether it is discontinuous transmission based on joint demodulation of data symbol and pilot symbol. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208612 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Disclosed are methods, circuits, apparatus, systems and associated computer executable code for mitigating interface signals interfering with operation of a wireless network. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208613 | DYNAMIC DATA TRANSMISSION ADJUSTMENT METHOD - A dynamic data transmission adjustment method in a wireless communication system. The system includes a base station and a user equipment. The base station and the user equipment communicate amongst themselves by using a first transmission technique. The method includes transmitting a plurality of frames between the base station and the user equipment using a regular transmission scheme according to the first transmission technique, and at least one iteration of the following steps: calculating a specific error rate in at least one specific region of the transmitted frames; and adjusting the regular transmission scheme when a value representative of the specific error rate associated to the specific region exceeds a predetermined threshold. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208614 | METHOD OF PROVIDING VOICE OVER IP AT PREDEFINED QOS LEVELS - The present invention is a technique for provisioning and assessment of voice quality in Internet Protocol (IP) voice applications. A predetermined quality of service (QoS) is received from a user in the form of an acceptable packet loss. The technique measures current packet loss and delay in the network and in the terminal, and determines and optimum play-out delay for the use by a play-out adaptation routine. An actual QoS is reported back to the user. To enhance packet delay and loss measurement, a QoS engine component is placed on the terminal side of the packetizer, therefore including packetizer losses in any measurement of the network. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208615 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM THEREFOR, AND RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING CONTROL PROGRAM RECORDED THEREON - According to a control method of a wireless communication system in which wireless communication between a base station ( | 08-15-2013 |
20130208616 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PROVIDING MDT MEASUREMENT INFORMATION TO A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - The present invention provides a method and system of providing minimization drive test (MDT) measurement information to a base station in a wireless communication network. In one embodiment, a method includes indicating availability of MDT measurement information logged by user equipment to a base station in a wireless network environment. The method further includes receiving an information request message to transfer the MDT measurement information in response to the indication. The method includes transmitting an information response message including at least a portion of the MDT measurement information to the base station, where the information response message indicates whether any portion of MDT measurement information is leftover with the user equipment. The method then includes repeating the above steps of receiving and transmitting till the entire MDT measurement information is transferred to the base station. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208617 | RADIO MEASUREMENT COLLECTION METHOD, RADIO TERMINAL, AND RADIO BASE STATION - In one embodiment, a radio measurement collection method comprises: a step S | 08-15-2013 |
20130208618 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device comprises: a detector configured to detect an interference wave and a frequency of the interference wave, the interference wave causing radio interference in the wireless communication; an interference avoidance controller configured to predict duration where the wireless communication is affected by radio interference due to the interference wave, and configured to issue a command for avoiding the radio interference due to the interference wave when the predicted duration exceeds a threshold time period; and a frequency controller configured to control frequencies used in the wireless communication to exclude the frequency of the interference wave in accordance with the command for avoiding the radio interference issued by the interference avoidance controller. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208619 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Communication quality is prevented from being deteriorated due to interference caused by low accuracy of channel information or interference from another base station or another wireless communication system. A wireless communication system includes a first wireless station including a plurality of antenna elements, transmission units corresponding to the plurality of antenna elements, and a transmission directivity control unit that controls transmission directivity of the plurality of antenna elements, and a plurality of second wireless stations each including a reception power measurement unit that measures a reception power. The transmission directivity control unit determines the transmission directivity of each of the plurality of antenna elements so that a signal does not reach a particular second wireless station among the plurality of second wireless stations. The transmission units generate wireless signals using the transmission directivity. The plurality of antenna elements transmit the generated wireless signals. The reception power measurement unit measures the reception power in a period that is set so that a signal does not reach the particular second wireless station, and detect the presence or absence of interference. | 08-15-2013 |
20130215767 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ADAPTIVE NETWORK THROTTLING - Apparatus and methods for adaptive network throttling are provided. Adaptive network throttling may allow a device to communicate information using a shared network link without negatively impacting other devices utilizing the shared link. Adaptive network throttling may regulate communication of each device independently of network link or device hardware specifications. Adaptive network throttling may ensure that each device utilizing the shared network link inserts a time delay following a communication of information. The time delay may represent bandwidth on the shared network link that is not being used by a device. The unused bandwidth may be available to other devices communicating over the shared network link. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215768 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC DSCP TRACING FOR XOIP ELEMENTS - Systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for performing automatic Differentiated Services Code Point tracing for XoIP elements. A system configured as an agent maintains a cache of destination network addresses based on prior network communications. Then, the system identifies a destination network address to test. The system can identify the destination network address to test based on the cache of destination network addresses. The cache can include additional information, such as network test results, traffic information, port numbers, DSCP trace value, measurements of traffic protection, service provider information, etc. Next, the system automatically sends to the destination network address a network test configured to determine a Differentiated Services Code Point trace. The system can perform the network test for any type of network traffic and port. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215769 | CONTROLLER PLACEMENT FOR FAST FAILOVER IN THE SPLIT ARCHITECTURE - A method implemented by a network topology design system, the network topology design system including a processing device. The method to determine placement of a controller within a network with a split architecture where control plane components of the split architecture network are executed by a controller and the control plane components are separate from data plane components of the split architecture network. The placement of the controller is selected to minimize disruption of the split architecture network caused by a link failure, a switch failure or a connectivity loss between the controller and the data plane components. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215770 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK BASED ON CONTENTS CHARACTERISTIC - A method and an apparatus for selecting wireless access networks in wireless communication systems including a plurality of wireless access networks are provided. A broadcasting/communication server for a multi access network includes a wireless access network wireless resource cost comparing module configured to select one wireless access network by calculating a cost function of each of the plurality of wireless access networks, based on wireless traffic information of each wireless access network received from the plurality of wireless access networks and contents information to be provided to terminals; a wireless router control module configured to control a path of a contents based router with the selected one wireless access network; and a network matching module configured to be connected to the plurality of wireless access network through the contents based router. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215771 | ANALYZING COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION IN A PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - Each network message configured for transmission from a sender to a receiver IED across an Ethernet switch-based communication network of a PC/SA system is evaluated, and a graphical representation respective of process related operational aspects of each IED involved is generated and displayed. Sender and receiver IDs are determined from a logical data flow description that is part of a formal configuration representation of the PC/SA system. One of a plurality of operational aspects of the process is retrieved for each IED from the formal configuration description. Generating the graphical representation of the system includes forming groups of IEDs with identical operational aspects. For each group of IEDs, the respective operational aspect is indicated or displayed. A user may analyze the communication configuration of the system by looking at the graphical representation and determine the consequences of IED failures or engineering errors on other IEDs. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215772 | RECONFIGURATION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES FOR FUZZY CELLS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may transmit data via multiple component carriers associated with multiple eNode-Bs. The WTRU may receive a handover request message from a source eNode-B. While maintaining a connection with a component carrier on the source eNode-B, the WTRU may establish a connection with another component carrier on a target eNode-B. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215773 | DATA COMMUNICATION - A management device is used in an access network including a plurality of data connections between end user devices and an aggregation transceiver device where the connections are aggregated for onward connection through the access network. The access network stores a plurality of different profiles, each of which specifies a set of values for a plurality of parameters associated with each data connection. The device applies one of the stored profiles to each connection, and receives a notification in the event of one of a predetermined set of notifiable events occurring on the connection. It is determined if more than a predetermined number of notifications are received within a predetermined period for a respective connection and, in the event of such a determination being made, a different one of the profiles is caused to be applied to the connection. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215774 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MEDIA OVER AN INTERNET PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION - A real-time bandwidth monitor (RTBM) for VoIP applications are disclosed having a media streaming function to sense the available bandwidth between two endpoints of a VoIP communication (herein, a “call path”) utilizing the media streaming function and to adapt in real-time the transmission rate of the media stream to utilize that bandwidth. The media stream may include voice content, video content, or other media content. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215775 | AUTOMATED ON-LINE BUSINESS BANDWIDTH PLANNING METHODOLOGY - Closed-loop control is applied to the field of automated on-line business bandwidth planning tools by comparing measured business bandwidth with a baseline for providing a difference indication, changing the baseline according to the difference, and reporting the change as an event relating to a service level agreement. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215776 | METHOD FOR ASSESSING QUALITY OF A RADIO TRANSMISSION CHANNEL, AND RESIDENTIAL GATEWAY USING THE METHOD - A method for assessing quality of a transmission channel in a wireless network comprises the steps of | 08-22-2013 |
20130215777 | METHOD OF ENABLING A PACKET LOSS MEASUREMENT IN A PACKET TRANSPORT NETWORK - Proposed is a method of enabling a packet loss measurement in a network. Via a group of user ports data packets containing a same source address and a same destination address are received. A link aggregation of the group of user ports is performed. At a network port, received data packets are transmitted to a far end network edge node. A number of transmitted data packets is determined, and also for each of the user ports a number of data packets lost internally is determined. At the network port, a corrected number of transmitted data packets is indicated to the far end network edge node as the sum of the determined number of transmitted data packets the overall number of data packets lost internally. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215778 | Intra-Cell Common Reuse for a Wireless Communication System - To avoid or reduce intra-cell interference, each sector of a cell is associated with a sector-specific set of system resources (e.g., subbands) and at least one non-overlapping common set of system resources. Each common set for each sector includes system resources observing little or no interference from at least one other sector in the cell. The channel condition for a terminal in a given sector x is ascertained based on forward and/or reverse link measurements for the terminal. The terminal is assigned system resources from a common set or a sector-specific set for sector x based on the terminal's channel condition. For example, if the terminal observes high interference from another sector y, then the terminal is assigned system resources from a common set that observes little or no interference from sector y. The techniques may be used for an OFDMA system that uses frequency hopping. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215779 | TRANSMIT POWER ADAPTATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - When wireless systems are in communication with each other, transmit power levels can vary based on a distance between the communicating wireless systems. The transmit power levels may be varied by taking into consideration optimal values of performance indicators such as SNR. However, because a transmitting wireless system typically does not receive information that describes a communication channel as seen by a receiving wireless system, the transmitting wireless system may not be able to accurately determine when, whether, and by how much to reduce the transmit power without impairing signal reception ability at the receiving wireless system. Functionality can be implemented on the transmitting wireless system to vary the transmit power level based on comparing a percentage of packets transmitted at a maximum packet transmit rate with one or more thresholds. Such a variation of the transmit power levels can help reduce power consumption and ensure performance is not compromised. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215780 | Closed User Groups - An arrangement for providing, on an ad hoc basis, a closed user group (CUG) among a collection of pre-defined IP network users. A set of intelligent access devices, dispersed through the IP network, constantly transmit a set of pings associated with the defines CUGs to discover those devices within its communication range. The discovered IP addresses for each device is thus constantly updated, allowing group members to remain in constant contact (emulating an “always on” connection). The users feels they are always connected with group members and thus have instant access to voice/data/video sessions—much like hot lines or “always on” connections. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215781 | SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING GLOBAL, HIGH QUALITY MOVEMENT OF VERY LARGE DATA FILES - A system for providing communication services between geographically disbursed source and destination terminals includes at least one airborne or spaceborne wireless communication device, such as a satellite. The wireless communication device is configured to store and forward large data files of at least an aggregated 10 gigabytes. The wireless communication device includes a wireless transceiver for communicating with the source and destination terminals over at least one high bandwidth channel. A mass data storage device stores the large data files for a predetermined period of time that is greater than approximately two minutes. At least one processor is coupled among the mass data storage and wireless transceiver. The processor is configured to control receipt of a large data file from the source terminal and to transmit it to the destination terminal as the wireless communication device nears the destination terminal. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215782 | MEDIA INDEPENDENT MULTI-RAT FUNCTION IN A CONVERGED DEVICE - A communication device facilitates a multiple radio access technology (multi-RAT) mesh network and includes a processor that executes a media independent mesh function (MIMF), the MIMF configured to exchange media independent mesh information between peer mesh entities. At least two physical network links of the communication device support different radio access technologies (RATs). The MIMF is further configured to determine a RAT-agnostic link quality estimate for a signal routing, to selectively activate or deactivate each RAT-based physical network link to conserve power and control bandwidth; and to determine a multi-RAT mesh capability of a peer device. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215783 | RADIO LINK PERFORMANCE PREDICTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method for predicting performance of a radio link in a wireless communication terminal including hypothesizing a second codeword including information associated with a hypothesized first codeword, obtaining channel state information from a received signal, and estimating a decoder error rate of the first codeword under a condition that the second codeword may not be decoded correctly, wherein the decoder error rate is estimated using the channel state information. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215784 | Radio Base Station and a Method Therein - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a radio base station ( | 08-22-2013 |
20130215785 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE - Provided are a method and an apparatus for coordinating inter-cell interference. A user equipment receives from a serving cell information on a downlink timing offset between an interfering cell and an interfered cell and a limited resource measurement, and applies the downlink timing offset to perform measurement using a radio resource indicated for the limited resource measurement, thereby allowing the user equipment to be provided services through the radio resource which substantially mitigates interference, and enhancing connectivity with a network. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215786 | METHOD OF DETECTING AND JAMMING TRANSMITTER EFFECTING A COMMUNICATION USER EQUIPMENT, USER EQUIPMENT AND EVALUATION UNIT WITH INTERFACES TO THE USER EQUIPMENT - The invention relates to a method of detecting a jamming transmitter affecting a communication user equipment, wherein said communication user equipment (UE) and a number of base node stations (BNS) are components of a cellular code division multiple access (CDMA) based radio network (RN), wherein a communication signal unit (SU) is correlated with a pseudonoise spread code (SC) in a serving cell coverage area (CA) of a serving base node station (sBNS) and transmitted as a pseudonoise chip (CHI) in a multiple shared communication frequency channel spectrally located between an upper frequency and a lower frequency of a communication frequency band (FB I-XIX) and the pseudonoise spread code (SC) is received by the communication user equipment (UE) as a serving pseudonoise spread code (sSC) from said serving base node station (BNS) in a serving downlink channel (sCPICH). | 08-22-2013 |
20130215787 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A TERMINAL TO SELECT A CELL IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a cell selection method of a terminal in a heterogeneous network, and cell selection method of a terminal in a heterogeneous network according to the present invention includes receiving a measurement restriction pattern from a base station; and selecting a cell based on the measurement restriction pattern. According to an embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to select a cell accurately and efficiently. | 08-22-2013 |
20130223238 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING WHETHER A COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE ROUTE IS OPERATING PURSUANT TO A SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT - A communications system may include communications devices configured to define a communications service routes each subject to a respective service level agreement. The communications devices for each service route may include in a series coupled arrangement, a customer edge router, a local exchange carrier (LEC) access circuit, an interchange carrier transport circuit, a provider edge router, and an internet protocol computing cloud. The communications system may further include a controller coupled to the communications devices. The controller may be configured to poll each of the communications devices for a device health status, correlate the health statuses to a given communications service route, and determine a service state of the given communications service route based upon the health statuses. The controller may further be configured to determine whether the given communications service route is operating pursuant to the service level agreement based upon the service state. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223239 | IRAT MEASUREMENT METHOD WHEN IN TD-SCDMA CONNECTED MODE - When a user equipment (UE) is operating in connected mode in a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) network all time slots may be allocated to communications, leaving insufficient time for the UE to perform measurement of neighboring radio access technologies (RATs). When the UE moves out of TD-SCDMA coverage, it may report to the base station and receive an instruction to switch into time division multiplexing (TDM) mode and to perform inter-RAT measurement while in TDM mode. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223240 | MULTI-INTERFACE ADAPTIVE BIT RATE SESSION MANAGEMENT - Systems and method are provided that allow an application layer client in a mobile device to manage multiple interfaces in a communication network. The multiple interfaces can include WiFi, cellular, Femto, WiMAX, Bluetooth, infrared, Ethernet, and other types of interfaces for communication in a network. The client on the mobile device can use intelligence and rules to determine how and when request fragments are communicated over the various interfaces available to the client. The intelligence can include parameters such as performance information for a particular interface and subscriber preferences. Based on this information the client can decide to use a combination of the interfaces to obtain multimedia content and render the content for display on the mobile device. By using a combination of interfaces and tracking the advantages and disadvantages of each interface, the client can make intelligent decisions in providing multimedia content to the user. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223241 | FALSE ALARM REDUCTION WITH SEARCH WINDOWING AND PEAK SUPPRESSION - The present embodiments are directed to systems and methods for detecting random access channel requests, while excluding false random access signals using search windowing and distance-based peak suppression techniques. The present embodiments additionally include further techniques for suppression of fake random access signals, including amplitude thresholds and preamble-based signal exclusion. Beneficially, the present embodiments significantly reduce the false alarm rate, while maintaining a low hardware complexity requirements. In some embodiments, worst-case false alarm rates can be reduced from as much as 20% down to nearly 0.1%. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223242 | SIGNATURE DETECTION AND TIMING OFFSET ESTIMATION - Bias introduced by down-sampling may be eliminated, or significantly reduced, by the present embodiments. Methods and apparatuses are described for use in wireless communication systems including LTE and other mobile data systems. The method includes identifying a timing offset estimation bias caused by a misalignment between samples and a zero-offset point of a preamble signature. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223243 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OPTIMIZING THE PERFORMANCE OF AN APPLICATION COMMUNICATING OVER A NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing the performance of an application, as described, may include determining an arrival time of a packet at a network emulator node by the network emulator node, wherein the packet is transmitted from a node to the network emulator node over the network, establishing a packet ordering queue at the network emulator node, applying a maximum delay time by the network emulator node, applying a minimum delay time by the network emulator node, and computing a packet departure time for the packet from the network emulator node. An exemplary embodiment may additionally include the determination of a bandwidth delay time, where the applicable network bandwidth is imposed by the network emulator node. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223244 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING NUMBER OF IDLE STATE TERMINALS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSION USING THE SAME - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for determining the number of idle state terminals that determines the number of terminals in an idle state and controls data transmission for a multicast or broadcast service (MBS), and a method of controlling data transmission. The method of determining the number of idle state terminals in the MBS according to the present invention includes: transmitting, by a transmitter, a base station signal for verifying the number of idle state terminals; determining whether a radio terminal signal transmitted from an idle state terminal using the base station signal is present, or a the number of radio terminal signal types; and determining the number of idle state terminals based on whether the radio terminal signal is present or the number of radio terminal signal types. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223245 | CODEBOOK CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - To facilitate selection of an optimal PMI corresponding to a channel variance in a channel propagation path, in a method of controlling codebooks comprised of a plurality of DFT codebooks for defining precoding matrixes that are selected when correlation between antennas in a base station apparatus (eNode B) is high and a plurality of random codebooks for defining precoding matrixes that are selected when correlation between antennas in the base station apparatus (eNode B) is low, a channel variance in a channel propagation path is estimated, and based on the estimated channel variance, the configuration ratio between the DFT codebooks and the random codebooks included in the codebooks is varied adaptively. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223246 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE APPARATUS - In a communication method of a mobile apparatus, the mobile apparatus having fixed mobile IP information and performing data communication with a first base station transmits communication environment information of the first base station and a second base station capable of performing data communication with the mobile apparatus to the first base station. The mobile apparatus determines whether the communication environment information of the second base station is better than that of the first base station. While maintaining the fixed mobile IP information of the mobile apparatus, the mobile apparatus receives data, in which network IP information of a base station for transmitting data is changed to IP information of the second base station, from the first base station. At the mobile apparatus, a network IP of a base station for data communication is changed from the first base station to the second base station. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223247 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING VOICE CALL DELAY - A method for reducing delay in a voice calling operation includes entering into a packet switched network communication state on a mobile communication terminal, detecting an input associated with a voice calling operation, identifying a target legacy communication network cell for conducting the voice calling operation, and performing a camp-on operation on the target legacy communication network cell. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223248 | PACKET TRANSFER DELAY MEASUREMENT SYSTEM - When measuring a one-way packet transfer delay between first and second measurement devices in a time-asynchronous manner, the first measurement device transmits first packets each containing a first counter value at a time of transmission; and then transmits a second packet containing a second counter value at the time of the transmission. The second measurement device stores the first counter value extracted from each of the first packets, a third counter value at a time of reception, and reception time stamp information; calculates an incremental ratio between the first counter value and the third counter value per unit time; and calculates an expected fourth counter value at the time of the reception based on the second counter value and the incremental ratio, and obtains the transfer delay based on the calculated expected fourth counter value and an actual fourth counter value at the time of the reception. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223249 | METHOD OF PERFORMING QoS VERIFICATION IN UMTS - According to one or multiple transmission parameters, one or multiple measurement targets are set for a plurality of data links provided by a user equipment in UMTS. The data throughput of each measurement target during a specific period is summed up for acquiring an uplink scheduled IP throughput and a downlink scheduled IP throughput of each measurement target. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223250 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND INTERFERENCE DETECTION METHOD - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus is provided with first and second determination units. The first unit determines based on a first carrier sense threshold whether busy state or not and specifies a first time when busy state is determined with the first threshold, and determines based on a second carrier sense threshold smaller than the first threshold whether busy state or not and specifies a second time when busy state is determined. The second unit determines, if at least busy state is determined based on the second threshold and the second time precedes a reference time equal to or earlier than the first time, to perform processing for avoiding interference. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223251 | BEAM MANAGEMENT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatuses manage beam selection. A method for a mobile station (MS) includes identifying beamforming constraints of the MS. The method also includes performing measurement on a channel between a base station (BS) and the MS on at least one transmit (TX) beam and at least one receive (RX) beam. Additionally, the method includes sending beamforming feedback information based on the identified constraints of the MS and the channel measurement. A method for a base station (BS) includes receiving beamforming feedback information comprising at least one of radio frequency beamforming constraints of a mobile station or channel measurement information on a channel between the BS and the MS. Additionally, the method includes sending, to the MS, control information comprising an indication of at least one of MS RX beams or BS TX beams to be used in downlink communication with the MS based on the received beamforming feedback information. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223252 | MITIGATION OF FALSE PDCCH DETECTION - A method includes receiving in a communication terminal a signal, which is transmitted in multiple links and which includes a control channel transmitted in an assigned sequence of the links. One or more candidate sequences of the links, which are likely to be the assigned sequence, are identified. For at least, one candidate sequence, a verification is made whether the candidate sequence is the assigned sequence, by re-encoding decoded bits of the candidate sequence to produce regenerated symbols and comparing the regenerated symbols to respective received symbols from which the decoded bits were decoded. The control channel is decoded from the candidate sequence in response to verifying that the candidate sequence is the assigned sequence. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223253 | Method and Apparatus for Coordinated Multi-Point Operations - Embodiments provide a feedback indicator for coordinated multi-point operations of various coordinated multi-point schemes and/or scenarios. An exemplary embodiment involves generating a feedback indicator for coordinated multi-point operations, the feedback indicator indicating a recommendation for a CoMP controller entity to request signaling of multi-point feedback information with respect to multiple coordinated multi-point transmission points, and signaling the generated feedback indicator for coordinated multi-point operations to the CoMP controller entity. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223254 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication control device measures a size of burst data transmitted from a first device through the use of a predetermined protocol in a transport layer. The communication control device selects a protocol ruled by an algorithm with the smallest latency, which is estimated from the measured size of burst data and characteristics of a network, from among plural protocols used in the transport layer. The communication control device terminates the communication of the burst data transmitted through the predetermined protocol from the first device and transmits the burst data to a destination through the use of the selected protocol. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223255 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION - An apparatus and method for communication are provided. The solution includes controlling the estimation of a radio channel to obtain an estimate of a channel quality, performing quantization of the estimate of the channel quality to obtain a channel quality index, the quantization steps being of non-uniform size and selected on the basis of the accuracy of the estimation on different levels of channel quality, and controlling the transmission of the channel quality index to the communication system. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223256 | CONNECTED MODE GAP MEASUREMENT FOR LTE TDD - A method of wireless communication includes selecting three or more reference signal symbols from at least two subframes detected within a measurement window location during a connected mode gap. The selected reference signal symbols are selected from reference signal symbols of at least one non-MBSFN subframe and one reference signal symbol of a special subframe. The method also includes combining the selected reference signal symbols and estimating a reference signal received power (RSRP) based at least in part on a result of the combining. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223257 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RELAY STATION, BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND NETWORK COMPONENT - In one embodiment, a mobile communication system is provided comprising a base station, a relay station, and a mobile station, a determiner configured to determine the distance between the mobile station and the base station or between the mobile station and the relay station, a decider configured to decide whether data transmission between the base station and the mobile station is carried out in a first relaying mode or a second relaying mode based on the determined distance and a controller configured to control the mobile communication system based on the result of the decision by the decider. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223258 | INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed herein is a wireless communication system. More particularly, disclosed herein is a method and apparatus for coordinating and reducing inter-cell interference in a wireless communication system. A method of transmitting channel state information (CSI) measurement resource information by a base station includes determining first and second subframe sets, in which CSI measurement will be performed, among a plurality of downlink subframes, transmitting information indicating the first and second subframe sets to a terminal, and receiving the CSI of each of the first and second subframe sets from the terminal. A subframe belonging to the first subframe set and a subframe belonging to the second subframe set do not overlap, and some of the plurality of subframes do not belong to either of the first and second subframe sets. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223259 | SIMULTANEOUS DATA PACKET PROCESSING - A packet controller for simultaneous processing of data packets transmitted via a plurality of communication channels includes a plurality of inputs to receive a respective plurality of signals, such that each of the plurality of signals is indicative of a presence of a data packet on a respective one of the plurality of communication channels, a clock source to supply a periodic clock signal, a plurality of independent processing modules coupled to the respective plurality of inputs to simultaneously process the plurality of signals, such that each of the plurality of independent processing modules implements a respective state machine driven by the periodic clock signal to process the respective signal independently of every other one of the plurality of processing modules, and an output to transmit an output signal indicative of a presence of at least one data packet on one or more of the plurality of communication channels. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223260 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The object is achieved by providing a base station apparatus for performing time and frequency scheduling in uplink packet access with: an interference amount measurement part configured to measure an uplink interference amount for each interference amount measurement unit which comprises a predetermined period and a predetermined number of frequency blocks; an interference amount determination part configured to determine whether the uplink interference amount satisfies a predetermined condition; and an overload indicator reporting part configured to report an overload indicator to a neighboring cell when the predetermined condition is satisfied. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223261 | Processing time determination for wireless position determination - An example method for determining a processing time for wirelessly determining a position of a mobile station includes: measuring a round trip time delay to each of multiple wireless access points; estimating an initial processing time for each of the wireless access points; calculating the position of the mobile station based upon the measured round trip time delays and estimated processing times; and updating the initial processing time for each of the wireless access points based upon the calculated position of the mobile station. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223262 | DYNAMIC CHANNEL AND TRANSMISSION RATE SELECTION - Dynamic channel and transmission rate selection is described. In an example, a communication resource for transmitting data to a receiver is selected from several channels, each having several associated rates. The selection comprises storing a weighting factor for each channel/rate combination, monitoring transmission performance on a selected channel and rate, and inferring performance for other rates on the selected channel from the monitored performance. Each weighting factor is then updated using the monitored and inferred performances, and used to select a channel/rate combination for subsequent transmission. In another example, a communication device comprises a transmitter, a processor, and a memory arranged to store a weighting factor associated with each receiver, channel and rate combination. The transmitter sends data to a receiver using one channel and rate, and the processor monitors the performance, updates the weighting factors accordingly, and selects a receiver, channel and rate combination for subsequent transmission. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223263 | Method and Device for Classifying Wireless Data Service - A method and a device for classifying wireless data service are provided in the disclosure. The method comprises the following steps of: calculating Key Performance Indicators KPIs of the wireless call information, matching the calculated KPIs with the service model which is preset, and determining a service type of a call. The disclosure may quickly and accurately differentiate the actual IP service type of a user without increasing the system load at a base station or a core network, so that the quality of service of a wireless network is improved and the resource may be distributed reasonably. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223264 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The present invention provides a base station apparatus, a mobile terminal apparatus and a communication control method which can improve the accuracy of channel quality estimation. A communication control method includes the steps of: arranging a CSI-RS, which is a reference signal for downlink channel estimation, in resources of subframes for CSI-RS transmission; setting, in the subframes for CSI-RS transmission, resources to which the CSI-RS is allocated in neighboring areas, to be muting resources; and reporting transmission interval information, which indicates a transmission interval of subframes that are set at the same timing in a transmission cycle of a subframe for CSI-RS transmission in a subject area and in a transmission cycle of a subframe for CSI-RS transmission in the neighboring areas, to a mobile terminal apparatus. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223265 | COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR AND COMMUNICATION PROCESSING METHOD - The present invention provides a communication processor that is compatible with a plurality of communication protocols and also limits increases in circuit scale. A communication processor ( | 08-29-2013 |
20130223266 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL METHOD - When a cell in a first system which follows a transmission loss to control an uplink transmit power neighbors a cell in a second system which follows channel fading to control an uplink transmit power, a quality of an uplink signal in the cell in the first system is maintained. The base station includes an uplink signal and interference power measuring unit which measures a desired signal power and an interference signal power from a received signal; an SIR calculating unit which calculates a receive quality for transmit power control from the desired signal power and the interference signal power; a TPC command generating unit which generates transmit power control information in accordance with results of comparing the receive quality for the transmit power control with a predetermined target receive quality; and a signal transmitting unit which transmits, to a user apparatus, a control signal which includes the transmit power control information and resource information which indicates radio resources for the uplink signal, wherein the SIR calculating unit calculates the receive quality for the transmit power control with a calculating method in accordance with communications conditions in a cell of the base station. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223267 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING SELECTIVE MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method which is performed by a user equipment in a wireless communication system. The method comprises the following steps: receiving from a serving cell a first measurement setting which is applied to normal operation; receiving from an interfering cell a second measurement setting when a high interference situation occurs; deciding whether the high interference situation has occurred; and performing the measurement based on the first measurement setting and the second measurement setting when the high interference occurrence is detected. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223268 | METHOD FOR MEASURING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for measuring which is performed by a user equipment in a wireless communication system. The method comprises the following steps: receiving from a serving cell an interference area indication setting including information which permits the user equipment to transmit the interference area indication; deciding whether a limited measurement is necessary; and transmitting the interference area indication for indicating that the limited measurement is necessary to the serving cell, receiving a limited resource measurement setting as a reply to the interference area indication, and performing the measurement based on the limited resource measurement setting, when the limited measurement is decided as necessary. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223269 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING SAME - Provided is a radio communication system in which a base station apparatus with a plurality of transmission antennas spatially multiplexes and transmits a transmission signal addressed to a plurality of mobile station apparatuses, and in which the mobile station apparatuses receive the signal transmitted from the base station apparatus. The mobile station apparatuses select a desired precoding vector from predetermined candidates, and give the base station apparatus information identifying the selected precoding vector. The base station apparatus generates a linear filter on the basis of the information from the mobile station apparatuses, grasps multi-user interference that at least one of the mobile station apparatuses is subjected to when the generated linear filter is used, generates a new transmission signal by subtracting the multi-user interference from the transmission signal, and spatially multiplexes the transmission signal addressed to the plurality of mobile station apparatuses by multiplying the new transmission signal by the linear filter. Thus, favorable reception characteristics can be obtained while CSI feedback is performed efficiently. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223270 | Method and System for Calculating Total Received Power of High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel - A method for calculating total received power of an HS-PDSCH is disclosed in the patent document, comprising: when a terminal performs an HS-DSCH cell handover across an IUR interface, an SRNC requesting a DRNC to establish an HS-DSCH pre-configuration; the DRNC returning information of a measured power deviation of a target serving cell to the SRNC; the SRNC sending said information to the terminal; and after performing the handover to the target serving cell, the terminal using the measured power deviation of the target serving cell to estimate the total received power of the HS-PDSCH in the target serving cell. A system for calculating the total received power of the HS-PDSCH is also disclosed in the patent document, and the system comprises: a first module and second module of a serving radio network controller, a drift radio network controller and a terminal. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223271 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALLING MEASUREMENT SIGNALLING - The eNB of a first cell being interfered by at least one second cell, obtains pattern information, from the eNB of the second cell or network configuration, indicating almost blank subframes that are configured by the eNB of the second cell or the network configuration; determines measurement signalling indicating subframes; and sends the measurement signalling to the UE. The UE in the first cell receives the measurement signalling from the serving eNB, the measurement signalling comprising at least one pattern information recommended by at least one second cell or network configuration, each of the pattern information indicating at least one almost blank subframe that is configured by the corresponding second cell; determines the resource used for measurement according to the measurement signalling; and carries out measurement on the determined resource. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223272 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING COMP COOPERATING SET IN COORDINATED MULTI-POINT COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a method for establishing a CoMP cooperating set in coordinated multi-point communication, the method comprising the steps of: triggering and starting a coordinated multi-point communication process; according to channel state information of all cells in a measurement cell set measured by a UE, determining a candidate CoMP cooperating set; sending a CoMP cooperating set establishment request to eNodeBs of the cooperating cells in the determined candidate CoMP cooperating set; the eNodeBs being of the cooperating cell and receiving the CoMP cooperating set establishment request responding to the CoMP cooperating set establishment request to the eNodeB of the serving cell of the UE, and sending a CoMP cooperating set establishment response to the eNodeB of the serving cell of the UE; the eNodeB of the serving cell of the UE determining a CoMP cooperating set of the UE according to information of the CoMP cooperating set establishment response; and according to a coordinated multi-point communication mode, sharing data information and service bearer information of the UE of the CoMP cooperating set. The present invention guarantees coordinated multi-point joint transmission/reception, decreases the overhead and complexity of the communication system and furthermore reduces the time delay in the information exchange. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223273 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVALUATING AN AIR INTERFACE CONDITION OF A WLAN - In a method and an apparatus for evaluating air interface condition of a wireless local area network (WLAN), the evaluation of the air interface condition of the WLAN is divided into four layers: the evaluation of the air interface condition of the pre-defined area, the evaluation of the air interface condition of each place in the pre-defined area, the evaluation of the air interface condition of each AP in each place and the evaluation of the air interface condition of each user accessing each AP. The method and apparatus are able to provide definite evaluation denoting the level of the air interface condition through analyzing and quantizing of the statistical information items with respect to the overall air interface condition of the whole area covered by the WLAN or the partial air interface condition of each place, each AP and each user in the pre-defined area. | 08-29-2013 |
20130229928 | MECHANISM FOR PROXIMITY DETECTION BASED ON WI-FI SIGNALS - A mechanism is described for proximity detection based on Wi-Fi signals. A method of embodiments of the invention includes determining strength of one or more signals being communicated between one or more antennae of a first device and two or more antennae of a second device. The one or more signals are associated with a broadcast packet. The method further includes determining proximity of the first device and the second device based on the determined strength of the one or more signals. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229929 | CONTEXT-AWARE MOBILE COMPUTING FOR AUTOMATIC ENVIRONMENT DETECTION AND RE-ESTABLISHMENT - Automatically discovering and re-establishing wireless connections to other devices in a mobile computing environment (MCE) may be achieved by monitoring connections of different devices with the UE, correlating the connections of the different devices, determining an MCE based on the correlations, and storing information associated with the MCE. A known MCE may accordingly be automatically detected based on an identification of at least one of the different devices, for example, and connection with one or more of the different devices may be automatically re-established to re-establish the MCE based on the stored information. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229930 | PROXIMITY-BASED WIRELESS HANDSHAKING FOR CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - A first network device can implement functionality to establish a proximity-based wireless connection with a second network device. It can be determined whether the second network device is within a threshold detection distance from the first network device based on a signal strength associated with RF signals received from the second network device or based on detecting RF saturation at the first network device. Device credentials associated with the first network device can be transmitted to the second network device at a reduced transmit power level in response to determining that the second network device is within the threshold detection distance from the first network device. A communication link can be established between the first network device and the second network device based, at least in part, on the device credentials associated with the first network device and device credentials received from the second network device. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229931 | METHODS OF MANAGING TERMINAL PERFORMED IN BASE STATION AND TERMINAL - Provided are methods of managing a terminal in a heterogeneous network (HetNet) environment. Between the methods, a method of managing a terminal performed in a base station includes determining whether or not a measurement change request event has occurred, and when a measurement change request event has occurred, transmitting a control message for instructing a change of a measurement operation to the terminal. Accordingly, it is possible to improve a measurement operation and discontinuous reception (DRX) operation control procedure necessary for connection control between one or more base stations and a terminal in a HetNet environment, and thereby performance of a system can be improved. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229932 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step of transmitting, by a mobile management node MME, “Measurement Configuration #1” for instructing to measure and report a desired radio quality to a radio base station eNB#1 that manages a cell #1 when it is detected that a mobile station UE has moved into the cell #1 that lies inside a measurement-target area, and a step of transmitting, by the radio base station eNB#1, “RRC Connection Reconfiguration” including the “Measurement Configuration #1” to the mobile station UE. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229933 | HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK (HETNET) USER EQUIPMENT (UE) RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (RRM) MEASUREMENTS - Methods and apparatus for performing radio resource management (RRM) measurements in a heterogeneous network (HetNet) are provided in an effort to prevent failure of RRM measurement procedures in a dominant interference scenario. Several alternatives are provided for determining particular resources (e.g., subframes) to use for performing the RRM measurements, wherein the particular resources are based on cooperative resource partitioning between cells of the HetNet, wherein the cells may be of different types (e.g., macro, pico, or femto cells). These alternatives include, for example: (1) intra-frequency or intra-RAT (radio access technology) alternatives, which may involve transmitting resource partitioning information (RPI) in or deriving non-serving cell RPI based on the serving cell's RPI, as well as (2) inter-frequency or inter-RAT alternatives, where the RRM measurements may be performed during a measurement gap. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229934 | USING MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES TO FACILITATE COORDINATING USE OF RESOURCES - Resource blocks associated with communication devices can be managed. A mobile device(s) at cell edge identifies its in-use resource blocks (RBs) to a neighbor base station, or in-use RBs of a neighbor base station to the serving base station. In the former instance, the neighbor base station sorts RBs in ascending order based on signal strengths respectively associated with the RBs and mobile devices; in the latter instance, the serving base station ranks RBs in ascending order based on signal strengths respectively associated with the RBs and neighbor base stations. RBs having weakest signal strength are reused first for mobile devices at cell edge. Base station establishes a direct wireless radio path with another base station facilitated by employing a sequence of subframes where all subframes but a specified subframe are blanked, and data is transmitted between base stations during the specified subframe. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229935 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATION STRATEGY SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate cooperation strategy selection for a network multiple-in-multiple-out (N-MIMO) communication system. As described herein, one or more nodes in a communication system capable of N-MIMO communication can calculate marginal utilities, projected per-user rates, and/or other parameters corresponding to respective associated users. Based on these calculations, respective network nodes can perform user scheduling and selection, cell scheduling and selection, selection of a cooperation strategy (e.g., coordinated silencing, joint transmission, coordinated beamforming, etc.), and/or other operations to provide cooperative communication for respective users. As further described herein, projected rate calculation for a given user can be adjusted based on processing or channel implementation loss associated with the user, interference nulling capability of the user, or other factors. As additionally described herein, these and/or other parameters can be fed back by respective users to a serving network node and/or mandated via system performance requirements. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229936 | Network-Based Location of Mobile Transmitters - In an overlay, network-based, wireless location system, LMUs typically co-located with BTSs are used to collect radio signaling both in the forward and reverse channels for use in TDOA and/or AOA positioning methods. Information broadcast from the radio network and by global satellite navigation system constellations can be received by the LMU and used to reduce the difficulty of initial system configuration and reconfiguration due to radio network changes. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229937 | WIRELESS NETWORK FACILITATOR AND MONITOR - Techniques are presented for facilitating and monitoring wireless network connections. Clients and intermediate nodes are configured to interact with one another via network connections. Initially, the clients wirelessly connect to a select one of the intermediate nodes. Tests may be periodically issued to the clients and to the intermediate nodes to measure and track performance and quality of the network connections. Billing records may also be recorded and billing policies verified for client activities occurring during the network connections. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229938 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING LIMITED MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for measuring, which is performed by a user equipment in a wireless communication system. The method for measuring comprises the following steps: receiving from a serving cell a report request message on measured resource limitation; attempting to acquire the information on the measured resource limitation; and transmitting the report request message on the measured resource limitation including the information on the measured resource limitation to the serving cell; receiving from the serving cell the measured resource limitation setting; and performing the limited measurement, when the information on the measured resource limitation is successfully acquired. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229939 | Handover Control for Networks with Several Types of Backhaul Connections - There are provided measures for handover control for backhaul connections, said measures exemplarily including evaluation of the suitability of an access node cell in access network as target for a handover of a terminal based on delay information being indicative of an expected packet delay in a cell of the access node, wherein such delay information may be generated and/or exchanged in the access network. Said measures may exemplarily be applied for improving handover control in relay-enhanced access networks or networks that contain access nodes connected via different kinds of backhaul that can result in different end-to-end packet delays. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229940 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR PROVIDING MEASUREMENT REPORTS - The invention proposes method of providing measurement reports. The eNodeB sends (S | 09-05-2013 |
20130229941 | Two-Dimensional UE Pairing in MIMO Systems - A method and a radio base station are provided for selecting a first User Equipment (UE) and at least a second UE from a plurality of UEs, for sharing a transmission resource in the time-frequency dimension in a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission. A first and second imperfection of Channel State Information (CSI) made available for the first UE and second UE, respectively is estimated ( | 09-05-2013 |
20130229942 | RADIO BASE STATION, RELAY BASE STATION, MOBILE TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND OPERATION CONTROL METHOD - To achieve load distribution in a short period of time, a mobile communication system includes a mobile terminal ( | 09-05-2013 |
20130229943 | Method, Apparatus and System for Optimizing Inter-Cell Interference Coordination - The present invention proposes a method, a radio base station and a wireless communication system for optimizing Inter-cell Interference Coordination, wherein a user equipment is communicated within a cell served by the radio base station, comprising: obtaining one or more channel conditions on the communication channel between the user equipment and the radio base station, establishing a utility function as a function of Signal to Interference-and-Noise Ratios SINRs to model the user equipment's satisfaction level in terms of quality of service and power consumption based on the obtained channel conditions, selecting a SINR that enables to maximize the value of the utility function as a target SINR, and determining a transmit power to be used by the user equipment as a function of the target SINR. Thus, a self-optimized inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) without X2 signaling between base stations is achieved and greedy power allocation is avoid. | 09-05-2013 |
20130235737 | DEFERRAL MECHANISM FOR IMPROVED MEDIUM REUSE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS WITH TRANSMIT POWER IMBALANCES - The deferral mechanism described herein may improve medium reuse in a wireless network with transmit power imbalances. For example, in one embodiment, an apparatus employing the deferral mechanism described herein may comprise a receiver to sense a data unit transmitted on a medium associated with the wireless network, wherein the data unit may comprise information indicating a transmit power associated therewith. Furthermore, the apparatus may comprise one or more processors to initiate a transmission on the medium associated with the wireless network if the apparatus is not an intended receiver of the sensed data unit, the transmit power associated with the data unit exceeds a transmit power associated with the apparatus, and a received power associated with the data unit does not equal or exceed a clear channel assessment threshold plus a difference between the transmit power associated with the data unit and the transmit power associated with the apparatus. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235738 | Measurement and Reporting Configuration in Radio Communication Networks - A wireless device, a network apparatus, a test equipment and a method in a heterogeneous radio-communication system configured to perform and report measurements in view of patterns including at least two types of subframes are provided. The wireless device has a transceiver and a processing unit. The transceiver is configured to send and to receive signals from more than one cell, and to receive information defining a first pattern related to first cells. The processing unit is configured to determine a second pattern related to second cells based on the first pattern and at least one of an indication or predefined rule relating the first pattern and the second pattern, to perform measurements related to the signals, and to report, to a network node, measurement results based on the measurements, the measurement results being related to signals received from a number of one or more cells. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235739 | Dynamic Audio/Video Channel Bonding - A data communication architecture delivers a wide variety of content, including audio and video content, to consumers. The architecture employs channel bonding to deliver more bandwidth than any single communication channel can carry. In some implementations, the communication architecture communicates content according to an initial bonding configuration. The communication architecture may adjust the bonding configuration to adapt to bonding environment changes affecting the communication capabilities or requirements associated with transmitting the content. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235740 | METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL FOR MANAGING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK PROCEDURE AND NETWORK REGISTRATION - A method that uses a processor to manage a circuit switched fall back (CSFB) procedure includes connecting to a circuit switched network for the CSFB procedure, processing, using the processor, a voice call using the circuit switched network, and determining whether to register to a packet switched network according to a connection possibility of the packet switched network. A mobile terminal includes a first mobile communication modem to connect to a packet switched network, a second mobile communication modem to switch from the packet switched network to a circuit switched network, and a controller to determine whether to re-register to the packet switched network according to a connection possibility of the packet switched network. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235741 | Obtaining Signalling Information in a Packet Switched Network - A method for a first node obtaining signalling information in a packet switched network. The method comprises the steps of the first node sending a first request message comprising a first request for collecting signalling information towards a second node comprised by the packet switched network; the first node receiving a first response message, the first response message comprising a signalling information added by the second node and the signalling information collected by the second node in response to the first request message. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235742 | CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION AND BEAM INDEX REPORTING - A method and apparatus report or identify channel quality information. The method for reporting includes selecting one or more beams for channel quality reporting. The method also includes mapping, by the UE, indices of the one or more selected beams to one or more channel quality values. Additionally, the method includes sending channel quality information for the one or more selected beams according to the mapping. The method for identifying includes receiving an indication of indices of one or more beams selected for reporting. The method also includes receiving channel quality information for the one or more selected beams. The method further includes identifying a mapping of the indices of the one or more selected beams to one or more channel quality values. Additionally, the method includes identifying a channel quality value for each of the one or more selected beams according to the mapping. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235743 | COLLABORATIVE MEASUREMENTS IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - A method for assessing the interference impact of a specific base station includes causing an interfering transmitter in the network to transmit data at substantially different power levels for each of at least two predefined time-frequency-resources, instructing the user equipment to measure and report to the serving base station at least one parameter associated with reception of the downlink signals that is indicative of an effect of the interfering signals and processing the results in order to assess the effect of the interfering signals. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235744 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING ORBITAL ANGULAR MOMENTUM - Different data communication architectures deliver a wide variety of content, including audio and video content, to consumers. The architectures may utilize orbital angular momentum to deliver more bandwidth across multiple channels than any single communication channel can carry. In some implementations, the communication architectures distribute data across multiple orbital angular momentum channels in a bonded channel group. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235745 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless network includes a source node, a destination node, and at least a first relay node. The network is arranged to determine a first measure of signal quality for a direct link between the source node and the destination node, and a second measure of signal quality for a link between the source node and the destination node via at least one relay node. At a relay node, the duration of a recruitment slot is determined, within which the relay node may transmit a recruitment message indicating availability of the relay node to relay. The recruitment slot duration is determined on the basis of the first measure of signal quality. In this way, the recruitment of a relay may depend on the signal quality of the direct link from the source node to the destination node. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235746 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FEMTOCELL CHANNEL SELECTION - Femto node radio frequency channel selection may be achieved by selecting between a first band of operating channels and a second band of operating channels for a femto node based on at least one band-selection criterion, the first band including a plurality of channels that are higher in frequency than a plurality of channels in the second band, and configuring the femto node for operation according to one or more operating channels in the selected band. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235747 | ESTIMATION OF ACCESS QUALITY IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Communicating in a network over a path that includes a first node includes: receiving from the first node, at a second node on the path, a packet addressed to a destination; forwarding the packet from the second node to the destination; determining, at the second node, a first time associated with forwarding the packet to the destination; receiving, at the second node, an acknowledgement of the packet from the destination; determining, at the second node, a second time associated with receiving the acknowledgement at the second node; and forwarding the acknowledgment from the second node to the first node. The acknowledgment includes timing information based on the first time and second time. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235748 | Medium Access Control for Wireless Systems - A method for execution by a mobile station (MS) in a mobile communications network, the method comprising: receiving a first MS identifier from the network during a ranging operation involving the MS; using the first MS identifier to extract the contents of at least one message received from the network during said ranging operation; using a second MS identifier, different from the first MS identifier, to extract the contents of at least one message received from the network after said ranging operation is complete. Also, a method for execution by the base station, comprising: outputting a first message destined for the MS, the first message including a first identifier for use by the MS during a ranging operation; determining that said ranging operation is complete; outputting a second message destined for the MS, the second message including a second identifier for use by the MS in subsequent communication with the network. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235749 | METHOD DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ESTIMATING ACCESS POINTS USING LOG DATA - The present disclosure provides a system, device and method for estimating an AP location using log data. Information, which is not pre-stored in a database when the information is updated, is classified and then location information of an AP is estimated by using log data of a user in such a manner of estimating a location of the AP by using log data of a user in wireless LAN based positioning and thus updating the database for the wireless LAN based positioning, thereby improving positioning accuracy. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235750 | OUT-OF-BAND RADIO FOR SUPPORTING COMPRESSED MODE IN A FEMTO DEPLOYMENT - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for using communications over an out-of-band (OOB) link to support compressed mode communications by user equipment (UE) in a femto deployment. Typically, UEs must tune away from an active communications channel to make inter-frequency and/or inter-RAT measurements. When making these measurements, data communications may be compressed to allow time to tune away for those measurements. Embodiments integrate an OOB proxy with the femtocell to provide OOB link capability to supplement WWAN link resources. According to various techniques, the OOB link is used to compensate for reductions in data rate and/or quality resulting from compressed mode operation. For example, the OOB link is used to communicate compressed mode signaling data, retransmissions, and/or other compensatory data. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235751 | Method and Apparatus for Monitoring Wireless Network Access - A system and method for monitoring wireless network access, and use of a detected wireless network connection are described. A client component (e.g., software component), or client, can be downloaded to a computing device, which leverages off of the computing device's ability to locate and establish a network connection. The client component listens for network connection activity, and determines whether the device has established a network connection with a network known to the client. If the client determines that a network connection has been established to a known network, the client uses the network connection to log the user onto the network. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235752 | Method and System for Integrated Link Adaptation and Power Control to Improve Error and Throughput Performance in Wireless Packet Networks - The invention provides a system that implements an algorithm for integrated link adaptation and power control to achieve specified error rates and to improve an overall throughput for real-time applications in wireless packet networks. The system initially divides wireless terminals into groups according to their signal path gains. Afterwards, the system can periodically adapt transmissions (i.e., link adaptations) based on the required error rates, actual error statistics and average transmission power for each wireless terminal group. Furthermore, transmission power can be adjusted by an enhanced Kalman-filter method to ensure successful reception. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235753 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program for Signaling Channel Quality Information in a Network that Employs Relay Nodes - A relay node receives from user equipments UE CQI reports which give a CQI value per radio band resource RBR, from which are aggregated across the RBRs and/or aggregated per UE across that UE's RBR values. The relay node reports an indication of the average to its controlling access node (eNodeB), either explicitly or implicitly (e.g., a gain applied to the CQI of the downlink between the relay and access nodes). The relay node also checks the UEs' buffer status (actual or predicted) and reports either periodically or based on an underflow/overflow occurrence. For periodic reports, each UE buffer experiencing the overrun/underrun is reported. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235754 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING A CHANNEL STATUS BETWEEN TERMINALS IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM THAT SUPPORTS COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION - The present invention provides a method for measuring a channel status between a source terminal and a cooperative terminal in a wireless access system that supports cooperative communication between terminals. The method comprises: a step in which the source terminal receives, from a base station, first control information for performing the cooperative communication between the terminals, wherein said first control information includes resource allocation information and control signal information; a step in which the source terminal measures the channel status between the source terminal and the cooperative terminal using the resource allocation information and the control signal information; a step in which the source terminal receives, from the base station, second control information for performing cooperative communication between the source terminal and the cooperative terminal; and a step in which the source terminal performs the cooperative communication between the terminals using the second control information. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235755 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS IN A MULTI CARRIER ENVIRONMENT - A method and apparatus for performing measurements in a multi-carrier environment are provided. In the method, a request to perform measurements on a frequency corresponding to one of at least one frequency band is received from a base station. It is determined whether a compressed mode is to be applied on the frequency corresponding to the one of the at least one frequency band based on capabilities of a user equipment. If so, the compressed mode is applied on the frequency corresponding to the one of the at least one frequency band so that measurements can be performed on the frequency corresponding to the one of the at least one frequency band without interrupting data activity on the remaining frequency bands. Otherwise, measurements are performed on the frequency corresponding to the one of the at least one frequency band without applying the compressed mode. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235756 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR APERIODICALLY REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS CONNECTION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to methods and devices for aperiodically reporting channel state information (CSI). According to an embodiment of the present invention, a method for aperiodically reporting channel state information may comprise: a terminal receiving an upper layer signal from a base station, the upper layer signal containing information about at least one allocated CSI measurement group; the terminal receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) signal via a first subframe from the base station, the PDCCH signal containing a CSI request field; the terminal setting a second subframe as a CSI reference resource based on the first subframe; and determining whether at least one CSI measurement group to which a CSI reference resource is allocated is included. | 09-12-2013 |
20130242761 | COMBINING CHANNEL QUALITY MEASUREMENTS BASED ON SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNALS AND DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNALS - A first communication node communicates by multiple-input-multiple-output (MIMO) wireless communications with a second communication node of a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) over a plurality of subcarriers transmitted by the second communication node for MIMO communications. Channel quality is measured responsive to the sounding reference signal to output a first channel quality value. A demodulation reference signal is received over a plurality of subcarriers transmitted by the second communication node for MIMO communications. Channel quality is measured responsive to the demodulation reference signal to output a second channel quality value. Reliability of the measurements of the first channel quality value and the second channel quality value is determined. The first and second channel quality values are combined while compensating for the determined reliability difference between the measurements to generate a combined channel quality value. Related communication nodes are disclosed. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242762 | Wireless Communication Device Capable of Utilizing Additional Bandwidth - A wireless communication device is disclosed that is capable of utilizing bandwidth outside of its allocated bandwidth in order to maximize frequency coverage. The allocated band is separate from a neighboring band by a guard band. The device performs a scan of the neighboring band in order to determine an activity level within the neighboring band. Based on the determined activity level, the device expands its communication frequency range to include the guard band and/or the neighboring band. Once expanded, the device periodically rescans the neighboring band in order to determine whether the device must contract its frequency band out of the expanded area. The device can also receive activity level information of the neighboring band from a server via a common network infrastructure, and can coordinate expansion with other devices. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242763 | METHOD TO USE NETWORK MEASUREMENTS TO OPTIMIZE MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE PERFORMANCE - Method and apparatus for managing connections and state transitions between a mobile wireless device and a wireless network are described. The mobile wireless device measures network characteristics of radio sectors in the wireless network and saves the measured network characteristics in a database, later retrieving the network characteristics and determining data inactivity timeout values for the radio sector. The mobile wireless device manages connections and state transitions based on the determined data inactivity timeout values. The database of network characteristics is organized by geographic location. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242764 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING FEEDBACK IN MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSIONS - An apparatus and a method are provided, which, for example in a user equipment, measure a transmission channel based on reference resources with respect to at least two transmission points, establish a feedback report based on the measurement, the feedback report including a plurality of channel feedback information related to each transmission point, and send the feedback report on a physical uplink control channel. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242765 | ERROR DETECTION - Methods and apparatus for enabling ciphering error detection and recovery in a telecommunications network. Predetermined data is inserted into at least one radio link control service data unit at a network entity. The predetermined data has the same form as a packet data convergence protocol header. The at least one radio link control service data unit comprising the predetermined data is transmitted to a user equipment in the network. As a result, the user equipment is able to apply, on the basis of the predetermined data, either an unacknowledged mode radio link control ciphering error detection and recovery mechanism or a packet data convergence protocol ciphering error detection and recovery mechanism to the at least one radio link control service data unit. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242766 | PRE-SIB2 CHANNEL ESTIMATION AND SIGNAL PROCESSING IN THE PRESENCE OF MBSFN FOR LTE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus updates a CIE in guaranteed non-MBSFN subframes. The apparatus refrains from updating at least one of an AGC, a TTL, an FTL, or an SNR estimation (FTL_SNR) in potential MBSFN subframes before a SIB is decoded to ascertain which subframes of a radio frame are MBSFN subframes and non-MBSFN subframes. The MBSFN subframes include a subset of the potential MBSFN subframes. The non-MBSFN subframes include a remaining subset of the potential MBSFN subframes and the guaranteed non-MBSFN subframes. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242767 | Cell Selection and Reselection in a Telecommunication Network - A method for performing a selection or a reselection of a cell of an UMTS or LTE network, based on a parameter taking into account a traffic load level of the cell. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242768 | ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SYSTEM CAPABLE OF OPTIMIZING CHANNEL ESTIMATION AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a channel estimation method for an orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing system with cyclic-delay diversity. The method makes pilots have the same amplitude and equally partitions the pilots into a number of pilot groups. In addition, the method equally spaces the pilots of each group in a frequency domain and determines the pilot locations and cyclic-delay coefficient of each pilot group in order to optimize the channel estimation of a receiver. The method can perform the channel estimation by using just one OFDM symbol. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242769 | Induced Incoherency for Joint Transmission - Frequency-selective phase shifts are applied to signals transmitted from multiple transmission points involved in a coordinated (joint) transmission to a given UE. An eNodeB or other network node controlling the joint transmission artificially induces frequency selectivity between signals received by the UE in joint transmission from different transmission points, so as to ensure an even balance between constructive and destructive combination over frequency. By applying frequency-selective phase shifts (e.g., pseudo-random phase shifts) to the different transmission points that perform joint transmission, the signals from the different transmission points are forced to combine at the UE in a non-coherent manner. As a result, uncertainty in how the signals combine is drastically reduced, since it can be expected that the signals will always combine incoherently. The reduced uncertainty translates to reduced back-off offset in the link adaptation, and thus in an increased throughput. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242770 | In enhanced physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH) - Technology for transmitting a distributed control channel element (CCE) for an enhanced physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH) and a localized CCE in a physical resource block (PRB) pair from a node and technology for physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) physical resource block (PRB) allocation with at least one enhanced physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH) at a wireless device is disclosed. One method can include a node precoding at least one distributed CCE and at least one localized CCE for the PRB pair. The node can transmit the at least one distributed CCE for transmit diversity using at least two user equipment-specific reference signal (UERS) ports and transmitting the at least one localized CCE in the PRB pair. The at least two UERS ports can be used to transmit two CCEs. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242771 | COMMUNICATION DURATION CONFIGURING METHOD, RELAY STATION, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication duration configuring method is used in a mobile communication system with a relay station for relaying wireless communications between a base station and a mobile station. The method includes: configuring at least one of a downlink communication duration in which the relay station receives a transmission signal from the base station while limiting a transmission of a signal from the relay station to the mobile station, and an uplink communication duration in which the relay station transmits the transmission signal to the base station while limiting a transmission of a signal from the mobile station to the relay station; measuring a self-interference amount in the relay station; and controlling a configuration of the communication duration according to the self-interference amount. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242772 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE RECEIVE DIVERSITY CONTROL FOR POWER REDUCTION - Methods and devices performing the method for wireless communications are disclosed, where the method includes retrieving historical communications information for a plurality of receive chains for receiving communications from a wireless node; determining a number of receive chains from the plurality of receive chains to enable in a discontinuous reception mode based on the historical communications information; and enabling the number of receive chains to receive a communication from the wireless node in a communications cycle. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242773 | NODE AND METHOD FOR GENERATING BEAMFORMED FOR DOWNLINK COMMUNICATIONS - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards an eNodeB, and method therein, for generating downlink communications in a multiple antenna system. The method comprises transmitting, to a number of user equipments, a plurality of reference signals, where each signal is beamformed in a distinct direction within at least one correlated domain (e.g., elevation and/or azimuth). The eNodeB receives at least one CSI report from a specific user equipment and determines a primary reference signal based on, for example, the at least one CSI report. The eNodeB may thereafter generate downlink communication signals for antenna element(s) and/or subelements of the multiple antenna system. The downlink communication signals are beamformed into a transmitting direction that aligns most closely with a beamforming direction of the at least one primary reference signal, as compared to any other beamforming direction of the reference signals. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242774 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENT SCHEDULING BASED ON AN UNDETECTED FREQUENCY - Apparatus and method for wireless communication in a wireless communication network include operating a wireless device on a first wireless communication technology and detecting a first cell in first frequency of a second wireless communication technology. The aspects also include determining the detected cell of the second wireless communication technology satisfies a first reselection criterion based on a first measurement and identifying a second frequency of the second wireless communication technology as an undetected frequency based on monitoring the second frequency without detecting a second cell. Aspects also include expediting a determination of whether to perform cell reselection to the second wireless communication technology based on the undetected frequency and the detected cell of the second wireless communication technology satisfying the first reselection criterion and determining to reselect to the detected cell of the second wireless communication technology. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242775 | Routing a Call - A method of routing a call involving a call party in a telecommunications network via a selected media routing path of a plurality of different media routing paths is provided. The media routing paths communicate media data to and/or from at least one communication device associated with the call party. A call control system in the telecommunications network receives data derived from a media quality test procedure for a given media routing path. The media quality test procedure includes media test data being communicated via the given media routing path and the media test data being analysed. The call control system selects a preferred media routing path from the plurality of media routing paths for communicating media data associated with the call to and/or from one or more of the at least one communication devices associated with the call party on the basis of at least the received data. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242776 | MEASUREMENT-ASSISTED DYNAMIC FREQUENCY-REUSE IN CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A radio network resource controller directs a first network node associated with a first cell region, or a wireless terminal in communication through the first cell region, to measure and report radio resource-related data selected from the group consisting of: resource activity per channel; the number of transmitted power samples that exceed a threshold over a measurement period; and, channel quality samples that exceed a quality threshold. The controller then receives at least one measurement report of the radio resource-related data and, as a function of the radio resource-related data in the first cell region, dynamically reallocates the distribution of resources, such as radio-frequency channels, between the first cell region and at least a second cell region. The invention has a particular advantage in TDD mode of operation where efficient and dynamic interference mitigation is needed to combat the inherent mobile-to-mobile and base station-to-base station interference. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242777 | CARRIER AGGREGATION SCHEDULING BASED ON TRAFFIC CHARACTERISTICS AND CELL CHARACTERISTICS - A method, implemented by one or more processors, for scheduling traffic streams in a communication network includes determining, via a processor, a plurality of sets of one or more cell characteristics. Each set of cell characteristics in the plurality of sets of cell characteristics corresponds to a different cell in a plurality of cells. The method also includes determining, via a processor, a first set of one or more traffic characteristics corresponding to a first traffic stream, selecting, via a processor, a first cell from the plurality of cells based on (i) the plurality of sets of cell characteristics and (ii) the first set of traffic characteristics, and assigning, via a processor, the first traffic stream to the first cell for an entire duration of the first traffic stream. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242778 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNAL CONFIGURING AND REPORTING FOR A COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION SCHEME - A method for wireless communication includes allocating overlapping sets of resources to different UEs. The resources may be for channel state information (CSI) measurement and received power measurements. The overlapping resources include a first set of resources, allocated to a first UE, for the CSI measurements and a second set of resources, allocated to a second UE, for the received power measurements. The method also includes receiving a CSI measurement report and a received power measurement report. The reports are based on the first set of resources and the second set or resources, respectively. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242779 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE COORDINATED TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for interference coordination to improve transmission and reception performance within wireless networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a wireless transmitter transmits multiple transmissions over a determined time. The receiver receives the multiple transmissions and attempts to recover the transmitted signal. Because, the fading channel varies over time for each transmitter-receiver, by combining the received signals over multiple iterations, the signal of interest will be magnified, whereas interference effects will be suppressed. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242780 | VIRTUAL GAP PATTERNS WITH MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE FOR PROTECTED MEASUREMENTS - A user equipment (UE) may mitigate coexistence issues in multi-radio devices, where significant in-device coexistence problems can. The UE determines at least one potential virtual gap pattern configuration for a first radio access technology (RAT). The UE also selects one of the at least one potential gap pattern configuration based at least in part on protecting subframes which are used by the first RAT to perform clean signal reference measurements and/or based at least in part on performance of the second RAT. Further, the UE quiets transmit activities of a second RAT during protected subframes of the first RAT in the determined potential virtual gap pattern configuration. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242781 | Mobile Network Traffic Optimization - The techniques described herein detect which one of multiple different radio states a radio communication unit of a client device is currently operating in. The techniques may also learn one or more transition parameters that, once satisfied or reached, may switch the radio communication unit from one radio state to another radio state. Using the detected radio state and the learned transition parameters, the client device can optimize network communications. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242782 | Method and Apparatus for Adjusting Transmission Power in a Radio System - The invention relates to a method and apparatus to adjust transmission of a closed subscriber group node for improving radio coverage when the signal power received from the strongest co-channel open-access cell e.g. macro cell and the handover rate in the node does not fulfil set conditions. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242783 | System and Method of Offloading Traffic to a Wireless Local Area Network - Methods and apparatus for offloading traffic from a cellular network to a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. One example method generally includes receiving, from a serving base station, a request to measure one or more WLAN access points (APs), determining one or more metrics for the WLAN APs, comparing the metrics for the WLAN APs to a threshold, and reporting metrics for at least a first AP of the WLAN APs if the metrics for the first AP exceed the threshold. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242784 | Reducing Complexity and Power Consumption in Cellular Networks with Carrier Aggregation - In a communications network with carrier aggregation (CA), embodiments enable the network to advertise to a supported wireless device not only whether or not aggregated component carriers allocated to the wireless are intra-band adjacent but farther whether or not the allocated component carriers are collocated. Embodiments further enable the wireless to advertise its CA capabilities including the support of adjacent collocated CA and/or non-adjacent collocated CA. Embodiments thus provide systems/methods for the exploitation of special conditions provided by adjacent collocated component carriers to reduce processing complexity and power consumption for certain types of wireless device transmitter/receiver architectures and to support intra-band adjacent CA for other types of UE transmitter/receiver architectures. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242785 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOGGING AND REPORTING EVENTS THAT COULD CAUSE ACCESSIBILITY PROBLEMS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus are disclosed for logging and reporting events that could cause accessibility problems in a wireless communication system. The method includes logging, at m UE, in an event log an occurrence of an event where no cell could he found. The method also includes reporting the event log from the UE. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242786 | Network Controlled Throughput for Enhanced Uplink FACH - Systems and methods according to these exemplary embodiments provide for network control of interference associated with uplink transmissions by user equipments, UEs, operating in a random access state, e.g., the CELL_FACH state. A radio network controller, RNC, can determine, and then transmit, a limitation on uplink transmissions for such UEs, e.g., a maximum transport block size, TBS. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242787 | System and Method for Measurement Report Triggering Configuration for Multiple Point Communication Measurement Set Management - A method embodiment includes configuring, by a network device, a multiple point communication measurement reporting scheme. The multiple point communication measurement reporting scheme includes a multiple point communication measurement set, a List A, a List B, and measurement report triggering events. The measurement report triggering events includes a first event wherein a measurement result of an element in List A becomes better than a threshold, a second event wherein a measurement result of an element in List A becomes better than a measurement result of an element in List B by at least an offset, a third event wherein a measurement result of an element in List B becomes worse than a threshold, and/or a fourth event wherein a measurement result of an element in List B becomes worse than a measurement result of an element in List A by at least an offset. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242788 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The user equipment comprises a radio transmitter arranged to transmit data packets to a receiver on an uplink channel and a receiver arranged to receive data packets transmitted from a transmitter on a downlink channel. The user equipment comprises circuitry that analyzes the received data packets. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242789 | Signal Measurement on Component Carriers in Wireless Communication Systems - A method in a wireless communication device includes performing measurements of a first serving cell on a first carrier frequency at a first rate, determining whether a signal level of a second serving cell on a second carrier frequency exceeds a threshold, and performing measurements of the first serving cell at a second rate if the signal level of the second serving cell is below the threshold, wherein the second rate is higher than the first rate. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242790 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING ACTIVATION INDICATOR REGARDING COMPONENT CARRIER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for supporting activation/deactivation of serving cells by a base station (eNB) in a wireless communication system provides decreased overhead and decreased power consumption for a user equipment (UE). The method includes configuring M supportable serving cells in the UE, configuring an indicator indicating activation/deactivation of each of the M serving cells, configuring a medium access control (MAC) message which includes a MAC control element (CE) and a logical channel identifier (LCID), the MAC CE including the indicator configured for each of the M serving cells and having a length corresponding to an integer multiple of 8 bits, the LCID indicating that the MAC CE includes the indicator indicating activation/deactivation of each serving cell, and transmitting the configured MAC message to the UE. Accordingly, a control channel or data channel regarding a component carrier is selectively received depending on whether the component carrier is activated. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242791 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE TRANSMISSION POWER OF A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for controlling transmission power of the base station in a wireless communication system and includes calculating signal-to-noise ratio of a target component carrier and recovering the signal-to-noise ratio to be equal to or greater than a threshold by increasing a transmission power to a predetermined level and requesting, when the signal-to-noise ratio is less than a predetermined threshold, a neighbor base station to decrease the transmission power. According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the inter-cell interference and improve channel utilization efficiency, resulting in improvement of the throughput of the wireless communication system. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242792 | MULTIPLE BAND PORTABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZER - A device for detecting RF power information, for use as a stand alone purpose built device, or connectable to an external computing instrument such as a laptop, PDA, or cell phone, or other similarly capable technology. The device scans two or more bands in the wireless frequency and provides output to the user with wireless information about multiple bands of information. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242793 | Method, Device, and System for Selecting Relay Type - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, a device, and a system for selecting a relay type. A relay node selects a Un interface frequency band with an optimal signal according to frequency bands supported on a Un interface. The relay node determines a relay type according to the selected Un interface frequency band and a configured Uu interface frequency band and sends indication information to a DeNB. The indication information includes the selected Un interface frequency band and the relay type. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242794 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CONFIGURING ANTENNA MODE FOR UPLINK COMMUNICATION - Methods and devices for configuring transmit antenna mode for a user equipment that can transmit in the uplink using at least two transmit antennas are provided. In accordance with embodiment a transmit antenna mode of the user equipment can be configured in response to a measured transmit antenna imbalance. Methods and devices for configuring transmit antenna mode for a user equipment that can transmit in the uplink using at least two transmit antennas are provided. In accordance with embodiment a transmit antenna mode of the user equipment can be configured in response to a measured transmit antenna imbalance. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242795 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FINGERPRINTING OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method for fingerprinting wireless devices and a method for using a device fingerprint for identifying wireless devices. A monitoring station listens to a channel. For each received frame, the station measures the inter-arrival time from the end of the previously received frame to the end of the present frame, if possible, the station obtains the identity of the sender of the frame. If the sender is known, then the station stores the inter-arrival time in a histogram for the sender; the histogram becomes the fingerprint for the sender. Identification of a device begins by obtaining a number of inter-arrival times for an unknown sender and then matching these to stored fingerprints using a suitable similarity measure. The invention is particularly suitable for IEEE 802.11 and may for example be used to detect so-called MAC spoofing and as an additional layer of an identification protocol. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242796 | Method for reporting measurement capability and UE - The disclosure discloses a method for reporting measurement capability, including: a UE reports the measurement capability of the UE to a base station, wherein the measurement capability is the capability of whether a measurement gap is required for the UE to execute different-frequency and different-system measurement when the UE operates in one frequency band or in a carrier aggregation scenario; and after acquiring the measurement capability of the UE, the base station determines whether to configure a measurement gap for the UE according to the frequency band to which carriers configured to be aggregated for the UE belong, the frequency band to which the carrier frequency for a measurement object of a currently configured measurement task belongs, and the measurement capability of the UE. The disclosure also discloses a UE correspondingly. By the disclosure, the base station is capable of not configuring a measurement gap for the UE if unnecessary, so that the influence of the different-frequency and different-system measurement to the service can be reduced, and possible resource waste caused can be avoided when the UE carries out measurement in the carrier aggregation scenario. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242797 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Upon receipt of sounding signals from a plurality of communication devices including a communication partner device, an evaluation value processing unit calculates an evaluation value indicative of a characteristic of a transmission path based on the sounding signals from the plurality of communication devices. A transmission scheme setting unit sets, based on the evaluation value, adaptive array transmission that achieves both null steering and beamforming or beamforming dedicated transmission as a transmission scheme to the communication partner device. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250782 | Radio Link Monitoring in a Wireless Communication Device For a Enhanced Control Channel | 09-26-2013 |
20130250783 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS REGISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE OF WIRELESS CLIENTS VIA A PROXY WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE - A method for registration and maintenance of a data connection using a proxy wireless network service involves registering a multi-network terminal on a first network that is made up of a first network infrastructure. The method includes transmitting registration information for a second network to a proxy component that is part of the first network infrastructure. The transmission of the registration information causes the proxy component to forward said registration information to an agent component that is part of the second network that is made up of a second network infrastructure. The method also includes receiving a registered service from the second network based on the registration information that was transmitted to the first network infrastructure. The method also includes transmitting a message to the second network and receiving the registered service from the second network in response to the message. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250784 | INTER-SYSTEM CELL RESELECTION IN TD-SCDMA SYSTEMS - When a user equipment performs inter-cell measurement, it may desire to measure signal quality and signal level of a source radio access technology (RAT) cell and a target cell. The signal quality measurement may be Squal and the signal level measurement may be Srxlev. Because Squal is not defined for TD-SCDMA, a new measurement criteria is defined to allow proper comparison of source RAT cell measurements with target RAT cell measurements when a user equipment is considering switching to a target cell. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250785 | Adaptive Partial Packet Decoding - A user device receives packets from a base station. The user device may invoke decoding while the packet is still being received, based on the incomplete contents of a given packet. This “partial packet decoding” relies on the fact that the underlying information in the packet is encoded with redundancy (code rate less than one). If link quality is poor, the partial packet decoding is likely to be unsuccessful, i.e., to fail in its attempt to recover the underlying information. To avoid waste of power, the user device may be configured to apply one or more tests of link quality prior to invoking the partial packet decoding on a current packet. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250786 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR END-TO-END CALL QUALITY INDICATION - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for generating an end-to-end quality indication associated with a communication session. Based on a real-time transport control protocol message, the system identifies a media path associated with a communication session. Next, the system determines a respective media leg quality for a plurality of media legs in the media path. Based on the respective media leg quality, the system then determines a media path quality. The system can also generate a media quality indication based on the media path quality, and display the media quality indication. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250787 | TDMA-BASED SELF-ADAPTIVE CHANNEL SWITCHING - In some examples, a method of TDMA-based self-adaptive channel-switching is described. The method may include determining multiple switching thresholds, each corresponding to a respective one of multiple communication devices within a coverage area of a wireless access point (AP). Each of the switching thresholds may be based at least on a first received signal strength indication (RSSI). The first RSSI may indicate a received signal strength at the respective one of the communication devices substantially in the absence of interference. The method may also include determining that a current RSSI at a particular one of the communication devices is less than a corresponding one of the switching thresholds. The method may also include coordinating a transition by the wireless AP and the communication devices from a carrier sense multiple access CSMA mode to a hybrid CSMA-TDMA mode. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250788 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An interference measurement method of a terminal is provided for facilitating downlink transmission in the mobile communication system based on Distributed Antenna System (DAS) in which multiple antennas controlled by a base station are distributed within the service area of the base station. The interference measurement method includes receiving channel measurement information and interference measurement information from a base station, receiving channel state information reference signals, calculating, when the received channel state information reference signal is for channel measurement, a received signal energy based on the channel measurement information and, when the received channel state information reference signal is for interference measurement, an interference based on the interference measurement information, generating channel quality information based on the received signal energy and the interference, and transmitting the channel quality information to the base station. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250789 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENHANCED TRANSMISSION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A transmission method and system for use in a base station of a mobile communication network. It provides a simple and efficient technique which improves the performance of prior art solutions for MIMO user equipments (especially in bad or medium radio conditions scenarios). | 09-26-2013 |
20130250790 | SETTING UP A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An access network (AN) periodically broadcasts, to at least one user equipment (UE) served by the AN, a message requesting the at least one UE, whenever the at least one UE determines to perform a given type of transmission, (i) to measure a reverse-link channel upon which the transmission is to be performed, and (ii) to include results of the measurement within the transmission. A given UE receives the periodically broadcasted message from the AN and determines to perform the given type of transmission. The given UE refrains from measuring the reverse-link channel, as instructed by the AN, based on the data being associated with a communication session of a given type. The given UE transmits the data to the AN. If the data transmission omits the requested measurement results, the AN selects a transmission format for subsequent transmissions of the given UE based on the omission. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250791 | Indoor Positioning System for Standards-Based Narrowband mobile Radios Using Spectrally Overlapping Transmissions - Two or more data packets transmitted through a wireless channel are received using a receiver device. The two or more data packets are a result of two or more transmissions that are made sequentially in time at different center frequencies in order to span a desired bandwidth. Each data packet of the two or more data packets is transmitted at a single center frequency. Time differences and/or carrier phase differences among the two or more transmissions are estimated. A time-of-arrival of one or more data packets of the two or more data packets is calculated using each data packet of the two or more data packets and one or more of the estimated time differences, the different center frequencies, and the estimated carrier phase differences. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250792 | ROUTER - The router is used to relay a packet to be transmitted from one node to another in an integrated circuit that has distributed buses according to a packet exchange method. The router includes: a plurality of buffers, each of which configured to store packets with information indicating their transmission node; a classifying section configured to classify the buffers that store the packets into a number of groups according to the transmission nodes of the packets; a selecting section configured to select at least one of the buffers of each group; and an output port configured to sequentially output the packets that are stored in the selected buffer. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250793 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING REFERENCE SIGNAL TONES FOR DECODING A CHANNEL - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include selecting reference signal (RS) or other tones to utilize in estimating a channel for decoding one or more channels. Where the RS tones are interfered by other base stations, interference cancelation can be performed over the RS tones. Since interference can vary over the tones, interference cancelation can yield RS tones of varying quality. Thus, a quality of each of the RS tones can be determined, and at least a subset of the RS tones can be selected for estimating a channel. Additionally or alternatively, the RS tones can be weighted or otherwise classified for performing channel estimation using the RS tones. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250794 | Radio Communication Device and Radio Communication Method - A radio base station | 09-26-2013 |
20130250795 | PACKET BASED LOCATION PROVISIONING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system may include a plurality of wireless devices, each wireless device including a time source and configured to selectively communicate with at least one other of the plurality of wireless devices by way of a packet-based time precision protocol. The plurality of wireless devices may include a first wireless device and a second wireless device, the first wireless device being configured to determine whether the first wireless device and the second wireless device are in selective communication over a single-hop wireless link; determine a one-way delay over the single-hop wireless link by way of at least one packed-based time precision protocol message; and calculate a distance measurement between the first wireless device and the second wireless device based at least in part on the one-way delay | 09-26-2013 |
20130250796 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING AN AGGREGATION SCHEME IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and arrangement for employing media layer adaptation in a wireless communication of media in data packets from a sending node to a receiving node, by determining a fitting frame aggregation scheme in an effective and accurate manner. An arrival time AT and generation time GT are monitored for packets when received at the packet receiving node. A difference ATdiff in the arrival time of consecutive packets and a difference GTdiff in the generation time of the packets, are calculated. Then, an inter-arrival measure IA is calculated as the deviation between the arrival time difference ATdiff and generation time difference GTdiff. When the inter-arrival jitter exceeds a preset threshold (Th), a frame aggregation scheme is determined based on the calculated inter-arrival jitter IA and applied in the packet communication. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250797 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication control system includes: a packet transmitting device for transmitting a received packet according to a packet process rule which is a rule defining a process for the packet; and a control device for controlling a transmission route of the packet, by instructing the packet transmitting device to apply the packet process rule. The control device includes a communication method selecting unit for selecting a communication method with the packet transmitting device, according to a communication condition with the packet transmitting device. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250798 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step A of transmitting, by a mobile station UE# | 09-26-2013 |
20130250799 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, NODE CONTROLLING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system reduces load on a control device managing centralized control of a plurality of nodes. The communication system includes nodes and a control device. On receipt of a packet, each node references a table including a plurality of processing rules concerning packet processing to process the received packet in accordance with at least one processing rule corresponding to the received packet. If the corresponding processing rule is not known, each node transmits a processing rule setting request. On receipt of the processing rule setting request, the control device sets a packet processing rule in at least one of the nodes. A request staying unit that transiently stays the setting request to the control device is provided in such one or more nodes. | 09-26-2013 |
20130258868 | Method and Apparatus for Multicarrier Coverage Diversity - Methods and apparatus are described for overcoming interference in a multicarrier communication system by applying different antenna configurations to each carrier in a multi-carrier base station based on channel conditions specific to the carrier. Each carrier may be assigned to a different antenna element configuration, each configuration providing a different coverage area. Different portions of a data stream may be transmitted simultaneously via each carrier, the amount of data in each portion of the data stream being defined based on the channel conditions. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258869 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Described herein are implementations related to communication in a wireless communication system. In one implementation, serving signals from serving base stations and interfering signals from neighbor base stations are split into multiple substreams. A power allocation algorithm is used to calculate the power amplitude factor of the substreams communicated from the serving based stations coupled to corresponding wireless devices. A control signaling related to this implementation is described. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258870 | UTILIZING SCANNED RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION - A method may include monitoring available radio access networks for information on one or more of types of radio access technologies, measurements of signal quality, measurements of signal strengths, or carrier identifiers of the available radio access networks; calculating network priorities for the available radio access networks based on the monitored information; detecting a border condition, the border condition based on a decrease in the measurements of signal quality or the measurements of signal strength; selecting, when a border condition is detected, a new radio access network from the available radio access networks based on the calculated network priorities of the available radio access networks; and connecting to a communication channel using the selected available radio access network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258871 | PSUEDOWIRE EXTENDED GROUP MESSAGING IN A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - Embodiments of the invention are directed to extended psuedowire groups in a packet switched network. Embodiments associate a pseudowire to one or more groups at each provider edge device across which the pseudowire traverses. When a pseudowire set-up request message traverses across various provider edge devices, each provider edge device typically adds one or more local group membership information elements into the pseudowire set-up request message. In that way the grouping assigned by each provider edge device that the pseudowire traverses is made available to all other provider edge devices traversed by the pseudowire. Advantageously, this availability pseudowire grouping information allows any of these provider edge devices to initiate a wildcard message to notify other provider edge devices with respect to pseudowires in any of its local groups, as well as allowing a pseudowire to be bound to multiple groups based on various requirements. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258872 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CHANGING NETWORK TOPOLOGY BASED ON ENERGY CONSUMPTION - A system for managing energy consumption of a mesh network. The system includes a controller, a dynamic routing device configured to perform a functionality of either a routing device or a non-routing device, and at least one processor. The at least one processor is programmed to identify a number of routing devices in the mesh network, determine a signal strength of each of the identified routing devices with respect to at least one of the controller and the dynamic processor, and determine whether the dynamic routing device will perform the functionality of a routing device or a non-routing device upon joining the mesh network based on the number of identified routing devices and the signal strength of each of the identified routing devices. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258873 | Adaptive Transmit Beamforming for Frequency Division Duplexing Systems - Embodiments of a method and apparatus for performing an adaptive transmission scheme in a frequency division duplexing communication system based on channel state information estimated using an open-loop mode are described herein. In one example, the method includes estimating an impulse response of a channel using a signal received over a first frequency band of the channel from a device, transforming the impulse response into a frequency response of the channel, and subsequently performing the adaptive transmission scheme using the frequency response to transmit a signal to the device over a second frequency band of the channel that is different from the first frequency band. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258874 | COLLISION RESOLUTION AMONG TRANSMISSION SCHEDULES OF UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION (UCI) - A method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) on a user equipment (UE) is described. Multiple channel state information (CSI) reports are generated for multiple channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS) received on a serving cell. The multiple CSI-RS reports are scheduled to be transmitted in a subframe. An overall highest priority CSI report is determined using a method of prioritization. The overall highest priority CSI report is selected. The overall highest priority CSI report is transmitted. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258875 | Method and Apparatus for Accounting of Cell Related Data - A method in a network node for performing network tasks based on a user equipment trajectory includes the network node receiving cell change information from a user equipment wherein the cell change information further includes user equipment trajectory data based on cell parameters of visited cells in a user equipment trajectory. The method in a user equipment for collecting cell change information associated with a cell change includes the user equipment storing the cell change information within the user equipment. The cell change information is sent to the network node for performing network tasks. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258876 | Method for Power Saving for Wireless Device in Discontinuous Reception Mode - A methodology for determining a periodicity of a neighbor cell search for a cellular mobile device is disclosed. The neighbor cell searches may be conducted during discontinuous reception (DRX) paging cycles. However, instead of performing a neighbor cell search during each DRX paging cycle, the period for performing a neighbor cell search may be adaptively determined. Various metrics may be used in determining the periodicity for neighbor cell searches. In various embodiments, two or more metrics may be utilized in combination to determine the neighbor cell search periodicity. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258877 | Adaptive Generation of Channel Quality Indicators (CQIs) Based on a Current Communication Scenario - Adaptive generation of channel quality indicators based on a current communication scenario. A plurality of sets of channel quality indicator information may be stored for each of a plurality of UE communication scenarios. The information may be usable in generating a channel quality indicator. During operation of the UE, a current communication scenario of the UE may be determined. A first set of channel quality indicator information may be selected based on the determined current communication scenario being experienced by the UE. At least one channel quality indicator may be determined based on the selected first set of channel quality indicator information. Finally, the channel quality indicator may be provided to a base station. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258878 | Dynamic Data Publication and Dissemination - A system for dynamic data publication and dissemination in a mobile node network is disclosed. The system comprises a collection module, a naming module and a publishing module. The collection module collects sensor data and detects a road event based at least in part on the sensor data. The collection module generates event data that describes the road event. The naming module converts the event data to a set of naming data that conforms to a naming structure. The naming structure includes an application identifier that identifies an application for the road event and a location that identifies a geographical scope for the road event. The naming module caches the set of naming data in a storage device. The publishing module publishes the set of naming data in the mobile node network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258879 | NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS, NETWORK CONTROL SYSTEM, AND NETWORK CONTROL METHOD - A network control apparatus includes: a power consumption collecting unit configured to collect power consumption information measured by at least one electrical node included in an electrical layer network and at least one optical node included in an optical layer network; a cut-through range identifying unit configured to calculate an optical cut-through path based on the collected power consumption information; and a cut-through path setting instructing unit configured to instruct the electrical node and the optical node to set the optical cut-through path based on the calculation result in the cut-through range identifying unit. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258880 | Method and system for data transmission - Embodiments as disclosed provided methods or systems for transmitting data over a network. Specifically, in certain embodiments, data for transmission is received and a datagram comprising at least a portion of the data can be created and sent to a terminal. Control data can be received from the terminal and the transmission of the data to the terminal adjusted based on the received control data. In certain embodiments both the datagram and the control data may be transmitted over an unreliable protocol. Thus, embodiments as disclosed may provide an increased level of reliability and adaptability to differing network conditions in conjunction with the use of an unreliable protocol. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258881 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR LOCATING WIFI DEVICES ADJACENT TO THE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - In a method for locating WIFI devices adjacent to an electronic device, one or more WIFI devices adjacent to the electronic device are searched for within a signal strength range of the electronic device. The method establishes an X-Y coordinate system based on a horizontal line and an initial position of the electronic device, and calculates coordinate values of each of the | 10-03-2013 |
20130258882 | Random Access Mechanism for a Wireless Device and Base Station - A wireless device receives at least one control message configuring a plurality of cell groups and a pathloss reference for each secondary cell in at least one secondary cell. The wireless device transmits uplink signals to a base station in a first secondary cell in a secondary cell group. Transmission power of the uplink signals is determined employing a received power of the pathloss reference assigned to the first secondary cell. Timing of the uplink signals in the secondary cell group employs a second synchronization signal on an active secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a secondary timing reference. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258883 | DYNAMIC MEASUREMENT RATES TO SPEED UP CELL RESELECTIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a switch to a second network is facilitated by increasing a rate of measurement of certain quantities of the second network while in an idle state in a first network. The rate of measurement maybe increased to an integer multiple of a frequency associated with a discontinuous reception cycle configured for the first network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258884 | FORMAT DEPENDENT POWER CONTROL FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION - An apparatus determines a transmission power of a signal transmitted by a user equipment (UE) in a cell that is identified by a virtual cell identifier. The apparatus generates a power control command based on the determined signal power, and transmits the power control command to a plurality of UEs. Subsequent to transmission of the power control command, the apparatus receives a plurality of transmissions from the plurality of UEs. Some of the transmissions have different transmission powers. The different transmission powers of the signals transmitted by the UEs are due to the power control command and a predefined power offset associated with each respective UE. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258885 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING BEAM INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a mobile station of transmitting beam information by a mobile station in a wireless communication system are provided. The mobile station determines whether a particular a particular event according to communication with a base station has occurred, and transmits information on at least one DownLink (DL) transmission beam among N number of DL transmission beams to the base station using a contention-based feedback channel according to a result of the determination. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258886 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK IN A COORDINATED MULTI-POINT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operating a wireless communication system (FIG. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258887 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR ALLOCATING PS TRAFFIC IN A MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method, base station and controller for allocating PS traffic in mobile networks which provide a plurality of RATs (multi-RAT networks) for supporting Packet Services, which comprises:
| 10-03-2013 |
20130258888 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The time required to set up a voice call in an exemplary embodiment, in which Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) is used, is reduced to provide a voice call service to a User Equipment (UE) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. If a voice call occurs in a UE while the UE accesses the LTE system, the UE using CSFB switches to a 2G/3G legacy system, recycles system information for a 2G/3G cell that the UE has accessed before, and immediately proceeds with voice call setup without receiving system information unnecessary for a CSFB process. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258889 | Determining Distances Between Wireless Devices - A method includes transmitting frames from a first device to a second device, where a first frame is transmitted at a first value for a particular transmission parameter, and where a second frame is transmitted at a second value for the particular transmission parameter that is different than the first value. For each of the transmitted frames, a determination is made if a corresponding Acknowledgement (ACK) frame, as defined by IEEE 802.11 standards, is received by the first device from the second device. Based on the IEEE 802.11 ACK frames received by the first device from the second device, a distance estimate is calculated from the first device to the second device. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258890 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR MONITORING A COMMUNICATION INTERFACE BETWEEN ACCESS NODES - A wireless communication method and a wireless communication system includes a user equipment and a cooperating set of access nodes, each access node being operable to wirelessly exchange data and/or signalling information with the user equipment, the cooperating set participating directly or indirectly in the exchange with the user equipment in accordance with an exchange scheme, the cooperating set includes at least a first access node, the first access node being interconnected by an interface with a second access node. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258891 | VOICE OPTIMIZATION IN A NETWORK HAVING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION DEVICES - An apparatus and a method of optimizing voice quality on a network having end-points that are voice over Internet Protocol (IP) devices. Default parameters of the end-points are initialized. Network performance parameters are measured and evaluated to determine whether they signify that connection to the network is below a desired level of operation. If so, the default parameters of the end-points are re-set based on the evaluation. The adjustment may entail re-negotiating the CODEC connection and re-setting parameters for packet size and resetting parameters for jitter buffer size. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258892 | Wireless Chip-to-Chip Switching - Embodiments of the invention provide a system and method for chip to chip communications in electronic circuits. A router or switch receives data packets at input port ASICs. A routing table on the input port ASIC or on a routing ASIC is used to identify a destination port ASIC based upon header information in the data packet. The data packet is transmitted from the input port ASIC to the destination port ASIC using millimeter wave signals that are transmitted across a waveguide or a wireless interface. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258893 | RADIO COMMUNICATION STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND METHODS OF OPERATING SAME - A radio communication station in a radio communication system having a plurality of radio communication devices, derives a quantisation parameter and transmits the quantisation parameter to the radio communication devices for use in subsequent quantisation of a channel state metric. The radio communication devices receive the quantisation parameter, determine a channel state metric, quantise the determined channel state metric by applying quantisation ranges indicated by the quantisation parameter, determine a data value indicative of the quantised channel state metric, and transmit a signal conveying the determined data value as a random access transmission. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258894 | TRANSMITTER, RECEIVER, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND RECEPTION METHOD - Provided is a transmitter which improves the flexibility of SRS resource allocation without increasing the amount of signaling for notifying the cyclic shift amount. In the transmitter, with regard to each basic shift amount candidate group having a basic shift amount from 0 to N−1, a transmission control unit ( | 10-03-2013 |
20130258895 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THAT SUPPORTS A PLURALITY OF COMPONENT CARRIERS, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed are a method for controlling inter-cell interference in a wireless communication system that supports a plurality of component carriers (CCs), and a base station apparatus for the same. In inter-cell interference control method according to the present invention comprises the following steps: receiving priority information on the interference protection for each of a plurality of component carriers from at least one neighboring base station; measuring an intensity of the signal received from said at least one neighboring base station; and generating priority information for interference protection for each of a plurality of component carriers constructed for the base station, based on the received priority information and the measured intensity of the signal received from said at least one neighboring base station. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258896 | METHOD OF PERFORMING MEASUREMENT AT UE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method of performing measurement at a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving channel status information-reference signals (CSI-RSs) for channel status information feedback from a plurality of transmission points (TPs), performing radio resource management (RRM) measurement based on the CSI-RSs, and selecting one or more TPs for receiving a signal from among the plurality of TPs based on the result of measurement. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258897 | METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for reporting channel state information, the method and the apparatus comprising the following steps: measuring downlink signals from a plurality of base stations; feeding back a first channel state information on a first base station in subband units, wherein the first channel state information includes identification information for indicating a corresponding subband; and feeding back a second channel state information on a second base station in subband units, wherein the subband which corresponds to the second channel state information is set to be identical to the subband which corresponds to the first channel state information, and wherein the second channel state information does not include identification information for indicating the corresponding subband. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258898 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, CONTROLLER, CONTROLLER MANAGER AND COMMUNICATION ROUTE ANALYSIS METHOD - A controller sets, for a first switch, a flow entry whose rule is header information of a delay measurement packet and whose action is forwarding to a second switch, and transmits the delay measurement packet to the first switch. The first switch forwards the delay measurement packet received from the controller to the second switch, in accordance with the flow entry set in the first switch. An analyzing module obtains the delay measurement packet from the second switch and calculates a delay time in a communication section between the first switch and the second switch by using a time stamped on the delay measurement packet. | 10-03-2013 |
20130265887 | SMALL FORM FACTOR PLUGGABLE UNIT WITH SIGNAL MONITORING CAPABILITIES - The present disclosure relates to small form factor pluggable units (SFP) having a monitoring probe. The monitoring probe is capable of monitoring a signal received by the SFP unit, in order to analyze the received signal and to generate a status signal. The monitoring probe may monitor a received signal directly or a copy thereof. The monitoring probe may be non-intrusive of the received signal, or intrusive. The monitoring probe may further generate a diagnostic of the received signal. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265888 | CONNECTION TIMEOUT MANAGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK WITH NETWORK REDUNDANCY - A method of configuring a communication network including a network device includes obtaining a first parameter associated with a predetermined topological characteristic of the communication network, a second parameter associated with a communication protocol of the communication network and a third parameter associated with a performance characteristic of the communication network, and calculating a connection timeout value based on the first parameter, the second parameter and the third parameter. The network device is configured to determine whether a communication timeout has occurred on the communication network based on the connection timeout value. Calculating the connection timeout value may include calculating a sum of the first parameter, the second parameter and the third parameter. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265889 | Optimized Uplink Performance via Antenna Selection - Embodiments of the disclosure provide systems and methods for improving user equipment performance in up-link transmission by implementing antenna selection based on channel measurements in the down-link. In various embodiments, first and second antennas are used to receive desired signals on a downlink and to transmit signals on an uplink. A plurality of signals received on the downlink are used to generate a plurality of antenna parameter measurements derived from multiple correlations of a known reference sequence of data signals transmitted on the downlink. The plurality of antenna parameter measurements is then used to select either the first antenna or the second antenna for transmitting data signals by said user equipment device on the uplink. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265890 | Optimized Uplink Performance via Antenna Selection - Embodiments of the invention provide systems and methods for improving user equipment performance in up-link transmission by implementing antenna selection based on channel measurements in the down-link. In various embodiments, first and second antennas are used to receive signals on a downlink and to transmit signals on an uplink. A plurality of signals received on the downlink are used to generate a plurality of antenna parameter measurements derived from multiple correlations of a known reference sequence of data signals transmitted on the downlink. The plurality of antenna parameter measurements is then used to select either the first antenna or the second antenna or a combination of both through splitting of the signal for transmitting data signals by said user equipment device on the uplink. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265891 | Transmission Interface and Method for Determining Transmission Signal - A transmission interface coupled to a test device includes a detection module for receiving a test signal of the test device, a processor for generating a control signal, a multiplexer coupled to the detection module and the processor for generating an output signal according to the test signal and the control signal, and an output module for outputting the output signal to a display device so as to process an functional operation corresponding to the test signal. The functional operation includes determination of a maximum operational frequency signal, a clock signal, a transmission data or an operational mode of the test device. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265892 | RECEIVER FOR IMBALANCED CARRIERS - Techniques for using one or multiple downconverters to receive multiple transmissions sent on multiple carriers are disclosed. In an exemplary design, an apparatus includes first and second downconverters. The first downconverter downconverts a first radio frequency (RF) signal when it is selected. The second downconverter downconverts a second RF signal when it is selected. Each of the first and second RF signals includes multiple transmissions sent on multiple carriers to a wireless device. The first downconverter is selected to perform downconversion for the multiple transmissions when at least one criterion is not met. The first and second downconverters are selected to perform downconversion for the multiple transmissions, based on different mixing frequencies, when the at least one criterion is met. The at least one criterion may relate to imbalance between the multiple carriers, received power of a received RF signal, etc. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265893 | APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING INTERFERENCE OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ANALYZING INTERFERENCE USING THE SAME - An apparatus for analyzing interference of a wireless communication device includes a frequency detector configured to detect a frequency signal in a low frequency band that is generated in a wireless communication device; and a band-pass filter configured to extract an interference signal reflecting auditory sensitivity at each frequency, in an audible frequency band of the detected frequency signal. Further, the apparatus includes a voltmeter configured to measure a magnitude of the extracted interference signal at each frequency; and an interference determination block configured to determine whether there is an influence of interference of the wireless communication device on an audio device by comparing an interference level of the measured interference signal with a preset interference reference value. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265894 | NETWORK AVAILABILITY ANALYTICS - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving at a network device, route convergence measurements and traffic demand measurements from a plurality of routers, and computing network availability based on the measurements at the network device. The route convergence measurements are associated with route computations at the routers and the traffic demand measurements include portions of a demand matrix associated with the routers. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265895 | System and Method for Next Generation BASE-T Communication - A system and method for next generation BASE-T communication. Next generation BASE-T devices designed for communication over twisted pair Ethernet cabling are configurable based on the characteristics of the communication channel. In discovering the characteristics of the communication channel, the physical layer device (PHY) can select one of a plurality of operating modes that can support a given data transmission rate (e.g., 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s, 400 Gbit/s, etc.). | 10-10-2013 |
20130265896 | PROCEDURES TO ACTIVATE OPPORTUNISTIC RELAYS - Aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for activating opportunistic relays. A combination of uplink and downlink pilots may be used to switch on user equipment relays (UeNBs) in an effort to make more accurate measurements in an effort to enable handovers. According to aspects of the present disclosure, a relay may evaluate one or more channel conditions, determine whether or not to transmit downlink reference signals to a UE based on the evaluation, and transmit downlink reference signals to the UE based on the determination. According to aspects, a relay may determine a set of resources reserved for transmission of uplink pilots by UEs, monitor the set of resources to detect transmission of uplink pilots, and report, to an eNB, a power at which the uplink pilots were received. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265897 | OFDM System with Reverse Link Interference Estimation - A new method of performing interference estimation to allow the data packets to be efficiently delivered in an OFDM system. The interference estimation is performed on average over each frame for each mobile station individually in both frequency and time domains. Based on the estimated interference, the CIR can be determined by the BTS based on channel response estimates made by the BTS, or by the MS based on channel response estimates made for the uplink assuming a symmetrical channel. Numerical results show that the CIR estimation error could be very small if a sub-channel is considered as the minimum transmission unit. In terms of the aggregate throughput, the interference estimation method can provide a significant gain. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265898 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCE FOR AVOIDING INTERFERENCE OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a wireless communication system, a transmitting node selects a simultaneously transmit-unavailable node of a 1-hop node of the transmitting node, and allocates a transmitting resource in transmissible resources, except for a transmission scheduled resource of a simultaneously transmit-unavailable node. Further, a receiving node selects a simultaneously receive-unavailable node of a 1-hop node, which is a transmission target of the receiving node selects a simultaneously transmit-unavailable node of a 1-hop node of the receiving node, and allocates a receiving resource in receivable resources, except for a transmission scheduled resource to a simultaneously transmit-unavailable node of a simultaneously receive-unavailable node of the 1-hop node, which is a transmission target of the receiving node. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265899 | DETERMINATION OF CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN ADVANCED ANTENNA SYSTEMS - A user equipment (UE) is configured to determine channel quality information (CQI) in a wireless communication system. The UE includes a processor configured to receive from an eNodeB (eNB) signaling parameters related to a first co-channel precoding matrix indicator (PMI) codebook, determine a second co-channel PMI based on a determined single user PMI (SU-PMI) and the received signaling parameters related to the first co-channel PMI codebook, determine a multi-user CQI (MU-CQI) based on the second co-channel PMI, and transmit the MU-CQI to the eNB. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265900 | ANTENNA SELECTION AND PILOT COMPRESSION IN MIMO SYSTEMS - The disclosed embodiments relate to a system that facilitates antenna selection and pilot reduction in a multi-antenna system. During operation, in response to an activating event, the system performs a full pilot transmission by transmitting pilot signals through all available transmit antennas at a base station. The system then determines the selected subset of transmit antennas by receiving lists of selected antennas from mobile stations associated with preferred users, wherein a given mobile station selects a list of antennas in response to pilot signals received during the full pilot transmission. The system then combines the received lists to produce the selected subset, wherein the selected subset includes all antennas which appear in the received lists of selected antennas. Next, during normal system operation, the system periodically performs a selected pilot transmission by transmitting pilot signals through a selected subset of the available transmit antennas. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265901 | Coordinating Communications in radio Service Areas - Methods and apparatuses for coordinating muting in a system including radio service areas of a first type and of a second type are disclosed. In a method a node providing a radio service area of the first type detects a first radio service area of the second type and determines information suitable for determining the location of the node. Said information for identifying the first radio service area and said information suitable for determining the location of the node are communicated to a controls apparatus. Upon receipt of said information for identifying and information suitable for determining the location of the node the control apparatus can coordinate muting based on the received information. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265902 | METHOD FOR BACKGROUND SCAN IN A MOBILE WIRELESS SYSTEM - A method is disclosed, operating a mobile station in a wireless network system comprising a plurality of base stations allocated in N channels. A Data packet is transmitted at a time interval p to a first base station of the wireless network system to which the mobile station is currently connected. Each of a plurality of partial scan sections is performed at the interval of every M data packets to monitor messages from the base stations of the N channels. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265903 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING MEASUREMENT REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a wireless communication system and terminal for providing a wireless communication service, and more particularly, a method of transmitting a measurement log from a terminal to a network when a RRC connected terminal has not found a RRC connectable network, although a wireless dedicated channel is not allocated between the terminal and the network, in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from a UMTS, Long Term Evolution (LTE) System or LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) system. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265904 | Differentiating Fixed Devices from Mobile Devices in Mobile Broadband Networks - Fixed devices may be distinguished from mobile devices in a broadband wireless network. Fixed devices may be given an identifier that identifies the device as a fixed device. | 10-10-2013 |
20130272143 | Method For A Retransmission Roundtrip Correction - The present disclosure relates generally to communication systems and more particularly to Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) and wireless communication systems. One embodiment relates to a method of processing data in a communication system. In this method, a data stream is received by a transmitter and packaged into discrete data units prior to transmission. The size of a data unit depends upon the details of the embodiment, and is estimated by communication system prior to data transmission. Once a data unit is transmitted from the transmitter to the receiver, the receiver sends an acknowledgement that the data unit is received. Knowledge of the roundtrip time delay between transmission of the data unit and reception of the acknowledgement allows the communication system to determine an optimum data unit size to maximize throughput. Other methods and systems are also disclosed. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272144 | Adaptive Monitoring of Telecommunications Networks - Systems and methods for the adaptive monitoring of telecommunications networks are described. In some embodiments, a method may include monitoring traffic transmitted through a mobile telecommunications network (e.g., 3G, 4G, LTE, etc.) and identifying a monitoring rule. The monitoring rule may associate a selected portion of the traffic (e.g., based on content type, source, destination, transport protocol, session, etc.) with a monitoring sampling ratio, and the monitoring sampling ratio may determine a fraction of the selected portion of the traffic usable to provide one or more performance indicators (e.g., service indicators, network congestion, connection maintenance, service quality, and/or network availability). The method may further include modifying the monitoring sampling ratio in response to a change in network monitoring conditions (e.g., one or more probes operating at or near capacity, scheduled maintenance events, peak traffic times, etc.) | 10-17-2013 |
20130272145 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPPORTUNISTIC SCHEDULING OF PEER TO PEER LINKS IN WIDE AREA NETWORK - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided. The apparatus determines an availability of a wireless wide area network (WWAN) subframe, and utilizes the WWAN subframe for peer-to-peer communication when the WWAN subframe is available. Accordingly, peer mobile terminals or devices may establish direct peer-to-peer links for communicating small amounts of information without affecting the quality of existing WWAN communications. In the wireless wide area network (WWAN) scenario, communication between mobile terminals is facilitated through uplink/downlink channels between the mobile terminals and a base station (i.e., WWAN link). Therefore, for various types of applications, an efficient means of communicating a small amount of information frequently is provided that does not require large amounts of signaling overhead. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272146 | NETWORK TESTING USING A CONTROL SERVER - A system may receive a test signal from a first server; monitor network activity associated with the device; determine when the device is in an idle state based on the network activity associated with the device; generate a first packet based on receiving the test signal and based on determining when the device is in the idle state; provide the first packet to a second server; receive a second packet from the second server based on providing the first packet to the second server, the second packet authorizing the device to perform the network test; communicate with a third server, associated with the second packet, to perform the network test independently of the first and/or second server; generate test results based on performing the network test; and provide the test results to the second server, the second server being capable of generating performance data based on the test results. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272147 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF USING SPACE TIME BLOCK CODES - In a particular embodiment, a method includes applying a first stream to antenna mapping scheme to a preamble portion of a packet. The method further includes applying a second stream to antenna mapping scheme to a data portion of the packet. The second stream to antenna mapping scheme is applied to the data portion of the packet but not to the preamble portion of the packet. The second stream to antenna mapping scheme includes a circulation scheme or a cyclic delay diversity (CDD) scheme. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272148 | SMALL DATA COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Technology for enabling small data transmissions in a user equipment (UE) configured for machine type communication (MTC) is disclosed. One method comprises receiving, by the UE from an evolved node (eNB), a system information block (SIB). The SIB can include system information relating to small data transmissions for MTC. The system information included in the SIB is read by the UE. The small data transmission is performed, from the UE to the eNB, based on the system information included in the SIB. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272149 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFLICT DETECTION IN SELF ORGANIZATION NETWORK (SON) FUNCTIONS - A system and method for detecting cooperation or conflict between actors in a network made up of self-organizing sub-networks examines parameters such as performance indicators and configuration parameters to determine whether or not different actors are adjusting configuration parameters in a way that is cooperative or conflicting. When a performance indicator is observed to be outside of its expected range, an acceptable convergence range can be defined to give the actors time to adjust and return the performance indicator to its expected range of values. When a performance indicator is detected to be non-convergent, the monitor can alert an operator, or another node, so that appropriate actions can be taken. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272150 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENSURING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE - A method for acquiring quality of experience QOE of a telecommunication service is provided. The method includes: acquiring multiple groups of original KQI vectors and a QOE value corresponding to each group of original KQI vectors in the multiple groups of original KQI vectors; analyzing a relationship between the multiple groups of original KQI vectors and QOE values corresponding to the multiple groups of original KQI vectors to establish a function relationship between KQI vectors and QOE values corresponding to the KQI vectors; acquiring a current KQI vector, and applying the function relationship between the KQI vectors and the QOE values corresponding to the KQI vectors to obtain a current QOE value corresponding to the current KQI vector. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272151 | Reference Signal Design And Signaling For Per-User Elevation MIMO - A method to use RSs for per-user elevation beamforming is described. An eNB sends, to a UE, an indication of which RSs in a plurality of RSs sound in the elevation dimension and which RSs in the plurality of RSs sound in the azimuthal dimension. Then, the eNB sends to the UE, the plurality of RSs using a plurality of antenna. The UE separates the plurality of RSs into the first portion and the second portion based at least in part on the indication and sends elevation and azimuthal feedback based on the received RSs to the eNB. The eNB determines beamforming weights for the plurality of antenna based at least in part on the elevation feedback and the azimuthal feedback. Apparatus and computer readable media are also described. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272152 | METHOD FOR TESTING AN AMPLIFICATION PATH FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SATELLITE REPEATER - A method for testing an amplification path of a repeater for a satellite for broadcasting the usable signals, the amplification path making it possible to frequency amplify usable signals from a plurality of communications channels, the channels being situated in a first frequency band, the amplification path being adapted to the first band, wherein the satellite includes a signal generator of a subsystem that enables generation of telemetry data to a second transmission antenna for reception thereof on Earth, the method including defining a test signal that includes the selection of a carrier frequency situated in the first frequency band; configuring the repeater to enable transmission of the signal generated by the signal generator to the amplification path; switching of the test signal amplified via the amplification path to the second transmitting antenna. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272153 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING POSITIONING MEASUREMENTS - A wireless terminal ( | 10-17-2013 |
20130272154 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING A PACKET NETWORK - A method and system for enabling a network service provider to monitor a packet network by using call detail records (CDRs) are disclosed. The method first detects a termination of a call by at least one voice gateway router and generates a call detail record (CDR) at said termination of said call by said at least one voice gateway router. The method then forwards said call detail record by said at least one voice gateway router to at least one CDR collecting and analysis server. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272155 | Systems and Methods for Determining Packet Error Rate (PER) for Wireless Encapsulated Network Packet Data Communications Links - A method for generating a packet sequence for determining a Packet Error Rate (PER) using network packets, the method comprisinggenerating, using a Local Area Network (LAN) enabled computer, a series of network PER test packets and frames, each packet comprising a predetermined unique identifier and each frame comprising a predetermined sequence for the packets in the series of network packets, wherein the series of network packets and frames are each of a size that is compliant with a predetermined framing mode and encapsulation protocol for the transmission system for determining a PER from the series of network packets and frames, andtransmitting, using a transmitting device, the network packets and frames to a receiving device. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272156 | CALIBRATION MODE - A communication device for communicating with a plurality of terminals via a series of frames, the communication device being configured to indicate to the terminals, at the commencement of a frame, that communication is to be suspended for the remainder of the frame in order for a calibration to be performed, and to perform said calibration during the remainder of the time allotted to that frame. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272157 | POWER CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - This application discloses a power control method and device of a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) in a long term evolution (LTE) advanced system, relates to the technical field of wireless communications and is intended to reasonably determine the signal transmit power of a user equipment (UE) on the PUCCH to thereby improve the power utilization ratio of the user equipment. In this application, upon determining to bundle generated positive acknowledge (ACK)/negative acknowledge (NACK) information, the UE bundles the ACK/NACK information in a predefined bundling scheme, determines the power offset value corresponding to the number of bits carried on the PUCCH according to the bundling scheme and further determines the transmit power of the PUCCH. With the invention, the transmit power of the UE can be determined more reasonably. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272158 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER AT UE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method of determining uplink transmission power at a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving channel status information-reference signal (CSI-RS) settings and downlink transmission power values for a plurality of transmission points (TPs) from a higher layer, receiving CSI-RSs from the plurality of TPs, estimating path loss values corresponding to the plurality of TPs based on the received CSI-RSs, determining the uplink transmission power using the estimated path loss values, and transmitting an uplink signal to one or more of the plurality of TPs based upon the determined uplink transmission power. | 10-17-2013 |
20130279349 | GENERATING ACCURATE DYNAMIC HEAT MAPS - Described in an example embodiment herein is a technique for generating a heat map representative of a radio frequency environment based on data representative of antenna pattern, antenna orientation, access point height and a path loss model. In particular embodiments, the base heat map can be corrected based on neighbor access point (AP) signal strength measurements, such as received signal strength indications (RSSIs) that are added over a base heat map. The neighbor RSSIs may be adjusted to a point underneath the AP. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279350 | Methods and Apparatus for Interference Management - Methods and apparatus for identifying interference when prevailing conditions give rise to a suspicion of interference. Upon detection by one or more elements of a wireless network that interference may be present, measurements are directed to provide information indicating whether interference is present and whether the interference is severe enough to warrant interference mitigation. The information is analyzed to determine if severe interference is in fact present, and interference mitigation measures are directed if severe interference is identified. Analysis may include identifying one or more dominant interferers, and may further include directing additional measurements and analyzing information provided thereby in order to identify one or more dominant interferers. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279351 | Process for Performing Cubic Metric Computation in the Transmitter of a UE for a Wireless Communication System, and Apparatus for Performing the Same - A process for computing cubic metric used for performing Maximum Power Reduction (MPR) in the transmitter of a User Equipment communicating with a base station (BS), said cubic metric computation being performed before each time slot of said uplink transmission of data; said process being characterized in that it involves the steps of: —using PN generators ( | 10-24-2013 |
20130279352 | Traffic Matrix Computation for a Backbone Network Supporting Virtual Private Networks - This invention provides a more effective method for capacity planning and traffic engineering of packet networks that connect Virtual Private Network (VPN) sites. A distributed architecture efficiently computes traffic matrixes that show the number of bytes and/or packets exchanged among provider edge (PE) routers and/or service nodes. Each PE router in a service node is exports flow records to a Flow Record Processor (FRP) in the same location. The FRPs use these records in conjunction with configuration data extracted from the PE routers to compute partial traffic matrixes. The partial traffic matrixes are uploaded to a Matrix Generator to create a total traffic matrix. The total traffic matrix is essential input for capacity planning or traffic engineering tools. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279353 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING RADIO MEASUREMENTS DURING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - Methods and apparatus for managing radio measurements during discontinuous reception. In one exemplary embodiment, the distribution of Long Term Evolution (LTE) DRX measurements is staggered or distributed across multiple DRX cycles (which may be contiguous or non-contiguous) so as to reduce the transceiver activity and power consumption. The exemplary UE in one implementation only performs a subset of measurements during each DRX cycle. By staggering or distributing cell measurements over multiple DRX cycles, the UE can improve power consumption, while still conforming to measurement requirements. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279354 | WIRELESS NETWORK PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS SYSTEM - The Mobile Pulse System makes use of a client application which is installed in each mobile device of a customer to obtain dynamic measurements of the service that is provided to the mobile device by a wireless service provider. These client applications perform frequent tests to determine the level of service that they are presently receiving, which test results are transmitted to the Mobile Pulse System server for compilation and analysis. As a result of the number and diversity of these tests, the server can accurately map the level of service that is being provided by the wireless service provider to a customer. The server can portray the level of service as a function of the type of mobile device used by the customer, specific locations within the service area, time of day, type of communications, and other such relevant parameters. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279355 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method for wireless communications includes determining a time division duplex (TDD) configuration of a non-serving network. The method also includes detecting interference from the non-serving network based at least in part on the TDD configuration of the non-serving network. The method further includes signaling an eNodeB of the interference based at least in part on the detecting. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279356 | METHODS FOR MEASURING AND TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK SIGNALS AND APPARATUSES THEREFOR - A method in which a User Equipment (UE) measures a downlink signal in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving information about a Beam Direction Pattern (BDP) of the downlink signal and measuring the downlink signal based on the information about the BDP. The information about the BDP includes an index of a subframe in which the downlink signal is to be transmitted using a specific BDP and includes an identifier (ID) of the specific BDP. The BDP of the downlink signal is switched according to the subframe index based on the information about the BDP. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279357 | Method and System for Implementing Drive Test - A method and system for implementing a drive test are provided in the present document. The method includes: a mobility management entity sending activation message including measurement configuration information of Minimization of drive test (MDT) to a base station; after receiving the activation message, if determining that it is appropriate for a corresponding UE to perform a corresponding MDT measurement, the base station sending the measurement configuration information to the UE. With the present document, a MDT configuration information interaction between a core network and the base station can be effectively implemented in a communication system, which enables the base station to better select an appropriate UE according to local information and enables the base station to utilize measurement information reported by the UE to achieve an object of MDT, thereby reducing maintenance and operation costs of the current communication network and enhancing the network performance. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279358 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The present invention provides a mobile terminal apparatus, a base station apparatus, and a communication control method, which allow control suitable for interference reduction in a layered network such as HetNet, and which support a next-generation mobile communication system. A mobile terminal apparatus has a receiving section ( | 10-24-2013 |
20130279359 | METHOD FOR MEASURING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, UE AND BASE STATION - A method for measuring channel state information, a UE and base station are described. The method includes: receiving in a subframe of Pico cell, by the user equipment, the channel state information reference symbol or common reference symbol of the Pico cell, the subframe of Pico cell corresponding to an almost blank subframe in a measurement set; and measuring the channel state information of the Pico cell based on the channel state information reference symbol or common reference symbol of the Pico cell. In certain embodiments, the UE configured with coordinated multi-point mode may measure the CSI of the Macro cell and the Pico cell without muting or with decreased muting by using the measurement set, thereby overcoming or partially overcoming the problems brought by RE muting. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279360 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND CHANNEL QUALITY INDEX ESTIMATION METHOD - Provided are a mobile communication device and a method for inferring a channel quality index, with which optimal channel quality index inference processing can be performed in mobile communication using TDD. The noise power of a reception signal and signal power inference values are obtained using a known signal included in a slot unit on the time axis and a sub-band unit that is a continuous fixed frequency bandwidth on the frequency axis. From among the inference values, a plurality of n inference values inferred at slot units are subjected to time-averaging processing at each sub-band. Time directional errors of the known signal are calculated in slot units. Based on a predetermined threshold value and differences in errors of adjacent slots from among the time directional errors, weighting coefficients are set for each of the n inference values in the time-average processing performed by a time-average power calculation unit. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279361 | METHOD OF REDUCING INTERCELL INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for processing a signal processing at a user equipment in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving an interference measurement subframe set from a serving cell, receiving first Channel Status Information (CSI) configuration information and second CSI configuration information from the serving cell, measuring CSI based on the first CSI configuration information in a subframe designated in the interference measurement subframe set and reporting the CSI to the serving cell, and measuring the CSI based on the second CSI configuration information in a subframe which is not designated in the interference measurement subframe set and reporting the CSI to the serving cell. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279362 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting a Node in a Distributed Multi-Node System - This specification relates to a method for selecting a node in a serving cell in a distributed multi-node system, the method being characterized by comprising the steps of: receiving a channel state information reference signal of each node in the serving cell from a base station; measuring a signal intensity or interference level about the respective nodes through the received channel state information reference signal; and determining at least one valid node from among the respective nodes based on the measured result, wherein the signal intensity or the interference level is expressed in any one of channel state information reference signal received power (CSI-RSRP), channel state information reference signal received quality (CSI-RSRQ), and channel state information reference signal's signal intensity (CSI-RSSI). | 10-24-2013 |
20130279363 | METHOD FOR TRIGGERING APERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK - The present disclosure provides a method for triggering aperiodic Channel State Information (CSI) feedback used in a multiple coordinated cells multiple component carriers system. According to the present disclosure, a base station firstly semi-statically configures a user equipment to CoMP transmission modes, and/or information on measurement cells, and/or information on measurement component carriers by a high layer signaling (RRC signaling). Then, the base station dynamically initiates an aperiodic CSI feedback request to the user equipment by downlink control information (through PDCCH). When receiving the aperiodic CSI feedback request transmitted by the base station, the user equipment transmits measured aperiodic CSI to the base station through an uplink channel (PUSCH or PUCCH). According to the present invention, the method for triggering aperiodic CSI feedback in CoMP transmission modes can be flexibly configured, and good backward compatibility can be obtained at the same time. The above method is simple and effective, the system design complexity is low, and the design requirements for practical systems and LTE-Advanced evolved systems are met. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279364 | RADIO RELAY STATION APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a radio relay station apparatus, a radio base station apparatus and a radio communication method capable of improving user throughput and increasing the capacity in type II relay. The radio communication method of the present invention is characterized by, in a radio relay station apparatus, measuring channel quality of relay links with use of sounding reference signals from mobile terminal apparatuses; and transmitting feedback information including measurement results of channel quality of the relay links to a radio base station apparatus via a backhaul link; in the radio base station apparatus, measuring channel quality of direct links with use of sounding reference signals from the mobile terminal apparatuses, subtracting a correction value from the measurement results of the radio relay station apparatus; and allocating radio resources to a mobile terminal apparatus based on measurement results of the channel quality of the direct links and subtraction results. | 10-24-2013 |
20130286860 | IMPAIRMENT SIMULATION FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION TO ENABLE VOICE QUALITY DEGRADATION ESTIMATION - An automated method for testing audio signal quality of cell phone transmissions provides a Mean Opinion Score (MOS) output using inexpensive test components. The test system uses a server computer to eliminate the need for expensive faders used in a bench test system. The server computer manipulates data packets from the reference media file to simulate impairments, including losses, errors, noise and jitter, at a much lower cost than using actual faders. Transmission through two separate radio access networks RANs is provided to simulate two parties communicating using separate mobile devices (an end-to-end test solution) with a single cell phone. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286861 | VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method is provided that includes: receiving, by one or more server devices, voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) traffic management rules from a network operations center; gathering, by the one or more server devices, VoIP traffic data from a VoIP network; analyzing, by the one or more server devices, the VoIP traffic data; creating, by the one or more server devices, a ticket based on the VoIP traffic management rules and the VoIP traffic data; and automatically sending, by the one or more server devices, the ticket to the network operations center based on the VoIP traffic management rules. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286862 | System and Method for Direct Mobile Communications Link Establishment - A method of establishing a direct mobile communications (DMC) link between a first user equipment (UE) and a second UE, where at least one of the first UE and the second UE is communicating on a first cellular link includes requesting that at least one of the first UE and the second UE participate in an evaluation procedure to determine a potential quality of a DMC link proposed between the first UE and the second UE. The method also includes receiving a report from at least one of the first UE and the second UE indicating the potential quality of the DMC link proposed between the first UE and the second UE according to the evaluation procedure. The method further includes establishing the DMC link between the first UE and the second UE if the potential quality of the DMC link exceeds a predetermined threshold. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286863 | Uplink Signal Bandwidth Characterization from Channel State Information - Techniques are provided to determine whether or not incident power at a wireless communication device in at least two frequency channels is from the same device. Incident power in frequency channels allocated to a basic service set in a wireless network is received at a plurality of antennas of the wireless communication device. Channel state information is computed for at least two frequency channels allocated to the basic service set. One or more metrics are generated based on the channel state information in the two frequency channels. The one or more metrics are evaluated to characterize an uplink signal bandwidth associated with the two channels to determine whether or not the incident power in the two channels is from the same device. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286864 | COMPUTER SYSTEM COMMUNICATION CHANNEL DIAGNOSTICS - A method provided in one example includes inserting a first common-mode signal into a first communication channel from a communication node, monitoring differential-mode noise in at least one communication channel due to the first common-mode signal, determining whether the differential-mode noise is acceptable, and generating a user notification if the differential-mode noise is not acceptable. In further embodiments, the at least one communication channel comprises one or more communication channels adjacent the first communication channel, and the method further includes determining whether the differential-mode noise due to the first common-mode signal is acceptable on the adjacent channels. In further embodiments, the method comprises sending a port identifier through the first communication channel before initiating the insertion. In more specific embodiments, the first common-mode signal comprises a signature that distinguishes the differential-mode from data on the at least one adjacent communication channel. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286865 | Method and Controlling Network Node in a Radio Access Network - Method and controlling network node ( | 10-31-2013 |
20130286866 | Configuring Channel-State Information Resources used for Reference-Signal-Received-Power Feedback - The initialization of the CoMP Resource Management Set for a given mobile terminal is based, at least in part, on an estimation of the mobile terminal's geographical location, which can be estimated using network positioning of the mobile terminal. One example method begins with the acquisition ( | 10-31-2013 |
20130286867 | SIGNAL INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for handling interference measurements in a wireless communication network. An apparatus may include computer-readable media having instructions and processors coupled with the computer-readable media and configured to execute the instructions to identify, for a serving eNB, a neighboring eNB for which signal interference measurements are to be performed by one or more wireless devices served by the serving eNB, and request that the neighboring eNB transmit typical interference signals within data units which are configured for, and may or may not have, a scheduled physical downlink shared channel transmission. The wireless devices may be configured to perform the signal interference measurements based at least in part on the typical interference signals, which may include non-zero-power signals or zero-power signals. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286868 | QoE-AWARE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR HTTP-BASED VIDEO STREAMING - Technology for adapting a video stream using a quality of experience (QoE) report is disclosed. One method can include a QoE-aware system in a node of a radio access network (RAN) receiving a QoE report with at least one QoE metric from a wireless device. The QoE-aware system can extract the at least one QoE metric in a function layer from a QoE reporting layer. The function layer can be a layer other than the QoE reporting layer. The QoE-aware system can modify a layer function in the function layer to improve the QoE metric. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286869 | LAWFUL INTERCEPTS - A method is provided. The method comprises monitoring a radio access network connection with a user. Intercept information associated with the connection is caused to be provided. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286870 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD FOR WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE - A wireless terminal device includes: a processor connected to a memory, configured to: acquire an estimated reception sensitivity of the wireless terminal device based on reception powers from a plurality of other wireless terminal devices with which the wireless terminal device performs random access communication, notify the other wireless terminal devices of the estimated reception sensitivity of the wireless terminal device, and select a transmission destination from among the other wireless terminal devices based on requested reception powers of the other wireless terminal devices, the requested reception powers being calculated based on estimated reception sensitivities of the other wireless terminal devices notified from the other wireless terminal devices. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286871 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING AVAILABILITY IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a system for availability metrics for customer premises equipment (CPE), CPE includes a non-volatile memory and a timer. Service availability interruption events and time stamps associated with the events are recorded in the non-volatile memory and transmitted to a computing device, which calculates availability metrics based on the interruption events and time stamps from the non-volatile memory of the CPE. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286872 | SESSION-BASED TRAFFIC ANALYSIS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a session-based traffic analysis system that may accurately analyze an amount of traffic for each transmission control protocol (TCP) connection using only one-way packets. The system may accurately analyze an amount of two-way traffic using only one-way connection information. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286873 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION UNIT, AND METHOD FOR SCHEDULING - Scheduling half duplex communication in a communication cell of a wireless communication system supporting communication between a base station and a plurality of wireless communication units is disclosed. The method comprises determining an interference potential between the at least two wireless communication units when they are respectively communicating with the base station and scheduling a half duplex communication resource to the at least two wireless communication units based on the determined interference potential. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286874 | IN-SERVICE THROUGHPUT TESTING IN DISTRIBUTED ROUTER/SWITCH ARCHITECTURES - Various embodiments relate to a system and related method of measuring at least one transport link's performance in a communications network. An originating device controlled by a customer may generate testing frames that are transported to a receiving device also controlled by the customer through the at least one transport link that connects the two devices. In some embodiments, the transport links may transfer the testing frames while the transport links are transporting other data traffic. The receiving device may parse incoming frames and, upon identifying the testing frames, may generate echoing response frames. In some embodiments, the echoing response frames may be placed in one of a series of priority-based service queues. The originating device may then receive the response frames through the transport links and may measure the stream of incoming frames to measure and analyze the transport links' performance. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286875 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING NETWORK PERFORMANCE - The disclosed embodiments include a system, method, and computer program product for improving network performance. For example, in one embodiment, a computer-implemented method for improving network performance includes determining network performance information data indicative of network transmission characteristics of a first set of data packets that are communicated, using a first data link layer protocol, over at least one link of a network. The method further includes the step of improving, using a processor, transmission of a second set of data packets over the network, which utilizes a second data link layer protocol, based on the network performance information data determined from the first set of data packets that are communicated using the first data link layer protocol. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286876 | DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION FOR MULTIPLE VIRTUAL MACS - Communication bandwidth on a single physical interface (PHY) in a wireless device is allocated among multiple virtual media access control layers (MACs) based on need. Excess bandwidth may be aggregated in a single virtual MAC for power savings. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286877 | Method and Apparatus Reporting Channel Quality Indicator of Communication System - The present invention provides a method and apparatus reporting a channel quality indicator (CQI) of a communication system, including: detecting a first measurement reflecting a first communication quality of the communication system, providing first reference(s) respectively corresponding to indicator level(s), providing CQI according to the indicator level(s) and a relation between the first measurement and the first reference(s), and updating one (or more) first reference according to a second measurement reflecting a second communication quality of the communication system. For example, the first measurement can represent signal to interference ratio or mutual information, and the second measurement can represent data error rate or throughput. First reference(s) can be further adjusted according to a third measurement, e.g., a power scheduling of base station, such that CQI can be updated if base station schedules additional transmission power. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286878 | Method and Apparatus for Cell Handoff - A method for handoff between cells in a communication system includes the network sends a cell individual offset preset for a cell in the active set relative to each of its neighboring cells respectively to a terminal. After measuring the cell in the active set and its neighboring cells, the terminal evaluates the measurement in accordance with the measurement result and the cell individual offset for the cell in the active set relative to its each neighboring cell. The terminal then submits a measurement report to the network in accordance with the measurement evaluation result. The network instructs the terminal to perform a handoff between cells in accordance with the measurement report. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286879 | VIDEO STREAMING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE DEGRADATION CONTROL USING A VIDEO QUALITY METRIC - Degradation control management is provided for a plurality of video streams associated with a plurality of user terminals in a communication network, based at least in part on an overall video quality metric, by determining a video quality metric for each video stream based on at least a set of video quality metric input parameters, and calculating an overall video quality metric based on the determined video quality metrics for the video streams, determining, with an objective function, at least one objective parameter based on at least the overall video quality metric, calculating a scheduling parameter for each video stream using a degradation control algorithm based on at least the determined video quality metric for the respective video stream and on the at least one objective parameter, and scheduling network resources for each video stream based on at least the scheduling parameter for the video stream. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286880 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - A method and apparatus for transmitting a downlink reference signal in a wireless communication system supporting multiple antennas is disclosed. A method for transmitting Channel State Information-Reference Signals (CSI-RSs) for eight or less antenna ports includes selecting one of a plurality of CSI-RS Resource Element (RE) groups defined on a data region of a downlink subframe and mapping CSI-RSs for the eight or less antenna ports to the selected CSI-RS RE group, and transmitting the downlink subframe in which the CSI-RSs for the eight or less antenna ports are mapped. The plurality of CSI-RS RE groups is defined such that a transmission diversity RE pair for data transmitted on the downlink subframe is not broken. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286881 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - A Channel State Information (CSI) feedback method and a User Equipment (UE) are disclosed. The method comprises the following steps of: determining a set of coordinated Base Stations (BSs) participating multi-BS coordination, the set of coordination BSs containing a serving BS and at least one non-serving BS; for each BS in the set of coordinated BSs: calculating a Signal to Interference and Noise Ratio (SINR) for a channel between a UE and the BS based on a hypothetical BS coordination mode corresponding to the BS; and deriving a Channel Quality Index (CQI) corresponding to the calculated SINR and feeding back the derived CQI to the serving BS. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286882 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING TERMINAL-TO-TERMINAL COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method for a source terminal performing client cooperation in a wireless access system, and the method includes: receiving, from a base station, first control information for performing client cooperation, wherein the first control information contains resource area information that is allocated for channel state measurement between a source terminal and a cooperative terminal and a control signal that is used for the channel state measurement; measuring a channel state with the cooperative terminal by using the resource area information and the control signal; receiving, from the base station, second control information for performing client cooperation with the cooperative terminal; and performing client cooperation by using the second control information, wherein the first control information further contains frame structure information for defining an operation for the source terminal and the cooperative terminal performing client cooperation in a client cooperation frame. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286883 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY CONTROLLING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE POWER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for efficiently controlling inter-cell interference power in a wireless communication system. According to the present invention, a measurement method to be performed by a terminal in a wireless communication system comprises the following steps: receiving, from a base station, an RRC connection reestablishment message containing pattern information for measuring a serving cell or an adjacent cell; measuring, for an object to be measured indicated by said RRC reestablishment message, the serving cell or adjacent cell using the pattern information; and reporting the result of the measurement to the base station. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286884 | Method and device for determining channel quality indication information - The disclosure provides a method and device for determining Channel quality indication information, which is configured to perform channel measurement based on a reference signal, so as to obtain a CQI information. The method considers the influence of multiple factors on CQI calculation, including selection of a measurement reference signal as well as the influence of multiple complex conditions on CQI calculation, thereby solving the problem that an existing system is unable to obtain accurate Channel quality indication information when using a transmission mode 9, and enhancing the flexibility and performance of the system. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286885 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A MULTIMEDIA DATA PACKET USING CROSS-LAYER OPTIMIZATION - An apparatus and method for transmitting a multimedia data packet are provided. The method includes receiving Bottom-up Network Abstraction Layer (B-NAL) information from a network entity, determining a media data quality based on the received B-NAL information and generating media data having the determined media data quality, and generating a packet including the generated media data and transmitting the packet to the network entity. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286886 | Method and System for Controlling Data Packet Transmissions Over Lossy Protocols - A method for data packets transmission includes a first group of data packets transmitted with a first bitrate, this first group including a first payload. Quality of transmission of the first group of data packets is checked and, if it is above a first threshold, a second group of data packets is transmitted with a second bitrate higher than the first bitrate. The second group of data packets includes a payload, and additional control data (C | 10-31-2013 |
20130294261 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR EFFICIENT TIM COMPRESSION AND DECODING - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments improve power saving in network environments. An example method embodiment comprises: generating in an access point device, a traffic indication map comprising a page bitmap field, a page control field, one or more block bitmap fields, and one or more sub-block bitmaps indicating wireless client devices having buffered data in the access point device available for them; and periodically broadcasting the traffic indication map in a beacon frame to the wireless client devices. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294262 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE AND COMMUNICATING INFORMATION - A wireless communications device operates in a system where communications resources may be used by multiple devices concurrently. A device, with an acquired set of recurring time intervals, selects, e.g., pseudo-randomly, an interval or intervals to be used as a combined data transmission and channel measurement time interval. The other time intervals in its set are to be used as data transmission time intervals. The combined use type interval facilitates the measurement of interference on the device's channel while still allowing the device to transmit some data during the interval. A combined use interval includes a first portion for data transmission and a second portion for channel measurement. In some embodiments, the first portion is fixed size and the second portion occurs at the very end of the interval. In some embodiments, the duration of the first portion is varied over time such that the channel measurement start time varies. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294263 | Method and Device for Monitoring Wireless Terminal Behavior According to Terminal Type - One or more embodiments of a method and device taught herein provide for monitoring wireless terminal behavior in a wireless communication network, where each wireless terminal has a defined terminal type. Data describing the behavior of a plurality of wireless terminals in the wireless communication network is obtained. Based on the obtained data, an aggregated severity score for a given terminal type is determined that is indicative of the extent to which one or more of a plurality of performance criteria have not been met by wireless terminals of the given terminal type. If the aggregated severity score for the given terminal type exceeds a corresponding severity score threshold, one or more of a plurality of predefined actions are performed based on the extent to which the threshold is exceeded. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294264 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLASSIFYING FEMTO NODE USERS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with classifying devices that communicate with a femto node for providing services thereto. In one example, a node is equipped to monitor and/or receive one or more parameters communicated by a device, assign a classification to the device related to a frequency of using the femto node based in part on the one or more parameters. In an aspect, the node is equipped to provide services to the device based on the classification. In another aspect, the node is equipped to provide the classification to one or more femto nodes, including the femto node, for providing services to the device. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294265 | POSITIONING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides a positioning method, device and system, which are applied to indoor WLAN positioning. A positioning server obtains location service information of APs in a set of APs to be measured; selects three APs to be measured in the set of APs to be measured according to a preset rule, and calculates a first coordinate of a terminal; if a calculated RSSI value of an unmeasured AP is not smaller than a difference between the measured RSSI value and a preset threshold, determines that signals of the unmeasured AP are not affected by reflection; and uses the first coordinate as a location coordinate of the terminal if all the three APs to be measured have been measured, thereby positioning the terminal. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294266 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING A LOCATION OF A MOBILE STATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for estimating a location of a mobile station includes transmitting a position request signal, including at least departure time information or an identifier of the mobile station, to an AP by synchronizing with the AP, receiving first position information, including at least a calculated first location of the mobile station or a calculated first distance between the mobile station and the AP and departure time information of a position response signal, from the AP, calculating a ToA of a signal between the mobile station and the AP based on the departure time information of the position response signal, calculating at least a second distance between the mobile station and the AP or a second location of the mobile station using the ToA, and determining a final location of the mobile station based on the first position information and at least the second distance or the second location. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294267 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR A SET OF HARD-REAL TIME APPLICATIONS WITHIN A NETWORK - A data communication method for a set of hard real-time applications with an associated set of predefined network requirements (PNR) is provided. The method comprises configuring the physical layer of the network with a set of static modulation parameters (SMPs) to guarantee the PNRs are met at worst-case operating conditions for the network. The method further comprises measuring the current network performance within the network based on a given network performance monitoring schedule and, whenever the current network performance exceeds the PNRs by predefined amounts, adjusting the physical layer of the network by selecting a set of dynamic modulation parameters (DMP's) to increase the bandwidth availability within the network. Advantageously, the invention further allows for the allocation of the excess bandwidth to a set of non-hard real-time applications, whenever the current network performance exceeds the PNR. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294268 | INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION BASED ON ADAPTIVE TIME DIVISION DUPLEXING (TDD) CONFIGURATIONS - A method for mitigating interference in a wireless network includes an eNodeB and/or a UE identifying interference. The eNodeB may identify the interfering TDD configurations based on a downlink signal of a neighboring eNodeB received during an uplink timeslot for a UE associated with the eNodeB. Likewise, the UE may identify an interfering UE based on an uplink signal received during a downlink timeslot for an eNodeB associated with the UE. The eNodeB performs interference management based at least in part on the identified interference. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294269 | TIME SPACE COHERENCE INTERFEROMETER - A time space coherence interferometer (TSCI) system is provided. In one embodiment of the present invention the TSCI system includes an interferometer in communication with an RF source and a receiver. The interferometer includes a first switch, a second switch, a transmit element, a receive element and a sequencer circuit, wherein the sequencer circuit is configured to alternate the first and second switches between first and second configurations. In a first configuration, the signal from the RF source is provided to the transmit element, where it is communicated to the receive element via a signal path, and provided to the receiver. In the second configuration, the signal from the RF source is provided to the receiver via a reference path. The switching sequence results in a complex ratio of the signal path signal to the reference path signal (e.g., an S21 transmission ratio) being provided to the receiver. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294270 | System and Method for Controlling Network Discovery - A method for discovering an access point of a communications system includes receiving an active scanning indicator, delaying transmission of a probe request of the station for a first amount of time in accordance with the active scanning indicator, and determining if the station is able to receive a matching probe request of a neighbor station during the first amount of time. The method also includes delaying transmission of the probe request for a second amount of time if the station is able to receive the matching probe request during the first amount of time, and determining if the station is able to receive a probe response corresponding to the matching probe request during the second amount of time. The method further includes transmitting the probe request if the station is not able to receive the probe response corresponding to the matching probe request during the second amount of time. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294271 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The present invention provides a mobile terminal apparatus, a base station apparatus, and a communication control method, which allow control suitable for interference reduction in a layered network such as HetNet, and which support a next-generation mobile communication system. A mobile terminal apparatus has a receiving section ( | 11-07-2013 |
20130294272 | DEACTIVATION OF MICRO CELLS IN CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A cell ranking algorithm for power saving in a cellular wireless network having a heterogeneous network structure of macro and micro cells. The algorithm determines when and which micro cells in the network can be deactivated, by which the power consumption of the network can be reduced. A micro cell (Micro d) having a traffic load below a threshold value is deactivated and its load is assigned to adjacent macro cells (Macro a, Macro b) acting as compensation cells. The proposed algorithm is based on the comprehensive consideration of factors that have influence on the power saving of the network and the balance between the traffic load (or quality of service) and the energy saving. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294273 | Multipoint Transmissions - In scheduling of downlink multipoint transmissions at least one resource element is left free of the downlink channel. Data representing interference is then inserted in said at least one resource element for use in interference measurements. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294274 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS BASE STATION, METHOD OF CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF COMMON PILOT SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - In a wireless communication system that includes wireless base station ( | 11-07-2013 |
20130294275 | DISTRIBUTED DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTI-POINT (CoMP) FRAMEWORK - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate dynamically forming clusters in a wireless communication environment. A set of non-overlapping clusters can be formed dynamically over time and in a distributed manner. Each of the clusters can include a set of base stations and a set of mobile devices. The clusters can be yielded based upon a set of local strategies selected by base stations across the network converged upon through message passing. For example, each base station can select a particular local strategy as a function of time based upon network-wide utility estimates respectively conditioned upon implementation of the particular local strategy and disparate possible local strategies that can cover the corresponding base station. Moreover, operation within each of the clusters can be coordinated. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294276 | ESTIMATION OF CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR USING UNUSED CODES - Methods, a user equipment and a radio network node relating to estimation of a channel quality indicator, CQI, are provided. Downlink channels of a radio communication system are associated to a plurality of codes for code division multiplexing. Each downlink channel is associated to a respective code of said plurality of codes. The radio network node obtains information about an unused code among said plurality of codes. The user equipment obtains information about the unused code. The user equipment receives a downlink transmission from the radio network node. The user equipment estimates the CQI based on the unused code, wherein the unused code is unused with respect to the received downlink transmission. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294277 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a radio base station apparatus, a mobile terminal apparatus and a radio communication method capable of taking other-cell interference mitigation measures even in consideration of inter-cell coordination like CoMP. The radio communication method according to the present invention is characterized by, in a radio base station apparatus, generating notification information including subframe information of a serving cell and subframe information of another cell; and transmitting the notification information to a mobile terminal apparatus connected to the serving cell as a connected cell; and in the mobile terminal apparatus, receiving the notification information including the subframe information of the connected cell and the subframe information of another cell; and measuring channel quality of the connected cell with use of the subframe information of the connected cell and measuring channel quality of another cell with use of the subframe information of another cell. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294278 | RECEIVER, RECEPTION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Provided are a receiver, a reception method, and a computer program, which make it possible to calculate reception quality (SNR) more exactly when simultaneous determination is performed based on the reception quality of a control channel. The receiver comprises: a calculation means for calculating the ratio of the signal power in each reference signal to the average signal power over an entire band; a determination means for determining whether or not the maximum value of the calculated ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold; and a first correction means for correcting the signal power and noise power when the maximum value is determined as exceeding the threshold. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294279 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a mobile terminal apparatus, a radio base station apparatus and a radio communication method capable of making the most of the effects of the MIMO technique and the CoMP technique, when employing both of the techniques. According to the radio communication method of the present invention, a mobile terminal apparatus estimates downlink channel states using respective reference signals included in downlink signals from plural cells; selects PMIs using a codebook based on the channel states; estimates a phase difference between the cells based on the selected PMIs or the channel states; and transmits information of the phase difference and the selected PMIs to radio base station apparatuses of the respective cells. A radio base station apparatus receives an uplink signal including a PMI and the information of the phase difference between the cells; multiplies a transmission signal by a precoding weight corresponding to the PMI; adjusts the phase difference between the cells with use of the information of the phase difference between the cells; and transmits the transmission signal to a radio base station apparatus of another cell by coordinated multi-point transmission. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294280 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING UPLINK SHARED CHANNEL RESOURCE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method and device for allocating uplink shared channel resource, and a communication system, for solving the problem of the overall performance of the communication system being reduced in an existing allocating method. The method comprises: acquiring the volume of data-to-be-transmitted and an uplink channel quality indication; on the basis of the volume of data-to-be-transmitted acquired, determining at least one set of resource profile of the uplink channel quality indication and a resource number; judging of whether or not the uplink channel quality indication comprised within the at least one set of resource profile is identical to the uplink channel quality indication acquired, if identical, using a corresponding set of resource profile as a final resource profile; and if different, combining an uplink transmission power with the corresponding set of resource profile to determine the final resource profile. Under the premise of ensuring QoS, the present invention allows for minimization of transmission power of each terminal, thus reducing inter-system interference, allowing system performance to be further improved. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294281 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING METHOD OF TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for processing a signal of a terminal in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the method comprises the steps of: performing a measurement on a first cell in one or more specific subframes; configuring report information which includes the measurement result, together with an indicator indicating that the measurement has been performed in the one or more specific subframes; and transmitting the report information to a second cell, wherein the one or more specific subframes are configured to have different interference levels from other subframes. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294282 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AN UPLINK SIGNAL BY A RELAY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNCATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and to a method and apparatus for transceiving an uplink signal by a relay in a wireless communication system. According to the present invention, a scheme, in which the relay may correctly determine a reference resource for channel state information (CSI) calculation, and thus may perform accurate CSI transmission, may be provided. In addition, according to the present invention, a scheme, in which the relay may correctly determine timing for transmitting a sounding reference signal (SRS) based on the instruction of a base station and may perform SRS transmission, may be provided. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294283 | FACILITATING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - In order to facilitate cellular device-to-device communication, a cross-layer optimization functionality, utilizing for example monitoring capabilities of a MAC layer entity, and adjustment capabilities of an application control entity, is introduced. | 11-07-2013 |
20130301427 | GRACE STATE AND PACING IN LINK AGGREGATION - In one embodiment, one or more indicia of stress are monitored. Based on the one or more indicia of stress, it is determined a stress condition exists. In response to the stress condition, one or more link aggregation actors and partners are caused to enter a grace state for a grace period. While the one or more link aggregation actors and partners are in the grace state, link aggregation formation is paced on a plurality of links by delaying formation of one or more new link aggregation groups on the plurality of links until a hold is released. Upon expiration of the grace period, the grace state is exited. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301428 | POWER BASED GAIN CONTROL ADJUSTMENT - Method and devices for use in a wireless device are described herein. A signal is received over a plurality of time segments, the signal over each time segment including a plurality of resource element blocks. For each time segment, at least one resource element block is selected from the plurality of resource element blocks of the time segment based on information determined about the time segment. For each time segment, a power value associated with the at least one resource element block of the time segment is determined. For each time segment, a gain adjustment value to adjust the gain of the time segment or one or more subsequent time segments of the signal is determined based upon the power value associated with the at least one resource element block. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301429 | Methods and Apparatus for Direct Routing Between Nodes of Networks - Methods and apparatus for direction routing between nodes of networks are disclosed. An example method includes identifying a destination node of first data received at a first node; calculating a logical distance from the first node to the destination node; and, when the logical distance meets a threshold condition and when a direct route from the first node to the destination node is blocked according to a protocol setting, overriding the protocol setting to enable transmission of the first data from the first node to the destination node via the direct route. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301430 | MECHANISM FOR AUTOMATIC NETWORK DATA COMPRESSION ON A NETWORK CONNECTION - The techniques are provided automatically detecting when performing pre-transmission compression on data to be sent over a network connection will be preferable to sending the data uncompressed, and for automatically performing pre-transmission compression only when doing so is determined to be beneficial. The techniques involve performing compression on sample data. The time it takes to perform the compression on the sample data, along with the reduction in size achieved by the compression, are factors used to automatically determine whether compressing data before sending the data over a network connection will achieve better results that sending the data uncompressed. In some embodiments, multiple compression algorithm/compression level combinations are tested at different points in the transmission. At each point, the sending device may switch to the algorithm/level combination that is producing the best results on the current sample. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301431 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING SERVICE QUALITY METRICS FOR MANAGED SERVICES QUALITY ASSURANCE - A service quality metrics selection capability is presented. The selection of service quality metrics for a service may include selecting a plurality of candidate service quality metrics for a service from a set of available service quality metrics, associating each of the candidate service quality metrics with a respective one of a plurality of user experience categories and a respective one of a plurality of service user functions of the service, and selecting at least a portion of the candidate service quality metrics to be associated with the service. The selection of candidate service quality metrics to be associated with the service produces a set of selected service quality metrics for the service, which may be used to manage service quality assurance for the service. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301432 | Methods and Arrangements for CSI Reporting - Some embodiments provide a method in a wireless device for reporting channel state information, CSI, for a CSI process. The CSI process corresponds to a reference signal resource and an interference measurement resource. According to the method, the wireless device obtains an adjustment value associated with the CSI process. The wireless device estimates an effective channel based on one or more reference signals received in the reference signal resource, and applies the adjustment value to the estimated effective channel, thereby obtaining an adjusted effective channel. Furthermore, the wireless device determines channel state information based on the adjusted effective channel, and on interference estimated based on the interference measurement resource. Finally, the channel state information is transmitted to a network node. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301433 | DEVICES FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION - A User Equipment (UE) for sending feedback information is described. The UE includes a processor and instructions stored in memory that is in electronic communication with the processor. The UE determines a primary cell (PCell) configuration. The UE also determines a secondary cell (SCell) configuration. The SCell configuration is different from the PCell configuration. The UE further determines a feedback parameter M | 11-14-2013 |
20130301434 | RADIO LINK MONTORING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Methods and apparatus' of determining radio link quality are disclosed. According to various implementations, information indicating the time-frequency blocks to be monitored by a UE to enable the UE to locate a control channel is determined. The UE receives configuration information regarding resources used by a channel state information reference signal. It also receives configuration information regarding an interference measurement resource, as well as a channel state information reference signal. The channel state information reference signal uses the channel state information reference signal resources. A synchronization condition is determined based on the time frequency blocks to be monitored by the UE, the received channel state information reference signal and the interference measurement resource. The determined synchronization condition is sent to a higher layer. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301435 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES TO IMPROVE ON-TIME THROUGHPUT FOR INTEGRATED MULTI-RAT HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Methods and devices for optimizing on-time throughput in a wireless network. An enhanced node B (eNodeB) integrating two or more air interfaces schedules transmissions, for a measurement period, over at least one of the two or more air interfaces. The eNodeB estimates, based on the transmissions, a metric of on-time throughput for the user equipment (UE) within the cell, where on-time throughput is a measure of an amount of data that arrives at a destination before a delay threshold has been reached and at a bit-rate greater than or equal to a target bit-rate. The eNodeB then assigns UEs within the cell to an air interface of the two or more air interface to maximize the metric of on-time throughput for the UEs within the cell. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301436 | SECTORIZED BASE STATIONS AS MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for improved utilization of air link resources are discussed in wireless communications systems employing multi-sector base stations and wireless terminals with multiple antennas. Timing synchronization is maintained across the base station sectors, and the same set of tones are used in adjacent sectors. In a sector boundary region, which is typically a high interference region, a wireless terminal is set to a sector pair state and operated in a MIMO mode of operation, communicating with two adjacent base station antenna faces of the same base station concurrently, the two different adjacent base station antenna faces corresponding to different adjacent sectors. Thus, typically high interference sector boundary regions, are converted into high capacity regions by having the sectors coordinated and utilizing MIMO techniques. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301437 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN ACCESS PROBE TRANSMIT POWER ACCORDING TO A REVERSE LINK UNDERLOAD CONDITION - Apparatus and methods are disclosed for adapting the power of an access probe transmission, in accordance with a reverse link underload indicator provided by the base station. In one example, the base station can transmit a one-bit reverse link underload indicator as an information element broadcasted within a general page message (GPM). Here, the reverse link underload indicator can indicate whether a measured rise-over-thermal (RoT) at the base station is less than a given threshold. The access terminal may accordingly reduce the initial transmit power of an access probe transmission in the case of a reverse link underload condition, as this condition would indicate that the base station could accommodate reduced power access probe transmissions without substantially decreasing the probability of a quick detection of the access attempt. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301438 | APPARATUS AND METHOD TO ESTABLISH A DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) CONNECTION IN A 3GPP-LTE NETWORK USING A DISTRIBUTED CHANNEL SCAN - An apparatus and method that allow user equipment (UE) to transmit information directly with other user equipment, using a device-to-device (D2D) mode is disclosed herein. A first D2D UE (dUE | 11-14-2013 |
20130301439 | PERFORMING A HANDOVER IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK - Technology for performing a handover in a heterogeneous wireless network (HetNet) is disclosed. One method comprises receiving, at an anchor serving cell in the HetNet, channel measurement reports made by a user equipment (UE) for a plurality of cells. A transmission point change request can be sent, based on the channel measurements for the UE, from the anchor serving cell to a target transmission point. The target transmission point is located in one of the plurality of cells. A transmission point change indicator is sent from the anchor cell to the UE to indicate a change in TP with which the UE will communicate via an air interface, while maintaining a connection to the anchor serving cell. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301440 | APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING LOOP-FREE TRANSMISSION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - There is provided an apparatus for performing loop-free transmission in a communication network. The apparatus includes a plurality of ports, a controller, a memory, and an interface unit. The controller generates monitoring frames that are transmitted to another apparatus, so as to monitor a connection state of the communication network. The memory includes port-state information that stores a port state in association with each of the plurality of ports. The interface unit processes a frame based on the port-state information and sets, in the port-state information, a stopped state to a first port included in the plurality of ports, in accordance with a time period during which the monitoring frames are not generated. The interface unit discards a frame received via the first port for which the stopped state is set in the port-state information. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301441 | NULL-DATA PACKET THROUGHPUT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method for improving signal reception in an access point. The system and method may comprise the steps of: transmitting a non-zero 802.11 NULL-data packet to a client, wherein the traffic test is initiated at intervals; receiving an 802.11 ACKnowledgement packet from the client wherein the 802.11 ACKnowledgement packet indicates that the non-zero 802.11 NULL-data packet was received by the client; and discarding the non-zero 802.11 NULL-data packet after receipt. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301442 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in order to provide for periodic measurements related to a frequency identified by the network, such as a downlink frequency associated with a secondary uplink frequency. In the context of a method, a message is caused to be transmitted to a mobile terminal indicating that the mobile terminal is to perform periodic measurements in relation to a secondary uplink frequency. Following the performance of the periodic measurements by the mobile terminal, the method also includes receiving an indication of the periodic measurements in relation to the secondary uplink frequency that have been performed by the mobile terminal. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301443 | DIFFERENTIAL SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO BASED RATE ADAPTATION - Systems and methods for implementing a differential signal to noise ratio (DSNR) based rate adaptation for wireless networks are disclosed. The described methods probabilistically adapt the rate of data transmission based on an assessment of the causes of data loss. The described methods include determining a DSNR for data transmission during a predetermined window of time and adapting the transmission rate in a probabilistic manner responsive to the differential SNR and a differential SNR threshold for the data transmission. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301444 | GROUP MESSAGE BASED CARRIER AGGREGATION CONTROL - A mobile communication system includes a network based aggregation controller for controlling aggregation of component carriers from a first spectrum and a second spectrum. In addition, the mobile communication system includes a group of mobile terminals. The network based aggregation controller is configured to send a group message on at least one component carrier of the first spectrum to the group of mobile terminals. The mobile terminals receive the group message. A terminal based aggregation controller in each of the mobile terminals is configured to control operation of the respective mobile terminal with respect to the at least one component carrier of the second spectrum. This control is accomplished in response to the received group message. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301445 | RADIO BASE STATION, USER TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a radio base station, a user terminal and a radio communication method capable of making accurate measurement in various network configurations in HetNet. The radio communication method according to the present invention has, in a heterogeneous network having a network configuration where a macro cell overlays a micro cell that is smaller than the macro cell, a radio base station that forms the macro cell and is connected to a macro terminal under control of the macro cell determining a measurement subframe to measure a CRS based on the network configuration, generating a time reference indicating the measurement subframe and transmitting a signal including the time reference and the CRS to the macro terminal; and the macro terminal receiving the time reference and the CRS and measuring the CRS in the measurement subframe indicated by the time reference. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301446 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING RESOURCES FOR SCHEDULING REQUEST AND USER EQUIPMENT USING THE SAME AND A CONTROL NODE USING THE SAME - The present disclosure proposes a method of allocating resources for a scheduling request (SR), a user equipment using the same method, and a control node using the same method, which is related to dynamically adjusting a dedicated SR (D-SR) period which is a semi-persistently configured D-SR resource used to transmit a SR. The method, the user equipment, and the control node would perform functions including establishing a connection between the user equipment and the control node in order to transmit uplink data, the user equipment transmitting through the connection an assisting information to the control node after establishing the connection to adjust the D-SR period, and the user equipment obtaining a second D-SR period after transmitting the assisting information to the control node. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301447 | Method and System for Reporting Feedback in Cooperative Multipoint Transmission - A method includes receiving, in a communication terminal, signals from a group of cells. The group of cells cooperates in a Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) transmission scheme that assigns multiple Channel State Information Reference Signals (CSI-RS) resources to the cells. A first subset of the CSI-RS resources is assigned to periodically report channel feedback on a first uplink channel, and a second subset of the CSI-RS resources is assigned to a-periodically report the channel feedback on a second uplink channel. The channel feedback is computed for the multiple CSI-RS resources. The channel feedback computed for the CSI-RS resources is transmitted in the first subset on the first uplink channel, and the channel feedback computed for the CSI-RS resources in the second subset is transmitted on the second uplink channel. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301448 | CSI DEFINITIONS AND FEEDBACK MODES FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION - A method and apparatus report channel state information (CSI) feedback of a user equipment (UE) in a coordinated multipoint communication system. The method includes identifying, when downlink transmissions to the UE are configured with at least two CSI subframe subsets, an interference measurement resource within one of the CSI subframe subsets belonging to a CSI reference resource. The method also includes using the identified interference measurement resource to derive an interference measurement. The apparatus includes a controller configured to, when downlink transmissions to the UE are configured with at least two CSI subframe subsets, identify an interference measurement resource within one of the CSI subframe subsets belonging to a CSI reference resource. The controller is configured to use the identified interference measurement resource to derive an interference measurement. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301449 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS OPERABLE IN AUTO-NEGOTIATION MODE, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus capable of activating an EEE power saving mode when not activated. The communication apparatus is operable in an auto-negotiation mode. When a CPU of the communication apparatus determines that a power saving mode to be realized in the auto-negotiation mode is to be activated, if an other-party apparatus at the other end of communication has been set to a fixed mode, the CPU causes the other-party apparatus to be set to the auto-negotiation mode. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301450 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING COORDINATED MULTIPOINT FEEDBACK UNDER MULTIPLE CHANNEL AND INTERFERENCE ASSUMPTIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for performing coordinated multipoint (CoMP) channel state information (CSI) feedback under multiple channel and interference assumptions. One method generally includes receiving signaling indicating at least one or more interference measurement resources (IMRs) from a network and a configuration with one or more non-zero power reference signal (NZP-RS) resources in which one or more base stations transmit a RS, performing separate interference measurements at least on a per-IMR basis in one or more subframes by forming a baseline interference estimate based on the IMR and forming separate interference estimates based on adding interference from selected NZP-RS resources to the baseline interference estimate, and transmitting one or more CSI feedback reports that correspond to the interference measurements. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301451 | Methods and Apparatus for Determining a Signal Estimate by Scaling - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for estimating a signal by a wireless device in a wireless communication system. The wireless device obtains a scaling factor that describes a relation between signal estimates for first and second signals of a first type. The wireless device further obtains a reference signal estimate that comprises a signal estimate for a first signal of a second type. The wireless device then selectively determines at the wireless device a signal estimate for a second signal of the second type by scaling the reference signal estimate by the scaling factor. The first signals of the first and second type are associated with a first radio network node. The second signals of the first and second type are associated with a second radio network node. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301452 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving a reference signal in a wireless communication system. In the method, in order to dynamically switch an uplink (UL) Demodulation-Reference Signal (DM-RS) according to the communication environment, such as CoMP and MU-MIMO, a parameter set for generation of a reference signal sequence is configured to include a Virtual Cell Identifier (VCID) parameter configured by information of a total of 9 bits and a cyclic shift hopping initial value parameter c | 11-14-2013 |
20130301453 | WIRELESS NETWORK WITH POWER AWARE TRANSMISSION CONTROL - A wireless device that tailors communications based on power parameters of the device. In one embodiment, a wireless device includes an energy source, a power monitor coupled to the energy source, a wireless transceiver, and a traffic controller coupled to the power monitor and the wireless transceiver. The power monitor is configured to measure a parameter of the energy source. The wireless transceiver is configured to wirelessly communicate via a wireless network. The traffic controller is configured to set length of packets to be transmitted based on the measured parameter of the energy source. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301454 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING ANALOG AND DIGITAL HYBRID BEAMFORMING - A communication method and apparatus using analog and digital hybrid beamforming are provided. The method includes receiving a first message including a measurement and selection condition for hybrid beamforming from a Base Station (BS), measuring channels of a plurality of BS transmission beams, selecting at least one BS transmission beam based on channel measurements, transmitting report information about the selected at least one BS transmission beam to the BS, receiving from the BS a second message, estimating an effective channel matrix for the selected final BS transmission beam according to the measurement and report condition, determining feedback information for digital beamforming of the BS based on the effective channel matrix, transmitting the determined feedback information to the BS, and receiving a data burst from the BS according to a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) mode and/or a configuration scheduled based on the feedback information. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301455 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR JOINTLY TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication method is performed by a Mobile Station (MS) in a mobile communication system including a plurality of Base Stations (BSs). The method includes receiving at least one reference signal through at least one receive beam in a direction of nearby BSs, determining at least one candidate BS for joint transmission/reception among the nearby BSs based on the received at least one reference signal, and transmitting information about the determined at least one candidate BS to a serving BS. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301456 | Reference Signal Interference Management in Heterogeneous Network Deployments - Methods and apparatus for enabling interference coordination in a communication network. A base station includes a plurality of antenna ports. Each antenna port is configured to transmit a reference signal, and each antenna port is associated with a respective cell. The base station determines a set of cells where transmissions of reference signals is to be performed from a reduced set of the plurality of antenna ports. The base station determines a subset of antenna ports in at least one cell of the determined set of cells to enable interference coordination in the network, and transmits the reference signal from the subset of antenna ports. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301457 | POSITION LOCATION USING MULTIPLE CARRIERS - A method of determining a distance estimate between a mobile device and a wireless transceiver communicating with the mobile device on at least one multi-carrier signal includes: receiving at least one multi-carrier signal; selecting at least one carrier signal from the at least one multi-carrier signal; measuring a signal characteristic of the at least one carrier signal from the at least one multi-carrier signal; and determining the distance estimate between the mobile device and the wireless transceiver based at least partially upon the signal characteristic. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301458 | CHANNEL QUALITY REPORTING FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF SUBFRAMES - A method for determining channel quality estimates of two or more types of subframes, such as clean and unclean subframes, may be applicable to both legacy and newer user equipment. A first base station affects a channel quality measurement by either transmitting dummy signals over designed tones that correspond to a second base station, or by puncturing transmissions during designated tones that correspond to the second base station. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301459 | NETWORK BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT - Technologies for measuring a data throughput rate of a link typically used for transferring media catalogs and media between a media provider and an UPnP Control Point. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301460 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING CODEC SPEED IN A TRANSMISSION PATH DURING CALL SET-UP DUE TO REDUCED TRANSMISSION PERFORMANCE - A system and method for establishing a phone call over a packet network. The process may receive a call request from an originating call device to a termination call device. A determination may be made to determine whether the terminating call device is available. If the terminating call device is determined to be available, transmission path status information between the originating and terminating call devices may be retrieved. Status of the transmission path on the packet network between the originating and terminating call devices may be determined. If the status of the transmission path is determined to be within a first range, a call may be established between the originating and terminating call devices via an encoder/decoder (CODEC) having a first data rate. Otherwise, the call may be established between the originating and terminating call devices via a CODEC having a second, lower data rate. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301461 | RESOURCE UTILIZATION MEASUREMENTS FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Interference issues between wireless network devices are mitigated. An evolved node B (eNodeB) may experience higher cell load or higher interference when serving user equipment (UEs) that are operating in an cell range extension (CRE) area in which the UEs are strongly affected by aggressor eNodeBs. An eNodeB experiencing higher cell load or serving user equipments (UEs) under higher interference generally requests an interfering/aggressor eNodeB to repartition some of its resources. Repartitioning of resources, however, may have a negative impact on the eNodeB serving CRE area UEs. In one aspect, a new measurement of utilization accounts for CRE status and differentiates between protected and unprotected resources, such as subframes. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301462 | OPTIMIZATION PROCESS AND SYSTEM FOR A HETEROGENEOUS AD HOC NETWORK - Method and system for optimizing selection of a network. The method includes identifying available lenders and existing networks within a vicinity of a borrower, selecting an optimization technique for completing a task of the borrower, calculating, for a plurality of network options, a value for completing the borrower's task according to the optimization technique, and selecting an optimum network option to complete the borrower's task. The plurality of network options includes forming a heterogeneous network composed of both a peer-to-peer network and a multiplexed network. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301463 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING MANAGEMENT INFORMATION FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and of transmitting management information, performed by an access point (AP), in a wireless local area network system is provided. The method includes transmitting, to a station, a frame including a BSS load information element, the BSS load element including a multi user (MU) multiple input multiple output (MIMO) capable STA count field and a plurality of bandwidth utilization fields, wherein the MU-MIMO capable STA count field indicates a total number of STAs with MU reception capability currently associated with a candidate BSS managed by the AP and the plurality of bandwidth untilization fields indicate whether a plurality of operating channel width are busy. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301464 | Method and device for measurement compensation for inter-system reselection and handover in dual-mode terminal - Method and device for measurement compensation for inter-system reselection and handover in a dual-mode terminal are disclosed. The method comprises: a GSM physical layer reporting measured RSCP and Ec/No values of a 3G neighbor cell to a radio resource management layer with inter-layer primitives; the radio resource management layer receiving the inter-layer primitives carrying the RSCP and Ec/No values reported by the physical layer, and performing measurement compensation for the inter-layer primitives in the radio resource management layer. Since the measurement compensation is performed in the radio resource management layer of the terminal, the terminal preferably resides on 3G network when detecting the 3G network. It can be applied to measurement compensation for the inter-system reselection and handover when 2G and 3G mobile communication systems co-exist. The terminal is more easily retained on the network of one of the systems and allowed to make a priority selection of the networks. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301465 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SETTING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION MEASURING RESOURCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, discloses a method and a device for setting a channel status information (CSI) measuring resource in a wireless communication system. The present invention provides a way to transmit/receive the CSI more accurately and efficiently by setting a virtual reference resource for measuring the CSI. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301466 | METHOD FOR THE USE OF A GSM/UMTS MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK BY A USER EQUIPMENT ATTACHED TO A CORE NETWORK OF AN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM (EPS) MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for use of a Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM) and Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS) (GSM/UMTS) mobile communication network by a user equipment attached to a core network of an Evolved Packet System (EPS) mobile communication network, the use of the GSM/UMTS mobile communication network being the result of a fallback operation, includes, prior to an invocation of a service that triggers the fallback operation: performing an updating operation regarding assignment of a Location Area Code (LAC) and/or a serving Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to the user equipment; and/or performing, autonomously by the user equipment, a measurement operation regarding a current General Packet Radio System (GPRS)/EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) or UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) (GERAN/UTRAN) radio environment in order to identify potential CSFB target cells of the user equipment. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301467 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING SIGNAL IN MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - A method of receiving a signal of a user equipment in a multi-node system including a plurality of nodes and a base station for controlling the plurality of nodes is provided. The method includes: receiving a reference parameter from the base station; and receiving a node-specific signal from at least one node among the plurality of nodes, wherein a virtual cell parameter required for decoding of the node-specific signal is determined based on the reference parameter, and the node-specific signal is identified by each of the plurality of nodes. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301468 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting interference information at a mobile station in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises detecting a change of interference information associated with a interference frequency; and transmitting a message including the interference information associated with the interference frequency to the network, if a timer configured based on the interference frequency is not running. | 11-14-2013 |
20130308469 | SHARED CELL RECEIVER FOR UPLINK CAPACITY IMPROVEMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A wireless communication method and system are provided in which an uplink data stream that has uplink data associated with a user device is received. Channel performance data based at least in part on a portion of the uplink data stream is determined. A determination is made whether the channel performance data meets a predetermined performance level. The portion of the uplink data stream is discarded when the channel performance data does not meet the predetermined performance level. The portion of the uplink data stream is tagged for additional processing when the channel performance data meets the predetermined performance level. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308470 | Wireless Network Supporting Extended Coverage of Service - A communications access point may provide access to a wireless communications network to a user device located at a first location. The communications access point may determine that the user device is moving from the first location to a second location where access to the wireless network is limited or not available. In response to the determination, the communications access point may provide access to the wireless network at the second location by extending a coverage area of the wireless network. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308471 | DETECTING ERROR CONDITIONS IN STANDBY LINKS - A method includes generating, by a first network device, test traffic to be transmitted to a second network device. The first and second network devices are coupled via a number of communication links, where one of links is a backup link. The method also includes transmitting, by the first network device, the test traffic to the second network device at periodic intervals via the backup link, receiving, by the second network device, the test traffic and monitoring the received test traffic. The method further includes comparing the monitored test traffic to a threshold, determining whether the monitored test traffic meets the threshold, and generating an alarm or notification message, in response to determining that the monitored test traffic does not meet the threshold. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308472 | User Equipment and Method for Radio Link Monitoring - Techniques are provided for a radio link quality monitoring method and apparatus wherein a given user equipment device receives a plurality of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex symbols that comprise a plurality of resource elements distributed in time and frequency, and which include reference symbols. The objective of the radio link quality monitoring is to predict the user equipment detection probability of control messages transmitted by the base station. The radio link quality estimation process calculates two average signal to noise ratio values over the complete frequency bandwidth for two assumed control channel formats corresponding to in-sync and out-of-sync conditions. The results of the calculations are then used to deduce the average error probabilities that are compared with predefined thresholds to provide the in-sync/out-of-sync indications. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308473 | SIGNALING SUPPORT FOR MULTI SECTOR DEPLOYMENT IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS - A method in a controller for a first cell in a mobile cellular network for making a decision to handover a user equipment to a second cell of the mobile cellular network is described. The method may include obtaining a first measurement of an uplink signal from a user equipment at the first cell, obtaining a second measurement of an uplink signal from the user equipment at the second cell, and making a decision to handover the user equipment from the first cell to the second cell using the obtained first and second measurements. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308474 | COORDINATED MULTIPOINT RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - A method for resource management includes determining a Coordinated Multi-point Processing (CoMP) resource management set of a user equipment (UE), receiving a set of channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS) at the UE from a transmission point (TP) included within the CoMP resource management set, determining a resource management parameter based upon the CSI-RS signals, and sending the determined resource management parameter to the TP. The CoMP resource management set includes a plurality of candidate TPs for which downlink communication may be established with the UE. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308475 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK INTERFERENCE IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - The present disclosure presents a method and apparatus for controlling an uplink (UL) rate of one or more use equipments (UEs) served by a base station. For example, the method may include obtaining one or more measurements of a plurality of signals from a sub-set of the one or more UEs served by the base station over a period of time. Furthermore, such an example method may include comparing the measurements to one or more respective target values to generate a power activity indicator (PAI) metric and comparing the measurements to one or more respective target values to generate a power activity indicator (PAI) metric. As such, the uplink interference in heterogeneous networks may be controlled. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308476 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ANTENNA SWITCHING BASED ON UPLINK METRICS - This disclosure provides systems, methods, and apparatus for antenna switching for simultaneous communication. In one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus is provided. The wireless communication apparatus includes a plurality of antennas including a first antenna and a second antenna. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a plurality of transmit circuits including a first transmit circuit. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a controller configured to selectively switch the first transmit circuit from transmitting wireless communications via the first antenna to transmit wireless communications via the second antenna based on one or more uplink performance characteristics of at least one of the first antenna and the second antenna. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308477 | ANTENNA SWITCHING DEVICES, METHODS, AND SYSTEMS - This disclosure provides systems, methods, and apparatus for antenna switching for simultaneous communication. In one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus is provided. The wireless communication apparatus includes a plurality of antennas including a first antenna and a second antenna. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a plurality of receive circuits including a first receive circuit. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a controller configured to determine one or more performance characteristics of the first antenna over a plurality of sources. The controller is further configured to selectively switch the first receive circuit from receiving wireless communications via the first antenna to receive wireless communications via the second antenna if the one or more performance characteristics of the first antenna over the plurality of sources fall simultaneously. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308478 | DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR ADJUSTING PROBING DISTANCES - This disclosure provides systems, methods, and apparatus for adjusting probing distances. In one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus is provided. The wireless communication apparatus includes a plurality of antennas including a first antenna and a second antenna. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a plurality of receive circuits including a first receive circuit coupled to the first antenna and a second receive circuit coupled to the second antenna. The first receive circuit is configured to measure one or more downlink performance characteristics of the first antenna and the second receive circuit is configured to measure one or more downlink performance characteristics of the second antenna during at least part of a same time period. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a controller configured to determine a difference between the one or more downlink performance characteristics of the first antenna and the second antenna, and determine a next time to use the second receive circuit to measure the one or more downlink performance characteristics of the second antenna based on the determined difference between the one or more downlink performance characteristics of the first antenna and the second antenna. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308479 | RADIO COMMUNICATIONS - An arrangement is described for adapting outer loop precoder phase combiner in a radio communication system having coordinated multipoint transmission. In the arrangement ACK/NACK-message received as a response to a transmitted data packet is used for adapting the phase. When a NACK-message is received the phase may be adapted or it may be further determined if the error was due to error in channel code or due to destructive inter-point signal combining. If the error was due to destructive combining the phase is adjusted. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308480 | Load Estimation in Frequency Domain Pre-Equalization Systems - A method for noise rise estimation in a wireless communication system comprises measuring ( | 11-21-2013 |
20130308481 | Technique for performing cell measurement on at least two cells - A technique for performing at least one measurement on at least a first cell and a second cell is disclosed. The first cell employs i) a first Radio Access Technology (RAT), different from a second RAT of the second cell, and ii) a first carrier substantially the same as a second carrier of the second cell. In a method aspect, the method is performed in a by a User Equipment (UE), and comprises the step of configuring the UE to perform the at least one measurement on the first and second cells substantially simultaneously with UE operations different from the at least one measurement. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308482 | COGNITIVE WIRELESS SYSTEM - A cognitive wireless system that enables a mobile node to operate dynamically with heterogeneous networks by taking into account real-time contextual information about the mobile node and system-wide health information. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308483 | Selecting Receiver Chains of a Mobile Unit for Receiving Wireless Signals - A method and apparatus of selecting which of a plurality of receiver chains of a mobile unit to receive wireless signals, is disclosed. One method includes measuring a first receive signal quality while all of the plurality of receiver chains are receiving wireless signals, and measuring a second receive signal quality while a subset of the plurality of receiver chains are receiving wireless signals. The subset of the plurality of receiver chains are selected to receive wireless signal unless the first receive signal quality is a threshold better than the second receive signal quality. If the first receive signal quality is a threshold better than the second receive signal quality then all the plurality of receiver chains are selected to receive wireless signals. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308484 | PERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION SIGNALING WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer readable medium can be provided for periodic channel state information signaling that employs carrier aggregation. The method can include determining, in an apparatus, channel state information. The channel state information includes channel state information of a plurality of component carriers. The method can also include reporting, by the apparatus, the channel state information including a plurality of reports in an aggregated form. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308485 | INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method in a wireless terminal transceiver includes receiving a sequence of frames from a first base station, wherein each frame in the sequence contains a first set of time-frequency resources which may be used for scheduling data and a second set of time-frequency resources not used for scheduling data. The transceiver also receives a message from the first base station identifying a third set of time-frequency resources that is a subset of the first set of time-frequency resources, and estimates the channel state based on the transmission received in the third set of time-frequency resources. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308486 | HIGH DATA THROUGHPUT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK RECEIVER - A method for receiving a frame in a high data throughput wireless local area network begins by receiving a preamble of the frame via a channel in accordance with a default receiver filter mask. The processing continues by validating the preamble. The processing continues by, when the preamble is validated, interpreting the preamble to determine a high data throughput channel configuration. The processing continues by reconfiguring the default receiver filter mask in accordance with the high data throughput channel configuration to produce a reconfigured receiver filter mask. The processing continues by receiving a data segment of the frame in accordance with the reconfigured receiver filter mask. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308487 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR HANDLING UNRELIABLE SCHEDULING GRANTS IN A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements for handling unreliable scheduling grants in a WCDMA-communication system. A user equipment detects that a received scheduling grant is unreliable and adjust its serving grant based on that information. The user equipment is also able to report continuously received unreliable grants as an event to the network, allowing the network to adapt its operation to reduce the unreliable grants. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308488 | METHOD OF FEEDING BACK MU-CQI IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION POINT DEVICE, AND USER EQUIPMENT - There are provided a method, user equipment, and transmission point device for feeding back channel quality indicator (MU-CQI) to the transmission point in a communication system including the transmission point and a plurality of user equipments, the method comprising steps: the transmission point sending a message to an intended user equipment of the plurality of user equipments; and the intended user equipment calculating the MU-CQI based on the message, and feeding back the MU-CQI to the transmission point. The present disclosure enables dynamic MU operation, and improves link adaptation performance with marginal downlink overhead. And the accuracy is not limited by codebook size. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308489 | Minimizing Drive Tests Measurements Configuration for Signal Strength Reporting in Mobile Communications Environments - At least one table for mapping measured quantity values of a signal strength, which are measured by a user equipment according to a minimizing drive tests policy in a mobile communications environment, to reported values is generated by including a number n of thresholds therein which are adjustable and indicate signal strength ranges defining the reported values, wherein n is greater or equal to two. The number n and values of the thresholds are adjusted to filter the measured quantity values in the user equipment, and the minimizing drive tests policy is controlled based on the at least one table. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308490 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for performing a device-to-device cooperative transmission (D2D CT) using a multi-carrier in a wireless access system, including the steps of: enabling a source device to perform a network entry process with a base station using a primary carrier; enabling the source device to receive control information related to a dedicated carrier used for D2D CT from the base station through the primary carrier; and enabling the source device to transmit an uplink signal to a collaborative device using the dedicated carrier. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308491 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR ADJUSTING DOWNLINK GRANT PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL OF UE - The present invention provides a method and a base station for adjusting a downlink grant physical downlink control channel of a UE. The method comprises: receiving a signal transmitted on an uplink resource corresponding to a current downlink grant physical downlink control channel from the UE; judging whether or not the UE has received the downlink grant physical downlink control channel successfully in accordance with the received signal; and determining the number of CCEs occupied by the downlink grant physical downlink control channel and/or a transmission power of the downlink grant physical downlink control channel in accordance with the judgment result. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315076 | Electronic Devices, Methods, and Computer Program Products for Selecting an Antenna Element Based on a Wireless Communication Performance Criterion - A method of operating an electronic device includes providing a plurality of antenna elements, evaluating a wireless communication performance criterion to obtain a performance evaluation, and assigning a first one of the plurality of antenna elements to a main wireless signal reception and transmission path and a second one of the plurality of antenna elements to a diversity wireless signal reception path based on the performance evaluation. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315077 | Reputation-Based Routing and Error-Correction Coding in Ad Hoc Networks - Nodes in an ad hoc mobile network are monitored to provide secure routing of packets. Malicious or selfish behaviors by nodes are used to maintain and distribute node reputations. Based on the reputation, the most secure route, which can have multiple paths, is selected for packet communications. In conjunction with secure routing, a forward error correction code is adaptively optimized according to the reputation through every adjacent nodes along the route to avoid eavesdropping and falsification by malicious nodes. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315078 | Method and System For On-Demand Adaptation of Packet Time-To-Live In Time-Slotted Barrage Relay Networks - Methods and systems for on-demand adaptation of packet time-to-live in time-slotted barrage relay networks are disclosed. For example, one disclosed method includes: transmitting a first packet from a first node in a wireless ad hoc network to a second node in the wireless ad hoc network; determining a first path distance, in terms of number of hops, from the first node to the second node, based on the first packet transmission; transmitting a second packet from the second node to the first node, wherein the second packet includes content representing the first path distance; and determining a time-to-live value for subsequent transfers from the first node to the second node, by taking into account the first path distance, wherein the time-to-live value limits the number of hops each packet is allowed to take in subsequent transfers from the first node to the second node. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315079 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USING DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS TO SUPPORT IMS BASED SERVICES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with using D2D communications to support at least a portion of IMS based services. In one example, a first UE is equipped to perform communications with a second UE using an IMS session in which data traffic and signaling traffic are supported through a network, determine that the second UE is within a first proximity threshold of the first UE, establish a D2D communication link with the second UE, and transfer support of the data traffic to the D2D communication link while maintaining the support of the signaling traffic through the network. In an aspect, the first proximity threshold may be a distance, a signaling strength or a signaling quality between the first and second UEs between which D2D communications are supported. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315080 | System and Method for Multi-Pair Configuration Over Existing Cabling Infrastructure - A system and method for multi-pair configuration over existing cabling infrastructure. In one embodiment, a network device is configured through a selective activation of one or more physical layer devices that are coupled to a respective one or more of the conductor pairs that are identified in a diagnostic process. Aggregation can be performed on the data streams carried over the activated conductor pairs. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315081 | REFERENCE SIGNAL MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INCLUDING PLURAL BASE STATIONS WITH DISTRIBUTED ANTENNAS - An apparatus and a method of measuring a reference signal for efficient downlink transmission in a mobile communication system are provided. The system includes plural base stations, each having a plurality of antennas distributed in the service area thereof based on a Distributed Antenna System (DAS). A method for a base station to notify a terminal of reference signal measurement information in a mobile communication system comprises determining whether the terminal is in a Rank Indicator/Precoding Matrix Indicator (RI/PMI) disabled mode, selecting, when the terminal is in the RI/PMI disabled mode, the reference signal to be measured by the terminal between a Cell-specific Reference Signal (CRS) and a Channel Status Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS), notifying the terminal of the reference signal measurement information with the selection result, and receiving channel information generated based on the reference signal measurement information from the terminal. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315082 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING CARRIER FREQUENCIES - A method and apparatus for searching carrier frequencies (CFs) including determining all CFs to be measured within a frequency band according to a predetermined frequency interval; selecting part of the CFs as Sampling Measurement CFs (SMCFs) according to a predetermined band search step, and for each of the SMCFs, calculating initial peak to average ratio (PAR) of the SMCFs; weighting the initial PAR of each of the SMCFs by using initial PARs of SMCFs left and right neighboring each of the SMCFs, to obtain a determined PAR of each of the SMCFs; ordering the determined PARs of all the SMCFs, and selecting, in a descending order of the determined PARs, a predetermined number of SMCFs and frequencies to be measured left and right neighboring the selected SMCFs as a search result. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315083 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING BEAMFORMING - A method for transmitting a reference signal by a Base Station (BS) in a mobile communication system using beamforming includes determining beamforming information for transmission of a Reference Signal (RS) Transmit (Tx) beam, wherein at least one of a Tx period and a beam width of the RS Tx beam is determined differently based on a size of Receive (Rx) areas in which a plurality of Tx beams are received in coverage of the BS; and transmitting the RS Tx beam to related Rx areas depending on the determined beamforming information. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315084 | IQ IMBALANCE IMAGE COMPENSATION IN MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method in a wireless communication terminal includes receiving an aggregated carrier including a first component carrier and a second component carrier, determining a level of interference from a signal received on the first component carrier to a signal on the second component carrier based on a signal characteristic of the first component carrier and a signal characteristic of the second component carrier, and providing signal interference information to a serving base station if the determined interference level satisfies a condition. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315085 | IQ IMBALANCE IMAGE COMPENSATION IN MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method in a wireless communication terminal includes receiving an aggregated carrier including a first component carrier and a second component carrier, determining a level of interference from a signal received on the first component carrier to a signal on the second component carrier based on a signal characteristic of the first component carrier and a signal characteristic of the second component carrier, and providing signal interference information to a serving base station if the determined interference level satisfies a condition. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315086 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF CONTROLLING STATE OF DEVICES OPERABLE TO SUPPORT CALLS BETWEEN ENDPOINTS - A method and system of controlling state for devices operable to support signaling or sessions between endpoints, such as the type used to support phone, video, messaging, and other calls. The state control may include transitioning the device between in-service and out-of-service states as a function of current, past or future operating demands on the devices. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315087 | MOBILE TERMINAL, MICRO BASE STATION, MACRO BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile terminal, a micro base station, a macro base station, a communication system and a communication method. The method includes receiving from a micro base station a designation of specific subframe and a designation of feedback mode; judging whether a current subframe is a specific subframe designated by the micro base station; and measuring and feeding back the channel condition of the current subframe in a joint transmission feedback mode when the current subframe is the specific subframe designated by the micro base station, and measuring and feeding back the channel condition of the current subframe in a feedback mode designated by the micro base station when the current subframe is not the specific subframe designated by the micro base station. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315088 | INTELLIGENT MOBILITY APPLICATION PROFILING TOOL - Analyzing mobile device applications within a wireless data network and other related aspects are presented herein. More particularly, described herein is a novel Intelligent Mobility Application Profiling Tool (iMAP) and/or other mechanisms, systems and methods for profiling and benchmarking applications associated with mobile devices in a wireless data network. Various systems and methods described herein expose cross-layer interaction associated with a network device in order to profile an application on the network device with respect to energy efficiency, performance, and functionality. As described herein, radio resource control (RRC) analysis can be performed to infer RRC states associated with a given application, identify tail time, etc. Further, analyzers are employed for various layers, including transmission control protocol (TCP) and/or hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP), as well as to analyze communication bursts associated with a given application. Analysis results are subsequently utilized to deliver application profiling results to a user. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315089 | ESTIMATION OF CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR USING ADDITIONAL REFERENCE SIGNALS - Methods, a user equipment and a radio network node relating to estimation of a channel quality indicator, CQI, are provided. A first reference signal is carried by a downlink channel of a radio communication system. The user equipment receives from the radio network node information about scheduling of a downlink transmission to the user equipment and information about a second reference signal being different from the first reference signal. Furthermore, the user equipment receives from the radio network node the downlink transmission. The downlink transmission comprises the first reference signal and the second reference signal. Next, the user equipment estimates the CQI based on the first reference signal and the second reference signal. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315090 | METHODS FOR CONTROLLING ELECTIONS IN A MULTICAST NETWORK - Methods for controlling a Designated Forwarder (DF) election in a multicast network are described herein. The multicast network includes a plurality of multicast network devices, including a first network device and a second network device. A Designated Forwarder is determined. It is determined whether to initiate a Designated Forwarder election based on a comparison of a metric measuring a distance to a Rendezvous Point Address from a first network device and a metric measuring the distance to the Rendezvous Point Address from the second network device. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315091 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REMOVING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE OF AN ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present application relates to a method for central node (CN) to remove inter-cell interference of an access point (AP) in a wireless access system according to the present invention, including: receiving feedback information at each time slot from a plurality of APs, the feedback information including channel measurement information between terminals in each AP and the coverage of each AP, or position information of each AP; obtaining a preference for each pattern, the pattern representing an ON or OFF operation of each AP at each time slot; determining a target time rate of each pattern on the basis of the obtained preference for each pattern; receiving an instantaneous transfer rate of terminals in the coverage of each AP for each pattern from the plurality of APs; and determining a pattern in order to minimize reference between each AP according to the received instantaneous transfer rate. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315092 | USER EQUIPMENT BATTERY SAVING IN A HETNET DEPLOYMENT WITH EICIC - Devices and methods are provided for reducing client node power consumption when monitoring first and second channels corresponding to first and second access nodes in a heterogeneous wireless-enabled communications environment. Enhanced Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (eICIC) operations are performed to mitigate interference between a first access node and a second access node. The client node monitors first and second channels corresponding to the first and second access nodes. The client node receives restricted measurement data transmitted on the first channel, which is then processed to schedule cessation of monitoring the first channel to reduce power consumption and thereby conserve battery resources. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315093 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR ADJUSTING UPLINK GRANT PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL OF UE - The disclosure provides a method and a base station for adjusting an uplink grant physical downlink control channel of a UE adaptively. The method includes: receiving a physical uplink shared channel transmitted on an uplink resource indicated by a current uplink grant physical downlink control channel from the UE; judging whether or not the UE has received the uplink grant physical downlink control channel successfully in accordance with the received physical uplink shared channel; and determining the number of control channel elements CCEs occupied by the uplink grant physical downlink control channel and/or a transmission power of the uplink grant physical downlink control channel in accordance with the judgment result. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315094 | RANDOM ACCESS TECHNIQUES FOR FIXED DEVICES IN MOBILE BROADBAND NETWORKS - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a fixed device performs a cell search to search for one or more cells on a network and determines a transmit power level to communicate with one of the cells of the network. The fixed device sets a frequency of updating the transmit power level for communication with a cell on the network, wherein the frequency of updating the transmit power level is reduced for the fixed device with respect to a mobile device. | 11-28-2013 |
20130322266 | NETWORK TRAFFIC MONITORING - A network traffic monitoring method includes generating packet information for packets destined for a target subnet. The method includes identifying network connections associated with an application running on a device based on socket activities performed by the application. The method further includes filtering out network traffic information between the application and the target subnet based on the identified network connections and the packet information. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322267 | RECONFIGURING MIMO COMMUNICATION LINKS - A plurality of communication links are established between a user device and a base station. The user device may determine if one or more criteria are satisfied and may reconfigure one or more of the plurality of communication links, based on the one or more criteria. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322268 | Long Term Evolution Network Billing Management - A device in a network may monitor a communications session (such as a traffic flow) and determine that the session has been affected by an adverse network condition such as equipment failure or heavy congestion. The effect of the network condition may be provided to a billing system that may proactively adjust charging for a customer associated with the traffic flow. Various data may be taken into account in determining the adjustment, including a service type, a subscriber identifier, an emergency identifier, and a traffic condition index. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322269 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL IN A TD-LTE SYSTEM - This invention describes method and apparatus for automatic gain control (AGC) for a TD-LTE system, taking into consideration the TD-LTE frame structure. In one embodiment, an AGC method comprises: adjusting RF gain for subframe j (where 0<=j<=9) in a radio frame according to an average peak signal power of subframe j in previous radio frames when a terminal is lack of information in downlink timing and in uplink/downlink configuration; computing a first average signal power in one or more downlink subframes as received from at least one base station when the terminal has information in downlink timing but is lack of information in uplink/downlink configuration; and computing a second average signal power in one or more downlink subframes as received from at least one base station when the terminal has information in downlink timing and in uplink/downlink configuration. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322270 | Techniques for Segregating Circuit-Switched Traffic from Packet-Switched Traffic in Radio Access Networks - A computer-based method for processing user data traffic in a RAN in which mobile user equipment can communicate with a RNC through a base station includes the following steps. A flow of data frames to/from mobile user equipment passing between the base station and the RNC are read, wherein one or more of the data frames contain control messages and one or more other of the data frames contain user data. The control messages contained in the data frames are analyzed for channel identification information that indicates whether the data frames that contain user data contain circuit-switched or packet-switched user data. The data frames that contain the circuit-switched user data and the data frames that contain the packet-switched user data are segregated at a transport network layer between the base station and the RNC based on the channel identification information. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322271 | SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING DATA CUT-THROUGH - A system transfers data. The system includes an ingress node transferring data at a determined bandwidth. The ingress node includes a buffer and operates based on a monitored node parameter. The system includes a controller in communication with the ingress node. The controller is configured to allocate, based on the monitored node parameter, an amount of the determined bandwidth for directly transferring data to bypass the buffer of the ingress node. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322272 | NETWORK MONITORING DEVICE - A zero traffic state that is a non-communication state derived from any fault is discriminated from a no-operation state derived from, power discontinuity, and a communication device that is in the zero traffic state is efficiently sensed in consideration of a zero traffic period that is normally observed in a certain installation place or use environment. A network monitoring device cyclically notifies a maintenance person of a communication device, for which a time difference between a final access time and a finally passed traffic generation time exceeds a threshold calculated by multiplying a previously observed maximum, value of the time difference between the final access time and the finally passed traffic generation time by a coefficient that is a safety factory as a device that is In a zero traffic suspected state. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322273 | MEASUREMENT OF NODES IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (CoMP) SYSTEMS - Technology for enabling radio resource management (RRM) measurements in coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission and reception is disclosed. One method comprises sending, from an evolved node B (eNB) to a user equipment (UE), an information element (IE) containing a list of measurement objects that define configurations of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) based RRM measurements. The eNB can analyze the CSI-RS based RRM measurements in a CoMP Resource Management (CRM) Set, wherein each CSI-RS based RRM measurement corresponds to a transmission point in a set of transmission points which may be used for downlink transmissions to the UE. The eNB can select a CoMP Measurement Set based on the CSI-RS based RRM measurements reported by the UE, comprising at least one of the set of transmission points for which fast channel state information (CSI) feedback will be reported to the eNB from the UE. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322274 | INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A CONGESTION STATE - An infrastructure equipment forming part of a mobile communications network. The mobile communications network communicates data to and/or from mobile communications devices. The infrastructure equipment receives an indication of one or more communications bearers provided by the mobile communications network on request to the mobile communications devices in accordance with a relative type of data packets communicated via the communications bearers for supporting communications sessions, the indications used to configure the communications bearers, to determine the number of bearers of each of the type of the communications bearers for plural pre-determined types provided to the mobile communications devices within the mobile communications network, and to determine a state of the mobile communications network in accordance with the number of each type of the communications bearers for each of the plurality of pre-determined types. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322275 | MONITORING AND ALLOCATION OF INTERFACE RESOURCES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and systems for centralizing transport and control, T&C, functions for management of a plurality of enhanced nodeBs, eNBS, and their associated cells are disclosed. According to one aspect, the invention provides a method that includes providing the T&C functions associated with each of the plurality of eNBs at at least one T&C pool entity. Mobility events associated with the plurality of the eNBs are coordinated between the at least one T&C pool entity using an interface. Available resources of each of a plurality of links of a shared network connecting the plurality of eNBs and the at least one T&C pool entity are determined. Control signaling and data packets between the plurality of eNBs and the at least one T&C pool entity are transmitted using a protocol across the shared network to facilitate communication between eNBs and user equipment. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322276 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) LINK ADAPTATION - Channel quality may be measured in a device-to-device (D2D) communication network. The D2D communication network may include one or more D2D wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs), wherein the D2D WTRUs may communicate using a D2D bandwidth. A D2D WTRU may receive a channel measurement resource configuration corresponding to a channel measurement resource. The D2D WTRU may further receive an RS on the channel measurement resource. The D2D WTRU may measure one or more channel state parameters from the channel measurement resource for a part of bandwidth overlapping with a D2D communication bandwidth, when the RS bandwidth is greater than the D2D communication bandwidth. The D2D WTRU may report the channel state parameters to a controlling entity. The controlling entity may configure a D2D frequency allocation between a transmitting device and a receiving device. The D2D frequency allocation may be based on the time averaged measurement. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322277 | MEASUREMENTS AND INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE LINKS - Disclosed herein are measurement and interference avoidance for direct device-to-device (D2D) links. A method may be implemented by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The method may include determining a sounding reference signal (SRS) to detect high interference and facilitate measurements on a link with another WTRU. The method may also include using the SRS on a direct link with another WTRU. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322278 | FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION OF MULTIPLE CELLS - A method and an apparatus for an interference measurement method of a terminal in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes measuring a signal component based on at least one Channel Status Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS) allocated by a base station, measuring an interference component based on at least one Interference Measurement Resource (IMR) allocated by a base station, receiving a feedback combination configuration of the signal component and the interference component, generating feedback information including at least one of at least one Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), at least one Rank Indicator (RI), and at least one Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), and transmitting the feedback information to the base station. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322279 | SENSING MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION AND REPORTING IN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM OPERATING OVER LICENSE EXEMPT BANDS - A method for sensing measurement gap scheduling includes allocating a new supplementary carrier in a license-exempt spectrum by a radio resource management (RRM) entity in an evolved Node B (eNB); configuring a local cognitive sensing entity in the eNB by the RRM entity; configuring a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for cognitive sensing through radio resource control (RRC) signaling, the RRC signaling being generated by the eNB; configuring a local cognitive sensing entity at the WTRU by a dynamic spectrum management (DSM) entity; and signaling a start and a duration of a measurement gap to an enhanced sensing component. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322280 | UPLINK CHANNEL SOUNDING AND CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION ESTIMATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - A system includes a base station configured to communicate with a plurality of mobile stations. The base station transmits downlink timing synchronization and establishes frequency synchronization with at least one of the plurality of mobile stations. The base station receives, from the mobile station, at least one of: coarse sounding reference signal (SRS), and fine SRS. The base processes at least one of the coarse SRS to enable tracking of the preferred uplink (UL) slice for uplink transmissions, and the fine SRS in order to resolve a short-term small-scale channel state information (CSI), estimate a CSI from at least one of the coarse SRS and fine SRS, and perform uplink scheduling and grant. The mobile station performs uplink scheduling request and uplink data communication. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322281 | Commissioning of Wireless Devices in Personal Area Networks - A device joining a wireless network performs a scan and acquire procedure to discover the optimal node in the desired network. The joining device scans all desired channels for a predetermined amount of time. During the scan, the joining device builds a table of discovered networks ranked and truncated according to proximity. Additionally, the joining device curates the list to ensure that only the optimal node from each network is listed. The joining device then attempts to join networks according to the table of discovered networks. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322282 | Method for Measuring Processing Delays of Voice-Over IP Devices - A system and method for recording analog signals exchanged between a telephone device and a VoIP device, capturing packets exchanged between the VoIP device and an IP network, determining analog time values corresponding to analog characteristics of the analog signals, determining digital time values corresponding to digital characteristics of the packets, determining a common reference time for the analog time values and digital time values and determining a processing delay based on the analog time values and the digital time values. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322283 | MIMO CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION ESTIMATION WITH COUPLED ITERATIVE TWO-STAGE RANKING - A plurality of wireless channels link a transmitter and a receiver, each channel corresponding to a different transmit-receive antenna pair. Channel state information is estimated for the plurality of wireless channels by grouping the plurality of channels into one or more groups, each group including the channels associated with two or more collocated transmit and/or receive antennas. A set of delay tap values is iteratively estimated in the time domain for each group of channels so that the channels included in the same group are associated with the same delay tap values. A frequency domain channel response of each of the channels included in the same group of channels is estimated based on the set of delay tap values estimated for the group. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322284 | DETERMINING A RECEIVING QUALITY IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A radio communication device including a receiver configured to receive radio signals, a measurement circuit configured to measure the receiving quality of received radio signals, and a controller configured to control the measurement circuit such that a first measurement is carried out using a first frequency bandwidth, thereby determining a first receiving quality, and if the determined first receiving quality fulfills a first receiving quality criterion, a second measurement is carried out using a second frequency bandwidth, wherein the second frequency bandwidth is larger than the first frequency bandwidth, thereby determining a second receiving quality. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322285 | Network Switching Device for Quantifying Available Service-Level Capacity of a Network For Projected Network Traffic - A network switching device ( | 12-05-2013 |
20130322286 | TROUBLESHOOTING WI-FI CONNECTIVITY BY MEASURING THE ROUND TRIP TIME OF PACKETS SENT WITH DIFFERENT MODULATION RATES - The application relates to a “wireless communication network including a station and an access point” which is in particular a Wi-Fi network according to the IEEE 802.11 standards. Internet service providers are searching for ways to get a better understanding of the end-user's wireless environment including link quality and performance. The proposed method calculates a performance value based on measured round trip times which are sent at different modulation rates. Based the change of performance in dependence of the modulation rate conclusions about the possible source of performance problems can be drawn, in particular it can be distinguished between (Bluetooth) interference and distance between station and access point being too large. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322287 | Packet Delay Optimization in the Uplink of a Multi-Hop Cooperative Relay-Enabled Wireless Network - A method for communication in a wireless network is provided. The method includes a relay node receiving a data packet and determining whether to transmit the packet without performing error checking. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322288 | METHOD OF DETERMINING A CHANNEL STATE IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION - In order to reduce the feedback overhead of channel state information in Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) transmission, the present invention provides a method of determining a channel state in the CoMP transmission, wherein the serving base station receives first channel state information with the serving base station and second channel state information with each of coordinated base stations, fed back by a user equipment; informing each coordinated base stations of the corresponding second channel state information; precoding a first reference signal according to the first channel state information, and sending the precoded first reference signal to the user equipment on the communication resource commonly used with the coordinated base station, wherein the first reference signal is superimposed with precoded second reference signals respectively sent by each of coordinated base stations; receiving third channel state information fed back by the user equipment according to the superimposed reference signal, and determining a channel state of the coordinated multipoint transmission corresponding to the user equipment, according to the first, second and third channel state information. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322289 | Reducing Interference Caused by an Atmospheric Duct in a Mobile Communication System - A base station ( | 12-05-2013 |
20130329575 | CHANNEL QUALITY REPORTING - In certain communication systems, such as TD-HSDPA communications, channel quality index (CQI) reporting is based on a predetermined configuration, such as a mobile device (UE) reporting a CQI for a most recently received data transmission. This configuration may lead to errors if a UE reports a CQI for a certain data transmission but the base station (node B) believes the CQI corresponds to a different data transmission, such as a later transmission the UE never received due to an error processing control channel information. Offered is an indicator to accompany CQI reports. The indicator indicates to the node B which communication resource corresponds to the CQI report. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329576 | NOVEL METHODS FOR EFFICIENT POWER MANAGEMENT IN 60GHZ DEVICES - A device and method for managing power in a wireless telecommunication system. A telecommunication device operates in a power saving mode during a sleep interval whenever possible to minimize power drain. The telecommunication device monitors various device, channel and network parameters and dynamically adjusts the duration of the sleep interval based on the monitored parameters in order to optimize power savings. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329577 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE CONTROL OF SWITCHES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method includes sending a virtual output queue (VOQ) length of a VOQ to an egress chip. The VOQ relates to a flow routed through an egress port associated with the egress chip. The method also includes receiving fair share information for the VOQ from the egress chip, and enforcing a control action on the incoming packets based on the fair share information. An ingress chip and the egress chip can be provided in a VOQ switch. The control action is a selected one of a group of actions, the group consisting of: (a) dropping packets, (b) pausing packets, and (c) marking packets. The method can further include receiving VOQ lengths of corresponding VOQs from respective ingress chips, where the VOQs relate to the flow. The method can also include calculating respective fair share information for each VOQ, and sending the fair share information to the respective ingress chips. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329578 | LARGE-SCALE PASSIVE NETWORK MONITORING USING MULTIPLE TIERS OF ORDINARY NETWORK SWITCHES - Passive monitoring of a large-scale network using multiple tiers of ordinary network switches, as opposed to purpose-built network monitoring hardware, is accomplished by initially providing network communications to an initial tier of monitoring switches, either from existing switches that copy frames and provide them to the monitoring switches, or from network taps to which the monitoring switches are connected. The initial tier of monitoring switches comprises flow tables that initially simply drop all frames provided to those switches and, subsequently, when specific network issues arise, they are modified to include a specification particular frame criteria whose frames are either forwarded to subsequent tiers of monitoring switches, or statistics regarding those frames are collected. Subsequent tiers of monitoring switches receive frames from the initial tier and direct them to one or more appropriate analysis computing devices. Ordinary network switches are selected based on their ability to provide low latency forwarding. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329579 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MEASURING FRAME LOSS IN MULTIPOINT NETWORKS - Systems and methods for measuring frame loss in multipoint networks are provided. In one embodiment, a method for calculating frame loss in a multipoint network is provided. The method comprises: synchronizing local PM frame count bin boundaries across a multipoint network; collecting a first sample of frame count data at a network manager from a first local PM frame count bin for each VLAN Endpoint on the multipoint network; and calculating a frame loss for the multipoint network by accounting for frame ingress and frame egress from the multipoint network based on the first sample of frame count data; wherein the first sample of frame count data is associated with a first period of time defined by the local PM frame count bin boundaries. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329580 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MEASURING FRAME LOSS IN MULTIPOINT NETWORKS - Systems and methods for measuring frame loss in multipoint networks are provided. In one embodiment, a method for calculating frame loss comprises: performing a first continuity check message exchange between a first and a plurality of other devices, the first exchange comprises the first device collecting a first set of frame count data from each of the first and other devices, the first set of frame count data associated with a first instance of time by a first sequence identifier; performing a second continuity check message exchange between the first and plurality of other devices, the second exchange comprises the first device collecting a second set of frame count data from the first other devices, the second set of frame count data associated with a second instance of time by a second sequence identifier; and calculating a frame loss measurement by accounting for frame Ingress and frame Egress. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329581 | METHOD FOR POSITIONING MOBILE DEVICE IN WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK - A method for positioning a mobile device in a wireless wide area network (WWAN) is provided. The method includes determining three measurement circles according to coordinates of three base stations and respectively calculating radiuses of the three measurement circles and distances between the three base stations. The method uses genetic algorithm to derive the best solution of a plurality of variables of an object function and estimates the position of the mobile device according to the best solution. Accordingly, non-line-of-sight (NLOS) errors are reduced, and more accurate positioning can be provided. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329582 | Mesh Node Mobility Across Static and Mobile Mesh Networks - Methods and systems for mobility of mobile nodes in mesh networks are taught wherein the mobile mesh nodes choose an attachment point to another mesh node based on predetermined criteria, such as the characteristics of the attachment point's path to a reference destination, and other factors local to the attachment point, such as load and available capacity. The mobile nodes forward packets on each other's behalf. Static and mobile nodes and the links between them are treated differently from each other in view of their respectively different properties. A special metric is used for paths that include mobile links in addition to the static mesh links and wired mesh links. Mobility is handled completely transparently to any client devices attached to the mesh nodes, where this attachment could be wireless or wired. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329583 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-RAT TRANSMISSION - A method and apparatus for mobility management, load management, sharing management and configuration update and setup in a mobile network having a first radio access technology node and a second radio access technology node, the first radio access technology node and the second radio access technology node communicating over a backhaul interface. In one aspect the method detects, at the first radio access technology node, that a handover for a user equipment to a new node is required; provides, from the first radio access technology node, handover information to the second radio access technology node over the backhaul interface; and performs the handover of the user equipment from the first radio access technology node to the new node. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329584 | FINDING LATENCY THROUGH A PHYSICAL NETWORK IN A VIRTUALIZED NETWORK - Techniques are described for determining latency in a physical network that includes a number of network devices over which packets travel. A virtual network controller receives a plurality of messages from a plurality of network devices in a network, each of the messages including a packet signature comprising a hash of an invariant portion of an original packet that uniquely identifies the original packet, an identifier of one of the plurality of network devices from which the respective message was received, and a timestamp indicating a time an original packet was processed by the network device from which the respective message was received. The virtual network controller determines a latency of a physical network path in the network based on analysis of contents of the identified messages having a common packet signature. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329585 | NETWORK ANALYSIS METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A network analysis method using an information processing device includes receiving packets from a wired network; extracting, from a set of the received packets, a delay packet that was received after at least a predetermined period of time had elapsed since an immediately preceding packet was received; and determining that a packet delay because of a control signal wirelessly sent from an access point coupled to the wired network has occurred, based on periodicity of a timing at which the delay packet was received. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329586 | IMPROVING RECEPTION BY A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for improving reception by a wireless communication device is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device using a first RF chain to support a connection to a network via a first frequency band. The method can further include the wireless communication device tuning a second RF chain, which is not being actively used for carrier aggregation, to a second frequency band. The method can additionally include the wireless communication device measuring, via the second RF chain, a signal characteristic of the second frequency band. The method can also include the wireless communication device adjusting a configuration of the first RF chain based at least in part on the measured signal characteristic. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329587 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio communication terminal including: a processor configured to communicate, when a reception quality of a radio signal of the base station is lower than a threshold value and when a first group identification information identifying a base station group to which the base station belongs is not received from the base station, to each of neighbor base stations sequentially in an intermittent reception period, to specify a specified neighbor base station of the neighbor base stations, the specified neighbor base station belonging to the base station group, based on whether a second group identification information is received from each of the neighbor base stations or not and based on the first group identification and the second group identification are same or not, to select the specified base station preferentially to which the terminal is to hand over, among the neighbor base stations. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329588 | BEHAVIOR-BASED NETWORK OPTIMIZATION THROUGH CELL CLUSTERING - The techniques and systems described herein are directed, in part, to optimizing network performance by clustering cell sites of the network based on performance patterns and then optimizing each cluster of cell sites, thereby optimizing performance of a network as a whole. The cell sites may be base stations, radio access networks, and/or other hardware that directly or indirectly exchanges communications with user devices such as mobile telecommunication devices (e.g., user handsets, user hardware, etc.). By optimizing the clusters of cell sites, a service provider (e.g., a telecommunications company, etc.) may improve network performance in less time and/or with less capital resources than attempting to optimize each cell site on an individual basis. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329589 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INTER-FREQUENCY AND/OR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENTS - Techniques for performing inter-frequency and/or inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurements are disclosed. A multi-receiver wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may receive downlink transmissions via a plurality of downlink carriers simultaneously. The WTRU may perform inter-frequency and/or inter-RAT measurements using an inactive receiver without measurement gaps if at least one receiver is inactive. If the WTRU receives a measurement order on a disabled carrier, the WTRU may perform measurements on the disabled carrier without measurement gaps using an inactive receiver while maintaining a status of the disabled carrier as disabled. The WTRU may perform the measurements autonomously if a trigger condition is met and at least one receiver is inactive. If all receivers are active, the WTRU may perform the measurements using measurement gaps, that may be configured on a downlink carrier, or alternatively, on an unpaired downlink carrier, or alternatively, on a subset of associated downlink uplink carrier pairs. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329590 | RECEIVED SIGNAL TO NOISE INDICATOR - A method and device may be used to produce a received interference value in wireless communications. The device may include one or more components to measure a received power of a channel and measure an average noise plus interference power of the channel. The device may include a processor configured to calculate a received signal to noise indicator (RSNI) value. The RSNI may be based on the measured received power and the measured average noise plus interference power. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329591 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR USER EQUIPMENT HANDOFF WITHIN AN IP-FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A system, method, and computer readable medium for provisioning communication services by an IP-based femtocell network is provided. Service of a user equipment may be transferred from one femtocell to another femtocell via a femtocell handoff procedure. Femtocell systems of the femtocell network perform link quality measurements and may distribute the link quality measurements to neighbor femtocells. A femtocell system may periodically evaluate the link quality with the user equipment. If an evaluation is made that the user equipment needs to be transferred to another site, the servicing femtocell site may evaluate the most recent link quality measurements received from neighboring femtocell sites and select a femtocell site for handoff. In the event that the femtocell network is deployed in an area serviced by a macrocellular network, handoff routines may provide preference for transferring the user equipment to a target femtocell system rather than a macrocell site. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329592 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING INTERFERENCE - A mobile communications system comprises a first group of one or more base stations which are arranged to communicate signals with mobile units via a wireless access interface by transmitting and/or receiving radio signals within a first frequency band; a second group of one or more base stations which are arranged to communicate signals with mobile units via a wireless access interface by transmitting and/or receiving radio signals within a second frequency band; and a controller. The controller is arranged in operation to determine an amount of interference in the first frequency band to radio signals for a first type of traffic where the interference is caused by radio signals for a second type of traffic in the second frequency band, wherein: the radio signals for the first type of traffic are to and/or from a first base station of the first group; and the radio signals for the second type of traffic are to and/or from to a second base station of the second group; and to, in response to the determined interference, generate instructions to influence fluence the second group in respect of the transmission of the radio signals for the second type of traffic in the second frequency band, wherein the instructions are generated based on at least a priority for the first type of traffic and a priority for the second type of traffic. In one example, the first group of one or more base stations may be providing communications services to human to human communications (H2H), whereas the second group of one or more base stations may be providing communications services supporting machine type communications (MTC), where H2H communications are prioritizes over machine type communications. The second group of one or more base stations is therefore instructed to take action to reduce the interference caused by the mobile unit. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329593 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING AND REPORTING CHANNEL MEASUREMENT INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention pertains to a method for efficiently determining the validity of terminal location information in a minimization of drive test (MDT) measurement report procedure in a 3GPP system. The method for reporting channel measurement information of a terminal in a wireless communication system according to the present invention comprises: a reception step of receiving setup information for wireless channel measurement from a base station; an acquisition step of acquiring wireless channel information, location information of the terminal, and time information when the location information is collected according to the setup information; a determination step of determining whether the location information of the terminal is valid; and a transmission step of generating and transmitting channel measurement information inc1uding the time information to the base station when valid. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329594 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND SYSTEMS FOR FLEXIBLE RANK ADAPTATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - In various embodiments, a first base station may communicate with a first user equipment (UE) over a wireless communication channel. The first base station may receive an interference indication from a second base station communicating with a second UE on the same wireless communication channel. In response to the interference indication, the first base station may transmit a request to the first UE for the first UE to send feedback information associated with the wireless communication channel to the first base station for one or more transmission ranks specified by the first base station. The first UE may determine the requested feedback information and transmit the determined feedback information to the first base station. Thereafter, the first base station may reduce a transmission rank of ongoing transmissions to the UE based on the interference indication and the determined feedback information. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329595 | VOIP QUALITY MEASUREMENT ENHANCEMENTS USING THE INTERNET CONTROL MESSAGE PROTOCOL - This invention relates to a method for enhancing the quality information of a VoIP session by deducting information from received ICMP messages, in addition to quality information already collected from media streams and/or signaling streams of the same VoIP session. ICMP messages passing on the network link are monitored and correlated with an existing and ongoing VoIP session, i.e. media stream, already monitored by a media plane monitoring unit. A data record for the media stream(s) is expanded with information from the ICMP messages, thus giving a better and more complete quality feedback of the media stream reception at the two communication endpoints. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329596 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio communication system includes a first radio base station that forms a first cell, second radio base stations that form second cells, and mobile stations that execute radio communication with radio base stations. The first radio base station includes a radio communication section, a resource specifying section that specifies, according to a parameter that affects the amount of communication of the first radio base station or the second radio base stations, the number and placement of first resources in which the radio communication section should execute radio communication and the number and placement of second sources in which the radio communication section should stop radio communication, and a communication control section that controls the radio communication section such that the radio communication section executes radio communication in the first resources specified by the resource specifying section, and such that the radio communication section stops radio communication in the second resources specified by the resource specifying section. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336130 | System and Method for Detecting Jamming in Wireless Networks - A method and apparatus for operating a security system. The method includes the steps of providing a plurality of wireless detectors within a security system, each of the plurality of wireless detectors exchanging packets with a control panel of the security system, at least one of the plurality of wireless detectors monitoring a wireless channel of a transmission radio frequency band for a periodically transmitted packet from another of the detectors, decoding the packet and forwarding the received packet to the control panel, the at least one wireless detector detecting radio frequency energy on the wireless channel and the at least one wireless detector transmitting a packet notifying the control panel of jamming upon failing to decode the periodically transmitted packet from the other wireless detector while continuing to detect radio frequency energy on the wireless channel in place of the periodically transmitted packet. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336131 | RTT BASED RANGING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method are disclosed for performing ranging operations ( | 12-19-2013 |
20130336132 | Dynamic Response Management Leveraging Dynamic Quality Of Service Allocation - For methods, system, and apparatuses for dynamic response management a network device may receive an application service identifier and assign a radio resource to a first device based on the application service identifier. There may be a partitioning of content into a plurality of segments. There also may be an assignment of a quality of service level to a segment of the plurality segments and an adjustment of the quality of service level based on sensors of a device and other inputs. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336133 | METHOD OF PROCESSING SIGNALS AND A SIGNAL PROCESSOR - The method includes receiving a signal in a multiple carrier mobile communication system, the signal including at least two reference symbols of different types, determining a first channel estimate at a symbol position of a first reference symbol of a first type, determining a second channel estimate at a symbol position of a second reference symbol of a second type, and determining a quantity being a function of a cross-correlation between the first and second channel estimate. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336134 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR OPEN FABRIC MANAGEMENT - A system for operating a plurality of information handling systems forming a network including a plurality of switches is provided. The switches include physical and virtual switches each having ports coupling information handling systems to one another. The system including a management unit configured to provide commands to the switches and to collect a status information for each of the switches; and an agent unit coupled to each of the switches, the agent configured to receive the commands from the management unit, provide the commands to the switch associated thereto, monitor status of the switch associated thereto, and provide the status information to the management unit. A method for operating a network and a computer program to perform the method for using a system as above is also provided. A network managing device configured to couple to a service provider in a network as above is also provided. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336135 | Selection of Precoding Vectors in Lean-Carrier Systems - In a system using spatial precoding, in the event that reliable channel state information is unavailable, a transmitting node artificially creates a randomization of the precoders applied to the transmitted signal. Different precoding vectors are applied to both transmitted data and demodulation reference signals for each of several groups of time-frequency resources, where the precoding vectors vary randomly or pseudo-randomly from each group of time-frequency resources to the next frequency-adjacent group or groups, or to the next time-adjacent group or groups, or both. In an LTE system in particular, this randomization of precoders can be applied at the resource-block level or, at the level of the Precoding Resource block Group (PRG), for example. Thus, the precoders applied to the transmitted signal vary from one PRG to the next, in a random or pseudo-random fashion. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336136 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK QUALITY ESTIMATION, CONNECTIVITY DETECTION, AND LOAD MANAGEMENT - Systems, methods, and devices related to estimating backhaul quality, detecting Internet connectivity, and managing server load are described herein. In some aspects, a wireless device is configured to estimate a quality of a communication link. The device includes network interface configured to receive data units. The device further includes a processor configured to monitor the received data units at the network interface. The processor is further configured to determine, for each data unit received via the network interface, whether the data unit originated from a local area network or a non-local network. The processor is further configured to compute a characteristic of the communication link based on data units originating from a non-local network. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336137 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SITUATION-AWARE IP-BASED COMMUNICATION INTERCEPTION AND INTELLIGENCE EXTRACTION - A system and method for monitoring Internet Protocol (IP) data traffic may include receiving IP data generated by a target device interacting on the Internet, determining at least one activity performed by the target device based on the IP data, wherein an activity describes an interaction on the Internet, and aggregating data describing the at least one activity into one or more chunks, each chunk corresponding to a portion of time and at least one activity performed by the targets. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336138 | LOCATION DETECTION WITHIN IDENTIFIABLE PRE-DEFINED GEOGRAPHIC AREAS - Disclosed are systems, apparatus, devices, methods, computer program products, and other implementations, including a method that includes receiving signals at a mobile device from one or more access points, computing one or more positioning quality parameters by analyzing the received signals, and determining based, at least in part, on the computed one or more positioning quality parameters whether the mobile device is inside at least one of one or more areas respectively associated with the one or more access points. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336139 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION IN A CO-OPERATIVE NETWORK - A communications method executed by a node of a telecommunications network, the method includes: a training step including determining a “transmission” filter as a function of a received training signal; and a data transmission step of transmitting data to a target node of the network while using the transmission filter as determined during the training step. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336140 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY SWITCHING A CHANNEL - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for dynamically switching a channel. The method in the embodiments of the present invention includes: detecting, on a current working channel, a signal strength of data sent by an interfering access point; determining whether the detected signal strength is greater than a switching threshold; detecting signal strengths of data sent by interfering access points in available channels, when the detected signal strength is greater than the switching threshold; and switching the current working channel to one of the available channels, where a signal strength of data sent by an interfering access point that is detected in the one of the available channels is at least lower than the switching threshold. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336141 | WIRELESS ADAPTIVE PACKET CONTROL MESSAGE APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Embodiments of wireless adaptive control message apparatus, systems, and methods are described generally herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336142 | Method and Apparatus for Reducing Intercell Interference - In one aspect, the present invention provides methods and apparatuses for detecting that a wireless communication device in a serving cell is experiencing excessive interference variance, detecting a transmission pattern of interfering transmissions giving rise to such variance, and correspondingly adjusting scheduling of the device as a function of the detected transmission pattern, to at least partly avoid the interfering transmissions. An advantageous feature of such operation is that the determination of excessive interference variance and the determination of the transmission pattern associated with that varying interference can be done by a network node, e.g., the device's serving base station, or by the device, without requiring backhaul signaling or other inter-node cooperation in the network. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336143 | I-Q MISMATCH CALIBRATION AND METHOD - Techniques are provided for reducing mismatch between the in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) channels of a communications transmitter or receiver. In an exemplary embodiment, separate voltages are applied to bias the gates or bulks of the transistors in a mixer of the I channel versus a mixer of the Q channel. In another exemplary embodiment, separate voltages are applied to bias the common-mode reference voltage of a transimpedance amplifier associated with each channel. Techniques are further provided for deriving bias voltages to minimize a measured residual sideband in a received or transmitted signal, or to optimize other parameters of the received or transmitted signal. Techniques for generating separate bias voltages using a bidirectional and unidirectional current digital-to-analog converter (DAC) are also disclosed. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336144 | RECEIVER AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING A PLURALITY OF ESTIMATED TRANSFER FUNCTIONS CORRESPONDING TO WIRELESS CHANNELS IN A MULTIPLE-INPUT SYSTEM - In one embodiment, a receiver is provided for use in a multiple-input system that includes a receiving antenna receiving a time-domain signal corresponding to a plurality of signals transmitted from a plurality of transmitting antennas. The receiver includes: (a) a transform unit adapted to transform the time-domain signal into a frequency-domain signal; (b) a channel estimation unit adapted to estimate, based on the frequency-domain signal and a frequency-domain pilot signal, a combined transfer function corresponding to a plurality of transfer functions of respective channels between the plurality of transmitting antennas and the receiving antenna; and (c) a channel separation unit including a plurality of frequency-domain convolution units that separate the combined transfer function into a plurality of estimated channel transfer functions. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336145 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A PLURALITY OF PHYSICAL LAYERS FOR NETWORK CONNECTION - Methods and systems for a plurality of physical layers for network connection may include coupling a MAC to one of a plurality of PHYs. The coupling to a specific PHY may be based on auto-detection of network activity, or network devices, via the PHYs. Also, one of the PHYs may be coupled to the MAC as a power-up default. The PHYs may be coupled to a same network, by, for example, cables. A first cable to a first PHY may couple it to a first network switch and a second cable to a second PHY may couple it to a second network switch. The first network switch may be rated to handle, for example, a greater data rate than the second network switch. The first cable may not be able to be used as a cable for the second PHY, and vice versa. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336146 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AVAILABILITY METRICS FOR MEASUREMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF ETHERNET SERVICES - Maintenance entities may be defined between customer and provider flow points to allow performance management to take place on an Ethernet network. The maintenance entities may be defined for access link, intra-domain, and inter-domain, and may be defined on a link or service basis. Performance parameters, including availability metrics, may be collected for the maintenance entities. The provision of such availability metrics in an Ethernet based solution to facilitate consistency of service management and operations for carriers transitioning to the Ethernet solution. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336147 | Multi-User MIMO Systems and Methods - A method and system are provided for scheduling data transmission in a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) system. The MIMO system may comprise at least one MIMO transmitter and at least one MIMO receiver. Feedback from one or more receivers may be used by a transmitter to improve quality, capacity, and scheduling in MIMO communication systems. The method may include generating or receiving information pertaining to a MIMO channel metric and information pertaining to a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) in respect of a transmitted signal; and sending a next transmission to a receiver using a MIMO mode selected in accordance with the information pertaining to the MIMO channel metric, and an adaptive coding and modulation selected in accordance with the information pertaining to the CQI. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336148 | USER EQUIPMENT AND MEASUREMENT METHOD - A user equipment | 12-19-2013 |
20130336149 | USER EQUIPMENT AND MEASUREMENT METHOD - A user equipment ( | 12-19-2013 |
20130336150 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The present invention makes it possible to transmit and receive CSI-RSs adequately even when the number of CSI-RSs increase following the increase of antennas. The present invention provides a base station apparatus ( | 12-19-2013 |
20130336151 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile terminal selects a radio base station that is the access point for the mobile terminal in accordance with received-radiowave characteristic values for respective radio base stations. The multiple radio base stations include a macrobase station and multiple picobase stations. Each picobase station includes a load measurement unit adapted for measuring or calculating the communication load index of the picobase station itself; an adjustment-value setting unit adapted for setting an adjustment value that is used by the mobile terminal to change the received-radiowave characteristic value of the picobase station itself, depending on the communication load index; and an adjustment-value signaling unit adapted for signaling the adjustment value set by the adjustment-value setting unit to the mobile terminal. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336152 | STRUCTURED CODEBOOK FOR UNIFORM CIRCULAR ARRAY (UCA) - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe method, apparatus, and system configurations that implement or otherwise use a codebook designed for antennas configured in a circular array. A method includes receiving, by user equipment (UE) from an enhanced node B (eNB) station of a wireless communication network, a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS) for the UE to perform channel measurements of multiple antennas of the eNB station, wherein the multiple antennas are configured in one or more circular arrays, performing, by the UE, channel measurements of the multiple antennas of the eNB station using the received CSI-RS, and determining, by the UE, a code word based on the channel measurements, the code word being stored in a codebook designed for a circular antenna array. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336153 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING TERMINAL MEASUREMENT AND INTER-OPERATING BETWEEN SYSTEMS - Disclosed are a method and a device for reporting terminal measurement and for inter-system operation. The method comprises: receiving measurement configuration information transmitted by a source system access device; measuring cells on at least two frequencies within a target system on the basis of the measurement configuration information; on the basis of the measurement configuration information, and when a measurement report is triggered, reporting to the source system access device a measurement result acquired from measuring the cells on at least two frequencies within the target system, and on the basis of the measurement result, the source system access device confirming a main cell and an auxiliary cell for switching for the target system. The present invention assists a network in multicarrier handover between systems, and allows for reduced reporting latency, increased data transmission speed for a terminal switching PS domains between different systems, and enhanced user experience. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336154 | Sharing Radio Resources Between Access Nodes with Different Access Restrictions - Determining at a communication device served by a first access node whether transmissions from said first access node to said communication device are at at least a predetermined level of risk of interference by transmissions from one or more second access nodes inaccessible to said communication device; and, if so, transmitting an indication of said determination towards said first access node. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336155 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE AGGREGATE INTERFERENCE IN COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORKS - A method for controlling the aggregate interference of a secondary system ( | 12-19-2013 |
20130336156 | Operating A Wireless System in an Unlicensed Band - A network access node identifies a component carrier within an unlicensed radio spectrum, determines whether or not to configure the component carrier for use as a secondary component carrier, and based on the determining configures the component carrier for use as a secondary component carrier companion to a primary component carrier within a licensed radio spectrum, In various non-limiting embodiments the network node senses the component carrier within the unlicensed radio spectrum, and as more data is needed to make the determination employs a mobile device to also sense and further to measure the component carrier within the unlicensed radio spectrum. Specific procedures are detailed for both the network node and the mobile device. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336157 | PILOT SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT - A base station and a method therein are provided for supporting pilot channel selection for a mobile station. A base station has disposal of at least two pilot channels in its cell, and determines pilot channel(s) out of the pilot channels suitable to use for the mobile station. If the determined pilot channel(s) is not currently being used by the mobile station, then the base station starts to transmit the determined pilot channel(s) signals to the mobile station and receives a confirmation from the mobile station confirming their use. If the mobile station was using another pilot channel of the pilot channels than the determined pilot channel(s) and if no other mobile station is using the other pilot channel, then the base station terminates transmission of the other pilot channel. | 12-19-2013 |
20130343207 | DYNAMIC LATENCY ANALYSIS SYSTEM - An automated method for analyzing a plurality of network messages received by a network testing device is disclosed. The method may comprise, during a current window of time, receiving from a target network device a network message associated with an original network message determining a latency value for the received network message comparing the determined latency value with the threshold latency value; and incrementing either the first counter or the second counter based on the comparison of the determined latency value with a threshold latency value. The method may further comprise, at the end of the current window of time, storing the first and second counter values resulting from the analysis of the plurality of original network messages. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343208 | APPARATUS AND ASSOCIATED METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION BANDWIDTH IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and an associated method selects rates at which received signals are sampled in a multi-user communication system. The signals are sampled at initial sampling rates during a first period. An estimate is made of the number of received signals, and selection is made of an updated sampling rate, based in part upon the estimate. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343209 | Measurement of Reference Signals with Reduced Interference - A telecommunications system is disclosed comprising a wireless switching center and plurality of base stations that are configured to transmit positioning reference signals. The base stations transmit the positioning reference signals in positioning subframe time intervals. Meanwhile, the base stations also transmit cell-specific reference signals continuously, including during the positioning subframe time intervals. In order to ensure that the wireless terminal measures those cell-specific reference signals during periods of lower interference, the base station imposes a measurement restriction on the wireless terminal, in regard to when it may measure a signal. As a result of utilizing the measurement restriction in this way, in combination with the improved interference characteristics of the positioning reference signals themselves, the ability of the wireless terminal to detect the cell-specific reference signals of more distant cells is improved. The improved signal measurements are then made available to functionalities such as location estimation. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343210 | SYSTEM FOR ALLOCATING CHANNELS IN A MULTI-RADIO WIRELESS LAN ARRAY - A channel allocation system for allocating channels in a frequency band to a plurality of radios in close proximity so as to minimize co-channel interference. One method for allocating channels involves initially tuning each of the plurality of radios to the same one of the plurality of channels. All of the radios then receive signals from whatever sources and a signal score is determined for each radio. The radios are then tuned to another one of the plurality of channels. The steps of receiving a signal and determining a signal score for each radio are repeated for each of the remaining channels until all channels have been used. The signal scores are then tested against a table of mapping schemes to determine maximum isolation. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343211 | Beam-Change Indication for Channel Estimation Improvement in Wireless Networks - A method of channel estimation enhancement is provided. In a wireless communications system, a transmitting device transmits a long preamble frame comprising a first training field, a signal field, and a second training field. The signal field has a beam-change indicator bit indicates whether there is beam change between the first training field and the second training field. A receiving device receives the long preamble frame, performs a first channel estimation based on the first training field, and performs a second channel estimation based on the second training field. If the beam-change indicator bit indicates negative beam change, then the receiving device performs channel estimation enhancement by combining the first channel estimation and the second channel estimation. As a result, channel estimation performance is improved. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343212 | METHOD FOR SELF ORGANIZING NETWORK OPERATION - The present invention relates to wireless cellular telecommunication networks and, in particular, to control and management of self organizing wireless cellular telecommunication network. A method for network planning and frequency optimization in LTE networks by determining the optimal base station configuration parameters, comprises a base station initialization, an initial base station configuration, an iterative measurement procedure, an optimization process, a verification of operation, and a periodical maintenance procedure. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343213 | Methods and Computer Program Products for Correlation Analysis of Network Traffic in a Network Device - Provided are methods and computer program products for monitoring the contents of network traffic in a network device and performing correlation analysis of collected performance metrics to help identify reasons for network performance issues. Methods for correlation analysis include selecting scope and network metric types to include in the correlation analysis to generate an educated candidate set for correlation analysis. The correlation analysis methods result in a hypothesis set that assist the operator in identifying transactions and infrastructure problems resulting in network performance degradation. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343214 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Appropriate communication is performed even before a CQI report is acquired. A base station device | 12-26-2013 |
20130343215 | Systems and Methods for Improving Channel Quality Indication Feedback Accuracy In Wireless Communication - Systems and methods for channel quality indicator (CQI) feedback may be disclosed. At a current transmission time interval, precoder and/or modulation information that may be used at or associated with a future transmission time interval may be determined. As such, at a current transmission time interval, precoder and/or modulation information that may be used to select a modulation or coding scheme (MCS) and/or schedule transmission at a future transmission time interval may be predicted in the current transmission time interval. The precoder and/or modulation information may be broadcast and received such that the information may be used to estimate a channel quality indicator (CQI) at the current transmission time interval. The estimated CQI may be used to select a modulation and coding scheme (MCS), schedule transmissions, and the like. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343216 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE - There is disclosed method for reporting channel state so as to report channel state based upon CSI-RS. The method includes: a UE detecting configuration information of Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS), determining according to detection result the number of ports required to report channel state based upon CSI-RS, the UE determining CSI-RS based PMI feedback scheme to be adopted in preset corresponding relationship between the number of ports and feedback scheme upon determining that the eNB is to map data of Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) onto P (number) CSI-RS ports for transmission in a codebook-based precoding scheme, wherein the codebook-based precoding scheme is a scheme as represented in the formula of | 12-26-2013 |
20130343217 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR CONFIRMING UPLINK-DOWNLINK CONFIGURATION - Provided are a method, a system, and a device for confirming an uplink-downlink configuration, for use in confirming via interference detection whether or not a cell is capable of conducting independently the uplink-downlink configuration. The method comprises: a network side device confirming the value of an interference parameter of a target cell ( | 12-26-2013 |
20130343218 | Method and Apparatus for Determining Transmission Power - A technique, including in a communication system involving a plurality of access nodes cooperatively detecting a transmission from a communication device, determining at said communication device a transmission power parameter relating to said communication device at least partly on the basis of a plurality of pathloss values including a first pathloss value for a first set of access nodes of said plurality of access nodes transmitting a first reference signal at substantially the same transmission power and a second pathloss value for one or more second access nodes of said plurality of access nodes transmitting a second reference signal at substantially the same transmission power. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343219 | Method for Determining White Space Interference Margin - The disclosure relates to a network node of a wireless network, and to a related method for determining a margin of an interference level. The network node controls at least one white space device, and the interference level is associated with a critical position and a channel available for secondary usage by the at least one white space device. The method comprises the following steps: (a) initializing ( | 12-26-2013 |
20130343220 | METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION AND TRANSCEIVING DEVICE - The present invention relates to a method, in which a terminal transmits channel state information in a multi-node system, which includes the steps of: receiving information about cooperative transmission candidate nodes from a network; calculating first channel state information about the cooperative transmission candidate nodes; calculating second channel state information by assuming that the nodes included in the interference candidate modes are interference nodes among the cooperative transmission candidate nodes; and transmitting the calculated first and second channel state information to the network. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343221 | WI-FI SENSOR - Disclosed is a combined spectrum and channel analyzer with output in the form of various graphical displays. The graphical displays can be configured to display frequency, amplitude, time and density via a spectral view, a topographic view, or a planar view, or combinations of those views. Channel activities, parameters, overlap and interaction are shown in the displays. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343222 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING USER QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE QOE - The present invention discloses a method for measuring user quality of experience QoE, where the method includes the following steps: receiving event information sent by a receiving end, where the event information includes condition information for determining a cause for shortage of valid media data in a buffer of the receiving end; determining, according to the condition information, whether the shortage of the valid media data in the buffer of the receiving end is caused by a service system or caused by a user's action; and measuring QoE decrease degrees according to different causes for the shortage of the valid media data in the buffer, respectively. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343223 | PRIORITIZING RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES FOR MEASUREMENT - Each entry in a prioritized measurement list defines a unique combination of frequency layer and radio access technology (RAT) for cells. Based on signal strength and/or signal quality of the serving cell, a set of entries for measuring is selected from a neighbor list according to the prioritized measurement list and according to a selection rule. The selection rule provides: for the case the at least signal strength or quality of the serving cell is higher than a respective strength/quality threshold, the selected set is a first set; and for the case the at least signal strength or quality of the serving cell is lower than a respective strength/quality threshold, the selected set is a different second set of the prioritized measurement list that excludes all frequency layers of the prioritized measurement list belonging to the RAT having a highest (or alternatively a lowest) priority. | 12-26-2013 |
20140003254 | DYNAMIC NETWORK SELECTION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003255 | IDENTIFYING THE LOGICAL LOCATION OF A NETWORK DEVICE | 01-02-2014 |
20140003256 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING DISCOUNTS BASED ON TELEPHONY ACTIVITY | 01-02-2014 |
20140003257 | POWER AWARENESS MEASUREMENT IN TIME DIVISION SYNCHRONOUS CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003258 | MULTI-CARRIER TRANSMISSION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003259 | REDUCED USER EQUIPMENT MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY | 01-02-2014 |
20140003260 | Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) Recovery based on CQI Offset | 01-02-2014 |
20140003261 | Determining Network Availability Based on Geographical Location | 01-02-2014 |
20140003262 | SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL (SRS) MECHANISM FOR INTRACELL DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) COMMUNICATION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003263 | MEASUREMENT-BASED NETWORK SELECTION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003264 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING PAIR OF TARGET RECEIVER AND TARGET TRANSMITTER DISTRIBUTEDLY AND CONCENTRATEDLY USING COOPERATION HEADER IN A MULTI-HOP NETWORK PERFORMING INTERFERENCE NEUTRALIZATION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003265 | DATA RECEPTION DEVICE AND CORRESPONDING RECEPTION METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM | 01-02-2014 |
20140003266 | CALCULATING AND REPORTING CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003267 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REPORTING FOR PARTIALLY CANCELLED INTERFERENCE | 01-02-2014 |
20140003268 | System and Method for Grouping and Selecting Transmission Points | 01-02-2014 |
20140003269 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REPORTING FOR COMPONENT CARRIERS FOR WHICH NO CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION WAS CALCULATED | 01-02-2014 |
20140003270 | SUPPORT FOR ASYNCHRONOUS TIME DIVISION DUPLEXING IN ADJACENT CELLS OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
20140003271 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 01-02-2014 |
20140003272 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD | 01-02-2014 |
20140003273 | Limiting Interference in a Heterogeneous Wireless Communication System | 01-02-2014 |
20140003274 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE ALIGNMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
20140003275 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 01-02-2014 |
20140003276 | METHOD FOR MEASURING TRANSMISSION ERROR INFORMATION AND NETWORK DEVICE | 01-02-2014 |
20140003277 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MONITORING QUALITY METRICS ASSOCIATED WITH A WIRELESS NETWORK | 01-02-2014 |
20140003278 | ENERGY SAVING MODE WITH MAINTAINED NUMBER OF ADVERTISED TRANSMIT ANTENNAS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003279 | UPLINK TIMING RECOVERY | 01-02-2014 |
20140010096 | PORT MIRRORING IN DISTRIBUTED SWITCHING SYSTEMS - Port mirroring in a clustered network may be performed between a local switch and a remote switch. A port in the remote switch may be designated a mirrored port where data traffic passing there through can be copied and sent to a mirror-to-port on the local switch. In a virtual local area network (VLAN) environment, data frames of the copied traffic may include a VLAN header identifying the local switch so that routing of the data frames through the network may direct the data frames for monitoring at the local switch. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010097 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device including: a plurality of antennas configured to perform a plurality of wireless communication protocols simultaneously, and a processor configured to obtain each of a plurality of power consumptions for each of the plurality of the wireless communication protocols, to obtain each of a plurality of communication throughput for each of the plurality of the wireless communication protocols, to calculate an aggregated communication efficiency of the wireless communication using the plurality of wireless communication protocols simultaneously based on the plurality of the power consumptions and the plurality of the communication throughput, and to control the plurality of the antennas, when the aggregated communication efficiency exceeds a given value, as to perform the plurality of wireless communication protocols simultaneously, and, when the aggregated communication efficiency is equal to or less than the given value, as to stop one of the plurality of wireless communication protocols. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010102 | PACKET IDENTIFICATION FOR POWER SAVING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A network coordinator can assign an association identifier (AID) and/or a group identifier (GID) to identify a client station to which a packet is to be transmitted and to enable the client station to determine whether to receive an incoming packet. The network coordinator can determine a base AID that is representative of the network coordinator and can assign at least one AID to client stations to minimize the probability of client stations associated with proximate network coordinators being assigned the same AIDs. The network coordinator can also assign at least one GID to a group of client stations to minimize the probability of groups of client stations associated with the proximate network coordinators being assigned the same GID. The client station can analyze indications of a received AID and/or received GID to determine whether to receive the packet or whether to switch to an inactive power state. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010103 | RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) SAMPLING APPARATUS WITH ARRAYS OF TIME INTERLEAVED SAMPLERS AND SCENARIO BASED DYNAMIC RESOURCE ALLOCATION - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is described. The WTRU includes a front-end unit (FEU), a signal processing unit (SPU), and a resource management unit (RMU). The FEU receives a radio frequency (RF) signal, generates time-interleaved samples, an includes: a first array of first time-interleaved samplers, a second array of second time-interleaved samplers, and a third array of third time-interleaved samplers. The SPU receives and combines the plurality of time-interleaved samples and generates a signal quality measurement and in-phase and quadrature-phase (IQ) complex samples. The RMU receives the signal quality measurement and allocates FEU resources in conjunction with a front-end unit controller (FEUC) based on the signal quality measurement. The FEUC generates control signals based on the received signal quality measurement from the RMU. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016483 | Wireless multi-channel electronic signal measurement and generation device. - A wireless electronic signal measurement and generation device is presented. The device enables a host computing system, such as a smart-phone or PDA having standard wireless networking capability, to wirelessly connect to a multitude of wired electronic systems for test and measurement, such as an electronic thermometer or motor. The electronic systems under test are connected to the device by wire or probe. The device wirelessly connects to a host computing system by standard wireless network protocol, such as Bluetooth or IEEE802.11 Wi-Fi. The device supports direct unfiltered relay of measured analog data, detected digital data, and generated analog or digital signals between the host computer and connected electronic systems under test bi-directionally. The device can be embodied as a single module including a housing, wire connection ports, and a wireless connectivity module. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016484 | LARGE-SCALE PEER-TO-PEER DISCOVERY MECHANISM FOR FREQUENCY ALLOCATION - Method for collecting information from other radio transmitters and/or receivers for the purpose of coordinating and controlling the interference between transmitters and receivers. The method comprises discovering other radio transmitters and receivers in a network. Peer-to-peer communication is used over the Internet when determining relevant neighboring nodes for own communication and performing resource management for the set of radio transmitters and receivers. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016485 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS AND POSITIONING IN A NETWORK BASED WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM - A network based positioning (NBP) system that improves the accuracy of wireless positioning systems by concurrently performing RTT ranging operations and associated TDOA operations to generate a number of difference measurement values from which the position of a station device (STA) can be determined using, for example, multilateration techniques. Because the RTT values and their corresponding TDOA values both include the turn-around time (TAT) of the STA, subtracting TDOA values from their corresponding RTT values generates difference measurement values that do not include such TAT values of the STA. In this manner, the STA position can be determined without estimating the STA's TAT. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016486 | Fabric Cell Packing in a Switch Device - A method and system can insert multiple packets into a fabric cell. The method or system may be implemented as part of a line card on a switch device. The line card may obtain multiple packets with common packing characteristics, such as destination device, destination port, or priority. The line card may then determine if the multiple packets meet insertion criteria, such as whether the multiple packets together can fit into a fabric cell supported by a switching fabric in the switch device. When the insertion criteria is satisfied, the line card may insert data from the multiple packets into a fabric cell prior to switching the fabric cell through the switching fabric. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016487 | TEST SYSTEM TO ESTIMATE THE UPLINK OR DOWNLINK QUALITY OF MULTIPLE USER DEVICES USING A MEAN OPINION SCORE (MOS) - A test system is provided to test both voice and video quality of the connection for a large number of mobile phones, tablets, laptops or other user transmit/receive devices from a central location. The quality can be expressed as a Mean Opinion Score (MOS) and the uplink and downlink connection quality can be separately estimated. The system allows the use of media fragments that are characteristic of an end user and allows video data to be measured at the time and location that the user typically makes calls. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016488 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR POWER SAVING IN BROADCASTING CARRIER INFORMATION - The described aspects include methods and apparatus for activating a transmitter to communicate in a wireless network. A small cell can determine to activate the transmitter to serve user equipment (UE) in a wireless network. The small cell can then broadcast a portion of a set of broadcast signals in a radio frame and broadcast a remaining portion of the set of broadcast signals along with the portion of the set of broadcast signals in a subsequent radio frame. By refraining from immediately broadcasting all broadcast signals, the small cell can mitigate interference to other small cells. In addition, a UE can determine whether to generate random access channel (RACH) sequences for proximity determination or uplink timing synchronization based on parameters received in a RACH order. Moreover, a small cell with an active transmitter can decode discovery signals from a device to facilitate handover determination. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016489 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT WITH A WIDEBAND RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATOR - It is an objective of the present invention to provide a circuit with a wideband received signal strength indicator, used for multiple systems. By using the switches and the analog-to-digital converter and the demodulator, the circuit of the present invention has the advantages of auto gain control, circuit size reduction and power-saving. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016490 | MISSED RANK REPORT IN DUAL NETWORK RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - A method for handling a missed rank report during a tune-away period is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device tuning away from a first network to a second network for a tune-away period; returning to the first network from the tune-away period; determining that a scheduled rank report was missed during the tune-away period; generating a Channel State Indicator (CSI) report based on a previously defined Rank Indicator (RI) value known to the first network in response to missing the scheduled rank report; and sending the CSI report to the first network. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016491 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING SIGNAL QUALITY IN OVERLAPPING MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST SINGLE FREQUENCY NETWORK (MBSFN) AREAS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods and apparatus for reporting signal quality in overlapping Multimedia Broadcast Single Frequency Networks (MBSFN) areas. A UE may determine a signal quality estimate for each of two or more overlapping MBSFN areas based on Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) information and Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) information for the MBSFN area. The UE may then determine a combined signal quality based on the signal quality estimates of the MBSFN areas. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016492 | "METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING SYSTEM SIGNAL" - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for measuring a signal. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a signal measuring method may comprise the steps of: determining whether or not a current subframe corresponds to a measurement period; measuring a serving cell signal when the current subframe corresponds to the measurement period; determining whether a current measurement mode is a normal scan mode or a short scan mode in which a serving cell signal is more frequently measured than in the normal scan mode; determining whether or not the measured serving cell signal is less than a preset low signal threshold value when the current measurement mode is the normal scan mode; and changing the current measurement mode to the short scan mode when the measured serving cell signal is less than the low signal threshold value. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a system signal measuring method and apparatus which can quickly reflect the surrounding environment while efficiently using power is provided. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016493 | Method for Queuing Data Packets and Node Therefore - A method for queuing data packets is described. Upon receipt of a data packet, e.g., at an egress buffer of a node, a position within an output queue at which to place the data packet is determined. The queue position for the data packet can be determined based on various criteria, e.g., the type of the data packet and a time associated with its subsequent transmission, and timing aspects associated with the data packets which are already stored in the queue. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016494 | Secondary Spectrum Use - A method including: configuring a user device group for monitoring resource usage in a specified area and allocate user-device group-specific random access channel resources for informing on the resource usage; conveying a monitoring request to at least one user device based on the user device group configuration; obtaining monitoring results from at least one of the user devices in the user device group by using the group-specifically allocated random access channel resources, and processing the monitoring results for determining resource usage status the specified area. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016495 | LINK PREDICTION BASED RE-BEAMFORMING TRIGGERING ALGORITHM FOR 60 GHZ COMMUNICATION LINKS - A system and method are provided to trigger re-beamforming based on an algorithm that assesses various link characteristics. The algorithm is based on the ability of a 60 GHz receiving device to track and feedback a Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) to a 60 GHz data packet transmitter. By automatically analyzing RSSI values across a range of data packets, including consecutive data packets, a link degradation trend is predicted. When link degradation crosses, or is predicted to cross, a predetermined threshold, re-beamforming is triggered by the algorithm. Variables in the algorithm and the predetermined thresholds used by the algorithm can be automatically or manually modified to maintain a balance between appropriately triggering the re-beamforming when the conditions arise without unnecessarily triggering the re-beamforming thereby causing unneeded interruptions in regular data flow. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016496 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION - A method and a device for reporting channel quality information are provided by the present invention, the method comprising that: measuring, by a user equipment (UE), Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS) according to the configuration information of the CSI-RS, to acquire a downlink channel transport matrix ( | 01-16-2014 |
20140016497 | CSI-RS BASED CHANNEL ESTIMATING METHOD IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a user equipment to perform an estimation operation in a wireless communication system. In more detail, the method includes: receiving configuration information of CSI-RSs (channel status information-reference signals) defined by a plurality of antenna ports from a base station; combining CSI-RSs defined by specific antenna ports among the plurality of antenna ports; and performing the measurement based on the combined CSI-RSs. Here, performing the measurement comprises measuring at least one of a RSRP (reference signal received power), a RSRQ (reference signal received quality) and a pathloss based on the combined CSI-RSs. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016498 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A mobile communications device having an LTE radio technology and at least one other technology (for example, Bluetooth or Wi-Fi) determines whether transmissions using the other radio technology causes, or is likely to cause interference in reception of LTE signals. If such interference exists or is likely, then a signal indicating interference is sent to the LTE base station, which can take action to try to mitigate or prevent such interference. The mobile communications device can have a timer so that the interference indicating signal is only sent periodically, either at regular intervals, or whenever the interference is determined to exist after the timer period has expired. In some cases, a signal indicating that the interference level has reduced can be sent, again either at regular intervals, to whenever the interference level changes. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016499 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO COORDINATE TRANSMISSIONS IN DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS SYSTEMS VIA USER CLUSTERING - Systems and methods are described for coordinating transmissions in distributed wireless systems via user clustering. For example, a method according to one embodiment of the invention comprises: measuring link quality between a target user and a plurality of distributed-input distributed-output (DIDO) distributed antennas of base transceiver stations (BTSs); using the link quality measurements to define a user cluster; measuring channel state information (CSI) between each user and each DIDO antenna within a defined user cluster; and precoding data transmissions between each DIDO antenna and each user within the user cluster based on the measured CSI. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016500 | PACKET TIMING MEASUREMENT - A method and apparatus for performing packet time measurements. In one embodiment, the method comprises transmitting a packet in the network from a sender to a receiver through a plurality of devices; creating a plurality of packets by copying the packet at each of the plurality of devices as the packet is being transmitted through the plurality of devices, including adding a time stamp to each packet in the plurality of packets, wherein time stamps of plurality of packets are generated with data from time stamp engines synchronized to a global clock; sending the plurality of packets with their time stamps to a tool; and performing analysis on the plurality of packets using the tool. | 01-16-2014 |
20140022917 | HOME NETWORK OF CONNECTED CONSUMER DEVICES - A method of building a room list in a structure having at least two rooms includes forming a mesh network in the structure with at least two nodes, each node having a room-limited communication module, analyzing signals from the room-limited communication modules between nodes, segmenting the nodes into rooms based upon the signals, and associating each node of the plurality of nodes with one of the rooms. A method of making a room list includes providing at least two nodes, measuring signals between nodes, analyzing the signals, and associating a grouping of nodes to a room based on the analyzing. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022918 | Method And Apparatus For Selecting A Wireless Access Point - Various embodiments provide a method and apparatus of providing wireless access point selection based on performance metric(s) and signal strength. In particular, a client selecting between one of a number of wireless access points bases the selection decision on performance metrics as well as signal strength. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022919 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF HANDOFF SELECTION - In a particular embodiment, a method of determining a handoff selection includes determining, at a first station, a direct link quality factor value associated with a direct link between the first station and a second station. The method also includes receiving one or more measurements from the second station. The one or more measurements correspond to one or more access points that are wirelessly detectable by the second station. The method also includes determining a particular access point of the one or more access points as a handoff target based on the one or more measurements. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022920 | Relative positioning applications in wireless devices - Techniques for determining whether a mobile device crosses a boundary defined by a first wireless access point (WAP) and a second fixed-location WAP are provided. A method according to these techniques includes receiving, at a mobile device, information defining a boundary defined by first and second fixed-location WAPs, the boundary being defined at least in part based on a ratio of a round trip time (RTT) between the mobile device and the first fixed-location WAP to a ratio of a RTT between the mobile device and the second fixed-location WAP, determining the ratio of the RTT between the mobile device and the first fixed-location WAP to a ratio of the RTT between the mobile device and the second fixed-location WAP, determining whether the mobile device has crossed the boundary, and triggering an event in response to the mobile device crossing the boundary. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022921 | FRAME LOSS MEASUREMENT DEVICE, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT METHOD - A frame loss measurement device including a receiving unit which receives a measurement frame for measuring a communication path, a measurement unit which, based on the measurement frame received, measures performance of the communication path where the measurement frame is transmitted, and an allocation unit which secures resources of the frame loss measurement device to allocate to the measurement frame to be received. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022922 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device includes: a test frame generation unit configured to generate a test frame containing priority information and change the priority information for each test frame; a plurality of queues each for each of which a given priority of an input frame is defined; a queue extraction unit configured to extract the priority information of a test frame; a sorting unit configured to forward, when a test frame is input, the test frame to one of the plurality of queues in accordance with the priority information extracted by the queue extraction unit; and a test frame discarding unit configured to check normality of the test frame output from the queue and then discard the test frame. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022923 | TEST SYSTEM AND A TEST METHOD FOR DETERMINING PROCESSING PARAMETERS OF AUDIO AND/OR VIDEO DATA - The test system according to the invention for determining processing parameters of audio and/or video data in a mobile-radio device with a test device ( | 01-23-2014 |
20140022924 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ADAPTIVE CHANNEL ESTIMATION/PREDICTION FILTER DESIGN - A method to adapt a set of multi-point channel estimation filters for use in wireless communications including measuring a plurality of reception values is provided. Each reception value included in the plurality of reception values associated with one of the network nodes. The method includes sorting the plurality of reception values according to magnitude and determining a select reception value. The method includes selecting a particular network node from the set of network nodes based on the reception value. The reception value is within a threshold from the select reception value. The method includes adjusting the length of a multi-point channel estimation filter associated with the particular network node. The adjusting the length is based on a lookup table and on the reception value associated with the particular network node, according to some embodiments. User equipment in a wireless network adapted for the above method is also provided. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022925 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ANCHORED DOWN-SELECTION IN A COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION CLUSTER - A method to select members of a transmission set in a wireless network including receiving a list of network nodes included in a measurement set provided by a serving node is provided. The method includes determining received measurement values associated with the network nodes included in the measurement set and sorting the determined received measurement values in decreasing order. The method includes selecting transmission set cluster members having a determined received measurement value according to a threshold and providing channel status information (CSI) feedback on a plurality of network nodes included in the transmission set to the serving node in the wireless network. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022926 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A HIGH CAPACITY CABLE NETWORK - A cable modem termination system (CMTS) may communicate with a plurality of cable modems using a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) subcarriers. The CMTS may determine a performance metric of each of the cable modems. For each of the OFDM subcarriers and each of the cable modems, the CMTS may select physical layer parameters to be used for communication with that cable modem on that OFDM subcarrier based on a performance metric of that cable modem. The parameters may be selected for each individual modem and/or each individual subcarrier, or may be selected for groups of modems and/or groups of subcarriers. The parameters may include, for example, one or more of: transmit power, receive sensitivity, timeslot duration, modulation type, modulation order, forward error correction (FEC) type, and FEC code rate. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022927 | METHOD AND TOOL FOR AUTOMATICALLY GENERATING A LIMITED SET OF SPECTRUM AND SERVICE PROFILES - A method for automatically generating a limited set of spectrum and service profiles for use in an operator's telecommunication network includes collecting physical layer parameter values for individual lines, determining a set of optimized parameter values for each one of the individual lines, estimating a probability density function for each optimized parameter based on optimized parameter values for multiples lines, sampling the probability density function for each optimized parameter and selecting and combining according to parameter and profile policies a set of optimized parameter values to generate the limited set of spectrum and service profiles. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022928 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO SCHEDULE MULTIPLE PROBES FOR ACTIVE OR PASSIVE MONITORING OF NETWORKS - An apparatus and method for scheduling multiple probes for monitoring of a network is disclosed. The method comprises identifying a group of multiple probes to be deployed over an IP network, each of the multiple probes measuring different performance metrics in the network. A schedule period is also identified, in which to schedule the deployment of the multiple probes in the group. An even or random mode of scheduling may be specified. In response the even mode of scheduling, the apparatus may schedule the deployment of the multiple probes in the defined group periodically in the schedule period and/or schedules the group of probes periodically. Alternatively, in response to the random mode of scheduling, the scheduling apparatus may schedule the deployment of each of the multiple probes in the defined group at random intervals and/or schedules the group of probes randomly. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022929 | System and Method for Exchanging Channel, Physical Layer and Data Layer Information and Capabilities - A system and method for exchanging channel, physical layer and data layer information and capabilities. The exchange of channel, physical layer and data layer capabilities enables optimal solutions for the provision of network services. In one embodiment, channel, physical layer and data layer capabilities are exchanged during an auto-negotiation process or LLDP messaging. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022930 | DUAL MODE OPERATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided is dual mode operation by a communicating device in wireless network. The communicating device selects a radio frequency (RF) channel and a physical layer type. The communicating device processes signals received via the selected RF channel based on the selected physical layer type. The communicating device may determine whether a beacon frame has been detected base on the signals that were received via the selected RF channel and processed based on the selected physical layer type. When a frame is not detected, the communicating device may determine a signal energy level for the received signals. The communicating device may establish an association with an existing network based on detection of the beacon frame or the communicating device may transmit an originating beacon frame based on the determined signal energy level. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022931 | SPATIAL MAPPING OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SERVICE AREA - Spatial mapping of wireless access point service area. A means is presented by which a WACN's (Wireless Access Control Node's) service area is spatially mapped providing information corresponding to coverage region(s) within the WACN's service area. This spatial mapping may be generated and stored within either communication device at either end of a communication link (e.g., in a WACN or in a communication device operable to connect to the WACN). From the WACN's perspective, the spatial map can include its one or more coverage regions within its service area. From a communication device's perspective (e.g., a communication device that is capable to connect to a WACN), the spatial map can include multiple service areas provided by multiple WACNs and the various coverage regions therein. The partitioning of a WACN's service area into coverage areas can be performed along various lines (e.g., signal strength, history of connectivity, operational parameters employed, etc.). | 01-23-2014 |
20140029447 | FORWARDING TABLES FOR HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A hybrid device can apply forwarding tables associated with one or more other hybrid network devices of a hybrid communication network to control the entire transmission route of a frame scheduled for transmission. The hybrid device can use its forwarding table and a forwarding table of a destination hybrid device to determine a source network interface address, a destination network interface address, and a frame transmission route. The destination hybrid device can use forwarding tables associated with one or more hybrid network devices to determine whether to process or drop a received frame, whether the frame was previously received, and/or whether the frame was received on an incorrect network interface. The hybrid device can also use the forwarding tables to ensure that the frame comprises an appropriate link layer address and to select an appropriate transmission route based on analyzing link performance values associated with multiple transmission routes. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029448 | Method And Apparatus For Improved Signal Processing In Wireless Networks - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved cooperation-based signal processing. In a first method, network equipment determines ( | 01-30-2014 |
20140029449 | Investigating the Integrity of Forwarding Paths within a Packet Switching Device - In one embodiment, the integrity of forwarding paths within a packet switching device is investigated. A packet switching device creates a probe packet. The packet switching device then communicates the probe packet within the packet switching device in a normal forwarding manner, while monitoring at multiple positions along forwarding paths through the packet switching device for the appearance of the probe packet. The traveling within the packet switching device of the probe packet, including as identified by the monitored positions, is analyzed to identify whether or not the probe packet was correctly forwarded at one or more locations within the packet switching device. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029450 | Adaptive Antenna Pattern Management for Wireless Local Area Networks - The present disclosure discloses a network device and/or method for adaptive antenna pattern management for wireless local area networks. A network device comprising an adaptive antenna receives a coverage area description and a wireless coverage objective for a wireless network. The network device also scans a plurality of channels in a plurality of directions to detect signal levels from one or more other network devices in the wireless network. The network device can then coordinate wireless signal coverage with the one or more other network devices based at least on the coverage area description, the wireless coverage objective, and the detected signal levels. Specifically, the network device may accomplish such coordination by switching or reshaping the adaptive antenna patterns based on adaptive antenna patterns of other network devices in the wireless network. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029451 | MONITORING VIRTUALIZED NETWORK - A method of monitoring virtualized network includes receiving information regarding the virtualized network, wherein the information is received at a port of a network switch appliance, receiving a packet at a network port of the network switch appliance, and using the received information to determine whether to process the packet according to a first packet processing scheme or a second packet processing scheme, wherein the first packet processing scheme involves performing header stripping, and performing packet transmission to one of a plurality of instrument ports at the network switch appliance after the header stripping, each of the instrument ports configured for communicatively coupling to a network monitoring instrument, and wherein the second packet processing scheme involves performing packet transmission to one of the plurality of instrument ports at the network switch appliance without performing any header stripping. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029452 | NETWORK FLOW ANALYSIS - In an example network flow analysis, sample packets can be received from a stream of packets over a time interval from a network element. The sample packets can be aggregated into a subclass of packets. A sample pool size of the stream of packets in the time interval, a number of sample packets received over the time interval, and a number of sample packets aggregated into the subclass of packets can be determined. An effective sampling ratio (ESR) from the sample pool size of the stream of packets in the time interval and the number of sample packets received over the time interval can be calculated. An extrapolated flow for the subclass of sample packets can be calculated by multiplying the ESR by the number of sample packets aggregated into the subclass of packets. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029453 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF LINK MEASUREMENT OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LINK - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of link measurement of a wireless communication link. For example, a wireless communication unit may communicate a link measurement request frame between an initiator station and a responder station; may communicate a first link measurement report frame in response to the link measurement request frame, the link measurement report frame including link information determined by the responder station with respect to a wireless communication link between the initiator station and the responder station; and/or may communicate a second, unsolicited, link measurement report frame including link information determined by the initiator station with respect to the wireless communication link. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029454 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) by a CQI transmission apparatus in a communication system is provided. The method includes generating a CQI based on a CQI metric generated using a CQI_offset compensation value, and transmitting the CQI to a CQI reception apparatus, wherein the CQI_offset compensation value is generated using a CQI_offset and wherein a CQI_offset control value, and the CQI_offset is generated using Acknowledgement (Ack)/Non-Acknowledgement (Nack) information for a transmitted transport block. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029455 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION BY A USER EQUIPMENT IN IDLE AND/OR CONNECTED MODE - A method and apparatus for determining available downlink bandwidth are described. The described aspects may include estimating an available link capacity of a cell for a user equipment. The described aspects may include estimating an available fraction of cell resources for the user equipment. The described aspects may include estimating available bandwidth of the cell for the user equipment as a function of the estimated available link capacity and the estimated available fraction of cell resources. Available bandwidth may be estimated for a cell in a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) system when the user equipment is in an idle mode and/or a connected mode. Available bandwidth may be estimated for a cell in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system when the user equipment is in an idle mode and/or a connected mode. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029456 | INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION IN THE PRESENCE OF ePDCCH TRANSMISSIONS - A method of wireless communication is presented. The method includes determining, for each resource element group of a resource block pair, whether an interfering control channel is present on the resource block pair. The determination may be based on whether estimated power of the resource element groups varies among two or more resource element groups. The method also includes estimating the interference on the resource block pair based on the determination. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029457 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR REPORTING WIMAX PARAMETER - A computerized method reports world interoperability for microwave access (WIMAX) parameters of a communication device to a network server. An initial value of each of the WIMAX parameters of the communication device is recorded in a file, the file having a predetermined format. When there is a change in a value of any WIMAX parameter, the data stored in the file is updated. When a parameter diagnosis command is received from the network server, the value of each of the WIMAX parameters stored in the file is reported to the network server through a network. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029458 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR SIGNALING COORDINATED MULTI-POINT (COMP) MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION - A mobile communication device is provided with a wireless module and a controller module. The wireless module performs wireless transceiving to and from a cellular station. The controller module configures a plurality of Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS) resources according to a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message received from the cellular station via the wireless module, and receives a Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) from the cellular station via the wireless module. Also, the controller module adds or removes one of the CSI-RS resources to or from a measurement set for Coordinated Multi-Point (CoMP) according to the MAC CE. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029459 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for discontinuous reception in multiple component carrier system are provided. A method for a discontinuous reception (DRX) operation by a half-duplex UE in multiple component carrier system includes identifying whether a current subframe is a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) subframe; perform PDCCH monitoring on the identified PDCCH subframe during an active time of a DRX cycle; and counting a DRX-related timer included in the active time in the identified PDCCH subframe. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029460 | CHANNEL AND NOISE ESTIMATION METHOD AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS - A channel and noise estimation method includes: performing channel estimation on a received signal to obtain a real channel estimation value; filtering the real channel estimation value to obtain a filtered channel estimation value; calculating a biased noise power value, a biased signal power value, a biased noise correlation and a biased signal correlation according to the filtered channel estimation value; calculating an unbiased noise power value, an unbiased signal power value, an unbiased noise correlation and an unbiased signal correlation according to the biased noise power value, the biased signal power value, the biased noise correlation and the biased signal correlation. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029461 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR USING A BEAM-FORMING NETWORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH SPATIALLY MULTIPLEXED WIRELESS SIGNALS - Various methods and systems for combining the capabilities of beam-forming networks together with the benefit of using spatially multiplexed wireless signals. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029462 | System and Method For Monitoring Network Link Quality - Monitoring network link quality in a telecommunications network which includes a plurality of intermediate network elements connected to network links via which communications sessions are conducted between respective terminating devices. A communications session comprises signaling procedures relating to the control of the session and media transfer procedures for transmitting media content via a media path established using at least part of the procedures. The established media path includes media path legs which are each established between respective media path leg endpoints connected via a network link. One or more endpoints of a media path leg is determined from at least part of the procedures. The determined one or more endpoints includes a media path leg endpoint at an intermediate network element. Reporting data is generated that comprises data identifying the determined one or more endpoints. The reporting data is transmitted to an analysis system for network link quality analysis. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029463 | METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION AND DEVICE THEREOF - Disclosed are a method for reporting channel quality information and a device thereof, the method comprising: according to configuration information of a CSI-RS, a user equipment measuring the CSI-RS to acquire a downlink channel transmission matrix; according to a PDSCH transmission scheme used as a basis when determining a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), and according to the measured downlink channel transmission matrix, the user equipment determining the CQI of a frequency domain reporting unit; and the user equipment reporting the determined CQI to a network side. Through the present invention, the measurement and reporting of the channel quality information based on the CSI-RS is implemented based on transmission of non-PMI feedback. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029464 | Apparatus And Methods For Signal Reception Based On Network Load Estimations - Methods and apparatus for correcting quantization errors in signal reception based on estimated network loading including solutions for preserving cellular network performance in low noise, high interference environments. In one embodiment, a data channel is amplified with respect to other signals based on network load during periods of relatively low network utilization. Dynamic modification of the data channel's power level is configured to overcome quantization errors, rather than the true noise floor (which is insignificant in low noise environments). Such solutions provide both the fidelity necessary to enable high degrees of unwanted signaling rejection, while still preserving data channel quality. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029465 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is designed to provide a mobile terminal apparatus, a radio base station apparatus and a radio communication method which, even when a MIMO technique and a CoMP technique are applied together, can optimize the effects of both techniques. The mobile terminal apparatus estimates downlink channel states using reference signals included in downlink signals from a plurality of cells, determines the PMI for each cell and inter-cell phase difference information, from the channel states of the plurality of cells, such that the combinations of the PMI of each cell and inter-cell phase difference information become optimal, measures channel quality from the determined PMIs and inter-cell phase difference information, and transmits the PMI for each cell, the inter-cell phase difference information and channel quality information, to a radio base station apparatus. | 01-30-2014 |
20140036695 | DELAY QUEUES BASED ON DELAY REMAINING - Techniques are provided for performing a delay. A request for a delay may be received. A plurality of delay queues may be provided, with each delay queue spanning a range of delay remaining. The request may be assigned to a delay queue based on the delay remaining. The request may be moved to a different delay queue as the delay remaining decreases. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036696 | Utilizing Client Mobile Devices for Wireless Network Monitoring - Example embodiments disclosed herein relate to utilizing client mobile devices for wireless network monitoring. Link quality data for wireless networks are measured by a plurality of wireless client devices and are provided to a network controller. The link quality data is usable to manage a wireless local area network (WLAN). The wireless networks include at least the WLAN and a cellular network. A recommendation for connection is provided to the wireless client devices, where the recommendation indicates if the cellular network is recommended or an access point of the WLAN. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036697 | Traffic Management of Third Party Applications - A proxy server for routing traffic between a mobile device and a network, comprising at least one processor, a memory, and a traffic monitoring application stored in the memory that, when executed by the at least one processor, monitors a plurality of mobile device installed applications that run on the mobile device and the mobile device installed applications' traffic, analyzes traffic usage for the mobile device installed applications, identifies the mobile device installed applications responsible for traffic that is excessive or unnecessary as determined by the mobile device's service provider, and blocks, delays, or reports the excessive and unnecessary traffic without interrupting the mobile device's communications. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036698 | ITERATIVE COVARIANCE INVERSION BASED ON LINEAR RECEIVER DESIGNS - A method of wireless communication includes receiving a wireless signal at a linear receiver, and iteratively computing an inverted covariance matrix in frequency domain, one channel code at a time. The method also includes computing receiver demodulation coefficients based on the inverted covariance matrix and the frequency domain channel estimate or time domain channel estimate. The method further includes deriving a transmitter symbol based on a received signal vector and the coefficients. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036699 | METHODS AND STRUCTURE FOR REDUCED LAYOUT CONGESTION IN A SERIAL ATTACHED SCSI EXPANDER - Methods and structure for reduced layout congestion in a switching device integrated circuit. A switching device such as a Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) expander comprises a switching circuit to couple any of a plurality (“N”) of physical links of the switching device with any other physical link of the switching device. The switching circuit comprises a first stage circuit adapted to couple any of the N physical links with a selected one of N/2 communication paths of the switching circuit and comprises a second stage circuit adapted to couple any of the N/2 communication paths with any of the N physical links. Since only N/2 communication paths may be active at any time in such a switching device, a control unit of the switching device tracks which of the N/2 communication paths are presently in use or unused so that an unused path may be selected for a new connection. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036700 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR CONTROLLING TX AND RX THROUGHPUT OVER TCP - A first node that transmits TCP packets to and receives TCP packets from a second node splits a target TCP packet throughput across multiple consecutive time slots, each slot having a target throughput value. If a current slot's achieved throughput value does not match the current slot's target throughput value, the target throughput value for the current slot and/or a subsequent slot is adjusted. Transmit throughput from the first node to the second node is controlled by transmitting TCP packets from the first node to the second node according to a target throughput value for the current slot. Receive throughput from the second node to the first node is controlled by dynamically calculating an advertised receive window size according to a target throughput value for the current slot and communicating the advertised receive window size to the second node. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036701 | Mobile Access Point Detection - Methods and devices for detecting mobile access points are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of detecting mobile access points comprises collecting crowdsourcing data associated with one or more access point devices, quantizing the crowdsourcing data to generate a quantized crowdsourcing data, for each access point device, determining an interfracile range of the access point device using the quantized crowdsourcing data, where the interfracile range is a measure of statistical dispersion of the quantized crowdsourcing data with respect to the access point device, identifying the access point device as a mobile access point device in response to the interfracile range exceeds a first predetermined range. The method of collecting crowdsourcing data comprises collecting the crowdsourcing data within a predetermined sliding time window. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036702 | Multi-media multi-modulation and multi-data rate mesh network - A node having a multiple protocol receiver may listen to multiple links in parallel and determine a quality of links having multiple communication technologies between the node and multiple neighbor nodes. The multiple communication technologies may include radio frequency (RF) communication technologies and one or more power line communication (PLC) communication technologies. The node determines a link quality metric for each link associated with an optimum communication technology and data rate, and maintains availability information of neighbor nodes. The node may then route communications to neighbor nodes using the link quality metric and the availability information. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036703 | Method and System for Controlling Access of Terminal Device to Wireless Network - The present invention provides a method and system for controlling access of a terminal device to a wireless network. The method includes: receiving, by an access point device, a first wireless network access request message sent by a first terminal device; receiving, by the access point device, feedback information of one or more directional devices within a predetermined area; judging, by the access point device according to the received feedback information, whether N directional devices within the predetermined area all find the first wireless network access request message by monitoring; and if yes, enabling the first terminal device to access the wireless network, where the N is the number of the directional devices within the predetermined area. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036704 | PERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REPORTING FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (CoMP) SYSTEMS - Technology for periodic channel state information (CSI) reporting from a user equipment (UE) configured for carrier aggregation is disclosed. One method can include the UE generating a plurality of periodic CSI reports for transmission in a subframe for a plurality of CSI processes, wherein each periodic CSI report corresponds to a CSI process with a CSI process index. A single periodic CSI report from the plurality of periodic CSI reports may be selected to multiplex with a hybrid automatic repeat request-acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) feedback. The periodic CSI report multiplex with the HARQ-ACK feedback and any scheduling request (SR) may be determined to have a bit size less than or equal to a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) format 3 maximum payload bit size. The periodic CSI report multiplexed with the HARQ-ACK feedback and any SR may be transmitted to a serving cell. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036705 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION - The present invention provides a method and a device for data traffic distribution. The method includes: measuring, by a mobile wireless interconnection wifi device, signal strength of a wifi network; and switching, by the mobile wifi device, data traffic between a cellular wireless communication network and the wifi network according to the signal strength of the wifi network, where, when the data traffic is transmitted over the wifi network, the mobile wifi device, by means of time division multiplexing, serves as an access point AP and a station STA respectively to route the data traffic between STAs having an Internet access demand and APs capable of providing an Internet access service. The embodiments of the present invention can implement data distribution in the scenario of multiple WAN ports. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036706 | Interference Measurement Resource (IMR) Signaling and Use to Support Interference Coordination Between Cells - Indication(s) of a configuration of first interference measurement resources in first subframe(s) and of a configuration of second interference measurement resources in second subframe(s) are received at a first BS and from a second BS using an interface between the first and second BSs. The first BS transmits zero or low power REs that coincide with the REs belonging to the first interference measurement resources in the first subframe(s). The first BS transmits full power REs that coincide with the REs belonging to the second interference measurement resources in the second subframe(s). The first interference measurement resources in the first subframe(s) are to be used by a UE (e.g., attached to the second base station) to measure interference for zero or low power REs and the second interference measurement resources in the second subframe(s) are to be used by the UE to measure interference for full power REs. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036707 | DIFFERENTIATING MEASUREMENT REPORTING MECHANISM - Techniques are provided for transmission of measurement reports from a UE to a base station. A method may include receiving a measurement configuration message from a serving cell. The method may include determining a report value from the measurement configuration message, the report value indicating a number of measurement reports to be transmitted to the serving cell. The method may include, based on the number of measurement reports indicated by the report value, determining whether to wait for a signal measurement result of at least one neighboring cell to become available prior to sending a measurement report to the serving cell. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036708 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for optimizing measurement in a wireless communication network. In one embodiment, the method is implemented in a UE. The method includes configuring the UE with a threshold of serving cell quality. The method further includes determining, at the UE, whether to apply the threshold of serving cell quality depending | 02-06-2014 |
20140036709 | HIDDEN NODES DETECTION - A method of detecting a hidden node is disclosed. Reports from a plurality of access points (APs) are received. The method includes determining that transmissions from a second AP are not detected by a first AP based on the received report from the first AP. The method includes determining that transmissions from a client associated with the first AP are detected by the second AP based on the received report from the second AP. The method further includes detecting that the second AP is a hidden node, wherein transmissions from the hidden node interfere with transmissions between the client and the first AP, and wherein the detection is based at least in part on the determination that transmissions from the second AP are not detected by the first AP and the determination that transmissions from the client associated with the first AP are detected by the second AP. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036710 | INTER-RAT MEASUREMENTS FOR A DUAL-SIM DUAL-ACTIVE DEVICE - A method of wireless communication is presented. The method includes monitoring a first RAT for a first paging message with a first receive chain. The method also includes monitoring a second RAT for a second paging message with a second receive chain. The method further includes performing, for the first SIM, an inter-frequency/inter-RAT measurement for the first RAT. The method still further includes performing, for the second SIM, an inter-frequency/inter-RAT measurement for the second RAT. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036711 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HIGH RATE OFDM COMMUNICATIONS - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036712 | DETECTION AND LOCATION OF WIRELESS FIELD DEVICES - A method of evaluating a potential location to add a wireless field device to an existing network of a plurality of existing wireless field devices is provided. The method includes placing a handheld field maintenance tool in the potential location and causing the handheld field maintenance tool to identify wireless field devices within communicative range of the potential location. Information related to wireless communication at the potential location is viewed. Methods are also provided for identifying a selected field device in a process installation using a handheld field maintenance tool. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036713 | REFERENCE SIGNAL PORT DISCOVERY INVOLVING TRANSMISSION POINTS - A method includes receiving information indicating one or more sets of reference signal patterns from a first transmission point, wherein at least one of the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns corresponds to one of one or more other transmission points; measuring the channel quality for the indicated sets of reference signal patterns; and reporting indications of the measured channel quality for the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns to the first transmission point. Another method includes transmitting information indicating one or more sets of reference signal patterns from a first transmission point to a user equipment, wherein at least one of the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns corresponds to one of one or more other transmission points; and receiving from the user equipment indications of measured channel quality for the indicated one or more sets of reference signal patterns. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036714 | NODEB Self-Tuning - It is provided an apparatus, including base station means to provide a base station functionality using component carriers; neighbor detecting means to detect a neighboring base station; informing means to inform a coordinating device about the neighboring base station; willingness setting means to set a willingness to perform self-tuning based on a respective long-term priority for each component carrier, wherein the long-term priorities are received from the coordinating device, and the willingness is only set if the long-term priorities are not in contradiction to an actual requirement, willingness providing means to provide an indication of the willingness to the coordinating device; and self-tuning means to perform self-tuning if an agreement statement is received from the coordinating device, wherein, as a result of the self-tuning, a usage of each component carrier by the base station means is based on the received long-term information and the actual requirement. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036715 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TESTING SIGNAL RECEPTION SENSITIVITY - A method and apparatus for testing signal reception sensitivity of a wireless access point are provided. The apparatus includes a receiver which is configured to receive a test start request signal, a transmission power level change request signal and a test packet retransmission request signal from a neighboring access point apparatus; a test signal generator which is configured to generate a test packet signal to be transmitted to the neighboring access point apparatus; a transmission power level adjuster which is configured to adjust a transmission power level of the test packet signal; a transmitter which is configured to transmit the test packet signal to the neighboring access point apparatus with a power having a level adjusted by the transmission power level adjuster; and a test executor which is configured to execute a test program having a predetermined sequence for testing a signal reception sensitivity of the neighboring access point apparatus. | 02-06-2014 |
20140043984 | CHARGING AND POLICY FOR SERVICES AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed at the edge of a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A first service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. A second service mechanism in the core network receives data monitored during attach and Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context activation, and establishes sessions with components in the mobile data network that support charging and policy control for sessions broken out by the first service mechanism. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043985 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LICENSE ENFORCEMENT FOR DATA CENTER MONITORING APPLICATIONS - Methods include receiving a threshold time to live (“TTL”) value associated with a license. The methods include determining a first TTL value based on the threshold TTL value. The methods include transmitting a polling request including the first TTL value from a polling device disposed at the network location to a network device. The first TTL value decreases each time the polling request transits through a node device. The methods include receiving a polling response from the network device if the first TTL value has not decreased to a predetermined value before the polling request is received by the network device. The methods include determining that the license permits communication between a monitoring device disposed at the network location and the network device in response to receiving the polling response. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043986 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A radio communication device may be provided, including: a transceiver to exchange data with a base station; a mode determiner to determine whether to operate the radio communication device in a pre-determined mode, in which a first subset of frames of each multiframe in a plurality of multiframes is reserved for a first group of radio communication devices including the radio communication device for sending data to the base station and/or receiving data from the base station, and a second subset of frames of each multiframe in the plurality of multiframes is reserved for a second group of other radio communication devices for sending data to the base station and/or receiving data from the base station; and a measurement circuit to measure a reception quality of a pre-determined cell in the second subset if the mode determiner determines to operate the radio communication device in the pre-determined mode. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043987 | PASSIVE NETWORK LATENCY MONITORING - A method measures a resident delay for each port in a node in a network and a peer delay between each pair of neighbor nodes in the network. From these resident delays and peer delays, latency between each pair of neighbor nodes in the network is determined. The method includes weighting a route for a data packet going through the nodes in the network using the determined latencies. Each node includes a switch having switchable connections and is configured by a controller to send probe packets from an output port to a port in a neighbor node. The packet may include a time stamp and an identifier. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043988 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO LINK MONITORING IN NEW CARRIER TYPE (NCT) IN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) SYSTEM - Certain aspects provide methods and apparatus for performing radio link monitoring (RLM) based on channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs). Such RLM may be performed for certain carriers, such as New Carrier Type (NCT) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, for example, in which reference signals conventionally used for RLM (e.g., common reference signals (CRSs) in LTE Rel-8/9/10) are not available in every subframe. Radio link failure (RLF) may be declared based on the RLM. One example method generally includes determining at least one of a first set of CSI-RS resources for use in channel estimation to perform RLM measurements or a second set of CSI-RS resources for use in interference estimation to perform the RLM measurements and performing the RLM measurements based on the one or more determined sets of CSI-RS resources. Certain aspects provide methods and apparatus for performing radio resource management (RRM) based on CSI-RSs. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043989 | REDUCED USER EQUIPMENT IMPACT FROM PERFORMING WIDER BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENTS - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for wide bandwidth measurements. In some example embodiments, there is provided a method. The method may include receiving, at a user equipment, an indicator and a measurement bandwidth, wherein the indicator represents whether the user equipment is enabled to perform a wide bandwidth measurement, and wherein the received measurement bandwidth represents a maximum allowed measurement bandwidth; and performing, by the user equipment, the wide bandwidth measurement, when the received measurement bandwidth equals or exceeds a threshold and the indicator represents a request to the user equipment to perform the wide bandwidth measurement. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043990 | METHOD FOR REPORTING MINIMIZATION DRIVE TEST MEASUREMENT DATA - A method for reporting minimization of drive tests measurement data is disclosed. The network assigns a preamble dedicated to the reporting of the logged MDT measurement data. The UE in the idle mode may therefore report the logged MDT measurement data in the appropriate situation. The UEs perform the first random access procedure with the network to obtain the uplink resource and a dedicate indicator for performing the second random access procedure. The UEs perform the second random access procedure for transmitting the request message. The network transmits the response message with a scheduling plan according to the request message(s). The UE transmits the logged MDT measurement data according to the scheduling plan. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043991 | Systems and Methods for Phase Determination over a Wireless Link - An exemplary method to measure propagation of a signal between a first end data input transmit system and a first end transmit air frame detector, of the signal between a second end receive air frame detector and a second end data receive system, of the signal between the second end data receive system and a second end data input transmit system, of a time the signal is received by the second end data transmit system and a signal is received at a second end transmit air frame detector, of the signal between a first end receive air frame detector and a first end data receive system, and of a time when the signal is in the first end data receive system and when the signal is received by the first end data input transmit system, and determine a performance of the signal across a wireless link based on the measurements. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043992 | TRACEROUTE_DELAY DIAGNOSTIC COMMAND - A method for measuring the resident time of a probe message in at least a network node within a network path, includes registering the receive timestamp of the probe message, writing the receive timestamp into a dedicated field within the received probe message, and checking the Time-To-Live value of the probe message. If the Time-To-Live value is not null, the Time-To-Live value is decremented by one. If the Time-To-Live value is equal to one, then the method includes registering the transmit timestamp of the probe message, computing the probe message resident time within the network node by subtracting the registered receive timestamp from the registered transmit timestamp, writting the computed resident time into a field within the probe message, and changing the value of a flag within the received probe message in order to protect the resident time from being over written by subsequent action on the probe message. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043993 | INTELLIGENT P-GW RELOCATION FOR SIPTO SERVICE CONTINUITY - Intelligent packet data network gateway (P-GW) relocation for selected internet protocol traffic offload (SIPTO) service continuity is described. A user equipment (UE) application monitoring module, can monitor the network session state for a UE. A transition window can be determined based on both the network session state and a session continuity impact metric. A new packet data network gateway (P-GW) can be associated to the UE during the transition window in response to a determination that a current P-GW of the UE is less optimal, in at least one performance metric, than the new P-GW. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043994 | Providing Feedback To Media Senders Over Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) - The principal object of this embodiment is to provide regular feedback about the packet losses from a receiver to a sender in a RTP based network, based on which the sender then decides to control its transmission rate resulting in better quality of experience (QoE) for the receiver. Another object of the embodiment is to propose a method and system to send and receive feedback using lightweight protocol packets on a periodic or on as-per-required basis in a RTP based network. A further object of the embodiment is to propose a method and system to calculate and forecast Round Trip Times (RTT) at a RTP receiver in a RTP based network using double exponential smoothing methodology to calculate packet losses in that RTT. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043995 | BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR TRIGGERING INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE MESSAGE FOR COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A base station, a communication terminal and a method for triggering an interference avoidance message for a communication terminal. The communication terminal includes a Long Term Evolution (LTE) module and a communication module coexisted with the LTE module. The method includes: a measurement process for measuring a signal quality parameter and a traffic flow parameter; a traffic flow judgment process for judging whether the traffic flow parameter satisfies a predetermined condition; a signal quality judgment process for judging whether the signal quality parameter satisfies a predetermined condition; a triggering determination process for determining whether a trigging condition is satisfied according to a judgment result of the traffic flow judgment process and a judgment result of the signal quality judgment process; and transmitting the interference avoidance message when the triggering determination process determines that the trigging condition is satisfied. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043996 | CHANNEL QUALITY MEASUREMENTS FOR DOWNLINK RESOURCE ALLOCATION - A method for reporting channel quality from a user equipment (UE) to a base station is described. The UE derives a channel quality for each of a plurality of downlink resources. The UE transmits channel quality reports in a pattern of time intervals by rotating through the plurality of downlink resources in different time intervals of the pattern, wherein a channel quality report is not transmitted by the UE in each time interval of a frame. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043997 | UPLINK RESOURCE ALLOCATION TO CONTROL INTERCELL INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention exploit the reciprocity of radio channels in TDD, and longer-term correlation between average uplink and downlink path losses in FDD wireless communication systems to enable distributed schedulers in an enhanced uplink system to allocate uplink transmission resources while preemptively managing intercell interference levels. Each cell's base station transmits a downlink reference signal at a known transmission power level. A mobile station monitors the received signal strength of the downlink reference signals from multiple base stations. The transmitted and received signal strength levels can be used by the mobile station to estimate the amount of intercell interference that the mobile station's uplink transmissions cause, and the mobile station's uplink transmission parameters are adjusted accordingly. In further embodiments, the received reference signal power levels, or values derived therefrom, are transmitted by the mobile station to its serving base station, where a scheduling algorithm uses the information to adjust one or more transmission parameters relating to a grant of uplink transmission resources to the UE, thereby controlling the intercell interference generated by the mobile station's uplink transmissions. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043998 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CELL OUTAGE DETECTION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a device for cell outage detection. The method includes: receiving, by a controlling base station of a first cell, a request message, where the request message is used to request an outage measurement on a second cell, the first cell is a neighboring cell of the second cell; selecting, by the controlling base station of the first cell, a user equipment in the first cell to measure the second cell; receiving, by the controlling base station of the first cell, measurement information obtained by the user equipment by measuring the second cell, and generating, according to the measurement information, information used to determine whether an outage occurs in the second cell; and sending, by the controlling base station of the first cell, a reply message including the information used to determine whether an outage occurs in the second cell. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043999 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MODIFYING CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT PACKETS - The disclosed embodiments include a system, computer program product, and method for modifying communications of a communications network. For example, in one embodiment, a computer implemented method for modifying communications of a communications network comprises receiving performance information packets that includes network performance information associated with the communications network, and transmitting a command to a specified access point based on the network performance information. In certain embodiments, the command instructs the specified access point to perform at least one of reconfiguring itself based on a particular set of configuration parameters, restarting itself, running diagnostic routines, increasing buffered data, refreshing a routing table, modifying a routing table, terminating a particular process or processes, and terminating all operations. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044000 | LTE Carrier Aggregation Configuration on TV White Space Bands - An apparatus, method and computer program product comprise controlling cellular network based communication in a primary cell on a frequency band related to the cellular network and by using an uplink and downlink configuration specific to the primary cell; controlling communication in a secondary cell on a frequency band related to a television white space channel and by using an uplink and downlink configuration specific to the secondary cell; measuring radio interference on a temporarily set uplink related carrier on the secondary cell based on information on the temporarily set uplink related carrier received on a downlink related carrier on the primary cell; and reporting results of radio interference measurement via the primary cell. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044001 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION AND BASE STATION - A method of establishing communication in a base station includes measuring quality of a neighbor cell of a measurement-target communication system; and establishing communication in the measurement-target communication system when the measured quality is less than a predetermined threshold. The base station includes a measuring unit configured to measure quality of a neighbor cell of a measurement-target communication system; and a communication establishing unit configured to establish communication in the measurement-target communication system when the measured quality is less than a predetermined threshold. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044002 | MEASUREMENT COLLECTION METHOD, BASE STATION, AND RADIO TERMINAL - A measurement collection method used in a mobile communication system, comprises: a base station includes unnecessary area information, which indicates a measurement unnecessary area requiring no measurement data, into a configuration message as one of a parameter, and transmits the configuration message to a radio terminal; and the radio terminal excludes measurement data, which corresponds to the measurement unnecessary area indicated by the unnecessary area information, from a report object to the network, or stops measurement in the measurement unnecessary area and reports measurement data including a measurement result, other than that in the measurement unnecessary area, to the network. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044003 | Small Cell Mobility Enhancement - There is provided a method, an apparatus and a computer program product, wherein the method includes applying at least one procedure for inter-frequency measurements of at least one carrier, wherein a first procedure is applied when a carrier having at least one cell deployed for providing non-continuous coverage radio access is to be measured and a second procedure is applied when a carrier having at least one cell deployed for providing continuous coverage radio access is to be measured, and performing the inter-frequency measurements according to the applied procedure, when the procedure for the inter-frequency measurements is on. | 02-13-2014 |
20140050103 | MOBILE PROXY FOR CLOUD RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - Embodiments of computer-implemented methods, systems, computing devices, and computer-readable media are described herein for monitoring, by a mobile proxy associated with a control system of a cloud radio access network (“C-RAN”), application layer data traffic between the control system and a wireless communication device. In various embodiments, the mobile proxy may, based on the monitoring, facilitate alteration of data plane or control plane processing by the wireless communication device or a remote radio head (“RRH”) associated with the C-RAN. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050104 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OBVIATING A MEET-ME CONFERENCE HUB - System and method to obviate a conferencing hub, in one embodiment the method including: subscribing to a meet-me conference call that comprises a plurality of endpoints; monitoring for a triggering condition related to the meet-me conference call; and if the triggering condition is triggered then, for each endpoint of the conference call, redirecting a media stream produced by the endpoint from the conferencing hub to another endpoint. In another embodiment, the method includes: receiving a call from a first endpoint to join a new meet-me conference; waiting a predetermined waiting-time; if no other endpoints have joined the meet-me conference during the waiting-time, disconnecting the first endpoint from the meet-me conference in order to obviate the meet-me conference hub; receiving a call from a second endpoint to join the meet-me conference; calling back the first endpoint; and bridging together the first endpoint and the second endpoint to reassemble the meet-me conference. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050105 | Traffic-Adaptive Repeated Transmission - An apparatus used for digital subscriber line (DSL) communication comprising a processor configured to generate a data transmission unit (DTU) comprising user data and a transmitter configured to repeatedly transmit the DTU a plurality of times onto a subscriber line, wherein a number of the plurality of times is adaptively based on a user data rate of the subscriber line. A method of data communication comprising generating a DTU comprising user data and repeatedly transmitting the DTU a plurality of times onto a subscriber line, wherein a number of the plurality of times is adaptively based on a data rate of the subscriber line. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050106 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDLING COMMUNICATIONS REQUESTS - A system and method for handling communications requests. Network performance information of a communications network is gathered using PIP data packets to determine a status of a number of nodes of the communications network. Available bandwidth through connections of the communications network are determined based on the PIP data packets. The available bandwidth for a number of customers is allocated for new connections and utilized bandwidth through the connections as the utilized bandwidth changes across the communications network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050107 | ERROR PREVENTION IN DYNAMIC UPLINK/DOWNLINK CONFIGURATION CHANGE FOR TIME DIVISION DUPLEX - Method and apparatus which prevents or at least significantly reduces errors during dynamic TDD UL/DL configuration changes. Received downlink time division duplex subframes are monitored during a predetermined time window, wherein at least a portion of the subframes includes an uplink/downlink configuration indication. In response to not detecting an uplink/downlink configuration indicated by any of the uplink/downlink configuration indications in the monitored downlink time division duplex subframes, an average of the monitored uplink/downlink configuration indications is calculated. The calculated average is utilized in determining a time division duplex uplink/downlink configuration to be used. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050108 | System and Method for Controlling Data Transmission in a Multihop Wireless Network - Systems and methods are provided for media access control and rate control to improve data throughput in multihop wireless networks. For controlling media access, an unlocking mechanism is provided that sets the unlocking times at which the scheduling patterns of a MAC protocol is unlocked by requiring all, or a subset of links, to stop transmitting. The unlocking times are set and updated according to quality of service requirements which may change over time. Parameters of the MAC protocol and packet arrivals rates to the links in the network are updated using the parameters of the unlocking mechanism, the queue-sizes, and the utility functions of the links in the network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050109 | RELIABLE ISP ACCESS CLOUD STATE DETECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A Multi-Homing System is equipped with an Adaptive JSP Access Cloud State Detection apparatus (ACSD) that improves the reliability of the availability of digital connections (links) between computer sites, such as a Computer Premises Network and the Internet, in which such connections are made by connecting through a multiplicity of ISP Access Clouds (links). Reliability is improved over prior art methods by using data elements of Internet Protocol datagrams, e.g. record fields or bits of fields, that are regularly and normally exchanged between the ISP Access Clouds and the CPN without creating additional data traffic. Data Elements from each ISP Access Cloud are used by processing functions of the by the ACSD to test for conditions that indicate that it may be in a DOWN status. when a DOWN status is suspected, other functions in the ACSD initiate transmission of a set of PROBE packets that can reliably determine if the suspect link is actually DOWN or merely giving a response that would be interpreted as DOWN by prior art methods. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050110 | Method and System for Enabling Shared Mobile Data Usage - Disclosed is a system and method for enabling personalized shared mobile phone usage when accessing data services within a wireless telecommunications network, including an illustrative example application of the invention as it relates to mobile subscribers who cannot afford a mobile phone handset in emerging markets. For instance, a prepaid wireless subscriber can have a personal phone number associated with their own billing account, which can be used to access data services on a wireless network without needing to purchase any hardware, such as a mobile handset or SIM card. Thus, the subscriber may access his account and use data services through a borrowed handset. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050111 | RECEIVING APPARATUS, DATA RECEIVING METHOD, AND CHANNEL ESTIMATING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREFOR - Disclosed are a receiving apparatus, a data receiving method, a channel estimating apparatus and a channel estimating method for multi-user interference (MUI) signals according to the present invention. The channel estimating apparatus for MUI signals has: a user type determining section configured to determine whether a UE apparatus corresponding to an own station belongs to a first type user or a second type user and to determine demodulation information to use in channel estimation of MUI signals based on the type of the UE apparatus corresponding to the own station; and a second channel estimating section configured to perform channel estimation of a multi-user interference signal based on the determined demodulation information to use in channel estimation of MUI signals. In the present invention, the UE apparatus is classified by type and the demodulation information to use in channel estimation of MUI signals is determined based on the type of the UE apparatus. With this structure, it is possible to improve channel estimation accuracy and further to improve the performance of data reception and user and cell throughputs. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050112 | Positioning in Wireless Communication Systems - A method for reporting positioning data from a node B in a START oo cellular communication system comprises performing ( | 02-20-2014 |
20140050113 | Method and Apparatus for Deactivating One of a Primary and Secondary Cells of a User Equipment - A method includes causing a primary cell for a user equipment to be deactivated. The said user equipment has at least one active secondary cell. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050114 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING VOLTAGE STANDING WAWE RATIO IN DOWNLINK PERIOD OF RADIO COMMUNICATION - The present invention discloses a method for determining a Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) in downlink period of a radio communication, comprising: coupling a forward signal into a Transmitter Observation Receiver (TOR) via a Radio Frequency (RF) switch; feeding a reversed signal in a reversed path from a third port of a circulator into the TOR via the RF switch; making down conversion, filtering and converting the forward signal and the reversed signal from an analog signal into digital base-band signal respectively; measuring and storing power levels of the forward signal and the reversed signal in form of digital baseband; and calculating VSWR or Return Loss (RL) value from the stored power levels of the forward signal and the reversed signal. A corresponding apparatus and radio communication system are also provided. This provides an improved VSWR detection method with low complexity and low cost, etc. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050115 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - To enable a “Measurement process” using a plurality of “Measurement Subframe Patterns”, the mobile communication method according to the present invention includes notifying the ID corresponding to a “Measurement Subframe Pattern” to a MOBILE STATION UE using an “RRC Connection Release”; receiving the ID broadcasted in a neighbor cell when the MOBILE STATION UE is in Idle mode; and performing a “Measurement process” based on a “Measurement Subframe Pattern” corresponding to the received ID when the MOBILE STATION is in Idle mode. | 02-20-2014 |
20140056153 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM HAVING SELECTIVE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND RELATED METHODS - A wireless communications system may include different wireless communications networks, an application server, and an intermediate server configured to communicate with the application server. The wireless communications system may also include a mobile wireless communications device configured to communicate with the intermediate server over each of the different wireless communications networks to determine a selected wireless communications network. The mobile wireless communications device may also be configured to communicate with the application server via the intermediate server over the selected wireless communications network. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056154 | Data Channel Adaptation for Mobile Applications - Techniques, an apparatus and an article of manufacture for data channel adaptation for mobile applications. A method includes determining user presence information based on tracking of user movement patterns, wherein presence is a user's characteristic location in a given time period, determining at least one connectivity characteristic in each of multiple data channels available to the user for running a mobile device application based on the user presence information, comparing the multiple data channels based on the at least one connectivity characteristic in each data channel in connection with priority specified by the user and/or at least one requirement of the mobile device application, and automatically selecting the data channel for running the mobile device application to maximize utility based on priority of the application and/or the at least one requirement of the mobile device application. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056155 | INTER RAT MEASUREMENT FROM IDLE TO CONNECTED STATE - A user equipment (UE) may perform an advanced inter radio access technology (IRAT) measurement of a target cell when the UE transitions from an idle state to a connected state of a serving cell to reduce delay. In such instances, the UE compares the serving cell signal metric to a threshold. The advanced measurement may be performed when the serving cell signal metric, e.g., serving cell received signal code power (RSCP), is below the threshold. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056156 | CSI Reporting for a Set of CSI-RS Resources - A method implemented by a wireless terminal of reporting channel state information to a wireless communication network is disclosed. The wireless terminal receives reference symbols on a set of channel state information reference symbol (CSI-RS) resources, and determines a common transmission rank for the set of CSI-RS resources, based on the reference symbols received on a subset of those CSI-RS resources. The terminal then generates CSI feedback as a function of the common transmission rank, and transmits the CSI feedback to the communication network. The CSI feedback may include the common transmission rank itself, or may include different transmission ranks for different CSI-RS resources each determined as a function of the common transmission rank. A complementary method in which a network node uses such a CSI feedback to perform rank adaptation for the set of CSI-RS resources is also disclosed. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056157 | Systems and Methods for Measuring Available Bandwidth in Mobile Telecommunications Networks - A network device receives probe packets communicated by a user equipment device. The network device communicates response packets back to the user equipment device, including timestamps, and/or other information. The user equipment device may be configured to test the performance of different portions of a wireless network (i.e., determine an available bandwidth measurement throughput (ABMT) of the wireless network) by accessing different network devices (or information associated with different network devices). | 02-27-2014 |
20140056158 | Systems and Methods for Measuring Available Bandwidth in Mobile Telecommunications Networks - A network device receives probe packets communicated by a user equipment device. The network device communicates response packets back to the user equipment device, including timestamps, and/or other information. The user equipment device may be configured to test the performance of different portions of a wireless network (i.e., determine an available bandwidth measurement throughput (ABMT) of the wireless network) by accessing different network devices (or information associated with different network devices). | 02-27-2014 |
20140056159 | Systems and Methods for Measuring Available Bandwidth in Mobile Telecommunications Networks - A network device receives probe packets communicated by a user equipment device. The network device communicates response packets back to the user equipment device, including timestamps, and/or other information. The user equipment device may be configured to test the performance of different portions of a wireless network (i.e., determine an available bandwidth measurement throughput (ABMT) of the wireless network) by accessing different network devices (or information associated with different network devices). | 02-27-2014 |
20140056160 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device includes a signal strength check unit that checks the signal strength of a radio signal using a broad radio frequency range, a communication target detection unit that detects a communication target in descending order of the signal strength of the radio signal, which is checked by the signal strength check unit, for each frequency band that is included in the broad radio frequency range. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056161 | NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGER ARCHITECTURE - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing network communications. A traffic manager module may receive a message from a first network device to a second network device. The traffic manager module may serve as a proxy between the first network device and the second network device. The traffic manager module may perform an application layer inspection at the traffic manager module on at least one of the message or a response to the message from the second network device, and forward the message or the response to the message to a third network device based on the application layer inspection at the traffic manager module. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056162 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE RATE MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS ON A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods, apparatus, and computer readable media may adjust an encoding rate based on network conditions between a transmitter and a receiver. Either the transmitter, receiver, or both the transmitter and receiver may determine the encoding rate. In one aspect, a ratio of received network data to transmitted network data is determined. An encoding parameter is then determined based on the determined ratio. In one aspect, the encoding parameter may be used to adjust an encoder. In another aspect, the determined encoding parameter may be transmitted to an encoding or transmitting node. In another aspect, an amount of data buffered in a network is determined. A sustainable throughput of the network is also determined. A transmission rate is then determined based on the sustainable throughput and the amount of data buffered. An encoding parameter is then adjusted based on the transmission rate. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056163 | Systems and Methods for Nearby Channel Measurement - System and method embodiments are provided for nearby channel measurement. The embodiments enable identifying stations that are hidden from one another. In an embodiment, a method in a wireless access point (AP) for identifying channel quality between a first and second group of STAs associated with the AP includes transmitting a first packet to the first group of STAs, wherein the first packet comprises information on measurement time window within which the first group of STAs is to measure a received signal; transmitting scheduling information to the second group of STAs, wherein the scheduling information indicates a time to send a reference packet during the measurement time window; and receiving a measurement report from the first group of STAs after the measurement time window, wherein measurement report includes information on received signal quality at the first group of STAs of a signal transmitted by the second group of STAs. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056164 | RADIO BASE STATION AND METHOD THEREIN - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a radio base station ( | 02-27-2014 |
20140056165 | Verification in a Wireless Communication System - A method implemented by a node in a wireless communication system comprises obtaining ( | 02-27-2014 |
20140056166 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MANAGEMENT METHOD IN A MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, PROCESSING SECTION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a communication system, a base station apparatus, a mobile station apparatus, and a communication method where a configuration message is transmitted or received. The configuration message includes a measurement configuration, where the measurement configuration includes a measurement object and a reporting configuration. The measurement object is used to determine a first cell from among the plurality of cells, the measurement object is linked to the reporting configuration and indicates the measurement frequency, the reporting configuration includes an criterion, and the criterion triggers the mobile station apparatus to send a measurement report. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056167 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SPATIAL CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK FOR MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) - A method and system for feed-back of spatial CSI of an entire spatial channel that connects receive antennas at user equipment and multiple transmit antennas. Spatial discrimination information is provided as feed-back at the transmitter and the receiver connecting the user equipment and a cell. With the user equipment providing the transmitter and the receiver side spatial discrimination information of each sub-channel as feedback, the composite spatial CSI over multiple segments of transmit antennas can be determined. The user equipment may have one or multiple receiving antennas, and the spatial discrimination information can be subband short-term. In some embodiments, the spatial discrimination information at the receiver side is derived from the actual spatial channel while receiver implementation is taken into account. The spatial discrimination information at the transmitter and at the receiver can be can be provided as feedback using codebooks for MIMO precoding. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056168 | METHOD FOR LOGGING AND REPORTING HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAME - A method for reporting, performed UE, in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a logged measurement configuration comprising logging object heterogeneous network information, attempting to detect a radio signal transmitted by a heterogeneous network, checking a heterogeneous network type of the heterogeneous network when the radio signal is detected, determining whether or not the heterogeneous network is a logging object based on the logging object heterogeneous network information and the determined heterogeneous network type, logging information about the heterogeneous network and common logging information if the heterogeneous network is the logging object, and reporting the logged information. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056169 | METHOD FOR LOGGING AND REPORTING INFORMATION ON INTERFERENCE BY IDC TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAME - A method for logging and reporting IDC interference information is provided. The method includes receiving an IDC interference measurement configuration from a network, the IDC interference measurement configuration comprising information instructing that a logging of IDC interference information be started, performing first IDC interference measurement on a first subframe, logging first IDC interference information comprising a first IDC interference measurement result, performing second IDC interference measurement on a second subframe, logging second IDC interference information comprising a second IDC interference measurement result, and reporting the first IDC interference information and the second IDC interference information to the network. | 02-27-2014 |
20140064106 | Interference and Noise Estimation of a Communications Channel - A method of estimating interference and noise of a communications channel includes receiving a data sequence transmitted over the communications channel at a receiver, and computing a sequence of channel estimates based on the received data sequence. The method also includes computing a difference sequence based on the sequence of channel estimates and the sequence of channel estimates subjected to a displacement in time or frequency, and determining a covariance measure of the difference sequence as an estimate of the interference and noise of the communications channel. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064107 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FEATURE-BASED ADDRESSING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for computing an address for communicating with a partner. During operation, the system collects data that represents one or more features of a subject of interest to the partner. The system then extracts the one or more features of the subject from the collected data by performing computations with the collected data. Subsequently, the system computes an address for communicating with the partner based on the extracted one or more features. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064108 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR EXPLOITING FREQUENCY DIVERSITY FOR NEIGBORING CELL MEASUREMENTS - Apparatus and method for wireless communication in a wireless communication network that includes receiving a signal from a network and measuring a minimum bandwidth of the received signal for a measurement region by shifting the measurement region of the signal based on a frequency offset and rotating the measurement region of the signal. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064109 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE - A wireless device transmits downlink interference-related information to a transmission point. The wireless device generates this information by listening to reference signals associated with a first reference signal resource as well as with a second reference signal resource. The wireless device uses these reference signals to estimate a first channel matrix relating to the first reference signal resource and a second channel matrix relating to the second reference signal resource. Using the estimated first and second channel matrices, the wireless device derives a pair of precoding matrices. Precoding matrix indicators representing the precoding matrix pair are sent to the transmission point. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064110 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LAST GASP DEVICE IDENTIFICATION - A method for device identification includes determining a mass event has occurred in a wireless network from a reception of a plurality of signals each having a last gasp message, sampling a plurality of mapped zones associated with a base station, identifying which mapped zones are associated with a disconnected endpoint in a zone list, determining a length of time of the mass event, and selectively providing the zone list to identify disconnected endpoints based at least upon the length of time of the mass event. Each mapped zone includes a plurality of wireless device endpoints associated with the mapped zone. The sampling includes determining whether any of a subset of the endpoints associated with the given mapped zone are disconnected from the wireless network. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064111 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LAST GASP DEVICE DETECTION - A method is provided for device detection by a base station comprising receiving a plurality of signals over a preamble subframe from an endpoint. The plurality of signals are attempting to access an access group of the preamble subframe. Additionally, the plurality of signals are received on a random access channel using a wireless network. Further, the plurality of signals have a plurality of last gasp messages (LGMs). The method additionally comprises determining an allowable rate of collisions for the plurality of signals and determining an actual rate of collisions for the plurality of signals. The method includes increasing the size of the access group allocated to the plurality of signals having the plurality of LGMs, based on whether the actual rate of collisions exceeds the allowable rate of collisions. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064112 | CONTEXT-BASED POSITION DETERMINATION - Disclosed is a method for position determination, including obtaining measurements of at least one characteristic of one or more wireless signals acquired at a mobile station, obtaining a classification of a context of a user co-located with the mobile station, and affecting application of a representation of the signal environment to the measurements for obtaining a position fix based, at least in part, on the classification of the context. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064113 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR INCREASING DATA THROUGHPUT BY SCHEDULING OF POWER MEASUREMENTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Access terminals are adapted to receive and transmit data during one or more frames in a multiframe. Power measurements for a neighboring cell can be scheduled during one or more frames not intended for power measurements. In some examples, the one or more frames not intended for power measurements can include an Idle frame and/or a Packet Timing Advance Control Channel (PTCCH) frame in a 52-frame multiframe structure, as well as an Idle frame and/or a Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH) frame in a 26-frame multiframe structure. Some access terminals may be adapted for facilitating multiple subscriptions, and may operate at least substantially simultaneously in a Connected mode subscription and an Idle mode subscription. In such instances, a neighboring cell for which power measurements are performed may be associated with the Connected mode subscription and/or the Idle mode subscription. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064114 | ACTIVE SENSING METHOD BASED ON SPECTRAL CORRELATION FOR COGNITIVE RADIO SYSTEMS - A design of cognitive radio (CR) signal structure which based on the spectral correlation can be used for active sensing. In this signal structure, the known pilots used for the primary users (PUs) are duplicated and reallocated in the CR transmission signal properly. With this CR signal structure, the received signal of spectrum sensors will become correlated on the subcarriers when PU reoccupation occurs while the CR transmission is active, and thus PU activities can easily be detected by computing the spectral correlation function. As compare with the traditional cyclostationary feature detection scheme, this method can enhance the active sensing performance while remaining the service quality of the CR system, achieving better detection performance in the same detection time, reducing sensing time (about 1/10 of the traditional sensing time), and still reaching the satisfactory outcome even in the circumstances of low SNR and SINR. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064115 | BANDWIDTH SELECTION METHOD - A bandwidth selection method includes capturing at least one first quality information corresponding to a first bandwidth, computing at least one first threshold value according to the at least one first quality information and at least one first weighting index, capturing at least one second quality information corresponding to a second bandwidth, comparing the first threshold value with the second quality information to obtain a first comparison result, and selecting one of the first bandwidth and the second bandwidth as a used bandwidth of a filter according to the first comparison result. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064116 | PROXIMITY AND TAP DETECTION USING A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A method for detecting the proximity of a signal source using wireless systems is contemplated in which a wireless mobile device wirelessly receives packets from a signal source and determines a received signal strength for each packet. The wireless mobile device may store information based upon the received signal strength for each packet, and calculate from the information stored for all the packets, a current path loss value corresponding to a current distance from the wireless mobile device to the signal source. The wireless mobile device may then determine whether the current distance is sufficient to be an enabling condition such as tap, for example, for a data transfer or a transaction between the wireless mobile device and the signal source. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064117 | UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN A MULTI-SIM USER EQUIPMENT - A method of wireless communication in a dual subscriber identification module (SIM) terminal includes transmitting a first synchronization message from a first module associated with a first SIM. The method also includes receiving a first acknowledgment (ACK) message on a fast physical access channel (FPACH) in response to the first synchronization message. The method further includes sharing timing information included in the first ACK between the first module and a second module. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064118 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SATELLITE TERMINAL - Provided is a satellite terminal controlling apparatus and method that may measure a packet loss rate of a return link at a central station, may determine a modulation and coding (MODCOD) value of the return link using the packet loss rate, and may control MODCOD of a satellite terminal with respect to the return link. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064119 | MONITORING APPARATUS, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND MONITORING METHOD - A monitoring apparatus includes a memory, and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to receive plural acknowledgment packets each including an identifier for identifying a packet and information indicating selective acknowledgment which are transmitted from a reception node that has received a data packet transmitted from a transmission node via a network to the transmission node via the network, and determine that a data packet loss occurs in the reception node in a case where a first identifier and first information included in a first acknowledgment packet among the plural acknowledgment packets are respectively matched with a second identifier and second information included in a second acknowledgment packet received after the first acknowledgment packet among the plural acknowledgment packets. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064120 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH RATE SELECTION MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A wireless communication system includes: a control module configured to calculate a maximum throughput to represent a spectral efficiency; a storage module, coupled to the control module, configured to store the maximum throughput in a throughput table; and a communication module, coupled to the control module, configured to transmit a channel quality indicator as a feedback, selected from the throughput table, based on a largest value of the maximum throughput. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064121 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - The strength of electric wave which is transmitted from a wireless communication terminal and received through a leaky coaxial cable is detected. Data transmission is executed to the wireless communication terminal by transmitting the electric wave from the leaky coaxial cable if the detected strength of the electric wave is equal to or greater than a set value, which is changed according to time. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064122 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING TD-SCDMA IDLE INTERVALS IN TDD-LTE MEASUREMENT OPERATIONS - Methods and apparatus are provided for utilizing an idle interval of a first radio access network (RAN) for performing measurements in a second RAN. For certain aspects, the first and second RANs may be a Time Division—Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) network and a Time Division Duplex Long Term Evolution (TDD-LTE) network, respectively. With efficient use of the first RAN's idle interval, increased power savings or increased system throughput may be achieved. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064123 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DISPLAYING STATUS OF WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for providing a status of a wireless network, including: receiving a wireless signal from an access point and status information of the access point; determining processing capacity information of the access point based on the status information of the access point; and displaying wireless network information with respect to the access point, the wireless network information including the processing capacity information of the access point and signal strength information of the received wireless signal. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064124 | MANAGING GUARANTEED BIT RATE QUALITY OF SERVICE RESOURCE ALLOCATION BASED ON GUARANTEED BIT RATE DATA ACTIVITY ON A LINK - In an embodiment, an apparatus (e.g., a client device, an eNodeB, MME, S-GW, P-GW, UTRAN component, etc.) detects a first transition of a client device from an active state to an idle state while the client device is allocated a Quality of Service (QoS) link by a serving network. The apparatus caches QoS information associated with the QoS link, and releases the QoS link in response to the detection of the first transition. The apparatus later detects, after the caching and releasing, a second transition of the client device from the idle state back to the active state. The apparatus re-establishes the QoS link in response to the detection of the second transition using the cached QoS information. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064125 | Power Division Multiple Access - A satellite communication system includes a hub and one or more terminals, wherein the one or more terminals may be configured to communicate over a satellite with the hub using a segment of the satellite's resources and using a single channel per carrier (SCPC) access scheme. Methods are presented herein for facilitating the dimensioning of at least a power characteristic of said space segment using a Demand Assignment Multiple Access approach and for enforcing the dimensioned power characteristic in real-time, or substantially in real-time. Also presented are methods for allocating power to SCPC carriers, wherein a maximum power level for a carrier may be determined using a DAMA technique. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064126 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CALCULATING LOCATION OF MOBILE STATION IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for measuring the indoor position of a UE by a network node according to an embodiment of the present invention may include: receiving, from the UE, measurement information including the intensity of a signal received from an access point (AP) and feedback information including information about a sensor configured to measure movement of the UE and sensor measurement information regarding movement of the UE, measured by the sensor; estimating the position of the UE based on the measurement information and received signal strength (RSS) from the AP, predetermined for each reference point; and calculating the indoor position of the UE by applying the information about the sensor and a sensor correction factor corresponding to the sensor measurement information to the estimated position of the UE. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064127 | RANGING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A ranging method and apparatus in a wireless communication system are provided. The ranging method of a Mobile Station (MS) includes selecting at least one Base Station (BS) for performing ranging, transmitting a ranging signal by using a common ranging region shared by a plurality of BSs, and receiving a response signal, including a ranging result of at least one BS which received the ranging signal, from a central controller. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064128 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A SCANNING IN WLAN - The methods and an apparatuses for scanning in WLAN are disclosed. A method of a scanning of a station (STA) may include monitoring a channel during a probedelay based on a MAC sublayer management entity (MLME)-SCAN.request primitive indicating an active scanning for a target Access Point (AP), receiving a frame including a channel congestion indicator from an AP during the probedelay, generating a MLME-SCAN.change request primitive to request a change of a scanning type parameter included in the MLME-SCAN.request primitive when the channel congestion indicator indicates that the channel is congested, generating a MLME-SCAN.change confirm primitive to confirm the change of the scanning type parameter included in the MLME-SCAN.request primitive as a response of the MLME-SCAN.change request primitive, and performing a passive scanning for the target AP based on the MLME-SCAN.change confirm primitive. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064129 | ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORTING TO IMPROVE THROUGHPUT WHEN USING MULTICARRIER CELLS - A method for measurement reporting to improve throughput when using multicarrier cells is disclosed. The method can include a wireless communication device performing a first measurement of a primary carrier and performing a second measurement of a secondary carrier. The method can further include the wireless communication device deriving a combined measurement as a function of the first measurement and the second measurement. The method can also include the wireless communication device reporting the combined measurement to a serving network. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064130 | GEOGRAPHIC REDUNDANCY FOR CALL SERVERS IN A CELLULAR SYSTEM BASED ON A BEARER-INDEPENDENT CORE NETWORK - In a bearer-independent core network, the switching and transport of the bearer streams is separated from the processing of call sessions that control the bearer streams. The switching and transport of the bearer streams is executed by media gateways and packet switches in the switching and transport layer of the network. The processing of calls sessions that control the bearer streams is executed by call servers in the call control layer of the network. The switching and transport layer of the network may be implemented using ATM or IP technology. In order to redirect the signaling links to a backup call server, a signaling gateway is used. Each media gateway includes a signaling gateway function. The signaling gateways redirect the signaling links by encapsulating each signaling message in a new packet in one embodiment. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064131 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for reporting a channel quality indicator (CQI) in a multi-node system. A terminal measures the CQI on the basis of a final interference power in which interference from at least one node among a plurality of nodes, from which the terminal receives signals, is reduced, and reports the measured CQI to a base station. Improvement of system performance, such as a data rate increase can be expected. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064132 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR DELIVERING MINIMIZATION OF DRIVE-TESTS MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS - Embodiments of the present application discloses a method, system and apparatus for transmitting Minimization of Drive-Tests (MDT) measurement configuration parameters, relate to the field of wireless communications and address the problem that a User Equipment (UE) can not perform MDT measurement when the UE is configured by the network side to perform MDT measurement. In the present application, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) receives MDT measurement configuration parameters of a user equipment transmitted from a Home Subscriber Server (HSS); the MME determines whether cell list information in the MDT measurement configuration parameters includes information of a cell controlled by a base station controlling a serving cell of the user equipment; and the MME transmits the MDT measurement configuration parameters to the base station serving the user equipment when the result of determination is YES. With the invention, the problem of the UE failing to perform MDT measurement can be avoided. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064133 | Nodes and Methods for Enabling Measurements Performed by a Wireless Device - The disclosure relates to a method in a network node of a communications system, for enabling measurements performed by a wireless device, when MBSFN subframes are configured in the system. The method comprises determining ( | 03-06-2014 |
20140071837 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A MESH NETWORK WITH CENTRAL CONTROL OF COMMUNICATION RELATIONSHIPS - A method and apparatus for communication in a wireless sensor network. In one embodiment, one or more routers in a network may be available for communication with one or more star nodes at a randomized time and/or frequency. A connectivity assessment, which may be performed at several different frequencies and/or times, may be performed to evaluate the quality of communications between devices in the network. Primary and secondary communication relationships may be formed between devices to provide for system redundancy. One or more proxies may be maintained where each proxy includes a status of one or more devices in the network, e.g., one or more star nodes or routers. Proxies may be used to handle information requests and/or status change requests, e.g., a proxy may be requested to change a communication relationship between devices in the network and may generate command signals to cause the corresponding devices to make the change. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071838 | SELECTING A MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME FOR BEAMFORMED COMMUNICATION - In adaptive modulation and coding scheme (MCS) selection for directional antenna systems, at least one table is defined that maps different ranges of signal quality values to different sets of MCS parameters. In some implementations, each range corresponds to a separate table (e.g., a given table will include the MCS and other information for that range of signal quality values). In the event an abrupt change in signal quality is detected (e.g., a change in received signal strength greater than or equal to a defined threshold), instead of using a conventional rate selection algorithm, a new MCS is selected through the use of the ranges from the table(s). In this way, a relatively large change in MCS may be accommodated, if warranted by the change in signal quality. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071839 | Bandwidth Probing Messages - Techniques are provided for detecting network characteristics. At a first endpoint device configured to communicate with a second endpoint device in a network, a request is made to a relay server in a network for an address and port assignment on the relay server. The address and port assignment are obtained from the relay server, and a probing packet is sent at a first time instance to the relay server at an address and port corresponding to the address and port assignment. The first time instance is stored in a timestamp field of the probing packet. A response packet responsive to the probing packet is then received from the address and port on the relay server at a second time instance. The second time instance is stored in a timestamp field of the response packet. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071840 | MOBILE COMPUTER CONFIGURED TO SELECT WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A mobile computer can comprise a processor, a memory, and a wireless communication interface. The mobile computer can be configured to periodically monitor one or more network metrics of the currently connected wireless network. In order to maintain an uninterrupted data connection, the mobile computer can be further configured, responsive to determining that at least one pre-defined Quality of Service (QoS) metric of the currently connected network averaged over a pre-defined time period falls outside of an allowable range or at least one pre-defined Quality of Service (QoS) metric of the currently connected network has been outside of an allowable range for at least a pre-defined time period, to select a new wireless network of a plurality of available wireless networks based on at least one network selection criterion and connect to the new wireless network. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071841 | METHOD FOR INTER-CELL DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE MINIMIZATION VIA COMP - A cell edge user central based CoMP CS JP mode selection scheme to minimize inter-cell downlink interference. According to the distribution of different types of users adaptive select optimal transmission scheme. After guaranteeing the performance of cell edge user at first, mode selection should be applied to select suitable paired users in order to increase the cell average throughput. Through carefully designing the SINR gaps and level of interference for mode selection, mode selection is a significant solution for the tradeoff between cell edge user throughput and cell average throughput and the tradeoff between performance and complexity. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071842 | USING DOWNLINK TFCI TO GENERATE A LARGER IDLE INTERVAL - A method of wireless communication is presented. The method includes receiving a transport format combination indicator (TFCI) indicating a number of blocks and a block size for data to be sent on downlink time slots of a current frame and/or a subsequent frame. The method also includes determining when data is not expected to be received on an allocated downlink time slot and performing neighbor cell measurement during the allocated downlink time slot. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071843 | DOPPLER SPREAD AND SNR ESTIMATION FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER - A wireless communications receiver includes a receiving unit configured to receive a radio transmission having Doppler distortion and channel noise. Also included is an estimating unit coupled to the receiving unit and configured to determine a noise-abated maximum Doppler frequency estimate for the Doppler distortion. Additionally, the estimating unit is further configured to determine a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) estimate based on the noise-abated maximum Doppler frequency estimate. In another aspect, a method of operating a wireless communications receiver is provided. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071844 | POWER MANAGEMENT BASED ON ADAPTIVE RECEIVER SELECTION - In order to reduce power consumption of an electronic device during wireless communication, the electronic device may transition between a baseline (simple) receiver and a higher-power advanced receiver based on network conditions and/or environmental conditions. For example, the transition to the advanced receiver may occur when it offers improved communication performance over the baseline receiver, such as when there is significant interference and a high data rate, or when there is significant interference and a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is low. Similarly, the transition to the baseline receiver may occur when the capabilities of the advanced receiver are not needed, such as when there is less interference, or when the data rate is lower and the SNR is high. In this way, the electronic device can avoid the added power consumption associated with the advanced receiver except where the communication performance offered by the advanced receiver is needed. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071845 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR DETECTING, QUANTIFYING AND LOCALIZING OF WIRELESS INTERFERERS - A method, system and program product comprise receiving spectrum data from one or more WiFi communication devices being configured to be operable as observers of transmissions within a frequency band associated with a WiFi communication system. The spectrum data at least comprises signal levels and timing information for WiFi communication signals and non-WiFi signals observed within the frequency band. WiFi interferers are distinguished using at least the signal levels and timing information for the non-WiFi signals. A real-time interference impact on the observed WiFi communication signals for each of the distinguished WIFi interferers is determined. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071846 | System and Method for Wireless Access Point Layout and Network Operation - The present disclosure describes systems and methods for creating and/or deploying access points for a wireless network in a multi-unit building or for a private residential neighborhood. Additionally, described herein are methods for operating a wireless network in a multi-unit building that was either deployed according to the concepts described herein or was pre-existing. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071847 | Sectorization for Grouping Terminals - A geographic region in which an access point AP lies is divided into sectors, each sector associated with a group; and a station is assigned to a group based on location information of the station relative to the sectors. The station can assign itself to a group autonomously, after determining the number of groups from signalling received from the AP. Or the AP can do the group assignments, such as by assessing distance between adjacent stations. The AP can utilize the station's location information to test whether a first link between the station and a first node of a first group is sufficient. If the test indicates that the first link is sufficient the AP can assign the station to the first group, else it will utilize the location information to test whether a second link between the station and a second node of a second group is sufficient. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071848 | METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method and apparatus for reporting channel state information (CSI), wherein the method in which a terminal reports CSI comprises the steps of: receiving configuration information for periodic CSI reporting from a base station; and transmitting CSI information for each of a plurality of sets of CSI reports based on said configuration information to said base station via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH). Said plurality of sets of CSI reports contains one or more mutually different subframes. | 03-13-2014 |
20140078909 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTION OF A DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL (DCCH) - Apparatus and methods for wireless communication that includes measuring energy on a first path metric and second path metric, comparing the energy on the first path metric and second path metric to a predetermined threshold and determining if Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) energy is present. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078910 | REDUCTION OF POWER CONSUMPTION AND TIME FOR TIME-OF-FLIGHT POSITIONING VIA NEIGHBOR LIST - Systems and methods are directed to use of a neighbor list for wireless indoor navigation. The neighbor list may include related information regarding all neighboring access points (APs). The neighbor list can be transmitted, at least partially, to include the related information of a desired number of or all APs in the neighbor list from one AP to a wireless device. The neighbor list can be transmitted in a Neighbor Report Response (NRR) or a time-of-flight (ToF) Response and allow the wireless device to scan for minimal number of APs for ToF measurements. By using the neighbor list, power consumption and time can be significantly reduced during wireless indoor navigation. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078911 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO DETERMINE THE AMOUNT OF DELAY IN ROUND TRIP LATENCY FOR A CONNECTION WHERE THE TCP TRAFFIC DOES NOT CONTAIN MULTI-PACKET RESPONSES OR MAY NOT BE TRANSACTION ORIENTED TRAFFIC. - A network round trip time measurement apparatus and method employ request/response timing to determine network round trip time. An initial network round trip value is determined, and subsequent network round trip values are determined for possible better measurement values. Response send time and subsequent next request receipt times are employed to determine network round trip values, as well as response and ack packet times. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078912 | WEIGHTED RSRP MEASUREMENT - Systems and methods are disclosed for measuring received signal power at a mobile terminal in a cellular communications network in such a manner as to efficiently provide highly accurate received signal power measurements in the presence of strong inter-cell interference. In one embodiment, in order to measure received signal power for a measured cell, a mobile terminal selects weighting parameters for a number of time-frequency samples of a reference signal of the measured cell based, at least in part, on inter-cell interference from one or more synchronized interfering cells and inter-cell interference from one or more non-synchronized interfering cells. The mobile terminal applies the time-frequency samples of the reference signal of the measured cell and the corresponding weighting parameters to corresponding time-frequency samples of a received signal from the measured cell in order to obtain a measurement of the received power for the measured cell. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078913 | DATA PACKET STREAM FINGERPRINT - Techniques for identifying stream fingerprints are provided. A stream of data packets may be received. In one aspect, a stream fingerprint may be determined based on the stream of data packets. An application associated with the stream may be determined based on the stream fingerprint. In another aspect, a stream may be partially matched while a fully matched stream fingerprint has not been determined. As additional packets are received, the stream may become fully matched. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078914 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROGRAMMABLE MATCHING OF DETUNED RF COMPONENTS - Systems and methods are disclosed for returning RF components which exhibit a mismatch with a coupled load. A tuning circuit may be coupled to a signal path of the RF component, wherein the tuning circuit includes a plurality of loads, a switching element associated with each load, wherein each switching element brings the associated load into and out of the signal path, a control line for each switching element, and a phase stage configured to introduce a phase shift, such as 90°, between a first subset of the loads and a second subset of the loads. The disclosure also includes routines for establishing optimum settings for the tuning circuit. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078915 | Exporting Real Time Network Traffic Latency and Buffer Occupancy - Techniques are presented herein to facilitate the monitoring of occupancy of a buffer in a network device. Packets are received at a network device. Information is captured describing occupancy of the buffer caused by packet flow through the buffer in the network device. Analytics packets are generated containing the information. The analytics packets from the network device for retrieval of the information contained therein for analysis, replay of buffer occupancy, etc. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078916 | Systems and Methods for Assessing Jitter Buffers - A system having one or more processors and a memory, sends a plurality of test audio packets at a level of signal complexity deviating from a model level of signal complexity to a destination device through one or more networks. The system then receives a response to the plurality of test audio packets, where the response is indicative of a value for a quality of service characteristic associated with the one or more networks, and where the value for the quality of service characteristic is determined by how the plurality of test audio packets deviate from the model level of signal complexity when received by a remote device. In response to receiving the response to the plurality of test audio packets, the system activates a signal correction action when the value for the quality of service characteristic fails to meet a performance threshold. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078917 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ASSESSING DECODE RELIABILITY OF RADIO TRANSMISSIONS - Disclosed are an apparatus and method for assessing decode reliability of voice, data and control channel transmissions. In an aspect, the apparatus and method are configured to receive one or more radio frames or parts of a frame on a downlink channel; demodulate the received one or more frames or parts of the frame; decode the demodulated one or more frames or parts of the frame; compute one or more demodulator-based metrics and one or more decoder-based metrics; combine the one or more demodulator-based metrics and the one or more decoder-based metrics using a reliability function that assesses reliability of the decoded one or more frames or parts of the frame; and accept or reject the decoded one or more frames or parts of the frame based on the assessment of the reliability of the decoded frames or parts of the frame. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078918 | DYNAMIC POWER-SAVING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MULTI-LANE-BASED ETHERNET - Provided are a power-saving apparatus and method for multi-lane-based Ethernet, which allow a multi-lane-based Ethernet apparatus to improve energy-conserving efficiency while minimizing the deterioration of the performance of a network. The power-saving apparatus includes: a multi-lane communication unit configured to distribute an input communication packet between a plurality of transmission lanes, photoelectrically convert the input communication packet and transmit the photoelectrically-converted communication packet; a multi-buffer unit configured to comprise one or more buffers, store the input communication packet in each active buffer and transmit the input communication packet to the multi-lane communication unit; and a control unit configured to monitor the multi-buffer unit, compare the size of memory space in use of the multi-buffer unit with a predefined threshold and switch the one or more buffers to an active or inactive state based on the results of the comparison. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078919 | Methods and Arrangements for CSI Reporting - A method in a wireless device for reporting Channel State Information (CSI). The wireless device is comprised in a wireless communications system. The method includes receiving a CSI process configuration and a request for CSI information from a network node. The method further includes reporting CSI for one or more CSI processes. The CSI reflects the state of the channel for a CSI reference resource. According to the method, the CSI reference resource is determined based on the number of configured CSI processes. Related devices are also disclosed. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078920 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication. In one aspect, an apparatus for wireless communication is provided. The apparatus includes a receiver configured to receive a wireless signal comprising a packet. At least a portion of the wireless signal may be received over a channel with a channel bandwidth of at least approximately five hundred megahertz. The packet may be formed from at least one orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol comprising at least one hundred and twenty-eight tones. The apparatus further comprises a processor configured to evaluate the wireless signal. The processor may comprise a transform module configured to convert the at least one OFDM symbol into a frequency domain signal. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078921 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA, DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DATA, DEVICE FOR RECEIVING DATA, AND SYSTEM INCLUDING THE DEVICES - A device for transmitting data includes a data receiving unit, a channel quality measurement unit, and a modulating unit. The data receiving unit is configured to receive first transmission data for a first terminal and second transmission data for a second terminal. The channel quality measurement unit is configured to measure a first reception sensitivity of a channel connected to the first terminal and to measure a second reception sensitivity of a channel connected to the second terminal, and a modulating unit configured to determine a modulation scheme based on the first and second reception sensitivities, to encode the first transmission data and the second transmission data according to the determined modulation scheme to obtain modulated data, and to transmit the modulated data to the first and second terminals. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078922 | Interference Detection - Measures for enabling accurate and prompt inter-cell interference detection in a multi-cell environment. Such measures may include, at a network side of a cellular system, inputting a code-spreaded interleaved frequency division multiple access signal, despreading the inputted signal using a plurality of user-specific spreading codes including at least one spreading code of a user of a subject cell and at least one spreading code of a user of a neighboring cell, and detecting inter-cell interference information on the basis of user-related despreaded signals. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078923 | Information Acquiring Method and Base Station - An information acquiring method and a base station. The method comprises: receiving by a target base station reception status information of a multimedia broadcast multicast service of user equipment reported by a source base station when the user equipment is handed over between cells; wherein the reception status information comprises information indicating that the user equipment is receiving a multimedia broadcast multicast service, or information indicating that the user equipment finishes receiving a multimedia broadcast multicast service. With the embodiments of the present invention, the source base station of the user equipment notifies the target base station of reception status information of multimedia broadcast multicast service of the user equipment when the user equipment is handed over between cells, thereby guaranteeing the continuity of the MBMS of the user equipment. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078924 | Broadband Cable Network Utilizing Common Bit-Loading - A broadband cable network (“BCN”) for determining a common bit-loading modulation scheme for communicating between a plurality of nodes in the BCN is disclosed. The BCN may include a transmitting node within the plurality of nodes where the transmitting node is capable of sending a probe signal to the plurality of nodes, and at least one receiving node within the plurality of nodes in signal communication with the transmitting node. The at least one receiving node is capable of transmitting a first response signal in response to receiving the probe signal. The first response signal includes a first bit-loading modulation scheme determined by the at least one receiving node. The transmitting node is further capable of determining the common bit-loading modulation scheme from the first response signal. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078925 | Apparatus and Method for Communication - Apparatus and method for recognizing Global System for Mobile communication (GSM) signals are provided. The solution comprises obtaining as an input a sampled signal; determining the 8 | 03-20-2014 |
20140078926 | INITIATOR APPARATUS, TARGET APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TIMEOUT DETECTION METHOD, AND TIMEOUT DETECTION PROGRAM - Provided is an initiator apparatus that, when issuing access requests for remote access via wireless communication to a storage section that processes only one access request at a time, can easily detect timeouts with one timer irrespective of the number of access requests issued via wireless communication. In this apparatus, an access-request processor ( | 03-20-2014 |
20140086069 | EFFICIENT NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYSIS USING A HIERARCHICAL KEY COMBINATION DATA STRUCTURE - A network access device for network traffic analysis of a plurality of client devices in a local area network (LAN) maintains a hierarchical key combination traffic analysis (HKCTA) table for each of the client devices of the LAN (LAN devices) to store network traffic statistics of each LAN device, wherein the HKCTA includes entries identified by keys, each key being formed based on a combination of zero or more packet attributes of packets or flow attributes of a network flow associated with the packets (packet/flow attributes) exchanged by the LAN device. Each key represents one of hierarchical levels of a hierarchy of the entries. Each level of the hierarchy includes all packet/flow attributes of its parent hierarchical level plus at least one additional packet/flow attribute that is not present in its parent hierarchical level. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086070 | Bandwidth Management - In some embodiments, a system includes a shared, high bandwidth resource (e.g. a memory system), multiple agents configured to communicate with the shared resource, and a communication fabric coupling the multiple agents to the shared resource. The communication fabric may be equipped with limiters configured to limit bandwidth from the various agents based on one or more performance metrics measured with respect to the shared, high bandwidth resource. For example, the performance metrics may include one or more of latency, number of outstanding transactions, resource utilization, etc. The limiters may dynamically modify their limit configurations based on the performance metrics. In an embodiment, the system may include multiple thresholds for the performance metrics, and exceeding a given threshold may include modifying the limiters in the communication fabric. There may be hysteresis implemented in the system as well in some embodiments, to reduce the frequency of transitions between configurations. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086071 | ANTENNA RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR MULTI-ANTENNA STRUCTURE - A radio network node antenna management system dynamically manages a multi-antenna structure ( | 03-27-2014 |
20140086072 | SELF ADAPTIVE MULTI-LEVEL DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL FOR NOISE-LIMITED WIRELESS CELLULAR NETWORKS - The invention provides a self-adaptive downlink power control scheme for OFDMA-based wireless cellular networks suitable for noise-limited environments. Downlink power levels are assigned in a distributed manner in the absence of any requirement for coordination or cooperation between cells. Distributed assignment allows for more optimal usage of the available transmit power at the base stations and more complete exploitation of the flexibility of frequency domain scheduling. In one embodiment, base stations in a cellular network service mobile user equipment within the respective base station coverage areas, and categorize the user equipment in a plurality of power levels according to certain criteria in accordance with such factors as channel experience and quality. A load-balancing self-adjustment mechanism allows automatic balancing of the load between different power levels. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086073 | DETERMINING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE WITH A NETWORK DEVICE - A demarcation point device positioned at a customer network to provide the customer network access to a service provider network. The demarcation point device comprises a control unit that transmits one or more service query data packets on the customer network to test at least one service within the customer network. The control unit receives one or more service reply data packets from the customer network in response to transmitting the service query data packets, and determines one or more service statistics based on one or more of the service query data packets and the service reply data packets. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086074 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods of establishing a communications channel between a first telephony device and a second telephony device obtain information about the capabilities of various data network elements that can be used to establish the communications channel. The information about the elements is used to select a combination of elements that are used to establish the communications channel. A communications channel may also be monitored while it is in use. If the requirements for the channel change, the communications channel may also be changed accordingly. If any of the elements become incapable of providing the required level of service or functionality for a communications channel, the element may be removed from the communications channel. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086075 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR SIMULATING CHANNEL CONDITIONS - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for simulating channel conditions are disclosed. According to one method, the method includes storing a plurality of system level metrics associated with various channel conditions. The method also includes receiving data from a device under test (DUT). The method further includes for each of a plurality of user devices or simulated user devices during a test period: identifying, using information about the received data and a precomputed channel type configuration, a first system level metric from the plurality of system level metrics, and providing the first system level metric to the DUT. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086076 | IDLE TIME SLOT ALLOCATION FOR IRAT MEASUREMENT IN TD-HSDPA - A user equipment (UE) dynamically adjusts a decoding time to accommodate a delay associated with decoding a high-speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) to avoid wasting idle time slots that would otherwise be deemed busy time slots. The UE determines a dynamic protection line that extends beyond a last time slot of a subframe. The dynamic protection line is calculated based on an amount of time to complete the processing and decoding of a control information. This dynamic protection line provides a dynamically determined delay for decoding the HS-SCCH. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086077 | Method and Apparatus for Combined Adaptive Beamforming and MIMO in Indoor Wireless LAN - A wireless local area network (WLAN) device comprising a processor, a transceiver coupled to the processor, a switching mechanism coupled to the transceiver, a beamforming antenna assembly coupled to the switching mechanism, and a multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) antenna assembly coupled to the switching mechanism. Included is an apparatus comprising a processor and a memory coupled to the processor, wherein the memory comprises instructions that cause the processor to calibrate a WLAN device, select an optimal antenna configuration, track the WLAN device performance, and wait for a triggering event. Also included is an adaptive antenna method comprising calibrating a WLAN device, selecting an optimal antenna configuration, tracking the WLAN device performance, and waiting for a triggering event. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086078 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HYBRID CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus, e.g., base station, determines a plurality of component carriers configured for a user equipment (UE) served by the apparatus. The plurality of component carriers includes a primary component carrier and a secondary component carrier. The primary component carrier may be a time division duplex (TDD) carrier having a same uplink:downlink configuration as a first cell at a neighboring base station, and the secondary component carrier may be a TDD carrier having a different uplink:downlink configuration as a second cell at the neighboring base station. The apparatus exchanges data with the UE according to an effective uplink-downlink subframe partition of the configured component carriers. The effective uplink-downlink subframe partition may be time varying and the apparatus may operate to limit interference due to the different TDD configurations at the serving and neighbor cells. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086079 | System Level Emulation of TD-SCDMA Wireless Networks - A wireless network emulation system undersamples log files when the conditions represented in the log files would require a faster refresh rate than the channel emulator can provide. A representative sample may be selected based on number of channel taps, delay spread, maximum value, or being first, last or otherwise identifiable within a group. The RF information from the selected sample is utilized as being representative of a group of related samples for a given time period corresponding to the refresh rate of the channel emulator. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086080 | METRIC COMPUTATION FOR INTERFERENCE-AWARE ROUTING - Systems and methods for computing and/or utilizing mutual information based link metrics for a link in a wireless mesh network are disclosed. In one embodiment, one or more mutual information values are computed for a link between a transmitter of a first network node and a receiver of a second network node in a wireless mesh network. Each of the one or more mutual information values is computed for a different hypothesized transmission mode for the link. One or more link metrics for the link are computed as a function of the mutual information values, where each link metric is computed based on a different one of the one or more mutual information values. In this manner, a link metric is computed for each of the one or more hypothesized transmission modes for the link. At least one of the link metrics are then provided to a routing update module. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086081 | CHANNEL QUALITY MEASUREMENT AND TRANSMIT POWER ALLOCATION IN A DYNAMIC SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A dynamic spectrum management (DSM) engine may determine the channel quality of one or more channels associated with the DSM engine when packets are not being transmitted over the channels. For example, the DSM engine may trigger a channel quality measurement on a non-primary channel on a condition that a predetermined period of time has lapsed since the last activity associated with the non-primary channel. Channel quality measurement may be triggered via a data sending event on the non-primary channel such as sending a data frame on the non-primary channel. The DSM engine may perform respective quality measurements on multiple channels and store the respective quality values in a database. Time-averaged channel qualities for the channels may be computed based on the stored quality values for computing transmit power distribution of across the channels. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086082 | INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - An interference measurement method and apparatus for use in a Distributed Antenna System (DAS) is provided. The method for transmitting channel state information based on interference measurement of a terminal in a Distributed Antenna System (DAS) according to the present disclosure includes receiving configuration of Interference Measurement Resource (IMR) for measuring interferences caused by plural Transmission Points (TPs), receiving control information including scheduling information on Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), determining whether IMR-based interference measurement and PDSCH reception occur at a same subframe, and transmitting the channel state information generated according to a result of the determination. The interference measurement method and apparatus of the present disclosure is capable of measuring interference for efficient communication in the distributed antenna system. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086083 | UPLINK FREQUENCY CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME - Provided are an uplink frequency control method and a terminal apparatus using the same. The uplink frequency control method includes measuring a frequency offset with respect to a downlink, deriving a frequency offset component with respect to an uplink through the measured frequency offset, and correcting an uplink frequency offset using the derived frequency offset component. Therefore, by controlling an uplink frequency through a simple operation in a terminal, baseband design of a base station can be simplified, and uplink SNR performance can be improved. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086084 | System and Method for Configuring Channel State Information in a Communications System - A method for communicating in a wireless communications system includes generating a channel state information (CSI) process information element (IE) including a CSI process identifier, a non-zero padded CSI-reference signal (CSI-RS) identifier, an interference measurement resource (IMR) identifier, and channel quality indicator (CQI) report configuration information. The method also includes transmitting the CSI process IE. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086085 | CHANNEL MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a channel measurement method and apparatus. The method includes: configuring, for each frequency band of N frequency bands having a same carrier frequency, according to a measurement demand, reference signal information corresponding to each frequency band, so that reference signal densities included in configured reference signal information of at least two frequency bands of the N frequency bands are different, where N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, the reference signal information refers to information required to generate a reference signal, the reference signal density refers to a distribution density on a time domain or a distribution density on a frequency domain of the reference signal or a pattern of the reference signal; and notifying a user equipment of the reference signal information, so that the user equipment performs channel measurement according to the reference signal information. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086086 | MULTI-USER MULTI-STREAM BEAMFORMING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND BASE STATION - The present invention relates to a multi-user multi-stream beamforming method and apparatus, and a base station. The multi-user multi-stream beamforming method includes the steps of: a) calculating a beamforming matrix of each user in the multi-user according to a minimum leakage principle; b) determining a user average Signal to Leakage Noise Ratio (SLNR) of the multi-user according to the beamforming matrix of each user; c) determining whether the user average SLNR is stable, and if the user average SLNR is not stable, returning to step a) to recalculate the beamforming matrix of each user by using the calculated beamforming matrix of each user. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086087 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THROUGHPUT ENHANCEMENT - A method in a first node of a network comprises computing a packet duration when using a first unicast profile with a first type preamble and a packet duration when using a second unicast profile with a second type preamble; comparing the computed packet durations so as to determine one from the first and second unicast profiles which yields a shorter duration; and sending the packet to a second node by using the determined unicast profile. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086088 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING SCHEDULING INFORMATION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for reporting scheduling information. The method includes: configuring a carrier as a primary carrier and configuring other carriers as secondary carriers according to an indication message sent by a network; setting a reporting format, where the reporting format includes a first reporting format and a second reporting format, the first reporting format includes UPH, TEBS, HLBS, and HLID information in sequence from left to right, a total length of the second reporting format is the same as that of the first reporting format, the second reporting format includes first information and second information, the first information includes UPH information of one or more secondary carriers, and the second information includes reserved bit information or format identification bit information; and reporting scheduling information in the reporting format to the network. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086089 | METHOD FOR DETECTING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN BASE STATIONS AND BASE STATION - The present invention provides a method for detecting interference between base stations and a base station. The method includes: receiving, by a first base station, a command sent by an operation maintenance center, wherein the command comprises a frame number of a specified frame; collecting, by the first base station, a signal in an uplink sub-frame of the specified frame, wherein the collected signal comprises a signal obtained by collecting an index sequence sent by a second base station in a downlink sub-frame of the specified frame; and determining, by the first base station, an index sequence of the second base station, wherein the index sequence of the second base station is selected from a plurality of candidate index sequences, each of which is used to be correlated with the collected signal. Embodiments of the present invention can improve the detection efficiency and performance. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086090 | DISTRIBUTED ADMISSION CONTROL - A first network client requests initiation of a data transfer with a second network client. An admission control facility (ACF) responds to the initiation request by performing admission analysis to determine whether to initiate the data transfer. The ACF sends one or more packets to the second network client. In response, the second network client sends acknowledgment packets back to the ACF. The ACF performs admission analysis based on the packets sent and the acknowledgment packets, and determines whether the data transfer should be initiated based on the analysis. The admission analysis may be based on a variety of factors, such as the average time to receive an acknowledgment for each packet, the variance of the time to receive an acknowledgment for each packet, a combination of these factors, or a combination of these and other factors. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086091 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ANALYZING NETWORK TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTIC - A method for analyzing a network transmission characteristic, includes: receiving, by an intermediate network element, a service packet sent by a first service network element through the intermediate network element to a second service network element, where the service packet carries a service stream identifier, service stream information, and a control rule, where the service stream identifier is used to identify a service stream, the service stream information is used to provide a parameter that is required during transmission characteristic analysis, and the control rule is used to determine a type of the transmission characteristic analysis; and determining, by the intermediate network element, the type of the transmission characteristic analysis according to the received control rule, and performing, according to the service stream information, the transmission characteristic analysis on the service stream identified by the service stream identifier in a network application. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086092 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL FEEDBACK BASED ON REFERENCE SIGNAL - Techniques for supporting channel measurement and reporting in a wireless communication system are described. In one design, a cell transmits a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) used for channel estimation and coherent demodulation and a channel spatial information reference signal (CSI-RS) used for channel measurement and channel feedback reporting. The cell may transmit the CSI-RS less frequently than the CRS, or from more antenna ports than the CRS, or on fewer resource elements than the CRS, or a combination thereof. In one design, a user equipment (UE) determines at least one bandwidth part configured for the UE, with each bandwidth part covering at least one subband. The UE receives the CRS and CSI-RS from the cell, determines channel feedback information for the at least one bandwidth part based on the CSI-RS, sends the channel feedback information to the cell, and receives data transmitted by the cell based on the channel feedback information. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086093 | REFERENCE SIGNAL SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - An implementation manner of the present invention provides a reference signal sequence configuration method. The method includes: selecting, by a network device and from candidate IDs, an ID used for generating a reference signal initialization sequence for a terminal, where the candidate IDs include at least two IDs, and the selected ID does not include a scrambling ID; and generating a reference signal initialization sequence for the terminal according to the selected ID. An implementation manner of the present invention further provides a network device. In the reference signal sequence configuration method and the network device, a reference signal initialization sequence is generated according to the selected ID, thereby providing a manner of generating a reference signal initialization sequence different from the manner in the prior art. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086094 | TERMINAL MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION IN CARRIER AGGREGATION - There are provided measures for terminal measurement configuration in carrier aggregation, said measures exemplarily comprising a configuration of one or more carriers for automatic terminal measurements relating to network performance on said one or more carriers, said one or more carriers being carriers in a carrier aggregation for one or more terminals, wherein said configuration may comprise at least one condition. According to such configuration, automatic terminal measurements may be performed simultaneously on the configured one or more carriers or on the configured one or more carriers based on a predetermined priority of each carrier. Said measures may exemplarily be applied for in an MDT context. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086095 | METHOD OF MEASURING CHANNEL QUALITY IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method of measuring channel quality in a wireless access system and an apparatus for same. The method of measuring channel quality in a wireless access system includes the steps of: measuring channel quality using each CRS (cell-specific reference signal) transmitted in 0 | 03-27-2014 |
20140092755 | REDUCING WIRELESS RECONNECTION TIME OF A COMPUTING DEVICE - Technologies for reducing connection time to a wireless access point includes recording wireless connection information in a log, computing parameters as a function of past wireless connection information in the log, generating an ordered list of wireless access points most likely to be available for reconnection at a desired time as a function of recent wireless connection information in the log, and directly probing a wireless access point instead of initiating a wireless access point scan. In some embodiments, computing parameters as a function of past wireless connection information in the log comprises performing genetic programming operations to generate prediction programs for later prediction of wireless access points most likely to be available for reconnection at a desired time. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092756 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES TO PROVIDE TIME MARKERS FOR A PACKET STREAM - A time marker for a data packet stream is generated. The packets are grouped into a block based on the time marker. The block of data packets is stored in a memory. A block of the data packets can be terminated based on the time marker. A block header is generated for the block. Statistics associated with the packet stream is captured based on the time marker. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092757 | Controlling Data Synchronization and Backup Services - A method implemented in a router, the method comprising measuring a load of normal traffic on a network link to generate a first measurement, initiating a backup service based on the first measurement, and transmitting backup data traffic associated with the backup service on the network link, wherein the normal traffic is not associated with the backup service, and wherein the backup data traffic has lower priority than the normal traffic. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092758 | PROCESSING FOR A CARRIER ACCORDING TO A CARRIER TYPE - A mobile device receives information relating to a first carrier of a first type, where the information is received from a network node in a wireless access network that supports carrier aggregation that includes the first carrier of the first type and at least another carrier of a second, different type. The mobile device uses the information to perform processing relating to the first carrier of the first type or a cell of the first type. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092759 | LOCATIONING USING DIFFERENTIAL PHASE MEASUREMENTS OF IEEE 802.11 PREAMBLES - A method and apparatus for locationing using differential phase measurements of IEEE 802.11 preambles. A first step includes providing a local clock at the same frequency as the IEEE 802.11 preambles. This step includes synchronizing the local clocks at multiple receivers with a reference clock, for example, using Synchronous Ethernet. A next step includes receiving IEEE 802.11 packets from a transmitter by at least three fixed receivers. A next step includes determining a phase offset between the local clock and any nearest cycle of a preamble in the received packets in each of the receivers. A next step includes locating the transmitter using each of the phase offsets. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092760 | RANDOMIZATION PROCEDURE FOR ASSIGNING INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT RESOURCES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatus are provided for assigning interference measurement resources. A method includes receiving at least one identifier, which determines, at least in part, at least one interference measurement resource that partially overlaps with another at least one interference measurement resource. The at least one interference measurement resource comprises a number of resource elements out of a set of resource elements. The method also includes measuring interference based at least in part on the at least one interference measurement resource. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092761 | USER EQUIPMENT, NETWORK NODE AND METHODS THEREIN - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a user equipment ( | 04-03-2014 |
20140092762 | TECHNIQUES FOR EFFICIENTLY UPDATING ROUTING INFORMATION - Techniques for efficiently updating routing information in a network device such as a router. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the routing information is updated upon creation or deletion of an overlay tunnel without the network device having to regenerate a Shortest Path Tree (SPT) by performing full Shortest Path First (SPF) processing. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092763 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK, AND CORRESPONDING SENSOR NODE, SENSOR NETWORK, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method for managing a wireless sensor network comprising a plurality of sensor nodes, in which the sensor nodes are configured for detecting physical quantities. The method includes setting at least one configuration parameter identifying a service density or monitoring resolution and detecting for a sensor node which physical quantities are detected via respective surrounding sensor nodes. It is verified for the sensor node whether the sensor node is configured for detecting a physical quantity that is also detected via one of the surrounding sensor nodes. It is determined according to the configuration parameter identifying a service density or monitoring resolution, whether the sensor node must activate or de-activate detection of the physical quantity that is also detected via surrounding sensor nodes. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092764 | RECEPTION DEVICE AND RECEPTION METHOD - A reception device includes: an RF circuit configured to receive a first signal transmitted from a first transmission device; and a processor configured to: determine whether at least one symbol of the first signal has a probability of receiving interference from a second signal transmitted from a second transmission device, and measure a reception quality based on a known signal mapped to a symbol other than the at least one symbol determined to have the probability of receiving the interference from the second signal, the known signal being among known signals mapped to symbols of the first signal. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092765 | Heterogeneous Self-Organizing Network for Access and Backhaul - This application discloses methods for creating self-organizing networks implemented on heterogeneous mesh networks. The self-organizing networks can include a computing cloud component coupled to the heterogeneous mesh network. In the methods and computer-readable mediums disclosed herein, a processor receives an environmental condition for a mesh network. The processor may have measured the environmental condition, or it could have received it from elsewhere, e.g., internally stored information, a neighboring node, a server located in a computing cloud, a network element, user equipment (“UE”), and the like. After receiving the environmental condition, the processor evaluates it and determines whether an operational parameter within the mesh network should change to better optimize network performance. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092766 | SCALABLE MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL FOR MULTI-HOP HIGH BANDWIDTH COMMUNICATIONS - A scalable medium access control (“MAC”) module is provided that avoids conflict resource reservation so that network performance does not degrade as the number of hops or nodes in a wireless network increases. The MAC also provides different access schemes for traffic with different quality of service (“QoS”) requirements such that QoS is guaranteed and network resources are efficiently utilized. Furthermore, the resource allocation scheme determines the routing path as resources is allocated for data traffice, thereby achieving more robust layer-2 routing at the MAC layer. Finally, the scalable MAC is compliant with both WiMedia MAC and IEEE 802.15.3 MAC. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092767 | METHOD FOR TRANSITIONING RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL STATE OF USER EQUIPMENT TO IDLE STATE, SYSTEM THEREFOR, AND THE SAME USER EQUIPMENT - In a WCDMA mobile communication system, when the amount of packet traffic transmitted to or received from a UE decreases during a predetermined time in a CELL_DCH state in which a WCDMA packet data connection has been established, the UE transitions to a CELL_FACH state by a radio network controller (RNC). Thereafter, it is determined if there is no transmitted or received packet traffic during a certain time in the CELL_FACH state (which is an RRC state in which an RRC connection has been connected, and the dedicated physical channel has been released). When it is determined that there is no transmitted or received packet traffic during the certain time, the UE requests a network to release the RRC connection by utilizing a Signaling Connection Release Indication (SCRI) message. The invention enables a UE to check a packet transmission or reception flow, and to directly transmit the SCRI message to the network. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092768 | MODEM AND NETWORK SEARCH METHOD OF MODEM - The present application provides a modem and a network search method of the modem. The method includes: sampling a signal level value and a signal quality value of a serving cell; obtaining a signal power condition according to the signal level value, and obtaining a signal stability condition according to the signal quality value; and when both the signal power condition and the signal stability condition are higher than set conditions, determining a network search state as an off state. In embodiments of the present application, power consumption and a workload may be reduced. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092769 | DYNAMIC MULTI-PATH FORWARDING FOR SHARED-MEDIA COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a quality of one or more links of a particular node in a communication network may be determined, and then whether the quality of the one or more links is below a threshold may also be determined. In response to determining that the quality of at least one of the one or more links is above the threshold, a select one of the at least one of the one or more links with quality above the threshold may be utilized for communication with the particular node. Conversely, in response to determining that the quality of each of the one or more links is below the threshold, multi-path forwarding over a plurality of links of the particular node may be utilized for communication with the particular node. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092770 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRIGGERING RADIO LINK CONTROL PACKET DISCARD AND RADIO LINK CONTROL RE-ESTABLISHMENT - A method and apparatus for triggering radio link control (RLC) re-establishment and/or protocol data unit (PDU) discard are disclosed. An RLC entity maintains a state variable for counting a total number of transmissions and/or retransmissions of an RLC PDU and its PDU segments. If the state variable reaches a threshold, the RLC entity initiates RLC re-establishment and/or discards the RLC PDU and PDU segments. The state variable may be incremented each time a negative acknowledgement is received for at least a portion of the RLC PDU or when a retransmission is considered for the RLC PDU or a portion of the RLC PDU. The RLC entity may increase a state variable proportionate to a retransmitted data size. The RLC entity may maintain separate state variables for the RLC PDU and PDU segments and counts the number of transmissions and/or retransmissions for the RLC PDU and the PDU segments. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092771 | Technique for RF Performance Metric Estimation - A technique for obtaining a radio frequency (RF) performance metric estimate for a receiver used for at least one of a positioning measurement and a timing measurement is described. A method implementation of that technique includes the steps of calculating at least one of a detection probability and a false alarm rate for a radio signal usable for the measurement, and obtaining at least one RF performance metric estimate for the receiver based on at least one of the calculated detection probability and the calculated false alarm rate. | 04-03-2014 |
20140098680 | MOBILITY SUPPORT IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - A mobility event is supported on a flat or next generation mobile data networks with data breakout or offload at the edge of the mobile data network. Packet data is buffered while a complete set of the PDP context information is transferred from the source eNodeB to the target eNodeB and the mobile core network is updated with the information about the handover in a timely manner to prevent packet loss and thus provide a seamless user experience. The breakout system supports the PDP context transfer by shifting the end point of the TCP communication from the local breakout entity (MIOP@eNodeB) to the core breakout entity (MIOP@GW), transferring the TCP connection to the core breakout entity, and supporting the network initiated control flows in a way that is seamless from the perspective of the UE and the core network. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098681 | High Density Deployment Using Transmit or Transmit-Receive Interference Suppression with Selective Channel Dimension Reduction/Attenuation and Other Parameters - In a wireless local are network, each of multiple access points, in a high density deployment, are configured to suppress co-channel interference. A first access point having a plurality of antennas beamforms a transmission to a wireless client device within a null-space or with the weakest singular eigenmodes of a wireless channel between the first access point and at least one co-channel second access point. Techniques are presented herein for situations in which any given access point has two or more co-channel access points. In addition, an access point may perform receive side suppression with respect to a transmission (made by a co-channel access point to one of its associated wireless client devices) that is received from that co-channel access point. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098682 | Direction Aware Neighbor List Infrastructure Assisted Roaming - The direction of movement of a wireless local area network client device, determined based on data generated by one or more sensors onboard the client device, is provided by the client device to its serving access point. Using the direction of movement information, a list is generated of neighbor access points that are likely to be in the path of travel of the client device. The list may be generated by the serving access point or another infrastructure device, e.g., a wireless network controller. The serving access point sends the list of neighbor access points to the client device to enable the client device to select an access point to roam to at the appropriate time. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098683 | HETEROGENEOUS CHANNEL CAPACITIES IN AN INTERCONNECT - Systems and methods involving construction of a system interconnect in which different channels have different widths in numbers of bits. Example processes to construct such a heterogeneous channel NoC interconnect are disclosed herein, wherein the channel width may be determined based upon the provided specification of bandwidth and latency between various components of the system. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098684 | Method and System for Compensated Time Stamping for Time-Sensitive Network Communications - Aspects of a method and system for compensated time stamping for time-sensitive network communications are provided. In this regard, one or more timestamps generated in an OSI layer above the physical layer may be adjusted based on parameters associated with an amount of time in which data traverses a PHY of the network device. Communications of the network device may be managed based on the adjusted one or more timestamps. The parameters may comprise one or more of: average ingress PHY traversal time, average egress PHY traversal time, variance of ingress PHY traversal time, and variance of egress PHY traversal time. One or more network links coupled to the network device may be characterized based on the one or more adjusted timestamps. The parameters may be stored in one or more registers within a PHY of the network device. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098685 | Content Delivery in Wireless Wide Area Networks - Selecting an edge-server set in a wireless network comprises generating channel-quality measurements of wireless links between available nodes; determining a network topology state based on the measurements; calculating a performance metric for each candidate edge-server set; and selecting a candidate edge-server set based on the performance metric. An iterative process may be employed for selecting the best edge-server set. The iterative process may employ a trellis-exploration algorithm. A back-pressure routing algorithm may be used to calculate the performance metric. A server processes a request from a client residing on a wireless network by determining if another client on the wireless network has the requested object; determining if the requesting client can communicatively couple to the other client; and directing the request to the other client. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098686 | GEOCAST PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A protocol for providing location-based communication services in wireless sensor networks utilizes dynamic selection of forwarding devices, dynamic forwarding decisions, and intelligent backoff. Dynamic selection of forwarding devices limits the number of transmissions by dynamically selecting the devices that forward a message. Dynamic forwarding decisions implement different heuristics for different devices. According to intelligent backoff, devices that are closer to a destination region backoff for a shorter period of time than those which are further away from the destination region. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098687 | MOBILITY SUPPORT IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - A mobility event is supported on a flat or next generation mobile data networks with data breakout or offload at the edge of the mobile data network. Packet data is buffered while a complete set of the PDP context information is transferred from the source eNodeB to the target eNodeB and the mobile core network is updated with the information about the handover in a timely manner to prevent packet loss and thus provide a seamless user experience. The breakout system supports the PDP context transfer by shifting the end point of the TCP communication from the local breakout entity (MIOP@eNodeB) to the core breakout entity (MIOP@GW), transferring the TCP connection to the core breakout entity, and supporting the network initiated control flows in a way that is seamless from the perspective of the UE and the core network. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098688 | OUTER LOOP CONTROL OF CQI REPORTING AND GENERATION IN WIRELESS NETWORK - An outer loop for channel quality metric estimation may analyze channel realization and perform adaptive averaging to correct for an inner loop bias. The outer loop may take into account varying channel conditions and may adjust a reported channel quality metric up or down depending on throughput. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098689 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING MULTI-DIMENSIONAL ANTENNA CONFIGURATION - Communications may be performed in a communications system using multi-dimensional antenna configurations. A WTRU may receive communications from a base station via one or more channels. The communications may be performed using multiple component codebooks. The WTRU may send channel state information (CSI) feedback for each component codebook to the base station for consideration when performing communications with the WTRU. The WTRU may determine the CSI feedback for each component codebook based on channel measurements. The component codebooks may include a horizontal component codebook and/or a vertical component codebook. The WTRU may send the CSI feedback for each component codebook to the base station independently or in the form of a composite codebook. The WTRU may determine a composite codebook a function of the component codebooks. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098690 | METHODS FOR REQUESTING PARALLEL UPLINK WIRELESS SIGNAL MEASUREMENTS - Systems, methods, and apparatuses are presented for requesting parallel uplink wireless signal measurements (UL measurements), in which a measurement management apparatus determines information on UL measurements being performed or to be performed by a signal measuring apparatus over a predetermined measurement period. The measurement management apparatus further determines a capability of the signal measuring apparatus to perform parallel measurements. The measurement management apparatus determines an adjustment to a measurement configuration for the measuring apparatus. The measurement configuration relates to, for example, a number of parallel measurements to perform. The adjustment is based on a comparison of UL measurements being performed or to be performed by the measuring apparatus over a predetermined measurement period and the capability of the measuring apparatus to perform parallel measurements. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098691 | METHODS FOR PERFORMING PARALLEL UPLINK WIRELESS SIGNAL MEASUREMENTS - Systems, methods, and apparatuses are presented for performing parallel uplink wireless signal measurements (UL measurements), in which a signal measuring apparatus determines information on UL measurements being performed or to be performed by the signal measuring apparatus over a predetermined measurement period. The signal measuring apparatus further determines a capability of the signal measuring apparatus to perform parallel UL measurements. The signal measuring apparatus may adjust a measurement requirement or a measurement resource based on a comparison of the UL measurements being performed or to be performed over the measurement period with a capability of the measuring apparatus to perform parallel measurements. The signal measuring apparatus performs the UL measurements based on the adjusted measurement requirement or adjusted measurement resource. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098692 | SCHEDULING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) MEASUREMENT DURING CONTINUOUS DATA TRANSMISSION - A user equipment (UE) may improve scheduling of inter radio access technology (IRAT) measurement during continuous data transmission, for example in a High Speed-Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH). The UE may determine whether an IRAT measurement is desired. The UE may also perform the IRAT measurement during a scheduled downlink data subframe when it is determined the IRAT measurement is desired, without losing the scheduled downlink data. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098693 | TRIGGERING CELL TRANSITION IN AN UPLINK POWER LIMITED CONDITION - A method for triggering cell transition in an uplink power limited condition is disclosed. The method can include a wireless communication device determining that the wireless communication device is experiencing an uplink power limited condition; deriving a modified downlink channel quality measurement by adjusting a measured downlink channel quality to indicate a lower downlink channel quality than the measured downlink channel quality; generating a measurement report including the modified downlink channel quality measurement; and sending the measurement report to the serving cell to trigger transition of the wireless communication device from the serving cell to a second cell. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098694 | DYNAMIC RECEIVE DIVERSITY SELECTION FOR LTE - Methods, apparatuses and computer readable media are described that configure wireless circuitry in a wireless communication device. The wireless communication device establishes a connection to a wireless network using wireless circuitry that includes a first radio frequency receive signal chain and a second radio frequency receive signal chain. The wireless communication device monitors uplink and downlink traffic activity communicated between the wireless communication device and the wireless network and measures downlink radio frequency receive signal conditions at the wireless communication device. The wireless communication device reconfigures the wireless circuitry to enable receive diversity or to disable receive diversity at the wireless communication device based on the monitored traffic activity and the measured downlink radio frequency receive signal conditions. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098695 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING BEAMFORMING - An apparatus performs a method for generating information indicating channel quality when a dynamic range of a receive signal strength and an interference signal strength is considerable in a wireless communication system using beamforming. A base station (BS) for processing feedback information for scheduling receives from a mobile station (MS) first feedback information comprising a receive signal strength measurement result in paths selected from a plurality of downlink paths between the BSs and the MS, designates a transmit (TX) resource for interference measurement of the MS based on the first feedback information, receives from the MS second feedback information comprising an interference measurement result in the designated TX resource region, and calculates a Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) of the MS based on the first feedback information and the second feedback information. The designated TX resource includes a resource other than a signal TX resource for the MS. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098696 | COMBINING CHANNEL QUALITY MEASUREMENTS BASED ON SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNALS AND DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNALS - A first communication node communicates by multiple-input-multiple-output (MIMO) wireless communications with a second communication node of a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) over a plurality of subcarriers transmitted by the second communication node for MIMO communications. Channel quality is measured responsive to the sounding reference signal to output a first channel quality value. A demodulation reference signal is received over a plurality of subcarriers transmitted by the second communication node for MIMO communications. Channel quality is measured responsive to the demodulation reference signal to output a second channel quality value. Reliability of the measurements of the first channel quality value and the second channel quality value is determined. The first and second channel quality values are combined while compensating for the determined reliability difference between the measurements to generate a combined channel quality value. Related communication nodes are disclosed. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098697 | Method and Device for Correcting Channel Quality Indicator Value - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a device for correcting a CQI value. Information indicates radio channel characteristics. A block error rate (BLER) target value is determined according to the information that indicates radio channel characteristics. A channel quality indicator (CQI) measurement value is corrected according to a BLER measurement value and the determined BLER target value. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098698 | METHOD OF PERFORMING LINK ADAPTATION PROCEDURE - Methods and apparatuses for communicating in a wireless local area network are provided. The method includes receiving, by a responding station, from a requesting station, a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) feedback request frame to request the responding station to provide a MCS feedback, the MCS feedback request frame including a first MCS feedback sequence identifier identifying a MCS feedback request. The method also includes transmitting, by the responding station, to the requesting station, a MCS feedback frame as a response to the MCS feedback request frame, the MCS feedback frame including a MCS estimate and a second MCS feedback sequence identifier. An apparatus for performing the method is also provided. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098699 | Method and system for measuring frame loss ratio - The disclosure provides a method and system for measuring a frame loss ratio. The method includes: a first end acquiring a frame number of a received current measurement reply frame and a frame number of a received previous measurement reply frame, wherein the current measurement reply frame and the previous measurement reply frame are sent by a second end in response to a frame loss ratio measurement message frame sent by the first end; the first end judging whether the difference between the frame number of the current measurement reply frame and the frame number of the previous measurement reply frame is 1; if the difference is 1, the first end calculating the frame loss ratio according to count information carried in the current measurement reply frame and the previous measurement reply frame; and if the difference is greater than 1, the first end calculating the frame loss ratio according to the count information carried in the current measurement reply frame and the previous measurement reply frame and the difference. The disclosure solves the problem in the prior art that frame loss ratio measurement is inaccurate in the case that a protocol frame is lost, thereby achieving the technical effect of accurately measuring the frame loss ratio. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098700 | SENSOR AND RECEIVING DEVICE IN SENSOR SYSTEM - A sensor system in which it is possible to identify a sufficient number of sensors even in a situation where the data length of a packet is limited, as well as a sensor and a receiving device in the same, are provided. A sensor repeating a measurement period for performing measurement and a transmission period for performing transmission at predetermined cycles, includes: a measurement section ( | 04-10-2014 |
20140098701 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CHANNEL MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and device for channel measurement in a wireless LAN system. A station (STA) receives a plurality of sounding frames from an access point (AP), estimates the plurality of sounding frames in order to generate long-term channel state information (LCSI), provides the generated LCSI to the AP as feedback, and receives from the AP a group identifier (ID) management frame comprising information on a group ID determined on the basis of the LCSI. | 04-10-2014 |
20140105035 | DATA RATE DETERMINATION BASED ON RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICE FEEDBACK - A device may receive information that identifies a radio frequency condition of a user device, where the radio frequency condition indicates a quality of a radio access network connection of the user device. The device may determine a radio frequency parameter value based on the radio frequency condition, and may set a data rate for a transmission control protocol (“TCP”) communication with the user device based on the radio frequency parameter value. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105036 | System and Method of Implementing Quality of Service over a Packet-Based Network - A method includes, at a first network endpoint, determining whether a second network endpoint supports receipt of a stream of packets having a quality of service indicator. The method further includes, at the first network endpoint, in response to determining that the second network endpoint supports receipt of the stream of packets having the quality of service indicator, generating and sending the stream of packets having the quality of service indicator and including forward error correction data to the second network endpoint. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105037 | Determining Transmission Parameters for Transmitting Beacon Framers - A method includes dynamically determining transmission parameters for transmission of beacon frames corresponding to a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) supported by an access point. The transmission parameters being based on zero or more client devices connected to the WLAN or monitored data indicative of a load at the access point. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105038 | Media Flow Tracing in Third Party Devices - In one implementation, performance statistics for a provider network are compiled and delivered outside of the provider network. The provider network includes a media trace proxy server that receives a media trace query for a media stream of a customer edge network device. The media trace proxy server initiates a route discovery process on the provider network in response to the request or in response to at least one network device in the provider network being nonresponsive to similar types of media trace queries. The media trace proxy server collects performance statistics from the at least one network device and forwards the performance statistics of the at least one network device to the customer edge network device. The performance statistics may include only those statistics authorized by a subscription level or administrative region of the customer edge network device. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105039 | DYNAMIC FEATURE PEER NETWORK FOR APPLICATION FLOWS - A device receives packets of a traffic flow, and inspects one or more of the packets of the traffic flow. The device determines, based on the inspection of the one or more packets, a service graph of feature peers for the packets of the traffic flow. The feature peers are associated with a network, and the service graph includes an ordered set of the feature peers. The device configures network devices of the network with the service graph, and the network devices forward the packets of the traffic flow to the feature peers based on the service graph and without changing the traffic flow. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105040 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK POWER CONTROL IN AN ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system minimizes inter-cell interference and handover holes by providing for a user equipment (UE) to monitor downlink signals from a serving, boundary eNodeB and one or more neighbor eNodeBs, determine a signal quality metric (SQM) for each monitored signal to produce an SQM associated with each eNodeB, and determine a maximum uplink transmit power level (PMAX) for each eNodeB. Based on the determined SQMs and PMAXs, the UE determines a eNodeB of the one or more neighbor eNodeBs with a best SQM and, in response to determining that the neighbor eNodeB of the one or more neighbor eNodeBs with a best SQM is a high power eNodeB, determines a difference between the SQM associated with the high power ENodeB and the SQM associated with the boundary eNodeB. The UE then sets a PMAX for the UE based on the difference determination. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105041 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET LOSS RATE-BASED CODEC ADAPTATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided where, at a first wireless node, a weighted average of a frame loss rate is determined for a plurality of frames transmitted from a second wireless node using a first codec; feedback is transmitted to the second wireless node based at least in part on the frame loss rate; and one or more frames are received from the second wireless node using a second codec, responsive to transmitting the feedback. Also, transmitting from a first wireless node a plurality of frames to a second wireless node using a first codec; receiving frame loss rate information from the second wireless node responsive to the transmitting; selecting a second codec, based at least in part on the frame loss rate information, and transmitting a second plurality of frames to the second wireless node using the second codec. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105042 | Methods and Arrangements for Reference Signal Measurements - Embodiments are disclosed which improve the accuracy of measurement quantities obtained based on filtered measurements, by enabling filter memory reset events triggered by specific configuration and/or reconfiguration commands. According to some embodiments, a method for obtaining a measurement quantity is provided. The measurement quantity is based on a filtered reference signal (RS) measurement value. The method is executed in a wireless device, e.g. a user equipment (UE). According to the method, the wireless device receives ( | 04-17-2014 |
20140105043 | NETWORK ISOLATION SYSTEM - A network isolation system may include a network interface, a power level detector, and a processor. The network interface may be configured to receive signals over channels, where the signals include at least one local network signal, e.g. a signal originating on a local network, and at least one non-local network signal, e.g. a signal originating on a non-local network. The power level detector may be configured to determine attenuation values of the received signals. The signal processor may be configured to discard a first signal and reallocate the channel over which the first signal was received, without processing the first signal in a frequency domain, when the attenuation value of the first signal fails to satisfy a signal threshold. In one or more implementations, the signal threshold may differentiate the local network signal from the non-local network signal based at least in part on the determined attenuation values. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105044 | GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE TUNNEL PERFORMANCE MONITORING - Arrangements include methods and systems for enabling collection of end to end performance information of individual tunnels in a GPRS. According to one aspect, a GTP-U sender node is configured to provide to a GTP-U receiver node a sequence number for a G-PDU to enable determination of a first set of one-way performance data of a GTP-U tunnel to be monitored. The GTP-U sender node may further be configured to provide an exit timestamp for a G-PDU to enable determination of a second set of one-way performance data of the GTP-U tunnel to be monitored. Either one or both of the sender node and the receiver node may send G-PDU performance monitor records to a GTP-U performance monitor collector. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105045 | TERMINAL, AND SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided are a terminal and a system and method for monitoring a wireless network. The system for monitoring a wireless network includes: a first terminal including: a packet gap model (PGM) transmission unit for transmitting a plurality of measurement packets at a previously calculated transmission time interval; and a channel quality indicator (CQI) unit for acquiring information regarding channel quality of a wireless communication channel to measure an assured maximum increment of speed of the network; a second terminal including a PGM reception unit for receiving the measurement packets and measuring a non-assured maximum possible speed of the network from a reception time interval of the received measurement packets; and a wireless access point connected with the first terminal through the wireless communication channel. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105046 | USER EQUIPMENT LINK QUALITY ESTIMATION BASED ON POSITIONING - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for estimating a user equipment link quality based on a positioning of user equipment are provided. One method includes determining a plurality of link qualities (LQs) of the user equipment (UE) for a plurality of positionings of the UE, wherein at least one of the plurality of positionings includes at least a location or an orientation of the UE, storing information associated with the plurality of LQs for the plurality of positionings, estimating at least one future positioning of the UE, and estimating a future link quality (LQ) of the UE at the at least one future positioning of the UE based on the stored information associated with the plurality of LQs at the plurality of positionings of the UE. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105047 | INTERFERENCE CHARACTERIZATION BASED ON SCHEDULING A TRANSMISSION MODE - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for characterizing interference based on scheduling a transmission mode are provided. One method includes wirelessly communicating, by a base station (BS), with a plurality of user equipment (UE), selecting one or more other base stations (BSs) associated with the BS, scheduling the selected one or more other BSs associated with the BS to transmit according to at least one transmission mode during a scheduled transmission, and characterizing, by at least one of the plurality of UE, interference at the UE during the scheduled transmission. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105048 | SCHEDULING A USER EQUIPMENT TRANSMISSION MODE TO ASSIST UPLINK INTERFERENCE CHARACTERIZATION - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for scheduling a user equipment transmission mode to assist uplink interference characterization are provided. One method includes a first base station (BS) wirelessly communicating with a first plurality of user equipment (UE), selecting a second BS associated with the first BS, the second BS wirelessly communicating with a second plurality of UE, selecting a UE from the second plurality of UE, scheduling the selected UE to transmit according to a transmission mode during a scheduled transmission, and characterizing, by the first BS, interference of the selected UE at the first BS during the scheduled transmission. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105049 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION OF DOWNLINK CHANNEL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for sending a Channel State Information (CSI) report for a Downlink (DL) channel by a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes obtaining, from an evolved Node B (eNB), CSI report setting information including information about a transmission cycle and a transmission time for a CSI report, and Discontinuous Reception (DRX) setting information including information about an active time period in which signal transmission/reception is available in a DRX mode, determining whether the UE operates in the DRX mode, and if the UE is determined to operate in the DRX mode, adjusting the transmission time taking into account the CSI report setting information and the active time period, and sending the CSI report at the adjusted transmission time. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105050 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEAMLESS HANDOVER OPERATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for improving a mobile problem caused by a narrow handover region in a boundary region between virtual cells constructed by a plurality of small base stations are provided. A plurality of Virtual Cells (VCs) include a plurality of Distributed Base Stations (DBSs) whose VCs cooperatively communicate with each other. An Intermediate Distributed Base Station (I-DBS) is located in a region where adjacent at least two VCs among the plurality of VCs are superimposed, and belongs to a different VC according to a time division scheme. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105051 | Method and System for WLAN Connection Control - Embodiments of the invention proxy control the establishment or continued existence of a WLAN connection by using the back end authentication mechanism to authenticate/de-authenticate a WLAN session in dependence on the experienced quality of the connection during the set-up phase or session itself. This has the effect of preventing a bad quality connection from being established or from continuing, and hence should improve the user experience, and help a WLAN network operator maintain a service with high Quality of Service (QoS). | 04-17-2014 |
20140105052 | UPLINK RESOURCE ALLOCATION TO CONTROL INTERCELL INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention exploit the reciprocity of radio channels in TDD, and longer-term correlation between average uplink and downlink path losses in FDD wireless communication systems to enable distributed schedulers in an enhanced uplink system to allocate uplink transmission resources while preemptively managing intercell interference levels. Each cell's base station transmits a downlink reference signal at a known transmission power level. A mobile station monitors the received signal strength of the downlink reference signals from multiple base stations. The transmitted and received signal strength levels can be used by the mobile station to estimate the amount of intercell interference that the mobile station's uplink transmissions cause, and the mobile station's uplink transmission parameters are adjusted accordingly. In further embodiments, the received reference signal power levels, or values derived therefrom, are transmitted by the mobile station to its serving base station, where a scheduling algorithm uses the information to adjust one or more transmission parameters relating to a grant of uplink transmission resources to the UE, thereby controlling the intercell interference generated by the mobile station's uplink transmissions. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105053 | ESTIMATION OF FREQUENCY OFFSET BETWEEN A BASE STATION AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for frequency offset estimation exploits the differences in reference symbol timing for different channels to resolve ambiguities in the frequency offset estimation. Based on the initial frequency offset estimates, a hypothesis table is constructed providing hypothesized frequency offsets for each channel for a plurality of possible offset regions. An error metric for each offset region is calculated based on the difference of the hypothesized frequency offsets. The set of hypothesized frequency offsets that minimize the error metric is selected as the final frequency offset estimates. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105054 | Method and System for Long-Range Adaptive Mobile Beam-Forming Ad-Hoc Communication System with Integrated Positioning - Method and system for provided a long range, high capacity ad-hoc mobile communication network where a narrow antenna beam formed by a plurality of antenna elements, radio transceivers and digital spatial signal processing is used to provide a high accuracy positioning system integrated into the communication system. The relative positions and directive orientation of all the units in the network is done by mutual exchange of positioning data as an element in the communication protocol in the network. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105055 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method and apparatus in which user equipment sends channel state information. The method includes receiving mapping information informing an uplink (UL) channel mapped to a reference signal; determining a valid downlink (DL) subframe based on the mapping information; measuring the reference signal in the valid DL subframe; and transmitting Channel State Information (CSI), generated based on the measurement, in a configured UL subframe, wherein the UL channel is placed in the configured UL subframe, and the valid DL subframe is a DL subframe including the reference signal mapped to the UL channel. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105056 | ACTIVATION OF SUPPLEMENTARY TRANSMISSION UNIT - A telecommunications method in a wireless communication network comprising a base station, a supplementary transmission unit and one or more user equipments, the supplementary transmission unit being initially in a dormant state in which it does not transmit; wherein based on the configuration from the base station the supplementary transmission unit measures a parameter of uplink transmission from the user equipment towards the base station; and a decision is made as to whether to activate the supplementary transmission unit in dependence upon the measured parameter. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105057 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR DETERMINING CONTROL CHANNEL RESOURCE - The present invention discloses a method and a user equipment for determining a control channel resource. The method includes: detecting a downlink control channel that carries scheduling information of a downlink data channel and is sent by a base station, where the downlink control channel is formed by at least one control channel logical element, and the at least one control channel logical element is mapped to at least one antenna port; acquiring at least one of antenna port information of a first antenna port corresponding to a first control channel logical element of the successfully detected downlink control channel and an offset, and sequence number information of the first control channel logical element; and determining, according to at least one of the antenna port information and the offset, as well as the sequence number information. | 04-17-2014 |
20140112160 | DYNAMIC BAND SELECTION AND AGGREGATION - A user device may receive a selection of an application associated with the user device; generate a query based on receiving the selection of the application; provide the query to a first server; and receive, from the first server, a response to the query based on providing the query. The response may include information regarding a resource demand of the application and information regarding a performance of one or more wireless bands. The user device may also determine one or more first wireless bands, of the one or more wireless bands, that satisfy the resource demand; connect with a network via the one or more first wireless bands of the one or more wireless bands; and communicate with a second server using the network to operate the application in accordance with the resource demand. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112161 | QUANTITATIVE INTERFERENCE DETECTION - A method for wireless communications is described. The method includes beginning a voice call using a voice services over adaptive multi-user channels on one slot receiver. Pilot signal knowledge is obtained. Interferers knowledge is also obtained. Error metrics are computed using the pilot signal knowledge and the interferers knowledge. The method further includes selecting between the voice services over adaptive multi-user channels on one slot receiver and a legacy receiver for the voice call based on the error metrics. Other aspects, embodiments and features are also claimed and described. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112162 | POWER EFFICIENT RELAY DISCOVERY PROTOCOL - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus receives discovery resource information from a base station, sends a discovery signal based on the discovery resource information, and receives from at least one user equipment (UE) a request for relaying with the base station based on the discovery signal. The apparatus may also receive a discovery signal from a relay, and send to the relay a request for relaying with a base station based on the discovery signal. The apparatus may further receive a discovery signal from each of a plurality of relays, determine to select one of the plurality of relays based on the discovery signal from each relay, and send to a selected relay a request for relaying with a base station based on the discovery signal when one of the plurality of relays is determined to be selected. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112163 | SUPPRESSING WIRELESS BROADCAST/MULTICAST DATA TRANSMISSIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are described. The apparatus wirelessly transmits a reservation signal intended for a plurality of receivers for scheduling a broadcast/multicast data transmission, monitors for a confirmation signal from at least one of the plurality of receivers, wirelessly transmits the broadcast/multicast data transmission to the plurality of receivers if the confirmation signal is received, and suppresses transmission of the broadcast/multicast data to the plurality of receivers if the confirmation signal is not received. In some embodiments, the apparatus further determines at least one of a number of received confirmation signals or a signal strength of a received confirmation signal from the at least one of the plurality of receivers, and suppresses transmission of the broadcast/multicast data based on the determined at least one of the number of received confirmation signals or the signal strength of the received confirmation signal. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112164 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR INTERFERENCE AND NOISE ESTIMATION - Mobile broadband traffic has been exploding in wireless networks resulting in an increase of interferences and reduced operator control. Networks are also becoming more heterogeneous putting additional demand in interference management. Scheduler schedules uplink transmissions from UEs based on a load prediction algorithm that typically assumes worst case. However, UEs do not always use full power granted, and thus, much of granted radio resources are wasted. To address these and other issues, techniques to accurately predict/estimate other cell interferences and thermal noise separately and to accurately predict/estimate load utilization probabilities, rise-over-thermals, and load factor biases are described. The described techniques are applicable in a radio network node with any number of antenna branches. The techniques can be used to schedule UEs to more fully utilize available radio resources. Extended Kalman filtering can be adapted for use in estimation providing low order computational complexity. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112165 | Channel estimation method for TD-SCDMA - A channel estimation method for TD-SCDMA system includes: sending midamble data to channel estimator and estimating the serving cell and adjacent cell channel response; calculating the interference cell number and setting the iteration number for interference cancelation; providing a channel response to a channel noise-suppression module that outputs a suppressed channel response; applying adaptive iterative interference cancelation. The invention solves the difficulty about the estimation of channel in multicell system, thus improving the estimation accuracy and the system capacity. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112166 | Optimized Distribution of Wireless Broadband in a Building - Methods and systems are disclosed for optimizing the distribution of a broadband wireless signal in a building. The methods and systems include at least one antenna inserted into a building ventilation system and transmitting a wireless broadband signal from a transmitter in communication with the antenna. The wireless broadband signal will include multiple orthogonal subcarriers. The methods and systems further include detecting the wireless broadband signal with a receiver in the building. In selected embodiments, the methods and systems may include the steps of analyzing a parameter of the detected wireless broadband signal and optimizing the wireless broadband signal based at least in part upon the analyzed parameter. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112167 | USING FM/AM RADIO AND CELLULAR TECHNOLOGY TO SUPPORT INTERACTIVE GROUP COMMUNICATION FOR LARGE NUMBER OF USERS - The disclosure is directed to conducting group communications. An embodiment receives information defining a group communication from a first network, detects an availability of at least one local uni-directional radio broadcast network outside the first network, transmits an acknowledgment indicating an intention to connect to the at least one local uni-directional radio broadcast network, and monitors the group communication on the at least one local uni-directional radio broadcast network. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112168 | ENHANCED SRS TRANSMISSION FOR MIMO OPERATION IN LTE-A - Enhanced sounding reference signal (SRS) transmissions for multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) operation are disclosed in which a user equipment (UE) detects an observed interference level for each receiver chain of the UE. In response to an imbalance, the UE precodes a SRS targeting downlink operation to indicate the imbalance. The UE then transmits the precoded SRS. In alternative aspects, the precoded SRS vector may be determined by an evolved nodeB (eNB). In such aspects, the eNB determines the precoded SRS vector targeting downlink operations for the served UEs, wherein the determined precoded SRS vector includes determining the precoded SRS vector on a per UE basis, enabling the precoded SRS vector for either one or both of frequency division duplex (FDD) systems and time division duplex (TDD) systems, or enabling the precoded SRS vector for aperiodic SRS only. The eNB then transmits the determined precoded SRS vector to the UE. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112169 | USER ADMISSION FOR CO-EXISTENCE WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Techniques for admitting user equipments (UEs) to wireless systems are disclosed. UEs may be assigned priorities for admission to a given wireless system. The UEs may then be admitted to the wireless system based on the priorities of the UEs for the wireless system. In one design, a UE may be identified for admission to a first wireless system among a plurality of wireless systems. Attributes (e.g., capabilities) of the UE for the plurality of wireless systems may be determined. An admission priority of the UE for the first wireless system may be determined based on the attributes of the UE for the plurality of wireless systems. Whether to admit the UE to the first wireless system may be determined based on the admission priority of the UE for the first wireless system and possibly the current resource usage of the first wireless system. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112170 | BROADCAST OF INFORMATION TO ASSIST SYSTEM SELECTION BY USER EQUIPMENTS - Techniques for supporting system selection by user equipments (UEs) are disclosed. In one design, a UE may receive an indication that a first wireless system supports system selection by UEs. The UE may be within the coverage of a plurality of wireless systems, which may include the first wireless system. The UE may receive system selection information from at least one of the plurality of wireless systems. The system selection information may convey system loading, UE performance, system recommendation, etc. The UE may determine performance metrics for the plurality of wireless systems based on the system selection information. The UE may then select one wireless system among the plurality of wireless systems based on the performance metrics for the plurality of wireless systems and the indication that the first wireless system supports system selection by UEs. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112171 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING ROUTING CAPABILITY - Described are embodiments of a system, method, and computer program for providing network services to a user site, utilizing a network system including a computer, a processor, memory, and a plurality of Layer 3 devices distributed at a plurality of nodes of the network system along a Layer 2 backbone for connecting the user site with a predetermined destination, the computer comprising and at least one computer readable medium storing thereon computer code which when executed by the at least one computer causes the at least one computer to at least: measure performance of a plurality of paths that connect the plurality of Layer 3 devices, to the predetermined destination; and select a particular path from the plurality of paths to perform packet transmission based on the measured performance of the plurality of paths based on one or more criteria. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112172 | Load Estimation in 3GPP Networks - Loading estimation of 3GPP networks. One or more metrics relating to a cell of a 3GPP network may be measured. Loading of the cell may be estimated based on the one or more metrics. The metrics may include metrics measured, estimated, or derived at multiple layers, possibly including one or more of physical layer, radio link control layer, radio resource control layer, or application layer metrics. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112173 | Configuration of Coordinated Multipoint Transmission Hypotheses for Channel State Information Reporting - A system and method for providing an eNodeB with the flexibility to configure a Channel State Information (CSI) report to match a specific Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) transmission hypothesis, which is a candidate for a downlink transmission to a User Equipment (UE) is disclosed. A UE receives, from the eNodeB, a configuration message that specifies a CSI report. The CSI report is specified by a particular interference hypothesis and a particular desired signal hypothesis corresponding to data transmission over at least one effective channel characterized by a specific reference signal. The UE estimates interference according to the interference hypothesis, and/or estimates at least one effective channel by performing measurements on the specific reference signal, and determines a CSI report based on the interference estimation and on the estimated effective channel. The UE also transmits the CSI report to the eNodeB. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112174 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATING METHOD - A communication device capable of automatically selecting to directly communicate with an external device using a first communication technology with a first predetermined bandwidth or indirectly communicate with the external device comprises a determining module, a detecting module, a comparing module, and a control module. The determining module generates a detecting signal when the communication device establishes a communication with an electronic device capable of using a second communication technology with a second predetermined bandwidth. The detecting module detects a remained bandwidth of the second communication technology in response to the detecting signal. When comparing module determines that the first predetermined bandwidth is less than the remained bandwidth, the control module controls the communication device communicate with the external device via the electronic device using the second communication technology. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112175 | Methods of Operating a Wireless Device, and Apparatus and Computer Programs Therefor - Embodiments of the present disclosure solve problems of throughput reduction due to collisions, busy medium, and deferred transmission due to overlapping wireless networks (e.g. 802.11 OBSS) by allowing devices suffering from overlapping interference to have sufficient chances to transmit and/or receive successfully. Embodiments include methods for a first device (e.g. 802.11 AP) to communicate data via a medium shared with other devices (e.g. 802.11 APs and/or STAs) located in an overlapping service area but not under common control with the first device. Embodiments also include methods for a first device (e.g. 802.11 AP) to negotiate reservation of a shared medium requested by a second device (e.g. 802.11 AP), the two devices being in overlapping service areas but not under common control. Embodiments include wireless communication devices (e.g. 802.11 APs) and computer programs or computer-readable media embodying one or more of the methods. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112176 | POLARITY DETECTION SYSTEM - In the subject system for polarity detection, link initialization between a primary device and a secondary device may be performed in at least two stages, a half-duplex stage when only the primary device transmits initialization signals and any encoded handshaking signals may be set to false, and a full-duplex stage when both devices may transmit initialization signals. The secondary device may perform polarity detection during the half-duplex stage. If the secondary device determines that the polarities of the received signals are reversed, the secondary device may reverse the polarities of any signals subsequently received from, and transmitted to, the primary device. In this manner, the polarities can be corrected for both devices during the half-duplex stage by the secondary device. The secondary device may initiate the full-duplex link initialization stage, during which any handshaking signals may be exchanged, by transmitting signals to the primary device. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112177 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL AND USER EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNAL AND BASE STATION - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting a channel measurement reference signal for measuring channel state from user equipment, and a method and apparatus for receiving the channel measurement reference signal. The base station of the present invention transmits power information concerning a plurality of nodes to user equipment capable of receiving signals from the plurality of nodes, and the plurality of nodes each transmit respective channel measurement reference signals. The power Information includes channel measurement reference signal, transmission power for each of the plurality of nodes and information indicating downlink data transmission power ratios. The user equipment calculates channel state information on the plurality of nodes based on the power Information and the channel measurement reference signals from the plurality of nodes. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112178 | METHOD, NODE AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGEMENT OF A MOBILE NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for estimating performance in a mobile network, a method for generating a performance map, use of such methods, a network management system, and a network node in the mobile network for performing the methods. The exemplary method including receiving localized user equipment measurements from a user equipment in the mobile network, including the user equipment measurements in sets and determining at least one antenna characteristics model for the set of user equipment measurements. A path loss model is determined for the user equipment measurements. A localized performance measurement is determined by deducting an estimated antenna impact from the estimated path loss for the user equipment measurement. The operations are repeated to generate a spatial performance map for the mobile network, wherein updates of the spatial performance map are based on further user equipment measurements from the user equipment in the mobile network. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112179 | PATH LOSS CALCULATION METHOD, PATH LOSS CALCULATION DEVICE, PATH LOSS CALCULATION PROGRAM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SPECTRUM MANAGER - A spectrum manager manages a secondary system that shares a frequency with a primary system. A communication unit receives a measurement value of reception power of a signal of the secondary system which is measured by a monitoring station, and holds the measurement value in a measurement result storage unit. A path loss estimating unit estimates a path loss at a first frequency, and a path loss correcting unit performs actual measurement correction on a path loss estimation value using one of a reception power measurement value of a radio signal of a secondary transmitting station measured at a second frequency different from the first frequency and a reception power measurement value of the radio signal of the secondary transmitting station measured in a period of time which is not used by the primary system. A permissible transmission power setting unit calculates permissible transmission power of the secondary transmitting station using the path loss estimation value which has been actually measured and corrected. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112180 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments herein relate to a user equipment, UE, configured to performing measurements in a wireless communication network. The UE acquires system information, SI, of a cell during autonomous gaps, and also performs at least one non-SI measurement related to a serving and/or to one or more neighbour cells during a time period comprising the autonomous gaps. The embodiments also relate to a serving network node, a target network node and respective method therein. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112181 | CONTROL METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE MODULATION CIRCUIT AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSION DEVICE PROVIDED WITH ADAPTIVE MODULATION CIRCUIT - In a wireless transmission device provided with an adaptive modulation circuit and a control method for the adaptive modulation circuit, an Ethernet signal received from a wired transmission path is transmitted to an opposite station one-to-one via a wireless transmission path and the Ethernet signal in the opposite station is again output to the wired transmission path. A traffic-statistics circuit which accumulates a traffic volume of a time zone-specific Ethernet signal as statistical data is provided. A wireless transmission capacity can be reduced by decreasing a multi-level number of a modulation scheme in a time zone in which the traffic volume is small based on the accumulated statistical data. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112182 | Methods and Apparatuses for Cell Evaluation - Methods and apparatuses for cell evaluation by a mobile terminal in a cellular network. A base station ( | 04-24-2014 |
20140112183 | LINK ADAPTATION FEEDBACK METHOD AND TRANSMITTING DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a link adaptation feedback method and a transmitting device. The method includes: receiving, by a transmitting device, a link adaptation feedback frame sent by a receiving device, where the link adaptation feedback frame carries space-time block coding type indication information; and determining, by the transmitting device according to the space-time block coding type indication information, information about use of space-time block coding by a data frame related to the link adaptation feedback frame, and selecting, according to the use information, a space-time stream, and a modulation and coding scheme used when the transmitting device sends a data frame. Through the embodiments of the present invention, and according to the use information, the transmitting device may select the space-time stream, and the MCS used when the transmitting device sends a data frame, thereby improving link performance. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112184 | CELL MEASUREMENT METHOD, CELL RESOURCE SHARING METHOD, AND RELATED DEVICE - Disclosed are a cell measurement method, a cell resource sharing method, and a related device. The cell measurement method includes: a user equipment receives a measurement configuration message sent by a base station, wherein the measurement configuration message comprises at least one physical cell identity and CSI-RS configuration information corresponding to a measured cell, and wherein the physical cell identity is used to indicate the measured cell; measuring the CSI-RS corresponding to the measured cell according to the CSI-RS configuration information, and obtaining a measurement result of the measuring; sending the obtained measurement result of the measured cell and measurement object information of the measured cell to the base station via a measurement report. The technical solution provided by the present invention can effectively improve the accuracy of the measurement result, and enable the base station to distinguish different measurement results corresponding to different cells. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112185 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF NETWORK DIAGNOSIS - Embodiments provide systems and methods for diagnosing a network and identifying problems in a network which reduce the data transfer rate of data through the network. One embodiment of a method for network diagnosis may include infusing data into a network upstream and downstream of a portion of the network relative to a library drive, querying the drive at intervals over time for drive data to determine the data transfer rate at the drive and comparing the data transfer rate of the data infused upstream of the device or network portion with the data transfer rate of the data infused downstream of the device or network portion to determine throughput. By comparing the data transfer rate of data infused upstream and downstream of a network device or network portion, problem devices in a network may be identified. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112186 | METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING INDICATION INFORMATION - A method, a user equipment, and a base station device for transmitting indication information. A method comprises: initially setting an indication information feedback mode of a user equipment to a deactivation state, where the user equipment in the deactivation state does not transmit indication information to a base station; after receiving an indication information feedback request transmitted by a network side, setting the indication information feedback mode of the user equipment to an activation state, where the user equipment in the activation state uses an indication information feedback cycle to transmit the indication information to the base station. Embodiments of the present disclosure initially set a user equipment to a deactivation state of not transmitting indication information to the base station, set a user equipment to an activation state of transmitting indication information when a network side has transmitted an indication information feedback request, reducing unnecessary uplink indication information feedback. | 04-24-2014 |
20140119204 | ONE-TO-MANY AND MANY-TO-ONE COMMUNICATIONS ON A NETWORK - Some implementations include routing and/or delivering communications within a network system. In one example, a packet source may be configured to recursively encode a data delivery tree so that any sub-tree formed from the data delivery tree compresses a continuous data block of the data delivery tree. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119205 | Hybrid multi-cell channel estimation - Hybrid multi-cell channel estimation. At least two different operational modes associated with performing multi-cell channel estimation are combined and performed within different respective iterations of processing in order to generate a multi-cell channel estimate. A device, including at least one wireless interface to support communications with at least one other device and also including at least one processor to process signals received by or to be transmitted from, is operative to generate a multi-cell channel estimate corresponding to two or more respective cells with which the device may communicate. A first operational mode corresponds to time domain (TDOM) based per-tap serial interference cancellation (SIC), and a second operational mode corresponds to frequency domain (FDOM) based per-cell SIC. One implementation operates with no more than one iteration of TDOM based per-tap SIC, and no more than two iterations of FDOM based per-cell SIC. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119206 | USER DEVICE TIMING ADVANCE DETERMINATION - A user device may: receive, from a network device, timeslot information and a first timing advance value. The first timing advance value may be used by the user device to send a data block to the first network device in accordance with the timeslot information. The user device may further: determine a first distance corresponding to a distance between the user device and the network device; determine a change in position of the user device; determine a second distance based on the change in position of the user device; and determine a second timing advance value based on the first timing advance value, the first distance, and the second distance. The second timing advance value may be used by the user device to send the data block to the network device in accordance with the timeslot information. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119207 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HANDLING A TYPE-2 CARRIER - A User Equipment (UE) for handling a type-2 carrier is described. The UE includes a processor and memory in electronic communication with the processor. The instructions stored in the memory are executable to apply a configuration with one or more serving cells including at least one type-2 secondary cell (SCell). The instructions stored in the memory are also executable to obtain a measurement for each of the one or more serving cells except for the at least one type-2 SCell. The instructions stored in the memory are further executable to set a measurement list to include the measurement for each of the one or more serving cells except for the at least one type-2 SCell. The instructions stored in the memory are additionally executable to send the measurement list. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119208 | Sub-Channel Detection for Wireless Data Communication - Techniques for sub-channel detection for wireless data communication are described. In at least some implementations, techniques can utilize subsets of available wireless channels for inter-device data communication. For instance, in at least some embodiments, a wireless connection between a client device and a wireless device can be established according to a pre-specified subset of sub-channels. Further, in at least some embodiments, a wireless device can be configured to transmit and/or receive data using a specific subset of sub-channels, while a client device can be configured to scan a larger set of sub-channels to search for data communication from the wireless device. The client device can detect transmitted signal from the wireless device at the subset of sub-channels, and can utilize the set of sub-channels for data communication between the wireless device and the client device. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119209 | Transition from Packet-Switched to Circuit-Switched Connection Based on Communication Quality - Techniques for transitioning a synchronous communication engaged in by a telecommunication device from a packet-switched connection to a circuit-switched connection are described herein. The techniques include either or both of the telecommunication device or the telecommunication network determining a quality metric for a synchronous communication based at least in part on monitoring of the synchronous communication, the synchronous communication being transmitted using a packet-switched connection associated with the telecommunication network. Based at least in part on the quality metric, the telecommunication network and telecommunication device switch the synchronous communication from the packet-switched connection to a circuit-switched connection associated with the telecommunication network. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119210 | Weighted-Fairness in Message Rate Based Congestion Control for Vehicular Systems - A system and method for implementing congestion control for vehicles based at least in part on weighted fair message rates is disclosed. The system comprises a measurement module, a calculation module and a determination module. The measurement module measures a channel busy ratio describing a fraction of time during which a channel is busy. The calculation module calculates a ratio error by comparing the measured channel busy ratio with a target channel busy ratio. The determination module determines a first parameter value for a first vehicle based at least in part on a ratio of weights and determines a message rate for the first vehicle based at least in part on the ratio error and the first parameter value. The message rate describes a speed for transmitting messages from the first vehicle. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119211 | ALLOCATION OF VOICE IDLE TIME PERIOD FOR INTER-RAT MEASUREMENT - To create gaps in communication activity to perform inter radio access technology (IRAT) measurement, a user equipment may isolate silent periods during voice communications. During those silent periods, instead of transmitting special bursts with erasure packets indicating silent periods, the UE may allocate the time slots that would otherwise have sent the special bursts and indicate those slots as idle so they may be used for other purposes, such as IRAT measurement. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119212 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING INFORMATION CARRYING CAPACITY BY CONTROLLING RE-TRANSMISSIONS - The re-transmission of transmission units (TUs) received in a communication device over a communication link is controlled to improve the information carrying capacity of the link. A received TU has an associated service characteristic indicative of a quality of service (QOS) for the TU. The service characteristic is associated with a select set of key performance indicators (KPIs), such as measures of packet error, packet delay, packet delay variation, and/or packet loss experienced by TUs on the communication link. Upon receipt of a TU, the performance of the communication link is evaluated with respect to each KPI in the select set to obtain a corresponding measurement value, and the measurement values are compared to corresponding threshold values. Upon determining that a determined performance value does not satisfy a corresponding threshold value for a KPI in the select set, re-transmission of the TU is requested. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119213 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR AUTOMATICALLY DECODING UPLINK DATA - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for decoding uplink control information are disclosed. According to one method, bit widths for possible valid configurations of uplink control information parameters are stored. Uplink data generated by receiving uplink data generated by at least one user equipment (UE) or simulated UE is received. The uplink data is decoded by iteratively utilizing the bit widths for the possible valid configurations. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119214 | TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIDE TERMINALS AND METHOD OF MONITORING NETWORK USING THE SAME - Provided are transmitting side and receiving side terminals and a method of monitoring a network using the terminals. The transmitting side terminal includes a packet classifier configured to classify an input service packet as a probing packet or a non-probing packet according to a feature of the service packet, and a packet transmitter configured to transmit the probing packet or the non-probing packet. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119215 | MEASUREMENT OF PACKET PROCESSING TIME OF END HOSTS THROUGH ESTIMATION OF END LINK CAPACITY - Technologies are generally described for measuring packet processing time of a remotely connected host device. According to some examples, link capacity may be measured to estimate the packet processing time (PPT). The capacity of the link connected to a host may be measured through active probing with the hosts time-stamping each probing packet after receiving it. Thus, PPT information may be included in the packet receiving process and the processes that the packet undergoes defined by the nature of different computing applications, time-stamping a packet is an example of a process that involves processing time. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119216 | TWO-DIMENSIONAL TRANSMIT POWER COMPENSATION - Exemplary embodiments are related to two-dimensional maximum power compensation. A method may include calibrating an output power level of a transmitter across a range of frequencies at a constant temperature. The method may further include characterizing the output power level of the transmitter for each temperature of a plurality of temperatures for each frequency of the range of frequencies. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119217 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND APPARATUS - A method in a wireless system, including: receiving, at a wireless device, over first and second networks, from each of plural radios of the first and second networks, respective first and second sets of reference signals received from first radios of the first and second networks, and plural further reference signals received from remaining radios of plural radios of the first and second networks, the first radios of the first and second networks located at a common location; calculating first and second sets of normalized reference signals from ratios for each further reference signal of the first and second sets of reference signals with the first and second reference signals of the first and second sets of reference signals; comparing predictions of signal loss based on the first and second sets of normalized reference signals; and determining an estimate of shadow fading or signal reflectors using the comparison result. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119218 | SYSTEM, SERVER AND METHOD FOR CALCULATING DATA VOLUME OF NETWORK ACCESS - A calculating system is provided, which includes at least one eNB and a core network. The eNB is coupled to two mobile devices. The core network includes two servers. The first mobile device operates as a mobile access point for the second mobile device to access a computer network via the eNB and the core network. The eNB and the core network provide a charging data record (CDR) of access of the computer network of one of the two mobile devices to the second server. The first server provides separation information indicating binding relationship between a network address of the second mobile device and the other one of the two mobile devices. The second server calculates data volumes of the access of the computer network of the two mobile devices separately according to the CDR and the separation information. The second server may further bill the two mobile devices separately. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119219 | CONTROL OF MEASUREMENT MESSAGING IN A MOBILE DEVICE - A method to control measurement messaging is performed at a mobile wireless device. The mobile wireless device transmits a first measurement message to a radio access network in a wireless network and stores the first measurement message pending receipt of an acknowledgement from the radio access network. Before receiving the acknowledgement to the first measurement message, the mobile wireless device determines at least one parameter included in the first measurement message requires updating. The mobile wireless device deletes the stored pending first measurement message and transmits a second measurement message to the radio access network including an updated value for the at least one parameter in the first measurement message. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119220 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMIT POWER IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK, CONTROLLER, AND ACCESS POINT - The present invention provides a method for controlling a transmit power in a wireless local area network, a controller, and an access point, including: determining, by a controller, a transmit power range of a radio frequency unit of a first access point AP; determining, by the controller, a packet reception and transmission parameter of each user link of the radio frequency unit according to packet reception and transmission information of the radio frequency unit reported by the first AP; and configuring, by the controller, a transmit power for each user link of the radio frequency unit within the transmit power range according to the determined packet reception and transmission parameter of each user link of the radio frequency unit. Signal interference between devices in a WLAN is reduced while concurrent data transmission capability of the AP is not reduced, thereby improving system transmission performance of the WLAN. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING AND MANAGING END-TO-END SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT IN NETWORK HAVING ENTITIES OF DIFFERENT MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method for measuring an end-to-end Service Level Agreement (SLA) in a network having entities of different mobile communication networks is provided. The method includes sending a server a test condition for SLA measurement, sending the server a test packet, obtaining from a test result received from the server parameter values for metrics included in the test condition, generating analysis data based on the test condition, and sending the analysis data to a manager unit for the entities based on the test condition. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119222 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TESTING THROUGHPUT - A method and an apparatus for testing a throughout of a wireless access point apparatus are provided. The apparatus includes a receiver which is configured to receive a test start request signal and a test packet transmission condition change request signal, a test signal generator which is configured to generate a test packet signal; a transmission condition adjuster configured to adjust the transmission condition of the test packet signal; a transmitter configured to transmit the test packet signal to the neighboring access point apparatus under the transmission condition, which is adjusted by the transmission condition adjuster; and a test executor configured to execute a test having a predetermined sequence so as to execute a throughput test for the neighboring access point apparatus with regards to receiving the test packet signal. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119223 | NODE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION MODE SWITCHING FOR DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION IN DOWNLINK CHANNEL - The present invention discloses a node for transmission mode switching for downlink transmission in a downlink channel ( | 05-01-2014 |
20140119224 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TERMINAL MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION IN MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY ENVIRONMENT - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises: acquiring configuration information for terminal measurements of carriers relating to network performance on said carriers, said carriers being carriers in a carrier aggregation for a terminal, the configuration information comprising at least two measurement configurations with one measurement configuration for a radio access technology; and performing terminal measurements on said carriers according to the configuration information. Related apparatus and computer program product are also described. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119225 | BASE STATION, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A measuring unit measures channel values of propagation channels based on a pilot signal transmitted from a wireless terminal. An interpolation coefficient calculating unit calculates interpolation coefficients used to estimate channel values for one of antennas of the wireless terminal by using channel values for the rest of the antennas of the wireless terminal, which channel values are measured by the measuring unit. An estimate value calculating unit estimates the channel values for the one of the antennas of the wireless terminal based on the interpolation coefficients calculated by the interpolation coefficient calculating unit and the channel values for the rest of the antennas of the wireless terminal measured by the measuring unit. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119226 | OPTIMIZING PERFORMANCE INFORMATION COLLECTION - A network management system may detect a network condition corresponding to a network and evaluate the network condition to identify types of network performance information corresponding to the network condition. The network management system may prioritize the types of network performance information and communicate priority information to a network device. The priority information may include the types of network performance information identified by the network management system and/or the priority associated with each type of network performance information. The network device may receive the priority information, evaluate the availability of device resources, collect network performance information based on the priority information and the availability of device resources, and communicate the network performance information to the network management system. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119227 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in order to provide for periodic measurements related to a frequency identified by the network, such as a downlink frequency associated with a secondary uplink frequency. In the context of a method, a message is caused to be transmitted to a mobile terminal indicating that the mobile terminal is to perform periodic measurements in relation to a secondary uplink frequency. Following the performance of the periodic measurements by the mobile terminal, the method also includes receiving an indication of the periodic measurements in relation to the secondary uplink frequency that have been performed by the mobile terminal. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119228 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING REFERENCE SIGNAL, UE, AND ENB - The present invention provides a method for configuring a reference signal, a UE, and an eNB. The method includes: determining, by a UE, a reference signal configuration priority set, and sending information of the reference signal configuration priority set to an eNB; and receiving, by the UE, a reference signal configuration measurement set sent by the eNB, where the reference signal configuration measurement set is configured by the eNB according to the information of the reference signal configuration priority set, and the reference signal configuration measurement set is used for the UE to measure and feed back channel state information. In embodiments of the present invention, a reference signal configuration matched with an optimal actual channel of a UE can be selected when an RRH or a base station is geographically separated, so that the UE can acquire a good channel condition. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119229 | ESTIMATING MOBILE LOCAL PROPAGATION ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Characterization and enhancement of a mobile local scattering environment. The system includes a channel component and a link control component, wherein the channel component facilitates communication of a ping signal, which is used to estimate the delay spread characteristics and/or angle of arrival in order to characterize the mobile local scattering environment. This information is sent to the link control component, which enhances radio link performance based on the received information. The system can be used to assist in E-911 location applications, such as determining the location of an indoor user. | 05-01-2014 |
20140126385 | Techniques to Update a Wireless Communication Channel Estimation - Examples are disclosed for updating a wireless communication channel estimation. In some examples, a packet may be transmitted or received via a communication channel, the packet having one or more pilot signals that may shift between subcarrier frequencies based on a predetermined first variable associated with a first time duration. A second variable associated with a second time duration may be determined by the receiver of the data packet. The second variable may enable a receiver of the data packet to decide how many pilot signals may be used to update an initial channel estimation for the communication channel. Other examples are described and claimed. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126386 | Method and Apparatus for Communicating in an Increased Coverage Area to a Wireless Communication Unit - A method for increasing coverage in a wireless communication system is described. The method comprises, at the network element: transmitting a first portion of subframes comprising a number of resource blocks to a first wireless communication unit in a first mode of operation, wherein the number of resource blocks are transmitted at a first power level per resource block; and transmitting, a second portion of subframes to a second wireless communication unit in a second mode of operation at a second power level, wherein the second portion of subframes comprise a lower number of resource blocks than the first portion of subframes and the lower number of resource blocks is transmitted at a second power level per resource block that is higher than the first power level per resource block. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126387 | ENDPOINT SELECTION IN A NETWORK TEST SYSTEM - A method for testing a network and a test manager for a network test system are disclosed. The method for testing a network may including displaying (1) a graphical user interface including a graphical representation of endpoints available for selection as endpoints of traffic to be generated during a test session and (2) a tabular list describing selected endpoints. Source endpoints for the traffic may be selected and the selected source endpoints may be designated on the graphical representation of endpoints and described in the tabular list. Traffic from the selected source endpoints to the selected destination endpoints may be generated for transmission via the network. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126388 | ESTABLISHING WIRELESS CONNECTION BASED ON NETWORK STATUS - The disclosure is related to selecting an access point by a wireless terminal. Access points in an area associated with the wireless terminal may be scanned. From the scanned access points, candidate access points may be determined by filtering out improper access points from the scanned access points. A target access point may be selected from the candidate access points based on wireless link quality of each candidate access point. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126389 | VOICE QUALITY DATA PIGGYBACKING ON SIP SIGNALING MESSAGES - A call session control function (CSCF) receives, from a first user device engaged in a call with a second user device, a first Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) signaling message piggybacked with first data related to a voice quality of an inbound direction of the call at the first user device. The CSCF receives, from a second user device engaged in the call with the first user device, a second SIP signaling message piggybacked with second data related to a voice quality of an inbound direction of the call at the second user device. The CSCF extracts the first data related to the voice quality from the first SIP signaling message, and extracts the second data related to the voice quality from the second SIP signaling message. A charging collection function (CCF) determines a bi-directional voice quality of the call based on the first data and the second data. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126390 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DIRECT CURRENT (DC) ESTIMATION OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PACKET - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of Direct Current (DC) estimation. For example, an apparatus may include an estimator to estimate a DC component of a received wireless communication packet based on a first value, a second value and an estimated frequency offset, wherein the first value is based on a first plurality of samples including at least a plurality of samples of a first sequence of a preamble of the wireless communication packet, the second value is based on a second plurality of samples including at least a plurality of samples of a second sequence of the preamble, immediately successive to the first sequence, and the estimated frequency offset corresponds to a frequency offset between the first and second pluralities of samples. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126391 | POWER SAVING WI-FI TETHERING - The techniques discussed herein reduce the power consumption of a Wi-Fi tethering device by switching the Wi-Fi functionality of the Wi-Fi tethering device from a normal operational mode to a sleep mode during idle intervals. The techniques implement a sleep protocol where a Wi-Fi tethering device and the Wi-Fi client device coordinate and establish a sleep schedule. Moreover, the techniques describe a sleep interval adaptation algorithm to establish sleep duration intervals based on data packet exchange patterns associated with different applications executing on the Wi-Fi client device and/or different operations being performed by the Wi-Fi client device. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126392 | SYNCHRONIZED NETWORK FOR BATTERY BACKUP - Devices, systems, and techniques for a synchronized network for battery backup are described herein. A network device can establish a synchronized sleep schedule with the network while in a mains-power mode of operation. The network device can transmit data in the mains-power mode without regard for a transmission window of the synchronized sleep schedule. The network device can detect an interruption of mains power to itself and transition to a low-power mode of operation. The network device can then transmit data in the low-power mode, restricting data transmission to the transmission window of the synchronized sleep schedule. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126393 | ALGORITHM FOR LONG-LIVED LARGE FLOW IDENTIFICATION - A mechanism for identifying long-lived large flows in a communication network is disclosed in which packets transmitted through ports of a switching device or router are continuously examined. As new flows are recognized, their flow definition information is processed through a hashing table that uses a predetermined number of hash stages each having a pre-selected number of hash buckets. Each hash bucket has a counter that is incremented each time flow definition information ends up in the bucket. At the same time as counters are incremented, they are compared against a threshold number. If the bucket counters for all the hash stages exceed this threshold number, the flow is identified as a long-lived large flow and stored as such in a flow table. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126394 | ADAPTIVE OPTIMIZATION OF TIME OF FLIGHT (ToF) EXCHANGE - Embodiments for providing adaptive optimization of time of flight (ToF) exchange are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a mobile station includes a range management module arranged to transmit a measurement request action frame having a first flag for indicating to an access point to perform an optimized sequence for calculating the ToF, to receive ranging information in response to the transmission of the measurement request action frame having the first flag, and to calculate a time of flight based on the received ranging information. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126395 | SWITCH STATE REPORTING - Disclosed are various embodiments that relate to a network switch. The network switch obtains a network state metric, the network state metric quantifying a network traffic congestion associated with a switch. The network switch identifies a synchronous time stamp associated with the network state metric and generates an network state reporting message, the network state reporting message comprising the network state metric and the synchronous time stamp. The network state reporting message may be transmitted to a monitoring system. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126396 | Annotated Tracing Driven Network Adaptation - Network devices add annotation information to network packets as they travel through the network devices. The network devices may be switches, routers, bridges, hubs, or any other network device. The annotation information may be information specific to the network devices, as opposed to simply the kinds of information available at application servers that receive the network packets. As just a few examples, the annotation information may include switch buffer levels, routing delay, routing parameters affecting the packet, switch identifiers, power consumption, and heat, moisture, or other environmental data. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126397 | DYNAMICALLY ADAPTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In order to facilitate communication between an electronic device and another electronic device, the electronic device determines communication-quality metrics for a first connection in a wireless network based on received information from the other electronic device. Then, the electronic device calculates an overall communication-quality indicator for the first connection based on at least some of the communication-quality metrics. Moreover, the electronic device dynamically adapts the communication with the other electronic device based on the overall communication-quality indicator. For example, the electronic device may establish a second connection in a cellular-telephone network and may use the second connection to communicate with the other electronic device. Alternatively, the electronic device may provide the overall communication-quality indicator to the other electronic device and may at least partially transition the communication from the second connection in the cellular-telephone network to the first connection in the wireless network. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126398 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR PHASE-ONLY FEEDBACK AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - An apparatus includes a receiver to receive a first signal from at least one additional apparatus including a data frame including a FACK request in a signal (SIG) field. A baseband processor generates feedback information for use to perform channel estimation. A transmitter transmits a second signal that includes the feedback information to the at least one additional apparatus. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126399 | BUFFER STATUS REPORTING AND LOGICAL CHANNEL PRIORITIZATION IN MULTIFLOW OPERATION - Uplink reporting and logical channel prioritization in multiflow operation is described. In some embodiments, uplink reporting for multiflow operation utilizes bearer level splitting where the UE associates bearers or logical channel groups (LCGs) with cells for uplink reporting. In some embodiments, uplink reporting for multiflow operation utilizes packet level splitting where the UE groups buffers for all LCGs into a common pool for uplink reporting. In packet level splitting embodiments, the UE may perform uplink reporting based on the total amount of data available for transmission in the common buffer pool or by applying scaling coefficients associated with the serving cells. Some embodiments manage mapping of logical channel payloads to uplink grants for multiflow operation. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126400 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLINK/UPLINK FLOW CONTROL IN AN HSPA+ UE USING AUTONOMOUS CONNECTED DRX MODE TRIGGERING - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with controlling a flow of data in a user equipment (UE). In one example, a communications device is equipped to monitor at least one parameter related to processing of data at the UE, detect that the at least one parameter has passed a threshold, and autonomously trigger a discontinuous reception (DRX) mode of operation for the UE. In an aspect, the at least one parameter may include, but is not limited to, a data rate, Central Processing Unit (CPU) utilization, memory utilization, component temperature, etc. within the UE. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126401 | Gain Control for Intra-Band Carrier Aggregation - In a wireless communication system, carrier aggregation may be used to provide desired amounts of bandwidth, where a primary carrier and one or more secondary carriers are aggregated. At the receive side of a system in which the aggregated carriers are in a single frequency band, an amplifier may be used to apply a common gain to the aggregated carriers in the single frequency band, and the common gain may be determined as a function of indications of received signal quality associated with groups of aggregated carriers containing one or more of the aggregated carriers, where one group contains the primary carrier and possible one or more secondary carriers and another group contains only secondary carriers. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126402 | CONFIGURATION OF INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT RESOURCES FOR ENHANCED DOWNLINK MEASUREMENTS AND MU-MIMO - Apparatuses and methods for indicating and performing interference measurements. A method for performing interference measurements includes identifying a CSI-IM configuration for the UE to perform interference measurement. The method includes determining whether the CSI-IM configuration includes a subset of a total number of frequency resources configured for CSI-IM in the wireless communication system. The method includes measuring interference based on the identified CSI-IM configuration. Additionally, the method includes sending feedback based on the measured interference. The method for performing interference measurements may also include determining whether to perform interference measurements based on all downlink subframes or only a portion of the downlink subframes. Additionally, the method may include performing interference measurement based on the subframe determination. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126403 | METHODS OF OBTAINING MEASUREMENTS IN THE PRESENCE OF STRONG AND/OR HIGHLY VARYING INTERFERENCE - Systems and methods for obtaining effective measurements in a cellular communications network are disclosed. In one embodiment, a node (i.e., a measuring node) in a cellular communications network performs a reference measurement at the node, where the reference measurement contains one or more interference components. The node then mitigates at least one of the interference components contained in the reference measurement to thereby provide an effective measurement. In one embodiment, the effective measurement is used by the measuring node, reported to another node, or both used by the measuring node and reported to another node. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126404 | INTERFERENCE-AWARE DETECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus are provided for transmitting and receiving control information, for interference detection by a User Equipment (UE), in a wireless communication system. A base station determines whether the UE supports interference-aware detection. When the UE supports interference-aware detection, the control information is generated that includes interference signal modulation scheme information and demodulation reference signal measurement information. The control information is transmitted to the UE. The interference at the UE is measured based on the received control information. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126405 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING WIRELESS FRAME, AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK ELEMENT - It is disclosed a method for transmitting wireless frame, including: the wireless frame is transmitted by using any access category. The wireless frame is a beginning frame for performing channel information measurement. It is further disclosed an apparatus for transmitting wireless frame, including: a selection unit and a transmitting unit, where the selection unit is configured to select any access category for a beginning frame for performing the channel information measurement; and the transmitting unit is configured to transmit the beginning frame. It is further disclosed a communication network element provided with the apparatus for transmitting wireless frame mentioned above. It is ensured that the wireless frames subsequent to the frame exchange sequence for performing the channel information measurement may be smoothly transmitted, and the channel information measurement may be smoothly performed, and thereby transmitting communication data based on the acquired channel information. The support of each communication network elements to the MIMO and beam forming is further ensured, and an effective supplement to the existing protocols is provided. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126406 | BEARER CONTROL ON THE BASIS OF PROBING - For maintaining a certain quality of service for a certain type of data traffic, the data traffic may be directed to a corresponding bearer established with respect to a user equipment. By sending probe packets on the bearer and/or on a further bearer and receiving a response packets returned in response to the probe packets, a parameter corresponding to a time period between sending a probe packet and receiving the corresponding response packet can be measured. On the basis of the measured parameter, a bearer control procedure with respect to the user equipment is initiated. This bearer control procedure may for example include directing data packets of selected data traffic from one bearer to another bearer, modification of at least one quality of service parameter of a bearer, and/or establishing or releasing a bearer. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126407 | Method of Achieving Information, Access Node and Communication Device - A method of achieving information associated with sensor data in a communication network including a plurality of communication devices is provided, wherein the method includes receiving a signal at a first communication device, wherein the received signal is associated with sensor data measured by a sensor of a second communication device. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126408 | USER EQUIPMENT - A Channel State Information (CSI) feedback method and a User Equipment (UE) are provided for better support of Joint Transmission (JT) and Beamforming/Coordinated Scheduling (CB/CS). For JT, phase information for an adjacent Base Station (BS) is fed back. For CB/CS, enhanced CSI for an adjacent BS is fed back. The UE according to the present invention includes: a coordinated BS set determining unit configured for determining a set of coordinated BSs participating in multi-BS coordination, the set of coordinated BSs containing a serving BS and at least one non-serving BS; and a CSI feedback unit configured for feeding back CSI for JT or CB/CS for each non-serving BS in the set of coordinated BSs. The present invention has the advantages of simple implementation and low overhead and is applicable in LTE-A and 4G systems. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126409 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE - A method and an apparatus for reporting a channel state in a wireless communication system are provided. A wireless device monitors a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for downlink control information (DCI), which comprises a request for a channel quality indicator (CQI) for a plurality of wireless devices. When a CQI report is triggered by the request for the CQI, the wireless device reports the CQI to a base station. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126410 | Heterogeneous Self-Organizing Network for Access and Backhaul - This application discloses methods for creating self-organizing networks implemented on heterogeneous mesh networks. The self-organizing networks can include a computing cloud component coupled to the heterogeneous mesh network. In the methods and computer-readable mediums disclosed herein, a processor receives an environmental condition for a mesh network. The processor may have measured the environmental condition, or it could have received it from elsewhere, e.g., internally stored information, a neighboring node, a server located in a computing cloud, a network element, user equipment (“UE”), and the like. After receiving the environmental condition, the processor evaluates it and determines whether an operational parameter within the mesh network should change to better optimize network performance. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126411 | INDICATING PERFORMANCE INFORMATION TO A USER TO IMPROVE COMMUNICATIONS - A system, method, and handheld wireless device for improving a connection to a wireless device. Performance information is measured for the connection to the wireless device. One or more trends in one or more averages associated with the performance information are determined. The one or more trends and the one or more averages are displayed to user. Recommendations are generated for the user to implement a user action in response to the one or more trends and the one or more averages to improve the connection to the wireless device. The recommendations are displayed to the user to improve the connection in real-time. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126412 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication method of a base station transmits a modulation signal based on an OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) modulation scheme to a plurality of communication terminals. The method includes forming a transmission frame on which a first subcarrier group and a second subcarrier group are arranged, and determining on a per frame basis, which subcarrier group of the first subcarrier group and the second subcarrier group is allocated to each of the plurality of communication terminals and what number of subcarriers are selected from the subcarrier group that is allocated to each of the plurality of communication terminals. The method further includes forming the transmission frame based on the determined subcarrier group and the determined number of subcarriers, transmitting the modulation signal including the transmission frame, and receiving feedback information including radio propagation condition estimation information from each of the plurality of communication terminals. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126413 | DETERMINING SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT COMPLIANCE - A system, computer implemented method, and server for measuring compliance with a SLA. The system includes a server operable to communicate with a number of UNIs. The system further includes a network operable to communicate packets between the server and the number of UNIs. The server includes an application engine operable to determine that the network is noncompliant with the SLA in response to the determined frame loss and further in response to a determination that a committed information rate (CIR) has not been exceeded, and the monitoring device being further operable to log the network is noncompliant with the SLA. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126414 | MULTI-CHANNEL MULTI-ACCESS VOICE OVER IP INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - The present invention provides systems and methods employing Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology to provide multi-channel, multi-access voice communication capabilities. | 05-08-2014 |
20140133317 | ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION MODE SWITCHING | 05-15-2014 |
20140133318 | SCALABLE BROADBAND GROUP CALL VIA UNICAST DOWNLINK TRAFFIC CONSOLIDATION AND LOCAL RE-BROADCAST - A method, system, and device consolidate unicast downlinks in a broadband radio access network (RAN) for a requested group call. A subset of subscriber devices of the group in sufficiently close proximity is detected, one subscriber device in the subset is selected to act as a subscriber device to subscriber device broadcast downlink repeater (SD-BDR), and group call data is transmitted to each subscriber not in a subset via a separate unicast downlink, and to each subset via a single outbound unicast link to the selected subscriber device. The selected SD-BDR in each subset then re-broadcasts the group call data to the other members of the subset, thereby reducing outbound broadband resource usage in the broadband RAN. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133319 | RECEIVE DIVERSITY CONTROL IN TD-SCDMA - In a TD-SCDMA user equipment (UE) with multiple receive chains, receive diversity may be implemented where multiple receive chains may simultaneously activate to perform reception on downlink signals. Receive diversity may be enabled when single chain reception provides undesired results and when receive diversity will not impact power consumption too much. A state machine may be implemented to control receive diversity operation based on operating conditions such as an error rate, signal-to-interference ratio, and other factors. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133320 | INTER-PACKET INTERVAL PREDICTION LEARNING ALGORITHM - An appliance receives packets that are part of a flow pair, each packet sharing an application protocol. The appliance determines the application protocol of the packets by performing deep packet inspection (DPI) on the packets. Packet sizes are measured and converted into packet size states. Packet size states, packet sequence numbers, and packet flow directions are used to create an application protocol estimation table (APET). The APET is used during normal operation to estimate the application protocol of a flow pair without performing time consuming DPI. The appliance then determines inter-packet intervals between received packets. The inter-packet intervals are converted into inter-packet interval states. The inter-packet interval states and packet sequence numbers are used to create an inter-packet interval prediction table. The appliance then stores an inter-packet interval prediction table for each application protocol. The inter-packet interval prediction table is used during operation to predict the inter-packet interval between packets. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133321 | Method for Validating Radio-Frequency Performance of Wireless Electronic Devices - A test system for testing a wireless electronic device is provided. The test system may include a test host and a tester. The test host may instruct the electronic device under test (DUT) to transmit radio-frequency test signals in a selected resource block of a desired channel identified by a channel number in the Long Term Evolution frequency band. The tester may measure harmonic output power levels of the radio-frequency test signals transmitted by the DUT at harmonic frequencies of the selected resource block. The test host may compare the measured harmonic output power levels to threshold power levels to characterize the radio-frequency performance of wireless circuitry in the DUT. The test system may test the radio-frequency performance of the DUT for radio-frequency test signals transmitted by the DUT in some or all resource blocks in the desired Long Term Evolution band. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133322 | APERTURE SYNTHESIS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for improving capacity in wireless communications systems for use in areas having a high user traffic density. For reception, signals received from an antenna array are processed by performing a transformation comprising aperture synthesis to map signal content received from the antenna array to at least one element of a plurality of elements in an image plane storage to produce a time series of values for the at least one element, and then by assigning the at least one element to at least one radio access transceiver of a plurality of radio access transceivers for receiving the time series of values from the at least one element. For transmission, at least one radio access transceiver of a plurality of radio access transceivers is assigned to at least one element of a plurality of elements in an image plane storage, the assignment providing for the at least one element to receive a time series of values from the at least one radio access transceiver, and then a transformation is performed comprising antenna synthesis to map the time series of values from the at least one element to the signals for transmission by the antenna array. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133323 | Adjusting Link Layer Control Frame to Facilitate Data Thoughput - A base station subsystem includes logic to change the modulation and coding scheme for radio communications, and logic to communicate with a switching GSM to cause a change in link layer control frame size to reflect the change in modulation and coding scheme. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133324 | ANT SYNCWORD SPECIFIC ACQUISITION THRESHOLDING - Systems, methods, and devices for determining an acquisition threshold boundary value and applying that boundary value to identify which incoming signals are directed to a device, based on matching the device syncword with the syncword for the incoming signal. For some implementations using ANT protocol, syncwords composed of the last four bits of the preamble and first 14 bits of the network address identify each device. Incoming syncwords are correlated with the device's syncword, and the correlation compared to threshold boundary value which is based on the characteristics of the individual syncword, including syncword bit stream inter-symbol interference. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133325 | Feedback and Scheduling for Coordinated Multi-Point (CoMP) Joint Transmission (JT) in Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) - A method implemented in a user equipment (UE) used in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) wireless communications system supporting coordinated multi-point (CoMP) joint transmission (JT) is disclosed. The method includes measuring reference signal received power (RSRP), transmitting, to a network, first feedback on the RSRP, receiving, from the network, a CoMP measurement set, conducting pre-scheduling CoMP UE fallback according to the CoMP measurement set, computing channel quality and direction information according to a UE category, and transmitting, to the network, second feedback on the channel quality and direction information. Other methods, apparatuses, and systems also are disclosed. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133326 | VOIP BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A bandwidth management system and a method adapted for the system. The system determines when the sum of the required bandwidth of a new VOIP call and previous VOIP calls from a client device is greater than the maximum sustained rate, transmits a SIP invite to a called party of the new VOIP call to execute a SIP negotiation via a base station and monitors the new VOIP call and the VOIP calls whose SIP negotiations are not successful. When one of the VOIP calls of awaiting SIP negotiations is successful, the system calculates an actual used bandwidth of the client device, and when the actual used bandwidth is equal to or less than the maximum sustained rate, the system establishes a call link for the one VOIP call and monitoring the other VOIP calls of awaiting SIP negotiations. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133327 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, CONTROL METHOD, SETTING METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station communicates with a mobile station that continuously transmits a predetermined number of the same packets for predetermined time intervals. The base station includes a measuring unit that measures reception quality of packets received from the mobile station, among the predetermined number of the same packets that are continuous; and a control unit performing control of causing the mobile station to set the predetermined number based on the reception quality measured by the measuring unit. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133328 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING NARROW BANDWIDTH INTERFERENCE CONTAINED IN BROAD BANDWIDTH SIGNALS - Under one aspect of the present invention, a system for processing a group of signals and interference includes (a) an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter for digitizing the group of signals and the interference; (b) a Fourier transform circuit for obtaining a Fourier transform of the digitized group of signals and the interference and to provide as output spectral bins, at least one of which contains the interference; (c) a power analysis circuit for comparing the collective power level of the spectral bins to a predetermined threshold, and if the collective power level exceeds the predetermined threshold, and for excising at least one bin that contains the interference; and (d) an inverse Fourier transform circuit for obtaining an inverse Fourier transform of the remaining spectral bins and outputting a digitized group of signals less the interference in any excised spectral bin. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133329 | ADAPTIVE CHANNEL STATE FEEDBACK ESTIMATION - Aspects of the present invention provide apparatuses and methods for adaptive channel state feedback (CSF) estimation techniques. Downlink transmissions can be received at a mobile device. The downlink transmissions can be received after the mobile device has entered a power saving mode of operation. The downlink transmission received can be a discontinuous downlink subframe and can include one or more pilot symbols. A channel variation factor of the transmission channel can be determined based on the received downlink transmission. Based on the amount of variation of the transmission channel, either an earlier-received or a later-received pilot symbol can be used for CSF estimation. Further, either higher or lower weighted filter coefficients can be selected for use in CSF estimation based on the amount of variation of the transmission channel. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133330 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ENERGY MANAGEMENT, PROFILES, AND MESSAGE BLOCKS IN A CABLE SERVICE ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example and includes creating a plurality of profiles that describe one or more downstream modulations for each data-subcarrier in a channel to be used by a plurality of cable modems; receiving at least one testing measurement from the plurality of cable modems; and assigning a selected one of the plurality of profiles to each of the plurality of cable modems based, at least in part, on the one testing measurement that was received. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133331 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BLINDLY DETECTING A COMMON SEARCH SPACE AND A UE SPECIFIC SEARCH SPACE - Methods and apparatus are provided for blindly detecting a common search space and a UE specific search space. A location of a candidate EPDCCH occupied by a common search space is determined. A blind detection is performed for the candidate EPDCCH occupied by the common search space. A location of a candidate enhanced EPDCCH occupied by a UE specific search space is determined. A blind detection is performed for the candidate EPDCCH occupied by the UE specific search space. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133332 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SUPPORTING UE RELAY FUNCTIONS - The present invention is directed to a method and an apparatus for use in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the present invention is directed to a method of performing ProSe by a Public Safety ProSe-enabled UE in a cellular communication system wherein the Public Safety ProSe-enabled UE is a member of a ProSe Group, and at least one UE of the ProSe Group is not served by a cellular network, and an apparatus therefore, in which the method comprising: checking whether the Public Safety ProSe-enabled UE is in a location served by the cellular network; and transmitting first information related to the ProSe Group from the ProSe Group to the cellular network if a condition is satisfied. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133333 | Systems and Methods for Adaptation and Reconfiguration in a Wireless Network - An embodiment method for adaptation and reconfiguration in a wireless network includes base stations coordinating and setting aside a set of time-frequency resources for probing purposes, the base stations coordinating a set of probing transmissions and timings to be used to synchronize base stations/UEs actions, the base stations signaling the resources and timings to UEs, the base stations performing coordinated operations on the resources according to the timings, the base stations receiving feedback reports from UEs based on UE measurements on the signaled resources according to the signaled timings, and the base stations further coordinating the operations for further probing or to apply probing transmissions on broader time-frequency resources. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133334 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING MULTI-USER CHANNEL QUALITY IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND USER TERMINAL AND BASE STATION THEREFOR - Provided are a method for determining multi-user channel quality in a mobile communication system, a user terminal and a base station of the present invention. The method includes: in each user terminal, calculating the MU CQIs based on a first feedback template notified from a base station that has control over the user terminal or a second feedback template set by the user terminal and feeding the MU CQIs back to the base station. In the first feedback template or the second feedback template, a feedback ratio of MU CQIs for a plurality of hypothetical interference numbers k are defined, k being an integer larger than 0 and smaller than a maximum number of users schedulable by the base station. According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the accuracy in multi-user MIMO scheduling. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133335 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless communications system includes a base station, a plurality of intermediate devices, and a terminal device. Downlink communications may be provided directly from the base station to the terminal device, including control signals which instruct the terminal device where to send uplink data. This enables the base station to directly control scheduling of uplink communications, and in particular to define an uplink route from the terminal device to the base station via one or more intermediate devices. Power is conserved at the terminal device on the uplink because a lower power transmission can be used which although insufficient to reach the base station can reach the intermediate device. The terminal device is not required to determine the uplink path itself and therefore does not require complex, expensive, and power consuming control logic. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133336 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION TRANSMITTING METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT, AND CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION RECEIVING METHOD AND BASE STATION - One embodiment of the present invention discloses a method for allowing user equipment (UE), which can receive channel state information reference signals from a plurality of antenna ports, to transmit channel state information to at least one base station that controls the plurality of antenna ports. The method comprises the following steps: receiving power information of each of the plurality of antenna ports from the at least one base station; calculating channel state information on the at least one base station on the basis of the received power information and channel state information reference signals received from the plurality of antenna ports; and transmitting the calculated channel state information to the at least one base station. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133337 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION POWER OF PREAMBLE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for determining transmission power of a preamble in a wireless communication system. A terminal estimates secondary cell (SCell) path loss with respect to a downlink (DL) component carrier (CC), which is in a linkage relationship with an uplink (UL) component carrier inside the SCell; decides the transmission power of a physical random access channel (PRACH) preamble based on the SCell path loss that is estimated; and transmits the PRACH preamble to a base station through the ULCC inside the SCell, based on the transmission power that is decided. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133338 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - The first wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with a first wireless apparatus on a first wireless network. The beacon transmitting unit cyclically transmits a beacon signal to the first wireless apparatus via the first wireless communication unit. The period determiner determines a transmission permission period during which data transmission by the first wireless apparatus is permitted. The notification unit notifies a control signal specifying the transmission permission period to the first wireless apparatus via the beacon signal. The power managing unit performs control so that power supply to the first wireless communication unit is suspended during a suspension period, the suspend period being a period except both the transmission permission period and a transmission timing period of the beacon signal within a whole period. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133339 | Radio Communication Device and Radio Communication Method - A radio base station | 05-15-2014 |
20140133340 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - This invention discloses method and apparatus for obtaining channel state information, and relates to the field of communication techniques, capable of reducing signaling and feedback overheads and lowering UE operation complexity. According to the solutions provided in embodiments of this invention, a RS predetermined transmission time and a RS predetermined frequency are transmitted to a UE by any one cell of at least two cells; each cell or cell group out of the at least two cells, according to the RS predetermined transmission time and the RS predetermined frequency, transmits a RS to the UE on different RS resources; the measurement result transmitted by the UE is received, which comprises CSI between any one cell or cell group out of at least two cells and the UE. The solutions provided in embodiments of this invention are applicable when it is required to obtain CSI between multiple cells and a UE. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133341 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System for Handling Status Information of Data Units - A method is provides in a receiving node for handling status information of data units transmitted from a sending node to the receiving node over a radio link. The receiving node establishes ( | 05-15-2014 |
20140133342 | PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT IN A NETWORK SUPPORTING MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) - A method and apparatus to provide hop-by-hop tracking for a communication network is described. In one embodiment, a router verifies that a next downstream router does not support tracking and in response terminates hop-by-hop tracking. An end router provides a compilation of all the timestamps back to the originating router. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133343 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION FOR INTER-CELL COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CELLULAR SYSTEM - A method for transmitting feedback information for collaborative transmission in a cellular radio communication system is provided. The method includes receiving, from the base station, collaborative cell information indicating a plurality of collaborative cells, determining at least two preferred collaborative cells among the plurality of collaborative cells, generating feedback information including cell indicators for discriminating between the at least two preferred collaborative cells and the other cell, precoding matrix indicators for the at least two preferred collaborative cells, and channel quality indicators, and transmitting the feedback information via one of a control channel and a data channel. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133344 | CONCEPT FOR DETERMINING AN ORIENTATION OF A MOBILE DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a mobile device having a receiver and an orientation determiner. The receiver has a plurality of antennas for receiving a signal from a stationary transmitter. Each antenna of the plurality of antennas is arranged to have a different receiving direction. The receiver is configured to detect a signal strength of the signal received with each antenna in order to obtain a plurality of detected signal strengths. The orientation determiner is configured to determine an orientation of the mobile device relative to the stationary transmitter based on the plurality of detected signal strengths. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133345 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING MAPPING RELATIONSHIP AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDING BACK CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for establishing a mapping relationship and for feeding back channel quality information. The methods are applicable to terminal equipment configured with a coordinated multiple-point feedback mode, the method for establishing a mapping relationship includes: determining, by terminal equipment, the number of bits for denoting differential channel quality information and mapping relationship between each of bit values of the differential channel quality information and an offset reference value according to a CoMP transmission mode, so as to feed back the differential channel quality information by using the mapping relationship; wherein in the mapping relationship, a plurality of offset reference values to which the bit values in an order from small to large correspond are a plurality of incremental integers. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133346 | METHOD OF USER EQUIPMENT MONITORING CONTROL INFORMATION IN A MULTIPLE NODE SYSTEM AND USER EQUIPMENT USING THE METHOD - There are provided a method of user equipment monitoring control information and user equipment using the method. The method includes receiving information about a first reference position for a first Enhanced-Physical Control Format Indication Channel (E-PCFICH) from a Base Station (BS); detecting the first E-PCFICH in a resource indicated by the information about the first reference position; obtaining information about a reference position for a second E-PCFICH based on the information about the first reference position, wherein each of the first E-PCFICH and the second E-PCFICH is a control channel including information about the size of the frequency domain for an Enhanced-Physical Downlink Control Channel (E-PDCCH) for demodulating the control information by using a UE-specific Reference Signal (URS); and detecting the second E-PCFICH based on the obtained information about the reference position for the second E-PCFICH. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140222 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING CID REUSE IN LTE BASED D2D COMMUNICATIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with minimizing D2D RTS/CTS signaling overhead resource usage. In one example, a WAN entity is equipped to receive one or more channel gain values from a plurality of UEs, determine that a CID can be reused by multiple D2D links based on the received one or more channel gain values, and transmit information indicating that the CID may be reused. In another example, a UE is equipped to measure a direct power signals and an inverse power echoes on a CID used for a link formed between a third and fourth UE, and determine that the CID may potentially be reused by a link formed with a second UE for D2D RTS/CTS signaling, based at least in part on the measured direct power signals, measured the inverse power echoes, and a SIR threshold. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140223 | INTER RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) MEASUREMENT - A user equipment (UE) may perform an inter radio access technology (IRAT) measurement in time slots not deemed to be carrying critical data. In such instances, the UE only transmits and decodes critical data in the critical time slots when a serving cell signal is low for a determined period of time. Otherwise, when the time slots do not carry critical data, i.e., non-critical time slots, the UE stops transmitting and decoding and uses the non-critical time slots for IRAT measurement. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140224 | Antenna Selection for Coexistence of Multiple Radio Interfaces - A wireless communication device comprises a wide area transceiver, an auxiliary receiver, a plurality of antennas for use by said auxiliary receiver and said wide area transceiver, and an antenna selection circuit. The antenna selection circuit selects an antenna configuration for the auxiliary receiver and the wide area transceiver. The antenna selection circuit is configured to measure a link quality for one or more of antennas used by the auxiliary receiver, and select an antenna configuration for the wide area transceiver based on the link quality measurements for the auxiliary receiver. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140225 | DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM WITH UPLINK BANDWIDTH FOR SIGNAL ANALYSIS - One embodiment is directed towards a distributed antenna system (DAS). The DAS includes a host unit a plurality of remote units communicatively coupled to the host unit. The plurality of remote units are configured to implement a common arrangement of resource blocks for uplink transport signals. The host unit is configured to instruct a subset of the plurality of remote units to send a digital sample stream over a monitor path of their respective uplink transport signals. One or more simulcast modules are configured to sum the monitor paths from the respective uplink transport signals to generate a summed digital sample stream, the one or more simulcast modules configured to send the summed digital sample stream to the host unit. The host unit is configured to provide a signal based on the summed digital sample stream to one or more signal analysis modules. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140226 | IRAT MEASUREMENT REPORTING METHOD IN TD-SCDMA - A user equipment (UE) considers both the signal strength in time slot zero and the signal quality of the downlink traffic time slots when determining whether to send an IRAT measurement report to trigger IRAT handover to GSM. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140227 | Method for corroboration and transferring trust between network databases for enhanced positioning accuracy - Techniques for transferring trust between networks are described herein. An example of a method of using a mobile device to transfer trust between networks described herein includes receiving WAN base station information including a WAN base station trustworthiness value, determining a WAN position estimate for the mobile device based on the WAN base station information, receiving access point information including an access point trustworthiness value, determining an access point position estimate for the mobile device based on the access point information, determining if the WAN position estimate and the access point position estimate are corroborated, and increasing the access point trustworthiness value if the WAN position estimate and the access point position estimate are corroborated and the WAN base station trustworthiness value is higher than the access point trustworthiness value. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140228 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING WIRELESS LINK EFFICIENCY - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for improving transmission efficiency of a wireless link. During operation, the system receives a packet for transmission, where in the packet includes an original sequence number. The system then modifies the packet by including a virtual sequence number in a header of the packet and including the original sequence number in a payload of the modified packet. The system further aggregates a number of modified packets into an aggregate frame and transmits the aggregate frame to a destination device. The virtual sequence number facilitates stateless transmission of the encapsulated packets and allows the aggregate frame to have a maximum allowable number of packets while accommodating both re-transmitted packets and regular packets. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140229 | MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a gateway (GW), when interference is detected by an interference detection unit, a frame generation unit sends an interference broadcast signal. A terminal receives the interference broadcast signal sent at a maximum transmission power from the GW to which the terminal belongs. The interference broadcast signal includes information on a planned transmission power value that is a transmission power value of a data signal in the GW and is smaller than the maximum transmission power value. The interference broadcast signal is sent at the maximum transmission power value. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140230 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, TRANSMITTING TERMINAL, AND RECEIVING TERMINAL - A wireless communication system constitutes a wireless ad hoc network. A plurality of wireless terminals include a receiving terminal and a plurality of the transmitting terminals. Each of the transmitting terminals executes direct communication or indirect communication. The wireless communication system includes a first obtainer that obtains a reception side terminal number which is the number of the wireless terminals with which the receiving terminal is able to communicate directly, a second obtainer that obtains a transmission side terminal number which is the number of the wireless terminals with which a target transmitting terminal, which is one of the plurality of transmitting terminals, is able to communicate directly, and a setter that selects one of the direct communication and the indirect communication based on the reception side terminal number and the transmission side terminal number, and sets the target transmitting terminal so as to execute the selected communication. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140231 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOTION DETECTION USING DIGITAL ENHANCED CORDLESS TELECOMMUNICAITON (DECT) SIGNALS - A digital enhanced cordless telecommunication (DECT) base station, the DECT base station may include a transmitter that is arranged to transmit, at different points of time, downlink transmitted DECT signals to another DECT device that differs from the DECT base station; a receiver that is arranged to receive from the other DECT device downlink reception information indicative of attributes of downlink received DECT signals that were received by the other DECT device as a result of the transmission of the downlink transmitted DECT signals; a processor that is arranged to process the downlink reception information to detect a motion that affects a reception of the downlink received DECT signals by the other device. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140232 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING WIRELESS LINK EFFICIENCY - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for improving transmission efficiency of a wireless link. During operation, the system receives a packet for transmission, where in the packet includes an original sequence number. The system then modifies the packet by including a virtual sequence number in a header of the packet and including the original sequence number in a payload of the modified packet. The system further aggregates a number of modified packets into an aggregate frame and transmits the aggregate frame to a destination device. The virtual sequence number facilitates stateless transmission of the encapsulated packets and allows the aggregate frame to have a maximum allowable number of packets while accommodating both re-transmitted packets and regular packets. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140233 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS PACKET CAPTURE USING MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system and method for wireless packet capture using mobile communication devices such as commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) mobile communication devices is disclosed. Embodiments provide mobile communication device users the ability to collect wireless packet data for digital communications on COTS hardware and share the data amongst multiple devices for collection, processing, and geo-location without custom interfaces and external sensor devices. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140234 | DETERMINING PATH CONGESTION MEASURES - Methods and apparatus for determining measures indicative of downstream path congestion in respect of a node via which a plurality of data units are traversing an end-to-end path from a sender to a receiver, each data unit having a first indication settable in dependence on information from the receiver to each of at least two states whereby to indicate different levels of congestion experienced on the end-to-end path by data units previously received by the receiver; and a second indication settable to an initial state and to at least one updated state indicative of congestion experienced by data units on their path from the sender to said node; the method comprising receiving a plurality of said data units at said node, and determining said downstream path congestion measure in dependence on an inflation factor itself dependent on the proportion of a set of said data units whose second indication on receipt at said node is in said initial state. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140235 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INCLUDING HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Provided are a method and apparatus for mitigating the interference of an interfering base station (eNB) in a heterogeneous network. The method comprises: transmitting threshold value information to an interfered eNB; receiving second feedback information, which takes into account interference caused by the interfering eNB to an interfered user equipment (UE) selected by the interfered eNB, from the interfered UE on the basis of the threshold value information and first feedback information; selecting a precoding matrix for minimizing interference to the interfered UE on the basis of the second feedback information; and applying the precoding matrix and transmitting a signal to an UE, to which the interfering eNB provides service. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140236 | AUTOMATED NETWORK CONDITION IDENTIFICATION - Performance data relating to each of multiple network devices distributed in a geographic region is analyzed. That data can include values for various parameters measured automatically by routine polling of subscriber devices and/or network elements serving those subscriber devices. Measured parameter values can then be stored in a database and made available, together with information about subscriber device locations, to one or more analysis servers that analyze different portions of the network. As part of that analysis, groups of devices experiencing performance problems are identified based on device location. Information about those groups is then communicated and can be made available for, e.g., monitoring by service personnel. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140237 | METHOD, DEVICE AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR SENDING INDICATION INFORMATION, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RECEIVING MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE - Provided are a method, device and UE for sending indication information, and a method and device for receiving an MBMS. The method for sending indication information includes: UE determining that the UE has left one or more MBSFN areas which can carry a predetermined MBMS; the UE sending indication information to a network side. The method for receiving MBMS includes: UE receiving a specified MBMS which is carried in one or more MBSFN area to which a source cell where the UE is currently located belongs; after the UE performs cell reselection and resides in a target cell, in the case that one or more MBSFN areas to which the target cell belongs are different from one or more MBSFN areas to which the source cell belongs, the UE acquiring a condition of one or more MBMSs which are carried in the one or more MBSFN areas to which the target cell belongs; and the UE continuing receiving the specified MBMS in the target cell according to the acquired MBMS condition. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140238 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR POWER DETERMINATION - The present invention provides a method and a base station for power determination. The method comprises obtaining an optimal number of sub-carriers occupied by each user equipment, an optimal number of radio frequency links enabled by a base station and an optimal transmitting power of the base station by optimizing the number of the sub-carriers occupied by each user equipment, the number of the radio frequency links enabled by the base station and the transmitting power of the base station with an optimization condition that throughput of each user equipment is not smaller than a throughput threshold and an optimization goal of minimizing total power consumption of the base station; and determining the total power consumption of the base station according to the optimal number of the sub-carriers occupied by each user equipment, the optimal number of the radio frequency links enabled by the base station. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140239 | Method and Apparatus for Conducting Measurements when Multiple Carriers are Supported - Measurements are conducted on one or more carriers in a case where an access terminal supports reception on multiple carriers. Upon determining that an access terminal is capable of concurrently receiving on a given set of carriers, a measurement is conducted on one or more carriers of the set while receiving on or more other carriers of the set. Conversely, upon determining that an access terminal is not capable of concurrently receiving on a given set of carriers, a measurement is conducted on one or more carriers of the set while not receiving on or more other carriers of the set. In addition, data transfers to or from an access terminal on a carrier may be restricted (e.g., data transfers not scheduled or only low priority data transfers scheduled) during one or more subframes before or after the access terminal conducts a measurement on another carrier. | 05-22-2014 |
20140146689 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING DOWNLINK REFERENCE SIGNAL INTERFERENCE TO PDSCH IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION - A communications system employing CoMP transmission to suppress interference comprises: a CoMP user equipment; and a plurality of base stations, one of the base stations being an associated base station of the CoMP user equipment to transmit data to the CoMP user equipment, the plurality of base stations including multiple CoMP base stations for the CoMP user equipment. The CoMP base stations for the CoMP user equipment transmit CoMP downlink data, including subframes which comprise physical resource blocks having a plurality of resource elements (REs) and cell-specific reference signal (CRS) resource element (RE) locations. PDSCH bit-level muting or puncturing information is determined, based on radio resource management measurement and the subframes sent from the multiple CoMP base stations, to identify PDSCH REs that suffer strong CRS interference transmission from within the multiple CoMP base stations and are to be subjected to one of bit-level muting or bit-level puncturing. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146690 | OPPORTUNISTIC DECODING OF TRANSMISSIONS ON A FORWARD LINK IN A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). A packet is decoded and demodulated by an M2M device that is received during a time slot of a physical layer forward link frame in the M2M wireless WAN. The packet is transmitted by a base station. The M2M device enters a sleep state before a physical layer acknowledgment (ACK) message is transmitted to the base station to indicate receipt of the packet. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146691 | COOPERATIVE MEASURMENTS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus communicates using a first radio based on a first radio technology and configures a second radio based on a second radio technology different from the first radio technology to receive signals transmitted based on a radio technology different from the second radio technology. The apparatus also measures a quality indicator of a signal received at the second radio. The signal is transmitted based on the radio technology different from the second radio technology. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146692 | POWER MANAGEMENT FOR DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AND RELATED COMPONENTS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Power management techniques in distributed communication systems are disclosed herein. Related components, systems, and methods are also disclosed. In embodiments disclosed herein, services within a remote unit of the distributed communication system are selectively activated and power consumption is measured. From at least two measurements, a maximum power available may be calculated and compared to power requirements of the remote unit. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146693 | ESTIMATING AVAILABLE BANDWITH IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - Systems and methods for estimating bandwidth. A first probe flow is sent into cellular traffic, and a first bandwidth quantity achieved by the first probe flow is measured. A second probe flow is sent into the cellular traffic, and a second bandwidth quantity achieved by the first probe flow while the second probe flow is in the cellular traffic is measured. The first bandwidth quantity and the second bandwidth quantity are compared, and at least one result from the comparing is determined. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146694 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECTING CONGESTION ON A TRANSMISSION LINK - Detection of the congestion on a link based on an exchange of messages between a sender and a receiver, one sender and several receivers or several senders and one receiver. This equipment is connected to the ends of a transmission channel. One of the items of equipment is designated as the master and the others slaves. These exchanges are aimed at enabling the master to calculate and compare the rate of the data send and the rate of the data received. A divergence in the rates calculated reveals a congestion on the link. All these exchanges are made in the application layer and therefore do not involve the underlying layers. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146695 | SIGNAL PROCESSING APPARATUS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A signal processing apparatus which processes a voice packet is provided. The signal processing apparatus includes: a network jitter measurer which estimates network jitter using a weighting of a network jitter variance according to a network state, a compression and output unit which compresses or outputs a voice frame based on the estimated network jitter, and a loss concealer which divides a voice packet loss into short-term loss concealment and long-term loss concealment, and performs loss concealment in a different way depending on whether the voice packet loss is the short-term loss concealment or the long-term loss concealment. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146696 | UE Measurement Enhancement in Adaptive TDD Configuration Networks - Methods for UE measurement enhancement in an adaptive TDD configuration network are proposed. In a first solution, the network provides an adaptive TDD indicator to the UE. In a second solution, the network provides an instantaneous TDD configuration to the UE. In a third solution, multiple TDD configurations are grouped as one TDD group, and the network adapts TDD configurations within the same TDD group. In a fourth solution, the network broadcasts a TDD reference configuration in SIB1, and adapts to another TDD configuration with DL super set constraint, i.e., the DL subframes of the other TDD configuration form a super set of the DL subframes of the broadcasted TDD reference configuration. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146697 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing communication in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes receiving Measurement Gap (MG) configuration information related to the measurement gap, determining a subframe number specifying a starting point of the measurement gap based on the measurement gap configuration information, starting the measurement gap at an end of a subframe immediately before a subframe of the determined subframe number, performing a predetermined measurement operation during the measurement gap, and performing a predetermined operation in a subframe immediately after the measurement gap based on a duplexing mode of a User Equipment (UE) and a type of the subframe immediately before the measurement gap. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146698 | CHANNEL ASSESSMENT IN AN INFORMATION NETWORK - A method for assessing channel performance in a network is provided. The network includes a network controller and nodes. The method preferably includes selecting a channel for assessment and allocating a first probe operation for use with the nodes. The method may also include, in response to the allocating, sending a first probe operation report message from each of the nodes to the network controller. The method may further include using the network controller to select a node to be a channel assessment operation node. In addition, the method may include selecting at least a portion of the nodes to participate in a channel assessment operation signal exchange. The method may also include moving the selected nodes to a different channel to perform a channel assessment operation on the different channel and using the channel assessment operation node to allocate a second probe operation on each of the selected nodes. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146699 | Inter-Carrier Measurement Technique - A technique for scheduling an inter-carrier measurement in a communication network serving a mobile device ( | 05-29-2014 |
20140146700 | PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS IN A DIGITAL CELLULAR WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for performing measurements in a digital cellular wireless telecommunication network ( | 05-29-2014 |
20140146701 | EVOLUTION OF ETHERNET NETWORKS - An Ethernet network comprises nodes which support a plurality of different forwarding modes. A range of VLAN Identifiers (VIDs) are allocated to each of the forwarding modes. Connections are configured between a source node and a destination node of the network using different forwarding modes. Packets carrying data traffic are sent to the destination node by selectively setting a VID in a packet to a first value, to transfer a packet via a first connection and a first forwarding mode, and a second value to transfer a packet via the second connection and the second forwarding mode. Packets received from both of the connections and sent on to an end user. VLAN Identifiers can be allocated to different releases of functionality at nodes (e.g. software releases) such that packets are forwarded via a set of nodes supporting a first release, or via a set of nodes supporting a second release. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146702 | Wireless Communication Enabled Meter and Network - A meter enabled for wireless communication and a wireless communication network are disclosed. A meter enabled for wireless communication comprises a metering device, a wireless communication system and an interface between the two. Meter data can be read, and the meter can be controlled via communication with a wireless network using, e.g., the Bluetooth™ protocol. A self-configuring wireless network is also disclosed. The wireless network includes a number of vnodes, and one or more VGATES. The vnodes are devices that are enabled for wireless communication using, e.g., the Bluetooth™ protocol. Vnodes are operative to form ad hoc piconet connections. The one or more VGATES comprise computer network gateways that are enabled for wireless communication using, e.g., the Bluetooth™ protocol. Thus, the VGATES enable the wireless array of vnodes to communicate with a private or public computer network to transmit data or receive commands. The network may also communicate with a VNOC system. VNOC is a universal communications adapter that enables the wireless array of vnodes to communicate (either directly or through a VGATE) with a central control facility via various wireless or wired communication media. | 05-29-2014 |
20140153409 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNCIATIONS - Systems and methods performed by a telephony device allow the telephony device to test the quality of multiple potential paths which can be used to conduct a telephony communication. By testing the conditions that presently exist, the telephony device can choose the path that is presently offering the best quality. A telephony communication may be setup over an initial path, and then subsequent testing may determine that it is best to switch to an alternate path offering better call quality. The initial path used for the telephony communication may be the one that offers the fastest initial connection. When multiple potential paths exist, the telephony communication may be conducted over a first path while keep alive messages are communicated over a second path so that the telephony communication can be quickly switched to the second path. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153410 | MOBILE-TO-MOBILE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK EDGE OPTIMIZER MODULE CONTENT CROSS-CALL PARALLELIZED CONTENT RE-COMPRESSION, OPTIMIZATION, TRANSFER, AND SCHEDULING - Various communication systems may benefit from mobile-to-mobile management of cross-call content, including optimization, transfer and scheduling of the same. For example, in a mobile-to-mobile call, a first user's uplink media may be re-compressed while waiting for the media to return from a call server or a first user's uplink media may trigger an eNB/RAN element to prepare a second user RRC/grant just-in-time deliver media to the second user, upon a response from the call server. A method may comprise receiving audio/video on the uplink from a first mobile. The audio/video/media content may be extracted when it is received on the uplink from the first mobile, and may then be re-compressed/customized for delivery on the downlink to the second mobile. When the original content is received back from the server for delivery to the second mobile, the already re-compressed/customized version of the content may be transmitted down to the second mobile. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153411 | TRANSMISSION SPECTRUM SELECTION FOR LOCOMOTIVE CONSIST COMMUNICATIONS - A method for transmitting data between access points in a locomotive consist is disclosed. The method may include determining, at a sending access point, the number of locomotives across which a communication signal will be sent. The method may also include selecting, based on the number of determined locomotives, a first transmission spectrum from among one or more transmission spectrums. The method may further include equalizing the communication signal using the selected first transmission spectrum and sending the equalized communication signal to a receiving access point. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153412 | RELIABLE DATA TRANSFER FOR LOCOMOTIVE CONSIST COMMUNICATIONS - A method for controlling data communication within a locomotive consist is disclosed. The method may include receiving, at a first access point, a first set of data packets that represent a communication sent from a second access point via a first set of wires. The method may also include receiving, at the first access point, a second set of data packets that represent the same communication sent from the second access point via a second set of wires. Further, the method may include processing the first set of data packets and the second set of data packets to create a resultant set of data packets and generating, at the first access point, a communication related to operating the locomotive based on the resultant data packets. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153413 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNCIATIONS - Systems and methods performed by a telephony device allow the telephony device to test the quality of multiple potential paths which can be used to conduct a telephony communication. By testing the conditions that presently exist, the telephony device can choose the path that is presently offering the best quality. A telephony communication may be setup over an initial path, and then subsequent testing may determine that it is best to switch to an alternate path offering better call quality. The initial path used for the telephony communication may be the one that offers the fastest initial connection. When multiple potential paths exist, the telephony communication may be conducted over a first path while keep alive messages are communicated over a second path so that the telephony communication can be quickly switched to the second path. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153414 | SELECTIVE ROUTING OF COMMUNICATIONS IN LOCOMOTIVE CONSIST - A method for routing data between access points in a locomotive consist including at least three locomotives is disclosed. The method may include monitoring at least one characteristic of a first data transmission between a first access point in a first locomotive and a third access point in a third locomotive. The method may also include determining, based on the monitored characteristic, whether to route a second data transmission from the first access point to the third access point through a second access point in a second locomotive that is physically disposed between the first locomotive and the third locomotive. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153415 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SIGNALING FOR SECTORIZED BEAM OPERATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments configure channel access windows in overlapping network environments. An example method embodiment comprises: transmitting, by an access node, a measurement request to an associated wireless device, to perform measurements of signals received from other access nodes to which the device is not associated, the device being a member of a group of devices based on transmission by the access node to the device, of a directional beacon frame; receiving from the device, a measurement response comprising information on a directional message with an access node identifier of another access node to which the device is not associated; and determining a time window that may be used by devices that are members of the group, for transferring data between members of the group and the access node, based at least partly on the measurement response. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153416 | METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATION, AND SYSTEM FOR REDUCING DATA STARVATION - Embodiments of a wireless communication station and methods for reducing data starvation are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a wireless communications station passes data packets stored in a buffer to a higher-level medium access control (MAC) process, in sequential order based on a sequence number (SN) subfield of the data packets. A watchdog timer is activated upon encountering a missing data packet during the passing. Upon expiration of the watchdog timer, the wireless communication station transmits a delete block acknowledgment (DELBA) frame to terminate a block acknowledgment (ACK) agreement with an originator of the data packets. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153417 | MULTIPLE ACCESS SCHEME FOR NARROWBAND CHANNELS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). An operating frequency band of the M2M wireless WAN is divided into at least a first frequency channel and a second frequency channel. The first and second frequency channels being used for communications on a reverse link. First channel status information and second channel status information are broadcasted to one or more M2M devices. The first channel status information indicating a status of the first frequency channel. The second channel status information indicating a status of the second frequency channel. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153418 | DIAGNOSIS OF CELLULAR NETWORK ELEMENT STATES USING RADIO FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS - Techniques for monitoring and diagnosing states of wireless network elements having a known impact on uplink interference are presented. In an aspect, a method includes receiving, by a system including a processor, diagnostic data for a cellular network including strength data representative of strengths of radio frequency signals, prior to demodulation, respectively received at a plurality of antennas of a base station of the cellular network over a defined duration of time and at a defined sampling rate. The method further includes, based on analyzing the strength data by the system, determining by the system, a state of a network element of the cellular network. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153419 | Managing Media Distribution Based on a Service Quality Index Value - A method includes receiving first measurement data from a first device. The first device may be a first element of a communication path. The first measurement data may correspond to a first measured parameter associated with performance of the communication path. The method further includes receiving second measurement data from a second device. The second device may be a second element of the communication path. The second measurement data may correspond to a second measured parameter (distinct from the first measured parameter) associated with performance of the communication path. The method further includes determining a first service quality index value corresponding to performance of the communication path based on the first measurement data and the second measurement data. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153420 | CYCLIC SHIFT DELAY DETECTION USING A CLASSIFIER - Systems, apparatus and methods for determining a cyclic shift delay (CSD) mode from a plurality of CSD modes is disclosed. A received OFDM signal is converted to a channel impulse response (CIR) signal in the time domain and/or a channel frequency response (CFR) signal in the frequency domain. Matched filters and a comparator are used to determine a most likely current CSD mode. Alternatively, a classifier is used with a number of inputs including outputs from two or more matched filters and one or more outputs from a feature extractor. The feature extractor extracts features in the time domain from the CIR signal and/or in the frequency domain from the CFR signal useful in distinguishing various CSD modes. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153421 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OPTIMIZATION OF BRANCH SYNCHRONIZATION NODE DETERMINATION IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Methods, devices, and computer program products for optimization of branch synchronization node determination in a peer-to-peer network are disclosed herein. In one aspect, a higher-level node, such as a root node broadcasting master clock synchronization messages to other devices, may determine a dynamic signal strength threshold and send it in those synchronization messages. After receiving those messages, if finding the received signal strength of those messages is below the dynamic signal threshold, a receiving node will realize that it is relatively far away from the root node and hence may be a potential branch node to further relay those messages. This dynamic threshold may be determined to ensure that at least a certain percentage of receiving nodes are potential branch nodes, based on the received signal strengths of those nodes at the root node. This method can reduce device energy consumption by only requiring edge devices to relay the synchronization messages, and they can be dynamically identified based on the threshold. In addition, a branch node can also use the dynamic signal strength threshold to help the determination of its potential next-hop branch nodes. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153422 | RATE LIMITING MECHANISM BASED ON DEVICE LOAD/CAPACITY OR TRAFFIC CONTENT - The present disclosure discloses a method and network device for a rate limiting mechanism based on device load/capacity or traffic content. Specifically, the system receives a request from a network node, and determines whether a ratio between a current load and a capacity exceeds a threshold. If so, the system determines a wait time period based on current load/capacity ratio, and responds to the network node with a message including the wait time period. Moreover, the system can inspect content of the request to determine a message type, and whether the message type indicates that the request is associated with dependent messages. If so, the system responds to the request with a busy message including the wait time period. Further, the system rejects new session requests if the number of concurrent sessions currently connected to the network device approaches the number of sessions associated with a regression point. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153423 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF TERMINAL USING MULTI-CONNECTION IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for handover of a terminal using a multi-connection in a cellular communication system is disclosed. The method for handover according to the present invention includes a multi-connection setting procedure of setting a connection to a second base station in addition to a connection to a first base station according to movement of a terminal in a direction from the first base station to the second base station, and a connection release procedure of releasing the connection to the first base station. Specifically, the present invention may be applied in a multi-beam management environment of super high frequency (SHF) and extremely high frequency (EHF) bandwidths, and may obtain an effect of decreasing signaling overhead and process latency of a conventional handover method. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153424 | WIRELESS POSITIONING METHOD AND APPARATUS USING WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided is a wireless positioning method using a wireless sensor network, for estimating a position of an unknown node that is a positioning target by using a plurality of anchor nodes arranged at regular intervals, the wireless positioning method including: setting a plurality of test nodes at regular intervals on a space formed by some of the plurality of anchor nodes; obtaining a number and position information of anchor nodes within a predetermined distance from the unknown node; detecting at least one test node matching the obtained number and position information; and estimating a position of the unknown node by calculating an average coordinate value of the detected at least one test node. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153425 | Neighbour Cell Quality Measurement in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements for neighbour cell quality measurements using silent resource element (RE) grids, and as well to a silent RE grid. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153426 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A CHANNEL MEASUREMENT THROUGH A RECEIVING END IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for receiving a downlink signal through a receiving end in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving, from a transmitting end, information on at least one antenna port of a reference signal for a control channel and at least one antenna port of a reference signal for a data channel; receiving the control channel on the basis of the reference signal for the control channel; and receiving the data channel on the basis of the reference signal for the control channel and the reference signal for the data channel, wherein the at least one antenna port of the reference signal for the control channel is included in the at least one antenna port of the reference signal for the data channel. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153427 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING A WIRELESS LINK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly to a method and apparatus for monitoring a wireless link. A method for monitoring a wireless link by a terminal in a wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving a precoded control channel; and estimating the quality of the wireless link for the received precoded control channel, wherein the quality of the wireless link can be estimated on the basis of an assumption by the terminal regarding the precoding applied to the precoded control channel. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153428 | Method and System for Aggregating Wifi Signal Data and Non-Wifi Signal Data - Methods of aggregating spectrum data captured from a narrowband radio to form a spectrum covering a much wider frequency band. Frequency data, such as FFT spectrum data captured from a narrowband receiver such as an IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi receiver are combined to display representative real-time FFT, average FFT, and FFT duty cycle data of a wideband spectrum. Data is captured from narrow band radios such as access points, station monitors, or client devices on a wireless network. A wideband spectrum may be aggregated from data captured from one or from multiple devices. Data may be stored for later analysis and display. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153429 | REAL-TIME MONITORING OF PERCEIVED QUALITY OF PACKET VOICE TRANSMISSION - The present invention is directed to a system and method for monitoring perceived quality of a packet-switched voice service in a network. The method includes the step of receiving a packetized voice communication via the packet-switched voice service. At least one objective measurement is obtained from the received packetized voice communication. User perceived quality of voice data is derived from the at least one objective measurement. The user perceived quality of voice data is provided to a user. The steps of receiving, obtaining, deriving, and providing are performed in real-time. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153430 | Wimax R6 Management Protocol - Within an access services network (ASN) operable for providing wireless access services to an access terminal and including a base station communicatively coupled to an ASN gateway, a new management protocol is provided for managing the R6 communications. The protocol includes a common set of message types that may be used for data plane, control plane, and individual peer applications communicating over the control plane. In one embodiment, a keepalive procedure or process is used to manage the R6 interface between the ASN gateway and the base station by sending keepalive messages through an established data path tunnel and maintaining one or more keepalive timers. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153431 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING A JITTER BUFFER LEVEL - A buffer level for jitter data buffer is determined. A frame payload size difference is determined for a plurality of video frames encoded into data packets sequentially received from a network. The difference is a difference in a payload size of a current frame and a previous frame. A frame network transit delay is determined as a difference in a transport time between the current frame and the previous frame and an expected transport time between the current frame and the previous frame. A slope and a variance of a linear relationship between the frame payload size difference and the frame network transit delay are determined for the plurality of video frames. Finally, a buffer level of a jitter data buffer is determined using a maximum frame payload size, an average frame payload size, the slope and the variance. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153432 | METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for reporting channel state information, user equipment and base station. The method includes: receiving, by user equipment, an indication signaling transmitted by a base station, the indication signaling comprising identification information for triggering report of aperiodic channel state information; determining a measurement set of the report of the aperiodic channel state information according to the identification information; and reporting corresponding channel state information to the base station according to the measurement set. With the embodiments of the present invention, the needed aperiodic CSI may be quickly fed back, thereby achieving relatively flexible aperiodic report. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153433 | Resource Scheduling Method, Radio Access Device, and Communications System - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a resource scheduling method, a radio access device, and a communications system. In a solution provided in an embodiment of the present invention, a radio access device first measures an interference parameter value corresponding to each uplink resource block of a first communications system; when a first terminal accessing the first communications system needs to transmit uplink data, measures a channel condition parameter value of an uplink channel of the first terminal; if a current channel condition of the uplink channel of the first terminal is relatively good, allocates an uplink resource block, whose interference parameter value is greater than a first interference threshold, of the first communications system to the first terminal; and if relatively poor, allocates an uplink resource block, whose interference parameter value is less than the first interference threshold, of the first communications system to the first terminal. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153434 | Throughput-Based Active Mode Trigger - A method and apparatus for reducing gaps in data transmission between a device and at least one wireless access point connecting the first device to a central monitoring system. The device includes a radio that enables bidirectional data communication between the device and the at least one wireless access point, the radio being able to operate in a power save mode and an active transmission mode. A control processor selectively monitors a type and amount of data being transmitted between the radio and the at least one wireless access point to predict an occurrence of a gap in data transmission between the device and the at least one access point. The control processor, in response to predicting a gap in data transmission, automatically switches an operational mode of the radio from the power save mode to the active transmission mode for a predetermined amount of time enabling full bidirectional communication between the device and the at least one wireless access point for the predetermined amount of time preventing the gap in data transmission. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153435 | TIERED DEEP PACKET INSPECTION IN NETWORK DEVICES - Packet inspection in a network device includes a first stage circuit to monitor packets being switched by a network interface in the network device. The first stage circuit includes at least one pattern matcher to identify selected flows in the packets satisfying first criteria and to divert the selected flows from standard processing in the network interface. A second stage circuit receives the selected flows, performs deep packet inspection on the selected flows to identify further selected flows satisfying a second criteria, and controls the network interface to apply alternative processing to the further selected flows and allow the selected flows other than the further selected flows to rejoin the standard processing. | 06-05-2014 |
20140160945 | USING BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENTS TO ADJUST CIR AND EIR ON A SUB-RATE LINK - A method and system are provided for measuring the bandwidth of a network segment between a first location and a second location by generating a plurality of synthetic packets at the first location and marking each generated synthetic packet with a transmission timestamp indicative of a first clock time at which the synthetic packet is generated; transmitting each of the generated synthetic packets to the second location; receiving each synthetic packet at the second location and marking each received synthetic packet with a reception timestamp indicative of a second clock time at which the synthetic packet is received at the second location; calculating an inter-packet delay variation of the network segment based on the transmission timestamp and the reception timestamp of two or more synthetic packets; and deriving an available bandwidth of the network segment based on the calculated inter-packet delay variation. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160946 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING CENTRALIZED D2D SCHEDULING - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with minimizing D2D overhead resource usage. In one example, a first UE is equipped to measure a first received power value from a second UE with which the first UE has a D2D link, and a received power value from each UE of one or more other UEs, determine whether the received power value from any of the one or more other UEs is greater than a relevant interferer threshold, and transmit the received power value for any of the one or more other UEs for which the received power value is determined to be greater than the relevant interferer threshold. In an aspect, the relevant interferer threshold may be based on a fractional value of the first received power value. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160947 | Method And System for Unified Rate Adaptation For SU-BF And MU-MIMO Operation - A method of providing rate adaptation in a multi-user wireless communication system including single-user beamforming (SU-BF) and multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) is described. In this method, a master rate, which is a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for the SU-BF, is determined. An MCS for each transmit mode is derived from the master rate using a rate mapping. Using the results from the mapping, the master rate, instead of the MCS for each transmit mode, is tracked. In one embodiment, a mapping calibration is periodically performed. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160948 | OTA MOBILE DEVICE CLASSIFICATION - A system, method and device for classifying mobile devices based on frame characteristics and frame content provides a network administrator the ability to better understand actual network use by BYOD (bring your own device) type users, which are becoming more common, giving the ability to better understand actual use beyond the planned for stations factored into a wireless network design. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160949 | Determination of a Noise and Interference Covariance Measure - A method includes receiving a signal including a two-dimensional signal pattern in a time-frequency representation, the two-dimensional signal pattern including first reference resource elements at predetermined positions in the two-dimensional signal pattern. The method further includes determining a first covariance measure based on the first reference resource elements of the signal pattern. The method further includes determining a second covariance measure based on resource elements of the signal pattern different from the first reference resource elements. The method further includes determining a noise and interference covariance measure of the received signal based on the first covariance measure and based on the second covariance measure. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160950 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR FACILITATING D2D BEARER SWITCHING - A method of facilitating path switching, for a communication path between a first user equipment (UE) and a second UE, from a device to device (D2D) path to network path, includes receiving switch point information from the first UE that identifies a data block; establishing, at the access network, a connection with the first UE over an uplink path between the first UE and the access network; establishing, at the access network, a connection with the second UE over a downlink path between the network element and the second UE; setting, at the access network, a data block sequencing numbering to be the same for the uplink path and the downlink path based on the switch point information; and forwarding, at the access network, data from the first UE to the second UE via the network path, the network path including the uplink path and the downlink path. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160951 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIVITY TO LOCATION ORIGIN TRANSCEIVERS - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of simultaneous connectivity to location origin transceivers. For example, a transceiver may be configured to simultaneously maintain a plurality of simultaneous Media-Access-Control (MAC) layer connections with a plurality of location origin beacon transceivers (LOBTs), and to communicate wireless communication signals with the plurality of LOBTs via the plurality of simultaneous MAC-layer connections. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160952 | DETECTING AND ISOLATING DROPPED OR OUT-OF-ORDER PACKETS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A processor-implemented method for analyzing dropped or out of order data packets that are sent from an initiating device over a communications network is provided. The processor-implemented method may include receiving, by a processor, a predetermined plurality of test data packets from the initiating device over the communications network. At least one of the predetermined plurality of test data packets that are dropped or received out of order may be determined by the processor. A header portion corresponding to the at least one of the predetermined plurality of test data packets that are dropped or received out of order may then be accessed. The accessed header portion is sent, by the processor, to the initiating device, whereby the accessed header portion may include information associated with a device location at which the one or more of the predetermined plurality of test data packets are dropped or received out of order. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160953 | PACKET COLLISIONS AND IMPULSIVE NOISE DETECTION - A method includes determining a first Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) average for a first symbol set of at least one or more first symbols in one or more packets. The method includes determining a second SNR average for a second symbol set of at least one or more second symbols in the one or more packets. The method also includes determining a first difference between the first SNR average and the second SNR average. In response to determining that the first difference exceeds an SNR threshold, the method includes determining that a first channel event has occurred in the one or more packets at least within the first symbol set and the second symbol set and in response to determining that the first channel event has occurred, determining is to remain at the first data rate or at a second data rate that is higher than the first data rate. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160954 | HOST ETHERNET ADAPTER FRAME FORWARDING - A method for receiving a data packet is described. The method may include receiving a frame in a host Ethernet adapter from an Ethernet network. The frame may be parsed to determine a data packet size. A work queue element (WQE) may be selected from two or more available WQEs having different data packet size capacity. Data packet storage may be provided for each WQE, including at least some cache storage associated with a processor. The data packet may be stored in the data packet storage associated with the selected WQE based on the data packet size, including storing in the cache for data packets under selected conditions. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160955 | Method for Validating Radio-Frequency Self-Interference of Wireless Electronic Devices - A test system for testing a wireless electronic device is provided. The test system may include a test host and a tester. The test host may instruct a wireless electronic device under test (DUT) to transmit radio-frequency uplink signals in selected uplink resource blocks of an uplink channel in a desired Long Term Evolution (LTE) frequency band. The tester may convey radio-frequency test data to the DUT in a selected downlink resource block of a downlink channel in the desired LTE frequency band. The DUT may measure data reception throughput values associated with the test data. The test host may compare the measured data reception throughput values to threshold data reception throughput values to characterize the radio-frequency performance of the DUT. The test system may test the radio-frequency performance of the DUT for test data in some or all downlink resource blocks of the downlink channel. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160956 | Gateway based and centric network management and coordination - Gateway based and centric network management and coordination. Coordination and management of delivery of a source sequence, that has possibly undergone adaptive bit rate (ABR) encoding upstream to generate a number of respective fragments that may have different respective bit rates associated therewith, to one or more downstream, user, or client devices is achieved via appropriate communication network management and coordination performed by one or more communication devices within the system. In one instance, a home gateway communication device operates to perform such coordination management of a convergent network or convergent digital home network (CDHN). Consideration of any one or more local and/or remote conditions, parameters, etc. may be employed by such an application to ensure effective delivery of a source sequence to one or more client devices. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160957 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION CALIBRATION - A dedicated calibration device may be utilized by a wireless transceiver device, such as a base station, to compute compensation matrices. The wireless transceiver device and the dedicated calibration device can exchange training sequence signals. Based on the exchanged training sequence signals, the wireless transceiver device and the dedicated calibration device can estimate overall baseband to baseband channel responses taking into account the amplitude and phase responses of the respective transmit and receive radio chains, and the wireless transceiver device can determine the compensation matrices. Furthermore, the wireless transceiver device can estimate a baseband-to-baseband uplink channel response relative to actual user equipment, approximate a downlink channel response using only one of the determined compensation matrices, and perform beamforming to the actual user equipment using the approximated downlink channel response. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160958 | Method and Apparatus for Measuring Interference in a Telecommunications System - A receiving unit or a transmitting unit of a wireless network, for facilitating noise and interference measurements on an air interface. The receiving unit includes: a network interface which obtains information relating to a time-varying layout of a silent resource element (RE) grid; an electronic memory having code in communication with the network interface which stores the information; and a processing unit in communication with the electronic memory that takes a presence of a silent RE grid into account in the reception of a control or a data channel. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160959 | Methods and Systems for Enhanced Round Trip Time (RTT) Exchange - Disclosed are systems, methods and devices for obtaining round trip time measurements for use in location based services. In particular implementations, a fine timing measurement request message wirelessly transmitted by a first transceiver device to a second transceiver device may permit additional processing features in computing or applying a signal round trip time measurement. Such a signal round trip time measurement may be used in positioning operations. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160960 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION INDICATIVE OF TRAFFIC DELAY OF A WIRELESS LINK - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for providing information indicative of traffic delay of a wireless link are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160961 | DYNAMIC BALANCING OF A TRAFFIC MIX FOR DATA CENTER DEVICE TESTING - There is disclosed a method for testing a network device comprising defining a traffic profile wherein the traffic profile defines a type of network traffic comprising a sequence of packets and wherein the traffic profile associates the network traffic with a communication axis. The method also comprises defining a traffic template wherein the traffic template comprises one or more traffic profiles, a relative weight to identify a weight of the profile within an overall traffic configuration, and a load rate that defines the maximum amount of packets that can be transmitted at a certain time. The method further comprises generating network traffic based on the traffic template, and transmitting the network traffic to a device under test wherein the relative weight of the traffic profile may be changed dynamically in real-time. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160962 | SIGNAL MEASUREMENT - Methods, apparatus and computer-readable storage mediums for determining a characteristic of a signal transmitted from a wireless transmitter, using a measurement receiver. A first characteristic, calculated in respect of a first time period, and a second characteristic, calculated in respect of a second time period, are used to extrapolate a measured characteristic, measured over the first time period, to determine a determined characteristic for the second time period. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160963 | ESTIMATION OF SPEED AND DIRECTION OF TRAVEL IN A WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM - A method for estimating the speed and bearing of a Wi-Fi enabled device using WLAN radio signals in a WLAN based location service is provided. A method used to estimate a speed of travel of a Wi-Fi enabled device comprises the Wi-Fi enabled device receiving signals transmitted by Wi-Fi access points in range of the Wi-Fi enabled device, and using the signals to estimate the speed of and/or direction of travel of the Wi-Fi enabled device. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160964 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR MULTIPLE STATION SOUNDING IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Embodiments of a method and apparatus for obtaining sounding measurements between an access point and a wireless station within a wireless local area network are described. Some embodiments relate to Wi-Fi networks and networks operating in accordance with one of the IEEE 802.11 standards. Some embodiments may allow an access point to request that multiple stations compute sounding measurements with minimal time delay between measurements. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160965 | PROXIMITY MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a proximity measurement method and apparatus for device-to-device (D2D) communication in a mobile communication system. The proximity measurement method may include determining whether a cell identification (ID) is included in a packet received from a gateway, verifying whether the cell ID matches a pre-stored cell ID when the cell ID is included, extracting, from the packet, Internet Protocol addresses of mobile terminals transmitting and receiving the packet when the cell ID matches the pre-stored cell ID, searching for IP addresses matched to the extracted IP addresses based on a proximity list including IP addresses of mobile terminals performing D2D communication, and registering, when the extracted IP addresses are absent in the proximity list, the extracted IP addresses in the proximity list and measuring proximity between the mobile terminals. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160966 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN D2D COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A scheduling method and an apparatus are provided for use in a Device-to-Device (D2D) communication system. A scheduling method of a node in a wireless communication system according to the present disclosure includes acquiring a first data rate on a first link in consideration of interference occurring when a second link is established, acquiring a second data rate on the first link without consideration of the second link, acquiring, when the second link is established, a third data rate on the second link, and determining whether to establish the second link in consideration of the first data rate, second data rate, and third data rate. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160967 | Interference Control in Time Division Duplex Communication - There are provided measures for interference control in time division duplex communication. Such measures may exemplarily comprise setting up a predefined uplink-downlink configuration of a frame structure for time division duplex communication, said frame structure comprising a predefined number of downlink subframes, deriving measurement groups from the frame structure according to a measurement configuration, said measurement configuration defining a set of all downlink subframes of the frame structure or at least two subsets of the downlink subframes of the frame structure, each of said measurement groups comprising a set of subframes out of the downlink subframes of the frame structure, and performing an interference measurement for the downlink subframes of at least one of the measurement groups. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160968 | Enhanced Use of Frequency Spectrum in a Wireless Communication Network - The present invention relates to a user terminal ( | 06-12-2014 |
20140160969 | Service Classification of Web Traffic - A method for communication includes recording, at a gateway to a network, a generic definition of a service provided to clients of the gateway. The generic definition specifies a first Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) on the network that is associated with the service. At least a first communication between a client and the network is processed at the gateway in order to identify at least a second URI that is referenced from the first URI in a context of the service. Responsively to at least the first communication, an extended definition of the service for the client is automatically created by adding at least the second URI to the generic definition. Use of the service is monitored by applying the extended definition to second communications conveyed by the gateway between the client and the network. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160970 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SATELLITE LINK BUDGET ANALYSIS (LBA) OPTIMIZATION - A method of optimizing a link budget analysis (LBA) for a link comprising performing a first LBA based on a target modulation and coding pair (MODCOD) based on one or more link parameters, the MODCOD having a predetermined symbol energy to noise density ratio (Es/No), calculating a ratio of allocated bandwidth to a power equivalent bandwidth (PEB) for the link and converting the ratio to Decibels, determining whether additional energy is present by summing the Es/No for the link at the target MODCOD and the calculated ratio of allocated bandwidth to PEB, accessing a look up table to determine an optimal MODCOD for the link wherein if the sum is a positive value, selecting a MODCOD having a higher Es/No and if the sum is a negative value, selecting a MODCOD having a lower Es/No and altering one or more transmission or receiving parameters to apply the selected optimal MODCOD. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160971 | SERVICE QUALITY MONITORING IN A WIFI NETWORK - A method and a system for service quality monitoring in a network includes radio interfaces. The measurements are end-to-end measurements between the end user and chosen network element. The measurements are implemented using monitoring stations which can monitor the traffic passively or actively by transmitting test signals. The antenna beam directions of the monitoring stations can be controlled. The performance server works as a counterpart of the active tests. A reporting suite may define the performed measurements and it also collects the measurement data from different monitoring stations. Monitoring data from several corporate intranets can also be collected to an external server through internet connection. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160972 | SERVICE QUALITY MONITORING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and a system for service quality monitoring in a network includes radio interfaces. The measurements are end-to-end measurements between the end user and chosen network element. The measurements are implemented using monitoring stations which can monitor the traffic passively or actively by transmitting test signals. The antenna beam directions of the monitoring stations can be controlled. The performance server works as a counterpart of the active tests. A reporting suite may define the performed measurements and it also collects the measurement data from different monitoring stations. Monitoring data from several corporate intranets can also be collected to an external server through internet connection. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160973 | MACRO NETWORK OPTIMIZATION WITH ASSISTANCE FROM FEMTO CELLS - A received signal strength indicator returned from a femto cell is employed to optimize a multiple access wireless communication network. For example, a method operable in a wireless communications network is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a received signal strength indicator from a femto cell situated in a geographical area within a multiple access wireless communication network, and optimizing the multiple access wireless communication network as a function of the received signal strength indicator. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160974 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION, MOBILE TERMINAL, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BASE STATION, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MOBILE TERMINAL, AND CONTROL PROGRAM FOR BASE STATION OR MOBILE TERMINAL - In order to make it possible for a mobile terminal to measure surrounding cell information on the basis of a direction from a base station and to select only cell information on an unknown cell detected from the surrounding cell information and notify the base station of the cell information on the unknown cell when information on surrounding cells is acquired by the base station, a wireless communication system comprising the base station and the mobile terminal is characterized in that the base station comprises: a cell information acquisition means for acquiring cell information including cell quality information and cell identification information on surrounding cells located around the base station; and a transmission means for transmitting, to the mobile terminal, known cell information and acquisition direction for cell information on unknown cells that do not have cell information corresponding to the known cell information. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160975 | MEASUREMENT ON DATA TRAFFIC IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for performing a measurement on data traffic at a node of a communication network. The node includes an input interface and an output interface. The input interface receives first packets and checks whether they are marked. If a first packet is marked, a global input parameter is updated. A partial input parameter is also updated, provided the first packet is addressed to the output interface. The output interface receives second packets, which include at least part of the first packets, and checks whether they are marked. If a second packet is marked, a partial output parameter is updated, provided the second packet is received from the input interface. Further, a global output parameter is updated. The method further performs a measurement on the data traffic based on: global input parameter, partial input parameter, global output parameter, and partial output parameter. | 06-12-2014 |
20140160976 | Exchange of Mobility Information in Cellular Radio Communications - A connection request is received from a remote terminal of a radio communications system at a serving node of the radio communications system. Mobility information is requested ( | 06-12-2014 |
20140169185 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER AT USER EQUIPMENT AND USER EQUIPMENT CONFIGURED TO HANDOVER - The method for handover at user equipment includes decoding an information block from at least one of one or more target base stations before receiving a handover command indicating to handover to a first target base station and connecting to the first target base station using the decoded information block. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169186 | ADAPTIVE CHANNEL REUSE MECHANISM IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A feature-capable device that supports channel reuse can execute operations for determining whether to reuse or share a communication channel with a neighbor network when a local network (that comprises the feature-capable device) and/or the neighbor network comprise legacy devices that do not support adaptive channel reuse feature. The feature-capable device can determine channel performance measurements associated with each legacy device in the local network and/or the neighbor network and can compare the channel performance measurements against corresponding performance thresholds. The local network and the neighbor network can reuse the channel if the channel performance measurements associated with all the legacy devices are in accordance with the corresponding performance thresholds. The local network and the neighbor network can share the channel if the channel performance measurements of at least one of the legacy devices is not in accordance with the corresponding performance thresholds. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169187 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, PROCEDURE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PLANNING AND SIMULATING AN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - A procedure for evaluating a network, and a system, apparatus, and computer program that operate in accordance with the procedure. The procedure includes aggregating packet information from one or more sources in a network, and executing a correlation algorithm to determine traffic flow information based on the packet information. The aggregating includes obtaining information from a header of a packet being communicated in the network, in one example embodiment. In another example, the executing includes tracing a traffic flow from a source node to a destination node, and the tracing includes determining, based on the packet information, each link by which the traffic flow is communicated from the source node to the destination node. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169188 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING PEAK-TO-AVERAGE POWER RATIO REDUCTION FOR OFDMA MODULATION - A system and method are provided for implementing a peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) reduction scheme for Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) modulation. A unique PAPR reduction scheme for OFDMA modulation for systems operated according to a DOCSIS standard achieves results similar to those attributable to tone reservation schemes in a manner that does not negatively affect an amount of available data capacity, particularly in implementations with limited numbers of subcarriers. The disclosed systems and methods are particularly adaptable to next generation cable gateways and/or next generation cable modems. These next generation cable gateways and/or cable modems may find particular utility in advanced hybrid fiber/coaxial cable systems. The adaptable cable gateways/modems may include a cable gateway system-on-chip (SOC) configuration. The disclosed schemes may be applicable to OFDM modulation. For OFDM, however, the known tone reservation algorithms also may be employed. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169189 | Network Status Mapping - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide systems and methods for network status mapping. Such an exemplary system and method involves inserting a network map tag in a flow set of packets in a computer network and receiving a response to the network map tag from a network element that includes populated fields of the network map tag comprising a field to identify a network element, a field to identify the outgoing port of the network element, a field to identify queue of the outgoing port; and a status field for the queue of the outgoing port. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169190 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NETWORK PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT USING VERIFIABLE SINGLE-USE HIGHLY-ENTROPIC FILE GENERATION - A network performance measurement relies on the transmission of a verifiable, single-use, highly-entropic file across the network. Upon receiving a network performance measurement query from a user equipment (UE) device communicating through a mobile communication network, a test utility (TU) server generates a test file having high entropy such that it does not reduce substantially in size when compressed using standard compression algorithms. The test file is assigned a filename including a variable component, and the file is transmitted to the UE device. Information relating to the transmission of the test file is logged, and a network performance measurement value for the transport of the high-entropy test file to the UE device is computed based on the logged information. In one example, hash-value computations are used to verify that the test file received in the UE device is complete and accurate. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169191 | METHOD FOR CALIBRATING LISTEN DURATION AND LISTEN INTERVAL AND CONTROL MODULE THEREOF - A method for calibrating a listen duration and a listen interval and a control module thereof are provided. The method is suitable for being applied in a wireless device and monitoring beacons transmitted by a wireless access point (AP) within a wireless transmission range to calibrate the listen duration and the listen interval. The method includes: calculating an average beacon-receiving time and an RMS beacon-receiving time according to a beacon-receiving interval obtained within a first specific time frame when the listen duration and the listen interval are determined to be calibrated; setting the average beacon-receiving time and the RMS beacon-receiving time as an optimal listen interval and an optimal listen duration, respectively; monitoring beacons in X optimal listen durations according to the optimal listen interval and the optimal listen duration; if at least Y beacons are received, determining the calibration is successful, wherein X and Y are positive integers. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169192 | System and Method for Estimating an Effective Bandwidth - In one embodiment, a method for a method of estimating an effective bandwidth of a traffic source includes obtaining a first traffic pattern from a first traffic source. Also, the method includes setting a first effective bandwidth between a mean data rate of the first traffic source and a peak data rate of the first traffic source. Additionally, the method includes determining a first outage rate of the first traffic source in accordance with the first traffic pattern and the first effective bandwidth. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169193 | RELAY ATTACK PREVENTION - Embodiments related to transmission of data packets are described and depicted. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169194 | Method, System and Program Product for Detecting Wireless Interferers - A method, system and program product comprise generating spectral samples from at least one radio communication device being configured to be operable as an observer of transmissions within a frequency band divided into one or more sub-bands associated with communications of the radio communication device. The spectral samples at least comprise signal levels and timing information for observed signals within the sub-bands. Spectral samples determined to be decodable communications are purged. Pulses in the spectral samples are identified. The identified pulses at least comprise a power, a center frequency and a bandwidth. A list of identified pulses for the sub-bands is maintained. At least a set of features of the identified pulses in the list is extracted. A presence of at least one radio frequency device associated with the set is detected. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169195 | Wireless transmission rate adjustment method - The present invention discloses a wireless transmission rate adjustment method for adjusting the wireless transmission rate of a wireless transmission device. The method comprises: having the wireless transmission device enter a try state from a normal state; under the try state, transmitting a plurality of test packets according to a first modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and determining whether the transmission is successful in accordance with a predetermined condition; if the transmission is successful with the first MCS, returning to the normal state and transmitting data with the first MCS; if the transmission is unsuccessful with the first MCS, staying in the try state and transmitting a plurality of test packets according to a second MCS, and then determining whether the transmission is successful in accordance with the predetermined condition; if the transmission is successful with the second MCS, returning to the normal state and transmitting data with the second MCS; and if the transmission is failed with the second MCS, returning to the normal state and transmitting data at an original transmission rate or with the first MCS. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169196 | Apparatus, System, and Method for Enhanced Reporting and Measurement of Performance Data - A system includes a first device and a second device configured to monitor a plurality of data flows traversing the second device. The second device is configured to collect statistics associated with the plurality of data flows, and includes traffic analysis logic that is configured to augment the plurality of data flows with data including statistical information based on the statistics and address information associated with the first device. The first device is configured to receive the data. The traffic analysis logic is operable to push the statistical information to the first device independently of a real-time request for at least a portion of the statistical information from the first device. The traffic analysis logic is configurable based on at least the address information. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169197 | WAN-WLAN CELL SELECTION IN UES - A selection process is disclosed for a user equipment (UE) to select between a WAN and a WLAN. Instead of defaulting to select one or the other networks, as long as the connection is available, a better load balancing and maximization of the system capacity may be achieved when the UE selects the network according to a priority order between the WAN/WLAN. The priority order takes into account various network metrics, such as loading, channel conditions, bandwidth, and service requirements. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169198 | APERIODIC TRIGGERING OF CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION USING PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - The invention relates methods for triggering channel quality feedback for at least one of plural component carriers of a communication system available for downlink transmission. The invention suggests a mechanism for triggering channel quality feedback from a terminal where the downlink control signaling overhead for the selection of component carrier(s) to be reported on is minimized. One aspect of the invention is a new interpretation of a predetermined format for dedicated control information comprising a CQI request flag, which is depending on the status of the CQI request flag. In case the CQI request flag is set at least one further bit of the dedicated control information is interpreted as information indicative of the one or more component carriers available for downlink transmission to the terminal and the terminal is providing channel quality feedback on the channel quality experienced on the indicated component carrier or component carriers. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169199 | Method and System for the establishment and sustaining of a broad-band link - A system for establishing and sustaining a broadband communication is provided wherein: the first master post is suitable for transmitting a known test sequence on a sub-band Bk to the second called post as soon as the said second called post acknowledges the receipt of a communication setup message on a frequency fi; the said second controller being suitable for determining quality scores on the Mk frequencies of the sub-band Bk and for transmitting the said values of quality to the first master post. The first master post is suitable for determining and for evaluating the capability of the sub-band Bk to respond to the SLA target service a sub-channel on the basis of the scores of qualities received, and for selecting the sub-band Bk which exhibits the required capability and thereafter for triggering the communication with the said second post. Application to HF broadband systems. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169200 | MULTI-CELL INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - Multi-cell interference management (MCIM) for interference management among multiple cells in a wireless communication network is provided. In some embodiments, MCIM includes collecting data (e.g., CQI measurements and/or subband usage statistics) from a neighborhood of base stations; determining local and neighborhood system utility metrics; and determining interference managing directives (e.g., that can be communicated to the MAC layer of a base station in the neighborhood of base stations). | 06-19-2014 |
20140169201 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, REFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, AND REFERENCE SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD - A wireless communication device transmitting a reference signal with which a wireless communication terminal measures reception power from a communication cell, in a resource of a data region, includes a control section that determines the resource of the data region in which a reference signal specific to the wireless communication terminal is placed, and a wireless transmission section that transmits the reference signal in the resource determined by the control section. Provided is a wireless communication device transmitting a reference signal by which a wireless communication terminal measures reception power from a communication cell. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169202 | METHOD OF MEASURING INTERFERENCE - A method of measuring interference to perform efficient data communication is disclosed. A method of measuring interference of neighboring cells comprises allocating one or more first resource elements, to which pilot signals are allocated, to predetermined symbol regions included in a first resource block; allocating one or more second resource elements for measuring interference of the neighboring cells to a first symbol region of the predetermined symbol regions; and measuring interference of the neighboring cells using the one or more second resource elements. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169203 | REMOTE TESTING AND MONITORING TO A CELL SITE IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Systems and methods provide remote performance monitoring and testing to a cell site in a cellular communications network. The systems and methods include a network management center having remote monitoring and testing capabilities utilizing an intelligent customer service unit that traps and makes available alarm information on the transport link. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169204 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, USER EQUIPMENT, AND BASE STATION - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting channel state information, a user equipment, and a base station. The method includes: determining to-be-reported channel state information CSI, where the to-be-reported CSI includes at least one CSI report, and each CSI report of the at least one CSI report corresponds to one downlink carrier; and sending the to-be-reported CSI to a base station through a physical uplink channel. The user equipment includes a determining module and a sending module. The base station includes a receiving module, a first determining module, and a second determining module. According to the method, the user equipment, and the base station in the embodiments of the present invention, channel state information from different downlink carriers can be transmitted on a same subframe, and a performance requirement of the reported channel state information can be ensured, and power utilization efficiency can be improved. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169205 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a radio communication terminal which is capable of measuring quality in communication with a handover destination with high accuracy. The radio communication terminal is capable of communicating with a base station or a relay node, and includes: a receiver which receives control information including information relating to measurement of measuring quality of a neighbor cell; an extractor which extracts information on a subframe where the measurement should be performed, which is a subframe where only transmission of a signal from the relay node connected to the base station is performed, from the information relating to the measurement; a measurement section which performs the measurement, on a subframe basis, based on the extracted information on the subframe where the measurement should be performed; and a transmitter which transmits a result of the measurement to the base station or the relay node. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL TRANSPORT FORMAT COMBINATION IN CELL_FACH STATE AND IDLE MODE - A method and apparatus for selecting an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) in Cell_FACH state and idle mode are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) transmits a random access channel (RACH) preamble and receives an index to an E-DCH resource in response to the RACH preamble. The WTRU may estimate a power headroom based on the maximum WTRU transmit power, power offset value, and the last successfully transmitted RACH preamble transmit power. The WTRU restricts an E-TFC based on the estimated power headroom, and selects an E-TFC based on a set of supported E-TFCs. The WTRU then generates, and transmits, a protocol data unit (PDU) based on the selected E-TFC. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169207 | DETECTION OF END-TO-END TRANSPORT QUALITY - In various embodiments, methods and systems are disclosed for the real time detection of network conditions in conjunction with a remote presentation protocol. The link quality may represent the quality of the end-to-end connection between client and server with upper and lower bounds on the injection of additional traffic used for measurement. In some embodiments, the measurement technique may be selected based on the type of measurement that is desired. Accuracy may be maintained by selecting the type of measurement used based on current and previous network conditions. In one embodiment, a state model is used to determine the frequency of measurement and to determine when the measurements have produced a stable estimate of the link quality. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169208 | DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNAL BASED CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK IN OFDM-MIMO SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for using demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) based channel state information (CSI) feedback in Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing-multiple-input multiple-output (OFDM-MIMO) systems is disclosed. The wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) receives one or more resource blocks from a base station, wherein the resource blocks (RBs) include demodulating reference signals (DM-RS) and precoder information. The precoder information is sent unicast or broadcasted over a common control channel. The WTRU estimates an effective channel estimate based on the DM-RS, derives an unprecoded channel based on the effective channel and the precoder information, generates CSI feedback based on the unprecoded channel, and transmits the CSI feedback to the base station. Alternatively, the WTRU estimates an effective channel estimate based on the DM-RS, quantizes the effective channel estimate and transmits the CSI feedback to the base station. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169209 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION - There are provided a base station, a terminal, and a communication system in a wireless communication system in which a base station and a terminal communicate with each other, in which the base station and the terminal can efficiently perform communication. The base station includes a higher layer processing unit | 06-19-2014 |
20140177455 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO MONITOR AND ANALYZE END TO END FLOW CONTROL IN AN ETHERNET/ENHANCED ETHERNET ENVIRONMENT - A method and system for monitoring and analyzing flow control of packets in a communications network which includes multiple data transmission paths. The communications network has a first data path including an initiating node and a target node. A test frame is generated by an initiator module of a program executed by a computer for transmission over the first data path. The initiator module transmits the test frame over the first data path from the initiating node to the target node, wherein the test frame records a starting timestamp recorded by the initiating node upon transmitting the test frame. The test frame records a half trip timestamp recorded by the target node upon the test frame being received by the target node. The test frame records an end timestamp recorded by the initiating node, upon the test frame being received at the initiating node from the target node. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177456 | Mobile Device Assisted Coordinated Multipoint Transmission and Reception - Idle mobile devices are used as cooperating devices to support coordinated multipoint transmission and reception for uplink and downlink communications between a primary mobile device and its serving base station. For uplink communications, the cooperating mobile devices receive the uplink transmission from the primary mobile device and retransmit the received data signal to the serving base station for the primary mobile device. For downlink communications, the cooperating mobile devices receive the downlink transmission from the serving base station and retransmit the received data signal to the primary mobile device. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177457 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING TRANSMISSION INTERFERENCE BETWEEN NARROWBAND AND BROADBAND MOBILE DEVICES - A method and apparatus to mitigate radio frequency interference by a broadband mobile device by detecting, at the broadband mobile device, a geographically or physically proximate narrowband uplink transmission, wherein the narrowband uplink transmission is in close enough spectral proximity to at least one bearer channel of the broadband mobile device to result in interference on the narrowband reception when the broadband mobile device is transmitting and a narrowband mobile device is receiving, determining, based on the detected narrowband uplink transmission, a corresponding narrowband downlink frequency, monitoring the determined narrowband downlink frequency, detecting a narrowband downlink transmission at the monitored narrowband downlink frequency, and in response to detecting the narrowband downlink transmission at the monitored narrowband downlink frequency, modifying a broadband uplink transmission to ensure the broadband uplink transmission does not interfere with narrowband downlink reception. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177458 | NETWORK-MANAGED DIRECT DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS - Systems, apparatuses, and methods for network-managed direct device to device communications are provided. Certain aspects of the disclosure involve receiving, at a first UE, UE1 configuration information for an inter-device session (IDS) between the first UE and a second UE, UE1 configuration information including a radio network identifier. A control message configured with the radio network identifier and a radio resource identifier for the IDS can be received. The radio resource identifier corresponds to a radio resource for transmitting data directly from the first UE to the second UE during the IDS. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177459 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID AND COST EFFECTIVE TESTING OF WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Apparatus and methods for rapid, cost effective testing of wireless systems. In one embodiment, a unit under test (UUT) is tested by a test “server”. The UUT and test server communicate via a “connectionless” protocol which is based on beacons (and beacon responses) which can carry one or more test primitives. The aforementioned “connection-less” test protocol can be performed without wireless network configuration, which greatly reduces test time, Additionally, exemplary solutions are presented for “lock-up” of the UUT and the test server. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177460 | ROUTING DATA - Routing data in a bi-directional communication session over an overlay network is described. One-way performance measurements are determined for routing data in the communication session in a first direction from a first node to a second node via a respective plurality of relay nodes of the overlay network. Based on the performance measurements, relay node(s) are selected for use in routing data in the first direction from first node to second node. Data is routed in the communication session from the first node to the second node over the overlay network via the selected relay node(s). The selection of the relay node(s) for use in routing data in the first direction is performed separately to selection of one or more relay node for use in routing data in a second direction from the second node to the first node in the communication session. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177461 | DETERMINING A CLUSTER SET OF MOBILE DEVICES - Mechanisms for determining a cluster set of mobile devices are disclosed. A controller node identifies a primary mobile device that has a scheduled transmission for the controller node at a first time. The controller node identifies, from a plurality of mobile devices, a set of eligible assistant (EA) mobile devices. Each EA mobile device in the set is directed to determine a corresponding mobile device-to-mobile device (MD-MD) channel indicator that identifies a quality of a channel between the each EA mobile device and the primary mobile device. The controller node receives from at least one EA mobile device in the set the corresponding MD-MD channel indicator. The controller node then determines a cluster set that includes the primary mobile device and the at least one EA mobile device. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177462 | NETWORK ANALYSIS METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A network analysis method performed by a computer, the network analysis method includes receiving packets from a wired network, extracting a plurality of continuous packets transmitted by a communication device, and a plurality of acknowledgement packets transmitted by a wireless communication device in response to the plurality of continuous packets, and determining whether a delay is due to a wireless communication between the wireless communication device and an access point, based on a time interval of the plurality of continuous packets, and a time interval of the plurality of acknowledgment packets. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177463 | Signal Monitoring Platform - Aspects of the disclosure relate to signal monitoring at edge of a network domain in a network. A monitoring device can evaluate communication quality of information streams in downstream frequency channels, and operation conditions in a telecommunication network. In one aspect, communication quality can be evaluated at the physical layer level or at a higher-layer level containing payload data. In response to an operation issue, the monitoring device can transmit a notification to a node of a distribution platform of the telecommunication network. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177464 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC TRANSMISSION OF RETRANSMISSION REQUESTS - Methods and apparatus for communication comprise determining whether a communication characteristic value meets or exceeds a communication characteristic threshold value. Additionally, the methods and apparatus comprise adjusting a retransmission request transmission rate when the communication characteristic value meets or exceeds the communication characteristic threshold value. Moreover, the methods and apparatus comprise sending a retransmission request to a network entity based on the adjusted retransmission request transmission rate. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177465 | METHOD FOR TIME AWARE INLINE REMOTE MIRRORING - A method of monitoring packet traffic is provided. The method includes: at a first access point, capturing portions of traffic packets passing therethrough separated by time intervals; encapsulating the portions of traffic packets thereby forming encapsulated packets and adding timestamps to the encapsulated packets so as to preserve the portions of traffic packets and information related to the time intervals; transmitting the encapsulated packets over a network; decapsulating the encapsulated packets so as to obtain replay packets and the capture timestamps, wherein the replay packets include the portions of the traffic packets; and, transmitting the replay packets separated by the time intervals, wherein the timestamps are used to reproduce the time intervals so as to imitate the traffic packets passing through the first access point. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177466 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is designed to execute adequate signaling even when individual user terminals perform communication to support separate types of communication, in MIMO transmission to use antennas having varying antenna configurations depending on the type of communication. A radio base station ( | 06-26-2014 |
20140177467 | METHOD FOR TERMINAL DECIDING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER IN MACRO CELL ENVIRONMENT COMPRISING REMOTE RADIO HEAD (RRH), AND TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed is a method for a terminal deciding an uplink transmission power in a macro cell environment, comprising at least one remote radio head (RRH). The method for the terminal deciding the uplink transmission power, comprises the steps of: receiving from the base station configuration information on the base station and on a state channel information-reference signal (CSI-RS) of the at least one RRH and CSI-RS transmission power information; measuring the strength of a received signal of the CSI-RS which is received from the at least one RRH; and estimating downlink path loss that corresponds to a node that is set as a reception point or a reception RRH by using the configuration information on the CSI-RS and the CSI-RS transmission power information. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185464 | Systems and Methods for Reducing Variations in Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Measurements for Location Sensing - Certain embodiments herein are directed to reducing variations in received signal strength indicator (RSSI) measurements that may be received by a wireless device over a network, such as a WiFi network including one or more access points. A signal sent from an access point may be received by a user device, where channel estimation results associated with the received signal may be analyzed to determine a more accurate location of the user device. The received signal may be converted to at least one of the time domain and the frequency domain, in which signal components associated with the received signal may be identified based on a determination that the signal components may be associated with multipath fading or other types of interference. Such identified signal components, whether in the frequency domain or the time domain) may be excluded from a determination of a signal strength measurement that may in turn be used to identify the location of the user device. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185465 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR ADJUSTING RESOURCE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES BASED ON MACHINE DEVICE CAPABILITY INFORMATION - Devices and methods for adjusting resource management procedures in a User Equipment (UE) machine device communicating with one or more nodes in a communication network. In one embodiment, a method includes determining, during a first time period, the number of handovers, N, for the UE from a serving node to a different node. The method further includes comparing the value, N, to a threshold, wherein if the value, N, is greater than the threshold, mobility pattern information for the UE includes an indication of high mobility, and if the value, N, is less than or equal to the threshold, the mobility pattern information includes an indication of low mobility. The method also includes transmitting machine device capability information, including the indicated mobility pattern information, to be used for determining an adjustment to a resource management procedure for the UE. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185466 | Information Stream Management - Aspects of the disclosure relate to management of information streams. The information streams can be delivered according to adaptive streaming mechanisms. In one aspect, a method of data stream management can comprise receiving a plurality of data streams having a specific bit rate and a segmentation signaling structure, comprising at least one segmentation signaling marker. The method may also comprise monitoring the segmentation signaling structure of at least one data stream and supplying, based on the monitoring, a metric indicative of compliance with a predetermined segmentation signaling structure. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185467 | ENHANCED NODE B, USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS FOR DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION IN INTER-ENB CARRIER AGGREGATION - Embodiments of user equipment (UE) and methods for enhanced discontinuous reception (DRX) operations for inter eNB carrier aggregation (CA) in an LTE network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a UE is configured to be served by multiple serving cells. The first set of the serving cells may be associated with a first eNB and a second set of serving cells may be associated with a second eNB. In these embodiments, DRX operations may be performed independently in multiple serving cells belonging to the different eNBs. Other embodiments for enhanced DRX operations are also described. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185468 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR ADVERTISING SERVICES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Logic may decide which service advertisement information to transmit in a service advertisement frame based on link margin information of each service advertisement received. Logic may filter the service advertisement information to avoid advertising service information for service providers that cannot be reached. A first station may receive a service advertisement from a second station and determine whether to include the service advertisement with a transmission of the first station's service advertisement based upon perceived proximity of the second station. A station may generate a Leaving Message if a user terminates service advertisements of the station or the station appears to be moving away from a service advertisement group. In response to receiving a Leaving Message from a neighboring station, a station may remove the neighboring station from a list of service providers maintained by the station. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185469 | ADVANCED NETWORK CHARACTERIZATION AND MIGRATION - In some embodiments, a method includes scanning for wireless networks, where scanning includes collecting network information indicating properties of the wireless networks. The method can include analyzing the network information to determine signal data indicating signal qualities for the wireless networks. The method can include characterizing, based on the signal data, one or more wireless networks as being suitable for connection by the mobile device, where the characterizing includes determining, based on the signal data, movement of the mobile relative to one or more access points of the wireless networks. The method can include determining that one or more signals of the wireless networks are above a dwell threshold level for reliable wireless connectivity. The method can include determining that one or more signals has been dropped, and connecting to the mobile device to one of the one or more wireless networks that are suitable for connection. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185470 | System and Method for Enhanced Proxy Component - The present invention is directed to a system and method for use in a telecommunication networks to facilitate the use of packet switched end-user devices, particularly push-to-talk (PTT) devices, across multiple communication services and legacy networks. The present invention provides an enhanced proxy for integrated voice over internet protocol (VoIP) applications that enable predefined custom numbers to be utilized on a PTT device to access services on one or more legacy networks. The present invention also provides a means for the delivery of information that is dynamically customized and specific to an end-user of the PTT device. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185471 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A computer having a communication function is caused to receive user instructions designating execution of a process other than a process for acquiring information relating to a communication environment; execute the process designated by the user instructions; acquire information relating to the communication environment of the computer, when the user instructions are received or when the process indicated by the user instructions is executed; and acquire position information of the computer, when the user instructions are received or when the process indicated by the user instructions is executed. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185472 | METHOD FOR INCORPORATING INVISIBLE ACCESS POINTS FOR RSSI-BASED INDOOR POSITIONING APPLICATIONS - A method for incorporating invisible APs for RSSI based indoor positioning is presented. An empirical estimate of the probability of invisible APs versus distance is computed. An estimated position of the receiver can be computed using any statistical estimator based on the probability. In one embodiment, an estimate of the probability is computed by combining the probability over a set of visible APs and the probability over a set of invisible APs with the probability of individual contribution. In one embodiment a dynamic procedure is used to update the invisible probability that is computed using an AP dictionary built on the fly as new APs are detected. Incorporating invisible APs for estimating user position from the RSSI measurements for indoor positioning provides a better positioning accuracy as compared to typical estimators which rely only on the visible APs. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185473 | Speed frame exchange within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - A signaling protocol allows for speed frame exchange between different wireless communication devices within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communication system. A listening wireless communication device analyzes state of speed frame indicator bits within frames transmitted from a first other wireless communication device to determine the entire radio frame exchanges between that first other wireless communication device and a second other wireless communication device. The second other wireless communication device may be a hidden node relative to the listening wireless communication device such that all or less than all transmissions from the hidden node are received by the listening device. The listening wireless communication device determines the status of the communication medium (e.g., the air in the context of a wireless communication system), so that it can transmit successfully without interfering with any ongoing communications between the first and second other wireless communication devices. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185474 | QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE - The invention relates to an apparatus comprising: at least one processor and at least one memory including a computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus at least to: search for packet losses; determine a type of a frame wherein at least one packet loss took place and amount of lost information; determine events affecting user experience based on the type of the frame and the amount of lost information; estimate a first quality indicating parameter for each of the events affecting user experience, wherein the first quality parameter comprises objective quality information, and estimate a second quality indicating parameter by using the first quality indicating parameter, wherein the second quality indicating parameter comprises subjective quality information. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185475 | Adaptive Neighboring Cell Measurement Scaling for Wireless Devices - Adaptive neighboring cell measurement scaling by a wireless user equipment (UE) device. The UE may operate alternately in active and inactive states in a periodic manner according to DRX cycle timing for each of a plurality of DRX cycles. Paging messages may be checked for while in the active state during each DRX cycle. If a paging message is received, it may be decoded using a joint detection technique. The UE may adaptively determine whether or not to perform neighboring cell measurements during at least a subset of the DRX cycles, and perform neighboring cell measurements according to the adaptive determination. The adaptive determination may be based on one or more of joint detection of paging messages, one or more previous cell measurements, or an amount of motion of the UE. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185476 | Efficient Link Adaptation for Non-Collocated Antennas - Systems and methods for efficient link adaptation in multi-access wireless communication networks, including link adaptation in scenarios with non-collocated and/or power imbalanced base station transmit antennas are provided. In an embodiment, an indication of signal powers of the transmit antennas is signaled by the network to the user equipment (UE) when the UE is configured for logical antenna. ports using non-collocated and/or power imbalanced transmit antennas. The UE can use the indication of signal powers in determining the Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) and the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), resulting in higher accuracy link adaptation. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185477 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COLLECTING, REPORTING, AND ANALYZING DATA ON APPLICATION-LEVEL ACTIVITY AND OTHER USER INFORMATION ON A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - System and method for collecting and analyzing information on application-level activity and other user information on a mobile data network. A platform non-intrusively and transparently monitors data activity on a mobile data network in real-time so that user-level information can be reported to an operator. The platform comprises a plurality of collectors, a data manager, and a report manager. The collectors communicate with network routers to almost all network data. The collectors inspect the data for IP addresses and correlate them to user mobile phone numbers. The data manager receives the data and augments it with information obtained by querying carrier information. The data manager stores the data and monitors it to see if it satisfies a set of defined real-time reports. The report manager then works with the data manager to develop and test new reports based on operator instructions for a specific report. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185478 | Method of Handling Multiuser CQI for MU-MIMO and Related Communication Device - A method of handling multiuser channel quality indicators (MU-CQIs) for a communication device comprises transmitting a highest MU-CQI periodically to a network; and transmitting at least one MU-CQI aperiodically to the network according to a request transmitted by the network. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185479 | Method of Reporting CQI and Related Communication Device - A method of reporting channel quality indicator (CQI) for a communication device comprises performing a channel measurement on a channel between the communication device and a network; determining a number of at least one reference resource needed for achieving a channel quality indicator (CQI) level according to the channel measurement; and transmitting an indicator indicating the number of the at least one reference resource to the network. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185480 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ONE CELL OPERATION WITH FAST SMALL CELL SWITCHING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of supporting fast sub-cell switching by a sub-cell included in a macro coverage in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving multiple pieces of feedback information on multiple sub-cells from a User Equipment (UE), extracting channel quality indicators from the multiple pieces of received feedback information, respectively, comparing values of the extracted channel quality indicators, and determining, based on a result of the comparison of the values of the extracted channel quality indicators, whether to perform fast sub-cell switching of the UE. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185481 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A BEAM-FORMING BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for operating a Mobile Station (MS) for uplink (UL) power control in a wireless communication system. The method includes: determining an UL Transmit (Tx) power value compensated for a gain difference value between a downlink (DL) Tx beam and an UL Receive (Rx) beam of a Base Station (BS); and transmitting an UL signal based on the determined UL Tx power value. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185482 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE OF ENCRYPTED NETWORK TRAFFIC - The present invention is directed towards systems and methods for providing classification of an encrypted network packet for performing QoS and acceleration techniques. Encrypted packets may be classified by a first classifier at a first portion of a network stack of a device as corresponding to a first predetermined application, and an application identifier may be included with the packet. In some embodiments, the packets may be decrypted in an order dependent on a first classification of the encrypted network packet. After decryption, packets may be reclassified as corresponding to a second predetermined application by a second classifier operating at a second portion of a network stack of the device above the first portion. Thus, network performance may be enhanced and optimized by providing QoS and acceleration engines with packet- or data-specific information corresponding to the application, while avoiding inefficiencies due to a lack of prioritization of decryption. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185483 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for measuring inter-cell measurement in a wireless communication system are discussed. The method includes: receiving information regarding a predetermined resource region to which a sounding signal allocated for user equipments (UEs) connected to base stations (BSs) contained in the same coordinated cluster is transmitted, the sounding signal being used to detect a UE causing inter-cell interference; determining whether transmission of the sounding signal is granted for a serving UE in the predetermined resource region; and if transmission of the sounding signal is granted, transmitting a transmission grant message of the sounding signal to the serving UE, wherein whether the sounding signal transmission is granted is determined based on a random number, or is determined based on information of an available resource region of each BS if information regarding the available resource region of each BS is received with the information regarding the predetermined resource region. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185484 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR MONITORING WIRELESS LINKS DURING TRANSMISSION GAPS - A method and apparatus are provided for measuring a link quality by a User Equipment (UE) in a communication system. The method includes receiving, from a wireless access network, a control message including an s-Measure including a serving cell quality threshold and gap configuration information used for setting up and releasing measurement gaps; setting up a measurement gap configuration indicated by the gap configuration information; if a link quality related to a serving cell is lower than the serving cell quality threshold, measuring a link quality related to at least one neighboring cell during a period according to the measurement gap configuration; and transmitting, to the wireless access network, a measurement report including a result of the measuring. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185485 | WIRELESS LINK MONITORING AND ACTIVE TROUBLESHOOTING - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method comprises transmitting a Layer 2 (L2) frame from a first wireless device. Upon receipt of a frame in response to the L2 frame, the first wireless device uses information conveyed in the frame to modify its functionality. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185486 | Method and device for channel estimation - The disclosure provides a method for channel estimation, including that: a small-scale fading channel of each carrier of each interfering channel is obtained respectively according to a Gaussian distribution; a total interfering power P | 07-03-2014 |
20140192658 | Dynamic selection of positioning system and display map - Systems, apparatus and methods for determining whether to use an indoor map or an outdoor map based on local area network (LAN) signals from access points (APs) are disclosed. If only weak AP signals belonging to a location content identifier (LCI) are received, prior art systems display an indoor map associated with the LCI. An improvement herein further determines a quality of AP signals and/or wide area network (WAN) signals before determining whether to display the indoor map or an outdoor map. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192659 | MULTIPLE ACCESS SCHEME FOR MULTI-CHANNELS OF A NETWORK WITH A LIMITED LINK BUDGET - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). An operating frequency band of the M2M wireless WAN is divided into at least a first frequency channel and a second frequency channel. The first and second frequency channels being used for communications on a reverse link. A first rise over thermal (RoT) threshold is set for the first frequency channel. A second RoT threshold is set for the second frequency channel. The second RoT threshold is lower than the first RoT threshold. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192660 | RADIO MODULE AS WEB-CONTROLLABLE REMOTE SENSOR - The present invention provides for network control of a radio module having a plurality of input/output (I/O) ports capable of communication with one or more sensing devices across a network, where the radio module may be controlled remotely to obtain information from one or more networked remote sensing devices. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192661 | SCHEDULE RATE OF SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL (SCH) BASE STATION IDENTITY CODE (BSIC) - The scheduling rate of the synchronization channel (SCH) base station identity code (BSIC) is adapted based on target cell signal metric such as, the signal quality and/or signal strength. The scheduling rate is decreased when the target cell metric is below a first threshold value and is increased when the target cell metric is above a second threshold value. The scheduling rate may also be adapted based on a serving cell signal metric. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192662 | NETWORK AND USER BEHAVIOR BASED TIME-SHIFTED MOBILE DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for mobile data transmission are provided in the illustrative embodiments. A request for data is received from a mobile device. A determination is made whether a data transmission over a mobile data communication network in response to the request can be delayed, forming a time-shifting determination. A determination is made, responsive to the time-shifting determination being affirmative, a delayed schedule for the data transmission in response to the request such that the data transmission is completed by a deadline. The data is transmitted over the mobile data communication network according to the delayed schedule. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192663 | Power Difference Between SCell and PCell in a Carrier Aggregation System - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method is disclosed. Determining that downlink reception on a first CC is degraded due to interference caused by a second CC. In response to the determining, arranging UL signaling to inform a network of a quantitative power difference between the first and the second CC and further identifying which of the first or second CCs exhibits a higher power. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192664 | Methods and Devices for Reporting a Downlink Channel Quality - The invention relates to a method ( | 07-10-2014 |
20140192665 | MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND MEASUREMENT METHOD - A measurement circuit including: a memory, and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to measure a first signal strength of a received signal within a first frequency band, the received signal including a signal transmitted from a first transmitting apparatus within the first frequency band and a signal transmitted from a second transmitting apparatus within a second frequency band that constitutes a part of the first frequency band, to generate a second signal strength of the signal transmitted from the second transmitting apparatus within the second frequency band, and to generate a third signal strength of the received signal within the second frequency band based on the first signal strength and the second signal strength. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192666 | Method, apparatus and system for transmitting wireless network targeted information - A method, apparatus and system for transmitting targeted information are provided. In the method, a type of a service which a wireless terminal is currently dealing with is identified, when it is identified that the wireless terminal is currently dealing with a data downloading service, targeted information to be transmitted currently is determined, and then the targeted information is transmitted to the wireless terminal during downloading data. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192667 | Proximity Offloading and Service Continuity Support for Mobile Communication Devices - Systems and methods are provided to facilitate direct wireless communication between mobile communication devices while avoiding the need for mobile communication devices to periodically scan for in-range devices and avoiding unwanted breaks in traffic caused by changes in the source and/or destination IP address of packets. Mobile communication devices periodically update their positions to a server, which can send a notification when a mobile communication device comes within range. Further, mobile communication devices can encapsulate packets with an IP address used for direct wireless communication to facilitate this direct wireless communication without disrupting traffic over a core network. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192668 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DISTRIBUTED PACKET TRAFFIC PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Network packet traffic in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network is analyzed by associating a micro network access agent with a single network element in the LTE network and performing packet traffic analysis for packet traffic processed by the single network element using the micro network access agent. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192669 | FILTERING OF WI-FI PHYSICAL LAYER MEASUREMENTS - A station (STA) can receive messages (e.g., beacon frames) at a regular interval, and perform measurements on the received messages. The STA maintains a running average of recent measurement values, and updates the running average after each new measurement interval. At some measurement opportunities, the expected messages cannot be received by the STA, and so the STA cannot perform a measurement; when this occurs, the STA can choose substitute values to use for the missed measurements when next calculating the running average. As one example, the STA can substitute the value for a previously-performed measurement for the missed measurements. As another example, the STA can substitute a predetermined low value for the missed measurements. Based on the value of the running average at a given point in time, the STA can take actions such as initiating a roaming scan or switching to a different wireless interface. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192670 | INTELLIGENT CONNECTION MANAGER - Methods, devices, and storage media may provide for receiving a request from a subscriber device for a connection service pertaining to a machine-to-machine communication; determining whether the request is a valid request for the connection service; selecting a connection to a target device of the machine-to-machine communication in response to determining that the request is valid; executing a command included in the request to be directed to the target device; receiving a response from the target device; and transmitting the response to the subscriber device of the machine-to-machine communication. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192671 | CELL MEASURING METHOD AND INFORMATION TRANSMITTING METHOD THEREFOR - According to one embodiment of the present invention, provided is a method in which a terminal performs cell measurements. The method may include the steps of: receiving information on a resource restriction pattern indicating a subframe to which a restriction is applied for performing measurement on one or more neighboring cells; determining that a subframe indicated by second information is not configured as a Multimedia Broadcast over Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) subframe for the neighboring cells if an MBSFN configuration of each of the neighboring cells is not known or not clearly indicated; and performing measurements using a plurality of cell-specific reference signals (CRSs) received from the neighboring cells on the subframe which is not configured as the MBSFN subframe. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192672 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING A MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for reporting a measurement by a terminal, comprising the steps of: measuring the magnitude of a signal from a first transmission point; and measuring the magnitude of a signal from a second transmission point. The measurements of the magnitudes of the signals from each transmission point are performed using a channel state information reference signal. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192673 | UPLINK POWER CONTROLLING METHOD AND UPLINK SIGNAL RECEIVING METHOD THEREOF - The present invention relates to an uplink power control method and apparatus and an uplink signal receiving method and apparatus using the same. According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a method of receiving an uplink signal, the method of including selecting receiving points in a CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point) system, transmitting CoMP setting information to UE, and receiving uplink transmission from the UE, wherein uplink transmission power used for the uplink transmission is controlled based on an effective path loss calculated by using at least one of path losses between the UE performing the uplink transmission and points in the CoMP system. According to the present invention, when uplink transmission power control is performed in the uplink CoMP system, path losses for a plurality of receiving points are reflected so that power control may be exactly done. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192674 | Method and Node For Measuring Processing Power in a Node in a Communications Network - The embodiments herein relate to a method in a first network node ( | 07-10-2014 |
20140198670 | WIRELESS NETWORK SITE SURVEY SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Wireless network site survey systems and methods are described herein. One system includes a plurality of wireless nodes placed at a number of locations and a computing device configured to receive communication metrics, wherein the communication metrics include metrics of communication between the plurality of wireless nodes and between the computing device and each of the plurality of wireless nodes, and generate a node coverage map based on the received communication metrics. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198671 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO DYNAMICALLY SAMPLE NRT USING A DOUBLE-ENDED QUEUE THAT ALLOWS FOR SEAMLESS TRANSITION FROM FULL NRT ANALYSIS TO SAMPLED NRT ANALYSIS - A network round trip time measurement apparatus and method employ an allocated storage in the form of a double ended queue, to store data received while awaiting a corresponding receipt of data to allow the network round trip time to be determined. When the allocated size of the storage is exceeded, storage stops until such time as data is received to allow network round trip time to be determined on at least some of the already stored data, whereupon storage can resume. This allows use in high and low volume traffic situations to automatically scale back the amount of data processed, so as to not overtax available resources. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198672 | WAITING TIME PARAMETER FOR IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE SOLUTION - A user equipment receives, from a wireless access network node, a waiting time parameter indicating an amount of waiting time relating to provision, by the wireless access network node, of a solution for in-device coexistence (IDC) interference at the user equipment. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198673 | ACCESS POINT - Techniques for access point (AP) operation with respect to a client device are described in various implementations. In one example implementation, a method may include receiving, at an AP, a packet from a client device which was previously disconnected from the AP and has re-connected to the access point. The AP may obtain the SNR of the packet and determine whether to remain connected with the client device or re-disconnect the client device based at least in part on the SNR or the packet. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198674 | MANAGING A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Methods, devices, and systems for managing a wireless mesh network are described herein. One method includes monitoring an outgoing data queue length of a node of a wireless network, determining that the outgoing data queue length exceeds a particular threshold, reducing a video quality associated with the outgoing data queue, and sending a notification to an additional node of the wireless network to reduce a video quality associated with an outgoing data queue of the additional node. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198675 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION-REFERENCE SIGNAL PATTERNS FOR TIME DIVISION DUPLEX SYSTEMS IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION WIRELESS NETWORKS - A user equipment (UE) for time division duplex (TDD) communication through a wireless communication channel has a receiver to receive a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) subframe configuration value, a CSI-RS configuration value, and a CSI-RS; and circuitry to determine a subframe index corresponding to a temporal position of a special subframe including the CSI-RS; determine a CSI-RS pattern of one or more orthogonal frequency division modulation (OFDM) resource elements carrying the CSI-RS, the pattern being from among a group of CSI-RS patterns that include OF DM resource elements in OFDM symbols corresponding to a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) region of a legacy LTE wireless communication channel; control the receiver to receive the special subframe carrying the CSI-RS during the temporal position and at the one or more OFDM resource elements of the CSI-RS pattern; and measure the wireless communication channel based on the CSI-RS. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198676 | FAST SMALL CELL DISCOVERY - Embodiments of circuitry to be included in a user equipment (“UE”) and an evolved Node B (“eNB”) are described. To accelerate the detection of one or more cells in a wireless network, a UE may perform Radio Resource Management (“RRM”) measurements based on one or more synchronization signals instead of based on a common reference signal (“CRS”). Alternatively, the UE may perform RRM measurements for a cell based on a CRS transmitted for the cell without synchronizing to the cell using one or more synchronization signals. The UE may report the RRM measurements to an cNB that is to serve the UE. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198677 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION AND ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING DESIGN FOR LONG-TERM EVOLUTION MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a UE. The UE determines CSI. The UE determines whether to send the CSI based on at least one of a timer or a threshold. The UE sends the CSI upon determining to send the CSI. The UE may send the CSI in a MAC header upon determining to send the CSI. When the UE determines whether to send the CSI based on the threshold, the UE may determine whether to send the CSI based on a difference between the CSI and reference CSI. The UE may determine the reference CSI based on at least one of previously reported CSI, fixed CSI, or an MCS of a received data transmission from a base station. The UE may send CSI to the base station in an initial connection setup with the base station. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198678 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for controlling interference in a wireless communication system are disclosed. A method for measuring inter-cell interference by a pico eNB in a wireless communication system includes: receiving transmission information of a dummy signal to be transmitted on at least one candidate carrier from a neighbor pico eNB; scheduling at least one user equipment (UE) served by the pico eNB to measure the dummy signal based on the transmission information; receiving a measurement value of the dummy signal from the at least one UE; and transmitting a measurement report of the dummy signal based on the measurement value to the neighbor pico eNB, wherein the dummy signal transmission information is specified for each of a plurality of subframe sets of the at least one candidate carrier. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198679 | ANALYZING DEVICE, ANALYZING METHOD, AND ANALYZING PROGRAM - An analyzing device includes a memory and a processor coupled to the memory. The processor is configured to receive an acknowledgement from a wireless communication device for each of a plurality of data which is transmitted through a wired network and transmitted to the wireless communication device by a wireless communication which is capable of retransmitting data, from the wired network, calculate a reception interval of the plurality of acknowledgements, and analyze a retransmission cycle in the wireless communication based on a difference of the calculated reception interval of the plurality of acknowledgements. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198680 | METHODS OF RADIO COMMUNICATIONS USING DIFFERENT SUBFRAME CONFIGURATIONS AND RELATED RADIO AND/OR NETWORK NODES - A method may be provided in a radio node capable of operating in a Radio Access Network according to at least first and second UpLink/DownLink subframe configurations that are different. The first UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration and the second UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration may be used for operation in a first cell and a second cell respectively, and/or the first UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration and the second UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration may be used in the first cell or the second cell at non-overlapping times. A configuration message may be received at the radio node relating to the first UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration and/or the second UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration. An operation may be performed at the radio node on signals transmitted to and/or received from the first cell and/or the second cell based on the configuration message relating to the first UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration and/or the second UpLink/DownLink subframe configuration. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198681 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING SIGNAL IN BEAM FORMING SYSTEM - A method and a device for measuring a signal in a beam forming system. A method of measuring a signal by using beam forming by a wireless communication mobile station includes: acquiring a group setting rule that is a criterion for group classification; measuring a signal for each of transmission/reception beam pairs for a preset period of time; classifying the transmission/reception beam pairs into two or more transmission/reception beam groups according to the measured signal and the group setting rule; and performing signal measurement and report for the transmission/reception beam pairs belonging to the respective transmission/reception beam groups according to a measurement rule corresponding to the corresponding transmission/reception beam group. The device and the method efficiently measure the signal. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198682 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING EFFECTIVE FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - A method for transmitting channel status information (CSI) of downlink multi-carrier transmission includes generating the CSI including at least one of a rank indicator (RI), a first precoding matrix index (PMI), a second PMI and a channel quality indicator (CQI) for one or more downlink carriers, the CQI being calculated based on precoding information determined by a combination of the first and second PMIS, determining, when two or more CSIs collide with one another in one uplink subframe of one uplink carrier, a CSI to be transmitted on the basis of priority, and transmitting the determined CSI over a uplink channel. If a CSI including an RI or a wideband first PMI collides with a CSI including a wideband CQI or a subband CQI, the CSI including a wideband CQI or a subband CQI has low priority and is dropped. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198683 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN A DISTRIBUTED MULTI-NODE SYSTEM - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for channel estimation in a multi-node distributed system. A method for channel state estimation comprises the steps of: a terminal receiving channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) set-up information; and the terminal calculating interference on the basis of the CSI-RS set-up information and then transmitting channel state information (CSI) based on the interference, wherein the CSI-RS set-up information may include at least one of an external interference measurement field and an internal interference measurement field. Accordingly, during the external interference and internal interference measurements, the node for use in the interference measurements may be controlled by a base station so that interference is accurately measured and feedback of accurate channel information is enabled. | 07-17-2014 |
20140204770 | Methods and Apparatus For Device Scheduling - Systems and techniques for crosstalk estimation. One or more user devices feed back preceding matrix indicator rank information to one or more base stations, which generated channel state information reference sources, at least one of which includes weightings based on the preceding matrix indicator rank information. One or more user devices estimates channel information based on active preceding matrix indicator information received by the base station from at least one user device. One or more user devices computes channel estimates for a desired transmission channel and one or more other potential transmission channels associated with other user devices and performs crosstalk estimation for the estimated channels. Crosstalk estimation information is fed back to a base station, which performs scheduling based at least in part on the crosstalk estimation from the one or more user devices. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204771 | COMMUNICATING DATA USING A LOCAL WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK NODE - A local wireless access network node receives a request to offload at least a portion of data traffic for a user equipment from a macro wireless access network node to the local wireless access network node, where the user equipment is to maintain a wireless connection to the macro wireless access network node after the offload. The local wireless access network node sends a response to indicate whether the local wireless access node has accepted or denied the request. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204772 | BACKGROUND PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK SEARCH - A user equipment may reduce its wakeup time by performing at least a portion of a background public land mobile network (PLMN) search in conjunction with an inter-frequency and/or intra-frequency measurement. In such instances, the UE performs the background PLMN search subsequent to an inter-frequency and/or intra-frequency measurement using a radio frequency (RF) tuning and timing of the inter-frequency and/or intra-frequency measurement. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204773 | OPPORTUNISTIC INTERFERENCE ALIGNMENT FOR MULTI-CELL MULTI-USER UPLINK - A UE receives information indicating a receive direction vector for a serving BS and a set of receive direction vectors for at least one interfering BS. The UE determines a channel between the UE and the serving BS and a set of channels between the UE and each of the at least one interfering BS. The UE determines a transmit direction vector to apply to modulated symbols for mapping to a set of resource blocks for an uplink transmission based on the channel, the set of channels, the receive direction vector, and the set of receive direction vectors. The UE determines an interference caused to the at least one interfering BS by the uplink transmission based on the transmit direction vector, the set of channels, and the set of receive direction vectors. The UE transmits information indicating the interference to the serving BS. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204774 | INTEGRATED TEST PACKET GENERATION AND DIAGNOSTICS - Systems, methods, and apparatus for generating data packets and testing a packet switching system are provided. For example, a data packet diagnostic system includes an input queuing subsystem comprising a set of data queues, an injecting unit, and a diagnostic unit. Each data queue is coupled with a separate functional read/write path and debug read/write path. The injecting unit injects test data packets into at least one of the data queues via its respective debug read/write path. The test packets can then be processed (e.g., routed) through a data packet processing environment. In some implementations, packets are communicated via the data packet processing environment back to the input queuing subsystem, where the diagnostic unit can read present contents of at least one of the data queues to determine whether the present contents satisfy a predetermined test profile according to the injected data packets. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204775 | ROUTE SELECTION METHOD FOR USE WHERE PLURAL HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS ARE AVAILABLE - The present invention is to provide a route selection method which is applicable to a network connection device capable of receiving or transmitting a network packet through at least two heterogeneous networks. Upon receiving the packet, the device performs route performance detection to obtain the current transmission delay rate of each of the heterogeneous networks, and then determines whether the packet is highly sensitive to transmission delay or has a re-transmission mechanism. When it is determined that the packet is highly sensitive to transmission delay or doesn't have the re-transmission mechanism, the device chooses from the plural heterogeneous networks the one with a relatively low transmission delay rate as the route through which to transmit the packet to the Internet; otherwise, the device chooses from the plural heterogeneous networks the one with a relatively high transmission delay rate as the route through which to transmit the packet to the Internet. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204776 | Dynamic Adaption of Transmission Rate for Multiuser MIMO Networks - Dynamic adaption of transmission rate for multiuser MIMO networks is disclosed. The invention controls a first communication device to transmit data at rates optimal determined under the condition that the channel is occupied by the first communication device, a second communication device to transmit data at rates optimal determined under the condition that the channel is shared by the first and second communication devices and a third communication to transmit data at rates optimal determined under the condition that the channel is shared by the first, second and third communication device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204777 | CELL SWITCHING STRATEGY FOR AN LTE-ADVANCED SYSTEM BASED ON CARRIER AGGREGATION TECHNOLOGY - Various embodiments of a cell switching strategy for an LTE-Advanced system based on the carrier aggregation technology are provided. Compared with the conventional cell switching strategy, the proposed strategy monitors the channel conditions of all the component carriers that are utilized for the communication of a user. The proposed strategy switches cell for one or more of the component carriers with relatively weaker signal strength while maintaining the cell for the other component carriers with better channel quality. This Abstract is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204778 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a first communication device configured to transmit input data to a transmission path, detects a first accumulated amount of the input data, and transmit notifying data to the transmission path when the detected first accumulated amount has reached a threshold value, and a second communication device configured to receive data transmitted to the transmission path by the first communication device, detect a second accumulated amount of the received data, and output measurement information based on the detected second accumulated amount and the threshold value when having received the notifying data. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204779 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PRECODER DETERMINATION - According to an aspect of an embodiment, a method of determining a precoder for wireless communications may include acquiring first channel information associated with a first channel between a first node of a wireless communication network and a second node of the wireless communication network. The first node may be configured to transmit a first wireless signal in a wireless communication resource to the second node via the first channel. The method may further include acquiring second channel information associated with a second channel between the first node and a third node of the wireless communication network. The third node being may be configured to receive a second wireless signal transmitted in the wireless communication resource. Additionally, the method may include determining a precoder for transmission of the first wireless signal based on the first channel information and the second channel information. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204780 | WIRELESS DEVICE, ROUTER, WIRELESS SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR HIGH-SPEED OPTIMIZATION OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - A wireless transmission path monitoring unit of a wireless device monitors the state of a wireless transmission path, transmits a PAUSE command stipulated in a MAC control protocol to a router, and performs a band limitation for the router regardless of a margin of a buffer when the state of the wireless transmission path has changed. In this way, it is possible to shorten the processing time until the band limitation is applied to the router after the state of the wireless transmission path changes, and to suppress transmission delay due to retransmission of transmission data. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204781 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING A SIGNAL DETECTION QUALITY FOR A PHYSICAL CONTROL CHANNEL - A method for determining a signal detection quality for a physical control channel is provided. The method may include detecting, via a physical control channel, a first group of at least one radio resource element and a second group of at least one radio resource element, wherein the first group and the second group are non-contiguous in time and frequency with respect to radio resource elements of the physical control channel; and determining the signal detection quality based on the detected first group of resource elements and the detected second group of resource elements. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204782 | INTERPOLATION-BASED CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) ENHANCEMENTS IN LONG-TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) - According to example embodiments, a method for wireless communications by a user equipment (UE) is included. The method generally includes performing channel estimation at a plurality of frequency locations based on reference signals (RS) transmitted from at least one transmission point, computing at least one channel feedback metric for each frequency location, and transmitting the channel feedback metrics to the transmission point. According to certain aspects, a method for wireless communications by a base station (BS) is provided. The BS may receive channel feedback metrics from a UE, calculated at a plurality of frequency locations based on RSs transmitted from the BS. The BS may perform interpolation to determine values for channel feedback metrics for frequency locations between frequency locations of the received channel feedback metrics. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204783 | System and Methods of Dynamic TDD Configurations - Solutions to support the coexistence of legacy UEs and new released UEs in adaptive TDD systems are proposed. Methods of TDD grouping, RACH (random access channel) resource allocation, and DL/UL data transmission and HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) process to serve legacy UEs without interfering the operation of new released UEs are proposed. With the methods proposed in this invention, both the legacy UEs and the new released UEs can be served in the adaptive TDD systems and the data transmission from the legacy UEs would not interfere the data reception of the new released UEs. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204784 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PRE-ASSOCIATION DISCOVERY OF SERVICES ON A NETWORK - Systems, methods, and devices for transmitting service information on a network are disclosed. In one aspect, a method for an access point for transmitting service information on a network is disclosed. The method includes receiving a multicast service query from a wireless device, the service query requesting information on one or more services offered on the network. The method further includes determining a signal strength of a wireless connection to the wireless device, based at least in part on the received service query. The method further includes comparing the signal strength of the wireless connection to a threshold signal strength value and selectively responding to the service query from the wireless device based at least in part on the signal strength of the wireless connection as compared to the signal threshold value. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204785 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING MASSIVE MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT - A communication apparatus and method using a massive multiple input multiple output (MIMO) is disclosed, the method including measuring a transmission capacity between terminals disposed in a cell and a base station when a number of terminals disposed in the cell of the base station is greater than a number of terminals to be supported by the base station, and selecting at least one terminal for maximizing a network capacity from among terminals disposed in the cell based on the transmission capacity and the number of terminals to be supported by the base station. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204786 | METHOD FOR ASYNCHRONOUS CALCULATION OF NETWORK TRAFFIC RATES BASED ON RANDOMLY SAMPLED PACKETS - A method for calculating rates based on random sampling includes updating at least one state variable when sampled information is received. The method further includes calculating a rate value based on the state variable and the elapsed time since the state variable was previously updated. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204787 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a cell of a cellular wireless telecommunication system, a low interference time period is predefined for transmissions from the cell. For at least one user equipment served by the first cell, it is determined whether the user equipment should be scheduled for the low interference time period. This determination may be based on a determination as to whether the user equipment is located in the interior or exterior parts of the cell. The low interference time period may be determined based on a timing of transmissions from at least one neighbouring cell. In the case of a synchronized system, a low interference time period may be defined for each cell, such that a reuse distance between low interference time periods is maximized. In the case of an unsynchronized system, a user equipment that is close to a particular neighbour cell may be scheduled to avoid the low interference time period defined for that neighbour cell. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204788 | TESTING APPARATUS FOR A HIGH SPEED COMMUNICATIONS JACK AND METHODS OF OPERATING THE SAME - A testing unit including a substrate, a plurality of vias located in the substrate, a plurality of pin traces having a height and a width and each extending from a respective via towards an edge of the substrate, a plurality of end traces having a height and a width with each end trace extending from an end of a respective pin trace towards the edge of the substrate, a plurality of branch traces having a height and a width and each extending from a side of a respective pin trace, a plurality of traces extending from the end of a respective end trace, branch trace or pin trace to the edge of the substrate, where each end trace is adjacent to a respective branch trace, each end trace is adjacent to a respective branch trace on one side and a pin trace on the opposite side, and each pin trace is adjacent to another pin trace on one side. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204789 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING A DEGREE OF PARALLELISM OF STREAMS - A method, computer readable medium and apparatus for managing a degree of parallelism of streams are disclosed. For example, the method analyzes wireless traffic to determine a profile of the wireless traffic, determines an amount of available processing resources, and manages the degree of parallelism of streams based on the profile and the amount of available processing resources in a probe server. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204790 | MEASUREMENT METHOD FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a measurement method for channel state information, user equipment and a base station. The measurement method includes: selecting one or more coordinated transmission points for coordinated multipoint transmission by the base station for user equipment; and independently configuring a measurement subset used for channel state information feedback for each base station and each coordinated transmission point, so that the user equipment performs measurement according to the measurement subset. With the embodiments of the present invention, channel state information feedback configuration is performed to each cell or transmission point participated in coordination, and a unified structural design for feedback information may be used, so that channel feedback information for multiple transmission points or multiple cells can serve for not only transmission of a single cell, but also transmission of multiple cells. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204791 | Mechanisms to Facilitate a Telecommunication System to Make Use of Bands which are Not-Licensed to the Telecommunication System - The present invention addresses a method, including configuring a remote device (UE) for measurements of at least one carrier in a first frequency band which is different from a second frequency band which is licensed used for communication by said remote device, receiving a measurement report from said remote device, and deciding on the usability of the at least one measured carrier in said first frequency band for communication by said remote device. Also, a method is proposed, including measuring at least one carrier in a first frequency band which is different from a second frequency band which is licensed used for communication by a remote device, and sending, to a network transceiver device, a measurement report of the measurements. Likewise, corresponding computer program products as well as correspondingly configured devices are addressed | 07-24-2014 |
20140204792 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSESSING THE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL IN A MULTI-DOMAIN NETWORK - A method for assessing the quality of a communication channel in a multi-domain network includes transmitting, from a device, a probe signal onto the communication channel The transmitting coordinated with the transmission of at least one alien probe signal by another network node. Subsequently to the transmitting, receiving a mixed feedback signal. The mixed feedback signal including a first component corresponding to the probe signal and a second component corresponding to the at least one alien probe signal. The method further includes extracting the first component from the mixed feedback signal, and assessing the quality of the communication channel on the basis of the extracted first component. The probe signal and the at least one alien probe signal are designed to facilitate their separation after having been superimposed. | 07-24-2014 |
20140211640 | IDLE MEASUREMENT PERIODS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A transmission frame is communicated to cause a media idle measurement period on a contention based communication media. The media idle measurement period (i.e., “quiet period”) provides a period of inactivity on the communications medium that may be used to detect for the presence of foreign signals such as radio broadcast interference, noise, or other signals, or may be used for calibration of circuitry coupled to the communications medium. Idle measurement periods may be caused regularly (e.g., periodically). The transmission frame may include an explicit instruction for the media idle measurement period or may cause the media idle measurement period by simulating a collision on the communications media. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211641 | USING ETHERNET RING PROTECTION SWITCHING WITH COMPUTER NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a first routing device establishes a virtual channel with a remote routing device in a G.8032 protocol Ethernet network ring. The first routing device and the remote routing device each being linked to a multi-homed routing device having Layer 2 connectivity to a core network. The multi-homed routing device is not configured with the G.8032 protocol. The first routing device identifies a link state from the first routing device to the multi-homed routing device. Layer 2 connectivity of the first routing device to the core network is controlled based upon the identified link state of the first routing device. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211642 | Method And System For Boosting Transmission Settings Based On Signal To Interference And Noise Ratio - A method of performing transmission from an access point (AP) in a wireless communication system provides transmission setting adjustment after sounding. In this method, stations associated with the AP and having transmission data can be identified. Transmission to those stations can be performed using a predetermined transmission setting. For a first transmission after a sounding, the predetermined transmission setting can be boosted. For any transmission other than the first transmission after the sounding, a current or adjusted transmission setting can be used based on a detected PER during transmission. An adjusted transmission setting can be an MCS rate, a user-level (SU-BF, 2U-MIMO, or 3U-MIMO), or an aggregated MAC protocol data unit (AMPDU) aggregation level. A single transmission setting or a combination of settings can be used. The method can be used with any transmission setting(s), including those mapped from the Signal to Interference and Noise Ratio (SINR). | 07-31-2014 |
20140211643 | METHOD FOR SELECTING MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME, BASE STATION COMMUNICATION MODULE AND CUSTOMER PREMISE EQUIPMENT COMMUNICATION MODULE - A Base Station (BS) communication module and a Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) communication module are adapted to implement a method for selecting a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS). The method for selecting an MCS includes the following steps: receiving a plurality of first packets in a first period, and calculating a Packet Error Rate (PER); determining whether the PER is greater than an error rate threshold; and when the PER is greater than the error rate threshold, performing the following steps: obtaining a Carrier to Interference plus Noise Ratio (CINR) return value; performing an adjusting procedure to obtain a CINR adjustment value; calculating an actual return value according to the CINR return value and the CINR adjustment value; and selecting one of a plurality of MCSs according to the actual return value. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211644 | ROBUST PARAMETRIC POWER SPECTRAL DENSITY (PSD) CONSTRUCTION - This disclosure describes techniques for constructing power spectral density (PSD) maps representative of the distribution of radio frequency (RF) power as a function of both frequency and space (geographic location). For example, the disclosure describes techniques for construction PSD maps using robust basis pursuit forms of signal expansion. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211645 | WIRELESS TERMINAL, INFORMATION PROVIDING METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROVIDING SYSTEM - A wireless terminal according to an embodiment includes a display unit, a wireless LAN communication unit, a wireless WAN communication unit, and a control unit. The control unit acquires, when a radio wave intensity of a wireless signal output from a wireless LAN access point detected by the wireless LAN communication unit satisfies a predetermined condition, notification information corresponding to the wireless LAN access point by the wireless WAN communication unit or by the wireless LAN communication unit, and to indicates the notification information with an indication unit. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211646 | CELL-SPECIFIC REFERENCE SIGNAL INTERFERENCE AVERAGING - Aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for enhancing performance by selectively applying averaging to CSI reporting processes. According to certain aspects, a base station (e.g., an eNB) with knowledge of traffic patterns of potentially interfering transmitters may signal a UE how (or whether) to apply averaging, for example, when reporting CSI based on interference measurement resources (IMR). | 07-31-2014 |
20140211647 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SMALL CELL ENHANCEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses are disclosed for small cell enhancement in a wireless communication system. The method includes having a user equipment (UE) configured with at least a first serving cell and a second serving cell. The method also includes the UE reporting a power information report to the first serving cell, in which the power information report includes power information of a first set of serving cells and a second set of serving cells. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211648 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR ANONYMOUS CROWDSOURCING OF NETWORK CONDITION MEASUREMENTS - A communication device and method for crowdsourcing of information from one or more communication devices. The crowdsourced information can be defined by one or more parameters defined in an operational framework. The operational framework can be, for example, an Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) framework. The operational framework can include, for example, positional and/or movement information of the communication device(s), a signal quality of a communication network, a visibility duration of a communication network, data rate information of a communication network, and/or quality of service (QoS) information of a communication network. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211649 | REDUCING LATENCY OF AT LEAST ONE STREAM THAT IS ASSOCIATED WITH AT LEAST ONE BANDWIDTH RESERVATION - An embodiment may include circuitry to determine, at least in part, whether to delay transmission, at least in part, of at least one frame in favor of transmitting at least one other frame. The at least one other frame may belongs to at least one packet stream that is associated with at least one bandwidth reservation. The transmission of the at least one frame may be timed to occur prior to the transmitting of the at least one other frame. The at least one frame, at the time that it is selected for transmission, may have a relatively higher transmission priority than a relatively lower transmission priority of the at least one other frame. Many modifications, variations, and alternatives are possible without departing from this embodiment. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211650 | HYBRID LAND MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM INCORPORATING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT AND OUT-OF-COVERAGE INDICATION - The present disclosure provides a system and a method for providing mobility management and out-of-coverage indication in a hybrid system comprised of conventional LMR sites and trunking LMR sites. If a radio is located at a conventional site, the radio provides its location and user group data to the disclosed system through its traffic channel when the channel is idle. If the radio is located at a trunking site, the radio provides its location and user group data to the disclosed system through the trunking site's control channel. Knowledge of the radio's current location and user group data is used to provide dynamic call routing and data management within the disclosed system. The disclosed system and method provides seamless communication between a trunking site and a conventional site while concurrently enhancing the hybrid system to provide mobility management and out-of-coverage indication features typically associated with a stand-alone trunking system. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211651 | BGP SLOW PEER DETECTION - In one embodiment, a router selects a particular peer from an original update group used with an Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP) such as Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). The original update group includes a plurality of peers of the router that share a same outbound policy and that receive common update messages, from the router, of routing table information. The router determines that the particular peer is a potential slow peer based on a first type of indicia, wherein a slow peer is a peer that cannot keep up with a rate at which the router generates update messages over a prolonged period of time. The router confirms that one or more second types of indicia are consistent with the particular peer being a slow peer. In response to the confirmation, the router determines that the particular peer is a slow peer. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211652 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR REPORTING IN A CELLULAR RADIO NETWORK - Methods and devices are provided for signal interaction with a radio network controller and a radio base station where a report signal comprising information indicating downlink performance associated with a data queue in the radio base station is generated and transmitted to the radio network controller. Hereby scheduling in the radio network controller can take into account the downlink performance associated with a data queue. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211653 | CHANNEL INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, METHOD FOR SENDING DATA, AND BASE STATION - A method and system for feeding back channel information to coordinated cells, the method including: measuring channel qualities of downlink channels between coordinated cells and user equipment; classifying the coordinated cells into different coordinated cell classes according to the measured channel qualities; based on different channel quality intervals corresponding to different coordinated cell classes, respectively selecting channel information feedback modes with different feedback enhancement degrees for different coordinated cell classes; and using the selected channel information feedback modes with different feedback enhancement degrees to determine the channel information to be fed back to the coordinated cells in each coordinated cell class according to a pre-determined order, and sending the determined channel information to the coordinated cells. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211654 | Spectrum resource reconfiguration method, device, and system - A spectrum resource reconfiguration method is disclosed. The method includes: after spectrum resource configuration is triggered, a spectrum resource configuration decision is generated, and spectrum resources are configured to a to-be-configured link according to the configuration decision. Also disclosed are a spectrum resource reconfiguration device and system for implementing the method. In the disclosure, a spectrum resource Database (DB) is set and stores currently available spectrum resources and used spectrum resources. In this way, when insufficient spectrum resources occur on some links or spectrum resources are unavailable, a system may configure corresponding spectrum resources to the links according to currently available spectrum resources, so that it is ensured that the links with insufficient spectrum resources have available resources, thereby ensuring development of as many services as possible. By means of the technical solution of the disclosure, the use of spectrum resources is more reasonable, all spectrum resources may be fully utilized instead of being limited to specific spectrum resources, thereby maximally utilizing the spectrum resources. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211655 | RADIO LINK MONITORING (RLM) AND REFERENCE SIGNAL RECEIVED POWER (RSRP) MEASUREMENT FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method for communicating in an advanced long term evolution (LTE-A) network using common reference signal (CRS) resources associated with different interference levels due to resource partitioning is disclosed. Signals are received from an eNodeB indicating a subset of CRS resources for radio link monitoring (RLM) and/or reference signal received power (RSRP) measuring. The subset of CRS resources includes the CRS resources expected to have lower interference from the interfering eNodeBs. RLM and/or RSRP measurements are performed based on the indicated subset. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211656 | REFERENCE SIGNAL POWER MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING FOR IMPROVING PERFORMANCE IN A NETWORK WITH GEOGRAPHICALLY SEPARATED ANTENNA PORTS - Devices and methods for improving performance in a network with geographically separated antenna ports based on determining arid reporting reference signal power from a communication device to a base station are provided. In one aspect, the difference between received reference signal power values is used in determining a reported reference signal power value, such as reference signal received power (RSRP) in a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) network including geographically separated antenna ports transmitting on cell-specific reference signal (CBS) ports 0 and 1. Devices and methods for measuring and reporting per-port reference signal power values are provided. | 07-31-2014 |
20140219109 | DETERMINATION OF NCS PARAMETER AND LOGICAL ROOT SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENTS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for dynamically adjusting a ZeroCorrelationZoneConfig (Ncs) parameter of a base station. An initial Ncs parameter is set for the base station. A determination is made as to whether a count of timing synchronization failures between a mobile device and the base station exceeds a threshold. A determination is also made as to whether the timing synchronization failures correspond to a predetermined range of timing advanced (TA) estimated values. Upon determining that the count of timing synchronization failures exceeds the threshold and that the failures correspond to the predetermined range of TA estimated values, the initial Ncs parameter is dynamically adjusted. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219110 | Method And System For Dynamic AMPDU Duration Control In A Wireless Communication System - A method of providing aggregated MAC protocol data unit (AMPDU) duration control in a wireless communication device includes setting an AMPDU duration. Pass/fail statistics are collected for each MPDU of an AMPDU in a time window, W. A packet error rate (PER) difference is calculated between first and last sets of MPDUs for each AMPDU in the window. An average PER difference is calculated across all AMPDUs in the window. When the average PER difference is greater than a first threshold, then the AMPDU duration is decreased. When the difference is less than a second threshold, then the AMPDU duration is increased. When the difference is within the first and the second thresholds, then the method returns to the step of collecting for a next time window. The AMPDU duration can also be adjusted based on detected Doppler and line-of-sight transmissions. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219111 | Method And System For Dual-Mode Rate Control In A Wireless Communication System - A method of performing dual-mode rate control for an access point in a wireless communication system includes a single-user mode of operation and a multi-user mode of operation. In the single-user mode, a basic rate for a station is determined based on channel conditions. In the multi-user mode, a rate for a plurality of stations is determined using tracking. The tracking includes performing a sounding for the plurality of stations. An initial multi-user current rate is then set equal to a function of a number of users and the basic rate. A transmission is sent to the plurality of stations using the current rate. A packet error rate (PER) is detected during transmission to the plurality of stations. The current rate is adjusted based on the PER. After rate adjustment, either sounding is triggered or the method returns to sending a transmission using the current rate. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219112 | SELECTIVE PRIORITIZATION OF DATA PACKETS TO IMPROVE DATA TRAFFIC - Techniques are described herein for prioritizing higher priority data packets by reserving sequence numbers for assignment to higher priority data packets received after lower priority data packets are assigned sequence numbers. Higher priority data packets may also be prioritized by estimating an amount of data that can be sent in a single uplink allocation, limiting the amount of data packet data sent during a designated uplink allocation to the estimated amount of data, and encrypting high priority data packet(s) received previous to the designated uplink allocation. Higher priority data packets may also be prioritized by encrypting and placing high priority data packet(s) received in a queue, and subsequently re-encrypting any unsent lower priority data packets that were encrypted in the queue before the high priority data packet(s) were received. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219113 | Methods and Radio Network Nodes For Measuring Interference - A first radio network node ( | 08-07-2014 |
20140219114 | REMOTE PROBING FOR REMOTE QUALITY OF SERVICE MONITORING - In one embodiment, a targeted node in a computer network receives a probe generation request (PGR), and in response, generates a link-local multicast PGR (PGR-Local) carrying instructions for generating probes based on the PGR. The targeted node then transmits the PGR-Local to neighbors of the targeted node to cause one or more of the neighbors to generate and transmit probes to a collection device in the computer network according to the PGR-Local instructions. In another embodiment, a particular node in a computer network receives a link-local multicast probe generation request (PGR-Local) from a targeted node in the computer network, the targeted node having received the PGR-Local from a remote device, and determines how to generate probes based on instructions carried within the PGR-Local before sending one or more probes to a collection device in the computer network according to the PGR-Local instructions. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219115 | SIGNALING FOR CONFIGURATION OF DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATIONS - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe devices, methods, computer-readable media, and systems configurations for configuration of downlink coordinated multipoint (CoMP) communications in a wireless communication network. A user equipment (UE) may receive, from an evolved Node B (eNB), a radio resource control (RRC) transmission including channel state informations (CSI) reference signal (RS) parameters for a plurality of transmission points. The UE may subsequently receive a medium access control (MAC) control element (CE) including a plurality of index bits corresponding to one or more activated transmission points of the plurality of transmission points for which the feedback module is to generate CSI-RS feedback. The eNB may dynamically update the transmission points that are activated for CSI-RS feedback. The UE may receive another MAC CE from the eNB to notify the UE of the updated set of activated transmission points. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219116 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, CORE NETWORK DEVICE, RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: a step in which a core network device CN transmits a predetermined notification signal to a radio base station eNB when mobile stations UE# | 08-07-2014 |
20140219117 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INTER CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION - The present disclosure presents a method and an apparatus of triggering an inter cell interference coordination (ICIC) mechanism in a wireless network. For example, the disclosure presents a method for identifying a pilot pollution metric and determining when a pilot pollution condition based at least on the pilot pollution metric is satisfied. In addition, such as an example method may include triggering an ICIC mechanism when the pilot pollution condition is satisfied. As such, triggering an ICIC mechanism in a wireless network may be achieved. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219118 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISPLAY OF SUPPLEMENTAL CONTENT RESPONSIVE TO LOCATION - The present disclosure provides a system and method for providing a user with supplemental content based on the user's preferences and location. The disclosure provides a computer program that allows users to discover and organize content from a platform that is accessible from a mobile device or computer. Additionally, the disclosure provides a system for determining a user's location while indoors. The system can associate the user's location with specific content or items in a store and provide the user with supplemental content related to those items. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219119 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RATE CHANGE - A mobile terminal which can be connected to a plurality of base stations with different mobile communication systems, includes a handover determination section that determines a handover execution between cells provided by the plurality of base stations, a transmission rate control section that changes a transmission rate before a handover when the handover execution is determined, and a report creation section that creates a measurement report including information regarding the handover after the transmission rate is changed, and transmits the measurement report to a base station of a cell to which the mobile terminal is currently connected. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219120 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention concerns power allocation for a multi-carrier system encompassing multiple interfering links. Hence, in embodiments of the present invention the powers used on the different spectrum resources/bands/subcarriers are adjusted such that each user meets a target sum-rate, i.e. the sum of the rates over the available channels on one or more links (carriers). In this way, a power and rate control is achieved that incorporates the aspect of multiple bands and/or subcarriers. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219121 | Method of Handling Interference Measurement in TDD System and Related Communication Device - A method of handling an interference measurement for a communication device in a time-division duplexing (TDD) system comprises receiving a signal; measuring an interference coming from at least one cell with at least one uplink/downlink (UL/DL) configuration in the TDD system in a subframe according to the signal, to obtain a measured interference; and generating a measurement result comprising the measured interference and information of the at least one UL/DL configuration of the at least one cell. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219122 | CONTROL APPARATUS, REPRESENTATIVE BASE STATION AND BASE STATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, a control apparatus includes a terminal information collecting unit, an area determining unit, a parameter calculator, and a parameter setting unit. The terminal information collecting unit calculates an SINR based on reception powers and physical cell IDs. The area determining unit determines a low-throughput area in reference to at least one of the SINRs and reception powers. The parameter calculator selects a base station that causes the low-throughput area and calculates an operation frequency and transmission power of the selected base station. The parameter setting unit sets the calculated operation frequency and transmission power with respect to the selected base station. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219123 | TEST APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TESTING IP-BASED MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS TERMINALS - The present invention relates to a test apparatus and method for testing IP-based mobile communications terminals. The test apparatus comprises a first communications interface via which the test apparatus can be connected to the Internet, a second communications interface via which the test apparatus can be connected to an IP-based mobile communications terminal under test, and a test unit, which is designed to test IP-based applications provided in a mobile communications terminal under test that is connected to the Internet via the first and second communications interfaces. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219124 | MULTI-USER MIMO VIA ACTIVE SCATTERING PLATFORMS - Aircrafts flying near Earth or naval vessels are used as active scattering platforms in a multipath communications channel in MIMO communications systems. These man-made platforms in a communications channel, with techniques of beam forming and wavefront multiplexing in both transmitters at source and receivers at destinations enhance the ability to coherently combine the power of the communication signals, and improve the signal-to-noise ratio in addition to the MIMO advantage of multiple times of channel capacity over a finite bandwidth via frequency reuse. These platforms may be stationary, mobile ground based, or ocean surface based. They may also be airborne, or space borne. A swarm of 10's micro-UAV based mini-transponders is an example through active scattering of these micro-UAV to generate 10× more available bandwidth between a base station and ground mobile users over same bandwidth. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219125 | BASE-STATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - By a base station that is not limited to a cell concept, the system control cost is controlled and an area of high-communication-speed/high-communication-quality is expanded. There are provided fixed-cell support base-station devices | 08-07-2014 |
20140219126 | UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER DETERMINING METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide an uplink transmission power determining method and a user equipment. A user equipment determines a transmission situation of at least one of: a PUCCH, a PUSCH, and an SRS on another cell except a secondary cell in a subframe corresponding to a preamble to be transmitted on the secondary cell, so that the user equipment can determine an uplink transmission power of the user equipment according to the determined transmission situation, thereby solving a problem that it is not provided in the prior art that how a user equipment determines an uplink transmission power of the user equipment when random access is executed through a secondary cell. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219127 | PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS USING MULTIPLE CARRIERS - Methods and systems to configure and/or reconfigure measurement configuration in wireless communications with one or more cells are disclosed. Measurement configuration reporting may be reconfigured based on events associated with the one or more serving cells and/or one or more serving component carriers, among others. Measurement configuration and measurement configuration reporting may also be reconfigured based on events associated with one or more serving component carriers. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219128 | AIRTIME-BASED PACKET SCHEDULING FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Airtime usage may be used as a factor in controlling network traffic flow to and from client devices via a wireless network interface. Received packets or other data are assigned to a quality of service profile. Additionally, a cost value for communicating the received data is determined at least in part based on an actual or estimated airtime usage for the received packet. The cost value is used to allocate wireless network airtime to data. The allocation of wireless network airtime may be varied dynamically based on operating conditions. The cost value may be based on factors including the airtime used to communicate data; whether the data is a retransmission; and wireless network overhead. The cost value of data may also be different depending on whether the data is being sent from a client device or to a client device. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219129 | Method of Correlating QoS and Power Information - Methods of MDT information logging and reporting are provided. In one embodiment, a method is provided to resolve shortcomings of prior art by correlating UL measurements with QoS information to enable UL performance analysis and accurate detection of coverage problems. In another embodiment, a method is provided to resolve the shortcomings of the prior art by making DL measurements and location information collecting or logging conditional on UL measurements. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219130 | Method of Correlating Measurement Result - Methods of MDT information logging and reporting are provided. In one embodiment, a method is provided to resolve shortcomings of prior art by correlating UL measurements with QoS information to enable UL performance analysis and accurate detection of coverage problems. In another embodiment, a method is provided to resolve the shortcomings of the prior art by making DL measurements and location information collecting or logging conditional on UL measurements. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219131 | METHOD FOR MEASURING CELL IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM, AND DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed are a method for measuring a cell in a wireless access system and a device therefor. Specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving a pattern for reference signal received power (RSRP)/reference signal received quality (RSRQ) measurement; measuring a received signal strength indicator (RSSI) from a plurality of subframes included in the pattern for the RSRP/RSRQ measurement; extracting almost blank subframes (ABSs) from the plurality of subframes included in the pattern for the RSRP/RSRQ measurement by using the measured RSSI; and measuring the RSRP/RSRQ from the plurality of subframes included in the pattern for the RSRP/RSRQ measurement in consideration of the extracted ABSs. | 08-07-2014 |
20140233402 | Wireless Network Message Prioritization Technique - A computer-implemented character-string analysis method and associated device are provided for determining reliability of a communication network. The procedures include: assigning a priority to a message for sending by a signal carrier at the transmitting node; determining throughput of the signal carrier based on the priority; establishing latency of the message; calculating a packet error rate of the message; calculating dropout time between the transmitting and receiving nodes; and calculating a reliability index of the message. The latency represents delay between transmission time and reception time. The delay is affected by hardware, environment and distance between the transmitting and receiving nodes. The process accepts the message in response to the reliability index satisfying an acceptance threshold. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233403 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A radio communication device may include: a transmitter configured to transmit data at a data rate which is based on a pre-determined maximum data rate which is pre-determined by another radio communication device; a determination circuit configured to determine a quality indicator which is indicative of a quality of the transmission of the data; and a data rate changing circuit configured to change the data rate to a changed data rate based on the determined quality indicator. The transmitter may further transmit at the changed data rate. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233404 | APPLYING ERROR RESILIENCY BASED ON SPEED - A method for applying error resiliency based on speed is disclosed. A speed of the wireless communication device is detected. Source-based error resiliency is dynamically applied to a signal based on the speed. The signal is sent on an uplink. In addition to the speed, the source-based error resiliency may be dynamically applied to the signal based on a characteristic of the signal. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233405 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TESTING MULTIPLE DATA PACKET SIGNAL TRANSCEIVERS CONCURRENTLY - A system and method for testing multiple data packet signal transceivers concurrently in which scalar and vector signal testing are separated. Concurrent testing of scalar signal characteristics of multiple data packet signals from the data packet signal transceivers can be performed while also performing testing of vector signal characteristics of portions of each of the multiple data packet signals, thereby requiring less test time for performing all desired signal tests. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233406 | DETERMINING PARAMETERS OF AN ACCESS POINT - A method and system are described for determining parameters of an access point (AP). In the described embodiments, during a first time period, a portable electronic device (PED) scans for APs on a wireless local area network (WLAN) channel. Then, when an AP is detected on the WLAN channel, the PED determines if the AP includes a general advertisement service (GAS) protocol to make available information related to services provided by the AP. If the AP includes the GAS protocol, then the PED transmits a GAS request frame to the AP. If a response to the GAS request frame is not received from the AP within the first time period, then the PED extends the dwell time to wait for the response for a second time period, wherein a duration of the second time period is determined based on a total allowable time to scan for APs. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233407 | Interference Measurement Methods for Advanced Receiver in LTE/LTE-A - A method for receiving a PDCH is provided. The method comprises: receiving, by a UE, information identifying a plurality of resource elements that are transmitted with zero power in a resource block containing the PDCH; receiving, by the UE, a first DMRS on a first DMRS port transmitted from a first cell; and receiving, by the UE, the PDCH that is transmitted on the first DMRS port. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233408 | PROCEDURE FOR FORMULATING A SIGNAL TO INTERFERENCE PLUS NOISE RATIO - A method and system for formulating an SINR metric for cells using only the existing RSRP and RSRQ measurements. With this method and system side information is exchanged between eNBs of an E-UTRAN using the X2 interface where the X2 interface carries the X2 Application Protocol (X2AP). The side information is introduced either within X2AP messages exchanged between NB nodes or via modification of existing X2AP messages. Serving cell system information block (SIB) messages may also be modified or new SIB messages introduced to facilitate computation of an SNIR metric at a UE. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233409 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MEASUREMENT GAP IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for operating a terminal in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes at least one of transmitting data to and receiving data from a primary cell using a first Radio Frequency (RF) path, and, when a secondary cell is deactivated, operating a second RF path to perform searching and measurement with respect to at least one target cell at a frequency different from a frequency of the primary cell. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233410 | RECEPTION QUALITY MEASUREMENT DEVICE AND RECEPTION QUALITY MEASUREMENT METHOD - A reception quality measurement device includes a rate changing unit configured to downsample at least either a first sample sequence of a received signal with a first sampling rate or a second sample sequence of the received signal having a second sampling rate to adjust the sampling rates of the first sample sequence and the second sample sequence to a common sampling rate, and a power calculation unit configured to calculate a power intensity according to a cumulative total power of a predetermined number of samples included in either the first sample sequence or the second sample sequence with the common sampling rate. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233411 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING COLLISION IN WIRELESS MULTI-ACCESS CHANNEL - A method and an apparatus for detecting a collision in a wireless multi-access channel are disclosed. The method of detecting the collision in the wireless multi-access according to an exemplary embodiment includes generating a request-to-send (RTS) message by a transmission terminal, transmitting the RTS message to a reception terminal, and receiving a response message from the reception terminal and determining whether a collision occurs based on a number of pieces of tone information included in the response message. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233412 | Methods of Incorporating an Ad Hoc Cellular Network Into a Fixed Cellular Network - In this invention, we disclose methods directed toward integrating an ad hoc cellular network into a fixed cellular network. The methods disclosed herein automate the creation and integration of these networks. In additional embodiments, we disclose methods for establishing a stand-alone, ad hoc cellular network. In either of these implementations, we integrate or establish an ad hoc cellular network using mobile ad hoc cellular base stations configured to transmit and receive over a variety of frequencies, protocols, and duplexing schemes. The methods flexibly and dynamically choose an access or backhaul configuration and radio characteristics to optimize network performance. Additional embodiments provide for enhancing an existing network's coverage as needed, establishing a local network in the event of a loss of backhaul coverage to the core network, and providing local wireless access service within the ad hoc cellular network. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233413 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COORDINATING TRANSMISSION OF DATA PACKETS BASED ON FRAME TYPE DETECTION IN A BASE STATION - A system, method, base station, and computer program product for coordinating communication of data packets between a user device and an application server is described. The data packets may correspond to a bit-stream of encoded video data. In one aspect, the base station includes a memory and a computer processor operatively coupled to the memory, to a radio transmitter, and to a radio receiver. The processor is configured to detect a video frame type of the data packets and transmit one or more of the plurality of data packets based on the detected video frame type. For example, the processor may transrate, drop, or schedule the data packet for transmission based on the detected video frame type. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233414 | MU-MIMO-OFDMA METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SIGNALING MULTI-RANK CQIs AND PRECODERS - A method for determining attributes of communication channels of multi-user (MU)-multiple input multiple output (MIMO) users in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing based multiple access (OFDMA) system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving from a base station, for at least one sub-band of contiguous sub-carriers, an indication of an estimate of or an upper-bound on a total number of streams that are co-scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band or an indication of a fraction of a transmit power at the base station that is applied to streams that are scheduled for transmission to a particular user, determining one or more signal quality measures for the at least one sub-band based on at least one of the fraction or the estimate of or the upper-bound on the total number of streams that are scheduled by the base station on the at least one sub-band, and transmitting to the base station an indication of the one or more signal quality measures. Other methods, apparatuses, and systems also are disclosed. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233415 | RADIO TERMINAL, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A radio terminal comprises a communication unit, a measurement unit, a measurement unit, and a control unit. The communication unit selects the CDMA or OFDM scheme as a communication scheme to be used in a cell formed by a radio base station and performs radio communication. The measurement unit measures the receiving quality relating to the time difference between the preceding and delayed wave of a received signal in the OFDM scheme and measures the receiving quality of a received signal in the CDMA scheme. When the OFDM scheme is used in an idle state, when the receiving quality relating to the time difference which is obtained by the measurement unit is deteriorated below a threshold value corresponding to a guard interval used in the OFDM scheme, the control unit causes the measurement unit to measure the receiving quality of the received signal in the CDMA scheme. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233416 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING FREQUENCY SELECTIVE TRANSMISSION - Interference that occurs during wireless communication may be managed by determination of a selected transmit waveform exhibiting a preferred channel quality. A method, apparatus and medium of communication determine a transmit waveform from among a plurality of allocated waveforms of an unplanned access point to an associated access terminal. The transmit waveform exhibiting a highest channel quality with an associated access terminal over others of the plurality of allocated waveforms is determined. Signals are transmitted according to the transmit waveform from the unplanned access point to the associated access terminal. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233417 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for analyzing a wide frequency band with respect to signal power levels in specified narrow frequency bands, detecting narrow band signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level from the narrow band signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold, tracking narrow band interferers according to the adaptive threshold and the average composite wideband power level, and transmitting a report descriptive of the narrow band interferers. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233418 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for scanning wireless signals in a wide frequency band, measuring power levels in narrow frequency bands from the wireless signals, determining a threshold according to an average wideband power level or at least a portion of the power levels in the narrow frequency bands, detecting from the wireless signals a narrow band interferer based on the threshold, and initiating a strategy for responding to interference in the wide frequency band caused by the detected narrow band interferer. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233419 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for transmitting control information, a user equipment and a base station. The method includes: obtaining a resource occupied by first UCI, and obtaining a resource occupied by second UCI; performing channel encoding on the first UCI according to the resource occupied by the first UCI to obtain an encoded bit sequence of the first UCI, and performing channel encoding on the second UCI according to the resource occupied by the second UCI to obtain an encoded bit sequence of the second UCI; mapping the encoded bit sequence of the first UCI and the encoded bit sequence of the second UCI to a physical uplink channel, so as to transmit to a base station. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233420 | VIDEO RECEIVING TERMINAL, HOME GATEWAY DEVICE, QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AND QUALITY DETERIORATION ISOLATION SYSTEM - A pre-FEC packet quality analyzer | 08-21-2014 |
20140241174 | Generating Short Term Base Station Utilization Estimates For Wireless Networks - Monitoring within a network a history of bits throughput to a base station over each of a plurality of time intervals, monitoring within the network a physical resource block utilization level over each of the plurality of time intervals, determining a ratio of the history of bits to the utilization level for each of the plurality of time intervals, determining an updated history of bits for each of a plurality of upcoming time intervals, estimating an updated utilization level in response to the updated history of bits and the ratio, generating messaging to at least one additional network element conveying the estimated updated physical resource block utilization level, and adjusting at least one of a prefilling process or a prefetching process in response to the updated utilization level. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241175 | Methods for Determining Relative Locations of Multiple Nodes in a Wireless Network - A wireless communications network may include multiple nodes, one of which is selected as a master node. The nodes may take turns broadcasting respective packets according to a predetermined broadcast schedule. During any given broadcast iteration, each node may broadcast a packet while the other remaining nodes receive the broadcast packet in parallel. In response to receiving the broadcast packet, each node may be configured to obtain desired estimated timing values. The estimated timing values may be transmitted back to the master node for use in computing time-of-flight information. Frequency-synchronization operations may be periodically performed to help reduce timing errors. The time-of-flight information, along with other location-based metrics, may be used in determining the relative positions of the multiple nodes in the network. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241176 | GRANT UTILIZATION BASED OTHER CELL INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION - Mobile broadband traffic has been exploding in wireless networks resulting in an increase of interferences and reduced operator control. Networks are also becoming more heterogeneous putting additional demand in interference management. Scheduler schedules uplink transmissions from based on a load prediction algorithm that typically assumes worst case. However, UEs do not always use full power granted, and thus, much of granted radio resources are wasted. To address these and other issues, technique(s) to accurately predict/estimate other cell interferences and thermal noise separately and to accurately predict/estimate grant utilization probability and variance is(are) described. Inventive estimation technique(s) can be used to schedule UEs to more fully utilize available radio resources. Extended Kalman filtering can be adapted for use in estimation providing low order computational complexity. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241177 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVED CONNECTIVITY IN GPRS/EGPRS MOBILE ENVIRONMENT FOR STREAMING SERVICE - A system and method to select a modulation coding scheme of a mobile device including establishing a connection between the mobile device and a remote device through a wireless communication network, monitoring at least two measured properties of a radio frequency access link between the mobile device and the wireless communication network, selecting an updated derived C value based on the measured properties of the radio frequency access link, and inducing a change in a modulation coding scheme based on the updated derived C value. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241178 | Real-Time Radio Spectrum Assessment Engine - A multichannel radio receiver configured for real-time radio channel assessment is described herein. In one example, a radio frequency (RF) front end provides a frequency spectrum which is converted into a digitized spectrum. Within a digital subsystem, resources (e.g., software or a hardware device) may analyze channels or portions of spectrum within the digitized spectrum for a packet error rate (PER) at a plurality of power levels and a plurality of modulation schemes. The analysis may result a required received signal strength indicator (RSSI) that is needed to result in a particular read reliability requirement (RRR). Using the required RSSI, endpoints communicating with the multichannel radio may be associated with a channel(s), modulation scheme(s) and/or power level(s) that results in the RRR. The analysis may be performed by one or more resources operating in parallel and operating in the background to other communications between the endpoints and multichannel radio receiver. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241179 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED NETWORK ACTIVITY DETERMINATIONS - Methods and apparatus of wireless communication include receiving channel information and performing a first network activity estimation using at least a portion of the channel information. The first network activity estimation provides a first network activity indication. Moreover, the methods and apparatus include performing a second network activity estimation using at least another portion of the channel information. The second activity estimation provides a second network activity indication. Also, the method and apparatus include aggregating the network activity indications. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241180 | EVOLVED MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE (eMBMS) INTER-FREQUENCY CELL RESELECTION - A method for inter-frequency cell reselection by a wireless communication device is described. The wireless communication device camps on a serving cell. An evolved multimedia broadcast multicast service (eMBMS) service provided by a neighbor cell is discovered. Inter-frequency parameters of the neighbor cell are measured. It is determined whether to perform an inter-frequency cell reselection based on one or more inter-frequency cell reselection factors. An inter-frequency cell reselection to the neighbor cell is performed. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241181 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR PERFORMING DYNAMIC DROOP COMPENSATION - Provided herein are systems, methods and devices for performing droop compensation. In particular, systems, methods and devices for performing droop compensation by modifying transmit and/or receive characteristics of a magnetic device based on changing conditions are described. For example, a plurality of operating parameters or characteristics can be measured, a droop compensation capability of a link partner can be determined and transmit and/or receive characteristics of the magnetic device can be modified based on the measured operating parameters or characteristics and the determined droop compensation capability. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241182 | Access Point And Channel Selection In A Wireless Network For Reduced RF Interference - For each access point in a first network of a first type, a mobile device identifies a frame error rate of communications. The frame error rate is measured while simultaneously communicating with a second network of a second type. The mobile device stores the frame error rate in association with an access point identifier of the access point. Upon encountering, the first network again, the mobile device prioritizes the selection of an access point based on a ranking of the access points according to their associated frame error rates from lowest to highest. Further, the mobile device may use adjusted hysteresis parameters for making a handover decision in order to reduce a “ping-pong” selection between access points. Additionally or alternatively, the mobile device may select or suggest a channel of the access point based on a signal strength of signals from the second network. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241183 | AGGREGATION OF CARRIERS OF A CELLULAR RADIO NETWORK WITH CARRIERS OF AN AUXILIARY NETWORK - A method and devices for integrating a cellular radio network with a WiFi network are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method includes selecting, at a base station having a cellular radio subsystem and a WiFi radio subsystem, at least one of a cellular radio network carrier and a WiFi carrier to carry at least one data flow from the base station to a user equipment. The method further includes transmitting, from the base station to a user equipment, a control signal to cause the user equipment to select at least one of a cellular radio subsystem of the user equipment and a WiFi radio subsystem of the user equipment to receive the selected at least one of the cellular radio network carrier and the WiFi carrier. Data from the at least one data flow is transmitted on the at least one selected carrier. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241184 | SYSTEM ACQUISITION AT A MOBILE DEVICE - Methods, systems, and devices are described for system acquisition at a mobile device. A scan list including a plurality of entries may be stored at the mobile device. Each entry may include at least one connection parameter for connecting to a cellular system associated with the entry. A connection may be established with a target cellular system at the mobile device. A connection time with the target cellular system may be measured at the mobile device. A time-based entry including at least one connection parameter for the target cellular system may be added to the scan list based at least in part on the measured connection time with the target cellular system. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241185 | ASSIGNING DYNAMIC GAIN FACTORS TO COORDINATE DISTRIBUTED RADIO UNITS - A way of optimizing communication by minimizing the momentary overall radiated energy under constraints in respect to coverage and maintenance of communication with the users, is provided herein. Channel parameters are estimated from downlink and/or uplink communications or from user equipment messages and desirable gain factors are derived from the minimization. The optimization is reiterated continuously to dynamically adapt the communication system to varying conditions. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241186 | Method and Apparatus for Determining the Configuration of a Cellular Transmission System - A method for operating a computer to determine the operational parameters of an LTE communication system includes an REC and a RE that communicate with one another over a data link utilizing CPRI frames that are translated into LTE frames by the RE is disclosed. The method includes synchronizing the data processing system with the CPRI frames. The computer then determines a plurality of CPRI frame characteristics from the CPRI frames by examining a plurality of predetermined locations in the CPRI frames. The CPRI frame characteristics, a CPRI frame, and a model of the LTE communication system, are used to generate a first LTE frame that would be generated by that CPRI frame if the model accurately described the LTE communication system. The first LTE frame is then tested to determine if it is consistent with the model. The process is repeated until a consistent model is found. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241187 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AVOIDING INTERFERENCE FOR A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK CONNECTION - Systems and methods are described herein for avoiding interfering with 5 GHZ frequency band signals with a peer-to-peer wireless local area network connection. A peer-to-peer client is notified of radar signals in proximity to the client over a master-to-client wireless local area connection with an enterprise access point. If the notification includes a non-interfering radar channel, the peer-to-peer client resets the peer-to-peer channel to the non-interfering radar channel. If the notification does not provide a non-interfering radar channel, the peer-to-peer client resets the peer-to-peer network connection to a non-dynamic frequency selection channel and may disconnect the Wi-Fi connection with the enterprise access point. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241188 | REFERENCE SIGNAL GENERATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention relates to a reference signal generation method and apparatus. In the reference signal generation method, cyclic shift values of a reference signal for a channel, output in a single frame, are calculated for respective slots constituting the single frame. The calculated cyclic shift values are stored. Base signal sequence phases of the reference signal for the channel, output in the single frame, are calculated for respective slots. The calculated base signal sequence phases are stored. A total phase of the reference signal is calculated based on the cyclic shift values and the base signal sequence phases previously stored for respective slots. A reference signal sequence is generated based on the calculated total phase. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241189 | POSITION DETERMINATION OF MOBILE STATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a network, and a method of operating a network. The network includes a plurality of stations each able to transmit and receive data so that the network can transmit data between stations via at least one selected intermediate station. Each station transmits probe signals in broadcast fashion to other stations to gather a list of neighbor stations. The stations transmit position data and/or position determining data in at least some of the probe signals. The position data includes data indicative of the absolute or relative position of a station transmitting a probe signal, and the position determining data includes data usable by a station receiving a probe signal to determine the absolute or relative position of the station and/or other stations. Each station maintains position data and/or position determining data received from selected probing stations, and utilizes the data to determine the absolute or relative position of itself and/or other stations. The stations can determine the relative or absolute position of other stations in direct communication with themselves, and also of other stations not in direct communication with themselves. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241190 | Method for Reporting Downlink Channel State and Apparatus Therefor - A method for reporting a channel state to a base station (BS) supporting downlink (DL) multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) in a wireless communication system includes measuring a DL channel based on a DL signal received from the BS, and reporting an index of a codebook for precoding of the DL signal according to the measured DL channel, wherein the codebook for precoding includes an integrated codebook having a dual structure including a codebook for a wideband and a codebook for a subband, and wherein the integrated codebook is determined depending on an index i | 08-28-2014 |
20140241191 | INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NEW CARRIER TYPE - An Interference Measurement Resource (IMR) allocation method and apparatus for allocating resources for efficient interference measurement in a downlink in a system supporting a New Carrier Type (NCT) is provided. The interference measurement configuration method of a base station transmitting subframes including, or not including, Cell-specific Reference Signals (CRS) in a wireless communication system includes determining whether a terminal supports a New Carrier Type (NCT) subframe, allocating, when the terminal supports the NCT subframe, Interference Measurement Resources (IMR) to the terminal at Resource Elements (REs) where other signals are not mapped in the subframe, transmitting information on the allocated IMR to the terminal, and transmitting the subframe including the allocated IMR to the terminal. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241192 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING INFORMATION BETWEEN BASE STATION AND TERMINAL - A method and apparatus of exchanging information on the number of layers which is supported commonly between the base station and the terminals in Multi-User Multiple Input Multiple Output (MU-MIMO) environment is provided for performance enhancement. The communication method of a terminal in a wireless communication system according to the present disclosure includes receiving a reference signal and information on a number of layers supportable simultaneously from a base station, measuring a channel state value based on the reference signal and the number of layers, determining whether the measured channel state value fulfills a minimum required channel state value, and transmitting, when the measured channel state value fulfills the minimum required channel state value, a value determined based on the measured channel state value to the base station. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241193 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING A CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a system for measuring a channel quality indicator, a user equipment and a base station. The method includes: obtaining a channel quality indicator configuration, where the channel quality indicator configuration includes a first combination, and the first combination includes a valid signal processing manner and an interfering signal processing manner; performing valid signal processing and interfering signal processing according to the valid signal processing manner and the interfering signal processing manner in the first combination to obtain a valid signal and an interfering signal; performing channel quality indicator calculation according to the valid signal and the interfering signal to obtain a channel quality indicator; and feeding the channel quality indicator back to a base station. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241194 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING CHANNEL QUALITY - A method and a device for measuring channel quality are provided. The method includes: receiving first signal characteristic information and second signal characteristic information sent by a network side, where the first signal characteristic information is used to indicate a first signal, and the second signal characteristic information is used to indicate a second signal; receiving a downlink signal sent by each node in multiple nodes, obtaining a downlink channel response and downlink interference of each node respectively according to the first signal and the second signal in the downlink signal sent by each node; obtaining downlink channel quality information of each node according to the downlink channel response and the downlink interference of each node; and reporting the downlink channel quality information of each node to the network side. According to embodiments of the present invention, overheads for the node to send signaling is greatly lowered. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241195 | Radio Relay Method, Base Station Apparatus, And Relay Station Apparatus - A radio relay method for relaying signal transmitted and received between a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus, the radio relay method including: selecting a first relay method amplifying and transmitting reception signal, or a second relay method decoding, error correcting, re-encoding, and transmitting the reception signal, based on each reception quality between the relay station apparatus and the base station apparatus and between the relay station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus; and relaying the signal based on the selected first relay method or the selected second relay method. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241196 | Adaptive Generation of Channel Quality Indicators (CQIs) Based on a Current Communication Scenario - Adaptive generation of channel quality indicators based on a current communication scenario. A plurality of sets of channel quality indicator information may be stored for each of a plurality of UE communication scenarios. The information may be usable in generating a channel quality indicator. During operation of the UE, a current communication scenario of the UE may be determined. A first set of channel quality indicator information may be selected based on the determined current communication scenario being experienced by the UE. At least one channel quality indicator may be determined based on the selected first set of channel quality indicator information. Finally, the channel quality indicator may be provided to a base station. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241197 | POWER HEADROOM REPORTING FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION - Power headroom reporting and report handling are discussed in the context of a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), on which a user equipment (UE) has no valid uplink grant, and a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) on which a UE has no transmission. Under these circumstances, it is not possible to directly calculate one or more parameters which are used to calculate power headroom. Accordingly, exemplary embodiments provide for predetermined, known values to be used by the UE to calculate the power headroom, and by the eNodeB to understand the meaning of a received power headroom report. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241198 | METHOD FOR MEASURING AND FEEDING BACK RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT INFORMATION, BASE STATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present application discloses a method for measuring and feeding back radio resource management information, a base station, and a user equipment, relates to the field of communications. The method includes: receiving, by a user equipment UE, a measurement indication from a base station, where the measurement indication includes: information used for indicating, to the UE, at least one channel-state information-reference signal CSI-RS resource used for measuring a received signal strength indicator RSSI; acquiring, by the UE, at least one RSSI according to the measurement indication; acquiring, by the UE, at least one reference signal received quality RSRQ according to the at least one RSSI, where the at least one RSRQ is one-to-one corresponding to the at least one RSSI; and feeding back, by the UE, the at least one RSRQ to the base station. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241199 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING PLURALITY OF REFERENCE SIGNAL CONFIGURATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method for operating a user equipment in a wireless communication system and the user equipment for performing same. The user equipment receives a plurality of channel state information (CSI) reference signal (RS) configurations for indicating different usages, and performs an action based on each of the CSI RS configurations. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241200 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN A WIRLESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and device for measuring interference in a wireless communication system. User equipment (UE) receives interference measuring indicators form a base station and measures interference based on the interference-measuring indicators by using all or some resource elements (RE) that correspond to zero-power channel state information (CSI) reference signal (RS) configurations. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241201 | FEEDBACK METHOD IN COORDINATED MULTI-POINT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically to a method and an apparatus for feeding back the muting point information in a coordinated multi-point communication system. A method for enabling a terminal to transmit feedback information for the coordinated transmission in the wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps: receiving reference signals for the feedback of the channel state information from a plurality of base stations capable of participating in the coordinated transmission; measuring each channel state value for the plurality of base stations based on the reference signals; and transmitting the muting point information to indicate the preferring base station participating in the coordinated transmission among the plurality of base stations. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241202 | Radio Measurements in Cell_FACH - It is provided an apparatus, including flag detecting means adapted to detect a received flag; state detecting means adapted to detect if the apparatus communicates in a forward access channel state; measuring means adapted to perform, if the apparatus communicates in the forward access channel state, a measurement only if the flag is detected, wherein the measurement is radio related. | 08-28-2014 |
20140247728 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK ACCESS MONITORING - A system and method for collecting characteristics of a current instance of a network connection, where such characteristics include a characteristic of the device used for the connection, the user of the device, and an access layer of the connection. Such collected characteristics are compared to stored characteristics of at least one prior network connection. A signal may be issued with a result of the comparison. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247729 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING THE SMART BLANKING FEATURE OF THERMAL MITIGATION - Methods and apparatus for wireless communication via a communication device (e.g, via a 1X Advanced enabled mobile device) are discussed. Embodiments can include calculating that a temperature associated with the mobile device has exceeded a thermal threshold. Aspects of the methods and apparatus include transmitting a guarantee frame, from each set of frames to be transmitted, when the temperature associated with a mobile device has exceeded the thermal threshold. Aspects of the methods and apparatus include determining that the temperature associated with a mobile device has fallen below the thermal threshold. Aspects of the methods and apparatus also include reactivating normal transmissions upon determining that the temperature associated with the mobile device has fallen below the thermal threshold. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247730 | ASSISTING RETURN TO A FIRST NETWORK FROM A SECOND NETWORK AFTER PERFORMANCE OF A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK PROCEDURE - A method for assisting a wireless communication device to return to a first network from a second network is provided. The method can include the wireless communication device participating in a CSFB procedure to transition from the first network to the second network for servicing of a voice call; receiving a connection release from the second network after termination of the voice call; initiating a reselection procedure to reselect to the first network; determining presence of packet switched data ready for transmission from the wireless communication device before completion of the reselection procedure; holding the packet switched data at the wireless communication device at least until expiry of a reselection timer initiated during the reselection procedure; reselecting to the first network after expiry of the reselection timer; and initiating transmission of the packet switched data on the first network after completing reselection to the first network. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247731 | APPLICATION-BASED RADIO-ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SWITCHING - A method for application-based radio access technology (RAT) switching is provided. The method can include engaging in data communication for the application over a connection to a first RAT and measuring a connection quality metric of the connection to the first RAT. The method can further include determining a threshold connection quality metric for an application. The threshold connection quality metric can be defined for the application and can be different from a second threshold connection quality metric defined for a second application. The method can also include comparing the measured connection quality metric to the threshold connection quality metric. The method can additionally include switching from the first RAT to a second RAT and engaging in data communication for the application over the second RAT in an instance in which the quality metric does not satisfy the threshold connection quality metric. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247732 | ABSOLUTE GRANT CHANNEL FOR IRAT MEASUREMENT IN A HIGH SPEED DATA NETWORK - A method for handling grants includes communicating with a first radio access technology (RAT). An uplink grant that corresponds to at least one uplink timeslot overlapping with a measurement signal from a second RAT is discarded. The discarding of the uplink grant is based at least in part on a signal quality of the first RAT. Measurement of the second RAT during the at least one uplink timeslot is performed. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247733 | BUFFER SIZE REPORTING FOR IRAT MEASUREMENTS IN HIGH SPEED DATA NETWORKS - An intelligent buffer size reporting process includes determining whether a signal strength of a first radio access technology (RAT) is below a first threshold value. A false buffer size of zero is reported when the signal strength of the first RAT is below the first threshold value for a period of time. A signal strength of a second RAT is measured using uplink timeslots resulting from the reported false buffer size of zero. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247734 | UPLINK COVERAGE VIA AUTONOMOUS RETRANSMISSION | 09-04-2014 |
20140247735 | NETWORK MONITORING SYSTEM - A monitoring apparatus includes a processor configured to capture a network transmission signal from a monitoring location in a monitoring target network; specify each of a plurality of sessions based on session specifying information contained in the captured network transmission signal; analyze, for specified each of the sessions, the network transmission signal and measure a quality index; transfer the quality index of each of the sessions, which is measured every predetermined period of time, as a quality measurement result to an aggregation apparatus until a predetermined threshold value of a processing capability is reached; and stop, when the predetermined threshold value of the processing capability is exceeded, measuring the quality index of one of the sessions in a high-load state, and in a next cycle, perform the measurement on one of the sessions in the high-load state. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247736 | QUANTIZED CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION PREDICTION IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA SYSTEMS - A CSI vector quantizer (VQ) system is provided for time-correlated channels. The VQ system operates a receiver forwarding quantized channel state information in the form of indices and a transmitter predicting channel state change. The VQ system is aimed at feedback channels, in which bit errors, erasures and delays can occur. The VQ system uses transmitter-side channel prediction algorithms that work with the quantized CSI information and allow the system to recover from feedback channel transmission errors, erasures and delays. Moreover, the techniques can be used to lower the required feedback rate, while keeping the system's throughput at the required level. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247737 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LEARNING MSS OF SERVICES - The virtual Server (vServer) of an intermediary device deployed between a plurality of clients and services supports parameters for setting maximum segment size (MSS) on a per vServer/service basis and for automatically learning the MSS among the back-end services. In case of vServer/service setting, all vServers will use the MSS value set through the parameter for the MSS value set in TCP SYN+ACK to clients. In the case of learning mode, the backend service MSS will be learnt through monitor probing. The vServer will monitor and learn the MSS that is being frequently used by the services. When the learning is active, the intermediary device may keep statistics of the MSS of backend services picked up during load balancing decisions and once an interval timer expires, the MSS value may be picked by a majority and set on the vServer. If there is no majority, then the highest MSS is picked up to be set on the vServer. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247738 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RATE ASSIGNMENT - A method and apparatus for determining the data rate of a reverse link communication. An embodiment includes transmitting at a null rate on the communication channel only when the station is not transmitting voice, signaling, or data. An embodiment includes determining a maximum requested rate based on the normalized average pilot transmit power and the pilot reference value, and determining the timing of the rate request. An embodiment involves determining a maximum transmission rate. An embodiment involves determining sufficient power and a power-control set point. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247739 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIERARCHICAL CODEBOOK DESIGN IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatuses for wireless communication are provided. In an aspect, the method includes receiving a plurality of channel quality reports based on a multiple description coding schedule and determining a transmission parameter based on the plurality of channel quality reports. In another aspect, the method includes receiving a family of codebooks organized based on a transmission rank, and reporting, using a multiple description coding scheme, a channel quality parameter using a codebook entry from the family of codebooks. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247740 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SIMULTANEOUS DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICE OVER MULTIPLE NETWORKS - A transmitting device includes a partial data selector to select partial data divided from data to be transmitted over each of access networks based on a data transmission rate of each of the access networks; an identification information insertion unit to respectively insert identification information for measuring a data reception time interval into two or more partial data among the partial data selected for a particular access network of the access networks; a communication unit to transmit the two or more partial data with the inserted identification information to a receiving device through the particular access network; and a controller to acquire transmission state information of the particular access network based on at least one of a data transmission time interval and a data reception time interval. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247741 | COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (COMP) RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (RRM) MEASUREMENT - A method performed by a user equipment (UE) is described. A measurement configuration is received from an evolved NodeB (eNB). The measurement configuration comprises a measurement object in a carrier frequency and the measurement object comprises a set of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) configurations. A measurement is performed based on a cell-specific reference signal (CRS). A measurement is performed based on a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) based on the measurement configuration. A measurement report is generated in a radio resource control (RRC) layer. The measurement report is sent to the eNB. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247742 | METHOD FOR OPERATION BASED ON SWITCHING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - An operation method performed by user equipment in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: determining whether to switch a Discontinuous Reception (DRX) state; switching to a new DRX state and operating in the new DRX state, if it is determined to switch to the DRX state; and reporting the switch to the new DRX state to a network. The new DRX state is based on a new DRX cycle comprising on-duration for which a downlink channel is monitored and off-duration for which the downlink channel is not monitored. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247743 | METHOD IN WHICH A TERMINAL CONNECTED TO A CELLULAR NETWORK MEASURES A WIRELESS LAN AND RECEIVES INFORMATION FOR MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM, AND TERMINAL OR BASE STATION DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a measurement method for the access of a terminal to a second base station in a wireless access system, and to a base station and terminal for the method. Provided is a measurement reporting method in a measurement method for the access of a first base station-based terminal to a second base station in a wireless access system, comprising the following steps: receiving information on the second base station from the first base station; measuring the second base station using the information on the second base station; and reporting the information obtained by the second base station measurement to the first base station, wherein the second base station measurement is performed on the basis of a reference signal transmitted by the second base station. A terminal device for the method is also provided. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247744 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIGNALING AND PROCESSING CONTROL INFORMATION IN A MOBILE BROADBAND NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method and a system for signaling and processing control information in a cloud cell environment are provided. According to an embodiment, in a cloud cell, a master Base Station (BS) coordinates with other BSs to determine resources available for use on communication links between a mobile station in the cloud cell and one or all the BSs during a scheduling interval. Based on the resources available, the master BS allocates cumulative resources associated with the BSs to the mobile station for the scheduling interval. Then, the master BS transmits resource allocation control information indicating the allocated cumulative resources to the mobile station over a communication link between the master BS and the mobile station. Upon receiving the resource allocation control information, the mobile station decodes the information and receives data packets from each of the BSs during the scheduling interval according to the decoded resource allocation control information. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247745 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PERFORMANCE IN A RADIO BASE STATION ARRANGED FOR COMMUNICATION IN TDD MODE, AND RADIO BASE STATION - The present invention relates to a method for controlling performance in a radio base station communicating in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) mode in a cellular network. The radio base station has a transceiver comprising a transmitter part, a receiver part, and an antenna, the antenna being alternately connectable to the transmitter part and the receiver part. The method comprises: estimating, at the receiver part, a leakage signal in the receiver part, the leakage signal originating from a local oscillator of the transmitter part; and removing, at the receiver part, the estimated leakage signal from a received uplink signal. The present invention also relates to a corresponding radio base station. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247746 | LINK ADAPTATION AND DEVICE IN ACTIVE SCANNING METHOD - Disclosed are a link adaptation method and device in an active scanning method. The link adaptation method transmits a the probe request frame comprising null data packet announcement (NDPA) information elements, transmits a null data packet (NDP) frame comprising only a physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) header after transmitting the probe request frame, and receives a the probe response frame comprising feedback information elements measured based on the NDP frame. Therefore, the invention is capable of improving data transmission efficiency by using a modulation coding scheme (MCS) suitable for a channel state from initial connection. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247747 | METHOD AND NODE RELATED TO CHANNEL ESTIMATION - A method comprises determining a first and a second sub-carrier associated with a channel, and multiplying a signal received on the first sub-carrier with a first number to form a first resulting signal. The first number multiplied with a known signal transmitted by a second transmitting node on the first sub-carrier equals a constant value. A signal received on the second sub-carrier is multiplied with a second number to form a second resulting signal. The second number multiplied with the known signal transmitted by the second transmitting node on the second sub-carrier equals the constant value. The second resulting signal is subtracted from the first resulting signal to obtain a signal for which interference from the second transmitting node is suppressed, and the channel is estimated based on the obtained signal. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247748 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL INFORMATION FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus for a UE (user equipment) to provide reference signal feedback in a wireless communication system. The method includes: receiving, from a base station, CSI-RS configuration information for configuring CSI-RS (channel state information reference signal) patterns, the CSI-RS configuration information containing usage information; performing a first measurement for radio resource management on all CSI-RS patterns configured based on the CSI-RS configuration information; and performing a second measurement only on CSI-RS patterns corresponding to the usage information, the second measurement being determined by the usage indicated by the usage information. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247749 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDING BACK AGGREGATED CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN COOPERATIVE MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, in particular, to a method and apparatus for feeding back aggregated CSI using multiple CSI-RS setting information in a wireless communication system which supports CoMP. The method of a terminal feeding back aggregated CSI for cooperative transmission in the wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention, includes the steps of respectively receiving first CSI-RS setting information and second CSI setting information for a first base station and a second base station participating in the cooperative transmission; receiving a first CSI-RS and a second CSI-RS setting information; calculating first CSI and second CSI using the first CSI-RS and the second CSI-RS; and transmitting the aggregated CSI calculated on the basis of the first CSI and the second CSI, wherein the first CSI-RS and the second CSI-RS can be transmitted on the same subframe. | 09-04-2014 |
20140254398 | Methods And Apparatus for Internetworking - Systems and techniques for data traffic management are described. A base station providing data communication services to user devices and capable of transferring traffic to one or more wireless network access points receives data queuing latency information relating to data queuing latency experienced by the one or more user devices, access points, or both. The base station makes determinations relating to offloading of traffic to access points, such as from wireless cellular network frequencies to wireless local area network resources, based on the latency information. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254399 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A measurement reporting method includes measuring a first signal from a first neighbor base station until a first timer expires. Also measured is a second signal from a second neighbor base station until a second timer expires. The first signal is compared with the second signal. A measurement report of the first signal is delayed when the second signal is better than the first signal and the first timer expires prior to the second timer. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254400 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR PROVIDING A BINARY CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR FOR A SERVING WIRELESS CHANNEL - The present disclosure presents methods and apparatuses for providing a simplified channel quality indicator associated with a serving channel to a serving wireless node, so that the load and delay for feedback can be minimized. For example, the present disclosure describes example methods of channel quality indicator determination and reporting by a user equipment (UE), which may include measuring a serving channel of a wireless node and calculating a binary channel quality indicator that identifies a general quality of a serving channel of the wireless node. Additionally, example methods may include transmitting the binary channel quality indicator from the UE to the wireless node. Furthermore, upon successful receipt of the binary channel quality indicator, the wireless node may alter one or more channel characteristics based on the binary channel quality indicator, thereby providing improved user experience at the UE. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254401 | DISTRIBUTED POWER CONTROL FOR D2D COMMUNICATIONS - A technique for setting the transmission powers of individual D2D (device-to-device) transmitters using a distributed power control technique is described. Each individual D2D transmitter learns the interference levels that it imposes on an eNB (evolved Node B) and on D2D receivers other than its partner D2D receiver. The D2D transmitter is then able to adjust its transmission power accordingly. Such managing of interference temperature via distributed power control enables the network to maximize its reuse of time-frequency resources. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254402 | Method and/or System for Determining Time of Arrival of Data Packets - Disclosed are systems, methods and devices for application of estimating a apposition of a mobile device based, at least in part, on measuring differences of times of arrival of data packets transmitted to the mobile device from transmitters. In specific implementations, time-staggered quasi-matched filter correlators may applying a known waveform or data sequence to a payload of a received data packet to detect a correlation peak or correlation maximum corresponding to a time of arrival of the received data packet. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254403 | CHARACTERIZATION OF THE CAPACITY REGION OF A SET OF TRANSMITTERS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A capability is provided for characterizing the capacity region of a set of transmitters of a communication network. A set of interference constraints is determined for a set of transmitters having a plurality of transmitters. A plurality of expressions for a respective plurality of transmission time fractions for the transmitters are determined, as functions of a plurality of stability parameters of the respective transmitters and a plurality of ratio parameters of the respective transmitters, based on the set of interference constraints. A plurality of expressions for the respective plurality of stability parameters for the transmitters are determined as functions of the transmission time fractions of the transmitters and the ratio parameters of the transmitters. The expressions for the stability parameters are indicative of the capacity region of the set of transmitters, which may be determined by evaluating the expressions for the stability parameters. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254404 | EFFECTIVE UTILIZATION OF CYCLIC PREFIX IN OFDM SYSTEMS UNDER BENIGN CHANNEL CONDITIONS - System, apparatus, and methods are provided for effective allocation of cyclic prefix resources in OFDM systems under benign channel conditions. Methods may include a first network device receiving a transmission, from a second network device, comprising a symbol and a cyclic prefix. The first network device determines a first signal for a useable portion of the cyclic prefix and determines a second signal for a portion of the symbol corresponding to the useable portion of the cyclic prefix. The first network device determines a third signal based on the first signal and the second signal. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254405 | Measuring device and measurement method for non-intrusive throughput measurement in communication networks - A measuring device for performing measurements of a measurement signal emitted by a communication network using a plurality of resource blocks comprises digital processing means comprises power detection means for determining a received signal strength indicator RSSI indicative of a received power of user data within a number of resource blocks in the measurement signal and a reference signal received power RSRP indicative of a received power of reference signals within a number of resource blocks in the measurement signal. It further comprises resource determining means for determining occupied and unoccupied resource blocks based on the determined reference signal received power RSRP and received signal strength indicator RSSI. The resource blocks each correspond to a specific time and frequency range and each consist of a number of resource elements which each correspond to a specific time and frequency range. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254406 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VIRTUAL PRIVATE APPLICATION NETWORKS - A system and method for virtual private application networks includes receiving a first packet associated with a first network flow at a network device, determining one or more first characteristics of the first network flow based on information associated with the first packet, determining one or more second characteristics of a first virtual private application network (VPAN) based on information associated with the one or more first characteristics, assigning the first network flow to the first VPAN, selecting one or more first network switching devices to be associated with the first VPAN, and transmitting one or more first flow control messages to the selected one or more first network switching devices. The one or more first flow control messages provide forwarding instructions for network traffic associated with the first network flow to the selected one or more first network switching devices. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254407 | SIGNAL NOISE ESTIMATION - Estimation of noise within signaling is contemplated. The noise estimation may be beneficial in detecting noise within signaling in order to facilitate error correction or other corrective measures without having to process transmitted data being transmitted within the signaling. The noise estimation may be based on pilot tones included within frequency division multiplexed signaling. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254408 | RATE CONTROL ASSOCIATED WITH FRAME AGGREGATION - MAC layer frame aggregation and block acknowledgement are used in some WLAN technologies to improve efficiency of a communications channel by reducing PHY layer overhead. A frame aggregation window size defines how many MAC protocol data units (MPDUs) are included in an aggregated MPDU (AMPDU) frame. The frame aggregation window for a subsequent AMPDU frame is typically dependent upon the characteristics of the block acknowledgement—such as the number of non-acknowledged (NAK) MPDUs or the position of a hole in the previous AMPDU frame. A small frame aggregation window size may impact throughput especially at higher transmission rates. In this disclosure a transmission rate may be determined based, at least in part, on a projected frame aggregation window size resulting from a block acknowledgement. The frame aggregation feedback (e.g. block acknowledgement) may be used by a rate control module to determine a transmission rate that optimizes frame aggregation efficiency. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254409 | Method of Maintaining a Connection and Electronic Apparatus Using the Same - A method of maintaining a network connection is used between an electronic apparatus and a server. The method includes the following steps: (a) sending an Nth test packet to the server, and the Nth test packet requests that the server reply to the electronic apparatus after waiting for an Nth time interval; (b) determining whether a reply for the Nth test package is received; (c) repeating step (a) if the reply for the Nth test packet is received; and calculating a period from the (N−1)th test packet being sent to the reply from the server being received if the reply for the Nth test packet is not received; and (d) sending a keep-alive packet periodically to the server according to the period for maintaining a connection between the electronic apparatus and the server when the electronic apparatus is switched to a standby/sleep mode. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254410 | Method and apparatus for transmitting reception acknowledgement in wireless communication system - Provided are a method and apparatus for transmitting acknowledgement/not-acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) of a user equipment in a carrier aggregation system. The method includes: assigning first and second control regions as search spaces for a specific cell; detecting scheduling information with respect to the specific cell from the first control region and/or second control region; receiving a data channel from the specific cell on the basis of the scheduling information; and transmitting ACK/NACK indicating a reception acknowledgement for the data channel, wherein if the scheduling information is detected from the first control region, the ACK/NACK is transmitted using a radio resource linked to another radio resource used to receive the scheduling information, and wherein if the scheduling information is detected from the second control region, the ACK/NACK is transmitted using a pre-set radio resource through a higher layer signal. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254411 | Method of Handling Selections of Base Stations Related Communication Device - A method of handling selections of base stations for a network comprises the steps of determining an uplink (UL) offset of a UL signal quality for a UL base station of the network, for a communication device to select the UL base station from a plurality of base stations of the network according to the UL offset and the UL signal quality for performing a transmission to the UL base station; determining a downlink (DL) offset of a DL signal quality for a DL base station of the network, for the communication device to select the DL base station from the plurality of base stations according to the DL offset and the DL signal quality for performing a reception from the DL base station; and transmitting the UL offset and the DL offset to the communication device. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254412 | METHOD AND NETWORK NODE IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless device and a method therein for performing a positioning measurement are disclosed. The wireless device obtains uplink/downlink, “UL/DL”, subframe configuration information relating to a second radio network node neighboring to a first radio network node. The wireless device performs the positioning measurement while taking the obtained UL/DL subframe configuration information into account. Moreover, a first radio network node and a method therein for configuring positioning reference signals, positioning subframes and/or an UL/DL subframe configuration are disclosed. The first radio network node configures positioning reference signals, positioning subframes and/or the UL/DL subframe configuration in a non-ambiguous set of downlink subframes. Furthermore, a positioning node and a method therein for building positioning assistance data to be used by a wireless device, wherein each radio network node of the set of radio network nodes is associated with a respective UL/DL subframe configuration information. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254413 | ANNOUNCING A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An access network (AN) receives a call announcement message for transmission to an access terminal (AT). The AN initiates, in response to the received call announcement message, a physical-layer synchronization procedure for at least one channel between the AN and the AT, the physical-layer synchronization procedure associated with a transition of the access terminal to a dedicated channel state. The AN performs the initiation by sending a message to the AT. In response to the message, the AT monitors a downlink channel for receipt of the call announcement message. The AN then transmits the call announcement message on the downlink channel to the access terminal, and the AT receives the call announcement message due to the monitoring. The call announcement message is transmitted either (i) before the physical layer synchronization procedure completes or (ii) before a transmission of a reconfiguration complete message indicating completion of dedicated channel state transition. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254414 | Compressed Feedback Format for WLAN - Channel data for a plurality of OFDM tones for one or more spatial or space-time streams are determined. A plurality of angle values associated with the one or more spatial or space-time streams and the one or more OFDM tones of the plurality of OFDM tones are determined. For each of the one or more spatial or space time streams, a per-tone signal to noise ratio (PT-SNR) associated with one or more OFDM tone of the plurality of OFDM tones is determined, and an average signal to noise ratio (avg-SNR) is determined by averaging signal to noise ratio (SNR) values corresponding to one or more OFDM tones of the plurality of OFDM tones. A feedback report is generated to include at least i) the plurality of angle values , ii) the PT-SNRs, and iii) the avg-SNR. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254415 | Method, Device, and Data Frame for Spectrum Sensing - A method, device, and data frame for spectrum sensing. The method for spectrum sensing includes: determining configuration information of a spectrum sensing guard interval in a guard period (GP) used to prevent interference; setting a quiet period in the guard period according to the configuration information of the spectrum sensing guard interval; and performing the spectrum sensing in the quiet period. In the present invention, effectively avoiding the interference caused by the signal transmission to the spectrum sensing, and the spectrum sensing is performed in the condition that the signal transmission is not affected. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254416 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO TERMINAL, RADIO NETWORK, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A radio terminal, which has a function to collect and report measurement information designated by a radio network, comprises: means for receiving collection/reporting control information related to the radio terminal's execution of at least one of the collection of measurement information and the reporting of the measurement information to the radio network; and control means for executing, based on the collection/reporting control information, at least one of the collection and the reporting if execution determination information, which is related to at least one of the collection of the measurement information and the reporting of the measurement information to be executed by the local terminal, satisfies a given determination criterion. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254417 | PACKET NETWORK MONITORING DEVICE - A network analysis device for a digital communication network includes a digitizer to digitize a waveform representing a signal to produce a plurality of digital samples indicative of the waveform. The signal is communicated on the network. The network analysis device also includes a processor operable to analyze the digital samples to identify signal events, determine analog characteristics of the signal events, and classify the signal events, which are digital communications between network devices, based at least in part on the analog characteristics, to selectively predict a failure mode. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254418 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATON SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus for measuring interference in a wireless communication system. A terminal receives, from a base station, a zero-power channel state information (CSI) reference signal (RS) indicator that indicates whether or not to estimate interference using a zero-power CSI RS signal, and, according to the zero-power CSI RS indicator, measures interference on the basis of the zero-power CSI RS. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254419 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for measuring interference in a wireless communication system. User equipment (UE) receives a common reference signal (CRS) from a first domain having the same cell identity and a channel state information (CSI) reference signal (RS) from a second domain including a configuration of the CSI RS designated by the UE. The UE measures interference for the second domain on the basis of the received CRS and CSI RS. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254420 | METHOD AND WIRELESS DEVICE FOR MONITORING DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - Provided are a method and a wireless device for monitoring a downlink control channel in a wireless communication system. The wireless device monitors a first downlink control channel in a first search space, and monitors a second downlink control channel in a second search space. The first downlink control channel is modulated by a first reference signal, which is generated on the basis of an identifier of a first serving cell, and the second downlink control channel is modulated by a second reference signal, which is generated on the basis of an identifier of a second serving cell. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254421 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION USING REFERENCE SIGNALS - A method in a radio network node for estimating channel gain over frequencies of a bandwidth in a radio communications network. The radio network node measures a first channel gain based on a received power of a sounding reference signal over a first set of frequencies from a user equipment, which first set of frequencies is comprised in the frequencies of the bandwidth. Furthermore, the radio network node measures a second channel gain based on a received power of a received demodulation reference signal of a physical uplink shared channel over a second set of frequencies from the user equipment, which second set of frequencies is comprised in the frequencies of the bandwidth. The radio network node then estimates a third channel gain over the frequencies of the bandwidth based on the measured first channel gain and the measured second channel gain. | 09-11-2014 |
20140269353 | INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) MEASUREMENT SCHEDULING - A method of wireless communication includes determining whether a serving cell signal strength is below a first threshold. The method also includes determining whether an inter/intra frequency neighbor cell signal strength is below a second threshold. The method further includes determining whether a number of idle traffic time slots for inter-radio access technology IRAT measurements is less than a third threshold. Finally, a frequency of IRAT measurements in time slot zero (TS0), a downlink pilot time slot (DwPTS), an uplink pilot time slot (UpPTS), and a gap (GP) is increased. The increase is based on the determined serving cell signal strength, the determined inter/intra frequency neighbor cell signal strength, and the determined number of idle traffic time slots. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269354 | INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY AND/OR INTER-FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENT - A method of wireless communication includes activating a receive chain for inter-frequency or inter radio access technology (IRAT) measurement during uplink communications. The method may further include measuring at least one neighbor cell with the activated receive chain during uplink communications. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269355 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR REDUCING INTERFERENCE IN NETWORKS - At least one example embodiment discloses a method of controlling interference between a plurality of user equipments (UEs) in a network including a plurality of cells, each of the cells being at least one of a serving cell and neighboring cell. The method includes obtaining first path loss data of communications between the UEs and serving cells and second path loss data of communications between the UEs and neighboring cells, determining first parameters and nominal power parameters for the plurality of cells, respectively, based on the first path loss data and the second path loss data and determining nominal interferences for the plurality of cells, respectively, based on the respective first parameter and nominal power parameter. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269356 | REDUCING THE FREQUENCY OF MEASUREMENT OF A STATIONARY UE - A system and method reduce the frequency for performing measurements by a UE in a wireless network, such as a TD-SCDMA network. A UE compares at least one serving cell signal strength to a first threshold value. When the serving cell signal strength value is above the first threshold, the UE determines whether it is stationary. The UE determines whether it is stationary by evaluating change in serving cell signal strength and evaluating a timing difference value. The UE reduces the frequency for performing measurement(s) when changes in the serving cell signal strength values are below a second threshold value and the timing difference value is below a third threshold value. The timing difference can be a subframe number to subframe number (SFN-SFN) observed time difference. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269357 | ADAPTIVE PILOT PLACEMENT FOR ESTIMATION OF VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE WIRELESS CHANNEL - A system and method that may facilitate transmission bandwidth savings in non-stationary vehicle-to-vehicle wireless communication channels. At a transmitting vehicle, a transmitter may adaptively change the number of pilot symbols or pilot rate within a frame based upon the current channel statistics. The transmitter may utilize a look-up table approach to select a best pilot rate based upon current conditions associated with the transmitting vehicle, and/or a new frame structure to transmit pilot rate information. At the receiving vehicle, the receiver may be configured to detect a unique waveform transmitted by the transmitting vehicle to estimate the pilot rate information. Alternatively, the receiver on the receiving vehicle may be configured to predict and verify the pilot rate information from an encoded data symbol embedded within a frame transmitted by the transmitting vehicle, which may entail a detection algorithm using encoded data symbols and/or an estimation algorithm using channel statistics. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269358 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR STATISTICALLY PROFILING CHANNELS IN MIMO COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods are disclosed for generating a statistical profile of a MIMO channel. Packets of information may be transmitted over an interval of time to a plurality of stations using a plurality of MIMO modes. Each packet may be binned and a goodput value corresponding to the bin, the station and the MIMO mode may be determined stored. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269359 | REDUCTION OF RETRANSMISSION LATENCY BY COMBINING PACING AND FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION - A computer-implemented method for reducing retransmission latency, including steps for determining a packet transmission interval for a plurality of data packets, determining redundant error correction information for the plurality of packets and pacing a transmission of the plurality of packets to a recipient, wherein each of the plurality of packets is separated in time based on the packet transmission interval. In certain aspects, the method further includes steps for transmitting the redundant error correction information to the recipient once each of the plurality of packets has been transmitted. Systems and computer-readable media are also provided. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269360 | ACCESS POINT PROXY AND MULTI-HOP WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Methods and devices for communicating data in a wireless communications network are described herein. In one aspect, network layers are offloaded from a station to an access point. In another aspect, flow control is introduced between the station and access point. In another aspect, segmentation is introduced between the station and access point. In another aspect, keep alive is introduced between the station and access point. In another aspect, in addition to MAC layer sequencing and acknowledging, additional sequencing and acknowledging is performed between the station and access point to ensure reliable transmission of data. In another aspect, MAC layer sequencing and acknowledging is disabled. In another aspect, a last MPDU fragment is used to ensure reliable transmission of data. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269361 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR UTILIZING ADAPTIVE SYMBOL PROCESSING IN A MULTIPLE USER EQUIPMENT (MULTI-UE) SIMULATOR - A method for utilizing adaptive symbol processing in a multi-UE simulator is disclosed and includes receiving a downlink signal including a plurality of downlink signal portions, wherein each of the downlink signal portions is received via one of a plurality of carriers and forwarding the downlink signal portions to a first downlink signal chain processing module belonging to a plurality of downlink signal chain processing modules, wherein symbol processing task modules associated with the plurality of downlink signal chain processing modules are grouped in logical task pools of similar symbol processing task modules. The method includes processing the downlink signal portions using the symbol processing task modules associated with the first downlink signal chain processing module. The method also includes selecting a similar symbol processing task module from the logical task pool associated with the first symbol processing task module to assist with the processing of the downlink signal portions. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269362 | Techniques to Update a Wireless Communication Channel Estimation - An apparatus, a method and one or more tangible computer-readable non-transitory storage media. The apparatus comprises a processor and a receive module configured to be executed by the processor to receive a data packet via a wireless communication channel, the packet including one or more pilot signals assigned to one or more corresponding subcarrier frequencies of the packet, the one or more pilot signals arranged to sweep through at least a portion of the plurality of subcarrier frequencies as a function of time. The apparatus further includes a channel estimator module configured to be executed by the processor to determine an initial channel estimation for the communication channel, and to further update a channel estimation for the communication channel using at least a portion of the pilot signals of the packet based on channel conditions. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269363 | IN-TRANSIT DETECTION USING LOW COMPLEXITY ALGORITHM FUSION AND PHONE STATE HEURISTICS - System and methods are disclosed to use information available on the state of mobile devices in a heuristics-based approach to improve motion state detection. In one or more embodiments, information on the WiFi connectivity of mobile devices may be used to improve the detection of the in-transit state. The WiFi connectivity information may be used with sensor signal such as accelerometer signals in a motion classifier to reduce the false positives of the in-transit state. In one or more embodiments, information that a mobile device is connected to a WiFi access point (AP) may be used as heuristics to reduce the probability of falsely classifying the mobile device in the in-transit state when mobile device is actually in the hand of a relatively stationary user. Information on the battery charging state or the wireless connectivity of the mobile devices may also be used to improve the detection of in-transit state. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269364 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CLOUD-BASED MANAGEMENT OF SELF-ORGANIZING WIRELESS NETWORKS - Disclosed are system and method for managing self-organizing wireless networks by a cloud server. In an aspect, the cloud server is configured to collect from a plurality of radio nodes of the wireless networks statistical and predictive information about accessibility and performance of said nodes; collect from a plurality of mobile devices connected to the wireless networks at least statistical and predictive information about performance, location, mobility and services of said devices; analyze the collected information to assess the performance, loading and distribution of network resource among the radio nodes; determine, based on the analysis, optimization guidelines for performance, loading and distribution of network resources among the radio nodes; and send the optimization guidelines to the radio nodes in order to optimize performance, loading and distribution of network resources at the radio nodes and to make resource optimization decisions specific to the individual mobile devices. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269365 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TESTING A DATA PACKET SIGNAL TRANSCEIVER - A system and method for testing signal reception by a data packet signal transceiver. By monitoring signals provided to and returning from a device under test (DUT), e.g., stimulus and response signals, respectively, it can be determined whether and when the DUT has received a faulty data packet or received a valid data packet in a faulty manner. When such events occur, appropriate control signals are provided for instructing the test signal reception and analysis subsystem (e.g., a vector signal analyzer) to capture and retain for analysis such faulty data packet or valid data packet received in a faulty manner. This enables the data packet reception test results to identify the number of data packets correctly received within the prescribed time interval and identify which data packet reception faults are due to reception of a faulty data packet or reception of a valid data packet in a faulty manner. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269366 | DYNAMIC VOIP ROUTING AND ADJUSTIMENT - Systems and processes are provided for dynamically adjusting and routing signals and communications. According to one aspect, one or more codecs applied to the signals may be switched or changed to manage signal quality. According to another aspect, communications may be re-routed to an intended recipient entirely over the Internet. The systems and processes described herein are especially well suited for use in connection with detention environments. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269367 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING THE IMPACT OF SHORT INTERFERENCE BURSTS - Techniques are provided for utilizing selected inter-frame spacing, such as reduced inter-frame spacing (RIFS) or short inter-frame spacing (SIFS) to avoid failed data transmissions in a Wi-Fi network or the like. For example, there is provided a method, operable by a transmitter node or entity, such as, for example, an access point (AP), that may involve sending a data transmission in a data aggregation mode, the data transmission comprising aggregated MAC protocol data units (A-MPDUs). The method may involve monitoring for and detecting potential short interference bursts in the network. The method may involve re-sending the data transmission in a data bursting mode, the data transmission comprising back-to-back data packet bursts separated by a selected inter-frame spacing. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269368 | Radio Link Quality Monitoring - Disclosed herein is a method of radio link monitoring (RLM) in a UE comprising the steps of: selecting a control channel type to perform RLM on, wherein the control channel type includes one or more of: a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH); or an enhanced physical downlink control channel (EPDCCH); receiving a transmission on a carrier, the transmission comprising one or more reference signals; and determining the quality of the radio link using the selected control channel type and the one or more reference signals. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269369 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR STATION CONTENTION - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments of the invention are disclosed for station contention employable, for example, in connection with wireless networks. In an example embodiment of the invention, a method, comprises: employing a function, wherein said function takes as inputs at least one of: a station transmission opportunity duration, a station priority level, and a slot duration; and receiving, as output from said function, a station contention counter parameter. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269370 | Dynamic Beamforming Configuration Based on Network Conditions - A method includes steering client devices to access points that potentially increase capacity of communications using beamformed transmissions. In particular, this includes determining the best access points for beamforming to a particular client or a group of clients in the network for an improved throughput performance in the deployment or a subset of access points. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269371 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR SELECTIVELY PROCESSING PACKETS USING TIME TO LIVE (TTL) INFORMATION - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for selectively processing packets using time to live (TTL) information are disclosed. A method for selectively processing packets using TTL information includes receiving, at a test system, a test packet from a device under test (DUT), wherein the test packet includes a TTL parameter field containing a TTL value. The method further includes determining if the TTL value in the test packet is a magic TTL value and performing a processing task on the test packet if the test packet includes the magic TTL value. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269372 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR JITTER MITIGATION IN TIME DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (TDMA) COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A TDMA jitter buffer includes a receiver, a processor and a comparator. The receiver can receive a data transmission signal via a channel of a communications system, and can receive one or more delay factors measured at a transmission end of the channel, wherein each delay factor is associated with a respective data packet. The processor can queue each of the data packets that is associated with a delay factor in a respective one of one or more jitter buffers. The comparator can perform a comparison, for each data packet that is associated with a delay factor, between the respective delay factor and a predetermined latency parameter. The processor can further release each data packet that is queued in one of the jitter buffers based on the comparison between the respective delay factor associated with the data packet and the predetermined latency parameter. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269373 | ADAPTIVE USE OF RECEIVER DIVERSITY - A method for adaptively disabling receiver diversity is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device determining an active data traffic pattern; defining a threshold channel quality metric based at least in part on a threshold channel quality needed to support a threshold quality of service for the active data traffic pattern; comparing a measured channel quality to the threshold channel quality metric; and disabling receiver diversity in an instance in which the measured channel quality metric satisfies the threshold channel quality metric. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269374 | METHOD AND APPARTUS FOR SIGNAL INTERFERENCE PROCESSING - A system that incorporates the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for measuring a power level in at least a portion of a plurality of resource blocks occurring in a radio frequency spectrum, wherein the measuring occurs for a plurality of time cycles to generate a plurality of power level measurements, calculating a baseline power level according to at least a portion of the plurality of power levels, determining a threshold from the baseline power level, and monitoring at least a portion of the plurality of resource blocks for signal interference according to the threshold. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269375 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR ELECTRONIC SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT - Systems, methods, and devices enable spectrum management by identifying, classifying, and cataloging signals of interest based on radio frequency measurements. In an embodiment, signals and the parameters of the signals may be identified and indications of available frequencies may be presented to a user. In another embodiment, the protocols of signals may also be identified. In a further embodiment, the modulation of signals, data types carried by the signals, and estimated signal origins may be identified. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269376 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR ELECTRONIC SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT - Systems, methods, and devices enable spectrum management by identifying, classifying, and cataloging signals of interest based on radio frequency measurements. In an embodiment, signals and the parameters of the signals may be identified and indications of available frequencies may be presented to a user. In another embodiment, the protocols of signals may also be identified. In a further embodiment, the modulation of signals, data types carried by the signals, and estimated signal origins may be identified. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269377 | Methods Permitting A Wireless System Receiver To Determine And Report Channel Conditions To A System Transmitter - A method of providing feedback on channel observations to a transmitter includes observing a channel at a receiver based on received signals from the transmitter and determining whether a packet error rate (PER) is rising based on the observing. The receiver determines whether a rising PER is caused by channel noise or interference, and transmits a message to the transmitter indicating the cause of the rising PER. The cause may be encoded in reserved bits of a block acknowledgement (BA) frame or an Acknowledge (ACK) frame, or in a modulation coding scheme (MCS) used to transmit the message. The cause may be detected in response to SNR/RSSI level of received signals, or a number of receiver restarts. The transmitter may change the transmit rate adaptation algorithm to use a lower MCS if channel noise causes the rising PER, and a higher MCS if interference causes the rising PER. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269378 | System And Method For Determining A Cause Of Network Congestion - A method and apparatus of a device that determines a cause and effect of congestion in this device is described. In an exemplary embodiment, the device measures a queue group occupancy of a queue group for a port in the device, where the queue group stores a plurality of packets to be communicated through that port. In addition, the device determines if the measurement indicates a potential congestion of the queue group, where the congestion prevents a packet from being communicated within a time period. If potential congestion exists on that queue group, the device further gathers information regarding packets to be transmitted through that port. For example, the device can gather statistics packets that are stored in the queue group and/or new enqueue packets. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269379 | System And Method For Determining An Effect Of Network Congestion - A method and apparatus of a device that determines a cause and effect of congestion in this device is described. The device determines an effect of congestion in the device. The device measures a queue group occupancy of a queue group for a port in the device, where the queue group stores a plurality of packets to be communicated through that port. The device further determines if congestion exists on that queue group using the measurement, where the congestion prevents a packet of the plurality of packets from being communicated within a time period. If the congestion exists on that queue group, the device additionally gathers information regarding packets to be transmitted through that port. For example, the device can gather statistics packets that are stored in the queue group and/or new enqueue packets. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269380 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACTIVE FABRIC MANAGEMENT USING UNICAST REACHABILITY MONITORING - A method for active network fabric management. The method includes receiving a probe packet by a termination beacon, where the probe packet is associated with a stream, the stream is identified using an origin beacon identification (ID) for an origin beacon, a stream source IP address, a stream destination IP address, an L2 origin interface, and a TTL value or an IP Hop value. The method further includes generating, after receiving the probe packet and after the expiration of a probe rate request (PRR) refresh timer, a rate control packet (RCP) by the termination beacon where the RCP includes a PRR for the stream, and sending the RCP to the origin beacon using an origin beacon IP address, where the origin beacon IP address is different than the stream source IP address. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269381 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES FOR COMMUNICATIONS WITH BASE STATIONS - A device may include a receiver configured to receive messages about first transmission rates provided by cooperation devices configured for device-to-device (D2D) communications in a radio communication system supporting the D2D communications; a determiner configured to determine second transmission rates for the device to suggest to the cooperation devices based on the first transmission rates; and/or a transmitter configured to transmit messages about the second transmission rates to the cooperation devices. The determiner may be further configured to change the second transmission rates until the first transmission rates converge. The determiner may be further configured to determine a final transmission rate suggested to the cooperation devices based on the converged first transmission rates. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269382 | METHOD FOR TRACKING AND UTILIZING OPERATIONAL RUN TIME OF A NETWORK ELEMENT - Techniques for normalizing a performance metric in a wireless communication network include collecting operation data of a network element over a plurality of data collection time periods, determining operational run time of the network element based on the operation data, calculating a normalization value based on the operational run time, and normalizing the performance metric for the network element using the normalization value. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269383 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK SCHEME FOR COOPERATIVE MULTI POINT TRANSMISSION AND CARRIER AGGREGATION SCENARIO - Embodiments of a system and method for reporting uplink control information (UCI) are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a first and second component carrier (CC) is provided for a user equipment (UE). The first and second CC are configured with transmission mode (TM) 10 and TMs 1-9, respectively. A first channel state information (CSI) report for the first CC with TM 10 and a second CSI report for the second CC with at least one of TMs 1-9 are scheduled for transmission in a subframe. A collision is detected between the first and second CSI reports. Priority is assigned to the first CSI report or the second CSI report based on a prioritization parameter. The prioritized CSI report is transmitted based the prioritization parameter. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269384 | Through Wall Sensing System Using WiFi/Cellular Radar - A handheld through-wall sensing system comprising a transmitter/receiving operating at wireless data or cellular transmission frequencies. The system is operated in a monostatic radar mode with transmission occurring on frequency f | 09-18-2014 |
20140269385 | BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION BASED ON LOCATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods, systems, and devices are described that are directed to estimating the bandwidth at a particular location in a wireless mesh network. In some embodiments, a performance determination apparatus includes a signal receiver module, a location module, a signal analysis module, a report module, and a placement module. In some embodiments, the signal analysis module collects received signal strength indicator (RSSI) on one or more receive chains of the receiver and analyzes various aspects of signal quality. In some embodiments, the signal analysis module estimates the bandwidth available at the location, estimates the latency at the location, or both. In some embodiments, the report module represents the quality of the signal graphically by overlaying a representation of the signal quality on a map of the area. In some embodiments, the placement module recommends where to place customer premises equipment (CPE) in order to maximize signal quality. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269386 | Method and Apparatus for Analyzing and Verifying Functionality of Multiple Network Devices - A network device test station (“TS”) is capable of simultaneously testing and verifying a group of routers and/or switches at the same time. The TS includes a user interface (“UI”), a test bed engine, and a TS manager. The UI facilitates interactive communication between TS and user via an interactive graphical representations showing, for example, test configurations and test results. The test bed engine uses a set of test beds to conduct tests on attached devices or routers which are also known as device under tests (“DUTs”) or unit under tests (“UUTs”). The TS manager is configured to provide a test environment with one or more emulated communication networks for verifying functionalities of every DUT. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269387 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN SYSTEM PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A link scheduling method in a system for performing Device-to-Device (D2D) communication includes periodically collecting information indicating whether to perform a medium access from at least one neighboring link determining at least one link expected to perform a medium access in a corresponding traffic slot among links with a higher priority than the terminal based on the collected information, and determining whether to perform the medium access of the terminal by considering only the at least one link expected to perform the medium access. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269388 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING MOBILE DATA QUALITY OVER A NETWORK - A computer-implemented system is disclosed for determining mobile data quality over a network. The system includes one or more processors configured to execute computer program steps, the computer program steps comprising: collecting data from a mobile device; and determining an optimal an available WIFI network or cellular network for data transmission. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269389 | System and Method for Determining an Angle of Arrival in a Wireless Network - Angle of arrival (AoA) in a radio frequency (RF) network having radio devices at unknown positions is determined by using a specially built RF locator device. Any kind of modulation comprising, for example but not limited to, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) symbols can be decoded by the RF locator device using complex correlation. The RF locator device is connected to an antenna array with multiple antenna elements that are switched between DSSS symbols. The RF locator device determines correlation magnitude and angle data of the radio device for further processing. Collecting DSSS symbols with CFO compensated correlation magnitude and phase results from different locations enables electrical beam forming for determining the AoA by sweeping this beam around an angle of view of the antenna array. This AoA determination may be performed on multiple channels and packets to reduce the effects of multi-path propagation. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269390 | CONTROL PLANE PACKET TRAFFIC STATISTICS - There are disclosed methods and apparatus for displaying and viewing control plane statistical data for a network. The method comprises configuring a network configuration, wherein the network configuration comprises a network topology, a device group, and a device, generating a test to test the network under test, and requesting to display and view a statistical data based on a network configuration parameter. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269391 | LOCATION DETERMINATION - A method and apparatus for location determination by a WLAN station is disclosed. The method can include a first WLAN station receiving a packet sent by a second WLAN station, deriving a channel quality metric for a channel between the first WLAN station and the second WLAN station, comparing the channel quality metric to a threshold, and calculating a distance between the first WLAN station and the second WLAN station in an instance in which the channel quality metric satisfies the threshold. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269392 | System and Method for Direct Mobile Communication - Embodiments are provided reducing interference between cellular and direct mobile communication (DMC) links in wireless systems. In embodiment, a method performed by a network controller includes sending, to a second network controller, information of resources for a first set of DMC links between DMC user equipments (UEs). The first set of DMC links is associated with the network controller. The method further includes receiving second information of resources for a second set of DMC links associated with the second network controller. The network controller coordinates with the second network controller the allocation of network resources for the first set of DMC links between the DMC UEs. The network resources comprise cellular and DMC resources. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269393 | Cumulative Route Metrics for Wireless Mesh Network Routing - A wireless network device includes a physical layer module configured to send and receive packets wirelessly. The wireless network device includes a mesh routing module configured to receive a first packet from a second wireless network device via the physical layer module. The first packet includes a metric and a source address. The mesh routing module is further configured to determine a cumulative metric based on (i) the metric from the first packet and (ii) a link metric. The mesh routing module is further configured to transmit a second packet to a third wireless network device via the physical layer module. The second packet includes the cumulative metric. The mesh routing module is further configured to determine the link metric based on (i) a state of charge of a power supply of the wireless network device and (ii) a transmission parameter of the second packet. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269394 | Method for Handling Inter-Radio Access Technology Measurement Requests in a Mobile Telecommunications Device - Apparatus and a method are described for handling inter-radio access technology measurement reports in a radio telecommunications device, the device being operable with a first cellular radio access technology (e.g. UTRAN, E-UTRAN), GERAN and Generic Access Network, the radio telecommunications device being capable of adopting a cellular preferred mode. The method comprises, in the radio telecommunications device, when the radio telecommunications device is in cellular preferred mode and operating with the first cellular radio access technology and the radio telecommunications device is registered with a Generic Access Network Controller that operates as a GERAN network component, and a quality of a signal from the first cellular radio access technology is below a certain threshold and a quality of a signal from the GAN is above a certain threshold and a request has been received to send an inter-RAT measurement report, generating inter-radio access technology measurements and, when there is at least one GERAN cell that satisfies a triggering condition, transmitting a measurement report in respect of the GERAN cell(s) and a measurement report in respect of the generic access network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269395 | MULTIPLE RANK CQI FEEDBACK FOR CELLULAR NETWORKS - Single user and multiuser MIMO transmission in a cellular network may be performed by a base station (eNB) transmitting either one, two, or more transmission layers. A user equipment (UE) receives a reference symbol from the base station. The UE processes the reference symbol with one or more of a plurality of precoding matrices to form a plurality of channel quality indices (CQI). The UE provides feedback to the eNB comprising one or more feedback CQI selected from the plurality of CQI and one or more precoding matrix indicators (PMI) identifying the one or more precoding matrices used to form each of the one or more feedback CQIs for two or more ranks. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269396 | OFDMA WITH ADAPTIVE SUBCARRIER-CLUSTER CONFIGURATION AND SELECTIVE LOADING - A method and apparatus for allocating subcarriers in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system is described. In one embodiment, the method comprises allocating at least one diversity cluster of subcarriers to a first subscriber and allocating at least one coherence cluster to a second subscriber. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269397 | Method for Improving Battery Life and HARQ Retransmissions in Wireless Communications Systems - Methods and apparatus for controlling discontinuous receiver operation in a wireless communication device are disclosed. In an exemplary embodiment, a wireless communication device configured to monitor a downlink signal during a series of regularly scheduled awake intervals and monitor the downlink signal for retransmissions during retransmission-monitoring intervals scheduled at a first predetermined delay from each detected data transmission to the receiver includes a control circuit configured to detect that a first retransmission-monitoring interval overlaps a previously scheduled radio activity during which the receiver is unavailable to monitor the first downlink signal, such as a measurement gap, and to adjust the first retransmission-monitoring interval, add an additional retransmission-monitoring interval, or both, responsive to said detecting. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269398 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A CQI INDEX FROM A USER TERMINAL - A user terminal and a method for transmitting a CQI index from the user terminal to a base station. A method for performing a CQI index conversion so as to have a constant number of bits regardless of the number of bits of a calculated CQI index includes the steps of: calculating the CQI index for a signal received from the base station; converting the calculated CQI index to an one-bit CQI index through delta-sigma modulation; and transmitting the converted one-bit CQI index to the base station. | 09-18-2014 |
20140286178 | COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS USING COMMUNICATION AND ENERGY COSTS - A system, method, apparatus and software are disclosed for data communication within a wireless sensor network comprising a plurality of sensors and a base station, with the sensors organized into a plurality of clusters. Each sensor is to determine a communication cost comprising an amount of power or energy required for the sensor to communicate with all other sensors within its selected cluster, and to select a sensor having a lowest communication cost as a cluster head sensor. When the sensor is the cluster head sensor, it is to determine and transmit a TDMA data transmission schedule to the other sensors within the selected cluster, to receive and aggregate sensor data from these other sensors, to transmit a data transmission request to the base station designating an amount of aggregated data to be transmitted, and to transmit the aggregated data to the base station during a designated time interval. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286179 | HYBRID ROUTERS IN MULTICORE ARCHITECTURES - Technologies are generally described for methods and systems effective to implement hybrid routers in multicore architectures. A first tile may include a processor core, a cache configured to be in communication with the processor core and a router configured to be in communication with the cache. The router may be effective to move data with a packet switching channel or a circuit switching channel. The first tile may include switching logic configured to be in communication with the cache and the router. The switching logic may be effective to receive a routing objective that may relate to energy or delay costs in routing data through the network. The switching logic may select one of the packet switching channel or the circuit switching channel to move the data through the network based on the routing objective. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286180 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MULTIMEDIA COMMUNCIATIONS ACROSS CONVERGENT NETWORKS - The present invention provides for bidirectional or duplex transmission of multimedia content such as live video and/or audio between access devices of a calling party and a called party in a convergent network. The quality of transmission is managed through a convergent communications platform, which periodically tests performance characteristics of network routes in operative communication with the platform, categorizes the network routes based on measured performance metrics, and selects network operators whose network characteristics meet the desired duality parameters of a particular multimedia content to be transmitted (e.g., real time high definition video conference). The management of transmissions is transparent to the end users who will be able to communicate with others regardless of the type of devices or networks the caked parties use or subscribe to. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286181 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for analyzing a wide frequency band with respect to signal power levels in specified narrow frequency bands, detecting narrow band signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level from the narrow band signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold from the average composite wideband power level, detecting narrow band interference according to the adaptive threshold, and configuring a filter to substantially suppress the detected narrow band interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286182 | Reference Signal for 3D MIMO in Wireless Communication Systems - A user equipment device obtains a first measurement using a first CSI-RS sub-resource and a second measurement using a second CSI-RS sub-resource. The user device derives a single CSI-process based on the first and the second measurements and reports the CSI-process to a base station. The user device receives a message from the base station configuring the first and second CSI-RS sub-resources corresponding to the single CSI-process to be reported by the user device. The message from the base station comprises a configuration of the first CSI-RS sub-resource and a separate configuration of the second CSI-RS sub-resource. The configuration of each CSI-RS sub-resource comprises, for the corresponding CSI-RS sub-resource, at least a CSI-RS sub-resource index, a periodicity, and an offset. The user device may alternatively obtain measurements using any number of CSI-RS sub-resources and then derive and report a single CSI-process based on the plurality of measurements. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286183 | Receiver Having Integrated Spectral Analysis Capability - A method of managing traffic in a communications channel includes the steps of receiving a subscriber ID corresponding to a subscriber, performing a spectral analysis on a signal received from the subscriber within a time interval identified by the subscriber ID, and adjusting transmission characteristics of the subscriber based on the spectral analysis. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286184 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNAL FOR REDUCING INTERCELL INTERFERENCE IN MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a method for receiving a Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS) for measuring a channel includes: receiving CSI-RSs on resource elements (REs) in a subframe configured for the CSI-RSs from a base station, wherein if each CSI-RS of the received CSI-RSs is transmitted from each of four or more transmit antenna ports of the base station, at least two REs on which each CSI-RS is received are associated with each of the four or more transmit antenna ports; and transmitting channel state information based on the received CSI-RSs. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286185 | DOWNLINK CHANNEL ESTIMATION METHOD, SYSTEM, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A downlink channel estimation method and system, and a mobile terminal. In the method, a first mobile terminal is located in a central area of a cell, a second mobile terminal is located in an edge area of the cell, and a resource block of the second mobile terminal is adjacent to a resource block of the first mobile terminal, so that the first mobile terminal can use a data signal transmitted from a base station to the second mobile terminal to perform downlink channel estimation, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel estimation, and enhancing the performance of the downlink channel estimation. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286186 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A communication device which can reduce amount of control information, limit interference with other traffics, and prevent an increase in current consumption. In this device, a separation unit separates radio resource allocation information, specific section information and transmission parameter information from a received signal. A specific section information control unit selects a sub-carrier designated by the specific section information to allocate data to be transmitted to the own unit. A channel quality measuring unit uses a pilot signal to measure the channel quality of the selected sub-carrier. A channel quality information creating unit creates channel quality information indicating the measurement results input from the channel quality measuring unit. A multiplexing unit multiplexes the transmission signal with the channel quality information. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286187 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Since OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing), which is a downlink access scheme used for an LTE (Long Term Evolution) communication system, is weak at interference, it is preferable that the number of base stations for transmitting the same E-MBMS (Evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) data be not excessive. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286188 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for measuring interference by a user equipment (UE) in a multi-node system comprising inside a cell a base station and a plurality of nodes that are controlled by the base station, and the user equipment for same. The method comprises: receiving from the base station a node set-specific interference measurement region (NSIR) setting message from a node set that comprises a portion of the nodes from the plurality of nodes; and measuring the interference in a resource region that is indicated by the NSIR setting message, wherein the NSIR setting message is characterized by all of the nodes in the node set comprising information for setting an interference measurement region for transmitting a zero-power channel state information (CSI) reference signal (RS). | 09-25-2014 |
20140286189 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for measuring interference by a user equipment (UE) in a multi-node system comprising inside a cell a base station and a plurality of nodes that are controlled by the base station, and the user equipment for same. The method comprises: receiving from the base station a cell-specific interference measurement setting message; and measuring the interference in a resource region indicated by the cell-specific interference measurement setting message, wherein the cell-specific interference measurement setting message is characterized by all of the nodes in the cell comprising information for setting a cell-specific interference measurement region for transmitting a zero-power channel state information (CSI) reference signal (RS). | 09-25-2014 |
20140293800 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING COMMUNICATION PARAMETER AND FOR COMMUNICATION IN WLAN - A communication parameter determination method, and a WLAN communication method and device, comprising: a base station determines a first communication parameter used by a first mobile terminal for communication in a WLAN, the first communication parameter representing a first waiting time of the first mobile terminal in the WLAN from the time of determining that the channel is idle to the time of starting to communicate, and the first waiting time being less than a second waiting time of a second mobile terminal in the WLAN from the time of determining that the channel is idle to the time of starting to communicate; the base station transmits the determined first communication parameter to the first mobile terminal. Accordingly, the first mobile terminal about to switch from a cellular network to the WLAN receives the first communication parameter transmitted by the base station; and after accessing the WLAN, the first mobile terminal uses the first communication parameter to communicate in the WLAN. The solution provided in an embodiment of the present invention improves the WLAN communication quality for a mobile terminal that has switched from a cellular network to a WLAN. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293801 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING RECEIVED DATA IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for communicating data within a wireless network includes receiving an indication of a measurement type from a wireless communication device and receiving a first wireless transmission pertaining to a first measurement performed by the wireless communication device. The method also includes, in response to the received transmission, obtaining a value of a second measurement of the measurement type. The second measurement is performed by a sensor associated with the base station. In addition, the method includes determining a value of the first measurement based on the received transmission and a value of a second measurement performed by the sensor associated with the base station. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293802 | INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION WITH TDM - Mobile broadband traffic has been exploding in wireless networks resulting in an increase of interferences and reduced operator control. Networks are also becoming more heterogeneous putting additional demand in interference management. Scheduler schedules uplink transmissions from UEs based on a load prediction algorithm that typically assumes worst case. However, UEs do not always use full power granted, and thus, much of granted radio resources are wasted. To address these and other issues, technique(s) to accurately predict/estimate other cell interferences and thermal noise separately and to accurately predict/estimate load utilization probability and variance is(are) described. Inventive estimation technique(s) can be used to schedule UEs to more fully utilize available radio resources, e.g., in TD-scheduling operations. Extended Kalman filtering can be adapted for use in estimation providing low order computational complexity. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293803 | Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission and Multi-User MIMO - MU-MIMO and CoMP have potentials to increase the cell capacity by many folds. Interferences and channel feedback overhead, however, severely limits such potentials. Method of reference signal-based grid of beams (RS-GOB) is described. RS-GOB distributes the effective antennas of a base station into multiple beams, thereby significantly reducing the feedback overhead of CoMP and making effective use of CoMP to turn the interferences into cooperating useful signals. RS-GOB also reduces the need for small HetNet cells, which mitigates the interferences of small HetNet cells on macro cells. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293804 | BACKHAUL NETWORK PERFORMANCE MONITORING USING SEGMENTED ANALYTICS - A system may be configured to monitor traffic associated with a network device; determine a time at which a particular portion of traffic was received by the network device; identify one or more attributes associated with the particular portion of the traffic; determine one or more performance indicators associated with the particular portion of the traffic; and determine that an alert threshold has been met. The determining may be based on at least one of: the one or more attributes or the one or more performance indicators. The system may output, based on determining that the alert threshold has been met, information regarding the time at which the particular portion of the traffic was received by the network device, the one or more attributes, and the one or more performance indicators associated with the particular portion of the traffic. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293805 | METHOD FOR TURNING OFF ROUTERS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND ROUTER IMPLEMENTING THIS METHOD - A method for turning off routers, operating according to a link-state protocol, in a communications network, said network linking a plurality of devices, said method being executed simultaneously over a plurality of routers of the network, includes: a step of initializing; a step of monitoring verifying a list of predefined conditions to be met to allow the turning off of the router; a step of waiting; a step of turning off, including the transmission of a message destined for other routers executing said method to signal the turning off of said router to them; the waiting step being carried out before the turning-off step, the turning-off step being carried out only if no turning-off message originating from other routers is received during the waiting step, if a turning-off message coming from other routers is received during the waiting step then the return to the monitoring step. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293806 | Method and System for Fast Cell Search Using PSYNC Process in a Multimode WCDMA Terminal - Certain aspects of a method and system for a fast cell search using a primary synchronization channel (PSYNC) process in a multimode wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) terminal are provided. A WCDMA frequency search or a global system for mobile communications (GSM) frequency search is performed based on a current radio access technology (RAT), received signal strength indication (RSSI) scan measurements, and PSYNC detection operations. The RSSI scan measurements may be averaged by making multiple measurements during a measurement period. At least part of the PSYNC detection operations may be performed during a remaining portion of the measurement period. WCDMA carrier frequencies may be marked in accordance with the results of the PSYNC detection operations. For GSM, some of the frequencies may be removed from the search based on the PSYNC marking while the remaining search frequencies may be ranked based on results from the RSSI scan measurements. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293807 | System, Method, and Computer Program Product For Creating a Header Detail Record - A system, method, computer program product and computer processor-implemented method of generating a header detail record (HDR) for a hypertext transport protocol (HTTP) data browsing user accessing network resources, may include: receiving, by at least one computer processor, packet data from at least one probe tapping into at least one network element of a data network of a communications services provider, said packet data comprising: header data, and payload data; analyzing said packet data comprising: extracting at least one header detail record (HDR) from said header data and said payload data for all said packet data, and creating said at least one header detail record (HDR). | 10-02-2014 |
20140293808 | WIRELESS RECEIVING SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD - A wireless receiving system includes a packet searching module and a memory module. The packet searching module performs packet searching that includes adopting at least one parameter. The memory module stores the at least one parameter corresponding to a packet as a set of reference parameters. At a predetermined time point, the packet searching module again performs packet searching according to the set of reference parameters stored in the memory module. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293809 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CONTROLLING MAC-LAYER PROTOCOL FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT ID - An apparatus and method for enabling a device-to-device (D2D) communication, despite an identifier (ID) of a target device being unknown are provided. The apparatus may include a target device determining unit to select primary target devices based on relative distance information between a main device and a target device for communication with the main device, and to determine a final target device based on relative distance information between the main device and each of the primary target devices, a transmitter to transmit, to each of the primary target devices, a selection notification message and a relative distance information request message that are generated by the target device determining unit, and a receiver to receive, from each of the primary target devices, a response message corresponding to the selection notification message, and relative distance information used to determine a final target device. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293810 | METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING OPTIMAL INFLUENCIAL PATHS IN A DISTRIBUTED NETWORK FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION - The present disclosure is related to a method for identifying optimal influential paths in a distributed network for transmitting information/request to one or more target nodes. The routing server at the source node identifies one or more target nodes in the network based on information. Thereafter, routing server identifies one or more optimal nodes based on influence value associated with each node in network and determines predicted action that will be performed by the optimal node and transmits the information to each optimal node. Each optimal node performs an action upon receiving the information from the source node. The routing server receives the data related to the operation performed and updates influence value associated with respective nodes. The routing server identifies one or more optimal paths based on one of the influence value being updated and the action performed by each optimal node. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293811 | Method, system and device for determining transport block size - The present invention and its embodiments are made to provide for a feasible solution for determining transport block size in a wireless communication system. The method comprising of selecting plurality of transport block sizes near to the queue size of the user data and calculating the code rate for the plurality of selected transport block sizes and calculating code rate derived from Channel Quality Information (CQI) index. The method further comprising of comparing the code rates of the plurality of selected transport block sizes with the code rate derived from CQI index and filtering the selected transport block sizes having number of zero padding below a threshold value and having code rates equal or less than the code rate derived from CQI index and selecting one transport block for each modulation order from among the filtered transport block sizes which require lower number of Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs) to transmit. The method further comprising of determining one transport block size from among each modulation order by calculating the modulation order derived from CQI index to be used, such that the PRBs of the determined transport block size is less than a threshold value on comparison with the PRBs of other filtered transport block sizes having lower PRBs. The method further comprising of indicating the physical layer to transmit the user data with higher power if the modulation order of the determined transport block size is greater than the modulation order of the calculated modulation order derived from CQI. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293812 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING A RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Techniques and apparatus for efficiently determining the radio link control (RLC) protocol data unit (PDU) size and flexible RLC PDU creation for multi carrier operation are disclosed. An example wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) calculates a maximum amount of data allowed to be transmitted for a current transmission time interval (TTI) for each of a plurality of carriers, and selects an RLC PDU data field size such that each RLC PDU to be multiplexed to a medium access control (MAC) PDU matches a minimum of the maximum amount of data calculated for the carriers. The maximum amount of data may, for example, be calculated based on an applicable current grant for each carrier for the current TTI. The RLC PDU may be generated for the later TTI on a condition that an amount of data in outstanding pre-generated RLC PDUs for a particular logical channel is less than or equal to 4N times the minimum of the maximum amount of data allowed to be transmitted by the applicable current grant for the carriers for the current TTI, where N is a number of activated carriers. The maximum amount of data may be calculated based on a remaining power on each carrier. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293813 | Probing Network Nodes for Optimization - A non-transitory computer readable media having instructions stored thereon that, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to optimize a network that is formed from a plurality of nodes. The instructions cause the processor to execute an order that the plurality of nodes perform a probing operation. The order is typically round robin. The processor receives a request from a client that identifies a next node to perform the probing operation. Based on the request, the processor changes the order so that the next node performs the probing operation after the current node that is performing the probing operation has completed the operation. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293814 | Circuit, System and Method for Communication Between Two Nodes of a Radio Network - A first node of a radio network initiates a mode for finding the range to a second node. The first node transmits to the second node, with the address of the second node, a range finding command, which switches the second node into the range finding mode and controls a sequence. The first node transmits in a transmission time window a first signal, which is received by the second node in an associated reception time window, a first phase value of the first signal being measured. The second node transmits in a transmission time window a second signal, which is received by the first node in an associated reception time window, a second phase value of the second signal being measured. The first frequency is changed by a frequency difference and the second frequency is changed by the frequency difference in a subsequent time window of the sequence. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293815 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Embodiments of the present application disclose a method and an apparatus for obtaining channel state information. The method includes: first, receiving, by a user equipment, at least two channel state information CSI measurement reference resource sets sent by a base station; then, measuring, by the user equipment according to each CSI measurement reference resource set of the at least two channel state information CSI measurement reference resource sets, CSI between the user equipment and a transmission point and/or a transmission point combination corresponding to each CSI measurement reference resource set, and obtaining a feedback mechanism satisfying a requirement of the CSI between the user equipment and the transmission point and/or the transmission point combination; and finally, feeding back, by the user equipment, a measurement result to the base station through the same or different feedback mechanisms. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293816 | System and Method for Tracking a Line Rate Utilization - A system and method for tracking a line rate utilization. An effective throughput is measured for a data stream during a time period. A number of frames in the data stream is counted during the time period. A line rate utilization is determined for the data stream utilizing the number of frames and a size of the frames in response to the time period ending. The line rate utilization is save for communication to one or more users. The line rate utilization is communicated to one or more users. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293817 | MULTI-CARRIER CQI FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS - A radio base station transmits data symbols to a mobile terminal on multiple frequency carriers, e.g., in accordance with the MC-WCDMA or cmda2000 3x air interface protocols. The radio base station instructs the mobile terminal to report channel quality measurements obtained by the terminal for the multiple carriers over the same uplink channel during successive reporting intervals. According to one embodiment, the mobile terminal reports channel quality by receiving data symbols transmitted on a plurality of frequency carriers in a multi-carrier CDMA environment and measuring channel quality for the different frequency carriers. The mobile terminal reports individual ones of the channel quality measurements over the same uplink channel during successive reporting intervals. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293818 | Non-Contiguous Carrier Aggregation - A method of operating a user equipment for measuring non-contiguous carriers comprises: changing a position of a local oscillator to be in the middle of the non-contiguous carriers; measuring the carriers simultaneously; estimating a power level of an interferer in a gap in the non-contiguous carriers which creates image interference; and compensating the measurement dependent on the interferer power level and an image rejection factor. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293819 | DETERMINATION OF DOWNLOAD THROUGHPUT OF WIRELESS CONNECTION WITH COMPOUND PROBES - Technologies are generally described to determine a download throughput of a wireless connection in an environment hosting multiple wired and wireless connections. According to some examples, a compound probe may be transmitted from a source to a wireless destination. Another compound probe may also be transmitted from the source to the wireless destination. The compound probes may include multiple packets without any dispersion gap. Next, an average intra-packet gap (AIPG) and a minimum intra-packet gap (MIPG) may be determined from the first compound probe. Furthermore, another MIPG may be determined from the later compound probe. The download throughput from the source to the wireless destination may be computed from the AIPG and the MIPGs. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293820 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for supporting a measurement of a user equipment, according to one embodiment, comprising the steps of: a second cell deciding at least one measurement resource set with respect to the user equipment, based on subframe setting information of a first cell and/or transmission power information of the first cell; and the second cell transmitting to the user equipment information for indicating the at least one measurement resource set that is decided, wherein the subframe setting information of the first cell can include setting information with respect to a first almost blank subframe (ABS) and a second ABS. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293821 | METHOD OF DETECTING A JAMMING TRANSMITTER AFFECTING A COMMUNICATION USER EQUIPMENT, DEVICE AND USER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM WITH THE USER EQUIPMENT - A method of detecting a jamming transmitter includes the steps of indicating that a communication user equipment is capable of communicating in a cellular code division multiple access based radio network; testing a match of a uniform synchronization signal sequence of a synchronization channel; detecting a power indicator indicative of an unbiased wide band power of a received radio signal strength and comparing the power indicator to a noise floor threshold; and indicating a jamming affection of the communication user equipment in the case where (i) the communication indication is on hold; and (ii) the uniform synchronization sequence of the synchronization channel is not matched in the test, and (iii) the power indicator exceeds the noise floor threshold. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293822 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION, AND USER TERMINAL - A communication control method including a first base station and a second base station having a smaller coverage area than the first base station, comprises: a step A, performed by the second base station, of notifying the first base station of a reference signal transmission power of the second base station; a step B, performed by a user terminal connected to the first base station, of measuring a reference signal received power from the second base station, and then reporting the reference signal received power to the first base station; and a step C, performed by the first base station, of estimating a path loss between the second base station and the user terminal, on the basis of the reference signal transmission power notified from the second base station in the step A and the reference signal received power reported from the user terminal in the step B. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293823 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH FOR EACH USER EQUIPMENT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for estimating an available bandwidth for each User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system comprises: a process of receiving estimated bandwidth information for at least one UE from an enhanced node B; a process of checking whether the estimated bandwidth information is received from a Medium Access Control (MAC) layer constituting said enhanced node B, or received through a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer or a Packet Data Control Protocol (PDCP) layer; a process of updating channel quality information using said estimated bandwidth information if it is checked that said estimated bandwidth information is received through the MAC layer; a process of updating an average value weighted with respect to the number of bytes of the bandwidth served by said enhanced node B using the estimated bandwidth information if it is checked that said estimated bandwidth information is received through the RLC or PDCP layer; and a process of calculating the bandwidth currently available by at least one UE using the updated channel quality information or the average value weighted with respect to the number of the bytes of the served bandwidth, and then transmitting the calculated bandwidth to a server. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293824 | Policy Controller Based Network Statistics Generation - In order to support generation of network statistics, a policy controller ( | 10-02-2014 |
20140301214 | INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY TRANSITION BASED ON QUALITY OF SERVICE EVALUATION - A method for determining whether to allow performance of an inter-radio access technology (IRAT) transition is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device determining a realized quality of service (QoS) for packet switched data traffic on a first radio access technology (RAT); determining whether the realized QoS satisfies a threshold QoS; suspending IRAT transition to a second RAT in an instance in which it is determined that the realized QoS satisfies the threshold QoS; and allowing IRAT transition to the second RAT in an instance in which it is determined that the realized QoS does not satisfy the threshold QoS. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301215 | PACKET INTERCEPTION AND TIMESTAMPING FOR ERROR ESTIMATION IN ACTIVE MEASUREMENT PROTOCOLS - A method in a network device. The method is one of estimating a time delay between when a software timestamp is generated for an active measurement protocol test packet and when the active measurement protocol test packet is transmitted from the network device onto a link. The method includes generating an error estimation packet, generating a software timestamp (ts) for the error estimation packet, and transmitting the error estimation packet toward a network interface. The method also includes intercepting the error estimation packet before it is transmitted from the network device onto the link, and generating an interception timestamp (ti) for the error estimation packet after intercepting the error estimation packet. The time delay is estimated based on a difference between the interception timestamp and the software timestamp. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301216 | UPLINK INTERFERENCE DETECTION USING TRANSMISSION MATRICES - Identifying interference in a cellular network may include creating an interference neighbor list for a target base station that includes a plurality of neighboring base stations, determining a plurality of quiet resource blocks common to the plurality of neighboring base stations and the target base station, and analyzing signals received at the target base station during the plurality of quiet resource blocks. Whether to modify uplink transmission schedules, and the extent of modification, may be determined based on traffic levels. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301217 | SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE - A simultaneous transmit and receive (STR) technology is described. The eNB is configured with a downlink centric measurement threshold and an uplink centric measurement threshold which increase overall capacity in the wireless cellular network. A signal measurement command is transmitted from the eNB to the UE instructing the UE to take a signal quality measurement. The signal quality measurement is received from the UE at the eNB. It is determined whether the signal quality measurement is greater than the downlink centric measurement threshold and whether the signal quality measurement is greater than the uplink centric measurement threshold. The downlink centric measurement threshold, the uplink centric measurement threshold, and the DL/UL ratio are configured to increase capacity in the wireless cellular network through selective use of STR | 10-09-2014 |
20140301218 | STATISTICAL ANALYSIS AND PROMPTING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE TERMINAL INTERNET TRAFFIC - The present disclosure provides a statistical analysis and prompting method and system for mobile terminal Internet traffic. The method comprises: a mobile terminal obtaining mobile terminal Internet traffic usage data from an operator in real time; monitoring local mobile terminal Internet traffic usage data in real time; performing synchronization processing on the mobile terminal Internet traffic usage data obtained from the operator and the local mobile terminal Internet traffic usage data monitored in real time, to obtain real-time Internet traffic usage data; using the real-time Internet traffic usage data to calculate an estimated number of days with the traffic still being available, and prompting information regarding the estimated number of days to the user in real time. The effects of the present disclosure comprise that trend analysis can be performed on the data on the Internet traffic already used by the mobile terminal to obtain an estimated number of days for the remaining traffic, and the result can be prompted to the user in real time, so that the user can know the availability of the traffic in time, thereby achieving the objective of reasonably allocating and fully taking advantage of traffic resources. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301219 | WIRELESS NETWORK LOCATION TECHNIQUES - Improved wireless network location techniques are described. In one embodiment, for example, an apparatus may comprise circuitry and a communications management module for execution on the circuitry to send a timing announcement element comprising a sounding preamble count parameter indicating a number of sounding preambles, send a null data element comprising a number of sounding preambles equal to the sounding preamble count parameter, receive timing reply information comprising the number of sounding preambles equal to the sounding preamble count parameter, and determine a time of flight based on the timing reply information. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301220 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE CONTROL IN A MULTI-CELL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus disclosed maximize the capacity of serving cells and minimize inter-cell interferences due to power emission from serving cells in a multi-carrier, multi-cell communication system. The control methods and apparatus take into account various factors such as cell configuration, frequency reuse, geometry and path-loss information, transmission priority, subchannel configuration, feedback from other cells, or any combination thereof, and produce signals that control the transmission power levels and the modulation and coding of transmitted signals. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301221 | Pass-Through Test Device - Method and test device for performing testing in a network conveying a plurality of traffic flows. At the test device, receiving traffic flows through a first interface of the test device on a first segment and forwarding the received plurality of traffic flows towards a second segment of the network through a second interface. At the test device, receiving a test request directed to an address of a test module and, in response to the test request, causing a sequence of proprietary traffic to be injected on the second segment. A reprogrammable test device comprising a networked test module at least in part on a reprogrammable partition of a programmable logic device and a reprogramming module, on a static partition of the programmable logic device, for reprogramming at least a portion of the reprogrammable partition implementing the test module in accordance with reprogramming data received at the test device. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301222 | NETWORK ANALYZING SYSTEM, AS WELL AS NETWORK ANALYZING APPARATUS AND NETWORK ANALYZING PROGRAM, AS WELL AS DATA PROCESSING MODULE AND DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM - The present invention relates to a network analyzing system that performs analyzing for a network. The network analyzing system includes one or a plurality of data processing modules and a network analysis apparatus, the network analysis apparatus includes a unit for accommodating the data processing modules, a unit for holding data-to-be-analyzed, a unit for storing data processing definition information that defines steps that carry out the processing of the data-to-be-analyzed using the data processing modules, a unit for causing the data processing modules to carry out data processing based on the data processing definition information to obtain a data processing result, and each data processing module includes a unit connecting to the network analysis apparatus, and a unit for carrying out data processing in accordance with a request. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301223 | ESTIMATION OF DELAY PROBABILITY AND SKEW TIME OF DATA PACKET TRANSMITTED OVER A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present subject matter discloses systems and methods for data transfer in communication networks. In one implementation, the method comprises determining a skew time based in part on a maximum skew time of the communication network and a probability of a data packet being delayed during transmission over the communication network. The method further includes detecting at least one missing data packet transmission and initiating retransmission of the at least one missing data packet after a time interval exceeding the determined skew time. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301224 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING SMALL CELL MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for improving small cell measurement in a wireless communication system. The method includes configuring a plurality of offset values for Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurement on a small cell. The method also includes selecting some of the plurality of offset values to determine a triggering of the measurement report of the small cell. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301225 | NON-CONGESTIVE LOSS IN HSPA CONGESTION CONTROL - A method and a network node for increased utilization of a transport network link over a transport network of a HSPA system. The method comprises detecting a data packet loss in receiving a data packet flow, and detecting data delay information of data packets as received. The method also comprises determining if the detected data packet loss comprise non-congestive data packet loss, based on the detected data packet loss and the detected data delay information. In addition, the method comprises, when the detected data packet loss comprises non-congestive data packet loss, for a pre-determined time period, omitting to perform a congestion action affecting the data packet flow. By determining whether a data packet loss is non-congestive or not, an unnecessary reduction of the bitrate over the transport network can be omitted. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301226 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NETWORK MONITORING AND PACKET INSPECTION - An apparatus and a method for network monitoring and packet inspection capable of performing network monitoring and packet inspection in real time in a network system are disclosed. In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, the apparatus for monitoring and packet inspection includes: a controller configured to transmit and receive an open flow protocol message and perform a network control; and a switch configured to include a flow table for data transfer and a security channel for connection with the controller, wherein the flow table includes target information which is information on a flow on which a user performs the monitoring and packet inspection. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301227 | WIRELESS ARRAY DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING WIRELESS ARRAYS HAVING MAGNETOMETERS - A wireless array for providing access to a network is provided. The wireless array includes at least two transceivers in signal communication with a client. A magnetometer of the wireless array provides orientation information relating to an orientation of the wireless array relative to a magnetic field. A controller of the wireless array is in signal communication with the transceivers and the magnetometer. The controller manages the communications exchanged via the transceivers and receives the orientation information provided by the magnetometer. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301228 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses are provided for Device-to-Device (D2D) communication in a wireless communication system. A terminal receives a D2D communication initiation message from a base station. The terminal measures strength of a received signal on a radio resource predetermined for use in the D2D communication. The terminal transmits a measurement report of the strength of the received signal to the base station. The terminal receives allocation of a resource in the radio resource for transmitting a discovery signal to another terminal for the D2D communication from the base station. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301229 | Method of Handling Measurement Capability and Related Communication Device - A method of handling measurement capability for a mobile device capable of communicating with a network through a plurality of component carriers in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a measurement command from the network, and performing an inter-frequency measurement without measurement gap configured to any of the plurality of component carriers according to the measurement command, when the mobile device receives data on less than all of the plurality of component carriers. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301230 | Method of Handling Measurement Capability and Related Communication Device - A method of handling measurement capability for a mobile device capable of communicating with a network through a plurality of component carriers in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises sending a capability information message indicating a component carrier capability of the mobile device to the network, wherein the component carrier capability indicates the number of the plurality of component carriers, performing an inter-frequency measurement either on a first component carrier of the plurality of component carriers or on all of the plurality of component carriers, wherein the inter-frequency measurement is performed on the first component carrier when a measurement gap is configured to the first component carrier by the network and the inter-frequency measurement is performed on all of the plurality of component carriers when the measurement gap is configured to all of the plurality of component carriers by the network. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301231 | Providing Enhanced CSI Coverage by Reporting the Same Measure in Multiple Sub-Frames - The application relates to channel state feedback reporting in wireless communication networks and in particular to modifications of the procedure for reporting CSI as specified by section 7.2 of 3GPP TS 36.213 V10.3.0. and the corresponding RRC protocol as specified by 3GPP TS 36.331 V10.2.0. The current cycle for CSI measurement and reporting is such that the UE performs separate CSI measurements for each report. However, the coverage area of CSI measurement reporting is lower than other uplink reporting such as e.g. ACK/NACK on PUCCH which supports subframe repetition, leading to an imbalance. Therefore, it is rather clear that it is highly beneficial to support coverage extension for CSI reports. The issue then arises as to how to realize the CSI coverage enhancement on top of existing/evolving CSI reporting framework. The application proposes to realize said CSI coverage enhancement by reporting ( | 10-09-2014 |
20140301232 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CSI CALCULATION AND REPORTING - A method of measuring Channel State Information (CSI) in a multiple input/multiple output (MIMO) communication system including at least one base station (eNodeB) and at least one User Equipment (UE), the method including: receiving a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS) carried in a sub-frame of a radio frame of the communication system at the at least one UE from the at least one eNodeB over at least one downlink. channel therebetween; extracting CSI-RS Resource Elements (RE) from the CSI-RS sub-frame; and using the extracted CSI-RS REs to perform downlink channel estimations for active pairs of receiving and transmitting antennas of the UE and the eNodeB respectively to derive the CSI. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301233 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control method is used in a mobile communication system that supports MDT (minimization of drive test). The communication control method has: a step (A) wherein a user terminal, which has established a connection with abase station, location information indicating the location of the user terminal to the base station based on an instruction from the base station; and a step (B) wherein the base station receiving the location information from the user terminal measures the throughput of communication with the user terminal. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301234 | TERMINAL, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal that communicates with a base station monitors a physical downlink control channel that is arranged in a physical downlink control channel region and that specifies transmission of broadcast information, obtains higher layer control information that specifies monitoring in an extended physical downlink control channel region, which is different from the physical downlink control channel region, and, in a case where the higher layer control information has been obtained, monitors an extended physical downlink control channel that is arranged in the extended physical downlink control channel region and that specifies the transmission of the broadcast information instead of the physical downlink control channel arranged in the physical downlink control channel region. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301235 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and apparatus of controlling In-Device Coexistence interference in a wireless communication system are described. The present invention comprises receiving measurement configuration information, comprising an IDC triggering threshold, from a base station; performing measurement considering IDC influence in a serving cell and measurement not considering IDC influence in a neighbor cell based on the measurement configuration information; triggering the IDC event if a difference between a result of the measurement considering IDC influence and a result of the measurement not considering IDC influence is greater than the IDC triggering threshold; and transmitting measurement report information, comprising IDC indication, to the base station. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301236 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM TO MINIMIZE POST PROCESSING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - In the method of the invention said network traffic is monitored by means of descriptive metadata, said descriptive metadata is outputted by a Descriptive Metadata Interface of a Deep Packet Inspection, or DPI, deployment of a network and said descriptive metadata contains verbatim packet fields and accounting information. It is characterised in that it comprises correlating at least part of said descriptive metadata with information included in said descriptive metadata, centralized signatures and external data sources in order to enrich said descriptive metadata. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301237 | METHOD FOR ACQUIRING INFORMATION ON OCCUPIED CHANNEL OF DEVICE WHICH SUBSCRIBES TO INFORMATION SERVICE IN TELEVISION WHITE SPACE BAND - Provided is a method for acquiring information on an occupied channel of an apparatus (hereinafter, “information service apparatus”) which subscribes to an information service in order to allocate a channel to an apparatus (hereinafter, “management service apparatus”), which is performed by a management apparatus, and comprises: transmitting, to the information service apparatus, an occupied channel query request message for query of information about one or more channels (hereinafter, “occupied channels”) occupied by the information service apparatus; and receiving, from the information service apparatus, an occupied channel query response message including the information about the occupied channels, wherein the occupied channel query request message includes an ID of the information service apparatus and information about a measurement period of the occupied channels, and the information service apparatus and the management service apparatus may be TVWS devices. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301238 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for measuring channel quality indicator in a wireless communication system. User equipment receives, from a base station, at least one of a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) which is cell-specifically transmitted and a channel state information reference signal (CSI RS). The user equipment also receives, from the base station, a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) which is user equipment-specifically transmitted in an enhanced physical downlink control channel (e-PDCCH) region constituted in a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) region. The terminal measures the CQI based on either at least one of the CRS and the CSI RS or the DMRS. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301239 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION, AND USER TERMINAL - A mobile communication method for a mobile communication method that includes UE supporting MDT (minimization of drive tests), and a network for communication with the UE, the method including: a step in which, after a UE has been selected to collect measurement data in an MDT, the UE receives a Logged Measurement Configuration from the network; and a step in which the UE carries out a measurement process on the network, in accordance with the Logged Measurement Configuration from the network. The Logged Measurement Configuration includes Trace information relating to the network entity that selected the UE to collect measurement data. | 10-09-2014 |
20140307565 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TV WHITE SPACE SPECTRUM SENSING - A spectrum sensor detects the presence of incumbent signals in the television-band. The spectrum sensor can detect digital Advanced Television Systems Committee (ATSC) signals below a −114 dBm signal level and wireless microphone signals below a −110 dBm signal level with false detection rates less than 10%. A radio module receives radio-frequency signals and produces an intermediate-frequency signal reflecting signal received in a selected television channel. A baseband processor module receives the intermediate-frequency signal, digitizes it, and processes the digital data to detecting whether an incumbent signal is present in the selected channel. The processing may include using pilot detection based on power spectrum thresholding or statistic characteristic extraction to detect ATSC signals. The processing may also include using power spectrum thresholding or covariance based signal detection to detect wireless microphone signals. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307566 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIR ESTIMATION USING TIME MULTIPLEXED PILOTS AND TPC COMMANDS - Methods and apparatus for improving amplitude estimation of a received signal in a wireless communication system is provided. Aspects of the methods and apparatus relate to investigating estimation of signal-to-noise (SNR) of the signal. To estimate SNR of the signal, a user equipment (UE) combines previous pilot amplitude measurements and the present pilot amplitude measurement along with received transmit power control (TPC) commands. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307567 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA IN SUPPORT OF MULTI-SUBFRAME SCHEDULING - A method for transmitting HARQ for uplink data in support of multi-frame scheduling is provided. The method includes a UE receiving a multi-subframe scheduling uplink grant signaling and PHICH information sent from a base station; for one uplink subframe, the UE processes parameters of uplink transmission according to uplink grant signaling which schedules a SHARQ process of the scheduled uplink subframe and a relative position of a PHICH channel; and the UE sends new uplink data, retransmitting data of the SHARQ to which the uplink subframe belongs, or currently does not send uplink data in the uplink subframe. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307568 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TESTING THE BEAMFORMING PERFORMANCE OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Systems and techniques relating to beamforming testing for wireless communication are described. A described technique includes controlling a first wireless device to deactivate or activate a beamforming mode, the first device being configured to selectively use the beamforming mode to transmit data over multiple antennas; causing the first device to send a first portion of data traffic to a second wireless device via a wireless channel while the beamforming mode is deactivated; measuring first throughput values of the first portion of data traffic while the beamforming mode is deactivated; causing the first device to send a second portion of data traffic to the second device via the wireless channel while the beamforming mode is activated; measuring second throughput values of the second portion of the data traffic while the beamforming mode is activated; and producing a test result based on a comparison of the first and second throughput values, and predetermined criteria. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307569 | ADAPTIVE DATA INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - Real-time selection of interference cancellation schemes based on transmission parameters and amount of resource overlap between the desired payload and the interfering payload. Codeword level interference cancellation may be performed where the signal quality of the interfering signal indicates that the interfering payload will be decoded correctly. When performed, codeword level interference cancellation may be monitored to determine if decoding the interfering payload is converging. Other interference cancellation schemes may be selected based on the signal quality of the interfering signal or non-converging decode of the interfering payload. The number of iterations for iterative decoding in codeword level interference cancellation may be dynamically selected. The decoder output (e.g., soft bits) may be used to perform interference cancellations before the decoder is fully converged. Iterative decoding may be performed in multiple passes and soft decision output form one pass may be used to initialize the decoder for a subsequent pass. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307570 | PORTABLE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS FOR COMMUNICATION - A portable device and a method for transmitting signals at maximum data transmission rate are disclosed herein. The method includes checking minimum transmission power levels of first and the second transmission signals to prevent interrupted transmissions; determining the power levels of the first and the second transmission signals having the maximum data transmission rate based on the minimum transmission power levels and highest transmission power levels satisfying the specific absorption rate (SAR) regulations according to a stored SAR table; transmitting the first and the second transmission signals at the respective determined power levels using a main antenna; and transmitting the second transmission signal using an auxiliary antenna. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307571 | METHOD TO OPTIMIZE THE COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS BETWEEN AN ACCESS POINT AND AT LEAST ONE CLIENT DEVICE - A method to optimize the communication on a channel between an access point and at least one client device, said channel being characterized by a center frequency and a bandwidth, comprises: establishing a connection on a first channel according to a first center frequency and a first bandwidth; exchanging data through this first channel between the access point and the client device; monitoring a first interference level on the first channel; the access point, while the data are exchanged, executes: informing the client device to switch to a second channel having a different center frequency and/or a different bandwidth; determining a second interference level on the second channel; comparing the first interference level with the second interference level; deciding to switch back or keep the second channel based on the comparison. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307572 | Powerline Interference Indication And Mitigation For DSL Transceivers - The present disclosure outlines mechanisms, systems, methods, techniques and algorithms that gateway devices and powerline communication (PLC) networks can follow to mitigate adverse effects from the aforementioned inter-network interference. Although the present disclosure provides implementation details for G.hn and VDSL2, the mechanisms, systems, methods, techniques and algorithms described herein are equally applicable to other similar technologies. Therefore, when referring to non-implementation specific systems, methods, techniques and algorithms the term PLC is used to refer to a powerline network and the term customer premises equipment (CPE) is used to refer to a home-gateway device. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307573 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING DATA-PATH IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for optimizing a data-path by a source Base Station (BS) in a mobile communication network includes determining whether a tunnel among new BSs is set up while tracking a data-flow for a Mobile Station (MS), if the tunnel among the new BSs is set up, determining whether there is a bounce-back, if there is at least one bounce-back, transmitting a first message for detecting a root of an arbitrary bounce-back among the at least one bounce-back and setting up a short-cut tunnel to other end of the arbitrary bounce-back, and after transmitting the first message, receiving a second message including bounce-back root information indicating the root of the arbitrary bounce-back from the other end of the arbitrary bounce-back. Other various embodiments including a source BS, a target BS, and a backhaul network are also disclosed. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307574 | COMMUNICATION CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD AND ELECTRONIC APPARATUS SUPPORTING THE SAME - A communication connection control method is provided. The method includes collecting a wireless access point-related signal relating to a wireless environment of a wireless access point, determining whether the wireless access point-related signal is in a state having a value lower than or equal to a pre-configured value, performing a wireless communication performance evaluation of a system including a communication network connected to the wireless access point according to a result of the determining, and performing a control to deactivate a communication connection based on the wireless access point according to a result of the wireless communication performance evaluation. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307575 | ENHANCING A-GPS LOCATION ACCURACY AND YIELD WITH LOCATION MEASUREMENT UNITS AND NETWORK TIMING MEASUREMENTS - A system and method for determining the location of a mobile device. One or more location measurement units (LMUs) or components may be requested to provide timing relationship information from a respective cell site. These LMUs may then be tasked to measure uplink times of arrival of signals received by the LMUs from a target mobile device. A response message from the target mobile device may be received, the response message having reference epoch frame information whereby a Global Positioning System (GPS) time estimate at the reference epoch that the target mobile device used to make GPS satellite measurements is determined as a function of the requested timing relationship information. Satellite information may then be determined using the determined GPS time estimate, and a location of the mobile device performed using this satellite information. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307576 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT METHOD - To increase the number of CSI-RSs for interference measurement to improve interference measurement accuracy, a first reference signal for channel state measurement and a second reference signal for interference measurement are assigned to reference signal resources defined for transmission of the first reference signal, and a mobile terminal apparatus that supports both the first reference signal and the second reference signal is notified of pattern information to identify an assignment pattern of the first reference signal and the second reference signal. A second mobile terminal apparatus that supports the first reference signal and that does not support the second reference signal is notified of pattern information to identify an assignment pattern of the first reference signal, and of assignment information indicating that resources assigned the second reference signal are assigned a third reference signal of zero power for channel state measurement. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307577 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND USER TERMINAL - The present invention is designed to provide a radio communication system, an interference measurement method, a radio base station apparatus, and a user terminal whereby highly accurate interference measurement is possible. A radio communication system according to the present invention includes a user terminal and a radio base station apparatus that is connected to the user terminal, and, in this radio communication system: the radio base station apparatus has: a determining section that determines a subband pattern for interference measurement; and a transmission section that transmits a reporting signal to indicate the determined subband pattern to the user terminal; and the user terminal has: a receiving section that receives the reporting signal and acquires the subband pattern; and | 10-16-2014 |
20140313908 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO REDUCE RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (RRM) RELATED SIGNALING IN MACHINE-TO-MACHINE (M2M) COMMUNICATIONS - System and method for reducing signaling overhead related to scheduling of uplink and downlink radio resources to wireless devices (e.g., sensors or Machine-to-Machine (M2M) devices) that are primarily stationary in a cellular network. Because these wireless devices are non-moving, time-frequency channel conditions have a much lower variance for them as compared to other mobile devices in the network. Hence, the (semi)stationary channel can be estimated over time with the help of statistical methods and machine learning techniques, and stationary devices can be then instructed to stop reporting uplink and/or downlink channel condition related information to the network until further notice. When performance degradation is noticed by the base station, the scheduler may instruct the device to resume its channel condition reporting. As a byproduct of this solution, the energy consumed within such stationary terminals is reduced due to significant reductions in the number of channel measurements, their processing, and reporting. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313909 | MONITORING OF CHANNEL STABILITY AND INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The stability of a channel in a wireless network is evaluated at a node. Upon transmitting a packet from the node on a network channel, a first counter associated with the channel is incremented. Upon receiving an acknowledgment packet responsive to the transmitted packet, a second counter associated with the channel is incremented. A stability metric for the channel is computed based on values stored in the first and second counters. Additionally, interference on a channel of the network is measured at a node. Upon determining that no packet is received during a predetermined time-period on the channel, a received signal strength (RSS) is measured on the channel at an end of the predetermined time-period. Alternatively, upon determining that a packet is received during the predetermined time-period on the channel, the RSS is measured on the channel following completion of the transmission of the packet on the channel. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313910 | COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE DETECTION, TRACKING, AND AVOIDANCE - A method of, and a wireless transceiver and/or system for, detecting coexistence interference are described. The method includes receiving, by an antenna connected to a first wireless transceiver, a wireless signal including a first signal substantially within a first frequency band from one or more first wireless transmitters; acquiring measurement α of a wideband signal, the wideband signal being a wired signal corresponding to the wireless signal received by the antenna; acquiring measurement β of a narrowband signal, the narrowband signal being the result of mixing and filtering the wideband signal; and determining, based on measurements α and β, a level of coexistence interference between the first signal and a second signal substantially within a second frequency band substantially contiguous with the first frequency band, the second signal being transmitted by one or more second wireless transmitters collocated with the first wireless transceiver. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313911 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BASIC SERVICE SET AREA - An apparatus and method for controlling a BSS area are disclosed. The apparatus includes a generation unit, a coordinate extraction unit, a calculation unit, a path loss calculation unit, a characteristic classification unit, a transmitted signal strength calculation unit, and a control unit. The generation unit receives SSIDs, and generates a collected device list. The coordinate extraction unit extracts the coordinates of an SSID corresponding to a specific location beacon device. The calculation unit calculates a straight-line distance between the specific location beacon device and another location beacon device. The path loss calculation unit calculates a measured path loss value. The characteristic classification unit classifies the characteristic of a link. The transmitted signal strength calculation unit calculates transmitted signal strength. The control unit performs control so that a location beacon device other than the specific location beacon device is prevented from operating in a BSS area. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313912 | Configuration of Interference Averaging for Channel Measurements - The present disclosure relates to a method for determining CSI in a user terminal of a wireless communication network. The method comprises receiving ( | 10-23-2014 |
20140313913 | MONITORING BREATHING VIA SIGNAL STRENGTH IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods are disclosed for the use of sensor links in a network to estimate the breathing rate of a breathing subject within a structure, estimate the location of the subject within the structure, and detect if the subject is breathing. The structure may be a bed, a building, or a room in the building. The received signal strength of the sensor links is obtained and is then used in various breathing models to determine the breathing rate estimation, the location estimation, and the breathing detection. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313914 | Coordinated Access and Backhaul Networks - A communications network comprises performance determination circuitry and link control circuitry. The performance determination circuitry is operable to determine performance of a microwave backhaul link between a first microwave backhaul transceiver and a second microwave backhaul transceiver. The microwave backhaul link backhauls traffic of a mobile access link. The link control circuitry is operable to, in response to an indication from the performance determination circuitry that the performance of the microwave backhaul link has degraded, adjust one or more signaling parameters used for the mobile access link. The link control circuitry is operable to, in response to the indication that the performance of the microwave backhaul link has degraded, adjust one or more signaling parameters used for the backhaul link in combination with the adjustment of the parameter(s) of the access link. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313915 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING MESSAGES AMONG EVOLVED NODE BS IN COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for supporting a CoMP communication by an eNB of a mobile communication system. The method includes: receiving a channel measurement report relating to at least one transmission channel from a UE; and transmitting channel feedback information including information of interference with surrounding eNBs performing the CoMP communication on the at least one transmission channel, to a central controller, based on the received channel measurement report. In the method, adjacent cells can cooperate to transmit data through a CoMP transmission for a UE located in a cell boundary area in a cellular mobile communication system. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313916 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING BROADCASTING DATA BY USING MMT IN DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving broadcasting data in a digital broadcasting system are provided. The method includes analyzing a media transmission characteristic of a moving picture experts group (MPEG) media transport (MMT) package, setting digital video broadcasting generic stream encapsulation (DVB GSE) based on the analyzed media transmission characteristic, and transmitting an MMT packet comprising the broadcasting data constituting the MMT package using the DVB GSE. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313917 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method for deciding a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) connection method or a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connection method and transmitting/receiving data includes the operations of transmitting data to a second electronic device in a UDP method, receiving feedback information about reception of the data, from the second electronic device, and transmitting partial data of the data, the partial corresponding to the feedback information in a TCP method or the UDP method. The feedback information includes information about the partial data failing in reception among the data. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313918 | WIRELESS LINE USAGE STATUS MONITORING METHOD AND DEVICE - For monitoring a wireless line usage status more effectively, a mobile station extracts a synchronizing signal of each of frames received from a plurality of base stations and a known signal transmitted together with transmission data within a time slot in which the transmission data are included but not transmitted within a time slot in which the transmission data are not included. The mobile station then measures a reception power of the synchronizing signal and a reception power of the known signal for each base station. And the mobile station determines a usage status of a wireless line of each base station based on the reception power of the synchronizing signal and the reception power of the known signal. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313919 | Methods and Devices for Transmission Line Analysis - Improved diagnostics of transmission line noise are enabled by adapting DSL equipment to make measurements of quiet line noise also in the transmit bands, so that noise can be measured at both ends for the same frequency or frequency bands. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313920 | METHOD FOR REPORTING A MEASUREMENT REPORT OF A MEASUREMENT EVENT - The present invention discloses a method for reporting a measurement report of a measurement event, including: determining that a measurement event is generated in a user equipment UE in an activated state of discontinuous reception DRX mode; judging whether a first time to trigger corresponding to the measurement event is valid when it is determined that there is a measurement event generated; using, when it is judged that the first time to trigger is valid, the first time to trigger to time the measurement event; using, when it is judged that the first time to trigger is invalid, a second time to trigger to time the measurement event, such that the UE is in next one or next several activated states of DRX mode after the generation of the measurement event. The present invention can improve a success rate of mobility handover between cells or wireless link quality. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313921 | METHODS FOR ROBUST WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FOR NODES LOCATED IN VEHICLES - A communication method for a wireless communication network in a vehicle is disclosed where the network includes a plurality of sensor nodes and a receiving node. The method includes wirelessly transmitting first sensor data from a first sensor node and second sensor data from a second sensor node using first and second frequency channels, and receiving the first and second sensor data at the receiving node. The method can include rearranging the order of transmitting sensor data, and aggregating sensor data at the sensor nodes. The method can include testing the quality of the wireless links; and using the links with the best quality whether indirect or direct links. The receiving node can simultaneously receive data from more than one node using different frequencies. The nodes can transmit data in parallel using different frequencies. The network can include helper nodes. The wireless communication network can be designed as a tree. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313922 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING DISTANCE IN A WI-FI NETWORK - A method and apparatus for improving the accuracy of a round trip time (RTT) estimate between a first device and a second device are disclosed. The method involves calculating an acknowledgement correction factor and a unicast correction factor. These correction factors are used to compensate for symbol boundary time errors resulting from multipath effects. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313923 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL MEASUREMENT AND METHOD OF PROVIDING INFORMATION FOR CELL MEASUREMENT - A method of providing information for cell measurements. A first cell configures a subframe for performing a first measurement with respect to a first cell. A first position performing the first measurement is different from a second position performing a second measurement with respect to a second cell. The method includes transmitting, from the first cell to a user equipment (UE), first pattern information indicating the first position and second pattern information indicating the second position. A first subframe corresponding to the first pattern information is included in non-Almost Blank Subframe (ABS) subframes of the first cell, and a second subframe corresponding to the second pattern information is included in ABS subframes of the first cell. The ABS subframes of the first cell are configured as a first subframe at each of 8 subframes of the first cell. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313924 | Selecting A Receiving Antenna In A Wireless Local Area Network - The disclosure involves selecting a receiving antenna in a wireless local area network, comprises: testing each antenna in an antenna array to obtain an antenna quality parameter of each antenna corresponding to a client Station, and determining an optimal receiving antenna corresponding to said Station according to the antenna quality parameter of each antenna corresponding to the Station; setting the optimal receiving antenna corresponding to said Station as the receiving antenna upon receiving a notification transmission message transmitted by said Station. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313925 | MEASURING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for transmitting information for measuring a terminal by a first transmission point among a plurality of transmission points which use identical time division duplex (TDD) settings in a wireless communication system. The method is an information transmitting method and includes a step of transmitting a subframe set for measurement to the terminal, wherein the subframe set is determined from first and second pieces of information related to a change of the TDD setting. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321294 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INDICATING LINK QUALITY - A method for indicating communication link quality by an electronic device is described. The method includes tracking local link quality information corresponding to a local receive link between the electronic device and a neighboring device. The method also includes receiving a request to indicate a link quality. The method further includes indicating the link quality. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321295 | POWER COMMUNICATIONS MONITOR FOR POWER LINE CARRIER AND AUDIO TONE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus for monitoring and measuring analog signal levels, current and reflected power (SWR) in an electric utility substation environment. The apparatus includes selective measurement capabilities for at least five individual frequencies, respectively, and includes programmable event recording and remote alarms. The apparatus will provide data to support in-band spectral analysis of recorded events, and can be located at any point along an associated communication path. The apparatus is non-intrusive and will not affect any existing signals present on an associated communication path. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321296 | Methods and Devices for Mitigating Interference - A method includes receiving a signal including a two-dimensional signal pattern in a time-frequency representation, wherein the two-dimensional signal pattern includes a first reference signal at a predetermined first position in the two-dimensional signal pattern and at least one second reference signal at a predetermined second position in the two-dimensional signal pattern. The first reference signal includes cell identification information of a target cell of a cellular radio system and the at least one second reference signal includes cell identification information of at least one interfering cell of the cellular radio system. The method further includes determining a first noise covariance measure based on the first reference signal, determining at least one second noise covariance measure based on the at least one second reference signal, and mitigating an interference included in the received signal based on the first noise covariance measure and the at least one second noise covariance measure. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321297 | DIRECT LINK SETUP MECHANISMS FOR WIRELESS LANs - A client station including a communication circuit to communicate, via an infrastructure mode, with an access point in a basic service set; identify, based on signals transmitted by the access point, a plurality of client stations in the basic service set capable of communicating via a direct link setup mode; and during a predetermined time period, communicate, via the direct link setup mode, with the plurality of client stations; and a control circuit to, during the predetermined time period, determine strength of signals received from the plurality of client stations via the direct link setup mode, determine highest supportable data rates for communicating with the plurality of client stations via the direct link setup mode, and select, based on (i) the strength of the signals and (ii) the highest supportable data rates, one or more of the plurality of client stations for communicating via the direct link setup mode. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321298 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR JOINTLY OPTIMIZING WAN AND LAN NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - Described are systems and methods for jointly optimizing Wide Area Network (WAN) and Local Area Network (LAN) network communications. In one embodiment, a management device communicatively interfaced with a WAN and a LAN includes a collection module to collect LAN information from the LAN and WAN information from the WAN; an analysis module to jointly analyze the collected WAN information and the collected LAN information to identify an operational condition; and an implementation module to initiate a management event responsive to the operational condition being identified. In one embodiment, the management event includes generating and transmitting a diagnostics report responsive to a fault being identified. The management device may further generate and execute instructions to remedy the diagnosed fault. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321299 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CHANNEL QUALITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for determining channel quality in a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving Channel Quality Information (CQI) from a receiver; generating a channel quality reference value by correcting the received CQI using first resource use/nonuse information received from a scheduler that indicates whether an adjacent cell used resources at a previous time, and received signal power information measured in the adjacent cell; and determining a channel quality value at a current time using the generated channel quality reference value and second resource use/nonuse information received from the scheduler that indicates whether an adjacent cell uses resources at the current time. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321300 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - The device for controlling a wireless access point comprises: a grouping unit which groups wireless access points which use the same channel, by using channel use information received from the wireless access points; a map generator which computes each received signal strength value of the grouped wireless access points and each output strength value of the grouped wireless access points; an extractor which extracts a wireless access point having the highest received signal strength value among the grouped wireless access points, if interference occurs between said grouped wireless access points; and an optimal output strength value-calculator which computes a corrected output strength value by using the received signal strength value of the extracted wireless access point, a threshold value of predetermined received signal strength, and a currently used output strength value between said grouped wireless access points. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321301 | SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - A semiconductor device capable of determining plural transfer speeds with a small-scale circuit, and an information processing system having the semiconductor device are provided. The semiconductor device has a frequency determining circuit that receives a data signal on which plural transfer speeds can be set and that determines a transfer speed of the data signal. The frequency determining circuit latches the data signal at each of plural timings continuing with a predetermined interval, detects how many times a data switching occurs consecutively, based on the latched plural data, and determines the transfer speed of the data signal from the result of the detection. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321302 | MOBILE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DATA SYNCHRONIZATION - A mobile device is provided, which includes a modem processor and an application processor. The modem processor determines the channel quality between the mobile device and a wireless communication network. The modem processor calculates a counting value every time when determining the channel quality. The modem processor determines the overhead for data transmission between the mobile device and the wireless communication network according to the counting value. The modem processor determines the overhead to be low when the counting value reaches a preset value. The modem processor reduces the time for the counting value to reach the preset value when conducting a handover for the mobile device. The application processor allows or postpones a data synchronization started by an application with a server through the wireless communication network according to at least one preset condition. For example, one of the preset conditions is the aforementioned overhead. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321303 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR TESTING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION CAPABILITIES OF WIRELESS ACCESS ACCESS NODES - The subject matter described herein relates to methods, systems, and computer readable media for testing inter-cell interference coordination capabilities of wireless access nodes. One method for testing inter-cell interference mitigation capabilities of wireless access nodes includes, in a network equipment test device, emulating at least one user equipment (UE) served by a wireless access node under test. The method further includes emulating a wireless access node. The method further includes causing the emulated wireless access node to generate and send an indication of inter-cell interference to the wireless access node under test. The method further includes monitoring the response and evaluating the performance of the wireless access node under test to the indication of inter-cell interference using the network equipment test device. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321304 | Maximum Output Power Configuration with UE Preference in Carrier Aggregation - A method of maximum output power configuration with UE preference in carrier aggregation is provided. A UE configures multiple component carriers (CCs) with carrier aggregation for communicating with a serving base station in a mobile communication network. The UE determines channel condition of multiple serving cells over the corresponding multiple CCs. The UE then determines maximum output power for each CC based at least in part on the corresponding channel condition of each CC. Finally, the UE transmits power headroom report (PHR) for each CC to the serving base station, wherein the PHR is calculated based on the determined maximum output power. As a result, the reported PH information is channel condition dependent, which can be used by eNB for facilitating better transmission scheduling. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321305 | WIRELESS NETWORK, ACCESS POINT, AND TERMINAL - Wireless network, access point, and terminal are disclosed. A method for determining a size of an access window performed in an access point in a wireless network may comprise estimating a number of terminals attempting to access uplink (hereafter, uplink access attempt terminals) in a first access window including at least one uplink slot which is allocated to the terminal or is randomly selected by the terminal so as to transmit uplink data; and determining a size of a second access window next to the first access window based on the estimated number of the uplink access attempt terminals. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321306 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A base station for use in a wireless network capable of communicating with a plurality of mobile stations. The base station transmits to a first mobile station downlink subframes of OFDM symbols. Each downlink subframe comprises a plurality of resource blocks and is associated with a subframe (SF) type that is determined according to whether or not a PDSCH region of a resource block in a downlink subframe includes at least one of: 1) a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) resource element and 2) a channel-state-information reference signal (CSI-RS) resource element. The base station receives from the first mobile station at least one of CQI, PMI, modulation scheme, and transport block size and interprets the received at least one of CQI, PMI, modulation scheme, and transport block size according to a default SF type used by the first mobile station to determine the at least one of CQI, PMI, modulation scheme, and transport block size. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321307 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEBACK OVERHEAD REDUCTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus for reducing feedback transmission overhead in wireless communications. Averaging, compression, or both are used to reduce a number of bits needed for transmission of channel quality information. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321308 | Data Communication Method and System, Data Sending/Receiving Apparatus - A data communication method includes: a Radio Network Controller (RNC) sends a notification message to a Node B to instruct the Node B to perform proper operations after a specific event occurs on the User Equipment (UE). A data communication system, a data sending apparatus and a data receiving apparatus are also provided in an embodiment of the present disclosure. Through the technical solution under the present disclosure, when specific events such as cell handover, disconnection and state transition occur on the UE, the RNC that obtains the event information may send a notification message to Node B to instruct the Node B to perform proper operations. Therefore, the Node B is prevented from continuing to send the buffered UE data from the source cell; and in the Cell_FACH state, the present disclosure saves the radio channel resources, shortens the transmission delay, and reduces the transmission packet loss ratio. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321309 | Transparent Mesh Overlay in Hub-Spoke Satellite Networks - In a satellite-based communication network comprised of a central hub and plurality of remote terminals configured to transmit data to and receive data from the central hub in accordance with EN 301 790 (DVB-RCS), and where one or more of these remote terminals may be configured to include an additional receiver module configured to receive MF-TDMA transmission of other remote terminals, a mesh receiver and methods for coupling the mesh receiver with the host remote terminal. In addition, described herein are methods for synchronizing the mesh receiver on the network's timing and frequency and for utilizing the available link power for achieving efficient connectivity. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321310 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Acquiring Quality of Service QoS Control Information - A method, an apparatus, and a system for acquiring quality of service (QoS) control information. A policy control and charging rules function entity (PCRF) determines, according to a random algorithm, a time point in a time period from a receiving time of a request message sent by a policy and charging enforcement function entity PCEF for acquiring QoS control information to an update time of the QoS control information, as a time for the PCEF to reacquire QoS control information from the PCRF; and the PCEF reacquires QoS control information from the PCRF according to the time for reacquiring QoS control information from the PCRF that is carried in a response message returned by the PCRF, thereby avoiding execution of a QoS update by multiple PCEFs at a same time point, avoiding update message congestion, and improving an update speed of the QoS. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321311 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR ROOT CAUSE ANALYSIS - There is provided a method ( | 10-30-2014 |
20140321312 | FRONT-END CIRCUIT AND IMPEDANCE ADJUSTMENT METHOD - Provided is a front-end circuit which can prevent a signal from leaking into another circuit even when signals are sent and received simultaneously in multiple frequency bands in carrier aggregation. The circuit includes a transmission and reception antenna | 10-30-2014 |
20140321313 | METHOD FOR MEASURING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed are a method for measuring channel state information in a wireless access system that supports an environment in which an amount of uplink resource and an amount of downlink resource dynamically change, and an apparatus for the method. In detail, the method comprises: a step of receiving interference measurement resource information including information on the location of an interference measurement resource set in an uplink resource for interference measurement; a step of measuring interference being received from an adjacent cell at the location of the interference measurement resource; a step of calculating channel state information using the measured interference value; and a step of transmitting the calculated channel state information to a base station. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321314 | USER EQUIPMENT AND A RADIO NETWORK NODE, AND METHODS THEREIN - Embodiments herein relate to a user equipment and a radio network node, as well as to methods therein. The method in the radio network node relates to the control of resource allocation for device-to-device (D2D) communications in a communications network. The network comprises the network node, a first user equipment (UE), and a second UE, wherein at least one of the first and second UEs is a first D2D capable UE. The method comprises configuring the second UE to transmit a reference signal, transmitting configuration information relating to the second UE to the first UE, receiving a measurement result of the measurement performed by the first UE on the transmitted reference signal, and performing one or more radio operation task for a D2D communication between the first D2D capable UE and a second D2D communication capable UE based on the received measurement result. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328188 | Maintaining High Signal Quality In Mobile Wireless Networks Using Signal Relative Importance Values - A computer-automated method is described for identifying and carrying out reconfiguration actions for a transmitter in a radio network. A computer system is configured to determine, for a first transmitter, a multitude of relative importance values for signal data points relating to the first transmitter, the signal data points being acquired by mobile wireless devices from the first transmitter. Each relative importance value is determined by: (1) calculating a relative relevance for a first signal data point for the first transmitter, acquired by a first mobile wireless device, by comparing a first value for the first signal data point to a second value for a second transmitter, (2) calculating, by a fuzzy logic engine, a quality for the first signal data point, and (3) rendering a relative importance value based upon the relative relevance and the quality for the first signal data point. The results are thereafter used to carry out a reconfiguration action upon at least one transmitter based upon the multitude of relative importance values. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328189 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING AN EVENT INSTANCE - A method of determining an event instance in an event driven communications system, the method comprising the steps of: receiving ( | 11-06-2014 |
20140328190 | CLOUD-BASED MANAGEMENT PLATFORM FOR HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS DEVICES - A method of managing heterogeneous wireless devices in three or more different types of networks is disclosed. Each type of network uses a different type of radio access technology. The method includes receiving measurement data from a plurality of heterogeneous wireless devices via a control interface, wherein a heterogeneous wireless device provides connections to client devices via one or more of the three or more radio access technologies. The method includes searching, using a processor, for optimized adjustments to one or more parameters associated with one or more of the plurality of heterogeneous wireless devices based at least in part on a set of network optimization goals and the measurement data received from the plurality of heterogeneous wireless devices. The method includes transmitting at least some of the optimized adjustments of the one or more parameters to the one or more of the plurality of heterogeneous wireless devices. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328191 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REUSE OF A WIRELESS MEDIUM FOR HIGH EFFICIENCY WIFI - Systems and method for concurrent communication using high efficiency wifi are disclosed. One aspect is a method of transmitting a wireless message on a medium utilizing carrier sense multiple access (CSMA). The method includes receiving, via a first wireless device, at least a portion of a first wireless message from a second wireless device, the message including an indication of a basic service set of the second wireless device. The method also includes determining whether to defer transmission of a second wireless message based, at least in part, on the basic service set of the second wireless device. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328192 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COMMUNICATION IN DENSE WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - Systems, methods, and computer readable storage media communicate with a wireless device within a dense wireless environment. In one aspect, a method includes determining whether a wireless device is subject to interference, adjusting a transmission attribute based on the determining, and transmitting a message to the wireless device based on the adjusted transmission attribute. In some aspects, adjusting a transmission attribute may include selecting one or more of time division multiplexing or frequency division multiplexing when communicating with the wireless device. In some aspects, particular time periods and/or particular frequency bands may be selected for communication with the device depending on whether the device is subject to interference. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328193 | CONNECTED MODE NETWORK SELECTION IN WLAN-CELLULAR INTERWORKED NETWORKS - A method for network selection in a cellular and WLAN interworked network may include determining, by a UE, an association state between the UE and a WLAN access point. The UE may select a metric of the access point, based at least in part on the determined association state. The UE may determine a value of the metric. The UE may determine whether to report the value of the metric to a base station of the cellular wireless network, based on various factors. These factors may include the association state, the value of the at least one metric relative to a threshold value, a change in the association state, or receiving a reporting instruction from the base station. The UE may report the value of the metric to a base station, based on its determination. A base station may perform operations complementary to the UE, for network selection. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328194 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN A LOW POWER NETWORK AND A HIGH POWER NETWORK SHARING A COMMON FREQUENCY BAND - A method and a system for handling interference between a low power network and a high power network sharing a common frequency band are provided. The method includes receiving an association request message containing a set of parameters from the low power device. The method further includes determining a second set of parameters for transmission of the data in the uplink direction based on the first set of parameters, where the second set of parameters indicates resources allocated to the low power device for transmitting the data in a presence of interference from the high power network device on the common frequency band. Moreover, the method includes sending an association response message containing the second set of parameters to the low power device in response to the association request message. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328195 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DOWNLINK FREQUENCY DOMAIN MULTIPLEXING TRANSMISSIONS - Systems, methods, and devices for transmitting data are described herein. In some aspects, a method comprises generating a first packet. The first packet may comprise a physical layer and a media access control (MAC) layer. The MAC layer may allocate a first station to a primary frequency channel and a second station to a secondary frequency channel. The method further comprises transmitting the first packet to the first station and the second station. The method further comprises transmitting a second packet to the first station using the primary frequency channel. The method further comprises transmitting a third packet to the second station using the secondary frequency channel. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328196 | TIME EFFICIENT COUNTERS AND METERS ARCHITECTURE - A network device includes a plurality of interfaces configured to receive, from a network, packets to be processed by the network device. A load determination circuit of the network device is configured to determine whether a packet traffic load of the network device is above a traffic load threshold, and a dual-mode counter module is configured to (i) determine a count of quanta associated with the received packets using a first counting mode in response to the load determination unit determining that the packet traffic load is above the traffic load threshold, and (ii) determine a count of quanta associated with the received packets using a second counting mode, different than the first counting mode, in response to the load determination unit determining that the packet traffic load is not above the traffic load threshold. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328197 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for analyzing a wide frequency band with respect to signal power levels in specified narrow frequency bands, detecting narrow band signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level from the narrow band signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold, detecting narrow band interference according to one of the average composite wideband power level, the adaptive threshold, or both, prioritizing the detected narrow band interference, and selectively filtering a portion of the detected narrow band interference according to the prioritization. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328198 | Video Quality Assessment Method and Apparatus - A video quality assessment method and a video quality assessment apparatus are provided. The method includes: acquiring parameter information of video data, where the parameter information includes a bit rate, a frame rate, and packet information; performing calculation according to the bit rate or the frame rate to obtain benchmark video quality of the video data; calculating the number of successively lost packets according to the packet information, and calculating the number of effective packet loss times; performing calculation according to the number of effective packet loss times to obtain video packet loss and distortion quality of the video data; and performing calculation according to the benchmark video quality and the video packet loss and distortion quality to obtain final video quality. Using the number of effective packet loss times can accurately assess videos more effectively and reduce algorithm complexity. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328199 | Medium Access Control in Industrial and Automotive Wireless with Combined Wired and Wireless Sensor Networks - An embodiment of the invention relates to a local area sensor network including a central unit configured to receive a resource allocation request from a priority network sensor in a reserved timeslot and in response to designate a shared timeslot allocation. The priority network sensor transmits a resource allocation request in a reserved timeslot, and the sensor transmits data in the allocated shared timeslot. A sensor network can be formed with multiple gateways that each communicate over wired and wireless portions of the network. The central unit communicates with the gateways over the wired portion of the network. Wireless nodes communicate wirelessly with the gateways. The central unit receives a plurality of link quality indicators from the gateways for respective wireless paths to the wireless sensors, and selects a gateway for relaying a message from the central unit to a wireless sensor based on the link quality indicators. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328200 | MITIGATION OF INTERFERENCE DUE TO PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - Techniques for mitigating interference due to peer-to-peer (P2P) communication are described. In an aspect, a P2P UE may measure the signal strength of downlink signals from base stations and may set its transmit power based on (e.g., proportional to) the measured signal strength in order to mitigate interference to WWAN UEs communicating with base stations. In another aspect, the P2P UE may measure the signal strength of uplink signals from WWAN UEs and may set its transmit power based on (e.g., inversely proportional to) the measured signal strength in order to mitigate interference to the WWAN UEs. In one design, the P2P UE may measure the signal strength of an uplink signal from a WWAN UE, estimate the pathloss between the two UEs based on the measured signal strength, and determine its transmit power based on the estimated pathloss. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328201 | Predictive Caching of IP Data - Disclosed is a technique for predictively caching IP content data for a mobile device. In the mobile device, a content request is sent to an intelligent cache server over an IP network, the content request indicative of recurring IP content data of interest to the mobile device. The intelligent cache server retrieves the requested IP content data from content servers and queues the requested IP content data in a buffer associated with the mobile device. A notification message is sent to the mobile device indicating that the requested IP content is queued. The mobile device determines whether it is connected to a non-cellular IP network access point and automatically downloads the queued IP content data from the intelligent cache server when connected to a non-cellular IP network. The IP content data is stored in a cache memory in the mobile device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328202 | Predictive Caching of IP Data - Disclosed is a technique for predictively caching IP content data for a mobile device. In the mobile device, a content request is sent to a content server over an IP network, the content request indicative of recurring IP content data of interest to the mobile device. The content server retrieves the requested IP content data and queues the requested IP content data in a buffer associated with the mobile device. A notification message is sent to the mobile device indicating that the requested IP content is queued. The mobile device determines whether it is connected to a non-cellular IP network access point and automatically downloads the queued IP content data from the content server when connected to a non-cellular IP network. The IP content data is stored in a cache memory in the mobile device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328203 | Monitoring Audio Fidelity and Audio-Video Synchronization - Methods, systems, and computer programs for monitoring quality of audio delivered over a communications channel are presented. One method includes an operation for defining timestamps. The timestamps are associated with a measure of time while delivering audio to a client computer, where each timestamp includes a plurality of timestamp bits. Further, the method includes an operation for modulating an audio signal with pseudo noise (PN) codes when a timestamp bit has a first logical value, and modulating the audio signal with a negative of the PN codes when the timestamp bit has a second logical value. After transmitting the modulated audio signal to the client computer, the timestamp bits are extracted from a received modulated audio signal to obtain received timestamps. The quality of the audio is assessed based on the received timestamps, and the quality of the audio is stored in computer memory. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328204 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS - Embodiments can provide an apparatus, a method and/or a computer program for routing data packets in a radio access network. The apparatus | 11-06-2014 |
20140334316 | Multi-Mode Wireless Networking System and Method - A method is provided for controlling a wireless network interface controller (WNIC) to analyze one or more network conditions with little or no interruption to network connectivity or data communication. The WNIC may collect information regarding wireless channels, networks, and/or users. The method uses ideal network time slots and selective data collection to monitor wireless networks with minimal interruptions to normal operation. A system is provided for operating and controlling the WNIC in accordance with the method. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334317 | Rogue AP Detection - Methods, systems and computer readable media for rogue access point detection are disclosed. In some implementations, the method can include initiating, at one or more processors of a wireless controller, a rogue access point detection process for a wireless network, and transmitting, from the one or more processors, a signature frame to a mobility agent in a wireless switch. The method can also include receiving, at an authorized access point, the signature frame transmitted via a wireless signal from a rogue access point. The method can further include reporting reception of the signature frame to the wireless controller, and generating, at the one or more processors, a signal to shut down a port associated with the rogue access point. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334318 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING AN ACHIEVABLE LINK THROUGHPUT BASED ON ASSISTANCE INFORMATION - Methods and apparatuses are provided for determining available uplink bandwidth as an achievable throughput for a link. An available link capacity of a link with a cell for a user equipment is estimated based on a communication quality measured in the cell. An available fraction of cell resources for the user equipment over the link is also estimated based at least in part on received assistance information. An available bandwidth of the cell is then estimated as an achievable throughput for the user equipment over the link as a function of the estimated available link capacity and the estimated available fraction of cell resources. Moreover, a network procedure can be performed based at least in part on comparing the achievable throughput to one or more thresholds. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334319 | Methods, Apparatus and Computer Programs for Operating a Radio Access Network and User Equiptment - A user equipment (UE) is configured with a first configuration for reporting measurement feedback information according to a first reporting cycle using a first set of parameters, and a second configuration for reporting measurement feedback information according to a second reporting cycle using a second set of parameters. The UE switches between the first cycle and the second cycle for reporting for example CQI based on for example comparing a data or a channel measurement against a predefined threshold. In various embodiments the second configuration is fixed, or results in no CQI reporting, or is variable based on a previous cycle or CQI level, or is event-based. In another embodiment, the network commands the UE to switch. The end result is that control signalling overhead can be reduced when appropriate by reducing the number of CQI reports that are sent uplink. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334320 | Systems and Methods for Network Adaptation Support in Wireless Network - Embodiments are provided for implementing network adaptation schemes, including small cell on/off adaptation and transmission power control. In an embodiment method for supporting network adaptation, a network component receives a discovery reference signal (DRS) from a network controller that is in a switch-off transmission mode. The network component then performs measurements according to the DRS, and reports the measurements to a network associated with the network controller. In return, the network component receives a radio resource control (RRC) signaling from the network. The RRC signaling includes configuration information allowing a connection between the network component and the network controller. The network component then connects with the network controller in accordance with the configuration information. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334321 | HEURISTIC NETWORK TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION USING BYTE-DISTRIBUTIONS - A network device has counters that are configured to generate for a plurality of byte positions in a specified portion of data packets, a count indicative of a correspondence of a value found at the byte position corresponding to a rule such that occurrences of predetermined byte values in the plurality of byte positions may be counted. A packet classifier is configured to receive from the counters a number of byte values corresponding to the rules and to classify data packets based on the analysis. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334322 | ADJUSTMENT OF RADIATION PATTERNS UTILIZING A POSITION SENSOR - A device for a wireless RF link to a remote receiving device can radiate at different radiation patterns in response to detecting a change in the device position. As the device is moved, displaced, or re-positioned, a position sensor in the device detects the change in position and provides position information to a processor. The processor receives the position information from the position sensor, selects an antenna configuration and physical data rate based on the position information, and provides an RF signal associated with the selected antenna configuration through the antenna elements of the selected antenna configuration. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334323 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HIGH RATE OFDM COMMUNICATIONS - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334324 | COMMUNICATION SCHEME FOR CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION - The invention relates to a method for receiving and a method for reconstructing channel quality information in a communication system. Further, the invention also provides a transmitter and receiver performing these methods, respectively. The invention suggests a scheme for communicating channel quality measures that on the one hand allows for an accurate reconstruction of the channel quality measures at the receiver and on the other hand requires an acceptable transmission overhead. This is achieved by partitioning channel quality measures into at least two partitions and to compress the values partition-wise, for example, by means of a discrete cosine transform and the transmission of only a subset of the resulting coefficients. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334325 | CSI MEASUREMENT, REPORTING AND COLLISION-HANDLING - This invention sets conditions for user equipment responses to channel state indicator request in channel state information that may conflict. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334326 | Method, Device, and System for Monitoring Quality of Internet Access Service of Mobile Terminal - A method, a device, and a system for monitoring quality of an Internet access service of a mobile terminal are provided. The method includes collecting, by a mobile terminal, an IP data packet of an Internet access service, identifying, by the mobile terminal, an Internet access service type corresponding to the IP data packet, performing, by the mobile terminal, deep packet resolution on the IP data packet to obtain a resolution result, collecting statistics, by the mobile terminal, on a key quality indicator of the Internet access service corresponding to the Internet access service type according to the resolution result of the IP data packet, and uploading, by the mobile terminal, the key quality indicator obtained by means of statistics to a network server, so that the network server monitors quality of the Internet access service of the mobile terminal according to the key quality indicator. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334327 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ADJUSTING CQI FEEDBACK CYCLE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for adjusting a channel quality indicator CQI feedback cycle. A CQI adjustment parameter fed back by a base station is received, and it is determined according to the CQI adjustment parameter whether a CQI feedback cycle of a user equipment needs to be adjusted; and when it is determined that the CQI feedback cycle needs to be adjusted, the CQI feedback cycle of the user equipment is adjusted, and an adjusted CQI feedback cycle is sent to the user equipment. Therefore, the CQI feedback cycle of the user equipment is dynamically adjusted, and an uplink throughput rate and cell uplink coverage are increased. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334328 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR MAPPING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a system of setting up a reference signal in a radio communication system are disclosed. The radio communication system includes a serving cell and a neighboring cell, and a mobile terminal of the serving cell uses the same temporal frequency resource to receive a serving resource block from the serving cell and an interference resource block from the neighboring cell. The method includes setting up a user-specific reference signal in the interference resource block and puncturing at the same temporal frequency position as the temporal frequency position at which the user-specific reference signal is set up on the interference resource block of the serving resource block to prevent any signal from being transmitted at the punctured temporal frequency position. When the method and the system are used and the interference power between cells is measured, it is possible to effectively reduce feedback overhead in a coordinated beamforming. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334329 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING AN INSTANCE FOR PERFORMING A CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION MEASUREMENT AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A communications apparatus is provided. In one implementation, the apparatus includes a processor, coupled to a transceiver. The transceiver receives one or more configuration messages carrying information regarding to a first sub-frame subset, a second sub-frame subset and a plurality of reporting parameters from a peer communications apparatus. The processor further includes a first processor logic unit, for obtaining the information regarding at least the first sub-frame subset, the second sub-frame subset and the reporting parameters configured by the peer communications apparatus, a second processor logic unit, for determining at least one reporting instance according to the reporting parameters for reporting a measurement result linked to the first sub-frame subset; and a third processor logic unit, for determining a measuring instance for measuring the power of a desired signal corresponding to the first sub-frame subset based on the reporting instance. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334330 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING IN-DEVICE CO-EXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN USER EQUIPMENT - A method and a system for handling in-device coexistence interference in a user equipment are provided. The method includes detecting in-device coexistence interference between one or more of a plurality of carrier frequencies of Long Term Evolution (LTE) radio technology and at least one frequency of non-LTE radio technologies, determining at least one of the one or more of the plurality of LTE carrier frequencies for which a measurement object is configured, and transmitting interference information associated with the at least one LTE carrier frequency affected by the in-device coexistence interference. The interference information includes a measurement object identifier of the at least one carrier LTE frequency, Direction of Interference (DOI), and time domain multiplexing assistance information. The method further includes receiving a configured method from the network entity which help mitigate the in-device coexistence interference at the user equipment. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334331 | Method and Arrangement for Relaying - Uplink-only relay and donor network node and methods therein for supporting connection of a UE in a cell associated with the network node to the uplink-only relay for uplink communication. The method in the uplink-only relay involves monitoring a relation, in terms of performance, between a direct uplink communication from the UE to the network node, and a potential relayed uplink communication from the UE to the network node via the UORN The method further comprises indicating to the network node when the relation fulfills a condition. The method in the network node involves receiving information, from the UORN, indicating a monitored UE for which a condition is fulfilled. The condition is related to a relation, in terms of performance, between a direct uplink communication from the UE to the network node, and a potential uplink communication relayed via the UORN. If the UE is to be relayed, the method further comprises indicating, to the UORN, that the UE will be relayed via the UORN; and further comprises: adjusting uplink link adaptation of the UE based on the received information. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334332 | METHOD FOR OBTAINING INFORMATION REPRESENTATIVE OF THE CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATION ON AT LEAST ONE FREQUENCY SUBBAND - The present invention concerns a method and a device for obtaining, by a first telecommunication device and from a second telecommunication device, information representative of the channel quality indication on at least one frequency subband, the first and the second telecommunication devices being linked through a wireless telecommunication network using a plurality of frequency subbands. The frequency subbands are grouped into groups of at least one frequency subband, and the first telecommunication device transfers a message to the second telecommunication device, the message comprising information identifying a first group of at least one frequency subband, receives, from the second telecommunication device, for each frequency subband comprised in the first group, an information representative of the channel quality indication determined by the second telecommunication device for the frequency subband comprised in the first group. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334333 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTIPOINT MEASUREMENT SET - A method and apparatus for determining a downlink coordinated multipoint measurement set. The method includes: receiving reference signal receiving power of a channel state information reference signal transmitted by each point in an RRM measurement set reported by UE; wherein the reference signal receiving power of each point in the RRM measurement set is measured by the UE based on more than one groups of preconfigured channel state information reference signal resources; and determining the downlink coordinated multipoint measurement set according to the reference signal receiving power reported by the UE. With the method, the UE needs not to measure RSRP of all the points for transmitting signals, thereby avoiding waste of resources, and solving problems in the prior art. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341047 | TRIGGERING A SIGNALLING EVENT FROM THE DATA PLANE - Some examples of triggering a signaling event in a control plane of a mobile network from a user plane of the mobile network. After it is determined in accordance with a predefined criterion that an error indication should be sent, an error indication may be sent in the user plane, from a location external to a radio access network of the mobile network and external to a core network of the mobile network, to at least one element in the radio access network or the core network, thereby triggering a signaling event. The predefined criterion may include no accessible association between a user identifier or cell identifier and an identifier of a tunnel for tunneling user data packets between the radio access network and the core network. The lack of an accessible association may have negative implications, e.g. for traffic management. The triggered signaling event may include releasing this tunnel. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341048 | ORTHOLOGONAL BEAMFORMING FOR MULTIPLE USER MULTIPLE-INPUT AND MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) - Technology to generate an improved signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio (SINR) from a set of orthogonal reference signals (RSs) is disclosed. In an example, a user equipment (UE) can include computer circuitry configured to: Receive a set of orthogonal RSs from a node; calculate a SINR for each of the RSs in the set of orthogonal RSs to form a set of SINR; select a maximum SINR from the set of SINR; and quantize the maximum SINR for the set of SINR. Each reference signal can represent a transmission beam direction. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341049 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING A CONNECTION OF AN END-USER DEVICE TO A NETWORK - A method of monitoring the connection of a first end-user device to a network includes determining the amount of bandwidth present, tracking the amount of bandwidth in use by different classes of traffic, and tracking performance of the connection to detect when a threshold crossing has been reached. The method also includes transmitting a query to the first end-user device in response to the determined reaching of the threshold, the query requesting from a user of the first end-user device a communication action to perform based on the threshold being reached. The method further includes changing the communications session between the first end-user device and the network in accordance with the received communication action. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341050 | CHANNEL ESTIMATE UNDER NON-UNIFORM REFERENCE SIGNAL PATTERN - Reference signals may not uniformly span over time and/or frequency on a resource unit. For example, reference signals may non-uniformly occupy symbols of a subframe. Alternatively, reference signals normally transmitted over certain tones of a subframe may have to be punctured to avoid collisions with a PSS and/or SSS transmitted over the same tones. Consequently, a UE may only be able to use a subset of reference signal tones for performing channel estimation. Accordingly, a method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided for improving channel estimation under a non-uniform signal pattern. The apparatus indicates to a UE to utilize a subset of reference signals to derive a channel estimate for demodulating data in a specific subframe, and transmits a plurality of subframes, the plurality of subframes including the reference signals and the specific subframe, the specific subframe including a PSS and/or SSS. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341051 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING FOR ENHANCED INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT FOR TRAFFIC ADAPTATION (EIMTA) IN LTE - Certain aspects of the disclosure generally relate to wireless communications and, more particularly, to techniques for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting for enhanced interference management for traffic adaptation (eIMTA) in long term evolution (LTE). According to certain aspects, a method for wireless communications by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method generally includes identifying, within a set of subframes, one or more flexible subframes that may be dynamically managed for either uplink or downlink communications, determining whether a current flexible subframe is for either uplink or downlink communications, and performing at least one of channel measurement, interference measurement, or channel state reporting based on the determination. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341052 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR FREQUENCY SELECTIVE CHANNEL MODELING - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for frequency selective channel modeling. One exemplary system includes a network equipment test device including at least one processor. The network equipment test device includes the UE emulator implemented by the at least one processor and configured to emulate a plurality of UEs that attach to and communicate with a device under test. The system further includes a frequency selective channel modeler configured to receive resource scheduling information for the UEs from the device under test, to determine channel performance categories for the UEs using the resource scheduling information and to determine values for channel quality parameters using the channel performance categories assigned to the resource blocks, which represent selected frequencies in the total channel bandwidth. The emulated UEs communicate the channel quality parameters to the device under test based on the frequency allocated for a given UE in the channel bandwidth. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341053 | WIRELESS FEEDBACK COMMUNICATIONS OVER UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Methods and apparatuses are described in which an unlicensed spectrum is used for Long Term Evolution (LTE) communications. A first method includes receiving feedback information from a user equipment (UE) via a primary component carrier (PCC) uplink in a licensed spectrum. A second method includes transmitting feedback information from a UE to an evolved Node B (eNB) via a PCC uplink in a licensed spectrum. The feedback information may address signals transmitted to the UE via a downlink in an unlicensed spectrum | 11-20-2014 |
20140341054 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERFERENCE DETECTION AND MITIGATION - In a method for adjusting the modulation of information onto subcarriers transmitted on a network, a first modulation profile of a network node on the network is set a first density. A plurality of messages in support of a link maintenance operation (LMO) on the network are monitored. The first modulation profile of the network node is updated to a second modulation profile having a second density. The updating is based on the monitored messages. Interference is detected by determining that a link between the first network node and a second network node on the network is not conveying a predetermined class of messages correctly. The first network node is set to a third modulation profile more robust than the first and second modulation profiles in response to the detected interference. The third modulation profile is common to each network node on the network. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341055 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND PROCESSING USER EQUIPMENT FEEDBACK INFORMATION - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and processing user equipment feedback information are disclosed by the present invention, related to the field of radio communication technologies, and with the present invention, a user equipment is capable of transmitting feedback information with a maximum channel RI value of 4. The method includes: obtaining rank information (RI) of a radio channel, a corresponding channel quality indication information (CQI) value, and a precoding control information (PCI) value, where an RI value is any one of 1, 2, 3, and 4; and generating feedback information according to the CQI value and the PCI value, and sending the feedback information to a base station according to a CQI feedback pattern. Embodiments of the present invention are mainly applicable to a process of transmitting user equipment feedback information. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341056 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR ELECTRONIC SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT WITH REMOTE ACCESS TO DATA IN A VIRTUAL COMPUTING NETWORK - Systems, methods, and apparatus are provided for automated identification of baseline data and changes in state in a wireless communications spectrum, by identifying sources of signal emission in the spectrum by automatically detecting signals, analyzing signals, comparing signal data to historical and reference data, creating corresponding signal profiles, and determining information about the baseline data and changes in state based upon the measured and analyzed data in near real time, which is stored on each apparatus or device units and/or on a remote server computer that aggregates data from each of the units, wherein the data is accessible via remote computer devices. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341057 | METHOD FOR MEASURING LINK QUALITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for reporting the link quality of a downlink by a terminal. Specifically, the method includes the steps of: receiving, from a serving cell, a subframe set for resource-limited measurement and information regarding a cell-specific reference signal of an interference cell; measuring link quality of a downlink in the subframe set; and reporting the measured link quality of the downlink to the serving cell, wherein interference control processing due to the cell-specific reference signal from the interference cell is applied to the subframe set using the information regarding the cell-specific reference signal of the interference cell. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341058 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND PROGRAM - Components and operations of a wireless communication system are disclosed. Components of a wireless communication system may include a base station, a communication control device, and a terminal device. The base station may send configuration information to the communication control device, and the communication control device may send the configuration information to the terminal device. The configuration information may indicate a first protection status associated with frames. The terminal device may obtain measurement results indicating signal quality associated with one or more of the frames. The terminal device may send measurement information to the communication control device. The measurement information may depend on the measurement results. The communication control device may determine, based at least in part on the measurement information, whether to associate one or more of the frames with a second protection status. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341059 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DORMANT MODE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for avoiding interference in an idle mode and a method for receiving a public warning system message regardless of an operation mode when different wireless communication modules coexist in a terminal in a wireless communication system are provided. The method for controlling an idle mode of a terminal in a wireless communication system includes determining whether interference occurs between heterogeneous communication modules of the terminal; and limiting, if the interference occurs between the heterogeneous communication modules, camping on a corresponding frequency of the communication module in which the interference occurs. The terminal can maximally avoid the interference in the idle mode to operate without malfunction, and correctly receive the public warning system message regardless of the operation mode to enable the user to timely receive the corresponding message. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341060 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF MEASURING COMMUNICATION PERFORMANCE - A device is disclosed including a memory configured to store a user data frame. The user data frame includes a first portion that includes traffic data. The user data frame also includes a second portion that includes a set of stuff bits arranged in a detectible pattern wherein a count of the set of stuff bits is associated with a measure of transport utilization of a data communication channel over which the user data frame is transported. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341061 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING CANDIDATE FOR IMPROVING COMMUNICATION QUALITY; APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING COMMUNICATION PATH; NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING SUCH PROGRAMS; AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A management apparatus that identifies a candidate for improving communication quality in a wireless communication system including a base station and a mobile station, the management apparatus comprising: an obtainer that obtains measured communication quality information and positional information from the mobile station; a communication quality estimator that estimates a communication quality based on the positional information obtained from the mobile station; a communication path determiner that identifies a communication path using the estimated communication quality estimated and the measured communication quality information; and a communication quality improvement candidate determiner that identifies the candidate for improving communication quality related to the communication path determined, the candidate being based on communication quality. A method and a program for identifying a candidate for improving communication quality, an apparatus, a method, and a program for determining a communication path, and a wireless communication system are also provided. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341062 | Methods, Test Systems and Arrangements for Verifying Compliance with Requirement Specifications - A method for verifying compliance of a communication device with one or more requirement specifications is disclosed. The method comprises establishing a link between a test system and the communication device, wherein the establishing comprises configuring two or more bearers, one or more control channels, and one or more uplink packet filters; closing a test loop comprising the test system and the communication device, wherein the closing comprises activating a test loop function of the communication device; sending units of data associated with different service data flows in a downlink of the test loop from the test system to the communication device, each of the units of data including information representing the service data flow associated with the unit of data; receiving the units of data at the communication device; transferring the units of data to an uplink transmission arrangement of the communication device; and verifying, at the test system, that each of the units of data is transmitted, by the communication device in an uplink of the test loop to the test system, on a correct bearer corresponding to the service data flow associated with the respective unit of data according to the one or more uplink packet filters. Corresponding test system and test loop function arrangement are also disclosed. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341063 | Automated RFID Reader Detection - Carrying out a calibration cycle on one or more components in a local area network, the network including a plurality of Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) readers and the calibration cycle including exchanging, between RFID readers or other components of the local area network, distances between RFID readers calculated by one or more other components of the local area network. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341064 | Enhancement of Download Multi-User Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Wireless Communications - A method implemented in a user equipment configured to be used in a multi-user (MU) multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) wireless communications system is disclosed. The method includes transmitting to a base station a first channel state information (CSI) report determined according to a single-user (SU) MIMO rule, and transmitting to the base station a second CSI report determined according to an MU-MIMO rule. Other methods, apparatuses, and systems also are disclosed. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341065 | Priority Rules of Periodic CSI Reporting in Carrier Aggregation - A method of determining priority rules for periodic CSI reporting in carrier aggregation is proposed. A UE obtains channel state information (CSI) feedback for multiple downlink component carriers (CCs) in a multi-carrier wireless communication network. Each downlink CC is associated with a feedback mode, and each feedback mode comprises a set of feedback types to be reported to a base station at time slots configured by an upper layer. The UE then determines a prioritized downlink CC for CSI reporting based on priority levels of the feedback types to be transmitted for each downlink CC at a given time slot. The UE then transmits the corresponding CSI feedback for the prioritized downlink CC at the given time slot via a feedback channel over a primary uplink CC. In one embodiment, different feedback types are prioritized by groups, and each group has several feedback types sharing the same priority. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341066 | Communication Resource Allocation Systems and Methods - A channel descriptor management message is transmitted on a broadcast connection to a mobile terminal. The channel descriptor management message provides a format for a frame. The frame includes a resource space. The channel descriptor management message defines a plurality of channels within the resource space and allocates at least one of the channels to a plurality of users. Subsequent resource allocation messages may refer to a location within a channel rather than a location within the entire resource space. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341067 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING DATA BIT RATES TO MAINTAIN THE QUALITY OF RADIO LINKS - A wireless communication method and system for controlling the current data bit rate of a radio link (RL) to maintain the quality of the RL. The system includes a core network (CN), a radio network controller (RNC) and at least one wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The RL is established between the RNC and the WTRU. The RNC establishes a guaranteed data bit rate, a maximum data bit rate and a current data bit rate associated with the RL. When the RNC senses an event which indicates that the quality of the RL has substantially deteriorated, the RNC reduces the value of the current data bit rate. Then, in a recovery process, if a similar event does not occur during an established waiting period, the RNC restores the current data bit rate back to the maximum data bit rate. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341068 | METHOD FOR DEVICES IN A NETWORK TO PARTICIPATE IN AN END-TO-END MEASUREMENT OF LATENCY - A method of determining the latency of path segments in a communication network that uses multi-bit data packets comprises generating a test packet for use in determining the latency of path segments in the network; transmitting the test packet from a first device coupled to the network; storing in the test packet the time when a preselected bit in the test packet is transmitted from the first device; when the test packet is received by a second device coupled to the network, storing in the second device at least one of (a) the time when a preselected bit in the test packet is received by the second device and (b) the difference between (i) the time when the preselected bit in the test packet is transmitted from the first device and (ii) the time when the test packet is received by the second device. | 11-20-2014 |
20140348008 | IDENTIFYING BASE STATION TYPES - One or more devices may receive information that identifies a format of an identifier of a network device. The format of the identifier may indicate a portion of the identifier that identifies a type of the network device. The one or more devices may receive the identifier of the network device based on a user device connecting with the network device to communicate via the network device; determine the type of the network device connected to the user device based on the portion of the identifier and a format of the identifier that identifies the type of network device; and execute a processing instruction based on the type of network device connected to the user device. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348009 | COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TESTING - A method in a communication terminal for measuring one or more measurement quantities, wherein the measurement quantities correspond to a measurement identity, the method comprising: determining whether measurement of the measurement quantities can be performed in a first measurement occasion corresponding to the measurement identity; and if measurement of the measurement quantities cannot be performed in the first measurement occasion, measuring the measurement quantities using one or more other measurement occasions, wherein the one or more of the other measurement occasions correspond to at least one other measurement identity. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348010 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING CALL PERFORMANCE BY ENABLING UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS DURING POOR DOWNLINK RADIO CONDITIONS - Apparatus and methods of improving call performance by enabling/continuing uplink transmissions during poor downlink radio conditions. The apparatus and methods further include monitoring, by a user equipment (UE), downlink (DL) signal conditions associated with a serving Node B. Moreover, the apparatus and methods include triggering an out-of-sync state upon a determination that the DL signal conditions have degraded beyond a DL signal quality threshold. Additionally, the apparatus and methods include delaying turning off of a power amplifier (PA) associated with transmission of uplink (UL) messages for a call performance improvement threshold time duration. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348011 | VOIP Cooperative Multipoint Solution - It is provided a user equipment, including mode switching means adapted to switch, autonomously or based on a command from a base station of a communication system to which the user equipment belongs, the user equipment into a low data rate mode; measuring means adapted to measure a downlink reference signal received on a downlink from the base station; feedback preparing means adapted to prepare a feedback based on the measurement by the measuring means; encoding means adapted to encode the feedback, thus obtaining encoded data; modulating means adapted to modulate the encoded data; and providing means adapted to provide the modulated encoded data for being sent on the uplink at a predetermined time after the downlink reference signal was received, if the user equipment is in the low data rate mode. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348012 | SMALL CELL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND OPERATING METHOD THEFEOF - A small cell communication system and an operating method thereof are provided. The small cell communication system comprises a base station and a mobile device. The base station is configured to determine a reference signal pattern from a plurality of reference signal patterns, determine a physical resource block (PRB) bundling size corresponding to the reference signal pattern and transmit a signal with the PRB bundling size and the reference signal pattern. The mobile device is configured to receive the signal and perform channel estimation according to the PRB bundling size and the reference signal pattern. The operating method is applied to the small cell communication system to implement the aforesaid operations. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348013 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COLLECTING INFORMATION RELATING TO ACCESS POINTS - A device and a method of collecting information about access points in a wireless telecommunication system, for example RSS fingerprints in a Wi-Fi network, are disclosed. Information can be collected automatically along a user's path, using a mobile terminal. The mobile terminal is provided with display means for displaying the zone in which the mobile terminal moves around. The mobile terminal also includes pointing means to point at a location on a map. When the user is positioned at the location pointed at by the pointing means, the user can validates the user's position using validation means. Information collected along the path and coordinates of each validated position are time-stamped using a clock in the mobile terminal. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348014 | RADIO BASE STATION AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING TRANSITION BETWEEN RADIO SYSTEMS - A radio base station capable of communication in a first radio system and a second radio system includes an estimation unit arranged to measure information transmitted from a mobile station and estimate a propagation condition between the mobile station and the radio base station when transition from the second radio system to the first radio system is requested; and a determination unit arranged to determine whether measurement of a radio wave is needed upon transition by the mobile station from the second radio system to the first radio system based on the propagation condition estimated by the estimation unit. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348015 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for allowing a terminal to measure at least one or more transmission points among a first transmission point and a second transmission point, which are neighboring cells, in a wireless communication system, and the measurement method comprises the steps of: measuring a reference signal strength indicator (RSSI) in a predetermined resource of a subframe; and measuring reference signal received quality (RSRQ) from said RSSI and reference signal received power (RSRP), wherein said predetermined resource is associated with the setting of an almost blank subframe (ABS) of said first transmission point for said subframe. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348016 | METHOD, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR GAP-GENERATION DETERMINATION - A mobile station device that communicates with a base station device. The mobile communication receives, from the base station device, a control signal for permitting the mobile station device to perform monitoring neighboring cell. The mobile station device also generates a gap based on one length of plural lengths, the gap being used in the monitoring, the one length corresponding to a measurement type of a neighboring cell according to a predetermined rule, the plural lengths being common with the base station, and the predetermine rule being common with the base station. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348017 | MIMO MODE CONFIGURATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a MIMO mode configuration method and a communication device, which relate to the field of communications, and are capable of reducing mutual channel interference when users in neighboring cells and on the same channel perform transmission by using configured MIMO mode, thereby improving system performance. The method includes: calculating, under each predetermined MIMO mode combination in a cluster, throughput or an amount of interference of the cluster; and setting, in a predetermined MIMO mode combination corresponding to maximum throughput or a minimum amount of interference of the cluster, a predetermined MIMO mode of each user in the cluster to an actual MIMO mode of the user. The embodiments of the present invention are applied to MIMO mode configuration for a user in a cell. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348018 | SELF-INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - A wireless communication device includes, in part, an analog interference cancellation circuit and a controller. The analog cancellation circuit includes a multitude of delay paths each including a delay element and a variable attenuator. The controller dynamically varies the attenuation level of each of the variable attenuators in accordance with the frequency response characteristic of that attenuator to remove a portion of a self-interference signal present in a signal received by the device. The device measures the frequency response characteristic of the communication channel, used in determining the attenuation levels, via one or more preamble symbols. A second portion of the self-interference signal is removed by the device using a multitude of samples of a transmitted signal and a multitude of samples of a signal to be transmitted. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348019 | CQI Estimation in a Wireless Communication Network - Techniques for estimating and reporting channel quality indicator (CQI) are disclosed. Neighboring base stations may cause strong interference to one another and may be allocated different resources, e.g., different subframes. A UE may observe different levels of interference on different resources. In an aspect, the UE may determine a CQI for resources allocated to a base station and having reduced or no interference from at least one interfering base station. In another aspect, the UE may determine multiple CQI for resources of different types and associated with different interference levels. For example, the UE may determine a first CQI based on at least one first subframe allocated to the base station and having reduced or no interference from the interfering base station(s). The UE may determine a second CQI based on at least one second subframe allocated to the interfering base station(s). | 11-27-2014 |
20140348020 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING INTERACTION BETWEEN DRX CYCLES AND PAGING CYCLES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate managing interaction between paging and discontinuous reception (DRX) cycles for users operating in a communication system. As described herein, a connected mode user having an associated DRX cycle can modify its schedule for paging reception to minimize unnecessary periods of activity. For example, a user can initially schedule monitoring of paging occasions that coincide with periods of activity associated with the DRX cycle of the user. If such paging occasions are not sufficient to reach a minimum required number of monitored paging occasions, additional paging occasions can be monitored as needed by scheduling additional periods of activity and/or extending periods of activity specified in the DRX cycle. Additionally or alternatively, a network can synchronize a connected mode DRX cycle associated with a user with an idle mode paging cycle for the user, thereby providing power and performance benefits with low complexity. | 11-27-2014 |
20140355455 | REFERENCE SIGNAL MEASUREMENT - The embodiments disclosed relates to a method and a network node that estimates a signal power and/or noise power of a received reference signal. The receiving node may operate in a communications system applying frequency division multiplexing. An assumption is that the channel frequency responses, on adjacent subcarriers of the communications system are equivalent or constant. The method comprising receiving a reference signal comprising a first reference signal from a first wireless terminal and a second reference signal from a second wireless terminal By using this assumption it is possible to combine first and second reference signal in order to estimating the signal power and/or noise power of a received reference signal without a conventional channel estimation technique. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355456 | Second Order Intercept Point (IP2) Calibration for Wireless Receivers - IP2 calibration efficiency can be improved by passing the calibration signal through the transceiver's duplexer instead of inserting the calibration signal directly onto transceivers receive circuit. Passing the calibration signal through the duplexer may reduce IP2 calibration periods for transceivers having less-permeable duplexers, or duplexers that provide better than average separation between the RX and TX circuits. IP2 calibration inefficiencies can also be reduced by using a binary-like search when computing the in-phase and quadrature-phase path correction coefficients of the IP2 correction code. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355457 | SYSTEM FOR TESTING WIRELESS SIGNALS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING THE SAME - Disclosure herein is related to a system for testing wireless signals and a method provided for establishing the system. One of the objectives is to establish one new testing system while the method effectively reduces the unstable problem caused by hardware or environmental variations. The testing system measures intensity of the wireless signals outputted from a device-under-test. While compared to a test signals, it is determined if the signal intensities there-between are balanced. Accordingly, the hardware of system is required to be adjusted. After that, the wireless signals are compared with sample signals for determining whether or not the test results are stable among the different testing system. An attenuation value may be introduced to adjusting the test result. A new testing system is therefore established. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355458 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED APPLICATION SIGNALING FROM A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - Methods and apparatus for signaling adjustments include identifying, by a user equipment (UE), a change in a reachability state of the UE based at least in part on one or more channel metrics determined by a modem in the UE. Further, the methods and apparatus include adjusting a transmission of connectivity signals (e.g., keep-alive signals) to a server from an application on the UE, the adjusting being based at least in part on an indication of the change in the reachability state provided to the application via an interface in communication with the modem (e.g., modem application programming interface or API). Additionally, the methods and apparatus can include transmitting an indication of the change in the reachability state to the server. Moreover, the methods and apparatus may accommodate signaling adjustments for one or more applications on the UE and one or more servers in a wireless communication system. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355459 | Matrix for Use with a Radio Transceiver and Methods Thereto - A matrix for use with a radio transceiver having at least two signal sources is provided. The matrix comprises for each selected set of two or more signal sources, a list of combinations of harmonics of the signal sources, the combinations of harmonics each having a predicted amplitude greater than a predetermined threshold, and a frequency within a defined range related to a frequency range of one of the signal sources. Further, methods for generating such matrix and methods for avoiding spurs are provided. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355460 | RECEIVING APPARATUS, PACKET-BOUNDARY DETERMINATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - There is provided a receiving apparatus including a position detection unit configured to detect a position at which same information as predetermined synchronous information is present from an acquired stream, and a boundary determination unit configured to determine positions at which the same information as the synchronous information detected by the position detection unit appears N times, where N>1, again and again in N cycles each of which is equal to a packet length, as a packet boundary position of the stream. The boundary determination unit determines the packet boundary position on the basis of a packet-boundary-position likelihood of the positions of the same information as the synchronous information in a case where the packet boundary position is unable to be uniquely located. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355461 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENHANCED ROUND TRIP TIME (RTT) EXCHANGE - Disclosed are systems, methods and devices for obtaining round trip time measurements for use in location based services. In particular implementations, a fine timing measurement request message wirelessly transmitted by a first transceiver device to a second transceiver device may permit additional processing features in computing or applying a signal round trip time measurement. Such a signal round trip time measurement may be used in positioning operations. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355462 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENHANCED ROUND TRIP TIME (RTT) EXCHANGE - Disclosed are systems, methods and devices for obtaining round trip time measurements for use in location based services. In particular implementations, a fine timing measurement request message wirelessly transmitted by a first transceiver device to a second transceiver device may permit additional processing features in computing or applying a signal round trip time measurement. Such a signal round trip time measurement may be used in positioning operations. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355463 | Methods and System for Dynamic Spectrum Arbitrage with Mobility Management - A dynamic spectrum arbitrage (DSA) system includes a dynamic spectrum policy controller (DPC) and a dynamic spectrum controller (DSC) that together dynamically manage the allocation and use of resources (e.g., spectrum resources) across different networks. The DSC component may include wired or wireless connections to eNodeBs, a mobility management entity (MME), and various other network components. These components may be configured to communicate and perform various mobility management operations to better manage and coordinate the handling (e.g., handoffs, hand-ins, backoff, etc.) of wireless devices as they are moved with respect to the allocated resources. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355464 | TERMINAL, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING NETWORK STATE USING THE SAME - Provided are a terminal and a system and method of measuring a network state using the terminal. The system of measuring the network state according to an embodiment of the present disclosure includes a transmission terminal that transmits exploration packets, and a reception terminal that receives the exploration packets to measure an One-way Trip Time (OTT) of each of the exploration packets and calculates queuing delay using an average value of the measured OTTs and a minimum value of the measured OTTs. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355465 | Device Locationing Using Wireless Communication - A communication network of the present disclosure can determine one or more locations of communication devices within its geographic coverage area based upon one or more communication signals that are communicated within the communication network and/or between the communication network and another communication network. The communication devices within the communication network can be implemented to utilize, for example, an implicit beamforming technique to receive the one or more communication signals over multiple signal pathways. The communication devices can determine one or more characteristics of these various communication signals that are received over the multiple signal pathways to assist in determining the one or more locations. Thereafter, the communication devices can determine one or more properties of the various communication signals based upon the one or more characteristics to determine the one or more locations. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355466 | Locationing Determination Using Pilots Signals in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) - A communication network of the present disclosure can determine one or more locations of communication devices within its geographic coverage area based upon one or more communication signals that are communicated within the communication network and/or between the communication network and another communication network. The one or more communication devices within the communication network can be implemented to utilize, for example, pilot signals encoded using orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) on multiple carrier frequencies to concurrently transmit the one or more communication signals over multiple signal pathways. The communication devices can determine one or more characteristics of these various communication signals that are received over the multiple signal pathways to assist in determining the one or more locations. Thereafter, the communication devices can determine one or more properties from the one or more characteristics to determine the one or more locations. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355467 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ARRAY ANTENNA DEVICE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One or more embodiments provide a method for controlling array antenna device in a base station (BS) in a communication system. The method includes determining whether to perform a calibration operation for BSs while operating in one of a normal mode and an interference control mode. The method also includes transiting from the one of the normal mode and the interference control mode to a calibration mode based on the determining result of whether to perform the calibration operation for the BSs. A reference antenna among antennas included in the array antenna device is used in all of the normal mode, the interference control mode, and the calibration mode. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355468 | Methods and devices for notifying interference measurement signaling, interference measurement and feedback - The present disclosure provides a method for notifying an interference measurement signalling, including that: notifying, by a network side, information of M subframes included in an interference measurement subframe set or a channel quality measurement subframe set to a terminal. The present disclosure also provides a method for measuring interference, including that: receiving, by a terminal, a notification of information of an interference measurement subframe set or a quality measurement subframe set sent by a network side, performing interference measurement on each subframe of the interference measurement subframe set or the channel quality measurement subframe set, and calculating an average interference value; and determining, by the terminal, Channel Quality Indication (CQI) information according to the average interference value, and feeding the CQI information back to a base station. The present disclosure further provides a method for feeding back channel quality information, including that: performing, by a terminal, interference measurement on one or more subframes specified by a base station, determining a CQI according to the measurement result, and feeding back the CQI to the base station. The present disclosure also provides devices for implementing above methods. In the present disclosure, the base station can accurately determine a modulation and coding scheme of the terminal according to the interference measurement result, thus improving data transmission efficiency. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355469 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method for measuring the interference of user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system, and user equipment using the method. The method involves receiving an indication of a reference resource and an amount of interference correction from a base station, measuring an amount of interference in the reference resource, and correcting the measured amount of interference on the basis of the instructed amount of interference. The user equipment feeds back the corrected amount of interference and/or channel state information generated on the basis of the corrected amount of interference to the base station. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355470 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The present invention is designed to maintain reduced interference in a layered network like a HetNet and improve the overall system throughput performance. A radio base station apparatus has a normal/ABS pattern determining section ( | 12-04-2014 |
20140355471 | Method for Transmitting IDC Interference Information in Wireless Communication Systems and Apparatus for Same - The present invention relates to a method by which a first communication module of a terminal transmits IDC interference information to a base station in a wireless communication system, and to an apparatus for same. More particularly, the method includes the steps of receiving a first message instructing a specific event-related measurement setting from the base station; receiving a second message instructing the start of operations of second communication modules from one or more of the second communication modules coexisting in the terminal; measuring frequencies on the basis of information about the operating frequencies of the first and second communication modules; and transmitting the frequency measuring results to the base station when a specific event occurs. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355472 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DATA RECEIVING TERMINAL - A communication system includes a data sending terminal which sends data and a data receiving terminal which sends an acknowledgement, which indicates that the data is received, to the data sending terminal in reply to receiving the data, and the data receiving terminal includes a unit which judges whether it is necessary to resend the acknowledgement on the basis of judgment whether the data receiving terminal receives new data from the data sending terminal within a predetermined time since sending the acknowledgement. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355473 | REDUCING RATE OF MEASUREMENT CYCLES IN SUBSEQUENT DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (DRX) CYCLES - A user device performs intra-frequency measurements and inter-frequency measurements at a specified rate when the user device in a first discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle, and determines a signal condition of a signal received from a serving cell. The user device selects one of multiple lower intra-frequency rates for intra-frequency measurements in subsequent DRX cycles based on the signal condition and selects one of multiple lower inter-frequency rates for inter-frequency measurements in the subsequent DRX cycles based on the signal condition. The reduction in the rate may reduce a current drain by the user device when the user device is in the subsequent DRX cycles. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355474 | Channel Selection in Power Line Communications - A power line communication (PLC) device comprises a processor and a memory coupled to the processor. The memory is configured to store program instructions executable by the processor to cause the PLC device perform operations. One or more time slots are sequentially scan in each of a plurality of frequency bands. A packet transmitted by a second PLC device to the PLC device over one of the plurality of frequency bands is detected. Additional packets received from the second PLC device across the plurality of frequency bands based, at least in part, upon the detected packet are synchronized. The additional packets are organized in a plurality of frames, each of the plurality of frames having been transmitted by the second PLC device to the PLC device over a respective one of the plurality of frequency bands. Each frame has a plurality of time slots, and each time slot has a pair of beacon and bandscan packets, Each bandscan packet includes information indicating a frequency band distinct from any of the plurality of different frequency bands to be used by the second PLC device to communicate with the first PLC device in a direction from the second PLC device to the first PLC device. | 12-04-2014 |
20140362710 | PEER-TO-PEER AD HOC NETWORK SYSTEM FOR MONITORING A PRESENCE OF MEMBERS OF A GROUP - Embodiments include peer-to-peer ad hoc network having a group having a plurality of members, each of the plurality of members comprising a locating device, wherein the plurality of members are configured to detect an absence of one of the plurality of members from the group. The system also includes a location server configured to communicate with the locating device of at least one of the plurality of members and a supervisor device configured to receive an alert from the location server, wherein the alert is generated by the location server in response to a detection of the absence of one of the plurality of members from the group. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362711 | PERFORMANCE MONITOR, EVALUATION AND DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - A method of evaluating and diagnosing performance of an operating wireless sensor network without disturbing or burdening the network is disclosed. The operating wireless sensor network includes a plurality of operational nodes. A system, which comprises a plurality of detecting nodes and a performance evaluation and diagnosis platform, is provided in order to implement the present method. After time synchronization, the detecting node is connected with an operational node. After the detecting node estimates MAC or network layer address of its corresponding operational node, it will capture any transmission of or around the operational node, and upload captured packets to the evaluation and diagnosis platform. The evaluation and diagnosis platform produce a report by analyzing the acquired information from all detecting nodes. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362712 | RADIO OR NETWORK EVALUATION FOR SELECTION BASED ON MEASUREMENTS USING APPLICATION LAYER PROTOCOLS AT A MOBILE DEVICE - In one embodiment, a method comprises measuring a set of parameters for each of the available networks using an application layer protocol (e.g., HTTP). The method further comprises determining an overall quality level for each of the available networks based on the parameters, and choosing the network based on the overall quality level. In some embodiments, the set of parameters are measured by communicating with each of a plurality of predetermined servers within a respective network. Among other advantages, embodiments disclosed herein enable a quantified approach to user experience estimation and application-level Quality of Experience (QoE) measurements, which can serve as bases for selection of radios for the applications. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362713 | QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE ENHANCEMENT FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS BASED ON RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH AT A MOBILE DEVICE - Techniques are disclosed for network and/or evaluation and selection based on received signal strength at a device. For example, an received signal strength indicator (RSSI) can be measured (e.g., using Android API or other suitable methods). Then, the measured RSSI level can be compared against a threshold RSSI level, which can be determined on a device-by-device basis. In some embodiments, the RSSI values can assist the network evaluation and selection in certain situations, for example, where WiFi network quality is degraded because of locational movement and not backbone structure, and/or where there are multiple access points (APs) providing WiFi networks under the same SSID and each AP having different effective coverage. Further, in some embodiments, the RSSI values can provide the capabilities of WiFi AP suspension based on MAC addresses. In some embodiments, the RSSI values can be adopted to trigger QoE measurements. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362714 | NETWORK-SELECTING HYBRID FIBER COAXIAL MONITOR, SYSTEM INCLUDING SAME AND METHOD OF EMPLOYING - A device for monitoring a hybrid fiber coaxial network. The device includes a processing device and a switching mechanism in communication with, and controlled by, the processing device. The processing device is structured to receive data related to the hybrid fiber coaxial network and communicate the data via at least one of a plurality of communication pathways. The switching mechanism is structured to select from among the communication pathways the at least one pathway along which the data from the processing device is communicated in accordance with logic carried out by the processing device. The plurality of communication pathways comprises a communication pathway other than the hybrid fiber coaxial network. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362715 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR BROADBAND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA COMMUNICATION - Provided is an apparatus and method for wideband short-range wireless communication using a directional antenna in a millimeter wave band, and the method for wideband short-range wireless communication according to an embodiment may determine a first time interval and a second time interval for a cooperated data frame transfer based on a packet transmission time at each transmission from a source node to a destination node, transmit a frame to a relay node through an antenna pattern directed towards the relay node at a start point of the first time interval, and transmit the frame to the destination node through an antenna pattern directed towards the destination node after a predetermined period of time from a start point of the second time interval. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362716 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR INTER-FREQUENCY CELL MEASUREMENT - The present invention provides a method, a device, and a system for inter-frequency cell measurement. The method includes: performing, by a terminal, when receiving a measurement command of a network side device, inter-frequency cell measurement, in different cases, based on the time specified in different measurement time parameters or based on measurement time parameters corresponding to the information about an inter-frequency band. As different measurement time parameters specify different time actually used for measurement, not only an inter-frequency cell that meets a measurement event can be measured, but also the time for measurement by the terminal can be reduced, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal and enhancing the performance of the terminal. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362717 | Method and apparatus for handovers - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus comprising at least one processing core configured to determine a handover failure at the apparatus, the at least one processing core being further configured to compile information relating to the handover failure, the information comprising information on discontinuous reception, DRX, at the apparatus, the at least one processing core being further configured to cause a transmitter comprised in the apparatus to transmit the information relating to the handover failure toward a radio-access network. The information may be comprised in a handover failure report. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362718 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION STATE DISPLAY METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication terminal device performs communication with another communication terminal device through a network. The communication terminal device includes a storage unit configured to store therein thresholds for communication speed and display methods for displaying states of the communication speed for respective groups into which communication quality is categorized; an acquiring unit configured to acquire a communication speed during communication; a determining unit configured to compare the acquired communication speed with the thresholds for the communication speed stored in the storage unit and determine a display method for displaying a state of the acquired communication speed; and a display unit configured to display the state of the acquired communication speed with the determined display method. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362719 | METHODS FOR MONITORING DATA TRAFFIC IN A GATEWAY DEVICE - A method of monitoring data traffic across a gateway device connecting a first and a second networks includes comparing values obtained from data counters in the gateway device with defined amounts of data sent from the first to the second network or received from the second network in the first network. The method allows for detecting unauthorized or unwanted traffic as well as locating data loss in the first or second networks. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362720 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING MEASUREMENT REPORT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a measurement report in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for transmitting a measurement report at a UE in the wireless communication system includes measuring received strengths and reception frequencies of first and second signals, and transmitting a measurement report including a frequency offset between the first and second signals, if the received strength of the second signal is equal to or larger than a predetermined threshold. The frequency offset is used to support cooperative transmission of transmission points transmitting the first and second signals. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362721 | DETERMINATION APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING COMMUNICATION AVAILABILITY AND DETERMINATION METHOD - A determination apparatus for determining communication availability in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) scheme communication system, the determination apparatus includes a reception unit configured to receive a wireless signal including an OFDM symbol in which a pilot signal is inserted at a constant interval in a frequency axis direction, an obtaining unit configured to obtain a discrete sample signal by sampling the wireless signal, a correlation value calculation unit configured to calculate a correlation value of the discrete sample signal for a time shift amount that is defined in advance according to the constant interval, and a determination unit configured to determine the communication availability in the communication system based on at least a result of determination whether the correlation value for the time shift amount has a peak or not. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362722 | COMPONENT CARRIER ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION USING RESOURCE ASSIGNMENTS - This invention relates to a proposal of an uplink resource assignment format and a downlink resource assignment format. Furthermore, the invention relates to the use of the new uplink/downlink resource assignments in methods for (de)activation of downlink component carrier(s) configured for a mobile terminal, a base station and a mobile terminal. To enable efficient and robust (de)activation of component carriers, while minimizing the signaling overhead, the invention proposes a new uplink/downlink resource assignment format that allow the activation/deactivation of individual downlink component carriers configured for a mobile. The new uplink or downlink resource assignment comprises an indication of the activation state of the configured downlink component carriers, i.e. indicate which downlink component carrier(s) is/are to be activated or deactivated. This indication is for example implemented by means of a bit-mask that indicates which of the configured uplink component carriers are to be activated respectively deactivated. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369210 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL TX/RX AMSDU SIZE BASED ON THE NEGOTIATED MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT IN THE TUNNEL BETWEEN A CONTROLLER AND AN ACCESS POINT - A method includes selecting upstream and downstream aggregated MAC service data unit (AMSDU) sizes for communications between a client device, an access point, and an controller in a network system. The upstream and downstream AMSDU sizes may be separately selected based on the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for communications in a secure tunnel between the controller and the access point to avoid fragmentation and reassembly of AMSDUs transmitted in a single MTU. The upstream and downstream AMSDU sizes may be selected to be less or equal to the MTU size. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369211 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPORTING OF COMMUNICATION PATH QUALITY WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method includes identifying multiple statistics associated with each of multiple wireless connections. The multiple wireless connections form a single communication path between two wireless nodes in a wireless network. The method also includes identifying an overall quality associated with the communication path using the statistics. The method can also include assigning a quality value to each statistic for each wireless connection, where the overall quality is based on at least one of the quality values assigned to the statistics (such as a lowest of the quality values). The statistics could include a Received Signal Quality Indicator (RSQI), a Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI), and a transmit success/fail ratio. The quality value assigned to each statistic could include a “good” quality, a “fair” quality, or a “poor” quality. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369212 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING RELIABILITY OF WIRELESS NETWORK HAVING ASYMMETRIC OR OTHER LOW QUALITY WIRELESS LINKS - A method includes receiving link quality information associated with multiple wireless connections in a wireless network. The method also includes identifying at least one asymmetric communication path in the wireless network using the link quality information. The link quality information could include a statistical value for each of the wireless connections. Identifying the at least one asymmetric communication path could include identifying a first and a second of the statistical values associated with a first and a second of the wireless connections, respectively, and determining whether a difference between the first and second statistical values exceeds a threshold. The method could further include applying a heuristic to indicate that the first and second wireless connections do not form an asymmetric communication path even if the difference between the first and second statistical values exceeds the threshold. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369213 | METHOD FOR ESTIMATING CHANNEL BASED ON IEEE 802.11 ad WITH LOW COMPLEXITY - Exemplary embodiments of the present invention relate to a method of estimating a channel in a wireless communication network using the IEEE 802.11ad communication standard, and more particularly, to a method of estimating a channel which can determine a channel environment and actively select a channel estimation scheme according to the determined channel environment, and correctly estimate the channel while reducing the amount of computation by selectively using a pilot channel estimation value only in a pilot estimation period and adjacent pilot estimation periods when the channel changes severely, i.e., when a deep hole occurs, in the pilot estimation period although an LTF channel estimation value is used. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369214 | DEVICE FOR STORING AND RETRIEVING LOGS STORING AND TESTING CIRCUITS - Disclosed is a device for storing and retrieving log files and testing circuits that includes a Control and Management Module, a Network Interface Module and a Serial Interface Module. The Network Interface Module connects with an SFP interface of data transport network to supply power and achieve a network connection. The Serial Interface Module connects to a serial port of equipment to store the output logs into the device. Remote management equipment can access the inventive device via telnet or other means. The device can be conveniently carried and installed and can work automatically after power up, which avoids taking additional power from the equipment room and saves on installation space. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369215 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING LINK QUALITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for measuring a link quality in a wireless communication are provided. The method of a receiver for measuring the link quality in the wireless communication system includes determining a modulation type for each of at least one reception stream received through at least one antenna based on a modulation order and channel information regarding each of signals transmitted from a plurality of transmission antennas, searching for a parameter corresponding to the determined modulation type from a pre-stored parameter table in which parameters for each modulation type are stored, and calculating a channel capacity for each of the at least one reception streams received through the at least one antenna by using the searched parameter. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369216 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND TERMINAL - Reception power of a terminal for a first communication scheme is measured. A propagation path loss between a base station and the terminal is calculated. The propagation path loss is estimated in a case where communications are conducted using a second communication scheme, and reception power of the terminal is estimated from output of the base station for the second communication scheme and the estimated propagation path loss. If the sufficiency and stability of the reception power are assumed, the switching from the first communication scheme to the second communication scheme is done. In this way, stable communications using the second communication scheme are ensured. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369217 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING MINIMUM GUARANTEED RESOURCE AMOUNT TO ACCESS POINT IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method in which an upper layer entity allocates resources to a plurality of access points (APs) in a wireless access system, including the plurality of APs and the upper layer entity for managing the plurality of APs, the method comprising the step of: sensing a change in minimum guaranteed resource amount allocated to each of the APs; acquiring, from each of the APs, AP-level topology information according to a degree of interference with adjacent APs and AP weight information given to each AP by a service provider; determining a minimum guaranteed resource amount for each of the APs based on the acquired AP-level topology information and AP weight information; and transmitting the determined minimum guaranteed resource amount to each of the APs. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369218 | MEASUREMENT ON A DATA FLOW IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method performing a measurement on a data flow at a node of a communication network, the data flow including data units transmitted during first and second block periods marked by respective first and second marking values, the first and second block periods alternating in time. The method includes, at the node, during a current block period: a) determining a first parameter relating to the data units received at the node during a preceding block period; b) receiving from a further node of the transmission path a first data structure including a second parameter relating to data units transmitted to the node during the preceding block period; c) processing the first parameter and the second parameter for providing a result of the measurement on the data flow; and d) transmitting to a still further node of the transmission path a second data structure including the first parameter. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369219 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION, BASE STATION AND NETWORK CENTRAL PROCESSING DEVICE - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for estimating channel quality information, a base station and a network central processing device. According to the embodiments of the present invention, a macro cell includes multiple transmission points, the method can comprise receiving the channel quality information which is measured by a user equipment based on a cell specific reference signal; obtaining channel matrix information the multiple transmission points; calculating beamforming information on a single cell transmission and a coordinated multi-point transmission based on the channel matrix information; and estimating the channel quality information for the single cell transmission and the coordinated multi-point transmission based on the channel quality information, the channel matrix information, and the beamforming information. With embodiments of the present invention, it is possible to provide coordinated multi-point gains with no overhead introduced and it is compatible with the existing available user equipments. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369220 | Uplink Power Control For MU-MIMO | 12-18-2014 |
20140369221 | METHOD FOR CHANGING TDD UPLINK AND DOWNLINK CONFIGURATION - The present invention provides a method for changing TDD uplink and downlink configuration, including: UE measures interference from the adjacent cells′ UE and reports an interference condition to an eNB; the eNB changes current TDD uplink and downlink configuration according to the interference condition reported by the UE and the current uplink and downlink service requirements. By the present invention, the dynamically changed uplink and downlink service load requirements may be adapted when there is no serious interference between adjacent cells. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369222 | METHOD FOR ESTIMATING NETWORK JITTER IN APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CODED MEDIA DATA - The present invention relates to a method for estimating network jitter, which has the effect of more precisely estimating network jitter by using time information corresponding to a transmission time, which is transmitted from a transport layer in a transmitting end to a receiving end. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369223 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is designed to detect an S-cell efficiently, in a short time, upon carrier aggregation in a HetNet. In a communication system where carrier aggregation is executed between a first carrier (CC #1) and a second carrier (CC #2), a macro base station apparatus ( | 12-18-2014 |
20140369224 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER TERMINAL, AND CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION MEASUREMENT METHOD - The present invention is designed to provide a wireless communication system, a base station apparatus, a user terminal, and a channel state information measurement method that can allow a user terminal to feed back channel quality information that is optimal for a transmission mode from a plurality of transmission points. A wireless communication system according to the present invention provides a base station apparatus having a determining section that determines resource information about resources to allocate the reference signal for measuring desired signals to, and resource for measuring interference signals, and a reporting section that reports the resource information to the user terminal, and the user terminal having a receiving section that receives the reported resource information, a measurement section that measures desired signals and interference signals based on the resource information, and a measurement section that measures the channel state using the measurement results of the measurement section. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369225 | METHOD AND SENSOR SYSTEM FOR MEASURING THE PROPERTIES OF A TRANSMISSION PATH OF A MEASURING SYSTEM BETWEEN A TRANSMITTER AND A RECEIVER - Method and sensor system for measuring the transmission properties of a first transmission path based on feedback compensation between a first transmitter and a receiver, a compensation signal of a compensation transmitter being received in a superimposed manner in the receiver in addition to the emitted transmission signal of the first transmitter. A supply signal for the first transmitter and a receiver output signal each form a vector in a pre-Hilbert space. A Hilbert projection is performed between the receiver output signal and the supply signal so that a projection image signal is generated. An output signal is formed from the projection image signal. A pre-signal is generated by an inverse transformation of the output signal with the supply signal. A compensation signal for supplying the compensation transmitter is generated from the pre-signal formed in order to achieve feedback control of the receiver output signal. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369226 | Adaptive Partial Packet Decoding - A user device receives packets from a base station. The user device may invoke decoding while the packet is still being received, based on the incomplete contents of a given packet. This “partial packet decoding” relies on the fact that the underlying information in the packet is encoded with redundancy (code rate less than one). If link quality is poor, the partial packet decoding is likely to be unsuccessful, i.e., to fail in its attempt to recover the underlying information. To avoid waste of power, the user device may be configured to apply one or more tests of link quality prior to invoking the partial packet decoding on a current packet. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369227 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COMPUTATION OF CHANNEL LOSS RATE AND COLLISION LOSS RATE OF COMMUNICATION LINK(S) IN A RANDOM ACCESS NETWORK - A method is intended for computing online channel loss rate and collision loss rate of at least one communication link established between nodes (N | 12-18-2014 |
20140376390 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ANALYZING THE QUALITY OF A CELL IN A MOBILE DEVICE NETWORK - A method for analyzing a mobile radio network including the steps of collecting traffic data from call monitoring equipment connected to the mobile radio network, collecting signaling data from network monitoring equipment connected to the mobile radio network, correlating the traffic data and the signaling data related to a cell of the mobile radio network. and creating a graphical display of the correlated traffic data and the signaling data. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376391 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods for determining quality measures for communication paths that can be used to conduct telephony communications determine and record quality measures for each of a plurality of paths during different times of the day and different days of the week. This information is used to determine and record measures of how the quality of each path varies over predetermined periods of time. When it is necessary to select a path for the setup of a new telephony communication, information regarding the anticipated quality of different potential paths, and information regarding how that quality is expected to vary over the duration of the telephony communication are used to select a path for the telephony communication. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376392 | PARALLEL SCANNING OF WIRELESS CHANNELS - Methods, systems, and apparatus for parallel scanning of channels in communication networks are described herein. A parallel scanning device performs a scanning operation that includes parallel (i.e., simultaneous) scanning of channels that are in a common frequency band or in different frequency bands. The parallel scanning of channels results in a reduction of scan time, which reduces power consumption. Furthermore, a scanning operation may undesirably interrupt and/or delay normal communication traffic to and from the parallel scanning device, and the comparatively shorter scan time resulting from the parallel scanning operation can reduce such interruption and/or delay. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376393 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY REPORTING INTER-SYSTEM MEASUREMENT CAPABILITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Aspects of the disclosure provide apparatus and methods of inter-system measurements operable at a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication network. The UE establishes a connection with a network node in a first wireless communication network utilizing a first radio access technology (RAT), wherein the UE is capable of measuring a plurality of frequency bands of a second RAT greater in number than a measurement capability report limit of the first RAT. The UE further selects a subset of the plurality of frequency bands of the second RAT to be included in a measurement capability information element (IE) based on information provided by the network node and information stored at the UE. The UE further transmits the measurement capability IE to the network node. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376394 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication apparatus, includes: a packet processing unit that processes an incoming packet based on a processing rule corresponding to the incoming packet among a plurality of processing rules set from a control apparatus; a statistical value measurement unit that measures a statistical value obtained from a processing amount corresponding to each of the plurality of processing rules; and a processing rule management unit that determines whether or not each of the processing rules is effective based on the statistical value. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376395 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL - Provided are a method and an apparatus for monitoring a control channel in a sub-frame including a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexings (OFDMs) in a time division duplex (TDD)-based wireless communication system. A wireless device monitors a downlink control channel in at least one OFDM symbol after an OFDM symbol receives a primary synchronization signal (PSS) in the sub-frame. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376396 | METHOD FOR REPORTING SERVICE QUALITY FOR OVER THE TOP SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK | 12-25-2014 |
20140376397 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING POSITION OF USER EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SAME IN WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for determining position of a user equipment in a wireless mobile communication system. The method comprises receiving a plurality of subframes including reference signals for positioning of the user equipment from a plurality of base stations periodically with a predetermined period of time; and determining position of the user equipment using reference signal time difference (RSTD) between the reference signals for positioning of the user equipment included in the received plurality of subframes, wherein a pattern of the reference signals for positioning of the user equipment is generated by repeating a diagonal mother matrix with dimension of 6×6, the pattern of the reference signals are mapped to orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols of the subframe, and the reference signals for positioning of the user equipment in a OFDM symbol in which common reference signal (CRS) is transmitted are punctured. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376398 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF UPLINK INTERFERENCE COORDINATION IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - The present invention relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a method and apparatus of uplink interference coordination in a heterogeneous network. The method includes: monitoring uplink channel quality of terminal equipment; acquiring an uplink almost blank subframe when uplink interference appears, with terminal equipment in a Macro cell in the uplink almost blank subframe transmitting at reduced transmission power or no transmission power; and scheduling the terminal equipment subjected to uplink interference on the uplink almost blank subframe to perform uplink communication. With the embodiments of the present invention, interference brought by the uplink data transmission of the terminal equipment of the Macro cell to the uplink reception of the terminal equipment of the Pico cell may be avoided, thereby ensuring the uplink channel quality of the terminal equipment in the Pico cell. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376399 | Managing the Bandwidth of a Communication Session - A system includes a processor operable to identify each of a plurality of first video packets from a communication session with a first identifier designating that bandwidth is reserved on the network for the packet, and identify each of a plurality of second video packets from the communication session with a second identifier designating that bandwidth is not reserved on the network for the packet. The system further includes an interface operable to initiate transmission of the plurality of first video packets and the plurality of second video packets in the communication session. | 12-25-2014 |
20150009836 | Side Information for Channel State Information Reporting in Wireless Systems - In MIMO systems employing closed loop link adaptation, channel state information reporting can be enhanced using various types of side information, such as scheduling information indicating constraints on the scheduler related to the generation of downlink MIMO signals. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009837 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - In a radio communication system in which a radio communication apparatus performs communication with another apparatus via a radio relay apparatus, a communication quality value indicating communication quality between the radio communication apparatus and the radio relay apparatus is measured, a threshold for deciding a level of the communication quality is determined on the basis of a past tendency of the communication quality value, and transmission of contents between the radio communication apparatus and the other apparatus is blocked while a present value of the communication quality is smaller than the threshold. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009838 | TRANSMISSION RANK SELECTION WHEN DEPLOYING A SHARED RADIO CELL - The present disclosure concerns radio communication. In one of its aspects, the technology presented herein concerns a method performed by a base station | 01-08-2015 |
20150009839 | INTERFERENCE CONTROL METHOD, INTERFERENCE CONTROL APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An interference control method including: receiving actual reception qualities of wireless signals that are measured by a wireless terminal, each of the wireless signals being sent from each of base stations, estimating future reception qualities after a specified period based on the actual reception qualities, estimating, for each of combinations of transmission powers of the base stations, corresponding interference based on the future reception qualities, and setting each of transmission powers of the base stations based on one of the combinations of transmission powers that is selected based on the corresponding interference. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009840 | PACKET TIME STAMP PROCESSING METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND APPARATUS - Methods, systems, and apparatus for monitoring network devices and identifying packet anomalies are described herein. Anomalies may be identified by receiving packets from a network device at a network monitor, each packet having a first time stamp added by the network device, adding a second time stamp to the packets by the network monitor, comparing the first time stamp and the second time stamp of each packet, and identifying an anomaly associated with a packet in response to a difference metric generated based on the first and second time stamps exceeding a threshold. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009841 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FORMATING VIRTUAL CELL IN A VIRTUAL CELL NETWORK SYSTEM - An apparatus is configured to perform a method for providing a wireless communication service to at least one User Equipment (UE) from among a plurality of UEs having links established with a distributed small Base Station (BS) in a Virtual Cell Network (VCN) system in which a plurality of virtual cells exist within one macro cell. The method includes selecting at least one UE to which a wireless communication service is to be provided in a virtual cell, calculating a feedback allocation amount for each of the selected at least one UE, by sharing path losses and user characteristics measured and determined on a UE basis by each of the plurality of virtual cells, and providing information about the calculated feedback allocation amount to the selected at least one UE. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009842 | REVERSE POWER METERING - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for determining power provided by network terminals ( | 01-08-2015 |
20150009843 | BASE STATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR DETERMINING ALLOWABLE OVERLAP NUMBER, ALLOWABLE OVERLAP NUMBER DETERMINATION PROGRAM, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING ALLOWABLE OVERLAP NUMBER, AND ALLOWABLE OVERLAP NUMBER TRANSMISSION PROGRAM - An interference amount index obtaining unit | 01-08-2015 |
20150009844 | Cooperation Mechanism to Lower Stand-By Power Consumption - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for enabling lower power consumption. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include establishing, by an apparatus, a first wide area network access link to a wide area network including a base station; establishing, by the apparatus, a wireless local link to at least one other apparatus; and placing the first wide area network access link on hold to allow data transmission to the wide area network to occur through the wire-less local link to the at least one other apparatus and a second wide area network access link coupling the at least one other apparatus to the wide area network. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009845 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Uplink CoMP point selection is achieved, considering power consumption of a MTC device and uplink overhead. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009846 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING IN HOME NETWORK DEPLOYMENTS - Method for analysing at a remote server a problem of a home network, comprising the following steps performed at the remote server which is connected through the internet with the home network: storing reference data of at least one home network performance parameter covering a frequency band, said reference data corresponding with a normal behaviour of the home network; obtaining, through the internet, measurement data of said at least one home network performance parameter covering said frequency band; comparing said measurement data with said reference data to determine qualification data qualifying the problem. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009847 | TERMINAL DEVICE, WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND CHANNEL ESTIMATION METHOD - The present invention adopts a configuration such that when cooperative reception by a plurality of base stations is not applied, a reference signal sequence determined from a selection baseline value corresponding to the number of a sequence group allocated to a cell belonging to the device in question is selected from among a plurality of selection baseline values as a reference signal sequence for non-cooperative reception, whereas when cooperative reception by a plurality of base stations is applied, a reference signal sequence determined from one or more intermediate selection baseline values set between two adjacent selection baseline values corresponding to the number of a sequence group allocated individually to a terminal device is selected among the plurality of selection baseline values as a reference signal sequence for cooperative reception differing from the reference signal sequence for non-cooperative reception. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009848 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, USER TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A user terminal reports a group radio quality of each of radio resource groups to a base station at a first frequence. The base station reports an allocated radio resource group to be allocated for radio communication with the user terminal to the user terminal. The user terminal reports unit radio qualities of radio resource units contained in the allocated radio resource group to the base station at a second frequence that is higher than the first frequence. The base station performs radio resource scheduling based on the unit radio qualities. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009849 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDING BACK INFORMATION, AND TERMINAL - A method for feeding back information includes: measuring a CQI of a link between each coordinated transmitting node in a coordinated transmitting node set and a terminal,; using the CQI of and an RI value corresponding to the link between each coordinated transmitting node and the terminal as parameters of a spectral efficiency calculation function, and obtaining a spectral efficiency value corresponding to the link between each coordinated transmitting node and the terminal; when a value of the selection criterion function is less than or equal to a preconfigured comparison threshold value, selecting a corresponding coordinated transmitting node as a preferred coordinated transmitting node; and sending information of the preferred coordinated transmitting node to a transmitting end for selection. This may reduce uplink feedback overheads and enable the transmitting end to quickly determine the preferred coordinated transmitting node. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009850 | Method for Wireless Communication in A Device with Co-Existence Radio - Various methods for wireless communication in a device with co-existed/co-located radios are provided. Multiple communication radio transceivers are coexisted/co-located in a user equipment (UE) having in-device coexistence (IDC) capability, which may result in IDC interference. For example, the UE is equipped with both LTE radio and some ISM band applications such as WiFi and Bluetooth modules. In a first method, the network identifies IDC capability by UE identification (e.g., UE ID). In a second method, the UE intentionally performs cell selection or reselection to cells in non-ISM frequency bands. In a third method, the UE signals the existence of ISM band applications via capability negotiation. In a fourth method, the UE signals the activation of ISM band applications by signaling messages (e.g., RRC message or MAC CE). Under the various methods, the UE and its serving eNB can apply FDM or TDM solutions to mitigate the IDC interference. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009851 | PRECODING METHOD, BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a precoding method, a base station and a user equipment. The precoding method comprises: a base station acquires predetermined parameter(s) of at least one user equipment; calculates the acquired predetermined parameter(s) to obtain a calculation performance index; selects a target precoding solution according to the calculation performance index; precodes data information of all the user equipment(s) according to the target precoding solution; if the target precoding solution is a nonlinear precoding solution, sends the data information and indication signaling indicating information of the nonlinear precoding solution to each user equipment; and the user equipment receives the data information and the indication signaling which are sent by the base station; selects a receiver according to a receiver type obtained according to the indication signaling; and detects the received data information using the selected receiver. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009852 | DOWNLINK CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION ACQUISITION METHOD AND DEVICE - A downlink channel quality information acquisition method includes: a transmission node in a coordinated node set acquires the noise receiving power of a user equipment (UE | 01-08-2015 |
20150009853 | Method, Device and User Equipment for Transmitting Multi-Cell Scheduling Information - A method, device and user equipment (UE) for transmitting multi-cell scheduling information is provided. When at least two cells are serving the UE, the method for transmitting multi-cell scheduling information includes determining a main cell of the UE from the at least two cells and transmitting, in the main cell, the scheduling information of the main cell and an auxiliary cell which are serving the UE. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009854 | METHOD FOR REPORTING THE RESULTS OF SPECIFIC REFERENCE-CELL-BASED QUALITY MEASUREMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION, AND APPARATUS FOR THE METHOD - The present invention relates to a method in which a terminal reports the results of quality measurement based on a specific reference cell from among a plurality of serving cells for the terminal in a mobile communication system using carrier aggregation. The present invention also relates to a terminal apparatus for the method. For this purpose, the terminal receives measurement configuration information from a network, performs a quality measurement in accordance with the received measurement configuration information, determines whether or not a report criterion based on a specific reference cell from among the plurality of cells for the terminal is met in accordance with the measurement result, and, if the report criterion based on the specific reference cell is met, sends a report message, including the measurement results and an indicator that indicates the specific reference cell, to the network. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009855 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HIGH RATE OFDM COMMUNICATIONS - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009856 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, NODE, AND MONITORING NODE - A first node selects a selection node that is the send source of a packet with the highest received radio wave intensity from among packets received from a plurality of second node. The first node sends, to the selection node, a report packet that stores therein an identifier that specifies each of a plurality of first nodes and whose destination is a third node. The second node adds an identifier that specifies each of the plurality of second nodes to the report packet that was received from the first node with the received radio wave intensity that is equal to or greater than a predetermined value among the report packets which are transmitted by the plurality of first nodes and relays the report packet to the third node. The third node detects a node corresponding to the identifier that is not included in the report packets received. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016281 | BEACON FRAME DATA TRANSMISSION RATE ADJUSTMENT - Access to an access point is restricted to a plurality of client devices having wireless connections with the access point. The wireless connections conform to a wireless networking protocol. A first data transmission rate is the lowest data transmission rate defined by the wireless networking protocol. It is determined that a second data transmission rate is used between a first client device of the plurality of client devices and the access point. The second data transmission rate is the lowest data transmission rate used by the plurality of client devices. The second data transmission rate is greater than the first data transmission rate. Responsive to said determining that the second data transmission rate is the lowest data transmission rate used by the plurality of client devices, a beacon frame data transmission rate is set to the second data transmission rate. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016282 | MULTIPLE CELL MEASUREMENT AND DATA RECEPTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Methods, apparatuses and computer readable media are described that configure wireless circuitry of a wireless communication device connected to a wireless network. Processing circuitry in the wireless communication device establishes a connection to a access network subsystem of the wireless network using a plurality of radio frequency carriers and provides an indication of wireless circuitry included therein. The wireless network provides a measurement gap configuration, and the wireless communication device suspends communication on at least one carrier and measures signals from one or more additional access network subsystems during a measurement gap time period. The wireless communication device provides a measurement report to the access network subsystem based at least in part on measured signals. In an embodiment, the wireless communication device also receives downlink communication from the wireless network during at least a portion of the measurement gap time period. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016283 | MANAGING QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - A computer-implemented method, computer program product, and computing system is provided for managing quality of service for communication sessions. In an implementation, a method may include monitoring a performance attribute of a computing system hosting a plurality of communication sessions. The method may also include determining that the performance attribute of the computing system exceeds a defined threshold. The method may further include adjusting a characteristic of a communication activity associated with at least one of the plurality of communication sessions to achieve a threshold quality of service associated with one or more of the communication sessions. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016284 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION CONTROL FOR IMPROVED AGGREGATED CELL THROUGHPUT CAPACITY AND SIGNALING RELIABILITY - A wireless transmission control capability may be used to control downlink (DL) transmissions for a set of wireless user devices or for an individual wireless user device. A DL transmission control capability for a set of wireless user devices may include receiving DL channel operating parameter information associated with a set of cells, determining DL channel operating parameter distribution information based on the DL channel operating parameter information, and determining default DL channel operating parameter information for the set of cells based on the DL channel operating parameter distribution information and a target associated with the set of cells. A DL transmission control capability for an individual wireless user device may include determining radio link layer (RLL) retransmission information associated with a wireless user device and determining, based on the RLL retransmission information associated with the wireless user device, whether to modify an attribute of the wireless user device. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016285 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO HANDLE CODEC CHANGES IN CALL QUALITY CALCULATIONS - The embodiments described herein relate to obtaining one or more measurements from a VOIP communication that is indicative of call quality, changing one or more settings of the VOIP communication, such as the type of codec or the ascribed bit rate of a VBR codec, and determining call quality of the VOIP communication after setting changes by utilizing at least one of the one or more call quality measurements. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016286 | Tracing Network Packets by a Cluster of Network Controllers - Some embodiments provide a method for a first network controller that manages a set of logical forwarding elements implemented in several managed forwarding elements. The method receives a request to trace a specified packet having a particular source on a logical forwarding element. The method generates the packet according to the packet specification. The generated packet includes an indicator that the packet is for a trace operation. The method sends the packet to a second network controller that manages a managed forwarding element associated with the particular source. The method receives a first set of messages regarding operations performed on the packet from a set of network controllers that receives a second set of messages regarding operations performed on the packet from a set of managed forwarding elements that process the packet. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016287 | Tracing Network Packets Through Logical and Physical Networks - Some embodiments provide a method for a network controller that manages a plurality of managed forwarding elements. The method receives a request to trace a specified packet having a particular source on a logical forwarding element. The method generates the packet according to the packet specification. The generated packet includes an indicator that the packet is for a trace operation. The method inserts the packet into a managed forwarding element associated with the particular source such that the managed forwarding element processes the packet as though the packet was received from the particular source. The method receives, from a set of managed forwarding elements, a set of messages regarding logical processing operations and physical forwarding operations that each managed forwarding element in the set of managed forwarding elements performs on the packet. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016288 | Methods, Apparatus and Computer Programs for Controlling Feedback about Channel Conditions - A user equipment (UE) provides feedback about channel conditions. From a set of primary sub-bands subject to channel state information reporting by the UE, there is identified one or more of the primary sub-bands for reporting channel quality with a finer frequency-domain granularity than other primary sub-bands of the set ( | 01-15-2015 |
20150016289 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROXY BASE STATION - A method for a proxy base station includes analyzing current network parameters, determining parameters for the proxy base station based on the analyzed network parameters, and transmitting the determined parameters for the proxy base station to an actual base station of the network. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016290 | SMALL CELL INTERFERENCE EMULATOR - A heterogeneous network scenario is simulated using a combination of real cells, real user devices, and a multi-cell network emulator which provides emulated cells, emulated real devices, and channel emulation. The multi-cell network emulator may utilize playback files and signals from the real cells and real user devices to generate emulated cell signals and emulated real device signals. Further, a single real signal can be utilized to generate multiple emulated signals. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016291 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING MU-MIMO INTERFERENCE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One or more embodiments discloses a method of measuring interference by an evolved NodeB and an eNB device. The method includes configuring one or more first type interference measurement resources in a User Equipment (UE). The method also includes transmitting signals for a plurality of UEs within a cell range of the eNB to the one or more first type interference measurement resources. The method also includes receiving channel status information generated in accordance with a signal received in the one or more first type interference measurement resources. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016292 | METHOD FOR MEASURING INTENSITY OF INTERFERENCE SIGNAL BASED ON CSI-RS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed is a method for measuring the intensity of an interference signal by a terminal in a wireless communication system. More particularly, a method for measuring the intensity of an interference signal from a first base station by a terminal in a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) environment comprises: a step of receiving a plurality of channel status information-reference signals (CSI-RSs) from a second base station; a step of receiving downlink signals output from a plurality of resource element (RE) pairs corresponding to the respective plurality of CSI-RSs from the first base station; and a step of measuring a plurality of interference intensities based on the plurality of CSI-RSs and the received downlink signals. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016293 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CANCELLING INTERFERENCE - A method and apparatus are disclosed for canceling interference. The method includes: composing a cooperative group with multiple adjacent evolved NodeB (eNB); each eNB in the cooperative group sending frame structure configuration information to each eNB other than itself in the cooperative group every other frame structure change cycle; and each eNB in the cooperative group configuring a frame structure to be used in a next frame structure change cycle according to the received frame structure configuration information. With introducing 10 ms-dynamic frame structure switching, this method and apparatus can cancel the mutual interference of uplink and downlink, especially the mutual interference of uplink and downlink between the eNBs at the system side. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016294 | LINK AGGREGATION APPARATUS - A timeout value determining method of a link aggregation apparatus includes receiving link aggregated packets from a plurality of links, the link aggregated packets flowing on a packet flow between two end hosts, determining a delay relating to a remote host within the two end hosts, reordering the link aggregated packets based on an order in the packet flow, and calculating, by using a processor, a timeout value corresponding to each of the links based on a packet loss and the delay, each timeout value is used to wait reception of a packet from a corresponding link. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016295 | Methods of Channel State Information Feedback and Transmission in Coordinated Multi-Point Wireless Communications System - A method of operating an eNB in a wireless communication network is provided, wherein the eNB is configured for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission. The method comprises determining, by the eNB, whether to use a fall back transmission scheme for communicating with a UE in the network, wherein the fall back transmission scheme is different from a regular transmission scheme. The method further comprises transmitting, by the eNB, data using the fall back transmission scheme in one or more selected subframes and/or on selected frequency resources. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016296 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH INTEGRATED LOCATION-BASED MEASUREMENTS FOR DIAGNOSTICS AND PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION - A radio communication system includes at least one receive antenna for receiving communication signals, processing circuitry for processing the received communication signals and repeating the signals for further transmission, and at least one transmit antenna for transmitting the repeated signals. The processing circuitry is operable for receiving an input regarding the current geographic location of the communication system. The processing circuitry is further capable of recording measurements and data regarding the operation and use of the radio communication system and its operating environment including where and when the measurements and data were taken. The processing circuitry further provides a user interface and capabilities to analyze and visualize the recorded information to diagnose problems and optimize performance. Additionally, the recorded information can be transmitted to a remote server where can be used to determine optimal operational settings for other radio communication systems when they are operating in the same location where the measurements were taken, and these operational settings can be transmitted to these other radio communications systems prior to their use in these locations. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016297 | METHODS FOR ESTIMATION AND INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION FOR SIGNAL PROCESSING - A receiver in a CDMA system comprises a front end processor that generates a combined signal per source. A symbol estimator processes the combined signal to produce symbol estimates. An S-Matrix Generation module refines these symbol estimates based on the sub channel symbol estimates. An interference canceller is configured for cancelling interference from at least one of the plurality of received signals for producing at least one interference-cancelled signal. | 01-15-2015 |
20150023184 | Fast Scan Algorithm for Higher Priority Service Search - In a wireless communication system, techniques and devices are presented that can perform fast scan algorithms from a lower priority service, e.g., following a circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) voice call, to search for a higher priority network or technology to select. The higher priority network might be an LTE technology network or a high priority PLMN. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023185 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE OF A RELAY SCHEMED TO FACILITATE EFFICIENT BROADCAST COMMUNICATION IN DEVICE TO DEVICE ENVIRONMENT - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with improving packet communication in a broadcast D2D communication system. In an example, a communications device is equipped to receive a first packet during a first timeslot from a broadcast transmitter, measure a power level of a NACK received during the first timeslot, receive the first packet during a second timeslot, and determine whether to transmit the first packet during the second timeslot based on the measured power level of the NACK. In such an aspect in which the communications device determines that the measured power level of the NACK is above a threshold power level, the communications device may act as a relay and transmit the first packet during the second timeslot. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023186 | EFFICIENT NETWORK PROBING FOR DETERMINISTIC WIRELESS NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a device (e.g., path computation device) informs a network management device of a plurality of possible probing profiles, where nodes of a computer network receive the plurality of possible probing profiles from the network management device. Based on determining that particular information is desired from one or more particular nodes of the nodes of the computer network, the device may then select one or more particular probing profiles of the plurality of possible probing profiles based on the particular information, and instructs the one or more particular nodes to probe one or more particular destination nodes according to the one or more particular probing profiles. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023187 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE SAME - A method of operating a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The WLAN includes an access point supporting uplink multiple user multiple input multiple output mode. The method of operating the WLAN system includes selecting a first station, receiving channel information from the selected first station by a second station, calculating a SNR reduction value based on the channel information by the second station, and selecting the second station based on the SNR reduction value. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023188 | COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS OF WIRELESS DEVICES - A plurality of wireless devices which communicate with at least one other device are simultaneously tested using a test regime which includes a plurality of corresponding comparative tasks. Commencement of each task by all wireless devices is synchronized. Test results are analyzed and a side-by-side comparison is provided on an overall, per task type, and per task basis. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023189 | PACKET ANALYSIS DEVICE AND PACKET ANALYZING METHOD - A packet analysis device includes a processor that executes a process including receiving a packet to be transmitted to a terminal device through a relay device, calculating a delay time indicating time taken by the relay device from start to completion of the transmission of the packet according to the received packet, and analyzing communication quality between the relay device and the terminal device when a reception interval of the packet is longer than the delay time. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023190 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATION BASED CELL RESELECTION AND HANDOVERS - A method and apparatus are disclosed that enable a client terminal to decode additional information about one or more neighboring cells while maintaining connection with a serving cell. This enables the client terminal to resume the normal user data reception and transmission faster when compared to conventional methods. A result of this is reduced latency and improved user experience under cell reselection or handover conditions, which is especially beneficial for real time services such as voice, video and media streaming. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023191 | CELL AND MOBILE TERMINAL DISCOVERLY METHOD - Cell and terminal discovery methods are disclosed. A discovery method performed in a terminal may include transmitting a trigger signal; receiving a discovery signal from at least one cell which receives the trigger signal; measuring the discovery signal; and reporting a measurement result of the discovery signal to a serving cell. Therefore, cell and terminal discoveries may be performed efficiently in cellular mobile communication systems. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023192 | DETECTING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR A TERMINAL - The present invention provides a detecting method and device for a terminal and relates to the communications field, which can, when cell broadcast and paging messages cannot be acquired in time, read system information proactively within an appropriate time to acquire an enabled or disabled state of cell broadcast at that time, and, according to the current state, continue or stop receiving cell broadcast information messages, so as to decrease unnecessary decoding operations, reduce power consumption of the terminal, increase a cell broadcast message receiving rate, and save communication resources. This is implemented by defining a first time on a terminal and attempting to decode common traffic channel information in a cycle preset by a hysteresis timer, and further, attempting to receive system information according to different decoding results, and finally, according to a system state indicated in the system information, taking an action to continue or stop the reception. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023193 | CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATION WITH FILTERED INTERFERENCE - A plurality of interference measurements are obtained at a first communication device. The interference measurements correspond to interference experienced by the first communication device. A filter is applied to the plurality of interference measurements to obtain a filtered interference measurement, wherein the filtered interference measurement is a function of a current interference measurement and one or more past interference measurements. A channel quality indicator (CQI) corresponding to a communication channel between the first communication device and a second communication device is determined based at least in part on the filtered interference measurement. The CQI is transmitted from the first communication device to the second communication device. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023194 | METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE METHOD - Disclosed is a method for transceiving channel state information in a wireless access system and an apparatus for the method. More particularly, the method comprises: a step of receiving, from user equipment, channel state information measurement capability indicating the total number of pieces of channel state information which can be measured by the user equipment; a step of transmitting, to the user equipment, information regarding the object for channel state information measurement set in the user equipment; and a step of receiving, from the user equipment, channel state information measured in the object for channel state information measurement. The object for channel state information measurement is restrictively set such that the total number of the objects for channel state information measurement is the same as or less than the channel state information measurement capability. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023195 | MEASUREMENT BASED QOS ADAPTATION - The invention relates to a method and device ( | 01-22-2015 |
20150023196 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING POWER CONSUMPTION PER INPUT/OUTPUT PORT OF A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK NODE - In order to provides a practical way how detailed power consumption data can be made available to a control plane or network management system for optimizing the overall power consumption of an operator's network, the present invention proposes a method and related apparatus, which determines a power consumption per input/output port of a telecommunications network (NE) node by
| 01-22-2015 |
20150023197 | Common Reference Signal Configuration For Carrier Aggregation - Eliminating or reducing transmission of common signals for enhanced spectral efficiency, improved support for heterogeneous networks, network energy saving possibilities, can be obtained by apparatuses and methods according to certain embodiments. A method for operating a user equipment can include receiving a measurement object from a network for detection of one or more predetermined type cells. A cell search can be conducted. When a predetermined type cell is found, cell specific reference signal hopping parameters can be determined. Then, radio resource management measurement can be performed from the cell specific reference signal hopping parameters. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023198 | PLC NETWORK TOPOLOGY EXTRACTION METHOD USING NODE-TO-NODE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS - A home network topology identification method including conducting transfer function measurements of all possible pairs of connected network devices to obtain a set of measured transfer functions, defining initial values for each network topology parameter of an estimated set of network topology parameters to establish an estimated network topology, calculating a set of estimated transfer functions of all possible pairs of connected network devices from the estimated set of network topology parameters, comparing the set of estimated transfer functions and the set of measured transfer functions by applying a metric function to obtain a measure of difference, applying a criterion on the obtained measure of difference, adapting at least one network topology parameter of the estimated set of network topology parameters if the obtained measure of difference fails to fulfill the criterion, and repeating the calculating to adapting until one of the obtained measures of difference meets the criterion. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023199 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication method uses first and second demodulation reference signals in channel estimation of data and control signals, respectively, in a wireless communication system including a base station and a terminal. The base station informs the terminal of N parameters of first to Nth parameters to determine signal sequences for the first demodulation reference signal with a control signal of a higher layer, and informs the terminal of one parameter to determine a signal sequence for the second demodulation reference signal. The terminal defines a signal sequence with the one parameter informed of as the second demodulation reference signal, demodulates and decodes a control signal of the lower layer using the defined second demodulation reference signal, and defines a signal sequence with one parameter of the first to the Nth parameters with a correctly decoded control signal of the lower layer as the first demodulation reference signal. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023200 | Method of UE RSRQ Measurement Precaution for Interference Coordination - A method of UE RSRQ measurement precaution for interference coordination is provided. The UE receives radio signals of a neighbor cell under measurement. The neighbor cell applies a TDM silencing pattern for inter-cell interference coordination (TDM ICIC). The UE determines a measurement pattern that includes multiple subframes. The UE performs RSRQ measurements of the cell over multiple subframes and obtains multiple RSRQ measurement samples. The UE derives RSRQ measurement result by estimating the multiple RSRQ samples and applying a weighted average. RSRQ samples estimated to be more applicable are taken into account to more extent (e.g., applied with more weight), and/or RSRQ samples estimated to be less applicable are taken into account to less extent (e.g., applied with less weight, or discarded with zero weight). With UE precaution, a more predictable RSRQ measurement result is produced. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023201 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Among a plurality of communication formats to be used to transmit data with a predetermined period, a communication format that requires equal to or greater than half the period to transmit data is defined as a normal format, and a communication format that requires smaller than the half the period to transmit data is defined as a time division format. An antenna wirelessly receives data from the target device. A reception control circuit controls a directional direction of the antenna to measure states of electric waves around the wireless communication device. In a case that a direction of the target device is indistinguishable from a direction of the non-target device as a result of measurement of the states of the electric waves, the reception control circuit changes a communication format of the wireless communication device from the normal format to the time division format. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023202 | Cooperative Wireless Networks - A cooperative multi-user multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) system coordinates wireless client devices to provide cooperative uplink transmissions. A group of wireless client devices is selected based on their channel state information such that their uplink transmissions are uncorrelated. All of the client devices in the group transmit data on the same set of OFDM subcarriers. Channel state information is also communicated to at least one base transceiver along with the data. The channel state information may be measured by the wireless client devices, or the channel state information may be determined from pilot tones transmitted by the wireless client devices and received by at least one base transceiver. A cooperative-MIMO processing system communicatively coupled to at least one base transceiver processes the received uplink transmissions and the channel state information to separate received interfering signals via subspace de-multiplexing. | 01-22-2015 |
20150029871 | SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT VALIDATION VIA SERVICE TRAFFIC SAMPLE-AND-REPLAY - In one embodiment, a device samples actual service traffic at a device in a computer network, and generates real-time statistics on distribution of various packet header parameters of the sampled traffic that influence forwarding in the computer network. As such, the device may generate and transmit synthetic measurement traffic according to the distribution. For instance, in one embodiment, the synthetic traffic may be a replay of actual service traffic with an indication that the replayed traffic is synthetic, while in another embodiment, newly generated synthetic measurement traffic may have packet header parameters substantially matching the sampled traffic. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029872 | PATH-PING AND ECMP-TRACEROUTE FOR IPV6 OVERLAY VIRTUALIZED NETWORKS - In one embodiment, an ingress network virtualization edge (NVE) in a computer network generates an echo packet, and sets an indication in the echo packet that the echo packet is for overlay path validation. In addition, the ingress NVE sets a message type of the echo packet to a generic echo request, and includes virtualization network (VN) context information within the echo packet. Once setting a destination address of the echo packet as an egress NVE address and including an indication to the egress NVE that the echo packet is an operations, administration, and management (OAM) message, the ingress NVE may then send the echo packet toward the egress NVE (e.g., to validate the VN context information and/or to reveal multipath traces). | 01-29-2015 |
20150029873 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RANGING USING ROUND-TRIP TIME BY BROADCASTING IN A NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus receives a first message from a first wireless communication device and a second message from a second wireless communication device, obtains information associated with a first processing delay with respect to the first message and a second processing delay with respect to the second message, and transmits a third message comprising an indication of the information associated with the first and second processing delays. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029874 | FREQUENCY OFFSET MEASUREMENT ENHANCEMENTS FOR LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) - Embodiments for providing frequency offset measurement enhancements are generally described herein. In some embodiments, user equipment is informed of a configuration of a first reference signal and a configuration of a second reference signal. The first reference signal is provided to user equipment for performing channel estimation. A second reference signal for estimating carrier frequency offset is provided, wherein the second reference signal is co-located with the first reference signal. A carrier frequency offset estimation is calculated based on the co-located first and second reference signals. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029875 | DOWNTILT SELECTION IN A FULL DIMENSIONAL MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT SYSTEM - A technology for an enhanced node B (eNode B) in a cellular network that is operable to determine downtilt using full dimensional (FD) multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO). A plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) signals can be transmitted, wherein each transmitted OFDMA signal is transmitted with a selected downtilt angle from a two dimensional antenna array of the eNode B. Reference signal received power (RSRP) feedback information can be received from a UE for each of transmitted OFDMA signals at the selected downtilt angles. Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) feedback information can be received from the UE. A reference signal received quality (RSRQ) can be calculated for each of the selected antennas angles using the RSRP feedback information and the RSSI feedback information. A downtilt angle can be selected for transmitting data from the eNode B with a highest signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR). | 01-29-2015 |
20150029876 | TRANSMITTING CIRCUIT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A transmitting circuit includes: a multiplexer configured to output a third digital signal obtained by alternately synthesizing a first digital signal of a predetermined cycle length and a predetermined data rate with a second digital signal of the predetermined cycle length and the predetermined data rate; a first selector configured to output the first digital signal in a first state and output the third digital signal in a second state that is different from the first state; a second selector configured to output the second digital signal in the first state and output the third digital signal in the second state; a first driver circuit configured to output a signal corresponding to a signal output from the first selector; and a second driver circuit configured to output a signal corresponding to a signal output from the second selector. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029877 | DISCOVERY SIGNALS FOR LTE - Aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques that may be utilized in networks with relatively dense deployments of small cells and/or various other types of cells, each of which may or may not support a dormancy cell operation. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029878 | MULTI-PATH SEARCH APPARATUS AND METHOD IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A multi-path search apparatus and a method in a wireless communication system are provided. The multi-path search apparatus includes a correlator configured to get a 1st correlation value between a received signal and a 1st code, and to get a 2nd correlation value between the received signal and a 2nd code, a coupler configured to couple the 1st correlation value and the 2nd correlation value, and a multi-path information generator configured to get the correlation energy of the output of the coupler and to generate multi-path information. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029879 | SELECTING A RADIO NODE FOR DATA TRAFFIC OFFLOADING - A technology that is operable to select a radio node on a communications network is disclosed. In one embodiment, a user equipment (UE) is configured with circuitry configured to determine when to offload data traffic of the UE to a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) in a multi-radio access technology (RAT) communications network based on radio access network (RAN) assistance information communicated via the operations, administration and maintenance (OAM) system. A status is identified of one or more WLAN APs in the multi-RAT communications network using the RAN assistance information. A radio node is selected in the cell of the multi-RAT communications network for communication based on selected criteria. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029880 | PROXIMITY DETECTION OF INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT) DEVICES USING SOUND CHIRPS - In an embodiment, a connection is established between first and second Internet of Things (IoT) devices. After a determination is made to execute a proximity detection procedure, the second IoT device outputs an audio emission and a data packet at substantially the same time. The first IoT device detects the audio emission via a microphone and receives the data packet. The first IoT device uses correlation information to correlate the detected audio emission with the data packet, whereby the correlation information is contained in the detected audio emission, the data packet or both. The first IoT device uses the correlation between the detected audio emission and the data packet to calculate a distance estimate between the first and second IoT devices. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029881 | CONTROLLING A USER DEVICE - Measures for controlling a user device in a telecommunications network, the user device including a user interface, at least a first communication client capable of communicating via a first part of the telecommunications network and a second communication client capable of communicating via a second, different part of the telecommunications network. Network conditions associated with communication via the first part of the telecommunications network using the first communication client are analysed at the user device. In response to the analysis indicating that the quality of a communication session conducted via the first part of the telecommunications network using the first communication client would be below a predetermined communication session quality threshold, the user device configures the user interface to notify the indication to a user of the user device. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029882 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR DETECTING PHICH IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and terminal for detecting a physical hybrid-ARQ indicator channel (PHICH) in a wireless access system that supports enhanced inter-cell interference coordination. In particular, the method includes: determining whether the PHICH exists in only a 0 | 01-29-2015 |
20150029883 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - In current LTE, different measurement cycles of a measurement process are set for respective measurement frequencies. A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: a step A of a radio base station eNB notifying a mobile station UE of a measurement cycle for “Inter-Frequency Measurement” for each measurement frequency; and a step B of the mobile station UE performing out a measurement process in each of cells # | 01-29-2015 |
20150029884 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TAKING MEASUREMENTS ON NEIGHBORING CELLS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The present invention relates to a method by which a terminal takes measures on a neighboring cell in a wireless communication system, which includes the steps of: receiving a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) transmitted from the neighboring cell by using first time information received from a serving cell; and taking measurements using the CSI-RS, wherein the first time information is generated on the basis of the second time information of a serving cell, which receives an uplink signal from the terminal, and the third time information from a neighboring cell, which receives the uplink signal. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029885 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a terminal for taking a measurement in a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: measuring a reference signal strength indicator (RSSI); and determining reference signal received quality (RSRQ) from the RSSI and reference signal received power (RSRP), wherein the subframe for which the measurement is taken is directed by upper layer signaling, and if the terminal can obtain reference signal information of the neighboring cell, the RSSI is measured on the basis of an OFDM symbol, comprising a reference signal, in the subframe. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029886 | COMMUNICATION METHOD IN CONSIDERATION OF CARRIER TYPES AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. In particular, the present invention relates to a method for a terminal to receive a downlink signal in a wireless communication system and to an apparatus for same, the method comprising the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a first piece of information indicating the start point of a multicast broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN) signal, receiving an MBSFN subframe having a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, and receiving the MBSFN signal from an OFDM symbol indicated by the first piece of information in the MBSFN subframe. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029887 | SIGNALLING CONGESTION - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for signalling congestion being caused by data items such as packets, received at a network element such as a router, in a communications network such as the Internet, or being caused by items otherwise requiring service or capacity from a shared resource. Preferred embodiments of the method involve identifying whether or not received data items received at a network element are capable of carrying congestion indications such as ECN marks, and for those that are capable, assigning congestion indications to the data items in dependence on a queue length characterisation based on a substantially current, instantaneous measurement of the length of the queue, whereas for those that are not capable, a sanction such as dropping may be applied in dependence on a different queue length characterisation based on a weighted moving average of current, recent, and less recent measurements of the length of the queue. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029888 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is designed to prevent the increase of the overhead of feedback information, and furthermore improve the accuracy of updated CQIs, upon updating CQIs that are given as feedback, when CoMP transmission is applied. The radio communication system of the present invention is formed with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses and a user terminal that is configured to be able to perform coordinated multiple-point transmission/reception with the plurality of radio base station apparatuses and, in this radio communication system, the user terminal calculates a channel quality indicator for coordinated multiple-point transmission using an interference component ratio between cells and feeds back the channel quality indicator, and the radio base station apparatus re-calculates a channel quality indicator in accordance with a transmission mode of coordinated multiple-point transmission, using the channel quality indicator fed back from the user terminal. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029889 | METHOD FOR COORDINATION OF TRANSMISSION FROM BASE STATIONS, AND A BASE STATION THEREFOR - The invention concerns a method for coordination of transmission from a first and at least one further base station (M | 01-29-2015 |
20150029890 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING REDUNDANT TRANSMISSIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for configuring communication in a wireless communication system includes obtaining, at a first network node, information indicating a plurality of candidate subframes for downlink transmissions to a wireless communication device in a first cell served by the first network node. Each candidate subframe satisfies a candidate condition that relates to transmissions in a second cell during that subframe. The method also includes determining, based on the obtained information, a number of copies of an uplink transmission a wireless communication device should transmit in consecutive uplink subframes so that a downlink transmission related to the uplink transmission will occur during one of the candidate subframes. Additionally, the method includes configuring the wireless communication device to transmit the determined number of copies of the uplink transmission in consecutive subframes. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029891 | METHODS FOR CONFIGURING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION MEASUREMENT IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS UTILIZING THE SAME - A communications apparatus is provided. A controller determines two different sub-frame subsets for configuring a peer communications apparatus to perform channel state information measurement according to time-domain variation of a level of interference of the peer communications apparatus obtained from one or more previous measurement result(s). A transceiver transmits a configuration message carrying information regarding the two sub-frame subsets to the peer communications apparatus and receives one or more measurement result reporting message(s) carrying information regarding the measurement result(s) from the peer communications apparatus. | 01-29-2015 |
20150036514 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS FOR TWO NETWORKS IN A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system, method and device for adjusting communication parameters for networks communicating with a communication device are provided. The method comprises: when the communication device is linked to a first communication network and a second communication network, comparing a strength of received signals from the second network against a threshold; and when the strength of the received signals is less than the threshold, adjusting a network parameter of signals received from the second communication network by the communication device. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036515 | High Efficiency Network Monitoring System and Methods - A system and methods for monitoring wireless local area networks (WLAN) and reporting essential data is disclosed. The system optimizes and decides fundamentals before monitoring to enhance network monitoring efficiency. The system improves over prior problematic solutions that inefficiently monitor all data communicated over a network before filtering. The system may include instructions storable in memory to be executed by a processor. The system may include analytical engines, such as a resource analysis engine, fundamentals analysis engine, traffic analysis engine, optimization engine, and monitoring engine. The invention monitors subsets of the network traffic fundamentals that can be at least partially identified via metadata. The system may include exploring networks, identifying fundamentals of network traffic, assessing and evaluating the chosen fundamentals, optimizing fundamentals, and using a list of optimized fundamentals for network traffic monitoring. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036516 | METHOD FOR DETECTING EAVESDROPPERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method in a wireless communication system for determining whether an active eavesdropper is interfering in transmissions on a radio channel from a transmitter to a receiver, the method comprising the steps of: estimating, by said transmitter, a first effective channel gain of said radio channel at said receiver; estimating, by said receiver, a second effective channel gain of said radio channel at said receiver; and determining whether an active eavesdropper is interfering in the transmissions by comparing said first and second effective channel gains. Furthermore, the invention also relates to a method in a receiver, a receiver device, a computer program, and a computer program product thereof. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036517 | SUPPORTING A POSITIONING OF AN APPARATUS THAT IS BASED ON PERIODIC TRANSMISSIONS OF THE APPARATUS - For enabling a situational adjustment of the frequency of a periodic transmission by a mobile apparatus, which enables a determination of positions of the mobile apparatus, at least one criterion for an adjustment of the frequency is monitored. When it is detected that the at least one criterion is met, an adjustment of the frequency is caused. The actions may be performed at the mobile apparatus or at a stationary apparatus providing re-configuration messages to the mobile apparatus. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036518 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CONTINUOUS INTER-FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT RECONFIGURATIONS OF DC-HSUPA UE - Disclosed are systems and methods for continuous inter-frequency measurement reconfigurations in a DC-HSUPA User Equipment (UE). In one aspect, the system may configure the UE to perform intra-frequency measurements on a frequency f1 and inter-frequency measurements on a frequency f2 in a dual carrier (DC) downlink (DL) mode and a single carrier (SC) uplink (UL) mode. The system may then reconfigure the UE to operate in a DC UL mode and continuing to perform inter-frequency measurements on the frequency f2 in the DC UL mode. The system may then reconfigure the UE to operate in the SC UL mode and continuing to perform inter-frequency measurements on frequency f2 in the SC UL mode. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036519 | Method and Apparatus for Measurement Procedures with Composite Dynamic Subframes in Dynamic TDD - According to one aspect of the teachings herein, a base station ( | 02-05-2015 |
20150036520 | MONITORING OF A DIFFERENTIAL MULTICHANNEL TRANSMISSION LINK - A monitoring device and to a method for monitoring a proper operational state of a transmission link having multiple channels, each of which is configured for the differential transmission of signals, including the following steps: feeding differential signals at a first end of the transmission link to be monitored; converting the signals received at a second end of the transmission link to be monitored into difference signals, a difference signal being formed for each channel; and comparing a quality criterion which is dependent on the distribution of the values of the difference signals to a threshold value. The quality criterion depends on the variance of the logarithms of the difference signals across the channels, for example. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036521 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - There is provided a wireless communication apparatus including an obtaining unit configured to obtain parameter information, and a communication control unit configured to prioritize and select another wireless communication apparatus included in a connection history as a connection when a difference between the parameter information during a connection with another wireless communication apparatus included in the connection history and the parameter information obtained by the obtaining unit when not connected to the other wireless communication apparatus is at or less than a predetermined value. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036522 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present approach is applied to a case where, in a radio communication system including a mobile station and a plurality of base stations that communicate with the mobile station in subframe units, each of the plural base stations makes the downlink transmission power to become lower by restricting downlink signals in particular subframes. Herein, the mobile station, if it is a mobile station that cannot designate two types of subframes for performing CQI measurement, calculates a single type of CQI in the cell formed by the base station without recognizing the particular subframes that the base station transmitted and transmits the calculated CQI value to the base station. Each of the plural base stations, when receiving a CQI value from the mobile station, corrects the CQI value into two types if the mobile station is a mobile station that cannot designate two types of subframes for performing CQI measurement. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036523 | METHOD AND SERVER FOR DETERMINING HOME NETWORK QUALITY - Method for determining from a remote server a user quality of service (QoS) class of a home network, comprising the following steps performed at the remote server which is connected through the internet with the home network: obtaining home network measurement data of at least one home network parameter associated with a capacity of the home network, using an application layer protocol for remote management, said capacity being a measure for an amount of traffic that the home network can handle at one time; processing said home network measurement data to estimate the capacity of the home network or a parameter related thereto; based on the estimated capacity or parameter related thereto classifying said home network in a user QoS class. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036524 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING NEIGHBOR CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for measuring a neighbor cell in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for measuring a neighbor cell by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes: receiving subframe information including a subframe pattern for neighbor cell measurement; performing synchronization acquisition from the neighbor cell; and performing measurement in a subframe corresponding to the subframe pattern, wherein the user equipment (UE) assumes that a signal required when the UE acquires synchronization from the neighbor cell is transmitted in a subframe corresponding to the subframe pattern. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036525 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A terminal apparatus, a base station apparatus, a communication method, an integrated circuit, and a radio communication system are provided that enable a base station apparatus and a terminal apparatus to determine parameters relating to an uplink reference signal and efficiently communicate with each other. A terminal apparatus that transmits a demodulation reference signal, the terminal apparatus comprising: means for receiving a cell-specific parameter used for enabling or disabling a sequence group hopping, means for a user-equipment-specific parameter used for disabling the sequence group hopping, and means for generating a sequence of the demodulation reference signal on the basis of the enabled or disabled sequence group hopping, wherein, in a case that a transmission on the physical uplink shared channel corresponding to a downlink control information format to which CRC parity bits scrambled by a temporary C-RNTI are attached, the sequence group hopping is enabled or disabled on the basis of the cell-specific parameter. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036526 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EFFICIENT TRANSMISSION OF OVER-THE-TOP STREAMS OVER FIXED-LINE NETWORKS - A method and system for delivery of over-the-top (OTT) streams over a fixed-line network are provided. The method comprises monitoring OTT streams flow in the fixed-line network; determining if the delivery of at least one of the monitored OTT streams improves the efficiency of the fixed-line network when the at least one of the OTT streams is delivered in a multicast format; reformatting the at least one of the OTT streams into a multicast OTT stream; instructing user edge devices connected to the fixed-line network to expect the reception of the multicast OTT stream; and delivering the multicast OTT stream to the user edge devices over the fixed-line network. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036527 | SCANNING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for scanning assigned carriers in a multicarrier system may include receiving a multicarrier advertisement message from a base station, the multicarrier advertisement message including scan reporting trigger control information of assigned secondary carriers, performing scanning for the assigned secondary carriers, and reporting the scan results to the base station when a specific metric measured by the scanning meets a condition set in the scan reporting trigger control information. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036528 | JOINT ASSOCIATION, ROUTING AND RATE ALLOCATION IN WIRELESS MULTI-HOP MESH NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described including collecting network information, determining an association, bandwidth allocation and routing scheme based on the collected network information, notifying a mesh access point of the association, the bandwidth allocation and the routing scheme and notifying a client node of its association information. Also described are a method and apparatus including measuring link quality and channel conditions, reporting results of the measuring act to a controller, receiving a routing decision and data forwarding instructions from the controller and forwarding the routing decision and the data forwarding instructions to a client node. Further described are a method and apparatus including measuring link quality and channel conditions, reporting results of the measuring act to a controller, receiving association instructions from the centralized controller and updating previously stored association instructions with the received association instructions. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036529 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHODS AND DEVICES - A CSI feedback method and device, including: acquiring a code identifier; acquiring a code parameter group corresponding to the code identifier from multiple preset code parameter groups; compressing an initial CSI according to the code parameter group to generate a compressed CSI, wherein the initial CSI is acquired by measuring a current downlink channel of a base station; and feeding back the compressed CSI to the base station, wherein the compressed CSI is used for reestablishment according to the code parameter group by the base station to obtain an initial CSI for next data sending of the base station. In the present invention, the precision of the CSI fed back by the UE may be adaptively modified according to the uplink and downlink communication conditions of the current base station, thus optimizing the data transmission capability of a system. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036530 | MEASUREMENT METHOD FOR REFERENCE SIGNAL, BASE STATION AND UE - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a measurement method for a reference signal, a base station and UE. The measurement method includes: transmitting, by a base station to UE, indication information indicating whether to process the reference signal with respect to interference cancellation, when configuring the UE with radio resource management measurement; and receiving, by the base station, a result of the radio resource management measurement transmitted by the UE. With the embodiments of the present disclosure, the base station side is enabled to learn whether the UE side performs processing of interference cancellation, thereby accurately obtaining a measurement result of the reference signal. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036531 | APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND METHOD TO ESTIMATE QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE OF APPLICATION - A method of notifying estimated QoEs (Quality of Experiences) for applications between a mobile terminal and a plurality of application servers that provide services of the applications, may measure first QoEs for the applications between the apparatus and the mobile terminal, measure second QoEs for the applications between the apparatus and the application server, estimate the estimated QoEs for the applications, based on the first and second QoEs for the applications, and notify the estimated QoEs to the mobile terminal. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036532 | VERIFICATION OF CONNECTION OF METERS TO NETWORK - To determine network coverage of a device within a network a user may send an instruction to the device using a mobile configuration tool of a mobile device. Upon receiving the instruction, the device of which the network coverage is to be determined may broadcast a message using a standard protocol, and listen to one or more responses from other devices in the network. In response to receiving the one or more responses, the device at issue may relay the one or more responses, or a processing result of the network coverage (determined based on the one or more responses) to the mobile configuration tool for display to the user. The user may determine whether the network coverage of that device meets one or more network coverage criteria and, if not, may take some corrective action. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043361 | ECHO CANCELLER FOR VOIP NETWORKS - An echo canceller in an IP network includes an adaptive filter that models the echo path between a receiving output port of the echo canceller and a sending input port. The adaptive filter filters a receiving input signal to generate an estimate of an echo signal. The estimate of the echo signal is subtracted from a sending input signal to cancel the echo in the sending input signal and to generate a sending output signal. A packet loss detection circuit detects when packet loss occurs in the echo path. Responsive to detection of packet loss in the echo path, the echo canceller applies packet loss concealment to either the sending output signal or the receiving input signal. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043362 | Method and Apparatus for Wireless Network Data Collection - A method on an electronic device for a wireless network is described. A first set of unique wireless access point IDs is collected. A second set of unique wireless access point IDs is collected. The first set and the second set are compared to determine intersecting wireless access point IDs and non-intersecting wireless access point IDs of the second set. If the number of intersecting wireless access point IDs meets an intersection threshold for the first set, the non-intersecting wireless access point IDs of the second set are added to the first set. A confidence level is updated for the unique wireless access point IDs of the first set that correspond to the intersecting wireless access point IDs. Geographic information is determined for the unique wireless access point IDs of the first set that meet a confidence threshold. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043363 | APPARATUS AND METHOD TO REDUCE INTERFERENCE BETWEEN DISPARATE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Embodiments include a method and apparatus configured to reduce interference. The method includes determining, by a user equipment, active and inactive subframes of a plurality of subframes associated with a wireless local area network (WLAN) communication. The method then includes performing relative signal quality measurements on the inactive subframes, and providing, to a base station, a relative signal quality measurement report based on the relative signal quality measurements performed on the inactive subframes. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043364 | DYNAMIC ROUTING METHOD IN AD-HOC NETWORK AND NETWORK DEVICE THEREFOR - A dynamic routing method of a network device in an ad-hoc network is provided. The method includes (a) collecting a factor comprising at least one of the number of neighboring network devices, a moving speed and an amount of data traffic; (b) setting a routing information transmission mode based on a value of the collected factor; and (c) processing at least one of transmission and non-transmission of routing information according to the set routing information transmission mode, wherein in the step (b), when setting the routing information transmission mode, if the value of the factor is less than a preset threshold value, the routing information transmission mode is set to an active mode, and if the value of the factor exceeds the threshold, the routing information transmission mode is set to an inactive mode. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043365 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INDICATOR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an indicator in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) transmits an indicator to a base station, using at least one of a buffer status report (BSR) media access control (MAC) control element (CE) and a power headroom report (PHR) MAC CE if uplink transmission is not available. The indicator may indicates that there is no data in a buffer of the UE regardless of a current buffer status, or that there is no power headroom regardless of current power headroom status. The indicator may be a new logical channel identifier (LCID) or a new field, which indicates that the UL transmission is not available, in the at least one of the BSR MAC CE and the PHR MAC CE. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043366 | Scanning in Wireless Networks - A method, apparatus, and computer program for monitoring messages transmitted in a wireless network are disclosed. On the basis of the monitoring, it is determined that a transmission rate of messages is not sufficient upon detecting no message within a minimum transmission time interval and, upon determining that the transmission rate of messages is not sufficient, an access point of the wireless network is caused to transmit a scanning message. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043367 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING NEIGHBOR-CELL MEASUREMENT COMMAND IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a neighbor cell measurement command in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for transmitting a measurement command of a neighbor cell by a serving cell in a wireless communication system includes: confirming user equipment (UE) capability information related to cell range extension (CRE); and transmitting a measurement command including a list of cells to be measured to the UE, wherein, if the UE has CRE-related capability, the measurement command includes neighbor-cell reference signal (RS) information. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043368 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION FOR REPORTING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for a serving cell transmitting information for reporting a terminal measurement and/or reporting channel state information in a wireless communication system, and more specifically, to a method for transmitting information comprising a step of transmitting information to the terminal the measurement report and/or the channel state information report, wherein the information includes a plurality of channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) settings, wherein each of the plurality of CSI-RS settings includes information related to a bandwidth from which the CSI-RS is transmitted according to the relevant CSI-RS setting. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043369 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing measurement are disclosed. The method for performing radio link monitoring by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes: performing cancellation of a reference signal (RS) of a neighbor cell; and determining whether to declare a radio link failure (RLF) on the basis of a reference signal (RS) of a serving cell by using information of a predetermined power ratio related to the neighbor cell. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043370 | Inter-Cell Interference Detection for Inter Portable Long Term Evolution Local Area Network Interference - The long term evolution (LTE) of the third generation partnership project may benefit from a long term evolution local area network (LTE-LAN) system, such as a portable LTE-LAN system. Moreover, an LTE-LAN system may benefit from inter-cell interference (ICI) detection for inter portable LTE-LAN interference. A method can include measuring, with a first local access point, a first power of a first uplink sequence and a second power of a second uplink sequence from at least one user equipment. The method can also include determining that the first local access point and a second local access point are interfering with one another based on a comparison of the first power and the second power. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043371 | METHOD FOR TESTING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK INCLUDING A STATION AND AN ACCESS POINT - The method for testing a wireless communications network including a station and an access point comprises the steps of sending broadcast packets from the station to the access point in a lower frequency band and waiting for confirmation, calculating a packet loss in the lower frequency band based on the number of sent and confirmed broadcast packets, and calculating a packet loss for a higher frequency band by taking into account the calculated packet loss of the lower frequency band and by using a correlation function between the lower frequency and the higher frequency band. The wireless communications network is in particular a communications network according to one of the IEEE 802.11 recommendations and the broadcast packets are in particular address resolution protocol packets. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043372 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, USER TERMINAL, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is designed to enable adequate channel quality measurement in a user terminal even when CSI-RS transmission parameters are reported from a plurality of transmission points to the user terminal. In a radio communication method for a plurality of radio base stations and a user terminal having ability to receive a reference signal for channel state measurement from the plurality of radio base stations, the radio base station generates report information, which is formed with information that represents a transmission parameter of the reference signal, and system information that includes at least a system bandwidth of a radio base station that transmits the reference signal, and reports the generated report information to the user terminal by means of higher layer signaling, and the user terminal measures channel quality based on the received report information. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043373 | Method of Performing Wireless Local Area Network Measurement in Wireless Communication Systems - A method of performing WLAN measurement for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving WLAN measurement configuration including a WLAN identity of a WLAN that is to be measured, from a network, scanning WLAN channels to detect the WLAN identity, measuring received power in a channel when the WLAN identity is detected on the WLAN channel, determining if a WLAN access point (AP) can be connected, and transmitting a first message indicating the WLAN is not available to the network after the WLAN identity is not detected or after the WLAN identity is detected but the WLAN access point (AP) cannot be connected. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043374 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR BROADCASTING LOADING INFORMATION CORRESPONDING TO NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS - Methods and apparatus are described where loading information regarding loading conditions at a neighboring base station is received at a first base station and then communicated, e.g., broadcast, by the first base station to mobiles within the cell in which the first base station is located. Since the neighbor base station's loading information is being communicated to a mobile currently connected to the first base station via a reliable communications channel of the first base station, the mobile can be expected to be able to reliably recover loading factor information corresponding to not only the first base station but to the neighboring base station. By utilizing such loading factor information, the mobile can generate an improved uplink interference report. The first base station receives such interference reports from wireless terminals in its cell, facilitating efficient resource allocation and interference control. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043375 | BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station includes a radio communication unit that establishes communication with a mobile communication terminal using a plurality of component carriers. The base station further includes a determination unit that determines a handover factor. The base station also includes a control unit allocates to the mobile communication terminal a measurement time interval for at least one component carrier from the plurality of component carriers according to the handover factor. A channel quality of the at least one component carrier of another base station is measured during the measurement time interval. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043376 | DYNAMIC REMOTE PACKET CAPTURE - A device may be configured to receive information regarding one or more ports associated with a routing device; output, to the routing device, filter information associated with at least a particular port, of the one or more ports associated with the routing device, the filter information specifying one or more conditions associated with traffic of interest; receive, from the routing device, and based on the outputted filter information, information regarding traffic of interest received or sent by the routing device via the particular port, the traffic of interest being less than or equal to all traffic received or sent by the routing device via the particular port; and store or output a representation of at least a portion of the received information regarding the traffic of interest. | 02-12-2015 |
20150049616 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF A NETWORK DEVICE - A hybrid device can implement functionality to automatically configure itself to form a home network with other network devices. If it is determined that the hybrid device is the central access point of a hybrid network, operating parameters are determined for the central access point. The central access point can then operate in conjunction with other non-CAP hybrid devices of the hybrid device to determine how to configure the non-CAP hybrid device. The configuration of the non-CAP hybrid device can be determined based, at least in part, on a communication link performance measurement between the CAP and the non-CAP hybrid device. Furthermore, the hybrid network can also be monitored to ensure that the hybrid devices do not repeatedly or randomly switch between different configurations. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049617 | FCCH BURST DETECTION ABORT METHOD FOR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) MEASUREMENT - A system acquisition is initiated to perform inter radio access technology (IRAT) measurement. A waiting period of time is provided before aborting the system acquisition. The period of time is adjustable based on at least one metric. The metric can be a frequency of available measurement gaps, a total number of available measurement gaps, and/or a length of each measurement gap within a subframe. The metric could also be an absolute signal strength of a single neighbor cell and/or a relative signal strength between neighbor cells. The metric could also be a user equipment (UE) measured signal strength compared to a network indicated threshold value for triggering an IRAT measurement report. The metric could also be a percentage of a tone that falls within a measurement gap. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049618 | SMART WIRELESS ACCESS POINT ANALYZER - A method for selecting is disclosed. An apparatus also performs the functions of the method. The method includes identifying one or more wireless networks available for use by an electronic device, determining performance characteristics of at least one of the one or more wireless networks, and determining a wireless network rating for at least one wireless network of the one or more wireless networks. The wireless network rating includes a rating obtained while the electronic device was previously connected to a network. The method includes ranking each of the wireless networks of the one or more wireless networks based on a user profile, the determined performance characteristics, and the wireless network rating for the wireless network. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049619 | EVALUATING THE RELIABILITY OF DETERIORATION-EFFECT MULTI-STATE FLOW NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF` - A system of evaluating the reliability of deterioration-effect multi-state flow network and method thereof are disclosed in present invention. The system can evaluate the probability that d units of data of flow can be transmitted from a source node to a sink node. In practical application, the flow in a deterioration-effect multi-state flow network may undergo a loss due to deterioration. For example, electrical power will decrease if the transmission distance is too great. Therefore, how to evaluate the reliability of deterioration-effect multi-state flow network becomes an important issue. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049620 | METHOD FOR ESTIMATING CABLE LENGTH IN ETHERNET SYSTEM AND RECEIVER THEREOF - A method for estimating cable length in an Ethernet system and a receiver thereof are applicable to an Ethernet system. The method for estimating cable length includes obtaining a channel tap from channel information of a feedback equalizer in the Ethernet system and estimating a cable length according to the channel tap, a first coefficient and a constant. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049621 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A radio communication system includes a network and a user terminal, wherein the network includes a plurality of radio stations and a controller which controls the plurality of radio stations, wherein at least two of the plurality of radio stations communicate with the user terminal, wherein the controller notifies the user terminal of information about resource for interference measurement, wherein the user terminal calculates and reports channel quality information based on the information. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049622 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL CHANNELS AND UPLINK DATA CHANNELS IN COMP SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting an uplink channel in a wireless communication system. The method for transmitting an uplink channel of a terminal according to one embodiment of the present invention may comprise the steps of: receiving a downlink control message; extracting the starting point of a dynamic physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource region from the downlink control message; and transmitting an uplink channel according to the starting point of the extracted dynamic PUCCH resource region. An embodiment of the invention exhibits effects in reducing the signaling overhead, and preventing the terminal from unnecessarily consuming power, when transmitting the uplink channel in a CoMP system. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN C-RAN SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing handover by a user equipment (UE) in a C-RAN system is disclosed. The method for performing handover by a user equipment (UE) in a Cloud Radio Access Network (C-RAN) includes: measuring at least one candidate remote radio head (RRH); transmitting feedback information caused by the measurement to a primary RRH; and receiving information regarding a changed primary RRH according to the measurement result received from the primary RRH, wherein the measurement is performed to discriminate each RRH on the basis of a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) antenna port discriminated per the at least one candidate RRH. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049624 | Method and Apparatus for Reducing Radio Interferences - The present application relates generally to use of radio resources in a radio access network (RAN) and, in more specific, Full-Duplex (FD) transmission on the same carrier. Due to the mobility of the UEs or the non-optimal grouping, two UEs belonging to different groups may be close to each other while performing transmission and cause serious transmission interferences to 5 each other. This is one of the problems which a method in accordance with the invention aims to solve. When the performing the method a RAN triggers a UE to measure | 02-19-2015 |
20150049625 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention is a method for reporting channel state information by means of a terminal in a wireless communication system, the method comprising: a step of measuring a channel using at least one channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) indicated by at least one feedback type index from among a plurality of feedback type indices; and a step of generating channel state information based on the channel measurement and reporting the channel state information. Each of the plurality of feedback type indices indicates one or more CSI-RS configurations to be used in channel estimation and an effective channel relating to said one or more CSI-RS configurations. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049626 | ENABLING COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (COMP) OPERATION - Aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques that may help enable coordinated multipoint (CoMP) operation for devices designed to operate in systems that do not explicitly support CoMP. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049627 | MEASURING APPARATUS AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a measuring apparatus includes a first calculation unit and a second calculation unit. The first calculation unit calculates, as a communication delay for each request packet, a half of a round trip time based on first time information included in the request packet and second time information included in a response packet, the request packet requesting a notification of a reference time, the response packet being a response to the request packet. The second calculation unit calculates one of one or more communication delays not more than a threshold among a plurality of communication delays as an estimated delay of each response packet to be transmitted from the one or more second devices. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049628 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS LINK ADAPTATION - A method of high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) link adaptation, comprises receiving a channel quality measurement metric over a Measured Results on random access channel (RACH) information element (IE). The link is adapted based upon the received channel quality metric. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049629 | Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communication System - In one aspect of the teachings herein, a probability distribution is determined for the prediction errors determined from the differences between predicted and measured values of a quality parameter for a radio link between first and second radio nodes in a wireless communication system. In turn, the probability distribution is used to identify a prediction error value on which a link adaptation margin estimate is based, and the link adaptation margin estimate is provided for use in performing link adaptation, e.g., for use as a “back off” value for the predicted values of radio link quality which are used to make link adaptation decisions. | 02-19-2015 |
20150055490 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING ACCESS POINT COMMUNICATION CHANNEL UTILIZATION - A method is provided in one example and includes determining that at least one performance characteristic of a broadband communication channel between an access point and a gateway and managing access point communication channel utilization based, at least in part, on the performance characteristic. In one or more example embodiments, the access point communication channel utilization pertains to the broadband communication channel, at least one user equipment communication channel, and/or the like. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055491 | Use of a trained classifier to determine if a pair of wireless scans came from the same location - The present disclosure describes methods, systems, and apparatuses for determining the likelihood that two wireless scans of a mobile computing device were performed in the same location. The likelihood is determined by scanning for wireless networks with a computing device. The scanning includes a receiving a plurality of network attributes for each wireless networks within the range of the mobile computing device. Further, the likelihood is determined by comparing the plurality of network attributes from the scanning with a reference set of network attributes. The comparing of network attributes is used to determine an attribute comparison. Finally, the likelihood between a position associated with the reference set of network attributes and the computing device, based on the attribute comparison, determines a position associated with the network. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055492 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A WI-FI ACCESS POINT FOR POSITION DETERMNATION - Methods, systems, computer-readable media, and apparatuses for position determination are presented. In some embodiments, a method for position determination includes selecting at least one of a plurality of access points based on a measure of response time variability associated with the at least one access point. The method further includes sending, from a device, a communication to the selected at least one access point. The method also includes receiving, from the selected at least one access point, a response to the communication. The method additionally includes calculating a distance from the device to the selected at least one access point based on a round trip time associated with the response to the communication. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055493 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD - A system includes an apparatus; a first access point configured to transmit a first signal reaching the apparatus; and a second access point configured to transmit a second signal reaching the apparatus during a period other than the first signal is transmitted from the first access point, wherein a signal quality regarding the first access point is estimated on the basis of the first signal but except the second signal. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055494 | Method and Apparatus for Notifying Congestion Related Information - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for notifying congestion related information. The method includes: obtaining, by an ANDSF entity, congestion related information of an access network; notifying, by the ANDSF entity, the congestion related information to a UE through a message of an ANDSF policy. According to an embodiment of the present invention, by carrying the congestion related information of the access network in the message of the ANDSF policy, the UE can obtain congestion conditions of different access networks, and can select a radio access network to be used according to the congestion conditions, so as to avoid a condition that the UE cannot access the access network since the UE cannot know the network congestion conditions. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055495 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING SERVING CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for measuring a serving cell in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for performing measurement by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes: receiving a list of aggressor cells and neighbor-cell reference signal (RS) information from a serving cell; and performing measurement of the serving cell, wherein information as to whether CRE (Cell Range Extension)-related capability is used during the measurement is determined according to at least one of the presence or absence of CRE-related capability of the UE and information regarding configuration or non-configuration of restricted measurement. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055496 | Method, System and Device for Calibrating Deviation Among Multiple Access Points - The embodiment of the present invention discloses a method, a system and an apparatus for calibrating deviation among multiple access points, which are used for solving a problem that information received by a user equipment (UE) is not synchronous, caused when different access points send data to the UE at the same time, and improving system performance and frequency spectrum efficiency. The method for calibrating deviation among multiple access points comprises the following steps: in step A: a base station sending to a UE a message instructing the UE to perform measurement and return deviation calibration information among the multiple access points (S | 02-26-2015 |
20150055497 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELF-OPTIMIZED UPLINK POWER CONTROL IN A FIXED WIRELESS BACKHAUL NETWORK - A system and method of uplink power control in a fixed wireless backhaul network, wherein determining an uplink transmit power of each remote backhaul module (RBM) comprises obtaining an interference-over-thermal (IoT) noise value of each hub, determining a target IoT noise value for each RBM, determining a total path loss from each RBM to its serving hub, determining a target uplink carrier to interference and noise ratio (CINR) for the RBM, and computing the RBM uplink transmit power for each RBM by summing the target IoT noise value for the RBM, the total path loss of the RBM to its serving hub, and the target uplink CINR. Computationally expensive parameter sweeps are avoided. The method can be implemented using a centralized processing unit or distributed processing at each node. The method is self-optimizing, and initial hub and RBM transmit powers and other data may be estimated using pre-deployment tools. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055498 | System for Message Acknowledgement and Data Collection in Wireless Mesh Networks - A slave communication device includes a memory and a processor for operation within a wireless mesh network of communication devices including a control communication device. The memory stores a virtual routing identifier assigned to the slave communication device in response to increasing range from the control communication device. The processor, in response to receiving an initiation message from a control communication device, initiates data collection from said slave communication device synchronised relative to the start of the initiation message frame by, cumulatively setting bits in a first acknowledgement message in response to content of a second acknowledgement message received from another slave communication device. The first acknowledgement message being synchronized with start of the initiation message frame and the processor initiates communication of the first acknowledgement message to a destination in a time slot selected in response to the assigned virtual routing identifier. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055499 | NETWORKING STACK OF VIRTUALIZATION SOFTWARE CONFIGURED TO SUPPORT LATENCY SENSITIVE VIRTUAL MACHINES - A host computer has a plurality of containers including a first container executing therein, where the host also includes a physical network interface controller (NIC). A packet handling interrupt is detected upon receipt of a first data packet associated with the first container. If the first virtual machine is latency sensitive, then the packet handling interrupt is processed. If the first virtual machine is not latency sensitive, then the first data packet is queued and processing of the packet handling interrupt is delayed. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055500 | Systems, methods, and devices for electronic spectrum management - Systems, methods, and devices enable spectrum management by identifying, classifying, and cataloging signals of interest based on radio frequency measurements. In an embodiment, signals and the parameters of the signals may be identified and indications of available frequencies may be presented to a user. In another embodiment, the protocols of signals may also be identified. In a further embodiment, the modulation of signals, data types carried by the signals, and estimated signal origins may be identified. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055501 | WIRELESS EXTENDER SECURE DISCOVERY AND PROVISIONING - According to embodiments of the invention, a first wireless access point discovers a second wireless access point, the first wireless access point tunes its radio and privacy settings, without user input, based upon parameters automatically exchanged in response to the discovery of the second wireless access point, and a secure direct wireless connection is established between the first and second wireless access points using the radio and privacy settings. Adding the first wireless to an existing mesh network includes a determination of the best available direct wireless connection. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055502 | METHOD AND APPRATUS FOR MEASUREMENT FOR INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for supporting measurement of a User Equipment (UE) by a first base station in a wireless communication system. The method according to an embodiment includes acquiring, by the first base station, information of a downlink subframe configuration of a second base station; and transmitting, by the first base station, information of measurement objects to the UE. The measurement objects are determined based on the downlink subframe configuration of the second base station. A measurement is performed by the UE in resources indicated based on the information of the measurement objects. The resources are determined as a combination of at least one Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbol and at least one downlink subframe. The downlink subframe configuration of the second base station includes information indicating at least one subframe configured as an Almost Blank Subframe (ABS). | 02-26-2015 |
20150055503 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING REFERENCE SIGNAL, USER EQUIPMENT, AND BASE STATION - The present invention provides a method for processing a reference signal, a user equipment, and a base station. The method includes: obtaining, by a UE, a first reference signal resource set, where the first signal resource set includes at least one first reference signal resource; and executing, by the UE, an operation of performing a co-location assumption process for at least one antenna port indicated by each first reference signal resource. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063128 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR WIRELESS SIGNALING - Embodiments of the invention provide signaling mechanisms for wireless networks composed of a large number of stations. An example method embodiment comprises: storing, by a wireless device, a prior channel estimate that was previously transmitted to another wireless device in a wireless network; receiving, by the wireless device, a request message from the other device, to determine a distortion between a current channel estimate and the prior channel estimate and compare the determined distortion to a distortion threshold value, the request message being a broadcast request message or a measurement request message and the distortion value being either included in the request message, received in another message, or a preconfigured value; determining, by the wireless device, the distortion between the current channel estimate and the prior channel estimate and comparing the determined distortion to the distortion threshold value; and transmitting, by the wireless device, one or more parallel or sequential messages to the other device, indicating presence of the determined distortion greater than the distortion threshold value or indicating an inability to determine a distortion in channel estimates. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063129 | INFRASTRUCTURE CORRELATION PROTOCOL - The performance and/or state of communication infrastructure that transmits data may be correlated with the transmitted data. In one implementation, a method may include receiving infrastructure data relating to a state of communication infrastructure; receiving identifiers corresponding to machine to machine nodes that transmit data using the communication infrastructure; storing the infrastructure data to associate the infrastructure data to the identifiers corresponding to the nodes; generating structured data that represents a correlation of the received data and the infrastructure data; and providing at least a portion of the structured data, to one or more devices relating to the plurality of computing nodes or the communication infrastructure. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063130 | CUSTOMIZED DIAMETER PERFORMANCE METRICS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a Diameter node, the method including: receiving a Diameter message at the Diameter node; evaluating a custom metric rule to identify a metric to be collected; and collecting the metric related to the received Diameter message based upon the evaluation of the custom metric rule. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063131 | EFFECTING CHANGE TO TRANSMIT DUTY CYCLE OF WLAN TRANSCEIVER - An apparatus has a wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver and one or more sensors. The sensors are monitored. From time to time, a mitigation level applicable to the apparatus is determined as a function of output from the one or more sensors. The mitigation level is one of multiple mitigation levels, each mitigation level corresponding to a set of configuration changes for a Media Access Control (MAC) layer of the WLAN transceiver. Responsive to determining that the applicable mitigation level has increased from a most recent previously determined mitigation level, the MAC layer is configured to effect a decrease in a transmit duty cycle of the WLAN transceiver. Responsive to determining that the applicable mitigation level has decreased from a most recent previously determined mitigation level, the MAC layer is configured to effect an increase in the transmit duty cycle of the WLAN transceiver. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063132 | BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION MECHANISM FOR A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A mechanism for determining the available bandwidth of a network is disclosed. The baseline latency of each of a plurality of routers on a network path between a first network device and second network device of a network is determined. A subsequent latency of each of the plurality of routers is determined. A bandwidth limiting router on the network path is identified based, at least in part, on the baseline latency and the subsequent latency of each of the plurality of routers. An available bandwidth associated with the network path is determined based, at least in part, on taking latency measurements of the bandwidth limiting router from the first network device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063133 | METHOD FOR TESTING DATA PACKET SIGNAL TRANSCEIVERS USING INTERLEAVED DEVICE SETUP AND TESTING - A method of using tester data packet signals and control instructions for testing multiple data packet signal transceiver devices under test (DUTs). During mutually alternating time intervals, selected ones of which are substantially contemporaneous, multiple tester data packet signals and DUT control instructions are used for concurrent testing of multiple DUTs. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063134 | SELECTING A COMMUNICATION MEDIUM FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for transmitting data from within a wired communication system is disclosed. A first network-enabled device can select one of a plurality of communication mediums for transmitting the data stream to the second device and transmit the data stream to the second device using the selected communication medium. The first device determines that the transmission of the data stream using the selected communication medium is being interfered with by transmission of other data from the first device to a third device on another of the plurality of communication mediums. In response to determining that the transmission of the data stream to the second device on the selected communication medium is being interfered with by the transmission of the other data to the third device using the other communication medium, the first device turns off the transmission of the other data to the third device on the other communication medium. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063135 | CLIENT, SERVER, AND WIRELESS SIGNAL MAP CREATING SYSTEM USING THE SAME - Provided are a client and a server which filter errors in signal data collected in a wireless signal map creating process and increase accuracy of a signal map, and a wireless signal map creating system using the same. The wireless signal map creating system collects a local wireless signal map, stores a global wireless signal map, calculates a predicted signal strength of a specific point using a reception strength of at least one point located adjacent to the specific point in the local wireless signal map, compares a wireless signal strength of the specific point in the local wireless signal map and a predicted signal strength to determine an error or not, and updates the global wireless signal map based on a determination result. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063136 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK ENTITY COLLISION DETECTION - Methods and apparatus for communication at a network entity comprise sending a measurement configuration message to a user equipment (UE) to configure the UE to perform one or more measurements during a specified measurement period. Additionally, the methods and apparatus comprise suspending, at the network entity, transmission of at least one configuration parameter to the UE during the specified measurement period, wherein the network entity is the serving network entity. Moreover, the methods and apparatus comprise receiving at least one measurement report message from the UE after the specified measurement period. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063137 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK ENTITY COLLISION DETECTION - Methods and apparatus for communication at a network entity comprise receiving one or more technology layer measurements during a measurement period. The methods and apparatus further comprise determining that a first subset of the one or more technology layer measurements satisfies an adequate user equipment (UE) communication condition. In addition, the methods and apparatus comprise determining that a second subset of the one or more technology layer measurements satisfies at least one measurement threshold value. Moreover, the methods and apparatus comprise identifying a network entity conflict when the first subset of the one or more technology layer measurements satisfies the adequate UE communication condition and the second subset of the one or more technology layer measurements satisfies the at least one measurement threshold value. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063138 | PASSIVE POSITIONING UTILIZING ROUND TRIP TIME INFORMATION - Techniques for passive positioning of a client station are disclosed. In an example a passive positioning scheme may include detecting an incoming message from an access point, determining a Round Trip Time (RTT) value associated with the access point, generating an acknowledgment message, calculating a time of departure for the acknowledgment message based on the RTT value, and sending the acknowledgment message at the time of departure. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063139 | Apparatus and Method for Interference Management between Cellular and Local Area Networks - According to an example embodiment of this application, a method may include determining a distance from a network element; and assigning at least one of a downlink resource or an uplink resource to the network element based at least in part on the determined distance, wherein the assigned resource is used for both a downlink and an uplink communication of the network element. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063140 | METHOD FOR MEASURING CHANNEL USING TRACKING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE USING SAME - A method for measuring a channel in a wireless communication system is provided. A terminal receives a first reference signal from a primary cell. The terminal receives a second reference signal from a secondary cell corresponding to the primary cell. The terminal measures a channel for the secondary cell on the basis of the second reference signal. A subframe in which the second reference signal is received is signaled from the primary cell. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063141 | ESTIMATING LINE RATE - The invention measures the rates of a whole population of existing lines together with a line characteristic, such as capacitance, that can be measured prior to provisioning. Using these measures, a rating we refer to as a “quality figure” is generated for each distribution point by looking at the rate of the lines running through that distribution point, and comparing those rates to the rates of other lines having the same line characteristic across the whole population of lines. Distribution points that have lines operating better (faster) than the average for their given line characteristic will have higher quality figures. To estimate the rate of a new line, the quality figure of the distribution point that the new line passes through is used in conjunction with the measured line characteristic as a look up on the whole population of lines, which have also been given quality figures according to their line characteristic and line rate measurements. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063142 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for a terminal to report channel state information in a wireless communication system, comprising the steps of: calculating one or more pieces of channel quality information from a signal measurement resource configuration and a plurality of interference measurement resource configurations associated with the signal measurement resource configuration; and transmitting a channel state report including the calculated channel quality information. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063143 | LTE Advanced Service Indicator - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments there is at least an apparatus and method to perform receiving an indication of advanced services of an area associated with the communication network, in response to the indication of advanced services, determining a relative performance improvement of the advanced services for the device, and based on the determined relative performance improvement, setting an indication flag at the device. Further, in accordance with the exemplary embodiments, perform sending towards a user equipment information including an indication o f an advanced service area available to the user equipment, where the information is for use by the user equipment in determining whether accessing the advanced service area would provide a relative operational performance to the user equipment, and in response to the sending, receiving an indication of one of the user equipment displaying an indication of the advanced service area, and the user equipment accessing the advanced service area. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063144 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SOFTWARE DEFINED FLOW CONTROL IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for performing flow control. In one embodiment, the method is for use in a wireless network apparatus that includes a controller, wireless entities, user equipments, and includes the following operations: collecting, by the controller, signal strength measurements from entities of the plurality of wireless entities; collecting, by the controller, channel quality indicators (CQI) information provided by one or more UEs of the at least one UEs; generating a CQI estimate for each entity of the plurality of entities not serving a flow to a UE; and determining, by the controller, forwarding decisions for one or more flows to specify which wireless entity is to serve which flow, based on one or more of the signal strength measurements, the channel quality indicators (CQIs) provided by one or more UEs, and one or more generated CQI estimates associated with entities not serving a flow to a UE. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063145 | RADIO MEASUREMENT REPORTING - The present invention provides for a mobile radio communications device arranged to operate according to a first radio access technology for communication in a mobile radio communications network, and according to a second radio access technology, and to related network device and methods of operation, whereby radio measurements taken by the mobile radio communications device in relation to the first radio access technology can be polluted by coexistence interference from the second radio access technology, the mobile radio communications device being arranged to indicate to the network its capability of providing enhanced radio measurements taken while experiencing pollution by coexistence interference prior to any such provision and, if to be provided, to include interference information. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063146 | RADAR DETECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORK THAT USES FREQUENCY-DIVISION DUPLEXING - An apparatus, configured to communicate with an access terminal in a wireless network and operating in a frequency-division duplexing mode, can be caused to refrain from transmitting during at least one subframe of a frame of a downlink frequency band, and can be caused to monitor for the radar transmission during the at least one subframe of the frame of the downlink frequency band. Optionally, a placement of the at least one subframe within the frame of the downlink frequency band can correspond to a placement of at least one subframe that is designated for an uplink communication within a frame of a wireless network that is operating in accordance with the Long-Term Evolution Time-Division Duplex standard, or can correspond to a placement of at least one subframe that is designated for a transmission in accordance with the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service specification. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063147 | MANAGING RADAR DETECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORK THAT USES FREQUENCY-DIVISION DUPLEXING - An apparatus, configured to communicate with other apparatuses in a wireless network and operating in a frequency-division duplexing mode, can be caused to refrain from transmitting during a number of subframes of a frame of a downlink frequency band prior to a detection of a radar transmission, can be caused to send a first signal, related to monitoring for the radar transmission, to a second apparatus, and can be caused to change the number of the subframes of the frame of the downlink frequency band in response to an event that can be an increase or a decrease in a load of the apparatus or the detection of the radar transmission. Optionally, placement of the subframes within the frame of the downlink frequency band can correspond to placement of subframes that are designated for an uplink communication within a frame configured in accordance with the Long-Term Evolution Time-Division Duplex standard. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063148 | ROBUST INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY OPERATIONS IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Systems and methods for co-existence in unlicensed spectrum are disclosed. In one aspect, mitigating interference between Radio Access Technologies (RATs) sharing operating spectrum in an unlicensed band of radio frequencies may comprise, for example, determining an inter-RAT interference metric associated with base station narrowband signaling on the unlicensed band and modifying a transmission parameter relating to a transmission power or signaling scheme for narrowband signaling based on the determined inter-RAT interference metric. In accordance with the modified transmission parameter, a narrowband signal may be transmitted on the unlicensed band. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063149 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY MEASURING PROPAGATION CHARACTERISTICS OF MILLIMETER RADIO WAVES AND ACQUIRING DATA USING SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL IN REAL TIME - Provided is a method for automatically measuring propagation characteristics of millimeter radio waves and acquiring data using a simple network management protocol (SNMP) in real time. A remote server may control a transmitter control terminal and a receiver control terminal, which control a transmitter and receiver separated from each other at a predetermined distance so as to measure propagation characteristics, through a wired/wireless network using the SNMP. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063150 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Systems and methods for measurement reporting in unlicensed spectrum are disclosed. A user device may perform one or more signaling measurements in an unlicensed frequency band in accordance with a first Radio Access Technology (RAT) and send feedback information relating to the signaling measurements to a small cell base station, with the feedback information being sent in accordance with a second RAT. A message may be sent to the user device in accordance with the second RAT that configures the user device to perform the one or more signaling measurements in the unlicensed frequency band. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063151 | OPPORTUNISTIC SUPPLEMENTAL DOWNLINK IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Systems and methods for managing communication in an unlicensed band of frequencies to supplement communication in a licensed band of frequencies in unlicensed spectrum are disclosed. The management may comprise, for example, monitoring utilization of resources currently available to a first Radio Access Technology (RAT) via at least one of a Primary Cell (PCell) operating in the licensed band, a set of one or more Secondary Cells (SCells) operating in the unlicensed band, or a combination thereof. Based on the utilization, a first SCell among the set of SCells may be configured or de-configured with respect to operation in the unlicensed band. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063152 | CLIENT-SIDE INFERENCE OF WIRELESS NETWORK STATES - A system configured to generate a utilization metric using a plurality of client devices coupled to a network server is disclosed. The system includes a channel condition monitor and a probe packet coordinator located on each client device, the channel condition monitor being configured to gather channel information, the probe packet coordinator being configured to format a packet train containing the channel information, the probe packet coordinator being configured to schedule or control the transmission timing of the packet train. The system also includes a network congestion calculator located at the network server, the network congestion calculator being configured to receive the packet train from each client device and generate a utilization metric based on the packet train received from each client device. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063153 | MEDIA ACCESS CONTROLLER FOR USE IN A MULTI-SECTOR ACCESS POINT ARRAY - A wireless access point with a centralized media access controller MAC ( | 03-05-2015 |
20150063154 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DISCOVER SPECTRUM USAGE OF MOBILE CARRIERS - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for determining reliability of wireless carriers. An example method includes extracting channel information from messages transmitted to mobile devices at a plurality of locations to determine a quantity of available channels, segregating the extracted channel information into a first group corresponding to channels of a first carrier and a second group corresponding to channels of a second carrier, and determining, with a processor, a relative reliability between the first carrier and the second carrier based on a respective quantity of channels in the first group and the second group. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063155 | Paging in Heterogeneous Networks Using Restricted Subframe Patterns - A method for operating a UE in a wireless communications network is provided. The method comprises using, by the UE, a frequency parameter of paging frames and a restricted subframe pattern to determine one or more paging frames and occasions to monitor. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063156 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR DETERMINING FREQUENCY TO BE MEASURED - The present application provides a method and a terminal for determining a frequency to be measured. The terminal receives frequency information about an inter-frequency measurement object and frequency priority information about the inter-frequency measurement object, and determines the number of at least one frequency for the received inter-frequency measurement object according to the frequency information, and when the number of the at least one frequency for the received inter-frequency measurement object is greater than the number of at least one frequency for an inter-frequency measurement object supported by the terminal, the terminal is capable of selecting, according to the frequency priority information, at least one frequency to be measured from the at least one frequency for the received inter-frequency measurement object, wherein the number of the at least one frequency to be measured is equal to the number of frequencies for the inter-frequency measurement object supported by the terminal. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063157 | NETWORK AND NETWORKING METHOD WITH INTELLIGENT BROADBANDWIRELESS RELAY FOR CONNECTIVITY TO MOBILE OR PORTABLE DEVICES - An ultrawideband radio transceiver/repeater provides a low cost infrastructure solution that merges wireless and wired network devices while providing connection to the plant, flexible repeater capabilities, network security, traffic monitoring and provisioning, and traffic flow control for wired and wireless connectivity of devices or networks. The ultrawidebande radio transceiver/repeater can be implemented in discrete, integrated, distributed or embedded forms. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071088 | Pipelining Registration and Conflict Detection in Dual-SIM-Dual-Active Communication Device Coexistence - The various embodiments include a dual-SIM-dual-active (DSDA) device and methods for implementing pipelining of operation registration data and conflict checking to predict radio frequency co-existence interference between two subscriptions operating on the DSDA device. The DSDA device may predict when a subscription (the “aggressor”) de-senses the other subscription (the “victim”) as a result of the aggressor's scheduled operations, by analyzing the conflicting operation registration data prior to the scheduled operation execution time. The operation registration data is received and analyzed close in time to the scheduled execution of the operation to limit the possibility of changes in the operation schedule and registration data. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071089 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR DECREASING AWAKE STATE DURATIONS IN ACCESS TERMINALS OPERATING IN A SLOTTED IDLE MODE - Access terminals are adapted to dynamically decrease awake state durations (and conversely increase sleep state durations) when operating in a slotted idle mode. According to one example, an access terminal can determine an offset corresponding to a time difference between the beginning of a preceding slot cycle and receipt of a first packet transmission. The access terminal can store information corresponding to the determined offset, and can employ the stored information to power on a receiver circuit after the beginning of a subsequent slot cycle by an amount of time corresponding to the determined offset. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also included. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071090 | Method and Apparatus for Device Mode Detection - A method on an electronic device is described. A first sensor of the electronic device scans for a first movement indication. A set of second sensors of the electronic device are activated based on the first movement indication. The set of second sensors scan for a respective set of second movement indications. The set of second movement indications are weighted based on a respective set of sensor weight values to obtain a weighted set of second movement indications. The weighted set of second movement indications is combined to determine a device mode of the electronic device. The device mode is updated based on the combination of the weighted set. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071091 | Apparatus And Method For Monitoring Network Performance - A manner of monitoring network performance using an AMA (active monitoring agent). A network manager, generally operating on one of the network nodes, establishes an AMA associated with two end points, at least one of the end points including a VM running an application. VM migration is monitored, and if a detected migration is associated with an active AMA then the new endpoint or endpoints associated with the AMA are calculated and a new AMA is established. A VM pair table is updated to reflect the change. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071092 | BLIND SEARCH FOR NETWORK POSITIONING REFERENCE SIGNAL (PRS) CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS - A method for blindly determining positioning reference signals in a wireless communication network determines a positioning reference signal (PRS) network configuration by estimating a PRS energy from predetermined locations of each subframe of an incoming signal. Such a method may also include blindly detecting PRS parameters based on the estimated PRS energy. The PRS energy may be peak energy responses for deep searches or verifications. The PRS energy may be a signal to signal plus noise ratio for shallow searches. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071093 | Methods and Apparatuses for Improving Quality of Positioning - Methods and apparatuses of improving quality of positioning are disclosed. According to aspects of the present disclosure, a transition from a short training field to a long training field in one or more communication messages between two wireless stations may be detected. A station may then determine a first arrival correction time based on the transition from the short training field and the long training field. With the first arrival correction time, more accurate timing of communications between the two wireless stations may be determined and used for improving quality of positioning applications. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071094 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL TEST DEVICE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL TEST METHOD - A mobile communication terminal test device includes: test signal transmitting means ( | 03-12-2015 |
20150071095 | Establishing the Quality Indicator of a Radio Channel by Decorrelating Radio Conditions and Network Activity - A method establishing a quality indicator of a radio transmission channel in a first cell of a cellular network using a plurality of orthogonal frequency-division multiplexed subcarriers for transmitting data. A first transmitter located in the first cell transmits a reference control signal including a total-load control signal modulating one or more of the orthogonal subcarriers, during one or more first symbol times dedicated to transmission of symbols other than data symbols, and a useful-load control signal modulating one or more orthogonal subcarriers during at least one second symbol time dedicated to transmission of data symbols. A transmitter located in an adjacent cell transmits an interfering control signal modulating, during the first symbol time(s). The quality indicator is determined according to a measured quality indicator of the channel under the useful load and a measured quality indicator of the channel under the total load. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071096 | LOSS MEASUREMENT IN A LINK AGGREGATION GROUP - Accurate measurement of packet losses over a logical link comprising a plurality of physical links is achieved by aligning the individual packet counters for the plurality of links to a common time reference. By aligning the counters of individual links to a common time reference, the packet losses calculated for each link can be summed to determine an aggregate loss for the link aggregation group. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071097 | VECTORIAL NETWORK ANALYSER - A vectorial network analyzer (VNA) having at least one signal generator generating a particular RF output signal, and having n measuring ports, wherein an RF coupler is assigned to each measuring port and couples out an RF signal by running into the particular port from the outside, wherein the at least one signal generator is arranged and designed in such a manner that the latter supplies a particular RF output signal to at least one measuring port as an RF signal running out to the outside. Provision is made for an amplitude and/or a phase to be stored for the RF output signal for at least one signal generator in a retrievable manner on the basis of at least one parameter in a parameter field, wherein the RF signal generator is designed in such a manner that the latter generates the amplitude and/or phase of the RF output signal in a reproducible manner on the basis of at least this one parameter. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071098 | DELIVERY OF ELECTRICAL POWER - A power injection system ( | 03-12-2015 |
20150071099 | Method and Apparatus for Receiving Downlink Data in Wireless Communication System - Provided is a method for receiving downlink data in a wireless communication system. User equipment (UE) receives downlink control information in a first subframe from a primary cell. The user equipment receives downlink data from a secondary cell in a second subframe over a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH). The user equipment determines a transmission block size in accordance with the type of the carrier of the second subframe. The user equipment decodes the PDSCH on the basis of the downlink control information and the transmission block size. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071100 | METHOD FOR ESTIMATING ABS ZONE IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed in the present invention are a method for estimating an almost blank subframe (ABS) zone in a wireless access system in which a macro cell and a pico cell coexist, and an apparatus for same. More specifically, the present invention comprises the steps of measuring reference signal received power (RSRP) by using a cell-specific reference signal which is inserted into a subframe of the macro cell, and determining whether the format of the subframe is a multicast broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN) ABS by comparing an RSRP measurement value from a zeroth orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol of the subframe, and an RSRP measurement value from a symbol that is not the zeroth OFDM symbol. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071101 | MOBILE TERMINALS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING A MEASUREMENT - A mobile terminal is described comprising a detector configured to detect an event which may trigger a change of a measurement gap configuration for the mobile terminal; a determiner configured to determine, upon detecting the event, whether the measurement gap configuration for the mobile terminal after the event is suitable for a measurement to be performed; and a signaling circuit configured to request a measurement gap reconfiguration if the measurement gap configuration is not suitable for the measurement. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071102 | MOTION CLASSIFICATION USING A COMBINATION OF LOW-POWER SENSOR DATA AND MODEM INFORMATION - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for motion classification using a combination of low-power sensor data and modem information. In one embodiment, data received from at least one low-power sensor is collected. Information regarding cellular network signals is collected from a modem. A speed estimate is determined based on the information regarding cellular network signals. A motion context classification is then determined based on a combination of the collected data received from the at least one low-power sensor and the speed estimate. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071103 | TECHNIQUES FOR FILTERING CANDIDATE CELLS - A method includes receiving a composite signal (R(k)) comprising transmissions from a plurality of cells, and identifying a plurality of candidate cells (N | 03-12-2015 |
20150071104 | AUTONOMOUSLY SELECTING A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL HAVING A CO-CHANNEL OPERATION CONSTRAINT - Provided are methods and apparatus for selecting a communication channel. The methods and apparatus select a channel having the least interference and minimize a number of different channels in use. For example, a method for selecting a communication channel includes measuring a transmission characteristic for each channel in a plurality of channels to create a transmission characteristic measurement for each channel. The method also includes receiving, from at least one neighboring access point, data indicating the neighboring access point uses a channel in the plurality of channels. A utility value for each channel in the plurality of channels is calculated by weighting, based on the number of the neighboring access points using each channel in the plurality of channels, the transmission characteristic measurement for each channel in the plurality of channels. Further, the channel having the highest or the lowest utility value is chosen as the communication channel. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071105 | Method and System for Compensating for Interference Due to Carrier Frequency Offset in an OFDM Communication System - The invention provides a system and method for compensating for interference in a received signal due to carrier frequency offset in an uplink of an Orthogonal frequency division multiple access, OFDMA, communication system which uses interleaved and block interleaved carrier assignment schemes. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071106 | Method and Apparatus for Communicating to UE an Indication of Available RS, Based on MIMO Mode Settings - The present solution ensures that the UEs are able to make use of all the available reference signals that can be used in a cell for performing UE measurements, estimations or demodulations. That is achieved by indicating on a downlink common or shared channel, the MIMO mode settings associated with a specific network node. The indicated MIMO mode settings explicitly or implicitly indicate available common reference signals and/or dedicated reference signals to be used for said UE measurements, estimations or demodulations, which implies that measurements, estimations or demodulations can be performed based on said received indication. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071107 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication terminal includes: an antenna unit, a processing unit configured to process the video data transmitted or received through the directional antenna, and a control unit. The control unit sets the communication path as a first communication path, and causes the antenna unit to transmit or receive the video data of the one frame or the one field through the first communication path, and the control unit sets the communication path as a second communication path different from the first communication path in the same frame period or the same field period as a frame period or a field period in which the video data is transmitted or received through the first communication path, and causes the antenna unit to transmit or receive same video data as all or some of the video data transmitted or received through the first communication path, through the second communication path. | 03-12-2015 |
20150078177 | MITIGATING INTERFERENCE IN FULL DUPLEX COMMUNICATION - Systems and apparatuses involve implementing methods that may include receiving, by enhanced user equipment (eUE), an assignment of Resource Blocks (RBs) from an eNodeB (eNB), wherein the eUE is configured to receive full-duplex transmissions; for each assigned RB, measuring interference caused by uplink transmissions from one or more legacy UEs; and reporting, to the eNB, the measured interference. The present implementations may provide an eUE-based approach, an eUE and eNB interactive approach, an eUE baseband approach, and an eUE analog approach to reducing interference for full duplex enabled mobile devices. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078178 | SOFTWARE PLATFORM FOR IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL OF SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A software-based technology framework for supervising and supporting a combined wireless and satellite communications network requires a two-way communication capability that is operated by a network manager in a supervising system. In particular, this requires the monitoring of a communication network by the network manager, which receives operational information from operative components in the communications network that is pertinent to state/status, performance, and fault reporting aspects of the components. The operational information is then correlated and analyzed at the network manager to generate support information, which pertains to administration, configuration, provisioning and troubleshooting instructions for operative components of the communication network. The support information is then disseminated by the network manager to the appropriate operative component. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078179 | SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATOR FOR MULTICAST BROADCASTING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The quality of a multicast broadcast that is being received by a mobile device may be determined. In one implementation, a method may include receiving a radio signal corresponding to a multicast broadcast of content; measuring a strength of the received signal; determining a minimum signal strength to receive the content associated with the multicast broadcast; determining a signal quality metric, associated with the multicast broadcast, the signal quality metric being based on a difference between the measured strength of the signal and the determined minimum signal strength; and providing a visual indication of the signal quality metric. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078180 | Communication Adaptations To Industrial Noise - A device in an industrial environment may adapt communications to account for industrial noise in the industrial environment. The device may send a first communication to a destination device in the industrial environment using a first communication technology. The device may access noise prediction data for the industrial environment, and the noise prediction data may indicate predicted noise for one or more portions of the industrial environment, including a communication pathway to the destination device using the first communication technology. The device may adapt a subsequent communication to the destination device to account for the predicted noise along the communication pathway. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078181 | System and Method for Capacity Planning on a High Speed data Network - The present disclosure describes a method and system for monitoring the bandwidth utilization on a high speed data network port over time. According to the method described herein, measurements of the bandwidth utilization on the port may be taken over a predetermined time interval and analyzed to determine whether the utilization measurement equals or exceeds a predetermined upper threshold. If the port exhibits high bandwidth utilization within the time interval, an alert may be set for further monitoring of the port or for port augmentation. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078182 | METHODS SYSTEMS, AND DEVICES FOR ROBUSTNESS IMPROVEMENT IN A MOBILE AD HOC NETWORK USING REPUTATION-BASED ROUTING - Aspect of the present disclosure include A Mobile Ad Hoc Network (MANET) in which an intermediate relay node may engage in discreet packet-dropping practices for selfish (e.g., to conserve power) or other reasons. Each node in such a MANET has a dynamic reputation level known to all other nodes. Embodiments include improving the overall performance or robustness of such a MANET by adopting a routing strategy (e.g. routing protocol) which considers the reputation levels of intermediate relaying nodes in determining the best route from a source to a destination. Embodiments of the present disclosure also include a system for discovering a route between two nodes in a communication network. One or more nodes: (i) determine a reputation level of each neighboring node; (ii) sending a route discovery message that is addressed to the destination node to one neighboring node having a highest reputation level. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078183 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE SIGNAL IN CARRIER SIGNAL - Disclosed in the present disclosure are a method and system for measuring interference signals in carrier signals. The method comprises: receiving multiple valid samples of the carrier signals; based on the multiple valid samples of the carrier signals, gaining value of constant part and mean square error of zero mean part in the interference signals through iterative calculation; calculating the total power value of the interference signals. Since considering the constant part in the interference signals, the measurement method is suitable in the case that the interference signals in the carrier signals is non-zero mean value, and the obtained measurement result of the interference signals will be more accurate than the result through the existing method. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078184 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING SPEED OF USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for estimating a speed of a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes counting a number of cell reselections based on whether a cell is reselected due to a user service or not, and estimating a speed of the UE based on the number of the cell reselections. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078185 | Network Node, Wireless Sensor Network and Method for Facilitating Positioning of a Network Node in a Wireless Sensor Network - There is provided a network node for use in a wireless sensor network, said network node being arranged to determine communication activities of the network node in different spatial directions extending from the network node, and said network node comprising at least one visual indicator being arranged to provide a visual indication of said communication activities. A wireless sensor network comprising such a network node is also disclosed, as is a method facilitating positioning a network node in a sensor network. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078186 | METHOD AND SYSTEMS FOR DECENTRALIZED INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method that includes interference control at transmitters and interference mitigation at receivers in a wireless communication system is disclosed. Embodiments of the present invention exploit the interference sensitivity at neighboring terminals by taking into account the reciprocity of propagation radio channels in Time Division Duplexing systems (TDD). It can be applied to design the resource allocation for downlink (DL) and uplink (UL) transmissions in a wireless communication system. The methods include the self-configuration of the transmit power, the transmit precoder and the receive filter, at each transmitter and receiver in a multi-cell network. Systems are also provided and configured for implementing the methods of the invention. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078187 | NOISE ESTIMATION BASED ON CONTROL MESSAGES DESTINED FOR OTHER MOBILE TERMINALS - A method in a communication terminal includes receiving a signal that carries a data channel and at least a control-channel message, which has a first part that is masked with a terminal-specific code. A second part of the control-channel message that is not masked with the terminal-specific code is decoded to produce a decoded second part. The validity of decoded second part is checked. In response to deciding that the decoded second part is valid, a noise level for the data channel is estimated based on the decoded second part. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078188 | UPLINK CHANNEL DESIGN WITH COVERAGE ENHANCEMENTS - Aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for providing uplink channel coverage enhancements for wireless devices. An example method generally includes determining a power difference value based on a target preamble received power level and a maximum preamble transmit power level, selecting a bundling size for uplink transmissions based on the determined difference, and sending the uplink transmissions, in accordance with the selected bundling size. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078189 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DRX OPERATION IN BEAM FORMING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling a discontinuous reception operation in a beam forming communication system includes receiving a discontinuous reception operation request message from the mobile station; determining whether a discontinuous reception operation of the mobile station is set, based on the number of subframes necessary for measuring a beam of the base station by the mobile station and a maximum allowable delay time of a service provided for the mobile station, and when it is determined that a discontinuous reception operation is set for the mobile station, transmitting a response message containing information on a beam measuring duration and a feedback duration to the mobile station. Other embodiments including a base station and a mobile station are also disclosed. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078190 | DEVICE AND METHOD OF ENHANCING DOWNLINK UE-SPECIFIC DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNAL TO FACILITATE INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION AND SUPPRESSION - Various devices and methods are provided that use enhanced downlink demodulation reference signals (DMRS) to facilitate inter-cell interference cancellation and suppression. Coordinated configuration of DMRS port assignments for transmission from cells in a group of neighboring cells is provided. Each cell's physical cell identification (PCID) is mapped with its corresponding assigned antenna port(s). | 03-19-2015 |
20150078191 | System And Method For Providing Interference Characteristics For Interference Mitigation - According to certain embodiments, a method for providing interference characterization data by a network node includes providing telecommunications services for a first wireless device located associated with the network node. The network node identifies characteristic data associated with at least one characteristic of an interfering signal associated with a second wireless device. The characteristic data associated with the interfering signal associated with the second wireless device is transmitted to the first wireless device. The at least one characteristic may identify at least one power characteristic associated with the interfering signal. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078192 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVATING CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of a terminal and a base station in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes receiving measurement information including a measurement interval from a base station, determining a measurement period based on a discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle if a carrier is activated, determining the measurement period based on the received measurement interval if the carrier is deactivated, and generating a filtered measurement result for the carrier based on the measurement period. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078193 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR SOURCE DEVICE, DESTINATION DEVICE AND RELAY DEVICE - A communication method of a source device according to an embodiment includes detecting a status of a first link directly connected from the source device to a destination device or a status of a second link connected from the source device to the destination device via a relay device, selecting any one of the first link and the second link based on a result of the detection, and transmitting data using the selected link. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078194 | Spectrum analysis capability in network and/or system communication devices - Spectrum analysis (SA) capability is included in various communication devices within a communication network. One or more of the devices use the SA information from other devices in the system to determine status of various communication links were devices in the system. One or more processors within one or more devices can identify any actual/existing or expected failure or degradation of the various components within the system. Such components may include communication devices, communication channels or links, interfaces, interconnections, etc. When an actual/existing or expected failure or degradation is identified, the affected components may be serviced or devices within the system may operate to mitigate any reduction in performance caused by such problems. Such SA functionality/capability may be implemented in one communication device or in a distributed manner across a number of devices in a communication system. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078195 | RADIO RECEPTION APPARATUS, RADIO TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Where first and second reference signals for a first and second communication system, respectively, are transmitted, resources that affect a reception apparatus compatible only with the first communication system can be minimized, and the throughput can be prevented from being deteriorated. As resources for a reference signal CSI-RS for LTE-A, last half symbols in a time direction of a resource unit RB/Sub-frame defined in a frequency-time domain are used, and the CSI-RS is allocated in a position up to the last two symbols or in the last symbol, or the like, of a particular RB/Sub-frame and transmitted when a reference signal 4RS for LTE is transmitted to a reception apparatus in addition to transmitting CSI-RS for LTE-A. The reception apparatus receives CSI-RS allocated in the last half symbol of RB/Sub-frame based on CSI-RS allocation information, measures channel quality by using this CSI-RS, and transmits and reports feedback information. | 03-19-2015 |
20150085677 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR BAND-LIMITED SUBFRAMES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for using band-limited subframes in wireless communication networks are provided. During the band-limited subframes, the macro cell base station may mute its transmission or transmit at a low power over some frequency sub-band, while transmitting at a normal or higher power over other frequency sub-band. Correspondingly, the small cell base station may communicate with UEs within its coverage at the frequency sub-band that the macro cell base station transmits at a low power. The band-limited subframe enables the small cell base station to communicate with the UE with reduced interference, and in the meantime, increases the throughput of macro cell base station as it does not require the macro cell base station to completely mute its transmission during the band-limited subframe. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085678 | DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FLOW IDENTIFICATION IN AN ACCESS NETWORK - A system and method for tracking and adjusting packet flows through a network having a service delivery node and one or more residential services gateways. Packet flows are recognized as they pass through one or more residential services gateway and flow analytics information corresponding to the packet flows recognized in the residential services gateways are transferred from the residential gateways to the flow identification control unit. The flow analytics information received from the residential services gateways is analyzed within the flow identification control unit and traffic through one or more of the service access platform and the residential services gateways is adjusted, if necessary, as a function of the flow analytics information analyzed by the flow identification control unit. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085679 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Parameter Estimation Based On Historical Context Information - Methods and systems are described for parameter estimation based on historical context information. In one aspect, a communication context for a first mobile device is determined. The communication context is compared to a stored historical communication context of at least one other mobile device, wherein the stored historical communication context includes at least one of communication parameter estimates, mobile device statistics, mobile device transmit settings, and base station receiver settings. Parameters for communicating with the first mobile device are estimated based on the comparison. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085680 | RETRANSMITTING COMMUNICATIONS IN A MOBILE NETWORK USING SMALL CELL CLUSTERS - Methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture to enable retransmitting of communications in a mobile network using small cell clusters are disclosed. Example methods disclosed herein for a macro node in a mobile network include configuring a cluster of small cell nodes in communication with the macro node to perform retransmission of downlink packets sent from the macro node to a first user equipment (UE) served by the macro node. Such example methods also include sending a first downlink packet from the macro node for receipt by the first UE. Such example methods further include receiving acknowledgment information for the first downlink packet from the cluster of small cell nodes. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085681 | CELL PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT - A method for assessing performance of a cell in a network in which data is passed between layers in a protocol stack implemented by the cell. The method comprises calculating a data efficiency of data passing through a physical layer in the protocol stack via one or more higher layers in the protocol stack based on a comparison of a number of physical resource data units allocated to that data at the physical layer with a data throughput of one or more of the layers of the protocol stack. The method further comprises calculating an average efficiency by averaging the data efficiency over a predetermined time and normalising the average efficiency with respect to a predetermined efficiency so as to generate a normalised average efficiency. The method also comprises comparing the normalised average efficiency with a target threshold and adjusting the operation of the cell if the normalised average efficiency differs from the target threshold by greater than a threshold amount. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085682 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An apparatus includes a memory; and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to: determine display configurations each of which is to be applied to displays of a plurality of relevant information each of which corresponds to each of devices, on the basis of a plurality of strength variation of signals each of which is transmitted from each of the devices. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085683 | TECHNIQUES FOR PERFORMING CARRIER SENSE ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Aspects for reducing interference between networks are provided. A signal transmitted by a first network over a communications medium using an unlicensed frequency spectrum is decoded to determine one or more parameters of a packet in the signal. A level of utilization of the communications medium by the first network can be estimated based at least in part on a signal strength of the signal and the one or more parameters. A time for communicating in a second network over the communications medium using the unlicensed frequency spectrum can be adjusted based at least in part on the level of utilization of the communications medium by the first network. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085684 | CARRIER SENSE ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION (CSAT) IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Systems and methods for Carrier Sense Adaptive Transmission (CSAT) and related operations in unlicensed spectrum are disclosed to reduce interference between co-existing Radio Access Technologies (RATs). The parameters for a given CSAT communication scheme may be adapted dynamically based on received signals from a transceiver for a native RAT to be protected and an identification of how that RAT is utilizing a shared resource such as an unlicensed band. Other operations such as Discontinuous Reception (DRX) may be aligned with a CSAT Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) communication pattern by way of a DRX broadcast/multicast message. Different TDM communication patterns may be staggered in time across different frequencies. Channel selection for a co-existing RAT may also be configured to afford further protection to native RATs by preferring operation on secondary channels as opposed to primary channels. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085685 | Application Dependent Channel Condition Assessment - This disclosure relates to application dependent channel condition assessment mode selection for reduced power consumption in cellular communications. In one embodiment, a channel condition assessment mode may be selected for assessing a wireless communication channel used for a cellular link. The channel condition assessment mode may be selected from at least two channel condition assessment modes, and may be selected at least in part based on application characteristics of an application using the cellular link. Channel condition assessment may be performed according to the selected channel condition assessment mode. Channel condition assessment results obtained from the channel condition assessment may be transmitted to a cellular base station via the cellular link. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085686 | SCHEDULING BASED ON SIGNAL QUALITY MEASUREMENTS - Systems and methods for resource coordination and management in a communication environment are disclosed. The resource coordination and management may comprise, for example: transmitting channel and interference measurement signals over a plurality of resources; receiving link signal quality measurements that are based on the transmission of the channel and interference measurement signals over the plurality of resources; exchanging link signal quality measurement information with at least one apparatus, wherein the exchange of the link signal quality measurement information comprises sending information based on the received link signal quality measurements; and determining a data transmission schedule based on the exchange of the link signal quality measurement information. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085687 | System and Method for Adaptive Wireless Property Calculations - A station configured to perform a method for determining a wireless property such as a channel estimate, a channel estimation track, a time tracking loop, and a frequency tracking loop. The method including determining a set of consecutive subframes in which no transmission is scheduled, placing a processor into a first power mode during at least a portion of the set of consecutive subframes, placing the processor into a second power mode during at least another portion of the set of consecutive subframes, receiving a first reference symbol when the processor is in the second power mode and calculating a wireless property based on the first reference symbol. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085688 | System and Method for Adaptive Channel Estimation Based on Data Activity - A station performing a method to toggle a channel estimation setting between a full channel estimation that includes estimating the channel based upon a predetermined number of received reference symbols prior to a current subframe and a partial channel estimation that includes estimating the channel based upon a subset of the predetermined number of received reference symbols. The method includes changing the setting from full to partial when a predetermined number of consecutive subframes immediately prior to the current subframe had no downlink allocated and a reliability value indicates that control signals are capable of being reliably received. The method also includes changing the setting from partial to full when the current subframe had a downlink allocated thereto or the reliability value indicates that the control signals are incapable of being received to estimate the channel using the partial channel estimation. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085689 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH LTE TERMINALS HAVING RESTRICTED CAPABILITIES - A method and system for facilitating communication in an LTE network between an eNB and Limited Capability Terminal Equipments (LCTEs). A subset of PRACH preambles is defined for use by the LCTEs. PRACH preambles are selected by LCTEs only from said subset for inclusion in transmission of a PRACH preamble message to the eNB. Upon receipt of a PRACH preamble belonging to the subset, the eNB adjusts its operation to accommodate a limitation of the LCTE corresponding to the PRACH preamble. For example, the eNB may schedule transmission of the associated RAR on a restricted set of PRBs which is predictable and accessible to said LCTEs, to accommodate LCTE reception limitations. The subset of PRACH preambles can be adjusted in size in order to control system performance. The subset may include one or more preambles for exclusive use by LCTEs and/or preambles for non-exclusive use by LCTEs. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085690 | JOINT CHANNEL CORRECTION METHOD, JOINT CHANNEL CORRECTION UNIT AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a joint channel correction method, a joint channel correction unit and a base station. The joint channel correction method can implement joint channel correction between base stations in a base station set. At least one base station in the base station set is connected to the joint channel correction unit, so that all base stations in the base station set share a common reference transmit end and a common reference receive end. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085691 | COMMUNICATION EFFECTS IN NETWORK SIMULATIONS - A method for a system that runs a platform simulation and a network simulation of a radio network comprises probing the network simulation to determine effects produced between transmitter-receiver pairs represented within the network simulation; computing communication effects in response to the probing and saving the communication effects for later use; and when a communication event involving a transmitter-receiver pair occurs in the platform simulation, using the saved communication effects to simulate the communication effects for that event. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085692 | METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION AND SYSTEM FOR MEASURING SIGNAL RECEIVED POWER - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, a user equipment, a base station and a system for measuring signal received power, wherein the method includes: obtaining, by a user equipment (UE), reference signal resource; obtaining, by the user equipment (UE), a reference signal subset and a precoding matrix, wherein the reference signal subset is a subset of a reference signal port set configured in the reference signal resource, and the precoding matrix is used for precoding the reference signal subset; and obtaining, by the user equipment (UE), signal received power according to the reference signal subset and the precoding matrix. The signal received power may be obtained under an circumstance that a tilt angle of a base station antenna (e.g., AAS) is controlled flexibly, thereby being beneficial to achieve independent uplink power control and selection of a cell or a node under a scenario of the above-mentioned antenna configuration. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085693 | MULTI-CELL SIGNALS IN OFDM WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless device receives control messages indicating CSI measurement resources of cells belonging to at least two base stations or belonging to at least two sectors of a base station. The wireless device measures CSI employing at least CSI measurement resources of the cells. The wireless device quantizes the measured CSI jointly across cells and encodes and transmits the jointly quantized CSI. The wireless device receives a resource assignment for data packet(s). The wireless device receives signals carrying the data packets from multiple cells. | 03-26-2015 |
20150092572 | Synchronization - In a method for use by a user equipment of a communication network system, a signal strength received from a target signal which is transmitted from an access network of the communication network system, is measured at a frequency of a reception filter of the user equipment, the frequency corresponding to a frequency channel number. The signal strength measured is compared with a predetermined threshold. In case the signal strength measured is below the predetermined threshold, the frequency channel number is incremented by S, S being an integer equal to or greater than 2. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092573 | MULTIFLOW WITH ANTENNA SELECTION - Optimizing multiflow performance and priority across UEs and networks including receive antenna selection at the UEs, CSI measurement and reporting, and scheduling for multiflow operation. The techniques may evaluate channel conditions for a UE for multiple access points and different combinations of antennas and determine how the UE should feedback CSI for transmissions from the multiple access points. The disclosed techniques also include techniques for scheduling transmissions from the multiple access points using the CSI information to optimize multiflow performance and priority across UEs and networks. Various scheduling modes use feedback from UEs including the maximum supported rates for each link and/or rates based on the maximum sum capacity of the links used concurrently. The scheduler may maintain separate priority lists for each access point or a single priority list across both access points. The techniques may be used for multiflow operation using LTE and WLAN links. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092574 | DETECTING THE PRESENCE OF ROGUE FEMTOCELLS IN ENTERPRISE NETWORKS - A method for determining the presence of a femtocell in a network includes capturing a baseline sample for the network. The baseline sample includes a plurality of measurements taken across a plurality of downlink radio frequency (RF) bands within the network. The network is monitored to identify an RF signal having a signal strength value exceeding a predetermined threshold. The identified RF signal is compared with the captured baseline sample. The presence of the femtocell in the network is determined based on a determination that the identified RF signal does not match any of the plurality of measurements contained within the baseline sample. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092575 | DEVICE-INITIATED CODEC RATE CHANGE DURING A VOICE CALL - A method for initiating a codec rate change during a VoIP call by a wireless communication device is disclosed. The method can include the wireless communication device establishing a first codec rate for use in the VoIP call during a call establishment phase; using the first codec rate to encode voice data for transmission during a first portion of the VoIP call; determining a channel quality while using the first codec rate; determining that the channel quality satisfies a threshold for requesting a codec rate change; requesting a codec rate change from the first codec rate to a second codec rate in response to the channel quality satisfying the threshold; and using the second codec rate to encode voice data for transmission during a second portion of the VoIP call. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092576 | REPORTING RADIO ACCESS NETWORK CONGESTION INFORMATION IN A NETWORK SHARING ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes detecting user plane congestion at an eNodeB in connection with subscribers of a first one of a plurality of public land management networks (“PLMNs”) sharing a radio access network (“RAN”), identifying one or more of the PLMNs to be notified of the detected congestion in accordance with an agreement between the PLMNs, and reporting RAN congestion information (“RCI”) regarding the detected congestion to only the identified one or more of the PLMNs. The detecting may comprise determining whether detected user plane congestion exceeds a first congestion threshold indicated for the first one of the PLMNs. The method may further comprise terminating the RCI reporting when the detected congestion falls below a second congestion threshold specified for the first one of the PLMNs. The first and second thresholds may be indicated in a table associated with the eNodeB. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092577 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR FACILITATING CLOSED-LOOP TRANSMISSION DIVERSITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Access terminals are adapted to facilitate closed-loop transmit diversity in wireless communications systems. According to one example, an access terminal can calculate an uplink error rate for even slot indexes and a separate uplink error rate for odd slot indexes in an uplink frame to be transmitted. A respective downlink error rate can be estimated for an in-phase (I) component and a quadrature-phase (Q) component of a downlink transmission. The access terminal may further estimate a phase-related weight that was applied to the downlink transmission based on the downlink error rates and the uplink error rates. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also included. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092578 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECTING INTER-FREQUENCY CELL SIGNALS IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A method for reducing consumption of battery power of User Equipment (UE) during inter-frequency cell detection in a Heterogeneous Network (HetNet) is provided. The method includes receiving an indication from a serving cell operating on a first frequency layer about presence of a beacon signal transmission on the first frequency layer from a non-serving cell, an actual data transmission and reception of the non-serving cell occurs on a second frequency layer, determining whether the indication satisfies at least one triggering condition to initiate signal scanning on the first frequency layer for identifying the beacon signal transmission from the non-serving cell, scanning, when the received indication satisfies the triggering condition, the first frequency layer for identifying any beacon signal, decoding the beacon signal from the non-serving cell, and receiving assistance information from the serving cell to facilitate identification of the non-serving cell transmitting the beacon signals on the first frequency layer. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092579 | Drive Test Minimization Method and Device for Obtaining Time Delay - A method, device and system for controlling assistant information of user equipment are disclosed. The field of wireless communication technology is related, and the problem is solved that the system efficiency is reduced, for UE reports the assistant information inappropriately. The method includes: the user equipment acquiring a control parameter of assistant information configured by a network side; and the user equipment reporting the assistant information of the user equipment to the network side according to the control parameter of assistant information. The technical scheme provided in the example of the present document is applied to a LTE system or a UMTS system, which implements that the network side controls the UE reporting the assistant information. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092580 | TRAFFIC MEASURING PERIOD CONTROL SYSTEM FOR MEASURING ENERGY OF ROUTER AND METHOD THEREFOR - Disclosed are a traffic measuring period control system for measuring energy of a router and a method therefor. The traffic measuring period control system comprises: a state measurement unit for measuring a traffic road or energy consumption of the router, and a measuring period setting unit for setting the traffic measuring period on the basis of the measured traffic load value and the measured energy consumption value, and the state measurement unit can measure the traffic load of the router according to the set traffic measuring period. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092581 | Managing Upstream Transmission in a Network - A bandwidth allocation and monitoring method may divide available bandwidth on a shared communication medium into a plurality of discrete tones that can be individually allocated to modems on an as-needed basis. The effective modulation rate that a particular modem can use for each discrete tone can be monitored over time using a schedule of pilot tones transmitted from the modems on different tones at different times. The schedule may define representative pilot tones, in which case effective modulation rates for neighboring tones may be inferred from a determined effective modulation rate of a pilot tone. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092582 | Methods of Discovery and Measurements for Small Cells in OFDM/OFDMA Systems - A method of small cell discovery and RSRP/RSRQ measurements in OFDM/OFDMA systems is proposed. A discovery reference signal (DRS) with low transmission frequency is introduced to support small cell detection within a short time, multiple small cell discovery, and accurate measurement of multiple small cells. The DRS consists of one or multiple reference signal types with the functionalities including timing and frequency synchronization, cell detection, RSRP/RSSI/RSRQ measurements, and interference mitigation. RE muting is configured for the DRS to reduce interference level from data to DRS for discovery and RSRP/RSRQ measurements for small cells. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092583 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE MUTUAL INFORMATION - A method includes receiving at a receiver circuit a composite signal including non-interfered data resource elements and interfered data resource elements from a plurality of radio cells, and determining a first mutual information metric based on the non-interfered data resource elements. The method further includes determining a second mutual information metric based on the interfered data resource elements, and determining effective mutual information based on a combination of the first mutual information metric and the second mutual information metric. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092584 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING POSITION BASED ON NETWORK AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method for operating an electronic device is provided. The method includes determining, by the electronic device, a position estimation point according to state information of the electronic device. Further, the method includes transmitting a position estimation request message to an Access Point (AP) at the determined position estimation point with a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) connection not being performed, and receiving position information of the electronic device from the AP. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092585 | Adjusting a Jitter Buffer based on Inter Arrival Jitter - This disclosure relates to adjusting a jitter buffer at a wireless device based on inter-arrival-jitter (IAJ). In one embodiment, an IAJ value may be calculated for each of multiple received packets. An IAJ distribution may be generated for the received packets. A target packet loss rate may be determined. A quality of service value for IAJ distributions corresponding to the target packet loss rate may be determined. A de-jitter delay value may be calculated based on the IAJ distribution and the quality of service value for IAJ distributions. The de-jitter delay value may be used to adjust the jitter buffer at the wireless device. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092586 | RECEIVER WITH FREQUENCY DEVIATION DETECTION CAPABILITY AND METHOD THEREFOR - A receiver includes an analog receiver and a digital processor. The analog receiver has an input for receiving a radio frequency (RF) signal, and an output for providing a digital intermediate frequency signal. The digital processor has an input for receiving the digital intermediate frequency signal, and an output for providing digital symbols. The digital processor measures peak-to-peak frequency deviation of the digital intermediate frequency signal, and performs a digital signal processing function on the digital intermediate frequency signal to provide the digital symbols based on the peak-to-peak frequency deviation so measured. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092587 | Trigger synchronized event for channel characterization within communication systems - A new protocol uses a trigger message to identify one or more symbols transmitted between a first and a second communication device. The first device generates and transmits a trigger message to the second device. This process may be initiated based on the first device receiving a measurement initiation message from another device (e.g., such as the second device or another device within the system). Then, the first device transmits a signal that includes those one or more symbols to the second device. Before or during transmission, the first device generates a first capture of those one or more symbols. After receipt of the transmission from the first device, the second device performs a second capture of those one or more symbols identified within the trigger message. Then, any device having the first and second captures can determine a characterization of the communication pathway between the first and second devices. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092588 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MISMATCH DETECTION - The present invention relates to a method and a network node for service instance management in telecommunications network. According to the method a plurality of network paths are monitored. A number of network paths form a protection group associated with a service instance or group of service instances. The monitoring of the network paths includes periodic transmission of CCMs on the network paths. To facilitate detection of mismatches related to protection switching, some CCMs include a mismatch information element that specifies traffic status of a working network path and of a protection network path for a set of protection groups. The set of protections groups includes the protection groups which the monitored network path is a member of. A CCM that includes the mismatch information element also includes an indication bit that indicates presence of the mismatch information element in the CCM. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092589 | Systems, Structures and Associated Processes for Optimization of State Transitions within Wireless Networks - A system for optimizing communications on a radio network by altering transitions between different link states that includes several modules. The activity, environment, and load module monitor monitors the link layer based on spectral-load metrics and radio-link metrics. The state transition control module determines when user equipment transitions between different states based on the type of user equipment, user equipment battery life, whether the user equipment is connected to an alternating current outlet, a spectral cost, and a backhaul cost. The channel state influencer module uses any of direct messages, ping messages, and keep-alive messages to influence the link state. The policy and preference handler enables or disables transitions based on the bearer technology type, the type of user equipment, the user's subscription plan, and the load level on the network. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098344 | Channel Bandwidth Detection - A method for detecting a channel bandwidth for a signal, comprises the steps of: determining a differential operator between carriers of the signal; determining a signal power for the signal; and detecting the channel bandwidth as a function of the determined differential operator and the determined signal power, wherein the signal is processed as a function of the detected channel bandwidth. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098345 | TERNARY SEQUENCES WITH POWER OF TWO EXPONENT DIMENSIONALITIES SUITABLE FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION - Methods, systems, and devices for channel estimation in a location tracking system are described. The methods, system, and devices may include tools and techniques for determining and/or designing perfect or semi-perfect sequences (including preamble sequences) for implementation in a location tracking system. Sequences having 2's exponent dimensionality, such as ternary sequences, may be determined and employed, which may help reduce implementation complexity and/or operating power consumption. Sequences may be determined using mean square error and/or maximum autocorrelation peak performance metrics. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098346 | Configuration Method for Channel State Information Feedback Signal and Base Station and Termination - Methods for configuring Channel State Information (CSI) feedback signalings, feeding back CSI, configuring data demodulation, data demodulating, configuring antenna port information, obtaining antenna port information, base stations and terminals are disclosed. The method for configuring CSI feedback signalings includes: the base station configuring N CSI measurement processes for measuring and feeding back CSI for the terminal, each of them being independently configured with one or more of the following through terminal dedicated higher layer signaling: codebook subset restriction, PMI-RI-Report, PMI feedback-enabled, RI feedback-enabled, RI feedback-enabled according to reference process, PMI feedback-enabled according to reference process, sub-band feedback-enabled according to reference process, feedback mode, resource location fed back by PUCCH corresponding to CSI measurement process, subframe offset and cycle fed back by PUCCH corresponding to CSI measurement process, and initialization sequence ID of PUCCH corresponding to CSI measurement process; the base station sending the N CSI measurement processes to the terminal. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098347 | METHOD FOR INSTRUCTING CSI FEEDBACK SIGNALING CONFIGURATION AND BASE STATION - A method for instructing CSI feedback signaling configuration and base station are provided, the method comprising: a base station side notifies a terminal side, via the first higher layer signaling of a UE-Specific, a CSI-RS resource for measuring CSI, the CSI-RS resource comprising at least one of: the time frequency position of the CSI-RS resource in a subframe, the aerial port number configuration of the CSI-RS resource, a period and a subframe offset of the CSI-RS resource, the sequence identifier of the CSI-RS resource, and the power control information of the CSI-RS resource; the base station side instructs the terminal side to feed back the CSI corresponding to the CSI-RS resource. In the present invention, the base station side flexibly configures the terminal side to feed back various kinds of CSI information, thus enabling the base station side to flexibly and dynamically acquire the CSI, and in turn realizing precise link self-adaption and data transmission, and reducing the uplink feedback overhead and measurement complexity of the terminal side. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098348 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATON DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS APPARATUS - A wireless communication device has processing circuitry. The processing circuitry measures intensity of a signal received from a communication apparatus, senses whether the intensity is equal to or greater than a first threshold value, performs a connection process with the communication apparatus, performs data communication with the communication apparatus through close-range wireless communication, updates the first threshold value to the intensity and make a first sensor proceed with its process, senses whether a difference between the intensity and the first threshold value becomes larger than a second threshold value, and disconnects the communication with the communication apparatus when being sensed that the difference is larger than the second threshold value. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098349 | SEQUENCE GENERATION FOR SHARED SPECTRUM - Methods, systems, apparatuses, and devices are described for wireless communication. In one example, a sequence may be determined based on at least one of: an operator identifier associated with an operator using a spectrum or a clear channel assessment (CCA) slot index associated with the operator using the spectrum. At least one channel based on the determined sequence may be used to communicate over the spectrum. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098350 | Interface Device Providing Power Management and Load Termination in Distributed Antenna System - Certain aspects involve an interface device for a distributed antenna system (“DAS”). In some aspects, the interface device can include an interface, a power detector, and a processor. The interface can include one or more ports for communicatively coupling the interface device to a base station and a switch that is switchable between first and second configurations. The first configuration connects a port to a downlink path of the DAS, and the second configuration connects the port to a signal reflection path. The processor can switch the switch between the first and second configurations based on a signal power measured by the power detector at the port. In other aspects, the interface device can include additional ports and termination loads. The processor can cause a signal path to be connected to a termination load instead of a port based on the port being disconnected from a unit of the DAS. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098351 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DELAY MANAGEMENT IN DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM WITH DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE TO BASE STATION - A method for measuring downlink delay in a radio system includes applying a digital representation of a Gaussian pulse to a digital interface of the radio system; marking the digital representation of the Gaussian pulse with respect to a frame of digital data with a marker; propagating the Gaussian pulse in the radio system to an antenna, the radio system configured to convert the digital representation of the Gaussian pulse to a radio frequency signal transmitted at the antenna; measuring when the Gaussian pulse occurs in the radio frequency signal based on the marker; and determining a downlink propagation delay for the radio system between application of the digital representation of the Gaussian pulse at the digital interface and transmission of the radio frequency signal at the antenna. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098352 | DETERMINING QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE CONFIDENCE LEVEL FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS - A method, computer program product and system for determining quality of experience indicator in a telecommunication network including core network and radio access network (RAN) are provided. Quality of service indicators for a subscriber's session associated with the core network are received. Quality characteristics of a radio signal transmitted through the RAN or obtained from the user equipment and correlated to the subscriber's session are determined. A quality of experience indicator is generated for the subscriber's session based on the quality of service indicators for the core network and the quality characteristics of the radio signal. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098353 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING POWER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method and apparatus for controlling power in a wireless communication system. The method includes a transmitter transmits a signal to multiple receivers. The method also includes receiving a feedback signal including channel state information from each of the multiple receivers. The method also includes calculating a sum of received signal strengths of the feedback signal received from each of the multiple receivers. The method also includes determining a power control value by using the channel state information for each of the multiple receivers and the sum of the received signal strengths. The method also includes controlling a transmission power based on the determined power control value. | 04-09-2015 |
20150103678 | IDENTIFICATION OF USER HOME SYSTEM IN A DISTRIBUTED ENVIRONMENT - Described is a method of identifying a home network of a user, for example, a roaming user connecting using a Wi-Fi connection, for example, via a wireless router, based on a user identification received by a first device of the network visited by the user. If the authentication device of the visited network cannot determine the home network of the user based on the user identification, then it queries a core platform, which may be outside the first network. The core platform queries nodes associated with possible home networks and, based on the responses received from the nodes, determines the home network of the user. The user can then be authenticated using the home network information. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103679 | Tracing Host-Originated Logical Network Packets - Some embodiments provide a method for a first host machine that hosts a virtual machine connected to a particular logical network. The method receives a command to test connectivity between the first host machine and a set of at least one additional host machine that also host virtual machines on the particular logical network. At the first host machine, the method generates a packet for sending to the set of additional host machines in order to test the connectivity. The method appends to the generated packet (i) information that identifies the particular logical network and (ii) a flag indicating that the packet is for connectivity testing. The method encapsulates the generated packet with tunnel endpoint addresses, including a tunnel endpoint located at the first host machine. The method sends the encapsulated packet from the first host machine to the set of additional host machines according to the tunnel encapsulation. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103680 | DYNAMIC SCHEDULING FOR MULTI-CHANNEL CONCURRENCY SWITCHING - Described embodiments are directed to systems, methods, and apparatuses for dynamically scheduling channel dwell times across two or more channels across a single radio using Multi-Channel Concurrency. Communications may be transmitted and/or received over a first channel of the radio during a first dwell time of a dwell period and over a second channel of the radio during a second dwell time of the dwell period. Some embodiments include adjusting the dwell period and/or dwell time spent actively transmitting or receiving on two or more channels based on measured channel utilization metrics, to drive toward a balanced utilization across the two or more channels. Other embodiments include adjusting the dwell period and/or dwell time of multiple channels based on latency information and/or priority information of at least one of the channels. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103681 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DERIVING SIGNAL STRENGTH ATTENUATION CHARACTERISTIC VALUES - A method of deriving signal strength attenuation characteristic values for cells within a wireless communication network. The method for determining a set of cells for which signal strength attenuation characteristic values are to be derived, and using a genetic algorithm to derive signal strength attenuation characteristic values for the set of cells based at least partly on signal strength information for signal strength measurements obtained by wireless communication subscriber units within the wireless communication network. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103682 | PERIODIC COMMUNICATION METHOD BETWEEN AT LEAST ONE FIRST SYSTEM AND AT LEAST ONE SECOND SYSTEM BY MEANS OF A FULL-DUPLEX SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL LINK - The invention relates to a periodic communication method between at least one first system ( | 04-16-2015 |
20150103683 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for measuring interference by a terminal in a wireless communication system and includes: receiving neighboring cell specific reference signal (CRS) information; performing CRS interference cancellation on the basis of the CRS information; and measuring interference by applying a correction value to the result of the CRS interference cancellation, wherein the correction value is set for each sub-frame set for limited measurement. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103684 | Method, system and network side of monitoring machine type communication device event - The disclosure discloses a method of monitoring Machine-Type Communication device events, wherein a network side detects Machine-Type Communication (MTC) device events; when the occurrence or termination of a MTC device event is detected, sends an event report to a MTC server through PCRF, in which the MTC device event that has occurred or terminated is indicated. The disclosure further discloses, at the same time, a system and network of monitoring MTC device events. With the solution of the disclosure, it can be implemented that the network side reports a MTC device event to the MTC server and processes the MTC device according to the MTC device event that has occurred, as well as recovers normal activities of the MTC device when the termination of the MTC device event that has occurred is detected. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103685 | PLACED WIRELESS INSTRUMENTS FOR PREDICTING QUALITY OF SERVICE - A system determines wireless network performance. A wireless instrument is configured to send, receive and measure received wireless signals in a monitored area. A master controller connected with the wireless instrument forms a distributed wireless network testing solution. The master controller is configured to send and receive wireless signals with the wireless instrument, measure received wireless signals and perform an analysis of the wireless signals to determine a radio frequency environment performance of the distributed wireless network based on the wireless signals. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103686 | STOCHASTIC TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MU-MIMO SCHEME IN MIMO RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A stochastic channel state information transmission/reception method and apparatus is provided for use in a multiuser radio communication system. The signal method of transmitting and receiving signals in a terminal in a mobile communication system according to the present disclosure includes receiving a reference signal transmitted by a base station, estimating channel information based on the reference signal, predicting a channel estimation error based on the channel information, generating feedback information based on the channel estimation error, and transmitting feedback information to the base station. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103687 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DYNAMIC OPTIMIZATION OF NETWORK PARAMETERS FOR OPTIMAL PERFORMANCE - A system, method and device for dynamic optimization of network parameters for optimal performance in a wireless network. The method includes sending at least one reference file to clients, collecting reference files to the clients, measuring performance metrics and updating the low-level parameters to optimize performance. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103688 | PACKET RECEIVING METHOD, DEEP PACKET INSPECTION DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a packet receiving method, a deep packet inspection device and system, which relates to the field of communications. The packet receiving method includes: receiving a service request packet sent by a terminal device, where the packet carries a terminal domain name indicating the terminal device and a server domain name indicating a service server required by the service request; resolving the received server domain name to obtain a service server Internet protocol (IP) address; and discarding the packet if the resolved service server IP address does not belong to the preset service server IP address corresponding to the received terminal domain name in a preset list. Embodiments of the present invention are applied to the processing of the packet. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103689 | SUPPRESSION OF INTERFERENCES BETWEEN CELLS - An interference power measuring circuit in a base station measures the interference power in a cell that the base station belongs to. When the measured interference power is larger than a predetermined value, the transmitter in the base station transmits the interference information for each frequency used in the FDMA communication system to a base station in a neighboring cell. The base station in the neighboring cell instructs user equipment that communicates the base station to reduce a transmission power. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103690 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION METHOD USING A PLURALITY OF DIVIDED FREQUENCY BANDS IN A COMMUNICATION BAND - A radio communication apparatus capable of alleviating a burden in setting a transmission format and suppressing increases in the scale of the apparatus. In this apparatus, space multiplexing adaptability detection section detects space multiplexing transmission adaptability for divided bands obtained by dividing a communication band to which Ns subcarrier signals belong in multicarrier transmission and to which a plurality of subcarrier signals belong, and outputs the detection results. Transmission format setting section sets a transmission format when carrying out radio transmission based on the detection results from space multiplexing adaptability detection section. | 04-16-2015 |
20150109939 | MINIMIZATION OF DRIVE TESTS UPLINK MEASUREMENTS - A method and radio access network device includes a processing unit configured to: separate a network measurement configuration command into at least first network measurements and second network measurements; forward the first network measurements of the network measurement configuration command over an air interface to a user equipment; receive, from the user equipment, the first network measurements on downlink communication channels to form first network measurement results; perform, in the radio access network device, the second network measurements on uplink communication channels to form second network measurement results; and combine, in the radio access network device, the first network measurement results from the user equipment with the second network measurement results from the radio access network device to form an aggregated network measurement report. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109940 | DYNAMIC LOAD BALANCING BASED ON NETWORK PERFORMANCE - A server device may be configured to determine a first measure of throughput associated with a cellular wireless network, determine a second measure of throughput associated with a wireless local area network (“WLAN”), compare the first measure of throughput to the second measure of throughput; select, based on the comparing, a particular one of the cellular wireless network or the WLAN, and send an instruction to a user device that is in range of the cellular wireless network and the WLAN, the instruction instructing the user device to connect to the particular selected wireless network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109941 | MOBILE DEVICE TEST SYSTEM - Systems, methods, and computer media for testing mobile devices are disclosed herein. An outer signal isolation enclosure contains a group of test system components within. A plurality of inner signal isolation enclosures containing a plurality of wireless access points are contained within the outer signal isolation enclosure. An attenuator is also contained within the outer signal isolation enclosure and is connected to the plurality of wireless access points. The attenuator receives output signals from at least some of the plurality of wireless access points contained within the respective plurality of inner signal isolation enclosures and wirelessly transmits a test signal within the outer signal isolation enclosure based at least in part on the received output signals. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109942 | DETECTING PACKET LOSS AND RETRANSMISSION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - One example method is provided for detecting end-to-end packet loss and retransmission occurring in a connection of a network environment. The method can include monitoring packets transmitted from a sender to a receiver and acknowledgement packets from the receiver to the sender using a probe located in a path between the sender and the receiver in the network environment; identifying, by the probe, a first packet as a possibly-retransmitted packet if the first packet has a fall back sequence number; classifying, by the probe, the first packet as a retransmitted packet using one or more conditions based, at least in part, on one or more of the following: characteristic(s) of the possibly-retransmitted packet, characteristic(s) of sequence numbers observed by the probe, and characteristic(s) of acknowledgements observed by the probe. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109943 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DIRECTIONAL MESH NETWORKS WITH JOINT BACKHAUL AND ACCESS LINK DESIGN - A cellular communications network may be configured to leverage a millimeter wave (mmW) mesh network. Base stations may be configured to operate as mmW base stations (tnBs). Such base stations may be configured to participate in the mmW mesh network and to access the cellular communications network (e.g., via cellular access links). A network device of the cellular communications network (e.g., an eNB) may operate as a control entity with respect to one or more niBs. Such a network device may govern mesh backhaul routing with respect to the cellular communications network and the mmW mesh network. Such a network device may configure the mmW mesh network, for example by performing a process to join a new mB to the mmW mesh network. A WTRU may send and receive control information via a cellular access fink and may send and receive data via the mmW mesh network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109944 | MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR MEASURING RECEPTION QUALITY - A mobile station includes a calculation unit, an adjustment unit, an estimation unit, and a measurement unit. The calculation unit calculates a weighting matrix for use in channel estimation of an interfering cell. The adjustment unit adjusts values of respective components of the weighting matrix calculated by the calculation unit so that out of the respective components, diagonal components are smaller than components other than the diagonal components. The estimation unit suppresses a noise component included in a value of the channel estimation by using the weighting matrix whose respective component values were adjusted by the adjustment unit so as to perform the channel estimation of the interfering cell. The measurement unit cancels a signal of the interfering cell from a received signal based on a result of the channel estimation and measures a reception quality of a measurement target cell with respect to the received signal. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109945 | ON-DEMAND TRANSMISSION PATH PROVIDING SYSTEM AND METHOD - An on-demand transmission path providing method includes: receiving a virtual lease line (VLL) establishing request including a start area and an end area of the VLL and an establishing duration of the VLL; producing a VLL establishing information including a connection relationship of router devices constituting the VLL and ports of the router devices to be connected; assigning a timed task for the VLL according to the establishing duration, therein, the timed task includes a start time and an end time when establishing the VLL; judging whether current time reaches to the beginning time of the timed task; and establishing the VLL if yes. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109946 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF CELL SELECTION FOR A HANDOVER DURING COEXISTENCE OF LTE FDD/TDD NETWORKS - A method and system for performing a cell selection in case of a handover during co-existence of LTE TDD/FDD networks is provided. The method includes receiving a handover message from a network along with a target cell for the handover. The method includes scanning for primary target cells, upon a failure in detecting the target cell by the User Equipment. The method includes storing the detected primary target cells in a measurement database by the UE. The UE initiates scanning on the stored primary target cells in the measurement database for performing the cell selection during the handover. Further, the UE after the performing the cell selection, sends the re-establishment request message along with the measurement database to the network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109947 | SPECTRUM SENSING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COOPERATIVE COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORK IN NON-GAUSSIAN NOISE ENVIRONMENT, AND FUSION CENTER APPARATUS AND COOPERATIVE COGNITIVE RADIO SYSTEM USING THE SAME - Disclosed herein are a spectrum sensing apparatus and method for a cognitive radio (CCR) network in a non-Gaussian noise environment and an FC apparatus and CCR system using the same. The cooperative cognitive radio (CCR) system includes M cognitive radios (CRs), and a fusion center (FC). Each of the M CRs samples a baseband signal obtained by down-converting a radio signal detected in the corresponding frequency spectrum, and generates spectrum sensing information (SSI) indicating that a PU signal has been detected based on the results of the sampling. The FC determines a joint threshold λ | 04-23-2015 |
20150109948 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of receiving control information in a wireless communication system includes receiving position information for searching at least one downlink control channel, a downlink control channel carrying control information of at least one user equipment, receiving multiplexed downlink control channel in which a plurality of downlink control channels are sequentially multiplexed and sequentially searching the downlink control channel on the multiplexed downlink control channel according to the position information. The number of detection attempts to detect its own control information can be reduced. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109949 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR HANDLING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Provided in embodiments of the present application are a method and terminal for handling CSI. The embodiments of the present invention use the terminal to measure and report to a base station first CSI, where the first CSI comprises a first RI, a first PMI, and a first CQI, to acquire a second RI and/or a second PMI on the basis of the first CSI, thus allowing the terminal to utilize the second RI to measure and report to the base station the PMI and CQI corresponding to the second RI; or, the terminal utilizes the second RI and the second PMI to measure and report to the base station the CQI corresponding to the second RI and to the second PMI; or, the terminal utilizes the second PMI to measure and report to the base station the RI and CQI corresponding to the second PMI. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109950 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASUREMENT OF ACTIVE USER DEVICES PER QUALITY-OF-SERVICE CLASS INDICATOR - Methods, apparatus, and systems for measuring, on a per-QoS-class basis, the average number of user devices active on the uplink of a wireless communication system are disclosed. In an exemplary method, a number of mobile terminals with buffered data for transmission to a base station is estimated based on received buffer status reports. An estimated quantity of active mobile terminals is calculated, based on the received buffer status reports and a number of mobile terminals for which a semi-persistent scheduling grant has been granted. In some embodiments, the estimated quantity of active mobile terminals is estimated on a per-traffic-class basis, in which case the technique includes calculating first and second estimated quantities, corresponding to mobile terminals having active data bearers for first and second traffic classes, respectively, based on the received buffer status reports and the number of mobile terminals for which a semi-persistent scheduling grant has been granted. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109951 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT USING PERODIC MEASUREMENTS OF INDICATORS - A beacon signal may be provided with data extensions. The data extensions permit additional information to be provided by the beacon signal, thereby reducing the traffic overhead of the network. The data extensions further permit handoffs and handoffs based on offset values. A Measurement Request field corresponding to a beacon request contains a measurement duration value and channel number for which the request applies. The beacon request permits a scan mode. In Active Scan mode, the measuring station (STA) transmits a probe request with a broadcast SSID. In Passive Scan mode, the measuring STA passively receives on the specified channel and return a beacon report containing one information element for each STA from which it detects a beacon or probe response. In Beacon Table mode, the measuring STA returns a beacon report containing the current contents of its beacon table without performing additional measurements. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109952 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MEASURING AVAILABLE CAPACITY AND TIGHT LINK CAPACITY OF IP PATHS FROM A SINGLE ENDPOINT - According to one exemplary embodiment, a method for determining the forward and reverse available capacity or tight link capacity of an IP path from a single endpoint includes the steps of: transmitting, from a source IP endpoint node toward a destination IP endpoint node, a forward packet train including a first plurality of IP test packets over the forward IP path; and receiving, at the source IP endpoint node, a corresponding reverse packet train from the destination IP endpoint node, the reverse packet train including a second plurality of IP test packets over the reverse IP path each of which correspond to a respective one of the first plurality of IP test packets. For those IP path capacity measurements embodiments which are TWAMP-based, no changes are needed to the TWAMP control protocol, e.g., since exemplary embodiments make use of padding octets to transfer additional information which can be used for available IP path capacity and tight IP link capacity calculations. | 04-23-2015 |
20150117228 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - Methods and apparatuses are provided for graphically displaying the noise level on each WLAN channel, along with the arrangement of other (neighboring) wireless host devices on each channel with their respective signal strengths as a distance indicator. As a result, collected information may be gathered and displayed intuitively to allow a user to quickly assess the environment and manually configure the wireless host device. in addition, methods and apparatuses are provided for suggesting to a user or automatically selecting a wireless host device configuration based on the noise level on each WLAN channel and the arrangement of other wireless host devices on each channel with consideration of their respective signal strengths. As a result, an optimal configuration for a deployed wireless host device may be determined and consistently suggested or automatically configured. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117229 | ESTIMATING TONE MAPS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network device may be configured to iteratively modify an initial tone map for each communication region of a powerline cycle to minimize the time before application data can be transmitted. A first network device estimates an initial tone map for each communication region based, at least in part, on sounding messages received from a second network device. The first network device determines whether to estimate a modified tone map for the first communication region based on at least one performance measurement associated with a data packet generated using the initial tone map for the first communication region. If so, the second network device retransmits the sounding messages in the first communication region that will be used to modify the initial tone map for the first communication region, and the second network device continues to transmit the data packets using the initial tone maps in the remaining communication regions. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117230 | PROBE MECHANISM FOR DISCOVERING EXPLICIT CONGESTION NOTIFICATION DATA - Explicit congestion notification (ECN) data that is utilized in a core portion of a cellular communication network has known issues associated with a first use scenario and an infrequent use scenario. A probe comprising probe data and a data structure for storing certain ECN data can be transmitted in order to mitigate these issues. Transmitting the probe in response to a communication session being established with a device of a network can mitigate the first use issue. Transmitting the probe in response to expiration of a probe timer in connection with a network traffic idle period can mitigate the infrequent use scenario. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117231 | INTER FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT SCHEDULING IN DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (DRX) MODE - A user equipment (UE) avoids or reduces delay associated with measuring preferred neighbor cells by scheduling inter frequency measurements based on network indicated offset values provided by a network. In some instances, the UE performs measurements when the UE wakes up from a sleep mode. The UE schedules measurement of a neighbor cell with a lower offset value more frequently or earlier. The offset value can be a Qoffset value. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117232 | CODEC SELECTION AND USAGE FOR IMPROVED VOIP CALL QUALITY - Codec selection and usage for calls includes identifying a call scheduled for a time in the future from an electronic calendar associated with a user and prior to the call, ordering a plurality of codecs used by an Internet Protocol (IP) phone of the user for the scheduled call. During the call and using a processor, a mean opinion score for the call is calculated and stored as part of call data for the call within a data storage device including historical call data. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117233 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPLEMENTING A REPETITION LEVEL FOR A CHANNEL - At least one example embodiment discloses a user equipment (UE) including a memory configured to store a selected physical random access channel (PRACH) repetition level and a processor configured to monitor a duration of a timer, the duration indicating a length of time to use the PRACH repetition level. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117234 | Monitoring Link Quality Between Network Devices - The present disclosure discloses a system and method for monitoring link quality between internetworking devices. The system includes a processor and a memory storing instructions that, when executed, cause the system to: generate, at a first internetworking device, a marker-request packet that includes a current marker ID; send, from the first internetworking device, the marker-request packet to a second internetworking device; receive, at the first internetworking device, a marker-reply packet that responds to the marker-request packet from the second internetworking device, the marker-reply packet including the current marker ID and a previous marker ID; and determine, at the first network device, a link quality between the first internetworking device and the second internetworking device based at least in part on the marker-reply packet. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117235 | Enhanced Dynamic Multicast Optimization - The present disclosure discloses a system and method for enhanced dynamic multicast optimization based on network condition measurement. The system includes a processor and a memory storing instructions that, when executed, cause the system to: measure a network condition for a multicast group using one or more metrics; determine whether to convert all stations in the multicast group to unicast based on the network condition; and responsive to determining not to convert the all stations in the multicast group to unicast, determine, based on the network condition, a sub set of the multicast group for converting the subset of the multicast group to unicast, wherein the subset includes less than all stations in the multicast group. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117236 | CODEC SELECTION AND USAGE FOR IMPROVED VOIP CALL QUALITY - A method of implementing calls includes identifying a call scheduled for a time in the future from an electronic calendar associated with a user and prior to the call, ordering a plurality of codecs used by an Internet Protocol (IP) phone of the user for the scheduled call. The method further includes, during the call and using a processor, calculating a mean opinion score for the call and storing the mean opinion score as part of call data for the call within a data storage device comprising historical call data. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117237 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATION - Embodiments of the disclosure provide a method and apparatus for obtaining a CQI in a communication system, wherein the communication system comprises a UE, a CoMP measurement set including more than one BS/point, and one or more outside BSs/points which is outside the CoMP measurement set, and wherein the UE is served by a serving BS/point in the CoMP measurement set and interfered by at least one interfering BS/point in the CoMP measurement set and the one or more outside BSs/points. In the method according to embodiments of the present invention, a first interference from at least one outside BS/point which is outside the CoMP measurement set to the UE is estimated; a second interference from at least one interfering BS/point in the CoMP measurement set to the UE is estimated; and a target CQI based on the first interference and the second interference is obtained. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117238 | Wireless Communication Terminal and Server and Methods Thereof for Inter-RAT Cell Measurement Reporting - The present invention relates to a method of a wireless communication terminal ( | 04-30-2015 |
20150117239 | Scheduling Apparatus and Method Thereof for Setting Up Device-to-Device Communication - The present disclosure relates to a scheduling apparatus ( | 04-30-2015 |
20150117240 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is presented in which a communication device communicates, in at least one communication cell operated by communication apparatus, using a plurality of subframes, wherein each subframe comprises a plurality of communication resources. A respective measure of communication quality associated with each of the communication resources is obtained and a search space, comprising a set of the communication resources, is defined based on the measures of communication quality. The mobile device searches for control information in the defined search space. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117241 | BUFFER STATUS REPORTING IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A technology that is operable to communicate buffer status report (BSR) information to an evolved node B (eNode B) is disclosed. In one embodiment, a user equipment is configured with circuitry configured to buffer data at the UE for communication to at least one of a master eNode B (MeNode B) or a secondary eNode B (SeNode B). BSR information is determined based on the buffered data at the UE. An uplink split configuration of the UE is determined for the MeNode B and the SeNode B. The MeNode B or the SeNode B is identified based on the uplink split configuration to send selected BSR information. The selected BSR information is communicated to the identified MeNode B or the selected SeNode B. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117242 | ANALYSIS METHOD AND ANALYSIS APPARATUS - In an analysis apparatus, when detecting each packet communicated via a network, an update unit updates statistical information that is stored in a continuous storage area of a storage unit and that indicates the communication state of the network for a first cycle. Then, a first processing unit reads the statistical information from the storage unit at every first cycle, and processes the statistical information and initializes the statistical information in the storage unit. A second processing unit reads partial statistical information that is part of the statistical information from the storage unit at every second cycle shorter than the first cycle, and processes the partial statistical information and initializes the partial statistical information in the storage unit. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117243 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING MOVING PICTURE EXPERTS GROUP (MPEG) MEDIA TRANSPORT (MMT) SIGNALING MESSAGE FOR MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION (MC) PROCESSING - A method of transmitting a Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) Media Transport (MMT) signaling message for Measurement Configuration (MC) processing in an MMT sending entity. The method includes generating an MC message with header information by setting a measurement mode (measurement_mode), which indicates information on a measurement start time (measurement_start_time) of a measurement item in an MMT receiving entity, to one of: an immediate measurement start, a measurement start at a predetermined time, a measurement start based on a predetermined condition, and an immediate measurement stop; and transmitting an MMT packet including the generated MC message to an MMT receiving entity. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117244 | METHODS TO VISUALIZE TIME-ALIGNED DATA FLOW BETWEEN NODES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Disclosed herein are techniques for improved network management, including improved visualization of network events. According to one embodiment, a network monitoring node receives performance data corresponding to at least one network parameter for a network path between a source node and a destination node, and receives a user-specified time period. The network monitoring node further determines a time associated with the performance data, and aligns the performance data according to the associated time and the at least one time index for each node in the network path. The network monitoring node simultaneously presents the performance data for each network node in the network path aligned according to the associated time and the at least one time index for the user-specified time period. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117245 | Sending Node and Buffer Status Reporting Method - A sending node and a buffer status reporting method are disclosed. The method includes: classifying at least two RLC entities included in a sending node as at least one first RLC entity and one second RLC entity, where all the RLC entities are associated with a PDCP entity included in the sending node; and in a case in which a buffer of the first RLC entity includes to-be-sent data, generating a first buffer status report BSR based on a size of the to-be-sent data in the buffer of the first RLC entity, and sending the generated first BSR to a receiving node corresponding to the first RLC entity. By classification of the first RLC entity and the second RLC entity, the second RLC entity is exclusively associated with buffer status reporting of the PDCP entity. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117246 | DATA UNIT COUNTER - A network device may include first logic configured to count data units passing through the network device and to produce a counter value. The network device may include second logic configured to receive the counter value when an indicator is present, and to store the counter value. The network device may include third logic configured to sample the second logic, to receive the counter value, and to operate on the counter value to produce a result. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117247 | Communication Control Method, User Equipment, Network Server, and System - A communication control method, including receiving, by a first user equipment, a first message sent by a second user equipment; acquiring receive power of the first message; acquiring power parameter information of the second user equipment; obtaining a path loss value according to the power parameter information of the second user equipment and the receive power of the first message; and determining, according to the path loss value, whether direct communication is allowed between the first user equipment and the second user equipment. The embodiments of the present invention further provide a corresponding user equipment and system. According to the method, user equipment, and system in the embodiments of the present invention, control on direct communication between user equipment can be implemented. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117248 | Systems, methods, and devices for electronic spectrum management - Systems, methods, and devices enable spectrum management by identifying, classifying, and cataloging signals of interest based on radio frequency measurements. In an embodiment, signals and the parameters of the signals may be identified and indications of available frequencies may be presented to a user. In another embodiment, the protocols of signals may also be identified. In a further embodiment, the modulation of signals, data types carried by the signals, and estimated signal origins may be identified. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117249 | METHOD FOR ACQUIRING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR, USER EQUIPMENT, EVOLVED NODE B AND SYSTEM - This application relates to a method for acquiring a CQI, a user equipment, an eNB and a system. The method includes: calculating CQIs of at least two subbands, where there is an overlapped resource block between the subbands; and transmitting the subband CQIs to an eNB. In the method for acquiring a channel quality indicator, the user equipment, the evolved node B and the system of the present application, there is an overlapped resource block between adjacent subbands, and meanwhile the channel quality of the resource block of the subband is obtained by using different subbands, thus the feedback accuracy of the channel quality of the resource block of each subband, especially the channel quality of the resource block in the subband overlapping area, thereby improving the granularity of frequency-selective scheduling, and improving the frequency-selective scheduling and the link adaptation, and therefore, the system throughput is increased. | 04-30-2015 |
20150124630 | AUTOMATIC LOCATION IDENTIFICATION OF CABLE Wi-Fi AND SMALL CELL NODES IN HFC NETWORKS AND THEIR INTEGRATION INTO INVENTORY DATABASES - Location determination software is provided to determine the location of cable Wi-Fi nodes that do not have integrated GPS by using HFC and Wireless domain techniques. The location identification solutions include (1) using ranging, trilateration and common channel characteristics analysis with other CMs and fiber nodes, (2) ranging using transit delay (3) determining location based on a nearby gateway or tap, and (4) determining location from a nearby mobile device with GPS. The location information can be provided in a unified database for access by other Wi-Fi transmission devices and HFC components. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124631 | NETWORKING APPARATUSES AND PACKET STATISTIC DETERMINATION METHODS EMPLOYING ATOMIC COUNTERS - Disclosed herein are methods and related apparatuses for determining statistics descriptive of packets received at a particular location on a network out of a set of packets transmitted on the network, which include transmitting first and second groups of packets on the network, the packets in the first and second groups labeled with first and second labels, respectively (the packets in the second group not in the first group), incrementing first and second packet counters associated with the particular network location in response to packet(s) in the first and second groups, respectively, being received at the network location until all packets in the first and second groups have drained from the network, and using values read from the first and second packet counters to determine a statistic descriptive of the packets received at the particular network location out of those in the first and second groups transmitted on the network. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124632 | Method and Base Station for Providing an Estimate of Interference and Noise Power of an Uplink Resource Block - A method in a base station ( | 05-07-2015 |
20150124633 | METHOD FOR INCREASING LAYER-3 LONGEST PREFIX MATCH SCALE - Various embodiments are disclosed for increasing Layer-3 LPM (longest prefix match) routing database in a network platform. In some embodiments, chipsets in fabric modules (FMs) can be partitioned into multiple banks. Network traffic can be directed towards a corresponding bank in the FMs by using a LPM table on a line card (LC). Entries in the LPM table on the LC can be programmed either statically or dynamically based upon LPM routes that are dynamically learned. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124634 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CALIBRATING A TRANSCEIVER ARRAY - A system and method for compensating phase differences between multiple local oscillators and group delay differences between multiple transceivers. The system may include; an antenna array; a plurality of transceivers connected to said antennas and operatively associated each with a local oscillator (LO), wherein at least some of the transceivers do not share a common LO, and wherein at least some of the LOs are using a common reference oscillator; a common digital beamformer circuit connected to the transceivers; a baseband processor configured to operate the system at a specified communication scheme; and a calibration circuit and software modules configured to eliminate or reduce mismatches and phase deviations between the different transceivers, wherein the calibration circuit and software modules are incorporated in system such that the elimination or reduction of mismatches and phase deviations is non-interrupting with a continuous operation of the system at the specified communication scheme. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124635 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RECEIVER, TRANSMITTER, AND TRANSMISSION RATE CONTROL METHOD - A receiver includes a first detector that detects a Received Signal Strength Indicator of a desiring signal wave transmitted from a transmitter, a second detector that detects a power of interfering wave generated by an external device, a transmission rate selection processor that selects a transmission rate, which is used to transmit a signal from the transmitter to the receiver, from among a plurality of transmission rates based on the detected Received Signal Strength Indicator of the desiring signal wave and a detected power of the interfering wave, when the second detector detects generation of the interfering wave, and a transmission rate notificator that notifies the transmitter of the transmission rate selected by the transmission rate selection processor. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124636 | System and Method for Delay Management for Traffic Engineering - A method for engineering traffic in a communications system includes determining a set of delay constraints associated with a traffic flow over the communications system, and excluding non-convex constraints from the set of delay constraints, thereby producing a set of convex constraints. The method also includes selecting a path solution for the traffic flow in accordance with the set of convex constraints, and sending information regarding the path solution to nodes in the communications system. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124637 | PAYMENT RECONCILIATION IN MIXED-OWNERSHIP LOW-POWER MESH NETWORKS - Systems and methods that enable scalable, cost-effective payment reconciliation between owners of devices at least temporarily connected in or to a particular low-power, ad hoc mesh network. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124638 | METHOD FOR VIRTUAL CARRIER AGGREGATION, BASE STATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method for virtual carrier aggregation, a base station, and a user equipment are provided. A base station receives measurement capability indication information and indication information indicating a capability of receiving data transmission that are reported by a UE. The base station selects a measurement set for the UE according to the measurement capability indication information, and sends the measurement set to the UE, where the indication information indicating the capability of receiving data transmission includes information of carriers on which the UE supports concurrent receiving of data transmission and the measurement capability indication information includes indication information indicating a capability of the UE for measuring CSI and/or indication information indicating a capability of the UE for measuring RSRP. The base station can flexibly select an activated carrier set for the UE. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124639 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS TERMINAL - A wireless communication method includes: transmitting, by a wireless terminal executing a plurality of wireless communications, first assistance information for assisting in control of interference to a base station, according to occurrence of the interference in the wireless terminal; receiving, by the base station, the first assistance information from the wireless terminal and transmitting control information relating to the plurality of wireless communications to the wireless terminal; and performing, by the wireless terminal, measurement for the control of the interference and transmitting second assistance information for assisting in the control of the interference. | 05-07-2015 |
20150131458 | MULTI-SOURCE CORRELATION OF NETWORK TOPOLOGY METRICS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method of determining a cost for a routing path in a network. The method includes: receiving a first metric for a plurality of links in a network, the first metric being a routing metric used to determine routing in the network; determining a routing path including a subset of the links based on the first metric, the routing path having an initial cost based on the first metric; receiving second metric information including a second metric that is different from the first metric; and calculating a corrected cost for the routing path based on the second metric. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131459 | REDUCING TIME PERIOD OF DATA TRAVEL IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Examples of methods, systems, and computer program products relating to supervising data in a wireless network are disclosed. At least part of a system may be located between a packet data network and a base station, and/or may be at least logically separate from the base station. The system may be capable of evaluating the service provided by the base station, and may be capable of determining whether or not any action should consequently be performed. Examples of an action may include an action which may not necessarily affect en-route data packets such as outputting a report, and/or an action which may affect en-route data packets such as delaying packets, not delaying packets, and/or stopping the delaying of packets. An action which affects data packets may or may not affect data packets uniformly. An action may or may not result in an improvement in quality of user experience. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131460 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING RSSI AND RTT INFORMATION FOR CHOOSING ACCESS POINTS TO ASSOCIATE WITH - During access point discovery, an initial list of access points available for connection is generated. The received signal strength indication (RSSI) and round trip time (RTT) delay for the access points in the initial list are measured, e.g., during discovery and by a plurality of active measurements. The initial list is pruned based on an initial and subsequent RSSI and RTT measurements to produce a master list of access points. The pruning of the initial list of access points may be based on the differentials in the RSSI measurements and the RTT measurements as well as a determination of access points that the mobile device is moving away from. As the mobile device moves to different locations, access points from the master list may be selected and connected with based on the expected duration of availability as determined by RSSI and RTT measurements. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131461 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING MODEM POWER BASED ON A PRESENT STATE OF CHARGE OF BATTERY - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing power of a user equipment (UE). A UE modem may determine the state of charge of the battery to determine that the battery is in one of two or more charge state levels, and may invoke one or more modem power saving modes based on the charge state level. Power saving modes may include, for example, reducing a number of available receive chains in a UE, initiating a time delay between one or more frequency scan requests performed by the UE, reducing a rate of neighbor search requests performed by the UE, providing a buffer status report (BSR) parameter that indicates a reduced amount of buffer data relative to an actual amount of buffer data for the UE, and/or adjusting a maximum transmit power level for an uplink channel. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131462 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ASSISTED NETWORK DETECTION FOR USER EQUIPMENT - Methods, systems, and devices are described for detecting a communications network or assisting in the detection of a communications network. In a method for detecting a communications network, a beacon received from a device over a wireless local area network (WLAN) may be decoded to identify an information element (IE) in the beacon. The IE may indicate an availability of another network. When the IE is empty, a sleep mode may be entered (e.g., by a user equipment (UE)). In a method for assisting a detection of a communications network, a database including information indicating an availability of at least a first network may be accessed, and a beacon may be broadcast over a WLAN. The beacon may include an IE that indicates the availability of at least the first network. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131463 | GAIN CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TD-HSPA+TERMINAL DEVICE - Disclosed are a signal gain control method and device for a TD-HSPA+ terminal device. The method comprises the following steps: when a terminal device is in a continuous packet transmission mode, it is determined whether the terminal device receives a signal from a high speed packet channel for the first time, and if not, it is determined whether a reception interval between two successively received signals is smaller than a preset interval; if the reception interval is not smaller than the preset interval, a gain AGC | 05-14-2015 |
20150131464 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF DETERMINING COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network in which two or more communication schemes coexist, in which a wireless control device identifies a communication scheme of a frame transmitted by a wireless terminal device, making reception possible. The wireless control device, upon detecting a receive signal strength of receive data, determines a signal strength at a non-overlapping frequency band of each communication scheme and thereby judges the communication scheme of the receive data. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131465 | CARRIER-BASED RSRQ METRIC FOR EFFICIENT SMALL CELL OFFLOADING - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for controlling measurements and, in particular, a type of load-sensitive measurement, such as received signal, received quality (RSRQ), performed by a user equipment. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131466 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING OUTER LOOP POWER CONTROL FOR FRAME EARLY TERMINATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Aspects of the present disclosures are directed to outer loop power control (OLPC) mechanisms that can achieve or realize the desired block error rate (BLER) performance in a wireless network that supports frame early termination (FET) utilizing multiple decoding attempts during the same transmit time interval. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131467 | SPECTRUM-AWARE RF MANAGEMENT AND AUTOMATIC CONVERSION OF ACCESS POINTS TO SPECTRUM MONITORS AND HYBRID MODE ACCESS POINTS - Methods of operating devices on a wireless network as access points (AP) or spectrum monitors (SM). An adaptive radio management (ARM) process operating on the digital network senses network conditions based on data from APs and SMs on the network, and in response to conditions changes devices from AP operation to SM operation, and from SM operation back to AP operation. A method for providing wideband spectrum analysis functions on a radio operating as an AP on a channel proving client connectivity services. A method for scanning off-channel for shorter durations between transmissions to collect spectral data and a method for explicitly quieting IEEE 802.11 transmissions on a channel to collect spectral data. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131468 | METHOD FOR ACCESS POINTS SCHEDULING FOR BACKHAUL AGGREGATION IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND A DEVICE - A method for access points scheduling for backhaul aggregation in a telecommunications network and a device | 05-14-2015 |
20150131469 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA AND AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - An apparatus and a method are provided for transmitting data in an electronic device. A method for processing data in an electronic device includes in network connection, determining whether to send a packet of a first Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) value that is preset, a destination node, responsive to the packet of the first preset MTU value not being transmitted to the destination node, measuring an optimal MTU value in an Internet Protocol (IP) layer or an application layer, and changing the first preset MTU to the measured optimal MTU value. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131470 | WIFI POSITIONING BENCH TEST METHOD AND INSTRUMENT - The present invention relates to simulation on a lab workbench of conditions that would be encountered by a mobile device during a so-called drive test, which involves transporting the mobile device along a course so that it encounters fading and changing wireless access points used normally to connect the mobile device to a wireless network but in this case used to locate the device. The instrument and method also support parametric testing of transceivers used for WiFi positioning and, optionally, GNSS positioning by the same mobile device used for WiFi positioning. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131471 | INTELLIGENT MOBILITY APPLICATION PROFILING TOOL - Analyzing mobile device applications within a wireless data network and other related aspects are presented herein. More particularly, described herein is a novel Intelligent Mobility Application Profiling Tool (iMAP) and/or other mechanisms, systems and methods for profiling and benchmarking applications associated with mobile devices in a wireless data network. Various systems and methods described herein expose cross-layer interaction associated with a network device in order to profile an application on the network device with respect to energy efficiency, performance, and functionality. As described herein, radio resource control (RRC) analysis can be performed to infer RRC states associated with a given application, identify tail time, etc. Further, analyzers are employed for various layers, including transmission control protocol (TCP) and/or hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP), as well as to analyze communication bursts associated with a given application. Analysis results are subsequently utilized to deliver application profiling results to a user. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131472 | REFERENCE SIGNAL RECEPTION AND CQI COMPUTATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication base station apparatus which is able to prevent deterioration in the throughput of LTE terminals even when LTE terminals and LTE+ terminals coexist. In this apparatus, based on the mapping pattern of the reference signals used only in LTE+ terminals, a setting unit sets, in each subframe, the resource block groups where the reference signals used only by the LTE+ terminals are mapped. For symbols mapped to the antennas, an mapping unit maps, to all the resource blocks within one frame, cell specific reference signals used for both LTE terminals and LTE+ terminals. For the symbols mapped to the antennas, the mapping unit maps, to the plurality of resource blocks, of which part of the resource block groups is comprised, in the same subframe within one frame, the cell specific reference signals used only for LTE+ terminals, based on the setting results inputted from the setting unit. | 05-14-2015 |
20150138995 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PHASE NOISE CANCELLATION - According to an aspect of the present disclosure, a baseband signal and a pilot signal are combined for a transmission. The combined signal is then translated to higher frequency band by mixing a local oscillator signal and the combined signal. On the receiver, the pilot signal is used to remove the phase noise in the baseband signal, as both baseband signal and the pilot signal are affected/modified by substantially the same phase noise. In one embodiment, the pilot signal may be selected either centered outside the bandwidth of the base band signal or centered inside the bandwidth of the base band signal with enough guard band around it so that it can be filtered out using filters. The pilot signal is used in a similar fashion to eliminate the effect of the phase noise introduced by the local oscillator present in the tester in testing the receiver device. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138996 | SWITCHED MEASUREMENT PROBE FOR LARGE-SCALE BROADBAND PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT - A single measurement agent installed at an aggregation point in a network is cycled through multiple network segments (or service groups) using a switching device. Detailed broadband measurement tests are performed on each network segment. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138997 | DETECTION OF RVU CAPABLE DEVICES - Devices and methods for quickly and definitively detecting whether or not a device is RVU capable. Aspects of the disclosed method and apparatus make use of the RVU messaging protocol, which include a Discovery phase and a Description phase. In one embodiment, a stand-alone testing device includes functionality that can test for the existence of RVU capability in a network connected device; in another embodiment, a cable/data network interface device may be modified to include such functionality. One detection method exams messages transmitted by a device during a Discovery phase for unique indicia of RVU compliance by the device. Another detection method reads a data structure from a device during a Description phase and looks for unique indicia of RVU compliance by the device. An installation method provides a process for quickly and definitively detecting an RVU compliant device. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138998 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING TESTING A DATA LINK OF A DATA PACKET SIGNAL TRANSCEIVER - A system and method for enabling testing a data link of a data packet signal transceiver device under test (DUT). A RX data packet signal originating from a reference device is conveyed for reception by a DUT, and a TX data packet signal originating from the DUT is conveyed for reception by the reference device. At least a portion of the RX data packet signal is conveyed with a signal attenuation and at least a portion of the TX data packet signal is conveyed with a different signal attenuation. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138999 | OPTIMIZING RESPONSE INTERFRAME SPACE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A response interframe space (RIFS) time period may be adapted in a communication system. The RIFS time period may be determined based, at least in part, on a processing time used by a receiving device to process a received physical layer transmission from a transmitting device. The RIFS may be optimized in consideration of channel conditions for a particular communications channel, capabilities of a receiving device, and/or characteristics of a particular physical layer transmission. For example, the RIFS may be dependent on characteristics of a final transmission symbol used to transmit a physical layer transmission. The RIFS may depend on a processing time associated with decoding forward error correction (FEC) encoded blocks that end in the final transmission symbol. The RIFS may depend on a quantity of decoding iterations in a communication system that uses iterative decoding of FEC encoded blocks. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139000 | ADJUSTMENT OF CQI BASED ON FADING CONDITION - CQI is enhanced in fast fading and/or poor RF scenarios. For example, in the event a fast fading condition and/or a poor RF condition is detected at a UE, a CQI value is increased by a defined delta. The UE reports this higher CQI value to a serving access point (e.g., base station) as long as the channel condition prevails this way such that a corresponding increase in throughput may subsequently be seen at the UE. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139001 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BEAM IDENTIFICATION IN MULTI-ANTENNA SYSTEMS - Embodiments allow a station to determine which of a plurality of spatial beams is best suited for communicating with user equipment (UE). Some embodiments overlay spatial multiplexing in a way that provides support for UE without changing existing signaling schemes. In these embodiments, different messages, each designed to provoke different behavior in the UE, are transmitted on different spatial beams. The station then observes the behavior to determine which beam is most suited for the UE. Other embodiments design new signaling schemes to effectively allow UE supporting the schemes to identify which beam is most suited for communication. A single reference signal is scrambled with one of a plurality of indexing sequences, and each is transmitted on a different spatial beam. The UE performs a channel quality estimate for each scrambled signal and determines the index best suited for communication. The index may then be transmitted to the station. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139002 | Management of Modulation and Coding Scheme Implementation - In an example, packets transmitted over a communication channel from a transmitter are received. Channel state information (CSI) from the received packets are obtained and signal-to-noise (SNR) values of the communication channel are computed based on the obtained CSI. In addition, effective bit error rate (BER) values are determined based on the SNR values, a coherence time period within which the effective BER values of the communication channel remain within a predetermined range is determined, a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) to be implemented by the transmitter is determined based on the effective BER values within the coherence time period, and the determined MCS is transmitted to the transmitter. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139003 | MOBILE STATION DEVICE, PATH LOSS CALCULATION METHOD, PROGRAM, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - Disclosed is a mobile station device | 05-21-2015 |
20150139004 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - A method in a network node for assisting a first user equipment in interference mitigation. The network node is comprised in a cellular communications network. The cellular communications network further comprises the first user equipment and a second user equipment. The second user equipment causes interference to the first user equipment when at least one of the first user equipment and second user equipment communicate by using Device-to-Device communication. The network node obtains information about the receiver of the first user equipment. The network node then determines one or more parameters required by the first user equipment for mitigating the interference. The parameters relate to the obtained information and to the interfering second user equipment. The network node then sends the one or more parameters to the first user equipment thereby assisting the first user equipment to mitigate interference caused by the second user equipment. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139005 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, MEASUREMENT METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A base station apparatus configures, for each of configurations for channel state information reference signals included in a measurement configuration, a measurement offset to offset a result of measurement using the channel state information reference signal, based on the purpose of measurement. A mobile station apparatus adds the corresponding measurement offset included in the measurement configuration to a result of measuring each of the channel state information reference signals and judges whether a condition of a report configuration is satisfied. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139006 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CARRYING OUT DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method by which a first device carries out device-to-device (D2D) communications in a wireless communications system, the method including the steps of: receiving discovery-related information from a third device; and receiving a discovery signal by using the discovery-related information, wherein the discovery-related information includes the kind of the reference signal used as the discovery signal and/or the information relating to the carrier frequency. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139007 | Wireless LAN Device Positioning - A system and method to determine a location of a device in a wireless local area network (LAN) based on positioning assistance data acquired from a server is disclosed. The host-offload wireless LAN device may determine a location based on the location computations done inside the wireless LAN module. The device includes a storage medium configured to provide a database of positioning assistance data, a wireless LAN module configured to receive beacon signals broadcast from one or more access points, and a processor configured to store the access point identification information and the signal strength detected by the wireless LAN module in a first memory section, access the previously-stored positioning assistance data from the storage medium, assemble positioning assistance data based on a comparison, store the assembled positioning assistance data in a second memory section, and determine a location of wireless LAN device using assembled positioning assistance data. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139008 | EARLY FRAME BANDWIDTH ASSESSMENT IN A MULTI-BANDWIDTH WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for determining the bandwidth of an incoming frame in a wireless local area network (WLAN), includes the following steps, executed at least by a processor, upon reception of a first plurality of samples representative of a first signal of the frame received at a primary WLAN channel, and of a second plurality of samples of the frame representative of a second signal of the frame received at a secondary WLAN channel:
| 05-21-2015 |
20150139009 | SIGNALING METHOD FOR COMP SCHEME AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method for link adaptation in a wireless communication system, the method performed by a user equipment (UE) and including measuring a channel state at a first time instance, reporting a measurement value of the channel state, and receiving scheduling based on the reported measurement value of the channel state from a serving base station at a second time instance. Traffic generation of a neighboring base station is restricted at least between the first time instance and the second time instance to accord the reported measurement value of the channel state with a channel state at the second time instance. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139010 | ACCESS POINT SELECTION AND MANAGEMENT - The disclosure is related to a method of selecting one of access points based on multiple quality parameters in different frames. The method may include receiving a probe response frame from access points, analyzing quality parameters included in the received probe response frame to estimate wireless link quality of each access point, and selecting one of the access points based on the analysis result. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING A SET UP SIGNAL USED FOR DATA COMMUNICATION OVER A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of detecting a set up signal having a predetermined frequency and used for data transmissions over a communication network comprises comparing an energy level of a filtered received signal with a first predetermined value and providing a first detect signal, comparing an energy level of a component of the received signal at a predetermined frequency with a second predetermined value and providing a second detect signal. In addition, an autocorrelation function is performed on the received signal to discriminate between the set up signal and other signals in the received signal and a check signal is provided when the autocorrelation function identifies the set up signal. The set up signal in the received signal is detected in response to the first and the second detect signals and the check signal. A method of detecting phase reversals in the set up signal is also disclosed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139012 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for analyzing a wide frequency band with respect to signal power levels in specified narrow frequency bands, detecting narrow band signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level from the narrow band signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold from the average composite wideband power level, detecting narrow band interference according to the adaptive threshold, and configuring a filter to substantially suppress the detected narrow band interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139013 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for analyzing a wide frequency band with respect to signal power levels in specified narrow frequency bands, detecting narrow band signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level from the narrow band signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold, detecting narrow band interference according to one of the average composite wideband power level, the adaptive threshold, or both, prioritizing the detected narrow band interference, and selectively filtering a portion of the detected narrow band interference according to the prioritization. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139014 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS NETWORK MANAGEMENT - Methods and systems for wireless network management are described. In one embodiment, a radio measurement of a characteristic of a wireless access technology may be taken. The wireless access technology may enable data communication through a wireless network when connected to an access point. A report may be transmitted through an alternate access technology. The report may be based on the radio measurement. Additional methods and systems are disclosed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139015 | LTE Band Avoidance for RF Coexistence Interference - Various embodiments enable a multi-active mobile communication device to mitigate (manage) interference by a frequency band used by a first subscription with the frequency band used by a second subscription. The device processor may generate modified power measurements for one or more frequency bands of a first subscription and use the modified power measurement(s) to cause the first subscription to switch from the frequency band that interferes with the frequency band of the second subscription. The modified power measurement may be a decreased power measurement of the first frequency band and/or an increased power measurement of a second frequency band that does not interfere with the frequency band of the second subscription. As a result, various embodiments may mitigate or otherwise manage the impact of coexistence interference between the first and second subscriptions of a multi-active mobile communication device without limiting capabilities of the device or changes to the network. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139016 | Adaptive Frequency Domain Resource Configuration Method, Apparatus, and Communications System - Disclosed are an adaptive frequency domain resource configuration method, an apparatus, and a communications system. The method includes receiving, by a receiving apparatus, a pilot signal transmitted by a transmitting apparatus and feeding back channel information of a channel for transmitting the pilot signal to the transmitting apparatus by measuring the pilot signal, so that the transmitting apparatus divides a bandwidth frequency of the transmitting apparatus according to the channel information. The receiving apparatus can feed back the channel information to the transmitting apparatus according to the received pilot signal, so that the transmitting apparatus can divide the bandwidth frequency according to channel quality, and adaptive adjustment can be performed on a frequency domain resource of each subcarrier according to the channel information fed back by the receiving apparatus. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139017 | MDT INFORMATION-REPORTING FORMAT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND TIME-STAMP CONFIGURING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method for configuring a Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) information reporting format and a time-stamp is provided that supports MDT in a 3 | 05-21-2015 |
20150139018 | Dynamic Almost Blank Subframe Allocation - After an increase in the number of wireless devices or traffic load by an amount greater than a value, a base station transmits a message. The message comprises an updated subframe allocation bitmap indicating a second plurality of subframes including an updated plurality of almost blank subframes. The updated plurality of almost blank subframes includes a smaller number of almost blank subframes than an initial plurality of almost blank subframes. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139019 | Technique for Performing Physical Layer Measurements - The present disclosure relates to a technique for performing physical layer measurements on a frequency resource relative to other frequency resources in a telecommunications system operable to communicate over multiple frequency resources. A method aspect of this technique includes determining that a mobile terminal is to perform a physical layer measurement with regard to a first frequency resource, determining if there is data to be communicated over one or more second frequency resource(s) within a time period wherein the first frequency resource is distinct from the second frequency resources: if it is determined that there is no data to be communicated over the second frequency resource(s) within the time period, performing the physical layer measurement on the first frequency resource and forming a quality measure of the first frequency resource based on the physical layer measurement; or if it is determined that there is data to be communicated over the second frequency resource(s) within the time period, modifying the physical layer measurement and forming a quality measure of the first frequency resource based on the modified physical layer measurement. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139020 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DRIVE TEST IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for matching the radio channel measurement timing of Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) cycle with timings of the Discontinuous Reception (DRX) cycle are provided. The radio channel measurement method of a terminal according to the present invention includes configuring a DRX cycle, receiving a Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) cycle, comparing the DRX cycle and the MDT cycle, measuring, when the MDT cycle is an integer multiple of the DRX cycle, the radio channel at DRX timings matching with MDT timings, and storing a result of the measurement. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139021 | Decentralized Caching System - In a satellite communication system comprising at least a hub and a plurality of terminals, at least one terminal may include a cache for storing data objects. The cache may be based on a detachable memory device that may be inserted to or removed from the terminal at any given time, including after the terminal is deployed. Aspects are directed to preventing a prefetching of objects already stored in a cache of a remote terminal. In some embodiments, an efficient multicasting of content to terminals over an adaptive link may occur in a manner which may benefit terminals comprising a cache while not affecting or minimally affecting the performance of terminals that may not include a cache. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139022 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA DEMODULATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention discloses a method and a system for data demodulation, and a user equipment. An interference statistic characteristic is measured by using an IMR instead of a CRS or a non-zero power CSI-RS, so that the obtained interference statistic characteristic can truly reflect an interference statistic characteristic that a DMRS actually experiences, and then a PDSCH is demodulated, so as to improve accuracy of channel estimation. | 05-21-2015 |
20150146545 | HANDLING SIGNAL QUALITY MEASUREMENTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for handling signal quality measurements by a wireless device in a wireless network environment, particularly in a coordinated transmission environment. An apparatus way include computer-readable media having instructions and one or more processors coupled with the media and configured to execute the instructions to generate a power parameter corresponding to a power adjustment associated with a reference signal, provide the reference signal generated based in part on the generated power parameter to a wireless device, and provide the power parameter to transmission points operating in the coordinated transmission environment. Each of the transmission points may be configured to communicate the power parameter to the wireless device, and the wireless device may be configured to determine, based at least in part on the power parameter, a power characteristics associated with a channel in which the reference signal is provided. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146546 | METHOD AND NODES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-28-2015 |
20150146547 | CELL AND EVOLVED NODE B STATION OUTAGE RESTORATION TOOL - During scheduled or unscheduled wireless communication outage, restoration of crucial or critical cell site devices and/or base station device are prioritized. The system filters current key performance indicator values and historical key performance indicator values for a reference cell device to produce a filtered key performance indicator metric for the reference cell device, filters statistical data to produce filtered statistical data representing a filtered statistic for the reference cell device, determines a weighting factor for the reference cell device, and displays of a ranking score determined as a function of the weighting factor, the filtered statistic data, and the filtered key performance indicator metric. The ranking score provides an ordering that can be used to restore critical cell site devices and/or base station devices. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146548 | ADAPTIVE REMOTE WI-FI CLIENT POWER CONTROL TO AVOID LOCAL RECEIVER DESENSE - A method and apparatus for communicating in a wireless network includes an AP having multiple radios, a first one of which communicates with a nearby client node and a second one of which receives power on another wireless protocol operating in the same or close frequency band as the first radio. The first radio is configured to remotely control the transmit power of the client node so that it doesn't interfere with the reception performance of the second radio. A beacon or probe response frame is used to reduce transmit power of the client node and a CTS2S signal is used to selectively terminate client node transmit power entirely over short periods so that the reception performance of the other wireless device is not severely compromised or desensed by the client node and can be evaluated according to comparative performance criteria such as signal to interference plus noise ratio. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146549 | KNOWLEDGE DISCOVERY AND DATA MINING-ASSISTED MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CONTROL - Joint provisioning of cell sector capacity (CSC) and a defined customer service level (CSL) is provided utilizing a knowledge discovery and data mining-assisted multi-radio access technology controller. For example, Strategic Performance Indexes, CSC and CSL, are identified. The relationships between CSC, CSL, ergodic channel capacity (ECC) and an interface load (IL) for a radio network (RN) (or cell sector of an RN) are determined. Extensive information associated with the RN is collected and neural networks analysis is employed to reduce the information to a manageable set including the specific information associated with ECC and IL. The reduced set of information is mapped to ECC and IL using eigenvalue analysis, and the relationships between the ECC, IL, CSC and CSL are employed to determine the CSC and CSL for the RN (or cell sector of the RN). Network assignments and/or parameters can be updated based on the results. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146550 | METHOD OF AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING AN EMPIRICAL PROPAGATION PREDICTION MODEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A propagation prediction model having adjustable parameters is optimized in a mobile communications network, by subdividing a service area into a plurality of map tiles, predicting a tile reliability from the model for each map tile, averaging the predicted tile reliability from all the map tiles to obtain a predicted average service area reliability, measuring a service area reliability for all the map tiles to obtain a measured service area reliability, comparing the predicted average service area reliability with the predicted average service area reliability, and adjusting the parameters of the model when the measured service area reliability differs from the predicted average service area reliability by a predetermined amount. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146551 | INTER RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) MEASUREMENT USING IDLE INTERVAL AND DEDICATED CHANNEL MEASUREMENT OCCASION - A method of wireless communication increases the gap length for performing IRAT measurements. When a radio bearer transmission time interval (TTI) length is greater than an initial gap length, the gap length is increased to provide additional time for performing IRAT measurement. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146552 | Adaptive Pacing of Media Content Delivery Over a Wireless Network - A method includes monitoring, at a base station of a wireless network, channel quality information corresponding to a wireless channel used by the base station to stream media content to a communication device. The media content is streamed to the communication device at a particular effective transfer rate via data bursts. The method includes selecting, at the base station, a size of a data burst to send to the communication device and a download rate for the data burst. The size and the data rate are based on the channel quality information. The method also includes sending the data burst to the communication device at a first time from the base station. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146553 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEPLOYING AN RTT-BASED INDOOR POSITIONING SYSTEM - The present disclosure describes methods, systems, computer-readable media, and apparatuses for evaluating the suitability of AP signaling for RTT-based location calculation. Various evaluation methods are disclosed to enable the signaling to be tested for consistency and reliability. An AP may be analyzed by a mobile device or other communications mechanism to determine whether the AP is suitable for RTT-based location signaling. A mobile device receives multiple signals from an evaluated AP at various locations in the indoor area, and derives RTT data from the signals. The RTT data is analyzed to determine whether RTT data from the AP should be used by mobile devices in the process of calculating their location. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146554 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING END-TO-END ACCESSIBILITY IN VOICE OVER LONG TERM EVOLUTION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a method for estimating end-to-end accessibility in a voice over long term evolution network includes aggregating data, by a processor, from a plurality of sources in the network relating to calls originating from and terminating in the network, where the data indicates success rates for a plurality of procedures initiated by placement of the calls, and calculating, by the processor, a metric indicative of the end-to-end accessibility from the data. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146555 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING LOCALIZED SERVICE QUALITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method, computer-readable storage device, and an apparatus for determining a localized service quality in a wireless network are disclosed. For example, the method constructs a tensor comprising a plurality of dimensions to represent data for the localized service quality, receives data for the wireless network that is gathered at a coarse granularity level, populates the tensor in accordance with the data that is gathered, applies an unfolding mechanism to construct a plurality of two dimensional matrices from the tensor, determines for each respective two dimensional matrix of the plurality of two dimensional matrices an approximation for a pre-determined level of accuracy, and populating all entries of each respective two dimensional matrix that are not populated in accordance with the approximation of the respective two dimensional matrix, and determines the localized service quality by applying a folding mechanism across the plurality of two dimensional matrices. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146556 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CENTRAL CONTROL SERVER - It is provided a base station apparatus that uses a plurality of coordinated Multiple Points (CoMP) schemes, and is connected to a plurality of subordinate transmission points for transmitting data, comprising: a transceiver unit, located at the transmission point, that receives and transmits data from and to a terminal; a data processing unit that extracts non-periodic feedback information and periodic feedback information from the data received via the transceiver unit from the terminal; a CoMP scheme selection unit that selects a CoMP scheme to be applied to the terminal from a plurality of CoMP schemes based on the non-periodic feedback information; and a scheduling unit that performs scheduling with use of the selected CoMP scheme based on the non-periodic feedback information and periodic feedback information, and transmits data to the terminal via a corresponding transceiver unit. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146557 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING CHANNEL MEASUREMENT AND DL CSI FEEDBACK - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the technical field of wireless communications, and in particular, to a method, system, and device for configuring channel measurement and DL CSI feedback, so as to implement measurement in a dynamic TDD system. The method for configuring channel measurement according to the embodiment of the present invention comprises: a network side device dividing downlink subframes into multiple downlink subframe groups according to an interference condition on the downlink subframes; and the network side device notifying a user equipment of channel measurement configuration information corresponding to the downlink subframe groups. The network side device notifies the user equipment of the channel measurement configuration information corresponding to the multiple downlink subframe groups that are obtained according to the interference condition on the downlink subframe, thereby implementing measurement in the dynamic TDD system. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146558 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Provided are a method and an apparatus for reporting channel state information in a wireless communication system. A wireless device determines a Channel status information (CSI) reference resource based on a CSI configuration, and estimates CSI from the CSI reference resource. The wireless device reports the estimated CSI to a base station. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146559 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, RECEPTION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND RECEPTION METHOD - A reference signal generation unit | 05-28-2015 |
20150146560 | Method and Apparatus for Estimating Available Capacity of a Data Transfer Path - A method and apparatus for estimating available capacity of a data transfer path ( | 05-28-2015 |
20150146561 | METHOD FOR MEASURING AND REPORTING CSI-RS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for measuring and reporting a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) by a terminal in a wireless communication system. The method involves acquiring, from a network, a measurement configuration for measuring radio resource monitoring, the measurement configuration including information for requesting a CSI-RS measurement report, performing a CSI-RS measurement based on the measurement configuration in order to acquire a CSI-RS measurement result, evaluating whether or not a measurement result report condition has been satisfied based on the measurement configuration, and, if the measurement result report condition has been satisfied, transmitting a measurement report message to the network. The measurement report message includes the CSI-RS measurement result. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146562 | RADIO LINK MONITORING - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for monitoring channel quality of a radio link between a secondary evolved NodeB (SeNB) and a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication network configured for dual connectivity. In embodiments, the UE may generate one or more indications of a channel quality of the SeNB-UE radio link and forward the indication to the SeNB. Based on the indication, the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) message from a master eNB (MeNB) related to the SeNB-UE radio link. Other embodiments may be claimed. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146563 | METHOD OF SENSING EXCESSIVE BANDWIDTH USAGE - A method of sensing an excessive bandwidth usage includes acquiring an information set of a network bandwidth usage, applying a plurality of excessive bandwidth use sensing techniques to the acquired information set, determining an excessive bandwidth usage, and then limiting the determined excessive bandwidth usage. Accordingly, the network bandwidth may be uniformly secured and provided by limiting the bandwidth usage that uses the excessive network band. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146564 | Methods, Systems, and Products for Network Topology - Methods, systems, and products simulate a topology of a residential home network. The residential home network has a residential gateway and one or more devices communicating with the residential gateway. Each device may be queried by the residential gateway for configuration and performance data. A simulated view of a topology of the residential home network is then generated. | 05-28-2015 |
20150295679 | REMOTE TX TRAINING WITH A RE-TIMER - A device for transmit (TX) training a remote link partner (LP) includes a TX retimer module adjacent to a TX port of the device, and a receive (RX) retimer module adjacent lo the TX retimer module. The RX retimer module copies first control and status data to the TX retimer module, and the TX retimer module provides second control and status data, for TX training of the remote LP. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295734 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING THE RECEPTION QUALITY OF MESSAGES IN A CAN BUS SYSTEM - A user station for a bus system and a method for improving a reception quality of messages in a user station of a bus system are provided. The user station includes an estimation device for estimating a channel impulse response when and/or after only one further user station of the bus system transmits a message to the bus system, or for determining necessary functions of filters directly from a signal received by the user station, and a correction device for correcting a signal received by the user station based on the channel impulse response estimated by the estimation device. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295797 | PACKET MEASUREMENTS AND REPORTING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - This document discloses methods,apparatuses, and computer programs for carrying out packet arrival measurements and reporting the measurement results. A first wireless apparatus transmits a packet arrival measurement request to a second wireless apparatus. The first wireless apparatus then receives a packet arrival measurement report from the second wireless apparatus,wherein the packet arrival measurement report comprises information on arrival of at least one data packet addressed to the first wireless apparatus at the second wireless apparatus. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295801 | Distributed Network Delay and Jitter Monitoring Using Fixed and Mobile Network Devices - Inclusion of a simple time-transfer module in client devices and judicious deployment of time-servers in the network enable a network management system to observe, record, and predict network issues. In a wireless network every mobile device can be a probe and monitoring of all parts of the network on a continuous basis can be achieved. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295810 | Throughput Test Method and Apparatus - Disclosed are a throughput test method and apparatus. The method includes: a first network device generating a periodic detection message through a data processor; the first network device sending the detection message to a second network device to be tested, wherein a first throughput value of the first network device is greater than or equal to a second throughput value of the second network device; the first network device receiving a loopback detection message looped back by the second network device; the first network device obtaining a first quantity value of the detection messages as well as a second quantity value of the loopback detection messages; and the first network device obtaining the second throughput value characterizing the throughput of the second network device through the data processor based on the first quantity value and the second quantity value. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295813 | Method and Apparatus for Determining Traffic Forwarding Path and Communications System - A method and an apparatus for determining a traffic forwarding path and a communications system are provided that belong to the field of communications technologies. The method includes acquiring, by a first network node, link quality information of each link in a first autonomous system, the link quality information of each link includes an individual link quality index of each link, or, the link quality information of each link includes an index reference value calculated according to the individual link quality index of each link, where the link quality index includes one or more dynamic link quality indexes; and determining, according to the currently acquired link quality information of each link in the first autonomous system, a path used by the first network node to forward traffic to each second network node. The present invention has relatively good network adaptability. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296083 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF DISTRIBUTED SILO SIGNALING - The embodiments described herein recite a telephone communication system used for handling information such as messages, typically voice mail messages, and, more particularly, is directed to a system that provides distributed session initiation protocol (SIP) silos. Distributed SIP silos (DSS) is a Communications Application Platform (CAP) feature that maintains the site's call capacity even when a signaling server fails. DSS uses multiple non-redundant signaling servers to provide SIP signaling for the same set of media ports. Because there are multiple signaling servers providing signaling for the same set of ports, the failure of one signaling server only terminates the calls it was actively processing and once those calls have been cleaned up, all the available (non-suspended) ports in the configuration are available to the remaining signaling servers. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296383 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD - A wireless communications apparatus may include: a channel monitoring unit monitoring a state of a communications channel according to a first communications standard and providing channel state information; a controlling unit deciding whether or not channel interference is present based on the channel state information; and an interference removing signal generating unit transmitting an interference removing signal to at least one of a plurality of channels adjacent to the communications channel when channel interference is present. Therefore, interference between heterogeneous communications networks may be decreased, such that wireless communications may be more stably performed. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296395 | Technique for Evaluation of a Parameter Adjustment in a Mobile Communications Network - This disclosure describes a technique for evaluating a parameter adjustment in a mobile communications network using a multivariate performance model that models a dependency of a performance metric for the mobile communications network on at least two parameters. A parameter is selected to be adjusted for a first network entity, where at least one second network entity is potentially affected by the parameter adjustment for the first network entity. The multivariate performance model is used to determine a change of the performance metric for the first network entity resulting from the parameter adjustment, and a change of the performance metric for the at least one second network entity resulting from the parameter adjustment for the first network entity. Then, the parameter adjustment is evaluated based on the performance metric changes for the first and second network entities. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296397 | CAPTURE OF PSS AND SSS WITH WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK RECEIVE CHAIN - An apparatus for capturing a signal of interest, e.g., PSS and/or SSS, captures data transmitted by a WWAN by obtaining access to a WLAN receive chain for a period of time corresponding to a measurement gap. The signal of interest transmitted by the WWAN is captured during the measurement gap using the WLAN receive chain. Access to a WLAN receive chain may be obtained in any one of several ways. For example, access may be obtained by 1) requesting WLAN receive chain access for LTE measurements through a virtual flow, 2) entering into a power save mode, 3) tuning to a non-operating WLAN channel, 4) setting network allocation vector (NAV) at or above a threshold value, or 5) entering a measurement mode during which the WLAN receive chain is prevented from performing WLAN operations. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296400 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS IN COVERAGE EXTENSION AREA OF SMALL-SCALE CELL WHEN MACRO CELL AND SMALL-SCALE CELL COEXIST - The present specification provides a method for performing measurements, by a terminal, in a coverage extension area of a small-scale cell in a wireless communication system in which macro cell and the small-scale cell coexist. The method for performing measurements can include the steps of: receiving information about a first subframe on which measurements for the small-scale cell can be performed and information about a second subframe on which measurements for the macro cell can be performed; when an interference cancellation function is set, measuring reference signal received power (RSRP) and a received signal strength indicator (RSSI) for the small-scale cell by driving the interference cancellation function on the first subframe; and measuring RSRP on the second subframe for the macro cell by driving the interference cancellation function and measuring the RSSI for the macro cell without driving the interference cancellation function. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296401 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BLOCKING SPURIOUS INTER-FREQUENCY AND INTER-SYSTEM MEASUREMENT REPORTS - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method is disclosed that comprises obtaining a new signal quality threshold based on a base signal quality threshold and a context-sensitive buffer margin and setting a current triggering threshold to the obtained new signal quality threshold if the current triggering threshold is smaller than the obtained new signal quality threshold. The method also comprises, if a measured signal quality on a currently active cell falls below the current trigging threshold: obtaining a combined quality of all cells within an active cell set and an inter-frequency signal quality or an inter-radio access technology (RAT) signal quality from an inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell set that is within a receiving range of the wireless device; and blocking a measurement report to a wireless network element if the obtained combined signal quality is equal to or better than the obtained inter-frequency or inter-RAT signal quality, wherein the measurement report is either an inter-frequency measurement report or an inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurement report. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296552 | WIRELESS DOCKING/UNDOCKING USING FINE TIME MEASUREMENT - A wireless dockee or a wireless docking center may utilize a fine timing measurement procedure to determine propagation times for signals communicated between the devices. Based on the propagation time, the wireless dockee or the wireless docking center may calculate their proximity to each other. When the proximity supports a wireless docking session, the wireless dockee or the wireless docking center may initiate a wireless docking session. The wireless docking session may include docking the wireless dockee to the wireless docking center and/or undocking the wireless dockee to the wireless docking center. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296562 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION - A method and an apparatus for controlling a wireless network connection are provided. The method includes detecting a signal strength in a connected wireless network, determining whether the detected signal strength is greater than a first threshold, if the detected signal strength is not greater than the first threshold determining whether an error occurs at least once in data transmission through the connected wireless network, and controlling a connection state of the connected wireless network according to a result of the error determination. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304180 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE FORMAT - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and server for processing geo-information including receiving, at the Geo-Information System server, a geo-view identifier; sending an indication whether a geo-view identified by the geo-view identifier is available, the geo-view comprising a schema identifier, wherein a schema identified by the schema identifier describes a data format comprising location information and one or more characteristics of the conditions in the cellular network; receiving data in a format consistent with the identified schema; and storing the received data in a data store. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304184 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EXTRACTING STRUCTURED APPLICATION DATA FROM A COMMUNICATIONS LINK - Systems and methods for generating a semantic description of operations between network agents. In an embodiment, packet-level traffic between two or more network agents is captured. The packet-level traffic is bundled into one or more messages, wherein each message comprises one or more elements. For each of the messages, the elements of the message are matched to one or more attributes, and the message is decoded into message data based on the matched attributes. The message data is then used to generate a semantic description of operations between the network agents. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304185 | Operations Analysis of Packet Groups Identified based on Timestamps - In one embodiment, operations analysis of packet groups identified based on timestamps is performed. One embodiment includes sending a plurality of sent timeframe groups of a plurality of time-stamped packets from a first packet network node towards a second packet network node in a network and recording first information associated with each of the plurality of said sent timeframe groups of the plurality of time-stamped packets. The second network node receives a plurality of received timeframe groups of a received plurality of time-stamped packets of said sent plurality of time-stamped packets and recording second information associated with each of the plurality of said received timeframe groups of the received plurality of time-stamped packets. Operations analysis based on one or more operations characteristics of said first information and said second information to produce analysis results. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY DETERMINING CAUSES OF SERVICE QUALITY DEGRADATION - Causes of service quality degradation in a communication network are determined for automated root cause analysis by identifying occurrence of degradation in service quality within a user session; identifying an underperforming resource of the communication network during occurrence of said identified degradation in service quality; in response to determining that the underperforming resource has at least one dependant resource, identifying any underperforming dependant resources during occurrence of said identified degradation in service quality; and outputting a plurality of causes of the service quality degradation including the identity of each of the identified underperforming resources. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304861 | RADIO PERFORMANCE CALCULATOR - A radio performance analyzer is provided comprising a cloud-accessible user communications interface and a radio performance calculator configured to compute a measure of performance for a plurality of networked radios operable in a geographic region, wherein the user communications interface is configured to receive a selection of a number of radios in the plurality of networked radios, wherein a selection is formed, the radio performance calculator computes the measure of performance of the selection for a plurality of locations in the geographic region spanning a selected period of time, and the radio performance calculator computes the measure of performance based on calculations of bit error rate and signal-to-noise ratio. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304865 | QUALITY OF SERVICE MONITORING FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL BASED COMMUNICATION SERVICE - In a method monitoring quality of service (QoS) of an IP based communication service, a node for controlling the IP service receives a request for initiating a session of the IP service. The node sends a request authorizing the session to a policy controller, and sends an indication to the policy controller that QoS monitoring is required for the session. The policy controller determines a policy rule for identifying and controlling user plane traffic of the session and sends an indication of the policy rule to a gateway node. The policy controller also sends an indication to the gateway node that QoS monitoring is required for the identified user plane traffic. The gateway node monitors QoS of the identified user plane traffic, and sends a QoS report indicating the QoS to the policy controller. The policy controller forwards the QoS report to the node for controlling the IP service. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304867 | Backhaul Communication in Wireless Networks - There is provided improved backhaul communication in a wireless network. The wireless network comprises at least one coordinating network node. The wireless network further comprises at least one cooperative network node. A method performed by the cooperating network node comprises receiving an uplink signal from a wireless device, the uplink signal comprising data. The method further comprises compressively sampling the data so as to obtain compressive measurements of the data. The method further comprises transmitting the compressively sampled data to the coordinating network node. There is also provided a method performed in the coordinating network node. There is further provided a cooperating network node and a coordinating network node arranged to perform the methods and computer programs and computer program products comprising computer program code for implementing the method. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304871 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR END-TO-END LINK QUALITY INDICATION - A mechanism for end-to-end link quality indication, including a wireless router, coupled to other wireless routers over a multi-hop mesh network, responsive to a first message received from an origination device, configured to forward the first message to a next one of the other wireless routers in route to a destination device. The wireless router has received signal strength indication (RSSI) logic, that adds first RSSI information to a first field of the first message, and that adds second RSSI information to a second field of an acknowledgement message prior to transmitting the acknowledgement message to the origination device. The first and second RSSI information, along with intermediate RSSI information added by one or more of the other wireless routers along a path from the origination device to the destination device, is aggregated into a single term representative of total round-trip quality for the first message and the acknowledgment message. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304872 | UTILIZING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE MESSAGE FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN UNLICENSED BANDS - Described herein are techniques for efficient LTE operation in the unlicensed band. For example, the technique may involve initiating, at the wireless device, a signal measurement of an unlicensed communication band device. The technique may also involve sending, to an access point configured for operation in the unlicensed communication band, a measurement report including the signal measurement of the unlicensed communication band device. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304873 | ENHANCED RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - A method for enhanced radio resource management in a public land mobile network includes: generating, by a mobility detecting sensor module of a user equipment, a previous motion information and a current motion information; and transmitting a mobility status update information, indicative of the current motion information, to the public land mobile network. The transmitting is based on a discrepancy between the current motion information and the previous motion information exceeding a predetermined threshold. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304874 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK QUALITY AND DOWNLOADING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DATA - A method determines a mobile communications network quality for downloading mobile communications data. Data which quantify the mobile communications network quality in a current location of a respective motor vehicle, is continually acquired using acquisition units provided in the motor vehicle. This data is transferred to a database in which it is stored. A route of a select motor vehicle is determined. A data record quantifying the mobile communications network quality along the route, is retrieved from the database. Mobile communications data is downloaded to a memory of the select motor vehicle taking the data record into consideration. A total data record quantifying the mobile communications network quality is determined at predetermined intervals by a data processing device, taking into consideration the data transferred to the database, and the data record quantifying the mobile communications network for the select motor vehicle is obtained from this total data record. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304876 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL INTERFERENCE PROCESSING - A system that incorporates the subject disclosure may include, for example, a device comprising a memory to store instructions and a processor coupled to the memory, wherein responsive to executing the instructions, the processor performs operations. The operations comprise receiving signals over a spectrum of frequencies, providing location data of the device to a base station, receiving a request from a base station to perform a spectral analysis of the signals, detecting an interference among the signals, and providing, in response to the request, data to the base station regarding a source of the interference, wherein the data comprises a location of the source relative to the device, spectral data for identifying the source, and a time a frequency of occurrence of the interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304877 | POSITIONING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications, and provide a positioning method, apparatus, and system, so as to improve positioning precision. The method includes: determining, by a server, a positioning measurement parameter, and generating measurement configuration information carrying the positioning measurement parameter, where the positioning measurement parameter is a parameter that the server requests a terminal to measure and is used to position the terminal; sending, by the server, the measurement configuration information to the terminal through a base station; receiving, by the server through the base station, configuration response information returned by the terminal, where the configuration response information carries a positioning response parameter, and the positioning response parameter is a measurement result generated after the terminal measures the positioning measurement parameter; and positioning, by the server, the terminal according to the positioning response parameter carried in the configuration response information. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304878 | METHOD FOR CHANNEL MEASUREMENT, METHOD FOR CONFIGURING CHANNEL MEASUREMENT AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method for channel measurement, a method for configuring channel measurement and an apparatus therefor includes: receiving, by UE, RRC signaling transmitted by an eNB, the RRC signaling including channel measurement indication and a measurement carrier frequency and a measurement bandwidth configured by the eNB for the UE; determining a channel measurement type by the UE according to the channel measurement indication, the channel measurement type including: performing channel measurement based on a reference signal to which the measurement carrier frequency corresponds, or performing channel measurement based on an actual reference signal; determining a reference signal sequence for performing channel measurement by the UE according to the channel measurement type; and performing channel measurement by the UE on the measurement carrier frequency with the configured measurement bandwidth by using the reference signal sequence. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304960 | ACCURATE UPLINK POWER CONTROL FOR COMP AND C-RAN - A user equipment (UE) is arranged to send an uplink power reference signal to an enhanced Node B (eNB) associated with multiple reception points (RPs), to receive identification of an RP set and a downlink reference signal power level, to determine a path loss estimate for each downlink reference signal received from RPs of the RP set, to determine an uplink power level that is a function of the path loss estimates determined for the downlink signals received from the RPs of the RP set, and to use the determined uplink power level during communication with the multiple RPs. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304966 | METHOD FOR REPORTING A POWER HEADROOM AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE THEREOF - There is provided a method for a method for reporting a power headroom. The method may comprise: identifying a change of a MAC entity; and triggering a power headroom reporting (PHR), if the change of the MAC entity is identified. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304989 | Receiving eMBMS on a Single-Radio-Multiple-Standby User Equipment - Embodiments methods implemented with a server or a processor of a mobile communication device (e.g., a multi-standby communication device) reduce the redundancy information needed to achieve adequate reception service on a first radio access technology (RAT) sharing an RF resource with a second RAT. The device processor may implement at least one tune-away management strategy that mitigates the amount of data for the first RAT that is lost during the tune-away event. Thus, by implementing the one or more tune-away management strategies, the device processor may ensure that less redundancy information overhead is needed to correct or replace lost or partially received data, improving latency, channel usage, and the first RAT's overall reception performance. In some embodiments, a server may implement one or more strategies for including redundancy information into data that is sent to a first RAT to mitigate the negative effects of tune aways on the first RAT. | 10-22-2015 |
20150311988 | Method and Arrangement for Signaling of Parameters in a Wireless Network - A mobile terminal receives, over a first cell configured on a carrier frequency, at least one parameter associated with a second cell configured on a carrier frequency. The at least one parameter comprises a cell identity. The mobile terminal then derives at least one physical layer characteristic for the second cell based on the received at least one parameter. Thereby, the mobile terminal is able to receive transmissions over the second cell, even if it could not initially detect the presence of the cell. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312008 | Autonomous Channel Quality Information Prediction - Data characterizing a first signal transmitted in an orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) system by a transmitter with one or more transmit antennas through an in-band channel and received by a receiver with a plurality of receive antennas can be received. The first signal can include one or more in-band pilot pulses. A channel quality for an out-of-band channel can be predicted based on the received data and a cross-correlation between an in-band channel and one or more out-of-band channels. Data characterizing the predicted channel quality for the out-of-band channel can be provided. Related apparatus, systems, techniques, and articles are also described. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312130 | Assigning Time Stamps to Received Data Packets - A method is provided for assigning a time stamp to a specific data packet which, as with a group of received data packets, is received by a cyclically operating sensor. The specific data packet is especially part of the group of received data packets. The disclosed method includes: determining the time of arrival of each data packet of the group of received data packets; assigning a time stamp to each data packet of the group of data packets; determining the time difference between the determined time of arrival and the assigned time stamp for each data packet of the group of data packets; determining the smallest time difference from among the determined time differences; and assigning a time stamp to the specific data packet on the basis of the time of arrival determined for the data packet for which the smallest time difference has been determined. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312283 | System and Method for Generating a Graphical User Interface Representative of Network Performance - The disclosed embodiments include a system and method for monitoring performance of a packet network. In one embodiment, a method includes collecting network performance information from a plurality of network nodes of a packet network, the network performance information being indicative of a health of the network packet network. The method includes storing the network performance information collected from the plurality of network nodes and generating a graphical user interface including a graphical representation of the network performance information, wherein the graphical representation of a network segment is indicated as a line, and wherein a width of the line widens and narrows in accordance with an amount of traffic flow over the network segment. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312773 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING SITE ACQUISITION SERVICES - Systems, methods, and articles of manufacture are disclosed for providing, investigative services associated with locations for deploying infrastructure, environmental studies, audits, etc. Disclosed embodiments may be used to provide site acquisition services to telecommunication carriers, including accurate information regarding potential locations for new towers or antennas. Other project applications include interim funding, permitting, underwriting, or general project managed activities. Consistent with disclosed embodiments, a site acquisition vendor may receive a request from a client to investigate potential locations for new antennas or other equipment. The site acquisition vendor may use disclosed embodiments to quickly and efficiently generate and provide reports responsive to these site acquisition requests by assembling investigation tools for site acquisition requests, providing mobile access to these tools in the field, and capitalizing on previously collected information for potential candidate locations. Furthermore, disclosed embodiments may collect non-site acquisition related data to provide analyses for other data collection scenarios. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312784 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT AND TERMINAL - There is provided a method for performing measurements. The method may be performed by a user equipment (UE) and comprise: receiving measurement configuration information including a measurement timing configuration for a discovery signal; and performing measurements for a first cell and measurements for a second cell. The measurement timing configuration for the discovery signal may be applied to the measurements for the second cell, but not to the measurements for the first cell. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312785 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a process for measuring by a system having a processor, within a wide frequency band, signal power levels received in specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level that excludes a portion of the power levels of the received signals, detecting interference according to an adaptive threshold based on the average composite wideband power level, and configuring a filter to suppress at least a portion of the interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312788 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 10-29-2015 |
20150312789 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT AND TERMINAL - There is a method for performing measurements. The method may be performed by a user equipment (UE) and comprise: receiving a measurement subframe pattern for a neighbor cell and a measurement timing configuration for a discovery signal; selecting at least one or more subframes to perform the measurement based on both of the measurement subframe pattern and the measurement timing configuration; and performing the measurement by using the discovery signal of the neighbor cell on the selected subframes. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312790 | USER EQUIPMENT CARRIER ACTIVATION - In one exemplary embodiment of the invention, a method includes: measuring at least one characteristic of a secondary component carrier to obtain a measurement result, where measuring is performed by an apparatus while the apparatus is in communication with a network via a primary component carrier with a network access node; and in response to the measurement result of the at least one characteristic being below a threshold, and further in response to receiving from the network access node an activation command for the secondary component carrier, considering the secondary component carrier as being undetectable. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312791 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR APERIODICALLY REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS CONNECTION SYSTEM - A method for aperiodic channel status information (CSI) reporting in a wireless access system, and a user equipment (UE) for performing the method are discussed. The method is performed by a user equipment (UE) and includes receiving a radio resource control (RRC) message configuring one or more CSI measurement sets. Each of the one or more CSI measurement sets includes one or more subframes. The method includes receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) including a CSI request field triggering the aperiodic CSI reporting; and reporting a CSI on a subframe ‘n’. The CSI has been measured on a subframe ‘n-n | 10-29-2015 |
20150312795 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS POINTS - Embodiments described herein relate generally to a communication between an element manager and a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP). The WLAN AP may be configured with one or more counters. The one or more counters may measure events, such as data transmission and/or reception at the WLAN AP or statistics based on association of user equipment (UE) with the WLAN AP. The element manager may be configured to read one or more of these counters and compute one or more values based on the values read from the one or more counters. The element manager may be configured to communicate the one or more computed values to a network manager. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312796 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING NETWORK COMMUNICATION LOAD IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for estimating a network communication load without performing actual communication and a wireless communication terminal are provided. A wireless communication terminal ( | 10-29-2015 |
20150312803 | CENTRALIZED CHANNEL CODING AND SHAPING FOR A MULTI-NODE RAN - A system may be configured to determine radio frequency (“RF”) transmission error types associated with a group of channels. Each channel may be associated with a particular remote radio node (“RRN”), of a group of RRNs, and a user device. The system may further modify subsequent RF communications between the RRNs and the user device, on a per-channel basis, and based on the determined transmission error types associated with each channel. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312851 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system including: at least one base station configured to form each of at least one first cell being a cell to which a wireless terminal is able to couple without coupling to another cell and each of at least one second cell being a cell to which a wireless terminal is unable to couple without coupling to another cell, and a specific wireless terminal configured to: identify, when the specific wireless terminal couples to no cell, at least one known signal being at least a part of at least one first known signal based on a first rule, the at least one known signal being received from the at least one first cell, select a cell being one of the at least one first cell based on the identified at least one known signal, and couple to the selected cell. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312871 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A non-anchor radio base station comprises: a non-anchor side measurement unit configured to measure reception quality of an uplink signal received from the radio terminal; and a notification unit configured to notify the anchor radio base station of the reception quality measured by the non-anchor side measurement unit. The anchor radio base station comprises: a transmission unit configured to transmit a control signal for adjusting a timing, at which the radio terminal transmits an uplink signal, to the radio terminal in order to adjust a timing, at which the uplink signal is received from the radio terminal, to a desired timing; and a determination unit configured to determine whether or not to exclude the non-anchor radio base station from the radio base station group on the basis of the reception quality notified from the non-anchor radio base station. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312919 | VIRTUAL ANTENNA MAPPING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDBACK OF VIRTUAL ANTENNA MAPPING INFORMATION IN MIMO SYSTEM - A Virtual Antenna Mapping (VAM) method of a base station and a transmission apparatus equipped with M physical antennas and Q Transceiver Units (TXRUs) are provided. The method includes transmitting Reference Signals (RSs) arranged differently according to respective VAM patterns to a terminal in a transmission mode supporting N logical antennas; receiving a feedback including information regarding a VAM pattern selected as a result of channel measurement with respect to the RSs transmitted according to the VAM pattern from the terminal; and transmitting a signal to the terminal through the M physical antennas by applying the selected VAM pattern, wherein the selected VAM pattern maps N data streams corresponding to the N logical antennas to the M physical antennas through the Q TXRUs. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312921 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONVERTING COMMUNICATION MODES - A method and a device for communication mode switching are provided in embodiment of the present disclosure. The method includes: acquiring at least one candidate communication mode for switching according to a preset channel quality condition, where the channel quality condition is met under the candidate communication mode for switching; evaluating each of the at least one candidate communication mode for switching according to a switch criterion and acquiring an evaluation value of each of the at least one candidate communication mode for switching; and ranking the evaluation value of the at least one candidate communication mode for switching in an ascending order or a descending order and switching a communication system from a current communication mode to a candidate communication mode for switching corresponding to an evaluation value ranked as the first. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312958 | ROBUST TRANSMISSION ON DOWNLINK DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION CARRIER - A method and system for downlink discontinuous transmission are provided. In one embodiment, a base station includes a memory, a processor and a transmitter. The memory stores information to be transmitted in a subset of sub frames to a UE. The information includes transmission mode configuration information. The processor operates to configure the transmitter according to a selected transmission mode configuration that includes one of a transmit diversity mode and a MIMO mode, and configures the transmitter to transmit discontinuously and include CRS in only a subset of sub frames. | 10-29-2015 |
20150318882 | PASSIVE INTERMODULATION DETECTION - A method, apparatus and receiver for detecting intermodulation distortion (IMD) affecting a received signal in a wireless receiver are provided. One method includes determining a measurement indicative of IMD based on at least one transmit signal. When the measurement indicative of IMD exceeds a first pre-determined level, at least one sample of an amplitude of a signal output by the wireless receiver is collected in a first data set. When the measurement indicative of intermodulation distortion does not exceed a second pre-determined level, the second predetermined level being less than the first predetermined level, at least one sample of an amplitude of the signal output by the wireless receiver is collected in a second data set. A comparison is performed based on data of the first data set and on data of the second data set to determine a measure of IMD. | 11-05-2015 |
20150318936 | BURSTY-INTERFERENCE-AWARE INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT UTILIZING CONDITIONAL METRIC - Interference management for a wireless device in a wireless communication system may operate by, for example, determining a loss pattern from one or more block acknowledgement (ACK) bitmaps. The loss pattern may comprise a plurality of values indicating reception success or reception failure of a corresponding media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (MPDU) at a receiving station. A conditional MPDU error rate metric may be computed correlating the loss pattern values over a time window of interest. The conditional MPDU error rate metric may be compared to a corresponding bursty interference signature associated with a time-independence among the loss pattern values that is characteristic of bursty interference. Based on the comparison, a bursty interference condition may be identified, and a bursty interference indicator may be generated based on the identification of the bursty interference condition. | 11-05-2015 |
20150318946 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INCREASING PERFORMANCE OF COMMUNICATION PATHS FOR COMMUNICATION NODES - A system that incorporates aspects of the subject disclosure may perform operations including, for example, obtaining performance measurements, identifying a performance measurement from the performance measurements that is below performance threshold and, in turn, initiating corrective action to improve the performance measurement of an affected network element falling below the performance threshold. The performance measurements can be determined from measurements associated with signals generated by communication devices, noise levels in a spectral portion used by communication devices to transmit the signals, and interference signals exceeding an adaptive inter-cell interference threshold. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 11-05-2015 |
20150318954 | METHOD FOR CALCULATING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM BASED ON MULTIPLE CELLS AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present application discloses a method for enabling a terminal to report CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) in a wireless communications system. Specifically, the method includes the steps of: receiving the setup information concerning at least one CSI (Channel Status Information Process) through an upper layer; receiving CSI-RS (Channel Status Information-Reference Signal) contained in the setup information from a base station; calculating the CQI by using the CSI-RS under the assumption that the CRS (Cell specific RS) resource contained in a given resource for calculating the CQI is not mapped with data; and reporting the calculated CQI to the base station, wherein the setup information contains the information of the CRS resource. | 11-05-2015 |
20150318970 | System and Method for Grassmannian Signaling in a Broadband Network - An embodiment method includes determining, by a first network device, an equivalent coherence time of a narrowband network corresponding to the broadband network in accordance with a channel coherence time and a coherence bandwidth of the broadband network. The method further includes structuring, by the first network device, a Grassmannian symbol in accordance with the equivalent coherence time, generating, by the first network device, Grassmannian symbol sections by partitioning the Grassmannian symbol in accordance with the coherence bandwidth, and transmitting, by the first network device to a second network device, the Grassmannian symbol sections on subchannels within the coherence bandwidth. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319004 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MONITORING VIDEO DATA PACKET DELIVERY - A method includes receiving, at a processor of a network device, data packets to be communicated to a multicast destination. The method includes recording, with the network device, performance data associated with the data packets, where the performance data is associated with a performance metric. The method includes determining, with the processor, a trend based on the performance data. The method also includes sending a warning from the processor to a performance server based on the trend satisfying a condition. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319071 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING TEST ENVIRONMENTS FOR EXECUTING AND ANALYSING TEST ROUTINES - A system is operable to provide one or more test environments for executing and analysing test routine. The system includes one or more user interfaces coupled via a communication network to a server arrangement for hosting a plurality of emulations of wireless communication devices or terminals. The server arrangement is operable to receive one or more software applications for execution upon the wireless communication devices or terminals, and one or more test routines for use in testing the wireless communication devices or terminals. Moreover, the server arrangement is operable to execute one or more the software applications and apply the one or more test routines thereto. Furthermore, the server arrangement is operable to monitor operation of the wireless communication devices or terminals and to provide corresponding test results to the one or more user interfaces. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319629 | WIRELESS MESH ACCESS NODE NEIGHBORING CHANNEL QUALITY ESTIMATION - A controller of a wireless access node is operative to estimate an adjacent one of a plurality of wireless channels while the access node is communicating over a present one of the plurality of wireless channels, comprising the controller, determining a difference between a measured signal quality of a signal communicated over the present wireless channel and a measured signal quality of a signal communicated over the adjacent channel, estimate a difference between a packet success rate of the present channel and a packet success rate of the adjacent channel based on the determined difference, and estimating a packet success rate of the adjacent channel based on a packet success rate of the present channel and the estimated difference between the packet success rate of the present channel and the packet success rate of the adjacent channel. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319630 | A METHOD FOR PROVIDING RELIABLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method for communication between a wireless device node in a wireless sensor network (WSN) and control apparatus or control processes of an industrial control system is used to determine a method of radio transmission which provides a greater or a lesser measure of transmission quality between nodes. Thus a transmitter node measures a transmission quality metric of at least one packet received from two or more different switching branches, identifies which of the two or more switching branches has the greater transmission quality metric, distributes data packets with a first priority to the switching branch with the greater transmission quality metric, and transmits data packets with the first priority such as real-time data on the switching branch with the greater transmission quality metric. A wireless node, a sensor network system and a computer program for carrying out the method are described. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319631 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENHANCED ROUND TRIP TIME (RTT) EXCHANGE - Disclosed are methods and systems for obtaining measurements of a range between devices based on a Round Trip Time (RTT) for an exchange messages. In particular, described are techniques for transmitting messages between or among devices to share computed parameters indicative of ranges between devices. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319632 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure is used to determine a number of sub-carriers or symbols to be used to estimate N channels for N user equipment (UE)s on a basis of resource allocation information on N reference signals associated with the N UEs, estimate channel values for the N channels by receiving the N reference signals through the sub-carriers or the symbols according to the determined number, and correlate the estimated channel values to use the correlated channel values to estimate each of the N channels. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319633 | SELECTIVE CHANNEL FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems, base stations, terminals, and methods for group-selective channel feedback in a wireless communication system are described. In one signal measurement method for a base station supporting Multiuser Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MU-MIMO), the base station allocates a group identifier to a terminal group for performing and reporting signal measurements simultaneously. When the base station transmits control information including the group identifier, each one of terminals belonging to the terminal group performs signal measurement, generates signal measurement feedback, and simultaneously transmits the signal measurement feedback to the base station. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319634 | ACQUIRING INFORMATION REGARDING A VOLUME USING WIRELESS NETWORKS - There is provided a method for acquiring information regarding terrain and/or objects within a volume, said method comprising: transmitting signals over time (“node signals”) from one or more nodes of a wireless network (“subject network”); receiving the node signals after their traversing a medium (“node resultant signals”) using one or more receiving units (“node signal receivers”); measuring one or more physical attributes (“signal attributes”) for one or more of the node resultant signals, wherein at least one of the signal attributes is of at least one of the following types: (a) time difference between node signal transmission by the applicable transmitting subject network node and node resultant signal reception by the applicable node signal receiver; (b) phase difference between the transmitted node signal and the received node resultant signal; (c) power ratio between the transmitted node signal and the received node resultant signal; (d) frequency difference between the received node resultant signal and the transmitted node signal (Doppler shift); and/or (e) direction from which the node resultant signal has arrived, and/or its projection on one or more predefined axes; estimating the spatial location as a function of time for one or more of the transmitting subject network nodes and/or one or more of the node signal receivers; and analyzing one or more of the node resultant signals and/or one or more of the signal attributes to extract information regarding objects along the signal's paths (“mapping information”). | 11-05-2015 |
20150319636 | METHOD FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for measuring, by a user device, interference in a wireless communication system includes the steps of: receiving setting information for a target resource of an interference measurement from a base station; and reporting channel state information (CSI) based on the measured interference, wherein the setting information includes indication information for the interference measurement with respect to subbands or resource blocks of specific sub-frame sets divided according to interference environments, and a CSI process can be set for each of the specific sub-frame sets. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319699 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE-OUTPUT PARTIAL ENVELOPE TRACKING IN HANDHELD WIRELESS COMPUTING DEVICES - A partial envelope tracking (PET) circuitry for improving the dynamic range of a plurality of power amplifiers amplifying radio frequency signals in a MIMO based handheld wireless computing device. The circuitry includes a plurality of sub-PET circuits respectively connected to the plurality of power amplifiers; and a common charging circuit connected to each of the sub-PET circuits and a power source, wherein the common charging circuit comprises a storage capacitor and a logic configured to control the charging of the storage capacitor respective of an operation mode of each of the sub-PET circuits, wherein the operation mode is any one of: a tracking mode and normal mode, wherein during the normal mode of all of the sub-PET circuits the storage capacitor is charged at the voltage level provided by the power source and during the tracking mode of at least one of the sub-PET circuits the storage capacitor is discharged. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319711 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENT IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK EMPLOYING DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A system and method for dynamically optimizing the performance of indoor distributed antenna systems communicate to user equipment is disclosed. The user equipment measures information describing the downlink signals such as the downlink data rates, the quality of the received signal, and the location of the user equipment. A service module collects this information and determines an optimized power level for each of the antenna units. The service module may optimize only one antenna unit power level or a subset of the antenna units within the distributed antenna system in a preferred embodiment. One or more of the antenna units then transmits downlink signals with the optimized power levels. The optimized power level may be less than the initial power level in a preferred embodiment. As a result, the performance of the indoor distributed antenna systems is enhanced. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319715 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF PERFORMING MULTI-RADIO ACCESS BEARER POWER SCALING - The present disclosure relates to a method and user equipment, UE, in a wireless communication network of performing power scaling on uplink transmission to a receiving radio access node, RAN. In particular, the disclosure relates to a method and user equipment for power scaling on uplink transmissions on a multi-radio access bearer, multi-RAB, wherein a Dedicated Physical Data Channel, DPDCH, and enhanced Data Channels, E-DCHs are configured for uplink transmission from the UE to the receiving RAN. The method comprises determining a total UE transmit power exceeding a predetermined maximum power limit value. The total UE transmit power is reduced to the predetermined maximum power limit value by reducing one or more E-DPDCH gain factors by an equal scaling factor. When a predetermined minimum E-DPDCH gain factor, ‘smallest quantised βed,k value’, is reached for all E-DPDCH gain factors βed,k, and DTX is applied for all E-DPDCHs, the method comprises applying DTX on E-DPCCH. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319718 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SIGNALS - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for transmitting uplink signals to a plurality of transmission points in a wireless communication system, comprising: receiving information on at least one parameter set group through upper layer signaling, wherein each of the at least one parameter set group includes a plurality of parameter sets; detecting a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) comprising indication information for indicating specific parameter sets which belong to one of the parameter set groups from among the at least one parameter set group; and transmitting a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) by using the specific parameter set, wherein each of the plurality of parameter sets includes information on a power control parameter and information on timing advance (TA) for transmitting the PUSCH signal. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319767 | BURSTY-INTERFERENCE-AWARE INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT UTILIZING RUN-LENGTHS - Interference management for a wireless device in a wireless communication system may operate by, for example, determining a loss pattern from one or more block acknowledgement (ACK) bitmaps. The loss pattern may comprise a plurality of values indicating reception success or reception failure of a corresponding media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (MPDU) at a receiving station. A run-length (RL) vector may be computed characterizing, in length and frequency of occurrence, runs of consecutive reception failures and/or reception successes in the loss pattern. The RL vector may be compared to a corresponding RL signature for distinguishing bursty from non-bursty interference. Based on the comparison, a bursty interference condition may be identified, and a bursty interference indicator may be generated based on the identification of the bursty interference condition. | 11-05-2015 |
20150323643 | CYCLING REFERENCE MULTIPLEXING RECEIVER SYSTEM - A position tracking system for tracking a physical location of a radio frequency (RF) transmitter comprises at least four RF receiver antennae at known locations. Each receiver antenna receives RF signals from the RF transmitter. One receiver antenna is used as a reference antenna. A receiver channel unit is in communication with the RF receiver antennae. The receiver channel unit comprises a reference receiver channel and a measurement receiver channel. A multiplexer is dynamically configurable to selectively connect the reference receiver channel to the reference receiver antenna and to connect, in succession, each other receiver antenna to the measurement receiver channel. A comparator measures phase differences between the RF signals received by the reference antenna and those received by each other receiver antennae. A data processor computes the physical location of the RF transmitter from the phase differences measured by the comparator and the known locations of the receiver antennae. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326335 | CELL ID MANAGEMENT FOR DISCOVERY REFERENCE SIGNALS FOR SMALL CELLS IN LTE - Heterogeneous networks incorporate various small cells, such as femto cells and pico cells, in addition to a macro cell. Existing signals (e.g., PSS and SSS) configured as discovery reference signals (DRSs) may not be sufficient for a UE to discover different cells in a heterogeneous network. The disclosed aspects provide approaches for managing cell IDs for various DRS configurations to improve UE discovery of different cells in heterogeneous networks. In an aspect, a UE receives a first reference signal (e.g., based on a PCI) configured for performing a base station measurement by the UE. The UE further receives one or more second reference signals (e.g., based on a VCI which is associated with the PCI) configured for measurement by the UE. The UE performs the base station measurement based on the first reference signal and the one or more second reference signals. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326366 | MEASUREMENT METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a measurement method, user equipment, a base station, and a wireless communications system, where the method includes: determining, according to transmit bandwidth and transmit time of a new carrier type cell-specific reference signal in a cell of the first base station and the transmit bandwidth and the transmit time of the new carrier type cell-specific reference signal in the cell of the second base station, measurement bandwidth and measurement time corresponding to a cell in which user equipment is located; and transmitting measurement configuration information including the measurement bandwidth and the measurement time to the user equipment. The first base station may acquire the transmit bandwidth and the transmit time, and deliver, to UE, measurement configuration information including two pieces of information, namely, measurement bandwidth and measurement time. Therefore, a solution for performing effective measurement in a new carrier type is provided. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326369 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR INFORMATION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND DEVICE SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention relates to a method of transmitting and receiving channel quality indicator (CQI) information that relates to a channel aging effect in an environment where a time-varying channel characteristic is maximized, and a device supporting same. According to an embodiment of the present invention, a method of reporting multi-channel quality indicator (CQI) information by a terminal in a wireless access system that supports an environment where a time-varying channel characteristic is maximized may include receiving a first reference signal, obtaining information on a first CQI by using the first reference signal, receiving a second reference signal, obtaining information on a second CQI by using the second reference signal, reporting the information on the first CQI, and reporting the information on the second CQI. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326370 | METHOD OF GENERATING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR ADAPTIVELY IN DOWNLINK STATUS AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR THE SAME - A method for generating a channel quality indicator (CQI) in a mobile communication system is presented. The method includes grouping a number of subcarriers to form at least one channel quality indicator subband for generating a channel quality indicator, and generating a channel quality indicator in each channel quality indicator subband, wherein a size of each channel quality indicator subband is dependent on a system bandwidth value and is an integer multiple of a downlink frequency resource unit size, wherein the downlink frequency resource unit size is prescribed according to the system bandwidth value. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326380 | TRANSMISSION SCHEME FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A transmission scheme for at least one transceiver pair, each transceiver pair including a first transceiver and a second transceiver, each transceiver including a transmitter and a receiver, the at least one transceiver pair defining a downlink between the transmitter of a first transceiver and the receiver of a second transceiver and further defining an uplink between the transmitter of the second transceiver and the receiver of the first transceiver, each transceiver pair transmitting data over a data transmission frame, the transmission scheme including determining a respective active-set for each one of the at least one transceiver pairs, the active-set including a combination of selected logical allocation units, each the logical allocation unit being defined as a unique combination of a time-slot and a frequency band, each selected logical allocation unit relates to at least one of the downlink only and the uplink. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326456 | PDCP AND FLOW CONTROL FOR SPLIT BEARER - A method in a network node is disclosed. The method comprises sending one or more packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) packet data units (PDUs) to a second network node on an internode interface, each of the one or more PDUs having an associated PDCP sequence number and an associated internode interface specific sequence number, the internode interface specific sequence numbers assigned by the network node. The method further comprises receiving feedback from the second network node. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326457 | FINE-GRAINED NETWORK MONITORING - In some cases, a network monitoring system may determine an operating or health condition of a node or connection link in a network (e.g., a datacenter network) by preparing an encapsulated data packet according to a tunneling protocol. Depending on a result of routing the encapsulated data packet, the network monitoring system determines whether the node or connection link is functioning normally or is experiencing an issue such as overloading or malfunctioning. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326460 | Network Flow Monitoring - A network flow monitoring and analysis system comprises flow labeling agent(s), sensor(s), controller(s), and correlation engines(s). The flow labeling agent(s) label at data packet flow unique and covert label(s). The sensor(s) observe data packet flow for the unique and covert label(s) and generate examination report(s) from the observations. The examination report(s) comprise information such as: location information; time information; target information; path information; and flow information. The controller(s) communicate instructions to the labeling agent(s) and sensor(s), receive event information and manage the correlation engine(s). The correlation engine(s) correlate information from information such as the target information; event information; path information; and flow information. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326462 | ADAPTIVE RATE CONTROL FOR CELLULAR-BASED VEHICULAR NETWORKS - A method for supporting vehicular communication in a cellular-based communication system includes connecting at least one base station and a plurality of vehicles equipped with mobile communication devices. A centralized control entity coordinates packet transmissions of the vehicles. Adjustment of a packet transmission rate is done recursively, where parameters of packet transmission characteristics are measured and the control entity determines, based on the parameters of packet transmission characteristics, an optimal packet transmission rate. The vehicles and/or the control entity transmit packets use the optimal packet transmission rate. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326463 | STATION ASSISTED INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT - A station assisted interference measurement scheme is described containing a system and devices that facilitate the measurement of interference levels or path loss values between nearby potentially interfering transmitting transceivers and candidate victim receivers. Such interference levels or path loss values are used to assist intelligent assignment of communication channels in an authorized shared access system (ASAS). Using control signals from a controller of the ASAS, suspected interfering devices transmit specialized signals on specific channels at specific times that may have a waveform and/or bit format different from typically used data communication signals. A candidate victim receiver may receive one or more of the specialized signals and measure a signal parameter of the received specialized signal. The controller of the authorized shared access system uses the measured signal parameters to determine interference between devices and improve the assignment of communication channels to mitigate interference. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326464 | System And Method For Analyzing A Network - System and methods for analyzing a network are disclosed. One method can comprise determining a parameter for each of a plurality of devices, generating a signature for each of the plurality of devices based upon the determined parameters, comparing the signatures of two or more of the plurality of devices, and grouping the plurality of devices based upon the comparison of the signatures of the two or more of the plurality of devices. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327018 | Method and Network Node for Enabling Position Determination of a User Equipment Measurement - Method and a network node ( | 11-12-2015 |
20150327020 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING SUBSCRIBER STATION MOBILITY - Methods and apparatus for identifying a subscriber station which is in motion, determining a mobility metric indicative of a level of mobility of the subscriber station and varying or updating one or more operating parameters based on the mobility metric. An apparatus can determine a measure of mobility based on one or a combination of a plurality of factors, such as variations in signal strength, variations in a channel estimate, or variations in phase or frequency of a particular signal or signal component. The one or more measures of mobility can be combined to form a single measure of mobility, the measure of mobility can be quantized to a predetermined number of mobility levels and one or more operating parameters can be varied or adjusted based on the mobility level. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327085 | OTFS METHODS OF DATA CHANNEL CHARACTERIZATION AND USES THEREOF - Fiber, cable, and wireless data channels are typically impaired by reflectors and other imperfections, producing a channel state with echoes and frequency shifts in data waveforms. Here, methods of using OTFS pilot symbol waveform bursts to automatically produce a detailed 2D model of the channel state are presented. This 2D channel state can then be used to optimize data transmission. For wireless data channels, an even more detailed 2D model of channel state can be produced by using polarization and multiple antennas in the process. Once 2D channel states are known, the system turns imperfect data channels from a liability to an advantage by using channel imperfections to boost data transmission rates. The methods can be used to improve legacy data transmission modes in multiple types of media, and are particularly useful for producing new types of robust and high capacity wireless communications using non-legacy OTFS data transmission methods. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327090 | Method and System for Aggregating Wifi Signal Data and Non-Wifi Signal Data - Methods of aggregating spectrum data captured from a narrowband radio to form a spectrum covering a much wider frequency band. Frequency data, such as FFT spectrum data captured from a narrowband receiver such as an IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi receiver are combined to display representative real-time FFT, average FFT, and FFT duty cycle data of a wideband spectrum. Data is captured from narrow band radios such as access points, station monitors, or client devices on a wireless network. A wideband spectrum may be aggregated from data captured from one or from multiple devices. Data may be stored for later analysis and display. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327093 | METHOD FOR USING TERMINAL TO DETECT SMALL-SCALE CELL IN ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH MACROCELL AND SMALL-SCALE CELL COEXIST - The present disclosure provides a method for using a terminal to detect a small-scale cell at the edge of coverage of the small-scale cell in a wireless communication system in which a macrocell and the small-scale cell coexist. The present invention may include: a step of measuring a macrocell; a step of comparing a value related to the reference signal received quality (RSRQ) acquired according to the macrocell measurement with at least one critical value; a step of determining whether or not to carry out at least one interference removal function for receiving a signal from a small-scale cell in accordance with the determined results; and a step of detecting the signal from the small-scale cell when the interference removal function is actuated. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327094 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting information in a wireless communication system is provided. A first node receives an indication which indicates that a secondary cell (SCell) is added by a user equipment (UE), and information on the added SCell, and transmits an SCell addition request, including the information on the added SCell and an identity of the UE, to a second node. Alternatively, a method for transmitting information in a wireless communication system is provided. The first node receives an indication which indicates that an SCell is released by a UE, and information on the released SCell, and transmits an SCell release request, including the information on the released SCell and an identity of the UE, to a second node. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327095 | INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station and a method thereof for acquiring channel status information in a mobile communication system operating in a multiuser multiple-input multiple-output transmission mode are provided. The method includes generating and transmitting, to a terminal, interference measurement configuration information for measuring interference caused by signals transmitted from a serving base station of the terminal to at least one other terminal in the transmission mode; and receiving channel status information generated using the transmitted information from the terminal. The present disclosure relates to a communication method and system for converging a 5th-Generation communication system for supporting higher data rates beyond a 4th-Generation system with a technology for Internet of Things, and may be applied to intelligent services based on the 5G communication technology and the IoT-related technology, such as smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car, connected car, health care, digital education, smart retail, security and safety services. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327097 | MEASUREMENT METHOD, CELL MEASUREMENT METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATIONS NODE - A measurement method, a cell measurement method, an apparatus, and a communications node are disclosed. A first communications node sends measurement information to a second communications node, where the measurement information includes measurement signal configuration information and/or configuration information of a measurement signal combination, the two pieces of configuration information are respectively used by the second communications node to determine a resource of a measurement signal corresponding to the measurement signal configuration information and a resource of a measurement signal corresponding to the configuration information of the measurement signal combination; and the first communications node receives a measurement report sent by the second communications node, where the measurement report carries a measurement result of measurement performed by the second communications node according to the measurement information. The examples of the present invention implement measurement on a radio link after introduction of a non-backward-compatible cell or carrier. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327098 | MEASUREMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATIONS NODE - A measurement method and apparatus, and a communications node are disclosed, where the measurement method includes: sending, by a first communications node, measurement information to a second communications node, where the measurement information includes information of a measurement signal type, and the information of the measurement signal type is used by the second communications node to determine a signaling type corresponding to a measurement signal; and receiving, by the first communications node, a measurement report sent by the second communications node, where the measurement report carries a measurement result of measurement performed by the second communications node according to the measurement information. Embodiments of the present invention implement measurement on a radio link signal according to a received measurement signal type. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327099 | Opportunistic Power Detection and Antenna Tuner Measurement During Concurrency - Methods implemented in a mobile communication device (e.g., a dual-SIM-dual-active or multi-SIM-multi-active communication device) for improving accuracy of radio-frequency (RF) output power measurements include opportunistically scheduling when a power detector takes RF output power measurements of a radio access technology (“RAT”). In various embodiments, a processor of the mobile communication device may ensure that the power detector takes an accurate RF output power measurement of the RAT by identifying an upcoming time window during which the RAT's transmit power is not artificially reduced as a result of performing transmit blanking/zeroing or artificially increased by transmissions originating from one or more other RATs operating on the device, and configuring or scheduling the power detector to take RF output power measurements of the RAT during that upcoming time window. A priority of the measured RAT may be increased in response to repeated delays in obtaining an RF output power measurement. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327101 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR CONTROLLING A USER EQUIPMENT - A user equipment takes measurements in response to a triggering event ( | 11-12-2015 |
20150327103 | TECHNIQUES TO MANAGE RADIO FREQUENCY CHAINS - Various embodiments may be generally directed to techniques for configuring a secondary RF chain of a mobile device—in particular, a secondary receiver chain—to perform wireless network measurements when the secondary RF chain is not used for data communications. Various embodiments provide for a primary RF chain to provide data communications with a wireless network and for the secondary RF chain to be capable of providing aggregated data communications with the wireless network. Various embodiments provide for the mobile device to determine that the wireless network does not support carrier aggregation and to reconfigure the secondary receiver chain, which would otherwise be left unused or inactive, to perform wireless network measurements. System throughout can be improved in comparison to using the primary RF chain for performing the wireless network measurements. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327106 | Method of Handling Channel Status Information and Related Communication Device - A method of handling channel status information (CSI) for a communication device comprises transmitting a first CSI report for a first cell of a network to the network; and dropping a second CSI report for a second cell of the network, when the second CSI report collides with the first CSI report and the second cell is configured with an on-off mechanism. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327107 | METHOD FOR ACTIVATING PSCELL AND SCELL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING DUAL CONNECTIVITY - The present disclosure relates to communication methods and systems for converging a 5th-Generation (5G) communication system for supporting higher data rates beyond a 4th-Generation (4G) system utilizing technology for Internet of Things (IoT). The present disclosure is applicable to intelligent services utilizing 5G communication technology and IoT-related technology, such as smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car, connected car, health care, digital education, smart retail, security and safety services. A Secondary Cell (SCell) method and apparatus for activating an SCell are provided for use in a mobile communication system supporting dual connectivity. The method includes receiving a control message instructing activation of at least one SCell, determining whether the SCell is a primary SCell (pSCell) based on the control message, monitoring, when the SCell is the pSCell, a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) of the pSCell, and reporting, after starting PDCCH monitoring, Channel Status Information (CSI) for the SCell. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327108 | Multi-Cell Signals in OFDM Wireless Networks - A wireless device receives messages indicating CSI measurement resources of cells belonging to at least two base stations or belonging to at least two sectors of a base station. The wireless device measures CSI employing at least CSI measurement resources of the cells. The wireless device quantizes the measured CSI jointly across cells and encodes and transmits the jointly quantized CSI. The wireless device receives a resource assignment for data packet(s). The wireless device receives signals carrying the data packets from multiple cells. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327111 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING BEARER - A method, apparatus and system for establishing a bearer are provided. The method includes: after a core network node initiates a bearer setup request, receiving, by a gateway node, a first identifier and a third identifier that are sent by a macro access network node, where the first identifier is used to enable the core network node to identify uplink user data forwarded by the gateway node, and the third identifier is used to enable a first small access network node to identify downlink user data forwarded by the gateway node; and sending, by the gateway node, a second identifier and a fourth identifier to the macro access network node. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327119 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING EFFECTIVE FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - A method for transmitting channel status information (CSI) of downlink multi-carrier transmission includes generating the CSI including at least one of a rank indicator (RI), a first precoding matrix index (PMI), a second PMI and a channel quality indicator (CQI) for one or more downlink carriers, the CQI being calculated based on precoding information determined by a combination of the first and second PMIs, determining, when two or more CSIs collide with one another in one uplink subframe of one uplink carrier, a CSI to be transmitted on the basis of priority, and transmitting the determined CSI over a uplink channel. If a CSI including an RI or a wideband first PMI collides with a CSI including a wideband CQI or a subband CQI, the CSI including a wideband CQI or a subband CQI has low priority and is dropped. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327132 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS CONNECTION QUALITY GUIDANCE - A user device determines a set of connection information at a current location of the device. The current connection information set includes one or more of current location information, current wireless channel information, current radio access technology information, and a current wireless channel quality metric. The device adds the current connection information set to a database of connection information that stores a plurality of sets of alternate connection information. Each alternate connection information set includes one or more of alternate location information, alternate wireless channel information, alternate radio access technology information, and an alternate wireless channel quality metric. The device determines whether to output through a user interface of the device, an indication of an alternate location from the database of connection information based on the current connection information set and at least one of the alternate connection information sets. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327144 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL RESELECTION - Various embodiments of the present invention provide a method for cell reselection, comprising: receiving, at a user equipment, system information from a network node that is shared by two or more operator networks, wherein the system information comprises first information associated with at least one operator network related to one or more neighboring cells for the user equipment; determining whether there is an operator network accessible to the user equipment in the at least one operator network, based at least in part on the first information; and performing a cell re-selection procedure only when one or more accessible operator networks are determined. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327162 | Method of Selecting a Cell in a Wireless Communication System and Apparatus Therefor - The present invention discloses a method of performing a cell selection at a first communication module of a user equipment in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the method includes receiving offset information from a network, measuring a cell for the cell selection, and determining whether to select the measured cell by applying the offset information to a measurement result, if a frequency on the measured cell is an unusable frequency. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327248 | REPORTING DEVICE STATISTICS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Aspects described herein relate to reporting user equipment (UE) activity period statistics. Statistics for a UE regarding a time the UE is in a connected mode or idle mode during one or more activity periods can be determined. From the statistics for the UE, it can also be determined whether the time the UE is in the connected mode in the one or more activity periods is less than a threshold. At least a portion of the statistics for the UE can be provided to an access network node where the time the UE is in the connected mode in a corresponding portion of the one or more activity periods is less than the threshold. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327253 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING A RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Techniques and apparatus for efficiently determining the radio link control (RLC) protocol data unit (PDU) size and flexible RLC PDU creation for multi carrier operation are disclosed. An example wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) calculates a maximum amount of data allowed to be transmitted for a current transmission time interval (TTI) for each of a plurality of carriers, and selects an RLC PDU data field size such that each RLC PDU to be multiplexed to a medium access control (MAC) PDU matches a minimum of the maximum amount of data calculated for the carriers. The maximum amount of data may, for example, be calculated based on an applicable current grant for each carrier for the current TTI. The RLC PDU may be generated for the later TTI on a condition that an amount of data in outstanding pre-generated RLC PDUs for a particular logical channel is less than or equal to 4N times the minimum of the maximum amount of data allowed to be transmitted by the applicable current grant for the carriers for the current TTI, where N is a number of activated carriers. The maximum amount of data may be calculated based on a remaining power on each carrier. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327277 | METHOD, NETWORK NODE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR DETERMINING RANK - It is presented a method for determining a rank indicating the number of layers to be used by a multiple input multiple output, MIMO, transmitter in a mobile communication network, the method being executed in a network node of the mobile communication network. The method comprises the steps of: obtaining success measurements indicating whether data frames, comprising user data, have been successfully transmitted between the network node and a mobile communication terminal for each one of a plurality of ranks; determining usage frequencies for each one of the plurality of ranks based on the success measurements for the respective ranks; and determining the rank to be used for transmission between the network node and the mobile communication terminal based on the usage frequencies. A corresponding network node, base station, computer program and compute program product are also presented. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327278 | BUNDLING OF PACKET ACKNOWLEDGMENTS AS A FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE - A method and an apparatus for bundling data packet acknowledgments in a wireless communication device is disclosed. The method includes determining a metric proportional to a communication distance between the wireless communication device and a counterpart wireless communication device; selecting a number of data packet acknowledgments to be bundled together according to the determined communication distance such that when the communication distance is higher, the higher number of data packet acknowledgments are bundled together into a single acknowledgment message; and causing transmission of the acknowledgment message comprising the selected number of data packet acknowledgments. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327284 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Sub-band CQI reports are introduced for LTE systems having system bandwidth of narrow band, e.g. less than or equal to 6 resource blocks, which address issues pertinent to such narrowband systems. Three related methods are described: fixed, semi-static and adaptive sub-band size. To varying degrees they are each specified in accordance with the channel condition. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327293 | Method and Apparatus for Scheduling User Equipment on Full-Duplex Cellular Network - The present invention discloses a method for scheduling user equipment on a full-duplex cellular network, including: determining a pairing set for each piece of user equipment in a cell, where a pairing parameter of the piece of user equipment and any piece of user equipment that is in the pairing set of the piece of user equipment meets a preset threshold; and selecting, when a piece of user equipment is scheduled to perform data transmission, another piece of user equipment from a pairing set of the piece of user equipment to perform data transmission in an opposite direction. Embodiments of the present invention further provide a corresponding apparatus. According to the technical solution of the present invention, existing spectrum resources can be utilized more thoroughly and spectrum utilization efficiency of wireless access can be improved. | 11-12-2015 |
20150333845 | Methods and Devices for MIMO Transmission - Methods and devices of controlling impact from interference from transmission to a 4-branch Multiple Input Multiple Output, MIMO, enabled User Equipment, UE, in a cellular radio system where legacy non 4-branch MIMO UEs co-exist are provided. The control involves determining an estimated Channel Quality Indicator, CQI, delay, and based on the estimated CQI delay determining if there exists a CQI under-estimation or CQI over-estimation. The control of the impact from high rank interference from transmission to the 4-branch MIMO enabled UE is based on a determined CQI under-estimation or CQI over-estimation. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333852 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND TERMINAL - Provided is a communication control device including a wireless communication unit configured to communicate wirelessly with a terminal in a macrocell that is allowed to communicate wirelessly in FDD mode using a frequency band, the macrocell being overlapped in part or in whole with a small cell that is allowed to communicate wirelessly in TDD mode using the frequency band, an acquisition unit configured to acquire a measurement result during handover of a terminal, the handover allowing the terminal to communicate wirelessly in the small cell, the measurement result being obtained by measuring a degree of interference between the terminal and one or more other terminals that communicate wirelessly in the macrocell, and a controller configured to control the handover based on the measurement result. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333854 | QUALITY PREDICTION METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL OF LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM - Provided are a quality prediction method and device for a physical downlink control channel of a long term evolution system. In the method, a target user equipment (UE) requiring physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) quality prediction is determined, and information reported by the target UE is received. According to the reported information, a prediction index of the target UE is determined, wherein the prediction index is a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of the control channel or an equivalent reception level (RP | 11-19-2015 |
20150333893 | METHOD FOR SHARING RADIO RESOURCE INFORMATION IN MULTI-CELL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for reporting channel state information of user equipment in a multi-cell wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving from a serving cell information on interference measurement resources (IMR) linked to at least one channel state information process (CSI process) and at least one item of CSI measurement information with respect to a plurality of radio resource sets having different interference characteristics; and reporting channel state information with respect to a specific radio resource set according to at least one item of information on the IMR and the at least one item of CSI measurement information, wherein the radio resource sets are defined so that uplink-downlink status changes depending on a system load state, and are linked to different channel state estimation processes. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333919 | Method for Node Device to Enter or Exit Power-Saving Mode and Node Device - A method for a node device to enter or exit a power-saving mode and a node device are disclosed. The method for a node device to enter a power-saving mode includes: the node device detecting characteristics of a reverse power supply signal provided by a customer premise equipment, and if a condition of entering a power-saving mode is satisfied, the node device entering the power-saving mode. The method for a node device to exit a power-saving mode includes: the node device in a power-saving mode exiting the power-saving mode after detecting that a customer premise equipment starts reverse power supply to the node device. The node device includes a reverse power supply unit, a power source unit, a control unit, and a transceiver unit. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333946 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING OUT-OF-BAND INTERFERENCE USING PEAK-TO-AVERAGE-POWER-RATIO (PAPR) REDUCTION WITH CONSTRAINTS - A method and system uses a constrained set of indexed samples to identify a next generation population of samples that exhibits a more desirable signal characteristic. The invention generates an intermediate set of indexed samples which are subjected to a fitness function and next generation calculations to produce next generation indexes for the next population of samples. The next generation indexes population of samples is further constrained over initial indexes for generating a more desirable signal characteristic. In dynamic spectrum access networks having OFDM components, the interference between collections of overlay and underlay signals is adaptively controlled based on the composite PAPR. In an example, the total out-of-band interference for the collection of overlay and underlay signals for all samples of the population are reduced. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333986 | PREDICTING VIDEO ENGAGEMENT FROM WIRELESS NETWORK MEASUREMENTS - A mechanism is provided for predicting video engagement from network measurements for a user device connected to a wireless network. Wireless network measurements are retrieved from a wireless network device in the wireless network. The wireless network measurements are related to the user device of a user. It is determined that the user device is engaged in a video streaming session. A computer classifies the video streaming session as one of a plurality of classes, in which the plurality of classes predict an outcome of the video streaming session for the user device. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333992 | DYNAMIC COLLECTION OF NETWORK METRICS FOR PREDICTIVE ANALYTICS - In one embodiment, data is received at a device regarding a network-monitoring process in which one or more nodes in a network export network metrics to one or more collector nodes. A change to the network-monitoring process is determined based on the received data. The device also adjusts the network-monitoring process to implement the determined change. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333993 | METHOD AND NODE ARRANGEMENT FOR PROVIDING MORE ACCURATE ESTIMATION OF DATA PATH CONDITIONS - The present invention relates to a method and node arrangement for evaluating available conditions of a data path between a sending node and a destination node in a data communications network by means of an active measurement process comprising one or more measurement sessions. The data path and sending node comprises a sending node interface. The method involves performing a measurement session of said data path for determining a measurement result, and estimating one or more available conditions of a data path using the measurement result and one or more initial parameter values as input in a calculation algorithm. The method further comprises setting one initial parameter value for the calculation to a maximum bandwidth capacity based on the lowest bandwidth capacity value of the interfaces of both nodes sending said probe packet sequences during said measurement session. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333995 | System for Selectively Unifying Overlapping Networks to Coordinate Communication Channel Usage - A system including first and second network nodes that communicate with additional nodes in first and second networks, respectively, using a shared communication channel. In response to detecting presence of the first network node, the second network node transmits a first signal to the first network node including a predetermined sequence known to both the first and second network nodes. The first network node measures a strength of the transmitted signal based on knowledge of the predetermined sequence and calculates a throughput metric (throughput referring to amount of information transmitted per second) based on the measured strength. In response to the throughput metric being less than a unification threshold, the first network node selectively transmits a unification request to the second network node. The unification request invites the second network node to coordinate operation with the first network node to reduce interference between the first network and the second network. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333997 | PROBING TECHNIQUE FOR PREDICTIVE ROUTING IN COMPUTER NETWORKS - In one embodiment, network information associated with a plurality of nodes in a network is received at a device in a network. From the plurality of nodes, a node is selected based on a determination that the selected node is an outlier among the plurality of nodes according to the received network information. Then, a probe is sent to the selected node, and in response to the probe, a performance metric is received from the selected node at the device. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334009 | System for monitoring the performance of flows carried over networks with dynamic topology - A method and system for monitoring the performance of end to end flows traversing a network with rapidly changing topology and with address translation and encapsulation. Multiple probes are deployed within the network and a dynamic mapping method used to enable probes to associate local address information with end to end flow identifiers. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334146 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VIDEO COMMUNICATION - A method for changing a communication network for video communication is provided. The method includes performing, by a User Equipment (UE), video communication through a mobile communication network; searching for whether there is a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) accessible by the UE; displaying, if a WLAN accessible by the UE is found, the accessible WLAN; and when the displayed WLAN is selected by a user, changing a communication network for the video communication to perform the video communication through the selected WLAN. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334551 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A first base station ( | 11-19-2015 |
20150334580 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR OBTAINING DATA - A system comprising: at least one sensor and at least one control apparatus wherein; the sensor comprises: at least one processor; and at least one memory including computer program code;the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus at least to perform;compressing a sensor data signal using a sampling basis to obtain a compressed data signal; and in response to a first feedback signal changing a sampling basis used to obtain the compressed data signal; and wherein the control apparatus comprises: at least one processor; and at least one memory including computer program code; the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus at least to perform; receiving the data signal from the at least one sensor;determining a quality of the received data signal; and if the quality of the received data signal is within a first threshold providing a feedback signal to control the sampling basis of the sensor. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334587 | METHOD OF DETECTING INDICATOR INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of detecting indicator information received by a receiver of a wireless communication system is provided, and the method includes determining a threshold value that reduces costs incurred by a false alarm rate that decides discontinuous transmission (DTX) information transmitted from a transmitter as non-DTX information and a missed detection rate that decides non-DTX information transmitted from the transmitter as DTX information; and detecting the indicator information using the threshold value. The threshold value is determined based on a reception quality level for acknowledgement (ACK) information when the transmitter transmits the ACK information. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334588 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR FAST RECOVERY - The invention introduces a method and an apparatus for fast recovery. The fast recovery method comprises: evaluating data download qualities of non-current RATs (Radio Access Technologies) to obtain a candidate RAT list; determining whether a PS (Packet Service) download quality of a current RAT becomes worse; and if the PS download quality of the current RAT becomes worse, selecting one RAT from the candidate RAT list and switching to the selected RAT. The method and the apparatus for fast recovery introduced by the invention realize the seamless RAT switch and maintain the continuous data transmission. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334589 | MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (RAT) MEASUREMENT SCHEDULING - A method of wireless communication includes adaptively modifying a measurement schedule order for a current discontinuous reception cycle. The method also includes receiving system information for two or more cells. The measurement schedule order is based on a priority of a cell associated with a radio access technology, a frequency, or a combination thereof. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334590 | METHODS AND APPARTUS FOR REPORTING AND/OR USING CONTROL INFORMATION - A wireless communications system supports wireless connections between base station sector attachment points and wireless terminals. Individual wireless connections correspond to one of a downlink-macrodiversity mode of operation and a downlink non-macrodiversity mode of operation. A wireless terminal has, for each of its current connections, a base station assigned dedicated control channel for communicating uplink control information reports. The uplink control information reports include downlink signal-to-noise ratio reports based on measured received pilot channel signals. If a connection corresponds to a macrodiversity mode of operation, a reporting format for the SNR report is used which reports (i) an SNR value and (ii) an indication as to whether or not the connection is considered a preferred connection by the wireless terminal. If a connection corresponds to a non-macrodiversity mode of operation, a reporting format for the SNR report is used which reports an SNR value. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334613 | NETWORK ELEMENTS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHODS THEREFOR - An Access Point ( | 11-19-2015 |
20150334636 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A closed subscriber group (CSG) cell is a cell that allows use of subscribers. In order to receive the service by the CSG cell, a CSG-ID is required to be notified to a user equipment, which cannot be obtained in a situation outside the reach of radio waves from a non-CSG cell. In a mobile communication system including base stations respectively provided to a CSG cell and a non-CSG cell in which access is made to the CSG cell with the use of a CSG-ID issued in a case where use of the CSG cell is allowed, the base station provided in the CSG cell refers to the notified identification information of a user equipment and then transmits a tracking area update request from the user equipment to a core network, and the core network determines whether the user equipment is allowed to use the CSG cell and, in the case where the use is allowed, transmits a signal for allowing assignment of radio resources to the user equipment and the CSG-ID. The user equipment accesses the CSG cell with the use of the CSG-ID. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334656 | ADAPTIVE PHYSICAL LAYER WARM-UP FOR LTE TDD C-DRX POWER OPTIMIZATION - Methods and apparatus to reduce power consumption in user equipment (UE) that operates in a connected discontinuous reception (C-DRX) mode while in communication with wireless network are disclosed. A C-DRX warm-up period before the UE enters an on-duration is adjusted dynamically based on one or more factors including a time division duplex (TDD) uplink/downlink (UL/DL) subframe configuration, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) values, and Doppler shift values. The C-DRX warm-up period is adapted based on the pattern of DL subframes in the UL/DL subframe configuration by including DL subframes that best contribute to channel estimation and adaptive tracking loops based on measured SNR and Doppler shift conditions. Favorable channel conditions, such as higher SNR and lower Doppler shift, can require fewer DL subframes and consequently shorter C-DRX warm-up periods. Higher Doppler shift values indicate more rapidly varying channel conditions and require DL subframes positioned closer to the start of the on-duration. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334663 | RADIO TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio terminal apparatus is provided. When the radio terminal apparatus simultaneously transmits a plurality of modulated waves having different frequencies, the radio terminal apparatus can effectively suppress intermodulation distortions without excessively reducing the transmission powers. This radio terminal apparatus, which is an apparatus for simultaneously transmitting a plurality of modulated waves having different frequencies, comprises a transmission control unit ( | 11-19-2015 |
20150334722 | Method for UE Pattern Indication and Measurement for Interference Coordination - A method of inter-cell interference coordination is provided for UE measurements and network access procedure. In a first embodiment, a UE in idle mode performs measurements on received radio signals applying a simplified radio resource restriction for interference coordination. The UE determines the restricted radio resource without receiving explicit measurement configuration. In a second embodiment, during various phases of a network access procedure, the UE indicates its interference status and/or additional interference information to its serving base station to enhance interference coordination. In a third embodiment, the UE in connected mode performs measurements on both interference-protected transmission resources and non-interference-protected transmission resources. The UE measurement results are used for scheduling, radio link monitoring, and/or mobility management to increase radio spectrum efficiency and to improve user experience. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334723 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD IN WIRELESS POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus in a wireless power transmission system includes an operating mode converter configured to switch an operating mode of the communication apparatus between a transmitting mode and a receiving mode according to a predetermined timing; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit state information of a channel occupied by a source including the communication apparatus using a continuous wave signal while the communication apparatus is operating in the transmitting mode irrespective of whether the communication apparatus is performing communication via the occupied channel. The source including the communication apparatus is configured to transmit wireless power. The occupied channel has been assigned to the source including the communication apparatus from a plurality of channels available in a communication cell for assignment to a plurality of sources each configured to transmit wireless power. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334745 | COLLISION PROTECTION BASED ON PACKET ERROR RATE - In order to maintain performance during wireless communication, a transmitting electronic device may selectively enable use of pre-authorization messages during communication with one or more receiving electronic devices. In particular, the transmitting electronic device may monitor a performance metric associated with the communication. If the performance metric is less than a threshold, the transmitting electronic device may selectively enable the use of the pre-authorization messages before communicating data to the one of the receiving electronic devices. Subsequently, the transmitting electronic device monitors a pre-authorization performance metric associated with the communication of the pre-authorization messages. If the pre-authorization performance metric is less than a pre-authorization threshold, the transmitting electronic device may selectively disable the use of the pre-authorization messages. Moreover, if the use of pre-authorization messages is disabled, the transmitting electronic device reverts to monitoring the performance metric. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334755 | Method in a Radio Communication System - The present disclosure relates a method, performed by a communication node of a cellular radio access network, for estimating a radio link quality of a direct link between a first user equipment and a second user equipment. The invention also provides a method performed in a user equipment, which method is used to monitor communication for the purpose of estimating communication in a possible direct link between a first user equipment and a second user equipment. The communication node instructs a user equipment to eavesdrop an uplink of an other user equipment UL | 11-19-2015 |
20150338512 | ROUND TRIP TIME ACCURACY IMPROVEMENT IN VARIED CHANNEL ENVIRONMENTS - Methods, systems, and devices are described that provide for wireless ranging. The methods, systems, and/or devices may include tools and techniques that provide for determining a range based on a TOD and a TOA that is adjusted based on a mean FAC. A probe may be transmitted from a transmitter to a receiver. The transmitter may receive a response, from the receiver. A strongest path within the response may be identified. A threshold may be determined. A plurality of FAC values may be identified, which exceed the threshold and precede the strongest path within the response. After the plurality of FAC values are identified, a mean FAC may be determined based at least in part on the plurality of FAC values. A TOA of the response may be adjusted based on the mean FAC. A range to the receiver may be determined based on a TOD and the adjusted TOA. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341095 | METHODS FOR EFFICIENT BEAM TRAINING AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND NETWORK CONTROL DEVICE UTILIZING THE SAME - A communications apparatus includes a wireless communications module and a controller. The wireless communications module uses a preferred receiving beam determined in a beam training procedure to communicate with a network control device and further monitors one or more candidate receiving beam(s) by using the one or more candidate receiving beam(s) to receive signals from the network control device. The controller calculates a detection metric for the preferred receiving beam and the preferred control beam and a detection metric for each combination of the one or more candidate receiving beam(s) and the preferred control beam, and determines whether to change the preferred receiving beam according to the detection metrics for the preferred receiving beam and the preferred control beam and for each combination of the one or more candidate receiving beam(s) and the preferred control beam. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341128 | Margin Test Methods and Circuits - Described are methods and circuits for margin testing digital receivers. These methods and circuits prevent margins from collapsing in response to erroneously received data, and can thus be used in receivers that employ historical data to reduce intersymbol interference (ISI). Some embodiments detect receive errors for input data streams of unknown patterns, and can thus be used for in-system margin testing. Such systems can be adapted to dynamically alter system parameters during device operation to maintain adequate margins despite fluctuations in the system noise environment due to e.g. temperature and supply-voltage changes. Also described are methods of plotting and interpreting filtered and unfiltered error data generated by the disclosed methods and circuits. Some embodiments filter error data to facilitate pattern-specific margin testing. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341148 | Avoiding Serving Cell Interruption - Techniques for minimizing the loss of radio signals transmitted on and/or received from serving cells in a multi-carrier system by selectively adapting the time instance at which a wireless terminal: (1) changes its radio frequency (RF) bandwidth or activates a second RF chain or any additional RF chain for measuring on one or more secondary serving cells, and/or (2) performs setup or release of one or more secondary serving cells. An example method, implemented in a radio network node, comprises determining ( | 11-26-2015 |
20150341188 | Grade of Service Control Closed Loop - Systems and methods for managing network traffic receives, at a grade of service device, network traffic information for a plurality of network traffic channels from a network device separate from the grade of service device. The network traffic information is compared to a threshold to determine a behavior value for each network traffic channel. Each network traffic channel is mapped to a grade of service according to the behavior value. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341233 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND ARTICLES FOR LOCATION PARAMETER REPORTING AND PROCESSING - Methods, apparatuses, and articles for location parameter reporting and processing are presented. In one example, a mobile device transmits a probe message to a transceiver device indicating that the mobile device is capable of reporting signal parameter measurements, such as received signal strength (RSSI), round-trip time (RTT), or any combination thereof, for example. Responsive to receipt of a probe message, a wireless transceiver may indicate to the mobile device that the transceiver is capable of utilizing the reported signal parameter measurements to construct or update, for example, localized heatmaps. The mobile device may report signal parameter measurements in response to one or more predetermined events. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341248 | METHOD FOR DETECTING NETWORK TRANSMISSION STATUS AND RELATED DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for detecting a network transmission status, and a related device. The method for detecting a network transmission status may include: measuring and calculating, by a first communications device, a transmission status characterization parameter used to indicate a status of network transmission between the first communications device and a second communications device; and if the transmission status characterization parameter meets a preset condition, sending, by the first communications device, a Real-Time Transport Protocol packet to the second communications device. Technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present invention facilitate improving of estimation precision of available network bandwidth on a transmit end, and further improve bandwidth utilization and reduce phenomena such as a delay and an intermittent stop, thereby improving user experience. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341803 | METHOD FOR MEASURING SUBBAND IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - According to one embodiment of the present invention, disclosed is a method for measuring a subband by pico base station(s) located within a coverage of a macro base station in a wireless communication system. The method is performed by a first pico base station, and comprises the steps of: receiving beacon signals from other pico base station(s) in the coverage of the macro base station via each subband of all the subbands of the whole band of the wireless communication system, and measuring the receiving quality of the beacon signal received via each subband; determining whether to select at least one subband from among said all subbands based on the measured receiving quality of the beacon signal; and transmitting, if at least one subband is selected, the beacon signal via the selected at least one subband. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341804 | HANDLING CALIBRATION DATA - Apparatus comprises: a multi-element antenna; and a transmitter configured to broadcasting multiple packets from the multi-element antenna, wherein each packet comprising: a positioning part; and a calibration data part, wherein the calibration data part of a packet comprises: a portion of calibration data; and data indicating a location of the portion of calibration data in a set of calibration data. The transmitter is configured: to switch between different elements of the multi-element antenna in a sequence when broadcasting the positioning part of the packet; and to transmit all of the calibration data part of the packet without switching between different elements of the multi-element antenna. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341809 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TESTING BASE STATIONS OF A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and system for testing of base stations of a mobile telecommunications network having a plurality of cells. A base station at its antenna is connected to a testing system by a radio frequency cable. Mobile terminals of a cell are emulated. The mobile terminals transmit data and sends/receives calls within the cell via the base station. A separate channel emulator is provided for each emulated mobile terminal. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341811 | Device to Device Round-Trip Time (RTT) Measurement Via Neighbor Aware Network - Methods and systems for performing a round trip time determination between two devices are described. An example method may include publishing, over a wireless network interface by a first device within a neighbor aware network (NAN) cluster, a schedule that invites devices within the NAN cluster to request, within a time window, to perform a round trip time (RTT) determination with the first device. The schedule may indicate that the time window begins at a time offset from a NAN discovery window and ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The method may also include receiving a request, from a second device within the NAN cluster, to perform the RTT determination with the first device. The method may also include performing the RTT determination with the second device. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341812 | VIDEO QUALITY MONITORING - A method for monitoring video quality transmitted over a mobile network, comprising tapping into a mobile network traffic stream organizing the tapped network traffic into at least one individual video session associated with a single user; determining a video quality parameter for the at least one individual video session wherein the video quality parameter is at least one of packet jitter growth, packet loss, instantaneous flow rate balance (IFRB), delay between packets; a jitter statistic; a total time required to receive all packets needed to fully assemble a segment; a statistic of errors in key frames; aggregating context information for the at least one individual video session wherein context information includes at least one of cell tower, smart node, serving gateway node, user, subscriber level, device type, application, and content provider; and transmitting aggregated context information and at least one video quality parameter to a video quality server. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341813 | CELL SEARCH METHOD AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A cell search method is described comprising searching for a frequency at which a communication network operates a radio cell within a predetermined set of candidate frequencies; determining a frequency at which a communication network operates a radio cell within the set of candidate frequencies; excluding a sub-set with a predetermined size of frequencies around the determined frequency from the set of candidate frequencies to generate an updated set of candidate frequencies; and continuing to search for a further frequency at which a communication network operates a radio cell within the updated set of candidate frequencies. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341814 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING INTERFERENCE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a device for measuring interference in a communication system are provided. The method includes measuring interference in a base station of a communication system, in which one or more antenna groups are arranged at different positions in a single cell, includes the steps of determining a reception antenna group which is one of the one or more antenna groups that transmits a signal other than an interference signal to a terminal, determining a reference signal in order to measure the strength of the signal transmitted by the reception antenna group, a step of determining a wireless resource so as to measure the interference in each of the one or more antenna groups, and notifying the terminal with the strength of the signal transmitted by the reception antenna group and information for measuring the interference in each of the one or more antenna groups. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341815 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING MEASUREMENT GAPS OF SERVING CELLS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a measuring method of terminal and a measurement information configuration method of a base station in a mobile communication system, and provides a measuring method and a measuring apparatus of a terminal and a configuration method and a configuration apparatus of a base station for configuring information in the terminal, the measurement method comprising the steps of: transmitting, to the base station, the terminal equipment information message including information for configuring measurement gaps with respect to a plurality of frequency bands; receiving from the base station, the measurement gap configuration information set on the basis of the information included in the terminal information message; and measuring according to the measurement gap configuration information. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341816 | METHOD FOR MANAGING RADIO RESOURCE IN MULTI-CELL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a radio resource management (RRM) measurement method of a terminal and a device therefor in a multi-cell wireless communication system. Particularly, the RRM measurement method comprises the steps of: receiving, from a serving cell, information associated with an RRM for a neighboring cell; and performing an RRM measurement for the neighboring cell according to the information associated with the RRM, wherein the serving cell and the neighboring cell are respectively set to change at least one uplink subframe according to a preset uplink-downlink configuration (UL-DL configuration) for downlink communication, and subframes for an RRM measurement for the neighboring cell are considered to be the same as subframes for an RRM measurement of the serving cell if the information associated with the RRM indicates the uplink-downlink configurations (UL-DL configurations) of the serving cell and the neighboring cell are the same. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341817 | RANK INDICATOR INHERITANCE FOR SUBFRAME RESTRICTED CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REPORTING - Generally, this disclosure provides devices, systems and methods for subframe restricted Channel State Information (CSI) reporting with Rank Indicator (RI) inheritance. A User Equipment (UE) device may include an RI generation module to generate RIs based on a received CSI configuration from an evolved Node B (eNB) of a serving cell of the UE. The UE may also include an RI Reference Process CSI generation module to generate a first Reference CSI including a first selected RI of the generated RIs, the first selection based on a first subframe set of the received CSI configuration, and to generate a second Reference CSI including a second selected RI of the generated RIs, the second selection based on a second subframe set of the received CSI configuration. The UE may further include a Linked Process CSI generation module to generate a linked CSI including an inherited RI from the first Reference CSI. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341818 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROL CHANNEL MONITORING IN A NEW CARRIER TYPE (NCT) WIRELESS NETWORK - Generally, this disclosure provides apparatus and methods for improved control channel monitoring in a New Carrier Type (NCT) wireless network. A User Equipment (UE) device may include a receiver circuit to receive a Multicast/Broadcast over Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) for Physical Multicast Channel (P-MCH) transmission from an evolved Node B (eNB); an MBSFN for P-MCH detection module to detect and extract an enhanced physical downlink control channel (EPDCCH) signal from the MBSFN subframe for P-MCH transmission; and an EPDCCH monitor module to decode and monitor the extracted EPDCCH signal. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341819 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD OF COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus connectable to a communication network notifies the presence of the communication apparatus using a communication channel assigned to the communication apparatus, then sets one communication channel different from the assigned communication channel of those available in the communication network, and searches for a communication partner apparatus which functions as a providing apparatus that provides communication parameters using the set communication channel. The communication apparatus repetitively executes the notification processing and the search processing, and changes a communication channel used in the search processing every time the repetition is executed one or a plurality of number of times. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341834 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING HANDOVER - A first base station may perform a method for controlling handover of a terminal. The method may include setting a handover parameter that is determined based on a handover policy and transmitting a message including the handover parameter to the terminal. The handover parameter includes a service parameter. The service parameter is used when determining a handover condition of the terminal in order to induce handover from the first base station to the second base station according to the handover policy. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341935 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY ALLOCATING RADIO RESOURCE - A method for a terminal to communicate with a network using a plurality of frequency band cells, and the terminal for performing the method are discussed. The method according to one embodiment includes acquiring frequency bands information on which of frequency bands measurement can be performed and on which of the frequency bands measurement cannot be performed. The frequency bands information is acquired from outside of the terminal. The method according to the embodiment further includes performing measurement on the frequency bands on which measurement can be performed based on the frequency bands information; acquiring measurement result information on the plurality of frequency band cells based on the measurement; and communicating data with a network on the plurality of frequency band cells considering the measurement result information. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341940 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method and apparatus relate to coexistence of multiple RF subsystems on a communication device. An apparatus may include a plurality of radio frequency (RF) subsystems configured to receive or transmit communication signals; and an interference table indicative of zones of interference among the multiple RF subsystems, the zones of interference being based on RF measurements. At least one of the RF subsystems comprises a coexistence module configured to communicate coexistence-related messages with of the other RF subsystems, the coexistence-related messages being based on the zones of interference. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341942 | SCHEME FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods, systems, apparatuses, evolved NodeB (EnBs), User Equipment (UE), and chip sets for all of the same, in cellular communication systems are described. One method for a UE includes receiving a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS) transmitted by an eNB according to a pattern in a time-frequency resource grid determined based on the transmission scheme of the eNB, measuring the state of the transmission channel using the CSI-RS, generating channel state information based on the measuring, and transmitting the channel state information as feedback. The UE receives a downlink signal including data and a Cell-specific Reference Signal (CRS) from the eNB and estimates the transmission channel using the CRS and then acquires the data using the estimated channel. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341967 | SUPPORTING AN ACCESS TO A DESTINATION NETWORK VIA A WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK - For supporting an access to a destination network by a mobile device via a wireless access network, the mobile device generates a predetermined request, which is addressed to a connectivity test server in the destination network. The predetermined request is transmitted to the wireless access network. In case the predetermined request reaches the connectivity test server, it generates a predetermined response and transmits it to the mobile device via the wireless access network. The mobile device determines whether a response to the predetermined request is received from the wireless access network and whether a received response corresponds to the predetermined response. | 11-26-2015 |
20150349854 | COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION METHOD AND EQUIPMENT - Disclosed in the present invention are a coordinated multi-point transmission method and network equipment. In the present invention, a CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point) auxiliary node provides CoMP auxiliary information for CoMP-participating cells via inter-cell interfaces, in order to assist the CoMP-participating cells in realizing CoMP. | 12-03-2015 |
20150349855 | Autonomous Quasi Co-Location Status Redefinition by Receiver in Coordinated Multipoint Downlink - User Equipment, UE ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150349856 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING A SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IN A CELLULAR MIMO SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND CELLULAR MIMO SYSTEM - A cellular multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) system has a base station. The base station has a plurality of antennas. To control a signal transmission in the MIMO system, the base station monitors at least one indicator which indicates whether a spatial resolution of the plurality of antennas allows signals received from at least two terminals to be distinguished. The base station selectively activates a multiple access transmission and reception for the at least two terminals as a function of the at least one indicator. The multiple access transmission and reception causes the at least two terminals to share a common channel. | 12-03-2015 |
20150349861 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN MULTIIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT NETWORK WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and an apparatus are provided for transmitting channel state information (CSI) by a terminal in a communication system. The method includes receiving a first signal from a first serving cell; receiving a second signal from a second serving cell; calculating first CSI for the first serving cell based on the first signal; calculating second CSI for the first serving cell based on the first signal; calculating first CSI for the second serving cell based on the second signal; calculating second CSI for the second serving cell based on the second signal; transmitting the first CSI and the second CSI for the first serving cell respectively; and transmitting the first CSI and the second CSI for the second serving cell respectively. | 12-03-2015 |
20150349867 | PROCESSING METHOD FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, BASE STATION AND TERMINAL - The present document relates to a method for processing channel state information (CSI), base station and terminal. The method for processing channel state information includes: a base station configuring a plurality of CSI processes for a terminal, each CSI process at least including information of a channel measurement part and information of an interference measurement part; when the base station configures corresponding CSI reference processes for partial or all CSI processes, at least limiting a rank indicator (RI) of the CSI processes for calculating a CSI report to be consistent with an RI of the CSI reference processes by configuring the CSI reference processes; and for the CSI processes configured with the CSI reference processes, the base station receiving the CSI report of the CSI processes according to the RI, or the RI and a PTI, or the RI and a PMI0 corresponding to the CSI reference processes. | 12-03-2015 |
20150349897 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UE MEASUREMENTS IN SUPPORT OF MIMO OTA - A method of processing the measurements of the user equipment (UE) antenna pattern for Multiple input Multiple Output (MIMO) Over-the-Air (OTA) testing consistent with the UE performing antenna pattern measurements using radiated test methods subsequent to conducted testing where the measured radiation pattern is then utilized. The method involves antenna pattern measurements which do not take into consideration the impact of radiated interference. For the MIMO OTA method it is necessary to estimate UE self-interference so that it can be accounted for during one phase of the throughput measurement process. A preferred method and a system in a packet switched data transfer system for antenna pattern measurements. A multiple Rx antenna UE is provided. A multiple Rx antenna UE includes a processor configured to promote antenna pattern measurements of a signal strength from a network component to the multiple Rx antenna UE. The signal strength of the advanced technology based network is measured when no user data is being transmitted. The invention deals with at least two different measurements: UE received power and relative phase measurements for multiple Rx antenna UEs. | 12-03-2015 |
20150349902 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A RADIO STATION IN A MOBILE NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for operating a secondary station comprising means for communicating with a primary station, the method comprising receiving from the primary station an interference status report, said interference status report comprising an spatial indication being representative of a spatial characteristic of the interference, measuring channel characteristics on reference symbols, and interpreting the measured channel characteristics with help of the interference status report. | 12-03-2015 |
20150349937 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. A method for user equipment transmitting channel state information (CSI) in the wireless communication system, according to the present invention, comprises the steps of: receiving information on an N number of CSI configurations for reporting the CSI; receiving information for selecting an M (2≦M≦N) number of the CSI configurations for joint CSI from the N number of the CSI configurations; calculating the M number of rank indexes (RI) based on each channel corresponding to the M number of CSI configurations; calculating a joint RI based on a synthetic channel generated by synthesizing the channels corresponding to the M number of the CSI configurations; and transmitting information on whether to report the joint CSI based on a result from comparing the M number of the RIs and the joint RI. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350044 | Cloud-based Infrastructure for Determining Reachability of Services Provided by a Server - Technologies are described for using a cloud-based computer system to access services provided by a particular server over public Internet Protocol (IP) connections. In one aspect, a system includes a first computer system configured to run the particular server to provide a first service over public IP connections; and a second computer system configured to run a second server, where the particular server transmits, over public IP connections, a request for the second server to check the first service, where, responsive to receipt of the request for the second server to check the first service, the second server provides, to the particular server over public IP connections, information relating to whether the first service is available over public IP connections, and where the particular server updates an availability status of the first service over public IP connections based on the information provided by the second server. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350919 | ADAPTATION OF ENHANCED INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION CONFIGURATION - In a wireless communication system, a cell may perform a method for adapting a long-term or short-term almost blank subframe (ABS) configuration, including determining, by the cell, a current neighbor cell deployment state, and adapting a long-term downlink ABS configuration of the cell based on the current neighbor cell deployment state. The current neighbor cell deployment state may include, for example, a number of neighbor cells, signal strengths of the neighbor cells, or a number of users being served in Cell Range Expansion (CRE), which may be determined using a Neighbor Listen module, receiving measurement reports from UEs, or receiving reports from small cell neighbors via a backhaul. Adapting the long-term downlink ABS configuration of the cell may include increasing a proportion of ABS-vacated resources in proportion to an change in neighbor cell deployment density, increasing neighbor cell signal strength, or increasing number of users served in CRE by neighbor cells. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350928 | METHOD FOR INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION WITH LOW-POWER SUBFRAMES IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Embodiments include methods for providing information enabling a communication device operating in a hetnet comprised of an aggressor cell and one or more overlaid victim cells utilizing a common frequency spectrum, to at least partially cancel an interfering signal transmitted from the aggressor cell in order to more accurately measure one or more signals transmitted from a victim cell. Embodiments include methods for configuring the aggressor cell with information related to overlaid victim cells in the aggressor's coverage area, and methods for configuring a victim cell with information related to the aggressor's interference within the victim's extended coverage area. Embodiments also include methods for receiving measurements of a signal transmitted from a victim cell, and methods for making such measurements on the victim's signal utilizing the aggressor cell interference information. Embodiments include network equipment or apparatus, user equipment or apparatus, and computer-readable media embodying one or more of these methods. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350934 | UPLINK TIMING ADJUSTMENT IN MULTI-SIM/MULTI-STANDBY DEVICES - A method/apparatus for wireless communication for a multi SIM/multi standby device having a single radio stores an uplink transmission timing of a first radio access technology (RAT) and a first path loss measurement before tuning away from the first RAT to perform an activity with a second RAT. A second path loss of the first RAT is measured after tuning back, and the second path loss measurement is compared to the first path loss measurement. The uplink transmission timing is adjusted based at least in part on the comparison. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350936 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PERFORMING A TIME OF FLIGHT (ToF) MEASUREMENT - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of performing a Time of Flight (ToF) measurement. For example, a first wireless device may include a radio to communicate a discovery frame with a second wireless device, the discovery frame including an initiator indication to indicate whether a sender of the discovery frame is to be an initiator or a responder of a Time of Flight (ToF) measurement procedure, and availability information to indicate a wireless channel and one or more time intervals; and a controller to perform the ToF measurement procedure with the second wireless device over the wireless channel during the one or more time intervals, the controller be either the initiator or responder of the ToF measurement according to the initiator indication. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350937 | Device and Method for Idle Mode Power Saving - A method to be performed by a wireless station having a wireless transceiver configured to establish a connection to a network, a processor and a non-transitory computer readable storage medium. The method includes receiving information during a first reception segment of a discontinuous reception cycle, wherein the discontinuous reception cycle includes the first reception segment and a first idle segment, performing a first measurement that begins during the first reception segment and performing a second measurement, wherein the second measurement begins prior to an end of the first measurement. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350938 | TECHNIQUE FOR MONITORING DATA TRAFFIC - A technique that assists in identifying services for monitoring data traffic in a communication network is provided. The communication network includes a terminal configured to transceive data traffic and a component configured to measure data traffic. As to a method aspect of the technique, the terminal associates one or more communication services that are executed or executable at the terminal with one or more communication endpoints. The terminal further sends a service identification report indicative of the association to the component. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350940 | PROCESSING OF PASSIVE INTERMODULATION DETECTION RESULTS - A PIM (passive intermodulation) diagnosis is generated for one or more wireless networks which have equipment deployed at a plurality of cell sites. Data is received representing PIM detection results from PIM detection devices at the cell sites, the detected PIM including PIM caused by passive intermodulation between carriers of the one or more wireless networks. The data representing respective PIM detection results is normalized to account for transmission power and frequency allocation of respective cell sites, and the normalized data representing respective PIM detection results is correlated with data relating to a condition of respective cell sites and/or an environment of the respective cell sites to produce correlation results. The PIM diagnosis is generated in dependence on the correlation results. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350941 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING DISCOVERY SIGNAL MEASUREMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREOF - Disclosed is a method of performing a measurement in UE. A method for performing discovery signal measurements, the method performed by a user equipment (UE) and includes: receiving measurement configuration information including a sub-frame offset between a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) and a channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS) in a discovery signal; setting configurations based on the measurement configuration information; and performing the discovery signal measurement based on the CSI-RS. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350943 | Obtaining Information for Radio Channel Modeling - An apparatus obtains information for radio channel modeling by checking at least one measurement based value of at least one set of measurement based values of a plurality of sets of measurement based values based on at least one timing measurement value, wherein each set of measurement based values originates from a respective mobile terminal in a communication network ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150350944 | TECHNIQUES FOR REPORTING POWER HEADROOM IN MULTIPLE CONNECTIVITY WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to reporting power headroom in wireless communications. A device can establish a first connection served by at least a first cell, and establish a second connection served by at least a second cell in multiple connectivity/carrier aggregation. The device can then determine to report a first power headroom in a first uplink subframe of the first cell in the first cell. The device can also determine a reporting configuration for possibly reporting a second power headroom based on a second subframe of the second cell as a companion report with the first power headroom when a type of the second subframe of the second cell is not an uplink subframe. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350945 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING CHANNEL BETWEEN BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method by which a first base station measures a channel with a second base station in a wireless communication system, the channel measuring method comprising the steps of: receiving a reference signal transmitted by the second base station, in a first subframe; and estimating a channel with the second base station on the basis of the reference signal, wherein the first subframe is obtained by changing a subframe indicated for an uplink by system information into a subframe for a downlink by the second base station. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350977 | DEVICE AND METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A device and method in a radio communication system. The device includes: an acquisition unit for use in acquiring a signal quality of a mobile terminal relative to a source cell; an assessment unit for use in assessing the degree of change in the signal quality of the mobile terminal relative to the source cell on the basis of multiple signal qualities of the mobile terminal relative to the source cell acquired at every predetermined time interval; and, a triggering unit for use in triggering, on the basis of the degree of change in the signal quality of the mobile terminal relative to the source cell, the mobile terminal to submit a measurement result. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350979 | Network Node, User Node and Methods for Channel Estimation - A method in a network node for estimating a channel from a user node to the network node is provided. The network node receives first pilots. The network node receives ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150350998 | RELAY DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A relay device includes: a processor and a memory configured to store a communication control program executed by the processor; wherein: the processor, based on the program, performs operations to: relay communication between a first base station in a first wireless communication network and a terminal connected to the relay device; identify a second base station in a second wireless communication network having a different communication protocol from the first wireless communication network, the second base station being present in the vicinity of the relay device; determine whether a connection is capable of being established between the second base station and the terminal; and stop a relay of the communication so that a connection target of the terminal is switched from the relay device to the second base station if the connection is capable of being established. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351047 | POWER EFFICIENT CONTROL OF UPLINK CARRIER USAGE BY MOBILE TERMINAL - In data transmission between a mobile terminal and a cellular network, a network component, e.g., a base station, establishes a downlink connection from the cellular network to the mobile terminal. The downlink connection uses one or more downlink carriers. Further, the network component identifies multiple uplink carriers which are available for establishing an uplink connection from the mobile terminal to the cellular network. The network component estimates impact of usage of the uplink carriers on power consumption of the mobile terminal. Depending on the estimated impact, the network component selects at least one of the uplink carriers for establishing the uplink connection. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351061 | METHOD FOR ADDING SECONDARY CELL IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention, which is utilized in a wireless access system supporting carrier aggregation (CA), relates to methods for acquiring an uplink synchronization from two or more geographically distanced cells, particularly S-cells, and indicating that the corresponding cell is an S-cell, and to an apparatus for supporting same. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351082 | METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR USING CHANNELK STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNALS - In a wireless communication system, a wireless device is identified as being a relay device. A channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) configuration is selected such that at least one CSI-RS can be transmitted to the wireless device in a subset of subframes assigned to relay backhaul transmissions. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351085 | APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DOWNLINK DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SUPPORTING COOPERATION BETWEEN TRANSMISSION POINTS AND METHOD THEREFOR - Disclosed are an apparatus for transmitting and receiving a downlink data in a wireless communications system supporting cooperation between transmission points and a method therefor. A method for transmitting a downlink data in a wireless communications system includes the steps of: transmitting the information on resources management collection including the CSI-RS information for measuring the terminal received bower to a terminal; receiving a report of the received power measurement of the CSI-RS corresponding to the resources management collection from the terminal; determining the measurement collection including the CSI-RS information for the terminal to infer a channel based on the received power measurement report; and transmitting the resources mapped with data to the terminal based on the measurement collection. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351097 | A MEASURING DEVICE AND A MEASURING METHOD FOR DETERMINING AN ACTIVE CHANNEL - A measuring device serves to determine an active channel from a plurality of channels of known frequencies. In this context, it comprises a processor ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150351107 | INTERFERENCE PROCESSING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method for processing interference in wireless communication at a base station, wherein at least some of a plurality of (Radio Frequency) RF channels in the base station operates at a current operating frequency point assigned to the base station includes detecting interference of one or more candidate frequency points by using at least one RF channel, wherein the one or more candidate frequency points are different from the current operating frequency point; reporting result of detecting interference of the one or more candidate frequency points to a resource manager; and in response to the resource manager assigning one of the one or more candidate frequency points to the base station, notifying a user to switch from the current operating frequency point to the assigned candidate frequency point. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351117 | Over-the-Air Signaling for Coordination of Time-Division Duplexing - Coordination information for controlling base-station-to-base-station interference is transmitted from one radio network node ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150351118 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless telecommunication system is described comprising a shared base station able to divide resources between multiple network operators sharing the base station. The base station resources are divided into sets of resources reserved for each network operator respectively and resources shared by all network operators. The shared base station is configured to monitor the usage of its resources by each operator and to determine, for each scheduling round, an appropriate prioritisation of communication bearers associated with the network operators. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351129 | WIRELESS NETWORK AND METHOD - A network node for a wireless network and corresponding methods for reducing false collisions in a wireless network, a wireless network, a wireless sensor network and a smart building including a wireless sensor network. The network node includes a processor, memory and an antenna. The network node is operable promiscuously to monitor and maintain a record of transmissions and acknowledgements received by the network node. The network node is also operable to send information relating to the record to another node in the network for use by the other node in determining that a further node to which the other node sends transmissions is hidden from the network node. In another aspect the network node is operable to determine from information received from a second other network node, that a first other network node is hidden from the second other network node. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351151 | DRX PARAMETER CONFIGURATION METHOD AND ASSOCIATED BASE STATION FOR FACILITATING ANR MEASUREMENT - The present invention discloses a Discontinuous Reception (DRX) parameter configuration method for facilitating Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) measurement. The method comprises determining a traffic intensity of a User Equipment (UE) by which a DRX-based ANR measurement is to be performed. The method further comprises setting a value for a DRX parameter to be used by the UE to perform the DRX-based ANR measurement, in accordance with the determined traffic intensity of the UE. The method further comprises transmitting the value set for the DRX parameter to the UE. The present invention further provides an associated BS adapted to perform DRX parameter configuration to facilitate ANR measurement. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351152 | ANR task execution method, system and ANR user equipment management method, apparatus - An Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) task execution method, system and an ANR user equipment management method, apparatus are described, when an ANR function is enabled, a corresponding User Equipment (UE) is selected for the enabled ANR function, and then a Discontinuous Reception (DRX) configuration matching this ANR function is configured for the selected UE; that is, the disclosure specifically configures a matching DRX parameter for the UE selected by the ANR function, without searching a required UE from the UE configuring a Long DRX in an entire cell, thus improving efficiency and a success rate of executing an ANR task; simultaneously the disclosure only needs to perform specific configuration on the UE selected by the ANR function, without changing the configuration of all the UEs in the entire cell, thus greatly reducing an influence on a Key Performance Indicator (KPI) of the cell, and improving entire user experience satisfaction of the cell. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358093 | METHOD FOR MEASURING CHANNEL AND INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed in the present invention is a method for user equipment performing a measurement in a wireless communication system. More particularly, the method comprises the steps of: receiving, from a network, information related to measuring resource combination; grouping into one time domain measurement resource group a plurality of time domain measuring resources of a time domain by using the information related to the measuring resource combination; and performing the measurement with the assumption that identical precoding is applied to or identical interference occurs in the time domain measurement resource group, wherein the information related to the measurement resource combination includes information related to the number of the plurality of time domain measurement resources. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358094 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for and apparatus for performing a measurement in a wireless communication system is provided. A wireless device determines information about a measurement type, the measurement type indicating one of a first measurement object and a second measurement object and performs measurement using a measurement signal at subframe(s) configured in the measurement object indicated by the measurement type. The measurement signal includes one of a discovery signal, a measurement reference signal (MRS) and a cell-common RS (CRS). | 12-10-2015 |
20150358102 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL IN MULTI-CELL COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting and receiving signals in a wireless communication system. Specifically, in a multi-cell cooperative communication system, a base station can form cooperative detection user set information by detecting a terminal within a cell and form cooperative processing user set by receiving the cooperative detection user set information of a neighboring base station. At this time, the base station acquires information about a base station adjacent to the neighboring base station and designs an efficient filter in transmitting and receiving signals of terminals between the base stations, thereby being capable of removing inter-cell interference signals. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358103 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile communication terminal calculates an interference rejection combining reception weight matrix so as to reduce interference with a desired beam by another beam, in which the desired beam is a beam of radio waves transmitted from a desired base station. The mobile communication terminal estimates an interference and noise power expected when the IRC is implemented based on the interference rejection combining reception weight matrix and calculates a signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio expected when the IRC is implemented based on the interference and noise power. The mobile communication terminal measures or calculates received signal qualities relative to radio waves received from a plurality of base stations, to compensate for the signal-to-interference-plus-noise ratio or the interference and noise power. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358104 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A mobile communication terminal calculates an interference rejection combining reception weight matrix based on a vector representing a reference signal transmitted from a desired base station so as to reduce interference with a desired beam of radio waves. The mobile communication terminal estimates, from the interference rejection combining reception weight matrix and the reference signal, an all received power expected when an IRC is implemented, and estimates, from an interference rejection combining weight vector, a channel matrix, and a reference signal sequence, a desired reference signal power expected when an IRC is implemented. The mobile communication terminal subtracts the desired reference signal power from the all received power, thereby estimating an interference and noise power expected when an IRC is implemented, and calculates an SINR expected when an IRC is implemented from the estimated interference and noise power. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358131 | Determining Signal Transmission Bandwidth - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a first radio node ( | 12-10-2015 |
20150358139 | Methods and Apparatuses for Measuring CSI - Provided are methods and apparatuses for measuring CSI. The method comprises: a terminal device determining whether a subframe a channel state information interference measurement resource is located on is a downlink subframe; when the subframe where the channel state information interference measurement resource is located is a downlink subframe, the terminal device executing interference measurement by using the channel state information interference measurement resource. By means of the present disclosure, the technical problem is solved that it is difficult to effectively perform the CSI measurement caused when a base station flexibly adjust uplink-downlink configuration in a related technology, thereby achieving the technical effect of improving the data transmission performance of a system. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358142 | METHOD FOR SHARING WIRELESS RESOURCE INFORMATION IN MULTI-CELL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for user equipment transmitting/receiving signals in a multi-cell wireless communication system. More specifically, the method far the user equipment transmitting/receiving signals in the multi-cell wireless communication system comprises a step of transmitting/receiving the signals by using a specific radio resource, wherein the specific radio resource is set so that the use of the radio resource is modified based on a predetermined time section between a serving cell and a neighbor cell. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358181 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION METHOD AND ASSOCIATED DEVICE FOR ESTIMATING DATA CHANNEL OF DATA RESOURCE ELEMENT OF PHYSICAL RESOURCE BLOCK FOR OFDM SYSTEM - A channel estimation method estimates a data channel of a data resource element of a physical resource block in a time-frequency domain. The method includes: utilizing a detection circuit to perform a first physical resource block bundling detection in a first direction of the time-frequency domain to detect if at least one neighboring physical resource block is allowed to be bundled with the physical resource block, and accordingly generating a first physical resource block bundling detection result; determining a physical resource block processing range according to at least the first physical resource block bundling detection result, wherein at least the physical resource block is included in the physical resource block processing range; obtaining a plurality of pilot channels for pilot resource elements in the physical resource block processing range; and estimating the data channel of the data resource element according to the pilot channels. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358220 | BROADBAND CABLE NETWORK UTILIZING COMMON BIT-LOADING - A network for determining a common bit-loading modulation scheme for communicating between nodes in the network is disclosed. The network may include a transmitting node within the plurality of nodes where the transmitting node is capable of sending a probe signal to the nodes, and at least one receiving node within the plurality of nodes in signal communication with the transmitting node. The at least one receiving node is capable of transmitting a first response signal in response to receiving the probe signal. The first response signal includes a first bit-loading modulation scheme determined by the at least one receiving node. The transmitting node is further capable of determining the common bit-loading modulation scheme from the first response signal. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING PERFORMANCE OF MULTI-SERVICE IN TUNNEL - Embodiments of the present application provide a method for measuring performance of multi-service in a tunnel, including: receiving a measurement message corresponding to a service packet, where a priority of the measurement message is the same as that of the service packet, and the measurement message includes at least one of the three: a packet loss measurement parameter, a delay measurement parameter, and a jitter measurement parameter; and measuring performance of a service in a tunnel according to a measurement parameter in the measurement message. According to the embodiments of the present application, a problem that performance measurement cannot be performed for different services transmitted in a tunnel in the prior art may be solved. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358222 | POWER FLUCTUATION DETECTION AND ANALYSIS - The network monitoring system collects transmission and/or receive power level information from a plurality of customer premise devices connected to the same distribution node for each of a plurality of network distribution nodes. For an individual network distribution node, the network monitoring system calculates a set of fluctuation parameters including a group power level deviation metric, e.g., a modified standard deviation ratio. The network monitoring system evaluates the generated fluctuation parameters and responds, e.g., outputting a fluctuations report, modifying a data collection profile being used by a set of customer premise devices corresponding to a distribution node, commanding diagnostics to be performed on a portion of the network and/or directing a service technician. The network monitoring system compares generated fluctuation parameters corresponding to different distribution nodes, and uses the results of the comparison to assign priority with regard to the assignment of limited available troubleshooting and repair resources. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358780 | SIGNAL HANDLING - A second device ( | 12-10-2015 |
20150358840 | AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL FOR TIME DIVISION DUPLEX LTE - A plurality of data samples are captured during a single capture period using a WLAN receive chain, wherein the data samples include a signal of interest periodically transmitted by a WWAN. A preferred LNA gain state is selected from among a plurality of available LNA gain states for the WLAN receive chain. The plurality of gain states may be a discrete set of LNA gain states or may be a set of LNA gain states derived from energy measurements. The LNA gain state of the WLAN receive chain is set to the selected LNA gain state and data samples are captured during each of a plurality of contiguous capture ticks within a capture period. The captured data samples are processed to detect for the signal of interest. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358846 | Device and Method of Handling Measurement Configuration - A communication device for handling a measurement configuration comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The instructions comprise receiving a measurement configuration comprising a first carrier frequency and a low priority for the first carrier frequency from a network; changing the low priority of the first carrier frequency to a normal priority in response to a radio resource control (RRC) procedure; and performing a measurement on the first carrier frequency according to the measurement configuration comprising the first carrier frequency with the normal priority. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358847 | TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal apparatus which performs periodic channel state information reporting to a base station apparatus, the terminal apparatus including a reception unit that receives first information, second information, and index information indicating a value for reporting periodicity of the channel state information, from the base station apparatus, and a transmission control unit that determines the value for reporting periodicity of the channel state information on the basis of the index information, in which the applicable value is based on a certain UL-DL configuration, in which, in a case where the second information is not configured, the certain UL-DL configuration is a UL-DL configuration indicated by the first information, and in which, in a case where the second information is configured, the certain UL-DL configuration is a UL-DL configuration indicated by the second information. Consequently, in a radio communication system which employs dynamic TDD, interference with a downlink signal is avoided, and an uplink control signal is transmitted. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358848 | METHOD FOR RADIO RESOURCE MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION, AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention relates to methods for making radio resource measurements in synchronized cells when quasi co-location is applied, and to apparatuses supporting same. A method for a terminal for making radio resource measurements (RRM) in a wireless access system according to one embodiment of the present invention may comprise the steps of: receiving an upper level signal comprising a reference signal for channel state information (CSI-RS) of a first cell, and quasi co-location (QCL) information for a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) and/or CSI-RS of a second cell; receiving the CRS and/or CSI-RS of the second cell on the basis of the QCL information; and measuring a first RRM for the first cell by means of the CRS and/or the CSI-RS of the second cell. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358849 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INTER-FREQUENCY AND/OR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENTS - Techniques for performing inter-frequency and/or inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurements are disclosed. A multi-receiver wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may receive downlink transmissions via a plurality of downlink carriers, of a set of configured downlink carriers, simultaneously. The WTRU may receive gap configuration information for at least one of the set of configured downlink carriers. The WTRU may further perform inter-frequency measurements on carriers outside of the set of configured downlink carriers during a measurement gap in response to the received gap configuration information. The WTRU may further receive information that at least one of the set of configured downlink carriers is to be disabled. The WTRU may then perform measurements on the frequency of the disabled downlink carrier without using measurement gaps. The WTRU may perform measurements on the disabled carrier without measurement gaps maintaining a status of the disabled carrier as disabled at a physical layer. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358855 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT THROUGH ELIMINATING INTERFERENCE AND TERMINAL - The present invention provides a method for performing a measurement by a terminal in a wireless communications system having both a macro cell and a small cell. The method for performing a measurement includes the step of receiving CRS (Cellspecific Reference Signal) support information from the macro cell or the small cell which works as a serving cell. The CRS support information may contain the information of a cell sending a CRS causing interference. The method may include the step of receiving respectively a CRS from the macro and a CRS from the small cell. Here, a timing offset may be adjusted between the sub-frame receiving the CRS from the macro cell and the sub-frame receiving the CRS from the small cell. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358883 | Method and a Network Node for Improved Resource Utilization in a Load Balanced Radio Communication System - The present disclosure concerns movements, such as handovers, of user equipments (UEs) | 12-10-2015 |
20150358899 | METHOD FOR CELL DISCOVERY - Disclosed is a method for cell discovery. In a network in which a macro cell overlaps at least one small cell, when the carrier frequency used by the macro cell is different from the carrier frequency used by the small cell, the small cell transmits a discovery signal using the carrier frequency used by the macro cell, or the small cell transmits a discovery signal using a carrier frequency of the small cell that is different from the carrier frequency used by the macro cell. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358903 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a communication system, a HeNB measures interference in an energy saving mode. When judging to have detected the interference by a UE during communication with an eNB, the HeNB cancels the energy saving mode and moves to a normal mode and starts issuing a pilot signal. When the UE judges to have detected the pilot signal and reports the judgment results to the eNB, a handover process from the eNB to the HeNB is performed for the UE. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358904 | OPERATION METHOD OF STATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Disclosed are operation method of station in wireless local area network. An operation method comprises setting transmission power of a frame; setting a clear channel assessment (CCA) threshold based on a difference between the set transmission power and a default value of the transmission power; and performing a CCA operation based on the set CCA threshold. Therefore, performance of WLAN can be enhanced. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358921 | Fast Fading Power Restriction - The present application discloses methods and apparatus for modifying a normal link adaptation process of a wireless device ( | 12-10-2015 |
20150358981 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for enabling a first device to perform device-to-device (D2D) communication in a wireless communication system, comprising the steps of: receiving a D2D candidate list from a third device; receiving a D2D reference signal transmitted from a second device included in the D2D candidate list; and performing measurement using the D2D reference signal; and transmitting the measured result to the third device. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358982 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING UPLINK AMC IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a serving base station determining a modulation and coding selection (MCS) of a terminal in a wireless communication system, according to the present invention, comprises the steps of: determining uplink interference from neighboring cells; determining a signal-to-interference plus noise ratio (SINR) based on a reply signal indicating whether data transmitted by the terminal is successfully received and the interference information; and determining the MCS based on the SINR information and the reply signal. According to the present invention, an MCS level can be determined according to a channel status of a receiver by accurately determining interference from nearby cells, thereby improving data transmission/reception efficiency. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365152 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION MEASUREMENTS FOR LICENSE-ASSISTED ACCESS - Systems and methods relating to accurate Channel State Information (CSI) measurements for a License Assisted Secondary Cell (LA SCell) are disclosed herein. In some embodiments, a wireless device enabled to operate in a cellular communications network according to a carrier aggregation scheme using both a licensed frequency band and an unlicensed frequency band operates to determine whether a Channel State Information Reference Symbol (CSI-RS) transmission from a LA SCell of the wireless device is present in a subframe, where the LA SCell is in an unlicensed frequency band. The wireless device further operates to process a CSI-RS measurement for the LA SCell for the subframe upon determining that a CSI-RS transmission from the LA SCell is present in the subframe and refrain from processing a CSI-RS measurement for the LA SCell for the subframe upon determining that a CSI-RS transmission from the LA SCell is not present in the subframe. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365205 | MULTI-CELL INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - Multi-cell interference management (MCIM) for interference management among multiple cells in a wireless communication network is provided. In some embodiments, MCIM includes collecting data (e.g., CQI measurements and/or subband usage statistics) from a neighborhood of base stations; determining local and neighborhood system utility metrics; and determining interference managing directives (e.g., that can be communicated to the MAC layer of a base station in the neighborhood of base stations). | 12-17-2015 |
20150365503 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING MAXIMUM SEGMENT SIZE - A method for determining a maximum segment size is disclosed. The method is used in an access point. The method includes: detecting a first MSS value between the access point and at least one device; setting a TCP MSS value of at least one TCP session established by the access point as a second MSS value; comparing the first MSS value with the second MSS value, and choosing a minimum value among the first MSS value and the second MSS value as a maximum value; and recording all the MSS values between the access point and the subsequent devices and the maximum value into a device MSS table. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365818 | SHARING DEVICE AVAILABILITY - A method, apparatus, and program product are disclosed for determining an availability status associated with an information handling device, generating a message comprising information regarding the availability status, the message being one or more of a voice message and a textual message, and sending the message to one or more contacts associated with the information handling device. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365833 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESS POINT LOCATION - Methods and apparatus for determining a desired or optimal location for one or more access points within a premises. In one embodiment, software is provided to wireless-enabled client devices in a user premises; the software enables each of the devices to communicate with one another and collect a plurality of data relating to the connectivity of each at various locations within the premises. The data is used to determine a desired or optimal location for placement of an access point. Once the optimal location is determined, the access point is placed, and the client devices communicate therewith. In one variant, ongoing data may be collected as the system operates to ensure continued optimization. In the instance changes in the topology or environment of the user premises cause significant alterations to the communication signals or connectivity, a new optimal location for the access point may be determined. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365835 | DYNAMICALLY ASSOCIATED NEIGHBOR AWARENESS NETWORKING (NAN) DISCOVERY WINDOWS FOR FINE TIMING MEASUREMENT - Certain embodiments herein relate to a dynamic pre-association between Neighbor Awareness Networking (NAN) discovery windows and fine timing measurement (FTM) communications. A wireless station may trigger An FTM procedure during a NAN discovery window by the transmission of a NAN Service Discovery Frame (SDF). In addition to the FTM communications, an indication of a discovery window for which a subsequent FTM communication is expected to occur is also transmitted. In some embodiments, an FTM range report may also be transmitted with the indication. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365838 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO SEPARATE COVERAGE LIMITED AND CO-CHANNEL LIMITED INTERFERENCES - Coverage and usage-based limitations to a wireless communications network can be estimated by monitoring network performance during a periods in which the network is relatively busy and relatively non-busy. For example, differences in distributions of bit error rates for calls in such time periods can be used to assess whether network limitations are associated with reduced-coverage zones or are usage-based. Such estimates can be used to target specific network features that limit network performance. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365839 | Glass Box Models for Predicting Circuit Switched Speech Quality in 3G Telecommunications Networks - A method for predicting speech quality in a voice call between a mobile terminal and a mobile coupling node is disclosed. The method includes obtaining M values of a power parameter measured M times at different points in time over a first time interval of the duration of the call, where the power parameter is a parameter indicative of transmitted power in one of a first direction and a second direction of the call, the first direction being an uplink direction from the mobile terminal to the mobile coupling node, the second direction being a downlink direction from the mobile coupling node to the mobile terminal. The method also includes calculating a power factor for the call based on the M values of the power parameter, and, based on the calculated power factor, calculating a speech quality indicator for the other one of the first direction and the second direction. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365841 | Prediction Of Quality Of Service Of A Possible Future Connection Of A Device To A Wireless Network - The disclosure relates to wireless networks, and more specifically to multiple access networks. This present disclosure provides for a method in a wireless device | 12-17-2015 |
20150365866 | System and Method for Dual-Band Backhaul Radio - A method and system are provided. The system includes a communication system including a first transmitter/receiver operating on a first frequency and a second transmitter/receiver operating on a second frequency. The system also includes a controller monitoring at least one of interference and throughput on the first and second transmitter/receiver and shifting demand based on the monitoring. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365874 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INDICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an indication in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) receives an indication, which indicates whether a cell served by an eNodeB (eNB) is a normal cell or a split cell, from the eNB, and transmits the received indication to a serving eNB of the UE. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365906 | Offset to Data Rate Control Based on Transmission Power in Neighbor Sector - Methods and systems are disclosed that may help a base station to adjust forward-link data rates in a given sector based on transmission-power variations in neighboring sectors. An exemplary method involves a base station that serves a first sector: (a) determining a respective transmission power for each of two or more channels of a second sector, (b) detecting a transmission-power difference between at least two of the channels of the second sector, and (c) in response to detecting the transmission-power difference: (i) determining a data rate control (DRC) adjustment for the first sector based at least in part on the transmission-power difference; and using the determined DRC adjustment to determine a forward-link data rate for at least one access terminal in the first sector. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365913 | FAILURE CONDITIONS FOR FINE TIMING MEASUREMENT (FTM) PROTOCOL - Techniques for positioning with Fine Timing Measurement (FTM) messages are disclosed. An example of a wireless transceiver system for providing a FTM response message is configure to receive a FTM request from an initiating station, the FTM request may include a minimum delta FTM value, a number of bursts exponents value, and a As Soon As Possible (ASAP) value. The transceiver may send a first FTM response message indicating the FTM session is terminated if the wireless transceiver is incapable of meeting the minimum delta FTM value and the number of bursts exponents value, and send a second FTM response message including a status value based on the ASAP value in the FTM request if the wireless transceiver is capable of meeting the minimum delta FTM value and the number of bursts exponents value. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365958 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND BAND CONTROL METHOD - A HeNB includes a CQI acquiring unit and an SIR acquiring unit that measure communication qualities of transmission bands on an uplink side and a downlink side. The HeNB, upon detecting an interference difference between bands in a transmission band on each of the uplink side and the downlink side on the basis of a result of measurement of the communication qualities, sets allocation of a band in which the communication quality satisfies a predetermined condition in the transmission band in which the interference difference is detected. The HeNB includes a control unit that, upon detecting signal interference on the downlink side on the basis of the result of the measurement of the communication qualities, controls a band on the downlink side, and controls a band on the uplink side in the transmission band in cooperation with the control on the band on the downlink side. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365959 | A PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS NLOS BACKHAUL - A protection system, configured for switching between backhaul technologies for upholding a communication in a wireless backhaul network, to a main node, to a dependent node, and a method for switching between backhaul technologies for upholding a communication. The protection system comprises a main node and a dependent node, wherein the main node and the dependent node are configured for communicating with each other via a backhaul channel, and a switching unit configured for selecting a backhaul technology for a communication via the backhaul channel, wherein at least one of the main node and the dependent node are further configured for measuring a quality parameter of the backhaul channel, wherein the switching unit is further configured for switching the backhaul technology selected for the communication via the backhaul channel to a predefined backhaul technology dependent on the quality parameter measured. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365960 | PHYSICAL RESOURCE BLOCK (PRB)-RESTRICTED INTERFERENCE AVERAGING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods, apparatuses, and systems are described related to interference averaging to generate feedback information. In embodiments, an evolved Node B (eNB) may transmit an feedback management message to a user equipment (UE) that defines one or more PRB sets. The PRB sets may include at least one PRB of the channel. The UE may average interference measurements within the PRB set and may generate channel state information (CSI) feedback for the PRB set based on the average interference measurement. The UE may transmit the CSI feedback to the eNB. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365971 | Wireless communication device and method - The present disclosure discloses a wireless communication device and method capable of adaptively permitting packet transmission or adjusting a threshold for packet transmission. An embodiment of said wireless communication device includes a reception circuit, a control circuit and a transmission circuit. The reception circuit measures signal energy, generates multiple energy measurement values, and generates multiple comparison results according to the energy measurement values and at least a threshold. The control circuit is operable to generate a transmission control signal according to the comparison results or to its derived information. The transmission circuit, coupled to the reception circuit and the control circuit, determines whether packet transmission is allowable according to the comparison results if the transmission control signal indicates a normal state, and the transmission circuit determines whether packet transmission is allowable according to the transmission control signal if the transmission control signal indicates an abnormal state. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365975 | Processing of Random Access Preamble Sequences - The present disclosure relates to random access in wireless communication systems, and in particular to a wireless device, a preamble receiver, and methods for processing random access preamble signals. A disclosed method in a wireless device comprises generating (S | 12-17-2015 |
20150372789 | Uplink Coverage Via Autonomous Retransmission | 12-24-2015 |
20150372872 | System and Method for Aggregating and Estimating the Bandwidth of Multiple Network Interfaces - The present invention provides a system and method for aggregating and estimating the bandwidth of the multiple network interfaces. Particularly, the invention provides a cross layer system for bandwidth aggregation based on dynamic analysis of network conditions. Further, the invention provides a system and method of estimation for evaluating bandwidth of multiple physical interfaces. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373555 | Wireless Sensor Network Commissioning - A communications apparatus configured to communicate with a sensor network, comprising a transmitter, a receiver, a processor coupled to the transmitter and the receiver, and a memory coupled to the processor, wherein the memory comprises instructions that when executed by the processor cause the apparatus to retrieve configuration data from the memory regarding the sensor network, wherein the configuration data is preloaded on the memory at a first physical location prior to installing the apparatus at a second physical location, select a wireless communication gateway from a plurality of communication gateways in the sensor network based at least in part on the configuration data, and wirelessly transmit data to the wireless communication gateway, wherein the data comprises information indicating a sensor reading. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373560 | METHOD FOR COLLECTING AND AGGREGATING NETWORK QUALITY DATA - A system and method are provided for collecting wireless network quality parameters. The wireless network quality parameters are collected from wireless networks by a client device in communication with the wireless network. The client device reports the wireless network quality parameters to a server. The server collects wireless network quality parameters from a plurality of client devices and analyses the wireless network quality parameters from the plurality of client devices to determine a network quality for the particular wireless networks. The network quality is stored in a network quality database maintained by the server. The server provides access to the network quality for devices with permission to access the wireless network quality database. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373561 | AUTOMATICALLY UPDATING AN ACCESS POINT - A method for seamlessly and automatically updating an access point or router. The method includes receiving an update for the access point and determining a status of a network traffic associated with the access point. The method further includes determining an update time for applying the update based on the determined status of the network traffic and applying the update to the access point at the determined update time. An access point receives an update for the access point, and waits for a time to apply the update. The access point waits until there is no interactive traffic in which a user is actively using the network. The access point applies the update and reboots. By waiting until there is no interactive traffic, the update process mitigates interruptions to the user's active use of the network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373563 | COORDINATION OF CAPACITY AND COVERAGE OPTIMIZATION OF SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORKS - In one embodiment, the present disclosure provides a self-optimizing network (SON) coordination module that includes a conflict detection module configured to receive operational information from at least one capacity and coverage optimization (CCO) module and at least one of an energy savings management (ESM) and/or a cell outage compensation (COC) module, wherein the at least one CCO module and the at least one of the ESM module and/or the COC module are associated with at least one eNodeB (eNB) in communication with the conflict detection module. The conflict detection module is configured to determine a conflict between operational information of the CCO module and at least one of the ESM module and/or the COC module. The SON coordination module also includes a conflict resolution module configured to resolve a conflict between the operational information of the CCO module and at least one of the ESM module and/or the COC module based on, at least in part, one or more conflict resolution rules. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373565 | QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE WITHIN A CONTEXT-AWARE COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Improving Quality of Experience (QoE) within a context-aware computing environment includes continuously receiving device data, receiving user data, and generating, using a processor, a QoE model using the device data and the user data. Using a processor, a predicted QoE is determined using the QoE model. A notification for improving a current QoE from the predicted QoE is provided. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373566 | METHOD TO REDUCE THE TRANSMISSION DELAY FOR DATA PACKETS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a modem. The apparatus detects reception of a low latency data packet. The apparatus starts a data activity timer determined based on the detection of the reception of the low latency data packet. The apparatus sends a disable low power message from the apparatus to a host device to disable a low power state of a link between the apparatus and the host device based on a duration of the data activity timer. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373567 | Performance Mapping - Methods and computer-executable instructions for mapping performance data of wireless systems include receiving from an access point actual performance information, such as throughput, of a user device at a particular time, along with an identifier of the access point, and location information of the user device. Then, using the received actual performance information, the received location information, and the particular time to map the received actual performance information on a map of an area around the mobile device. In certain embodiments, converting the mapped actual performance information into a visual reference gradient for display on the user device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373568 | PREDICTING CHANNEL STATE - A process of wireless communication for obtaining channel quality information alignment includes predicting a channel state of a future downlink subframe of a signal. The process also includes providing a base station with a set of parameters based on the predicted channel state. For example, a user equipment (UE) can obtain a recommended transport block size (RTBS) from the predictor process, and return the RTBS to the base station as one of the set of parameters. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373572 | INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENTS AND MANAGEMENT IN DIRECTIONAL MESH NETWORKS - Techniques may be used for interference measurement and management in directional mesh networks, including centralized and/or distributed approaches. A centralized node, such as an operations and maintenance (OAM) center, may use feedback from nodes in the mesh network to partition the nodes in the mesh network into clusters based on interference levels. Interference measurement reports may be used by the centralized node to update cluster membership. An initiating node in the mesh network may use topographical information to generate an initial interference cluster, and interference measurement frame (IMF) scheduling information may be used to schedule transmissions within the interference clusters. Techniques for opportunistic measurement campaigns, simultaneous measurement campaigns, link failure detection, and link re-acquisition in directional mesh networks may also be used. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373574 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE MEASUREMENT AND WIRELESS NETWORK RECOMMENDATION - Systems and methods for quality of experience measurement and wireless network recommendation and/or switching are disclosed. In some embodiments, a method comprises connecting to a cellular data network, measuring a signal strength value of a Wi-Fi data network within range of the digital device, calculating an overall Wi-Fi score based on the measured signal strength value of the Wi-Fi data network, measuring a signal strength value of the cellular data network, calculating an available bandwidth of the cellular data network, calculating an overall cellular data network score based on the measured signal strength value of the cellular data network and the calculated available bandwidth of the cellular data network, comparing the overall Wi-Fi score and the overall cellular data network score, and switching from the cellular data network to the Wi-Fi data network based on the comparison of the first bandwidth score to the bandwidth threshold value. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373595 | SELF CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMIZATION OF CELL NEIGHBORS IN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS - The present invention aims to reduce the cost of planning and maintaining neighbour cell sets by requiring mobile terminals to make an additional effort to identify uniquely neighbouring cells in the radio network. decided. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373601 | RADIO BASE STATION, USER TERMINAL, CELL SELECTION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system in which user terminal is able to aggressively select small cells in a radio communication system in which a macro cell and small cells are arranged to overlap each other is disclosed. A macro base station (M) configured to form a macro cell carries out the steps of determining the offset value to use in cell selection in a user terminal (UE) based on transmission property information of a second carrier in the small cell, and reporting the offset value to the user terminal (UE). Also, the user terminal (UE) carries out the steps of measuring the received quality of reference signals from the macro base station (M) and the small base station (S), receiving the offset value that is reported from the macro base station (M), and carrying out cell selection based on the received quality that is measured and the offset value that is received. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373608 | APPARATUSES, METHODS, AND SYSTEMS TO REDUCE HANDOVER LATENCY IN AN INTEGRATED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND CELLULAR NETWORK - Embodiments include apparatuses, methods, and systems to reduce handover latency in an integrated wireless local area network (WLAN) and wireless cellular network. In embodiments, a user equipment (UE) may communicate with a packet data network (PDN) gateway (P-GW) via the WLAN and/or the wireless cellular network. Various embodiments may provide monitoring circuitry to monitor one or more PDN connections between the P-GW and the UE over the WLAN, determine that the UE should be in a radio resource control (RRC)-Connected mode based on the monitored one or more PDN connections, and transmit an inactivity timer reconfiguration (ITR) message to request suspension of an inactivity timer associated with the UE. The monitoring circuitry may be included in the P-GW, a WLAN gateway, the UE, and/or another component of the network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373612 | Performing Neighboring Cell Searches While Transitioning to Connected-Mode - Performing cell re-selection by a device. A first cell on which to camp may be selected. The device may camp on the first cell in an idle-mode. The device may be configured to perform searches for neighboring cells according to an idle-mode timeline while camping on the first cell. The device may transmit a connection request to the first cell in order to transition the device from the idle-mode to a connected-mode via the first cell. One or more searches for neighboring cells may be performed according to a connected-mode timeline after transmitting the connection request, in response to transmitting the connection request. The one or more searches may be performed before the device establishes the connected-mode with the first cell. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373724 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR INTERFERENCE VARIANCE ESTIMATION AND INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - An interference variance estimation method includes receiving a composite sample comprising a sample of a first OFDM transmission scheme interfered by out-of-band interference of a second OFDM transmission scheme; determining for each of the resource elements of the first transmission scheme a power estimate of the out-of-band interference; and filtering the power estimates over subcarriers corresponding to a same symbol, wherein weights of the filtering are based on a correlation property of the power estimates with respect to the subcarriers. An interference cancellation method includes: receiving the composite sample; determining a first estimate of the out-of-band interference with respect to non-data bearing subcarriers; determining a second estimate of the out-of-band interference with respect to data bearing subcarriers based on the first estimate; and cancelling the out-of-band interference based on the composite signal and the second estimate. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373728 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING ALMOST BLANK SUBFRAME AND HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICAITON NETWORK - An apparatus and a method for a wireless communication network. The apparatus includes circuitry configured for acquiring the first information associated with an indicator indicating communication quality of user terminals served by an interfering base station; acquiring second information associated with an indicator indicating interfered degree of user terminals interfered by the interfering base station; configuring, based on the first information and the second information, transmission of the interfering base station for inter-base station coordination. The technical solution improves the overall performance of the wireless communication heterogeneous network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373774 | End-to-End Delay Adaptation with Connected DRX in a Cellular Voice Call - End-to-end delay adaptation in conjunction with connected discontinuous reception (C-DRX) mode communication during cellular voice calls. A Voice over LTE (VoLTE) call may be established between a first wireless user equipment (UE) device and a second UE. End-to-end delay between real-time transport protocol (RTP) layers of the first UE and the second UE for the VoLTE call may be estimated. The end-to-end delay may be compared with one or more thresholds A C-DRX cycle length for the VoLTE call may be modified based on comparing the end-to-end delay with the one or more thresholds. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381291 | Tiered Approach to Radio Frequency (RF) Co-existence - Various embodiments implemented on a mobile communication device leverage the availability of a plurality of coexistence mitigation strategies to choose a coexistence mitigation strategy that may be most successful in avoiding and/or mitigating coexistence interference between an aggressor RAT and a victim RAT. In response to determining that a coexistence event between the aggressor RAT and the victim RAT is occurring or is about to occur, a processor on the mobile communication device may determine various priority criteria related to the mobile communication device's current circumstances (e.g., network resources, device resources, etc.) and/or related to each available coexistence mitigation strategy. Using these determined priority criteria, the device processor may select and implement a coexistence mitigation strategy that may be the most suitable for avoiding/mitigating coexistence interference between the aggressor RAT and the victim RAT given the current condition, circumstances, etc. of the mobile communication device. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381292 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UE MEASUREMENTS IN SUPPORT OF MIMO OTA - A method of processing the measurements of the user equipment (UE) antenna pattern for Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) Over-the-Air (OTA) testing consistent with the UE performing antenna pattern measurements using radiated test methods subsequent to conducted testing where the measured radiation pattern is then utilized. The method involves antenna pattern measurements which do not take into consideration the impact of radiated interference. For the MIMO OTA method it is necessary to estimate UE self-interference so that it can be accounted for during one phase of the throughput measurement process. A preferred method and a system in a packet switched data transfer system for antenna pattern measurements. A multiple Rx antenna UE is provided. A multiple Rx antenna UE includes a processor configured to promote antenna pattern measurements of a signal strength from a network component to the multiple Rx antenna UE. The signal strength of the advanced technology based network is measured when no user data is being transmitted. The invention deals with at least two different measurements: UE received power and relative phase measurements for multiple Rx antenna UEs. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381446 | Detecting and Measuring Network Route Reconvergence Using In-Band Data Probes - The present disclosure is directed to systems and methods for detecting and measuring network route reconvergence using in-band data probes. The probes are generated and inserted into the network. The probes are routed to an insertion point, corresponding to a beginning of a measurement line, via an in-band connection such as a virtual private network. The in-band connection is configured such that the time-to-live field of the probes is not affected by network path changes occurring in the in-band connection. The probes are routed through the measurement line to measure network route reconvergence. The measurement line is configured to affect the time-to-live field of the probes to reflect network path changes occurring along the measurement line. The probes are extracted from an extraction point corresponding to an end of the measurement line and routed back to the measurement device for analysis. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381448 | PHYSICAL LAYER MEASUREMENTS FOR MULTICAST OR BROADCAST SERVICES - User equipment measure a characteristic of a multicast signal or a broadcast signal at a physical layer of user equipment for a multicast broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN) area associated with the user equipment. The user equipment provide a value of the measured characteristic from the user equipment in response to the value indicating that a probability of an application layer decoding error exceeds a first threshold. The measured characteristic may be a block error rate (BLER) or a signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) for the multicast signal or the broadcast signal. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381450 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED QUALITY OF A VISUALIZED CALL OVER NETWORK THROUGH PATHWAY TESTING - Systems and methods for improving quality of a call over network (CON) are provided. Call quality may be improved via pathway testing to determine data path quality. This may be utilized to inform buffering lengths, and also may be utilized to choose the data pathway utilized for transmitting the data. Pathway testing may employ collecting microphone data on one device, transmitting it across the various pathways, and then comparing the quality at the endpoint compared to the initial data. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381455 | Multipath Data Stream Optimization - In one implementation, a source endpoint and a destination endpoint communicate using multipath. A data stream may be transmitted using a primary path. The source endpoint and the destination endpoint connect through an alternative path, but before portions of the data stream are transmitted using the alternative path, the alternative path is tested using one or more disposable packets. The source endpoint sends the disposable packet of the data stream using the alternative path to the destination path and receives a transmission parameter for the disposable packet of the data stream and the alternative path. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381458 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND VEHICLE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus that forms, in a train in which fixed formations are coupled, a backbone network relaying signals between branch networks formed in the fixed formations with another communication apparatus that is made redundant, includes: a VRRP functional unit that, when operating as a master, periodically transmits an alive monitoring frame to another communication apparatus operating as a backup via the branch network, and, when operating as a backup, receives an alive monitoring frame transmitted from another communication apparatus operating as a master via the branch network; a port-malfunction detection unit detecting malfunction of the port to which the branch network is connected; and an alive determination unit that, when operating as a backup, detects whether another communication apparatus operating as a master has malfunctioned based on an alive-monitoring-frame reception result from the VRRP functional unit and a malfunction detection result from the port-malfunction detection unit. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381462 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VIRTUALIZING SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK (SDN)-BASED NETWORK MONITORING - A system and method for virtualizing SDN-based network monitoring. The system for includes: an information collector, a monitoring component, an information converter, and a resource allocator, in which a user-defined virtual monitor is included so that integrated monitoring may be performed, and expandability may be guaranteed to dynamically respond to a user's, demands. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381463 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COEXISTENCE OF MBMS AND VoIP SERVICES - Systems and methods for coexistence of Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services (MBMS) and Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) services are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of operation of a network node in a cellular communications network is provided. The method includes determining a number of MBMS subframes for an MBMS allocation period. The method also includes, for each MBMS subframe of the number of MBMS subframes, assigning a frame number and a subframe number for the MBMS subframe such that a probability of a VoIP packet transmission during the MBMS subframe is mitigated. By mitigating the probability that a VoIP packet transmission occurs during a scheduled MBMS subframe, a VoIP user equipment (UE) may miss fewer packets and/or experience reduced battery drain. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381509 | PATH MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT DISCOVERY - An example method is provided for a source device to perform discovery of a path maximum transmission unit (PMTU) of a path between the source device and a destination device in a communications network. The method may comprise configuring and sending a request message to the destination device via an intermediate device on the path. The request message may be configured to have a size of an estimated PMTU of the path, to cause a reply message to be received from the destination device or at least one report message to be received from the intermediate device, and to include a flag that allows fragmentation of the request message. The method may further comprise receiving the reply message from the destination device or the at least one report message from the intermediate device responsive to the request message; and based on the reply message or the at least one report message, determining that fragmentation of the request message has occurred because the estimated PMTU is greater than an actual PMTU and updating the estimated PMTU. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382208 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING WIRELESS PROBE DEVICES - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, providing testing criteria to a probe device located at a venue enabling the probe device to perform testing of first communication services via a first wireless access technology utilizing a distributed antenna system of the venue and testing of second communication services via a second wireless access technology utilizing the distributed antenna system according to the testing criteria, and receiving performance data from a database server responsive to the data query, where the performance data is representative of test results generated from the testing of the first and second communication services by the probe device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382209 | METHOD OF ADAPTING OPERATION OF SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORK FUNCTIONS - A method of adapting operation of self-organizing network functions in a communication network comprising a big data level system and a self-organizing network system and at least one network element is provided, wherein the method comprises adapting the operation of at least one self-organizing network function by using knowledge achieved by analysis performed on the big data level. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382212 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING AND ADJUSTING MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION SERVICES AT A VENUE - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, initiating first and second groups of communication sessions according to testing criteria where the first group of communication sessions is established via a local area wireless access technology utilizing the distributed antenna system and the second group of communication sessions is established via the second radio access technology utilizing the distributed antenna system, and measuring performance data for the first and second groups of communication sessions according to the testing criteria. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382214 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RECEPTION MODE SWITCHING IN DUAL-CARRIER WIRELESS BACKHAUL NETWORKS - A system and method for reception mode switching in a dual-carrier fixed wireless backhaul network is disclosed. The primary carrier is a licensed band. The secondary carrier may be an unlicensed or shared carrier. Multi-mode Remote Backhaul Modules (RBMs) comprise a first RF chain with antenna elements for RX/TX on the primary carrier and a second RF chain with antenna elements for RX/TX on the secondary carrier. The Multi-mode RBMs adaptively switch from one reception mode to another with resource borrowing of RF and antenna elements, e.g. the secondary carrier RF chain and antenna elements can be borrowed for the primary carrier, for better reception capability for the primary carrier, reducing the number of link-budget and interference-challenged RBMs, and improving system performance. The system may comprise a dual carrier and single carrier MIMO system with variable antenna topology, having flexibility to switch dynamically between different operational modes depending on performance metrics. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382215 | END-TO-END NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS - A system and machine-implemented method of network diagnostics are provided. First condition information about a wireless local area network is obtained. Second condition information about an access network connecting the wireless local area network to a wide area network is obtained. Third condition information about the wide area network is obtained. Based on the first, second and third condition information, a condition report is provided to a diagnostic module configured to identify one or more network issues across the wireless local area network, the access network and the wide area network based on the condition report. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382216 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED PROTECTION MODES IN HIGH-EFFICIENCY WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for adjusting transmission power in wireless networks are provided. One aspect of the disclosure provides an apparatus for wireless communication. The apparatus includes a processing system configured to receive a message instructing each of multiple devices to transmit a packet at least partially concurrently with each transmission of the other multiple devices. The processing system is further configured to generate the packet. The packet includes an indicator having a value greater than a time associated with a transmission of the packet. An interface is configured to provide the packet for transmission. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382217 | RADIO FREQUENCY DATA COLLECTION - A network controller sends a request to a device for radio frequency (RF) environment data. The request is receive via a network interface of the device that includes at least one of a wired interface and a wireless interface. Responsive to the request, the device initiates a RF scan to collect the environment data. The collected RF environment data is transmitted to the network controller via the network interface. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382220 | MOBILE WIRELESS TERMINAL AND BUFFER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile wireless terminal includes a communication processor. The communication processor includes an internal memory, a CQI estimating unit, an RBG table creating unit, and a DMPX. A second buffer is arranged in the internal memory. The CQI estimating unit measures the quality of channels for each channel. The RBG table creating unit specifies the plurality of channels in descending order of quality of the channels within the range in which the sum of the amount of data received via the channels is equal to or less than the capacity of the second buffer. The DMPX stores, in the second buffer, data received via the plurality of channels specified by the RBG table creating unit. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382221 | DELIVERY OF MEASUREMENTS - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for measurement delivery. In some example embodiments, there is provided a method. The method may include receiving information to configure a user equipment to perform one or more measurements and to configure the user equipment to report, when requested by a network, the one or more measurements; receiving a request from the network to report the one or more measurements configured based on the received information; and reporting, in response to the request from the network, the one or more measurements to the network, without regard to measurement event reporting. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382222 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING DOWNLINK CHANNEL STATE - A method and apparatus for reporting a downlink channel state are disclosed. The method for reporting channel state information (CSI) to a base station (BS) by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system having frequency-selective inter-cell interference, includes: performing channel measurement in a frequency band configured for downlink channel measurement; and reporting downlink channel state information (CSI) in accordance with the downlink channel measurement, wherein the frequency band is independently configured for each information contained in the CSI, and thus the downlink channel measurement is performed in each information-specifically configured frequency band contained in the CSI. As a result, the method and apparatus can efficiently report downlink channel state information, such that a higher-quality communication environment is expected in a heterogeneous cell environment. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382223 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more specifically, to a method and device for reporting channel state information (CSI). The method by which a terminal in a wireless communication system reports CSI, according to one embodiment of the present invention, can comprise the steps of: receiving a reference signal from a base station; and reporting, to the base station, the CSI generated by using the reference signal. The CSI can include at least one first domain precoding matrix indicator (PMI) indicating a first precoding matrix for a first domain of a two-dimensional antenna structure and at least one second domain PMI indicating a second precoding matrix for a second domain of the two-dimensional antenna structure. A reporting period of the at least one first domain PMI can be shorter than a reporting period of the at least one second domain PMI. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382225 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for analyzing a wide frequency band with respect to signal power levels in specified narrow frequency bands, detecting narrow band signal power levels received in the specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level from the narrow band signal power levels, determining an adaptive threshold, tracking narrow band interferers according to the adaptive threshold and the average composite wideband power level, and transmitting a report descriptive of the narrow band interferers. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382226 | METHOD FOR REPORTING THE RESULTS OF SPECIFIC REFERENCE-CELL-BASED QUALITY MEASUREMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION, AND APPARATUS FOR THE METHOD - The present invention relates to a method in which a terminal reports the results of quality measurement based on a specific reference cell from among a plurality of serving cells for the terminal in a mobile communication system using carrier aggregation. The present invention also relates to a terminal apparatus for the method. For this purpose, the terminal receives measurement configuration information from a network, performs a quality measurement in accordance with the received measurement configuration information, determines whether or not a report criterion based on a specific reference cell from among the plurality of cells for the terminal is met in accordance with the measurement result, and, if the report criterion based on the specific reference cell is met, sends a report message, including the measurement results and an indicator that indicates the specific reference cell, to the network. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382312 | POWER HEADROOM REPORT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and user equipment (UE) for obtaining power headroom information in a communication system are provided. The method includes acquiring information for a path loss reference, wherein the information for the path loss reference indicates whether the UE applies as the path loss reference either a downlink of a primary cell or a downlink of a secondary cell (SCell), triggering a power headroom report (PHR) if a prohibitPHR-Timer expires and a path loss is changed more than a threshold for at least one activated cell which is used as the path loss reference, and obtaining power headroom information for each activated cell, if extended PHR is used and an uplink resource is allocated for new transmission. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382313 | POWER HEADROOM REPORT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A Power Headroom Report (PHR) method and apparatus in a communication system are provided. The method includes acquiring information for a path loss reference, wherein the information for the path loss reference indicates whether the UE applies as the path loss reference either a downlink of a primary cell or a downlink of a secondary cell (SCell), triggering a power headroom report (PHR) if a path loss is changed more than a threshold for at least one activated cell which is used as the path loss reference, and obtaining power headroom information for each activated cell, if extended PHR is used and an uplink resource is allocated for new transmission. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382375 | FULL DUPLEX OPERATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods, apparatus, and computer software are disclosed for communicating within a wireless communication network including a scheduling entity configured for full duplex communication, and user equipment (UE) configured for half duplex communication. In some examples, one or more UEs may be configured for limited (quasi-) full duplex communication. Some aspects relate to scheduling the UEs, including determining whether co-scheduling of the UEs to share a time-frequency resource is suitable based on one or more factors such as an inter-device path loss. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006523 | Method and Network Nodes for Calibrating Uplink Measurements - The present disclosure relates to a method ( | 01-07-2016 |
20160006549 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING DOWN LINK SIGNAL AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method for receiving downlink signal and an apparatus therefor are disclosed. A method for enabling a user equipment (UE) to receive a downlink signal from an eNB including a plurality of antenna ports in a wireless communication system includes: receiving a precoded reference signal according to a precoded reference signal configuration for the plurality of antenna ports; measuring receive (Rx) power of the reference signal for each of the plurality of antenna ports; and reporting, to the eNB, at least one of Rx power values of the reference signal, measured for the plurality of antenna ports. The reference signal is for serving cell search of the UE and precoding is applied to the plurality of antenna ports through which the reference signal is transmitted. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006553 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING DOWNLINK CHANNEL STATE - A method and apparatus for reporting a downlink channel state to a serving Base Station (BS) at a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system in which each of N (N is an integer equal to or larger than 2) BSs transmits one or more independent layers to the UE are disclosed. The method includes receiving configuration information about a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) process including CSI-RS resource i (i=0, . . . , N—1) and one channel state information interference measurement (CSI-IM) resource, the CSI-RS resource i being allocated to BS i from among the N BSs, performing channel measurement in CSI-RS resource i to measure downlink channel H | 01-07-2016 |
20160006622 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLOUD SERVICES FOR ENHANCING BROADBAND EXPERIENCE - Described is a method for controlling a broadband service, the method comprising: collecting user behavior, usage data, and physical layer data associated with the broadband service; analyzing the collected data to determine whether a different broadband service can be offered to a user compared to existing broadband service; and providing the user a targeted offer according to the analysis. Described is also a method for recommending a service profile, the method comprising: receiving broadband data from an agent, wherein the agent is executable on a computing device coupled to a LAN of a broadband subscriber; identifying a current service profile of the broadband subscriber; analyzing the received broadband data in view of the current service profile; determining a new service profile for the broadband subscriber according to the analyzed broadband data; and recommending the new service profile to the broadband subscriber and the broadband subscriber's service provider. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006634 | Network Performance Monitoring Method and Apparatus - Embodiments of the present application provide a network performance monitoring method and apparatus. The apparatus records a time (e.g. a first time) at which a first network device sends a first packet to a second network device, records a time (e.g. a second time) at which the first network device receives a response packet of the first packet, and determines a round-trip delay between the first and second network devices according to the first and second times; within a preset time, the apparatus collects statistics about a quantity (e.g. a first count) of first packets that are sent by the first network device to the second network device, and collects statistics about a quantity (e.g. a second count) of retransmitted packets in the first packets, and determines a packet loss rate from the first network device to the second network device according to the first and second counts. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006642 | NETWORK-WIDE SERVICE CONTROLLER - A network-wide service controller comprises a monitoring device, an intelligent device, and a management device. The monitoring device is configured to monitor a state of at least one network. The intelligent device is configured to determine a path within the at least one network according to the state of the at least one network. The intelligent device is further configured to receive an instruction from a user and convert the instruction into a lower-level instruction. The management device is configured to analyze the lower-level instruction from the intelligent device and control forwarding of packets according to a result of analysis of the lower-level instruction and the path determined by the intelligent device. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007219 | RADIO BASE STATION - A radio base station of the invention includes: a measurement unit | 01-07-2016 |
20160007222 | Methods and Apparatus for Measurement Configuration Support - The invention provides a method and a network node for controlling configuration of measurements to be performed by a user equipment ( | 01-07-2016 |
20160007226 | Wireless Network Load and Throughput Estimation - This disclosure relates to determining load and estimating throughput of wireless networks by a wireless device. According to some embodiments, the numbers of active downlink and uplink nodes in a wireless network may be determined. Channel utilization of the wireless network may also be determined. An uplink data rate and a downlink data rate of the wireless device in the wireless network may be estimated. Based on the numbers of active downlink and uplink nodes, channel utilization, and the uplink data rate and a downlink data rate of the wireless device, the maximum possible uplink throughput and downlink throughput of the wireless device in the wireless network may be estimated. Such throughput estimates may be used to select a wireless network to join from among multiple available wireless networks. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007350 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASUREMENT REPORTING IN AN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Embodiments described herein relate generally to a communication between a user equipment (UE) and an evolved Node B (eNB). A UE may signal, to an eNB, a capability of the UE to communicate in an unlicensed band. The UE may communicate one or more measurements to the eNB associated with the unlicensed band. Based on the one or more measurements, the eNB may activate and configure communication with the UE through the unlicensed band. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007363 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME - Provided are a method of allocating a resource in a wireless communication system and an apparatus using the method. The method includes: measuring a variation of a data usage pattern or density of user equipments located in a region for providing a service; determining whether the variation is greater than or equal to a threshold; and determining a resource allocation type of the region for providing the service on the basis of the determination result. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007402 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING TO PACKET DATA NETWORKS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Various embodiments of the present disclosure relate to a method and apparatus for connecting to multiple Packet Data Networks (PDNs) in a wireless communication system using a Carrier Aggregation (CA) technique. In the wireless communication system using the CA technique for aggregating multiple carriers into one carrier, the wireless communication system may ensure Quality of Service (QoS) of a subscriber by mapping multiple carriers and multiple PDNs on the basis of a dynamic CA carrier. Various embodiments are possible. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007406 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INITIAL ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for and apparatus for performing an initial access procedure in a wireless communication system is provided. A wireless device detects a discontinuous transmission (DTX) cell that operates in a discontinuous transmission (DTX) state by receiving a discovery signal from the DTX cell; transmits an initial request message to the DTX cell to request the DTX cell to transition from the DTX state to a continuous transmission (TX) state. | 01-07-2016 |
20160011296 | DETERMINING LOCATION OF A RECEIVER WITH A MULTI-SUBCARRIER SIGNAL | 01-14-2016 |
20160013842 | METHOD OF VARIABLE RATE SINGLE USER AND MULTI USER MIMO FEEDBACK FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160013851 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160013852 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160013874 | SELECTIVITY TEST | 01-14-2016 |
20160013951 | ADAPTIVE CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR WIRELESS SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160013982 | SYSTEM GUIDED SURROGATING CONTROL IN BROADCAST AND MULTICAST | 01-14-2016 |
20160013984 | Radio Resource Management Information Measurement Method and Apparatus, and Device | 01-14-2016 |
20160013987 | AGGREGATED NETWORK MODEL WITH COMPONENT NETWORK AGGREGATION | 01-14-2016 |
20160013995 | PERIODICITY DETECTION METHOD, PERIODICITY DETECTION DEVICE, AND PERIODICITY DETECTION PROGRAM | 01-14-2016 |
20160013997 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DISPLAYING STATUS OF WIRELESS NETWORK | 01-14-2016 |
20160014001 | DETAILED END-TO-END LATENCY TRACKING OF MESSAGES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014003 | Network Cost Analysis | 01-14-2016 |
20160014007 | SECURING INTERNET MEASUREMENTS USING OPENFLOW | 01-14-2016 |
20160014008 | EDGE ANALYTICS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014186 | DYNAMIC MANAGEMENT AND REDISTRIBUTION OF CONTACT CENTER MEDIA TRAFFIC | 01-14-2016 |
20160014187 | QUALITY-OF-EXPERIENCE MEASUREMENT FOR VOICE SERVICES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014269 | Method for Measuring Processing Delays of Voice-Over IP Devices | 01-14-2016 |
20160014614 | Optimized Distribution of Wireless Broadband in a Building | 01-14-2016 |
20160014617 | Wireless Communication Network Performance and Robustness Tuning and Optimization Using Deviations in Multiple Key Performance Indicators | 01-14-2016 |
20160014625 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DETERMINING A METRIC OF RADIO FREQUENCY CHANNEL QUALITY FOR IDLE CHANNELS IN LTE AND LTE ADVANCED NETWORKS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014626 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DATA TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160014630 | PROCESSING METHOD FOR MINIMIZATION OF DRIVE TESTS, NETWORK DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160014667 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CELLULAR NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CORRESPONDING TO A NON-CELLULAR NETWORK | 01-14-2016 |
20160014692 | METHOD OF REDUCING CONSUMPTION OF STANDBY CURRENT IN A MOBILE TERMINAL | 01-14-2016 |
20160014704 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALCULATING POWER HEADROOM IN CARRIER AGGREGATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160014705 | RELAY CONTROL STATION, REPEATER, AND INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSING METHOD | 01-14-2016 |
20160014778 | BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION METHOD AND APPARATUS, USER EQUIPMENT, AND BASE STATION | 01-14-2016 |
20160014779 | Coordinating Base Station Downlink Transmissions In Unlicensed Frequency Bands | 01-14-2016 |
20160014791 | Methods Radio Network Nodes and User Equipment for Alleviating Interference in a Radio Communication Network | 01-14-2016 |
20160020876 | LOW-FREQUENCY ASSISTED METHODS FOR BEAMFORMING, TIMING AND FREQUENCY OFFSET IN MM-WAVE ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for operating a user equipment (UE) are provided. The apparatus determines a first set of beamforming directions for communication with a base station (BS) in a first network, monitors for beams in a second set of beamforming directions for communication with a millimeter wave base station (mmW-BS) based on the determined first set of beamforming directions, where the second set of beamforming directions includes the first set of beamforming directions, and where the mmW-BS is in a second network having a higher carrier frequency than the first network, and establishes a communication link with the mmW-BS based on a beamforming direction in the second set of beamforming directions. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020952 | Selective Single-Ended Transmission for High Speed Serial Links - Embodiments of systems and methods for selective single-ended transmission for high speed serial links. In an embodiment, a method includes training a data link in a differential mode. The method may also include training the data link in a single-ended mode. Additionally, the method may include dynamically operating the data link in the single-ended mode or the differential mode according to a monitored performance characteristic of the data link. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020966 | DYNAMIC REMOTE PACKET CAPTURE - A device may be configured to receive information regarding one or more ports associated with a routing device; output, to the routing device, filter information associated with at least a particular port, of the one or more ports associated with the routing device, the filter information specifying one or more conditions associated with traffic of interest; receive, from the routing device, and based on the outputted filter information, information regarding traffic of interest received or sent by the routing device via the particular port, the traffic of interest being less than or equal to all traffic received or sent by the routing device via the particular port; and store or output a representation of at least a portion of the received information regarding the traffic of interest. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020967 | SYNCHRONIZED ROUTING UPDATES FOR TSCH NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a network node provides a time slotted channel hopping (TSCH) schedule to one or more child nodes of the network node. The TSCH schedule includes one or more mandatory routing protocol report time slots. The network node receives routing protocol reports from the one or more child nodes according to the TSCH schedule. The network node aggregates the received routing protocol reports into an aggregated routing protocol report. The network node provides the aggregated routing protocol report to a parent of the network node during a time slot that is subsequent to the one or more mandatory time slots for the one or more child nodes. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020968 | Method For Calculating Statistic Data of Traffic Flows in Data Network And Probe Thereof - The disclosure provides a probe and a method for calculating statistic data of traffic flows. The probe comprises at least one link processor (LP) and a correlation processor (CP). Each LP includes two buffers, receives packets from directional traffic flows, generates information of bi-directional traffic flows based on the received packets, stores the generated information in one buffer within a reporting period and, reports the stored information to CP when the reporting period boundary is reached. The information of each bi-directional traffic flow includes the relevant identification information and statistic data. The CP calculates statistic data of a particular group of traffic flows with a predetermined characteristic based on the reported information, and the other buffer stores information of bi-directional traffic flows to be generated within a next reporting period and the stored information is to be reported to the correlation processor when the next reporting period boundary is reached. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020969 | Mitigating Reflection-Based Network Attacks - In one embodiment, a network device routes traffic along a network path and receives a performance threshold crossing alert regarding performance of the network path. The network device detects that the performance threshold crossing alert is part of a potential network attack by analyzing, by the device, the performance threshold crossing alert. The network device also provides a notification of the detected network attack. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020973 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COLLECTING AND ANALYZING DATA TO DETERMINE LINK QUALITY AND STABILITY IN LAYER TWO NETWORKS - A method and network element include receiving, at a receiver node, at least one of sender timestamps and sequence numbers in continuity check (CC) frames sent by a sender node; determining receiver timestamps at the receiver node; detecting instability based on one or more of the at least one of sender timestamps and sequence numbers and the receiver timestamps; and performing a remedial action based on the detecting instability. The CC frames can include Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) or Continuity Check Message (CCM) frames which are regularly transmitted in a session, but do not currently include timestamps or sequence numbers. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020978 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING ENCODED SIGNALS IN A NETWORK - Various aspects provide for non-intrusively monitoring a network system. A multiplexing component is configured to receive a plurality of first encoded signals and generate a plurality of second encoded signals. The plurality of second encoded signals contain a different data rate and a different number of network lanes than the plurality of first encoded signals. A monitoring component is configured to identify a block location for repeating blocks and an alignment marker in each of the plurality of first encoded signals and/or the plurality of second encoded signals. The monitoring component can also be configured to identify one or more defects, identify error information and/or determine one or more skew values associated with the plurality of first encoded signals and/or the plurality of second encoded signals. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020979 | LEAPFROG COMMUNICATIONS IN A TSCH NETWORK - In one embodiment, a network node monitors communications between a sender node and an intermediary receiver node during a set of time slots of a channel hopping schedule. The sender node, intermediary receiver node, and a final destination node for the communications may all be located along a primary communication path in the network. The network node stores a copy of one of the communications sent from the sender node to the intermediary receiver node during a particular time slot in the set of time slots. The network node forwards the copy of the communication to a listener node configured to monitor communications between the intermediary receiver node and another node located along the primary communication path. The intermediary receiver node is also configured to monitor communications between the network node and the listener node. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020980 | MEASURING DELAY - Delay in the allocation of resources can be measured for a set of sequential requests for the resources. A start time for the receipt of the first request of the set can be recorded, followed by the incrementing of a request start time counter, with the current time minus the recorded start time, for each subsequently received request. A total time counter can be incremented, with the current time minus recorded start time, for each request allocation, and a request counter can be incremented for each request allocation. When determining that all received requests have been allocated, and decrementing the total time counter by the request start time counter, it is possible to determine an average delay time from the total time counter value divided by the request counter value. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020983 | Load Estimation in 3GPP Networks - Loading estimation of 3GPP networks. One or more metrics relating to a cell of a 3GPP network may be measured. Loading of the cell may be estimated based on the one or more metrics. The metrics may include metrics measured, estimated, or derived at multiple layers, possibly including one or more of physical layer, radio link control layer, radio resource control layer, or application layer metrics. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020985 | TIMESTAMP PREDICTOR FOR PACKETS OVER A SYNCHRONOUS PROTOCOL - A physical layer communication device (PHY) transmits and receives signal to and from a communication link using a synchronous protocol. The PHY communicates with a higher-layer device using a packet protocol. Timestamp values contained in timing-related messages in some packets are written or modified by the PHY. Delays incurred in transmitting and receiving the packets are predicted and used in setting the timestamp values. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020987 | DETERMINISTIC CONTROL LOOP SCHEDULING - In one embodiment, a scheduling device in a network receives routing metrics regarding a network path between a device controller and a networked device. The scheduling device also receives controller metrics for the device controller. The scheduling device determines time costs associated with the network path and one or more control operations performed by the device controller, based on the routing and controller metrics. The scheduling device generates a communication schedule based on the time costs and instructs the device controller and the networked device to use the communication schedule. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020996 | INFORMATION TRANSFER DEVICE, DELAY TOLERANT NETWORK, INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A delay tolerant network is built with the use of a plurality of information transfer devices each of which includes: a communication unit to communicate to and from another device within a communication range that is connected to the information transfer device; and a storing unit to store and keeps collected notification information, and each of which holds delay tolerant communication by exchanging the collected and kept notification information with another device when the exchange becomes possible. Each information transfer device includes a control unit to exchange environment information with another information transfer device, and to execute deriving processing an assigned range that is assigned autonomously to its own information transfer device, based on the environment information that is kept by its own information transfer device, through a planarization search processing in which a value is evened out between its own information transfer device and other information transfer devices. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021490 | PROXIMITY AND TAP DETECTION USING A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A method for detecting the proximity of a signal source using wireless systems is contemplated in which a wireless mobile device wirelessly receives packets from a signal source and determines a received signal strength for each packet. The wireless mobile device may store information based upon the received signal strength for each packet, and calculate from the information stored for all the packets, a current path loss value corresponding to a current distance from the wireless mobile device to the signal source. The wireless mobile device may then determine whether the current distance is sufficient to be an enabling condition such as tap, for example, for a data transfer or a transaction between the wireless mobile device and the signal source. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021553 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELATING TO QUALITY OF SERVICE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for adapting quality of service to dynamics of a wireless telecommunications network is provided. The method includes collecting data relating to operation of an element in the network, wherein the collected data comprises radio-frequency (RF) data relating to operation of the network. The method also includes pre-calculating, from the collected data, a dynamic operational characteristic of the network, wherein the pre-calculating includes pre-calculating from the collected data to obtain a geometrical determination based on a geographical location of a wireless communications device within the network. The method further includes making available the pre-calculated characteristic of the network to an application of the device using the network, including storing the characteristic at a pre-calculation server accessible by the device so the device can selectively retrieve the characteristic, and updating the characteristic at a frequency based on a trigger related to volatility of the RF data being collected. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021555 | METHOD OF DIAGNOSIS OF DEGRADATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK USING A NEIGHBOUR NETWORK - Method of diagnosis of a heterogeneous network degradation, said heterogeneous network connecting a user terminal and a server through a plurality of links each of said links having a given direction, and comprising at least one home network, one access network and one neighboring network, wherein said method comprises using the neighboring network to determine at least one link of the heterogeneous network in which the degradation occurs and the direction of said link. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021608 | UTILIZING CLIENT MOBILE DEVICES FOR WIRELESS NETWORK MONITORING - Example embodiments disclosed herein relate to utilizing client mobile devices for wireless network monitoring. Link quality data for wireless networks are measured by a plurality of wireless client devices and are provided to a network controller. The link quality data is usable to manage a wireless local area network (WLAN). The wireless networks include at least the WLAN and a cellular network. A recommendation for connection is provided to the wireless client devices, where the recommendation indicates if the cellular network is recommended or an access point of the WLAN. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021619 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION POWER IN WLAN SYSTEM - A transmit power control method of a first station in a wireless LAN (WLAN) system includes: receiving path loss information from an (access point) AP, the path loss information containing a maximum value among path losses between the AP and at least one or more stations included in the WLAN system; controlling a transmit power by using the path loss information; and transmitting a frame according to the controlled transmit power. In said controlling the transmit power by using the path loss information, the transmit power is controlled by using a path loss obtained by adding the maximum value and a path loss between the first station and the AP or by using the path loss between the first station and the AP. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021657 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR UES UNDER COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication within and for user equipment (UE), including lower-complexity devices, which may have intermittent communication needs, low data rates, hard-to-reach locations, and the like. Devices within a wireless communication system may utilize transmission time interval (TTI) bundling to identify and employ various encoding schemes according to particular channel, transmission, and/or environmental conditions. Devices may also monitor and/or decode control-based transmission, control-less transmission, or both. In some examples, devices may monitor various channels based on a TTI bundling length. Some or any of these techniques may allow for coverage enhancement of UEs, including low-complexity UEs. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021658 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR UES UNDER COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication within and for user equipment (UE), including lower-complexity devices, which may have intermittent communication needs, low data rates, hard-to-reach locations, and the like. Devices within a wireless communication system may utilize transmission time interval (TTI) bundling to identify and employ various encoding schemes according to particular channel, transmission, and/or environmental conditions. Devices may also monitor and/or decode control-based transmission, control-less transmission, or both. In some examples, devices may monitor various channels based on a TTI bundling length. Some or any of these techniques may allow for coverage enhancement of UEs, including low-complexity UEs. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021668 | DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, DISTRIBUTION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND DATA DISTRIBUTION METHOD - A data distribution server and terminals measure a communication status with other devices. Based on measurement results of the communication status, the data distribution server categorizes the terminals as “trunk” or “branch”, notifies the terminals of categorization results, notifies the terminals of selection of a relay path through which data can be distributed to all relay terminals by relaying the data between “trunks”, and instructs a “trunk” terminal to relay the data through the relay path. When notified that the terminal itself is a “trunk”, each of the terminals relays the data based on an instruction from the data distribution server. When notified by the data distribution server that the terminal itself is a “branch”, each of the terminals receives the data distributed from the data distribution server or the “trunk”. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021675 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DEVICE USED FOR THE SAME - A semiconductor integrated circuit for a radio communication terminal sequentially uses a plurality of frequency channels by instructions from a hopping frequency decision unit to receive packet data by a reception unit. When the integrated circuit cannot detect the head of the packet data in reception operations, the integrated circuit cannot receive packet data should be received originally then assumes that the received packet data is a packet error. And the integrated circuit calculates packet error rates for each frequency channel on the basis of the number of times of reception operations performed for each frequency channel and of the number of times of packet errors to estimate channel qualities by using the packet error rates. | 01-21-2016 |
20160028499 | APPARATUS AND METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method in a radio communications system. The apparatus in the radio communications system includes an estimation unit and a statistics collection unit. The estimation unit is used for estimating a signal receiving strength of each of multiple transmission positions, compared with a signal transmission strength of each of one or more possible transmission positions of a first-type node of a to-be-test communications system on a transmission resource block. The statistics collection unit is used for collecting, according the estimation result, statistics on power space distribution of the first-type node of the to-be-tested communications system. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028558 | INTERFERENCE ESTIMATION FOR LTE RECEIVER - A method of estimating interference in a received signal is disclosed. The method includes receiving a plurality of subcarriers from a remote transmitter. Each of the subcarriers is multiplied by a control signal. At least two of the subcarriers are compared to produce a differential signal. Interference is estimated in response to the differential signal. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028597 | REAL-TIME ADAPTIVE PROCESSING OF NETWORK DATA PACKETS FOR ANALYSIS - A network monitoring system that summarizes a plurality of data packets of a session into a compact session record for storage and processing. Each session record may be produced in real-time and made available during the session and/or after the termination of the session. Depending on protocols, a network monitoring system extracts different sets of information, removes redundant information from the plurality of data packets, and adds performance information to produce the session record. The network monitoring system may retrieve and process a single session record or multiple session records for the same or different protocols to determine cause of events, resolve issues in a network or evaluate network performance or conditions. The session record enables analysis in the units of session instead of individual packets. Hence, the network monitoring system can analyze events, issues or performance of the network more efficiently and effectively. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028599 | SCHEDULING PREDICTIVE MODELS FOR MACHINE LEARNING SYSTEMS - In one embodiment, a device in a network monitors performance data for a first predictive model. The first predictive model is used to make proactive decisions in the network. The device maintains a supervisory model based on the monitored performance data for the first predictive model. The device identifies a time period during which the supervisory model predicts that the first predictive model will perform poorly. The device causes a switchover from the first predictive model to a second predictive model at a point in time associated with the time period, in response to identifying the time period. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028603 | DATA PATH PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT USING TEST MESSAGES IN A SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK - A method in a network controller of a control plane in a software defined network (SDN) coupled to a plurality of network elements (NEs) of a data plane in the SDN is described. The method includes at least sending a first control message to an ingress NE of the plurality of NEs to initiate a first test session; sending a second control message to an egress NE of the plurality of NEs to initiate a second test session; sending the test message to the ingress NE to cause the ingress NE to transmit the outgoing message from the ingress NE; receiving the first reply message from the ingress NE; receiving the second reply message from the egress NE; and calculating an indication of a delay between the ingress NE and the egress NE. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028604 | DATA PATH PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT USING NETWORK TRAFFIC IN A SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK - A method in a network controller of a control plane in a software defined network (SDN) coupled to a plurality of network elements (NEs) of a data plane in the SDN is described. The method includes sending a first control message having content including a first set of one or more classification rules to an ingress NE of the plurality of NEs; sending a second control message having content including a second set of one or more classification rules to an egress NE of the plurality of NEs; receiving the second notification message from the egress NE responsive to the selected data packet having been received by the ingress NE from an upstream NE and forwarded through the SDN from the ingress NE toward the egress NE; and calculating an indication of a delay of the selected data packet between the ingress NE and the egress NE. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028608 | SELECTIVE AND DYNAMIC APPLICATION-CENTRIC NETWORK MEASUREMENT INFRASTRUCTURE - In one embodiment, a device in a network receives data indicative of traffic characteristics of traffic associated with a particular application. The device identifies one or more paths in the network via which the traffic associated with the particular application was sent, based on the traffic characteristics. The device determines a probing schedule based on the traffic characteristics. The probing schedule simulates the traffic associated with the particular application. The device sends probes along the one or more identified paths according to the determined probing schedule. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028881 | MONITORING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) QUALITY DURING AN ONGOING CALL - A method for calculating a mean opinion score (MOS) during an ongoing Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call is provided. The method may include determining a time delay between a VoIP source and a VoIP destination connected by a communications network. A start recording message is sent from the VoIP source to the VoIP destination. A first recorded call sample from the VoIP source and a second recorded call sample from the VoIP destination are generated, whereby the first and the second recorded call sample are generated with a recording delay value corresponding the determined time delay for synchronizing the first and the second recorded call sample. Using an intrusive call quality measurement, a first MOS value is calculated based on the first and the second recorded call sample. Using a non-intrusive call quality measurement, a second MOS value is calculated based on the first MOS value. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028882 | MONITORING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) QUALITY DURING AN ONGOING CALL - A method for calculating a mean opinion score (MOS) during an ongoing Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call is provided. The method may include determining a time delay between a VoIP source and a VoIP destination connected by a communications network. A start recording message is sent from the VoIP source to the VoIP destination. A first recorded call sample from the VoIP source and a second recorded call sample from the VoIP destination are generated, whereby the first and the second recorded call sample are generated with a recording delay value corresponding the determined time delay for synchronizing the first and the second recorded call sample. Using an intrusive call quality measurement, a first MOS value is calculated based on the first and the second recorded call sample. Using a non-intrusive call quality measurement, a second MOS value is calculated based on the first MOS value. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029230 | METHODS, TEST SYSTEMS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR VERIFYING COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENT SPECIFICATIONS - Systems and methods for verifying compliance of a communication device with one or more requirement specifications is provided. In one exemplary embodiment, a method may be performed at a communication device for verifying compliance of the communication device with a requirement specification. Further, while a test loop is activated in the communication device, the method may include receiving, at a receiver of the communication device and on a downlink of a radio link, downlink data. In response to determining an occurrence of an event specific to verifying the compliance of the communication device with the requirement specification and used to control when the communication device transfers the received downlink data from the receiver to a transmitter of the communication device, the method may include transferring, from the receiver, to the transmitter, the received downlink data. Also, the method may include transmitting, from the transmitter on an uplink of the radio link, the received downlink data. The received downlink data transmitted on the uplink may be used to verify the compliance. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029231 | METHODS OF CONTROLLING SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION OF A RADIO NODE IN A TDD SYSTEM - According to some embodiments, a method comprises determining a first uplink-downlink, UL-DL, configuration used in a first cell, determining a second uplink-downlink, UL-DL, configuration used in a second cell, and determining that the first UL-DL configuration and the second UL-DL configuration are different during an at least partly overlapping time period. The method comprises adapting at least one of a measurement configuration for performing a measurement in at least one of the first cell and the second cell, scheduling transmission of signals at the radio node in at least one of the first cell and the second cell, and scheduling reception of signals at the radio node in at least one of the first cell and the second cell. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029232 | ULTRA RELIABLE LINK DESIGN - Techniques are described for wireless communication. A first method includes measuring, by a first device, a condition of a wireless channel; and generating at least one channel side information feedback message based on the measured condition of the wireless channel. The at least one channel side information feedback message provides information on a relationship of a set of parameters, including a data rate parameter, an error probability parameter, and at least one of a deadline parameter or a transmission link parameter. A second method includes measuring, by a first device, interference on a wireless channel; identifying an interfering device for the wireless channel based on the measurement; and generating a channel side information feedback message based on the measured interference on the wireless channel. The channel side information feedback message indicates the interfering device for the wireless channel and a correlation of interference from the interfering device with time or frequency. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029233 | Evaluation of Throughput of Aggregated Connections - There are provided measures for evaluation of throughput of carrier aggregated user equipments. Such measures exemplarily include determining, per communication endpoint implementing carrier aggregation aggregating one primary connection and at least one secondary connection, a transmission volume with at least one activated secondary connection, determining, per communication endpoint implementing carrier aggregation aggregating one primary connection and at least one secondary connection, a time with transmission data in a transmission buffer and at least one activated secondary connection, and obtaining, per communication endpoint, a transmission throughput with at least one activated secondary connection, based on said transmission volume and said time. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029234 | RADIO LINK MONITORING FOR EPDCCH - Generally discussed herein are systems and methods that include Radio Link Monitoring (RLM) on an Enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel (EPDCCH) transmission within a Heterogeneous Network (HetNet). RLM can be done without regard to a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) quality level. A User Equipment (UE) can be configured to receive the EPDCCH transmission from an Enhanced Node B (eNodeB). A quality level of the EPDCCH transmission can be estimated based upon a BLock Error Rate (BLER) of the EPDCCH transmission. If the quality level is lower than a first threshold value for a first specified number of consecutive periods, a timer can be started. In response to determining the quality level is greater than a second threshold for a second specified number of consecutive periods stop the timer before the timer expires. If the timer is stopped before the timer expires, declare a Radio Link Failure (RLF). | 01-28-2016 |
20160029235 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING AND TRANSMITTING POWER HEADROOM REPORT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a communication method and system enabling convergence of 5G communication and IoT technology to achieve higher data rates for beyond 4G communication systems. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029236 | BASE STATION - The present invention aims to perform sensing of a frequency with high accuracy by securing a sufficient amount of time to measure a reception level of a guard time while avoiding a decrease in transmission rate as much as possible even when the distance between a terminal and a base station is short. To this end, a base station is disclosed which is configured to set a guard time based on the measured reception level of a UL signal during a period other than a period when it is time to measure an interference amount. Meanwhile, the base station sets a guard time so as to secure a predetermined length required for measurement of a reception level when it is time to measure the interference amount. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029237 | ULTRA RELIABLE LINK DESIGN - Techniques are described for wireless communication. A first method includes measuring, by a first device, a condition of a wireless channel; and generating at least one channel side information feedback message based on the measured condition of the wireless channel. The at least one channel side information feedback message provides information on a relationship of a set of parameters, including a data rate parameter, an error probability parameter, and at least one of a deadline parameter or a transmission link parameter. A second method includes measuring, by a first device, interference on a wireless channel; identifying an interfering device for the wireless channel based on the measurement; and generating a channel side information feedback message based on the measured interference on the wireless channel. The channel side information feedback message indicates the interfering device for the wireless channel and a correlation of interference from the interfering device with time or frequency. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029238 | Method and Device for Determining Indication Signalling of Pilot Signal for Channel Measurement and Method and Device for Feeding Back CSI - Provided are a method and device for determining indication signalling of a pilot signal for channel measurement, and method and device for feeding back CSI. The method for determining indication signalling of pilot signal for channel measurement includes: a NodeB sends DL control signalling, which includes transmission resource configuration information of a non-periodic CSI-RS, to a terminal, wherein the transmission resource configuration information of the non-periodic CSI-RS is used for determining a location of the non-periodic CSI-RS, and the non-periodic CSI-RS is used for instructing the terminal to perform channel measurement. The non-periodic CSI-RS is determined according to the transmission resource configuration information of the non-periodic CSI-RS, and channel measurement is further performed according to the non-periodic CSI-RS, so that the problems of higher overhead and resource waste caused by periodical sending of a CSI-RS in the related art may be solved, resources are saved, and sending overhead is reduced. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029239 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER BASED ON ACCUMULATED TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL COMMANDS AND CORRESPONDING UPLINK SUBFRAME SETS - A method and apparatus are described for controlling uplink (UL) transmission power. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may receive a configuration of UL subframe sets and maintain a plurality of transmit power control (TPC) command accumulator values that correspond to respective ones of the UL subframe sets. The WTRU may receive a TPC command in a subframe n of a downlink (DL) transmission, determine a subframe n+k of a UL transmission that the received TPC command corresponds to, determine which of the UL subframe sets the UL transmission subframe n+k belongs to, and adjust a TPC command accumulator value that corresponds to the determined UL subframe set to determine power of the UL transmission when transmitting in the UL transmission subframe, where n is an integer, and k is an integer greater than zero. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029314 | Methods and Apparatus for Power Saving in Discontinuous Reception-Adaptive Neighbor Cell Search Duration - Methods and apparatus for adaptively adjusting temporal parameters (e.g., neighbor cell search durations). In one embodiment, neighbor cell search durations during discontinuous reception are based on a physical channel metric indicating signal strength and quality (e.g. Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP), Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI), Reference Signal Receive Quality (RSRQ), etc.) of a cell. In a second embodiment, neighbor cell search durations are based on a multitude of physical layer metrics from one or more cells. In one variant, the multitude of physical layer metrics may include signal strength and quality metrics from the serving base station as well as signal strength and quality indicators from neighbor cells derived from the cells respective synchronization sequences. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029394 | ULTRA RELIABLE LINK DESIGN - Techniques are described for wireless communication. A first method includes measuring, by a first device, a condition of a wireless channel; and generating at least one channel side information feedback message based on the measured condition of the wireless channel. The at least one channel side information feedback message provides information on a relationship of a set of parameters, including a data rate parameter, an error probability parameter, and at least one of a deadline parameter or a transmission link parameter. A second method includes measuring, by a first device, interference on a wireless channel; identifying an interfering device for the wireless channel based on the measurement; and generating a channel side information feedback message based on the measured interference on the wireless channel. The channel side information feedback message indicates the interfering device for the wireless channel and a correlation of interference from the interfering device with time or frequency. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029431 | METHOD OF DETERMINING EXPIRATION PERIOD OF TIMER, NETWORK NODE, BASE STATION, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A network node ( | 01-28-2016 |
20160033617 | System and Methods for Location Determination in MIMO Wireless Networks - Disclosed herein, one embodiment of the disclosure is directed to a system, apparatus, and method for location estimation in the presence of multipath/non-line-of-sight (NLOS) conditions. Various methods have been contemplated to detect the level of multipath/NLOS propagation between two devices. A SNR variation method determines how the SNR of each chain/stream is varying over a time window in order to detect the chain/stream with least local scattering or multipath. A measure of coherence SNR is defined to measure the level of multipath/N LOS per-chain/stream. Moreover, since per-subcarrier SNR information is available at the one or both nodes, the coherence methods can be used on a per-subcarrier basis to detect multipath/NLOS for the entire channel, for the specific spatial stream or for the specific frequencies occupied by the subcarriers. Furthermore, a coherence bandwidth estimation method uses the SNR variation over subcarriers to detect the coherence bandwidth of the spatial stream. The amount of multipath/NLOS is inversely proportional to the coherence bandwidth. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036511 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more specifically, to a method and device for reporting channel state information (CSI). The method by which a terminal in a wireless communication system reports CSI, according to one embodiment of the present invention, can comprise the steps for: receiving a reference signal from a base station; and reporting, to the base station, the CSI generated by using the reference signal. When the CSI for a two-dimensional antenna structure defined by a first domain and a second domain includes a channel quality indicator (CQI) for the two-dimensional antenna structure without including a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the two-dimensional antenna structure, the CQI can be calculated on the basis of the tilting in the second domain. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036540 | NETWORK, AND NETWORK ESTABLISHING METHOD AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a network establishing method. The method includes: acquiring a first comparison result obtained by comparing a comprehensive performance value of a first device with a comprehensive performance value of a second device, where the performance value of the first device respectively indicate one or more aspects of a data exchange capability of the first device, and the performance value of the second device respectively indicate one or more aspects of a data exchange capability of the second device; and setting the first device as a group server or a group client of a primary network according to the first comparison result, where the primary network includes the first device and the second device. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036543 | Method and Apparatus for Measuring Interference in a Telecommunications System - A receiving unit or a transmitting unit of a wireless network, for facilitating noise and interference measurements on an air interface. The receiving unit includes: a network interface which obtains information relating to a time-varying layout of a silent resource element (RE) grid; an electronic memory having code in communication with the network interface which stores the information; and a processing unit in communication with the electronic memory that takes a presence of a silent RE grid into account in the reception of a control or a data channel. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036545 | Measuring device and measuring method for start time synchronized signal generation - A measuring system comprises a timing unit and at least two signal generators. The signal generators are each configured to generate a measuring signal and to supply it to a device under test. The timing unit is configured to generate start time signals, which each indicate an allowed start time of the measuring signals. Said signal generators are configured to only start generating the measuring signals at least instances of start time signals. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036660 | Dynamic Audio/Video Channel Bonding - A data communication architecture delivers a wide variety of content, including audio and video content, to consumers. The architecture employs channel bonding to deliver more bandwidth than any single communication channel can carry. In some implementations, the communication architecture communicates content according to an initial bonding configuration. The communication architecture may adjust the bonding configuration to adapt to bonding environment changes affecting the communication capabilities or requirements associated with transmitting the content. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036672 | TESTING BY SIMULATION USING VARIATIONS OF REAL-TIME TRAFFIC - A system with at least one device including a hardware processor, performs the steps of receiving, by the system, a packet from a second system to be transmitted to a third system, forwarding, by the system to the third system, the packet received from the second system; modifying a portion of the packet to obtain a modified packet that falsely identifies a fourth system as a source of the modified packet, and transmitting, by the system to the third system, the modified packet identifying the fourth system as the source of the modified packet. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036673 | METHOD AND NETWORK ENTITY FOR EVALUATING A LINK BETWEEN A FIRST NETWORK NODE AND A SECOND NETWORK NODE - A method and a network entity for evaluating a link between a first and a second network node are disclosed. The link is configured to carry data packets between the network nodes via a third network node. The link comprises a first segment and a second segment. The network entity obtains an indication of a measurement tool to be used in a measurement session for evaluation of the link. The network entity selects a mathematical model based on the indication. The network entity generates measurement values by executing the measurement session. The network entity determines a first and a second value relating to lost data packets of the first and second segments, respectively, based on the measurement values and the selected mathematical model. The network entity identifies at least one of the first and second segments based the first and second values. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036674 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSYEM, CONTROL METHOD OF THE SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNITATION BASE STATION - A wireless communication terminal ( | 02-04-2016 |
20160036684 | Method And Apparatus To Provide Both High Speed And Low Speed Signaling From The High Speed Transceivers On An Field Programmable Gate Array - A programmable logic device, such as a field programmable gate array (FPGA), is disclosed that allows for both high speed and low speed signal processing using the existing high speed transceiver. The programmable logic of the device may be programmed to include a sampling logic block that determines the low speed bit patterns from a device under test (DUT). The logic may further include a bit replication logic block that replicates bits such that the output of the device's high speed transceiver looks like a low speed signal to the DUT. The device, therefore, can communicate with the DUT at both the high and low speeds without the need for intermediate hardware. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037362 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING RADIO RESOURCE USE PER TRAFFIC CLASS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for measuring a use of radio resources in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes allocating radio resources to a plurality of transport blocks, and, if at least one transport block among the plurality of transport blocks overlaps at least one other transport block in terms of the radio resources, a use of the radio resources is measured by calculating a sum of a value determined by dividing the number of radio resources allocated to each of the plurality of transport blocks by the number of radio resources which are used by the at least one other transport block in a duplicate manner. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037363 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN A BURSTY-INTERFERENCE ENVIRONMENT - A method of interference management for a wireless device in a wireless communication system may comprise, for example, receiving, at a first wireless device from a second wireless device of the wireless communication system, channel measurement statistics associated with a communication channel of the wireless communication system, comparing the channel measurement statistics to a corresponding bursty interference signature characteristic of bursty interference, identifying a bursty interference condition on the communication channel based on the comparison, and generating a bursty interference indicator based on the identification of the bursty interference condition. Other methods of interference management for a wireless device in a wireless communication system are also disclosed. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037364 | BURSTY-INTERFERENCE-AWARE INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - A method of interference management for a wireless device in a wireless communication system may comprise monitoring a packet error metric associated with transmissions over a communication channel of the wireless communication system, modifying a packet size attribute associated with MPDUs processed at the wireless device, identifying a bursty interference condition on the communication channel based on a change in the packet error metric in response to the modified packet size attribute, and generating a bursty interference indicator based on the identification of the bursty interference condition. Another method may comprise receiving a bursty interference indicator identifying a bursty interference condition on a communication channel of the wireless communication system, adjusting a packet size attribute associated with MPDUs processed at the wireless device based on the bursty interference indicator, and transmitting one or more MPDUs over the communication channel according to the adjusted packet size attribute. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037365 | ADAPTIVE PACKET PREAMBLE ADJUSTMENT - In some examples, an apparatus may be usable in a first network and configurable to operate within a proximity of a second network that communicates traffic that interferes with data communication in the first network. The apparatus may include a calculation module configured to calculate a packet loss rate. The apparatus may include a determination module coupled to the calculation module and configured to determine whether the packet loss rate exceeds a particular threshold level. The apparatus may include a preamble module coupled to the determination module and configured to dynamically adjust a number of protective bytes included in a packet preamble in response to a determination by the determination module that the packet loss rate exceeds the particular threshold level. The protective bytes may be effective to reduce packet corruption due to turnaround time collisions between packets communicated in the first network and traffic communicated in the second network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037366 | DETECTION AND REPORTING OF NETWORK IMPAIRMENTS - Systems, methods, and computer-readable media are disclosed for providing terminal devices configured to collect network performance data, communicate the network performance data to one or more neighboring devices, and analyze the collected performance data and/or the received network performance data to identify anomalous data. The anomalous data may be communicated to a network management system which may, in turn, analyze the anomalous data to identify one or more network impairments. Additionally, or alternatively, a terminal device may be configured to identify a network impairment by correlating anomalous collected data to data received from neighboring terminal devices. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037368 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR ONLINE TROUBLESHOOTING FOR MBMS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication device includes a communication interfacing unit and a processor. The processor operable to perform operations includes controlling the communication interfacing unit to transmit a first signal to a network controller according to a user-inputted command; logging first MBSFN measurement results in a first period; and controlling the communication interfacing unit to transmit the logged first MBSFN measurement results to the network controller, so that the network controller adjusts at least one parameter of a network corresponding to a MBSFN transmission of a MBMS signal according to the logged first MBSFN measurement results. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037369 | Multi-Carrier CQI Feedback Method and Apparatus - A radio base station transmits data symbols to a mobile terminal on multiple frequency carriers, e.g., in accordance with the MC-WCDMA or cdma2000 3x air interface protocols. The radio base station instructs the mobile terminal to report channel quality measurements obtained by the terminal for the multiple carriers over the same uplink channel during successive reporting intervals. According to one embodiment, the mobile terminal reports channel quality by receiving data symbols transmitted on a plurality of frequency carriers in a multi-carrier CDMA environment and measuring channel quality for the different frequency carriers. The mobile terminal reports individual ones of the channel quality measurements over the same uplink channel during successive reporting intervals. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037370 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING RADIO PARAMETER, NETWORK OPERATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, AND RADIO STATION - A method and a radio parameter control system, as well as a network operation management apparatus and a radio station, are provided that enable optimization control for problems varying with sites of occurrence. Using location information at the time of measurement included in a measurement report from a radio terminal ( | 02-04-2016 |
20160037372 | Method and a device for determining an estimated value for a noise power - A device for determining an estimated value for a mean power of the noise-signal sequence, which is superposed on an undisturbed periodic transmitted-signal sequence, determines a mean power of a received-signal sequence, which corresponds to the undisturbed periodic transmitted-signal sequence with the addition of the superposed noise-signal sequence. It then estimates an estimated-signal sequence for the undisturbed periodic transmitted-signal sequence from the received-signal sequence. Following this, a mean power of the estimated-signal sequence and the estimated value of the mean power of the noise-signal sequence is determined from a difference between the determined mean power of the received-signal sequence and the determined mean power of the estimated-signal sequence. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037464 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALCULATING POWER HEADROOM IN CARRIER AGGREGATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A power headroom calculation method and apparatus of a User Equipment (UE) are provided for a primary cell Power Headroom (PH) calculation in a Long Term Evolution-Advanced (LTE-A) mobile communication system. The method includes determining whether an activated serving cell includes uplink data and/or uplink control signal to be transmitted, and determining PH of the activated serving cell according to whether the activated serving cell has the uplink data and/or uplink control signal. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037465 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALCULATING POWER HEADROOM IN CARRIER AGGREGATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A power headroom calculation method and apparatus of a User Equipment (UE) are provided for a primary cell Power Headroom (PH) calculation in a Long Term Evolution-Advanced (LTE-A) mobile communication system. The method includes determining whether an activated serving cell includes uplink data and/or uplink control signal to be transmitted, and determining PH of the activated serving cell according to whether the activated serving cell has the uplink data and/or uplink control signal. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037483 | SERVICE ADVERTISEMENT MESSAGE TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a service advertisement message transmission method and device. The method in the embodiments of the present invention includes: generating, by a first device, a first service advertisement message, where the first service advertisement message includes first service information of the first device and second service information of a second device; the second service information is obtained by the first device from a received message sent by the second device; the first service information is used to enable a device in a communication range of the first device to learn service information of the first device; and the second service information is used to enable a device in a communication range of the second device to learn service information of the second device; and sending, by the first device, the first service advertisement message. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037539 | Antenna Method and Apparatus - An information handling system includes a triangular chassis and a plurality of antennas that provide optimized coverage in all directions around the triangular chassis. An antenna may be operated from each vertex of the triangular shaped base chassis. Alternatively, an antenna may be operated from each of three main side surfaces of the triangular shaped base chassis. One or more of the antennas can be selected for communication based on the ability to communicate with external network components. Disclosed systems provide omnidirectional coverage around the triangular chassis while minimizing the effects of shadowing caused by abase chassis. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037579 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS LINK CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING DUAL CONNECTIVITY - A method and an apparatus for wireless link (radio link) control in a wireless communication system supporting dual connectivity is disclosed. The present invention includes: detecting radio link failure (RLF) of a secondary serving cell provided from a secondary base station, separately from detecting RLF of a primary serving cell provided from a master base station; generating a RLF specifier specifying an occurrence of RLF of the secondary serving cell when RLF of the secondary serving cell is detected; and transmitting the RLF specifier to an RRC connected master base station. A wireless link between a terminal and a master base station and a wireless link between a terminal and a secondary base station can be managed individually when a terminal is dually connected to both the master base station and the secondary base station in a network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160043815 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is a cognitive radio system provided including a master node ( | 02-11-2016 |
20160043816 | OFDM System with Reverse Link Interference Estimation - A new method of performing interference estimation to allow the data packets to be efficiently delivered in an OFDM system. The interference estimation is performed on average over each frame for each mobile station individually in both frequency and time domains. Based on the estimated interference, the CIR can be determined by the BTS based on channel response estimates made by the BTS, or by the MS based on channel response estimates made for the uplink assuming a symmetrical channel. Numerical results show that the CIR estimation error could be very small if a sub-channel is considered as the minimum transmission unit. In terms of the aggregate throughput, the interference estimation method can provide a significant gain. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043827 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETECTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION JAMMING IN A NETWORK - An electronic device may include a processor and a network interface that may include a first radio and a second radio. The processor may be configured to perform wireless communication jamming attack detection by occasionally performing clear channel verification utilizing the network interface to determine whether a threshold number of devices' channels are incapacitated in a wireless network within a threshold amount of time and/or by sending a heartbeat signal from the first radio and determining whether the second radio received the heartbeat signal. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043828 | CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR FOR TIME, FREQUENCY AND SPATIAL CHANNEL IN TERRESTRIAL RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A wireless communication terminal that communicates on a plurality of sub-carriers divided into a plurality of frequency bands, wherein each frequency band includes at least one sub-carrier. The terminal measures a channel quality indicator (CQI) for a plurality of frequency bands, identifies a subset of frequency bands for which the channel quality indicator has been measured based on a subset criterion, and transmits a report identifying a subset of frequency bands for which a channel quality indicator has been measured or frequency bands not in the subset. In some embodiments, the report also includes a subset CQI value associated with at least the subset of frequency bands. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043836 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD TECHNICAL FIELD - A communication system that includes a terminal apparatus and a base station apparatus. The terminal apparatus transfers terminal capability information to the base station apparatus, whereby the terminal capability information indicating whether the terminal apparatus supports a PDSCH transmission mode with 4 or more CSI reference signal ports. The terminal apparatus reports a channel state information computed from a channel measurement, whereby the channel measurement in the PDSCH transmission mode with 4 or more CSI reference signal ports is based on only CSI-RS. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043925 | Estimating Bandwidth in a Network - A method comprising: collecting respective observations of end-end bandwidth experienced on different occasions by multiple past communications occurring over different respective observed paths over a network, each path comprising a respective plurality of network components; modelling each of the respective network components with a bandwidth probability function characterized by one or more parameters; and estimating a component bandwidth or component bandwidth probability density for each of the network components based on the modelling, by determining respective values for said parameters such that a combination of the component bandwidths or bandwidth probability densities for the network components in the observed paths approximately matches, according to an optimization process, the observations of the end-to-end bandwidth experienced by the past communications over the observed paths. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043957 | Method and Device for Latency Adjustment - A method for outputting from a device having data communication capability received multimedia data with an adjustable latency comprises the steps of: receiving data packets including the multimedia data and storing the multimedia data in a buffer; measuring at least one characteristic indicative of the input rate of the received data packets; measuring a latency introduced by the buffer; obtaining information indicative of the output rate of the device and determining a target latency for the multimedia data to be outputted based on statistical information derived from the measured at least one characteristic indicative of the input rate and the obtained information indicative of the output rate; adjusting the latency so that it complies with the target latency by modifying the rate at which the multimedia data is outputted or the rate at which the multimedia data is stored in the buffer. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044486 | Interference Avoidance in D2D Communications - A method for allocating radio resources for a D2D communication between a first device and a second device is disclosed. The method includes identifying device(s) relevant for the D2D communication between the first and second devices, obtaining location information for the identified device(s), determining a value of a distance parameter for each of the identified devices using the location information obtained for the device and one or both of location information for the first device and location information for the second device, and allocating one or more radio resources for the D2D communication between the first device and the second device based on the determined value of the distance parameter. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044519 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILE DEVICE SCREEN REPLICATION IN AUTOMOTIVE ENVIRONMENT USING FLEXIBLE NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - A system and method for supporting mobile device connectivity with a vehicle. A mobile device is provided that includes at least one connectivity option for connecting to a communications channel of the vehicle. A flexible connectivity module that includes a controller is programmed to determine if there is at least one matching communication channel between the mobile device and the vehicle such that the mobile device and the vehicle may be in communication with each other. The controller selects the optimal connectivity option if there is more than one of the matching communication channels available and monitors the selected connectivity option and changes or modifies the selected connectivity option if a predetermined interference threshold is achieved. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044520 | MOBILE AUTOMATION TEST PLATFORM - A system and method are provided for testing mobile applications. A set of mobile devices, a set of applications associated with the mobile devices, and a set of test cases each associated with at least one of the applications are registered at a server. A set of test stations for executing the set of test cases are also registered at the server. Execution of one or more of the test cases on one or more mobile devices at one or more of the test stations is scheduled based on a user request received from at least one client device. Timing of the scheduled test cases is analyzed to determine occurrence of the scheduling time. The scheduled test cases are automatically executed on the test stations with ability to capture necessary logs and screenshot. The execution results are sent to the client device for display to the user for evaluation. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044522 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LINK DEBUGGING - Provided herein is a system and method for determining the status of one or more wireless communication links in a network such as a personal area network. One or more nodes within the PAN substantially continuously monitor a plurality of quality of service (QoS) communication indicators and generate a first application link quality indicator (ALQI) based on a first subset of the plurality of QoS communication indicators according to a first time period. The node can then modify the first ALQI with a second subset of the plurality of QoS communication indicators only when a first predetermined threshold number of occurrences of the second subset of the plurality of QoS communication indicators has occurred without regard to the first time period to form a first modified ALQI. The node can then report the modified ALQI to a coordinator node that can then act upon the modified ALQI to possibly correct one or more communication link problems to which the reported ALQI pertains to. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044523 | DEVICES AND METHODS RELATED TO CONTROLLING UE ASSUMPTION OF INTERFACE - To control UE assumption of interference there is a controller module to control a plurality of transmission points, each constituted by a set of at least one transmit antenna, to transmit data to another device in a coordinated transmission from at least a subset of the plurality of transmission points. The controller module is configured to allocate, to each resource linked to the subset of the plurality of transmission points, an interference contribution parameter that is indicative of an expected interference contribution originating from said transmission point, and to inform said another device of those resources to which the subset of the plurality of transmission points is linked, together with the respective interference contribution parameter allocated to each resource. Another device reports feedback based on signals which are scaled with the respective interference contribution parameter. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044524 | FINE-TIMING MEASUREMENT FOR TIMEOF-FLIGHT POSITIONING - Embodiments of a system and method for establishing a physical location of a device are generally described herein. In some embodiments a device may include a wireless device configured to communicate with an access point through the use of a wireless protocol, and to perform a method for time-of-flight (ToF) positioning that includes a three-stage fine-timing measurement (FTM) procedure that includes: a first stage for negotiating comeback timing for a next FTM exchange, a second stage that includes performing a fine timing measurement exchange and optionally negotiating the comeback timing for the next fine timing measurement exchange, and a third stage that includes reporting and polling the timestamp of the previous fine timing measurement exchange and optionally performing an additional fine timing measurement stage. In some embodiments a module in a device may determine a range between the device and the access point or the one or more network devices. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044541 | RELAXED PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFLOADING MEASUREMENTS - Various communication systems may benefit from relaxed performance requirements. For example, long term evolution (LTE), and in particular heterogeneous networks (HetNet) as well as small cell detection and discovery in small cell deployments in general, may benefit from relaxed performance requirements for offloading measurements. A method can include determining whether a user equipment is in active data transfer. The method can also include using a relaxed performance requirement with respect to a plurality of gap bursts when the user equipment is determined not to be in active data transfer. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044551 | Methods and Network Nodes for Enabling Accurate Measurements - The disclosure relates to a method ( | 02-11-2016 |
20160044578 | IDLE-MODE ENHANCEMENTS FOR EXTENDED IDLE DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (EI-DRX) - A user equipment (UE) may determine when to monitor for downlink (DL) communications such as paging messages based on both a received extended idle discontinuous reception (eI-DRX) cycle and a change in a downlink channel reliability condition of the UE. A base station may also adjust its transmission of paging information to a UE based on a eI-DRX cycle. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044585 | ESTABLISHING A LINK IN A MESH NETWORK - A mobile mesh point is mobile with respect to a first connecting mesh point and a second connecting mesh point. While the mobile mesh point has a mesh link with the first connecting mesh point, the mobile mesh point scans for a connecting mesh point with which it may establish a mesh link. On detecting the second connecting mesh point, the mobile mesh point may establish a virtual mesh link between the mobile mesh point and the second connecting mesh point by exchanging messages between the mobile mesh point and the second connecting mesh point via the first connecting mesh point. The messages exchanged comprise messages to establish a real mesh link. The virtual mesh link may be transformed to a real mesh link between the mobile mesh point and the second connecting mesh point. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044620 | Systems and Methods for User Equipment Synchronization - Systems and methods for User Equipment (UE) synchronization for Device-to-Device (D2D) out-of-coverage communication are provided. In an embodiment, a method in an in-coverage (IC) UE for the IC UE to become a synchronization source for out-of-coverage UEs for D2D communication includes obtaining, by the IC UE scanning parameters; scanning, by the IC UE, for out-of-coverage synchronization signals; transmitting, by the IC UE, a measurement report to a Transmission Point (TP) in response to a report trigger, the measurement report comprising information of one or more received out-of-coverage synchronization signals; receiving, by the IC UE, a configuration command from the TP instructing the IC UE to become a synchronization source in response to a configuration command from the TP; and transmitting, by the IC UE, a D2D synchronization signal (SS) for a duration of time or until instructed not to do so by the TP. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044723 | Method and System for Facilitating the Establishment of a Virtual Private Network in a Cellular Communication Network - A method for facilitating the establishment of a virtual private network in a cellular communication network comprising the steps of: arranging a network interface device in close proximity to a plurality of antennas; identifying an access request from a client device to establish a virtual private network connection through a core network portion by means of the network interface device; determining application information from the client device by means of the net-work interface device; and comparing the application information to a network information of the core net-work portion to determine whether the application information matches the net-work information by means of the network interface device. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050005 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CSI REPORTING - Some embodiments provide a method in a wireless device for reporting channel state information, CSI, for a CSI process. The CSI process corresponds to a reference signal resource and an interference measurement resource. According to the method, the wireless device obtains an adjustment value associated with the CSI process. The wireless device estimates an effective channel based on one or more reference signals received in the reference signal resource, and applies the adjustment value to the estimated effective channel, thereby obtaining an adjusted effective channel. Furthermore, the wireless device determines channel state information based on the adjusted effective channel, and on interference estimated based on the interference measurement resource. Finally, the channel state information is transmitted to a network node. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050007 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF MASSIVE MULTI-ANTENNA SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for supporting multi-users using a massive MIMO technology in an FDD environment. A communication method of a UE in a MIMO system according to an embodiment of the present invention may comprise: estimating a channel; calculating a first precoding matrix indication having a minimum correlation with the estimated channel; and transmitting the calculated first precoding matrix indication to a BS. According to an embodiment of the present invention, in a massive MIMO system, the UE feeds not a pre-coder close to a channel thereof but a pre-coder close to a null space of a channel back to the BS, so that an IUI can be reduced even in an | 02-18-2016 |
20160050036 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL MEASUREMENT AND METHOD OF PROVIDING INFORMATION FOR CELL MEASUREMENT - A method and base station for transmitting information for cell measurements, and a method and user equipment for performing cell measurements are discussed. The method according to one embodiment includes transmitting, by the base station, signals according to an almost blank subframe pattern; and transmitting, by the base station, information indicating a first time domain measurement resource restriction pattern and a second time domain measurement resource restriction pattern. The almost blank subframe pattern indicates which subframes the base station is configuring. The first time domain measurement resource restriction pattern indicates which subframe is one or more first subframes configured for reference signal received power (RSRP) or reference signal received quality (RSRQ) measurements, and the second time domain measurement resource restriction pattern indicates which subframe is one or more second subframes configured for RSRP or RSRQ measurements. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050046 | Wireless Network with Power Aware Transmission Control - A wireless device that tailors communications based on power parameters of the device. In one embodiment, a wireless device includes an energy source, a power monitor coupled to the energy source, a wireless transceiver, and a traffic controller coupled to the power monitor and the wireless transceiver. The power monitor is configured to measure a parameter of the energy source. The wireless transceiver is configured to wirelessly communicate via a wireless network. The traffic controller is configured to dynamically provide traffic management based on a prediction of wireless device capabilities using the present state of the energy source. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050132 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO DYNAMICALLY COLLECT STATISTICS OF TRAFFIC FLOWS IN A SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKING (SDN) SYSTEM - Methods implemented in an electronic device are disclosed for dynamically collecting traffic flow in a SDN system. For each of a plurality of sets of traffic flows, the method causes a monitor to be configured to collect traffic statistics. The monitors are instructed to collect traffic statistics, and the traffic statistics are received. For each monitor, the method determines if the received traffic statistics are within a set of acceptable limits or not, wherein the set of acceptable limits includes one or more of an upper bound and a lower bound. For each of the sets of traffic flows of which the received traffic statistics were determined outside of the acceptable limits, the method causes a change of increase or decrease of collection of the traffic statistics of the traffic flows. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050133 | THROUGHPUT CHARACTERIZATION - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for characterizing throughput of a user equipment (UE) for transmission this transmitted using a modulation and coding scheme (MCS). Specifically, in embodiments throughput of the UE may be characterized using interpolation of UE throughput for one or more discrete signal strength values. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050134 | METHOD FOR SETTING HEARTBEAT TIMER, TERMINAL AND SERVER - The present invention provides a method for setting a heartbeat timer, a terminal and a server. The method includes: a terminal installed with an application receives a timer setting request carrying first setting information of a to-be-set timer transmitted by the application; the terminal transmits a timer query request to a server according to the first setting information; the timer query request carries a query identifier generated according to the first setting information; the terminal receives a timer query response returned by the server, where the timer query response carries a query result indicating whether a heartbeat timer list includes a heartbeat timer information entry matched with the query identifier; the terminal determines whether to set the to-be-set timer for the application according to the query result, and performs a corresponding setting operation. The solution can effectively manage and set a heartbeat timer within a mobile phone terminal. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050534 | METHOD FOR MEASURING LOCATION OF USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for measuring a location of a user equipment in a wireless access system for supporting carrier aggregation/multiple cells and an apparatus therefor. Specifically, the method comprises the steps of: enabling the user equipment to receive information on Positioning Reference Signal (PRS) transmission bandwidths of a reference cell and a neighboring cell, enabling the user equipment to reconfigure an operating channel bandwidth of a Radio Frequency (RF) unit when one of the PRS transmission bandwidth of the reference cell and the PRS transmission bandwidth of the neighboring cell belongs to an inactive secondary cell, enabling the user equipment to receive the PRS from the reference cell and the neighboring cell, and enabling the user equipment to measure a Reference Signal Time Difference (RSTD) by using the PRS of the reference cell and the PRS of the neighboring cell. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050569 | METHOD FOR TESTING IMPLICIT BEAMFORMING PERFORMANCE OF A MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT RADIO FREQUENCY DATA PACKET SIGNAL TRANSCEIVER - Method for testing implicit beamforming performance of a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) radio frequency (RF) data packet signal transceiver device under test (DUT). The data packet signals forming the sequential data packet signal transmissions used for beamforming are produced with a selectively varied phase difference and conveyed via internal RF signal paths to external transmit terminals. Combining these transmitted data packet signals produces a combined data packet signal in which a peak power occurs during which a particular phase difference is being induced between the sequential DUT data packet signal transmissions used for the beamforming. This phase difference corresponds to the difference in RF signal phase lengths between the internal RF signal paths of the DUT, and is thereby indicative of the amount of phase shift needed between the sequential DUT data packet signal transmissions used for the beamforming to enable optimal implicit beamforming performance. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050574 | DETECTION AND MITIGATION OF DENIAL-OF-SERVICE ATTACKS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, obtaining data relating to a set of collision events on a shared channel on a wireless network according to a contention-based access protocol in which a plurality of terminals attempt to access the channel contemporaneously. A probability of collision in the channel is estimated and a probability distribution of time intervals between access attempts is generated based on the estimated probability of collision. Empirical and theoretical cumulative distribution functions for the time intervals are calculated, and compared to identify a malfunctioning terminal not operating in accordance with the protocol. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050575 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method for performing measurement by a terminal in a wireless communications system according to an embodiment of the present invention includes the steps of: receiving from a first transmission point the uplink-downlink structures associated respectively with a second transmission point and a third transmission point; and determining at least one measurement set based on the received uplink-downlink structures, wherein each measurement set consists of the sub-frames that: the duplex direction combination during a particular time interval in the case of following the uplink-downlink structure associated with the second transmission point is the same as the duplex direction combination during the particular time interval in the case of following the uplink-downlink structure associated with the third transmission point. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050576 | ENSURING THE PERFORMANCE OF NORMAL PERFORMANCE CARRIERS - In some example embodiments, there may be provided a method. The method may include receiving, at a user equipment, a plurality of multicarrier parameters including a scaling parameter, a first quantity of carriers in a first group of carriers, and a second quantity of carriers in a second group of carriers; operating in a first mode using the received scaling factor, when the received plurality of multicarrier parameters does not result in the second group having equal or better monitoring performance than the first group; and operating in a second mode inhibiting use of the received scaling factor, when the received plurality of multicarrier parameters results in the second group having equal or better monitoring performance than the first group. Related methods, systems, and articles of manufacture are also disclosed. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050577 | Inter-Cell Interference Mitigation - To address the problem of inter-cell interference in a heterogeneous network, several methods and systems are disclosed for determining interference caused by an aggressor mobile node, and transmitting at appropriate times and with transmit power that does not cause interference. Methods disclosed include using X2 communications, such as HII and RNTP messages, switching to an alternative radio access technology, sniffing at the eNodeB to obtain information, coordinating with a cloud coordination server, and using CFI information to avoid interfering with communications on the PDCCH. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050578 | Interference Measurement Resource (IMR) Signaling And Use To Support Interference Coordination Between Cells - Indication(s) of a configuration of first interference measurement resources in first subframe(s) and of a configuration of second interference measurement resources in second subframe(s) are received at a first BS and from a second BS using an interface between the first and second BSs. The first BS transmits zero or low power REs that coincide with the REs belonging to the first interference measurement resources in the first subframe(s). The first BS transmits full power REs that coincide with the REs belonging to the second interference measurement resources in the second subframe(s). The first interference measurement resources in the first subframe(s) are to be used by a UE (e.g., attached to the second base station) to measure interference for zero or low power REs and the second interference measurement resources in the second subframe(s) are to be used by the UE to measure interference for full power REs. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050579 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL INTERFERENCE PROCESSING - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, obtaining a schedule of transmission segments in an uplink of a communication system, determining a threshold for detecting signal interference in at least one transmission segment of a plurality of transmission segments according to the schedule of transmission segments in the uplink, and detecting signal interference in the at least one transmission segment of the plurality of transmission segments according to the threshold. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050580 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTION OF RADIO CHANNEL STATE AND BASE STATION CONGESTION STATE IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided in one example embodiment and can include obtaining, within a radio access network, a channel state for a data channel associated with a mobile terminal; including the channel state in a differentiated services (diffserv) marking within an Internet Protocol (IP) header of at least one IP packet associated with the mobile terminal; and transmitting the at least one IP packet including the IP header having the diffserv marking toward a packet data network. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050581 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING AND PROCESSING INTERFERENCE INFORMATION - A system that incorporates the subject disclosure may perform, for example, a method for receiving interference information from each of the plurality of communication devices detecting interference information in a plurality of segments of a radio frequency spectrum, correlating the interference information of the plurality of communication devices to generate correlated information, and identifying a plurality of interferers according to the correlated information. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050607 | COMMUNICATING DATA USING A LOCAL WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK NODE - A local wireless access network node receives a request to offload at least a portion of data traffic for a user equipment from a macro wireless access network node to the local wireless access network node, where the user equipment is to maintain a wireless connection to the macro wireless access network node after the offload. The local wireless access network node sends a response to indicate whether the local wireless access node has accepted or denied the request. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050691 | Method to Improve Channel Access Opportunity in a Wireless Communications System - Methods and apparatus are provided for clear channel assessment in the Wifi network. In one novel aspect, different clear channel assessment (CCA) threshold value is set for intra-BSS and inter-BSS frames during the counting down process. A CCA procedure senses the radio channel and determines if the radio channel is busy or idle during the backoff period by comparing the signal level value of detected fames with the CCA threshold value. The counting down will be suspended if the radio channel determined to be busy. If the detected frame is inter-BSS frame, the CCA threshold value is raised. If the signal level of the detected frames is lower than the inter-BSS CCA threshold for inter-BSS fames, the radio channel is considered idle. The counting down process is resumed. | 02-18-2016 |
20160056904 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL STATION, RESOURCE CONTROL METHOD USING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CONTROL STATION, AND MICROWAVE BASE STATION - A microwave base station estimates a first position of a terminal station that has transmitted millimeter-wave signal quality information and a second position of a terminal station that has transmitted a data bandwidth reservation request and transmits the millimeter-wave signal quality information and the first position or the data bandwidth reservation request and the second position to a control station, and the control station stores the millimeter-wave signal quality information and the first position in a database in association with each other and determines, for the terminal station that has transmitted the data bandwidth reservation request, a millimeter-wave base station with which communication is to be performed, a first directivity, and a second directivity by referring to the database by using the second position, and allocates a radio resource based on the determined millimeter-wave base station, first directivity, and second directivity. | 02-25-2016 |
20160056916 | Guard Band Utilization for Wireless Data Communication - Techniques for guard band utilization for wireless data communication are described. In at least some embodiments, guard bands can be leveraged to transmit wireless broadband data and/or other forms of wireless data. According to one or more embodiments, signal activity in a wireless channel that is adjacent to a guard band is monitored, e.g., while the guard band is being utilized for wireless data communication. In at least some implementations, if the signal activity exceeds a signal activity threshold, usage of the guard band channel can be adjusted to mitigate interference with signal activity in an adjacent channel. | 02-25-2016 |
20160056935 | TECHNIQUES FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS OVER AN UNLICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND - Techniques are described for wireless communication. A first method may include receiving at a user equipment (UE) over an unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band an indication of a time window associated with a transmission of a synchronization signal, and monitoring the unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band during the time window to receive a synchronization signal from a base station. A second method may include transmitting an indication of a time window associated with a transmission of a synchronization signal; performing a plurality of clear channel assessments (CCAs) on an unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band during the time window; and transmitting the synchronization signal over the unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band at a transmission time during the time window. The transmission time may be based at least in part on a result of at least one of the CCAs. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057028 | MONITORING NETWORK PERFORMANCE - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for monitoring network performance in respect of a digital communications network comprising a user-network ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057040 | STORING DATA ASSOCIATED WITH PACKET RELATED METRICS - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for storing data associated with packet related metrics are disclosed. According to one method, the method includes generating a test packet including a port tuple sequence number (PTSN), wherein the PTSN indicates a number of packets across multiple flows associated with a same port tuple, wherein the port tuple indicates an ingress port and an egress port that the test packet traverses at a device under test (DUT), and storing the PTSN in an entry of a data structure, wherein the entry is indexed by the port tuple. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057633 | Methods and Apparatus for Antenna Tilt Optimization - Systems and techniques for antenna optimization are described. Information such as statistics relating to conditions are collected, and evaluated against specified criteria in an iterative process. An antenna tilt decision is made based on the evaluation and validated to determine if it should be retained or repeated, or if the tilt should be returned to a previous state. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057634 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING RADIO PARAMETERS, NETWORK OPERATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A method and an apparatus for controlling a radio parameter, as well as a network operation management apparatus and a radio base station, are provided that enable optimization control taking a dead zone into consideration. A radio parameter control apparatus ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057637 | Cognitive Reconfigurable RF Technology - The present invention provides a radio architecture that contains a main radio path and a sensing path. The parameters of the main radio path are controlled by a cognitive engine. The main radio path is tuned to a desired frequency band. The sensing path is used to monitor the spectrum around the desired frequency band. To minimize effects of undesired non-linearity on sensing, sensing path may have a lower gain setting. The cognitive engine determines the optimal setting of the main RF front-end with respect to the current state of the spectrum. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057640 | User equipment and access node and respective methods - A user equipment (UE) for which an analog beamforming scheme is applied and a measuring method performed by the UE are provided. Also an access node (AN) and a method performed by the AN are provided. The measuring method performed by the UE comprising: transmitting, to a serving access node, a measurement request for measuring a neighbouring access node that is working at a same frequency as the user equipment; receiving, from the serving access node, information related to a series of measurement time gaps; and after a delay, performing a measurement to the neighbouring access node within the series of measurement time gaps. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057641 | Interference Estimation and Devices Therefore - A method for neighbor cell interference estimation in the UpLink of a CDMA communication system comprises obtaining measurements of an uplink received total wideband power (RTWP) and obtaining measurements of a load utilization of the uplink. At least a sum of the neighbor cell interference power and the noise power floor as well as a load utilization probability are jointly estimated from the measurements of an uplink RTWP and the measurements of a load utilization of the uplink. A thermal noise power floor is monitored by performing a running estimate of a long-time average uplink wideband power, preferably an estimated thermal noise power floor level or an operational level of the RTWP. A subset of the states of the estimation is selected, comprising only all states of the estimation that are associated with powers. The states of the selected subset and quantities associated therewith are scaled with a scaling factor. The scaling factor depends on the running estimate. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057642 | ENHANCED RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT MEASUREMENT MECHANISM IN LOCAL AREA NETWORK WITH FLEXIBLE TIME DIVISION DUPLEX - The present invention addresses a method, apparatus and computer program product for enabling enhanced repetition radio resource management measurement mechanism in local area network with flexible time division duplex. For initiating a radio resource management measurement accomplished by a user equipment of a host cell and approaching a neighboring cell, the base station of the host cell transmits information indicating a radio resource management measurement subband and a cross link measurement subframe to the user equipment and not performing an uplink transmission, wherein the radio resource management measurement subband is an uplink prohibited subband that is being used in a downlink transmission of the neighboring cell, and the cross link measurement subframe is a subframe capable of being used for completing an uplink to downlink switch. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057644 | Guaranteed Periods of Inactivity for Network Listening Modes - The present invention provides methods, apparatuses and computer program product relating to guaranteed periods of inactivity for network listening modes. The present invention includes configuring a measurement configuration message, the measurement configuration message including measurement gap information, and transmitting the measurement configuration message to at least two user equipments connected to the base station, wherein the measurement gap information included in the measurement configuration message is the same for each of the at least two user equipments. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057645 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - [Object] To enable a load of measurement by a terminal device to be suppressed in a case in which allocated frequency bands are utilized. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057666 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR BIASING ADJUSTMENT OF CELL RANGE EXPANSION - The present invention aims to provide method, apparatuses and systems for providing UE with biasing adjustment parameters about cell range expansion in a heterogeneous network. Herein, a current eNB determines, based on attribute information of one or more user equipments to be handed over, biasing adjustment parameters about cell range expansion of the one or more user equipments corresponding to their target eNB, and sends the biasing adjustment parameters to the one or more user equipments; the one or more user equipments adjust, based on the biasing adjustment biasing adjustment parameters, its report trigger condition of measurement report on measurement report on the current eNB and the target eNB, and report, the measurement report on the current eNB and the target eNB to the current eNB when the report trigger condition is satisfied; the current eNB makes a handover decision for corresponding user equipment(s) based on the measurement report. The present invention realizes a more flexible handover setting for the CRE load balancing and enhances the network efficiency and user QoS. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057705 | Method, Telephone, Telecommunication System and Device for Controlling Power Consumption of a Telephone - The invention relates to a method for controlling the power consumption of a telephone ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057733 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR USING GRAPH MODELING TO MANAGE, MONITOR, AND CONTROL BROADCAST AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS - The present disclosure describes systems and methods for dynamic graph-based modeling and analysis system for broadcast environments. The graph model provides index-free adjacency for relationships between nodes, unlike relational databases, and is ideal for large volume, highly variable, semi structured and densely connected data. In particular, and unlike other graph-based modeling systems, the systems and methods discussed herein provide a modeling system that is aware of signal flow between components and through the graph model, from sources through processing and routing to destinations. Simultaneously, the system may be aware of signal types and formats and can enforce interconnection rules. The system may also execute in real-time, to provide dynamic and frame-accurate control of multiple routers throughout the broadcast environment. | 02-25-2016 |
20160065285 | WIRELESS TERMINAL, METHOD THEREIN, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - Embodiments herein relate a wireless terminal for handling channel feedback for a channel from a radio base station to the wireless terminal in a MIMO system. The wireless terminal computes a Signal to Noise Ratio, SNR, or Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio, SINR, for each entity in a precoding codebook for a plurality of transmission ranks. The wireless terminal either computes a capacity for each entity based on the computed SNR or SINR and then computes an averaged capacity by averaging the computed capacities for a plurality of layers; or the wireless terminal computes an averaged capacity for each entity based on an average of the computed SNR or SINR for a plurality of layers. Then the wireless terminal selects a preferred precoding control index, PCI, and a preferred transmission rank as channel feedback, which preferred PCI and preferred transmission rank maximize the computed averaged capacity. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065389 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION IN A CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A channel estimation method and apparatus are provided for a terminal in a cellular mobile communication system including a plurality of base stations. The method includes maintaining a maximum number of CSI processes supported by the UE; receiving CSI process report information; determining a number of CSI to be updated based on the maximum number of CSI processes supported by the UE; generating at least one CSI report based on the determined number of CSI to be updated; and transmitting the at least one CIS report to an evolved Node B (eNB). | 03-03-2016 |
20160065434 | METHODS AND DEVICES TO EFFICIENTLY DETERMINE NODE DELAY IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network monitoring device monitors at least one tap point corresponding to a network interface between User Equipment (UE) and one or more additional nodes in the communication network, detects one or more transactions at the at least one tap point corresponding to the network interface with each transaction including request data and response data. The network monitoring device further determines a time associated with the request data and a time associated with the response data for each transaction, determines a delay time for each transaction for the at least one tap point by a difference between the time associated with the request data and the time associated with the response data, assigns the delay time for each transaction to one or more a predefined time ranges, and increments a count corresponding to the one or more predefined time ranges when the delay time is assigned. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065439 | System and Method for Information Delivery with Multiple Point Transmission - A system and method for information delivery with multiple point transmission are provided. A method for detecting lost packets is provided. The method includes initiating a timer for a received packet at a receiving transmission point, where the timer is set according to a time value associated with the received packet. The method also includes determining that a delivery of the received packet has failed according to the timer elapsing, and transmitting a lost packet report to a primary transmission point that distributed the received packet to the receiving transmission point. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065442 | Packet Delay Variation in a Packet Switched Network - A packet switched network tester for testing a network using a packet delay variation test profile that has a plurality of different delays for applying to timestamps of packets received at the tester, the tester being configured to: detect a packet; determine whether a test profile delay when applied to the packet would result in a packet delayed to a time after any preceding packet; if not, repeat the steps of detecting and determining with subsequent packets; if yes, apply the delay to the timestamp of the packet and identify the next test profile delay; and repeat for the next test profile delay the steps of detecting and determining. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065444 | ANOMALY DETECTION BASED ON COMBINATIONS OF CAUSE VALUE, MESSAGE TYPE, RESPONSE TIME (GTP-C) - A method for monitoring control traffic in a network is provided. A network monitoring probe passively monitors one or more network performance metrics related to control traffic. A plurality of threshold values associated with the one or more network performance metrics is received from a user. An alert notification message is sent to the user via an alert engine, in response to determining that at least one of the plurality of threshold values has been reached by the control traffic. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066200 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR GRAPHICALLY INDICATING STATION EFFICIENCY AND PSEUDO-DYNAMIC ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE INFORMATION FOR A NETWORK OF WIRELESS STATIONS - Methods and apparatuses providing a visual metric of the efficiency of a network of devices communicating through a wireless access point (AP). These apparatuses and methods may also determine and display pseudo-dynamic error vector magnitude (EVM) information for a network of wireless stations, including displaying a pseudo-dynamic constellation diagrams using EVM information. These methods and apparatuses may transmit a plurality of sounding packets from each of one or more radio devices different modulation types (e.g., BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM and 1024QAM), and receiving at least some of the sounding packets at a second radio device (e.g., an access point) and determining EVM information from the received sounding packets, and displaying (or providing for display) a constellation diagram including pseudo-dynamic EVM information that is a constrained approximation of actual EVM information. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066201 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING WIRELESS SYSTEM DISCOVERY AND CONTROL USING A STATE-SPACE - In accordance with embodiments disclosed herein, there are provided apparatuses, systems and methods for implementing wireless system discovery and control using a state-space. For example, such means may include: establishing, a communications interface between an access point optimizer and a wireless access point; identifying one or more interfering wireless nodes exhibiting electromagnetic interference upon the wireless access point; collecting data from the wireless access point; determining a model of the wireless access point and the one or more interfering wireless nodes by: (i) modeling communicative relationships and properties among the wireless access points and the one or more interfering wireless nodes exhibiting electromagnetic interference upon the wireless access point based at least in part on the data collected, and (ii) modeling an active state of the wireless access points representing a current configuration of the wireless access points having therein one or more configurable parameters for the wireless access points based at least in part on the data collected; and quantifying a change in performance of the wireless access points or the one or more interfering wireless nodes based on a state change affecting the model. Other related embodiments are disclosed. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066202 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR GRAPHICALLY INDICATING STATION EFFICIENCY AND PSEUDO-DYNAMIC ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE INFORMATION FOR A NETWORK OF WIRELESS STATIONS - Methods and apparatuses providing a visual metric of the efficiency of a network of devices communicating through a wireless access point (AP). These apparatuses and methods may also determine and display pseudo-dynamic error vector magnitude (EVM) information for a network of wireless stations, including displaying a pseudo-dynamic constellation diagrams using EVM information. These methods and apparatuses may transmit a plurality of sounding packets from each of one or more radio devices different modulation types (e.g., BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM and 1024QAM), and receiving at least some of the sounding packets at a second radio device (e.g., an access point) and determining EVM information from the received sounding packets, and displaying (or providing for display) a constellation diagram including pseudo-dynamic EVM information that is a constrained approximation of actual EVM information. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066205 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication interface measures a signal level of a received signal from an access point. A control unit calculates connection time with the access point to which a mobile communication device is connected. The control unit associates a first connection threshold or a second connection threshold that is larger than the first connection threshold with the access point on the basis of the connection time. After calculating the connection time, when the mobile communication device is not connected to the access point, the control unit determines whether to connect the mobile communication device to the access point on the basis of a comparison between the signal level and the first connection threshold or the second connection threshold associated with the access point. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066276 | User Equipment Transmit Duty Cycle Control - In some embodiments, a user equipment device (UE) implements improved communication methods which include radio resource time multiplexing, dynamic sub-frame allocation, and UE transmit duty cycle control. In some embodiments, the UE may communicate with base stations using radio frames that include multiple sub-frames, transmit information regarding allocation of a portion of the sub-frames of a respective radio frame for each of a plurality of the radio frames, and transmit and receive data using allocated sub-frames and not using unallocated sub-frames. In some embodiments, the UE may operate according to a sub-frame allocation based on its current power state. The UE may transmit information to the base station and receive the sub-frame allocation based on at least the information. In some embodiments, the UE may switch transmit duty cycles based on an occurrence of a condition at the UE. The UE may inform the network of the switch. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066331 | INDIVIDUALIZED GAIN CONTROL OF REMOTE UPLINK BAND PATHS IN A REMOTE UNIT IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM (DAS), BASED ON COMBINED UPLINK POWER LEVEL IN THE REMOTE UNIT - Individualized gain control of remote uplink band paths in a remote unit in a distributed antenna system (DAS) based on combined uplink power level in the remote unit. The combined uplink power of a combined uplink communications signal in a remote unit is measured. If the combined uplink power level exceeds a defined uplink threshold power level for the remote unit, the gain is reduced for individual uplink band paths that provide a higher power contribution to the combined uplink power of combined uplink communications signal in the remote unit. This allows the initial uplink gain of the uplink band paths in a remote unit to be set higher to increase sensitivity, because the gain of the uplink band paths providing higher power contributions to the combined uplink power in the remote unit can be reduced, without reducing gain in other uplink band paths of the remote unit. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066334 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING RESOURCE FOR INTERFERENCE COORDINATION THEREIN - A communication method of a base station is provided. The communication method of the base station includes determining, by the base station, an aggregate interference caused by a terminal in a heterogeneous cell, transmitting information about the aggregate interference to a higher layer node entity, receiving information about an almost blank subframe (ABS) pattern from the higher node entity, and configuring an ABS based on the information about the ABS pattern. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066340 | A METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ENABLING DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION - The present disclosure relates to a method and device ( | 03-03-2016 |
20160072606 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DETECTING GUARD INTERVAL OF ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SIGNAL - A device and a method for detecting a guard interval (GI) of an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) signal are provided. The device includes a signal transforming unit and a GI determining unit. The signal transforming unit receives the OFDM signal and sets a predetermination GI to provide a first frequency-domain symbol and a second frequency-domain symbol. The GI determining unit receives the predetermination GI, the first frequency-domain symbol and the second frequency-domain symbol to determine a phase difference between the first frequency-domain symbol and the second frequency-domain symbol and determines the GI of the OFDM signal according to the phase difference. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072685 | DETECTION OF HEAVY USERS OF NETWORK RESOURCES - A device includes a multistage filter and an elephant trap. The multistage filter has hash functions and an array. The multistage filter is operable to receive a packet associated with a candidate heavy network user and send the packet to the hash functions. The hash functions generate hash function output values corresponding to indices in the array. The elephant trap is connected to the multistage filter. The elephant trap includes a buffer and probabilistic sampling logic. The probabilistic sampling logic is operable to attempt to add information associated with the packet to the buffer a particular percentage of the time based in part on the result of the multistage filter lookup. The buffer is operable to hold information associated with the packet, counter information, and timestamp information. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072686 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CAPTURING AND ENABLING ANALYSIS OF TEST DATA PACKETS FROM A RADIO FREQUENCY DATA PACKET SIGNAL TRANSCEIVER - System and method for capturing and enabling analysis of one or more test data packets from a radio frequency (RF) data packet signal transmitter device under test (DUT). Recently captured data packets from a received RF data packet signal are retained for analysis following confirmation that they contain potentially valid test data packets. Such confirmation is achieved by confirming that a data pattern defined by currently captured data packets differs from a data pattern defined by subsequently received data packets. Following such confirmation, a trigger signal initiates access and/or analysis of the captured data packets. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072689 | ROUND TRIP TIME DETERMINATION - Round trip time (RTT) measurements may be obtained from downlink (DL) trigger frame and uplink (UL) Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) frame transactions, which can replace and/or complement separate RTT measurements. By implementing such techniques, wireless systems can make access to RTT measurements, and consequently, location determination of access points (APs) within the system, more easily accessible to navigation and/or other applications benefitting from such measurements and determinations. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072691 | BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT ACROSS LOGICAL GROUPINGS OF ACCESS POINTS IN A SHARED ACCESS BROADBAND NETWORK - Systems and methods provide bandwidth management on the inroute of a satellite network. Inroute group managers (IGMs) monitor bandwidth usage in each terminal group (TG) under each of the IGMs, and report this bandwidth usage to a bandwidth manager. Upon receipt of the reported bandwidth usage from each of the IGMs, the bandwidth manager compares the bandwidth usage and minimum/maximum throughput rates associated with each TG. The bandwidth manager calculates scaling factors that it transmits to each of the IGMs to allow the IGMs to allocate bandwidth accordingly. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073278 | CONTROL SYSTEM, APPARATUS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING INSTRUCTIONS FOR A NETWORK NODE AND/OR A NETWORK CONTROLLER - The control system includes a monitoring device operable to determine information related to resource availability associated with the network entity and to communicate the information related to the resource availability to a network controller. The control system includes a data relay device, which is operable to relay data packets between a plurality of network nodes. The data relay device is operable to receive information related to data packet relaying to the network entity from the network controller. The network controller apparatus includes one or more communication interfaces, which are operable to receive information related to a resource availability from a monitoring device. The one or more communication interfaces are operable to communicate information related to data packet relaying to a data relay device. The network controller apparatus includes a routing module operable to determine the information related to data packet relaying based on the information related to the resource availability. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073279 | ADMISSION CONTROL FOR ALLOWING OR REJECTING A MEASUREMENT REQUEST BETWEEN A FIRST AND A SECOND DEVICE - An Admission Control Node and a method performed thereby for enabling a measurement between a first and a second device in a communication network, and a first device and a method performed thereby for performing the measurement between the first device and the second device in a communication network are provided. The method in the Admission Control Node comprises receiving, from the first device, a request for performing the measurement between the first and the second device and, determining segments comprised in a path between the first and the second device. The method also comprises determining a current measurement situation for the segments, and deciding to allow or reject the request for performing the measurement based on the current measurement situation for the segments. The method further comprises informing the first device about the decision of allowing or rejecting the request for performing the measurement. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073344 | Medium Access Control in LTE-U - In some implementations, a Medium Access Control (MAC) method for LTE in Unlicensed (LTE-U) includes transmitting at least one of a Clear to Send (CTS) message or a Request to Send (RTS) message on an LTE-U Secondary Cell (SCell) carrier. The at least one of the CTS message or the RTS message may include a duration field. The duration field may indicate a transmission time of a transmission on a packet data shared channel on the LTE-U SCell carrier. An evolved NodeB (eNB) transmits a scheduling grant for the transmission on the packet data shared channel on the LTE-U SCell carrier. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073347 | Device Proximity Detection Implemented In Hardware - In embodiments of device proximity detection implemented in hardware, a computing device, such as a mobile phone, appliance device, or other electronic device can be implemented with wireless radio systems for wireless communications, and a wireless radio system receives a wireless signal. A computing device includes a radio controller of the wireless radio system, and the radio controller is implemented to detect an indication associated with the wireless signal, such as a byte pattern in the wireless signal and/or a signal strength of the signal. The radio controller can then determine that the indication of the wireless signal identifies the wireless signal as pertinent to an application executing on the computing device, and communicate an event notice to a signal manager that the wireless signal has been identified. The radio controller communicates event notices via a hardware interface that is implemented to interface the radio controller with the signal manager. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073399 | TIME BUDGET MANAGEMENT FOR WLAN AND WWAN PROCESSING FOR INTER-FREQUENCY/INTER-RAT MEASUREMENTS FOR LTE - A time period associated with each of a plurality of tasks included in a current instance of WWAN data capture/processing by a WLAN processor and a WWAN processor is determined. A total time period comprising the respective time periods of each task is compared to an overall time budget criterion to obtain a comparison outcome. A change in at least one of the tasks based on the comparison outcome is implemented. The change results in an adjustment of the total time period associated with a next instance of WWAN data capture/processing by the WLAN processor and the WWAN processor. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073419 | PACKET DATA TRANSMISSION IN A MIMO SYSTEM - A packet data transmission system comprises primary stations (PS) having signal transmitting and receiving means and antennas (PA | 03-10-2016 |
20160080101 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING INTERFERENCE - A method and apparatus can be configured to receive an input. The input comprises a plurality of values. The receiver receives the input in the presence of interference caused by another system. The method may also include determining the values that have been affected by the interference. The method may also include mitigating the effects of the interference upon the received input. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080108 | LTE Transmission Mask Adjustment to Maximize Performance and Reduce Interference - System and methods for using channel quality reports to reduce inter-band interference are disclosed. Channel information is received at a first wireless communication device from a second wireless communication device. The first wireless device is operating in a first frequency range, and the second wireless device is operating in a second frequency range. The first frequency range is adjacent to the second frequency range. A channel quality report is generated at the first wireless communication device. The channel quality report indicates that particular sub-bands in the first frequency range have low channel quality. The particular sub-bands are selected using the channel information. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080228 | WIRELESS TERMINAL APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless terminal apparatus including: a memory, and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to: when the wireless terminal has not established a connection to a wireless base station, receive at least one radio frame that is transmitted from the wireless base station to another wireless terminal, and estimate a specified parameter indicating a reception data rate on an assumption that the wireless terminal has established a connection to the wireless base station, based on whether each of the at least one radio frame includes a reception error. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080241 | Gigabit Determination of Available Bandwidth Between Peers - A system includes a speed service architecture (SSA) capable of supporting high throughput connectivity between a server and client. The SSA may allow for a bandwidth measurement for a connection between the server and client. In some cases, the SSA may offload the processing of the connectivity measurement resulting in little or no load on processing devices external to the SSA, for example, the host processors of the client and/or server. The SSA may use a stream generator to generate a test stream for transmission over the connection. The test stream may be received and analyzed by a stream analyzer. The stream analyzer may then report the measurement results to the client, server, or other device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080242 | Testing of Communications Equipment - A method of testing communications equipment comprises providing to the communications equipment a test traffic load which varies with time to a different level of test traffic load. The method also comprises measuring one or more parameter which characterizes the communications equipment in handling a transition of the test traffic load to the different level. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080243 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TEST ITERATION VIA PROPERTY CHAINING - A new test control structure improves on constructing complex test sequences in a scripting language. The new test control structure iterates over two or more arbitrary values of a test attribute, such as a networking protocol parameter applied at OSI layers 2-7. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080264 | METHODS, APPARATUS, AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE TO PROVIDE A MULTICAST VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (MVPN) - Methods, apparatus, and articles of manufacture to provide a multicast virtual private network (MVPN) are disclosed. An example method to transmit multicast data over a communication network includes: determining an upstream hop of a multicast transmission based on a received hierarchical ingress replication route; storing a downstream hop and the upstream hop of the multicast transmission in a multicast routing table; monitoring the multicast transmission occurring via an area border router; in response to detecting at least one of a) a threshold fan-out of the multicast transmission or b) a threshold data rate from a source of the multicast transmission, converting a logical topology of the multicast transmission; and in response to receiving a multicast data packet of the multicast transmission, replicating the multicast data packet with the processor based on the downstream hop. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080283 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING AUDIO VIDEO BRIDGING - A communication system and methods of using the system are described. The communication system includes: a plurality of electronic control units (ECUs) operably configured for a first protocol and a second protocol; one or more switches; a first network of connections; and a second network of connections. The first protocol may be an audio video bridging (AVB) protocol. And the ECUs may include: a first protocol interface that includes one or more AVB ports; a second protocol interface; memory storing traffic shaping instructions; and a processor configured to carry out the traffic shaping instructions. The one or more switches may have a plurality of AVB ports. The first network of connections may interconnect the ports of the plurality of ECUs and the ports of the one or more switches. And the second network of connections may interconnect the second protocol interfaces of at least some of the plurality of ECUs. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080580 | KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD, TERMINAL, AND PROGRAM - A key telephone system includes a terminal and a primary device. The primary device transmits a command for transition into a power-saving state to the terminal, together with a power-saving duration time datum and/or a power-saving deactivating time datum, when the time reaches a power-saving state transition time. The terminal specifies the power-saving duration time and/or the power-saving deactivating time in the timekeeper means, and halts the communication means for communicating with the primary device at the time of receiving the command for transition into the power-saving state from the primary device, and activates the communication means being halted at a time when the timekeeper means has measured the lapse of the power-saving duration time and/or the power-saving deactivating time. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080905 | Computational Complexity Reduction of Training Wireless Strength-Based Probabilistic Models from Big Data - Disclosed are apparatus and methods for providing outputs; e.g., location estimates, based on signal strength measurements. A computing device can receive a particular signal strength measurement, which can include a wireless-signal-emitter (WSE) identifier and a signal strength value and can be associated with a measurement location. The computing device can determine one or more bins; each bin including statistics for WSEs and associated with a bin location. The statistics can include mean and standard deviation values. The computing device can: determine a particular bin whose bin location is associated with the measurement location for the particular signal strength measurement, determine particular statistics of the particular bin associated with a wireless signal emitter identified by the WSE identifier of the particular signal strength measurement, and update the particular statistics based on the signal strength value. The computing device can provide an estimated location output based on the bins. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080949 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT AND NETWORK PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION IN SMALL CELLS - A method of configuring small cell base stations in a cellular network is disclosed. A constraint on a performance-related metric associated with at least a portion of the cellular network is received. In some embodiments, the constraint on the performance-related metric comprises a constraint on a performance-related metric associated with one or more macrocells. Measurement data from one or more small cell base stations is received via a control interface. One or more optimized values of one or more parameters associated with one or more small cell base stations are searched. The searching is based at least in part on the received measurement data and subject to the constraint on the performance-related metric associated with the at least a portion of the cellular network. The one or more optimized values of the one or more parameters to the associated small cell base stations are transmitted. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080954 | DISTRIBUTED ADAPTIVE CCA MECHANISMS - A method implemented by a first network device where the method provides an adaptive clear channel assessment (CCA) by collecting a neighboring network device set for a wireless local area network (WLAN). The method detects a wireless signal from a second network device on a wireless medium. A signal quality of the wireless signal is then determined. An identity of the second network device is also determined. The second network device is then added to the neighboring network device set of the first network device, in response to determining that the second network device is a neighbor based on the signal quality of the wireless signal. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080957 | CALCULATING AND REPORTING CHANNEL CHARACTERISTICS - An interference covariance calculation technique is selected at a first communication device, where the interference covariance calculation technique is to be utilized by a second communication device when computing a channel quality indicator (CQI) associated with a communication channel between the first communication device and the second communication device. The interference covariance calculation technique is selected from a set of multiple techniques for calculating interference covariance. The first communication device transmits an indication of the selected interference covariance calculation technique to the second communication device. The first communication device receives a CQI calculated by the second communication device in accordance with the selected interference covariance calculation technique. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080960 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR RANGING PROTOCOL - Disclosed are systems, methods and devices for measuring a range between wireless devices using an exchange of messages between devices. For example, wireless transceiver devices may exchange messages transmitted in a wireless communications link to measure a time of flight. Based, at least in part, on the measured time of flight, a location of one of the wireless transceiver devices may be estimated. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080961 | FILTER BANK-BASED CHANNEL STATE REPORT AND RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a pre-5th-Generation (5G) or 5G communication system to be provided for supporting higher data rates Beyond 4th-Generation (4G) communication system such as Long Term Evolution (LTE). A filter bank-based channel state report and resource allocation method and an apparatus for use in a wireless communication system are provided. The channel state report method of a receiver in a filter bank-based wireless communication system includes receiving filter bank information on at least two filter banks from a transmitter, measuring a channel state of the each of at least two filter banks based on the filter bank information, and transmitting channel state information, which is generated based on the measurement result, to the transmitter. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080962 | WI-FI SIGNALING NETWORK INSIGHT DELIVERY - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for Wi-Fi signaling network insight delivery are provided. One method includes detecting, for example by an application running on a wireless device, at least one Wi-Fi advertised value. The method may then include extracting, from the at least one Wi-Fi advertised value, at least one cellular network insight for a cellular network condition. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080963 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUSES FOR NETWORK ASSISTED INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION AND SUPPRESSION IN LONG-TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) SYSTEMS - A method implemented by a Wireless Transmit/Receive Unit (WTRU) includes receiving a DeModulation Interference Measurement (DM-IM) resource, determining an interference measurement based on the DM-IM resource, and demodulating a received signal based on the interference measurement. An interference is suppressed based on the interference measurement. At least one DM-IM resource is located in a Physical Resource Block (PRB). The DM-IM resource is located in a PRB allocated for the WTRU. The DM-IM resource is a plurality of DM-IM resources which form a DM-IM pattern, and the DM-IM pattern is located on a Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) and/or an enhanced Physical Downlink Shared Channel (E-PDSCH) of at least one Long Term Evolution (LTE) subframe. The DM-IM resources are different for different Physical Resource Blocks (PRB) in the LTE subframe. The DM-IM is located in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) Resource Block (RB), and the DM-IM pattern is adjusted. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080982 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND DEVICES FOR DETERMINING KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS USING INFERENTIAL STATISTICS - Network monitoring devices and network monitoring techniques are disclosed and use inferential statistical approaches to determine one or more Key Performance Indicators, particularly for Circuit Switched FallBack (CSFB) scenarios. For example, the network monitoring node monitors a plurality of ciphered or clear text messages for a network interface in a communication network, determines a Mobile Terminating (MT) count for MT calls and a Mobile Originating (MO) count for User Equipment (UE) from at least one message of the plurality of messages and defines an inferred MT ratio based on the MT count and the MO count for a total number of messages. The network monitoring device further applies the inferred MT ratio to a CSFB idle mode count for UE and/or a CSFB active mode count for UE to yield an estimated total number of CSFB idle mode successes and an estimated total number of CSFB active mode successes, respectively. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081042 | Communication Efficiency - There is provided a method, including receiving, by a receive node, a transmission request message for data transmission from a transmit node of a first basic service set, wherein the transmission request message includes an indication of a modulation and coding scheme to-be-used in the data transmission; detecting signal strength of the transmission request message; determining, based on the signal strength and the indicated modulation and coding scheme, a maximum tolerable interference level during the data transmission; and in response to the transmission request message, generating and sending, to the transmit node, a transmission permission message including an indication of the maximum tolerable interference level. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081050 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communications method may includes scanning adjacent channels, transmitting a communications request signal to a gateway via any channel among the scanned channels, receiving a communications response signal including information regarding a plurality of data channels from the gateway via the channel through which the communications request signal is transmitted, transmitting an activation request signal to the gateway via any data channel among the plurality of data channels, receiving an activation response signal from the gateway via the data channel through which the activation request signal is transmitted, and registering the data channel through which the activation response signal is received as the data channel for performing data communications with the gateway. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081054 | IEEE 802.11 ENHANCEMENTS FOR HIGH EFFICIENCY POSITIONING - A ranging operation between a first wireless device and a second wireless may be performed by: sending, to the second wireless device, a data frame including a request for the second wireless device to report its actual SIFS duration to the first wireless device; determining a time of departure (TOD) of the data frame; receiving, from the second wireless device, a response frame including SIFS information indicative of the actual SIFS duration of the second wireless device; determining a time of arrival (TOA) of the response frame; and determining a round trip time (RTT) of the data frame and the response frame using the TOD of the data frame, the TOA of the response frame, and the actual SIFS duration of the second wireless device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081056 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ADJUSTING CLEAR CHANNEL ASSESSMENT LEVELS TO INCREASE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK THROUGHPUT - Methods and apparatus for adjusting clear channel assessment levels are disclosed herein. One aspect of the present disclosure provides a method of adjusting deferral on a first wireless communication network. The method includes determining a first distance between the first wireless communication network and a second wireless communication networks operating on a shared or partially-shared channel, determining an adjustment to a deferral mechanism based at least in part on the first distance, and transmitting an indication to one or more stations in the first wireless communication network, the indication based at least in part on the adjustment to the deferral mechanism. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081078 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method, device and system for performing wireless communication in a wireless communication system. The wireless communication system includes a low power node and a macro base station with common baseband and user equipment, and the user equipment communicates with the low power node and the macro base station via a plurality of component carriers. The method includes: receiving, by the user equipment, a downlink signal transmitted by the low power node and the macro base station; and transmitting uplink signals to the low power node and the macro base station, wherein the method further includes: transmitting all first uplink signals of the uplink signals to the low power node as a receiving node. According to the method, device and system, it is possible to improve the efficiency of uplink power control of a terminal and/or reduce the burden for uplink control channel transmission of a macro cell. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081119 | Method, device and computer readable storage medium for processing channel access - A method for processing channel access is disclosed in the present invention, which includes: a wireless station determines a first delay access variable and/or a second delay access variable according to the received wireless frame; the wireless station determines delay time for accessing a channel according to the second delay access variable or according to the first delay access variable and the second delay access variable. A device for processing channel access is also disclosed in the present invention. | 03-17-2016 |
20160087777 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of operating a terminal in a communication system, including measuring channel quality, and transmitting a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) based on the channel quality measured on the basis of a target BLock Error Rate (BLER), which is determined by using a ratio between efficiency corresponding to a first CQI and efficiency corresponding to a second CQI. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087814 | WIRELESS-COMMUNICATION QUALITY-INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A PLC network and a wireless network are asynchronous to each other, and data communication between the PLC network and the wireless network is performed via a gateway station. A wireless-communication quality-information processing device includes a reception unit, a wireless-communication quality-information generation unit, and a communication processing unit. The reception unit receives a wireless communication frame transmitted from a wireless slave station of the wireless network. The wireless-communication quality-information generation unit generates wireless-communication quality information indicating quality of wireless communication in the wireless network from characteristic information included in the received wireless communication frame. The communication processing unit determines whether to reflect data included in the wireless communication frame to the PLC network as new data by referring to the wireless-communication quality information. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087860 | APPLICATION TOPOLOGY BASED ON NETWORK TRAFFIC - Methods and apparatuses for generating an application topology are provided. A processor determines a first application profile based, at least in part, on a first network packet. A processor determines a second application profile based, at least in part, on a second network packet. A processor determines a link between a first application and a second application based, at least in part, on address information of the first network packet. A processor generates a topology comprising the first and second application profiles based, at least in part, on the link, the first application profile and the second application profile. A processor updates the first and second application profiles based, at least in part, on matching the first application profile and second application profile with an application deployment template. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088125 | Utilizing Packet Headers To Monitor Network Traffic In Association With A Client Device - Various methods and systems for facilitating network traffic monitoring in association with an application running on a client device are provided. In this regard, aspects of the invention facilitate monitoring network traffic being transmitted to and/or from a client device, such as a mobile device, so that network performance can be analyzed. In various implementations, packet headers of data packets are read to obtain or extract desired network metrics that indicate network performance. Packet headers are generally read to the extent necessary to identify various network data. As such, by avoiding examination of a packet payload and, in some cases, examination of the entire header, the efficiency of monitoring network traffic at a client device is improved. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088484 | SPECTRUM COORDINATION DEVICES, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICES, SPECTRUM COORDINATION METHODS, AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to various embodiments, a spectrum coordination device may be provided. The spectrum coordination device may include: a memory configured to store working channel information indicating for each radio communication device of a plurality of radio communication devices information of at least one channel used by the respective radio communication device; a radio communication device information receiver configured to receive working channel update information of at least one radio communication device of the plurality of radio communication devices; a conflict determination circuit configured to determine whether there is a conflict of channels to be used by the plurality of radio communication devices based on the working channel information and the working channel update information; and a working channel information updating circuit configured to update the working channel information based on the determination of the conflict determination circuit. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088497 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PERFORMING A TIME OF FLIGHT (ToF) MEASUREMENT - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of performing a Time of Flight (ToF) measurement. For example, a first wireless device may include a controller to perform a Time of Flight (ToF) measurement procedure with a second wireless device; and a radio to communicate with the second wireless device a ToF frame including a first time value of a Time Synchronization Function (TSF) of a sender of the frame to indicate a beginning time of a ToF measurement period, and a second time value of the TSF at transmission of the ToF frame. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088503 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS LINK ADAPTATION - A method of high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) link adaptation, comprises receiving a channel quality measurement metric over a Measured Results on random access channel (RACH) information element (IE). The link is adapted based upon the received channel quality metric. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088504 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING MEASUREMENT PARAMETER, A USER EQUIPMENT, AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING MEASUREMENT PARAMETER - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method for configuring a measurement parameter, a user equipment, and an apparatus for configuring a measurement parameter, and relate to the field of communications technologies, so that a larger RE value can be configured for a UE with better receiver performance in a same small cell, and therefore, the UE can trigger a measurement event earlier to facilitate access to the small cell. The method includes: sending, by a UE, UE capability information to a radio network controller RNC; and receiving, by the UE, a measurement parameter sent by the RNC, where the measurement parameter includes an RE value used when the UE measures a cell. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088505 | Measure of Quality of Link Between Mobile Station and Base Station - A mobile station associated with a base station determines a measure of the quality of a communication link between the mobile station and the base station. The measure is determined by comparing either i) an expected data rate for communications over the link and an actual data rate of communications over the link, wherein the expected data rate takes into account radio frequency (RF) power levels of signals received at the mobile station over the link, or ii) an expected RF power level for communications over the link and RF power levels of signals received at the mobile station over the link, wherein the expected RF power level takes into account the actual data rate of communications over the link. This measure of the quality of the link may be a factor in triggering the mobile station to initiate a handoff. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088506 | METHOD OF AVOIDING IDC INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - A user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system is described. The UE includes a long term evolution (LTE) transceiver for receiving configuration information from a network, and a processor for detecting an in-device coexistence (IDC) condition according to the configuration information and initiating a transmission of information on the detected IDC condition to the network. The information on the detected IDC condition comprises frequency information, and the transmission is initiated after the UE has failed to resolve the detected IDC condition on its own. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088507 | Method for Detecting Coverage of Target Network, and Apparatus - A method for detecting coverage of a target network, including acquiring a list of carrier frequencies of a target network that covers a position of an embedded universal integrated circuit card (eUICC) terminal; sending, to the eUICC terminal, a frequency measurement request that carries the list of carrier frequencies, so that the eUICC terminal performs frequency measurement for each carrier frequency in the list of carrier frequencies; and receiving a frequency measurement report reported by the eUICC terminal. A corresponding apparatus, including a subscription management entity, a network device, and an eUICC terminal. According to the technical solutions of the present disclosure, a coverage status of a target network to be switched to can be detected before switching. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088508 | REPORTING WiFi CHANNEL MEASUREMENTS TO A CELLULAR RADIO NETWORK - A method and devices for providing measurements of WiFi network channels to a cellular radio network are disclosed. According to one aspect, the invention provides a method that includes preparing, at a node of the cellular radio network, a request for measurement of at least one WiFi channel. The measurement is to be provided by at least one user equipment having a WiFi transceiver and a cellular radio transceiver. The method includes transmitting, from the node of the cellular radio network, the request to the at least one user equipment. The node of the cellular radio network receives, from the at least one user equipment, at least one measurement of the at least one WiFi channel. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088509 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION MONITORING FRAMEWORK FOR 3GPP SYSTEMS - A 3GPP monitoring architecture framework provides monitoring event configuration, detection, and reporting for machine-type and other mobile data applications by configuring monitoring on a mobility management entity (MME), a serving general packet radio service support node (SGSN), or a home subscriber service (HSS) node through existing interfaces, such as Tsp, T4, and T5 interfaces. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088534 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Radio Measurements in Autonomous Gaps in Multi-Connectivity Scenarios - In one aspect of the teachings herein, a wireless device operating in a multi-connectivity configuration with respect to an associated wireless communication network applies asymmetrical blanking to two or more of its multi-connectivity connections in conjunction with acquiring system information for a target cell during one or more measurement gaps. “Blanking” as used here implies an interruption in downlink reception, or an interruption in uplink transmission, or both, and arises as a consequence of the measurement gaps used by a wireless device to make measurements on target-cell signals. Asymmetrical blanking results in, for example, the wireless device sending more or less acknowledgment/non-acknowledgment, ACK/NACK, signaling on one of the connections relative to another one of the connections, when acquiring the target-cell system information. In some embodiments, asymmetrical blanking is triggered and/or configured by the network, while in other embodiments it is triggered and/or configured by the wireless device. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088567 | ADAPTING BLIND RECEPTION DURATION FOR RANGE AND CONGESTION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for adapting blind reception duration for range and congestion. A wireless station may measure channel conditions (e.g., range to an access point (AP) and channel congestion), and adjust one or more sleep timers based on the conditions. The sleep timers may each be associated with a window for reception of an expected transmission. If the transmission is not received in the window, the station may enter a sleep state to conserve power. In one example, a beacon miss timer is adjusted, and the expected wireless transmission is a delivery traffic indication message (DTIM). In another example, a content after beacon (CAB) timer is adjusted and the expected wireless transmission is the CAB. In some cases, the station may measure a delay for a number of beacons and determine the adjustment based on the delays. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088573 | POWER ADAPTION AND RANDOMIZATION FOR INTERFERENCE CANCELATION AND MITIGATION - Embodiments described herein relate generally to a communication between a user equipment (“UE”) and an evolved Node B (“eNB”). A UE may be adapted to signal to an eNB a request to adjust a downlink transmission power level. Based on the request, the eNB may adjust its downlink transmission power level. In another embodiment, an eNB may be adapted to adjust its downlink transmission power level according to a pseudorandom sequence. This pseudorandom sequence may be generated from a seed, which the eNB may signal to a UE. Based on power adjustments and/or randomizations, a UE may perform interference cancellation. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088648 | SCHEDULING IN A MULTIPLE USER MULTIPLE-INPUT AND MULTIPLE OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A technology that is operable to schedule data transfer for a multiple user multiple-input and multiple-output (MU-MIMO) communications network is disclosed. In one embodiment, an enhanced node B (eNode B) is configured with circuitry configured to receive a sounding signal from each of a plurality of user equipment (UEs). One or more major paths of the sounding signals from each of the plurality of UEs are determined. An angle of arrival (AoA) is determined that is associated with each of the one or more major paths. The plurality of UEs are grouped into one or more candidate MU-MIMO sets using the AoAs associated with each of the one or more major paths. Data transmissions are scheduled for one or more of the candidate UEs of the candidate MU-MIMO set on one or more of the major paths of each of the candidate UEs. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088660 | Random Access Method and System - A random access method and system are disclosed. The method includes: a second node sending a random access signaling to a first node; and the first node replying a random access response message to the second node, wherein random access response information of the second node is carried in the random access response message. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088663 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - According to one embodiment, a communication device includes a first circuitry, a second circuitry and a third circuitry. The first circuitry establishes a wireless connection with a first communication device, in accordance with a communication request relating to data communication. The second circuitry measures a communication environment of the communication device to acquire communication environment data. The third circuitry establishes a logical connection with a second communication device relating to the communication request via the wireless connection and controls so as to perform the data communication with the second communication device in accordance with the communication environment data. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094430 | Sampling Packets To Measure Network Performance - Disclosed are system, method, and computer-readable medium embodiments for a network to provide network applications and services and estimate network metrics for individual applications and services. In an embodiment, a first routing device receives a packet and determines that the packet is to be sampled. The first routing device samples the packet by storing first information associated with the packet and transmits the first information to a measurement server. The first routing device transmits the packet towards a destination according to routing information. A second routing device receives the packet and determines that the packet is to be sampled. The second routing device samples the packet by storing second information associated with the packet and transmitting the second information to the measurement server. The measurement server determines a measurement based on the first information and second information. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095006 | Radio Traffic Detector, Network Node and Methods for Assisting Handover - It is presented a method arranged to assist a determination of mobile devices being candidates for handover. The method is performed in a radio traffic detector and comprises: measuring a received signal strength value on a predetermined frequency band; repeating the measuring during a time period; generating a message comprising a timestamp associated with the time period, and a plurality of message elements, wherein each message element is based on a respective received signal strength value for respectively different time instances within the time period; and transmitting the message to a network node to assist the determination of mobile devices being candidates for handover. By using measured received signal strength, uplink traffic can be detected without the need to decode the signals. Corresponding radio traffic device, network node and method are also presented. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095007 | CARRIER COORDINATION DEVICE AND SYSTEM, COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND METHOD, AND MEASUREMENT DEVICE AND METHOD - A carrier coordination device and system, a communications device and method, and a measurement device and method. The carrier coordination device includes: a receiving unit, used to receive interference information for describing interference suffered by a user equipment; and a coordination unit, used to determine an interfering source base station of the user equipment according to the interference information, and coordinate carrier use of the user equipment and/or the interfering source base station at least based on the interference information and carrier state information of the interfering source base station, to reduce the interference suffered by the user equipment. The technology can be applied in a wireless communications field. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095008 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, AND NETWORK NODE - A wireless communications method, user equipment, and a network node are disclosed. The method includes: receiving, by user equipment, a message sent by a first network node, where the message includes measurement instruction information and connection indication information; measuring, by the user equipment in the RRC-IDLE mode, the neighboring cells according to the measurement instruction information, and obtaining measurement results; and selecting, by the user equipment, at least one to-be-connected cell from the neighboring cells according to the connection indication information and the measurement results, and keeping camping on the cell of the first network node when the user equipment is in the RRC-IDLE mode. Embodiments of the present invention can advance a time at which a new cell is found. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095010 | POWER MONITOR SCHEDULING IN DUAL DATA MODE - A method for scheduling monitor activity for a mobile communication device includes: receiving less than all of a plurality of bursts for a first subscription; decoding a packet header by decoding the received bursts; determining if a decoded temporary flow identity (TFI) matches a TFI for the mobile communication device; and in response to a mismatch between the decoded TFI and the TFI for the mobile communication device: inhibiting reception of a remaining plurality of bursts; and scheduling the monitor activity in timeslots reserved for the remaining plurality of bursts for the first subscription that do not conflict with transmissions on a second subscription. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095011 | LOGGING MULTICAST-BROADCAST SINGLE-FREQUENCY NETWORK MEASUREMENTS - Various communication systems may benefit from the appropriate logging of measurements. For example, communication systems employing multimedia broadcast multicast service may benefit from logging multicast-broadcast single-frequency network measurements. A method can include logging, by a user equipment, a multicast-broadcast single-frequency network measurement corresponding to a logging period. The method can also include storing, at the time the multicast-broadcast single-frequency network measurement is made, cell measurement results. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095012 | System and Method for Interference Detection - Solutions for interference detection are provided. A frequency band is scanned ( | 03-31-2016 |
20160095013 | MULTISENSORY CHANGE DETECTION FOR INTERNET OF THINGS DOMAIN - Examples of systems and methods for multisensory change detection are generally described herein. A method may include receiving a first set of signals from a first combination of sensors and a second set of signals from a second combination of sensors in a plurality of sensors, and determining a first distribution for the first set of signals and a second distribution for the second set of signals. The method may include estimating a divergence between the first and second distributions using the first and second combinations of sensors, a count of the plurality of sensors, and distances from a plurality of signals in the second set of signals to a first plurality of nearest neighbor signals in the first set of signals and a second plurality of nearest neighbor signals in the second set of signals. The method may include determining whether the divergence exceeds a threshold. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095048 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION TO AND MEASUREMENTS ON UNLICENSED FREQUENCY CARRIERS - Briefly, the present disclosure is directed to methods and apparatus that allow for the synchronization with, and measurement reporting of, unlicensed frequency carriers. A method and apparatus for synchronizing to an Scell operating on an unlicensed carrier determine, at a UE ( | 03-31-2016 |
20160095051 | ASSISTED DISCOVERY SCANS FOR INDOOR POSITION DETERMINATION - Techniques for determining a position of a mobile device are provided. An example of these techniques is a method that includes performing a passive scan for wireless transceivers proximate to the mobile device to generate passive scan results, generating a first wireless transceiver list, comprising a first set of wireless transceivers, transmitting a request to at least one wireless transceiver from the first wireless transceiver list requesting that the at least one wireless transceiver perform a scan, generating a second wireless transceiver list comprising identifying information for a second set of wireless transceivers, proximate to the at least one wireless transceiver, measuring signals received from wireless transceivers selected from at least one of the first wireless transceiver list and the second wireless transceiver list, and determining the position of the mobile device based at least in part on the signals measured. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095070 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK ASSISTED INTERFERENCE COORDINATION AND MITIGATION - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a system that obtains uplink parameters associated with different sectors of a wireless network where the uplink parameters are associated with uplink transmissions of a first end user device. The system can determine a differential path loss for the first end user device based on the uplink parameters where the differential path loss is between the different sectors of the wireless network. The system, responsive to a determination that the differential path loss does not satisfy a differential path loss threshold, can determine a restriction for utilization of a particular frequency and power level over a particular time period, where the determination that the differential path loss does not satisfy the differential path loss threshold can be performed without utilizing channel quality data from the first end user device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095140 | FACILITATING SOCIAL NETWORKING SERVICE CONNECTIONS VIA AN AD HOC PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK OF MOBILE DEVICES - A first mobile device may be configured to facilitate context-aware, graph-based interactions. For example, the first mobile device receives a first communication from a second mobile device. The first communication includes a second member identifier of a second member of the social networking service. The second member identifier may be associated with the second mobile device. In response to the receiving of the first communication, the first mobile device may determine, based on the second member identifier, that the second member is one of a plurality of members of the social networking service. The first mobile device may facilitate the establishing of the wireless peer-to-peer connection with the second mobile device based on the determining that that the second member is one of the plurality of members of the social networking service. | 03-31-2016 |
20160099857 | Method and System to Monitor a Network - A method of monitoring a network includes receiving by a user plane record aggregator first data associated with a user plane packet, the first data being selected by a user plane network element from second data, the second data being stored in a plurality of information fields, the plurality of information fields being associated with the user plane network element, the second data being obtained by the user plane network element from user plane traffic, the user plane network element processing the user plane packet in accordance with a user plane network function. The method further includes determining by an aggregation device a characteristic associated with the user plane traffic from the first data, thereby monitoring the user plane traffic without requiring a tap. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100317 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC FREQUENCY SELECTION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for a wireless local area network performed by an access point (AP) configured to communicate over a primary subchannel and a secondary subchannel. The AP transmits a frame including a quiet channel element to a receiving station. The quiet channel element indicates that the secondary subchannel is to be quieted during a quiet interval in which the AP tests the secondary subchannel for a presence of radar transmissions and the receiving station does not send any frame to the AP. The quiet channel element includes an AP quiet mode field indicating whether a communication to the AP is allowed within the primary subchannel during the quiet interval. The primary subchannel and the secondary subchannel are quieted during the quiet interval if the AP quiet mode field indicates the communication to the AP is not allowed with the primary subchannel during the quiet interval. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100327 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING THE PERFORMANCE QUALITY OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN THE PRESENCE OF NARROW BAND INTERFERENCE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a process for measuring by a system having a processor, within a wide frequency band, signal power levels received in specified narrow frequency bands, determining an average composite wideband power level that excludes a portion of the power levels of the received signals, detecting interference according to an adaptive threshold based on the average composite wideband power level, and generating an interference report based on the detecting of the interference. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100424 | TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL SPACE ALLOCATION - A method and apparatus of wireless communication schedules at least one grant to a user equipment (UE) with adjusted transmission time interval (TTI) spacing. The TTI spacing enabling the UE to perform inter radio access technology (IRAT) and/or inter frequency measurements. The scheduling is based at least in part on a serving cell signal quality reported by the UE and/or on the availability to the UE of a higher priority network or higher quality frequency. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100431 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL DEVICE - A radio communication system includes a radio base station and a terminal device. The radio base station and the terminal device share correspondence information about subsets of preamble sequences obtained by segmenting preamble sequences available in the radio communication systems into groups, each of the subsets being associated with a received signal level at the terminal device and a number of repetitions for transmitting the preamble sequences of each of the subsets. Based upon a receive level of a signal transmitted from the radio base station, the terminal device selects a subset corresponding to the receive level by referring to the correspondence information and transmits a preamble sequence included in the selected subset at the number of repetitions associated with the selected subset. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100449 | Apparatus and Method for Providing Multiple Connections Using Different Radio Access Technology in Wireless Communication System - The present disclosure relates to a communication method and system for converging a 5 | 04-07-2016 |
20160105248 | Measurements in a Wireless System - Channel state information is generated by a communication device. The device can determine that at least one uplink resource element of a radio frame is to be left unoccupied and perform at least one interference measurement on at least one downlink resource element coinciding with the at least one unoccupied uplink resource element, A channel state information report can then be generated based on the measurement, A network node may cause the communication device to leave at feast one uplink resource element of a radio frame unoccupied. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105265 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING COMMUNICATION QUALITY - A method and an apparatus for measuring communication quality are disclosed. The method includes: acquiring reference signal resource configuration information, where the reference signal resource configuration information at least includes: reference signal port configuration information, and reference signal power information of at least one port group; or the reference signal resource configuration information at least includes: reference signal port configuration information, and a ratio of a power of a data channel in at least one port group to a power of a reference signal; and sending the acquired reference signal resource configuration information to user equipment. Therefore, in a multi-antenna system, accurate signal quality measurement information is acquired, or more accurate channel state information is acquired | 04-14-2016 |
20160105333 | LOGICAL NETWORK TRAFFIC ANALYSIS - Some embodiments of the invention provide a method for gathering data for logical network traffic analysis by sampling flows of packets forwarded through a logical network. Some embodiments are implemented by a set of network virtualization controllers that, on a shared physical infrastructure, can implement two or more sets of logical forwarding elements that define two or more logical networks. In some embodiments, the method (1) defines an identifier for a logical network probe, (2) associates this identifier with one or more logical observation points in the logical network, and (3) distributes logical probe configuration data, including sample-action flow entry data, to one or more managed forwarding elements that implement the logical processing pipeline at the logical observation points associated with the logical network probe identifier. In some embodiments, the sample-action flow entry data specify the packet flows that the forwarding elements should sample and the percentage of packets within these flows that the forwarding elements should sample. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105343 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTION OF ELEPHANT FLOWS - A system and method for detection of elephant flows includes a switching device. The switching device includes one or more ports, a memory, and a control unit coupled to the ports and the memory. The control unit is configured to detect storage locations information included in one or more first messages. The storage locations information identifies a storage node and is forwarded to a computing device. The control unit is further configured to detect opening of a connection between the computing device and the storage node based one or more second messages received for forwarding on one or more of the ports and determine identifying characteristics of an elephant flow based on information associated with the connection. In some embodiments, the control unit is further configured to forward network packets using an altered forwarding strategy when the network packets are associated with the elephant flow | 04-14-2016 |
20160105349 | NETWORK DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CHANNEL QUALITY ESTIMATION - A method for channel quality estimation is executable by a network device. The network device divides channels into a plurality of groups according to a number of channels available in a competing network environment in which the first network device is located, and selects a representative channel from each of the plurality of groups which is central to the frequencies of each available competing channel. The selected representative channels are each tested and each of the channel quality estimations is taken as channel quality estimation of all channels of a group, to save time in estimating and increase efficiency. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105353 | PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT OF A LINK OF A PACKET-SWITCHED COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for performing a performance measurement of a link between two nodes of a communication network. Before starting a measurement, measurement mode information including start time and packet transmission rate are provided to both nodes. At the start time, a first node generates and transmits to the other node a packet flow including packets with transmission times determined by the start time and packet transmission rate. The packet flow is divided into alternating blocks transmitted during even and odd block periods. At each block period, while the packet flow is received, a variable indicative of its behaviour is updated by using the measurement mode information and detected information on reception of the packet flow. Then, a parameter indicative of a performance of the packet flow during the block period is calculated using the value reached by the variable at the end of the block period. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105359 | MESH NETWORK TRANSMISSION DECISIONS BASED ON NODE PERFORMANCE METRICS - Systems and methods for transmission of data through mesh networks are disclosed. Specifically, various techniques and systems are provided for using performance metrics of nodes in a mesh network to make data transmission decisions. Exemplary embodiments of the present invention include a computer-implemented method. The method comprises receiving, at a network device on a network, performance metrics associated with an additional network device on the network; generating performance metrics associated with the network device; storing the performance metrics associated with the network device and the performance metrics associated with the additional network device; and transmitting the performance metrics associated with the network device and the performance metrics associated with an additional network device, wherein when the performance metrics are received, the performance metrics are used to determine whether data will be transmitted to the network device. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105810 | TECHNIQUE FOR TESTING WIRELESS NETWORK LOAD PRODUCED BY MOBILE APP-CARRYING DEVICES - An approach for the analysis of the impact of over the top (OTT) applications is provided, which operate “over the top” of the network applications, with respect to network performance and power consumption on mobile devices. A wireless network for an application-carrying device separate from wireless communications network test equipment is simulated. A wireless communications interface between the simulated network and the application-carrying device is monitored. The monitoring comprises measuring signaling data on a control plane, and measuring application data on a user plane related to at least one application implemented on the application-carrying device. Cross-layer measurement data is generated based on the measured signaling data and application data. The signaling data and the application data are measured on the basis of a common time reference of the test equipment. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105811 | TECHNIQUE FOR TESTING WIRELESS NETWORK LOAD PRODUCED BY MOBILE APP-CARRYING DEVICES - An approach for the analysis of the impact of over the top (OTT) applications is provided, which operate “over the top” of the network applications, with respect to network performance and power consumption on mobile devices. A wireless network for an application-carrying device separate from wireless communications network test equipment is simulated. A wireless communications interface between the simulated network and the application-carrying device is monitored. The monitoring comprises measuring signaling data on a control plane, and measuring application data on a user plane related to at least one application implemented on the application-carrying device. Cross-layer measurement data is generated based on the measured signaling data and application data. The signaling data and the application data are measured on the basis of a common time reference of the test equipment. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105813 | METHOD FOR CELL SELECTION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK BY USER EQUIPMENT IN A CRE REGION - A method and system are provided for a User Equipment (UE) to perform cell selection in a Cell Range Extension (CRE) region in a heterogeneous network. The method includes avoiding barring a primary frequency at a transition to an idle mode, after failing to acquire System Information (SI) from a pico cell in the heterogeneous network; and camping on a cell corresponding to one of the primary frequency and a secondary frequency. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105814 | Methods, Apparatuses, and Systems for Network Analysis - Methods, systems, apparatuses, and computer readable media for providing a network analysis system are disclosed. An example of a system for providing a network analysis system includes at least one satellite device configured to monitor wireless network traffic to determine at least one network communication event, generate an event message based on the at least one network communication event, and transmit the event message. The system also includes a controller device configured to receive the event message, determine an identity of at least one device communicating during the network communication event, determine a network status based at least in part on the identity of the at least one device, and provide the network status via an interface. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105815 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTIMATING COMMUNICATION LOAD, RADIO STATION AND UPPER-LEVEL APPARATUS IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a device for estimating a communication load, as well as a radio station and an upper-level apparatus in a radio communication system, are provided that can estimate a communication load in a target network with high accuracy by using received quality information. A communication load estimation function ( | 04-14-2016 |
20160105817 | METHOD FOR CSI FEEDBACK - Embodiments of systems and methods for flexible Channel State Information (CSI) feedback in a cellular communications network are disclosed. In some embodiments, a base station configures a wireless device with a set of CSI-RS resources, dynamically configures a CSI-RS resource from the set of CSI-RS resources for measurement, and receives a CSI report from the wireless device determined from the CSI-RS resource dynamically configured for measurement. In this manner, the base station is enabled to dynamically configure and re-configure the CSI-RS resource(s) for measurement by the wireless device, which in turn provides flexible CSI feedback that is particularly well-suited for embodiments in which the base station transmits beamformed CSI-RS. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105827 | HANDOVER METHOD FOR MINIMIZING PACKET CALL RECONNECTION DELAY TIME BETWEEN DIFFERENT MOBILE COMMUNICATION SCHEMES AND MULTI-MODE TERMINAL FOR THE SAME - A multi-mode terminal having first and second modems supporting different communication services and method for performing a handover thereof are provided. The method includes receiving, by the first modem, a message including starting condition for handover to a second communication network, wherein the condition is defined by a first communication network; determining, by the first modem, whether the starting condition for handover in the received message is satisfied; if the starting condition for handover in the received message is satisfied, receiving by the second modem, a command from the first modem to handover to the second communication network; and registering, by the second modem, into the second communication network in response to the command of the first modem, and connecting to the second communication network to perform communication. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105847 | NETWORKED SECURITY SYSTEM - A method of communicating between a wireless security device and a security server through an access point includes estimating a link latency between a time of transmission of a message from the wireless security device and a time at which a response is received from the security server. A polling mode is enabled in which the access point will hold messages received by the access point that are directed to the wireless security device while the device is in a sleep state, without discarding the messages for a threshold period of time. The wireless security device may be placed in a sleep state and woken after a wake time determined based on the estimated link latency, and receives any messages received by the access point during the sleep state. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112099 | REFERENCE SIGNALS EXTENSION FOR MASSIVE MIMO SYSTEM - Reference signals (RSs) transmission scheme for massive MIMO system is disclosed. For this, ‘M’ resource blocks (RBs) are grouped into a resource block group (M>1). One or more antenna ports are grouped into one antenna group, wherein each of the antenna ports corresponds to each of the multiple antennas. The reference signals of the one antenna group are mapped into only one RB within one resource block group. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112108 | CSI FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS IN LARGE SCALE ANTENNA SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a channel state information (CSI) feedback method and apparatus in a large-quantity antenna system. An embodiment provides a method used in a UE of a large scale antenna system, including: detecting a downlink channel; determining, according to a multipath propagation model, a channel response of a first number of strong propagation paths, where the channel response of each propagation path is determined as a matrix related to the following time-varying parameters: an arrival direction, time to arrive, and a path amplitude; and feeding back the first number and indication information of the time-varying parameters of the first number of strong propagation paths. By using the sparsity of channels of the large-quantity antenna system, the present invention reduces a feedback payload and maintains at least equal system performance. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112116 | UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE (UAV) BEAM FORMING AND POINTING TOWARD GROUND COVERAGE AREA CELLS FOR BROADBAND ACCESS - Systems and methods configured to form and point beams from an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) toward target cells in a coverage area on the ground. One embodiment determines and forms the required number of UAV fixed beams needed to cover the target area when UAV is at its highest altitude and highest roll/pitch/yaw angles so that the target coverage area is covered under all UAV altitude and orientation conditions. In another embodiment, UAV determines the beam pointing angles toward different cells on the ground using information on position coordinates and orientation angles of the UAV, and the position coordinates of the cells in the coverage area relative to the center of coverage area. In another embodiment, a reference terminal placed at the center of coverage is used by the UAV to optimally point a beam toward center of the coverage area. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112149 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT - A method for performing a measurement in a wireless communication system is provided. A terminal selects one of a plurality of measurement configurations, and performs a measurement according to the selected measurement configuration. Signaling overhead caused by frequently transferring measurement configurations can be reduced. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112150 | METHOD FOR MAPPING WI-FI FINGERPRINTS BY MEANS OF BLIND COLLECTION OF RSS MEASUREMENTS - This invention relates to a method for mapping Wi-Fi fingerprints in a given geographical area. A user, provided with a receiver, sequentially collects Wi-Fi signal strength measurements by moving along the path thereof, with each measurement being constituted by a vector of RSS levels received from the various Wi-Fi access points. A graph that is representative of the path is determined from the sequence of measurements. Thanks to a geometric model of the area, a topographical characterisation of the path is carried out on the basis of the previously obtained graph. The positions of the various measurements of the sequence are provided by the topographical characterisation and stored with said measurements in a database. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112163 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING AND REPORTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR FOR TEMPORALLY UNCORRELATED CHANNELS - Various aspects of the disclosure provide a method of operating a user equipment (UE) to determine and report a throughput enhancing channel quality indicator (CQI) value when a physical channel between the UE and a base station is temporally uncorrelated. Reporting such CQI value may maximize the throughput of the channel when it remains temporally uncorrelated. In one aspect of the disclosure, the UE communicates with a base station utilizing a channel and determines that the channel is temporally uncorrelated. The UE further determines a plurality of CQIs in a first CQI reporting mode and computes the respective throughputs of the channel based on the plurality of CQIs. In addition, the UE selects a CQI of the plurality of CQIs corresponding to the highest throughput among the plurality of throughputs, and reports the selected CQI to the base station in a second CQI reporting mode while the channel remains temporally uncorrelated. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112169 | TECHNIQUES FOR CELL-SPECIFIC REFERENCE SIGNAL (CRS)-BASED SIGNALING IN A SHARED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND - Techniques are described for wireless communication. A first method includes identifying a configuration of a downlink subframe in a shared radio frequency spectrum band, and generating, based at least in part on the configuration of the downlink subframe, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) for the downlink subframe. A second method includes dynamically determining a presence of a CRS in a downlink subframe in a shared radio frequency spectrum band, and performing at least one operation during the downlink subframe in response to the dynamic determination. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112888 | DYNAMIC POINT TO POINT MOBILE NETWORK INCLUDING INTERMEDIATE USER INTERFACE ASPECTS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A computationally implemented system and method that is designed to, but is not limited to: electronically presenting output of mobile operating system operated code as user interface content presented on one or more user interface outputs of a mobile communication device based at least upon electronic reception of communication traffic related to use of the mobile communication device as a communication relay node of one or more ad hoc communication networks called into operation from standby status, the ad hoc communication network for service of communication between one or more origination electronic communication devices and one or more destination electronic communication devices. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112889 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION OF BASE STATION FOR MU-MIMO TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION IN DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A base station acquires an arrival time at which a signal that is transmitted from a plurality of terminals arrives at a plurality of Remote Radio Heads (RRH) that are installed within a cell, calculates an arrival delay time between the plurality of terminals and the plurality of RRHs using a predetermined reference time and an arrival time of the plurality of RRHs, selects RRHs to participate in receiving the uplink MU-MIMO among the plurality of RRHs using an arrival delay time between the plurality of terminals and the plurality of RRHs, and adjusts a transmitting time of the plurality of terminals using an arrival delay time between the plurality of terminals and RRHs to participate in receiving the uplink MU-MIMO. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112890 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing communication in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes receiving Measurement Gap (MG) configuration information related to the measurement gap, determining a subframe number specifying a starting point of the measurement gap based on the measurement gap configuration information, starting the measurement gap at an end of a subframe immediately before a subframe of the determined subframe number, performing a predetermined measurement operation during the measurement gap, and performing a predetermined operation in a subframe immediately after the measurement gap based on a duplexing mode of a User Equipment (UE) and a type of the subframe immediately before the measurement gap. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112891 | ESTIMATING AVAILABLE BANDWITH IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - Systems and methods for estimating bandwidth. A first probe flow is sent into cellular traffic, and a first bandwidth quantity achieved by the first probe flow is measured. A second probe flow is sent into the cellular traffic, and a second bandwidth quantity achieved by the first probe flow while the second probe flow is in the cellular traffic is measured. The first bandwidth quantity and the second bandwidth quantity are compared, and at least one result from the comparing is determined. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112893 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING A LOGGED MEASUREMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing a logged measurement in wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving measurement configuration from a network, logging MDT (Minimization of Driving Tests) measurement, detecting whether a condition for state transition has occurred, performing state transition when the condition for state transition has occurred, and logging state transition information related to said state transition. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112894 | Contextual Quality of User Experience Analysis Using Equipment Dynamics - The techniques described herein involve determining a context-based Quality of Experience based upon client device Quality of Experience diagnostic files in combination with client device equipment dynamics. Client device Quality of Experience (QoE) diagnostic files may indicate a reduced QoE at a client device, such as reduced signal strength or an increased number of dropped packets. User behavior during a reduced QoE event may be reflected as equipment dynamics, which may be included in equipment dynamics files. A service provider may receive information from the client device and may analyze the information to determine, with an increased confidence level, that the user device experiences a reduced QoE. Network resources may be allocated in response to the reduced QoE determination, thereby increasing a functioning of the computing network and an associated device's Quality of Experience. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112969 | TECHNIQUES FOR ENERGY DETECTION LEVEL ADJUSTMENTS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for improve network performance, such as throughput and PER, by allowing nodes to adjust energy detection (ED) threshold levels. For example, a method for Wi-Fi wireless communication includes determining, by a first node, an ED threshold level for a second node of a wireless network based at least in part on a metric for the first node. The method may also include signaling, from the first node to the second node, an ED level set element that indicates the determined ED threshold level. In another example, a method includes signaling, by a first node, an ED level adjustment capability of the first node to one or more nodes in a wireless network. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113029 | SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A network device may determine channel quality of a radio channel in a wireless network based on information from a user equipment (UE). Assistance information may provide channel conditions at a first network device. Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) streams based on the received assistance information and the channel quality may be dynamically scheduled. The network device may send to the first network device assistance information to cause scheduling adjustments. The sent assistance information may provide channel conditions in relation to the network device. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119164 | COMPONENT AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION - A communication management component for organizing data exchanges between communicating devices of an Ethernet type network, the management component having interface means, distribution means adapted to acquire incoming data coming from each communicating device via interface means and to distribute it via the interface means to the other communicating devices, and processor means arranged to control the distribution means in such a manner that the incoming data coming from a sender device is distributed to the other devices, each communicating device in turn becoming the sender device in a first predefined sequence that is repeated cyclically. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119174 | Method and Apparatus for Identifying Channel Bandwidth and Channel Offset of an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Signal - Methods, apparatuses and systems for identifying a channel bandwidth and channel offset of an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) signal. The OFDM signal is received by a receiver apparatus that may be tuned to RF bandwidth of 20 MHz, 40 MHz or 80 MHz. The method utilized by the apparatus includes identifying the location of the primary channel and subsequently determining a sequence of equalized frequency domain sub-symbols of the signal field in the lower and the upper frequency band. Further, a cross-correlation between the sequence of equalized frequency domain sub-symbols is computed along with the computing energy of the sequence of equalized frequency domain sub-symbols. Finally, the cross-correlation and the computed energy are compared for identifying the channel offset and the channel bandwidth. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119182 | MONITORING INTERNET USAGE ON HOME NETWORKS OF PANELIST USERS - The present disclosure relates generally to monitoring internet usage on home networks of panelist users. One examples method includes after determining that a user has accepted an offer to modify a home network of the user to monitor network traffic generated by devices connected to the home network, identifying a gateway device on the home network configured to receive network traffic from devices connected to the home network and communicate with an external network on behalf of the devices; determining that the gateway device is operable to be modified over the home network to include a monitoring application; and in response to determining that the gateway device is operable to be modified, modifying the gateway device over the home network to include the monitoring application. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method comprising: determining in an element that a load level in the element has changed; and deactivating at least one inactive session when a load level is above a load level threshold. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119211 | TUNNELED MONITORING SERVICE AND METHOD - Some embodiments provide systems and methods to monitor network communications, comprising: a computing device comprising a control circuit and memory with instructions executed by the control circuit to implement: a tunneled monitoring service (TMS) operated local on the mobile computing device; and a tunnel protocol within the mobile computing device that is configured to establish a tunnel interface between software applications and the TMS, wherein the tunnel interface is configured to collect output data transactions, communicated by the software applications, and direct the output data transactions to the TMS; wherein the TMS is configured to initiate a monitoring of each output data transaction relative to predefined criteria to identify relevant parameter information, obtained from one or more of the output data transactions, that have a predefined relationship with one or more of the criteria, and cause results of the monitoring relative to the criteria to be recorded. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119216 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING SECONDARY COMPONENT CARRIER IN CARRIER AGGREGATION - The present invention relates to communication technology. Disclosed are a method and device for activating and deactivating a secondary component carrier (SCC) in carrier aggregation. When the cache data volume reported by an RLC reaches an activation data volume threshold, increasing the count value of an SCC activation counter instead of directly activating an SCC; when determining that a monitor condition is met, and if the ratio of the count value of the SCC activation counter and the report times of the RLC reaches a set activation threshold, then indicating that the cache data volumes reported for multiple times all reach the activation data volume threshold, and then activating the SCC, thus avoiding multiple activations and deactivations during a short time, and improving SCC rate stability. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119384 | Dynamic Rate Adaptation During Real-Time LTE Communication - Methods and computing systems for dynamic rate adaption during real-time Long Term Evolution (LTE) communication are described. A real-time LTE communication session with another mobile device is established over an LTE connection. The real-time LTE communication session is established with codec rate. A monitor component receives data indicating a performance of the real-time LTE communication session, and causes the real-time LTE communication component to perform, during the real-time LTE communication session, a renegotiation of the codec rate based at least on the performance of the real-time LTE communication session. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119797 | LTE CELL SEARCH AND BLUETOOTH eSCO COEXISTENCE USING SHARED ANTENNA - A UE may use a same antenna for both Bluetooth communications and WWAN cell search and measurement operations. In order to avoid interference, the UE may adjust the periodicity of the WWAN cell search and measurement operations. Adjustment of the WWAN cell search and measurement periodicity may be based on a link quality of the Bluetooth communications. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119798 | ADAPTIVE COMMUNICATION FOR MOBILE ROUTER SYSTEMS - An approach to adaptively positioning a set of mobile routers to provide communication services to a set of clients makes use of estimated direction profiles of communication between routers and clients. The approach does not rely on a Euclidean model in which communication characteristics (e.g., signal strength, data rate, etc.) depend on distance between communicating nodes, and does not necessarily require sampling of communication characteristics in unproductive directions in order to move the routers to preferable locations. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119800 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes: a wireless communicator and a communication controller. When the wireless communicator does not receive an ACK signal corresponding to first data from the destination wireless communication device after transmitting the first data, the communication controller causes the wireless communicator to retransmit the first data, and, when the wireless communicator receives an ACK signal corresponding to first data from the destination wireless communication device after transmitting the first data to the destination wireless communication device, the communication controller causes the wireless communicator to transmit second data that is subsequent to the first data to the destination wireless communication device at a timing at which a prescribed time period has elapsed after transmitting the first data or after receiving the ACK signal, the prescribed time period corresponding to a period of an interference wave produced due to an interference device operating has elapsed. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119801 | Network based determination of whether to add a device to a system using CSMA - The present disclosure relates to wireless networks, and more specifically to multiple access networks. The present disclosure relates to methods implemented by a wireless network node, to which a number of wireless devices are already connected of determining admission of a further wireless device. The disclosure provides for a method implemented by a wireless network node, to which a number of wireless devices are already connected and are communicating using an access method, of determining admission of a further wireless device. The method comprises calculating a measure of the performance of a possible future connection between the wireless network node and the wireless device under ideal network condition estimating an expected performance of a possible future connection between the wireless network node and the further wireless device, as the calculated measure of the performance while taking into account effects of the used access method; and determining admission of the further wireless device based on the estimated expected performance. It further relates to a wireless network node configured to perform the methods. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119804 | ADAPTIVE CONTROL CHANNEL DETECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Aspects described herein relate to adaptive control channel detection in wireless communications. A signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of a signal received by a receiver comprising multiple sub-receivers is measured, wherein the SINR is filtered according to a signal combining technology. Based at least in part on the SINR, it is determined whether to utilize the signal combining technology in combining signals related to a channel received over the multiple sub-receivers. Accordingly, the signals related to the channel received over the multiple sub-receivers can be demodulated using the signal combining technology based on determining to utilize the signal combining technology | 04-28-2016 |
20160119805 | METHOD FOR A PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING DISTANCE OR ANGLE BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES CONNECTED WIRELESSLY - In a procedure for determining distance (or angle) between a pair of electronic devices wirelessly connected to one another, a current session may be temporarily suspended on request and thereafter the current session may be resumed. Temporary suspension and resumption of the current session may, for example, eliminate starting a new session between the pair of electronic devices and repeating a determination of parameters that were initially agreed upon in the current session. Temporary suspension of a current session may be signaled wirelessly, by one electronic device to the other electronic device, for example, by setting a specific value in a specific field, to signal that the current session is to be paused now, in a frame or message transmitted from the pausing device to the to-be-paused device. The current session may be resumed without repeating determination of the initially-agreed upon parameters, by transmitting a frame to initiate measurement exchange. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119807 | CHANNEL FEEDBACK FOR NON-ORTHOGONAL MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEMS - Channel feedback for non-orthogonal multiple access (NOMA) multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication systems may be reported by determining a measurement set of transmission strategies for channel feedback for a non-orthogonal channel. Estimates of channel quality for downlink transmissions to the UE corresponding to respective transmission strategies of the measurement set may then be determined. A channel feedback report may then be sent. The channel feedback report may include indicators of channel quality for a subset of the measurement set of transmission strategies. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119808 | PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS USING MULTIPLE CARRIERS - Methods and systems to configure and/or reconfigure measurement configuration in wireless communications with one or more cells are disclosed. Measurement configuration reporting may be reconfigured based on events associated with the one or more serving cells and/or one or more serving component carriers, among others. Measurement configuration and measurement configuration reporting may also be reconfigured based on events associated with one or more serving component carriers. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119823 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION MODE OF TELEMATICS TERMINAL - A method for controlling a communication mode in a telematics center associated with a telematics terminal through a mobile network is disclosed. The method includes receiving a voice over LET (VoLTE) setting state report message from the telematics terminal and determining whether VoLTE setting requires a change for the telematics terminal. When the VoLTE setting requires a change, a VoLTE setting change request message is transmitted to the telematics terminal. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119829 | HANDOVER PREPARATION IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for preparing handover of a mobile device from a serving base station in a radio communications system, includes sending an identity indicator of the mobile device, from the serving base station to a plurality of neighbouring bases stations; receiving, from at least a subset of said neighbouring base stations, detection data representing the respective base station's ability to detect the mobile device; sending cell identity data, from the serving base station to the mobile device, representing at least candidate base stations for the mobile device to monitor. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119876 | MOBILITY BASED POWER CONSERVATION - A user equipment (UE) prioritizes searches and/or measurements of neighbor cells/frequencies based on a level of mobility of a UE. In one instance, the UE identifies a priority of a layer of a radio access technology (RAT) to be measured or searched and identifies a level of mobility of the UE. A sensor module of the UE may determine the level of mobility of the UE and generate an indication corresponding to the level of mobility of the UE. The UE prioritizes a periodicity of interlayer search and/or measurement based on the priority of the layer to be measured and the level of the mobility of the UE. | 04-28-2016 |
20160127019 | Unsolicited Channel Sounding in a Wireless Local Area Network - A transceiver for a wireless local area network (WLAN) and the transceiver including a sounding feedback module and a sounding feedforward module. The sounding feedback module is responsive to an explicit sounding from a transmitting one of the nodes to send feedback of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) channel state information (CSI) derived from the channel sounding to the transmitting one of the nodes for improving subsequent transmissions. The sounding feedforward module is configured to monitor changes in CSI since the last explicit sounding based on CSI determined from the subsequent transmissions of the transmitting one of the nodes and responsive to a determination of a change in CSI above a threshold amount, to feedforward to the transmitting one of the nodes indicia of the change in CSI. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127055 | MECHANISM TO MEASURE, REPORT, AND ALLOCATE A HIGHEST POSSIBLE RANK FOR EACH CELL IN A CARRIER AGGREGATION (CA) MODE RECEIVER-LIMITED USER EQUIPMENT (UE) - Certain aspects of the claimed invention generally relate to a network dynamically configuring one or more cells based on signal quality measurements received from all antennas of a receiver-limited UE. The receiver-limited UE may have a number of receivers that is less than or equal to a number of antennas of the UE. Further, the UE may be capable of operating in a CA mode. Dynamically configuring the one or more cells based, at least in part, on the received signal quality measurements may allow the UE to operate on M×N MIMO on the Pcell or Scell. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127057 | DYNAMIC LTE SIGNAL DETECTION - Systems and methods allow LAA LTE equipment to coexist with other services in the unlicensed band such as WIFI or WLAN services. Systems and methods use LTE reference signals in the unlicensed spectrum that are not continuous and can be interrupted by a WIFI signal or other services in the unlicensed band or use a dynamic LAA ON burst or window to provide the LTE reference signals in some embodiments. The systems and methods can detect the presence of LTE signals using a one or more of a number of techniques. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127059 | RADIO LINK PERFORMANCE PREDICTION - A method for predicting the performance of a Line-Of-Sight, LOS, multiple-input multiple-output, MIMO, radio link, the method comprising the steps of determining a single-input single-output, SISO, radio link operating condition comprising a SISO system gain, and calculating a LOS-MIMO incremental gain of the LOS-MIMO radio link, as well as modifying the determined SISO radio link operating condition by accounting for the calculated LOS-MIMO incremental gain in the SISO system gain to obtain a LOS-MIMO radio link operating condition comprising a LOS-MIMO system gain, and also obtaining a set of operating condition requirements of the LOS-MIMO radio link. The method also comprising the step of predicting the LOS-MIMO radio link performance by comparing the LOS-MIMO radio link operating condition to the operating condition requirements of the LOS-MIMO radio link. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127076 | METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL INFORMATION BASED ON LINK ADAPTATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND THE APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method and a device for reporting a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) feedback in a wireless local area network are provided. A responding station receives, from a requesting station, a requesting Physical layer Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) for requesting a MCS feedback via a plurality of spatial streams. A recommended MCS is estimated under an assumption that the requesting station will transmit at least one first spatial stream among the plurality of spatial streams used for the requesting PPDU, The responding station transmits, to the requesting station, the MCS feedback including a recommended MCS field indicating the recommended MCS and a recommended stream field indicating a number of at least one recommended spatial stream. A number of the at least one first spatial stream used for estimating the recommended MCS is equal to the number of the at least one recommended spatial stream. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127078 | Link Adaptation Feedback Method and Transmitting Device - Embodiments of the present invention provide a link adaptation feedback method and a transmitting device. The method includes: receiving, by a transmitting device, a link adaptation feedback frame sent by a receiving device, where the link adaptation feedback frame carries space-time block coding type indication information; and determining, by the transmitting device according to the space-time block coding type indication information, information about use of space-time block coding by a data frame related to the link adaptation feedback frame. Through the embodiments of the present invention, and according to the use information, the transmitting device may select the space-time stream, and the MCS used when the transmitting device sends a data frame, thereby improving link performance. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127094 | PILOT RECONFIGURATION AND RETRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Adaptive pilot signaling is disclosed in which resources allocated to pilot symbols are allowed to vary to more closely match channel conditions. User equipments (UEs) may request different pilot configurations depending on channel conditions. In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a first set of pilot symbols using a first number of resource elements during a first transmission time interval (TTI), and receiving a second set of pilot symbols using a second number of resource elements during a second TTI. In the embodiment, the first TTI and the second TTI include the same number of resource elements, and the first number of resource elements is different than the second number of resource elements. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127114 | METHOD OF MEASURING SELF-INTERFERENCE CHANNEL AND USER EQUIPMENT THERETO - A method of measuring a self-interference channel in user equipment in a full duplex radio (FDR) communication environment is disclosed. The method includes receiving, from a base station, resource allocation information including information about a time interval, the base station stopping transmission of a signal in the time interval for measurement of the self-interference channel in the user equipment, transmitting a first reference signal for measurement of the self-interference channel in the time interval specified by the resource allocation information, and receiving a second reference signal input to a receiver of the user equipment according to self-interference in the time interval, wherein the second reference signal is a signal corresponding to the first reference signal transmitted over a wireless channel. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127141 | Network-Based Service for the Repair of IP Multicast Sessions - A system and method are disclosed for the repair of IP multicast sessions. A repair server polls multiple transmit servers to accumulate as many of the packets missing from the multicast session as possible. A network includes a source of multicast packets in a multicast session and a plurality of multicast recipients in that session. A repair server in the network provides the packets it receives to the recipients. The repair server includes a missing packet detector. There is a plurality of retransmit servers in the network buffering portions of the packets they respectively receive during the session. The repair server maintains an ordered list of the retransmit servers that are most likely to have buffered copies of packets missing from the session. When the repair server detects that there are packets missing from the session it has received, it uses the ordered list to sequentially request the missing packets from respective ones of the plurality of retransmit servers. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127153 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION ENHANCEMENTS - The disclosure relates in some aspects to techniques for improved channel estimation. For example, a device can specify a pilot structure where pilot density differs over time. As another example, a device can indicate that a pilot from a prior transmission time interval (TTI) can be used for channel estimation. As another example, a device can employ frequency domain physical resource block (PRB) bundling with the bundling information signaling. As yet another example, a device can use an adjustable traffic-to-pilot ratio (TPR) for throughput optimization. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also discussed and claimed. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127175 | NETWORK CONTROL - Systems and methods for managing a network are disclosed. For example, systems and methods are disclosed for selectively disabling and/or otherwise configuring devices to avoid interference, overlapping service, and/or the like. Signal information for nearby devices can be detected and analyzed to determine device configuration settings. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127205 | Link Cost Determination For Network Links - A link cost determining method including computing, by a station, a new composite data rate using a set of data rates including an average data rate, a geometric mean data rate, and a minimum data rate for data samples, computing, by the station, a pair of hysteresis thresholds for a previous composite data rate, determining, by the station, whether the new composite data rate exceeds one of the pair of hysteresis thresholds, and advertising, by the station, the new composite data rate when the new composite data rate exceeds one of the pair of hysteresis thresholds. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127214 | Tracing Host-Originated Logical Network Packets - Some embodiments provide a method for a first host machine that hosts a virtual machine connected to a particular logical network. The method receives a command to test connectivity between the first host machine and a set of at least one additional host machine that also host virtual machines on the particular logical network. At the first host machine, the method generates a packet for sending to the set of additional host machines in order to test the connectivity. The method appends to the generated packet (i) information that identifies the particular logical network and (ii) a flag indicating that the packet is for connectivity testing. The method encapsulates the generated packet with tunnel endpoint addresses, including a tunnel endpoint located at the first host machine. The method sends the encapsulated packet from the first host machine to the set of additional host machines according to the tunnel encapsulation. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127215 | Packet Loss and Bandwidth Coordination - A method of transmitting a stream of packets over a network, the method comprising the steps of: a transmitting device maintaining a measure of network quality; analyzing the measure of network quality so as to determine whether the bandwidth of the network is degrading, beyond a predetermined threshold, the network quality for a transmission over the network; the transmitting device determining a transmission bitrate and a proportion of redundancy in dependence on the analysis; the transmitting device packetising media data and redundancy data in dependence on the determined proportion to generate a stream of packets; and the transmitting device transmitting the generated stream at a rate commensurate with the determined transmission bitrate. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127519 | Adaptive Acknowledgment Transmissions - Systems and techniques for adaptive automatic acknowledgment handling are described. A described system includes a memory structure to store a data rate (DR) adaptation mode indicator, a frame check sequence (FCS) adaptation mode indicator, a preset DR parameter, and a preset FCS parameter; an extractor to extract a DR parameter from a received frame to produce an extracted DR parameter and extract a FCS parameter from the received frame to produce an extracted FCS parameter; a selector to select between the preset DR parameter and the extracted DR parameter based on the DR adaptation mode indicator to produce a selected DR parameter and select between the preset FCS parameter and the extracted FCS parameter based on the FCS adaptation mode indicator to produce a selected FCS parameter; and a generator to generate an acknowledgment to the received frame based on the selected DR parameter and the selected FCS parameter. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127924 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING NETWORK STATUS - A method for determining a network status is provided. The method includes obtaining a period determined by a first processor of an electronic apparatus, using a second processor of the electronic apparatus, transmitting a preset message from the electronic apparatus to another apparatus in a network according to the determined period, using the second processor, determining the network status based on at least one of (i) whether or not a response to the preset message is received and (ii) information included in the response, using the second processor, and when the network status is determined to be abnormal, activating the first processor using the second processor. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127927 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FREQUENCY ERROR CORRECTION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for correcting frequency error in a received signal include: receiving a satellite signal, the satellite signal having a bandwidth and a center frequency; determining the profile of the satellite signal; computing the center frequency of the satellite signal based on the profile of the received signal; and generating a reference signal at the computed center frequency. The systems and methods may further include computing a center frequency of each of a plurality of satellite signals based on the computed center frequency. Determining the profile may include sweeping a tuner above and below a given reference frequency; measuring the received signal strength during the sweeping operation; and determining the profile based on the received signal strength. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127930 | WIRELESS SYSTEM - The present invention provides a system that provides and extends wireless RF signals to any distance location beyond the normal transmission/broadcast of cellular tower utilizing a existing network. The system provides wireless communication carried by wire lines for communication and testing between remote locations in real-time. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127932 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A mobile telecommunications network includes a core network ( | 05-05-2016 |
20160127935 | Method and Controller for Low-Overhead User Equipment Measurements - An embodiment method includes identifying a plurality of VTP configurations representing allocations of TPs among a plurality of VTPs each having at least one TP. Potential serving VTPs are then identified for a selected UE in a plurality of UEs according to at least one UE centric criterion. The potential serving VTPs are selected for each of the plurality of VTP configurations. A UE measurement set is then scheduled for the potential serving VTPs for a scheduled channel resource according to measurement parameters. The method further includes selecting a serving VTP configuration from the plurality of VTP configurations according to UE measurement feedback from the selected UE. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127936 | USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS FOR CSI MEASUREMENTS WITH REDUCED BANDWIDTH SUPPORT - An enhanced NodeB (eNB), user equipment (UE) and method of Channel State Information (CSI) measurement and reporting using reduced bandwidth are generally described herein. The UE is preconfigured with a resource configuration information or the configuration information is transmitted to the UE from the eNB. The configuration information indicates a narrowband region on which to monitor for and receive physical downlink control and data channels and perform measurements for CSI computation. The region has a reduced bandwidth that is supported by the UE and is free from subbands outside of the region. The UE takes measurements of downlink transmissions using the assigned resources. The measurements are limited to subbands included within the region. The UE calculates the CSI based on an unrestricted time interval within subframes of the region and a restricted frequency interval free from physical resource blocks outside the region. The UE reports a region-specific wideband CSI that includes at least a region-specific wideband Channel Quality Indicator to the eNB. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127937 | Wireless Local Area Network with Spatial Diagnostics - A diagnostic system for spatial diagnosis of the WLAN includes: a sounding aggregator and a spatial correlator. The sounding aggregator is configured to aggregate multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) channel state information (CSI) from channel soundings of the WLAN, including channel soundings between a wireless access point (WAP) node and associated station nodes on a selected one of a plurality of communication channels of the WLAN. The spatial correlator is coupled to the sounding aggregator and configured to correlate CSI from the channel soundings with spatial characteristics of the WLAN including at least one of: a change in location of a WLAN node, human activity among the WLAN nodes, and structural impediments among WLAN nodes. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127938 | USER TERMINAL APPARATUS, ELECTRONIC APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A user terminal apparatus and an electronic apparatus are provided. The user terminal apparatus including a first communicator configured to perform wireless communication with an external apparatus; a second communicator configured to perform bilateral wireless communication with the external apparatus; a storage configured to store information about a connection with an access point; and a controller configured to control the first communicator to transmit a control signal to the external apparatus, to initiate a pairing operation with the external apparatus, and in response to performing the pairing, to control the second communicator to transmit the information about the connection with the access point to the external apparatus. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127939 | STATUS PROHIBITION TIMER DISABLING FOR PARTIAL STATUS REPORT - Apparatus and methods, in one or more aspects, provide for status report management of received data packets at a wireless device. The wireless device may determine that a first status report, generated in response to identifying a number of missing data packets within a sequence of a plurality of data packets received at the UE, includes information associated with fewer than the number of missing data packets. The wireless device may transmit the first status report. The wireless device may also disable a status prohibition timer in response to the transmitting based on the determination. The wireless device may transmit a second status report including information associated with a remainder of the number of missing data packets not included in the first status report. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127944 | ADAPTIVE QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR WIDE AREA NETWORK TRANSPORT - An example method is provided and includes determining a time shift comprising a difference in time between a packet count observation at a transmit element and a corresponding packet count observation at a receive element connected to the transmit element via a link; obtaining a first packet count from the transmit element and a second packet count from the receive element; and adjusting at least one of the first packet count and the second packet count to compensate for the time shift. The method further includes comparing the adjusted first and second packet counts to determine whether there is a discrepancy between the counts and if a discrepancy is detected between the counts, adjusting a rate at which the transmit element sends packets to the receive element. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127952 | Reception Method of MTC Device - The present specification provides a reception method of a machine type communication (MTC) device. The reception method can comprise the steps of: receiving a control channel through the entire system bandwidth on first and second orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols of a subframe; and determining whether to receive a data channel only in a reduced bandwidth compared with the system bandwidth from the third symbol of the subframe. At this point, when the control channel does not continue up until a third symbol of the subframe, the data channel can be received in a reduced bandwidth compared with the system bandwidth from the third symbol of the subframe. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127973 | DISPLAY APPARATUS FOR USING NETWORKS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A display apparatus and a control method thereof are provided, wherein the display apparatus receives input of information of a plurality of networks, sets priority information of the plurality of networks, and in response to receving a command to select one of the plurality of networks, measures a signal intensity of the selected network, and when the measured signal intensity is below a preset value, changes to a next-order network from among the plurality of networks based on the priority information. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128069 | DE-SENSE CHARACTERIZATION WITH ACCURATE ESTIMATION OF TX BACKOFF BASED ON DYNAMIC CHANNEL CONDITIONS - A method for determining transmission power backoff includes: for each combination of a plurality of predetermined receive (RX) signal power levels and transmit (TX) signal power levels: setting the RX signal power level for a first radio access technology (RAT) to one of the predetermined power levels; setting the TX signal power level for a second RAT to one of the predetermined power levels; subtracting a predetermined TX power backoff amount from the predetermined TX signal power level and transmitting the TX signal; measuring the RX signal frame error rate (FER); and increasing the TX power backoff amount by a predetermined amount until the FER is not greater than a predetermined threshold value at the predetermined RX signal power level. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128070 | CONFIGURABLE CLEAR CHANNEL ASSESSMENT - An example method of assessing one more communication channels includes receiving an indication to initiate channel assessment, receiving a user-selected first set of assessment parameters, and determining whether or not the first communication channel is busy based on the first set of assessment parameters. The method also includes replacing the first set of assessment parameters with a user-selected second set of assessment parameters, and determining whether or not the second communication channel is busy based on the second set of assessment parameters. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128123 | Method and Device for Triggering Multiple UE Cooperative Communication - In the present invention, a network device acquires terminal proximity relationship information and determines, according to the proximity relationship information, a beneficed terminal of multiple UE cooperative communication and at least one adjacent terminal of the beneficed terminal, the network device acquires channel quality information of the beneficed terminal and the at least one adjacent terminal of the beneficed terminal, makes, according to the channel quality information of the beneficed terminal and the at least one adjacent terminal of the beneficed terminal, a decision on whether to trigger the multiple UE cooperative communication for the beneficed terminal, and determines a supporting terminal of the multiple UE cooperative communication for the beneficed terminal according to the acquired channel quality information of the beneficed terminal and the at least one adjacent terminal of the beneficed terminal when it is decided that the multiple UE cooperative communication needs to be triggered. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134437 | DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNAL BASED CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK IN OFDM-MIMO SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for using demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) based channel state information (CSI) feedback in Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing-multiple-input multiple-output (OFDM-MIMO) systems is disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include: a receiver configured to receive broadcast information from an eNodeB, wherein the broadcast information is received by a plurality of WTRUs; and a processor configured to derive, from the received broadcast information, physical resource blocks having demodulation reference signals (DM-RS) and precoding information of the DM-RS; the receiver and the processor further configured to derive a channel estimation using the DM-RS received in the physical resource blocks, wherein the plurality of WTRUs derive a channel estimation using the DM-RS received in the physical resource blocks. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134478 | NETWORK ENTITY AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A SON-FUNCTION - The invention relates to a network entity installed in a network comprising an operator objective interface for receiving operator objectives; a SON-Function model interface for receiving at least a first SON Function Model, wherein the network entity is adapted to link the operator objectives with the first SON-Function model in order to adapt a SON Function for influencing a network behavior. Moreover the invention relates to a method for automatic controlling of at least one SON Function. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134485 | BANDWIDTH PREDICTION APPARATUS, BANDWIDTH PREDICTION SYSTEM, BANDWIDTH PREDICTION METHOD AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - There is provided a bandwidth prediction apparatus. An acquisition unit is configured to acquire position information indicating a first position at which a bandwidth is to be predicted. A prediction unit is configured to predict a bandwidth at the first position by using respective measured values of bandwidths measured in advance at a plurality of second positions. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134500 | MAINTENANCE METHOD FOR NETWORK CONNECTION AND COMPUTER SYSTEM - A maintenance method for network connection and a computer system are provided. The method is adapted to a computer system having a real-time clock. The real-time clock is configured to regularly wake up the computer system to check whether a network connection is working normally. In the method, a wake up operation to wake up the computer system is received from a user. It is determined whether a connection time of maintaining the network connection so far from a last time of entering a power saving mode is greater than a counting time for the real-time clock to wake up the computer system. It is tested whether the network connection is working normally when the connection time is greater than the counting time. The counting time of the real-time clock is updated to the connection time when the network connection is working normally. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134501 | DATA TRAFFIC PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS - A method of analysing a stream of data packets received at a first device, each data packet within the stream of data packets having a respective sequence number associated with a respective position within the buffer. The method includes providing an indication of the receipt of the data packet at an associated position within a buffer for each received data packet. A head index is maintained at a position of the buffer associated with a received data packet having a highest sequence number and a tail index is maintained at a position of the buffer associated with a received data packet having a lowest sequence number. It is determining, for each position of the buffer through which the tail index passes, whether an indication of receipt is stored at that buffer position and updating a packets lost count when a buffer position does not store an indication of receipt. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134502 | System and Method for Monitoring And Altering Performance of a Packet Network - The disclosed embodiments include a system and method for monitoring performance of a packet network. In one embodiment, a method includes determining network performance information of a packet network by monitoring performance information packets that are communicated along network paths of the packet network. The method also includes appending the network performance information gathered at a network node along the network paths to data stored in the performance information packets. The method stores the network performance information collected by monitoring the performance information packets in memory and analyzes the stored network performance information to generate historical network performance information. The method automatically alters network operation in response to current network performance information indicating that the packet network is not operating properly based on the historical network performance information. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134506 | HIDDEN NODE COUNTERACTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for an access point of a wireless local area network is disclosed for counteracting problems with hidden nodes. The method comprises, for each individual terminal of a plurality of terminals wirelessly connected to the access point, detecting whether that individual terminal is a hidden node for one or more of the other terminals of the plurality of terminals. The method further comprises requesting that individual terminal to apply RTS/CTS signaling for data to be transmitted from that individual terminal to the access point only if it is detected that said individual terminal is a hidden node. A corresponding access point is also disclosed. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134507 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF NETWORK DIAGNOSIS - Embodiments provide systems and methods for diagnosing a network and identifying problems in a network which reduce the data transfer rate of data through the network. One embodiment of a method for network diagnosis may include infusing data into a network upstream and downstream of a portion of the network relative to a library drive, querying the drive at intervals over time for drive data to determine the data transfer rate at the drive and comparing the data transfer rate of the data infused upstream of the device or network portion with the data transfer rate of the data infused downstream of the device or network portion to determine throughput. By comparing the data transfer rate of data infused upstream and downstream of a network device or network portion, problem devices in a network may be identified. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135003 | CIRCUIT OF A NODE AND METHOD FOR TRANSIT TIME MEASUREMENT IN A RADIO NETWORK - A circuit of a node in a radio network and method for transit time measurement between a first node and a second node of a radio network is provided. A frame is transmitted by the first node, wherein the frame requires an acknowledgment of reception by the second node. A first point in time of the transmission of the frame is established by the first node by a time counter. The frame is received by the second node at a second point in time. The acknowledgment is transmitted by the second node to the first node at a third point in time, wherein the third point in time depends on the second point in time by a predetermined time interval between the second point in time and the third point in time. A fourth point in time is established by the first node by the time counter when the acknowledgment is received. The transit time or the change in transit time is determined from the first point in time established by the time counter and from the established fourth point in time and from the predetermined time interval. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135056 | Device of Handling Measurement Signal on Unlicensed Carrier - A communication device comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise receiving a bitmap in at least one downlink (DL) control information (DCI) on at least one licensed carrier from a network; and determining whether to perform a radio resource management (RRM) measurement, a time/frequency synchronization and/or an automatic gain control (AGC) setting by utilizing at least one measurement signal in at least one subframe on at least one unlicensed carrier according to the bitmap. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135062 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING PARAMETER OF ANTENNA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for optimizing a parameter of an antenna based on radio frequency (RF) environment information in a wireless communication system are provided. The electronic device includes a reception unit configured to receive first network information and second network information, and a transmission unit configured to transmit a first signal to adjust a parameter of an antenna when a difference between a first indicator value included in the first network information and a second indicator value included in the second network information is greater than or equal to a first threshold. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135066 | Method and Device for Calculating Reference Signal Received Power - The present invention provides a method and a device for calculating RSRP. The method comprises the steps of: calculating a first signal power estimation value, the first signal power estimation value being an average value of power of all received RSs; calculating a second signal power estimation value, the second signal power estimation value being an average value of power of all coherence blocks, and the power of each coherence block being the power of an average value of the channel estimation for all the RSs in the coherence block; determining a noise power estimation value according to the first signal power estimation value and the second signal power estimation value; and determining the RSRP according to the first signal power estimation value and the noise power estimation value, or according to the second signal power estimation value and the noise power estimation value. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135068 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SPLIT AVAILABILITY OF CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting split availability of a cell in a wireless communication system is provided. A first eNodeB (eNB) may transmit a split availability of a first cell, managed by the first eNB, to neighbor eNBs. The split availability of the first cell may indicate whether the first cell supports cell split operation or not. Alternatively, the split availability of the first cell may indicate whether the first eNB supports an active antenna system (AAS). | 05-12-2016 |
20160135069 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INDICATION OF CELL COVERAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an indication of cell coverage in a wireless communication system is provided. A first eNodeB (eNB) transmits an indication which indicates cell coverage of an active antenna system (AAS) to a second eNB. The indication may be one of a cell split/merge/remove indication. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135070 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING CHANNEL STATUS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CHANGE OF USAGE OF RADIO RESOURCE - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for measuring channel status information on a terminal in a wireless communication system that supports the change of usage of a radio resource. In particular, the method includes the steps of: receiving a change of usage message for a dynamic change in the usage of a radio resource; and measuring channel status information (CSI) from a CSI reference resource, wherein the CSI reference resource is arranged on a time section at which a usage of a radio resource is determined by the change of usage message, and determined based on only an uplink-downlink setting on a system information block (SIB) when the reception of the change of usage message is unsuccessful. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135071 | HANDLING SIGNAL QUALITY MEASUREMENTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for handling signal quality measurements by a wireless device in a wireless network environment, particularly in a coordinated transmission environment. An apparatus may include computer-readable media having instructions and one or more processors coupled with the media and configured to execute the instructions to generate a power parameter corresponding to a power adjustment associated with a reference signal, provide the reference signal generated based in part on the generated power parameter to a wireless device, and provide the power parameter to transmission points operating in the coordinated transmission environment. Each of the transmission points may be configured to communicate the power parameter to the wireless device, and the wireless device may be configured to determine, based at least in part on the power parameter, a power characteristics associated with a channel in which the reference signal is provided. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135073 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR UPDATING A PRIORITIZATION LEVEL OF A SERVICE DATA FLOW BASED ON TRAFFIC SIZE PER TIME UNIT OF SAID DATA FLOW - This disclosure relates to a method, and an arrangement and a computer program for updating a prioritization level of a service data flow between a user node and a network node. The method comprises obtaining a traffic size per time unit of detected data packets of the service data flow, and updating the prioritization level of the service data flow, based on the obtained traffic size per time unit. It is an advantage that embodiments provide a possibility to determine a trade-off between the need to optimize response times for short-lived data sessions and limiting the impact on other users when prioritizing long-lived high volume sessions. It is advantageous that the embodiments are applicable to situations in which a direct classification, using IP 5-tuple or deep packet inspection is not meaningful. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135114 | THROTTLING PACKET-SWITCHED CALL ESTABLISHMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Aspects described herein relate to throttling packet-switched (PS) call establishment in wireless communications. A circuit-switched (CS) call can be conducted by using a first radio access technology (RAT). A cell update (CU) procedure for a PS call using a second RAT can be detected as due to one or more conditions. A cause for the one or more conditions can be determined based on one or more parameters related to a transmitter or receiver. PS call establishment attempts can accordingly be throttled based at least in part on determining the cause for the one or more conditions | 05-12-2016 |
20160135202 | Method and First Radio Node for Conveying a Message to a Second Radio Node - A method and first radio node ( | 05-12-2016 |
20160142115 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRECODING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNAL - A base station includes a transceiver, and a processor configured to allocate at least one CSI-RS antenna port to a user equipment (UE), precode the at least one CSI-RS antenna port with a first precoding matrix, cause the transceiver to transmit the at least one CSI-RS antenna port precoded with the first precoding matrix through a channel to the UE, cause the transceiver to signal a number of the at least one antenna port to the UE, cause the transceiver to receive an index for a second precoding matrix from the UE, wherein the second precoding matrix is determined by the UE according to the at least one CSI-RS antenna port precoded with the first precoding matrix as received through the channel by the UE and the signaled number of the at least one antenna port, and precode transmission data with the first precoding matrix and the second precoding matrix. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142176 | ENHANCING MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME SELECTION AND MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT AGGREGATION BASED ON UNDER-UTILIZATION - Methods, apparatus, and computer-readable media for wireless communication by an access point (AP) may involve communicating with a station using a first modulation and coding scheme (MCS). An under-utilization of a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (MPDU) aggregation of the station while using the first MCS may be identified. The under-utilization may be caused by packet error rate (PER)-induced head of line (HOL) blocking. The MCS may be switched to a second MCS that is lower than the first MCS. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142463 | SYSTEM FOR MONITORING CONVERSATIONAL AUDIO CALL QUALITY - A method, a computer program product, and a computer system for monitoring conversational audio quality of Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) are provided. A monitoring system determines a size of an audio file and an available bandwidth. The monitoring system predicts time of receiving the audio file, based on the size and the bandwidth. The monitoring system determines whether the time of receiving the audio file exceeds a monitoring timer interval by a certain threshold. The monitoring system uses an intrusive testing method for monitoring call quality, in response to determining that the time of receiving the audio file exceeds the monitoring timer interval by the certain threshold. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142464 | SYSTEM FOR MONITORING CONVERSATIONAL AUDIO CALL QUALITY - A method, a computer program product, and a computer system for monitoring conversational audio quality of Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) are provided. A monitoring system determines a size of an audio file and an available bandwidth. The monitoring system predicts time of receiving the audio file, based on the size and the bandwidth. The monitoring system determines whether the time of receiving the audio file exceeds a monitoring timer interval by a certain threshold. The monitoring system uses an intrusive testing method for monitoring call quality, in response to determining that the time of receiving the audio file exceeds the monitoring timer interval by the certain threshold. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142929 | METHOD OF SPATIAL SHARING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for performing spatial sharing between an existing SP and a candidate SP includes transmitting a first measurement request to an STA involved in the candidate SP carrying measurement configuration information for measurement over primary tier 1 channel of a tier 2 channel. The measurement configuration information includes the method that is to be used for the requested measurement, the measurement start time, the measurement duration, the number of time blocks within the measurement duration, the number of concurrent measurements to be performed using plural RX antenna configurations, and the method for reporting results of plural concurrent measurements, wherein the duration of each time block is the same. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142931 | AUTOMATED MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS OF END-TO-END PERFORMANCE OF VoLTE SERVICE - Systems and methods are disclosed herein that relate to automated measurement and analysis of end-to-end performance of Voice over Long Term Evolution (VoLTE) service and, in some embodiments, automated network optimization for VoLTE service performance improvement. In some embodiments, a method of operation of a network node to perform automated end-to-end analysis of VoLTE sessions is provided. In some embodiments, the method of operation of the network node comprises correlating control and data plane messages across a nodes and interfaces in a VoLTE network to thereby provide data representative of end-to-end message flows for a plurality of VoLTE sessions. The method of operation further comprises configuring one or more nodes in the VoLTE network based on the data representative of the end-to-end message flows for the plurality of VoLTE sessions. In this manner, automated network optimization for VoLTE service performance improvement can be provided. | 05-19-2016 |
20160146930 | TEMPORAL ANALYSIS FOR USER SPEED ESTIMATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for estimating the speed of a user equipment connected to a base station of a wireless network, the method comprising the following steps: measuring the power of a signal transmitted between the user equipment and the base station; computing the derivative of the measured signal power with respect to time; computing the standard deviation of the computed derivative; estimating, from previously established reference data, the speed of the user equipment that corresponds to the computed standard deviation, the reference data associating a given user equipment speed with a certain computed standard deviation. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149620 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN MULTI-ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a reference signal in a multi-antenna system is provided. The method includes: selecting at least one orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol in a subframe containing a plurality of OFDM symbols; allocating a channel quality indication reference signal (CQI RS) capable of measuring a channel state for each of a plurality of antennas to the selected at least one OFDM symbol; and transmitting the CQI RS, wherein the CQI RS is allocated to an OFDM symbol which does not overlap with an OFDM symbol to which a common reference signal to be transmitted to all user equipments in a cell or a dedicated reference signal to be transmitted to a specific user equipment in the cell is allocated. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149681 | NETWORK IDENTIFICATION BASED ON DISCOVERY REFERENCE SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Various aspects described herein relate to measuring cells in a public land mobile network (PLMN). An enhanced discovery reference signal (eDRS) of a cell is received on an unlicensed carrier frequency, wherein the eDRS comprises at least a reference signal transmission or a synchronization signal transmission. Measurements of the eDRS for the cell can be performed based at least in part on a configuration associated with a serving cell. The measurements of the eDRS can be reported to the serving cell. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149684 | System and Method for Intelligent Channel State Information Selection - A method for providing feedback information includes receiving a configuration of a plurality of offset values, determining the feedback information in accordance with at least one measurement made by a user equipment and with the plurality of offset values, and sending the feedback information to a network controller. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149726 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Adaptive Channel Estimation And Equalization In A Multicarrier Communication System - Methods and systems are described for adaptive channel estimation and equalization in a multicarrier communication system. In one aspect, a channel estimation in a multicarrier communication system is determined. A prediction error is determined based on a difference between the channel estimation and a reference signal. An equalization matrix is formed based on the prediction error. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149727 | VHT-SIG-B BASED DECISION FEEDBACK CHANNEL ESTIMATION - A method of determining a channel response of a communications channel. A computing device receives a data packet via the communications channel and generates a first channel estimation based on a first portion of a preamble of the received data packet. The computing device further generates a second channel estimation based on a second portion of the preamble and determines the channel response of the communications channel based, at least in part, on an average of the first and second channel estimations. For example, the first portion of the preamble may correspond with a Long Training Field (LTF), and the second portion of the preamble may correspond with a Very High Throughput Signal B (VHT-SIG-B) field. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149780 | NOC TIMING POWER ESTIMATING DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - A NoC timing power estimating method includes: estimating a plurality of transmission timing of a plurality of transmission units of at least a packet, the transmission timing indicating respective time points at which the transmission units enter/leave a plurality of passing elements of the NoC; based on the transmission timing of the transmission units, estimating respective circuit states and respective power states of the passing elements of the NoC, the circuit state indicating an operation state of the passing element and the power state being related to the circuit state; and based on the power states of the passing elements of the NoC, estimating power consumption of the NoC. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149781 | NETWORK NODE, A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A first network node for communicating with a second network node over a first communication network is described. The second network node is arranged to communicate over the first communication network in a first part of a communication period and arranged to not communicate over the first communication network in a second part of the communication period. The first network node has a send unit for sending data formatted in data packets to the second network node, a statistics unit arranged for determining a success statistics, an availability estimator for deriving an availability estimation from the success statistics, and a send controller arranged to control the send unit in dependence on the availability estimation. Also described is a communication system, a method of estimating availability of a second network node, a method of communicating by a first network node, and an associated computer program product. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149856 | OPTIMIZING GLOBAL IPV6 ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS - In one embodiment, a device in a network determines that one or more network nodes should use a stateful address configuration protocol to obtain network addresses. The device causes the one or more network nodes to use the stateful address configuration protocol, in response to determining that the one or more nodes should use the stateful address configuration protocol to obtain network addresses. The device determines that the one or more network nodes should use a stateless address configuration protocol to obtain network addresses. The device causes the one or more network nodes to use the stateless address configuration protocol, in response to determining that the one or more nodes should use the stateless address configuration protocol to obtain network address. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150424 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SPATIAL REUSE - A scheduling method of giving a chance for transmission to a plurality of terminals in the same time period, and a device therefor are provided. The scheduling method includes: transmitting first scheduling information to terminals in a network, the first scheduling information defining transmitting/receiving terminals and a transmission time period; receiving channel measurement information including inter-terminal interference information from the terminals in the network; and generating second scheduling information defining transmission time periods and a plurality of transmitting/receiving terminals that do not interfere with each other by using the channel measurement information. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150425 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING A SYNTHETIC TRANSACTION PLATFORM FOR ANALYZING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A MOBILE DEVICE AND A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method is disclosed for providing a platform for analyzing communication between a mobile device and a wireless network. The method comprises checking on the central management system for one or more codes associated with one or more tests to be executed by an agent on the mobile device and sending, by the central management system, a message to the mobile device over the wireless network, wherein the message includes the one or more codes associated with the one or more tests (synthetic transactions) to be executed by the agent. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150426 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND RELATED METHODS OF OPERATION - A communication network system and related devices and method of monitoring in a mobile radio communications network environment direct communications between first and second mobile communication devices to provide to the network an indication of link-quality of the direct communication, wherein the network is arranged to configure at least one of the mobile radio communication devices with a link-quality parameter reference value, the said at least one mobile radio communications device can report to the network if it determines, relative to the said reference value, that the link-quality of the direct communication is insufficient, and if required the network can subsequently control communication between the said first and second mobile radio communication devices responsive to the reporting the received from the said at least one mobile radio communications device, or the network can employ the reporting from the said at least one mobile radio communications device for network planning/optimization purposes. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150427 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR UTILIZING A PLURALITY OF UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLES TO CONDUCT PERFORMANCE TESTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - According to one aspect, the disclosed subject matter describes herein a method that includes navigating, by a plurality of unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs), a service coverage area associated with a wireless communications network, wherein the service coverage area includes a plurality of wireless access points and assigning, by at least one of the UAVs, wireless access points to one or more of the UAVs for wireless traffic testing. The method further includes executing, for each of the wireless access points, a wireless traffic test including test traffic data communicated between at least one of the UAVs and a tested wireless access point and determining, for each of the wireless access points to be tested, performance metric information associated with traffic data being wirelessly communicated between the tested wireless access point and the at least one of the UAVs. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150428 | CONTROL APPARATUS, ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHOD - A control apparatus that controls one or more first communication apparatuses and one or more second communication apparatuses configured to identify a logic level of a signal, the control apparatus includes a memory; and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to: acquire, from one of the one or more second communication apparatuses, a length of an undefined time period during which a level of the signal is undefined; determine, based on the length of the undefined time period, a length of a protection time period indicating a time period during which a logic level of the signal received by the second communication apparatus is maintained at a same level; and determine, based on the length of the protection time period, a rate of a signal transmitted to one of the one or more second communication apparatuses by one of the one or more first communication apparatuses. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150431 | CELL DISCOVERY AND MEASUREMENT METHOD, BASE STATION AND UE - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a cell discovery and measurement method, a base station and UE. The cell discovery and measurement method includes: a cell base station transmits a discovery signal enabling the cell to be discovered by a UE, and enables the UE to achieve synchronization with the cell base station; and transmits a measurement signal after transmitting the discovery signal. Through the embodiments of the present disclosure, the time for transmitting the discovery signal for a single time can be made as short as possible, an interval between two times of transmitting the discovery signals can be made as long as possible, and the measurement signal is only transmitted in need, thereby making the cell as energy-saving as possible; and the UE can accurately perform RRM measurement by measuring the signal, thereby increasing precision of the RRM measurement. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150432 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A wireless communication method and wireless communication apparatus allowing triggering of inter-frequency measurement. The method and apparatus are used in a heterogeneous network including a first base station and a second base station with different transmission power levels. The wireless communications method includes: receiving a measurement value of a signal received by a terminal as a first measurement value, or receiving a measurement value of a signal received by a second base station from the terminal as a second measurement value; determining a first/second measurement reference value of a statistic value of quality information associated with a location of the terminal and corresponding to the first/second measurement value; comparing the first/second measurement value with the first/second measurement reference value; and triggering an inter-frequency measurement of the terminal according to a relationship of a predetermined offset amount and an offset of the first/second measurement value from the first/second measurement reference value. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150435 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING BEAMFORMING - The present disclosure relates to a pre-5 | 05-26-2016 |
20160150519 | BEST-EFFORT SCHEDULED ACCESS - Embodiments of the invention provide a best-effort scheduled access method and system that enable nodes to request, and a hub to assign, tentative, but not committed, scheduled allocations, referred to as unscheduled bilink allocations, in which data traffic is transferred between the nodes and the hub on a best-effort basis. The tentative allocations will be available if the network of the hub still has enough bandwidth, but will be shifted or reduced otherwise. This invention unifies tentative and committed scheduled allocations in the same access framework, thereby facilitating access scheduling and offering access flexibility. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150521 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a frequency channel allocating section ( | 05-26-2016 |
20160150547 | Interference Mitigation in Strong Imbalance Zone - It is provided a method, including monitoring an interference from at least one terminal device not served by an apparatus performing the method; checking if the interference exceeds a threshold; informing, if the interference exceeds the threshold, a serving receiving device considered to serve the at least one terminal device that the interference exceeds the threshold. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150555 | METHODS FOR PERFORMING ANTISENSE OLIGONUCLEOTIDE-MEDIATED EXON SKIPPING IN THE RETINA OF A SUBJECT IN NEED THEREOF - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus determines an observed bit rate based on uplink transmissions of the UE, estimates an available link capacity for the UE, selects an estimate factor, and estimates available uplink throughput for future uplink transmissions of the UE as a function of the observed bit rate, the estimated available link capacity, and the estimate factor. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156397 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRECODING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNAL | 06-02-2016 |
20160156422 | Methods, Computer Program, Network Node and Network Node Site | 06-02-2016 |
20160156440 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT | 06-02-2016 |
20160156534 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND ESTIMATION METHOD | 06-02-2016 |
20160156539 | Smart Migration of Monitoring Constructs and Data | 06-02-2016 |
20160156549 | Method of Maintaining a Connection and Electronic Apparatus Using the Same | 06-02-2016 |
20160157046 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROXIMITY ESTIMATION | 06-02-2016 |
20160157113 | WIRELESS PARAMETER-SENSING NODE AND NETWORK THEREOF | 06-02-2016 |
20160157114 | IDENTIFICATION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONGESTION | 06-02-2016 |
20160157116 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIA FOR INTER-FREQUENCY SMALL CELL DETECTION AND REPORTING | 06-02-2016 |
20160157117 | EVOLVED NODEB AND TRAFFIC DISPATCH METHOD THEREOF | 06-02-2016 |
20160157118 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR LINK ADAPTATION | 06-02-2016 |
20160157120 | MEASUREMENT METHOD AND DEVICE, INFORMATION INTERCHANGE METHOD AND DEVICE, AND RESIDENCE METHOD AND DEVICE | 06-02-2016 |
20160157123 | Systems and Methods For Determining Measurement Power Offsets | 06-02-2016 |
20160157133 | THROTTLING MECHANISM FOR DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL | 06-02-2016 |
20160157191 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT | 06-02-2016 |
20160157236 | Radio Resource Management for a High-Speed Shared Channel | 06-02-2016 |
20160157241 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK SCHEME FOR COOPERATIVE MULTI POINT TRANSMISSION AND CARRIER AGGREGATION SCENARIO | 06-02-2016 |
20160164646 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDICATING CHANNEL ASSESSMENT INFORMATION - The embodiments provide a method implemented by a network device in a wireless local area network (WLAN) to provide a deferred clear channel assessment (CCA) from a physical layer to an upper layer within the network device. The deferred CCA enables the upper layer to make a final decision on the state of a wireless medium. The method identifies at least one condition on a wireless medium where an upper layer decision is required to determine a state of the wireless medium, and passes on requisite data to the upper layer to enable a decision on the state of the wireless medium. The deferred CCA process supports more complex CCA processes that may rely on information available in an upper layer. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164651 | CODEC WITH VARIABLE PACKET SIZE - Various of the disclosed embodiments improve encoding during a network call, such as a Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) connection, by adjusting the size of a data communications packet (“packet”). Particularly, given a corpus of codecs with which to encode data, the embodiments may identify a packet size based upon a common multiple of each codec's minimum raw data size. The packet size may be selected to accommodate the inclusion of data encoded in each codec format, as well as error correction code data, and codec transition commands. The packet size may be tailored to trade off measured latency and data efficiency. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164745 | Robust Techniques for Upstream Communication Between Subscriber Stations and a Base Station - A number of features for enhancing the performance of a communication system, in which data is transmitted between a base station and a plurality of subscriber stations located different distances from the base station, are presented. The power transmission level, slot timing, and equalization of the subscriber stations are set by a ranging process. Data is transmitted by the subscriber stations in fragmented form. Various measures are taken to make transmission from the subscriber stations robust. The uplink data transmission is controlled to permit multiple access from the subscriber stations. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164760 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING TRANSMISSION TIME DIFFERENCE OF SIGNALS TRANSMITTED THROUGH DIFFERENT ROUTES - A first route and a second route different from the first route are established between first and second nodes in a transmission system including a measuring unit and a computation unit. The measuring unit measures a first signal-transmission time indicating a time taken for a signal to be transmitted in a route starting from the first node and returning to the first node after passing through the first route, the second node, and the second route, and a second signal-transmission time indicating a time taken for a signal to be transmitted in a round-trip route of one of the first and second routes. The computation unit calculates, based on a measurement result of the measuring unit, a transmission time difference indicating a difference between transmission times of a signal transmitted through the first route and a signal transmitted through the second route in a transmission direction of the first signal. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164781 | TRANSMISSION ROUTE DESIGN METHOD, TRANSMISSION ROUTE DESIGN SYSTEM AND TRANSMISSION ROUTE DESIGN APPARATUS - A transmission route design method includes receiving, by a network management apparatus, new demands respectively including a start time and an end time and respectively used for requesting to set a new route; acquiring one or more established routes that are already set and that correspond to a time period between an earliest start time and a latest end time; dividing the time period into slots, based on the start time and the end time; generating intermediate data by calculating a maximum traffic load of each of one or more links included in the one or more established routes for each of the slots; transmitting the generated intermediate data to the transmission route design apparatus; determining, by the transmission route design apparatus, routes to be allocated to the new demands, based on the generated intermediate data; and transmitting information of the determined routes to the network management apparatus. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165059 | MOBILE DEVICE AUDIO TUNING - Various of the disclosed embodiments improve encoding during a network call, such as a Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) connection, by correlating various contextual parameters from previous calls, with appropriate settings for a current call. For example, the system may take note of the model of cell phone used during a communication, the carrier, the presence of a WiFi connection, the user rating, the codecs employed, etc. During a subsequent call, the system may compare these past calling parameters with the current situation, and may select call settings (e.g., codec selections) based thereon. Machine learning methods may be applied using the past data to inform the selection of the settings for the present call. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165466 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEEDING PARTIAL CQI BACK BY TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of reporting channel state information (CSI) to a base station by a terminal in a wireless communication system is disclosed. Specifically, the method includes configuring feedback chains corresponding to a plurality of CSI-reference signals (RSs) through upper layer signaling, receiving the plurality of CSI-RSs from the base station, calculating a complete channel quality indicator (CQI) for a whole channel using the plurality of CSI-RSs and dividing the complete CQI into partial CQIs corresponding to the respective feedback chains, and reporting CSI items including the partial CQIs to the base station through the feedback chains. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165467 | POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM, METHOD THEREFOR, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A position detection system, including a memory storing instructions, and at least one processor configured to process the instructions to receive measured waveform signals sent out from an object to be measured via a first sensor and a second sensor, receive the broadcasting radio wave signals sent out from the first sensor and the second sensor, separate the measured waveform signals and the broadcasting radio wave, for each sensor, estimate an offset between the sampling frequencies of the measured waveform signal of the first sensor and the measured waveform signal of the second sensor based on the broadcasting radio wave signals respectively sent out from the first sensor and the second sensor, correct the measured waveform signal sent out from the second sensor based on the estimated offset between the sampling frequencies, and detect a position of the object to be measured based on the measured waveform signal sent out from the first sensor and a signal obtained by correcting the measured waveform signal sent out from the second sensor. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165468 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING CELL SPECIFIC ANTENNA CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS - Adjusting cell specific antenna configuration parameters includes receiving, at each of a plurality of radio access nodes in a network, measurement reports from a plurality of user equipment devices. Base incremental adjustments to configuration parameters of one or more antennas are performed at each radio access node in response to the measurement reports. Additional measurement reports are received from the plurality of user equipment devices after the incremental adjustments. Base incremental adjustments to the configuration parameters of the one or more antennas at the radio access nodes continue to be performed in response to the measurement reports after previous incremental adjustments until an improvement limit has occurred. Biased random adjustments to the configuration parameters of the one or more antennas at the radio access nodes are performed in response to the improvement limit until a desired optimum result is achieved. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165470 | Proximity Detection - A method of estimating the proximity of a first device to a second device in a network causes the first device to perform a first measurement in a first period during which a control message broadcasted over the network instructs devices in the network to not transmit during the first period, wherein the second device disregards the control message and transmits a first signal during the first period which is measured by the first device during the first period, and forms a measure of the proximity of the first device to the second device in dependence on a strength of the first signal. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165473 | ACCESSING FAILURE EVENT REPORTING METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, METHOD FOR ADJUSTING ACCESS CONTROL MECHANISM, CONTROL NODE - An accessing failure event reporting method, UE, a method for adjusting access control mechanism and a control node are proposed. The accessing failure event reporting method includes: receiving a configuration signal when the UE is preparing into idle mode; performing an accessibility measurement of a GBR mechanism in response to the configuration signal. The accessibility measurement includes: attempting to establish a GBR traffic connection; recording at least one accessing failure event if the UE fails to establish the GBR traffic connection; and reporting the at least one accessing failure event. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165474 | Device of Handling Energy Detection in Unlicensed Band - A communication device comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise detecting energy of a set of subcarriers in an unlicensed band; obtaining a value according to a statistical function of the energy; and transmitting a report comprising the value to a network. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165512 | PATH CONTROL METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PATH CONTROL DEVICE, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - Provided are a path control method, a wireless communication system, a path control device, and a non-transitory computer readable medium which are capable of securing efficient traffic accommodation, while maintaining communication quality. The path control method controls a communication path by selecting one path from among a plurality of path candidates with respect to a specific piece of traffic in a network constituted of a radio link provided with an adaptive modulation function. A requested band of the piece of traffic is compared with an allocatable band allocatable to a first path candidate that is included in the plurality of path candidates and that satisfies a degree of stability requested by the piece of traffic by a first modulation method. As a result of the comparison, when the requested band of the piece of traffic is larger than the allocatable band, a penalty cost due to transmission using a band usable by a second modulation method having a lower degree of stability is given to the first path candidate so that the first path candidate is less likely to be selected as compared with the other path candidates for selecting one path from among the plurality of path candidates. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165516 | Wireless Architecture and Support for Process Control Systems - A wireless communication system for use in a process environment uses mesh and possibly a combination of mesh and point-to-point communications to produce a wireless communication network that can be easily set up, configured, changed and monitored, thereby making a wireless communication network that is less expensive, and more robust and reliable. The wireless communication system allows virtual communication paths to be established and used within the process control system in a manner that is independent of the manner in which the wireless signals are sent between different wireless transmitting and receiving devices within the process plant. Still further, communication analysis tools are provided to enable a user or operator to view the operation of the wireless communication network to thereby analyze the ongoing operation of the wireless communications within the wireless communication network. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165550 | WALK-ASSISTED AUTOMATED AP COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT - Systems and methods for controlling the power of small cells in a coverage area includes obtaining signal strength measurements of wireless signals received from a plurality of small cells in a defined coverage area by identifying signal strength at a plurality of locations near the perimeter of the coverage area, and determining a revised transmit power of the small cells based on the determined signal strength (a) to maintain a minimum threshold of received signal while reducing the average power within the coverage area, or (b) to reduce leakage outside the perimeter of the coverage area relative to a desired threshold. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165587 | UPLINK THROUGHPUT ENHANCEMENT VIA MINIMUM POWER CONSTRAINED USER DEVICES - Systems and methods are disclosed for enhancing uplink throughput at a small cell base station. The small cell base station may monitor a power level associated with one or more user device (UD) transmissions from a UD, determine that the UD is at a UD transmit power floor based on the monitored power level, and adjust a data rate assigned to the UD based on the determination that the UD is at the UD transmit power floor. | 06-09-2016 |
20160173150 | METHOD FOR NOISE POWER ESTIMATION | 06-16-2016 |
20160173167 | POWER LINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD | 06-16-2016 |
20160173261 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATORS (CQIs) | 06-16-2016 |
20160173336 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, LINE CONDITION IMPROVEMENT METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM | 06-16-2016 |
20160173352 | METHOD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK | 06-16-2016 |
20160173355 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING A PACKET THROUGHPUT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160173357 | Probe Routing in a Network | 06-16-2016 |
20160173559 | METHOD OF DETERMINING BROADBAND CONTENT USAGE WITHIN A SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160173662 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SHORT FRAME FRAGMENT IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174083 | COVERAGE-DEFICIENT TERMINAL CONNECTION PROCEDURES | 06-16-2016 |
20160174085 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ESTIMATING NETWORK PERFORMANCE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174086 | Method and Apparatus for Testing Mobile Terminals in an OFDM System | 06-16-2016 |
20160174087 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL IDENTIFICATION FOR FURTHER ENHANCED NON-CA BASED ICIC FOR LTE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174089 | PROVIDING EASY ACCESS TO RADIO NETWORKS | 06-16-2016 |
20160174090 | DELAY ESTIMATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, AND SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174091 | Signal Measurement Method and Apparatus | 06-16-2016 |
20160174092 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS TERMINAL | 06-16-2016 |
20160174093 | METHOD AND UE FOR MEASURING CSI-RS | 06-16-2016 |
20160174095 | TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING HANDOVERS IN AN UNLICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND | 06-16-2016 |
20160174096 | CHANNEL STATE MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING | 06-16-2016 |
20160174138 | METHOD OF PROCESSING RECEIVED DIGITIZED SIGNALS AND MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174147 | ACCESS POINT SELECTION FOR MOBILE DEVICE POSITIONING | 06-16-2016 |
20160174233 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LTE AND WLAN COEXISTENCE | 06-16-2016 |
20160174253 | METHOD OF CHANNEL ACCESS CONTROL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS | 06-16-2016 |
20160182166 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING CONFIGURATION INFORMATION AT USER EQUIPMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-23-2016 |
20160182317 | MULTI-RATE HIGH-SPEED BUS WITH STATISTICAL AGGREGATOR | 06-23-2016 |
20160182346 | NETWORK PERFORMANCE TESTING IN NON-HOMOGENEOUS NETWORKS | 06-23-2016 |
20160182354 | LINK DELAY BASED ROUTING APPARATUS FOR A NETWORK-ON-CHIP | 06-23-2016 |
20160182598 | PACKET ANALYZER DEVICE AND METHOD TO MEASURE A VIDEO QUALITY OF TRANSMITTED IP MULTICAST MEDIA | 06-23-2016 |
20160182599 | REMEDYING DISTORTIONS IN SPEECH AUDIOS RECEIVED BY PARTICIPANTS IN CONFERENCE CALLS USING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) | 06-23-2016 |
20160183100 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SELF-INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION | 06-23-2016 |
20160183109 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF VISUALIZING MOST UNHEALTHY NETWORK ELEMENTS WITHIN A NETWORK OR DATA CENTER | 06-23-2016 |
20160183110 | NETWORK PERFORMANCE TESTING IN NON-HOMOGENEOUS NETWORKS | 06-23-2016 |
20160183111 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA TO A WIRELESS DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK WHICH APPLIES A COMBINED CELL DEPLOYMENT | 06-23-2016 |
20160183112 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RADIO LINK MEASUREMENT FOR MTC AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 06-23-2016 |
20160183114 | APPARATUS FOR MEASURING EVM OF PHICH IN LTE SYSTEM | 06-23-2016 |
20160183183 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS TRANSMISSION | 06-23-2016 |
20160183236 | DETERMINING A CLUSTER SET OF MOBILE DEVICES | 06-23-2016 |
20160183268 | INTERFERENCE DETECTION AND REMEDY | 06-23-2016 |
20160183272 | METHOD OF PROCESSING RECEIVED DIGITIZED SIGNALS AND MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE | 06-23-2016 |
20160183320 | BASE STATION AND USER TERMINAL | 06-23-2016 |
20160191201 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR INFORMATION OF BEAMS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When a terminal of a mobile communication system using a plurality of beams receives information on a channel quality indicator (CQI) transmission mode from a base station, the terminal measures a CQI of a beam to feed back the CQI information according to the CQI transmission mode, transmits information of the beam to feed back the CQI information according to the CQI transmission mode, and thereafter, feeds back the measured CQI information of the beam to the base station. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191212 | METHOD OF RE-TRANSMITTING DATA AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed is a first electronic device and the first electronic device includes: a transmitter transmitting data to a second electronic device; a receiver receiving a feed-back (hereinafter, referred to as a first feed-back) for the transmitted data from the second electronic device; and a processor deciding whether to transmit the data again or another data to the second electronic device, based on the first feed-back, in which when the first feed-back is negative, the transmitter retransmits the data under a predetermined condition, and when a feed-back (hereinafter, referred to as a second feed-back) received from the second electronic device is negative with respect to the data retransmitted under the predetermined condition, the transmitter re-retransmits at least a part of the data to the second electronic device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191214 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING CHANNEL INFORMATION - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for estimating channel information. A terminal estimates a channel coefficient for each of subcarriers included in each symbol of the received signals, calculates power of the received signal matched to each of the subcarriers, calculates an interference estimation parameter for each of the subcarriers based on the power of the received signal matched to each of the subcarriers and based on power of a channel coefficient for a subcarrier on which the received signal has maximum power among the subcarriers, and calculates a non-Gaussian characteristic parameter of an interference signal related to the received signals based on the interference estimation parameters calculated for the subcarriers of all the symbols of the received signals. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191358 | TESTING METHOD FOR A SMART WRISTBAND AND TESTING SYSTEM THEREOF - A testing method for a smart wristband and a testing system thereof are provided. The testing method includes the following steps of: presetting the system software before the test to put the Bluetooth function of the smart wristband into a sleep state after the system software is installed; electrically connecting the smart wristband under test to a testing apparatus during the test so that the Bluetooth function of the smart wristband is activated; and accomplishing pairing of the smart wristband with the testing apparatus to test functions of the smart wristband. In this way, the present disclosure can ensure pairing connection of a designated smart wristband under test with the testing apparatus during the test with a high efficiency and at a low cost. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191368 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, METHOD, AND MEDIUM - In an information processing device in which analysis of a received packet is distributed to a plurality of cores, each core determines whether or not the core is appropriate as a core for analyzing the distributed packet, and when it is determined that the core is not appropriate, the core records request information for requesting another core to analyze the packet in a shared memory. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191700 | MONITORING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) QUALITY DURING AN ONGOING CALL - A method for calculating a mean opinion score (MOS) during an ongoing Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call is provided. The method may include determining a time delay between a VoIP source and a VoIP destination connected by a communications network. A start recording message is sent from the VoIP source to the VoIP destination. A first recorded call sample from the VoIP source and a second recorded call sample from the VoIP destination are generated, whereby the first and the second recorded call sample are generated with a recording delay value corresponding the determined time delay for synchronizing the first and the second recorded call sample. Using an intrusive call quality measurement, a first MOS value is calculated based on the first and the second recorded call sample. Using a non-intrusive call quality measurement, a second MOS value is calculated based on the first MOS value. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192173 | AUTOMATIC SEAMLESS CONTEXT SHARING ACROSS MULTIPLE DEVICES - Embodiments of a system and method for automatic context sharing across multiple devices are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an application context information transfer technique is provided that is capable of detecting when the user is moving away from or towards a stationary or fixed-location computing device, and transferring application context information to or from a mobile device. The application content information transferred between devices may include information that allows the user to continue a computing device activity on the mobile device or continue mobile device activity on the computing device, such as editing a document, reading a website article, or viewing a streaming video. The techniques described herein may be used to automate the transfer of such application context information between devices. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192211 | CROSS-LAYER FRAMEWORK IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK USING BIO-INSPIRED ALGORITHM AND OPERATION METHOD THEREOF - A cross-layer framework in a wireless mesh network using a bio-inspired algorithm and an operation method thereof are provided. The cross-layer framework includes a data structure configured to be formed in each node of the wireless mesh network and to collect and update information of each node through an ant packet and a cross-layer unit configured to perform at least one or more of channel assignment, routing, link scheduling, buffer management, and frame scheduling with respect to a control data flow of the data structure and to dynamically assign channels. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192212 | METHOD FOR SENSING MOBILITY LINK QUALITY AND TRANSMITTING DATA IN LOW-POWER WIRELESS NETWORK - An aspect of the present invention provides a method for sensing a quality of a mobility link by a system for sensing a quality of a mobility link configured for evaluating a quality of a transmission-attempting link connected with a transmission-attempting node: computing link quality metric values of RSSI, LQI and EXT from transmission packets included in the message; computing a distribution ratio of a fuzzy set corresponding to each of the link quality metric values by applying the computed quality metric values to a quality fuzzy set having their respective quality factor indicators configured therein; computing fuzzy estimator values by classifying and aggregating the computed fuzzy distribution ratio of the quality fuzzy set into a first, a second and a third quality; and evaluating a quality of the transmission-attempting link based on the fuzzy estimator values. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192218 | TECHNIQUES FOR CLASSIFYING SLEEP SESSIONS - Techniques are provided herein for categorizing and classifying sleep session data. A server device receives sleep data from a sleep monitoring device. The sleep data comprises information that is indicative of sleep patterns of a user over a period of time. After receiving the sleep data, the server analyzes the information to determine a starting time instance and a stopping time instance to define a sleep session over the period of time. The server associates the starting time instance to a first calendar time instance and associates the stopping time instance to a second time instance. The server classifies the sleep session as belonging to a calendar day associated with the second calendar time instance. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192219 | METHOD FOR ASSIGNING RADIO RESOURCE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING THE SAME - Disclosed is a method for assigning a radio resource. The method includes: measuring an interference or a noise level for a signal outputted from neighboring base stations and generating interference information corresponding to the measured value; receiving a frequency assignment list which is available for access for each interference state of a terminal from a serving base station via a control channel; selecting specific frequency assignment information from among the frequency assignment list based on the interference information; transmitting the selected frequency assignment information to the base station; and being assigned the radio resource by the base station based on the selected frequency assignment information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192220 | EXCHANGE OF PARAMETERS RELATING TO MEASUREMENT PERIODS - Methods for a first, and a second network node as well as a user equipment for exchange of measurement period related parameters are provided. The user equipment, which measures at least one quantity on a second cell on a second carrier operated by a second radio network node, receives an indication indicative of the second carrier and a first parameter, from the second radio network node. The user equipment determines the first measurement period based on the first parameter. The second network node performs a method for providing the first parameter to be used by the user equipment. The second network node sends, to the user equipment, the first parameter and the indication indicative of the second carrier. The first parameter is determined based on a specific length of the first measurement period. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192223 | SYSTEM INFORMATION BLOCK BROADCATING METHOD, CELL-SPANNING RESELECTION METHOD, AND DEVICE - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for managing a monitoring task, the method comprising: receiving, by a gateway, monitoring configuration information transmitted by a machine to machine (M2M) service platform or M2M application server, wherein a management parameter for managing a monitoring task is carried in the monitoring configuration information; managing the monitoring task by the gateway according to the management parameter. The effect that the gateway can effectively manage the monitoring task is achieved. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192225 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL INFORMATION REPORT MESSAGE IN CLOUD RADIO ACCESS NETWORK (C-RAN) ENVIRONMENT - A method and apparatus for transmitting a channel information report message in a cloud radio access network (C-RAN) environment are disclosed. A method for transmitting a channel information report message by a user equipment (UE) under a cloud radio access network (C-RAN) environment includes: receiving a reference signal (RS) including a reference signal (RS) configuration indicator from a specific base station (BS) contained in a UE-oriented virtual cell formed by the UE; measuring channel information regarding each of one or more base stations (BSs) contained in the UE-oriented virtual cell on the basis of the RS configuration indicator; and transmitting a channel information report message including the measured channel information to the specific base station (BS), wherein the RS configuration indicator includes one or more RS resources used for channel information measurement, and the one or more RS resources are allocated to one or more base stations (BSs) contained in the UE-oriented virtual cell. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192227 | Interference measurement method and system, related equipment and storage medium - Disclosed are an interference measurement method and system, and related equipment. The method includes: a network side configures Interference Measurement Resources for Demodulation (DM-IMRs) for a target data channel of a terminal, positions of the DM-IMRs on a frequency domain being determined according to a Physical Resource Block (PRB) which bears the target data channel; and the network side indicates configuration information of the DM-IMRs to the terminal to enable the terminal to perform transmission interference measurement on the target data channel. By the solutions of the present disclosure, accuracy in transmission interference measurement of the target data channel may be improved, so that improvement in demodulation/decoding performance of the target data channel at a receiving side is facilitated, and receiving performance of the target data channel may further be improved. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192228 | SCANNING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for scanning assigned carriers in a multicarrier system may include receiving a multicarrier advertisement message from a base station, the multicarrier advertisement message including scan reporting trigger control information of assigned secondary carriers, performing scanning for the assigned secondary carriers, and reporting the scan results to the base station when a specific metric measured by the scanning meets a condition set in the scan reporting trigger control information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192376 | COVERAGE ENHANCEMENTS OF LOW COST MTC DEVICES IN UPLINK/DOWNLINK DECOUPLED SCENARIO - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed to describe cell selection in low cost machine type communication (LC-MTC) devices. An LTC-MC device may measure a plurality of downlink signals from a plurality of cells. The LTC-MC may detect a channel condition, e.g., by determining a cell with better uplink coverage than a downlink cell. The detection of the channel condition may include measuring an uplink pathloss. The LTC-MC may report the channel condition as a decoupled channel condition, e.g., when an uplink cell is identified with uplink coverage better than the downlink cell. The channel condition may be reported, e.g., via a set of Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) preambles. The set of PRACH preambles may be predefined. The channel condition may be reported via a higher layer signaling. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192400 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method of transmitting and receiving a signal in a wireless communication. The method of transmitting and receiving a signal in a wireless communication includes: transmitting a transmission beam to a terminal in an area which exists within a preset cluster; receiving a random access channel signal including a random access code mapped to the cluster; and detecting the random access code by using the random access channel signal. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192418 | INTRACELL DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION CONTROL - A user equipment comprises one or more antennas, a processor to communicate with an enhanced Node B (eNB) of an Internet Protocol (IP) based wireless communication network via the antenna; and a storage medium coupled to the processor, the storage medium having instructions stored thereon, that if executed by the processor, result in: requesting the eNB for a direct communication with a second user equipment, wherein the user equipment and the second user equipment are in a cell of the eNB; performing a first channel measurement based on a command from the eNB; receiving direct communication related information from the eNB based on a result of the first channel measurement; and performing a configuration based on the direct communication related information to perform the direct communicate with the second user equipment. | 06-30-2016 |
20160195600 | POSITIONING ENHANCEMENT THROUGH TIME-OF-FLIGHT MEASUREMENT IN WLAN | 07-07-2016 |
20160197662 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS | 07-07-2016 |
20160197686 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SATELLITE NOISE AND INTERFERENCE CALIBRATION USING TERMINAL MEASUREMENTS | 07-07-2016 |
20160197687 | METHOD AND RADIO NODE FOR HANDLING CSI REPORTING | 07-07-2016 |
20160197692 | METHOD OF PERFORMING MEASUREMENT | 07-07-2016 |
20160197744 | Point-Dependent Resource Symbol Configuration in a Wireless Cell | 07-07-2016 |
20160197800 | DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING NETWORK OPERATIONS USING PHYSICAL SENSOR INPUTS | 07-07-2016 |
20160197802 | Methods and Apparatus for Providing Adaptive Private Network Centralized Management System Time Correlated Playback of Network Traffic | 07-07-2016 |
20160197804 | Detecting Leakage of OFDM Signals from an HFC Network | 07-07-2016 |
20160197812 | NETWORK STATUS MAPPING | 07-07-2016 |
20160197813 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COORDINATING CLIENT-SIDE INFERENCE OF MOBILE NETWORK LOADING AND CAPACITY | 07-07-2016 |
20160197818 | DATA FLOW PATH DETERMINATION | 07-07-2016 |
20160198350 | MULTI-BAND METHODS FOR INTERFERENCE LIMITED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEMS | 07-07-2016 |
20160198353 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL INTERFERENCE PROCESSING | 07-07-2016 |
20160198355 | Signal Measurement Method, User Equipment and Base Station | 07-07-2016 |
20160198356 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND TERMINAL POSITION ESTIMATION METHOD | 07-07-2016 |
20160198419 | SIGNALING OF POWER INFORMATION FOR MIMO TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198478 | CHANNEL BANDWIDTH SWITCHING METHOD AND NETWORK EQUIPMENT | 07-07-2016 |
20160198479 | UPLINK INTERFERENCE RESOLUTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-07-2016 |
20160204838 | SIGNALING METHOD FOR COORDINATED MULTIPLE POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 07-14-2016 |
20160204844 | Methods and Devices for Determining Link Adaptation Parameters | 07-14-2016 |
20160204852 | A Multiuser Communications System | 07-14-2016 |
20160204908 | ADAPTIVE MULTI-RATE PARTIAL DECODE | 07-14-2016 |
20160204910 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
20160204990 | Content Delivery in Wireless Wide Area Networks | 07-14-2016 |
20160205011 | Method and Device for Testing Link Performance, Logic Processor and Network Processor | 07-14-2016 |
20160205564 | Data Transmission Method, Base Station and User Equipment | 07-14-2016 |
20160205567 | FILTER FOR USE IN TIME-OF-ARRIVAL ESTIMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205568 | VISUAL SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATION FOR WIRELESS DEVICES | 07-14-2016 |
20160205569 | TIME-REVERSAL WIRELESS SYSTEMS HAVING ASYMMETRIC ARCHITECTURE | 07-14-2016 |
20160205570 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK (RAN) TRANSPORT EVOLVED PACKET CORE (EPC) SYNERGY | 07-14-2016 |
20160205571 | THE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION | 07-14-2016 |
20160205574 | ADAPTING THE NUMBER OF CELLS TO MEASURE IN A NETWORK WITH ON/OFF CELLS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205577 | CHANNEL QUALITY MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING IN A DUAL CONNECTIVITY SCENARIO | 07-14-2016 |
20160205579 | CSI REPORTING FOR LTE-TDD EIMTA | 07-14-2016 |
20160205580 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTEGRATING DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES USING CARRIER AGGREGATION | 07-14-2016 |
20160205582 | RRC MESSAGES AND PROCEDURES | 07-14-2016 |
20160205612 | METHOD FOR DETECTING DISCOVERY SIGNAL FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SAME | 07-14-2016 |
20160205634 | UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER DETERMINING METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT | 07-14-2016 |
20160205647 | METHOD FOR SCANNING RESOURCE FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DIRECT COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 07-14-2016 |
20160205659 | Paging in Coverage Extension Mode | 07-14-2016 |
20160205667 | RADIO BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD | 07-14-2016 |
20160205698 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD | 07-14-2016 |
20160254850 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ANTENNA DIVERSITY SWITCHING | 09-01-2016 |
20160254971 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM | 09-01-2016 |
20160254972 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, NETWORK AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION METHOD IN COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM ON WHICH NETWORK AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH ESTIMATION PROGRAM HAS BEEN RECORDED | 09-01-2016 |
20160254974 | TCP Layer with Higher Level Testing Capabilities | 09-01-2016 |
20160254976 | TRANSMISSION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM | 09-01-2016 |
20160254978 | SELECTIVELY REFRESHING ADDRESS REGISTRATION INFORMATION | 09-01-2016 |
20160254983 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LAST MILE OPTIMIZATION OF TRANSMISSION OF REAL-TIME DATA | 09-01-2016 |
20160255515 | METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM | 09-01-2016 |
20160255521 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TESTING A SMART DEVICE | 09-01-2016 |
20160255522 | NODE AND METHOD FOR MONITORING AN ABILITY OF A WIRELESS DEVICE TO RECEIVE DOWNLINK DATA | 09-01-2016 |
20160255525 | METHOD FOR MEASURING SERVICE TRANSMISSION STATUS OF USER EQUIPMENT AND SERVICE STATION | 09-01-2016 |
20160255526 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS NETWORK PERFORMANCE DIAGNOSTICS VIA USER EQUIPMENT | 09-01-2016 |
20160255528 | MEASUREMENT REPORT STOPPING METHOD AND ENODEB USING THE SAME | 09-01-2016 |
20160255619 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA IN A DUAL CONNECTIVITY AND A DEVICE THEREFOR | 09-01-2016 |
20160380687 | METHOD FOR FEEDBACK REPORTING AND A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A method and mobile communications device for receiving a composite signal composed of a plurality of resource elements, the plurality of resource elements including: a plurality of data resource elements subject to interference; measuring a first noise plus interference level on at least one predefined resource element from the plurality of resource elements; measuring a noise plus interference level on the plurality of data resource elements subject to interference; determining a baseline noise plus interference level common to the plurality of data resource elements subject to interference; and generating a hybrid noise plus interference level by replacing the baseline noise plus interference level with the first noise plus interference level from the at least one predefined resource element. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380712 | CHANNEL SOUNDING FOR IMPROVED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE - A transmitter generates and transmits a low rate signal to its intended receiver. Upon receiving the low rate signal, the intended receiver generates and transmits a channel sounding response (CSR), said CSR being a short burst having a predefined transmit format and carrying predetermined information. The transmitter then analyzes the CSR and determines uplink channel response, estimates downlink channel response, and determines appropriate transmit parameter settings based on the analysis and downlink response estimate. Adjustment of the transmit parameters can be made in either the MAC or PHY layer or in a combination of both. After adjusting its transmit parameters and modulating sub-carriers with user-data according to the determined transmit settings, the transmitter transmits the user-data to the receiver on a preferred portion of bandwidth. In a preferred embodiment, the transmitter also generates and transmits a transmit format control (TFC) signal containing the determined transmit parameter settings, including sub-carrier modulation information, to the receiver. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380807 | EFFICIENT MANAGEMENT OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION-DEPENDENT NETWORK FUNCTIONALITY - Notifications associated with software-defined network components are registered for. A notification is received in accordance with the registration. It is determined that the notification indicates a configuration change to a network associated with the software-defined network components. In response to a determination that the notification indicates the configuration change, a network topology associated with the network is determined. It is determined that one or more network functionalities are impacted by the configuration change based, at least in part, on the network topology. In response to a determination that the one or more network functionalities are impacted by the configuration change, the one or more network functionalities are updated based, at least in part, on the network topology. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380845 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING USER QUALITY OF EXPERIENCE QOE - The present invention discloses a method for measuring user quality of experience QoE, where the method includes the following steps: receiving event information sent by a receiving end, where the event information includes condition information for determining a cause for shortage of valid media data in a buffer of the receiving end; determining, according to the condition information, whether the shortage of the valid media data in the buffer of the receiving end is caused by a service system or caused by a user's action; and measuring QoE decrease degrees according to different causes for the shortage of the valid media data in the buffer, respectively. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380859 | MEASURING LATENCY WITHIN A NETWORKING DEVICE - Presented herein are techniques to measure latency associated with packets that are processed within a network device. A packet is received at a component of a network device comprising one or more components. A timestamp representing a time of arrival of the packet at a first point in the network device is associated with the packet. The timestamp is generated with respect to a clock of the network device. A latency value for the packet is computed based on at least one of the timestamp and current time of arrival at a second point in the network device. One or more latency statistics are updated based on the latency value. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380863 | Performance Characterization by Available Capacity - Previously available network monitoring and management systems fail to provide systems or processes that adequately communicate individual client experiences with regards to bitrates or communicate these experiences with respect to time, space and individual client service expectations. By contrast, and to that end, various implementations disclosed herein include systems, methods and apparatuses that obtain network utilization information from a compliant access point, wherein the network utilization information includes a respective first service level indicator value for at least one of one or more client devices; and determines a respective first performance characterization value for the at least one of the one or more client devices based on a function of the respective first service level indicator value and at least one of a first access point capacity value and a respective first network resource capacity value for the at least one of the one or more client devices. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380868 | In-Line Network Tap - An in-line network tap includes a network tap chip that is configured to analyze or otherwise process data packets as the data packets are transmitted within a network. The network tap chip can be embedded within a communication cable, such as an Ethernet or USB cable, either within the flexible cable portion of the cable or within a connector on either end of the communication cable. Alternatively, the network tap chip can be embedded within a transceiver. The in-line network tap can perform various processing including monitoring network performance, facilitating remote troubleshooting, data buffering, and intrusion detection and prevention. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380872 | ENHANCED PEER DISCOVERY IN A MESH NETWORK - A station of a mesh network comprising a peer table which is configured to list neighboring peers within the mesh network. Each peer comprises a qualification grade and the station comprises a controller which is configured to detect a new peer entering the mesh network and to establish a peer connection with the new peer. The controller is also configured to add the new peer to the peer table and to determine if the peer table is full when the new peer has been added. The controller is further configured to compare the qualification grades of the neighboring peers in the peer table if the peer table is full, and to remove a peer having a high qualification grade in relation to the neighboring peers in the peer table. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381179 | AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING A MOBILE DATA MODEM TO A CPE DEVICE - A method for automatically connecting a mobile data modem to a customer premises equipment device includes mobile data modem specific parameters in a configuration file of the mobile data modem ( | 12-29-2016 |
20160381579 | BEACON ARRAY - A method comprises receiving a first received signal strength indicator (RSSI) of a first beacon in an array of beacons and receiving a second RSSI of a second beacon in an array of beacons, calculating a RSSI of the array (r) as a function of the first RSSI and the second RSSI, retrieving a calibrated RSSI value of the array (r′) from a memory, determining whether r>r′, and outputting a signal to a user device responsive to determining that r>r′. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381580 | ASSOCIATION RULE ANALYSIS AND DATA VISUALIZATION FOR MOBILE NETWORKS - Embodiments are provided for using association rule mining to analyze performance counters of a mobile network, including converting a plurality of performance counters of a mobile network into a plurality of key performance indicators (KPIs), quantizing each KPI into one value of a set of values associated with that KPI, creating a set of items having multiple subsets corresponding to respective KPIs, where each item of a subset corresponds to a respective value of a particular set of values associated with a particular KPI, and generating association rules based, at least in part, on the set of items. In further embodiments, the quantizing the plurality of KPIs includes quantizing a first KPI into a first value of a set of three or more values associated with the first KPI. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381581 | CARRIER FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Methods and system for carrier frequency offset (CFO) estimation are described. The method includes determining correlation values between a plurality of samples from a received signal and a plurality of reference signals corresponding to a plurality of CFO candidates. A set of correlation values which exceeds a threshold is determined and a corresponding CFO candidate for each correlation value in the set is selected. A CFO estimate based on an interpolation of selected CFO candidates is then calculated. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381582 | BEACON ARRAY - A method comprises receiving a first received signal strength indicator (RSSI) of a first beacon in an array of beacons and receiving a second RSSI of a second beacon in an array of beacons, calculating a RSSI of the array (r) as a function of the first RSSI and the second RSSI, retrieving a calibrated RSSI value of the array (r′) from a memory, determining whether r>r′, and outputting a signal to a user device responsive to determining that r>r′. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381583 | RADIO BASE STATION, USER TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is designed to reduce the overhead of reference signals for measuring CSI in high-order MIMO multiplexing technique. A radio base station is used in a radio communications system of a frequency division duplexing (FDD) scheme, and has a receiving section that receives reference signals for measuring time division duplex (TDD) channel state information, transmitted from a plurality of antennas provided in a user terminal, a measurement section that measures the channel state information, in a plurality of receiving antennas, by using the reference signals, a generation/selection section that generates an optimal precoding vector from the channel state information measured in each receiving antenna, or selects the optimal precoding vector from a set of precoding vectors that is defined in advance, and a transmission section that transmits a physical downlink shared channel, in MIMO multiplexing transmission, by using the precoding vector selected in the generation/selection section. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381585 | Quality of Service in Wireless Backhauls - A feeder terminal comprises backhaul communication circuitry connecting a communications network via a wireless backhaul, and providing an access base station with wireless backhaul access. Backhaul information circuitry determines congestion information relating to the wireless backhaul and communication circuitry enables communication with an access base station and provides the congestion information to the access base station. In response to a demand message from the access base station comprising quality of service requirements, the communication circuitry forwards the demand message to the communications network. Additionally, an access base station comprises communication circuitry enabling communication with a feeder terminal. The communication circuitry provides a quality of service demand message to the feeder terminal based on a quality of service requirement and receives congestion information relating to the wireless backhaul from the feeder terminal. The access control circuitry controls usage of the wireless backhaul by user equipment in dependence on the congestion information. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381589 | TECHNIQUES FOR TRANSMITTING ON MULTIPLE CARRIERS OF A SHARED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND - Measurement and demodulation may be impacted by varying transmit power due to varying numbers of carriers in a shared radio frequency (RF) spectrum band. Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication. One method includes monitoring at least one carrier of a RF spectrum band for a first reference signal transmitted in a number of listen-before-talk (LBT) radio frames from a plurality of LBT radio frames associated with the plurality of carriers, where the plurality of LBT radio frames are received at the user equipment (UE) in different sets of at least one carrier of the RF spectrum band at different times, and where the first reference signal is associated with a first fixed transmit power; receiving a plurality of instances of the first reference signal; measuring the plurality of instances; and determining a cell measurement based at least in part on the measurements of the plurality of instances. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381590 | Managing External Interference in a Wireless Network - A method and apparatus configures a wireless network comprising a plurality of nodes to mitigate effects of an external interference source. A subset of the nodes simultaneously participate in an external interference sampling process in which each node of the subset samples signals received by an antenna array of that node. A measurement report, comprising a signal source angle and a received signal strength, is received from a node. A location of the external interference source is estimated using the measurement report. The external interference source is then characterised using the estimated location of the external interference source and the received signal strength to calculate for the external interference source at least one of: a source power; a beam width; an antenna bearing; and a front-to-back transmission ratio. The nodes are configured to mitigate effects of the external interference source in dependence on a result of the characterising step. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381591 | Wireless Network Configuration Using Path Loss Determination Between Nodes - A method and corresponding apparatus are provided for network configuration selection in a wireless network comprising a plurality of nodes. A subset of the nodes are configured to simultaneously participate in a sounding process, in which a node of the subset omni-directionally transmits a predetermined signal and in which other nodes of the subset of nodes sample the predetermined signal as received by an omni-directional antenna array of that node. Measurement reports are received from the subset of nodes, each measurement report comprising a signal source angle and a received signal strength. A path loss is determined in dependence on each measurement report to generate a set of path losses covering a plurality of transmitter node receiver node pairs. Then a directional configuration is selected for a directional antenna of each node of the subset of nodes for data transmission in dependence on the set of path losses. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381592 | AMBIGUITY RESOLUTION IN POSITIONING MEASUREMENTS - A computer implemented method of providing RSTD data comprising receiving an uncertainty window centered around an expected RSTD value, determining the PDP of each reference OFDM symbol within the uncertainty window, obtaining a main PDP by calculating a parameter indicative of signal quality for each determined PDP, the main PDP having the highest signal quality, obtaining a preceding PDP of the Main PDP, obtaining a succeeding PDP of the Main PDP, determining PDP metrics comprising, determining a channel metric for each of the main, preceding and succeeding PDPs, determining a channel main tap for each of the main, preceding and succeeding PDPs, determining a delay estimate for each of the main, preceding and succeeding PDPs, wherein if the main PDP is a combined PDP, performing coherence testing on the PDP metrics to detect any ambiguity in the delay estimate of the main PDP, and correcting any ambiguity. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381647 | PREEMPTIVE AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (AGC) FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Described herein are technologies related to an implementation of interference mitigation in a receiver of a portable device. A preemptive-automatic gain control (AGC) system mitigates a collocated or external interfering signal in a receiver of a portable device. The receiver of the portable device receives and processes a data packet of a first radio frequency (RF) signal that includes a Bluetooth (BT) signal, a Wi-Fi signal, a near field communications (NFC), 3G, 4G, or the like. During the processing of the data packet, a collocated or an external second RF signal is detected and received by the receiver. The second RF signal includes an interfering Bluetooth (BT) uplink transmission, a near field communications (NFC) transmission signal, a Wi-Fi transmission signal, 3G or 4G uplink transmission, an LTE signal, or the like. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381656 | Wireless Network Supporting Extended Coverage of Service - A communications access point may provide access to a wireless communications network to a user device located at a first location. The communications access point may determine that the user device is moving from the first location to a second location where access to the wireless network is limited or not available. In response to the determination, the communications access point may provide access to the wireless network at the second location by extending a coverage area of the wireless network. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381698 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COOPERATIVELY CONTROLLING AN APPLICATION - The cooperative controlling of an operation of an application that is used by a user equipment is implemented in a wireless network by obtaining scheduled shared resource rate information and channel condition information for bearers sharing network resources. User equipment policies for the user equipment associated with the bearers can be performed based on the scheduled shared resource rate information, the channel condition information, and available video rate information in order to invoke throughput restrictions for the user equipment. The user equipment policies can be used by application functions to cooperatively control the operation of applications among a number of user equipments. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237615 | Configuring Network Devices | 08-17-2017 |
20170237629 | ENHANCED TRACING AND/OR MONITORING OF THE NETWORK NODES OF A COMMUNICATION NETWORK | 08-17-2017 |
20170237632 | SOFTWARE-BASED PACKET BROKER | 08-17-2017 |
20170237633 | TRAFFIC DEDUPLICATION IN A VISIBILITY NETWORK | 08-17-2017 |
20170237642 | METHOD AND NETWORK MONITORING DEVICE FOR CALCULATING THROUGHPUT OF TRAFFIC FLOWS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237644 | TRANSMISSION SYSTEM IMPLEMENTING DELAY MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL | 08-17-2017 |
20170237721 | DEEP PACKET INSPECTION (DPI) AT AN ENDPOINT | 08-17-2017 |
20170237851 | CALL LEG QUALITY DIFFERENTIATION IN NETWORK TELEPHONY SYSTEMS | 08-17-2017 |
20170238199 | DETERMINING A PERFORMANCE CRITERION FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE | 08-17-2017 |
20170238200 | WIRELESS RAW PACKET SENSING AND INJECTION SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TARGETED COMMUNICATIONS | 08-17-2017 |
20170238204 | USER APPARATUS AND MEASUREMENT CONTROL METHOD | 08-17-2017 |
20170238207 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR REMOVING INTERFERENCE | 08-17-2017 |
20170238275 | RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20170238326 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN UNLICENSED BAND AND DEVICE USING SAME | 08-17-2017 |
20180026664 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC TUNING | 01-25-2018 |
20180026732 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE, OPERATION METHOD OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM | 01-25-2018 |
20180026777 | User Equipment That Autonomously Selects Between Full and Half Duplex Operations | 01-25-2018 |
20180026815 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION | 01-25-2018 |
20180026860 | TIME EFFICIENT COUNTERS AND METERS ARCHITECTURE | 01-25-2018 |
20180026868 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REDUCE STATIC AND DYNAMIC FRAGMENTATION IMPACT ON SOFTWARE-DEFINED INFRASTRUCTURE ARCHITECTURES | 01-25-2018 |
20180027426 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PROGRAM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027435 | METHOD FOR TESTING CLIENT ROAMING | 01-25-2018 |
20180027437 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION ENHANCEMENT | 01-25-2018 |
20180027481 | Discovery Signal Processing Method and Device | 01-25-2018 |
20180027492 | POWER MANAGEMENT FOR DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027502 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGING THE OPERATION OF A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT | 01-25-2018 |
20180027509 | UPLINK SCHEDULING APPARATUS AND METHOD BASED ON UPLINK REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
20190149181 | FREQUENCY BAND SELECTION | 05-16-2019 |
20190149222 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM | 05-16-2019 |
20190149223 | BROADBAND REPEATER WITH SECURITY FOR ULTRAWIDEBAND TECHNOLOGIES | 05-16-2019 |
20190149252 | CONTROLLING THE CHANNEL OCCUPANCY MEASUREMENT QUALITY | 05-16-2019 |
20190149253 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR PERFORMING MEASUREMENT, AND METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR CONFIGURING MEASUREMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20190149289 | AUTONOMOUS MODIFICATION OF TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS | 05-16-2019 |
20190149306 | System and Method for Flexible Channel State Information-Reference Signal Transmission | 05-16-2019 |
20190149307 | Methods and Apparatus for Controlling Interruption Level with RSSI-Based Measurements | 05-16-2019 |
20190149413 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL RELATED TO MONITORING BY SCEF IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME | 05-16-2019 |
20190149437 | Traffic Deduplication in a Visibility Network | 05-16-2019 |
20190149441 | IDENTIFYING SOURCES OF PACKET DROPS IN A SERVICE FUNCTION CHAIN ENVIRONMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20190149443 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MONITORING AND DIAGNOSING A WIRELESS NETWORK | 05-16-2019 |
20190149446 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SELECTION BETWEEN MULTIPLE REDUNDANT DATA STREAMS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150005 | POWER ADJUSTMENTS FOR SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORKS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150007 | Delaying Transmission Depending on Transmission Type and UE Processing Capabilities | 05-16-2019 |
20190150008 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEFINING RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH INDICATOR FOR DISCOVERY SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190150009 | Mechanism to Support RRM Measurement in New Radio Access System with Beamforming | 05-16-2019 |
20190150010 | System and Method for Reporting Beam Information | 05-16-2019 |
20190150012 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION | 05-16-2019 |
20190150016 | Multiple CQI Reporting Processes | 05-16-2019 |
20190150017 | MEASUREMENT JOB CREATION AND PERFORMANCE DATA REPORTING FOR ADVANCED NETWORKS INCLUDING NETWORK SLICING | 05-16-2019 |
20190150018 | METHOD AND RADIO NODE FOR HANDLING CSI REPORTING | 05-16-2019 |
20190150019 | USER EQUIPMENT AND MEASUREMENT METHOD | 05-16-2019 |
20190150083 | ESTIMATING SIGNAL STRENGTH AT A TARGET WIRELESS DEVICE | 05-16-2019 |
20190150114 | FALLBACK MODE FOR WAKE-UP SIGNAL RECEIVERS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150160 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD FOR BASE STATION DEVICE | 05-16-2019 |
20220140878 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BEAM MEASUREMENT AND REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for beam measurement and reporting in a wireless communication system. A method for operating a UE includes receiving a parameter indicating whether to report a group of two resource indicators in a same reporting instance, receiving a first set of reference signals (RSs) through a first set of RS resources for determining a first of the two resource indicators, and receiving a second set of RSs through a second set of RS resources for determining a second of the two resource indicators. The method further includes measuring at least one RS in the first and second sets of RSs, determining, based on the measured at least one RS in the first and second sets of RSs, the first and second resource indicators, respectively, and transmitting, in the same reporting instance, the group of two resource indicators including the determined first and second resource indicators. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141117 | METHOD AND ROUTER FOR LABEL SWITCHED PATH TRACEROUTE - The present disclosure provides a method ( | 05-05-2022 |
20220141131 | SELECTING FORWARDING PATHS AND RETURN PATHS IN A NETWORKED ENVIRONMENT - Techniques for utilizing edge nodes disposed throughout a multi-site cloud computing network to generate a probe packet including indicators that guarantee the use of forward and return route paths to accurately measure the network performance of a route path between two endpoints in a wide area network (WAN). An edge node disposed in a site of the multi-site cloud computing network may store in virtual memory associated with the edge node, a mapping between route paths, usable to send data from the edge node to remote edge nodes in remote sites, and route indicators. A probe packet may include a data portion for measuring the network performance of a route path, a portion including local and remote discriminators, and/or an inner and an outer header. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141132 | LINK QUALITY METRICS AS CONSTRAINTS IN SOURCE ROUTING SWITCHING NETWORKS - A label switching router for a switching network configured for source routing can be configured to modify one or more reported properties of a link associated with that router based on one or more link quality metrics. For example, a router can include a link with available bandwidth of 10 Gbps, a value that can be used by a headend when evaluating nodes of the network against a set of constraints required by a particular requested connection or tunnel. A link of that router may exhibit an increased bit error rate which can be used by the label switching router to artificially deflate available bandwidth, thereby reducing the number of label switching paths including the router are selected by the headend. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141680 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE PERFORMING RESCHEDULING OVER WIRELESS CHANNEL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SAME - According to various embodiments, an electronic device may include a communication circuit operably coupled with an external electronic device and at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor may be configured to determine one or more target-wake-time (TWT) parameters of at least one TWT service period based on at least one of the amount of data transmitted to the external electronic device, an amount of data received from the external electronic device, or a bandwidth, wherein at least one data frame is transmitted or received between the electronic device and the external electronic device during the at least one TWT service period; identify quality of service (QoS) for the at least one data frame transmitted or received during the at least one TWT service period; change at least one TWT parameter among the one or more TWT parameters based on the identified QoS; and control the communication circuit to transmit or receive at least one next data frame during the a next TWT service period based on the changed at least one TWT parameter. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141681 | PROVISIONING AN ACCESS POINT DEVICE USING AN EIRP MASK - An enhanced network environment is provided by provisioning a device to utilize the 6 GHz frequency band. The device requires provisioning so as not to interfere with legacy systems. The provisioning includes obtaining exterior multiple fixed power measurements to obtain a virtualized location and a virtualized power level. The elevation is then modified based on an actual height from ground level of the device. The location of the device and a virtualized equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) can then be sent to an automated frequency controller (AFC) resource to obtain an EIRP mask that can be used to provision the device so that the device can operate in the 6 GHz frequency band without causing interference with any other systems. Once provisioned, the device can be registered with the AFC resource. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141686 | SELECTIVE REFERENCE SIGNAL MEASUREMENTS - According to the disclosure there is provided an apparatus comprising means for performing: receiving a configuration for a distributed unit of the apparatus for transmitting reference signals using a time domain resource of the apparatus, in accordance with a time domain transmission pattern; and receiving a configuration for a mobile termination unit of the apparatus for reception of reference signals using the time domain resource of the apparatus, in accordance with a time domain reception pattern; and selectively measuring received reference signals in dependence on a determination of whether measurement of received reference signals is required. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141689 | Providing Utilization Information for Intelligent Selection of Operating Parameters of a Wireless Access Point - Aspects of the disclosure are directed toward intelligently selecting the operating parameters of wireless access points (WAPs) deployed in a wireless environment so as to minimize or at least reduce interference in that wireless environment. A WAP continually measures the characteristics of the wireless channels used in the wireless environment and obtains measurements of channel metrics for those channels. The WAP stores the channel metric measurements as a channel metric history and analyzes the channel metric history to determine correlations between the channel metric measurements and various timeframes. The WAP selects one or more of its operating parameters based on the channel metric history and the correlations identified. Operating parameters include the radio frequency band and channel to transmit on. A centralized control server may also receive, store, and analyze channel metric histories from multiple WAPs and issue instructions to those WAPs identifying values for their respective operating parameters. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141694 | REPETITION CONFIGURATION FOR REMOTE INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT-REFERENCE SIGNAL (RIM-RS) TRANSMISSIONS - A network element for configuring a Remote Interference Monitoring Reference Signal (RIM-RS) is disclosed. The network element transmits RIM-RS resource configuration and Information of Things (IoT) measurement and reporting configuration information to a base station. The base station conducts the IoT measurement and ducting phenomenon detection according to the received configuration, and transmits the results to the network element. The base station determines the number of repetition and/or near-far indication based on the received information and transmits the number of repetition and near-far indication to the base station. The base station then transmits the RIM-RS according to the received repetition and near-far indication. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141889 | DYNAMIC CYCLIC PREFIX SELECTION - Methods, systems, and devices for wireless communications are described for reducing overhead associated with a cyclic prefix (CP) by supporting dynamic determination of a CP length. For example, a user equipment (UE) may establish a wireless connection with a base station by receiving initial communications according to a numerology and a first CP configuration associated with a first CP length. The UE may determine a second CP length after establishing the wireless connection and may transmit an indication to the base station, indicating the second CP length. The base station may receive the indication and may transmit downlink signals according to a second CP configuration associated with the second CP length. The initial communications and the downlink signals may be associated with a same numerology or subcarrier spacing. | 05-05-2022 |